/**
 * Type Definitions for Gjs (https://gjs.guide/)
 *
 * These type definitions are automatically generated, do not edit them by hand.
 * If you found a bug fix it in `ts-for-gir` or create a bug report on https://github.com/gjsify/ts-for-gir
 *
 * The based EJS template file is used for the generated .d.ts file of each GIR module like Gtk-4.0, GObject-2.0, ...
 */

import '@girs/gjs';

// Module dependencies
import type xlib from '@girs/xlib-2.0';
import type Gdk from '@girs/gdk-3.0';
import type cairo from 'cairo';
import type GObject from '@girs/gobject-2.0';
import type GLib from '@girs/glib-2.0';
import type Pango from '@girs/pango-1.0';
import type HarfBuzz from '@girs/harfbuzz-0.0';
import type freetype2 from '@girs/freetype2-2.0';
import type Gio from '@girs/gio-2.0';
import type GModule from '@girs/gmodule-2.0';
import type GdkPixbuf from '@girs/gdkpixbuf-2.0';
import type Atk from '@girs/atk-1.0';

export namespace Gtk {

    /**
     * Gtk-3.0
     */


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace Align {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<Align>;
    }

    /**
     * Controls how a widget deals with extra space in a single (x or y)
     * dimension.
     * 
     * Alignment only matters if the widget receives a “too large” allocation,
     * for example if you packed the widget with the {@link Gtk.Widget.expand}
     * flag inside a {@link Gtk.Box}, then the widget might get extra space.  If
     * you have for example a 16x16 icon inside a 32x32 space, the icon
     * could be scaled and stretched, it could be centered, or it could be
     * positioned to one side of the space.
     * 
     * Note that in horizontal context `GTK_ALIGN_START` and `GTK_ALIGN_END`
     * are interpreted relative to text direction.
     * 
     * GTK_ALIGN_BASELINE support for it is optional for containers and widgets, and
     * it is only supported for vertical alignment.  When its not supported by
     * a child or a container it is treated as `GTK_ALIGN_FILL`.
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    enum Align {
        /**
         * stretch to fill all space if possible, center if
         *     no meaningful way to stretch
         */
        FILL,
        /**
         * snap to left or top side, leaving space on right
         *     or bottom
         */
        START,
        /**
         * snap to right or bottom side, leaving space on left
         *     or top
         */
        END,
        /**
         * center natural width of widget inside the
         *     allocation
         */
        CENTER,
        /**
         * align the widget according to the baseline. Since 3.10.
         */
        BASELINE,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace ArrowPlacement {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<ArrowPlacement>;
    }

    /**
     * Used to specify the placement of scroll arrows in scrolling menus.
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    enum ArrowPlacement {
        /**
         * Place one arrow on each end of the menu.
         */
        BOTH,
        /**
         * Place both arrows at the top of the menu.
         */
        START,
        /**
         * Place both arrows at the bottom of the menu.
         */
        END,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace ArrowType {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<ArrowType>;
    }

    /**
     * Used to indicate the direction in which an arrow should point.
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    enum ArrowType {
        /**
         * Represents an upward pointing arrow.
         */
        UP,
        /**
         * Represents a downward pointing arrow.
         */
        DOWN,
        /**
         * Represents a left pointing arrow.
         */
        LEFT,
        /**
         * Represents a right pointing arrow.
         */
        RIGHT,
        /**
         * No arrow. Since 2.10.
         */
        NONE,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace AssistantPageType {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<AssistantPageType>;
    }

    /**
     * An enum for determining the page role inside the {@link Gtk.Assistant}. It's
     * used to handle buttons sensitivity and visibility.
     * 
     * Note that an assistant needs to end its page flow with a page of type
     * {@link Gtk.AssistantPageType.CONFIRM}, {@link Gtk.AssistantPageType.SUMMARY} or
     * {@link Gtk.AssistantPageType.PROGRESS} to be correct.
     * 
     * The Cancel button will only be shown if the page isn’t “committed”.
     * See `gtk_assistant_commit()` for details.
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    enum AssistantPageType {
        /**
         * The page has regular contents. Both the
         *  Back and forward buttons will be shown.
         */
        CONTENT,
        /**
         * The page contains an introduction to the
         *  assistant task. Only the Forward button will be shown if there is a
         *   next page.
         */
        INTRO,
        /**
         * The page lets the user confirm or deny the
         *  changes. The Back and Apply buttons will be shown.
         */
        CONFIRM,
        /**
         * The page informs the user of the changes
         *  done. Only the Close button will be shown.
         */
        SUMMARY,
        /**
         * Used for tasks that take a long time to
         *  complete, blocks the assistant until the page is marked as complete.
         *   Only the back button will be shown.
         */
        PROGRESS,
        /**
         * Used for when other page types are not
         *  appropriate. No buttons will be shown, and the application must
         *  add its own buttons through `gtk_assistant_add_action_widget()`.
         */
        CUSTOM,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace BaselinePosition {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<BaselinePosition>;
    }

    /**
     * Whenever a container has some form of natural row it may align
     * children in that row along a common typographical baseline. If
     * the amount of verical space in the row is taller than the total
     * requested height of the baseline-aligned children then it can use a
     * {@link Gtk.BaselinePosition} to select where to put the baseline inside the
     * extra availible space.
     * @gir-type Enum
     * @since 3.10
     */
    enum BaselinePosition {
        /**
         * Align the baseline at the top
         */
        TOP,
        /**
         * Center the baseline
         */
        CENTER,
        /**
         * Align the baseline at the bottom
         */
        BOTTOM,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace BorderStyle {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<BorderStyle>;
    }

    /**
     * Describes how the border of a UI element should be rendered.
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    enum BorderStyle {
        /**
         * No visible border
         */
        NONE,
        /**
         * A single line segment
         */
        SOLID,
        /**
         * Looks as if the content is sunken into the canvas
         */
        INSET,
        /**
         * Looks as if the content is coming out of the canvas
         */
        OUTSET,
        /**
         * Same as `GTK_BORDER_STYLE_NONE`
         */
        HIDDEN,
        /**
         * A series of round dots
         */
        DOTTED,
        /**
         * A series of square-ended dashes
         */
        DASHED,
        /**
         * Two parallel lines with some space between them
         */
        DOUBLE,
        /**
         * Looks as if it were carved in the canvas
         */
        GROOVE,
        /**
         * Looks as if it were coming out of the canvas
         */
        RIDGE,
    }


    /**
     * Error codes that identify various errors that can occur while using
     * {@link Gtk.Builder}.
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    class BuilderError extends GLib.Error {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<GLib.Error>;

        // Static fields
        /**
         * A type-func attribute didn’t name
         *  a function that returns a {@link GObject.GType}.
         */
        static INVALID_TYPE_FUNCTION: number;

        /**
         * The input contained a tag that {@link Gtk.Builder}
         *  can’t handle.
         */
        static UNHANDLED_TAG: number;

        /**
         * An attribute that is required by
         *  {@link Gtk.Builder} was missing.
         */
        static MISSING_ATTRIBUTE: number;

        /**
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} found an attribute that
         *  it doesn’t understand.
         */
        static INVALID_ATTRIBUTE: number;

        /**
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} found a tag that
         *  it doesn’t understand.
         */
        static INVALID_TAG: number;

        /**
         * A required property value was
         *  missing.
         */
        static MISSING_PROPERTY_VALUE: number;

        /**
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} couldn’t parse
         *  some attribute value.
         */
        static INVALID_VALUE: number;

        /**
         * The input file requires a newer version
         *  of GTK+.
         */
        static VERSION_MISMATCH: number;

        /**
         * An object id occurred twice.
         */
        static DUPLICATE_ID: number;

        /**
         * A specified object type is of the same type or
         *  derived from the type of the composite class being extended with builder XML.
         */
        static OBJECT_TYPE_REFUSED: number;

        /**
         * The wrong type was specified in a composite class’s template XML
         */
        static TEMPLATE_MISMATCH: number;

        /**
         * The specified property is unknown for the object class.
         */
        static INVALID_PROPERTY: number;

        /**
         * The specified signal is unknown for the object class.
         */
        static INVALID_SIGNAL: number;

        /**
         * An object id is unknown
         */
        static INVALID_ID: number;

        // Constructors
        constructor(options: { message: string; code: number });

        // Static methods
        static quark(): GLib.Quark;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace ButtonBoxStyle {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<ButtonBoxStyle>;
    }

    /**
     * Used to dictate the style that a {@link Gtk.ButtonBox} uses to layout the buttons it
     * contains.
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    enum ButtonBoxStyle {
        /**
         * Buttons are evenly spread across the box.
         */
        SPREAD,
        /**
         * Buttons are placed at the edges of the box.
         */
        EDGE,
        /**
         * Buttons are grouped towards the start of the box,
         *   (on the left for a HBox, or the top for a VBox).
         */
        START,
        /**
         * Buttons are grouped towards the end of the box,
         *   (on the right for a HBox, or the bottom for a VBox).
         */
        END,
        /**
         * Buttons are centered in the box. Since 2.12.
         */
        CENTER,
        /**
         * Buttons expand to fill the box. This entails giving
         *   buttons a "linked" appearance, making button sizes homogeneous, and
         *   setting spacing to 0 (same as calling `gtk_box_set_homogeneous()` and
         *   `gtk_box_set_spacing()` manually). Since 3.12.
         */
        EXPAND,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace ButtonRole {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<ButtonRole>;
    }

    /**
     * The role specifies the desired appearance of a {@link Gtk.ModelButton}.
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    enum ButtonRole {
        /**
         * A plain button
         */
        NORMAL,
        /**
         * A check button
         */
        CHECK,
        /**
         * A radio button
         */
        RADIO,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace ButtonsType {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<ButtonsType>;
    }

    /**
     * Prebuilt sets of buttons for the dialog. If
     * none of these choices are appropriate, simply use {@link Gtk.ButtonsType.NONE}
     * then call `gtk_dialog_add_buttons()`.
     * 
     * > Please note that {@link Gtk.ButtonsType.OK}, {@link Gtk.ButtonsType.YES_NO}
     * > and {@link Gtk.ButtonsType.OK_CANCEL} are discouraged by the
     * > [GNOME Human Interface Guidelines](http://library.gnome.org/devel/hig-book/stable/).
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    enum ButtonsType {
        /**
         * no buttons at all
         */
        NONE,
        /**
         * an OK button
         */
        OK,
        /**
         * a Close button
         */
        CLOSE,
        /**
         * a Cancel button
         */
        CANCEL,
        /**
         * Yes and No buttons
         */
        YES_NO,
        /**
         * OK and Cancel buttons
         */
        OK_CANCEL,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace CellRendererAccelMode {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<CellRendererAccelMode>;
    }

    /**
     * Determines if the edited accelerators are GTK+ accelerators. If
     * they are, consumed modifiers are suppressed, only accelerators
     * accepted by GTK+ are allowed, and the accelerators are rendered
     * in the same way as they are in menus.
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    enum CellRendererAccelMode {
        /**
         * GTK+ accelerators mode
         */
        GTK,
        /**
         * Other accelerator mode
         */
        OTHER,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace CellRendererMode {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<CellRendererMode>;
    }

    /**
     * Identifies how the user can interact with a particular cell.
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    enum CellRendererMode {
        /**
         * The cell is just for display
         *  and cannot be interacted with.  Note that this doesn’t mean that eg. the
         *  row being drawn can’t be selected -- just that a particular element of
         *  it cannot be individually modified.
         */
        INERT,
        /**
         * The cell can be clicked.
         */
        ACTIVATABLE,
        /**
         * The cell can be edited or otherwise modified.
         */
        EDITABLE,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace CornerType {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<CornerType>;
    }

    /**
     * Specifies which corner a child widget should be placed in when packed into
     * a {@link Gtk.ScrolledWindow}. This is effectively the opposite of where the scroll
     * bars are placed.
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    enum CornerType {
        /**
         * Place the scrollbars on the right and bottom of the
         *  widget (default behaviour).
         */
        TOP_LEFT,
        /**
         * Place the scrollbars on the top and right of the
         *  widget.
         */
        BOTTOM_LEFT,
        /**
         * Place the scrollbars on the left and bottom of the
         *  widget.
         */
        TOP_RIGHT,
        /**
         * Place the scrollbars on the top and left of the
         *  widget.
         */
        BOTTOM_RIGHT,
    }


    /**
     * Error codes for `GTK_CSS_PROVIDER_ERROR`.
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    class CssProviderError extends GLib.Error {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<GLib.Error>;

        // Static fields
        /**
         * Failed.
         */
        static FAILED: number;

        /**
         * Syntax error.
         */
        static SYNTAX: number;

        /**
         * Import error.
         */
        static IMPORT: number;

        /**
         * Name error.
         */
        static NAME: number;

        /**
         * Deprecation error.
         */
        static DEPRECATED: number;

        /**
         * Unknown value.
         */
        static UNKNOWN_VALUE: number;

        // Constructors
        constructor(options: { message: string; code: number });

        // Static methods
        static quark(): GLib.Quark;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace CssSectionType {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<CssSectionType>;
    }

    /**
     * The different types of sections indicate parts of a CSS document as
     * parsed by GTK’s CSS parser. They are oriented towards the
     * [CSS Grammar](http://www.w3.org/TR/CSS21/grammar.html),
     * but may contain extensions.
     * 
     * More types might be added in the future as the parser incorporates
     * more features.
     * @gir-type Enum
     * @since 3.2
     */
    enum CssSectionType {
        /**
         * The section describes a complete document.
         *   This section time is the only one where `gtk_css_section_get_parent()`
         *   might return `null`.
         */
        DOCUMENT,
        /**
         * The section defines an import rule.
         */
        IMPORT,
        /**
         * The section defines a color. This
         *   is a GTK extension to CSS.
         */
        COLOR_DEFINITION,
        /**
         * The section defines a binding set. This
         *   is a GTK extension to CSS.
         */
        BINDING_SET,
        /**
         * The section defines a CSS ruleset.
         */
        RULESET,
        /**
         * The section defines a CSS selector.
         */
        SELECTOR,
        /**
         * The section defines the declaration of
         *   a CSS variable.
         */
        DECLARATION,
        /**
         * The section defines the value of a CSS declaration.
         */
        VALUE,
        /**
         * The section defines keyframes. See [CSS
         *   Animations](http://dev.w3.org/csswg/css3-animations/#keyframes) for details. Since 3.6
         */
        KEYFRAMES,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace DeleteType {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<DeleteType>;
    }

    /**
     * See also: {@link Gtk.Entry.SignalSignatures.delete_from_cursor | Gtk.Entry::delete-from-cursor}.
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    enum DeleteType {
        /**
         * Delete characters.
         */
        CHARS,
        /**
         * Delete only the portion of the word to the
         *   left/right of cursor if we’re in the middle of a word.
         */
        WORD_ENDS,
        /**
         * Delete words.
         */
        WORDS,
        /**
         * Delete display-lines. Display-lines
         *   refers to the visible lines, with respect to to the current line
         *   breaks. As opposed to paragraphs, which are defined by line
         *   breaks in the input.
         */
        DISPLAY_LINES,
        /**
         * Delete only the portion of the
         *   display-line to the left/right of cursor.
         */
        DISPLAY_LINE_ENDS,
        /**
         * Delete to the end of the
         *   paragraph. Like C-k in Emacs (or its reverse).
         */
        PARAGRAPH_ENDS,
        /**
         * Delete entire line. Like C-k in pico.
         */
        PARAGRAPHS,
        /**
         * Delete only whitespace. Like M-\ in Emacs.
         */
        WHITESPACE,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace DirectionType {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<DirectionType>;
    }

    /**
     * Focus movement types.
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    enum DirectionType {
        /**
         * Move forward.
         */
        TAB_FORWARD,
        /**
         * Move backward.
         */
        TAB_BACKWARD,
        /**
         * Move up.
         */
        UP,
        /**
         * Move down.
         */
        DOWN,
        /**
         * Move left.
         */
        LEFT,
        /**
         * Move right.
         */
        RIGHT,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace DragResult {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<DragResult>;
    }

    /**
     * Gives an indication why a drag operation failed.
     * The value can by obtained by connecting to the
     * {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.drag_failed | Gtk.Widget::drag-failed} signal.
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    enum DragResult {
        /**
         * The drag operation was successful.
         */
        SUCCESS,
        /**
         * No suitable drag target.
         */
        NO_TARGET,
        /**
         * The user cancelled the drag operation.
         */
        USER_CANCELLED,
        /**
         * The drag operation timed out.
         */
        TIMEOUT_EXPIRED,
        /**
         * The pointer or keyboard grab used
         *  for the drag operation was broken.
         */
        GRAB_BROKEN,
        /**
         * The drag operation failed due to some
         *  unspecified error.
         */
        ERROR,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace EntryIconPosition {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<EntryIconPosition>;
    }

    /**
     * Specifies the side of the entry at which an icon is placed.
     * @gir-type Enum
     * @since 2.16
     */
    enum EntryIconPosition {
        /**
         * At the beginning of the entry (depending on the text direction).
         */
        PRIMARY,
        /**
         * At the end of the entry (depending on the text direction).
         */
        SECONDARY,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace EventSequenceState {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<EventSequenceState>;
    }

    /**
     * Describes the state of a {@link Gdk.EventSequence} in a {@link Gtk.Gesture}.
     * @gir-type Enum
     * @since 3.14
     */
    enum EventSequenceState {
        /**
         * The sequence is handled, but not grabbed.
         */
        NONE,
        /**
         * The sequence is handled and grabbed.
         */
        CLAIMED,
        /**
         * The sequence is denied.
         */
        DENIED,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace ExpanderStyle {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<ExpanderStyle>;
    }

    /**
     * Used to specify the style of the expanders drawn by a {@link Gtk.TreeView}.
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    enum ExpanderStyle {
        /**
         * The style used for a collapsed subtree.
         */
        COLLAPSED,
        /**
         * Intermediate style used during animation.
         */
        SEMI_COLLAPSED,
        /**
         * Intermediate style used during animation.
         */
        SEMI_EXPANDED,
        /**
         * The style used for an expanded subtree.
         */
        EXPANDED,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace FileChooserAction {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<FileChooserAction>;
    }

    /**
     * Describes whether a {@link Gtk.FileChooser} is being used to open existing files
     * or to save to a possibly new file.
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    enum FileChooserAction {
        /**
         * Indicates open mode.  The file chooser
         *  will only let the user pick an existing file.
         */
        OPEN,
        /**
         * Indicates save mode.  The file chooser
         *  will let the user pick an existing file, or type in a new
         *  filename.
         */
        SAVE,
        /**
         * Indicates an Open mode for
         *  selecting folders.  The file chooser will let the user pick an
         *  existing folder.
         */
        SELECT_FOLDER,
        /**
         * Indicates a mode for creating a
         *  new folder.  The file chooser will let the user name an existing or
         *  new folder.
         */
        CREATE_FOLDER,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace FileChooserConfirmation {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<FileChooserConfirmation>;
    }

    /**
     * Used as a return value of handlers for the
     * {@link Gtk.FileChooser.SignalSignatures.confirm_overwrite | Gtk.FileChooser::confirm-overwrite} signal of a {@link Gtk.FileChooser}. This
     * value determines whether the file chooser will present the stock
     * confirmation dialog, accept the user’s choice of a filename, or
     * let the user choose another filename.
     * @gir-type Enum
     * @since 2.8
     */
    enum FileChooserConfirmation {
        /**
         * The file chooser will present
         *  its stock dialog to confirm about overwriting an existing file.
         */
        CONFIRM,
        /**
         * The file chooser will
         *  terminate and accept the user’s choice of a file name.
         */
        ACCEPT_FILENAME,
        /**
         * The file chooser will
         *  continue running, so as to let the user select another file name.
         */
        SELECT_AGAIN,
    }


    /**
     * These identify the various errors that can occur while calling
     * {@link Gtk.FileChooser} functions.
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    class FileChooserError extends GLib.Error {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<GLib.Error>;

        // Static fields
        /**
         * Indicates that a file does not exist.
         */
        static NONEXISTENT: number;

        /**
         * Indicates a malformed filename.
         */
        static BAD_FILENAME: number;

        /**
         * Indicates a duplicate path (e.g. when
         *  adding a bookmark).
         */
        static ALREADY_EXISTS: number;

        /**
         * Indicates an incomplete hostname (e.g. "http://foo" without a slash after that).
         */
        static INCOMPLETE_HOSTNAME: number;

        // Constructors
        constructor(options: { message: string; code: number });

        // Static methods
        /**
         * Registers an error quark for {@link Gtk.FileChooser} if necessary.
         */
        static quark(): GLib.Quark;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace IMPreeditStyle {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<IMPreeditStyle>;
    }

    /**
     * Style for input method preedit. See also
     * {@link Gtk.Settings.gtk_im_preedit_style}
     * @gir-type Enum
     * @deprecated since 3.10
     */
    enum IMPreeditStyle {
        /**
         * Deprecated
         */
        NOTHING,
        /**
         * Deprecated
         */
        CALLBACK,
        /**
         * Deprecated
         */
        NONE,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace IMStatusStyle {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<IMStatusStyle>;
    }

    /**
     * Style for input method status. See also
     * {@link Gtk.Settings.gtk_im_status_style}
     * @gir-type Enum
     * @deprecated since 3.10
     */
    enum IMStatusStyle {
        /**
         * Deprecated
         */
        NOTHING,
        /**
         * Deprecated
         */
        CALLBACK,
        /**
         * Deprecated
         */
        NONE,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace IconSize {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<IconSize>;
    }

    /**
     * Built-in stock icon sizes.
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    enum IconSize {
        /**
         * Invalid size.
         */
        INVALID,
        /**
         * Size appropriate for menus (16px).
         */
        MENU,
        /**
         * Size appropriate for small toolbars (16px).
         */
        SMALL_TOOLBAR,
        /**
         * Size appropriate for large toolbars (24px)
         */
        LARGE_TOOLBAR,
        /**
         * Size appropriate for buttons (16px)
         */
        BUTTON,
        /**
         * Size appropriate for drag and drop (32px)
         */
        DND,
        /**
         * Size appropriate for dialogs (48px)
         */
        DIALOG,
    }


    /**
     * Error codes for GtkIconTheme operations.
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    class IconThemeError extends GLib.Error {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<GLib.Error>;

        // Static fields
        /**
         * The icon specified does not exist in the theme
         */
        static NOT_FOUND: number;

        /**
         * An unspecified error occurred.
         */
        static FAILED: number;

        // Constructors
        constructor(options: { message: string; code: number });

        // Static methods
        static quark(): GLib.Quark;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace IconViewDropPosition {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<IconViewDropPosition>;
    }

    /**
     * An enum for determining where a dropped item goes.
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    enum IconViewDropPosition {
        /**
         * no drop possible
         */
        NO_DROP,
        /**
         * dropped item replaces the item
         */
        DROP_INTO,
        /**
         * droppped item is inserted to the left
         */
        DROP_LEFT,
        /**
         * dropped item is inserted to the right
         */
        DROP_RIGHT,
        /**
         * dropped item is inserted above
         */
        DROP_ABOVE,
        /**
         * dropped item is inserted below
         */
        DROP_BELOW,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace ImageType {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<ImageType>;
    }

    /**
     * Describes the image data representation used by a {@link Gtk.Image}. If you
     * want to get the image from the widget, you can only get the
     * currently-stored representation. e.g.  if the
     * `gtk_image_get_storage_type()` returns #GTK_IMAGE_PIXBUF, then you can
     * call `gtk_image_get_pixbuf()` but not `gtk_image_get_stock()`.  For empty
     * images, you can request any storage type (call any of the "get"
     * functions), but they will all return `null` values.
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    enum ImageType {
        /**
         * there is no image displayed by the widget
         */
        EMPTY,
        /**
         * the widget contains a {@link GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf}
         */
        PIXBUF,
        /**
         * the widget contains a [stock item name][gtkstock]
         */
        STOCK,
        /**
         * the widget contains a {@link Gtk.IconSet}
         */
        ICON_SET,
        /**
         * the widget contains a {@link GdkPixbuf.PixbufAnimation}
         */
        ANIMATION,
        /**
         * the widget contains a named icon.
         *  This image type was added in GTK+ 2.6
         */
        ICON_NAME,
        /**
         * the widget contains a {@link Gio.Icon}.
         *  This image type was added in GTK+ 2.14
         */
        GICON,
        /**
         * the widget contains a {@link cairo.Surface}.
         *  This image type was added in GTK+ 3.10
         */
        SURFACE,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace InputPurpose {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<InputPurpose>;
    }

    /**
     * Describes primary purpose of the input widget. This information is
     * useful for on-screen keyboards and similar input methods to decide
     * which keys should be presented to the user.
     * 
     * Note that the purpose is not meant to impose a totally strict rule
     * about allowed characters, and does not replace input validation.
     * It is fine for an on-screen keyboard to let the user override the
     * character set restriction that is expressed by the purpose. The
     * application is expected to validate the entry contents, even if
     * it specified a purpose.
     * 
     * The difference between `GTK_INPUT_PURPOSE_DIGITS` and
     * `GTK_INPUT_PURPOSE_NUMBER` is that the former accepts only digits
     * while the latter also some punctuation (like commas or points, plus,
     * minus) and “e” or “E” as in 3.14E+000.
     * 
     * This enumeration may be extended in the future; input methods should
     * interpret unknown values as “free form”.
     * @gir-type Enum
     * @since 3.6
     */
    enum InputPurpose {
        /**
         * Allow any character
         */
        FREE_FORM,
        /**
         * Allow only alphabetic characters
         */
        ALPHA,
        /**
         * Allow only digits
         */
        DIGITS,
        /**
         * Edited field expects numbers
         */
        NUMBER,
        /**
         * Edited field expects phone number
         */
        PHONE,
        /**
         * Edited field expects URL
         */
        URL,
        /**
         * Edited field expects email address
         */
        EMAIL,
        /**
         * Edited field expects the name of a person
         */
        NAME,
        /**
         * Like `GTK_INPUT_PURPOSE_FREE_FORM`, but characters are hidden
         */
        PASSWORD,
        /**
         * Like `GTK_INPUT_PURPOSE_DIGITS`, but characters are hidden
         */
        PIN,
        /**
         * Allow any character, in addition to control codes
         */
        TERMINAL,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace Justification {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<Justification>;
    }

    /**
     * Used for justifying the text inside a {@link Gtk.Label} widget. (See also
     * {@link Gtk.Alignment}).
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    enum Justification {
        /**
         * The text is placed at the left edge of the label.
         */
        LEFT,
        /**
         * The text is placed at the right edge of the label.
         */
        RIGHT,
        /**
         * The text is placed in the center of the label.
         */
        CENTER,
        /**
         * The text is placed is distributed across the label.
         */
        FILL,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace LevelBarMode {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<LevelBarMode>;
    }

    /**
     * Describes how {@link Gtk.LevelBar} contents should be rendered.
     * Note that this enumeration could be extended with additional modes
     * in the future.
     * @gir-type Enum
     * @since 3.6
     */
    enum LevelBarMode {
        /**
         * the bar has a continuous mode
         */
        CONTINUOUS,
        /**
         * the bar has a discrete mode
         */
        DISCRETE,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace License {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<License>;
    }

    /**
     * The type of license for an application.
     * 
     * This enumeration can be expanded at later date.
     * @gir-type Enum
     * @since 3.0
     */
    enum License {
        /**
         * No license specified
         */
        UNKNOWN,
        /**
         * A license text is going to be specified by the
         *   developer
         */
        CUSTOM,
        /**
         * The GNU General Public License, version 2.0 or later
         */
        GPL_2_0,
        /**
         * The GNU General Public License, version 3.0 or later
         */
        GPL_3_0,
        /**
         * The GNU Lesser General Public License, version 2.1 or later
         */
        LGPL_2_1,
        /**
         * The GNU Lesser General Public License, version 3.0 or later
         */
        LGPL_3_0,
        /**
         * The BSD standard license
         */
        BSD,
        /**
         * The MIT/X11 standard license
         */
        MIT_X11,
        /**
         * The Artistic License, version 2.0
         */
        ARTISTIC,
        /**
         * The GNU General Public License, version 2.0 only. Since 3.12.
         */
        GPL_2_0_ONLY,
        /**
         * The GNU General Public License, version 3.0 only. Since 3.12.
         */
        GPL_3_0_ONLY,
        /**
         * The GNU Lesser General Public License, version 2.1 only. Since 3.12.
         */
        LGPL_2_1_ONLY,
        /**
         * The GNU Lesser General Public License, version 3.0 only. Since 3.12.
         */
        LGPL_3_0_ONLY,
        /**
         * The GNU Affero General Public License, version 3.0 or later. Since: 3.22.
         */
        AGPL_3_0,
        /**
         * The GNU Affero General Public License, version 3.0 only. Since: 3.22.27.
         */
        AGPL_3_0_ONLY,
        /**
         * The 3-clause BSD licence. Since: 3.24.20.
         */
        BSD_3,
        /**
         * The Apache License, version 2.0. Since: 3.24.20.
         */
        APACHE_2_0,
        /**
         * The Mozilla Public License, version 2.0. Since: 3.24.20.
         */
        MPL_2_0,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace MenuDirectionType {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<MenuDirectionType>;
    }

    /**
     * An enumeration representing directional movements within a menu.
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    enum MenuDirectionType {
        /**
         * To the parent menu shell
         */
        PARENT,
        /**
         * To the submenu, if any, associated with the item
         */
        CHILD,
        /**
         * To the next menu item
         */
        NEXT,
        /**
         * To the previous menu item
         */
        PREV,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace MessageType {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<MessageType>;
    }

    /**
     * The type of message being displayed in the dialog.
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    enum MessageType {
        /**
         * Informational message
         */
        INFO,
        /**
         * Non-fatal warning message
         */
        WARNING,
        /**
         * Question requiring a choice
         */
        QUESTION,
        /**
         * Fatal error message
         */
        ERROR,
        /**
         * None of the above
         */
        OTHER,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace MovementStep {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<MovementStep>;
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    enum MovementStep {
        /**
         * Move forward or back by graphemes
         */
        LOGICAL_POSITIONS,
        /**
         * Move left or right by graphemes
         */
        VISUAL_POSITIONS,
        /**
         * Move forward or back by words
         */
        WORDS,
        /**
         * Move up or down lines (wrapped lines)
         */
        DISPLAY_LINES,
        /**
         * Move to either end of a line
         */
        DISPLAY_LINE_ENDS,
        /**
         * Move up or down paragraphs (newline-ended lines)
         */
        PARAGRAPHS,
        /**
         * Move to either end of a paragraph
         */
        PARAGRAPH_ENDS,
        /**
         * Move by pages
         */
        PAGES,
        /**
         * Move to ends of the buffer
         */
        BUFFER_ENDS,
        /**
         * Move horizontally by pages
         */
        HORIZONTAL_PAGES,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace NotebookTab {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<NotebookTab>;
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    enum NotebookTab {
        FIRST,
        LAST,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace NumberUpLayout {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<NumberUpLayout>;
    }

    /**
     * Used to determine the layout of pages on a sheet when printing
     * multiple pages per sheet.
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    enum NumberUpLayout {
        /**
         * ![](layout-lrtb.png)
         */
        LRTB,
        /**
         * ![](layout-lrbt.png)
         */
        LRBT,
        /**
         * ![](layout-rltb.png)
         */
        RLTB,
        /**
         * ![](layout-rlbt.png)
         */
        RLBT,
        /**
         * ![](layout-tblr.png)
         */
        TBLR,
        /**
         * ![](layout-tbrl.png)
         */
        TBRL,
        /**
         * ![](layout-btlr.png)
         */
        BTLR,
        /**
         * ![](layout-btrl.png)
         */
        BTRL,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace Orientation {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<Orientation>;
    }

    /**
     * Represents the orientation of widgets and other objects which can be switched
     * between horizontal and vertical orientation on the fly, like {@link Gtk.Toolbar} or
     * {@link Gtk.GesturePan}.
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    enum Orientation {
        /**
         * The element is in horizontal orientation.
         */
        HORIZONTAL,
        /**
         * The element is in vertical orientation.
         */
        VERTICAL,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace PackDirection {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<PackDirection>;
    }

    /**
     * Determines how widgets should be packed inside menubars
     * and menuitems contained in menubars.
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    enum PackDirection {
        /**
         * Widgets are packed left-to-right
         */
        LTR,
        /**
         * Widgets are packed right-to-left
         */
        RTL,
        /**
         * Widgets are packed top-to-bottom
         */
        TTB,
        /**
         * Widgets are packed bottom-to-top
         */
        BTT,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace PackType {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<PackType>;
    }

    /**
     * Represents the packing location {@link Gtk.Box} children. (See: {@link Gtk.VBox},
     * {@link Gtk.HBox}, and {@link Gtk.ButtonBox}).
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    enum PackType {
        /**
         * The child is packed into the start of the box
         */
        START,
        /**
         * The child is packed into the end of the box
         */
        END,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace PadActionType {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<PadActionType>;
    }

    /**
     * The type of a pad action.
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    enum PadActionType {
        /**
         * Action is triggered by a pad button
         */
        BUTTON,
        /**
         * Action is triggered by a pad ring
         */
        RING,
        /**
         * Action is triggered by a pad strip
         */
        STRIP,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace PageOrientation {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<PageOrientation>;
    }

    /**
     * See also `gtk_print_settings_set_orientation()`.
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    enum PageOrientation {
        /**
         * Portrait mode.
         */
        PORTRAIT,
        /**
         * Landscape mode.
         */
        LANDSCAPE,
        /**
         * Reverse portrait mode.
         */
        REVERSE_PORTRAIT,
        /**
         * Reverse landscape mode.
         */
        REVERSE_LANDSCAPE,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace PageSet {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<PageSet>;
    }

    /**
     * See also `gtk_print_job_set_page_set()`.
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    enum PageSet {
        /**
         * All pages.
         */
        ALL,
        /**
         * Even pages.
         */
        EVEN,
        /**
         * Odd pages.
         */
        ODD,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace PanDirection {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<PanDirection>;
    }

    /**
     * Describes the panning direction of a {@link Gtk.GesturePan}
     * @gir-type Enum
     * @since 3.14
     */
    enum PanDirection {
        /**
         * panned towards the left
         */
        LEFT,
        /**
         * panned towards the right
         */
        RIGHT,
        /**
         * panned upwards
         */
        UP,
        /**
         * panned downwards
         */
        DOWN,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace PathPriorityType {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<PathPriorityType>;
    }

    /**
     * Priorities for path lookups.
     * See also `gtk_binding_set_add_path()`.
     * @gir-type Enum
     * @deprecated since 3.0
     */
    enum PathPriorityType {
        /**
         * Deprecated
         */
        LOWEST,
        /**
         * Deprecated
         */
        GTK,
        /**
         * Deprecated
         */
        APPLICATION,
        /**
         * Deprecated
         */
        THEME,
        /**
         * Deprecated
         */
        RC,
        /**
         * Deprecated
         */
        HIGHEST,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace PathType {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<PathType>;
    }

    /**
     * Widget path types.
     * See also `gtk_binding_set_add_path()`.
     * @gir-type Enum
     * @deprecated since 3.0
     */
    enum PathType {
        /**
         * Deprecated
         */
        WIDGET,
        /**
         * Deprecated
         */
        WIDGET_CLASS,
        /**
         * Deprecated
         */
        CLASS,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace PolicyType {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<PolicyType>;
    }

    /**
     * Determines how the size should be computed to achieve the one of the
     * visibility mode for the scrollbars.
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    enum PolicyType {
        /**
         * The scrollbar is always visible. The view size is
         *  independent of the content.
         */
        ALWAYS,
        /**
         * The scrollbar will appear and disappear as necessary.
         *  For example, when all of a {@link Gtk.TreeView} can not be seen.
         */
        AUTOMATIC,
        /**
         * The scrollbar should never appear. In this mode the
         *  content determines the size.
         */
        NEVER,
        /**
         * Don't show a scrollbar, but don't force the
         *  size to follow the content. This can be used e.g. to make multiple
         *  scrolled windows share a scrollbar. Since: 3.16
         */
        EXTERNAL,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace PopoverConstraint {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<PopoverConstraint>;
    }

    /**
     * Describes constraints to positioning of popovers. More values
     * may be added to this enumeration in the future.
     * @gir-type Enum
     * @since 3.20
     */
    enum PopoverConstraint {
        /**
         * Don't constrain the popover position
         *   beyond what is imposed by the implementation
         */
        NONE,
        /**
         * Constrain the popover to the boundaries
         *   of the window that it is attached to
         */
        WINDOW,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace PositionType {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<PositionType>;
    }

    /**
     * Describes which edge of a widget a certain feature is positioned at, e.g. the
     * tabs of a {@link Gtk.Notebook}, the handle of a {@link Gtk.HandleBox} or the label of a
     * {@link Gtk.Scale}.
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    enum PositionType {
        /**
         * The feature is at the left edge.
         */
        LEFT,
        /**
         * The feature is at the right edge.
         */
        RIGHT,
        /**
         * The feature is at the top edge.
         */
        TOP,
        /**
         * The feature is at the bottom edge.
         */
        BOTTOM,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace PrintDuplex {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<PrintDuplex>;
    }

    /**
     * See also `gtk_print_settings_set_duplex()`.
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    enum PrintDuplex {
        /**
         * No duplex.
         */
        SIMPLEX,
        /**
         * Horizontal duplex.
         */
        HORIZONTAL,
        /**
         * Vertical duplex.
         */
        VERTICAL,
    }


    /**
     * Error codes that identify various errors that can occur while
     * using the GTK+ printing support.
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    class PrintError extends GLib.Error {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<GLib.Error>;

        // Static fields
        /**
         * An unspecified error occurred.
         */
        static GENERAL: number;

        /**
         * An internal error occurred.
         */
        static INTERNAL_ERROR: number;

        /**
         * A memory allocation failed.
         */
        static NOMEM: number;

        /**
         * An error occurred while loading a page setup
         *     or paper size from a key file.
         */
        static INVALID_FILE: number;

        // Constructors
        constructor(options: { message: string; code: number });

        // Static methods
        /**
         * Registers an error quark for {@link Gtk.PrintOperation} if necessary.
         */
        static quark(): GLib.Quark;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace PrintOperationAction {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<PrintOperationAction>;
    }

    /**
     * The `action` parameter to `gtk_print_operation_run()`
     * determines what action the print operation should perform.
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    enum PrintOperationAction {
        /**
         * Show the print dialog.
         */
        PRINT_DIALOG,
        /**
         * Start to print without showing
         *     the print dialog, based on the current print settings.
         */
        PRINT,
        /**
         * Show the print preview.
         */
        PREVIEW,
        /**
         * Export to a file. This requires
         *     the export-filename property to be set.
         */
        EXPORT,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace PrintOperationResult {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<PrintOperationResult>;
    }

    /**
     * A value of this type is returned by `gtk_print_operation_run()`.
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    enum PrintOperationResult {
        /**
         * An error has occurred.
         */
        ERROR,
        /**
         * The print settings should be stored.
         */
        APPLY,
        /**
         * The print operation has been canceled,
         *     the print settings should not be stored.
         */
        CANCEL,
        /**
         * The print operation is not complete
         *     yet. This value will only be returned when running asynchronously.
         */
        IN_PROGRESS,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace PrintPages {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<PrintPages>;
    }

    /**
     * See also `gtk_print_job_set_pages()`
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    enum PrintPages {
        /**
         * All pages.
         */
        ALL,
        /**
         * Current page.
         */
        CURRENT,
        /**
         * Range of pages.
         */
        RANGES,
        /**
         * Selected pages.
         */
        SELECTION,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace PrintQuality {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<PrintQuality>;
    }

    /**
     * See also `gtk_print_settings_set_quality()`.
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    enum PrintQuality {
        /**
         * Low quality.
         */
        LOW,
        /**
         * Normal quality.
         */
        NORMAL,
        /**
         * High quality.
         */
        HIGH,
        /**
         * Draft quality.
         */
        DRAFT,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace PrintStatus {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<PrintStatus>;
    }

    /**
     * The status gives a rough indication of the completion of a running
     * print operation.
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    enum PrintStatus {
        /**
         * The printing has not started yet; this
         *     status is set initially, and while the print dialog is shown.
         */
        INITIAL,
        /**
         * This status is set while the begin-print
         *     signal is emitted and during pagination.
         */
        PREPARING,
        /**
         * This status is set while the
         *     pages are being rendered.
         */
        GENERATING_DATA,
        /**
         * The print job is being sent off to the
         *     printer.
         */
        SENDING_DATA,
        /**
         * The print job has been sent to the printer,
         *     but is not printed for some reason, e.g. the printer may be stopped.
         */
        PENDING,
        /**
         * Some problem has occurred during
         *     printing, e.g. a paper jam.
         */
        PENDING_ISSUE,
        /**
         * The printer is processing the print job.
         */
        PRINTING,
        /**
         * The printing has been completed successfully.
         */
        FINISHED,
        /**
         * The printing has been aborted.
         */
        FINISHED_ABORTED,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace PropagationPhase {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<PropagationPhase>;
    }

    /**
     * Describes the stage at which events are fed into a {@link Gtk.EventController}.
     * @gir-type Enum
     * @since 3.14
     */
    enum PropagationPhase {
        /**
         * Events are not delivered automatically. Those can be
         *   manually fed through `gtk_event_controller_handle_event()`. This should
         *   only be used when full control about when, or whether the controller
         *   handles the event is needed.
         */
        NONE,
        /**
         * Events are delivered in the capture phase. The
         *   capture phase happens before the bubble phase, runs from the toplevel down
         *   to the event widget. This option should only be used on containers that
         *   might possibly handle events before their children do.
         */
        CAPTURE,
        /**
         * Events are delivered in the bubble phase. The bubble
         *   phase happens after the capture phase, and before the default handlers
         *   are run. This phase runs from the event widget, up to the toplevel.
         */
        BUBBLE,
        /**
         * Events are delivered in the default widget event handlers,
         *   note that widget implementations must chain up on button, motion, touch and
         *   grab broken handlers for controllers in this phase to be run.
         */
        TARGET,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace RcTokenType {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<RcTokenType>;
    }

    /**
     * The {@link Gtk.RcTokenType} enumeration represents the tokens
     * in the RC file. It is exposed so that theme engines
     * can reuse these tokens when parsing the theme-engine
     * specific portions of a RC file.
     * @gir-type Enum
     * @deprecated since 3.0: Use {@link Gtk.CssProvider} instead.
     */
    enum RcTokenType {
        /**
         * Deprecated
         */
        INVALID,
        /**
         * Deprecated
         */
        INCLUDE,
        /**
         * Deprecated
         */
        NORMAL,
        /**
         * Deprecated
         */
        ACTIVE,
        /**
         * Deprecated
         */
        PRELIGHT,
        /**
         * Deprecated
         */
        SELECTED,
        /**
         * Deprecated
         */
        INSENSITIVE,
        /**
         * Deprecated
         */
        FG,
        /**
         * Deprecated
         */
        BG,
        /**
         * Deprecated
         */
        TEXT,
        /**
         * Deprecated
         */
        BASE,
        /**
         * Deprecated
         */
        XTHICKNESS,
        /**
         * Deprecated
         */
        YTHICKNESS,
        /**
         * Deprecated
         */
        FONT,
        /**
         * Deprecated
         */
        FONTSET,
        /**
         * Deprecated
         */
        FONT_NAME,
        /**
         * Deprecated
         */
        BG_PIXMAP,
        /**
         * Deprecated
         */
        PIXMAP_PATH,
        /**
         * Deprecated
         */
        STYLE,
        /**
         * Deprecated
         */
        BINDING,
        /**
         * Deprecated
         */
        BIND,
        /**
         * Deprecated
         */
        WIDGET,
        /**
         * Deprecated
         */
        WIDGET_CLASS,
        /**
         * Deprecated
         */
        CLASS,
        /**
         * Deprecated
         */
        LOWEST,
        /**
         * Deprecated
         */
        GTK,
        /**
         * Deprecated
         */
        APPLICATION,
        /**
         * Deprecated
         */
        THEME,
        /**
         * Deprecated
         */
        RC,
        /**
         * Deprecated
         */
        HIGHEST,
        /**
         * Deprecated
         */
        ENGINE,
        /**
         * Deprecated
         */
        MODULE_PATH,
        /**
         * Deprecated
         */
        IM_MODULE_PATH,
        /**
         * Deprecated
         */
        IM_MODULE_FILE,
        /**
         * Deprecated
         */
        STOCK,
        /**
         * Deprecated
         */
        LTR,
        /**
         * Deprecated
         */
        RTL,
        /**
         * Deprecated
         */
        COLOR,
        /**
         * Deprecated
         */
        UNBIND,
        /**
         * Deprecated
         */
        LAST,
    }


    /**
     * These identify the various errors that can occur while calling
     * {@link Gtk.RecentChooser} functions.
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    class RecentChooserError extends GLib.Error {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<GLib.Error>;

        // Static fields
        /**
         * Indicates that a file does not exist
         */
        static NOT_FOUND: number;

        /**
         * Indicates a malformed URI
         */
        static INVALID_URI: number;

        // Constructors
        constructor(options: { message: string; code: number });

        // Static methods
        static quark(): GLib.Quark;
    }


    /**
     * Error codes for {@link Gtk.RecentManager} operations
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    class RecentManagerError extends GLib.Error {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<GLib.Error>;

        // Static fields
        /**
         * the URI specified does not exists in
         *   the recently used resources list.
         */
        static NOT_FOUND: number;

        /**
         * the URI specified is not valid.
         */
        static INVALID_URI: number;

        /**
         * the supplied string is not
         *   UTF-8 encoded.
         */
        static INVALID_ENCODING: number;

        /**
         * no application has registered
         *   the specified item.
         */
        static NOT_REGISTERED: number;

        /**
         * failure while reading the recently used
         *   resources file.
         */
        static READ: number;

        /**
         * failure while writing the recently used
         *   resources file.
         */
        static WRITE: number;

        /**
         * unspecified error.
         */
        static UNKNOWN: number;

        // Constructors
        constructor(options: { message: string; code: number });

        // Static methods
        static quark(): GLib.Quark;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace RecentSortType {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<RecentSortType>;
    }

    /**
     * Used to specify the sorting method to be applyed to the recently
     * used resource list.
     * @gir-type Enum
     * @since 2.10
     */
    enum RecentSortType {
        /**
         * Do not sort the returned list of recently used
         *   resources.
         */
        NONE,
        /**
         * Sort the returned list with the most recently used
         *   items first.
         */
        MRU,
        /**
         * Sort the returned list with the least recently used
         *   items first.
         */
        LRU,
        /**
         * Sort the returned list using a custom sorting
         *   function passed using `gtk_recent_chooser_set_sort_func()`.
         */
        CUSTOM,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace ReliefStyle {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<ReliefStyle>;
    }

    /**
     * Indicated the relief to be drawn around a {@link Gtk.Button}.
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    enum ReliefStyle {
        /**
         * Draw a normal relief.
         */
        NORMAL,
        /**
         * A half relief. Deprecated in 3.14, does the same as `GTK_RELIEF_NORMAL`
         */
        HALF,
        /**
         * No relief.
         */
        NONE,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace ResizeMode {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<ResizeMode>;
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    enum ResizeMode {
        /**
         * Pass resize request to the parent
         */
        PARENT,
        /**
         * Queue resizes on this widget
         */
        QUEUE,
        /**
         * Resize immediately. Deprecated.
         */
        IMMEDIATE,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace ResponseType {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<ResponseType>;
    }

    /**
     * Predefined values for use as response ids in `gtk_dialog_add_button()`.
     * All predefined values are negative; GTK+ leaves values of 0 or greater for
     * application-defined response ids.
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    enum ResponseType {
        /**
         * Returned if an action widget has no response id,
         *     or if the dialog gets programmatically hidden or destroyed
         */
        NONE,
        /**
         * Generic response id, not used by GTK+ dialogs
         */
        REJECT,
        /**
         * Generic response id, not used by GTK+ dialogs
         */
        ACCEPT,
        /**
         * Returned if the dialog is deleted
         */
        DELETE_EVENT,
        /**
         * Returned by OK buttons in GTK+ dialogs
         */
        OK,
        /**
         * Returned by Cancel buttons in GTK+ dialogs
         */
        CANCEL,
        /**
         * Returned by Close buttons in GTK+ dialogs
         */
        CLOSE,
        /**
         * Returned by Yes buttons in GTK+ dialogs
         */
        YES,
        /**
         * Returned by No buttons in GTK+ dialogs
         */
        NO,
        /**
         * Returned by Apply buttons in GTK+ dialogs
         */
        APPLY,
        /**
         * Returned by Help buttons in GTK+ dialogs
         */
        HELP,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace RevealerTransitionType {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<RevealerTransitionType>;
    }

    /**
     * These enumeration values describe the possible transitions
     * when the child of a {@link Gtk.Revealer} widget is shown or hidden.
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    enum RevealerTransitionType {
        /**
         * No transition
         */
        NONE,
        /**
         * Fade in
         */
        CROSSFADE,
        /**
         * Slide in from the left
         */
        SLIDE_RIGHT,
        /**
         * Slide in from the right
         */
        SLIDE_LEFT,
        /**
         * Slide in from the bottom
         */
        SLIDE_UP,
        /**
         * Slide in from the top
         */
        SLIDE_DOWN,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace ScrollStep {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<ScrollStep>;
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    enum ScrollStep {
        /**
         * Scroll in steps.
         */
        STEPS,
        /**
         * Scroll by pages.
         */
        PAGES,
        /**
         * Scroll to ends.
         */
        ENDS,
        /**
         * Scroll in horizontal steps.
         */
        HORIZONTAL_STEPS,
        /**
         * Scroll by horizontal pages.
         */
        HORIZONTAL_PAGES,
        /**
         * Scroll to the horizontal ends.
         */
        HORIZONTAL_ENDS,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace ScrollType {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<ScrollType>;
    }

    /**
     * Scrolling types.
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    enum ScrollType {
        /**
         * No scrolling.
         */
        NONE,
        /**
         * Jump to new location.
         */
        JUMP,
        /**
         * Step backward.
         */
        STEP_BACKWARD,
        /**
         * Step forward.
         */
        STEP_FORWARD,
        /**
         * Page backward.
         */
        PAGE_BACKWARD,
        /**
         * Page forward.
         */
        PAGE_FORWARD,
        /**
         * Step up.
         */
        STEP_UP,
        /**
         * Step down.
         */
        STEP_DOWN,
        /**
         * Page up.
         */
        PAGE_UP,
        /**
         * Page down.
         */
        PAGE_DOWN,
        /**
         * Step to the left.
         */
        STEP_LEFT,
        /**
         * Step to the right.
         */
        STEP_RIGHT,
        /**
         * Page to the left.
         */
        PAGE_LEFT,
        /**
         * Page to the right.
         */
        PAGE_RIGHT,
        /**
         * Scroll to start.
         */
        START,
        /**
         * Scroll to end.
         */
        END,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace ScrollablePolicy {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<ScrollablePolicy>;
    }

    /**
     * Defines the policy to be used in a scrollable widget when updating
     * the scrolled window adjustments in a given orientation.
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    enum ScrollablePolicy {
        /**
         * Scrollable adjustments are based on the minimum size
         */
        MINIMUM,
        /**
         * Scrollable adjustments are based on the natural size
         */
        NATURAL,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace SelectionMode {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<SelectionMode>;
    }

    /**
     * Used to control what selections users are allowed to make.
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    enum SelectionMode {
        /**
         * No selection is possible.
         */
        NONE,
        /**
         * Zero or one element may be selected.
         */
        SINGLE,
        /**
         * Exactly one element is selected.
         *     In some circumstances, such as initially or during a search
         *     operation, it’s possible for no element to be selected with
         *     {@link Gtk.SelectionMode.BROWSE}. What is really enforced is that the user
         *     can’t deselect a currently selected element except by selecting
         *     another element.
         */
        BROWSE,
        /**
         * Any number of elements may be selected.
         *      The Ctrl key may be used to enlarge the selection, and Shift
         *      key to select between the focus and the child pointed to.
         *      Some widgets may also allow Click-drag to select a range of elements.
         */
        MULTIPLE,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace SensitivityType {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<SensitivityType>;
    }

    /**
     * Determines how GTK+ handles the sensitivity of stepper arrows
     * at the end of range widgets.
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    enum SensitivityType {
        /**
         * The arrow is made insensitive if the
         *   thumb is at the end
         */
        AUTO,
        /**
         * The arrow is always sensitive
         */
        ON,
        /**
         * The arrow is always insensitive
         */
        OFF,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace ShadowType {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<ShadowType>;
    }

    /**
     * Used to change the appearance of an outline typically provided by a {@link Gtk.Frame}.
     * 
     * Note that many themes do not differentiate the appearance of the
     * various shadow types: Either their is no visible shadow (`GTK_SHADOW_NONE`),
     * or there is (any other value).
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    enum ShadowType {
        /**
         * No outline.
         */
        NONE,
        /**
         * The outline is bevelled inwards.
         */
        IN,
        /**
         * The outline is bevelled outwards like a button.
         */
        OUT,
        /**
         * The outline has a sunken 3d appearance.
         */
        ETCHED_IN,
        /**
         * The outline has a raised 3d appearance.
         */
        ETCHED_OUT,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace ShortcutType {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<ShortcutType>;
    }

    /**
     * GtkShortcutType specifies the kind of shortcut that is being described.
     * More values may be added to this enumeration over time.
     * @gir-type Enum
     * @since 3.20
     */
    enum ShortcutType {
        /**
         * The shortcut is a keyboard accelerator. The {@link Gtk.ShortcutsShortcut.accelerator}
         *   property will be used.
         */
        ACCELERATOR,
        /**
         * The shortcut is a pinch gesture. GTK+ provides an icon and subtitle.
         */
        GESTURE_PINCH,
        /**
         * The shortcut is a stretch gesture. GTK+ provides an icon and subtitle.
         */
        GESTURE_STRETCH,
        /**
         * The shortcut is a clockwise rotation gesture. GTK+ provides an icon and subtitle.
         */
        GESTURE_ROTATE_CLOCKWISE,
        /**
         * The shortcut is a counterclockwise rotation gesture. GTK+ provides an icon and subtitle.
         */
        GESTURE_ROTATE_COUNTERCLOCKWISE,
        /**
         * The shortcut is a two-finger swipe gesture. GTK+ provides an icon and subtitle.
         */
        GESTURE_TWO_FINGER_SWIPE_LEFT,
        /**
         * The shortcut is a two-finger swipe gesture. GTK+ provides an icon and subtitle.
         */
        GESTURE_TWO_FINGER_SWIPE_RIGHT,
        /**
         * The shortcut is a gesture. The {@link Gtk.ShortcutsShortcut.icon} property will be
         *   used.
         */
        GESTURE,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace SizeGroupMode {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<SizeGroupMode>;
    }

    /**
     * The mode of the size group determines the directions in which the size
     * group affects the requested sizes of its component widgets.
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    enum SizeGroupMode {
        /**
         * group has no effect
         */
        NONE,
        /**
         * group affects horizontal requisition
         */
        HORIZONTAL,
        /**
         * group affects vertical requisition
         */
        VERTICAL,
        /**
         * group affects both horizontal and vertical requisition
         */
        BOTH,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace SizeRequestMode {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<SizeRequestMode>;
    }

    /**
     * Specifies a preference for height-for-width or
     * width-for-height geometry management.
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    enum SizeRequestMode {
        /**
         * Prefer height-for-width geometry management
         */
        HEIGHT_FOR_WIDTH,
        /**
         * Prefer width-for-height geometry management
         */
        WIDTH_FOR_HEIGHT,
        /**
         * Don’t trade height-for-width or width-for-height
         */
        CONSTANT_SIZE,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace SortType {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<SortType>;
    }

    /**
     * Determines the direction of a sort.
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    enum SortType {
        /**
         * Sorting is in ascending order.
         */
        ASCENDING,
        /**
         * Sorting is in descending order.
         */
        DESCENDING,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace SpinButtonUpdatePolicy {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<SpinButtonUpdatePolicy>;
    }

    /**
     * The spin button update policy determines whether the spin button displays
     * values even if they are outside the bounds of its adjustment.
     * See `gtk_spin_button_set_update_policy()`.
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    enum SpinButtonUpdatePolicy {
        /**
         * When refreshing your {@link Gtk.SpinButton}, the value is
         *     always displayed
         */
        ALWAYS,
        /**
         * When refreshing your {@link Gtk.SpinButton}, the value is
         *     only displayed if it is valid within the bounds of the spin button's
         *     adjustment
         */
        IF_VALID,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace SpinType {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<SpinType>;
    }

    /**
     * The values of the GtkSpinType enumeration are used to specify the
     * change to make in `gtk_spin_button_spin()`.
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    enum SpinType {
        /**
         * Increment by the adjustments step increment.
         */
        STEP_FORWARD,
        /**
         * Decrement by the adjustments step increment.
         */
        STEP_BACKWARD,
        /**
         * Increment by the adjustments page increment.
         */
        PAGE_FORWARD,
        /**
         * Decrement by the adjustments page increment.
         */
        PAGE_BACKWARD,
        /**
         * Go to the adjustments lower bound.
         */
        HOME,
        /**
         * Go to the adjustments upper bound.
         */
        END,
        /**
         * Change by a specified amount.
         */
        USER_DEFINED,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace StackTransitionType {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<StackTransitionType>;
    }

    /**
     * These enumeration values describe the possible transitions
     * between pages in a {@link Gtk.Stack} widget.
     * 
     * New values may be added to this enumeration over time.
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    enum StackTransitionType {
        /**
         * No transition
         */
        NONE,
        /**
         * A cross-fade
         */
        CROSSFADE,
        /**
         * Slide from left to right
         */
        SLIDE_RIGHT,
        /**
         * Slide from right to left
         */
        SLIDE_LEFT,
        /**
         * Slide from bottom up
         */
        SLIDE_UP,
        /**
         * Slide from top down
         */
        SLIDE_DOWN,
        /**
         * Slide from left or right according to the children order
         */
        SLIDE_LEFT_RIGHT,
        /**
         * Slide from top down or bottom up according to the order
         */
        SLIDE_UP_DOWN,
        /**
         * Cover the old page by sliding up. Since 3.12
         */
        OVER_UP,
        /**
         * Cover the old page by sliding down. Since: 3.12
         */
        OVER_DOWN,
        /**
         * Cover the old page by sliding to the left. Since: 3.12
         */
        OVER_LEFT,
        /**
         * Cover the old page by sliding to the right. Since: 3.12
         */
        OVER_RIGHT,
        /**
         * Uncover the new page by sliding up. Since 3.12
         */
        UNDER_UP,
        /**
         * Uncover the new page by sliding down. Since: 3.12
         */
        UNDER_DOWN,
        /**
         * Uncover the new page by sliding to the left. Since: 3.12
         */
        UNDER_LEFT,
        /**
         * Uncover the new page by sliding to the right. Since: 3.12
         */
        UNDER_RIGHT,
        /**
         * Cover the old page sliding up or uncover the new page sliding down, according to order. Since: 3.12
         */
        OVER_UP_DOWN,
        /**
         * Cover the old page sliding down or uncover the new page sliding up, according to order. Since: 3.14
         */
        OVER_DOWN_UP,
        /**
         * Cover the old page sliding left or uncover the new page sliding right, according to order. Since: 3.14
         */
        OVER_LEFT_RIGHT,
        /**
         * Cover the old page sliding right or uncover the new page sliding left, according to order. Since: 3.14
         */
        OVER_RIGHT_LEFT,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace StateType {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<StateType>;
    }

    /**
     * This type indicates the current state of a widget; the state determines how
     * the widget is drawn. The {@link Gtk.StateType} enumeration is also used to
     * identify different colors in a {@link Gtk.Style} for drawing, so states can be
     * used for subparts of a widget as well as entire widgets.
     * @gir-type Enum
     * @deprecated since 3.14: All APIs that are using this enumeration have been deprecated     in favor of alternatives using {@link Gtk.StateFlags}.
     */
    enum StateType {
        /**
         * State during normal operation.
         */
        NORMAL,
        /**
         * State of a currently active widget, such as a depressed button.
         */
        ACTIVE,
        /**
         * State indicating that the mouse pointer is over
         *                      the widget and the widget will respond to mouse clicks.
         */
        PRELIGHT,
        /**
         * State of a selected item, such the selected row in a list.
         */
        SELECTED,
        /**
         * State indicating that the widget is
         *                         unresponsive to user actions.
         */
        INSENSITIVE,
        /**
         * The widget is inconsistent, such as checkbuttons
         *                          or radiobuttons that aren’t either set to `true` nor `false`,
         *                          or buttons requiring the user attention.
         */
        INCONSISTENT,
        /**
         * The widget has the keyboard focus.
         */
        FOCUSED,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace TextBufferTargetInfo {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<TextBufferTargetInfo>;
    }

    /**
     * These values are used as “info” for the targets contained in the
     * lists returned by `gtk_text_buffer_get_copy_target_list()` and
     * `gtk_text_buffer_get_paste_target_list()`.
     * 
     * The values counts down from `-1` to avoid clashes
     * with application added drag destinations which usually start at 0.
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    enum TextBufferTargetInfo {
        /**
         * Buffer contents
         */
        BUFFER_CONTENTS,
        /**
         * Rich text
         */
        RICH_TEXT,
        /**
         * Text
         */
        TEXT,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace TextDirection {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<TextDirection>;
    }

    /**
     * Reading directions for text.
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    enum TextDirection {
        /**
         * No direction.
         */
        NONE,
        /**
         * Left to right text direction.
         */
        LTR,
        /**
         * Right to left text direction.
         */
        RTL,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace TextExtendSelection {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<TextExtendSelection>;
    }

    /**
     * Granularity types that extend the text selection. Use the
     * {@link Gtk.TextView.SignalSignatures.extend_selection | Gtk.TextView::extend-selection} signal to customize the selection.
     * @gir-type Enum
     * @since 3.16
     */
    enum TextExtendSelection {
        /**
         * Selects the current word. It is triggered by
         *   a double-click for example.
         */
        WORD,
        /**
         * Selects the current line. It is triggered by
         *   a triple-click for example.
         */
        LINE,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace TextViewLayer {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<TextViewLayer>;
    }

    /**
     * Used to reference the layers of {@link Gtk.TextView} for the purpose of customized
     * drawing with the ::draw_layer vfunc.
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    enum TextViewLayer {
        /**
         * Old deprecated layer, use {@link Gtk.TextViewLayer.BELOW_TEXT} instead
         */
        BELOW,
        /**
         * Old deprecated layer, use {@link Gtk.TextViewLayer.ABOVE_TEXT} instead
         */
        ABOVE,
        /**
         * The layer rendered below the text (but above the background).  Since: 3.20
         */
        BELOW_TEXT,
        /**
         * The layer rendered above the text.  Since: 3.20
         */
        ABOVE_TEXT,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace TextWindowType {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<TextWindowType>;
    }

    /**
     * Used to reference the parts of {@link Gtk.TextView}.
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    enum TextWindowType {
        /**
         * Invalid value, used as a marker
         */
        PRIVATE,
        /**
         * Window that floats over scrolling areas.
         */
        WIDGET,
        /**
         * Scrollable text window.
         */
        TEXT,
        /**
         * Left side border window.
         */
        LEFT,
        /**
         * Right side border window.
         */
        RIGHT,
        /**
         * Top border window.
         */
        TOP,
        /**
         * Bottom border window.
         */
        BOTTOM,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace ToolbarSpaceStyle {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<ToolbarSpaceStyle>;
    }

    /**
     * Whether spacers are vertical lines or just blank.
     * @gir-type Enum
     * @deprecated since 3.20
     */
    enum ToolbarSpaceStyle {
        /**
         * Use blank spacers.
         */
        EMPTY,
        /**
         * Use vertical lines for spacers.
         */
        LINE,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace ToolbarStyle {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<ToolbarStyle>;
    }

    /**
     * Used to customize the appearance of a {@link Gtk.Toolbar}. Note that
     * setting the toolbar style overrides the user’s preferences
     * for the default toolbar style.  Note that if the button has only
     * a label set and GTK_TOOLBAR_ICONS is used, the label will be
     * visible, and vice versa.
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    enum ToolbarStyle {
        /**
         * Buttons display only icons in the toolbar.
         */
        ICONS,
        /**
         * Buttons display only text labels in the toolbar.
         */
        TEXT,
        /**
         * Buttons display text and icons in the toolbar.
         */
        BOTH,
        /**
         * Buttons display icons and text alongside each
         *  other, rather than vertically stacked
         */
        BOTH_HORIZ,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace TreeViewColumnSizing {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<TreeViewColumnSizing>;
    }

    /**
     * The sizing method the column uses to determine its width.  Please note
     * that `GTK_TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_AUTOSIZE` are inefficient for large views, and
     * can make columns appear choppy.
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    enum TreeViewColumnSizing {
        /**
         * Columns only get bigger in reaction to changes in the model
         */
        GROW_ONLY,
        /**
         * Columns resize to be the optimal size everytime the model changes.
         */
        AUTOSIZE,
        /**
         * Columns are a fixed numbers of pixels wide.
         */
        FIXED,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace TreeViewDropPosition {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<TreeViewDropPosition>;
    }

    /**
     * An enum for determining where a dropped row goes.
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    enum TreeViewDropPosition {
        /**
         * dropped row is inserted before
         */
        BEFORE,
        /**
         * dropped row is inserted after
         */
        AFTER,
        /**
         * dropped row becomes a child or is inserted before
         */
        INTO_OR_BEFORE,
        /**
         * dropped row becomes a child or is inserted after
         */
        INTO_OR_AFTER,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace TreeViewGridLines {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<TreeViewGridLines>;
    }

    /**
     * Used to indicate which grid lines to draw in a tree view.
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    enum TreeViewGridLines {
        /**
         * No grid lines.
         */
        NONE,
        /**
         * Horizontal grid lines.
         */
        HORIZONTAL,
        /**
         * Vertical grid lines.
         */
        VERTICAL,
        /**
         * Horizontal and vertical grid lines.
         */
        BOTH,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace Unit {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<Unit>;
    }

    /**
     * See also `gtk_print_settings_set_paper_width()`.
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    enum Unit {
        /**
         * No units.
         */
        NONE,
        /**
         * Dimensions in points.
         */
        POINTS,
        /**
         * Dimensions in inches.
         */
        INCH,
        /**
         * Dimensions in millimeters
         */
        MM,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace WidgetHelpType {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<WidgetHelpType>;
    }

    /**
     * Kinds of widget-specific help. Used by the ::show-help signal.
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    enum WidgetHelpType {
        /**
         * Tooltip.
         */
        TOOLTIP,
        /**
         * What’s this.
         */
        WHATS_THIS,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace WindowPosition {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<WindowPosition>;
    }

    /**
     * Window placement can be influenced using this enumeration. Note that
     * using #GTK_WIN_POS_CENTER_ALWAYS is almost always a bad idea.
     * It won’t necessarily work well with all window managers or on all windowing systems.
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    enum WindowPosition {
        /**
         * No influence is made on placement.
         */
        NONE,
        /**
         * Windows should be placed in the center of the screen.
         */
        CENTER,
        /**
         * Windows should be placed at the current mouse position.
         */
        MOUSE,
        /**
         * Keep window centered as it changes size, etc.
         */
        CENTER_ALWAYS,
        /**
         * Center the window on its transient
         *  parent (see `gtk_window_set_transient_for()`).
         */
        CENTER_ON_PARENT,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace WindowType {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<WindowType>;
    }

    /**
     * A {@link Gtk.Window} can be one of these types. Most things you’d consider a
     * “window” should have type #GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL; windows with this type
     * are managed by the window manager and have a frame by default (call
     * `gtk_window_set_decorated()` to toggle the frame).  Windows with type
     * #GTK_WINDOW_POPUP are ignored by the window manager; window manager
     * keybindings won’t work on them, the window manager won’t decorate the
     * window with a frame, many GTK+ features that rely on the window
     * manager will not work (e.g. resize grips and
     * maximization/minimization). #GTK_WINDOW_POPUP is used to implement
     * widgets such as {@link Gtk.Menu} or tooltips that you normally don’t think of
     * as windows per se. Nearly all windows should be #GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL.
     * In particular, do not use #GTK_WINDOW_POPUP just to turn off
     * the window borders; use `gtk_window_set_decorated()` for that.
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    enum WindowType {
        /**
         * A regular window, such as a dialog.
         */
        TOPLEVEL,
        /**
         * A special window such as a tooltip.
         */
        POPUP,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    export namespace WrapMode {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<WrapMode>;
    }

    /**
     * Describes a type of line wrapping.
     * @gir-type Enum
     */
    enum WrapMode {
        /**
         * do not wrap lines; just make the text area wider
         */
        NONE,
        /**
         * wrap text, breaking lines anywhere the cursor can
         *     appear (between characters, usually - if you want to be technical,
         *     between graphemes, see `pango_get_log_attrs()`)
         */
        CHAR,
        /**
         * wrap text, breaking lines in between words
         */
        WORD,
        /**
         * wrap text, breaking lines in between words, or if
         *     that is not enough, also between graphemes
         */
        WORD_CHAR,
    }


    /**
     * Like `gtk_get_binary_age()`, but from the headers used at
     * application compile time, rather than from the library linked
     * against at application run time.
     */
    const BINARY_AGE: number;

    /**
     * Constant to return from a signal handler for the {@link Gtk.SpinButton.SignalSignatures.input | Gtk.SpinButton::input}
     * signal in case of conversion failure.
     */
    const INPUT_ERROR: number;

    /**
     * Like `gtk_get_interface_age()`, but from the headers used at
     * application compile time, rather than from the library linked
     * against at application run time.
     */
    const INTERFACE_AGE: number;

    /**
     * The name used for the stock full offset included by {@link Gtk.LevelBar}.
     * @since 3.20
     */
    const LEVEL_BAR_OFFSET_FULL: string;

    /**
     * The name used for the stock high offset included by {@link Gtk.LevelBar}.
     * @since 3.6
     */
    const LEVEL_BAR_OFFSET_HIGH: string;

    /**
     * The name used for the stock low offset included by {@link Gtk.LevelBar}.
     * @since 3.6
     */
    const LEVEL_BAR_OFFSET_LOW: string;

    /**
     * Like `gtk_get_major_version()`, but from the headers used at
     * application compile time, rather than from the library linked
     * against at application run time.
     */
    const MAJOR_VERSION: number;

    /**
     * The maximum length of sequences in compose tables.
     */
    const MAX_COMPOSE_LEN: number;

    /**
     * Like `gtk_get_micro_version()`, but from the headers used at
     * application compile time, rather than from the library linked
     * against at application run time.
     */
    const MICRO_VERSION: number;

    /**
     * Like `gtk_get_minor_version()`, but from the headers used at
     * application compile time, rather than from the library linked
     * against at application run time.
     */
    const MINOR_VERSION: number;

    /**
     * Name for the A3 paper size.
     */
    const PAPER_NAME_A3: string;

    /**
     * Name for the A4 paper size.
     */
    const PAPER_NAME_A4: string;

    /**
     * Name for the A5 paper size.
     */
    const PAPER_NAME_A5: string;

    /**
     * Name for the B5 paper size.
     */
    const PAPER_NAME_B5: string;

    /**
     * Name for the Executive paper size.
     */
    const PAPER_NAME_EXECUTIVE: string;

    /**
     * Name for the Legal paper size.
     */
    const PAPER_NAME_LEGAL: string;

    /**
     * Name for the Letter paper size.
     */
    const PAPER_NAME_LETTER: string;

    const PATH_PRIO_MASK: number;

    const PRINT_SETTINGS_COLLATE: string;

    const PRINT_SETTINGS_DEFAULT_SOURCE: string;

    const PRINT_SETTINGS_DITHER: string;

    const PRINT_SETTINGS_DUPLEX: string;

    const PRINT_SETTINGS_FINISHINGS: string;

    const PRINT_SETTINGS_MEDIA_TYPE: string;

    const PRINT_SETTINGS_NUMBER_UP: string;

    const PRINT_SETTINGS_NUMBER_UP_LAYOUT: string;

    const PRINT_SETTINGS_N_COPIES: string;

    const PRINT_SETTINGS_ORIENTATION: string;

    /**
     * The key used by the “Print to file” printer to store the file
     * name of the output without the path to the directory and the
     * file extension.
     * @since 3.6
     */
    const PRINT_SETTINGS_OUTPUT_BASENAME: string;

    const PRINT_SETTINGS_OUTPUT_BIN: string;

    /**
     * The key used by the “Print to file” printer to store the
     * directory to which the output should be written.
     * @since 3.6
     */
    const PRINT_SETTINGS_OUTPUT_DIR: string;

    /**
     * The key used by the “Print to file” printer to store the format
     * of the output. The supported values are “PS” and “PDF”.
     */
    const PRINT_SETTINGS_OUTPUT_FILE_FORMAT: string;

    /**
     * The key used by the “Print to file” printer to store the URI
     * to which the output should be written. GTK+ itself supports
     * only “file://” URIs.
     */
    const PRINT_SETTINGS_OUTPUT_URI: string;

    const PRINT_SETTINGS_PAGE_RANGES: string;

    const PRINT_SETTINGS_PAGE_SET: string;

    const PRINT_SETTINGS_PAPER_FORMAT: string;

    const PRINT_SETTINGS_PAPER_HEIGHT: string;

    const PRINT_SETTINGS_PAPER_WIDTH: string;

    const PRINT_SETTINGS_PRINTER: string;

    const PRINT_SETTINGS_PRINTER_LPI: string;

    const PRINT_SETTINGS_PRINT_PAGES: string;

    const PRINT_SETTINGS_QUALITY: string;

    const PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION: string;

    const PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION_X: string;

    const PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION_Y: string;

    const PRINT_SETTINGS_REVERSE: string;

    const PRINT_SETTINGS_SCALE: string;

    const PRINT_SETTINGS_USE_COLOR: string;

    const PRINT_SETTINGS_WIN32_DRIVER_EXTRA: string;

    const PRINT_SETTINGS_WIN32_DRIVER_VERSION: string;

    /**
     * Use this priority for functionality related to size allocation.
     * 
     * It is used internally by GTK+ to compute the sizes of widgets.
     * This priority is higher than `GDK_PRIORITY_REDRAW` to avoid
     * resizing a widget which was just redrawn.
     */
    const PRIORITY_RESIZE: number;

    /**
     * The “About” item.
     * ![](help-about.png)
     * @since 2.6
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;help-about&quot; or the label &quot;_About&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_ABOUT: string;

    /**
     * The “Add” item and icon.
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;list-add&quot; or the label &quot;_Add&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_ADD: string;

    /**
     * The “Apply” item and icon.
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Do not use an icon. Use label &quot;_Apply&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_APPLY: string;

    /**
     * The “Bold” item and icon.
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;format-text-bold&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_BOLD: string;

    /**
     * The “Cancel” item and icon.
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Do not use an icon. Use label &quot;_Cancel&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_CANCEL: string;

    /**
     * The “Caps Lock Warning” icon.
     * @since 2.16
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;dialog-warning-symbolic&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_CAPS_LOCK_WARNING: string;

    /**
     * The “CD-Rom” item and icon.
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;media-optical&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_CDROM: string;

    /**
     * The “Clear” item and icon.
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;edit-clear&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_CLEAR: string;

    /**
     * The “Close” item and icon.
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;window-close&quot; or the label &quot;_Close&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_CLOSE: string;

    /**
     * The “Color Picker” item and icon.
     * @since 2.2
     * @deprecated since 3.10
     */
    const STOCK_COLOR_PICKER: string;

    /**
     * The “Connect” icon.
     * @since 2.6
     * @deprecated since 3.10
     */
    const STOCK_CONNECT: string;

    /**
     * The “Convert” item and icon.
     * @deprecated since 3.10
     */
    const STOCK_CONVERT: string;

    /**
     * The “Copy” item and icon.
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use the named icon &quot;edit-copy&quot; or the label &quot;_Copy&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_COPY: string;

    /**
     * The “Cut” item and icon.
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use the named icon &quot;edit-cut&quot; or the label &quot;Cu_t&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_CUT: string;

    /**
     * The “Delete” item and icon.
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use the named icon &quot;edit-delete&quot; or the label &quot;_Delete&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_DELETE: string;

    /**
     * The “Authentication” item and icon.
     * @since 2.4
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;dialog-password&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_DIALOG_AUTHENTICATION: string;

    /**
     * The “Error” item and icon.
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;dialog-error&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_DIALOG_ERROR: string;

    /**
     * The “Information” item and icon.
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;dialog-information&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_DIALOG_INFO: string;

    /**
     * The “Question” item and icon.
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;dialog-question&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_DIALOG_QUESTION: string;

    /**
     * The “Warning” item and icon.
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;dialog-warning&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_DIALOG_WARNING: string;

    /**
     * The “Directory” icon.
     * @since 2.6
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;folder&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_DIRECTORY: string;

    /**
     * The “Discard” item.
     * @since 2.12
     * @deprecated since 3.10
     */
    const STOCK_DISCARD: string;

    /**
     * The “Disconnect” icon.
     * @since 2.6
     * @deprecated since 3.10
     */
    const STOCK_DISCONNECT: string;

    /**
     * The “Drag-And-Drop” icon.
     * @deprecated since 3.10
     */
    const STOCK_DND: string;

    /**
     * The “Drag-And-Drop multiple” icon.
     * @deprecated since 3.10
     */
    const STOCK_DND_MULTIPLE: string;

    /**
     * The “Edit” item and icon.
     * @since 2.6
     * @deprecated since 3.10
     */
    const STOCK_EDIT: string;

    /**
     * The “Execute” item and icon.
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;system-run&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_EXECUTE: string;

    /**
     * The “File” item and icon.
     * 
     * Since 3.0, this item has a label, before it only had an icon.
     * @since 2.6
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;text-x-generic&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_FILE: string;

    /**
     * The “Find” item and icon.
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;edit-find&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_FIND: string;

    /**
     * The “Find and Replace” item and icon.
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;edit-find-replace&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_FIND_AND_REPLACE: string;

    /**
     * The “Floppy” item and icon.
     * @deprecated since 3.10
     */
    const STOCK_FLOPPY: string;

    /**
     * The “Fullscreen” item and icon.
     * @since 2.8
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;view-fullscreen&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_FULLSCREEN: string;

    /**
     * The “Bottom” item and icon.
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;go-bottom&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_GOTO_BOTTOM: string;

    /**
     * The “First” item and icon. The icon has an RTL variant.
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;go-first&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_GOTO_FIRST: string;

    /**
     * The “Last” item and icon. The icon has an RTL variant.
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;go-last&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_GOTO_LAST: string;

    /**
     * The “Top” item and icon.
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;go-top&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_GOTO_TOP: string;

    /**
     * The “Back” item and icon. The icon has an RTL variant.
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;go-previous&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_GO_BACK: string;

    /**
     * The “Down” item and icon.
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;go-down&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_GO_DOWN: string;

    /**
     * The “Forward” item and icon. The icon has an RTL variant.
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;go-next&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_GO_FORWARD: string;

    /**
     * The “Up” item and icon.
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;go-up&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_GO_UP: string;

    /**
     * The “Harddisk” item and icon.
     * @since 2.4
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;drive-harddisk&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_HARDDISK: string;

    /**
     * The “Help” item and icon.
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;help-browser&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_HELP: string;

    /**
     * The “Home” item and icon.
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;go-home&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_HOME: string;

    /**
     * The “Indent” item and icon. The icon has an RTL variant.
     * @since 2.4
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;format-indent-more&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_INDENT: string;

    /**
     * The “Index” item and icon.
     * @deprecated since 3.10
     */
    const STOCK_INDEX: string;

    /**
     * The “Info” item and icon.
     * @since 2.8
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;dialog-information&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_INFO: string;

    /**
     * The “Italic” item and icon.
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;format-text-italic&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_ITALIC: string;

    /**
     * The “Jump to” item and icon. The icon has an RTL variant.
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;go-jump&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_JUMP_TO: string;

    /**
     * The “Center” item and icon.
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;format-justify-center&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_JUSTIFY_CENTER: string;

    /**
     * The “Fill” item and icon.
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;format-justify-fill&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_JUSTIFY_FILL: string;

    /**
     * The “Left” item and icon.
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;format-justify-left&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_JUSTIFY_LEFT: string;

    /**
     * The “Right” item and icon.
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;format-justify-right&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_JUSTIFY_RIGHT: string;

    /**
     * The “Leave Fullscreen” item and icon.
     * @since 2.8
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;view-restore&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_LEAVE_FULLSCREEN: string;

    /**
     * The “Media Forward” item and icon. The icon has an RTL variant.
     * @since 2.6
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;media-seek-forward&quot; or the label &quot;_Forward&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_MEDIA_FORWARD: string;

    /**
     * The “Media Next” item and icon. The icon has an RTL variant.
     * @since 2.6
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;media-skip-forward&quot; or the label &quot;_Next&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_MEDIA_NEXT: string;

    /**
     * The “Media Pause” item and icon.
     * @since 2.6
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;media-playback-pause&quot; or the label &quot;P_ause&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_MEDIA_PAUSE: string;

    /**
     * The “Media Play” item and icon. The icon has an RTL variant.
     * @since 2.6
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;media-playback-start&quot; or the label &quot;_Play&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_MEDIA_PLAY: string;

    /**
     * The “Media Previous” item and icon. The icon has an RTL variant.
     * @since 2.6
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;media-skip-backward&quot; or the label &quot;Pre_vious&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_MEDIA_PREVIOUS: string;

    /**
     * The “Media Record” item and icon.
     * @since 2.6
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;media-record&quot; or the label &quot;_Record&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_MEDIA_RECORD: string;

    /**
     * The “Media Rewind” item and icon. The icon has an RTL variant.
     * @since 2.6
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;media-seek-backward&quot; or the label &quot;R_ewind&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_MEDIA_REWIND: string;

    /**
     * The “Media Stop” item and icon.
     * @since 2.6
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;media-playback-stop&quot; or the label &quot;_Stop&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_MEDIA_STOP: string;

    /**
     * The “Missing image” icon.
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;image-missing&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_MISSING_IMAGE: string;

    /**
     * The “Network” item and icon.
     * @since 2.4
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;network-workgroup&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_NETWORK: string;

    /**
     * The “New” item and icon.
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;document-new&quot; or the label &quot;_New&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_NEW: string;

    /**
     * The “No” item and icon.
     * @deprecated since 3.10
     */
    const STOCK_NO: string;

    /**
     * The “OK” item and icon.
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Do not use an icon. Use label &quot;_OK&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_OK: string;

    /**
     * The “Open” item and icon.
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;document-open&quot; or the label &quot;_Open&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_OPEN: string;

    /**
     * The “Landscape Orientation” item and icon.
     * @since 2.10
     * @deprecated since 3.10
     */
    const STOCK_ORIENTATION_LANDSCAPE: string;

    /**
     * The “Portrait Orientation” item and icon.
     * @since 2.10
     * @deprecated since 3.10
     */
    const STOCK_ORIENTATION_PORTRAIT: string;

    /**
     * The “Reverse Landscape Orientation” item and icon.
     * @since 2.10
     * @deprecated since 3.10
     */
    const STOCK_ORIENTATION_REVERSE_LANDSCAPE: string;

    /**
     * The “Reverse Portrait Orientation” item and icon.
     * @since 2.10
     * @deprecated since 3.10
     */
    const STOCK_ORIENTATION_REVERSE_PORTRAIT: string;

    /**
     * The “Page Setup” item and icon.
     * @since 2.14
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;document-page-setup&quot; or the label &quot;Page Set_up&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_PAGE_SETUP: string;

    /**
     * The “Paste” item and icon.
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;edit-paste&quot; or the label &quot;_Paste&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_PASTE: string;

    /**
     * The “Preferences” item and icon.
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;preferences-system&quot; or the label &quot;_Preferences&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_PREFERENCES: string;

    /**
     * The “Print” item and icon.
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;document-print&quot; or the label &quot;_Print&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_PRINT: string;

    /**
     * The “Print Error” icon.
     * @since 2.14
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;printer-error&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_PRINT_ERROR: string;

    /**
     * The “Print Paused” icon.
     * @since 2.14
     * @deprecated since 3.10
     */
    const STOCK_PRINT_PAUSED: string;

    /**
     * The “Print Preview” item and icon.
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use label &quot;Pre_view&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_PRINT_PREVIEW: string;

    /**
     * The “Print Report” icon.
     * @since 2.14
     * @deprecated since 3.10
     */
    const STOCK_PRINT_REPORT: string;

    /**
     * The “Print Warning” icon.
     * @since 2.14
     * @deprecated since 3.10
     */
    const STOCK_PRINT_WARNING: string;

    /**
     * The “Properties” item and icon.
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;document-properties&quot; or the label &quot;_Properties&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_PROPERTIES: string;

    /**
     * The “Quit” item and icon.
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;application-exit&quot; or the label &quot;_Quit&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_QUIT: string;

    /**
     * The “Redo” item and icon. The icon has an RTL variant.
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;edit-redo&quot; or the label &quot;_Redo&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_REDO: string;

    /**
     * The “Refresh” item and icon.
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;view-refresh&quot; or the label &quot;_Refresh&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_REFRESH: string;

    /**
     * The “Remove” item and icon.
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;list-remove&quot; or the label &quot;_Remove&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_REMOVE: string;

    /**
     * The “Revert” item and icon. The icon has an RTL variant.
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;document-revert&quot; or the label &quot;_Revert&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_REVERT_TO_SAVED: string;

    /**
     * The “Save” item and icon.
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;document-save&quot; or the label &quot;_Save&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_SAVE: string;

    /**
     * The “Save As” item and icon.
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;document-save-as&quot; or the label &quot;Save _As&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_SAVE_AS: string;

    /**
     * The “Select All” item and icon.
     * @since 2.10
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;edit-select-all&quot; or the label &quot;Select _All&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_SELECT_ALL: string;

    /**
     * The “Color” item and icon.
     * @deprecated since 3.10
     */
    const STOCK_SELECT_COLOR: string;

    /**
     * The “Font” item and icon.
     * @deprecated since 3.10
     */
    const STOCK_SELECT_FONT: string;

    /**
     * The “Ascending” item and icon.
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;view-sort-ascending&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_SORT_ASCENDING: string;

    /**
     * The “Descending” item and icon.
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;view-sort-descending&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_SORT_DESCENDING: string;

    /**
     * The “Spell Check” item and icon.
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;tools-check-spelling&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_SPELL_CHECK: string;

    /**
     * The “Stop” item and icon.
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;process-stop&quot; or the label &quot;_Stop&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_STOP: string;

    /**
     * The “Strikethrough” item and icon.
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;format-text-strikethrough&quot; or the label &quot;_Strikethrough&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_STRIKETHROUGH: string;

    /**
     * The “Undelete” item and icon. The icon has an RTL variant.
     * @deprecated since 3.10
     */
    const STOCK_UNDELETE: string;

    /**
     * The “Underline” item and icon.
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;format-text-underline&quot; or the label &quot;_Underline&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_UNDERLINE: string;

    /**
     * The “Undo” item and icon. The icon has an RTL variant.
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;edit-undo&quot; or the label &quot;_Undo&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_UNDO: string;

    /**
     * The “Unindent” item and icon. The icon has an RTL variant.
     * @since 2.4
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;format-indent-less&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_UNINDENT: string;

    /**
     * The “Yes” item and icon.
     * @deprecated since 3.10
     */
    const STOCK_YES: string;

    /**
     * The “Zoom 100%” item and icon.
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;zoom-original&quot; or the label &quot;_Normal Size&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_ZOOM_100: string;

    /**
     * The “Zoom to Fit” item and icon.
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;zoom-fit-best&quot; or the label &quot;Best _Fit&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_ZOOM_FIT: string;

    /**
     * The “Zoom In” item and icon.
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;zoom-in&quot; or the label &quot;Zoom _In&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_ZOOM_IN: string;

    /**
     * The “Zoom Out” item and icon.
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use named icon &quot;zoom-out&quot; or the label &quot;Zoom _Out&quot;.
     */
    const STOCK_ZOOM_OUT: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class to match an accelerator.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_ACCELERATOR: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class used when rendering an arrow element.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_ARROW: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class to match the window background.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_BACKGROUND: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class to indicate an area at the bottom of a widget.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_BOTTOM: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class to match buttons.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_BUTTON: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class to match calendars.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_CALENDAR: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class to match content rendered in cell views.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_CELL: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class to match check boxes.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_CHECK: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class to match combobox entries.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_COMBOBOX_ENTRY: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class to match context menus.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_CONTEXT_MENU: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class that gets added to windows which have client-side decorations.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     * @since 3.14
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_CSD: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class used when rendering a drag handle for
     * text selection.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_CURSOR_HANDLE: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class to match the default widget.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_DEFAULT: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class used when an action (usually a button) is
     * one that is expected to remove or destroy something visible
     * to the user.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     * @since 3.12
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_DESTRUCTIVE_ACTION: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class to match dimmed labels.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_DIM_LABEL: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class for a drag-and-drop indicator.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_DND: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class defining a dock area.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_DOCK: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class to match text entries.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_ENTRY: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class for an area displaying an error message,
     * such as those in infobars.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_ERROR: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class defining an expander, such as those in treeviews.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_EXPANDER: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class that is added when widgets that usually have
     * a frame or border (like buttons or entries) should appear
     * without it.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     * @since 3.14
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_FLAT: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class defining a frame delimiting content, such as
     * {@link Gtk.Frame} or the scrolled window frame around the
     * scrollable area.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_FRAME: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class defining a resize grip.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_GRIP: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class to match a header element.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_HEADER: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class defining a highlighted area, such as headings in
     * assistants and calendars.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_HIGHLIGHT: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class for horizontally layered widgets.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_HORIZONTAL: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class defining an image, such as the icon in an entry.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_IMAGE: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class for an area displaying an informational message,
     * such as those in infobars.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_INFO: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class to match inline toolbars.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_INLINE_TOOLBAR: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class used when rendering a drag handle for
     * the insertion cursor position.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_INSERTION_CURSOR: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class to match labels.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     * @since 3.16
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_LABEL: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class to indicate an area at the left of a widget.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_LEFT: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class used when rendering a level indicator, such
     * as a battery charge level, or a password strength.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_LEVEL_BAR: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class to match a linked area, such as a box containing buttons
     * belonging to the same control.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_LINKED: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class to match lists.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_LIST: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class to match list rows.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_LIST_ROW: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class defining marks in a widget, such as in scales.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_MARK: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class to match menus.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_MENU: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class to menubars.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_MENUBAR: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class to match menu items.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_MENUITEM: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class that is added to message dialogs.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     * @since 3.14
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_MESSAGE_DIALOG: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class that is added to text view that should use
     * a monospace font.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     * @since 3.16
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_MONOSPACE: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class used when an element needs the user attention,
     * for instance a button in a stack switcher corresponding to
     * a hidden page that changed state.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     * @since 3.12
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_NEEDS_ATTENTION: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class defining a notebook.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_NOTEBOOK: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class used when rendering an OSD (On Screen Display) element,
     * on top of another container.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_OSD: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class that is added on the visual hints that happen
     * when scrolling is attempted past the limits of a scrollable
     * area.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     * @since 3.14
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_OVERSHOOT: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class for a pane separator, such as those in {@link Gtk.Paned}.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_PANE_SEPARATOR: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class that is added to areas that should look like paper.
     * 
     * This is used in print previews and themes are encouraged to
     * style it as black text on white background.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     * @since 3.16
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_PAPER: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class that matches popovers.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     * @since 3.14
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_POPOVER: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class that is added to the toplevel windows used for menus.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     * @since 3.14
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_POPUP: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class to match primary toolbars.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_PRIMARY_TOOLBAR: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class to use when rendering activity as a progressbar.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_PROGRESSBAR: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class to use when rendering a pulse in an indeterminate progress bar.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_PULSE: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class for an area displaying a question to the user,
     * such as those in infobars.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_QUESTION: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class to match radio buttons.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_RADIO: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class to match a raised control, such as a raised
     * button on a toolbar.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_RAISED: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class used to indicate a read-only state.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_READ_ONLY: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class to indicate an area at the right of a widget.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_RIGHT: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class to match the rubberband selection rectangle.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_RUBBERBAND: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class to match scale widgets.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_SCALE: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class to match scale widgets with marks attached,
     * all the marks are above for horizontal {@link Gtk.Scale}.
     * left for vertical {@link Gtk.Scale}.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_SCALE_HAS_MARKS_ABOVE: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class to match scale widgets with marks attached,
     * all the marks are below for horizontal {@link Gtk.Scale},
     * right for vertical {@link Gtk.Scale}.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_SCALE_HAS_MARKS_BELOW: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class to match scrollbars.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_SCROLLBAR: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class to match the junction area between an horizontal
     * and vertical scrollbar, when they’re both shown.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_SCROLLBARS_JUNCTION: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class for a separator.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_SEPARATOR: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class defining a sidebar, such as the left side in
     * a file chooser.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_SIDEBAR: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class to match sliders.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_SLIDER: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class defining an spinbutton.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_SPINBUTTON: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class to use when rendering activity as a “spinner”.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_SPINNER: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class to match statusbars.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     * @since 3.16
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_STATUSBAR: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class used for the subtitle label in a titlebar in
     * a toplevel window.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     * @since 3.14
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_SUBTITLE: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class used when an action (usually a button) is the
     * primary suggested action in a specific context.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     * @since 3.12
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_SUGGESTED_ACTION: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class used for the title label in a titlebar in
     * a toplevel window.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     * @since 3.14
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_TITLE: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class used when rendering a titlebar in a toplevel window.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_TITLEBAR: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class to match toolbars.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_TOOLBAR: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class to match tooltip windows.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_TOOLTIP: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class to indicate an area at the top of a widget.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_TOP: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class for touch selection popups on entries
     * and text views.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     * @since 3.16
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_TOUCH_SELECTION: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class to match troughs, as in scrollbars and progressbars.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_TROUGH: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class that is added on the visual hints that happen
     * where content is 'scrolled off' and can be made visible
     * by scrolling.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     * @since 3.16
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_UNDERSHOOT: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class for vertically layered widgets.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_VERTICAL: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class defining a view, such as iconviews or treeviews.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_VIEW: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class for an area displaying a warning message,
     * such as those in infobars.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_WARNING: string;

    /**
     * A CSS class to indicate that a UI element should be 'wide'.
     * Used by {@link Gtk.Paned}.
     * 
     * Refer to individual widget documentation for used style classes.
     * @since 3.16
     */
    const STYLE_CLASS_WIDE: string;

    /**
     * A property holding the background color of rendered elements as a {@link Gdk.RGBA}.
     */
    const STYLE_PROPERTY_BACKGROUND_COLOR: string;

    /**
     * A property holding the element’s background as a {@link cairo.Pattern}.
     */
    const STYLE_PROPERTY_BACKGROUND_IMAGE: string;

    /**
     * A property holding the element’s border color as a {@link Gdk.RGBA}.
     */
    const STYLE_PROPERTY_BORDER_COLOR: string;

    /**
     * A property holding the rendered element’s border radius in pixels as a `gint`.
     */
    const STYLE_PROPERTY_BORDER_RADIUS: string;

    /**
     * A property holding the element’s border style as a {@link Gtk.BorderStyle}.
     */
    const STYLE_PROPERTY_BORDER_STYLE: string;

    /**
     * A property holding the rendered element’s border width in pixels as
     * a {@link Gtk.Border}. The border is the intermediary spacing property of the
     * padding/border/margin series.
     * 
     * `gtk_render_frame()` uses this property to find out the frame line width,
     * so `GtkWidgets` rendering frames may need to add up this padding when
     * requesting size
     */
    const STYLE_PROPERTY_BORDER_WIDTH: string;

    /**
     * A property holding the foreground color of rendered elements as a {@link Gdk.RGBA}.
     */
    const STYLE_PROPERTY_COLOR: string;

    /**
     * A property holding the font properties used when rendering text
     * as a {@link Pango.FontDescription}.
     */
    const STYLE_PROPERTY_FONT: string;

    /**
     * A property holding the rendered element’s margin as a {@link Gtk.Border}. The
     * margin is defined as the spacing between the border of the element
     * and its surrounding elements. It is external to {@link Gtk.Widget}'s
     * size allocations, and the most external spacing property of the
     * padding/border/margin series.
     */
    const STYLE_PROPERTY_MARGIN: string;

    /**
     * A property holding the rendered element’s padding as a {@link Gtk.Border}. The
     * padding is defined as the spacing between the inner part of the element border
     * and its child. It’s the innermost spacing property of the padding/border/margin
     * series.
     */
    const STYLE_PROPERTY_PADDING: string;

    /**
     * A priority that can be used when adding a {@link Gtk.StyleProvider}
     * for application-specific style information.
     */
    const STYLE_PROVIDER_PRIORITY_APPLICATION: number;

    /**
     * The priority used for default style information
     * that is used in the absence of themes.
     * 
     * Note that this is not very useful for providing default
     * styling for custom style classes - themes are likely to
     * override styling provided at this priority with
     * catch-all `* {...}` rules.
     */
    const STYLE_PROVIDER_PRIORITY_FALLBACK: number;

    /**
     * The priority used for style information provided
     * via {@link Gtk.Settings}.
     * 
     * This priority is higher than #GTK_STYLE_PROVIDER_PRIORITY_THEME
     * to let settings override themes.
     */
    const STYLE_PROVIDER_PRIORITY_SETTINGS: number;

    /**
     * The priority used for style information provided
     * by themes.
     */
    const STYLE_PROVIDER_PRIORITY_THEME: number;

    /**
     * The priority used for the style information from
     * `XDG_CONFIG_HOME/gtk-3.0/gtk.css`.
     * 
     * You should not use priorities higher than this, to
     * give the user the last word.
     */
    const STYLE_PROVIDER_PRIORITY_USER: number;

    /**
     * A widget region name to define a treeview column.
     * @deprecated since 3.20: Don't use regions.
     */
    const STYLE_REGION_COLUMN: string;

    /**
     * A widget region name to define a treeview column header.
     * @deprecated since 3.20: Don't use regions.
     */
    const STYLE_REGION_COLUMN_HEADER: string;

    /**
     * A widget region name to define a treeview row.
     * @deprecated since 3.20: Don't use regions.
     */
    const STYLE_REGION_ROW: string;

    /**
     * A widget region name to define a notebook tab.
     * @deprecated since 3.20: Don't use regions.
     */
    const STYLE_REGION_TAB: string;

    /**
     * The priority at which the text view validates onscreen lines
     * in an idle job in the background.
     */
    const TEXT_VIEW_PRIORITY_VALIDATE: number;

    /**
     * The GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID can be used to make a
     * {@link Gtk.TreeSortable} use the default sort function.
     * 
     * See also `gtk_tree_sortable_set_sort_column_id()`
     */
    const TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID: number;

    /**
     * The GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID can be used to make a
     * {@link Gtk.TreeSortable} use no sorting.
     * 
     * See also `gtk_tree_sortable_set_sort_column_id()`
     */
    const TREE_SORTABLE_UNSORTED_SORT_COLUMN_ID: number;

    /**
     * Finds the first accelerator in any {@link Gtk.AccelGroup} attached
     * to `object` that matches `accel_key` and `accel_mods`, and
     * activates that accelerator.
     * @param object the {@link GObject.Object}, usually a {@link Gtk.Window}, on which     to activate the accelerator
     * @param accel_key accelerator keyval from a key event
     * @param accel_mods keyboard state mask from a key event
     * @returns `true` if an accelerator was activated and handled     this keypress
     */
    function accel_groups_activate(object: GObject.Object, accel_key: number, accel_mods: Gdk.ModifierType): boolean;

    /**
     * Gets a list of all accel groups which are attached to `object`.
     * @param object a {@link GObject.Object}, usually a {@link Gtk.Window}
     * @returns a list of     all accel groups which are attached to `object`
     */
    function accel_groups_from_object(object: GObject.Object): AccelGroup[];

    /**
     * Gets the modifier mask.
     * 
     * The modifier mask determines which modifiers are considered significant
     * for keyboard accelerators. See `gtk_accelerator_set_default_mod_mask()`.
     * @returns the default accelerator modifier mask
     */
    function accelerator_get_default_mod_mask(): Gdk.ModifierType;

    /**
     * Converts an accelerator keyval and modifier mask into a string
     * which can be used to represent the accelerator to the user.
     * @param accelerator_key accelerator keyval
     * @param accelerator_mods accelerator modifier mask
     * @returns a newly-allocated string representing the accelerator.
     * @since 2.6
     */
    function accelerator_get_label(accelerator_key: number, accelerator_mods: Gdk.ModifierType): string;

    /**
     * Converts an accelerator keyval and modifier mask
     * into a (possibly translated) string that can be displayed to
     * a user, similarly to `gtk_accelerator_get_label()`, but handling
     * keycodes.
     * 
     * This is only useful for system-level components, applications
     * should use `gtk_accelerator_parse()` instead.
     * @param display a {@link Gdk.Display} or `null` to use the default display
     * @param accelerator_key accelerator keyval
     * @param keycode accelerator keycode
     * @param accelerator_mods accelerator modifier mask
     * @returns a newly-allocated string representing the accelerator.
     * @since 3.4
     */
    function accelerator_get_label_with_keycode(display: Gdk.Display | null, accelerator_key: number, keycode: number, accelerator_mods: Gdk.ModifierType): string;

    /**
     * Converts an accelerator keyval and modifier mask into a string
     * parseable by `gtk_accelerator_parse()`. For example, if you pass in
     * #GDK_KEY_q and #GDK_CONTROL_MASK, this function returns “<Control>q”.
     * 
     * If you need to display accelerators in the user interface,
     * see `gtk_accelerator_get_label()`.
     * @param accelerator_key accelerator keyval
     * @param accelerator_mods accelerator modifier mask
     * @returns a newly-allocated accelerator name
     */
    function accelerator_name(accelerator_key: number, accelerator_mods: Gdk.ModifierType): string;

    /**
     * Converts an accelerator keyval and modifier mask
     * into a string parseable by `gtk_accelerator_parse_with_keycode()`,
     * similarly to `gtk_accelerator_name()` but handling keycodes.
     * This is only useful for system-level components, applications
     * should use `gtk_accelerator_parse()` instead.
     * @param display a {@link Gdk.Display} or `null` to use the default display
     * @param accelerator_key accelerator keyval
     * @param keycode accelerator keycode
     * @param accelerator_mods accelerator modifier mask
     * @returns a newly allocated accelerator name.
     * @since 3.4
     */
    function accelerator_name_with_keycode(display: Gdk.Display | null, accelerator_key: number, keycode: number, accelerator_mods: Gdk.ModifierType): string;

    /**
     * Parses a string representing an accelerator. The format looks like
     * `<Control>a` or `<Shift><Alt>F1` or `<Release>z` (the last one is
     * for key release).
     * 
     * The parser is fairly liberal and allows lower or upper case, and also
     * abbreviations such as `<Ctl>` and `<Ctrl>`. Key names are parsed using
     * `gdk_keyval_from_name()`. For character keys the name is not the symbol,
     * but the lowercase name, e.g. one would use `<Ctrl>minus` instead of
     * `<Ctrl>-`.
     * 
     * If the parse fails, `accelerator_key` and `accelerator_mods` will
     * be set to 0 (zero).
     * @param accelerator string representing an accelerator
     */
    function accelerator_parse(accelerator: string): [number, Gdk.ModifierType | null];

    /**
     * Parses a string representing an accelerator, similarly to
     * `gtk_accelerator_parse()` but handles keycodes as well. This is only
     * useful for system-level components, applications should use
     * `gtk_accelerator_parse()` instead.
     * 
     * If `accelerator_codes` is given and the result stored in it is non-`null`,
     * the result must be freed with `g_free()`.
     * 
     * If a keycode is present in the accelerator and no `accelerator_codes`
     * is given, the parse will fail.
     * 
     * If the parse fails, `accelerator_key`, `accelerator_mods` and
     * `accelerator_codes` will be set to 0 (zero).
     * @param accelerator string representing an accelerator
     * @since 3.4
     */
    function accelerator_parse_with_keycode(accelerator: string): [number, number[] | null, Gdk.ModifierType | null];

    /**
     * Sets the modifiers that will be considered significant for keyboard
     * accelerators. The default mod mask depends on the GDK backend in use,
     * but will typically include #GDK_CONTROL_MASK | #GDK_SHIFT_MASK |
     * #GDK_MOD1_MASK | #GDK_SUPER_MASK | #GDK_HYPER_MASK | #GDK_META_MASK.
     * In other words, Control, Shift, Alt, Super, Hyper and Meta. Other
     * modifiers will by default be ignored by {@link Gtk.AccelGroup}.
     * 
     * You must include at least the three modifiers Control, Shift
     * and Alt in any value you pass to this function.
     * 
     * The default mod mask should be changed on application startup,
     * before using any accelerator groups.
     * @param default_mod_mask accelerator modifier mask
     */
    function accelerator_set_default_mod_mask(default_mod_mask: Gdk.ModifierType): void;

    /**
     * Determines whether a given keyval and modifier mask constitute
     * a valid keyboard accelerator. For example, the #GDK_KEY_a keyval
     * plus #GDK_CONTROL_MASK is valid - this is a “Ctrl+a” accelerator.
     * But, you can't, for instance, use the #GDK_KEY_Control_L keyval
     * as an accelerator.
     * @param keyval a GDK keyval
     * @param modifiers modifier mask
     * @returns `true` if the accelerator is valid
     */
    function accelerator_valid(keyval: number, modifiers: Gdk.ModifierType): boolean;

    /**
     * Returns `true` if dialogs are expected to use an alternative
     * button order on the screen `screen`. See
     * `gtk_dialog_set_alternative_button_order()` for more details
     * about alternative button order.
     * 
     * If you need to use this function, you should probably connect
     * to the ::notify:gtk-alternative-button-order signal on the
     * {@link Gtk.Settings} object associated to `screen`, in order to be
     * notified if the button order setting changes.
     * @param screen a {@link Gdk.Screen}, or `null` to use the default screen
     * @returns Whether the alternative button order should be used
     * @since 2.6
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Deprecated
     */
    function alternative_dialog_button_order(screen: Gdk.Screen | null): boolean;

    /**
     * Parses a signal description from `signal_desc` and incorporates
     * it into `binding_set`.
     * 
     * Signal descriptions may either bind a key combination to
     * one or more signals:
     * 
     * ```
     *   bind "key" {
     *     "signalname" (param, ...)
     *     ...
     *   }
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * Or they may also unbind a key combination:
     * 
     * ```
     *   unbind "key"
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * Key combinations must be in a format that can be parsed by
     * `gtk_accelerator_parse()`.
     * @param binding_set a {@link Gtk.BindingSet}
     * @param signal_desc a signal description
     * @returns {@link GLib.TokenType.NONE} if the signal was successfully parsed and added,     the expected token otherwise
     * @since 3.0
     */
    function binding_entry_add_signal_from_string(binding_set: BindingSet, signal_desc: string): GLib.TokenType;

    /**
     * Override or install a new key binding for `keyval` with `modifiers` on
     * `binding_set`.
     * @param binding_set a {@link Gtk.BindingSet} to add a signal to
     * @param keyval key value
     * @param modifiers key modifier
     * @param signal_name signal name to be bound
     * @param binding_args list of {@link Gtk.BindingArg} signal arguments
     */
    function binding_entry_add_signall(binding_set: BindingSet, keyval: number, modifiers: Gdk.ModifierType, signal_name: string, binding_args: BindingArg[]): void;

    /**
     * Remove a binding previously installed via
     * `gtk_binding_entry_add_signal()` on `binding_set`.
     * @param binding_set a {@link Gtk.BindingSet} to remove an entry of
     * @param keyval key value of binding to remove
     * @param modifiers key modifier of binding to remove
     */
    function binding_entry_remove(binding_set: BindingSet, keyval: number, modifiers: Gdk.ModifierType): void;

    /**
     * Install a binding on `binding_set` which causes key lookups
     * to be aborted, to prevent bindings from lower priority sets
     * to be activated.
     * @param binding_set a {@link Gtk.BindingSet} to skip an entry of
     * @param keyval key value of binding to skip
     * @param modifiers key modifier of binding to skip
     * @since 2.12
     */
    function binding_entry_skip(binding_set: BindingSet, keyval: number, modifiers: Gdk.ModifierType): void;

    /**
     * Find a binding set by its globally unique name.
     * 
     * The `set_name` can either be a name used for `gtk_binding_set_new()`
     * or the type name of a class used in `gtk_binding_set_by_class()`.
     * @param set_name unique binding set name
     * @returns `null` or the specified binding set
     */
    function binding_set_find(set_name: string): BindingSet | null;

    /**
     * Find a key binding matching `keyval` and `modifiers` and activate the
     * binding on `object`.
     * @param object object to activate when binding found
     * @param keyval key value of the binding
     * @param modifiers key modifier of the binding
     * @returns `true` if a binding was found and activated
     */
    function bindings_activate(object: GObject.Object, keyval: number, modifiers: Gdk.ModifierType): boolean;

    /**
     * Looks up key bindings for `object` to find one matching
     * `event`, and if one was found, activate it.
     * @param object a {@link GObject.Object} (generally must be a widget)
     * @param event a {@link Gdk.EventKey}
     * @returns `true` if a matching key binding was found
     * @since 2.4
     */
    function bindings_activate_event(object: GObject.Object, event: Gdk.EventKey): boolean;

    function builder_error_quark(): GLib.Quark;

    /**
     * This function is supposed to be called in {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.draw | Gtk.Widget::draw}
     * implementations for widgets that support multiple windows.
     * `cr` must be untransformed from invoking of the draw function.
     * This function will return `true` if the contents of the given
     * `window` are supposed to be drawn and `false` otherwise. Note
     * that when the drawing was not initiated by the windowing
     * system this function will return `true` for all windows, so
     * you need to draw the bottommost window first. Also, do not
     * use “else if” statements to check which window should be drawn.
     * @param cr a cairo context
     * @param window the window to check. `window` may not be an input-only          window.
     * @returns `true` if `window` should be drawn
     * @since 3.0
     */
    function cairo_should_draw_window(cr: cairo.Context, window: Gdk.Window): boolean;

    /**
     * Transforms the given cairo context `cr` that from `widget`-relative
     * coordinates to `window`-relative coordinates.
     * If the `widget`’s window is not an ancestor of `window`, no
     * modification will be applied.
     * 
     * This is the inverse to the transformation GTK applies when
     * preparing an expose event to be emitted with the {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.draw | Gtk.Widget::draw}
     * signal. It is intended to help porting multiwindow widgets from
     * GTK+ 2 to the rendering architecture of GTK+ 3.
     * @param cr the cairo context to transform
     * @param widget the widget the context is currently centered for
     * @param window the window to transform the context to
     * @since 3.0
     */
    function cairo_transform_to_window(cr: cairo.Context, widget: Widget, window: Gdk.Window): void;

    /**
     * Checks that the GTK+ library in use is compatible with the
     * given version. Generally you would pass in the constants
     * #GTK_MAJOR_VERSION, #GTK_MINOR_VERSION, #GTK_MICRO_VERSION
     * as the three arguments to this function; that produces
     * a check that the library in use is compatible with
     * the version of GTK+ the application or module was compiled
     * against.
     * 
     * Compatibility is defined by two things: first the version
     * of the running library is newer than the version
     * `required_major`.required_minor.`required_micro`. Second
     * the running library must be binary compatible with the
     * version `required_major`.required_minor.`required_micro`
     * (same major version.)
     * 
     * This function is primarily for GTK+ modules; the module
     * can call this function to check that it wasn’t loaded
     * into an incompatible version of GTK+. However, such a
     * check isn’t completely reliable, since the module may be
     * linked against an old version of GTK+ and calling the
     * old version of `gtk_check_version()`, but still get loaded
     * into an application using a newer version of GTK+.
     * @param required_major the required major version
     * @param required_minor the required minor version
     * @param required_micro the required micro version
     * @returns `null` if the GTK+ library is compatible with the   given version, or a string describing the version mismatch.   The returned string is owned by GTK+ and should not be modified   or freed.
     */
    function check_version(required_major: number, required_minor: number, required_micro: number): string | null;

    function css_provider_error_quark(): GLib.Quark;

    /**
     * Adds a GTK+ grab on `device`, so all the events on `device` and its
     * associated pointer or keyboard (if any) are delivered to `widget`.
     * If the `block_others` parameter is `true`, any other devices will be
     * unable to interact with `widget` during the grab.
     * @param widget a {@link Gtk.Widget}
     * @param device a {@link Gdk.Device} to grab on.
     * @param block_others `true` to prevent other devices to interact with `widget`.
     * @since 3.0
     */
    function device_grab_add(widget: Widget, device: Gdk.Device, block_others: boolean): void;

    /**
     * Removes a device grab from the given widget.
     * 
     * You have to pair calls to `gtk_device_grab_add()` and
     * `gtk_device_grab_remove()`.
     * @param widget a {@link Gtk.Widget}
     * @param device a {@link Gdk.Device}
     * @since 3.0
     */
    function device_grab_remove(widget: Widget, device: Gdk.Device): void;

    /**
     * Prevents `gtk_init()`, `gtk_init_check()`, `gtk_init_with_args()` and
     * `gtk_parse_args()` from automatically
     * calling `setlocale (LC_ALL, "")`. You would
     * want to use this function if you wanted to set the locale for
     * your program to something other than the user’s locale, or if
     * you wanted to set different values for different locale categories.
     * 
     * Most programs should not need to call this function.
     */
    function disable_setlocale(): void;

    /**
     * Distributes `extra_space` to child `sizes` by bringing smaller
     * children up to natural size first.
     * 
     * The remaining space will be added to the `minimum_size` member of the
     * GtkRequestedSize struct. If all sizes reach their natural size then
     * the remaining space is returned.
     * @param extra_space Extra space to redistribute among children after subtracting               minimum sizes and any child padding from the overall allocation
     * @param n_requested_sizes Number of requests to fit into the allocation
     * @param sizes An array of structs with a client pointer and a minimum/natural size         in the orientation of the allocation.
     * @returns The remainder of `extra_space` after redistributing space to `sizes`.
     */
    function distribute_natural_allocation(extra_space: number, n_requested_sizes: number, sizes: RequestedSize): number;

    /**
     * Cancels an ongoing drag operation on the source side.
     * 
     * If you want to be able to cancel a drag operation in this way,
     * you need to keep a pointer to the drag context, either from an
     * explicit call to `gtk_drag_begin_with_coordinates()`, or by
     * connecting to {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.drag_begin | Gtk.Widget::drag-begin}.
     * 
     * If `context` does not refer to an ongoing drag operation, this
     * function does nothing.
     * 
     * If a drag is cancelled in this way, the `result` argument of
     * {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.drag_failed | Gtk.Widget::drag-failed} is set to `GTK_DRAG_RESULT_ERROR`.
     * @param context a {@link Gdk.DragContext}, as e.g. returned by `gtk_drag_begin_with_coordinates()`
     * @since 3.16
     */
    function drag_cancel(context: Gdk.DragContext): void;

    /**
     * Informs the drag source that the drop is finished, and
     * that the data of the drag will no longer be required.
     * @param context the drag context
     * @param success a flag indicating whether the drop was successful
     * @param del a flag indicating whether the source should delete the   original data. (This should be `true` for a move)
     * @param time_ the timestamp from the {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.drag_drop | Gtk.Widget::drag-drop} signal
     */
    function drag_finish(context: Gdk.DragContext, success: boolean, del: boolean, time_: number): void;

    /**
     * Determines the source widget for a drag.
     * @param context a (destination side) drag context
     * @returns if the drag is occurring     within a single application, a pointer to the source widget.     Otherwise, `null`.
     */
    function drag_get_source_widget(context: Gdk.DragContext): Widget | null;

    /**
     * Sets the icon for a particular drag to the default
     * icon.
     * @param context the context for a drag (This must be called     with a  context for the source side of a drag)
     */
    function drag_set_icon_default(context: Gdk.DragContext): void;

    /**
     * Sets the icon for a given drag from the given `icon`.
     * See the documentation for `gtk_drag_set_icon_name()`
     * for more details about using icons in drag and drop.
     * @param context the context for a drag (This must be called     with a context for the source side of a drag)
     * @param icon a {@link Gio.Icon}
     * @param hot_x the X offset of the hotspot within the icon
     * @param hot_y the Y offset of the hotspot within the icon
     * @since 3.2
     */
    function drag_set_icon_gicon(context: Gdk.DragContext, icon: Gio.Icon, hot_x: number, hot_y: number): void;

    /**
     * Sets the icon for a given drag from a named themed icon. See
     * the docs for {@link Gtk.IconTheme} for more details. Note that the
     * size of the icon depends on the icon theme (the icon is
     * loaded at the symbolic size #GTK_ICON_SIZE_DND), thus
     * `hot_x` and `hot_y` have to be used with care.
     * @param context the context for a drag (This must be called     with a context for the source side of a drag)
     * @param icon_name name of icon to use
     * @param hot_x the X offset of the hotspot within the icon
     * @param hot_y the Y offset of the hotspot within the icon
     * @since 2.8
     */
    function drag_set_icon_name(context: Gdk.DragContext, icon_name: string, hot_x: number, hot_y: number): void;

    /**
     * Sets `pixbuf` as the icon for a given drag.
     * @param context the context for a drag (This must be called            with a  context for the source side of a drag)
     * @param pixbuf the {@link GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf} to use as the drag icon
     * @param hot_x the X offset within `widget` of the hotspot
     * @param hot_y the Y offset within `widget` of the hotspot
     */
    function drag_set_icon_pixbuf(context: Gdk.DragContext, pixbuf: GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf, hot_x: number, hot_y: number): void;

    /**
     * Sets the icon for a given drag from a stock ID.
     * @param context the context for a drag (This must be called            with a  context for the source side of a drag)
     * @param stock_id the ID of the stock icon to use for the drag
     * @param hot_x the X offset within the icon of the hotspot
     * @param hot_y the Y offset within the icon of the hotspot
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use `gtk_drag_set_icon_name()` instead.
     */
    function drag_set_icon_stock(context: Gdk.DragContext, stock_id: string, hot_x: number, hot_y: number): void;

    /**
     * Sets `surface` as the icon for a given drag. GTK+ retains
     * references for the arguments, and will release them when
     * they are no longer needed.
     * 
     * To position the surface relative to the mouse, use
     * `cairo_surface_set_device_offset()` on `surface`. The mouse
     * cursor will be positioned at the (0,0) coordinate of the
     * surface.
     * @param context the context for a drag (This must be called     with a context for the source side of a drag)
     * @param surface the surface to use as icon
     */
    function drag_set_icon_surface(context: Gdk.DragContext, surface: cairo.Surface): void;

    /**
     * Changes the icon for drag operation to a given widget.
     * GTK+ will not destroy the widget, so if you don’t want
     * it to persist, you should connect to the “drag-end”
     * signal and destroy it yourself.
     * @param context the context for a drag. (This must be called           with a context for the source side of a drag)
     * @param widget a widget to use as an icon
     * @param hot_x the X offset within `widget` of the hotspot
     * @param hot_y the Y offset within `widget` of the hotspot
     */
    function drag_set_icon_widget(context: Gdk.DragContext, widget: Widget, hot_x: number, hot_y: number): void;

    /**
     * Draws a text caret on `cr` at `location`. This is not a style function
     * but merely a convenience function for drawing the standard cursor shape.
     * @param widget a {@link Gtk.Widget}
     * @param cr cairo context to draw to
     * @param location location where to draw the cursor (`location`->width is ignored)
     * @param is_primary if the cursor should be the primary cursor color.
     * @param direction whether the cursor is left-to-right or             right-to-left. Should never be #GTK_TEXT_DIR_NONE
     * @param draw_arrow `true` to draw a directional arrow on the        cursor. Should be `false` unless the cursor is split.
     * @since 3.0
     * @deprecated since 3.4: Use `gtk_render_insertion_cursor()` instead.
     */
    function draw_insertion_cursor(widget: Widget, cr: cairo.Context, location: Gdk.Rectangle, is_primary: boolean, direction: TextDirection, draw_arrow: boolean): void;

    /**
     * Checks if any events are pending.
     * 
     * This can be used to update the UI and invoke timeouts etc.
     * while doing some time intensive computation.
     * 
     * ## Updating the UI during a long computation
     * 
     * 
     * ```c
     *  // computation going on...
     * 
     *  while (gtk_events_pending ())
     *    gtk_main_iteration ();
     * 
     *  // ...computation continued
     * ```
     * 
     * @returns `true` if any events are pending, `false` otherwise
     */
    function events_pending(): boolean;

    /**
     * Analogical to `gtk_true()`, this function does nothing
     * but always returns `false`.
     * @returns `false`
     */
    function __false(): boolean;

    /**
     * Registers an error quark for {@link Gtk.FileChooser} if necessary.
     * @returns The error quark used for {@link Gtk.FileChooser} errors.
     * @since 2.4
     */
    function file_chooser_error_quark(): GLib.Quark;

    /**
     * Returns the binary age as passed to `libtool`
     * when building the GTK+ library the process is running against.
     * If `libtool` means nothing to you, don't
     * worry about it.
     * @returns the binary age of the GTK+ library
     * @since 3.0
     */
    function get_binary_age(): number;

    /**
     * Obtains a copy of the event currently being processed by GTK+.
     * 
     * For example, if you are handling a {@link Gtk.Button.SignalSignatures.clicked | Gtk.Button::clicked} signal,
     * the current event will be the {@link Gdk.EventButton} that triggered
     * the ::clicked signal.
     * @returns a copy of the current event, or     `null` if there is no current event. The returned event must be     freed with `gdk_event_free()`.
     */
    function get_current_event(): Gdk.Event | null;

    /**
     * If there is a current event and it has a device, return that
     * device, otherwise return `null`.
     * @returns a {@link Gdk.Device}, or `null`
     */
    function get_current_event_device(): Gdk.Device | null;

    /**
     * If there is a current event and it has a state field, place
     * that state field in `state` and return `true`, otherwise return
     * `false`.
     * @returns `true` if there was a current event and it     had a state field
     */
    function get_current_event_state(): [boolean, Gdk.ModifierType];

    /**
     * If there is a current event and it has a timestamp,
     * return that timestamp, otherwise return `GDK_CURRENT_TIME`.
     * @returns the timestamp from the current event,     or `GDK_CURRENT_TIME`.
     */
    function get_current_event_time(): number;

    /**
     * Returns the GTK+ debug flags.
     * 
     * This function is intended for GTK+ modules that want
     * to adjust their debug output based on GTK+ debug flags.
     * @returns the GTK+ debug flags.
     */
    function get_debug_flags(): number;

    /**
     * Returns the {@link Pango.Language} for the default language currently in
     * effect. (Note that this can change over the life of an
     * application.) The default language is derived from the current
     * locale. It determines, for example, whether GTK+ uses the
     * right-to-left or left-to-right text direction.
     * 
     * This function is equivalent to `pango_language_get_default()`.
     * See that function for details.
     * @returns the default language as a {@link Pango.Language},     must not be freed
     */
    function get_default_language(): Pango.Language;

    /**
     * If `event` is `null` or the event was not associated with any widget,
     * returns `null`, otherwise returns the widget that received the event
     * originally.
     * @param event a {@link Gdk.Event}
     * @returns the widget that originally     received `event`, or `null`
     */
    function get_event_widget(event: Gdk.Event): Widget | null;

    /**
     * Returns the interface age as passed to `libtool`
     * when building the GTK+ library the process is running against.
     * If `libtool` means nothing to you, don't
     * worry about it.
     * @returns the interface age of the GTK+ library
     * @since 3.0
     */
    function get_interface_age(): number;

    /**
     * Get the direction of the current locale. This is the expected
     * reading direction for text and UI.
     * 
     * This function depends on the current locale being set with
     * `setlocale()` and will default to setting the {@link Gtk.TextDirection.LTR}
     * direction otherwise. {@link Gtk.TextDirection.NONE} will never be returned.
     * 
     * GTK+ sets the default text direction according to the locale
     * during `gtk_init()`, and you should normally use
     * `gtk_widget_get_direction()` or `gtk_widget_get_default_direction()`
     * to obtain the current direcion.
     * 
     * This function is only needed rare cases when the locale is
     * changed after GTK+ has already been initialized. In this case,
     * you can use it to update the default text direction as follows:
     * 
     * 
     * ```c
     * setlocale (LC_ALL, new_locale);
     * direction = gtk_get_locale_direction ();
     * gtk_widget_set_default_direction (direction);
     * ```
     * 
     * @returns the {@link Gtk.TextDirection} of the current locale
     * @since 3.12
     */
    function get_locale_direction(): TextDirection;

    /**
     * Returns the major version number of the GTK+ library.
     * (e.g. in GTK+ version 3.1.5 this is 3.)
     * 
     * This function is in the library, so it represents the GTK+ library
     * your code is running against. Contrast with the #GTK_MAJOR_VERSION
     * macro, which represents the major version of the GTK+ headers you
     * have included when compiling your code.
     * @returns the major version number of the GTK+ library
     * @since 3.0
     */
    function get_major_version(): number;

    /**
     * Returns the micro version number of the GTK+ library.
     * (e.g. in GTK+ version 3.1.5 this is 5.)
     * 
     * This function is in the library, so it represents the GTK+ library
     * your code is are running against. Contrast with the
     * #GTK_MICRO_VERSION macro, which represents the micro version of the
     * GTK+ headers you have included when compiling your code.
     * @returns the micro version number of the GTK+ library
     * @since 3.0
     */
    function get_micro_version(): number;

    /**
     * Returns the minor version number of the GTK+ library.
     * (e.g. in GTK+ version 3.1.5 this is 1.)
     * 
     * This function is in the library, so it represents the GTK+ library
     * your code is are running against. Contrast with the
     * #GTK_MINOR_VERSION macro, which represents the minor version of the
     * GTK+ headers you have included when compiling your code.
     * @returns the minor version number of the GTK+ library
     * @since 3.0
     */
    function get_minor_version(): number;

    /**
     * Returns a {@link GLib.OptionGroup} for the commandline arguments recognized
     * by GTK+ and GDK.
     * 
     * You should add this group to your {@link GLib.OptionContext}
     * with `g_option_context_add_group()`, if you are using
     * `g_option_context_parse()` to parse your commandline arguments.
     * @param open_default_display whether to open the default display     when parsing the commandline arguments
     * @returns a {@link GLib.OptionGroup} for the commandline     arguments recognized by GTK+
     * @since 2.6
     */
    function get_option_group(open_default_display: boolean): GLib.OptionGroup;

    /**
     * Queries the current grab of the default window group.
     * @returns The widget which currently     has the grab or `null` if no grab is active
     */
    function grab_get_current(): Widget | null;

    /**
     * Looks up the icon size associated with `name`.
     * @param name the name to look up.
     * @returns the icon size ({@link Gtk.IconSize})
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use {@link Gtk.IconTheme} instead.
     */
    function icon_size_from_name(name: string): number;

    /**
     * Gets the canonical name of the given icon size. The returned string
     * is statically allocated and should not be freed.
     * @param size a {@link Gtk.IconSize}.
     * @returns the name of the given icon size.
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use {@link Gtk.IconTheme} instead.
     */
    function icon_size_get_name(size: number): string;

    /**
     * Obtains the pixel size of a semantic icon size `size`:
     * #GTK_ICON_SIZE_MENU, #GTK_ICON_SIZE_BUTTON, etc.  This function
     * isn’t normally needed, `gtk_icon_theme_load_icon()` is the usual
     * way to get an icon for rendering, then just look at the size of
     * the rendered pixbuf. The rendered pixbuf may not even correspond to
     * the width/height returned by `gtk_icon_size_lookup()`, because themes
     * are free to render the pixbuf however they like, including changing
     * the usual size.
     * @param size an icon size ({@link Gtk.IconSize})
     * @returns `true` if `size` was a valid size
     */
    function icon_size_lookup(size: number): [boolean, number, number];

    /**
     * Obtains the pixel size of a semantic icon size, possibly
     * modified by user preferences for a particular
     * {@link Gtk.Settings}. Normally `size` would be
     * #GTK_ICON_SIZE_MENU, #GTK_ICON_SIZE_BUTTON, etc.  This function
     * isn’t normally needed, `gtk_widget_render_icon_pixbuf()` is the usual
     * way to get an icon for rendering, then just look at the size of
     * the rendered pixbuf. The rendered pixbuf may not even correspond to
     * the width/height returned by `gtk_icon_size_lookup()`, because themes
     * are free to render the pixbuf however they like, including changing
     * the usual size.
     * @param settings a {@link Gtk.Settings} object, used to determine   which set of user preferences to used.
     * @param size an icon size ({@link Gtk.IconSize})
     * @returns `true` if `size` was a valid size
     * @since 2.2
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use `gtk_icon_size_lookup()` instead.
     */
    function icon_size_lookup_for_settings(settings: Settings, size: number): [boolean, number, number];

    /**
     * Registers a new icon size, along the same lines as #GTK_ICON_SIZE_MENU,
     * etc. Returns the integer value for the size.
     * @param name name of the icon size
     * @param width the icon width
     * @param height the icon height
     * @returns integer value representing the size ({@link Gtk.IconSize})
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use {@link Gtk.IconTheme} instead.
     */
    function icon_size_register(name: string, width: number, height: number): number;

    /**
     * Registers `alias` as another name for `target`.
     * So calling `gtk_icon_size_from_name()` with `alias` as argument
     * will return `target`.
     * @param alias an alias for `target`
     * @param target an existing icon size ({@link Gtk.IconSize})
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use {@link Gtk.IconTheme} instead.
     */
    function icon_size_register_alias(alias: string, target: number): void;

    function icon_theme_error_quark(): GLib.Quark;

    /**
     * Call this function before using any other GTK+ functions in your GUI
     * applications.  It will initialize everything needed to operate the
     * toolkit and parses some standard command line options.
     * 
     * Although you are expected to pass the `argc`, `argv` parameters from `main()` to
     * this function, it is possible to pass `null` if `argv` is not available or
     * commandline handling is not required.
     * 
     * `argc` and `argv` are adjusted accordingly so your own code will
     * never see those standard arguments.
     * 
     * Note that there are some alternative ways to initialize GTK+:
     * if you are calling `gtk_parse_args()`, `gtk_init_check()`,
     * `gtk_init_with_args()` or `g_option_context_parse()` with
     * the option group returned by `gtk_get_option_group()`,
     * you don’t have to call `gtk_init()`.
     * 
     * And if you are using {@link Gtk.Application}, you don't have to call any of the
     * initialization functions either; the {@link Gtk.Application.SignalSignatures.startup | Gtk.Application::startup} handler
     * does it for you.
     * 
     * This function will terminate your program if it was unable to
     * initialize the windowing system for some reason. If you want
     * your program to fall back to a textual interface you want to
     * call `gtk_init_check()` instead.
     * 
     * Since 2.18, GTK+ calls `signal (SIGPIPE, SIG_IGN)`
     * during initialization, to ignore SIGPIPE signals, since these are
     * almost never wanted in graphical applications. If you do need to
     * handle SIGPIPE for some reason, reset the handler after `gtk_init()`,
     * but notice that other libraries (e.g. libdbus or gvfs) might do
     * similar things.
     * @param argv Address of the     `argv` parameter of `main()`, or `null`. Any options     understood by GTK+ are stripped before return.
     */
    function init(argv: string[] | null): string[] | null;

    /**
     * This function does the same work as `gtk_init()` with only a single
     * change: It does not terminate the program if the commandline
     * arguments couldn’t be parsed or the windowing system can’t be
     * initialized. Instead it returns `false` on failure.
     * 
     * This way the application can fall back to some other means of
     * communication with the user - for example a curses or command line
     * interface.
     * 
     * Note that calling any GTK function or instantiating any GTK type after
     * this function returns `false` results in undefined behavior.
     * @param argv Address of the     `argv` parameter of `main()`, or `null`. Any options     understood by GTK+ are stripped before return.
     * @returns `true` if the commandline arguments (if any) were valid and     the windowing system has been successfully initialized, `false`     otherwise
     */
    function init_check(argv: string[] | null): [boolean, string[] | null];

    /**
     * This function does the same work as `gtk_init_check()`.
     * Additionally, it allows you to add your own commandline options,
     * and it automatically generates nicely formatted
     * `--help` output. Note that your program will
     * be terminated after writing out the help output.
     * @param argv Address of the     `argv` parameter of `main()`, or `null`. Any options     understood by GTK+ are stripped before return.
     * @param parameter_string a string which is displayed in    the first line of `--help` output, after    `programname [OPTION...]`
     * @param entries a `null`-terminated array    of `GOptionEntrys` describing the options of your program
     * @param translation_domain a translation domain to use for translating    the `--help` output for the options in `entries`    and the `parameter_string` with `gettext()`, or `null`
     * @returns `true` if the commandline arguments (if any) were valid and     if the windowing system has been successfully initialized,     `false` otherwise
     * @since 2.6
     */
    function init_with_args(argv: string[] | null, parameter_string: string | null, entries: GLib.OptionEntry[], translation_domain: string | null): [boolean, string[] | null];

    /**
     * Removes the key snooper function with the given id.
     * @param snooper_handler_id Identifies the key snooper to remove
     * @deprecated since 3.4: Key snooping should not be done. Events should     be handled by widgets.
     */
    function key_snooper_remove(snooper_handler_id: number): void;

    /**
     * Runs the main loop until `gtk_main_quit()` is called.
     * 
     * You can nest calls to `gtk_main()`. In that case `gtk_main_quit()`
     * will make the innermost invocation of the main loop return.
     */
    function main(): void;

    /**
     * Processes a single GDK event.
     * 
     * This is public only to allow filtering of events between GDK and GTK+.
     * You will not usually need to call this function directly.
     * 
     * While you should not call this function directly, you might want to
     * know how exactly events are handled. So here is what this function
     * does with the event:
     * 
     * 1. Compress enter/leave notify events. If the event passed build an
     *    enter/leave pair together with the next event (peeked from GDK), both
     *    events are thrown away. This is to avoid a backlog of (de-)highlighting
     *    widgets crossed by the pointer.
     * 
     * 2. Find the widget which got the event. If the widget can’t be determined
     *    the event is thrown away unless it belongs to a INCR transaction.
     * 
     * 3. Then the event is pushed onto a stack so you can query the currently
     *    handled event with `gtk_get_current_event()`.
     * 
     * 4. The event is sent to a widget. If a grab is active all events for widgets
     *    that are not in the contained in the grab widget are sent to the latter
     *    with a few exceptions:
     *    - Deletion and destruction events are still sent to the event widget for
     *      obvious reasons.
     *    - Events which directly relate to the visual representation of the event
     *      widget.
     *    - Leave events are delivered to the event widget if there was an enter
     *      event delivered to it before without the paired leave event.
     *    - Drag events are not redirected because it is unclear what the semantics
     *      of that would be.
     *    Another point of interest might be that all key events are first passed
     *    through the key snooper functions if there are any. Read the description
     *    of `gtk_key_snooper_install()` if you need this feature.
     * 
     * 5. After finishing the delivery the event is popped from the event stack.
     * @param event An event to process (normally passed by GDK)
     */
    function main_do_event(event: Gdk.Event): void;

    /**
     * Runs a single iteration of the mainloop.
     * 
     * If no events are waiting to be processed GTK+ will block
     * until the next event is noticed. If you don’t want to block
     * look at `gtk_main_iteration_do()` or check if any events are
     * pending with `gtk_events_pending()` first.
     * @returns `true` if `gtk_main_quit()` has been called for the     innermost mainloop
     */
    function main_iteration(): boolean;

    /**
     * Runs a single iteration of the mainloop.
     * If no events are available either return or block depending on
     * the value of `blocking`.
     * @param blocking `true` if you want GTK+ to block if no events are pending
     * @returns `true` if `gtk_main_quit()` has been called for the     innermost mainloop
     */
    function main_iteration_do(blocking: boolean): boolean;

    /**
     * Asks for the current nesting level of the main loop.
     * @returns the nesting level of the current invocation     of the main loop
     */
    function main_level(): number;

    /**
     * Makes the innermost invocation of the main loop return
     * when it regains control.
     */
    function main_quit(): void;

    /**
     * Draws an arrow in the given rectangle on `cr` using the given
     * parameters. `arrow_type` determines the direction of the arrow.
     * @param style a {@link Gtk.Style}
     * @param cr a {@link cairo.Context}
     * @param state_type a state
     * @param shadow_type the type of shadow to draw
     * @param widget the widget
     * @param detail a style detail
     * @param arrow_type the type of arrow to draw
     * @param fill `true` if the arrow tip should be filled
     * @param x x origin of the rectangle to draw the arrow in
     * @param y y origin of the rectangle to draw the arrow in
     * @param width width of the rectangle to draw the arrow in
     * @param height height of the rectangle to draw the arrow in
     * @deprecated since 3.0: Use `gtk_render_arrow()` instead
     */
    function paint_arrow(style: Style, cr: cairo.Context, state_type: StateType, shadow_type: ShadowType, widget: Widget | null, detail: string | null, arrow_type: ArrowType, fill: boolean, x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number): void;

    /**
     * Draws a box on `cr` with the given parameters.
     * @param style a {@link Gtk.Style}
     * @param cr a {@link cairo.Context}
     * @param state_type a state
     * @param shadow_type the type of shadow to draw
     * @param widget the widget
     * @param detail a style detail
     * @param x x origin of the box
     * @param y y origin of the box
     * @param width the width of the box
     * @param height the height of the box
     * @deprecated since 3.0: Use `gtk_render_frame()` and `gtk_render_background()` instead
     */
    function paint_box(style: Style, cr: cairo.Context, state_type: StateType, shadow_type: ShadowType, widget: Widget | null, detail: string | null, x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number): void;

    /**
     * Draws a box in `cr` using the given style and state and shadow type,
     * leaving a gap in one side.
     * @param style a {@link Gtk.Style}
     * @param cr a {@link cairo.Context}
     * @param state_type a state
     * @param shadow_type type of shadow to draw
     * @param widget the widget
     * @param detail a style detail
     * @param x x origin of the rectangle
     * @param y y origin of the rectangle
     * @param width width of the rectangle
     * @param height width of the rectangle
     * @param gap_side side in which to leave the gap
     * @param gap_x starting position of the gap
     * @param gap_width width of the gap
     * @deprecated since 3.0: Use `gtk_render_frame_gap()` instead
     */
    function paint_box_gap(style: Style, cr: cairo.Context, state_type: StateType, shadow_type: ShadowType, widget: Widget | null, detail: string | null, x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number, gap_side: PositionType, gap_x: number, gap_width: number): void;

    /**
     * Draws a check button indicator in the given rectangle on `cr` with
     * the given parameters.
     * @param style a {@link Gtk.Style}
     * @param cr a {@link cairo.Context}
     * @param state_type a state
     * @param shadow_type the type of shadow to draw
     * @param widget the widget
     * @param detail a style detail
     * @param x x origin of the rectangle to draw the check in
     * @param y y origin of the rectangle to draw the check in
     * @param width the width of the rectangle to draw the check in
     * @param height the height of the rectangle to draw the check in
     * @deprecated since 3.0: Use `gtk_render_check()` instead
     */
    function paint_check(style: Style, cr: cairo.Context, state_type: StateType, shadow_type: ShadowType, widget: Widget | null, detail: string | null, x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number): void;

    /**
     * Draws a diamond in the given rectangle on `window` using the given
     * parameters.
     * @param style a {@link Gtk.Style}
     * @param cr a {@link cairo.Context}
     * @param state_type a state
     * @param shadow_type the type of shadow to draw
     * @param widget the widget
     * @param detail a style detail
     * @param x x origin of the rectangle to draw the diamond in
     * @param y y origin of the rectangle to draw the diamond in
     * @param width width of the rectangle to draw the diamond in
     * @param height height of the rectangle to draw the diamond in
     * @deprecated since 3.0: Use cairo instead
     */
    function paint_diamond(style: Style, cr: cairo.Context, state_type: StateType, shadow_type: ShadowType, widget: Widget | null, detail: string | null, x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number): void;

    /**
     * Draws an expander as used in {@link Gtk.TreeView}. `x` and `y` specify the
     * center the expander. The size of the expander is determined by the
     * “expander-size” style property of `widget`.  (If widget is not
     * specified or doesn’t have an “expander-size” property, an
     * unspecified default size will be used, since the caller doesn't
     * have sufficient information to position the expander, this is
     * likely not useful.) The expander is expander_size pixels tall
     * in the collapsed position and expander_size pixels wide in the
     * expanded position.
     * @param style a {@link Gtk.Style}
     * @param cr a {@link cairo.Context}
     * @param state_type a state
     * @param widget the widget
     * @param detail a style detail
     * @param x the x position to draw the expander at
     * @param y the y position to draw the expander at
     * @param expander_style the style to draw the expander in; determines   whether the expander is collapsed, expanded, or in an   intermediate state.
     * @deprecated since 3.0: Use `gtk_render_expander()` instead
     */
    function paint_expander(style: Style, cr: cairo.Context, state_type: StateType, widget: Widget | null, detail: string | null, x: number, y: number, expander_style: ExpanderStyle): void;

    /**
     * Draws an extension, i.e. a notebook tab.
     * @param style a {@link Gtk.Style}
     * @param cr a {@link cairo.Context}
     * @param state_type a state
     * @param shadow_type type of shadow to draw
     * @param widget the widget
     * @param detail a style detail
     * @param x x origin of the extension
     * @param y y origin of the extension
     * @param width width of the extension
     * @param height width of the extension
     * @param gap_side the side on to which the extension is attached
     * @deprecated since 3.0: Use `gtk_render_extension()` instead
     */
    function paint_extension(style: Style, cr: cairo.Context, state_type: StateType, shadow_type: ShadowType, widget: Widget | null, detail: string | null, x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number, gap_side: PositionType): void;

    /**
     * Draws a flat box on `cr` with the given parameters.
     * @param style a {@link Gtk.Style}
     * @param cr a {@link cairo.Context}
     * @param state_type a state
     * @param shadow_type the type of shadow to draw
     * @param widget the widget
     * @param detail a style detail
     * @param x x origin of the box
     * @param y y origin of the box
     * @param width the width of the box
     * @param height the height of the box
     * @deprecated since 3.0: Use `gtk_render_frame()` and `gtk_render_background()` instead
     */
    function paint_flat_box(style: Style, cr: cairo.Context, state_type: StateType, shadow_type: ShadowType, widget: Widget | null, detail: string | null, x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number): void;

    /**
     * Draws a focus indicator around the given rectangle on `cr` using the
     * given style.
     * @param style a {@link Gtk.Style}
     * @param cr a {@link cairo.Context}
     * @param state_type a state
     * @param widget the widget
     * @param detail a style detail
     * @param x the x origin of the rectangle around which to draw a focus indicator
     * @param y the y origin of the rectangle around which to draw a focus indicator
     * @param width the width of the rectangle around which to draw a focus indicator
     * @param height the height of the rectangle around which to draw a focus indicator
     * @deprecated since 3.0: Use `gtk_render_focus()` instead
     */
    function paint_focus(style: Style, cr: cairo.Context, state_type: StateType, widget: Widget | null, detail: string | null, x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number): void;

    /**
     * Draws a handle as used in {@link Gtk.HandleBox} and {@link Gtk.Paned}.
     * @param style a {@link Gtk.Style}
     * @param cr a {@link cairo.Context}
     * @param state_type a state
     * @param shadow_type type of shadow to draw
     * @param widget the widget
     * @param detail a style detail
     * @param x x origin of the handle
     * @param y y origin of the handle
     * @param width with of the handle
     * @param height height of the handle
     * @param orientation the orientation of the handle
     * @deprecated since 3.0: Use `gtk_render_handle()` instead
     */
    function paint_handle(style: Style, cr: cairo.Context, state_type: StateType, shadow_type: ShadowType, widget: Widget | null, detail: string | null, x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number, orientation: Orientation): void;

    /**
     * Draws a horizontal line from (`x1`, `y`) to (`x2`, `y`) in `cr`
     * using the given style and state.
     * @param style a {@link Gtk.Style}
     * @param cr a `caio_t`
     * @param state_type a state
     * @param widget the widget
     * @param detail a style detail
     * @param x1 the starting x coordinate
     * @param x2 the ending x coordinate
     * @param y the y coordinate
     * @deprecated since 3.0: Use `gtk_render_line()` instead
     */
    function paint_hline(style: Style, cr: cairo.Context, state_type: StateType, widget: Widget | null, detail: string | null, x1: number, x2: number, y: number): void;

    /**
     * Draws a layout on `cr` using the given parameters.
     * @param style a {@link Gtk.Style}
     * @param cr a {@link cairo.Context}
     * @param state_type a state
     * @param use_text whether to use the text or foreground            graphics context of `style`
     * @param widget the widget
     * @param detail a style detail
     * @param x x origin
     * @param y y origin
     * @param layout the layout to draw
     * @deprecated since 3.0: Use `gtk_render_layout()` instead
     */
    function paint_layout(style: Style, cr: cairo.Context, state_type: StateType, use_text: boolean, widget: Widget | null, detail: string | null, x: number, y: number, layout: Pango.Layout): void;

    /**
     * Draws a radio button indicator in the given rectangle on `cr` with
     * the given parameters.
     * @param style a {@link Gtk.Style}
     * @param cr a {@link cairo.Context}
     * @param state_type a state
     * @param shadow_type the type of shadow to draw
     * @param widget the widget
     * @param detail a style detail
     * @param x x origin of the rectangle to draw the option in
     * @param y y origin of the rectangle to draw the option in
     * @param width the width of the rectangle to draw the option in
     * @param height the height of the rectangle to draw the option in
     * @deprecated since 3.0: Use `gtk_render_option()` instead
     */
    function paint_option(style: Style, cr: cairo.Context, state_type: StateType, shadow_type: ShadowType, widget: Widget | null, detail: string | null, x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number): void;

    /**
     * Draws a resize grip in the given rectangle on `cr` using the given
     * parameters.
     * @param style a {@link Gtk.Style}
     * @param cr a {@link cairo.Context}
     * @param state_type a state
     * @param widget the widget
     * @param detail a style detail
     * @param edge the edge in which to draw the resize grip
     * @param x the x origin of the rectangle in which to draw the resize grip
     * @param y the y origin of the rectangle in which to draw the resize grip
     * @param width the width of the rectangle in which to draw the resize grip
     * @param height the height of the rectangle in which to draw the resize grip
     * @deprecated since 3.0: Use `gtk_render_handle()` instead
     */
    function paint_resize_grip(style: Style, cr: cairo.Context, state_type: StateType, widget: Widget | null, detail: string | null, edge: Gdk.WindowEdge, x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number): void;

    /**
     * Draws a shadow around the given rectangle in `cr`
     * using the given style and state and shadow type.
     * @param style a {@link Gtk.Style}
     * @param cr a {@link cairo.Context}
     * @param state_type a state
     * @param shadow_type type of shadow to draw
     * @param widget the widget
     * @param detail a style detail
     * @param x x origin of the rectangle
     * @param y y origin of the rectangle
     * @param width width of the rectangle
     * @param height width of the rectangle
     * @deprecated since 3.0: Use `gtk_render_frame()` instead
     */
    function paint_shadow(style: Style, cr: cairo.Context, state_type: StateType, shadow_type: ShadowType, widget: Widget | null, detail: string | null, x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number): void;

    /**
     * Draws a shadow around the given rectangle in `cr`
     * using the given style and state and shadow type, leaving a
     * gap in one side.
     * @param style a {@link Gtk.Style}
     * @param cr a {@link cairo.Context}
     * @param state_type a state
     * @param shadow_type type of shadow to draw
     * @param widget the widget
     * @param detail a style detail
     * @param x x origin of the rectangle
     * @param y y origin of the rectangle
     * @param width width of the rectangle
     * @param height width of the rectangle
     * @param gap_side side in which to leave the gap
     * @param gap_x starting position of the gap
     * @param gap_width width of the gap
     * @deprecated since 3.0: Use `gtk_render_frame_gap()` instead
     */
    function paint_shadow_gap(style: Style, cr: cairo.Context, state_type: StateType, shadow_type: ShadowType, widget: Widget | null, detail: string | null, x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number, gap_side: PositionType, gap_x: number, gap_width: number): void;

    /**
     * Draws a slider in the given rectangle on `cr` using the
     * given style and orientation.
     * @param style a {@link Gtk.Style}
     * @param cr a {@link cairo.Context}
     * @param state_type a state
     * @param shadow_type a shadow
     * @param widget the widget
     * @param detail a style detail
     * @param x the x origin of the rectangle in which to draw a slider
     * @param y the y origin of the rectangle in which to draw a slider
     * @param width the width of the rectangle in which to draw a slider
     * @param height the height of the rectangle in which to draw a slider
     * @param orientation the orientation to be used
     * @deprecated since 3.0: Use `gtk_render_slider()` instead
     */
    function paint_slider(style: Style, cr: cairo.Context, state_type: StateType, shadow_type: ShadowType, widget: Widget | null, detail: string | null, x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number, orientation: Orientation): void;

    /**
     * Draws a spinner on `window` using the given parameters.
     * @param style a {@link Gtk.Style}
     * @param cr a {@link cairo.Context}
     * @param state_type a state
     * @param widget the widget (may be `null`)
     * @param detail a style detail (may be `null`)
     * @param step the nth step
     * @param x the x origin of the rectangle in which to draw the spinner
     * @param y the y origin of the rectangle in which to draw the spinner
     * @param width the width of the rectangle in which to draw the spinner
     * @param height the height of the rectangle in which to draw the spinner
     * @deprecated since 3.0: Use `gtk_render_icon()` and the {@link Gtk.StyleContext}   you are drawing instead
     */
    function paint_spinner(style: Style, cr: cairo.Context, state_type: StateType, widget: Widget | null, detail: string | null, step: number, x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number): void;

    /**
     * Draws an option menu tab (i.e. the up and down pointing arrows)
     * in the given rectangle on `cr` using the given parameters.
     * @param style a {@link Gtk.Style}
     * @param cr a {@link cairo.Context}
     * @param state_type a state
     * @param shadow_type the type of shadow to draw
     * @param widget the widget
     * @param detail a style detail
     * @param x x origin of the rectangle to draw the tab in
     * @param y y origin of the rectangle to draw the tab in
     * @param width the width of the rectangle to draw the tab in
     * @param height the height of the rectangle to draw the tab in
     * @deprecated since 3.0: Use cairo instead
     */
    function paint_tab(style: Style, cr: cairo.Context, state_type: StateType, shadow_type: ShadowType, widget: Widget | null, detail: string | null, x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number): void;

    /**
     * Draws a vertical line from (`x`, `y1_`) to (`x`, `y2_`) in `cr`
     * using the given style and state.
     * @param style a {@link Gtk.Style}
     * @param cr a {@link cairo.Context}
     * @param state_type a state
     * @param widget the widget
     * @param detail a style detail
     * @param y1_ the starting y coordinate
     * @param y2_ the ending y coordinate
     * @param x the x coordinate
     * @deprecated since 3.0: Use `gtk_render_line()` instead
     */
    function paint_vline(style: Style, cr: cairo.Context, state_type: StateType, widget: Widget | null, detail: string | null, y1_: number, y2_: number, x: number): void;

    /**
     * Returns the name of the default paper size, which
     * depends on the current locale.
     * @returns the name of the default paper size. The string is owned by GTK+ and should not be modified.
     * @since 2.10
     */
    function paper_size_get_default(): string;

    /**
     * Creates a list of known paper sizes.
     * @param include_custom whether to include custom paper sizes     as defined in the page setup dialog
     * @returns a newly allocated list of newly    allocated {@link Gtk.PaperSize} objects
     * @since 2.12
     */
    function paper_size_get_paper_sizes(include_custom: boolean): PaperSize[];

    /**
     * Parses command line arguments, and initializes global
     * attributes of GTK+, but does not actually open a connection
     * to a display. (See `gdk_display_open()`, `gdk_get_display_arg_name()`)
     * 
     * Any arguments used by GTK+ or GDK are removed from the array and
     * `argc` and `argv` are updated accordingly.
     * 
     * There is no need to call this function explicitly if you are using
     * `gtk_init()`, or `gtk_init_check()`.
     * 
     * Note that many aspects of GTK+ require a display connection to
     * function, so this way of initializing GTK+ is really only useful
     * for specialized use cases.
     * @param argv a pointer to the array of     command line arguments
     * @returns `true` if initialization succeeded, otherwise `false`
     */
    function parse_args(argv: string[]): [boolean, string[]];

    /**
     * Registers an error quark for {@link Gtk.PrintOperation} if necessary.
     * @returns The error quark used for {@link Gtk.PrintOperation} errors.
     * @since 2.10
     */
    function print_error_quark(): GLib.Quark;

    /**
     * Runs a page setup dialog, letting the user modify the values from
     * `page_setup`. If the user cancels the dialog, the returned {@link Gtk.PageSetup}
     * is identical to the passed in `page_setup`, otherwise it contains the
     * modifications done in the dialog.
     * 
     * Note that this function may use a recursive mainloop to show the page
     * setup dialog. See `gtk_print_run_page_setup_dialog_async()` if this is
     * a problem.
     * @param parent transient parent
     * @param page_setup an existing {@link Gtk.PageSetup}
     * @param settings a {@link Gtk.PrintSettings}
     * @returns a new {@link Gtk.PageSetup}
     * @since 2.10
     */
    function print_run_page_setup_dialog(parent: Window | null, page_setup: PageSetup | null, settings: PrintSettings): PageSetup;

    /**
     * Runs a page setup dialog, letting the user modify the values from `page_setup`.
     * 
     * In contrast to `gtk_print_run_page_setup_dialog()`, this function  returns after
     * showing the page setup dialog on platforms that support this, and calls `done_cb`
     * from a signal handler for the ::response signal of the dialog.
     * @param parent transient parent, or `null`
     * @param page_setup an existing {@link Gtk.PageSetup}, or `null`
     * @param settings a {@link Gtk.PrintSettings}
     * @param done_cb a function to call when the user saves           the modified page setup
     * @since 2.10
     */
    function print_run_page_setup_dialog_async(parent: Window | null, page_setup: PageSetup | null, settings: PrintSettings, done_cb: PageSetupDoneFunc): void;

    /**
     * Sends an event to a widget, propagating the event to parent widgets
     * if the event remains unhandled.
     * 
     * Events received by GTK+ from GDK normally begin in `gtk_main_do_event()`.
     * Depending on the type of event, existence of modal dialogs, grabs, etc.,
     * the event may be propagated; if so, this function is used.
     * 
     * `gtk_propagate_event()` calls `gtk_widget_event()` on each widget it
     * decides to send the event to. So `gtk_widget_event()` is the lowest-level
     * function; it simply emits the {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.event | Gtk.Widget::event} and possibly an
     * event-specific signal on a widget. `gtk_propagate_event()` is a bit
     * higher-level, and `gtk_main_do_event()` is the highest level.
     * 
     * All that said, you most likely don’t want to use any of these
     * functions; synthesizing events is rarely needed. There are almost
     * certainly better ways to achieve your goals. For example, use
     * `gdk_window_invalidate_rect()` or `gtk_widget_queue_draw()` instead
     * of making up expose events.
     * @param widget a {@link Gtk.Widget}
     * @param event an event
     */
    function propagate_event(widget: Widget, event: Gdk.Event): void;

    /**
     * Adds a file to the list of files to be parsed at the
     * end of `gtk_init()`.
     * @param filename the pathname to the file. If `filename`    is not absolute, it is searched in the current directory.
     * @deprecated since 3.0: Use {@link Gtk.StyleContext} with a custom {@link Gtk.StyleProvider} instead
     */
    function rc_add_default_file(filename: string): void;

    /**
     * Searches for a theme engine in the GTK+ search path. This function
     * is not useful for applications and should not be used.
     * @param module_file name of a theme engine
     * @returns The filename, if found (must be   freed with `g_free()`), otherwise `null`.
     * @deprecated since 3.0: Use {@link Gtk.CssProvider} instead.
     */
    function rc_find_module_in_path(module_file: string): string;

    /**
     * Looks up a file in pixmap path for the specified {@link Gtk.Settings}.
     * If the file is not found, it outputs a warning message using
     * `g_warning()` and returns `null`.
     * @param settings a {@link Gtk.Settings}
     * @param scanner Scanner used to get line number information for the   warning message, or `null`
     * @param pixmap_file name of the pixmap file to locate.
     * @returns the filename.
     * @deprecated since 3.0: Use {@link Gtk.CssProvider} instead.
     */
    function rc_find_pixmap_in_path(settings: Settings, scanner: GLib.Scanner, pixmap_file: string): string;

    /**
     * Retrieves the current list of RC files that will be parsed
     * at the end of `gtk_init()`.
     * @returns A `null`-terminated array of filenames.  This memory is owned     by GTK+ and must not be freed by the application.  If you want     to store this information, you should make a copy.
     * @deprecated since 3.0: Use {@link Gtk.StyleContext} instead
     */
    function rc_get_default_files(): string[];

    /**
     * Obtains the path to the IM modules file. See the documentation
     * of the `GTK_IM_MODULE_FILE`
     * environment variable for more details.
     * @returns a newly-allocated string containing the    name of the file listing the IM modules available for loading
     * @deprecated since 3.0: Use {@link Gtk.CssProvider} instead.
     */
    function rc_get_im_module_file(): string;

    /**
     * Obtains the path in which to look for IM modules. See the documentation
     * of the `GTK_PATH`
     * environment variable for more details about looking up modules. This
     * function is useful solely for utilities supplied with GTK+ and should
     * not be used by applications under normal circumstances.
     * @returns a newly-allocated string containing the    path in which to look for IM modules.
     * @deprecated since 3.0: Use {@link Gtk.CssProvider} instead.
     */
    function rc_get_im_module_path(): string;

    /**
     * Returns a directory in which GTK+ looks for theme engines.
     * For full information about the search for theme engines,
     * see the docs for `GTK_PATH` in [Running GTK+ Applications][gtk-running].
     * @returns the directory. (Must be freed with `g_free()`)
     * @deprecated since 3.0: Use {@link Gtk.CssProvider} instead.
     */
    function rc_get_module_dir(): string;

    /**
     * Finds all matching RC styles for a given widget,
     * composites them together, and then creates a
     * {@link Gtk.Style} representing the composite appearance.
     * (GTK+ actually keeps a cache of previously
     * created styles, so a new style may not be
     * created.)
     * @param widget a {@link Gtk.Widget}
     * @returns the resulting style. No refcount is added   to the returned style, so if you want to save this style around,   you should add a reference yourself.
     * @deprecated since 3.0: Use {@link Gtk.StyleContext} instead
     */
    function rc_get_style(widget: Widget): Style;

    /**
     * Creates up a {@link Gtk.Style} from styles defined in a RC file by providing
     * the raw components used in matching. This function may be useful
     * when creating pseudo-widgets that should be themed like widgets but
     * don’t actually have corresponding GTK+ widgets. An example of this
     * would be items inside a GNOME canvas widget.
     * 
     * The action of `gtk_rc_get_style()` is similar to:
     * 
     * ```c
     *  gtk_widget_path (widget, NULL, &path, NULL);
     *  gtk_widget_class_path (widget, NULL, &class_path, NULL);
     *  gtk_rc_get_style_by_paths (gtk_widget_get_settings (widget),
     *                             path, class_path,
     *                             G_OBJECT_TYPE (widget));
     * ```
     * 
     * @param settings a {@link Gtk.Settings} object
     * @param widget_path the widget path to use when looking up the     style, or `null` if no matching against the widget path should be done
     * @param class_path the class path to use when looking up the style,     or `null` if no matching against the class path should be done.
     * @param type a type that will be used along with parent types of this type     when matching against class styles, or #G_TYPE_NONE
     * @returns A style created by matching     with the supplied paths, or `null` if nothing matching was     specified and the default style should be used. The returned     value is owned by GTK+ as part of an internal cache, so you     must call `g_object_ref()` on the returned value if you want to     keep a reference to it.
     * @deprecated since 3.0: Use {@link Gtk.StyleContext} instead
     */
    function rc_get_style_by_paths(settings: Settings, widget_path: string | null, class_path: string | null, type: GObject.GType): Style | null;

    /**
     * Returns the standard directory in which themes should
     * be installed. (GTK+ does not actually use this directory
     * itself.)
     * @returns The directory (must be freed with `g_free()`).
     * @deprecated since 3.0: Use {@link Gtk.CssProvider} instead.
     */
    function rc_get_theme_dir(): string;

    /**
     * Parses a given resource file.
     * @param filename the filename of a file to parse. If `filename` is not absolute, it  is searched in the current directory.
     * @deprecated since 3.0: Use {@link Gtk.CssProvider} instead.
     */
    function rc_parse(filename: string): void;

    /**
     * Parses a color in the format expected
     * in a RC file.
     * 
     * Note that theme engines should use `gtk_rc_parse_color_full()` in
     * order to support symbolic colors.
     * @param scanner a {@link GLib.Scanner}
     * @returns {@link GLib.TokenType.NONE} if parsing succeeded, otherwise the token     that was expected but not found
     * @deprecated since 3.0: Use {@link Gtk.CssProvider} instead
     */
    function rc_parse_color(scanner: GLib.Scanner): [number, Gdk.Color];

    /**
     * Parses a color in the format expected
     * in a RC file. If `style` is not `null`, it will be consulted to resolve
     * references to symbolic colors.
     * @param scanner a {@link GLib.Scanner}
     * @param style a {@link Gtk.RcStyle}, or `null`
     * @returns {@link GLib.TokenType.NONE} if parsing succeeded, otherwise the token     that was expected but not found
     * @since 2.12
     * @deprecated since 3.0: Use {@link Gtk.CssProvider} instead
     */
    function rc_parse_color_full(scanner: GLib.Scanner, style: RcStyle | null): [number, Gdk.Color];

    /**
     * Parses a {@link Gtk.PathPriorityType} variable from the format expected
     * in a RC file.
     * @param scanner a {@link GLib.Scanner} (must be initialized for parsing an RC file)
     * @param priority A pointer to {@link Gtk.PathPriorityType} variable in which  to store the result.
     * @returns {@link GLib.TokenType.NONE} if parsing succeeded, otherwise the token   that was expected but not found.
     * @deprecated since 3.0: Use {@link Gtk.CssProvider} instead
     */
    function rc_parse_priority(scanner: GLib.Scanner, priority: PathPriorityType): number;

    /**
     * Parses a {@link Gtk.StateType} variable from the format expected
     * in a RC file.
     * @param scanner a {@link GLib.Scanner} (must be initialized for parsing an RC file)
     * @returns {@link GLib.TokenType.NONE} if parsing succeeded, otherwise the token   that was expected but not found.
     * @deprecated since 3.0: Use {@link Gtk.CssProvider} instead
     */
    function rc_parse_state(scanner: GLib.Scanner): [number, StateType];

    /**
     * Parses resource information directly from a string.
     * @param rc_string a string to parse.
     * @deprecated since 3.0: Use {@link Gtk.CssProvider} instead.
     */
    function rc_parse_string(rc_string: string): void;

    /**
     * A {@link Gtk.RcPropertyParser} for use with `gtk_settings_install_property_parser()`
     * or `gtk_widget_class_install_style_property_parser()` which parses
     * borders in the form
     * `"{ left, right, top, bottom }"` for integers
     * left, right, top and bottom.
     * @param pspec a {@link GObject.ParamSpec}
     * @param gstring the {@link GLib.String} to be parsed
     * @param property_value a {@link GObject.Value} which must hold boxed values.
     * @returns `true` if `gstring` could be parsed and `property_value` has been set to the resulting {@link Gtk.Border}.
     */
    function rc_property_parse_border(pspec: GObject.ParamSpec, gstring: GLib.String, property_value: GObject.Value | any): boolean;

    /**
     * A {@link Gtk.RcPropertyParser} for use with `gtk_settings_install_property_parser()`
     * or `gtk_widget_class_install_style_property_parser()` which parses a
     * color given either by its name or in the form
     * `{ red, green, blue }` where red, green and
     * blue are integers between 0 and 65535 or floating-point numbers
     * between 0 and 1.
     * @param pspec a {@link GObject.ParamSpec}
     * @param gstring the {@link GLib.String} to be parsed
     * @param property_value a {@link GObject.Value} which must hold {@link Gdk.Color} values.
     * @returns `true` if `gstring` could be parsed and `property_value` has been set to the resulting {@link Gdk.Color}.
     */
    function rc_property_parse_color(pspec: GObject.ParamSpec, gstring: GLib.String, property_value: GObject.Value | any): boolean;

    /**
     * A {@link Gtk.RcPropertyParser} for use with `gtk_settings_install_property_parser()`
     * or `gtk_widget_class_install_style_property_parser()` which parses a single
     * enumeration value.
     * 
     * The enumeration value can be specified by its name, its nickname or
     * its numeric value. For consistency with flags parsing, the value
     * may be surrounded by parentheses.
     * @param pspec a {@link GObject.ParamSpec}
     * @param gstring the {@link GLib.String} to be parsed
     * @param property_value a {@link GObject.Value} which must hold enum values.
     * @returns `true` if `gstring` could be parsed and `property_value` has been set to the resulting {@link GObject.EnumValue}.
     */
    function rc_property_parse_enum(pspec: GObject.ParamSpec, gstring: GLib.String, property_value: GObject.Value | any): boolean;

    /**
     * A {@link Gtk.RcPropertyParser} for use with `gtk_settings_install_property_parser()`
     * or `gtk_widget_class_install_style_property_parser()` which parses flags.
     * 
     * Flags can be specified by their name, their nickname or
     * numerically. Multiple flags can be specified in the form
     * `"( flag1 | flag2 | ... )"`.
     * @param pspec a {@link GObject.ParamSpec}
     * @param gstring the {@link GLib.String} to be parsed
     * @param property_value a {@link GObject.Value} which must hold flags values.
     * @returns `true` if `gstring` could be parsed and `property_value` has been set to the resulting flags value.
     */
    function rc_property_parse_flags(pspec: GObject.ParamSpec, gstring: GLib.String, property_value: GObject.Value | any): boolean;

    /**
     * A {@link Gtk.RcPropertyParser} for use with `gtk_settings_install_property_parser()`
     * or `gtk_widget_class_install_style_property_parser()` which parses a
     * requisition in the form
     * `"{ width, height }"` for integers %width and %height.
     * @param pspec a {@link GObject.ParamSpec}
     * @param gstring the {@link GLib.String} to be parsed
     * @param property_value a {@link GObject.Value} which must hold boxed values.
     * @returns `true` if `gstring` could be parsed and `property_value` has been set to the resulting {@link Gtk.Requisition}.
     */
    function rc_property_parse_requisition(pspec: GObject.ParamSpec, gstring: GLib.String, property_value: GObject.Value | any): boolean;

    /**
     * If the modification time on any previously read file for the
     * default {@link Gtk.Settings} has changed, discard all style information
     * and then reread all previously read RC files.
     * @returns `true` if the files were reread.
     * @deprecated since 3.0: Use {@link Gtk.CssProvider} instead.
     */
    function rc_reparse_all(): boolean;

    /**
     * If the modification time on any previously read file
     * for the given {@link Gtk.Settings} has changed, discard all style information
     * and then reread all previously read RC files.
     * @param settings a {@link Gtk.Settings}
     * @param force_load load whether or not anything changed
     * @returns `true` if the files were reread.
     * @deprecated since 3.0: Use {@link Gtk.CssProvider} instead.
     */
    function rc_reparse_all_for_settings(settings: Settings, force_load: boolean): boolean;

    /**
     * This function recomputes the styles for all widgets that use a
     * particular {@link Gtk.Settings} object. (There is one {@link Gtk.Settings} object
     * per {@link Gdk.Screen}, see `gtk_settings_get_for_screen()`); It is useful
     * when some global parameter has changed that affects the appearance
     * of all widgets, because when a widget gets a new style, it will
     * both redraw and recompute any cached information about its
     * appearance. As an example, it is used when the default font size
     * set by the operating system changes. Note that this function
     * doesn’t affect widgets that have a style set explicitly on them
     * with `gtk_widget_set_style()`.
     * @param settings a {@link Gtk.Settings}
     * @since 2.4
     * @deprecated since 3.0: Use {@link Gtk.CssProvider} instead.
     */
    function rc_reset_styles(settings: Settings): void;

    /**
     * Sets the list of files that GTK+ will read at the
     * end of `gtk_init()`.
     * @param filenames A     `null`-terminated list of filenames.
     * @deprecated since 3.0: Use {@link Gtk.StyleContext} with a custom {@link Gtk.StyleProvider} instead
     */
    function rc_set_default_files(filenames: string[]): void;

    function recent_chooser_error_quark(): GLib.Quark;

    function recent_manager_error_quark(): GLib.Quark;

    /**
     * Renders an activity indicator (such as in {@link Gtk.Spinner}).
     * The state {@link Gtk.StateFlags.CHECKED} determines whether there is
     * activity going on.
     * @param context a {@link Gtk.StyleContext}
     * @param cr a {@link cairo.Context}
     * @param x X origin of the rectangle
     * @param y Y origin of the rectangle
     * @param width rectangle width
     * @param height rectangle height
     * @since 3.0
     */
    function render_activity(context: StyleContext, cr: cairo.Context, x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number): void;

    /**
     * Renders an arrow pointing to `angle`.
     * 
     * Typical arrow rendering at 0, 1⁄2 π;, π; and 3⁄2 π:
     * 
     * ![](arrows.png)
     * @param context a {@link Gtk.StyleContext}
     * @param cr a {@link cairo.Context}
     * @param angle arrow angle from 0 to 2 * `G_PI`, being 0 the arrow pointing to the north
     * @param x X origin of the render area
     * @param y Y origin of the render area
     * @param size square side for render area
     * @since 3.0
     */
    function render_arrow(context: StyleContext, cr: cairo.Context, angle: number, x: number, y: number, size: number): void;

    /**
     * Renders the background of an element.
     * 
     * Typical background rendering, showing the effect of
     * `background-image`, `border-width` and `border-radius`:
     * 
     * ![](background.png)
     * @param context a {@link Gtk.StyleContext}
     * @param cr a {@link cairo.Context}
     * @param x X origin of the rectangle
     * @param y Y origin of the rectangle
     * @param width rectangle width
     * @param height rectangle height
     * @since 3.0
     */
    function render_background(context: StyleContext, cr: cairo.Context, x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number): void;

    /**
     * Returns the area that will be affected (i.e. drawn to) when
     * calling `gtk_render_background()` for the given `context` and
     * rectangle.
     * @param context a {@link Gtk.StyleContext}
     * @param x X origin of the rectangle
     * @param y Y origin of the rectangle
     * @param width rectangle width
     * @param height rectangle height
     * @since 3.20
     */
    function render_background_get_clip(context: StyleContext, x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number): Gdk.Rectangle;

    /**
     * Renders a checkmark (as in a {@link Gtk.CheckButton}).
     * 
     * The {@link Gtk.StateFlags.CHECKED} state determines whether the check is
     * on or off, and {@link Gtk.StateFlags.INCONSISTENT} determines whether it
     * should be marked as undefined.
     * 
     * Typical checkmark rendering:
     * 
     * ![](checks.png)
     * @param context a {@link Gtk.StyleContext}
     * @param cr a {@link cairo.Context}
     * @param x X origin of the rectangle
     * @param y Y origin of the rectangle
     * @param width rectangle width
     * @param height rectangle height
     * @since 3.0
     */
    function render_check(context: StyleContext, cr: cairo.Context, x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number): void;

    /**
     * Renders an expander (as used in {@link Gtk.TreeView} and {@link Gtk.Expander}) in the area
     * defined by `x`, `y`, `width`, `height`. The state {@link Gtk.StateFlags.CHECKED}
     * determines whether the expander is collapsed or expanded.
     * 
     * Typical expander rendering:
     * 
     * ![](expanders.png)
     * @param context a {@link Gtk.StyleContext}
     * @param cr a {@link cairo.Context}
     * @param x X origin of the rectangle
     * @param y Y origin of the rectangle
     * @param width rectangle width
     * @param height rectangle height
     * @since 3.0
     */
    function render_expander(context: StyleContext, cr: cairo.Context, x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number): void;

    /**
     * Renders a extension (as in a {@link Gtk.Notebook} tab) in the rectangle
     * defined by `x`, `y`, `width`, `height`. The side where the extension
     * connects to is defined by `gap_side`.
     * 
     * Typical extension rendering:
     * 
     * ![](extensions.png)
     * @param context a {@link Gtk.StyleContext}
     * @param cr a {@link cairo.Context}
     * @param x X origin of the rectangle
     * @param y Y origin of the rectangle
     * @param width rectangle width
     * @param height rectangle height
     * @param gap_side side where the gap is
     * @since 3.0
     */
    function render_extension(context: StyleContext, cr: cairo.Context, x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number, gap_side: PositionType): void;

    /**
     * Renders a focus indicator on the rectangle determined by `x`, `y`, `width`, `height`.
     * 
     * Typical focus rendering:
     * 
     * ![](focus.png)
     * @param context a {@link Gtk.StyleContext}
     * @param cr a {@link cairo.Context}
     * @param x X origin of the rectangle
     * @param y Y origin of the rectangle
     * @param width rectangle width
     * @param height rectangle height
     * @since 3.0
     */
    function render_focus(context: StyleContext, cr: cairo.Context, x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number): void;

    /**
     * Renders a frame around the rectangle defined by `x`, `y`, `width`, `height`.
     * 
     * Examples of frame rendering, showing the effect of `border-image`,
     * `border-color`, `border-width`, `border-radius` and junctions:
     * 
     * ![](frames.png)
     * @param context a {@link Gtk.StyleContext}
     * @param cr a {@link cairo.Context}
     * @param x X origin of the rectangle
     * @param y Y origin of the rectangle
     * @param width rectangle width
     * @param height rectangle height
     * @since 3.0
     */
    function render_frame(context: StyleContext, cr: cairo.Context, x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number): void;

    /**
     * Renders a frame around the rectangle defined by (`x`, `y`, `width`, `height`),
     * leaving a gap on one side. `xy0_gap` and `xy1_gap` will mean X coordinates
     * for {@link Gtk.PositionType.TOP} and {@link Gtk.PositionType.BOTTOM} gap sides, and Y coordinates for
     * {@link Gtk.PositionType.LEFT} and {@link Gtk.PositionType.RIGHT}.
     * 
     * Typical rendering of a frame with a gap:
     * 
     * ![](frame-gap.png)
     * @param context a {@link Gtk.StyleContext}
     * @param cr a {@link cairo.Context}
     * @param x X origin of the rectangle
     * @param y Y origin of the rectangle
     * @param width rectangle width
     * @param height rectangle height
     * @param gap_side side where the gap is
     * @param xy0_gap initial coordinate (X or Y depending on `gap_side`) for the gap
     * @param xy1_gap end coordinate (X or Y depending on `gap_side`) for the gap
     * @since 3.0
     * @deprecated since 3.24: Use `gtk_render_frame()` instead. Themes can create gaps     by omitting borders via CSS.
     */
    function render_frame_gap(context: StyleContext, cr: cairo.Context, x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number, gap_side: PositionType, xy0_gap: number, xy1_gap: number): void;

    /**
     * Renders a handle (as in {@link Gtk.HandleBox}, {@link Gtk.Paned} and
     * {@link Gtk.Window}’s resize grip), in the rectangle
     * determined by `x`, `y`, `width`, `height`.
     * 
     * Handles rendered for the paned and grip classes:
     * 
     * ![](handles.png)
     * @param context a {@link Gtk.StyleContext}
     * @param cr a {@link cairo.Context}
     * @param x X origin of the rectangle
     * @param y Y origin of the rectangle
     * @param width rectangle width
     * @param height rectangle height
     * @since 3.0
     */
    function render_handle(context: StyleContext, cr: cairo.Context, x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number): void;

    /**
     * Renders the icon in `pixbuf` at the specified `x` and `y` coordinates.
     * 
     * This function will render the icon in `pixbuf` at exactly its size,
     * regardless of scaling factors, which may not be appropriate when
     * drawing on displays with high pixel densities.
     * 
     * You probably want to use `gtk_render_icon_surface()` instead, if you
     * already have a Cairo surface.
     * @param context a {@link Gtk.StyleContext}
     * @param cr a {@link cairo.Context}
     * @param pixbuf a {@link GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf} containing the icon to draw
     * @param x X position for the `pixbuf`
     * @param y Y position for the `pixbuf`
     * @since 3.2
     */
    function render_icon(context: StyleContext, cr: cairo.Context, pixbuf: GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf, x: number, y: number): void;

    /**
     * Renders the icon specified by `source` at the given `size`, returning the result
     * in a pixbuf.
     * @param context a {@link Gtk.StyleContext}
     * @param source the {@link Gtk.IconSource} specifying the icon to render
     * @param size the size ({@link Gtk.IconSize}) to render the icon at.        A size of `(GtkIconSize) -1` means render at the size of the source        and don’t scale.
     * @returns a newly-created {@link GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf} containing the rendered icon
     * @since 3.0
     * @deprecated since 3.10: Use `gtk_icon_theme_load_icon()` instead.
     */
    function render_icon_pixbuf(context: StyleContext, source: IconSource, size: number): GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf;

    /**
     * Renders the icon in `surface` at the specified `x` and `y` coordinates.
     * @param context a {@link Gtk.StyleContext}
     * @param cr a {@link cairo.Context}
     * @param surface a {@link cairo.Surface} containing the icon to draw
     * @param x X position for the `icon`
     * @param y Y position for the `incon`
     * @since 3.10
     */
    function render_icon_surface(context: StyleContext, cr: cairo.Context, surface: cairo.Surface, x: number, y: number): void;

    /**
     * Draws a text caret on `cr` at the specified index of `layout`.
     * @param context a {@link Gtk.StyleContext}
     * @param cr a {@link cairo.Context}
     * @param x X origin
     * @param y Y origin
     * @param layout the {@link Pango.Layout} of the text
     * @param index the index in the {@link Pango.Layout}
     * @param direction the {@link Pango.Direction} of the text
     * @since 3.4
     */
    function render_insertion_cursor(context: StyleContext, cr: cairo.Context, x: number, y: number, layout: Pango.Layout, index: number, direction: Pango.Direction): void;

    /**
     * Renders `layout` on the coordinates `x`, `y`
     * @param context a {@link Gtk.StyleContext}
     * @param cr a {@link cairo.Context}
     * @param x X origin
     * @param y Y origin
     * @param layout the {@link Pango.Layout} to render
     * @since 3.0
     */
    function render_layout(context: StyleContext, cr: cairo.Context, x: number, y: number, layout: Pango.Layout): void;

    /**
     * Renders a line from (x0, y0) to (x1, y1).
     * @param context a {@link Gtk.StyleContext}
     * @param cr a {@link cairo.Context}
     * @param x0 X coordinate for the origin of the line
     * @param y0 Y coordinate for the origin of the line
     * @param x1 X coordinate for the end of the line
     * @param y1 Y coordinate for the end of the line
     * @since 3.0
     */
    function render_line(context: StyleContext, cr: cairo.Context, x0: number, y0: number, x1: number, y1: number): void;

    /**
     * Renders an option mark (as in a {@link Gtk.RadioButton}), the {@link Gtk.StateFlags.CHECKED}
     * state will determine whether the option is on or off, and
     * {@link Gtk.StateFlags.INCONSISTENT} whether it should be marked as undefined.
     * 
     * Typical option mark rendering:
     * 
     * ![](options.png)
     * @param context a {@link Gtk.StyleContext}
     * @param cr a {@link cairo.Context}
     * @param x X origin of the rectangle
     * @param y Y origin of the rectangle
     * @param width rectangle width
     * @param height rectangle height
     * @since 3.0
     */
    function render_option(context: StyleContext, cr: cairo.Context, x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number): void;

    /**
     * Renders a slider (as in {@link Gtk.Scale}) in the rectangle defined by `x`, `y`,
     * `width`, `height`. `orientation` defines whether the slider is vertical
     * or horizontal.
     * 
     * Typical slider rendering:
     * 
     * ![](sliders.png)
     * @param context a {@link Gtk.StyleContext}
     * @param cr a {@link cairo.Context}
     * @param x X origin of the rectangle
     * @param y Y origin of the rectangle
     * @param width rectangle width
     * @param height rectangle height
     * @param orientation orientation of the slider
     * @since 3.0
     */
    function render_slider(context: StyleContext, cr: cairo.Context, x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number, orientation: Orientation): void;

    /**
     * Converts a color from RGB space to HSV.
     * 
     * Input values must be in the [0.0, 1.0] range;
     * output values will be in the same range.
     * @param r Red
     * @param g Green
     * @param b Blue
     * @since 2.14
     */
    function rgb_to_hsv(r: number, g: number, b: number): [number, number, number];

    /**
     * Appends a specified target to the list of supported targets for a
     * given widget and selection.
     * @param widget a {@link Gtk.Widget}
     * @param selection the selection
     * @param target target to add.
     * @param info A unsigned integer which will be passed back to the application.
     */
    function selection_add_target(widget: Widget, selection: Gdk.Atom, target: Gdk.Atom, info: number): void;

    /**
     * Prepends a table of targets to the list of supported targets
     * for a given widget and selection.
     * @param widget a {@link Gtk.Widget}
     * @param selection the selection
     * @param targets a table of targets to add
     */
    function selection_add_targets(widget: Widget, selection: Gdk.Atom, targets: TargetEntry[]): void;

    /**
     * Remove all targets registered for the given selection for the
     * widget.
     * @param widget a {@link Gtk.Widget}
     * @param selection an atom representing a selection
     */
    function selection_clear_targets(widget: Widget, selection: Gdk.Atom): void;

    /**
     * Requests the contents of a selection. When received,
     * a “selection-received” signal will be generated.
     * @param widget The widget which acts as requestor
     * @param selection Which selection to get
     * @param target Form of information desired (e.g., STRING)
     * @param time_ Time of request (usually of triggering event)        In emergency, you could use #GDK_CURRENT_TIME
     * @returns `true` if requested succeeded. `false` if we could not process          request. (e.g., there was already a request in process for          this widget).
     */
    function selection_convert(widget: Widget, selection: Gdk.Atom, target: Gdk.Atom, time_: number): boolean;

    /**
     * Claims ownership of a given selection for a particular widget,
     * or, if `widget` is `null`, release ownership of the selection.
     * @param widget a {@link Gtk.Widget}, or `null`.
     * @param selection an interned atom representing the selection to claim
     * @param time_ timestamp with which to claim the selection
     * @returns `true` if the operation succeeded
     */
    function selection_owner_set(widget: Widget | null, selection: Gdk.Atom, time_: number): boolean;

    /**
     * Claim ownership of a given selection for a particular widget, or,
     * if `widget` is `null`, release ownership of the selection.
     * @param display the {@link Gdk.Display} where the selection is set
     * @param widget new selection owner (a {@link Gtk.Widget}), or `null`.
     * @param selection an interned atom representing the selection to claim.
     * @param time_ timestamp with which to claim the selection
     * @returns TRUE if the operation succeeded
     * @since 2.2
     */
    function selection_owner_set_for_display(display: Gdk.Display, widget: Widget | null, selection: Gdk.Atom, time_: number): boolean;

    /**
     * Removes all handlers and unsets ownership of all
     * selections for a widget. Called when widget is being
     * destroyed. This function will not generally be
     * called by applications.
     * @param widget a {@link Gtk.Widget}
     */
    function selection_remove_all(widget: Widget): void;

    /**
     * Sets the GTK+ debug flags.
     * @param flags 
     */
    function set_debug_flags(flags: number): void;

    /**
     * A convenience function for launching the default application
     * to show the uri. Like `gtk_show_uri_on_window()`, but takes a screen
     * as transient parent instead of a window.
     * 
     * Note that this function is deprecated as it does not pass the necessary
     * information for helpers to parent their dialog properly, when run from
     * sandboxed applications for example.
     * @param screen screen to show the uri on     or `null` for the default screen
     * @param uri the uri to show
     * @param timestamp a timestamp to prevent focus stealing
     * @returns `true` on success, `false` on error
     * @since 2.14
     * @deprecated since 3.22: Use `gtk_show_uri_on_window()` instead.
     */
    function show_uri(screen: Gdk.Screen | null, uri: string, timestamp: number): boolean;

    /**
     * This is a convenience function for launching the default application
     * to show the uri. The uri must be of a form understood by GIO (i.e. you
     * need to install gvfs to get support for uri schemes such as http://
     * or ftp://, as only local files are handled by GIO itself).
     * Typical examples are
     * - `file:///home/gnome/pict.jpg`
     * - `http://www.gnome.org`
     * - `mailto:me@gnome.org`
     * 
     * Ideally the timestamp is taken from the event triggering
     * the `gtk_show_uri()` call. If timestamp is not known you can take
     * `GDK_CURRENT_TIME`.
     * 
     * This is the recommended call to be used as it passes information
     * necessary for sandbox helpers to parent their dialogs properly.
     * @param parent parent window
     * @param uri the uri to show
     * @param timestamp a timestamp to prevent focus stealing
     * @returns `true` on success, `false` on error
     * @since 3.22
     */
    function show_uri_on_window(parent: Window | null, uri: string, timestamp: number): boolean;

    /**
     * Registers each of the stock items in `items`. If an item already
     * exists with the same stock ID as one of the `items`, the old item
     * gets replaced. The stock items are copied, so GTK+ does not hold
     * any pointer into `items` and `items` can be freed. Use
     * `gtk_stock_add_static()` if `items` is persistent and GTK+ need not
     * copy the array.
     * @param items a {@link Gtk.StockItem} or array of items
     * @deprecated since 3.10
     */
    function stock_add(items: StockItem[]): void;

    /**
     * Same as `gtk_stock_add()`, but doesn’t copy `items`, so
     * `items` must persist until application exit.
     * @param items a {@link Gtk.StockItem} or array of {@link Gtk.StockItem}
     * @deprecated since 3.10
     */
    function stock_add_static(items: StockItem[]): void;

    /**
     * Retrieves a list of all known stock IDs added to a {@link Gtk.IconFactory}
     * or registered with `gtk_stock_add()`. The list must be freed with `g_slist_free()`,
     * and each string in the list must be freed with `g_free()`.
     * @returns a list of known stock IDs
     * @deprecated since 3.10
     */
    function stock_list_ids(): string[];

    /**
     * Fills `item` with the registered values for `stock_id`, returning `true`
     * if `stock_id` was known.
     * @param stock_id a stock item name
     * @returns `true` if `item` was initialized
     * @deprecated since 3.10
     */
    function stock_lookup(stock_id: string): [boolean, StockItem];

    /**
     * Sets a function to be used for translating the `label` of
     * a stock item.
     * 
     * If no function is registered for a translation domain,
     * `g_dgettext()` is used.
     * 
     * The function is used for all stock items whose
     * `translation_domain` matches `domain`. Note that it is possible
     * to use strings different from the actual gettext translation domain
     * of your application for this, as long as your {@link Gtk.TranslateFunc} uses
     * the correct domain when calling `dgettext()`. This can be useful, e.g.
     * when dealing with message contexts:
     * 
     * 
     * ```c
     * GtkStockItem items[] = {
     *  { MY_ITEM1, NC_("odd items", "Item 1"), 0, 0, "odd-item-domain" },
     *  { MY_ITEM2, NC_("even items", "Item 2"), 0, 0, "even-item-domain" },
     * };
     * 
     * gchar *
     * my_translate_func (const gchar *msgid,
     *                    gpointer     data)
     * {
     *   gchar *msgctxt = data;
     * 
     *   return (gchar*)g_dpgettext2 (GETTEXT_PACKAGE, msgctxt, msgid);
     * }
     * 
     * ...
     * 
     * gtk_stock_add (items, G_N_ELEMENTS (items));
     * gtk_stock_set_translate_func ("odd-item-domain", my_translate_func, "odd items");
     * gtk_stock_set_translate_func ("even-item-domain", my_translate_func, "even items");
     * ```
     * 
     * @param domain the translation domain for which `func` shall be used
     * @param func a {@link Gtk.TranslateFunc}
     * @since 2.8
     * @deprecated since 3.10
     */
    function stock_set_translate_func(domain: string, func: TranslateFunc): void;

    /**
     * This function frees a target table as returned by
     * `gtk_target_table_new_from_list()`
     * @param targets a {@link Gtk.TargetEntry} array
     * @since 2.10
     */
    function target_table_free(targets: TargetEntry[]): void;

    /**
     * This function creates an {@link Gtk.TargetEntry} array that contains the
     * same targets as the passed %list. The returned table is newly
     * allocated and should be freed using `gtk_target_table_free()` when no
     * longer needed.
     * @param list a {@link Gtk.TargetList}
     * @returns the new table.
     * @since 2.10
     */
    function target_table_new_from_list(list: TargetList): TargetEntry[];

    /**
     * Determines if any of the targets in `targets` can be used to
     * provide a {@link GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf}.
     * @param targets an array of `GdkAtoms`
     * @param writable whether to accept only targets for which GTK+ knows   how to convert a pixbuf into the format
     * @returns `true` if `targets` include a suitable target for images,   otherwise `false`.
     * @since 2.10
     */
    function targets_include_image(targets: Gdk.Atom[], writable: boolean): boolean;

    /**
     * Determines if any of the targets in `targets` can be used to
     * provide rich text.
     * @param targets an array of `GdkAtoms`
     * @param buffer a {@link Gtk.TextBuffer}
     * @returns `true` if `targets` include a suitable target for rich text,               otherwise `false`.
     * @since 2.10
     */
    function targets_include_rich_text(targets: Gdk.Atom[], buffer: TextBuffer): boolean;

    /**
     * Determines if any of the targets in `targets` can be used to
     * provide text.
     * @param targets an array of `GdkAtoms`
     * @returns `true` if `targets` include a suitable target for text,   otherwise `false`.
     * @since 2.10
     */
    function targets_include_text(targets: Gdk.Atom[]): boolean;

    /**
     * Determines if any of the targets in `targets` can be used to
     * provide an uri list.
     * @param targets an array of `GdkAtoms`
     * @returns `true` if `targets` include a suitable target for uri lists,   otherwise `false`.
     * @since 2.10
     */
    function targets_include_uri(targets: Gdk.Atom[]): boolean;

    /**
     * Create a simple window with window title `window_title` and
     * text contents `dialog_text`.
     * The window will quit any running `gtk_main()`-loop when destroyed, and it
     * will automatically be destroyed upon test function teardown.
     * @param window_title Title of the window to be displayed.
     * @param dialog_text Text inside the window to be displayed.
     * @returns a widget pointer to the newly created GtkWindow.
     * @since 2.14
     * @deprecated since 3.20: This testing infrastructure is phased out in favor of reftests.
     */
    function test_create_simple_window(window_title: string, dialog_text: string): Widget;

    /**
     * This function will search `widget` and all its descendants for a GtkLabel
     * widget with a text string matching `label_pattern`.
     * The `label_pattern` may contain asterisks “*” and question marks “?” as
     * placeholders, `g_pattern_match()` is used for the matching.
     * Note that locales other than "C“ tend to alter (translate” label strings,
     * so this function is genrally only useful in test programs with
     * predetermined locales, see `gtk_test_init()` for more details.
     * @param widget Valid label or container widget.
     * @param label_pattern Shell-glob pattern to match a label string.
     * @returns a GtkLabel widget if any is found.
     * @since 2.14
     */
    function test_find_label(widget: Widget, label_pattern: string): Widget;

    /**
     * This function will search siblings of `base_widget` and siblings of its
     * ancestors for all widgets matching `widget_type`.
     * Of the matching widgets, the one that is geometrically closest to
     * `base_widget` will be returned.
     * The general purpose of this function is to find the most likely “action”
     * widget, relative to another labeling widget. Such as finding a
     * button or text entry widget, given its corresponding label widget.
     * @param base_widget Valid widget, part of a widget hierarchy
     * @param widget_type Type of a aearched for sibling widget
     * @returns a widget of type `widget_type` if any is found.
     * @since 2.14
     */
    function test_find_sibling(base_widget: Widget, widget_type: GObject.GType): Widget;

    /**
     * This function will search the descendants of `widget` for a widget
     * of type `widget_type` that has a label matching `label_pattern` next
     * to it. This is most useful for automated GUI testing, e.g. to find
     * the “OK” button in a dialog and synthesize clicks on it.
     * However see `gtk_test_find_label()`, `gtk_test_find_sibling()` and
     * `gtk_test_widget_click()` for possible caveats involving the search of
     * such widgets and synthesizing widget events.
     * @param widget Container widget, usually a GtkWindow.
     * @param label_pattern Shell-glob pattern to match a label string.
     * @param widget_type Type of a aearched for label sibling widget.
     * @returns a valid widget if any is found or `null`.
     * @since 2.14
     */
    function test_find_widget(widget: Widget, label_pattern: string, widget_type: GObject.GType): Widget | null;

    /**
     * Return the type ids that have been registered after
     * calling `gtk_test_register_all_types()`.
     * @returns 0-terminated array of type ids
     * @since 2.14
     */
    function test_list_all_types(): GObject.GType[];

    /**
     * Force registration of all core Gtk+ and Gdk object types.
     * This allowes to refer to any of those object types via
     * `g_type_from_name()` after calling this function.
     * @since 2.14
     */
    function test_register_all_types(): void;

    /**
     * Retrive the literal adjustment value for GtkRange based
     * widgets and spin buttons. Note that the value returned by
     * this function is anything between the lower and upper bounds
     * of the adjustment belonging to `widget`, and is not a percentage
     * as passed in to `gtk_test_slider_set_perc()`.
     * @param widget valid widget pointer.
     * @returns gtk_adjustment_get_value (adjustment) for an adjustment belonging to `widget`.
     * @since 2.14
     * @deprecated since 3.20: This testing infrastructure is phased out in favor of reftests.
     */
    function test_slider_get_value(widget: Widget): number;

    /**
     * This function will adjust the slider position of all GtkRange
     * based widgets, such as scrollbars or scales, it’ll also adjust
     * spin buttons. The adjustment value of these widgets is set to
     * a value between the lower and upper limits, according to the
     * `percentage` argument.
     * @param widget valid widget pointer.
     * @param percentage value between 0 and 100.
     * @since 2.14
     * @deprecated since 3.20: This testing infrastructure is phased out in favor of reftests.
     */
    function test_slider_set_perc(widget: Widget, percentage: number): void;

    /**
     * This function will generate a `button` click in the upwards or downwards
     * spin button arrow areas, usually leading to an increase or decrease of
     * spin button’s value.
     * @param spinner valid GtkSpinButton widget.
     * @param button Number of the pointer button for the event, usually 1, 2 or 3.
     * @param upwards `true` for upwards arrow click, `false` for downwards arrow click.
     * @returns whether all actions neccessary for the button click simulation were carried out successfully.
     * @since 2.14
     * @deprecated since 3.20: This testing infrastructure is phased out in favor of reftests.
     */
    function test_spin_button_click(spinner: SpinButton, button: number, upwards: boolean): boolean;

    /**
     * Retrive the text string of `widget` if it is a GtkLabel,
     * GtkEditable (entry and text widgets) or GtkTextView.
     * @param widget valid widget pointer.
     * @returns new 0-terminated C string, needs to be released with `g_free()`.
     * @since 2.14
     * @deprecated since 3.20: This testing infrastructure is phased out in favor of reftests.
     */
    function test_text_get(widget: Widget): string;

    /**
     * Set the text string of `widget` to `string` if it is a GtkLabel,
     * GtkEditable (entry and text widgets) or GtkTextView.
     * @param widget valid widget pointer.
     * @param string a 0-terminated C string
     * @since 2.14
     * @deprecated since 3.20: This testing infrastructure is phased out in favor of reftests.
     */
    function test_text_set(widget: Widget, string: string): void;

    /**
     * This function will generate a `button` click (button press and button
     * release event) in the middle of the first GdkWindow found that belongs
     * to `widget`.
     * For windowless widgets like {@link Gtk.Button} (which returns `false` from
     * `gtk_widget_get_has_window()`), this will often be an
     * input-only event window. For other widgets, this is usually widget->window.
     * Certain caveats should be considered when using this function, in
     * particular because the mouse pointer is warped to the button click
     * location, see `gdk_test_simulate_button()` for details.
     * @param widget Widget to generate a button click on.
     * @param button Number of the pointer button for the event, usually 1, 2 or 3.
     * @param modifiers Keyboard modifiers the event is setup with.
     * @returns whether all actions neccessary for the button click simulation were carried out successfully.
     * @since 2.14
     * @deprecated since 3.20: This testing infrastructure is phased out in favor of reftests.
     */
    function test_widget_click(widget: Widget, button: number, modifiers: Gdk.ModifierType): boolean;

    /**
     * This function will generate keyboard press and release events in
     * the middle of the first GdkWindow found that belongs to `widget`.
     * For windowless widgets like {@link Gtk.Button} (which returns `false` from
     * `gtk_widget_get_has_window()`), this will often be an
     * input-only event window. For other widgets, this is usually widget->window.
     * Certain caveats should be considered when using this function, in
     * particular because the mouse pointer is warped to the key press
     * location, see `gdk_test_simulate_key()` for details.
     * @param widget Widget to generate a key press and release on.
     * @param keyval A Gdk keyboard value.
     * @param modifiers Keyboard modifiers the event is setup with.
     * @returns whether all actions neccessary for the key event simulation were carried out successfully.
     * @since 2.14
     */
    function test_widget_send_key(widget: Widget, keyval: number, modifiers: Gdk.ModifierType): boolean;

    /**
     * Enters the main loop and waits for `widget` to be “drawn”. In this
     * context that means it waits for the frame clock of `widget` to have
     * run a full styling, layout and drawing cycle.
     * 
     * This function is intended to be used for syncing with actions that
     * depend on `widget` relayouting or on interaction with the display
     * server.
     * @param widget the widget to wait for
     * @since 3.10
     */
    function test_widget_wait_for_draw(widget: Widget): void;

    /**
     * Obtains a `tree_model` and `path` from selection data of target type
     * `GTK_TREE_MODEL_ROW`. Normally called from a drag_data_received handler.
     * This function can only be used if `selection_data` originates from the same
     * process that’s calling this function, because a pointer to the tree model
     * is being passed around. If you aren’t in the same process, then you'll
     * get memory corruption. In the {@link Gtk.TreeDragDest} drag_data_received handler,
     * you can assume that selection data of type `GTK_TREE_MODEL_ROW` is
     * in from the current process. The returned path must be freed with
     * `gtk_tree_path_free()`.
     * @param selection_data a {@link Gtk.SelectionData}
     * @returns `true` if `selection_data` had target type `GTK_TREE_MODEL_ROW` and  is otherwise valid
     */
    function tree_get_row_drag_data(selection_data: SelectionData): [boolean, TreeModel | null, TreePath | null];

    /**
     * Lets a set of row reference created by
     * `gtk_tree_row_reference_new_proxy()` know that the
     * model emitted the {@link Gtk.TreeModel.SignalSignatures.row_deleted | Gtk.TreeModel::row-deleted} signal.
     * @param proxy a {@link GObject.Object}
     * @param path the path position that was deleted
     */
    function tree_row_reference_deleted(proxy: GObject.Object, path: TreePath): void;

    /**
     * Lets a set of row reference created by
     * `gtk_tree_row_reference_new_proxy()` know that the
     * model emitted the {@link Gtk.TreeModel.SignalSignatures.row_inserted | Gtk.TreeModel::row-inserted} signal.
     * @param proxy a {@link GObject.Object}
     * @param path the row position that was inserted
     */
    function tree_row_reference_inserted(proxy: GObject.Object, path: TreePath): void;

    /**
     * Sets selection data of target type `GTK_TREE_MODEL_ROW`. Normally used
     * in a drag_data_get handler.
     * @param selection_data some {@link Gtk.SelectionData}
     * @param tree_model a {@link Gtk.TreeModel}
     * @param path a row in `tree_model`
     * @returns `true` if the {@link Gtk.SelectionData} had the proper target type to allow us to set a tree row
     */
    function tree_set_row_drag_data(selection_data: SelectionData, tree_model: TreeModel, path: TreePath): boolean;

    /**
     * All this function does it to return `true`.
     * 
     * This can be useful for example if you want to inhibit the deletion
     * of a window. Of course you should not do this as the user expects
     * a reaction from clicking the close icon of the window...
     * 
     * ## A persistent window
     * 
     * 
     * ```c
     * #include <gtk/gtk.h>
     * 
     * int
     * main (int argc, char **argv)
     * {
     *   GtkWidget *win, *but;
     *   const char *text = "Close yourself. I mean it!";
     * 
     *   gtk_init (&argc, &argv);
     * 
     *   win = gtk_window_new (GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
     *   g_signal_connect (win,
     *                     "delete-event",
     *                     G_CALLBACK (gtk_true),
     *                     NULL);
     *   g_signal_connect (win, "destroy",
     *                     G_CALLBACK (gtk_main_quit),
     *                     NULL);
     * 
     *   but = gtk_button_new_with_label (text);
     *   g_signal_connect_swapped (but, "clicked",
     *                             G_CALLBACK (gtk_object_destroy),
     *                             win);
     *   gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (win), but);
     * 
     *   gtk_widget_show_all (win);
     * 
     *   gtk_main ();
     * 
     *   return 0;
     * }
     * ```
     * 
     * @returns `true`
     */
    function __true(): boolean;

    /**
     * @gir-type Callback
     */
    interface AccelGroupActivate<A = GObject.Object> {
        (accel_group: AccelGroup, acceleratable: A, keyval: number, modifier: Gdk.ModifierType): boolean;
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Callback
     */
    interface AccelGroupFindFunc {
        (key: AccelKey, closure: GObject.Closure): boolean;
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Callback
     */
    interface AccelMapForeach {
        (data: null, accel_path: string, accel_key: number, accel_mods: Gdk.ModifierType, changed: boolean): void;
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Callback
     */
    interface AssistantPageFunc {
        (current_page: number): number;
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Callback
     */
    interface BuilderConnectFunc<A = GObject.Object, B = GObject.Object> {
        (builder: Builder, object: A, signal_name: string, handler_name: string, connect_object: B | null, flags: GObject.ConnectFlags): void;
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Callback
     */
    interface CalendarDetailFunc {
        (calendar: Calendar, year: number, month: number, day: number): string | null;
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Callback
     */
    interface Callback {
        (widget: Widget): void;
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Callback
     */
    interface CellAllocCallback {
        (renderer: CellRenderer, cell_area: Gdk.Rectangle, cell_background: Gdk.Rectangle): boolean;
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Callback
     */
    interface CellCallback {
        (renderer: CellRenderer): boolean;
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Callback
     */
    interface CellLayoutDataFunc {
        (cell_layout: CellLayout, cell: CellRenderer, tree_model: TreeModel, iter: TreeIter): void;
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Callback
     */
    interface ClipboardClearFunc {
        (clipboard: Clipboard, user_data_or_owner: null): void;
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Callback
     */
    interface ClipboardGetFunc {
        (clipboard: Clipboard, selection_data: SelectionData, info: number, user_data_or_owner: null): void;
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Callback
     */
    interface ClipboardImageReceivedFunc {
        (clipboard: Clipboard, pixbuf: GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf): void;
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Callback
     */
    interface ClipboardReceivedFunc {
        (clipboard: Clipboard, selection_data: SelectionData): void;
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Callback
     */
    interface ClipboardRichTextReceivedFunc {
        (clipboard: Clipboard, format: Gdk.Atom, text: string | null, length: number): void;
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Callback
     */
    interface ClipboardTargetsReceivedFunc {
        (clipboard: Clipboard, atoms: Gdk.Atom[] | null): void;
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Callback
     */
    interface ClipboardTextReceivedFunc {
        (clipboard: Clipboard, text: string | null): void;
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Callback
     */
    interface ClipboardURIReceivedFunc {
        (clipboard: Clipboard, uris: string[]): void;
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Callback
     */
    interface ColorSelectionChangePaletteFunc {
        (colors: Gdk.Color[]): void;
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Callback
     */
    interface ColorSelectionChangePaletteWithScreenFunc {
        (screen: Gdk.Screen, colors: Gdk.Color[]): void;
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Callback
     */
    interface EntryCompletionMatchFunc {
        (completion: EntryCompletion, key: string, iter: TreeIter): boolean;
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Callback
     */
    interface FileFilterFunc {
        (filter_info: FileFilterInfo): boolean;
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Callback
     */
    interface FlowBoxCreateWidgetFunc<A = GObject.Object> {
        (item: A): Widget;
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Callback
     */
    interface FlowBoxFilterFunc {
        (child: FlowBoxChild): boolean;
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Callback
     */
    interface FlowBoxForeachFunc {
        (box: FlowBox, child: FlowBoxChild): void;
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Callback
     */
    interface FlowBoxSortFunc {
        (child1: FlowBoxChild, child2: FlowBoxChild): number;
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Callback
     */
    interface FontFilterFunc {
        (family: Pango.FontFamily, face: Pango.FontFace): boolean;
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Callback
     */
    interface IconViewForeachFunc {
        (icon_view: IconView, path: TreePath): void;
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Callback
     */
    interface KeySnoopFunc {
        (grab_widget: Widget, event: Gdk.EventKey): number;
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Callback
     */
    interface ListBoxCreateWidgetFunc<A = GObject.Object> {
        (item: A): Widget;
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Callback
     */
    interface ListBoxFilterFunc {
        (row: ListBoxRow): boolean;
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Callback
     */
    interface ListBoxForeachFunc {
        (box: ListBox, row: ListBoxRow): void;
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Callback
     */
    interface ListBoxSortFunc {
        (row1: ListBoxRow, row2: ListBoxRow): number;
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Callback
     */
    interface ListBoxUpdateHeaderFunc {
        (row: ListBoxRow, before: ListBoxRow | null): void;
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Callback
     */
    interface MenuDetachFunc {
        (attach_widget: Widget, menu: Menu): void;
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Callback
     */
    interface MenuPositionFunc {
        (menu: Menu, x: number, y: number): void;
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Callback
     */
    interface ModuleDisplayInitFunc {
        (display: Gdk.Display): void;
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Callback
     */
    interface ModuleInitFunc {
        (argv: string[] | null): void;
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Callback
     */
    interface PageSetupDoneFunc {
        (page_setup: PageSetup): void;
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Callback
     */
    interface PrintSettingsFunc {
        (key: string, value: string): void;
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Callback
     */
    interface RcPropertyParser {
        (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec, rc_string: GLib.String, property_value: unknown): boolean;
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Callback
     */
    interface RecentFilterFunc {
        (filter_info: RecentFilterInfo): boolean;
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Callback
     */
    interface RecentSortFunc {
        (a: RecentInfo, b: RecentInfo): number;
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Callback
     */
    interface StylePropertyParser {
        (string: string, value: unknown): boolean;
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Callback
     */
    interface TextBufferDeserializeFunc {
        (register_buffer: TextBuffer, content_buffer: TextBuffer, iter: TextIter, data: Uint8Array, create_tags: boolean): boolean;
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Callback
     */
    interface TextBufferSerializeFunc {
        (register_buffer: TextBuffer, content_buffer: TextBuffer, start: TextIter, end: TextIter): Uint8Array | null;
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Callback
     */
    interface TextCharPredicate {
        (ch: string): boolean;
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Callback
     */
    interface TextTagTableForeach {
        (tag: TextTag): void;
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Callback
     */
    interface TickCallback {
        (widget: Widget, frame_clock: Gdk.FrameClock): boolean;
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Callback
     */
    interface TranslateFunc {
        (path: string): string;
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Callback
     */
    interface TreeCellDataFunc {
        (tree_column: TreeViewColumn, cell: CellRenderer, tree_model: TreeModel, iter: TreeIter): void;
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Callback
     */
    interface TreeDestroyCountFunc {
        (tree_view: TreeView, path: TreePath, children: number): void;
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Callback
     */
    interface TreeIterCompareFunc {
        (model: TreeModel, a: TreeIter, b: TreeIter): number;
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Callback
     */
    interface TreeModelFilterModifyFunc {
        (model: TreeModel, iter: TreeIter, column: number): void;
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Callback
     */
    interface TreeModelFilterVisibleFunc {
        (model: TreeModel, iter: TreeIter): boolean;
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Callback
     */
    interface TreeModelForeachFunc {
        (model: TreeModel, path: TreePath, iter: TreeIter): boolean;
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Callback
     */
    interface TreeSelectionForeachFunc {
        (model: TreeModel, path: TreePath, iter: TreeIter): void;
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Callback
     */
    interface TreeSelectionFunc {
        (selection: TreeSelection, model: TreeModel, path: TreePath, path_currently_selected: boolean): boolean;
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Callback
     */
    interface TreeViewColumnDropFunc {
        (tree_view: TreeView, column: TreeViewColumn, prev_column: TreeViewColumn, next_column: TreeViewColumn): boolean;
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Callback
     */
    interface TreeViewMappingFunc {
        (tree_view: TreeView, path: TreePath): void;
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Callback
     */
    interface TreeViewRowSeparatorFunc {
        (model: TreeModel, iter: TreeIter): boolean;
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Callback
     */
    interface TreeViewSearchEqualFunc {
        (model: TreeModel, column: number, key: string, iter: TreeIter): boolean;
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Callback
     */
    interface TreeViewSearchPositionFunc {
        (tree_view: TreeView, search_dialog: Widget): void;
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Flags
     */
    export namespace AccelFlags {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<AccelFlags>;
    }

    /**
     * Accelerator flags used with `gtk_accel_group_connect()`.
     * @gir-type Flags
     */
    enum AccelFlags {
        /**
         * Accelerator is visible
         */
        VISIBLE,
        /**
         * Accelerator not removable
         */
        LOCKED,
        /**
         * Mask
         */
        MASK,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Flags
     */
    export namespace ApplicationInhibitFlags {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<ApplicationInhibitFlags>;
    }

    /**
     * Types of user actions that may be blocked by `gtk_application_inhibit()`.
     * @gir-type Flags
     * @since 3.4
     */
    enum ApplicationInhibitFlags {
        /**
         * Inhibit ending the user session
         *     by logging out or by shutting down the computer
         */
        LOGOUT,
        /**
         * Inhibit user switching
         */
        SWITCH,
        /**
         * Inhibit suspending the
         *     session or computer
         */
        SUSPEND,
        /**
         * Inhibit the session being
         *     marked as idle (and possibly locked)
         */
        IDLE,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Flags
     */
    export namespace AttachOptions {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<AttachOptions>;
    }

    /**
     * Denotes the expansion properties that a widget will have when it (or its
     * parent) is resized.
     * @gir-type Flags
     */
    enum AttachOptions {
        /**
         * the widget should expand to take up any extra space in its
         * container that has been allocated.
         */
        EXPAND,
        /**
         * the widget should shrink as and when possible.
         */
        SHRINK,
        /**
         * the widget should fill the space allocated to it.
         */
        FILL,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Flags
     */
    export namespace CalendarDisplayOptions {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<CalendarDisplayOptions>;
    }

    /**
     * These options can be used to influence the display and behaviour of a {@link Gtk.Calendar}.
     * @gir-type Flags
     */
    enum CalendarDisplayOptions {
        /**
         * Specifies that the month and year should be displayed.
         */
        SHOW_HEADING,
        /**
         * Specifies that three letter day descriptions should be present.
         */
        SHOW_DAY_NAMES,
        /**
         * Prevents the user from switching months with the calendar.
         */
        NO_MONTH_CHANGE,
        /**
         * Displays each week numbers of the current year, down the
         * left side of the calendar.
         */
        SHOW_WEEK_NUMBERS,
        /**
         * Just show an indicator, not the full details
         * text when details are provided. See `gtk_calendar_set_detail_func()`.
         */
        SHOW_DETAILS,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Flags
     */
    export namespace CellRendererState {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<CellRendererState>;
    }

    /**
     * Tells how a cell is to be rendered.
     * @gir-type Flags
     */
    enum CellRendererState {
        /**
         * The cell is currently selected, and
         *  probably has a selection colored background to render to.
         */
        SELECTED,
        /**
         * The mouse is hovering over the cell.
         */
        PRELIT,
        /**
         * The cell is drawn in an insensitive manner
         */
        INSENSITIVE,
        /**
         * The cell is in a sorted row
         */
        SORTED,
        /**
         * The cell is in the focus row.
         */
        FOCUSED,
        /**
         * The cell is in a row that can be expanded. Since 3.4
         */
        EXPANDABLE,
        /**
         * The cell is in a row that is expanded. Since 3.4
         */
        EXPANDED,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Flags
     */
    export namespace DebugFlag {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<DebugFlag>;
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Flags
     */
    enum DebugFlag {
        MISC,
        PLUGSOCKET,
        TEXT,
        TREE,
        UPDATES,
        KEYBINDINGS,
        MULTIHEAD,
        MODULES,
        GEOMETRY,
        ICONTHEME,
        PRINTING,
        BUILDER,
        SIZE_REQUEST,
        NO_CSS_CACHE,
        BASELINES,
        PIXEL_CACHE,
        NO_PIXEL_CACHE,
        INTERACTIVE,
        TOUCHSCREEN,
        ACTIONS,
        RESIZE,
        LAYOUT,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Flags
     */
    export namespace DestDefaults {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<DestDefaults>;
    }

    /**
     * The {@link Gtk.DestDefaults} enumeration specifies the various
     * types of action that will be taken on behalf
     * of the user for a drag destination site.
     * @gir-type Flags
     */
    enum DestDefaults {
        /**
         * If set for a widget, GTK+, during a drag over this
         *   widget will check if the drag matches this widget’s list of possible targets
         *   and actions.
         *   GTK+ will then call `gdk_drag_status()` as appropriate.
         */
        MOTION,
        /**
         * If set for a widget, GTK+ will draw a highlight on
         *   this widget as long as a drag is over this widget and the widget drag format
         *   and action are acceptable.
         */
        HIGHLIGHT,
        /**
         * If set for a widget, when a drop occurs, GTK+ will
         *   will check if the drag matches this widget’s list of possible targets and
         *   actions. If so, GTK+ will call `gtk_drag_get_data()` on behalf of the widget.
         *   Whether or not the drop is successful, GTK+ will call `gtk_drag_finish()`. If
         *   the action was a move, then if the drag was successful, then `true` will be
         *   passed for the `delete` parameter to `gtk_drag_finish()`.
         */
        DROP,
        /**
         * If set, specifies that all default actions should
         *   be taken.
         */
        ALL,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Flags
     */
    export namespace DialogFlags {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<DialogFlags>;
    }

    /**
     * Flags used to influence dialog construction.
     * @gir-type Flags
     */
    enum DialogFlags {
        /**
         * Make the constructed dialog modal,
         *     see `gtk_window_set_modal()`
         */
        MODAL,
        /**
         * Destroy the dialog when its
         *     parent is destroyed, see `gtk_window_set_destroy_with_parent()`
         */
        DESTROY_WITH_PARENT,
        /**
         * Create dialog with actions in header
         *     bar instead of action area. Since 3.12.
         */
        USE_HEADER_BAR,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Flags
     */
    export namespace EventControllerScrollFlags {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<EventControllerScrollFlags>;
    }

    /**
     * Describes the behavior of a {@link Gtk.EventControllerScroll}.
     * @gir-type Flags
     * @since 3.24
     */
    enum EventControllerScrollFlags {
        /**
         * Don't emit scroll.
         */
        NONE,
        /**
         * Emit scroll with vertical deltas.
         */
        VERTICAL,
        /**
         * Emit scroll with horizontal deltas.
         */
        HORIZONTAL,
        /**
         * Only emit deltas that are multiples of 1.
         */
        DISCRETE,
        /**
         * Emit {@link Gtk.EventControllerScroll.SignalSignatures.decelerate | Gtk.EventControllerScroll::decelerate}
         *   after continuous scroll finishes.
         */
        KINETIC,
        /**
         * Emit scroll on both axes.
         */
        BOTH_AXES,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Flags
     */
    export namespace FileFilterFlags {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<FileFilterFlags>;
    }

    /**
     * These flags indicate what parts of a {@link Gtk.FileFilterInfo} struct
     * are filled or need to be filled.
     * @gir-type Flags
     */
    enum FileFilterFlags {
        /**
         * the filename of the file being tested
         */
        FILENAME,
        /**
         * the URI for the file being tested
         */
        URI,
        /**
         * the string that will be used to
         *   display the file in the file chooser
         */
        DISPLAY_NAME,
        /**
         * the mime type of the file
         */
        MIME_TYPE,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Flags
     */
    export namespace FontChooserLevel {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<FontChooserLevel>;
    }

    /**
     * This enumeration specifies the granularity of font selection
     * that is desired in a font chooser.
     * 
     * This enumeration may be extended in the future; applications should
     * ignore unknown values.
     * @gir-type Flags
     */
    enum FontChooserLevel {
        /**
         * Allow selecting a font family
         */
        FAMILY,
        /**
         * Allow selecting a specific font face
         */
        STYLE,
        /**
         * Allow selecting a specific font size
         */
        SIZE,
        VARIATIONS,
        /**
         * Allow selecting specific OpenType font features
         */
        FEATURES,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Flags
     */
    export namespace IconLookupFlags {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<IconLookupFlags>;
    }

    /**
     * Used to specify options for `gtk_icon_theme_lookup_icon()`
     * @gir-type Flags
     */
    enum IconLookupFlags {
        /**
         * Never get SVG icons, even if gdk-pixbuf
         *   supports them. Cannot be used together with {@link Gtk.IconLookupFlags.FORCE_SVG}.
         */
        NO_SVG,
        /**
         * Get SVG icons, even if gdk-pixbuf
         *   doesn’t support them.
         *   Cannot be used together with {@link Gtk.IconLookupFlags.NO_SVG}.
         */
        FORCE_SVG,
        /**
         * When passed to
         *   `gtk_icon_theme_lookup_icon()` includes builtin icons
         *   as well as files. For a builtin icon, `gtk_icon_info_get_filename()`
         *   is `null` and you need to call `gtk_icon_info_get_builtin_pixbuf()`.
         */
        USE_BUILTIN,
        /**
         * Try to shorten icon name at '-'
         *   characters before looking at inherited themes. This flag is only
         *   supported in functions that take a single icon name. For more general
         *   fallback, see `gtk_icon_theme_choose_icon()`. Since 2.12.
         */
        GENERIC_FALLBACK,
        /**
         * Always get the icon scaled to the
         *   requested size. Since 2.14.
         */
        FORCE_SIZE,
        /**
         * Try to always load regular icons, even
         *   when symbolic icon names are given. Since 3.14.
         */
        FORCE_REGULAR,
        /**
         * Try to always load symbolic icons, even
         *   when regular icon names are given. Since 3.14.
         */
        FORCE_SYMBOLIC,
        /**
         * Try to load a variant of the icon for left-to-right
         *   text direction. Since 3.14.
         */
        DIR_LTR,
        /**
         * Try to load a variant of the icon for right-to-left
         *   text direction. Since 3.14.
         */
        DIR_RTL,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Flags
     */
    export namespace InputHints {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<InputHints>;
    }

    /**
     * Describes hints that might be taken into account by input methods
     * or applications. Note that input methods may already tailor their
     * behaviour according to the {@link Gtk.InputPurpose} of the entry.
     * 
     * Some common sense is expected when using these flags - mixing
     * `GTK_INPUT_HINT_LOWERCASE` with any of the uppercase hints makes no sense.
     * 
     * This enumeration may be extended in the future; input methods should
     * ignore unknown values.
     * @gir-type Flags
     * @since 3.6
     */
    enum InputHints {
        /**
         * No special behaviour suggested
         */
        NONE,
        /**
         * Suggest checking for typos
         */
        SPELLCHECK,
        /**
         * Suggest not checking for typos
         */
        NO_SPELLCHECK,
        /**
         * Suggest word completion
         */
        WORD_COMPLETION,
        /**
         * Suggest to convert all text to lowercase
         */
        LOWERCASE,
        /**
         * Suggest to capitalize all text
         */
        UPPERCASE_CHARS,
        /**
         * Suggest to capitalize the first
         *     character of each word
         */
        UPPERCASE_WORDS,
        /**
         * Suggest to capitalize the
         *     first word of each sentence
         */
        UPPERCASE_SENTENCES,
        /**
         * Suggest to not show an onscreen keyboard
         *     (e.g for a calculator that already has all the keys).
         */
        INHIBIT_OSK,
        /**
         * The text is vertical. Since 3.18
         */
        VERTICAL_WRITING,
        /**
         * Suggest offering Emoji support. Since 3.22.20
         */
        EMOJI,
        /**
         * Suggest not offering Emoji support. Since 3.22.20
         */
        NO_EMOJI,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Flags
     */
    export namespace JunctionSides {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<JunctionSides>;
    }

    /**
     * Describes how a rendered element connects to adjacent elements.
     * @gir-type Flags
     */
    enum JunctionSides {
        /**
         * No junctions.
         */
        NONE,
        /**
         * Element connects on the top-left corner.
         */
        CORNER_TOPLEFT,
        /**
         * Element connects on the top-right corner.
         */
        CORNER_TOPRIGHT,
        /**
         * Element connects on the bottom-left corner.
         */
        CORNER_BOTTOMLEFT,
        /**
         * Element connects on the bottom-right corner.
         */
        CORNER_BOTTOMRIGHT,
        /**
         * Element connects on the top side.
         */
        TOP,
        /**
         * Element connects on the bottom side.
         */
        BOTTOM,
        /**
         * Element connects on the left side.
         */
        LEFT,
        /**
         * Element connects on the right side.
         */
        RIGHT,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Flags
     */
    export namespace PlacesOpenFlags {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<PlacesOpenFlags>;
    }

    /**
     * These flags serve two purposes.  First, the application can call `gtk_places_sidebar_set_open_flags()`
     * using these flags as a bitmask.  This tells the sidebar that the application is able to open
     * folders selected from the sidebar in various ways, for example, in new tabs or in new windows in
     * addition to the normal mode.
     * 
     * Second, when one of these values gets passed back to the application in the
     * {@link Gtk.PlacesSidebar.SignalSignatures.open_location | Gtk.PlacesSidebar::open-location} signal, it means that the application should
     * open the selected location in the normal way, in a new tab, or in a new
     * window.  The sidebar takes care of determining the desired way to open the location,
     * based on the modifier keys that the user is pressing at the time the selection is made.
     * 
     * If the application never calls `gtk_places_sidebar_set_open_flags()`, then the sidebar will only
     * use #GTK_PLACES_OPEN_NORMAL in the {@link Gtk.PlacesSidebar.SignalSignatures.open_location | Gtk.PlacesSidebar::open-location} signal.  This is the
     * default mode of operation.
     * @gir-type Flags
     */
    enum PlacesOpenFlags {
        /**
         * This is the default mode that {@link Gtk.PlacesSidebar} uses if no other flags
         *  are specified.  It indicates that the calling application should open the selected location
         *  in the normal way, for example, in the folder view beside the sidebar.
         */
        NORMAL,
        /**
         * When passed to `gtk_places_sidebar_set_open_flags()`, this indicates
         *  that the application can open folders selected from the sidebar in new tabs.  This value
         *  will be passed to the {@link Gtk.PlacesSidebar.SignalSignatures.open_location | Gtk.PlacesSidebar::open-location} signal when the user selects
         *  that a location be opened in a new tab instead of in the standard fashion.
         */
        NEW_TAB,
        /**
         * Similar to `GTK_PLACES_OPEN_NEW_TAB`, but indicates that the application
         *  can open folders in new windows.
         */
        NEW_WINDOW,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Flags
     */
    export namespace RcFlags {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<RcFlags>;
    }

    /**
     * Deprecated
     * @gir-type Flags
     */
    enum RcFlags {
        /**
         * Deprecated
         */
        FG,
        /**
         * Deprecated
         */
        BG,
        /**
         * Deprecated
         */
        TEXT,
        /**
         * Deprecated
         */
        BASE,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Flags
     */
    export namespace RecentFilterFlags {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<RecentFilterFlags>;
    }

    /**
     * These flags indicate what parts of a {@link Gtk.RecentFilterInfo} struct
     * are filled or need to be filled.
     * @gir-type Flags
     */
    enum RecentFilterFlags {
        /**
         * the URI of the file being tested
         */
        URI,
        /**
         * the string that will be used to
         *  display the file in the recent chooser
         */
        DISPLAY_NAME,
        /**
         * the mime type of the file
         */
        MIME_TYPE,
        /**
         * the list of applications that have
         *  registered the file
         */
        APPLICATION,
        /**
         * the groups to which the file belongs to
         */
        GROUP,
        /**
         * the number of days elapsed since the file
         *  has been registered
         */
        AGE,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Flags
     */
    export namespace RegionFlags {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<RegionFlags>;
    }

    /**
     * Describes a region within a widget.
     * @gir-type Flags
     */
    enum RegionFlags {
        /**
         * Region has an even number within a set.
         */
        EVEN,
        /**
         * Region has an odd number within a set.
         */
        ODD,
        /**
         * Region is the first one within a set.
         */
        FIRST,
        /**
         * Region is the last one within a set.
         */
        LAST,
        /**
         * Region is the only one within a set.
         */
        ONLY,
        /**
         * Region is part of a sorted area.
         */
        SORTED,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Flags
     */
    export namespace StateFlags {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<StateFlags>;
    }

    /**
     * Describes a widget state. Widget states are used to match the widget
     * against CSS pseudo-classes. Note that GTK extends the regular CSS
     * classes and sometimes uses different names.
     * @gir-type Flags
     */
    enum StateFlags {
        /**
         * State during normal operation.
         */
        NORMAL,
        /**
         * Widget is active.
         */
        ACTIVE,
        /**
         * Widget has a mouse pointer over it.
         */
        PRELIGHT,
        /**
         * Widget is selected.
         */
        SELECTED,
        /**
         * Widget is insensitive.
         */
        INSENSITIVE,
        /**
         * Widget is inconsistent.
         */
        INCONSISTENT,
        /**
         * Widget has the keyboard focus.
         */
        FOCUSED,
        /**
         * Widget is in a background toplevel window.
         */
        BACKDROP,
        /**
         * Widget is in left-to-right text direction. Since 3.8
         */
        DIR_LTR,
        /**
         * Widget is in right-to-left text direction. Since 3.8
         */
        DIR_RTL,
        /**
         * Widget is a link. Since 3.12
         */
        LINK,
        /**
         * The location the widget points to has already been visited. Since 3.12
         */
        VISITED,
        /**
         * Widget is checked. Since 3.14
         */
        CHECKED,
        /**
         * Widget is highlighted as a drop target for DND. Since 3.20
         */
        DROP_ACTIVE,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Flags
     */
    export namespace StyleContextPrintFlags {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<StyleContextPrintFlags>;
    }

    /**
     * Flags that modify the behavior of `gtk_style_context_to_string()`.
     * New values may be added to this enumeration.
     * @gir-type Flags
     */
    enum StyleContextPrintFlags {
        NONE,
        /**
         * Print the entire tree of
         *     CSS nodes starting at the style context's node
         */
        RECURSE,
        /**
         * Show the values of the
         *     CSS properties for each node
         */
        SHOW_STYLE,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Flags
     */
    export namespace TargetFlags {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<TargetFlags>;
    }

    /**
     * The {@link Gtk.TargetFlags} enumeration is used to specify
     * constraints on a {@link Gtk.TargetEntry}.
     * @gir-type Flags
     */
    enum TargetFlags {
        /**
         * If this is set, the target will only be selected
         *   for drags within a single application.
         */
        SAME_APP,
        /**
         * If this is set, the target will only be selected
         *   for drags within a single widget.
         */
        SAME_WIDGET,
        /**
         * If this is set, the target will not be selected
         *   for drags within a single application.
         */
        OTHER_APP,
        /**
         * If this is set, the target will not be selected
         *   for drags withing a single widget.
         */
        OTHER_WIDGET,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Flags
     */
    export namespace TextSearchFlags {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<TextSearchFlags>;
    }

    /**
     * Flags affecting how a search is done.
     * 
     * If neither #GTK_TEXT_SEARCH_VISIBLE_ONLY nor #GTK_TEXT_SEARCH_TEXT_ONLY are
     * enabled, the match must be exact; the special 0xFFFC character will match
     * embedded pixbufs or child widgets.
     * @gir-type Flags
     */
    enum TextSearchFlags {
        /**
         * Search only visible data. A search match may
         * have invisible text interspersed.
         */
        VISIBLE_ONLY,
        /**
         * Search only text. A match may have pixbufs or
         * child widgets mixed inside the matched range.
         */
        TEXT_ONLY,
        /**
         * The text will be matched regardless of
         * what case it is in.
         */
        CASE_INSENSITIVE,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Flags
     */
    export namespace ToolPaletteDragTargets {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<ToolPaletteDragTargets>;
    }

    /**
     * Flags used to specify the supported drag targets.
     * @gir-type Flags
     */
    enum ToolPaletteDragTargets {
        /**
         * Support drag of items.
         */
        ITEMS,
        /**
         * Support drag of groups.
         */
        GROUPS,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Flags
     */
    export namespace TreeModelFlags {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<TreeModelFlags>;
    }

    /**
     * These flags indicate various properties of a {@link Gtk.TreeModel}.
     * 
     * They are returned by `gtk_tree_model_get_flags()`, and must be
     * static for the lifetime of the object. A more complete description
     * of #GTK_TREE_MODEL_ITERS_PERSIST can be found in the overview of
     * this section.
     * @gir-type Flags
     */
    enum TreeModelFlags {
        /**
         * iterators survive all signals
         *     emitted by the tree
         */
        ITERS_PERSIST,
        /**
         * the model is a list only, and never
         *     has children
         */
        LIST_ONLY,
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Flags
     */
    export namespace UIManagerItemType {
        export const $gtype: GObject.GType<UIManagerItemType>;
    }

    /**
     * These enumeration values are used by `gtk_ui_manager_add_ui()` to determine
     * what UI element to create.
     * @gir-type Flags
     * @deprecated since 3.10
     */
    enum UIManagerItemType {
        /**
         * Pick the type of the UI element according to context.
         */
        AUTO,
        /**
         * Create a menubar.
         */
        MENUBAR,
        /**
         * Create a menu.
         */
        MENU,
        /**
         * Create a toolbar.
         */
        TOOLBAR,
        /**
         * Insert a placeholder.
         */
        PLACEHOLDER,
        /**
         * Create a popup menu.
         */
        POPUP,
        /**
         * Create a menuitem.
         */
        MENUITEM,
        /**
         * Create a toolitem.
         */
        TOOLITEM,
        /**
         * Create a separator.
         */
        SEPARATOR,
        /**
         * Install an accelerator.
         */
        ACCELERATOR,
        /**
         * Same as {@link Gtk.UIManagerItemType.POPUP}, but the
         *   actions’ accelerators are shown.
         */
        POPUP_WITH_ACCELS,
    }


    namespace AboutDialog {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Dialog.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * The signal which gets emitted to activate a URI.
             * Applications may connect to it to override the default behaviour,
             * which is to call `gtk_show_uri_on_window()`.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.24
             * @run-last
             */
            "activate-link": (arg0: string) => boolean | void;
            "notify::artists": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::authors": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::comments": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::copyright": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::documenters": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::license": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::license-type": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::logo": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::logo-icon-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::program-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::translator-credits": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::version": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::website": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::website-label": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::wrap-license": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-header-bar": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accept-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::application": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::attached-to": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::decorated": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::default-height": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::default-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::deletable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::destroy-with-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-map": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gravity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-resize-grip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-toplevel-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hide-titlebar-when-maximized": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::icon": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::icon-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-active": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-maximized": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::mnemonics-visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::modal": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resizable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-grip-visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::screen": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::skip-pager-hint": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::skip-taskbar-hint": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::startup-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::title": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::transient-for": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::type": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::type-hint": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::urgency-hint": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window-position": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Dialog.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {
            artists: string[];
            authors: string[];
            comments: string;
            copyright: string;
            documenters: string[];
            license: string;
            license_type: License;
            licenseType: License;
            logo: GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf;
            logo_icon_name: string;
            logoIconName: string;
            program_name: string;
            programName: string;
            translator_credits: string;
            translatorCredits: string;
            version: string;
            website: string;
            website_label: string;
            websiteLabel: string;
            wrap_license: boolean;
            wrapLicense: boolean;
        }
    }

    /**
     * The GtkAboutDialog offers a simple way to display information about
     * a program like its logo, name, copyright, website and license. It is
     * also possible to give credits to the authors, documenters, translators
     * and artists who have worked on the program. An about dialog is typically
     * opened when the user selects the `About` option from the `Help` menu.
     * All parts of the dialog are optional.
     * 
     * About dialogs often contain links and email addresses. GtkAboutDialog
     * displays these as clickable links. By default, it calls `gtk_show_uri_on_window()`
     * when a user clicks one. The behaviour can be overridden with the
     * {@link Gtk.AboutDialog.SignalSignatures.activate_link | Gtk.AboutDialog::activate-link} signal.
     * 
     * To specify a person with an email address, use a string like
     * "Edgar Allan Poe <edgar\`poe`.com>". To specify a website with a title,
     * use a string like "GTK+ team http://www.gtk.org".
     * 
     * To make constructing a GtkAboutDialog as convenient as possible, you can
     * use the function `gtk_show_about_dialog()` which constructs and shows a dialog
     * and keeps it around so that it can be shown again.
     * 
     * Note that GTK+ sets a default title of `_("About %s")` on the dialog
     * window (where \%s is replaced by the name of the application, but in
     * order to ensure proper translation of the title, applications should
     * set the title property explicitly when constructing a GtkAboutDialog,
     * as shown in the following example:
     * 
     * ```c
     * GdkPixbuf *example_logo = gdk_pixbuf_new_from_file ("./logo.png", NULL);
     * gtk_show_about_dialog (NULL,
     *                        "program-name", "ExampleCode",
     *                        "logo", example_logo,
     *                        "title", _("About ExampleCode"),
     *                        NULL);
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * It is also possible to show a {@link Gtk.AboutDialog} like any other {@link Gtk.Dialog},
     * e.g. using `gtk_dialog_run()`. In this case, you might need to know that
     * the “Close” button returns the #GTK_RESPONSE_CANCEL response id.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class AboutDialog extends Dialog implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<AboutDialog>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * The people who contributed artwork to the program, as a `null`-terminated
         * array of strings. Each string may contain email addresses and URLs, which
         * will be displayed as links, see the introduction for more details.
         * @since 2.6
         */
        get artists(): string[];
        set artists(val: string[]);

        /**
         * The authors of the program, as a `null`-terminated array of strings.
         * Each string may contain email addresses and URLs, which will be displayed
         * as links, see the introduction for more details.
         * @since 2.6
         */
        get authors(): string[];
        set authors(val: string[]);

        /**
         * Comments about the program. This string is displayed in a label
         * in the main dialog, thus it should be a short explanation of
         * the main purpose of the program, not a detailed list of features.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default null
         */
        get comments(): string;
        set comments(val: string);

        /**
         * Copyright information for the program.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default null
         */
        get copyright(): string;
        set copyright(val: string);

        /**
         * The people documenting the program, as a `null`-terminated array of strings.
         * Each string may contain email addresses and URLs, which will be displayed
         * as links, see the introduction for more details.
         * @since 2.6
         */
        get documenters(): string[];
        set documenters(val: string[]);

        /**
         * The license of the program. This string is displayed in a
         * text view in a secondary dialog, therefore it is fine to use
         * a long multi-paragraph text. Note that the text is only wrapped
         * in the text view if the "wrap-license" property is set to `true`;
         * otherwise the text itself must contain the intended linebreaks.
         * When setting this property to a non-`null` value, the
         * {@link Gtk.AboutDialog.license_type} property is set to {@link Gtk.License.CUSTOM}
         * as a side effect.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default null
         */
        get license(): string;
        set license(val: string);

        /**
         * The license of the program, as a value of the %GtkLicense enumeration.
         * 
         * The {@link Gtk.AboutDialog} will automatically fill out a standard disclaimer
         * and link the user to the appropriate online resource for the license
         * text.
         * 
         * If {@link Gtk.License.UNKNOWN} is used, the link used will be the same
         * specified in the {@link Gtk.AboutDialog.website} property.
         * 
         * If {@link Gtk.License.CUSTOM} is used, the current contents of the
         * {@link Gtk.AboutDialog.license} property are used.
         * 
         * For any other {@link Gtk.License} value, the contents of the
         * {@link Gtk.AboutDialog.license} property are also set by this property as
         * a side effect.
         * @since 3.0
         * @default Gtk.License.UNKNOWN
         */
        get license_type(): License;
        set license_type(val: License);

        /**
         * The license of the program, as a value of the %GtkLicense enumeration.
         * 
         * The {@link Gtk.AboutDialog} will automatically fill out a standard disclaimer
         * and link the user to the appropriate online resource for the license
         * text.
         * 
         * If {@link Gtk.License.UNKNOWN} is used, the link used will be the same
         * specified in the {@link Gtk.AboutDialog.website} property.
         * 
         * If {@link Gtk.License.CUSTOM} is used, the current contents of the
         * {@link Gtk.AboutDialog.license} property are used.
         * 
         * For any other {@link Gtk.License} value, the contents of the
         * {@link Gtk.AboutDialog.license} property are also set by this property as
         * a side effect.
         * @since 3.0
         * @default Gtk.License.UNKNOWN
         */
        get licenseType(): License;
        set licenseType(val: License);

        /**
         * A logo for the about box. If it is `null`, the default window icon
         * set with `gtk_window_set_default_icon()` will be used.
         * @since 2.6
         */
        get logo(): GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf;
        set logo(val: GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf);

        /**
         * A named icon to use as the logo for the about box. This property
         * overrides the {@link Gtk.AboutDialog.logo} property.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default image-missing
         */
        get logo_icon_name(): string;
        set logo_icon_name(val: string);

        /**
         * A named icon to use as the logo for the about box. This property
         * overrides the {@link Gtk.AboutDialog.logo} property.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default image-missing
         */
        get logoIconName(): string;
        set logoIconName(val: string);

        /**
         * The name of the program.
         * If this is not set, it defaults to `g_get_application_name()`.
         * @since 2.12
         * @default null
         */
        get program_name(): string;
        set program_name(val: string);

        /**
         * The name of the program.
         * If this is not set, it defaults to `g_get_application_name()`.
         * @since 2.12
         * @default null
         */
        get programName(): string;
        set programName(val: string);

        /**
         * Credits to the translators. This string should be marked as translatable.
         * The string may contain email addresses and URLs, which will be displayed
         * as links, see the introduction for more details.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default null
         */
        get translator_credits(): string;
        set translator_credits(val: string);

        /**
         * Credits to the translators. This string should be marked as translatable.
         * The string may contain email addresses and URLs, which will be displayed
         * as links, see the introduction for more details.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default null
         */
        get translatorCredits(): string;
        set translatorCredits(val: string);

        /**
         * The version of the program.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default null
         */
        get version(): string;
        set version(val: string);

        /**
         * The URL for the link to the website of the program.
         * This should be a string starting with "http://.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default null
         */
        get website(): string;
        set website(val: string);

        /**
         * The label for the link to the website of the program.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default null
         */
        get website_label(): string;
        set website_label(val: string);

        /**
         * The label for the link to the website of the program.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default null
         */
        get websiteLabel(): string;
        set websiteLabel(val: string);

        /**
         * Whether to wrap the text in the license dialog.
         * @since 2.8
         * @default false
         */
        get wrap_license(): boolean;
        set wrap_license(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether to wrap the text in the license dialog.
         * @since 2.8
         * @default false
         */
        get wrapLicense(): boolean;
        set wrapLicense(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: AboutDialog.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<AboutDialog.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): AboutDialog;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof AboutDialog.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, AboutDialog.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof AboutDialog.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, AboutDialog.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof AboutDialog.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<AboutDialog.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * @param uri 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_activate_link(uri: string): boolean;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Creates a new section in the Credits page.
         * @param section_name The name of the section
         * @param people The people who belong to that section
         */
        add_credit_section(section_name: string, people: string[]): void;

        /**
         * Returns the string which are displayed in the artists tab
         * of the secondary credits dialog.
         * @returns A  `null`-terminated string array containing the artists. The array is  owned by the about dialog and must not be modified.
         */
        get_artists(): string[];

        /**
         * Returns the string which are displayed in the authors tab
         * of the secondary credits dialog.
         * @returns A  `null`-terminated string array containing the authors. The array is  owned by the about dialog and must not be modified.
         */
        get_authors(): string[];

        /**
         * Returns the comments string.
         * @returns The comments. The string is owned by the about  dialog and must not be modified.
         */
        get_comments(): string;

        /**
         * Returns the copyright string.
         * @returns The copyright string. The string is owned by the about  dialog and must not be modified.
         */
        get_copyright(): string;

        /**
         * Returns the string which are displayed in the documenters
         * tab of the secondary credits dialog.
         * @returns A  `null`-terminated string array containing the documenters. The  array is owned by the about dialog and must not be modified.
         */
        get_documenters(): string[];

        /**
         * Returns the license information.
         * @returns The license information. The string is owned by the about  dialog and must not be modified.
         */
        get_license(): string;

        /**
         * Retrieves the license set using `gtk_about_dialog_set_license_type()`
         * @returns a {@link Gtk.License} value
         */
        get_license_type(): License;

        /**
         * Returns the pixbuf displayed as logo in the about dialog.
         * @returns the pixbuf displayed as logo. The   pixbuf is owned by the about dialog. If you want to keep a   reference to it, you have to call `g_object_ref()` on it.
         */
        get_logo(): GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf;

        /**
         * Returns the icon name displayed as logo in the about dialog.
         * @returns the icon name displayed as logo. The string is   owned by the dialog. If you want to keep a reference   to it, you have to call `g_strdup()` on it.
         */
        get_logo_icon_name(): string;

        /**
         * Returns the program name displayed in the about dialog.
         * @returns The program name. The string is owned by the about  dialog and must not be modified.
         */
        get_program_name(): string;

        /**
         * Returns the translator credits string which is displayed
         * in the translators tab of the secondary credits dialog.
         * @returns The translator credits string. The string is   owned by the about dialog and must not be modified.
         */
        get_translator_credits(): string;

        /**
         * Returns the version string.
         * @returns The version string. The string is owned by the about  dialog and must not be modified.
         */
        get_version(): string;

        /**
         * Returns the website URL.
         * @returns The website URL. The string is owned by the about  dialog and must not be modified.
         */
        get_website(): string;

        /**
         * Returns the label used for the website link.
         * @returns The label used for the website link. The string is     owned by the about dialog and must not be modified.
         */
        get_website_label(): string;

        /**
         * Returns whether the license text in `about` is
         * automatically wrapped.
         * @returns `true` if the license text is wrapped
         */
        get_wrap_license(): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the strings which are displayed in the artists tab
         * of the secondary credits dialog.
         * @param artists a `null`-terminated array of strings
         */
        set_artists(artists: string[]): void;

        /**
         * Sets the strings which are displayed in the authors tab
         * of the secondary credits dialog.
         * @param authors a `null`-terminated array of strings
         */
        set_authors(authors: string[]): void;

        /**
         * Sets the comments string to display in the about dialog.
         * This should be a short string of one or two lines.
         * @param comments a comments string
         */
        set_comments(comments: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the copyright string to display in the about dialog.
         * This should be a short string of one or two lines.
         * @param copyright the copyright string
         */
        set_copyright(copyright: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the strings which are displayed in the documenters tab
         * of the secondary credits dialog.
         * @param documenters a `null`-terminated array of strings
         */
        set_documenters(documenters: string[]): void;

        /**
         * Sets the license information to be displayed in the secondary
         * license dialog. If `license` is `null`, the license button is
         * hidden.
         * @param license the license information or `null`
         */
        set_license(license: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the license of the application showing the `about` dialog from a
         * list of known licenses.
         * 
         * This function overrides the license set using
         * `gtk_about_dialog_set_license()`.
         * @param license_type the type of license
         */
        set_license_type(license_type: License): void;

        /**
         * Sets the pixbuf to be displayed as logo in the about dialog.
         * If it is `null`, the default window icon set with
         * `gtk_window_set_default_icon()` will be used.
         * @param logo a {@link GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf}, or `null`
         */
        set_logo(logo: GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the pixbuf to be displayed as logo in the about dialog.
         * If it is `null`, the default window icon set with
         * `gtk_window_set_default_icon()` will be used.
         * @param icon_name an icon name, or `null`
         */
        set_logo_icon_name(icon_name: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the name to display in the about dialog.
         * If this is not set, it defaults to `g_get_application_name()`.
         * @param name the program name
         */
        set_program_name(name: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets the translator credits string which is displayed in
         * the translators tab of the secondary credits dialog.
         * 
         * The intended use for this string is to display the translator
         * of the language which is currently used in the user interface.
         * Using `gettext()`, a simple way to achieve that is to mark the
         * string for translation:
         * 
         * ```c
         * GtkWidget *about = gtk_about_dialog_new ();
         * gtk_about_dialog_set_translator_credits (GTK_ABOUT_DIALOG (about),
         *                                          _("translator-credits"));
         * ```
         * 
         * It is a good idea to use the customary msgid “translator-credits” for this
         * purpose, since translators will already know the purpose of that msgid, and
         * since {@link Gtk.AboutDialog} will detect if “translator-credits” is untranslated
         * and hide the tab.
         * @param translator_credits the translator credits
         */
        set_translator_credits(translator_credits: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the version string to display in the about dialog.
         * @param version the version string
         */
        set_version(version: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the URL to use for the website link.
         * @param website a URL string starting with "http://"
         */
        set_website(website: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the label to be used for the website link.
         * @param website_label the label used for the website link
         */
        set_website_label(website_label: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the license text in `about` is
         * automatically wrapped.
         * @param wrap_license whether to wrap the license
         */
        set_wrap_license(wrap_license: boolean): void;
    }


    namespace AccelGroup {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends GObject.Object.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * The accel-activate signal is an implementation detail of
             * {@link Gtk.AccelGroup} and not meant to be used by applications.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             */
            "accel-activate": (arg0: GObject.Object, arg1: number, arg2: Gdk.ModifierType) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * The accel-changed signal is emitted when an entry
             * is added to or removed from the accel group.
             * 
             * Widgets like {@link Gtk.AccelLabel} which display an associated
             * accelerator should connect to this signal, and rebuild
             * their visual representation if the `accel_closure` is theirs.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "accel-changed": (arg0: number, arg1: Gdk.ModifierType, arg2: GObject.Closure) => void;
            "notify::is-locked": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::modifier-mask": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            /**
             * The accel-activate signal is an implementation detail of
             * {@link Gtk.AccelGroup} and not meant to be used by applications.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             */
            "accel-activate::is-locked": (arg0: GObject.Object, arg1: number, arg2: Gdk.ModifierType) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * The accel-activate signal is an implementation detail of
             * {@link Gtk.AccelGroup} and not meant to be used by applications.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             */
            "accel-activate::modifier-mask": (arg0: GObject.Object, arg1: number, arg2: Gdk.ModifierType) => boolean | void;
            [key: `accel-activate::${string}`]: (arg0: GObject.Object, arg1: number, arg2: Gdk.ModifierType) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * The accel-changed signal is emitted when an entry
             * is added to or removed from the accel group.
             * 
             * Widgets like {@link Gtk.AccelLabel} which display an associated
             * accelerator should connect to this signal, and rebuild
             * their visual representation if the `accel_closure` is theirs.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "accel-changed::is-locked": (arg0: number, arg1: Gdk.ModifierType, arg2: GObject.Closure) => void;
            /**
             * The accel-changed signal is emitted when an entry
             * is added to or removed from the accel group.
             * 
             * Widgets like {@link Gtk.AccelLabel} which display an associated
             * accelerator should connect to this signal, and rebuild
             * their visual representation if the `accel_closure` is theirs.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "accel-changed::modifier-mask": (arg0: number, arg1: Gdk.ModifierType, arg2: GObject.Closure) => void;
            [key: `accel-changed::${string}`]: (arg0: number, arg1: Gdk.ModifierType, arg2: GObject.Closure) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.Object.ConstructorProps {
            is_locked: boolean;
            isLocked: boolean;
            modifier_mask: Gdk.ModifierType;
            modifierMask: Gdk.ModifierType;
        }
    }

    /**
     * A {@link Gtk.AccelGroup} represents a group of keyboard accelerators,
     * typically attached to a toplevel {@link Gtk.Window} (with
     * `gtk_window_add_accel_group()`). Usually you won’t need to create a
     * {@link Gtk.AccelGroup} directly; instead, when using {@link Gtk.UIManager}, GTK+
     * automatically sets up the accelerators for your menus in the ui
     * manager’s {@link Gtk.AccelGroup}.
     * 
     * Note that “accelerators” are different from
     * “mnemonics”. Accelerators are shortcuts for
     * activating a menu item; they appear alongside the menu item they’re a
     * shortcut for. For example “Ctrl+Q” might appear alongside the “Quit”
     * menu item. Mnemonics are shortcuts for GUI elements such as text
     * entries or buttons; they appear as underlined characters. See
     * `gtk_label_new_with_mnemonic()`. Menu items can have both accelerators
     * and mnemonics, of course.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class AccelGroup extends GObject.Object {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<AccelGroup>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * @read-only
         * @default false
         */
        get is_locked(): boolean;

        /**
         * @read-only
         * @default false
         */
        get isLocked(): boolean;

        /**
         * @read-only
         * @default 0
         */
        get modifier_mask(): Gdk.ModifierType;

        /**
         * @read-only
         * @default 0
         */
        get modifierMask(): Gdk.ModifierType;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: AccelGroup.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<AccelGroup.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): AccelGroup;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof AccelGroup.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, AccelGroup.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof AccelGroup.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, AccelGroup.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof AccelGroup.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<AccelGroup.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Static methods
        /**
         * Finds the {@link Gtk.AccelGroup} to which `closure` is connected;
         * see `gtk_accel_group_connect()`.
         * @param closure a {@link GObject.Closure}
         */
        static from_accel_closure(closure: GObject.Closure): AccelGroup | null;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * Signal emitted when an entry is added to or removed
         *    from the accel group.
         * @param keyval 
         * @param modifier 
         * @param accel_closure 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_accel_changed(keyval: number, modifier: Gdk.ModifierType, accel_closure: GObject.Closure): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Finds the first accelerator in `accel_group` that matches
         * `accel_key` and `accel_mods`, and activates it.
         * @param accel_quark the quark for the accelerator name
         * @param acceleratable the {@link GObject.Object}, usually a {@link Gtk.Window}, on which    to activate the accelerator
         * @param accel_key accelerator keyval from a key event
         * @param accel_mods keyboard state mask from a key event
         * @returns `true` if an accelerator was activated and handled     this keypress
         */
        activate(accel_quark: GLib.Quark, acceleratable: GObject.Object, accel_key: number, accel_mods: Gdk.ModifierType): boolean;

        /**
         * Installs an accelerator in this group. When `accel_group` is being
         * activated in response to a call to `gtk_accel_groups_activate()`,
         * `closure` will be invoked if the `accel_key` and `accel_mods` from
         * `gtk_accel_groups_activate()` match those of this connection.
         * 
         * The signature used for the `closure` is that of {@link Gtk.AccelGroupActivate}.
         * 
         * Note that, due to implementation details, a single closure can
         * only be connected to one accelerator group.
         * @param accel_key key value of the accelerator
         * @param accel_mods modifier combination of the accelerator
         * @param accel_flags a flag mask to configure this accelerator
         * @param closure closure to be executed upon accelerator activation
         */
        connect(accel_key: number, accel_mods: Gdk.ModifierType, accel_flags: AccelFlags, closure: GObject.Closure): void;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        connect(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Installs an accelerator in this group, using an accelerator path
         * to look up the appropriate key and modifiers (see
         * `gtk_accel_map_add_entry()`). When `accel_group` is being activated
         * in response to a call to `gtk_accel_groups_activate()`, `closure` will
         * be invoked if the `accel_key` and `accel_mods` from
         * `gtk_accel_groups_activate()` match the key and modifiers for the path.
         * 
         * The signature used for the `closure` is that of {@link Gtk.AccelGroupActivate}.
         * 
         * Note that `accel_path` string will be stored in a {@link GLib.Quark}. Therefore,
         * if you pass a static string, you can save some memory by interning it
         * first with `g_intern_static_string()`.
         * @param accel_path path used for determining key and modifiers
         * @param closure closure to be executed upon accelerator activation
         */
        connect_by_path(accel_path: string, closure: GObject.Closure): void;

        /**
         * Removes an accelerator previously installed through
         * `gtk_accel_group_connect()`.
         * 
         * Since 2.20 `closure` can be `null`.
         * @param closure the closure to remove from this accelerator     group, or `null` to remove all closures
         * @returns `true` if the closure was found and got disconnected
         */
        disconnect(closure: GObject.Closure | null): boolean;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
    // Conflicted with GObject.Object.disconnect
        disconnect(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Removes an accelerator previously installed through
         * `gtk_accel_group_connect()`.
         * @param accel_key key value of the accelerator
         * @param accel_mods modifier combination of the accelerator
         * @returns `true` if there was an accelerator which could be     removed, `false` otherwise
         */
        disconnect_key(accel_key: number, accel_mods: Gdk.ModifierType): boolean;

        /**
         * Finds the first entry in an accelerator group for which
         * `find_func` returns `true` and returns its {@link Gtk.AccelKey}.
         * @param find_func a function to filter the entries    of `accel_group` with
         * @returns the key of the first entry passing    `find_func`. The key is owned by GTK+ and must not be freed.
         */
        find(find_func: AccelGroupFindFunc): AccelKey;

        /**
         * Locks are added and removed using `gtk_accel_group_lock()` and
         * `gtk_accel_group_unlock()`.
         * @returns `true` if there are 1 or more locks on the `accel_group`,     `false` otherwise.
         */
        get_is_locked(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets a {@link Gdk.ModifierType} representing the mask for this
         * `accel_group`. For example, #GDK_CONTROL_MASK, #GDK_SHIFT_MASK, etc.
         * @returns the modifier mask for this accel group.
         */
        get_modifier_mask(): Gdk.ModifierType;

        /**
         * Locks the given accelerator group.
         * 
         * Locking an acelerator group prevents the accelerators contained
         * within it to be changed during runtime. Refer to
         * `gtk_accel_map_change_entry()` about runtime accelerator changes.
         * 
         * If called more than once, `accel_group` remains locked until
         * `gtk_accel_group_unlock()` has been called an equivalent number
         * of times.
         */
        lock(): void;

        /**
         * Queries an accelerator group for all entries matching `accel_key`
         * and `accel_mods`.
         * @param accel_key key value of the accelerator
         * @param accel_mods modifier combination of the accelerator
         * @returns an array of     `n_entries` {@link Gtk.AccelGroupEntry} elements, or `null`. The array     is owned by GTK+ and must not be freed.
         */
        query(accel_key: number, accel_mods: Gdk.ModifierType): AccelGroupEntry[] | null;

        /**
         * Undoes the last call to `gtk_accel_group_lock()` on this `accel_group`.
         */
        unlock(): void;
    }


    namespace AccelLabel {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Label.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::accel-closure": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accel-widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::angle": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::attributes": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::cursor-position": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::ellipsize": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::justify": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::label": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::lines": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::max-width-chars": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::mnemonic-keyval": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::mnemonic-widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::pattern": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::selectable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::selection-bound": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::single-line-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::track-visited-links": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-underline": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-chars": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::wrap": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::wrap-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::xalign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::yalign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::xpad": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::ypad": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Label.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {
            accel_closure: GObject.Closure;
            accelClosure: GObject.Closure;
            accel_widget: Widget | null;
            accelWidget: Widget | null;
        }
    }

    /**
     * The {@link Gtk.AccelLabel} widget is a subclass of {@link Gtk.Label} that also displays an
     * accelerator key on the right of the label text, e.g. “Ctrl+S”.
     * It is commonly used in menus to show the keyboard short-cuts for commands.
     * 
     * The accelerator key to display is typically not set explicitly (although it
     * can be, with `gtk_accel_label_set_accel()`). Instead, the {@link Gtk.AccelLabel} displays
     * the accelerators which have been added to a particular widget. This widget is
     * set by calling `gtk_accel_label_set_accel_widget()`.
     * 
     * For example, a {@link Gtk.MenuItem} widget may have an accelerator added to emit
     * the “activate” signal when the “Ctrl+S” key combination is pressed.
     * A {@link Gtk.AccelLabel} is created and added to the {@link Gtk.MenuItem}, and
     * `gtk_accel_label_set_accel_widget()` is called with the {@link Gtk.MenuItem} as the
     * second argument. The {@link Gtk.AccelLabel} will now display “Ctrl+S” after its label.
     * 
     * Note that creating a {@link Gtk.MenuItem} with `gtk_menu_item_new_with_label()` (or
     * one of the similar functions for {@link Gtk.CheckMenuItem} and {@link Gtk.RadioMenuItem})
     * automatically adds a {@link Gtk.AccelLabel} to the {@link Gtk.MenuItem} and calls
     * `gtk_accel_label_set_accel_widget()` to set it up for you.
     * 
     * A {@link Gtk.AccelLabel} will only display accelerators which have {@link Gtk.AccelFlags.VISIBLE}
     * set (see {@link Gtk.AccelFlags}).
     * A {@link Gtk.AccelLabel} can display multiple accelerators and even signal names,
     * though it is almost always used to display just one accelerator key.
     * 
     * ## Creating a simple menu item with an accelerator key.
     * 
     * 
     * ```c
     *   GtkWidget *window = gtk_window_new (GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
     *   GtkWidget *menu = gtk_menu_new ();
     *   GtkWidget *save_item;
     *   GtkAccelGroup *accel_group;
     * 
     *   // Create a GtkAccelGroup and add it to the window.
     *   accel_group = gtk_accel_group_new ();
     *   gtk_window_add_accel_group (GTK_WINDOW (window), accel_group);
     * 
     *   // Create the menu item using the convenience function.
     *   save_item = gtk_menu_item_new_with_label ("Save");
     *   gtk_widget_show (save_item);
     *   gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (menu), save_item);
     * 
     *   // Now add the accelerator to the GtkMenuItem. Note that since we
     *   // called `gtk_menu_item_new_with_label()` to create the GtkMenuItem
     *   // the GtkAccelLabel is automatically set up to display the
     *   // GtkMenuItem accelerators. We just need to make sure we use
     *   // GTK_ACCEL_VISIBLE here.
     *   gtk_widget_add_accelerator (save_item, "activate", accel_group,
     *                               GDK_KEY_s, GDK_CONTROL_MASK, GTK_ACCEL_VISIBLE);
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * # CSS nodes
     * 
     * 
     * ```
     * label
     * ╰── accelerator
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * Like {@link Gtk.Label}, GtkAccelLabel has a main CSS node with the name label.
     * It adds a subnode with name accelerator.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class AccelLabel extends Label implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<AccelLabel>;

        // Properties
        get accel_closure(): GObject.Closure;
        set accel_closure(val: GObject.Closure);

        get accelClosure(): GObject.Closure;
        set accelClosure(val: GObject.Closure);

        get accel_widget(): Widget | null;
        set accel_widget(val: Widget | null);

        get accelWidget(): Widget | null;
        set accelWidget(val: Widget | null);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: AccelLabel.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        
    // @ts-expect-error This property conflicts with an accessor in a parent class or interface.
    label: Label;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<AccelLabel.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](string: string): AccelLabel;

        // Conflicted with Gtk.Label.new
        static ["new"](...args: never[]): any;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof AccelLabel.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, AccelLabel.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof AccelLabel.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, AccelLabel.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof AccelLabel.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<AccelLabel.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Gets the keyval and modifier mask set with
         * `gtk_accel_label_set_accel()`.
         */
        get_accel(): [number, Gdk.ModifierType];

        /**
         * Fetches the widget monitored by this accelerator label. See
         * `gtk_accel_label_set_accel_widget()`.
         * @returns the object monitored by the accelerator label, or `null`.
         */
        get_accel_widget(): Widget | null;

        /**
         * Returns the width needed to display the accelerator key(s).
         * This is used by menus to align all of the {@link Gtk.MenuItem} widgets, and shouldn't
         * be needed by applications.
         * @returns the width needed to display the accelerator key(s).
         */
        get_accel_width(): number;

        /**
         * Recreates the string representing the accelerator keys.
         * This should not be needed since the string is automatically updated whenever
         * accelerators are added or removed from the associated widget.
         * @returns always returns `false`.
         */
        refetch(): boolean;

        /**
         * Manually sets a keyval and modifier mask as the accelerator rendered
         * by `accel_label`.
         * 
         * If a keyval and modifier are explicitly set then these values are
         * used regardless of any associated accel closure or widget.
         * 
         * Providing an `accelerator_key` of 0 removes the manual setting.
         * @param accelerator_key a keyval, or 0
         * @param accelerator_mods the modifier mask for the accel
         */
        set_accel(accelerator_key: number, accelerator_mods: Gdk.ModifierType): void;

        /**
         * Sets the closure to be monitored by this accelerator label. The closure
         * must be connected to an accelerator group; see `gtk_accel_group_connect()`.
         * Passing `null` for `accel_closure` will dissociate `accel_label` from its
         * current closure, if any.
         * @param accel_closure the closure to monitor for accelerator changes, or `null`
         */
        set_accel_closure(accel_closure: GObject.Closure | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the widget to be monitored by this accelerator label. Passing `null` for
         * `accel_widget` will dissociate `accel_label` from its current widget, if any.
         * @param accel_widget the widget to be monitored, or `null`
         */
        set_accel_widget(accel_widget: Widget | null): void;
    }


    namespace AccelMap {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends GObject.Object.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * Notifies of a change in the global accelerator map.
             * The path is also used as the detail for the signal,
             * so it is possible to connect to
             * changed::`accel_path`.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.4
             * @detailed
             * @run-last
             */
            changed: (arg0: string, arg1: number, arg2: Gdk.ModifierType) => void;
            [key: `changed::${string}`]: (arg0: string, arg1: number, arg2: Gdk.ModifierType) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.Object.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * Accelerator maps are used to define runtime configurable accelerators.
     * Functions for manipulating them are are usually used by higher level
     * convenience mechanisms like {@link Gtk.UIManager} and are thus considered
     * “low-level”. You’ll want to use them if you’re manually creating menus that
     * should have user-configurable accelerators.
     * 
     * An accelerator is uniquely defined by:
     * - accelerator path
     * - accelerator key
     * - accelerator modifiers
     * 
     * The accelerator path must consist of
     * “<WINDOWTYPE>/Category1/Category2/.../Action”, where WINDOWTYPE
     * should be a unique application-specific identifier that corresponds
     * to the kind of window the accelerator is being used in, e.g.
     * “Gimp-Image”, “Abiword-Document” or “Gnumeric-Settings”.
     * The “Category1/.../Action” portion is most appropriately chosen by
     * the action the accelerator triggers, i.e. for accelerators on menu
     * items, choose the item’s menu path, e.g. “File/Save As”,
     * “Image/View/Zoom” or “Edit/Select All”. So a full valid accelerator
     * path may look like: “<Gimp-Toolbox>/File/Dialogs/Tool Options...”.
     * 
     * All accelerators are stored inside one global {@link Gtk.AccelMap} that can
     * be obtained using `gtk_accel_map_get()`. See
     * [Monitoring changes][monitoring-changes] for additional
     * details.
     * 
     * # Manipulating accelerators
     * 
     * New accelerators can be added using `gtk_accel_map_add_entry()`.
     * To search for specific accelerator, use `gtk_accel_map_lookup_entry()`.
     * Modifications of existing accelerators should be done using
     * `gtk_accel_map_change_entry()`.
     * 
     * In order to avoid having some accelerators changed, they can be
     * locked using `gtk_accel_map_lock_path()`. Unlocking is done using
     * `gtk_accel_map_unlock_path()`.
     * 
     * # Saving and loading accelerator maps
     * 
     * Accelerator maps can be saved to and loaded from some external
     * resource. For simple saving and loading from file,
     * `gtk_accel_map_save()` and `gtk_accel_map_load()` are provided.
     * Saving and loading can also be done by providing file descriptor
     * to `gtk_accel_map_save_fd()` and `gtk_accel_map_load_fd()`.
     * 
     * # Monitoring changes
     * 
     * {@link Gtk.AccelMap} object is only useful for monitoring changes of
     * accelerators. By connecting to {@link Gtk.AccelMap.SignalSignatures.changed | Gtk.AccelMap::changed} signal, one
     * can monitor changes of all accelerators. It is also possible to
     * monitor only single accelerator path by using it as a detail of
     * the {@link Gtk.AccelMap.SignalSignatures.changed | Gtk.AccelMap::changed} signal.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class AccelMap extends GObject.Object {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<AccelMap>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: AccelMap.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<AccelMap.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof AccelMap.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, AccelMap.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof AccelMap.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, AccelMap.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof AccelMap.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<AccelMap.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Static methods
        /**
         * Registers a new accelerator with the global accelerator map.
         * This function should only be called once per `accel_path`
         * with the canonical `accel_key` and `accel_mods` for this path.
         * To change the accelerator during runtime programatically, use
         * `gtk_accel_map_change_entry()`.
         * 
         * Set `accel_key` and `accel_mods` to 0 to request a removal of
         * the accelerator.
         * 
         * Note that `accel_path` string will be stored in a {@link GLib.Quark}. Therefore, if you
         * pass a static string, you can save some memory by interning it first with
         * `g_intern_static_string()`.
         * @param accel_path valid accelerator path
         * @param accel_key the accelerator key
         * @param accel_mods the accelerator modifiers
         */
        static add_entry(accel_path: string, accel_key: number, accel_mods: Gdk.ModifierType): void;

        /**
         * Adds a filter to the global list of accel path filters.
         * 
         * Accel map entries whose accel path matches one of the filters
         * are skipped by `gtk_accel_map_foreach()`.
         * 
         * This function is intended for GTK+ modules that create their own
         * menus, but don’t want them to be saved into the applications accelerator
         * map dump.
         * @param filter_pattern a pattern (see {@link GLib.PatternSpec})
         */
        static add_filter(filter_pattern: string): void;

        /**
         * Changes the `accel_key` and `accel_mods` currently associated with `accel_path`.
         * Due to conflicts with other accelerators, a change may not always be possible,
         * `replace` indicates whether other accelerators may be deleted to resolve such
         * conflicts. A change will only occur if all conflicts could be resolved (which
         * might not be the case if conflicting accelerators are locked). Successful
         * changes are indicated by a `true` return value.
         * 
         * Note that `accel_path` string will be stored in a {@link GLib.Quark}. Therefore, if you
         * pass a static string, you can save some memory by interning it first with
         * `g_intern_static_string()`.
         * @param accel_path a valid accelerator path
         * @param accel_key the new accelerator key
         * @param accel_mods the new accelerator modifiers
         * @param replace `true` if other accelerators may be deleted upon conflicts
         */
        static change_entry(accel_path: string, accel_key: number, accel_mods: Gdk.ModifierType, replace: boolean): boolean;

        /**
         * Loops over the entries in the accelerator map whose accel path
         * doesn’t match any of the filters added with `gtk_accel_map_add_filter()`,
         * and execute `foreach_func` on each. The signature of `foreach_func` is
         * that of {@link Gtk.AccelMapForeach}, the `changed` parameter indicates whether
         * this accelerator was changed during runtime (thus, would need
         * saving during an accelerator map dump).
         * @param data data to be passed into `foreach_func`
         * @param foreach_func function to be executed for each accel                map entry which is not filtered out
         */
        static foreach(data: null, foreach_func: AccelMapForeach): void;

        /**
         * Loops over all entries in the accelerator map, and execute
         * `foreach_func` on each. The signature of `foreach_func` is that of
         * {@link Gtk.AccelMapForeach}, the `changed` parameter indicates whether
         * this accelerator was changed during runtime (thus, would need
         * saving during an accelerator map dump).
         * @param data data to be passed into `foreach_func`
         * @param foreach_func function to be executed for each accel                map entry
         */
        static foreach_unfiltered(data: null, foreach_func: AccelMapForeach): void;

        /**
         * Gets the singleton global {@link Gtk.AccelMap} object. This object
         * is useful only for notification of changes to the accelerator
         * map via the ::changed signal; it isn’t a parameter to the
         * other accelerator map functions.
         */
        static get(): AccelMap;

        /**
         * Parses a file previously saved with `gtk_accel_map_save()` for
         * accelerator specifications, and propagates them accordingly.
         * @param file_name a file containing accelerator specifications,   in the GLib file name encoding
         */
        static load(file_name: string): void;

        /**
         * Filedescriptor variant of `gtk_accel_map_load()`.
         * 
         * Note that the file descriptor will not be closed by this function.
         * @param fd a valid readable file descriptor
         */
        static load_fd(fd: number): void;

        /**
         * {@link GLib.Scanner} variant of `gtk_accel_map_load()`.
         * @param scanner a {@link GLib.Scanner} which has already been provided with an input file
         */
        static load_scanner(scanner: GLib.Scanner): void;

        /**
         * Locks the given accelerator path. If the accelerator map doesn’t yet contain
         * an entry for `accel_path`, a new one is created.
         * 
         * Locking an accelerator path prevents its accelerator from being changed
         * during runtime. A locked accelerator path can be unlocked by
         * `gtk_accel_map_unlock_path()`. Refer to `gtk_accel_map_change_entry()`
         * for information about runtime accelerator changes.
         * 
         * If called more than once, `accel_path` remains locked until
         * `gtk_accel_map_unlock_path()` has been called an equivalent number
         * of times.
         * 
         * Note that locking of individual accelerator paths is independent from
         * locking the {@link Gtk.AccelGroup} containing them. For runtime accelerator
         * changes to be possible, both the accelerator path and its {@link Gtk.AccelGroup}
         * have to be unlocked.
         * @param accel_path a valid accelerator path
         */
        static lock_path(accel_path: string): void;

        /**
         * Looks up the accelerator entry for `accel_path` and fills in `key`.
         * @param accel_path a valid accelerator path
         */
        static lookup_entry(accel_path: string): [boolean, AccelKey | null];

        /**
         * Saves current accelerator specifications (accelerator path, key
         * and modifiers) to `file_name`.
         * The file is written in a format suitable to be read back in by
         * `gtk_accel_map_load()`.
         * @param file_name the name of the file to contain   accelerator specifications, in the GLib file name encoding
         */
        static save(file_name: string): void;

        /**
         * Filedescriptor variant of `gtk_accel_map_save()`.
         * 
         * Note that the file descriptor will not be closed by this function.
         * @param fd a valid writable file descriptor
         */
        static save_fd(fd: number): void;

        /**
         * Undoes the last call to `gtk_accel_map_lock_path()` on this `accel_path`.
         * Refer to `gtk_accel_map_lock_path()` for information about accelerator path locking.
         * @param accel_path a valid accelerator path
         */
        static unlock_path(accel_path: string): void;
    }


    namespace Accessible {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Atk.Object.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-layer": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-mdi-zorder": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-help-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-hypertext-nlinks": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption-object": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-summary": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Atk.Object.ConstructorProps {
            widget: Widget | null;
        }
    }

    /**
     * The {@link Gtk.Accessible} class is the base class for accessible
     * implementations for {@link Gtk.Widget} subclasses. It is a thin
     * wrapper around {@link Atk.Object}, which adds facilities for associating
     * a widget with its accessible object.
     * 
     * An accessible implementation for a third-party widget should
     * derive from {@link Gtk.Accessible} and implement the suitable interfaces
     * from ATK, such as {@link Atk.Text} or {@link Atk.Selection}. To establish
     * the connection between the widget class and its corresponding
     * acccessible implementation, override the get_accessible vfunc
     * in {@link Gtk.WidgetClass}.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class Accessible extends Atk.Object {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<Accessible>;

        // Properties
        get widget(): Widget | null;
        set widget(val: Widget | null);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: Accessible.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<Accessible.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof Accessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Accessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof Accessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Accessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof Accessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<Accessible.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * This function specifies the callback function to be called
         * when the widget corresponding to a GtkAccessible is destroyed.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_connect_widget_destroyed(): void;

        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_widget_set(): void;

        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_widget_unset(): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * This function specifies the callback function to be called
         * when the widget corresponding to a GtkAccessible is destroyed.
         */
        connect_widget_destroyed(): void;

        /**
         * Gets the {@link Gtk.Widget} corresponding to the {@link Gtk.Accessible}.
         * The returned widget does not have a reference added, so
         * you do not need to unref it.
         * @returns pointer to the {@link Gtk.Widget}     corresponding to the {@link Gtk.Accessible}, or `null`.
         */
        get_widget(): Widget | null;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.Widget} corresponding to the {@link Gtk.Accessible}.
         * 
         * `accessible` will not hold a reference to `widget`.
         * It is the caller’s responsibility to ensure that when `widget`
         * is destroyed, the widget is unset by calling this function
         * again with `widget` set to `null`.
         * @param widget a {@link Gtk.Widget} or `null` to unset
         */
        set_widget(widget: Widget | null): void;
    }


    namespace Action {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends GObject.Object.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * The "activate" signal is emitted when the action is activated.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.4
             * @deprecated since 3.10: Use {@link Gio.SimpleAction.SignalSignatures.activate | Gio.SimpleAction::activate} instead
             * @run-first
             */
            activate: () => void;
            "notify::action-group": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::always-show-image": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gicon": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hide-if-empty": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::icon-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-important": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::label": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::short-label": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::stock-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible-horizontal": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible-overflown": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible-vertical": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.Object.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {
            action_group: ActionGroup;
            actionGroup: ActionGroup;
            always_show_image: boolean;
            alwaysShowImage: boolean;
            gicon: Gio.Icon;
            hide_if_empty: boolean;
            hideIfEmpty: boolean;
            icon_name: string;
            iconName: string;
            is_important: boolean;
            isImportant: boolean;
            label: string;
            name: string;
            sensitive: boolean;
            short_label: string;
            shortLabel: string;
            stock_id: string;
            stockId: string;
            tooltip: string;
            visible: boolean;
            visible_horizontal: boolean;
            visibleHorizontal: boolean;
            visible_overflown: boolean;
            visibleOverflown: boolean;
            visible_vertical: boolean;
            visibleVertical: boolean;
        }
    }

    /**
     * > In GTK+ 3.10, GtkAction has been deprecated. Use {@link Gio.Action}
     * > instead, and associate actions with {@link Gtk.Actionable} widgets. Use
     * > {@link Gio.MenuModel} for creating menus with `gtk_menu_new_from_model()`.
     * 
     * Actions represent operations that the user can be perform, along with
     * some information how it should be presented in the interface. Each action
     * provides methods to create icons, menu items and toolbar items
     * representing itself.
     * 
     * As well as the callback that is called when the action gets activated,
     * the following also gets associated with the action:
     * 
     * - a name (not translated, for path lookup)
     * 
     * - a label (translated, for display)
     * 
     * - an accelerator
     * 
     * - whether label indicates a stock id
     * 
     * - a tooltip (optional, translated)
     * 
     * - a toolbar label (optional, shorter than label)
     * 
     * 
     * The action will also have some state information:
     * 
     * - visible (shown/hidden)
     * 
     * - sensitive (enabled/disabled)
     * 
     * Apart from regular actions, there are [toggle actions][GtkToggleAction],
     * which can be toggled between two states and
     * [radio actions][GtkRadioAction], of which only one in a group
     * can be in the “active” state. Other actions can be implemented as {@link Gtk.Action}
     * subclasses.
     * 
     * Each action can have one or more proxy widgets. To act as an action proxy,
     * widget needs to implement {@link Gtk.Activatable} interface. Proxies mirror the state
     * of the action and should change when the action’s state changes. Properties
     * that are always mirrored by proxies are {@link Gtk.Action.sensitive} and
     * {@link Gtk.Action.visible}. {@link Gtk.Action.gicon}, {@link Gtk.Action.icon_name}, {@link Gtk.Action.label},
     * {@link Gtk.Action.short_label} and {@link Gtk.Action.stock_id} properties are only mirorred
     * if proxy widget has {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} property set to
     * `true`.
     * 
     * When the proxy is activated, it should activate its action.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class Action extends GObject.Object implements Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<Action>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * The GtkActionGroup this GtkAction is associated with, or NULL
         * (for internal use).
         * @deprecated since 3.10: Lookup the {@link Gio.Action} using `g_action_map_lookup_action()` instead
         */
        get action_group(): ActionGroup;
        set action_group(val: ActionGroup);

        /**
         * The GtkActionGroup this GtkAction is associated with, or NULL
         * (for internal use).
         * @deprecated since 3.10: Lookup the {@link Gio.Action} using `g_action_map_lookup_action()` instead
         */
        get actionGroup(): ActionGroup;
        set actionGroup(val: ActionGroup);

        /**
         * If `true`, the action's menu item proxies will ignore the {@link Gtk.Settings.gtk_menu_images}
         * setting and always show their image, if available.
         * 
         * Use this property if the menu item would be useless or hard to use
         * without their image.
         * @since 2.20
         * @deprecated since 3.10: There is no corresponding replacement when using {@link Gio.Action}
         * @default false
         */
        get always_show_image(): boolean;
        set always_show_image(val: boolean);

        /**
         * If `true`, the action's menu item proxies will ignore the {@link Gtk.Settings.gtk_menu_images}
         * setting and always show their image, if available.
         * 
         * Use this property if the menu item would be useless or hard to use
         * without their image.
         * @since 2.20
         * @deprecated since 3.10: There is no corresponding replacement when using {@link Gio.Action}
         * @default false
         */
        get alwaysShowImage(): boolean;
        set alwaysShowImage(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The {@link Gio.Icon} displayed in the {@link Gtk.Action}.
         * 
         * Note that the stock icon is preferred, if the {@link Gtk.Action.stock_id}
         * property holds the id of an existing stock icon.
         * 
         * This is an appearance property and thus only applies if
         * {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} is `true`.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10: Use the "icon" attribute on a {@link Gio.MenuItem} instead
         */
        get gicon(): Gio.Icon;
        set gicon(val: Gio.Icon);

        /**
         * When TRUE, empty menu proxies for this action are hidden.
         * @deprecated since 3.10: There is no corresponding replacement when using {@link Gio.Action}
         * @default true
         */
        get hide_if_empty(): boolean;
        set hide_if_empty(val: boolean);

        /**
         * When TRUE, empty menu proxies for this action are hidden.
         * @deprecated since 3.10: There is no corresponding replacement when using {@link Gio.Action}
         * @default true
         */
        get hideIfEmpty(): boolean;
        set hideIfEmpty(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The name of the icon from the icon theme.
         * 
         * Note that the stock icon is preferred, if the {@link Gtk.Action.stock_id}
         * property holds the id of an existing stock icon, and the {@link Gio.Icon} is
         * preferred if the {@link Gtk.Action.gicon} property is set.
         * 
         * This is an appearance property and thus only applies if
         * {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} is `true`.
         * @since 2.10
         * @deprecated since 3.10: Use the "icon" attribute on a {@link Gio.MenuItem} instead
         * @default null
         */
        get icon_name(): string;
        set icon_name(val: string);

        /**
         * The name of the icon from the icon theme.
         * 
         * Note that the stock icon is preferred, if the {@link Gtk.Action.stock_id}
         * property holds the id of an existing stock icon, and the {@link Gio.Icon} is
         * preferred if the {@link Gtk.Action.gicon} property is set.
         * 
         * This is an appearance property and thus only applies if
         * {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} is `true`.
         * @since 2.10
         * @deprecated since 3.10: Use the "icon" attribute on a {@link Gio.MenuItem} instead
         * @default null
         */
        get iconName(): string;
        set iconName(val: string);

        /**
         * Whether the action is considered important. When TRUE, toolitem
         * proxies for this action show text in GTK_TOOLBAR_BOTH_HORIZ mode.
         * @deprecated since 3.10: There is no corresponding replacement when using {@link Gio.Action}
         * @default false
         */
        get is_important(): boolean;
        set is_important(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether the action is considered important. When TRUE, toolitem
         * proxies for this action show text in GTK_TOOLBAR_BOTH_HORIZ mode.
         * @deprecated since 3.10: There is no corresponding replacement when using {@link Gio.Action}
         * @default false
         */
        get isImportant(): boolean;
        set isImportant(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The label used for menu items and buttons that activate
         * this action. If the label is `null`, GTK+ uses the stock
         * label specified via the stock-id property.
         * 
         * This is an appearance property and thus only applies if
         * {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} is `true`.
         * @deprecated since 3.10: Use the "label" attribute on {@link Gio.MenuItem} instead
         * @default null
         */
        get label(): string;
        set label(val: string);

        /**
         * A unique name for the action.
         * @deprecated since 3.10: Use {@link Gio.Action.name} instead
         * @construct-only
         * @default null
         */
        get name(): string;

        /**
         * Whether the action is enabled.
         * @deprecated since 3.10: Use {@link Gio.Action.enabled} and {@link Gio.SimpleAction.enabled} instead
         * @default true
         */
        get sensitive(): boolean;
        set sensitive(val: boolean);

        /**
         * A shorter label that may be used on toolbar buttons.
         * 
         * This is an appearance property and thus only applies if
         * {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} is `true`.
         * @deprecated since 3.10: There is no corresponding replacement when using {@link Gio.Action}
         * @default null
         */
        get short_label(): string;
        set short_label(val: string);

        /**
         * A shorter label that may be used on toolbar buttons.
         * 
         * This is an appearance property and thus only applies if
         * {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} is `true`.
         * @deprecated since 3.10: There is no corresponding replacement when using {@link Gio.Action}
         * @default null
         */
        get shortLabel(): string;
        set shortLabel(val: string);

        /**
         * The stock icon displayed in widgets representing this action.
         * 
         * This is an appearance property and thus only applies if
         * {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} is `true`.
         * @deprecated since 3.10: There is no corresponding replacement when using {@link Gio.Action}
         * @default null
         */
        get stock_id(): string;
        set stock_id(val: string);

        /**
         * The stock icon displayed in widgets representing this action.
         * 
         * This is an appearance property and thus only applies if
         * {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} is `true`.
         * @deprecated since 3.10: There is no corresponding replacement when using {@link Gio.Action}
         * @default null
         */
        get stockId(): string;
        set stockId(val: string);

        /**
         * A tooltip for this action.
         * @deprecated since 3.10: Use `gtk_widget_set_tooltip_text()` instead
         * @default null
         */
        get tooltip(): string;
        set tooltip(val: string);

        /**
         * Whether the action is visible.
         * @deprecated since 3.10: There is no corresponding replacement when using {@link Gio.Action}
         * @default true
         */
        get visible(): boolean;
        set visible(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether the toolbar item is visible when the toolbar is in a horizontal orientation.
         * @deprecated since 3.10: There is no corresponding replacement when using {@link Gio.Action}
         * @default true
         */
        get visible_horizontal(): boolean;
        set visible_horizontal(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether the toolbar item is visible when the toolbar is in a horizontal orientation.
         * @deprecated since 3.10: There is no corresponding replacement when using {@link Gio.Action}
         * @default true
         */
        get visibleHorizontal(): boolean;
        set visibleHorizontal(val: boolean);

        /**
         * When `true`, toolitem proxies for this action are represented in the
         * toolbar overflow menu.
         * @since 2.6
         * @deprecated since 3.10: There is no corresponding replacement when using {@link Gio.Action}
         * @default true
         */
        get visible_overflown(): boolean;
        set visible_overflown(val: boolean);

        /**
         * When `true`, toolitem proxies for this action are represented in the
         * toolbar overflow menu.
         * @since 2.6
         * @deprecated since 3.10: There is no corresponding replacement when using {@link Gio.Action}
         * @default true
         */
        get visibleOverflown(): boolean;
        set visibleOverflown(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether the toolbar item is visible when the toolbar is in a vertical orientation.
         * @deprecated since 3.10: There is no corresponding replacement when using {@link Gio.Action}
         * @default true
         */
        get visible_vertical(): boolean;
        set visible_vertical(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether the toolbar item is visible when the toolbar is in a vertical orientation.
         * @deprecated since 3.10: There is no corresponding replacement when using {@link Gio.Action}
         * @default true
         */
        get visibleVertical(): boolean;
        set visibleVertical(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: Action.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        object: GObject.Object;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<Action.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](name: string, label: string | null, tooltip: string | null, stock_id: string | null): Action;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof Action.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Action.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof Action.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Action.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof Action.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<Action.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * Emits the “activate” signal on the specified action, if it isn't
         * insensitive. This gets called by the proxy widgets when they get
         * activated.
         * 
         * It can also be used to manually activate an action.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_activate(): void;

        /**
         * @param proxy 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_connect_proxy(proxy: Widget): void;

        /**
         * If `action` provides a {@link Gtk.Menu} widget as a submenu for the menu
         * item or the toolbar item it creates, this function returns an
         * instance of that menu.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_create_menu(): Widget;

        /**
         * Creates a menu item widget that proxies for the given action.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_create_menu_item(): Widget;

        /**
         * Creates a toolbar item widget that proxies for the given action.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_create_tool_item(): Widget;

        /**
         * @param proxy 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_disconnect_proxy(proxy: Widget): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Emits the “activate” signal on the specified action, if it isn't
         * insensitive. This gets called by the proxy widgets when they get
         * activated.
         * 
         * It can also be used to manually activate an action.
         */
        activate(): void;

        /**
         * Disable activation signals from the action
         * 
         * This is needed when updating the state of your proxy
         * {@link Gtk.Activatable} widget could result in calling `gtk_action_activate()`,
         * this is a convenience function to avoid recursing in those
         * cases (updating toggle state for instance).
         */
        block_activate(): void;

        /**
         * Installs the accelerator for `action` if `action` has an
         * accel path and group. See `gtk_action_set_accel_path()` and
         * `gtk_action_set_accel_group()`
         * 
         * Since multiple proxies may independently trigger the installation
         * of the accelerator, the `action` counts the number of times this
         * function has been called and doesn’t remove the accelerator until
         * `gtk_action_disconnect_accelerator()` has been called as many times.
         */
        connect_accelerator(): void;

        /**
         * This function is intended for use by action implementations to
         * create icons displayed in the proxy widgets.
         * @param icon_size the size of the icon ({@link Gtk.IconSize}) that should      be created.
         * @returns a widget that displays the icon for this action.
         */
        create_icon(icon_size: number): Widget;

        /**
         * If `action` provides a {@link Gtk.Menu} widget as a submenu for the menu
         * item or the toolbar item it creates, this function returns an
         * instance of that menu.
         * @returns the menu item provided by the               action, or `null`.
         */
        create_menu(): Widget;

        /**
         * Creates a menu item widget that proxies for the given action.
         * @returns a menu item connected to the action.
         */
        create_menu_item(): Widget;

        /**
         * Creates a toolbar item widget that proxies for the given action.
         * @returns a toolbar item connected to the action.
         */
        create_tool_item(): Widget;

        /**
         * Undoes the effect of one call to `gtk_action_connect_accelerator()`.
         */
        disconnect_accelerator(): void;

        /**
         * Returns the accel closure for this action.
         * @returns the accel closure for this action. The          returned closure is owned by GTK+ and must not be unreffed          or modified.
         */
        get_accel_closure(): GObject.Closure;

        /**
         * Returns the accel path for this action.
         * @returns the accel path for this action, or `null`   if none is set. The returned string is owned by GTK+   and must not be freed or modified.
         */
        get_accel_path(): string;

        /**
         * Returns whether `action`'s menu item proxies will always
         * show their image, if available.
         * @returns `true` if the menu item proxies will always show their image
         */
        get_always_show_image(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the gicon of `action`.
         * @returns The action’s {@link Gio.Icon} if one is set.
         */
        get_gicon(): Gio.Icon;

        /**
         * Gets the icon name of `action`.
         * @returns the icon name
         */
        get_icon_name(): string;

        /**
         * Checks whether `action` is important or not
         * @returns whether `action` is important
         */
        get_is_important(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the label text of `action`.
         * @returns the label text
         */
        get_label(): string;

        /**
         * Returns the name of the action.
         * @returns the name of the action. The string belongs to GTK+ and should not   be freed.
         */
        get_name(): string;

        /**
         * Returns the proxy widgets for an action.
         * See also `gtk_activatable_get_related_action()`.
         * @returns a {@link GLib.SList} of proxy widgets. The list is owned by GTK+ and must not be modified.
         */
        get_proxies(): Widget[];

        /**
         * Returns whether the action itself is sensitive. Note that this doesn’t
         * necessarily mean effective sensitivity. See `gtk_action_is_sensitive()`
         * for that.
         * @returns `true` if the action itself is sensitive.
         */
        get_sensitive(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the short label text of `action`.
         * @returns the short label text.
         */
        get_short_label(): string;

        /**
         * Gets the stock id of `action`.
         * @returns the stock id
         */
        get_stock_id(): string;

        /**
         * Gets the tooltip text of `action`.
         * @returns the tooltip text
         */
        get_tooltip(): string;

        /**
         * Returns whether the action itself is visible. Note that this doesn’t
         * necessarily mean effective visibility. See `gtk_action_is_sensitive()`
         * for that.
         * @returns `true` if the action itself is visible.
         */
        get_visible(): boolean;

        /**
         * Checks whether `action` is visible when horizontal
         * @returns whether `action` is visible when horizontal
         */
        get_visible_horizontal(): boolean;

        /**
         * Checks whether `action` is visible when horizontal
         * @returns whether `action` is visible when horizontal
         */
        get_visible_vertical(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns whether the action is effectively sensitive.
         * @returns `true` if the action and its associated action group are both sensitive.
         */
        is_sensitive(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns whether the action is effectively visible.
         * @returns `true` if the action and its associated action group are both visible.
         */
        is_visible(): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.AccelGroup} in which the accelerator for this action
         * will be installed.
         * @param accel_group a {@link Gtk.AccelGroup} or `null`
         */
        set_accel_group(accel_group: AccelGroup | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the accel path for this action.  All proxy widgets associated
         * with the action will have this accel path, so that their
         * accelerators are consistent.
         * 
         * Note that `accel_path` string will be stored in a {@link GLib.Quark}. Therefore, if you
         * pass a static string, you can save some memory by interning it first with
         * `g_intern_static_string()`.
         * @param accel_path the accelerator path
         */
        set_accel_path(accel_path: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether `action`'s menu item proxies will ignore the
         * {@link Gtk.Settings.gtk_menu_images} setting and always show their image, if available.
         * 
         * Use this if the menu item would be useless or hard to use
         * without their image.
         * @param always_show `true` if menuitem proxies should always show their image
         */
        set_always_show_image(always_show: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the icon of `action`.
         * @param icon the {@link Gio.Icon} to set
         */
        set_gicon(icon: Gio.Icon): void;

        /**
         * Sets the icon name on `action`
         * @param icon_name the icon name to set
         */
        set_icon_name(icon_name: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the action is important, this attribute is used
         * primarily by toolbar items to decide whether to show a label
         * or not.
         * @param is_important `true` to make the action important
         */
        set_is_important(is_important: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the label of `action`.
         * @param label the label text to set
         */
        set_label(label: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets the :sensitive property of the action to `sensitive`. Note that
         * this doesn’t necessarily mean effective sensitivity. See
         * `gtk_action_is_sensitive()`
         * for that.
         * @param sensitive `true` to make the action sensitive
         */
        set_sensitive(sensitive: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets a shorter label text on `action`.
         * @param short_label the label text to set
         */
        set_short_label(short_label: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets the stock id on `action`
         * @param stock_id the stock id
         */
        set_stock_id(stock_id: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets the tooltip text on `action`
         * @param tooltip the tooltip text
         */
        set_tooltip(tooltip: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets the :visible property of the action to `visible`. Note that
         * this doesn’t necessarily mean effective visibility. See
         * `gtk_action_is_visible()`
         * for that.
         * @param visible `true` to make the action visible
         */
        set_visible(visible: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether `action` is visible when horizontal
         * @param visible_horizontal whether the action is visible horizontally
         */
        set_visible_horizontal(visible_horizontal: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether `action` is visible when vertical
         * @param visible_vertical whether the action is visible vertically
         */
        set_visible_vertical(visible_vertical: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Reenable activation signals from the action
         */
        unblock_activate(): void;

        /**
         * Adds a child to `buildable`. `type` is an optional string
         * describing how the child should be added.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child to add
         * @param type kind of child or `null`
         */
        add_child(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object, type: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Constructs a child of `buildable` with the name `name`.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} calls this function if a “constructor” has been
         * specified in the UI definition.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param name name of child to construct
         * @returns the constructed child
         */
        construct_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, name: string): T;

        /**
         * This is similar to `gtk_buildable_parser_finished()` but is
         * called once for each custom tag handled by the `buildable`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname the name of the tag
         * @param data user data created in custom_tag_start
         */
        custom_finished(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
         * the buildable.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @param data user data that will be passed in to parser functions
         */
        custom_tag_end(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called for each unknown element under `<child>`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @returns `true` if a object has a custom implementation, `false`          if it doesn't.
         */
        custom_tag_start(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string): [boolean, GLib.MarkupParser, null];

        /**
         * Get the internal child called `childname` of the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param childname name of child
         * @returns the internal child of the buildable object
         */
        get_internal_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, childname: string): T;

        /**
         * Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI].
         * Note that this will be called once for each time
         * `gtk_builder_add_from_file()` or `gtk_builder_add_from_string()`
         * is called on a builder.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         */
        parser_finished(builder: Builder): void;

        /**
         * Sets the property name `name` to `value` on the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param name name of property
         * @param value value of property
         */
        set_buildable_property(builder: Builder, name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;

        /**
         * Sets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * @param name name to set
         */
        set_name(name: string): void;

        /**
         * Adds a child to `buildable`. `type` is an optional string
         * describing how the child should be added.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child to add
         * @param type kind of child or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add_child(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object, type: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Constructs a child of `buildable` with the name `name`.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} calls this function if a “constructor” has been
         * specified in the UI definition.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param name name of child to construct
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_construct_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, name: string): T;

        /**
         * This is similar to `gtk_buildable_parser_finished()` but is
         * called once for each custom tag handled by the `buildable`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname the name of the tag
         * @param data user data created in custom_tag_start
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_finished(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
         * the buildable.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @param data user data that will be passed in to parser functions
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_tag_end(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called for each unknown element under `<child>`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_tag_start(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string): [boolean, GLib.MarkupParser, never];

        /**
         * Get the internal child called `childname` of the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param childname name of child
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_internal_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, childname: string): T;

        /**
         * Gets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} sets the name based on the
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI]
         * used to construct the `buildable`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_name(): string;

        /**
         * Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI].
         * Note that this will be called once for each time
         * `gtk_builder_add_from_file()` or `gtk_builder_add_from_string()`
         * is called on a builder.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_parser_finished(builder: Builder): void;

        /**
         * Sets the property name `name` to `value` on the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param name name of property
         * @param value value of property
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_buildable_property(builder: Builder, name: string, value: unknown): void;

        /**
         * Sets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * @param name name to set
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_name(name: string): void;
    }


    namespace ActionBar {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Bin.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Bin.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * GtkActionBar is designed to present contextual actions. It is
     * expected to be displayed below the content and expand horizontally
     * to fill the area.
     * 
     * It allows placing children at the start or the end. In addition, it
     * contains an internal centered box which is centered with respect to
     * the full width of the box, even if the children at either side take
     * up different amounts of space.
     * 
     * # CSS nodes
     * 
     * GtkActionBar has a single CSS node with name actionbar.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class ActionBar extends Bin implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ActionBar>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: ActionBar.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<ActionBar.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): ActionBar;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof ActionBar.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ActionBar.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof ActionBar.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ActionBar.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof ActionBar.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<ActionBar.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Retrieves the center bar widget of the bar.
         * @returns the center {@link Gtk.Widget} or `null`.
         */
        get_center_widget(): Widget | null;

        /**
         * Adds `child` to `action_bar`, packed with reference to the
         * end of the `action_bar`.
         * @param child the {@link Gtk.Widget} to be added to `action_bar`
         */
        pack_end(child: Widget): void;

        /**
         * Adds `child` to `action_bar`, packed with reference to the
         * start of the `action_bar`.
         * @param child the {@link Gtk.Widget} to be added to `action_bar`
         */
        pack_start(child: Widget): void;

        /**
         * Sets the center widget for the {@link Gtk.ActionBar}.
         * @param center_widget a widget to use for the center
         */
        set_center_widget(center_widget: Widget | null): void;
    }


    namespace ActionGroup {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends GObject.Object.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * The ::connect-proxy signal is emitted after connecting a proxy to
             * an action in the group. Note that the proxy may have been connected
             * to a different action before.
             * 
             * This is intended for simple customizations for which a custom action
             * class would be too clumsy, e.g. showing tooltips for menuitems in the
             * statusbar.
             * 
             * {@link Gtk.UIManager} proxies the signal and provides global notification
             * just before any action is connected to a proxy, which is probably more
             * convenient to use.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.4
             * @deprecated since 3.10
             */
            "connect-proxy": (arg0: Action, arg1: Widget) => void;
            /**
             * The ::disconnect-proxy signal is emitted after disconnecting a proxy
             * from an action in the group.
             * 
             * {@link Gtk.UIManager} proxies the signal and provides global notification
             * just before any action is connected to a proxy, which is probably more
             * convenient to use.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.4
             * @deprecated since 3.10
             */
            "disconnect-proxy": (arg0: Action, arg1: Widget) => void;
            /**
             * The ::post-activate signal is emitted just after the `action` in the
             * `action_group` is activated
             * 
             * This is intended for {@link Gtk.UIManager} to proxy the signal and provide global
             * notification just after any action is activated.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.4
             * @deprecated since 3.10
             */
            "post-activate": (arg0: Action) => void;
            /**
             * The ::pre-activate signal is emitted just before the `action` in the
             * `action_group` is activated
             * 
             * This is intended for {@link Gtk.UIManager} to proxy the signal and provide global
             * notification just before any action is activated.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.4
             * @deprecated since 3.10
             */
            "pre-activate": (arg0: Action) => void;
            "notify::accel-group": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.Object.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {
            accel_group: AccelGroup;
            accelGroup: AccelGroup;
            name: string;
            sensitive: boolean;
            visible: boolean;
        }
    }

    /**
     * Actions are organised into groups. An action group is essentially a
     * map from names to {@link Gtk.Action} objects.
     * 
     * All actions that would make sense to use in a particular context
     * should be in a single group. Multiple action groups may be used for a
     * particular user interface. In fact, it is expected that most nontrivial
     * applications will make use of multiple groups. For example, in an
     * application that can edit multiple documents, one group holding global
     * actions (e.g. quit, about, new), and one group per document holding
     * actions that act on that document (eg. save, cut/copy/paste, etc). Each
     * window’s menus would be constructed from a combination of two action
     * groups.
     * 
     * ## Accelerators ## {{@link Gtk.Action}-Accel}
     * 
     * Accelerators are handled by the GTK+ accelerator map. All actions are
     * assigned an accelerator path (which normally has the form
     * `<Actions>/group-name/action-name`) and a shortcut is associated with
     * this accelerator path. All menuitems and toolitems take on this accelerator
     * path. The GTK+ accelerator map code makes sure that the correct shortcut
     * is displayed next to the menu item.
     * 
     * # GtkActionGroup as GtkBuildable # {{@link Gtk.ActionGroup}-BUILDER-UI}
     * 
     * The {@link Gtk.ActionGroup} implementation of the {@link Gtk.Buildable} interface accepts
     * {@link Gtk.Action} objects as `<child>` elements in UI definitions.
     * 
     * Note that it is probably more common to define actions and action groups
     * in the code, since they are directly related to what the code can do.
     * 
     * The GtkActionGroup implementation of the GtkBuildable interface supports
     * a custom `<accelerator>` element, which has attributes named “key“ and
     * “modifiers“ and allows to specify accelerators. This is similar to the
     * `<accelerator>` element of {@link Gtk.Widget}, the main difference is that
     * it doesn’t allow you to specify a signal.
     * 
     * ## A {@link Gtk.Dialog} UI definition fragment. ##
     * 
     * 
     * ```xml
     * <object class="GtkActionGroup" id="actiongroup">
     *   <child>
     *       <object class="GtkAction" id="About">
     *           <property name="name">About</property>
     *           <property name="stock_id">gtk-about</property>
     *           <signal handler="about_activate" name="activate"/>
     *       </object>
     *       <accelerator key="F1" modifiers="GDK_CONTROL_MASK | GDK_SHIFT_MASK"/>
     *   </child>
     * </object>
     * ```
     * 
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class ActionGroup extends GObject.Object implements Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ActionGroup>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * The accelerator group the actions of this group should use.
         * @deprecated since 3.10
         */
        get accel_group(): AccelGroup;
        set accel_group(val: AccelGroup);

        /**
         * The accelerator group the actions of this group should use.
         * @deprecated since 3.10
         */
        get accelGroup(): AccelGroup;
        set accelGroup(val: AccelGroup);

        /**
         * A name for the action.
         * @deprecated since 3.10
         * @construct-only
         * @default null
         */
        get name(): string;

        /**
         * Whether the action group is enabled.
         * @deprecated since 3.10
         * @default true
         */
        get sensitive(): boolean;
        set sensitive(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether the action group is visible.
         * @deprecated since 3.10
         * @default true
         */
        get visible(): boolean;
        set visible(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: ActionGroup.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<ActionGroup.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](name: string): ActionGroup;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof ActionGroup.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ActionGroup.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof ActionGroup.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ActionGroup.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof ActionGroup.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<ActionGroup.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * Looks up an action in the action group by name.
         * @param action_name the name of the action
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_action(action_name: string): Action;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Adds an action object to the action group. Note that this function
         * does not set up the accel path of the action, which can lead to problems
         * if a user tries to modify the accelerator of a menuitem associated with
         * the action. Therefore you must either set the accel path yourself with
         * `gtk_action_set_accel_path()`, or use
         * `gtk_action_group_add_action_with_accel (..., NULL)`.
         * @param action an action
         */
        add_action(action: Action): void;

        /**
         * Adds an action object to the action group and sets up the accelerator.
         * 
         * If `accelerator` is `null`, attempts to use the accelerator associated
         * with the stock_id of the action.
         * 
         * Accel paths are set to `<Actions>/group-name/action-name`.
         * @param action the action to add
         * @param accelerator the accelerator for the action, in   the format understood by `gtk_accelerator_parse()`, or "" for no accelerator, or   `null` to use the stock accelerator
         */
        add_action_with_accel(action: Action, accelerator: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Gets the accelerator group.
         * @returns the accelerator group associated with this action group or `null` if there is none.
         */
        get_accel_group(): AccelGroup;

        /**
         * Looks up an action in the action group by name.
         * @param action_name the name of the action
         * @returns the action, or `null` if no action by that name exists
         */
        get_action(action_name: string): Action;

        /**
         * Gets the name of the action group.
         * @returns the name of the action group.
         */
        get_name(): string;

        /**
         * Returns `true` if the group is sensitive.  The constituent actions
         * can only be logically sensitive (see `gtk_action_is_sensitive()`) if
         * they are sensitive (see `gtk_action_get_sensitive()`) and their group
         * is sensitive.
         * @returns `true` if the group is sensitive.
         */
        get_sensitive(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns `true` if the group is visible.  The constituent actions
         * can only be logically visible (see `gtk_action_is_visible()`) if
         * they are visible (see `gtk_action_get_visible()`) and their group
         * is visible.
         * @returns `true` if the group is visible.
         */
        get_visible(): boolean;

        /**
         * Lists the actions in the action group.
         * @returns an allocated list of the action objects in the action group
         */
        list_actions(): Action[];

        /**
         * Removes an action object from the action group.
         * @param action an action
         */
        remove_action(action: Action): void;

        /**
         * Sets the accelerator group to be used by every action in this group.
         * @param accel_group a {@link Gtk.AccelGroup} to set or `null`
         */
        set_accel_group(accel_group: AccelGroup | null): void;

        /**
         * Changes the sensitivity of `action_group`
         * @param sensitive new sensitivity
         */
        set_sensitive(sensitive: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets a function to be used for translating the `label` and `tooltip` of
         * `GtkActionEntrys` added by `gtk_action_group_add_actions()`.
         * 
         * If you’re using `gettext()`, it is enough to set the translation domain
         * with `gtk_action_group_set_translation_domain()`.
         * @param func a {@link Gtk.TranslateFunc}
         */
        set_translate_func(func: TranslateFunc): void;

        /**
         * Sets the translation domain and uses `g_dgettext()` for translating the
         * `label` and `tooltip` of `GtkActionEntrys` added by
         * `gtk_action_group_add_actions()`.
         * 
         * If you’re not using `gettext()` for localization, see
         * `gtk_action_group_set_translate_func()`.
         * @param domain the translation domain to use for `g_dgettext()` calls, or `null` to use the domain set with `textdomain()`
         */
        set_translation_domain(domain: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Changes the visible of `action_group`.
         * @param visible new visiblity
         */
        set_visible(visible: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Translates a string using the function set with
         * `gtk_action_group_set_translate_func()`. This
         * is mainly intended for language bindings.
         * @param string a string
         * @returns the translation of `string`
         */
        translate_string(string: string): string;

        /**
         * Adds a child to `buildable`. `type` is an optional string
         * describing how the child should be added.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child to add
         * @param type kind of child or `null`
         */
        add_child(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object, type: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Constructs a child of `buildable` with the name `name`.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} calls this function if a “constructor” has been
         * specified in the UI definition.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param name name of child to construct
         * @returns the constructed child
         */
        construct_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, name: string): T;

        /**
         * This is similar to `gtk_buildable_parser_finished()` but is
         * called once for each custom tag handled by the `buildable`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname the name of the tag
         * @param data user data created in custom_tag_start
         */
        custom_finished(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
         * the buildable.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @param data user data that will be passed in to parser functions
         */
        custom_tag_end(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called for each unknown element under `<child>`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @returns `true` if a object has a custom implementation, `false`          if it doesn't.
         */
        custom_tag_start(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string): [boolean, GLib.MarkupParser, null];

        /**
         * Get the internal child called `childname` of the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param childname name of child
         * @returns the internal child of the buildable object
         */
        get_internal_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, childname: string): T;

        /**
         * Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI].
         * Note that this will be called once for each time
         * `gtk_builder_add_from_file()` or `gtk_builder_add_from_string()`
         * is called on a builder.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         */
        parser_finished(builder: Builder): void;

        /**
         * Sets the property name `name` to `value` on the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param name name of property
         * @param value value of property
         */
        set_buildable_property(builder: Builder, name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;

        /**
         * Sets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * @param name name to set
         */
        set_name(name: string): void;

        /**
         * Adds a child to `buildable`. `type` is an optional string
         * describing how the child should be added.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child to add
         * @param type kind of child or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add_child(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object, type: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Constructs a child of `buildable` with the name `name`.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} calls this function if a “constructor” has been
         * specified in the UI definition.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param name name of child to construct
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_construct_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, name: string): T;

        /**
         * This is similar to `gtk_buildable_parser_finished()` but is
         * called once for each custom tag handled by the `buildable`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname the name of the tag
         * @param data user data created in custom_tag_start
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_finished(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
         * the buildable.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @param data user data that will be passed in to parser functions
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_tag_end(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called for each unknown element under `<child>`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_tag_start(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string): [boolean, GLib.MarkupParser, never];

        /**
         * Get the internal child called `childname` of the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param childname name of child
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_internal_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, childname: string): T;

        /**
         * Gets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} sets the name based on the
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI]
         * used to construct the `buildable`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_name(): string;

        /**
         * Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI].
         * Note that this will be called once for each time
         * `gtk_builder_add_from_file()` or `gtk_builder_add_from_string()`
         * is called on a builder.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_parser_finished(builder: Builder): void;

        /**
         * Sets the property name `name` to `value` on the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param name name of property
         * @param value value of property
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_buildable_property(builder: Builder, name: string, value: unknown): void;

        /**
         * Sets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * @param name name to set
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_name(name: string): void;
    }


    namespace Adjustment {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends GObject.InitiallyUnowned.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * Emitted when one or more of the {@link Gtk.Adjustment} properties have been
             * changed, other than the {@link Gtk.Adjustment.value} property.
             * @signal
             * @run-first
             */
            changed: () => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when the {@link Gtk.Adjustment.value} property has been changed.
             * @signal
             * @run-first
             */
            "value-changed": () => void;
            "notify::lower": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::page-increment": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::page-size": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::step-increment": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::upper": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.InitiallyUnowned.ConstructorProps {
            lower: number;
            page_increment: number;
            pageIncrement: number;
            page_size: number;
            pageSize: number;
            step_increment: number;
            stepIncrement: number;
            upper: number;
            value: number;
        }
    }

    /**
     * The {@link Gtk.Adjustment} object represents a value which has an associated lower
     * and upper bound, together with step and page increments, and a page size.
     * It is used within several GTK+ widgets, including {@link Gtk.SpinButton}, {@link Gtk.Viewport},
     * and {@link Gtk.Range} (which is a base class for {@link Gtk.Scrollbar} and {@link Gtk.Scale}).
     * 
     * The {@link Gtk.Adjustment} object does not update the value itself. Instead
     * it is left up to the owner of the {@link Gtk.Adjustment} to control the value.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class Adjustment extends GObject.InitiallyUnowned {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<Adjustment>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * The minimum value of the adjustment.
         * @since 2.4
         * @default 0
         */
        get lower(): number;
        set lower(val: number);

        /**
         * The page increment of the adjustment.
         * @since 2.4
         * @default 0
         */
        get page_increment(): number;
        set page_increment(val: number);

        /**
         * The page increment of the adjustment.
         * @since 2.4
         * @default 0
         */
        get pageIncrement(): number;
        set pageIncrement(val: number);

        /**
         * The page size of the adjustment.
         * Note that the page-size is irrelevant and should be set to zero
         * if the adjustment is used for a simple scalar value, e.g. in a
         * {@link Gtk.SpinButton}.
         * @since 2.4
         * @default 0
         */
        get page_size(): number;
        set page_size(val: number);

        /**
         * The page size of the adjustment.
         * Note that the page-size is irrelevant and should be set to zero
         * if the adjustment is used for a simple scalar value, e.g. in a
         * {@link Gtk.SpinButton}.
         * @since 2.4
         * @default 0
         */
        get pageSize(): number;
        set pageSize(val: number);

        /**
         * The step increment of the adjustment.
         * @since 2.4
         * @default 0
         */
        get step_increment(): number;
        set step_increment(val: number);

        /**
         * The step increment of the adjustment.
         * @since 2.4
         * @default 0
         */
        get stepIncrement(): number;
        set stepIncrement(val: number);

        /**
         * The maximum value of the adjustment.
         * Note that values will be restricted by
         * `upper - page-size` if the page-size
         * property is nonzero.
         * @since 2.4
         * @default 0
         */
        get upper(): number;
        set upper(val: number);

        /**
         * The value of the adjustment.
         * @since 2.4
         * @default 0
         */
        get value(): number;
        set value(val: number);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: Adjustment.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<Adjustment.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](value: number, lower: number, upper: number, step_increment: number, page_increment: number, page_size: number): Adjustment;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof Adjustment.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Adjustment.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof Adjustment.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Adjustment.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof Adjustment.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<Adjustment.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * Emits a {@link Gtk.Adjustment.SignalSignatures.changed | Gtk.Adjustment::changed} signal from the {@link Gtk.Adjustment}.
         * This is typically called by the owner of the {@link Gtk.Adjustment} after it has
         * changed any of the {@link Gtk.Adjustment} properties other than the value.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_changed(): void;

        /**
         * Emits a {@link Gtk.Adjustment.SignalSignatures.value_changed | Gtk.Adjustment::value-changed} signal from the {@link Gtk.Adjustment}.
         * This is typically called by the owner of the {@link Gtk.Adjustment} after it has
         * changed the {@link Gtk.Adjustment.value} property.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_value_changed(): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Emits a {@link Gtk.Adjustment.SignalSignatures.changed | Gtk.Adjustment::changed} signal from the {@link Gtk.Adjustment}.
         * This is typically called by the owner of the {@link Gtk.Adjustment} after it has
         * changed any of the {@link Gtk.Adjustment} properties other than the value.
         */
        changed(): void;

        /**
         * Updates the {@link Gtk.Adjustment.value} property to ensure that the range
         * between `lower` and `upper` is in the current page (i.e. between
         * {@link Gtk.Adjustment.value} and {@link Gtk.Adjustment.value} + {@link Gtk.Adjustment.page_size}).
         * If the range is larger than the page size, then only the start of it will
         * be in the current page.
         * 
         * A {@link Gtk.Adjustment.SignalSignatures.value_changed | Gtk.Adjustment::value-changed} signal will be emitted if the value is changed.
         * @param lower the lower value
         * @param upper the upper value
         */
        clamp_page(lower: number, upper: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets all properties of the adjustment at once.
         * 
         * Use this function to avoid multiple emissions of the
         * {@link Gtk.Adjustment.SignalSignatures.changed | Gtk.Adjustment::changed} signal. See `gtk_adjustment_set_lower()`
         * for an alternative way of compressing multiple emissions of
         * {@link Gtk.Adjustment.SignalSignatures.changed | Gtk.Adjustment::changed} into one.
         * @param value the new value
         * @param lower the new minimum value
         * @param upper the new maximum value
         * @param step_increment the new step increment
         * @param page_increment the new page increment
         * @param page_size the new page size
         */
        configure(value: number, lower: number, upper: number, step_increment: number, page_increment: number, page_size: number): void;

        /**
         * Retrieves the minimum value of the adjustment.
         * @returns The current minimum value of the adjustment
         */
        get_lower(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the smaller of step increment and page increment.
         * @returns the minimum increment of `adjustment`
         */
        get_minimum_increment(): number;

        /**
         * Retrieves the page increment of the adjustment.
         * @returns The current page increment of the adjustment
         */
        get_page_increment(): number;

        /**
         * Retrieves the page size of the adjustment.
         * @returns The current page size of the adjustment
         */
        get_page_size(): number;

        /**
         * Retrieves the step increment of the adjustment.
         * @returns The current step increment of the adjustment.
         */
        get_step_increment(): number;

        /**
         * Retrieves the maximum value of the adjustment.
         * @returns The current maximum value of the adjustment
         */
        get_upper(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the current value of the adjustment.
         * See `gtk_adjustment_set_value()`.
         * @returns The current value of the adjustment
         */
        get_value(): number;

        /**
         * Sets the minimum value of the adjustment.
         * 
         * When setting multiple adjustment properties via their individual
         * setters, multiple {@link Gtk.Adjustment.SignalSignatures.changed | Gtk.Adjustment::changed} signals will be emitted.
         * However, since the emission of the {@link Gtk.Adjustment.SignalSignatures.changed | Gtk.Adjustment::changed} signal
         * is tied to the emission of the {@link GObject.Object.SignalSignatures.notify | GObject.Object::notify} signals of the changed
         * properties, it’s possible to compress the {@link Gtk.Adjustment.SignalSignatures.changed | Gtk.Adjustment::changed}
         * signals into one by calling `g_object_freeze_notify()` and
         * `g_object_thaw_notify()` around the calls to the individual setters.
         * 
         * Alternatively, using a single `g_object_set()` for all the properties
         * to change, or using `gtk_adjustment_configure()` has the same effect
         * of compressing {@link Gtk.Adjustment.SignalSignatures.changed | Gtk.Adjustment::changed} emissions.
         * @param lower the new minimum value
         */
        set_lower(lower: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the page increment of the adjustment.
         * 
         * See `gtk_adjustment_set_lower()` about how to compress multiple
         * emissions of the {@link Gtk.Adjustment.SignalSignatures.changed | Gtk.Adjustment::changed} signal when setting
         * multiple adjustment properties.
         * @param page_increment the new page increment
         */
        set_page_increment(page_increment: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the page size of the adjustment.
         * 
         * See `gtk_adjustment_set_lower()` about how to compress multiple
         * emissions of the GtkAdjustment::changed signal when setting
         * multiple adjustment properties.
         * @param page_size the new page size
         */
        set_page_size(page_size: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the step increment of the adjustment.
         * 
         * See `gtk_adjustment_set_lower()` about how to compress multiple
         * emissions of the {@link Gtk.Adjustment.SignalSignatures.changed | Gtk.Adjustment::changed} signal when setting
         * multiple adjustment properties.
         * @param step_increment the new step increment
         */
        set_step_increment(step_increment: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the maximum value of the adjustment.
         * 
         * Note that values will be restricted by `upper - page-size`
         * if the page-size property is nonzero.
         * 
         * See `gtk_adjustment_set_lower()` about how to compress multiple
         * emissions of the {@link Gtk.Adjustment.SignalSignatures.changed | Gtk.Adjustment::changed} signal when setting
         * multiple adjustment properties.
         * @param upper the new maximum value
         */
        set_upper(upper: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.Adjustment} value. The value is clamped to lie between
         * {@link Gtk.Adjustment.lower} and {@link Gtk.Adjustment.upper}.
         * 
         * Note that for adjustments which are used in a {@link Gtk.Scrollbar}, the
         * effective range of allowed values goes from {@link Gtk.Adjustment.lower} to
         * {@link Gtk.Adjustment.upper} - {@link Gtk.Adjustment.page_size}.
         * @param value the new value
         */
        set_value(value: number): void;

        /**
         * Emits a {@link Gtk.Adjustment.SignalSignatures.value_changed | Gtk.Adjustment::value-changed} signal from the {@link Gtk.Adjustment}.
         * This is typically called by the owner of the {@link Gtk.Adjustment} after it has
         * changed the {@link Gtk.Adjustment.value} property.
         */
        value_changed(): void;
    }


    namespace Alignment {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Bin.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::bottom-padding": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::left-padding": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::right-padding": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::top-padding": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::xalign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::xscale": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::yalign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::yscale": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Bin.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {
            bottom_padding: number;
            bottomPadding: number;
            left_padding: number;
            leftPadding: number;
            right_padding: number;
            rightPadding: number;
            top_padding: number;
            topPadding: number;
            xalign: number;
            xscale: number;
            yalign: number;
            yscale: number;
        }
    }

    /**
     * The {@link Gtk.Alignment} widget controls the alignment and size of its child widget.
     * It has four settings: xscale, yscale, xalign, and yalign.
     * 
     * The scale settings are used to specify how much the child widget should
     * expand to fill the space allocated to the {@link Gtk.Alignment}.
     * The values can range from 0 (meaning the child doesn’t expand at all) to
     * 1 (meaning the child expands to fill all of the available space).
     * 
     * The align settings are used to place the child widget within the available
     * area. The values range from 0 (top or left) to 1 (bottom or right).
     * Of course, if the scale settings are both set to 1, the alignment settings
     * have no effect.
     * 
     * GtkAlignment has been deprecated in 3.14 and should not be used in
     * newly-written code. The desired effect can be achieved by using the
     * {@link Gtk.Widget.halign}, {@link Gtk.Widget.valign} and {@link Gtk.Widget.margin} properties on the
     * child widget.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class Alignment extends Bin implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<Alignment>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * The padding to insert at the bottom of the widget.
         * @since 2.4
         * @deprecated since 3.14: Use `gtk_widget_set_margin_bottom()` instead
         * @default 0
         */
        get bottom_padding(): number;
        set bottom_padding(val: number);

        /**
         * The padding to insert at the bottom of the widget.
         * @since 2.4
         * @deprecated since 3.14: Use `gtk_widget_set_margin_bottom()` instead
         * @default 0
         */
        get bottomPadding(): number;
        set bottomPadding(val: number);

        /**
         * The padding to insert at the left of the widget.
         * @since 2.4
         * @deprecated since 3.14: Use `gtk_widget_set_margin_start()` instead
         * @default 0
         */
        get left_padding(): number;
        set left_padding(val: number);

        /**
         * The padding to insert at the left of the widget.
         * @since 2.4
         * @deprecated since 3.14: Use `gtk_widget_set_margin_start()` instead
         * @default 0
         */
        get leftPadding(): number;
        set leftPadding(val: number);

        /**
         * The padding to insert at the right of the widget.
         * @since 2.4
         * @deprecated since 3.14: Use `gtk_widget_set_margin_end()` instead
         * @default 0
         */
        get right_padding(): number;
        set right_padding(val: number);

        /**
         * The padding to insert at the right of the widget.
         * @since 2.4
         * @deprecated since 3.14: Use `gtk_widget_set_margin_end()` instead
         * @default 0
         */
        get rightPadding(): number;
        set rightPadding(val: number);

        /**
         * The padding to insert at the top of the widget.
         * @since 2.4
         * @deprecated since 3.14: Use `gtk_widget_set_margin_top()` instead
         * @default 0
         */
        get top_padding(): number;
        set top_padding(val: number);

        /**
         * The padding to insert at the top of the widget.
         * @since 2.4
         * @deprecated since 3.14: Use `gtk_widget_set_margin_top()` instead
         * @default 0
         */
        get topPadding(): number;
        set topPadding(val: number);

        /**
         * Horizontal position of child in available space. A value of 0.0
         * will flush the child left (or right, in RTL locales); a value
         * of 1.0 will flush the child right (or left, in RTL locales).
         * @deprecated since 3.14: Use `gtk_widget_set_halign()` on the child instead
         * @default 0.5
         */
        get xalign(): number;
        set xalign(val: number);

        /**
         * If available horizontal space is bigger than needed, how much
         * of it to use for the child. A value of 0.0 means none; a value
         * of 1.0 means all.
         * @deprecated since 3.14: Use `gtk_widget_set_hexpand()` on the child instead
         * @default 1
         */
        get xscale(): number;
        set xscale(val: number);

        /**
         * Vertical position of child in available space. A value of 0.0
         * will flush the child to the top; a value of 1.0 will flush the
         * child to the bottom.
         * @deprecated since 3.14: Use `gtk_widget_set_valign()` on the child instead
         * @default 0.5
         */
        get yalign(): number;
        set yalign(val: number);

        /**
         * If available vertical space is bigger than needed, how much
         * of it to use for the child. A value of 0.0 means none; a value
         * of 1.0 means all.
         * @deprecated since 3.14: Use `gtk_widget_set_vexpand()` on the child instead
         * @default 1
         */
        get yscale(): number;
        set yscale(val: number);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: Alignment.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        bin: Bin;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<Alignment.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](xalign: number, yalign: number, xscale: number, yscale: number): Alignment;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof Alignment.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Alignment.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof Alignment.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Alignment.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof Alignment.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<Alignment.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Gets the padding on the different sides of the widget.
         * See gtk_alignment_set_padding ().
         */
        get_padding(): [number, number, number, number];

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.Alignment} values.
         * @param xalign the horizontal alignment of the child widget, from 0 (left) to 1  (right).
         * @param yalign the vertical alignment of the child widget, from 0 (top) to 1  (bottom).
         * @param xscale the amount that the child widget expands horizontally to fill up  unused space, from 0 to 1.  A value of 0 indicates that the child widget should never expand.  A value of 1 indicates that the child widget will expand to fill all of the  space allocated for the {@link Gtk.Alignment}.
         * @param yscale the amount that the child widget expands vertically to fill up  unused space, from 0 to 1. The values are similar to `xscale`.
         */
        set(xalign: number, yalign: number, xscale: number, yscale: number): void;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
    // Conflicted with GObject.Object.set
        set(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Sets the padding on the different sides of the widget.
         * The padding adds blank space to the sides of the widget. For instance,
         * this can be used to indent the child widget towards the right by adding
         * padding on the left.
         * @param padding_top the padding at the top of the widget
         * @param padding_bottom the padding at the bottom of the widget
         * @param padding_left the padding at the left of the widget
         * @param padding_right the padding at the right of the widget.
         */
        set_padding(padding_top: number, padding_bottom: number, padding_left: number, padding_right: number): void;
    }


    namespace AppChooserButton {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends ComboBox.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * Emitted when a custom item, previously added with
             * `gtk_app_chooser_button_append_custom_item()`, is activated from the
             * dropdown menu.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "custom-item-activated": (arg0: string) => void;
            "notify::heading": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::show-default-item": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::show-dialog-item": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::active": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::active-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::add-tearoffs": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::button-sensitivity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::cell-area": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::column-span-column": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::entry-text-column": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-entry": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-frame": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::id-column": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::model": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::popup-fixed-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::popup-shown": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::row-span-column": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tearoff-title": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::wrap-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::content-type": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::editing-canceled": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when a custom item, previously added with
             * `gtk_app_chooser_button_append_custom_item()`, is activated from the
             * dropdown menu.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "custom-item-activated::heading": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when a custom item, previously added with
             * `gtk_app_chooser_button_append_custom_item()`, is activated from the
             * dropdown menu.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "custom-item-activated::show-default-item": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when a custom item, previously added with
             * `gtk_app_chooser_button_append_custom_item()`, is activated from the
             * dropdown menu.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "custom-item-activated::show-dialog-item": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when a custom item, previously added with
             * `gtk_app_chooser_button_append_custom_item()`, is activated from the
             * dropdown menu.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "custom-item-activated::active": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when a custom item, previously added with
             * `gtk_app_chooser_button_append_custom_item()`, is activated from the
             * dropdown menu.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "custom-item-activated::active-id": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when a custom item, previously added with
             * `gtk_app_chooser_button_append_custom_item()`, is activated from the
             * dropdown menu.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "custom-item-activated::add-tearoffs": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when a custom item, previously added with
             * `gtk_app_chooser_button_append_custom_item()`, is activated from the
             * dropdown menu.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "custom-item-activated::button-sensitivity": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when a custom item, previously added with
             * `gtk_app_chooser_button_append_custom_item()`, is activated from the
             * dropdown menu.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "custom-item-activated::cell-area": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when a custom item, previously added with
             * `gtk_app_chooser_button_append_custom_item()`, is activated from the
             * dropdown menu.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "custom-item-activated::column-span-column": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when a custom item, previously added with
             * `gtk_app_chooser_button_append_custom_item()`, is activated from the
             * dropdown menu.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "custom-item-activated::entry-text-column": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when a custom item, previously added with
             * `gtk_app_chooser_button_append_custom_item()`, is activated from the
             * dropdown menu.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "custom-item-activated::has-entry": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when a custom item, previously added with
             * `gtk_app_chooser_button_append_custom_item()`, is activated from the
             * dropdown menu.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "custom-item-activated::has-frame": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when a custom item, previously added with
             * `gtk_app_chooser_button_append_custom_item()`, is activated from the
             * dropdown menu.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "custom-item-activated::id-column": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when a custom item, previously added with
             * `gtk_app_chooser_button_append_custom_item()`, is activated from the
             * dropdown menu.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "custom-item-activated::model": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when a custom item, previously added with
             * `gtk_app_chooser_button_append_custom_item()`, is activated from the
             * dropdown menu.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "custom-item-activated::popup-fixed-width": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when a custom item, previously added with
             * `gtk_app_chooser_button_append_custom_item()`, is activated from the
             * dropdown menu.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "custom-item-activated::popup-shown": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when a custom item, previously added with
             * `gtk_app_chooser_button_append_custom_item()`, is activated from the
             * dropdown menu.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "custom-item-activated::row-span-column": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when a custom item, previously added with
             * `gtk_app_chooser_button_append_custom_item()`, is activated from the
             * dropdown menu.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "custom-item-activated::tearoff-title": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when a custom item, previously added with
             * `gtk_app_chooser_button_append_custom_item()`, is activated from the
             * dropdown menu.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "custom-item-activated::wrap-width": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when a custom item, previously added with
             * `gtk_app_chooser_button_append_custom_item()`, is activated from the
             * dropdown menu.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "custom-item-activated::border-width": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when a custom item, previously added with
             * `gtk_app_chooser_button_append_custom_item()`, is activated from the
             * dropdown menu.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "custom-item-activated::child": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when a custom item, previously added with
             * `gtk_app_chooser_button_append_custom_item()`, is activated from the
             * dropdown menu.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "custom-item-activated::resize-mode": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when a custom item, previously added with
             * `gtk_app_chooser_button_append_custom_item()`, is activated from the
             * dropdown menu.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "custom-item-activated::app-paintable": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when a custom item, previously added with
             * `gtk_app_chooser_button_append_custom_item()`, is activated from the
             * dropdown menu.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "custom-item-activated::can-default": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when a custom item, previously added with
             * `gtk_app_chooser_button_append_custom_item()`, is activated from the
             * dropdown menu.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "custom-item-activated::can-focus": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when a custom item, previously added with
             * `gtk_app_chooser_button_append_custom_item()`, is activated from the
             * dropdown menu.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "custom-item-activated::composite-child": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when a custom item, previously added with
             * `gtk_app_chooser_button_append_custom_item()`, is activated from the
             * dropdown menu.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "custom-item-activated::double-buffered": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when a custom item, previously added with
             * `gtk_app_chooser_button_append_custom_item()`, is activated from the
             * dropdown menu.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "custom-item-activated::events": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when a custom item, previously added with
             * `gtk_app_chooser_button_append_custom_item()`, is activated from the
             * dropdown menu.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "custom-item-activated::expand": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when a custom item, previously added with
             * `gtk_app_chooser_button_append_custom_item()`, is activated from the
             * dropdown menu.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "custom-item-activated::focus-on-click": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when a custom item, previously added with
             * `gtk_app_chooser_button_append_custom_item()`, is activated from the
             * dropdown menu.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "custom-item-activated::halign": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when a custom item, previously added with
             * `gtk_app_chooser_button_append_custom_item()`, is activated from the
             * dropdown menu.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "custom-item-activated::has-default": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when a custom item, previously added with
             * `gtk_app_chooser_button_append_custom_item()`, is activated from the
             * dropdown menu.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "custom-item-activated::has-focus": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when a custom item, previously added with
             * `gtk_app_chooser_button_append_custom_item()`, is activated from the
             * dropdown menu.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "custom-item-activated::has-tooltip": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when a custom item, previously added with
             * `gtk_app_chooser_button_append_custom_item()`, is activated from the
             * dropdown menu.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "custom-item-activated::height-request": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when a custom item, previously added with
             * `gtk_app_chooser_button_append_custom_item()`, is activated from the
             * dropdown menu.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "custom-item-activated::hexpand": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when a custom item, previously added with
             * `gtk_app_chooser_button_append_custom_item()`, is activated from the
             * dropdown menu.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "custom-item-activated::hexpand-set": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when a custom item, previously added with
             * `gtk_app_chooser_button_append_custom_item()`, is activated from the
             * dropdown menu.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "custom-item-activated::is-focus": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when a custom item, previously added with
             * `gtk_app_chooser_button_append_custom_item()`, is activated from the
             * dropdown menu.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "custom-item-activated::margin": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when a custom item, previously added with
             * `gtk_app_chooser_button_append_custom_item()`, is activated from the
             * dropdown menu.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "custom-item-activated::margin-bottom": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when a custom item, previously added with
             * `gtk_app_chooser_button_append_custom_item()`, is activated from the
             * dropdown menu.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "custom-item-activated::margin-end": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when a custom item, previously added with
             * `gtk_app_chooser_button_append_custom_item()`, is activated from the
             * dropdown menu.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "custom-item-activated::margin-left": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when a custom item, previously added with
             * `gtk_app_chooser_button_append_custom_item()`, is activated from the
             * dropdown menu.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "custom-item-activated::margin-right": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when a custom item, previously added with
             * `gtk_app_chooser_button_append_custom_item()`, is activated from the
             * dropdown menu.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "custom-item-activated::margin-start": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when a custom item, previously added with
             * `gtk_app_chooser_button_append_custom_item()`, is activated from the
             * dropdown menu.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "custom-item-activated::margin-top": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when a custom item, previously added with
             * `gtk_app_chooser_button_append_custom_item()`, is activated from the
             * dropdown menu.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "custom-item-activated::name": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when a custom item, previously added with
             * `gtk_app_chooser_button_append_custom_item()`, is activated from the
             * dropdown menu.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "custom-item-activated::no-show-all": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when a custom item, previously added with
             * `gtk_app_chooser_button_append_custom_item()`, is activated from the
             * dropdown menu.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "custom-item-activated::opacity": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when a custom item, previously added with
             * `gtk_app_chooser_button_append_custom_item()`, is activated from the
             * dropdown menu.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "custom-item-activated::parent": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when a custom item, previously added with
             * `gtk_app_chooser_button_append_custom_item()`, is activated from the
             * dropdown menu.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "custom-item-activated::receives-default": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when a custom item, previously added with
             * `gtk_app_chooser_button_append_custom_item()`, is activated from the
             * dropdown menu.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "custom-item-activated::scale-factor": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when a custom item, previously added with
             * `gtk_app_chooser_button_append_custom_item()`, is activated from the
             * dropdown menu.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "custom-item-activated::sensitive": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when a custom item, previously added with
             * `gtk_app_chooser_button_append_custom_item()`, is activated from the
             * dropdown menu.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "custom-item-activated::style": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when a custom item, previously added with
             * `gtk_app_chooser_button_append_custom_item()`, is activated from the
             * dropdown menu.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "custom-item-activated::tooltip-markup": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when a custom item, previously added with
             * `gtk_app_chooser_button_append_custom_item()`, is activated from the
             * dropdown menu.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "custom-item-activated::tooltip-text": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when a custom item, previously added with
             * `gtk_app_chooser_button_append_custom_item()`, is activated from the
             * dropdown menu.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "custom-item-activated::valign": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when a custom item, previously added with
             * `gtk_app_chooser_button_append_custom_item()`, is activated from the
             * dropdown menu.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "custom-item-activated::vexpand": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when a custom item, previously added with
             * `gtk_app_chooser_button_append_custom_item()`, is activated from the
             * dropdown menu.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "custom-item-activated::vexpand-set": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when a custom item, previously added with
             * `gtk_app_chooser_button_append_custom_item()`, is activated from the
             * dropdown menu.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "custom-item-activated::visible": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when a custom item, previously added with
             * `gtk_app_chooser_button_append_custom_item()`, is activated from the
             * dropdown menu.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "custom-item-activated::width-request": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when a custom item, previously added with
             * `gtk_app_chooser_button_append_custom_item()`, is activated from the
             * dropdown menu.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "custom-item-activated::window": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when a custom item, previously added with
             * `gtk_app_chooser_button_append_custom_item()`, is activated from the
             * dropdown menu.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "custom-item-activated::content-type": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when a custom item, previously added with
             * `gtk_app_chooser_button_append_custom_item()`, is activated from the
             * dropdown menu.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "custom-item-activated::editing-canceled": (arg0: string) => void;
            [key: `custom-item-activated::${string}`]: (arg0: string) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends ComboBox.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, AppChooser.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, CellEditable.ConstructorProps, CellLayout.ConstructorProps {
            heading: string | null;
            show_default_item: boolean;
            showDefaultItem: boolean;
            show_dialog_item: boolean;
            showDialogItem: boolean;
        }
    }

    /**
     * The {@link Gtk.AppChooserButton} is a widget that lets the user select
     * an application. It implements the {@link Gtk.AppChooser} interface.
     * 
     * Initially, a {@link Gtk.AppChooserButton} selects the first application
     * in its list, which will either be the most-recently used application
     * or, if {@link Gtk.AppChooserButton.show_default_item} is `true`, the
     * default application.
     * 
     * The list of applications shown in a {@link Gtk.AppChooserButton} includes
     * the recommended applications for the given content type. When
     * {@link Gtk.AppChooserButton.show_default_item} is set, the default application
     * is also included. To let the user chooser other applications,
     * you can set the {@link Gtk.AppChooserButton.show_dialog_item} property,
     * which allows to open a full {@link Gtk.AppChooserDialog}.
     * 
     * It is possible to add custom items to the list, using
     * `gtk_app_chooser_button_append_custom_item()`. These items cause
     * the {@link Gtk.AppChooserButton.SignalSignatures.custom_item_activated | Gtk.AppChooserButton::custom-item-activated} signal to be
     * emitted when they are selected.
     * 
     * To track changes in the selected application, use the
     * {@link Gtk.ComboBox.SignalSignatures.changed | Gtk.ComboBox::changed} signal.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class AppChooserButton extends ComboBox implements Atk.ImplementorIface, AppChooser, Buildable, CellEditable, CellLayout {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<AppChooserButton>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * The text to show at the top of the dialog that can be
         * opened from the button. The string may contain Pango markup.
         * @default null
         */
        get heading(): string | null;
        set heading(val: string | null);

        /**
         * The {@link Gtk.AppChooserButton.show_default_item} property determines
         * whether the dropdown menu should show the default application
         * on top for the provided content type.
         * @since 3.2
         * @default false
         */
        get show_default_item(): boolean;
        set show_default_item(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The {@link Gtk.AppChooserButton.show_default_item} property determines
         * whether the dropdown menu should show the default application
         * on top for the provided content type.
         * @since 3.2
         * @default false
         */
        get showDefaultItem(): boolean;
        set showDefaultItem(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The {@link Gtk.AppChooserButton.show_dialog_item} property determines
         * whether the dropdown menu should show an item that triggers
         * a {@link Gtk.AppChooserDialog} when clicked.
         * @default false
         */
        get show_dialog_item(): boolean;
        set show_dialog_item(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The {@link Gtk.AppChooserButton.show_dialog_item} property determines
         * whether the dropdown menu should show an item that triggers
         * a {@link Gtk.AppChooserDialog} when clicked.
         * @default false
         */
        get showDialogItem(): boolean;
        set showDialogItem(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: AppChooserButton.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<AppChooserButton.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](content_type: string): AppChooserButton;

        // Conflicted with Gtk.ComboBox.new
        static ["new"](...args: never[]): any;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof AppChooserButton.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, AppChooserButton.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof AppChooserButton.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, AppChooserButton.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof AppChooserButton.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<AppChooserButton.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * Signal emitted when a custom item,
         *    previously added with `gtk_app_chooser_button_append_custom_item()`,
         *    is activated from the dropdown menu.
         * @param item_name 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_item_activated(item_name: string): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Appends a custom item to the list of applications that is shown
         * in the popup; the item name must be unique per-widget.
         * Clients can use the provided name as a detail for the
         * {@link Gtk.AppChooserButton.SignalSignatures.custom_item_activated | Gtk.AppChooserButton::custom-item-activated} signal, to add a
         * callback for the activation of a particular custom item in the list.
         * See also `gtk_app_chooser_button_append_separator()`.
         * @param name the name of the custom item
         * @param label the label for the custom item
         * @param icon the icon for the custom item
         */
        append_custom_item(name: string, label: string, icon: Gio.Icon): void;

        /**
         * Appends a separator to the list of applications that is shown
         * in the popup.
         */
        append_separator(): void;

        /**
         * Returns the text to display at the top of the dialog.
         * @returns the text to display at the top of the dialog,     or `null`, in which case a default text is displayed
         */
        get_heading(): string | null;

        /**
         * Returns the current value of the {@link Gtk.AppChooserButton.show_default_item}
         * property.
         * @returns the value of {@link Gtk.AppChooserButton.show_default_item}
         */
        get_show_default_item(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the current value of the {@link Gtk.AppChooserButton.show_dialog_item}
         * property.
         * @returns the value of {@link Gtk.AppChooserButton.show_dialog_item}
         */
        get_show_dialog_item(): boolean;

        /**
         * Selects a custom item previously added with
         * `gtk_app_chooser_button_append_custom_item()`.
         * 
         * Use `gtk_app_chooser_refresh()` to bring the selection
         * to its initial state.
         * @param name the name of the custom item
         */
        set_active_custom_item(name: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets the text to display at the top of the dialog.
         * If the heading is not set, the dialog displays a default text.
         * @param heading a string containing Pango markup
         */
        set_heading(heading: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the dropdown menu of this button should show the
         * default application for the given content type at top.
         * @param setting the new value for {@link Gtk.AppChooserButton.show_default_item}
         */
        set_show_default_item(setting: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the dropdown menu of this button should show an
         * entry to trigger a {@link Gtk.AppChooserDialog}.
         * @param setting the new value for {@link Gtk.AppChooserButton.show_dialog_item}
         */
        set_show_dialog_item(setting: boolean): void;

        /**
         * The content type of the {@link Gtk.AppChooser} object.
         * 
         * See [GContentType][gio-GContentType]
         * for more information about content types.
         * @construct-only
         * @default null
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.AppChooser
         */
        get content_type(): string;

        /**
         * The content type of the {@link Gtk.AppChooser} object.
         * 
         * See [GContentType][gio-GContentType]
         * for more information about content types.
         * @construct-only
         * @default null
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.AppChooser
         */
        get contentType(): string;

        /**
         * Indicates whether editing on the cell has been canceled.
         * @since 2.20
         * @default false
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.CellEditable
         */
        get editing_canceled(): boolean;
        set editing_canceled(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Indicates whether editing on the cell has been canceled.
         * @since 2.20
         * @default false
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.CellEditable
         */
        get editingCanceled(): boolean;
        set editingCanceled(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Returns the currently selected application.
         * @returns a {@link Gio.AppInfo} for the currently selected     application, or `null` if none is selected. Free with `g_object_unref()`
         */
        get_app_info(): Gio.AppInfo | null;

        /**
         * Returns the current value of the {@link Gtk.AppChooser.content_type} property.
         * @returns the content type of `self`. Free with `g_free()`
         */
        get_content_type(): string;

        /**
         * Reloads the list of applications.
         */
        refresh(): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.CellEditable.SignalSignatures.editing_done | Gtk.CellEditable::editing-done} signal.
         */
        editing_done(): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.CellEditable.SignalSignatures.remove_widget | Gtk.CellEditable::remove-widget} signal.
         */
        remove_widget(): void;

        /**
         * Begins editing on a `cell_editable`.
         * 
         * The {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} for the cell creates and returns a {@link Gtk.CellEditable} from
         * `gtk_cell_renderer_start_editing()`, configured for the {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} type.
         * 
         * `gtk_cell_editable_start_editing()` can then set up `cell_editable` suitably for
         * editing a cell, e.g. making the Esc key emit {@link Gtk.CellEditable.SignalSignatures.editing_done | Gtk.CellEditable::editing-done}.
         * 
         * Note that the `cell_editable` is created on-demand for the current edit; its
         * lifetime is temporary and does not persist across other edits and/or cells.
         * @param event The {@link Gdk.Event} that began the editing process, or   `null` if editing was initiated programmatically
         */
        start_editing(event: Gdk.Event | null): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.CellEditable.SignalSignatures.editing_done | Gtk.CellEditable::editing-done} signal.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_editing_done(): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.CellEditable.SignalSignatures.remove_widget | Gtk.CellEditable::remove-widget} signal.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_remove_widget(): void;

        /**
         * Begins editing on a `cell_editable`.
         * 
         * The {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} for the cell creates and returns a {@link Gtk.CellEditable} from
         * `gtk_cell_renderer_start_editing()`, configured for the {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} type.
         * 
         * `gtk_cell_editable_start_editing()` can then set up `cell_editable` suitably for
         * editing a cell, e.g. making the Esc key emit {@link Gtk.CellEditable.SignalSignatures.editing_done | Gtk.CellEditable::editing-done}.
         * 
         * Note that the `cell_editable` is created on-demand for the current edit; its
         * lifetime is temporary and does not persist across other edits and/or cells.
         * @param event The {@link Gdk.Event} that began the editing process, or   `null` if editing was initiated programmatically
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_start_editing(event: Gdk.Event | null): void;

        /**
         * Adds an attribute mapping to the list in `cell_layout`.
         * 
         * The `column` is the column of the model to get a value from, and the
         * `attribute` is the parameter on `cell` to be set from the value. So for
         * example if column 2 of the model contains strings, you could have the
         * “text” attribute of a {@link Gtk.CellRendererText} get its values from column 2.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param attribute an attribute on the renderer
         * @param column the column position on the model to get the attribute from
         */
        add_attribute(cell: CellRenderer, attribute: string, column: number): void;

        /**
         * Unsets all the mappings on all renderers on `cell_layout` and
         * removes all renderers from `cell_layout`.
         */
        clear(): void;

        /**
         * Clears all existing attributes previously set with
         * `gtk_cell_layout_set_attributes()`.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} to clear the attribute mapping on
         */
        clear_attributes(cell: CellRenderer): void;

        /**
         * Returns the underlying {@link Gtk.CellArea} which might be `cell_layout`
         * if called on a {@link Gtk.CellArea} or might be `null` if no {@link Gtk.CellArea}
         * is used by `cell_layout`.
         * @returns the cell area used by `cell_layout`, or `null` in case no cell area is used.
         */
        get_area(): CellArea | null;

        /**
         * Returns the cell renderers which have been added to `cell_layout`.
         * @returns a list of cell renderers. The list, but not the renderers has     been newly allocated and should be freed with `g_list_free()`     when no longer needed.
         */
        get_cells(): CellRenderer[];

        /**
         * Adds the `cell` to the end of `cell_layout`. If `expand` is `false`, then the
         * `cell` is allocated no more space than it needs. Any unused space is
         * divided evenly between cells for which `expand` is `true`.
         * 
         * Note that reusing the same cell renderer is not supported.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param expand `true` if `cell` is to be given extra space allocated to `cell_layout`
         */
        pack_end(cell: CellRenderer, expand: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Packs the `cell` into the beginning of `cell_layout`. If `expand` is `false`,
         * then the `cell` is allocated no more space than it needs. Any unused space
         * is divided evenly between cells for which `expand` is `true`.
         * 
         * Note that reusing the same cell renderer is not supported.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param expand `true` if `cell` is to be given extra space allocated to `cell_layout`
         */
        pack_start(cell: CellRenderer, expand: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Re-inserts `cell` at `position`.
         * 
         * Note that `cell` has already to be packed into `cell_layout`
         * for this to function properly.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} to reorder
         * @param position new position to insert `cell` at
         */
        reorder(cell: CellRenderer, position: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.CellLayoutDataFunc} to use for `cell_layout`.
         * 
         * This function is used instead of the standard attributes mapping
         * for setting the column value, and should set the value of `cell_layout`’s
         * cell renderer(s) as appropriate.
         * 
         * `func` may be `null` to remove a previously set function.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param func the {@link Gtk.CellLayoutDataFunc} to use, or `null`
         */
        set_cell_data_func(cell: CellRenderer, func: CellLayoutDataFunc | null): void;

        /**
         * Adds an attribute mapping to the list in `cell_layout`.
         * 
         * The `column` is the column of the model to get a value from, and the
         * `attribute` is the parameter on `cell` to be set from the value. So for
         * example if column 2 of the model contains strings, you could have the
         * “text” attribute of a {@link Gtk.CellRendererText} get its values from column 2.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param attribute an attribute on the renderer
         * @param column the column position on the model to get the attribute from
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add_attribute(cell: CellRenderer, attribute: string, column: number): void;

        /**
         * Unsets all the mappings on all renderers on `cell_layout` and
         * removes all renderers from `cell_layout`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_clear(): void;

        /**
         * Clears all existing attributes previously set with
         * `gtk_cell_layout_set_attributes()`.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} to clear the attribute mapping on
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_clear_attributes(cell: CellRenderer): void;

        /**
         * Returns the underlying {@link Gtk.CellArea} which might be `cell_layout`
         * if called on a {@link Gtk.CellArea} or might be `null` if no {@link Gtk.CellArea}
         * is used by `cell_layout`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_area(): CellArea | null;

        /**
         * Returns the cell renderers which have been added to `cell_layout`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_cells(): CellRenderer[];

        /**
         * Adds the `cell` to the end of `cell_layout`. If `expand` is `false`, then the
         * `cell` is allocated no more space than it needs. Any unused space is
         * divided evenly between cells for which `expand` is `true`.
         * 
         * Note that reusing the same cell renderer is not supported.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param expand `true` if `cell` is to be given extra space allocated to `cell_layout`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_pack_end(cell: CellRenderer, expand: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Packs the `cell` into the beginning of `cell_layout`. If `expand` is `false`,
         * then the `cell` is allocated no more space than it needs. Any unused space
         * is divided evenly between cells for which `expand` is `true`.
         * 
         * Note that reusing the same cell renderer is not supported.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param expand `true` if `cell` is to be given extra space allocated to `cell_layout`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_pack_start(cell: CellRenderer, expand: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Re-inserts `cell` at `position`.
         * 
         * Note that `cell` has already to be packed into `cell_layout`
         * for this to function properly.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} to reorder
         * @param position new position to insert `cell` at
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_reorder(cell: CellRenderer, position: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.CellLayoutDataFunc} to use for `cell_layout`.
         * 
         * This function is used instead of the standard attributes mapping
         * for setting the column value, and should set the value of `cell_layout`’s
         * cell renderer(s) as appropriate.
         * 
         * `func` may be `null` to remove a previously set function.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param func the {@link Gtk.CellLayoutDataFunc} to use, or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_cell_data_func(cell: CellRenderer, func: CellLayoutDataFunc | null): void;

        /**
         * Emits a {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.child_notify | Gtk.Widget::child-notify} signal for the
         * [child property][child-properties] `child_property`
         * on `widget`.
         * 
         * This is the analogue of `g_object_notify()` for child properties.
         * 
         * Also see `gtk_container_child_notify()`.
         * @param child_property the name of a child property installed on the                  class of `widget`’s parent
         */
        child_notify(child_property: string): void;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Gtk.Container.child_notify
        child_notify(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Returns whether the widget should grab focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
         * See `gtk_widget_set_focus_on_click()`.
         * @returns `true` if the widget should grab focus when it is clicked with               the mouse.
         */
        get_focus_on_click(): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets whether the widget should grab focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
         * Making mouse clicks not grab focus is useful in places like toolbars where
         * you don’t want the keyboard focus removed from the main area of the
         * application.
         * @param focus_on_click whether the widget should grab focus when clicked with the mouse
         */
        set_focus_on_click(focus_on_click: boolean): void;
    }


    namespace AppChooserDialog {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Dialog.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::gfile": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::heading": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-header-bar": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accept-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::application": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::attached-to": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::decorated": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::default-height": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::default-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::deletable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::destroy-with-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-map": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gravity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-resize-grip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-toplevel-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hide-titlebar-when-maximized": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::icon": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::icon-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-active": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-maximized": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::mnemonics-visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::modal": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resizable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-grip-visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::screen": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::skip-pager-hint": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::skip-taskbar-hint": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::startup-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::title": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::transient-for": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::type": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::type-hint": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::urgency-hint": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window-position": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::content-type": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Dialog.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, AppChooser.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {
            gfile: Gio.File;
            heading: string | null;
        }
    }

    /**
     * {@link Gtk.AppChooserDialog} shows a {@link Gtk.AppChooserWidget} inside a {@link Gtk.Dialog}.
     * 
     * Note that {@link Gtk.AppChooserDialog} does not have any interesting methods
     * of its own. Instead, you should get the embedded {@link Gtk.AppChooserWidget}
     * using `gtk_app_chooser_dialog_get_widget()` and call its methods if
     * the generic {@link Gtk.AppChooser} interface is not sufficient for your needs.
     * 
     * To set the heading that is shown above the {@link Gtk.AppChooserWidget},
     * use `gtk_app_chooser_dialog_set_heading()`.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class AppChooserDialog extends Dialog implements Atk.ImplementorIface, AppChooser, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<AppChooserDialog>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * The GFile used by the {@link Gtk.AppChooserDialog}.
         * The dialog's {@link Gtk.AppChooserWidget} content type will be guessed from the
         * file, if present.
         * @construct-only
         */
        get gfile(): Gio.File;

        /**
         * The text to show at the top of the dialog.
         * The string may contain Pango markup.
         * @default null
         */
        get heading(): string | null;
        set heading(val: string | null);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: AppChooserDialog.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<AppChooserDialog.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](parent: Window | null, flags: DialogFlags, file: Gio.File): AppChooserDialog;

        // Conflicted with Gtk.Dialog.new
        static ["new"](...args: never[]): any;

        static new_for_content_type(parent: Window | null, flags: DialogFlags, content_type: string): AppChooserDialog;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof AppChooserDialog.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, AppChooserDialog.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof AppChooserDialog.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, AppChooserDialog.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof AppChooserDialog.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<AppChooserDialog.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Returns the text to display at the top of the dialog.
         * @returns the text to display at the top of the dialog, or `null`, in which     case a default text is displayed
         */
        get_heading(): string | null;

        /**
         * Returns the {@link Gtk.AppChooserWidget} of this dialog.
         * @returns the {@link Gtk.AppChooserWidget} of `self`
         */
        get_widget(): Widget;

        /**
         * Sets the text to display at the top of the dialog.
         * If the heading is not set, the dialog displays a default text.
         * @param heading a string containing Pango markup
         */
        set_heading(heading: string): void;

        /**
         * The content type of the {@link Gtk.AppChooser} object.
         * 
         * See [GContentType][gio-GContentType]
         * for more information about content types.
         * @construct-only
         * @default null
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.AppChooser
         */
        get content_type(): string;

        /**
         * The content type of the {@link Gtk.AppChooser} object.
         * 
         * See [GContentType][gio-GContentType]
         * for more information about content types.
         * @construct-only
         * @default null
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.AppChooser
         */
        get contentType(): string;

        /**
         * The widget's window if it is realized, `null` otherwise.
         * @since 2.14
         * @read-only
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Widget
         */
        // This accessor conflicts with a property or field in a parent class or interface.
     window: Gdk.Window | null | any;

        /**
         * Returns the currently selected application.
         * @returns a {@link Gio.AppInfo} for the currently selected     application, or `null` if none is selected. Free with `g_object_unref()`
         */
        get_app_info(): Gio.AppInfo | null;

        /**
         * Returns the current value of the {@link Gtk.AppChooser.content_type} property.
         * @returns the content type of `self`. Free with `g_free()`
         */
        get_content_type(): string;

        /**
         * Reloads the list of applications.
         */
        refresh(): void;

        /**
         * Emits a {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.child_notify | Gtk.Widget::child-notify} signal for the
         * [child property][child-properties] `child_property`
         * on `widget`.
         * 
         * This is the analogue of `g_object_notify()` for child properties.
         * 
         * Also see `gtk_container_child_notify()`.
         * @param child_property the name of a child property installed on the                  class of `widget`’s parent
         */
        child_notify(child_property: string): void;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Gtk.Container.child_notify
        child_notify(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Fetches the requested opacity for this widget.
         * See `gtk_widget_set_opacity()`.
         * @returns the requested opacity for this widget.
         */
        get_opacity(): number;

        /**
         * Get the {@link Gdk.Screen} from the toplevel window associated with
         * this widget. This function can only be called after the widget
         * has been added to a widget hierarchy with a {@link Gtk.Window}
         * at the top.
         * 
         * In general, you should only create screen specific
         * resources when a widget has been realized, and you should
         * free those resources when the widget is unrealized.
         * @returns the {@link Gdk.Screen} for the toplevel for this widget.
         */
        get_screen(): Gdk.Screen;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.mnemonic_activate | Gtk.Widget::mnemonic-activate} signal.
         * @param group_cycling `true` if there are other widgets with the same mnemonic
         * @returns `true` if the signal has been handled
         */
        mnemonic_activate(group_cycling: boolean): boolean;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Gtk.Window.mnemonic_activate
        mnemonic_activate(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Request the `widget` to be rendered partially transparent,
         * with opacity 0 being fully transparent and 1 fully opaque. (Opacity values
         * are clamped to the [0,1] range.).
         * This works on both toplevel widget, and child widgets, although there
         * are some limitations:
         * 
         * For toplevel widgets this depends on the capabilities of the windowing
         * system. On X11 this has any effect only on X screens with a compositing manager
         * running. See `gtk_widget_is_composited()`. On Windows it should work
         * always, although setting a window’s opacity after the window has been
         * shown causes it to flicker once on Windows.
         * 
         * For child widgets it doesn’t work if any affected widget has a native window, or
         * disables double buffering.
         * @param opacity desired opacity, between 0 and 1
         */
        set_opacity(opacity: number): void;
    }


    namespace AppChooserWidget {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Box.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * Emitted when an application item is activated from the widget's list.
             * 
             * This usually happens when the user double clicks an item, or an item
             * is selected and the user presses one of the keys Space, Shift+Space,
             * Return or Enter.
             * @signal
             * @run-first
             */
            "application-activated": (arg0: Gio.AppInfo) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when an application item is selected from the widget's list.
             * @signal
             * @run-first
             */
            "application-selected": (arg0: Gio.AppInfo) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when a context menu is about to popup over an application item.
             * Clients can insert menu items into the provided {@link Gtk.Menu} object in the
             * callback of this signal; the context menu will be shown over the item
             * if at least one item has been added to the menu.
             * @signal
             * @run-first
             */
            "populate-popup": (arg0: Menu, arg1: Gio.AppInfo) => void;
            "notify::default-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::show-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::show-fallback": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::show-other": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::show-recommended": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::baseline-position": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::homogeneous": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::spacing": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::content-type": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::orientation": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Box.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, AppChooser.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, Orientable.ConstructorProps {
            default_text: string;
            defaultText: string;
            show_all: boolean | any;
            showAll: boolean;
            show_default: boolean;
            showDefault: boolean;
            show_fallback: boolean;
            showFallback: boolean;
            show_other: boolean;
            showOther: boolean;
            show_recommended: boolean;
            showRecommended: boolean;
        }
    }

    /**
     * {@link Gtk.AppChooserWidget} is a widget for selecting applications.
     * It is the main building block for {@link Gtk.AppChooserDialog}. Most
     * applications only need to use the latter; but you can use
     * this widget as part of a larger widget if you have special needs.
     * 
     * {@link Gtk.AppChooserWidget} offers detailed control over what applications
     * are shown, using the
     * {@link Gtk.AppChooserWidget.show_default},
     * {@link Gtk.AppChooserWidget.show_recommended},
     * {@link Gtk.AppChooserWidget.show_fallback},
     * {@link Gtk.AppChooserWidget.show_other} and
     * {@link Gtk.AppChooserWidget.show_all}
     * properties. See the {@link Gtk.AppChooser} documentation for more information
     * about these groups of applications.
     * 
     * To keep track of the selected application, use the
     * {@link Gtk.AppChooserWidget.SignalSignatures.application_selected | Gtk.AppChooserWidget::application-selected} and {@link Gtk.AppChooserWidget.SignalSignatures.application_activated | Gtk.AppChooserWidget::application-activated} signals.
     * 
     * # CSS nodes
     * 
     * GtkAppChooserWidget has a single CSS node with name appchooser.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class AppChooserWidget extends Box implements Atk.ImplementorIface, AppChooser, Buildable, Orientable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<AppChooserWidget>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * The {@link Gtk.AppChooserWidget.default_text} property determines the text
         * that appears in the widget when there are no applications for the
         * given content type.
         * See also `gtk_app_chooser_widget_set_default_text()`.
         * @default null
         */
        get default_text(): string;
        set default_text(val: string);

        /**
         * The {@link Gtk.AppChooserWidget.default_text} property determines the text
         * that appears in the widget when there are no applications for the
         * given content type.
         * See also `gtk_app_chooser_widget_set_default_text()`.
         * @default null
         */
        get defaultText(): string;
        set defaultText(val: string);

        /**
         * If the {@link Gtk.AppChooserWidget.show_all} property is `true`, the app
         * chooser presents all applications in a single list, without
         * subsections for default, recommended or related applications.
         * @default false
         */
    // This accessor conflicts with a field or function name in a parent class or interface.
         show_all: boolean | any;

        /**
         * If the {@link Gtk.AppChooserWidget.show_all} property is `true`, the app
         * chooser presents all applications in a single list, without
         * subsections for default, recommended or related applications.
         * @default false
         */
        get showAll(): boolean;
        set showAll(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The ::show-default property determines whether the app chooser
         * should show the default handler for the content type in a
         * separate section. If `false`, the default handler is listed
         * among the recommended applications.
         * @default false
         */
        get show_default(): boolean;
        set show_default(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The ::show-default property determines whether the app chooser
         * should show the default handler for the content type in a
         * separate section. If `false`, the default handler is listed
         * among the recommended applications.
         * @default false
         */
        get showDefault(): boolean;
        set showDefault(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The {@link Gtk.AppChooserWidget.show_fallback} property determines whether
         * the app chooser should show a section for fallback applications.
         * If `false`, the fallback applications are listed among the other
         * applications.
         * @default false
         */
        get show_fallback(): boolean;
        set show_fallback(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The {@link Gtk.AppChooserWidget.show_fallback} property determines whether
         * the app chooser should show a section for fallback applications.
         * If `false`, the fallback applications are listed among the other
         * applications.
         * @default false
         */
        get showFallback(): boolean;
        set showFallback(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The {@link Gtk.AppChooserWidget.show_other} property determines whether
         * the app chooser should show a section for other applications.
         * @default false
         */
        get show_other(): boolean;
        set show_other(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The {@link Gtk.AppChooserWidget.show_other} property determines whether
         * the app chooser should show a section for other applications.
         * @default false
         */
        get showOther(): boolean;
        set showOther(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The {@link Gtk.AppChooserWidget.show_recommended} property determines
         * whether the app chooser should show a section for recommended
         * applications. If `false`, the recommended applications are listed
         * among the other applications.
         * @default true
         */
        get show_recommended(): boolean;
        set show_recommended(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The {@link Gtk.AppChooserWidget.show_recommended} property determines
         * whether the app chooser should show a section for recommended
         * applications. If `false`, the recommended applications are listed
         * among the other applications.
         * @default true
         */
        get showRecommended(): boolean;
        set showRecommended(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: AppChooserWidget.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<AppChooserWidget.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](content_type: string): AppChooserWidget;

        // Conflicted with Gtk.Box.new
        static ["new"](...args: never[]): any;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof AppChooserWidget.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, AppChooserWidget.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof AppChooserWidget.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, AppChooserWidget.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof AppChooserWidget.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<AppChooserWidget.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * Signal emitted when an application item is
         *    activated from the widget’s list.
         * @param app_info 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_application_activated(app_info: Gio.AppInfo): void;

        /**
         * Signal emitted when an application item is
         *    selected from the widget’s list.
         * @param app_info 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_application_selected(app_info: Gio.AppInfo): void;

        /**
         * Signal emitted when a context menu is about to
         *    popup over an application item.
         * @param menu 
         * @param app_info 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_populate_popup(menu: Menu, app_info: Gio.AppInfo): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Returns the text that is shown if there are not applications
         * that can handle the content type.
         * @returns the value of {@link Gtk.AppChooserWidget.default_text}
         */
        get_default_text(): string;

        /**
         * Returns the current value of the {@link Gtk.AppChooserWidget.show_all}
         * property.
         * @returns the value of {@link Gtk.AppChooserWidget.show_all}
         */
        get_show_all(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the current value of the {@link Gtk.AppChooserWidget.show_default}
         * property.
         * @returns the value of {@link Gtk.AppChooserWidget.show_default}
         */
        get_show_default(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the current value of the {@link Gtk.AppChooserWidget.show_fallback}
         * property.
         * @returns the value of {@link Gtk.AppChooserWidget.show_fallback}
         */
        get_show_fallback(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the current value of the {@link Gtk.AppChooserWidget.show_other}
         * property.
         * @returns the value of {@link Gtk.AppChooserWidget.show_other}
         */
        get_show_other(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the current value of the {@link Gtk.AppChooserWidget.show_recommended}
         * property.
         * @returns the value of {@link Gtk.AppChooserWidget.show_recommended}
         */
        get_show_recommended(): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the text that is shown if there are not applications
         * that can handle the content type.
         * @param text the new value for {@link Gtk.AppChooserWidget.default_text}
         */
        set_default_text(text: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the app chooser should show all applications
         * in a flat list.
         * @param setting the new value for {@link Gtk.AppChooserWidget.show_all}
         */
        set_show_all(setting: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the app chooser should show the default handler
         * for the content type in a separate section.
         * @param setting the new value for {@link Gtk.AppChooserWidget.show_default}
         */
        set_show_default(setting: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the app chooser should show related applications
         * for the content type in a separate section.
         * @param setting the new value for {@link Gtk.AppChooserWidget.show_fallback}
         */
        set_show_fallback(setting: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the app chooser should show applications
         * which are unrelated to the content type.
         * @param setting the new value for {@link Gtk.AppChooserWidget.show_other}
         */
        set_show_other(setting: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the app chooser should show recommended applications
         * for the content type in a separate section.
         * @param setting the new value for {@link Gtk.AppChooserWidget.show_recommended}
         */
        set_show_recommended(setting: boolean): void;

        /**
         * The content type of the {@link Gtk.AppChooser} object.
         * 
         * See [GContentType][gio-GContentType]
         * for more information about content types.
         * @construct-only
         * @default null
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.AppChooser
         */
        get content_type(): string;

        /**
         * The content type of the {@link Gtk.AppChooser} object.
         * 
         * See [GContentType][gio-GContentType]
         * for more information about content types.
         * @construct-only
         * @default null
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.AppChooser
         */
        get contentType(): string;

        /**
         * The orientation of the orientable.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default Gtk.Orientation.HORIZONTAL
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Orientable
         */
        get orientation(): Orientation;
        set orientation(val: Orientation);

        /**
         * Returns the currently selected application.
         * @returns a {@link Gio.AppInfo} for the currently selected     application, or `null` if none is selected. Free with `g_object_unref()`
         */
        get_app_info(): Gio.AppInfo | null;

        /**
         * Returns the current value of the {@link Gtk.AppChooser.content_type} property.
         * @returns the content type of `self`. Free with `g_free()`
         */
        get_content_type(): string;

        /**
         * Reloads the list of applications.
         */
        refresh(): void;

        /**
         * Retrieves the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @returns the orientation of the `orientable`.
         */
        get_orientation(): Orientation;

        /**
         * Sets the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @param orientation the orientable’s new orientation.
         */
        set_orientation(orientation: Orientation): void;

        /**
         * Emits a {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.child_notify | Gtk.Widget::child-notify} signal for the
         * [child property][child-properties] `child_property`
         * on `widget`.
         * 
         * This is the analogue of `g_object_notify()` for child properties.
         * 
         * Also see `gtk_container_child_notify()`.
         * @param child_property the name of a child property installed on the                  class of `widget`’s parent
         */
        child_notify(child_property: string): void;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Gtk.Container.child_notify
        child_notify(...args: never[]): any;
    }


    namespace Application {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Gio.Application.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * Emitted when the session manager is about to end the session, only
             * if {@link Gtk.Application.SignalSignatures.register_session | Gtk.Application::register-session} is `true`. Applications can
             * connect to this signal and call `gtk_application_inhibit()` with
             * {@link Gtk.ApplicationInhibitFlags.LOGOUT} to delay the end of the session
             * until state has been saved.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.24.8
             * @run-first
             */
            "query-end": () => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when a {@link Gtk.Window} is added to `application` through
             * `gtk_application_add_window()`.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.2
             * @run-first
             */
            "window-added": (arg0: Window) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when a {@link Gtk.Window} is removed from `application`,
             * either as a side-effect of being destroyed or explicitly
             * through `gtk_application_remove_window()`.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.2
             * @run-first
             */
            "window-removed": (arg0: Window) => void;
            "notify::active-window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-menu": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::menubar": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::register-session": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::screensaver-active": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::action-group": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::application-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::flags": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::inactivity-timeout": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-busy": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-registered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-remote": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resource-base-path": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::version": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Gio.Application.ConstructorProps, Gio.ActionGroup.ConstructorProps, Gio.ActionMap.ConstructorProps {
            active_window: Window | null;
            activeWindow: Window | null;
            app_menu: Gio.MenuModel | null;
            appMenu: Gio.MenuModel | null;
            menubar: Gio.MenuModel;
            register_session: boolean;
            registerSession: boolean;
            screensaver_active: boolean;
            screensaverActive: boolean;
        }
    }

    /**
     * {@link Gtk.Application} is a class that handles many important aspects
     * of a GTK+ application in a convenient fashion, without enforcing
     * a one-size-fits-all application model.
     * 
     * Currently, GtkApplication handles GTK+ initialization, application
     * uniqueness, session management, provides some basic scriptability and
     * desktop shell integration by exporting actions and menus and manages a
     * list of toplevel windows whose life-cycle is automatically tied to the
     * life-cycle of your application.
     * 
     * While GtkApplication works fine with plain `GtkWindows`, it is recommended
     * to use it together with {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow}.
     * 
     * When GDK threads are enabled, GtkApplication will acquire the GDK
     * lock when invoking actions that arrive from other processes.  The GDK
     * lock is not touched for local action invocations.  In order to have
     * actions invoked in a predictable context it is therefore recommended
     * that the GDK lock be held while invoking actions locally with
     * `g_action_group_activate_action()`.  The same applies to actions
     * associated with {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow} and to the “activate” and
     * “open” {@link Gio.Application} methods.
     * 
     * ## Automatic resources ## {#automatic-resources}
     * 
     * {@link Gtk.Application} will automatically load menus from the {@link Gtk.Builder}
     * resource located at "gtk/menus.ui", relative to the application's
     * resource base path (see `g_application_set_resource_base_path()`).  The
     * menu with the ID "app-menu" is taken as the application's app menu
     * and the menu with the ID "menubar" is taken as the application's
     * menubar.  Additional menus (most interesting submenus) can be named
     * and accessed via `gtk_application_get_menu_by_id()` which allows for
     * dynamic population of a part of the menu structure.
     * 
     * If the resources "gtk/menus-appmenu.ui" or "gtk/menus-traditional.ui" are
     * present then these files will be used in preference, depending on the value
     * of `gtk_application_prefers_app_menu()`. If the resource "gtk/menus-common.ui"
     * is present it will be loaded as well. This is useful for storing items that
     * are referenced from both "gtk/menus-appmenu.ui" and
     * "gtk/menus-traditional.ui".
     * 
     * It is also possible to provide the menus manually using
     * `gtk_application_set_app_menu()` and `gtk_application_set_menubar()`.
     * 
     * {@link Gtk.Application} will also automatically setup an icon search path for
     * the default icon theme by appending "icons" to the resource base
     * path.  This allows your application to easily store its icons as
     * resources.  See `gtk_icon_theme_add_resource_path()` for more
     * information.
     * 
     * If there is a resource located at "gtk/help-overlay.ui" which
     * defines a {@link Gtk.ShortcutsWindow} with ID "help_overlay" then GtkApplication
     * associates an instance of this shortcuts window with each
     * {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow} and sets up keyboard accelerators (Control-F1
     * and Control-?) to open it. To create a menu item that displays the
     * shortcuts window, associate the item with the action win.show-help-overlay.
     * 
     * ## A simple application ## {#gtkapplication}
     * 
     * [A simple example](https://gitlab.gnome.org/GNOME/gtk/-/blob/gtk-3-24/examples/bp/bloatpad.c)
     * 
     * GtkApplication optionally registers with a session manager
     * of the users session (if you set the {@link Gtk.Application.register_session}
     * property) and offers various functionality related to the session
     * life-cycle.
     * 
     * An application can block various ways to end the session with
     * the `gtk_application_inhibit()` function. Typical use cases for
     * this kind of inhibiting are long-running, uninterruptible operations,
     * such as burning a CD or performing a disk backup. The session
     * manager may not honor the inhibitor, but it can be expected to
     * inform the user about the negative consequences of ending the
     * session while inhibitors are present.
     * 
     * ## See Also ## {#seealso}
     * [HowDoI: Using GtkApplication](https://wiki.gnome.org/HowDoI/GtkApplication),
     * [Getting Started with GTK+: Basics](https://developer.gnome.org/gtk3/stable/gtk-getting-started.html#id-1.2.3.3)
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class Application extends Gio.Application implements Gio.ActionGroup, Gio.ActionMap {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<Application>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * @read-only
         */
        get active_window(): Window | null;

        /**
         * @read-only
         */
        get activeWindow(): Window | null;

        get app_menu(): Gio.MenuModel | null;
        set app_menu(val: Gio.MenuModel | null);

        get appMenu(): Gio.MenuModel | null;
        set appMenu(val: Gio.MenuModel | null);

        get menubar(): Gio.MenuModel;
        set menubar(val: Gio.MenuModel);

        /**
         * Set this property to `true` to register with the session manager.
         * @since 3.4
         * @default false
         */
        get register_session(): boolean;
        set register_session(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Set this property to `true` to register with the session manager.
         * @since 3.4
         * @default false
         */
        get registerSession(): boolean;
        set registerSession(val: boolean);

        /**
         * This property is `true` if GTK+ believes that the screensaver is
         * currently active. GTK+ only tracks session state (including this)
         * when {@link Gtk.Application.SignalSignatures.register_session | Gtk.Application::register-session} is set to `true`.
         * 
         * Tracking the screensaver state is supported on Linux.
         * @since 3.24
         * @read-only
         * @default false
         */
        get screensaver_active(): boolean;

        /**
         * This property is `true` if GTK+ believes that the screensaver is
         * currently active. GTK+ only tracks session state (including this)
         * when {@link Gtk.Application.SignalSignatures.register_session | Gtk.Application::register-session} is set to `true`.
         * 
         * Tracking the screensaver state is supported on Linux.
         * @since 3.24
         * @read-only
         * @default false
         */
        get screensaverActive(): boolean;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: Application.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<Application.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](application_id: string | null, flags: Gio.ApplicationFlags): Application;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof Application.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Application.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof Application.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Application.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof Application.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<Application.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * Signal emitted when a {@link Gtk.Window} is added to
         *    application through `gtk_application_add_window()`.
         * @param window 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_window_added(window: Window): void;

        /**
         * Signal emitted when a {@link Gtk.Window} is removed from
         *    application, either as a side-effect of being destroyed or
         *    explicitly through `gtk_application_remove_window()`.
         * @param window 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_window_removed(window: Window): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Installs an accelerator that will cause the named action
         * to be activated when the key combination specificed by `accelerator`
         * is pressed.
         * 
         * `accelerator` must be a string that can be parsed by `gtk_accelerator_parse()`,
         * e.g. "<Primary>q" or “<Control><Alt>p”.
         * 
         * `action_name` must be the name of an action as it would be used
         * in the app menu, i.e. actions that have been added to the application
         * are referred to with an “app.” prefix, and window-specific actions
         * with a “win.” prefix.
         * 
         * GtkApplication also extracts accelerators out of “accel” attributes
         * in the `GMenuModels` passed to `gtk_application_set_app_menu()` and
         * `gtk_application_set_menubar()`, which is usually more convenient
         * than calling this function for each accelerator.
         * @param accelerator accelerator string
         * @param action_name the name of the action to activate
         * @param parameter parameter to pass when activating the action,   or `null` if the action does not accept an activation parameter
         */
        add_accelerator(accelerator: string, action_name: string, parameter: GLib.Variant | null): void;

        /**
         * Adds a window to `application`.
         * 
         * This call can only happen after the `application` has started;
         * typically, you should add new application windows in response
         * to the emission of the {@link Gio.Application.SignalSignatures.activate | Gio.Application::activate} signal.
         * 
         * This call is equivalent to setting the {@link Gtk.Window.application}
         * property of `window` to `application`.
         * 
         * Normally, the connection between the application and the window
         * will remain until the window is destroyed, but you can explicitly
         * remove it with `gtk_application_remove_window()`.
         * 
         * GTK+ will keep the `application` running as long as it has
         * any windows.
         * @param window a {@link Gtk.Window}
         */
        add_window(window: Window): void;

        /**
         * Gets the accelerators that are currently associated with
         * the given action.
         * @param detailed_action_name a detailed action name, specifying an action     and target to obtain accelerators for
         * @returns accelerators for `detailed_action_name`, as     a `null`-terminated array. Free with `g_strfreev()` when no longer needed
         */
        get_accels_for_action(detailed_action_name: string): string[];

        /**
         * Returns the list of actions (possibly empty) that `accel` maps to.
         * Each item in the list is a detailed action name in the usual form.
         * 
         * This might be useful to discover if an accel already exists in
         * order to prevent installation of a conflicting accelerator (from
         * an accelerator editor or a plugin system, for example). Note that
         * having more than one action per accelerator may not be a bad thing
         * and might make sense in cases where the actions never appear in the
         * same context.
         * 
         * In case there are no actions for a given accelerator, an empty array
         * is returned.  `null` is never returned.
         * 
         * It is a programmer error to pass an invalid accelerator string.
         * If you are unsure, check it with `gtk_accelerator_parse()` first.
         * @param accel an accelerator that can be parsed by `gtk_accelerator_parse()`
         * @returns a `null`-terminated array of actions for `accel`
         */
        get_actions_for_accel(accel: string): string[];

        /**
         * Gets the “active” window for the application.
         * 
         * The active window is the one that was most recently focused (within
         * the application).  This window may not have the focus at the moment
         * if another application has it — this is just the most
         * recently-focused window within this application.
         * @returns the active window, or `null` if   there isn't one.
         */
        get_active_window(): Window | null;

        /**
         * Returns the menu model that has been set with
         * `gtk_application_set_app_menu()`.
         * @returns the application menu of `application`   or `null` if no application menu has been set.
         */
        get_app_menu(): Gio.MenuModel | null;

        /**
         * Gets a menu from automatically loaded resources.
         * See [Automatic resources][automatic-resources]
         * for more information.
         * @param id the id of the menu to look up
         * @returns Gets the menu with the     given id from the automatically loaded resources
         */
        get_menu_by_id(id: string): Gio.Menu;

        /**
         * Returns the menu model that has been set with
         * `gtk_application_set_menubar()`.
         * @returns the menubar for windows of `application`
         */
        get_menubar(): Gio.MenuModel;

        /**
         * Returns the {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow} with the given ID.
         * 
         * The ID of a {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow} can be retrieved with
         * `gtk_application_window_get_id()`.
         * @param id an identifier number
         * @returns the window with ID `id`, or   `null` if there is no window with this ID
         */
        get_window_by_id(id: number): Window | null;

        /**
         * Gets a list of the `GtkWindows` associated with `application`.
         * 
         * The list is sorted by most recently focused window, such that the first
         * element is the currently focused window. (Useful for choosing a parent
         * for a transient window.)
         * 
         * The list that is returned should not be modified in any way. It will
         * only remain valid until the next focus change or window creation or
         * deletion.
         * @returns a {@link GLib.List} of {@link Gtk.Window}
         */
        get_windows(): Window[];

        /**
         * Inform the session manager that certain types of actions should be
         * inhibited. This is not guaranteed to work on all platforms and for
         * all types of actions.
         * 
         * Applications should invoke this method when they begin an operation
         * that should not be interrupted, such as creating a CD or DVD. The
         * types of actions that may be blocked are specified by the `flags`
         * parameter. When the application completes the operation it should
         * call `gtk_application_uninhibit()` to remove the inhibitor. Note that
         * an application can have multiple inhibitors, and all of them must
         * be individually removed. Inhibitors are also cleared when the
         * application exits.
         * 
         * Applications should not expect that they will always be able to block
         * the action. In most cases, users will be given the option to force
         * the action to take place.
         * 
         * Reasons should be short and to the point.
         * 
         * If `window` is given, the session manager may point the user to
         * this window to find out more about why the action is inhibited.
         * @param window a {@link Gtk.Window}, or `null`
         * @param flags what types of actions should be inhibited
         * @param reason a short, human-readable string that explains     why these operations are inhibited
         * @returns A non-zero cookie that is used to uniquely identify this     request. It should be used as an argument to `gtk_application_uninhibit()`     in order to remove the request. If the platform does not support     inhibiting or the request failed for some reason, 0 is returned.
         */
        inhibit(window: Window | null, flags: ApplicationInhibitFlags, reason: string | null): number;

        /**
         * Determines if any of the actions specified in `flags` are
         * currently inhibited (possibly by another application).
         * 
         * Note that this information may not be available (for example
         * when the application is running in a sandbox).
         * @param flags what types of actions should be queried
         * @returns `true` if any of the actions specified in `flags` are inhibited
         */
        is_inhibited(flags: ApplicationInhibitFlags): boolean;

        /**
         * Lists the detailed action names which have associated accelerators.
         * See `gtk_application_set_accels_for_action()`.
         * @returns a `null`-terminated array of strings,     free with `g_strfreev()` when done
         */
        list_action_descriptions(): string[];

        /**
         * Determines if the desktop environment in which the application is
         * running would prefer an application menu be shown.
         * 
         * If this function returns `true` then the application should call
         * `gtk_application_set_app_menu()` with the contents of an application
         * menu, which will be shown by the desktop environment.  If it returns
         * `false` then you should consider using an alternate approach, such as
         * a menubar.
         * 
         * The value returned by this function is purely advisory and you are
         * free to ignore it.  If you call `gtk_application_set_app_menu()` even
         * if the desktop environment doesn't support app menus, then a fallback
         * will be provided.
         * 
         * Applications are similarly free not to set an app menu even if the
         * desktop environment wants to show one.  In that case, a fallback will
         * also be created by the desktop environment (GNOME, for example, uses
         * a menu with only a "Quit" item in it).
         * 
         * The value returned by this function never changes.  Once it returns a
         * particular value, it is guaranteed to always return the same value.
         * 
         * You may only call this function after the application has been
         * registered and after the base startup handler has run.  You're most
         * likely to want to use this from your own startup handler.  It may
         * also make sense to consult this function while constructing UI (in
         * activate, open or an action activation handler) in order to determine
         * if you should show a gear menu or not.
         * 
         * This function will return `false` on Mac OS and a default app menu
         * will be created automatically with the "usual" contents of that menu
         * typical to most Mac OS applications.  If you call
         * `gtk_application_set_app_menu()` anyway, then this menu will be
         * replaced with your own.
         * @returns `true` if you should set an app menu
         */
        prefers_app_menu(): boolean;

        /**
         * Removes an accelerator that has been previously added
         * with `gtk_application_add_accelerator()`.
         * @param action_name the name of the action to activate
         * @param parameter parameter to pass when activating the action,   or `null` if the action does not accept an activation parameter
         */
        remove_accelerator(action_name: string, parameter: GLib.Variant | null): void;

        /**
         * Remove a window from `application`.
         * 
         * If `window` belongs to `application` then this call is equivalent to
         * setting the {@link Gtk.Window.application} property of `window` to
         * `null`.
         * 
         * The application may stop running as a result of a call to this
         * function.
         * @param window a {@link Gtk.Window}
         */
        remove_window(window: Window): void;

        /**
         * Sets zero or more keyboard accelerators that will trigger the
         * given action. The first item in `accels` will be the primary
         * accelerator, which may be displayed in the UI.
         * 
         * To remove all accelerators for an action, use an empty, zero-terminated
         * array for `accels`.
         * 
         * For the `detailed_action_name`, see `g_action_parse_detailed_name()` and
         * `g_action_print_detailed_name()`.
         * @param detailed_action_name a detailed action name, specifying an action     and target to associate accelerators with
         * @param accels a list of accelerators in the format     understood by `gtk_accelerator_parse()`
         */
        set_accels_for_action(detailed_action_name: string, accels: string[]): void;

        /**
         * Sets or unsets the application menu for `application`.
         * 
         * This can only be done in the primary instance of the application,
         * after it has been registered.  {@link Gio.Application.SignalSignatures.startup | Gio.Application::startup} is a good place
         * to call this.
         * 
         * The application menu is a single menu containing items that typically
         * impact the application as a whole, rather than acting on a specific
         * window or document.  For example, you would expect to see
         * “Preferences” or “Quit” in an application menu, but not “Save” or
         * “Print”.
         * 
         * If supported, the application menu will be rendered by the desktop
         * environment.
         * 
         * Use the base {@link Gio.ActionMap} interface to add actions, to respond to the user
         * selecting these menu items.
         * @param app_menu a {@link Gio.MenuModel}, or `null`
         */
        set_app_menu(app_menu: Gio.MenuModel | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets or unsets the menubar for windows of `application`.
         * 
         * This is a menubar in the traditional sense.
         * 
         * This can only be done in the primary instance of the application,
         * after it has been registered.  {@link Gio.Application.SignalSignatures.startup | Gio.Application::startup} is a good place
         * to call this.
         * 
         * Depending on the desktop environment, this may appear at the top of
         * each window, or at the top of the screen.  In some environments, if
         * both the application menu and the menubar are set, the application
         * menu will be presented as if it were the first item of the menubar.
         * Other environments treat the two as completely separate — for example,
         * the application menu may be rendered by the desktop shell while the
         * menubar (if set) remains in each individual window.
         * 
         * Use the base {@link Gio.ActionMap} interface to add actions, to respond to the
         * user selecting these menu items.
         * @param menubar a {@link Gio.MenuModel}, or `null`
         */
        set_menubar(menubar: Gio.MenuModel | null): void;

        /**
         * Removes an inhibitor that has been established with `gtk_application_inhibit()`.
         * Inhibitors are also cleared when the application exits.
         * @param cookie a cookie that was returned by `gtk_application_inhibit()`
         */
        uninhibit(cookie: number): void;

        /**
         * Emits the `Gio.ActionGroup::action-added` signal on `action_group`.
         * 
         * This function should only be called by {@link Gio.ActionGroup} implementations.
         * @param action_name the name of an action in the group
         */
        action_added(action_name: string): void;

        /**
         * Emits the `Gio.ActionGroup::action-enabled-changed` signal on `action_group`.
         * 
         * This function should only be called by {@link Gio.ActionGroup} implementations.
         * @param action_name the name of an action in the group
         * @param enabled whether the action is now enabled
         */
        action_enabled_changed(action_name: string, enabled: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Emits the `Gio.ActionGroup::action-removed` signal on `action_group`.
         * 
         * This function should only be called by {@link Gio.ActionGroup} implementations.
         * @param action_name the name of an action in the group
         */
        action_removed(action_name: string): void;

        /**
         * Emits the `Gio.ActionGroup::action-state-changed` signal on `action_group`.
         * 
         * This function should only be called by {@link Gio.ActionGroup} implementations.
         * @param action_name the name of an action in the group
         * @param state the new state of the named action
         */
        action_state_changed(action_name: string, state: GLib.Variant): void;

        /**
         * Activate the named action within `action_group`.
         * 
         * If the action is expecting a parameter, then the correct type of
         * parameter must be given as `parameter`.  If the action is expecting no
         * parameters then `parameter` must be `NULL`.  See
         * {@link Gio.ActionGroup.get_action_parameter_type}.
         * 
         * If the {@link Gio.ActionGroup} implementation supports asynchronous remote
         * activation over D-Bus, this call may return before the relevant
         * D-Bus traffic has been sent, or any replies have been received. In
         * order to block on such asynchronous activation calls,
         * {@link Gio.DBusConnection.flush} should be called prior to the code, which
         * depends on the result of the action activation. Without flushing
         * the D-Bus connection, there is no guarantee that the action would
         * have been activated.
         * 
         * The following code which runs in a remote app instance, shows an
         * example of a ‘quit’ action being activated on the primary app
         * instance over D-Bus. Here {@link Gio.DBusConnection.flush} is called
         * before `exit()`. Without `g_dbus_connection_flush()`, the ‘quit’ action
         * may fail to be activated on the primary instance.
         * 
         * ```c
         * // call ‘quit’ action on primary instance
         * g_action_group_activate_action (G_ACTION_GROUP (app), "quit", NULL);
         * 
         * // make sure the action is activated now
         * g_dbus_connection_flush (…);
         * 
         * g_debug ("Application has been terminated. Exiting.");
         * 
         * exit (0);
         * ```
         * @param action_name the name of the action to activate
         * @param parameter parameters to the activation
         */
        activate_action(action_name: string, parameter: GLib.Variant | null): void;

        /**
         * Request for the state of the named action within `action_group` to be
         * changed to `value`.
         * 
         * The action must be stateful and `value` must be of the correct type.
         * See {@link Gio.ActionGroup.get_action_state_type}.
         * 
         * This call merely requests a change.  The action may refuse to change
         * its state or may change its state to something other than `value`.
         * See {@link Gio.ActionGroup.get_action_state_hint}.
         * 
         * If the `value` GVariant is floating, it is consumed.
         * @param action_name the name of the action to request the change on
         * @param value the new state
         */
        change_action_state(action_name: string, value: GLib.Variant): void;

        /**
         * Checks if the named action within `action_group` is currently enabled.
         * 
         * An action must be enabled in order to be activated or in order to
         * have its state changed from outside callers.
         * @param action_name the name of the action to query
         * @returns whether the action is currently enabled
         */
        get_action_enabled(action_name: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Queries the type of the parameter that must be given when activating
         * the named action within `action_group`.
         * 
         * When activating the action using {@link Gio.ActionGroup.activate_action},
         * the {@link GLib.Variant} given to that function must be of the type returned
         * by this function.
         * 
         * In the case that this function returns `NULL`, you must not give any
         * {@link GLib.Variant}, but `NULL` instead.
         * 
         * The parameter type of a particular action will never change but it is
         * possible for an action to be removed and for a new action to be added
         * with the same name but a different parameter type.
         * @param action_name the name of the action to query
         * @returns the parameter type
         */
        get_action_parameter_type(action_name: string): GLib.VariantType | null;

        /**
         * Queries the current state of the named action within `action_group`.
         * 
         * If the action is not stateful then `NULL` will be returned.  If the
         * action is stateful then the type of the return value is the type
         * given by {@link Gio.ActionGroup.get_action_state_type}.
         * 
         * The return value (if non-`NULL`) should be freed with
         * {@link GLib.Variant.unref} when it is no longer required.
         * @param action_name the name of the action to query
         * @returns the current state of the action
         */
        get_action_state(action_name: string): GLib.Variant | null;

        /**
         * Requests a hint about the valid range of values for the state of the
         * named action within `action_group`.
         * 
         * If `NULL` is returned it either means that the action is not stateful
         * or that there is no hint about the valid range of values for the
         * state of the action.
         * 
         * If a {@link GLib.Variant} array is returned then each item in the array is a
         * possible value for the state.  If a {@link GLib.Variant} pair (ie: two-tuple) is
         * returned then the tuple specifies the inclusive lower and upper bound
         * of valid values for the state.
         * 
         * In any case, the information is merely a hint.  It may be possible to
         * have a state value outside of the hinted range and setting a value
         * within the range may fail.
         * 
         * The return value (if non-`NULL`) should be freed with
         * {@link GLib.Variant.unref} when it is no longer required.
         * @param action_name the name of the action to query
         * @returns the state range hint
         */
        get_action_state_hint(action_name: string): GLib.Variant | null;

        /**
         * Queries the type of the state of the named action within
         * `action_group`.
         * 
         * If the action is stateful then this function returns the
         * {@link GLib.VariantType} of the state.  All calls to
         * {@link Gio.ActionGroup.change_action_state} must give a {@link GLib.Variant} of this
         * type and {@link Gio.ActionGroup.get_action_state} will return a {@link GLib.Variant}
         * of the same type.
         * 
         * If the action is not stateful then this function will return `NULL`.
         * In that case, {@link Gio.ActionGroup.get_action_state} will return `NULL`
         * and you must not call {@link Gio.ActionGroup.change_action_state}.
         * 
         * The state type of a particular action will never change but it is
         * possible for an action to be removed and for a new action to be added
         * with the same name but a different state type.
         * @param action_name the name of the action to query
         * @returns the state type, if the action is stateful
         */
        get_action_state_type(action_name: string): GLib.VariantType | null;

        /**
         * Checks if the named action exists within `action_group`.
         * @param action_name the name of the action to check for
         * @returns whether the named action exists
         */
        has_action(action_name: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Lists the actions contained within `action_group`.
         * 
         * The caller is responsible for freeing the list with {@link GLib.strfreev} when
         * it is no longer required.
         * @returns a `NULL`-terminated array   of the names of the actions in the group
         */
        list_actions(): string[];

        /**
         * Queries all aspects of the named action within an `action_group`.
         * 
         * This function acquires the information available from
         * {@link Gio.ActionGroup.has_action}, {@link Gio.ActionGroup.get_action_enabled},
         * {@link Gio.ActionGroup.get_action_parameter_type},
         * {@link Gio.ActionGroup.get_action_state_type},
         * {@link Gio.ActionGroup.get_action_state_hint} and
         * {@link Gio.ActionGroup.get_action_state} with a single function call.
         * 
         * This provides two main benefits.
         * 
         * The first is the improvement in efficiency that comes with not having
         * to perform repeated lookups of the action in order to discover
         * different things about it.  The second is that implementing
         * {@link Gio.ActionGroup} can now be done by only overriding this one virtual
         * function.
         * 
         * The interface provides a default implementation of this function that
         * calls the individual functions, as required, to fetch the
         * information.  The interface also provides default implementations of
         * those functions that call this function.  All implementations,
         * therefore, must override either this function or all of the others.
         * 
         * If the action exists, `TRUE` is returned and any of the requested
         * fields (as indicated by having a non-`NULL` reference passed in) are
         * filled.  If the action doesn’t exist, `FALSE` is returned and the
         * fields may or may not have been modified.
         * @param action_name the name of an action in the group
         * @returns `TRUE` if the action exists, else `FALSE`
         */
        query_action(action_name: string): [boolean, boolean, GLib.VariantType | null, GLib.VariantType | null, GLib.Variant | null, GLib.Variant | null];

        /**
         * Emits the `Gio.ActionGroup::action-added` signal on `action_group`.
         * 
         * This function should only be called by {@link Gio.ActionGroup} implementations.
         * @param action_name the name of an action in the group
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_action_added(action_name: string): void;

        /**
         * Emits the `Gio.ActionGroup::action-enabled-changed` signal on `action_group`.
         * 
         * This function should only be called by {@link Gio.ActionGroup} implementations.
         * @param action_name the name of an action in the group
         * @param enabled whether the action is now enabled
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_action_enabled_changed(action_name: string, enabled: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Emits the `Gio.ActionGroup::action-removed` signal on `action_group`.
         * 
         * This function should only be called by {@link Gio.ActionGroup} implementations.
         * @param action_name the name of an action in the group
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_action_removed(action_name: string): void;

        /**
         * Emits the `Gio.ActionGroup::action-state-changed` signal on `action_group`.
         * 
         * This function should only be called by {@link Gio.ActionGroup} implementations.
         * @param action_name the name of an action in the group
         * @param state the new state of the named action
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_action_state_changed(action_name: string, state: GLib.Variant): void;

        /**
         * Activate the named action within `action_group`.
         * 
         * If the action is expecting a parameter, then the correct type of
         * parameter must be given as `parameter`.  If the action is expecting no
         * parameters then `parameter` must be `NULL`.  See
         * {@link Gio.ActionGroup.get_action_parameter_type}.
         * 
         * If the {@link Gio.ActionGroup} implementation supports asynchronous remote
         * activation over D-Bus, this call may return before the relevant
         * D-Bus traffic has been sent, or any replies have been received. In
         * order to block on such asynchronous activation calls,
         * {@link Gio.DBusConnection.flush} should be called prior to the code, which
         * depends on the result of the action activation. Without flushing
         * the D-Bus connection, there is no guarantee that the action would
         * have been activated.
         * 
         * The following code which runs in a remote app instance, shows an
         * example of a ‘quit’ action being activated on the primary app
         * instance over D-Bus. Here {@link Gio.DBusConnection.flush} is called
         * before `exit()`. Without `g_dbus_connection_flush()`, the ‘quit’ action
         * may fail to be activated on the primary instance.
         * 
         * ```c
         * // call ‘quit’ action on primary instance
         * g_action_group_activate_action (G_ACTION_GROUP (app), "quit", NULL);
         * 
         * // make sure the action is activated now
         * g_dbus_connection_flush (…);
         * 
         * g_debug ("Application has been terminated. Exiting.");
         * 
         * exit (0);
         * ```
         * @param action_name the name of the action to activate
         * @param parameter parameters to the activation
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_activate_action(action_name: string, parameter: GLib.Variant | null): void;

        /**
         * Request for the state of the named action within `action_group` to be
         * changed to `value`.
         * 
         * The action must be stateful and `value` must be of the correct type.
         * See {@link Gio.ActionGroup.get_action_state_type}.
         * 
         * This call merely requests a change.  The action may refuse to change
         * its state or may change its state to something other than `value`.
         * See {@link Gio.ActionGroup.get_action_state_hint}.
         * 
         * If the `value` GVariant is floating, it is consumed.
         * @param action_name the name of the action to request the change on
         * @param value the new state
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_change_action_state(action_name: string, value: GLib.Variant): void;

        /**
         * Checks if the named action within `action_group` is currently enabled.
         * 
         * An action must be enabled in order to be activated or in order to
         * have its state changed from outside callers.
         * @param action_name the name of the action to query
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_action_enabled(action_name: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Queries the type of the parameter that must be given when activating
         * the named action within `action_group`.
         * 
         * When activating the action using {@link Gio.ActionGroup.activate_action},
         * the {@link GLib.Variant} given to that function must be of the type returned
         * by this function.
         * 
         * In the case that this function returns `NULL`, you must not give any
         * {@link GLib.Variant}, but `NULL` instead.
         * 
         * The parameter type of a particular action will never change but it is
         * possible for an action to be removed and for a new action to be added
         * with the same name but a different parameter type.
         * @param action_name the name of the action to query
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_action_parameter_type(action_name: string): GLib.VariantType | null;

        /**
         * Queries the current state of the named action within `action_group`.
         * 
         * If the action is not stateful then `NULL` will be returned.  If the
         * action is stateful then the type of the return value is the type
         * given by {@link Gio.ActionGroup.get_action_state_type}.
         * 
         * The return value (if non-`NULL`) should be freed with
         * {@link GLib.Variant.unref} when it is no longer required.
         * @param action_name the name of the action to query
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_action_state(action_name: string): GLib.Variant | null;

        /**
         * Requests a hint about the valid range of values for the state of the
         * named action within `action_group`.
         * 
         * If `NULL` is returned it either means that the action is not stateful
         * or that there is no hint about the valid range of values for the
         * state of the action.
         * 
         * If a {@link GLib.Variant} array is returned then each item in the array is a
         * possible value for the state.  If a {@link GLib.Variant} pair (ie: two-tuple) is
         * returned then the tuple specifies the inclusive lower and upper bound
         * of valid values for the state.
         * 
         * In any case, the information is merely a hint.  It may be possible to
         * have a state value outside of the hinted range and setting a value
         * within the range may fail.
         * 
         * The return value (if non-`NULL`) should be freed with
         * {@link GLib.Variant.unref} when it is no longer required.
         * @param action_name the name of the action to query
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_action_state_hint(action_name: string): GLib.Variant | null;

        /**
         * Queries the type of the state of the named action within
         * `action_group`.
         * 
         * If the action is stateful then this function returns the
         * {@link GLib.VariantType} of the state.  All calls to
         * {@link Gio.ActionGroup.change_action_state} must give a {@link GLib.Variant} of this
         * type and {@link Gio.ActionGroup.get_action_state} will return a {@link GLib.Variant}
         * of the same type.
         * 
         * If the action is not stateful then this function will return `NULL`.
         * In that case, {@link Gio.ActionGroup.get_action_state} will return `NULL`
         * and you must not call {@link Gio.ActionGroup.change_action_state}.
         * 
         * The state type of a particular action will never change but it is
         * possible for an action to be removed and for a new action to be added
         * with the same name but a different state type.
         * @param action_name the name of the action to query
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_action_state_type(action_name: string): GLib.VariantType | null;

        /**
         * Checks if the named action exists within `action_group`.
         * @param action_name the name of the action to check for
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_has_action(action_name: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Lists the actions contained within `action_group`.
         * 
         * The caller is responsible for freeing the list with {@link GLib.strfreev} when
         * it is no longer required.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_list_actions(): string[];

        /**
         * Queries all aspects of the named action within an `action_group`.
         * 
         * This function acquires the information available from
         * {@link Gio.ActionGroup.has_action}, {@link Gio.ActionGroup.get_action_enabled},
         * {@link Gio.ActionGroup.get_action_parameter_type},
         * {@link Gio.ActionGroup.get_action_state_type},
         * {@link Gio.ActionGroup.get_action_state_hint} and
         * {@link Gio.ActionGroup.get_action_state} with a single function call.
         * 
         * This provides two main benefits.
         * 
         * The first is the improvement in efficiency that comes with not having
         * to perform repeated lookups of the action in order to discover
         * different things about it.  The second is that implementing
         * {@link Gio.ActionGroup} can now be done by only overriding this one virtual
         * function.
         * 
         * The interface provides a default implementation of this function that
         * calls the individual functions, as required, to fetch the
         * information.  The interface also provides default implementations of
         * those functions that call this function.  All implementations,
         * therefore, must override either this function or all of the others.
         * 
         * If the action exists, `TRUE` is returned and any of the requested
         * fields (as indicated by having a non-`NULL` reference passed in) are
         * filled.  If the action doesn’t exist, `FALSE` is returned and the
         * fields may or may not have been modified.
         * @param action_name the name of an action in the group
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_query_action(action_name: string): [boolean, boolean, GLib.VariantType | null, GLib.VariantType | null, GLib.Variant | null, GLib.Variant | null];

        /**
         * Adds an action to the `action_map`.
         * 
         * If the action map already contains an action with the same name
         * as `action` then the old action is dropped from the action map.
         * 
         * The action map takes its own reference on `action`.
         * @param action a {@link Gio.Action}
         */
        add_action(action: Gio.Action): void;

        /**
         * A convenience function for creating multiple simple actions. 
         * See Gio.ActionEntryObj for the structure of the action entry.
         * @param entries Array of action entries to add
         */
        add_action_entries(entries: Gio.ActionEntryObj[]): void;

        /**
         * Looks up the action with the name `action_name` in `action_map`.
         * 
         * If no such action exists, returns `NULL`.
         * @param action_name the name of an action
         * @returns a {@link Gio.Action}
         */
        lookup_action(action_name: string): Gio.Action | null;

        /**
         * Removes the named action from the action map.
         * 
         * If no action of this name is in the map then nothing happens.
         * @param action_name the name of the action
         */
        remove_action(action_name: string): void;

        /**
         * Remove actions from a {@link Gio.ActionMap}. This is meant as the reverse of
         * {@link Gio.ActionMap.add_action_entries}.
         * 
         * 
         * ```c
         * static const GActionEntry entries[] = {
         *     { "quit",         activate_quit              },
         *     { "print-string", activate_print_string, "s" }
         * };
         * 
         * void
         * add_actions (GActionMap *map)
         * {
         *   g_action_map_add_action_entries (map, entries, G_N_ELEMENTS (entries), NULL);
         * }
         * 
         * void
         * remove_actions (GActionMap *map)
         * {
         *   g_action_map_remove_action_entries (map, entries, G_N_ELEMENTS (entries));
         * }
         * ```
         * @param entries a pointer to   the first item in an array of {@link Gio.ActionEntry} structs
         */
        remove_action_entries(entries: Gio.ActionEntry[]): void;

        /**
         * Adds an action to the `action_map`.
         * 
         * If the action map already contains an action with the same name
         * as `action` then the old action is dropped from the action map.
         * 
         * The action map takes its own reference on `action`.
         * @param action a {@link Gio.Action}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add_action(action: Gio.Action): void;

        /**
         * Looks up the action with the name `action_name` in `action_map`.
         * 
         * If no such action exists, returns `NULL`.
         * @param action_name the name of an action
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_lookup_action(action_name: string): Gio.Action | null;

        /**
         * Removes the named action from the action map.
         * 
         * If no action of this name is in the map then nothing happens.
         * @param action_name the name of the action
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_remove_action(action_name: string): void;
    }


    namespace ApplicationWindow {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Window.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::show-menubar": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accept-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::application": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::attached-to": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::decorated": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::default-height": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::default-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::deletable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::destroy-with-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-map": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gravity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-resize-grip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-toplevel-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hide-titlebar-when-maximized": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::icon": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::icon-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-active": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-maximized": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::mnemonics-visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::modal": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resizable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-grip-visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::screen": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::skip-pager-hint": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::skip-taskbar-hint": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::startup-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::title": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::transient-for": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::type": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::type-hint": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::urgency-hint": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window-position": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Window.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Gio.ActionGroup.ConstructorProps, Gio.ActionMap.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {
            show_menubar: boolean;
            showMenubar: boolean;
        }
    }

    /**
     * {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow} is a {@link Gtk.Window} subclass that offers some
     * extra functionality for better integration with {@link Gtk.Application}
     * features.  Notably, it can handle both the application menu as well
     * as the menubar. See `gtk_application_set_app_menu()` and
     * `gtk_application_set_menubar()`.
     * 
     * This class implements the {@link Gio.ActionGroup} and {@link Gio.ActionMap} interfaces,
     * to let you add window-specific actions that will be exported by the
     * associated {@link Gtk.Application}, together with its application-wide
     * actions.  Window-specific actions are prefixed with the “win.”
     * prefix and application-wide actions are prefixed with the “app.”
     * prefix.  Actions must be addressed with the prefixed name when
     * referring to them from a {@link Gio.MenuModel}.
     * 
     * Note that widgets that are placed inside a {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow}
     * can also activate these actions, if they implement the
     * {@link Gtk.Actionable} interface.
     * 
     * As with {@link Gtk.Application}, the GDK lock will be acquired when
     * processing actions arriving from other processes and should therefore
     * be held when activating actions locally (if GDK threads are enabled).
     * 
     * The settings {@link Gtk.Settings.gtk_shell_shows_app_menu} and
     * {@link Gtk.Settings.gtk_shell_shows_menubar} tell GTK+ whether the
     * desktop environment is showing the application menu and menubar
     * models outside the application as part of the desktop shell.
     * For instance, on OS X, both menus will be displayed remotely;
     * on Windows neither will be. gnome-shell (starting with version 3.4)
     * will display the application menu, but not the menubar.
     * 
     * If the desktop environment does not display the menubar, then
     * {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow} will automatically show a {@link Gtk.MenuBar} for it.
     * This behaviour can be overridden with the {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow.show_menubar}
     * property. If the desktop environment does not display the application
     * menu, then it will automatically be included in the menubar or in the
     * windows client-side decorations.
     * 
     * ## A GtkApplicationWindow with a menubar
     * 
     * 
     * ```c
     * GtkApplication *app = gtk_application_new ("org.gtk.test", 0);
     * 
     * GtkBuilder *builder = gtk_builder_new_from_string (
     *     "<interface>"
     *     "  <menu id='menubar'>"
     *     "    <submenu label='_Edit'>"
     *     "      <item label='_Copy' action='win.copy'/>"
     *     "      <item label='_Paste' action='win.paste'/>"
     *     "    </submenu>"
     *     "  </menu>"
     *     "</interface>",
     *     -1);
     * 
     * GMenuModel *menubar = G_MENU_MODEL (gtk_builder_get_object (builder,
     *                                                             "menubar"));
     * gtk_application_set_menubar (GTK_APPLICATION (app), menubar);
     * g_object_unref (builder);
     * 
     * // ...
     * 
     * GtkWidget *window = gtk_application_window_new (app);
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * ## Handling fallback yourself
     * 
     * [A simple example](https://git.gnome.org/browse/gtk+/tree/examples/sunny.c)
     * 
     * The XML format understood by {@link Gtk.Builder} for {@link Gio.MenuModel} consists
     * of a toplevel `<menu>` element, which contains one or more `<item>`
     * elements. Each `<item>` element contains `<attribute>` and `<link>`
     * elements with a mandatory name attribute. `<link>` elements have the
     * same content model as `<menu>`. Instead of `<link name="submenu>` or
     * `<link name="section">`, you can use `<submenu>` or `<section>`
     * elements.
     * 
     * Attribute values can be translated using gettext, like other {@link Gtk.Builder}
     * content. `<attribute>` elements can be marked for translation with a
     * `translatable="yes"` attribute. It is also possible to specify message
     * context and translator comments, using the context and comments attributes.
     * To make use of this, the {@link Gtk.Builder} must have been given the gettext
     * domain to use.
     * 
     * The following attributes are used when constructing menu items:
     * - "label": a user-visible string to display
     * - "action": the prefixed name of the action to trigger
     * - "target": the parameter to use when activating the action
     * - "icon" and "verb-icon": names of icons that may be displayed
     * - "submenu-action": name of an action that may be used to determine
     *      if a submenu can be opened
     * - "hidden-when": a string used to determine when the item will be hidden.
     *      Possible values include "action-disabled", "action-missing", "macos-menubar".
     * 
     * The following attributes are used when constructing sections:
     * - "label": a user-visible string to use as section heading
     * - "display-hint": a string used to determine special formatting for the section.
     *     Possible values include "horizontal-buttons".
     * - "text-direction": a string used to determine the {@link Gtk.TextDirection} to use
     *     when "display-hint" is set to "horizontal-buttons". Possible values
     *     include "rtl", "ltr", and "none".
     * 
     * The following attributes are used when constructing submenus:
     * - "label": a user-visible string to display
     * - "icon": icon name to display
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class ApplicationWindow extends Window implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Gio.ActionGroup, Gio.ActionMap, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ApplicationWindow>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * If this property is `true`, the window will display a menubar
         * that includes the app menu and menubar, unless these are
         * shown by the desktop shell. See `gtk_application_set_app_menu()`
         * and `gtk_application_set_menubar()`.
         * 
         * If `false`, the window will not display a menubar, regardless
         * of whether the desktop shell is showing the menus or not.
         * @default true
         */
        get show_menubar(): boolean;
        set show_menubar(val: boolean);

        /**
         * If this property is `true`, the window will display a menubar
         * that includes the app menu and menubar, unless these are
         * shown by the desktop shell. See `gtk_application_set_app_menu()`
         * and `gtk_application_set_menubar()`.
         * 
         * If `false`, the window will not display a menubar, regardless
         * of whether the desktop shell is showing the menus or not.
         * @default true
         */
        get showMenubar(): boolean;
        set showMenubar(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: ApplicationWindow.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<ApplicationWindow.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](application: Application): ApplicationWindow;

        // Conflicted with Gtk.Window.new
        static ["new"](...args: never[]): any;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof ApplicationWindow.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ApplicationWindow.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof ApplicationWindow.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ApplicationWindow.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof ApplicationWindow.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<ApplicationWindow.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Gets the {@link Gtk.ShortcutsWindow} that has been set up with
         * a prior call to `gtk_application_window_set_help_overlay()`.
         * @returns the help overlay associated with `window`, or `null`
         */
        get_help_overlay(): ShortcutsWindow | null;

        /**
         * Returns the unique ID of the window. If the window has not yet been added to
         * a {@link Gtk.Application}, returns `0`.
         * @returns the unique ID for `window`, or `0` if the window   has not yet been added to a {@link Gtk.Application}
         */
        get_id(): number;

        /**
         * Returns whether the window will display a menubar for the app menu
         * and menubar as needed.
         * @returns `true` if `window` will display a menubar when needed
         */
        get_show_menubar(): boolean;

        /**
         * Associates a shortcuts window with the application window, and
         * sets up an action with the name win.show-help-overlay to present
         * it.
         * 
         * `window` takes resposibility for destroying `help_overlay`.
         * @param help_overlay a {@link Gtk.ShortcutsWindow}
         */
        set_help_overlay(help_overlay: ShortcutsWindow | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the window will display a menubar for the app menu
         * and menubar as needed.
         * @param show_menubar whether to show a menubar when needed
         */
        set_show_menubar(show_menubar: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Emits the `Gio.ActionGroup::action-added` signal on `action_group`.
         * 
         * This function should only be called by {@link Gio.ActionGroup} implementations.
         * @param action_name the name of an action in the group
         */
        action_added(action_name: string): void;

        /**
         * Emits the `Gio.ActionGroup::action-enabled-changed` signal on `action_group`.
         * 
         * This function should only be called by {@link Gio.ActionGroup} implementations.
         * @param action_name the name of an action in the group
         * @param enabled whether the action is now enabled
         */
        action_enabled_changed(action_name: string, enabled: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Emits the `Gio.ActionGroup::action-removed` signal on `action_group`.
         * 
         * This function should only be called by {@link Gio.ActionGroup} implementations.
         * @param action_name the name of an action in the group
         */
        action_removed(action_name: string): void;

        /**
         * Emits the `Gio.ActionGroup::action-state-changed` signal on `action_group`.
         * 
         * This function should only be called by {@link Gio.ActionGroup} implementations.
         * @param action_name the name of an action in the group
         * @param state the new state of the named action
         */
        action_state_changed(action_name: string, state: GLib.Variant): void;

        /**
         * Activate the named action within `action_group`.
         * 
         * If the action is expecting a parameter, then the correct type of
         * parameter must be given as `parameter`.  If the action is expecting no
         * parameters then `parameter` must be `NULL`.  See
         * {@link Gio.ActionGroup.get_action_parameter_type}.
         * 
         * If the {@link Gio.ActionGroup} implementation supports asynchronous remote
         * activation over D-Bus, this call may return before the relevant
         * D-Bus traffic has been sent, or any replies have been received. In
         * order to block on such asynchronous activation calls,
         * {@link Gio.DBusConnection.flush} should be called prior to the code, which
         * depends on the result of the action activation. Without flushing
         * the D-Bus connection, there is no guarantee that the action would
         * have been activated.
         * 
         * The following code which runs in a remote app instance, shows an
         * example of a ‘quit’ action being activated on the primary app
         * instance over D-Bus. Here {@link Gio.DBusConnection.flush} is called
         * before `exit()`. Without `g_dbus_connection_flush()`, the ‘quit’ action
         * may fail to be activated on the primary instance.
         * 
         * ```c
         * // call ‘quit’ action on primary instance
         * g_action_group_activate_action (G_ACTION_GROUP (app), "quit", NULL);
         * 
         * // make sure the action is activated now
         * g_dbus_connection_flush (…);
         * 
         * g_debug ("Application has been terminated. Exiting.");
         * 
         * exit (0);
         * ```
         * @param action_name the name of the action to activate
         * @param parameter parameters to the activation
         */
        activate_action(action_name: string, parameter: GLib.Variant | null): void;

        /**
         * Request for the state of the named action within `action_group` to be
         * changed to `value`.
         * 
         * The action must be stateful and `value` must be of the correct type.
         * See {@link Gio.ActionGroup.get_action_state_type}.
         * 
         * This call merely requests a change.  The action may refuse to change
         * its state or may change its state to something other than `value`.
         * See {@link Gio.ActionGroup.get_action_state_hint}.
         * 
         * If the `value` GVariant is floating, it is consumed.
         * @param action_name the name of the action to request the change on
         * @param value the new state
         */
        change_action_state(action_name: string, value: GLib.Variant): void;

        /**
         * Checks if the named action within `action_group` is currently enabled.
         * 
         * An action must be enabled in order to be activated or in order to
         * have its state changed from outside callers.
         * @param action_name the name of the action to query
         * @returns whether the action is currently enabled
         */
        get_action_enabled(action_name: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Queries the type of the parameter that must be given when activating
         * the named action within `action_group`.
         * 
         * When activating the action using {@link Gio.ActionGroup.activate_action},
         * the {@link GLib.Variant} given to that function must be of the type returned
         * by this function.
         * 
         * In the case that this function returns `NULL`, you must not give any
         * {@link GLib.Variant}, but `NULL` instead.
         * 
         * The parameter type of a particular action will never change but it is
         * possible for an action to be removed and for a new action to be added
         * with the same name but a different parameter type.
         * @param action_name the name of the action to query
         * @returns the parameter type
         */
        get_action_parameter_type(action_name: string): GLib.VariantType | null;

        /**
         * Queries the current state of the named action within `action_group`.
         * 
         * If the action is not stateful then `NULL` will be returned.  If the
         * action is stateful then the type of the return value is the type
         * given by {@link Gio.ActionGroup.get_action_state_type}.
         * 
         * The return value (if non-`NULL`) should be freed with
         * {@link GLib.Variant.unref} when it is no longer required.
         * @param action_name the name of the action to query
         * @returns the current state of the action
         */
        get_action_state(action_name: string): GLib.Variant | null;

        /**
         * Requests a hint about the valid range of values for the state of the
         * named action within `action_group`.
         * 
         * If `NULL` is returned it either means that the action is not stateful
         * or that there is no hint about the valid range of values for the
         * state of the action.
         * 
         * If a {@link GLib.Variant} array is returned then each item in the array is a
         * possible value for the state.  If a {@link GLib.Variant} pair (ie: two-tuple) is
         * returned then the tuple specifies the inclusive lower and upper bound
         * of valid values for the state.
         * 
         * In any case, the information is merely a hint.  It may be possible to
         * have a state value outside of the hinted range and setting a value
         * within the range may fail.
         * 
         * The return value (if non-`NULL`) should be freed with
         * {@link GLib.Variant.unref} when it is no longer required.
         * @param action_name the name of the action to query
         * @returns the state range hint
         */
        get_action_state_hint(action_name: string): GLib.Variant | null;

        /**
         * Queries the type of the state of the named action within
         * `action_group`.
         * 
         * If the action is stateful then this function returns the
         * {@link GLib.VariantType} of the state.  All calls to
         * {@link Gio.ActionGroup.change_action_state} must give a {@link GLib.Variant} of this
         * type and {@link Gio.ActionGroup.get_action_state} will return a {@link GLib.Variant}
         * of the same type.
         * 
         * If the action is not stateful then this function will return `NULL`.
         * In that case, {@link Gio.ActionGroup.get_action_state} will return `NULL`
         * and you must not call {@link Gio.ActionGroup.change_action_state}.
         * 
         * The state type of a particular action will never change but it is
         * possible for an action to be removed and for a new action to be added
         * with the same name but a different state type.
         * @param action_name the name of the action to query
         * @returns the state type, if the action is stateful
         */
        get_action_state_type(action_name: string): GLib.VariantType | null;

        /**
         * Checks if the named action exists within `action_group`.
         * @param action_name the name of the action to check for
         * @returns whether the named action exists
         */
        has_action(action_name: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Lists the actions contained within `action_group`.
         * 
         * The caller is responsible for freeing the list with {@link GLib.strfreev} when
         * it is no longer required.
         * @returns a `NULL`-terminated array   of the names of the actions in the group
         */
        list_actions(): string[];

        /**
         * Queries all aspects of the named action within an `action_group`.
         * 
         * This function acquires the information available from
         * {@link Gio.ActionGroup.has_action}, {@link Gio.ActionGroup.get_action_enabled},
         * {@link Gio.ActionGroup.get_action_parameter_type},
         * {@link Gio.ActionGroup.get_action_state_type},
         * {@link Gio.ActionGroup.get_action_state_hint} and
         * {@link Gio.ActionGroup.get_action_state} with a single function call.
         * 
         * This provides two main benefits.
         * 
         * The first is the improvement in efficiency that comes with not having
         * to perform repeated lookups of the action in order to discover
         * different things about it.  The second is that implementing
         * {@link Gio.ActionGroup} can now be done by only overriding this one virtual
         * function.
         * 
         * The interface provides a default implementation of this function that
         * calls the individual functions, as required, to fetch the
         * information.  The interface also provides default implementations of
         * those functions that call this function.  All implementations,
         * therefore, must override either this function or all of the others.
         * 
         * If the action exists, `TRUE` is returned and any of the requested
         * fields (as indicated by having a non-`NULL` reference passed in) are
         * filled.  If the action doesn’t exist, `FALSE` is returned and the
         * fields may or may not have been modified.
         * @param action_name the name of an action in the group
         * @returns `TRUE` if the action exists, else `FALSE`
         */
        query_action(action_name: string): [boolean, boolean, GLib.VariantType | null, GLib.VariantType | null, GLib.Variant | null, GLib.Variant | null];

        /**
         * Emits the `Gio.ActionGroup::action-added` signal on `action_group`.
         * 
         * This function should only be called by {@link Gio.ActionGroup} implementations.
         * @param action_name the name of an action in the group
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_action_added(action_name: string): void;

        /**
         * Emits the `Gio.ActionGroup::action-enabled-changed` signal on `action_group`.
         * 
         * This function should only be called by {@link Gio.ActionGroup} implementations.
         * @param action_name the name of an action in the group
         * @param enabled whether the action is now enabled
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_action_enabled_changed(action_name: string, enabled: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Emits the `Gio.ActionGroup::action-removed` signal on `action_group`.
         * 
         * This function should only be called by {@link Gio.ActionGroup} implementations.
         * @param action_name the name of an action in the group
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_action_removed(action_name: string): void;

        /**
         * Emits the `Gio.ActionGroup::action-state-changed` signal on `action_group`.
         * 
         * This function should only be called by {@link Gio.ActionGroup} implementations.
         * @param action_name the name of an action in the group
         * @param state the new state of the named action
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_action_state_changed(action_name: string, state: GLib.Variant): void;

        /**
         * Activate the named action within `action_group`.
         * 
         * If the action is expecting a parameter, then the correct type of
         * parameter must be given as `parameter`.  If the action is expecting no
         * parameters then `parameter` must be `NULL`.  See
         * {@link Gio.ActionGroup.get_action_parameter_type}.
         * 
         * If the {@link Gio.ActionGroup} implementation supports asynchronous remote
         * activation over D-Bus, this call may return before the relevant
         * D-Bus traffic has been sent, or any replies have been received. In
         * order to block on such asynchronous activation calls,
         * {@link Gio.DBusConnection.flush} should be called prior to the code, which
         * depends on the result of the action activation. Without flushing
         * the D-Bus connection, there is no guarantee that the action would
         * have been activated.
         * 
         * The following code which runs in a remote app instance, shows an
         * example of a ‘quit’ action being activated on the primary app
         * instance over D-Bus. Here {@link Gio.DBusConnection.flush} is called
         * before `exit()`. Without `g_dbus_connection_flush()`, the ‘quit’ action
         * may fail to be activated on the primary instance.
         * 
         * ```c
         * // call ‘quit’ action on primary instance
         * g_action_group_activate_action (G_ACTION_GROUP (app), "quit", NULL);
         * 
         * // make sure the action is activated now
         * g_dbus_connection_flush (…);
         * 
         * g_debug ("Application has been terminated. Exiting.");
         * 
         * exit (0);
         * ```
         * @param action_name the name of the action to activate
         * @param parameter parameters to the activation
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_activate_action(action_name: string, parameter: GLib.Variant | null): void;

        /**
         * Request for the state of the named action within `action_group` to be
         * changed to `value`.
         * 
         * The action must be stateful and `value` must be of the correct type.
         * See {@link Gio.ActionGroup.get_action_state_type}.
         * 
         * This call merely requests a change.  The action may refuse to change
         * its state or may change its state to something other than `value`.
         * See {@link Gio.ActionGroup.get_action_state_hint}.
         * 
         * If the `value` GVariant is floating, it is consumed.
         * @param action_name the name of the action to request the change on
         * @param value the new state
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_change_action_state(action_name: string, value: GLib.Variant): void;

        /**
         * Checks if the named action within `action_group` is currently enabled.
         * 
         * An action must be enabled in order to be activated or in order to
         * have its state changed from outside callers.
         * @param action_name the name of the action to query
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_action_enabled(action_name: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Queries the type of the parameter that must be given when activating
         * the named action within `action_group`.
         * 
         * When activating the action using {@link Gio.ActionGroup.activate_action},
         * the {@link GLib.Variant} given to that function must be of the type returned
         * by this function.
         * 
         * In the case that this function returns `NULL`, you must not give any
         * {@link GLib.Variant}, but `NULL` instead.
         * 
         * The parameter type of a particular action will never change but it is
         * possible for an action to be removed and for a new action to be added
         * with the same name but a different parameter type.
         * @param action_name the name of the action to query
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_action_parameter_type(action_name: string): GLib.VariantType | null;

        /**
         * Queries the current state of the named action within `action_group`.
         * 
         * If the action is not stateful then `NULL` will be returned.  If the
         * action is stateful then the type of the return value is the type
         * given by {@link Gio.ActionGroup.get_action_state_type}.
         * 
         * The return value (if non-`NULL`) should be freed with
         * {@link GLib.Variant.unref} when it is no longer required.
         * @param action_name the name of the action to query
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_action_state(action_name: string): GLib.Variant | null;

        /**
         * Requests a hint about the valid range of values for the state of the
         * named action within `action_group`.
         * 
         * If `NULL` is returned it either means that the action is not stateful
         * or that there is no hint about the valid range of values for the
         * state of the action.
         * 
         * If a {@link GLib.Variant} array is returned then each item in the array is a
         * possible value for the state.  If a {@link GLib.Variant} pair (ie: two-tuple) is
         * returned then the tuple specifies the inclusive lower and upper bound
         * of valid values for the state.
         * 
         * In any case, the information is merely a hint.  It may be possible to
         * have a state value outside of the hinted range and setting a value
         * within the range may fail.
         * 
         * The return value (if non-`NULL`) should be freed with
         * {@link GLib.Variant.unref} when it is no longer required.
         * @param action_name the name of the action to query
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_action_state_hint(action_name: string): GLib.Variant | null;

        /**
         * Queries the type of the state of the named action within
         * `action_group`.
         * 
         * If the action is stateful then this function returns the
         * {@link GLib.VariantType} of the state.  All calls to
         * {@link Gio.ActionGroup.change_action_state} must give a {@link GLib.Variant} of this
         * type and {@link Gio.ActionGroup.get_action_state} will return a {@link GLib.Variant}
         * of the same type.
         * 
         * If the action is not stateful then this function will return `NULL`.
         * In that case, {@link Gio.ActionGroup.get_action_state} will return `NULL`
         * and you must not call {@link Gio.ActionGroup.change_action_state}.
         * 
         * The state type of a particular action will never change but it is
         * possible for an action to be removed and for a new action to be added
         * with the same name but a different state type.
         * @param action_name the name of the action to query
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_action_state_type(action_name: string): GLib.VariantType | null;

        /**
         * Checks if the named action exists within `action_group`.
         * @param action_name the name of the action to check for
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_has_action(action_name: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Lists the actions contained within `action_group`.
         * 
         * The caller is responsible for freeing the list with {@link GLib.strfreev} when
         * it is no longer required.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_list_actions(): string[];

        /**
         * Queries all aspects of the named action within an `action_group`.
         * 
         * This function acquires the information available from
         * {@link Gio.ActionGroup.has_action}, {@link Gio.ActionGroup.get_action_enabled},
         * {@link Gio.ActionGroup.get_action_parameter_type},
         * {@link Gio.ActionGroup.get_action_state_type},
         * {@link Gio.ActionGroup.get_action_state_hint} and
         * {@link Gio.ActionGroup.get_action_state} with a single function call.
         * 
         * This provides two main benefits.
         * 
         * The first is the improvement in efficiency that comes with not having
         * to perform repeated lookups of the action in order to discover
         * different things about it.  The second is that implementing
         * {@link Gio.ActionGroup} can now be done by only overriding this one virtual
         * function.
         * 
         * The interface provides a default implementation of this function that
         * calls the individual functions, as required, to fetch the
         * information.  The interface also provides default implementations of
         * those functions that call this function.  All implementations,
         * therefore, must override either this function or all of the others.
         * 
         * If the action exists, `TRUE` is returned and any of the requested
         * fields (as indicated by having a non-`NULL` reference passed in) are
         * filled.  If the action doesn’t exist, `FALSE` is returned and the
         * fields may or may not have been modified.
         * @param action_name the name of an action in the group
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_query_action(action_name: string): [boolean, boolean, GLib.VariantType | null, GLib.VariantType | null, GLib.Variant | null, GLib.Variant | null];

        /**
         * Adds an action to the `action_map`.
         * 
         * If the action map already contains an action with the same name
         * as `action` then the old action is dropped from the action map.
         * 
         * The action map takes its own reference on `action`.
         * @param action a {@link Gio.Action}
         */
        add_action(action: Gio.Action): void;

        /**
         * A convenience function for creating multiple simple actions. 
         * See Gio.ActionEntryObj for the structure of the action entry.
         * @param entries Array of action entries to add
         */
        add_action_entries(entries: Gio.ActionEntryObj[]): void;

        /**
         * Looks up the action with the name `action_name` in `action_map`.
         * 
         * If no such action exists, returns `NULL`.
         * @param action_name the name of an action
         * @returns a {@link Gio.Action}
         */
        lookup_action(action_name: string): Gio.Action | null;

        /**
         * Removes the named action from the action map.
         * 
         * If no action of this name is in the map then nothing happens.
         * @param action_name the name of the action
         */
        remove_action(action_name: string): void;

        /**
         * Remove actions from a {@link Gio.ActionMap}. This is meant as the reverse of
         * {@link Gio.ActionMap.add_action_entries}.
         * 
         * 
         * ```c
         * static const GActionEntry entries[] = {
         *     { "quit",         activate_quit              },
         *     { "print-string", activate_print_string, "s" }
         * };
         * 
         * void
         * add_actions (GActionMap *map)
         * {
         *   g_action_map_add_action_entries (map, entries, G_N_ELEMENTS (entries), NULL);
         * }
         * 
         * void
         * remove_actions (GActionMap *map)
         * {
         *   g_action_map_remove_action_entries (map, entries, G_N_ELEMENTS (entries));
         * }
         * ```
         * @param entries a pointer to   the first item in an array of {@link Gio.ActionEntry} structs
         */
        remove_action_entries(entries: Gio.ActionEntry[]): void;

        /**
         * Adds an action to the `action_map`.
         * 
         * If the action map already contains an action with the same name
         * as `action` then the old action is dropped from the action map.
         * 
         * The action map takes its own reference on `action`.
         * @param action a {@link Gio.Action}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add_action(action: Gio.Action): void;

        /**
         * Looks up the action with the name `action_name` in `action_map`.
         * 
         * If no such action exists, returns `NULL`.
         * @param action_name the name of an action
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_lookup_action(action_name: string): Gio.Action | null;

        /**
         * Removes the named action from the action map.
         * 
         * If no action of this name is in the map then nothing happens.
         * @param action_name the name of the action
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_remove_action(action_name: string): void;
    }


    namespace Arrow {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Misc.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::arrow-type": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::shadow-type": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::xalign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::xpad": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::yalign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::ypad": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Misc.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {
            arrow_type: ArrowType;
            arrowType: ArrowType;
            shadow_type: ShadowType;
            shadowType: ShadowType;
        }
    }

    /**
     * GtkArrow should be used to draw simple arrows that need to point in
     * one of the four cardinal directions (up, down, left, or right).  The
     * style of the arrow can be one of shadow in, shadow out, etched in, or
     * etched out.  Note that these directions and style types may be
     * amended in versions of GTK+ to come.
     * 
     * GtkArrow will fill any space alloted to it, but since it is inherited
     * from {@link Gtk.Misc}, it can be padded and/or aligned, to fill exactly the
     * space the programmer desires.
     * 
     * Arrows are created with a call to `gtk_arrow_new()`.  The direction or
     * style of an arrow can be changed after creation by using `gtk_arrow_set()`.
     * 
     * GtkArrow has been deprecated; you can simply use a {@link Gtk.Image} with a
     * suitable icon name, such as “pan-down-symbolic“. When replacing
     * GtkArrow by an image, pay attention to the fact that GtkArrow is
     * doing automatic flipping between #GTK_ARROW_LEFT and #GTK_ARROW_RIGHT,
     * depending on the text direction. To get the same effect with an image,
     * use the icon names “pan-start-symbolic“ and “pan-end-symbolic“, which
     * react to the text direction.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class Arrow extends Misc implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<Arrow>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * @default Gtk.ArrowType.RIGHT
         */
        get arrow_type(): ArrowType;
        set arrow_type(val: ArrowType);

        /**
         * @default Gtk.ArrowType.RIGHT
         */
        get arrowType(): ArrowType;
        set arrowType(val: ArrowType);

        /**
         * @default Gtk.ShadowType.OUT
         */
        get shadow_type(): ShadowType;
        set shadow_type(val: ShadowType);

        /**
         * @default Gtk.ShadowType.OUT
         */
        get shadowType(): ShadowType;
        set shadowType(val: ShadowType);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: Arrow.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        misc: Misc;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<Arrow.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](arrow_type: ArrowType, shadow_type: ShadowType): Arrow;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof Arrow.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Arrow.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof Arrow.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Arrow.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof Arrow.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<Arrow.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Sets the direction and style of the {@link Gtk.Arrow}, `arrow`.
         * @param arrow_type a valid {@link Gtk.ArrowType}.
         * @param shadow_type a valid {@link Gtk.ShadowType}.
         */
        set(arrow_type: ArrowType, shadow_type: ShadowType): void;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
    // Conflicted with GObject.Object.set
        set(...args: never[]): any;
    }


    namespace ArrowAccessible {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends WidgetAccessible.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-layer": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-mdi-zorder": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-help-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-hypertext-nlinks": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption-object": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-summary": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends WidgetAccessible.ConstructorProps, Atk.Component.ConstructorProps, Atk.Image.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class ArrowAccessible extends WidgetAccessible implements Atk.Component, Atk.Image {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ArrowAccessible>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: ArrowAccessible.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<ArrowAccessible.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof ArrowAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ArrowAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof ArrowAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ArrowAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof ArrowAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<ArrowAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        /**
         * Checks whether the specified point is within the extent of the `component`.
         * 
         * Toolkit implementor note: ATK provides a default implementation for
         * this virtual method. In general there are little reason to
         * re-implement it.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @returns `true` or `false` indicating whether the specified point is within the extent of the `component` or not
         */
        contains(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the alpha value (i.e. the opacity) for this
         * `component`, on a scale from 0 (fully transparent) to 1.0
         * (fully opaque).
         * @returns An alpha value from 0 to 1.0, inclusive.
         */
        get_alpha(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the rectangle which gives the extent of the `component`.
         * 
         * If the extent can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), all of x, y, width, height are set to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         */
        get_extents(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the layer of the component.
         * @returns an {@link Atk.Layer} which is the layer of the component
         */
        get_layer(): Atk.Layer;

        /**
         * Gets the zorder of the component. The value G_MININT will be returned
         * if the layer of the component is not ATK_LAYER_MDI or ATK_LAYER_WINDOW.
         * @returns a gint which is the zorder of the component, i.e. the depth at which the component is shown in relation to other components in the same container.
         */
        get_mdi_zorder(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the position of `component` in the form of
         * a point specifying `component`'s top-left corner.
         * 
         * If the position can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), x and y are set to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         */
        get_position(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the size of the `component` in terms of width and height.
         * 
         * If the size can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), width and height are set to -1.
         */
        get_size(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Grabs focus for this `component`.
         * @returns `true` if successful, `false` otherwise.
         */
        grab_focus(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets a reference to the accessible child, if one exists, at the
         * coordinate point specified by `x` and `y`.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @returns a reference to the accessible child, if one exists
         */
        ref_accessible_at_point(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): Atk.Object | null;

        /**
         * Remove the handler specified by `handler_id` from the list of
         * functions to be executed when this object receives focus events
         * (in or out).
         * @param handler_id the handler id of the focus handler to be removed from `component`
         */
        remove_focus_handler(handler_id: number): void;

        /**
         * Makes `component` visible on the screen by scrolling all necessary parents.
         * 
         * Contrary to atk_component_set_position, this does not actually move
         * `component` in its parent, this only makes the parents scroll so that the
         * object shows up on the screen, given its current position within the parents.
         * @param type specify where the object should be made visible.
         * @returns whether scrolling was successful.
         */
        scroll_to(type: Atk.ScrollType): boolean;

        /**
         * Move the top-left of `component` to a given position of the screen by
         * scrolling all necessary parents.
         * @param coords specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or to the parent object.
         * @param x x-position where to scroll to
         * @param y y-position where to scroll to
         * @returns whether scrolling was successful.
         */
        scroll_to_point(coords: Atk.CoordType, x: number, y: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the extents of `component`.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param width width to set for `component`
         * @param height height to set for `component`
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @returns `true` or `false` whether the extents were set or not
         */
        set_extents(x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the position of `component`.
         * 
         * Contrary to atk_component_scroll_to, this does not trigger any scrolling,
         * this just moves `component` in its parent.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the component's top level window
         * @returns `true` or `false` whether or not the position was set or not
         */
        set_position(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Set the size of the `component` in terms of width and height.
         * @param width width to set for `component`
         * @param height height to set for `component`
         * @returns `true` or `false` whether the size was set or not
         */
        set_size(width: number, height: number): boolean;

        /**
         * @param bounds 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_bounds_changed(bounds: Atk.Rectangle): void;

        /**
         * Checks whether the specified point is within the extent of the `component`.
         * 
         * Toolkit implementor note: ATK provides a default implementation for
         * this virtual method. In general there are little reason to
         * re-implement it.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_contains(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the alpha value (i.e. the opacity) for this
         * `component`, on a scale from 0 (fully transparent) to 1.0
         * (fully opaque).
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_alpha(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the rectangle which gives the extent of the `component`.
         * 
         * If the extent can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), all of x, y, width, height are set to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_extents(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the layer of the component.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_layer(): Atk.Layer;

        /**
         * Gets the zorder of the component. The value G_MININT will be returned
         * if the layer of the component is not ATK_LAYER_MDI or ATK_LAYER_WINDOW.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_mdi_zorder(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the position of `component` in the form of
         * a point specifying `component`'s top-left corner.
         * 
         * If the position can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), x and y are set to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_position(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the size of the `component` in terms of width and height.
         * 
         * If the size can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), width and height are set to -1.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_size(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Grabs focus for this `component`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_grab_focus(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets a reference to the accessible child, if one exists, at the
         * coordinate point specified by `x` and `y`.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_ref_accessible_at_point(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): Atk.Object | null;

        /**
         * Remove the handler specified by `handler_id` from the list of
         * functions to be executed when this object receives focus events
         * (in or out).
         * @param handler_id the handler id of the focus handler to be removed from `component`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_remove_focus_handler(handler_id: number): void;

        /**
         * Makes `component` visible on the screen by scrolling all necessary parents.
         * 
         * Contrary to atk_component_set_position, this does not actually move
         * `component` in its parent, this only makes the parents scroll so that the
         * object shows up on the screen, given its current position within the parents.
         * @param type specify where the object should be made visible.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_scroll_to(type: Atk.ScrollType): boolean;

        /**
         * Move the top-left of `component` to a given position of the screen by
         * scrolling all necessary parents.
         * @param coords specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or to the parent object.
         * @param x x-position where to scroll to
         * @param y y-position where to scroll to
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_scroll_to_point(coords: Atk.CoordType, x: number, y: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the extents of `component`.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param width width to set for `component`
         * @param height height to set for `component`
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_extents(x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the position of `component`.
         * 
         * Contrary to atk_component_scroll_to, this does not trigger any scrolling,
         * this just moves `component` in its parent.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the component's top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_position(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Set the size of the `component` in terms of width and height.
         * @param width width to set for `component`
         * @param height height to set for `component`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_size(width: number, height: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Get a textual description of this image.
         * @returns a string representing the image description
         */
        get_image_description(): string;

        /**
         * Retrieves the locale identifier associated to the {@link Atk.Image}.
         * @returns a string corresponding to the POSIX   `LC_MESSAGES` locale used by the image description, or   `null` if the image does not specify a locale.
         */
        get_image_locale(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the position of the image in the form of a point specifying the
         * images top-left corner.
         * 
         * If the position can not be obtained (e.g. missing support), x and y are set
         * to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         */
        get_image_position(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number];

        /**
         * Get the width and height in pixels for the specified image.
         * The values of `width` and `height` are returned as -1 if the
         * values cannot be obtained (for instance, if the object is not onscreen).
         * 
         * If the size can not be obtained (e.g. missing support), x and y are set
         * to -1.
         */
        get_image_size(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Sets the textual description for this image.
         * @param description a string description to set for `image`
         * @returns boolean TRUE, or FALSE if operation could not be completed.
         */
        set_image_description(description: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Get a textual description of this image.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_image_description(): string;

        /**
         * Retrieves the locale identifier associated to the {@link Atk.Image}.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_image_locale(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the position of the image in the form of a point specifying the
         * images top-left corner.
         * 
         * If the position can not be obtained (e.g. missing support), x and y are set
         * to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_image_position(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number];

        /**
         * Get the width and height in pixels for the specified image.
         * The values of `width` and `height` are returned as -1 if the
         * values cannot be obtained (for instance, if the object is not onscreen).
         * 
         * If the size can not be obtained (e.g. missing support), x and y are set
         * to -1.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_image_size(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Sets the textual description for this image.
         * @param description a string description to set for `image`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_image_description(description: string): boolean;
    }


    namespace AspectFrame {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Frame.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::obey-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::ratio": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::xalign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::yalign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::label": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::label-widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::label-xalign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::label-yalign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::shadow-type": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Frame.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {
            obey_child: boolean;
            obeyChild: boolean;
            ratio: number;
            xalign: number;
            yalign: number;
        }
    }

    /**
     * The {@link Gtk.AspectFrame} is useful when you want
     * pack a widget so that it can resize but always retains
     * the same aspect ratio. For instance, one might be
     * drawing a small preview of a larger image. {@link Gtk.AspectFrame}
     * derives from {@link Gtk.Frame}, so it can draw a label and
     * a frame around the child. The frame will be
     * “shrink-wrapped” to the size of the child.
     * 
     * # CSS nodes
     * 
     * GtkAspectFrame uses a CSS node with name frame.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class AspectFrame extends Frame implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<AspectFrame>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * @default true
         */
        get obey_child(): boolean;
        set obey_child(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default true
         */
        get obeyChild(): boolean;
        set obeyChild(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default 1
         */
        get ratio(): number;
        set ratio(val: number);

        /**
         * @default 0.5
         */
        get xalign(): number;
        set xalign(val: number);

        /**
         * @default 0.5
         */
        get yalign(): number;
        set yalign(val: number);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: AspectFrame.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        frame: Frame;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<AspectFrame.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](label: string | null, xalign: number, yalign: number, ratio: number, obey_child: boolean): AspectFrame;

        // Conflicted with Gtk.Frame.new
        static ["new"](...args: never[]): any;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof AspectFrame.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, AspectFrame.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof AspectFrame.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, AspectFrame.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof AspectFrame.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<AspectFrame.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Set parameters for an existing {@link Gtk.AspectFrame}.
         * @param xalign Horizontal alignment of the child within the allocation of  the {@link Gtk.AspectFrame}. This ranges from 0.0 (left aligned)  to 1.0 (right aligned)
         * @param yalign Vertical alignment of the child within the allocation of  the {@link Gtk.AspectFrame}. This ranges from 0.0 (top aligned)  to 1.0 (bottom aligned)
         * @param ratio The desired aspect ratio.
         * @param obey_child If `true`, `ratio` is ignored, and the aspect  ratio is taken from the requistion of the child.
         */
        set(xalign: number, yalign: number, ratio: number, obey_child: boolean): void;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
    // Conflicted with GObject.Object.set
        set(...args: never[]): any;
    }


    namespace Assistant {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Window.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * The ::apply signal is emitted when the apply button is clicked.
             * 
             * The default behavior of the {@link Gtk.Assistant} is to switch to the page
             * after the current page, unless the current page is the last one.
             * 
             * A handler for the ::apply signal should carry out the actions for
             * which the wizard has collected data. If the action takes a long time
             * to complete, you might consider putting a page of type
             * {@link Gtk.AssistantPageType.PROGRESS} after the confirmation page and handle
             * this operation within the {@link Gtk.Assistant.SignalSignatures.prepare | Gtk.Assistant::prepare} signal of the progress
             * page.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.10
             * @run-last
             */
            apply: () => void;
            /**
             * The ::cancel signal is emitted when then the cancel button is clicked.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.10
             * @run-last
             */
            cancel: () => void;
            /**
             * The ::close signal is emitted either when the close button of
             * a summary page is clicked, or when the apply button in the last
             * page in the flow (of type {@link Gtk.AssistantPageType.CONFIRM}) is clicked.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.10
             * @run-last
             */
            close: () => void;
            /**
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-first
             */
            escape: () => void;
            /**
             * The ::prepare signal is emitted when a new page is set as the
             * assistant's current page, before making the new page visible.
             * 
             * A handler for this signal can do any preparations which are
             * necessary before showing `page`.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.10
             * @run-last
             */
            prepare: (arg0: Widget) => void;
            "notify::use-header-bar": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accept-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::application": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::attached-to": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::decorated": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::default-height": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::default-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::deletable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::destroy-with-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-map": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gravity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-resize-grip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-toplevel-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hide-titlebar-when-maximized": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::icon": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::icon-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-active": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-maximized": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::mnemonics-visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::modal": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resizable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-grip-visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::screen": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::skip-pager-hint": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::skip-taskbar-hint": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::startup-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::title": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::transient-for": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::type": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::type-hint": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::urgency-hint": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window-position": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Window.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {
            use_header_bar: number;
            useHeaderBar: number;
        }
    }

    /**
     * A {@link Gtk.Assistant} is a widget used to represent a generally complex
     * operation splitted in several steps, guiding the user through its
     * pages and controlling the page flow to collect the necessary data.
     * 
     * The design of GtkAssistant is that it controls what buttons to show
     * and to make sensitive, based on what it knows about the page sequence
     * and the [type][GtkAssistantPageType] of each page,
     * in addition to state information like the page
     * [completion][gtk-assistant-set-page-complete]
     * and [committed][gtk-assistant-commit] status.
     * 
     * If you have a case that doesn’t quite fit in `GtkAssistants` way of
     * handling buttons, you can use the #GTK_ASSISTANT_PAGE_CUSTOM page
     * type and handle buttons yourself.
     * 
     * # GtkAssistant as GtkBuildable
     * 
     * The GtkAssistant implementation of the {@link Gtk.Buildable} interface
     * exposes the `action_area` as internal children with the name
     * “action_area”.
     * 
     * To add pages to an assistant in {@link Gtk.Builder}, simply add it as a
     * child to the GtkAssistant object, and set its child properties
     * as necessary.
     * 
     * # CSS nodes
     * 
     * GtkAssistant has a single CSS node with the name assistant.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class Assistant extends Window implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<Assistant>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * `true` if the assistant uses a {@link Gtk.HeaderBar} for action buttons
         * instead of the action-area.
         * 
         * For technical reasons, this property is declared as an integer
         * property, but you should only set it to `true` or `false`.
         * @since 3.12
         * @construct-only
         * @default -1
         */
        get use_header_bar(): number;

        /**
         * `true` if the assistant uses a {@link Gtk.HeaderBar} for action buttons
         * instead of the action-area.
         * 
         * For technical reasons, this property is declared as an integer
         * property, but you should only set it to `true` or `false`.
         * @since 3.12
         * @construct-only
         * @default -1
         */
        get useHeaderBar(): number;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: Assistant.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<Assistant.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): Assistant;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof Assistant.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Assistant.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof Assistant.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Assistant.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof Assistant.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<Assistant.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * Signal emitted when the apply button is clicked.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_apply(): void;

        /**
         * Signal emitted when the cancel button is clicked.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_cancel(): void;

        /**
         * Signal emitted either when the close button or last page apply button is clicked.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_close(): void;

        /**
         * Signal emitted when a new page is set as the assistant’s current page, before making the new page visible.
         * @param page 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_prepare(page: Widget): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Adds a widget to the action area of a {@link Gtk.Assistant}.
         * @param child a {@link Gtk.Widget}
         */
        add_action_widget(child: Widget): void;

        /**
         * Appends a page to the `assistant`.
         * @param page a {@link Gtk.Widget}
         * @returns the index (starting at 0) of the inserted page
         */
        append_page(page: Widget): number;

        /**
         * Erases the visited page history so the back button is not
         * shown on the current page, and removes the cancel button
         * from subsequent pages.
         * 
         * Use this when the information provided up to the current
         * page is hereafter deemed permanent and cannot be modified
         * or undone. For example, showing a progress page to track
         * a long-running, unreversible operation after the user has
         * clicked apply on a confirmation page.
         */
        commit(): void;

        /**
         * Returns the page number of the current page.
         * @returns The index (starting from 0) of the current     page in the `assistant`, or -1 if the `assistant` has no pages,     or no current page.
         */
        get_current_page(): number;

        /**
         * Returns the number of pages in the `assistant`
         * @returns the number of pages in the `assistant`
         */
        get_n_pages(): number;

        /**
         * Returns the child widget contained in page number `page_num`.
         * @param page_num the index of a page in the `assistant`,     or -1 to get the last page
         * @returns the child widget, or `null`     if `page_num` is out of bounds
         */
        get_nth_page(page_num: number): Widget | null;

        /**
         * Gets whether `page` is complete.
         * @param page a page of `assistant`
         * @returns `true` if `page` is complete.
         */
        get_page_complete(page: Widget): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets whether page has padding.
         * @param page a page of `assistant`
         * @returns `true` if `page` has padding
         */
        get_page_has_padding(page: Widget): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the header image for `page`.
         * @param page a page of `assistant`
         * @returns the header image for `page`,     or `null` if there’s no header image for the page
         */
        get_page_header_image(page: Widget): GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf;

        /**
         * Gets the side image for `page`.
         * @param page a page of `assistant`
         * @returns the side image for `page`,     or `null` if there’s no side image for the page
         */
        get_page_side_image(page: Widget): GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf;

        /**
         * Gets the title for `page`.
         * @param page a page of `assistant`
         * @returns the title for `page`
         */
        get_page_title(page: Widget): string;

        /**
         * Gets the page type of `page`.
         * @param page a page of `assistant`
         * @returns the page type of `page`
         */
        get_page_type(page: Widget): AssistantPageType;

        /**
         * Inserts a page in the `assistant` at a given position.
         * @param page a {@link Gtk.Widget}
         * @param position the index (starting at 0) at which to insert the page,     or -1 to append the page to the `assistant`
         * @returns the index (starting from 0) of the inserted page
         */
        insert_page(page: Widget, position: number): number;

        /**
         * Navigate to the next page.
         * 
         * It is a programming error to call this function when
         * there is no next page.
         * 
         * This function is for use when creating pages of the
         * #GTK_ASSISTANT_PAGE_CUSTOM type.
         */
        next_page(): void;

        /**
         * Prepends a page to the `assistant`.
         * @param page a {@link Gtk.Widget}
         * @returns the index (starting at 0) of the inserted page
         */
        prepend_page(page: Widget): number;

        /**
         * Navigate to the previous visited page.
         * 
         * It is a programming error to call this function when
         * no previous page is available.
         * 
         * This function is for use when creating pages of the
         * #GTK_ASSISTANT_PAGE_CUSTOM type.
         */
        previous_page(): void;

        /**
         * Removes a widget from the action area of a {@link Gtk.Assistant}.
         * @param child a {@link Gtk.Widget}
         */
        remove_action_widget(child: Widget): void;

        /**
         * Removes the `page_num`’s page from `assistant`.
         * @param page_num the index of a page in the `assistant`,     or -1 to remove the last page
         */
        remove_page(page_num: number): void;

        /**
         * Switches the page to `page_num`.
         * 
         * Note that this will only be necessary in custom buttons,
         * as the `assistant` flow can be set with
         * `gtk_assistant_set_forward_page_func()`.
         * @param page_num index of the page to switch to, starting from 0.     If negative, the last page will be used. If greater     than the number of pages in the `assistant`, nothing     will be done.
         */
        set_current_page(page_num: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the page forwarding function to be `page_func`.
         * 
         * This function will be used to determine what will be
         * the next page when the user presses the forward button.
         * Setting `page_func` to `null` will make the assistant to
         * use the default forward function, which just goes to the
         * next visible page.
         * @param page_func the {@link Gtk.AssistantPageFunc}, or `null`     to use the default one
         */
        set_forward_page_func(page_func: AssistantPageFunc | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether `page` contents are complete.
         * 
         * This will make `assistant` update the buttons state
         * to be able to continue the task.
         * @param page a page of `assistant`
         * @param complete the completeness status of the page
         */
        set_page_complete(page: Widget, complete: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the assistant is adding padding around
         * the page.
         * @param page a page of `assistant`
         * @param has_padding whether this page has padding
         */
        set_page_has_padding(page: Widget, has_padding: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets a header image for `page`.
         * @param page a page of `assistant`
         * @param pixbuf the new header image `page`
         */
        set_page_header_image(page: Widget, pixbuf: GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets a side image for `page`.
         * 
         * This image used to be displayed in the side area of the assistant
         * when `page` is the current page.
         * @param page a page of `assistant`
         * @param pixbuf the new side image `page`
         */
        set_page_side_image(page: Widget, pixbuf: GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets a title for `page`.
         * 
         * The title is displayed in the header area of the assistant
         * when `page` is the current page.
         * @param page a page of `assistant`
         * @param title the new title for `page`
         */
        set_page_title(page: Widget, title: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets the page type for `page`.
         * 
         * The page type determines the page behavior in the `assistant`.
         * @param page a page of `assistant`
         * @param type the new type for `page`
         */
        set_page_type(page: Widget, type: AssistantPageType): void;

        /**
         * Forces `assistant` to recompute the buttons state.
         * 
         * GTK+ automatically takes care of this in most situations,
         * e.g. when the user goes to a different page, or when the
         * visibility or completeness of a page changes.
         * 
         * One situation where it can be necessary to call this
         * function is when changing a value on the current page
         * affects the future page flow of the assistant.
         */
        update_buttons_state(): void;
    }


    namespace Bin {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Container.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Container.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * The {@link Gtk.Bin} widget is a container with just one child.
     * It is not very useful itself, but it is useful for deriving subclasses,
     * since it provides common code needed for handling a single child widget.
     * 
     * Many GTK+ widgets are subclasses of {@link Gtk.Bin}, including {@link Gtk.Window},
     * {@link Gtk.Button}, {@link Gtk.Frame}, {@link Gtk.HandleBox} or {@link Gtk.ScrolledWindow}.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    abstract class Bin extends Container implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<Bin>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: Bin.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        container: Container;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<Bin.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof Bin.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Bin.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof Bin.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Bin.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof Bin.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<Bin.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Gets the child of the {@link Gtk.Bin}, or `null` if the bin contains
         * no child widget. The returned widget does not have a reference
         * added, so you do not need to unref it.
         * @returns the child of `bin`, or `null` if it does not have a child.
         */
        get_child(): Widget | null;
    }


    namespace BooleanCellAccessible {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends RendererCellAccessible.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::renderer": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-layer": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-mdi-zorder": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-help-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-hypertext-nlinks": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption-object": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-summary": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends RendererCellAccessible.ConstructorProps, Atk.Action.ConstructorProps, Atk.Component.ConstructorProps, Atk.TableCell.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class BooleanCellAccessible extends RendererCellAccessible implements Atk.Action, Atk.Component, Atk.TableCell {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<BooleanCellAccessible>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: BooleanCellAccessible.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<BooleanCellAccessible.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof BooleanCellAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, BooleanCellAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof BooleanCellAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, BooleanCellAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof BooleanCellAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<BooleanCellAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;
    }


    namespace Box {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Container.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::baseline-position": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::homogeneous": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::spacing": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::orientation": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Container.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, Orientable.ConstructorProps {
            baseline_position: BaselinePosition;
            baselinePosition: BaselinePosition;
            homogeneous: boolean;
            spacing: number;
        }
    }

    /**
     * The GtkBox widget arranges child widgets into a single row or column,
     * depending upon the value of its {@link Gtk.Orientable.orientation} property. Within
     * the other dimension, all children are allocated the same size. Of course,
     * the {@link Gtk.Widget.halign} and {@link Gtk.Widget.valign} properties can be used on
     * the children to influence their allocation.
     * 
     * GtkBox uses a notion of packing. Packing refers
     * to adding widgets with reference to a particular position in a
     * {@link Gtk.Container}. For a GtkBox, there are two reference positions: the
     * start and the end of the box.
     * For a vertical {@link Gtk.Box}, the start is defined as the top of the box and
     * the end is defined as the bottom. For a horizontal {@link Gtk.Box} the start
     * is defined as the left side and the end is defined as the right side.
     * 
     * Use repeated calls to `gtk_box_pack_start()` to pack widgets into a
     * GtkBox from start to end. Use `gtk_box_pack_end()` to add widgets from
     * end to start. You may intersperse these calls and add widgets from
     * both ends of the same GtkBox.
     * 
     * Because GtkBox is a {@link Gtk.Container}, you may also use `gtk_container_add()`
     * to insert widgets into the box, and they will be packed with the default
     * values for expand and fill child properties. Use `gtk_container_remove()`
     * to remove widgets from the GtkBox.
     * 
     * Use `gtk_box_set_homogeneous()` to specify whether or not all children
     * of the GtkBox are forced to get the same amount of space.
     * 
     * Use `gtk_box_set_spacing()` to determine how much space will be
     * minimally placed between all children in the GtkBox. Note that
     * spacing is added between the children, while
     * padding added by `gtk_box_pack_start()` or `gtk_box_pack_end()` is added
     * on either side of the widget it belongs to.
     * 
     * Use `gtk_box_reorder_child()` to move a GtkBox child to a different
     * place in the box.
     * 
     * Use `gtk_box_set_child_packing()` to reset the expand,
     * fill and padding child properties.
     * Use `gtk_box_query_child_packing()` to query these fields.
     * 
     * # CSS nodes
     * 
     * GtkBox uses a single CSS node with name box.
     * 
     * In horizontal orientation, the nodes of the children are always arranged
     * from left to right. So :first-child will always select the leftmost child,
     * regardless of text direction.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class Box extends Container implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable, Orientable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<Box>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * @default Gtk.BaselinePosition.CENTER
         */
        get baseline_position(): BaselinePosition;
        set baseline_position(val: BaselinePosition);

        /**
         * @default Gtk.BaselinePosition.CENTER
         */
        get baselinePosition(): BaselinePosition;
        set baselinePosition(val: BaselinePosition);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get homogeneous(): boolean;
        set homogeneous(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default 0
         */
        get spacing(): number;
        set spacing(val: number);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: Box.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        container: Container;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<Box.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](orientation: Orientation, spacing: number): Box;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof Box.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Box.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof Box.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Box.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof Box.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<Box.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Gets the value set by `gtk_box_set_baseline_position()`.
         * @returns the baseline position
         */
        get_baseline_position(): BaselinePosition;

        /**
         * Retrieves the center widget of the box.
         * @returns the center widget   or `null` in case no center widget is set.
         */
        get_center_widget(): Widget | null;

        /**
         * Returns whether the box is homogeneous (all children are the
         * same size). See `gtk_box_set_homogeneous()`.
         * @returns `true` if the box is homogeneous.
         */
        get_homogeneous(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the value set by `gtk_box_set_spacing()`.
         * @returns spacing between children
         */
        get_spacing(): number;

        /**
         * Adds `child` to `box`, packed with reference to the end of `box`.
         * The `child` is packed after (away from end of) any other child
         * packed with reference to the end of `box`.
         * @param child the {@link Gtk.Widget} to be added to `box`
         * @param expand `true` if the new child is to be given extra space allocated   to `box`. The extra space will be divided evenly between all children   of `box` that use this option
         * @param fill `true` if space given to `child` by the `expand` option is   actually allocated to `child`, rather than just padding it.  This   parameter has no effect if `expand` is set to `false`.  A child is   always allocated the full height of a horizontal {@link Gtk.Box} and the full width   of a vertical {@link Gtk.Box}.  This option affects the other dimension
         * @param padding extra space in pixels to put between this child and its   neighbors, over and above the global amount specified by   {@link Gtk.Box.spacing} property.  If `child` is a widget at one of the   reference ends of `box`, then `padding` pixels are also put between   `child` and the reference edge of `box`
         */
        pack_end(child: Widget, expand: boolean, fill: boolean, padding: number): void;

        /**
         * Adds `child` to `box`, packed with reference to the start of `box`.
         * The `child` is packed after any other child packed with reference
         * to the start of `box`.
         * @param child the {@link Gtk.Widget} to be added to `box`
         * @param expand `true` if the new child is to be given extra space allocated     to `box`. The extra space will be divided evenly between all children     that use this option
         * @param fill `true` if space given to `child` by the `expand` option is     actually allocated to `child`, rather than just padding it.  This     parameter has no effect if `expand` is set to `false`.  A child is     always allocated the full height of a horizontal {@link Gtk.Box} and the full width     of a vertical {@link Gtk.Box}. This option affects the other dimension
         * @param padding extra space in pixels to put between this child and its   neighbors, over and above the global amount specified by   {@link Gtk.Box.spacing} property.  If `child` is a widget at one of the   reference ends of `box`, then `padding` pixels are also put between   `child` and the reference edge of `box`
         */
        pack_start(child: Widget, expand: boolean, fill: boolean, padding: number): void;

        /**
         * Obtains information about how `child` is packed into `box`.
         * @param child the {@link Gtk.Widget} of the child to query
         */
        query_child_packing(child: Widget): [boolean, boolean, number, PackType];

        /**
         * Moves `child` to a new `position` in the list of `box` children.
         * The list contains widgets packed #GTK_PACK_START
         * as well as widgets packed #GTK_PACK_END, in the order that these
         * widgets were added to `box`.
         * 
         * A widget’s position in the `box` children list determines where
         * the widget is packed into `box`.  A child widget at some position
         * in the list will be packed just after all other widgets of the
         * same packing type that appear earlier in the list.
         * @param child the {@link Gtk.Widget} to move
         * @param position the new position for `child` in the list of children   of `box`, starting from 0. If negative, indicates the end of   the list
         */
        reorder_child(child: Widget, position: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the baseline position of a box. This affects
         * only horizontal boxes with at least one baseline aligned
         * child. If there is more vertical space available than requested,
         * and the baseline is not allocated by the parent then
         * `position` is used to allocate the baseline wrt the
         * extra space available.
         * @param position a {@link Gtk.BaselinePosition}
         */
        set_baseline_position(position: BaselinePosition): void;

        /**
         * Sets a center widget; that is a child widget that will be
         * centered with respect to the full width of the box, even
         * if the children at either side take up different amounts
         * of space.
         * @param widget the widget to center
         */
        set_center_widget(widget: Widget | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the way `child` is packed into `box`.
         * @param child the {@link Gtk.Widget} of the child to set
         * @param expand the new value of the expand child property
         * @param fill the new value of the fill child property
         * @param padding the new value of the padding child property
         * @param pack_type the new value of the pack-type child property
         */
        set_child_packing(child: Widget, expand: boolean, fill: boolean, padding: number, pack_type: PackType): void;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.Box.homogeneous} property of `box`, controlling
         * whether or not all children of `box` are given equal space
         * in the box.
         * @param homogeneous a boolean value, `true` to create equal allotments,   `false` for variable allotments
         */
        set_homogeneous(homogeneous: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.Box.spacing} property of `box`, which is the
         * number of pixels to place between children of `box`.
         * @param spacing the number of pixels to put between children
         */
        set_spacing(spacing: number): void;

        /**
         * The orientation of the orientable.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default Gtk.Orientation.HORIZONTAL
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Orientable
         */
        get orientation(): Orientation;
        set orientation(val: Orientation);

        /**
         * Retrieves the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @returns the orientation of the `orientable`.
         */
        get_orientation(): Orientation;

        /**
         * Sets the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @param orientation the orientable’s new orientation.
         */
        set_orientation(orientation: Orientation): void;
    }


    namespace Builder {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends GObject.Object.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::translation-domain": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.Object.ConstructorProps {
            translation_domain: string;
            translationDomain: string;
        }
    }

    /**
     * A GtkBuilder is an auxiliary object that reads textual descriptions
     * of a user interface and instantiates the described objects. To create
     * a GtkBuilder from a user interface description, call
     * `gtk_builder_new_from_file()`, `gtk_builder_new_from_resource()` or
     * `gtk_builder_new_from_string()`.
     * 
     * In the (unusual) case that you want to add user interface
     * descriptions from multiple sources to the same GtkBuilder you can
     * call `gtk_builder_new()` to get an empty builder and populate it by
     * (multiple) calls to `gtk_builder_add_from_file()`,
     * `gtk_builder_add_from_resource()` or `gtk_builder_add_from_string()`.
     * 
     * A GtkBuilder holds a reference to all objects that it has constructed
     * and drops these references when it is finalized. This finalization can
     * cause the destruction of non-widget objects or widgets which are not
     * contained in a toplevel window. For toplevel windows constructed by a
     * builder, it is the responsibility of the user to call `gtk_widget_destroy()`
     * to get rid of them and all the widgets they contain.
     * 
     * The functions `gtk_builder_get_object()` and `gtk_builder_get_objects()`
     * can be used to access the widgets in the interface by the names assigned
     * to them inside the UI description. Toplevel windows returned by these
     * functions will stay around until the user explicitly destroys them
     * with `gtk_widget_destroy()`. Other widgets will either be part of a
     * larger hierarchy constructed by the builder (in which case you should
     * not have to worry about their lifecycle), or without a parent, in which
     * case they have to be added to some container to make use of them.
     * Non-widget objects need to be reffed with `g_object_ref()` to keep them
     * beyond the lifespan of the builder.
     * 
     * The function `gtk_builder_connect_signals()` and variants thereof can be
     * used to connect handlers to the named signals in the description.
     * 
     * # GtkBuilder UI Definitions # {`BUILDER`-UI}
     * 
     * GtkBuilder parses textual descriptions of user interfaces which are
     * specified in an XML format which can be roughly described by the
     * RELAX NG schema below. We refer to these descriptions as “GtkBuilder
     * UI definitions” or just “UI definitions” if the context is clear.
     * Do not confuse GtkBuilder UI Definitions with
     * [GtkUIManager UI Definitions][XML-UI], which are more limited in scope.
     * It is common to use `.ui` as the filename extension for files containing
     * GtkBuilder UI definitions.
     * 
     * [RELAX NG Compact Syntax](https://gitlab.gnome.org/GNOME/gtk/-/blob/gtk-3-24/gtk/gtkbuilder.rnc)
     * 
     * The toplevel element is `<interface>`. It optionally takes a “domain”
     * attribute, which will make the builder look for translated strings
     * using `dgettext()` in the domain specified. This can also be done by
     * calling `gtk_builder_set_translation_domain()` on the builder.
     * Objects are described by `<object>` elements, which can contain
     * `<property>` elements to set properties, `<signal>` elements which
     * connect signals to handlers, and `<child>` elements, which describe
     * child objects (most often widgets inside a container, but also e.g.
     * actions in an action group, or columns in a tree model). A `<child>`
     * element contains an `<object>` element which describes the child object.
     * The target toolkit version(s) are described by `<requires>` elements,
     * the “lib” attribute specifies the widget library in question (currently
     * the only supported value is “gtk+”) and the “version” attribute specifies
     * the target version in the form `<major>.<minor>`. The builder will error
     * out if the version requirements are not met.
     * 
     * Typically, the specific kind of object represented by an `<object>`
     * element is specified by the “class” attribute. If the type has not
     * been loaded yet, GTK+ tries to find the `get_type()` function from the
     * class name by applying heuristics. This works in most cases, but if
     * necessary, it is possible to specify the name of the `get_type()` function
     * explictly with the "type-func" attribute. As a special case, GtkBuilder
     * allows to use an object that has been constructed by a {@link Gtk.UIManager} in
     * another part of the UI definition by specifying the id of the {@link Gtk.UIManager}
     * in the “constructor” attribute and the name of the object in the “id”
     * attribute.
     * 
     * Objects may be given a name with the “id” attribute, which allows the
     * application to retrieve them from the builder with `gtk_builder_get_object()`.
     * An id is also necessary to use the object as property value in other
     * parts of the UI definition. GTK+ reserves ids starting and ending
     * with `___` (3 underscores) for its own purposes.
     * 
     * Setting properties of objects is pretty straightforward with the
     * `<property>` element: the “name” attribute specifies the name of the
     * property, and the content of the element specifies the value.
     * If the “translatable” attribute is set to a true value, GTK+ uses
     * `gettext()` (or `dgettext()` if the builder has a translation domain set)
     * to find a translation for the value. This happens before the value
     * is parsed, so it can be used for properties of any type, but it is
     * probably most useful for string properties. It is also possible to
     * specify a context to disambiguate short strings, and comments which
     * may help the translators.
     * 
     * GtkBuilder can parse textual representations for the most common
     * property types: characters, strings, integers, floating-point numbers,
     * booleans (strings like “TRUE”, “t”, “yes”, “y”, “1” are interpreted
     * as `true`, strings like “FALSE”, “f”, “no”, “n”, “0” are interpreted
     * as `false`), enumerations (can be specified by their name, nick or
     * integer value), flags (can be specified by their name, nick, integer
     * value, optionally combined with “|”, e.g. “GTK_VISIBLE|GTK_REALIZED”)
     * and colors (in a format understood by `gdk_rgba_parse()`).
     * 
     * GVariants can be specified in the format understood by `g_variant_parse()`,
     * and pixbufs can be specified as a filename of an image file to load.
     * 
     * Objects can be referred to by their name and by default refer to
     * objects declared in the local xml fragment and objects exposed via
     * `gtk_builder_expose_object()`. In general, GtkBuilder allows forward
     * references to objects — declared in the local xml; an object doesn’t
     * have to be constructed before it can be referred to. The exception
     * to this rule is that an object has to be constructed before it can
     * be used as the value of a construct-only property.
     * 
     * It is also possible to bind a property value to another object's
     * property value using the attributes
     * "bind-source" to specify the source object of the binding,
     * "bind-property" to specify the source property and optionally
     * "bind-flags" to specify the binding flags.
     * Internally builder implements this using GBinding objects.
     * For more information see `g_object_bind_property()`
     * 
     * Signal handlers are set up with the `<signal>` element. The “name”
     * attribute specifies the name of the signal, and the “handler” attribute
     * specifies the function to connect to the signal. By default, GTK+ tries
     * to find the handler using `g_module_symbol()`, but this can be changed by
     * passing a custom {@link Gtk.BuilderConnectFunc} to
     * `gtk_builder_connect_signals_full()`. The remaining attributes, “after”,
     * “swapped” and “object”, have the same meaning as the corresponding
     * parameters of the `g_signal_connect_object()` or
     * `g_signal_connect_data()` functions. A “last_modification_time”
     * attribute is also allowed, but it does not have a meaning to the
     * builder.
     * 
     * Sometimes it is necessary to refer to widgets which have implicitly
     * been constructed by GTK+ as part of a composite widget, to set
     * properties on them or to add further children (e.g. the `vbox` of
     * a {@link Gtk.Dialog}). This can be achieved by setting the “internal-child”
     * property of the `<child>` element to a true value. Note that GtkBuilder
     * still requires an `<object>` element for the internal child, even if it
     * has already been constructed.
     * 
     * A number of widgets have different places where a child can be added
     * (e.g. tabs vs. page content in notebooks). This can be reflected in
     * a UI definition by specifying the “type” attribute on a `<child>`
     * The possible values for the “type” attribute are described in the
     * sections describing the widget-specific portions of UI definitions.
     * 
     * # A GtkBuilder UI Definition
     * 
     * 
     * ```xml
     * <interface>
     *   <object class="GtkDialog" id="dialog1">
     *     <child internal-child="vbox">
     *       <object class="GtkBox" id="vbox1">
     *         <property name="border-width">10</property>
     *         <child internal-child="action_area">
     *           <object class="GtkButtonBox" id="hbuttonbox1">
     *             <property name="border-width">20</property>
     *             <child>
     *               <object class="GtkButton" id="ok_button">
     *                 <property name="label">gtk-ok</property>
     *                 <property name="use-stock">TRUE</property>
     *                 <signal name="clicked" handler="ok_button_clicked"/>
     *               </object>
     *             </child>
     *           </object>
     *         </child>
     *       </object>
     *     </child>
     *   </object>
     * </interface>
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * Beyond this general structure, several object classes define their
     * own XML DTD fragments for filling in the ANY placeholders in the DTD
     * above. Note that a custom element in a `<child>` element gets parsed by
     * the custom tag handler of the parent object, while a custom element in
     * an `<object>` element gets parsed by the custom tag handler of the object.
     * 
     * These XML fragments are explained in the documentation of the
     * respective objects.
     * 
     * Additionally, since 3.10 a special `<template>` tag has been added
     * to the format allowing one to define a widget class’s components.
     * See the [GtkWidget documentation][composite-templates] for details.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class Builder extends GObject.Object {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<Builder>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * The translation domain used when translating property values that
         * have been marked as translatable in interface descriptions.
         * If the translation domain is `null`, {@link Gtk.Builder} uses `gettext()`,
         * otherwise `g_dgettext()`.
         * @since 2.12
         * @default null
         */
        get translation_domain(): string;
        set translation_domain(val: string);

        /**
         * The translation domain used when translating property values that
         * have been marked as translatable in interface descriptions.
         * If the translation domain is `null`, {@link Gtk.Builder} uses `gettext()`,
         * otherwise `g_dgettext()`.
         * @since 2.12
         * @default null
         */
        get translationDomain(): string;
        set translationDomain(val: string);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: Builder.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<Builder.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): Builder;

        static new_from_file(filename: string): Builder;

        static new_from_resource(resource_path: string): Builder;

        static new_from_string(string: string, length: bigint | number): Builder;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof Builder.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Builder.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof Builder.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Builder.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof Builder.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<Builder.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * Looks up a type by name, using the virtual function that
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} has for that purpose. This is mainly used when
         * implementing the {@link Gtk.Buildable} interface on a type.
         * @param type_name type name to lookup
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_type_from_name(type_name: string): GObject.GType;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Adds the `callback_symbol` to the scope of `builder` under the given `callback_name`.
         * 
         * Using this function overrides the behavior of `gtk_builder_connect_signals()`
         * for any callback symbols that are added. Using this method allows for better
         * encapsulation as it does not require that callback symbols be declared in
         * the global namespace.
         * @param callback_name The name of the callback, as expected in the XML
         * @param callback_symbol The callback pointer
         */
        add_callback_symbol(callback_name: string, callback_symbol: GObject.Callback): void;

        /**
         * Parses a file containing a [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI]
         * and merges it with the current contents of `builder`.
         * 
         * Most users will probably want to use `gtk_builder_new_from_file()`.
         * 
         * If an error occurs, 0 will be returned and `error` will be assigned a
         * {@link GLib.Error} from the #GTK_BUILDER_ERROR, #G_MARKUP_ERROR or #G_FILE_ERROR
         * domain.
         * 
         * It’s not really reasonable to attempt to handle failures of this
         * call. You should not use this function with untrusted files (ie:
         * files that are not part of your application). Broken {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * files can easily crash your program, and it’s possible that memory
         * was leaked leading up to the reported failure. The only reasonable
         * thing to do when an error is detected is to call `g_error()`.
         * @param filename the name of the file to parse
         * @returns A positive value on success, 0 if an error occurred
         */
        add_from_file(filename: string): number;

        /**
         * Parses a resource file containing a [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI]
         * and merges it with the current contents of `builder`.
         * 
         * Most users will probably want to use `gtk_builder_new_from_resource()`.
         * 
         * If an error occurs, 0 will be returned and `error` will be assigned a
         * {@link GLib.Error} from the #GTK_BUILDER_ERROR, #G_MARKUP_ERROR or #G_RESOURCE_ERROR
         * domain.
         * 
         * It’s not really reasonable to attempt to handle failures of this
         * call.  The only reasonable thing to do when an error is detected is
         * to call `g_error()`.
         * @param resource_path the path of the resource file to parse
         * @returns A positive value on success, 0 if an error occurred
         */
        add_from_resource(resource_path: string): number;

        /**
         * Parses a string containing a [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI]
         * and merges it with the current contents of `builder`.
         * 
         * Most users will probably want to use `gtk_builder_new_from_string()`.
         * 
         * Upon errors 0 will be returned and `error` will be assigned a
         * {@link GLib.Error} from the #GTK_BUILDER_ERROR, #G_MARKUP_ERROR or
         * #G_VARIANT_PARSE_ERROR domain.
         * 
         * It’s not really reasonable to attempt to handle failures of this
         * call.  The only reasonable thing to do when an error is detected is
         * to call `g_error()`.
         * @param buffer the string to parse
         * @param length the length of `buffer` (may be -1 if `buffer` is nul-terminated)
         * @returns A positive value on success, 0 if an error occurred
         */
        add_from_string(buffer: string, length: bigint | number): number;

        /**
         * Parses a file containing a [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI]
         * building only the requested objects and merges
         * them with the current contents of `builder`.
         * 
         * Upon errors 0 will be returned and `error` will be assigned a
         * {@link GLib.Error} from the #GTK_BUILDER_ERROR, #G_MARKUP_ERROR or #G_FILE_ERROR
         * domain.
         * 
         * If you are adding an object that depends on an object that is not
         * its child (for instance a {@link Gtk.TreeView} that depends on its
         * {@link Gtk.TreeModel}), you have to explicitly list all of them in `object_ids`.
         * @param filename the name of the file to parse
         * @param object_ids nul-terminated array of objects to build
         * @returns A positive value on success, 0 if an error occurred
         */
        add_objects_from_file(filename: string, object_ids: string[]): number;

        /**
         * Parses a resource file containing a [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI]
         * building only the requested objects and merges
         * them with the current contents of `builder`.
         * 
         * Upon errors 0 will be returned and `error` will be assigned a
         * {@link GLib.Error} from the #GTK_BUILDER_ERROR, #G_MARKUP_ERROR or #G_RESOURCE_ERROR
         * domain.
         * 
         * If you are adding an object that depends on an object that is not
         * its child (for instance a {@link Gtk.TreeView} that depends on its
         * {@link Gtk.TreeModel}), you have to explicitly list all of them in `object_ids`.
         * @param resource_path the path of the resource file to parse
         * @param object_ids nul-terminated array of objects to build
         * @returns A positive value on success, 0 if an error occurred
         */
        add_objects_from_resource(resource_path: string, object_ids: string[]): number;

        /**
         * Parses a string containing a [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI]
         * building only the requested objects and merges
         * them with the current contents of `builder`.
         * 
         * Upon errors 0 will be returned and `error` will be assigned a
         * {@link GLib.Error} from the #GTK_BUILDER_ERROR or #G_MARKUP_ERROR domain.
         * 
         * If you are adding an object that depends on an object that is not
         * its child (for instance a {@link Gtk.TreeView} that depends on its
         * {@link Gtk.TreeModel}), you have to explicitly list all of them in `object_ids`.
         * @param buffer the string to parse
         * @param length the length of `buffer` (may be -1 if `buffer` is nul-terminated)
         * @param object_ids nul-terminated array of objects to build
         * @returns A positive value on success, 0 if an error occurred
         */
        add_objects_from_string(buffer: string, length: bigint | number, object_ids: string[]): number;

        /**
         * This method is a simpler variation of `gtk_builder_connect_signals_full()`.
         * It uses symbols explicitly added to `builder` with prior calls to
         * `gtk_builder_add_callback_symbol()`. In the case that symbols are not
         * explicitly added; it uses {@link GModule.Module}’s introspective features (by opening the module `null`)
         * to look at the application’s symbol table. From here it tries to match
         * the signal handler names given in the interface description with
         * symbols in the application and connects the signals. Note that this
         * function can only be called once, subsequent calls will do nothing.
         * 
         * Note that unless `gtk_builder_add_callback_symbol()` is called for
         * all signal callbacks which are referenced by the loaded XML, this
         * function will require that {@link GModule.Module} be supported on the platform.
         * 
         * If you rely on {@link GModule.Module} support to lookup callbacks in the symbol table,
         * the following details should be noted:
         * 
         * When compiling applications for Windows, you must declare signal callbacks
         * with #G_MODULE_EXPORT, or they will not be put in the symbol table.
         * On Linux and Unices, this is not necessary; applications should instead
         * be compiled with the -Wl,--export-dynamic CFLAGS, and linked against
         * gmodule-export-2.0.
         * @param user_data user data to pass back with all signals
         */
        connect_signals(user_data: null): void;

        /**
         * This function can be thought of the interpreted language binding
         * version of `gtk_builder_connect_signals()`, except that it does not
         * require GModule to function correctly.
         * @param func the function used to connect the signals
         */
        connect_signals_full(func: BuilderConnectFunc): void;

        /**
         * Add `object` to the `builder` object pool so it can be referenced just like any
         * other object built by builder.
         * @param name the name of the object exposed to the builder
         * @param object the object to expose
         */
        expose_object(name: string, object: GObject.Object): void;

        /**
         * Main private entry point for building composite container
         * components from template XML.
         * 
         * This is exported purely to let gtk-builder-tool validate
         * templates, applications have no need to call this function.
         * @param widget the widget that is being extended
         * @param template_type the type that the template is for
         * @param buffer the string to parse
         * @param length the length of `buffer` (may be -1 if `buffer` is nul-terminated)
         * @returns A positive value on success, 0 if an error occurred
         */
        extend_with_template(widget: Widget, template_type: GObject.GType, buffer: string, length: bigint | number): number;

        /**
         * Gets the {@link Gtk.Application} associated with the builder.
         * 
         * The {@link Gtk.Application} is used for creating action proxies as requested
         * from XML that the builder is loading.
         * 
         * By default, the builder uses the default application: the one from
         * `g_application_get_default()`. If you want to use another application
         * for constructing proxies, use `gtk_builder_set_application()`.
         * @returns the application being used by the builder,     or `null`
         */
        get_application(): Application | null;

        /**
         * Gets the object named `name`. Note that this function does not
         * increment the reference count of the returned object.
         * @param name name of object to get
         * @returns the object named `name` or `null` if    it could not be found in the object tree.
         */
        get_object<T = GObject.Object>(name: string): T;

        /**
         * Gets all objects that have been constructed by `builder`. Note that
         * this function does not increment the reference counts of the returned
         * objects.
         * @returns a newly-allocated {@link GLib.SList} containing all the objects   constructed by the {@link Gtk.Builder} instance. It should be freed by   `g_slist_free()`
         */
        get_objects(): GObject.Object[];

        /**
         * Gets the translation domain of `builder`.
         * @returns the translation domain. This string is owned by the builder object and must not be modified or freed.
         */
        get_translation_domain(): string;

        /**
         * Looks up a type by name, using the virtual function that
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} has for that purpose. This is mainly used when
         * implementing the {@link Gtk.Buildable} interface on a type.
         * @param type_name type name to lookup
         * @returns the {@link GObject.GType} found for `type_name` or #G_TYPE_INVALID   if no type was found
         */
        get_type_from_name(type_name: string): GObject.GType;

        /**
         * Sets the application associated with `builder`.
         * 
         * You only need this function if there is more than one {@link Gio.Application}
         * in your process. `application` cannot be `null`.
         * @param application a {@link Gtk.Application}
         */
        set_application(application: Application): void;

        /**
         * Sets the translation domain of `builder`.
         * See {@link Gtk.Builder.translation_domain}.
         * @param domain the translation domain or `null`
         */
        set_translation_domain(domain: string | null): void;

        /**
         * This function demarshals a value from a string. This function
         * calls `g_value_init()` on the `value` argument, so it need not be
         * initialised beforehand.
         * 
         * This function can handle char, uchar, boolean, int, uint, long,
         * ulong, enum, flags, float, double, string, {@link Gdk.Color}, {@link Gdk.RGBA} and
         * {@link Gtk.Adjustment} type values. Support for {@link Gtk.Widget} type values is
         * still to come.
         * 
         * Upon errors `false` will be returned and `error` will be assigned a
         * {@link GLib.Error} from the #GTK_BUILDER_ERROR domain.
         * @param pspec the {@link GObject.ParamSpec} for the property
         * @param string the string representation of the value
         * @returns `true` on success
         */
        value_from_string(pspec: GObject.ParamSpec, string: string): [boolean, unknown];

        /**
         * Like `gtk_builder_value_from_string()`, this function demarshals
         * a value from a string, but takes a {@link GObject.GType} instead of {@link GObject.ParamSpec}.
         * This function calls `g_value_init()` on the `value` argument, so it
         * need not be initialised beforehand.
         * 
         * Upon errors `false` will be returned and `error` will be assigned a
         * {@link GLib.Error} from the #GTK_BUILDER_ERROR domain.
         * @param type the {@link GObject.GType} of the value
         * @param string the string representation of the value
         * @returns `true` on success
         */
        value_from_string_type(type: GObject.GType, string: string): [boolean, unknown];
    }


    namespace Button {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Bin.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * The ::activate signal on GtkButton is an action signal and
             * emitting it causes the button to animate press then release.
             * Applications should never connect to this signal, but use the
             * {@link Gtk.Button.SignalSignatures.clicked | Gtk.Button::clicked} signal.
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-first
             */
            activate: () => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when the button has been activated (pressed and released).
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-first
             */
            clicked: () => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when the pointer enters the button.
             * @signal
             * @deprecated since 2.8: Use the {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.enter_notify_event | Gtk.Widget::enter-notify-event} signal.
             * @run-first
             */
            enter: () => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when the pointer leaves the button.
             * @signal
             * @deprecated since 2.8: Use the {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.leave_notify_event | Gtk.Widget::leave-notify-event} signal.
             * @run-first
             */
            leave: () => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when the button is pressed.
             * @signal
             * @deprecated since 2.8: Use the {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.button_press_event | Gtk.Widget::button-press-event} signal.
             * @run-first
             */
            pressed: () => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when the button is released.
             * @signal
             * @deprecated since 2.8: Use the {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.button_release_event | Gtk.Widget::button-release-event} signal.
             * @run-first
             */
            released: () => void;
            "notify::always-show-image": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::image": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::image-position": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::label": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::relief": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-stock": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-underline": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::xalign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::yalign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::action-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::action-target": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::related-action": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-action-appearance": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Bin.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Actionable.ConstructorProps, Activatable.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {
            always_show_image: boolean;
            alwaysShowImage: boolean;
            image: Widget | null;
            image_position: PositionType;
            imagePosition: PositionType;
            label: string;
            relief: ReliefStyle;
            use_stock: boolean;
            useStock: boolean;
            use_underline: boolean;
            useUnderline: boolean;
            xalign: number;
            yalign: number;
        }
    }

    /**
     * The {@link Gtk.Button} widget is generally used to trigger a callback function that is
     * called when the button is pressed.  The various signals and how to use them
     * are outlined below.
     * 
     * The {@link Gtk.Button} widget can hold any valid child widget.  That is, it can hold
     * almost any other standard {@link Gtk.Widget}.  The most commonly used child is the
     * {@link Gtk.Label}.
     * 
     * # CSS nodes
     * 
     * GtkButton has a single CSS node with name button. The node will get the
     * style classes .image-button or .text-button, if the content is just an
     * image or label, respectively. It may also receive the .flat style class.
     * 
     * Other style classes that are commonly used with GtkButton include
     * .suggested-action and .destructive-action. In special cases, buttons
     * can be made round by adding the .circular style class.
     * 
     * Button-like widgets like {@link Gtk.ToggleButton}, {@link Gtk.MenuButton}, {@link Gtk.VolumeButton},
     * {@link Gtk.LockButton}, {@link Gtk.ColorButton}, {@link Gtk.FontButton} or {@link Gtk.FileChooserButton} use
     * style classes such as .toggle, .popup, .scale, .lock, .color, .font, .file
     * to differentiate themselves from a plain GtkButton.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class Button extends Bin implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Actionable, Activatable, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<Button>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * If `true`, the button will ignore the {@link Gtk.Settings.gtk_button_images}
         * setting and always show the image, if available.
         * 
         * Use this property if the button would be useless or hard to use
         * without the image.
         * @since 3.6
         * @default false
         */
        get always_show_image(): boolean;
        set always_show_image(val: boolean);

        /**
         * If `true`, the button will ignore the {@link Gtk.Settings.gtk_button_images}
         * setting and always show the image, if available.
         * 
         * Use this property if the button would be useless or hard to use
         * without the image.
         * @since 3.6
         * @default false
         */
        get alwaysShowImage(): boolean;
        set alwaysShowImage(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The child widget to appear next to the button text.
         * @since 2.6
         */
        get image(): Widget | null;
        set image(val: Widget | null);

        /**
         * The position of the image relative to the text inside the button.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default Gtk.PositionType.LEFT
         */
        get image_position(): PositionType;
        set image_position(val: PositionType);

        /**
         * The position of the image relative to the text inside the button.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default Gtk.PositionType.LEFT
         */
        get imagePosition(): PositionType;
        set imagePosition(val: PositionType);

        /**
         * @default null
         */
        get label(): string;
        set label(val: string);

        /**
         * @default Gtk.ReliefStyle.NORMAL
         */
        get relief(): ReliefStyle;
        set relief(val: ReliefStyle);

        /**
         * @deprecated since 3.10
         * @default false
         */
        get use_stock(): boolean;
        set use_stock(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @deprecated since 3.10
         * @default false
         */
        get useStock(): boolean;
        set useStock(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get use_underline(): boolean;
        set use_underline(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get useUnderline(): boolean;
        set useUnderline(val: boolean);

        /**
         * If the child of the button is a {@link Gtk.Misc} or {@link Gtk.Alignment}, this property
         * can be used to control its horizontal alignment. 0.0 is left aligned,
         * 1.0 is right aligned.
         * @since 2.4
         * @deprecated since 3.14: Access the child widget directly if you need to control its alignment.
         * @default 0.5
         */
        get xalign(): number;
        set xalign(val: number);

        /**
         * If the child of the button is a {@link Gtk.Misc} or {@link Gtk.Alignment}, this property
         * can be used to control its vertical alignment. 0.0 is top aligned,
         * 1.0 is bottom aligned.
         * @since 2.4
         * @deprecated since 3.14: Access the child widget directly if you need to control its alignment.
         * @default 0.5
         */
        get yalign(): number;
        set yalign(val: number);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: Button.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<Button.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): Button;

        static new_from_icon_name(icon_name: string | null, size: number): Button;

        static new_from_stock(stock_id: string): Button;

        static new_with_label(label: string): Button;

        static new_with_mnemonic(label: string): Button;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof Button.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Button.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof Button.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Button.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof Button.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<Button.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * Signal that causes the button to animate press then
         *    release. Applications should never connect to this signal, but use
         *    the `clicked` signal.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_activate(): void;

        /**
         * Emits a {@link Gtk.Button.SignalSignatures.clicked | Gtk.Button::clicked} signal to the given {@link Gtk.Button}.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_clicked(): void;

        /**
         * Emits a {@link Gtk.Button.SignalSignatures.enter | Gtk.Button::enter} signal to the given {@link Gtk.Button}.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_enter(): void;

        /**
         * Emits a {@link Gtk.Button.SignalSignatures.leave | Gtk.Button::leave} signal to the given {@link Gtk.Button}.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_leave(): void;

        /**
         * Emits a {@link Gtk.Button.SignalSignatures.pressed | Gtk.Button::pressed} signal to the given {@link Gtk.Button}.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_pressed(): void;

        /**
         * Emits a {@link Gtk.Button.SignalSignatures.released | Gtk.Button::released} signal to the given {@link Gtk.Button}.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_released(): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Emits a {@link Gtk.Button.SignalSignatures.clicked | Gtk.Button::clicked} signal to the given {@link Gtk.Button}.
         */
        clicked(): void;

        /**
         * Emits a {@link Gtk.Button.SignalSignatures.enter | Gtk.Button::enter} signal to the given {@link Gtk.Button}.
         */
        enter(): void;

        /**
         * Gets the alignment of the child in the button.
         */
        get_alignment(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Returns whether the button will ignore the {@link Gtk.Settings.gtk_button_images}
         * setting and always show the image, if available.
         * @returns `true` if the button will always show the image
         */
        get_always_show_image(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the button’s event window if it is realized, `null` otherwise.
         * This function should be rarely needed.
         * @returns `button`’s event window.
         */
        get_event_window(): Gdk.Window;

        /**
         * Returns whether the button grabs focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
         * See `gtk_button_set_focus_on_click()`.
         * @returns `true` if the button grabs focus when it is clicked with               the mouse.
         */
        get_focus_on_click(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the widget that is currenty set as the image of `button`.
         * This may have been explicitly set by `gtk_button_set_image()`
         * or constructed by `gtk_button_new_from_stock()`.
         * @returns a {@link Gtk.Widget} or `null` in case     there is no image
         */
        get_image(): Widget | null;

        /**
         * Gets the position of the image relative to the text
         * inside the button.
         * @returns the position
         */
        get_image_position(): PositionType;

        /**
         * Fetches the text from the label of the button, as set by
         * `gtk_button_set_label()`. If the label text has not
         * been set the return value will be `null`. This will be the
         * case if you create an empty button with `gtk_button_new()` to
         * use as a container.
         * @returns The text of the label widget. This string is owned by the widget and must not be modified or freed.
         */
        get_label(): string;

        /**
         * Returns the current relief style of the given {@link Gtk.Button}.
         * @returns The current {@link Gtk.ReliefStyle}
         */
        get_relief(): ReliefStyle;

        /**
         * Returns whether the button label is a stock item.
         * @returns `true` if the button label is used to               select a stock item instead of being               used directly as the label text.
         */
        get_use_stock(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns whether an embedded underline in the button label indicates a
         * mnemonic. See gtk_button_set_use_underline ().
         * @returns `true` if an embedded underline in the button label               indicates the mnemonic accelerator keys.
         */
        get_use_underline(): boolean;

        /**
         * Emits a {@link Gtk.Button.SignalSignatures.leave | Gtk.Button::leave} signal to the given {@link Gtk.Button}.
         */
        leave(): void;

        /**
         * Emits a {@link Gtk.Button.SignalSignatures.pressed | Gtk.Button::pressed} signal to the given {@link Gtk.Button}.
         */
        pressed(): void;

        /**
         * Emits a {@link Gtk.Button.SignalSignatures.released | Gtk.Button::released} signal to the given {@link Gtk.Button}.
         */
        released(): void;

        /**
         * Sets the alignment of the child. This property has no effect unless
         * the child is a {@link Gtk.Misc} or a {@link Gtk.Alignment}.
         * @param xalign the horizontal position of the child, 0.0 is left aligned,   1.0 is right aligned
         * @param yalign the vertical position of the child, 0.0 is top aligned,   1.0 is bottom aligned
         */
        set_alignment(xalign: number, yalign: number): void;

        /**
         * If `true`, the button will ignore the {@link Gtk.Settings.gtk_button_images}
         * setting and always show the image, if available.
         * 
         * Use this property if the button  would be useless or hard to use
         * without the image.
         * @param always_show `true` if the menuitem should always show the image
         */
        set_always_show_image(always_show: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the button will grab focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
         * Making mouse clicks not grab focus is useful in places like toolbars where
         * you don’t want the keyboard focus removed from the main area of the
         * application.
         * @param focus_on_click whether the button grabs focus when clicked with the mouse
         */
        set_focus_on_click(focus_on_click: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Set the image of `button` to the given widget. The image will be
         * displayed if the label text is `null` or if
         * {@link Gtk.Button.always_show_image} is `true`. You don’t have to call
         * `gtk_widget_show()` on `image` yourself.
         * @param image a widget to set as the image for the button, or `null` to unset
         */
        set_image(image: Widget | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the position of the image relative to the text
         * inside the button.
         * @param position the position
         */
        set_image_position(position: PositionType): void;

        /**
         * Sets the text of the label of the button to `str`. This text is
         * also used to select the stock item if `gtk_button_set_use_stock()`
         * is used.
         * 
         * This will also clear any previously set labels.
         * @param label a string
         */
        set_label(label: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets the relief style of the edges of the given {@link Gtk.Button} widget.
         * Two styles exist, {@link Gtk.ReliefStyle.NORMAL} and {@link Gtk.ReliefStyle.NONE}.
         * The default style is, as one can guess, {@link Gtk.ReliefStyle.NORMAL}.
         * The deprecated value {@link Gtk.ReliefStyle.HALF} behaves the same as
         * {@link Gtk.ReliefStyle.NORMAL}.
         * @param relief The GtkReliefStyle as described above
         */
        set_relief(relief: ReliefStyle): void;

        /**
         * If `true`, the label set on the button is used as a
         * stock id to select the stock item for the button.
         * @param use_stock `true` if the button should use a stock item
         */
        set_use_stock(use_stock: boolean): void;

        /**
         * If true, an underline in the text of the button label indicates
         * the next character should be used for the mnemonic accelerator key.
         * @param use_underline `true` if underlines in the text indicate mnemonics
         */
        set_use_underline(use_underline: boolean): void;

        /**
         * @default null
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable
         */
        get action_name(): string | null;
        set action_name(val: string | null);

        /**
         * @default null
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable
         */
        get actionName(): string | null;
        set actionName(val: string | null);

        /** @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable */
        get action_target(): GLib.Variant;
        set action_target(val: GLib.Variant);

        /** @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable */
        get actionTarget(): GLib.Variant;
        set actionTarget(val: GLib.Variant);

        /**
         * The action that this activatable will activate and receive
         * updates from for various states and possibly appearance.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the this property and
         * > call `gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action()` when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get related_action(): Action;
        set related_action(val: Action);

        /**
         * The action that this activatable will activate and receive
         * updates from for various states and possibly appearance.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the this property and
         * > call `gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action()` when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get relatedAction(): Action;
        set relatedAction(val: Action);

        /**
         * Whether this activatable should reset its layout
         * and appearance when setting the related action or when
         * the action changes appearance.
         * 
         * See the {@link Gtk.Action} documentation directly to find which properties
         * should be ignored by the {@link Gtk.Activatable} when this property is `false`.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle this property
         * > and call `gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties()` on the activatable
         * > widget when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get use_action_appearance(): boolean;
        set use_action_appearance(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether this activatable should reset its layout
         * and appearance when setting the related action or when
         * the action changes appearance.
         * 
         * See the {@link Gtk.Action} documentation directly to find which properties
         * should be ignored by the {@link Gtk.Activatable} when this property is `false`.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle this property
         * > and call `gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties()` on the activatable
         * > widget when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get useActionAppearance(): boolean;
        set useActionAppearance(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Gets the action name for `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_name()` for more information.
         * @returns the action name, or `null` if none is set
         */
        get_action_name(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the current target value of `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_target_value()` for more information.
         * @returns the current target value
         */
        get_action_target_value(): GLib.Variant;

        /**
         * Specifies the name of the action with which this widget should be
         * associated.  If `action_name` is `null` then the widget will be
         * unassociated from any previous action.
         * 
         * Usually this function is used when the widget is located (or will be
         * located) within the hierarchy of a {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow}.
         * 
         * Names are of the form “win.save” or “app.quit” for actions on the
         * containing {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow} or its associated {@link Gtk.Application},
         * respectively.  This is the same form used for actions in the {@link Gio.Menu}
         * associated with the window.
         * @param action_name an action name, or `null`
         */
        set_action_name(action_name: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the target value of an actionable widget.
         * 
         * If `target_value` is `null` then the target value is unset.
         * 
         * The target value has two purposes.  First, it is used as the
         * parameter to activation of the action associated with the
         * {@link Gtk.Actionable} widget. Second, it is used to determine if the widget
         * should be rendered as “active” — the widget is active if the state
         * is equal to the given target.
         * 
         * Consider the example of associating a set of buttons with a {@link Gio.Action}
         * with string state in a typical “radio button” situation.  Each button
         * will be associated with the same action, but with a different target
         * value for that action.  Clicking on a particular button will activate
         * the action with the target of that button, which will typically cause
         * the action’s state to change to that value.  Since the action’s state
         * is now equal to the target value of the button, the button will now
         * be rendered as active (and the other buttons, with different targets,
         * rendered inactive).
         * @param target_value a {@link GLib.Variant} to set as the target value, or `null`
         */
        set_action_target_value(target_value: GLib.Variant | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the action-name and associated string target value of an
         * actionable widget.
         * 
         * `detailed_action_name` is a string in the format accepted by
         * `g_action_parse_detailed_name()`.
         * 
         * (Note that prior to version 3.22.25,
         * this function is only usable for actions with a simple "s" target, and
         * `detailed_action_name` must be of the form `"action::target"` where
         * `action` is the action name and `target` is the string to use
         * as the target.)
         * @param detailed_action_name the detailed action name
         */
        set_detailed_action_name(detailed_action_name: string): void;

        /**
         * Gets the action name for `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_name()` for more information.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_action_name(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the current target value of `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_target_value()` for more information.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_action_target_value(): GLib.Variant;

        /**
         * Specifies the name of the action with which this widget should be
         * associated.  If `action_name` is `null` then the widget will be
         * unassociated from any previous action.
         * 
         * Usually this function is used when the widget is located (or will be
         * located) within the hierarchy of a {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow}.
         * 
         * Names are of the form “win.save” or “app.quit” for actions on the
         * containing {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow} or its associated {@link Gtk.Application},
         * respectively.  This is the same form used for actions in the {@link Gio.Menu}
         * associated with the window.
         * @param action_name an action name, or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_action_name(action_name: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the target value of an actionable widget.
         * 
         * If `target_value` is `null` then the target value is unset.
         * 
         * The target value has two purposes.  First, it is used as the
         * parameter to activation of the action associated with the
         * {@link Gtk.Actionable} widget. Second, it is used to determine if the widget
         * should be rendered as “active” — the widget is active if the state
         * is equal to the given target.
         * 
         * Consider the example of associating a set of buttons with a {@link Gio.Action}
         * with string state in a typical “radio button” situation.  Each button
         * will be associated with the same action, but with a different target
         * value for that action.  Clicking on a particular button will activate
         * the action with the target of that button, which will typically cause
         * the action’s state to change to that value.  Since the action’s state
         * is now equal to the target value of the button, the button will now
         * be rendered as active (and the other buttons, with different targets,
         * rendered inactive).
         * @param target_value a {@link GLib.Variant} to set as the target value, or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_action_target_value(target_value: GLib.Variant | null): void;

        /**
         * This is a utility function for {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors.
         * 
         * When implementing {@link Gtk.Activatable} you must call this when
         * handling changes of the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action}, and
         * you must also use this to break references in {@link GObject.Object}->dispose().
         * 
         * This function adds a reference to the currently set related
         * action for you, it also makes sure the {@link Gtk.Activatable}->update()
         * method is called when the related {@link Gtk.Action} properties change
         * and registers to the action’s proxy list.
         * 
         * > Be careful to call this before setting the local
         * > copy of the {@link Gtk.Action} property, since this function uses
         * > `gtk_activatable_get_related_action()` to retrieve the
         * > previous action.
         * @param action the {@link Gtk.Action} to set
         */
        do_set_related_action(action: Action): void;

        /**
         * Gets the related {@link Gtk.Action} for `activatable`.
         * @returns the related {@link Gtk.Action} if one is set.
         */
        get_related_action(): Action;

        /**
         * Gets whether this activatable should reset its layout
         * and appearance when setting the related action or when
         * the action changes appearance.
         * @returns whether `activatable` uses its actions appearance.
         */
        get_use_action_appearance(): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the related action on the `activatable` object.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action}
         * > property and call `gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action()` when it changes.
         * @param action the {@link Gtk.Action} to set
         */
        set_related_action(action: Action): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether this activatable should reset its layout and appearance
         * when setting the related action or when the action changes appearance
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} property and call
         * > `gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties()` to update `activatable`
         * > if needed.
         * @param use_appearance whether to use the actions appearance
         */
        set_use_action_appearance(use_appearance: boolean): void;

        /**
         * This is called to update the activatable completely, this is called
         * internally when the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action} property is set
         * or unset and by the implementing class when
         * {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} changes.
         * @param action the related {@link Gtk.Action} or `null`
         */
        sync_action_properties(action: Action | null): void;

        /**
         * This is called to update the activatable completely, this is called
         * internally when the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action} property is set
         * or unset and by the implementing class when
         * {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} changes.
         * @param action the related {@link Gtk.Action} or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_sync_action_properties(action: Action | null): void;

        /**
         * Called to update the activatable when its related action’s properties change.
         * You must check the {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} property only apply action
         * properties that are meant to effect the appearance accordingly.
         * @param action 
         * @param property_name 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_update(action: Action, property_name: string): void;

        /**
         * Emits a {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.child_notify | Gtk.Widget::child-notify} signal for the
         * [child property][child-properties] `child_property`
         * on `widget`.
         * 
         * This is the analogue of `g_object_notify()` for child properties.
         * 
         * Also see `gtk_container_child_notify()`.
         * @param child_property the name of a child property installed on the                  class of `widget`’s parent
         */
        child_notify(child_property: string): void;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Gtk.Container.child_notify
        child_notify(...args: never[]): any;
    }


    namespace ButtonAccessible {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends ContainerAccessible.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-layer": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-mdi-zorder": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-help-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-hypertext-nlinks": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption-object": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-summary": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends ContainerAccessible.ConstructorProps, Atk.Action.ConstructorProps, Atk.Component.ConstructorProps, Atk.Image.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class ButtonAccessible extends ContainerAccessible implements Atk.Action, Atk.Component, Atk.Image {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ButtonAccessible>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: ButtonAccessible.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<ButtonAccessible.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof ButtonAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ButtonAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof ButtonAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ButtonAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof ButtonAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<ButtonAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        /**
         * Perform the specified action on the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns `true` if success, `false` otherwise
         */
        do_action(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns a description of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns a description string, or `null` if `action` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_description(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.get_description
        get_description(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Gets the keybinding which can be used to activate this action, if one
         * exists. The string returned should contain localized, human-readable,
         * key sequences as they would appear when displayed on screen. It must
         * be in the format "mnemonic;sequence;shortcut".
         * 
         * - The mnemonic key activates the object if it is presently enabled onscreen.
         *   This typically corresponds to the underlined letter within the widget.
         *   Example: "n" in a traditional "New..." menu item or the "a" in "Apply" for
         *   a button.
         * - The sequence is the full list of keys which invoke the action even if the
         *   relevant element is not currently shown on screen. For instance, for a menu
         *   item the sequence is the keybindings used to open the parent menus before
         *   invoking. The sequence string is colon-delimited. Example: "Alt+F:N" in a
         *   traditional "New..." menu item.
         * - The shortcut, if it exists, will invoke the same action without showing
         *   the component or its enclosing menus or dialogs. Example: "Ctrl+N" in a
         *   traditional "New..." menu item.
         * 
         * Example: For a traditional "New..." menu item, the expected return value
         * would be: "N;Alt+F:N;Ctrl+N" for the English locale and "N;Alt+D:N;Strg+N"
         * for the German locale. If, hypothetically, this menu item lacked a mnemonic,
         * it would be represented by ";;Ctrl+N" and ";;Strg+N" respectively.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns the keybinding which can be used to activate this action, or `null` if there is no keybinding for this action.
         */
        get_keybinding(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Returns the localized name of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns a name string, or `null` if `action` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_localized_name(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the number of accessible actions available on the object.
         * If there are more than one, the first one is considered the
         * "default" action of the object.
         * @returns a the number of actions, or 0 if `action` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_n_actions(): number;

        /**
         * Returns a non-localized string naming the specified action of the
         * object. This name is generally not descriptive of the end result
         * of the action, but instead names the 'interaction type' which the
         * object supports. By convention, the above strings should be used to
         * represent the actions which correspond to the common point-and-click
         * interaction techniques of the same name: i.e.
         * "click", "press", "release", "drag", "drop", "popup", etc.
         * The "popup" action should be used to pop up a context menu for the
         * object, if one exists.
         * 
         * For technical reasons, some toolkits cannot guarantee that the
         * reported action is actually 'bound' to a nontrivial user event;
         * i.e. the result of some actions via `atk_action_do_action()` may be
         * NIL.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns a name string, or `null` if `action` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_name(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.get_name
        get_name(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Sets a description of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @param desc the description to be assigned to this action
         * @returns a gboolean representing if the description was successfully set;
         */
        set_description(i: number, desc: string): boolean;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.set_description
        set_description(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Perform the specified action on the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_do_action(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns a description of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_description(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         * @virtual
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.vfunc_get_description
        vfunc_get_description(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Gets the keybinding which can be used to activate this action, if one
         * exists. The string returned should contain localized, human-readable,
         * key sequences as they would appear when displayed on screen. It must
         * be in the format "mnemonic;sequence;shortcut".
         * 
         * - The mnemonic key activates the object if it is presently enabled onscreen.
         *   This typically corresponds to the underlined letter within the widget.
         *   Example: "n" in a traditional "New..." menu item or the "a" in "Apply" for
         *   a button.
         * - The sequence is the full list of keys which invoke the action even if the
         *   relevant element is not currently shown on screen. For instance, for a menu
         *   item the sequence is the keybindings used to open the parent menus before
         *   invoking. The sequence string is colon-delimited. Example: "Alt+F:N" in a
         *   traditional "New..." menu item.
         * - The shortcut, if it exists, will invoke the same action without showing
         *   the component or its enclosing menus or dialogs. Example: "Ctrl+N" in a
         *   traditional "New..." menu item.
         * 
         * Example: For a traditional "New..." menu item, the expected return value
         * would be: "N;Alt+F:N;Ctrl+N" for the English locale and "N;Alt+D:N;Strg+N"
         * for the German locale. If, hypothetically, this menu item lacked a mnemonic,
         * it would be represented by ";;Ctrl+N" and ";;Strg+N" respectively.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_keybinding(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Returns the localized name of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_localized_name(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the number of accessible actions available on the object.
         * If there are more than one, the first one is considered the
         * "default" action of the object.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_n_actions(): number;

        /**
         * Returns a non-localized string naming the specified action of the
         * object. This name is generally not descriptive of the end result
         * of the action, but instead names the 'interaction type' which the
         * object supports. By convention, the above strings should be used to
         * represent the actions which correspond to the common point-and-click
         * interaction techniques of the same name: i.e.
         * "click", "press", "release", "drag", "drop", "popup", etc.
         * The "popup" action should be used to pop up a context menu for the
         * object, if one exists.
         * 
         * For technical reasons, some toolkits cannot guarantee that the
         * reported action is actually 'bound' to a nontrivial user event;
         * i.e. the result of some actions via `atk_action_do_action()` may be
         * NIL.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_name(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         * @virtual
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.vfunc_get_name
        vfunc_get_name(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Sets a description of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @param desc the description to be assigned to this action
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_description(i: number, desc: string): boolean;

        /**
         * @param args 
         * @virtual
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.vfunc_set_description
        vfunc_set_description(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Get a textual description of this image.
         * @returns a string representing the image description
         */
        get_image_description(): string;

        /**
         * Retrieves the locale identifier associated to the {@link Atk.Image}.
         * @returns a string corresponding to the POSIX   `LC_MESSAGES` locale used by the image description, or   `null` if the image does not specify a locale.
         */
        get_image_locale(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the position of the image in the form of a point specifying the
         * images top-left corner.
         * 
         * If the position can not be obtained (e.g. missing support), x and y are set
         * to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         */
        get_image_position(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number];

        /**
         * Get the width and height in pixels for the specified image.
         * The values of `width` and `height` are returned as -1 if the
         * values cannot be obtained (for instance, if the object is not onscreen).
         * 
         * If the size can not be obtained (e.g. missing support), x and y are set
         * to -1.
         */
        get_image_size(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Sets the textual description for this image.
         * @param description a string description to set for `image`
         * @returns boolean TRUE, or FALSE if operation could not be completed.
         */
        set_image_description(description: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Get a textual description of this image.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_image_description(): string;

        /**
         * Retrieves the locale identifier associated to the {@link Atk.Image}.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_image_locale(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the position of the image in the form of a point specifying the
         * images top-left corner.
         * 
         * If the position can not be obtained (e.g. missing support), x and y are set
         * to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_image_position(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number];

        /**
         * Get the width and height in pixels for the specified image.
         * The values of `width` and `height` are returned as -1 if the
         * values cannot be obtained (for instance, if the object is not onscreen).
         * 
         * If the size can not be obtained (e.g. missing support), x and y are set
         * to -1.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_image_size(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Sets the textual description for this image.
         * @param description a string description to set for `image`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_image_description(description: string): boolean;
    }


    namespace ButtonBox {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Box.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::layout-style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::baseline-position": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::homogeneous": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::spacing": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::orientation": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Box.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, Orientable.ConstructorProps {
            layout_style: ButtonBoxStyle;
            layoutStyle: ButtonBoxStyle;
        }
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class ButtonBox extends Box implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable, Orientable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ButtonBox>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * @default Gtk.ButtonBoxStyle.EDGE
         */
        get layout_style(): ButtonBoxStyle;
        set layout_style(val: ButtonBoxStyle);

        /**
         * @default Gtk.ButtonBoxStyle.EDGE
         */
        get layoutStyle(): ButtonBoxStyle;
        set layoutStyle(val: ButtonBoxStyle);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: ButtonBox.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        box: Box;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<ButtonBox.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](orientation: Orientation): ButtonBox;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof ButtonBox.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ButtonBox.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof ButtonBox.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ButtonBox.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof ButtonBox.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<ButtonBox.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Returns whether the child is exempted from homogenous
         * sizing.
         * @param child a child of `widget`
         * @returns `true` if the child is not subject to homogenous sizing
         */
        get_child_non_homogeneous(child: Widget): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns whether `child` should appear in a secondary group of children.
         * @param child a child of `widget`
         * @returns whether `child` should appear in a secondary group of children.
         */
        get_child_secondary(child: Widget): boolean;

        /**
         * Retrieves the method being used to arrange the buttons in a button box.
         * @returns the method used to lay out buttons in `widget`.
         */
        get_layout(): ButtonBoxStyle;

        /**
         * Sets whether the child is exempted from homogeous sizing.
         * @param child a child of `widget`
         * @param non_homogeneous the new value
         */
        set_child_non_homogeneous(child: Widget, non_homogeneous: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether `child` should appear in a secondary group of children.
         * A typical use of a secondary child is the help button in a dialog.
         * 
         * This group appears after the other children if the style
         * is {@link Gtk.ButtonBoxStyle.START}, {@link Gtk.ButtonBoxStyle.SPREAD} or
         * {@link Gtk.ButtonBoxStyle.EDGE}, and before the other children if the style
         * is {@link Gtk.ButtonBoxStyle.END}. For horizontal button boxes, the definition
         * of before/after depends on direction of the widget (see
         * `gtk_widget_set_direction()`). If the style is {@link Gtk.ButtonBoxStyle.START}
         * or {@link Gtk.ButtonBoxStyle.END}, then the secondary children are aligned at
         * the other end of the button box from the main children. For the
         * other styles, they appear immediately next to the main children.
         * @param child a child of `widget`
         * @param is_secondary if `true`, the `child` appears in a secondary group of the                button box.
         */
        set_child_secondary(child: Widget, is_secondary: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Changes the way buttons are arranged in their container.
         * @param layout_style the new layout style
         */
        set_layout(layout_style: ButtonBoxStyle): void;

        /**
         * The orientation of the orientable.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default Gtk.Orientation.HORIZONTAL
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Orientable
         */
        get orientation(): Orientation;
        set orientation(val: Orientation);

        /**
         * Retrieves the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @returns the orientation of the `orientable`.
         */
        get_orientation(): Orientation;

        /**
         * Sets the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @param orientation the orientable’s new orientation.
         */
        set_orientation(orientation: Orientation): void;
    }


    namespace Calendar {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Widget.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * Emitted when the user selects a day.
             * @signal
             * @run-first
             */
            "day-selected": () => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when the user double-clicks a day.
             * @signal
             * @run-first
             */
            "day-selected-double-click": () => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when the user clicks a button to change the selected month on a
             * calendar.
             * @signal
             * @run-first
             */
            "month-changed": () => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when the user switched to the next month.
             * @signal
             * @run-first
             */
            "next-month": () => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when user switched to the next year.
             * @signal
             * @run-first
             */
            "next-year": () => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when the user switched to the previous month.
             * @signal
             * @run-first
             */
            "prev-month": () => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when user switched to the previous year.
             * @signal
             * @run-first
             */
            "prev-year": () => void;
            "notify::day": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::detail-height-rows": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::detail-width-chars": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::month": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-month-change": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::show-day-names": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::show-details": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::show-heading": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::show-week-numbers": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::year": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Widget.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {
            day: number;
            detail_height_rows: number;
            detailHeightRows: number;
            detail_width_chars: number;
            detailWidthChars: number;
            month: number;
            no_month_change: boolean;
            noMonthChange: boolean;
            show_day_names: boolean;
            showDayNames: boolean;
            show_details: boolean;
            showDetails: boolean;
            show_heading: boolean;
            showHeading: boolean;
            show_week_numbers: boolean;
            showWeekNumbers: boolean;
            year: number;
        }
    }

    /**
     * {@link Gtk.Calendar} is a widget that displays a Gregorian calendar, one month
     * at a time. It can be created with `gtk_calendar_new()`.
     * 
     * The month and year currently displayed can be altered with
     * `gtk_calendar_select_month()`. The exact day can be selected from the
     * displayed month using `gtk_calendar_select_day()`.
     * 
     * To place a visual marker on a particular day, use `gtk_calendar_mark_day()`
     * and to remove the marker, `gtk_calendar_unmark_day()`. Alternative, all
     * marks can be cleared with `gtk_calendar_clear_marks()`.
     * 
     * The way in which the calendar itself is displayed can be altered using
     * `gtk_calendar_set_display_options()`.
     * 
     * The selected date can be retrieved from a {@link Gtk.Calendar} using
     * `gtk_calendar_get_date()`.
     * 
     * Users should be aware that, although the Gregorian calendar is the
     * legal calendar in most countries, it was adopted progressively
     * between 1582 and 1929. Display before these dates is likely to be
     * historically incorrect.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class Calendar extends Widget implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<Calendar>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * The selected day (as a number between 1 and 31, or 0
         * to unselect the currently selected day).
         * This property gets initially set to the current day.
         * @default 0
         */
        get day(): number;
        set day(val: number);

        /**
         * Height of a detail cell, in rows.
         * A value of 0 allows any width. See `gtk_calendar_set_detail_func()`.
         * @since 2.14
         * @default 0
         */
        get detail_height_rows(): number;
        set detail_height_rows(val: number);

        /**
         * Height of a detail cell, in rows.
         * A value of 0 allows any width. See `gtk_calendar_set_detail_func()`.
         * @since 2.14
         * @default 0
         */
        get detailHeightRows(): number;
        set detailHeightRows(val: number);

        /**
         * Width of a detail cell, in characters.
         * A value of 0 allows any width. See `gtk_calendar_set_detail_func()`.
         * @since 2.14
         * @default 0
         */
        get detail_width_chars(): number;
        set detail_width_chars(val: number);

        /**
         * Width of a detail cell, in characters.
         * A value of 0 allows any width. See `gtk_calendar_set_detail_func()`.
         * @since 2.14
         * @default 0
         */
        get detailWidthChars(): number;
        set detailWidthChars(val: number);

        /**
         * The selected month (as a number between 0 and 11).
         * This property gets initially set to the current month.
         * @default 0
         */
        get month(): number;
        set month(val: number);

        /**
         * Determines whether the selected month can be changed.
         * @since 2.4
         * @default false
         */
        get no_month_change(): boolean;
        set no_month_change(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Determines whether the selected month can be changed.
         * @since 2.4
         * @default false
         */
        get noMonthChange(): boolean;
        set noMonthChange(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Determines whether day names are displayed.
         * @since 2.4
         * @default true
         */
        get show_day_names(): boolean;
        set show_day_names(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Determines whether day names are displayed.
         * @since 2.4
         * @default true
         */
        get showDayNames(): boolean;
        set showDayNames(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Determines whether details are shown directly in the widget, or if they are
         * available only as tooltip. When this property is set days with details are
         * marked.
         * @since 2.14
         * @default true
         */
        get show_details(): boolean;
        set show_details(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Determines whether details are shown directly in the widget, or if they are
         * available only as tooltip. When this property is set days with details are
         * marked.
         * @since 2.14
         * @default true
         */
        get showDetails(): boolean;
        set showDetails(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Determines whether a heading is displayed.
         * @since 2.4
         * @default true
         */
        get show_heading(): boolean;
        set show_heading(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Determines whether a heading is displayed.
         * @since 2.4
         * @default true
         */
        get showHeading(): boolean;
        set showHeading(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Determines whether week numbers are displayed.
         * @since 2.4
         * @default false
         */
        get show_week_numbers(): boolean;
        set show_week_numbers(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Determines whether week numbers are displayed.
         * @since 2.4
         * @default false
         */
        get showWeekNumbers(): boolean;
        set showWeekNumbers(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The selected year.
         * This property gets initially set to the current year.
         * @default 0
         */
        get year(): number;
        set year(val: number);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: Calendar.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        widget: Widget;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<Calendar.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): Calendar;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof Calendar.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Calendar.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof Calendar.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Calendar.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof Calendar.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<Calendar.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_day_selected(): void;

        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_day_selected_double_click(): void;

        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_month_changed(): void;

        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_next_month(): void;

        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_next_year(): void;

        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_prev_month(): void;

        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_prev_year(): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Remove all visual markers.
         */
        clear_marks(): void;

        /**
         * Obtains the selected date from a {@link Gtk.Calendar}.
         */
        get_date(): [number, number, number];

        /**
         * Returns if the `day` of the `calendar` is already marked.
         * @param day the day number between 1 and 31.
         * @returns whether the day is marked.
         */
        get_day_is_marked(day: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Queries the height of detail cells, in rows.
         * See {@link Gtk.Calendar.detail_width_chars}.
         * @returns The height of detail cells, in rows.
         */
        get_detail_height_rows(): number;

        /**
         * Queries the width of detail cells, in characters.
         * See {@link Gtk.Calendar.detail_width_chars}.
         * @returns The width of detail cells, in characters.
         */
        get_detail_width_chars(): number;

        /**
         * Returns the current display options of `calendar`.
         * @returns the display options.
         */
        get_display_options(): CalendarDisplayOptions;

        /**
         * Places a visual marker on a particular day.
         * @param day the day number to mark between 1 and 31.
         */
        mark_day(day: number): void;

        /**
         * Selects a day from the current month.
         * @param day the day number between 1 and 31, or 0 to unselect   the currently selected day.
         */
        select_day(day: number): void;

        /**
         * Shifts the calendar to a different month.
         * @param month a month number between 0 and 11.
         * @param year the year the month is in.
         */
        select_month(month: number, year: number): void;

        /**
         * Installs a function which provides Pango markup with detail information
         * for each day. Examples for such details are holidays or appointments. That
         * information is shown below each day when {@link Gtk.Calendar.show_details} is set.
         * A tooltip containing with full detail information is provided, if the entire
         * text should not fit into the details area, or if {@link Gtk.Calendar.show_details}
         * is not set.
         * 
         * The size of the details area can be restricted by setting the
         * {@link Gtk.Calendar.detail_width_chars} and {@link Gtk.Calendar.detail_height_rows}
         * properties.
         * @param func a function providing details for each day.
         */
        set_detail_func(func: CalendarDetailFunc): void;

        /**
         * Updates the height of detail cells.
         * See {@link Gtk.Calendar.detail_height_rows}.
         * @param rows detail height in rows.
         */
        set_detail_height_rows(rows: number): void;

        /**
         * Updates the width of detail cells.
         * See {@link Gtk.Calendar.detail_width_chars}.
         * @param chars detail width in characters.
         */
        set_detail_width_chars(chars: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets display options (whether to display the heading and the month
         * headings).
         * @param flags the display options to set
         */
        set_display_options(flags: CalendarDisplayOptions): void;

        /**
         * Removes the visual marker from a particular day.
         * @param day the day number to unmark between 1 and 31.
         */
        unmark_day(day: number): void;

        /**
         * Adds a child to `buildable`. `type` is an optional string
         * describing how the child should be added.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child to add
         * @param type kind of child or `null`
         */
        add_child(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object, type: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Constructs a child of `buildable` with the name `name`.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} calls this function if a “constructor” has been
         * specified in the UI definition.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param name name of child to construct
         * @returns the constructed child
         */
        construct_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, name: string): T;

        /**
         * This is similar to `gtk_buildable_parser_finished()` but is
         * called once for each custom tag handled by the `buildable`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname the name of the tag
         * @param data user data created in custom_tag_start
         */
        custom_finished(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
         * the buildable.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @param data user data that will be passed in to parser functions
         */
        custom_tag_end(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called for each unknown element under `<child>`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @returns `true` if a object has a custom implementation, `false`          if it doesn't.
         */
        custom_tag_start(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string): [boolean, GLib.MarkupParser, null];

        /**
         * Get the internal child called `childname` of the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param childname name of child
         * @returns the internal child of the buildable object
         */
        get_internal_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, childname: string): T;

        /**
         * Gets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} sets the name based on the
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI]
         * used to construct the `buildable`.
         * @returns the name set with `gtk_buildable_set_name()`
         */
        get_name(): string;

        /**
         * Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI].
         * Note that this will be called once for each time
         * `gtk_builder_add_from_file()` or `gtk_builder_add_from_string()`
         * is called on a builder.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         */
        parser_finished(builder: Builder): void;

        /**
         * Sets the property name `name` to `value` on the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param name name of property
         * @param value value of property
         */
        set_buildable_property(builder: Builder, name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;

        /**
         * Sets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * @param name name to set
         */
        set_name(name: string): void;

        /**
         * Adds a child to `buildable`. `type` is an optional string
         * describing how the child should be added.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child to add
         * @param type kind of child or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add_child(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object, type: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Constructs a child of `buildable` with the name `name`.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} calls this function if a “constructor” has been
         * specified in the UI definition.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param name name of child to construct
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_construct_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, name: string): T;

        /**
         * This is similar to `gtk_buildable_parser_finished()` but is
         * called once for each custom tag handled by the `buildable`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname the name of the tag
         * @param data user data created in custom_tag_start
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_finished(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
         * the buildable.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @param data user data that will be passed in to parser functions
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_tag_end(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called for each unknown element under `<child>`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_tag_start(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string): [boolean, GLib.MarkupParser, never];

        /**
         * Get the internal child called `childname` of the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param childname name of child
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_internal_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, childname: string): T;

        /**
         * Gets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} sets the name based on the
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI]
         * used to construct the `buildable`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_name(): string;

        /**
         * Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI].
         * Note that this will be called once for each time
         * `gtk_builder_add_from_file()` or `gtk_builder_add_from_string()`
         * is called on a builder.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_parser_finished(builder: Builder): void;

        /**
         * Sets the property name `name` to `value` on the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param name name of property
         * @param value value of property
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_buildable_property(builder: Builder, name: string, value: unknown): void;

        /**
         * Sets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * @param name name to set
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_name(name: string): void;
    }


    namespace CellAccessible {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Accessible.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-layer": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-mdi-zorder": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-help-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-hypertext-nlinks": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption-object": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-summary": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Accessible.ConstructorProps, Atk.Action.ConstructorProps, Atk.Component.ConstructorProps, Atk.TableCell.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class CellAccessible extends Accessible implements Atk.Action, Atk.Component, Atk.TableCell {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<CellAccessible>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: CellAccessible.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<CellAccessible.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof CellAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, CellAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof CellAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, CellAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof CellAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<CellAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * @param emit_signal 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_update_cache(emit_signal: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Perform the specified action on the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns `true` if success, `false` otherwise
         */
        do_action(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns a description of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns a description string, or `null` if `action` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_description(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.get_description
        get_description(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Gets the keybinding which can be used to activate this action, if one
         * exists. The string returned should contain localized, human-readable,
         * key sequences as they would appear when displayed on screen. It must
         * be in the format "mnemonic;sequence;shortcut".
         * 
         * - The mnemonic key activates the object if it is presently enabled onscreen.
         *   This typically corresponds to the underlined letter within the widget.
         *   Example: "n" in a traditional "New..." menu item or the "a" in "Apply" for
         *   a button.
         * - The sequence is the full list of keys which invoke the action even if the
         *   relevant element is not currently shown on screen. For instance, for a menu
         *   item the sequence is the keybindings used to open the parent menus before
         *   invoking. The sequence string is colon-delimited. Example: "Alt+F:N" in a
         *   traditional "New..." menu item.
         * - The shortcut, if it exists, will invoke the same action without showing
         *   the component or its enclosing menus or dialogs. Example: "Ctrl+N" in a
         *   traditional "New..." menu item.
         * 
         * Example: For a traditional "New..." menu item, the expected return value
         * would be: "N;Alt+F:N;Ctrl+N" for the English locale and "N;Alt+D:N;Strg+N"
         * for the German locale. If, hypothetically, this menu item lacked a mnemonic,
         * it would be represented by ";;Ctrl+N" and ";;Strg+N" respectively.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns the keybinding which can be used to activate this action, or `null` if there is no keybinding for this action.
         */
        get_keybinding(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Returns the localized name of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns a name string, or `null` if `action` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_localized_name(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the number of accessible actions available on the object.
         * If there are more than one, the first one is considered the
         * "default" action of the object.
         * @returns a the number of actions, or 0 if `action` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_n_actions(): number;

        /**
         * Returns a non-localized string naming the specified action of the
         * object. This name is generally not descriptive of the end result
         * of the action, but instead names the 'interaction type' which the
         * object supports. By convention, the above strings should be used to
         * represent the actions which correspond to the common point-and-click
         * interaction techniques of the same name: i.e.
         * "click", "press", "release", "drag", "drop", "popup", etc.
         * The "popup" action should be used to pop up a context menu for the
         * object, if one exists.
         * 
         * For technical reasons, some toolkits cannot guarantee that the
         * reported action is actually 'bound' to a nontrivial user event;
         * i.e. the result of some actions via `atk_action_do_action()` may be
         * NIL.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns a name string, or `null` if `action` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_name(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.get_name
        get_name(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Sets a description of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @param desc the description to be assigned to this action
         * @returns a gboolean representing if the description was successfully set;
         */
        set_description(i: number, desc: string): boolean;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.set_description
        set_description(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Perform the specified action on the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_do_action(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns a description of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_description(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         * @virtual
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.vfunc_get_description
        vfunc_get_description(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Gets the keybinding which can be used to activate this action, if one
         * exists. The string returned should contain localized, human-readable,
         * key sequences as they would appear when displayed on screen. It must
         * be in the format "mnemonic;sequence;shortcut".
         * 
         * - The mnemonic key activates the object if it is presently enabled onscreen.
         *   This typically corresponds to the underlined letter within the widget.
         *   Example: "n" in a traditional "New..." menu item or the "a" in "Apply" for
         *   a button.
         * - The sequence is the full list of keys which invoke the action even if the
         *   relevant element is not currently shown on screen. For instance, for a menu
         *   item the sequence is the keybindings used to open the parent menus before
         *   invoking. The sequence string is colon-delimited. Example: "Alt+F:N" in a
         *   traditional "New..." menu item.
         * - The shortcut, if it exists, will invoke the same action without showing
         *   the component or its enclosing menus or dialogs. Example: "Ctrl+N" in a
         *   traditional "New..." menu item.
         * 
         * Example: For a traditional "New..." menu item, the expected return value
         * would be: "N;Alt+F:N;Ctrl+N" for the English locale and "N;Alt+D:N;Strg+N"
         * for the German locale. If, hypothetically, this menu item lacked a mnemonic,
         * it would be represented by ";;Ctrl+N" and ";;Strg+N" respectively.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_keybinding(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Returns the localized name of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_localized_name(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the number of accessible actions available on the object.
         * If there are more than one, the first one is considered the
         * "default" action of the object.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_n_actions(): number;

        /**
         * Returns a non-localized string naming the specified action of the
         * object. This name is generally not descriptive of the end result
         * of the action, but instead names the 'interaction type' which the
         * object supports. By convention, the above strings should be used to
         * represent the actions which correspond to the common point-and-click
         * interaction techniques of the same name: i.e.
         * "click", "press", "release", "drag", "drop", "popup", etc.
         * The "popup" action should be used to pop up a context menu for the
         * object, if one exists.
         * 
         * For technical reasons, some toolkits cannot guarantee that the
         * reported action is actually 'bound' to a nontrivial user event;
         * i.e. the result of some actions via `atk_action_do_action()` may be
         * NIL.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_name(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         * @virtual
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.vfunc_get_name
        vfunc_get_name(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Sets a description of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @param desc the description to be assigned to this action
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_description(i: number, desc: string): boolean;

        /**
         * @param args 
         * @virtual
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.vfunc_set_description
        vfunc_set_description(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Checks whether the specified point is within the extent of the `component`.
         * 
         * Toolkit implementor note: ATK provides a default implementation for
         * this virtual method. In general there are little reason to
         * re-implement it.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @returns `true` or `false` indicating whether the specified point is within the extent of the `component` or not
         */
        contains(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the alpha value (i.e. the opacity) for this
         * `component`, on a scale from 0 (fully transparent) to 1.0
         * (fully opaque).
         * @returns An alpha value from 0 to 1.0, inclusive.
         */
        get_alpha(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the rectangle which gives the extent of the `component`.
         * 
         * If the extent can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), all of x, y, width, height are set to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         */
        get_extents(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the layer of the component.
         * @returns an {@link Atk.Layer} which is the layer of the component
         */
        get_layer(): Atk.Layer;

        /**
         * Gets the zorder of the component. The value G_MININT will be returned
         * if the layer of the component is not ATK_LAYER_MDI or ATK_LAYER_WINDOW.
         * @returns a gint which is the zorder of the component, i.e. the depth at which the component is shown in relation to other components in the same container.
         */
        get_mdi_zorder(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the position of `component` in the form of
         * a point specifying `component`'s top-left corner.
         * 
         * If the position can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), x and y are set to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         */
        get_position(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number];

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.TableCell.get_position
        get_position(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Gets the size of the `component` in terms of width and height.
         * 
         * If the size can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), width and height are set to -1.
         */
        get_size(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Grabs focus for this `component`.
         * @returns `true` if successful, `false` otherwise.
         */
        grab_focus(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets a reference to the accessible child, if one exists, at the
         * coordinate point specified by `x` and `y`.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @returns a reference to the accessible child, if one exists
         */
        ref_accessible_at_point(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): Atk.Object | null;

        /**
         * Remove the handler specified by `handler_id` from the list of
         * functions to be executed when this object receives focus events
         * (in or out).
         * @param handler_id the handler id of the focus handler to be removed from `component`
         */
        remove_focus_handler(handler_id: number): void;

        /**
         * Makes `component` visible on the screen by scrolling all necessary parents.
         * 
         * Contrary to atk_component_set_position, this does not actually move
         * `component` in its parent, this only makes the parents scroll so that the
         * object shows up on the screen, given its current position within the parents.
         * @param type specify where the object should be made visible.
         * @returns whether scrolling was successful.
         */
        scroll_to(type: Atk.ScrollType): boolean;

        /**
         * Move the top-left of `component` to a given position of the screen by
         * scrolling all necessary parents.
         * @param coords specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or to the parent object.
         * @param x x-position where to scroll to
         * @param y y-position where to scroll to
         * @returns whether scrolling was successful.
         */
        scroll_to_point(coords: Atk.CoordType, x: number, y: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the extents of `component`.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param width width to set for `component`
         * @param height height to set for `component`
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @returns `true` or `false` whether the extents were set or not
         */
        set_extents(x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the position of `component`.
         * 
         * Contrary to atk_component_scroll_to, this does not trigger any scrolling,
         * this just moves `component` in its parent.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the component's top level window
         * @returns `true` or `false` whether or not the position was set or not
         */
        set_position(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Set the size of the `component` in terms of width and height.
         * @param width width to set for `component`
         * @param height height to set for `component`
         * @returns `true` or `false` whether the size was set or not
         */
        set_size(width: number, height: number): boolean;

        /**
         * @param bounds 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_bounds_changed(bounds: Atk.Rectangle): void;

        /**
         * Checks whether the specified point is within the extent of the `component`.
         * 
         * Toolkit implementor note: ATK provides a default implementation for
         * this virtual method. In general there are little reason to
         * re-implement it.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_contains(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the alpha value (i.e. the opacity) for this
         * `component`, on a scale from 0 (fully transparent) to 1.0
         * (fully opaque).
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_alpha(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the rectangle which gives the extent of the `component`.
         * 
         * If the extent can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), all of x, y, width, height are set to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_extents(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the layer of the component.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_layer(): Atk.Layer;

        /**
         * Gets the zorder of the component. The value G_MININT will be returned
         * if the layer of the component is not ATK_LAYER_MDI or ATK_LAYER_WINDOW.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_mdi_zorder(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the position of `component` in the form of
         * a point specifying `component`'s top-left corner.
         * 
         * If the position can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), x and y are set to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_position(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number];

        /**
         * @param args 
         * @virtual
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.TableCell.vfunc_get_position
        vfunc_get_position(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Gets the size of the `component` in terms of width and height.
         * 
         * If the size can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), width and height are set to -1.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_size(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Grabs focus for this `component`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_grab_focus(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets a reference to the accessible child, if one exists, at the
         * coordinate point specified by `x` and `y`.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_ref_accessible_at_point(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): Atk.Object | null;

        /**
         * Remove the handler specified by `handler_id` from the list of
         * functions to be executed when this object receives focus events
         * (in or out).
         * @param handler_id the handler id of the focus handler to be removed from `component`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_remove_focus_handler(handler_id: number): void;

        /**
         * Makes `component` visible on the screen by scrolling all necessary parents.
         * 
         * Contrary to atk_component_set_position, this does not actually move
         * `component` in its parent, this only makes the parents scroll so that the
         * object shows up on the screen, given its current position within the parents.
         * @param type specify where the object should be made visible.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_scroll_to(type: Atk.ScrollType): boolean;

        /**
         * Move the top-left of `component` to a given position of the screen by
         * scrolling all necessary parents.
         * @param coords specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or to the parent object.
         * @param x x-position where to scroll to
         * @param y y-position where to scroll to
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_scroll_to_point(coords: Atk.CoordType, x: number, y: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the extents of `component`.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param width width to set for `component`
         * @param height height to set for `component`
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_extents(x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the position of `component`.
         * 
         * Contrary to atk_component_scroll_to, this does not trigger any scrolling,
         * this just moves `component` in its parent.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the component's top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_position(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Set the size of the `component` in terms of width and height.
         * @param width width to set for `component`
         * @param height height to set for `component`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_size(width: number, height: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the column headers as an array of cell accessibles.
         * @returns a GPtrArray of AtkObjects representing the column header cells.
         */
        get_column_header_cells(): Atk.Object[];

        /**
         * Returns the number of columns occupied by this cell accessible.
         * @returns a gint representing the number of columns occupied by this cell, or 0 if the cell does not implement this method.
         */
        get_column_span(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the row and column indexes and span of this cell accessible.
         * 
         * Note: If the object does not implement this function, then, by default, atk
         * will implement this function by calling get_row_span and get_column_span
         * on the object.
         * @returns TRUE if successful; FALSE otherwise.
         */
        get_row_column_span(): [boolean, number, number, number, number];

        /**
         * Returns the row headers as an array of cell accessibles.
         * @returns a GPtrArray of AtkObjects representing the row header cells.
         */
        get_row_header_cells(): Atk.Object[];

        /**
         * Returns the number of rows occupied by this cell accessible.
         * @returns a gint representing the number of rows occupied by this cell, or 0 if the cell does not implement this method.
         */
        get_row_span(): number;

        /**
         * Returns a reference to the accessible of the containing table.
         * @returns the atk object for the containing table.
         */
        get_table(): Atk.Object;

        /**
         * Returns the column headers as an array of cell accessibles.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_column_header_cells(): Atk.Object[];

        /**
         * Returns the number of columns occupied by this cell accessible.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_column_span(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the row and column indexes and span of this cell accessible.
         * 
         * Note: If the object does not implement this function, then, by default, atk
         * will implement this function by calling get_row_span and get_column_span
         * on the object.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_row_column_span(): [boolean, number, number, number, number];

        /**
         * Returns the row headers as an array of cell accessibles.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_row_header_cells(): Atk.Object[];

        /**
         * Returns the number of rows occupied by this cell accessible.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_row_span(): number;

        /**
         * Returns a reference to the accessible of the containing table.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_table(): Atk.Object;
    }


    namespace CellArea {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends GObject.InitiallyUnowned.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * Indicates that editing has started on `renderer` and that `editable`
             * should be added to the owning cell-layouting widget at `cell_area`.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.0
             * @run-first
             */
            "add-editable": (arg0: CellRenderer, arg1: CellEditable, arg2: Gdk.Rectangle, arg3: string) => void;
            /**
             * This signal is emitted whenever applying attributes to `area` from `model`
             * @signal
             * @since 3.0
             * @run-first
             */
            "apply-attributes": (arg0: TreeModel, arg1: TreeIter, arg2: boolean, arg3: boolean) => void;
            /**
             * Indicates that focus changed on this `area`. This signal
             * is emitted either as a result of focus handling or event
             * handling.
             * 
             * It's possible that the signal is emitted even if the
             * currently focused renderer did not change, this is
             * because focus may change to the same renderer in the
             * same cell area for a different row of data.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.0
             * @run-first
             */
            "focus-changed": (arg0: CellRenderer, arg1: string) => void;
            /**
             * Indicates that editing finished on `renderer` and that `editable`
             * should be removed from the owning cell-layouting widget.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.0
             * @run-first
             */
            "remove-editable": (arg0: CellRenderer, arg1: CellEditable) => void;
            "notify::edit-widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::edited-cell": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-cell": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.InitiallyUnowned.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, CellLayout.ConstructorProps {
            edit_widget: CellEditable;
            editWidget: CellEditable;
            edited_cell: CellRenderer;
            editedCell: CellRenderer;
            focus_cell: CellRenderer;
            focusCell: CellRenderer;
        }
    }

    /**
     * The {@link Gtk.CellArea} is an abstract class for {@link Gtk.CellLayout} widgets
     * (also referred to as "layouting widgets") to interface with an
     * arbitrary number of `GtkCellRenderers` and interact with the user
     * for a given {@link Gtk.TreeModel} row.
     * 
     * The cell area handles events, focus navigation, drawing and
     * size requests and allocations for a given row of data.
     * 
     * Usually users dont have to interact with the {@link Gtk.CellArea} directly
     * unless they are implementing a cell-layouting widget themselves.
     * 
     * # Requesting area sizes
     * 
     * As outlined in
     * [GtkWidget’s geometry management section][geometry-management],
     * GTK+ uses a height-for-width
     * geometry management system to compute the sizes of widgets and user
     * interfaces. {@link Gtk.CellArea} uses the same semantics to calculate the
     * size of an area for an arbitrary number of {@link Gtk.TreeModel} rows.
     * 
     * When requesting the size of a cell area one needs to calculate
     * the size for a handful of rows, and this will be done differently by
     * different layouting widgets. For instance a {@link Gtk.TreeViewColumn}
     * always lines up the areas from top to bottom while a {@link Gtk.IconView}
     * on the other hand might enforce that all areas received the same
     * width and wrap the areas around, requesting height for more cell
     * areas when allocated less width.
     * 
     * It’s also important for areas to maintain some cell
     * alignments with areas rendered for adjacent rows (cells can
     * appear “columnized” inside an area even when the size of
     * cells are different in each row). For this reason the {@link Gtk.CellArea}
     * uses a {@link Gtk.CellAreaContext} object to store the alignments
     * and sizes along the way (as well as the overall largest minimum
     * and natural size for all the rows which have been calculated
     * with the said context).
     * 
     * The {@link Gtk.CellAreaContext} is an opaque object specific to the
     * {@link Gtk.CellArea} which created it (see `gtk_cell_area_create_context()`).
     * The owning cell-layouting widget can create as many contexts as
     * it wishes to calculate sizes of rows which should receive the
     * same size in at least one orientation (horizontally or vertically),
     * However, it’s important that the same {@link Gtk.CellAreaContext} which
     * was used to request the sizes for a given {@link Gtk.TreeModel} row be
     * used when rendering or processing events for that row.
     * 
     * In order to request the width of all the rows at the root level
     * of a {@link Gtk.TreeModel} one would do the following:
     * 
     * 
     * ```c
     * GtkTreeIter iter;
     * gint        minimum_width;
     * gint        natural_width;
     * 
     * valid = gtk_tree_model_get_iter_first (model, &iter);
     * while (valid)
     *   {
     *     gtk_cell_area_apply_attributes (area, model, &iter, FALSE, FALSE);
     *     gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_width (area, context, widget, NULL, NULL);
     * 
     *     valid = gtk_tree_model_iter_next (model, &iter);
     *   }
     * gtk_cell_area_context_get_preferred_width (context, &minimum_width, &natural_width);
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * Note that in this example it’s not important to observe the
     * returned minimum and natural width of the area for each row
     * unless the cell-layouting object is actually interested in the
     * widths of individual rows. The overall width is however stored
     * in the accompanying {@link Gtk.CellAreaContext} object and can be consulted
     * at any time.
     * 
     * This can be useful since {@link Gtk.CellLayout} widgets usually have to
     * support requesting and rendering rows in treemodels with an
     * exceedingly large amount of rows. The {@link Gtk.CellLayout} widget in
     * that case would calculate the required width of the rows in an
     * idle or timeout source (see `g_timeout_add()`) and when the widget
     * is requested its actual width in {@link Gtk.WidgetClass}.get_preferred_width()
     * it can simply consult the width accumulated so far in the
     * {@link Gtk.CellAreaContext} object.
     * 
     * A simple example where rows are rendered from top to bottom and
     * take up the full width of the layouting widget would look like:
     * 
     * 
     * ```c
     * static void
     * foo_get_preferred_width (GtkWidget       *widget,
     *                          gint            *minimum_size,
     *                          gint            *natural_size)
     * {
     *   Foo        *foo  = FOO (widget);
     *   FooPrivate *priv = foo->priv;
     * 
     *   foo_ensure_at_least_one_handfull_of_rows_have_been_requested (foo);
     * 
     *   gtk_cell_area_context_get_preferred_width (priv->context, minimum_size, natural_size);
     * }
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * In the above example the Foo widget has to make sure that some
     * row sizes have been calculated (the amount of rows that Foo judged
     * was appropriate to request space for in a single timeout iteration)
     * before simply returning the amount of space required by the area via
     * the {@link Gtk.CellAreaContext}.
     * 
     * Requesting the height for width (or width for height) of an area is
     * a similar task except in this case the {@link Gtk.CellAreaContext} does not
     * store the data (actually, it does not know how much space the layouting
     * widget plans to allocate it for every row. It’s up to the layouting
     * widget to render each row of data with the appropriate height and
     * width which was requested by the {@link Gtk.CellArea}).
     * 
     * In order to request the height for width of all the rows at the
     * root level of a {@link Gtk.TreeModel} one would do the following:
     * 
     * 
     * ```c
     * GtkTreeIter iter;
     * gint        minimum_height;
     * gint        natural_height;
     * gint        full_minimum_height = 0;
     * gint        full_natural_height = 0;
     * 
     * valid = gtk_tree_model_get_iter_first (model, &iter);
     * while (valid)
     *   {
     *     gtk_cell_area_apply_attributes (area, model, &iter, FALSE, FALSE);
     *     gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_height_for_width (area, context, widget,
     *                                                   width, &minimum_height, &natural_height);
     * 
     *     if (width_is_for_allocation)
     *        cache_row_height (&iter, minimum_height, natural_height);
     * 
     *     full_minimum_height += minimum_height;
     *     full_natural_height += natural_height;
     * 
     *     valid = gtk_tree_model_iter_next (model, &iter);
     *   }
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * Note that in the above example we would need to cache the heights
     * returned for each row so that we would know what sizes to render the
     * areas for each row. However we would only want to really cache the
     * heights if the request is intended for the layouting widgets real
     * allocation.
     * 
     * In some cases the layouting widget is requested the height for an
     * arbitrary for_width, this is a special case for layouting widgets
     * who need to request size for tens of thousands  of rows. For this
     * case it’s only important that the layouting widget calculate
     * one reasonably sized chunk of rows and return that height
     * synchronously. The reasoning here is that any layouting widget is
     * at least capable of synchronously calculating enough height to fill
     * the screen height (or scrolled window height) in response to a single
     * call to {@link Gtk.WidgetClass}.get_preferred_height_for_width(). Returning
     * a perfect height for width that is larger than the screen area is
     * inconsequential since after the layouting receives an allocation
     * from a scrolled window it simply continues to drive the scrollbar
     * values while more and more height is required for the row heights
     * that are calculated in the background.
     * 
     * # Rendering Areas
     * 
     * Once area sizes have been aquired at least for the rows in the
     * visible area of the layouting widget they can be rendered at
     * {@link Gtk.WidgetClass}.draw() time.
     * 
     * A crude example of how to render all the rows at the root level
     * runs as follows:
     * 
     * 
     * ```c
     * GtkAllocation allocation;
     * GdkRectangle  cell_area = { 0, };
     * GtkTreeIter   iter;
     * gint          minimum_width;
     * gint          natural_width;
     * 
     * gtk_widget_get_allocation (widget, &allocation);
     * cell_area.width = allocation.width;
     * 
     * valid = gtk_tree_model_get_iter_first (model, &iter);
     * while (valid)
     *   {
     *     cell_area.height = get_cached_height_for_row (&iter);
     * 
     *     gtk_cell_area_apply_attributes (area, model, &iter, FALSE, FALSE);
     *     gtk_cell_area_render (area, context, widget, cr,
     *                           &cell_area, &cell_area, state_flags, FALSE);
     * 
     *     cell_area.y += cell_area.height;
     * 
     *     valid = gtk_tree_model_iter_next (model, &iter);
     *   }
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * Note that the cached height in this example really depends on how
     * the layouting widget works. The layouting widget might decide to
     * give every row its minimum or natural height or, if the model content
     * is expected to fit inside the layouting widget without scrolling, it
     * would make sense to calculate the allocation for each row at
     * {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.size_allocate | Gtk.Widget::size-allocate} time using `gtk_distribute_natural_allocation()`.
     * 
     * # Handling Events and Driving Keyboard Focus
     * 
     * Passing events to the area is as simple as handling events on any
     * normal widget and then passing them to the `gtk_cell_area_event()`
     * API as they come in. Usually {@link Gtk.CellArea} is only interested in
     * button events, however some customized derived areas can be implemented
     * who are interested in handling other events. Handling an event can
     * trigger the {@link Gtk.CellArea.SignalSignatures.focus_changed | Gtk.CellArea::focus-changed} signal to fire; as well as
     * {@link Gtk.CellArea.SignalSignatures.add_editable | Gtk.CellArea::add-editable} in the case that an editable cell was
     * clicked and needs to start editing. You can call
     * `gtk_cell_area_stop_editing()` at any time to cancel any cell editing
     * that is currently in progress.
     * 
     * The {@link Gtk.CellArea} drives keyboard focus from cell to cell in a way
     * similar to {@link Gtk.Widget}. For layouting widgets that support giving
     * focus to cells it’s important to remember to pass {@link Gtk.CellRendererState.FOCUSED}
     * to the area functions for the row that has focus and to tell the
     * area to paint the focus at render time.
     * 
     * Layouting widgets that accept focus on cells should implement the
     * {@link Gtk.WidgetClass}.focus() virtual method. The layouting widget is always
     * responsible for knowing where {@link Gtk.TreeModel} rows are rendered inside
     * the widget, so at {@link Gtk.WidgetClass}.focus() time the layouting widget
     * should use the {@link Gtk.CellArea} methods to navigate focus inside the area
     * and then observe the GtkDirectionType to pass the focus to adjacent
     * rows and areas.
     * 
     * A basic example of how the {@link Gtk.WidgetClass}.focus() virtual method
     * should be implemented:
     * 
     * 
     * ```c
     * static gboolean
     * foo_focus (GtkWidget       *widget,
     *            GtkDirectionType direction)
     * {
     *   Foo        *foo  = FOO (widget);
     *   FooPrivate *priv = foo->priv;
     *   gint        focus_row;
     *   gboolean    have_focus = FALSE;
     * 
     *   focus_row = priv->focus_row;
     * 
     *   if (!gtk_widget_has_focus (widget))
     *     gtk_widget_grab_focus (widget);
     * 
     *   valid = gtk_tree_model_iter_nth_child (priv->model, &iter, NULL, priv->focus_row);
     *   while (valid)
     *     {
     *       gtk_cell_area_apply_attributes (priv->area, priv->model, &iter, FALSE, FALSE);
     * 
     *       if (gtk_cell_area_focus (priv->area, direction))
     *         {
     *            priv->focus_row = focus_row;
     *            have_focus = TRUE;
     *            break;
     *         }
     *       else
     *         {
     *           if (direction == GTK_DIR_RIGHT ||
     *               direction == GTK_DIR_LEFT)
     *             break;
     *           else if (direction == GTK_DIR_UP ||
     *                    direction == GTK_DIR_TAB_BACKWARD)
     *            {
     *               if (focus_row == 0)
     *                 break;
     *               else
     *                {
     *                   focus_row--;
     *                   valid = gtk_tree_model_iter_nth_child (priv->model, &iter, NULL, focus_row);
     *                }
     *             }
     *           else
     *             {
     *               if (focus_row == last_row)
     *                 break;
     *               else
     *                 {
     *                   focus_row++;
     *                   valid = gtk_tree_model_iter_next (priv->model, &iter);
     *                 }
     *             }
     *         }
     *     }
     *     return have_focus;
     * }
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * Note that the layouting widget is responsible for matching the
     * GtkDirectionType values to the way it lays out its cells.
     * 
     * # Cell Properties
     * 
     * The {@link Gtk.CellArea} introduces cell properties for `GtkCellRenderers`
     * in very much the same way that {@link Gtk.Container} introduces
     * [child properties][child-properties]
     * for `GtkWidgets`. This provides some general interfaces for defining
     * the relationship cell areas have with their cells. For instance in a
     * {@link Gtk.CellAreaBox} a cell might “expand” and receive extra space when
     * the area is allocated more than its full natural request, or a cell
     * might be configured to “align” with adjacent rows which were requested
     * and rendered with the same {@link Gtk.CellAreaContext}.
     * 
     * Use `gtk_cell_area_class_install_cell_property()` to install cell
     * properties for a cell area class and `gtk_cell_area_class_find_cell_property()`
     * or `gtk_cell_area_class_list_cell_properties()` to get information about
     * existing cell properties.
     * 
     * To set the value of a cell property, use `gtk_cell_area_cell_set_property()`,
     * `gtk_cell_area_cell_set()` or `gtk_cell_area_cell_set_valist()`. To obtain
     * the value of a cell property, use `gtk_cell_area_cell_get_property()`,
     * `gtk_cell_area_cell_get()` or `gtk_cell_area_cell_get_valist()`.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    abstract class CellArea extends GObject.InitiallyUnowned implements Buildable, CellLayout {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<CellArea>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * The widget currently editing the edited cell
         * 
         * This property is read-only and only changes as
         * a result of a call `gtk_cell_area_activate_cell()`.
         * @since 3.0
         * @read-only
         */
        get edit_widget(): CellEditable;

        /**
         * The widget currently editing the edited cell
         * 
         * This property is read-only and only changes as
         * a result of a call `gtk_cell_area_activate_cell()`.
         * @since 3.0
         * @read-only
         */
        get editWidget(): CellEditable;

        /**
         * The cell in the area that is currently edited
         * 
         * This property is read-only and only changes as
         * a result of a call `gtk_cell_area_activate_cell()`.
         * @since 3.0
         * @read-only
         */
        get edited_cell(): CellRenderer;

        /**
         * The cell in the area that is currently edited
         * 
         * This property is read-only and only changes as
         * a result of a call `gtk_cell_area_activate_cell()`.
         * @since 3.0
         * @read-only
         */
        get editedCell(): CellRenderer;

        /**
         * The cell in the area that currently has focus
         * @since 3.0
         */
        get focus_cell(): CellRenderer;
        set focus_cell(val: CellRenderer);

        /**
         * The cell in the area that currently has focus
         * @since 3.0
         */
        get focusCell(): CellRenderer;
        set focusCell(val: CellRenderer);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: CellArea.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<CellArea.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof CellArea.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, CellArea.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof CellArea.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, CellArea.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof CellArea.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<CellArea.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Static methods
        /**
         * @param property_name the name of the child property to find
         */
        static find_cell_property(property_name: string): GObject.ParamSpec;

        /**
         * @param property_id the id for the property
         * @param pspec the {@link GObject.ParamSpec} for the property
         */
        static install_cell_property(property_id: number, pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;

        static list_cell_properties(): GObject.ParamSpec[];

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * Activates `area`, usually by activating the currently focused
         * cell, however some subclasses which embed widgets in the area
         * can also activate a widget if it currently has the focus.
         * @param context the {@link Gtk.CellAreaContext} in context with the current row data
         * @param widget the {@link Gtk.Widget} that `area` is rendering on
         * @param cell_area the size and location of `area` relative to `widget`’s allocation
         * @param flags the {@link Gtk.CellRendererState} flags for `area` for this row of data.
         * @param edit_only if `true` then only cell renderers that are {@link Gtk.CellRendererMode.EDITABLE}             will be activated.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_activate(context: CellAreaContext, widget: Widget, cell_area: Gdk.Rectangle, flags: CellRendererState, edit_only: boolean): boolean;

        /**
         * Adds `renderer` to `area` with the default child cell properties.
         * @param renderer the {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} to add to `area`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add(renderer: CellRenderer): void;

        /**
         * Applies any connected attributes to the renderers in
         * `area` by pulling the values from `tree_model`.
         * @param tree_model the {@link Gtk.TreeModel} to pull values from
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter} in `tree_model` to apply values for
         * @param is_expander whether `iter` has children
         * @param is_expanded whether `iter` is expanded in the view and               children are visible
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_apply_attributes(tree_model: TreeModel, iter: TreeIter, is_expander: boolean, is_expanded: boolean): void;

        /**
         * This is sometimes needed for cases where rows need to share
         * alignments in one orientation but may be separately grouped
         * in the opposing orientation.
         * 
         * For instance, {@link Gtk.IconView} creates all icons (rows) to have
         * the same width and the cells theirin to have the same
         * horizontal alignments. However each row of icons may have
         * a separate collective height. {@link Gtk.IconView} uses this to
         * request the heights of each row based on a context which
         * was already used to request all the row widths that are
         * to be displayed.
         * @param context the {@link Gtk.CellAreaContext} to copy
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_copy_context(context: CellAreaContext): CellAreaContext;

        /**
         * Creates a {@link Gtk.CellAreaContext} to be used with `area` for
         * all purposes. {@link Gtk.CellAreaContext} stores geometry information
         * for rows for which it was operated on, it is important to use
         * the same context for the same row of data at all times (i.e.
         * one should render and handle events with the same {@link Gtk.CellAreaContext}
         * which was used to request the size of those rows of data).
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_create_context(): CellAreaContext;

        /**
         * Delegates event handling to a {@link Gtk.CellArea}.
         * @param context the {@link Gtk.CellAreaContext} for this row of data.
         * @param widget the {@link Gtk.Widget} that `area` is rendering to
         * @param event the {@link Gdk.Event} to handle
         * @param cell_area the `widget` relative coordinates for `area`
         * @param flags the {@link Gtk.CellRendererState} for `area` in this row.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_event(context: CellAreaContext, widget: Widget, event: Gdk.Event, cell_area: Gdk.Rectangle, flags: CellRendererState): number;

        /**
         * This should be called by the `area`’s owning layout widget
         * when focus is to be passed to `area`, or moved within `area`
         * for a given `direction` and row data.
         * 
         * Implementing {@link Gtk.CellArea} classes should implement this
         * method to receive and navigate focus in its own way particular
         * to how it lays out cells.
         * @param direction the {@link Gtk.DirectionType}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_focus(direction: DirectionType): boolean;

        /**
         * Calls `callback` for every {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} in `area`.
         * @param callback the {@link Gtk.CellCallback} to call
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_foreach(callback: CellCallback): void;

        /**
         * Calls `callback` for every {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} in `area` with the
         * allocated rectangle inside `cell_area`.
         * @param context the {@link Gtk.CellAreaContext} for this row of data.
         * @param widget the {@link Gtk.Widget} that `area` is rendering to
         * @param cell_area the `widget` relative coordinates and size for `area`
         * @param background_area the `widget` relative coordinates of the background area
         * @param callback the {@link Gtk.CellAllocCallback} to call
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_foreach_alloc(context: CellAreaContext, widget: Widget, cell_area: Gdk.Rectangle, background_area: Gdk.Rectangle, callback: CellAllocCallback): void;

        /**
         * This should be implemented to report the values of
         *     child cell properties for a given child {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}.
         * @param renderer 
         * @param property_id 
         * @param value 
         * @param pspec 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_cell_property(renderer: CellRenderer, property_id: number, value: unknown, pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;

        /**
         * Retrieves a cell area’s initial minimum and natural height.
         * 
         * `area` will store some geometrical information in `context` along the way;
         * when requesting sizes over an arbitrary number of rows, it’s not important
         * to check the `minimum_height` and `natural_height` of this call but rather to
         * consult `gtk_cell_area_context_get_preferred_height()` after a series of
         * requests.
         * @param context the {@link Gtk.CellAreaContext} to perform this request with
         * @param widget the {@link Gtk.Widget} where `area` will be rendering
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_preferred_height(context: CellAreaContext, widget: Widget): [number, number];

        /**
         * Retrieves a cell area’s minimum and natural height if it would be given
         * the specified `width`.
         * 
         * `area` stores some geometrical information in `context` along the way
         * while calling `gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_width()`. It’s important to
         * perform a series of `gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_width()` requests with
         * `context` first and then call `gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_height_for_width()`
         * on each cell area individually to get the height for width of each
         * fully requested row.
         * 
         * If at some point, the width of a single row changes, it should be
         * requested with `gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_width()` again and then
         * the full width of the requested rows checked again with
         * `gtk_cell_area_context_get_preferred_width()`.
         * @param context the {@link Gtk.CellAreaContext} which has already been requested for widths.
         * @param widget the {@link Gtk.Widget} where `area` will be rendering
         * @param width the width for which to check the height of this area
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_preferred_height_for_width(context: CellAreaContext, widget: Widget, width: number): [number, number];

        /**
         * Retrieves a cell area’s initial minimum and natural width.
         * 
         * `area` will store some geometrical information in `context` along the way;
         * when requesting sizes over an arbitrary number of rows, it’s not important
         * to check the `minimum_width` and `natural_width` of this call but rather to
         * consult `gtk_cell_area_context_get_preferred_width()` after a series of
         * requests.
         * @param context the {@link Gtk.CellAreaContext} to perform this request with
         * @param widget the {@link Gtk.Widget} where `area` will be rendering
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_preferred_width(context: CellAreaContext, widget: Widget): [number, number];

        /**
         * Retrieves a cell area’s minimum and natural width if it would be given
         * the specified `height`.
         * 
         * `area` stores some geometrical information in `context` along the way
         * while calling `gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_height()`. It’s important to
         * perform a series of `gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_height()` requests with
         * `context` first and then call `gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_width_for_height()`
         * on each cell area individually to get the height for width of each
         * fully requested row.
         * 
         * If at some point, the height of a single row changes, it should be
         * requested with `gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_height()` again and then
         * the full height of the requested rows checked again with
         * `gtk_cell_area_context_get_preferred_height()`.
         * @param context the {@link Gtk.CellAreaContext} which has already been requested for widths.
         * @param widget the {@link Gtk.Widget} where `area` will be rendering
         * @param height the height for which to check the width of this area
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_preferred_width_for_height(context: CellAreaContext, widget: Widget, height: number): [number, number];

        /**
         * Gets whether the area prefers a height-for-width layout
         * or a width-for-height layout.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_request_mode(): SizeRequestMode;

        /**
         * Returns whether the area can do anything when activated,
         * after applying new attributes to `area`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_is_activatable(): boolean;

        /**
         * Removes `renderer` from `area`.
         * @param renderer the {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} to remove from `area`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_remove(renderer: CellRenderer): void;

        /**
         * Renders `area`’s cells according to `area`’s layout onto `widget` at
         * the given coordinates.
         * @param context the {@link Gtk.CellAreaContext} for this row of data.
         * @param widget the {@link Gtk.Widget} that `area` is rendering to
         * @param cr the {@link cairo.Context} to render with
         * @param background_area the `widget` relative coordinates for `area`’s background
         * @param cell_area the `widget` relative coordinates for `area`
         * @param flags the {@link Gtk.CellRendererState} for `area` in this row.
         * @param paint_focus whether `area` should paint focus on focused cells for focused rows or not.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_render(context: CellAreaContext, widget: Widget, cr: cairo.Context, background_area: Gdk.Rectangle, cell_area: Gdk.Rectangle, flags: CellRendererState, paint_focus: boolean): void;

        /**
         * This should be implemented to handle changes in child
         *     cell properties for a given {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} that were previously
         *     installed on the {@link Gtk.CellAreaClass} with `gtk_cell_area_class_install_cell_property()`.
         * @param renderer 
         * @param property_id 
         * @param value 
         * @param pspec 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_cell_property(renderer: CellRenderer, property_id: number, value: unknown, pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Activates `area`, usually by activating the currently focused
         * cell, however some subclasses which embed widgets in the area
         * can also activate a widget if it currently has the focus.
         * @param context the {@link Gtk.CellAreaContext} in context with the current row data
         * @param widget the {@link Gtk.Widget} that `area` is rendering on
         * @param cell_area the size and location of `area` relative to `widget`’s allocation
         * @param flags the {@link Gtk.CellRendererState} flags for `area` for this row of data.
         * @param edit_only if `true` then only cell renderers that are {@link Gtk.CellRendererMode.EDITABLE}             will be activated.
         * @returns Whether `area` was successfully activated.
         */
        activate(context: CellAreaContext, widget: Widget, cell_area: Gdk.Rectangle, flags: CellRendererState, edit_only: boolean): boolean;

        /**
         * This is used by {@link Gtk.CellArea} subclasses when handling events
         * to activate cells, the base {@link Gtk.CellArea} class activates cells
         * for keyboard events for free in its own GtkCellArea->activate()
         * implementation.
         * @param widget the {@link Gtk.Widget} that `area` is rendering onto
         * @param renderer the {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} in `area` to activate
         * @param event the {@link Gdk.Event} for which cell activation should occur
         * @param cell_area the {@link Gdk.Rectangle} in `widget` relative coordinates             of `renderer` for the current row.
         * @param flags the {@link Gtk.CellRendererState} for `renderer`
         * @returns whether cell activation was successful
         */
        activate_cell(widget: Widget, renderer: CellRenderer, event: Gdk.Event, cell_area: Gdk.Rectangle, flags: CellRendererState): boolean;

        /**
         * Adds `renderer` to `area` with the default child cell properties.
         * @param renderer the {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} to add to `area`
         */
        add(renderer: CellRenderer): void;

        /**
         * Adds `sibling` to `renderer`’s focusable area, focus will be drawn
         * around `renderer` and all of its siblings if `renderer` can
         * focus for a given row.
         * 
         * Events handled by focus siblings can also activate the given
         * focusable `renderer`.
         * @param renderer the {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} expected to have focus
         * @param sibling the {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} to add to `renderer`’s focus area
         */
        add_focus_sibling(renderer: CellRenderer, sibling: CellRenderer): void;

        /**
         * Applies any connected attributes to the renderers in
         * `area` by pulling the values from `tree_model`.
         * @param tree_model the {@link Gtk.TreeModel} to pull values from
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter} in `tree_model` to apply values for
         * @param is_expander whether `iter` has children
         * @param is_expanded whether `iter` is expanded in the view and               children are visible
         */
        apply_attributes(tree_model: TreeModel, iter: TreeIter, is_expander: boolean, is_expanded: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Connects an `attribute` to apply values from `column` for the
         * {@link Gtk.TreeModel} in use.
         * @param renderer the {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} to connect an attribute for
         * @param attribute the attribute name
         * @param column the {@link Gtk.TreeModel} column to fetch attribute values from
         */
        attribute_connect(renderer: CellRenderer, attribute: string, column: number): void;

        /**
         * Disconnects `attribute` for the `renderer` in `area` so that
         * attribute will no longer be updated with values from the
         * model.
         * @param renderer the {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} to disconnect an attribute for
         * @param attribute the attribute name
         */
        attribute_disconnect(renderer: CellRenderer, attribute: string): void;

        /**
         * Returns the model column that an attribute has been mapped to,
         * or -1 if the attribute is not mapped.
         * @param renderer a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param attribute an attribute on the renderer
         * @returns the model column, or -1
         */
        attribute_get_column(renderer: CellRenderer, attribute: string): number;

        /**
         * Gets the value of a cell property for `renderer` in `area`.
         * @param renderer a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} inside `area`
         * @param property_name the name of the property to get
         * @param value a location to return the value
         */
        cell_get_property(renderer: CellRenderer, property_name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;

        /**
         * Sets a cell property for `renderer` in `area`.
         * @param renderer a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} inside `area`
         * @param property_name the name of the cell property to set
         * @param value the value to set the cell property to
         */
        cell_set_property(renderer: CellRenderer, property_name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;

        /**
         * This is sometimes needed for cases where rows need to share
         * alignments in one orientation but may be separately grouped
         * in the opposing orientation.
         * 
         * For instance, {@link Gtk.IconView} creates all icons (rows) to have
         * the same width and the cells theirin to have the same
         * horizontal alignments. However each row of icons may have
         * a separate collective height. {@link Gtk.IconView} uses this to
         * request the heights of each row based on a context which
         * was already used to request all the row widths that are
         * to be displayed.
         * @param context the {@link Gtk.CellAreaContext} to copy
         * @returns a newly created {@link Gtk.CellAreaContext} copy of `context`.
         */
        copy_context(context: CellAreaContext): CellAreaContext;

        /**
         * Creates a {@link Gtk.CellAreaContext} to be used with `area` for
         * all purposes. {@link Gtk.CellAreaContext} stores geometry information
         * for rows for which it was operated on, it is important to use
         * the same context for the same row of data at all times (i.e.
         * one should render and handle events with the same {@link Gtk.CellAreaContext}
         * which was used to request the size of those rows of data).
         * @returns a newly created {@link Gtk.CellAreaContext} which can be used with `area`.
         */
        create_context(): CellAreaContext;

        /**
         * Delegates event handling to a {@link Gtk.CellArea}.
         * @param context the {@link Gtk.CellAreaContext} for this row of data.
         * @param widget the {@link Gtk.Widget} that `area` is rendering to
         * @param event the {@link Gdk.Event} to handle
         * @param cell_area the `widget` relative coordinates for `area`
         * @param flags the {@link Gtk.CellRendererState} for `area` in this row.
         * @returns `true` if the event was handled by `area`.
         */
        event(context: CellAreaContext, widget: Widget, event: Gdk.Event, cell_area: Gdk.Rectangle, flags: CellRendererState): number;

        /**
         * This should be called by the `area`’s owning layout widget
         * when focus is to be passed to `area`, or moved within `area`
         * for a given `direction` and row data.
         * 
         * Implementing {@link Gtk.CellArea} classes should implement this
         * method to receive and navigate focus in its own way particular
         * to how it lays out cells.
         * @param direction the {@link Gtk.DirectionType}
         * @returns `true` if focus remains inside `area` as a result of this call.
         */
        focus(direction: DirectionType): boolean;

        /**
         * Calls `callback` for every {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} in `area`.
         * @param callback the {@link Gtk.CellCallback} to call
         */
        foreach(callback: CellCallback): void;

        /**
         * Calls `callback` for every {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} in `area` with the
         * allocated rectangle inside `cell_area`.
         * @param context the {@link Gtk.CellAreaContext} for this row of data.
         * @param widget the {@link Gtk.Widget} that `area` is rendering to
         * @param cell_area the `widget` relative coordinates and size for `area`
         * @param background_area the `widget` relative coordinates of the background area
         * @param callback the {@link Gtk.CellAllocCallback} to call
         */
        foreach_alloc(context: CellAreaContext, widget: Widget, cell_area: Gdk.Rectangle, background_area: Gdk.Rectangle, callback: CellAllocCallback): void;

        /**
         * Derives the allocation of `renderer` inside `area` if `area`
         * were to be renderered in `cell_area`.
         * @param context the {@link Gtk.CellAreaContext} used to hold sizes for `area`.
         * @param widget the {@link Gtk.Widget} that `area` is rendering on
         * @param renderer the {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} to get the allocation for
         * @param cell_area the whole allocated area for `area` in `widget`             for this row
         */
        get_cell_allocation(context: CellAreaContext, widget: Widget, renderer: CellRenderer, cell_area: Gdk.Rectangle): Gdk.Rectangle;

        /**
         * Gets the {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} at `x` and `y` coordinates inside `area` and optionally
         * returns the full cell allocation for it inside `cell_area`.
         * @param context the {@link Gtk.CellAreaContext} used to hold sizes for `area`.
         * @param widget the {@link Gtk.Widget} that `area` is rendering on
         * @param cell_area the whole allocated area for `area` in `widget`             for this row
         * @param x the x position
         * @param y the y position
         * @returns the {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} at `x` and `y`.
         */
        get_cell_at_position(context: CellAreaContext, widget: Widget, cell_area: Gdk.Rectangle, x: number, y: number): [CellRenderer, Gdk.Rectangle | null];

        /**
         * Gets the current {@link Gtk.TreePath} string for the currently
         * applied {@link Gtk.TreeIter}, this is implicitly updated when
         * `gtk_cell_area_apply_attributes()` is called and can be
         * used to interact with renderers from {@link Gtk.CellArea}
         * subclasses.
         * @returns The current {@link Gtk.TreePath} string for the current attributes applied to `area`. This string belongs to the area and should not be freed.
         */
        get_current_path_string(): string;

        /**
         * Gets the {@link Gtk.CellEditable} widget currently used
         * to edit the currently edited cell.
         * @returns The currently active {@link Gtk.CellEditable} widget
         */
        get_edit_widget(): CellEditable;

        /**
         * Gets the {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} in `area` that is currently
         * being edited.
         * @returns The currently edited {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         */
        get_edited_cell(): CellRenderer;

        /**
         * Retrieves the currently focused cell for `area`
         * @returns the currently focused cell in `area`.
         */
        get_focus_cell(): CellRenderer;

        /**
         * Gets the {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} which is expected to be focusable
         * for which `renderer` is, or may be a sibling.
         * 
         * This is handy for {@link Gtk.CellArea} subclasses when handling events,
         * after determining the renderer at the event location it can
         * then chose to activate the focus cell for which the event
         * cell may have been a sibling.
         * @param renderer the {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @returns the {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} for which `renderer`    is a sibling, or `null`.
         */
        get_focus_from_sibling(renderer: CellRenderer): CellRenderer | null;

        /**
         * Gets the focus sibling cell renderers for `renderer`.
         * @param renderer the {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} expected to have focus
         * @returns A {@link GLib.List} of `GtkCellRenderers`.       The returned list is internal and should not be freed.
         */
        get_focus_siblings(renderer: CellRenderer): CellRenderer[];

        /**
         * Retrieves a cell area’s initial minimum and natural height.
         * 
         * `area` will store some geometrical information in `context` along the way;
         * when requesting sizes over an arbitrary number of rows, it’s not important
         * to check the `minimum_height` and `natural_height` of this call but rather to
         * consult `gtk_cell_area_context_get_preferred_height()` after a series of
         * requests.
         * @param context the {@link Gtk.CellAreaContext} to perform this request with
         * @param widget the {@link Gtk.Widget} where `area` will be rendering
         */
        get_preferred_height(context: CellAreaContext, widget: Widget): [number, number];

        /**
         * Retrieves a cell area’s minimum and natural height if it would be given
         * the specified `width`.
         * 
         * `area` stores some geometrical information in `context` along the way
         * while calling `gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_width()`. It’s important to
         * perform a series of `gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_width()` requests with
         * `context` first and then call `gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_height_for_width()`
         * on each cell area individually to get the height for width of each
         * fully requested row.
         * 
         * If at some point, the width of a single row changes, it should be
         * requested with `gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_width()` again and then
         * the full width of the requested rows checked again with
         * `gtk_cell_area_context_get_preferred_width()`.
         * @param context the {@link Gtk.CellAreaContext} which has already been requested for widths.
         * @param widget the {@link Gtk.Widget} where `area` will be rendering
         * @param width the width for which to check the height of this area
         */
        get_preferred_height_for_width(context: CellAreaContext, widget: Widget, width: number): [number, number];

        /**
         * Retrieves a cell area’s initial minimum and natural width.
         * 
         * `area` will store some geometrical information in `context` along the way;
         * when requesting sizes over an arbitrary number of rows, it’s not important
         * to check the `minimum_width` and `natural_width` of this call but rather to
         * consult `gtk_cell_area_context_get_preferred_width()` after a series of
         * requests.
         * @param context the {@link Gtk.CellAreaContext} to perform this request with
         * @param widget the {@link Gtk.Widget} where `area` will be rendering
         */
        get_preferred_width(context: CellAreaContext, widget: Widget): [number, number];

        /**
         * Retrieves a cell area’s minimum and natural width if it would be given
         * the specified `height`.
         * 
         * `area` stores some geometrical information in `context` along the way
         * while calling `gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_height()`. It’s important to
         * perform a series of `gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_height()` requests with
         * `context` first and then call `gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_width_for_height()`
         * on each cell area individually to get the height for width of each
         * fully requested row.
         * 
         * If at some point, the height of a single row changes, it should be
         * requested with `gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_height()` again and then
         * the full height of the requested rows checked again with
         * `gtk_cell_area_context_get_preferred_height()`.
         * @param context the {@link Gtk.CellAreaContext} which has already been requested for widths.
         * @param widget the {@link Gtk.Widget} where `area` will be rendering
         * @param height the height for which to check the width of this area
         */
        get_preferred_width_for_height(context: CellAreaContext, widget: Widget, height: number): [number, number];

        /**
         * Gets whether the area prefers a height-for-width layout
         * or a width-for-height layout.
         * @returns The {@link Gtk.SizeRequestMode} preferred by `area`.
         */
        get_request_mode(): SizeRequestMode;

        /**
         * Checks if `area` contains `renderer`.
         * @param renderer the {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} to check
         * @returns `true` if `renderer` is in the `area`.
         */
        has_renderer(renderer: CellRenderer): boolean;

        /**
         * This is a convenience function for {@link Gtk.CellArea} implementations
         * to get the inner area where a given {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} will be
         * rendered. It removes any padding previously added by `gtk_cell_area_request_renderer()`.
         * @param widget the {@link Gtk.Widget} that `area` is rendering onto
         * @param cell_area the `widget` relative coordinates where one of `area`’s cells             is to be placed
         */
        inner_cell_area(widget: Widget, cell_area: Gdk.Rectangle): Gdk.Rectangle;

        /**
         * Returns whether the area can do anything when activated,
         * after applying new attributes to `area`.
         * @returns whether `area` can do anything when activated.
         */
        is_activatable(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns whether `sibling` is one of `renderer`’s focus siblings
         * (see `gtk_cell_area_add_focus_sibling()`).
         * @param renderer the {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} expected to have focus
         * @param sibling the {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} to check against `renderer`’s sibling list
         * @returns `true` if `sibling` is a focus sibling of `renderer`
         */
        is_focus_sibling(renderer: CellRenderer, sibling: CellRenderer): boolean;

        /**
         * Removes `renderer` from `area`.
         * @param renderer the {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} to remove from `area`
         */
        remove(renderer: CellRenderer): void;

        /**
         * Removes `sibling` from `renderer`’s focus sibling list
         * (see `gtk_cell_area_add_focus_sibling()`).
         * @param renderer the {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} expected to have focus
         * @param sibling the {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} to remove from `renderer`’s focus area
         */
        remove_focus_sibling(renderer: CellRenderer, sibling: CellRenderer): void;

        /**
         * Renders `area`’s cells according to `area`’s layout onto `widget` at
         * the given coordinates.
         * @param context the {@link Gtk.CellAreaContext} for this row of data.
         * @param widget the {@link Gtk.Widget} that `area` is rendering to
         * @param cr the {@link cairo.Context} to render with
         * @param background_area the `widget` relative coordinates for `area`’s background
         * @param cell_area the `widget` relative coordinates for `area`
         * @param flags the {@link Gtk.CellRendererState} for `area` in this row.
         * @param paint_focus whether `area` should paint focus on focused cells for focused rows or not.
         */
        render(context: CellAreaContext, widget: Widget, cr: cairo.Context, background_area: Gdk.Rectangle, cell_area: Gdk.Rectangle, flags: CellRendererState, paint_focus: boolean): void;

        /**
         * This is a convenience function for {@link Gtk.CellArea} implementations
         * to request size for cell renderers. It’s important to use this
         * function to request size and then use `gtk_cell_area_inner_cell_area()`
         * at render and event time since this function will add padding
         * around the cell for focus painting.
         * @param renderer the {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} to request size for
         * @param orientation the {@link Gtk.Orientation} in which to request size
         * @param widget the {@link Gtk.Widget} that `area` is rendering onto
         * @param for_size the allocation contextual size to request for, or -1 if the base request for the orientation is to be returned.
         */
        request_renderer(renderer: CellRenderer, orientation: Orientation, widget: Widget, for_size: number): [number, number];

        /**
         * Explicitly sets the currently focused cell to `renderer`.
         * 
         * This is generally called by implementations of
         * {@link Gtk.CellAreaClass}.focus() or {@link Gtk.CellAreaClass}.event(),
         * however it can also be used to implement functions such
         * as `gtk_tree_view_set_cursor_on_cell()`.
         * @param renderer the {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} to give focus to
         */
        set_focus_cell(renderer: CellRenderer): void;

        /**
         * Explicitly stops the editing of the currently edited cell.
         * 
         * If `canceled` is `true`, the currently edited cell renderer
         * will emit the ::editing-canceled signal, otherwise the
         * the ::editing-done signal will be emitted on the current
         * edit widget.
         * 
         * See `gtk_cell_area_get_edited_cell()` and `gtk_cell_area_get_edit_widget()`.
         * @param canceled whether editing was canceled.
         */
        stop_editing(canceled: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Adds a child to `buildable`. `type` is an optional string
         * describing how the child should be added.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child to add
         * @param type kind of child or `null`
         */
        add_child(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object, type: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Constructs a child of `buildable` with the name `name`.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} calls this function if a “constructor” has been
         * specified in the UI definition.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param name name of child to construct
         * @returns the constructed child
         */
        construct_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, name: string): T;

        /**
         * This is similar to `gtk_buildable_parser_finished()` but is
         * called once for each custom tag handled by the `buildable`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname the name of the tag
         * @param data user data created in custom_tag_start
         */
        custom_finished(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
         * the buildable.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @param data user data that will be passed in to parser functions
         */
        custom_tag_end(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called for each unknown element under `<child>`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @returns `true` if a object has a custom implementation, `false`          if it doesn't.
         */
        custom_tag_start(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string): [boolean, GLib.MarkupParser, null];

        /**
         * Get the internal child called `childname` of the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param childname name of child
         * @returns the internal child of the buildable object
         */
        get_internal_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, childname: string): T;

        /**
         * Gets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} sets the name based on the
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI]
         * used to construct the `buildable`.
         * @returns the name set with `gtk_buildable_set_name()`
         */
        get_name(): string;

        /**
         * Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI].
         * Note that this will be called once for each time
         * `gtk_builder_add_from_file()` or `gtk_builder_add_from_string()`
         * is called on a builder.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         */
        parser_finished(builder: Builder): void;

        /**
         * Sets the property name `name` to `value` on the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param name name of property
         * @param value value of property
         */
        set_buildable_property(builder: Builder, name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;

        /**
         * Sets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * @param name name to set
         */
        set_name(name: string): void;

        /**
         * Adds a child to `buildable`. `type` is an optional string
         * describing how the child should be added.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child to add
         * @param type kind of child or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add_child(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object, type: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Constructs a child of `buildable` with the name `name`.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} calls this function if a “constructor” has been
         * specified in the UI definition.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param name name of child to construct
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_construct_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, name: string): T;

        /**
         * This is similar to `gtk_buildable_parser_finished()` but is
         * called once for each custom tag handled by the `buildable`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname the name of the tag
         * @param data user data created in custom_tag_start
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_finished(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
         * the buildable.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @param data user data that will be passed in to parser functions
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_tag_end(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called for each unknown element under `<child>`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_tag_start(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string): [boolean, GLib.MarkupParser, never];

        /**
         * Get the internal child called `childname` of the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param childname name of child
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_internal_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, childname: string): T;

        /**
         * Gets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} sets the name based on the
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI]
         * used to construct the `buildable`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_name(): string;

        /**
         * Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI].
         * Note that this will be called once for each time
         * `gtk_builder_add_from_file()` or `gtk_builder_add_from_string()`
         * is called on a builder.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_parser_finished(builder: Builder): void;

        /**
         * Sets the property name `name` to `value` on the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param name name of property
         * @param value value of property
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_buildable_property(builder: Builder, name: string, value: unknown): void;

        /**
         * Sets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * @param name name to set
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_name(name: string): void;

        /**
         * Adds an attribute mapping to the list in `cell_layout`.
         * 
         * The `column` is the column of the model to get a value from, and the
         * `attribute` is the parameter on `cell` to be set from the value. So for
         * example if column 2 of the model contains strings, you could have the
         * “text” attribute of a {@link Gtk.CellRendererText} get its values from column 2.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param attribute an attribute on the renderer
         * @param column the column position on the model to get the attribute from
         */
        add_attribute(cell: CellRenderer, attribute: string, column: number): void;

        /**
         * Unsets all the mappings on all renderers on `cell_layout` and
         * removes all renderers from `cell_layout`.
         */
        clear(): void;

        /**
         * Clears all existing attributes previously set with
         * `gtk_cell_layout_set_attributes()`.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} to clear the attribute mapping on
         */
        clear_attributes(cell: CellRenderer): void;

        /**
         * Returns the underlying {@link Gtk.CellArea} which might be `cell_layout`
         * if called on a {@link Gtk.CellArea} or might be `null` if no {@link Gtk.CellArea}
         * is used by `cell_layout`.
         * @returns the cell area used by `cell_layout`, or `null` in case no cell area is used.
         */
        get_area(): CellArea | null;

        /**
         * Returns the cell renderers which have been added to `cell_layout`.
         * @returns a list of cell renderers. The list, but not the renderers has     been newly allocated and should be freed with `g_list_free()`     when no longer needed.
         */
        get_cells(): CellRenderer[];

        /**
         * Adds the `cell` to the end of `cell_layout`. If `expand` is `false`, then the
         * `cell` is allocated no more space than it needs. Any unused space is
         * divided evenly between cells for which `expand` is `true`.
         * 
         * Note that reusing the same cell renderer is not supported.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param expand `true` if `cell` is to be given extra space allocated to `cell_layout`
         */
        pack_end(cell: CellRenderer, expand: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Packs the `cell` into the beginning of `cell_layout`. If `expand` is `false`,
         * then the `cell` is allocated no more space than it needs. Any unused space
         * is divided evenly between cells for which `expand` is `true`.
         * 
         * Note that reusing the same cell renderer is not supported.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param expand `true` if `cell` is to be given extra space allocated to `cell_layout`
         */
        pack_start(cell: CellRenderer, expand: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Re-inserts `cell` at `position`.
         * 
         * Note that `cell` has already to be packed into `cell_layout`
         * for this to function properly.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} to reorder
         * @param position new position to insert `cell` at
         */
        reorder(cell: CellRenderer, position: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.CellLayoutDataFunc} to use for `cell_layout`.
         * 
         * This function is used instead of the standard attributes mapping
         * for setting the column value, and should set the value of `cell_layout`’s
         * cell renderer(s) as appropriate.
         * 
         * `func` may be `null` to remove a previously set function.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param func the {@link Gtk.CellLayoutDataFunc} to use, or `null`
         */
        set_cell_data_func(cell: CellRenderer, func: CellLayoutDataFunc | null): void;

        /**
         * Adds an attribute mapping to the list in `cell_layout`.
         * 
         * The `column` is the column of the model to get a value from, and the
         * `attribute` is the parameter on `cell` to be set from the value. So for
         * example if column 2 of the model contains strings, you could have the
         * “text” attribute of a {@link Gtk.CellRendererText} get its values from column 2.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param attribute an attribute on the renderer
         * @param column the column position on the model to get the attribute from
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add_attribute(cell: CellRenderer, attribute: string, column: number): void;

        /**
         * Unsets all the mappings on all renderers on `cell_layout` and
         * removes all renderers from `cell_layout`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_clear(): void;

        /**
         * Clears all existing attributes previously set with
         * `gtk_cell_layout_set_attributes()`.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} to clear the attribute mapping on
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_clear_attributes(cell: CellRenderer): void;

        /**
         * Returns the underlying {@link Gtk.CellArea} which might be `cell_layout`
         * if called on a {@link Gtk.CellArea} or might be `null` if no {@link Gtk.CellArea}
         * is used by `cell_layout`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_area(): CellArea | null;

        /**
         * Returns the cell renderers which have been added to `cell_layout`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_cells(): CellRenderer[];

        /**
         * Adds the `cell` to the end of `cell_layout`. If `expand` is `false`, then the
         * `cell` is allocated no more space than it needs. Any unused space is
         * divided evenly between cells for which `expand` is `true`.
         * 
         * Note that reusing the same cell renderer is not supported.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param expand `true` if `cell` is to be given extra space allocated to `cell_layout`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_pack_end(cell: CellRenderer, expand: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Packs the `cell` into the beginning of `cell_layout`. If `expand` is `false`,
         * then the `cell` is allocated no more space than it needs. Any unused space
         * is divided evenly between cells for which `expand` is `true`.
         * 
         * Note that reusing the same cell renderer is not supported.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param expand `true` if `cell` is to be given extra space allocated to `cell_layout`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_pack_start(cell: CellRenderer, expand: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Re-inserts `cell` at `position`.
         * 
         * Note that `cell` has already to be packed into `cell_layout`
         * for this to function properly.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} to reorder
         * @param position new position to insert `cell` at
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_reorder(cell: CellRenderer, position: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.CellLayoutDataFunc} to use for `cell_layout`.
         * 
         * This function is used instead of the standard attributes mapping
         * for setting the column value, and should set the value of `cell_layout`’s
         * cell renderer(s) as appropriate.
         * 
         * `func` may be `null` to remove a previously set function.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param func the {@link Gtk.CellLayoutDataFunc} to use, or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_cell_data_func(cell: CellRenderer, func: CellLayoutDataFunc | null): void;
    }


    namespace CellAreaBox {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends CellArea.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::spacing": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::edit-widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::edited-cell": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-cell": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::orientation": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends CellArea.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, CellLayout.ConstructorProps, Orientable.ConstructorProps {
            spacing: number;
        }
    }

    /**
     * The {@link Gtk.CellAreaBox} renders cell renderers into a row or a column
     * depending on its {@link Gtk.Orientation}.
     * 
     * GtkCellAreaBox uses a notion of packing. Packing
     * refers to adding cell renderers with reference to a particular position
     * in a {@link Gtk.CellAreaBox}. There are two reference positions: the
     * start and the end of the box.
     * When the {@link Gtk.CellAreaBox} is oriented in the {@link Gtk.Orientation.VERTICAL}
     * orientation, the start is defined as the top of the box and the end is
     * defined as the bottom. In the {@link Gtk.Orientation.HORIZONTAL} orientation
     * start is defined as the left side and the end is defined as the right
     * side.
     * 
     * Alignments of `GtkCellRenderers` rendered in adjacent rows can be
     * configured by configuring the {@link Gtk.CellAreaBox} align child cell property
     * with `gtk_cell_area_cell_set_property()` or by specifying the "align"
     * argument to `gtk_cell_area_box_pack_start()` and `gtk_cell_area_box_pack_end()`.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class CellAreaBox extends CellArea implements Buildable, CellLayout, Orientable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<CellAreaBox>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * The amount of space to reserve between cells.
         * @since 3.0
         * @default 0
         */
        get spacing(): number;
        set spacing(val: number);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: CellAreaBox.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<CellAreaBox.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): CellAreaBox;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof CellAreaBox.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, CellAreaBox.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof CellAreaBox.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, CellAreaBox.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof CellAreaBox.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<CellAreaBox.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Gets the spacing added between cell renderers.
         * @returns the space added between cell renderers in `box`.
         */
        get_spacing(): number;

        /**
         * Adds `renderer` to `box`, packed with reference to the end of `box`.
         * 
         * The `renderer` is packed after (away from end of) any other
         * {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} packed with reference to the end of `box`.
         * @param renderer the {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} to add
         * @param expand whether `renderer` should receive extra space when the area receives more than its natural size
         * @param align whether `renderer` should be aligned in adjacent rows
         * @param fixed whether `renderer` should have the same size in all rows
         */
        pack_end(renderer: CellRenderer, expand: boolean, align: boolean, fixed: boolean): void;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
    // Conflicted with Gtk.CellLayout.pack_end
        pack_end(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Adds `renderer` to `box`, packed with reference to the start of `box`.
         * 
         * The `renderer` is packed after any other {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} packed
         * with reference to the start of `box`.
         * @param renderer the {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} to add
         * @param expand whether `renderer` should receive extra space when the area receives more than its natural size
         * @param align whether `renderer` should be aligned in adjacent rows
         * @param fixed whether `renderer` should have the same size in all rows
         */
        pack_start(renderer: CellRenderer, expand: boolean, align: boolean, fixed: boolean): void;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
    // Conflicted with Gtk.CellLayout.pack_start
        pack_start(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Sets the spacing to add between cell renderers in `box`.
         * @param spacing the space to add between `GtkCellRenderers`
         */
        set_spacing(spacing: number): void;

        /**
         * The orientation of the orientable.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default Gtk.Orientation.HORIZONTAL
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Orientable
         */
        get orientation(): Orientation;
        set orientation(val: Orientation);

        /**
         * Adds a child to `buildable`. `type` is an optional string
         * describing how the child should be added.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child to add
         * @param type kind of child or `null`
         */
        add_child(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object, type: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Constructs a child of `buildable` with the name `name`.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} calls this function if a “constructor” has been
         * specified in the UI definition.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param name name of child to construct
         * @returns the constructed child
         */
        construct_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, name: string): T;

        /**
         * This is similar to `gtk_buildable_parser_finished()` but is
         * called once for each custom tag handled by the `buildable`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname the name of the tag
         * @param data user data created in custom_tag_start
         */
        custom_finished(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
         * the buildable.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @param data user data that will be passed in to parser functions
         */
        custom_tag_end(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called for each unknown element under `<child>`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @returns `true` if a object has a custom implementation, `false`          if it doesn't.
         */
        custom_tag_start(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string): [boolean, GLib.MarkupParser, null];

        /**
         * Get the internal child called `childname` of the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param childname name of child
         * @returns the internal child of the buildable object
         */
        get_internal_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, childname: string): T;

        /**
         * Gets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} sets the name based on the
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI]
         * used to construct the `buildable`.
         * @returns the name set with `gtk_buildable_set_name()`
         */
        get_name(): string;

        /**
         * Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI].
         * Note that this will be called once for each time
         * `gtk_builder_add_from_file()` or `gtk_builder_add_from_string()`
         * is called on a builder.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         */
        parser_finished(builder: Builder): void;

        /**
         * Sets the property name `name` to `value` on the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param name name of property
         * @param value value of property
         */
        set_buildable_property(builder: Builder, name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;

        /**
         * Sets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * @param name name to set
         */
        set_name(name: string): void;

        /**
         * Adds a child to `buildable`. `type` is an optional string
         * describing how the child should be added.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child to add
         * @param type kind of child or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add_child(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object, type: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Constructs a child of `buildable` with the name `name`.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} calls this function if a “constructor” has been
         * specified in the UI definition.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param name name of child to construct
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_construct_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, name: string): T;

        /**
         * This is similar to `gtk_buildable_parser_finished()` but is
         * called once for each custom tag handled by the `buildable`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname the name of the tag
         * @param data user data created in custom_tag_start
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_finished(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
         * the buildable.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @param data user data that will be passed in to parser functions
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_tag_end(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called for each unknown element under `<child>`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_tag_start(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string): [boolean, GLib.MarkupParser, never];

        /**
         * Get the internal child called `childname` of the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param childname name of child
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_internal_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, childname: string): T;

        /**
         * Gets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} sets the name based on the
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI]
         * used to construct the `buildable`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_name(): string;

        /**
         * Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI].
         * Note that this will be called once for each time
         * `gtk_builder_add_from_file()` or `gtk_builder_add_from_string()`
         * is called on a builder.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_parser_finished(builder: Builder): void;

        /**
         * Sets the property name `name` to `value` on the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param name name of property
         * @param value value of property
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_buildable_property(builder: Builder, name: string, value: unknown): void;

        /**
         * Sets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * @param name name to set
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_name(name: string): void;

        /**
         * Adds an attribute mapping to the list in `cell_layout`.
         * 
         * The `column` is the column of the model to get a value from, and the
         * `attribute` is the parameter on `cell` to be set from the value. So for
         * example if column 2 of the model contains strings, you could have the
         * “text” attribute of a {@link Gtk.CellRendererText} get its values from column 2.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param attribute an attribute on the renderer
         * @param column the column position on the model to get the attribute from
         */
        add_attribute(cell: CellRenderer, attribute: string, column: number): void;

        /**
         * Unsets all the mappings on all renderers on `cell_layout` and
         * removes all renderers from `cell_layout`.
         */
        clear(): void;

        /**
         * Clears all existing attributes previously set with
         * `gtk_cell_layout_set_attributes()`.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} to clear the attribute mapping on
         */
        clear_attributes(cell: CellRenderer): void;

        /**
         * Returns the underlying {@link Gtk.CellArea} which might be `cell_layout`
         * if called on a {@link Gtk.CellArea} or might be `null` if no {@link Gtk.CellArea}
         * is used by `cell_layout`.
         * @returns the cell area used by `cell_layout`, or `null` in case no cell area is used.
         */
        get_area(): CellArea | null;

        /**
         * Returns the cell renderers which have been added to `cell_layout`.
         * @returns a list of cell renderers. The list, but not the renderers has     been newly allocated and should be freed with `g_list_free()`     when no longer needed.
         */
        get_cells(): CellRenderer[];

        /**
         * Re-inserts `cell` at `position`.
         * 
         * Note that `cell` has already to be packed into `cell_layout`
         * for this to function properly.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} to reorder
         * @param position new position to insert `cell` at
         */
        reorder(cell: CellRenderer, position: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.CellLayoutDataFunc} to use for `cell_layout`.
         * 
         * This function is used instead of the standard attributes mapping
         * for setting the column value, and should set the value of `cell_layout`’s
         * cell renderer(s) as appropriate.
         * 
         * `func` may be `null` to remove a previously set function.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param func the {@link Gtk.CellLayoutDataFunc} to use, or `null`
         */
        set_cell_data_func(cell: CellRenderer, func: CellLayoutDataFunc | null): void;

        /**
         * Adds an attribute mapping to the list in `cell_layout`.
         * 
         * The `column` is the column of the model to get a value from, and the
         * `attribute` is the parameter on `cell` to be set from the value. So for
         * example if column 2 of the model contains strings, you could have the
         * “text” attribute of a {@link Gtk.CellRendererText} get its values from column 2.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param attribute an attribute on the renderer
         * @param column the column position on the model to get the attribute from
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add_attribute(cell: CellRenderer, attribute: string, column: number): void;

        /**
         * Unsets all the mappings on all renderers on `cell_layout` and
         * removes all renderers from `cell_layout`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_clear(): void;

        /**
         * Clears all existing attributes previously set with
         * `gtk_cell_layout_set_attributes()`.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} to clear the attribute mapping on
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_clear_attributes(cell: CellRenderer): void;

        /**
         * Returns the underlying {@link Gtk.CellArea} which might be `cell_layout`
         * if called on a {@link Gtk.CellArea} or might be `null` if no {@link Gtk.CellArea}
         * is used by `cell_layout`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_area(): CellArea | null;

        /**
         * Returns the cell renderers which have been added to `cell_layout`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_cells(): CellRenderer[];

        /**
         * Adds the `cell` to the end of `cell_layout`. If `expand` is `false`, then the
         * `cell` is allocated no more space than it needs. Any unused space is
         * divided evenly between cells for which `expand` is `true`.
         * 
         * Note that reusing the same cell renderer is not supported.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param expand `true` if `cell` is to be given extra space allocated to `cell_layout`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_pack_end(cell: CellRenderer, expand: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Packs the `cell` into the beginning of `cell_layout`. If `expand` is `false`,
         * then the `cell` is allocated no more space than it needs. Any unused space
         * is divided evenly between cells for which `expand` is `true`.
         * 
         * Note that reusing the same cell renderer is not supported.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param expand `true` if `cell` is to be given extra space allocated to `cell_layout`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_pack_start(cell: CellRenderer, expand: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Re-inserts `cell` at `position`.
         * 
         * Note that `cell` has already to be packed into `cell_layout`
         * for this to function properly.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} to reorder
         * @param position new position to insert `cell` at
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_reorder(cell: CellRenderer, position: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.CellLayoutDataFunc} to use for `cell_layout`.
         * 
         * This function is used instead of the standard attributes mapping
         * for setting the column value, and should set the value of `cell_layout`’s
         * cell renderer(s) as appropriate.
         * 
         * `func` may be `null` to remove a previously set function.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param func the {@link Gtk.CellLayoutDataFunc} to use, or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_cell_data_func(cell: CellRenderer, func: CellLayoutDataFunc | null): void;

        /**
         * Retrieves the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @returns the orientation of the `orientable`.
         */
        get_orientation(): Orientation;

        /**
         * Sets the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @param orientation the orientable’s new orientation.
         */
        set_orientation(orientation: Orientation): void;
    }


    namespace CellAreaContext {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends GObject.Object.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::area": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::minimum-height": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::minimum-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::natural-height": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::natural-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.Object.ConstructorProps {
            area: CellArea;
            minimum_height: number;
            minimumHeight: number;
            minimum_width: number;
            minimumWidth: number;
            natural_height: number;
            naturalHeight: number;
            natural_width: number;
            naturalWidth: number;
        }
    }

    /**
     * The {@link Gtk.CellAreaContext} object is created by a given {@link Gtk.CellArea}
     * implementation via its {@link Gtk.CellAreaClass}.create_context() virtual
     * method and is used to store cell sizes and alignments for a series of
     * {@link Gtk.TreeModel} rows that are requested and rendered in the same context.
     * 
     * {@link Gtk.CellLayout} widgets can create any number of contexts in which to
     * request and render groups of data rows. However, it’s important that the
     * same context which was used to request sizes for a given {@link Gtk.TreeModel}
     * row also be used for the same row when calling other {@link Gtk.CellArea} APIs
     * such as `gtk_cell_area_render()` and `gtk_cell_area_event()`.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class CellAreaContext extends GObject.Object {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<CellAreaContext>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * The {@link Gtk.CellArea} this context was created by
         * @since 3.0
         * @construct-only
         */
        get area(): CellArea;

        /**
         * The minimum height for the {@link Gtk.CellArea} in this context
         * for all {@link Gtk.TreeModel} rows that this context was requested
         * for using `gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_height()`.
         * @since 3.0
         * @read-only
         * @default -1
         */
        get minimum_height(): number;

        /**
         * The minimum height for the {@link Gtk.CellArea} in this context
         * for all {@link Gtk.TreeModel} rows that this context was requested
         * for using `gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_height()`.
         * @since 3.0
         * @read-only
         * @default -1
         */
        get minimumHeight(): number;

        /**
         * The minimum width for the {@link Gtk.CellArea} in this context
         * for all {@link Gtk.TreeModel} rows that this context was requested
         * for using `gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_width()`.
         * @since 3.0
         * @read-only
         * @default -1
         */
        get minimum_width(): number;

        /**
         * The minimum width for the {@link Gtk.CellArea} in this context
         * for all {@link Gtk.TreeModel} rows that this context was requested
         * for using `gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_width()`.
         * @since 3.0
         * @read-only
         * @default -1
         */
        get minimumWidth(): number;

        /**
         * The natural height for the {@link Gtk.CellArea} in this context
         * for all {@link Gtk.TreeModel} rows that this context was requested
         * for using `gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_height()`.
         * @since 3.0
         * @read-only
         * @default -1
         */
        get natural_height(): number;

        /**
         * The natural height for the {@link Gtk.CellArea} in this context
         * for all {@link Gtk.TreeModel} rows that this context was requested
         * for using `gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_height()`.
         * @since 3.0
         * @read-only
         * @default -1
         */
        get naturalHeight(): number;

        /**
         * The natural width for the {@link Gtk.CellArea} in this context
         * for all {@link Gtk.TreeModel} rows that this context was requested
         * for using `gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_width()`.
         * @since 3.0
         * @read-only
         * @default -1
         */
        get natural_width(): number;

        /**
         * The natural width for the {@link Gtk.CellArea} in this context
         * for all {@link Gtk.TreeModel} rows that this context was requested
         * for using `gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_width()`.
         * @since 3.0
         * @read-only
         * @default -1
         */
        get naturalWidth(): number;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: CellAreaContext.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<CellAreaContext.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof CellAreaContext.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, CellAreaContext.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof CellAreaContext.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, CellAreaContext.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof CellAreaContext.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<CellAreaContext.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * Allocates a width and/or a height for all rows which are to be
         * rendered with `context`.
         * 
         * Usually allocation is performed only horizontally or sometimes
         * vertically since a group of rows are usually rendered side by
         * side vertically or horizontally and share either the same width
         * or the same height. Sometimes they are allocated in both horizontal
         * and vertical orientations producing a homogeneous effect of the
         * rows. This is generally the case for {@link Gtk.TreeView} when
         * {@link Gtk.TreeView.fixed_height_mode} is enabled.
         * 
         * Since 3.0
         * @param width the allocated width for all {@link Gtk.TreeModel} rows rendered     with `context`, or -1.
         * @param height the allocated height for all {@link Gtk.TreeModel} rows rendered     with `context`, or -1.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_allocate(width: number, height: number): void;

        /**
         * Gets the accumulative preferred height for `width` for all rows
         * which have been requested for the same said `width` with this context.
         * 
         * After `gtk_cell_area_context_reset()` is called and/or before ever
         * requesting the size of a {@link Gtk.CellArea}, the returned values are -1.
         * @param width a proposed width for allocation
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_preferred_height_for_width(width: number): [number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the accumulative preferred width for `height` for all rows which
         * have been requested for the same said `height` with this context.
         * 
         * After `gtk_cell_area_context_reset()` is called and/or before ever
         * requesting the size of a {@link Gtk.CellArea}, the returned values are -1.
         * @param height a proposed height for allocation
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_preferred_width_for_height(height: number): [number, number];

        /**
         * Resets any previously cached request and allocation
         * data.
         * 
         * When underlying {@link Gtk.TreeModel} data changes its
         * important to reset the context if the content
         * size is allowed to shrink. If the content size
         * is only allowed to grow (this is usually an option
         * for views rendering large data stores as a measure
         * of optimization), then only the row that changed
         * or was inserted needs to be (re)requested with
         * `gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_width()`.
         * 
         * When the new overall size of the context requires
         * that the allocated size changes (or whenever this
         * allocation changes at all), the variable row
         * sizes need to be re-requested for every row.
         * 
         * For instance, if the rows are displayed all with
         * the same width from top to bottom then a change
         * in the allocated width necessitates a recalculation
         * of all the displayed row heights using
         * `gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_height_for_width()`.
         * 
         * Since 3.0
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_reset(): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Allocates a width and/or a height for all rows which are to be
         * rendered with `context`.
         * 
         * Usually allocation is performed only horizontally or sometimes
         * vertically since a group of rows are usually rendered side by
         * side vertically or horizontally and share either the same width
         * or the same height. Sometimes they are allocated in both horizontal
         * and vertical orientations producing a homogeneous effect of the
         * rows. This is generally the case for {@link Gtk.TreeView} when
         * {@link Gtk.TreeView.fixed_height_mode} is enabled.
         * 
         * Since 3.0
         * @param width the allocated width for all {@link Gtk.TreeModel} rows rendered     with `context`, or -1.
         * @param height the allocated height for all {@link Gtk.TreeModel} rows rendered     with `context`, or -1.
         */
        allocate(width: number, height: number): void;

        /**
         * Fetches the current allocation size for `context`.
         * 
         * If the context was not allocated in width or height, or if the
         * context was recently reset with `gtk_cell_area_context_reset()`,
         * the returned value will be -1.
         */
        get_allocation(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Fetches the {@link Gtk.CellArea} this `context` was created by.
         * 
         * This is generally unneeded by layouting widgets; however,
         * it is important for the context implementation itself to
         * fetch information about the area it is being used for.
         * 
         * For instance at {@link Gtk.CellAreaContextClass}.allocate() time
         * it’s important to know details about any cell spacing
         * that the {@link Gtk.CellArea} is configured with in order to
         * compute a proper allocation.
         * @returns the {@link Gtk.CellArea} this context was created by.
         */
        get_area(): CellArea;

        /**
         * Gets the accumulative preferred height for all rows which have been
         * requested with this context.
         * 
         * After `gtk_cell_area_context_reset()` is called and/or before ever
         * requesting the size of a {@link Gtk.CellArea}, the returned values are 0.
         */
        get_preferred_height(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the accumulative preferred height for `width` for all rows
         * which have been requested for the same said `width` with this context.
         * 
         * After `gtk_cell_area_context_reset()` is called and/or before ever
         * requesting the size of a {@link Gtk.CellArea}, the returned values are -1.
         * @param width a proposed width for allocation
         */
        get_preferred_height_for_width(width: number): [number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the accumulative preferred width for all rows which have been
         * requested with this context.
         * 
         * After `gtk_cell_area_context_reset()` is called and/or before ever
         * requesting the size of a {@link Gtk.CellArea}, the returned values are 0.
         */
        get_preferred_width(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the accumulative preferred width for `height` for all rows which
         * have been requested for the same said `height` with this context.
         * 
         * After `gtk_cell_area_context_reset()` is called and/or before ever
         * requesting the size of a {@link Gtk.CellArea}, the returned values are -1.
         * @param height a proposed height for allocation
         */
        get_preferred_width_for_height(height: number): [number, number];

        /**
         * Causes the minimum and/or natural height to grow if the new
         * proposed sizes exceed the current minimum and natural height.
         * 
         * This is used by {@link Gtk.CellAreaContext} implementations during
         * the request process over a series of {@link Gtk.TreeModel} rows to
         * progressively push the requested height over a series of
         * `gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_height()` requests.
         * @param minimum_height the proposed new minimum height for `context`
         * @param natural_height the proposed new natural height for `context`
         */
        push_preferred_height(minimum_height: number, natural_height: number): void;

        /**
         * Causes the minimum and/or natural width to grow if the new
         * proposed sizes exceed the current minimum and natural width.
         * 
         * This is used by {@link Gtk.CellAreaContext} implementations during
         * the request process over a series of {@link Gtk.TreeModel} rows to
         * progressively push the requested width over a series of
         * `gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_width()` requests.
         * @param minimum_width the proposed new minimum width for `context`
         * @param natural_width the proposed new natural width for `context`
         */
        push_preferred_width(minimum_width: number, natural_width: number): void;

        /**
         * Resets any previously cached request and allocation
         * data.
         * 
         * When underlying {@link Gtk.TreeModel} data changes its
         * important to reset the context if the content
         * size is allowed to shrink. If the content size
         * is only allowed to grow (this is usually an option
         * for views rendering large data stores as a measure
         * of optimization), then only the row that changed
         * or was inserted needs to be (re)requested with
         * `gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_width()`.
         * 
         * When the new overall size of the context requires
         * that the allocated size changes (or whenever this
         * allocation changes at all), the variable row
         * sizes need to be re-requested for every row.
         * 
         * For instance, if the rows are displayed all with
         * the same width from top to bottom then a change
         * in the allocated width necessitates a recalculation
         * of all the displayed row heights using
         * `gtk_cell_area_get_preferred_height_for_width()`.
         * 
         * Since 3.0
         */
        reset(): void;
    }


    namespace CellRenderer {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends GObject.InitiallyUnowned.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * This signal gets emitted when the user cancels the process of editing a
             * cell.  For example, an editable cell renderer could be written to cancel
             * editing when the user presses Escape.
             * 
             * See also: `gtk_cell_renderer_stop_editing()`.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.4
             * @run-first
             */
            "editing-canceled": () => void;
            /**
             * This signal gets emitted when a cell starts to be edited.
             * The intended use of this signal is to do special setup
             * on `editable`, e.g. adding a {@link Gtk.EntryCompletion} or setting
             * up additional columns in a {@link Gtk.ComboBox}.
             * 
             * See `gtk_cell_editable_start_editing()` for information on the lifecycle of
             * the `editable` and a way to do setup that doesn’t depend on the `renderer`.
             * 
             * Note that GTK+ doesn't guarantee that cell renderers will
             * continue to use the same kind of widget for editing in future
             * releases, therefore you should check the type of `editable`
             * before doing any specific setup, as in the following example:
             * 
             * ```c
             * static void
             * text_editing_started (GtkCellRenderer *cell,
             *                       GtkCellEditable *editable,
             *                       const gchar     *path,
             *                       gpointer         data)
             * {
             *   if (GTK_IS_ENTRY (editable))
             *     {
             *       GtkEntry *entry = GTK_ENTRY (editable);
             *       
             *       // ... create a GtkEntryCompletion
             *       
             *       gtk_entry_set_completion (entry, completion);
             *     }
             * }
             * ```
             * 
             * @signal
             * @since 2.6
             * @run-first
             */
            "editing-started": (arg0: CellEditable, arg1: string) => void;
            "notify::cell-background": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::cell-background-gdk": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::cell-background-rgba": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::cell-background-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::editing": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-expanded": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-expander": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::xalign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::xpad": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::yalign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::ypad": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.InitiallyUnowned.ConstructorProps {
            cell_background: string;
            cellBackground: string;
            cell_background_gdk: Gdk.Color;
            cellBackgroundGdk: Gdk.Color;
            cell_background_rgba: Gdk.RGBA;
            cellBackgroundRgba: Gdk.RGBA;
            cell_background_set: boolean;
            cellBackgroundSet: boolean;
            editing: boolean;
            height: number;
            is_expanded: boolean;
            isExpanded: boolean;
            is_expander: boolean;
            isExpander: boolean;
            mode: CellRendererMode;
            sensitive: boolean;
            visible: boolean;
            width: number;
            xalign: number;
            xpad: number;
            yalign: number;
            ypad: number;
        }
    }

    /**
     * The {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} is a base class of a set of objects used for
     * rendering a cell to a {@link cairo.Context}.  These objects are used primarily by
     * the {@link Gtk.TreeView} widget, though they aren’t tied to them in any
     * specific way.  It is worth noting that {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} is not a
     * {@link Gtk.Widget} and cannot be treated as such.
     * 
     * The primary use of a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} is for drawing a certain graphical
     * elements on a {@link cairo.Context}. Typically, one cell renderer is used to
     * draw many cells on the screen.  To this extent, it isn’t expected that a
     * CellRenderer keep any permanent state around.  Instead, any state is set
     * just prior to use using `GObjects` property system.  Then, the
     * cell is measured using `gtk_cell_renderer_get_size()`. Finally, the cell
     * is rendered in the correct location using `gtk_cell_renderer_render()`.
     * 
     * There are a number of rules that must be followed when writing a new
     * {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}.  First and foremost, it’s important that a certain set
     * of properties will always yield a cell renderer of the same size,
     * barring a {@link Gtk.Style} change.  The {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} also has a number of
     * generic properties that are expected to be honored by all children.
     * 
     * Beyond merely rendering a cell, cell renderers can optionally
     * provide active user interface elements. A cell renderer can be
     * “activatable” like {@link Gtk.CellRendererToggle},
     * which toggles when it gets activated by a mouse click, or it can be
     * “editable” like {@link Gtk.CellRendererText}, which
     * allows the user to edit the text using a widget implementing the
     * {@link Gtk.CellEditable} interface, e.g. {@link Gtk.Entry}.
     * To make a cell renderer activatable or editable, you have to
     * implement the {@link Gtk.CellRendererClass}.activate or
     * {@link Gtk.CellRendererClass}.start_editing virtual functions, respectively.
     * 
     * Many properties of {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} and its subclasses have a
     * corresponding “set” property, e.g. “cell-background-set” corresponds
     * to “cell-background”. These “set” properties reflect whether a property
     * has been set or not. You should not set them independently.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    abstract class CellRenderer extends GObject.InitiallyUnowned {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<CellRenderer>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * @write-only
         * @default null
         */
        set cell_background(val: string);

        /**
         * @write-only
         * @default null
         */
        set cellBackground(val: string);

        /**
         * Cell background as a {@link Gdk.Color}
         * @deprecated since 3.4: Use {@link Gtk.CellRenderer.cell_background_rgba} instead.
         */
        get cell_background_gdk(): Gdk.Color;
        set cell_background_gdk(val: Gdk.Color);

        /**
         * Cell background as a {@link Gdk.Color}
         * @deprecated since 3.4: Use {@link Gtk.CellRenderer.cell_background_rgba} instead.
         */
        get cellBackgroundGdk(): Gdk.Color;
        set cellBackgroundGdk(val: Gdk.Color);

        /**
         * Cell background as a {@link Gdk.RGBA}
         * @since 3.0
         */
        get cell_background_rgba(): Gdk.RGBA;
        set cell_background_rgba(val: Gdk.RGBA);

        /**
         * Cell background as a {@link Gdk.RGBA}
         * @since 3.0
         */
        get cellBackgroundRgba(): Gdk.RGBA;
        set cellBackgroundRgba(val: Gdk.RGBA);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get cell_background_set(): boolean;
        set cell_background_set(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get cellBackgroundSet(): boolean;
        set cellBackgroundSet(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @read-only
         * @default false
         */
        get editing(): boolean;

        /**
         * @default -1
         */
        get height(): number;
        set height(val: number);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get is_expanded(): boolean;
        set is_expanded(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get isExpanded(): boolean;
        set isExpanded(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get is_expander(): boolean;
        set is_expander(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get isExpander(): boolean;
        set isExpander(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default Gtk.CellRendererMode.INERT
         */
        get mode(): CellRendererMode;
        set mode(val: CellRendererMode);

        /**
         * @default true
         */
        get sensitive(): boolean;
        set sensitive(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default true
         */
        get visible(): boolean;
        set visible(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default -1
         */
        get width(): number;
        set width(val: number);

        /**
         * @default 0.5
         */
        get xalign(): number;
        set xalign(val: number);

        /**
         * @default 0
         */
        get xpad(): number;
        set xpad(val: number);

        /**
         * @default 0.5
         */
        get yalign(): number;
        set yalign(val: number);

        /**
         * @default 0
         */
        get ypad(): number;
        set ypad(val: number);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: CellRenderer.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<CellRenderer.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof CellRenderer.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, CellRenderer.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof CellRenderer.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, CellRenderer.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof CellRenderer.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<CellRenderer.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Static methods
        /**
         * @param type The object type that implements the accessible for `widget_class`.     The type must be a subtype of {@link Gtk.RendererCellAccessible}
         */
        static set_accessible_type(type: GObject.GType): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * Passes an activate event to the cell renderer for possible processing.
         * Some cell renderers may use events; for example, {@link Gtk.CellRendererToggle}
         * toggles when it gets a mouse click.
         * @param event a {@link Gdk.Event}
         * @param widget widget that received the event
         * @param path widget-dependent string representation of the event location;    e.g. for {@link Gtk.TreeView}, a string representation of {@link Gtk.TreePath}
         * @param background_area background area as passed to `gtk_cell_renderer_render()`
         * @param cell_area cell area as passed to `gtk_cell_renderer_render()`
         * @param flags render flags
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_activate(event: Gdk.Event, widget: Widget, path: string, background_area: Gdk.Rectangle, cell_area: Gdk.Rectangle, flags: CellRendererState): boolean;

        /**
         * Signal gets emitted when the user cancels the process of editing a cell.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_editing_canceled(): void;

        /**
         * Signal gets emitted when a cell starts to be edited.
         * @param editable 
         * @param path 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_editing_started(editable: CellEditable, path: string): void;

        /**
         * Gets the aligned area used by `cell` inside `cell_area`. Used for finding
         * the appropriate edit and focus rectangle.
         * @param widget the {@link Gtk.Widget} this cell will be rendering to
         * @param flags render flags
         * @param cell_area cell area which would be passed to `gtk_cell_renderer_render()`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_aligned_area(widget: Widget, flags: CellRendererState, cell_area: Gdk.Rectangle): Gdk.Rectangle;

        /**
         * Retreives a renderer’s natural size when rendered to `widget`.
         * @param widget the {@link Gtk.Widget} this cell will be rendering to
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_preferred_height(widget: Widget): [number, number];

        /**
         * Retreives a cell renderers’s minimum and natural height if it were rendered to
         * `widget` with the specified `width`.
         * @param widget the {@link Gtk.Widget} this cell will be rendering to
         * @param width the size which is available for allocation
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_preferred_height_for_width(widget: Widget, width: number): [number, number];

        /**
         * Retreives a renderer’s natural size when rendered to `widget`.
         * @param widget the {@link Gtk.Widget} this cell will be rendering to
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_preferred_width(widget: Widget): [number, number];

        /**
         * Retreives a cell renderers’s minimum and natural width if it were rendered to
         * `widget` with the specified `height`.
         * @param widget the {@link Gtk.Widget} this cell will be rendering to
         * @param height the size which is available for allocation
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_preferred_width_for_height(widget: Widget, height: number): [number, number];

        /**
         * Gets whether the cell renderer prefers a height-for-width layout
         * or a width-for-height layout.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_request_mode(): SizeRequestMode;

        /**
         * Obtains the width and height needed to render the cell. Used by view
         * widgets to determine the appropriate size for the cell_area passed to
         * `gtk_cell_renderer_render()`.  If `cell_area` is not `null`, fills in the
         * x and y offsets (if set) of the cell relative to this location.
         * 
         * Please note that the values set in `width` and `height`, as well as those
         * in `x_offset` and `y_offset` are inclusive of the xpad and ypad properties.
         * @param widget the widget the renderer is rendering to
         * @param cell_area The area a cell will be allocated, or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_size(widget: Widget, cell_area: Gdk.Rectangle | null): [number, number, number, number];

        /**
         * Invokes the virtual render function of the {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}. The three
         * passed-in rectangles are areas in `cr`. Most renderers will draw within
         * `cell_area`; the xalign, yalign, xpad, and ypad fields of the {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * should be honored with respect to `cell_area`. `background_area` includes the
         * blank space around the cell, and also the area containing the tree expander;
         * so the `background_area` rectangles for all cells tile to cover the entire
         * `window`.
         * @param cr a cairo context to draw to
         * @param widget the widget owning `window`
         * @param background_area entire cell area (including tree expanders and maybe    padding on the sides)
         * @param cell_area area normally rendered by a cell renderer
         * @param flags flags that affect rendering
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_render(cr: cairo.Context, widget: Widget, background_area: Gdk.Rectangle, cell_area: Gdk.Rectangle, flags: CellRendererState): void;

        /**
         * Starts editing the contents of this `cell`, through a new {@link Gtk.CellEditable}
         * widget created by the {@link Gtk.CellRendererClass}.start_editing virtual function.
         * @param event a {@link Gdk.Event}
         * @param widget widget that received the event
         * @param path widget-dependent string representation of the event location;    e.g. for {@link Gtk.TreeView}, a string representation of {@link Gtk.TreePath}
         * @param background_area background area as passed to `gtk_cell_renderer_render()`
         * @param cell_area cell area as passed to `gtk_cell_renderer_render()`
         * @param flags render flags
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_start_editing(event: Gdk.Event | null, widget: Widget, path: string, background_area: Gdk.Rectangle, cell_area: Gdk.Rectangle, flags: CellRendererState): CellEditable | null;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Passes an activate event to the cell renderer for possible processing.
         * Some cell renderers may use events; for example, {@link Gtk.CellRendererToggle}
         * toggles when it gets a mouse click.
         * @param event a {@link Gdk.Event}
         * @param widget widget that received the event
         * @param path widget-dependent string representation of the event location;    e.g. for {@link Gtk.TreeView}, a string representation of {@link Gtk.TreePath}
         * @param background_area background area as passed to `gtk_cell_renderer_render()`
         * @param cell_area cell area as passed to `gtk_cell_renderer_render()`
         * @param flags render flags
         * @returns `true` if the event was consumed/handled
         */
        activate(event: Gdk.Event, widget: Widget, path: string, background_area: Gdk.Rectangle, cell_area: Gdk.Rectangle, flags: CellRendererState): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the aligned area used by `cell` inside `cell_area`. Used for finding
         * the appropriate edit and focus rectangle.
         * @param widget the {@link Gtk.Widget} this cell will be rendering to
         * @param flags render flags
         * @param cell_area cell area which would be passed to `gtk_cell_renderer_render()`
         */
        get_aligned_area(widget: Widget, flags: CellRendererState, cell_area: Gdk.Rectangle): Gdk.Rectangle;

        /**
         * Fills in `xalign` and `yalign` with the appropriate values of `cell`.
         */
        get_alignment(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Fills in `width` and `height` with the appropriate size of `cell`.
         */
        get_fixed_size(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Fills in `xpad` and `ypad` with the appropriate values of `cell`.
         */
        get_padding(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Retreives a renderer’s natural size when rendered to `widget`.
         * @param widget the {@link Gtk.Widget} this cell will be rendering to
         */
        get_preferred_height(widget: Widget): [number, number];

        /**
         * Retreives a cell renderers’s minimum and natural height if it were rendered to
         * `widget` with the specified `width`.
         * @param widget the {@link Gtk.Widget} this cell will be rendering to
         * @param width the size which is available for allocation
         */
        get_preferred_height_for_width(widget: Widget, width: number): [number, number];

        /**
         * Retrieves the minimum and natural size of a cell taking
         * into account the widget’s preference for height-for-width management.
         * @param widget the {@link Gtk.Widget} this cell will be rendering to
         */
        get_preferred_size(widget: Widget): [Requisition | null, Requisition | null];

        /**
         * Retreives a renderer’s natural size when rendered to `widget`.
         * @param widget the {@link Gtk.Widget} this cell will be rendering to
         */
        get_preferred_width(widget: Widget): [number, number];

        /**
         * Retreives a cell renderers’s minimum and natural width if it were rendered to
         * `widget` with the specified `height`.
         * @param widget the {@link Gtk.Widget} this cell will be rendering to
         * @param height the size which is available for allocation
         */
        get_preferred_width_for_height(widget: Widget, height: number): [number, number];

        /**
         * Gets whether the cell renderer prefers a height-for-width layout
         * or a width-for-height layout.
         * @returns The {@link Gtk.SizeRequestMode} preferred by this renderer.
         */
        get_request_mode(): SizeRequestMode;

        /**
         * Returns the cell renderer’s sensitivity.
         * @returns `true` if the cell renderer is sensitive
         */
        get_sensitive(): boolean;

        /**
         * Obtains the width and height needed to render the cell. Used by view
         * widgets to determine the appropriate size for the cell_area passed to
         * `gtk_cell_renderer_render()`.  If `cell_area` is not `null`, fills in the
         * x and y offsets (if set) of the cell relative to this location.
         * 
         * Please note that the values set in `width` and `height`, as well as those
         * in `x_offset` and `y_offset` are inclusive of the xpad and ypad properties.
         * @param widget the widget the renderer is rendering to
         * @param cell_area The area a cell will be allocated, or `null`
         */
        get_size(widget: Widget, cell_area: Gdk.Rectangle | null): [number, number, number, number];

        /**
         * Translates the cell renderer state to {@link Gtk.StateFlags},
         * based on the cell renderer and widget sensitivity, and
         * the given {@link Gtk.CellRendererState}.
         * @param widget a {@link Gtk.Widget}, or `null`
         * @param cell_state cell renderer state
         * @returns the widget state flags applying to `cell`
         */
        get_state(widget: Widget | null, cell_state: CellRendererState): StateFlags;

        /**
         * Returns the cell renderer’s visibility.
         * @returns `true` if the cell renderer is visible
         */
        get_visible(): boolean;

        /**
         * Checks whether the cell renderer can do something when activated.
         * @returns `true` if the cell renderer can do anything when activated
         */
        is_activatable(): boolean;

        /**
         * Invokes the virtual render function of the {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}. The three
         * passed-in rectangles are areas in `cr`. Most renderers will draw within
         * `cell_area`; the xalign, yalign, xpad, and ypad fields of the {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * should be honored with respect to `cell_area`. `background_area` includes the
         * blank space around the cell, and also the area containing the tree expander;
         * so the `background_area` rectangles for all cells tile to cover the entire
         * `window`.
         * @param cr a cairo context to draw to
         * @param widget the widget owning `window`
         * @param background_area entire cell area (including tree expanders and maybe    padding on the sides)
         * @param cell_area area normally rendered by a cell renderer
         * @param flags flags that affect rendering
         */
        render(cr: cairo.Context, widget: Widget, background_area: Gdk.Rectangle, cell_area: Gdk.Rectangle, flags: CellRendererState): void;

        /**
         * Sets the renderer’s alignment within its available space.
         * @param xalign the x alignment of the cell renderer
         * @param yalign the y alignment of the cell renderer
         */
        set_alignment(xalign: number, yalign: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the renderer size to be explicit, independent of the properties set.
         * @param width the width of the cell renderer, or -1
         * @param height the height of the cell renderer, or -1
         */
        set_fixed_size(width: number, height: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the renderer’s padding.
         * @param xpad the x padding of the cell renderer
         * @param ypad the y padding of the cell renderer
         */
        set_padding(xpad: number, ypad: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the cell renderer’s sensitivity.
         * @param sensitive the sensitivity of the cell
         */
        set_sensitive(sensitive: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the cell renderer’s visibility.
         * @param visible the visibility of the cell
         */
        set_visible(visible: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Starts editing the contents of this `cell`, through a new {@link Gtk.CellEditable}
         * widget created by the {@link Gtk.CellRendererClass}.start_editing virtual function.
         * @param event a {@link Gdk.Event}
         * @param widget widget that received the event
         * @param path widget-dependent string representation of the event location;    e.g. for {@link Gtk.TreeView}, a string representation of {@link Gtk.TreePath}
         * @param background_area background area as passed to `gtk_cell_renderer_render()`
         * @param cell_area cell area as passed to `gtk_cell_renderer_render()`
         * @param flags render flags
         * @returns A new {@link Gtk.CellEditable} for editing this   `cell`, or `null` if editing is not possible
         */
        start_editing(event: Gdk.Event | null, widget: Widget, path: string, background_area: Gdk.Rectangle, cell_area: Gdk.Rectangle, flags: CellRendererState): CellEditable | null;

        /**
         * Informs the cell renderer that the editing is stopped.
         * If `canceled` is `true`, the cell renderer will emit the
         * {@link Gtk.CellRenderer.SignalSignatures.editing_canceled | Gtk.CellRenderer::editing-canceled} signal.
         * 
         * This function should be called by cell renderer implementations
         * in response to the {@link Gtk.CellEditable.SignalSignatures.editing_done | Gtk.CellEditable::editing-done} signal of
         * {@link Gtk.CellEditable}.
         * @param canceled `true` if the editing has been canceled
         */
        stop_editing(canceled: boolean): void;
    }


    namespace CellRendererAccel {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends CellRendererText.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * Gets emitted when the user has removed the accelerator.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.10
             * @run-last
             */
            "accel-cleared": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Gets emitted when the user has selected a new accelerator.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.10
             * @run-last
             */
            "accel-edited": (arg0: string, arg1: number, arg2: Gdk.ModifierType, arg3: number) => void;
            "notify::accel-key": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accel-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accel-mods": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::keycode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::align-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::alignment": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::attributes": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::background": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::background-gdk": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::background-rgba": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::background-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::editable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::editable-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::ellipsize": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::ellipsize-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::family": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::family-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::font": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::font-desc": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::foreground": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::foreground-gdk": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::foreground-rgba": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::foreground-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::language": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::language-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::max-width-chars": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::placeholder-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::rise": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::rise-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::single-paragraph-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::size": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::size-points": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::size-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::stretch": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::stretch-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::strikethrough": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::strikethrough-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::underline": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::underline-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::variant": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::variant-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::weight": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::weight-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-chars": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::wrap-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::wrap-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::cell-background": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::cell-background-gdk": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::cell-background-rgba": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::cell-background-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::editing": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-expanded": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-expander": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::xalign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::xpad": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::yalign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::ypad": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends CellRendererText.ConstructorProps {
            accel_key: number;
            accelKey: number;
            accel_mode: CellRendererAccelMode;
            accelMode: CellRendererAccelMode;
            accel_mods: Gdk.ModifierType;
            accelMods: Gdk.ModifierType;
            keycode: number;
        }
    }

    /**
     * {@link Gtk.CellRendererAccel} displays a keyboard accelerator (i.e. a key
     * combination like `Control + a`). If the cell renderer is editable,
     * the accelerator can be changed by simply typing the new combination.
     * 
     * The {@link Gtk.CellRendererAccel} cell renderer was added in GTK+ 2.10.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class CellRendererAccel extends CellRendererText {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<CellRendererAccel>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * The keyval of the accelerator.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default 0
         */
        get accel_key(): number;
        set accel_key(val: number);

        /**
         * The keyval of the accelerator.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default 0
         */
        get accelKey(): number;
        set accelKey(val: number);

        /**
         * Determines if the edited accelerators are GTK+ accelerators. If
         * they are, consumed modifiers are suppressed, only accelerators
         * accepted by GTK+ are allowed, and the accelerators are rendered
         * in the same way as they are in menus.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default Gtk.CellRendererAccelMode.GTK
         */
        get accel_mode(): CellRendererAccelMode;
        set accel_mode(val: CellRendererAccelMode);

        /**
         * Determines if the edited accelerators are GTK+ accelerators. If
         * they are, consumed modifiers are suppressed, only accelerators
         * accepted by GTK+ are allowed, and the accelerators are rendered
         * in the same way as they are in menus.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default Gtk.CellRendererAccelMode.GTK
         */
        get accelMode(): CellRendererAccelMode;
        set accelMode(val: CellRendererAccelMode);

        /**
         * The modifier mask of the accelerator.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default 0
         */
        get accel_mods(): Gdk.ModifierType;
        set accel_mods(val: Gdk.ModifierType);

        /**
         * The modifier mask of the accelerator.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default 0
         */
        get accelMods(): Gdk.ModifierType;
        set accelMods(val: Gdk.ModifierType);

        /**
         * The hardware keycode of the accelerator. Note that the hardware keycode is
         * only relevant if the key does not have a keyval. Normally, the keyboard
         * configuration should assign keyvals to all keys.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default 0
         */
        get keycode(): number;
        set keycode(val: number);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: CellRendererAccel.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<CellRendererAccel.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): CellRendererAccel;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof CellRendererAccel.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, CellRendererAccel.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof CellRendererAccel.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, CellRendererAccel.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof CellRendererAccel.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<CellRendererAccel.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * @param path_string 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_accel_cleared(path_string: string): void;

        /**
         * @param path_string 
         * @param accel_key 
         * @param accel_mods 
         * @param hardware_keycode 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_accel_edited(path_string: string, accel_key: number, accel_mods: Gdk.ModifierType, hardware_keycode: number): void;
    }


    namespace CellRendererCombo {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends CellRendererText.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * This signal is emitted each time after the user selected an item in
             * the combo box, either by using the mouse or the arrow keys.  Contrary
             * to GtkComboBox, GtkCellRendererCombo::changed is not emitted for
             * changes made to a selected item in the entry.  The argument `new_iter`
             * corresponds to the newly selected item in the combo box and it is relative
             * to the GtkTreeModel set via the model property on GtkCellRendererCombo.
             * 
             * Note that as soon as you change the model displayed in the tree view,
             * the tree view will immediately cease the editing operating.  This
             * means that you most probably want to refrain from changing the model
             * until the combo cell renderer emits the edited or editing_canceled signal.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.14
             * @run-last
             */
            changed: (arg0: string, arg1: TreeIter) => void;
            "notify::has-entry": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::model": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::text-column": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::align-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::alignment": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::attributes": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::background": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::background-gdk": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::background-rgba": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::background-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::editable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::editable-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::ellipsize": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::ellipsize-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::family": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::family-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::font": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::font-desc": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::foreground": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::foreground-gdk": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::foreground-rgba": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::foreground-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::language": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::language-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::max-width-chars": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::placeholder-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::rise": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::rise-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::single-paragraph-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::size": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::size-points": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::size-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::stretch": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::stretch-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::strikethrough": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::strikethrough-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::underline": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::underline-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::variant": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::variant-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::weight": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::weight-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-chars": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::wrap-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::wrap-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::cell-background": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::cell-background-gdk": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::cell-background-rgba": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::cell-background-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::editing": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-expanded": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-expander": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::xalign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::xpad": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::yalign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::ypad": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends CellRendererText.ConstructorProps {
            has_entry: boolean;
            hasEntry: boolean;
            model: TreeModel;
            text_column: number;
            textColumn: number;
        }
    }

    /**
     * {@link Gtk.CellRendererCombo} renders text in a cell like {@link Gtk.CellRendererText} from
     * which it is derived. But while {@link Gtk.CellRendererText} offers a simple entry to
     * edit the text, {@link Gtk.CellRendererCombo} offers a {@link Gtk.ComboBox}
     * widget to edit the text. The values to display in the combo box are taken from
     * the tree model specified in the {@link Gtk.CellRendererCombo.model} property.
     * 
     * The combo cell renderer takes care of adding a text cell renderer to the combo
     * box and sets it to display the column specified by its
     * {@link Gtk.CellRendererCombo.text_column} property. Further properties of the combo box
     * can be set in a handler for the {@link Gtk.CellRenderer.SignalSignatures.editing_started | Gtk.CellRenderer::editing-started} signal.
     * 
     * The {@link Gtk.CellRendererCombo} cell renderer was added in GTK+ 2.6.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class CellRendererCombo extends CellRendererText {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<CellRendererCombo>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * If `true`, the cell renderer will include an entry and allow to enter
         * values other than the ones in the popup list.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default true
         */
        get has_entry(): boolean;
        set has_entry(val: boolean);

        /**
         * If `true`, the cell renderer will include an entry and allow to enter
         * values other than the ones in the popup list.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default true
         */
        get hasEntry(): boolean;
        set hasEntry(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Holds a tree model containing the possible values for the combo box.
         * Use the text_column property to specify the column holding the values.
         * @since 2.6
         */
        get model(): TreeModel;
        set model(val: TreeModel);

        /**
         * Specifies the model column which holds the possible values for the
         * combo box.
         * 
         * Note that this refers to the model specified in the model property,
         * not the model backing the tree view to which
         * this cell renderer is attached.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.CellRendererCombo} automatically adds a text cell renderer for
         * this column to its combo box.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default -1
         */
        get text_column(): number;
        set text_column(val: number);

        /**
         * Specifies the model column which holds the possible values for the
         * combo box.
         * 
         * Note that this refers to the model specified in the model property,
         * not the model backing the tree view to which
         * this cell renderer is attached.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.CellRendererCombo} automatically adds a text cell renderer for
         * this column to its combo box.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default -1
         */
        get textColumn(): number;
        set textColumn(val: number);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: CellRendererCombo.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<CellRendererCombo.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): CellRendererCombo;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof CellRendererCombo.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, CellRendererCombo.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof CellRendererCombo.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, CellRendererCombo.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof CellRendererCombo.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<CellRendererCombo.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;
    }


    namespace CellRendererPixbuf {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends CellRenderer.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::follow-state": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gicon": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::icon-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::pixbuf": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::pixbuf-expander-closed": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::pixbuf-expander-open": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::stock-detail": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::stock-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::stock-size": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::surface": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::cell-background": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::cell-background-gdk": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::cell-background-rgba": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::cell-background-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::editing": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-expanded": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-expander": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::xalign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::xpad": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::yalign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::ypad": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends CellRenderer.ConstructorProps {
            follow_state: boolean;
            followState: boolean;
            gicon: Gio.Icon;
            icon_name: string;
            iconName: string;
            pixbuf: GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf;
            pixbuf_expander_closed: GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf;
            pixbufExpanderClosed: GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf;
            pixbuf_expander_open: GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf;
            pixbufExpanderOpen: GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf;
            stock_detail: string;
            stockDetail: string;
            stock_id: string;
            stockId: string;
            stock_size: number;
            stockSize: number;
            surface: cairo.Surface;
        }
    }

    /**
     * A {@link Gtk.CellRendererPixbuf} can be used to render an image in a cell. It allows
     * to render either a given {@link GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf} (set via the
     * {@link Gtk.CellRendererPixbuf.pixbuf} property) or a named icon (set via the
     * {@link Gtk.CellRendererPixbuf.icon_name} property).
     * 
     * To support the tree view, {@link Gtk.CellRendererPixbuf} also supports rendering two
     * alternative pixbufs, when the {@link Gtk.CellRenderer.is_expander} property is `true`.
     * If the {@link Gtk.CellRenderer.is_expanded} property is `true` and the
     * {@link Gtk.CellRendererPixbuf.pixbuf_expander_open} property is set to a pixbuf, it
     * renders that pixbuf, if the {@link Gtk.CellRenderer.is_expanded} property is `false`
     * and the {@link Gtk.CellRendererPixbuf.pixbuf_expander_closed} property is set to a
     * pixbuf, it renders that one.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class CellRendererPixbuf extends CellRenderer {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<CellRendererPixbuf>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * Specifies whether the rendered pixbuf should be colorized
         * according to the {@link Gtk.CellRendererState}.
         * @since 2.8
         * @deprecated since 3.16: Cell renderers always follow state.
         * @default true
         */
        get follow_state(): boolean;
        set follow_state(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Specifies whether the rendered pixbuf should be colorized
         * according to the {@link Gtk.CellRendererState}.
         * @since 2.8
         * @deprecated since 3.16: Cell renderers always follow state.
         * @default true
         */
        get followState(): boolean;
        set followState(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The GIcon representing the icon to display.
         * If the icon theme is changed, the image will be updated
         * automatically.
         * @since 2.14
         */
        get gicon(): Gio.Icon;
        set gicon(val: Gio.Icon);

        /**
         * The name of the themed icon to display.
         * This property only has an effect if not overridden by "stock_id"
         * or "pixbuf" properties.
         * @since 2.8
         * @default null
         */
        get icon_name(): string;
        set icon_name(val: string);

        /**
         * The name of the themed icon to display.
         * This property only has an effect if not overridden by "stock_id"
         * or "pixbuf" properties.
         * @since 2.8
         * @default null
         */
        get iconName(): string;
        set iconName(val: string);

        get pixbuf(): GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf;
        set pixbuf(val: GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf);

        get pixbuf_expander_closed(): GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf;
        set pixbuf_expander_closed(val: GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf);

        get pixbufExpanderClosed(): GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf;
        set pixbufExpanderClosed(val: GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf);

        get pixbuf_expander_open(): GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf;
        set pixbuf_expander_open(val: GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf);

        get pixbufExpanderOpen(): GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf;
        set pixbufExpanderOpen(val: GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf);

        /**
         * @default null
         */
        get stock_detail(): string;
        set stock_detail(val: string);

        /**
         * @default null
         */
        get stockDetail(): string;
        set stockDetail(val: string);

        /**
         * @since 2.2
         * @deprecated since 3.10: Use {@link Gtk.CellRendererPixbuf.icon_name} instead.
         * @default null
         */
        get stock_id(): string;
        set stock_id(val: string);

        /**
         * @since 2.2
         * @deprecated since 3.10: Use {@link Gtk.CellRendererPixbuf.icon_name} instead.
         * @default null
         */
        get stockId(): string;
        set stockId(val: string);

        /**
         * The {@link Gtk.IconSize} value that specifies the size of the rendered icon.
         * @since 2.2
         * @default 1
         */
        get stock_size(): number;
        set stock_size(val: number);

        /**
         * The {@link Gtk.IconSize} value that specifies the size of the rendered icon.
         * @since 2.2
         * @default 1
         */
        get stockSize(): number;
        set stockSize(val: number);

        /**
         * @since 3.10
         */
        get surface(): cairo.Surface;
        set surface(val: cairo.Surface);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: CellRendererPixbuf.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<CellRendererPixbuf.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): CellRendererPixbuf;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof CellRendererPixbuf.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, CellRendererPixbuf.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof CellRendererPixbuf.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, CellRendererPixbuf.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof CellRendererPixbuf.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<CellRendererPixbuf.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;
    }


    namespace CellRendererProgress {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends CellRenderer.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::inverted": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::pulse": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::text-xalign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::text-yalign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::cell-background": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::cell-background-gdk": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::cell-background-rgba": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::cell-background-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::editing": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-expanded": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-expander": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::xalign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::xpad": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::yalign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::ypad": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::orientation": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends CellRenderer.ConstructorProps, Orientable.ConstructorProps {
            inverted: boolean;
            pulse: number;
            text: string;
            text_xalign: number;
            textXalign: number;
            text_yalign: number;
            textYalign: number;
            value: number;
        }
    }

    /**
     * {@link Gtk.CellRendererProgress} renders a numeric value as a progress par in a cell.
     * Additionally, it can display a text on top of the progress bar.
     * 
     * The {@link Gtk.CellRendererProgress} cell renderer was added in GTK+ 2.6.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class CellRendererProgress extends CellRenderer implements Orientable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<CellRendererProgress>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get inverted(): boolean;
        set inverted(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Setting this to a non-negative value causes the cell renderer to
         * enter "activity mode", where a block bounces back and forth to
         * indicate that some progress is made, without specifying exactly how
         * much.
         * 
         * Each increment of the property causes the block to move by a little
         * bit.
         * 
         * To indicate that the activity has not started yet, set the property
         * to zero. To indicate completion, set the property to `G_MAXINT`.
         * @since 2.12
         * @default -1
         */
        get pulse(): number;
        set pulse(val: number);

        /**
         * The "text" property determines the label which will be drawn
         * over the progress bar. Setting this property to `null` causes the default
         * label to be displayed. Setting this property to an empty string causes
         * no label to be displayed.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default null
         */
        get text(): string;
        set text(val: string);

        /**
         * The "text-xalign" property controls the horizontal alignment of the
         * text in the progress bar.  Valid values range from 0 (left) to 1
         * (right).  Reserved for RTL layouts.
         * @since 2.12
         * @default 0.5
         */
        get text_xalign(): number;
        set text_xalign(val: number);

        /**
         * The "text-xalign" property controls the horizontal alignment of the
         * text in the progress bar.  Valid values range from 0 (left) to 1
         * (right).  Reserved for RTL layouts.
         * @since 2.12
         * @default 0.5
         */
        get textXalign(): number;
        set textXalign(val: number);

        /**
         * The "text-yalign" property controls the vertical alignment of the
         * text in the progress bar.  Valid values range from 0 (top) to 1
         * (bottom).
         * @since 2.12
         * @default 0.5
         */
        get text_yalign(): number;
        set text_yalign(val: number);

        /**
         * The "text-yalign" property controls the vertical alignment of the
         * text in the progress bar.  Valid values range from 0 (top) to 1
         * (bottom).
         * @since 2.12
         * @default 0.5
         */
        get textYalign(): number;
        set textYalign(val: number);

        /**
         * The "value" property determines the percentage to which the
         * progress bar will be "filled in".
         * @since 2.6
         * @default 0
         */
        get value(): number;
        set value(val: number);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: CellRendererProgress.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<CellRendererProgress.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): CellRendererProgress;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof CellRendererProgress.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, CellRendererProgress.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof CellRendererProgress.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, CellRendererProgress.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof CellRendererProgress.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<CellRendererProgress.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        /**
         * The orientation of the orientable.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default Gtk.Orientation.HORIZONTAL
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Orientable
         */
        get orientation(): Orientation;
        set orientation(val: Orientation);

        /**
         * Retrieves the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @returns the orientation of the `orientable`.
         */
        get_orientation(): Orientation;

        /**
         * Sets the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @param orientation the orientable’s new orientation.
         */
        set_orientation(orientation: Orientation): void;
    }


    namespace CellRendererSpin {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends CellRendererText.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::adjustment": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::climb-rate": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::digits": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::align-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::alignment": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::attributes": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::background": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::background-gdk": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::background-rgba": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::background-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::editable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::editable-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::ellipsize": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::ellipsize-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::family": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::family-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::font": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::font-desc": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::foreground": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::foreground-gdk": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::foreground-rgba": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::foreground-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::language": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::language-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::max-width-chars": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::placeholder-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::rise": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::rise-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::single-paragraph-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::size": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::size-points": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::size-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::stretch": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::stretch-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::strikethrough": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::strikethrough-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::underline": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::underline-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::variant": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::variant-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::weight": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::weight-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-chars": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::wrap-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::wrap-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::cell-background": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::cell-background-gdk": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::cell-background-rgba": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::cell-background-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::editing": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-expanded": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-expander": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::xalign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::xpad": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::yalign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::ypad": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends CellRendererText.ConstructorProps {
            adjustment: Adjustment;
            climb_rate: number;
            climbRate: number;
            digits: number;
        }
    }

    /**
     * {@link Gtk.CellRendererSpin} renders text in a cell like {@link Gtk.CellRendererText} from
     * which it is derived. But while {@link Gtk.CellRendererText} offers a simple entry to
     * edit the text, {@link Gtk.CellRendererSpin} offers a {@link Gtk.SpinButton} widget. Of course,
     * that means that the text has to be parseable as a floating point number.
     * 
     * The range of the spinbutton is taken from the adjustment property of the
     * cell renderer, which can be set explicitly or mapped to a column in the
     * tree model, like all properties of cell renders. {@link Gtk.CellRendererSpin}
     * also has properties for the {@link Gtk.CellRendererSpin.climb_rate} and the number
     * of {@link Gtk.CellRendererSpin.digits} to display. Other {@link Gtk.SpinButton} properties
     * can be set in a handler for the {@link Gtk.CellRenderer.SignalSignatures.editing_started | Gtk.CellRenderer::editing-started} signal.
     * 
     * The {@link Gtk.CellRendererSpin} cell renderer was added in GTK+ 2.10.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class CellRendererSpin extends CellRendererText {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<CellRendererSpin>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * The adjustment that holds the value of the spinbutton.
         * This must be non-`null` for the cell renderer to be editable.
         * @since 2.10
         */
        get adjustment(): Adjustment;
        set adjustment(val: Adjustment);

        /**
         * The acceleration rate when you hold down a button.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default 0
         */
        get climb_rate(): number;
        set climb_rate(val: number);

        /**
         * The acceleration rate when you hold down a button.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default 0
         */
        get climbRate(): number;
        set climbRate(val: number);

        /**
         * The number of decimal places to display.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default 0
         */
        get digits(): number;
        set digits(val: number);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: CellRendererSpin.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<CellRendererSpin.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): CellRendererSpin;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof CellRendererSpin.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, CellRendererSpin.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof CellRendererSpin.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, CellRendererSpin.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof CellRendererSpin.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<CellRendererSpin.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;
    }


    namespace CellRendererSpinner {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends CellRenderer.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::active": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::pulse": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::size": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::cell-background": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::cell-background-gdk": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::cell-background-rgba": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::cell-background-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::editing": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-expanded": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-expander": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::xalign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::xpad": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::yalign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::ypad": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends CellRenderer.ConstructorProps {
            active: boolean;
            pulse: number;
            size: IconSize;
        }
    }

    /**
     * GtkCellRendererSpinner renders a spinning animation in a cell, very
     * similar to {@link Gtk.Spinner}. It can often be used as an alternative
     * to a {@link Gtk.CellRendererProgress} for displaying indefinite activity,
     * instead of actual progress.
     * 
     * To start the animation in a cell, set the {@link Gtk.CellRendererSpinner.active}
     * property to `true` and increment the {@link Gtk.CellRendererSpinner.pulse} property
     * at regular intervals. The usual way to set the cell renderer properties
     * for each cell is to bind them to columns in your tree model using e.g.
     * `gtk_tree_view_column_add_attribute()`.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class CellRendererSpinner extends CellRenderer {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<CellRendererSpinner>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get active(): boolean;
        set active(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Pulse of the spinner. Increment this value to draw the next frame of the
         * spinner animation. Usually, you would update this value in a timeout.
         * 
         * By default, the {@link Gtk.Spinner} widget draws one full cycle of the animation,
         * consisting of 12 frames, in 750 milliseconds.
         * @since 2.20
         * @default 0
         */
        get pulse(): number;
        set pulse(val: number);

        /**
         * The {@link Gtk.IconSize} value that specifies the size of the rendered spinner.
         * @since 2.20
         * @default Gtk.IconSize.MENU
         */
        get size(): IconSize;
        set size(val: IconSize);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: CellRendererSpinner.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<CellRendererSpinner.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): CellRendererSpinner;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof CellRendererSpinner.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, CellRendererSpinner.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof CellRendererSpinner.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, CellRendererSpinner.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof CellRendererSpinner.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<CellRendererSpinner.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;
    }


    namespace CellRendererText {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends CellRenderer.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * This signal is emitted after `renderer` has been edited.
             * 
             * It is the responsibility of the application to update the model
             * and store `new_text` at the position indicated by `path`.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            edited: (arg0: string, arg1: string) => void;
            "notify::align-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::alignment": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::attributes": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::background": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::background-gdk": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::background-rgba": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::background-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::editable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::editable-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::ellipsize": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::ellipsize-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::family": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::family-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::font": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::font-desc": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::foreground": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::foreground-gdk": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::foreground-rgba": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::foreground-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::language": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::language-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::max-width-chars": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::placeholder-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::rise": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::rise-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::single-paragraph-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::size": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::size-points": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::size-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::stretch": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::stretch-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::strikethrough": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::strikethrough-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::underline": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::underline-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::variant": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::variant-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::weight": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::weight-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-chars": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::wrap-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::wrap-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::cell-background": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::cell-background-gdk": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::cell-background-rgba": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::cell-background-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::editing": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-expanded": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-expander": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::xalign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::xpad": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::yalign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::ypad": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends CellRenderer.ConstructorProps {
            align_set: boolean;
            alignSet: boolean;
            alignment: Pango.Alignment;
            attributes: Pango.AttrList;
            background: string;
            background_gdk: Gdk.Color;
            backgroundGdk: Gdk.Color;
            background_rgba: Gdk.RGBA;
            backgroundRgba: Gdk.RGBA;
            background_set: boolean;
            backgroundSet: boolean;
            editable: boolean;
            editable_set: boolean;
            editableSet: boolean;
            ellipsize: Pango.EllipsizeMode;
            ellipsize_set: boolean;
            ellipsizeSet: boolean;
            family: string;
            family_set: boolean;
            familySet: boolean;
            font: string;
            font_desc: Pango.FontDescription;
            fontDesc: Pango.FontDescription;
            foreground: string;
            foreground_gdk: Gdk.Color;
            foregroundGdk: Gdk.Color;
            foreground_rgba: Gdk.RGBA;
            foregroundRgba: Gdk.RGBA;
            foreground_set: boolean;
            foregroundSet: boolean;
            language: string;
            language_set: boolean;
            languageSet: boolean;
            markup: string;
            max_width_chars: number;
            maxWidthChars: number;
            placeholder_text: string;
            placeholderText: string;
            rise: number;
            rise_set: boolean;
            riseSet: boolean;
            scale: number;
            scale_set: boolean;
            scaleSet: boolean;
            single_paragraph_mode: boolean;
            singleParagraphMode: boolean;
            size: number;
            size_points: number;
            sizePoints: number;
            size_set: boolean;
            sizeSet: boolean;
            stretch: Pango.Stretch;
            stretch_set: boolean;
            stretchSet: boolean;
            strikethrough: boolean;
            strikethrough_set: boolean;
            strikethroughSet: boolean;
            style: Pango.Style;
            style_set: boolean;
            styleSet: boolean;
            text: string;
            underline: Pango.Underline;
            underline_set: boolean;
            underlineSet: boolean;
            variant: Pango.Variant;
            variant_set: boolean;
            variantSet: boolean;
            weight: number;
            weight_set: boolean;
            weightSet: boolean;
            width_chars: number;
            widthChars: number;
            wrap_mode: Pango.WrapMode;
            wrapMode: Pango.WrapMode;
            wrap_width: number;
            wrapWidth: number;
        }
    }

    /**
     * A {@link Gtk.CellRendererText} renders a given text in its cell, using the font, color and
     * style information provided by its properties. The text will be ellipsized if it is
     * too long and the {@link Gtk.CellRendererText.ellipsize} property allows it.
     * 
     * If the {@link Gtk.CellRenderer.mode} is {@link Gtk.CellRendererMode.EDITABLE},
     * the {@link Gtk.CellRendererText} allows to edit its text using an entry.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class CellRendererText extends CellRenderer {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<CellRendererText>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get align_set(): boolean;
        set align_set(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get alignSet(): boolean;
        set alignSet(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Specifies how to align the lines of text with respect to each other.
         * 
         * Note that this property describes how to align the lines of text in
         * case there are several of them. The "xalign" property of {@link Gtk.CellRenderer},
         * on the other hand, sets the horizontal alignment of the whole text.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default Pango.Alignment.LEFT
         */
        get alignment(): Pango.Alignment;
        set alignment(val: Pango.Alignment);

        get attributes(): Pango.AttrList;
        set attributes(val: Pango.AttrList);

        /**
         * @write-only
         * @default null
         */
        set background(val: string);

        /**
         * Background color as a {@link Gdk.Color}
         * @deprecated since 3.4: Use {@link Gtk.CellRendererText.background_rgba} instead.
         */
        get background_gdk(): Gdk.Color;
        set background_gdk(val: Gdk.Color);

        /**
         * Background color as a {@link Gdk.Color}
         * @deprecated since 3.4: Use {@link Gtk.CellRendererText.background_rgba} instead.
         */
        get backgroundGdk(): Gdk.Color;
        set backgroundGdk(val: Gdk.Color);

        /**
         * Background color as a {@link Gdk.RGBA}
         * @since 3.0
         */
        get background_rgba(): Gdk.RGBA;
        set background_rgba(val: Gdk.RGBA);

        /**
         * Background color as a {@link Gdk.RGBA}
         * @since 3.0
         */
        get backgroundRgba(): Gdk.RGBA;
        set backgroundRgba(val: Gdk.RGBA);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get background_set(): boolean;
        set background_set(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get backgroundSet(): boolean;
        set backgroundSet(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get editable(): boolean;
        set editable(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get editable_set(): boolean;
        set editable_set(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get editableSet(): boolean;
        set editableSet(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Specifies the preferred place to ellipsize the string, if the cell renderer
         * does not have enough room to display the entire string. Setting it to
         * {@link Pango.EllipsizeMode.NONE} turns off ellipsizing. See the wrap-width property
         * for another way of making the text fit into a given width.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default Pango.EllipsizeMode.NONE
         */
        get ellipsize(): Pango.EllipsizeMode;
        set ellipsize(val: Pango.EllipsizeMode);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get ellipsize_set(): boolean;
        set ellipsize_set(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get ellipsizeSet(): boolean;
        set ellipsizeSet(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default null
         */
        get family(): string;
        set family(val: string);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get family_set(): boolean;
        set family_set(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get familySet(): boolean;
        set familySet(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default null
         */
        get font(): string;
        set font(val: string);

        get font_desc(): Pango.FontDescription;
        set font_desc(val: Pango.FontDescription);

        get fontDesc(): Pango.FontDescription;
        set fontDesc(val: Pango.FontDescription);

        /**
         * @write-only
         * @default null
         */
        set foreground(val: string);

        /**
         * Foreground color as a {@link Gdk.Color}
         * @deprecated since 3.4: Use {@link Gtk.CellRendererText.foreground_rgba} instead.
         */
        get foreground_gdk(): Gdk.Color;
        set foreground_gdk(val: Gdk.Color);

        /**
         * Foreground color as a {@link Gdk.Color}
         * @deprecated since 3.4: Use {@link Gtk.CellRendererText.foreground_rgba} instead.
         */
        get foregroundGdk(): Gdk.Color;
        set foregroundGdk(val: Gdk.Color);

        /**
         * Foreground color as a {@link Gdk.RGBA}
         * @since 3.0
         */
        get foreground_rgba(): Gdk.RGBA;
        set foreground_rgba(val: Gdk.RGBA);

        /**
         * Foreground color as a {@link Gdk.RGBA}
         * @since 3.0
         */
        get foregroundRgba(): Gdk.RGBA;
        set foregroundRgba(val: Gdk.RGBA);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get foreground_set(): boolean;
        set foreground_set(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get foregroundSet(): boolean;
        set foregroundSet(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default null
         */
        get language(): string;
        set language(val: string);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get language_set(): boolean;
        set language_set(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get languageSet(): boolean;
        set languageSet(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @write-only
         * @default null
         */
        set markup(val: string);

        /**
         * The desired maximum width of the cell, in characters. If this property
         * is set to -1, the width will be calculated automatically.
         * 
         * For cell renderers that ellipsize or wrap text; this property
         * controls the maximum reported width of the cell. The
         * cell should not receive any greater allocation unless it is
         * set to expand in its {@link Gtk.CellLayout} and all of the cell's siblings
         * have received their natural width.
         * @since 3.0
         * @default -1
         */
        get max_width_chars(): number;
        set max_width_chars(val: number);

        /**
         * The desired maximum width of the cell, in characters. If this property
         * is set to -1, the width will be calculated automatically.
         * 
         * For cell renderers that ellipsize or wrap text; this property
         * controls the maximum reported width of the cell. The
         * cell should not receive any greater allocation unless it is
         * set to expand in its {@link Gtk.CellLayout} and all of the cell's siblings
         * have received their natural width.
         * @since 3.0
         * @default -1
         */
        get maxWidthChars(): number;
        set maxWidthChars(val: number);

        /**
         * The text that will be displayed in the {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} if
         * {@link Gtk.CellRendererText.editable} is `true` and the cell is empty.
         * 
         * Since 3.6
         * @default null
         */
        get placeholder_text(): string;
        set placeholder_text(val: string);

        /**
         * The text that will be displayed in the {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} if
         * {@link Gtk.CellRendererText.editable} is `true` and the cell is empty.
         * 
         * Since 3.6
         * @default null
         */
        get placeholderText(): string;
        set placeholderText(val: string);

        /**
         * @default 0
         */
        get rise(): number;
        set rise(val: number);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get rise_set(): boolean;
        set rise_set(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get riseSet(): boolean;
        set riseSet(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default 1
         */
        get scale(): number;
        set scale(val: number);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get scale_set(): boolean;
        set scale_set(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get scaleSet(): boolean;
        set scaleSet(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get single_paragraph_mode(): boolean;
        set single_paragraph_mode(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get singleParagraphMode(): boolean;
        set singleParagraphMode(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default 0
         */
        get size(): number;
        set size(val: number);

        /**
         * @default 0
         */
        get size_points(): number;
        set size_points(val: number);

        /**
         * @default 0
         */
        get sizePoints(): number;
        set sizePoints(val: number);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get size_set(): boolean;
        set size_set(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get sizeSet(): boolean;
        set sizeSet(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default Pango.Stretch.NORMAL
         */
        get stretch(): Pango.Stretch;
        set stretch(val: Pango.Stretch);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get stretch_set(): boolean;
        set stretch_set(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get stretchSet(): boolean;
        set stretchSet(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get strikethrough(): boolean;
        set strikethrough(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get strikethrough_set(): boolean;
        set strikethrough_set(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get strikethroughSet(): boolean;
        set strikethroughSet(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default Pango.Style.NORMAL
         */
        get style(): Pango.Style;
        set style(val: Pango.Style);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get style_set(): boolean;
        set style_set(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get styleSet(): boolean;
        set styleSet(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default null
         */
        get text(): string;
        set text(val: string);

        /**
         * @default Pango.Underline.NONE
         */
        get underline(): Pango.Underline;
        set underline(val: Pango.Underline);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get underline_set(): boolean;
        set underline_set(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get underlineSet(): boolean;
        set underlineSet(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default Pango.Variant.NORMAL
         */
        get variant(): Pango.Variant;
        set variant(val: Pango.Variant);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get variant_set(): boolean;
        set variant_set(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get variantSet(): boolean;
        set variantSet(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default 400
         */
        get weight(): number;
        set weight(val: number);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get weight_set(): boolean;
        set weight_set(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get weightSet(): boolean;
        set weightSet(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The desired width of the cell, in characters. If this property is set to
         * -1, the width will be calculated automatically, otherwise the cell will
         * request either 3 characters or the property value, whichever is greater.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default -1
         */
        get width_chars(): number;
        set width_chars(val: number);

        /**
         * The desired width of the cell, in characters. If this property is set to
         * -1, the width will be calculated automatically, otherwise the cell will
         * request either 3 characters or the property value, whichever is greater.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default -1
         */
        get widthChars(): number;
        set widthChars(val: number);

        /**
         * Specifies how to break the string into multiple lines, if the cell
         * renderer does not have enough room to display the entire string.
         * This property has no effect unless the wrap-width property is set.
         * @since 2.8
         * @default Pango.WrapMode.CHAR
         */
        get wrap_mode(): Pango.WrapMode;
        set wrap_mode(val: Pango.WrapMode);

        /**
         * Specifies how to break the string into multiple lines, if the cell
         * renderer does not have enough room to display the entire string.
         * This property has no effect unless the wrap-width property is set.
         * @since 2.8
         * @default Pango.WrapMode.CHAR
         */
        get wrapMode(): Pango.WrapMode;
        set wrapMode(val: Pango.WrapMode);

        /**
         * Specifies the minimum width at which the text is wrapped. The wrap-mode property can
         * be used to influence at what character positions the line breaks can be placed.
         * Setting wrap-width to -1 turns wrapping off.
         * @since 2.8
         * @default -1
         */
        get wrap_width(): number;
        set wrap_width(val: number);

        /**
         * Specifies the minimum width at which the text is wrapped. The wrap-mode property can
         * be used to influence at what character positions the line breaks can be placed.
         * Setting wrap-width to -1 turns wrapping off.
         * @since 2.8
         * @default -1
         */
        get wrapWidth(): number;
        set wrapWidth(val: number);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: CellRendererText.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<CellRendererText.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): CellRendererText;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof CellRendererText.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, CellRendererText.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof CellRendererText.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, CellRendererText.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof CellRendererText.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<CellRendererText.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * @param path 
         * @param new_text 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_edited(path: string, new_text: string): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Sets the height of a renderer to explicitly be determined by the “font” and
         * “y_pad” property set on it.  Further changes in these properties do not
         * affect the height, so they must be accompanied by a subsequent call to this
         * function.  Using this function is unflexible, and should really only be used
         * if calculating the size of a cell is too slow (ie, a massive number of cells
         * displayed).  If `number_of_rows` is -1, then the fixed height is unset, and
         * the height is determined by the properties again.
         * @param number_of_rows Number of rows of text each cell renderer is allocated, or -1
         */
        set_fixed_height_from_font(number_of_rows: number): void;
    }


    namespace CellRendererToggle {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends CellRenderer.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * The ::toggled signal is emitted when the cell is toggled.
             * 
             * It is the responsibility of the application to update the model
             * with the correct value to store at `path`.  Often this is simply the
             * opposite of the value currently stored at `path`.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            toggled: (arg0: string) => void;
            "notify::activatable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::active": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::inconsistent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::indicator-size": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::radio": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::cell-background": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::cell-background-gdk": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::cell-background-rgba": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::cell-background-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::editing": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-expanded": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-expander": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::xalign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::xpad": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::yalign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::ypad": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends CellRenderer.ConstructorProps {
            activatable: boolean;
            active: boolean;
            inconsistent: boolean;
            indicator_size: number;
            indicatorSize: number;
            radio: boolean;
        }
    }

    /**
     * {@link Gtk.CellRendererToggle} renders a toggle button in a cell. The
     * button is drawn as a radio or a checkbutton, depending on the
     * {@link Gtk.CellRendererToggle.radio} property.
     * When activated, it emits the {@link Gtk.CellRendererToggle.SignalSignatures.toggled | Gtk.CellRendererToggle::toggled} signal.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class CellRendererToggle extends CellRenderer {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<CellRendererToggle>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * @default true
         */
        get activatable(): boolean;
        set activatable(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get active(): boolean;
        set active(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get inconsistent(): boolean;
        set inconsistent(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default 0
         */
        get indicator_size(): number;
        set indicator_size(val: number);

        /**
         * @default 0
         */
        get indicatorSize(): number;
        set indicatorSize(val: number);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get radio(): boolean;
        set radio(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: CellRendererToggle.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<CellRendererToggle.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): CellRendererToggle;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof CellRendererToggle.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, CellRendererToggle.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof CellRendererToggle.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, CellRendererToggle.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof CellRendererToggle.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<CellRendererToggle.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * @param path 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_toggled(path: string): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Returns whether the cell renderer is activatable. See
         * `gtk_cell_renderer_toggle_set_activatable()`.
         * @returns `true` if the cell renderer is activatable.
         */
        get_activatable(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns whether the cell renderer is active. See
         * `gtk_cell_renderer_toggle_set_active()`.
         * @returns `true` if the cell renderer is active.
         */
        get_active(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns whether we’re rendering radio toggles rather than checkboxes.
         * @returns `true` if we’re rendering radio toggles rather than checkboxes
         */
        get_radio(): boolean;

        /**
         * Makes the cell renderer activatable.
         * @param setting the value to set.
         */
        set_activatable(setting: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Activates or deactivates a cell renderer.
         * @param setting the value to set.
         */
        set_active(setting: boolean): void;

        /**
         * If `radio` is `true`, the cell renderer renders a radio toggle
         * (i.e. a toggle in a group of mutually-exclusive toggles).
         * If `false`, it renders a check toggle (a standalone boolean option).
         * This can be set globally for the cell renderer, or changed just
         * before rendering each cell in the model (for {@link Gtk.TreeView}, you set
         * up a per-row setting using {@link Gtk.TreeViewColumn} to associate model
         * columns with cell renderer properties).
         * @param radio `true` to make the toggle look like a radio button
         */
        set_radio(radio: boolean): void;
    }


    namespace CellView {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Widget.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::background": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::background-gdk": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::background-rgba": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::background-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::cell-area": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::cell-area-context": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::draw-sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::fit-model": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::model": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::orientation": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Widget.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, CellLayout.ConstructorProps, Orientable.ConstructorProps {
            background: string;
            background_gdk: Gdk.Color;
            backgroundGdk: Gdk.Color;
            background_rgba: Gdk.RGBA;
            backgroundRgba: Gdk.RGBA;
            background_set: boolean;
            backgroundSet: boolean;
            cell_area: CellArea;
            cellArea: CellArea;
            cell_area_context: CellAreaContext;
            cellAreaContext: CellAreaContext;
            draw_sensitive: boolean;
            drawSensitive: boolean;
            fit_model: boolean;
            fitModel: boolean;
            model: TreeModel | null;
        }
    }

    /**
     * A {@link Gtk.CellView} displays a single row of a {@link Gtk.TreeModel} using a {@link Gtk.CellArea}
     * and {@link Gtk.CellAreaContext}. A {@link Gtk.CellAreaContext} can be provided to the
     * {@link Gtk.CellView} at construction time in order to keep the cellview in context
     * of a group of cell views, this ensures that the renderers displayed will
     * be properly aligned with eachother (like the aligned cells in the menus
     * of {@link Gtk.ComboBox}).
     * 
     * {@link Gtk.CellView} is {@link Gtk.Orientable} in order to decide in which orientation
     * the underlying {@link Gtk.CellAreaContext} should be allocated. Taking the {@link Gtk.ComboBox}
     * menu as an example, cellviews should be oriented horizontally if the menus are
     * listed top-to-bottom and thus all share the same width but may have separate
     * individual heights (left-to-right menus should be allocated vertically since
     * they all share the same height but may have variable widths).
     * 
     * # CSS nodes
     * 
     * GtkCellView has a single CSS node with name cellview.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class CellView extends Widget implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable, CellLayout, Orientable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<CellView>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * @write-only
         * @default null
         */
        set background(val: string);

        /**
         * The background color as a {@link Gdk.Color}
         * @deprecated since 3.4: Use {@link Gtk.CellView.background_rgba} instead.
         */
        get background_gdk(): Gdk.Color;
        set background_gdk(val: Gdk.Color);

        /**
         * The background color as a {@link Gdk.Color}
         * @deprecated since 3.4: Use {@link Gtk.CellView.background_rgba} instead.
         */
        get backgroundGdk(): Gdk.Color;
        set backgroundGdk(val: Gdk.Color);

        /**
         * The background color as a {@link Gdk.RGBA}
         * @since 3.0
         */
        get background_rgba(): Gdk.RGBA;
        set background_rgba(val: Gdk.RGBA);

        /**
         * The background color as a {@link Gdk.RGBA}
         * @since 3.0
         */
        get backgroundRgba(): Gdk.RGBA;
        set backgroundRgba(val: Gdk.RGBA);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get background_set(): boolean;
        set background_set(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get backgroundSet(): boolean;
        set backgroundSet(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The {@link Gtk.CellArea} rendering cells
         * 
         * If no area is specified when creating the cell view with `gtk_cell_view_new_with_context()`
         * a horizontally oriented {@link Gtk.CellAreaBox} will be used.
         * 
         * since 3.0
         * @construct-only
         */
        get cell_area(): CellArea;

        /**
         * The {@link Gtk.CellArea} rendering cells
         * 
         * If no area is specified when creating the cell view with `gtk_cell_view_new_with_context()`
         * a horizontally oriented {@link Gtk.CellAreaBox} will be used.
         * 
         * since 3.0
         * @construct-only
         */
        get cellArea(): CellArea;

        /**
         * The {@link Gtk.CellAreaContext} used to compute the geometry of the cell view.
         * 
         * A group of cell views can be assigned the same context in order to
         * ensure the sizes and cell alignments match across all the views with
         * the same context.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.ComboBox} menus uses this to assign the same context to all cell views
         * in the menu items for a single menu (each submenu creates its own
         * context since the size of each submenu does not depend on parent
         * or sibling menus).
         * 
         * since 3.0
         * @construct-only
         */
        get cell_area_context(): CellAreaContext;

        /**
         * The {@link Gtk.CellAreaContext} used to compute the geometry of the cell view.
         * 
         * A group of cell views can be assigned the same context in order to
         * ensure the sizes and cell alignments match across all the views with
         * the same context.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.ComboBox} menus uses this to assign the same context to all cell views
         * in the menu items for a single menu (each submenu creates its own
         * context since the size of each submenu does not depend on parent
         * or sibling menus).
         * 
         * since 3.0
         * @construct-only
         */
        get cellAreaContext(): CellAreaContext;

        /**
         * Whether all cells should be draw as sensitive for this view regardless
         * of the actual cell properties (used to make menus with submenus appear
         * sensitive when the items in submenus might be insensitive).
         * 
         * since 3.0
         * @default false
         */
        get draw_sensitive(): boolean;
        set draw_sensitive(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether all cells should be draw as sensitive for this view regardless
         * of the actual cell properties (used to make menus with submenus appear
         * sensitive when the items in submenus might be insensitive).
         * 
         * since 3.0
         * @default false
         */
        get drawSensitive(): boolean;
        set drawSensitive(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether the view should request enough space to always fit
         * the size of every row in the model (used by the combo box to
         * ensure the combo box size doesnt change when different items
         * are selected).
         * 
         * since 3.0
         * @default false
         */
        get fit_model(): boolean;
        set fit_model(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether the view should request enough space to always fit
         * the size of every row in the model (used by the combo box to
         * ensure the combo box size doesnt change when different items
         * are selected).
         * 
         * since 3.0
         * @default false
         */
        get fitModel(): boolean;
        set fitModel(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The model for cell view
         * 
         * since 2.10
         */
        get model(): TreeModel | null;
        set model(val: TreeModel | null);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: CellView.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<CellView.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): CellView;

        static new_with_context(area: CellArea, context: CellAreaContext): CellView;

        static new_with_markup(markup: string): CellView;

        static new_with_pixbuf(pixbuf: GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf): CellView;

        static new_with_text(text: string): CellView;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof CellView.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, CellView.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof CellView.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, CellView.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof CellView.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<CellView.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Returns a {@link Gtk.TreePath} referring to the currently
         * displayed row. If no row is currently displayed,
         * `null` is returned.
         * @returns the currently displayed row or `null`
         */
        get_displayed_row(): TreePath | null;

        /**
         * Gets whether `cell_view` is configured to draw all of its
         * cells in a sensitive state.
         * @returns whether `cell_view` draws all of its cells in a sensitive state
         */
        get_draw_sensitive(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets whether `cell_view` is configured to request space
         * to fit the entire {@link Gtk.TreeModel}.
         * @returns whether `cell_view` requests space to fit the entire {@link Gtk.TreeModel}.
         */
        get_fit_model(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the model for `cell_view`. If no model is used `null` is
         * returned.
         * @returns a {@link Gtk.TreeModel} used or `null`
         */
        get_model(): TreeModel | null;

        /**
         * Sets `requisition` to the size needed by `cell_view` to display
         * the model row pointed to by `path`.
         * @param path a {@link Gtk.TreePath}
         * @returns `true`
         */
        get_size_of_row(path: TreePath): [boolean, Requisition];

        /**
         * Sets the background color of `view`.
         * @param color the new background color
         */
        set_background_color(color: Gdk.Color): void;

        /**
         * Sets the background color of `cell_view`.
         * @param rgba the new background color
         */
        set_background_rgba(rgba: Gdk.RGBA): void;

        /**
         * Sets the row of the model that is currently displayed
         * by the {@link Gtk.CellView}. If the path is unset, then the
         * contents of the cellview “stick” at their last value;
         * this is not normally a desired result, but may be
         * a needed intermediate state if say, the model for
         * the {@link Gtk.CellView} becomes temporarily empty.
         * @param path a {@link Gtk.TreePath} or `null` to unset.
         */
        set_displayed_row(path: TreePath | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether `cell_view` should draw all of its
         * cells in a sensitive state, this is used by {@link Gtk.ComboBox} menus
         * to ensure that rows with insensitive cells that contain
         * children appear sensitive in the parent menu item.
         * @param draw_sensitive whether to draw all cells in a sensitive state.
         */
        set_draw_sensitive(draw_sensitive: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether `cell_view` should request space to fit the entire {@link Gtk.TreeModel}.
         * 
         * This is used by {@link Gtk.ComboBox} to ensure that the cell view displayed on
         * the combo box’s button always gets enough space and does not resize
         * when selection changes.
         * @param fit_model whether `cell_view` should request space for the whole model.
         */
        set_fit_model(fit_model: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the model for `cell_view`.  If `cell_view` already has a model
         * set, it will remove it before setting the new model.  If `model` is
         * `null`, then it will unset the old model.
         * @param model a {@link Gtk.TreeModel}
         */
        set_model(model: TreeModel | null): void;

        /**
         * The orientation of the orientable.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default Gtk.Orientation.HORIZONTAL
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Orientable
         */
        get orientation(): Orientation;
        set orientation(val: Orientation);

        /**
         * Adds a child to `buildable`. `type` is an optional string
         * describing how the child should be added.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child to add
         * @param type kind of child or `null`
         */
        add_child(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object, type: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Constructs a child of `buildable` with the name `name`.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} calls this function if a “constructor” has been
         * specified in the UI definition.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param name name of child to construct
         * @returns the constructed child
         */
        construct_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, name: string): T;

        /**
         * This is similar to `gtk_buildable_parser_finished()` but is
         * called once for each custom tag handled by the `buildable`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname the name of the tag
         * @param data user data created in custom_tag_start
         */
        custom_finished(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
         * the buildable.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @param data user data that will be passed in to parser functions
         */
        custom_tag_end(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called for each unknown element under `<child>`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @returns `true` if a object has a custom implementation, `false`          if it doesn't.
         */
        custom_tag_start(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string): [boolean, GLib.MarkupParser, null];

        /**
         * Get the internal child called `childname` of the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param childname name of child
         * @returns the internal child of the buildable object
         */
        get_internal_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, childname: string): T;

        /**
         * Gets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} sets the name based on the
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI]
         * used to construct the `buildable`.
         * @returns the name set with `gtk_buildable_set_name()`
         */
        get_name(): string;

        /**
         * Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI].
         * Note that this will be called once for each time
         * `gtk_builder_add_from_file()` or `gtk_builder_add_from_string()`
         * is called on a builder.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         */
        parser_finished(builder: Builder): void;

        /**
         * Sets the property name `name` to `value` on the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param name name of property
         * @param value value of property
         */
        set_buildable_property(builder: Builder, name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;

        /**
         * Sets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * @param name name to set
         */
        set_name(name: string): void;

        /**
         * Adds a child to `buildable`. `type` is an optional string
         * describing how the child should be added.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child to add
         * @param type kind of child or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add_child(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object, type: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Constructs a child of `buildable` with the name `name`.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} calls this function if a “constructor” has been
         * specified in the UI definition.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param name name of child to construct
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_construct_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, name: string): T;

        /**
         * This is similar to `gtk_buildable_parser_finished()` but is
         * called once for each custom tag handled by the `buildable`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname the name of the tag
         * @param data user data created in custom_tag_start
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_finished(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
         * the buildable.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @param data user data that will be passed in to parser functions
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_tag_end(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called for each unknown element under `<child>`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_tag_start(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string): [boolean, GLib.MarkupParser, never];

        /**
         * Get the internal child called `childname` of the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param childname name of child
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_internal_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, childname: string): T;

        /**
         * Gets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} sets the name based on the
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI]
         * used to construct the `buildable`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_name(): string;

        /**
         * Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI].
         * Note that this will be called once for each time
         * `gtk_builder_add_from_file()` or `gtk_builder_add_from_string()`
         * is called on a builder.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_parser_finished(builder: Builder): void;

        /**
         * Sets the property name `name` to `value` on the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param name name of property
         * @param value value of property
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_buildable_property(builder: Builder, name: string, value: unknown): void;

        /**
         * Sets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * @param name name to set
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_name(name: string): void;

        /**
         * Adds an attribute mapping to the list in `cell_layout`.
         * 
         * The `column` is the column of the model to get a value from, and the
         * `attribute` is the parameter on `cell` to be set from the value. So for
         * example if column 2 of the model contains strings, you could have the
         * “text” attribute of a {@link Gtk.CellRendererText} get its values from column 2.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param attribute an attribute on the renderer
         * @param column the column position on the model to get the attribute from
         */
        add_attribute(cell: CellRenderer, attribute: string, column: number): void;

        /**
         * Unsets all the mappings on all renderers on `cell_layout` and
         * removes all renderers from `cell_layout`.
         */
        clear(): void;

        /**
         * Clears all existing attributes previously set with
         * `gtk_cell_layout_set_attributes()`.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} to clear the attribute mapping on
         */
        clear_attributes(cell: CellRenderer): void;

        /**
         * Returns the underlying {@link Gtk.CellArea} which might be `cell_layout`
         * if called on a {@link Gtk.CellArea} or might be `null` if no {@link Gtk.CellArea}
         * is used by `cell_layout`.
         * @returns the cell area used by `cell_layout`, or `null` in case no cell area is used.
         */
        get_area(): CellArea | null;

        /**
         * Returns the cell renderers which have been added to `cell_layout`.
         * @returns a list of cell renderers. The list, but not the renderers has     been newly allocated and should be freed with `g_list_free()`     when no longer needed.
         */
        get_cells(): CellRenderer[];

        /**
         * Adds the `cell` to the end of `cell_layout`. If `expand` is `false`, then the
         * `cell` is allocated no more space than it needs. Any unused space is
         * divided evenly between cells for which `expand` is `true`.
         * 
         * Note that reusing the same cell renderer is not supported.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param expand `true` if `cell` is to be given extra space allocated to `cell_layout`
         */
        pack_end(cell: CellRenderer, expand: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Packs the `cell` into the beginning of `cell_layout`. If `expand` is `false`,
         * then the `cell` is allocated no more space than it needs. Any unused space
         * is divided evenly between cells for which `expand` is `true`.
         * 
         * Note that reusing the same cell renderer is not supported.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param expand `true` if `cell` is to be given extra space allocated to `cell_layout`
         */
        pack_start(cell: CellRenderer, expand: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Re-inserts `cell` at `position`.
         * 
         * Note that `cell` has already to be packed into `cell_layout`
         * for this to function properly.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} to reorder
         * @param position new position to insert `cell` at
         */
        reorder(cell: CellRenderer, position: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.CellLayoutDataFunc} to use for `cell_layout`.
         * 
         * This function is used instead of the standard attributes mapping
         * for setting the column value, and should set the value of `cell_layout`’s
         * cell renderer(s) as appropriate.
         * 
         * `func` may be `null` to remove a previously set function.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param func the {@link Gtk.CellLayoutDataFunc} to use, or `null`
         */
        set_cell_data_func(cell: CellRenderer, func: CellLayoutDataFunc | null): void;

        /**
         * Adds an attribute mapping to the list in `cell_layout`.
         * 
         * The `column` is the column of the model to get a value from, and the
         * `attribute` is the parameter on `cell` to be set from the value. So for
         * example if column 2 of the model contains strings, you could have the
         * “text” attribute of a {@link Gtk.CellRendererText} get its values from column 2.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param attribute an attribute on the renderer
         * @param column the column position on the model to get the attribute from
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add_attribute(cell: CellRenderer, attribute: string, column: number): void;

        /**
         * Unsets all the mappings on all renderers on `cell_layout` and
         * removes all renderers from `cell_layout`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_clear(): void;

        /**
         * Clears all existing attributes previously set with
         * `gtk_cell_layout_set_attributes()`.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} to clear the attribute mapping on
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_clear_attributes(cell: CellRenderer): void;

        /**
         * Returns the underlying {@link Gtk.CellArea} which might be `cell_layout`
         * if called on a {@link Gtk.CellArea} or might be `null` if no {@link Gtk.CellArea}
         * is used by `cell_layout`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_area(): CellArea | null;

        /**
         * Returns the cell renderers which have been added to `cell_layout`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_cells(): CellRenderer[];

        /**
         * Adds the `cell` to the end of `cell_layout`. If `expand` is `false`, then the
         * `cell` is allocated no more space than it needs. Any unused space is
         * divided evenly between cells for which `expand` is `true`.
         * 
         * Note that reusing the same cell renderer is not supported.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param expand `true` if `cell` is to be given extra space allocated to `cell_layout`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_pack_end(cell: CellRenderer, expand: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Packs the `cell` into the beginning of `cell_layout`. If `expand` is `false`,
         * then the `cell` is allocated no more space than it needs. Any unused space
         * is divided evenly between cells for which `expand` is `true`.
         * 
         * Note that reusing the same cell renderer is not supported.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param expand `true` if `cell` is to be given extra space allocated to `cell_layout`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_pack_start(cell: CellRenderer, expand: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Re-inserts `cell` at `position`.
         * 
         * Note that `cell` has already to be packed into `cell_layout`
         * for this to function properly.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} to reorder
         * @param position new position to insert `cell` at
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_reorder(cell: CellRenderer, position: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.CellLayoutDataFunc} to use for `cell_layout`.
         * 
         * This function is used instead of the standard attributes mapping
         * for setting the column value, and should set the value of `cell_layout`’s
         * cell renderer(s) as appropriate.
         * 
         * `func` may be `null` to remove a previously set function.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param func the {@link Gtk.CellLayoutDataFunc} to use, or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_cell_data_func(cell: CellRenderer, func: CellLayoutDataFunc | null): void;

        /**
         * Retrieves the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @returns the orientation of the `orientable`.
         */
        get_orientation(): Orientation;

        /**
         * Sets the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @param orientation the orientable’s new orientation.
         */
        set_orientation(orientation: Orientation): void;
    }


    namespace CheckButton {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends ToggleButton.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::active": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::draw-indicator": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::inconsistent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::always-show-image": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::image": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::image-position": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::label": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::relief": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-stock": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-underline": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::xalign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::yalign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends ToggleButton.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Actionable.ConstructorProps, Activatable.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * A {@link Gtk.CheckButton} places a discrete {@link Gtk.ToggleButton} next to a widget,
     * (usually a {@link Gtk.Label}). See the section on {@link Gtk.ToggleButton} widgets for
     * more information about toggle/check buttons.
     * 
     * The important signal ( {@link Gtk.ToggleButton.SignalSignatures.toggled | Gtk.ToggleButton::toggled} ) is also inherited from
     * {@link Gtk.ToggleButton}.
     * 
     * # CSS nodes
     * 
     * 
     * ```
     * checkbutton
     * ├── check
     * ╰── <child>
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * A GtkCheckButton with indicator (see `gtk_toggle_button_set_mode()`) has a
     * main CSS node with name checkbutton and a subnode with name check.
     * 
     * 
     * ```
     * button.check
     * ├── check
     * ╰── <child>
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * A GtkCheckButton without indicator changes the name of its main node
     * to button and adds a .check style class to it. The subnode is invisible
     * in this case.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class CheckButton extends ToggleButton implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Actionable, Activatable, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<CheckButton>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: CheckButton.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        toggle_button: ToggleButton;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<CheckButton.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): CheckButton;

        static new_with_label(label: string): CheckButton;

        static new_with_mnemonic(label: string): CheckButton;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof CheckButton.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, CheckButton.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof CheckButton.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, CheckButton.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof CheckButton.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<CheckButton.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * @param cr 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_draw_indicator(cr: cairo.Context): void;

        /**
         * Emits a {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.child_notify | Gtk.Widget::child-notify} signal for the
         * [child property][child-properties] `child_property`
         * on `widget`.
         * 
         * This is the analogue of `g_object_notify()` for child properties.
         * 
         * Also see `gtk_container_child_notify()`.
         * @param child_property the name of a child property installed on the                  class of `widget`’s parent
         */
        child_notify(child_property: string): void;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Gtk.Container.child_notify
        child_notify(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Returns whether the widget should grab focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
         * See `gtk_widget_set_focus_on_click()`.
         * @returns `true` if the widget should grab focus when it is clicked with               the mouse.
         */
        get_focus_on_click(): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets whether the widget should grab focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
         * Making mouse clicks not grab focus is useful in places like toolbars where
         * you don’t want the keyboard focus removed from the main area of the
         * application.
         * @param focus_on_click whether the widget should grab focus when clicked with the mouse
         */
        set_focus_on_click(focus_on_click: boolean): void;
    }


    namespace CheckMenuItem {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends MenuItem.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * This signal is emitted when the state of the check box is changed.
             * 
             * A signal handler can use `gtk_check_menu_item_get_active()`
             * to discover the new state.
             * @signal
             * @run-first
             */
            toggled: () => void;
            "notify::active": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::draw-as-radio": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::inconsistent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accel-path": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::label": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::right-justified": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::submenu": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-underline": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::action-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::action-target": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::related-action": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-action-appearance": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends MenuItem.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Actionable.ConstructorProps, Activatable.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {
            active: boolean;
            draw_as_radio: boolean;
            drawAsRadio: boolean;
            inconsistent: boolean;
        }
    }

    /**
     * A {@link Gtk.CheckMenuItem} is a menu item that maintains the state of a boolean
     * value in addition to a {@link Gtk.MenuItem} usual role in activating application
     * code.
     * 
     * A check box indicating the state of the boolean value is displayed
     * at the left side of the {@link Gtk.MenuItem}.  Activating the {@link Gtk.MenuItem}
     * toggles the value.
     * 
     * # CSS nodes
     * 
     * 
     * ```
     * menuitem
     * ├── check.left
     * ╰── <child>
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * GtkCheckMenuItem has a main CSS node with name menuitem, and a subnode
     * with name check, which gets the .left or .right style class.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class CheckMenuItem extends MenuItem implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Actionable, Activatable, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<CheckMenuItem>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get active(): boolean;
        set active(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get draw_as_radio(): boolean;
        set draw_as_radio(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get drawAsRadio(): boolean;
        set drawAsRadio(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get inconsistent(): boolean;
        set inconsistent(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: CheckMenuItem.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        menu_item: MenuItem;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<CheckMenuItem.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): CheckMenuItem;

        static new_with_label(label: string): CheckMenuItem;

        static new_with_mnemonic(label: string): CheckMenuItem;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof CheckMenuItem.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, CheckMenuItem.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof CheckMenuItem.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, CheckMenuItem.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof CheckMenuItem.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<CheckMenuItem.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * Called to draw the check indicator.
         * @param cr 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_draw_indicator(cr: cairo.Context): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.CheckMenuItem.SignalSignatures.toggled | Gtk.CheckMenuItem::toggled} signal.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_toggled(): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Returns whether the check menu item is active. See
         * gtk_check_menu_item_set_active ().
         * @returns `true` if the menu item is checked.
         */
        get_active(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns whether `check_menu_item` looks like a {@link Gtk.RadioMenuItem}
         * @returns Whether `check_menu_item` looks like a {@link Gtk.RadioMenuItem}
         */
        get_draw_as_radio(): boolean;

        /**
         * Retrieves the value set by `gtk_check_menu_item_set_inconsistent()`.
         * @returns `true` if inconsistent
         */
        get_inconsistent(): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the active state of the menu item’s check box.
         * @param is_active boolean value indicating whether the check box is active.
         */
        set_active(is_active: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether `check_menu_item` is drawn like a {@link Gtk.RadioMenuItem}
         * @param draw_as_radio whether `check_menu_item` is drawn like a {@link Gtk.RadioMenuItem}
         */
        set_draw_as_radio(draw_as_radio: boolean): void;

        /**
         * If the user has selected a range of elements (such as some text or
         * spreadsheet cells) that are affected by a boolean setting, and the
         * current values in that range are inconsistent, you may want to
         * display the check in an “in between” state. This function turns on
         * “in between” display.  Normally you would turn off the inconsistent
         * state again if the user explicitly selects a setting. This has to be
         * done manually, `gtk_check_menu_item_set_inconsistent()` only affects
         * visual appearance, it doesn’t affect the semantics of the widget.
         * @param setting `true` to display an “inconsistent” third state check
         */
        set_inconsistent(setting: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.CheckMenuItem.SignalSignatures.toggled | Gtk.CheckMenuItem::toggled} signal.
         */
        toggled(): void;

        /**
         * @default null
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable
         */
        get action_name(): string | null;
        set action_name(val: string | null);

        /**
         * @default null
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable
         */
        get actionName(): string | null;
        set actionName(val: string | null);

        /** @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable */
        get action_target(): GLib.Variant;
        set action_target(val: GLib.Variant);

        /** @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable */
        get actionTarget(): GLib.Variant;
        set actionTarget(val: GLib.Variant);

        /**
         * The action that this activatable will activate and receive
         * updates from for various states and possibly appearance.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the this property and
         * > call `gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action()` when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get related_action(): Action;
        set related_action(val: Action);

        /**
         * The action that this activatable will activate and receive
         * updates from for various states and possibly appearance.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the this property and
         * > call `gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action()` when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get relatedAction(): Action;
        set relatedAction(val: Action);

        /**
         * Whether this activatable should reset its layout
         * and appearance when setting the related action or when
         * the action changes appearance.
         * 
         * See the {@link Gtk.Action} documentation directly to find which properties
         * should be ignored by the {@link Gtk.Activatable} when this property is `false`.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle this property
         * > and call `gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties()` on the activatable
         * > widget when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get use_action_appearance(): boolean;
        set use_action_appearance(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether this activatable should reset its layout
         * and appearance when setting the related action or when
         * the action changes appearance.
         * 
         * See the {@link Gtk.Action} documentation directly to find which properties
         * should be ignored by the {@link Gtk.Activatable} when this property is `false`.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle this property
         * > and call `gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties()` on the activatable
         * > widget when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get useActionAppearance(): boolean;
        set useActionAppearance(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Gets the action name for `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_name()` for more information.
         * @returns the action name, or `null` if none is set
         */
        get_action_name(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the current target value of `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_target_value()` for more information.
         * @returns the current target value
         */
        get_action_target_value(): GLib.Variant;

        /**
         * Specifies the name of the action with which this widget should be
         * associated.  If `action_name` is `null` then the widget will be
         * unassociated from any previous action.
         * 
         * Usually this function is used when the widget is located (or will be
         * located) within the hierarchy of a {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow}.
         * 
         * Names are of the form “win.save” or “app.quit” for actions on the
         * containing {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow} or its associated {@link Gtk.Application},
         * respectively.  This is the same form used for actions in the {@link Gio.Menu}
         * associated with the window.
         * @param action_name an action name, or `null`
         */
        set_action_name(action_name: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the target value of an actionable widget.
         * 
         * If `target_value` is `null` then the target value is unset.
         * 
         * The target value has two purposes.  First, it is used as the
         * parameter to activation of the action associated with the
         * {@link Gtk.Actionable} widget. Second, it is used to determine if the widget
         * should be rendered as “active” — the widget is active if the state
         * is equal to the given target.
         * 
         * Consider the example of associating a set of buttons with a {@link Gio.Action}
         * with string state in a typical “radio button” situation.  Each button
         * will be associated with the same action, but with a different target
         * value for that action.  Clicking on a particular button will activate
         * the action with the target of that button, which will typically cause
         * the action’s state to change to that value.  Since the action’s state
         * is now equal to the target value of the button, the button will now
         * be rendered as active (and the other buttons, with different targets,
         * rendered inactive).
         * @param target_value a {@link GLib.Variant} to set as the target value, or `null`
         */
        set_action_target_value(target_value: GLib.Variant | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the action-name and associated string target value of an
         * actionable widget.
         * 
         * `detailed_action_name` is a string in the format accepted by
         * `g_action_parse_detailed_name()`.
         * 
         * (Note that prior to version 3.22.25,
         * this function is only usable for actions with a simple "s" target, and
         * `detailed_action_name` must be of the form `"action::target"` where
         * `action` is the action name and `target` is the string to use
         * as the target.)
         * @param detailed_action_name the detailed action name
         */
        set_detailed_action_name(detailed_action_name: string): void;

        /**
         * Gets the action name for `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_name()` for more information.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_action_name(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the current target value of `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_target_value()` for more information.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_action_target_value(): GLib.Variant;

        /**
         * Specifies the name of the action with which this widget should be
         * associated.  If `action_name` is `null` then the widget will be
         * unassociated from any previous action.
         * 
         * Usually this function is used when the widget is located (or will be
         * located) within the hierarchy of a {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow}.
         * 
         * Names are of the form “win.save” or “app.quit” for actions on the
         * containing {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow} or its associated {@link Gtk.Application},
         * respectively.  This is the same form used for actions in the {@link Gio.Menu}
         * associated with the window.
         * @param action_name an action name, or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_action_name(action_name: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the target value of an actionable widget.
         * 
         * If `target_value` is `null` then the target value is unset.
         * 
         * The target value has two purposes.  First, it is used as the
         * parameter to activation of the action associated with the
         * {@link Gtk.Actionable} widget. Second, it is used to determine if the widget
         * should be rendered as “active” — the widget is active if the state
         * is equal to the given target.
         * 
         * Consider the example of associating a set of buttons with a {@link Gio.Action}
         * with string state in a typical “radio button” situation.  Each button
         * will be associated with the same action, but with a different target
         * value for that action.  Clicking on a particular button will activate
         * the action with the target of that button, which will typically cause
         * the action’s state to change to that value.  Since the action’s state
         * is now equal to the target value of the button, the button will now
         * be rendered as active (and the other buttons, with different targets,
         * rendered inactive).
         * @param target_value a {@link GLib.Variant} to set as the target value, or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_action_target_value(target_value: GLib.Variant | null): void;

        /**
         * This is a utility function for {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors.
         * 
         * When implementing {@link Gtk.Activatable} you must call this when
         * handling changes of the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action}, and
         * you must also use this to break references in {@link GObject.Object}->dispose().
         * 
         * This function adds a reference to the currently set related
         * action for you, it also makes sure the {@link Gtk.Activatable}->update()
         * method is called when the related {@link Gtk.Action} properties change
         * and registers to the action’s proxy list.
         * 
         * > Be careful to call this before setting the local
         * > copy of the {@link Gtk.Action} property, since this function uses
         * > `gtk_activatable_get_related_action()` to retrieve the
         * > previous action.
         * @param action the {@link Gtk.Action} to set
         */
        do_set_related_action(action: Action): void;

        /**
         * Gets the related {@link Gtk.Action} for `activatable`.
         * @returns the related {@link Gtk.Action} if one is set.
         */
        get_related_action(): Action;

        /**
         * Gets whether this activatable should reset its layout
         * and appearance when setting the related action or when
         * the action changes appearance.
         * @returns whether `activatable` uses its actions appearance.
         */
        get_use_action_appearance(): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the related action on the `activatable` object.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action}
         * > property and call `gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action()` when it changes.
         * @param action the {@link Gtk.Action} to set
         */
        set_related_action(action: Action): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether this activatable should reset its layout and appearance
         * when setting the related action or when the action changes appearance
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} property and call
         * > `gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties()` to update `activatable`
         * > if needed.
         * @param use_appearance whether to use the actions appearance
         */
        set_use_action_appearance(use_appearance: boolean): void;

        /**
         * This is called to update the activatable completely, this is called
         * internally when the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action} property is set
         * or unset and by the implementing class when
         * {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} changes.
         * @param action the related {@link Gtk.Action} or `null`
         */
        sync_action_properties(action: Action | null): void;

        /**
         * This is called to update the activatable completely, this is called
         * internally when the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action} property is set
         * or unset and by the implementing class when
         * {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} changes.
         * @param action the related {@link Gtk.Action} or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_sync_action_properties(action: Action | null): void;

        /**
         * Called to update the activatable when its related action’s properties change.
         * You must check the {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} property only apply action
         * properties that are meant to effect the appearance accordingly.
         * @param action 
         * @param property_name 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_update(action: Action, property_name: string): void;

        /**
         * For widgets that can be “activated” (buttons, menu items, etc.)
         * this function activates them. Activation is what happens when you
         * press Enter on a widget during key navigation. If `widget` isn't
         * activatable, the function returns `false`.
         * @returns `true` if the widget was activatable
         */
        activate(): boolean;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Gtk.MenuItem.activate
        activate(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Emits a {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.child_notify | Gtk.Widget::child-notify} signal for the
         * [child property][child-properties] `child_property`
         * on `widget`.
         * 
         * This is the analogue of `g_object_notify()` for child properties.
         * 
         * Also see `gtk_container_child_notify()`.
         * @param child_property the name of a child property installed on the                  class of `widget`’s parent
         */
        child_notify(child_property: string): void;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Gtk.Container.child_notify
        child_notify(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Given an accelerator group, `accel_group`, and an accelerator path,
         * `accel_path`, sets up an accelerator in `accel_group` so whenever the
         * key binding that is defined for `accel_path` is pressed, `widget`
         * will be activated.  This removes any accelerators (for any
         * accelerator group) installed by previous calls to
         * `gtk_widget_set_accel_path()`. Associating accelerators with
         * paths allows them to be modified by the user and the modifications
         * to be saved for future use. (See `gtk_accel_map_save()`.)
         * 
         * This function is a low level function that would most likely
         * be used by a menu creation system like {@link Gtk.UIManager}. If you
         * use {@link Gtk.UIManager}, setting up accelerator paths will be done
         * automatically.
         * 
         * Even when you you aren’t using {@link Gtk.UIManager}, if you only want to
         * set up accelerators on menu items `gtk_menu_item_set_accel_path()`
         * provides a somewhat more convenient interface.
         * 
         * Note that `accel_path` string will be stored in a {@link GLib.Quark}. Therefore, if you
         * pass a static string, you can save some memory by interning it first with
         * `g_intern_static_string()`.
         * @param accel_path path used to look up the accelerator
         * @param accel_group a {@link Gtk.AccelGroup}.
         */
        set_accel_path(accel_path: string | null, accel_group: AccelGroup | null): void;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Gtk.MenuItem.set_accel_path
        set_accel_path(...args: never[]): any;
    }


    namespace CheckMenuItemAccessible {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends MenuItemAccessible.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-layer": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-mdi-zorder": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-help-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-hypertext-nlinks": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption-object": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-summary": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends MenuItemAccessible.ConstructorProps, Atk.Action.ConstructorProps, Atk.Component.ConstructorProps, Atk.Selection.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class CheckMenuItemAccessible extends MenuItemAccessible implements Atk.Action, Atk.Component, Atk.Selection {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<CheckMenuItemAccessible>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: CheckMenuItemAccessible.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<CheckMenuItemAccessible.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof CheckMenuItemAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, CheckMenuItemAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof CheckMenuItemAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, CheckMenuItemAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof CheckMenuItemAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<CheckMenuItemAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        /**
         * Perform the specified action on the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns `true` if success, `false` otherwise
         */
        do_action(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns a description of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns a description string, or `null` if `action` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_description(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.get_description
        get_description(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Gets the keybinding which can be used to activate this action, if one
         * exists. The string returned should contain localized, human-readable,
         * key sequences as they would appear when displayed on screen. It must
         * be in the format "mnemonic;sequence;shortcut".
         * 
         * - The mnemonic key activates the object if it is presently enabled onscreen.
         *   This typically corresponds to the underlined letter within the widget.
         *   Example: "n" in a traditional "New..." menu item or the "a" in "Apply" for
         *   a button.
         * - The sequence is the full list of keys which invoke the action even if the
         *   relevant element is not currently shown on screen. For instance, for a menu
         *   item the sequence is the keybindings used to open the parent menus before
         *   invoking. The sequence string is colon-delimited. Example: "Alt+F:N" in a
         *   traditional "New..." menu item.
         * - The shortcut, if it exists, will invoke the same action without showing
         *   the component or its enclosing menus or dialogs. Example: "Ctrl+N" in a
         *   traditional "New..." menu item.
         * 
         * Example: For a traditional "New..." menu item, the expected return value
         * would be: "N;Alt+F:N;Ctrl+N" for the English locale and "N;Alt+D:N;Strg+N"
         * for the German locale. If, hypothetically, this menu item lacked a mnemonic,
         * it would be represented by ";;Ctrl+N" and ";;Strg+N" respectively.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns the keybinding which can be used to activate this action, or `null` if there is no keybinding for this action.
         */
        get_keybinding(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Returns the localized name of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns a name string, or `null` if `action` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_localized_name(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the number of accessible actions available on the object.
         * If there are more than one, the first one is considered the
         * "default" action of the object.
         * @returns a the number of actions, or 0 if `action` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_n_actions(): number;

        /**
         * Returns a non-localized string naming the specified action of the
         * object. This name is generally not descriptive of the end result
         * of the action, but instead names the 'interaction type' which the
         * object supports. By convention, the above strings should be used to
         * represent the actions which correspond to the common point-and-click
         * interaction techniques of the same name: i.e.
         * "click", "press", "release", "drag", "drop", "popup", etc.
         * The "popup" action should be used to pop up a context menu for the
         * object, if one exists.
         * 
         * For technical reasons, some toolkits cannot guarantee that the
         * reported action is actually 'bound' to a nontrivial user event;
         * i.e. the result of some actions via `atk_action_do_action()` may be
         * NIL.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns a name string, or `null` if `action` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_name(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.get_name
        get_name(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Sets a description of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @param desc the description to be assigned to this action
         * @returns a gboolean representing if the description was successfully set;
         */
        set_description(i: number, desc: string): boolean;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.set_description
        set_description(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Perform the specified action on the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_do_action(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns a description of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_description(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         * @virtual
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.vfunc_get_description
        vfunc_get_description(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Gets the keybinding which can be used to activate this action, if one
         * exists. The string returned should contain localized, human-readable,
         * key sequences as they would appear when displayed on screen. It must
         * be in the format "mnemonic;sequence;shortcut".
         * 
         * - The mnemonic key activates the object if it is presently enabled onscreen.
         *   This typically corresponds to the underlined letter within the widget.
         *   Example: "n" in a traditional "New..." menu item or the "a" in "Apply" for
         *   a button.
         * - The sequence is the full list of keys which invoke the action even if the
         *   relevant element is not currently shown on screen. For instance, for a menu
         *   item the sequence is the keybindings used to open the parent menus before
         *   invoking. The sequence string is colon-delimited. Example: "Alt+F:N" in a
         *   traditional "New..." menu item.
         * - The shortcut, if it exists, will invoke the same action without showing
         *   the component or its enclosing menus or dialogs. Example: "Ctrl+N" in a
         *   traditional "New..." menu item.
         * 
         * Example: For a traditional "New..." menu item, the expected return value
         * would be: "N;Alt+F:N;Ctrl+N" for the English locale and "N;Alt+D:N;Strg+N"
         * for the German locale. If, hypothetically, this menu item lacked a mnemonic,
         * it would be represented by ";;Ctrl+N" and ";;Strg+N" respectively.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_keybinding(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Returns the localized name of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_localized_name(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the number of accessible actions available on the object.
         * If there are more than one, the first one is considered the
         * "default" action of the object.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_n_actions(): number;

        /**
         * Returns a non-localized string naming the specified action of the
         * object. This name is generally not descriptive of the end result
         * of the action, but instead names the 'interaction type' which the
         * object supports. By convention, the above strings should be used to
         * represent the actions which correspond to the common point-and-click
         * interaction techniques of the same name: i.e.
         * "click", "press", "release", "drag", "drop", "popup", etc.
         * The "popup" action should be used to pop up a context menu for the
         * object, if one exists.
         * 
         * For technical reasons, some toolkits cannot guarantee that the
         * reported action is actually 'bound' to a nontrivial user event;
         * i.e. the result of some actions via `atk_action_do_action()` may be
         * NIL.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_name(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         * @virtual
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.vfunc_get_name
        vfunc_get_name(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Sets a description of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @param desc the description to be assigned to this action
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_description(i: number, desc: string): boolean;

        /**
         * @param args 
         * @virtual
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.vfunc_set_description
        vfunc_set_description(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Adds the specified accessible child of the object to the
         * object's selection.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the child index.
         * @returns TRUE if success, FALSE otherwise.
         */
        add_selection(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Clears the selection in the object so that no children in the object
         * are selected.
         * @returns TRUE if success, FALSE otherwise.
         */
        clear_selection(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the number of accessible children currently selected.
         * Note: callers should not rely on `null` or on a zero value for
         * indication of whether AtkSelectionIface is implemented, they should
         * use type checking/interface checking macros or the
         * `atk_get_accessible_value()` convenience method.
         * @returns a gint representing the number of items selected, or 0 if `selection` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_selection_count(): number;

        /**
         * Determines if the current child of this object is selected
         * Note: callers should not rely on `null` or on a zero value for
         * indication of whether AtkSelectionIface is implemented, they should
         * use type checking/interface checking macros or the
         * `atk_get_accessible_value()` convenience method.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the child index.
         * @returns a gboolean representing the specified child is selected, or 0 if `selection` does not implement this interface.
         */
        is_child_selected(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets a reference to the accessible object representing the specified
         * selected child of the object.
         * Note: callers should not rely on `null` or on a zero value for
         * indication of whether AtkSelectionIface is implemented, they should
         * use type checking/interface checking macros or the
         * `atk_get_accessible_value()` convenience method.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the index in the selection set.  (e.g. the ith selection as opposed to the ith child).
         * @returns an {@link Atk.Object} representing the selected accessible, or `null` if `selection` does not implement this interface.
         */
        ref_selection(i: number): Atk.Object | null;

        /**
         * Removes the specified child of the object from the object's selection.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the index in the selection set.  (e.g. the ith selection as opposed to the ith child).
         * @returns TRUE if success, FALSE otherwise.
         */
        remove_selection(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Causes every child of the object to be selected if the object
         * supports multiple selections.
         * @returns TRUE if success, FALSE otherwise.
         */
        select_all_selection(): boolean;

        /**
         * Adds the specified accessible child of the object to the
         * object's selection.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the child index.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add_selection(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Clears the selection in the object so that no children in the object
         * are selected.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_clear_selection(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the number of accessible children currently selected.
         * Note: callers should not rely on `null` or on a zero value for
         * indication of whether AtkSelectionIface is implemented, they should
         * use type checking/interface checking macros or the
         * `atk_get_accessible_value()` convenience method.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_selection_count(): number;

        /**
         * Determines if the current child of this object is selected
         * Note: callers should not rely on `null` or on a zero value for
         * indication of whether AtkSelectionIface is implemented, they should
         * use type checking/interface checking macros or the
         * `atk_get_accessible_value()` convenience method.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the child index.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_is_child_selected(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets a reference to the accessible object representing the specified
         * selected child of the object.
         * Note: callers should not rely on `null` or on a zero value for
         * indication of whether AtkSelectionIface is implemented, they should
         * use type checking/interface checking macros or the
         * `atk_get_accessible_value()` convenience method.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the index in the selection set.  (e.g. the ith selection as opposed to the ith child).
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_ref_selection(i: number): Atk.Object | null;

        /**
         * Removes the specified child of the object from the object's selection.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the index in the selection set.  (e.g. the ith selection as opposed to the ith child).
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_remove_selection(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Causes every child of the object to be selected if the object
         * supports multiple selections.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_select_all_selection(): boolean;

        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_selection_changed(): void;
    }


    namespace Clipboard {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends GObject.Object.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * The ::owner-change signal is emitted when GTK+ receives an
             * event that indicates that the ownership of the selection
             * associated with `clipboard` has changed.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.6
             * @run-first
             */
            "owner-change": (arg0: Gdk.EventOwnerChange) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.Object.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * The {@link Gtk.Clipboard} object represents a clipboard of data shared
     * between different processes or between different widgets in
     * the same process. Each clipboard is identified by a name encoded as a
     * {@link Gdk.Atom}. (Conversion to and from strings can be done with
     * `gdk_atom_intern()` and `gdk_atom_name()`.) The default clipboard
     * corresponds to the “CLIPBOARD” atom; another commonly used clipboard
     * is the “PRIMARY” clipboard, which, in X, traditionally contains
     * the currently selected text.
     * 
     * To support having a number of different formats on the clipboard
     * at the same time, the clipboard mechanism allows providing
     * callbacks instead of the actual data.  When you set the contents
     * of the clipboard, you can either supply the data directly (via
     * functions like `gtk_clipboard_set_text()`), or you can supply a
     * callback to be called at a later time when the data is needed (via
     * `gtk_clipboard_set_with_data()` or `gtk_clipboard_set_with_owner()`.)
     * Providing a callback also avoids having to make copies of the data
     * when it is not needed.
     * 
     * `gtk_clipboard_set_with_data()` and `gtk_clipboard_set_with_owner()`
     * are quite similar; the choice between the two depends mostly on
     * which is more convenient in a particular situation.
     * The former is most useful when you want to have a blob of data
     * with callbacks to convert it into the various data types that you
     * advertise. When the `clear_func` you provided is called, you
     * simply free the data blob. The latter is more useful when the
     * contents of clipboard reflect the internal state of a {@link GObject.Object}
     * (As an example, for the PRIMARY clipboard, when an entry widget
     * provides the clipboard’s contents the contents are simply the
     * text within the selected region.) If the contents change, the
     * entry widget can call `gtk_clipboard_set_with_owner()` to update
     * the timestamp for clipboard ownership, without having to worry
     * about `clear_func` being called.
     * 
     * Requesting the data from the clipboard is essentially
     * asynchronous. If the contents of the clipboard are provided within
     * the same process, then a direct function call will be made to
     * retrieve the data, but if they are provided by another process,
     * then the data needs to be retrieved from the other process, which
     * may take some time. To avoid blocking the user interface, the call
     * to request the selection, `gtk_clipboard_request_contents()` takes a
     * callback that will be called when the contents are received (or
     * when the request fails.) If you don’t want to deal with providing
     * a separate callback, you can also use `gtk_clipboard_wait_for_contents()`.
     * What this does is run the GLib main loop recursively waiting for
     * the contents. This can simplify the code flow, but you still have
     * to be aware that other callbacks in your program can be called
     * while this recursive mainloop is running.
     * 
     * Along with the functions to get the clipboard contents as an
     * arbitrary data chunk, there are also functions to retrieve
     * it as text, `gtk_clipboard_request_text()` and
     * `gtk_clipboard_wait_for_text()`. These functions take care of
     * determining which formats are advertised by the clipboard
     * provider, asking for the clipboard in the best available format
     * and converting the results into the UTF-8 encoding. (The standard
     * form for representing strings in GTK+.)
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class Clipboard extends GObject.Object {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<Clipboard>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: Clipboard.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<Clipboard.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof Clipboard.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Clipboard.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof Clipboard.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Clipboard.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof Clipboard.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<Clipboard.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Static methods
        /**
         * Returns the clipboard object for the given selection.
         * See `gtk_clipboard_get_for_display()` for complete details.
         * @param selection a {@link Gdk.Atom} which identifies the clipboard to use
         */
        static get(selection: Gdk.Atom): Clipboard;

        /**
         * Returns the default clipboard object for use with cut/copy/paste menu items
         * and keyboard shortcuts.
         * @param display the {@link Gdk.Display} for which the clipboard is to be retrieved.
         */
        static get_default(display: Gdk.Display): Clipboard;

        /**
         * Returns the clipboard object for the given selection.
         * Cut/copy/paste menu items and keyboard shortcuts should use
         * the default clipboard, returned by passing `GDK_SELECTION_CLIPBOARD` for `selection`.
         * (`GDK_NONE` is supported as a synonym for GDK_SELECTION_CLIPBOARD
         * for backwards compatibility reasons.)
         * The currently-selected object or text should be provided on the clipboard
         * identified by #GDK_SELECTION_PRIMARY. Cut/copy/paste menu items
         * conceptually copy the contents of the #GDK_SELECTION_PRIMARY clipboard
         * to the default clipboard, i.e. they copy the selection to what the
         * user sees as the clipboard.
         * 
         * (Passing #GDK_NONE is the same as using `gdk_atom_intern
         * ("CLIPBOARD", FALSE)`.
         * 
         * See the
         * [FreeDesktop Clipboard Specification](http://www.freedesktop.org/Standards/clipboards-spec)
         * for a detailed discussion of the “CLIPBOARD” vs. “PRIMARY”
         * selections under the X window system. On Win32 the
         * #GDK_SELECTION_PRIMARY clipboard is essentially ignored.)
         * 
         * It’s possible to have arbitrary named clipboards; if you do invent
         * new clipboards, you should prefix the selection name with an
         * underscore (because the ICCCM requires that nonstandard atoms are
         * underscore-prefixed), and namespace it as well. For example,
         * if your application called “Foo” has a special-purpose
         * clipboard, you might call it “_FOO_SPECIAL_CLIPBOARD”.
         * @param display the {@link Gdk.Display} for which the clipboard is to be retrieved or created.
         * @param selection a {@link Gdk.Atom} which identifies the clipboard to use.
         */
        static get_for_display(display: Gdk.Display, selection: Gdk.Atom): Clipboard;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Clears the contents of the clipboard. Generally this should only
         * be called between the time you call `gtk_clipboard_set_with_owner()`
         * or `gtk_clipboard_set_with_data()`,
         * and when the `clear_func` you supplied is called. Otherwise, the
         * clipboard may be owned by someone else.
         */
        clear(): void;

        /**
         * Gets the {@link Gdk.Display} associated with `clipboard`
         * @returns the {@link Gdk.Display} associated with `clipboard`
         */
        get_display(): Gdk.Display;

        /**
         * If the clipboard contents callbacks were set with
         * `gtk_clipboard_set_with_owner()`, and the `gtk_clipboard_set_with_data()` or
         * `gtk_clipboard_clear()` has not subsequently called, returns the owner set
         * by `gtk_clipboard_set_with_owner()`.
         * @returns the owner of the clipboard, if any;     otherwise `null`.
         */
        get_owner<T = GObject.Object>(): T;

        /**
         * Gets the selection that this clipboard is for.
         * @returns the selection
         */
        get_selection(): Gdk.Atom;

        /**
         * Requests the contents of clipboard as the given target.
         * When the results of the result are later received the supplied callback
         * will be called.
         * @param target an atom representing the form into which the clipboard     owner should convert the selection.
         * @param callback A function to call when the results are received     (or the retrieval fails). If the retrieval fails the length field of     `selection_data` will be negative.
         */
        request_contents(target: Gdk.Atom, callback: ClipboardReceivedFunc): void;

        /**
         * Requests the contents of the clipboard as image. When the image is
         * later received, it will be converted to a {@link GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf}, and
         * `callback` will be called.
         * 
         * The `pixbuf` parameter to `callback` will contain the resulting
         * {@link GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf} if the request succeeded, or `null` if it failed. This
         * could happen for various reasons, in particular if the clipboard
         * was empty or if the contents of the clipboard could not be
         * converted into an image.
         * @param callback a function to call when the image is received,     or the retrieval fails. (It will always be called one way or the other.)
         */
        request_image(callback: ClipboardImageReceivedFunc): void;

        /**
         * Requests the contents of the clipboard as rich text. When the rich
         * text is later received, `callback` will be called.
         * 
         * The `text` parameter to `callback` will contain the resulting rich
         * text if the request succeeded, or `null` if it failed. The `length`
         * parameter will contain `text`’s length. This function can fail for
         * various reasons, in particular if the clipboard was empty or if the
         * contents of the clipboard could not be converted into rich text form.
         * @param buffer a {@link Gtk.TextBuffer}
         * @param callback a function to call when the text is received,     or the retrieval fails. (It will always be called one way or the other.)
         */
        request_rich_text(buffer: TextBuffer, callback: ClipboardRichTextReceivedFunc): void;

        /**
         * Requests the contents of the clipboard as list of supported targets.
         * When the list is later received, `callback` will be called.
         * 
         * The `targets` parameter to `callback` will contain the resulting targets if
         * the request succeeded, or `null` if it failed.
         * @param callback a function to call when the targets are     received, or the retrieval fails. (It will always be called     one way or the other.)
         */
        request_targets(callback: ClipboardTargetsReceivedFunc): void;

        /**
         * Requests the contents of the clipboard as text. When the text is
         * later received, it will be converted to UTF-8 if necessary, and
         * `callback` will be called.
         * 
         * The `text` parameter to `callback` will contain the resulting text if
         * the request succeeded, or `null` if it failed. This could happen for
         * various reasons, in particular if the clipboard was empty or if the
         * contents of the clipboard could not be converted into text form.
         * @param callback a function to call when the text is received,     or the retrieval fails. (It will always be called one way or the other.)
         */
        request_text(callback: ClipboardTextReceivedFunc): void;

        /**
         * Requests the contents of the clipboard as URIs. When the URIs are
         * later received `callback` will be called.
         * 
         * The `uris` parameter to `callback` will contain the resulting array of
         * URIs if the request succeeded, or `null` if it failed. This could happen
         * for various reasons, in particular if the clipboard was empty or if the
         * contents of the clipboard could not be converted into URI form.
         * @param callback a function to call when the URIs are received,     or the retrieval fails. (It will always be called one way or the other.)
         */
        request_uris(callback: ClipboardURIReceivedFunc): void;

        /**
         * Hints that the clipboard data should be stored somewhere when the
         * application exits or when gtk_clipboard_store () is called.
         * 
         * This value is reset when the clipboard owner changes.
         * Where the clipboard data is stored is platform dependent,
         * see gdk_display_store_clipboard () for more information.
         * @param targets array containing           information about which forms should be stored or `null`           to indicate that all forms should be stored.
         */
        set_can_store(targets: TargetEntry[] | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the contents of the clipboard to the given {@link GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf}.
         * GTK+ will take responsibility for responding for requests
         * for the image, and for converting the image into the
         * requested format.
         * @param pixbuf a {@link GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf}
         */
        set_image(pixbuf: GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf): void;

        /**
         * Sets the contents of the clipboard to the given UTF-8 string. GTK+ will
         * make a copy of the text and take responsibility for responding
         * for requests for the text, and for converting the text into
         * the requested format.
         * @param text a UTF-8 string.
         * @param len length of `text`, in bytes, or -1, in which case             the length will be determined with `strlen()`.
         */
        set_text(text: string, len: number): void;

        /**
         * Stores the current clipboard data somewhere so that it will stay
         * around after the application has quit.
         */
        store(): void;

        /**
         * Requests the contents of the clipboard using the given target.
         * This function waits for the data to be received using the main
         * loop, so events, timeouts, etc, may be dispatched during the wait.
         * @param target an atom representing the form into which the clipboard          owner should convert the selection.
         * @returns a newly-allocated {@link Gtk.SelectionData} object or `null`               if retrieving the given target failed. If non-`null`,               this value must be freed with `gtk_selection_data_free()`               when you are finished with it.
         */
        wait_for_contents(target: Gdk.Atom): SelectionData | null;

        /**
         * Requests the contents of the clipboard as image and converts
         * the result to a {@link GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf}. This function waits for
         * the data to be received using the main loop, so events,
         * timeouts, etc, may be dispatched during the wait.
         * @returns a newly-allocated {@link GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf}     object which must be disposed with `g_object_unref()`, or     `null` if retrieving the selection data failed. (This could     happen for various reasons, in particular if the clipboard     was empty or if the contents of the clipboard could not be     converted into an image.)
         */
        wait_for_image(): GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf | null;

        /**
         * Requests the contents of the clipboard as rich text.  This function
         * waits for the data to be received using the main loop, so events,
         * timeouts, etc, may be dispatched during the wait.
         * @param buffer a {@link Gtk.TextBuffer}
         * @returns a               newly-allocated binary block of data which must be               freed with `g_free()`, or `null` if retrieving the               selection data failed. (This could happen for various               reasons, in particular if the clipboard was empty or               if the contents of the clipboard could not be               converted into text form.)
         */
        wait_for_rich_text(buffer: TextBuffer): [Uint8Array | null, Gdk.Atom];

        /**
         * Returns a list of targets that are present on the clipboard, or `null`
         * if there aren’t any targets available. The returned list must be
         * freed with `g_free()`.
         * This function waits for the data to be received using the main
         * loop, so events, timeouts, etc, may be dispatched during the wait.
         * @returns `true` if any targets are present on the clipboard,               otherwise `false`.
         */
        wait_for_targets(): [boolean, Gdk.Atom[]];

        /**
         * Requests the contents of the clipboard as text and converts
         * the result to UTF-8 if necessary. This function waits for
         * the data to be received using the main loop, so events,
         * timeouts, etc, may be dispatched during the wait.
         * @returns a newly-allocated UTF-8 string which must               be freed with `g_free()`, or `null` if retrieving               the selection data failed. (This could happen               for various reasons, in particular if the               clipboard was empty or if the contents of the               clipboard could not be converted into text form.)
         */
        wait_for_text(): string | null;

        /**
         * Requests the contents of the clipboard as URIs. This function waits
         * for the data to be received using the main loop, so events,
         * timeouts, etc, may be dispatched during the wait.
         * @returns a newly-allocated `null`-terminated array of strings which must     be freed with `g_strfreev()`, or `null` if retrieving the     selection data failed. (This could happen for various reasons,     in particular if the clipboard was empty or if the contents of     the clipboard could not be converted into URI form.)
         */
        wait_for_uris(): string[] | null;

        /**
         * Test to see if there is an image available to be pasted
         * This is done by requesting the TARGETS atom and checking
         * if it contains any of the supported image targets. This function
         * waits for the data to be received using the main loop, so events,
         * timeouts, etc, may be dispatched during the wait.
         * 
         * This function is a little faster than calling
         * `gtk_clipboard_wait_for_image()` since it doesn’t need to retrieve
         * the actual image data.
         * @returns `true` is there is an image available, `false` otherwise.
         */
        wait_is_image_available(): boolean;

        /**
         * Test to see if there is rich text available to be pasted
         * This is done by requesting the TARGETS atom and checking
         * if it contains any of the supported rich text targets. This function
         * waits for the data to be received using the main loop, so events,
         * timeouts, etc, may be dispatched during the wait.
         * 
         * This function is a little faster than calling
         * `gtk_clipboard_wait_for_rich_text()` since it doesn’t need to retrieve
         * the actual text.
         * @param buffer a {@link Gtk.TextBuffer}
         * @returns `true` is there is rich text available, `false` otherwise.
         */
        wait_is_rich_text_available(buffer: TextBuffer): boolean;

        /**
         * Checks if a clipboard supports pasting data of a given type. This
         * function can be used to determine if a “Paste” menu item should be
         * insensitive or not.
         * 
         * If you want to see if there’s text available on the clipboard, use
         * gtk_clipboard_wait_is_text_available () instead.
         * @param target A {@link Gdk.Atom} indicating which target to look for.
         * @returns `true` if the target is available, `false` otherwise.
         */
        wait_is_target_available(target: Gdk.Atom): boolean;

        /**
         * Test to see if there is text available to be pasted
         * This is done by requesting the TARGETS atom and checking
         * if it contains any of the supported text targets. This function
         * waits for the data to be received using the main loop, so events,
         * timeouts, etc, may be dispatched during the wait.
         * 
         * This function is a little faster than calling
         * `gtk_clipboard_wait_for_text()` since it doesn’t need to retrieve
         * the actual text.
         * @returns `true` is there is text available, `false` otherwise.
         */
        wait_is_text_available(): boolean;

        /**
         * Test to see if there is a list of URIs available to be pasted
         * This is done by requesting the TARGETS atom and checking
         * if it contains the URI targets. This function
         * waits for the data to be received using the main loop, so events,
         * timeouts, etc, may be dispatched during the wait.
         * 
         * This function is a little faster than calling
         * `gtk_clipboard_wait_for_uris()` since it doesn’t need to retrieve
         * the actual URI data.
         * @returns `true` is there is an URI list available, `false` otherwise.
         */
        wait_is_uris_available(): boolean;
    }


    namespace ColorButton {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Button.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * The ::color-set signal is emitted when the user selects a color.
             * When handling this signal, use `gtk_color_button_get_rgba()` to
             * find out which color was just selected.
             * 
             * Note that this signal is only emitted when the user
             * changes the color. If you need to react to programmatic color changes
             * as well, use the notify::color signal.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.4
             * @run-first
             */
            "color-set": () => void;
            "notify::alpha": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::color": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::rgba": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::show-editor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::title": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-alpha": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::always-show-image": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::image": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::image-position": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::label": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::relief": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-stock": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-underline": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::xalign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::yalign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::action-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::action-target": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::related-action": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-action-appearance": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Button.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Actionable.ConstructorProps, Activatable.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, ColorChooser.ConstructorProps {
            alpha: number;
            color: Gdk.Color;
            rgba: Gdk.RGBA;
            show_editor: boolean;
            showEditor: boolean;
            title: string;
            use_alpha: boolean;
            useAlpha: boolean;
        }
    }

    /**
     * The {@link Gtk.ColorButton} is a button which displays the currently selected
     * color and allows to open a color selection dialog to change the color.
     * It is suitable widget for selecting a color in a preference dialog.
     * 
     * # CSS nodes
     * 
     * GtkColorButton has a single CSS node with name button. To differentiate
     * it from a plain {@link Gtk.Button}, it gets the .color style class.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class ColorButton extends Button implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Actionable, Activatable, Buildable, ColorChooser {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ColorButton>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * The selected opacity value (0 fully transparent, 65535 fully opaque).
         * @since 2.4
         * @default 65535
         */
        get alpha(): number;
        set alpha(val: number);

        /**
         * The selected color.
         * @since 2.4
         * @deprecated since 3.4: Use {@link Gtk.ColorButton.rgba} instead.
         */
        get color(): Gdk.Color;
        set color(val: Gdk.Color);

        /**
         * The RGBA color.
         * @since 3.0
         */
        get rgba(): Gdk.RGBA;
        set rgba(val: Gdk.RGBA);

        /**
         * Set this property to `true` to skip the palette
         * in the dialog and go directly to the color editor.
         * 
         * This property should be used in cases where the palette
         * in the editor would be redundant, such as when the color
         * button is already part of a palette.
         * @since 3.20
         * @default false
         */
        get show_editor(): boolean;
        set show_editor(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Set this property to `true` to skip the palette
         * in the dialog and go directly to the color editor.
         * 
         * This property should be used in cases where the palette
         * in the editor would be redundant, such as when the color
         * button is already part of a palette.
         * @since 3.20
         * @default false
         */
        get showEditor(): boolean;
        set showEditor(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The title of the color selection dialog
         * @since 2.4
         * @default Pick a Color
         */
        get title(): string;
        set title(val: string);

        /**
         * If this property is set to `true`, the color swatch on the button is
         * rendered against a checkerboard background to show its opacity and
         * the opacity slider is displayed in the color selection dialog.
         * @since 2.4
         * @default false
         */
        get use_alpha(): boolean;
        set use_alpha(val: boolean);

        /**
         * If this property is set to `true`, the color swatch on the button is
         * rendered against a checkerboard background to show its opacity and
         * the opacity slider is displayed in the color selection dialog.
         * @since 2.4
         * @default false
         */
        get useAlpha(): boolean;
        set useAlpha(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: ColorButton.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        button: Button;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<ColorButton.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): ColorButton;

        static new_with_color(color: Gdk.Color): ColorButton;

        static new_with_rgba(rgba: Gdk.RGBA): ColorButton;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof ColorButton.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ColorButton.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof ColorButton.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ColorButton.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof ColorButton.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<ColorButton.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_color_set(): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Returns the current alpha value.
         * @returns an integer between 0 and 65535
         */
        get_alpha(): number;

        /**
         * Sets `color` to be the current color in the {@link Gtk.ColorButton} widget.
         */
        get_color(): Gdk.Color;

        /**
         * Gets the title of the color selection dialog.
         * @returns An internal string, do not free the return value
         */
        get_title(): string;

        /**
         * Does the color selection dialog use the alpha channel ?
         * @returns `true` if the color sample uses alpha channel, `false` if not
         */
        get_use_alpha(): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the current opacity to be `alpha`.
         * @param alpha an integer between 0 and 65535
         */
        set_alpha(alpha: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the current color to be `color`.
         * @param color A {@link Gdk.Color} to set the current color with
         */
        set_color(color: Gdk.Color): void;

        /**
         * Sets the title for the color selection dialog.
         * @param title String containing new window title
         */
        set_title(title: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether or not the color button should use the alpha channel.
         * @param use_alpha `true` if color button should use alpha channel, `false` if not
         */
        set_use_alpha(use_alpha: boolean): void;

        /**
         * @default null
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable
         */
        get action_name(): string | null;
        set action_name(val: string | null);

        /**
         * @default null
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable
         */
        get actionName(): string | null;
        set actionName(val: string | null);

        /** @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable */
        get action_target(): GLib.Variant;
        set action_target(val: GLib.Variant);

        /** @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable */
        get actionTarget(): GLib.Variant;
        set actionTarget(val: GLib.Variant);

        /**
         * The action that this activatable will activate and receive
         * updates from for various states and possibly appearance.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the this property and
         * > call `gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action()` when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get related_action(): Action;
        set related_action(val: Action);

        /**
         * The action that this activatable will activate and receive
         * updates from for various states and possibly appearance.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the this property and
         * > call `gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action()` when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get relatedAction(): Action;
        set relatedAction(val: Action);

        /**
         * Whether this activatable should reset its layout
         * and appearance when setting the related action or when
         * the action changes appearance.
         * 
         * See the {@link Gtk.Action} documentation directly to find which properties
         * should be ignored by the {@link Gtk.Activatable} when this property is `false`.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle this property
         * > and call `gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties()` on the activatable
         * > widget when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get use_action_appearance(): boolean;
        set use_action_appearance(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether this activatable should reset its layout
         * and appearance when setting the related action or when
         * the action changes appearance.
         * 
         * See the {@link Gtk.Action} documentation directly to find which properties
         * should be ignored by the {@link Gtk.Activatable} when this property is `false`.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle this property
         * > and call `gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties()` on the activatable
         * > widget when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get useActionAppearance(): boolean;
        set useActionAppearance(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Gets the action name for `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_name()` for more information.
         * @returns the action name, or `null` if none is set
         */
        get_action_name(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the current target value of `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_target_value()` for more information.
         * @returns the current target value
         */
        get_action_target_value(): GLib.Variant;

        /**
         * Specifies the name of the action with which this widget should be
         * associated.  If `action_name` is `null` then the widget will be
         * unassociated from any previous action.
         * 
         * Usually this function is used when the widget is located (or will be
         * located) within the hierarchy of a {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow}.
         * 
         * Names are of the form “win.save” or “app.quit” for actions on the
         * containing {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow} or its associated {@link Gtk.Application},
         * respectively.  This is the same form used for actions in the {@link Gio.Menu}
         * associated with the window.
         * @param action_name an action name, or `null`
         */
        set_action_name(action_name: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the target value of an actionable widget.
         * 
         * If `target_value` is `null` then the target value is unset.
         * 
         * The target value has two purposes.  First, it is used as the
         * parameter to activation of the action associated with the
         * {@link Gtk.Actionable} widget. Second, it is used to determine if the widget
         * should be rendered as “active” — the widget is active if the state
         * is equal to the given target.
         * 
         * Consider the example of associating a set of buttons with a {@link Gio.Action}
         * with string state in a typical “radio button” situation.  Each button
         * will be associated with the same action, but with a different target
         * value for that action.  Clicking on a particular button will activate
         * the action with the target of that button, which will typically cause
         * the action’s state to change to that value.  Since the action’s state
         * is now equal to the target value of the button, the button will now
         * be rendered as active (and the other buttons, with different targets,
         * rendered inactive).
         * @param target_value a {@link GLib.Variant} to set as the target value, or `null`
         */
        set_action_target_value(target_value: GLib.Variant | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the action-name and associated string target value of an
         * actionable widget.
         * 
         * `detailed_action_name` is a string in the format accepted by
         * `g_action_parse_detailed_name()`.
         * 
         * (Note that prior to version 3.22.25,
         * this function is only usable for actions with a simple "s" target, and
         * `detailed_action_name` must be of the form `"action::target"` where
         * `action` is the action name and `target` is the string to use
         * as the target.)
         * @param detailed_action_name the detailed action name
         */
        set_detailed_action_name(detailed_action_name: string): void;

        /**
         * Gets the action name for `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_name()` for more information.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_action_name(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the current target value of `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_target_value()` for more information.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_action_target_value(): GLib.Variant;

        /**
         * Specifies the name of the action with which this widget should be
         * associated.  If `action_name` is `null` then the widget will be
         * unassociated from any previous action.
         * 
         * Usually this function is used when the widget is located (or will be
         * located) within the hierarchy of a {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow}.
         * 
         * Names are of the form “win.save” or “app.quit” for actions on the
         * containing {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow} or its associated {@link Gtk.Application},
         * respectively.  This is the same form used for actions in the {@link Gio.Menu}
         * associated with the window.
         * @param action_name an action name, or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_action_name(action_name: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the target value of an actionable widget.
         * 
         * If `target_value` is `null` then the target value is unset.
         * 
         * The target value has two purposes.  First, it is used as the
         * parameter to activation of the action associated with the
         * {@link Gtk.Actionable} widget. Second, it is used to determine if the widget
         * should be rendered as “active” — the widget is active if the state
         * is equal to the given target.
         * 
         * Consider the example of associating a set of buttons with a {@link Gio.Action}
         * with string state in a typical “radio button” situation.  Each button
         * will be associated with the same action, but with a different target
         * value for that action.  Clicking on a particular button will activate
         * the action with the target of that button, which will typically cause
         * the action’s state to change to that value.  Since the action’s state
         * is now equal to the target value of the button, the button will now
         * be rendered as active (and the other buttons, with different targets,
         * rendered inactive).
         * @param target_value a {@link GLib.Variant} to set as the target value, or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_action_target_value(target_value: GLib.Variant | null): void;

        /**
         * This is a utility function for {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors.
         * 
         * When implementing {@link Gtk.Activatable} you must call this when
         * handling changes of the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action}, and
         * you must also use this to break references in {@link GObject.Object}->dispose().
         * 
         * This function adds a reference to the currently set related
         * action for you, it also makes sure the {@link Gtk.Activatable}->update()
         * method is called when the related {@link Gtk.Action} properties change
         * and registers to the action’s proxy list.
         * 
         * > Be careful to call this before setting the local
         * > copy of the {@link Gtk.Action} property, since this function uses
         * > `gtk_activatable_get_related_action()` to retrieve the
         * > previous action.
         * @param action the {@link Gtk.Action} to set
         */
        do_set_related_action(action: Action): void;

        /**
         * Gets the related {@link Gtk.Action} for `activatable`.
         * @returns the related {@link Gtk.Action} if one is set.
         */
        get_related_action(): Action;

        /**
         * Gets whether this activatable should reset its layout
         * and appearance when setting the related action or when
         * the action changes appearance.
         * @returns whether `activatable` uses its actions appearance.
         */
        get_use_action_appearance(): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the related action on the `activatable` object.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action}
         * > property and call `gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action()` when it changes.
         * @param action the {@link Gtk.Action} to set
         */
        set_related_action(action: Action): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether this activatable should reset its layout and appearance
         * when setting the related action or when the action changes appearance
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} property and call
         * > `gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties()` to update `activatable`
         * > if needed.
         * @param use_appearance whether to use the actions appearance
         */
        set_use_action_appearance(use_appearance: boolean): void;

        /**
         * This is called to update the activatable completely, this is called
         * internally when the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action} property is set
         * or unset and by the implementing class when
         * {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} changes.
         * @param action the related {@link Gtk.Action} or `null`
         */
        sync_action_properties(action: Action | null): void;

        /**
         * This is called to update the activatable completely, this is called
         * internally when the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action} property is set
         * or unset and by the implementing class when
         * {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} changes.
         * @param action the related {@link Gtk.Action} or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_sync_action_properties(action: Action | null): void;

        /**
         * Called to update the activatable when its related action’s properties change.
         * You must check the {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} property only apply action
         * properties that are meant to effect the appearance accordingly.
         * @param action 
         * @param property_name 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_update(action: Action, property_name: string): void;

        /**
         * Adds a palette to the color chooser. If `orientation` is horizontal,
         * the colors are grouped in rows, with `colors_per_line` colors
         * in each row. If `horizontal` is `false`, the colors are grouped
         * in columns instead.
         * 
         * The default color palette of {@link Gtk.ColorChooserWidget} has
         * 27 colors, organized in columns of 3 colors. The default gray
         * palette has 9 grays in a single row.
         * 
         * The layout of the color chooser widget works best when the
         * palettes have 9-10 columns.
         * 
         * Calling this function for the first time has the
         * side effect of removing the default color and gray palettes
         * from the color chooser.
         * 
         * If `colors` is `null`, removes all previously added palettes.
         * @param orientation {@link Gtk.Orientation.HORIZONTAL} if the palette should     be displayed in rows, {@link Gtk.Orientation.VERTICAL} for columns
         * @param colors_per_line the number of colors to show in each row/column
         * @param colors the colors of the palette, or `null`
         */
        add_palette(orientation: Orientation, colors_per_line: number, colors: Gdk.RGBA[] | null): void;

        /**
         * Gets the currently-selected color.
         */
        get_rgba(): Gdk.RGBA;

        /**
         * Sets the color.
         * @param color the new color
         */
        set_rgba(color: Gdk.RGBA): void;

        /**
         * Adds a palette to the color chooser. If `orientation` is horizontal,
         * the colors are grouped in rows, with `colors_per_line` colors
         * in each row. If `horizontal` is `false`, the colors are grouped
         * in columns instead.
         * 
         * The default color palette of {@link Gtk.ColorChooserWidget} has
         * 27 colors, organized in columns of 3 colors. The default gray
         * palette has 9 grays in a single row.
         * 
         * The layout of the color chooser widget works best when the
         * palettes have 9-10 columns.
         * 
         * Calling this function for the first time has the
         * side effect of removing the default color and gray palettes
         * from the color chooser.
         * 
         * If `colors` is `null`, removes all previously added palettes.
         * @param orientation {@link Gtk.Orientation.HORIZONTAL} if the palette should     be displayed in rows, {@link Gtk.Orientation.VERTICAL} for columns
         * @param colors_per_line the number of colors to show in each row/column
         * @param colors the colors of the palette, or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add_palette(orientation: Orientation, colors_per_line: number, colors: Gdk.RGBA[] | null): void;

        /**
         * @param color 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_color_activated(color: Gdk.RGBA): void;

        /**
         * Gets the currently-selected color.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_rgba(): Gdk.RGBA;

        /**
         * Sets the color.
         * @param color the new color
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_rgba(color: Gdk.RGBA): void;

        /**
         * Emits a {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.child_notify | Gtk.Widget::child-notify} signal for the
         * [child property][child-properties] `child_property`
         * on `widget`.
         * 
         * This is the analogue of `g_object_notify()` for child properties.
         * 
         * Also see `gtk_container_child_notify()`.
         * @param child_property the name of a child property installed on the                  class of `widget`’s parent
         */
        child_notify(child_property: string): void;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Gtk.Container.child_notify
        child_notify(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Returns whether the widget should grab focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
         * See `gtk_widget_set_focus_on_click()`.
         * @returns `true` if the widget should grab focus when it is clicked with               the mouse.
         */
        get_focus_on_click(): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets whether the widget should grab focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
         * Making mouse clicks not grab focus is useful in places like toolbars where
         * you don’t want the keyboard focus removed from the main area of the
         * application.
         * @param focus_on_click whether the widget should grab focus when clicked with the mouse
         */
        set_focus_on_click(focus_on_click: boolean): void;
    }


    namespace ColorChooserDialog {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Dialog.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::show-editor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-header-bar": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accept-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::application": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::attached-to": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::decorated": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::default-height": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::default-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::deletable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::destroy-with-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-map": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gravity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-resize-grip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-toplevel-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hide-titlebar-when-maximized": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::icon": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::icon-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-active": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-maximized": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::mnemonics-visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::modal": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resizable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-grip-visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::screen": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::skip-pager-hint": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::skip-taskbar-hint": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::startup-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::title": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::transient-for": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::type": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::type-hint": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::urgency-hint": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window-position": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::rgba": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-alpha": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Dialog.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, ColorChooser.ConstructorProps {
            show_editor: boolean;
            showEditor: boolean;
        }
    }

    /**
     * The {@link Gtk.ColorChooserDialog} widget is a dialog for choosing
     * a color. It implements the {@link Gtk.ColorChooser} interface.
     * @gir-type Class
     * @since 3.4
     */
    class ColorChooserDialog extends Dialog implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable, ColorChooser {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ColorChooserDialog>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get show_editor(): boolean;
        set show_editor(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get showEditor(): boolean;
        set showEditor(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: ColorChooserDialog.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<ColorChooserDialog.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](title: string | null, parent: Window | null): ColorChooserDialog;

        // Conflicted with Gtk.Dialog.new
        static ["new"](...args: never[]): any;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof ColorChooserDialog.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ColorChooserDialog.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof ColorChooserDialog.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ColorChooserDialog.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof ColorChooserDialog.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<ColorChooserDialog.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        /**
         * The ::rgba property contains the currently selected color,
         * as a {@link Gdk.RGBA} struct. The property can be set to change
         * the current selection programmatically.
         * @since 3.4
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.ColorChooser
         */
        get rgba(): Gdk.RGBA;
        set rgba(val: Gdk.RGBA);

        /**
         * When ::use-alpha is `true`, colors may have alpha (translucency)
         * information. When it is `false`, the {@link Gdk.RGBA} struct obtained
         * via the {@link Gtk.ColorChooser.rgba} property will be forced to have
         * alpha == 1.
         * 
         * Implementations are expected to show alpha by rendering the color
         * over a non-uniform background (like a checkerboard pattern).
         * @since 3.4
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.ColorChooser
         */
        get use_alpha(): boolean;
        set use_alpha(val: boolean);

        /**
         * When ::use-alpha is `true`, colors may have alpha (translucency)
         * information. When it is `false`, the {@link Gdk.RGBA} struct obtained
         * via the {@link Gtk.ColorChooser.rgba} property will be forced to have
         * alpha == 1.
         * 
         * Implementations are expected to show alpha by rendering the color
         * over a non-uniform background (like a checkerboard pattern).
         * @since 3.4
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.ColorChooser
         */
        get useAlpha(): boolean;
        set useAlpha(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Adds a palette to the color chooser. If `orientation` is horizontal,
         * the colors are grouped in rows, with `colors_per_line` colors
         * in each row. If `horizontal` is `false`, the colors are grouped
         * in columns instead.
         * 
         * The default color palette of {@link Gtk.ColorChooserWidget} has
         * 27 colors, organized in columns of 3 colors. The default gray
         * palette has 9 grays in a single row.
         * 
         * The layout of the color chooser widget works best when the
         * palettes have 9-10 columns.
         * 
         * Calling this function for the first time has the
         * side effect of removing the default color and gray palettes
         * from the color chooser.
         * 
         * If `colors` is `null`, removes all previously added palettes.
         * @param orientation {@link Gtk.Orientation.HORIZONTAL} if the palette should     be displayed in rows, {@link Gtk.Orientation.VERTICAL} for columns
         * @param colors_per_line the number of colors to show in each row/column
         * @param colors the colors of the palette, or `null`
         */
        add_palette(orientation: Orientation, colors_per_line: number, colors: Gdk.RGBA[] | null): void;

        /**
         * Gets the currently-selected color.
         */
        get_rgba(): Gdk.RGBA;

        /**
         * Returns whether the color chooser shows the alpha channel.
         * @returns `true` if the color chooser uses the alpha channel,     `false` if not
         */
        get_use_alpha(): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the color.
         * @param color the new color
         */
        set_rgba(color: Gdk.RGBA): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether or not the color chooser should use the alpha channel.
         * @param use_alpha `true` if color chooser should use alpha channel, `false` if not
         */
        set_use_alpha(use_alpha: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Adds a palette to the color chooser. If `orientation` is horizontal,
         * the colors are grouped in rows, with `colors_per_line` colors
         * in each row. If `horizontal` is `false`, the colors are grouped
         * in columns instead.
         * 
         * The default color palette of {@link Gtk.ColorChooserWidget} has
         * 27 colors, organized in columns of 3 colors. The default gray
         * palette has 9 grays in a single row.
         * 
         * The layout of the color chooser widget works best when the
         * palettes have 9-10 columns.
         * 
         * Calling this function for the first time has the
         * side effect of removing the default color and gray palettes
         * from the color chooser.
         * 
         * If `colors` is `null`, removes all previously added palettes.
         * @param orientation {@link Gtk.Orientation.HORIZONTAL} if the palette should     be displayed in rows, {@link Gtk.Orientation.VERTICAL} for columns
         * @param colors_per_line the number of colors to show in each row/column
         * @param colors the colors of the palette, or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add_palette(orientation: Orientation, colors_per_line: number, colors: Gdk.RGBA[] | null): void;

        /**
         * @param color 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_color_activated(color: Gdk.RGBA): void;

        /**
         * Gets the currently-selected color.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_rgba(): Gdk.RGBA;

        /**
         * Sets the color.
         * @param color the new color
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_rgba(color: Gdk.RGBA): void;
    }


    namespace ColorChooserWidget {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Box.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::show-editor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::baseline-position": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::homogeneous": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::spacing": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::rgba": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-alpha": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::orientation": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Box.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, ColorChooser.ConstructorProps, Orientable.ConstructorProps {
            show_editor: boolean;
            showEditor: boolean;
        }
    }

    /**
     * The {@link Gtk.ColorChooserWidget} widget lets the user select a
     * color. By default, the chooser presents a predefined palette
     * of colors, plus a small number of settable custom colors.
     * It is also possible to select a different color with the
     * single-color editor. To enter the single-color editing mode,
     * use the context menu of any color of the palette, or use the
     * '+' button to add a new custom color.
     * 
     * The chooser automatically remembers the last selection, as well
     * as custom colors.
     * 
     * To change the initially selected color, use `gtk_color_chooser_set_rgba()`.
     * To get the selected color use `gtk_color_chooser_get_rgba()`.
     * 
     * The {@link Gtk.ColorChooserWidget} is used in the {@link Gtk.ColorChooserDialog}
     * to provide a dialog for selecting colors.
     * 
     * # CSS names
     * 
     * GtkColorChooserWidget has a single CSS node with name colorchooser.
     * @gir-type Class
     * @since 3.4
     */
    class ColorChooserWidget extends Box implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable, ColorChooser, Orientable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ColorChooserWidget>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * The ::show-editor property is `true` when the color chooser
         * is showing the single-color editor. It can be set to switch
         * the color chooser into single-color editing mode.
         * @since 3.4
         * @default false
         */
        get show_editor(): boolean;
        set show_editor(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The ::show-editor property is `true` when the color chooser
         * is showing the single-color editor. It can be set to switch
         * the color chooser into single-color editing mode.
         * @since 3.4
         * @default false
         */
        get showEditor(): boolean;
        set showEditor(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: ColorChooserWidget.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<ColorChooserWidget.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): ColorChooserWidget;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof ColorChooserWidget.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ColorChooserWidget.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof ColorChooserWidget.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ColorChooserWidget.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof ColorChooserWidget.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<ColorChooserWidget.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        /**
         * The ::rgba property contains the currently selected color,
         * as a {@link Gdk.RGBA} struct. The property can be set to change
         * the current selection programmatically.
         * @since 3.4
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.ColorChooser
         */
        get rgba(): Gdk.RGBA;
        set rgba(val: Gdk.RGBA);

        /**
         * When ::use-alpha is `true`, colors may have alpha (translucency)
         * information. When it is `false`, the {@link Gdk.RGBA} struct obtained
         * via the {@link Gtk.ColorChooser.rgba} property will be forced to have
         * alpha == 1.
         * 
         * Implementations are expected to show alpha by rendering the color
         * over a non-uniform background (like a checkerboard pattern).
         * @since 3.4
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.ColorChooser
         */
        get use_alpha(): boolean;
        set use_alpha(val: boolean);

        /**
         * When ::use-alpha is `true`, colors may have alpha (translucency)
         * information. When it is `false`, the {@link Gdk.RGBA} struct obtained
         * via the {@link Gtk.ColorChooser.rgba} property will be forced to have
         * alpha == 1.
         * 
         * Implementations are expected to show alpha by rendering the color
         * over a non-uniform background (like a checkerboard pattern).
         * @since 3.4
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.ColorChooser
         */
        get useAlpha(): boolean;
        set useAlpha(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The orientation of the orientable.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default Gtk.Orientation.HORIZONTAL
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Orientable
         */
        get orientation(): Orientation;
        set orientation(val: Orientation);

        /**
         * Adds a palette to the color chooser. If `orientation` is horizontal,
         * the colors are grouped in rows, with `colors_per_line` colors
         * in each row. If `horizontal` is `false`, the colors are grouped
         * in columns instead.
         * 
         * The default color palette of {@link Gtk.ColorChooserWidget} has
         * 27 colors, organized in columns of 3 colors. The default gray
         * palette has 9 grays in a single row.
         * 
         * The layout of the color chooser widget works best when the
         * palettes have 9-10 columns.
         * 
         * Calling this function for the first time has the
         * side effect of removing the default color and gray palettes
         * from the color chooser.
         * 
         * If `colors` is `null`, removes all previously added palettes.
         * @param orientation {@link Gtk.Orientation.HORIZONTAL} if the palette should     be displayed in rows, {@link Gtk.Orientation.VERTICAL} for columns
         * @param colors_per_line the number of colors to show in each row/column
         * @param colors the colors of the palette, or `null`
         */
        add_palette(orientation: Orientation, colors_per_line: number, colors: Gdk.RGBA[] | null): void;

        /**
         * Gets the currently-selected color.
         */
        get_rgba(): Gdk.RGBA;

        /**
         * Returns whether the color chooser shows the alpha channel.
         * @returns `true` if the color chooser uses the alpha channel,     `false` if not
         */
        get_use_alpha(): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the color.
         * @param color the new color
         */
        set_rgba(color: Gdk.RGBA): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether or not the color chooser should use the alpha channel.
         * @param use_alpha `true` if color chooser should use alpha channel, `false` if not
         */
        set_use_alpha(use_alpha: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Adds a palette to the color chooser. If `orientation` is horizontal,
         * the colors are grouped in rows, with `colors_per_line` colors
         * in each row. If `horizontal` is `false`, the colors are grouped
         * in columns instead.
         * 
         * The default color palette of {@link Gtk.ColorChooserWidget} has
         * 27 colors, organized in columns of 3 colors. The default gray
         * palette has 9 grays in a single row.
         * 
         * The layout of the color chooser widget works best when the
         * palettes have 9-10 columns.
         * 
         * Calling this function for the first time has the
         * side effect of removing the default color and gray palettes
         * from the color chooser.
         * 
         * If `colors` is `null`, removes all previously added palettes.
         * @param orientation {@link Gtk.Orientation.HORIZONTAL} if the palette should     be displayed in rows, {@link Gtk.Orientation.VERTICAL} for columns
         * @param colors_per_line the number of colors to show in each row/column
         * @param colors the colors of the palette, or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add_palette(orientation: Orientation, colors_per_line: number, colors: Gdk.RGBA[] | null): void;

        /**
         * @param color 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_color_activated(color: Gdk.RGBA): void;

        /**
         * Gets the currently-selected color.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_rgba(): Gdk.RGBA;

        /**
         * Sets the color.
         * @param color the new color
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_rgba(color: Gdk.RGBA): void;

        /**
         * Retrieves the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @returns the orientation of the `orientable`.
         */
        get_orientation(): Orientation;

        /**
         * Sets the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @param orientation the orientable’s new orientation.
         */
        set_orientation(orientation: Orientation): void;
    }


    namespace ColorSelection {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Box.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * This signal is emitted when the color changes in the {@link Gtk.ColorSelection}
             * according to its update policy.
             * @signal
             * @run-first
             */
            "color-changed": () => void;
            "notify::current-alpha": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::current-color": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::current-rgba": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-opacity-control": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-palette": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::baseline-position": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::homogeneous": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::spacing": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::orientation": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Box.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, Orientable.ConstructorProps {
            current_alpha: number;
            currentAlpha: number;
            current_color: Gdk.Color;
            currentColor: Gdk.Color;
            current_rgba: Gdk.RGBA;
            currentRgba: Gdk.RGBA;
            has_opacity_control: boolean;
            hasOpacityControl: boolean;
            has_palette: boolean;
            hasPalette: boolean;
        }
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class ColorSelection extends Box implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable, Orientable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ColorSelection>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * @default 65535
         */
        get current_alpha(): number;
        set current_alpha(val: number);

        /**
         * @default 65535
         */
        get currentAlpha(): number;
        set currentAlpha(val: number);

        /**
         * The current GdkColor color.
         * @deprecated since 3.4: Use {@link Gtk.ColorSelection.current_rgba} instead.
         */
        get current_color(): Gdk.Color;
        set current_color(val: Gdk.Color);

        /**
         * The current GdkColor color.
         * @deprecated since 3.4: Use {@link Gtk.ColorSelection.current_rgba} instead.
         */
        get currentColor(): Gdk.Color;
        set currentColor(val: Gdk.Color);

        /**
         * The current RGBA color.
         * @since 3.0
         */
        get current_rgba(): Gdk.RGBA;
        set current_rgba(val: Gdk.RGBA);

        /**
         * The current RGBA color.
         * @since 3.0
         */
        get currentRgba(): Gdk.RGBA;
        set currentRgba(val: Gdk.RGBA);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get has_opacity_control(): boolean;
        set has_opacity_control(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get hasOpacityControl(): boolean;
        set hasOpacityControl(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get has_palette(): boolean;
        set has_palette(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get hasPalette(): boolean;
        set hasPalette(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: ColorSelection.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<ColorSelection.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): ColorSelection;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof ColorSelection.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ColorSelection.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof ColorSelection.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ColorSelection.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof ColorSelection.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<ColorSelection.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Static methods
        /**
         * Parses a color palette string; the string is a colon-separated
         * list of color names readable by `gdk_color_parse()`.
         * @param str a string encoding a color palette
         */
        static palette_from_string(str: string): [boolean, Gdk.Color[]];

        /**
         * Encodes a palette as a string, useful for persistent storage.
         * @param colors an array of colors
         */
        static palette_to_string(colors: Gdk.Color[]): string;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_color_changed(): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Returns the current alpha value.
         * @returns an integer between 0 and 65535
         */
        get_current_alpha(): number;

        /**
         * Sets `color` to be the current color in the GtkColorSelection widget.
         */
        get_current_color(): Gdk.Color;

        /**
         * Sets `rgba` to be the current color in the GtkColorSelection widget.
         */
        get_current_rgba(): Gdk.RGBA;

        /**
         * Determines whether the colorsel has an opacity control.
         * @returns `true` if the `colorsel` has an opacity control,     `false` if it does't
         */
        get_has_opacity_control(): boolean;

        /**
         * Determines whether the color selector has a color palette.
         * @returns `true` if the selector has a palette, `false` if it hasn't
         */
        get_has_palette(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the previous alpha value.
         * @returns an integer between 0 and 65535
         */
        get_previous_alpha(): number;

        /**
         * Fills `color` in with the original color value.
         */
        get_previous_color(): Gdk.Color;

        /**
         * Fills `rgba` in with the original color value.
         */
        get_previous_rgba(): Gdk.RGBA;

        /**
         * Gets the current state of the `colorsel`.
         * @returns `true` if the user is currently dragging     a color around, and `false` if the selection has stopped
         */
        is_adjusting(): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the current opacity to be `alpha`.
         * 
         * The first time this is called, it will also set
         * the original opacity to be `alpha` too.
         * @param alpha an integer between 0 and 65535
         */
        set_current_alpha(alpha: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the current color to be `color`.
         * 
         * The first time this is called, it will also set
         * the original color to be `color` too.
         * @param color a {@link Gdk.Color} to set the current color with
         */
        set_current_color(color: Gdk.Color): void;

        /**
         * Sets the current color to be `rgba`.
         * 
         * The first time this is called, it will also set
         * the original color to be `rgba` too.
         * @param rgba A {@link Gdk.RGBA} to set the current color with
         */
        set_current_rgba(rgba: Gdk.RGBA): void;

        /**
         * Sets the `colorsel` to use or not use opacity.
         * @param has_opacity `true` if `colorsel` can set the opacity, `false` otherwise
         */
        set_has_opacity_control(has_opacity: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Shows and hides the palette based upon the value of `has_palette`.
         * @param has_palette `true` if palette is to be visible, `false` otherwise
         */
        set_has_palette(has_palette: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the “previous” alpha to be `alpha`.
         * 
         * This function should be called with some hesitations,
         * as it might seem confusing to have that alpha change.
         * @param alpha an integer between 0 and 65535
         */
        set_previous_alpha(alpha: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the “previous” color to be `color`.
         * 
         * This function should be called with some hesitations,
         * as it might seem confusing to have that color change.
         * Calling `gtk_color_selection_set_current_color()` will also
         * set this color the first time it is called.
         * @param color a {@link Gdk.Color} to set the previous color with
         */
        set_previous_color(color: Gdk.Color): void;

        /**
         * Sets the “previous” color to be `rgba`.
         * 
         * This function should be called with some hesitations,
         * as it might seem confusing to have that color change.
         * Calling `gtk_color_selection_set_current_rgba()` will also
         * set this color the first time it is called.
         * @param rgba a {@link Gdk.RGBA} to set the previous color with
         */
        set_previous_rgba(rgba: Gdk.RGBA): void;

        /**
         * The orientation of the orientable.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default Gtk.Orientation.HORIZONTAL
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Orientable
         */
        get orientation(): Orientation;
        set orientation(val: Orientation);

        /**
         * Retrieves the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @returns the orientation of the `orientable`.
         */
        get_orientation(): Orientation;

        /**
         * Sets the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @param orientation the orientable’s new orientation.
         */
        set_orientation(orientation: Orientation): void;
    }


    namespace ColorSelectionDialog {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Dialog.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::cancel-button": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::color-selection": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::help-button": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::ok-button": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-header-bar": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accept-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::application": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::attached-to": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::decorated": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::default-height": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::default-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::deletable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::destroy-with-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-map": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gravity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-resize-grip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-toplevel-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hide-titlebar-when-maximized": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::icon": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::icon-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-active": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-maximized": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::mnemonics-visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::modal": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resizable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-grip-visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::screen": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::skip-pager-hint": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::skip-taskbar-hint": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::startup-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::title": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::transient-for": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::type": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::type-hint": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::urgency-hint": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window-position": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Dialog.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {
            cancel_button: Widget;
            cancelButton: Widget;
            color_selection: Widget;
            colorSelection: Widget;
            help_button: Widget;
            helpButton: Widget;
            ok_button: Widget;
            okButton: Widget;
        }
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class ColorSelectionDialog extends Dialog implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ColorSelectionDialog>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * @read-only
         */
        get cancel_button(): Widget;

        /**
         * @read-only
         */
        get cancelButton(): Widget;

        /**
         * @read-only
         */
        get color_selection(): Widget;

        /**
         * @read-only
         */
        get colorSelection(): Widget;

        /**
         * @read-only
         */
        get help_button(): Widget;

        /**
         * @read-only
         */
        get helpButton(): Widget;

        /**
         * @read-only
         */
        get ok_button(): Widget;

        /**
         * @read-only
         */
        get okButton(): Widget;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: ColorSelectionDialog.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<ColorSelectionDialog.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](title: string): ColorSelectionDialog;

        // Conflicted with Gtk.Dialog.new
        static ["new"](...args: never[]): any;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof ColorSelectionDialog.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ColorSelectionDialog.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof ColorSelectionDialog.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ColorSelectionDialog.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof ColorSelectionDialog.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<ColorSelectionDialog.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Retrieves the {@link Gtk.ColorSelection} widget embedded in the dialog.
         * @returns the embedded {@link Gtk.ColorSelection}
         */
        get_color_selection(): Widget;
    }


    namespace ComboBox {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Bin.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * The changed signal is emitted when the active
             * item is changed. The can be due to the user selecting
             * a different item from the list, or due to a
             * call to `gtk_combo_box_set_active_iter()`.
             * It will also be emitted while typing into the entry of a combo box
             * with an entry.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.4
             * @run-last
             */
            changed: () => void;
            /**
             * For combo boxes that are created with an entry (See GtkComboBox:has-entry).
             * 
             * A signal which allows you to change how the text displayed in a combo box's
             * entry is displayed.
             * 
             * Connect a signal handler which returns an allocated string representing
             * `path`. That string will then be used to set the text in the combo box's entry.
             * The default signal handler uses the text from the GtkComboBox::entry-text-column
             * model column.
             * 
             * Here's an example signal handler which fetches data from the model and
             * displays it in the entry.
             * 
             * ```c
             * static gchar*
             * format_entry_text_callback (GtkComboBox *combo,
             *                             const gchar *path,
             *                             gpointer     user_data)
             * {
             *   GtkTreeIter iter;
             *   GtkTreeModel model;
             *   gdouble      value;
             * 
             *   model = gtk_combo_box_get_model (combo);
             * 
             *   gtk_tree_model_get_iter_from_string (model, &iter, path);
             *   gtk_tree_model_get (model, &iter,
             *                       THE_DOUBLE_VALUE_COLUMN, &value,
             *                       -1);
             * 
             *   return g_strdup_printf ("%g", value);
             * }
             * ```
             * 
             * @signal
             * @since 3.4
             * @run-last
             */
            "format-entry-text": (arg0: string) => string;
            /**
             * The ::move-active signal is a
             * [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted to move the active selection.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.12
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "move-active": (arg0: ScrollType) => void;
            /**
             * The ::popdown signal is a
             * [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted to popdown the combo box list.
             * 
             * The default bindings for this signal are Alt+Up and Escape.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.12
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            popdown: () => boolean | void;
            /**
             * The ::popup signal is a
             * [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted to popup the combo box list.
             * 
             * The default binding for this signal is Alt+Down.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.12
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            popup: () => void;
            "notify::active": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::active-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::add-tearoffs": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::button-sensitivity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::cell-area": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::column-span-column": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::entry-text-column": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-entry": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-frame": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::id-column": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::model": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::popup-fixed-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::popup-shown": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::row-span-column": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tearoff-title": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::wrap-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::editing-canceled": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Bin.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, CellEditable.ConstructorProps, CellLayout.ConstructorProps {
            active: number;
            active_id: string | null;
            activeId: string | null;
            add_tearoffs: boolean;
            addTearoffs: boolean;
            button_sensitivity: SensitivityType;
            buttonSensitivity: SensitivityType;
            cell_area: CellArea;
            cellArea: CellArea;
            column_span_column: number;
            columnSpanColumn: number;
            entry_text_column: number;
            entryTextColumn: number;
            has_entry: boolean;
            hasEntry: boolean;
            has_frame: boolean;
            hasFrame: boolean;
            id_column: number;
            idColumn: number;
            model: TreeModel;
            popup_fixed_width: boolean;
            popupFixedWidth: boolean;
            popup_shown: boolean;
            popupShown: boolean;
            row_span_column: number;
            rowSpanColumn: number;
            tearoff_title: string;
            tearoffTitle: string;
            wrap_width: number;
            wrapWidth: number;
        }
    }

    /**
     * A GtkComboBox is a widget that allows the user to choose from a list of
     * valid choices. The GtkComboBox displays the selected choice. When
     * activated, the GtkComboBox displays a popup which allows the user to
     * make a new choice. The style in which the selected value is displayed,
     * and the style of the popup is determined by the current theme. It may
     * be similar to a Windows-style combo box.
     * 
     * The GtkComboBox uses the model-view pattern; the list of valid choices
     * is specified in the form of a tree model, and the display of the choices
     * can be adapted to the data in the model by using cell renderers, as you
     * would in a tree view. This is possible since GtkComboBox implements the
     * {@link Gtk.CellLayout} interface. The tree model holding the valid choices is
     * not restricted to a flat list, it can be a real tree, and the popup will
     * reflect the tree structure.
     * 
     * To allow the user to enter values not in the model, the “has-entry”
     * property allows the GtkComboBox to contain a {@link Gtk.Entry}. This entry
     * can be accessed by calling `gtk_bin_get_child()` on the combo box.
     * 
     * For a simple list of textual choices, the model-view API of GtkComboBox
     * can be a bit overwhelming. In this case, {@link Gtk.ComboBoxText} offers a
     * simple alternative. Both GtkComboBox and {@link Gtk.ComboBoxText} can contain
     * an entry.
     * 
     * # CSS nodes
     * 
     * 
     * ```
     * combobox
     * ├── box.linked
     * │   ╰── button.combo
     * │       ╰── box
     * │           ├── cellview
     * │           ╰── arrow
     * ╰── window.popup
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * A normal combobox contains a box with the .linked class, a button
     * with the .combo class and inside those buttons, there are a cellview and
     * an arrow.
     * 
     * 
     * ```
     * combobox
     * ├── box.linked
     * │   ├── entry.combo
     * │   ╰── button.combo
     * │       ╰── box
     * │           ╰── arrow
     * ╰── window.popup
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * A GtkComboBox with an entry has a single CSS node with name combobox. It
     * contains a box with the .linked class. That box contains an entry and a
     * button, both with the .combo class added.
     * The button also contains another node with name arrow.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class ComboBox extends Bin implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable, CellEditable, CellLayout {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ComboBox>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * The item which is currently active. If the model is a non-flat treemodel,
         * and the active item is not an immediate child of the root of the tree,
         * this property has the value
         * `gtk_tree_path_get_indices (path)[0]`,
         * where `path` is the {@link Gtk.TreePath} of the active item.
         * @since 2.4
         * @default -1
         */
        get active(): number;
        set active(val: number);

        /**
         * The value of the ID column of the active row.
         * @since 3.0
         * @default null
         */
        get active_id(): string | null;
        set active_id(val: string | null);

        /**
         * The value of the ID column of the active row.
         * @since 3.0
         * @default null
         */
        get activeId(): string | null;
        set activeId(val: string | null);

        /**
         * The add-tearoffs property controls whether generated menus
         * have tearoff menu items.
         * 
         * Note that this only affects menu style combo boxes.
         * @since 2.6
         * @deprecated since 3.10
         * @default false
         */
        get add_tearoffs(): boolean;
        set add_tearoffs(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The add-tearoffs property controls whether generated menus
         * have tearoff menu items.
         * 
         * Note that this only affects menu style combo boxes.
         * @since 2.6
         * @deprecated since 3.10
         * @default false
         */
        get addTearoffs(): boolean;
        set addTearoffs(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether the dropdown button is sensitive when
         * the model is empty.
         * @since 2.14
         * @default Gtk.SensitivityType.AUTO
         */
        get button_sensitivity(): SensitivityType;
        set button_sensitivity(val: SensitivityType);

        /**
         * Whether the dropdown button is sensitive when
         * the model is empty.
         * @since 2.14
         * @default Gtk.SensitivityType.AUTO
         */
        get buttonSensitivity(): SensitivityType;
        set buttonSensitivity(val: SensitivityType);

        /**
         * The {@link Gtk.CellArea} used to layout cell renderers for this combo box.
         * 
         * If no area is specified when creating the combo box with `gtk_combo_box_new_with_area()`
         * a horizontally oriented {@link Gtk.CellAreaBox} will be used.
         * @since 3.0
         * @construct-only
         */
        get cell_area(): CellArea;

        /**
         * The {@link Gtk.CellArea} used to layout cell renderers for this combo box.
         * 
         * If no area is specified when creating the combo box with `gtk_combo_box_new_with_area()`
         * a horizontally oriented {@link Gtk.CellAreaBox} will be used.
         * @since 3.0
         * @construct-only
         */
        get cellArea(): CellArea;

        /**
         * If this is set to a non-negative value, it must be the index of a column
         * of type `G_TYPE_INT` in the model. The value in that column for each item
         * will determine how many columns that item will span in the popup.
         * Therefore, values in this column must be greater than zero, and the sum of
         * an item’s column position + span should not exceed {@link Gtk.ComboBox.wrap_width}.
         * @since 2.4
         * @default -1
         */
        get column_span_column(): number;
        set column_span_column(val: number);

        /**
         * If this is set to a non-negative value, it must be the index of a column
         * of type `G_TYPE_INT` in the model. The value in that column for each item
         * will determine how many columns that item will span in the popup.
         * Therefore, values in this column must be greater than zero, and the sum of
         * an item’s column position + span should not exceed {@link Gtk.ComboBox.wrap_width}.
         * @since 2.4
         * @default -1
         */
        get columnSpanColumn(): number;
        set columnSpanColumn(val: number);

        /**
         * The column in the combo box's model to associate with strings from the entry
         * if the combo was created with {@link Gtk.ComboBox.has_entry} = `true`.
         * @since 2.24
         * @default -1
         */
        get entry_text_column(): number;
        set entry_text_column(val: number);

        /**
         * The column in the combo box's model to associate with strings from the entry
         * if the combo was created with {@link Gtk.ComboBox.has_entry} = `true`.
         * @since 2.24
         * @default -1
         */
        get entryTextColumn(): number;
        set entryTextColumn(val: number);

        /**
         * Whether the combo box has an entry.
         * @since 2.24
         * @construct-only
         * @default false
         */
        get has_entry(): boolean;

        /**
         * Whether the combo box has an entry.
         * @since 2.24
         * @construct-only
         * @default false
         */
        get hasEntry(): boolean;

        /**
         * The has-frame property controls whether a frame
         * is drawn around the entry.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default true
         */
        get has_frame(): boolean;
        set has_frame(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The has-frame property controls whether a frame
         * is drawn around the entry.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default true
         */
        get hasFrame(): boolean;
        set hasFrame(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The column in the combo box's model that provides string
         * IDs for the values in the model, if != -1.
         * @since 3.0
         * @default -1
         */
        get id_column(): number;
        set id_column(val: number);

        /**
         * The column in the combo box's model that provides string
         * IDs for the values in the model, if != -1.
         * @since 3.0
         * @default -1
         */
        get idColumn(): number;
        set idColumn(val: number);

        /**
         * The model from which the combo box takes the values shown
         * in the list.
         * @since 2.4
         */
        get model(): TreeModel;
        set model(val: TreeModel);

        /**
         * Whether the popup's width should be a fixed width matching the
         * allocated width of the combo box.
         * @since 3.0
         * @default true
         */
        get popup_fixed_width(): boolean;
        set popup_fixed_width(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether the popup's width should be a fixed width matching the
         * allocated width of the combo box.
         * @since 3.0
         * @default true
         */
        get popupFixedWidth(): boolean;
        set popupFixedWidth(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether the combo boxes dropdown is popped up.
         * Note that this property is mainly useful, because
         * it allows you to connect to notify::popup-shown.
         * @since 2.10
         * @read-only
         * @default false
         */
        get popup_shown(): boolean;

        /**
         * Whether the combo boxes dropdown is popped up.
         * Note that this property is mainly useful, because
         * it allows you to connect to notify::popup-shown.
         * @since 2.10
         * @read-only
         * @default false
         */
        get popupShown(): boolean;

        /**
         * If this is set to a non-negative value, it must be the index of a column
         * of type `G_TYPE_INT` in the model. The value in that column for each item
         * will determine how many rows that item will span in the popup. Therefore,
         * values in this column must be greater than zero.
         * @since 2.4
         * @default -1
         */
        get row_span_column(): number;
        set row_span_column(val: number);

        /**
         * If this is set to a non-negative value, it must be the index of a column
         * of type `G_TYPE_INT` in the model. The value in that column for each item
         * will determine how many rows that item will span in the popup. Therefore,
         * values in this column must be greater than zero.
         * @since 2.4
         * @default -1
         */
        get rowSpanColumn(): number;
        set rowSpanColumn(val: number);

        /**
         * A title that may be displayed by the window manager
         * when the popup is torn-off.
         * @since 2.10
         * @deprecated since 3.10
         * @default null
         */
        get tearoff_title(): string;
        set tearoff_title(val: string);

        /**
         * A title that may be displayed by the window manager
         * when the popup is torn-off.
         * @since 2.10
         * @deprecated since 3.10
         * @default null
         */
        get tearoffTitle(): string;
        set tearoffTitle(val: string);

        /**
         * If wrap-width is set to a positive value, items in the popup will be laid
         * out along multiple columns, starting a new row on reaching the wrap width.
         * @since 2.4
         * @default 0
         */
        get wrap_width(): number;
        set wrap_width(val: number);

        /**
         * If wrap-width is set to a positive value, items in the popup will be laid
         * out along multiple columns, starting a new row on reaching the wrap width.
         * @since 2.4
         * @default 0
         */
        get wrapWidth(): number;
        set wrapWidth(val: number);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: ComboBox.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<ComboBox.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): ComboBox;

        static new_with_area(area: CellArea): ComboBox;

        static new_with_area_and_entry(area: CellArea): ComboBox;

        static new_with_entry(): ComboBox;

        static new_with_model(model: TreeModel): ComboBox;

        static new_with_model_and_entry(model: TreeModel): ComboBox;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof ComboBox.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ComboBox.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof ComboBox.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ComboBox.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof ComboBox.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<ComboBox.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * Signal is emitted when the active item is changed.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_changed(): void;

        /**
         * Signal which allows you to change how the text
         *    displayed in a combo box’s entry is displayed.
         * @param path 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_format_entry_text(path: string): string;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Returns the index of the currently active item, or -1 if there’s no
         * active item. If the model is a non-flat treemodel, and the active item
         * is not an immediate child of the root of the tree, this function returns
         * `gtk_tree_path_get_indices (path)[0]`, where
         * `path` is the {@link Gtk.TreePath} of the active item.
         * @returns An integer which is the index of the currently active item,     or -1 if there’s no active item.
         */
        get_active(): number;

        /**
         * Returns the ID of the active row of `combo_box`.  This value is taken
         * from the active row and the column specified by the {@link Gtk.ComboBox.id_column}
         * property of `combo_box` (see `gtk_combo_box_set_id_column()`).
         * 
         * The returned value is an interned string which means that you can
         * compare the pointer by value to other interned strings and that you
         * must not free it.
         * 
         * If the {@link Gtk.ComboBox.id_column} property of `combo_box` is not set, or if
         * no row is active, or if the active row has a `null` ID value, then `null`
         * is returned.
         * @returns the ID of the active row, or `null`
         */
        get_active_id(): string | null;

        /**
         * Sets `iter` to point to the currently active item, if any item is active.
         * Otherwise, `iter` is left unchanged.
         * @returns `true` if `iter` was set, `false` otherwise
         */
        get_active_iter(): [boolean, TreeIter];

        /**
         * Gets the current value of the :add-tearoffs property.
         * @returns the current value of the :add-tearoffs property.
         */
        get_add_tearoffs(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns whether the combo box sets the dropdown button
         * sensitive or not when there are no items in the model.
         * @returns {@link Gtk.SensitivityType.ON} if the dropdown button    is sensitive when the model is empty, {@link Gtk.SensitivityType.OFF}    if the button is always insensitive or    {@link Gtk.SensitivityType.AUTO} if it is only sensitive as long as    the model has one item to be selected.
         */
        get_button_sensitivity(): SensitivityType;

        /**
         * Returns the column with column span information for `combo_box`.
         * @returns the column span column.
         */
        get_column_span_column(): number;

        /**
         * Returns the column which `combo_box` is using to get the strings
         * from to display in the internal entry.
         * @returns A column in the data source model of `combo_box`.
         */
        get_entry_text_column(): number;

        /**
         * Returns whether the combo box grabs focus when it is clicked
         * with the mouse. See `gtk_combo_box_set_focus_on_click()`.
         * @returns `true` if the combo box grabs focus when it is     clicked with the mouse.
         */
        get_focus_on_click(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns whether the combo box has an entry.
         * @returns whether there is an entry in `combo_box`.
         */
        get_has_entry(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the column which `combo_box` is using to get string IDs
         * for values from.
         * @returns A column in the data source model of `combo_box`.
         */
        get_id_column(): number;

        /**
         * Returns the {@link Gtk.TreeModel} which is acting as data source for `combo_box`.
         * @returns A {@link Gtk.TreeModel} which was passed     during construction.
         */
        get_model(): TreeModel;

        /**
         * Gets the accessible object corresponding to the combo box’s popup.
         * 
         * This function is mostly intended for use by accessibility technologies;
         * applications should have little use for it.
         * @returns the accessible object corresponding     to the combo box’s popup.
         */
        get_popup_accessible(): Atk.Object;

        /**
         * Gets whether the popup uses a fixed width matching
         * the allocated width of the combo box.
         * @returns `true` if the popup uses a fixed width
         */
        get_popup_fixed_width(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the column with row span information for `combo_box`.
         * @returns the row span column.
         */
        get_row_span_column(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the current title of the menu in tearoff mode. See
         * `gtk_combo_box_set_add_tearoffs()`.
         * @returns the menu’s title in tearoff mode. This is an internal copy of the string which must not be freed.
         */
        get_title(): string;

        /**
         * Returns the wrap width which is used to determine the number of columns
         * for the popup menu. If the wrap width is larger than 1, the combo box
         * is in table mode.
         * @returns the wrap width.
         */
        get_wrap_width(): number;

        /**
         * Hides the menu or dropdown list of `combo_box`.
         * 
         * This function is mostly intended for use by accessibility technologies;
         * applications should have little use for it.
         */
        popdown(): void;

        /**
         * Pops up the menu or dropdown list of `combo_box`.
         * 
         * This function is mostly intended for use by accessibility technologies;
         * applications should have little use for it.
         * 
         * Before calling this, `combo_box` must be mapped, or nothing will happen.
         */
        popup(): void;

        /**
         * Pops up the menu or dropdown list of `combo_box`, the popup window
         * will be grabbed so only `device` and its associated pointer/keyboard
         * are the only `GdkDevices` able to send events to it.
         * @param device a {@link Gdk.Device}
         */
        popup_for_device(device: Gdk.Device): void;

        /**
         * Sets the active item of `combo_box` to be the item at `index`.
         * @param index_ An index in the model passed during construction, or -1 to have no active item
         */
        set_active(index_: number): void;

        /**
         * Changes the active row of `combo_box` to the one that has an ID equal to
         * `active_id`, or unsets the active row if `active_id` is `null`.  Rows having
         * a `null` ID string cannot be made active by this function.
         * 
         * If the {@link Gtk.ComboBox.id_column} property of `combo_box` is unset or if no
         * row has the given ID then the function does nothing and returns `false`.
         * @param active_id the ID of the row to select, or `null`
         * @returns `true` if a row with a matching ID was found.  If a `null`          `active_id` was given to unset the active row, the function          always returns `true`.
         */
        set_active_id(active_id: string | null): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the current active item to be the one referenced by `iter`, or
         * unsets the active item if `iter` is `null`.
         * @param iter The {@link Gtk.TreeIter}, or `null`
         */
        set_active_iter(iter: TreeIter | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the popup menu should have a tearoff
         * menu item.
         * @param add_tearoffs `true` to add tearoff menu items
         */
        set_add_tearoffs(add_tearoffs: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the dropdown button of the combo box should be
         * always sensitive ({@link Gtk.SensitivityType.ON}), never sensitive ({@link Gtk.SensitivityType.OFF})
         * or only if there is at least one item to display ({@link Gtk.SensitivityType.AUTO}).
         * @param sensitivity specify the sensitivity of the dropdown button
         */
        set_button_sensitivity(sensitivity: SensitivityType): void;

        /**
         * Sets the column with column span information for `combo_box` to be
         * `column_span`. The column span column contains integers which indicate
         * how many columns an item should span.
         * @param column_span A column in the model passed during construction
         */
        set_column_span_column(column_span: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the model column which `combo_box` should use to get strings from
         * to be `text_column`. The column `text_column` in the model of `combo_box`
         * must be of type `G_TYPE_STRING`.
         * 
         * This is only relevant if `combo_box` has been created with
         * {@link Gtk.ComboBox.has_entry} as `true`.
         * @param text_column A column in `model` to get the strings from for     the internal entry
         */
        set_entry_text_column(text_column: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the combo box will grab focus when it is clicked with
         * the mouse. Making mouse clicks not grab focus is useful in places
         * like toolbars where you don’t want the keyboard focus removed from
         * the main area of the application.
         * @param focus_on_click whether the combo box grabs focus when clicked    with the mouse
         */
        set_focus_on_click(focus_on_click: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the model column which `combo_box` should use to get string IDs
         * for values from. The column `id_column` in the model of `combo_box`
         * must be of type `G_TYPE_STRING`.
         * @param id_column A column in `model` to get string IDs for values from
         */
        set_id_column(id_column: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the model used by `combo_box` to be `model`. Will unset a previously set
         * model (if applicable). If model is `null`, then it will unset the model.
         * 
         * Note that this function does not clear the cell renderers, you have to
         * call `gtk_cell_layout_clear()` yourself if you need to set up different
         * cell renderers for the new model.
         * @param model A {@link Gtk.TreeModel}
         */
        set_model(model: TreeModel | null): void;

        /**
         * Specifies whether the popup’s width should be a fixed width
         * matching the allocated width of the combo box.
         * @param fixed whether to use a fixed popup width
         */
        set_popup_fixed_width(fixed: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the row separator function, which is used to determine
         * whether a row should be drawn as a separator. If the row separator
         * function is `null`, no separators are drawn. This is the default value.
         * @param func a {@link Gtk.TreeViewRowSeparatorFunc}
         */
        set_row_separator_func(func: TreeViewRowSeparatorFunc): void;

        /**
         * Sets the column with row span information for `combo_box` to be `row_span`.
         * The row span column contains integers which indicate how many rows
         * an item should span.
         * @param row_span A column in the model passed during construction.
         */
        set_row_span_column(row_span: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the menu’s title in tearoff mode.
         * @param title a title for the menu in tearoff mode
         */
        set_title(title: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets the wrap width of `combo_box` to be `width`. The wrap width is basically
         * the preferred number of columns when you want the popup to be layed out
         * in a table.
         * @param width Preferred number of columns
         */
        set_wrap_width(width: number): void;

        /**
         * Indicates whether editing on the cell has been canceled.
         * @since 2.20
         * @default false
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.CellEditable
         */
        get editing_canceled(): boolean;
        set editing_canceled(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Indicates whether editing on the cell has been canceled.
         * @since 2.20
         * @default false
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.CellEditable
         */
        get editingCanceled(): boolean;
        set editingCanceled(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.CellEditable.SignalSignatures.editing_done | Gtk.CellEditable::editing-done} signal.
         */
        editing_done(): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.CellEditable.SignalSignatures.remove_widget | Gtk.CellEditable::remove-widget} signal.
         */
        remove_widget(): void;

        /**
         * Begins editing on a `cell_editable`.
         * 
         * The {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} for the cell creates and returns a {@link Gtk.CellEditable} from
         * `gtk_cell_renderer_start_editing()`, configured for the {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} type.
         * 
         * `gtk_cell_editable_start_editing()` can then set up `cell_editable` suitably for
         * editing a cell, e.g. making the Esc key emit {@link Gtk.CellEditable.SignalSignatures.editing_done | Gtk.CellEditable::editing-done}.
         * 
         * Note that the `cell_editable` is created on-demand for the current edit; its
         * lifetime is temporary and does not persist across other edits and/or cells.
         * @param event The {@link Gdk.Event} that began the editing process, or   `null` if editing was initiated programmatically
         */
        start_editing(event: Gdk.Event | null): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.CellEditable.SignalSignatures.editing_done | Gtk.CellEditable::editing-done} signal.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_editing_done(): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.CellEditable.SignalSignatures.remove_widget | Gtk.CellEditable::remove-widget} signal.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_remove_widget(): void;

        /**
         * Begins editing on a `cell_editable`.
         * 
         * The {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} for the cell creates and returns a {@link Gtk.CellEditable} from
         * `gtk_cell_renderer_start_editing()`, configured for the {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} type.
         * 
         * `gtk_cell_editable_start_editing()` can then set up `cell_editable` suitably for
         * editing a cell, e.g. making the Esc key emit {@link Gtk.CellEditable.SignalSignatures.editing_done | Gtk.CellEditable::editing-done}.
         * 
         * Note that the `cell_editable` is created on-demand for the current edit; its
         * lifetime is temporary and does not persist across other edits and/or cells.
         * @param event The {@link Gdk.Event} that began the editing process, or   `null` if editing was initiated programmatically
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_start_editing(event: Gdk.Event | null): void;

        /**
         * Adds an attribute mapping to the list in `cell_layout`.
         * 
         * The `column` is the column of the model to get a value from, and the
         * `attribute` is the parameter on `cell` to be set from the value. So for
         * example if column 2 of the model contains strings, you could have the
         * “text” attribute of a {@link Gtk.CellRendererText} get its values from column 2.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param attribute an attribute on the renderer
         * @param column the column position on the model to get the attribute from
         */
        add_attribute(cell: CellRenderer, attribute: string, column: number): void;

        /**
         * Unsets all the mappings on all renderers on `cell_layout` and
         * removes all renderers from `cell_layout`.
         */
        clear(): void;

        /**
         * Clears all existing attributes previously set with
         * `gtk_cell_layout_set_attributes()`.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} to clear the attribute mapping on
         */
        clear_attributes(cell: CellRenderer): void;

        /**
         * Returns the underlying {@link Gtk.CellArea} which might be `cell_layout`
         * if called on a {@link Gtk.CellArea} or might be `null` if no {@link Gtk.CellArea}
         * is used by `cell_layout`.
         * @returns the cell area used by `cell_layout`, or `null` in case no cell area is used.
         */
        get_area(): CellArea | null;

        /**
         * Returns the cell renderers which have been added to `cell_layout`.
         * @returns a list of cell renderers. The list, but not the renderers has     been newly allocated and should be freed with `g_list_free()`     when no longer needed.
         */
        get_cells(): CellRenderer[];

        /**
         * Adds the `cell` to the end of `cell_layout`. If `expand` is `false`, then the
         * `cell` is allocated no more space than it needs. Any unused space is
         * divided evenly between cells for which `expand` is `true`.
         * 
         * Note that reusing the same cell renderer is not supported.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param expand `true` if `cell` is to be given extra space allocated to `cell_layout`
         */
        pack_end(cell: CellRenderer, expand: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Packs the `cell` into the beginning of `cell_layout`. If `expand` is `false`,
         * then the `cell` is allocated no more space than it needs. Any unused space
         * is divided evenly between cells for which `expand` is `true`.
         * 
         * Note that reusing the same cell renderer is not supported.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param expand `true` if `cell` is to be given extra space allocated to `cell_layout`
         */
        pack_start(cell: CellRenderer, expand: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Re-inserts `cell` at `position`.
         * 
         * Note that `cell` has already to be packed into `cell_layout`
         * for this to function properly.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} to reorder
         * @param position new position to insert `cell` at
         */
        reorder(cell: CellRenderer, position: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.CellLayoutDataFunc} to use for `cell_layout`.
         * 
         * This function is used instead of the standard attributes mapping
         * for setting the column value, and should set the value of `cell_layout`’s
         * cell renderer(s) as appropriate.
         * 
         * `func` may be `null` to remove a previously set function.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param func the {@link Gtk.CellLayoutDataFunc} to use, or `null`
         */
        set_cell_data_func(cell: CellRenderer, func: CellLayoutDataFunc | null): void;

        /**
         * Adds an attribute mapping to the list in `cell_layout`.
         * 
         * The `column` is the column of the model to get a value from, and the
         * `attribute` is the parameter on `cell` to be set from the value. So for
         * example if column 2 of the model contains strings, you could have the
         * “text” attribute of a {@link Gtk.CellRendererText} get its values from column 2.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param attribute an attribute on the renderer
         * @param column the column position on the model to get the attribute from
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add_attribute(cell: CellRenderer, attribute: string, column: number): void;

        /**
         * Unsets all the mappings on all renderers on `cell_layout` and
         * removes all renderers from `cell_layout`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_clear(): void;

        /**
         * Clears all existing attributes previously set with
         * `gtk_cell_layout_set_attributes()`.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} to clear the attribute mapping on
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_clear_attributes(cell: CellRenderer): void;

        /**
         * Returns the underlying {@link Gtk.CellArea} which might be `cell_layout`
         * if called on a {@link Gtk.CellArea} or might be `null` if no {@link Gtk.CellArea}
         * is used by `cell_layout`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_area(): CellArea | null;

        /**
         * Returns the cell renderers which have been added to `cell_layout`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_cells(): CellRenderer[];

        /**
         * Adds the `cell` to the end of `cell_layout`. If `expand` is `false`, then the
         * `cell` is allocated no more space than it needs. Any unused space is
         * divided evenly between cells for which `expand` is `true`.
         * 
         * Note that reusing the same cell renderer is not supported.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param expand `true` if `cell` is to be given extra space allocated to `cell_layout`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_pack_end(cell: CellRenderer, expand: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Packs the `cell` into the beginning of `cell_layout`. If `expand` is `false`,
         * then the `cell` is allocated no more space than it needs. Any unused space
         * is divided evenly between cells for which `expand` is `true`.
         * 
         * Note that reusing the same cell renderer is not supported.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param expand `true` if `cell` is to be given extra space allocated to `cell_layout`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_pack_start(cell: CellRenderer, expand: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Re-inserts `cell` at `position`.
         * 
         * Note that `cell` has already to be packed into `cell_layout`
         * for this to function properly.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} to reorder
         * @param position new position to insert `cell` at
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_reorder(cell: CellRenderer, position: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.CellLayoutDataFunc} to use for `cell_layout`.
         * 
         * This function is used instead of the standard attributes mapping
         * for setting the column value, and should set the value of `cell_layout`’s
         * cell renderer(s) as appropriate.
         * 
         * `func` may be `null` to remove a previously set function.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param func the {@link Gtk.CellLayoutDataFunc} to use, or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_cell_data_func(cell: CellRenderer, func: CellLayoutDataFunc | null): void;

        /**
         * Emits a {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.child_notify | Gtk.Widget::child-notify} signal for the
         * [child property][child-properties] `child_property`
         * on `widget`.
         * 
         * This is the analogue of `g_object_notify()` for child properties.
         * 
         * Also see `gtk_container_child_notify()`.
         * @param child_property the name of a child property installed on the                  class of `widget`’s parent
         */
        child_notify(child_property: string): void;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Gtk.Container.child_notify
        child_notify(...args: never[]): any;
    }


    namespace ComboBoxAccessible {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends ContainerAccessible.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-layer": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-mdi-zorder": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-help-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-hypertext-nlinks": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption-object": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-summary": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends ContainerAccessible.ConstructorProps, Atk.Action.ConstructorProps, Atk.Component.ConstructorProps, Atk.Selection.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class ComboBoxAccessible extends ContainerAccessible implements Atk.Action, Atk.Component, Atk.Selection {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ComboBoxAccessible>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: ComboBoxAccessible.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<ComboBoxAccessible.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof ComboBoxAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ComboBoxAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof ComboBoxAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ComboBoxAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof ComboBoxAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<ComboBoxAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        /**
         * Perform the specified action on the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns `true` if success, `false` otherwise
         */
        do_action(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns a description of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns a description string, or `null` if `action` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_description(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.get_description
        get_description(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Gets the keybinding which can be used to activate this action, if one
         * exists. The string returned should contain localized, human-readable,
         * key sequences as they would appear when displayed on screen. It must
         * be in the format "mnemonic;sequence;shortcut".
         * 
         * - The mnemonic key activates the object if it is presently enabled onscreen.
         *   This typically corresponds to the underlined letter within the widget.
         *   Example: "n" in a traditional "New..." menu item or the "a" in "Apply" for
         *   a button.
         * - The sequence is the full list of keys which invoke the action even if the
         *   relevant element is not currently shown on screen. For instance, for a menu
         *   item the sequence is the keybindings used to open the parent menus before
         *   invoking. The sequence string is colon-delimited. Example: "Alt+F:N" in a
         *   traditional "New..." menu item.
         * - The shortcut, if it exists, will invoke the same action without showing
         *   the component or its enclosing menus or dialogs. Example: "Ctrl+N" in a
         *   traditional "New..." menu item.
         * 
         * Example: For a traditional "New..." menu item, the expected return value
         * would be: "N;Alt+F:N;Ctrl+N" for the English locale and "N;Alt+D:N;Strg+N"
         * for the German locale. If, hypothetically, this menu item lacked a mnemonic,
         * it would be represented by ";;Ctrl+N" and ";;Strg+N" respectively.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns the keybinding which can be used to activate this action, or `null` if there is no keybinding for this action.
         */
        get_keybinding(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Returns the localized name of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns a name string, or `null` if `action` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_localized_name(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the number of accessible actions available on the object.
         * If there are more than one, the first one is considered the
         * "default" action of the object.
         * @returns a the number of actions, or 0 if `action` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_n_actions(): number;

        /**
         * Returns a non-localized string naming the specified action of the
         * object. This name is generally not descriptive of the end result
         * of the action, but instead names the 'interaction type' which the
         * object supports. By convention, the above strings should be used to
         * represent the actions which correspond to the common point-and-click
         * interaction techniques of the same name: i.e.
         * "click", "press", "release", "drag", "drop", "popup", etc.
         * The "popup" action should be used to pop up a context menu for the
         * object, if one exists.
         * 
         * For technical reasons, some toolkits cannot guarantee that the
         * reported action is actually 'bound' to a nontrivial user event;
         * i.e. the result of some actions via `atk_action_do_action()` may be
         * NIL.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns a name string, or `null` if `action` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_name(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.get_name
        get_name(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Sets a description of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @param desc the description to be assigned to this action
         * @returns a gboolean representing if the description was successfully set;
         */
        set_description(i: number, desc: string): boolean;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.set_description
        set_description(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Perform the specified action on the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_do_action(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns a description of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_description(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         * @virtual
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.vfunc_get_description
        vfunc_get_description(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Gets the keybinding which can be used to activate this action, if one
         * exists. The string returned should contain localized, human-readable,
         * key sequences as they would appear when displayed on screen. It must
         * be in the format "mnemonic;sequence;shortcut".
         * 
         * - The mnemonic key activates the object if it is presently enabled onscreen.
         *   This typically corresponds to the underlined letter within the widget.
         *   Example: "n" in a traditional "New..." menu item or the "a" in "Apply" for
         *   a button.
         * - The sequence is the full list of keys which invoke the action even if the
         *   relevant element is not currently shown on screen. For instance, for a menu
         *   item the sequence is the keybindings used to open the parent menus before
         *   invoking. The sequence string is colon-delimited. Example: "Alt+F:N" in a
         *   traditional "New..." menu item.
         * - The shortcut, if it exists, will invoke the same action without showing
         *   the component or its enclosing menus or dialogs. Example: "Ctrl+N" in a
         *   traditional "New..." menu item.
         * 
         * Example: For a traditional "New..." menu item, the expected return value
         * would be: "N;Alt+F:N;Ctrl+N" for the English locale and "N;Alt+D:N;Strg+N"
         * for the German locale. If, hypothetically, this menu item lacked a mnemonic,
         * it would be represented by ";;Ctrl+N" and ";;Strg+N" respectively.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_keybinding(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Returns the localized name of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_localized_name(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the number of accessible actions available on the object.
         * If there are more than one, the first one is considered the
         * "default" action of the object.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_n_actions(): number;

        /**
         * Returns a non-localized string naming the specified action of the
         * object. This name is generally not descriptive of the end result
         * of the action, but instead names the 'interaction type' which the
         * object supports. By convention, the above strings should be used to
         * represent the actions which correspond to the common point-and-click
         * interaction techniques of the same name: i.e.
         * "click", "press", "release", "drag", "drop", "popup", etc.
         * The "popup" action should be used to pop up a context menu for the
         * object, if one exists.
         * 
         * For technical reasons, some toolkits cannot guarantee that the
         * reported action is actually 'bound' to a nontrivial user event;
         * i.e. the result of some actions via `atk_action_do_action()` may be
         * NIL.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_name(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         * @virtual
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.vfunc_get_name
        vfunc_get_name(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Sets a description of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @param desc the description to be assigned to this action
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_description(i: number, desc: string): boolean;

        /**
         * @param args 
         * @virtual
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.vfunc_set_description
        vfunc_set_description(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Adds the specified accessible child of the object to the
         * object's selection.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the child index.
         * @returns TRUE if success, FALSE otherwise.
         */
        add_selection(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Clears the selection in the object so that no children in the object
         * are selected.
         * @returns TRUE if success, FALSE otherwise.
         */
        clear_selection(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the number of accessible children currently selected.
         * Note: callers should not rely on `null` or on a zero value for
         * indication of whether AtkSelectionIface is implemented, they should
         * use type checking/interface checking macros or the
         * `atk_get_accessible_value()` convenience method.
         * @returns a gint representing the number of items selected, or 0 if `selection` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_selection_count(): number;

        /**
         * Determines if the current child of this object is selected
         * Note: callers should not rely on `null` or on a zero value for
         * indication of whether AtkSelectionIface is implemented, they should
         * use type checking/interface checking macros or the
         * `atk_get_accessible_value()` convenience method.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the child index.
         * @returns a gboolean representing the specified child is selected, or 0 if `selection` does not implement this interface.
         */
        is_child_selected(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets a reference to the accessible object representing the specified
         * selected child of the object.
         * Note: callers should not rely on `null` or on a zero value for
         * indication of whether AtkSelectionIface is implemented, they should
         * use type checking/interface checking macros or the
         * `atk_get_accessible_value()` convenience method.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the index in the selection set.  (e.g. the ith selection as opposed to the ith child).
         * @returns an {@link Atk.Object} representing the selected accessible, or `null` if `selection` does not implement this interface.
         */
        ref_selection(i: number): Atk.Object | null;

        /**
         * Removes the specified child of the object from the object's selection.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the index in the selection set.  (e.g. the ith selection as opposed to the ith child).
         * @returns TRUE if success, FALSE otherwise.
         */
        remove_selection(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Causes every child of the object to be selected if the object
         * supports multiple selections.
         * @returns TRUE if success, FALSE otherwise.
         */
        select_all_selection(): boolean;

        /**
         * Adds the specified accessible child of the object to the
         * object's selection.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the child index.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add_selection(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Clears the selection in the object so that no children in the object
         * are selected.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_clear_selection(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the number of accessible children currently selected.
         * Note: callers should not rely on `null` or on a zero value for
         * indication of whether AtkSelectionIface is implemented, they should
         * use type checking/interface checking macros or the
         * `atk_get_accessible_value()` convenience method.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_selection_count(): number;

        /**
         * Determines if the current child of this object is selected
         * Note: callers should not rely on `null` or on a zero value for
         * indication of whether AtkSelectionIface is implemented, they should
         * use type checking/interface checking macros or the
         * `atk_get_accessible_value()` convenience method.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the child index.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_is_child_selected(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets a reference to the accessible object representing the specified
         * selected child of the object.
         * Note: callers should not rely on `null` or on a zero value for
         * indication of whether AtkSelectionIface is implemented, they should
         * use type checking/interface checking macros or the
         * `atk_get_accessible_value()` convenience method.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the index in the selection set.  (e.g. the ith selection as opposed to the ith child).
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_ref_selection(i: number): Atk.Object | null;

        /**
         * Removes the specified child of the object from the object's selection.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the index in the selection set.  (e.g. the ith selection as opposed to the ith child).
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_remove_selection(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Causes every child of the object to be selected if the object
         * supports multiple selections.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_select_all_selection(): boolean;

        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_selection_changed(): void;
    }


    namespace ComboBoxText {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends ComboBox.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::active": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::active-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::add-tearoffs": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::button-sensitivity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::cell-area": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::column-span-column": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::entry-text-column": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-entry": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-frame": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::id-column": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::model": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::popup-fixed-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::popup-shown": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::row-span-column": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tearoff-title": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::wrap-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::editing-canceled": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends ComboBox.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, CellEditable.ConstructorProps, CellLayout.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * A GtkComboBoxText is a simple variant of {@link Gtk.ComboBox} that hides
     * the model-view complexity for simple text-only use cases.
     * 
     * To create a GtkComboBoxText, use `gtk_combo_box_text_new()` or
     * `gtk_combo_box_text_new_with_entry()`.
     * 
     * You can add items to a GtkComboBoxText with
     * `gtk_combo_box_text_append_text()`, `gtk_combo_box_text_insert_text()`
     * or `gtk_combo_box_text_prepend_text()` and remove options with
     * `gtk_combo_box_text_remove()`.
     * 
     * If the GtkComboBoxText contains an entry (via the “has-entry” property),
     * its contents can be retrieved using `gtk_combo_box_text_get_active_text()`.
     * The entry itself can be accessed by calling `gtk_bin_get_child()` on the
     * combo box.
     * 
     * You should not call `gtk_combo_box_set_model()` or attempt to pack more cells
     * into this combo box via its GtkCellLayout interface.
     * 
     * # GtkComboBoxText as GtkBuildable
     * 
     * The GtkComboBoxText implementation of the GtkBuildable interface supports
     * adding items directly using the `<items>` element and specifying `<item>`
     * elements for each item. Each `<item>` element can specify the “id”
     * corresponding to the appended text and also supports the regular
     * translation attributes “translatable”, “context” and “comments”.
     * 
     * Here is a UI definition fragment specifying GtkComboBoxText items:
     * 
     * 
     * ```xml
     * <object class="GtkComboBoxText">
     *   <items>
     *     <item translatable="yes" id="factory">Factory</item>
     *     <item translatable="yes" id="home">Home</item>
     *     <item translatable="yes" id="subway">Subway</item>
     *   </items>
     * </object>
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * # CSS nodes
     * 
     * 
     * ```
     * combobox
     * ╰── box.linked
     *     ├── entry.combo
     *     ├── button.combo
     *     ╰── window.popup
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * GtkComboBoxText has a single CSS node with name combobox. It adds
     * the style class .combo to the main CSS nodes of its entry and button
     * children, and the .linked class to the node of its internal box.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class ComboBoxText extends ComboBox implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable, CellEditable, CellLayout {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ComboBoxText>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: ComboBoxText.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<ComboBoxText.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): ComboBoxText;

        static new_with_entry(): ComboBoxText;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof ComboBoxText.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ComboBoxText.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof ComboBoxText.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ComboBoxText.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof ComboBoxText.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<ComboBoxText.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Appends `text` to the list of strings stored in `combo_box`.
         * If `id` is non-`null` then it is used as the ID of the row.
         * 
         * This is the same as calling `gtk_combo_box_text_insert()` with a
         * position of -1.
         * @param id a string ID for this value, or `null`
         * @param text A string
         */
        append(id: string | null, text: string): void;

        /**
         * Appends `text` to the list of strings stored in `combo_box`.
         * 
         * This is the same as calling `gtk_combo_box_text_insert_text()` with a
         * position of -1.
         * @param text A string
         */
        append_text(text: string): void;

        /**
         * Returns the currently active string in `combo_box`, or `null`
         * if none is selected. If `combo_box` contains an entry, this
         * function will return its contents (which will not necessarily
         * be an item from the list).
         * @returns a newly allocated string containing the     currently active text. Must be freed with `g_free()`.
         */
        get_active_text(): string;

        /**
         * Inserts `text` at `position` in the list of strings stored in `combo_box`.
         * If `id` is non-`null` then it is used as the ID of the row.  See
         * {@link Gtk.ComboBox.id_column}.
         * 
         * If `position` is negative then `text` is appended.
         * @param position An index to insert `text`
         * @param id a string ID for this value, or `null`
         * @param text A string to display
         */
        insert(position: number, id: string | null, text: string): void;

        /**
         * Inserts `text` at `position` in the list of strings stored in `combo_box`.
         * 
         * If `position` is negative then `text` is appended.
         * 
         * This is the same as calling `gtk_combo_box_text_insert()` with a `null`
         * ID string.
         * @param position An index to insert `text`
         * @param text A string
         */
        insert_text(position: number, text: string): void;

        /**
         * Prepends `text` to the list of strings stored in `combo_box`.
         * If `id` is non-`null` then it is used as the ID of the row.
         * 
         * This is the same as calling `gtk_combo_box_text_insert()` with a
         * position of 0.
         * @param id a string ID for this value, or `null`
         * @param text a string
         */
        prepend(id: string | null, text: string): void;

        /**
         * Prepends `text` to the list of strings stored in `combo_box`.
         * 
         * This is the same as calling `gtk_combo_box_text_insert_text()` with a
         * position of 0.
         * @param text A string
         */
        prepend_text(text: string): void;

        /**
         * Removes the string at `position` from `combo_box`.
         * @param position Index of the item to remove
         */
        remove(position: number): void;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
    // Conflicted with Gtk.Container.remove
        remove(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Removes all the text entries from the combo box.
         */
        remove_all(): void;

        /**
         * Indicates whether editing on the cell has been canceled.
         * @since 2.20
         * @default false
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.CellEditable
         */
        get editing_canceled(): boolean;
        set editing_canceled(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Indicates whether editing on the cell has been canceled.
         * @since 2.20
         * @default false
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.CellEditable
         */
        get editingCanceled(): boolean;
        set editingCanceled(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.CellEditable.SignalSignatures.editing_done | Gtk.CellEditable::editing-done} signal.
         */
        editing_done(): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.CellEditable.SignalSignatures.remove_widget | Gtk.CellEditable::remove-widget} signal.
         */
        remove_widget(): void;

        /**
         * Begins editing on a `cell_editable`.
         * 
         * The {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} for the cell creates and returns a {@link Gtk.CellEditable} from
         * `gtk_cell_renderer_start_editing()`, configured for the {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} type.
         * 
         * `gtk_cell_editable_start_editing()` can then set up `cell_editable` suitably for
         * editing a cell, e.g. making the Esc key emit {@link Gtk.CellEditable.SignalSignatures.editing_done | Gtk.CellEditable::editing-done}.
         * 
         * Note that the `cell_editable` is created on-demand for the current edit; its
         * lifetime is temporary and does not persist across other edits and/or cells.
         * @param event The {@link Gdk.Event} that began the editing process, or   `null` if editing was initiated programmatically
         */
        start_editing(event: Gdk.Event | null): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.CellEditable.SignalSignatures.editing_done | Gtk.CellEditable::editing-done} signal.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_editing_done(): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.CellEditable.SignalSignatures.remove_widget | Gtk.CellEditable::remove-widget} signal.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_remove_widget(): void;

        /**
         * Begins editing on a `cell_editable`.
         * 
         * The {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} for the cell creates and returns a {@link Gtk.CellEditable} from
         * `gtk_cell_renderer_start_editing()`, configured for the {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} type.
         * 
         * `gtk_cell_editable_start_editing()` can then set up `cell_editable` suitably for
         * editing a cell, e.g. making the Esc key emit {@link Gtk.CellEditable.SignalSignatures.editing_done | Gtk.CellEditable::editing-done}.
         * 
         * Note that the `cell_editable` is created on-demand for the current edit; its
         * lifetime is temporary and does not persist across other edits and/or cells.
         * @param event The {@link Gdk.Event} that began the editing process, or   `null` if editing was initiated programmatically
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_start_editing(event: Gdk.Event | null): void;

        /**
         * Adds an attribute mapping to the list in `cell_layout`.
         * 
         * The `column` is the column of the model to get a value from, and the
         * `attribute` is the parameter on `cell` to be set from the value. So for
         * example if column 2 of the model contains strings, you could have the
         * “text” attribute of a {@link Gtk.CellRendererText} get its values from column 2.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param attribute an attribute on the renderer
         * @param column the column position on the model to get the attribute from
         */
        add_attribute(cell: CellRenderer, attribute: string, column: number): void;

        /**
         * Unsets all the mappings on all renderers on `cell_layout` and
         * removes all renderers from `cell_layout`.
         */
        clear(): void;

        /**
         * Clears all existing attributes previously set with
         * `gtk_cell_layout_set_attributes()`.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} to clear the attribute mapping on
         */
        clear_attributes(cell: CellRenderer): void;

        /**
         * Returns the underlying {@link Gtk.CellArea} which might be `cell_layout`
         * if called on a {@link Gtk.CellArea} or might be `null` if no {@link Gtk.CellArea}
         * is used by `cell_layout`.
         * @returns the cell area used by `cell_layout`, or `null` in case no cell area is used.
         */
        get_area(): CellArea | null;

        /**
         * Returns the cell renderers which have been added to `cell_layout`.
         * @returns a list of cell renderers. The list, but not the renderers has     been newly allocated and should be freed with `g_list_free()`     when no longer needed.
         */
        get_cells(): CellRenderer[];

        /**
         * Adds the `cell` to the end of `cell_layout`. If `expand` is `false`, then the
         * `cell` is allocated no more space than it needs. Any unused space is
         * divided evenly between cells for which `expand` is `true`.
         * 
         * Note that reusing the same cell renderer is not supported.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param expand `true` if `cell` is to be given extra space allocated to `cell_layout`
         */
        pack_end(cell: CellRenderer, expand: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Packs the `cell` into the beginning of `cell_layout`. If `expand` is `false`,
         * then the `cell` is allocated no more space than it needs. Any unused space
         * is divided evenly between cells for which `expand` is `true`.
         * 
         * Note that reusing the same cell renderer is not supported.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param expand `true` if `cell` is to be given extra space allocated to `cell_layout`
         */
        pack_start(cell: CellRenderer, expand: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Re-inserts `cell` at `position`.
         * 
         * Note that `cell` has already to be packed into `cell_layout`
         * for this to function properly.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} to reorder
         * @param position new position to insert `cell` at
         */
        reorder(cell: CellRenderer, position: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.CellLayoutDataFunc} to use for `cell_layout`.
         * 
         * This function is used instead of the standard attributes mapping
         * for setting the column value, and should set the value of `cell_layout`’s
         * cell renderer(s) as appropriate.
         * 
         * `func` may be `null` to remove a previously set function.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param func the {@link Gtk.CellLayoutDataFunc} to use, or `null`
         */
        set_cell_data_func(cell: CellRenderer, func: CellLayoutDataFunc | null): void;

        /**
         * Adds an attribute mapping to the list in `cell_layout`.
         * 
         * The `column` is the column of the model to get a value from, and the
         * `attribute` is the parameter on `cell` to be set from the value. So for
         * example if column 2 of the model contains strings, you could have the
         * “text” attribute of a {@link Gtk.CellRendererText} get its values from column 2.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param attribute an attribute on the renderer
         * @param column the column position on the model to get the attribute from
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add_attribute(cell: CellRenderer, attribute: string, column: number): void;

        /**
         * Unsets all the mappings on all renderers on `cell_layout` and
         * removes all renderers from `cell_layout`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_clear(): void;

        /**
         * Clears all existing attributes previously set with
         * `gtk_cell_layout_set_attributes()`.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} to clear the attribute mapping on
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_clear_attributes(cell: CellRenderer): void;

        /**
         * Returns the underlying {@link Gtk.CellArea} which might be `cell_layout`
         * if called on a {@link Gtk.CellArea} or might be `null` if no {@link Gtk.CellArea}
         * is used by `cell_layout`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_area(): CellArea | null;

        /**
         * Returns the cell renderers which have been added to `cell_layout`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_cells(): CellRenderer[];

        /**
         * Adds the `cell` to the end of `cell_layout`. If `expand` is `false`, then the
         * `cell` is allocated no more space than it needs. Any unused space is
         * divided evenly between cells for which `expand` is `true`.
         * 
         * Note that reusing the same cell renderer is not supported.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param expand `true` if `cell` is to be given extra space allocated to `cell_layout`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_pack_end(cell: CellRenderer, expand: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Packs the `cell` into the beginning of `cell_layout`. If `expand` is `false`,
         * then the `cell` is allocated no more space than it needs. Any unused space
         * is divided evenly between cells for which `expand` is `true`.
         * 
         * Note that reusing the same cell renderer is not supported.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param expand `true` if `cell` is to be given extra space allocated to `cell_layout`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_pack_start(cell: CellRenderer, expand: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Re-inserts `cell` at `position`.
         * 
         * Note that `cell` has already to be packed into `cell_layout`
         * for this to function properly.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} to reorder
         * @param position new position to insert `cell` at
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_reorder(cell: CellRenderer, position: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.CellLayoutDataFunc} to use for `cell_layout`.
         * 
         * This function is used instead of the standard attributes mapping
         * for setting the column value, and should set the value of `cell_layout`’s
         * cell renderer(s) as appropriate.
         * 
         * `func` may be `null` to remove a previously set function.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param func the {@link Gtk.CellLayoutDataFunc} to use, or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_cell_data_func(cell: CellRenderer, func: CellLayoutDataFunc | null): void;

        /**
         * Emits a {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.child_notify | Gtk.Widget::child-notify} signal for the
         * [child property][child-properties] `child_property`
         * on `widget`.
         * 
         * This is the analogue of `g_object_notify()` for child properties.
         * 
         * Also see `gtk_container_child_notify()`.
         * @param child_property the name of a child property installed on the                  class of `widget`’s parent
         */
        child_notify(child_property: string): void;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Gtk.Container.child_notify
        child_notify(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Returns whether the widget should grab focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
         * See `gtk_widget_set_focus_on_click()`.
         * @returns `true` if the widget should grab focus when it is clicked with               the mouse.
         */
        get_focus_on_click(): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets whether the widget should grab focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
         * Making mouse clicks not grab focus is useful in places like toolbars where
         * you don’t want the keyboard focus removed from the main area of the
         * application.
         * @param focus_on_click whether the widget should grab focus when clicked with the mouse
         */
        set_focus_on_click(focus_on_click: boolean): void;
    }


    namespace Container {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Widget.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * @signal
             * @run-first
             */
            add: (arg0: Widget) => void;
            /**
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "check-resize": () => void;
            /**
             * @signal
             * @run-first
             */
            remove: (arg0: Widget) => void;
            /**
             * @signal
             * @run-first
             */
            "set-focus-child": (arg0: Widget) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Widget.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {
            border_width: number;
            borderWidth: number;
            child: Widget;
            resize_mode: ResizeMode;
            resizeMode: ResizeMode;
        }
    }

    /**
     * A GTK+ user interface is constructed by nesting widgets inside widgets.
     * Container widgets are the inner nodes in the resulting tree of widgets:
     * they contain other widgets. So, for example, you might have a {@link Gtk.Window}
     * containing a {@link Gtk.Frame} containing a {@link Gtk.Label}. If you wanted an image instead
     * of a textual label inside the frame, you might replace the {@link Gtk.Label} widget
     * with a {@link Gtk.Image} widget.
     * 
     * There are two major kinds of container widgets in GTK+. Both are subclasses
     * of the abstract GtkContainer base class.
     * 
     * The first type of container widget has a single child widget and derives
     * from {@link Gtk.Bin}. These containers are decorators, which
     * add some kind of functionality to the child. For example, a {@link Gtk.Button} makes
     * its child into a clickable button; a {@link Gtk.Frame} draws a frame around its child
     * and a {@link Gtk.Window} places its child widget inside a top-level window.
     * 
     * The second type of container can have more than one child; its purpose is to
     * manage layout. This means that these containers assign
     * sizes and positions to their children. For example, a {@link Gtk.HBox} arranges its
     * children in a horizontal row, and a {@link Gtk.Grid} arranges the widgets it contains
     * in a two-dimensional grid.
     * 
     * For implementations of {@link Gtk.Container} the virtual method {@link Gtk.ContainerClass}.forall()
     * is always required, since it's used for drawing and other internal operations
     * on the children.
     * If the {@link Gtk.Container} implementation expect to have non internal children
     * it's needed to implement both {@link Gtk.ContainerClass}.add() and {@link Gtk.ContainerClass}.remove().
     * If the GtkContainer implementation has internal children, they should be added
     * with `gtk_widget_set_parent()` on `init()` and removed with `gtk_widget_unparent()`
     * in the {@link Gtk.WidgetClass}.destroy() implementation.
     * See more about implementing custom widgets at https://wiki.gnome.org/HowDoI/CustomWidgets
     * 
     * # Height for width geometry management
     * 
     * GTK+ uses a height-for-width (and width-for-height) geometry management system.
     * Height-for-width means that a widget can change how much vertical space it needs,
     * depending on the amount of horizontal space that it is given (and similar for
     * width-for-height).
     * 
     * There are some things to keep in mind when implementing container widgets
     * that make use of GTK+’s height for width geometry management system. First,
     * it’s important to note that a container must prioritize one of its
     * dimensions, that is to say that a widget or container can only have a
     * {@link Gtk.SizeRequestMode} that is {@link Gtk.SizeRequestMode.HEIGHT_FOR_WIDTH} or
     * {@link Gtk.SizeRequestMode.WIDTH_FOR_HEIGHT}. However, every widget and container
     * must be able to respond to the APIs for both dimensions, i.e. even if a
     * widget has a request mode that is height-for-width, it is possible that
     * its parent will request its sizes using the width-for-height APIs.
     * 
     * To ensure that everything works properly, here are some guidelines to follow
     * when implementing height-for-width (or width-for-height) containers.
     * 
     * Each request mode involves 2 virtual methods. Height-for-width apis run
     * through `gtk_widget_get_preferred_width()` and then through `gtk_widget_get_preferred_height_for_width()`.
     * When handling requests in the opposite {@link Gtk.SizeRequestMode} it is important that
     * every widget request at least enough space to display all of its content at all times.
     * 
     * When `gtk_widget_get_preferred_height()` is called on a container that is height-for-width,
     * the container must return the height for its minimum width. This is easily achieved by
     * simply calling the reverse apis implemented for itself as follows:
     * 
     * 
     * ```c
     * static void
     * foo_container_get_preferred_height (GtkWidget *widget,
     *                                     gint *min_height,
     *                                     gint *nat_height)
     * {
     *    if (i_am_in_height_for_width_mode)
     *      {
     *        gint min_width;
     * 
     *        GTK_WIDGET_GET_CLASS (widget)->get_preferred_width (widget,
     *                                                            &min_width,
     *                                                            NULL);
     *        GTK_WIDGET_GET_CLASS (widget)->get_preferred_height_for_width
     *                                                           (widget,
     *                                                            min_width,
     *                                                            min_height,
     *                                                            nat_height);
     *      }
     *    else
     *      {
     *        ... many containers support both request modes, execute the
     *        real width-for-height request here by returning the
     *        collective heights of all widgets that are stacked
     *        vertically (or whatever is appropriate for this container)
     *        ...
     *      }
     * }
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * Similarly, when `gtk_widget_get_preferred_width_for_height()` is called for a container or widget
     * that is height-for-width, it then only needs to return the base minimum width like so:
     * 
     * 
     * ```c
     * static void
     * foo_container_get_preferred_width_for_height (GtkWidget *widget,
     *                                               gint for_height,
     *                                               gint *min_width,
     *                                               gint *nat_width)
     * {
     *    if (i_am_in_height_for_width_mode)
     *      {
     *        GTK_WIDGET_GET_CLASS (widget)->get_preferred_width (widget,
     *                                                            min_width,
     *                                                            nat_width);
     *      }
     *    else
     *      {
     *        ... execute the real width-for-height request here based on
     *        the required width of the children collectively if the
     *        container were to be allocated the said height ...
     *      }
     * }
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * Height for width requests are generally implemented in terms of a virtual allocation
     * of widgets in the input orientation. Assuming an height-for-width request mode, a container
     * would implement the `get_preferred_height_for_width()` virtual function by first calling
     * `gtk_widget_get_preferred_width()` for each of its children.
     * 
     * For each potential group of children that are lined up horizontally, the values returned by
     * `gtk_widget_get_preferred_width()` should be collected in an array of {@link Gtk.RequestedSize} structures.
     * Any child spacing should be removed from the input `for_width` and then the collective size should be
     * allocated using the `gtk_distribute_natural_allocation()` convenience function.
     * 
     * The container will then move on to request the preferred height for each child by using
     * `gtk_widget_get_preferred_height_for_width()` and using the sizes stored in the {@link Gtk.RequestedSize} array.
     * 
     * To allocate a height-for-width container, it’s again important
     * to consider that a container must prioritize one dimension over the other. So if
     * a container is a height-for-width container it must first allocate all widgets horizontally
     * using a {@link Gtk.RequestedSize} array and `gtk_distribute_natural_allocation()` and then add any
     * extra space (if and where appropriate) for the widget to expand.
     * 
     * After adding all the expand space, the container assumes it was allocated sufficient
     * height to fit all of its content. At this time, the container must use the total horizontal sizes
     * of each widget to request the height-for-width of each of its children and store the requests in a
     * {@link Gtk.RequestedSize} array for any widgets that stack vertically (for tabular containers this can
     * be generalized into the heights and widths of rows and columns).
     * The vertical space must then again be distributed using `gtk_distribute_natural_allocation()`
     * while this time considering the allocated height of the widget minus any vertical spacing
     * that the container adds. Then vertical expand space should be added where appropriate and available
     * and the container should go on to actually allocating the child widgets.
     * 
     * See [GtkWidget’s geometry management section][geometry-management]
     * to learn more about implementing height-for-width geometry management for widgets.
     * 
     * # Child properties
     * 
     * GtkContainer introduces child properties.
     * These are object properties that are not specific
     * to either the container or the contained widget, but rather to their relation.
     * Typical examples of child properties are the position or pack-type of a widget
     * which is contained in a {@link Gtk.Box}.
     * 
     * Use `gtk_container_class_install_child_property()` to install child properties
     * for a container class and `gtk_container_class_find_child_property()` or
     * `gtk_container_class_list_child_properties()` to get information about existing
     * child properties.
     * 
     * To set the value of a child property, use `gtk_container_child_set_property()`,
     * `gtk_container_child_set()` or `gtk_container_child_set_valist()`.
     * To obtain the value of a child property, use
     * `gtk_container_child_get_property()`, `gtk_container_child_get()` or
     * `gtk_container_child_get_valist()`. To emit notification about child property
     * changes, use `gtk_widget_child_notify()`.
     * 
     * # GtkContainer as GtkBuildable
     * 
     * The GtkContainer implementation of the GtkBuildable interface supports
     * a `<packing>` element for children, which can contain multiple `<property>`
     * elements that specify child properties for the child.
     * 
     * Since 2.16, child properties can also be marked as translatable using
     * the same “translatable”, “comments” and “context” attributes that are used
     * for regular properties.
     * 
     * Since 3.16, containers can have a `<focus-chain>` element containing multiple
     * `<widget>` elements, one for each child that should be added to the focus
     * chain. The ”name” attribute gives the id of the widget.
     * 
     * An example of these properties in UI definitions:
     * 
     * 
     * ```xml
     * <object class="GtkBox">
     *   <child>
     *     <object class="GtkEntry" id="entry1"/>
     *     <packing>
     *       <property name="pack-type">start</property>
     *     </packing>
     *   </child>
     *   <child>
     *     <object class="GtkEntry" id="entry2"/>
     *   </child>
     *   <focus-chain>
     *     <widget name="entry1"/>
     *     <widget name="entry2"/>
     *   </focus-chain>
     * </object>
     * ```
     * 
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    abstract class Container extends Widget implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<Container>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * @default 0
         */
        get border_width(): number;
        set border_width(val: number);

        /**
         * @default 0
         */
        get borderWidth(): number;
        set borderWidth(val: number);

        /**
         * @write-only
         */
        set child(val: Widget);

        /**
         * @default Gtk.ResizeMode.PARENT
         */
        get resize_mode(): ResizeMode;
        set resize_mode(val: ResizeMode);

        /**
         * @default Gtk.ResizeMode.PARENT
         */
        get resizeMode(): ResizeMode;
        set resizeMode(val: ResizeMode);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: Container.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        widget: Widget;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<Container.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof Container.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Container.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof Container.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Container.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof Container.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<Container.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Static methods
        /**
         * @param property_name the name of the child property to find
         */
        static find_child_property(property_name: string): GObject.ParamSpec | null;

        static handle_border_width(): void;

        /**
         * @param pspecs the {@link GObject.ParamSpec} array defining the new     child properties
         */
        static install_child_properties(pspecs: GObject.ParamSpec[]): void;

        /**
         * @param property_id the id for the property
         * @param pspec the {@link GObject.ParamSpec} for the property
         */
        static install_child_property(property_id: number, pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;

        static list_child_properties(): GObject.ParamSpec[];

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * Adds `widget` to `container`. Typically used for simple containers
         * such as {@link Gtk.Window}, {@link Gtk.Frame}, or {@link Gtk.Button}; for more complicated
         * layout containers such as {@link Gtk.Box} or {@link Gtk.Grid}, this function will
         * pick default packing parameters that may not be correct.  So
         * consider functions such as `gtk_box_pack_start()` and
         * `gtk_grid_attach()` as an alternative to `gtk_container_add()` in
         * those cases. A widget may be added to only one container at a time;
         * you can’t place the same widget inside two different containers.
         * 
         * Note that some containers, such as {@link Gtk.ScrolledWindow} or {@link Gtk.ListBox},
         * may add intermediate children between the added widget and the
         * container.
         * @param widget a widget to be placed inside `container`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add(widget: Widget): void;

        /**
         * Signal emitted when a size recalculation is needed.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_check_resize(): void;

        /**
         * Returns the type of the children supported by the container.
         * 
         * Note that this may return `G_TYPE_NONE` to indicate that no more
         * children can be added, e.g. for a {@link Gtk.Paned} which already has two
         * children.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_child_type(): GObject.GType;

        /**
         * Gets a widget’s composite name. Deprecated: 3.10.
         * @param child 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_composite_name(child: Widget): string;

        /**
         * Invokes `callback` on each direct child of `container`, including
         * children that are considered “internal” (implementation details
         * of the container). “Internal” children generally weren’t added
         * by the user of the container, but were added by the container
         * implementation itself.
         * 
         * Most applications should use `gtk_container_foreach()`, rather
         * than `gtk_container_forall()`.
         * @param include_internals 
         * @param callback a callback
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_forall(include_internals: boolean, callback: Callback): void;

        /**
         * Get a property from a child of container.
         * @param child 
         * @param property_id 
         * @param value 
         * @param pspec 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_child_property(child: Widget, property_id: number, value: unknown, pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;

        /**
         * Returns a newly created widget path representing all the widget hierarchy
         * from the toplevel down to and including `child`.
         * @param child a child of `container`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_path_for_child(child: Widget): WidgetPath;

        /**
         * Removes `widget` from `container`. `widget` must be inside `container`.
         * Note that `container` will own a reference to `widget`, and that this
         * may be the last reference held; so removing a widget from its
         * container can destroy that widget. If you want to use `widget`
         * again, you need to add a reference to it before removing it from
         * a container, using `g_object_ref()`. If you don’t want to use `widget`
         * again it’s usually more efficient to simply destroy it directly
         * using `gtk_widget_destroy()` since this will remove it from the
         * container and help break any circular reference count cycles.
         * @param widget a current child of `container`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_remove(widget: Widget): void;

        /**
         * Set a property on a child of container.
         * @param child 
         * @param property_id 
         * @param value 
         * @param pspec 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_child_property(child: Widget, property_id: number, value: unknown, pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;

        /**
         * Sets, or unsets if `child` is `null`, the focused child of `container`.
         * 
         * This function emits the GtkContainer::set_focus_child signal of
         * `container`. Implementations of {@link Gtk.Container} can override the
         * default behaviour by overriding the class closure of this signal.
         * 
         * This is function is mostly meant to be used by widgets. Applications can use
         * `gtk_widget_grab_focus()` to manually set the focus to a specific widget.
         * @param child a {@link Gtk.Widget}, or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_focus_child(child: Widget | null): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Adds `widget` to `container`. Typically used for simple containers
         * such as {@link Gtk.Window}, {@link Gtk.Frame}, or {@link Gtk.Button}; for more complicated
         * layout containers such as {@link Gtk.Box} or {@link Gtk.Grid}, this function will
         * pick default packing parameters that may not be correct.  So
         * consider functions such as `gtk_box_pack_start()` and
         * `gtk_grid_attach()` as an alternative to `gtk_container_add()` in
         * those cases. A widget may be added to only one container at a time;
         * you can’t place the same widget inside two different containers.
         * 
         * Note that some containers, such as {@link Gtk.ScrolledWindow} or {@link Gtk.ListBox},
         * may add intermediate children between the added widget and the
         * container.
         * @param widget a widget to be placed inside `container`
         */
        add(widget: Widget): void;

        check_resize(): void;

        /**
         * Gets the value of a child property for `child` and `container`.
         * @param child a widget which is a child of `container`
         * @param property_name the name of the property to get
         * @param value a location to return the value
         */
        child_get_property(child: Widget, property_name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;

        /**
         * Emits a {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.child_notify | Gtk.Widget::child-notify} signal for the
         * [child property][child-properties]
         * `child_property` on the child.
         * 
         * This is an analogue of `g_object_notify()` for child properties.
         * 
         * Also see `gtk_widget_child_notify()`.
         * @param child the child widget
         * @param child_property the name of a child property installed on     the class of `container`
         */
        child_notify(child: Widget, child_property: string): void;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
    // Conflicted with Gtk.Widget.child_notify
        child_notify(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Emits a {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.child_notify | Gtk.Widget::child-notify} signal for the
         * [child property][child-properties] specified by
         * `pspec` on the child.
         * 
         * This is an analogue of `g_object_notify_by_pspec()` for child properties.
         * @param child the child widget
         * @param pspec the {@link GObject.ParamSpec} of a child property instealled on     the class of `container`
         */
        child_notify_by_pspec(child: Widget, pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;

        /**
         * Sets a child property for `child` and `container`.
         * @param child a widget which is a child of `container`
         * @param property_name the name of the property to set
         * @param value the value to set the property to
         */
        child_set_property(child: Widget, property_name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;

        /**
         * Returns the type of the children supported by the container.
         * 
         * Note that this may return `G_TYPE_NONE` to indicate that no more
         * children can be added, e.g. for a {@link Gtk.Paned} which already has two
         * children.
         * @returns a {@link GObject.GType}.
         */
        child_type(): GObject.GType;

        /**
         * Invokes `callback` on each direct child of `container`, including
         * children that are considered “internal” (implementation details
         * of the container). “Internal” children generally weren’t added
         * by the user of the container, but were added by the container
         * implementation itself.
         * 
         * Most applications should use `gtk_container_foreach()`, rather
         * than `gtk_container_forall()`.
         * @param callback a callback
         */
        forall(callback: Callback): void;

        /**
         * Invokes `callback` on each non-internal child of `container`.
         * See `gtk_container_forall()` for details on what constitutes
         * an “internal” child. For all practical purposes, this function
         * should iterate over precisely those child widgets that were
         * added to the container by the application with explicit `add()`
         * calls.
         * 
         * It is permissible to remove the child from the `callback` handler.
         * 
         * Most applications should use `gtk_container_foreach()`,
         * rather than `gtk_container_forall()`.
         * @param callback a callback
         */
        foreach(callback: Callback): void;

        /**
         * Retrieves the border width of the container. See
         * `gtk_container_set_border_width()`.
         * @returns the current border width
         */
        get_border_width(): number;

        /**
         * Returns the container’s non-internal children. See
         * `gtk_container_forall()` for details on what constitutes an "internal" child.
         * @returns a newly-allocated list of the container’s non-internal children.
         */
        get_children(): Widget[];

        /**
         * Retrieves the focus chain of the container, if one has been
         * set explicitly. If no focus chain has been explicitly
         * set, GTK+ computes the focus chain based on the positions
         * of the children. In that case, GTK+ stores `null` in
         * `focusable_widgets` and returns `false`.
         * @returns `true` if the focus chain of the container has been set explicitly.
         */
        get_focus_chain(): [boolean, Widget[]];

        /**
         * Returns the current focus child widget inside `container`. This is not the
         * currently focused widget. That can be obtained by calling
         * `gtk_window_get_focus()`.
         * @returns The child widget which will receive the          focus inside `container` when the `container` is focused,          or `null` if none is set.
         */
        get_focus_child(): Widget | null;

        /**
         * Retrieves the horizontal focus adjustment for the container. See
         * gtk_container_set_focus_hadjustment ().
         * @returns the horizontal focus adjustment, or `null` if   none has been set.
         */
        get_focus_hadjustment(): Adjustment | null;

        /**
         * Retrieves the vertical focus adjustment for the container. See
         * `gtk_container_set_focus_vadjustment()`.
         * @returns the vertical focus adjustment, or   `null` if none has been set.
         */
        get_focus_vadjustment(): Adjustment | null;

        /**
         * Returns a newly created widget path representing all the widget hierarchy
         * from the toplevel down to and including `child`.
         * @param child a child of `container`
         * @returns A newly created {@link Gtk.WidgetPath}
         */
        get_path_for_child(child: Widget): WidgetPath;

        /**
         * Returns the resize mode for the container. See
         * gtk_container_set_resize_mode ().
         * @returns the current resize mode
         */
        get_resize_mode(): ResizeMode;

        /**
         * When a container receives a call to the draw function, it must send
         * synthetic {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.draw | Gtk.Widget::draw} calls to all children that don’t have their
         * own `GdkWindows`. This function provides a convenient way of doing this.
         * A container, when it receives a call to its {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.draw | Gtk.Widget::draw} function,
         * calls `gtk_container_propagate_draw()` once for each child, passing in
         * the `cr` the container received.
         * 
         * `gtk_container_propagate_draw()` takes care of translating the origin of `cr`,
         * and deciding whether the draw needs to be sent to the child. It is a
         * convenient and optimized way of getting the same effect as calling
         * `gtk_widget_draw()` on the child directly.
         * 
         * In most cases, a container can simply either inherit the
         * {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.draw | Gtk.Widget::draw} implementation from {@link Gtk.Container}, or do some drawing
         * and then chain to the ::draw implementation from {@link Gtk.Container}.
         * @param child a child of `container`
         * @param cr Cairo context as passed to the container. If you want to use `cr`   in container’s draw function, consider using `cairo_save()` and   `cairo_restore()` before calling this function.
         */
        propagate_draw(child: Widget, cr: cairo.Context): void;

        /**
         * Removes `widget` from `container`. `widget` must be inside `container`.
         * Note that `container` will own a reference to `widget`, and that this
         * may be the last reference held; so removing a widget from its
         * container can destroy that widget. If you want to use `widget`
         * again, you need to add a reference to it before removing it from
         * a container, using `g_object_ref()`. If you don’t want to use `widget`
         * again it’s usually more efficient to simply destroy it directly
         * using `gtk_widget_destroy()` since this will remove it from the
         * container and help break any circular reference count cycles.
         * @param widget a current child of `container`
         */
        remove(widget: Widget): void;

        resize_children(): void;

        /**
         * Sets the border width of the container.
         * 
         * The border width of a container is the amount of space to leave
         * around the outside of the container. The only exception to this is
         * {@link Gtk.Window}; because toplevel windows can’t leave space outside,
         * they leave the space inside. The border is added on all sides of
         * the container. To add space to only one side, use a specific
         * {@link Gtk.Widget.margin} property on the child widget, for example
         * {@link Gtk.Widget.margin_top}.
         * @param border_width amount of blank space to leave outside   the container. Valid values are in the range 0-65535 pixels.
         */
        set_border_width(border_width: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets a focus chain, overriding the one computed automatically by GTK+.
         * 
         * In principle each widget in the chain should be a descendant of the
         * container, but this is not enforced by this method, since it’s allowed
         * to set the focus chain before you pack the widgets, or have a widget
         * in the chain that isn’t always packed. The necessary checks are done
         * when the focus chain is actually traversed.
         * @param focusable_widgets the new focus chain
         */
        set_focus_chain(focusable_widgets: Widget[]): void;

        /**
         * Sets, or unsets if `child` is `null`, the focused child of `container`.
         * 
         * This function emits the GtkContainer::set_focus_child signal of
         * `container`. Implementations of {@link Gtk.Container} can override the
         * default behaviour by overriding the class closure of this signal.
         * 
         * This is function is mostly meant to be used by widgets. Applications can use
         * `gtk_widget_grab_focus()` to manually set the focus to a specific widget.
         * @param child a {@link Gtk.Widget}, or `null`
         */
        set_focus_child(child: Widget | null): void;

        /**
         * Hooks up an adjustment to focus handling in a container, so when a child
         * of the container is focused, the adjustment is scrolled to show that
         * widget. This function sets the horizontal alignment.
         * See `gtk_scrolled_window_get_hadjustment()` for a typical way of obtaining
         * the adjustment and `gtk_container_set_focus_vadjustment()` for setting
         * the vertical adjustment.
         * 
         * The adjustments have to be in pixel units and in the same coordinate
         * system as the allocation for immediate children of the container.
         * @param adjustment an adjustment which should be adjusted when the focus is   moved among the descendents of `container`
         */
        set_focus_hadjustment(adjustment: Adjustment): void;

        /**
         * Hooks up an adjustment to focus handling in a container, so when a
         * child of the container is focused, the adjustment is scrolled to
         * show that widget. This function sets the vertical alignment. See
         * `gtk_scrolled_window_get_vadjustment()` for a typical way of obtaining
         * the adjustment and `gtk_container_set_focus_hadjustment()` for setting
         * the horizontal adjustment.
         * 
         * The adjustments have to be in pixel units and in the same coordinate
         * system as the allocation for immediate children of the container.
         * @param adjustment an adjustment which should be adjusted when the focus   is moved among the descendents of `container`
         */
        set_focus_vadjustment(adjustment: Adjustment): void;

        /**
         * Sets the `reallocate_redraws` flag of the container to the given value.
         * 
         * Containers requesting reallocation redraws get automatically
         * redrawn if any of their children changed allocation.
         * @param needs_redraws the new value for the container’s `reallocate_redraws` flag
         */
        set_reallocate_redraws(needs_redraws: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the resize mode for the container.
         * 
         * The resize mode of a container determines whether a resize request
         * will be passed to the container’s parent, queued for later execution
         * or executed immediately.
         * @param resize_mode the new resize mode
         */
        set_resize_mode(resize_mode: ResizeMode): void;

        /**
         * Removes a focus chain explicitly set with `gtk_container_set_focus_chain()`.
         */
        unset_focus_chain(): void;

        /**
         * Adds a child to `buildable`. `type` is an optional string
         * describing how the child should be added.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child to add
         * @param type kind of child or `null`
         */
        add_child(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object, type: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Constructs a child of `buildable` with the name `name`.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} calls this function if a “constructor” has been
         * specified in the UI definition.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param name name of child to construct
         * @returns the constructed child
         */
        construct_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, name: string): T;

        /**
         * This is similar to `gtk_buildable_parser_finished()` but is
         * called once for each custom tag handled by the `buildable`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname the name of the tag
         * @param data user data created in custom_tag_start
         */
        custom_finished(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
         * the buildable.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @param data user data that will be passed in to parser functions
         */
        custom_tag_end(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called for each unknown element under `<child>`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @returns `true` if a object has a custom implementation, `false`          if it doesn't.
         */
        custom_tag_start(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string): [boolean, GLib.MarkupParser, null];

        /**
         * Get the internal child called `childname` of the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param childname name of child
         * @returns the internal child of the buildable object
         */
        get_internal_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, childname: string): T;

        /**
         * Gets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} sets the name based on the
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI]
         * used to construct the `buildable`.
         * @returns the name set with `gtk_buildable_set_name()`
         */
        get_name(): string;

        /**
         * Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI].
         * Note that this will be called once for each time
         * `gtk_builder_add_from_file()` or `gtk_builder_add_from_string()`
         * is called on a builder.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         */
        parser_finished(builder: Builder): void;

        /**
         * Sets the property name `name` to `value` on the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param name name of property
         * @param value value of property
         */
        set_buildable_property(builder: Builder, name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;

        /**
         * Sets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * @param name name to set
         */
        set_name(name: string): void;

        /**
         * Adds a child to `buildable`. `type` is an optional string
         * describing how the child should be added.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child to add
         * @param type kind of child or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add_child(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object, type: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Constructs a child of `buildable` with the name `name`.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} calls this function if a “constructor” has been
         * specified in the UI definition.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param name name of child to construct
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_construct_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, name: string): T;

        /**
         * This is similar to `gtk_buildable_parser_finished()` but is
         * called once for each custom tag handled by the `buildable`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname the name of the tag
         * @param data user data created in custom_tag_start
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_finished(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
         * the buildable.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @param data user data that will be passed in to parser functions
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_tag_end(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called for each unknown element under `<child>`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_tag_start(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string): [boolean, GLib.MarkupParser, never];

        /**
         * Get the internal child called `childname` of the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param childname name of child
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_internal_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, childname: string): T;

        /**
         * Gets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} sets the name based on the
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI]
         * used to construct the `buildable`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_name(): string;

        /**
         * Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI].
         * Note that this will be called once for each time
         * `gtk_builder_add_from_file()` or `gtk_builder_add_from_string()`
         * is called on a builder.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_parser_finished(builder: Builder): void;

        /**
         * Sets the property name `name` to `value` on the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param name name of property
         * @param value value of property
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_buildable_property(builder: Builder, name: string, value: unknown): void;

        /**
         * Sets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * @param name name to set
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_name(name: string): void;
    }


    namespace ContainerAccessible {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends WidgetAccessible.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-layer": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-mdi-zorder": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-help-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-hypertext-nlinks": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption-object": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-summary": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends WidgetAccessible.ConstructorProps, Atk.Component.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class ContainerAccessible extends WidgetAccessible implements Atk.Component {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ContainerAccessible>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: ContainerAccessible.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<ContainerAccessible.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof ContainerAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ContainerAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof ContainerAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ContainerAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof ContainerAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<ContainerAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        /**
         * Checks whether the specified point is within the extent of the `component`.
         * 
         * Toolkit implementor note: ATK provides a default implementation for
         * this virtual method. In general there are little reason to
         * re-implement it.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @returns `true` or `false` indicating whether the specified point is within the extent of the `component` or not
         */
        contains(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the alpha value (i.e. the opacity) for this
         * `component`, on a scale from 0 (fully transparent) to 1.0
         * (fully opaque).
         * @returns An alpha value from 0 to 1.0, inclusive.
         */
        get_alpha(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the rectangle which gives the extent of the `component`.
         * 
         * If the extent can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), all of x, y, width, height are set to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         */
        get_extents(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the layer of the component.
         * @returns an {@link Atk.Layer} which is the layer of the component
         */
        get_layer(): Atk.Layer;

        /**
         * Gets the zorder of the component. The value G_MININT will be returned
         * if the layer of the component is not ATK_LAYER_MDI or ATK_LAYER_WINDOW.
         * @returns a gint which is the zorder of the component, i.e. the depth at which the component is shown in relation to other components in the same container.
         */
        get_mdi_zorder(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the position of `component` in the form of
         * a point specifying `component`'s top-left corner.
         * 
         * If the position can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), x and y are set to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         */
        get_position(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the size of the `component` in terms of width and height.
         * 
         * If the size can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), width and height are set to -1.
         */
        get_size(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Grabs focus for this `component`.
         * @returns `true` if successful, `false` otherwise.
         */
        grab_focus(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets a reference to the accessible child, if one exists, at the
         * coordinate point specified by `x` and `y`.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @returns a reference to the accessible child, if one exists
         */
        ref_accessible_at_point(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): Atk.Object | null;

        /**
         * Remove the handler specified by `handler_id` from the list of
         * functions to be executed when this object receives focus events
         * (in or out).
         * @param handler_id the handler id of the focus handler to be removed from `component`
         */
        remove_focus_handler(handler_id: number): void;

        /**
         * Makes `component` visible on the screen by scrolling all necessary parents.
         * 
         * Contrary to atk_component_set_position, this does not actually move
         * `component` in its parent, this only makes the parents scroll so that the
         * object shows up on the screen, given its current position within the parents.
         * @param type specify where the object should be made visible.
         * @returns whether scrolling was successful.
         */
        scroll_to(type: Atk.ScrollType): boolean;

        /**
         * Move the top-left of `component` to a given position of the screen by
         * scrolling all necessary parents.
         * @param coords specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or to the parent object.
         * @param x x-position where to scroll to
         * @param y y-position where to scroll to
         * @returns whether scrolling was successful.
         */
        scroll_to_point(coords: Atk.CoordType, x: number, y: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the extents of `component`.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param width width to set for `component`
         * @param height height to set for `component`
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @returns `true` or `false` whether the extents were set or not
         */
        set_extents(x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the position of `component`.
         * 
         * Contrary to atk_component_scroll_to, this does not trigger any scrolling,
         * this just moves `component` in its parent.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the component's top level window
         * @returns `true` or `false` whether or not the position was set or not
         */
        set_position(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Set the size of the `component` in terms of width and height.
         * @param width width to set for `component`
         * @param height height to set for `component`
         * @returns `true` or `false` whether the size was set or not
         */
        set_size(width: number, height: number): boolean;

        /**
         * @param bounds 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_bounds_changed(bounds: Atk.Rectangle): void;

        /**
         * Checks whether the specified point is within the extent of the `component`.
         * 
         * Toolkit implementor note: ATK provides a default implementation for
         * this virtual method. In general there are little reason to
         * re-implement it.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_contains(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the alpha value (i.e. the opacity) for this
         * `component`, on a scale from 0 (fully transparent) to 1.0
         * (fully opaque).
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_alpha(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the rectangle which gives the extent of the `component`.
         * 
         * If the extent can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), all of x, y, width, height are set to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_extents(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the layer of the component.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_layer(): Atk.Layer;

        /**
         * Gets the zorder of the component. The value G_MININT will be returned
         * if the layer of the component is not ATK_LAYER_MDI or ATK_LAYER_WINDOW.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_mdi_zorder(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the position of `component` in the form of
         * a point specifying `component`'s top-left corner.
         * 
         * If the position can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), x and y are set to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_position(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the size of the `component` in terms of width and height.
         * 
         * If the size can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), width and height are set to -1.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_size(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Grabs focus for this `component`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_grab_focus(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets a reference to the accessible child, if one exists, at the
         * coordinate point specified by `x` and `y`.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_ref_accessible_at_point(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): Atk.Object | null;

        /**
         * Remove the handler specified by `handler_id` from the list of
         * functions to be executed when this object receives focus events
         * (in or out).
         * @param handler_id the handler id of the focus handler to be removed from `component`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_remove_focus_handler(handler_id: number): void;

        /**
         * Makes `component` visible on the screen by scrolling all necessary parents.
         * 
         * Contrary to atk_component_set_position, this does not actually move
         * `component` in its parent, this only makes the parents scroll so that the
         * object shows up on the screen, given its current position within the parents.
         * @param type specify where the object should be made visible.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_scroll_to(type: Atk.ScrollType): boolean;

        /**
         * Move the top-left of `component` to a given position of the screen by
         * scrolling all necessary parents.
         * @param coords specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or to the parent object.
         * @param x x-position where to scroll to
         * @param y y-position where to scroll to
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_scroll_to_point(coords: Atk.CoordType, x: number, y: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the extents of `component`.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param width width to set for `component`
         * @param height height to set for `component`
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_extents(x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the position of `component`.
         * 
         * Contrary to atk_component_scroll_to, this does not trigger any scrolling,
         * this just moves `component` in its parent.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the component's top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_position(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Set the size of the `component` in terms of width and height.
         * @param width width to set for `component`
         * @param height height to set for `component`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_size(width: number, height: number): boolean;
    }


    namespace ContainerCellAccessible {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends CellAccessible.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-layer": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-mdi-zorder": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-help-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-hypertext-nlinks": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption-object": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-summary": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends CellAccessible.ConstructorProps, Atk.Action.ConstructorProps, Atk.Component.ConstructorProps, Atk.TableCell.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class ContainerCellAccessible extends CellAccessible implements Atk.Action, Atk.Component, Atk.TableCell {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ContainerCellAccessible>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: ContainerCellAccessible.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<ContainerCellAccessible.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): ContainerCellAccessible;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof ContainerCellAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ContainerCellAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof ContainerCellAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ContainerCellAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof ContainerCellAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<ContainerCellAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * @param child 
         */
        add_child(child: CellAccessible): void;

        /**
         * Get a list of children.
         */
        get_children(): CellAccessible[];

        /**
         * @param child 
         */
        remove_child(child: CellAccessible): void;

        /**
         * Perform the specified action on the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns `true` if success, `false` otherwise
         */
        do_action(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns a description of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns a description string, or `null` if `action` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_description(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.get_description
        get_description(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Gets the keybinding which can be used to activate this action, if one
         * exists. The string returned should contain localized, human-readable,
         * key sequences as they would appear when displayed on screen. It must
         * be in the format "mnemonic;sequence;shortcut".
         * 
         * - The mnemonic key activates the object if it is presently enabled onscreen.
         *   This typically corresponds to the underlined letter within the widget.
         *   Example: "n" in a traditional "New..." menu item or the "a" in "Apply" for
         *   a button.
         * - The sequence is the full list of keys which invoke the action even if the
         *   relevant element is not currently shown on screen. For instance, for a menu
         *   item the sequence is the keybindings used to open the parent menus before
         *   invoking. The sequence string is colon-delimited. Example: "Alt+F:N" in a
         *   traditional "New..." menu item.
         * - The shortcut, if it exists, will invoke the same action without showing
         *   the component or its enclosing menus or dialogs. Example: "Ctrl+N" in a
         *   traditional "New..." menu item.
         * 
         * Example: For a traditional "New..." menu item, the expected return value
         * would be: "N;Alt+F:N;Ctrl+N" for the English locale and "N;Alt+D:N;Strg+N"
         * for the German locale. If, hypothetically, this menu item lacked a mnemonic,
         * it would be represented by ";;Ctrl+N" and ";;Strg+N" respectively.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns the keybinding which can be used to activate this action, or `null` if there is no keybinding for this action.
         */
        get_keybinding(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Returns the localized name of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns a name string, or `null` if `action` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_localized_name(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the number of accessible actions available on the object.
         * If there are more than one, the first one is considered the
         * "default" action of the object.
         * @returns a the number of actions, or 0 if `action` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_n_actions(): number;

        /**
         * Returns a non-localized string naming the specified action of the
         * object. This name is generally not descriptive of the end result
         * of the action, but instead names the 'interaction type' which the
         * object supports. By convention, the above strings should be used to
         * represent the actions which correspond to the common point-and-click
         * interaction techniques of the same name: i.e.
         * "click", "press", "release", "drag", "drop", "popup", etc.
         * The "popup" action should be used to pop up a context menu for the
         * object, if one exists.
         * 
         * For technical reasons, some toolkits cannot guarantee that the
         * reported action is actually 'bound' to a nontrivial user event;
         * i.e. the result of some actions via `atk_action_do_action()` may be
         * NIL.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns a name string, or `null` if `action` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_name(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.get_name
        get_name(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Sets a description of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @param desc the description to be assigned to this action
         * @returns a gboolean representing if the description was successfully set;
         */
        set_description(i: number, desc: string): boolean;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.set_description
        set_description(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Perform the specified action on the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_do_action(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns a description of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_description(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         * @virtual
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.vfunc_get_description
        vfunc_get_description(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Gets the keybinding which can be used to activate this action, if one
         * exists. The string returned should contain localized, human-readable,
         * key sequences as they would appear when displayed on screen. It must
         * be in the format "mnemonic;sequence;shortcut".
         * 
         * - The mnemonic key activates the object if it is presently enabled onscreen.
         *   This typically corresponds to the underlined letter within the widget.
         *   Example: "n" in a traditional "New..." menu item or the "a" in "Apply" for
         *   a button.
         * - The sequence is the full list of keys which invoke the action even if the
         *   relevant element is not currently shown on screen. For instance, for a menu
         *   item the sequence is the keybindings used to open the parent menus before
         *   invoking. The sequence string is colon-delimited. Example: "Alt+F:N" in a
         *   traditional "New..." menu item.
         * - The shortcut, if it exists, will invoke the same action without showing
         *   the component or its enclosing menus or dialogs. Example: "Ctrl+N" in a
         *   traditional "New..." menu item.
         * 
         * Example: For a traditional "New..." menu item, the expected return value
         * would be: "N;Alt+F:N;Ctrl+N" for the English locale and "N;Alt+D:N;Strg+N"
         * for the German locale. If, hypothetically, this menu item lacked a mnemonic,
         * it would be represented by ";;Ctrl+N" and ";;Strg+N" respectively.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_keybinding(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Returns the localized name of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_localized_name(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the number of accessible actions available on the object.
         * If there are more than one, the first one is considered the
         * "default" action of the object.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_n_actions(): number;

        /**
         * Returns a non-localized string naming the specified action of the
         * object. This name is generally not descriptive of the end result
         * of the action, but instead names the 'interaction type' which the
         * object supports. By convention, the above strings should be used to
         * represent the actions which correspond to the common point-and-click
         * interaction techniques of the same name: i.e.
         * "click", "press", "release", "drag", "drop", "popup", etc.
         * The "popup" action should be used to pop up a context menu for the
         * object, if one exists.
         * 
         * For technical reasons, some toolkits cannot guarantee that the
         * reported action is actually 'bound' to a nontrivial user event;
         * i.e. the result of some actions via `atk_action_do_action()` may be
         * NIL.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_name(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         * @virtual
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.vfunc_get_name
        vfunc_get_name(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Sets a description of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @param desc the description to be assigned to this action
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_description(i: number, desc: string): boolean;

        /**
         * @param args 
         * @virtual
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.vfunc_set_description
        vfunc_set_description(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Checks whether the specified point is within the extent of the `component`.
         * 
         * Toolkit implementor note: ATK provides a default implementation for
         * this virtual method. In general there are little reason to
         * re-implement it.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @returns `true` or `false` indicating whether the specified point is within the extent of the `component` or not
         */
        contains(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the alpha value (i.e. the opacity) for this
         * `component`, on a scale from 0 (fully transparent) to 1.0
         * (fully opaque).
         * @returns An alpha value from 0 to 1.0, inclusive.
         */
        get_alpha(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the rectangle which gives the extent of the `component`.
         * 
         * If the extent can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), all of x, y, width, height are set to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         */
        get_extents(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the layer of the component.
         * @returns an {@link Atk.Layer} which is the layer of the component
         */
        get_layer(): Atk.Layer;

        /**
         * Gets the zorder of the component. The value G_MININT will be returned
         * if the layer of the component is not ATK_LAYER_MDI or ATK_LAYER_WINDOW.
         * @returns a gint which is the zorder of the component, i.e. the depth at which the component is shown in relation to other components in the same container.
         */
        get_mdi_zorder(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the position of `component` in the form of
         * a point specifying `component`'s top-left corner.
         * 
         * If the position can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), x and y are set to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         */
        get_position(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number];

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.TableCell.get_position
        get_position(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Gets the size of the `component` in terms of width and height.
         * 
         * If the size can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), width and height are set to -1.
         */
        get_size(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Grabs focus for this `component`.
         * @returns `true` if successful, `false` otherwise.
         */
        grab_focus(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets a reference to the accessible child, if one exists, at the
         * coordinate point specified by `x` and `y`.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @returns a reference to the accessible child, if one exists
         */
        ref_accessible_at_point(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): Atk.Object | null;

        /**
         * Remove the handler specified by `handler_id` from the list of
         * functions to be executed when this object receives focus events
         * (in or out).
         * @param handler_id the handler id of the focus handler to be removed from `component`
         */
        remove_focus_handler(handler_id: number): void;

        /**
         * Makes `component` visible on the screen by scrolling all necessary parents.
         * 
         * Contrary to atk_component_set_position, this does not actually move
         * `component` in its parent, this only makes the parents scroll so that the
         * object shows up on the screen, given its current position within the parents.
         * @param type specify where the object should be made visible.
         * @returns whether scrolling was successful.
         */
        scroll_to(type: Atk.ScrollType): boolean;

        /**
         * Move the top-left of `component` to a given position of the screen by
         * scrolling all necessary parents.
         * @param coords specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or to the parent object.
         * @param x x-position where to scroll to
         * @param y y-position where to scroll to
         * @returns whether scrolling was successful.
         */
        scroll_to_point(coords: Atk.CoordType, x: number, y: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the extents of `component`.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param width width to set for `component`
         * @param height height to set for `component`
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @returns `true` or `false` whether the extents were set or not
         */
        set_extents(x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the position of `component`.
         * 
         * Contrary to atk_component_scroll_to, this does not trigger any scrolling,
         * this just moves `component` in its parent.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the component's top level window
         * @returns `true` or `false` whether or not the position was set or not
         */
        set_position(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Set the size of the `component` in terms of width and height.
         * @param width width to set for `component`
         * @param height height to set for `component`
         * @returns `true` or `false` whether the size was set or not
         */
        set_size(width: number, height: number): boolean;

        /**
         * @param bounds 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_bounds_changed(bounds: Atk.Rectangle): void;

        /**
         * Checks whether the specified point is within the extent of the `component`.
         * 
         * Toolkit implementor note: ATK provides a default implementation for
         * this virtual method. In general there are little reason to
         * re-implement it.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_contains(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the alpha value (i.e. the opacity) for this
         * `component`, on a scale from 0 (fully transparent) to 1.0
         * (fully opaque).
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_alpha(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the rectangle which gives the extent of the `component`.
         * 
         * If the extent can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), all of x, y, width, height are set to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_extents(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the layer of the component.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_layer(): Atk.Layer;

        /**
         * Gets the zorder of the component. The value G_MININT will be returned
         * if the layer of the component is not ATK_LAYER_MDI or ATK_LAYER_WINDOW.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_mdi_zorder(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the position of `component` in the form of
         * a point specifying `component`'s top-left corner.
         * 
         * If the position can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), x and y are set to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_position(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number];

        /**
         * @param args 
         * @virtual
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.TableCell.vfunc_get_position
        vfunc_get_position(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Gets the size of the `component` in terms of width and height.
         * 
         * If the size can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), width and height are set to -1.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_size(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Grabs focus for this `component`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_grab_focus(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets a reference to the accessible child, if one exists, at the
         * coordinate point specified by `x` and `y`.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_ref_accessible_at_point(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): Atk.Object | null;

        /**
         * Remove the handler specified by `handler_id` from the list of
         * functions to be executed when this object receives focus events
         * (in or out).
         * @param handler_id the handler id of the focus handler to be removed from `component`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_remove_focus_handler(handler_id: number): void;

        /**
         * Makes `component` visible on the screen by scrolling all necessary parents.
         * 
         * Contrary to atk_component_set_position, this does not actually move
         * `component` in its parent, this only makes the parents scroll so that the
         * object shows up on the screen, given its current position within the parents.
         * @param type specify where the object should be made visible.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_scroll_to(type: Atk.ScrollType): boolean;

        /**
         * Move the top-left of `component` to a given position of the screen by
         * scrolling all necessary parents.
         * @param coords specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or to the parent object.
         * @param x x-position where to scroll to
         * @param y y-position where to scroll to
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_scroll_to_point(coords: Atk.CoordType, x: number, y: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the extents of `component`.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param width width to set for `component`
         * @param height height to set for `component`
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_extents(x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the position of `component`.
         * 
         * Contrary to atk_component_scroll_to, this does not trigger any scrolling,
         * this just moves `component` in its parent.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the component's top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_position(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Set the size of the `component` in terms of width and height.
         * @param width width to set for `component`
         * @param height height to set for `component`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_size(width: number, height: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the column headers as an array of cell accessibles.
         * @returns a GPtrArray of AtkObjects representing the column header cells.
         */
        get_column_header_cells(): Atk.Object[];

        /**
         * Returns the number of columns occupied by this cell accessible.
         * @returns a gint representing the number of columns occupied by this cell, or 0 if the cell does not implement this method.
         */
        get_column_span(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the row and column indexes and span of this cell accessible.
         * 
         * Note: If the object does not implement this function, then, by default, atk
         * will implement this function by calling get_row_span and get_column_span
         * on the object.
         * @returns TRUE if successful; FALSE otherwise.
         */
        get_row_column_span(): [boolean, number, number, number, number];

        /**
         * Returns the row headers as an array of cell accessibles.
         * @returns a GPtrArray of AtkObjects representing the row header cells.
         */
        get_row_header_cells(): Atk.Object[];

        /**
         * Returns the number of rows occupied by this cell accessible.
         * @returns a gint representing the number of rows occupied by this cell, or 0 if the cell does not implement this method.
         */
        get_row_span(): number;

        /**
         * Returns a reference to the accessible of the containing table.
         * @returns the atk object for the containing table.
         */
        get_table(): Atk.Object;

        /**
         * Returns the column headers as an array of cell accessibles.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_column_header_cells(): Atk.Object[];

        /**
         * Returns the number of columns occupied by this cell accessible.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_column_span(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the row and column indexes and span of this cell accessible.
         * 
         * Note: If the object does not implement this function, then, by default, atk
         * will implement this function by calling get_row_span and get_column_span
         * on the object.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_row_column_span(): [boolean, number, number, number, number];

        /**
         * Returns the row headers as an array of cell accessibles.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_row_header_cells(): Atk.Object[];

        /**
         * Returns the number of rows occupied by this cell accessible.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_row_span(): number;

        /**
         * Returns a reference to the accessible of the containing table.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_table(): Atk.Object;
    }


    namespace CssProvider {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends GObject.Object.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * Signals that a parsing error occurred. the `path`, `line` and `position`
             * describe the actual location of the error as accurately as possible.
             * 
             * Parsing errors are never fatal, so the parsing will resume after
             * the error. Errors may however cause parts of the given
             * data or even all of it to not be parsed at all. So it is a useful idea
             * to check that the parsing succeeds by connecting to this signal.
             * 
             * Note that this signal may be emitted at any time as the css provider
             * may opt to defer parsing parts or all of the input to a later time
             * than when a loading function was called.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "parsing-error": (arg0: CssSection, arg1: GLib.Error) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.Object.ConstructorProps, StyleProvider.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * GtkCssProvider is an object implementing the {@link Gtk.StyleProvider} interface.
     * It is able to parse [CSS-like][css-overview] input in order to style widgets.
     * 
     * An application can make GTK+ parse a specific CSS style sheet by calling
     * `gtk_css_provider_load_from_file()` or `gtk_css_provider_load_from_resource()`
     * and adding the provider with `gtk_style_context_add_provider()` or
     * `gtk_style_context_add_provider_for_screen()`.
     * 
     * In addition, certain files will be read when GTK+ is initialized. First, the
     * file `$XDG_CONFIG_HOME/gtk-3.0/gtk.css` is loaded if it exists. Then, GTK+
     * loads the first existing file among
     * `XDG_DATA_HOME/themes/THEME/gtk-VERSION/gtk.css`,
     * `$HOME/.themes/THEME/gtk-VERSION/gtk.css`,
     * `$XDG_DATA_DIRS/themes/THEME/gtk-VERSION/gtk.css` and
     * `DATADIR/share/themes/THEME/gtk-VERSION/gtk.css`, where `THEME` is the name of
     * the current theme (see the {@link Gtk.Settings.gtk_theme_name} setting), `DATADIR`
     * is the prefix configured when GTK+ was compiled (unless overridden by the
     * `GTK_DATA_PREFIX` environment variable), and `VERSION` is the GTK+ version number.
     * If no file is found for the current version, GTK+ tries older versions all the
     * way back to 3.0.
     * 
     * In the same way, GTK+ tries to load a gtk-keys.css file for the current
     * key theme, as defined by {@link Gtk.Settings.gtk_key_theme_name}.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class CssProvider extends GObject.Object implements StyleProvider {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<CssProvider>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: CssProvider.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<CssProvider.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): CssProvider;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof CssProvider.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, CssProvider.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof CssProvider.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, CssProvider.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof CssProvider.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<CssProvider.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Static methods
        /**
         * Returns the provider containing the style settings used as a
         * fallback for all widgets.
         */
        static get_default(): CssProvider;

        /**
         * Loads a theme from the usual theme paths
         * @param name A theme name
         * @param variant variant to load, for example, "dark", or     `null` for the default
         */
        static get_named(name: string, variant: string | null): CssProvider;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * @param section 
         * @param error 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_parsing_error(section: CssSection, error: GLib.Error): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Loads `data` into `css_provider`, and by doing so clears any previously loaded
         * information.
         * @param data CSS data loaded in memory
         * @returns `true`. The return value is deprecated and `false` will only be     returned for backwards compatibility reasons if an `error` is not     `null` and a loading error occurred. To track errors while loading     CSS, connect to the {@link Gtk.CssProvider.SignalSignatures.parsing_error | Gtk.CssProvider::parsing-error} signal.
         */
        load_from_data(data: Uint8Array | string): boolean;

        /**
         * Loads the data contained in `file` into `css_provider`, making it
         * clear any previously loaded information.
         * @param file {@link Gio.File} pointing to a file to load
         * @returns `true`. The return value is deprecated and `false` will only be     returned for backwards compatibility reasons if an `error` is not     `null` and a loading error occurred. To track errors while loading     CSS, connect to the {@link Gtk.CssProvider.SignalSignatures.parsing_error | Gtk.CssProvider::parsing-error} signal.
         */
        load_from_file(file: Gio.File): boolean;

        /**
         * Loads the data contained in `path` into `css_provider`, making it clear
         * any previously loaded information.
         * @param path the path of a filename to load, in the GLib filename encoding
         * @returns `true`. The return value is deprecated and `false` will only be     returned for backwards compatibility reasons if an `error` is not     `null` and a loading error occurred. To track errors while loading     CSS, connect to the {@link Gtk.CssProvider.SignalSignatures.parsing_error | Gtk.CssProvider::parsing-error} signal.
         */
        load_from_path(path: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Loads the data contained in the resource at `resource_path` into
         * the {@link Gtk.CssProvider}, clearing any previously loaded information.
         * 
         * To track errors while loading CSS, connect to the
         * {@link Gtk.CssProvider.SignalSignatures.parsing_error | Gtk.CssProvider::parsing-error} signal.
         * @param resource_path a {@link Gio.Resource} resource path
         */
        load_from_resource(resource_path: string): void;

        /**
         * Converts the `provider` into a string representation in CSS
         * format.
         * 
         * Using `gtk_css_provider_load_from_data()` with the return value
         * from this function on a new provider created with
         * `gtk_css_provider_new()` will basically create a duplicate of
         * this `provider`.
         * @returns a new string representing the `provider`.
         */
        to_string(): string;

        /**
         * Returns the {@link Gtk.IconFactory} defined to be in use for `path`, or `null` if none
         * is defined.
         * @param path {@link Gtk.WidgetPath} to query
         * @returns The icon factory to use for `path`, or `null`
         */
        get_icon_factory(path: WidgetPath): IconFactory | null;

        /**
         * Returns the style settings affecting a widget defined by `path`, or `null` if
         * `provider` doesn’t contemplate styling `path`.
         * @param path {@link Gtk.WidgetPath} to query
         * @returns a {@link Gtk.StyleProperties} containing the style settings affecting `path`
         */
        get_style(path: WidgetPath): StyleProperties | null;

        /**
         * Looks up a widget style property as defined by `provider` for
         * the widget represented by `path`.
         * @param path {@link Gtk.WidgetPath} to query
         * @param state state to query the style property for
         * @param pspec The {@link GObject.ParamSpec} to query
         * @returns `true` if the property was found and has a value, `false` otherwise
         */
        get_style_property(path: WidgetPath, state: StateFlags, pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): [boolean, unknown];

        /**
         * Returns the {@link Gtk.IconFactory} defined to be in use for `path`, or `null` if none
         * is defined.
         * @param path {@link Gtk.WidgetPath} to query
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_icon_factory(path: WidgetPath): IconFactory | null;

        /**
         * Returns the style settings affecting a widget defined by `path`, or `null` if
         * `provider` doesn’t contemplate styling `path`.
         * @param path {@link Gtk.WidgetPath} to query
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_style(path: WidgetPath): StyleProperties | null;

        /**
         * Looks up a widget style property as defined by `provider` for
         * the widget represented by `path`.
         * @param path {@link Gtk.WidgetPath} to query
         * @param state state to query the style property for
         * @param pspec The {@link GObject.ParamSpec} to query
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_style_property(path: WidgetPath, state: StateFlags, pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): [boolean, GObject.Value | any];
    }


    namespace Dialog {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Window.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * The ::close signal is a
             * [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted when the user uses a keybinding to close
             * the dialog.
             * 
             * The default binding for this signal is the Escape key.
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            close: () => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when an action widget is clicked, the dialog receives a
             * delete event, or the application programmer calls `gtk_dialog_response()`.
             * On a delete event, the response ID is #GTK_RESPONSE_DELETE_EVENT.
             * Otherwise, it depends on which action widget was clicked.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            response: (arg0: number) => void;
            "notify::use-header-bar": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accept-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::application": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::attached-to": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::decorated": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::default-height": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::default-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::deletable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::destroy-with-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-map": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gravity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-resize-grip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-toplevel-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hide-titlebar-when-maximized": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::icon": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::icon-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-active": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-maximized": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::mnemonics-visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::modal": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resizable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-grip-visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::screen": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::skip-pager-hint": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::skip-taskbar-hint": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::startup-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::title": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::transient-for": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::type": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::type-hint": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::urgency-hint": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window-position": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Window.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {
            use_header_bar: number;
            useHeaderBar: number;
        }
    }

    /**
     * Dialog boxes are a convenient way to prompt the user for a small amount
     * of input, e.g. to display a message, ask a question, or anything else
     * that does not require extensive effort on the user’s part.
     * 
     * GTK+ treats a dialog as a window split vertically. The top section is a
     * {@link Gtk.VBox}, and is where widgets such as a {@link Gtk.Label} or a {@link Gtk.Entry} should
     * be packed. The bottom area is known as the
     * “action area”. This is generally used for
     * packing buttons into the dialog which may perform functions such as
     * cancel, ok, or apply.
     * 
     * {@link Gtk.Dialog} boxes are created with a call to `gtk_dialog_new()` or
     * `gtk_dialog_new_with_buttons()`. `gtk_dialog_new_with_buttons()` is
     * recommended; it allows you to set the dialog title, some convenient
     * flags, and add simple buttons.
     * 
     * If “dialog” is a newly created dialog, the two primary areas of the
     * window can be accessed through `gtk_dialog_get_content_area()` and
     * `gtk_dialog_get_action_area()`, as can be seen from the example below.
     * 
     * A “modal” dialog (that is, one which freezes the rest of the application
     * from user input), can be created by calling `gtk_window_set_modal()` on the
     * dialog. Use the GTK_WINDOW() macro to cast the widget returned from
     * `gtk_dialog_new()` into a {@link Gtk.Window}. When using `gtk_dialog_new_with_buttons()`
     * you can also pass the #GTK_DIALOG_MODAL flag to make a dialog modal.
     * 
     * If you add buttons to {@link Gtk.Dialog} using `gtk_dialog_new_with_buttons()`,
     * `gtk_dialog_add_button()`, `gtk_dialog_add_buttons()`, or
     * `gtk_dialog_add_action_widget()`, clicking the button will emit a signal
     * called {@link Gtk.Dialog.SignalSignatures.response | Gtk.Dialog::response} with a response ID that you specified. GTK+
     * will never assign a meaning to positive response IDs; these are entirely
     * user-defined. But for convenience, you can use the response IDs in the
     * {@link Gtk.ResponseType} enumeration (these all have values less than zero). If
     * a dialog receives a delete event, the {@link Gtk.Dialog.SignalSignatures.response | Gtk.Dialog::response} signal will
     * be emitted with a response ID of #GTK_RESPONSE_DELETE_EVENT.
     * 
     * If you want to block waiting for a dialog to return before returning
     * control flow to your code, you can call `gtk_dialog_run()`. This function
     * enters a recursive main loop and waits for the user to respond to the
     * dialog, returning the response ID corresponding to the button the user
     * clicked.
     * 
     * For the simple dialog in the following example, in reality you’d probably
     * use {@link Gtk.MessageDialog} to save yourself some effort. But you’d need to
     * create the dialog contents manually if you had more than a simple message
     * in the dialog.
     * 
     * An example for simple GtkDialog usage:
     * 
     * ```c
     * // Function to open a dialog box with a message
     * void
     * quick_message (GtkWindow *parent, gchar *message)
     * {
     *  GtkWidget *dialog, *label, *content_area;
     *  GtkDialogFlags flags;
     * 
     *  // Create the widgets
     *  flags = GTK_DIALOG_DESTROY_WITH_PARENT;
     *  dialog = gtk_dialog_new_with_buttons ("Message",
     *                                        parent,
     *                                        flags,
     *                                        _("_OK"),
     *                                        GTK_RESPONSE_NONE,
     *                                        NULL);
     *  content_area = gtk_dialog_get_content_area (GTK_DIALOG (dialog));
     *  label = gtk_label_new (message);
     * 
     *  // Ensure that the dialog box is destroyed when the user responds
     * 
     *  g_signal_connect_swapped (dialog,
     *                            "response",
     *                            G_CALLBACK (gtk_widget_destroy),
     *                            dialog);
     * 
     *  // Add the label, and show everything we’ve added
     * 
     *  gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (content_area), label);
     *  gtk_widget_show_all (dialog);
     * }
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * # GtkDialog as GtkBuildable
     * 
     * The GtkDialog implementation of the {@link Gtk.Buildable} interface exposes the
     * `vbox` and `action_area` as internal children with the names “vbox” and
     * “action_area”.
     * 
     * GtkDialog supports a custom `<action-widgets>` element, which can contain
     * multiple `<action-widget>` elements. The “response” attribute specifies a
     * numeric response, and the content of the element is the id of widget
     * (which should be a child of the dialogs `action_area`). To mark a response
     * as default, set the “default“ attribute of the `<action-widget>` element
     * to true.
     * 
     * GtkDialog supports adding action widgets by specifying “action“ as
     * the “type“ attribute of a `<child>` element. The widget will be added
     * either to the action area or the headerbar of the dialog, depending
     * on the “use-header-bar“ property. The response id has to be associated
     * with the action widget using the `<action-widgets>` element.
     * 
     * An example of a {@link Gtk.Dialog} UI definition fragment:
     * 
     * 
     * ```xml
     * <object class="GtkDialog" id="dialog1">
     *   <child type="action">
     *     <object class="GtkButton" id="button_cancel"/>
     *   </child>
     *   <child type="action">
     *     <object class="GtkButton" id="button_ok">
     *       <property name="can-default">True</property>
     *     </object>
     *   </child>
     *   <action-widgets>
     *     <action-widget response="cancel">button_cancel</action-widget>
     *     <action-widget response="ok" default="true">button_ok</action-widget>
     *   </action-widgets>
     * </object>
     * ```
     * 
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class Dialog extends Window implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<Dialog>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * `true` if the dialog uses a {@link Gtk.HeaderBar} for action buttons
         * instead of the action-area.
         * 
         * For technical reasons, this property is declared as an integer
         * property, but you should only set it to `true` or `false`.
         * @since 3.12
         * @construct-only
         * @default -1
         */
        get use_header_bar(): number;

        /**
         * `true` if the dialog uses a {@link Gtk.HeaderBar} for action buttons
         * instead of the action-area.
         * 
         * For technical reasons, this property is declared as an integer
         * property, but you should only set it to `true` or `false`.
         * @since 3.12
         * @construct-only
         * @default -1
         */
        get useHeaderBar(): number;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: Dialog.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        
    // @ts-expect-error This property conflicts with an accessor in a parent class or interface.
    window: Window;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<Dialog.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): Dialog;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof Dialog.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Dialog.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof Dialog.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Dialog.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof Dialog.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<Dialog.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * Signal emitted when the user uses a keybinding to close the dialog.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_close(): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.Dialog.SignalSignatures.response | Gtk.Dialog::response} signal with the given response ID.
         * Used to indicate that the user has responded to the dialog in some way;
         * typically either you or `gtk_dialog_run()` will be monitoring the
         * ::response signal and take appropriate action.
         * @param response_id response ID
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_response(response_id: number): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Adds an activatable widget to the action area of a {@link Gtk.Dialog},
         * connecting a signal handler that will emit the {@link Gtk.Dialog.SignalSignatures.response | Gtk.Dialog::response}
         * signal on the dialog when the widget is activated. The widget is
         * appended to the end of the dialog’s action area. If you want to add a
         * non-activatable widget, simply pack it into the `action_area` field
         * of the {@link Gtk.Dialog} struct.
         * @param child an activatable widget
         * @param response_id response ID for `child`
         */
        add_action_widget(child: Widget, response_id: number): void;

        /**
         * Adds a button with the given text and sets things up so that
         * clicking the button will emit the {@link Gtk.Dialog.SignalSignatures.response | Gtk.Dialog::response} signal with
         * the given `response_id`. The button is appended to the end of the
         * dialog’s action area. The button widget is returned, but usually
         * you don’t need it.
         * @param button_text text of button
         * @param response_id response ID for the button
         * @returns the {@link Gtk.Button} widget that was added
         */
        add_button(button_text: string, response_id: number): Widget;

        /**
         * Returns the action area of `dialog`.
         * @returns the action area
         */
        get_action_area(): Box;

        /**
         * Returns the content area of `dialog`.
         * @returns the content area {@link Gtk.Box}.
         */
        get_content_area(): Box;

        /**
         * Returns the header bar of `dialog`. Note that the
         * headerbar is only used by the dialog if the
         * {@link Gtk.Dialog.use_header_bar} property is `true`.
         * @returns the header bar
         */
        get_header_bar(): HeaderBar;

        /**
         * Gets the response id of a widget in the action area
         * of a dialog.
         * @param widget a widget in the action area of `dialog`
         * @returns the response id of `widget`, or {@link Gtk.ResponseType.NONE}  if `widget` doesn’t have a response id set.
         */
        get_response_for_widget(widget: Widget): number;

        /**
         * Gets the widget button that uses the given response ID in the action area
         * of a dialog.
         * @param response_id the response ID used by the `dialog` widget
         * @returns the `widget` button that uses the given     `response_id`, or `null`.
         */
        get_widget_for_response(response_id: number): Widget | null;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.Dialog.SignalSignatures.response | Gtk.Dialog::response} signal with the given response ID.
         * Used to indicate that the user has responded to the dialog in some way;
         * typically either you or `gtk_dialog_run()` will be monitoring the
         * ::response signal and take appropriate action.
         * @param response_id response ID
         */
        response(response_id: number): void;

        /**
         * Blocks in a recursive main loop until the `dialog` either emits the
         * {@link Gtk.Dialog.SignalSignatures.response | Gtk.Dialog::response} signal, or is destroyed. If the dialog is
         * destroyed during the call to `gtk_dialog_run()`, `gtk_dialog_run()` returns
         * #GTK_RESPONSE_NONE. Otherwise, it returns the response ID from the
         * ::response signal emission.
         * 
         * Before entering the recursive main loop, `gtk_dialog_run()` calls
         * `gtk_widget_show()` on the dialog for you. Note that you still
         * need to show any children of the dialog yourself.
         * 
         * During `gtk_dialog_run()`, the default behavior of {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.delete_event | Gtk.Widget::delete-event}
         * is disabled; if the dialog receives ::delete_event, it will not be
         * destroyed as windows usually are, and `gtk_dialog_run()` will return
         * #GTK_RESPONSE_DELETE_EVENT. Also, during `gtk_dialog_run()` the dialog
         * will be modal. You can force `gtk_dialog_run()` to return at any time by
         * calling `gtk_dialog_response()` to emit the ::response signal. Destroying
         * the dialog during `gtk_dialog_run()` is a very bad idea, because your
         * post-run code won’t know whether the dialog was destroyed or not.
         * 
         * After `gtk_dialog_run()` returns, you are responsible for hiding or
         * destroying the dialog if you wish to do so.
         * 
         * Typical usage of this function might be:
         * 
         * ```c
         *   GtkWidget *dialog = gtk_dialog_new ();
         *   // Set up dialog...
         * 
         *   int result = gtk_dialog_run (GTK_DIALOG (dialog));
         *   switch (result)
         *     {
         *       case GTK_RESPONSE_ACCEPT:
         *          // do_application_specific_something ();
         *          break;
         *       default:
         *          // do_nothing_since_dialog_was_cancelled ();
         *          break;
         *     }
         *   gtk_widget_destroy (dialog);
         * ```
         * 
         * 
         * Note that even though the recursive main loop gives the effect of a
         * modal dialog (it prevents the user from interacting with other
         * windows in the same window group while the dialog is run), callbacks
         * such as timeouts, IO channel watches, DND drops, etc, will
         * be triggered during a `gtk_dialog_run()` call.
         * @returns response ID
         */
        run(): number;

        /**
         * Sets an alternative button order. If the
         * {@link Gtk.Settings.gtk_alternative_button_order} setting is set to `true`,
         * the dialog buttons are reordered according to the order of the
         * response ids in `new_order`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_dialog_set_alternative_button_order()` for more information.
         * 
         * This function is for use by language bindings.
         * @param new_order an array of response ids of     `dialog`’s buttons
         */
        set_alternative_button_order_from_array(new_order: number[]): void;

        /**
         * Sets the last widget in the dialog’s action area with the given `response_id`
         * as the default widget for the dialog. Pressing “Enter” normally activates
         * the default widget.
         * @param response_id a response ID
         */
        set_default_response(response_id: number): void;

        /**
         * Calls `gtk_widget_set_sensitive (widget, `setting`)`
         * for each widget in the dialog’s action area with the given `response_id`.
         * A convenient way to sensitize/desensitize dialog buttons.
         * @param response_id a response ID
         * @param setting `true` for sensitive
         */
        set_response_sensitive(response_id: number, setting: boolean): void;
    }


    namespace DrawingArea {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Widget.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Widget.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * The {@link Gtk.DrawingArea} widget is used for creating custom user interface
     * elements. It’s essentially a blank widget; you can draw on it. After
     * creating a drawing area, the application may want to connect to:
     * 
     * - Mouse and button press signals to respond to input from
     *   the user. (Use `gtk_widget_add_events()` to enable events
     *   you wish to receive.)
     * 
     * - The {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.realize | Gtk.Widget::realize} signal to take any necessary actions
     *   when the widget is instantiated on a particular display.
     *   (Create GDK resources in response to this signal.)
     * 
     * - The {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.size_allocate | Gtk.Widget::size-allocate} signal to take any necessary
     *   actions when the widget changes size.
     * 
     * - The {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.draw | Gtk.Widget::draw} signal to handle redrawing the
     *   contents of the widget.
     * 
     * The following code portion demonstrates using a drawing
     * area to display a circle in the normal widget foreground
     * color.
     * 
     * Note that GDK automatically clears the exposed area before sending
     * the expose event, and that drawing is implicitly clipped to the exposed
     * area. If you want to have a theme-provided background, you need
     * to call `gtk_render_background()` in your ::draw method.
     * 
     * ## Simple GtkDrawingArea usage
     * 
     * 
     * ```c
     * gboolean
     * draw_callback (GtkWidget *widget, cairo_t *cr, gpointer data)
     * {
     *   guint width, height;
     *   GdkRGBA color;
     *   GtkStyleContext *context;
     * 
     *   context = gtk_widget_get_style_context (widget);
     * 
     *   width = gtk_widget_get_allocated_width (widget);
     *   height = gtk_widget_get_allocated_height (widget);
     * 
     *   gtk_render_background (context, cr, 0, 0, width, height);
     * 
     *   cairo_arc (cr,
     *              width / 2.0, height / 2.0,
     *              MIN (width, height) / 2.0,
     *              0, 2 * G_PI);
     * 
     *   gtk_style_context_get_color (context,
     *                                gtk_style_context_get_state (context),
     *                                &color);
     *   gdk_cairo_set_source_rgba (cr, &color);
     * 
     *   cairo_fill (cr);
     * 
     *  return FALSE;
     * }
     * [...]
     *   GtkWidget *drawing_area = gtk_drawing_area_new ();
     *   gtk_widget_set_size_request (drawing_area, 100, 100);
     *   g_signal_connect (G_OBJECT (drawing_area), "draw",
     *                     G_CALLBACK (draw_callback), NULL);
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * Draw signals are normally delivered when a drawing area first comes
     * onscreen, or when it’s covered by another window and then uncovered.
     * You can also force an expose event by adding to the “damage region”
     * of the drawing area’s window; `gtk_widget_queue_draw_area()` and
     * `gdk_window_invalidate_rect()` are equally good ways to do this.
     * You’ll then get a draw signal for the invalid region.
     * 
     * The available routines for drawing are documented on the
     * [GDK Drawing Primitives][gdk3-Cairo-Interaction] page
     * and the cairo documentation.
     * 
     * To receive mouse events on a drawing area, you will need to enable
     * them with `gtk_widget_add_events()`. To receive keyboard events, you
     * will need to set the “can-focus” property on the drawing area, and you
     * should probably draw some user-visible indication that the drawing
     * area is focused. Use `gtk_widget_has_focus()` in your expose event
     * handler to decide whether to draw the focus indicator. See
     * `gtk_render_focus()` for one way to draw focus.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class DrawingArea extends Widget implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<DrawingArea>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: DrawingArea.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        widget: Widget;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<DrawingArea.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): DrawingArea;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof DrawingArea.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, DrawingArea.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof DrawingArea.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, DrawingArea.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof DrawingArea.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<DrawingArea.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        /**
         * Adds a child to `buildable`. `type` is an optional string
         * describing how the child should be added.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child to add
         * @param type kind of child or `null`
         */
        add_child(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object, type: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Constructs a child of `buildable` with the name `name`.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} calls this function if a “constructor” has been
         * specified in the UI definition.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param name name of child to construct
         * @returns the constructed child
         */
        construct_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, name: string): T;

        /**
         * This is similar to `gtk_buildable_parser_finished()` but is
         * called once for each custom tag handled by the `buildable`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname the name of the tag
         * @param data user data created in custom_tag_start
         */
        custom_finished(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
         * the buildable.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @param data user data that will be passed in to parser functions
         */
        custom_tag_end(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called for each unknown element under `<child>`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @returns `true` if a object has a custom implementation, `false`          if it doesn't.
         */
        custom_tag_start(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string): [boolean, GLib.MarkupParser, null];

        /**
         * Get the internal child called `childname` of the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param childname name of child
         * @returns the internal child of the buildable object
         */
        get_internal_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, childname: string): T;

        /**
         * Gets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} sets the name based on the
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI]
         * used to construct the `buildable`.
         * @returns the name set with `gtk_buildable_set_name()`
         */
        get_name(): string;

        /**
         * Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI].
         * Note that this will be called once for each time
         * `gtk_builder_add_from_file()` or `gtk_builder_add_from_string()`
         * is called on a builder.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         */
        parser_finished(builder: Builder): void;

        /**
         * Sets the property name `name` to `value` on the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param name name of property
         * @param value value of property
         */
        set_buildable_property(builder: Builder, name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;

        /**
         * Sets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * @param name name to set
         */
        set_name(name: string): void;

        /**
         * Adds a child to `buildable`. `type` is an optional string
         * describing how the child should be added.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child to add
         * @param type kind of child or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add_child(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object, type: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Constructs a child of `buildable` with the name `name`.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} calls this function if a “constructor” has been
         * specified in the UI definition.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param name name of child to construct
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_construct_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, name: string): T;

        /**
         * This is similar to `gtk_buildable_parser_finished()` but is
         * called once for each custom tag handled by the `buildable`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname the name of the tag
         * @param data user data created in custom_tag_start
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_finished(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
         * the buildable.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @param data user data that will be passed in to parser functions
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_tag_end(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called for each unknown element under `<child>`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_tag_start(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string): [boolean, GLib.MarkupParser, never];

        /**
         * Get the internal child called `childname` of the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param childname name of child
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_internal_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, childname: string): T;

        /**
         * Gets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} sets the name based on the
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI]
         * used to construct the `buildable`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_name(): string;

        /**
         * Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI].
         * Note that this will be called once for each time
         * `gtk_builder_add_from_file()` or `gtk_builder_add_from_string()`
         * is called on a builder.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_parser_finished(builder: Builder): void;

        /**
         * Sets the property name `name` to `value` on the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param name name of property
         * @param value value of property
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_buildable_property(builder: Builder, name: string, value: unknown): void;

        /**
         * Sets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * @param name name to set
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_name(name: string): void;
    }


    namespace Entry {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Widget.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * The ::activate signal is emitted when the user hits
             * the Enter key.
             * 
             * While this signal is used as a
             * [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal],
             * it is also commonly used by applications to intercept
             * activation of entries.
             * 
             * The default bindings for this signal are all forms of the Enter key.
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            activate: () => void;
            /**
             * The ::backspace signal is a
             * [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted when the user asks for it.
             * 
             * The default bindings for this signal are
             * Backspace and Shift-Backspace.
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            backspace: () => void;
            /**
             * The ::copy-clipboard signal is a
             * [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted to copy the selection to the clipboard.
             * 
             * The default bindings for this signal are
             * Ctrl-c and Ctrl-Insert.
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "copy-clipboard": () => void;
            /**
             * The ::cut-clipboard signal is a
             * [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted to cut the selection to the clipboard.
             * 
             * The default bindings for this signal are
             * Ctrl-x and Shift-Delete.
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "cut-clipboard": () => void;
            /**
             * The ::delete-from-cursor signal is a
             * [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted when the user initiates a text deletion.
             * 
             * If the `type` is {@link Gtk.DeleteType.CHARS}, GTK+ deletes the selection
             * if there is one, otherwise it deletes the requested number
             * of characters.
             * 
             * The default bindings for this signal are
             * Delete for deleting a character and Ctrl-Delete for
             * deleting a word.
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "delete-from-cursor": (arg0: DeleteType, arg1: number) => void;
            /**
             * The ::icon-press signal is emitted when an activatable icon
             * is clicked.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.16
             * @run-last
             */
            "icon-press": (arg0: EntryIconPosition, arg1: Gdk.Event) => void;
            /**
             * The ::icon-release signal is emitted on the button release from a
             * mouse click over an activatable icon.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.16
             * @run-last
             */
            "icon-release": (arg0: EntryIconPosition, arg1: Gdk.Event) => void;
            /**
             * The ::insert-at-cursor signal is a
             * [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted when the user initiates the insertion of a
             * fixed string at the cursor.
             * 
             * This signal has no default bindings.
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "insert-at-cursor": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * The ::insert-emoji signal is a
             * [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted to present the Emoji chooser for the `entry`.
             * 
             * The default bindings for this signal are Ctrl-. and Ctrl-;
             * @signal
             * @since 3.22.27
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "insert-emoji": () => void;
            /**
             * The ::move-cursor signal is a
             * [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted when the user initiates a cursor movement.
             * If the cursor is not visible in `entry`, this signal causes
             * the viewport to be moved instead.
             * 
             * Applications should not connect to it, but may emit it with
             * `g_signal_emit_by_name()` if they need to control the cursor
             * programmatically.
             * 
             * The default bindings for this signal come in two variants,
             * the variant with the Shift modifier extends the selection,
             * the variant without the Shift modifer does not.
             * There are too many key combinations to list them all here.
             * - Arrow keys move by individual characters/lines
             * - Ctrl-arrow key combinations move by words/paragraphs
             * - Home/End keys move to the ends of the buffer
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "move-cursor": (arg0: MovementStep, arg1: number, arg2: boolean) => void;
            /**
             * The ::paste-clipboard signal is a
             * [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted to paste the contents of the clipboard
             * into the text view.
             * 
             * The default bindings for this signal are
             * Ctrl-v and Shift-Insert.
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "paste-clipboard": () => void;
            /**
             * The ::populate-popup signal gets emitted before showing the
             * context menu of the entry.
             * 
             * If you need to add items to the context menu, connect
             * to this signal and append your items to the `widget`, which
             * will be a {@link Gtk.Menu} in this case.
             * 
             * If {@link Gtk.Entry.populate_all} is `true`, this signal will
             * also be emitted to populate touch popups. In this case,
             * `widget` will be a different container, e.g. a {@link Gtk.Toolbar}.
             * The signal handler should not make assumptions about the
             * type of `widget`.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "populate-popup": (arg0: Widget) => void;
            /**
             * If an input method is used, the typed text will not immediately
             * be committed to the buffer. So if you are interested in the text,
             * connect to this signal.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.20
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "preedit-changed": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "toggle-direction": () => void;
            /**
             * The ::toggle-overwrite signal is a
             * [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted to toggle the overwrite mode of the entry.
             * 
             * The default bindings for this signal is Insert.
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "toggle-overwrite": () => void;
            "notify::activates-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::attributes": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::buffer": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::caps-lock-warning": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::completion": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::cursor-position": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::editable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::enable-emoji-completion": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-frame": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::im-module": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::inner-border": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::input-hints": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::input-purpose": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::invisible-char": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::invisible-char-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::max-length": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::max-width-chars": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::overwrite-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::placeholder-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::populate-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::primary-icon-activatable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::primary-icon-gicon": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::primary-icon-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::primary-icon-pixbuf": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::primary-icon-sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::primary-icon-stock": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::primary-icon-storage-type": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::primary-icon-tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::primary-icon-tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::progress-fraction": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::progress-pulse-step": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scroll-offset": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::secondary-icon-activatable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::secondary-icon-gicon": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::secondary-icon-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::secondary-icon-pixbuf": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::secondary-icon-sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::secondary-icon-stock": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::secondary-icon-storage-type": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::secondary-icon-tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::secondary-icon-tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::selection-bound": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::shadow-type": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::show-emoji-icon": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tabs": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::text-length": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::truncate-multiline": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visibility": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-chars": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::xalign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::editing-canceled": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Widget.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, CellEditable.ConstructorProps, Editable.ConstructorProps {
            activates_default: boolean;
            activatesDefault: boolean;
            attributes: Pango.AttrList | null;
            buffer: EntryBuffer;
            caps_lock_warning: boolean;
            capsLockWarning: boolean;
            completion: EntryCompletion;
            cursor_position: number;
            cursorPosition: number;
            editable: boolean;
            enable_emoji_completion: boolean;
            enableEmojiCompletion: boolean;
            has_frame: boolean;
            hasFrame: boolean;
            im_module: string;
            imModule: string;
            inner_border: Border | null;
            innerBorder: Border | null;
            input_hints: InputHints;
            inputHints: InputHints;
            input_purpose: InputPurpose;
            inputPurpose: InputPurpose;
            invisible_char: number;
            invisibleChar: number;
            invisible_char_set: boolean;
            invisibleCharSet: boolean;
            max_length: number;
            maxLength: number;
            max_width_chars: number;
            maxWidthChars: number;
            overwrite_mode: boolean;
            overwriteMode: boolean;
            placeholder_text: string;
            placeholderText: string;
            populate_all: boolean;
            populateAll: boolean;
            primary_icon_activatable: boolean;
            primaryIconActivatable: boolean;
            primary_icon_gicon: Gio.Icon;
            primaryIconGicon: Gio.Icon;
            primary_icon_name: string;
            primaryIconName: string;
            primary_icon_pixbuf: GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf;
            primaryIconPixbuf: GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf;
            primary_icon_sensitive: boolean;
            primaryIconSensitive: boolean;
            primary_icon_stock: string;
            primaryIconStock: string;
            primary_icon_storage_type: ImageType;
            primaryIconStorageType: ImageType;
            primary_icon_tooltip_markup: string;
            primaryIconTooltipMarkup: string;
            primary_icon_tooltip_text: string;
            primaryIconTooltipText: string;
            progress_fraction: number;
            progressFraction: number;
            progress_pulse_step: number;
            progressPulseStep: number;
            scroll_offset: number;
            scrollOffset: number;
            secondary_icon_activatable: boolean;
            secondaryIconActivatable: boolean;
            secondary_icon_gicon: Gio.Icon;
            secondaryIconGicon: Gio.Icon;
            secondary_icon_name: string;
            secondaryIconName: string;
            secondary_icon_pixbuf: GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf;
            secondaryIconPixbuf: GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf;
            secondary_icon_sensitive: boolean;
            secondaryIconSensitive: boolean;
            secondary_icon_stock: string;
            secondaryIconStock: string;
            secondary_icon_storage_type: ImageType;
            secondaryIconStorageType: ImageType;
            secondary_icon_tooltip_markup: string;
            secondaryIconTooltipMarkup: string;
            secondary_icon_tooltip_text: string;
            secondaryIconTooltipText: string;
            selection_bound: number;
            selectionBound: number;
            shadow_type: ShadowType;
            shadowType: ShadowType;
            show_emoji_icon: boolean;
            showEmojiIcon: boolean;
            tabs: Pango.TabArray | null;
            text: string;
            text_length: number;
            textLength: number;
            truncate_multiline: boolean;
            truncateMultiline: boolean;
            visibility: boolean;
            width_chars: number;
            widthChars: number;
            xalign: number;
        }
    }

    /**
     * The {@link Gtk.Entry} widget is a single line text entry
     * widget. A fairly large set of key bindings are supported
     * by default. If the entered text is longer than the allocation
     * of the widget, the widget will scroll so that the cursor
     * position is visible.
     * 
     * When using an entry for passwords and other sensitive information,
     * it can be put into “password mode” using `gtk_entry_set_visibility()`.
     * In this mode, entered text is displayed using a “invisible” character.
     * By default, GTK+ picks the best invisible character that is available
     * in the current font, but it can be changed with
     * `gtk_entry_set_invisible_char()`. Since 2.16, GTK+ displays a warning
     * when Caps Lock or input methods might interfere with entering text in
     * a password entry. The warning can be turned off with the
     * {@link Gtk.Entry.caps_lock_warning} property.
     * 
     * Since 2.16, GtkEntry has the ability to display progress or activity
     * information behind the text. To make an entry display such information,
     * use `gtk_entry_set_progress_fraction()` or `gtk_entry_set_progress_pulse_step()`.
     * 
     * Additionally, GtkEntry can show icons at either side of the entry. These
     * icons can be activatable by clicking, can be set up as drag source and
     * can have tooltips. To add an icon, use `gtk_entry_set_icon_from_gicon()` or
     * one of the various other functions that set an icon from a stock id, an
     * icon name or a pixbuf. To trigger an action when the user clicks an icon,
     * connect to the {@link Gtk.Entry.SignalSignatures.icon_press | Gtk.Entry::icon-press} signal. To allow DND operations
     * from an icon, use `gtk_entry_set_icon_drag_source()`. To set a tooltip on
     * an icon, use `gtk_entry_set_icon_tooltip_text()` or the corresponding function
     * for markup.
     * 
     * Note that functionality or information that is only available by clicking
     * on an icon in an entry may not be accessible at all to users which are not
     * able to use a mouse or other pointing device. It is therefore recommended
     * that any such functionality should also be available by other means, e.g.
     * via the context menu of the entry.
     * 
     * # CSS nodes
     * 
     * 
     * ```
     * entry[.read-only][.flat][.warning][.error]
     * ├── image.left
     * ├── image.right
     * ├── undershoot.left
     * ├── undershoot.right
     * ├── [selection]
     * ├── [progress[.pulse]]
     * ╰── [window.popup]
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * GtkEntry has a main node with the name entry. Depending on the properties
     * of the entry, the style classes .read-only and .flat may appear. The style
     * classes .warning and .error may also be used with entries.
     * 
     * When the entry shows icons, it adds subnodes with the name image and the
     * style class .left or .right, depending on where the icon appears.
     * 
     * When the entry has a selection, it adds a subnode with the name selection.
     * 
     * When the entry shows progress, it adds a subnode with the name progress.
     * The node has the style class .pulse when the shown progress is pulsing.
     * 
     * The CSS node for a context menu is added as a subnode below entry as well.
     * 
     * The undershoot nodes are used to draw the underflow indication when content
     * is scrolled out of view. These nodes get the .left and .right style classes
     * added depending on where the indication is drawn.
     * 
     * When touch is used and touch selection handles are shown, they are using
     * CSS nodes with name cursor-handle. They get the .top or .bottom style class
     * depending on where they are shown in relation to the selection. If there is
     * just a single handle for the text cursor, it gets the style class
     * .insertion-cursor.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class Entry extends Widget implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable, CellEditable, Editable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<Entry>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get activates_default(): boolean;
        set activates_default(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get activatesDefault(): boolean;
        set activatesDefault(val: boolean);

        /**
         * A list of Pango attributes to apply to the text of the entry.
         * 
         * This is mainly useful to change the size or weight of the text.
         * 
         * The {@link Pango.Attribute}'s `start_index` and `end_index` must refer to the
         * {@link Gtk.EntryBuffer} text, i.e. without the preedit string.
         * @since 3.6
         */
        get attributes(): Pango.AttrList | null;
        set attributes(val: Pango.AttrList | null);

        get buffer(): EntryBuffer;
        set buffer(val: EntryBuffer);

        /**
         * Whether password entries will show a warning when Caps Lock is on.
         * 
         * Note that the warning is shown using a secondary icon, and thus
         * does not work if you are using the secondary icon position for some
         * other purpose.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default true
         */
        get caps_lock_warning(): boolean;
        set caps_lock_warning(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether password entries will show a warning when Caps Lock is on.
         * 
         * Note that the warning is shown using a secondary icon, and thus
         * does not work if you are using the secondary icon position for some
         * other purpose.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default true
         */
        get capsLockWarning(): boolean;
        set capsLockWarning(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The auxiliary completion object to use with the entry.
         * @since 3.2
         */
        get completion(): EntryCompletion;
        set completion(val: EntryCompletion);

        /**
         * @read-only
         * @default 0
         */
        get cursor_position(): number;

        /**
         * @read-only
         * @default 0
         */
        get cursorPosition(): number;

        /**
         * @default true
         */
        get editable(): boolean;
        set editable(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get enable_emoji_completion(): boolean;
        set enable_emoji_completion(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get enableEmojiCompletion(): boolean;
        set enableEmojiCompletion(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default true
         */
        get has_frame(): boolean;
        set has_frame(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default true
         */
        get hasFrame(): boolean;
        set hasFrame(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Which IM (input method) module should be used for this entry.
         * See {@link Gtk.IMContext}.
         * 
         * Setting this to a non-`null` value overrides the
         * system-wide IM module setting. See the GtkSettings
         * {@link Gtk.Settings.gtk_im_module} property.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default null
         */
        get im_module(): string;
        set im_module(val: string);

        /**
         * Which IM (input method) module should be used for this entry.
         * See {@link Gtk.IMContext}.
         * 
         * Setting this to a non-`null` value overrides the
         * system-wide IM module setting. See the GtkSettings
         * {@link Gtk.Settings.gtk_im_module} property.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default null
         */
        get imModule(): string;
        set imModule(val: string);

        /**
         * Sets the text area's border between the text and the frame.
         * @since 2.10
         * @deprecated since 3.4: Use the standard border and padding CSS properties   (through objects like {@link Gtk.StyleContext} and {@link Gtk.CssProvider}); the value   of this style property is ignored.
         */
        get inner_border(): Border | null;
        set inner_border(val: Border | null);

        /**
         * Sets the text area's border between the text and the frame.
         * @since 2.10
         * @deprecated since 3.4: Use the standard border and padding CSS properties   (through objects like {@link Gtk.StyleContext} and {@link Gtk.CssProvider}); the value   of this style property is ignored.
         */
        get innerBorder(): Border | null;
        set innerBorder(val: Border | null);

        /**
         * Additional hints (beyond {@link Gtk.Entry.input_purpose}) that
         * allow input methods to fine-tune their behaviour.
         * @since 3.6
         * @default Gtk.InputHints.NONE
         */
        get input_hints(): InputHints;
        set input_hints(val: InputHints);

        /**
         * Additional hints (beyond {@link Gtk.Entry.input_purpose}) that
         * allow input methods to fine-tune their behaviour.
         * @since 3.6
         * @default Gtk.InputHints.NONE
         */
        get inputHints(): InputHints;
        set inputHints(val: InputHints);

        /**
         * The purpose of this text field.
         * 
         * This property can be used by on-screen keyboards and other input
         * methods to adjust their behaviour.
         * 
         * Note that setting the purpose to {@link Gtk.InputPurpose.PASSWORD} or
         * {@link Gtk.InputPurpose.PIN} is independent from setting
         * {@link Gtk.Entry.visibility}.
         * @since 3.6
         * @default Gtk.InputPurpose.FREE_FORM
         */
        get input_purpose(): InputPurpose;
        set input_purpose(val: InputPurpose);

        /**
         * The purpose of this text field.
         * 
         * This property can be used by on-screen keyboards and other input
         * methods to adjust their behaviour.
         * 
         * Note that setting the purpose to {@link Gtk.InputPurpose.PASSWORD} or
         * {@link Gtk.InputPurpose.PIN} is independent from setting
         * {@link Gtk.Entry.visibility}.
         * @since 3.6
         * @default Gtk.InputPurpose.FREE_FORM
         */
        get inputPurpose(): InputPurpose;
        set inputPurpose(val: InputPurpose);

        /**
         * The invisible character is used when masking entry contents (in
         * \"password mode\")"). When it is not explicitly set with the
         * {@link Gtk.Entry.invisible_char} property, GTK+ determines the character
         * to use from a list of possible candidates, depending on availability
         * in the current font.
         * 
         * This style property allows the theme to prepend a character
         * to the list of candidates.
         * @since 2.18
         * @default 42
         */
        get invisible_char(): number;
        set invisible_char(val: number);

        /**
         * The invisible character is used when masking entry contents (in
         * \"password mode\")"). When it is not explicitly set with the
         * {@link Gtk.Entry.invisible_char} property, GTK+ determines the character
         * to use from a list of possible candidates, depending on availability
         * in the current font.
         * 
         * This style property allows the theme to prepend a character
         * to the list of candidates.
         * @since 2.18
         * @default 42
         */
        get invisibleChar(): number;
        set invisibleChar(val: number);

        /**
         * Whether the invisible char has been set for the {@link Gtk.Entry}.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default false
         */
        get invisible_char_set(): boolean;
        set invisible_char_set(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether the invisible char has been set for the {@link Gtk.Entry}.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default false
         */
        get invisibleCharSet(): boolean;
        set invisibleCharSet(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default 0
         */
        get max_length(): number;
        set max_length(val: number);

        /**
         * @default 0
         */
        get maxLength(): number;
        set maxLength(val: number);

        /**
         * The desired maximum width of the entry, in characters.
         * If this property is set to -1, the width will be calculated
         * automatically.
         * @since 3.12
         * @default -1
         */
        get max_width_chars(): number;
        set max_width_chars(val: number);

        /**
         * The desired maximum width of the entry, in characters.
         * If this property is set to -1, the width will be calculated
         * automatically.
         * @since 3.12
         * @default -1
         */
        get maxWidthChars(): number;
        set maxWidthChars(val: number);

        /**
         * If text is overwritten when typing in the {@link Gtk.Entry}.
         * @since 2.14
         * @default false
         */
        get overwrite_mode(): boolean;
        set overwrite_mode(val: boolean);

        /**
         * If text is overwritten when typing in the {@link Gtk.Entry}.
         * @since 2.14
         * @default false
         */
        get overwriteMode(): boolean;
        set overwriteMode(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The text that will be displayed in the {@link Gtk.Entry} when it is empty
         * and unfocused.
         * @since 3.2
         * @default null
         */
        get placeholder_text(): string;
        set placeholder_text(val: string);

        /**
         * The text that will be displayed in the {@link Gtk.Entry} when it is empty
         * and unfocused.
         * @since 3.2
         * @default null
         */
        get placeholderText(): string;
        set placeholderText(val: string);

        /**
         * If :populate-all is `true`, the {@link Gtk.Entry.SignalSignatures.populate_popup | Gtk.Entry::populate-popup}
         * signal is also emitted for touch popups.
         * @since 3.8
         * @default false
         */
        get populate_all(): boolean;
        set populate_all(val: boolean);

        /**
         * If :populate-all is `true`, the {@link Gtk.Entry.SignalSignatures.populate_popup | Gtk.Entry::populate-popup}
         * signal is also emitted for touch popups.
         * @since 3.8
         * @default false
         */
        get populateAll(): boolean;
        set populateAll(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether the primary icon is activatable.
         * 
         * GTK+ emits the {@link Gtk.Entry.SignalSignatures.icon_press | Gtk.Entry::icon-press} and {@link Gtk.Entry.SignalSignatures.icon_release | Gtk.Entry::icon-release}
         * signals only on sensitive, activatable icons.
         * 
         * Sensitive, but non-activatable icons can be used for purely
         * informational purposes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default true
         */
        get primary_icon_activatable(): boolean;
        set primary_icon_activatable(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether the primary icon is activatable.
         * 
         * GTK+ emits the {@link Gtk.Entry.SignalSignatures.icon_press | Gtk.Entry::icon-press} and {@link Gtk.Entry.SignalSignatures.icon_release | Gtk.Entry::icon-release}
         * signals only on sensitive, activatable icons.
         * 
         * Sensitive, but non-activatable icons can be used for purely
         * informational purposes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default true
         */
        get primaryIconActivatable(): boolean;
        set primaryIconActivatable(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The {@link Gio.Icon} to use for the primary icon for the entry.
         * @since 2.16
         */
        get primary_icon_gicon(): Gio.Icon;
        set primary_icon_gicon(val: Gio.Icon);

        /**
         * The {@link Gio.Icon} to use for the primary icon for the entry.
         * @since 2.16
         */
        get primaryIconGicon(): Gio.Icon;
        set primaryIconGicon(val: Gio.Icon);

        /**
         * The icon name to use for the primary icon for the entry.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default null
         */
        get primary_icon_name(): string;
        set primary_icon_name(val: string);

        /**
         * The icon name to use for the primary icon for the entry.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default null
         */
        get primaryIconName(): string;
        set primaryIconName(val: string);

        /**
         * A pixbuf to use as the primary icon for the entry.
         * @since 2.16
         */
        get primary_icon_pixbuf(): GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf;
        set primary_icon_pixbuf(val: GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf);

        /**
         * A pixbuf to use as the primary icon for the entry.
         * @since 2.16
         */
        get primaryIconPixbuf(): GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf;
        set primaryIconPixbuf(val: GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf);

        /**
         * Whether the primary icon is sensitive.
         * 
         * An insensitive icon appears grayed out. GTK+ does not emit the
         * {@link Gtk.Entry.SignalSignatures.icon_press | Gtk.Entry::icon-press} and {@link Gtk.Entry.SignalSignatures.icon_release | Gtk.Entry::icon-release} signals and
         * does not allow DND from insensitive icons.
         * 
         * An icon should be set insensitive if the action that would trigger
         * when clicked is currently not available.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default true
         */
        get primary_icon_sensitive(): boolean;
        set primary_icon_sensitive(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether the primary icon is sensitive.
         * 
         * An insensitive icon appears grayed out. GTK+ does not emit the
         * {@link Gtk.Entry.SignalSignatures.icon_press | Gtk.Entry::icon-press} and {@link Gtk.Entry.SignalSignatures.icon_release | Gtk.Entry::icon-release} signals and
         * does not allow DND from insensitive icons.
         * 
         * An icon should be set insensitive if the action that would trigger
         * when clicked is currently not available.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default true
         */
        get primaryIconSensitive(): boolean;
        set primaryIconSensitive(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The stock id to use for the primary icon for the entry.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10: Use {@link Gtk.Entry.primary_icon_name} instead.
         * @default null
         */
        get primary_icon_stock(): string;
        set primary_icon_stock(val: string);

        /**
         * The stock id to use for the primary icon for the entry.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10: Use {@link Gtk.Entry.primary_icon_name} instead.
         * @default null
         */
        get primaryIconStock(): string;
        set primaryIconStock(val: string);

        /**
         * The representation which is used for the primary icon of the entry.
         * @since 2.16
         * @read-only
         * @default Gtk.ImageType.EMPTY
         */
        get primary_icon_storage_type(): ImageType;

        /**
         * The representation which is used for the primary icon of the entry.
         * @since 2.16
         * @read-only
         * @default Gtk.ImageType.EMPTY
         */
        get primaryIconStorageType(): ImageType;

        /**
         * The contents of the tooltip on the primary icon, which is marked up
         * with the [Pango text markup language][PangoMarkupFormat].
         * 
         * Also see `gtk_entry_set_icon_tooltip_markup()`.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default null
         */
        get primary_icon_tooltip_markup(): string;
        set primary_icon_tooltip_markup(val: string);

        /**
         * The contents of the tooltip on the primary icon, which is marked up
         * with the [Pango text markup language][PangoMarkupFormat].
         * 
         * Also see `gtk_entry_set_icon_tooltip_markup()`.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default null
         */
        get primaryIconTooltipMarkup(): string;
        set primaryIconTooltipMarkup(val: string);

        /**
         * The contents of the tooltip on the primary icon.
         * 
         * Also see `gtk_entry_set_icon_tooltip_text()`.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default null
         */
        get primary_icon_tooltip_text(): string;
        set primary_icon_tooltip_text(val: string);

        /**
         * The contents of the tooltip on the primary icon.
         * 
         * Also see `gtk_entry_set_icon_tooltip_text()`.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default null
         */
        get primaryIconTooltipText(): string;
        set primaryIconTooltipText(val: string);

        /**
         * The current fraction of the task that's been completed.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default 0
         */
        get progress_fraction(): number;
        set progress_fraction(val: number);

        /**
         * The current fraction of the task that's been completed.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default 0
         */
        get progressFraction(): number;
        set progressFraction(val: number);

        /**
         * The fraction of total entry width to move the progress
         * bouncing block for each call to `gtk_entry_progress_pulse()`.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default 0.1
         */
        get progress_pulse_step(): number;
        set progress_pulse_step(val: number);

        /**
         * The fraction of total entry width to move the progress
         * bouncing block for each call to `gtk_entry_progress_pulse()`.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default 0.1
         */
        get progressPulseStep(): number;
        set progressPulseStep(val: number);

        /**
         * @read-only
         * @default 0
         */
        get scroll_offset(): number;

        /**
         * @read-only
         * @default 0
         */
        get scrollOffset(): number;

        /**
         * Whether the secondary icon is activatable.
         * 
         * GTK+ emits the {@link Gtk.Entry.SignalSignatures.icon_press | Gtk.Entry::icon-press} and {@link Gtk.Entry.SignalSignatures.icon_release | Gtk.Entry::icon-release}
         * signals only on sensitive, activatable icons.
         * 
         * Sensitive, but non-activatable icons can be used for purely
         * informational purposes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default true
         */
        get secondary_icon_activatable(): boolean;
        set secondary_icon_activatable(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether the secondary icon is activatable.
         * 
         * GTK+ emits the {@link Gtk.Entry.SignalSignatures.icon_press | Gtk.Entry::icon-press} and {@link Gtk.Entry.SignalSignatures.icon_release | Gtk.Entry::icon-release}
         * signals only on sensitive, activatable icons.
         * 
         * Sensitive, but non-activatable icons can be used for purely
         * informational purposes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default true
         */
        get secondaryIconActivatable(): boolean;
        set secondaryIconActivatable(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The {@link Gio.Icon} to use for the secondary icon for the entry.
         * @since 2.16
         */
        get secondary_icon_gicon(): Gio.Icon;
        set secondary_icon_gicon(val: Gio.Icon);

        /**
         * The {@link Gio.Icon} to use for the secondary icon for the entry.
         * @since 2.16
         */
        get secondaryIconGicon(): Gio.Icon;
        set secondaryIconGicon(val: Gio.Icon);

        /**
         * The icon name to use for the secondary icon for the entry.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default null
         */
        get secondary_icon_name(): string;
        set secondary_icon_name(val: string);

        /**
         * The icon name to use for the secondary icon for the entry.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default null
         */
        get secondaryIconName(): string;
        set secondaryIconName(val: string);

        /**
         * An pixbuf to use as the secondary icon for the entry.
         * @since 2.16
         */
        get secondary_icon_pixbuf(): GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf;
        set secondary_icon_pixbuf(val: GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf);

        /**
         * An pixbuf to use as the secondary icon for the entry.
         * @since 2.16
         */
        get secondaryIconPixbuf(): GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf;
        set secondaryIconPixbuf(val: GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf);

        /**
         * Whether the secondary icon is sensitive.
         * 
         * An insensitive icon appears grayed out. GTK+ does not emit the
         * {@link Gtk.Entry.SignalSignatures.icon_press | Gtk.Entry::icon-press} and {@link Gtk.Entry.SignalSignatures.icon_release | Gtk.Entry::icon-release} signals and
         * does not allow DND from insensitive icons.
         * 
         * An icon should be set insensitive if the action that would trigger
         * when clicked is currently not available.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default true
         */
        get secondary_icon_sensitive(): boolean;
        set secondary_icon_sensitive(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether the secondary icon is sensitive.
         * 
         * An insensitive icon appears grayed out. GTK+ does not emit the
         * {@link Gtk.Entry.SignalSignatures.icon_press | Gtk.Entry::icon-press} and {@link Gtk.Entry.SignalSignatures.icon_release | Gtk.Entry::icon-release} signals and
         * does not allow DND from insensitive icons.
         * 
         * An icon should be set insensitive if the action that would trigger
         * when clicked is currently not available.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default true
         */
        get secondaryIconSensitive(): boolean;
        set secondaryIconSensitive(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The stock id to use for the secondary icon for the entry.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10: Use {@link Gtk.Entry.secondary_icon_name} instead.
         * @default null
         */
        get secondary_icon_stock(): string;
        set secondary_icon_stock(val: string);

        /**
         * The stock id to use for the secondary icon for the entry.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10: Use {@link Gtk.Entry.secondary_icon_name} instead.
         * @default null
         */
        get secondaryIconStock(): string;
        set secondaryIconStock(val: string);

        /**
         * The representation which is used for the secondary icon of the entry.
         * @since 2.16
         * @read-only
         * @default Gtk.ImageType.EMPTY
         */
        get secondary_icon_storage_type(): ImageType;

        /**
         * The representation which is used for the secondary icon of the entry.
         * @since 2.16
         * @read-only
         * @default Gtk.ImageType.EMPTY
         */
        get secondaryIconStorageType(): ImageType;

        /**
         * The contents of the tooltip on the secondary icon, which is marked up
         * with the [Pango text markup language][PangoMarkupFormat].
         * 
         * Also see `gtk_entry_set_icon_tooltip_markup()`.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default null
         */
        get secondary_icon_tooltip_markup(): string;
        set secondary_icon_tooltip_markup(val: string);

        /**
         * The contents of the tooltip on the secondary icon, which is marked up
         * with the [Pango text markup language][PangoMarkupFormat].
         * 
         * Also see `gtk_entry_set_icon_tooltip_markup()`.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default null
         */
        get secondaryIconTooltipMarkup(): string;
        set secondaryIconTooltipMarkup(val: string);

        /**
         * The contents of the tooltip on the secondary icon.
         * 
         * Also see `gtk_entry_set_icon_tooltip_text()`.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default null
         */
        get secondary_icon_tooltip_text(): string;
        set secondary_icon_tooltip_text(val: string);

        /**
         * The contents of the tooltip on the secondary icon.
         * 
         * Also see `gtk_entry_set_icon_tooltip_text()`.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default null
         */
        get secondaryIconTooltipText(): string;
        set secondaryIconTooltipText(val: string);

        /**
         * @read-only
         * @default 0
         */
        get selection_bound(): number;

        /**
         * @read-only
         * @default 0
         */
        get selectionBound(): number;

        /**
         * Which kind of shadow to draw around the entry when
         * {@link Gtk.Entry.has_frame} is set to `true`.
         * @since 2.12
         * @deprecated since 3.20: Use CSS to determine the style of the border;     the value of this style property is ignored.
         * @default Gtk.ShadowType.IN
         */
        get shadow_type(): ShadowType;
        set shadow_type(val: ShadowType);

        /**
         * Which kind of shadow to draw around the entry when
         * {@link Gtk.Entry.has_frame} is set to `true`.
         * @since 2.12
         * @deprecated since 3.20: Use CSS to determine the style of the border;     the value of this style property is ignored.
         * @default Gtk.ShadowType.IN
         */
        get shadowType(): ShadowType;
        set shadowType(val: ShadowType);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get show_emoji_icon(): boolean;
        set show_emoji_icon(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get showEmojiIcon(): boolean;
        set showEmojiIcon(val: boolean);

        get tabs(): Pango.TabArray | null;
        set tabs(val: Pango.TabArray | null);

        get text(): string;
        set text(val: string);

        /**
         * The length of the text in the {@link Gtk.Entry}.
         * @since 2.14
         * @read-only
         * @default 0
         */
        get text_length(): number;

        /**
         * The length of the text in the {@link Gtk.Entry}.
         * @since 2.14
         * @read-only
         * @default 0
         */
        get textLength(): number;

        /**
         * When `true`, pasted multi-line text is truncated to the first line.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default false
         */
        get truncate_multiline(): boolean;
        set truncate_multiline(val: boolean);

        /**
         * When `true`, pasted multi-line text is truncated to the first line.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default false
         */
        get truncateMultiline(): boolean;
        set truncateMultiline(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default true
         */
        get visibility(): boolean;
        set visibility(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default -1
         */
        get width_chars(): number;
        set width_chars(val: number);

        /**
         * @default -1
         */
        get widthChars(): number;
        set widthChars(val: number);

        /**
         * The horizontal alignment, from 0 (left) to 1 (right).
         * Reversed for RTL layouts.
         * @since 2.4
         * @default 0
         */
        get xalign(): number;
        set xalign(val: number);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: Entry.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<Entry.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): Entry;

        static new_with_buffer(buffer: EntryBuffer): Entry;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof Entry.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Entry.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof Entry.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Entry.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof Entry.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<Entry.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * Class handler for the {@link Gtk.Entry.SignalSignatures.activate | Gtk.Entry::activate} signal. The default
         *   implementation calls `gtk_window_activate_default()` on the entry’s top-level
         *   window.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_activate(): void;

        /**
         * Class handler for the {@link Gtk.Entry.SignalSignatures.backspace | Gtk.Entry::backspace} signal. The default
         *   implementation deletes the selection or a single character or word.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_backspace(): void;

        /**
         * Class handler for the {@link Gtk.Entry.SignalSignatures.copy_clipboard | Gtk.Entry::copy-clipboard} signal. The
         *   default implementation copies the selection, if one exists.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_copy_clipboard(): void;

        /**
         * Class handler for the {@link Gtk.Entry.SignalSignatures.cut_clipboard | Gtk.Entry::cut-clipboard} signal. The
         *   default implementation cuts the selection, if one exists.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_cut_clipboard(): void;

        /**
         * Class handler for the {@link Gtk.Entry.SignalSignatures.delete_from_cursor | Gtk.Entry::delete-from-cursor}
         *   signal. The default implementation deletes the selection or the specified
         *   number of characters or words.
         * @param type 
         * @param count 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_delete_from_cursor(type: DeleteType, count: number): void;

        /**
         * Calculate the size of the text area frame, which is its
         *   allocated width and requested height, minus space for margins and borders,
         *   and taking baseline and text height into account. This virtual function
         *   must be non-`null`.
         * @param x 
         * @param y 
         * @param width 
         * @param height 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_frame_size(x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number): void;

        /**
         * Calculate the size of the text area, which is its
         *   allocated width and requested height, minus space for margins and borders.
         *   This virtual function must be non-`null`.
         * @param x 
         * @param y 
         * @param width 
         * @param height 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_text_area_size(x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number): void;

        /**
         * Class handler for the {@link Gtk.Entry.SignalSignatures.insert_at_cursor | Gtk.Entry::insert-at-cursor} signal.
         *   The default implementation inserts text at the cursor.
         * @param str 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_insert_at_cursor(str: string): void;

        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_insert_emoji(): void;

        /**
         * Class handler for the {@link Gtk.Entry.SignalSignatures.move_cursor | Gtk.Entry::move-cursor} signal. The
         *   default implementation specifies the standard {@link Gtk.Entry} cursor movement
         *   behavior.
         * @param step 
         * @param count 
         * @param extend_selection 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_move_cursor(step: MovementStep, count: number, extend_selection: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Class handler for the {@link Gtk.Entry.SignalSignatures.paste_clipboard | Gtk.Entry::paste-clipboard} signal.
         *   The default implementation pastes at the current cursor position or over
         *   the current selection if one exists.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_paste_clipboard(): void;

        /**
         * Class handler for the {@link Gtk.Entry.SignalSignatures.populate_popup | Gtk.Entry::populate-popup} signal. If
         *   non-`null`, this will be called to add additional entries to the context
         *   menu when it is displayed.
         * @param popup 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_populate_popup(popup: Widget): void;

        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_toggle_direction(): void;

        /**
         * Class handler for the {@link Gtk.Entry.SignalSignatures.toggle_overwrite | Gtk.Entry::toggle-overwrite} signal.
         *   The default implementation toggles overwrite mode and blinks the cursor.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_toggle_overwrite(): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Retrieves the value set by `gtk_entry_set_activates_default()`.
         * @returns `true` if the entry will activate the default widget
         */
        get_activates_default(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the value set by `gtk_entry_set_alignment()`.
         * @returns the alignment
         */
        get_alignment(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the attribute list that was set on the entry using
         * `gtk_entry_set_attributes()`, if any.
         * @returns the attribute list, or `null`     if none was set.
         */
        get_attributes(): Pango.AttrList | null;

        /**
         * Get the {@link Gtk.EntryBuffer} object which holds the text for
         * this widget.
         * @returns A {@link Gtk.EntryBuffer} object.
         */
        get_buffer(): EntryBuffer;

        /**
         * Returns the auxiliary completion object currently in use by `entry`.
         * @returns The auxiliary completion object currently     in use by `entry`.
         */
        get_completion(): EntryCompletion;

        /**
         * Returns the index of the icon which is the source of the current
         * DND operation, or -1.
         * 
         * This function is meant to be used in a {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.drag_data_get | Gtk.Widget::drag-data-get}
         * callback.
         * @returns index of the icon which is the source of the current          DND operation, or -1.
         */
        get_current_icon_drag_source(): number;

        /**
         * Retrieves the horizontal cursor adjustment for the entry.
         * See `gtk_entry_set_cursor_hadjustment()`.
         * @returns the horizontal cursor adjustment, or `null`   if none has been set.
         */
        get_cursor_hadjustment(): Adjustment | null;

        /**
         * Gets the value set by `gtk_entry_set_has_frame()`.
         * @returns whether the entry has a beveled frame
         */
        get_has_frame(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns whether the icon is activatable.
         * @param icon_pos Icon position
         * @returns `true` if the icon is activatable.
         */
        get_icon_activatable(icon_pos: EntryIconPosition): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the area where entry’s icon at `icon_pos` is drawn.
         * This function is useful when drawing something to the
         * entry in a draw callback.
         * 
         * If the entry is not realized or has no icon at the given position,
         * `icon_area` is filled with zeros. Otherwise, `icon_area` will be filled
         * with the icon’s allocation, relative to `entry`’s allocation.
         * 
         * See also `gtk_entry_get_text_area()`
         * @param icon_pos Icon position
         */
        get_icon_area(icon_pos: EntryIconPosition): Gdk.Rectangle;

        /**
         * Finds the icon at the given position and return its index. The
         * position’s coordinates are relative to the `entry`’s top left corner.
         * If `x`, `y` doesn’t lie inside an icon, -1 is returned.
         * This function is intended for use in a {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.query_tooltip | Gtk.Widget::query-tooltip}
         * signal handler.
         * @param x the x coordinate of the position to find
         * @param y the y coordinate of the position to find
         * @returns the index of the icon at the given position, or -1
         */
        get_icon_at_pos(x: number, y: number): number;

        /**
         * Retrieves the {@link Gio.Icon} used for the icon, or `null` if there is
         * no icon or if the icon was set by some other method (e.g., by
         * stock, pixbuf, or icon name).
         * @param icon_pos Icon position
         * @returns A {@link Gio.Icon}, or `null` if no icon is set     or if the icon is not a {@link Gio.Icon}
         */
        get_icon_gicon(icon_pos: EntryIconPosition): Gio.Icon | null;

        /**
         * Retrieves the icon name used for the icon, or `null` if there is
         * no icon or if the icon was set by some other method (e.g., by
         * pixbuf, stock or gicon).
         * @param icon_pos Icon position
         * @returns An icon name, or `null` if no icon is set or if the icon          wasn’t set from an icon name
         */
        get_icon_name(icon_pos: EntryIconPosition): string | null;

        /**
         * Retrieves the image used for the icon.
         * 
         * Unlike the other methods of setting and getting icon data, this
         * method will work regardless of whether the icon was set using a
         * {@link GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf}, a {@link Gio.Icon}, a stock item, or an icon name.
         * @param icon_pos Icon position
         * @returns A {@link GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf}, or `null` if no icon is     set for this position.
         */
        get_icon_pixbuf(icon_pos: EntryIconPosition): GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf | null;

        /**
         * Returns whether the icon appears sensitive or insensitive.
         * @param icon_pos Icon position
         * @returns `true` if the icon is sensitive.
         */
        get_icon_sensitive(icon_pos: EntryIconPosition): boolean;

        /**
         * Retrieves the stock id used for the icon, or `null` if there is
         * no icon or if the icon was set by some other method (e.g., by
         * pixbuf, icon name or gicon).
         * @param icon_pos Icon position
         * @returns A stock id, or `null` if no icon is set or if the icon          wasn’t set from a stock id
         */
        get_icon_stock(icon_pos: EntryIconPosition): string;

        /**
         * Gets the type of representation being used by the icon
         * to store image data. If the icon has no image data,
         * the return value will be {@link Gtk.ImageType.EMPTY}.
         * @param icon_pos Icon position
         * @returns image representation being used
         */
        get_icon_storage_type(icon_pos: EntryIconPosition): ImageType;

        /**
         * Gets the contents of the tooltip on the icon at the specified
         * position in `entry`.
         * @param icon_pos the icon position
         * @returns the tooltip text, or `null`. Free the returned     string with `g_free()` when done.
         */
        get_icon_tooltip_markup(icon_pos: EntryIconPosition): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the contents of the tooltip on the icon at the specified
         * position in `entry`.
         * @param icon_pos the icon position
         * @returns the tooltip text, or `null`. Free the returned     string with `g_free()` when done.
         */
        get_icon_tooltip_text(icon_pos: EntryIconPosition): string | null;

        /**
         * This function returns the entry’s {@link Gtk.Entry.inner_border} property. See
         * `gtk_entry_set_inner_border()` for more information.
         * @returns the entry’s {@link Gtk.Border}, or   `null` if none was set.
         */
        get_inner_border(): Border | null;

        /**
         * Gets the value of the {@link Gtk.Entry.input_hints} property.
         */
        get_input_hints(): InputHints;

        /**
         * Gets the value of the {@link Gtk.Entry.input_purpose} property.
         */
        get_input_purpose(): InputPurpose;

        /**
         * Retrieves the character displayed in place of the real characters
         * for entries with visibility set to false. See `gtk_entry_set_invisible_char()`.
         * @returns the current invisible char, or 0, if the entry does not               show invisible text at all.
         */
        get_invisible_char(): string;

        /**
         * Gets the {@link Pango.Layout} used to display the entry.
         * The layout is useful to e.g. convert text positions to
         * pixel positions, in combination with `gtk_entry_get_layout_offsets()`.
         * The returned layout is owned by the entry and must not be
         * modified or freed by the caller.
         * 
         * Keep in mind that the layout text may contain a preedit string, so
         * `gtk_entry_layout_index_to_text_index()` and
         * `gtk_entry_text_index_to_layout_index()` are needed to convert byte
         * indices in the layout to byte indices in the entry contents.
         * @returns the {@link Pango.Layout} for this entry
         */
        get_layout(): Pango.Layout;

        /**
         * Obtains the position of the {@link Pango.Layout} used to render text
         * in the entry, in widget coordinates. Useful if you want to line
         * up the text in an entry with some other text, e.g. when using the
         * entry to implement editable cells in a sheet widget.
         * 
         * Also useful to convert mouse events into coordinates inside the
         * {@link Pango.Layout}, e.g. to take some action if some part of the entry text
         * is clicked.
         * 
         * Note that as the user scrolls around in the entry the offsets will
         * change; you’ll need to connect to the “notify::scroll-offset”
         * signal to track this. Remember when using the {@link Pango.Layout}
         * functions you need to convert to and from pixels using
         * PANGO_PIXELS() or #PANGO_SCALE.
         * 
         * Keep in mind that the layout text may contain a preedit string, so
         * `gtk_entry_layout_index_to_text_index()` and
         * `gtk_entry_text_index_to_layout_index()` are needed to convert byte
         * indices in the layout to byte indices in the entry contents.
         */
        get_layout_offsets(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Retrieves the maximum allowed length of the text in
         * `entry`. See `gtk_entry_set_max_length()`.
         * 
         * This is equivalent to getting `entry`'s {@link Gtk.EntryBuffer} and
         * calling `gtk_entry_buffer_get_max_length()` on it.
         * @returns the maximum allowed number of characters               in {@link Gtk.Entry}, or 0 if there is no maximum.
         */
        get_max_length(): number;

        /**
         * Retrieves the desired maximum width of `entry`, in characters.
         * See `gtk_entry_set_max_width_chars()`.
         * @returns the maximum width of the entry, in characters
         */
        get_max_width_chars(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the value set by `gtk_entry_set_overwrite_mode()`.
         * @returns whether the text is overwritten when typing.
         */
        get_overwrite_mode(): boolean;

        /**
         * Retrieves the text that will be displayed when `entry` is empty and unfocused
         * @returns a pointer to the placeholder text as a string. This string points to internally allocated storage in the widget and must not be freed, modified or stored.
         */
        get_placeholder_text(): string;

        /**
         * Returns the current fraction of the task that’s been completed.
         * See `gtk_entry_set_progress_fraction()`.
         * @returns a fraction from 0.0 to 1.0
         */
        get_progress_fraction(): number;

        /**
         * Retrieves the pulse step set with `gtk_entry_set_progress_pulse_step()`.
         * @returns a fraction from 0.0 to 1.0
         */
        get_progress_pulse_step(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the tabstops that were set on the entry using `gtk_entry_set_tabs()`, if
         * any.
         * @returns the tabstops, or `null` if none was set.
         */
        get_tabs(): Pango.TabArray | null;

        /**
         * Retrieves the contents of the entry widget.
         * See also `gtk_editable_get_chars()`.
         * 
         * This is equivalent to getting `entry`'s {@link Gtk.EntryBuffer} and calling
         * `gtk_entry_buffer_get_text()` on it.
         * @returns a pointer to the contents of the widget as a      string. This string points to internally allocated      storage in the widget and must not be freed, modified or      stored.
         */
        get_text(): string;

        /**
         * Gets the area where the entry’s text is drawn. This function is
         * useful when drawing something to the entry in a draw callback.
         * 
         * If the entry is not realized, `text_area` is filled with zeros.
         * 
         * See also `gtk_entry_get_icon_area()`.
         */
        get_text_area(): Gdk.Rectangle;

        /**
         * Retrieves the current length of the text in
         * `entry`.
         * 
         * This is equivalent to getting `entry`'s {@link Gtk.EntryBuffer} and
         * calling `gtk_entry_buffer_get_length()` on it.
         * @returns the current number of characters               in {@link Gtk.Entry}, or 0 if there are none.
         */
        get_text_length(): number;

        /**
         * Retrieves whether the text in `entry` is visible. See
         * `gtk_entry_set_visibility()`.
         * @returns `true` if the text is currently visible
         */
        get_visibility(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the value set by `gtk_entry_set_width_chars()`.
         * @returns number of chars to request space for, or negative if unset
         */
        get_width_chars(): number;

        /**
         * Causes `entry` to have keyboard focus.
         * 
         * It behaves like `gtk_widget_grab_focus()`,
         * except that it doesn't select the contents of the entry.
         * You only want to call this on some special entries
         * which the user usually doesn't want to replace all text in,
         * such as search-as-you-type entries.
         */
        grab_focus_without_selecting(): void;

        /**
         * Allow the {@link Gtk.Entry} input method to internally handle key press
         * and release events. If this function returns `true`, then no further
         * processing should be done for this key event. See
         * `gtk_im_context_filter_keypress()`.
         * 
         * Note that you are expected to call this function from your handler
         * when overriding key event handling. This is needed in the case when
         * you need to insert your own key handling between the input method
         * and the default key event handling of the {@link Gtk.Entry}.
         * See `gtk_text_view_reset_im_context()` for an example of use.
         * @param event the key event
         * @returns `true` if the input method handled the key event.
         */
        im_context_filter_keypress(event: Gdk.EventKey): boolean;

        /**
         * Converts from a position in the entry’s {@link Pango.Layout} (returned by
         * `gtk_entry_get_layout()`) to a position in the entry contents
         * (returned by `gtk_entry_get_text()`).
         * @param layout_index byte index into the entry layout text
         * @returns byte index into the entry contents
         */
        layout_index_to_text_index(layout_index: number): number;

        /**
         * Indicates that some progress is made, but you don’t know how much.
         * Causes the entry’s progress indicator to enter “activity mode,”
         * where a block bounces back and forth. Each call to
         * `gtk_entry_progress_pulse()` causes the block to move by a little bit
         * (the amount of movement per pulse is determined by
         * `gtk_entry_set_progress_pulse_step()`).
         */
        progress_pulse(): void;

        /**
         * Reset the input method context of the entry if needed.
         * 
         * This can be necessary in the case where modifying the buffer
         * would confuse on-going input method behavior.
         */
        reset_im_context(): void;

        /**
         * If `setting` is `true`, pressing Enter in the `entry` will activate the default
         * widget for the window containing the entry. This usually means that
         * the dialog box containing the entry will be closed, since the default
         * widget is usually one of the dialog buttons.
         * 
         * (For experts: if `setting` is `true`, the entry calls
         * `gtk_window_activate_default()` on the window containing the entry, in
         * the default handler for the {@link Gtk.Entry.SignalSignatures.activate | Gtk.Entry::activate} signal.)
         * @param setting `true` to activate window’s default widget on Enter keypress
         */
        set_activates_default(setting: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the alignment for the contents of the entry. This controls
         * the horizontal positioning of the contents when the displayed
         * text is shorter than the width of the entry.
         * @param xalign The horizontal alignment, from 0 (left) to 1 (right).          Reversed for RTL layouts
         */
        set_alignment(xalign: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets a {@link Pango.AttrList}; the attributes in the list are applied to the
         * entry text.
         * @param attrs a {@link Pango.AttrList}
         */
        set_attributes(attrs: Pango.AttrList): void;

        /**
         * Set the {@link Gtk.EntryBuffer} object which holds the text for
         * this widget.
         * @param buffer a {@link Gtk.EntryBuffer}
         */
        set_buffer(buffer: EntryBuffer): void;

        /**
         * Sets `completion` to be the auxiliary completion object to use with `entry`.
         * All further configuration of the completion mechanism is done on
         * `completion` using the {@link Gtk.EntryCompletion} API. Completion is disabled if
         * `completion` is set to `null`.
         * @param completion The {@link Gtk.EntryCompletion} or `null`
         */
        set_completion(completion: EntryCompletion | null): void;

        /**
         * Hooks up an adjustment to the cursor position in an entry, so that when
         * the cursor is moved, the adjustment is scrolled to show that position.
         * See `gtk_scrolled_window_get_hadjustment()` for a typical way of obtaining
         * the adjustment.
         * 
         * The adjustment has to be in pixel units and in the same coordinate system
         * as the entry.
         * @param adjustment an adjustment which should be adjusted when the cursor              is moved, or `null`
         */
        set_cursor_hadjustment(adjustment: Adjustment | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the entry has a beveled frame around it.
         * @param setting new value
         */
        set_has_frame(setting: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the icon is activatable.
         * @param icon_pos Icon position
         * @param activatable `true` if the icon should be activatable
         */
        set_icon_activatable(icon_pos: EntryIconPosition, activatable: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets up the icon at the given position so that GTK+ will start a drag
         * operation when the user clicks and drags the icon.
         * 
         * To handle the drag operation, you need to connect to the usual
         * {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.drag_data_get | Gtk.Widget::drag-data-get} (or possibly {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.drag_data_delete | Gtk.Widget::drag-data-delete})
         * signal, and use `gtk_entry_get_current_icon_drag_source()` in
         * your signal handler to find out if the drag was started from
         * an icon.
         * 
         * By default, GTK+ uses the icon as the drag icon. You can use the
         * {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.drag_begin | Gtk.Widget::drag-begin} signal to set a different icon. Note that you
         * have to use `g_signal_connect_after()` to ensure that your signal handler
         * gets executed after the default handler.
         * @param icon_pos icon position
         * @param target_list the targets (data formats) in which the data can be provided
         * @param actions a bitmask of the allowed drag actions
         */
        set_icon_drag_source(icon_pos: EntryIconPosition, target_list: TargetList, actions: Gdk.DragAction): void;

        /**
         * Sets the icon shown in the entry at the specified position
         * from the current icon theme.
         * If the icon isn’t known, a “broken image” icon will be displayed
         * instead.
         * 
         * If `icon` is `null`, no icon will be shown in the specified position.
         * @param icon_pos The position at which to set the icon
         * @param icon The icon to set, or `null`
         */
        set_icon_from_gicon(icon_pos: EntryIconPosition, icon: Gio.Icon | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the icon shown in the entry at the specified position
         * from the current icon theme.
         * 
         * If the icon name isn’t known, a “broken image” icon will be displayed
         * instead.
         * 
         * If `icon_name` is `null`, no icon will be shown in the specified position.
         * @param icon_pos The position at which to set the icon
         * @param icon_name An icon name, or `null`
         */
        set_icon_from_icon_name(icon_pos: EntryIconPosition, icon_name: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the icon shown in the specified position using a pixbuf.
         * 
         * If `pixbuf` is `null`, no icon will be shown in the specified position.
         * @param icon_pos Icon position
         * @param pixbuf A {@link GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf}, or `null`
         */
        set_icon_from_pixbuf(icon_pos: EntryIconPosition, pixbuf: GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the icon shown in the entry at the specified position from
         * a stock image.
         * 
         * If `stock_id` is `null`, no icon will be shown in the specified position.
         * @param icon_pos Icon position
         * @param stock_id The name of the stock item, or `null`
         */
        set_icon_from_stock(icon_pos: EntryIconPosition, stock_id: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the sensitivity for the specified icon.
         * @param icon_pos Icon position
         * @param sensitive Specifies whether the icon should appear             sensitive or insensitive
         */
        set_icon_sensitive(icon_pos: EntryIconPosition, sensitive: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets `tooltip` as the contents of the tooltip for the icon at
         * the specified position. `tooltip` is assumed to be marked up with
         * the [Pango text markup language][PangoMarkupFormat].
         * 
         * Use `null` for `tooltip` to remove an existing tooltip.
         * 
         * See also `gtk_widget_set_tooltip_markup()` and
         * `gtk_entry_set_icon_tooltip_text()`.
         * @param icon_pos the icon position
         * @param tooltip the contents of the tooltip for the icon, or `null`
         */
        set_icon_tooltip_markup(icon_pos: EntryIconPosition, tooltip: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets `tooltip` as the contents of the tooltip for the icon
         * at the specified position.
         * 
         * Use `null` for `tooltip` to remove an existing tooltip.
         * 
         * See also `gtk_widget_set_tooltip_text()` and
         * `gtk_entry_set_icon_tooltip_markup()`.
         * 
         * If you unset the widget tooltip via `gtk_widget_set_tooltip_text()` or
         * `gtk_widget_set_tooltip_markup()`, this sets GtkWidget:has-tooltip to `false`,
         * which suppresses icon tooltips too. You can resolve this by then calling
         * `gtk_widget_set_has_tooltip()` to set GtkWidget:has-tooltip back to `true`, or
         * setting at least one non-empty tooltip on any icon achieves the same result.
         * @param icon_pos the icon position
         * @param tooltip the contents of the tooltip for the icon, or `null`
         */
        set_icon_tooltip_text(icon_pos: EntryIconPosition, tooltip: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets %entry’s inner-border property to `border`, or clears it if `null`
         * is passed. The inner-border is the area around the entry’s text, but
         * inside its frame.
         * 
         * If set, this property overrides the inner-border style property.
         * Overriding the style-provided border is useful when you want to do
         * in-place editing of some text in a canvas or list widget, where
         * pixel-exact positioning of the entry is important.
         * @param border a {@link Gtk.Border}, or `null`
         */
        set_inner_border(border: Border | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.Entry.input_hints} property, which
         * allows input methods to fine-tune their behaviour.
         * @param hints the hints
         */
        set_input_hints(hints: InputHints): void;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.Entry.input_purpose} property which
         * can be used by on-screen keyboards and other input
         * methods to adjust their behaviour.
         * @param purpose the purpose
         */
        set_input_purpose(purpose: InputPurpose): void;

        /**
         * Sets the character to use in place of the actual text when
         * `gtk_entry_set_visibility()` has been called to set text visibility
         * to `false`. i.e. this is the character used in “password mode” to
         * show the user how many characters have been typed. By default, GTK+
         * picks the best invisible char available in the current font. If you
         * set the invisible char to 0, then the user will get no feedback
         * at all; there will be no text on the screen as they type.
         * @param ch a Unicode character
         */
        set_invisible_char(ch: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets the maximum allowed length of the contents of the widget. If
         * the current contents are longer than the given length, then they
         * will be truncated to fit.
         * 
         * This is equivalent to getting `entry`'s {@link Gtk.EntryBuffer} and
         * calling `gtk_entry_buffer_set_max_length()` on it.
         * ```
         * 
         * @param max the maximum length of the entry, or 0 for no maximum.   (other than the maximum length of entries.) The value passed in will   be clamped to the range 0-65536.
         */
        set_max_length(max: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the desired maximum width in characters of `entry`.
         * @param n_chars the new desired maximum width, in characters
         */
        set_max_width_chars(n_chars: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the text is overwritten when typing in the {@link Gtk.Entry}.
         * @param overwrite new value
         */
        set_overwrite_mode(overwrite: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets text to be displayed in `entry` when it is empty and unfocused.
         * This can be used to give a visual hint of the expected contents of
         * the {@link Gtk.Entry}.
         * 
         * Note that since the placeholder text gets removed when the entry
         * received focus, using this feature is a bit problematic if the entry
         * is given the initial focus in a window. Sometimes this can be
         * worked around by delaying the initial focus setting until the
         * first key event arrives.
         * @param text a string to be displayed when `entry` is empty and unfocused, or `null`
         */
        set_placeholder_text(text: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Causes the entry’s progress indicator to “fill in” the given
         * fraction of the bar. The fraction should be between 0.0 and 1.0,
         * inclusive.
         * @param fraction fraction of the task that’s been completed
         */
        set_progress_fraction(fraction: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the fraction of total entry width to move the progress
         * bouncing block for each call to `gtk_entry_progress_pulse()`.
         * @param fraction fraction between 0.0 and 1.0
         */
        set_progress_pulse_step(fraction: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets a {@link Pango.TabArray}; the tabstops in the array are applied to the entry
         * text.
         * @param tabs a {@link Pango.TabArray}
         */
        set_tabs(tabs: Pango.TabArray): void;

        /**
         * Sets the text in the widget to the given
         * value, replacing the current contents.
         * 
         * See `gtk_entry_buffer_set_text()`.
         * @param text the new text
         */
        set_text(text: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the contents of the entry are visible or not.
         * When visibility is set to `false`, characters are displayed
         * as the invisible char, and will also appear that way when
         * the text in the entry widget is copied elsewhere.
         * 
         * By default, GTK+ picks the best invisible character available
         * in the current font, but it can be changed with
         * `gtk_entry_set_invisible_char()`.
         * 
         * Note that you probably want to set {@link Gtk.Entry.input_purpose}
         * to {@link Gtk.InputPurpose.PASSWORD} or {@link Gtk.InputPurpose.PIN} to
         * inform input methods about the purpose of this entry,
         * in addition to setting visibility to `false`.
         * @param visible `true` if the contents of the entry are displayed           as plaintext
         */
        set_visibility(visible: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Changes the size request of the entry to be about the right size
         * for `n_chars` characters. Note that it changes the size
         * request, the size can still be affected by
         * how you pack the widget into containers. If `n_chars` is -1, the
         * size reverts to the default entry size.
         * @param n_chars width in chars
         */
        set_width_chars(n_chars: number): void;

        /**
         * Converts from a position in the entry contents (returned
         * by `gtk_entry_get_text()`) to a position in the
         * entry’s {@link Pango.Layout} (returned by `gtk_entry_get_layout()`,
         * with text retrieved via `pango_layout_get_text()`).
         * @param text_index byte index into the entry contents
         * @returns byte index into the entry layout text
         */
        text_index_to_layout_index(text_index: number): number;

        /**
         * Unsets the invisible char previously set with
         * `gtk_entry_set_invisible_char()`. So that the
         * default invisible char is used again.
         */
        unset_invisible_char(): void;

        /**
         * Indicates whether editing on the cell has been canceled.
         * @since 2.20
         * @default false
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.CellEditable
         */
        get editing_canceled(): boolean;
        set editing_canceled(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Indicates whether editing on the cell has been canceled.
         * @since 2.20
         * @default false
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.CellEditable
         */
        get editingCanceled(): boolean;
        set editingCanceled(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Adds a child to `buildable`. `type` is an optional string
         * describing how the child should be added.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child to add
         * @param type kind of child or `null`
         */
        add_child(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object, type: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Constructs a child of `buildable` with the name `name`.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} calls this function if a “constructor” has been
         * specified in the UI definition.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param name name of child to construct
         * @returns the constructed child
         */
        construct_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, name: string): T;

        /**
         * This is similar to `gtk_buildable_parser_finished()` but is
         * called once for each custom tag handled by the `buildable`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname the name of the tag
         * @param data user data created in custom_tag_start
         */
        custom_finished(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
         * the buildable.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @param data user data that will be passed in to parser functions
         */
        custom_tag_end(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called for each unknown element under `<child>`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @returns `true` if a object has a custom implementation, `false`          if it doesn't.
         */
        custom_tag_start(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string): [boolean, GLib.MarkupParser, null];

        /**
         * Get the internal child called `childname` of the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param childname name of child
         * @returns the internal child of the buildable object
         */
        get_internal_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, childname: string): T;

        /**
         * Gets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} sets the name based on the
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI]
         * used to construct the `buildable`.
         * @returns the name set with `gtk_buildable_set_name()`
         */
        get_name(): string;

        /**
         * Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI].
         * Note that this will be called once for each time
         * `gtk_builder_add_from_file()` or `gtk_builder_add_from_string()`
         * is called on a builder.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         */
        parser_finished(builder: Builder): void;

        /**
         * Sets the property name `name` to `value` on the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param name name of property
         * @param value value of property
         */
        set_buildable_property(builder: Builder, name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;

        /**
         * Sets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * @param name name to set
         */
        set_name(name: string): void;

        /**
         * Adds a child to `buildable`. `type` is an optional string
         * describing how the child should be added.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child to add
         * @param type kind of child or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add_child(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object, type: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Constructs a child of `buildable` with the name `name`.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} calls this function if a “constructor” has been
         * specified in the UI definition.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param name name of child to construct
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_construct_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, name: string): T;

        /**
         * This is similar to `gtk_buildable_parser_finished()` but is
         * called once for each custom tag handled by the `buildable`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname the name of the tag
         * @param data user data created in custom_tag_start
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_finished(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
         * the buildable.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @param data user data that will be passed in to parser functions
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_tag_end(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called for each unknown element under `<child>`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_tag_start(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string): [boolean, GLib.MarkupParser, never];

        /**
         * Get the internal child called `childname` of the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param childname name of child
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_internal_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, childname: string): T;

        /**
         * Gets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} sets the name based on the
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI]
         * used to construct the `buildable`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_name(): string;

        /**
         * Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI].
         * Note that this will be called once for each time
         * `gtk_builder_add_from_file()` or `gtk_builder_add_from_string()`
         * is called on a builder.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_parser_finished(builder: Builder): void;

        /**
         * Sets the property name `name` to `value` on the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param name name of property
         * @param value value of property
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_buildable_property(builder: Builder, name: string, value: unknown): void;

        /**
         * Sets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * @param name name to set
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_name(name: string): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.CellEditable.SignalSignatures.editing_done | Gtk.CellEditable::editing-done} signal.
         */
        editing_done(): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.CellEditable.SignalSignatures.remove_widget | Gtk.CellEditable::remove-widget} signal.
         */
        remove_widget(): void;

        /**
         * Begins editing on a `cell_editable`.
         * 
         * The {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} for the cell creates and returns a {@link Gtk.CellEditable} from
         * `gtk_cell_renderer_start_editing()`, configured for the {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} type.
         * 
         * `gtk_cell_editable_start_editing()` can then set up `cell_editable` suitably for
         * editing a cell, e.g. making the Esc key emit {@link Gtk.CellEditable.SignalSignatures.editing_done | Gtk.CellEditable::editing-done}.
         * 
         * Note that the `cell_editable` is created on-demand for the current edit; its
         * lifetime is temporary and does not persist across other edits and/or cells.
         * @param event The {@link Gdk.Event} that began the editing process, or   `null` if editing was initiated programmatically
         */
        start_editing(event: Gdk.Event | null): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.CellEditable.SignalSignatures.editing_done | Gtk.CellEditable::editing-done} signal.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_editing_done(): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.CellEditable.SignalSignatures.remove_widget | Gtk.CellEditable::remove-widget} signal.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_remove_widget(): void;

        /**
         * Begins editing on a `cell_editable`.
         * 
         * The {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} for the cell creates and returns a {@link Gtk.CellEditable} from
         * `gtk_cell_renderer_start_editing()`, configured for the {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} type.
         * 
         * `gtk_cell_editable_start_editing()` can then set up `cell_editable` suitably for
         * editing a cell, e.g. making the Esc key emit {@link Gtk.CellEditable.SignalSignatures.editing_done | Gtk.CellEditable::editing-done}.
         * 
         * Note that the `cell_editable` is created on-demand for the current edit; its
         * lifetime is temporary and does not persist across other edits and/or cells.
         * @param event The {@link Gdk.Event} that began the editing process, or   `null` if editing was initiated programmatically
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_start_editing(event: Gdk.Event | null): void;

        /**
         * Copies the contents of the currently selected content in the editable and
         * puts it on the clipboard.
         */
        copy_clipboard(): void;

        /**
         * Removes the contents of the currently selected content in the editable and
         * puts it on the clipboard.
         */
        cut_clipboard(): void;

        /**
         * Deletes the currently selected text of the editable.
         * This call doesn’t do anything if there is no selected text.
         */
        delete_selection(): void;

        /**
         * Deletes a sequence of characters. The characters that are deleted are
         * those characters at positions from `start_pos` up to, but not including
         * `end_pos`. If `end_pos` is negative, then the characters deleted
         * are those from `start_pos` to the end of the text.
         * 
         * Note that the positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
         * @param start_pos start position
         * @param end_pos end position
         */
        delete_text(start_pos: number, end_pos: number): void;

        /**
         * Retrieves a sequence of characters. The characters that are retrieved
         * are those characters at positions from `start_pos` up to, but not
         * including `end_pos`. If `end_pos` is negative, then the characters
         * retrieved are those characters from `start_pos` to the end of the text.
         * 
         * Note that positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
         * @param start_pos start of text
         * @param end_pos end of text
         * @returns a pointer to the contents of the widget as a      string. This string is allocated by the {@link Gtk.Editable}      implementation and should be freed by the caller.
         */
        get_chars(start_pos: number, end_pos: number): string;

        /**
         * Retrieves whether `editable` is editable. See
         * `gtk_editable_set_editable()`.
         * @returns `true` if `editable` is editable.
         */
        get_editable(): boolean;

        /**
         * Retrieves the current position of the cursor relative to the start
         * of the content of the editable.
         * 
         * Note that this position is in characters, not in bytes.
         * @returns the cursor position
         */
        get_position(): number;

        /**
         * Retrieves the selection bound of the editable. start_pos will be filled
         * with the start of the selection and `end_pos` with end. If no text was
         * selected both will be identical and `false` will be returned.
         * 
         * Note that positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
         * @returns `true` if an area is selected, `false` otherwise
         */
        get_selection_bounds(): [boolean, number, number];

        /**
         * Inserts `new_text_length` bytes of `new_text` into the contents of the
         * widget, at position `position`.
         * 
         * Note that the position is in characters, not in bytes.
         * The function updates `position` to point after the newly inserted text.
         * @param new_text the text to append
         * @param new_text_length the length of the text in bytes, or -1
         * @param position location of the position text will be inserted at
         */
        insert_text(new_text: string, new_text_length: number, position: number): number;

        /**
         * Pastes the content of the clipboard to the current position of the
         * cursor in the editable.
         */
        paste_clipboard(): void;

        /**
         * Selects a region of text. The characters that are selected are
         * those characters at positions from `start_pos` up to, but not
         * including `end_pos`. If `end_pos` is negative, then the
         * characters selected are those characters from `start_pos` to
         * the end of the text.
         * 
         * Note that positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
         * @param start_pos start of region
         * @param end_pos end of region
         */
        select_region(start_pos: number, end_pos: number): void;

        /**
         * Determines if the user can edit the text in the editable
         * widget or not.
         * @param is_editable `true` if the user is allowed to edit the text   in the widget
         */
        set_editable(is_editable: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the cursor position in the editable to the given value.
         * 
         * The cursor is displayed before the character with the given (base 0)
         * index in the contents of the editable. The value must be less than or
         * equal to the number of characters in the editable. A value of -1
         * indicates that the position should be set after the last character
         * of the editable. Note that `position` is in characters, not in bytes.
         * @param position the position of the cursor
         */
        set_position(position: number): void;

        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_changed(): void;

        /**
         * Deletes a sequence of characters. The characters that are deleted are
         * those characters at positions from `start_pos` up to, but not including
         * `end_pos`. If `end_pos` is negative, then the characters deleted
         * are those from `start_pos` to the end of the text.
         * 
         * Note that the positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
         * @param start_pos start position
         * @param end_pos end position
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_delete_text(start_pos: number, end_pos: number): void;

        /**
         * Deletes a sequence of characters. The characters that are deleted are
         * those characters at positions from `start_pos` up to, but not including
         * `end_pos`. If `end_pos` is negative, then the characters deleted
         * are those from `start_pos` to the end of the text.
         * 
         * Note that the positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
         * @param start_pos start position
         * @param end_pos end position
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_do_delete_text(start_pos: number, end_pos: number): void;

        /**
         * Inserts `new_text_length` bytes of `new_text` into the contents of the
         * widget, at position `position`.
         * 
         * Note that the position is in characters, not in bytes.
         * The function updates `position` to point after the newly inserted text.
         * @param new_text the text to append
         * @param new_text_length the length of the text in bytes, or -1
         * @param position location of the position text will be inserted at
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_do_insert_text(new_text: string, new_text_length: number, position: number): number;

        /**
         * Retrieves a sequence of characters. The characters that are retrieved
         * are those characters at positions from `start_pos` up to, but not
         * including `end_pos`. If `end_pos` is negative, then the characters
         * retrieved are those characters from `start_pos` to the end of the text.
         * 
         * Note that positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
         * @param start_pos start of text
         * @param end_pos end of text
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_chars(start_pos: number, end_pos: number): string;

        /**
         * Retrieves the current position of the cursor relative to the start
         * of the content of the editable.
         * 
         * Note that this position is in characters, not in bytes.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_position(): number;

        /**
         * Retrieves the selection bound of the editable. start_pos will be filled
         * with the start of the selection and `end_pos` with end. If no text was
         * selected both will be identical and `false` will be returned.
         * 
         * Note that positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_selection_bounds(): [boolean, number, number];

        /**
         * Inserts `new_text_length` bytes of `new_text` into the contents of the
         * widget, at position `position`.
         * 
         * Note that the position is in characters, not in bytes.
         * The function updates `position` to point after the newly inserted text.
         * @param new_text the text to append
         * @param new_text_length the length of the text in bytes, or -1
         * @param position location of the position text will be inserted at
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_insert_text(new_text: string, new_text_length: number, position: number): number;

        /**
         * Sets the cursor position in the editable to the given value.
         * 
         * The cursor is displayed before the character with the given (base 0)
         * index in the contents of the editable. The value must be less than or
         * equal to the number of characters in the editable. A value of -1
         * indicates that the position should be set after the last character
         * of the editable. Note that `position` is in characters, not in bytes.
         * @param position the position of the cursor
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_position(position: number): void;

        /**
         * Selects a region of text. The characters that are selected are
         * those characters at positions from `start_pos` up to, but not
         * including `end_pos`. If `end_pos` is negative, then the
         * characters selected are those characters from `start_pos` to
         * the end of the text.
         * 
         * Note that positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
         * @param start_pos start of region
         * @param end_pos end of region
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_selection_bounds(start_pos: number, end_pos: number): void;
    }


    namespace EntryAccessible {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends WidgetAccessible.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-layer": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-mdi-zorder": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-help-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-hypertext-nlinks": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption-object": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-summary": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends WidgetAccessible.ConstructorProps, Atk.Action.ConstructorProps, Atk.Component.ConstructorProps, Atk.EditableText.ConstructorProps, Atk.Text.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class EntryAccessible extends WidgetAccessible implements Atk.Action, Atk.Component, Atk.EditableText, Atk.Text {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<EntryAccessible>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: EntryAccessible.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<EntryAccessible.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof EntryAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, EntryAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof EntryAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, EntryAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof EntryAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<EntryAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        /**
         * Perform the specified action on the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns `true` if success, `false` otherwise
         */
        do_action(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns a description of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns a description string, or `null` if `action` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_description(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.get_description
        get_description(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Gets the keybinding which can be used to activate this action, if one
         * exists. The string returned should contain localized, human-readable,
         * key sequences as they would appear when displayed on screen. It must
         * be in the format "mnemonic;sequence;shortcut".
         * 
         * - The mnemonic key activates the object if it is presently enabled onscreen.
         *   This typically corresponds to the underlined letter within the widget.
         *   Example: "n" in a traditional "New..." menu item or the "a" in "Apply" for
         *   a button.
         * - The sequence is the full list of keys which invoke the action even if the
         *   relevant element is not currently shown on screen. For instance, for a menu
         *   item the sequence is the keybindings used to open the parent menus before
         *   invoking. The sequence string is colon-delimited. Example: "Alt+F:N" in a
         *   traditional "New..." menu item.
         * - The shortcut, if it exists, will invoke the same action without showing
         *   the component or its enclosing menus or dialogs. Example: "Ctrl+N" in a
         *   traditional "New..." menu item.
         * 
         * Example: For a traditional "New..." menu item, the expected return value
         * would be: "N;Alt+F:N;Ctrl+N" for the English locale and "N;Alt+D:N;Strg+N"
         * for the German locale. If, hypothetically, this menu item lacked a mnemonic,
         * it would be represented by ";;Ctrl+N" and ";;Strg+N" respectively.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns the keybinding which can be used to activate this action, or `null` if there is no keybinding for this action.
         */
        get_keybinding(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Returns the localized name of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns a name string, or `null` if `action` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_localized_name(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the number of accessible actions available on the object.
         * If there are more than one, the first one is considered the
         * "default" action of the object.
         * @returns a the number of actions, or 0 if `action` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_n_actions(): number;

        /**
         * Returns a non-localized string naming the specified action of the
         * object. This name is generally not descriptive of the end result
         * of the action, but instead names the 'interaction type' which the
         * object supports. By convention, the above strings should be used to
         * represent the actions which correspond to the common point-and-click
         * interaction techniques of the same name: i.e.
         * "click", "press", "release", "drag", "drop", "popup", etc.
         * The "popup" action should be used to pop up a context menu for the
         * object, if one exists.
         * 
         * For technical reasons, some toolkits cannot guarantee that the
         * reported action is actually 'bound' to a nontrivial user event;
         * i.e. the result of some actions via `atk_action_do_action()` may be
         * NIL.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns a name string, or `null` if `action` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_name(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.get_name
        get_name(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Sets a description of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @param desc the description to be assigned to this action
         * @returns a gboolean representing if the description was successfully set;
         */
        set_description(i: number, desc: string): boolean;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.set_description
        set_description(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Perform the specified action on the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_do_action(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns a description of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_description(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         * @virtual
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.vfunc_get_description
        vfunc_get_description(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Gets the keybinding which can be used to activate this action, if one
         * exists. The string returned should contain localized, human-readable,
         * key sequences as they would appear when displayed on screen. It must
         * be in the format "mnemonic;sequence;shortcut".
         * 
         * - The mnemonic key activates the object if it is presently enabled onscreen.
         *   This typically corresponds to the underlined letter within the widget.
         *   Example: "n" in a traditional "New..." menu item or the "a" in "Apply" for
         *   a button.
         * - The sequence is the full list of keys which invoke the action even if the
         *   relevant element is not currently shown on screen. For instance, for a menu
         *   item the sequence is the keybindings used to open the parent menus before
         *   invoking. The sequence string is colon-delimited. Example: "Alt+F:N" in a
         *   traditional "New..." menu item.
         * - The shortcut, if it exists, will invoke the same action without showing
         *   the component or its enclosing menus or dialogs. Example: "Ctrl+N" in a
         *   traditional "New..." menu item.
         * 
         * Example: For a traditional "New..." menu item, the expected return value
         * would be: "N;Alt+F:N;Ctrl+N" for the English locale and "N;Alt+D:N;Strg+N"
         * for the German locale. If, hypothetically, this menu item lacked a mnemonic,
         * it would be represented by ";;Ctrl+N" and ";;Strg+N" respectively.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_keybinding(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Returns the localized name of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_localized_name(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the number of accessible actions available on the object.
         * If there are more than one, the first one is considered the
         * "default" action of the object.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_n_actions(): number;

        /**
         * Returns a non-localized string naming the specified action of the
         * object. This name is generally not descriptive of the end result
         * of the action, but instead names the 'interaction type' which the
         * object supports. By convention, the above strings should be used to
         * represent the actions which correspond to the common point-and-click
         * interaction techniques of the same name: i.e.
         * "click", "press", "release", "drag", "drop", "popup", etc.
         * The "popup" action should be used to pop up a context menu for the
         * object, if one exists.
         * 
         * For technical reasons, some toolkits cannot guarantee that the
         * reported action is actually 'bound' to a nontrivial user event;
         * i.e. the result of some actions via `atk_action_do_action()` may be
         * NIL.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_name(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         * @virtual
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.vfunc_get_name
        vfunc_get_name(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Sets a description of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @param desc the description to be assigned to this action
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_description(i: number, desc: string): boolean;

        /**
         * @param args 
         * @virtual
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.vfunc_set_description
        vfunc_set_description(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Checks whether the specified point is within the extent of the `component`.
         * 
         * Toolkit implementor note: ATK provides a default implementation for
         * this virtual method. In general there are little reason to
         * re-implement it.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @returns `true` or `false` indicating whether the specified point is within the extent of the `component` or not
         */
        contains(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the alpha value (i.e. the opacity) for this
         * `component`, on a scale from 0 (fully transparent) to 1.0
         * (fully opaque).
         * @returns An alpha value from 0 to 1.0, inclusive.
         */
        get_alpha(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the rectangle which gives the extent of the `component`.
         * 
         * If the extent can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), all of x, y, width, height are set to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         */
        get_extents(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the layer of the component.
         * @returns an {@link Atk.Layer} which is the layer of the component
         */
        get_layer(): Atk.Layer;

        /**
         * Gets the zorder of the component. The value G_MININT will be returned
         * if the layer of the component is not ATK_LAYER_MDI or ATK_LAYER_WINDOW.
         * @returns a gint which is the zorder of the component, i.e. the depth at which the component is shown in relation to other components in the same container.
         */
        get_mdi_zorder(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the position of `component` in the form of
         * a point specifying `component`'s top-left corner.
         * 
         * If the position can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), x and y are set to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         */
        get_position(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the size of the `component` in terms of width and height.
         * 
         * If the size can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), width and height are set to -1.
         */
        get_size(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Grabs focus for this `component`.
         * @returns `true` if successful, `false` otherwise.
         */
        grab_focus(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets a reference to the accessible child, if one exists, at the
         * coordinate point specified by `x` and `y`.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @returns a reference to the accessible child, if one exists
         */
        ref_accessible_at_point(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): Atk.Object | null;

        /**
         * Remove the handler specified by `handler_id` from the list of
         * functions to be executed when this object receives focus events
         * (in or out).
         * @param handler_id the handler id of the focus handler to be removed from `component`
         */
        remove_focus_handler(handler_id: number): void;

        /**
         * Makes `component` visible on the screen by scrolling all necessary parents.
         * 
         * Contrary to atk_component_set_position, this does not actually move
         * `component` in its parent, this only makes the parents scroll so that the
         * object shows up on the screen, given its current position within the parents.
         * @param type specify where the object should be made visible.
         * @returns whether scrolling was successful.
         */
        scroll_to(type: Atk.ScrollType): boolean;

        /**
         * Move the top-left of `component` to a given position of the screen by
         * scrolling all necessary parents.
         * @param coords specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or to the parent object.
         * @param x x-position where to scroll to
         * @param y y-position where to scroll to
         * @returns whether scrolling was successful.
         */
        scroll_to_point(coords: Atk.CoordType, x: number, y: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the extents of `component`.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param width width to set for `component`
         * @param height height to set for `component`
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @returns `true` or `false` whether the extents were set or not
         */
        set_extents(x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the position of `component`.
         * 
         * Contrary to atk_component_scroll_to, this does not trigger any scrolling,
         * this just moves `component` in its parent.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the component's top level window
         * @returns `true` or `false` whether or not the position was set or not
         */
        set_position(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Set the size of the `component` in terms of width and height.
         * @param width width to set for `component`
         * @param height height to set for `component`
         * @returns `true` or `false` whether the size was set or not
         */
        set_size(width: number, height: number): boolean;

        /**
         * @param bounds 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_bounds_changed(bounds: Atk.Rectangle): void;

        /**
         * Checks whether the specified point is within the extent of the `component`.
         * 
         * Toolkit implementor note: ATK provides a default implementation for
         * this virtual method. In general there are little reason to
         * re-implement it.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_contains(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the alpha value (i.e. the opacity) for this
         * `component`, on a scale from 0 (fully transparent) to 1.0
         * (fully opaque).
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_alpha(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the rectangle which gives the extent of the `component`.
         * 
         * If the extent can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), all of x, y, width, height are set to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_extents(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the layer of the component.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_layer(): Atk.Layer;

        /**
         * Gets the zorder of the component. The value G_MININT will be returned
         * if the layer of the component is not ATK_LAYER_MDI or ATK_LAYER_WINDOW.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_mdi_zorder(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the position of `component` in the form of
         * a point specifying `component`'s top-left corner.
         * 
         * If the position can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), x and y are set to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_position(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the size of the `component` in terms of width and height.
         * 
         * If the size can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), width and height are set to -1.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_size(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Grabs focus for this `component`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_grab_focus(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets a reference to the accessible child, if one exists, at the
         * coordinate point specified by `x` and `y`.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_ref_accessible_at_point(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): Atk.Object | null;

        /**
         * Remove the handler specified by `handler_id` from the list of
         * functions to be executed when this object receives focus events
         * (in or out).
         * @param handler_id the handler id of the focus handler to be removed from `component`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_remove_focus_handler(handler_id: number): void;

        /**
         * Makes `component` visible on the screen by scrolling all necessary parents.
         * 
         * Contrary to atk_component_set_position, this does not actually move
         * `component` in its parent, this only makes the parents scroll so that the
         * object shows up on the screen, given its current position within the parents.
         * @param type specify where the object should be made visible.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_scroll_to(type: Atk.ScrollType): boolean;

        /**
         * Move the top-left of `component` to a given position of the screen by
         * scrolling all necessary parents.
         * @param coords specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or to the parent object.
         * @param x x-position where to scroll to
         * @param y y-position where to scroll to
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_scroll_to_point(coords: Atk.CoordType, x: number, y: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the extents of `component`.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param width width to set for `component`
         * @param height height to set for `component`
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_extents(x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the position of `component`.
         * 
         * Contrary to atk_component_scroll_to, this does not trigger any scrolling,
         * this just moves `component` in its parent.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the component's top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_position(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Set the size of the `component` in terms of width and height.
         * @param width width to set for `component`
         * @param height height to set for `component`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_size(width: number, height: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Copy text from `start_pos` up to, but not including `end_pos`
         * to the clipboard.
         * @param start_pos start position
         * @param end_pos end position
         */
        copy_text(start_pos: number, end_pos: number): void;

        /**
         * Copy text from `start_pos` up to, but not including `end_pos`
         * to the clipboard and then delete from the widget.
         * @param start_pos start position
         * @param end_pos end position
         */
        cut_text(start_pos: number, end_pos: number): void;

        /**
         * Delete text `start_pos` up to, but not including `end_pos`.
         * @param start_pos start position
         * @param end_pos end position
         */
        delete_text(start_pos: number, end_pos: number): void;

        /**
         * Insert text at a given position.
         * @param string the text to insert
         * @param length the length of text to insert, in bytes
         * @param position The caller initializes this to the position at which to insert the text. After the call it points at the position after the newly inserted text.
         */
        insert_text(string: string, length: number, position: number): void;

        /**
         * Paste text from clipboard to specified `position`.
         * @param position position to paste
         */
        paste_text(position: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the attributes for a specified range. See the ATK_ATTRIBUTE
         * macros (such as #ATK_ATTRIBUTE_LEFT_MARGIN) for examples of attributes
         * that can be set. Note that other attributes that do not have corresponding
         * ATK_ATTRIBUTE macros may also be set for certain text widgets.
         * @param attrib_set an {@link Atk.AttributeSet}
         * @param start_offset start of range in which to set attributes
         * @param end_offset end of range in which to set attributes
         * @returns `true` if attributes successfully set for the specified range, otherwise `false`
         */
        set_run_attributes(attrib_set: Atk.AttributeSet, start_offset: number, end_offset: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Set text contents of `text`.
         * @param string string to set for text contents of `text`
         */
        set_text_contents(string: string): void;

        /**
         * Copy text from `start_pos` up to, but not including `end_pos`
         * to the clipboard.
         * @param start_pos start position
         * @param end_pos end position
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_copy_text(start_pos: number, end_pos: number): void;

        /**
         * Copy text from `start_pos` up to, but not including `end_pos`
         * to the clipboard and then delete from the widget.
         * @param start_pos start position
         * @param end_pos end position
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_cut_text(start_pos: number, end_pos: number): void;

        /**
         * Delete text `start_pos` up to, but not including `end_pos`.
         * @param start_pos start position
         * @param end_pos end position
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_delete_text(start_pos: number, end_pos: number): void;

        /**
         * Insert text at a given position.
         * @param string the text to insert
         * @param length the length of text to insert, in bytes
         * @param position The caller initializes this to the position at which to insert the text. After the call it points at the position after the newly inserted text.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_insert_text(string: string, length: number, position: number): void;

        /**
         * Paste text from clipboard to specified `position`.
         * @param position position to paste
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_paste_text(position: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the attributes for a specified range. See the ATK_ATTRIBUTE
         * macros (such as #ATK_ATTRIBUTE_LEFT_MARGIN) for examples of attributes
         * that can be set. Note that other attributes that do not have corresponding
         * ATK_ATTRIBUTE macros may also be set for certain text widgets.
         * @param attrib_set an {@link Atk.AttributeSet}
         * @param start_offset start of range in which to set attributes
         * @param end_offset end of range in which to set attributes
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_run_attributes(attrib_set: Atk.AttributeSet, start_offset: number, end_offset: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Set text contents of `text`.
         * @param string string to set for text contents of `text`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_text_contents(string: string): void;

        /**
         * Adds a selection bounded by the specified offsets.
         * @param start_offset the starting character offset of the selected region
         * @param end_offset the offset of the first character after the selected region.
         * @returns `true` if successful, `false` otherwise
         */
        add_selection(start_offset: number, end_offset: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Get the ranges of text in the specified bounding box.
         * @param rect An AtkTextRectangle giving the dimensions of the bounding box.
         * @param coord_type Specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or widget window.
         * @param x_clip_type Specify the horizontal clip type.
         * @param y_clip_type Specify the vertical clip type.
         * @returns Array of AtkTextRange. The last          element of the array returned by this function will be NULL.
         */
        get_bounded_ranges(rect: Atk.TextRectangle, coord_type: Atk.CoordType, x_clip_type: Atk.TextClipType, y_clip_type: Atk.TextClipType): Atk.TextRange[];

        /**
         * Gets the offset of the position of the caret (cursor).
         * @returns the character offset of the position of the caret or -1 if          the caret is not located inside the element or in the case of          any other failure.
         */
        get_caret_offset(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the specified text.
         * @param offset a character offset within `text`
         * @returns the character at `offset` or 0 in the case of failure.
         */
        get_character_at_offset(offset: number): string;

        /**
         * Gets the character count.
         * @returns the number of characters or -1 in case of failure.
         */
        get_character_count(): number;

        /**
         * If the extent can not be obtained (e.g. missing support), all of x, y, width,
         * height are set to -1.
         * 
         * Get the bounding box containing the glyph representing the character at
         *     a particular text offset.
         * @param offset The offset of the text character for which bounding information is required.
         * @param coords specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or widget window
         */
        get_character_extents(offset: number, coords: Atk.CoordType): [number, number, number, number];

        /**
         * Creates an {@link Atk.AttributeSet} which consists of the default values of
         * attributes for the text. See the enum AtkTextAttribute for types of text
         * attributes that can be returned. Note that other attributes may also be
         * returned.
         * @returns an {@link Atk.AttributeSet} which contains the default text          attributes for this {@link Atk.Text}. This {@link Atk.AttributeSet} should be freed by          a call to `atk_attribute_set_free()`.
         */
        get_default_attributes(): Atk.AttributeSet;

        /**
         * Gets the number of selected regions.
         * @returns The number of selected regions, or -1 in the case of failure.
         */
        get_n_selections(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the offset of the character located at coordinates `x` and `y`. `x` and `y`
         * are interpreted as being relative to the screen or this widget's window
         * depending on `coords`.
         * @param x screen x-position of character
         * @param y screen y-position of character
         * @param coords specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or widget window
         * @returns the offset to the character which is located at  the specified          `x` and `y` coordinates of -1 in case of failure.
         */
        get_offset_at_point(x: number, y: number, coords: Atk.CoordType): number;

        /**
         * Get the bounding box for text within the specified range.
         * 
         * If the extents can not be obtained (e.g. or missing support), the rectangle
         * fields are set to -1.
         * @param start_offset The offset of the first text character for which boundary        information is required.
         * @param end_offset The offset of the text character after the last character        for which boundary information is required.
         * @param coord_type Specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or widget window.
         */
        get_range_extents(start_offset: number, end_offset: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): Atk.TextRectangle;

        /**
         * Creates an {@link Atk.AttributeSet} which consists of the attributes explicitly
         * set at the position `offset` in the text. `start_offset` and `end_offset` are
         * set to the start and end of the range around `offset` where the attributes are
         * invariant. Note that `end_offset` is the offset of the first character
         * after the range.  See the enum AtkTextAttribute for types of text
         * attributes that can be returned. Note that other attributes may also be
         * returned.
         * @param offset the character offset at which to get the attributes, -1 means the offset of the character to be inserted at the caret location.
         * @returns an {@link Atk.AttributeSet} which contains the attributes         explicitly set at `offset`. This {@link Atk.AttributeSet} should be freed by         a call to `atk_attribute_set_free()`.
         */
        get_run_attributes(offset: number): [Atk.AttributeSet, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the text from the specified selection.
         * @param selection_num The selection number.  The selected regions are assigned numbers that correspond to how far the region is from the start of the text.  The selected region closest to the beginning of the text region is assigned the number 0, etc.  Note that adding, moving or deleting a selected region can change the numbering.
         * @returns a newly allocated string containing the selected text. Use `g_free()`          to free the returned string.
         */
        get_selection(selection_num: number): [string, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets a portion of the text exposed through an {@link Atk.Text} according to a given `offset`
         * and a specific `granularity`, along with the start and end offsets defining the
         * boundaries of such a portion of text.
         * 
         * If `granularity` is ATK_TEXT_GRANULARITY_CHAR the character at the
         * offset is returned.
         * 
         * If `granularity` is ATK_TEXT_GRANULARITY_WORD the returned string
         * is from the word start at or before the offset to the word start after
         * the offset.
         * 
         * The returned string will contain the word at the offset if the offset
         * is inside a word and will contain the word before the offset if the
         * offset is not inside a word.
         * 
         * If `granularity` is ATK_TEXT_GRANULARITY_SENTENCE the returned string
         * is from the sentence start at or before the offset to the sentence
         * start after the offset.
         * 
         * The returned string will contain the sentence at the offset if the offset
         * is inside a sentence and will contain the sentence before the offset
         * if the offset is not inside a sentence.
         * 
         * If `granularity` is ATK_TEXT_GRANULARITY_LINE the returned string
         * is from the line start at or before the offset to the line
         * start after the offset.
         * 
         * If `granularity` is ATK_TEXT_GRANULARITY_PARAGRAPH the returned string
         * is from the start of the paragraph at or before the offset to the start
         * of the following paragraph after the offset.
         * @param offset position
         * @param granularity An {@link Atk.TextGranularity}
         * @returns a newly allocated string containing the text at          the `offset` bounded by the specified `granularity`. Use `g_free()`          to free the returned string.  Returns `null` if the offset is invalid          or no implementation is available.
         */
        get_string_at_offset(offset: number, granularity: Atk.TextGranularity): [string | null, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the specified text.
         * @param start_offset a starting character offset within `text`
         * @param end_offset an ending character offset within `text`, or -1 for the end of the string.
         * @returns a newly allocated string containing the text from `start_offset` up          to, but not including `end_offset`. Use `g_free()` to free the returned          string.
         */
        get_text(start_offset: number, end_offset: number): string;

        /**
         * Gets the specified text.
         * @param offset position
         * @param boundary_type An {@link Atk.TextBoundary}
         * @returns a newly allocated string containing the text after `offset` bounded          by the specified `boundary_type`. Use `g_free()` to free the returned          string.
         */
        get_text_after_offset(offset: number, boundary_type: Atk.TextBoundary): [string, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the specified text.
         * 
         * If the boundary_type if ATK_TEXT_BOUNDARY_CHAR the character at the
         * offset is returned.
         * 
         * If the boundary_type is ATK_TEXT_BOUNDARY_WORD_START the returned string
         * is from the word start at or before the offset to the word start after
         * the offset.
         * 
         * The returned string will contain the word at the offset if the offset
         * is inside a word and will contain the word before the offset if the
         * offset is not inside a word.
         * 
         * If the boundary type is ATK_TEXT_BOUNDARY_SENTENCE_START the returned
         * string is from the sentence start at or before the offset to the sentence
         * start after the offset.
         * 
         * The returned string will contain the sentence at the offset if the offset
         * is inside a sentence and will contain the sentence before the offset
         * if the offset is not inside a sentence.
         * 
         * If the boundary type is ATK_TEXT_BOUNDARY_LINE_START the returned
         * string is from the line start at or before the offset to the line
         * start after the offset.
         * @param offset position
         * @param boundary_type An {@link Atk.TextBoundary}
         * @returns a newly allocated string containing the text at `offset` bounded          by the specified `boundary_type`. Use `g_free()` to free the returned          string.
         */
        get_text_at_offset(offset: number, boundary_type: Atk.TextBoundary): [string, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the specified text.
         * @param offset position
         * @param boundary_type An {@link Atk.TextBoundary}
         * @returns a newly allocated string containing the text before `offset` bounded          by the specified `boundary_type`. Use `g_free()` to free the returned          string.
         */
        get_text_before_offset(offset: number, boundary_type: Atk.TextBoundary): [string, number, number];

        /**
         * Removes the specified selection.
         * @param selection_num The selection number.  The selected regions are assigned numbers that correspond to how far the region is from the start of the text.  The selected region closest to the beginning of the text region is assigned the number 0, etc.  Note that adding, moving or deleting a selected region can change the numbering.
         * @returns `true` if successful, `false` otherwise
         */
        remove_selection(selection_num: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Makes a substring of `text` visible on the screen by scrolling all necessary parents.
         * @param start_offset start offset in the `text`
         * @param end_offset end offset in the `text`, or -1 for the end of the text.
         * @param type specify where the object should be made visible.
         * @returns whether scrolling was successful.
         */
        scroll_substring_to(start_offset: number, end_offset: number, type: Atk.ScrollType): boolean;

        /**
         * Move the top-left of a substring of `text` to a given position of the screen
         * by scrolling all necessary parents.
         * @param start_offset start offset in the `text`
         * @param end_offset end offset in the `text`, or -1 for the end of the text.
         * @param coords specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or to the parent object.
         * @param x x-position where to scroll to
         * @param y y-position where to scroll to
         * @returns whether scrolling was successful.
         */
        scroll_substring_to_point(start_offset: number, end_offset: number, coords: Atk.CoordType, x: number, y: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the caret (cursor) position to the specified `offset`.
         * 
         * In the case of rich-text content, this method should either grab focus
         * or move the sequential focus navigation starting point (if the application
         * supports this concept) as if the user had clicked on the new caret position.
         * Typically, this means that the target of this operation is the node containing
         * the new caret position or one of its ancestors. In other words, after this
         * method is called, if the user advances focus, it should move to the first
         * focusable node following the new caret position.
         * 
         * Calling this method should also scroll the application viewport in a way
         * that matches the behavior of the application's typical caret motion or tab
         * navigation as closely as possible. This also means that if the application's
         * caret motion or focus navigation does not trigger a scroll operation, this
         * method should not trigger one either. If the application does not have a caret
         * motion or focus navigation operation, this method should try to scroll the new
         * caret position into view while minimizing unnecessary scroll motion.
         * @param offset the character offset of the new caret position
         * @returns `true` if successful, `false` otherwise.
         */
        set_caret_offset(offset: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Changes the start and end offset of the specified selection.
         * @param selection_num The selection number.  The selected regions are assigned numbers that correspond to how far the region is from the start of the text.  The selected region closest to the beginning of the text region is assigned the number 0, etc.  Note that adding, moving or deleting a selected region can change the numbering.
         * @param start_offset the new starting character offset of the selection
         * @param end_offset the new end position of (e.g. offset immediately past) the selection
         * @returns `true` if successful, `false` otherwise
         */
        set_selection(selection_num: number, start_offset: number, end_offset: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Adds a selection bounded by the specified offsets.
         * @param start_offset the starting character offset of the selected region
         * @param end_offset the offset of the first character after the selected region.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add_selection(start_offset: number, end_offset: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Get the ranges of text in the specified bounding box.
         * @param rect An AtkTextRectangle giving the dimensions of the bounding box.
         * @param coord_type Specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or widget window.
         * @param x_clip_type Specify the horizontal clip type.
         * @param y_clip_type Specify the vertical clip type.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_bounded_ranges(rect: Atk.TextRectangle, coord_type: Atk.CoordType, x_clip_type: Atk.TextClipType, y_clip_type: Atk.TextClipType): Atk.TextRange[];

        /**
         * Gets the offset of the position of the caret (cursor).
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_caret_offset(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the specified text.
         * @param offset a character offset within `text`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_character_at_offset(offset: number): string;

        /**
         * Gets the character count.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_character_count(): number;

        /**
         * If the extent can not be obtained (e.g. missing support), all of x, y, width,
         * height are set to -1.
         * 
         * Get the bounding box containing the glyph representing the character at
         *     a particular text offset.
         * @param offset The offset of the text character for which bounding information is required.
         * @param coords specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or widget window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_character_extents(offset: number, coords: Atk.CoordType): [number, number, number, number];

        /**
         * Creates an {@link Atk.AttributeSet} which consists of the default values of
         * attributes for the text. See the enum AtkTextAttribute for types of text
         * attributes that can be returned. Note that other attributes may also be
         * returned.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_default_attributes(): Atk.AttributeSet;

        /**
         * Gets the number of selected regions.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_n_selections(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the offset of the character located at coordinates `x` and `y`. `x` and `y`
         * are interpreted as being relative to the screen or this widget's window
         * depending on `coords`.
         * @param x screen x-position of character
         * @param y screen y-position of character
         * @param coords specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or widget window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_offset_at_point(x: number, y: number, coords: Atk.CoordType): number;

        /**
         * Get the bounding box for text within the specified range.
         * 
         * If the extents can not be obtained (e.g. or missing support), the rectangle
         * fields are set to -1.
         * @param start_offset The offset of the first text character for which boundary        information is required.
         * @param end_offset The offset of the text character after the last character        for which boundary information is required.
         * @param coord_type Specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or widget window.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_range_extents(start_offset: number, end_offset: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): Atk.TextRectangle;

        /**
         * Creates an {@link Atk.AttributeSet} which consists of the attributes explicitly
         * set at the position `offset` in the text. `start_offset` and `end_offset` are
         * set to the start and end of the range around `offset` where the attributes are
         * invariant. Note that `end_offset` is the offset of the first character
         * after the range.  See the enum AtkTextAttribute for types of text
         * attributes that can be returned. Note that other attributes may also be
         * returned.
         * @param offset the character offset at which to get the attributes, -1 means the offset of the character to be inserted at the caret location.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_run_attributes(offset: number): [Atk.AttributeSet, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the text from the specified selection.
         * @param selection_num The selection number.  The selected regions are assigned numbers that correspond to how far the region is from the start of the text.  The selected region closest to the beginning of the text region is assigned the number 0, etc.  Note that adding, moving or deleting a selected region can change the numbering.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_selection(selection_num: number): [string, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets a portion of the text exposed through an {@link Atk.Text} according to a given `offset`
         * and a specific `granularity`, along with the start and end offsets defining the
         * boundaries of such a portion of text.
         * 
         * If `granularity` is ATK_TEXT_GRANULARITY_CHAR the character at the
         * offset is returned.
         * 
         * If `granularity` is ATK_TEXT_GRANULARITY_WORD the returned string
         * is from the word start at or before the offset to the word start after
         * the offset.
         * 
         * The returned string will contain the word at the offset if the offset
         * is inside a word and will contain the word before the offset if the
         * offset is not inside a word.
         * 
         * If `granularity` is ATK_TEXT_GRANULARITY_SENTENCE the returned string
         * is from the sentence start at or before the offset to the sentence
         * start after the offset.
         * 
         * The returned string will contain the sentence at the offset if the offset
         * is inside a sentence and will contain the sentence before the offset
         * if the offset is not inside a sentence.
         * 
         * If `granularity` is ATK_TEXT_GRANULARITY_LINE the returned string
         * is from the line start at or before the offset to the line
         * start after the offset.
         * 
         * If `granularity` is ATK_TEXT_GRANULARITY_PARAGRAPH the returned string
         * is from the start of the paragraph at or before the offset to the start
         * of the following paragraph after the offset.
         * @param offset position
         * @param granularity An {@link Atk.TextGranularity}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_string_at_offset(offset: number, granularity: Atk.TextGranularity): [string | null, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the specified text.
         * @param start_offset a starting character offset within `text`
         * @param end_offset an ending character offset within `text`, or -1 for the end of the string.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_text(start_offset: number, end_offset: number): string;

        /**
         * Gets the specified text.
         * @param offset position
         * @param boundary_type An {@link Atk.TextBoundary}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_text_after_offset(offset: number, boundary_type: Atk.TextBoundary): [string, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the specified text.
         * 
         * If the boundary_type if ATK_TEXT_BOUNDARY_CHAR the character at the
         * offset is returned.
         * 
         * If the boundary_type is ATK_TEXT_BOUNDARY_WORD_START the returned string
         * is from the word start at or before the offset to the word start after
         * the offset.
         * 
         * The returned string will contain the word at the offset if the offset
         * is inside a word and will contain the word before the offset if the
         * offset is not inside a word.
         * 
         * If the boundary type is ATK_TEXT_BOUNDARY_SENTENCE_START the returned
         * string is from the sentence start at or before the offset to the sentence
         * start after the offset.
         * 
         * The returned string will contain the sentence at the offset if the offset
         * is inside a sentence and will contain the sentence before the offset
         * if the offset is not inside a sentence.
         * 
         * If the boundary type is ATK_TEXT_BOUNDARY_LINE_START the returned
         * string is from the line start at or before the offset to the line
         * start after the offset.
         * @param offset position
         * @param boundary_type An {@link Atk.TextBoundary}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_text_at_offset(offset: number, boundary_type: Atk.TextBoundary): [string, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the specified text.
         * @param offset position
         * @param boundary_type An {@link Atk.TextBoundary}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_text_before_offset(offset: number, boundary_type: Atk.TextBoundary): [string, number, number];

        /**
         * Removes the specified selection.
         * @param selection_num The selection number.  The selected regions are assigned numbers that correspond to how far the region is from the start of the text.  The selected region closest to the beginning of the text region is assigned the number 0, etc.  Note that adding, moving or deleting a selected region can change the numbering.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_remove_selection(selection_num: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Makes a substring of `text` visible on the screen by scrolling all necessary parents.
         * @param start_offset start offset in the `text`
         * @param end_offset end offset in the `text`, or -1 for the end of the text.
         * @param type specify where the object should be made visible.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_scroll_substring_to(start_offset: number, end_offset: number, type: Atk.ScrollType): boolean;

        /**
         * Move the top-left of a substring of `text` to a given position of the screen
         * by scrolling all necessary parents.
         * @param start_offset start offset in the `text`
         * @param end_offset end offset in the `text`, or -1 for the end of the text.
         * @param coords specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or to the parent object.
         * @param x x-position where to scroll to
         * @param y y-position where to scroll to
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_scroll_substring_to_point(start_offset: number, end_offset: number, coords: Atk.CoordType, x: number, y: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the caret (cursor) position to the specified `offset`.
         * 
         * In the case of rich-text content, this method should either grab focus
         * or move the sequential focus navigation starting point (if the application
         * supports this concept) as if the user had clicked on the new caret position.
         * Typically, this means that the target of this operation is the node containing
         * the new caret position or one of its ancestors. In other words, after this
         * method is called, if the user advances focus, it should move to the first
         * focusable node following the new caret position.
         * 
         * Calling this method should also scroll the application viewport in a way
         * that matches the behavior of the application's typical caret motion or tab
         * navigation as closely as possible. This also means that if the application's
         * caret motion or focus navigation does not trigger a scroll operation, this
         * method should not trigger one either. If the application does not have a caret
         * motion or focus navigation operation, this method should try to scroll the new
         * caret position into view while minimizing unnecessary scroll motion.
         * @param offset the character offset of the new caret position
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_caret_offset(offset: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Changes the start and end offset of the specified selection.
         * @param selection_num The selection number.  The selected regions are assigned numbers that correspond to how far the region is from the start of the text.  The selected region closest to the beginning of the text region is assigned the number 0, etc.  Note that adding, moving or deleting a selected region can change the numbering.
         * @param start_offset the new starting character offset of the selection
         * @param end_offset the new end position of (e.g. offset immediately past) the selection
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_selection(selection_num: number, start_offset: number, end_offset: number): boolean;

        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_text_attributes_changed(): void;

        /**
         * @param location 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_text_caret_moved(location: number): void;

        /**
         * the signal handler which is executed when there is a
         *   text change. This virtual function is deprecated sice 2.9.4 and
         *   it should not be overriden.
         * @param position 
         * @param length 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_text_changed(position: number, length: number): void;

        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_text_selection_changed(): void;
    }


    namespace EntryBuffer {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends GObject.Object.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * This signal is emitted after text is deleted from the buffer.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.18
             * @run-first
             */
            "deleted-text": (arg0: number, arg1: number) => void;
            /**
             * This signal is emitted after text is inserted into the buffer.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.18
             * @run-first
             */
            "inserted-text": (arg0: number, arg1: string, arg2: number) => void;
            "notify::length": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::max-length": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.Object.ConstructorProps {
            length: number;
            max_length: number;
            maxLength: number;
            text: string;
        }
    }

    /**
     * The {@link Gtk.EntryBuffer} class contains the actual text displayed in a
     * {@link Gtk.Entry} widget.
     * 
     * A single {@link Gtk.EntryBuffer} object can be shared by multiple {@link Gtk.Entry}
     * widgets which will then share the same text content, but not the cursor
     * position, visibility attributes, icon etc.
     * 
     * {@link Gtk.EntryBuffer} may be derived from. Such a derived class might allow
     * text to be stored in an alternate location, such as non-pageable memory,
     * useful in the case of important passwords. Or a derived class could
     * integrate with an application’s concept of undo/redo.
     * @gir-type Class
     * @since 2.18
     */
    class EntryBuffer extends GObject.Object {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<EntryBuffer>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * The length (in characters) of the text in buffer.
         * @since 2.18
         * @read-only
         * @default 0
         */
        get length(): number;

        /**
         * The maximum length (in characters) of the text in the buffer.
         * @since 2.18
         * @default 0
         */
        get max_length(): number;
        set max_length(val: number);

        /**
         * The maximum length (in characters) of the text in the buffer.
         * @since 2.18
         * @default 0
         */
        get maxLength(): number;
        set maxLength(val: number);

        /**
         * The contents of the buffer.
         * @since 2.18
         */
        get text(): string;
        set text(val: string);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: EntryBuffer.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<EntryBuffer.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](initial_chars: string | null, n_initial_chars: number): EntryBuffer;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof EntryBuffer.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, EntryBuffer.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof EntryBuffer.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, EntryBuffer.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof EntryBuffer.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<EntryBuffer.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * Deletes a sequence of characters from the buffer. `n_chars` characters are
         * deleted starting at `position`. If `n_chars` is negative, then all characters
         * until the end of the text are deleted.
         * 
         * If `position` or `n_chars` are out of bounds, then they are coerced to sane
         * values.
         * 
         * Note that the positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
         * @param position position at which to delete text
         * @param n_chars number of characters to delete
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_delete_text(position: number, n_chars: number): number;

        /**
         * @param position 
         * @param n_chars 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_deleted_text(position: number, n_chars: number): void;

        /**
         * Retrieves the length in characters of the buffer.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_length(): number;

        /**
         * @param n_bytes 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_text(n_bytes: number): string;

        /**
         * Inserts `n_chars` characters of `chars` into the contents of the
         * buffer, at position `position`.
         * 
         * If `n_chars` is negative, then characters from chars will be inserted
         * until a null-terminator is found. If `position` or `n_chars` are out of
         * bounds, or the maximum buffer text length is exceeded, then they are
         * coerced to sane values.
         * 
         * Note that the position and length are in characters, not in bytes.
         * @param position the position at which to insert text.
         * @param chars the text to insert into the buffer.
         * @param n_chars the length of the text in characters, or -1
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_insert_text(position: number, chars: string, n_chars: number): number;

        /**
         * @param position 
         * @param chars 
         * @param n_chars 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_inserted_text(position: number, chars: string, n_chars: number): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Deletes a sequence of characters from the buffer. `n_chars` characters are
         * deleted starting at `position`. If `n_chars` is negative, then all characters
         * until the end of the text are deleted.
         * 
         * If `position` or `n_chars` are out of bounds, then they are coerced to sane
         * values.
         * 
         * Note that the positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
         * @param position position at which to delete text
         * @param n_chars number of characters to delete
         * @returns The number of characters deleted.
         */
        delete_text(position: number, n_chars: number): number;

        /**
         * Used when subclassing {@link Gtk.EntryBuffer}
         * @param position position at which text was deleted
         * @param n_chars number of characters deleted
         */
        emit_deleted_text(position: number, n_chars: number): void;

        /**
         * Used when subclassing {@link Gtk.EntryBuffer}
         * @param position position at which text was inserted
         * @param chars text that was inserted
         * @param n_chars number of characters inserted
         */
        emit_inserted_text(position: number, chars: string, n_chars: number): void;

        /**
         * Retrieves the length in bytes of the buffer.
         * See `gtk_entry_buffer_get_length()`.
         * @returns The byte length of the buffer.
         */
        get_bytes(): number;

        /**
         * Retrieves the length in characters of the buffer.
         * @returns The number of characters in the buffer.
         */
        get_length(): number;

        /**
         * Retrieves the maximum allowed length of the text in
         * `buffer`. See `gtk_entry_buffer_set_max_length()`.
         * @returns the maximum allowed number of characters               in {@link Gtk.EntryBuffer}, or 0 if there is no maximum.
         */
        get_max_length(): number;

        /**
         * Retrieves the contents of the buffer.
         * 
         * The memory pointer returned by this call will not change
         * unless this object emits a signal, or is finalized.
         * @returns a pointer to the contents of the widget as a      string. This string points to internally allocated      storage in the buffer and must not be freed, modified or      stored.
         */
        get_text(): string;

        /**
         * Inserts `n_chars` characters of `chars` into the contents of the
         * buffer, at position `position`.
         * 
         * If `n_chars` is negative, then characters from chars will be inserted
         * until a null-terminator is found. If `position` or `n_chars` are out of
         * bounds, or the maximum buffer text length is exceeded, then they are
         * coerced to sane values.
         * 
         * Note that the position and length are in characters, not in bytes.
         * @param position the position at which to insert text.
         * @param chars the text to insert into the buffer.
         * @param n_chars the length of the text in characters, or -1
         * @returns The number of characters actually inserted.
         */
        insert_text(position: number, chars: string, n_chars: number): number;

        /**
         * Sets the maximum allowed length of the contents of the buffer. If
         * the current contents are longer than the given length, then they
         * will be truncated to fit.
         * @param max_length the maximum length of the entry buffer, or 0 for no maximum.   (other than the maximum length of entries.) The value passed in will   be clamped to the range 0-65536.
         */
        set_max_length(max_length: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the text in the buffer.
         * 
         * This is roughly equivalent to calling `gtk_entry_buffer_delete_text()`
         * and `gtk_entry_buffer_insert_text()`.
         * 
         * Note that `n_chars` is in characters, not in bytes.
         * @param chars the new text
         * @param n_chars the number of characters in `text`, or -1
         */
        set_text(chars: string, n_chars: number): void;
    }


    namespace EntryCompletion {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends GObject.Object.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * Gets emitted when an action is activated.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.4
             * @run-last
             */
            "action-activated": (arg0: number) => void;
            /**
             * Gets emitted when a match from the cursor is on a match
             * of the list. The default behaviour is to replace the contents
             * of the entry with the contents of the text column in the row
             * pointed to by `iter`.
             * 
             * Note that `model` is the model that was passed to
             * `gtk_entry_completion_set_model()`.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.12
             * @run-last
             */
            "cursor-on-match": (arg0: TreeModel, arg1: TreeIter) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * Gets emitted when the inline autocompletion is triggered.
             * The default behaviour is to make the entry display the
             * whole prefix and select the newly inserted part.
             * 
             * Applications may connect to this signal in order to insert only a
             * smaller part of the `prefix` into the entry - e.g. the entry used in
             * the {@link Gtk.FileChooser} inserts only the part of the prefix up to the
             * next '/'.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.6
             * @run-last
             */
            "insert-prefix": (arg0: string) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * Gets emitted when a match from the list is selected.
             * The default behaviour is to replace the contents of the
             * entry with the contents of the text column in the row
             * pointed to by `iter`.
             * 
             * Note that `model` is the model that was passed to
             * `gtk_entry_completion_set_model()`.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.4
             * @run-last
             */
            "match-selected": (arg0: TreeModel, arg1: TreeIter) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * Gets emitted when the filter model has zero
             * number of rows in completion_complete method.
             * (In other words when GtkEntryCompletion is out of
             *  suggestions)
             * @signal
             * @since 3.14
             * @run-last
             */
            "no-matches": () => void;
            "notify::cell-area": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::inline-completion": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::inline-selection": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::minimum-key-length": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::model": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::popup-completion": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::popup-set-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::popup-single-match": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::text-column": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.Object.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, CellLayout.ConstructorProps {
            cell_area: CellArea;
            cellArea: CellArea;
            inline_completion: boolean;
            inlineCompletion: boolean;
            inline_selection: boolean;
            inlineSelection: boolean;
            minimum_key_length: number;
            minimumKeyLength: number;
            model: TreeModel | null;
            popup_completion: boolean;
            popupCompletion: boolean;
            popup_set_width: boolean;
            popupSetWidth: boolean;
            popup_single_match: boolean;
            popupSingleMatch: boolean;
            text_column: number;
            textColumn: number;
        }
    }

    /**
     * {@link Gtk.EntryCompletion} is an auxiliary object to be used in conjunction with
     * {@link Gtk.Entry} to provide the completion functionality. It implements the
     * {@link Gtk.CellLayout} interface, to allow the user to add extra cells to the
     * {@link Gtk.TreeView} with completion matches.
     * 
     * “Completion functionality” means that when the user modifies the text
     * in the entry, {@link Gtk.EntryCompletion} checks which rows in the model match
     * the current content of the entry, and displays a list of matches.
     * By default, the matching is done by comparing the entry text
     * case-insensitively against the text column of the model (see
     * `gtk_entry_completion_set_text_column()`), but this can be overridden
     * with a custom match function (see `gtk_entry_completion_set_match_func()`).
     * 
     * When the user selects a completion, the content of the entry is
     * updated. By default, the content of the entry is replaced by the
     * text column of the model, but this can be overridden by connecting
     * to the {@link Gtk.EntryCompletion.SignalSignatures.match_selected | Gtk.EntryCompletion::match-selected} signal and updating the
     * entry in the signal handler. Note that you should return `true` from
     * the signal handler to suppress the default behaviour.
     * 
     * To add completion functionality to an entry, use `gtk_entry_set_completion()`.
     * 
     * In addition to regular completion matches, which will be inserted into the
     * entry when they are selected, {@link Gtk.EntryCompletion} also allows to display
     * “actions” in the popup window. Their appearance is similar to menuitems,
     * to differentiate them clearly from completion strings. When an action is
     * selected, the {@link Gtk.EntryCompletion.SignalSignatures.action_activated | Gtk.EntryCompletion::action-activated} signal is emitted.
     * 
     * GtkEntryCompletion uses a {@link Gtk.TreeModelFilter} model to represent the
     * subset of the entire model that is currently matching. While the
     * GtkEntryCompletion signals {@link Gtk.EntryCompletion.SignalSignatures.match_selected | Gtk.EntryCompletion::match-selected} and
     * {@link Gtk.EntryCompletion.SignalSignatures.cursor_on_match | Gtk.EntryCompletion::cursor-on-match} take the original model and an
     * iter pointing to that model as arguments, other callbacks and signals
     * (such as `GtkCellLayoutDataFuncs` or {@link Gtk.CellArea.SignalSignatures.apply_attributes | Gtk.CellArea::apply-attributes})
     * will generally take the filter model as argument. As long as you are
     * only calling `gtk_tree_model_get()`, this will make no difference to
     * you. If for some reason, you need the original model, use
     * `gtk_tree_model_filter_get_model()`. Don’t forget to use
     * `gtk_tree_model_filter_convert_iter_to_child_iter()` to obtain a
     * matching iter.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class EntryCompletion extends GObject.Object implements Buildable, CellLayout {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<EntryCompletion>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * The {@link Gtk.CellArea} used to layout cell renderers in the treeview column.
         * 
         * If no area is specified when creating the entry completion with
         * `gtk_entry_completion_new_with_area()` a horizontally oriented
         * {@link Gtk.CellAreaBox} will be used.
         * @since 3.0
         * @construct-only
         */
        get cell_area(): CellArea;

        /**
         * The {@link Gtk.CellArea} used to layout cell renderers in the treeview column.
         * 
         * If no area is specified when creating the entry completion with
         * `gtk_entry_completion_new_with_area()` a horizontally oriented
         * {@link Gtk.CellAreaBox} will be used.
         * @since 3.0
         * @construct-only
         */
        get cellArea(): CellArea;

        /**
         * Determines whether the common prefix of the possible completions
         * should be inserted automatically in the entry. Note that this
         * requires text-column to be set, even if you are using a custom
         * match function.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default false
         */
        get inline_completion(): boolean;
        set inline_completion(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Determines whether the common prefix of the possible completions
         * should be inserted automatically in the entry. Note that this
         * requires text-column to be set, even if you are using a custom
         * match function.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default false
         */
        get inlineCompletion(): boolean;
        set inlineCompletion(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Determines whether the possible completions on the popup
         * will appear in the entry as you navigate through them.
         * @since 2.12
         * @default false
         */
        get inline_selection(): boolean;
        set inline_selection(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Determines whether the possible completions on the popup
         * will appear in the entry as you navigate through them.
         * @since 2.12
         * @default false
         */
        get inlineSelection(): boolean;
        set inlineSelection(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default 1
         */
        get minimum_key_length(): number;
        set minimum_key_length(val: number);

        /**
         * @default 1
         */
        get minimumKeyLength(): number;
        set minimumKeyLength(val: number);

        get model(): TreeModel | null;
        set model(val: TreeModel | null);

        /**
         * Determines whether the possible completions should be
         * shown in a popup window.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default true
         */
        get popup_completion(): boolean;
        set popup_completion(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Determines whether the possible completions should be
         * shown in a popup window.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default true
         */
        get popupCompletion(): boolean;
        set popupCompletion(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Determines whether the completions popup window will be
         * resized to the width of the entry.
         * @since 2.8
         * @default true
         */
        get popup_set_width(): boolean;
        set popup_set_width(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Determines whether the completions popup window will be
         * resized to the width of the entry.
         * @since 2.8
         * @default true
         */
        get popupSetWidth(): boolean;
        set popupSetWidth(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Determines whether the completions popup window will shown
         * for a single possible completion. You probably want to set
         * this to `false` if you are using
         * [inline completion][GtkEntryCompletion--inline-completion].
         * @since 2.8
         * @default true
         */
        get popup_single_match(): boolean;
        set popup_single_match(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Determines whether the completions popup window will shown
         * for a single possible completion. You probably want to set
         * this to `false` if you are using
         * [inline completion][GtkEntryCompletion--inline-completion].
         * @since 2.8
         * @default true
         */
        get popupSingleMatch(): boolean;
        set popupSingleMatch(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The column of the model containing the strings.
         * Note that the strings must be UTF-8.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default -1
         */
        get text_column(): number;
        set text_column(val: number);

        /**
         * The column of the model containing the strings.
         * Note that the strings must be UTF-8.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default -1
         */
        get textColumn(): number;
        set textColumn(val: number);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: EntryCompletion.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<EntryCompletion.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): EntryCompletion;

        static new_with_area(area: CellArea): EntryCompletion;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof EntryCompletion.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, EntryCompletion.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof EntryCompletion.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, EntryCompletion.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof EntryCompletion.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<EntryCompletion.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * @param index_ 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_action_activated(index_: number): void;

        /**
         * @param model 
         * @param iter 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_cursor_on_match(model: TreeModel, iter: TreeIter): boolean;

        /**
         * @param prefix 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_insert_prefix(prefix: string): boolean;

        /**
         * @param model 
         * @param iter 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_match_selected(model: TreeModel, iter: TreeIter): boolean;

        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_no_matches(): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Requests a completion operation, or in other words a refiltering of the
         * current list with completions, using the current key. The completion list
         * view will be updated accordingly.
         */
        complete(): void;

        /**
         * Computes the common prefix that is shared by all rows in `completion`
         * that start with `key`. If no row matches `key`, `null` will be returned.
         * Note that a text column must have been set for this function to work,
         * see `gtk_entry_completion_set_text_column()` for details.
         * @param key The text to complete for
         * @returns The common prefix all rows starting with   `key` or `null` if no row matches `key`.
         */
        compute_prefix(key: string): string | null;

        /**
         * Deletes the action at `index_` from `completion`’s action list.
         * 
         * Note that `index_` is a relative position and the position of an
         * action may have changed since it was inserted.
         * @param index_ the index of the item to delete
         */
        delete_action(index_: number): void;

        /**
         * Get the original text entered by the user that triggered
         * the completion or `null` if there’s no completion ongoing.
         * @returns the prefix for the current completion
         */
        get_completion_prefix(): string;

        /**
         * Gets the entry `completion` has been attached to.
         * @returns The entry `completion` has been attached to
         */
        get_entry(): Widget;

        /**
         * Returns whether the common prefix of the possible completions should
         * be automatically inserted in the entry.
         * @returns `true` if inline completion is turned on
         */
        get_inline_completion(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns `true` if inline-selection mode is turned on.
         * @returns `true` if inline-selection mode is on
         */
        get_inline_selection(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the minimum key length as set for `completion`.
         * @returns The currently used minimum key length
         */
        get_minimum_key_length(): number;

        /**
         * Returns the model the {@link Gtk.EntryCompletion} is using as data source.
         * Returns `null` if the model is unset.
         * @returns A {@link Gtk.TreeModel}, or `null` if none     is currently being used
         */
        get_model(): TreeModel | null;

        /**
         * Returns whether the completions should be presented in a popup window.
         * @returns `true` if popup completion is turned on
         */
        get_popup_completion(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns whether the  completion popup window will be resized to the
         * width of the entry.
         * @returns `true` if the popup window will be resized to the width of   the entry
         */
        get_popup_set_width(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns whether the completion popup window will appear even if there is
         * only a single match.
         * @returns `true` if the popup window will appear regardless of the    number of matches
         */
        get_popup_single_match(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the column in the model of `completion` to get strings from.
         * @returns the column containing the strings
         */
        get_text_column(): number;

        /**
         * Inserts an action in `completion`’s action item list at position `index_`
         * with markup `markup`.
         * @param index_ the index of the item to insert
         * @param markup markup of the item to insert
         */
        insert_action_markup(index_: number, markup: string): void;

        /**
         * Inserts an action in `completion`’s action item list at position `index_`
         * with text `text`. If you want the action item to have markup, use
         * `gtk_entry_completion_insert_action_markup()`.
         * 
         * Note that `index_` is a relative position in the list of actions and
         * the position of an action can change when deleting a different action.
         * @param index_ the index of the item to insert
         * @param text text of the item to insert
         */
        insert_action_text(index_: number, text: string): void;

        /**
         * Requests a prefix insertion.
         */
        insert_prefix(): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the common prefix of the possible completions should
         * be automatically inserted in the entry.
         * @param inline_completion `true` to do inline completion
         */
        set_inline_completion(inline_completion: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether it is possible to cycle through the possible completions
         * inside the entry.
         * @param inline_selection `true` to do inline selection
         */
        set_inline_selection(inline_selection: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the match function for `completion` to be `func`. The match function
         * is used to determine if a row should or should not be in the completion
         * list.
         * @param func the {@link Gtk.EntryCompletionMatchFunc} to use
         */
        set_match_func(func: EntryCompletionMatchFunc): void;

        /**
         * Requires the length of the search key for `completion` to be at least
         * `length`. This is useful for long lists, where completing using a small
         * key takes a lot of time and will come up with meaningless results anyway
         * (ie, a too large dataset).
         * @param length the minimum length of the key in order to start completing
         */
        set_minimum_key_length(length: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the model for a {@link Gtk.EntryCompletion}. If `completion` already has
         * a model set, it will remove it before setting the new model.
         * If model is `null`, then it will unset the model.
         * @param model the {@link Gtk.TreeModel}
         */
        set_model(model: TreeModel | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the completions should be presented in a popup window.
         * @param popup_completion `true` to do popup completion
         */
        set_popup_completion(popup_completion: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the completion popup window will be resized to be the same
         * width as the entry.
         * @param popup_set_width `true` to make the width of the popup the same as the entry
         */
        set_popup_set_width(popup_set_width: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the completion popup window will appear even if there is
         * only a single match. You may want to set this to `false` if you
         * are using [inline completion][GtkEntryCompletion--inline-completion].
         * @param popup_single_match `true` if the popup should appear even for a single     match
         */
        set_popup_single_match(popup_single_match: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Convenience function for setting up the most used case of this code: a
         * completion list with just strings. This function will set up `completion`
         * to have a list displaying all (and just) strings in the completion list,
         * and to get those strings from `column` in the model of `completion`.
         * 
         * This functions creates and adds a {@link Gtk.CellRendererText} for the selected
         * column. If you need to set the text column, but don't want the cell
         * renderer, use `g_object_set()` to set the {@link Gtk.EntryCompletion.text_column}
         * property directly.
         * @param column the column in the model of `completion` to get strings from
         */
        set_text_column(column: number): void;

        /**
         * Adds a child to `buildable`. `type` is an optional string
         * describing how the child should be added.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child to add
         * @param type kind of child or `null`
         */
        add_child(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object, type: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Constructs a child of `buildable` with the name `name`.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} calls this function if a “constructor” has been
         * specified in the UI definition.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param name name of child to construct
         * @returns the constructed child
         */
        construct_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, name: string): T;

        /**
         * This is similar to `gtk_buildable_parser_finished()` but is
         * called once for each custom tag handled by the `buildable`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname the name of the tag
         * @param data user data created in custom_tag_start
         */
        custom_finished(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
         * the buildable.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @param data user data that will be passed in to parser functions
         */
        custom_tag_end(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called for each unknown element under `<child>`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @returns `true` if a object has a custom implementation, `false`          if it doesn't.
         */
        custom_tag_start(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string): [boolean, GLib.MarkupParser, null];

        /**
         * Get the internal child called `childname` of the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param childname name of child
         * @returns the internal child of the buildable object
         */
        get_internal_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, childname: string): T;

        /**
         * Gets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} sets the name based on the
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI]
         * used to construct the `buildable`.
         * @returns the name set with `gtk_buildable_set_name()`
         */
        get_name(): string;

        /**
         * Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI].
         * Note that this will be called once for each time
         * `gtk_builder_add_from_file()` or `gtk_builder_add_from_string()`
         * is called on a builder.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         */
        parser_finished(builder: Builder): void;

        /**
         * Sets the property name `name` to `value` on the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param name name of property
         * @param value value of property
         */
        set_buildable_property(builder: Builder, name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;

        /**
         * Sets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * @param name name to set
         */
        set_name(name: string): void;

        /**
         * Adds a child to `buildable`. `type` is an optional string
         * describing how the child should be added.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child to add
         * @param type kind of child or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add_child(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object, type: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Constructs a child of `buildable` with the name `name`.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} calls this function if a “constructor” has been
         * specified in the UI definition.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param name name of child to construct
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_construct_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, name: string): T;

        /**
         * This is similar to `gtk_buildable_parser_finished()` but is
         * called once for each custom tag handled by the `buildable`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname the name of the tag
         * @param data user data created in custom_tag_start
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_finished(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
         * the buildable.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @param data user data that will be passed in to parser functions
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_tag_end(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called for each unknown element under `<child>`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_tag_start(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string): [boolean, GLib.MarkupParser, never];

        /**
         * Get the internal child called `childname` of the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param childname name of child
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_internal_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, childname: string): T;

        /**
         * Gets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} sets the name based on the
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI]
         * used to construct the `buildable`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_name(): string;

        /**
         * Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI].
         * Note that this will be called once for each time
         * `gtk_builder_add_from_file()` or `gtk_builder_add_from_string()`
         * is called on a builder.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_parser_finished(builder: Builder): void;

        /**
         * Sets the property name `name` to `value` on the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param name name of property
         * @param value value of property
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_buildable_property(builder: Builder, name: string, value: unknown): void;

        /**
         * Sets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * @param name name to set
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_name(name: string): void;

        /**
         * Adds an attribute mapping to the list in `cell_layout`.
         * 
         * The `column` is the column of the model to get a value from, and the
         * `attribute` is the parameter on `cell` to be set from the value. So for
         * example if column 2 of the model contains strings, you could have the
         * “text” attribute of a {@link Gtk.CellRendererText} get its values from column 2.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param attribute an attribute on the renderer
         * @param column the column position on the model to get the attribute from
         */
        add_attribute(cell: CellRenderer, attribute: string, column: number): void;

        /**
         * Unsets all the mappings on all renderers on `cell_layout` and
         * removes all renderers from `cell_layout`.
         */
        clear(): void;

        /**
         * Clears all existing attributes previously set with
         * `gtk_cell_layout_set_attributes()`.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} to clear the attribute mapping on
         */
        clear_attributes(cell: CellRenderer): void;

        /**
         * Returns the underlying {@link Gtk.CellArea} which might be `cell_layout`
         * if called on a {@link Gtk.CellArea} or might be `null` if no {@link Gtk.CellArea}
         * is used by `cell_layout`.
         * @returns the cell area used by `cell_layout`, or `null` in case no cell area is used.
         */
        get_area(): CellArea | null;

        /**
         * Returns the cell renderers which have been added to `cell_layout`.
         * @returns a list of cell renderers. The list, but not the renderers has     been newly allocated and should be freed with `g_list_free()`     when no longer needed.
         */
        get_cells(): CellRenderer[];

        /**
         * Adds the `cell` to the end of `cell_layout`. If `expand` is `false`, then the
         * `cell` is allocated no more space than it needs. Any unused space is
         * divided evenly between cells for which `expand` is `true`.
         * 
         * Note that reusing the same cell renderer is not supported.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param expand `true` if `cell` is to be given extra space allocated to `cell_layout`
         */
        pack_end(cell: CellRenderer, expand: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Packs the `cell` into the beginning of `cell_layout`. If `expand` is `false`,
         * then the `cell` is allocated no more space than it needs. Any unused space
         * is divided evenly between cells for which `expand` is `true`.
         * 
         * Note that reusing the same cell renderer is not supported.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param expand `true` if `cell` is to be given extra space allocated to `cell_layout`
         */
        pack_start(cell: CellRenderer, expand: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Re-inserts `cell` at `position`.
         * 
         * Note that `cell` has already to be packed into `cell_layout`
         * for this to function properly.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} to reorder
         * @param position new position to insert `cell` at
         */
        reorder(cell: CellRenderer, position: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.CellLayoutDataFunc} to use for `cell_layout`.
         * 
         * This function is used instead of the standard attributes mapping
         * for setting the column value, and should set the value of `cell_layout`’s
         * cell renderer(s) as appropriate.
         * 
         * `func` may be `null` to remove a previously set function.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param func the {@link Gtk.CellLayoutDataFunc} to use, or `null`
         */
        set_cell_data_func(cell: CellRenderer, func: CellLayoutDataFunc | null): void;

        /**
         * Adds an attribute mapping to the list in `cell_layout`.
         * 
         * The `column` is the column of the model to get a value from, and the
         * `attribute` is the parameter on `cell` to be set from the value. So for
         * example if column 2 of the model contains strings, you could have the
         * “text” attribute of a {@link Gtk.CellRendererText} get its values from column 2.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param attribute an attribute on the renderer
         * @param column the column position on the model to get the attribute from
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add_attribute(cell: CellRenderer, attribute: string, column: number): void;

        /**
         * Unsets all the mappings on all renderers on `cell_layout` and
         * removes all renderers from `cell_layout`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_clear(): void;

        /**
         * Clears all existing attributes previously set with
         * `gtk_cell_layout_set_attributes()`.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} to clear the attribute mapping on
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_clear_attributes(cell: CellRenderer): void;

        /**
         * Returns the underlying {@link Gtk.CellArea} which might be `cell_layout`
         * if called on a {@link Gtk.CellArea} or might be `null` if no {@link Gtk.CellArea}
         * is used by `cell_layout`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_area(): CellArea | null;

        /**
         * Returns the cell renderers which have been added to `cell_layout`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_cells(): CellRenderer[];

        /**
         * Adds the `cell` to the end of `cell_layout`. If `expand` is `false`, then the
         * `cell` is allocated no more space than it needs. Any unused space is
         * divided evenly between cells for which `expand` is `true`.
         * 
         * Note that reusing the same cell renderer is not supported.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param expand `true` if `cell` is to be given extra space allocated to `cell_layout`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_pack_end(cell: CellRenderer, expand: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Packs the `cell` into the beginning of `cell_layout`. If `expand` is `false`,
         * then the `cell` is allocated no more space than it needs. Any unused space
         * is divided evenly between cells for which `expand` is `true`.
         * 
         * Note that reusing the same cell renderer is not supported.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param expand `true` if `cell` is to be given extra space allocated to `cell_layout`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_pack_start(cell: CellRenderer, expand: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Re-inserts `cell` at `position`.
         * 
         * Note that `cell` has already to be packed into `cell_layout`
         * for this to function properly.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} to reorder
         * @param position new position to insert `cell` at
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_reorder(cell: CellRenderer, position: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.CellLayoutDataFunc} to use for `cell_layout`.
         * 
         * This function is used instead of the standard attributes mapping
         * for setting the column value, and should set the value of `cell_layout`’s
         * cell renderer(s) as appropriate.
         * 
         * `func` may be `null` to remove a previously set function.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param func the {@link Gtk.CellLayoutDataFunc} to use, or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_cell_data_func(cell: CellRenderer, func: CellLayoutDataFunc | null): void;
    }


    namespace EntryIconAccessible {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Atk.Object.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::accessible-component-layer": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-mdi-zorder": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-help-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-hypertext-nlinks": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption-object": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-summary": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Atk.Object.ConstructorProps, Atk.Action.ConstructorProps, Atk.Component.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class EntryIconAccessible extends Atk.Object implements Atk.Action, Atk.Component {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<EntryIconAccessible>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: EntryIconAccessible.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<EntryIconAccessible.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof EntryIconAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, EntryIconAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof EntryIconAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, EntryIconAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof EntryIconAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<EntryIconAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        /**
         * Perform the specified action on the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns `true` if success, `false` otherwise
         */
        do_action(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns a description of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns a description string, or `null` if `action` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_description(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.get_description
        get_description(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Gets the keybinding which can be used to activate this action, if one
         * exists. The string returned should contain localized, human-readable,
         * key sequences as they would appear when displayed on screen. It must
         * be in the format "mnemonic;sequence;shortcut".
         * 
         * - The mnemonic key activates the object if it is presently enabled onscreen.
         *   This typically corresponds to the underlined letter within the widget.
         *   Example: "n" in a traditional "New..." menu item or the "a" in "Apply" for
         *   a button.
         * - The sequence is the full list of keys which invoke the action even if the
         *   relevant element is not currently shown on screen. For instance, for a menu
         *   item the sequence is the keybindings used to open the parent menus before
         *   invoking. The sequence string is colon-delimited. Example: "Alt+F:N" in a
         *   traditional "New..." menu item.
         * - The shortcut, if it exists, will invoke the same action without showing
         *   the component or its enclosing menus or dialogs. Example: "Ctrl+N" in a
         *   traditional "New..." menu item.
         * 
         * Example: For a traditional "New..." menu item, the expected return value
         * would be: "N;Alt+F:N;Ctrl+N" for the English locale and "N;Alt+D:N;Strg+N"
         * for the German locale. If, hypothetically, this menu item lacked a mnemonic,
         * it would be represented by ";;Ctrl+N" and ";;Strg+N" respectively.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns the keybinding which can be used to activate this action, or `null` if there is no keybinding for this action.
         */
        get_keybinding(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Returns the localized name of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns a name string, or `null` if `action` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_localized_name(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the number of accessible actions available on the object.
         * If there are more than one, the first one is considered the
         * "default" action of the object.
         * @returns a the number of actions, or 0 if `action` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_n_actions(): number;

        /**
         * Returns a non-localized string naming the specified action of the
         * object. This name is generally not descriptive of the end result
         * of the action, but instead names the 'interaction type' which the
         * object supports. By convention, the above strings should be used to
         * represent the actions which correspond to the common point-and-click
         * interaction techniques of the same name: i.e.
         * "click", "press", "release", "drag", "drop", "popup", etc.
         * The "popup" action should be used to pop up a context menu for the
         * object, if one exists.
         * 
         * For technical reasons, some toolkits cannot guarantee that the
         * reported action is actually 'bound' to a nontrivial user event;
         * i.e. the result of some actions via `atk_action_do_action()` may be
         * NIL.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns a name string, or `null` if `action` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_name(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.get_name
        get_name(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Sets a description of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @param desc the description to be assigned to this action
         * @returns a gboolean representing if the description was successfully set;
         */
        set_description(i: number, desc: string): boolean;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.set_description
        set_description(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Perform the specified action on the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_do_action(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns a description of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_description(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         * @virtual
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.vfunc_get_description
        vfunc_get_description(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Gets the keybinding which can be used to activate this action, if one
         * exists. The string returned should contain localized, human-readable,
         * key sequences as they would appear when displayed on screen. It must
         * be in the format "mnemonic;sequence;shortcut".
         * 
         * - The mnemonic key activates the object if it is presently enabled onscreen.
         *   This typically corresponds to the underlined letter within the widget.
         *   Example: "n" in a traditional "New..." menu item or the "a" in "Apply" for
         *   a button.
         * - The sequence is the full list of keys which invoke the action even if the
         *   relevant element is not currently shown on screen. For instance, for a menu
         *   item the sequence is the keybindings used to open the parent menus before
         *   invoking. The sequence string is colon-delimited. Example: "Alt+F:N" in a
         *   traditional "New..." menu item.
         * - The shortcut, if it exists, will invoke the same action without showing
         *   the component or its enclosing menus or dialogs. Example: "Ctrl+N" in a
         *   traditional "New..." menu item.
         * 
         * Example: For a traditional "New..." menu item, the expected return value
         * would be: "N;Alt+F:N;Ctrl+N" for the English locale and "N;Alt+D:N;Strg+N"
         * for the German locale. If, hypothetically, this menu item lacked a mnemonic,
         * it would be represented by ";;Ctrl+N" and ";;Strg+N" respectively.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_keybinding(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Returns the localized name of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_localized_name(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the number of accessible actions available on the object.
         * If there are more than one, the first one is considered the
         * "default" action of the object.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_n_actions(): number;

        /**
         * Returns a non-localized string naming the specified action of the
         * object. This name is generally not descriptive of the end result
         * of the action, but instead names the 'interaction type' which the
         * object supports. By convention, the above strings should be used to
         * represent the actions which correspond to the common point-and-click
         * interaction techniques of the same name: i.e.
         * "click", "press", "release", "drag", "drop", "popup", etc.
         * The "popup" action should be used to pop up a context menu for the
         * object, if one exists.
         * 
         * For technical reasons, some toolkits cannot guarantee that the
         * reported action is actually 'bound' to a nontrivial user event;
         * i.e. the result of some actions via `atk_action_do_action()` may be
         * NIL.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_name(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         * @virtual
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.vfunc_get_name
        vfunc_get_name(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Sets a description of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @param desc the description to be assigned to this action
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_description(i: number, desc: string): boolean;

        /**
         * @param args 
         * @virtual
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.vfunc_set_description
        vfunc_set_description(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Checks whether the specified point is within the extent of the `component`.
         * 
         * Toolkit implementor note: ATK provides a default implementation for
         * this virtual method. In general there are little reason to
         * re-implement it.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @returns `true` or `false` indicating whether the specified point is within the extent of the `component` or not
         */
        contains(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the alpha value (i.e. the opacity) for this
         * `component`, on a scale from 0 (fully transparent) to 1.0
         * (fully opaque).
         * @returns An alpha value from 0 to 1.0, inclusive.
         */
        get_alpha(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the rectangle which gives the extent of the `component`.
         * 
         * If the extent can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), all of x, y, width, height are set to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         */
        get_extents(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the layer of the component.
         * @returns an {@link Atk.Layer} which is the layer of the component
         */
        get_layer(): Atk.Layer;

        /**
         * Gets the zorder of the component. The value G_MININT will be returned
         * if the layer of the component is not ATK_LAYER_MDI or ATK_LAYER_WINDOW.
         * @returns a gint which is the zorder of the component, i.e. the depth at which the component is shown in relation to other components in the same container.
         */
        get_mdi_zorder(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the position of `component` in the form of
         * a point specifying `component`'s top-left corner.
         * 
         * If the position can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), x and y are set to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         */
        get_position(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the size of the `component` in terms of width and height.
         * 
         * If the size can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), width and height are set to -1.
         */
        get_size(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Grabs focus for this `component`.
         * @returns `true` if successful, `false` otherwise.
         */
        grab_focus(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets a reference to the accessible child, if one exists, at the
         * coordinate point specified by `x` and `y`.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @returns a reference to the accessible child, if one exists
         */
        ref_accessible_at_point(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): Atk.Object | null;

        /**
         * Remove the handler specified by `handler_id` from the list of
         * functions to be executed when this object receives focus events
         * (in or out).
         * @param handler_id the handler id of the focus handler to be removed from `component`
         */
        remove_focus_handler(handler_id: number): void;

        /**
         * Makes `component` visible on the screen by scrolling all necessary parents.
         * 
         * Contrary to atk_component_set_position, this does not actually move
         * `component` in its parent, this only makes the parents scroll so that the
         * object shows up on the screen, given its current position within the parents.
         * @param type specify where the object should be made visible.
         * @returns whether scrolling was successful.
         */
        scroll_to(type: Atk.ScrollType): boolean;

        /**
         * Move the top-left of `component` to a given position of the screen by
         * scrolling all necessary parents.
         * @param coords specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or to the parent object.
         * @param x x-position where to scroll to
         * @param y y-position where to scroll to
         * @returns whether scrolling was successful.
         */
        scroll_to_point(coords: Atk.CoordType, x: number, y: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the extents of `component`.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param width width to set for `component`
         * @param height height to set for `component`
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @returns `true` or `false` whether the extents were set or not
         */
        set_extents(x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the position of `component`.
         * 
         * Contrary to atk_component_scroll_to, this does not trigger any scrolling,
         * this just moves `component` in its parent.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the component's top level window
         * @returns `true` or `false` whether or not the position was set or not
         */
        set_position(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Set the size of the `component` in terms of width and height.
         * @param width width to set for `component`
         * @param height height to set for `component`
         * @returns `true` or `false` whether the size was set or not
         */
        set_size(width: number, height: number): boolean;

        /**
         * @param bounds 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_bounds_changed(bounds: Atk.Rectangle): void;

        /**
         * Checks whether the specified point is within the extent of the `component`.
         * 
         * Toolkit implementor note: ATK provides a default implementation for
         * this virtual method. In general there are little reason to
         * re-implement it.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_contains(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the alpha value (i.e. the opacity) for this
         * `component`, on a scale from 0 (fully transparent) to 1.0
         * (fully opaque).
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_alpha(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the rectangle which gives the extent of the `component`.
         * 
         * If the extent can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), all of x, y, width, height are set to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_extents(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the layer of the component.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_layer(): Atk.Layer;

        /**
         * Gets the zorder of the component. The value G_MININT will be returned
         * if the layer of the component is not ATK_LAYER_MDI or ATK_LAYER_WINDOW.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_mdi_zorder(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the position of `component` in the form of
         * a point specifying `component`'s top-left corner.
         * 
         * If the position can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), x and y are set to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_position(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the size of the `component` in terms of width and height.
         * 
         * If the size can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), width and height are set to -1.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_size(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Grabs focus for this `component`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_grab_focus(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets a reference to the accessible child, if one exists, at the
         * coordinate point specified by `x` and `y`.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_ref_accessible_at_point(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): Atk.Object | null;

        /**
         * Remove the handler specified by `handler_id` from the list of
         * functions to be executed when this object receives focus events
         * (in or out).
         * @param handler_id the handler id of the focus handler to be removed from `component`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_remove_focus_handler(handler_id: number): void;

        /**
         * Makes `component` visible on the screen by scrolling all necessary parents.
         * 
         * Contrary to atk_component_set_position, this does not actually move
         * `component` in its parent, this only makes the parents scroll so that the
         * object shows up on the screen, given its current position within the parents.
         * @param type specify where the object should be made visible.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_scroll_to(type: Atk.ScrollType): boolean;

        /**
         * Move the top-left of `component` to a given position of the screen by
         * scrolling all necessary parents.
         * @param coords specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or to the parent object.
         * @param x x-position where to scroll to
         * @param y y-position where to scroll to
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_scroll_to_point(coords: Atk.CoordType, x: number, y: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the extents of `component`.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param width width to set for `component`
         * @param height height to set for `component`
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_extents(x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the position of `component`.
         * 
         * Contrary to atk_component_scroll_to, this does not trigger any scrolling,
         * this just moves `component` in its parent.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the component's top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_position(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Set the size of the `component` in terms of width and height.
         * @param width width to set for `component`
         * @param height height to set for `component`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_size(width: number, height: number): boolean;
    }


    namespace EventBox {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Bin.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::above-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible-window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Bin.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {
            above_child: boolean;
            aboveChild: boolean;
            visible_window: boolean;
            visibleWindow: boolean;
        }
    }

    /**
     * The {@link Gtk.EventBox} widget is a subclass of {@link Gtk.Bin} which also has its
     * own window. It is useful since it allows you to catch events for widgets
     * which do not have their own window.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class EventBox extends Bin implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<EventBox>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get above_child(): boolean;
        set above_child(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get aboveChild(): boolean;
        set aboveChild(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default true
         */
        get visible_window(): boolean;
        set visible_window(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default true
         */
        get visibleWindow(): boolean;
        set visibleWindow(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: EventBox.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        bin: Bin;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<EventBox.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): EventBox;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof EventBox.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, EventBox.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof EventBox.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, EventBox.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof EventBox.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<EventBox.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Returns whether the event box window is above or below the
         * windows of its child. See `gtk_event_box_set_above_child()`
         * for details.
         * @returns `true` if the event box window is above the     window of its child
         */
        get_above_child(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns whether the event box has a visible window.
         * See `gtk_event_box_set_visible_window()` for details.
         * @returns `true` if the event box window is visible
         */
        get_visible_window(): boolean;

        /**
         * Set whether the event box window is positioned above the windows
         * of its child, as opposed to below it. If the window is above, all
         * events inside the event box will go to the event box. If the window
         * is below, events in windows of child widgets will first got to that
         * widget, and then to its parents.
         * 
         * The default is to keep the window below the child.
         * @param above_child `true` if the event box window is above its child
         */
        set_above_child(above_child: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Set whether the event box uses a visible or invisible child
         * window. The default is to use visible windows.
         * 
         * In an invisible window event box, the window that the
         * event box creates is a {@link Gdk.WindowWindowClass.INPUT_ONLY} window, which
         * means that it is invisible and only serves to receive
         * events.
         * 
         * A visible window event box creates a visible ({@link Gdk.WindowWindowClass.INPUT_OUTPUT})
         * window that acts as the parent window for all the widgets
         * contained in the event box.
         * 
         * You should generally make your event box invisible if
         * you just want to trap events. Creating a visible window
         * may cause artifacts that are visible to the user, especially
         * if the user is using a theme with gradients or pixmaps.
         * 
         * The main reason to create a non input-only event box is if
         * you want to set the background to a different color or
         * draw on it.
         * 
         * There is one unexpected issue for an invisible event box that has its
         * window below the child. (See `gtk_event_box_set_above_child()`.)
         * Since the input-only window is not an ancestor window of any windows
         * that descendent widgets of the event box create, events on these
         * windows aren’t propagated up by the windowing system, but only by GTK+.
         * The practical effect of this is if an event isn’t in the event
         * mask for the descendant window (see `gtk_widget_add_events()`),
         * it won’t be received by the event box.
         * 
         * This problem doesn’t occur for visible event boxes, because in
         * that case, the event box window is actually the ancestor of the
         * descendant windows, not just at the same place on the screen.
         * @param visible_window `true` to make the event box have a visible window
         */
        set_visible_window(visible_window: boolean): void;
    }


    namespace EventController {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends GObject.Object.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::propagation-phase": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.Object.ConstructorProps {
            propagation_phase: PropagationPhase;
            propagationPhase: PropagationPhase;
            widget: Widget;
        }
    }

    /**
     * {@link Gtk.EventController} is a base, low-level implementation for event
     * controllers. Those react to a series of `GdkEvents`, and possibly trigger
     * actions as a consequence of those.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    abstract class EventController extends GObject.Object {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<EventController>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * The propagation phase at which this controller will handle events.
         * @since 3.14
         * @default Gtk.PropagationPhase.BUBBLE
         */
        get propagation_phase(): PropagationPhase;
        set propagation_phase(val: PropagationPhase);

        /**
         * The propagation phase at which this controller will handle events.
         * @since 3.14
         * @default Gtk.PropagationPhase.BUBBLE
         */
        get propagationPhase(): PropagationPhase;
        set propagationPhase(val: PropagationPhase);

        /**
         * The widget receiving the `GdkEvents` that the controller will handle.
         * @since 3.14
         * @construct-only
         */
        get widget(): Widget;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: EventController.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<EventController.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof EventController.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, EventController.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof EventController.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, EventController.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof EventController.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<EventController.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Gets the propagation phase at which `controller` handles events.
         * @returns the propagation phase
         */
        get_propagation_phase(): PropagationPhase;

        /**
         * Returns the {@link Gtk.Widget} this controller relates to.
         * @returns a {@link Gtk.Widget}
         */
        get_widget(): Widget;

        /**
         * Feeds an events into `controller`, so it can be interpreted
         * and the controller actions triggered.
         * @param event a {@link Gdk.Event}
         * @returns `true` if the event was potentially useful to trigger the          controller action
         */
        handle_event(event: Gdk.Event): boolean;

        /**
         * Resets the `controller` to a clean state. Every interaction
         * the controller did through {@link Gtk.EventController.SignalSignatures.handle_event | Gtk.EventController::handle-event}
         * will be dropped at this point.
         */
        reset(): void;

        /**
         * Sets the propagation phase at which a controller handles events.
         * 
         * If `phase` is {@link Gtk.PropagationPhase.NONE}, no automatic event handling will be
         * performed, but other additional gesture maintenance will. In that phase,
         * the events can be managed by calling `gtk_event_controller_handle_event()`.
         * @param phase a propagation phase
         */
        set_propagation_phase(phase: PropagationPhase): void;
    }


    namespace EventControllerKey {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends EventController.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "focus-in": () => void;
            /**
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "focus-out": () => void;
            /**
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "im-update": () => void;
            /**
             * This signal is emitted whenever a key is pressed.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.24
             * @run-last
             */
            "key-pressed": (arg0: number, arg1: number, arg2: Gdk.ModifierType) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * This signal is emitted whenever a key is released.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.24
             * @run-last
             */
            "key-released": (arg0: number, arg1: number, arg2: Gdk.ModifierType) => void;
            /**
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            modifiers: (arg0: Gdk.ModifierType) => boolean | void;
            "notify::propagation-phase": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends EventController.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * {@link Gtk.EventControllerKey} is an event controller meant for situations
     * where you need access to key events.
     * 
     * This object was added in 3.24.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class EventControllerKey extends EventController {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<EventControllerKey>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: EventControllerKey.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<EventControllerKey.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](widget: Widget): EventControllerKey;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof EventControllerKey.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, EventControllerKey.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof EventControllerKey.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, EventControllerKey.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof EventControllerKey.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<EventControllerKey.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * @param widget 
         */
        forward(widget: Widget): boolean;

        get_group(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the IM context of a key controller.
         * @returns the IM context
         */
        get_im_context(): IMContext;

        /**
         * @param im_context 
         */
        set_im_context(im_context: IMContext): void;
    }


    namespace EventControllerMotion {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends EventController.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * Signals that the pointer has entered the widget.
             * @signal
             * @run-first
             */
            enter: (arg0: number, arg1: number) => void;
            /**
             * Signals that pointer has left the widget.
             * @signal
             * @run-first
             */
            leave: () => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when the pointer moves inside the widget.
             * @signal
             * @run-first
             */
            motion: (arg0: number, arg1: number) => void;
            "notify::propagation-phase": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends EventController.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * {@link Gtk.EventControllerMotion} is an event controller meant for situations
     * where you need to track the position of the pointer.
     * 
     * This object was added in 3.24.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class EventControllerMotion extends EventController {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<EventControllerMotion>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: EventControllerMotion.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<EventControllerMotion.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](widget: Widget): EventControllerMotion;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof EventControllerMotion.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, EventControllerMotion.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof EventControllerMotion.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, EventControllerMotion.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof EventControllerMotion.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<EventControllerMotion.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;
    }


    namespace EventControllerScroll {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends EventController.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * Emitted after scroll is finished if the #GTK_EVENT_CONTROLLER_SCROLL_KINETIC
             * flag is set. `vel_x` and `vel_y` express the initial velocity that was
             * imprinted by the scroll events. `vel_x` and `vel_y` are expressed in
             * pixels/ms.
             * @signal
             * @run-first
             */
            decelerate: (arg0: number, arg1: number) => void;
            /**
             * Signals that the widget should scroll by the
             * amount specified by `dx` and `dy`.
             * @signal
             * @run-first
             */
            scroll: (arg0: number, arg1: number) => void;
            /**
             * Signals that a new scrolling operation has begun. It will
             * only be emitted on devices capable of it.
             * @signal
             * @run-first
             */
            "scroll-begin": () => void;
            /**
             * Signals that a new scrolling operation has finished. It will
             * only be emitted on devices capable of it.
             * @signal
             * @run-first
             */
            "scroll-end": () => void;
            "notify::flags": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::propagation-phase": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends EventController.ConstructorProps {
            flags: EventControllerScrollFlags;
        }
    }

    /**
     * {@link Gtk.EventControllerScroll} is an event controller meant to handle
     * scroll events from mice and touchpads. It is capable of handling
     * both discrete and continuous scroll events, abstracting them both
     * on the {@link Gtk.EventControllerScroll.SignalSignatures.scroll | Gtk.EventControllerScroll::scroll} signal (deltas in the
     * discrete case are multiples of 1).
     * 
     * In the case of continuous scroll events, {@link Gtk.EventControllerScroll}
     * encloses all {@link Gtk.EventControllerScroll.SignalSignatures.scroll | Gtk.EventControllerScroll::scroll} events between two
     * {@link Gtk.EventControllerScroll.SignalSignatures.scroll_begin | Gtk.EventControllerScroll::scroll-begin} and {@link Gtk.EventControllerScroll.SignalSignatures.scroll_end | Gtk.EventControllerScroll::scroll-end}
     * signals.
     * 
     * The behavior of the event controller can be modified by the
     * flags given at creation time, or modified at a later point through
     * `gtk_event_controller_scroll_set_flags()` (e.g. because the scrolling
     * conditions of the widget changed).
     * 
     * The controller can be set up to emit motion for either/both vertical
     * and horizontal scroll events through #GTK_EVENT_CONTROLLER_SCROLL_VERTICAL,
     * #GTK_EVENT_CONTROLLER_SCROLL_HORIZONTAL and #GTK_EVENT_CONTROLLER_SCROLL_BOTH.
     * If any axis is disabled, the respective {@link Gtk.EventControllerScroll.SignalSignatures.scroll | Gtk.EventControllerScroll::scroll}
     * delta will be 0. Vertical scroll events will be translated to horizontal
     * motion for the devices incapable of horizontal scrolling.
     * 
     * The event controller can also be forced to emit discrete events on all devices
     * through #GTK_EVENT_CONTROLLER_SCROLL_DISCRETE. This can be used to implement
     * discrete actions triggered through scroll events (e.g. switching across
     * combobox options).
     * 
     * The #GTK_EVENT_CONTROLLER_SCROLL_KINETIC flag toggles the emission of the
     * {@link Gtk.EventControllerScroll.SignalSignatures.decelerate | Gtk.EventControllerScroll::decelerate} signal, emitted at the end of scrolling
     * with two X/Y velocity arguments that are consistent with the motion that
     * was received.
     * 
     * This object was added in 3.24.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class EventControllerScroll extends EventController {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<EventControllerScroll>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * The flags affecting event controller behavior
         * @since 3.24
         * @default Gtk.EventControllerScrollFlags.NONE
         */
        get flags(): EventControllerScrollFlags;
        set flags(val: EventControllerScrollFlags);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: EventControllerScroll.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<EventControllerScroll.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](widget: Widget, flags: EventControllerScrollFlags): EventControllerScroll;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof EventControllerScroll.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, EventControllerScroll.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof EventControllerScroll.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, EventControllerScroll.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof EventControllerScroll.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<EventControllerScroll.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Gets the flags conditioning the scroll controller behavior.
         * @returns the controller flags.
         */
        get_flags(): EventControllerScrollFlags;

        /**
         * Sets the flags conditioning scroll controller behavior.
         * @param flags behavior flags
         */
        set_flags(flags: EventControllerScrollFlags): void;
    }


    namespace Expander {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Bin.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            activate: () => void;
            "notify::expanded": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::label": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::label-fill": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::label-widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-toplevel": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::spacing": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-underline": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Bin.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {
            expanded: boolean;
            label: string | null;
            label_fill: boolean;
            labelFill: boolean;
            label_widget: Widget | null;
            labelWidget: Widget | null;
            resize_toplevel: boolean;
            resizeToplevel: boolean;
            spacing: number;
            use_markup: boolean;
            useMarkup: boolean;
            use_underline: boolean;
            useUnderline: boolean;
        }
    }

    /**
     * A {@link Gtk.Expander} allows the user to hide or show its child by clicking
     * on an expander triangle similar to the triangles used in a {@link Gtk.TreeView}.
     * 
     * Normally you use an expander as you would use any other descendant
     * of {@link Gtk.Bin}; you create the child widget and use `gtk_container_add()`
     * to add it to the expander. When the expander is toggled, it will take
     * care of showing and hiding the child automatically.
     * 
     * # Special Usage
     * 
     * There are situations in which you may prefer to show and hide the
     * expanded widget yourself, such as when you want to actually create
     * the widget at expansion time. In this case, create a {@link Gtk.Expander}
     * but do not add a child to it. The expander widget has an
     * {@link Gtk.Expander.expanded} property which can be used to monitor
     * its expansion state. You should watch this property with a signal
     * connection as follows:
     * 
     * 
     * ```c
     * static void
     * expander_callback (GObject    *object,
     *                    GParamSpec *param_spec,
     *                    gpointer    user_data)
     * {
     *   GtkExpander *expander;
     * 
     *   expander = GTK_EXPANDER (object);
     * 
     *   if (gtk_expander_get_expanded (expander))
     *     {
     *       // Show or create widgets
     *     }
     *   else
     *     {
     *       // Hide or destroy widgets
     *     }
     * }
     * 
     * static void
     * create_expander (void)
     * {
     *   GtkWidget *expander = gtk_expander_new_with_mnemonic ("_More Options");
     *   g_signal_connect (expander, "notify::expanded",
     *                     G_CALLBACK (expander_callback), NULL);
     * 
     *   // ...
     * }
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * # GtkExpander as GtkBuildable
     * 
     * The GtkExpander implementation of the GtkBuildable interface supports
     * placing a child in the label position by specifying “label” as the
     * “type” attribute of a `<child>` element. A normal content child can be
     * specified without specifying a `<child>` type attribute.
     * 
     * An example of a UI definition fragment with GtkExpander:
     * 
     * 
     * ```xml
     * <object class="GtkExpander">
     *   <child type="label">
     *     <object class="GtkLabel" id="expander-label"/>
     *   </child>
     *   <child>
     *     <object class="GtkEntry" id="expander-content"/>
     *   </child>
     * </object>
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * # CSS nodes
     * 
     * 
     * ```
     * expander
     * ├── title
     * │   ├── arrow
     * │   ╰── <label widget>
     * ╰── <child>
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * GtkExpander has three CSS nodes, the main node with the name expander,
     * a subnode with name title and node below it with name arrow. The arrow of an
     * expander that is showing its child gets the :checked pseudoclass added to it.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class Expander extends Bin implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<Expander>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get expanded(): boolean;
        set expanded(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default null
         */
        get label(): string | null;
        set label(val: string | null);

        /**
         * Whether the label widget should fill all available horizontal space.
         * 
         * Note that this property is ignored since 3.20.
         * @default false
         */
        get label_fill(): boolean;
        set label_fill(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether the label widget should fill all available horizontal space.
         * 
         * Note that this property is ignored since 3.20.
         * @default false
         */
        get labelFill(): boolean;
        set labelFill(val: boolean);

        get label_widget(): Widget | null;
        set label_widget(val: Widget | null);

        get labelWidget(): Widget | null;
        set labelWidget(val: Widget | null);

        /**
         * When this property is `true`, the expander will resize the toplevel
         * widget containing the expander upon expanding and collapsing.
         * @since 3.2
         * @default false
         */
        get resize_toplevel(): boolean;
        set resize_toplevel(val: boolean);

        /**
         * When this property is `true`, the expander will resize the toplevel
         * widget containing the expander upon expanding and collapsing.
         * @since 3.2
         * @default false
         */
        get resizeToplevel(): boolean;
        set resizeToplevel(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Space to put between the label and the child when the
         * expander is expanded.
         * @deprecated since 3.20: This property is deprecated and ignored.     Use margins on the child instead.
         * @default 0
         */
        get spacing(): number;
        set spacing(val: number);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get use_markup(): boolean;
        set use_markup(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get useMarkup(): boolean;
        set useMarkup(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get use_underline(): boolean;
        set use_underline(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get useUnderline(): boolean;
        set useUnderline(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: Expander.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        bin: Bin;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<Expander.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](label: string | null): Expander;

        static new_with_mnemonic(label: string | null): Expander;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof Expander.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Expander.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof Expander.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Expander.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof Expander.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<Expander.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * Keybinding signal is emitted when the user hits the Enter key.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_activate(): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Queries a {@link Gtk.Expander} and returns its current state. Returns `true`
         * if the child widget is revealed.
         * 
         * See `gtk_expander_set_expanded()`.
         * @returns the current state of the expander
         */
        get_expanded(): boolean;

        /**
         * Fetches the text from a label widget including any embedded
         * underlines indicating mnemonics and Pango markup, as set by
         * `gtk_expander_set_label()`. If the label text has not been set the
         * return value will be `null`. This will be the case if you create an
         * empty button with `gtk_button_new()` to use as a container.
         * 
         * Note that this function behaved differently in versions prior to
         * 2.14 and used to return the label text stripped of embedded
         * underlines indicating mnemonics and Pango markup. This problem can
         * be avoided by fetching the label text directly from the label
         * widget.
         * @returns The text of the label widget. This string is owned     by the widget and must not be modified or freed.
         */
        get_label(): string | null;

        /**
         * Returns whether the label widget will fill all available
         * horizontal space allocated to `expander`.
         * @returns `true` if the label widget will fill all     available horizontal space
         */
        get_label_fill(): boolean;

        /**
         * Retrieves the label widget for the frame. See
         * `gtk_expander_set_label_widget()`.
         * @returns the label widget,     or `null` if there is none
         */
        get_label_widget(): Widget | null;

        /**
         * Returns whether the expander will resize the toplevel widget
         * containing the expander upon resizing and collpasing.
         * @returns the “resize toplevel” setting.
         */
        get_resize_toplevel(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the value set by `gtk_expander_set_spacing()`.
         * @returns spacing between the expander and child
         */
        get_spacing(): number;

        /**
         * Returns whether the label’s text is interpreted as marked up with
         * the [Pango text markup language][PangoMarkupFormat].
         * See `gtk_expander_set_use_markup()`.
         * @returns `true` if the label’s text will be parsed for markup
         */
        get_use_markup(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns whether an embedded underline in the expander label
         * indicates a mnemonic. See `gtk_expander_set_use_underline()`.
         * @returns `true` if an embedded underline in the expander     label indicates the mnemonic accelerator keys
         */
        get_use_underline(): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the state of the expander. Set to `true`, if you want
         * the child widget to be revealed, and `false` if you want the
         * child widget to be hidden.
         * @param expanded whether the child widget is revealed
         */
        set_expanded(expanded: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the text of the label of the expander to `label`.
         * 
         * This will also clear any previously set labels.
         * @param label a string
         */
        set_label(label: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the label widget should fill all available
         * horizontal space allocated to `expander`.
         * 
         * Note that this function has no effect since 3.20.
         * @param label_fill `true` if the label should should fill     all available horizontal space
         */
        set_label_fill(label_fill: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Set the label widget for the expander. This is the widget
         * that will appear embedded alongside the expander arrow.
         * @param label_widget the new label widget
         */
        set_label_widget(label_widget: Widget | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the expander will resize the toplevel widget
         * containing the expander upon resizing and collpasing.
         * @param resize_toplevel whether to resize the toplevel
         */
        set_resize_toplevel(resize_toplevel: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the spacing field of `expander`, which is the number of
         * pixels to place between expander and the child.
         * @param spacing distance between the expander and child in pixels
         */
        set_spacing(spacing: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the text of the label contains markup in
         * [Pango’s text markup language][PangoMarkupFormat].
         * See `gtk_label_set_markup()`.
         * @param use_markup `true` if the label’s text should be parsed for markup
         */
        set_use_markup(use_markup: boolean): void;

        /**
         * If true, an underline in the text of the expander label indicates
         * the next character should be used for the mnemonic accelerator key.
         * @param use_underline `true` if underlines in the text indicate mnemonics
         */
        set_use_underline(use_underline: boolean): void;
    }


    namespace ExpanderAccessible {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends ContainerAccessible.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-layer": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-mdi-zorder": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-help-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-hypertext-nlinks": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption-object": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-summary": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends ContainerAccessible.ConstructorProps, Atk.Action.ConstructorProps, Atk.Component.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class ExpanderAccessible extends ContainerAccessible implements Atk.Action, Atk.Component {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ExpanderAccessible>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: ExpanderAccessible.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<ExpanderAccessible.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof ExpanderAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ExpanderAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof ExpanderAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ExpanderAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof ExpanderAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<ExpanderAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        /**
         * Perform the specified action on the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns `true` if success, `false` otherwise
         */
        do_action(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns a description of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns a description string, or `null` if `action` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_description(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.get_description
        get_description(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Gets the keybinding which can be used to activate this action, if one
         * exists. The string returned should contain localized, human-readable,
         * key sequences as they would appear when displayed on screen. It must
         * be in the format "mnemonic;sequence;shortcut".
         * 
         * - The mnemonic key activates the object if it is presently enabled onscreen.
         *   This typically corresponds to the underlined letter within the widget.
         *   Example: "n" in a traditional "New..." menu item or the "a" in "Apply" for
         *   a button.
         * - The sequence is the full list of keys which invoke the action even if the
         *   relevant element is not currently shown on screen. For instance, for a menu
         *   item the sequence is the keybindings used to open the parent menus before
         *   invoking. The sequence string is colon-delimited. Example: "Alt+F:N" in a
         *   traditional "New..." menu item.
         * - The shortcut, if it exists, will invoke the same action without showing
         *   the component or its enclosing menus or dialogs. Example: "Ctrl+N" in a
         *   traditional "New..." menu item.
         * 
         * Example: For a traditional "New..." menu item, the expected return value
         * would be: "N;Alt+F:N;Ctrl+N" for the English locale and "N;Alt+D:N;Strg+N"
         * for the German locale. If, hypothetically, this menu item lacked a mnemonic,
         * it would be represented by ";;Ctrl+N" and ";;Strg+N" respectively.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns the keybinding which can be used to activate this action, or `null` if there is no keybinding for this action.
         */
        get_keybinding(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Returns the localized name of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns a name string, or `null` if `action` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_localized_name(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the number of accessible actions available on the object.
         * If there are more than one, the first one is considered the
         * "default" action of the object.
         * @returns a the number of actions, or 0 if `action` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_n_actions(): number;

        /**
         * Returns a non-localized string naming the specified action of the
         * object. This name is generally not descriptive of the end result
         * of the action, but instead names the 'interaction type' which the
         * object supports. By convention, the above strings should be used to
         * represent the actions which correspond to the common point-and-click
         * interaction techniques of the same name: i.e.
         * "click", "press", "release", "drag", "drop", "popup", etc.
         * The "popup" action should be used to pop up a context menu for the
         * object, if one exists.
         * 
         * For technical reasons, some toolkits cannot guarantee that the
         * reported action is actually 'bound' to a nontrivial user event;
         * i.e. the result of some actions via `atk_action_do_action()` may be
         * NIL.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns a name string, or `null` if `action` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_name(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.get_name
        get_name(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Sets a description of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @param desc the description to be assigned to this action
         * @returns a gboolean representing if the description was successfully set;
         */
        set_description(i: number, desc: string): boolean;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.set_description
        set_description(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Perform the specified action on the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_do_action(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns a description of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_description(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         * @virtual
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.vfunc_get_description
        vfunc_get_description(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Gets the keybinding which can be used to activate this action, if one
         * exists. The string returned should contain localized, human-readable,
         * key sequences as they would appear when displayed on screen. It must
         * be in the format "mnemonic;sequence;shortcut".
         * 
         * - The mnemonic key activates the object if it is presently enabled onscreen.
         *   This typically corresponds to the underlined letter within the widget.
         *   Example: "n" in a traditional "New..." menu item or the "a" in "Apply" for
         *   a button.
         * - The sequence is the full list of keys which invoke the action even if the
         *   relevant element is not currently shown on screen. For instance, for a menu
         *   item the sequence is the keybindings used to open the parent menus before
         *   invoking. The sequence string is colon-delimited. Example: "Alt+F:N" in a
         *   traditional "New..." menu item.
         * - The shortcut, if it exists, will invoke the same action without showing
         *   the component or its enclosing menus or dialogs. Example: "Ctrl+N" in a
         *   traditional "New..." menu item.
         * 
         * Example: For a traditional "New..." menu item, the expected return value
         * would be: "N;Alt+F:N;Ctrl+N" for the English locale and "N;Alt+D:N;Strg+N"
         * for the German locale. If, hypothetically, this menu item lacked a mnemonic,
         * it would be represented by ";;Ctrl+N" and ";;Strg+N" respectively.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_keybinding(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Returns the localized name of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_localized_name(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the number of accessible actions available on the object.
         * If there are more than one, the first one is considered the
         * "default" action of the object.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_n_actions(): number;

        /**
         * Returns a non-localized string naming the specified action of the
         * object. This name is generally not descriptive of the end result
         * of the action, but instead names the 'interaction type' which the
         * object supports. By convention, the above strings should be used to
         * represent the actions which correspond to the common point-and-click
         * interaction techniques of the same name: i.e.
         * "click", "press", "release", "drag", "drop", "popup", etc.
         * The "popup" action should be used to pop up a context menu for the
         * object, if one exists.
         * 
         * For technical reasons, some toolkits cannot guarantee that the
         * reported action is actually 'bound' to a nontrivial user event;
         * i.e. the result of some actions via `atk_action_do_action()` may be
         * NIL.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_name(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         * @virtual
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.vfunc_get_name
        vfunc_get_name(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Sets a description of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @param desc the description to be assigned to this action
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_description(i: number, desc: string): boolean;

        /**
         * @param args 
         * @virtual
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.vfunc_set_description
        vfunc_set_description(...args: never[]): any;
    }


    namespace FileChooserButton {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Box.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * The ::file-set signal is emitted when the user selects a file.
             * 
             * Note that this signal is only emitted when the user
             * changes the file.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.12
             * @run-first
             */
            "file-set": () => void;
            "notify::dialog": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::title": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-chars": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::baseline-position": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::homogeneous": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::spacing": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::action": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::create-folders": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::do-overwrite-confirmation": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::extra-widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::filter": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::local-only": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::preview-widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::preview-widget-active": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::select-multiple": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::show-hidden": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-preview-label": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::orientation": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Box.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, FileChooser.ConstructorProps, Orientable.ConstructorProps {
            dialog: FileChooser;
            title: string;
            width_chars: number;
            widthChars: number;
        }
    }

    /**
     * The {@link Gtk.FileChooserButton} is a widget that lets the user select a
     * file.  It implements the {@link Gtk.FileChooser} interface.  Visually, it is a
     * file name with a button to bring up a {@link Gtk.FileChooserDialog}.
     * The user can then use that dialog to change the file associated with
     * that button.  This widget does not support setting the
     * {@link Gtk.FileChooser.select_multiple} property to `true`.
     * 
     * ## Create a button to let the user select a file in /etc
     * 
     * 
     * ```c
     * {
     *   GtkWidget *button;
     * 
     *   button = gtk_file_chooser_button_new (_("Select a file"),
     *                                         GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_OPEN);
     *   gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder (GTK_FILE_CHOOSER (button),
     *                                        "/etc");
     * }
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * The {@link Gtk.FileChooserButton} supports the `GtkFileChooserActions`
     * {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.OPEN} and {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.SELECT_FOLDER}.
     * 
     * > The {@link Gtk.FileChooserButton} will ellipsize the label, and will thus
     * > request little horizontal space.  To give the button more space,
     * > you should call `gtk_widget_get_preferred_size()`,
     * > `gtk_file_chooser_button_set_width_chars()`, or pack the button in
     * > such a way that other interface elements give space to the
     * > widget.
     * 
     * # CSS nodes
     * 
     * GtkFileChooserButton has a CSS node with name “filechooserbutton”, containing
     * a subnode for the internal button with name “button” and style class “.file”.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class FileChooserButton extends Box implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable, FileChooser, Orientable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<FileChooserButton>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * Instance of the {@link Gtk.FileChooserDialog} associated with the button.
         * @since 2.6
         * @construct-only
         */
        set dialog(val: FileChooser);

        /**
         * Title to put on the {@link Gtk.FileChooserDialog} associated with the button.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default Select a File
         */
        get title(): string;
        set title(val: string);

        /**
         * The width of the entry and label inside the button, in characters.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default -1
         */
        get width_chars(): number;
        set width_chars(val: number);

        /**
         * The width of the entry and label inside the button, in characters.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default -1
         */
        get widthChars(): number;
        set widthChars(val: number);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: FileChooserButton.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<FileChooserButton.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](title: string, action: FileChooserAction): FileChooserButton;

        // Conflicted with Gtk.Box.new
        static ["new"](...args: never[]): any;

        static new_with_dialog(dialog: Dialog): FileChooserButton;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof FileChooserButton.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, FileChooserButton.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof FileChooserButton.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, FileChooserButton.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof FileChooserButton.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<FileChooserButton.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * Signal emitted when the user selects a file.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_file_set(): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Returns whether the button grabs focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
         * See `gtk_file_chooser_button_set_focus_on_click()`.
         * @returns `true` if the button grabs focus when it is clicked with               the mouse.
         */
        get_focus_on_click(): boolean;

        /**
         * Retrieves the title of the browse dialog used by `button`. The returned value
         * should not be modified or freed.
         * @returns a pointer to the browse dialog’s title.
         */
        get_title(): string;

        /**
         * Retrieves the width in characters of the `button` widget’s entry and/or label.
         * @returns an integer width (in characters) that the button will use to size itself.
         */
        get_width_chars(): number;

        /**
         * Sets whether the button will grab focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
         * Making mouse clicks not grab focus is useful in places like toolbars where
         * you don’t want the keyboard focus removed from the main area of the
         * application.
         * @param focus_on_click whether the button grabs focus when clicked with the mouse
         */
        set_focus_on_click(focus_on_click: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Modifies the `title` of the browse dialog used by `button`.
         * @param title the new browse dialog title.
         */
        set_title(title: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets the width (in characters) that `button` will use to `n_chars`.
         * @param n_chars the new width, in characters.
         */
        set_width_chars(n_chars: number): void;

        /**
         * @default Gtk.FileChooserAction.OPEN
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser
         */
        get action(): FileChooserAction;
        set action(val: FileChooserAction);

        /**
         * Whether a file chooser not in {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.OPEN} mode
         * will offer the user to create new folders.
         * @since 2.18
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser
         */
        get create_folders(): boolean;
        set create_folders(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether a file chooser not in {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.OPEN} mode
         * will offer the user to create new folders.
         * @since 2.18
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser
         */
        get createFolders(): boolean;
        set createFolders(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether a file chooser in {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.SAVE} mode
         * will present an overwrite confirmation dialog if the user
         * selects a file name that already exists.
         * @since 2.8
         * @default false
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser
         */
        get do_overwrite_confirmation(): boolean;
        set do_overwrite_confirmation(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether a file chooser in {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.SAVE} mode
         * will present an overwrite confirmation dialog if the user
         * selects a file name that already exists.
         * @since 2.8
         * @default false
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser
         */
        get doOverwriteConfirmation(): boolean;
        set doOverwriteConfirmation(val: boolean);

        /** @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser */
        get extra_widget(): Widget | null;
        set extra_widget(val: Widget | null);

        /** @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser */
        get extraWidget(): Widget | null;
        set extraWidget(val: Widget | null);

        /** @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser */
        get filter(): FileFilter | null;
        set filter(val: FileFilter | null);

        /**
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser
         */
        get local_only(): boolean;
        set local_only(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser
         */
        get localOnly(): boolean;
        set localOnly(val: boolean);

        /** @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser */
        get preview_widget(): Widget | null;
        set preview_widget(val: Widget | null);

        /** @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser */
        get previewWidget(): Widget | null;
        set previewWidget(val: Widget | null);

        /**
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser
         */
        get preview_widget_active(): boolean;
        set preview_widget_active(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser
         */
        get previewWidgetActive(): boolean;
        set previewWidgetActive(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser
         */
        get select_multiple(): boolean;
        set select_multiple(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser
         */
        get selectMultiple(): boolean;
        set selectMultiple(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser
         */
        get show_hidden(): boolean;
        set show_hidden(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser
         */
        get showHidden(): boolean;
        set showHidden(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser
         */
        get use_preview_label(): boolean;
        set use_preview_label(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser
         */
        get usePreviewLabel(): boolean;
        set usePreviewLabel(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The orientation of the orientable.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default Gtk.Orientation.HORIZONTAL
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Orientable
         */
        get orientation(): Orientation;
        set orientation(val: Orientation);

        /**
         * Adds a 'choice' to the file chooser. This is typically implemented
         * as a combobox or, for boolean choices, as a checkbutton. You can select
         * a value using `gtk_file_chooser_set_choice()` before the dialog is shown,
         * and you can obtain the user-selected value in the ::response signal handler
         * using `gtk_file_chooser_get_choice()`.
         * 
         * Compare `gtk_file_chooser_set_extra_widget()`.
         * @param id id for the added choice
         * @param label user-visible label for the added choice
         * @param options ids for the options of the choice, or `null` for a boolean choice
         * @param option_labels user-visible labels for the options, must be the same length as `options`
         */
        add_choice(id: string, label: string, options: string[] | null, option_labels: string[] | null): void;

        /**
         * Adds `filter` to the list of filters that the user can select between.
         * When a filter is selected, only files that are passed by that
         * filter are displayed.
         * 
         * Note that the `chooser` takes ownership of the filter, so you have to
         * ref and sink it if you want to keep a reference.
         * @param filter a {@link Gtk.FileFilter}
         */
        add_filter(filter: FileFilter): void;

        /**
         * Adds a folder to be displayed with the shortcut folders in a file chooser.
         * Note that shortcut folders do not get saved, as they are provided by the
         * application.  For example, you can use this to add a
         * “/usr/share/mydrawprogram/Clipart” folder to the volume list.
         * @param folder filename of the folder to add
         * @returns `true` if the folder could be added successfully, `false` otherwise.  In the latter case, the `error` will be set as appropriate.
         */
        add_shortcut_folder(folder: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Adds a folder URI to be displayed with the shortcut folders in a file
         * chooser.  Note that shortcut folders do not get saved, as they are provided
         * by the application.  For example, you can use this to add a
         * “file:///usr/share/mydrawprogram/Clipart” folder to the volume list.
         * @param uri URI of the folder to add
         * @returns `true` if the folder could be added successfully, `false` otherwise.  In the latter case, the `error` will be set as appropriate.
         */
        add_shortcut_folder_uri(uri: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the type of operation that the file chooser is performing; see
         * `gtk_file_chooser_set_action()`.
         * @returns the action that the file selector is performing
         */
        get_action(): FileChooserAction;

        /**
         * Gets the currently selected option in the 'choice' with the given ID.
         * @param id the ID of the choice to get
         * @returns the ID of the currenly selected option
         */
        get_choice(id: string): string;

        /**
         * Gets whether file choser will offer to create new folders.
         * See `gtk_file_chooser_set_create_folders()`.
         * @returns `true` if the Create Folder button should be displayed.
         */
        get_create_folders(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the current folder of `chooser` as a local filename.
         * See `gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder()`.
         * 
         * Note that this is the folder that the file chooser is currently displaying
         * (e.g. "/home/username/Documents"), which is not the same
         * as the currently-selected folder if the chooser is in
         * {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.SELECT_FOLDER} mode
         * (e.g. "/home/username/Documents/selected-folder/".  To get the
         * currently-selected folder in that mode, use `gtk_file_chooser_get_uri()` as the
         * usual way to get the selection.
         * @returns the full path of the current folder, or `null` if the current path cannot be represented as a local filename.  Free with `g_free()`.  This function will also return `null` if the file chooser was unable to load the last folder that was requested from it; for example, as would be for calling `gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder()` on a nonexistent folder.
         */
        get_current_folder(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the current folder of `chooser` as {@link Gio.File}.
         * See `gtk_file_chooser_get_current_folder_uri()`.
         * @returns the {@link Gio.File} for the current folder.
         */
        get_current_folder_file(): Gio.File | null;

        /**
         * Gets the current folder of `chooser` as an URI.
         * See `gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder_uri()`.
         * 
         * Note that this is the folder that the file chooser is currently displaying
         * (e.g. "file:///home/username/Documents"), which is not the same
         * as the currently-selected folder if the chooser is in
         * {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.SELECT_FOLDER} mode
         * (e.g. "file:///home/username/Documents/selected-folder/".  To get the
         * currently-selected folder in that mode, use `gtk_file_chooser_get_uri()` as the
         * usual way to get the selection.
         * @returns the URI for the current folder. Free with `g_free()`.  This function will also return `null` if the file chooser was unable to load the last folder that was requested from it; for example, as would be for calling `gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder_uri()` on a nonexistent folder.
         */
        get_current_folder_uri(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the current name in the file selector, as entered by the user in the
         * text entry for “Name”.
         * 
         * This is meant to be used in save dialogs, to get the currently typed filename
         * when the file itself does not exist yet.  For example, an application that
         * adds a custom extra widget to the file chooser for “file format” may want to
         * change the extension of the typed filename based on the chosen format, say,
         * from “.jpg” to “.png”.
         * @returns The raw text from the file chooser’s “Name” entry.  Free this with `g_free()`.  Note that this string is not a full pathname or URI; it is whatever the contents of the entry are.  Note also that this string is in UTF-8 encoding, which is not necessarily the system’s encoding for filenames.
         */
        get_current_name(): string;

        /**
         * Queries whether a file chooser is set to confirm for overwriting when the user
         * types a file name that already exists.
         * @returns `true` if the file chooser will present a confirmation dialog; `false` otherwise.
         */
        get_do_overwrite_confirmation(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the current extra widget; see
         * `gtk_file_chooser_set_extra_widget()`.
         * @returns the current extra widget, or `null`
         */
        get_extra_widget(): Widget | null;

        /**
         * Gets the {@link Gio.File} for the currently selected file in
         * the file selector. If multiple files are selected,
         * one of the files will be returned at random.
         * 
         * If the file chooser is in folder mode, this function returns the selected
         * folder.
         * @returns a selected {@link Gio.File}. You own the returned file;     use `g_object_unref()` to release it.
         */
        get_file(): Gio.File;

        /**
         * Gets the filename for the currently selected file in
         * the file selector. The filename is returned as an absolute path. If
         * multiple files are selected, one of the filenames will be returned at
         * random.
         * 
         * If the file chooser is in folder mode, this function returns the selected
         * folder.
         * @returns The currently selected filename,  or `null` if no file is selected, or the selected file can't  be represented with a local filename. Free with `g_free()`.
         */
        get_filename(): string | null;

        /**
         * Lists all the selected files and subfolders in the current folder of
         * `chooser`. The returned names are full absolute paths. If files in the current
         * folder cannot be represented as local filenames they will be ignored. (See
         * `gtk_file_chooser_get_uris()`)
         * @returns a {@link GLib.SList}    containing the filenames of all selected files and subfolders in    the current folder. Free the returned list with `g_slist_free()`,    and the filenames with `g_free()`.
         */
        get_filenames(): string[];

        /**
         * Lists all the selected files and subfolders in the current folder of `chooser`
         * as {@link Gio.File}. An internal function, see `gtk_file_chooser_get_uris()`.
         * @returns a {@link GLib.SList}   containing a {@link Gio.File} for each selected file and subfolder in the   current folder.  Free the returned list with `g_slist_free()`, and   the files with `g_object_unref()`.
         */
        get_files(): Gio.File[];

        /**
         * Gets the current filter; see `gtk_file_chooser_set_filter()`.
         * @returns the current filter, or `null`
         */
        get_filter(): FileFilter | null;

        /**
         * Gets whether only local files can be selected in the
         * file selector. See `gtk_file_chooser_set_local_only()`
         * @returns `true` if only local files can be selected.
         */
        get_local_only(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the {@link Gio.File} that should be previewed in a custom preview
         * Internal function, see `gtk_file_chooser_get_preview_uri()`.
         * @returns the {@link Gio.File} for the file to preview,     or `null` if no file is selected. Free with `g_object_unref()`.
         */
        get_preview_file(): Gio.File | null;

        /**
         * Gets the filename that should be previewed in a custom preview
         * widget. See `gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget()`.
         * @returns the filename to preview, or `null` if  no file is selected, or if the selected file cannot be represented  as a local filename. Free with `g_free()`
         */
        get_preview_filename(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the URI that should be previewed in a custom preview
         * widget. See `gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget()`.
         * @returns the URI for the file to preview,     or `null` if no file is selected. Free with `g_free()`.
         */
        get_preview_uri(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the current preview widget; see
         * `gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget()`.
         * @returns the current preview widget, or `null`
         */
        get_preview_widget(): Widget | null;

        /**
         * Gets whether the preview widget set by `gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget()`
         * should be shown for the current filename. See
         * `gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget_active()`.
         * @returns `true` if the preview widget is active for the current filename.
         */
        get_preview_widget_active(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets whether multiple files can be selected in the file
         * selector. See `gtk_file_chooser_set_select_multiple()`.
         * @returns `true` if multiple files can be selected.
         */
        get_select_multiple(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets whether hidden files and folders are displayed in the file selector.
         * See `gtk_file_chooser_set_show_hidden()`.
         * @returns `true` if hidden files and folders are displayed.
         */
        get_show_hidden(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the URI for the currently selected file in
         * the file selector. If multiple files are selected,
         * one of the filenames will be returned at random.
         * 
         * If the file chooser is in folder mode, this function returns the selected
         * folder.
         * @returns The currently selected URI, or `null`    if no file is selected. If `gtk_file_chooser_set_local_only()` is set to    `true` (the default) a local URI will be returned for any FUSE locations.    Free with `g_free()`
         */
        get_uri(): string | null;

        /**
         * Lists all the selected files and subfolders in the current folder of
         * `chooser`. The returned names are full absolute URIs.
         * @returns a {@link GLib.SList} containing the URIs of all selected   files and subfolders in the current folder. Free the returned list   with `g_slist_free()`, and the filenames with `g_free()`.
         */
        get_uris(): string[];

        /**
         * Gets whether a stock label should be drawn with the name of the previewed
         * file.  See `gtk_file_chooser_set_use_preview_label()`.
         * @returns `true` if the file chooser is set to display a label with the name of the previewed file, `false` otherwise.
         */
        get_use_preview_label(): boolean;

        /**
         * Lists the current set of user-selectable filters; see
         * `gtk_file_chooser_add_filter()`, `gtk_file_chooser_remove_filter()`.
         * @returns a  {@link GLib.SList} containing the current set of user selectable filters. The  contents of the list are owned by GTK+, but you must free the list  itself with `g_slist_free()` when you are done with it.
         */
        list_filters(): FileFilter[];

        /**
         * Queries the list of shortcut folders in the file chooser, as set by
         * `gtk_file_chooser_add_shortcut_folder_uri()`.
         * @returns A list of folder URIs, or `null` if there are no shortcut folders.  Free the returned list with `g_slist_free()`, and the URIs with `g_free()`.
         */
        list_shortcut_folder_uris(): string[] | null;

        /**
         * Queries the list of shortcut folders in the file chooser, as set by
         * `gtk_file_chooser_add_shortcut_folder()`.
         * @returns A list of folder filenames, or `null` if there are no shortcut folders. Free the returned list with `g_slist_free()`, and the filenames with `g_free()`.
         */
        list_shortcut_folders(): string[] | null;

        /**
         * Removes a 'choice' that has been added with `gtk_file_chooser_add_choice()`.
         * @param id the ID of the choice to remove
         */
        remove_choice(id: string): void;

        /**
         * Removes `filter` from the list of filters that the user can select between.
         * @param filter a {@link Gtk.FileFilter}
         */
        remove_filter(filter: FileFilter): void;

        /**
         * Removes a folder from a file chooser’s list of shortcut folders.
         * @param folder filename of the folder to remove
         * @returns `true` if the operation succeeds, `false` otherwise. In the latter case, the `error` will be set as appropriate. See also: `gtk_file_chooser_add_shortcut_folder()`
         */
        remove_shortcut_folder(folder: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Removes a folder URI from a file chooser’s list of shortcut folders.
         * @param uri URI of the folder to remove
         * @returns `true` if the operation succeeds, `false` otherwise. In the latter case, the `error` will be set as appropriate. See also: `gtk_file_chooser_add_shortcut_folder_uri()`
         */
        remove_shortcut_folder_uri(uri: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Selects all the files in the current folder of a file chooser.
         */
        select_all(): void;

        /**
         * Selects the file referred to by `file`. An internal function. See
         * _gtk_file_chooser_select_uri().
         * @param file the file to select
         * @returns Not useful.
         */
        select_file(file: Gio.File): boolean;

        /**
         * Selects a filename. If the file name isn’t in the current
         * folder of `chooser`, then the current folder of `chooser` will
         * be changed to the folder containing `filename`.
         * @param filename the filename to select
         * @returns Not useful. See also: `gtk_file_chooser_set_filename()`
         */
        select_filename(filename: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Selects the file to by `uri`. If the URI doesn’t refer to a
         * file in the current folder of `chooser`, then the current folder of
         * `chooser` will be changed to the folder containing `filename`.
         * @param uri the URI to select
         * @returns Not useful.
         */
        select_uri(uri: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the type of operation that the chooser is performing; the
         * user interface is adapted to suit the selected action. For example,
         * an option to create a new folder might be shown if the action is
         * {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.SAVE} but not if the action is
         * {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.OPEN}.
         * @param action the action that the file selector is performing
         */
        set_action(action: FileChooserAction): void;

        /**
         * Selects an option in a 'choice' that has been added with
         * `gtk_file_chooser_add_choice()`. For a boolean choice, the
         * possible options are "true" and "false".
         * @param id the ID of the choice to set
         * @param option the ID of the option to select
         */
        set_choice(id: string, option: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether file choser will offer to create new folders.
         * This is only relevant if the action is not set to be
         * {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.OPEN}.
         * @param create_folders `true` if the Create Folder button should be displayed
         */
        set_create_folders(create_folders: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the current folder for `chooser` from a local filename.
         * The user will be shown the full contents of the current folder,
         * plus user interface elements for navigating to other folders.
         * 
         * In general, you should not use this function.  See the
         * [section on setting up a file chooser dialog][gtkfilechooserdialog-setting-up]
         * for the rationale behind this.
         * @param filename the full path of the new current folder
         * @returns Not useful.
         */
        set_current_folder(filename: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the current folder for `chooser` from a {@link Gio.File}.
         * Internal function, see `gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder_uri()`.
         * @param file the {@link Gio.File} for the new folder
         * @returns `true` if the folder could be changed successfully, `false` otherwise.
         */
        set_current_folder_file(file: Gio.File): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the current folder for `chooser` from an URI.
         * The user will be shown the full contents of the current folder,
         * plus user interface elements for navigating to other folders.
         * 
         * In general, you should not use this function.  See the
         * [section on setting up a file chooser dialog][gtkfilechooserdialog-setting-up]
         * for the rationale behind this.
         * @param uri the URI for the new current folder
         * @returns `true` if the folder could be changed successfully, `false` otherwise.
         */
        set_current_folder_uri(uri: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the current name in the file selector, as if entered
         * by the user. Note that the name passed in here is a UTF-8
         * string rather than a filename. This function is meant for
         * such uses as a suggested name in a “Save As...” dialog.  You can
         * pass “Untitled.doc” or a similarly suitable suggestion for the `name`.
         * 
         * If you want to preselect a particular existing file, you should use
         * `gtk_file_chooser_set_filename()` or `gtk_file_chooser_set_uri()` instead.
         * Please see the documentation for those functions for an example of using
         * `gtk_file_chooser_set_current_name()` as well.
         * @param name the filename to use, as a UTF-8 string
         */
        set_current_name(name: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether a file chooser in {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.SAVE} mode will present
         * a confirmation dialog if the user types a file name that already exists.  This
         * is `false` by default.
         * 
         * If set to `true`, the `chooser` will emit the
         * {@link Gtk.FileChooser.SignalSignatures.confirm_overwrite | Gtk.FileChooser::confirm-overwrite} signal when appropriate.
         * 
         * If all you need is the stock confirmation dialog, set this property to `true`.
         * You can override the way confirmation is done by actually handling the
         * {@link Gtk.FileChooser.SignalSignatures.confirm_overwrite | Gtk.FileChooser::confirm-overwrite} signal; please refer to its documentation
         * for the details.
         * @param do_overwrite_confirmation whether to confirm overwriting in save mode
         */
        set_do_overwrite_confirmation(do_overwrite_confirmation: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets an application-supplied widget to provide extra options to the user.
         * @param extra_widget widget for extra options
         */
        set_extra_widget(extra_widget: Widget): void;

        /**
         * Sets `file` as the current filename for the file chooser, by changing
         * to the file’s parent folder and actually selecting the file in list.  If
         * the `chooser` is in {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.SAVE} mode, the file’s base name
         * will also appear in the dialog’s file name entry.
         * 
         * If the file name isn’t in the current folder of `chooser`, then the current
         * folder of `chooser` will be changed to the folder containing `filename`. This
         * is equivalent to a sequence of `gtk_file_chooser_unselect_all()` followed by
         * `gtk_file_chooser_select_filename()`.
         * 
         * Note that the file must exist, or nothing will be done except
         * for the directory change.
         * 
         * If you are implementing a save dialog,
         * you should use this function if you already have a file name to which the
         * user may save; for example, when the user opens an existing file and then
         * does Save As...  If you don’t have
         * a file name already — for example, if the user just created a new
         * file and is saving it for the first time, do not call this function.
         * Instead, use something similar to this:
         * 
         * ```c
         * if (document_is_new)
         *   {
         *     // the user just created a new document
         *     gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder_file (chooser, default_file_for_saving);
         *     gtk_file_chooser_set_current_name (chooser, "Untitled document");
         *   }
         * else
         *   {
         *     // the user edited an existing document
         *     gtk_file_chooser_set_file (chooser, existing_file);
         *   }
         * ```
         * 
         * @param file the {@link Gio.File} to set as current
         * @returns Not useful.
         */
        set_file(file: Gio.File): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets `filename` as the current filename for the file chooser, by changing to
         * the file’s parent folder and actually selecting the file in list; all other
         * files will be unselected.  If the `chooser` is in
         * {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.SAVE} mode, the file’s base name will also appear in
         * the dialog’s file name entry.
         * 
         * Note that the file must exist, or nothing will be done except
         * for the directory change.
         * 
         * You should use this function only when implementing a save
         * dialog for which you already have a file name to which
         * the user may save.  For example, when the user opens an existing file and
         * then does Save As... to save a copy or
         * a modified version.  If you don’t have a file name already — for
         * example, if the user just created a new file and is saving it for the first
         * time, do not call this function.  Instead, use something similar to this:
         * 
         * ```c
         * if (document_is_new)
         *   {
         *     // the user just created a new document
         *     gtk_file_chooser_set_current_name (chooser, "Untitled document");
         *   }
         * else
         *   {
         *     // the user edited an existing document
         *     gtk_file_chooser_set_filename (chooser, existing_filename);
         *   }
         * ```
         * 
         * 
         * In the first case, the file chooser will present the user with useful suggestions
         * as to where to save his new file.  In the second case, the file’s existing location
         * is already known, so the file chooser will use it.
         * @param filename the filename to set as current
         * @returns Not useful.
         */
        set_filename(filename: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the current filter; only the files that pass the
         * filter will be displayed. If the user-selectable list of filters
         * is non-empty, then the filter should be one of the filters
         * in that list. Setting the current filter when the list of
         * filters is empty is useful if you want to restrict the displayed
         * set of files without letting the user change it.
         * @param filter a {@link Gtk.FileFilter}
         */
        set_filter(filter: FileFilter): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether only local files can be selected in the
         * file selector. If `local_only` is `true` (the default),
         * then the selected file or files are guaranteed to be
         * accessible through the operating systems native file
         * system and therefore the application only
         * needs to worry about the filename functions in
         * {@link Gtk.FileChooser}, like `gtk_file_chooser_get_filename()`,
         * rather than the URI functions like
         * `gtk_file_chooser_get_uri()`,
         * 
         * On some systems non-native files may still be
         * available using the native filesystem via a userspace
         * filesystem (FUSE).
         * @param local_only `true` if only local files can be selected
         */
        set_local_only(local_only: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets an application-supplied widget to use to display a custom preview
         * of the currently selected file. To implement a preview, after setting the
         * preview widget, you connect to the {@link Gtk.FileChooser.SignalSignatures.update_preview | Gtk.FileChooser::update-preview}
         * signal, and call `gtk_file_chooser_get_preview_filename()` or
         * `gtk_file_chooser_get_preview_uri()` on each change. If you can
         * display a preview of the new file, update your widget and
         * set the preview active using `gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget_active()`.
         * Otherwise, set the preview inactive.
         * 
         * When there is no application-supplied preview widget, or the
         * application-supplied preview widget is not active, the file chooser
         * will display no preview at all.
         * @param preview_widget widget for displaying preview.
         */
        set_preview_widget(preview_widget: Widget): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the preview widget set by
         * `gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget()` should be shown for the
         * current filename. When `active` is set to false, the file chooser
         * may display an internally generated preview of the current file
         * or it may display no preview at all. See
         * `gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget()` for more details.
         * @param active whether to display the user-specified preview widget
         */
        set_preview_widget_active(active: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether multiple files can be selected in the file selector.  This is
         * only relevant if the action is set to be {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.OPEN} or
         * {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.SELECT_FOLDER}.
         * @param select_multiple `true` if multiple files can be selected.
         */
        set_select_multiple(select_multiple: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether hidden files and folders are displayed in the file selector.
         * @param show_hidden `true` if hidden files and folders should be displayed.
         */
        set_show_hidden(show_hidden: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the file referred to by `uri` as the current file for the file chooser,
         * by changing to the URI’s parent folder and actually selecting the URI in the
         * list.  If the `chooser` is {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.SAVE} mode, the URI’s base
         * name will also appear in the dialog’s file name entry.
         * 
         * Note that the URI must exist, or nothing will be done except for the
         * directory change.
         * 
         * You should use this function only when implementing a save
         * dialog for which you already have a file name to which
         * the user may save.  For example, when the user opens an existing file and then
         * does Save As... to save a copy or a
         * modified version.  If you don’t have a file name already — for example,
         * if the user just created a new file and is saving it for the first time, do
         * not call this function.  Instead, use something similar to this:
         * 
         * ```c
         * if (document_is_new)
         *   {
         *     // the user just created a new document
         *     gtk_file_chooser_set_current_name (chooser, "Untitled document");
         *   }
         * else
         *   {
         *     // the user edited an existing document
         *     gtk_file_chooser_set_uri (chooser, existing_uri);
         *   }
         * ```
         * 
         * 
         * 
         * In the first case, the file chooser will present the user with useful suggestions
         * as to where to save his new file.  In the second case, the file’s existing location
         * is already known, so the file chooser will use it.
         * @param uri the URI to set as current
         * @returns Not useful.
         */
        set_uri(uri: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets whether the file chooser should display a stock label with the name of
         * the file that is being previewed; the default is `true`.  Applications that
         * want to draw the whole preview area themselves should set this to `false` and
         * display the name themselves in their preview widget.
         * 
         * See also: `gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget()`
         * @param use_label whether to display a stock label with the name of the previewed file
         */
        set_use_preview_label(use_label: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Unselects all the files in the current folder of a file chooser.
         */
        unselect_all(): void;

        /**
         * Unselects the file referred to by `file`. If the file is not in the current
         * directory, does not exist, or is otherwise not currently selected, does nothing.
         * @param file a {@link Gio.File}
         */
        unselect_file(file: Gio.File): void;

        /**
         * Unselects a currently selected filename. If the filename
         * is not in the current directory, does not exist, or
         * is otherwise not currently selected, does nothing.
         * @param filename the filename to unselect
         */
        unselect_filename(filename: string): void;

        /**
         * Unselects the file referred to by `uri`. If the file
         * is not in the current directory, does not exist, or
         * is otherwise not currently selected, does nothing.
         * @param uri the URI to unselect
         */
        unselect_uri(uri: string): void;

        /**
         * Retrieves the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @returns the orientation of the `orientable`.
         */
        get_orientation(): Orientation;

        /**
         * Sets the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @param orientation the orientable’s new orientation.
         */
        set_orientation(orientation: Orientation): void;
    }


    namespace FileChooserDialog {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Dialog.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::use-header-bar": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accept-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::application": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::attached-to": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::decorated": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::default-height": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::default-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::deletable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::destroy-with-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-map": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gravity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-resize-grip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-toplevel-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hide-titlebar-when-maximized": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::icon": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::icon-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-active": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-maximized": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::mnemonics-visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::modal": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resizable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-grip-visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::screen": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::skip-pager-hint": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::skip-taskbar-hint": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::startup-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::title": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::transient-for": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::type": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::type-hint": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::urgency-hint": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window-position": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::action": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::create-folders": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::do-overwrite-confirmation": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::extra-widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::filter": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::local-only": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::preview-widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::preview-widget-active": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::select-multiple": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::show-hidden": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-preview-label": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Dialog.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, FileChooser.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * {@link Gtk.FileChooserDialog} is a dialog box suitable for use with
     * “File/Open” or “File/Save as” commands.  This widget works by
     * putting a {@link Gtk.FileChooserWidget} inside a {@link Gtk.Dialog}.  It exposes
     * the {@link Gtk.FileChooser} interface, so you can use all of the
     * {@link Gtk.FileChooser} functions on the file chooser dialog as well as
     * those for {@link Gtk.Dialog}.
     * 
     * Note that {@link Gtk.FileChooserDialog} does not have any methods of its
     * own.  Instead, you should use the functions that work on a
     * {@link Gtk.FileChooser}.
     * 
     * If you want to integrate well with the platform you should use the
     * {@link Gtk.FileChooserNative} API, which will use a platform-specific
     * dialog if available and fall back to GtkFileChooserDialog
     * otherwise.
     * 
     * ## Typical usage ## {#gtkfilechooser-typical-usage}
     * 
     * In the simplest of cases, you can the following code to use
     * {@link Gtk.FileChooserDialog} to select a file for opening:
     * 
     * 
     * ```
     * GtkWidget *dialog;
     * GtkFileChooserAction action = GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_OPEN;
     * gint res;
     * 
     * dialog = gtk_file_chooser_dialog_new ("Open File",
     *                                       parent_window,
     *                                       action,
     *                                       _("_Cancel"),
     *                                       GTK_RESPONSE_CANCEL,
     *                                       _("_Open"),
     *                                       GTK_RESPONSE_ACCEPT,
     *                                       NULL);
     * 
     * res = gtk_dialog_run (GTK_DIALOG (dialog));
     * if (res == GTK_RESPONSE_ACCEPT)
     *   {
     *     char *filename;
     *     GtkFileChooser *chooser = GTK_FILE_CHOOSER (dialog);
     *     filename = gtk_file_chooser_get_filename (chooser);
     *     open_file (filename);
     *     g_free (filename);
     *   }
     * 
     * gtk_widget_destroy (dialog);
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * To use a dialog for saving, you can use this:
     * 
     * 
     * ```
     * GtkWidget *dialog;
     * GtkFileChooser *chooser;
     * GtkFileChooserAction action = GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE;
     * gint res;
     * 
     * dialog = gtk_file_chooser_dialog_new ("Save File",
     *                                       parent_window,
     *                                       action,
     *                                       _("_Cancel"),
     *                                       GTK_RESPONSE_CANCEL,
     *                                       _("_Save"),
     *                                       GTK_RESPONSE_ACCEPT,
     *                                       NULL);
     * chooser = GTK_FILE_CHOOSER (dialog);
     * 
     * gtk_file_chooser_set_do_overwrite_confirmation (chooser, TRUE);
     * 
     * if (user_edited_a_new_document)
     *   gtk_file_chooser_set_current_name (chooser,
     *                                      _("Untitled document"));
     * else
     *   gtk_file_chooser_set_filename (chooser,
     *                                  existing_filename);
     * 
     * res = gtk_dialog_run (GTK_DIALOG (dialog));
     * if (res == GTK_RESPONSE_ACCEPT)
     *   {
     *     char *filename;
     * 
     *     filename = gtk_file_chooser_get_filename (chooser);
     *     save_to_file (filename);
     *     g_free (filename);
     *   }
     * 
     * gtk_widget_destroy (dialog);
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * ## Setting up a file chooser dialog ## {#gtkfilechooserdialog-setting-up}
     * 
     * There are various cases in which you may need to use a {@link Gtk.FileChooserDialog}:
     * 
     * - To select a file for opening. Use #GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_OPEN.
     * 
     * - To save a file for the first time. Use #GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE,
     *   and suggest a name such as “Untitled” with `gtk_file_chooser_set_current_name()`.
     * 
     * - To save a file under a different name. Use #GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE,
     *   and set the existing filename with `gtk_file_chooser_set_filename()`.
     * 
     * - To choose a folder instead of a file. Use #GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SELECT_FOLDER.
     * 
     * Note that old versions of the file chooser’s documentation suggested
     * using `gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder()` in various
     * situations, with the intention of letting the application
     * suggest a reasonable default folder.  This is no longer
     * considered to be a good policy, as now the file chooser is
     * able to make good suggestions on its own.  In general, you
     * should only cause the file chooser to show a specific folder
     * when it is appropriate to use `gtk_file_chooser_set_filename()`,
     * i.e. when you are doing a Save As command and you already
     * have a file saved somewhere.
     * 
     * ## Response Codes ## {#gtkfilechooserdialog-responses}
     * 
     * {@link Gtk.FileChooserDialog} inherits from {@link Gtk.Dialog}, so buttons that
     * go in its action area have response codes such as
     * #GTK_RESPONSE_ACCEPT and #GTK_RESPONSE_CANCEL.  For example, you
     * could call `gtk_file_chooser_dialog_new()` as follows:
     * 
     * 
     * ```
     * GtkWidget *dialog;
     * GtkFileChooserAction action = GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_OPEN;
     * 
     * dialog = gtk_file_chooser_dialog_new ("Open File",
     *                                       parent_window,
     *                                       action,
     *                                       _("_Cancel"),
     *                                       GTK_RESPONSE_CANCEL,
     *                                       _("_Open"),
     *                                       GTK_RESPONSE_ACCEPT,
     *                                       NULL);
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * This will create buttons for “Cancel” and “Open” that use stock
     * response identifiers from {@link Gtk.ResponseType}.  For most dialog
     * boxes you can use your own custom response codes rather than the
     * ones in {@link Gtk.ResponseType}, but {@link Gtk.FileChooserDialog} assumes that
     * its “accept”-type action, e.g. an “Open” or “Save” button,
     * will have one of the following response codes:
     * 
     * - #GTK_RESPONSE_ACCEPT
     * - #GTK_RESPONSE_OK
     * - #GTK_RESPONSE_YES
     * - #GTK_RESPONSE_APPLY
     * 
     * This is because {@link Gtk.FileChooserDialog} must intercept responses
     * and switch to folders if appropriate, rather than letting the
     * dialog terminate — the implementation uses these known
     * response codes to know which responses can be blocked if
     * appropriate.
     * 
     * To summarize, make sure you use a
     * [stock response code][gtkfilechooserdialog-responses]
     * when you use {@link Gtk.FileChooserDialog} to ensure proper operation.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class FileChooserDialog extends Dialog implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable, FileChooser {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<FileChooserDialog>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: FileChooserDialog.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<FileChooserDialog.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof FileChooserDialog.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, FileChooserDialog.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof FileChooserDialog.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, FileChooserDialog.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof FileChooserDialog.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<FileChooserDialog.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        /**
         * @default Gtk.FileChooserAction.OPEN
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser
         */
        get action(): FileChooserAction;
        set action(val: FileChooserAction);

        /**
         * Whether a file chooser not in {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.OPEN} mode
         * will offer the user to create new folders.
         * @since 2.18
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser
         */
        get create_folders(): boolean;
        set create_folders(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether a file chooser not in {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.OPEN} mode
         * will offer the user to create new folders.
         * @since 2.18
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser
         */
        get createFolders(): boolean;
        set createFolders(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether a file chooser in {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.SAVE} mode
         * will present an overwrite confirmation dialog if the user
         * selects a file name that already exists.
         * @since 2.8
         * @default false
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser
         */
        get do_overwrite_confirmation(): boolean;
        set do_overwrite_confirmation(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether a file chooser in {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.SAVE} mode
         * will present an overwrite confirmation dialog if the user
         * selects a file name that already exists.
         * @since 2.8
         * @default false
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser
         */
        get doOverwriteConfirmation(): boolean;
        set doOverwriteConfirmation(val: boolean);

        /** @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser */
        get extra_widget(): Widget | null;
        set extra_widget(val: Widget | null);

        /** @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser */
        get extraWidget(): Widget | null;
        set extraWidget(val: Widget | null);

        /** @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser */
        get filter(): FileFilter | null;
        set filter(val: FileFilter | null);

        /**
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser
         */
        get local_only(): boolean;
        set local_only(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser
         */
        get localOnly(): boolean;
        set localOnly(val: boolean);

        /** @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser */
        get preview_widget(): Widget | null;
        set preview_widget(val: Widget | null);

        /** @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser */
        get previewWidget(): Widget | null;
        set previewWidget(val: Widget | null);

        /**
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser
         */
        get preview_widget_active(): boolean;
        set preview_widget_active(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser
         */
        get previewWidgetActive(): boolean;
        set previewWidgetActive(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser
         */
        get select_multiple(): boolean;
        set select_multiple(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser
         */
        get selectMultiple(): boolean;
        set selectMultiple(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser
         */
        get show_hidden(): boolean;
        set show_hidden(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser
         */
        get showHidden(): boolean;
        set showHidden(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser
         */
        get use_preview_label(): boolean;
        set use_preview_label(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser
         */
        get usePreviewLabel(): boolean;
        set usePreviewLabel(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Adds a 'choice' to the file chooser. This is typically implemented
         * as a combobox or, for boolean choices, as a checkbutton. You can select
         * a value using `gtk_file_chooser_set_choice()` before the dialog is shown,
         * and you can obtain the user-selected value in the ::response signal handler
         * using `gtk_file_chooser_get_choice()`.
         * 
         * Compare `gtk_file_chooser_set_extra_widget()`.
         * @param id id for the added choice
         * @param label user-visible label for the added choice
         * @param options ids for the options of the choice, or `null` for a boolean choice
         * @param option_labels user-visible labels for the options, must be the same length as `options`
         */
        add_choice(id: string, label: string, options: string[] | null, option_labels: string[] | null): void;

        /**
         * Adds `filter` to the list of filters that the user can select between.
         * When a filter is selected, only files that are passed by that
         * filter are displayed.
         * 
         * Note that the `chooser` takes ownership of the filter, so you have to
         * ref and sink it if you want to keep a reference.
         * @param filter a {@link Gtk.FileFilter}
         */
        add_filter(filter: FileFilter): void;

        /**
         * Adds a folder to be displayed with the shortcut folders in a file chooser.
         * Note that shortcut folders do not get saved, as they are provided by the
         * application.  For example, you can use this to add a
         * “/usr/share/mydrawprogram/Clipart” folder to the volume list.
         * @param folder filename of the folder to add
         * @returns `true` if the folder could be added successfully, `false` otherwise.  In the latter case, the `error` will be set as appropriate.
         */
        add_shortcut_folder(folder: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Adds a folder URI to be displayed with the shortcut folders in a file
         * chooser.  Note that shortcut folders do not get saved, as they are provided
         * by the application.  For example, you can use this to add a
         * “file:///usr/share/mydrawprogram/Clipart” folder to the volume list.
         * @param uri URI of the folder to add
         * @returns `true` if the folder could be added successfully, `false` otherwise.  In the latter case, the `error` will be set as appropriate.
         */
        add_shortcut_folder_uri(uri: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the type of operation that the file chooser is performing; see
         * `gtk_file_chooser_set_action()`.
         * @returns the action that the file selector is performing
         */
        get_action(): FileChooserAction;

        /**
         * Gets the currently selected option in the 'choice' with the given ID.
         * @param id the ID of the choice to get
         * @returns the ID of the currenly selected option
         */
        get_choice(id: string): string;

        /**
         * Gets whether file choser will offer to create new folders.
         * See `gtk_file_chooser_set_create_folders()`.
         * @returns `true` if the Create Folder button should be displayed.
         */
        get_create_folders(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the current folder of `chooser` as a local filename.
         * See `gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder()`.
         * 
         * Note that this is the folder that the file chooser is currently displaying
         * (e.g. "/home/username/Documents"), which is not the same
         * as the currently-selected folder if the chooser is in
         * {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.SELECT_FOLDER} mode
         * (e.g. "/home/username/Documents/selected-folder/".  To get the
         * currently-selected folder in that mode, use `gtk_file_chooser_get_uri()` as the
         * usual way to get the selection.
         * @returns the full path of the current folder, or `null` if the current path cannot be represented as a local filename.  Free with `g_free()`.  This function will also return `null` if the file chooser was unable to load the last folder that was requested from it; for example, as would be for calling `gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder()` on a nonexistent folder.
         */
        get_current_folder(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the current folder of `chooser` as {@link Gio.File}.
         * See `gtk_file_chooser_get_current_folder_uri()`.
         * @returns the {@link Gio.File} for the current folder.
         */
        get_current_folder_file(): Gio.File | null;

        /**
         * Gets the current folder of `chooser` as an URI.
         * See `gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder_uri()`.
         * 
         * Note that this is the folder that the file chooser is currently displaying
         * (e.g. "file:///home/username/Documents"), which is not the same
         * as the currently-selected folder if the chooser is in
         * {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.SELECT_FOLDER} mode
         * (e.g. "file:///home/username/Documents/selected-folder/".  To get the
         * currently-selected folder in that mode, use `gtk_file_chooser_get_uri()` as the
         * usual way to get the selection.
         * @returns the URI for the current folder. Free with `g_free()`.  This function will also return `null` if the file chooser was unable to load the last folder that was requested from it; for example, as would be for calling `gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder_uri()` on a nonexistent folder.
         */
        get_current_folder_uri(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the current name in the file selector, as entered by the user in the
         * text entry for “Name”.
         * 
         * This is meant to be used in save dialogs, to get the currently typed filename
         * when the file itself does not exist yet.  For example, an application that
         * adds a custom extra widget to the file chooser for “file format” may want to
         * change the extension of the typed filename based on the chosen format, say,
         * from “.jpg” to “.png”.
         * @returns The raw text from the file chooser’s “Name” entry.  Free this with `g_free()`.  Note that this string is not a full pathname or URI; it is whatever the contents of the entry are.  Note also that this string is in UTF-8 encoding, which is not necessarily the system’s encoding for filenames.
         */
        get_current_name(): string;

        /**
         * Queries whether a file chooser is set to confirm for overwriting when the user
         * types a file name that already exists.
         * @returns `true` if the file chooser will present a confirmation dialog; `false` otherwise.
         */
        get_do_overwrite_confirmation(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the current extra widget; see
         * `gtk_file_chooser_set_extra_widget()`.
         * @returns the current extra widget, or `null`
         */
        get_extra_widget(): Widget | null;

        /**
         * Gets the {@link Gio.File} for the currently selected file in
         * the file selector. If multiple files are selected,
         * one of the files will be returned at random.
         * 
         * If the file chooser is in folder mode, this function returns the selected
         * folder.
         * @returns a selected {@link Gio.File}. You own the returned file;     use `g_object_unref()` to release it.
         */
        get_file(): Gio.File;

        /**
         * Gets the filename for the currently selected file in
         * the file selector. The filename is returned as an absolute path. If
         * multiple files are selected, one of the filenames will be returned at
         * random.
         * 
         * If the file chooser is in folder mode, this function returns the selected
         * folder.
         * @returns The currently selected filename,  or `null` if no file is selected, or the selected file can't  be represented with a local filename. Free with `g_free()`.
         */
        get_filename(): string | null;

        /**
         * Lists all the selected files and subfolders in the current folder of
         * `chooser`. The returned names are full absolute paths. If files in the current
         * folder cannot be represented as local filenames they will be ignored. (See
         * `gtk_file_chooser_get_uris()`)
         * @returns a {@link GLib.SList}    containing the filenames of all selected files and subfolders in    the current folder. Free the returned list with `g_slist_free()`,    and the filenames with `g_free()`.
         */
        get_filenames(): string[];

        /**
         * Lists all the selected files and subfolders in the current folder of `chooser`
         * as {@link Gio.File}. An internal function, see `gtk_file_chooser_get_uris()`.
         * @returns a {@link GLib.SList}   containing a {@link Gio.File} for each selected file and subfolder in the   current folder.  Free the returned list with `g_slist_free()`, and   the files with `g_object_unref()`.
         */
        get_files(): Gio.File[];

        /**
         * Gets the current filter; see `gtk_file_chooser_set_filter()`.
         * @returns the current filter, or `null`
         */
        get_filter(): FileFilter | null;

        /**
         * Gets whether only local files can be selected in the
         * file selector. See `gtk_file_chooser_set_local_only()`
         * @returns `true` if only local files can be selected.
         */
        get_local_only(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the {@link Gio.File} that should be previewed in a custom preview
         * Internal function, see `gtk_file_chooser_get_preview_uri()`.
         * @returns the {@link Gio.File} for the file to preview,     or `null` if no file is selected. Free with `g_object_unref()`.
         */
        get_preview_file(): Gio.File | null;

        /**
         * Gets the filename that should be previewed in a custom preview
         * widget. See `gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget()`.
         * @returns the filename to preview, or `null` if  no file is selected, or if the selected file cannot be represented  as a local filename. Free with `g_free()`
         */
        get_preview_filename(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the URI that should be previewed in a custom preview
         * widget. See `gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget()`.
         * @returns the URI for the file to preview,     or `null` if no file is selected. Free with `g_free()`.
         */
        get_preview_uri(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the current preview widget; see
         * `gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget()`.
         * @returns the current preview widget, or `null`
         */
        get_preview_widget(): Widget | null;

        /**
         * Gets whether the preview widget set by `gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget()`
         * should be shown for the current filename. See
         * `gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget_active()`.
         * @returns `true` if the preview widget is active for the current filename.
         */
        get_preview_widget_active(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets whether multiple files can be selected in the file
         * selector. See `gtk_file_chooser_set_select_multiple()`.
         * @returns `true` if multiple files can be selected.
         */
        get_select_multiple(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets whether hidden files and folders are displayed in the file selector.
         * See `gtk_file_chooser_set_show_hidden()`.
         * @returns `true` if hidden files and folders are displayed.
         */
        get_show_hidden(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the URI for the currently selected file in
         * the file selector. If multiple files are selected,
         * one of the filenames will be returned at random.
         * 
         * If the file chooser is in folder mode, this function returns the selected
         * folder.
         * @returns The currently selected URI, or `null`    if no file is selected. If `gtk_file_chooser_set_local_only()` is set to    `true` (the default) a local URI will be returned for any FUSE locations.    Free with `g_free()`
         */
        get_uri(): string | null;

        /**
         * Lists all the selected files and subfolders in the current folder of
         * `chooser`. The returned names are full absolute URIs.
         * @returns a {@link GLib.SList} containing the URIs of all selected   files and subfolders in the current folder. Free the returned list   with `g_slist_free()`, and the filenames with `g_free()`.
         */
        get_uris(): string[];

        /**
         * Gets whether a stock label should be drawn with the name of the previewed
         * file.  See `gtk_file_chooser_set_use_preview_label()`.
         * @returns `true` if the file chooser is set to display a label with the name of the previewed file, `false` otherwise.
         */
        get_use_preview_label(): boolean;

        /**
         * Lists the current set of user-selectable filters; see
         * `gtk_file_chooser_add_filter()`, `gtk_file_chooser_remove_filter()`.
         * @returns a  {@link GLib.SList} containing the current set of user selectable filters. The  contents of the list are owned by GTK+, but you must free the list  itself with `g_slist_free()` when you are done with it.
         */
        list_filters(): FileFilter[];

        /**
         * Queries the list of shortcut folders in the file chooser, as set by
         * `gtk_file_chooser_add_shortcut_folder_uri()`.
         * @returns A list of folder URIs, or `null` if there are no shortcut folders.  Free the returned list with `g_slist_free()`, and the URIs with `g_free()`.
         */
        list_shortcut_folder_uris(): string[] | null;

        /**
         * Queries the list of shortcut folders in the file chooser, as set by
         * `gtk_file_chooser_add_shortcut_folder()`.
         * @returns A list of folder filenames, or `null` if there are no shortcut folders. Free the returned list with `g_slist_free()`, and the filenames with `g_free()`.
         */
        list_shortcut_folders(): string[] | null;

        /**
         * Removes a 'choice' that has been added with `gtk_file_chooser_add_choice()`.
         * @param id the ID of the choice to remove
         */
        remove_choice(id: string): void;

        /**
         * Removes `filter` from the list of filters that the user can select between.
         * @param filter a {@link Gtk.FileFilter}
         */
        remove_filter(filter: FileFilter): void;

        /**
         * Removes a folder from a file chooser’s list of shortcut folders.
         * @param folder filename of the folder to remove
         * @returns `true` if the operation succeeds, `false` otherwise. In the latter case, the `error` will be set as appropriate. See also: `gtk_file_chooser_add_shortcut_folder()`
         */
        remove_shortcut_folder(folder: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Removes a folder URI from a file chooser’s list of shortcut folders.
         * @param uri URI of the folder to remove
         * @returns `true` if the operation succeeds, `false` otherwise. In the latter case, the `error` will be set as appropriate. See also: `gtk_file_chooser_add_shortcut_folder_uri()`
         */
        remove_shortcut_folder_uri(uri: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Selects all the files in the current folder of a file chooser.
         */
        select_all(): void;

        /**
         * Selects the file referred to by `file`. An internal function. See
         * _gtk_file_chooser_select_uri().
         * @param file the file to select
         * @returns Not useful.
         */
        select_file(file: Gio.File): boolean;

        /**
         * Selects a filename. If the file name isn’t in the current
         * folder of `chooser`, then the current folder of `chooser` will
         * be changed to the folder containing `filename`.
         * @param filename the filename to select
         * @returns Not useful. See also: `gtk_file_chooser_set_filename()`
         */
        select_filename(filename: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Selects the file to by `uri`. If the URI doesn’t refer to a
         * file in the current folder of `chooser`, then the current folder of
         * `chooser` will be changed to the folder containing `filename`.
         * @param uri the URI to select
         * @returns Not useful.
         */
        select_uri(uri: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the type of operation that the chooser is performing; the
         * user interface is adapted to suit the selected action. For example,
         * an option to create a new folder might be shown if the action is
         * {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.SAVE} but not if the action is
         * {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.OPEN}.
         * @param action the action that the file selector is performing
         */
        set_action(action: FileChooserAction): void;

        /**
         * Selects an option in a 'choice' that has been added with
         * `gtk_file_chooser_add_choice()`. For a boolean choice, the
         * possible options are "true" and "false".
         * @param id the ID of the choice to set
         * @param option the ID of the option to select
         */
        set_choice(id: string, option: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether file choser will offer to create new folders.
         * This is only relevant if the action is not set to be
         * {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.OPEN}.
         * @param create_folders `true` if the Create Folder button should be displayed
         */
        set_create_folders(create_folders: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the current folder for `chooser` from a local filename.
         * The user will be shown the full contents of the current folder,
         * plus user interface elements for navigating to other folders.
         * 
         * In general, you should not use this function.  See the
         * [section on setting up a file chooser dialog][gtkfilechooserdialog-setting-up]
         * for the rationale behind this.
         * @param filename the full path of the new current folder
         * @returns Not useful.
         */
        set_current_folder(filename: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the current folder for `chooser` from a {@link Gio.File}.
         * Internal function, see `gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder_uri()`.
         * @param file the {@link Gio.File} for the new folder
         * @returns `true` if the folder could be changed successfully, `false` otherwise.
         */
        set_current_folder_file(file: Gio.File): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the current folder for `chooser` from an URI.
         * The user will be shown the full contents of the current folder,
         * plus user interface elements for navigating to other folders.
         * 
         * In general, you should not use this function.  See the
         * [section on setting up a file chooser dialog][gtkfilechooserdialog-setting-up]
         * for the rationale behind this.
         * @param uri the URI for the new current folder
         * @returns `true` if the folder could be changed successfully, `false` otherwise.
         */
        set_current_folder_uri(uri: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the current name in the file selector, as if entered
         * by the user. Note that the name passed in here is a UTF-8
         * string rather than a filename. This function is meant for
         * such uses as a suggested name in a “Save As...” dialog.  You can
         * pass “Untitled.doc” or a similarly suitable suggestion for the `name`.
         * 
         * If you want to preselect a particular existing file, you should use
         * `gtk_file_chooser_set_filename()` or `gtk_file_chooser_set_uri()` instead.
         * Please see the documentation for those functions for an example of using
         * `gtk_file_chooser_set_current_name()` as well.
         * @param name the filename to use, as a UTF-8 string
         */
        set_current_name(name: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether a file chooser in {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.SAVE} mode will present
         * a confirmation dialog if the user types a file name that already exists.  This
         * is `false` by default.
         * 
         * If set to `true`, the `chooser` will emit the
         * {@link Gtk.FileChooser.SignalSignatures.confirm_overwrite | Gtk.FileChooser::confirm-overwrite} signal when appropriate.
         * 
         * If all you need is the stock confirmation dialog, set this property to `true`.
         * You can override the way confirmation is done by actually handling the
         * {@link Gtk.FileChooser.SignalSignatures.confirm_overwrite | Gtk.FileChooser::confirm-overwrite} signal; please refer to its documentation
         * for the details.
         * @param do_overwrite_confirmation whether to confirm overwriting in save mode
         */
        set_do_overwrite_confirmation(do_overwrite_confirmation: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets an application-supplied widget to provide extra options to the user.
         * @param extra_widget widget for extra options
         */
        set_extra_widget(extra_widget: Widget): void;

        /**
         * Sets `file` as the current filename for the file chooser, by changing
         * to the file’s parent folder and actually selecting the file in list.  If
         * the `chooser` is in {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.SAVE} mode, the file’s base name
         * will also appear in the dialog’s file name entry.
         * 
         * If the file name isn’t in the current folder of `chooser`, then the current
         * folder of `chooser` will be changed to the folder containing `filename`. This
         * is equivalent to a sequence of `gtk_file_chooser_unselect_all()` followed by
         * `gtk_file_chooser_select_filename()`.
         * 
         * Note that the file must exist, or nothing will be done except
         * for the directory change.
         * 
         * If you are implementing a save dialog,
         * you should use this function if you already have a file name to which the
         * user may save; for example, when the user opens an existing file and then
         * does Save As...  If you don’t have
         * a file name already — for example, if the user just created a new
         * file and is saving it for the first time, do not call this function.
         * Instead, use something similar to this:
         * 
         * ```c
         * if (document_is_new)
         *   {
         *     // the user just created a new document
         *     gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder_file (chooser, default_file_for_saving);
         *     gtk_file_chooser_set_current_name (chooser, "Untitled document");
         *   }
         * else
         *   {
         *     // the user edited an existing document
         *     gtk_file_chooser_set_file (chooser, existing_file);
         *   }
         * ```
         * 
         * @param file the {@link Gio.File} to set as current
         * @returns Not useful.
         */
        set_file(file: Gio.File): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets `filename` as the current filename for the file chooser, by changing to
         * the file’s parent folder and actually selecting the file in list; all other
         * files will be unselected.  If the `chooser` is in
         * {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.SAVE} mode, the file’s base name will also appear in
         * the dialog’s file name entry.
         * 
         * Note that the file must exist, or nothing will be done except
         * for the directory change.
         * 
         * You should use this function only when implementing a save
         * dialog for which you already have a file name to which
         * the user may save.  For example, when the user opens an existing file and
         * then does Save As... to save a copy or
         * a modified version.  If you don’t have a file name already — for
         * example, if the user just created a new file and is saving it for the first
         * time, do not call this function.  Instead, use something similar to this:
         * 
         * ```c
         * if (document_is_new)
         *   {
         *     // the user just created a new document
         *     gtk_file_chooser_set_current_name (chooser, "Untitled document");
         *   }
         * else
         *   {
         *     // the user edited an existing document
         *     gtk_file_chooser_set_filename (chooser, existing_filename);
         *   }
         * ```
         * 
         * 
         * In the first case, the file chooser will present the user with useful suggestions
         * as to where to save his new file.  In the second case, the file’s existing location
         * is already known, so the file chooser will use it.
         * @param filename the filename to set as current
         * @returns Not useful.
         */
        set_filename(filename: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the current filter; only the files that pass the
         * filter will be displayed. If the user-selectable list of filters
         * is non-empty, then the filter should be one of the filters
         * in that list. Setting the current filter when the list of
         * filters is empty is useful if you want to restrict the displayed
         * set of files without letting the user change it.
         * @param filter a {@link Gtk.FileFilter}
         */
        set_filter(filter: FileFilter): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether only local files can be selected in the
         * file selector. If `local_only` is `true` (the default),
         * then the selected file or files are guaranteed to be
         * accessible through the operating systems native file
         * system and therefore the application only
         * needs to worry about the filename functions in
         * {@link Gtk.FileChooser}, like `gtk_file_chooser_get_filename()`,
         * rather than the URI functions like
         * `gtk_file_chooser_get_uri()`,
         * 
         * On some systems non-native files may still be
         * available using the native filesystem via a userspace
         * filesystem (FUSE).
         * @param local_only `true` if only local files can be selected
         */
        set_local_only(local_only: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets an application-supplied widget to use to display a custom preview
         * of the currently selected file. To implement a preview, after setting the
         * preview widget, you connect to the {@link Gtk.FileChooser.SignalSignatures.update_preview | Gtk.FileChooser::update-preview}
         * signal, and call `gtk_file_chooser_get_preview_filename()` or
         * `gtk_file_chooser_get_preview_uri()` on each change. If you can
         * display a preview of the new file, update your widget and
         * set the preview active using `gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget_active()`.
         * Otherwise, set the preview inactive.
         * 
         * When there is no application-supplied preview widget, or the
         * application-supplied preview widget is not active, the file chooser
         * will display no preview at all.
         * @param preview_widget widget for displaying preview.
         */
        set_preview_widget(preview_widget: Widget): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the preview widget set by
         * `gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget()` should be shown for the
         * current filename. When `active` is set to false, the file chooser
         * may display an internally generated preview of the current file
         * or it may display no preview at all. See
         * `gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget()` for more details.
         * @param active whether to display the user-specified preview widget
         */
        set_preview_widget_active(active: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether multiple files can be selected in the file selector.  This is
         * only relevant if the action is set to be {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.OPEN} or
         * {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.SELECT_FOLDER}.
         * @param select_multiple `true` if multiple files can be selected.
         */
        set_select_multiple(select_multiple: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether hidden files and folders are displayed in the file selector.
         * @param show_hidden `true` if hidden files and folders should be displayed.
         */
        set_show_hidden(show_hidden: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the file referred to by `uri` as the current file for the file chooser,
         * by changing to the URI’s parent folder and actually selecting the URI in the
         * list.  If the `chooser` is {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.SAVE} mode, the URI’s base
         * name will also appear in the dialog’s file name entry.
         * 
         * Note that the URI must exist, or nothing will be done except for the
         * directory change.
         * 
         * You should use this function only when implementing a save
         * dialog for which you already have a file name to which
         * the user may save.  For example, when the user opens an existing file and then
         * does Save As... to save a copy or a
         * modified version.  If you don’t have a file name already — for example,
         * if the user just created a new file and is saving it for the first time, do
         * not call this function.  Instead, use something similar to this:
         * 
         * ```c
         * if (document_is_new)
         *   {
         *     // the user just created a new document
         *     gtk_file_chooser_set_current_name (chooser, "Untitled document");
         *   }
         * else
         *   {
         *     // the user edited an existing document
         *     gtk_file_chooser_set_uri (chooser, existing_uri);
         *   }
         * ```
         * 
         * 
         * 
         * In the first case, the file chooser will present the user with useful suggestions
         * as to where to save his new file.  In the second case, the file’s existing location
         * is already known, so the file chooser will use it.
         * @param uri the URI to set as current
         * @returns Not useful.
         */
        set_uri(uri: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets whether the file chooser should display a stock label with the name of
         * the file that is being previewed; the default is `true`.  Applications that
         * want to draw the whole preview area themselves should set this to `false` and
         * display the name themselves in their preview widget.
         * 
         * See also: `gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget()`
         * @param use_label whether to display a stock label with the name of the previewed file
         */
        set_use_preview_label(use_label: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Unselects all the files in the current folder of a file chooser.
         */
        unselect_all(): void;

        /**
         * Unselects the file referred to by `file`. If the file is not in the current
         * directory, does not exist, or is otherwise not currently selected, does nothing.
         * @param file a {@link Gio.File}
         */
        unselect_file(file: Gio.File): void;

        /**
         * Unselects a currently selected filename. If the filename
         * is not in the current directory, does not exist, or
         * is otherwise not currently selected, does nothing.
         * @param filename the filename to unselect
         */
        unselect_filename(filename: string): void;

        /**
         * Unselects the file referred to by `uri`. If the file
         * is not in the current directory, does not exist, or
         * is otherwise not currently selected, does nothing.
         * @param uri the URI to unselect
         */
        unselect_uri(uri: string): void;
    }


    namespace FileChooserNative {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends NativeDialog.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::accept-label": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::cancel-label": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::modal": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::title": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::transient-for": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::action": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::create-folders": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::do-overwrite-confirmation": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::extra-widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::filter": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::local-only": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::preview-widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::preview-widget-active": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::select-multiple": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::show-hidden": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-preview-label": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends NativeDialog.ConstructorProps, FileChooser.ConstructorProps {
            accept_label: string | null;
            acceptLabel: string | null;
            cancel_label: string | null;
            cancelLabel: string | null;
        }
    }

    /**
     * {@link Gtk.FileChooserNative} is an abstraction of a dialog box suitable
     * for use with “File/Open” or “File/Save as” commands. By default, this
     * just uses a {@link Gtk.FileChooserDialog} to implement the actual dialog.
     * However, on certain platforms, such as Windows and macOS, the native platform
     * file chooser is used instead. When the application is running in a
     * sandboxed environment without direct filesystem access (such as Flatpak),
     * {@link Gtk.FileChooserNative} may call the proper APIs (portals) to let the user
     * choose a file and make it available to the application.
     * 
     * While the API of {@link Gtk.FileChooserNative} closely mirrors {@link Gtk.FileChooserDialog}, the main
     * difference is that there is no access to any {@link Gtk.Window} or {@link Gtk.Widget} for the dialog.
     * This is required, as there may not be one in the case of a platform native dialog.
     * Showing, hiding and running the dialog is handled by the {@link Gtk.NativeDialog} functions.
     * 
     * ## Typical usage ## {#gtkfilechoosernative-typical-usage}
     * 
     * In the simplest of cases, you can the following code to use
     * {@link Gtk.FileChooserDialog} to select a file for opening:
     * 
     * 
     * ```
     * GtkFileChooserNative *native;
     * GtkFileChooserAction action = GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_OPEN;
     * gint res;
     * 
     * native = gtk_file_chooser_native_new ("Open File",
     *                                       parent_window,
     *                                       action,
     *                                       "_Open",
     *                                       "_Cancel");
     * 
     * res = gtk_native_dialog_run (GTK_NATIVE_DIALOG (native));
     * if (res == GTK_RESPONSE_ACCEPT)
     *   {
     *     char *filename;
     *     GtkFileChooser *chooser = GTK_FILE_CHOOSER (native);
     *     filename = gtk_file_chooser_get_filename (chooser);
     *     open_file (filename);
     *     g_free (filename);
     *   }
     * 
     * g_object_unref (native);
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * To use a dialog for saving, you can use this:
     * 
     * 
     * ```
     * GtkFileChooserNative *native;
     * GtkFileChooser *chooser;
     * GtkFileChooserAction action = GTK_FILE_CHOOSER_ACTION_SAVE;
     * gint res;
     * 
     * native = gtk_file_chooser_native_new ("Save File",
     *                                       parent_window,
     *                                       action,
     *                                       "_Save",
     *                                       "_Cancel");
     * chooser = GTK_FILE_CHOOSER (native);
     * 
     * gtk_file_chooser_set_do_overwrite_confirmation (chooser, TRUE);
     * 
     * if (user_edited_a_new_document)
     *   gtk_file_chooser_set_current_name (chooser,
     *                                      _("Untitled document"));
     * else
     *   gtk_file_chooser_set_filename (chooser,
     *                                  existing_filename);
     * 
     * res = gtk_native_dialog_run (GTK_NATIVE_DIALOG (native));
     * if (res == GTK_RESPONSE_ACCEPT)
     *   {
     *     char *filename;
     * 
     *     filename = gtk_file_chooser_get_filename (chooser);
     *     save_to_file (filename);
     *     g_free (filename);
     *   }
     * 
     * g_object_unref (native);
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * For more information on how to best set up a file dialog, see {@link Gtk.FileChooserDialog}.
     * 
     * ## Response Codes ## {#gtkfilechooserdialognative-responses}
     * 
     * {@link Gtk.FileChooserNative} inherits from {@link Gtk.NativeDialog}, which means it
     * will return #GTK_RESPONSE_ACCEPT if the user accepted, and
     * #GTK_RESPONSE_CANCEL if he pressed cancel. It can also return
     * #GTK_RESPONSE_DELETE_EVENT if the window was unexpectedly closed.
     * 
     * ## Differences from {@link Gtk.FileChooserDialog} ##  {#gtkfilechooserdialognative-differences}
     * 
     * There are a few things in the GtkFileChooser API that are not
     * possible to use with {@link Gtk.FileChooserNative}, as such use would
     * prohibit the use of a native dialog.
     * 
     * There is no support for the signals that are emitted when the user
     * navigates in the dialog, including:
     * * {@link Gtk.FileChooser.SignalSignatures.current_folder_changed | Gtk.FileChooser::current-folder-changed}
     * * {@link Gtk.FileChooser.SignalSignatures.selection_changed | Gtk.FileChooser::selection-changed}
     * * {@link Gtk.FileChooser.SignalSignatures.file_activated | Gtk.FileChooser::file-activated}
     * * {@link Gtk.FileChooser.SignalSignatures.confirm_overwrite | Gtk.FileChooser::confirm-overwrite}
     * 
     * You can also not use the methods that directly control user navigation:
     * * `gtk_file_chooser_unselect_filename()`
     * * `gtk_file_chooser_select_all()`
     * * `gtk_file_chooser_unselect_all()`
     * 
     * If you need any of the above you will have to use {@link Gtk.FileChooserDialog} directly.
     * 
     * No operations that change the the dialog work while the dialog is
     * visible. Set all the properties that are required before showing the dialog.
     * 
     * ## Win32 details ## {#gtkfilechooserdialognative-win32}
     * 
     * On windows the IFileDialog implementation (added in Windows Vista) is
     * used. It supports many of the features that {@link Gtk.FileChooserDialog}
     * does, but there are some things it does not handle:
     * 
     * * Extra widgets added with `gtk_file_chooser_set_extra_widget()`.
     * 
     * * Use of custom previews by connecting to {@link Gtk.FileChooser.SignalSignatures.update_preview | Gtk.FileChooser::update-preview}.
     * 
     * * Any {@link Gtk.FileFilter} added using a mimetype or custom filter.
     * 
     * If any of these features are used the regular {@link Gtk.FileChooserDialog}
     * will be used in place of the native one.
     * 
     * ## Portal details ## {#gtkfilechooserdialognative-portal}
     * 
     * When the org.freedesktop.portal.FileChooser portal is available on the
     * session bus, it is used to bring up an out-of-process file chooser. Depending
     * on the kind of session the application is running in, this may or may not
     * be a GTK+ file chooser. In this situation, the following things are not
     * supported and will be silently ignored:
     * 
     * * Extra widgets added with `gtk_file_chooser_set_extra_widget()`.
     * 
     * * Use of custom previews by connecting to {@link Gtk.FileChooser.SignalSignatures.update_preview | Gtk.FileChooser::update-preview}.
     * 
     * * Any {@link Gtk.FileFilter} added with a custom filter.
     * 
     * ## macOS details ## {#gtkfilechooserdialognative-macos}
     * 
     * On macOS the NSSavePanel and NSOpenPanel classes are used to provide native
     * file chooser dialogs. Some features provided by {@link Gtk.FileChooserDialog} are
     * not supported:
     * 
     * * Extra widgets added with `gtk_file_chooser_set_extra_widget()`, unless the
     *   widget is an instance of GtkLabel, in which case the label text will be used
     *   to set the NSSavePanel message instance property.
     * 
     * * Use of custom previews by connecting to {@link Gtk.FileChooser.SignalSignatures.update_preview | Gtk.FileChooser::update-preview}.
     * 
     * * Any {@link Gtk.FileFilter} added with a custom filter.
     * 
     * * Shortcut folders.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class FileChooserNative extends NativeDialog implements FileChooser {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<FileChooserNative>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * The text used for the label on the accept button in the dialog, or
         * `null` to use the default text.
         * @default null
         */
        get accept_label(): string | null;
        set accept_label(val: string | null);

        /**
         * The text used for the label on the accept button in the dialog, or
         * `null` to use the default text.
         * @default null
         */
        get acceptLabel(): string | null;
        set acceptLabel(val: string | null);

        /**
         * The text used for the label on the cancel button in the dialog, or
         * `null` to use the default text.
         * @default null
         */
        get cancel_label(): string | null;
        set cancel_label(val: string | null);

        /**
         * The text used for the label on the cancel button in the dialog, or
         * `null` to use the default text.
         * @default null
         */
        get cancelLabel(): string | null;
        set cancelLabel(val: string | null);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: FileChooserNative.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<FileChooserNative.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](title: string | null, parent: Window | null, action: FileChooserAction, accept_label: string | null, cancel_label: string | null): FileChooserNative;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof FileChooserNative.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, FileChooserNative.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof FileChooserNative.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, FileChooserNative.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof FileChooserNative.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<FileChooserNative.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Retrieves the custom label text for the accept button.
         * @returns The custom label, or `null` for the default. This string is owned by GTK+ and should not be modified or freed
         */
        get_accept_label(): string | null;

        /**
         * Retrieves the custom label text for the cancel button.
         * @returns The custom label, or `null` for the default. This string is owned by GTK+ and should not be modified or freed
         */
        get_cancel_label(): string | null;

        /**
         * Sets the custom label text for the accept button.
         * 
         * If characters in `label` are preceded by an underscore, they are underlined.
         * If you need a literal underscore character in a label, use “__” (two
         * underscores). The first underlined character represents a keyboard
         * accelerator called a mnemonic.
         * Pressing Alt and that key activates the button.
         * @param accept_label custom label or `null` for the default
         */
        set_accept_label(accept_label: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the custom label text for the cancel button.
         * 
         * If characters in `label` are preceded by an underscore, they are underlined.
         * If you need a literal underscore character in a label, use “__” (two
         * underscores). The first underlined character represents a keyboard
         * accelerator called a mnemonic.
         * Pressing Alt and that key activates the button.
         * @param cancel_label custom label or `null` for the default
         */
        set_cancel_label(cancel_label: string | null): void;

        /**
         * @default Gtk.FileChooserAction.OPEN
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser
         */
        get action(): FileChooserAction;
        set action(val: FileChooserAction);

        /**
         * Whether a file chooser not in {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.OPEN} mode
         * will offer the user to create new folders.
         * @since 2.18
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser
         */
        get create_folders(): boolean;
        set create_folders(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether a file chooser not in {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.OPEN} mode
         * will offer the user to create new folders.
         * @since 2.18
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser
         */
        get createFolders(): boolean;
        set createFolders(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether a file chooser in {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.SAVE} mode
         * will present an overwrite confirmation dialog if the user
         * selects a file name that already exists.
         * @since 2.8
         * @default false
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser
         */
        get do_overwrite_confirmation(): boolean;
        set do_overwrite_confirmation(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether a file chooser in {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.SAVE} mode
         * will present an overwrite confirmation dialog if the user
         * selects a file name that already exists.
         * @since 2.8
         * @default false
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser
         */
        get doOverwriteConfirmation(): boolean;
        set doOverwriteConfirmation(val: boolean);

        /** @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser */
        get extra_widget(): Widget | null;
        set extra_widget(val: Widget | null);

        /** @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser */
        get extraWidget(): Widget | null;
        set extraWidget(val: Widget | null);

        /** @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser */
        get filter(): FileFilter | null;
        set filter(val: FileFilter | null);

        /**
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser
         */
        get local_only(): boolean;
        set local_only(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser
         */
        get localOnly(): boolean;
        set localOnly(val: boolean);

        /** @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser */
        get preview_widget(): Widget | null;
        set preview_widget(val: Widget | null);

        /** @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser */
        get previewWidget(): Widget | null;
        set previewWidget(val: Widget | null);

        /**
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser
         */
        get preview_widget_active(): boolean;
        set preview_widget_active(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser
         */
        get previewWidgetActive(): boolean;
        set previewWidgetActive(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser
         */
        get select_multiple(): boolean;
        set select_multiple(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser
         */
        get selectMultiple(): boolean;
        set selectMultiple(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser
         */
        get show_hidden(): boolean;
        set show_hidden(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser
         */
        get showHidden(): boolean;
        set showHidden(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser
         */
        get use_preview_label(): boolean;
        set use_preview_label(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser
         */
        get usePreviewLabel(): boolean;
        set usePreviewLabel(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Adds a 'choice' to the file chooser. This is typically implemented
         * as a combobox or, for boolean choices, as a checkbutton. You can select
         * a value using `gtk_file_chooser_set_choice()` before the dialog is shown,
         * and you can obtain the user-selected value in the ::response signal handler
         * using `gtk_file_chooser_get_choice()`.
         * 
         * Compare `gtk_file_chooser_set_extra_widget()`.
         * @param id id for the added choice
         * @param label user-visible label for the added choice
         * @param options ids for the options of the choice, or `null` for a boolean choice
         * @param option_labels user-visible labels for the options, must be the same length as `options`
         */
        add_choice(id: string, label: string, options: string[] | null, option_labels: string[] | null): void;

        /**
         * Adds `filter` to the list of filters that the user can select between.
         * When a filter is selected, only files that are passed by that
         * filter are displayed.
         * 
         * Note that the `chooser` takes ownership of the filter, so you have to
         * ref and sink it if you want to keep a reference.
         * @param filter a {@link Gtk.FileFilter}
         */
        add_filter(filter: FileFilter): void;

        /**
         * Adds a folder to be displayed with the shortcut folders in a file chooser.
         * Note that shortcut folders do not get saved, as they are provided by the
         * application.  For example, you can use this to add a
         * “/usr/share/mydrawprogram/Clipart” folder to the volume list.
         * @param folder filename of the folder to add
         * @returns `true` if the folder could be added successfully, `false` otherwise.  In the latter case, the `error` will be set as appropriate.
         */
        add_shortcut_folder(folder: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Adds a folder URI to be displayed with the shortcut folders in a file
         * chooser.  Note that shortcut folders do not get saved, as they are provided
         * by the application.  For example, you can use this to add a
         * “file:///usr/share/mydrawprogram/Clipart” folder to the volume list.
         * @param uri URI of the folder to add
         * @returns `true` if the folder could be added successfully, `false` otherwise.  In the latter case, the `error` will be set as appropriate.
         */
        add_shortcut_folder_uri(uri: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the type of operation that the file chooser is performing; see
         * `gtk_file_chooser_set_action()`.
         * @returns the action that the file selector is performing
         */
        get_action(): FileChooserAction;

        /**
         * Gets the currently selected option in the 'choice' with the given ID.
         * @param id the ID of the choice to get
         * @returns the ID of the currenly selected option
         */
        get_choice(id: string): string;

        /**
         * Gets whether file choser will offer to create new folders.
         * See `gtk_file_chooser_set_create_folders()`.
         * @returns `true` if the Create Folder button should be displayed.
         */
        get_create_folders(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the current folder of `chooser` as a local filename.
         * See `gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder()`.
         * 
         * Note that this is the folder that the file chooser is currently displaying
         * (e.g. "/home/username/Documents"), which is not the same
         * as the currently-selected folder if the chooser is in
         * {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.SELECT_FOLDER} mode
         * (e.g. "/home/username/Documents/selected-folder/".  To get the
         * currently-selected folder in that mode, use `gtk_file_chooser_get_uri()` as the
         * usual way to get the selection.
         * @returns the full path of the current folder, or `null` if the current path cannot be represented as a local filename.  Free with `g_free()`.  This function will also return `null` if the file chooser was unable to load the last folder that was requested from it; for example, as would be for calling `gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder()` on a nonexistent folder.
         */
        get_current_folder(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the current folder of `chooser` as {@link Gio.File}.
         * See `gtk_file_chooser_get_current_folder_uri()`.
         * @returns the {@link Gio.File} for the current folder.
         */
        get_current_folder_file(): Gio.File | null;

        /**
         * Gets the current folder of `chooser` as an URI.
         * See `gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder_uri()`.
         * 
         * Note that this is the folder that the file chooser is currently displaying
         * (e.g. "file:///home/username/Documents"), which is not the same
         * as the currently-selected folder if the chooser is in
         * {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.SELECT_FOLDER} mode
         * (e.g. "file:///home/username/Documents/selected-folder/".  To get the
         * currently-selected folder in that mode, use `gtk_file_chooser_get_uri()` as the
         * usual way to get the selection.
         * @returns the URI for the current folder. Free with `g_free()`.  This function will also return `null` if the file chooser was unable to load the last folder that was requested from it; for example, as would be for calling `gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder_uri()` on a nonexistent folder.
         */
        get_current_folder_uri(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the current name in the file selector, as entered by the user in the
         * text entry for “Name”.
         * 
         * This is meant to be used in save dialogs, to get the currently typed filename
         * when the file itself does not exist yet.  For example, an application that
         * adds a custom extra widget to the file chooser for “file format” may want to
         * change the extension of the typed filename based on the chosen format, say,
         * from “.jpg” to “.png”.
         * @returns The raw text from the file chooser’s “Name” entry.  Free this with `g_free()`.  Note that this string is not a full pathname or URI; it is whatever the contents of the entry are.  Note also that this string is in UTF-8 encoding, which is not necessarily the system’s encoding for filenames.
         */
        get_current_name(): string;

        /**
         * Queries whether a file chooser is set to confirm for overwriting when the user
         * types a file name that already exists.
         * @returns `true` if the file chooser will present a confirmation dialog; `false` otherwise.
         */
        get_do_overwrite_confirmation(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the current extra widget; see
         * `gtk_file_chooser_set_extra_widget()`.
         * @returns the current extra widget, or `null`
         */
        get_extra_widget(): Widget | null;

        /**
         * Gets the {@link Gio.File} for the currently selected file in
         * the file selector. If multiple files are selected,
         * one of the files will be returned at random.
         * 
         * If the file chooser is in folder mode, this function returns the selected
         * folder.
         * @returns a selected {@link Gio.File}. You own the returned file;     use `g_object_unref()` to release it.
         */
        get_file(): Gio.File;

        /**
         * Gets the filename for the currently selected file in
         * the file selector. The filename is returned as an absolute path. If
         * multiple files are selected, one of the filenames will be returned at
         * random.
         * 
         * If the file chooser is in folder mode, this function returns the selected
         * folder.
         * @returns The currently selected filename,  or `null` if no file is selected, or the selected file can't  be represented with a local filename. Free with `g_free()`.
         */
        get_filename(): string | null;

        /**
         * Lists all the selected files and subfolders in the current folder of
         * `chooser`. The returned names are full absolute paths. If files in the current
         * folder cannot be represented as local filenames they will be ignored. (See
         * `gtk_file_chooser_get_uris()`)
         * @returns a {@link GLib.SList}    containing the filenames of all selected files and subfolders in    the current folder. Free the returned list with `g_slist_free()`,    and the filenames with `g_free()`.
         */
        get_filenames(): string[];

        /**
         * Lists all the selected files and subfolders in the current folder of `chooser`
         * as {@link Gio.File}. An internal function, see `gtk_file_chooser_get_uris()`.
         * @returns a {@link GLib.SList}   containing a {@link Gio.File} for each selected file and subfolder in the   current folder.  Free the returned list with `g_slist_free()`, and   the files with `g_object_unref()`.
         */
        get_files(): Gio.File[];

        /**
         * Gets the current filter; see `gtk_file_chooser_set_filter()`.
         * @returns the current filter, or `null`
         */
        get_filter(): FileFilter | null;

        /**
         * Gets whether only local files can be selected in the
         * file selector. See `gtk_file_chooser_set_local_only()`
         * @returns `true` if only local files can be selected.
         */
        get_local_only(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the {@link Gio.File} that should be previewed in a custom preview
         * Internal function, see `gtk_file_chooser_get_preview_uri()`.
         * @returns the {@link Gio.File} for the file to preview,     or `null` if no file is selected. Free with `g_object_unref()`.
         */
        get_preview_file(): Gio.File | null;

        /**
         * Gets the filename that should be previewed in a custom preview
         * widget. See `gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget()`.
         * @returns the filename to preview, or `null` if  no file is selected, or if the selected file cannot be represented  as a local filename. Free with `g_free()`
         */
        get_preview_filename(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the URI that should be previewed in a custom preview
         * widget. See `gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget()`.
         * @returns the URI for the file to preview,     or `null` if no file is selected. Free with `g_free()`.
         */
        get_preview_uri(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the current preview widget; see
         * `gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget()`.
         * @returns the current preview widget, or `null`
         */
        get_preview_widget(): Widget | null;

        /**
         * Gets whether the preview widget set by `gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget()`
         * should be shown for the current filename. See
         * `gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget_active()`.
         * @returns `true` if the preview widget is active for the current filename.
         */
        get_preview_widget_active(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets whether multiple files can be selected in the file
         * selector. See `gtk_file_chooser_set_select_multiple()`.
         * @returns `true` if multiple files can be selected.
         */
        get_select_multiple(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets whether hidden files and folders are displayed in the file selector.
         * See `gtk_file_chooser_set_show_hidden()`.
         * @returns `true` if hidden files and folders are displayed.
         */
        get_show_hidden(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the URI for the currently selected file in
         * the file selector. If multiple files are selected,
         * one of the filenames will be returned at random.
         * 
         * If the file chooser is in folder mode, this function returns the selected
         * folder.
         * @returns The currently selected URI, or `null`    if no file is selected. If `gtk_file_chooser_set_local_only()` is set to    `true` (the default) a local URI will be returned for any FUSE locations.    Free with `g_free()`
         */
        get_uri(): string | null;

        /**
         * Lists all the selected files and subfolders in the current folder of
         * `chooser`. The returned names are full absolute URIs.
         * @returns a {@link GLib.SList} containing the URIs of all selected   files and subfolders in the current folder. Free the returned list   with `g_slist_free()`, and the filenames with `g_free()`.
         */
        get_uris(): string[];

        /**
         * Gets whether a stock label should be drawn with the name of the previewed
         * file.  See `gtk_file_chooser_set_use_preview_label()`.
         * @returns `true` if the file chooser is set to display a label with the name of the previewed file, `false` otherwise.
         */
        get_use_preview_label(): boolean;

        /**
         * Lists the current set of user-selectable filters; see
         * `gtk_file_chooser_add_filter()`, `gtk_file_chooser_remove_filter()`.
         * @returns a  {@link GLib.SList} containing the current set of user selectable filters. The  contents of the list are owned by GTK+, but you must free the list  itself with `g_slist_free()` when you are done with it.
         */
        list_filters(): FileFilter[];

        /**
         * Queries the list of shortcut folders in the file chooser, as set by
         * `gtk_file_chooser_add_shortcut_folder_uri()`.
         * @returns A list of folder URIs, or `null` if there are no shortcut folders.  Free the returned list with `g_slist_free()`, and the URIs with `g_free()`.
         */
        list_shortcut_folder_uris(): string[] | null;

        /**
         * Queries the list of shortcut folders in the file chooser, as set by
         * `gtk_file_chooser_add_shortcut_folder()`.
         * @returns A list of folder filenames, or `null` if there are no shortcut folders. Free the returned list with `g_slist_free()`, and the filenames with `g_free()`.
         */
        list_shortcut_folders(): string[] | null;

        /**
         * Removes a 'choice' that has been added with `gtk_file_chooser_add_choice()`.
         * @param id the ID of the choice to remove
         */
        remove_choice(id: string): void;

        /**
         * Removes `filter` from the list of filters that the user can select between.
         * @param filter a {@link Gtk.FileFilter}
         */
        remove_filter(filter: FileFilter): void;

        /**
         * Removes a folder from a file chooser’s list of shortcut folders.
         * @param folder filename of the folder to remove
         * @returns `true` if the operation succeeds, `false` otherwise. In the latter case, the `error` will be set as appropriate. See also: `gtk_file_chooser_add_shortcut_folder()`
         */
        remove_shortcut_folder(folder: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Removes a folder URI from a file chooser’s list of shortcut folders.
         * @param uri URI of the folder to remove
         * @returns `true` if the operation succeeds, `false` otherwise. In the latter case, the `error` will be set as appropriate. See also: `gtk_file_chooser_add_shortcut_folder_uri()`
         */
        remove_shortcut_folder_uri(uri: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Selects all the files in the current folder of a file chooser.
         */
        select_all(): void;

        /**
         * Selects the file referred to by `file`. An internal function. See
         * _gtk_file_chooser_select_uri().
         * @param file the file to select
         * @returns Not useful.
         */
        select_file(file: Gio.File): boolean;

        /**
         * Selects a filename. If the file name isn’t in the current
         * folder of `chooser`, then the current folder of `chooser` will
         * be changed to the folder containing `filename`.
         * @param filename the filename to select
         * @returns Not useful. See also: `gtk_file_chooser_set_filename()`
         */
        select_filename(filename: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Selects the file to by `uri`. If the URI doesn’t refer to a
         * file in the current folder of `chooser`, then the current folder of
         * `chooser` will be changed to the folder containing `filename`.
         * @param uri the URI to select
         * @returns Not useful.
         */
        select_uri(uri: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the type of operation that the chooser is performing; the
         * user interface is adapted to suit the selected action. For example,
         * an option to create a new folder might be shown if the action is
         * {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.SAVE} but not if the action is
         * {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.OPEN}.
         * @param action the action that the file selector is performing
         */
        set_action(action: FileChooserAction): void;

        /**
         * Selects an option in a 'choice' that has been added with
         * `gtk_file_chooser_add_choice()`. For a boolean choice, the
         * possible options are "true" and "false".
         * @param id the ID of the choice to set
         * @param option the ID of the option to select
         */
        set_choice(id: string, option: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether file choser will offer to create new folders.
         * This is only relevant if the action is not set to be
         * {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.OPEN}.
         * @param create_folders `true` if the Create Folder button should be displayed
         */
        set_create_folders(create_folders: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the current folder for `chooser` from a local filename.
         * The user will be shown the full contents of the current folder,
         * plus user interface elements for navigating to other folders.
         * 
         * In general, you should not use this function.  See the
         * [section on setting up a file chooser dialog][gtkfilechooserdialog-setting-up]
         * for the rationale behind this.
         * @param filename the full path of the new current folder
         * @returns Not useful.
         */
        set_current_folder(filename: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the current folder for `chooser` from a {@link Gio.File}.
         * Internal function, see `gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder_uri()`.
         * @param file the {@link Gio.File} for the new folder
         * @returns `true` if the folder could be changed successfully, `false` otherwise.
         */
        set_current_folder_file(file: Gio.File): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the current folder for `chooser` from an URI.
         * The user will be shown the full contents of the current folder,
         * plus user interface elements for navigating to other folders.
         * 
         * In general, you should not use this function.  See the
         * [section on setting up a file chooser dialog][gtkfilechooserdialog-setting-up]
         * for the rationale behind this.
         * @param uri the URI for the new current folder
         * @returns `true` if the folder could be changed successfully, `false` otherwise.
         */
        set_current_folder_uri(uri: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the current name in the file selector, as if entered
         * by the user. Note that the name passed in here is a UTF-8
         * string rather than a filename. This function is meant for
         * such uses as a suggested name in a “Save As...” dialog.  You can
         * pass “Untitled.doc” or a similarly suitable suggestion for the `name`.
         * 
         * If you want to preselect a particular existing file, you should use
         * `gtk_file_chooser_set_filename()` or `gtk_file_chooser_set_uri()` instead.
         * Please see the documentation for those functions for an example of using
         * `gtk_file_chooser_set_current_name()` as well.
         * @param name the filename to use, as a UTF-8 string
         */
        set_current_name(name: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether a file chooser in {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.SAVE} mode will present
         * a confirmation dialog if the user types a file name that already exists.  This
         * is `false` by default.
         * 
         * If set to `true`, the `chooser` will emit the
         * {@link Gtk.FileChooser.SignalSignatures.confirm_overwrite | Gtk.FileChooser::confirm-overwrite} signal when appropriate.
         * 
         * If all you need is the stock confirmation dialog, set this property to `true`.
         * You can override the way confirmation is done by actually handling the
         * {@link Gtk.FileChooser.SignalSignatures.confirm_overwrite | Gtk.FileChooser::confirm-overwrite} signal; please refer to its documentation
         * for the details.
         * @param do_overwrite_confirmation whether to confirm overwriting in save mode
         */
        set_do_overwrite_confirmation(do_overwrite_confirmation: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets an application-supplied widget to provide extra options to the user.
         * @param extra_widget widget for extra options
         */
        set_extra_widget(extra_widget: Widget): void;

        /**
         * Sets `file` as the current filename for the file chooser, by changing
         * to the file’s parent folder and actually selecting the file in list.  If
         * the `chooser` is in {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.SAVE} mode, the file’s base name
         * will also appear in the dialog’s file name entry.
         * 
         * If the file name isn’t in the current folder of `chooser`, then the current
         * folder of `chooser` will be changed to the folder containing `filename`. This
         * is equivalent to a sequence of `gtk_file_chooser_unselect_all()` followed by
         * `gtk_file_chooser_select_filename()`.
         * 
         * Note that the file must exist, or nothing will be done except
         * for the directory change.
         * 
         * If you are implementing a save dialog,
         * you should use this function if you already have a file name to which the
         * user may save; for example, when the user opens an existing file and then
         * does Save As...  If you don’t have
         * a file name already — for example, if the user just created a new
         * file and is saving it for the first time, do not call this function.
         * Instead, use something similar to this:
         * 
         * ```c
         * if (document_is_new)
         *   {
         *     // the user just created a new document
         *     gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder_file (chooser, default_file_for_saving);
         *     gtk_file_chooser_set_current_name (chooser, "Untitled document");
         *   }
         * else
         *   {
         *     // the user edited an existing document
         *     gtk_file_chooser_set_file (chooser, existing_file);
         *   }
         * ```
         * 
         * @param file the {@link Gio.File} to set as current
         * @returns Not useful.
         */
        set_file(file: Gio.File): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets `filename` as the current filename for the file chooser, by changing to
         * the file’s parent folder and actually selecting the file in list; all other
         * files will be unselected.  If the `chooser` is in
         * {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.SAVE} mode, the file’s base name will also appear in
         * the dialog’s file name entry.
         * 
         * Note that the file must exist, or nothing will be done except
         * for the directory change.
         * 
         * You should use this function only when implementing a save
         * dialog for which you already have a file name to which
         * the user may save.  For example, when the user opens an existing file and
         * then does Save As... to save a copy or
         * a modified version.  If you don’t have a file name already — for
         * example, if the user just created a new file and is saving it for the first
         * time, do not call this function.  Instead, use something similar to this:
         * 
         * ```c
         * if (document_is_new)
         *   {
         *     // the user just created a new document
         *     gtk_file_chooser_set_current_name (chooser, "Untitled document");
         *   }
         * else
         *   {
         *     // the user edited an existing document
         *     gtk_file_chooser_set_filename (chooser, existing_filename);
         *   }
         * ```
         * 
         * 
         * In the first case, the file chooser will present the user with useful suggestions
         * as to where to save his new file.  In the second case, the file’s existing location
         * is already known, so the file chooser will use it.
         * @param filename the filename to set as current
         * @returns Not useful.
         */
        set_filename(filename: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the current filter; only the files that pass the
         * filter will be displayed. If the user-selectable list of filters
         * is non-empty, then the filter should be one of the filters
         * in that list. Setting the current filter when the list of
         * filters is empty is useful if you want to restrict the displayed
         * set of files without letting the user change it.
         * @param filter a {@link Gtk.FileFilter}
         */
        set_filter(filter: FileFilter): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether only local files can be selected in the
         * file selector. If `local_only` is `true` (the default),
         * then the selected file or files are guaranteed to be
         * accessible through the operating systems native file
         * system and therefore the application only
         * needs to worry about the filename functions in
         * {@link Gtk.FileChooser}, like `gtk_file_chooser_get_filename()`,
         * rather than the URI functions like
         * `gtk_file_chooser_get_uri()`,
         * 
         * On some systems non-native files may still be
         * available using the native filesystem via a userspace
         * filesystem (FUSE).
         * @param local_only `true` if only local files can be selected
         */
        set_local_only(local_only: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets an application-supplied widget to use to display a custom preview
         * of the currently selected file. To implement a preview, after setting the
         * preview widget, you connect to the {@link Gtk.FileChooser.SignalSignatures.update_preview | Gtk.FileChooser::update-preview}
         * signal, and call `gtk_file_chooser_get_preview_filename()` or
         * `gtk_file_chooser_get_preview_uri()` on each change. If you can
         * display a preview of the new file, update your widget and
         * set the preview active using `gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget_active()`.
         * Otherwise, set the preview inactive.
         * 
         * When there is no application-supplied preview widget, or the
         * application-supplied preview widget is not active, the file chooser
         * will display no preview at all.
         * @param preview_widget widget for displaying preview.
         */
        set_preview_widget(preview_widget: Widget): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the preview widget set by
         * `gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget()` should be shown for the
         * current filename. When `active` is set to false, the file chooser
         * may display an internally generated preview of the current file
         * or it may display no preview at all. See
         * `gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget()` for more details.
         * @param active whether to display the user-specified preview widget
         */
        set_preview_widget_active(active: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether multiple files can be selected in the file selector.  This is
         * only relevant if the action is set to be {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.OPEN} or
         * {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.SELECT_FOLDER}.
         * @param select_multiple `true` if multiple files can be selected.
         */
        set_select_multiple(select_multiple: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether hidden files and folders are displayed in the file selector.
         * @param show_hidden `true` if hidden files and folders should be displayed.
         */
        set_show_hidden(show_hidden: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the file referred to by `uri` as the current file for the file chooser,
         * by changing to the URI’s parent folder and actually selecting the URI in the
         * list.  If the `chooser` is {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.SAVE} mode, the URI’s base
         * name will also appear in the dialog’s file name entry.
         * 
         * Note that the URI must exist, or nothing will be done except for the
         * directory change.
         * 
         * You should use this function only when implementing a save
         * dialog for which you already have a file name to which
         * the user may save.  For example, when the user opens an existing file and then
         * does Save As... to save a copy or a
         * modified version.  If you don’t have a file name already — for example,
         * if the user just created a new file and is saving it for the first time, do
         * not call this function.  Instead, use something similar to this:
         * 
         * ```c
         * if (document_is_new)
         *   {
         *     // the user just created a new document
         *     gtk_file_chooser_set_current_name (chooser, "Untitled document");
         *   }
         * else
         *   {
         *     // the user edited an existing document
         *     gtk_file_chooser_set_uri (chooser, existing_uri);
         *   }
         * ```
         * 
         * 
         * 
         * In the first case, the file chooser will present the user with useful suggestions
         * as to where to save his new file.  In the second case, the file’s existing location
         * is already known, so the file chooser will use it.
         * @param uri the URI to set as current
         * @returns Not useful.
         */
        set_uri(uri: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets whether the file chooser should display a stock label with the name of
         * the file that is being previewed; the default is `true`.  Applications that
         * want to draw the whole preview area themselves should set this to `false` and
         * display the name themselves in their preview widget.
         * 
         * See also: `gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget()`
         * @param use_label whether to display a stock label with the name of the previewed file
         */
        set_use_preview_label(use_label: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Unselects all the files in the current folder of a file chooser.
         */
        unselect_all(): void;

        /**
         * Unselects the file referred to by `file`. If the file is not in the current
         * directory, does not exist, or is otherwise not currently selected, does nothing.
         * @param file a {@link Gio.File}
         */
        unselect_file(file: Gio.File): void;

        /**
         * Unselects a currently selected filename. If the filename
         * is not in the current directory, does not exist, or
         * is otherwise not currently selected, does nothing.
         * @param filename the filename to unselect
         */
        unselect_filename(filename: string): void;

        /**
         * Unselects the file referred to by `uri`. If the file
         * is not in the current directory, does not exist, or
         * is otherwise not currently selected, does nothing.
         * @param uri the URI to unselect
         */
        unselect_uri(uri: string): void;
    }


    namespace FileChooserWidget {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Box.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * The ::desktop-folder signal is a [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted when the user asks for it.
             * 
             * This is used to make the file chooser show the user's Desktop
             * folder in the file list.
             * 
             * The default binding for this signal is `Alt + D`.
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-first
             */
            "desktop-folder": () => void;
            /**
             * The ::down-folder signal is a [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted when the user asks for it.
             * 
             * This is used to make the file chooser go to a child of the current folder
             * in the file hierarchy. The subfolder that will be used is displayed in the
             * path bar widget of the file chooser. For example, if the path bar is showing
             * "/foo/bar/baz", with bar currently displayed, then this will cause the file
             * chooser to switch to the "baz" subfolder.
             * 
             * The default binding for this signal is `Alt + Down`.
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-first
             */
            "down-folder": () => void;
            /**
             * The ::home-folder signal is a [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted when the user asks for it.
             * 
             * This is used to make the file chooser show the user's home
             * folder in the file list.
             * 
             * The default binding for this signal is `Alt + Home`.
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-first
             */
            "home-folder": () => void;
            /**
             * The ::location-popup signal is a [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted when the user asks for it.
             * 
             * This is used to make the file chooser show a "Location" prompt which
             * the user can use to manually type the name of the file he wishes to select.
             * 
             * The default bindings for this signal are `Control + L` with a `path` string
             * of "" (the empty string).  It is also bound to `/` with a `path` string of
             * "`/`" (a slash):  this lets you type `/` and immediately type a path name.
             * On Unix systems, this is bound to `~` (tilde) with a `path` string of "~"
             * itself for access to home directories.
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-first
             */
            "location-popup": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * The ::location-popup-on-paste signal is a [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted when the user asks for it.
             * 
             * This is used to make the file chooser show a "Location" prompt when the user
             * pastes into a {@link Gtk.FileChooserWidget}.
             * 
             * The default binding for this signal is `Control + V`.
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-first
             */
            "location-popup-on-paste": () => void;
            /**
             * The ::location-toggle-popup signal is a [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted when the user asks for it.
             * 
             * This is used to toggle the visibility of a "Location" prompt which the user
             * can use to manually type the name of the file he wishes to select.
             * 
             * The default binding for this signal is `Control + L`.
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-first
             */
            "location-toggle-popup": () => void;
            /**
             * The ::places-shortcut signal is a [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted when the user asks for it.
             * 
             * This is used to move the focus to the places sidebar.
             * 
             * The default binding for this signal is `Alt + P`.
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-first
             */
            "places-shortcut": () => void;
            /**
             * The ::quick-bookmark signal is a [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted when the user asks for it.
             * 
             * This is used to make the file chooser switch to the bookmark specified
             * in the `bookmark_index` parameter. For example, if you have three bookmarks,
             * you can pass 0, 1, 2 to this signal to switch to each of them, respectively.
             * 
             * The default binding for this signal is `Alt + 1`, `Alt + 2`,
             * etc. until `Alt + 0`.  Note that in the default binding, that
             * `Alt + 1` is actually defined to switch to the bookmark at index
             * 0, and so on successively; `Alt + 0` is defined to switch to the
             * bookmark at index 10.
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-first
             */
            "quick-bookmark": (arg0: number) => void;
            /**
             * The ::recent-shortcut signal is a [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted when the user asks for it.
             * 
             * This is used to make the file chooser show the Recent location.
             * 
             * The default binding for this signal is `Alt + R`.
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-first
             */
            "recent-shortcut": () => void;
            /**
             * The ::search-shortcut signal is a [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted when the user asks for it.
             * 
             * This is used to make the file chooser show the search entry.
             * 
             * The default binding for this signal is `Alt + S`.
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-first
             */
            "search-shortcut": () => void;
            /**
             * The ::show-hidden signal is a [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted when the user asks for it.
             * 
             * This is used to make the file chooser display hidden files.
             * 
             * The default binding for this signal is `Control + H`.
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-first
             */
            "show-hidden": () => void;
            /**
             * The ::up-folder signal is a [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted when the user asks for it.
             * 
             * This is used to make the file chooser go to the parent of the current folder
             * in the file hierarchy.
             * 
             * The default binding for this signal is `Alt + Up`.
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-first
             */
            "up-folder": () => void;
            "notify::search-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::subtitle": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::baseline-position": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::homogeneous": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::spacing": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::action": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::create-folders": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::do-overwrite-confirmation": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::extra-widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::filter": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::local-only": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::preview-widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::preview-widget-active": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::select-multiple": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::show-hidden": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-preview-label": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::orientation": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Box.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, FileChooser.ConstructorProps, Orientable.ConstructorProps {
            search_mode: boolean;
            searchMode: boolean;
            subtitle: string;
        }
    }

    /**
     * {@link Gtk.FileChooserWidget} is a widget for choosing files.
     * It exposes the {@link Gtk.FileChooser} interface, and you should
     * use the methods of this interface to interact with the
     * widget.
     * 
     * # CSS nodes
     * 
     * GtkFileChooserWidget has a single CSS node with name filechooser.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class FileChooserWidget extends Box implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable, FileChooser, Orientable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<FileChooserWidget>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get search_mode(): boolean;
        set search_mode(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get searchMode(): boolean;
        set searchMode(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @read-only
         */
        get subtitle(): string;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: FileChooserWidget.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<FileChooserWidget.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](action: FileChooserAction): FileChooserWidget;

        // Conflicted with Gtk.Box.new
        static ["new"](...args: never[]): any;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof FileChooserWidget.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, FileChooserWidget.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof FileChooserWidget.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, FileChooserWidget.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof FileChooserWidget.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<FileChooserWidget.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        /**
         * @default Gtk.FileChooserAction.OPEN
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser
         */
        get action(): FileChooserAction;
        set action(val: FileChooserAction);

        /**
         * Whether a file chooser not in {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.OPEN} mode
         * will offer the user to create new folders.
         * @since 2.18
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser
         */
        get create_folders(): boolean;
        set create_folders(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether a file chooser not in {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.OPEN} mode
         * will offer the user to create new folders.
         * @since 2.18
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser
         */
        get createFolders(): boolean;
        set createFolders(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether a file chooser in {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.SAVE} mode
         * will present an overwrite confirmation dialog if the user
         * selects a file name that already exists.
         * @since 2.8
         * @default false
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser
         */
        get do_overwrite_confirmation(): boolean;
        set do_overwrite_confirmation(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether a file chooser in {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.SAVE} mode
         * will present an overwrite confirmation dialog if the user
         * selects a file name that already exists.
         * @since 2.8
         * @default false
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser
         */
        get doOverwriteConfirmation(): boolean;
        set doOverwriteConfirmation(val: boolean);

        /** @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser */
        get extra_widget(): Widget | null;
        set extra_widget(val: Widget | null);

        /** @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser */
        get extraWidget(): Widget | null;
        set extraWidget(val: Widget | null);

        /** @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser */
        get filter(): FileFilter | null;
        set filter(val: FileFilter | null);

        /**
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser
         */
        get local_only(): boolean;
        set local_only(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser
         */
        get localOnly(): boolean;
        set localOnly(val: boolean);

        /** @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser */
        get preview_widget(): Widget | null;
        set preview_widget(val: Widget | null);

        /** @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser */
        get previewWidget(): Widget | null;
        set previewWidget(val: Widget | null);

        /**
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser
         */
        get preview_widget_active(): boolean;
        set preview_widget_active(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser
         */
        get previewWidgetActive(): boolean;
        set previewWidgetActive(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser
         */
        get select_multiple(): boolean;
        set select_multiple(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser
         */
        get selectMultiple(): boolean;
        set selectMultiple(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser
         */
        get show_hidden(): boolean;
        set show_hidden(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser
         */
        get showHidden(): boolean;
        set showHidden(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser
         */
        get use_preview_label(): boolean;
        set use_preview_label(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FileChooser
         */
        get usePreviewLabel(): boolean;
        set usePreviewLabel(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The orientation of the orientable.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default Gtk.Orientation.HORIZONTAL
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Orientable
         */
        get orientation(): Orientation;
        set orientation(val: Orientation);

        /**
         * Adds a 'choice' to the file chooser. This is typically implemented
         * as a combobox or, for boolean choices, as a checkbutton. You can select
         * a value using `gtk_file_chooser_set_choice()` before the dialog is shown,
         * and you can obtain the user-selected value in the ::response signal handler
         * using `gtk_file_chooser_get_choice()`.
         * 
         * Compare `gtk_file_chooser_set_extra_widget()`.
         * @param id id for the added choice
         * @param label user-visible label for the added choice
         * @param options ids for the options of the choice, or `null` for a boolean choice
         * @param option_labels user-visible labels for the options, must be the same length as `options`
         */
        add_choice(id: string, label: string, options: string[] | null, option_labels: string[] | null): void;

        /**
         * Adds `filter` to the list of filters that the user can select between.
         * When a filter is selected, only files that are passed by that
         * filter are displayed.
         * 
         * Note that the `chooser` takes ownership of the filter, so you have to
         * ref and sink it if you want to keep a reference.
         * @param filter a {@link Gtk.FileFilter}
         */
        add_filter(filter: FileFilter): void;

        /**
         * Adds a folder to be displayed with the shortcut folders in a file chooser.
         * Note that shortcut folders do not get saved, as they are provided by the
         * application.  For example, you can use this to add a
         * “/usr/share/mydrawprogram/Clipart” folder to the volume list.
         * @param folder filename of the folder to add
         * @returns `true` if the folder could be added successfully, `false` otherwise.  In the latter case, the `error` will be set as appropriate.
         */
        add_shortcut_folder(folder: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Adds a folder URI to be displayed with the shortcut folders in a file
         * chooser.  Note that shortcut folders do not get saved, as they are provided
         * by the application.  For example, you can use this to add a
         * “file:///usr/share/mydrawprogram/Clipart” folder to the volume list.
         * @param uri URI of the folder to add
         * @returns `true` if the folder could be added successfully, `false` otherwise.  In the latter case, the `error` will be set as appropriate.
         */
        add_shortcut_folder_uri(uri: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the type of operation that the file chooser is performing; see
         * `gtk_file_chooser_set_action()`.
         * @returns the action that the file selector is performing
         */
        get_action(): FileChooserAction;

        /**
         * Gets the currently selected option in the 'choice' with the given ID.
         * @param id the ID of the choice to get
         * @returns the ID of the currenly selected option
         */
        get_choice(id: string): string;

        /**
         * Gets whether file choser will offer to create new folders.
         * See `gtk_file_chooser_set_create_folders()`.
         * @returns `true` if the Create Folder button should be displayed.
         */
        get_create_folders(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the current folder of `chooser` as a local filename.
         * See `gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder()`.
         * 
         * Note that this is the folder that the file chooser is currently displaying
         * (e.g. "/home/username/Documents"), which is not the same
         * as the currently-selected folder if the chooser is in
         * {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.SELECT_FOLDER} mode
         * (e.g. "/home/username/Documents/selected-folder/".  To get the
         * currently-selected folder in that mode, use `gtk_file_chooser_get_uri()` as the
         * usual way to get the selection.
         * @returns the full path of the current folder, or `null` if the current path cannot be represented as a local filename.  Free with `g_free()`.  This function will also return `null` if the file chooser was unable to load the last folder that was requested from it; for example, as would be for calling `gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder()` on a nonexistent folder.
         */
        get_current_folder(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the current folder of `chooser` as {@link Gio.File}.
         * See `gtk_file_chooser_get_current_folder_uri()`.
         * @returns the {@link Gio.File} for the current folder.
         */
        get_current_folder_file(): Gio.File | null;

        /**
         * Gets the current folder of `chooser` as an URI.
         * See `gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder_uri()`.
         * 
         * Note that this is the folder that the file chooser is currently displaying
         * (e.g. "file:///home/username/Documents"), which is not the same
         * as the currently-selected folder if the chooser is in
         * {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.SELECT_FOLDER} mode
         * (e.g. "file:///home/username/Documents/selected-folder/".  To get the
         * currently-selected folder in that mode, use `gtk_file_chooser_get_uri()` as the
         * usual way to get the selection.
         * @returns the URI for the current folder. Free with `g_free()`.  This function will also return `null` if the file chooser was unable to load the last folder that was requested from it; for example, as would be for calling `gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder_uri()` on a nonexistent folder.
         */
        get_current_folder_uri(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the current name in the file selector, as entered by the user in the
         * text entry for “Name”.
         * 
         * This is meant to be used in save dialogs, to get the currently typed filename
         * when the file itself does not exist yet.  For example, an application that
         * adds a custom extra widget to the file chooser for “file format” may want to
         * change the extension of the typed filename based on the chosen format, say,
         * from “.jpg” to “.png”.
         * @returns The raw text from the file chooser’s “Name” entry.  Free this with `g_free()`.  Note that this string is not a full pathname or URI; it is whatever the contents of the entry are.  Note also that this string is in UTF-8 encoding, which is not necessarily the system’s encoding for filenames.
         */
        get_current_name(): string;

        /**
         * Queries whether a file chooser is set to confirm for overwriting when the user
         * types a file name that already exists.
         * @returns `true` if the file chooser will present a confirmation dialog; `false` otherwise.
         */
        get_do_overwrite_confirmation(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the current extra widget; see
         * `gtk_file_chooser_set_extra_widget()`.
         * @returns the current extra widget, or `null`
         */
        get_extra_widget(): Widget | null;

        /**
         * Gets the {@link Gio.File} for the currently selected file in
         * the file selector. If multiple files are selected,
         * one of the files will be returned at random.
         * 
         * If the file chooser is in folder mode, this function returns the selected
         * folder.
         * @returns a selected {@link Gio.File}. You own the returned file;     use `g_object_unref()` to release it.
         */
        get_file(): Gio.File;

        /**
         * Gets the filename for the currently selected file in
         * the file selector. The filename is returned as an absolute path. If
         * multiple files are selected, one of the filenames will be returned at
         * random.
         * 
         * If the file chooser is in folder mode, this function returns the selected
         * folder.
         * @returns The currently selected filename,  or `null` if no file is selected, or the selected file can't  be represented with a local filename. Free with `g_free()`.
         */
        get_filename(): string | null;

        /**
         * Lists all the selected files and subfolders in the current folder of
         * `chooser`. The returned names are full absolute paths. If files in the current
         * folder cannot be represented as local filenames they will be ignored. (See
         * `gtk_file_chooser_get_uris()`)
         * @returns a {@link GLib.SList}    containing the filenames of all selected files and subfolders in    the current folder. Free the returned list with `g_slist_free()`,    and the filenames with `g_free()`.
         */
        get_filenames(): string[];

        /**
         * Lists all the selected files and subfolders in the current folder of `chooser`
         * as {@link Gio.File}. An internal function, see `gtk_file_chooser_get_uris()`.
         * @returns a {@link GLib.SList}   containing a {@link Gio.File} for each selected file and subfolder in the   current folder.  Free the returned list with `g_slist_free()`, and   the files with `g_object_unref()`.
         */
        get_files(): Gio.File[];

        /**
         * Gets the current filter; see `gtk_file_chooser_set_filter()`.
         * @returns the current filter, or `null`
         */
        get_filter(): FileFilter | null;

        /**
         * Gets whether only local files can be selected in the
         * file selector. See `gtk_file_chooser_set_local_only()`
         * @returns `true` if only local files can be selected.
         */
        get_local_only(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the {@link Gio.File} that should be previewed in a custom preview
         * Internal function, see `gtk_file_chooser_get_preview_uri()`.
         * @returns the {@link Gio.File} for the file to preview,     or `null` if no file is selected. Free with `g_object_unref()`.
         */
        get_preview_file(): Gio.File | null;

        /**
         * Gets the filename that should be previewed in a custom preview
         * widget. See `gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget()`.
         * @returns the filename to preview, or `null` if  no file is selected, or if the selected file cannot be represented  as a local filename. Free with `g_free()`
         */
        get_preview_filename(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the URI that should be previewed in a custom preview
         * widget. See `gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget()`.
         * @returns the URI for the file to preview,     or `null` if no file is selected. Free with `g_free()`.
         */
        get_preview_uri(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the current preview widget; see
         * `gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget()`.
         * @returns the current preview widget, or `null`
         */
        get_preview_widget(): Widget | null;

        /**
         * Gets whether the preview widget set by `gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget()`
         * should be shown for the current filename. See
         * `gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget_active()`.
         * @returns `true` if the preview widget is active for the current filename.
         */
        get_preview_widget_active(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets whether multiple files can be selected in the file
         * selector. See `gtk_file_chooser_set_select_multiple()`.
         * @returns `true` if multiple files can be selected.
         */
        get_select_multiple(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets whether hidden files and folders are displayed in the file selector.
         * See `gtk_file_chooser_set_show_hidden()`.
         * @returns `true` if hidden files and folders are displayed.
         */
        get_show_hidden(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the URI for the currently selected file in
         * the file selector. If multiple files are selected,
         * one of the filenames will be returned at random.
         * 
         * If the file chooser is in folder mode, this function returns the selected
         * folder.
         * @returns The currently selected URI, or `null`    if no file is selected. If `gtk_file_chooser_set_local_only()` is set to    `true` (the default) a local URI will be returned for any FUSE locations.    Free with `g_free()`
         */
        get_uri(): string | null;

        /**
         * Lists all the selected files and subfolders in the current folder of
         * `chooser`. The returned names are full absolute URIs.
         * @returns a {@link GLib.SList} containing the URIs of all selected   files and subfolders in the current folder. Free the returned list   with `g_slist_free()`, and the filenames with `g_free()`.
         */
        get_uris(): string[];

        /**
         * Gets whether a stock label should be drawn with the name of the previewed
         * file.  See `gtk_file_chooser_set_use_preview_label()`.
         * @returns `true` if the file chooser is set to display a label with the name of the previewed file, `false` otherwise.
         */
        get_use_preview_label(): boolean;

        /**
         * Lists the current set of user-selectable filters; see
         * `gtk_file_chooser_add_filter()`, `gtk_file_chooser_remove_filter()`.
         * @returns a  {@link GLib.SList} containing the current set of user selectable filters. The  contents of the list are owned by GTK+, but you must free the list  itself with `g_slist_free()` when you are done with it.
         */
        list_filters(): FileFilter[];

        /**
         * Queries the list of shortcut folders in the file chooser, as set by
         * `gtk_file_chooser_add_shortcut_folder_uri()`.
         * @returns A list of folder URIs, or `null` if there are no shortcut folders.  Free the returned list with `g_slist_free()`, and the URIs with `g_free()`.
         */
        list_shortcut_folder_uris(): string[] | null;

        /**
         * Queries the list of shortcut folders in the file chooser, as set by
         * `gtk_file_chooser_add_shortcut_folder()`.
         * @returns A list of folder filenames, or `null` if there are no shortcut folders. Free the returned list with `g_slist_free()`, and the filenames with `g_free()`.
         */
        list_shortcut_folders(): string[] | null;

        /**
         * Removes a 'choice' that has been added with `gtk_file_chooser_add_choice()`.
         * @param id the ID of the choice to remove
         */
        remove_choice(id: string): void;

        /**
         * Removes `filter` from the list of filters that the user can select between.
         * @param filter a {@link Gtk.FileFilter}
         */
        remove_filter(filter: FileFilter): void;

        /**
         * Removes a folder from a file chooser’s list of shortcut folders.
         * @param folder filename of the folder to remove
         * @returns `true` if the operation succeeds, `false` otherwise. In the latter case, the `error` will be set as appropriate. See also: `gtk_file_chooser_add_shortcut_folder()`
         */
        remove_shortcut_folder(folder: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Removes a folder URI from a file chooser’s list of shortcut folders.
         * @param uri URI of the folder to remove
         * @returns `true` if the operation succeeds, `false` otherwise. In the latter case, the `error` will be set as appropriate. See also: `gtk_file_chooser_add_shortcut_folder_uri()`
         */
        remove_shortcut_folder_uri(uri: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Selects all the files in the current folder of a file chooser.
         */
        select_all(): void;

        /**
         * Selects the file referred to by `file`. An internal function. See
         * _gtk_file_chooser_select_uri().
         * @param file the file to select
         * @returns Not useful.
         */
        select_file(file: Gio.File): boolean;

        /**
         * Selects a filename. If the file name isn’t in the current
         * folder of `chooser`, then the current folder of `chooser` will
         * be changed to the folder containing `filename`.
         * @param filename the filename to select
         * @returns Not useful. See also: `gtk_file_chooser_set_filename()`
         */
        select_filename(filename: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Selects the file to by `uri`. If the URI doesn’t refer to a
         * file in the current folder of `chooser`, then the current folder of
         * `chooser` will be changed to the folder containing `filename`.
         * @param uri the URI to select
         * @returns Not useful.
         */
        select_uri(uri: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the type of operation that the chooser is performing; the
         * user interface is adapted to suit the selected action. For example,
         * an option to create a new folder might be shown if the action is
         * {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.SAVE} but not if the action is
         * {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.OPEN}.
         * @param action the action that the file selector is performing
         */
        set_action(action: FileChooserAction): void;

        /**
         * Selects an option in a 'choice' that has been added with
         * `gtk_file_chooser_add_choice()`. For a boolean choice, the
         * possible options are "true" and "false".
         * @param id the ID of the choice to set
         * @param option the ID of the option to select
         */
        set_choice(id: string, option: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether file choser will offer to create new folders.
         * This is only relevant if the action is not set to be
         * {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.OPEN}.
         * @param create_folders `true` if the Create Folder button should be displayed
         */
        set_create_folders(create_folders: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the current folder for `chooser` from a local filename.
         * The user will be shown the full contents of the current folder,
         * plus user interface elements for navigating to other folders.
         * 
         * In general, you should not use this function.  See the
         * [section on setting up a file chooser dialog][gtkfilechooserdialog-setting-up]
         * for the rationale behind this.
         * @param filename the full path of the new current folder
         * @returns Not useful.
         */
        set_current_folder(filename: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the current folder for `chooser` from a {@link Gio.File}.
         * Internal function, see `gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder_uri()`.
         * @param file the {@link Gio.File} for the new folder
         * @returns `true` if the folder could be changed successfully, `false` otherwise.
         */
        set_current_folder_file(file: Gio.File): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the current folder for `chooser` from an URI.
         * The user will be shown the full contents of the current folder,
         * plus user interface elements for navigating to other folders.
         * 
         * In general, you should not use this function.  See the
         * [section on setting up a file chooser dialog][gtkfilechooserdialog-setting-up]
         * for the rationale behind this.
         * @param uri the URI for the new current folder
         * @returns `true` if the folder could be changed successfully, `false` otherwise.
         */
        set_current_folder_uri(uri: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the current name in the file selector, as if entered
         * by the user. Note that the name passed in here is a UTF-8
         * string rather than a filename. This function is meant for
         * such uses as a suggested name in a “Save As...” dialog.  You can
         * pass “Untitled.doc” or a similarly suitable suggestion for the `name`.
         * 
         * If you want to preselect a particular existing file, you should use
         * `gtk_file_chooser_set_filename()` or `gtk_file_chooser_set_uri()` instead.
         * Please see the documentation for those functions for an example of using
         * `gtk_file_chooser_set_current_name()` as well.
         * @param name the filename to use, as a UTF-8 string
         */
        set_current_name(name: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether a file chooser in {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.SAVE} mode will present
         * a confirmation dialog if the user types a file name that already exists.  This
         * is `false` by default.
         * 
         * If set to `true`, the `chooser` will emit the
         * {@link Gtk.FileChooser.SignalSignatures.confirm_overwrite | Gtk.FileChooser::confirm-overwrite} signal when appropriate.
         * 
         * If all you need is the stock confirmation dialog, set this property to `true`.
         * You can override the way confirmation is done by actually handling the
         * {@link Gtk.FileChooser.SignalSignatures.confirm_overwrite | Gtk.FileChooser::confirm-overwrite} signal; please refer to its documentation
         * for the details.
         * @param do_overwrite_confirmation whether to confirm overwriting in save mode
         */
        set_do_overwrite_confirmation(do_overwrite_confirmation: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets an application-supplied widget to provide extra options to the user.
         * @param extra_widget widget for extra options
         */
        set_extra_widget(extra_widget: Widget): void;

        /**
         * Sets `file` as the current filename for the file chooser, by changing
         * to the file’s parent folder and actually selecting the file in list.  If
         * the `chooser` is in {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.SAVE} mode, the file’s base name
         * will also appear in the dialog’s file name entry.
         * 
         * If the file name isn’t in the current folder of `chooser`, then the current
         * folder of `chooser` will be changed to the folder containing `filename`. This
         * is equivalent to a sequence of `gtk_file_chooser_unselect_all()` followed by
         * `gtk_file_chooser_select_filename()`.
         * 
         * Note that the file must exist, or nothing will be done except
         * for the directory change.
         * 
         * If you are implementing a save dialog,
         * you should use this function if you already have a file name to which the
         * user may save; for example, when the user opens an existing file and then
         * does Save As...  If you don’t have
         * a file name already — for example, if the user just created a new
         * file and is saving it for the first time, do not call this function.
         * Instead, use something similar to this:
         * 
         * ```c
         * if (document_is_new)
         *   {
         *     // the user just created a new document
         *     gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder_file (chooser, default_file_for_saving);
         *     gtk_file_chooser_set_current_name (chooser, "Untitled document");
         *   }
         * else
         *   {
         *     // the user edited an existing document
         *     gtk_file_chooser_set_file (chooser, existing_file);
         *   }
         * ```
         * 
         * @param file the {@link Gio.File} to set as current
         * @returns Not useful.
         */
        set_file(file: Gio.File): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets `filename` as the current filename for the file chooser, by changing to
         * the file’s parent folder and actually selecting the file in list; all other
         * files will be unselected.  If the `chooser` is in
         * {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.SAVE} mode, the file’s base name will also appear in
         * the dialog’s file name entry.
         * 
         * Note that the file must exist, or nothing will be done except
         * for the directory change.
         * 
         * You should use this function only when implementing a save
         * dialog for which you already have a file name to which
         * the user may save.  For example, when the user opens an existing file and
         * then does Save As... to save a copy or
         * a modified version.  If you don’t have a file name already — for
         * example, if the user just created a new file and is saving it for the first
         * time, do not call this function.  Instead, use something similar to this:
         * 
         * ```c
         * if (document_is_new)
         *   {
         *     // the user just created a new document
         *     gtk_file_chooser_set_current_name (chooser, "Untitled document");
         *   }
         * else
         *   {
         *     // the user edited an existing document
         *     gtk_file_chooser_set_filename (chooser, existing_filename);
         *   }
         * ```
         * 
         * 
         * In the first case, the file chooser will present the user with useful suggestions
         * as to where to save his new file.  In the second case, the file’s existing location
         * is already known, so the file chooser will use it.
         * @param filename the filename to set as current
         * @returns Not useful.
         */
        set_filename(filename: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the current filter; only the files that pass the
         * filter will be displayed. If the user-selectable list of filters
         * is non-empty, then the filter should be one of the filters
         * in that list. Setting the current filter when the list of
         * filters is empty is useful if you want to restrict the displayed
         * set of files without letting the user change it.
         * @param filter a {@link Gtk.FileFilter}
         */
        set_filter(filter: FileFilter): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether only local files can be selected in the
         * file selector. If `local_only` is `true` (the default),
         * then the selected file or files are guaranteed to be
         * accessible through the operating systems native file
         * system and therefore the application only
         * needs to worry about the filename functions in
         * {@link Gtk.FileChooser}, like `gtk_file_chooser_get_filename()`,
         * rather than the URI functions like
         * `gtk_file_chooser_get_uri()`,
         * 
         * On some systems non-native files may still be
         * available using the native filesystem via a userspace
         * filesystem (FUSE).
         * @param local_only `true` if only local files can be selected
         */
        set_local_only(local_only: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets an application-supplied widget to use to display a custom preview
         * of the currently selected file. To implement a preview, after setting the
         * preview widget, you connect to the {@link Gtk.FileChooser.SignalSignatures.update_preview | Gtk.FileChooser::update-preview}
         * signal, and call `gtk_file_chooser_get_preview_filename()` or
         * `gtk_file_chooser_get_preview_uri()` on each change. If you can
         * display a preview of the new file, update your widget and
         * set the preview active using `gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget_active()`.
         * Otherwise, set the preview inactive.
         * 
         * When there is no application-supplied preview widget, or the
         * application-supplied preview widget is not active, the file chooser
         * will display no preview at all.
         * @param preview_widget widget for displaying preview.
         */
        set_preview_widget(preview_widget: Widget): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the preview widget set by
         * `gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget()` should be shown for the
         * current filename. When `active` is set to false, the file chooser
         * may display an internally generated preview of the current file
         * or it may display no preview at all. See
         * `gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget()` for more details.
         * @param active whether to display the user-specified preview widget
         */
        set_preview_widget_active(active: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether multiple files can be selected in the file selector.  This is
         * only relevant if the action is set to be {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.OPEN} or
         * {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.SELECT_FOLDER}.
         * @param select_multiple `true` if multiple files can be selected.
         */
        set_select_multiple(select_multiple: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether hidden files and folders are displayed in the file selector.
         * @param show_hidden `true` if hidden files and folders should be displayed.
         */
        set_show_hidden(show_hidden: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the file referred to by `uri` as the current file for the file chooser,
         * by changing to the URI’s parent folder and actually selecting the URI in the
         * list.  If the `chooser` is {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.SAVE} mode, the URI’s base
         * name will also appear in the dialog’s file name entry.
         * 
         * Note that the URI must exist, or nothing will be done except for the
         * directory change.
         * 
         * You should use this function only when implementing a save
         * dialog for which you already have a file name to which
         * the user may save.  For example, when the user opens an existing file and then
         * does Save As... to save a copy or a
         * modified version.  If you don’t have a file name already — for example,
         * if the user just created a new file and is saving it for the first time, do
         * not call this function.  Instead, use something similar to this:
         * 
         * ```c
         * if (document_is_new)
         *   {
         *     // the user just created a new document
         *     gtk_file_chooser_set_current_name (chooser, "Untitled document");
         *   }
         * else
         *   {
         *     // the user edited an existing document
         *     gtk_file_chooser_set_uri (chooser, existing_uri);
         *   }
         * ```
         * 
         * 
         * 
         * In the first case, the file chooser will present the user with useful suggestions
         * as to where to save his new file.  In the second case, the file’s existing location
         * is already known, so the file chooser will use it.
         * @param uri the URI to set as current
         * @returns Not useful.
         */
        set_uri(uri: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets whether the file chooser should display a stock label with the name of
         * the file that is being previewed; the default is `true`.  Applications that
         * want to draw the whole preview area themselves should set this to `false` and
         * display the name themselves in their preview widget.
         * 
         * See also: `gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget()`
         * @param use_label whether to display a stock label with the name of the previewed file
         */
        set_use_preview_label(use_label: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Unselects all the files in the current folder of a file chooser.
         */
        unselect_all(): void;

        /**
         * Unselects the file referred to by `file`. If the file is not in the current
         * directory, does not exist, or is otherwise not currently selected, does nothing.
         * @param file a {@link Gio.File}
         */
        unselect_file(file: Gio.File): void;

        /**
         * Unselects a currently selected filename. If the filename
         * is not in the current directory, does not exist, or
         * is otherwise not currently selected, does nothing.
         * @param filename the filename to unselect
         */
        unselect_filename(filename: string): void;

        /**
         * Unselects the file referred to by `uri`. If the file
         * is not in the current directory, does not exist, or
         * is otherwise not currently selected, does nothing.
         * @param uri the URI to unselect
         */
        unselect_uri(uri: string): void;

        /**
         * Retrieves the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @returns the orientation of the `orientable`.
         */
        get_orientation(): Orientation;

        /**
         * Sets the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @param orientation the orientable’s new orientation.
         */
        set_orientation(orientation: Orientation): void;
    }


    namespace FileChooserWidgetAccessible {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends ContainerAccessible.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-layer": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-mdi-zorder": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-help-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-hypertext-nlinks": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption-object": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-summary": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends ContainerAccessible.ConstructorProps, Atk.Action.ConstructorProps, Atk.Component.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Class
     * @since 3.24.30
     */
    class FileChooserWidgetAccessible extends ContainerAccessible implements Atk.Action, Atk.Component {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<FileChooserWidgetAccessible>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: FileChooserWidgetAccessible.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<FileChooserWidgetAccessible.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof FileChooserWidgetAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, FileChooserWidgetAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof FileChooserWidgetAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, FileChooserWidgetAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof FileChooserWidgetAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<FileChooserWidgetAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        /**
         * Perform the specified action on the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns `true` if success, `false` otherwise
         */
        do_action(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns a description of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns a description string, or `null` if `action` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_description(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.get_description
        get_description(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Gets the keybinding which can be used to activate this action, if one
         * exists. The string returned should contain localized, human-readable,
         * key sequences as they would appear when displayed on screen. It must
         * be in the format "mnemonic;sequence;shortcut".
         * 
         * - The mnemonic key activates the object if it is presently enabled onscreen.
         *   This typically corresponds to the underlined letter within the widget.
         *   Example: "n" in a traditional "New..." menu item or the "a" in "Apply" for
         *   a button.
         * - The sequence is the full list of keys which invoke the action even if the
         *   relevant element is not currently shown on screen. For instance, for a menu
         *   item the sequence is the keybindings used to open the parent menus before
         *   invoking. The sequence string is colon-delimited. Example: "Alt+F:N" in a
         *   traditional "New..." menu item.
         * - The shortcut, if it exists, will invoke the same action without showing
         *   the component or its enclosing menus or dialogs. Example: "Ctrl+N" in a
         *   traditional "New..." menu item.
         * 
         * Example: For a traditional "New..." menu item, the expected return value
         * would be: "N;Alt+F:N;Ctrl+N" for the English locale and "N;Alt+D:N;Strg+N"
         * for the German locale. If, hypothetically, this menu item lacked a mnemonic,
         * it would be represented by ";;Ctrl+N" and ";;Strg+N" respectively.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns the keybinding which can be used to activate this action, or `null` if there is no keybinding for this action.
         */
        get_keybinding(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Returns the localized name of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns a name string, or `null` if `action` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_localized_name(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the number of accessible actions available on the object.
         * If there are more than one, the first one is considered the
         * "default" action of the object.
         * @returns a the number of actions, or 0 if `action` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_n_actions(): number;

        /**
         * Returns a non-localized string naming the specified action of the
         * object. This name is generally not descriptive of the end result
         * of the action, but instead names the 'interaction type' which the
         * object supports. By convention, the above strings should be used to
         * represent the actions which correspond to the common point-and-click
         * interaction techniques of the same name: i.e.
         * "click", "press", "release", "drag", "drop", "popup", etc.
         * The "popup" action should be used to pop up a context menu for the
         * object, if one exists.
         * 
         * For technical reasons, some toolkits cannot guarantee that the
         * reported action is actually 'bound' to a nontrivial user event;
         * i.e. the result of some actions via `atk_action_do_action()` may be
         * NIL.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns a name string, or `null` if `action` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_name(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.get_name
        get_name(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Sets a description of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @param desc the description to be assigned to this action
         * @returns a gboolean representing if the description was successfully set;
         */
        set_description(i: number, desc: string): boolean;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.set_description
        set_description(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Perform the specified action on the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_do_action(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns a description of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_description(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         * @virtual
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.vfunc_get_description
        vfunc_get_description(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Gets the keybinding which can be used to activate this action, if one
         * exists. The string returned should contain localized, human-readable,
         * key sequences as they would appear when displayed on screen. It must
         * be in the format "mnemonic;sequence;shortcut".
         * 
         * - The mnemonic key activates the object if it is presently enabled onscreen.
         *   This typically corresponds to the underlined letter within the widget.
         *   Example: "n" in a traditional "New..." menu item or the "a" in "Apply" for
         *   a button.
         * - The sequence is the full list of keys which invoke the action even if the
         *   relevant element is not currently shown on screen. For instance, for a menu
         *   item the sequence is the keybindings used to open the parent menus before
         *   invoking. The sequence string is colon-delimited. Example: "Alt+F:N" in a
         *   traditional "New..." menu item.
         * - The shortcut, if it exists, will invoke the same action without showing
         *   the component or its enclosing menus or dialogs. Example: "Ctrl+N" in a
         *   traditional "New..." menu item.
         * 
         * Example: For a traditional "New..." menu item, the expected return value
         * would be: "N;Alt+F:N;Ctrl+N" for the English locale and "N;Alt+D:N;Strg+N"
         * for the German locale. If, hypothetically, this menu item lacked a mnemonic,
         * it would be represented by ";;Ctrl+N" and ";;Strg+N" respectively.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_keybinding(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Returns the localized name of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_localized_name(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the number of accessible actions available on the object.
         * If there are more than one, the first one is considered the
         * "default" action of the object.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_n_actions(): number;

        /**
         * Returns a non-localized string naming the specified action of the
         * object. This name is generally not descriptive of the end result
         * of the action, but instead names the 'interaction type' which the
         * object supports. By convention, the above strings should be used to
         * represent the actions which correspond to the common point-and-click
         * interaction techniques of the same name: i.e.
         * "click", "press", "release", "drag", "drop", "popup", etc.
         * The "popup" action should be used to pop up a context menu for the
         * object, if one exists.
         * 
         * For technical reasons, some toolkits cannot guarantee that the
         * reported action is actually 'bound' to a nontrivial user event;
         * i.e. the result of some actions via `atk_action_do_action()` may be
         * NIL.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_name(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         * @virtual
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.vfunc_get_name
        vfunc_get_name(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Sets a description of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @param desc the description to be assigned to this action
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_description(i: number, desc: string): boolean;

        /**
         * @param args 
         * @virtual
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.vfunc_set_description
        vfunc_set_description(...args: never[]): any;
    }


    namespace FileFilter {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends GObject.InitiallyUnowned.SignalSignatures {}

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.InitiallyUnowned.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * A GtkFileFilter can be used to restrict the files being shown in a
     * {@link Gtk.FileChooser}. Files can be filtered based on their name (with
     * `gtk_file_filter_add_pattern()`), on their mime type (with
     * `gtk_file_filter_add_mime_type()`), or by a custom filter function
     * (with `gtk_file_filter_add_custom()`).
     * 
     * Filtering by mime types handles aliasing and subclassing of mime
     * types; e.g. a filter for text/plain also matches a file with mime
     * type application/rtf, since application/rtf is a subclass of
     * text/plain. Note that {@link Gtk.FileFilter} allows wildcards for the
     * subtype of a mime type, so you can e.g. filter for image/\*.
     * 
     * Normally, filters are used by adding them to a {@link Gtk.FileChooser},
     * see `gtk_file_chooser_add_filter()`, but it is also possible
     * to manually use a filter on a file with `gtk_file_filter_filter()`.
     * 
     * # GtkFileFilter as GtkBuildable
     * 
     * The GtkFileFilter implementation of the GtkBuildable interface
     * supports adding rules using the `<mime-types>`, `<patterns>` and
     * `<applications>` elements and listing the rules within. Specifying
     * a `<mime-type>` or `<pattern>` has the same effect as as calling
     * `gtk_file_filter_add_mime_type()` or `gtk_file_filter_add_pattern()`.
     * 
     * An example of a UI definition fragment specifying GtkFileFilter
     * rules:
     * 
     * 
     * ```xml
     * <object class="GtkFileFilter">
     *   <mime-types>
     *     <mime-type>text/plain</mime-type>
     *     <mime-type>image/ *</mime-type>
     *   </mime-types>
     *   <patterns>
     *     <pattern>*.txt</pattern>
     *     <pattern>*.png</pattern>
     *   </patterns>
     * </object>
     * ```
     * 
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class FileFilter extends GObject.InitiallyUnowned implements Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<FileFilter>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: FileFilter.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<FileFilter.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): FileFilter;

        static new_from_gvariant(variant: GLib.Variant): FileFilter;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof FileFilter.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, FileFilter.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof FileFilter.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, FileFilter.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof FileFilter.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<FileFilter.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Adds rule to a filter that allows files based on a custom callback
         * function. The bitfield `needed` which is passed in provides information
         * about what sorts of information that the filter function needs;
         * this allows GTK+ to avoid retrieving expensive information when
         * it isn’t needed by the filter.
         * @param needed bitfield of flags indicating the information that the custom          filter function needs.
         * @param func callback function; if the function returns `true`, then   the file will be displayed.
         */
        add_custom(needed: FileFilterFlags, func: FileFilterFunc): void;

        /**
         * Adds a rule allowing a given mime type to `filter`.
         * @param mime_type name of a MIME type
         */
        add_mime_type(mime_type: string): void;

        /**
         * Adds a rule allowing a shell style glob to a filter.
         * @param pattern a shell style glob
         */
        add_pattern(pattern: string): void;

        /**
         * Adds a rule allowing image files in the formats supported
         * by GdkPixbuf.
         */
        add_pixbuf_formats(): void;

        /**
         * Tests whether a file should be displayed according to `filter`.
         * The {@link Gtk.FileFilterInfo} `filter_info` should include
         * the fields returned from `gtk_file_filter_get_needed()`.
         * 
         * This function will not typically be used by applications; it
         * is intended principally for use in the implementation of
         * {@link Gtk.FileChooser}.
         * @param filter_info a {@link Gtk.FileFilterInfo} containing information  about a file.
         * @returns `true` if the file should be displayed
         */
        filter(filter_info: FileFilterInfo): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the human-readable name for the filter. See `gtk_file_filter_set_name()`.
         * @returns The human-readable name of the filter,   or `null`. This value is owned by GTK+ and must not   be modified or freed.
         */
        get_name(): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
    // Conflicted with Gtk.Buildable.get_name
        get_name(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Gets the fields that need to be filled in for the {@link Gtk.FileFilterInfo}
         * passed to `gtk_file_filter_filter()`
         * 
         * This function will not typically be used by applications; it
         * is intended principally for use in the implementation of
         * {@link Gtk.FileChooser}.
         * @returns bitfield of flags indicating needed fields when   calling `gtk_file_filter_filter()`
         */
        get_needed(): FileFilterFlags;

        /**
         * Sets the human-readable name of the filter; this is the string
         * that will be displayed in the file selector user interface if
         * there is a selectable list of filters.
         * @param name the human-readable-name for the filter, or `null`   to remove any existing name.
         */
        set_name(name: string | null): void;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
    // Conflicted with Gtk.Buildable.set_name
        set_name(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Serialize a file filter to an a{sv} variant.
         * @returns a new, floating, {@link GLib.Variant}
         */
        to_gvariant(): GLib.Variant;

        /**
         * Adds a child to `buildable`. `type` is an optional string
         * describing how the child should be added.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child to add
         * @param type kind of child or `null`
         */
        add_child(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object, type: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Constructs a child of `buildable` with the name `name`.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} calls this function if a “constructor” has been
         * specified in the UI definition.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param name name of child to construct
         * @returns the constructed child
         */
        construct_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, name: string): T;

        /**
         * This is similar to `gtk_buildable_parser_finished()` but is
         * called once for each custom tag handled by the `buildable`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname the name of the tag
         * @param data user data created in custom_tag_start
         */
        custom_finished(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
         * the buildable.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @param data user data that will be passed in to parser functions
         */
        custom_tag_end(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called for each unknown element under `<child>`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @returns `true` if a object has a custom implementation, `false`          if it doesn't.
         */
        custom_tag_start(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string): [boolean, GLib.MarkupParser, null];

        /**
         * Get the internal child called `childname` of the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param childname name of child
         * @returns the internal child of the buildable object
         */
        get_internal_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, childname: string): T;

        /**
         * Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI].
         * Note that this will be called once for each time
         * `gtk_builder_add_from_file()` or `gtk_builder_add_from_string()`
         * is called on a builder.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         */
        parser_finished(builder: Builder): void;

        /**
         * Sets the property name `name` to `value` on the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param name name of property
         * @param value value of property
         */
        set_buildable_property(builder: Builder, name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;

        /**
         * Adds a child to `buildable`. `type` is an optional string
         * describing how the child should be added.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child to add
         * @param type kind of child or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add_child(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object, type: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Constructs a child of `buildable` with the name `name`.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} calls this function if a “constructor” has been
         * specified in the UI definition.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param name name of child to construct
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_construct_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, name: string): T;

        /**
         * This is similar to `gtk_buildable_parser_finished()` but is
         * called once for each custom tag handled by the `buildable`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname the name of the tag
         * @param data user data created in custom_tag_start
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_finished(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
         * the buildable.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @param data user data that will be passed in to parser functions
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_tag_end(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called for each unknown element under `<child>`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_tag_start(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string): [boolean, GLib.MarkupParser, never];

        /**
         * Get the internal child called `childname` of the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param childname name of child
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_internal_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, childname: string): T;

        /**
         * Gets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} sets the name based on the
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI]
         * used to construct the `buildable`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_name(): string;

        /**
         * Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI].
         * Note that this will be called once for each time
         * `gtk_builder_add_from_file()` or `gtk_builder_add_from_string()`
         * is called on a builder.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_parser_finished(builder: Builder): void;

        /**
         * Sets the property name `name` to `value` on the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param name name of property
         * @param value value of property
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_buildable_property(builder: Builder, name: string, value: unknown): void;

        /**
         * Sets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * @param name name to set
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_name(name: string): void;
    }


    namespace Fixed {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Container.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Container.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * The {@link Gtk.Fixed} widget is a container which can place child widgets
     * at fixed positions and with fixed sizes, given in pixels. {@link Gtk.Fixed}
     * performs no automatic layout management.
     * 
     * For most applications, you should not use this container! It keeps
     * you from having to learn about the other GTK+ containers, but it
     * results in broken applications.  With {@link Gtk.Fixed}, the following
     * things will result in truncated text, overlapping widgets, and
     * other display bugs:
     * 
     * - Themes, which may change widget sizes.
     * 
     * - Fonts other than the one you used to write the app will of course
     *   change the size of widgets containing text; keep in mind that
     *   users may use a larger font because of difficulty reading the
     *   default, or they may be using a different OS that provides different fonts.
     * 
     * - Translation of text into other languages changes its size. Also,
     *   display of non-English text will use a different font in many
     *   cases.
     * 
     * In addition, {@link Gtk.Fixed} does not pay attention to text direction and thus may
     * produce unwanted results if your app is run under right-to-left languages
     * such as Hebrew or Arabic. That is: normally GTK+ will order containers
     * appropriately for the text direction, e.g. to put labels to the right of the
     * thing they label when using an RTL language, but it can’t do that with
     * {@link Gtk.Fixed}. So if you need to reorder widgets depending on the text direction,
     * you would need to manually detect it and adjust child positions accordingly.
     * 
     * Finally, fixed positioning makes it kind of annoying to add/remove
     * GUI elements, since you have to reposition all the other
     * elements. This is a long-term maintenance problem for your
     * application.
     * 
     * If you know none of these things are an issue for your application,
     * and prefer the simplicity of {@link Gtk.Fixed}, by all means use the
     * widget. But you should be aware of the tradeoffs.
     * 
     * See also {@link Gtk.Layout}, which shares the ability to perform fixed positioning
     * of child widgets and additionally adds custom drawing and scrollability.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class Fixed extends Container implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<Fixed>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: Fixed.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        container: Container;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<Fixed.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): Fixed;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof Fixed.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Fixed.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof Fixed.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Fixed.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof Fixed.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<Fixed.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Moves a child of a {@link Gtk.Fixed} container to the given position.
         * @param widget the child widget.
         * @param x the horizontal position to move the widget to.
         * @param y the vertical position to move the widget to.
         */
        move(widget: Widget, x: number, y: number): void;

        /**
         * Adds a widget to a {@link Gtk.Fixed} container at the given position.
         * @param widget the widget to add.
         * @param x the horizontal position to place the widget at.
         * @param y the vertical position to place the widget at.
         */
        put(widget: Widget, x: number, y: number): void;
    }


    namespace FlowBox {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Container.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * The ::activate-cursor-child signal is a
             * [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted when the user activates the `box`.
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "activate-cursor-child": () => void;
            /**
             * The ::child-activated signal is emitted when a child has been
             * activated by the user.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "child-activated": (arg0: FlowBoxChild) => void;
            /**
             * The ::move-cursor signal is a
             * [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted when the user initiates a cursor movement.
             * 
             * Applications should not connect to it, but may emit it with
             * `g_signal_emit_by_name()` if they need to control the cursor
             * programmatically.
             * 
             * The default bindings for this signal come in two variants,
             * the variant with the Shift modifier extends the selection,
             * the variant without the Shift modifer does not.
             * There are too many key combinations to list them all here.
             * - Arrow keys move by individual children
             * - Home/End keys move to the ends of the box
             * - PageUp/PageDown keys move vertically by pages
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "move-cursor": (arg0: MovementStep, arg1: number) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * The ::select-all signal is a
             * [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted to select all children of the box, if
             * the selection mode permits it.
             * 
             * The default bindings for this signal is Ctrl-a.
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "select-all": () => void;
            /**
             * The ::selected-children-changed signal is emitted when the
             * set of selected children changes.
             * 
             * Use `gtk_flow_box_selected_foreach()` or
             * `gtk_flow_box_get_selected_children()` to obtain the
             * selected children.
             * @signal
             * @run-first
             */
            "selected-children-changed": () => void;
            /**
             * The ::toggle-cursor-child signal is a
             * [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which toggles the selection of the child that has the focus.
             * 
             * The default binding for this signal is Ctrl-Space.
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "toggle-cursor-child": () => void;
            /**
             * The ::unselect-all signal is a
             * [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted to unselect all children of the box, if
             * the selection mode permits it.
             * 
             * The default bindings for this signal is Ctrl-Shift-a.
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "unselect-all": () => void;
            "notify::activate-on-single-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::column-spacing": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::homogeneous": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::max-children-per-line": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::min-children-per-line": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::row-spacing": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::selection-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::orientation": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Container.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, Orientable.ConstructorProps {
            activate_on_single_click: boolean;
            activateOnSingleClick: boolean;
            column_spacing: number;
            columnSpacing: number;
            homogeneous: boolean;
            max_children_per_line: number;
            maxChildrenPerLine: number;
            min_children_per_line: number;
            minChildrenPerLine: number;
            row_spacing: number;
            rowSpacing: number;
            selection_mode: SelectionMode;
            selectionMode: SelectionMode;
        }
    }

    /**
     * A GtkFlowBox positions child widgets in sequence according to its
     * orientation.
     * 
     * For instance, with the horizontal orientation, the widgets will be
     * arranged from left to right, starting a new row under the previous
     * row when necessary. Reducing the width in this case will require more
     * rows, so a larger height will be requested.
     * 
     * Likewise, with the vertical orientation, the widgets will be arranged
     * from top to bottom, starting a new column to the right when necessary.
     * Reducing the height will require more columns, so a larger width will
     * be requested.
     * 
     * The size request of a GtkFlowBox alone may not be what you expect; if you
     * need to be able to shrink it along both axes and dynamically reflow its
     * children, you may have to wrap it in a {@link Gtk.ScrolledWindow} to enable that.
     * 
     * The children of a GtkFlowBox can be dynamically sorted and filtered.
     * 
     * Although a GtkFlowBox must have only {@link Gtk.FlowBoxChild} children,
     * you can add any kind of widget to it via `gtk_container_add()`, and
     * a GtkFlowBoxChild widget will automatically be inserted between
     * the box and the widget.
     * 
     * Also see {@link Gtk.ListBox}.
     * 
     * GtkFlowBox was added in GTK+ 3.12.
     * 
     * # CSS nodes
     * 
     * 
     * ```
     * flowbox
     * ├── flowboxchild
     * │   ╰── <child>
     * ├── flowboxchild
     * │   ╰── <child>
     * ┊
     * ╰── [rubberband]
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * GtkFlowBox uses a single CSS node with name flowbox. GtkFlowBoxChild
     * uses a single CSS node with name flowboxchild.
     * For rubberband selection, a subnode with name rubberband is used.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class FlowBox extends Container implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable, Orientable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<FlowBox>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * Determines whether children can be activated with a single
         * click, or require a double-click.
         * @default true
         */
        get activate_on_single_click(): boolean;
        set activate_on_single_click(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Determines whether children can be activated with a single
         * click, or require a double-click.
         * @default true
         */
        get activateOnSingleClick(): boolean;
        set activateOnSingleClick(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The amount of horizontal space between two children.
         * @default 0
         */
        get column_spacing(): number;
        set column_spacing(val: number);

        /**
         * The amount of horizontal space between two children.
         * @default 0
         */
        get columnSpacing(): number;
        set columnSpacing(val: number);

        /**
         * Determines whether all children should be allocated the
         * same size.
         * @default false
         */
        get homogeneous(): boolean;
        set homogeneous(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The maximum amount of children to request space for consecutively
         * in the given orientation.
         * @default 7
         */
        get max_children_per_line(): number;
        set max_children_per_line(val: number);

        /**
         * The maximum amount of children to request space for consecutively
         * in the given orientation.
         * @default 7
         */
        get maxChildrenPerLine(): number;
        set maxChildrenPerLine(val: number);

        /**
         * The minimum number of children to allocate consecutively
         * in the given orientation.
         * 
         * Setting the minimum children per line ensures
         * that a reasonably small height will be requested
         * for the overall minimum width of the box.
         * @default 0
         */
        get min_children_per_line(): number;
        set min_children_per_line(val: number);

        /**
         * The minimum number of children to allocate consecutively
         * in the given orientation.
         * 
         * Setting the minimum children per line ensures
         * that a reasonably small height will be requested
         * for the overall minimum width of the box.
         * @default 0
         */
        get minChildrenPerLine(): number;
        set minChildrenPerLine(val: number);

        /**
         * The amount of vertical space between two children.
         * @default 0
         */
        get row_spacing(): number;
        set row_spacing(val: number);

        /**
         * The amount of vertical space between two children.
         * @default 0
         */
        get rowSpacing(): number;
        set rowSpacing(val: number);

        /**
         * The selection mode used by the flow  box.
         * @default Gtk.SelectionMode.SINGLE
         */
        get selection_mode(): SelectionMode;
        set selection_mode(val: SelectionMode);

        /**
         * The selection mode used by the flow  box.
         * @default Gtk.SelectionMode.SINGLE
         */
        get selectionMode(): SelectionMode;
        set selectionMode(val: SelectionMode);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: FlowBox.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        container: Container;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<FlowBox.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): FlowBox;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof FlowBox.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, FlowBox.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof FlowBox.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, FlowBox.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof FlowBox.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<FlowBox.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_activate_cursor_child(): void;

        /**
         * @param child 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_child_activated(child: FlowBoxChild): void;

        /**
         * @param step 
         * @param count 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_move_cursor(step: MovementStep, count: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Select all children of `box`, if the selection
         * mode allows it.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_select_all(): void;

        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_selected_children_changed(): void;

        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_toggle_cursor_child(): void;

        /**
         * Unselect all children of `box`, if the selection
         * mode allows it.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_unselect_all(): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Binds `model` to `box`.
         * 
         * If `box` was already bound to a model, that previous binding is
         * destroyed.
         * 
         * The contents of `box` are cleared and then filled with widgets that
         * represent items from `model`. `box` is updated whenever `model` changes.
         * If `model` is `null`, `box` is left empty.
         * 
         * It is undefined to add or remove widgets directly (for example, with
         * `gtk_flow_box_insert()` or `gtk_container_add()`) while `box` is bound to a
         * model.
         * 
         * Note that using a model is incompatible with the filtering and sorting
         * functionality in GtkFlowBox. When using a model, filtering and sorting
         * should be implemented by the model.
         * @param model the {@link Gio.ListModel} to be bound to `box`
         * @param create_widget_func a function that creates widgets for items
         */
        bind_model(model: Gio.ListModel | null, create_widget_func: FlowBoxCreateWidgetFunc): void;

        /**
         * Returns whether children activate on single clicks.
         * @returns `true` if children are activated on single click,     `false` otherwise
         */
        get_activate_on_single_click(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the nth child in the `box`.
         * @param idx the position of the child
         * @returns the child widget, which will     always be a {@link Gtk.FlowBoxChild} or `null` in case no child widget     with the given index exists.
         */
        get_child_at_index(idx: number): FlowBoxChild | null;

        /**
         * Gets the child in the (`x`, `y`) position.
         * @param x the x coordinate of the child
         * @param y the y coordinate of the child
         * @returns the child widget, which will     always be a {@link Gtk.FlowBoxChild} or `null` in case no child widget     exists for the given x and y coordinates.
         */
        get_child_at_pos(x: number, y: number): FlowBoxChild | null;

        /**
         * Gets the horizontal spacing.
         * @returns the horizontal spacing
         */
        get_column_spacing(): number;

        /**
         * Returns whether the box is homogeneous (all children are the
         * same size). See `gtk_box_set_homogeneous()`.
         * @returns `true` if the box is homogeneous.
         */
        get_homogeneous(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the maximum number of children per line.
         * @returns the maximum number of children per line
         */
        get_max_children_per_line(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the minimum number of children per line.
         * @returns the minimum number of children per line
         */
        get_min_children_per_line(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the vertical spacing.
         * @returns the vertical spacing
         */
        get_row_spacing(): number;

        /**
         * Creates a list of all selected children.
         * @returns A {@link GLib.List} containing the {@link Gtk.Widget} for each selected child.     Free with `g_list_free()` when done.
         */
        get_selected_children(): FlowBoxChild[];

        /**
         * Gets the selection mode of `box`.
         * @returns the {@link Gtk.SelectionMode}
         */
        get_selection_mode(): SelectionMode;

        /**
         * Inserts the `widget` into `box` at `position`.
         * 
         * If a sort function is set, the widget will actually be inserted
         * at the calculated position and this function has the same effect
         * as `gtk_container_add()`.
         * 
         * If `position` is -1, or larger than the total number of children
         * in the `box`, then the `widget` will be appended to the end.
         * @param widget the {@link Gtk.Widget} to add
         * @param position the position to insert `child` in
         */
        insert(widget: Widget, position: number): void;

        /**
         * Updates the filtering for all children.
         * 
         * Call this function when the result of the filter
         * function on the `box` is changed due ot an external
         * factor. For instance, this would be used if the
         * filter function just looked for a specific search
         * term, and the entry with the string has changed.
         */
        invalidate_filter(): void;

        /**
         * Updates the sorting for all children.
         * 
         * Call this when the result of the sort function on
         * `box` is changed due to an external factor.
         */
        invalidate_sort(): void;

        /**
         * Select all children of `box`, if the selection
         * mode allows it.
         */
        select_all(): void;

        /**
         * Selects a single child of `box`, if the selection
         * mode allows it.
         * @param child a child of `box`
         */
        select_child(child: FlowBoxChild): void;

        /**
         * Calls a function for each selected child.
         * 
         * Note that the selection cannot be modified from within
         * this function.
         * @param func the function to call for each selected child
         */
        selected_foreach(func: FlowBoxForeachFunc): void;

        /**
         * If `single` is `true`, children will be activated when you click
         * on them, otherwise you need to double-click.
         * @param single `true` to emit child-activated on a single click
         */
        set_activate_on_single_click(single: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the horizontal space to add between children.
         * See the {@link Gtk.FlowBox.column_spacing} property.
         * @param spacing the spacing to use
         */
        set_column_spacing(spacing: number): void;

        /**
         * By setting a filter function on the `box` one can decide dynamically
         * which of the children to show. For instance, to implement a search
         * function that only shows the children matching the search terms.
         * 
         * The `filter_func` will be called for each child after the call, and
         * it will continue to be called each time a child changes (via
         * `gtk_flow_box_child_changed()`) or when `gtk_flow_box_invalidate_filter()`
         * is called.
         * 
         * Note that using a filter function is incompatible with using a model
         * (see `gtk_flow_box_bind_model()`).
         * @param filter_func callback that     lets you filter which children to show
         */
        set_filter_func(filter_func: FlowBoxFilterFunc | null): void;

        /**
         * Hooks up an adjustment to focus handling in `box`.
         * The adjustment is also used for autoscrolling during
         * rubberband selection. See `gtk_scrolled_window_get_hadjustment()`
         * for a typical way of obtaining the adjustment, and
         * `gtk_flow_box_set_vadjustment()`for setting the vertical
         * adjustment.
         * 
         * The adjustments have to be in pixel units and in the same
         * coordinate system as the allocation for immediate children
         * of the box.
         * @param adjustment an adjustment which should be adjusted    when the focus is moved among the descendents of `container`
         */
        set_hadjustment(adjustment: Adjustment): void;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.FlowBox.homogeneous} property of `box`, controlling
         * whether or not all children of `box` are given equal space
         * in the box.
         * @param homogeneous `true` to create equal allotments,   `false` for variable allotments
         */
        set_homogeneous(homogeneous: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the maximum number of children to request and
         * allocate space for in `box`’s orientation.
         * 
         * Setting the maximum number of children per line
         * limits the overall natural size request to be no more
         * than `n_children` children long in the given orientation.
         * @param n_children the maximum number of children per line
         */
        set_max_children_per_line(n_children: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the minimum number of children to line up
         * in `box`’s orientation before flowing.
         * @param n_children the minimum number of children per line
         */
        set_min_children_per_line(n_children: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the vertical space to add between children.
         * See the {@link Gtk.FlowBox.row_spacing} property.
         * @param spacing the spacing to use
         */
        set_row_spacing(spacing: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets how selection works in `box`.
         * See {@link Gtk.SelectionMode} for details.
         * @param mode the new selection mode
         */
        set_selection_mode(mode: SelectionMode): void;

        /**
         * By setting a sort function on the `box`, one can dynamically
         * reorder the children of the box, based on the contents of
         * the children.
         * 
         * The `sort_func` will be called for each child after the call,
         * and will continue to be called each time a child changes (via
         * `gtk_flow_box_child_changed()`) and when `gtk_flow_box_invalidate_sort()`
         * is called.
         * 
         * Note that using a sort function is incompatible with using a model
         * (see `gtk_flow_box_bind_model()`).
         * @param sort_func the sort function
         */
        set_sort_func(sort_func: FlowBoxSortFunc | null): void;

        /**
         * Hooks up an adjustment to focus handling in `box`.
         * The adjustment is also used for autoscrolling during
         * rubberband selection. See `gtk_scrolled_window_get_vadjustment()`
         * for a typical way of obtaining the adjustment, and
         * `gtk_flow_box_set_hadjustment()`for setting the horizontal
         * adjustment.
         * 
         * The adjustments have to be in pixel units and in the same
         * coordinate system as the allocation for immediate children
         * of the box.
         * @param adjustment an adjustment which should be adjusted    when the focus is moved among the descendents of `container`
         */
        set_vadjustment(adjustment: Adjustment): void;

        /**
         * Unselect all children of `box`, if the selection
         * mode allows it.
         */
        unselect_all(): void;

        /**
         * Unselects a single child of `box`, if the selection
         * mode allows it.
         * @param child a child of `box`
         */
        unselect_child(child: FlowBoxChild): void;

        /**
         * The orientation of the orientable.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default Gtk.Orientation.HORIZONTAL
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Orientable
         */
        get orientation(): Orientation;
        set orientation(val: Orientation);

        /**
         * Retrieves the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @returns the orientation of the `orientable`.
         */
        get_orientation(): Orientation;

        /**
         * Sets the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @param orientation the orientable’s new orientation.
         */
        set_orientation(orientation: Orientation): void;
    }


    namespace FlowBoxAccessible {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends ContainerAccessible.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-layer": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-mdi-zorder": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-help-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-hypertext-nlinks": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption-object": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-summary": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends ContainerAccessible.ConstructorProps, Atk.Component.ConstructorProps, Atk.Selection.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class FlowBoxAccessible extends ContainerAccessible implements Atk.Component, Atk.Selection {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<FlowBoxAccessible>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: FlowBoxAccessible.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<FlowBoxAccessible.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof FlowBoxAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, FlowBoxAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof FlowBoxAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, FlowBoxAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof FlowBoxAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<FlowBoxAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        /**
         * Adds the specified accessible child of the object to the
         * object's selection.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the child index.
         * @returns TRUE if success, FALSE otherwise.
         */
        add_selection(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Clears the selection in the object so that no children in the object
         * are selected.
         * @returns TRUE if success, FALSE otherwise.
         */
        clear_selection(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the number of accessible children currently selected.
         * Note: callers should not rely on `null` or on a zero value for
         * indication of whether AtkSelectionIface is implemented, they should
         * use type checking/interface checking macros or the
         * `atk_get_accessible_value()` convenience method.
         * @returns a gint representing the number of items selected, or 0 if `selection` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_selection_count(): number;

        /**
         * Determines if the current child of this object is selected
         * Note: callers should not rely on `null` or on a zero value for
         * indication of whether AtkSelectionIface is implemented, they should
         * use type checking/interface checking macros or the
         * `atk_get_accessible_value()` convenience method.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the child index.
         * @returns a gboolean representing the specified child is selected, or 0 if `selection` does not implement this interface.
         */
        is_child_selected(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets a reference to the accessible object representing the specified
         * selected child of the object.
         * Note: callers should not rely on `null` or on a zero value for
         * indication of whether AtkSelectionIface is implemented, they should
         * use type checking/interface checking macros or the
         * `atk_get_accessible_value()` convenience method.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the index in the selection set.  (e.g. the ith selection as opposed to the ith child).
         * @returns an {@link Atk.Object} representing the selected accessible, or `null` if `selection` does not implement this interface.
         */
        ref_selection(i: number): Atk.Object | null;

        /**
         * Removes the specified child of the object from the object's selection.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the index in the selection set.  (e.g. the ith selection as opposed to the ith child).
         * @returns TRUE if success, FALSE otherwise.
         */
        remove_selection(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Causes every child of the object to be selected if the object
         * supports multiple selections.
         * @returns TRUE if success, FALSE otherwise.
         */
        select_all_selection(): boolean;

        /**
         * Adds the specified accessible child of the object to the
         * object's selection.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the child index.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add_selection(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Clears the selection in the object so that no children in the object
         * are selected.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_clear_selection(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the number of accessible children currently selected.
         * Note: callers should not rely on `null` or on a zero value for
         * indication of whether AtkSelectionIface is implemented, they should
         * use type checking/interface checking macros or the
         * `atk_get_accessible_value()` convenience method.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_selection_count(): number;

        /**
         * Determines if the current child of this object is selected
         * Note: callers should not rely on `null` or on a zero value for
         * indication of whether AtkSelectionIface is implemented, they should
         * use type checking/interface checking macros or the
         * `atk_get_accessible_value()` convenience method.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the child index.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_is_child_selected(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets a reference to the accessible object representing the specified
         * selected child of the object.
         * Note: callers should not rely on `null` or on a zero value for
         * indication of whether AtkSelectionIface is implemented, they should
         * use type checking/interface checking macros or the
         * `atk_get_accessible_value()` convenience method.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the index in the selection set.  (e.g. the ith selection as opposed to the ith child).
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_ref_selection(i: number): Atk.Object | null;

        /**
         * Removes the specified child of the object from the object's selection.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the index in the selection set.  (e.g. the ith selection as opposed to the ith child).
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_remove_selection(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Causes every child of the object to be selected if the object
         * supports multiple selections.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_select_all_selection(): boolean;

        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_selection_changed(): void;
    }


    namespace FlowBoxChild {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Bin.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * The ::activate signal is emitted when the user activates
             * a child widget in a {@link Gtk.FlowBox}, either by clicking or
             * double-clicking, or by using the Space or Enter key.
             * 
             * While this signal is used as a
             * [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal],
             * it can be used by applications for their own purposes.
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-first
             */
            activate: () => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Bin.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class FlowBoxChild extends Bin implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<FlowBoxChild>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: FlowBoxChild.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<FlowBoxChild.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): FlowBoxChild;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof FlowBoxChild.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, FlowBoxChild.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof FlowBoxChild.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, FlowBoxChild.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof FlowBoxChild.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<FlowBoxChild.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_activate(): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Marks `child` as changed, causing any state that depends on this
         * to be updated. This affects sorting and filtering.
         * 
         * Note that calls to this method must be in sync with the data
         * used for the sorting and filtering functions. For instance, if
         * the list is mirroring some external data set, and *two* children
         * changed in the external data set when you call
         * `gtk_flow_box_child_changed()` on the first child, the sort function
         * must only read the new data for the first of the two changed
         * children, otherwise the resorting of the children will be wrong.
         * 
         * This generally means that if you don’t fully control the data
         * model, you have to duplicate the data that affects the sorting
         * and filtering functions into the widgets themselves. Another
         * alternative is to call `gtk_flow_box_invalidate_sort()` on any
         * model change, but that is more expensive.
         */
        changed(): void;

        /**
         * Gets the current index of the `child` in its {@link Gtk.FlowBox} container.
         * @returns the index of the `child`, or -1 if the `child` is not     in a flow box.
         */
        get_index(): number;

        /**
         * Returns whether the `child` is currently selected in its
         * {@link Gtk.FlowBox} container.
         * @returns `true` if `child` is selected
         */
        is_selected(): boolean;
    }


    namespace FlowBoxChildAccessible {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends ContainerAccessible.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-layer": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-mdi-zorder": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-help-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-hypertext-nlinks": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption-object": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-summary": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends ContainerAccessible.ConstructorProps, Atk.Component.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class FlowBoxChildAccessible extends ContainerAccessible implements Atk.Component {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<FlowBoxChildAccessible>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: FlowBoxChildAccessible.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<FlowBoxChildAccessible.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof FlowBoxChildAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, FlowBoxChildAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof FlowBoxChildAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, FlowBoxChildAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof FlowBoxChildAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<FlowBoxChildAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;
    }


    namespace FontButton {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Button.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * The ::font-set signal is emitted when the user selects a font.
             * When handling this signal, use `gtk_font_chooser_get_font()`
             * to find out which font was just selected.
             * 
             * Note that this signal is only emitted when the user
             * changes the font. If you need to react to programmatic font changes
             * as well, use the notify::font signal.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.4
             * @run-first
             */
            "font-set": () => void;
            "notify::font-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::show-size": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::show-style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::title": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-font": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-size": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::always-show-image": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::image": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::image-position": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::label": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::relief": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-stock": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-underline": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::xalign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::yalign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::action-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::action-target": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::related-action": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-action-appearance": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::font": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::font-desc": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::font-features": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::language": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::level": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::preview-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::show-preview-entry": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Button.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Actionable.ConstructorProps, Activatable.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, FontChooser.ConstructorProps {
            font_name: string;
            fontName: string;
            show_size: boolean;
            showSize: boolean;
            show_style: boolean;
            showStyle: boolean;
            title: string;
            use_font: boolean;
            useFont: boolean;
            use_size: boolean;
            useSize: boolean;
        }
    }

    /**
     * The {@link Gtk.FontButton} is a button which displays the currently selected
     * font an allows to open a font chooser dialog to change the font.
     * It is suitable widget for selecting a font in a preference dialog.
     * 
     * # CSS nodes
     * 
     * GtkFontButton has a single CSS node with name button and style class .font.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class FontButton extends Button implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Actionable, Activatable, Buildable, FontChooser {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<FontButton>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * The name of the currently selected font.
         * @since 2.4
         * @deprecated since 3.22: Use the {@link Gtk.FontChooser.SignalSignatures.font | Gtk.FontChooser::font} property instead
         * @default Sans 12
         */
        get font_name(): string;
        set font_name(val: string);

        /**
         * The name of the currently selected font.
         * @since 2.4
         * @deprecated since 3.22: Use the {@link Gtk.FontChooser.SignalSignatures.font | Gtk.FontChooser::font} property instead
         * @default Sans 12
         */
        get fontName(): string;
        set fontName(val: string);

        /**
         * If this property is set to `true`, the selected font size will be shown
         * in the label. For a more WYSIWYG way to show the selected size, see the
         * ::use-size property.
         * @since 2.4
         * @default true
         */
        get show_size(): boolean;
        set show_size(val: boolean);

        /**
         * If this property is set to `true`, the selected font size will be shown
         * in the label. For a more WYSIWYG way to show the selected size, see the
         * ::use-size property.
         * @since 2.4
         * @default true
         */
        get showSize(): boolean;
        set showSize(val: boolean);

        /**
         * If this property is set to `true`, the name of the selected font style
         * will be shown in the label. For a more WYSIWYG way to show the selected
         * style, see the ::use-font property.
         * @since 2.4
         * @default true
         */
        get show_style(): boolean;
        set show_style(val: boolean);

        /**
         * If this property is set to `true`, the name of the selected font style
         * will be shown in the label. For a more WYSIWYG way to show the selected
         * style, see the ::use-font property.
         * @since 2.4
         * @default true
         */
        get showStyle(): boolean;
        set showStyle(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The title of the font chooser dialog.
         * @since 2.4
         * @default Pick a Font
         */
        get title(): string;
        set title(val: string);

        /**
         * If this property is set to `true`, the label will be drawn
         * in the selected font.
         * @since 2.4
         * @default false
         */
        get use_font(): boolean;
        set use_font(val: boolean);

        /**
         * If this property is set to `true`, the label will be drawn
         * in the selected font.
         * @since 2.4
         * @default false
         */
        get useFont(): boolean;
        set useFont(val: boolean);

        /**
         * If this property is set to `true`, the label will be drawn
         * with the selected font size.
         * @since 2.4
         * @default false
         */
        get use_size(): boolean;
        set use_size(val: boolean);

        /**
         * If this property is set to `true`, the label will be drawn
         * with the selected font size.
         * @since 2.4
         * @default false
         */
        get useSize(): boolean;
        set useSize(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: FontButton.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        button: Button;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<FontButton.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): FontButton;

        static new_with_font(fontname: string): FontButton;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof FontButton.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, FontButton.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof FontButton.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, FontButton.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof FontButton.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<FontButton.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_font_set(): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Retrieves the name of the currently selected font. This name includes
         * style and size information as well. If you want to render something
         * with the font, use this string with `pango_font_description_from_string()` .
         * If you’re interested in peeking certain values (family name,
         * style, size, weight) just query these properties from the
         * {@link Pango.FontDescription} object.
         * @returns an internal copy of the font name which must not be freed.
         */
        get_font_name(): string;

        /**
         * Returns whether the font size will be shown in the label.
         * @returns whether the font size will be shown in the label.
         */
        get_show_size(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns whether the name of the font style will be shown in the label.
         * @returns whether the font style will be shown in the label.
         */
        get_show_style(): boolean;

        /**
         * Retrieves the title of the font chooser dialog.
         * @returns an internal copy of the title string which must not be freed.
         */
        get_title(): string;

        /**
         * Returns whether the selected font is used in the label.
         * @returns whether the selected font is used in the label.
         */
        get_use_font(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns whether the selected size is used in the label.
         * @returns whether the selected size is used in the label.
         */
        get_use_size(): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets or updates the currently-displayed font in font picker dialog.
         * @param fontname Name of font to display in font chooser dialog
         * @returns `true`
         */
        set_font_name(fontname: string): boolean;

        /**
         * If `show_size` is `true`, the font size will be displayed along with the name of the selected font.
         * @param show_size `true` if font size should be displayed in dialog.
         */
        set_show_size(show_size: boolean): void;

        /**
         * If `show_style` is `true`, the font style will be displayed along with name of the selected font.
         * @param show_style `true` if font style should be displayed in label.
         */
        set_show_style(show_style: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the title for the font chooser dialog.
         * @param title a string containing the font chooser dialog title
         */
        set_title(title: string): void;

        /**
         * If `use_font` is `true`, the font name will be written using the selected font.
         * @param use_font If `true`, font name will be written using font chosen.
         */
        set_use_font(use_font: boolean): void;

        /**
         * If `use_size` is `true`, the font name will be written using the selected size.
         * @param use_size If `true`, font name will be written using the selected size.
         */
        set_use_size(use_size: boolean): void;

        /**
         * @default null
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable
         */
        get action_name(): string | null;
        set action_name(val: string | null);

        /**
         * @default null
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable
         */
        get actionName(): string | null;
        set actionName(val: string | null);

        /** @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable */
        get action_target(): GLib.Variant;
        set action_target(val: GLib.Variant);

        /** @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable */
        get actionTarget(): GLib.Variant;
        set actionTarget(val: GLib.Variant);

        /**
         * The action that this activatable will activate and receive
         * updates from for various states and possibly appearance.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the this property and
         * > call `gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action()` when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get related_action(): Action;
        set related_action(val: Action);

        /**
         * The action that this activatable will activate and receive
         * updates from for various states and possibly appearance.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the this property and
         * > call `gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action()` when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get relatedAction(): Action;
        set relatedAction(val: Action);

        /**
         * Whether this activatable should reset its layout
         * and appearance when setting the related action or when
         * the action changes appearance.
         * 
         * See the {@link Gtk.Action} documentation directly to find which properties
         * should be ignored by the {@link Gtk.Activatable} when this property is `false`.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle this property
         * > and call `gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties()` on the activatable
         * > widget when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get use_action_appearance(): boolean;
        set use_action_appearance(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether this activatable should reset its layout
         * and appearance when setting the related action or when
         * the action changes appearance.
         * 
         * See the {@link Gtk.Action} documentation directly to find which properties
         * should be ignored by the {@link Gtk.Activatable} when this property is `false`.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle this property
         * > and call `gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties()` on the activatable
         * > widget when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get useActionAppearance(): boolean;
        set useActionAppearance(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The font description as a string, e.g. "Sans Italic 12".
         * @default Sans 10
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FontChooser
         */
        get font(): string | null;
        set font(val: string | null);

        /**
         * The font description as a {@link Pango.FontDescription}.
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FontChooser
         */
        get font_desc(): Pango.FontDescription | null;
        set font_desc(val: Pango.FontDescription | null);

        /**
         * The font description as a {@link Pango.FontDescription}.
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FontChooser
         */
        get fontDesc(): Pango.FontDescription | null;
        set fontDesc(val: Pango.FontDescription | null);

        /**
         * The selected font features, in a format that is compatible with
         * CSS and with Pango attributes.
         * @since 3.24.1
         * @read-only
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FontChooser
         */
        get font_features(): string;

        /**
         * The selected font features, in a format that is compatible with
         * CSS and with Pango attributes.
         * @since 3.24.1
         * @read-only
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FontChooser
         */
        get fontFeatures(): string;

        /**
         * The language for which the {@link Gtk.FontChooser.font_features} were
         * selected, in a format that is compatible with CSS and with Pango
         * attributes.
         * @since 3.24.1
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FontChooser
         */
        get language(): string;
        set language(val: string);

        /**
         * The level of granularity to offer for selecting fonts.
         * @since 3.24.1
         * @default Gtk.FontChooserLevel.STYLE | Gtk.FontChooserLevel.SIZE
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FontChooser
         */
        get level(): FontChooserLevel;
        set level(val: FontChooserLevel);

        /**
         * The string with which to preview the font.
         * @default The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog.
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FontChooser
         */
        get preview_text(): string;
        set preview_text(val: string);

        /**
         * The string with which to preview the font.
         * @default The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog.
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FontChooser
         */
        get previewText(): string;
        set previewText(val: string);

        /**
         * Whether to show an entry to change the preview text.
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FontChooser
         */
        get show_preview_entry(): boolean;
        set show_preview_entry(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether to show an entry to change the preview text.
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FontChooser
         */
        get showPreviewEntry(): boolean;
        set showPreviewEntry(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Gets the action name for `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_name()` for more information.
         * @returns the action name, or `null` if none is set
         */
        get_action_name(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the current target value of `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_target_value()` for more information.
         * @returns the current target value
         */
        get_action_target_value(): GLib.Variant;

        /**
         * Specifies the name of the action with which this widget should be
         * associated.  If `action_name` is `null` then the widget will be
         * unassociated from any previous action.
         * 
         * Usually this function is used when the widget is located (or will be
         * located) within the hierarchy of a {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow}.
         * 
         * Names are of the form “win.save” or “app.quit” for actions on the
         * containing {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow} or its associated {@link Gtk.Application},
         * respectively.  This is the same form used for actions in the {@link Gio.Menu}
         * associated with the window.
         * @param action_name an action name, or `null`
         */
        set_action_name(action_name: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the target value of an actionable widget.
         * 
         * If `target_value` is `null` then the target value is unset.
         * 
         * The target value has two purposes.  First, it is used as the
         * parameter to activation of the action associated with the
         * {@link Gtk.Actionable} widget. Second, it is used to determine if the widget
         * should be rendered as “active” — the widget is active if the state
         * is equal to the given target.
         * 
         * Consider the example of associating a set of buttons with a {@link Gio.Action}
         * with string state in a typical “radio button” situation.  Each button
         * will be associated with the same action, but with a different target
         * value for that action.  Clicking on a particular button will activate
         * the action with the target of that button, which will typically cause
         * the action’s state to change to that value.  Since the action’s state
         * is now equal to the target value of the button, the button will now
         * be rendered as active (and the other buttons, with different targets,
         * rendered inactive).
         * @param target_value a {@link GLib.Variant} to set as the target value, or `null`
         */
        set_action_target_value(target_value: GLib.Variant | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the action-name and associated string target value of an
         * actionable widget.
         * 
         * `detailed_action_name` is a string in the format accepted by
         * `g_action_parse_detailed_name()`.
         * 
         * (Note that prior to version 3.22.25,
         * this function is only usable for actions with a simple "s" target, and
         * `detailed_action_name` must be of the form `"action::target"` where
         * `action` is the action name and `target` is the string to use
         * as the target.)
         * @param detailed_action_name the detailed action name
         */
        set_detailed_action_name(detailed_action_name: string): void;

        /**
         * Gets the action name for `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_name()` for more information.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_action_name(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the current target value of `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_target_value()` for more information.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_action_target_value(): GLib.Variant;

        /**
         * Specifies the name of the action with which this widget should be
         * associated.  If `action_name` is `null` then the widget will be
         * unassociated from any previous action.
         * 
         * Usually this function is used when the widget is located (or will be
         * located) within the hierarchy of a {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow}.
         * 
         * Names are of the form “win.save” or “app.quit” for actions on the
         * containing {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow} or its associated {@link Gtk.Application},
         * respectively.  This is the same form used for actions in the {@link Gio.Menu}
         * associated with the window.
         * @param action_name an action name, or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_action_name(action_name: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the target value of an actionable widget.
         * 
         * If `target_value` is `null` then the target value is unset.
         * 
         * The target value has two purposes.  First, it is used as the
         * parameter to activation of the action associated with the
         * {@link Gtk.Actionable} widget. Second, it is used to determine if the widget
         * should be rendered as “active” — the widget is active if the state
         * is equal to the given target.
         * 
         * Consider the example of associating a set of buttons with a {@link Gio.Action}
         * with string state in a typical “radio button” situation.  Each button
         * will be associated with the same action, but with a different target
         * value for that action.  Clicking on a particular button will activate
         * the action with the target of that button, which will typically cause
         * the action’s state to change to that value.  Since the action’s state
         * is now equal to the target value of the button, the button will now
         * be rendered as active (and the other buttons, with different targets,
         * rendered inactive).
         * @param target_value a {@link GLib.Variant} to set as the target value, or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_action_target_value(target_value: GLib.Variant | null): void;

        /**
         * This is a utility function for {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors.
         * 
         * When implementing {@link Gtk.Activatable} you must call this when
         * handling changes of the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action}, and
         * you must also use this to break references in {@link GObject.Object}->dispose().
         * 
         * This function adds a reference to the currently set related
         * action for you, it also makes sure the {@link Gtk.Activatable}->update()
         * method is called when the related {@link Gtk.Action} properties change
         * and registers to the action’s proxy list.
         * 
         * > Be careful to call this before setting the local
         * > copy of the {@link Gtk.Action} property, since this function uses
         * > `gtk_activatable_get_related_action()` to retrieve the
         * > previous action.
         * @param action the {@link Gtk.Action} to set
         */
        do_set_related_action(action: Action): void;

        /**
         * Gets the related {@link Gtk.Action} for `activatable`.
         * @returns the related {@link Gtk.Action} if one is set.
         */
        get_related_action(): Action;

        /**
         * Gets whether this activatable should reset its layout
         * and appearance when setting the related action or when
         * the action changes appearance.
         * @returns whether `activatable` uses its actions appearance.
         */
        get_use_action_appearance(): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the related action on the `activatable` object.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action}
         * > property and call `gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action()` when it changes.
         * @param action the {@link Gtk.Action} to set
         */
        set_related_action(action: Action): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether this activatable should reset its layout and appearance
         * when setting the related action or when the action changes appearance
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} property and call
         * > `gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties()` to update `activatable`
         * > if needed.
         * @param use_appearance whether to use the actions appearance
         */
        set_use_action_appearance(use_appearance: boolean): void;

        /**
         * This is called to update the activatable completely, this is called
         * internally when the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action} property is set
         * or unset and by the implementing class when
         * {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} changes.
         * @param action the related {@link Gtk.Action} or `null`
         */
        sync_action_properties(action: Action | null): void;

        /**
         * This is called to update the activatable completely, this is called
         * internally when the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action} property is set
         * or unset and by the implementing class when
         * {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} changes.
         * @param action the related {@link Gtk.Action} or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_sync_action_properties(action: Action | null): void;

        /**
         * Called to update the activatable when its related action’s properties change.
         * You must check the {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} property only apply action
         * properties that are meant to effect the appearance accordingly.
         * @param action 
         * @param property_name 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_update(action: Action, property_name: string): void;

        /**
         * Gets the currently-selected font name.
         * 
         * Note that this can be a different string than what you set with
         * `gtk_font_chooser_set_font()`, as the font chooser widget may
         * normalize font names and thus return a string with a different
         * structure. For example, “Helvetica Italic Bold 12” could be
         * normalized to “Helvetica Bold Italic 12”.
         * 
         * Use `pango_font_description_equal()` if you want to compare two
         * font descriptions.
         * @returns A string with the name     of the current font, or `null` if  no font is selected. You must     free this string with `g_free()`.
         */
        get_font(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the currently-selected font.
         * 
         * Note that this can be a different string than what you set with
         * `gtk_font_chooser_set_font()`, as the font chooser widget may
         * normalize font names and thus return a string with a different
         * structure. For example, “Helvetica Italic Bold 12” could be
         * normalized to “Helvetica Bold Italic 12”.
         * 
         * Use `pango_font_description_equal()` if you want to compare two
         * font descriptions.
         * @returns A {@link Pango.FontDescription} for the     current font, or `null` if  no font is selected.
         */
        get_font_desc(): Pango.FontDescription | null;

        /**
         * Gets the {@link Pango.FontFace} representing the selected font group
         * details (i.e. family, slant, weight, width, etc).
         * 
         * If the selected font is not installed, returns `null`.
         * @returns A {@link Pango.FontFace} representing the     selected font group details, or `null`. The returned object is owned by     `fontchooser` and must not be modified or freed.
         */
        get_font_face(): Pango.FontFace | null;

        /**
         * Gets the {@link Pango.FontFamily} representing the selected font family.
         * Font families are a collection of font faces.
         * 
         * If the selected font is not installed, returns `null`.
         * @returns A {@link Pango.FontFamily} representing the     selected font family, or `null`. The returned object is owned by `fontchooser`     and must not be modified or freed.
         */
        get_font_family(): Pango.FontFamily | null;

        /**
         * Gets the currently-selected font features.
         * @returns the currently selected font features
         */
        get_font_features(): string;

        /**
         * Gets the custom font map of this font chooser widget,
         * or `null` if it does not have one.
         * @returns a {@link Pango.FontMap}, or `null`
         */
        get_font_map(): Pango.FontMap | null;

        /**
         * The selected font size.
         * @returns A n integer representing the selected font size,     or -1 if no font size is selected.
         */
        get_font_size(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the language that is used for font features.
         * @returns the currently selected language
         */
        get_language(): string;

        /**
         * Returns the current level of granularity for selecting fonts.
         * @returns the current granularity level
         */
        get_level(): FontChooserLevel;

        /**
         * Gets the text displayed in the preview area.
         * @returns the text displayed in the     preview area
         */
        get_preview_text(): string;

        /**
         * Returns whether the preview entry is shown or not.
         * @returns `true` if the preview entry is shown     or `false` if it is hidden.
         */
        get_show_preview_entry(): boolean;

        /**
         * Adds a filter function that decides which fonts to display
         * in the font chooser.
         * @param filter a {@link Gtk.FontFilterFunc}, or `null`
         */
        set_filter_func(filter: FontFilterFunc | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the currently-selected font.
         * @param fontname a font name like “Helvetica 12” or “Times Bold 18”
         */
        set_font(fontname: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets the currently-selected font from `font_desc`.
         * @param font_desc a {@link Pango.FontDescription}
         */
        set_font_desc(font_desc: Pango.FontDescription): void;

        /**
         * Sets a custom font map to use for this font chooser widget.
         * A custom font map can be used to present application-specific
         * fonts instead of or in addition to the normal system fonts.
         * 
         * 
         * ```c
         * FcConfig *config;
         * PangoFontMap *fontmap;
         * 
         * config = FcInitLoadConfigAndFonts ();
         * FcConfigAppFontAddFile (config, my_app_font_file);
         * 
         * fontmap = pango_cairo_font_map_new_for_font_type (CAIRO_FONT_TYPE_FT);
         * pango_fc_font_map_set_config (PANGO_FC_FONT_MAP (fontmap), config);
         * 
         * gtk_font_chooser_set_font_map (font_chooser, fontmap);
         * ```
         * 
         * 
         * Note that other GTK+ widgets will only be able to use the application-specific
         * font if it is present in the font map they use:
         * 
         * 
         * ```
         * context = gtk_widget_get_pango_context (label);
         * pango_context_set_font_map (context, fontmap);
         * ```
         * 
         * @param fontmap a {@link Pango.FontMap}
         */
        set_font_map(fontmap: Pango.FontMap | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the language to use for font features.
         * @param language a language
         */
        set_language(language: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets the desired level of granularity for selecting fonts.
         * @param level the desired level of granularity
         */
        set_level(level: FontChooserLevel): void;

        /**
         * Sets the text displayed in the preview area.
         * The `text` is used to show how the selected font looks.
         * @param text the text to display in the preview area
         */
        set_preview_text(text: string): void;

        /**
         * Shows or hides the editable preview entry.
         * @param show_preview_entry whether to show the editable preview entry or not
         */
        set_show_preview_entry(show_preview_entry: boolean): void;

        /**
         * @param fontname 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_font_activated(fontname: string): void;

        /**
         * Gets the {@link Pango.FontFace} representing the selected font group
         * details (i.e. family, slant, weight, width, etc).
         * 
         * If the selected font is not installed, returns `null`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_font_face(): Pango.FontFace | null;

        /**
         * Gets the {@link Pango.FontFamily} representing the selected font family.
         * Font families are a collection of font faces.
         * 
         * If the selected font is not installed, returns `null`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_font_family(): Pango.FontFamily | null;

        /**
         * Gets the custom font map of this font chooser widget,
         * or `null` if it does not have one.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_font_map(): Pango.FontMap | null;

        /**
         * The selected font size.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_font_size(): number;

        /**
         * Adds a filter function that decides which fonts to display
         * in the font chooser.
         * @param filter a {@link Gtk.FontFilterFunc}, or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_filter_func(filter: FontFilterFunc | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets a custom font map to use for this font chooser widget.
         * A custom font map can be used to present application-specific
         * fonts instead of or in addition to the normal system fonts.
         * 
         * 
         * ```c
         * FcConfig *config;
         * PangoFontMap *fontmap;
         * 
         * config = FcInitLoadConfigAndFonts ();
         * FcConfigAppFontAddFile (config, my_app_font_file);
         * 
         * fontmap = pango_cairo_font_map_new_for_font_type (CAIRO_FONT_TYPE_FT);
         * pango_fc_font_map_set_config (PANGO_FC_FONT_MAP (fontmap), config);
         * 
         * gtk_font_chooser_set_font_map (font_chooser, fontmap);
         * ```
         * 
         * 
         * Note that other GTK+ widgets will only be able to use the application-specific
         * font if it is present in the font map they use:
         * 
         * 
         * ```
         * context = gtk_widget_get_pango_context (label);
         * pango_context_set_font_map (context, fontmap);
         * ```
         * 
         * @param fontmap a {@link Pango.FontMap}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_font_map(fontmap: Pango.FontMap | null): void;

        /**
         * Emits a {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.child_notify | Gtk.Widget::child-notify} signal for the
         * [child property][child-properties] `child_property`
         * on `widget`.
         * 
         * This is the analogue of `g_object_notify()` for child properties.
         * 
         * Also see `gtk_container_child_notify()`.
         * @param child_property the name of a child property installed on the                  class of `widget`’s parent
         */
        child_notify(child_property: string): void;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Gtk.Container.child_notify
        child_notify(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Returns whether the widget should grab focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
         * See `gtk_widget_set_focus_on_click()`.
         * @returns `true` if the widget should grab focus when it is clicked with               the mouse.
         */
        get_focus_on_click(): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets whether the widget should grab focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
         * Making mouse clicks not grab focus is useful in places like toolbars where
         * you don’t want the keyboard focus removed from the main area of the
         * application.
         * @param focus_on_click whether the widget should grab focus when clicked with the mouse
         */
        set_focus_on_click(focus_on_click: boolean): void;
    }


    namespace FontChooserDialog {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Dialog.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::use-header-bar": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accept-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::application": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::attached-to": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::decorated": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::default-height": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::default-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::deletable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::destroy-with-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-map": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gravity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-resize-grip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-toplevel-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hide-titlebar-when-maximized": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::icon": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::icon-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-active": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-maximized": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::mnemonics-visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::modal": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resizable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-grip-visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::screen": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::skip-pager-hint": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::skip-taskbar-hint": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::startup-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::title": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::transient-for": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::type": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::type-hint": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::urgency-hint": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window-position": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::font": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::font-desc": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::font-features": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::language": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::level": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::preview-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::show-preview-entry": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Dialog.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, FontChooser.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * The {@link Gtk.FontChooserDialog} widget is a dialog for selecting a font.
     * It implements the {@link Gtk.FontChooser} interface.
     * 
     * # GtkFontChooserDialog as GtkBuildable
     * 
     * The GtkFontChooserDialog implementation of the {@link Gtk.Buildable}
     * interface exposes the buttons with the names “select_button”
     * and “cancel_button”.
     * @gir-type Class
     * @since 3.2
     */
    class FontChooserDialog extends Dialog implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable, FontChooser {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<FontChooserDialog>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: FontChooserDialog.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<FontChooserDialog.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](title: string | null, parent: Window | null): FontChooserDialog;

        // Conflicted with Gtk.Dialog.new
        static ["new"](...args: never[]): any;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof FontChooserDialog.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, FontChooserDialog.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof FontChooserDialog.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, FontChooserDialog.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof FontChooserDialog.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<FontChooserDialog.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        /**
         * The font description as a string, e.g. "Sans Italic 12".
         * @default Sans 10
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FontChooser
         */
        get font(): string | null;
        set font(val: string | null);

        /**
         * The font description as a {@link Pango.FontDescription}.
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FontChooser
         */
        get font_desc(): Pango.FontDescription | null;
        set font_desc(val: Pango.FontDescription | null);

        /**
         * The font description as a {@link Pango.FontDescription}.
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FontChooser
         */
        get fontDesc(): Pango.FontDescription | null;
        set fontDesc(val: Pango.FontDescription | null);

        /**
         * The selected font features, in a format that is compatible with
         * CSS and with Pango attributes.
         * @since 3.24.1
         * @read-only
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FontChooser
         */
        get font_features(): string;

        /**
         * The selected font features, in a format that is compatible with
         * CSS and with Pango attributes.
         * @since 3.24.1
         * @read-only
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FontChooser
         */
        get fontFeatures(): string;

        /**
         * The language for which the {@link Gtk.FontChooser.font_features} were
         * selected, in a format that is compatible with CSS and with Pango
         * attributes.
         * @since 3.24.1
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FontChooser
         */
        get language(): string;
        set language(val: string);

        /**
         * The level of granularity to offer for selecting fonts.
         * @since 3.24.1
         * @default Gtk.FontChooserLevel.STYLE | Gtk.FontChooserLevel.SIZE
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FontChooser
         */
        get level(): FontChooserLevel;
        set level(val: FontChooserLevel);

        /**
         * The string with which to preview the font.
         * @default The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog.
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FontChooser
         */
        get preview_text(): string;
        set preview_text(val: string);

        /**
         * The string with which to preview the font.
         * @default The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog.
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FontChooser
         */
        get previewText(): string;
        set previewText(val: string);

        /**
         * Whether to show an entry to change the preview text.
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FontChooser
         */
        get show_preview_entry(): boolean;
        set show_preview_entry(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether to show an entry to change the preview text.
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FontChooser
         */
        get showPreviewEntry(): boolean;
        set showPreviewEntry(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Gets the currently-selected font name.
         * 
         * Note that this can be a different string than what you set with
         * `gtk_font_chooser_set_font()`, as the font chooser widget may
         * normalize font names and thus return a string with a different
         * structure. For example, “Helvetica Italic Bold 12” could be
         * normalized to “Helvetica Bold Italic 12”.
         * 
         * Use `pango_font_description_equal()` if you want to compare two
         * font descriptions.
         * @returns A string with the name     of the current font, or `null` if  no font is selected. You must     free this string with `g_free()`.
         */
        get_font(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the currently-selected font.
         * 
         * Note that this can be a different string than what you set with
         * `gtk_font_chooser_set_font()`, as the font chooser widget may
         * normalize font names and thus return a string with a different
         * structure. For example, “Helvetica Italic Bold 12” could be
         * normalized to “Helvetica Bold Italic 12”.
         * 
         * Use `pango_font_description_equal()` if you want to compare two
         * font descriptions.
         * @returns A {@link Pango.FontDescription} for the     current font, or `null` if  no font is selected.
         */
        get_font_desc(): Pango.FontDescription | null;

        /**
         * Gets the {@link Pango.FontFace} representing the selected font group
         * details (i.e. family, slant, weight, width, etc).
         * 
         * If the selected font is not installed, returns `null`.
         * @returns A {@link Pango.FontFace} representing the     selected font group details, or `null`. The returned object is owned by     `fontchooser` and must not be modified or freed.
         */
        get_font_face(): Pango.FontFace | null;

        /**
         * Gets the {@link Pango.FontFamily} representing the selected font family.
         * Font families are a collection of font faces.
         * 
         * If the selected font is not installed, returns `null`.
         * @returns A {@link Pango.FontFamily} representing the     selected font family, or `null`. The returned object is owned by `fontchooser`     and must not be modified or freed.
         */
        get_font_family(): Pango.FontFamily | null;

        /**
         * Gets the currently-selected font features.
         * @returns the currently selected font features
         */
        get_font_features(): string;

        /**
         * Gets the custom font map of this font chooser widget,
         * or `null` if it does not have one.
         * @returns a {@link Pango.FontMap}, or `null`
         */
        get_font_map(): Pango.FontMap | null;

        /**
         * The selected font size.
         * @returns A n integer representing the selected font size,     or -1 if no font size is selected.
         */
        get_font_size(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the language that is used for font features.
         * @returns the currently selected language
         */
        get_language(): string;

        /**
         * Returns the current level of granularity for selecting fonts.
         * @returns the current granularity level
         */
        get_level(): FontChooserLevel;

        /**
         * Gets the text displayed in the preview area.
         * @returns the text displayed in the     preview area
         */
        get_preview_text(): string;

        /**
         * Returns whether the preview entry is shown or not.
         * @returns `true` if the preview entry is shown     or `false` if it is hidden.
         */
        get_show_preview_entry(): boolean;

        /**
         * Adds a filter function that decides which fonts to display
         * in the font chooser.
         * @param filter a {@link Gtk.FontFilterFunc}, or `null`
         */
        set_filter_func(filter: FontFilterFunc | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the currently-selected font.
         * @param fontname a font name like “Helvetica 12” or “Times Bold 18”
         */
        set_font(fontname: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets the currently-selected font from `font_desc`.
         * @param font_desc a {@link Pango.FontDescription}
         */
        set_font_desc(font_desc: Pango.FontDescription): void;

        /**
         * Sets a custom font map to use for this font chooser widget.
         * A custom font map can be used to present application-specific
         * fonts instead of or in addition to the normal system fonts.
         * 
         * 
         * ```c
         * FcConfig *config;
         * PangoFontMap *fontmap;
         * 
         * config = FcInitLoadConfigAndFonts ();
         * FcConfigAppFontAddFile (config, my_app_font_file);
         * 
         * fontmap = pango_cairo_font_map_new_for_font_type (CAIRO_FONT_TYPE_FT);
         * pango_fc_font_map_set_config (PANGO_FC_FONT_MAP (fontmap), config);
         * 
         * gtk_font_chooser_set_font_map (font_chooser, fontmap);
         * ```
         * 
         * 
         * Note that other GTK+ widgets will only be able to use the application-specific
         * font if it is present in the font map they use:
         * 
         * 
         * ```
         * context = gtk_widget_get_pango_context (label);
         * pango_context_set_font_map (context, fontmap);
         * ```
         * 
         * @param fontmap a {@link Pango.FontMap}
         */
        set_font_map(fontmap: Pango.FontMap | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the language to use for font features.
         * @param language a language
         */
        set_language(language: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets the desired level of granularity for selecting fonts.
         * @param level the desired level of granularity
         */
        set_level(level: FontChooserLevel): void;

        /**
         * Sets the text displayed in the preview area.
         * The `text` is used to show how the selected font looks.
         * @param text the text to display in the preview area
         */
        set_preview_text(text: string): void;

        /**
         * Shows or hides the editable preview entry.
         * @param show_preview_entry whether to show the editable preview entry or not
         */
        set_show_preview_entry(show_preview_entry: boolean): void;

        /**
         * @param fontname 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_font_activated(fontname: string): void;

        /**
         * Gets the {@link Pango.FontFace} representing the selected font group
         * details (i.e. family, slant, weight, width, etc).
         * 
         * If the selected font is not installed, returns `null`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_font_face(): Pango.FontFace | null;

        /**
         * Gets the {@link Pango.FontFamily} representing the selected font family.
         * Font families are a collection of font faces.
         * 
         * If the selected font is not installed, returns `null`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_font_family(): Pango.FontFamily | null;

        /**
         * Gets the custom font map of this font chooser widget,
         * or `null` if it does not have one.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_font_map(): Pango.FontMap | null;

        /**
         * The selected font size.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_font_size(): number;

        /**
         * Adds a filter function that decides which fonts to display
         * in the font chooser.
         * @param filter a {@link Gtk.FontFilterFunc}, or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_filter_func(filter: FontFilterFunc | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets a custom font map to use for this font chooser widget.
         * A custom font map can be used to present application-specific
         * fonts instead of or in addition to the normal system fonts.
         * 
         * 
         * ```c
         * FcConfig *config;
         * PangoFontMap *fontmap;
         * 
         * config = FcInitLoadConfigAndFonts ();
         * FcConfigAppFontAddFile (config, my_app_font_file);
         * 
         * fontmap = pango_cairo_font_map_new_for_font_type (CAIRO_FONT_TYPE_FT);
         * pango_fc_font_map_set_config (PANGO_FC_FONT_MAP (fontmap), config);
         * 
         * gtk_font_chooser_set_font_map (font_chooser, fontmap);
         * ```
         * 
         * 
         * Note that other GTK+ widgets will only be able to use the application-specific
         * font if it is present in the font map they use:
         * 
         * 
         * ```
         * context = gtk_widget_get_pango_context (label);
         * pango_context_set_font_map (context, fontmap);
         * ```
         * 
         * @param fontmap a {@link Pango.FontMap}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_font_map(fontmap: Pango.FontMap | null): void;
    }


    namespace FontChooserWidget {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Box.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::tweak-action": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::baseline-position": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::homogeneous": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::spacing": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::font": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::font-desc": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::font-features": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::language": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::level": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::preview-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::show-preview-entry": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::orientation": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Box.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, FontChooser.ConstructorProps, Orientable.ConstructorProps {
            tweak_action: Gio.Action;
            tweakAction: Gio.Action;
        }
    }

    /**
     * The {@link Gtk.FontChooserWidget} widget lists the available fonts,
     * styles and sizes, allowing the user to select a font. It is
     * used in the {@link Gtk.FontChooserDialog} widget to provide a
     * dialog box for selecting fonts.
     * 
     * To set the font which is initially selected, use
     * `gtk_font_chooser_set_font()` or `gtk_font_chooser_set_font_desc()`.
     * 
     * To get the selected font use `gtk_font_chooser_get_font()` or
     * `gtk_font_chooser_get_font_desc()`.
     * 
     * To change the text which is shown in the preview area, use
     * `gtk_font_chooser_set_preview_text()`.
     * 
     * # CSS nodes
     * 
     * GtkFontChooserWidget has a single CSS node with name fontchooser.
     * @gir-type Class
     * @since 3.2
     */
    class FontChooserWidget extends Box implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable, FontChooser, Orientable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<FontChooserWidget>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * A toggle action that can be used to switch to the tweak page
         * of the font chooser widget, which lets the user tweak the
         * OpenType features and variation axes of the selected font.
         * 
         * The action will be enabled or disabled depending on whether
         * the selected font has any features or axes.
         * @read-only
         */
        get tweak_action(): Gio.Action;

        /**
         * A toggle action that can be used to switch to the tweak page
         * of the font chooser widget, which lets the user tweak the
         * OpenType features and variation axes of the selected font.
         * 
         * The action will be enabled or disabled depending on whether
         * the selected font has any features or axes.
         * @read-only
         */
        get tweakAction(): Gio.Action;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: FontChooserWidget.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<FontChooserWidget.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): FontChooserWidget;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof FontChooserWidget.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, FontChooserWidget.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof FontChooserWidget.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, FontChooserWidget.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof FontChooserWidget.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<FontChooserWidget.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        /**
         * The font description as a string, e.g. "Sans Italic 12".
         * @default Sans 10
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FontChooser
         */
        get font(): string | null;
        set font(val: string | null);

        /**
         * The font description as a {@link Pango.FontDescription}.
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FontChooser
         */
        get font_desc(): Pango.FontDescription | null;
        set font_desc(val: Pango.FontDescription | null);

        /**
         * The font description as a {@link Pango.FontDescription}.
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FontChooser
         */
        get fontDesc(): Pango.FontDescription | null;
        set fontDesc(val: Pango.FontDescription | null);

        /**
         * The selected font features, in a format that is compatible with
         * CSS and with Pango attributes.
         * @since 3.24.1
         * @read-only
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FontChooser
         */
        get font_features(): string;

        /**
         * The selected font features, in a format that is compatible with
         * CSS and with Pango attributes.
         * @since 3.24.1
         * @read-only
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FontChooser
         */
        get fontFeatures(): string;

        /**
         * The language for which the {@link Gtk.FontChooser.font_features} were
         * selected, in a format that is compatible with CSS and with Pango
         * attributes.
         * @since 3.24.1
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FontChooser
         */
        get language(): string;
        set language(val: string);

        /**
         * The level of granularity to offer for selecting fonts.
         * @since 3.24.1
         * @default Gtk.FontChooserLevel.STYLE | Gtk.FontChooserLevel.SIZE
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FontChooser
         */
        get level(): FontChooserLevel;
        set level(val: FontChooserLevel);

        /**
         * The string with which to preview the font.
         * @default The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog.
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FontChooser
         */
        get preview_text(): string;
        set preview_text(val: string);

        /**
         * The string with which to preview the font.
         * @default The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog.
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FontChooser
         */
        get previewText(): string;
        set previewText(val: string);

        /**
         * Whether to show an entry to change the preview text.
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FontChooser
         */
        get show_preview_entry(): boolean;
        set show_preview_entry(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether to show an entry to change the preview text.
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.FontChooser
         */
        get showPreviewEntry(): boolean;
        set showPreviewEntry(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The orientation of the orientable.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default Gtk.Orientation.HORIZONTAL
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Orientable
         */
        get orientation(): Orientation;
        set orientation(val: Orientation);

        /**
         * Gets the currently-selected font name.
         * 
         * Note that this can be a different string than what you set with
         * `gtk_font_chooser_set_font()`, as the font chooser widget may
         * normalize font names and thus return a string with a different
         * structure. For example, “Helvetica Italic Bold 12” could be
         * normalized to “Helvetica Bold Italic 12”.
         * 
         * Use `pango_font_description_equal()` if you want to compare two
         * font descriptions.
         * @returns A string with the name     of the current font, or `null` if  no font is selected. You must     free this string with `g_free()`.
         */
        get_font(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the currently-selected font.
         * 
         * Note that this can be a different string than what you set with
         * `gtk_font_chooser_set_font()`, as the font chooser widget may
         * normalize font names and thus return a string with a different
         * structure. For example, “Helvetica Italic Bold 12” could be
         * normalized to “Helvetica Bold Italic 12”.
         * 
         * Use `pango_font_description_equal()` if you want to compare two
         * font descriptions.
         * @returns A {@link Pango.FontDescription} for the     current font, or `null` if  no font is selected.
         */
        get_font_desc(): Pango.FontDescription | null;

        /**
         * Gets the {@link Pango.FontFace} representing the selected font group
         * details (i.e. family, slant, weight, width, etc).
         * 
         * If the selected font is not installed, returns `null`.
         * @returns A {@link Pango.FontFace} representing the     selected font group details, or `null`. The returned object is owned by     `fontchooser` and must not be modified or freed.
         */
        get_font_face(): Pango.FontFace | null;

        /**
         * Gets the {@link Pango.FontFamily} representing the selected font family.
         * Font families are a collection of font faces.
         * 
         * If the selected font is not installed, returns `null`.
         * @returns A {@link Pango.FontFamily} representing the     selected font family, or `null`. The returned object is owned by `fontchooser`     and must not be modified or freed.
         */
        get_font_family(): Pango.FontFamily | null;

        /**
         * Gets the currently-selected font features.
         * @returns the currently selected font features
         */
        get_font_features(): string;

        /**
         * Gets the custom font map of this font chooser widget,
         * or `null` if it does not have one.
         * @returns a {@link Pango.FontMap}, or `null`
         */
        get_font_map(): Pango.FontMap | null;

        /**
         * The selected font size.
         * @returns A n integer representing the selected font size,     or -1 if no font size is selected.
         */
        get_font_size(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the language that is used for font features.
         * @returns the currently selected language
         */
        get_language(): string;

        /**
         * Returns the current level of granularity for selecting fonts.
         * @returns the current granularity level
         */
        get_level(): FontChooserLevel;

        /**
         * Gets the text displayed in the preview area.
         * @returns the text displayed in the     preview area
         */
        get_preview_text(): string;

        /**
         * Returns whether the preview entry is shown or not.
         * @returns `true` if the preview entry is shown     or `false` if it is hidden.
         */
        get_show_preview_entry(): boolean;

        /**
         * Adds a filter function that decides which fonts to display
         * in the font chooser.
         * @param filter a {@link Gtk.FontFilterFunc}, or `null`
         */
        set_filter_func(filter: FontFilterFunc | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the currently-selected font.
         * @param fontname a font name like “Helvetica 12” or “Times Bold 18”
         */
        set_font(fontname: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets the currently-selected font from `font_desc`.
         * @param font_desc a {@link Pango.FontDescription}
         */
        set_font_desc(font_desc: Pango.FontDescription): void;

        /**
         * Sets a custom font map to use for this font chooser widget.
         * A custom font map can be used to present application-specific
         * fonts instead of or in addition to the normal system fonts.
         * 
         * 
         * ```c
         * FcConfig *config;
         * PangoFontMap *fontmap;
         * 
         * config = FcInitLoadConfigAndFonts ();
         * FcConfigAppFontAddFile (config, my_app_font_file);
         * 
         * fontmap = pango_cairo_font_map_new_for_font_type (CAIRO_FONT_TYPE_FT);
         * pango_fc_font_map_set_config (PANGO_FC_FONT_MAP (fontmap), config);
         * 
         * gtk_font_chooser_set_font_map (font_chooser, fontmap);
         * ```
         * 
         * 
         * Note that other GTK+ widgets will only be able to use the application-specific
         * font if it is present in the font map they use:
         * 
         * 
         * ```
         * context = gtk_widget_get_pango_context (label);
         * pango_context_set_font_map (context, fontmap);
         * ```
         * 
         * @param fontmap a {@link Pango.FontMap}
         */
        set_font_map(fontmap: Pango.FontMap | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the language to use for font features.
         * @param language a language
         */
        set_language(language: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets the desired level of granularity for selecting fonts.
         * @param level the desired level of granularity
         */
        set_level(level: FontChooserLevel): void;

        /**
         * Sets the text displayed in the preview area.
         * The `text` is used to show how the selected font looks.
         * @param text the text to display in the preview area
         */
        set_preview_text(text: string): void;

        /**
         * Shows or hides the editable preview entry.
         * @param show_preview_entry whether to show the editable preview entry or not
         */
        set_show_preview_entry(show_preview_entry: boolean): void;

        /**
         * @param fontname 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_font_activated(fontname: string): void;

        /**
         * Gets the {@link Pango.FontFace} representing the selected font group
         * details (i.e. family, slant, weight, width, etc).
         * 
         * If the selected font is not installed, returns `null`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_font_face(): Pango.FontFace | null;

        /**
         * Gets the {@link Pango.FontFamily} representing the selected font family.
         * Font families are a collection of font faces.
         * 
         * If the selected font is not installed, returns `null`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_font_family(): Pango.FontFamily | null;

        /**
         * Gets the custom font map of this font chooser widget,
         * or `null` if it does not have one.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_font_map(): Pango.FontMap | null;

        /**
         * The selected font size.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_font_size(): number;

        /**
         * Adds a filter function that decides which fonts to display
         * in the font chooser.
         * @param filter a {@link Gtk.FontFilterFunc}, or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_filter_func(filter: FontFilterFunc | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets a custom font map to use for this font chooser widget.
         * A custom font map can be used to present application-specific
         * fonts instead of or in addition to the normal system fonts.
         * 
         * 
         * ```c
         * FcConfig *config;
         * PangoFontMap *fontmap;
         * 
         * config = FcInitLoadConfigAndFonts ();
         * FcConfigAppFontAddFile (config, my_app_font_file);
         * 
         * fontmap = pango_cairo_font_map_new_for_font_type (CAIRO_FONT_TYPE_FT);
         * pango_fc_font_map_set_config (PANGO_FC_FONT_MAP (fontmap), config);
         * 
         * gtk_font_chooser_set_font_map (font_chooser, fontmap);
         * ```
         * 
         * 
         * Note that other GTK+ widgets will only be able to use the application-specific
         * font if it is present in the font map they use:
         * 
         * 
         * ```
         * context = gtk_widget_get_pango_context (label);
         * pango_context_set_font_map (context, fontmap);
         * ```
         * 
         * @param fontmap a {@link Pango.FontMap}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_font_map(fontmap: Pango.FontMap | null): void;

        /**
         * Retrieves the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @returns the orientation of the `orientable`.
         */
        get_orientation(): Orientation;

        /**
         * Sets the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @param orientation the orientable’s new orientation.
         */
        set_orientation(orientation: Orientation): void;
    }


    namespace FontSelection {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Box.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::font-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::preview-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::baseline-position": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::homogeneous": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::spacing": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::orientation": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Box.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, Orientable.ConstructorProps {
            font_name: string;
            fontName: string;
            preview_text: string;
            previewText: string;
        }
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class FontSelection extends Box implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable, Orientable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<FontSelection>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * @default Sans 10
         */
        get font_name(): string;
        set font_name(val: string);

        /**
         * @default Sans 10
         */
        get fontName(): string;
        set fontName(val: string);

        /**
         * @default abcdefghijk ABCDEFGHIJK
         */
        get preview_text(): string;
        set preview_text(val: string);

        /**
         * @default abcdefghijk ABCDEFGHIJK
         */
        get previewText(): string;
        set previewText(val: string);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: FontSelection.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<FontSelection.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): FontSelection;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof FontSelection.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, FontSelection.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof FontSelection.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, FontSelection.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof FontSelection.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<FontSelection.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Gets the {@link Pango.FontFace} representing the selected font group
         * details (i.e. family, slant, weight, width, etc).
         * @returns A {@link Pango.FontFace} representing the     selected font group details. The returned object is owned by     `fontsel` and must not be modified or freed.
         */
        get_face(): Pango.FontFace;

        /**
         * This returns the {@link Gtk.TreeView} which lists all styles available for
         * the selected font. For example, “Regular”, “Bold”, etc.
         * @returns A {@link Gtk.Widget} that is part of `fontsel`
         */
        get_face_list(): Widget;

        /**
         * Gets the {@link Pango.FontFamily} representing the selected font family.
         * @returns A {@link Pango.FontFamily} representing the     selected font family. Font families are a collection of font     faces. The returned object is owned by `fontsel` and must not     be modified or freed.
         */
        get_family(): Pango.FontFamily;

        /**
         * This returns the {@link Gtk.TreeView} that lists font families, for
         * example, “Sans”, “Serif”, etc.
         * @returns A {@link Gtk.Widget} that is part of `fontsel`
         */
        get_family_list(): Widget;

        /**
         * Gets the currently-selected font name.
         * 
         * Note that this can be a different string than what you set with
         * `gtk_font_selection_set_font_name()`, as the font selection widget may
         * normalize font names and thus return a string with a different structure.
         * For example, “Helvetica Italic Bold 12” could be normalized to
         * “Helvetica Bold Italic 12”. Use `pango_font_description_equal()`
         * if you want to compare two font descriptions.
         * @returns A string with the name of the current font, or `null` if     no font is selected. You must free this string with `g_free()`.
         */
        get_font_name(): string;

        /**
         * This returns the {@link Gtk.Entry} used to display the font as a preview.
         * @returns A {@link Gtk.Widget} that is part of `fontsel`
         */
        get_preview_entry(): Widget;

        /**
         * Gets the text displayed in the preview area.
         * @returns the text displayed in the preview area.     This string is owned by the widget and should not be     modified or freed
         */
        get_preview_text(): string;

        /**
         * The selected font size.
         * @returns A n integer representing the selected font size,     or -1 if no font size is selected.
         */
        get_size(): number;

        /**
         * This returns the {@link Gtk.Entry} used to allow the user to edit the font
         * number manually instead of selecting it from the list of font sizes.
         * @returns A {@link Gtk.Widget} that is part of `fontsel`
         */
        get_size_entry(): Widget;

        /**
         * This returns the {@link Gtk.TreeView} used to list font sizes.
         * @returns A {@link Gtk.Widget} that is part of `fontsel`
         */
        get_size_list(): Widget;

        /**
         * Sets the currently-selected font.
         * 
         * Note that the `fontsel` needs to know the screen in which it will appear
         * for this to work; this can be guaranteed by simply making sure that the
         * `fontsel` is inserted in a toplevel window before you call this function.
         * @param fontname a font name like “Helvetica 12” or “Times Bold 18”
         * @returns `true` if the font could be set successfully; `false` if no     such font exists or if the `fontsel` doesn’t belong to a particular     screen yet.
         */
        set_font_name(fontname: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the text displayed in the preview area.
         * The `text` is used to show how the selected font looks.
         * @param text the text to display in the preview area
         */
        set_preview_text(text: string): void;

        /**
         * The orientation of the orientable.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default Gtk.Orientation.HORIZONTAL
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Orientable
         */
        get orientation(): Orientation;
        set orientation(val: Orientation);

        /**
         * Retrieves the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @returns the orientation of the `orientable`.
         */
        get_orientation(): Orientation;

        /**
         * Sets the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @param orientation the orientable’s new orientation.
         */
        set_orientation(orientation: Orientation): void;
    }


    namespace FontSelectionDialog {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Dialog.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::use-header-bar": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accept-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::application": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::attached-to": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::decorated": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::default-height": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::default-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::deletable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::destroy-with-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-map": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gravity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-resize-grip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-toplevel-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hide-titlebar-when-maximized": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::icon": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::icon-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-active": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-maximized": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::mnemonics-visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::modal": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resizable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-grip-visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::screen": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::skip-pager-hint": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::skip-taskbar-hint": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::startup-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::title": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::transient-for": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::type": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::type-hint": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::urgency-hint": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window-position": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Dialog.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class FontSelectionDialog extends Dialog implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<FontSelectionDialog>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: FontSelectionDialog.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<FontSelectionDialog.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](title: string): FontSelectionDialog;

        // Conflicted with Gtk.Dialog.new
        static ["new"](...args: never[]): any;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof FontSelectionDialog.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, FontSelectionDialog.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof FontSelectionDialog.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, FontSelectionDialog.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof FontSelectionDialog.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<FontSelectionDialog.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Gets the “Cancel” button.
         * @returns the {@link Gtk.Widget} used in the dialog     for the “Cancel” button.
         */
        get_cancel_button(): Widget;

        /**
         * Gets the currently-selected font name.
         * 
         * Note that this can be a different string than what you set with
         * `gtk_font_selection_dialog_set_font_name()`, as the font selection widget
         * may normalize font names and thus return a string with a different
         * structure. For example, “Helvetica Italic Bold 12” could be normalized
         * to “Helvetica Bold Italic 12”.  Use `pango_font_description_equal()`
         * if you want to compare two font descriptions.
         * @returns A string with the name of the current font, or `null` if no     font is selected. You must free this string with `g_free()`.
         */
        get_font_name(): string;

        /**
         * Retrieves the {@link Gtk.FontSelection} widget embedded in the dialog.
         * @returns the embedded {@link Gtk.FontSelection}
         */
        get_font_selection(): Widget;

        /**
         * Gets the “OK” button.
         * @returns the {@link Gtk.Widget} used in the dialog     for the “OK” button.
         */
        get_ok_button(): Widget;

        /**
         * Gets the text displayed in the preview area.
         * @returns the text displayed in the preview area.     This string is owned by the widget and should not be     modified or freed
         */
        get_preview_text(): string;

        /**
         * Sets the currently selected font.
         * @param fontname a font name like “Helvetica 12” or “Times Bold 18”
         * @returns `true` if the font selected in `fsd` is now the     `fontname` specified, `false` otherwise.
         */
        set_font_name(fontname: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the text displayed in the preview area.
         * @param text the text to display in the preview area
         */
        set_preview_text(text: string): void;
    }


    namespace Frame {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Bin.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::label": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::label-widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::label-xalign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::label-yalign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::shadow-type": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Bin.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {
            label: string | null;
            label_widget: Widget | null;
            labelWidget: Widget | null;
            label_xalign: number;
            labelXalign: number;
            label_yalign: number;
            labelYalign: number;
            shadow_type: ShadowType;
            shadowType: ShadowType;
        }
    }

    /**
     * The frame widget is a bin that surrounds its child with a decorative
     * frame and an optional label. If present, the label is drawn in a gap
     * in the top side of the frame. The position of the label can be
     * controlled with `gtk_frame_set_label_align()`.
     * 
     * # GtkFrame as GtkBuildable
     * 
     * The GtkFrame implementation of the {@link Gtk.Buildable} interface supports
     * placing a child in the label position by specifying “label” as the
     * “type” attribute of a `<child>` element. A normal content child can
     * be specified without specifying a `<child>` type attribute.
     * 
     * An example of a UI definition fragment with {@link Gtk.Frame}:
     * 
     * 
     * ```xml
     * <object class="GtkFrame">
     *   <child type="label">
     *     <object class="GtkLabel" id="frame-label"/>
     *   </child>
     *   <child>
     *     <object class="GtkEntry" id="frame-content"/>
     *   </child>
     * </object>
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * # CSS nodes
     * 
     * 
     * ```
     * frame
     * ├── border[.flat]
     * ├── <label widget>
     * ╰── <child>
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * GtkFrame has a main CSS node named “frame” and a subnode named “border”. The
     * “border” node is used to draw the visible border. You can set the appearance
     * of the border using CSS properties like “border-style” on the “border” node.
     * 
     * The border node can be given the style class “.flat”, which is used by themes
     * to disable drawing of the border. To do this from code, call
     * `gtk_frame_set_shadow_type()` with {@link Gtk.ShadowType.NONE} to add the “.flat” class or
     * any other shadow type to remove it.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class Frame extends Bin implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<Frame>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * @default null
         */
        get label(): string | null;
        set label(val: string | null);

        get label_widget(): Widget | null;
        set label_widget(val: Widget | null);

        get labelWidget(): Widget | null;
        set labelWidget(val: Widget | null);

        /**
         * @default 0
         */
        get label_xalign(): number;
        set label_xalign(val: number);

        /**
         * @default 0
         */
        get labelXalign(): number;
        set labelXalign(val: number);

        /**
         * @default 0.5
         */
        get label_yalign(): number;
        set label_yalign(val: number);

        /**
         * @default 0.5
         */
        get labelYalign(): number;
        set labelYalign(val: number);

        /**
         * @default Gtk.ShadowType.ETCHED_IN
         */
        get shadow_type(): ShadowType;
        set shadow_type(val: ShadowType);

        /**
         * @default Gtk.ShadowType.ETCHED_IN
         */
        get shadowType(): ShadowType;
        set shadowType(val: ShadowType);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: Frame.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        bin: Bin;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<Frame.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](label: string | null): Frame;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof Frame.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Frame.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof Frame.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Frame.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof Frame.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<Frame.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * @param allocation 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_compute_child_allocation(allocation: Allocation): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * If the frame’s label widget is a {@link Gtk.Label}, returns the
         * text in the label widget. (The frame will have a {@link Gtk.Label}
         * for the label widget if a non-`null` argument was passed
         * to `gtk_frame_new()`.)
         * @returns the text in the label, or `null` if there               was no label widget or the lable widget was not               a {@link Gtk.Label}. This string is owned by GTK+ and               must not be modified or freed.
         */
        get_label(): string | null;

        /**
         * Retrieves the X and Y alignment of the frame’s label. See
         * `gtk_frame_set_label_align()`.
         */
        get_label_align(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Retrieves the label widget for the frame. See
         * `gtk_frame_set_label_widget()`.
         * @returns the label widget, or `null` if there is none.
         */
        get_label_widget(): Widget | null;

        /**
         * Retrieves the shadow type of the frame. See
         * `gtk_frame_set_shadow_type()`.
         * @returns the current shadow type of the frame.
         */
        get_shadow_type(): ShadowType;

        /**
         * Removes the current {@link Gtk.Frame.label_widget}. If `label` is not `null`, creates a
         * new {@link Gtk.Label} with that text and adds it as the {@link Gtk.Frame.label_widget}.
         * @param label the text to use as the label of the frame
         */
        set_label(label: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the alignment of the frame widget’s label. The
         * default values for a newly created frame are 0.0 and 0.5.
         * @param xalign The position of the label along the top edge   of the widget. A value of 0.0 represents left alignment;   1.0 represents right alignment.
         * @param yalign The y alignment of the label. A value of 0.0 aligns under   the frame; 1.0 aligns above the frame. If the values are exactly   0.0 or 1.0 the gap in the frame won’t be painted because the label   will be completely above or below the frame.
         */
        set_label_align(xalign: number, yalign: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.Frame.label_widget} for the frame. This is the widget that
         * will appear embedded in the top edge of the frame as a title.
         * @param label_widget the new label widget
         */
        set_label_widget(label_widget: Widget | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.Frame.shadow_type} for `frame`, i.e. whether it is drawn without
         * ({@link Gtk.ShadowType.NONE}) or with (other values) a visible border. Values other than
         * {@link Gtk.ShadowType.NONE} are treated identically by GtkFrame. The chosen type is
         * applied by removing or adding the .flat class to the CSS node named border.
         * @param type the new {@link Gtk.ShadowType}
         */
        set_shadow_type(type: ShadowType): void;
    }


    namespace FrameAccessible {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends ContainerAccessible.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-layer": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-mdi-zorder": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-help-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-hypertext-nlinks": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption-object": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-summary": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends ContainerAccessible.ConstructorProps, Atk.Component.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class FrameAccessible extends ContainerAccessible implements Atk.Component {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<FrameAccessible>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: FrameAccessible.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<FrameAccessible.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof FrameAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, FrameAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof FrameAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, FrameAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof FrameAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<FrameAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;
    }


    namespace GLArea {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Widget.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * The ::create-context signal is emitted when the widget is being
             * realized, and allows you to override how the GL context is
             * created. This is useful when you want to reuse an existing GL
             * context, or if you want to try creating different kinds of GL
             * options.
             * 
             * If context creation fails then the signal handler can use
             * `gtk_gl_area_set_error()` to register a more detailed error
             * of how the construction failed.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.16
             * @run-last
             */
            "create-context": () => Gdk.GLContext;
            /**
             * The ::render signal is emitted every time the contents
             * of the {@link Gtk.GLArea} should be redrawn.
             * 
             * The `context` is bound to the `area` prior to emitting this function,
             * and the buffers are painted to the window once the emission terminates.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.16
             * @run-last
             */
            render: (arg0: Gdk.GLContext) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * The ::resize signal is emitted once when the widget is realized, and
             * then each time the widget is changed while realized. This is useful
             * in order to keep GL state up to date with the widget size, like for
             * instance camera properties which may depend on the width/height ratio.
             * 
             * The GL context for the area is guaranteed to be current when this signal
             * is emitted.
             * 
             * The default handler sets up the GL viewport.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.16
             * @run-last
             */
            resize: (arg0: number, arg1: number) => void;
            "notify::auto-render": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::context": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-alpha": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-depth-buffer": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-stencil-buffer": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-es": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Widget.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {
            auto_render: boolean;
            autoRender: boolean;
            context: Gdk.GLContext;
            has_alpha: boolean;
            hasAlpha: boolean;
            has_depth_buffer: boolean;
            hasDepthBuffer: boolean;
            has_stencil_buffer: boolean;
            hasStencilBuffer: boolean;
            use_es: boolean;
            useEs: boolean;
        }
    }

    /**
     * {@link Gtk.GLArea} is a widget that allows drawing with OpenGL.
     * 
     * {@link Gtk.GLArea} sets up its own {@link Gdk.GLContext} for the window it creates, and
     * creates a custom GL framebuffer that the widget will do GL rendering onto.
     * It also ensures that this framebuffer is the default GL rendering target
     * when rendering.
     * 
     * In order to draw, you have to connect to the {@link Gtk.GLArea.SignalSignatures.render | Gtk.GLArea::render} signal,
     * or subclass {@link Gtk.GLArea} and override the `GtkGLAreaClass`.render() virtual
     * function.
     * 
     * The {@link Gtk.GLArea} widget ensures that the {@link Gdk.GLContext} is associated with
     * the widget's drawing area, and it is kept updated when the size and
     * position of the drawing area changes.
     * 
     * ## Drawing with GtkGLArea ##
     * 
     * The simplest way to draw using OpenGL commands in a {@link Gtk.GLArea} is to
     * create a widget instance and connect to the {@link Gtk.GLArea.SignalSignatures.render | Gtk.GLArea::render} signal:
     * 
     * 
     * ```c
     *   // create a GtkGLArea instance
     *   GtkWidget *gl_area = gtk_gl_area_new ();
     * 
     *   // connect to the "render" signal
     *   g_signal_connect (gl_area, "render", G_CALLBACK (render), NULL);
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * The `render()` function will be called when the {@link Gtk.GLArea} is ready
     * for you to draw its content:
     * 
     * 
     * ```c
     *   static gboolean
     *   render (GtkGLArea *area, GdkGLContext *context)
     *   {
     *     // inside this function it's safe to use GL; the given
     *     // {@link Gdk.GLContext} has been made current to the drawable
     *     // surface used by the {@link Gtk.GLArea} and the viewport has
     *     // already been set to be the size of the allocation
     * 
     *     // we can start by clearing the buffer
     *     glClearColor (0, 0, 0, 0);
     *     glClear (GL_COLOR_BUFFER_BIT);
     * 
     *     // draw your object
     *     draw_an_object ();
     * 
     *     // we completed our drawing; the draw commands will be
     *     // flushed at the end of the signal emission chain, and
     *     // the buffers will be drawn on the window
     *     return TRUE;
     *   }
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * If you need to initialize OpenGL state, e.g. buffer objects or
     * shaders, you should use the {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.realize | Gtk.Widget::realize} signal; you
     * can use the {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.unrealize | Gtk.Widget::unrealize} signal to clean up. Since the
     * {@link Gdk.GLContext} creation and initialization may fail, you will
     * need to check for errors, using `gtk_gl_area_get_error()`. An example
     * of how to safely initialize the GL state is:
     * 
     * 
     * ```c
     *   static void
     *   on_realize (GtkGLarea *area)
     *   {
     *     // We need to make the context current if we want to
     *     // call GL API
     *     gtk_gl_area_make_current (area);
     * 
     *     // If there were errors during the initialization or
     *     // when trying to make the context current, this
     *     // function will return a {@link GLib.Error} for you to catch
     *     if (gtk_gl_area_get_error (area) != NULL)
     *       return;
     * 
     *     // You can also use `gtk_gl_area_set_error()` in order
     *     // to show eventual initialization errors on the
     *     // GtkGLArea widget itself
     *     GError *internal_error = NULL;
     *     init_buffer_objects (&error);
     *     if (error != NULL)
     *       {
     *         gtk_gl_area_set_error (area, error);
     *         g_error_free (error);
     *         return;
     *       }
     * 
     *     init_shaders (&error);
     *     if (error != NULL)
     *       {
     *         gtk_gl_area_set_error (area, error);
     *         g_error_free (error);
     *         return;
     *       }
     *   }
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * If you need to change the options for creating the {@link Gdk.GLContext}
     * you should use the {@link Gtk.GLArea.SignalSignatures.create_context | Gtk.GLArea::create-context} signal.
     * @gir-type Class
     * @since 3.16
     */
    class GLArea extends Widget implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<GLArea>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * If set to `true` the {@link Gtk.GLArea.SignalSignatures.render | Gtk.GLArea::render} signal will be emitted every time
         * the widget draws. This is the default and is useful if drawing the widget
         * is faster.
         * 
         * If set to `false` the data from previous rendering is kept around and will
         * be used for drawing the widget the next time, unless the window is resized.
         * In order to force a rendering `gtk_gl_area_queue_render()` must be called.
         * This mode is useful when the scene changes seldomly, but takes a long time
         * to redraw.
         * @since 3.16
         * @default true
         */
        get auto_render(): boolean;
        set auto_render(val: boolean);

        /**
         * If set to `true` the {@link Gtk.GLArea.SignalSignatures.render | Gtk.GLArea::render} signal will be emitted every time
         * the widget draws. This is the default and is useful if drawing the widget
         * is faster.
         * 
         * If set to `false` the data from previous rendering is kept around and will
         * be used for drawing the widget the next time, unless the window is resized.
         * In order to force a rendering `gtk_gl_area_queue_render()` must be called.
         * This mode is useful when the scene changes seldomly, but takes a long time
         * to redraw.
         * @since 3.16
         * @default true
         */
        get autoRender(): boolean;
        set autoRender(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The {@link Gdk.GLContext} used by the {@link Gtk.GLArea} widget.
         * 
         * The {@link Gtk.GLArea} widget is responsible for creating the {@link Gdk.GLContext}
         * instance. If you need to render with other kinds of buffers (stencil,
         * depth, etc), use render buffers.
         * @since 3.16
         * @read-only
         */
        get context(): Gdk.GLContext;

        /**
         * If set to `true` the buffer allocated by the widget will have an alpha channel
         * component, and when rendering to the window the result will be composited over
         * whatever is below the widget.
         * 
         * If set to `false` there will be no alpha channel, and the buffer will fully
         * replace anything below the widget.
         * @since 3.16
         * @default false
         */
        get has_alpha(): boolean;
        set has_alpha(val: boolean);

        /**
         * If set to `true` the buffer allocated by the widget will have an alpha channel
         * component, and when rendering to the window the result will be composited over
         * whatever is below the widget.
         * 
         * If set to `false` there will be no alpha channel, and the buffer will fully
         * replace anything below the widget.
         * @since 3.16
         * @default false
         */
        get hasAlpha(): boolean;
        set hasAlpha(val: boolean);

        /**
         * If set to `true` the widget will allocate and enable a depth buffer for the
         * target framebuffer.
         * @since 3.16
         * @default false
         */
        get has_depth_buffer(): boolean;
        set has_depth_buffer(val: boolean);

        /**
         * If set to `true` the widget will allocate and enable a depth buffer for the
         * target framebuffer.
         * @since 3.16
         * @default false
         */
        get hasDepthBuffer(): boolean;
        set hasDepthBuffer(val: boolean);

        /**
         * If set to `true` the widget will allocate and enable a stencil buffer for the
         * target framebuffer.
         * @since 3.16
         * @default false
         */
        get has_stencil_buffer(): boolean;
        set has_stencil_buffer(val: boolean);

        /**
         * If set to `true` the widget will allocate and enable a stencil buffer for the
         * target framebuffer.
         * @since 3.16
         * @default false
         */
        get hasStencilBuffer(): boolean;
        set hasStencilBuffer(val: boolean);

        /**
         * If set to `true` the widget will try to create a {@link Gdk.GLContext} using
         * OpenGL ES instead of OpenGL.
         * 
         * See also: `gdk_gl_context_set_use_es()`
         * @since 3.22
         * @default false
         */
        get use_es(): boolean;
        set use_es(val: boolean);

        /**
         * If set to `true` the widget will try to create a {@link Gdk.GLContext} using
         * OpenGL ES instead of OpenGL.
         * 
         * See also: `gdk_gl_context_set_use_es()`
         * @since 3.22
         * @default false
         */
        get useEs(): boolean;
        set useEs(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: GLArea.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<GLArea.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): GLArea;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof GLArea.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, GLArea.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof GLArea.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, GLArea.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof GLArea.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<GLArea.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * class closure for the {@link Gtk.GLArea.SignalSignatures.render | Gtk.GLArea::render} signal
         * @param context 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_render(context: Gdk.GLContext): boolean;

        /**
         * class closeure for the {@link Gtk.GLArea.SignalSignatures.resize | Gtk.GLArea::resize} signal
         * @param width 
         * @param height 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_resize(width: number, height: number): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Ensures that the `area` framebuffer object is made the current draw
         * and read target, and that all the required buffers for the `area`
         * are created and bound to the frambuffer.
         * 
         * This function is automatically called before emitting the
         * {@link Gtk.GLArea.SignalSignatures.render | Gtk.GLArea::render} signal, and doesn't normally need to be called
         * by application code.
         */
        attach_buffers(): void;

        /**
         * Returns whether the area is in auto render mode or not.
         * @returns `true` if the `area` is auto rendering, `false` otherwise
         */
        get_auto_render(): boolean;

        /**
         * Retrieves the {@link Gdk.GLContext} used by `area`.
         * @returns the {@link Gdk.GLContext}
         */
        get_context(): Gdk.GLContext;

        /**
         * Gets the current error set on the `area`.
         * @returns the {@link GLib.Error} or `null`
         */
        get_error(): GLib.Error | null;

        /**
         * Returns whether the area has an alpha component.
         * @returns `true` if the `area` has an alpha component, `false` otherwise
         */
        get_has_alpha(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns whether the area has a depth buffer.
         * @returns `true` if the `area` has a depth buffer, `false` otherwise
         */
        get_has_depth_buffer(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns whether the area has a stencil buffer.
         * @returns `true` if the `area` has a stencil buffer, `false` otherwise
         */
        get_has_stencil_buffer(): boolean;

        /**
         * Retrieves the required version of OpenGL set
         * using `gtk_gl_area_set_required_version()`.
         */
        get_required_version(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Retrieves the value set by `gtk_gl_area_set_use_es()`.
         * @returns `true` if the {@link Gtk.GLArea} should create an OpenGL ES context   and `false` otherwise
         */
        get_use_es(): boolean;

        /**
         * Ensures that the {@link Gdk.GLContext} used by `area` is associated with
         * the {@link Gtk.GLArea}.
         * 
         * This function is automatically called before emitting the
         * {@link Gtk.GLArea.SignalSignatures.render | Gtk.GLArea::render} signal, and doesn't normally need to be called
         * by application code.
         */
        make_current(): void;

        /**
         * Marks the currently rendered data (if any) as invalid, and queues
         * a redraw of the widget, ensuring that the {@link Gtk.GLArea.SignalSignatures.render | Gtk.GLArea::render} signal
         * is emitted during the draw.
         * 
         * This is only needed when the `gtk_gl_area_set_auto_render()` has
         * been called with a `false` value. The default behaviour is to
         * emit {@link Gtk.GLArea.SignalSignatures.render | Gtk.GLArea::render} on each draw.
         */
        queue_render(): void;

        /**
         * If `auto_render` is `true` the {@link Gtk.GLArea.SignalSignatures.render | Gtk.GLArea::render} signal will be
         * emitted every time the widget draws. This is the default and is
         * useful if drawing the widget is faster.
         * 
         * If `auto_render` is `false` the data from previous rendering is kept
         * around and will be used for drawing the widget the next time,
         * unless the window is resized. In order to force a rendering
         * `gtk_gl_area_queue_render()` must be called. This mode is useful when
         * the scene changes seldomly, but takes a long time to redraw.
         * @param auto_render a boolean
         */
        set_auto_render(auto_render: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets an error on the area which will be shown instead of the
         * GL rendering. This is useful in the {@link Gtk.GLArea.SignalSignatures.create_context | Gtk.GLArea::create-context}
         * signal if GL context creation fails.
         * @param error a new {@link GLib.Error}, or `null` to unset the error
         */
        set_error(error: GLib.Error | null): void;

        /**
         * If `has_alpha` is `true` the buffer allocated by the widget will have
         * an alpha channel component, and when rendering to the window the
         * result will be composited over whatever is below the widget.
         * 
         * If `has_alpha` is `false` there will be no alpha channel, and the
         * buffer will fully replace anything below the widget.
         * @param has_alpha `true` to add an alpha component
         */
        set_has_alpha(has_alpha: boolean): void;

        /**
         * If `has_depth_buffer` is `true` the widget will allocate and
         * enable a depth buffer for the target framebuffer. Otherwise
         * there will be none.
         * @param has_depth_buffer `true` to add a depth buffer
         */
        set_has_depth_buffer(has_depth_buffer: boolean): void;

        /**
         * If `has_stencil_buffer` is `true` the widget will allocate and
         * enable a stencil buffer for the target framebuffer. Otherwise
         * there will be none.
         * @param has_stencil_buffer `true` to add a stencil buffer
         */
        set_has_stencil_buffer(has_stencil_buffer: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the required version of OpenGL to be used when creating the context
         * for the widget.
         * 
         * This function must be called before the area has been realized.
         * @param major the major version
         * @param minor the minor version
         */
        set_required_version(major: number, minor: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the `area` should create an OpenGL or an OpenGL ES context.
         * 
         * You should check the capabilities of the {@link Gdk.GLContext} before drawing
         * with either API.
         * @param use_es whether to use OpenGL or OpenGL ES
         */
        set_use_es(use_es: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Adds a child to `buildable`. `type` is an optional string
         * describing how the child should be added.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child to add
         * @param type kind of child or `null`
         */
        add_child(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object, type: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Constructs a child of `buildable` with the name `name`.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} calls this function if a “constructor” has been
         * specified in the UI definition.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param name name of child to construct
         * @returns the constructed child
         */
        construct_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, name: string): T;

        /**
         * This is similar to `gtk_buildable_parser_finished()` but is
         * called once for each custom tag handled by the `buildable`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname the name of the tag
         * @param data user data created in custom_tag_start
         */
        custom_finished(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
         * the buildable.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @param data user data that will be passed in to parser functions
         */
        custom_tag_end(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called for each unknown element under `<child>`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @returns `true` if a object has a custom implementation, `false`          if it doesn't.
         */
        custom_tag_start(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string): [boolean, GLib.MarkupParser, null];

        /**
         * Get the internal child called `childname` of the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param childname name of child
         * @returns the internal child of the buildable object
         */
        get_internal_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, childname: string): T;

        /**
         * Gets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} sets the name based on the
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI]
         * used to construct the `buildable`.
         * @returns the name set with `gtk_buildable_set_name()`
         */
        get_name(): string;

        /**
         * Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI].
         * Note that this will be called once for each time
         * `gtk_builder_add_from_file()` or `gtk_builder_add_from_string()`
         * is called on a builder.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         */
        parser_finished(builder: Builder): void;

        /**
         * Sets the property name `name` to `value` on the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param name name of property
         * @param value value of property
         */
        set_buildable_property(builder: Builder, name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;

        /**
         * Sets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * @param name name to set
         */
        set_name(name: string): void;

        /**
         * Adds a child to `buildable`. `type` is an optional string
         * describing how the child should be added.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child to add
         * @param type kind of child or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add_child(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object, type: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Constructs a child of `buildable` with the name `name`.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} calls this function if a “constructor” has been
         * specified in the UI definition.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param name name of child to construct
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_construct_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, name: string): T;

        /**
         * This is similar to `gtk_buildable_parser_finished()` but is
         * called once for each custom tag handled by the `buildable`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname the name of the tag
         * @param data user data created in custom_tag_start
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_finished(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
         * the buildable.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @param data user data that will be passed in to parser functions
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_tag_end(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called for each unknown element under `<child>`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_tag_start(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string): [boolean, GLib.MarkupParser, never];

        /**
         * Get the internal child called `childname` of the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param childname name of child
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_internal_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, childname: string): T;

        /**
         * Gets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} sets the name based on the
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI]
         * used to construct the `buildable`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_name(): string;

        /**
         * Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI].
         * Note that this will be called once for each time
         * `gtk_builder_add_from_file()` or `gtk_builder_add_from_string()`
         * is called on a builder.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_parser_finished(builder: Builder): void;

        /**
         * Sets the property name `name` to `value` on the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param name name of property
         * @param value value of property
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_buildable_property(builder: Builder, name: string, value: unknown): void;

        /**
         * Sets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * @param name name to set
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_name(name: string): void;
    }


    namespace Gesture {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends EventController.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * This signal is emitted when the gesture is recognized. This means the
             * number of touch sequences matches {@link Gtk.Gesture.n_points}, and the {@link Gtk.Gesture.SignalSignatures.check | Gtk.Gesture::check}
             * handler(s) returned `TRUE`.
             * 
             * Note: These conditions may also happen when an extra touch (eg. a third touch
             * on a 2-touches gesture) is lifted, in that situation `sequence` won't pertain
             * to the current set of active touches, so don't rely on this being true.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.14
             * @run-last
             */
            begin: (arg0: Gdk.EventSequence | null) => void;
            /**
             * This signal is emitted whenever a sequence is cancelled. This usually
             * happens on active touches when `gtk_event_controller_reset()` is called
             * on `gesture` (manually, due to grabs...), or the individual `sequence`
             * was claimed by parent widgets' controllers (see `gtk_gesture_set_sequence_state()`).
             * 
             * `gesture` must forget everything about `sequence` as a reaction to this signal.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.14
             * @run-last
             */
            cancel: (arg0: Gdk.EventSequence | null) => void;
            /**
             * This signal is emitted when `gesture` either stopped recognizing the event
             * sequences as something to be handled (the {@link Gtk.Gesture.SignalSignatures.check | Gtk.Gesture::check} handler returned
             * `false`), or the number of touch sequences became higher or lower than
             * {@link Gtk.Gesture.n_points}.
             * 
             * Note: `sequence` might not pertain to the group of sequences that were
             * previously triggering recognition on `gesture` (ie. a just pressed touch
             * sequence that exceeds {@link Gtk.Gesture.n_points}). This situation may be detected
             * by checking through `gtk_gesture_handles_sequence()`.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.14
             * @run-last
             */
            end: (arg0: Gdk.EventSequence | null) => void;
            /**
             * This signal is emitted whenever a sequence state changes. See
             * `gtk_gesture_set_sequence_state()` to know more about the expectable
             * sequence lifetimes.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.14
             * @run-last
             */
            "sequence-state-changed": (arg0: Gdk.EventSequence | null, arg1: EventSequenceState) => void;
            /**
             * This signal is emitted whenever an event is handled while the gesture is
             * recognized. `sequence` is guaranteed to pertain to the set of active touches.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.14
             * @run-last
             */
            update: (arg0: Gdk.EventSequence | null) => void;
            "notify::n-points": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::propagation-phase": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends EventController.ConstructorProps {
            n_points: number;
            nPoints: number;
            window: Gdk.Window | null;
        }
    }

    /**
     * {@link Gtk.Gesture} is the base object for gesture recognition, although this
     * object is quite generalized to serve as a base for multi-touch gestures,
     * it is suitable to implement single-touch and pointer-based gestures (using
     * the special `null` {@link Gdk.EventSequence} value for these).
     * 
     * The number of touches that a {@link Gtk.Gesture} need to be recognized is controlled
     * by the {@link Gtk.Gesture.n_points} property, if a gesture is keeping track of less
     * or more than that number of sequences, it won't check wether the gesture
     * is recognized.
     * 
     * As soon as the gesture has the expected number of touches, the gesture will
     * run the {@link Gtk.Gesture.SignalSignatures.check | Gtk.Gesture::check} signal regularly on input events until the gesture
     * is recognized, the criteria to consider a gesture as "recognized" is left to
     * {@link Gtk.Gesture} subclasses.
     * 
     * A recognized gesture will then emit the following signals:
     * - {@link Gtk.Gesture.SignalSignatures.begin | Gtk.Gesture::begin} when the gesture is recognized.
     * - A number of {@link Gtk.Gesture.SignalSignatures.update | Gtk.Gesture::update}, whenever an input event is processed.
     * - {@link Gtk.Gesture.SignalSignatures.end | Gtk.Gesture::end} when the gesture is no longer recognized.
     * 
     * ## Event propagation
     * 
     * In order to receive events, a gesture needs to either set a propagation phase
     * through `gtk_event_controller_set_propagation_phase()`, or feed those manually
     * through `gtk_event_controller_handle_event()`.
     * 
     * In the capture phase, events are propagated from the toplevel down to the
     * target widget, and gestures that are attached to containers above the widget
     * get a chance to interact with the event before it reaches the target.
     * 
     * After the capture phase, GTK+ emits the traditional {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.button_press_event | Gtk.Widget::button-press-event},
     * {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.button_release_event | Gtk.Widget::button-release-event}, {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.touch_event | Gtk.Widget::touch-event}, etc signals. Gestures
     * with the {@link Gtk.PropagationPhase.TARGET} phase are fed events from the default {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.event | Gtk.Widget::event}
     * handlers.
     * 
     * In the bubble phase, events are propagated up from the target widget to the
     * toplevel, and gestures that are attached to containers above the widget get
     * a chance to interact with events that have not been handled yet.
     * 
     * ## States of a sequence # {#touch-sequence-states}
     * 
     * Whenever input interaction happens, a single event may trigger a cascade of
     * `GtkGestures`, both across the parents of the widget receiving the event and
     * in parallel within an individual widget. It is a responsibility of the
     * widgets using those gestures to set the state of touch sequences accordingly
     * in order to enable cooperation of gestures around the `GdkEventSequences`
     * triggering those.
     * 
     * Within a widget, gestures can be grouped through `gtk_gesture_group()`,
     * grouped gestures synchronize the state of sequences, so calling
     * `gtk_gesture_set_sequence_state()` on one will effectively propagate
     * the state throughout the group.
     * 
     * By default, all sequences start out in the #GTK_EVENT_SEQUENCE_NONE state,
     * sequences in this state trigger the gesture event handler, but event
     * propagation will continue unstopped by gestures.
     * 
     * If a sequence enters into the #GTK_EVENT_SEQUENCE_DENIED state, the gesture
     * group will effectively ignore the sequence, letting events go unstopped
     * through the gesture, but the "slot" will still remain occupied while
     * the touch is active.
     * 
     * If a sequence enters in the #GTK_EVENT_SEQUENCE_CLAIMED state, the gesture
     * group will grab all interaction on the sequence, by:
     * - Setting the same sequence to #GTK_EVENT_SEQUENCE_DENIED on every other gesture
     *   group within the widget, and every gesture on parent widgets in the propagation
     *   chain.
     * - calling {@link Gtk.Gesture.SignalSignatures.cancel | Gtk.Gesture::cancel} on every gesture in widgets underneath in the
     *   propagation chain.
     * - Stopping event propagation after the gesture group handles the event.
     * 
     * Note: if a sequence is set early to #GTK_EVENT_SEQUENCE_CLAIMED on
     * #GDK_TOUCH_BEGIN/#GDK_BUTTON_PRESS (so those events are captured before
     * reaching the event widget, this implies #GTK_PHASE_CAPTURE), one similar
     * event will emulated if the sequence changes to #GTK_EVENT_SEQUENCE_DENIED.
     * This way event coherence is preserved before event propagation is unstopped
     * again.
     * 
     * Sequence states can't be changed freely, see `gtk_gesture_set_sequence_state()`
     * to know about the possible lifetimes of a {@link Gdk.EventSequence}.
     * 
     * ## Touchpad gestures
     * 
     * On the platforms that support it, {@link Gtk.Gesture} will handle transparently
     * touchpad gesture events. The only precautions users of {@link Gtk.Gesture} should do
     * to enable this support are:
     * - Enabling {@link Gdk.EventMask.TOUCHPAD_GESTURE_MASK} on their `GdkWindows`
     * - If the gesture has {@link Gtk.PropagationPhase.NONE}, ensuring events of type
     *   {@link Gdk.EventType.TOUCHPAD_SWIPE} and {@link Gdk.EventType.TOUCHPAD_PINCH} are handled by the {@link Gtk.Gesture}
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    abstract class Gesture extends EventController {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<Gesture>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * The number of touch points that trigger recognition on this gesture,
         * @since 3.14
         * @construct-only
         * @default 1
         */
        get n_points(): number;

        /**
         * The number of touch points that trigger recognition on this gesture,
         * @since 3.14
         * @construct-only
         * @default 1
         */
        get nPoints(): number;

        /**
         * If non-`null`, the gesture will only listen for events that happen on
         * this {@link Gdk.Window}, or a child of it.
         * @since 3.14
         */
        get window(): Gdk.Window | null;
        set window(val: Gdk.Window | null);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: Gesture.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<Gesture.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof Gesture.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Gesture.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof Gesture.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Gesture.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof Gesture.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<Gesture.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * If there are touch sequences being currently handled by `gesture`,
         * this function returns `true` and fills in `rect` with the bounding
         * box containing all active touches. Otherwise, `false` will be
         * returned.
         * 
         * Note: This function will yield unexpected results on touchpad
         * gestures. Since there is no correlation between physical and
         * pixel distances, these will look as if constrained in an
         * infinitely small area, `rect` width and height will thus be 0
         * regardless of the number of touchpoints.
         * @returns `true` if there are active touches, `false` otherwise
         */
        get_bounding_box(): [boolean, Gdk.Rectangle];

        /**
         * If there are touch sequences being currently handled by `gesture`,
         * this function returns `true` and fills in `x` and `y` with the center
         * of the bounding box containing all active touches. Otherwise, `false`
         * will be returned.
         * @returns `false` if no active touches are present, `true` otherwise
         */
        get_bounding_box_center(): [boolean, number, number];

        /**
         * Returns the master {@link Gdk.Device} that is currently operating
         * on `gesture`, or `null` if the gesture is not being interacted.
         * @returns a {@link Gdk.Device}, or `null`
         */
        get_device(): Gdk.Device | null;

        /**
         * Returns all gestures in the group of `gesture`
         * @returns The list   of `GtkGestures`, free with `g_list_free()`
         */
        get_group(): Gesture[];

        /**
         * Returns the last event that was processed for `sequence`.
         * 
         * Note that the returned pointer is only valid as long as the `sequence`
         * is still interpreted by the `gesture`. If in doubt, you should make
         * a copy of the event.
         * @param sequence a {@link Gdk.EventSequence}
         * @returns The last event from `sequence`
         */
        get_last_event(sequence: Gdk.EventSequence | null): Gdk.Event | null;

        /**
         * Returns the {@link Gdk.EventSequence} that was last updated on `gesture`.
         * @returns The last updated sequence
         */
        get_last_updated_sequence(): Gdk.EventSequence | null;

        /**
         * If `sequence` is currently being interpreted by `gesture`, this
         * function returns `true` and fills in `x` and `y` with the last coordinates
         * stored for that event sequence. The coordinates are always relative to the
         * widget allocation.
         * @param sequence a {@link Gdk.EventSequence}, or `null` for pointer events
         * @returns `true` if `sequence` is currently interpreted
         */
        get_point(sequence: Gdk.EventSequence | null): [boolean, number, number];

        /**
         * Returns the `sequence` state, as seen by `gesture`.
         * @param sequence a {@link Gdk.EventSequence}
         * @returns The sequence state in `gesture`
         */
        get_sequence_state(sequence: Gdk.EventSequence): EventSequenceState;

        /**
         * Returns the list of `GdkEventSequences` currently being interpreted
         * by `gesture`.
         * @returns A list          of `GdkEventSequences`, the list elements are owned by GTK+          and must not be freed or modified, the list itself must be deleted          through `g_list_free()`
         */
        get_sequences(): Gdk.EventSequence[];

        /**
         * Returns the user-defined window that receives the events
         * handled by `gesture`. See `gtk_gesture_set_window()` for more
         * information.
         * @returns the user defined window, or `null` if none
         */
        get_window(): Gdk.Window | null;

        /**
         * Adds `gesture` to the same group than `group_gesture`. Gestures
         * are by default isolated in their own groups.
         * 
         * When gestures are grouped, the state of `GdkEventSequences`
         * is kept in sync for all of those, so calling `gtk_gesture_set_sequence_state()`,
         * on one will transfer the same value to the others.
         * 
         * Groups also perform an "implicit grabbing" of sequences, if a
         * {@link Gdk.EventSequence} state is set to #GTK_EVENT_SEQUENCE_CLAIMED on one group,
         * every other gesture group attached to the same {@link Gtk.Widget} will switch the
         * state for that sequence to #GTK_EVENT_SEQUENCE_DENIED.
         * @param gesture a {@link Gtk.Gesture}
         */
        group(gesture: Gesture): void;

        /**
         * Returns `true` if `gesture` is currently handling events corresponding to
         * `sequence`.
         * @param sequence a {@link Gdk.EventSequence} or `null`
         * @returns `true` if `gesture` is handling `sequence`, `false` otherwise
         */
        handles_sequence(sequence: Gdk.EventSequence | null): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns `true` if the gesture is currently active.
         * A gesture is active meanwhile there are touch sequences
         * interacting with it.
         * @returns `true` if gesture is active
         */
        is_active(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns `true` if both gestures pertain to the same group.
         * @param other another {@link Gtk.Gesture}
         * @returns whether the gestures are grouped
         */
        is_grouped_with(other: Gesture): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns `true` if the gesture is currently recognized.
         * A gesture is recognized if there are as many interacting
         * touch sequences as required by `gesture`, and {@link Gtk.Gesture.SignalSignatures.check | Gtk.Gesture::check}
         * returned `true` for the sequences being currently interpreted.
         * @returns `true` if gesture is recognized
         */
        is_recognized(): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the state of `sequence` in `gesture`. Sequences start
         * in state #GTK_EVENT_SEQUENCE_NONE, and whenever they change
         * state, they can never go back to that state. Likewise,
         * sequences in state #GTK_EVENT_SEQUENCE_DENIED cannot turn
         * back to a not denied state. With these rules, the lifetime
         * of an event sequence is constrained to the next four:
         * 
         * * None
         * * None → Denied
         * * None → Claimed
         * * None → Claimed → Denied
         * 
         * Note: Due to event handling ordering, it may be unsafe to
         * set the state on another gesture within a {@link Gtk.Gesture.SignalSignatures.begin | Gtk.Gesture::begin}
         * signal handler, as the callback might be executed before
         * the other gesture knows about the sequence. A safe way to
         * perform this could be:
         * 
         * 
         * ```
         * static void
         * first_gesture_begin_cb (GtkGesture       *first_gesture,
         *                         GdkEventSequence *sequence,
         *                         gpointer          user_data)
         * {
         *   gtk_gesture_set_sequence_state (first_gesture, sequence, GTK_EVENT_SEQUENCE_CLAIMED);
         *   gtk_gesture_set_sequence_state (second_gesture, sequence, GTK_EVENT_SEQUENCE_DENIED);
         * }
         * 
         * static void
         * second_gesture_begin_cb (GtkGesture       *second_gesture,
         *                          GdkEventSequence *sequence,
         *                          gpointer          user_data)
         * {
         *   if (gtk_gesture_get_sequence_state (first_gesture, sequence) == GTK_EVENT_SEQUENCE_CLAIMED)
         *     gtk_gesture_set_sequence_state (second_gesture, sequence, GTK_EVENT_SEQUENCE_DENIED);
         * }
         * ```
         * 
         * 
         * If both gestures are in the same group, just set the state on
         * the gesture emitting the event, the sequence will be already
         * be initialized to the group's global state when the second
         * gesture processes the event.
         * @param sequence a {@link Gdk.EventSequence}
         * @param state the sequence state
         * @returns `true` if `sequence` is handled by `gesture`,          and the state is changed successfully
         */
        set_sequence_state(sequence: Gdk.EventSequence, state: EventSequenceState): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the state of all sequences that `gesture` is currently
         * interacting with. See `gtk_gesture_set_sequence_state()`
         * for more details on sequence states.
         * @param state the sequence state
         * @returns `true` if the state of at least one sequence     was changed successfully
         */
        set_state(state: EventSequenceState): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets a specific window to receive events about, so `gesture`
         * will effectively handle only events targeting `window`, or
         * a child of it. `window` must pertain to `gtk_event_controller_get_widget()`.
         * @param window a {@link Gdk.Window}, or `null`
         */
        set_window(window: Gdk.Window | null): void;

        /**
         * Separates `gesture` into an isolated group.
         */
        ungroup(): void;
    }


    namespace GestureDrag {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends GestureSingle.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * This signal is emitted whenever dragging starts.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.14
             * @run-last
             */
            "drag-begin": (arg0: number, arg1: number) => void;
            /**
             * This signal is emitted whenever the dragging is finished.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.14
             * @run-last
             */
            "drag-end": (arg0: number, arg1: number) => void;
            /**
             * This signal is emitted whenever the dragging point moves.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.14
             * @run-last
             */
            "drag-update": (arg0: number, arg1: number) => void;
            "notify::button": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::exclusive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::touch-only": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::n-points": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::propagation-phase": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GestureSingle.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * {@link Gtk.GestureDrag} is a {@link Gtk.Gesture} implementation that recognizes drag
     * operations. The drag operation itself can be tracked throught the
     * {@link Gtk.GestureDrag.SignalSignatures.drag_begin | Gtk.GestureDrag::drag-begin}, {@link Gtk.GestureDrag.SignalSignatures.drag_update | Gtk.GestureDrag::drag-update} and
     * {@link Gtk.GestureDrag.SignalSignatures.drag_end | Gtk.GestureDrag::drag-end} signals, or the relevant coordinates be
     * extracted through `gtk_gesture_drag_get_offset()` and
     * `gtk_gesture_drag_get_start_point()`.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class GestureDrag extends GestureSingle {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<GestureDrag>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: GestureDrag.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<GestureDrag.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](widget: Widget): GestureDrag;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof GestureDrag.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, GestureDrag.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof GestureDrag.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, GestureDrag.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof GestureDrag.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<GestureDrag.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * If the `gesture` is active, this function returns `true` and
         * fills in `x` and `y` with the coordinates of the current point,
         * as an offset to the starting drag point.
         * @returns `true` if the gesture is active
         */
        get_offset(): [boolean, number, number];

        /**
         * If the `gesture` is active, this function returns `true`
         * and fills in `x` and `y` with the drag start coordinates,
         * in window-relative coordinates.
         * @returns `true` if the gesture is active
         */
        get_start_point(): [boolean, number, number];
    }


    namespace GestureLongPress {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends GestureSingle.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * This signal is emitted whenever a press moved too far, or was released
             * before {@link Gtk.GestureLongPress.SignalSignatures.pressed | Gtk.GestureLongPress::pressed} happened.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.14
             * @run-last
             */
            cancelled: () => void;
            /**
             * This signal is emitted whenever a press goes unmoved/unreleased longer than
             * what the GTK+ defaults tell.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.14
             * @run-last
             */
            pressed: (arg0: number, arg1: number) => void;
            "notify::delay-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::button": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::exclusive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::touch-only": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::n-points": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::propagation-phase": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GestureSingle.ConstructorProps {
            delay_factor: number;
            delayFactor: number;
        }
    }

    /**
     * {@link Gtk.GestureLongPress} is a {@link Gtk.Gesture} implementation able to recognize
     * long presses, triggering the {@link Gtk.GestureLongPress.SignalSignatures.pressed | Gtk.GestureLongPress::pressed} after the
     * timeout is exceeded.
     * 
     * If the touchpoint is lifted before the timeout passes, or if it drifts
     * too far of the initial press point, the {@link Gtk.GestureLongPress.SignalSignatures.cancelled | Gtk.GestureLongPress::cancelled}
     * signal will be emitted.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class GestureLongPress extends GestureSingle {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<GestureLongPress>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * @default 1
         */
        get delay_factor(): number;
        set delay_factor(val: number);

        /**
         * @default 1
         */
        get delayFactor(): number;
        set delayFactor(val: number);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: GestureLongPress.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<GestureLongPress.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](widget: Widget): GestureLongPress;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof GestureLongPress.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, GestureLongPress.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof GestureLongPress.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, GestureLongPress.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof GestureLongPress.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<GestureLongPress.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;
    }


    namespace GestureMultiPress {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends GestureSingle.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * This signal is emitted whenever a button or touch press happens.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.14
             * @run-last
             */
            pressed: (arg0: number, arg1: number, arg2: number) => void;
            /**
             * This signal is emitted when a button or touch is released. `n_press`
             * will report the number of press that is paired to this event, note
             * that {@link Gtk.GestureMultiPress.SignalSignatures.stopped | Gtk.GestureMultiPress::stopped} may have been emitted between the
             * press and its release, `n_press` will only start over at the next press.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.14
             * @run-last
             */
            released: (arg0: number, arg1: number, arg2: number) => void;
            /**
             * This signal is emitted whenever any time/distance threshold has
             * been exceeded.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.14
             * @run-last
             */
            stopped: () => void;
            "notify::button": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::exclusive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::touch-only": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::n-points": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::propagation-phase": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GestureSingle.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * {@link Gtk.GestureMultiPress} is a {@link Gtk.Gesture} implementation able to recognize
     * multiple clicks on a nearby zone, which can be listened for through the
     * {@link Gtk.GestureMultiPress.SignalSignatures.pressed | Gtk.GestureMultiPress::pressed} signal. Whenever time or distance between
     * clicks exceed the GTK+ defaults, {@link Gtk.GestureMultiPress.SignalSignatures.stopped | Gtk.GestureMultiPress::stopped} is emitted,
     * and the click counter is reset.
     * 
     * Callers may also restrict the area that is considered valid for a >1
     * touch/button press through `gtk_gesture_multi_press_set_area()`, so any
     * click happening outside that area is considered to be a first click of
     * its own.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class GestureMultiPress extends GestureSingle {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<GestureMultiPress>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: GestureMultiPress.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<GestureMultiPress.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](widget: Widget): GestureMultiPress;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof GestureMultiPress.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, GestureMultiPress.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof GestureMultiPress.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, GestureMultiPress.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof GestureMultiPress.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<GestureMultiPress.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * If an area was set through `gtk_gesture_multi_press_set_area()`,
         * this function will return `true` and fill in `rect` with the
         * press area. See `gtk_gesture_multi_press_set_area()` for more
         * details on what the press area represents.
         * @returns `true` if `rect` was filled with the press area
         */
        get_area(): [boolean, Gdk.Rectangle];

        /**
         * If `rect` is non-`null`, the press area will be checked to be
         * confined within the rectangle, otherwise the button count
         * will be reset so the press is seen as being the first one.
         * If `rect` is `null`, the area will be reset to an unrestricted
         * state.
         * 
         * Note: The rectangle is only used to determine whether any
         * non-first click falls within the expected area. This is not
         * akin to an input shape.
         * @param rect rectangle to receive coordinates on
         */
        set_area(rect: Gdk.Rectangle | null): void;
    }


    namespace GesturePan {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends GestureDrag.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * This signal is emitted once a panning gesture along the
             * expected axis is detected.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.14
             * @run-last
             */
            pan: (arg0: PanDirection, arg1: number) => void;
            "notify::orientation": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::button": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::exclusive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::touch-only": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::n-points": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::propagation-phase": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GestureDrag.ConstructorProps {
            orientation: Orientation;
        }
    }

    /**
     * {@link Gtk.GesturePan} is a {@link Gtk.Gesture} implementation able to recognize
     * pan gestures, those are drags that are locked to happen along one
     * axis. The axis that a {@link Gtk.GesturePan} handles is defined at
     * construct time, and can be changed through
     * `gtk_gesture_pan_set_orientation()`.
     * 
     * When the gesture starts to be recognized, {@link Gtk.GesturePan} will
     * attempt to determine as early as possible whether the sequence
     * is moving in the expected direction, and denying the sequence if
     * this does not happen.
     * 
     * Once a panning gesture along the expected axis is recognized,
     * the {@link Gtk.GesturePan.SignalSignatures.pan | Gtk.GesturePan::pan} signal will be emitted as input events
     * are received, containing the offset in the given axis.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class GesturePan extends GestureDrag {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<GesturePan>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * The expected orientation of pan gestures.
         * @since 3.14
         * @default Gtk.Orientation.HORIZONTAL
         */
        get orientation(): Orientation;
        set orientation(val: Orientation);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: GesturePan.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<GesturePan.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](widget: Widget, orientation: Orientation): GesturePan;

        // Conflicted with Gtk.GestureDrag.new
        static ["new"](...args: never[]): any;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof GesturePan.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, GesturePan.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof GesturePan.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, GesturePan.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof GesturePan.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<GesturePan.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Returns the orientation of the pan gestures that this `gesture` expects.
         * @returns the expected orientation for pan gestures
         */
        get_orientation(): Orientation;

        /**
         * Sets the orientation to be expected on pan gestures.
         * @param orientation expected orientation
         */
        set_orientation(orientation: Orientation): void;
    }


    namespace GestureRotate {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Gesture.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * This signal is emitted when the angle between both tracked points
             * changes.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.14
             * @run-first
             */
            "angle-changed": (arg0: number, arg1: number) => void;
            "notify::n-points": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::propagation-phase": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Gesture.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * {@link Gtk.GestureRotate} is a {@link Gtk.Gesture} implementation able to recognize
     * 2-finger rotations, whenever the angle between both handled sequences
     * changes, the {@link Gtk.GestureRotate.SignalSignatures.angle_changed | Gtk.GestureRotate::angle-changed} signal is emitted.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class GestureRotate extends Gesture {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<GestureRotate>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: GestureRotate.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<GestureRotate.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](widget: Widget): GestureRotate;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof GestureRotate.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, GestureRotate.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof GestureRotate.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, GestureRotate.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof GestureRotate.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<GestureRotate.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * If `gesture` is active, this function returns the angle difference
         * in radians since the gesture was first recognized. If `gesture` is
         * not active, 0 is returned.
         * @returns the angle delta in radians
         */
        get_angle_delta(): number;
    }


    namespace GestureSingle {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Gesture.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::button": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::exclusive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::touch-only": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::n-points": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::propagation-phase": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Gesture.ConstructorProps {
            button: number;
            exclusive: boolean;
            touch_only: boolean;
            touchOnly: boolean;
        }
    }

    /**
     * {@link Gtk.GestureSingle} is a subclass of {@link Gtk.Gesture}, optimized (although
     * not restricted) for dealing with mouse and single-touch gestures. Under
     * interaction, these gestures stick to the first interacting sequence, which
     * is accessible through `gtk_gesture_single_get_current_sequence()` while the
     * gesture is being interacted with.
     * 
     * By default gestures react to both `GDK_BUTTON_PRIMARY` and touch
     * events, `gtk_gesture_single_set_touch_only()` can be used to change the
     * touch behavior. Callers may also specify a different mouse button number
     * to interact with through `gtk_gesture_single_set_button()`, or react to any
     * mouse button by setting 0. While the gesture is active, the button being
     * currently pressed can be known through `gtk_gesture_single_get_current_button()`.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class GestureSingle extends Gesture {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<GestureSingle>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * Mouse button number to listen to, or 0 to listen for any button.
         * @since 3.14
         * @default 1
         */
        get button(): number;
        set button(val: number);

        /**
         * Whether the gesture is exclusive. Exclusive gestures only listen to pointer
         * and pointer emulated events.
         * @since 3.14
         * @default false
         */
        get exclusive(): boolean;
        set exclusive(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether the gesture handles only touch events.
         * @since 3.14
         * @default false
         */
        get touch_only(): boolean;
        set touch_only(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether the gesture handles only touch events.
         * @since 3.14
         * @default false
         */
        get touchOnly(): boolean;
        set touchOnly(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: GestureSingle.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<GestureSingle.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof GestureSingle.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, GestureSingle.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof GestureSingle.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, GestureSingle.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof GestureSingle.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<GestureSingle.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Returns the button number `gesture` listens for, or 0 if `gesture`
         * reacts to any button press.
         * @returns The button number, or 0 for any button
         */
        get_button(): number;

        /**
         * Returns the button number currently interacting with `gesture`, or 0 if there
         * is none.
         * @returns The current button number
         */
        get_current_button(): number;

        /**
         * Returns the event sequence currently interacting with `gesture`.
         * This is only meaningful if `gtk_gesture_is_active()` returns `true`.
         * @returns the current sequence
         */
        get_current_sequence(): Gdk.EventSequence | null;

        /**
         * Gets whether a gesture is exclusive. For more information, see
         * `gtk_gesture_single_set_exclusive()`.
         * @returns Whether the gesture is exclusive
         */
        get_exclusive(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns `true` if the gesture is only triggered by touch events.
         * @returns `true` if the gesture only handles touch events
         */
        get_touch_only(): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the button number `gesture` listens to. If non-0, every
         * button press from a different button number will be ignored.
         * Touch events implicitly match with button 1.
         * @param button button number to listen to, or 0 for any button
         */
        set_button(button: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether `gesture` is exclusive. An exclusive gesture will
         * only handle pointer and "pointer emulated" touch events, so at
         * any given time, there is only one sequence able to interact with
         * those.
         * @param exclusive `true` to make `gesture` exclusive
         */
        set_exclusive(exclusive: boolean): void;

        /**
         * If `touch_only` is `true`, `gesture` will only handle events of type
         * #GDK_TOUCH_BEGIN, #GDK_TOUCH_UPDATE or #GDK_TOUCH_END. If `false`,
         * mouse events will be handled too.
         * @param touch_only whether `gesture` handles only touch events
         */
        set_touch_only(touch_only: boolean): void;
    }


    namespace GestureStylus {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends GestureSingle.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            down: (arg0: number, arg1: number) => void;
            /**
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            motion: (arg0: number, arg1: number) => void;
            /**
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            proximity: (arg0: number, arg1: number) => void;
            /**
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            up: (arg0: number, arg1: number) => void;
            "notify::button": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::exclusive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::touch-only": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::n-points": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::propagation-phase": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GestureSingle.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * {@link Gtk.GestureStylus} is a {@link Gtk.Gesture} implementation specific to stylus
     * input. The provided signals just provide the basic information
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class GestureStylus extends GestureSingle {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<GestureStylus>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: GestureStylus.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<GestureStylus.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](widget: Widget): GestureStylus;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof GestureStylus.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, GestureStylus.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof GestureStylus.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, GestureStylus.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof GestureStylus.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<GestureStylus.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Returns the current values for the requested `axes`. This function
         * must be called from either the {@link Gtk.GestureStylus.down},
         * {@link Gtk.GestureStylus.motion}, {@link Gtk.GestureStylus.up} or {@link Gtk.GestureStylus.proximity}
         * signals.
         * @param axes array of requested axes, terminated with #GDK_AXIS_IGNORE
         * @returns `TRUE` if there is a current value for the axes
         */
        get_axes(axes: Gdk.AxisUse[]): [boolean, number[]];

        /**
         * Returns the current value for the requested `axis`. This function
         * must be called from either the {@link Gtk.GestureStylus.down},
         * {@link Gtk.GestureStylus.motion}, {@link Gtk.GestureStylus.up} or {@link Gtk.GestureStylus.proximity}
         * signals.
         * @param axis requested device axis
         * @returns `TRUE` if there is a current value for the axis
         */
        get_axis(axis: Gdk.AxisUse): [boolean, number];

        /**
         * Returns the {@link Gdk.DeviceTool} currently driving input through this gesture.
         * This function must be called from either the {@link Gtk.GestureStylus.SignalSignatures.down | Gtk.GestureStylus::down},
         * {@link Gtk.GestureStylus.SignalSignatures.motion | Gtk.GestureStylus::motion}, {@link Gtk.GestureStylus.SignalSignatures.up | Gtk.GestureStylus::up} or {@link Gtk.GestureStylus.SignalSignatures.proximity | Gtk.GestureStylus::proximity}
         * signal handlers.
         * @returns The current stylus tool
         */
        get_device_tool(): Gdk.DeviceTool | null;
    }


    namespace GestureSwipe {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends GestureSingle.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * This signal is emitted when the recognized gesture is finished, velocity
             * and direction are a product of previously recorded events.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.14
             * @run-last
             */
            swipe: (arg0: number, arg1: number) => void;
            "notify::button": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::exclusive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::touch-only": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::n-points": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::propagation-phase": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GestureSingle.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * {@link Gtk.GestureSwipe} is a {@link Gtk.Gesture} implementation able to recognize
     * swipes, after a press/move/.../move/release sequence happens, the
     * {@link Gtk.GestureSwipe.SignalSignatures.swipe | Gtk.GestureSwipe::swipe} signal will be emitted, providing the velocity
     * and directionality of the sequence at the time it was lifted.
     * 
     * If the velocity is desired in intermediate points,
     * `gtk_gesture_swipe_get_velocity()` can be called on eg. a
     * {@link Gtk.Gesture.SignalSignatures.update | Gtk.Gesture::update} handler.
     * 
     * All velocities are reported in pixels/sec units.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class GestureSwipe extends GestureSingle {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<GestureSwipe>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: GestureSwipe.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<GestureSwipe.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](widget: Widget): GestureSwipe;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof GestureSwipe.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, GestureSwipe.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof GestureSwipe.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, GestureSwipe.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof GestureSwipe.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<GestureSwipe.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * If the gesture is recognized, this function returns `true` and fill in
         * `velocity_x` and `velocity_y` with the recorded velocity, as per the
         * last event(s) processed.
         * @returns whether velocity could be calculated
         */
        get_velocity(): [boolean, number, number];
    }


    namespace GestureZoom {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Gesture.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * This signal is emitted whenever the distance between both tracked
             * sequences changes.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.14
             * @run-first
             */
            "scale-changed": (arg0: number) => void;
            "notify::n-points": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::propagation-phase": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Gesture.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * {@link Gtk.GestureZoom} is a {@link Gtk.Gesture} implementation able to recognize
     * pinch/zoom gestures, whenever the distance between both tracked
     * sequences changes, the {@link Gtk.GestureZoom.SignalSignatures.scale_changed | Gtk.GestureZoom::scale-changed} signal is
     * emitted to report the scale factor.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class GestureZoom extends Gesture {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<GestureZoom>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: GestureZoom.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<GestureZoom.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](widget: Widget): GestureZoom;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof GestureZoom.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, GestureZoom.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof GestureZoom.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, GestureZoom.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof GestureZoom.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<GestureZoom.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * If `gesture` is active, this function returns the zooming difference
         * since the gesture was recognized (hence the starting point is
         * considered 1:1). If `gesture` is not active, 1 is returned.
         * @returns the scale delta
         */
        get_scale_delta(): number;
    }


    namespace Grid {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Container.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::baseline-row": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::column-homogeneous": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::column-spacing": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::row-homogeneous": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::row-spacing": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::orientation": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Container.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, Orientable.ConstructorProps {
            baseline_row: number;
            baselineRow: number;
            column_homogeneous: boolean;
            columnHomogeneous: boolean;
            column_spacing: number;
            columnSpacing: number;
            row_homogeneous: boolean;
            rowHomogeneous: boolean;
            row_spacing: number;
            rowSpacing: number;
        }
    }

    /**
     * GtkGrid is a container which arranges its child widgets in
     * rows and columns, with arbitrary positions and horizontal/vertical spans.
     * 
     * Children are added using `gtk_grid_attach()`. They can span multiple
     * rows or columns. It is also possible to add a child next to an
     * existing child, using `gtk_grid_attach_next_to()`. The behaviour of
     * GtkGrid when several children occupy the same grid cell is undefined.
     * 
     * GtkGrid can be used like a {@link Gtk.Box} by just using `gtk_container_add()`,
     * which will place children next to each other in the direction determined
     * by the {@link Gtk.Orientable.orientation} property. However, if all you want is a
     * single row or column, then {@link Gtk.Box} is the preferred widget.
     * 
     * # CSS nodes
     * 
     * GtkGrid uses a single CSS node with name grid.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class Grid extends Container implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable, Orientable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<Grid>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * @default 0
         */
        get baseline_row(): number;
        set baseline_row(val: number);

        /**
         * @default 0
         */
        get baselineRow(): number;
        set baselineRow(val: number);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get column_homogeneous(): boolean;
        set column_homogeneous(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get columnHomogeneous(): boolean;
        set columnHomogeneous(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default 0
         */
        get column_spacing(): number;
        set column_spacing(val: number);

        /**
         * @default 0
         */
        get columnSpacing(): number;
        set columnSpacing(val: number);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get row_homogeneous(): boolean;
        set row_homogeneous(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get rowHomogeneous(): boolean;
        set rowHomogeneous(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default 0
         */
        get row_spacing(): number;
        set row_spacing(val: number);

        /**
         * @default 0
         */
        get rowSpacing(): number;
        set rowSpacing(val: number);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: Grid.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<Grid.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): Grid;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof Grid.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Grid.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof Grid.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Grid.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof Grid.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<Grid.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Adds a widget to the grid.
         * 
         * The position of `child` is determined by `left` and `top`. The
         * number of “cells” that `child` will occupy is determined by
         * `width` and `height`.
         * @param child the widget to add
         * @param left the column number to attach the left side of `child` to
         * @param top the row number to attach the top side of `child` to
         * @param width the number of columns that `child` will span
         * @param height the number of rows that `child` will span
         */
        attach(child: Widget, left: number, top: number, width: number, height: number): void;

        /**
         * Adds a widget to the grid.
         * 
         * The widget is placed next to `sibling`, on the side determined by
         * `side`. When `sibling` is `null`, the widget is placed in row (for
         * left or right placement) or column 0 (for top or bottom placement),
         * at the end indicated by `side`.
         * 
         * Attaching widgets labeled [1], [2], [3] with `sibling` == `null` and
         * `side` == {@link Gtk.PositionType.LEFT} yields a layout of [3][2][1].
         * @param child the widget to add
         * @param sibling the child of `grid` that `child` will be placed     next to, or `null` to place `child` at the beginning or end
         * @param side the side of `sibling` that `child` is positioned next to
         * @param width the number of columns that `child` will span
         * @param height the number of rows that `child` will span
         */
        attach_next_to(child: Widget, sibling: Widget | null, side: PositionType, width: number, height: number): void;

        /**
         * Returns which row defines the global baseline of `grid`.
         * @returns the row index defining the global baseline
         */
        get_baseline_row(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the child of `grid` whose area covers the grid
         * cell whose upper left corner is at `left`, `top`.
         * @param left the left edge of the cell
         * @param top the top edge of the cell
         * @returns the child at the given position, or `null`
         */
        get_child_at(left: number, top: number): Widget | null;

        /**
         * Returns whether all columns of `grid` have the same width.
         * @returns whether all columns of `grid` have the same width.
         */
        get_column_homogeneous(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the amount of space between the columns of `grid`.
         * @returns the column spacing of `grid`
         */
        get_column_spacing(): number;

        /**
         * Returns the baseline position of `row` as set
         * by `gtk_grid_set_row_baseline_position()` or the default value
         * {@link Gtk.BaselinePosition.CENTER}.
         * @param row a row index
         * @returns the baseline position of `row`
         */
        get_row_baseline_position(row: number): BaselinePosition;

        /**
         * Returns whether all rows of `grid` have the same height.
         * @returns whether all rows of `grid` have the same height.
         */
        get_row_homogeneous(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the amount of space between the rows of `grid`.
         * @returns the row spacing of `grid`
         */
        get_row_spacing(): number;

        /**
         * Inserts a column at the specified position.
         * 
         * Children which are attached at or to the right of this position
         * are moved one column to the right. Children which span across this
         * position are grown to span the new column.
         * @param position the position to insert the column at
         */
        insert_column(position: number): void;

        /**
         * Inserts a row or column at the specified position.
         * 
         * The new row or column is placed next to `sibling`, on the side
         * determined by `side`. If `side` is {@link Gtk.PositionType.TOP} or {@link Gtk.PositionType.BOTTOM},
         * a row is inserted. If `side` is {@link Gtk.PositionType.LEFT} of {@link Gtk.PositionType.RIGHT},
         * a column is inserted.
         * @param sibling the child of `grid` that the new row or column will be     placed next to
         * @param side the side of `sibling` that `child` is positioned next to
         */
        insert_next_to(sibling: Widget, side: PositionType): void;

        /**
         * Inserts a row at the specified position.
         * 
         * Children which are attached at or below this position
         * are moved one row down. Children which span across this
         * position are grown to span the new row.
         * @param position the position to insert the row at
         */
        insert_row(position: number): void;

        /**
         * Removes a column from the grid.
         * 
         * Children that are placed in this column are removed,
         * spanning children that overlap this column have their
         * width reduced by one, and children after the column
         * are moved to the left.
         * @param position the position of the column to remove
         */
        remove_column(position: number): void;

        /**
         * Removes a row from the grid.
         * 
         * Children that are placed in this row are removed,
         * spanning children that overlap this row have their
         * height reduced by one, and children below the row
         * are moved up.
         * @param position the position of the row to remove
         */
        remove_row(position: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets which row defines the global baseline for the entire grid.
         * Each row in the grid can have its own local baseline, but only
         * one of those is global, meaning it will be the baseline in the
         * parent of the `grid`.
         * @param row the row index
         */
        set_baseline_row(row: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether all columns of `grid` will have the same width.
         * @param homogeneous `true` to make columns homogeneous
         */
        set_column_homogeneous(homogeneous: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the amount of space between columns of `grid`.
         * @param spacing the amount of space to insert between columns
         */
        set_column_spacing(spacing: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets how the baseline should be positioned on `row` of the
         * grid, in case that row is assigned more space than is requested.
         * @param row a row index
         * @param pos a {@link Gtk.BaselinePosition}
         */
        set_row_baseline_position(row: number, pos: BaselinePosition): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether all rows of `grid` will have the same height.
         * @param homogeneous `true` to make rows homogeneous
         */
        set_row_homogeneous(homogeneous: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the amount of space between rows of `grid`.
         * @param spacing the amount of space to insert between rows
         */
        set_row_spacing(spacing: number): void;

        /**
         * The orientation of the orientable.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default Gtk.Orientation.HORIZONTAL
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Orientable
         */
        get orientation(): Orientation;
        set orientation(val: Orientation);

        /**
         * Retrieves the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @returns the orientation of the `orientable`.
         */
        get_orientation(): Orientation;

        /**
         * Sets the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @param orientation the orientable’s new orientation.
         */
        set_orientation(orientation: Orientation): void;
    }


    namespace HBox {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Box.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::baseline-position": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::homogeneous": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::spacing": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::orientation": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Box.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, Orientable.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * {@link Gtk.HBox} is a container that organizes child widgets into a single row.
     * 
     * Use the {@link Gtk.Box} packing interface to determine the arrangement,
     * spacing, width, and alignment of {@link Gtk.HBox} children.
     * 
     * All children are allocated the same height.
     * 
     * GtkHBox has been deprecated. You can use {@link Gtk.Box} instead, which is a
     * very quick and easy change. If you have derived your own classes from
     * GtkHBox, you can simply change the inheritance to derive directly
     * from {@link Gtk.Box}. No further changes are needed, since the default
     * value of the {@link Gtk.Orientable.orientation} property is
     * {@link Gtk.Orientation.HORIZONTAL}.
     * 
     * If you have a grid-like layout composed of nested boxes, and you don’t
     * need first-child or last-child styling, the recommendation is to switch
     * to {@link Gtk.Grid}. For more information about migrating to {@link Gtk.Grid}, see
     * [Migrating from other containers to GtkGrid][gtk-migrating-GtkGrid].
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class HBox extends Box implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable, Orientable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<HBox>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: HBox.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        box: Box;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<HBox.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](homogeneous: boolean, spacing: number): HBox;

        // Conflicted with Gtk.Box.new
        static ["new"](...args: never[]): any;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof HBox.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, HBox.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof HBox.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, HBox.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof HBox.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<HBox.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        /**
         * The orientation of the orientable.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default Gtk.Orientation.HORIZONTAL
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Orientable
         */
        get orientation(): Orientation;
        set orientation(val: Orientation);

        /**
         * Retrieves the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @returns the orientation of the `orientable`.
         */
        get_orientation(): Orientation;

        /**
         * Sets the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @param orientation the orientable’s new orientation.
         */
        set_orientation(orientation: Orientation): void;
    }


    namespace HButtonBox {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends ButtonBox.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::layout-style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::baseline-position": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::homogeneous": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::spacing": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends ButtonBox.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, Orientable.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class HButtonBox extends ButtonBox implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable, Orientable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<HButtonBox>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: HButtonBox.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        button_box: ButtonBox;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<HButtonBox.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): HButtonBox;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof HButtonBox.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, HButtonBox.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof HButtonBox.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, HButtonBox.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof HButtonBox.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<HButtonBox.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;
    }


    namespace HPaned {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Paned.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::max-position": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::min-position": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::position": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::position-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::wide-handle": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::orientation": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Paned.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, Orientable.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * The HPaned widget is a container widget with two
     * children arranged horizontally. The division between
     * the two panes is adjustable by the user by dragging
     * a handle. See {@link Gtk.Paned} for details.
     * 
     * GtkHPaned has been deprecated, use {@link Gtk.Paned} instead.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class HPaned extends Paned implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable, Orientable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<HPaned>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: HPaned.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        paned: Paned;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<HPaned.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): HPaned;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof HPaned.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, HPaned.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof HPaned.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, HPaned.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof HPaned.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<HPaned.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        /**
         * The orientation of the orientable.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default Gtk.Orientation.HORIZONTAL
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Orientable
         */
        get orientation(): Orientation;
        set orientation(val: Orientation);

        /**
         * Retrieves the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @returns the orientation of the `orientable`.
         */
        get_orientation(): Orientation;

        /**
         * Sets the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @param orientation the orientable’s new orientation.
         */
        set_orientation(orientation: Orientation): void;
    }


    namespace HSV {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Widget.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * @signal
             * @run-first
             */
            changed: () => void;
            /**
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            move: (arg0: DirectionType) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Widget.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * {@link Gtk.HSV} is the “color wheel” part of a complete color selector widget.
     * It allows to select a color by determining its HSV components in an
     * intuitive way. Moving the selection around the outer ring changes the hue,
     * and moving the selection point inside the inner triangle changes value and
     * saturation.
     * 
     * {@link Gtk.HSV} has been deprecated together with {@link Gtk.ColorSelection}, where
     * it was used.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class HSV extends Widget implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<HSV>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: HSV.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<HSV.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): HSV;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof HSV.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, HSV.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof HSV.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, HSV.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof HSV.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<HSV.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Static methods
        /**
         * Converts a color from HSV space to RGB.
         * 
         * Input values must be in the [0.0, 1.0] range;
         * output values will be in the same range.
         * @param h Hue
         * @param s Saturation
         * @param v Value
         */
        static to_rgb(h: number, s: number, v: number): [number, number, number];

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_changed(): void;

        /**
         * @param type 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_move(type: DirectionType): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Queries the current color in an HSV color selector.
         * Returned values will be in the [0.0, 1.0] range.
         */
        get_color(): [number, number, number];

        /**
         * Queries the size and ring width of an HSV color selector.
         */
        get_metrics(): [number, number];

        /**
         * An HSV color selector can be said to be adjusting if multiple rapid
         * changes are being made to its value, for example, when the user is
         * adjusting the value with the mouse. This function queries whether
         * the HSV color selector is being adjusted or not.
         * @returns `true` if clients can ignore changes to the color value,     since they may be transitory, or `false` if they should consider     the color value status to be final.
         */
        is_adjusting(): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the current color in an HSV color selector.
         * Color component values must be in the [0.0, 1.0] range.
         * @param h Hue
         * @param s Saturation
         * @param v Value
         */
        set_color(h: number, s: number, v: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the size and ring width of an HSV color selector.
         * @param size Diameter for the hue ring
         * @param ring_width Width of the hue ring
         */
        set_metrics(size: number, ring_width: number): void;

        /**
         * Adds a child to `buildable`. `type` is an optional string
         * describing how the child should be added.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child to add
         * @param type kind of child or `null`
         */
        add_child(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object, type: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Constructs a child of `buildable` with the name `name`.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} calls this function if a “constructor” has been
         * specified in the UI definition.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param name name of child to construct
         * @returns the constructed child
         */
        construct_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, name: string): T;

        /**
         * This is similar to `gtk_buildable_parser_finished()` but is
         * called once for each custom tag handled by the `buildable`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname the name of the tag
         * @param data user data created in custom_tag_start
         */
        custom_finished(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
         * the buildable.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @param data user data that will be passed in to parser functions
         */
        custom_tag_end(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called for each unknown element under `<child>`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @returns `true` if a object has a custom implementation, `false`          if it doesn't.
         */
        custom_tag_start(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string): [boolean, GLib.MarkupParser, null];

        /**
         * Get the internal child called `childname` of the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param childname name of child
         * @returns the internal child of the buildable object
         */
        get_internal_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, childname: string): T;

        /**
         * Gets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} sets the name based on the
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI]
         * used to construct the `buildable`.
         * @returns the name set with `gtk_buildable_set_name()`
         */
        get_name(): string;

        /**
         * Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI].
         * Note that this will be called once for each time
         * `gtk_builder_add_from_file()` or `gtk_builder_add_from_string()`
         * is called on a builder.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         */
        parser_finished(builder: Builder): void;

        /**
         * Sets the property name `name` to `value` on the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param name name of property
         * @param value value of property
         */
        set_buildable_property(builder: Builder, name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;

        /**
         * Sets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * @param name name to set
         */
        set_name(name: string): void;

        /**
         * Adds a child to `buildable`. `type` is an optional string
         * describing how the child should be added.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child to add
         * @param type kind of child or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add_child(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object, type: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Constructs a child of `buildable` with the name `name`.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} calls this function if a “constructor” has been
         * specified in the UI definition.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param name name of child to construct
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_construct_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, name: string): T;

        /**
         * This is similar to `gtk_buildable_parser_finished()` but is
         * called once for each custom tag handled by the `buildable`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname the name of the tag
         * @param data user data created in custom_tag_start
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_finished(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
         * the buildable.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @param data user data that will be passed in to parser functions
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_tag_end(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called for each unknown element under `<child>`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_tag_start(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string): [boolean, GLib.MarkupParser, never];

        /**
         * Get the internal child called `childname` of the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param childname name of child
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_internal_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, childname: string): T;

        /**
         * Gets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} sets the name based on the
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI]
         * used to construct the `buildable`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_name(): string;

        /**
         * Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI].
         * Note that this will be called once for each time
         * `gtk_builder_add_from_file()` or `gtk_builder_add_from_string()`
         * is called on a builder.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_parser_finished(builder: Builder): void;

        /**
         * Sets the property name `name` to `value` on the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param name name of property
         * @param value value of property
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_buildable_property(builder: Builder, name: string, value: unknown): void;

        /**
         * Sets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * @param name name to set
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_name(name: string): void;
    }


    namespace HScale {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Scale.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::digits": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::draw-value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-origin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::value-pos": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::adjustment": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::fill-level": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::inverted": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::lower-stepper-sensitivity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::restrict-to-fill-level": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::round-digits": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::show-fill-level": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::upper-stepper-sensitivity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Scale.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, Orientable.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * The {@link Gtk.HScale} widget is used to allow the user to select a value using
     * a horizontal slider. To create one, use `gtk_hscale_new_with_range()`.
     * 
     * The position to show the current value, and the number of decimal places
     * shown can be set using the parent {@link Gtk.Scale} class’s functions.
     * 
     * GtkHScale has been deprecated, use {@link Gtk.Scale} instead.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class HScale extends Scale implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable, Orientable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<HScale>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: HScale.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        scale: Scale;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<HScale.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](adjustment: Adjustment | null): HScale;

        // Conflicted with Gtk.Scale.new
        static ["new"](...args: never[]): any;

        static new_with_range(min: number, max: number, step: number): HScale;

        // Conflicted with Gtk.Scale.new_with_range
        static new_with_range(...args: never[]): any;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof HScale.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, HScale.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof HScale.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, HScale.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof HScale.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<HScale.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;
    }


    namespace HScrollbar {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Scrollbar.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::adjustment": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::fill-level": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::inverted": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::lower-stepper-sensitivity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::restrict-to-fill-level": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::round-digits": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::show-fill-level": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::upper-stepper-sensitivity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Scrollbar.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, Orientable.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * The {@link Gtk.HScrollbar} widget is a widget arranged horizontally creating a
     * scrollbar. See {@link Gtk.Scrollbar} for details on
     * scrollbars. {@link Gtk.Adjustment} pointers may be added to handle the
     * adjustment of the scrollbar or it may be left `null` in which case one
     * will be created for you. See {@link Gtk.Scrollbar} for a description of what the
     * fields in an adjustment represent for a scrollbar.
     * 
     * GtkHScrollbar has been deprecated, use {@link Gtk.Scrollbar} instead.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class HScrollbar extends Scrollbar implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable, Orientable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<HScrollbar>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: HScrollbar.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        scrollbar: Scrollbar;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<HScrollbar.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](adjustment: Adjustment | null): HScrollbar;

        // Conflicted with Gtk.Scrollbar.new
        static ["new"](...args: never[]): any;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof HScrollbar.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, HScrollbar.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof HScrollbar.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, HScrollbar.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof HScrollbar.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<HScrollbar.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;
    }


    namespace HSeparator {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Separator.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::orientation": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Separator.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, Orientable.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * The {@link Gtk.HSeparator} widget is a horizontal separator, used to group the
     * widgets within a window. It displays a horizontal line with a shadow to
     * make it appear sunken into the interface.
     * 
     * > The {@link Gtk.HSeparator} widget is not used as a separator within menus.
     * > To create a separator in a menu create an empty {@link Gtk.SeparatorMenuItem}
     * > widget using `gtk_separator_menu_item_new()` and add it to the menu with
     * > `gtk_menu_shell_append()`.
     * 
     * GtkHSeparator has been deprecated, use {@link Gtk.Separator} instead.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class HSeparator extends Separator implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable, Orientable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<HSeparator>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: HSeparator.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        separator: Separator;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<HSeparator.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): HSeparator;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof HSeparator.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, HSeparator.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof HSeparator.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, HSeparator.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof HSeparator.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<HSeparator.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        /**
         * The orientation of the orientable.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default Gtk.Orientation.HORIZONTAL
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Orientable
         */
        get orientation(): Orientation;
        set orientation(val: Orientation);

        /**
         * Retrieves the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @returns the orientation of the `orientable`.
         */
        get_orientation(): Orientation;

        /**
         * Sets the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @param orientation the orientable’s new orientation.
         */
        set_orientation(orientation: Orientation): void;
    }


    namespace HandleBox {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Bin.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * This signal is emitted when the contents of the
             * handlebox are reattached to the main window.
             * @signal
             * @deprecated since 3.4: {@link Gtk.HandleBox} has been deprecated.
             * @run-first
             */
            "child-attached": (arg0: Widget) => void;
            /**
             * This signal is emitted when the contents of the
             * handlebox are detached from the main window.
             * @signal
             * @deprecated since 3.4: {@link Gtk.HandleBox} has been deprecated.
             * @run-first
             */
            "child-detached": (arg0: Widget) => void;
            "notify::child-detached": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::handle-position": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::shadow-type": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::snap-edge": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::snap-edge-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Bin.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {
            child_detached: boolean;
            childDetached: boolean;
            handle_position: PositionType;
            handlePosition: PositionType;
            shadow_type: ShadowType;
            shadowType: ShadowType;
            snap_edge: PositionType;
            snapEdge: PositionType;
            snap_edge_set: boolean;
            snapEdgeSet: boolean;
        }
    }

    /**
     * The {@link Gtk.HandleBox} widget allows a portion of a window to be "torn
     * off". It is a bin widget which displays its child and a handle that
     * the user can drag to tear off a separate window (the “float
     * window”) containing the child widget. A thin
     * “ghost” is drawn in the original location of the
     * handlebox. By dragging the separate window back to its original
     * location, it can be reattached.
     * 
     * When reattaching, the ghost and float window, must be aligned
     * along one of the edges, the “snap edge”.
     * This either can be specified by the application programmer
     * explicitly, or GTK+ will pick a reasonable default based
     * on the handle position.
     * 
     * To make detaching and reattaching the handlebox as minimally confusing
     * as possible to the user, it is important to set the snap edge so that
     * the snap edge does not move when the handlebox is deattached. For
     * instance, if the handlebox is packed at the bottom of a VBox, then
     * when the handlebox is detached, the bottom edge of the handlebox's
     * allocation will remain fixed as the height of the handlebox shrinks,
     * so the snap edge should be set to {@link Gtk.PositionType.BOTTOM}.
     * 
     * > {@link Gtk.HandleBox} has been deprecated. It is very specialized, lacks features
     * > to make it useful and most importantly does not fit well into modern
     * > application design. Do not use it. There is no replacement.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class HandleBox extends Bin implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<HandleBox>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * @read-only
         * @default false
         */
        get child_detached(): boolean;

        /**
         * @read-only
         * @default false
         */
        get childDetached(): boolean;

        /**
         * @default Gtk.PositionType.LEFT
         */
        get handle_position(): PositionType;
        set handle_position(val: PositionType);

        /**
         * @default Gtk.PositionType.LEFT
         */
        get handlePosition(): PositionType;
        set handlePosition(val: PositionType);

        /**
         * @default Gtk.ShadowType.OUT
         */
        get shadow_type(): ShadowType;
        set shadow_type(val: ShadowType);

        /**
         * @default Gtk.ShadowType.OUT
         */
        get shadowType(): ShadowType;
        set shadowType(val: ShadowType);

        /**
         * @default Gtk.PositionType.TOP
         */
        get snap_edge(): PositionType;
        set snap_edge(val: PositionType);

        /**
         * @default Gtk.PositionType.TOP
         */
        get snapEdge(): PositionType;
        set snapEdge(val: PositionType);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get snap_edge_set(): boolean;
        set snap_edge_set(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get snapEdgeSet(): boolean;
        set snapEdgeSet(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: HandleBox.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        bin: Bin;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<HandleBox.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): HandleBox;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof HandleBox.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, HandleBox.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof HandleBox.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, HandleBox.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof HandleBox.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<HandleBox.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * Signal emitted when the contents of the handlebox
         *    are reattached to the main window. Deprecated: 3.4.
         * @param child 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_child_attached(child: Widget): void;

        /**
         * Signal emitted when the contents of the handlebox
         *    are detached from the main window. Deprecated: 3.4.
         * @param child 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_child_detached(child: Widget): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Whether the handlebox’s child is currently detached.
         * @returns `true` if the child is currently detached, otherwise `false`
         */
        get_child_detached(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the handle position of the handle box. See
         * `gtk_handle_box_set_handle_position()`.
         * @returns the current handle position.
         */
        get_handle_position(): PositionType;

        /**
         * Gets the type of shadow drawn around the handle box. See
         * `gtk_handle_box_set_shadow_type()`.
         * @returns the type of shadow currently drawn around the handle box.
         */
        get_shadow_type(): ShadowType;

        /**
         * Gets the edge used for determining reattachment of the handle box.
         * See `gtk_handle_box_set_snap_edge()`.
         * @returns the edge used for determining reattachment, or   (GtkPositionType)-1 if this is determined (as per default)   from the handle position.
         */
        get_snap_edge(): PositionType;

        /**
         * Sets the side of the handlebox where the handle is drawn.
         * @param position the side of the handlebox where the handle should be drawn.
         */
        set_handle_position(position: PositionType): void;

        /**
         * Sets the type of shadow to be drawn around the border
         * of the handle box.
         * @param type the shadow type.
         */
        set_shadow_type(type: ShadowType): void;

        /**
         * Sets the snap edge of a handlebox. The snap edge is
         * the edge of the detached child that must be aligned
         * with the corresponding edge of the “ghost” left
         * behind when the child was detached to reattach
         * the torn-off window. Usually, the snap edge should
         * be chosen so that it stays in the same place on
         * the screen when the handlebox is torn off.
         * 
         * If the snap edge is not set, then an appropriate value
         * will be guessed from the handle position. If the
         * handle position is {@link Gtk.PositionType.RIGHT} or {@link Gtk.PositionType.LEFT},
         * then the snap edge will be {@link Gtk.PositionType.TOP}, otherwise
         * it will be {@link Gtk.PositionType.LEFT}.
         * @param edge the snap edge, or -1 to unset the value; in which   case GTK+ will try to guess an appropriate value   in the future.
         */
        set_snap_edge(edge: PositionType): void;
    }


    namespace HeaderBar {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Container.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::custom-title": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::decoration-layout": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::decoration-layout-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-subtitle": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::show-close-button": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::spacing": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::subtitle": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::title": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Container.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {
            custom_title: Widget | null;
            customTitle: Widget | null;
            decoration_layout: string;
            decorationLayout: string;
            decoration_layout_set: boolean;
            decorationLayoutSet: boolean;
            has_subtitle: boolean;
            hasSubtitle: boolean;
            show_close_button: boolean;
            showCloseButton: boolean;
            spacing: number;
            subtitle: string | null;
            title: string | null;
        }
    }

    /**
     * GtkHeaderBar is similar to a horizontal {@link Gtk.Box}. It allows children to
     * be placed at the start or the end. In addition, it allows a title and
     * subtitle to be displayed. The title will be centered with respect to
     * the width of the box, even if the children at either side take up
     * different amounts of space. The height of the titlebar will be
     * set to provide sufficient space for the subtitle, even if none is
     * currently set. If a subtitle is not needed, the space reservation
     * can be turned off with `gtk_header_bar_set_has_subtitle()`.
     * 
     * GtkHeaderBar can add typical window frame controls, such as minimize,
     * maximize and close buttons, or the window icon.
     * 
     * For these reasons, GtkHeaderBar is the natural choice for use as the custom
     * titlebar widget of a {@link Gtk.Window} (see `gtk_window_set_titlebar()`), as it gives
     * features typical of titlebars while allowing the addition of child widgets.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class HeaderBar extends Container implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<HeaderBar>;

        // Properties
        get custom_title(): Widget | null;
        set custom_title(val: Widget | null);

        get customTitle(): Widget | null;
        set customTitle(val: Widget | null);

        /**
         * The decoration layout for buttons. If this property is
         * not set, the {@link Gtk.Settings.gtk_decoration_layout} setting
         * is used.
         * 
         * See `gtk_header_bar_set_decoration_layout()` for information
         * about the format of this string.
         * @since 3.12
         * @default null
         */
        get decoration_layout(): string;
        set decoration_layout(val: string);

        /**
         * The decoration layout for buttons. If this property is
         * not set, the {@link Gtk.Settings.gtk_decoration_layout} setting
         * is used.
         * 
         * See `gtk_header_bar_set_decoration_layout()` for information
         * about the format of this string.
         * @since 3.12
         * @default null
         */
        get decorationLayout(): string;
        set decorationLayout(val: string);

        /**
         * Set to `true` if {@link Gtk.HeaderBar.decoration_layout} is set.
         * @since 3.12
         * @default false
         */
        get decoration_layout_set(): boolean;
        set decoration_layout_set(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Set to `true` if {@link Gtk.HeaderBar.decoration_layout} is set.
         * @since 3.12
         * @default false
         */
        get decorationLayoutSet(): boolean;
        set decorationLayoutSet(val: boolean);

        /**
         * If `true`, reserve space for a subtitle, even if none
         * is currently set.
         * @since 3.12
         * @default true
         */
        get has_subtitle(): boolean;
        set has_subtitle(val: boolean);

        /**
         * If `true`, reserve space for a subtitle, even if none
         * is currently set.
         * @since 3.12
         * @default true
         */
        get hasSubtitle(): boolean;
        set hasSubtitle(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether to show window decorations.
         * 
         * Which buttons are actually shown and where is determined
         * by the {@link Gtk.HeaderBar.decoration_layout} property, and by
         * the state of the window (e.g. a close button will not be
         * shown if the window can't be closed).
         * @default false
         */
        get show_close_button(): boolean;
        set show_close_button(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether to show window decorations.
         * 
         * Which buttons are actually shown and where is determined
         * by the {@link Gtk.HeaderBar.decoration_layout} property, and by
         * the state of the window (e.g. a close button will not be
         * shown if the window can't be closed).
         * @default false
         */
        get showCloseButton(): boolean;
        set showCloseButton(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default 6
         */
        get spacing(): number;
        set spacing(val: number);

        /**
         * @default null
         */
        get subtitle(): string | null;
        set subtitle(val: string | null);

        /**
         * @default null
         */
        get title(): string | null;
        set title(val: string | null);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: HeaderBar.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        container: Container;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<HeaderBar.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): HeaderBar;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof HeaderBar.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, HeaderBar.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof HeaderBar.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, HeaderBar.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof HeaderBar.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<HeaderBar.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Retrieves the custom title widget of the header. See
         * `gtk_header_bar_set_custom_title()`.
         * @returns the custom title widget    of the header, or `null` if none has been set explicitly.
         */
        get_custom_title(): Widget | null;

        /**
         * Gets the decoration layout set with
         * `gtk_header_bar_set_decoration_layout()`.
         * @returns the decoration layout
         */
        get_decoration_layout(): string;

        /**
         * Retrieves whether the header bar reserves space for
         * a subtitle, regardless if one is currently set or not.
         * @returns `true` if the header bar reserves space     for a subtitle
         */
        get_has_subtitle(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns whether this header bar shows the standard window
         * decorations.
         * @returns `true` if the decorations are shown
         */
        get_show_close_button(): boolean;

        /**
         * Retrieves the subtitle of the header. See `gtk_header_bar_set_subtitle()`.
         * @returns the subtitle of the header, or `null` if none has    been set explicitly. The returned string is owned by the widget    and must not be modified or freed.
         */
        get_subtitle(): string | null;

        /**
         * Retrieves the title of the header. See `gtk_header_bar_set_title()`.
         * @returns the title of the header, or `null` if none has    been set explicitly. The returned string is owned by the widget    and must not be modified or freed.
         */
        get_title(): string | null;

        /**
         * Adds `child` to `bar`, packed with reference to the
         * end of the `bar`.
         * @param child the {@link Gtk.Widget} to be added to `bar`
         */
        pack_end(child: Widget): void;

        /**
         * Adds `child` to `bar`, packed with reference to the
         * start of the `bar`.
         * @param child the {@link Gtk.Widget} to be added to `bar`
         */
        pack_start(child: Widget): void;

        /**
         * Sets a custom title for the {@link Gtk.HeaderBar}.
         * 
         * The title should help a user identify the current view. This
         * supersedes any title set by `gtk_header_bar_set_title()` or
         * `gtk_header_bar_set_subtitle()`. To achieve the same style as
         * the builtin title and subtitle, use the “title” and “subtitle”
         * style classes.
         * 
         * You should set the custom title to `null`, for the header title
         * label to be visible again.
         * @param title_widget a custom widget to use for a title
         */
        set_custom_title(title_widget: Widget | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the decoration layout for this header bar, overriding
         * the {@link Gtk.Settings.gtk_decoration_layout} setting.
         * 
         * There can be valid reasons for overriding the setting, such
         * as a header bar design that does not allow for buttons to take
         * room on the right, or only offers room for a single close button.
         * Split header bars are another example for overriding the
         * setting.
         * 
         * The format of the string is button names, separated by commas.
         * A colon separates the buttons that should appear on the left
         * from those on the right. Recognized button names are minimize,
         * maximize, close, icon (the window icon) and menu (a menu button
         * for the fallback app menu).
         * 
         * For example, “menu:minimize,maximize,close” specifies a menu
         * on the left, and minimize, maximize and close buttons on the right.
         * @param layout a decoration layout, or `null` to     unset the layout
         */
        set_decoration_layout(layout: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the header bar should reserve space
         * for a subtitle, even if none is currently set.
         * @param setting `true` to reserve space for a subtitle
         */
        set_has_subtitle(setting: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether this header bar shows the standard window decorations,
         * including close, maximize, and minimize.
         * @param setting `true` to show standard window decorations
         */
        set_show_close_button(setting: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the subtitle of the {@link Gtk.HeaderBar}. The title should give a user
         * an additional detail to help him identify the current view.
         * 
         * Note that GtkHeaderBar by default reserves room for the subtitle,
         * even if none is currently set. If this is not desired, set the
         * {@link Gtk.HeaderBar.has_subtitle} property to `false`.
         * @param subtitle a subtitle, or `null`
         */
        set_subtitle(subtitle: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the title of the {@link Gtk.HeaderBar}. The title should help a user
         * identify the current view. A good title should not include the
         * application name.
         * @param title a title, or `null`
         */
        set_title(title: string | null): void;
    }


    namespace HeaderBarAccessible {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends ContainerAccessible.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-layer": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-mdi-zorder": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-help-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-hypertext-nlinks": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption-object": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-summary": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends ContainerAccessible.ConstructorProps, Atk.Component.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Class
     * @since 3.24.11
     */
    class HeaderBarAccessible extends ContainerAccessible implements Atk.Component {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<HeaderBarAccessible>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: HeaderBarAccessible.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<HeaderBarAccessible.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof HeaderBarAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, HeaderBarAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof HeaderBarAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, HeaderBarAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof HeaderBarAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<HeaderBarAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;
    }


    namespace IMContext {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends GObject.Object.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * The ::commit signal is emitted when a complete input sequence
             * has been entered by the user. This can be a single character
             * immediately after a key press or the final result of preediting.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            commit: (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * The ::delete-surrounding signal is emitted when the input method
             * needs to delete all or part of the context surrounding the cursor.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "delete-surrounding": (arg0: number, arg1: number) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * The ::preedit-changed signal is emitted whenever the preedit sequence
             * currently being entered has changed.  It is also emitted at the end of
             * a preedit sequence, in which case
             * `gtk_im_context_get_preedit_string()` returns the empty string.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "preedit-changed": () => void;
            /**
             * The ::preedit-end signal is emitted when a preediting sequence
             * has been completed or canceled.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "preedit-end": () => void;
            /**
             * The ::preedit-start signal is emitted when a new preediting sequence
             * starts.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "preedit-start": () => void;
            /**
             * The ::retrieve-surrounding signal is emitted when the input method
             * requires the context surrounding the cursor.  The callback should set
             * the input method surrounding context by calling the
             * `gtk_im_context_set_surrounding()` method.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "retrieve-surrounding": () => boolean | void;
            "notify::input-hints": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::input-purpose": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.Object.ConstructorProps {
            input_hints: InputHints;
            inputHints: InputHints;
            input_purpose: InputPurpose;
            inputPurpose: InputPurpose;
        }
    }

    /**
     * {@link Gtk.IMContext} defines the interface for GTK+ input methods. An input method
     * is used by GTK+ text input widgets like {@link Gtk.Entry} to map from key events to
     * Unicode character strings.
     * 
     * The default input method can be set programmatically via the
     * {@link Gtk.Settings.gtk_im_module} GtkSettings property. Alternatively, you may set
     * the GTK_IM_MODULE environment variable as documented in
     * [Running GTK+ Applications][gtk-running].
     * 
     * The {@link Gtk.Entry} {@link Gtk.Entry.im_module} and {@link Gtk.TextView} {@link Gtk.TextView.im_module}
     * properties may also be used to set input methods for specific widget
     * instances. For instance, a certain entry widget might be expected to contain
     * certain characters which would be easier to input with a certain input
     * method.
     * 
     * An input method may consume multiple key events in sequence and finally
     * output the composed result. This is called preediting, and an input method
     * may provide feedback about this process by displaying the intermediate
     * composition states as preedit text. For instance, the default GTK+ input
     * method implements the input of arbitrary Unicode code points by holding down
     * the Control and Shift keys and then typing “U” followed by the hexadecimal
     * digits of the code point.  When releasing the Control and Shift keys,
     * preediting ends and the character is inserted as text. Ctrl+Shift+u20AC for
     * example results in the € sign.
     * 
     * Additional input methods can be made available for use by GTK+ widgets as
     * loadable modules. An input method module is a small shared library which
     * implements a subclass of {@link Gtk.IMContext} or {@link Gtk.IMContextSimple} and exports
     * these four functions:
     * 
     * 
     * ```c
     * void im_module_init(GTypeModule *module);
     * ```
     * 
     * This function should register the {@link GObject.GType} of the {@link Gtk.IMContext} subclass which
     * implements the input method by means of `g_type_module_register_type()`. Note
     * that `g_type_register_static()` cannot be used as the type needs to be
     * registered dynamically.
     * 
     * 
     * ```c
     * void im_module_exit(void);
     * ```
     * 
     * Here goes any cleanup code your input method might require on module unload.
     * 
     * 
     * ```c
     * void im_module_list(const GtkIMContextInfo ***contexts, int *n_contexts)
     * {
     *   *contexts = info_list;
     *   *n_contexts = G_N_ELEMENTS (info_list);
     * }
     * ```
     * 
     * This function returns the list of input methods provided by the module. The
     * example implementation above shows a common solution and simply returns a
     * pointer to statically defined array of {@link Gtk.IMContextInfo} items for each
     * provided input method.
     * 
     * 
     * ```c
     * GtkIMContext * im_module_create(const gchar *context_id);
     * ```
     * 
     * This function should return a pointer to a newly created instance of the
     * {@link Gtk.IMContext} subclass identified by `context_id`. The context ID is the same
     * as specified in the {@link Gtk.IMContextInfo} array returned by `im_module_list()`.
     * 
     * After a new loadable input method module has been installed on the system,
     * the configuration file `gtk.immodules` needs to be
     * regenerated by [gtk-query-immodules-3.0][gtk-query-immodules-3.0],
     * in order for the new input method to become available to GTK+ applications.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    abstract class IMContext extends GObject.Object {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<IMContext>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * @default Gtk.InputHints.NONE
         */
        get input_hints(): InputHints;
        set input_hints(val: InputHints);

        /**
         * @default Gtk.InputHints.NONE
         */
        get inputHints(): InputHints;
        set inputHints(val: InputHints);

        /**
         * @default Gtk.InputPurpose.FREE_FORM
         */
        get input_purpose(): InputPurpose;
        set input_purpose(val: InputPurpose);

        /**
         * @default Gtk.InputPurpose.FREE_FORM
         */
        get inputPurpose(): InputPurpose;
        set inputPurpose(val: InputPurpose);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: IMContext.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<IMContext.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof IMContext.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, IMContext.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof IMContext.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, IMContext.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof IMContext.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<IMContext.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * Default handler of the {@link Gtk.IMContext.SignalSignatures.commit | Gtk.IMContext::commit} signal.
         * @param str 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_commit(str: string): void;

        /**
         * Asks the widget that the input context is attached to to delete
         * characters around the cursor position by emitting the
         * GtkIMContext::delete_surrounding signal. Note that `offset` and `n_chars`
         * are in characters not in bytes which differs from the usage other
         * places in {@link Gtk.IMContext}.
         * 
         * In order to use this function, you should first call
         * `gtk_im_context_get_surrounding()` to get the current context, and
         * call this function immediately afterwards to make sure that you
         * know what you are deleting. You should also account for the fact
         * that even if the signal was handled, the input context might not
         * have deleted all the characters that were requested to be deleted.
         * 
         * This function is used by an input method that wants to make
         * subsitutions in the existing text in response to new input. It is
         * not useful for applications.
         * @param offset offset from cursor position in chars;    a negative value means start before the cursor.
         * @param n_chars number of characters to delete.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_delete_surrounding(offset: number, n_chars: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Allow an input method to internally handle key press and release
         * events. If this function returns `true`, then no further processing
         * should be done for this key event.
         * @param event the key event
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_filter_keypress(event: Gdk.EventKey): boolean;

        /**
         * Notify the input method that the widget to which this
         * input context corresponds has gained focus. The input method
         * may, for example, change the displayed feedback to reflect
         * this change.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_focus_in(): void;

        /**
         * Notify the input method that the widget to which this
         * input context corresponds has lost focus. The input method
         * may, for example, change the displayed feedback or reset the contexts
         * state to reflect this change.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_focus_out(): void;

        /**
         * Retrieve the current preedit string for the input context,
         * and a list of attributes to apply to the string.
         * This string should be displayed inserted at the insertion
         * point.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_preedit_string(): [string, Pango.AttrList, number];

        /**
         * Retrieves context around the insertion point. Input methods
         * typically want context in order to constrain input text based on
         * existing text; this is important for languages such as Thai where
         * only some sequences of characters are allowed.
         * 
         * This function is implemented by emitting the
         * GtkIMContext::retrieve_surrounding signal on the input method; in
         * response to this signal, a widget should provide as much context as
         * is available, up to an entire paragraph, by calling
         * `gtk_im_context_set_surrounding()`. Note that there is no obligation
         * for a widget to respond to the ::retrieve_surrounding signal, so input
         * methods must be prepared to function without context.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_surrounding(): [boolean, string, number];

        /**
         * Default handler of the {@link Gtk.IMContext.SignalSignatures.preedit_changed | Gtk.IMContext::preedit-changed}
         *   signal.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_preedit_changed(): void;

        /**
         * Default handler of the {@link Gtk.IMContext.SignalSignatures.preedit_end | Gtk.IMContext::preedit-end} signal.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_preedit_end(): void;

        /**
         * Default handler of the {@link Gtk.IMContext.SignalSignatures.preedit_start | Gtk.IMContext::preedit-start} signal.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_preedit_start(): void;

        /**
         * Notify the input method that a change such as a change in cursor
         * position has been made. This will typically cause the input
         * method to clear the preedit state.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_reset(): void;

        /**
         * Default handler of the
         *   {@link Gtk.IMContext.SignalSignatures.retrieve_surrounding | Gtk.IMContext::retrieve-surrounding} signal.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_retrieve_surrounding(): boolean;

        /**
         * Set the client window for the input context; this is the
         * {@link Gdk.Window} in which the input appears. This window is
         * used in order to correctly position status windows, and may
         * also be used for purposes internal to the input method.
         * @param window the client window. This may be `null` to indicate           that the previous client window no longer exists.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_client_window(window: Gdk.Window | null): void;

        /**
         * Notify the input method that a change in cursor
         * position has been made. The location is relative to the client
         * window.
         * @param area new location
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_cursor_location(area: Gdk.Rectangle): void;

        /**
         * Sets surrounding context around the insertion point and preedit
         * string. This function is expected to be called in response to the
         * GtkIMContext::retrieve_surrounding signal, and will likely have no
         * effect if called at other times.
         * @param text text surrounding the insertion point, as UTF-8.        the preedit string should not be included within        `text`.
         * @param len the length of `text`, or -1 if `text` is nul-terminated
         * @param cursor_index the byte index of the insertion cursor within `text`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_surrounding(text: string, len: number, cursor_index: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the IM context should use the preedit string
         * to display feedback. If `use_preedit` is FALSE (default
         * is TRUE), then the IM context may use some other method to display
         * feedback, such as displaying it in a child of the root window.
         * @param use_preedit whether the IM context should use the preedit string.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_use_preedit(use_preedit: boolean): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Asks the widget that the input context is attached to to delete
         * characters around the cursor position by emitting the
         * GtkIMContext::delete_surrounding signal. Note that `offset` and `n_chars`
         * are in characters not in bytes which differs from the usage other
         * places in {@link Gtk.IMContext}.
         * 
         * In order to use this function, you should first call
         * `gtk_im_context_get_surrounding()` to get the current context, and
         * call this function immediately afterwards to make sure that you
         * know what you are deleting. You should also account for the fact
         * that even if the signal was handled, the input context might not
         * have deleted all the characters that were requested to be deleted.
         * 
         * This function is used by an input method that wants to make
         * subsitutions in the existing text in response to new input. It is
         * not useful for applications.
         * @param offset offset from cursor position in chars;    a negative value means start before the cursor.
         * @param n_chars number of characters to delete.
         * @returns `true` if the signal was handled.
         */
        delete_surrounding(offset: number, n_chars: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Allow an input method to internally handle key press and release
         * events. If this function returns `true`, then no further processing
         * should be done for this key event.
         * @param event the key event
         * @returns `true` if the input method handled the key event.
         */
        filter_keypress(event: Gdk.EventKey): boolean;

        /**
         * Notify the input method that the widget to which this
         * input context corresponds has gained focus. The input method
         * may, for example, change the displayed feedback to reflect
         * this change.
         */
        focus_in(): void;

        /**
         * Notify the input method that the widget to which this
         * input context corresponds has lost focus. The input method
         * may, for example, change the displayed feedback or reset the contexts
         * state to reflect this change.
         */
        focus_out(): void;

        /**
         * Retrieve the current preedit string for the input context,
         * and a list of attributes to apply to the string.
         * This string should be displayed inserted at the insertion
         * point.
         */
        get_preedit_string(): [string, Pango.AttrList, number];

        /**
         * Retrieves context around the insertion point. Input methods
         * typically want context in order to constrain input text based on
         * existing text; this is important for languages such as Thai where
         * only some sequences of characters are allowed.
         * 
         * This function is implemented by emitting the
         * GtkIMContext::retrieve_surrounding signal on the input method; in
         * response to this signal, a widget should provide as much context as
         * is available, up to an entire paragraph, by calling
         * `gtk_im_context_set_surrounding()`. Note that there is no obligation
         * for a widget to respond to the ::retrieve_surrounding signal, so input
         * methods must be prepared to function without context.
         * @returns `true` if surrounding text was provided; in this case    you must free the result stored in *text.
         */
        get_surrounding(): [boolean, string, number];

        /**
         * Notify the input method that a change such as a change in cursor
         * position has been made. This will typically cause the input
         * method to clear the preedit state.
         */
        reset(): void;

        /**
         * Set the client window for the input context; this is the
         * {@link Gdk.Window} in which the input appears. This window is
         * used in order to correctly position status windows, and may
         * also be used for purposes internal to the input method.
         * @param window the client window. This may be `null` to indicate           that the previous client window no longer exists.
         */
        set_client_window(window: Gdk.Window | null): void;

        /**
         * Notify the input method that a change in cursor
         * position has been made. The location is relative to the client
         * window.
         * @param area new location
         */
        set_cursor_location(area: Gdk.Rectangle): void;

        /**
         * Sets surrounding context around the insertion point and preedit
         * string. This function is expected to be called in response to the
         * GtkIMContext::retrieve_surrounding signal, and will likely have no
         * effect if called at other times.
         * @param text text surrounding the insertion point, as UTF-8.        the preedit string should not be included within        `text`.
         * @param len the length of `text`, or -1 if `text` is nul-terminated
         * @param cursor_index the byte index of the insertion cursor within `text`.
         */
        set_surrounding(text: string, len: number, cursor_index: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the IM context should use the preedit string
         * to display feedback. If `use_preedit` is FALSE (default
         * is TRUE), then the IM context may use some other method to display
         * feedback, such as displaying it in a child of the root window.
         * @param use_preedit whether the IM context should use the preedit string.
         */
        set_use_preedit(use_preedit: boolean): void;
    }


    namespace IMContextSimple {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends IMContext.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::input-hints": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::input-purpose": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends IMContext.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * GtkIMContextSimple is a simple input method context supporting table-based
     * input methods. It has a built-in table of compose sequences that is derived
     * from the X11 Compose files.
     * 
     * GtkIMContextSimple reads additional compose sequences from the first of the
     * following files that is found: ~/.config/gtk-3.0/Compose, ~/.XCompose,
     * /usr/share/X11/locale/$locale/Compose (for locales that have a nontrivial
     * Compose file). The syntax of these files is described in the Compose(5)
     * manual page.
     * 
     * ## Unicode characters
     * 
     * GtkIMContextSimple also supports numeric entry of Unicode characters
     * by typing Ctrl-Shift-u, followed by a hexadecimal Unicode codepoint.
     * For example, Ctrl-Shift-u 1 2 3 Enter yields U+0123 LATIN SMALL LETTER
     * G WITH CEDILLA, i.e. ģ.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class IMContextSimple extends IMContext {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<IMContextSimple>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: IMContextSimple.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        object: IMContext;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<IMContextSimple.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): IMContextSimple;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof IMContextSimple.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, IMContextSimple.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof IMContextSimple.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, IMContextSimple.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof IMContextSimple.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<IMContextSimple.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Adds an additional table from the X11 compose file.
         * @param compose_file The path of compose file
         */
        add_compose_file(compose_file: string): void;
    }


    namespace IMMulticontext {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends IMContext.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::input-hints": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::input-purpose": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends IMContext.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class IMMulticontext extends IMContext {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<IMMulticontext>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: IMMulticontext.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        object: IMContext;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<IMMulticontext.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): IMMulticontext;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof IMMulticontext.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, IMMulticontext.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof IMMulticontext.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, IMMulticontext.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof IMMulticontext.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<IMMulticontext.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Add menuitems for various available input methods to a menu;
         * the menuitems, when selected, will switch the input method
         * for the context and the global default input method.
         * @param menushell a {@link Gtk.MenuShell}
         */
        append_menuitems(menushell: MenuShell): void;

        /**
         * Gets the id of the currently active slave of the `context`.
         * @returns the id of the currently active slave
         */
        get_context_id(): string;

        /**
         * Sets the context id for `context`.
         * 
         * This causes the currently active slave of `context` to be
         * replaced by the slave corresponding to the new context id.
         * @param context_id the id to use
         */
        set_context_id(context_id: string): void;
    }


    namespace IconFactory {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends GObject.Object.SignalSignatures {}

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.Object.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * An icon factory manages a collection of {@link Gtk.IconSet}; a {@link Gtk.IconSet} manages a
     * set of variants of a particular icon (i.e. a {@link Gtk.IconSet} contains variants for
     * different sizes and widget states). Icons in an icon factory are named by a
     * stock ID, which is a simple string identifying the icon. Each {@link Gtk.Style} has a
     * list of {@link Gtk.IconFactory} derived from the current theme; those icon factories
     * are consulted first when searching for an icon. If the theme doesn’t set a
     * particular icon, GTK+ looks for the icon in a list of default icon factories,
     * maintained by `gtk_icon_factory_add_default()` and
     * `gtk_icon_factory_remove_default()`. Applications with icons should add a default
     * icon factory with their icons, which will allow themes to override the icons
     * for the application.
     * 
     * To display an icon, always use `gtk_style_lookup_icon_set()` on the widget that
     * will display the icon, or the convenience function
     * `gtk_widget_render_icon()`. These functions take the theme into account when
     * looking up the icon to use for a given stock ID.
     * 
     * # GtkIconFactory as GtkBuildable # {{@link Gtk.IconFactory}-BUILDER-UI}
     * 
     * GtkIconFactory supports a custom `<sources>` element, which can contain
     * multiple `<source>` elements. The following attributes are allowed:
     * 
     * - stock-id
     * 
     *     The stock id of the source, a string. This attribute is
     *     mandatory
     * 
     * - filename
     * 
     *     The filename of the source, a string.  This attribute is
     *     optional
     * 
     * - icon-name
     * 
     *     The icon name for the source, a string.  This attribute is
     *     optional.
     * 
     * - size
     * 
     *     Size of the icon, a {@link Gtk.IconSize} enum value.  This attribute is
     *     optional.
     * 
     * - direction
     * 
     *     Direction of the source, a {@link Gtk.TextDirection} enum value.  This
     *     attribute is optional.
     * 
     * - state
     * 
     *     State of the source, a {@link Gtk.StateType} enum value.  This
     *     attribute is optional.
     * 
     * 
     * ## A {@link Gtk.IconFactory} UI definition fragment. ##
     * 
     * 
     * ```
     * <object class="GtkIconFactory" id="iconfactory1">
     *   <sources>
     *     <source stock-id="apple-red" filename="apple-red.png"/>
     *   </sources>
     * </object>
     * <object class="GtkWindow" id="window1">
     *   <child>
     *     <object class="GtkButton" id="apple_button">
     *       <property name="label">apple-red</property>
     *       <property name="use-stock">True</property>
     *     </object>
     *   </child>
     * </object>
     * ```
     * 
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class IconFactory extends GObject.Object implements Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<IconFactory>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: IconFactory.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<IconFactory.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): IconFactory;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof IconFactory.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, IconFactory.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof IconFactory.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, IconFactory.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof IconFactory.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<IconFactory.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Static methods
        /**
         * Looks for an icon in the list of default icon factories.  For
         * display to the user, you should use `gtk_style_lookup_icon_set()` on
         * the {@link Gtk.Style} for the widget that will display the icon, instead of
         * using this function directly, so that themes are taken into
         * account.
         * @param stock_id an icon name
         */
        static lookup_default(stock_id: string): IconSet;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Adds the given `icon_set` to the icon factory, under the name
         * `stock_id`.  `stock_id` should be namespaced for your application,
         * e.g. “myapp-whatever-icon”.  Normally applications create a
         * {@link Gtk.IconFactory}, then add it to the list of default factories with
         * `gtk_icon_factory_add_default()`. Then they pass the `stock_id` to
         * widgets such as {@link Gtk.Image} to display the icon. Themes can provide
         * an icon with the same name (such as "myapp-whatever-icon") to
         * override your application’s default icons. If an icon already
         * existed in `factory` for `stock_id`, it is unreferenced and replaced
         * with the new `icon_set`.
         * @param stock_id icon name
         * @param icon_set icon set
         */
        add(stock_id: string, icon_set: IconSet): void;

        /**
         * Adds an icon factory to the list of icon factories searched by
         * `gtk_style_lookup_icon_set()`. This means that, for example,
         * `gtk_image_new_from_stock()` will be able to find icons in `factory`.
         * There will normally be an icon factory added for each library or
         * application that comes with icons. The default icon factories
         * can be overridden by themes.
         */
        add_default(): void;

        /**
         * Looks up `stock_id` in the icon factory, returning an icon set
         * if found, otherwise `null`. For display to the user, you should
         * use `gtk_style_lookup_icon_set()` on the {@link Gtk.Style} for the
         * widget that will display the icon, instead of using this
         * function directly, so that themes are taken into account.
         * @param stock_id an icon name
         * @returns icon set of `stock_id`.
         */
        lookup(stock_id: string): IconSet;

        /**
         * Removes an icon factory from the list of default icon
         * factories. Not normally used; you might use it for a library that
         * can be unloaded or shut down.
         */
        remove_default(): void;

        /**
         * Adds a child to `buildable`. `type` is an optional string
         * describing how the child should be added.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child to add
         * @param type kind of child or `null`
         */
        add_child(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object, type: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Constructs a child of `buildable` with the name `name`.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} calls this function if a “constructor” has been
         * specified in the UI definition.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param name name of child to construct
         * @returns the constructed child
         */
        construct_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, name: string): T;

        /**
         * This is similar to `gtk_buildable_parser_finished()` but is
         * called once for each custom tag handled by the `buildable`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname the name of the tag
         * @param data user data created in custom_tag_start
         */
        custom_finished(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
         * the buildable.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @param data user data that will be passed in to parser functions
         */
        custom_tag_end(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called for each unknown element under `<child>`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @returns `true` if a object has a custom implementation, `false`          if it doesn't.
         */
        custom_tag_start(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string): [boolean, GLib.MarkupParser, null];

        /**
         * Get the internal child called `childname` of the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param childname name of child
         * @returns the internal child of the buildable object
         */
        get_internal_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, childname: string): T;

        /**
         * Gets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} sets the name based on the
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI]
         * used to construct the `buildable`.
         * @returns the name set with `gtk_buildable_set_name()`
         */
        get_name(): string;

        /**
         * Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI].
         * Note that this will be called once for each time
         * `gtk_builder_add_from_file()` or `gtk_builder_add_from_string()`
         * is called on a builder.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         */
        parser_finished(builder: Builder): void;

        /**
         * Sets the property name `name` to `value` on the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param name name of property
         * @param value value of property
         */
        set_buildable_property(builder: Builder, name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;

        /**
         * Sets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * @param name name to set
         */
        set_name(name: string): void;

        /**
         * Adds a child to `buildable`. `type` is an optional string
         * describing how the child should be added.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child to add
         * @param type kind of child or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add_child(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object, type: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Constructs a child of `buildable` with the name `name`.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} calls this function if a “constructor” has been
         * specified in the UI definition.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param name name of child to construct
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_construct_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, name: string): T;

        /**
         * This is similar to `gtk_buildable_parser_finished()` but is
         * called once for each custom tag handled by the `buildable`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname the name of the tag
         * @param data user data created in custom_tag_start
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_finished(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
         * the buildable.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @param data user data that will be passed in to parser functions
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_tag_end(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called for each unknown element under `<child>`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_tag_start(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string): [boolean, GLib.MarkupParser, never];

        /**
         * Get the internal child called `childname` of the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param childname name of child
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_internal_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, childname: string): T;

        /**
         * Gets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} sets the name based on the
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI]
         * used to construct the `buildable`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_name(): string;

        /**
         * Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI].
         * Note that this will be called once for each time
         * `gtk_builder_add_from_file()` or `gtk_builder_add_from_string()`
         * is called on a builder.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_parser_finished(builder: Builder): void;

        /**
         * Sets the property name `name` to `value` on the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param name name of property
         * @param value value of property
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_buildable_property(builder: Builder, name: string, value: unknown): void;

        /**
         * Sets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * @param name name to set
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_name(name: string): void;
    }


    namespace IconInfo {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends GObject.Object.SignalSignatures {}

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.Object.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * Contains information found when looking up an icon in
     * an icon theme.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class IconInfo extends GObject.Object {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<IconInfo>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: IconInfo.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<IconInfo.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static new_for_pixbuf(icon_theme: IconTheme, pixbuf: GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf): IconInfo;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof IconInfo.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, IconInfo.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof IconInfo.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, IconInfo.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof IconInfo.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<IconInfo.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * This function is deprecated and always returns `false`.
         * @returns `false`
         */
        get_attach_points(): [boolean, Gdk.Point[] | null];

        /**
         * Gets the base scale for the icon. The base scale is a scale
         * for the icon that was specified by the icon theme creator.
         * For instance an icon drawn for a high-dpi screen with window
         * scale 2 for a base size of 32 will be 64 pixels tall and have
         * a base scale of 2.
         * @returns the base scale
         */
        get_base_scale(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the base size for the icon. The base size
         * is a size for the icon that was specified by
         * the icon theme creator. This may be different
         * than the actual size of image; an example of
         * this is small emblem icons that can be attached
         * to a larger icon. These icons will be given
         * the same base size as the larger icons to which
         * they are attached.
         * 
         * Note that for scaled icons the base size does
         * not include the base scale.
         * @returns the base size, or 0, if no base     size is known for the icon.
         */
        get_base_size(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the built-in image for this icon, if any. To allow GTK+ to use
         * built in icon images, you must pass the {@link Gtk.IconLookupFlags.USE_BUILTIN}
         * to `gtk_icon_theme_lookup_icon()`.
         * @returns the built-in image pixbuf, or `null`.     No extra reference is added to the returned pixbuf, so if     you want to keep it around, you must use `g_object_ref()`.     The returned image must not be modified.
         */
        get_builtin_pixbuf(): GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf | null;

        /**
         * This function is deprecated and always returns `null`.
         * @returns `null`
         */
        get_display_name(): string;

        /**
         * This function is deprecated and always returns `false`.
         * @returns `false`
         */
        get_embedded_rect(): [boolean, Gdk.Rectangle];

        /**
         * Gets the filename for the icon. If the {@link Gtk.IconLookupFlags.USE_BUILTIN}
         * flag was passed to `gtk_icon_theme_lookup_icon()`, there may be no
         * filename if a builtin icon is returned; in this case, you should
         * use `gtk_icon_info_get_builtin_pixbuf()`.
         * @returns the filename for the icon, or `null`     if `gtk_icon_info_get_builtin_pixbuf()` should be used instead.     The return value is owned by GTK+ and should not be modified     or freed.
         */
        get_filename(): string | null;

        /**
         * Checks if the icon is symbolic or not. This currently uses only
         * the file name and not the file contents for determining this.
         * This behaviour may change in the future.
         * @returns `true` if the icon is symbolic, `false` otherwise
         */
        is_symbolic(): boolean;

        /**
         * Renders an icon previously looked up in an icon theme using
         * `gtk_icon_theme_lookup_icon()`; the size will be based on the size
         * passed to `gtk_icon_theme_lookup_icon()`. Note that the resulting
         * pixbuf may not be exactly this size; an icon theme may have icons
         * that differ slightly from their nominal sizes, and in addition GTK+
         * will avoid scaling icons that it considers sufficiently close to the
         * requested size or for which the source image would have to be scaled
         * up too far. (This maintains sharpness.). This behaviour can be changed
         * by passing the {@link Gtk.IconLookupFlags.FORCE_SIZE} flag when obtaining
         * the {@link Gtk.IconInfo}. If this flag has been specified, the pixbuf
         * returned by this function will be scaled to the exact size.
         * @returns the rendered icon; this may be a newly     created icon or a new reference to an internal icon, so you must     not modify the icon. Use `g_object_unref()` to release your reference     to the icon.
         */
        load_icon(): GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf;

        /**
         * Asynchronously load, render and scale an icon previously looked up
         * from the icon theme using `gtk_icon_theme_lookup_icon()`.
         * 
         * For more details, see `gtk_icon_info_load_icon()` which is the synchronous
         * version of this call.
         * @param cancellable optional {@link Gio.Cancellable} object, `null` to ignore
         */
        load_icon_async(cancellable: Gio.Cancellable | null): globalThis.Promise<GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf>;

        /**
         * Asynchronously load, render and scale an icon previously looked up
         * from the icon theme using `gtk_icon_theme_lookup_icon()`.
         * 
         * For more details, see `gtk_icon_info_load_icon()` which is the synchronous
         * version of this call.
         * @param cancellable optional {@link Gio.Cancellable} object, `null` to ignore
         * @param callback a {@link Gio.AsyncReadyCallback} to call when the     request is satisfied
         */
        load_icon_async(cancellable: Gio.Cancellable | null, callback: Gio.AsyncReadyCallback<this> | null): void;

        /**
         * Asynchronously load, render and scale an icon previously looked up
         * from the icon theme using `gtk_icon_theme_lookup_icon()`.
         * 
         * For more details, see `gtk_icon_info_load_icon()` which is the synchronous
         * version of this call.
         * @param cancellable optional {@link Gio.Cancellable} object, `null` to ignore
         * @param callback a {@link Gio.AsyncReadyCallback} to call when the     request is satisfied
         */
        load_icon_async(cancellable: Gio.Cancellable | null, callback?: Gio.AsyncReadyCallback<this> | null): globalThis.Promise<GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf> | void;

        /**
         * Finishes an async icon load, see `gtk_icon_info_load_icon_async()`.
         * @param res a {@link Gio.AsyncResult}
         * @returns the rendered icon; this may be a newly     created icon or a new reference to an internal icon, so you must     not modify the icon. Use `g_object_unref()` to release your reference     to the icon.
         */
        load_icon_finish(res: Gio.AsyncResult): GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf;

        /**
         * Renders an icon previously looked up in an icon theme using
         * `gtk_icon_theme_lookup_icon()`; the size will be based on the size
         * passed to `gtk_icon_theme_lookup_icon()`. Note that the resulting
         * surface may not be exactly this size; an icon theme may have icons
         * that differ slightly from their nominal sizes, and in addition GTK+
         * will avoid scaling icons that it considers sufficiently close to the
         * requested size or for which the source image would have to be scaled
         * up too far. (This maintains sharpness.). This behaviour can be changed
         * by passing the {@link Gtk.IconLookupFlags.FORCE_SIZE} flag when obtaining
         * the {@link Gtk.IconInfo}. If this flag has been specified, the pixbuf
         * returned by this function will be scaled to the exact size.
         * @param for_window {@link Gdk.Window} to optimize drawing for, or `null`
         * @returns the rendered icon; this may be a newly     created icon or a new reference to an internal icon, so you must     not modify the icon. Use `cairo_surface_destroy()` to release your     reference to the icon.
         */
        load_surface(for_window: Gdk.Window | null): cairo.Surface;

        /**
         * Loads an icon, modifying it to match the system colours for the foreground,
         * success, warning and error colors provided. If the icon is not a symbolic
         * one, the function will return the result from `gtk_icon_info_load_icon()`.
         * 
         * This allows loading symbolic icons that will match the system theme.
         * 
         * Unless you are implementing a widget, you will want to use
         * `g_themed_icon_new_with_default_fallbacks()` to load the icon.
         * 
         * As implementation details, the icon loaded needs to be of SVG type,
         * contain the “symbolic” term as the last component of the icon name,
         * and use the “fg”, “success”, “warning” and “error” CSS styles in the
         * SVG file itself.
         * 
         * See the [Symbolic Icons Specification](http://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/SymbolicIcons)
         * for more information about symbolic icons.
         * @param fg a {@link Gdk.RGBA} representing the foreground color of the icon
         * @param success_color a {@link Gdk.RGBA} representing the warning color     of the icon or `null` to use the default color
         * @param warning_color a {@link Gdk.RGBA} representing the warning color     of the icon or `null` to use the default color
         * @param error_color a {@link Gdk.RGBA} representing the error color     of the icon or `null` to use the default color (allow-none)
         * @returns a {@link GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf} representing the loaded icon
         */
        load_symbolic(fg: Gdk.RGBA, success_color: Gdk.RGBA | null, warning_color: Gdk.RGBA | null, error_color: Gdk.RGBA | null): [GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf, boolean];

        /**
         * Asynchronously load, render and scale a symbolic icon previously looked up
         * from the icon theme using `gtk_icon_theme_lookup_icon()`.
         * 
         * For more details, see `gtk_icon_info_load_symbolic()` which is the synchronous
         * version of this call.
         * @param fg a {@link Gdk.RGBA} representing the foreground color of the icon
         * @param success_color a {@link Gdk.RGBA} representing the warning color     of the icon or `null` to use the default color
         * @param warning_color a {@link Gdk.RGBA} representing the warning color     of the icon or `null` to use the default color
         * @param error_color a {@link Gdk.RGBA} representing the error color     of the icon or `null` to use the default color (allow-none)
         * @param cancellable optional {@link Gio.Cancellable} object,     `null` to ignore
         */
        load_symbolic_async(fg: Gdk.RGBA, success_color: Gdk.RGBA | null, warning_color: Gdk.RGBA | null, error_color: Gdk.RGBA | null, cancellable: Gio.Cancellable | null): globalThis.Promise<[GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf, boolean]>;

        /**
         * Asynchronously load, render and scale a symbolic icon previously looked up
         * from the icon theme using `gtk_icon_theme_lookup_icon()`.
         * 
         * For more details, see `gtk_icon_info_load_symbolic()` which is the synchronous
         * version of this call.
         * @param fg a {@link Gdk.RGBA} representing the foreground color of the icon
         * @param success_color a {@link Gdk.RGBA} representing the warning color     of the icon or `null` to use the default color
         * @param warning_color a {@link Gdk.RGBA} representing the warning color     of the icon or `null` to use the default color
         * @param error_color a {@link Gdk.RGBA} representing the error color     of the icon or `null` to use the default color (allow-none)
         * @param cancellable optional {@link Gio.Cancellable} object,     `null` to ignore
         * @param callback a {@link Gio.AsyncReadyCallback} to call when the     request is satisfied
         */
        load_symbolic_async(fg: Gdk.RGBA, success_color: Gdk.RGBA | null, warning_color: Gdk.RGBA | null, error_color: Gdk.RGBA | null, cancellable: Gio.Cancellable | null, callback: Gio.AsyncReadyCallback<this> | null): void;

        /**
         * Asynchronously load, render and scale a symbolic icon previously looked up
         * from the icon theme using `gtk_icon_theme_lookup_icon()`.
         * 
         * For more details, see `gtk_icon_info_load_symbolic()` which is the synchronous
         * version of this call.
         * @param fg a {@link Gdk.RGBA} representing the foreground color of the icon
         * @param success_color a {@link Gdk.RGBA} representing the warning color     of the icon or `null` to use the default color
         * @param warning_color a {@link Gdk.RGBA} representing the warning color     of the icon or `null` to use the default color
         * @param error_color a {@link Gdk.RGBA} representing the error color     of the icon or `null` to use the default color (allow-none)
         * @param cancellable optional {@link Gio.Cancellable} object,     `null` to ignore
         * @param callback a {@link Gio.AsyncReadyCallback} to call when the     request is satisfied
         */
        load_symbolic_async(fg: Gdk.RGBA, success_color: Gdk.RGBA | null, warning_color: Gdk.RGBA | null, error_color: Gdk.RGBA | null, cancellable: Gio.Cancellable | null, callback?: Gio.AsyncReadyCallback<this> | null): globalThis.Promise<[GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf, boolean]> | void;

        /**
         * Finishes an async icon load, see `gtk_icon_info_load_symbolic_async()`.
         * @param res a {@link Gio.AsyncResult}
         * @returns the rendered icon; this may be a newly     created icon or a new reference to an internal icon, so you must     not modify the icon. Use `g_object_unref()` to release your reference     to the icon.
         */
        load_symbolic_finish(res: Gio.AsyncResult): [GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf, boolean];

        /**
         * Loads an icon, modifying it to match the system colors for the foreground,
         * success, warning and error colors provided. If the icon is not a symbolic
         * one, the function will return the result from `gtk_icon_info_load_icon()`.
         * This function uses the regular foreground color and the symbolic colors
         * with the names “success_color”, “warning_color” and “error_color” from
         * the context.
         * 
         * This allows loading symbolic icons that will match the system theme.
         * 
         * See `gtk_icon_info_load_symbolic()` for more details.
         * @param context a {@link Gtk.StyleContext}
         * @returns a {@link GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf} representing the loaded icon
         */
        load_symbolic_for_context(context: StyleContext): [GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf, boolean];

        /**
         * Asynchronously load, render and scale a symbolic icon previously
         * looked up from the icon theme using `gtk_icon_theme_lookup_icon()`.
         * 
         * For more details, see `gtk_icon_info_load_symbolic_for_context()`
         * which is the synchronous version of this call.
         * @param context a {@link Gtk.StyleContext}
         * @param cancellable optional {@link Gio.Cancellable} object,     `null` to ignore
         */
        load_symbolic_for_context_async(context: StyleContext, cancellable: Gio.Cancellable | null): globalThis.Promise<[GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf, boolean]>;

        /**
         * Asynchronously load, render and scale a symbolic icon previously
         * looked up from the icon theme using `gtk_icon_theme_lookup_icon()`.
         * 
         * For more details, see `gtk_icon_info_load_symbolic_for_context()`
         * which is the synchronous version of this call.
         * @param context a {@link Gtk.StyleContext}
         * @param cancellable optional {@link Gio.Cancellable} object,     `null` to ignore
         * @param callback a {@link Gio.AsyncReadyCallback} to call when the     request is satisfied
         */
        load_symbolic_for_context_async(context: StyleContext, cancellable: Gio.Cancellable | null, callback: Gio.AsyncReadyCallback<this> | null): void;

        /**
         * Asynchronously load, render and scale a symbolic icon previously
         * looked up from the icon theme using `gtk_icon_theme_lookup_icon()`.
         * 
         * For more details, see `gtk_icon_info_load_symbolic_for_context()`
         * which is the synchronous version of this call.
         * @param context a {@link Gtk.StyleContext}
         * @param cancellable optional {@link Gio.Cancellable} object,     `null` to ignore
         * @param callback a {@link Gio.AsyncReadyCallback} to call when the     request is satisfied
         */
        load_symbolic_for_context_async(context: StyleContext, cancellable: Gio.Cancellable | null, callback?: Gio.AsyncReadyCallback<this> | null): globalThis.Promise<[GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf, boolean]> | void;

        /**
         * Finishes an async icon load, see `gtk_icon_info_load_symbolic_for_context_async()`.
         * @param res a {@link Gio.AsyncResult}
         * @returns the rendered icon; this may be a newly     created icon or a new reference to an internal icon, so you must     not modify the icon. Use `g_object_unref()` to release your reference     to the icon.
         */
        load_symbolic_for_context_finish(res: Gio.AsyncResult): [GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf, boolean];

        /**
         * Loads an icon, modifying it to match the system colours for the foreground,
         * success, warning and error colors provided. If the icon is not a symbolic
         * one, the function will return the result from `gtk_icon_info_load_icon()`.
         * 
         * This allows loading symbolic icons that will match the system theme.
         * 
         * See `gtk_icon_info_load_symbolic()` for more details.
         * @param style a {@link Gtk.Style} to take the colors from
         * @param state the widget state to use for colors
         * @returns a {@link GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf} representing the loaded icon
         */
        load_symbolic_for_style(style: Style, state: StateType): [GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf, boolean];

        /**
         * Sets whether the coordinates returned by `gtk_icon_info_get_embedded_rect()`
         * and `gtk_icon_info_get_attach_points()` should be returned in their
         * original form as specified in the icon theme, instead of scaled
         * appropriately for the pixbuf returned by `gtk_icon_info_load_icon()`.
         * 
         * Raw coordinates are somewhat strange; they are specified to be with
         * respect to the unscaled pixmap for PNG and XPM icons, but for SVG
         * icons, they are in a 1000x1000 coordinate space that is scaled
         * to the final size of the icon.  You can determine if the icon is an SVG
         * icon by using `gtk_icon_info_get_filename()`, and seeing if it is non-`null`
         * and ends in “.svg”.
         * 
         * This function is provided primarily to allow compatibility wrappers
         * for older API's, and is not expected to be useful for applications.
         * @param raw_coordinates whether the coordinates of embedded rectangles     and attached points should be returned in their original     (unscaled) form.
         */
        set_raw_coordinates(raw_coordinates: boolean): void;
    }


    namespace IconTheme {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends GObject.Object.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * Emitted when the current icon theme is switched or GTK+ detects
             * that a change has occurred in the contents of the current
             * icon theme.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            changed: () => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.Object.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * {@link Gtk.IconTheme} provides a facility for looking up icons by name
     * and size. The main reason for using a name rather than simply
     * providing a filename is to allow different icons to be used
     * depending on what “icon theme” is selected
     * by the user. The operation of icon themes on Linux and Unix
     * follows the [Icon Theme Specification](http://www.freedesktop.org/Standards/icon-theme-spec)
     * There is a fallback icon theme, named `hicolor`, where applications
     * should install their icons, but additional icon themes can be installed
     * as operating system vendors and users choose.
     * 
     * Named icons are similar to the deprecated [Stock Items][gtkstock],
     * and the distinction between the two may be a bit confusing.
     * A few things to keep in mind:
     * 
     * - Stock images usually are used in conjunction with
     *   [Stock Items][gtkstock], such as `GTK_STOCK_OK` or
     *   `GTK_STOCK_OPEN`. Named icons are easier to set up and therefore
     *   are more useful for new icons that an application wants to
     *   add, such as application icons or window icons.
     * 
     * - Stock images can only be loaded at the symbolic sizes defined
     *   by the {@link Gtk.IconSize} enumeration, or by custom sizes defined
     *   by `gtk_icon_size_register()`, while named icons are more flexible
     *   and any pixel size can be specified.
     * 
     * - Because stock images are closely tied to stock items, and thus
     *   to actions in the user interface, stock images may come in
     *   multiple variants for different widget states or writing
     *   directions.
     * 
     * A good rule of thumb is that if there is a stock image for what
     * you want to use, use it, otherwise use a named icon. It turns
     * out that internally stock images are generally defined in
     * terms of one or more named icons. (An example of the
     * more than one case is icons that depend on writing direction;
     * `GTK_STOCK_GO_FORWARD` uses the two themed icons
     * “gtk-stock-go-forward-ltr” and “gtk-stock-go-forward-rtl”.)
     * 
     * In many cases, named themes are used indirectly, via {@link Gtk.Image}
     * or stock items, rather than directly, but looking up icons
     * directly is also simple. The {@link Gtk.IconTheme} object acts
     * as a database of all the icons in the current theme. You
     * can create new {@link Gtk.IconTheme} objects, but it’s much more
     * efficient to use the standard icon theme for the {@link Gdk.Screen}
     * so that the icon information is shared with other people
     * looking up icons.
     * 
     * ```c
     * GError *error = NULL;
     * GtkIconTheme *icon_theme;
     * GdkPixbuf *pixbuf;
     * 
     * icon_theme = gtk_icon_theme_get_default ();
     * pixbuf = gtk_icon_theme_load_icon (icon_theme,
     *                                    "my-icon-name", // icon name
     *                                    48, // icon size
     *                                    0,  // flags
     *                                    &error);
     * if (!pixbuf)
     *   {
     *     g_warning ("Couldn’t load icon: %s", error->message);
     *     g_error_free (error);
     *   }
     * else
     *   {
     *     // Use the pixbuf
     *     g_object_unref (pixbuf);
     *   }
     * ```
     * 
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class IconTheme extends GObject.Object {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<IconTheme>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: IconTheme.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<IconTheme.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): IconTheme;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof IconTheme.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, IconTheme.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof IconTheme.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, IconTheme.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof IconTheme.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<IconTheme.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Static methods
        /**
         * Registers a built-in icon for icon theme lookups. The idea
         * of built-in icons is to allow an application or library
         * that uses themed icons to function requiring files to
         * be present in the file system. For instance, the default
         * images for all of GTK+’s stock icons are registered
         * as built-icons.
         * 
         * In general, if you use `gtk_icon_theme_add_builtin_icon()`
         * you should also install the icon in the icon theme, so
         * that the icon is generally available.
         * 
         * This function will generally be used with pixbufs loaded
         * via `gdk_pixbuf_new_from_inline()`.
         * @param icon_name the name of the icon to register
         * @param size the size in pixels at which to register the icon (different     images can be registered for the same icon name at different sizes.)
         * @param pixbuf {@link GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf} that contains the image to use for `icon_name`
         */
        static add_builtin_icon(icon_name: string, size: number, pixbuf: GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf): void;

        /**
         * Gets the icon theme for the default screen. See
         * `gtk_icon_theme_get_for_screen()`.
         */
        static get_default(): IconTheme;

        /**
         * Gets the icon theme object associated with `screen`; if this
         * function has not previously been called for the given
         * screen, a new icon theme object will be created and
         * associated with the screen. Icon theme objects are
         * fairly expensive to create, so using this function
         * is usually a better choice than calling than `gtk_icon_theme_new()`
         * and setting the screen yourself; by using this function
         * a single icon theme object will be shared between users.
         * @param screen a {@link Gdk.Screen}
         */
        static get_for_screen(screen: Gdk.Screen): IconTheme;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * Signal emitted when the current icon theme is switched or
         *    GTK+ detects that a change has occurred in the contents of the
         *    current icon theme.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_changed(): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Adds a resource path that will be looked at when looking
         * for icons, similar to search paths.
         * 
         * This function should be used to make application-specific icons
         * available as part of the icon theme.
         * 
         * The resources are considered as part of the hicolor icon theme
         * and must be located in subdirectories that are defined in the
         * hicolor icon theme, such as ``path`/16x16/actions/run.png`.
         * Icons that are directly placed in the resource path instead
         * of a subdirectory are also considered as ultimate fallback.
         * @param path a resource path
         */
        add_resource_path(path: string): void;

        /**
         * Appends a directory to the search path.
         * See `gtk_icon_theme_set_search_path()`.
         * @param path directory name to append to the icon path
         */
        append_search_path(path: string): void;

        /**
         * Looks up a named icon and returns a {@link Gtk.IconInfo} containing
         * information such as the filename of the icon. The icon
         * can then be rendered into a pixbuf using
         * `gtk_icon_info_load_icon()`. (gtk_icon_theme_load_icon()
         * combines these two steps if all you need is the pixbuf.)
         * 
         * If `icon_names` contains more than one name, this function
         * tries them all in the given order before falling back to
         * inherited icon themes.
         * @param icon_names `null`-terminated array of     icon names to lookup
         * @param size desired icon size
         * @param flags flags modifying the behavior of the icon lookup
         * @returns a {@link Gtk.IconInfo} object containing information about the icon, or `null` if the icon wasn’t found.
         */
        choose_icon(icon_names: string[], size: number, flags: IconLookupFlags): IconInfo | null;

        /**
         * Looks up a named icon for a particular window scale and returns
         * a {@link Gtk.IconInfo} containing information such as the filename of the
         * icon. The icon can then be rendered into a pixbuf using
         * `gtk_icon_info_load_icon()`. (gtk_icon_theme_load_icon()
         * combines these two steps if all you need is the pixbuf.)
         * 
         * If `icon_names` contains more than one name, this function
         * tries them all in the given order before falling back to
         * inherited icon themes.
         * @param icon_names `null`-terminated     array of icon names to lookup
         * @param size desired icon size
         * @param scale desired scale
         * @param flags flags modifying the behavior of the icon lookup
         * @returns a {@link Gtk.IconInfo} object     containing information about the icon, or `null` if the     icon wasn’t found.
         */
        choose_icon_for_scale(icon_names: string[], size: number, scale: number, flags: IconLookupFlags): IconInfo | null;

        /**
         * Gets the name of an icon that is representative of the
         * current theme (for instance, to use when presenting
         * a list of themes to the user.)
         * @returns the name of an example icon or `null`.     Free with `g_free()`.
         */
        get_example_icon_name(): string | null;

        /**
         * Returns an array of integers describing the sizes at which
         * the icon is available without scaling. A size of -1 means
         * that the icon is available in a scalable format. The array
         * is zero-terminated.
         * @param icon_name the name of an icon
         * @returns An newly allocated array describing the sizes at which the icon is available. The array should be freed with `g_free()` when it is no longer needed.
         */
        get_icon_sizes(icon_name: string): number[];

        /**
         * Gets the current search path. See `gtk_icon_theme_set_search_path()`.
         */
        get_search_path(): string[] | null;

        /**
         * Checks whether an icon theme includes an icon
         * for a particular name.
         * @param icon_name the name of an icon
         * @returns `true` if `icon_theme` includes an  icon for `icon_name`.
         */
        has_icon(icon_name: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the list of contexts available within the current
         * hierarchy of icon themes.
         * See `gtk_icon_theme_list_icons()` for details about contexts.
         * @returns a {@link GLib.List} list     holding the names of all the contexts in the theme. You must first     free each element in the list with `g_free()`, then free the list     itself with `g_list_free()`.
         */
        list_contexts(): string[];

        /**
         * Lists the icons in the current icon theme. Only a subset
         * of the icons can be listed by providing a context string.
         * The set of values for the context string is system dependent,
         * but will typically include such values as “Applications” and
         * “MimeTypes”. Contexts are explained in the
         * [Icon Theme Specification](http://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Specifications/icon-theme-spec).
         * The standard contexts are listed in the
         * [Icon Naming Specification](http://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Specifications/icon-naming-spec).
         * Also see `gtk_icon_theme_list_contexts()`.
         * @param context a string identifying a particular type of           icon, or `null` to list all icons.
         * @returns a {@link GLib.List} list     holding the names of all the icons in the theme. You must     first free each element in the list with `g_free()`, then     free the list itself with `g_list_free()`.
         */
        list_icons(context: string | null): string[];

        /**
         * Looks up an icon in an icon theme, scales it to the given size
         * and renders it into a pixbuf. This is a convenience function;
         * if more details about the icon are needed, use
         * `gtk_icon_theme_lookup_icon()` followed by `gtk_icon_info_load_icon()`.
         * 
         * Note that you probably want to listen for icon theme changes and
         * update the icon. This is usually done by connecting to the
         * GtkWidget::style-set signal. If for some reason you do not want to
         * update the icon when the icon theme changes, you should consider
         * using `gdk_pixbuf_copy()` to make a private copy of the pixbuf
         * returned by this function. Otherwise GTK+ may need to keep the old
         * icon theme loaded, which would be a waste of memory.
         * @param icon_name the name of the icon to lookup
         * @param size the desired icon size. The resulting icon may not be     exactly this size; see `gtk_icon_info_load_icon()`.
         * @param flags flags modifying the behavior of the icon lookup
         * @returns the rendered icon; this may be     a newly created icon or a new reference to an internal icon, so     you must not modify the icon. Use `g_object_unref()` to release     your reference to the icon. `null` if the icon isn’t found.
         */
        load_icon(icon_name: string, size: number, flags: IconLookupFlags): GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf | null;

        /**
         * Looks up an icon in an icon theme for a particular window scale,
         * scales it to the given size and renders it into a pixbuf. This is a
         * convenience function; if more details about the icon are needed,
         * use `gtk_icon_theme_lookup_icon()` followed by
         * `gtk_icon_info_load_icon()`.
         * 
         * Note that you probably want to listen for icon theme changes and
         * update the icon. This is usually done by connecting to the
         * GtkWidget::style-set signal. If for some reason you do not want to
         * update the icon when the icon theme changes, you should consider
         * using `gdk_pixbuf_copy()` to make a private copy of the pixbuf
         * returned by this function. Otherwise GTK+ may need to keep the old
         * icon theme loaded, which would be a waste of memory.
         * @param icon_name the name of the icon to lookup
         * @param size the desired icon size. The resulting icon may not be     exactly this size; see `gtk_icon_info_load_icon()`.
         * @param scale desired scale
         * @param flags flags modifying the behavior of the icon lookup
         * @returns the rendered icon; this may be     a newly created icon or a new reference to an internal icon, so     you must not modify the icon. Use `g_object_unref()` to release     your reference to the icon. `null` if the icon isn’t found.
         */
        load_icon_for_scale(icon_name: string, size: number, scale: number, flags: IconLookupFlags): GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf | null;

        /**
         * Looks up an icon in an icon theme for a particular window scale,
         * scales it to the given size and renders it into a cairo surface. This is a
         * convenience function; if more details about the icon are needed,
         * use `gtk_icon_theme_lookup_icon()` followed by
         * `gtk_icon_info_load_surface()`.
         * 
         * Note that you probably want to listen for icon theme changes and
         * update the icon. This is usually done by connecting to the
         * GtkWidget::style-set signal.
         * @param icon_name the name of the icon to lookup
         * @param size the desired icon size. The resulting icon may not be     exactly this size; see `gtk_icon_info_load_icon()`.
         * @param scale desired scale
         * @param for_window {@link Gdk.Window} to optimize drawing for, or `null`
         * @param flags flags modifying the behavior of the icon lookup
         * @returns the rendered icon; this may be     a newly created icon or a new reference to an internal icon, so     you must not modify the icon. Use `cairo_surface_destroy()` to     release your reference to the icon. `null` if the icon isn’t     found.
         */
        load_surface(icon_name: string, size: number, scale: number, for_window: Gdk.Window | null, flags: IconLookupFlags): cairo.Surface | null;

        /**
         * Looks up an icon and returns a {@link Gtk.IconInfo} containing information
         * such as the filename of the icon. The icon can then be rendered
         * into a pixbuf using `gtk_icon_info_load_icon()`.
         * 
         * When rendering on displays with high pixel densities you should not
         * use a `size` multiplied by the scaling factor returned by functions
         * like `gdk_window_get_scale_factor()`. Instead, you should use
         * `gtk_icon_theme_lookup_by_gicon_for_scale()`, as the assets loaded
         * for a given scaling factor may be different.
         * @param icon the {@link Gio.Icon} to look up
         * @param size desired icon size
         * @param flags flags modifying the behavior of the icon lookup
         * @returns a {@link Gtk.IconInfo} containing     information about the icon, or `null` if the icon wasn’t     found. Unref with `g_object_unref()`
         */
        lookup_by_gicon(icon: Gio.Icon, size: number, flags: IconLookupFlags): IconInfo | null;

        /**
         * Looks up an icon and returns a {@link Gtk.IconInfo} containing information
         * such as the filename of the icon. The icon can then be rendered into
         * a pixbuf using `gtk_icon_info_load_icon()`.
         * @param icon the {@link Gio.Icon} to look up
         * @param size desired icon size
         * @param scale the desired scale
         * @param flags flags modifying the behavior of the icon lookup
         * @returns a {@link Gtk.IconInfo} containing     information about the icon, or `null` if the icon wasn’t     found. Unref with `g_object_unref()`
         */
        lookup_by_gicon_for_scale(icon: Gio.Icon, size: number, scale: number, flags: IconLookupFlags): IconInfo | null;

        /**
         * Looks up a named icon and returns a {@link Gtk.IconInfo} containing
         * information such as the filename of the icon. The icon
         * can then be rendered into a pixbuf using
         * `gtk_icon_info_load_icon()`. (gtk_icon_theme_load_icon()
         * combines these two steps if all you need is the pixbuf.)
         * 
         * When rendering on displays with high pixel densities you should not
         * use a `size` multiplied by the scaling factor returned by functions
         * like `gdk_window_get_scale_factor()`. Instead, you should use
         * `gtk_icon_theme_lookup_icon_for_scale()`, as the assets loaded
         * for a given scaling factor may be different.
         * @param icon_name the name of the icon to lookup
         * @param size desired icon size
         * @param flags flags modifying the behavior of the icon lookup
         * @returns a {@link Gtk.IconInfo} object     containing information about the icon, or `null` if the     icon wasn’t found.
         */
        lookup_icon(icon_name: string, size: number, flags: IconLookupFlags): IconInfo | null;

        /**
         * Looks up a named icon for a particular window scale and returns a
         * {@link Gtk.IconInfo} containing information such as the filename of the
         * icon. The icon can then be rendered into a pixbuf using
         * `gtk_icon_info_load_icon()`. (gtk_icon_theme_load_icon() combines
         * these two steps if all you need is the pixbuf.)
         * @param icon_name the name of the icon to lookup
         * @param size desired icon size
         * @param scale the desired scale
         * @param flags flags modifying the behavior of the icon lookup
         * @returns a {@link Gtk.IconInfo} object     containing information about the icon, or `null` if the     icon wasn’t found.
         */
        lookup_icon_for_scale(icon_name: string, size: number, scale: number, flags: IconLookupFlags): IconInfo | null;

        /**
         * Prepends a directory to the search path.
         * See `gtk_icon_theme_set_search_path()`.
         * @param path directory name to prepend to the icon path
         */
        prepend_search_path(path: string): void;

        /**
         * Checks to see if the icon theme has changed; if it has, any
         * currently cached information is discarded and will be reloaded
         * next time `icon_theme` is accessed.
         * @returns `true` if the icon theme has changed and needed     to be reloaded.
         */
        rescan_if_needed(): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the name of the icon theme that the {@link Gtk.IconTheme} object uses
         * overriding system configuration. This function cannot be called
         * on the icon theme objects returned from `gtk_icon_theme_get_default()`
         * and `gtk_icon_theme_get_for_screen()`.
         * @param theme_name name of icon theme to use instead of   configured theme, or `null` to unset a previously set custom theme
         */
        set_custom_theme(theme_name: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the screen for an icon theme; the screen is used
         * to track the user’s currently configured icon theme,
         * which might be different for different screens.
         * @param screen a {@link Gdk.Screen}
         */
        set_screen(screen: Gdk.Screen): void;

        /**
         * Sets the search path for the icon theme object. When looking
         * for an icon theme, GTK+ will search for a subdirectory of
         * one or more of the directories in `path` with the same name
         * as the icon theme containing an index.theme file. (Themes from
         * multiple of the path elements are combined to allow themes to be
         * extended by adding icons in the user’s home directory.)
         * 
         * In addition if an icon found isn’t found either in the current
         * icon theme or the default icon theme, and an image file with
         * the right name is found directly in one of the elements of
         * `path`, then that image will be used for the icon name.
         * (This is legacy feature, and new icons should be put
         * into the fallback icon theme, which is called hicolor,
         * rather than directly on the icon path.)
         * @param path array of     directories that are searched for icon themes
         */
        set_search_path(path: string[]): void;
    }


    namespace IconView {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Container.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * A [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted when the user activates the currently
             * focused item.
             * 
             * Applications should not connect to it, but may emit it with
             * `g_signal_emit_by_name()` if they need to control activation
             * programmatically.
             * 
             * The default bindings for this signal are Space, Return and Enter.
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "activate-cursor-item": () => boolean | void;
            /**
             * The ::item-activated signal is emitted when the method
             * `gtk_icon_view_item_activated()` is called, when the user double
             * clicks an item with the "activate-on-single-click" property set
             * to `false`, or when the user single clicks an item when the
             * "activate-on-single-click" property set to `true`. It is also
             * emitted when a non-editable item is selected and one of the keys:
             * Space, Return or Enter is pressed.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "item-activated": (arg0: TreePath) => void;
            /**
             * The ::move-cursor signal is a
             * [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted when the user initiates a cursor movement.
             * 
             * Applications should not connect to it, but may emit it with
             * `g_signal_emit_by_name()` if they need to control the cursor
             * programmatically.
             * 
             * The default bindings for this signal include
             * - Arrow keys which move by individual steps
             * - Home/End keys which move to the first/last item
             * - PageUp/PageDown which move by "pages"
             * All of these will extend the selection when combined with
             * the Shift modifier.
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "move-cursor": (arg0: MovementStep, arg1: number) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * A [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted when the user selects all items.
             * 
             * Applications should not connect to it, but may emit it with
             * `g_signal_emit_by_name()` if they need to control selection
             * programmatically.
             * 
             * The default binding for this signal is Ctrl-a.
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "select-all": () => void;
            /**
             * A [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted when the user selects the item that is currently
             * focused.
             * 
             * Applications should not connect to it, but may emit it with
             * `g_signal_emit_by_name()` if they need to control selection
             * programmatically.
             * 
             * There is no default binding for this signal.
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "select-cursor-item": () => void;
            /**
             * The ::selection-changed signal is emitted when the selection
             * (i.e. the set of selected items) changes.
             * @signal
             * @run-first
             */
            "selection-changed": () => void;
            /**
             * A [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted when the user toggles whether the currently
             * focused item is selected or not. The exact effect of this
             * depend on the selection mode.
             * 
             * Applications should not connect to it, but may emit it with
             * `g_signal_emit_by_name()` if they need to control selection
             * programmatically.
             * 
             * There is no default binding for this signal is Ctrl-Space.
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "toggle-cursor-item": () => void;
            /**
             * A [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted when the user unselects all items.
             * 
             * Applications should not connect to it, but may emit it with
             * `g_signal_emit_by_name()` if they need to control selection
             * programmatically.
             * 
             * The default binding for this signal is Ctrl-Shift-a.
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "unselect-all": () => void;
            "notify::activate-on-single-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::cell-area": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::column-spacing": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::columns": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::item-orientation": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::item-padding": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::item-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::markup-column": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::model": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::pixbuf-column": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::reorderable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::row-spacing": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::selection-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::spacing": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::text-column": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-column": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hadjustment": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hscroll-policy": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vadjustment": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vscroll-policy": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Container.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, CellLayout.ConstructorProps, Scrollable.ConstructorProps {
            activate_on_single_click: boolean;
            activateOnSingleClick: boolean;
            cell_area: CellArea;
            cellArea: CellArea;
            column_spacing: number;
            columnSpacing: number;
            columns: number;
            item_orientation: Orientation;
            itemOrientation: Orientation;
            item_padding: number;
            itemPadding: number;
            item_width: number;
            itemWidth: number;
            margin: number;
            markup_column: number;
            markupColumn: number;
            model: TreeModel | null;
            pixbuf_column: number;
            pixbufColumn: number;
            reorderable: boolean;
            row_spacing: number;
            rowSpacing: number;
            selection_mode: SelectionMode;
            selectionMode: SelectionMode;
            spacing: number;
            text_column: number;
            textColumn: number;
            tooltip_column: number;
            tooltipColumn: number;
        }
    }

    /**
     * {@link Gtk.IconView} provides an alternative view on a {@link Gtk.TreeModel}.
     * It displays the model as a grid of icons with labels. Like
     * {@link Gtk.TreeView}, it allows to select one or multiple items
     * (depending on the selection mode, see `gtk_icon_view_set_selection_mode()`).
     * In addition to selection with the arrow keys, {@link Gtk.IconView} supports
     * rubberband selection, which is controlled by dragging the pointer.
     * 
     * Note that if the tree model is backed by an actual tree store (as
     * opposed to a flat list where the mapping to icons is obvious),
     * {@link Gtk.IconView} will only display the first level of the tree and
     * ignore the tree’s branches.
     * 
     * # CSS nodes
     * 
     * 
     * ```
     * iconview.view
     * ╰── [rubberband]
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * GtkIconView has a single CSS node with name iconview and style class .view.
     * For rubberband selection, a subnode with name rubberband is used.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class IconView extends Container implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable, CellLayout, Scrollable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<IconView>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * The activate-on-single-click property specifies whether the "item-activated" signal
         * will be emitted after a single click.
         * @since 3.8
         * @default false
         */
        get activate_on_single_click(): boolean;
        set activate_on_single_click(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The activate-on-single-click property specifies whether the "item-activated" signal
         * will be emitted after a single click.
         * @since 3.8
         * @default false
         */
        get activateOnSingleClick(): boolean;
        set activateOnSingleClick(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The {@link Gtk.CellArea} used to layout cell renderers for this view.
         * 
         * If no area is specified when creating the icon view with `gtk_icon_view_new_with_area()`
         * a {@link Gtk.CellAreaBox} will be used.
         * @since 3.0
         * @construct-only
         */
        get cell_area(): CellArea;

        /**
         * The {@link Gtk.CellArea} used to layout cell renderers for this view.
         * 
         * If no area is specified when creating the icon view with `gtk_icon_view_new_with_area()`
         * a {@link Gtk.CellAreaBox} will be used.
         * @since 3.0
         * @construct-only
         */
        get cellArea(): CellArea;

        /**
         * The column-spacing property specifies the space which is inserted between
         * the columns of the icon view.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default 6
         */
        get column_spacing(): number;
        set column_spacing(val: number);

        /**
         * The column-spacing property specifies the space which is inserted between
         * the columns of the icon view.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default 6
         */
        get columnSpacing(): number;
        set columnSpacing(val: number);

        /**
         * The columns property contains the number of the columns in which the
         * items should be displayed. If it is -1, the number of columns will
         * be chosen automatically to fill the available area.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default -1
         */
        get columns(): number;
        set columns(val: number);

        /**
         * The item-orientation property specifies how the cells (i.e. the icon and
         * the text) of the item are positioned relative to each other.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default Gtk.Orientation.VERTICAL
         */
        get item_orientation(): Orientation;
        set item_orientation(val: Orientation);

        /**
         * The item-orientation property specifies how the cells (i.e. the icon and
         * the text) of the item are positioned relative to each other.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default Gtk.Orientation.VERTICAL
         */
        get itemOrientation(): Orientation;
        set itemOrientation(val: Orientation);

        /**
         * The item-padding property specifies the padding around each
         * of the icon view's item.
         * @since 2.18
         * @default 6
         */
        get item_padding(): number;
        set item_padding(val: number);

        /**
         * The item-padding property specifies the padding around each
         * of the icon view's item.
         * @since 2.18
         * @default 6
         */
        get itemPadding(): number;
        set itemPadding(val: number);

        /**
         * The item-width property specifies the width to use for each item.
         * If it is set to -1, the icon view will automatically determine a
         * suitable item size.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default -1
         */
        get item_width(): number;
        set item_width(val: number);

        /**
         * The item-width property specifies the width to use for each item.
         * If it is set to -1, the icon view will automatically determine a
         * suitable item size.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default -1
         */
        get itemWidth(): number;
        set itemWidth(val: number);

        /**
         * The margin property specifies the space which is inserted
         * at the edges of the icon view.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default 6
         */
        get margin(): number;
        set margin(val: number);

        /**
         * The ::markup-column property contains the number of the model column
         * containing markup information to be displayed. The markup column must be
         * of type #G_TYPE_STRING. If this property and the :text-column property
         * are both set to column numbers, it overrides the text column.
         * If both are set to -1, no texts are displayed.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default -1
         */
        get markup_column(): number;
        set markup_column(val: number);

        /**
         * The ::markup-column property contains the number of the model column
         * containing markup information to be displayed. The markup column must be
         * of type #G_TYPE_STRING. If this property and the :text-column property
         * are both set to column numbers, it overrides the text column.
         * If both are set to -1, no texts are displayed.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default -1
         */
        get markupColumn(): number;
        set markupColumn(val: number);

        get model(): TreeModel | null;
        set model(val: TreeModel | null);

        /**
         * The ::pixbuf-column property contains the number of the model column
         * containing the pixbufs which are displayed. The pixbuf column must be
         * of type #GDK_TYPE_PIXBUF. Setting this property to -1 turns off the
         * display of pixbufs.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default -1
         */
        get pixbuf_column(): number;
        set pixbuf_column(val: number);

        /**
         * The ::pixbuf-column property contains the number of the model column
         * containing the pixbufs which are displayed. The pixbuf column must be
         * of type #GDK_TYPE_PIXBUF. Setting this property to -1 turns off the
         * display of pixbufs.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default -1
         */
        get pixbufColumn(): number;
        set pixbufColumn(val: number);

        /**
         * The reorderable property specifies if the items can be reordered
         * by DND.
         * @since 2.8
         * @default false
         */
        get reorderable(): boolean;
        set reorderable(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The row-spacing property specifies the space which is inserted between
         * the rows of the icon view.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default 6
         */
        get row_spacing(): number;
        set row_spacing(val: number);

        /**
         * The row-spacing property specifies the space which is inserted between
         * the rows of the icon view.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default 6
         */
        get rowSpacing(): number;
        set rowSpacing(val: number);

        /**
         * The ::selection-mode property specifies the selection mode of
         * icon view. If the mode is #GTK_SELECTION_MULTIPLE, rubberband selection
         * is enabled, for the other modes, only keyboard selection is possible.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default Gtk.SelectionMode.SINGLE
         */
        get selection_mode(): SelectionMode;
        set selection_mode(val: SelectionMode);

        /**
         * The ::selection-mode property specifies the selection mode of
         * icon view. If the mode is #GTK_SELECTION_MULTIPLE, rubberband selection
         * is enabled, for the other modes, only keyboard selection is possible.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default Gtk.SelectionMode.SINGLE
         */
        get selectionMode(): SelectionMode;
        set selectionMode(val: SelectionMode);

        /**
         * The spacing property specifies the space which is inserted between
         * the cells (i.e. the icon and the text) of an item.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default 0
         */
        get spacing(): number;
        set spacing(val: number);

        /**
         * The ::text-column property contains the number of the model column
         * containing the texts which are displayed. The text column must be
         * of type #G_TYPE_STRING. If this property and the :markup-column
         * property are both set to -1, no texts are displayed.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default -1
         */
        get text_column(): number;
        set text_column(val: number);

        /**
         * The ::text-column property contains the number of the model column
         * containing the texts which are displayed. The text column must be
         * of type #G_TYPE_STRING. If this property and the :markup-column
         * property are both set to -1, no texts are displayed.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default -1
         */
        get textColumn(): number;
        set textColumn(val: number);

        /**
         * @default -1
         */
        get tooltip_column(): number;
        set tooltip_column(val: number);

        /**
         * @default -1
         */
        get tooltipColumn(): number;
        set tooltipColumn(val: number);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: IconView.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<IconView.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): IconView;

        static new_with_area(area: CellArea): IconView;

        static new_with_model(model: TreeModel): IconView;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof IconView.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, IconView.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof IconView.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, IconView.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof IconView.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<IconView.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_activate_cursor_item(): boolean;

        /**
         * Activates the item determined by `path`.
         * @param path The {@link Gtk.TreePath} to be activated
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_item_activated(path: TreePath): void;

        /**
         * @param step 
         * @param count 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_move_cursor(step: MovementStep, count: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Selects all the icons. `icon_view` must has its selection mode set
         * to #GTK_SELECTION_MULTIPLE.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_select_all(): void;

        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_select_cursor_item(): void;

        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_selection_changed(): void;

        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_toggle_cursor_item(): void;

        /**
         * Unselects all the icons.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_unselect_all(): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Converts widget coordinates to coordinates for the bin_window,
         * as expected by e.g. `gtk_icon_view_get_path_at_pos()`.
         * @param wx X coordinate relative to the widget
         * @param wy Y coordinate relative to the widget
         */
        convert_widget_to_bin_window_coords(wx: number, wy: number): [number, number];

        /**
         * Creates a {@link cairo.Surface} representation of the item at `path`.
         * This image is used for a drag icon.
         * @param path a {@link Gtk.TreePath} in `icon_view`
         * @returns a newly-allocated surface of the drag icon.
         */
        create_drag_icon(path: TreePath): cairo.Surface;

        /**
         * Turns `icon_view` into a drop destination for automatic DND. Calling this
         * method sets {@link Gtk.IconView.reorderable} to `false`.
         * @param targets the table of targets that the drag will           support
         * @param actions the bitmask of possible actions for a drag to this    widget
         */
        enable_model_drag_dest(targets: TargetEntry[], actions: Gdk.DragAction): void;

        /**
         * Turns `icon_view` into a drag source for automatic DND. Calling this
         * method sets {@link Gtk.IconView.reorderable} to `false`.
         * @param start_button_mask Mask of allowed buttons to start drag
         * @param targets the table of targets that the drag will           support
         * @param actions the bitmask of possible actions for a drag from this    widget
         */
        enable_model_drag_source(start_button_mask: Gdk.ModifierType, targets: TargetEntry[], actions: Gdk.DragAction): void;

        /**
         * Gets the setting set by `gtk_icon_view_set_activate_on_single_click()`.
         * @returns `true` if item-activated will be emitted on a single click
         */
        get_activate_on_single_click(): boolean;

        /**
         * Fills the bounding rectangle in widget coordinates for the cell specified by
         * `path` and `cell`. If `cell` is `null` the main cell area is used.
         * 
         * This function is only valid if `icon_view` is realized.
         * @param path a {@link Gtk.TreePath}
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} or `null`
         * @returns `false` if there is no such item, `true` otherwise
         */
        get_cell_rect(path: TreePath, cell: CellRenderer | null): [boolean, Gdk.Rectangle];

        /**
         * Returns the value of the ::column-spacing property.
         * @returns the space between columns
         */
        get_column_spacing(): number;

        /**
         * Returns the value of the ::columns property.
         * @returns the number of columns, or -1
         */
        get_columns(): number;

        /**
         * Fills in `path` and `cell` with the current cursor path and cell.
         * If the cursor isn’t currently set, then *`path` will be `null`.
         * If no cell currently has focus, then *`cell` will be `null`.
         * 
         * The returned {@link Gtk.TreePath} must be freed with `gtk_tree_path_free()`.
         * @returns `true` if the cursor is set.
         */
        get_cursor(): [boolean, TreePath | null, CellRenderer | null];

        /**
         * Determines the destination item for a given position.
         * @param drag_x the position to determine the destination item for
         * @param drag_y the position to determine the destination item for
         * @returns whether there is an item at the given position.
         */
        get_dest_item_at_pos(drag_x: number, drag_y: number): [boolean, TreePath | null, IconViewDropPosition | null];

        /**
         * Gets information about the item that is highlighted for feedback.
         */
        get_drag_dest_item(): [TreePath | null, IconViewDropPosition | null];

        /**
         * Finds the path at the point (`x`, `y`), relative to bin_window coordinates.
         * In contrast to `gtk_icon_view_get_path_at_pos()`, this function also
         * obtains the cell at the specified position. The returned path should
         * be freed with `gtk_tree_path_free()`.
         * See `gtk_icon_view_convert_widget_to_bin_window_coords()` for converting
         * widget coordinates to bin_window coordinates.
         * @param x The x position to be identified
         * @param y The y position to be identified
         * @returns `true` if an item exists at the specified position
         */
        get_item_at_pos(x: number, y: number): [boolean, TreePath | null, CellRenderer | null];

        /**
         * Gets the column in which the item `path` is currently
         * displayed. Column numbers start at 0.
         * @param path the {@link Gtk.TreePath} of the item
         * @returns The column in which the item is displayed
         */
        get_item_column(path: TreePath): number;

        /**
         * Returns the value of the ::item-orientation property which determines
         * whether the labels are drawn beside the icons instead of below.
         * @returns the relative position of texts and icons
         */
        get_item_orientation(): Orientation;

        /**
         * Returns the value of the ::item-padding property.
         * @returns the padding around items
         */
        get_item_padding(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the row in which the item `path` is currently
         * displayed. Row numbers start at 0.
         * @param path the {@link Gtk.TreePath} of the item
         * @returns The row in which the item is displayed
         */
        get_item_row(path: TreePath): number;

        /**
         * Returns the value of the ::item-width property.
         * @returns the width of a single item, or -1
         */
        get_item_width(): number;

        /**
         * Returns the value of the ::margin property.
         * @returns the space at the borders
         */
        get_margin(): number;

        /**
         * Returns the column with markup text for `icon_view`.
         * @returns the markup column, or -1 if it’s unset.
         */
        get_markup_column(): number;

        /**
         * Returns the model the {@link Gtk.IconView} is based on.  Returns `null` if the
         * model is unset.
         * @returns A {@link Gtk.TreeModel}, or `null` if none is     currently being used.
         */
        get_model(): TreeModel | null;

        /**
         * Finds the path at the point (`x`, `y`), relative to bin_window coordinates.
         * See `gtk_icon_view_get_item_at_pos()`, if you are also interested in
         * the cell at the specified position.
         * See `gtk_icon_view_convert_widget_to_bin_window_coords()` for converting
         * widget coordinates to bin_window coordinates.
         * @param x The x position to be identified
         * @param y The y position to be identified
         * @returns The {@link Gtk.TreePath} corresponding to the icon or `null` if no icon exists at that position.
         */
        get_path_at_pos(x: number, y: number): TreePath | null;

        /**
         * Returns the column with pixbufs for `icon_view`.
         * @returns the pixbuf column, or -1 if it’s unset.
         */
        get_pixbuf_column(): number;

        /**
         * Retrieves whether the user can reorder the list via drag-and-drop.
         * See `gtk_icon_view_set_reorderable()`.
         * @returns `true` if the list can be reordered.
         */
        get_reorderable(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the value of the ::row-spacing property.
         * @returns the space between rows
         */
        get_row_spacing(): number;

        /**
         * Creates a list of paths of all selected items. Additionally, if you are
         * planning on modifying the model after calling this function, you may
         * want to convert the returned list into a list of `GtkTreeRowReferences`.
         * To do this, you can use `gtk_tree_row_reference_new()`.
         * 
         * To free the return value, use:
         * 
         * ```c
         * g_list_free_full (list, (GDestroyNotify) gtk_tree_path_free);
         * ```
         * 
         * @returns A {@link GLib.List} containing a {@link Gtk.TreePath} for each selected row.
         */
        get_selected_items(): TreePath[];

        /**
         * Gets the selection mode of the `icon_view`.
         * @returns the current selection mode
         */
        get_selection_mode(): SelectionMode;

        /**
         * Returns the value of the ::spacing property.
         * @returns the space between cells
         */
        get_spacing(): number;

        /**
         * Returns the column with text for `icon_view`.
         * @returns the text column, or -1 if it’s unset.
         */
        get_text_column(): number;

        /**
         * Returns the column of `icon_view`’s model which is being used for
         * displaying tooltips on `icon_view`’s rows.
         * @returns the index of the tooltip column that is currently being used, or -1 if this is disabled.
         */
        get_tooltip_column(): number;

        /**
         * This function is supposed to be used in a {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.query_tooltip | Gtk.Widget::query-tooltip}
         * signal handler for {@link Gtk.IconView}.  The `x`, `y` and `keyboard_tip` values
         * which are received in the signal handler, should be passed to this
         * function without modification.
         * 
         * The return value indicates whether there is an icon view item at the given
         * coordinates (`true`) or not (`false`) for mouse tooltips. For keyboard
         * tooltips the item returned will be the cursor item. When `true`, then any of
         * `model`, `path` and `iter` which have been provided will be set to point to
         * that row and the corresponding model. `x` and `y` will always be converted
         * to be relative to `icon_view`’s bin_window if `keyboard_tooltip` is `false`.
         * @param x the x coordinate (relative to widget coordinates)
         * @param y the y coordinate (relative to widget coordinates)
         * @param keyboard_tip whether this is a keyboard tooltip or not
         * @returns whether or not the given tooltip context points to a item
         */
        get_tooltip_context(x: number, y: number, keyboard_tip: boolean): [boolean, number, number, TreeModel | null, TreePath | null, TreeIter | null];

        /**
         * Sets `start_path` and `end_path` to be the first and last visible path.
         * Note that there may be invisible paths in between.
         * 
         * Both paths should be freed with `gtk_tree_path_free()` after use.
         * @returns `true`, if valid paths were placed in `start_path` and `end_path`
         */
        get_visible_range(): [boolean, TreePath | null, TreePath | null];

        /**
         * Activates the item determined by `path`.
         * @param path The {@link Gtk.TreePath} to be activated
         */
        item_activated(path: TreePath): void;

        /**
         * Returns `true` if the icon pointed to by `path` is currently
         * selected. If `path` does not point to a valid location, `false` is returned.
         * @param path A {@link Gtk.TreePath} to check selection on.
         * @returns `true` if `path` is selected.
         */
        path_is_selected(path: TreePath): boolean;

        /**
         * Moves the alignments of `icon_view` to the position specified by `path`.
         * `row_align` determines where the row is placed, and `col_align` determines
         * where `column` is placed.  Both are expected to be between 0.0 and 1.0.
         * 0.0 means left/top alignment, 1.0 means right/bottom alignment, 0.5 means
         * center.
         * 
         * If `use_align` is `false`, then the alignment arguments are ignored, and the
         * tree does the minimum amount of work to scroll the item onto the screen.
         * This means that the item will be scrolled to the edge closest to its current
         * position.  If the item is currently visible on the screen, nothing is done.
         * 
         * This function only works if the model is set, and `path` is a valid row on
         * the model. If the model changes before the `icon_view` is realized, the
         * centered path will be modified to reflect this change.
         * @param path The path of the item to move to.
         * @param use_align whether to use alignment arguments, or `false`.
         * @param row_align The vertical alignment of the item specified by `path`.
         * @param col_align The horizontal alignment of the item specified by `path`.
         */
        scroll_to_path(path: TreePath, use_align: boolean, row_align: number, col_align: number): void;

        /**
         * Selects all the icons. `icon_view` must has its selection mode set
         * to #GTK_SELECTION_MULTIPLE.
         */
        select_all(): void;

        /**
         * Selects the row at `path`.
         * @param path The {@link Gtk.TreePath} to be selected.
         */
        select_path(path: TreePath): void;

        /**
         * Calls a function for each selected icon. Note that the model or
         * selection cannot be modified from within this function.
         * @param func The function to call for each selected icon.
         */
        selected_foreach(func: IconViewForeachFunc): void;

        /**
         * Causes the {@link Gtk.IconView.SignalSignatures.item_activated | Gtk.IconView::item-activated} signal to be emitted on
         * a single click instead of a double click.
         * @param single `true` to emit item-activated on a single click
         */
        set_activate_on_single_click(single: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the ::column-spacing property which specifies the space
         * which is inserted between the columns of the icon view.
         * @param column_spacing the column spacing
         */
        set_column_spacing(column_spacing: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the ::columns property which determines in how
         * many columns the icons are arranged. If `columns` is
         * -1, the number of columns will be chosen automatically
         * to fill the available area.
         * @param columns the number of columns
         */
        set_columns(columns: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the current keyboard focus to be at `path`, and selects it.  This is
         * useful when you want to focus the user’s attention on a particular item.
         * If `cell` is not `null`, then focus is given to the cell specified by
         * it. Additionally, if `start_editing` is `true`, then editing should be
         * started in the specified cell.
         * 
         * This function is often followed by `gtk_widget_grab_focus
         * (icon_view)` in order to give keyboard focus to the widget.
         * Please note that editing can only happen when the widget is realized.
         * @param path A {@link Gtk.TreePath}
         * @param cell One of the cell renderers of `icon_view`, or `null`
         * @param start_editing `true` if the specified cell should start being edited.
         */
        set_cursor(path: TreePath, cell: CellRenderer | null, start_editing: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the item that is highlighted for feedback.
         * @param path The path of the item to highlight, or `null`.
         * @param pos Specifies where to drop, relative to the item
         */
        set_drag_dest_item(path: TreePath | null, pos: IconViewDropPosition): void;

        /**
         * Sets the ::item-orientation property which determines whether the labels
         * are drawn beside the icons instead of below.
         * @param orientation the relative position of texts and icons
         */
        set_item_orientation(orientation: Orientation): void;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.IconView.item_padding} property which specifies the padding
         * around each of the icon view’s items.
         * @param item_padding the item padding
         */
        set_item_padding(item_padding: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the ::item-width property which specifies the width
         * to use for each item. If it is set to -1, the icon view will
         * automatically determine a suitable item size.
         * @param item_width the width for each item
         */
        set_item_width(item_width: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the ::margin property which specifies the space
         * which is inserted at the top, bottom, left and right
         * of the icon view.
         * @param margin the margin
         */
        set_margin(margin: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the column with markup information for `icon_view` to be
         * `column`. The markup column must be of type #G_TYPE_STRING.
         * If the markup column is set to something, it overrides
         * the text column set by `gtk_icon_view_set_text_column()`.
         * @param column A column in the currently used model, or -1 to display no text
         */
        set_markup_column(column: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the model for a {@link Gtk.IconView}.
         * If the `icon_view` already has a model set, it will remove
         * it before setting the new model.  If `model` is `null`, then
         * it will unset the old model.
         * @param model The model.
         */
        set_model(model: TreeModel | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the column with pixbufs for `icon_view` to be `column`. The pixbuf
         * column must be of type #GDK_TYPE_PIXBUF
         * @param column A column in the currently used model, or -1 to disable
         */
        set_pixbuf_column(column: number): void;

        /**
         * This function is a convenience function to allow you to reorder models that
         * support the {@link Gtk.TreeDragSourceIface} and the {@link Gtk.TreeDragDestIface}.  Both
         * {@link Gtk.TreeStore} and {@link Gtk.ListStore} support these.  If `reorderable` is `true`, then
         * the user can reorder the model by dragging and dropping rows.  The
         * developer can listen to these changes by connecting to the model's
         * row_inserted and row_deleted signals. The reordering is implemented by setting up
         * the icon view as a drag source and destination. Therefore, drag and
         * drop can not be used in a reorderable view for any other purpose.
         * 
         * This function does not give you any degree of control over the order -- any
         * reordering is allowed.  If more control is needed, you should probably
         * handle drag and drop manually.
         * @param reorderable `true`, if the list of items can be reordered.
         */
        set_reorderable(reorderable: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the ::row-spacing property which specifies the space
         * which is inserted between the rows of the icon view.
         * @param row_spacing the row spacing
         */
        set_row_spacing(row_spacing: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the selection mode of the `icon_view`.
         * @param mode The selection mode
         */
        set_selection_mode(mode: SelectionMode): void;

        /**
         * Sets the ::spacing property which specifies the space
         * which is inserted between the cells (i.e. the icon and
         * the text) of an item.
         * @param spacing the spacing
         */
        set_spacing(spacing: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the column with text for `icon_view` to be `column`. The text
         * column must be of type #G_TYPE_STRING.
         * @param column A column in the currently used model, or -1 to display no text
         */
        set_text_column(column: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the tip area of `tooltip` to the area which `cell` occupies in
         * the item pointed to by `path`. See also `gtk_tooltip_set_tip_area()`.
         * 
         * See also `gtk_icon_view_set_tooltip_column()` for a simpler alternative.
         * @param tooltip a {@link Gtk.Tooltip}
         * @param path a {@link Gtk.TreePath}
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} or `null`
         */
        set_tooltip_cell(tooltip: Tooltip, path: TreePath, cell: CellRenderer | null): void;

        /**
         * If you only plan to have simple (text-only) tooltips on full items, you
         * can use this function to have {@link Gtk.IconView} handle these automatically
         * for you. `column` should be set to the column in `icon_view`’s model
         * containing the tooltip texts, or -1 to disable this feature.
         * 
         * When enabled, {@link Gtk.Widget.has_tooltip} will be set to `true` and
         * `icon_view` will connect a {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.query_tooltip | Gtk.Widget::query-tooltip} signal handler.
         * 
         * Note that the signal handler sets the text with `gtk_tooltip_set_markup()`,
         * so &, <, etc have to be escaped in the text.
         * @param column an integer, which is a valid column number for `icon_view`’s model
         */
        set_tooltip_column(column: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the tip area of `tooltip` to be the area covered by the item at `path`.
         * See also `gtk_icon_view_set_tooltip_column()` for a simpler alternative.
         * See also `gtk_tooltip_set_tip_area()`.
         * @param tooltip a {@link Gtk.Tooltip}
         * @param path a {@link Gtk.TreePath}
         */
        set_tooltip_item(tooltip: Tooltip, path: TreePath): void;

        /**
         * Unselects all the icons.
         */
        unselect_all(): void;

        /**
         * Unselects the row at `path`.
         * @param path The {@link Gtk.TreePath} to be unselected.
         */
        unselect_path(path: TreePath): void;

        /**
         * Undoes the effect of `gtk_icon_view_enable_model_drag_dest()`. Calling this
         * method sets {@link Gtk.IconView.reorderable} to `false`.
         */
        unset_model_drag_dest(): void;

        /**
         * Undoes the effect of `gtk_icon_view_enable_model_drag_source()`. Calling this
         * method sets {@link Gtk.IconView.reorderable} to `false`.
         */
        unset_model_drag_source(): void;

        /**
         * Horizontal {@link Gtk.Adjustment} of the scrollable widget. This adjustment is
         * shared between the scrollable widget and its parent.
         * @since 3.0
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Scrollable
         */
        get hadjustment(): Adjustment;
        set hadjustment(val: Adjustment);

        /**
         * Determines whether horizontal scrolling should start once the scrollable
         * widget is allocated less than its minimum width or less than its natural width.
         * @since 3.0
         * @default Gtk.ScrollablePolicy.MINIMUM
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Scrollable
         */
        get hscroll_policy(): ScrollablePolicy;
        set hscroll_policy(val: ScrollablePolicy);

        /**
         * Determines whether horizontal scrolling should start once the scrollable
         * widget is allocated less than its minimum width or less than its natural width.
         * @since 3.0
         * @default Gtk.ScrollablePolicy.MINIMUM
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Scrollable
         */
        get hscrollPolicy(): ScrollablePolicy;
        set hscrollPolicy(val: ScrollablePolicy);

        /**
         * Verical {@link Gtk.Adjustment} of the scrollable widget. This adjustment is shared
         * between the scrollable widget and its parent.
         * @since 3.0
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Scrollable
         */
        get vadjustment(): Adjustment;
        set vadjustment(val: Adjustment);

        /**
         * Determines whether vertical scrolling should start once the scrollable
         * widget is allocated less than its minimum height or less than its natural height.
         * @since 3.0
         * @default Gtk.ScrollablePolicy.MINIMUM
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Scrollable
         */
        get vscroll_policy(): ScrollablePolicy;
        set vscroll_policy(val: ScrollablePolicy);

        /**
         * Determines whether vertical scrolling should start once the scrollable
         * widget is allocated less than its minimum height or less than its natural height.
         * @since 3.0
         * @default Gtk.ScrollablePolicy.MINIMUM
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Scrollable
         */
        get vscrollPolicy(): ScrollablePolicy;
        set vscrollPolicy(val: ScrollablePolicy);

        /**
         * Adds an attribute mapping to the list in `cell_layout`.
         * 
         * The `column` is the column of the model to get a value from, and the
         * `attribute` is the parameter on `cell` to be set from the value. So for
         * example if column 2 of the model contains strings, you could have the
         * “text” attribute of a {@link Gtk.CellRendererText} get its values from column 2.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param attribute an attribute on the renderer
         * @param column the column position on the model to get the attribute from
         */
        add_attribute(cell: CellRenderer, attribute: string, column: number): void;

        /**
         * Unsets all the mappings on all renderers on `cell_layout` and
         * removes all renderers from `cell_layout`.
         */
        clear(): void;

        /**
         * Clears all existing attributes previously set with
         * `gtk_cell_layout_set_attributes()`.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} to clear the attribute mapping on
         */
        clear_attributes(cell: CellRenderer): void;

        /**
         * Returns the underlying {@link Gtk.CellArea} which might be `cell_layout`
         * if called on a {@link Gtk.CellArea} or might be `null` if no {@link Gtk.CellArea}
         * is used by `cell_layout`.
         * @returns the cell area used by `cell_layout`, or `null` in case no cell area is used.
         */
        get_area(): CellArea | null;

        /**
         * Returns the cell renderers which have been added to `cell_layout`.
         * @returns a list of cell renderers. The list, but not the renderers has     been newly allocated and should be freed with `g_list_free()`     when no longer needed.
         */
        get_cells(): CellRenderer[];

        /**
         * Adds the `cell` to the end of `cell_layout`. If `expand` is `false`, then the
         * `cell` is allocated no more space than it needs. Any unused space is
         * divided evenly between cells for which `expand` is `true`.
         * 
         * Note that reusing the same cell renderer is not supported.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param expand `true` if `cell` is to be given extra space allocated to `cell_layout`
         */
        pack_end(cell: CellRenderer, expand: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Packs the `cell` into the beginning of `cell_layout`. If `expand` is `false`,
         * then the `cell` is allocated no more space than it needs. Any unused space
         * is divided evenly between cells for which `expand` is `true`.
         * 
         * Note that reusing the same cell renderer is not supported.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param expand `true` if `cell` is to be given extra space allocated to `cell_layout`
         */
        pack_start(cell: CellRenderer, expand: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Re-inserts `cell` at `position`.
         * 
         * Note that `cell` has already to be packed into `cell_layout`
         * for this to function properly.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} to reorder
         * @param position new position to insert `cell` at
         */
        reorder(cell: CellRenderer, position: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.CellLayoutDataFunc} to use for `cell_layout`.
         * 
         * This function is used instead of the standard attributes mapping
         * for setting the column value, and should set the value of `cell_layout`’s
         * cell renderer(s) as appropriate.
         * 
         * `func` may be `null` to remove a previously set function.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param func the {@link Gtk.CellLayoutDataFunc} to use, or `null`
         */
        set_cell_data_func(cell: CellRenderer, func: CellLayoutDataFunc | null): void;

        /**
         * Adds an attribute mapping to the list in `cell_layout`.
         * 
         * The `column` is the column of the model to get a value from, and the
         * `attribute` is the parameter on `cell` to be set from the value. So for
         * example if column 2 of the model contains strings, you could have the
         * “text” attribute of a {@link Gtk.CellRendererText} get its values from column 2.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param attribute an attribute on the renderer
         * @param column the column position on the model to get the attribute from
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add_attribute(cell: CellRenderer, attribute: string, column: number): void;

        /**
         * Unsets all the mappings on all renderers on `cell_layout` and
         * removes all renderers from `cell_layout`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_clear(): void;

        /**
         * Clears all existing attributes previously set with
         * `gtk_cell_layout_set_attributes()`.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} to clear the attribute mapping on
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_clear_attributes(cell: CellRenderer): void;

        /**
         * Returns the underlying {@link Gtk.CellArea} which might be `cell_layout`
         * if called on a {@link Gtk.CellArea} or might be `null` if no {@link Gtk.CellArea}
         * is used by `cell_layout`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_area(): CellArea | null;

        /**
         * Returns the cell renderers which have been added to `cell_layout`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_cells(): CellRenderer[];

        /**
         * Adds the `cell` to the end of `cell_layout`. If `expand` is `false`, then the
         * `cell` is allocated no more space than it needs. Any unused space is
         * divided evenly between cells for which `expand` is `true`.
         * 
         * Note that reusing the same cell renderer is not supported.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param expand `true` if `cell` is to be given extra space allocated to `cell_layout`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_pack_end(cell: CellRenderer, expand: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Packs the `cell` into the beginning of `cell_layout`. If `expand` is `false`,
         * then the `cell` is allocated no more space than it needs. Any unused space
         * is divided evenly between cells for which `expand` is `true`.
         * 
         * Note that reusing the same cell renderer is not supported.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param expand `true` if `cell` is to be given extra space allocated to `cell_layout`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_pack_start(cell: CellRenderer, expand: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Re-inserts `cell` at `position`.
         * 
         * Note that `cell` has already to be packed into `cell_layout`
         * for this to function properly.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} to reorder
         * @param position new position to insert `cell` at
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_reorder(cell: CellRenderer, position: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.CellLayoutDataFunc} to use for `cell_layout`.
         * 
         * This function is used instead of the standard attributes mapping
         * for setting the column value, and should set the value of `cell_layout`’s
         * cell renderer(s) as appropriate.
         * 
         * `func` may be `null` to remove a previously set function.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param func the {@link Gtk.CellLayoutDataFunc} to use, or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_cell_data_func(cell: CellRenderer, func: CellLayoutDataFunc | null): void;

        /**
         * Returns the size of a non-scrolling border around the
         * outside of the scrollable. An example for this would
         * be treeview headers. GTK+ can use this information to
         * display overlayed graphics, like the overshoot indication,
         * at the right position.
         * @returns `true` if `border` has been set
         */
        get_border(): [boolean, Border];

        /**
         * Retrieves the {@link Gtk.Adjustment} used for horizontal scrolling.
         * @returns horizontal {@link Gtk.Adjustment}.
         */
        get_hadjustment(): Adjustment;

        /**
         * Gets the horizontal {@link Gtk.ScrollablePolicy}.
         * @returns The horizontal {@link Gtk.ScrollablePolicy}.
         */
        get_hscroll_policy(): ScrollablePolicy;

        /**
         * Retrieves the {@link Gtk.Adjustment} used for vertical scrolling.
         * @returns vertical {@link Gtk.Adjustment}.
         */
        get_vadjustment(): Adjustment;

        /**
         * Gets the vertical {@link Gtk.ScrollablePolicy}.
         * @returns The vertical {@link Gtk.ScrollablePolicy}.
         */
        get_vscroll_policy(): ScrollablePolicy;

        /**
         * Sets the horizontal adjustment of the {@link Gtk.Scrollable}.
         * @param hadjustment a {@link Gtk.Adjustment}
         */
        set_hadjustment(hadjustment: Adjustment | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.ScrollablePolicy} to determine whether
         * horizontal scrolling should start below the minimum width or
         * below the natural width.
         * @param policy the horizontal {@link Gtk.ScrollablePolicy}
         */
        set_hscroll_policy(policy: ScrollablePolicy): void;

        /**
         * Sets the vertical adjustment of the {@link Gtk.Scrollable}.
         * @param vadjustment a {@link Gtk.Adjustment}
         */
        set_vadjustment(vadjustment: Adjustment | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.ScrollablePolicy} to determine whether
         * vertical scrolling should start below the minimum height or
         * below the natural height.
         * @param policy the vertical {@link Gtk.ScrollablePolicy}
         */
        set_vscroll_policy(policy: ScrollablePolicy): void;

        /**
         * Returns the size of a non-scrolling border around the
         * outside of the scrollable. An example for this would
         * be treeview headers. GTK+ can use this information to
         * display overlayed graphics, like the overshoot indication,
         * at the right position.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_border(): [boolean, Border];
    }


    namespace IconViewAccessible {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends ContainerAccessible.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-layer": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-mdi-zorder": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-help-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-hypertext-nlinks": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption-object": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-summary": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends ContainerAccessible.ConstructorProps, Atk.Component.ConstructorProps, Atk.Selection.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class IconViewAccessible extends ContainerAccessible implements Atk.Component, Atk.Selection {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<IconViewAccessible>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: IconViewAccessible.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<IconViewAccessible.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof IconViewAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, IconViewAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof IconViewAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, IconViewAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof IconViewAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<IconViewAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        /**
         * Adds the specified accessible child of the object to the
         * object's selection.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the child index.
         * @returns TRUE if success, FALSE otherwise.
         */
        add_selection(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Clears the selection in the object so that no children in the object
         * are selected.
         * @returns TRUE if success, FALSE otherwise.
         */
        clear_selection(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the number of accessible children currently selected.
         * Note: callers should not rely on `null` or on a zero value for
         * indication of whether AtkSelectionIface is implemented, they should
         * use type checking/interface checking macros or the
         * `atk_get_accessible_value()` convenience method.
         * @returns a gint representing the number of items selected, or 0 if `selection` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_selection_count(): number;

        /**
         * Determines if the current child of this object is selected
         * Note: callers should not rely on `null` or on a zero value for
         * indication of whether AtkSelectionIface is implemented, they should
         * use type checking/interface checking macros or the
         * `atk_get_accessible_value()` convenience method.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the child index.
         * @returns a gboolean representing the specified child is selected, or 0 if `selection` does not implement this interface.
         */
        is_child_selected(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets a reference to the accessible object representing the specified
         * selected child of the object.
         * Note: callers should not rely on `null` or on a zero value for
         * indication of whether AtkSelectionIface is implemented, they should
         * use type checking/interface checking macros or the
         * `atk_get_accessible_value()` convenience method.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the index in the selection set.  (e.g. the ith selection as opposed to the ith child).
         * @returns an {@link Atk.Object} representing the selected accessible, or `null` if `selection` does not implement this interface.
         */
        ref_selection(i: number): Atk.Object | null;

        /**
         * Removes the specified child of the object from the object's selection.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the index in the selection set.  (e.g. the ith selection as opposed to the ith child).
         * @returns TRUE if success, FALSE otherwise.
         */
        remove_selection(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Causes every child of the object to be selected if the object
         * supports multiple selections.
         * @returns TRUE if success, FALSE otherwise.
         */
        select_all_selection(): boolean;

        /**
         * Adds the specified accessible child of the object to the
         * object's selection.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the child index.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add_selection(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Clears the selection in the object so that no children in the object
         * are selected.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_clear_selection(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the number of accessible children currently selected.
         * Note: callers should not rely on `null` or on a zero value for
         * indication of whether AtkSelectionIface is implemented, they should
         * use type checking/interface checking macros or the
         * `atk_get_accessible_value()` convenience method.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_selection_count(): number;

        /**
         * Determines if the current child of this object is selected
         * Note: callers should not rely on `null` or on a zero value for
         * indication of whether AtkSelectionIface is implemented, they should
         * use type checking/interface checking macros or the
         * `atk_get_accessible_value()` convenience method.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the child index.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_is_child_selected(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets a reference to the accessible object representing the specified
         * selected child of the object.
         * Note: callers should not rely on `null` or on a zero value for
         * indication of whether AtkSelectionIface is implemented, they should
         * use type checking/interface checking macros or the
         * `atk_get_accessible_value()` convenience method.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the index in the selection set.  (e.g. the ith selection as opposed to the ith child).
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_ref_selection(i: number): Atk.Object | null;

        /**
         * Removes the specified child of the object from the object's selection.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the index in the selection set.  (e.g. the ith selection as opposed to the ith child).
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_remove_selection(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Causes every child of the object to be selected if the object
         * supports multiple selections.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_select_all_selection(): boolean;

        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_selection_changed(): void;
    }


    namespace Image {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Misc.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::file": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gicon": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::icon-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::icon-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::icon-size": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::pixbuf": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::pixbuf-animation": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::pixel-size": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resource": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::stock": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::storage-type": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::surface": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-fallback": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::xalign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::xpad": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::yalign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::ypad": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Misc.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {
            file: string;
            gicon: Gio.Icon;
            icon_name: string;
            iconName: string;
            icon_set: IconSet;
            iconSet: IconSet;
            icon_size: number;
            iconSize: number;
            pixbuf: GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf | null;
            pixbuf_animation: GdkPixbuf.PixbufAnimation;
            pixbufAnimation: GdkPixbuf.PixbufAnimation;
            pixel_size: number;
            pixelSize: number;
            resource: string;
            stock: string;
            storage_type: ImageType;
            storageType: ImageType;
            surface: cairo.Surface;
            use_fallback: boolean;
            useFallback: boolean;
        }
    }

    /**
     * The {@link Gtk.Image} widget displays an image. Various kinds of object
     * can be displayed as an image; most typically, you would load a
     * {@link GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf} ("pixel buffer") from a file, and then display that.
     * There’s a convenience function to do this, `gtk_image_new_from_file()`,
     * used as follows:
     * 
     * ```c
     *   GtkWidget *image;
     *   image = gtk_image_new_from_file ("myfile.png");
     * ```
     * 
     * If the file isn’t loaded successfully, the image will contain a
     * “broken image” icon similar to that used in many web browsers.
     * If you want to handle errors in loading the file yourself,
     * for example by displaying an error message, then load the image with
     * `gdk_pixbuf_new_from_file()`, then create the {@link Gtk.Image} with
     * `gtk_image_new_from_pixbuf()`.
     * 
     * The image file may contain an animation, if so the {@link Gtk.Image} will
     * display an animation ({@link GdkPixbuf.PixbufAnimation}) instead of a static image.
     * 
     * {@link Gtk.Image} is a subclass of {@link Gtk.Misc}, which implies that you can
     * align it (center, left, right) and add padding to it, using
     * {@link Gtk.Misc} methods.
     * 
     * {@link Gtk.Image} is a “no window” widget (has no {@link Gdk.Window} of its own),
     * so by default does not receive events. If you want to receive events
     * on the image, such as button clicks, place the image inside a
     * {@link Gtk.EventBox}, then connect to the event signals on the event box.
     * 
     * ## Handling button press events on a {@link Gtk.Image}.
     * 
     * 
     * ```c
     *   static gboolean
     *   button_press_callback (GtkWidget      *event_box,
     *                          GdkEventButton *event,
     *                          gpointer        data)
     *   {
     *     g_print ("Event box clicked at coordinates %f,%f\n",
     *              event->x, event->y);
     * 
     *     // Returning TRUE means we handled the event, so the signal
     *     // emission should be stopped (don’t call any further callbacks
     *     // that may be connected). Return FALSE to continue invoking callbacks.
     *     return TRUE;
     *   }
     * 
     *   static GtkWidget*
     *   create_image (void)
     *   {
     *     GtkWidget *image;
     *     GtkWidget *event_box;
     * 
     *     image = gtk_image_new_from_file ("myfile.png");
     * 
     *     event_box = gtk_event_box_new ();
     * 
     *     gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (event_box), image);
     * 
     *     g_signal_connect (G_OBJECT (event_box),
     *                       "button_press_event",
     *                       G_CALLBACK (button_press_callback),
     *                       image);
     * 
     *     return image;
     *   }
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * When handling events on the event box, keep in mind that coordinates
     * in the image may be different from event box coordinates due to
     * the alignment and padding settings on the image (see {@link Gtk.Misc}).
     * The simplest way to solve this is to set the alignment to 0.0
     * (left/top), and set the padding to zero. Then the origin of
     * the image will be the same as the origin of the event box.
     * 
     * Sometimes an application will want to avoid depending on external data
     * files, such as image files. GTK+ comes with a program to avoid this,
     * called “gdk-pixbuf-csource”. This library
     * allows you to convert an image into a C variable declaration, which
     * can then be loaded into a {@link GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf} using
     * `gdk_pixbuf_new_from_inline()`.
     * 
     * # CSS nodes
     * 
     * GtkImage has a single CSS node with the name image. The style classes
     * may appear on image CSS nodes: .icon-dropshadow, .lowres-icon.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class Image extends Misc implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<Image>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * @default null
         */
        get file(): string;
        set file(val: string);

        /**
         * The GIcon displayed in the GtkImage. For themed icons,
         * If the icon theme is changed, the image will be updated
         * automatically.
         * @since 2.14
         */
        get gicon(): Gio.Icon;
        set gicon(val: Gio.Icon);

        /**
         * The name of the icon in the icon theme. If the icon theme is
         * changed, the image will be updated automatically.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default null
         */
        get icon_name(): string;
        set icon_name(val: string);

        /**
         * The name of the icon in the icon theme. If the icon theme is
         * changed, the image will be updated automatically.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default null
         */
        get iconName(): string;
        set iconName(val: string);

        /**
         * @deprecated since 3.10: Use {@link Gtk.Image.icon_name} instead.
         */
        get icon_set(): IconSet;
        set icon_set(val: IconSet);

        /**
         * @deprecated since 3.10: Use {@link Gtk.Image.icon_name} instead.
         */
        get iconSet(): IconSet;
        set iconSet(val: IconSet);

        /**
         * @default 4
         */
        get icon_size(): number;
        set icon_size(val: number);

        /**
         * @default 4
         */
        get iconSize(): number;
        set iconSize(val: number);

        get pixbuf(): GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf | null;
        set pixbuf(val: GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf | null);

        get pixbuf_animation(): GdkPixbuf.PixbufAnimation;
        set pixbuf_animation(val: GdkPixbuf.PixbufAnimation);

        get pixbufAnimation(): GdkPixbuf.PixbufAnimation;
        set pixbufAnimation(val: GdkPixbuf.PixbufAnimation);

        /**
         * The "pixel-size" property can be used to specify a fixed size
         * overriding the {@link Gtk.Image.icon_size} property for images of type
         * {@link Gtk.ImageType.ICON_NAME}.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default -1
         */
        get pixel_size(): number;
        set pixel_size(val: number);

        /**
         * The "pixel-size" property can be used to specify a fixed size
         * overriding the {@link Gtk.Image.icon_size} property for images of type
         * {@link Gtk.ImageType.ICON_NAME}.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default -1
         */
        get pixelSize(): number;
        set pixelSize(val: number);

        /**
         * A path to a resource file to display.
         * @since 3.8
         * @default null
         */
        get resource(): string;
        set resource(val: string);

        /**
         * @deprecated since 3.10: Use {@link Gtk.Image.icon_name} instead.
         * @default null
         */
        get stock(): string;
        set stock(val: string);

        /**
         * @read-only
         * @default Gtk.ImageType.EMPTY
         */
        get storage_type(): ImageType;

        /**
         * @read-only
         * @default Gtk.ImageType.EMPTY
         */
        get storageType(): ImageType;

        get surface(): cairo.Surface;
        set surface(val: cairo.Surface);

        /**
         * Whether the icon displayed in the GtkImage will use
         * standard icon names fallback. The value of this property
         * is only relevant for images of type {@link Gtk.ImageType.ICON_NAME}
         * and {@link Gtk.ImageType.GICON}.
         * @since 3.0
         * @default false
         */
        get use_fallback(): boolean;
        set use_fallback(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether the icon displayed in the GtkImage will use
         * standard icon names fallback. The value of this property
         * is only relevant for images of type {@link Gtk.ImageType.ICON_NAME}
         * and {@link Gtk.ImageType.GICON}.
         * @since 3.0
         * @default false
         */
        get useFallback(): boolean;
        set useFallback(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: Image.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        misc: Misc;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<Image.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): Image;

        static new_from_animation(animation: GdkPixbuf.PixbufAnimation): Image;

        static new_from_file(filename: string): Image;

        static new_from_gicon(icon: Gio.Icon, size: number): Image;

        static new_from_icon_name(icon_name: string | null, size: number): Image;

        static new_from_icon_set(icon_set: IconSet, size: number): Image;

        static new_from_pixbuf(pixbuf: GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf | null): Image;

        static new_from_resource(resource_path: string): Image;

        static new_from_stock(stock_id: string, size: number): Image;

        static new_from_surface(surface: cairo.Surface | null): Image;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof Image.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Image.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof Image.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Image.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof Image.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<Image.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Resets the image to be empty.
         */
        clear(): void;

        /**
         * Gets the {@link GdkPixbuf.PixbufAnimation} being displayed by the {@link Gtk.Image}.
         * The storage type of the image must be {@link Gtk.ImageType.EMPTY} or
         * {@link Gtk.ImageType.ANIMATION} (see `gtk_image_get_storage_type()`).
         * The caller of this function does not own a reference to the
         * returned animation.
         * @returns the displayed animation, or `null` if the image is empty
         */
        get_animation(): GdkPixbuf.PixbufAnimation | null;

        /**
         * Gets the {@link Gio.Icon} and size being displayed by the {@link Gtk.Image}.
         * The storage type of the image must be {@link Gtk.ImageType.EMPTY} or
         * {@link Gtk.ImageType.GICON} (see `gtk_image_get_storage_type()`).
         * The caller of this function does not own a reference to the
         * returned {@link Gio.Icon}.
         */
        get_gicon(): [Gio.Icon | null, number];

        /**
         * Gets the icon name and size being displayed by the {@link Gtk.Image}.
         * The storage type of the image must be {@link Gtk.ImageType.EMPTY} or
         * {@link Gtk.ImageType.ICON_NAME} (see `gtk_image_get_storage_type()`).
         * The returned string is owned by the {@link Gtk.Image} and should not
         * be freed.
         */
        get_icon_name(): [string, number];

        /**
         * Gets the icon set and size being displayed by the {@link Gtk.Image}.
         * The storage type of the image must be {@link Gtk.ImageType.EMPTY} or
         * {@link Gtk.ImageType.ICON_SET} (see `gtk_image_get_storage_type()`).
         */
        get_icon_set(): [IconSet | null, number];

        /**
         * Gets the {@link GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf} being displayed by the {@link Gtk.Image}.
         * The storage type of the image must be {@link Gtk.ImageType.EMPTY} or
         * {@link Gtk.ImageType.PIXBUF} (see `gtk_image_get_storage_type()`).
         * The caller of this function does not own a reference to the
         * returned pixbuf.
         * @returns the displayed pixbuf, or `null` if the image is empty
         */
        get_pixbuf(): GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf | null;

        /**
         * Gets the pixel size used for named icons.
         * @returns the pixel size used for named icons.
         */
        get_pixel_size(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the stock icon name and size being displayed by the {@link Gtk.Image}.
         * The storage type of the image must be {@link Gtk.ImageType.EMPTY} or
         * {@link Gtk.ImageType.STOCK} (see `gtk_image_get_storage_type()`).
         * The returned string is owned by the {@link Gtk.Image} and should not
         * be freed.
         */
        get_stock(): [string, number];

        /**
         * Gets the type of representation being used by the {@link Gtk.Image}
         * to store image data. If the {@link Gtk.Image} has no image data,
         * the return value will be {@link Gtk.ImageType.EMPTY}.
         * @returns image representation being used
         */
        get_storage_type(): ImageType;

        /**
         * Causes the {@link Gtk.Image} to display the given animation (or display
         * nothing, if you set the animation to `null`).
         * @param animation the {@link GdkPixbuf.PixbufAnimation}
         */
        set_from_animation(animation: GdkPixbuf.PixbufAnimation): void;

        /**
         * See `gtk_image_new_from_file()` for details.
         * @param filename a filename or `null`
         */
        set_from_file(filename: string | null): void;

        /**
         * See `gtk_image_new_from_gicon()` for details.
         * @param icon an icon
         * @param size an icon size ({@link Gtk.IconSize})
         */
        set_from_gicon(icon: Gio.Icon, size: number): void;

        /**
         * See `gtk_image_new_from_icon_name()` for details.
         * @param icon_name an icon name or `null`
         * @param size an icon size ({@link Gtk.IconSize})
         */
        set_from_icon_name(icon_name: string | null, size: number): void;

        /**
         * See `gtk_image_new_from_icon_set()` for details.
         * @param icon_set a {@link Gtk.IconSet}
         * @param size a stock icon size ({@link Gtk.IconSize})
         */
        set_from_icon_set(icon_set: IconSet, size: number): void;

        /**
         * See `gtk_image_new_from_pixbuf()` for details.
         * @param pixbuf a {@link GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf} or `null`
         */
        set_from_pixbuf(pixbuf: GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf | null): void;

        /**
         * See `gtk_image_new_from_resource()` for details.
         * @param resource_path a resource path or `null`
         */
        set_from_resource(resource_path: string | null): void;

        /**
         * See `gtk_image_new_from_stock()` for details.
         * @param stock_id a stock icon name
         * @param size a stock icon size ({@link Gtk.IconSize})
         */
        set_from_stock(stock_id: string, size: number): void;

        /**
         * See `gtk_image_new_from_surface()` for details.
         * @param surface a cairo_surface_t or `null`
         */
        set_from_surface(surface: cairo.Surface | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the pixel size to use for named icons. If the pixel size is set
         * to a value != -1, it is used instead of the icon size set by
         * `gtk_image_set_from_icon_name()`.
         * @param pixel_size the new pixel size
         */
        set_pixel_size(pixel_size: number): void;
    }


    namespace ImageAccessible {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends WidgetAccessible.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-layer": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-mdi-zorder": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-help-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-hypertext-nlinks": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption-object": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-summary": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends WidgetAccessible.ConstructorProps, Atk.Component.ConstructorProps, Atk.Image.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class ImageAccessible extends WidgetAccessible implements Atk.Component, Atk.Image {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ImageAccessible>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: ImageAccessible.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<ImageAccessible.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof ImageAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ImageAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof ImageAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ImageAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof ImageAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<ImageAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        /**
         * Checks whether the specified point is within the extent of the `component`.
         * 
         * Toolkit implementor note: ATK provides a default implementation for
         * this virtual method. In general there are little reason to
         * re-implement it.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @returns `true` or `false` indicating whether the specified point is within the extent of the `component` or not
         */
        contains(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the alpha value (i.e. the opacity) for this
         * `component`, on a scale from 0 (fully transparent) to 1.0
         * (fully opaque).
         * @returns An alpha value from 0 to 1.0, inclusive.
         */
        get_alpha(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the rectangle which gives the extent of the `component`.
         * 
         * If the extent can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), all of x, y, width, height are set to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         */
        get_extents(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the layer of the component.
         * @returns an {@link Atk.Layer} which is the layer of the component
         */
        get_layer(): Atk.Layer;

        /**
         * Gets the zorder of the component. The value G_MININT will be returned
         * if the layer of the component is not ATK_LAYER_MDI or ATK_LAYER_WINDOW.
         * @returns a gint which is the zorder of the component, i.e. the depth at which the component is shown in relation to other components in the same container.
         */
        get_mdi_zorder(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the position of `component` in the form of
         * a point specifying `component`'s top-left corner.
         * 
         * If the position can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), x and y are set to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         */
        get_position(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the size of the `component` in terms of width and height.
         * 
         * If the size can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), width and height are set to -1.
         */
        get_size(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Grabs focus for this `component`.
         * @returns `true` if successful, `false` otherwise.
         */
        grab_focus(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets a reference to the accessible child, if one exists, at the
         * coordinate point specified by `x` and `y`.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @returns a reference to the accessible child, if one exists
         */
        ref_accessible_at_point(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): Atk.Object | null;

        /**
         * Remove the handler specified by `handler_id` from the list of
         * functions to be executed when this object receives focus events
         * (in or out).
         * @param handler_id the handler id of the focus handler to be removed from `component`
         */
        remove_focus_handler(handler_id: number): void;

        /**
         * Makes `component` visible on the screen by scrolling all necessary parents.
         * 
         * Contrary to atk_component_set_position, this does not actually move
         * `component` in its parent, this only makes the parents scroll so that the
         * object shows up on the screen, given its current position within the parents.
         * @param type specify where the object should be made visible.
         * @returns whether scrolling was successful.
         */
        scroll_to(type: Atk.ScrollType): boolean;

        /**
         * Move the top-left of `component` to a given position of the screen by
         * scrolling all necessary parents.
         * @param coords specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or to the parent object.
         * @param x x-position where to scroll to
         * @param y y-position where to scroll to
         * @returns whether scrolling was successful.
         */
        scroll_to_point(coords: Atk.CoordType, x: number, y: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the extents of `component`.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param width width to set for `component`
         * @param height height to set for `component`
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @returns `true` or `false` whether the extents were set or not
         */
        set_extents(x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the position of `component`.
         * 
         * Contrary to atk_component_scroll_to, this does not trigger any scrolling,
         * this just moves `component` in its parent.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the component's top level window
         * @returns `true` or `false` whether or not the position was set or not
         */
        set_position(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Set the size of the `component` in terms of width and height.
         * @param width width to set for `component`
         * @param height height to set for `component`
         * @returns `true` or `false` whether the size was set or not
         */
        set_size(width: number, height: number): boolean;

        /**
         * @param bounds 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_bounds_changed(bounds: Atk.Rectangle): void;

        /**
         * Checks whether the specified point is within the extent of the `component`.
         * 
         * Toolkit implementor note: ATK provides a default implementation for
         * this virtual method. In general there are little reason to
         * re-implement it.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_contains(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the alpha value (i.e. the opacity) for this
         * `component`, on a scale from 0 (fully transparent) to 1.0
         * (fully opaque).
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_alpha(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the rectangle which gives the extent of the `component`.
         * 
         * If the extent can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), all of x, y, width, height are set to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_extents(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the layer of the component.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_layer(): Atk.Layer;

        /**
         * Gets the zorder of the component. The value G_MININT will be returned
         * if the layer of the component is not ATK_LAYER_MDI or ATK_LAYER_WINDOW.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_mdi_zorder(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the position of `component` in the form of
         * a point specifying `component`'s top-left corner.
         * 
         * If the position can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), x and y are set to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_position(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the size of the `component` in terms of width and height.
         * 
         * If the size can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), width and height are set to -1.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_size(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Grabs focus for this `component`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_grab_focus(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets a reference to the accessible child, if one exists, at the
         * coordinate point specified by `x` and `y`.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_ref_accessible_at_point(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): Atk.Object | null;

        /**
         * Remove the handler specified by `handler_id` from the list of
         * functions to be executed when this object receives focus events
         * (in or out).
         * @param handler_id the handler id of the focus handler to be removed from `component`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_remove_focus_handler(handler_id: number): void;

        /**
         * Makes `component` visible on the screen by scrolling all necessary parents.
         * 
         * Contrary to atk_component_set_position, this does not actually move
         * `component` in its parent, this only makes the parents scroll so that the
         * object shows up on the screen, given its current position within the parents.
         * @param type specify where the object should be made visible.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_scroll_to(type: Atk.ScrollType): boolean;

        /**
         * Move the top-left of `component` to a given position of the screen by
         * scrolling all necessary parents.
         * @param coords specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or to the parent object.
         * @param x x-position where to scroll to
         * @param y y-position where to scroll to
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_scroll_to_point(coords: Atk.CoordType, x: number, y: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the extents of `component`.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param width width to set for `component`
         * @param height height to set for `component`
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_extents(x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the position of `component`.
         * 
         * Contrary to atk_component_scroll_to, this does not trigger any scrolling,
         * this just moves `component` in its parent.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the component's top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_position(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Set the size of the `component` in terms of width and height.
         * @param width width to set for `component`
         * @param height height to set for `component`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_size(width: number, height: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Get a textual description of this image.
         * @returns a string representing the image description
         */
        get_image_description(): string;

        /**
         * Retrieves the locale identifier associated to the {@link Atk.Image}.
         * @returns a string corresponding to the POSIX   `LC_MESSAGES` locale used by the image description, or   `null` if the image does not specify a locale.
         */
        get_image_locale(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the position of the image in the form of a point specifying the
         * images top-left corner.
         * 
         * If the position can not be obtained (e.g. missing support), x and y are set
         * to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         */
        get_image_position(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number];

        /**
         * Get the width and height in pixels for the specified image.
         * The values of `width` and `height` are returned as -1 if the
         * values cannot be obtained (for instance, if the object is not onscreen).
         * 
         * If the size can not be obtained (e.g. missing support), x and y are set
         * to -1.
         */
        get_image_size(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Sets the textual description for this image.
         * @param description a string description to set for `image`
         * @returns boolean TRUE, or FALSE if operation could not be completed.
         */
        set_image_description(description: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Get a textual description of this image.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_image_description(): string;

        /**
         * Retrieves the locale identifier associated to the {@link Atk.Image}.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_image_locale(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the position of the image in the form of a point specifying the
         * images top-left corner.
         * 
         * If the position can not be obtained (e.g. missing support), x and y are set
         * to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_image_position(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number];

        /**
         * Get the width and height in pixels for the specified image.
         * The values of `width` and `height` are returned as -1 if the
         * values cannot be obtained (for instance, if the object is not onscreen).
         * 
         * If the size can not be obtained (e.g. missing support), x and y are set
         * to -1.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_image_size(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Sets the textual description for this image.
         * @param description a string description to set for `image`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_image_description(description: string): boolean;
    }


    namespace ImageCellAccessible {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends RendererCellAccessible.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::renderer": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-layer": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-mdi-zorder": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-help-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-hypertext-nlinks": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption-object": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-summary": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends RendererCellAccessible.ConstructorProps, Atk.Action.ConstructorProps, Atk.Component.ConstructorProps, Atk.Image.ConstructorProps, Atk.TableCell.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class ImageCellAccessible extends RendererCellAccessible implements Atk.Action, Atk.Component, Atk.Image, Atk.TableCell {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ImageCellAccessible>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: ImageCellAccessible.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<ImageCellAccessible.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof ImageCellAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ImageCellAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof ImageCellAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ImageCellAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof ImageCellAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<ImageCellAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        /**
         * Get a textual description of this image.
         * @returns a string representing the image description
         */
        get_image_description(): string;

        /**
         * Retrieves the locale identifier associated to the {@link Atk.Image}.
         * @returns a string corresponding to the POSIX   `LC_MESSAGES` locale used by the image description, or   `null` if the image does not specify a locale.
         */
        get_image_locale(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the position of the image in the form of a point specifying the
         * images top-left corner.
         * 
         * If the position can not be obtained (e.g. missing support), x and y are set
         * to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         */
        get_image_position(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number];

        /**
         * Get the width and height in pixels for the specified image.
         * The values of `width` and `height` are returned as -1 if the
         * values cannot be obtained (for instance, if the object is not onscreen).
         * 
         * If the size can not be obtained (e.g. missing support), x and y are set
         * to -1.
         */
        get_image_size(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Sets the textual description for this image.
         * @param description a string description to set for `image`
         * @returns boolean TRUE, or FALSE if operation could not be completed.
         */
        set_image_description(description: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Get a textual description of this image.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_image_description(): string;

        /**
         * Retrieves the locale identifier associated to the {@link Atk.Image}.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_image_locale(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the position of the image in the form of a point specifying the
         * images top-left corner.
         * 
         * If the position can not be obtained (e.g. missing support), x and y are set
         * to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_image_position(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number];

        /**
         * Get the width and height in pixels for the specified image.
         * The values of `width` and `height` are returned as -1 if the
         * values cannot be obtained (for instance, if the object is not onscreen).
         * 
         * If the size can not be obtained (e.g. missing support), x and y are set
         * to -1.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_image_size(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Sets the textual description for this image.
         * @param description a string description to set for `image`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_image_description(description: string): boolean;
    }


    namespace ImageMenuItem {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends MenuItem.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::accel-group": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::always-show-image": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::image": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-stock": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accel-path": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::label": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::right-justified": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::submenu": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-underline": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::action-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::action-target": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::related-action": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-action-appearance": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends MenuItem.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Actionable.ConstructorProps, Activatable.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {
            accel_group: AccelGroup;
            accelGroup: AccelGroup;
            always_show_image: boolean;
            alwaysShowImage: boolean;
            image: Widget;
            use_stock: boolean;
            useStock: boolean;
        }
    }

    /**
     * A GtkImageMenuItem is a menu item which has an icon next to the text label.
     * 
     * This is functionally equivalent to:
     * 
     * 
     * ```c
     *   GtkWidget *box = gtk_box_new (GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL, 6);
     *   GtkWidget *icon = gtk_image_new_from_icon_name ("folder-music-symbolic", GTK_ICON_SIZE_MENU);
     *   GtkWidget *label = gtk_label_new ("Music");
     *   GtkWidget *menu_item = gtk_menu_item_new ();
     * 
     *   gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (box), icon);
     *   gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (box), label);
     * 
     *   gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (menu_item), box);
     * 
     *   gtk_widget_show_all (menu_item);
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * Note that the user may disable display of menu icons using
     * the {@link Gtk.Settings.gtk_menu_images} setting, so make sure to still
     * fill in the text label. If you want to ensure that your menu items
     * show an icon you are strongly encouraged to use a {@link Gtk.MenuItem}
     * with a {@link Gtk.Image} instead.
     * 
     * {@link Gtk.ImageMenuItem} has been deprecated since GTK+ 3.10. If you want to
     * display an icon in a menu item, you should use {@link Gtk.MenuItem} and pack a
     * {@link Gtk.Box} with a {@link Gtk.Image} and a {@link Gtk.Label} instead. You should also consider
     * using {@link Gtk.Builder} and the XML {@link Gio.Menu} description for creating menus, by
     * following the [GMenu guide][https://developer.gnome.org/GMenu/]. You should
     * consider using icons in menu items only sparingly, and for "objects" (or
     * "nouns") elements only, like bookmarks, files, and links; "actions" (or
     * "verbs") should not have icons.
     * 
     * Furthermore, if you would like to display keyboard accelerator, you must
     * pack the accel label into the box using `gtk_box_pack_end()` and align the
     * label, otherwise the accelerator will not display correctly. The following
     * code snippet adds a keyboard accelerator to the menu item, with a key
     * binding of Ctrl+M:
     * 
     * 
     * ```c
     *   GtkWidget *box = gtk_box_new (GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL, 6);
     *   GtkWidget *icon = gtk_image_new_from_icon_name ("folder-music-symbolic", GTK_ICON_SIZE_MENU);
     *   GtkWidget *label = gtk_accel_label_new ("Music");
     *   GtkWidget *menu_item = gtk_menu_item_new ();
     *   GtkAccelGroup *accel_group = gtk_accel_group_new ();
     * 
     *   gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (box), icon);
     * 
     *   gtk_label_set_use_underline (GTK_LABEL (label), TRUE);
     *   gtk_label_set_xalign (GTK_LABEL (label), 0.0);
     * 
     *   gtk_widget_add_accelerator (menu_item, "activate", accel_group,
     *                               GDK_KEY_m, GDK_CONTROL_MASK, GTK_ACCEL_VISIBLE);
     *   gtk_accel_label_set_accel_widget (GTK_ACCEL_LABEL (label), menu_item);
     * 
     *   gtk_box_pack_end (GTK_BOX (box), label, TRUE, TRUE, 0);
     * 
     *   gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (menu_item), box);
     * 
     *   gtk_widget_show_all (menu_item);
     * ```
     * 
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class ImageMenuItem extends MenuItem implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Actionable, Activatable, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ImageMenuItem>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * The Accel Group to use for stock accelerator keys
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10: Use `gtk_widget_add_accelerator()` instead
         * @write-only
         */
        set accel_group(val: AccelGroup);

        /**
         * The Accel Group to use for stock accelerator keys
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10: Use `gtk_widget_add_accelerator()` instead
         * @write-only
         */
        set accelGroup(val: AccelGroup);

        /**
         * If `true`, the menu item will always show the image, if available.
         * 
         * Use this property only if the menuitem would be useless or hard to use
         * without the image.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10: Use a {@link Gtk.MenuItem} containing a {@link Gtk.Box} with   a {@link Gtk.AccelLabel} and a {@link Gtk.Image} instead
         * @default false
         */
        get always_show_image(): boolean;
        set always_show_image(val: boolean);

        /**
         * If `true`, the menu item will always show the image, if available.
         * 
         * Use this property only if the menuitem would be useless or hard to use
         * without the image.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10: Use a {@link Gtk.MenuItem} containing a {@link Gtk.Box} with   a {@link Gtk.AccelLabel} and a {@link Gtk.Image} instead
         * @default false
         */
        get alwaysShowImage(): boolean;
        set alwaysShowImage(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Child widget to appear next to the menu text.
         * @deprecated since 3.10: Use a {@link Gtk.MenuItem} containing a {@link Gtk.Box} with   a {@link Gtk.AccelLabel} and a {@link Gtk.Image} instead
         */
        get image(): Widget;
        set image(val: Widget);

        /**
         * If `true`, the label set in the menuitem is used as a
         * stock id to select the stock item for the item.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10: Use a named icon from the {@link Gtk.IconTheme} instead
         * @default false
         */
        get use_stock(): boolean;
        set use_stock(val: boolean);

        /**
         * If `true`, the label set in the menuitem is used as a
         * stock id to select the stock item for the item.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10: Use a named icon from the {@link Gtk.IconTheme} instead
         * @default false
         */
        get useStock(): boolean;
        set useStock(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: ImageMenuItem.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        menu_item: MenuItem;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<ImageMenuItem.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): ImageMenuItem;

        static new_from_stock(stock_id: string, accel_group: AccelGroup | null): ImageMenuItem;

        static new_with_label(label: string): ImageMenuItem;

        static new_with_mnemonic(label: string): ImageMenuItem;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof ImageMenuItem.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ImageMenuItem.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof ImageMenuItem.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ImageMenuItem.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof ImageMenuItem.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<ImageMenuItem.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Returns whether the menu item will ignore the {@link Gtk.Settings.gtk_menu_images}
         * setting and always show the image, if available.
         * @returns `true` if the menu item will always show the image
         */
        get_always_show_image(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the widget that is currently set as the image of `image_menu_item`.
         * See `gtk_image_menu_item_set_image()`.
         * @returns the widget set as image of `image_menu_item`
         */
        get_image(): Widget;

        /**
         * Checks whether the label set in the menuitem is used as a
         * stock id to select the stock item for the item.
         * @returns `true` if the label set in the menuitem is used as a     stock id to select the stock item for the item
         */
        get_use_stock(): boolean;

        /**
         * Specifies an `accel_group` to add the menu items accelerator to
         * (this only applies to stock items so a stock item must already
         * be set, make sure to call `gtk_image_menu_item_set_use_stock()`
         * and `gtk_menu_item_set_label()` with a valid stock item first).
         * 
         * If you want this menu item to have changeable accelerators then
         * you shouldnt need this (see `gtk_image_menu_item_new_from_stock()`).
         * @param accel_group the {@link Gtk.AccelGroup}
         */
        set_accel_group(accel_group: AccelGroup): void;

        /**
         * If `true`, the menu item will ignore the {@link Gtk.Settings.gtk_menu_images}
         * setting and always show the image, if available.
         * 
         * Use this property if the menuitem would be useless or hard to use
         * without the image.
         * @param always_show `true` if the menuitem should always show the image
         */
        set_always_show_image(always_show: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the image of `image_menu_item` to the given widget.
         * Note that it depends on the show-menu-images setting whether
         * the image will be displayed or not.
         * @param image a widget to set as the image for the menu item.
         */
        set_image(image: Widget | null): void;

        /**
         * If `true`, the label set in the menuitem is used as a
         * stock id to select the stock item for the item.
         * @param use_stock `true` if the menuitem should use a stock item
         */
        set_use_stock(use_stock: boolean): void;

        /**
         * @default null
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable
         */
        get action_name(): string | null;
        set action_name(val: string | null);

        /**
         * @default null
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable
         */
        get actionName(): string | null;
        set actionName(val: string | null);

        /** @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable */
        get action_target(): GLib.Variant;
        set action_target(val: GLib.Variant);

        /** @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable */
        get actionTarget(): GLib.Variant;
        set actionTarget(val: GLib.Variant);

        /**
         * The action that this activatable will activate and receive
         * updates from for various states and possibly appearance.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the this property and
         * > call `gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action()` when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get related_action(): Action;
        set related_action(val: Action);

        /**
         * The action that this activatable will activate and receive
         * updates from for various states and possibly appearance.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the this property and
         * > call `gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action()` when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get relatedAction(): Action;
        set relatedAction(val: Action);

        /**
         * Whether this activatable should reset its layout
         * and appearance when setting the related action or when
         * the action changes appearance.
         * 
         * See the {@link Gtk.Action} documentation directly to find which properties
         * should be ignored by the {@link Gtk.Activatable} when this property is `false`.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle this property
         * > and call `gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties()` on the activatable
         * > widget when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get use_action_appearance(): boolean;
        set use_action_appearance(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether this activatable should reset its layout
         * and appearance when setting the related action or when
         * the action changes appearance.
         * 
         * See the {@link Gtk.Action} documentation directly to find which properties
         * should be ignored by the {@link Gtk.Activatable} when this property is `false`.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle this property
         * > and call `gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties()` on the activatable
         * > widget when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get useActionAppearance(): boolean;
        set useActionAppearance(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Gets the action name for `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_name()` for more information.
         * @returns the action name, or `null` if none is set
         */
        get_action_name(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the current target value of `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_target_value()` for more information.
         * @returns the current target value
         */
        get_action_target_value(): GLib.Variant;

        /**
         * Specifies the name of the action with which this widget should be
         * associated.  If `action_name` is `null` then the widget will be
         * unassociated from any previous action.
         * 
         * Usually this function is used when the widget is located (or will be
         * located) within the hierarchy of a {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow}.
         * 
         * Names are of the form “win.save” or “app.quit” for actions on the
         * containing {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow} or its associated {@link Gtk.Application},
         * respectively.  This is the same form used for actions in the {@link Gio.Menu}
         * associated with the window.
         * @param action_name an action name, or `null`
         */
        set_action_name(action_name: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the target value of an actionable widget.
         * 
         * If `target_value` is `null` then the target value is unset.
         * 
         * The target value has two purposes.  First, it is used as the
         * parameter to activation of the action associated with the
         * {@link Gtk.Actionable} widget. Second, it is used to determine if the widget
         * should be rendered as “active” — the widget is active if the state
         * is equal to the given target.
         * 
         * Consider the example of associating a set of buttons with a {@link Gio.Action}
         * with string state in a typical “radio button” situation.  Each button
         * will be associated with the same action, but with a different target
         * value for that action.  Clicking on a particular button will activate
         * the action with the target of that button, which will typically cause
         * the action’s state to change to that value.  Since the action’s state
         * is now equal to the target value of the button, the button will now
         * be rendered as active (and the other buttons, with different targets,
         * rendered inactive).
         * @param target_value a {@link GLib.Variant} to set as the target value, or `null`
         */
        set_action_target_value(target_value: GLib.Variant | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the action-name and associated string target value of an
         * actionable widget.
         * 
         * `detailed_action_name` is a string in the format accepted by
         * `g_action_parse_detailed_name()`.
         * 
         * (Note that prior to version 3.22.25,
         * this function is only usable for actions with a simple "s" target, and
         * `detailed_action_name` must be of the form `"action::target"` where
         * `action` is the action name and `target` is the string to use
         * as the target.)
         * @param detailed_action_name the detailed action name
         */
        set_detailed_action_name(detailed_action_name: string): void;

        /**
         * Gets the action name for `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_name()` for more information.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_action_name(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the current target value of `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_target_value()` for more information.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_action_target_value(): GLib.Variant;

        /**
         * Specifies the name of the action with which this widget should be
         * associated.  If `action_name` is `null` then the widget will be
         * unassociated from any previous action.
         * 
         * Usually this function is used when the widget is located (or will be
         * located) within the hierarchy of a {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow}.
         * 
         * Names are of the form “win.save” or “app.quit” for actions on the
         * containing {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow} or its associated {@link Gtk.Application},
         * respectively.  This is the same form used for actions in the {@link Gio.Menu}
         * associated with the window.
         * @param action_name an action name, or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_action_name(action_name: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the target value of an actionable widget.
         * 
         * If `target_value` is `null` then the target value is unset.
         * 
         * The target value has two purposes.  First, it is used as the
         * parameter to activation of the action associated with the
         * {@link Gtk.Actionable} widget. Second, it is used to determine if the widget
         * should be rendered as “active” — the widget is active if the state
         * is equal to the given target.
         * 
         * Consider the example of associating a set of buttons with a {@link Gio.Action}
         * with string state in a typical “radio button” situation.  Each button
         * will be associated with the same action, but with a different target
         * value for that action.  Clicking on a particular button will activate
         * the action with the target of that button, which will typically cause
         * the action’s state to change to that value.  Since the action’s state
         * is now equal to the target value of the button, the button will now
         * be rendered as active (and the other buttons, with different targets,
         * rendered inactive).
         * @param target_value a {@link GLib.Variant} to set as the target value, or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_action_target_value(target_value: GLib.Variant | null): void;

        /**
         * This is a utility function for {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors.
         * 
         * When implementing {@link Gtk.Activatable} you must call this when
         * handling changes of the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action}, and
         * you must also use this to break references in {@link GObject.Object}->dispose().
         * 
         * This function adds a reference to the currently set related
         * action for you, it also makes sure the {@link Gtk.Activatable}->update()
         * method is called when the related {@link Gtk.Action} properties change
         * and registers to the action’s proxy list.
         * 
         * > Be careful to call this before setting the local
         * > copy of the {@link Gtk.Action} property, since this function uses
         * > `gtk_activatable_get_related_action()` to retrieve the
         * > previous action.
         * @param action the {@link Gtk.Action} to set
         */
        do_set_related_action(action: Action): void;

        /**
         * Gets the related {@link Gtk.Action} for `activatable`.
         * @returns the related {@link Gtk.Action} if one is set.
         */
        get_related_action(): Action;

        /**
         * Gets whether this activatable should reset its layout
         * and appearance when setting the related action or when
         * the action changes appearance.
         * @returns whether `activatable` uses its actions appearance.
         */
        get_use_action_appearance(): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the related action on the `activatable` object.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action}
         * > property and call `gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action()` when it changes.
         * @param action the {@link Gtk.Action} to set
         */
        set_related_action(action: Action): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether this activatable should reset its layout and appearance
         * when setting the related action or when the action changes appearance
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} property and call
         * > `gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties()` to update `activatable`
         * > if needed.
         * @param use_appearance whether to use the actions appearance
         */
        set_use_action_appearance(use_appearance: boolean): void;

        /**
         * This is called to update the activatable completely, this is called
         * internally when the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action} property is set
         * or unset and by the implementing class when
         * {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} changes.
         * @param action the related {@link Gtk.Action} or `null`
         */
        sync_action_properties(action: Action | null): void;

        /**
         * This is called to update the activatable completely, this is called
         * internally when the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action} property is set
         * or unset and by the implementing class when
         * {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} changes.
         * @param action the related {@link Gtk.Action} or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_sync_action_properties(action: Action | null): void;

        /**
         * Called to update the activatable when its related action’s properties change.
         * You must check the {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} property only apply action
         * properties that are meant to effect the appearance accordingly.
         * @param action 
         * @param property_name 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_update(action: Action, property_name: string): void;

        /**
         * For widgets that can be “activated” (buttons, menu items, etc.)
         * this function activates them. Activation is what happens when you
         * press Enter on a widget during key navigation. If `widget` isn't
         * activatable, the function returns `false`.
         * @returns `true` if the widget was activatable
         */
        activate(): boolean;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Gtk.MenuItem.activate
        activate(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Emits a {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.child_notify | Gtk.Widget::child-notify} signal for the
         * [child property][child-properties] `child_property`
         * on `widget`.
         * 
         * This is the analogue of `g_object_notify()` for child properties.
         * 
         * Also see `gtk_container_child_notify()`.
         * @param child_property the name of a child property installed on the                  class of `widget`’s parent
         */
        child_notify(child_property: string): void;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Gtk.Container.child_notify
        child_notify(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Given an accelerator group, `accel_group`, and an accelerator path,
         * `accel_path`, sets up an accelerator in `accel_group` so whenever the
         * key binding that is defined for `accel_path` is pressed, `widget`
         * will be activated.  This removes any accelerators (for any
         * accelerator group) installed by previous calls to
         * `gtk_widget_set_accel_path()`. Associating accelerators with
         * paths allows them to be modified by the user and the modifications
         * to be saved for future use. (See `gtk_accel_map_save()`.)
         * 
         * This function is a low level function that would most likely
         * be used by a menu creation system like {@link Gtk.UIManager}. If you
         * use {@link Gtk.UIManager}, setting up accelerator paths will be done
         * automatically.
         * 
         * Even when you you aren’t using {@link Gtk.UIManager}, if you only want to
         * set up accelerators on menu items `gtk_menu_item_set_accel_path()`
         * provides a somewhat more convenient interface.
         * 
         * Note that `accel_path` string will be stored in a {@link GLib.Quark}. Therefore, if you
         * pass a static string, you can save some memory by interning it first with
         * `g_intern_static_string()`.
         * @param accel_path path used to look up the accelerator
         * @param accel_group a {@link Gtk.AccelGroup}.
         */
        set_accel_path(accel_path: string | null, accel_group: AccelGroup | null): void;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Gtk.MenuItem.set_accel_path
        set_accel_path(...args: never[]): any;
    }


    namespace InfoBar {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Box.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * The ::close signal is a
             * [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted when the user uses a keybinding to dismiss
             * the info bar.
             * 
             * The default binding for this signal is the Escape key.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.18
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            close: () => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when an action widget is clicked or the application programmer
             * calls `gtk_dialog_response()`. The `response_id` depends on which action
             * widget was clicked.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.18
             * @run-last
             */
            response: (arg0: number) => void;
            "notify::message-type": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::revealed": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::show-close-button": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::baseline-position": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::homogeneous": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::spacing": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::orientation": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Box.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, Orientable.ConstructorProps {
            message_type: MessageType;
            messageType: MessageType;
            revealed: boolean;
            show_close_button: boolean;
            showCloseButton: boolean;
        }
    }

    /**
     * {@link Gtk.InfoBar} is a widget that can be used to show messages to
     * the user without showing a dialog. It is often temporarily shown
     * at the top or bottom of a document. In contrast to {@link Gtk.Dialog}, which
     * has a action area at the bottom, {@link Gtk.InfoBar} has an action area
     * at the side.
     * 
     * The API of {@link Gtk.InfoBar} is very similar to {@link Gtk.Dialog}, allowing you
     * to add buttons to the action area with `gtk_info_bar_add_button()` or
     * `gtk_info_bar_new_with_buttons()`. The sensitivity of action widgets
     * can be controlled with `gtk_info_bar_set_response_sensitive()`.
     * To add widgets to the main content area of a {@link Gtk.InfoBar}, use
     * `gtk_info_bar_get_content_area()` and add your widgets to the container.
     * 
     * Similar to {@link Gtk.MessageDialog}, the contents of a {@link Gtk.InfoBar} can by
     * classified as error message, warning, informational message, etc,
     * by using `gtk_info_bar_set_message_type()`. GTK+ may use the message type
     * to determine how the message is displayed.
     * 
     * A simple example for using a {@link Gtk.InfoBar}:
     * 
     * ```c
     * GtkWidget *widget, *message_label, *content_area;
     * GtkWidget *grid;
     * GtkInfoBar *bar;
     * 
     * // set up info bar
     * widget = gtk_info_bar_new ();
     * bar = GTK_INFO_BAR (widget);
     * grid = gtk_grid_new ();
     * 
     * gtk_widget_set_no_show_all (widget, TRUE);
     * message_label = gtk_label_new ("");
     * content_area = gtk_info_bar_get_content_area (bar);
     * gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (content_area),
     *                    message_label);
     * gtk_info_bar_add_button (bar,
     *                          _("_OK"),
     *                          GTK_RESPONSE_OK);
     * g_signal_connect (bar,
     *                   "response",
     *                   G_CALLBACK (gtk_widget_hide),
     *                   NULL);
     * gtk_grid_attach (GTK_GRID (grid),
     *                  widget,
     *                  0, 2, 1, 1);
     * 
     * // ...
     * 
     * // show an error message
     * gtk_label_set_text (GTK_LABEL (message_label), "An error occurred!");
     * gtk_info_bar_set_message_type (bar,
     *                                GTK_MESSAGE_ERROR);
     * gtk_widget_show (bar);
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * # GtkInfoBar as GtkBuildable
     * 
     * The GtkInfoBar implementation of the GtkBuildable interface exposes
     * the content area and action area as internal children with the names
     * “content_area” and “action_area”.
     * 
     * GtkInfoBar supports a custom `<action-widgets>` element, which can contain
     * multiple `<action-widget>` elements. The “response” attribute specifies a
     * numeric response, and the content of the element is the id of widget
     * (which should be a child of the dialogs `action_area`).
     * 
     * # CSS nodes
     * 
     * GtkInfoBar has a single CSS node with name infobar. The node may get
     * one of the style classes .info, .warning, .error or .question, depending
     * on the message type.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class InfoBar extends Box implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable, Orientable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<InfoBar>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * The type of the message.
         * 
         * The type may be used to determine the appearance of the info bar.
         * @since 2.18
         * @default Gtk.MessageType.INFO
         */
        get message_type(): MessageType;
        set message_type(val: MessageType);

        /**
         * The type of the message.
         * 
         * The type may be used to determine the appearance of the info bar.
         * @since 2.18
         * @default Gtk.MessageType.INFO
         */
        get messageType(): MessageType;
        set messageType(val: MessageType);

        /**
         * @default true
         */
        get revealed(): boolean;
        set revealed(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether to include a standard close button.
         * @since 3.10
         * @default false
         */
        get show_close_button(): boolean;
        set show_close_button(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether to include a standard close button.
         * @since 3.10
         * @default false
         */
        get showCloseButton(): boolean;
        set showCloseButton(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: InfoBar.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<InfoBar.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): InfoBar;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof InfoBar.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, InfoBar.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof InfoBar.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, InfoBar.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof InfoBar.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<InfoBar.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_close(): void;

        /**
         * Emits the “response” signal with the given `response_id`.
         * @param response_id a response ID
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_response(response_id: number): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Add an activatable widget to the action area of a {@link Gtk.InfoBar},
         * connecting a signal handler that will emit the {@link Gtk.InfoBar.SignalSignatures.response | Gtk.InfoBar::response}
         * signal on the message area when the widget is activated. The widget
         * is appended to the end of the message areas action area.
         * @param child an activatable widget
         * @param response_id response ID for `child`
         */
        add_action_widget(child: Widget, response_id: number): void;

        /**
         * Adds a button with the given text and sets things up so that
         * clicking the button will emit the “response” signal with the given
         * response_id. The button is appended to the end of the info bars's
         * action area. The button widget is returned, but usually you don't
         * need it.
         * @param button_text text of button
         * @param response_id response ID for the button
         * @returns the {@link Gtk.Button} widget that was added
         */
        add_button(button_text: string, response_id: number): Button;

        /**
         * Returns the action area of `info_bar`.
         * @returns the action area
         */
        get_action_area(): Box;

        /**
         * Returns the content area of `info_bar`.
         * @returns the content area
         */
        get_content_area(): Box;

        /**
         * Returns the message type of the message area.
         * @returns the message type of the message area.
         */
        get_message_type(): MessageType;

        /**
         * @returns the current value of the GtkInfoBar:revealed property.
         */
        get_revealed(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns whether the widget will display a standard close button.
         * @returns `true` if the widget displays standard close button
         */
        get_show_close_button(): boolean;

        /**
         * Emits the “response” signal with the given `response_id`.
         * @param response_id a response ID
         */
        response(response_id: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the last widget in the info bar’s action area with
         * the given response_id as the default widget for the dialog.
         * Pressing “Enter” normally activates the default widget.
         * 
         * Note that this function currently requires `info_bar` to
         * be added to a widget hierarchy.
         * @param response_id a response ID
         */
        set_default_response(response_id: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the message type of the message area.
         * 
         * GTK+ uses this type to determine how the message is displayed.
         * @param message_type a {@link Gtk.MessageType}
         */
        set_message_type(message_type: MessageType): void;

        /**
         * Calls gtk_widget_set_sensitive (widget, setting) for each
         * widget in the info bars’s action area with the given response_id.
         * A convenient way to sensitize/desensitize dialog buttons.
         * @param response_id a response ID
         * @param setting TRUE for sensitive
         */
        set_response_sensitive(response_id: number, setting: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the GtkInfoBar:revealed property to `revealed`. This will cause
         * `info_bar` to show up with a slide-in transition.
         * 
         * Note that this property does not automatically show `info_bar` and thus won’t
         * have any effect if it is invisible.
         * @param revealed The new value of the property
         */
        set_revealed(revealed: boolean): void;

        /**
         * If true, a standard close button is shown. When clicked it emits
         * the response {@link Gtk.ResponseType.CLOSE}.
         * @param setting `true` to include a close button
         */
        set_show_close_button(setting: boolean): void;

        /**
         * The orientation of the orientable.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default Gtk.Orientation.HORIZONTAL
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Orientable
         */
        get orientation(): Orientation;
        set orientation(val: Orientation);

        /**
         * Retrieves the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @returns the orientation of the `orientable`.
         */
        get_orientation(): Orientation;

        /**
         * Sets the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @param orientation the orientable’s new orientation.
         */
        set_orientation(orientation: Orientation): void;
    }


    namespace Invisible {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Widget.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::screen": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Widget.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {
            screen: Gdk.Screen;
        }
    }

    /**
     * The {@link Gtk.Invisible} widget is used internally in GTK+, and is probably not
     * very useful for application developers.
     * 
     * It is used for reliable pointer grabs and selection handling in the code
     * for drag-and-drop.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class Invisible extends Widget implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<Invisible>;

        // Properties
        get screen(): Gdk.Screen;
        set screen(val: Gdk.Screen);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: Invisible.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        widget: Widget;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<Invisible.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): Invisible;

        static new_for_screen(screen: Gdk.Screen): Invisible;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof Invisible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Invisible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof Invisible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Invisible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof Invisible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<Invisible.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Returns the {@link Gdk.Screen} object associated with `invisible`
         * @returns the associated {@link Gdk.Screen}.
         */
        get_screen(): Gdk.Screen;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gdk.Screen} where the {@link Gtk.Invisible} object will be displayed.
         * @param screen a {@link Gdk.Screen}.
         */
        set_screen(screen: Gdk.Screen): void;

        /**
         * Adds a child to `buildable`. `type` is an optional string
         * describing how the child should be added.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child to add
         * @param type kind of child or `null`
         */
        add_child(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object, type: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Constructs a child of `buildable` with the name `name`.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} calls this function if a “constructor” has been
         * specified in the UI definition.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param name name of child to construct
         * @returns the constructed child
         */
        construct_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, name: string): T;

        /**
         * This is similar to `gtk_buildable_parser_finished()` but is
         * called once for each custom tag handled by the `buildable`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname the name of the tag
         * @param data user data created in custom_tag_start
         */
        custom_finished(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
         * the buildable.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @param data user data that will be passed in to parser functions
         */
        custom_tag_end(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called for each unknown element under `<child>`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @returns `true` if a object has a custom implementation, `false`          if it doesn't.
         */
        custom_tag_start(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string): [boolean, GLib.MarkupParser, null];

        /**
         * Get the internal child called `childname` of the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param childname name of child
         * @returns the internal child of the buildable object
         */
        get_internal_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, childname: string): T;

        /**
         * Gets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} sets the name based on the
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI]
         * used to construct the `buildable`.
         * @returns the name set with `gtk_buildable_set_name()`
         */
        get_name(): string;

        /**
         * Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI].
         * Note that this will be called once for each time
         * `gtk_builder_add_from_file()` or `gtk_builder_add_from_string()`
         * is called on a builder.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         */
        parser_finished(builder: Builder): void;

        /**
         * Sets the property name `name` to `value` on the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param name name of property
         * @param value value of property
         */
        set_buildable_property(builder: Builder, name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;

        /**
         * Sets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * @param name name to set
         */
        set_name(name: string): void;

        /**
         * Adds a child to `buildable`. `type` is an optional string
         * describing how the child should be added.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child to add
         * @param type kind of child or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add_child(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object, type: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Constructs a child of `buildable` with the name `name`.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} calls this function if a “constructor” has been
         * specified in the UI definition.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param name name of child to construct
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_construct_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, name: string): T;

        /**
         * This is similar to `gtk_buildable_parser_finished()` but is
         * called once for each custom tag handled by the `buildable`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname the name of the tag
         * @param data user data created in custom_tag_start
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_finished(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
         * the buildable.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @param data user data that will be passed in to parser functions
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_tag_end(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called for each unknown element under `<child>`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_tag_start(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string): [boolean, GLib.MarkupParser, never];

        /**
         * Get the internal child called `childname` of the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param childname name of child
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_internal_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, childname: string): T;

        /**
         * Gets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} sets the name based on the
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI]
         * used to construct the `buildable`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_name(): string;

        /**
         * Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI].
         * Note that this will be called once for each time
         * `gtk_builder_add_from_file()` or `gtk_builder_add_from_string()`
         * is called on a builder.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_parser_finished(builder: Builder): void;

        /**
         * Sets the property name `name` to `value` on the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param name name of property
         * @param value value of property
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_buildable_property(builder: Builder, name: string, value: unknown): void;

        /**
         * Sets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * @param name name to set
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_name(name: string): void;
    }


    namespace Label {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Misc.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * A [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted when the user activates a link in the label.
             * 
             * Applications may also emit the signal with `g_signal_emit_by_name()`
             * if they need to control activation of URIs programmatically.
             * 
             * The default bindings for this signal are all forms of the Enter key.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.18
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "activate-current-link": () => void;
            /**
             * The signal which gets emitted to activate a URI.
             * Applications may connect to it to override the default behaviour,
             * which is to call `gtk_show_uri_on_window()`.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.18
             * @run-last
             */
            "activate-link": (arg0: string) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * The ::copy-clipboard signal is a
             * [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted to copy the selection to the clipboard.
             * 
             * The default binding for this signal is Ctrl-c.
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "copy-clipboard": () => void;
            /**
             * The ::move-cursor signal is a
             * [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted when the user initiates a cursor movement.
             * If the cursor is not visible in `entry`, this signal causes
             * the viewport to be moved instead.
             * 
             * Applications should not connect to it, but may emit it with
             * `g_signal_emit_by_name()` if they need to control the cursor
             * programmatically.
             * 
             * The default bindings for this signal come in two variants,
             * the variant with the Shift modifier extends the selection,
             * the variant without the Shift modifer does not.
             * There are too many key combinations to list them all here.
             * - Arrow keys move by individual characters/lines
             * - Ctrl-arrow key combinations move by words/paragraphs
             * - Home/End keys move to the ends of the buffer
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "move-cursor": (arg0: MovementStep, arg1: number, arg2: boolean) => void;
            /**
             * The ::populate-popup signal gets emitted before showing the
             * context menu of the label. Note that only selectable labels
             * have context menus.
             * 
             * If you need to add items to the context menu, connect
             * to this signal and append your menuitems to the `menu`.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "populate-popup": (arg0: Menu) => void;
            "notify::angle": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::attributes": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::cursor-position": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::ellipsize": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::justify": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::label": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::lines": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::max-width-chars": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::mnemonic-keyval": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::mnemonic-widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::pattern": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::selectable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::selection-bound": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::single-line-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::track-visited-links": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-underline": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-chars": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::wrap": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::wrap-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::xalign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::yalign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::xpad": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::ypad": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Misc.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {
            angle: number;
            attributes: Pango.AttrList | null;
            cursor_position: number;
            cursorPosition: number;
            ellipsize: Pango.EllipsizeMode;
            justify: Justification;
            label: string;
            lines: number;
            max_width_chars: number;
            maxWidthChars: number;
            mnemonic_keyval: number;
            mnemonicKeyval: number;
            mnemonic_widget: Widget | null;
            mnemonicWidget: Widget | null;
            pattern: string;
            selectable: boolean;
            selection_bound: number;
            selectionBound: number;
            single_line_mode: boolean;
            singleLineMode: boolean;
            track_visited_links: boolean;
            trackVisitedLinks: boolean;
            use_markup: boolean;
            useMarkup: boolean;
            use_underline: boolean;
            useUnderline: boolean;
            width_chars: number;
            widthChars: number;
            wrap: boolean;
            wrap_mode: Pango.WrapMode;
            wrapMode: Pango.WrapMode;
            xalign: number;
            yalign: number;
        }
    }

    /**
     * The {@link Gtk.Label} widget displays a small amount of text. As the name
     * implies, most labels are used to label another widget such as a
     * {@link Gtk.Button}, a {@link Gtk.MenuItem}, or a {@link Gtk.ComboBox}.
     * 
     * # CSS nodes
     * 
     * 
     * ```
     * label
     * ├── [selection]
     * ├── [link]
     * ┊
     * ╰── [link]
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * GtkLabel has a single CSS node with the name label. A wide variety
     * of style classes may be applied to labels, such as .title, .subtitle,
     * .dim-label, etc. In the {@link Gtk.ShortcutsWindow}, labels are used wth the
     * .keycap style class.
     * 
     * If the label has a selection, it gets a subnode with name selection.
     * 
     * If the label has links, there is one subnode per link. These subnodes
     * carry the link or visited state depending on whether they have been
     * visited.
     * 
     * # GtkLabel as GtkBuildable
     * 
     * The GtkLabel implementation of the GtkBuildable interface supports a
     * custom `<attributes>` element, which supports any number of `<attribute>`
     * elements. The `<attribute>` element has attributes named “name“, “value“,
     * “start“ and “end“ and allows you to specify {@link Pango.Attribute} values for
     * this label.
     * 
     * An example of a UI definition fragment specifying Pango attributes:
     * 
     * 
     * ```xml
     * <object class="GtkLabel">
     *   <attributes>
     *     <attribute name="weight" value="PANGO_WEIGHT_BOLD"/>
     *     <attribute name="background" value="red" start="5" end="10"/>
     *   </attributes>
     * </object>
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * The start and end attributes specify the range of characters to which the
     * Pango attribute applies. If start and end are not specified, the attribute is
     * applied to the whole text. Note that specifying ranges does not make much
     * sense with translatable attributes. Use markup embedded in the translatable
     * content instead.
     * 
     * # Mnemonics
     * 
     * Labels may contain “mnemonics”. Mnemonics are
     * underlined characters in the label, used for keyboard navigation.
     * Mnemonics are created by providing a string with an underscore before
     * the mnemonic character, such as `"_File"`, to the
     * functions `gtk_label_new_with_mnemonic()` or
     * `gtk_label_set_text_with_mnemonic()`.
     * 
     * Mnemonics automatically activate any activatable widget the label is
     * inside, such as a {@link Gtk.Button}; if the label is not inside the
     * mnemonic’s target widget, you have to tell the label about the target
     * using `gtk_label_set_mnemonic_widget()`. Here’s a simple example where
     * the label is inside a button:
     * 
     * 
     * ```c
     *   // Pressing Alt+H will activate this button
     *   GtkWidget *button = gtk_button_new ();
     *   GtkWidget *label = gtk_label_new_with_mnemonic ("_Hello");
     *   gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (button), label);
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * There’s a convenience function to create buttons with a mnemonic label
     * already inside:
     * 
     * 
     * ```c
     *   // Pressing Alt+H will activate this button
     *   GtkWidget *button = gtk_button_new_with_mnemonic ("_Hello");
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * To create a mnemonic for a widget alongside the label, such as a
     * {@link Gtk.Entry}, you have to point the label at the entry with
     * `gtk_label_set_mnemonic_widget()`:
     * 
     * 
     * ```c
     *   // Pressing Alt+H will focus the entry
     *   GtkWidget *entry = gtk_entry_new ();
     *   GtkWidget *label = gtk_label_new_with_mnemonic ("_Hello");
     *   gtk_label_set_mnemonic_widget (GTK_LABEL (label), entry);
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * # Markup (styled text)
     * 
     * To make it easy to format text in a label (changing colors,
     * fonts, etc.), label text can be provided in a simple
     * [markup format][PangoMarkupFormat].
     * 
     * Here’s how to create a label with a small font:
     * 
     * ```c
     *   GtkWidget *label = gtk_label_new (NULL);
     *   gtk_label_set_markup (GTK_LABEL (label), "<small>Small text</small>");
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * (See [complete documentation][PangoMarkupFormat] of available
     * tags in the Pango manual.)
     * 
     * The markup passed to `gtk_label_set_markup()` must be valid; for example,
     * literal <, > and & characters must be escaped as &lt;, &gt;, and &amp;.
     * If you pass text obtained from the user, file, or a network to
     * `gtk_label_set_markup()`, you’ll want to escape it with
     * `g_markup_escape_text()` or `g_markup_printf_escaped()`.
     * 
     * Markup strings are just a convenient way to set the {@link Pango.AttrList} on
     * a label; `gtk_label_set_attributes()` may be a simpler way to set
     * attributes in some cases. Be careful though; {@link Pango.AttrList} tends to
     * cause internationalization problems, unless you’re applying attributes
     * to the entire string (i.e. unless you set the range of each attribute
     * to [0, `G_MAXINT`)). The reason is that specifying the start_index and
     * end_index for a {@link Pango.Attribute} requires knowledge of the exact string
     * being displayed, so translations will cause problems.
     * 
     * # Selectable labels
     * 
     * Labels can be made selectable with `gtk_label_set_selectable()`.
     * Selectable labels allow the user to copy the label contents to
     * the clipboard. Only labels that contain useful-to-copy information
     * — such as error messages — should be made selectable.
     * 
     * # Text layout # {#label-text-layout}
     * 
     * A label can contain any number of paragraphs, but will have
     * performance problems if it contains more than a small number.
     * Paragraphs are separated by newlines or other paragraph separators
     * understood by Pango.
     * 
     * Labels can automatically wrap text if you call
     * `gtk_label_set_line_wrap()`.
     * 
     * `gtk_label_set_justify()` sets how the lines in a label align
     * with one another. If you want to set how the label as a whole
     * aligns in its available space, see the {@link Gtk.Widget.halign} and
     * {@link Gtk.Widget.valign} properties.
     * 
     * The {@link Gtk.Label.width_chars} and {@link Gtk.Label.max_width_chars} properties
     * can be used to control the size allocation of ellipsized or wrapped
     * labels. For ellipsizing labels, if either is specified (and less
     * than the actual text size), it is used as the minimum width, and the actual
     * text size is used as the natural width of the label. For wrapping labels,
     * width-chars is used as the minimum width, if specified, and max-width-chars
     * is used as the natural width. Even if max-width-chars specified, wrapping
     * labels will be rewrapped to use all of the available width.
     * 
     * Note that the interpretation of {@link Gtk.Label.width_chars} and
     * {@link Gtk.Label.max_width_chars} has changed a bit with the introduction of
     * [width-for-height geometry management.][geometry-management]
     * 
     * # Links
     * 
     * Since 2.18, GTK+ supports markup for clickable hyperlinks in addition
     * to regular Pango markup. The markup for links is borrowed from HTML,
     * using the `<a>` with “href“ and “title“ attributes. GTK+ renders links
     * similar to the way they appear in web browsers, with colored, underlined
     * text. The “title“ attribute is displayed as a tooltip on the link.
     * 
     * An example looks like this:
     * 
     * 
     * ```c
     * const gchar *text =
     * "Go to the"
     * "<a href=\"http://www.gtk.org title=\"&lt;i&gt;Our&lt;/i&gt; website\">"
     * "GTK+ website</a> for more...";
     * GtkWidget *label = gtk_label_new (NULL);
     * gtk_label_set_markup (GTK_LABEL (label), text);
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * It is possible to implement custom handling for links and their tooltips with
     * the {@link Gtk.Label.SignalSignatures.activate_link | Gtk.Label::activate-link} signal and the `gtk_label_get_current_uri()` function.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class Label extends Misc implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<Label>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * The angle that the baseline of the label makes with the horizontal,
         * in degrees, measured counterclockwise. An angle of 90 reads from
         * from bottom to top, an angle of 270, from top to bottom. Ignored
         * if the label is selectable.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default 0
         */
        get angle(): number;
        set angle(val: number);

        get attributes(): Pango.AttrList | null;
        set attributes(val: Pango.AttrList | null);

        /**
         * @read-only
         * @default 0
         */
        get cursor_position(): number;

        /**
         * @read-only
         * @default 0
         */
        get cursorPosition(): number;

        /**
         * The preferred place to ellipsize the string, if the label does
         * not have enough room to display the entire string, specified as a
         * {@link Pango.EllipsizeMode}.
         * 
         * Note that setting this property to a value other than
         * {@link Pango.EllipsizeMode.NONE} has the side-effect that the label requests
         * only enough space to display the ellipsis "...". In particular, this
         * means that ellipsizing labels do not work well in notebook tabs, unless
         * the {@link Gtk.Notebook} tab-expand child property is set to `true`. Other ways
         * to set a label's width are `gtk_widget_set_size_request()` and
         * `gtk_label_set_width_chars()`.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default Pango.EllipsizeMode.NONE
         */
        get ellipsize(): Pango.EllipsizeMode;
        set ellipsize(val: Pango.EllipsizeMode);

        /**
         * @default Gtk.Justification.LEFT
         */
        get justify(): Justification;
        set justify(val: Justification);

        /**
         * The contents of the label.
         * 
         * If the string contains [Pango XML markup][PangoMarkupFormat], you will
         * have to set the {@link Gtk.Label.use_markup} property to `true` in order for the
         * label to display the markup attributes. See also `gtk_label_set_markup()`
         * for a convenience function that sets both this property and the
         * {@link Gtk.Label.use_markup} property at the same time.
         * 
         * If the string contains underlines acting as mnemonics, you will have to
         * set the {@link Gtk.Label.use_underline} property to `true` in order for the label
         * to display them.
         */
        get label(): string;
        set label(val: string);

        /**
         * The number of lines to which an ellipsized, wrapping label
         * should be limited. This property has no effect if the
         * label is not wrapping or ellipsized. Set this property to
         * -1 if you don't want to limit the number of lines.
         * @since 3.10
         * @default -1
         */
        get lines(): number;
        set lines(val: number);

        /**
         * The desired maximum width of the label, in characters. If this property
         * is set to -1, the width will be calculated automatically.
         * 
         * See the section on [text layout][label-text-layout]
         * for details of how {@link Gtk.Label.width_chars} and {@link Gtk.Label.max_width_chars}
         * determine the width of ellipsized and wrapped labels.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default -1
         */
        get max_width_chars(): number;
        set max_width_chars(val: number);

        /**
         * The desired maximum width of the label, in characters. If this property
         * is set to -1, the width will be calculated automatically.
         * 
         * See the section on [text layout][label-text-layout]
         * for details of how {@link Gtk.Label.width_chars} and {@link Gtk.Label.max_width_chars}
         * determine the width of ellipsized and wrapped labels.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default -1
         */
        get maxWidthChars(): number;
        set maxWidthChars(val: number);

        /**
         * @read-only
         * @default 16777215
         */
        get mnemonic_keyval(): number;

        /**
         * @read-only
         * @default 16777215
         */
        get mnemonicKeyval(): number;

        get mnemonic_widget(): Widget | null;
        set mnemonic_widget(val: Widget | null);

        get mnemonicWidget(): Widget | null;
        set mnemonicWidget(val: Widget | null);

        /**
         * @write-only
         * @default null
         */
        set pattern(val: string);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get selectable(): boolean;
        set selectable(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @read-only
         * @default 0
         */
        get selection_bound(): number;

        /**
         * @read-only
         * @default 0
         */
        get selectionBound(): number;

        /**
         * Whether the label is in single line mode. In single line mode,
         * the height of the label does not depend on the actual text, it
         * is always set to ascent + descent of the font. This can be an
         * advantage in situations where resizing the label because of text
         * changes would be distracting, e.g. in a statusbar.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default false
         */
        get single_line_mode(): boolean;
        set single_line_mode(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether the label is in single line mode. In single line mode,
         * the height of the label does not depend on the actual text, it
         * is always set to ascent + descent of the font. This can be an
         * advantage in situations where resizing the label because of text
         * changes would be distracting, e.g. in a statusbar.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default false
         */
        get singleLineMode(): boolean;
        set singleLineMode(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Set this property to `true` to make the label track which links
         * have been visited. It will then apply the #GTK_STATE_FLAG_VISITED
         * when rendering this link, in addition to #GTK_STATE_FLAG_LINK.
         * @since 2.18
         * @default true
         */
        get track_visited_links(): boolean;
        set track_visited_links(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Set this property to `true` to make the label track which links
         * have been visited. It will then apply the #GTK_STATE_FLAG_VISITED
         * when rendering this link, in addition to #GTK_STATE_FLAG_LINK.
         * @since 2.18
         * @default true
         */
        get trackVisitedLinks(): boolean;
        set trackVisitedLinks(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get use_markup(): boolean;
        set use_markup(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get useMarkup(): boolean;
        set useMarkup(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get use_underline(): boolean;
        set use_underline(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get useUnderline(): boolean;
        set useUnderline(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The desired width of the label, in characters. If this property is set to
         * -1, the width will be calculated automatically.
         * 
         * See the section on [text layout][label-text-layout]
         * for details of how {@link Gtk.Label.width_chars} and {@link Gtk.Label.max_width_chars}
         * determine the width of ellipsized and wrapped labels.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default -1
         */
        get width_chars(): number;
        set width_chars(val: number);

        /**
         * The desired width of the label, in characters. If this property is set to
         * -1, the width will be calculated automatically.
         * 
         * See the section on [text layout][label-text-layout]
         * for details of how {@link Gtk.Label.width_chars} and {@link Gtk.Label.max_width_chars}
         * determine the width of ellipsized and wrapped labels.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default -1
         */
        get widthChars(): number;
        set widthChars(val: number);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get wrap(): boolean;
        set wrap(val: boolean);

        /**
         * If line wrapping is on (see the {@link Gtk.Label.wrap} property) this controls
         * how the line wrapping is done. The default is {@link Pango.WrapMode.WORD}, which
         * means wrap on word boundaries.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default Pango.WrapMode.WORD
         */
        get wrap_mode(): Pango.WrapMode;
        set wrap_mode(val: Pango.WrapMode);

        /**
         * If line wrapping is on (see the {@link Gtk.Label.wrap} property) this controls
         * how the line wrapping is done. The default is {@link Pango.WrapMode.WORD}, which
         * means wrap on word boundaries.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default Pango.WrapMode.WORD
         */
        get wrapMode(): Pango.WrapMode;
        set wrapMode(val: Pango.WrapMode);

        /**
         * The xalign property determines the horizontal aligment of the label text
         * inside the labels size allocation. Compare this to {@link Gtk.Widget.halign},
         * which determines how the labels size allocation is positioned in the
         * space available for the label.
         * @since 3.16
         * @default 0.5
         */
        get xalign(): number;
        set xalign(val: number);

        /**
         * The yalign property determines the vertical aligment of the label text
         * inside the labels size allocation. Compare this to {@link Gtk.Widget.valign},
         * which determines how the labels size allocation is positioned in the
         * space available for the label.
         * @since 3.16
         * @default 0.5
         */
        get yalign(): number;
        set yalign(val: number);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: Label.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        misc: Misc;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<Label.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](str: string | null): Label;

        static new_with_mnemonic(str: string | null): Label;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof Label.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Label.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof Label.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Label.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof Label.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<Label.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * @param uri 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_activate_link(uri: string): boolean;

        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_copy_clipboard(): void;

        /**
         * @param step 
         * @param count 
         * @param extend_selection 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_move_cursor(step: MovementStep, count: number, extend_selection: boolean): void;

        /**
         * @param menu 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_populate_popup(menu: Menu): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Gets the angle of rotation for the label. See
         * `gtk_label_set_angle()`.
         * @returns the angle of rotation for the label
         */
        get_angle(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the attribute list that was set on the label using
         * `gtk_label_set_attributes()`, if any. This function does
         * not reflect attributes that come from the labels markup
         * (see `gtk_label_set_markup()`). If you want to get the
         * effective attributes for the label, use
         * pango_layout_get_attribute (gtk_label_get_layout (label)).
         * @returns the attribute list, or `null`     if none was set.
         */
        get_attributes(): Pango.AttrList | null;

        /**
         * Returns the URI for the currently active link in the label.
         * The active link is the one under the mouse pointer or, in a
         * selectable label, the link in which the text cursor is currently
         * positioned.
         * 
         * This function is intended for use in a {@link Gtk.Label.SignalSignatures.activate_link | Gtk.Label::activate-link} handler
         * or for use in a {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.query_tooltip | Gtk.Widget::query-tooltip} handler.
         * @returns the currently active URI. The string is owned by GTK+ and must   not be freed or modified.
         */
        get_current_uri(): string;

        /**
         * Returns the ellipsizing position of the label. See `gtk_label_set_ellipsize()`.
         * @returns {@link Pango.EllipsizeMode}
         */
        get_ellipsize(): Pango.EllipsizeMode;

        /**
         * Returns the justification of the label. See `gtk_label_set_justify()`.
         * @returns {@link Gtk.Justification}
         */
        get_justify(): Justification;

        /**
         * Fetches the text from a label widget including any embedded
         * underlines indicating mnemonics and Pango markup. (See
         * `gtk_label_get_text()`).
         * @returns the text of the label widget. This string is   owned by the widget and must not be modified or freed.
         */
        get_label(): string;

        /**
         * Gets the {@link Pango.Layout} used to display the label.
         * The layout is useful to e.g. convert text positions to
         * pixel positions, in combination with `gtk_label_get_layout_offsets()`.
         * The returned layout is owned by the `label` so need not be
         * freed by the caller. The `label` is free to recreate its layout at
         * any time, so it should be considered read-only.
         * @returns the {@link Pango.Layout} for this label
         */
        get_layout(): Pango.Layout;

        /**
         * Obtains the coordinates where the label will draw the {@link Pango.Layout}
         * representing the text in the label; useful to convert mouse events
         * into coordinates inside the {@link Pango.Layout}, e.g. to take some action
         * if some part of the label is clicked. Of course you will need to
         * create a {@link Gtk.EventBox} to receive the events, and pack the label
         * inside it, since labels are windowless (they return `false` from
         * `gtk_widget_get_has_window()`). Remember
         * when using the {@link Pango.Layout} functions you need to convert to
         * and from pixels using PANGO_PIXELS() or #PANGO_SCALE.
         */
        get_layout_offsets(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Returns whether lines in the label are automatically wrapped.
         * See `gtk_label_set_line_wrap()`.
         * @returns `true` if the lines of the label are automatically wrapped.
         */
        get_line_wrap(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns line wrap mode used by the label. See `gtk_label_set_line_wrap_mode()`.
         * @returns `true` if the lines of the label are automatically wrapped.
         */
        get_line_wrap_mode(): Pango.WrapMode;

        /**
         * Gets the number of lines to which an ellipsized, wrapping
         * label should be limited. See `gtk_label_set_lines()`.
         * @returns The number of lines
         */
        get_lines(): number;

        /**
         * Retrieves the desired maximum width of `label`, in characters. See
         * `gtk_label_set_width_chars()`.
         * @returns the maximum width of the label in characters.
         */
        get_max_width_chars(): number;

        /**
         * If the label has been set so that it has an mnemonic key this function
         * returns the keyval used for the mnemonic accelerator. If there is no
         * mnemonic set up it returns #GDK_KEY_VoidSymbol.
         * @returns GDK keyval usable for accelerators, or #GDK_KEY_VoidSymbol
         */
        get_mnemonic_keyval(): number;

        /**
         * Retrieves the target of the mnemonic (keyboard shortcut) of this
         * label. See `gtk_label_set_mnemonic_widget()`.
         * @returns the target of the label’s mnemonic,     or `null` if none has been set and the default algorithm will be used.
         */
        get_mnemonic_widget(): Widget | null;

        /**
         * Gets the value set by `gtk_label_set_selectable()`.
         * @returns `true` if the user can copy text from the label
         */
        get_selectable(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the selected range of characters in the label, returning `true`
         * if there’s a selection.
         * @returns `true` if selection is non-empty
         */
        get_selection_bounds(): [boolean, number, number];

        /**
         * Returns whether the label is in single line mode.
         * @returns `true` when the label is in single line mode.
         */
        get_single_line_mode(): boolean;

        /**
         * Fetches the text from a label widget, as displayed on the
         * screen. This does not include any embedded underlines
         * indicating mnemonics or Pango markup. (See `gtk_label_get_label()`)
         * @returns the text in the label widget. This is the internal   string used by the label, and must not be modified.
         */
        get_text(): string;

        /**
         * Returns whether the label is currently keeping track
         * of clicked links.
         * @returns `true` if clicked links are remembered
         */
        get_track_visited_links(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns whether the label’s text is interpreted as marked up with
         * the [Pango text markup language][PangoMarkupFormat].
         * See gtk_label_set_use_markup ().
         * @returns `true` if the label’s text will be parsed for markup.
         */
        get_use_markup(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns whether an embedded underline in the label indicates a
         * mnemonic. See `gtk_label_set_use_underline()`.
         * @returns `true` whether an embedded underline in the label indicates               the mnemonic accelerator keys.
         */
        get_use_underline(): boolean;

        /**
         * Retrieves the desired width of `label`, in characters. See
         * `gtk_label_set_width_chars()`.
         * @returns the width of the label in characters.
         */
        get_width_chars(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the {@link Gtk.Label.xalign} property for `label`.
         * @returns the xalign property
         */
        get_xalign(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the {@link Gtk.Label.yalign} property for `label`.
         * @returns the yalign property
         */
        get_yalign(): number;

        /**
         * Selects a range of characters in the label, if the label is selectable.
         * See `gtk_label_set_selectable()`. If the label is not selectable,
         * this function has no effect. If `start_offset` or
         * `end_offset` are -1, then the end of the label will be substituted.
         * @param start_offset start offset (in characters not bytes)
         * @param end_offset end offset (in characters not bytes)
         */
        select_region(start_offset: number, end_offset: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the angle of rotation for the label. An angle of 90 reads from
         * from bottom to top, an angle of 270, from top to bottom. The angle
         * setting for the label is ignored if the label is selectable,
         * wrapped, or ellipsized.
         * @param angle the angle that the baseline of the label makes with   the horizontal, in degrees, measured counterclockwise
         */
        set_angle(angle: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets a {@link Pango.AttrList}; the attributes in the list are applied to the
         * label text.
         * 
         * The attributes set with this function will be applied
         * and merged with any other attributes previously effected by way
         * of the {@link Gtk.Label.use_underline} or {@link Gtk.Label.use_markup} properties.
         * While it is not recommended to mix markup strings with manually set
         * attributes, if you must; know that the attributes will be applied
         * to the label after the markup string is parsed.
         * @param attrs a {@link Pango.AttrList}, or `null`
         */
        set_attributes(attrs: Pango.AttrList | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the mode used to ellipsize (add an ellipsis: "...") to the text
         * if there is not enough space to render the entire string.
         * @param mode a {@link Pango.EllipsizeMode}
         */
        set_ellipsize(mode: Pango.EllipsizeMode): void;

        /**
         * Sets the alignment of the lines in the text of the label relative to
         * each other. {@link Gtk.Justification.LEFT} is the default value when the widget is
         * first created with `gtk_label_new()`. If you instead want to set the
         * alignment of the label as a whole, use `gtk_widget_set_halign()` instead.
         * `gtk_label_set_justify()` has no effect on labels containing only a
         * single line.
         * @param jtype a {@link Gtk.Justification}
         */
        set_justify(jtype: Justification): void;

        /**
         * Sets the text of the label. The label is interpreted as
         * including embedded underlines and/or Pango markup depending
         * on the values of the {@link Gtk.Label.use_underline} and
         * {@link Gtk.Label.use_markup} properties.
         * @param str the new text to set for the label
         */
        set_label(str: string): void;

        /**
         * Toggles line wrapping within the {@link Gtk.Label} widget. `true` makes it break
         * lines if text exceeds the widget’s size. `false` lets the text get cut off
         * by the edge of the widget if it exceeds the widget size.
         * 
         * Note that setting line wrapping to `true` does not make the label
         * wrap at its parent container’s width, because GTK+ widgets
         * conceptually can’t make their requisition depend on the parent
         * container’s size. For a label that wraps at a specific position,
         * set the label’s width using `gtk_widget_set_size_request()`.
         * @param wrap the setting
         */
        set_line_wrap(wrap: boolean): void;

        /**
         * If line wrapping is on (see `gtk_label_set_line_wrap()`) this controls how
         * the line wrapping is done. The default is {@link Pango.WrapMode.WORD} which means
         * wrap on word boundaries.
         * @param wrap_mode the line wrapping mode
         */
        set_line_wrap_mode(wrap_mode: Pango.WrapMode): void;

        /**
         * Sets the number of lines to which an ellipsized, wrapping label
         * should be limited. This has no effect if the label is not wrapping
         * or ellipsized. Set this to -1 if you don’t want to limit the
         * number of lines.
         * @param lines the desired number of lines, or -1
         */
        set_lines(lines: number): void;

        /**
         * Parses `str` which is marked up with the
         * [Pango text markup language][PangoMarkupFormat], setting the
         * label’s text and attribute list based on the parse results.
         * 
         * If the `str` is external data, you may need to escape it with
         * `g_markup_escape_text()` or `g_markup_printf_escaped()`:
         * 
         * 
         * ```c
         * GtkWidget *label = gtk_label_new (NULL);
         * const char *str = "some text";
         * const char *format = "<span style=\"italic\">\%s</span>";
         * char *markup;
         * 
         * markup = g_markup_printf_escaped (format, str);
         * gtk_label_set_markup (GTK_LABEL (label), markup);
         * g_free (markup);
         * ```
         * 
         * 
         * This function will set the {@link Gtk.Label.use_markup} property to `true` as
         * a side effect.
         * 
         * If you set the label contents using the {@link Gtk.Label.label} property you
         * should also ensure that you set the {@link Gtk.Label.use_markup} property
         * accordingly.
         * 
         * See also: `gtk_label_set_text()`
         * @param str a markup string (see [Pango markup format][PangoMarkupFormat])
         */
        set_markup(str: string): void;

        /**
         * Parses `str` which is marked up with the
         * [Pango text markup language][PangoMarkupFormat],
         * setting the label’s text and attribute list based on the parse results.
         * If characters in `str` are preceded by an underscore, they are underlined
         * indicating that they represent a keyboard accelerator called a mnemonic.
         * 
         * The mnemonic key can be used to activate another widget, chosen
         * automatically, or explicitly using `gtk_label_set_mnemonic_widget()`.
         * @param str a markup string (see     [Pango markup format][PangoMarkupFormat])
         */
        set_markup_with_mnemonic(str: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets the desired maximum width in characters of `label` to `n_chars`.
         * @param n_chars the new desired maximum width, in characters.
         */
        set_max_width_chars(n_chars: number): void;

        /**
         * If the label has been set so that it has an mnemonic key (using
         * i.e. `gtk_label_set_markup_with_mnemonic()`,
         * `gtk_label_set_text_with_mnemonic()`, `gtk_label_new_with_mnemonic()`
         * or the “use_underline” property) the label can be associated with a
         * widget that is the target of the mnemonic. When the label is inside
         * a widget (like a {@link Gtk.Button} or a {@link Gtk.Notebook} tab) it is
         * automatically associated with the correct widget, but sometimes
         * (i.e. when the target is a {@link Gtk.Entry} next to the label) you need to
         * set it explicitly using this function.
         * 
         * The target widget will be accelerated by emitting the
         * GtkWidget::mnemonic-activate signal on it. The default handler for
         * this signal will activate the widget if there are no mnemonic collisions
         * and toggle focus between the colliding widgets otherwise.
         * @param widget the target {@link Gtk.Widget}, or `null` to unset
         */
        set_mnemonic_widget(widget: Widget | null): void;

        /**
         * The pattern of underlines you want under the existing text within the
         * {@link Gtk.Label} widget.  For example if the current text of the label says
         * “FooBarBaz” passing a pattern of “___   ___” will underline
         * “Foo” and “Baz” but not “Bar”.
         * @param pattern The pattern as described above.
         */
        set_pattern(pattern: string): void;

        /**
         * Selectable labels allow the user to select text from the label, for
         * copy-and-paste.
         * @param setting `true` to allow selecting text in the label
         */
        set_selectable(setting: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the label is in single line mode.
         * @param single_line_mode `true` if the label should be in single line mode
         */
        set_single_line_mode(single_line_mode: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the text within the {@link Gtk.Label} widget. It overwrites any text that
         * was there before.
         * 
         * This function will clear any previously set mnemonic accelerators, and
         * set the {@link Gtk.Label.use_underline} property to `false` as a side effect.
         * 
         * This function will set the {@link Gtk.Label.use_markup} property to `false`
         * as a side effect.
         * 
         * See also: `gtk_label_set_markup()`
         * @param str The text you want to set
         */
        set_text(str: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets the label’s text from the string `str`.
         * If characters in `str` are preceded by an underscore, they are underlined
         * indicating that they represent a keyboard accelerator called a mnemonic.
         * The mnemonic key can be used to activate another widget, chosen
         * automatically, or explicitly using `gtk_label_set_mnemonic_widget()`.
         * @param str a string
         */
        set_text_with_mnemonic(str: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the label should keep track of clicked
         * links (and use a different color for them).
         * @param track_links `true` to track visited links
         */
        set_track_visited_links(track_links: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the text of the label contains markup in
         * [Pango’s text markup language][PangoMarkupFormat].
         * See `gtk_label_set_markup()`.
         * @param setting `true` if the label’s text should be parsed for markup.
         */
        set_use_markup(setting: boolean): void;

        /**
         * If true, an underline in the text indicates the next character should be
         * used for the mnemonic accelerator key.
         * @param setting `true` if underlines in the text indicate mnemonics
         */
        set_use_underline(setting: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the desired width in characters of `label` to `n_chars`.
         * @param n_chars the new desired width, in characters.
         */
        set_width_chars(n_chars: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.Label.xalign} property for `label`.
         * @param xalign the new xalign value, between 0 and 1
         */
        set_xalign(xalign: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.Label.yalign} property for `label`.
         * @param yalign the new yalign value, between 0 and 1
         */
        set_yalign(yalign: number): void;
    }


    namespace LabelAccessible {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends WidgetAccessible.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-layer": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-mdi-zorder": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-help-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-hypertext-nlinks": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption-object": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-summary": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends WidgetAccessible.ConstructorProps, Atk.Component.ConstructorProps, Atk.Hypertext.ConstructorProps, Atk.Text.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class LabelAccessible extends WidgetAccessible implements Atk.Component, Atk.Hypertext, Atk.Text {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<LabelAccessible>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: LabelAccessible.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<LabelAccessible.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof LabelAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, LabelAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof LabelAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, LabelAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof LabelAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<LabelAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        /**
         * Checks whether the specified point is within the extent of the `component`.
         * 
         * Toolkit implementor note: ATK provides a default implementation for
         * this virtual method. In general there are little reason to
         * re-implement it.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @returns `true` or `false` indicating whether the specified point is within the extent of the `component` or not
         */
        contains(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the alpha value (i.e. the opacity) for this
         * `component`, on a scale from 0 (fully transparent) to 1.0
         * (fully opaque).
         * @returns An alpha value from 0 to 1.0, inclusive.
         */
        get_alpha(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the rectangle which gives the extent of the `component`.
         * 
         * If the extent can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), all of x, y, width, height are set to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         */
        get_extents(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the layer of the component.
         * @returns an {@link Atk.Layer} which is the layer of the component
         */
        get_layer(): Atk.Layer;

        /**
         * Gets the zorder of the component. The value G_MININT will be returned
         * if the layer of the component is not ATK_LAYER_MDI or ATK_LAYER_WINDOW.
         * @returns a gint which is the zorder of the component, i.e. the depth at which the component is shown in relation to other components in the same container.
         */
        get_mdi_zorder(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the position of `component` in the form of
         * a point specifying `component`'s top-left corner.
         * 
         * If the position can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), x and y are set to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         */
        get_position(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the size of the `component` in terms of width and height.
         * 
         * If the size can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), width and height are set to -1.
         */
        get_size(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Grabs focus for this `component`.
         * @returns `true` if successful, `false` otherwise.
         */
        grab_focus(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets a reference to the accessible child, if one exists, at the
         * coordinate point specified by `x` and `y`.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @returns a reference to the accessible child, if one exists
         */
        ref_accessible_at_point(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): Atk.Object | null;

        /**
         * Remove the handler specified by `handler_id` from the list of
         * functions to be executed when this object receives focus events
         * (in or out).
         * @param handler_id the handler id of the focus handler to be removed from `component`
         */
        remove_focus_handler(handler_id: number): void;

        /**
         * Makes `component` visible on the screen by scrolling all necessary parents.
         * 
         * Contrary to atk_component_set_position, this does not actually move
         * `component` in its parent, this only makes the parents scroll so that the
         * object shows up on the screen, given its current position within the parents.
         * @param type specify where the object should be made visible.
         * @returns whether scrolling was successful.
         */
        scroll_to(type: Atk.ScrollType): boolean;

        /**
         * Move the top-left of `component` to a given position of the screen by
         * scrolling all necessary parents.
         * @param coords specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or to the parent object.
         * @param x x-position where to scroll to
         * @param y y-position where to scroll to
         * @returns whether scrolling was successful.
         */
        scroll_to_point(coords: Atk.CoordType, x: number, y: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the extents of `component`.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param width width to set for `component`
         * @param height height to set for `component`
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @returns `true` or `false` whether the extents were set or not
         */
        set_extents(x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the position of `component`.
         * 
         * Contrary to atk_component_scroll_to, this does not trigger any scrolling,
         * this just moves `component` in its parent.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the component's top level window
         * @returns `true` or `false` whether or not the position was set or not
         */
        set_position(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Set the size of the `component` in terms of width and height.
         * @param width width to set for `component`
         * @param height height to set for `component`
         * @returns `true` or `false` whether the size was set or not
         */
        set_size(width: number, height: number): boolean;

        /**
         * @param bounds 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_bounds_changed(bounds: Atk.Rectangle): void;

        /**
         * Checks whether the specified point is within the extent of the `component`.
         * 
         * Toolkit implementor note: ATK provides a default implementation for
         * this virtual method. In general there are little reason to
         * re-implement it.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_contains(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the alpha value (i.e. the opacity) for this
         * `component`, on a scale from 0 (fully transparent) to 1.0
         * (fully opaque).
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_alpha(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the rectangle which gives the extent of the `component`.
         * 
         * If the extent can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), all of x, y, width, height are set to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_extents(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the layer of the component.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_layer(): Atk.Layer;

        /**
         * Gets the zorder of the component. The value G_MININT will be returned
         * if the layer of the component is not ATK_LAYER_MDI or ATK_LAYER_WINDOW.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_mdi_zorder(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the position of `component` in the form of
         * a point specifying `component`'s top-left corner.
         * 
         * If the position can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), x and y are set to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_position(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the size of the `component` in terms of width and height.
         * 
         * If the size can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), width and height are set to -1.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_size(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Grabs focus for this `component`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_grab_focus(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets a reference to the accessible child, if one exists, at the
         * coordinate point specified by `x` and `y`.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_ref_accessible_at_point(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): Atk.Object | null;

        /**
         * Remove the handler specified by `handler_id` from the list of
         * functions to be executed when this object receives focus events
         * (in or out).
         * @param handler_id the handler id of the focus handler to be removed from `component`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_remove_focus_handler(handler_id: number): void;

        /**
         * Makes `component` visible on the screen by scrolling all necessary parents.
         * 
         * Contrary to atk_component_set_position, this does not actually move
         * `component` in its parent, this only makes the parents scroll so that the
         * object shows up on the screen, given its current position within the parents.
         * @param type specify where the object should be made visible.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_scroll_to(type: Atk.ScrollType): boolean;

        /**
         * Move the top-left of `component` to a given position of the screen by
         * scrolling all necessary parents.
         * @param coords specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or to the parent object.
         * @param x x-position where to scroll to
         * @param y y-position where to scroll to
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_scroll_to_point(coords: Atk.CoordType, x: number, y: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the extents of `component`.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param width width to set for `component`
         * @param height height to set for `component`
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_extents(x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the position of `component`.
         * 
         * Contrary to atk_component_scroll_to, this does not trigger any scrolling,
         * this just moves `component` in its parent.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the component's top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_position(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Set the size of the `component` in terms of width and height.
         * @param width width to set for `component`
         * @param height height to set for `component`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_size(width: number, height: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the link in this hypertext document at index
         * `link_index`
         * @param link_index an integer specifying the desired link
         * @returns the link in this hypertext document at index `link_index`
         */
        get_link(link_index: number): Atk.Hyperlink;

        /**
         * Gets the index into the array of hyperlinks that is associated with
         * the character specified by `char_index`.
         * @param char_index a character index
         * @returns an index into the array of hyperlinks in `hypertext`, or -1 if there is no hyperlink associated with this character.
         */
        get_link_index(char_index: number): number;

        /**
         * Gets the number of links within this hypertext document.
         * @returns the number of links within this hypertext document
         */
        get_n_links(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the link in this hypertext document at index
         * `link_index`
         * @param link_index an integer specifying the desired link
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_link(link_index: number): Atk.Hyperlink;

        /**
         * Gets the index into the array of hyperlinks that is associated with
         * the character specified by `char_index`.
         * @param char_index a character index
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_link_index(char_index: number): number;

        /**
         * Gets the number of links within this hypertext document.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_n_links(): number;

        /**
         * @param link_index 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_link_selected(link_index: number): void;

        /**
         * Adds a selection bounded by the specified offsets.
         * @param start_offset the starting character offset of the selected region
         * @param end_offset the offset of the first character after the selected region.
         * @returns `true` if successful, `false` otherwise
         */
        add_selection(start_offset: number, end_offset: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Get the ranges of text in the specified bounding box.
         * @param rect An AtkTextRectangle giving the dimensions of the bounding box.
         * @param coord_type Specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or widget window.
         * @param x_clip_type Specify the horizontal clip type.
         * @param y_clip_type Specify the vertical clip type.
         * @returns Array of AtkTextRange. The last          element of the array returned by this function will be NULL.
         */
        get_bounded_ranges(rect: Atk.TextRectangle, coord_type: Atk.CoordType, x_clip_type: Atk.TextClipType, y_clip_type: Atk.TextClipType): Atk.TextRange[];

        /**
         * Gets the offset of the position of the caret (cursor).
         * @returns the character offset of the position of the caret or -1 if          the caret is not located inside the element or in the case of          any other failure.
         */
        get_caret_offset(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the specified text.
         * @param offset a character offset within `text`
         * @returns the character at `offset` or 0 in the case of failure.
         */
        get_character_at_offset(offset: number): string;

        /**
         * Gets the character count.
         * @returns the number of characters or -1 in case of failure.
         */
        get_character_count(): number;

        /**
         * If the extent can not be obtained (e.g. missing support), all of x, y, width,
         * height are set to -1.
         * 
         * Get the bounding box containing the glyph representing the character at
         *     a particular text offset.
         * @param offset The offset of the text character for which bounding information is required.
         * @param coords specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or widget window
         */
        get_character_extents(offset: number, coords: Atk.CoordType): [number, number, number, number];

        /**
         * Creates an {@link Atk.AttributeSet} which consists of the default values of
         * attributes for the text. See the enum AtkTextAttribute for types of text
         * attributes that can be returned. Note that other attributes may also be
         * returned.
         * @returns an {@link Atk.AttributeSet} which contains the default text          attributes for this {@link Atk.Text}. This {@link Atk.AttributeSet} should be freed by          a call to `atk_attribute_set_free()`.
         */
        get_default_attributes(): Atk.AttributeSet;

        /**
         * Gets the number of selected regions.
         * @returns The number of selected regions, or -1 in the case of failure.
         */
        get_n_selections(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the offset of the character located at coordinates `x` and `y`. `x` and `y`
         * are interpreted as being relative to the screen or this widget's window
         * depending on `coords`.
         * @param x screen x-position of character
         * @param y screen y-position of character
         * @param coords specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or widget window
         * @returns the offset to the character which is located at  the specified          `x` and `y` coordinates of -1 in case of failure.
         */
        get_offset_at_point(x: number, y: number, coords: Atk.CoordType): number;

        /**
         * Get the bounding box for text within the specified range.
         * 
         * If the extents can not be obtained (e.g. or missing support), the rectangle
         * fields are set to -1.
         * @param start_offset The offset of the first text character for which boundary        information is required.
         * @param end_offset The offset of the text character after the last character        for which boundary information is required.
         * @param coord_type Specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or widget window.
         */
        get_range_extents(start_offset: number, end_offset: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): Atk.TextRectangle;

        /**
         * Creates an {@link Atk.AttributeSet} which consists of the attributes explicitly
         * set at the position `offset` in the text. `start_offset` and `end_offset` are
         * set to the start and end of the range around `offset` where the attributes are
         * invariant. Note that `end_offset` is the offset of the first character
         * after the range.  See the enum AtkTextAttribute for types of text
         * attributes that can be returned. Note that other attributes may also be
         * returned.
         * @param offset the character offset at which to get the attributes, -1 means the offset of the character to be inserted at the caret location.
         * @returns an {@link Atk.AttributeSet} which contains the attributes         explicitly set at `offset`. This {@link Atk.AttributeSet} should be freed by         a call to `atk_attribute_set_free()`.
         */
        get_run_attributes(offset: number): [Atk.AttributeSet, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the text from the specified selection.
         * @param selection_num The selection number.  The selected regions are assigned numbers that correspond to how far the region is from the start of the text.  The selected region closest to the beginning of the text region is assigned the number 0, etc.  Note that adding, moving or deleting a selected region can change the numbering.
         * @returns a newly allocated string containing the selected text. Use `g_free()`          to free the returned string.
         */
        get_selection(selection_num: number): [string, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets a portion of the text exposed through an {@link Atk.Text} according to a given `offset`
         * and a specific `granularity`, along with the start and end offsets defining the
         * boundaries of such a portion of text.
         * 
         * If `granularity` is ATK_TEXT_GRANULARITY_CHAR the character at the
         * offset is returned.
         * 
         * If `granularity` is ATK_TEXT_GRANULARITY_WORD the returned string
         * is from the word start at or before the offset to the word start after
         * the offset.
         * 
         * The returned string will contain the word at the offset if the offset
         * is inside a word and will contain the word before the offset if the
         * offset is not inside a word.
         * 
         * If `granularity` is ATK_TEXT_GRANULARITY_SENTENCE the returned string
         * is from the sentence start at or before the offset to the sentence
         * start after the offset.
         * 
         * The returned string will contain the sentence at the offset if the offset
         * is inside a sentence and will contain the sentence before the offset
         * if the offset is not inside a sentence.
         * 
         * If `granularity` is ATK_TEXT_GRANULARITY_LINE the returned string
         * is from the line start at or before the offset to the line
         * start after the offset.
         * 
         * If `granularity` is ATK_TEXT_GRANULARITY_PARAGRAPH the returned string
         * is from the start of the paragraph at or before the offset to the start
         * of the following paragraph after the offset.
         * @param offset position
         * @param granularity An {@link Atk.TextGranularity}
         * @returns a newly allocated string containing the text at          the `offset` bounded by the specified `granularity`. Use `g_free()`          to free the returned string.  Returns `null` if the offset is invalid          or no implementation is available.
         */
        get_string_at_offset(offset: number, granularity: Atk.TextGranularity): [string | null, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the specified text.
         * @param start_offset a starting character offset within `text`
         * @param end_offset an ending character offset within `text`, or -1 for the end of the string.
         * @returns a newly allocated string containing the text from `start_offset` up          to, but not including `end_offset`. Use `g_free()` to free the returned          string.
         */
        get_text(start_offset: number, end_offset: number): string;

        /**
         * Gets the specified text.
         * @param offset position
         * @param boundary_type An {@link Atk.TextBoundary}
         * @returns a newly allocated string containing the text after `offset` bounded          by the specified `boundary_type`. Use `g_free()` to free the returned          string.
         */
        get_text_after_offset(offset: number, boundary_type: Atk.TextBoundary): [string, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the specified text.
         * 
         * If the boundary_type if ATK_TEXT_BOUNDARY_CHAR the character at the
         * offset is returned.
         * 
         * If the boundary_type is ATK_TEXT_BOUNDARY_WORD_START the returned string
         * is from the word start at or before the offset to the word start after
         * the offset.
         * 
         * The returned string will contain the word at the offset if the offset
         * is inside a word and will contain the word before the offset if the
         * offset is not inside a word.
         * 
         * If the boundary type is ATK_TEXT_BOUNDARY_SENTENCE_START the returned
         * string is from the sentence start at or before the offset to the sentence
         * start after the offset.
         * 
         * The returned string will contain the sentence at the offset if the offset
         * is inside a sentence and will contain the sentence before the offset
         * if the offset is not inside a sentence.
         * 
         * If the boundary type is ATK_TEXT_BOUNDARY_LINE_START the returned
         * string is from the line start at or before the offset to the line
         * start after the offset.
         * @param offset position
         * @param boundary_type An {@link Atk.TextBoundary}
         * @returns a newly allocated string containing the text at `offset` bounded          by the specified `boundary_type`. Use `g_free()` to free the returned          string.
         */
        get_text_at_offset(offset: number, boundary_type: Atk.TextBoundary): [string, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the specified text.
         * @param offset position
         * @param boundary_type An {@link Atk.TextBoundary}
         * @returns a newly allocated string containing the text before `offset` bounded          by the specified `boundary_type`. Use `g_free()` to free the returned          string.
         */
        get_text_before_offset(offset: number, boundary_type: Atk.TextBoundary): [string, number, number];

        /**
         * Removes the specified selection.
         * @param selection_num The selection number.  The selected regions are assigned numbers that correspond to how far the region is from the start of the text.  The selected region closest to the beginning of the text region is assigned the number 0, etc.  Note that adding, moving or deleting a selected region can change the numbering.
         * @returns `true` if successful, `false` otherwise
         */
        remove_selection(selection_num: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Makes a substring of `text` visible on the screen by scrolling all necessary parents.
         * @param start_offset start offset in the `text`
         * @param end_offset end offset in the `text`, or -1 for the end of the text.
         * @param type specify where the object should be made visible.
         * @returns whether scrolling was successful.
         */
        scroll_substring_to(start_offset: number, end_offset: number, type: Atk.ScrollType): boolean;

        /**
         * Move the top-left of a substring of `text` to a given position of the screen
         * by scrolling all necessary parents.
         * @param start_offset start offset in the `text`
         * @param end_offset end offset in the `text`, or -1 for the end of the text.
         * @param coords specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or to the parent object.
         * @param x x-position where to scroll to
         * @param y y-position where to scroll to
         * @returns whether scrolling was successful.
         */
        scroll_substring_to_point(start_offset: number, end_offset: number, coords: Atk.CoordType, x: number, y: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the caret (cursor) position to the specified `offset`.
         * 
         * In the case of rich-text content, this method should either grab focus
         * or move the sequential focus navigation starting point (if the application
         * supports this concept) as if the user had clicked on the new caret position.
         * Typically, this means that the target of this operation is the node containing
         * the new caret position or one of its ancestors. In other words, after this
         * method is called, if the user advances focus, it should move to the first
         * focusable node following the new caret position.
         * 
         * Calling this method should also scroll the application viewport in a way
         * that matches the behavior of the application's typical caret motion or tab
         * navigation as closely as possible. This also means that if the application's
         * caret motion or focus navigation does not trigger a scroll operation, this
         * method should not trigger one either. If the application does not have a caret
         * motion or focus navigation operation, this method should try to scroll the new
         * caret position into view while minimizing unnecessary scroll motion.
         * @param offset the character offset of the new caret position
         * @returns `true` if successful, `false` otherwise.
         */
        set_caret_offset(offset: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Changes the start and end offset of the specified selection.
         * @param selection_num The selection number.  The selected regions are assigned numbers that correspond to how far the region is from the start of the text.  The selected region closest to the beginning of the text region is assigned the number 0, etc.  Note that adding, moving or deleting a selected region can change the numbering.
         * @param start_offset the new starting character offset of the selection
         * @param end_offset the new end position of (e.g. offset immediately past) the selection
         * @returns `true` if successful, `false` otherwise
         */
        set_selection(selection_num: number, start_offset: number, end_offset: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Adds a selection bounded by the specified offsets.
         * @param start_offset the starting character offset of the selected region
         * @param end_offset the offset of the first character after the selected region.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add_selection(start_offset: number, end_offset: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Get the ranges of text in the specified bounding box.
         * @param rect An AtkTextRectangle giving the dimensions of the bounding box.
         * @param coord_type Specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or widget window.
         * @param x_clip_type Specify the horizontal clip type.
         * @param y_clip_type Specify the vertical clip type.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_bounded_ranges(rect: Atk.TextRectangle, coord_type: Atk.CoordType, x_clip_type: Atk.TextClipType, y_clip_type: Atk.TextClipType): Atk.TextRange[];

        /**
         * Gets the offset of the position of the caret (cursor).
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_caret_offset(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the specified text.
         * @param offset a character offset within `text`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_character_at_offset(offset: number): string;

        /**
         * Gets the character count.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_character_count(): number;

        /**
         * If the extent can not be obtained (e.g. missing support), all of x, y, width,
         * height are set to -1.
         * 
         * Get the bounding box containing the glyph representing the character at
         *     a particular text offset.
         * @param offset The offset of the text character for which bounding information is required.
         * @param coords specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or widget window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_character_extents(offset: number, coords: Atk.CoordType): [number, number, number, number];

        /**
         * Creates an {@link Atk.AttributeSet} which consists of the default values of
         * attributes for the text. See the enum AtkTextAttribute for types of text
         * attributes that can be returned. Note that other attributes may also be
         * returned.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_default_attributes(): Atk.AttributeSet;

        /**
         * Gets the number of selected regions.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_n_selections(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the offset of the character located at coordinates `x` and `y`. `x` and `y`
         * are interpreted as being relative to the screen or this widget's window
         * depending on `coords`.
         * @param x screen x-position of character
         * @param y screen y-position of character
         * @param coords specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or widget window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_offset_at_point(x: number, y: number, coords: Atk.CoordType): number;

        /**
         * Get the bounding box for text within the specified range.
         * 
         * If the extents can not be obtained (e.g. or missing support), the rectangle
         * fields are set to -1.
         * @param start_offset The offset of the first text character for which boundary        information is required.
         * @param end_offset The offset of the text character after the last character        for which boundary information is required.
         * @param coord_type Specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or widget window.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_range_extents(start_offset: number, end_offset: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): Atk.TextRectangle;

        /**
         * Creates an {@link Atk.AttributeSet} which consists of the attributes explicitly
         * set at the position `offset` in the text. `start_offset` and `end_offset` are
         * set to the start and end of the range around `offset` where the attributes are
         * invariant. Note that `end_offset` is the offset of the first character
         * after the range.  See the enum AtkTextAttribute for types of text
         * attributes that can be returned. Note that other attributes may also be
         * returned.
         * @param offset the character offset at which to get the attributes, -1 means the offset of the character to be inserted at the caret location.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_run_attributes(offset: number): [Atk.AttributeSet, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the text from the specified selection.
         * @param selection_num The selection number.  The selected regions are assigned numbers that correspond to how far the region is from the start of the text.  The selected region closest to the beginning of the text region is assigned the number 0, etc.  Note that adding, moving or deleting a selected region can change the numbering.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_selection(selection_num: number): [string, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets a portion of the text exposed through an {@link Atk.Text} according to a given `offset`
         * and a specific `granularity`, along with the start and end offsets defining the
         * boundaries of such a portion of text.
         * 
         * If `granularity` is ATK_TEXT_GRANULARITY_CHAR the character at the
         * offset is returned.
         * 
         * If `granularity` is ATK_TEXT_GRANULARITY_WORD the returned string
         * is from the word start at or before the offset to the word start after
         * the offset.
         * 
         * The returned string will contain the word at the offset if the offset
         * is inside a word and will contain the word before the offset if the
         * offset is not inside a word.
         * 
         * If `granularity` is ATK_TEXT_GRANULARITY_SENTENCE the returned string
         * is from the sentence start at or before the offset to the sentence
         * start after the offset.
         * 
         * The returned string will contain the sentence at the offset if the offset
         * is inside a sentence and will contain the sentence before the offset
         * if the offset is not inside a sentence.
         * 
         * If `granularity` is ATK_TEXT_GRANULARITY_LINE the returned string
         * is from the line start at or before the offset to the line
         * start after the offset.
         * 
         * If `granularity` is ATK_TEXT_GRANULARITY_PARAGRAPH the returned string
         * is from the start of the paragraph at or before the offset to the start
         * of the following paragraph after the offset.
         * @param offset position
         * @param granularity An {@link Atk.TextGranularity}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_string_at_offset(offset: number, granularity: Atk.TextGranularity): [string | null, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the specified text.
         * @param start_offset a starting character offset within `text`
         * @param end_offset an ending character offset within `text`, or -1 for the end of the string.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_text(start_offset: number, end_offset: number): string;

        /**
         * Gets the specified text.
         * @param offset position
         * @param boundary_type An {@link Atk.TextBoundary}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_text_after_offset(offset: number, boundary_type: Atk.TextBoundary): [string, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the specified text.
         * 
         * If the boundary_type if ATK_TEXT_BOUNDARY_CHAR the character at the
         * offset is returned.
         * 
         * If the boundary_type is ATK_TEXT_BOUNDARY_WORD_START the returned string
         * is from the word start at or before the offset to the word start after
         * the offset.
         * 
         * The returned string will contain the word at the offset if the offset
         * is inside a word and will contain the word before the offset if the
         * offset is not inside a word.
         * 
         * If the boundary type is ATK_TEXT_BOUNDARY_SENTENCE_START the returned
         * string is from the sentence start at or before the offset to the sentence
         * start after the offset.
         * 
         * The returned string will contain the sentence at the offset if the offset
         * is inside a sentence and will contain the sentence before the offset
         * if the offset is not inside a sentence.
         * 
         * If the boundary type is ATK_TEXT_BOUNDARY_LINE_START the returned
         * string is from the line start at or before the offset to the line
         * start after the offset.
         * @param offset position
         * @param boundary_type An {@link Atk.TextBoundary}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_text_at_offset(offset: number, boundary_type: Atk.TextBoundary): [string, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the specified text.
         * @param offset position
         * @param boundary_type An {@link Atk.TextBoundary}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_text_before_offset(offset: number, boundary_type: Atk.TextBoundary): [string, number, number];

        /**
         * Removes the specified selection.
         * @param selection_num The selection number.  The selected regions are assigned numbers that correspond to how far the region is from the start of the text.  The selected region closest to the beginning of the text region is assigned the number 0, etc.  Note that adding, moving or deleting a selected region can change the numbering.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_remove_selection(selection_num: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Makes a substring of `text` visible on the screen by scrolling all necessary parents.
         * @param start_offset start offset in the `text`
         * @param end_offset end offset in the `text`, or -1 for the end of the text.
         * @param type specify where the object should be made visible.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_scroll_substring_to(start_offset: number, end_offset: number, type: Atk.ScrollType): boolean;

        /**
         * Move the top-left of a substring of `text` to a given position of the screen
         * by scrolling all necessary parents.
         * @param start_offset start offset in the `text`
         * @param end_offset end offset in the `text`, or -1 for the end of the text.
         * @param coords specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or to the parent object.
         * @param x x-position where to scroll to
         * @param y y-position where to scroll to
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_scroll_substring_to_point(start_offset: number, end_offset: number, coords: Atk.CoordType, x: number, y: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the caret (cursor) position to the specified `offset`.
         * 
         * In the case of rich-text content, this method should either grab focus
         * or move the sequential focus navigation starting point (if the application
         * supports this concept) as if the user had clicked on the new caret position.
         * Typically, this means that the target of this operation is the node containing
         * the new caret position or one of its ancestors. In other words, after this
         * method is called, if the user advances focus, it should move to the first
         * focusable node following the new caret position.
         * 
         * Calling this method should also scroll the application viewport in a way
         * that matches the behavior of the application's typical caret motion or tab
         * navigation as closely as possible. This also means that if the application's
         * caret motion or focus navigation does not trigger a scroll operation, this
         * method should not trigger one either. If the application does not have a caret
         * motion or focus navigation operation, this method should try to scroll the new
         * caret position into view while minimizing unnecessary scroll motion.
         * @param offset the character offset of the new caret position
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_caret_offset(offset: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Changes the start and end offset of the specified selection.
         * @param selection_num The selection number.  The selected regions are assigned numbers that correspond to how far the region is from the start of the text.  The selected region closest to the beginning of the text region is assigned the number 0, etc.  Note that adding, moving or deleting a selected region can change the numbering.
         * @param start_offset the new starting character offset of the selection
         * @param end_offset the new end position of (e.g. offset immediately past) the selection
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_selection(selection_num: number, start_offset: number, end_offset: number): boolean;

        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_text_attributes_changed(): void;

        /**
         * @param location 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_text_caret_moved(location: number): void;

        /**
         * the signal handler which is executed when there is a
         *   text change. This virtual function is deprecated sice 2.9.4 and
         *   it should not be overriden.
         * @param position 
         * @param length 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_text_changed(position: number, length: number): void;

        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_text_selection_changed(): void;
    }


    namespace Layout {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Container.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::height": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hadjustment": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hscroll-policy": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vadjustment": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vscroll-policy": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Container.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, Scrollable.ConstructorProps {
            height: number;
            width: number;
        }
    }

    /**
     * {@link Gtk.Layout} is similar to {@link Gtk.DrawingArea} in that it’s a “blank slate” and
     * doesn’t do anything except paint a blank background by default. It’s
     * different in that it supports scrolling natively due to implementing
     * {@link Gtk.Scrollable}, and can contain child widgets since it’s a {@link Gtk.Container}.
     * 
     * If you just want to draw, a {@link Gtk.DrawingArea} is a better choice since it has
     * lower overhead. If you just need to position child widgets at specific
     * points, then {@link Gtk.Fixed} provides that functionality on its own.
     * 
     * When handling expose events on a {@link Gtk.Layout}, you must draw to the {@link Gdk.Window}
     * returned by `gtk_layout_get_bin_window()`, rather than to the one returned by
     * `gtk_widget_get_window()` as you would for a {@link Gtk.DrawingArea}.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class Layout extends Container implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable, Scrollable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<Layout>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * @default 100
         */
        get height(): number;
        set height(val: number);

        /**
         * @default 100
         */
        get width(): number;
        set width(val: number);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: Layout.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        container: Container;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<Layout.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](hadjustment: Adjustment | null, vadjustment: Adjustment | null): Layout;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof Layout.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Layout.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof Layout.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Layout.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof Layout.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<Layout.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Retrieve the bin window of the layout used for drawing operations.
         * @returns a {@link Gdk.Window}
         */
        get_bin_window(): Gdk.Window;

        /**
         * This function should only be called after the layout has been
         * placed in a {@link Gtk.ScrolledWindow} or otherwise configured for
         * scrolling. It returns the {@link Gtk.Adjustment} used for communication
         * between the horizontal scrollbar and `layout`.
         * 
         * See {@link Gtk.ScrolledWindow}, {@link Gtk.Scrollbar}, {@link Gtk.Adjustment} for details.
         * @returns horizontal scroll adjustment
         */
        get_hadjustment(): Adjustment;

        /**
         * Gets the size that has been set on the layout, and that determines
         * the total extents of the layout’s scrollbar area. See
         * gtk_layout_set_size ().
         */
        get_size(): [number, number];

        /**
         * This function should only be called after the layout has been
         * placed in a {@link Gtk.ScrolledWindow} or otherwise configured for
         * scrolling. It returns the {@link Gtk.Adjustment} used for communication
         * between the vertical scrollbar and `layout`.
         * 
         * See {@link Gtk.ScrolledWindow}, {@link Gtk.Scrollbar}, {@link Gtk.Adjustment} for details.
         * @returns vertical scroll adjustment
         */
        get_vadjustment(): Adjustment;

        /**
         * Moves a current child of `layout` to a new position.
         * @param child_widget a current child of `layout`
         * @param x X position to move to
         * @param y Y position to move to
         */
        move(child_widget: Widget, x: number, y: number): void;

        /**
         * Adds `child_widget` to `layout`, at position (`x`,`y`).
         * `layout` becomes the new parent container of `child_widget`.
         * @param child_widget child widget
         * @param x X position of child widget
         * @param y Y position of child widget
         */
        put(child_widget: Widget, x: number, y: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the horizontal scroll adjustment for the layout.
         * 
         * See {@link Gtk.ScrolledWindow}, {@link Gtk.Scrollbar}, {@link Gtk.Adjustment} for details.
         * @param adjustment new scroll adjustment
         */
        set_hadjustment(adjustment: Adjustment | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the size of the scrollable area of the layout.
         * @param width width of entire scrollable area
         * @param height height of entire scrollable area
         */
        set_size(width: number, height: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the vertical scroll adjustment for the layout.
         * 
         * See {@link Gtk.ScrolledWindow}, {@link Gtk.Scrollbar}, {@link Gtk.Adjustment} for details.
         * @param adjustment new scroll adjustment
         */
        set_vadjustment(adjustment: Adjustment | null): void;

        /**
         * Horizontal {@link Gtk.Adjustment} of the scrollable widget. This adjustment is
         * shared between the scrollable widget and its parent.
         * @since 3.0
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Scrollable
         */
        get hadjustment(): Adjustment;
        set hadjustment(val: Adjustment);

        /**
         * Determines whether horizontal scrolling should start once the scrollable
         * widget is allocated less than its minimum width or less than its natural width.
         * @since 3.0
         * @default Gtk.ScrollablePolicy.MINIMUM
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Scrollable
         */
        get hscroll_policy(): ScrollablePolicy;
        set hscroll_policy(val: ScrollablePolicy);

        /**
         * Determines whether horizontal scrolling should start once the scrollable
         * widget is allocated less than its minimum width or less than its natural width.
         * @since 3.0
         * @default Gtk.ScrollablePolicy.MINIMUM
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Scrollable
         */
        get hscrollPolicy(): ScrollablePolicy;
        set hscrollPolicy(val: ScrollablePolicy);

        /**
         * Verical {@link Gtk.Adjustment} of the scrollable widget. This adjustment is shared
         * between the scrollable widget and its parent.
         * @since 3.0
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Scrollable
         */
        get vadjustment(): Adjustment;
        set vadjustment(val: Adjustment);

        /**
         * Determines whether vertical scrolling should start once the scrollable
         * widget is allocated less than its minimum height or less than its natural height.
         * @since 3.0
         * @default Gtk.ScrollablePolicy.MINIMUM
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Scrollable
         */
        get vscroll_policy(): ScrollablePolicy;
        set vscroll_policy(val: ScrollablePolicy);

        /**
         * Determines whether vertical scrolling should start once the scrollable
         * widget is allocated less than its minimum height or less than its natural height.
         * @since 3.0
         * @default Gtk.ScrollablePolicy.MINIMUM
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Scrollable
         */
        get vscrollPolicy(): ScrollablePolicy;
        set vscrollPolicy(val: ScrollablePolicy);

        /**
         * Returns the size of a non-scrolling border around the
         * outside of the scrollable. An example for this would
         * be treeview headers. GTK+ can use this information to
         * display overlayed graphics, like the overshoot indication,
         * at the right position.
         * @returns `true` if `border` has been set
         */
        get_border(): [boolean, Border];

        /**
         * Gets the horizontal {@link Gtk.ScrollablePolicy}.
         * @returns The horizontal {@link Gtk.ScrollablePolicy}.
         */
        get_hscroll_policy(): ScrollablePolicy;

        /**
         * Gets the vertical {@link Gtk.ScrollablePolicy}.
         * @returns The vertical {@link Gtk.ScrollablePolicy}.
         */
        get_vscroll_policy(): ScrollablePolicy;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.ScrollablePolicy} to determine whether
         * horizontal scrolling should start below the minimum width or
         * below the natural width.
         * @param policy the horizontal {@link Gtk.ScrollablePolicy}
         */
        set_hscroll_policy(policy: ScrollablePolicy): void;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.ScrollablePolicy} to determine whether
         * vertical scrolling should start below the minimum height or
         * below the natural height.
         * @param policy the vertical {@link Gtk.ScrollablePolicy}
         */
        set_vscroll_policy(policy: ScrollablePolicy): void;

        /**
         * Returns the size of a non-scrolling border around the
         * outside of the scrollable. An example for this would
         * be treeview headers. GTK+ can use this information to
         * display overlayed graphics, like the overshoot indication,
         * at the right position.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_border(): [boolean, Border];
    }


    namespace LevelBar {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Widget.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * Emitted when an offset specified on the bar changes value as an
             * effect to `gtk_level_bar_add_offset_value()` being called.
             * 
             * The signal supports detailed connections; you can connect to the
             * detailed signal "changed::x" in order to only receive callbacks when
             * the value of offset "x" changes.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.6
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "offset-changed": (arg0: string) => void;
            "notify::inverted": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::max-value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::min-value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::orientation": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when an offset specified on the bar changes value as an
             * effect to `gtk_level_bar_add_offset_value()` being called.
             * 
             * The signal supports detailed connections; you can connect to the
             * detailed signal "changed::x" in order to only receive callbacks when
             * the value of offset "x" changes.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.6
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "offset-changed::inverted": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when an offset specified on the bar changes value as an
             * effect to `gtk_level_bar_add_offset_value()` being called.
             * 
             * The signal supports detailed connections; you can connect to the
             * detailed signal "changed::x" in order to only receive callbacks when
             * the value of offset "x" changes.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.6
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "offset-changed::max-value": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when an offset specified on the bar changes value as an
             * effect to `gtk_level_bar_add_offset_value()` being called.
             * 
             * The signal supports detailed connections; you can connect to the
             * detailed signal "changed::x" in order to only receive callbacks when
             * the value of offset "x" changes.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.6
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "offset-changed::min-value": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when an offset specified on the bar changes value as an
             * effect to `gtk_level_bar_add_offset_value()` being called.
             * 
             * The signal supports detailed connections; you can connect to the
             * detailed signal "changed::x" in order to only receive callbacks when
             * the value of offset "x" changes.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.6
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "offset-changed::mode": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when an offset specified on the bar changes value as an
             * effect to `gtk_level_bar_add_offset_value()` being called.
             * 
             * The signal supports detailed connections; you can connect to the
             * detailed signal "changed::x" in order to only receive callbacks when
             * the value of offset "x" changes.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.6
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "offset-changed::value": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when an offset specified on the bar changes value as an
             * effect to `gtk_level_bar_add_offset_value()` being called.
             * 
             * The signal supports detailed connections; you can connect to the
             * detailed signal "changed::x" in order to only receive callbacks when
             * the value of offset "x" changes.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.6
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "offset-changed::app-paintable": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when an offset specified on the bar changes value as an
             * effect to `gtk_level_bar_add_offset_value()` being called.
             * 
             * The signal supports detailed connections; you can connect to the
             * detailed signal "changed::x" in order to only receive callbacks when
             * the value of offset "x" changes.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.6
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "offset-changed::can-default": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when an offset specified on the bar changes value as an
             * effect to `gtk_level_bar_add_offset_value()` being called.
             * 
             * The signal supports detailed connections; you can connect to the
             * detailed signal "changed::x" in order to only receive callbacks when
             * the value of offset "x" changes.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.6
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "offset-changed::can-focus": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when an offset specified on the bar changes value as an
             * effect to `gtk_level_bar_add_offset_value()` being called.
             * 
             * The signal supports detailed connections; you can connect to the
             * detailed signal "changed::x" in order to only receive callbacks when
             * the value of offset "x" changes.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.6
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "offset-changed::composite-child": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when an offset specified on the bar changes value as an
             * effect to `gtk_level_bar_add_offset_value()` being called.
             * 
             * The signal supports detailed connections; you can connect to the
             * detailed signal "changed::x" in order to only receive callbacks when
             * the value of offset "x" changes.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.6
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "offset-changed::double-buffered": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when an offset specified on the bar changes value as an
             * effect to `gtk_level_bar_add_offset_value()` being called.
             * 
             * The signal supports detailed connections; you can connect to the
             * detailed signal "changed::x" in order to only receive callbacks when
             * the value of offset "x" changes.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.6
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "offset-changed::events": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when an offset specified on the bar changes value as an
             * effect to `gtk_level_bar_add_offset_value()` being called.
             * 
             * The signal supports detailed connections; you can connect to the
             * detailed signal "changed::x" in order to only receive callbacks when
             * the value of offset "x" changes.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.6
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "offset-changed::expand": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when an offset specified on the bar changes value as an
             * effect to `gtk_level_bar_add_offset_value()` being called.
             * 
             * The signal supports detailed connections; you can connect to the
             * detailed signal "changed::x" in order to only receive callbacks when
             * the value of offset "x" changes.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.6
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "offset-changed::focus-on-click": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when an offset specified on the bar changes value as an
             * effect to `gtk_level_bar_add_offset_value()` being called.
             * 
             * The signal supports detailed connections; you can connect to the
             * detailed signal "changed::x" in order to only receive callbacks when
             * the value of offset "x" changes.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.6
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "offset-changed::halign": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when an offset specified on the bar changes value as an
             * effect to `gtk_level_bar_add_offset_value()` being called.
             * 
             * The signal supports detailed connections; you can connect to the
             * detailed signal "changed::x" in order to only receive callbacks when
             * the value of offset "x" changes.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.6
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "offset-changed::has-default": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when an offset specified on the bar changes value as an
             * effect to `gtk_level_bar_add_offset_value()` being called.
             * 
             * The signal supports detailed connections; you can connect to the
             * detailed signal "changed::x" in order to only receive callbacks when
             * the value of offset "x" changes.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.6
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "offset-changed::has-focus": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when an offset specified on the bar changes value as an
             * effect to `gtk_level_bar_add_offset_value()` being called.
             * 
             * The signal supports detailed connections; you can connect to the
             * detailed signal "changed::x" in order to only receive callbacks when
             * the value of offset "x" changes.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.6
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "offset-changed::has-tooltip": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when an offset specified on the bar changes value as an
             * effect to `gtk_level_bar_add_offset_value()` being called.
             * 
             * The signal supports detailed connections; you can connect to the
             * detailed signal "changed::x" in order to only receive callbacks when
             * the value of offset "x" changes.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.6
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "offset-changed::height-request": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when an offset specified on the bar changes value as an
             * effect to `gtk_level_bar_add_offset_value()` being called.
             * 
             * The signal supports detailed connections; you can connect to the
             * detailed signal "changed::x" in order to only receive callbacks when
             * the value of offset "x" changes.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.6
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "offset-changed::hexpand": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when an offset specified on the bar changes value as an
             * effect to `gtk_level_bar_add_offset_value()` being called.
             * 
             * The signal supports detailed connections; you can connect to the
             * detailed signal "changed::x" in order to only receive callbacks when
             * the value of offset "x" changes.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.6
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "offset-changed::hexpand-set": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when an offset specified on the bar changes value as an
             * effect to `gtk_level_bar_add_offset_value()` being called.
             * 
             * The signal supports detailed connections; you can connect to the
             * detailed signal "changed::x" in order to only receive callbacks when
             * the value of offset "x" changes.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.6
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "offset-changed::is-focus": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when an offset specified on the bar changes value as an
             * effect to `gtk_level_bar_add_offset_value()` being called.
             * 
             * The signal supports detailed connections; you can connect to the
             * detailed signal "changed::x" in order to only receive callbacks when
             * the value of offset "x" changes.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.6
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "offset-changed::margin": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when an offset specified on the bar changes value as an
             * effect to `gtk_level_bar_add_offset_value()` being called.
             * 
             * The signal supports detailed connections; you can connect to the
             * detailed signal "changed::x" in order to only receive callbacks when
             * the value of offset "x" changes.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.6
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "offset-changed::margin-bottom": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when an offset specified on the bar changes value as an
             * effect to `gtk_level_bar_add_offset_value()` being called.
             * 
             * The signal supports detailed connections; you can connect to the
             * detailed signal "changed::x" in order to only receive callbacks when
             * the value of offset "x" changes.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.6
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "offset-changed::margin-end": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when an offset specified on the bar changes value as an
             * effect to `gtk_level_bar_add_offset_value()` being called.
             * 
             * The signal supports detailed connections; you can connect to the
             * detailed signal "changed::x" in order to only receive callbacks when
             * the value of offset "x" changes.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.6
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "offset-changed::margin-left": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when an offset specified on the bar changes value as an
             * effect to `gtk_level_bar_add_offset_value()` being called.
             * 
             * The signal supports detailed connections; you can connect to the
             * detailed signal "changed::x" in order to only receive callbacks when
             * the value of offset "x" changes.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.6
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "offset-changed::margin-right": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when an offset specified on the bar changes value as an
             * effect to `gtk_level_bar_add_offset_value()` being called.
             * 
             * The signal supports detailed connections; you can connect to the
             * detailed signal "changed::x" in order to only receive callbacks when
             * the value of offset "x" changes.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.6
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "offset-changed::margin-start": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when an offset specified on the bar changes value as an
             * effect to `gtk_level_bar_add_offset_value()` being called.
             * 
             * The signal supports detailed connections; you can connect to the
             * detailed signal "changed::x" in order to only receive callbacks when
             * the value of offset "x" changes.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.6
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "offset-changed::margin-top": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when an offset specified on the bar changes value as an
             * effect to `gtk_level_bar_add_offset_value()` being called.
             * 
             * The signal supports detailed connections; you can connect to the
             * detailed signal "changed::x" in order to only receive callbacks when
             * the value of offset "x" changes.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.6
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "offset-changed::name": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when an offset specified on the bar changes value as an
             * effect to `gtk_level_bar_add_offset_value()` being called.
             * 
             * The signal supports detailed connections; you can connect to the
             * detailed signal "changed::x" in order to only receive callbacks when
             * the value of offset "x" changes.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.6
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "offset-changed::no-show-all": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when an offset specified on the bar changes value as an
             * effect to `gtk_level_bar_add_offset_value()` being called.
             * 
             * The signal supports detailed connections; you can connect to the
             * detailed signal "changed::x" in order to only receive callbacks when
             * the value of offset "x" changes.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.6
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "offset-changed::opacity": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when an offset specified on the bar changes value as an
             * effect to `gtk_level_bar_add_offset_value()` being called.
             * 
             * The signal supports detailed connections; you can connect to the
             * detailed signal "changed::x" in order to only receive callbacks when
             * the value of offset "x" changes.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.6
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "offset-changed::parent": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when an offset specified on the bar changes value as an
             * effect to `gtk_level_bar_add_offset_value()` being called.
             * 
             * The signal supports detailed connections; you can connect to the
             * detailed signal "changed::x" in order to only receive callbacks when
             * the value of offset "x" changes.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.6
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "offset-changed::receives-default": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when an offset specified on the bar changes value as an
             * effect to `gtk_level_bar_add_offset_value()` being called.
             * 
             * The signal supports detailed connections; you can connect to the
             * detailed signal "changed::x" in order to only receive callbacks when
             * the value of offset "x" changes.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.6
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "offset-changed::scale-factor": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when an offset specified on the bar changes value as an
             * effect to `gtk_level_bar_add_offset_value()` being called.
             * 
             * The signal supports detailed connections; you can connect to the
             * detailed signal "changed::x" in order to only receive callbacks when
             * the value of offset "x" changes.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.6
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "offset-changed::sensitive": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when an offset specified on the bar changes value as an
             * effect to `gtk_level_bar_add_offset_value()` being called.
             * 
             * The signal supports detailed connections; you can connect to the
             * detailed signal "changed::x" in order to only receive callbacks when
             * the value of offset "x" changes.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.6
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "offset-changed::style": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when an offset specified on the bar changes value as an
             * effect to `gtk_level_bar_add_offset_value()` being called.
             * 
             * The signal supports detailed connections; you can connect to the
             * detailed signal "changed::x" in order to only receive callbacks when
             * the value of offset "x" changes.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.6
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "offset-changed::tooltip-markup": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when an offset specified on the bar changes value as an
             * effect to `gtk_level_bar_add_offset_value()` being called.
             * 
             * The signal supports detailed connections; you can connect to the
             * detailed signal "changed::x" in order to only receive callbacks when
             * the value of offset "x" changes.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.6
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "offset-changed::tooltip-text": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when an offset specified on the bar changes value as an
             * effect to `gtk_level_bar_add_offset_value()` being called.
             * 
             * The signal supports detailed connections; you can connect to the
             * detailed signal "changed::x" in order to only receive callbacks when
             * the value of offset "x" changes.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.6
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "offset-changed::valign": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when an offset specified on the bar changes value as an
             * effect to `gtk_level_bar_add_offset_value()` being called.
             * 
             * The signal supports detailed connections; you can connect to the
             * detailed signal "changed::x" in order to only receive callbacks when
             * the value of offset "x" changes.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.6
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "offset-changed::vexpand": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when an offset specified on the bar changes value as an
             * effect to `gtk_level_bar_add_offset_value()` being called.
             * 
             * The signal supports detailed connections; you can connect to the
             * detailed signal "changed::x" in order to only receive callbacks when
             * the value of offset "x" changes.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.6
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "offset-changed::vexpand-set": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when an offset specified on the bar changes value as an
             * effect to `gtk_level_bar_add_offset_value()` being called.
             * 
             * The signal supports detailed connections; you can connect to the
             * detailed signal "changed::x" in order to only receive callbacks when
             * the value of offset "x" changes.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.6
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "offset-changed::visible": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when an offset specified on the bar changes value as an
             * effect to `gtk_level_bar_add_offset_value()` being called.
             * 
             * The signal supports detailed connections; you can connect to the
             * detailed signal "changed::x" in order to only receive callbacks when
             * the value of offset "x" changes.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.6
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "offset-changed::width-request": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when an offset specified on the bar changes value as an
             * effect to `gtk_level_bar_add_offset_value()` being called.
             * 
             * The signal supports detailed connections; you can connect to the
             * detailed signal "changed::x" in order to only receive callbacks when
             * the value of offset "x" changes.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.6
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "offset-changed::window": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when an offset specified on the bar changes value as an
             * effect to `gtk_level_bar_add_offset_value()` being called.
             * 
             * The signal supports detailed connections; you can connect to the
             * detailed signal "changed::x" in order to only receive callbacks when
             * the value of offset "x" changes.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.6
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "offset-changed::orientation": (arg0: string) => void;
            [key: `offset-changed::${string}`]: (arg0: string) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Widget.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, Orientable.ConstructorProps {
            inverted: boolean;
            max_value: number;
            maxValue: number;
            min_value: number;
            minValue: number;
            mode: LevelBarMode;
            value: number;
        }
    }

    /**
     * The {@link Gtk.LevelBar} is a bar widget that can be used
     * as a level indicator. Typical use cases are displaying the strength
     * of a password, or showing the charge level of a battery.
     * 
     * Use `gtk_level_bar_set_value()` to set the current value, and
     * `gtk_level_bar_add_offset_value()` to set the value offsets at which
     * the bar will be considered in a different state. GTK will add a few
     * offsets by default on the level bar: #GTK_LEVEL_BAR_OFFSET_LOW,
     * #GTK_LEVEL_BAR_OFFSET_HIGH and #GTK_LEVEL_BAR_OFFSET_FULL, with
     * values 0.25, 0.75 and 1.0 respectively.
     * 
     * Note that it is your responsibility to update preexisting offsets
     * when changing the minimum or maximum value. GTK+ will simply clamp
     * them to the new range.
     * 
     * ## Adding a custom offset on the bar
     * 
     * 
     * ```c
     * 
     * static GtkWidget *
     * create_level_bar (void)
     * {
     *   GtkWidget *widget;
     *   GtkLevelBar *bar;
     * 
     *   widget = gtk_level_bar_new ();
     *   bar = GTK_LEVEL_BAR (widget);
     * 
     *   // This changes the value of the default low offset
     * 
     *   gtk_level_bar_add_offset_value (bar,
     *                                   GTK_LEVEL_BAR_OFFSET_LOW,
     *                                   0.10);
     * 
     *   // This adds a new offset to the bar; the application will
     *   // be able to change its color CSS like this:
     *   //
     *   // levelbar block.my-offset {
     *   //   background-color: magenta;
     *   //   border-style: solid;
     *   //   border-color: black;
     *   //   border-style: 1px;
     *   // }
     * 
     *   gtk_level_bar_add_offset_value (bar, "my-offset", 0.60);
     * 
     *   return widget;
     * }
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * The default interval of values is between zero and one, but it’s possible to
     * modify the interval using `gtk_level_bar_set_min_value()` and
     * `gtk_level_bar_set_max_value()`. The value will be always drawn in proportion to
     * the admissible interval, i.e. a value of 15 with a specified interval between
     * 10 and 20 is equivalent to a value of 0.5 with an interval between 0 and 1.
     * When #GTK_LEVEL_BAR_MODE_DISCRETE is used, the bar level is rendered
     * as a finite number of separated blocks instead of a single one. The number
     * of blocks that will be rendered is equal to the number of units specified by
     * the admissible interval.
     * 
     * For instance, to build a bar rendered with five blocks, it’s sufficient to
     * set the minimum value to 0 and the maximum value to 5 after changing the indicator
     * mode to discrete.
     * 
     * GtkLevelBar was introduced in GTK+ 3.6.
     * 
     * # GtkLevelBar as GtkBuildable
     * 
     * The GtkLevelBar implementation of the GtkBuildable interface supports a
     * custom `<offsets>` element, which can contain any number of `<offset>` elements,
     * each of which must have "name" and "value" attributes.
     * 
     * # CSS nodes
     * 
     * 
     * ```
     * levelbar[.discrete]
     * ╰── trough
     *     ├── block.filled.level-name
     *     ┊
     *     ├── block.empty
     *     ┊
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * GtkLevelBar has a main CSS node with name levelbar and one of the style
     * classes .discrete or .continuous and a subnode with name trough. Below the
     * trough node are a number of nodes with name block and style class .filled
     * or .empty. In continuous mode, there is exactly one node of each, in discrete
     * mode, the number of filled and unfilled nodes corresponds to blocks that are
     * drawn. The block.filled nodes also get a style class .level-name corresponding
     * to the level for the current value.
     * 
     * In horizontal orientation, the nodes are always arranged from left to right,
     * regardless of text direction.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class LevelBar extends Widget implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable, Orientable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<LevelBar>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * Level bars normally grow from top to bottom or left to right.
         * Inverted level bars grow in the opposite direction.
         * @since 3.8
         * @default false
         */
        get inverted(): boolean;
        set inverted(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The {@link Gtk.LevelBar.max_value} property determaxes the maximum value of
         * the interval that can be displayed by the bar.
         * @since 3.6
         * @default 1
         */
        get max_value(): number;
        set max_value(val: number);

        /**
         * The {@link Gtk.LevelBar.max_value} property determaxes the maximum value of
         * the interval that can be displayed by the bar.
         * @since 3.6
         * @default 1
         */
        get maxValue(): number;
        set maxValue(val: number);

        /**
         * The {@link Gtk.LevelBar.min_value} property determines the minimum value of
         * the interval that can be displayed by the bar.
         * @since 3.6
         * @default 0
         */
        get min_value(): number;
        set min_value(val: number);

        /**
         * The {@link Gtk.LevelBar.min_value} property determines the minimum value of
         * the interval that can be displayed by the bar.
         * @since 3.6
         * @default 0
         */
        get minValue(): number;
        set minValue(val: number);

        /**
         * The {@link Gtk.LevelBar.mode} property determines the way {@link Gtk.LevelBar}
         * interprets the value properties to draw the level fill area.
         * Specifically, when the value is #GTK_LEVEL_BAR_MODE_CONTINUOUS,
         * {@link Gtk.LevelBar} will draw a single block representing the current value in
         * that area; when the value is #GTK_LEVEL_BAR_MODE_DISCRETE,
         * the widget will draw a succession of separate blocks filling the
         * draw area, with the number of blocks being equal to the units separating
         * the integral roundings of {@link Gtk.LevelBar.min_value} and {@link Gtk.LevelBar.max_value}.
         * @since 3.6
         * @default Gtk.LevelBarMode.CONTINUOUS
         */
        get mode(): LevelBarMode;
        set mode(val: LevelBarMode);

        /**
         * The {@link Gtk.LevelBar.value} property determines the currently
         * filled value of the level bar.
         * @since 3.6
         * @default 0
         */
        get value(): number;
        set value(val: number);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: LevelBar.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<LevelBar.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): LevelBar;

        static new_for_interval(min_value: number, max_value: number): LevelBar;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof LevelBar.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, LevelBar.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof LevelBar.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, LevelBar.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof LevelBar.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<LevelBar.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * @param name 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_offset_changed(name: string): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Adds a new offset marker on `self` at the position specified by `value`.
         * When the bar value is in the interval topped by `value` (or between `value`
         * and {@link Gtk.LevelBar.max_value} in case the offset is the last one on the bar)
         * a style class named `level-``name` will be applied
         * when rendering the level bar fill.
         * If another offset marker named `name` exists, its value will be
         * replaced by `value`.
         * @param name the name of the new offset
         * @param value the value for the new offset
         */
        add_offset_value(name: string, value: number): void;

        /**
         * Return the value of the {@link Gtk.LevelBar.inverted} property.
         * @returns `true` if the level bar is inverted
         */
        get_inverted(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the value of the {@link Gtk.LevelBar.max_value} property.
         * @returns a positive value
         */
        get_max_value(): number;

        /**
         * Returns the value of the {@link Gtk.LevelBar.min_value} property.
         * @returns a positive value
         */
        get_min_value(): number;

        /**
         * Returns the value of the {@link Gtk.LevelBar.mode} property.
         * @returns a {@link Gtk.LevelBarMode}
         */
        get_mode(): LevelBarMode;

        /**
         * Fetches the value specified for the offset marker `name` in `self`,
         * returning `true` in case an offset named `name` was found.
         * @param name the name of an offset in the bar
         * @returns `true` if the specified offset is found
         */
        get_offset_value(name: string | null): [boolean, number];

        /**
         * Returns the value of the {@link Gtk.LevelBar.value} property.
         * @returns a value in the interval between     {@link Gtk.LevelBar.min_value} and {@link Gtk.LevelBar.max_value}
         */
        get_value(): number;

        /**
         * Removes an offset marker previously added with
         * `gtk_level_bar_add_offset_value()`.
         * @param name the name of an offset in the bar
         */
        remove_offset_value(name: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the value of the {@link Gtk.LevelBar.inverted} property.
         * @param inverted `true` to invert the level bar
         */
        set_inverted(inverted: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the value of the {@link Gtk.LevelBar.max_value} property.
         * 
         * You probably want to update preexisting level offsets after calling
         * this function.
         * @param value a positive value
         */
        set_max_value(value: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the value of the {@link Gtk.LevelBar.min_value} property.
         * 
         * You probably want to update preexisting level offsets after calling
         * this function.
         * @param value a positive value
         */
        set_min_value(value: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the value of the {@link Gtk.LevelBar.mode} property.
         * @param mode a {@link Gtk.LevelBarMode}
         */
        set_mode(mode: LevelBarMode): void;

        /**
         * Sets the value of the {@link Gtk.LevelBar.value} property.
         * @param value a value in the interval between     {@link Gtk.LevelBar.min_value} and {@link Gtk.LevelBar.max_value}
         */
        set_value(value: number): void;

        /**
         * The orientation of the orientable.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default Gtk.Orientation.HORIZONTAL
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Orientable
         */
        get orientation(): Orientation;
        set orientation(val: Orientation);

        /**
         * Adds a child to `buildable`. `type` is an optional string
         * describing how the child should be added.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child to add
         * @param type kind of child or `null`
         */
        add_child(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object, type: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Constructs a child of `buildable` with the name `name`.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} calls this function if a “constructor” has been
         * specified in the UI definition.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param name name of child to construct
         * @returns the constructed child
         */
        construct_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, name: string): T;

        /**
         * This is similar to `gtk_buildable_parser_finished()` but is
         * called once for each custom tag handled by the `buildable`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname the name of the tag
         * @param data user data created in custom_tag_start
         */
        custom_finished(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
         * the buildable.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @param data user data that will be passed in to parser functions
         */
        custom_tag_end(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called for each unknown element under `<child>`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @returns `true` if a object has a custom implementation, `false`          if it doesn't.
         */
        custom_tag_start(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string): [boolean, GLib.MarkupParser, null];

        /**
         * Get the internal child called `childname` of the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param childname name of child
         * @returns the internal child of the buildable object
         */
        get_internal_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, childname: string): T;

        /**
         * Gets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} sets the name based on the
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI]
         * used to construct the `buildable`.
         * @returns the name set with `gtk_buildable_set_name()`
         */
        get_name(): string;

        /**
         * Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI].
         * Note that this will be called once for each time
         * `gtk_builder_add_from_file()` or `gtk_builder_add_from_string()`
         * is called on a builder.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         */
        parser_finished(builder: Builder): void;

        /**
         * Sets the property name `name` to `value` on the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param name name of property
         * @param value value of property
         */
        set_buildable_property(builder: Builder, name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;

        /**
         * Sets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * @param name name to set
         */
        set_name(name: string): void;

        /**
         * Adds a child to `buildable`. `type` is an optional string
         * describing how the child should be added.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child to add
         * @param type kind of child or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add_child(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object, type: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Constructs a child of `buildable` with the name `name`.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} calls this function if a “constructor” has been
         * specified in the UI definition.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param name name of child to construct
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_construct_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, name: string): T;

        /**
         * This is similar to `gtk_buildable_parser_finished()` but is
         * called once for each custom tag handled by the `buildable`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname the name of the tag
         * @param data user data created in custom_tag_start
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_finished(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
         * the buildable.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @param data user data that will be passed in to parser functions
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_tag_end(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called for each unknown element under `<child>`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_tag_start(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string): [boolean, GLib.MarkupParser, never];

        /**
         * Get the internal child called `childname` of the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param childname name of child
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_internal_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, childname: string): T;

        /**
         * Gets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} sets the name based on the
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI]
         * used to construct the `buildable`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_name(): string;

        /**
         * Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI].
         * Note that this will be called once for each time
         * `gtk_builder_add_from_file()` or `gtk_builder_add_from_string()`
         * is called on a builder.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_parser_finished(builder: Builder): void;

        /**
         * Sets the property name `name` to `value` on the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param name name of property
         * @param value value of property
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_buildable_property(builder: Builder, name: string, value: unknown): void;

        /**
         * Sets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * @param name name to set
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_name(name: string): void;

        /**
         * Retrieves the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @returns the orientation of the `orientable`.
         */
        get_orientation(): Orientation;

        /**
         * Sets the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @param orientation the orientable’s new orientation.
         */
        set_orientation(orientation: Orientation): void;
    }


    namespace LevelBarAccessible {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends WidgetAccessible.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-layer": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-mdi-zorder": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-help-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-hypertext-nlinks": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption-object": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-summary": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends WidgetAccessible.ConstructorProps, Atk.Component.ConstructorProps, Atk.Value.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class LevelBarAccessible extends WidgetAccessible implements Atk.Component, Atk.Value {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<LevelBarAccessible>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: LevelBarAccessible.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<LevelBarAccessible.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof LevelBarAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, LevelBarAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof LevelBarAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, LevelBarAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof LevelBarAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<LevelBarAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        /**
         * Checks whether the specified point is within the extent of the `component`.
         * 
         * Toolkit implementor note: ATK provides a default implementation for
         * this virtual method. In general there are little reason to
         * re-implement it.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @returns `true` or `false` indicating whether the specified point is within the extent of the `component` or not
         */
        contains(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the alpha value (i.e. the opacity) for this
         * `component`, on a scale from 0 (fully transparent) to 1.0
         * (fully opaque).
         * @returns An alpha value from 0 to 1.0, inclusive.
         */
        get_alpha(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the rectangle which gives the extent of the `component`.
         * 
         * If the extent can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), all of x, y, width, height are set to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         */
        get_extents(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the layer of the component.
         * @returns an {@link Atk.Layer} which is the layer of the component
         */
        get_layer(): Atk.Layer;

        /**
         * Gets the zorder of the component. The value G_MININT will be returned
         * if the layer of the component is not ATK_LAYER_MDI or ATK_LAYER_WINDOW.
         * @returns a gint which is the zorder of the component, i.e. the depth at which the component is shown in relation to other components in the same container.
         */
        get_mdi_zorder(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the position of `component` in the form of
         * a point specifying `component`'s top-left corner.
         * 
         * If the position can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), x and y are set to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         */
        get_position(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the size of the `component` in terms of width and height.
         * 
         * If the size can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), width and height are set to -1.
         */
        get_size(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Grabs focus for this `component`.
         * @returns `true` if successful, `false` otherwise.
         */
        grab_focus(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets a reference to the accessible child, if one exists, at the
         * coordinate point specified by `x` and `y`.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @returns a reference to the accessible child, if one exists
         */
        ref_accessible_at_point(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): Atk.Object | null;

        /**
         * Remove the handler specified by `handler_id` from the list of
         * functions to be executed when this object receives focus events
         * (in or out).
         * @param handler_id the handler id of the focus handler to be removed from `component`
         */
        remove_focus_handler(handler_id: number): void;

        /**
         * Makes `component` visible on the screen by scrolling all necessary parents.
         * 
         * Contrary to atk_component_set_position, this does not actually move
         * `component` in its parent, this only makes the parents scroll so that the
         * object shows up on the screen, given its current position within the parents.
         * @param type specify where the object should be made visible.
         * @returns whether scrolling was successful.
         */
        scroll_to(type: Atk.ScrollType): boolean;

        /**
         * Move the top-left of `component` to a given position of the screen by
         * scrolling all necessary parents.
         * @param coords specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or to the parent object.
         * @param x x-position where to scroll to
         * @param y y-position where to scroll to
         * @returns whether scrolling was successful.
         */
        scroll_to_point(coords: Atk.CoordType, x: number, y: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the extents of `component`.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param width width to set for `component`
         * @param height height to set for `component`
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @returns `true` or `false` whether the extents were set or not
         */
        set_extents(x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the position of `component`.
         * 
         * Contrary to atk_component_scroll_to, this does not trigger any scrolling,
         * this just moves `component` in its parent.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the component's top level window
         * @returns `true` or `false` whether or not the position was set or not
         */
        set_position(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Set the size of the `component` in terms of width and height.
         * @param width width to set for `component`
         * @param height height to set for `component`
         * @returns `true` or `false` whether the size was set or not
         */
        set_size(width: number, height: number): boolean;

        /**
         * @param bounds 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_bounds_changed(bounds: Atk.Rectangle): void;

        /**
         * Checks whether the specified point is within the extent of the `component`.
         * 
         * Toolkit implementor note: ATK provides a default implementation for
         * this virtual method. In general there are little reason to
         * re-implement it.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_contains(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the alpha value (i.e. the opacity) for this
         * `component`, on a scale from 0 (fully transparent) to 1.0
         * (fully opaque).
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_alpha(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the rectangle which gives the extent of the `component`.
         * 
         * If the extent can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), all of x, y, width, height are set to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_extents(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the layer of the component.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_layer(): Atk.Layer;

        /**
         * Gets the zorder of the component. The value G_MININT will be returned
         * if the layer of the component is not ATK_LAYER_MDI or ATK_LAYER_WINDOW.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_mdi_zorder(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the position of `component` in the form of
         * a point specifying `component`'s top-left corner.
         * 
         * If the position can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), x and y are set to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_position(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the size of the `component` in terms of width and height.
         * 
         * If the size can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), width and height are set to -1.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_size(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Grabs focus for this `component`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_grab_focus(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets a reference to the accessible child, if one exists, at the
         * coordinate point specified by `x` and `y`.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_ref_accessible_at_point(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): Atk.Object | null;

        /**
         * Remove the handler specified by `handler_id` from the list of
         * functions to be executed when this object receives focus events
         * (in or out).
         * @param handler_id the handler id of the focus handler to be removed from `component`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_remove_focus_handler(handler_id: number): void;

        /**
         * Makes `component` visible on the screen by scrolling all necessary parents.
         * 
         * Contrary to atk_component_set_position, this does not actually move
         * `component` in its parent, this only makes the parents scroll so that the
         * object shows up on the screen, given its current position within the parents.
         * @param type specify where the object should be made visible.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_scroll_to(type: Atk.ScrollType): boolean;

        /**
         * Move the top-left of `component` to a given position of the screen by
         * scrolling all necessary parents.
         * @param coords specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or to the parent object.
         * @param x x-position where to scroll to
         * @param y y-position where to scroll to
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_scroll_to_point(coords: Atk.CoordType, x: number, y: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the extents of `component`.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param width width to set for `component`
         * @param height height to set for `component`
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_extents(x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the position of `component`.
         * 
         * Contrary to atk_component_scroll_to, this does not trigger any scrolling,
         * this just moves `component` in its parent.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the component's top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_position(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Set the size of the `component` in terms of width and height.
         * @param width width to set for `component`
         * @param height height to set for `component`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_size(width: number, height: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the value of this object.
         */
        get_current_value(): unknown;

        /**
         * Gets the minimum increment by which the value of this object may be
         * changed.  If zero, the minimum increment is undefined, which may
         * mean that it is limited only by the floating point precision of the
         * platform.
         * @returns the minimum increment by which the value of this object may be changed. zero if undefined.
         */
        get_increment(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the maximum value of this object.
         */
        get_maximum_value(): unknown;

        /**
         * Gets the minimum increment by which the value of this object may be changed.  If zero,
         * the minimum increment is undefined, which may mean that it is limited only by the
         * floating point precision of the platform.
         */
        get_minimum_increment(): unknown;

        /**
         * Gets the minimum value of this object.
         */
        get_minimum_value(): unknown;

        /**
         * Gets the range of this object.
         * @returns a newly allocated {@link Atk.Range} that represents the minimum, maximum and descriptor (if available) of `obj`. NULL if that range is not defined.
         */
        get_range(): Atk.Range | null;

        /**
         * Gets the list of subranges defined for this object. See {@link Atk.Value}
         * introduction for examples of subranges and when to expose them.
         * @returns an {@link GLib.SList} of {@link Atk.Range} which each of the subranges defined for this object. Free the returns list with `g_slist_free()`.
         */
        get_sub_ranges(): Atk.Range[];

        /**
         * Gets the current value and the human readable text alternative of
         * `obj`. `text` is a newly created string, that must be freed by the
         * caller. Can be NULL if no descriptor is available.
         */
        get_value_and_text(): [number, string];

        /**
         * Sets the value of this object.
         * @param value a {@link GObject.Value} which is the desired new accessible value.
         * @returns `true` if new value is successfully set, `false` otherwise.
         */
        set_current_value(value: GObject.Value | any): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the value of this object.
         * 
         * This method is intended to provide a way to change the value of the
         * object. In any case, it is possible that the value can't be
         * modified (ie: a read-only component). If the value changes due this
         * call, it is possible that the text could change, and will trigger
         * an {@link Atk.Value.SignalSignatures.value_changed | Atk.Value::value-changed} signal emission.
         * 
         * Note for implementors: the deprecated `atk_value_set_current_value()`
         * method returned TRUE or FALSE depending if the value was assigned
         * or not. In the practice several implementors were not able to
         * decide it, and returned TRUE in any case. For that reason it is not
         * required anymore to return if the value was properly assigned or
         * not.
         * @param new_value a double which is the desired new accessible value.
         */
        set_value(new_value: number): void;

        /**
         * Gets the value of this object.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_current_value(): GObject.Value | any;

        /**
         * Gets the minimum increment by which the value of this object may be
         * changed.  If zero, the minimum increment is undefined, which may
         * mean that it is limited only by the floating point precision of the
         * platform.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_increment(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the maximum value of this object.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_maximum_value(): GObject.Value | any;

        /**
         * Gets the minimum increment by which the value of this object may be changed.  If zero,
         * the minimum increment is undefined, which may mean that it is limited only by the
         * floating point precision of the platform.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_minimum_increment(): GObject.Value | any;

        /**
         * Gets the minimum value of this object.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_minimum_value(): GObject.Value | any;

        /**
         * Gets the range of this object.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_range(): Atk.Range | null;

        /**
         * Gets the list of subranges defined for this object. See {@link Atk.Value}
         * introduction for examples of subranges and when to expose them.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_sub_ranges(): Atk.Range[];

        /**
         * Gets the current value and the human readable text alternative of
         * `obj`. `text` is a newly created string, that must be freed by the
         * caller. Can be NULL if no descriptor is available.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_value_and_text(): [number, string];

        /**
         * Sets the value of this object.
         * @param value a {@link GObject.Value} which is the desired new accessible value.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_current_value(value: unknown): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the value of this object.
         * 
         * This method is intended to provide a way to change the value of the
         * object. In any case, it is possible that the value can't be
         * modified (ie: a read-only component). If the value changes due this
         * call, it is possible that the text could change, and will trigger
         * an {@link Atk.Value.SignalSignatures.value_changed | Atk.Value::value-changed} signal emission.
         * 
         * Note for implementors: the deprecated `atk_value_set_current_value()`
         * method returned TRUE or FALSE depending if the value was assigned
         * or not. In the practice several implementors were not able to
         * decide it, and returned TRUE in any case. For that reason it is not
         * required anymore to return if the value was properly assigned or
         * not.
         * @param new_value a double which is the desired new accessible value.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_value(new_value: number): void;
    }


    namespace LinkButton {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Button.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * The ::activate-link signal is emitted each time the {@link Gtk.LinkButton}
             * has been clicked.
             * 
             * The default handler will call `gtk_show_uri_on_window()` with the URI stored inside
             * the {@link Gtk.LinkButton.uri} property.
             * 
             * To override the default behavior, you can connect to the ::activate-link
             * signal and stop the propagation of the signal by returning `true` from
             * your handler.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "activate-link": () => boolean | void;
            "notify::uri": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visited": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::always-show-image": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::image": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::image-position": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::label": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::relief": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-stock": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-underline": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::xalign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::yalign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::action-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::action-target": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::related-action": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-action-appearance": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Button.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Actionable.ConstructorProps, Activatable.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {
            uri: string;
            visited: boolean;
        }
    }

    /**
     * A GtkLinkButton is a {@link Gtk.Button} with a hyperlink, similar to the one
     * used by web browsers, which triggers an action when clicked. It is useful
     * to show quick links to resources.
     * 
     * A link button is created by calling either `gtk_link_button_new()` or
     * `gtk_link_button_new_with_label()`. If using the former, the URI you pass
     * to the constructor is used as a label for the widget.
     * 
     * The URI bound to a GtkLinkButton can be set specifically using
     * `gtk_link_button_set_uri()`, and retrieved using `gtk_link_button_get_uri()`.
     * 
     * By default, GtkLinkButton calls `gtk_show_uri_on_window()` when the button is
     * clicked. This behaviour can be overridden by connecting to the
     * {@link Gtk.LinkButton.SignalSignatures.activate_link | Gtk.LinkButton::activate-link} signal and returning `true` from the
     * signal handler.
     * 
     * # CSS nodes
     * 
     * GtkLinkButton has a single CSS node with name button. To differentiate
     * it from a plain {@link Gtk.Button}, it gets the .link style class.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class LinkButton extends Button implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Actionable, Activatable, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<LinkButton>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * The URI bound to this button.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default null
         */
        get uri(): string;
        set uri(val: string);

        /**
         * The 'visited' state of this button. A visited link is drawn in a
         * different color.
         * @since 2.14
         * @default false
         */
        get visited(): boolean;
        set visited(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: LinkButton.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<LinkButton.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](uri: string): LinkButton;

        // Conflicted with Gtk.Button.new
        static ["new"](...args: never[]): any;

        static new_with_label(uri: string, label: string | null): LinkButton;

        // Conflicted with Gtk.Button.new_with_label
        static new_with_label(...args: never[]): any;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof LinkButton.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, LinkButton.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof LinkButton.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, LinkButton.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof LinkButton.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<LinkButton.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * class handler for the {@link Gtk.LinkButton.SignalSignatures.activate_link | Gtk.LinkButton::activate-link} signal
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_activate_link(): boolean;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Retrieves the URI set using `gtk_link_button_set_uri()`.
         * @returns a valid URI.  The returned string is owned by the link button   and should not be modified or freed.
         */
        get_uri(): string;

        /**
         * Retrieves the “visited” state of the URI where the {@link Gtk.LinkButton}
         * points. The button becomes visited when it is clicked. If the URI
         * is changed on the button, the “visited” state is unset again.
         * 
         * The state may also be changed using `gtk_link_button_set_visited()`.
         * @returns `true` if the link has been visited, `false` otherwise
         */
        get_visited(): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets `uri` as the URI where the {@link Gtk.LinkButton} points. As a side-effect
         * this unsets the “visited” state of the button.
         * @param uri a valid URI
         */
        set_uri(uri: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets the “visited” state of the URI where the {@link Gtk.LinkButton}
         * points.  See `gtk_link_button_get_visited()` for more details.
         * @param visited the new “visited” state
         */
        set_visited(visited: boolean): void;

        /**
         * @default null
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable
         */
        get action_name(): string | null;
        set action_name(val: string | null);

        /**
         * @default null
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable
         */
        get actionName(): string | null;
        set actionName(val: string | null);

        /** @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable */
        get action_target(): GLib.Variant;
        set action_target(val: GLib.Variant);

        /** @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable */
        get actionTarget(): GLib.Variant;
        set actionTarget(val: GLib.Variant);

        /**
         * The action that this activatable will activate and receive
         * updates from for various states and possibly appearance.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the this property and
         * > call `gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action()` when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get related_action(): Action;
        set related_action(val: Action);

        /**
         * The action that this activatable will activate and receive
         * updates from for various states and possibly appearance.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the this property and
         * > call `gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action()` when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get relatedAction(): Action;
        set relatedAction(val: Action);

        /**
         * Whether this activatable should reset its layout
         * and appearance when setting the related action or when
         * the action changes appearance.
         * 
         * See the {@link Gtk.Action} documentation directly to find which properties
         * should be ignored by the {@link Gtk.Activatable} when this property is `false`.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle this property
         * > and call `gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties()` on the activatable
         * > widget when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get use_action_appearance(): boolean;
        set use_action_appearance(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether this activatable should reset its layout
         * and appearance when setting the related action or when
         * the action changes appearance.
         * 
         * See the {@link Gtk.Action} documentation directly to find which properties
         * should be ignored by the {@link Gtk.Activatable} when this property is `false`.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle this property
         * > and call `gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties()` on the activatable
         * > widget when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get useActionAppearance(): boolean;
        set useActionAppearance(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Gets the action name for `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_name()` for more information.
         * @returns the action name, or `null` if none is set
         */
        get_action_name(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the current target value of `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_target_value()` for more information.
         * @returns the current target value
         */
        get_action_target_value(): GLib.Variant;

        /**
         * Specifies the name of the action with which this widget should be
         * associated.  If `action_name` is `null` then the widget will be
         * unassociated from any previous action.
         * 
         * Usually this function is used when the widget is located (or will be
         * located) within the hierarchy of a {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow}.
         * 
         * Names are of the form “win.save” or “app.quit” for actions on the
         * containing {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow} or its associated {@link Gtk.Application},
         * respectively.  This is the same form used for actions in the {@link Gio.Menu}
         * associated with the window.
         * @param action_name an action name, or `null`
         */
        set_action_name(action_name: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the target value of an actionable widget.
         * 
         * If `target_value` is `null` then the target value is unset.
         * 
         * The target value has two purposes.  First, it is used as the
         * parameter to activation of the action associated with the
         * {@link Gtk.Actionable} widget. Second, it is used to determine if the widget
         * should be rendered as “active” — the widget is active if the state
         * is equal to the given target.
         * 
         * Consider the example of associating a set of buttons with a {@link Gio.Action}
         * with string state in a typical “radio button” situation.  Each button
         * will be associated with the same action, but with a different target
         * value for that action.  Clicking on a particular button will activate
         * the action with the target of that button, which will typically cause
         * the action’s state to change to that value.  Since the action’s state
         * is now equal to the target value of the button, the button will now
         * be rendered as active (and the other buttons, with different targets,
         * rendered inactive).
         * @param target_value a {@link GLib.Variant} to set as the target value, or `null`
         */
        set_action_target_value(target_value: GLib.Variant | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the action-name and associated string target value of an
         * actionable widget.
         * 
         * `detailed_action_name` is a string in the format accepted by
         * `g_action_parse_detailed_name()`.
         * 
         * (Note that prior to version 3.22.25,
         * this function is only usable for actions with a simple "s" target, and
         * `detailed_action_name` must be of the form `"action::target"` where
         * `action` is the action name and `target` is the string to use
         * as the target.)
         * @param detailed_action_name the detailed action name
         */
        set_detailed_action_name(detailed_action_name: string): void;

        /**
         * Gets the action name for `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_name()` for more information.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_action_name(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the current target value of `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_target_value()` for more information.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_action_target_value(): GLib.Variant;

        /**
         * Specifies the name of the action with which this widget should be
         * associated.  If `action_name` is `null` then the widget will be
         * unassociated from any previous action.
         * 
         * Usually this function is used when the widget is located (or will be
         * located) within the hierarchy of a {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow}.
         * 
         * Names are of the form “win.save” or “app.quit” for actions on the
         * containing {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow} or its associated {@link Gtk.Application},
         * respectively.  This is the same form used for actions in the {@link Gio.Menu}
         * associated with the window.
         * @param action_name an action name, or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_action_name(action_name: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the target value of an actionable widget.
         * 
         * If `target_value` is `null` then the target value is unset.
         * 
         * The target value has two purposes.  First, it is used as the
         * parameter to activation of the action associated with the
         * {@link Gtk.Actionable} widget. Second, it is used to determine if the widget
         * should be rendered as “active” — the widget is active if the state
         * is equal to the given target.
         * 
         * Consider the example of associating a set of buttons with a {@link Gio.Action}
         * with string state in a typical “radio button” situation.  Each button
         * will be associated with the same action, but with a different target
         * value for that action.  Clicking on a particular button will activate
         * the action with the target of that button, which will typically cause
         * the action’s state to change to that value.  Since the action’s state
         * is now equal to the target value of the button, the button will now
         * be rendered as active (and the other buttons, with different targets,
         * rendered inactive).
         * @param target_value a {@link GLib.Variant} to set as the target value, or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_action_target_value(target_value: GLib.Variant | null): void;

        /**
         * This is a utility function for {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors.
         * 
         * When implementing {@link Gtk.Activatable} you must call this when
         * handling changes of the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action}, and
         * you must also use this to break references in {@link GObject.Object}->dispose().
         * 
         * This function adds a reference to the currently set related
         * action for you, it also makes sure the {@link Gtk.Activatable}->update()
         * method is called when the related {@link Gtk.Action} properties change
         * and registers to the action’s proxy list.
         * 
         * > Be careful to call this before setting the local
         * > copy of the {@link Gtk.Action} property, since this function uses
         * > `gtk_activatable_get_related_action()` to retrieve the
         * > previous action.
         * @param action the {@link Gtk.Action} to set
         */
        do_set_related_action(action: Action): void;

        /**
         * Gets the related {@link Gtk.Action} for `activatable`.
         * @returns the related {@link Gtk.Action} if one is set.
         */
        get_related_action(): Action;

        /**
         * Gets whether this activatable should reset its layout
         * and appearance when setting the related action or when
         * the action changes appearance.
         * @returns whether `activatable` uses its actions appearance.
         */
        get_use_action_appearance(): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the related action on the `activatable` object.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action}
         * > property and call `gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action()` when it changes.
         * @param action the {@link Gtk.Action} to set
         */
        set_related_action(action: Action): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether this activatable should reset its layout and appearance
         * when setting the related action or when the action changes appearance
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} property and call
         * > `gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties()` to update `activatable`
         * > if needed.
         * @param use_appearance whether to use the actions appearance
         */
        set_use_action_appearance(use_appearance: boolean): void;

        /**
         * This is called to update the activatable completely, this is called
         * internally when the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action} property is set
         * or unset and by the implementing class when
         * {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} changes.
         * @param action the related {@link Gtk.Action} or `null`
         */
        sync_action_properties(action: Action | null): void;

        /**
         * This is called to update the activatable completely, this is called
         * internally when the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action} property is set
         * or unset and by the implementing class when
         * {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} changes.
         * @param action the related {@link Gtk.Action} or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_sync_action_properties(action: Action | null): void;

        /**
         * Called to update the activatable when its related action’s properties change.
         * You must check the {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} property only apply action
         * properties that are meant to effect the appearance accordingly.
         * @param action 
         * @param property_name 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_update(action: Action, property_name: string): void;

        /**
         * Emits a {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.child_notify | Gtk.Widget::child-notify} signal for the
         * [child property][child-properties] `child_property`
         * on `widget`.
         * 
         * This is the analogue of `g_object_notify()` for child properties.
         * 
         * Also see `gtk_container_child_notify()`.
         * @param child_property the name of a child property installed on the                  class of `widget`’s parent
         */
        child_notify(child_property: string): void;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Gtk.Container.child_notify
        child_notify(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Returns whether the widget should grab focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
         * See `gtk_widget_set_focus_on_click()`.
         * @returns `true` if the widget should grab focus when it is clicked with               the mouse.
         */
        get_focus_on_click(): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets whether the widget should grab focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
         * Making mouse clicks not grab focus is useful in places like toolbars where
         * you don’t want the keyboard focus removed from the main area of the
         * application.
         * @param focus_on_click whether the widget should grab focus when clicked with the mouse
         */
        set_focus_on_click(focus_on_click: boolean): void;
    }


    namespace LinkButtonAccessible {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends ButtonAccessible.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-layer": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-mdi-zorder": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-help-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-hypertext-nlinks": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption-object": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-summary": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends ButtonAccessible.ConstructorProps, Atk.Action.ConstructorProps, Atk.Component.ConstructorProps, Atk.HyperlinkImpl.ConstructorProps, Atk.Image.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class LinkButtonAccessible extends ButtonAccessible implements Atk.Action, Atk.Component, Atk.HyperlinkImpl, Atk.Image {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<LinkButtonAccessible>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: LinkButtonAccessible.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<LinkButtonAccessible.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof LinkButtonAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, LinkButtonAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof LinkButtonAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, LinkButtonAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof LinkButtonAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<LinkButtonAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        /**
         * Perform the specified action on the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns `true` if success, `false` otherwise
         */
        do_action(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns a description of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns a description string, or `null` if `action` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_description(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.get_description
        get_description(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Gets the keybinding which can be used to activate this action, if one
         * exists. The string returned should contain localized, human-readable,
         * key sequences as they would appear when displayed on screen. It must
         * be in the format "mnemonic;sequence;shortcut".
         * 
         * - The mnemonic key activates the object if it is presently enabled onscreen.
         *   This typically corresponds to the underlined letter within the widget.
         *   Example: "n" in a traditional "New..." menu item or the "a" in "Apply" for
         *   a button.
         * - The sequence is the full list of keys which invoke the action even if the
         *   relevant element is not currently shown on screen. For instance, for a menu
         *   item the sequence is the keybindings used to open the parent menus before
         *   invoking. The sequence string is colon-delimited. Example: "Alt+F:N" in a
         *   traditional "New..." menu item.
         * - The shortcut, if it exists, will invoke the same action without showing
         *   the component or its enclosing menus or dialogs. Example: "Ctrl+N" in a
         *   traditional "New..." menu item.
         * 
         * Example: For a traditional "New..." menu item, the expected return value
         * would be: "N;Alt+F:N;Ctrl+N" for the English locale and "N;Alt+D:N;Strg+N"
         * for the German locale. If, hypothetically, this menu item lacked a mnemonic,
         * it would be represented by ";;Ctrl+N" and ";;Strg+N" respectively.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns the keybinding which can be used to activate this action, or `null` if there is no keybinding for this action.
         */
        get_keybinding(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Returns the localized name of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns a name string, or `null` if `action` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_localized_name(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the number of accessible actions available on the object.
         * If there are more than one, the first one is considered the
         * "default" action of the object.
         * @returns a the number of actions, or 0 if `action` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_n_actions(): number;

        /**
         * Returns a non-localized string naming the specified action of the
         * object. This name is generally not descriptive of the end result
         * of the action, but instead names the 'interaction type' which the
         * object supports. By convention, the above strings should be used to
         * represent the actions which correspond to the common point-and-click
         * interaction techniques of the same name: i.e.
         * "click", "press", "release", "drag", "drop", "popup", etc.
         * The "popup" action should be used to pop up a context menu for the
         * object, if one exists.
         * 
         * For technical reasons, some toolkits cannot guarantee that the
         * reported action is actually 'bound' to a nontrivial user event;
         * i.e. the result of some actions via `atk_action_do_action()` may be
         * NIL.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns a name string, or `null` if `action` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_name(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.get_name
        get_name(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Sets a description of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @param desc the description to be assigned to this action
         * @returns a gboolean representing if the description was successfully set;
         */
        set_description(i: number, desc: string): boolean;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.set_description
        set_description(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Perform the specified action on the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_do_action(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns a description of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_description(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         * @virtual
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.vfunc_get_description
        vfunc_get_description(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Gets the keybinding which can be used to activate this action, if one
         * exists. The string returned should contain localized, human-readable,
         * key sequences as they would appear when displayed on screen. It must
         * be in the format "mnemonic;sequence;shortcut".
         * 
         * - The mnemonic key activates the object if it is presently enabled onscreen.
         *   This typically corresponds to the underlined letter within the widget.
         *   Example: "n" in a traditional "New..." menu item or the "a" in "Apply" for
         *   a button.
         * - The sequence is the full list of keys which invoke the action even if the
         *   relevant element is not currently shown on screen. For instance, for a menu
         *   item the sequence is the keybindings used to open the parent menus before
         *   invoking. The sequence string is colon-delimited. Example: "Alt+F:N" in a
         *   traditional "New..." menu item.
         * - The shortcut, if it exists, will invoke the same action without showing
         *   the component or its enclosing menus or dialogs. Example: "Ctrl+N" in a
         *   traditional "New..." menu item.
         * 
         * Example: For a traditional "New..." menu item, the expected return value
         * would be: "N;Alt+F:N;Ctrl+N" for the English locale and "N;Alt+D:N;Strg+N"
         * for the German locale. If, hypothetically, this menu item lacked a mnemonic,
         * it would be represented by ";;Ctrl+N" and ";;Strg+N" respectively.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_keybinding(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Returns the localized name of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_localized_name(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the number of accessible actions available on the object.
         * If there are more than one, the first one is considered the
         * "default" action of the object.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_n_actions(): number;

        /**
         * Returns a non-localized string naming the specified action of the
         * object. This name is generally not descriptive of the end result
         * of the action, but instead names the 'interaction type' which the
         * object supports. By convention, the above strings should be used to
         * represent the actions which correspond to the common point-and-click
         * interaction techniques of the same name: i.e.
         * "click", "press", "release", "drag", "drop", "popup", etc.
         * The "popup" action should be used to pop up a context menu for the
         * object, if one exists.
         * 
         * For technical reasons, some toolkits cannot guarantee that the
         * reported action is actually 'bound' to a nontrivial user event;
         * i.e. the result of some actions via `atk_action_do_action()` may be
         * NIL.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_name(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         * @virtual
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.vfunc_get_name
        vfunc_get_name(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Sets a description of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @param desc the description to be assigned to this action
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_description(i: number, desc: string): boolean;

        /**
         * @param args 
         * @virtual
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.vfunc_set_description
        vfunc_set_description(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Gets the hyperlink associated with this object.
         * @returns an AtkHyperlink object which points to this implementing AtkObject.
         */
        get_hyperlink(): Atk.Hyperlink;

        /**
         * Gets the hyperlink associated with this object.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_hyperlink(): Atk.Hyperlink;

        /**
         * Get a textual description of this image.
         * @returns a string representing the image description
         */
        get_image_description(): string;

        /**
         * Retrieves the locale identifier associated to the {@link Atk.Image}.
         * @returns a string corresponding to the POSIX   `LC_MESSAGES` locale used by the image description, or   `null` if the image does not specify a locale.
         */
        get_image_locale(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the position of the image in the form of a point specifying the
         * images top-left corner.
         * 
         * If the position can not be obtained (e.g. missing support), x and y are set
         * to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         */
        get_image_position(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number];

        /**
         * Get the width and height in pixels for the specified image.
         * The values of `width` and `height` are returned as -1 if the
         * values cannot be obtained (for instance, if the object is not onscreen).
         * 
         * If the size can not be obtained (e.g. missing support), x and y are set
         * to -1.
         */
        get_image_size(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Sets the textual description for this image.
         * @param description a string description to set for `image`
         * @returns boolean TRUE, or FALSE if operation could not be completed.
         */
        set_image_description(description: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Get a textual description of this image.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_image_description(): string;

        /**
         * Retrieves the locale identifier associated to the {@link Atk.Image}.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_image_locale(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the position of the image in the form of a point specifying the
         * images top-left corner.
         * 
         * If the position can not be obtained (e.g. missing support), x and y are set
         * to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_image_position(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number];

        /**
         * Get the width and height in pixels for the specified image.
         * The values of `width` and `height` are returned as -1 if the
         * values cannot be obtained (for instance, if the object is not onscreen).
         * 
         * If the size can not be obtained (e.g. missing support), x and y are set
         * to -1.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_image_size(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Sets the textual description for this image.
         * @param description a string description to set for `image`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_image_description(description: string): boolean;
    }


    namespace ListBox {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Container.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "activate-cursor-row": () => void;
            /**
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "move-cursor": (arg0: MovementStep, arg1: number) => void;
            /**
             * The ::row-activated signal is emitted when a row has been activated by the user.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.10
             * @run-last
             */
            "row-activated": (arg0: ListBoxRow) => void;
            /**
             * The ::row-selected signal is emitted when a new row is selected, or
             * (with a `null` `row`) when the selection is cleared.
             * 
             * When the `box` is using #GTK_SELECTION_MULTIPLE, this signal will not
             * give you the full picture of selection changes, and you should use
             * the {@link Gtk.ListBox.SignalSignatures.selected_rows_changed | Gtk.ListBox::selected-rows-changed} signal instead.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.10
             * @run-last
             */
            "row-selected": (arg0: ListBoxRow | null) => void;
            /**
             * The ::select-all signal is a [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted to select all children of the box, if the selection
             * mode permits it.
             * 
             * The default bindings for this signal is Ctrl-a.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.14
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "select-all": () => void;
            /**
             * The ::selected-rows-changed signal is emitted when the
             * set of selected rows changes.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.14
             * @run-first
             */
            "selected-rows-changed": () => void;
            /**
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "toggle-cursor-row": () => void;
            /**
             * The ::unselect-all signal is a [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted to unselect all children of the box, if the selection
             * mode permits it.
             * 
             * The default bindings for this signal is Ctrl-Shift-a.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.14
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "unselect-all": () => void;
            "notify::activate-on-single-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::selection-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Container.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {
            activate_on_single_click: boolean;
            activateOnSingleClick: boolean;
            selection_mode: SelectionMode;
            selectionMode: SelectionMode;
        }
    }

    /**
     * A GtkListBox is a vertical container that contains GtkListBoxRow
     * children. These rows can be dynamically sorted and filtered, and
     * headers can be added dynamically depending on the row content.
     * It also allows keyboard and mouse navigation and selection like
     * a typical list.
     * 
     * Using GtkListBox is often an alternative to {@link Gtk.TreeView}, especially
     * when the list contents has a more complicated layout than what is allowed
     * by a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}, or when the contents is interactive (i.e. has a
     * button in it).
     * 
     * Although a {@link Gtk.ListBox} must have only {@link Gtk.ListBoxRow} children you can
     * add any kind of widget to it via `gtk_container_add()`, and a {@link Gtk.ListBoxRow}
     * widget will automatically be inserted between the list and the widget.
     * 
     * `GtkListBoxRows` can be marked as activatable or selectable. If a row
     * is activatable, {@link Gtk.ListBox.SignalSignatures.row_activated | Gtk.ListBox::row-activated} will be emitted for it when
     * the user tries to activate it. If it is selectable, the row will be marked
     * as selected when the user tries to select it.
     * 
     * The GtkListBox widget was added in GTK+ 3.10.
     * 
     * # GtkListBox as GtkBuildable
     * 
     * The GtkListBox implementation of the {@link Gtk.Buildable} interface supports
     * setting a child as the placeholder by specifying “placeholder” as the “type”
     * attribute of a `<child>` element. See `gtk_list_box_set_placeholder()` for info.
     * 
     * # CSS nodes
     * 
     * 
     * ```
     * list
     * ╰── row[.activatable]
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * GtkListBox uses a single CSS node named list. Each GtkListBoxRow uses
     * a single CSS node named row. The row nodes get the .activatable
     * style class added when appropriate.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class ListBox extends Container implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ListBox>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * @default true
         */
        get activate_on_single_click(): boolean;
        set activate_on_single_click(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default true
         */
        get activateOnSingleClick(): boolean;
        set activateOnSingleClick(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default Gtk.SelectionMode.SINGLE
         */
        get selection_mode(): SelectionMode;
        set selection_mode(val: SelectionMode);

        /**
         * @default Gtk.SelectionMode.SINGLE
         */
        get selectionMode(): SelectionMode;
        set selectionMode(val: SelectionMode);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: ListBox.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<ListBox.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): ListBox;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof ListBox.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ListBox.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof ListBox.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ListBox.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof ListBox.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<ListBox.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * Class handler for the {@link Gtk.ListBox.SignalSignatures.activate_cursor_row | Gtk.ListBox::activate-cursor-row} signal
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_activate_cursor_row(): void;

        /**
         * Class handler for the {@link Gtk.ListBox.SignalSignatures.move_cursor | Gtk.ListBox::move-cursor} signal
         * @param step 
         * @param count 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_move_cursor(step: MovementStep, count: number): void;

        /**
         * Class handler for the {@link Gtk.ListBox.SignalSignatures.row_activated | Gtk.ListBox::row-activated} signal
         * @param row 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_row_activated(row: ListBoxRow): void;

        /**
         * Class handler for the {@link Gtk.ListBox.SignalSignatures.row_selected | Gtk.ListBox::row-selected} signal
         * @param row 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_row_selected(row: ListBoxRow): void;

        /**
         * Select all children of `box`, if the selection mode allows it.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_select_all(): void;

        /**
         * Class handler for the {@link Gtk.ListBox.SignalSignatures.selected_rows_changed | Gtk.ListBox::selected-rows-changed} signal
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_selected_rows_changed(): void;

        /**
         * Class handler for the {@link Gtk.ListBox.SignalSignatures.toggle_cursor_row | Gtk.ListBox::toggle-cursor-row} signal
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_toggle_cursor_row(): void;

        /**
         * Unselect all children of `box`, if the selection mode allows it.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_unselect_all(): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Binds `model` to `box`.
         * 
         * If `box` was already bound to a model, that previous binding is
         * destroyed.
         * 
         * The contents of `box` are cleared and then filled with widgets that
         * represent items from `model`. `box` is updated whenever `model` changes.
         * If `model` is `null`, `box` is left empty.
         * 
         * It is undefined to add or remove widgets directly (for example, with
         * `gtk_list_box_insert()` or `gtk_container_add()`) while `box` is bound to a
         * model.
         * 
         * Note that using a model is incompatible with the filtering and sorting
         * functionality in GtkListBox. When using a model, filtering and sorting
         * should be implemented by the model.
         * @param model the {@link Gio.ListModel} to be bound to `box`
         * @param create_widget_func a function that creates widgets for items   or `null` in case you also passed `null` as `model`
         */
        bind_model(model: Gio.ListModel | null, create_widget_func: ListBoxCreateWidgetFunc | null): void;

        /**
         * This is a helper function for implementing DnD onto a {@link Gtk.ListBox}.
         * The passed in `row` will be highlighted via `gtk_drag_highlight()`,
         * and any previously highlighted row will be unhighlighted.
         * 
         * The row will also be unhighlighted when the widget gets
         * a drag leave event.
         * @param row a {@link Gtk.ListBoxRow}
         */
        drag_highlight_row(row: ListBoxRow): void;

        /**
         * If a row has previously been highlighted via `gtk_list_box_drag_highlight_row()`
         * it will have the highlight removed.
         */
        drag_unhighlight_row(): void;

        /**
         * Returns whether rows activate on single clicks.
         * @returns `true` if rows are activated on single click, `false` otherwise
         */
        get_activate_on_single_click(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the adjustment (if any) that the widget uses to
         * for vertical scrolling.
         * @returns the adjustment
         */
        get_adjustment(): Adjustment;

        /**
         * Gets the n-th child in the list (not counting headers).
         * If `_index` is negative or larger than the number of items in the
         * list, `null` is returned.
         * @param index_ the index of the row
         * @returns the child {@link Gtk.Widget} or `null`
         */
        get_row_at_index(index_: number): ListBoxRow | null;

        /**
         * Gets the row at the `y` position.
         * @param y position
         * @returns the row or `null`   in case no row exists for the given y coordinate.
         */
        get_row_at_y(y: number): ListBoxRow | null;

        /**
         * Gets the selected row.
         * 
         * Note that the box may allow multiple selection, in which
         * case you should use `gtk_list_box_selected_foreach()` to
         * find all selected rows.
         * @returns the selected row
         */
        get_selected_row(): ListBoxRow;

        /**
         * Creates a list of all selected children.
         * @returns A {@link GLib.List} containing the {@link Gtk.Widget} for each selected child.     Free with `g_list_free()` when done.
         */
        get_selected_rows(): ListBoxRow[];

        /**
         * Gets the selection mode of the listbox.
         * @returns a {@link Gtk.SelectionMode}
         */
        get_selection_mode(): SelectionMode;

        /**
         * Insert the `child` into the `box` at `position`. If a sort function is
         * set, the widget will actually be inserted at the calculated position and
         * this function has the same effect of `gtk_container_add()`.
         * 
         * If `position` is -1, or larger than the total number of items in the
         * `box`, then the `child` will be appended to the end.
         * @param child the {@link Gtk.Widget} to add
         * @param position the position to insert `child` in
         */
        insert(child: Widget, position: number): void;

        /**
         * Update the filtering for all rows. Call this when result
         * of the filter function on the `box` is changed due
         * to an external factor. For instance, this would be used
         * if the filter function just looked for a specific search
         * string and the entry with the search string has changed.
         */
        invalidate_filter(): void;

        /**
         * Update the separators for all rows. Call this when result
         * of the header function on the `box` is changed due
         * to an external factor.
         */
        invalidate_headers(): void;

        /**
         * Update the sorting for all rows. Call this when result
         * of the sort function on the `box` is changed due
         * to an external factor.
         */
        invalidate_sort(): void;

        /**
         * Prepend a widget to the list. If a sort function is set, the widget will
         * actually be inserted at the calculated position and this function has the
         * same effect of `gtk_container_add()`.
         * @param child the {@link Gtk.Widget} to add
         */
        prepend(child: Widget): void;

        /**
         * Select all children of `box`, if the selection mode allows it.
         */
        select_all(): void;

        /**
         * Make `row` the currently selected row.
         * @param row The row to select or `null`
         */
        select_row(row: ListBoxRow | null): void;

        /**
         * Calls a function for each selected child.
         * 
         * Note that the selection cannot be modified from within this function.
         * @param func the function to call for each selected child
         */
        selected_foreach(func: ListBoxForeachFunc): void;

        /**
         * If `single` is `true`, rows will be activated when you click on them,
         * otherwise you need to double-click.
         * @param single a boolean
         */
        set_activate_on_single_click(single: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the adjustment (if any) that the widget uses to
         * for vertical scrolling. For instance, this is used
         * to get the page size for PageUp/Down key handling.
         * 
         * In the normal case when the `box` is packed inside
         * a {@link Gtk.ScrolledWindow} the adjustment from that will
         * be picked up automatically, so there is no need
         * to manually do that.
         * @param adjustment the adjustment, or `null`
         */
        set_adjustment(adjustment: Adjustment | null): void;

        /**
         * By setting a filter function on the `box` one can decide dynamically which
         * of the rows to show. For instance, to implement a search function on a list that
         * filters the original list to only show the matching rows.
         * 
         * The `filter_func` will be called for each row after the call, and it will
         * continue to be called each time a row changes (via `gtk_list_box_row_changed()`) or
         * when `gtk_list_box_invalidate_filter()` is called.
         * 
         * Note that using a filter function is incompatible with using a model
         * (see `gtk_list_box_bind_model()`).
         * @param filter_func callback that lets you filter which rows to show
         */
        set_filter_func(filter_func: ListBoxFilterFunc | null): void;

        /**
         * By setting a header function on the `box` one can dynamically add headers
         * in front of rows, depending on the contents of the row and its position in the list.
         * For instance, one could use it to add headers in front of the first item of a
         * new kind, in a list sorted by the kind.
         * 
         * The `update_header` can look at the current header widget using `gtk_list_box_row_get_header()`
         * and either update the state of the widget as needed, or set a new one using
         * `gtk_list_box_row_set_header()`. If no header is needed, set the header to `null`.
         * 
         * Note that you may get many calls `update_header` to this for a particular row when e.g.
         * changing things that don’t affect the header. In this case it is important for performance
         * to not blindly replace an existing header with an identical one.
         * 
         * The `update_header` function will be called for each row after the call, and it will
         * continue to be called each time a row changes (via `gtk_list_box_row_changed()`) and when
         * the row before changes (either by `gtk_list_box_row_changed()` on the previous row, or when
         * the previous row becomes a different row). It is also called for all rows when
         * `gtk_list_box_invalidate_headers()` is called.
         * @param update_header callback that lets you add row headers
         */
        set_header_func(update_header: ListBoxUpdateHeaderFunc | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the placeholder widget that is shown in the list when
         * it doesn't display any visible children.
         * @param placeholder a {@link Gtk.Widget} or `null`
         */
        set_placeholder(placeholder: Widget | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets how selection works in the listbox.
         * See {@link Gtk.SelectionMode} for details.
         * @param mode The {@link Gtk.SelectionMode}
         */
        set_selection_mode(mode: SelectionMode): void;

        /**
         * By setting a sort function on the `box` one can dynamically reorder the rows
         * of the list, based on the contents of the rows.
         * 
         * The `sort_func` will be called for each row after the call, and will continue to
         * be called each time a row changes (via `gtk_list_box_row_changed()`) and when
         * `gtk_list_box_invalidate_sort()` is called.
         * 
         * Note that using a sort function is incompatible with using a model
         * (see `gtk_list_box_bind_model()`).
         * @param sort_func the sort function
         */
        set_sort_func(sort_func: ListBoxSortFunc | null): void;

        /**
         * Unselect all children of `box`, if the selection mode allows it.
         */
        unselect_all(): void;

        /**
         * Unselects a single row of `box`, if the selection mode allows it.
         * @param row the row to unselected
         */
        unselect_row(row: ListBoxRow): void;
    }


    namespace ListBoxAccessible {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends ContainerAccessible.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-layer": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-mdi-zorder": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-help-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-hypertext-nlinks": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption-object": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-summary": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends ContainerAccessible.ConstructorProps, Atk.Component.ConstructorProps, Atk.Selection.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class ListBoxAccessible extends ContainerAccessible implements Atk.Component, Atk.Selection {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ListBoxAccessible>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: ListBoxAccessible.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<ListBoxAccessible.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof ListBoxAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ListBoxAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof ListBoxAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ListBoxAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof ListBoxAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<ListBoxAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        /**
         * Adds the specified accessible child of the object to the
         * object's selection.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the child index.
         * @returns TRUE if success, FALSE otherwise.
         */
        add_selection(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Clears the selection in the object so that no children in the object
         * are selected.
         * @returns TRUE if success, FALSE otherwise.
         */
        clear_selection(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the number of accessible children currently selected.
         * Note: callers should not rely on `null` or on a zero value for
         * indication of whether AtkSelectionIface is implemented, they should
         * use type checking/interface checking macros or the
         * `atk_get_accessible_value()` convenience method.
         * @returns a gint representing the number of items selected, or 0 if `selection` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_selection_count(): number;

        /**
         * Determines if the current child of this object is selected
         * Note: callers should not rely on `null` or on a zero value for
         * indication of whether AtkSelectionIface is implemented, they should
         * use type checking/interface checking macros or the
         * `atk_get_accessible_value()` convenience method.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the child index.
         * @returns a gboolean representing the specified child is selected, or 0 if `selection` does not implement this interface.
         */
        is_child_selected(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets a reference to the accessible object representing the specified
         * selected child of the object.
         * Note: callers should not rely on `null` or on a zero value for
         * indication of whether AtkSelectionIface is implemented, they should
         * use type checking/interface checking macros or the
         * `atk_get_accessible_value()` convenience method.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the index in the selection set.  (e.g. the ith selection as opposed to the ith child).
         * @returns an {@link Atk.Object} representing the selected accessible, or `null` if `selection` does not implement this interface.
         */
        ref_selection(i: number): Atk.Object | null;

        /**
         * Removes the specified child of the object from the object's selection.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the index in the selection set.  (e.g. the ith selection as opposed to the ith child).
         * @returns TRUE if success, FALSE otherwise.
         */
        remove_selection(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Causes every child of the object to be selected if the object
         * supports multiple selections.
         * @returns TRUE if success, FALSE otherwise.
         */
        select_all_selection(): boolean;

        /**
         * Adds the specified accessible child of the object to the
         * object's selection.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the child index.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add_selection(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Clears the selection in the object so that no children in the object
         * are selected.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_clear_selection(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the number of accessible children currently selected.
         * Note: callers should not rely on `null` or on a zero value for
         * indication of whether AtkSelectionIface is implemented, they should
         * use type checking/interface checking macros or the
         * `atk_get_accessible_value()` convenience method.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_selection_count(): number;

        /**
         * Determines if the current child of this object is selected
         * Note: callers should not rely on `null` or on a zero value for
         * indication of whether AtkSelectionIface is implemented, they should
         * use type checking/interface checking macros or the
         * `atk_get_accessible_value()` convenience method.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the child index.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_is_child_selected(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets a reference to the accessible object representing the specified
         * selected child of the object.
         * Note: callers should not rely on `null` or on a zero value for
         * indication of whether AtkSelectionIface is implemented, they should
         * use type checking/interface checking macros or the
         * `atk_get_accessible_value()` convenience method.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the index in the selection set.  (e.g. the ith selection as opposed to the ith child).
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_ref_selection(i: number): Atk.Object | null;

        /**
         * Removes the specified child of the object from the object's selection.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the index in the selection set.  (e.g. the ith selection as opposed to the ith child).
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_remove_selection(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Causes every child of the object to be selected if the object
         * supports multiple selections.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_select_all_selection(): boolean;

        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_selection_changed(): void;
    }


    namespace ListBoxRow {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Bin.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * This is a keybinding signal, which will cause this row to be activated.
             * 
             * If you want to be notified when the user activates a row (by key or not),
             * use the {@link Gtk.ListBox.SignalSignatures.row_activated | Gtk.ListBox::row-activated} signal on the row’s parent {@link Gtk.ListBox}.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.10
             * @action
             * @run-first
             */
            activate: () => void;
            "notify::activatable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::selectable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::action-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::action-target": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Bin.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Actionable.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {
            activatable: boolean;
            selectable: boolean;
        }
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class ListBoxRow extends Bin implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Actionable, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ListBoxRow>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * The property determines whether the {@link Gtk.ListBox.SignalSignatures.row_activated | Gtk.ListBox::row-activated}
         * signal will be emitted for this row.
         * @since 3.14
         * @default true
         */
        get activatable(): boolean;
        set activatable(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The property determines whether this row can be selected.
         * @since 3.14
         * @default true
         */
        get selectable(): boolean;
        set selectable(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: ListBoxRow.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<ListBoxRow.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): ListBoxRow;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof ListBoxRow.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ListBoxRow.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof ListBoxRow.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ListBoxRow.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof ListBoxRow.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<ListBoxRow.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_activate(): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Marks `row` as changed, causing any state that depends on this
         * to be updated. This affects sorting, filtering and headers.
         * 
         * Note that calls to this method must be in sync with the data
         * used for the row functions. For instance, if the list is
         * mirroring some external data set, and *two* rows changed in the
         * external data set then when you call `gtk_list_box_row_changed()`
         * on the first row the sort function must only read the new data
         * for the first of the two changed rows, otherwise the resorting
         * of the rows will be wrong.
         * 
         * This generally means that if you don’t fully control the data
         * model you have to duplicate the data that affects the listbox
         * row functions into the row widgets themselves. Another alternative
         * is to call `gtk_list_box_invalidate_sort()` on any model change,
         * but that is more expensive.
         */
        changed(): void;

        /**
         * Gets the value of the {@link Gtk.ListBoxRow.activatable} property
         * for this row.
         * @returns `true` if the row is activatable
         */
        get_activatable(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the current header of the `row`. This can be used
         * in a {@link Gtk.ListBoxUpdateHeaderFunc} to see if there is a header
         * set already, and if so to update the state of it.
         * @returns the current header, or `null` if none
         */
        get_header(): Widget | null;

        /**
         * Gets the current index of the `row` in its {@link Gtk.ListBox} container.
         * @returns the index of the `row`, or -1 if the `row` is not in a listbox
         */
        get_index(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the value of the {@link Gtk.ListBoxRow.selectable} property
         * for this row.
         * @returns `true` if the row is selectable
         */
        get_selectable(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns whether the child is currently selected in its
         * {@link Gtk.ListBox} container.
         * @returns `true` if `row` is selected
         */
        is_selected(): boolean;

        /**
         * Set the {@link Gtk.ListBoxRow.activatable} property for this row.
         * @param activatable `true` to mark the row as activatable
         */
        set_activatable(activatable: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the current header of the `row`. This is only allowed to be called
         * from a {@link Gtk.ListBoxUpdateHeaderFunc}. It will replace any existing
         * header in the row, and be shown in front of the row in the listbox.
         * @param header the header, or `null`
         */
        set_header(header: Widget | null): void;

        /**
         * Set the {@link Gtk.ListBoxRow.selectable} property for this row.
         * @param selectable `true` to mark the row as selectable
         */
        set_selectable(selectable: boolean): void;

        /**
         * @default null
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable
         */
        get action_name(): string | null;
        set action_name(val: string | null);

        /**
         * @default null
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable
         */
        get actionName(): string | null;
        set actionName(val: string | null);

        /** @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable */
        get action_target(): GLib.Variant;
        set action_target(val: GLib.Variant);

        /** @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable */
        get actionTarget(): GLib.Variant;
        set actionTarget(val: GLib.Variant);

        /**
         * Gets the action name for `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_name()` for more information.
         * @returns the action name, or `null` if none is set
         */
        get_action_name(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the current target value of `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_target_value()` for more information.
         * @returns the current target value
         */
        get_action_target_value(): GLib.Variant;

        /**
         * Specifies the name of the action with which this widget should be
         * associated.  If `action_name` is `null` then the widget will be
         * unassociated from any previous action.
         * 
         * Usually this function is used when the widget is located (or will be
         * located) within the hierarchy of a {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow}.
         * 
         * Names are of the form “win.save” or “app.quit” for actions on the
         * containing {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow} or its associated {@link Gtk.Application},
         * respectively.  This is the same form used for actions in the {@link Gio.Menu}
         * associated with the window.
         * @param action_name an action name, or `null`
         */
        set_action_name(action_name: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the target value of an actionable widget.
         * 
         * If `target_value` is `null` then the target value is unset.
         * 
         * The target value has two purposes.  First, it is used as the
         * parameter to activation of the action associated with the
         * {@link Gtk.Actionable} widget. Second, it is used to determine if the widget
         * should be rendered as “active” — the widget is active if the state
         * is equal to the given target.
         * 
         * Consider the example of associating a set of buttons with a {@link Gio.Action}
         * with string state in a typical “radio button” situation.  Each button
         * will be associated with the same action, but with a different target
         * value for that action.  Clicking on a particular button will activate
         * the action with the target of that button, which will typically cause
         * the action’s state to change to that value.  Since the action’s state
         * is now equal to the target value of the button, the button will now
         * be rendered as active (and the other buttons, with different targets,
         * rendered inactive).
         * @param target_value a {@link GLib.Variant} to set as the target value, or `null`
         */
        set_action_target_value(target_value: GLib.Variant | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the action-name and associated string target value of an
         * actionable widget.
         * 
         * `detailed_action_name` is a string in the format accepted by
         * `g_action_parse_detailed_name()`.
         * 
         * (Note that prior to version 3.22.25,
         * this function is only usable for actions with a simple "s" target, and
         * `detailed_action_name` must be of the form `"action::target"` where
         * `action` is the action name and `target` is the string to use
         * as the target.)
         * @param detailed_action_name the detailed action name
         */
        set_detailed_action_name(detailed_action_name: string): void;

        /**
         * Gets the action name for `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_name()` for more information.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_action_name(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the current target value of `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_target_value()` for more information.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_action_target_value(): GLib.Variant;

        /**
         * Specifies the name of the action with which this widget should be
         * associated.  If `action_name` is `null` then the widget will be
         * unassociated from any previous action.
         * 
         * Usually this function is used when the widget is located (or will be
         * located) within the hierarchy of a {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow}.
         * 
         * Names are of the form “win.save” or “app.quit” for actions on the
         * containing {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow} or its associated {@link Gtk.Application},
         * respectively.  This is the same form used for actions in the {@link Gio.Menu}
         * associated with the window.
         * @param action_name an action name, or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_action_name(action_name: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the target value of an actionable widget.
         * 
         * If `target_value` is `null` then the target value is unset.
         * 
         * The target value has two purposes.  First, it is used as the
         * parameter to activation of the action associated with the
         * {@link Gtk.Actionable} widget. Second, it is used to determine if the widget
         * should be rendered as “active” — the widget is active if the state
         * is equal to the given target.
         * 
         * Consider the example of associating a set of buttons with a {@link Gio.Action}
         * with string state in a typical “radio button” situation.  Each button
         * will be associated with the same action, but with a different target
         * value for that action.  Clicking on a particular button will activate
         * the action with the target of that button, which will typically cause
         * the action’s state to change to that value.  Since the action’s state
         * is now equal to the target value of the button, the button will now
         * be rendered as active (and the other buttons, with different targets,
         * rendered inactive).
         * @param target_value a {@link GLib.Variant} to set as the target value, or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_action_target_value(target_value: GLib.Variant | null): void;

        /**
         * Emits a {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.child_notify | Gtk.Widget::child-notify} signal for the
         * [child property][child-properties] `child_property`
         * on `widget`.
         * 
         * This is the analogue of `g_object_notify()` for child properties.
         * 
         * Also see `gtk_container_child_notify()`.
         * @param child_property the name of a child property installed on the                  class of `widget`’s parent
         */
        child_notify(child_property: string): void;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Gtk.Container.child_notify
        child_notify(...args: never[]): any;
    }


    namespace ListBoxRowAccessible {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends ContainerAccessible.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-layer": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-mdi-zorder": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-help-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-hypertext-nlinks": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption-object": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-summary": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends ContainerAccessible.ConstructorProps, Atk.Component.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class ListBoxRowAccessible extends ContainerAccessible implements Atk.Component {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ListBoxRowAccessible>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: ListBoxRowAccessible.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<ListBoxRowAccessible.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof ListBoxRowAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ListBoxRowAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof ListBoxRowAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ListBoxRowAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof ListBoxRowAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<ListBoxRowAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;
    }


    namespace ListStore {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends GObject.Object.SignalSignatures {}

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.Object.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, TreeDragDest.ConstructorProps, TreeDragSource.ConstructorProps, TreeModel.ConstructorProps, TreeSortable.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * The {@link Gtk.ListStore} object is a list model for use with a {@link Gtk.TreeView}
     * widget.  It implements the {@link Gtk.TreeModel} interface, and consequentialy,
     * can use all of the methods available there.  It also implements the
     * {@link Gtk.TreeSortable} interface so it can be sorted by the view.
     * Finally, it also implements the tree
     * [drag and drop][gtk3-GtkTreeView-drag-and-drop]
     * interfaces.
     * 
     * The {@link Gtk.ListStore} can accept most GObject types as a column type, though
     * it can’t accept all custom types.  Internally, it will keep a copy of
     * data passed in (such as a string or a boxed pointer).  Columns that
     * accept `GObjects` are handled a little differently.  The
     * {@link Gtk.ListStore} will keep a reference to the object instead of copying the
     * value.  As a result, if the object is modified, it is up to the
     * application writer to call `gtk_tree_model_row_changed()` to emit the
     * {@link Gtk.TreeModel.SignalSignatures.row_changed | Gtk.TreeModel::row_changed} signal.  This most commonly affects lists with
     * `GdkPixbufs` stored.
     * 
     * An example for creating a simple list store:
     * 
     * 
     * ```c
     * enum {
     *   COLUMN_STRING,
     *   COLUMN_INT,
     *   COLUMN_BOOLEAN,
     *   N_COLUMNS
     * };
     * 
     * {
     *   GtkListStore *list_store;
     *   GtkTreePath *path;
     *   GtkTreeIter iter;
     *   gint i;
     * 
     *   list_store = gtk_list_store_new (N_COLUMNS,
     *                                    G_TYPE_STRING,
     *                                    G_TYPE_INT,
     *                                    G_TYPE_BOOLEAN);
     * 
     *   for (i = 0; i < 10; i++)
     *     {
     *       gchar *some_data;
     * 
     *       some_data = get_some_data (i);
     * 
     *       // Add a new row to the model
     *       gtk_list_store_append (list_store, &iter);
     *       gtk_list_store_set (list_store, &iter,
     *                           COLUMN_STRING, some_data,
     *                           COLUMN_INT, i,
     *                           COLUMN_BOOLEAN,  FALSE,
     *                           -1);
     * 
     *       // As the store will keep a copy of the string internally,
     *       // we free some_data.
     *       g_free (some_data);
     *     }
     * 
     *   // Modify a particular row
     *   path = gtk_tree_path_new_from_string ("4");
     *   gtk_tree_model_get_iter (GTK_TREE_MODEL (list_store),
     *                            &iter,
     *                            path);
     *   gtk_tree_path_free (path);
     *   gtk_list_store_set (list_store, &iter,
     *                       COLUMN_BOOLEAN, TRUE,
     *                       -1);
     * }
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * # Performance Considerations
     * 
     * Internally, the {@link Gtk.ListStore} was implemented with a linked list with
     * a tail pointer prior to GTK+ 2.6.  As a result, it was fast at data
     * insertion and deletion, and not fast at random data access.  The
     * {@link Gtk.ListStore} sets the #GTK_TREE_MODEL_ITERS_PERSIST flag, which means
     * that `GtkTreeIters` can be cached while the row exists.  Thus, if
     * access to a particular row is needed often and your code is expected to
     * run on older versions of GTK+, it is worth keeping the iter around.
     * 
     * # Atomic Operations
     * 
     * It is important to note that only the methods
     * `gtk_list_store_insert_with_values()` and `gtk_list_store_insert_with_valuesv()`
     * are atomic, in the sense that the row is being appended to the store and the
     * values filled in in a single operation with regard to {@link Gtk.TreeModel} signaling.
     * In contrast, using e.g. `gtk_list_store_append()` and then `gtk_list_store_set()`
     * will first create a row, which triggers the {@link Gtk.TreeModel.SignalSignatures.row_inserted | Gtk.TreeModel::row-inserted} signal
     * on {@link Gtk.ListStore}. The row, however, is still empty, and any signal handler
     * connecting to {@link Gtk.TreeModel.SignalSignatures.row_inserted | Gtk.TreeModel::row-inserted} on this particular store should be prepared
     * for the situation that the row might be empty. This is especially important
     * if you are wrapping the {@link Gtk.ListStore} inside a {@link Gtk.TreeModelFilter} and are
     * using a {@link Gtk.TreeModelFilterVisibleFunc}. Using any of the non-atomic operations
     * to append rows to the {@link Gtk.ListStore} will cause the
     * {@link Gtk.TreeModelFilterVisibleFunc} to be visited with an empty row first; the
     * function must be prepared for that.
     * 
     * # GtkListStore as GtkBuildable
     * 
     * The GtkListStore implementation of the GtkBuildable interface allows
     * to specify the model columns with a `<columns>` element that may contain
     * multiple `<column>` elements, each specifying one model column. The “type”
     * attribute specifies the data type for the column.
     * 
     * Additionally, it is possible to specify content for the list store
     * in the UI definition, with the `<data>` element. It can contain multiple
     * `<row>` elements, each specifying to content for one row of the list model.
     * Inside a `<row>`, the `<col>` elements specify the content for individual cells.
     * 
     * Note that it is probably more common to define your models in the code,
     * and one might consider it a layering violation to specify the content of
     * a list store in a UI definition, data, not presentation, and common wisdom
     * is to separate the two, as far as possible.
     * 
     * An example of a UI Definition fragment for a list store:
     * 
     * 
     * ```xml
     * <object class="GtkListStore">
     *   <columns>
     *     <column type="gchararray"/>
     *     <column type="gchararray"/>
     *     <column type="gint"/>
     *   </columns>
     *   <data>
     *     <row>
     *       <col id="0">John</col>
     *       <col id="1">Doe</col>
     *       <col id="2">25</col>
     *     </row>
     *     <row>
     *       <col id="0">Johan</col>
     *       <col id="1">Dahlin</col>
     *       <col id="2">50</col>
     *     </row>
     *   </data>
     * </object>
     * ```
     * 
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class ListStore extends GObject.Object implements Buildable, TreeDragDest, TreeDragSource, TreeModel, TreeSortable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ListStore>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: ListStore.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<ListStore.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](types: GObject.GType[]): ListStore;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof ListStore.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ListStore.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof ListStore.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ListStore.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof ListStore.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<ListStore.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Appends a new row to `list_store`.  `iter` will be changed to point to this new
         * row.  The row will be empty after this function is called.  To fill in
         * values, you need to call `gtk_list_store_set()` or `gtk_list_store_set_value()`.
         */
        append(): TreeIter;

        /**
         * Removes all rows from the list store.
         */
        clear(): void;

        /**
         * Creates a new row at `position`.  `iter` will be changed to point to this new
         * row.  If `position` is -1 or is larger than the number of rows on the list,
         * then the new row will be appended to the list. The row will be empty after
         * this function is called.  To fill in values, you need to call
         * `gtk_list_store_set()` or `gtk_list_store_set_value()`.
         * @param position position to insert the new row, or -1 for last
         */
        insert(position: number): TreeIter;

        /**
         * Inserts a new row after `sibling`. If `sibling` is `null`, then the row will be
         * prepended to the beginning of the list. `iter` will be changed to point to
         * this new row. The row will be empty after this function is called. To fill
         * in values, you need to call `gtk_list_store_set()` or `gtk_list_store_set_value()`.
         * @param sibling A valid {@link Gtk.TreeIter}, or `null`
         */
        insert_after(sibling: TreeIter | null): TreeIter;

        /**
         * Inserts a new row before `sibling`. If `sibling` is `null`, then the row will
         * be appended to the end of the list. `iter` will be changed to point to this
         * new row. The row will be empty after this function is called. To fill in
         * values, you need to call `gtk_list_store_set()` or `gtk_list_store_set_value()`.
         * @param sibling A valid {@link Gtk.TreeIter}, or `null`
         */
        insert_before(sibling: TreeIter | null): TreeIter;

        /**
         * A variant of `gtk_list_store_insert_with_values()` which
         * takes the columns and values as two arrays, instead of
         * varargs. This function is mainly intended for
         * language-bindings.
         * @param position position to insert the new row, or -1 for last
         * @param columns an array of column numbers
         * @param values an array of GValues
         */
        insert_with_valuesv(position: number, columns: number[], values: (GObject.Value | any)[]): TreeIter | null;

        /**
         * > This function is slow. Only use it for debugging and/or testing
         * > purposes.
         * 
         * Checks if the given iter is a valid iter for this {@link Gtk.ListStore}.
         * @param iter A {@link Gtk.TreeIter}.
         * @returns `true` if the iter is valid, `false` if the iter is invalid.
         */
        iter_is_valid(iter: TreeIter): boolean;

        /**
         * Moves `iter` in `store` to the position after `position`. Note that this
         * function only works with unsorted stores. If `position` is `null`, `iter`
         * will be moved to the start of the list.
         * @param iter A {@link Gtk.TreeIter}.
         * @param position A {@link Gtk.TreeIter} or `null`.
         */
        move_after(iter: TreeIter, position: TreeIter | null): void;

        /**
         * Moves `iter` in `store` to the position before `position`. Note that this
         * function only works with unsorted stores. If `position` is `null`, `iter`
         * will be moved to the end of the list.
         * @param iter A {@link Gtk.TreeIter}.
         * @param position A {@link Gtk.TreeIter}, or `null`.
         */
        move_before(iter: TreeIter, position: TreeIter | null): void;

        /**
         * Prepends a new row to `list_store`. `iter` will be changed to point to this new
         * row. The row will be empty after this function is called. To fill in
         * values, you need to call `gtk_list_store_set()` or `gtk_list_store_set_value()`.
         */
        prepend(): TreeIter;

        /**
         * Removes the given row from the list store.  After being removed,
         * `iter` is set to be the next valid row, or invalidated if it pointed
         * to the last row in `list_store`.
         * @param iter A valid {@link Gtk.TreeIter}
         * @returns `true` if `iter` is valid, `false` if not.
         */
        remove(iter: TreeIter): boolean;

        /**
         * Reorders `store` to follow the order indicated by `new_order`. Note that
         * this function only works with unsorted stores.
         * @param new_order an array of integers mapping the new      position of each child to its old position before the re-ordering,      i.e. `new_order``[newpos] = oldpos`. It must have      exactly as many items as the list store’s length.
         */
        reorder(new_order: number[]): void;

        /**
         * This function is meant primarily for `GObjects` that inherit from {@link Gtk.ListStore},
         * and should only be used when constructing a new {@link Gtk.ListStore}.  It will not
         * function after a row has been added, or a method on the {@link Gtk.TreeModel}
         * interface is called.
         * @param types An array length n of `GTypes`
         */
        set_column_types(types: GObject.GType[]): void;

        /**
         * Sets the data in the cell specified by `iter` and `column`.
         * The type of `value` must be convertible to the type of the
         * column.
         * @param iter A valid {@link Gtk.TreeIter} for the row being modified
         * @param column column number to modify
         * @param value new value for the cell
         */
        set_value(iter: TreeIter, column: number, value: GObject.Value | any): void;

        /**
         * A variant of `gtk_list_store_set_valist()` which
         * takes the columns and values as two arrays, instead of
         * varargs. This function is mainly intended for
         * language-bindings and in case the number of columns to
         * change is not known until run-time.
         * @param iter A valid {@link Gtk.TreeIter} for the row being modified
         * @param columns an array of column numbers
         * @param values an array of GValues
         */
        set(iter: TreeIter, columns: number[], values: (GObject.Value | any)[]): void;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
    // Conflicted with GObject.Object.set
        set(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Swaps `a` and `b` in `store`. Note that this function only works with
         * unsorted stores.
         * @param a A {@link Gtk.TreeIter}.
         * @param b Another {@link Gtk.TreeIter}.
         */
        swap(a: TreeIter, b: TreeIter): void;

        /**
         * Adds a child to `buildable`. `type` is an optional string
         * describing how the child should be added.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child to add
         * @param type kind of child or `null`
         */
        add_child(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object, type: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Constructs a child of `buildable` with the name `name`.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} calls this function if a “constructor” has been
         * specified in the UI definition.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param name name of child to construct
         * @returns the constructed child
         */
        construct_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, name: string): T;

        /**
         * This is similar to `gtk_buildable_parser_finished()` but is
         * called once for each custom tag handled by the `buildable`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname the name of the tag
         * @param data user data created in custom_tag_start
         */
        custom_finished(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
         * the buildable.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @param data user data that will be passed in to parser functions
         */
        custom_tag_end(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called for each unknown element under `<child>`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @returns `true` if a object has a custom implementation, `false`          if it doesn't.
         */
        custom_tag_start(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string): [boolean, GLib.MarkupParser, null];

        /**
         * Get the internal child called `childname` of the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param childname name of child
         * @returns the internal child of the buildable object
         */
        get_internal_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, childname: string): T;

        /**
         * Gets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} sets the name based on the
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI]
         * used to construct the `buildable`.
         * @returns the name set with `gtk_buildable_set_name()`
         */
        get_name(): string;

        /**
         * Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI].
         * Note that this will be called once for each time
         * `gtk_builder_add_from_file()` or `gtk_builder_add_from_string()`
         * is called on a builder.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         */
        parser_finished(builder: Builder): void;

        /**
         * Sets the property name `name` to `value` on the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param name name of property
         * @param value value of property
         */
        set_buildable_property(builder: Builder, name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;

        /**
         * Sets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * @param name name to set
         */
        set_name(name: string): void;

        /**
         * Adds a child to `buildable`. `type` is an optional string
         * describing how the child should be added.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child to add
         * @param type kind of child or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add_child(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object, type: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Constructs a child of `buildable` with the name `name`.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} calls this function if a “constructor” has been
         * specified in the UI definition.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param name name of child to construct
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_construct_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, name: string): T;

        /**
         * This is similar to `gtk_buildable_parser_finished()` but is
         * called once for each custom tag handled by the `buildable`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname the name of the tag
         * @param data user data created in custom_tag_start
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_finished(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
         * the buildable.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @param data user data that will be passed in to parser functions
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_tag_end(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called for each unknown element under `<child>`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_tag_start(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string): [boolean, GLib.MarkupParser, never];

        /**
         * Get the internal child called `childname` of the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param childname name of child
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_internal_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, childname: string): T;

        /**
         * Gets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} sets the name based on the
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI]
         * used to construct the `buildable`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_name(): string;

        /**
         * Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI].
         * Note that this will be called once for each time
         * `gtk_builder_add_from_file()` or `gtk_builder_add_from_string()`
         * is called on a builder.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_parser_finished(builder: Builder): void;

        /**
         * Sets the property name `name` to `value` on the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param name name of property
         * @param value value of property
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_buildable_property(builder: Builder, name: string, value: unknown): void;

        /**
         * Sets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * @param name name to set
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_name(name: string): void;

        /**
         * Asks the {@link Gtk.TreeDragDest} to insert a row before the path `dest`,
         * deriving the contents of the row from `selection_data`. If `dest` is
         * outside the tree so that inserting before it is impossible, `false`
         * will be returned. Also, `false` may be returned if the new row is
         * not created for some model-specific reason.  Should robustly handle
         * a `dest` no longer found in the model!
         * @param dest row to drop in front of
         * @param selection_data data to drop
         * @returns whether a new row was created before position `dest`
         */
        drag_data_received(dest: TreePath, selection_data: SelectionData): boolean;

        /**
         * Determines whether a drop is possible before the given `dest_path`,
         * at the same depth as `dest_path`. i.e., can we drop the data in
         * `selection_data` at that location. `dest_path` does not have to
         * exist; the return value will almost certainly be `false` if the
         * parent of `dest_path` doesn’t exist, though.
         * @param dest_path destination row
         * @param selection_data the data being dragged
         * @returns `true` if a drop is possible before `dest_path`
         */
        row_drop_possible(dest_path: TreePath, selection_data: SelectionData): boolean;

        /**
         * Asks the {@link Gtk.TreeDragDest} to insert a row before the path `dest`,
         * deriving the contents of the row from `selection_data`. If `dest` is
         * outside the tree so that inserting before it is impossible, `false`
         * will be returned. Also, `false` may be returned if the new row is
         * not created for some model-specific reason.  Should robustly handle
         * a `dest` no longer found in the model!
         * @param dest row to drop in front of
         * @param selection_data data to drop
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_drag_data_received(dest: TreePath, selection_data: SelectionData): boolean;

        /**
         * Determines whether a drop is possible before the given `dest_path`,
         * at the same depth as `dest_path`. i.e., can we drop the data in
         * `selection_data` at that location. `dest_path` does not have to
         * exist; the return value will almost certainly be `false` if the
         * parent of `dest_path` doesn’t exist, though.
         * @param dest_path destination row
         * @param selection_data the data being dragged
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_row_drop_possible(dest_path: TreePath, selection_data: SelectionData): boolean;

        /**
         * Asks the {@link Gtk.TreeDragSource} to delete the row at `path`, because
         * it was moved somewhere else via drag-and-drop. Returns `false`
         * if the deletion fails because `path` no longer exists, or for
         * some model-specific reason. Should robustly handle a `path` no
         * longer found in the model!
         * @param path row that was being dragged
         * @returns `true` if the row was successfully deleted
         */
        drag_data_delete(path: TreePath): boolean;

        /**
         * Asks the {@link Gtk.TreeDragSource} to fill in `selection_data` with a
         * representation of the row at `path`. `selection_data`->target gives
         * the required type of the data.  Should robustly handle a `path` no
         * longer found in the model!
         * @param path row that was dragged
         * @param selection_data a {@link Gtk.SelectionData} to fill with data                  from the dragged row
         * @returns `true` if data of the required type was provided
         */
        drag_data_get(path: TreePath, selection_data: SelectionData): boolean;

        /**
         * Asks the {@link Gtk.TreeDragSource} whether a particular row can be used as
         * the source of a DND operation. If the source doesn’t implement
         * this interface, the row is assumed draggable.
         * @param path row on which user is initiating a drag
         * @returns `true` if the row can be dragged
         */
        row_draggable(path: TreePath): boolean;

        /**
         * Asks the {@link Gtk.TreeDragSource} to delete the row at `path`, because
         * it was moved somewhere else via drag-and-drop. Returns `false`
         * if the deletion fails because `path` no longer exists, or for
         * some model-specific reason. Should robustly handle a `path` no
         * longer found in the model!
         * @param path row that was being dragged
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_drag_data_delete(path: TreePath): boolean;

        /**
         * Asks the {@link Gtk.TreeDragSource} to fill in `selection_data` with a
         * representation of the row at `path`. `selection_data`->target gives
         * the required type of the data.  Should robustly handle a `path` no
         * longer found in the model!
         * @param path row that was dragged
         * @param selection_data a {@link Gtk.SelectionData} to fill with data                  from the dragged row
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_drag_data_get(path: TreePath, selection_data: SelectionData): boolean;

        /**
         * Asks the {@link Gtk.TreeDragSource} whether a particular row can be used as
         * the source of a DND operation. If the source doesn’t implement
         * this interface, the row is assumed draggable.
         * @param path row on which user is initiating a drag
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_row_draggable(path: TreePath): boolean;

        /**
         * Creates a new {@link Gtk.TreeModel}, with `child_model` as the child_model
         * and `root` as the virtual root.
         * @param root A {@link Gtk.TreePath} or `null`.
         * @returns A new {@link Gtk.TreeModel}.
         */
        filter_new(root: TreePath | null): TreeModel;

        /**
         * Calls func on each node in model in a depth-first fashion.
         * 
         * If `func` returns `true`, then the tree ceases to be walked,
         * and `gtk_tree_model_foreach()` returns.
         * @param func a function to be called on each row
         */
        foreach(func: TreeModelForeachFunc): void;

        /**
         * Returns the type of the column.
         * @param index_ the column index
         * @returns the type of the column
         */
        get_column_type(index_: number): GObject.GType;

        /**
         * Returns a set of flags supported by this interface.
         * 
         * The flags are a bitwise combination of {@link Gtk.TreeModelFlags}.
         * The flags supported should not change during the lifetime
         * of the `tree_model`.
         * @returns the flags supported by this interface
         */
        get_flags(): TreeModelFlags;

        /**
         * Sets `iter` to a valid iterator pointing to `path`.  If `path` does
         * not exist, `iter` is set to an invalid iterator and `false` is returned.
         * @param path the {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct
         * @returns `true`, if `iter` was set
         */
        get_iter(path: TreePath): [boolean, TreeIter];

        /**
         * Initializes `iter` with the first iterator in the tree
         * (the one at the path "0") and returns `true`. Returns
         * `false` if the tree is empty.
         * @returns `true`, if `iter` was set
         */
        get_iter_first(): [boolean, TreeIter];

        /**
         * Sets `iter` to a valid iterator pointing to `path_string`, if it
         * exists. Otherwise, `iter` is left invalid and `false` is returned.
         * @param path_string a string representation of a {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct
         * @returns `true`, if `iter` was set
         */
        get_iter_from_string(path_string: string): [boolean, TreeIter];

        /**
         * Returns the number of columns supported by `tree_model`.
         * @returns the number of columns
         */
        get_n_columns(): number;

        /**
         * Returns a newly-created {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct referenced by `iter`.
         * 
         * This path should be freed with `gtk_tree_path_free()`.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
         * @returns a newly-created {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct
         */
        get_path(iter: TreeIter): TreePath;

        /**
         * Generates a string representation of the iter.
         * 
         * This string is a “:” separated list of numbers.
         * For example, “4:10:0:3” would be an acceptable
         * return value for this string.
         * @param iter a {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
         * @returns a newly-allocated string.     Must be freed with `g_free()`.
         */
        get_string_from_iter(iter: TreeIter): string;

        /**
         * Initializes and sets `value` to that at `column`.
         * 
         * When done with `value`, `g_value_unset()` needs to be called
         * to free any allocated memory.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
         * @param column the column to lookup the value at
         */
        get_value(iter: TreeIter, column: number): unknown;

        /**
         * Sets `iter` to point to the first child of `parent`.
         * 
         * If `parent` has no children, `false` is returned and `iter` is
         * set to be invalid. `parent` will remain a valid node after this
         * function has been called.
         * 
         * If `parent` is `null` returns the first node, equivalent to
         * `gtk_tree_model_get_iter_first (tree_model, iter);`
         * @param parent the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct, or `null`
         * @returns `true`, if `iter` has been set to the first child
         */
        iter_children(parent: TreeIter | null): [boolean, TreeIter];

        /**
         * Returns `true` if `iter` has children, `false` otherwise.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct to test for children
         * @returns `true` if `iter` has children
         */
        iter_has_child(iter: TreeIter): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the number of children that `iter` has.
         * 
         * As a special case, if `iter` is `null`, then the number
         * of toplevel nodes is returned.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct, or `null`
         * @returns the number of children of `iter`
         */
        iter_n_children(iter: TreeIter | null): number;

        /**
         * Sets `iter` to point to the node following it at the current level.
         * 
         * If there is no next `iter`, `false` is returned and `iter` is set
         * to be invalid.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
         * @returns `true` if `iter` has been changed to the next node
         */
        iter_next(iter: TreeIter): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets `iter` to be the child of `parent`, using the given index.
         * 
         * The first index is 0. If `n` is too big, or `parent` has no children,
         * `iter` is set to an invalid iterator and `false` is returned. `parent`
         * will remain a valid node after this function has been called. As a
         * special case, if `parent` is `null`, then the `n`-th root node
         * is set.
         * @param parent the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct to get the child from, or `null`.
         * @param n the index of the desired child
         * @returns `true`, if `parent` has an `n`-th child
         */
        iter_nth_child(parent: TreeIter | null, n: number): [boolean, TreeIter];

        /**
         * Sets `iter` to be the parent of `child`.
         * 
         * If `child` is at the toplevel, and doesn’t have a parent, then
         * `iter` is set to an invalid iterator and `false` is returned.
         * `child` will remain a valid node after this function has been
         * called.
         * 
         * `iter` will be initialized before the lookup is performed, so `child`
         * and `iter` cannot point to the same memory location.
         * @param child the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
         * @returns `true`, if `iter` is set to the parent of `child`
         */
        iter_parent(child: TreeIter): [boolean, TreeIter];

        /**
         * Sets `iter` to point to the previous node at the current level.
         * 
         * If there is no previous `iter`, `false` is returned and `iter` is
         * set to be invalid.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
         * @returns `true` if `iter` has been changed to the previous node
         */
        iter_previous(iter: TreeIter): boolean;

        /**
         * Lets the tree ref the node.
         * 
         * This is an optional method for models to implement.
         * To be more specific, models may ignore this call as it exists
         * primarily for performance reasons.
         * 
         * This function is primarily meant as a way for views to let
         * caching models know when nodes are being displayed (and hence,
         * whether or not to cache that node). Being displayed means a node
         * is in an expanded branch, regardless of whether the node is currently
         * visible in the viewport. For example, a file-system based model
         * would not want to keep the entire file-hierarchy in memory,
         * just the sections that are currently being displayed by
         * every current view.
         * 
         * A model should be expected to be able to get an iter independent
         * of its reffed state.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
         */
        ref_node(iter: TreeIter): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.TreeModel.SignalSignatures.row_changed | Gtk.TreeModel::row-changed} signal on `tree_model`.
         * @param path a {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct pointing to the changed row
         * @param iter a valid {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct pointing to the changed row
         */
        row_changed(path: TreePath, iter: TreeIter): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.TreeModel.SignalSignatures.row_deleted | Gtk.TreeModel::row-deleted} signal on `tree_model`.
         * 
         * This should be called by models after a row has been removed.
         * The location pointed to by `path` should be the location that
         * the row previously was at. It may not be a valid location anymore.
         * 
         * Nodes that are deleted are not unreffed, this means that any
         * outstanding references on the deleted node should not be released.
         * @param path a {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct pointing to the previous location of     the deleted row
         */
        row_deleted(path: TreePath): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.TreeModel.SignalSignatures.row_has_child_toggled | Gtk.TreeModel::row-has-child-toggled} signal on
         * `tree_model`. This should be called by models after the child
         * state of a node changes.
         * @param path a {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct pointing to the changed row
         * @param iter a valid {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct pointing to the changed row
         */
        row_has_child_toggled(path: TreePath, iter: TreeIter): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.TreeModel.SignalSignatures.row_inserted | Gtk.TreeModel::row-inserted} signal on `tree_model`.
         * @param path a {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct pointing to the inserted row
         * @param iter a valid {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct pointing to the inserted row
         */
        row_inserted(path: TreePath, iter: TreeIter): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.TreeModel.SignalSignatures.rows_reordered | Gtk.TreeModel::rows-reordered} signal on `tree_model`.
         * 
         * This should be called by models when their rows have been
         * reordered.
         * @param path a {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct pointing to the tree node whose children     have been reordered
         * @param iter a valid {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct pointing to the node     whose children have been reordered, or `null` if the depth     of `path` is 0
         * @param new_order an array of integers     mapping the current position of each child to its old     position before the re-ordering,     i.e. `new_order``[newpos] = oldpos`
         */
        rows_reordered(path: TreePath, iter: TreeIter | null, new_order: number[]): void;

        /**
         * Lets the tree unref the node.
         * 
         * This is an optional method for models to implement.
         * To be more specific, models may ignore this call as it exists
         * primarily for performance reasons. For more information on what
         * this means, see `gtk_tree_model_ref_node()`.
         * 
         * Please note that nodes that are deleted are not unreffed.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
         */
        unref_node(iter: TreeIter): void;

        /**
         * Returns the type of the column.
         * @param index_ the column index
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_column_type(index_: number): GObject.GType;

        /**
         * Returns a set of flags supported by this interface.
         * 
         * The flags are a bitwise combination of {@link Gtk.TreeModelFlags}.
         * The flags supported should not change during the lifetime
         * of the `tree_model`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_flags(): TreeModelFlags;

        /**
         * Sets `iter` to a valid iterator pointing to `path`.  If `path` does
         * not exist, `iter` is set to an invalid iterator and `false` is returned.
         * @param path the {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_iter(path: TreePath): [boolean, TreeIter];

        /**
         * Returns the number of columns supported by `tree_model`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_n_columns(): number;

        /**
         * Returns a newly-created {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct referenced by `iter`.
         * 
         * This path should be freed with `gtk_tree_path_free()`.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_path(iter: TreeIter): TreePath;

        /**
         * Initializes and sets `value` to that at `column`.
         * 
         * When done with `value`, `g_value_unset()` needs to be called
         * to free any allocated memory.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
         * @param column the column to lookup the value at
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_value(iter: TreeIter, column: number): GObject.Value | any;

        /**
         * Sets `iter` to point to the first child of `parent`.
         * 
         * If `parent` has no children, `false` is returned and `iter` is
         * set to be invalid. `parent` will remain a valid node after this
         * function has been called.
         * 
         * If `parent` is `null` returns the first node, equivalent to
         * `gtk_tree_model_get_iter_first (tree_model, iter);`
         * @param parent the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct, or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_iter_children(parent: TreeIter | null): [boolean, TreeIter];

        /**
         * Returns `true` if `iter` has children, `false` otherwise.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct to test for children
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_iter_has_child(iter: TreeIter): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the number of children that `iter` has.
         * 
         * As a special case, if `iter` is `null`, then the number
         * of toplevel nodes is returned.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct, or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_iter_n_children(iter: TreeIter | null): number;

        /**
         * Sets `iter` to point to the node following it at the current level.
         * 
         * If there is no next `iter`, `false` is returned and `iter` is set
         * to be invalid.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_iter_next(iter: TreeIter): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets `iter` to be the child of `parent`, using the given index.
         * 
         * The first index is 0. If `n` is too big, or `parent` has no children,
         * `iter` is set to an invalid iterator and `false` is returned. `parent`
         * will remain a valid node after this function has been called. As a
         * special case, if `parent` is `null`, then the `n`-th root node
         * is set.
         * @param parent the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct to get the child from, or `null`.
         * @param n the index of the desired child
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_iter_nth_child(parent: TreeIter | null, n: number): [boolean, TreeIter];

        /**
         * Sets `iter` to be the parent of `child`.
         * 
         * If `child` is at the toplevel, and doesn’t have a parent, then
         * `iter` is set to an invalid iterator and `false` is returned.
         * `child` will remain a valid node after this function has been
         * called.
         * 
         * `iter` will be initialized before the lookup is performed, so `child`
         * and `iter` cannot point to the same memory location.
         * @param child the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_iter_parent(child: TreeIter): [boolean, TreeIter];

        /**
         * Sets `iter` to point to the previous node at the current level.
         * 
         * If there is no previous `iter`, `false` is returned and `iter` is
         * set to be invalid.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_iter_previous(iter: TreeIter): boolean;

        /**
         * Lets the tree ref the node.
         * 
         * This is an optional method for models to implement.
         * To be more specific, models may ignore this call as it exists
         * primarily for performance reasons.
         * 
         * This function is primarily meant as a way for views to let
         * caching models know when nodes are being displayed (and hence,
         * whether or not to cache that node). Being displayed means a node
         * is in an expanded branch, regardless of whether the node is currently
         * visible in the viewport. For example, a file-system based model
         * would not want to keep the entire file-hierarchy in memory,
         * just the sections that are currently being displayed by
         * every current view.
         * 
         * A model should be expected to be able to get an iter independent
         * of its reffed state.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_ref_node(iter: TreeIter): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.TreeModel.SignalSignatures.row_changed | Gtk.TreeModel::row-changed} signal on `tree_model`.
         * @param path a {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct pointing to the changed row
         * @param iter a valid {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct pointing to the changed row
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_row_changed(path: TreePath, iter: TreeIter): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.TreeModel.SignalSignatures.row_deleted | Gtk.TreeModel::row-deleted} signal on `tree_model`.
         * 
         * This should be called by models after a row has been removed.
         * The location pointed to by `path` should be the location that
         * the row previously was at. It may not be a valid location anymore.
         * 
         * Nodes that are deleted are not unreffed, this means that any
         * outstanding references on the deleted node should not be released.
         * @param path a {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct pointing to the previous location of     the deleted row
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_row_deleted(path: TreePath): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.TreeModel.SignalSignatures.row_has_child_toggled | Gtk.TreeModel::row-has-child-toggled} signal on
         * `tree_model`. This should be called by models after the child
         * state of a node changes.
         * @param path a {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct pointing to the changed row
         * @param iter a valid {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct pointing to the changed row
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_row_has_child_toggled(path: TreePath, iter: TreeIter): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.TreeModel.SignalSignatures.row_inserted | Gtk.TreeModel::row-inserted} signal on `tree_model`.
         * @param path a {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct pointing to the inserted row
         * @param iter a valid {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct pointing to the inserted row
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_row_inserted(path: TreePath, iter: TreeIter): void;

        /**
         * Lets the tree unref the node.
         * 
         * This is an optional method for models to implement.
         * To be more specific, models may ignore this call as it exists
         * primarily for performance reasons. For more information on what
         * this means, see `gtk_tree_model_ref_node()`.
         * 
         * Please note that nodes that are deleted are not unreffed.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_unref_node(iter: TreeIter): void;

        /**
         * Fills in `sort_column_id` and `order` with the current sort column and the
         * order. It returns `true` unless the `sort_column_id` is
         * `GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID` or
         * `GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_UNSORTED_SORT_COLUMN_ID`.
         * @returns `true` if the sort column is not one of the special sort   column ids.
         */
        get_sort_column_id(): [boolean, number, SortType];

        /**
         * Returns `true` if the model has a default sort function. This is used
         * primarily by GtkTreeViewColumns in order to determine if a model can
         * go back to the default state, or not.
         * @returns `true`, if the model has a default sort function
         */
        has_default_sort_func(): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the default comparison function used when sorting to be `sort_func`.
         * If the current sort column id of `sortable` is
         * `GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID`, then the model will sort using
         * this function.
         * 
         * If `sort_func` is `null`, then there will be no default comparison function.
         * This means that once the model  has been sorted, it can’t go back to the
         * default state. In this case, when the current sort column id of `sortable`
         * is `GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID`, the model will be unsorted.
         * @param sort_func The comparison function
         */
        set_default_sort_func(sort_func: TreeIterCompareFunc): void;

        /**
         * Sets the current sort column to be `sort_column_id`. The `sortable` will
         * resort itself to reflect this change, after emitting a
         * {@link Gtk.TreeSortable.SignalSignatures.sort_column_changed | Gtk.TreeSortable::sort-column-changed} signal. `sort_column_id` may either be
         * a regular column id, or one of the following special values:
         * 
         * - `GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID`: the default sort function
         *   will be used, if it is set
         * 
         * - `GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_UNSORTED_SORT_COLUMN_ID`: no sorting will occur
         * @param sort_column_id the sort column id to set
         * @param order The sort order of the column
         */
        set_sort_column_id(sort_column_id: number, order: SortType): void;

        /**
         * Sets the comparison function used when sorting to be `sort_func`. If the
         * current sort column id of `sortable` is the same as `sort_column_id`, then
         * the model will sort using this function.
         * @param sort_column_id the sort column id to set the function for
         * @param sort_func The comparison function
         */
        set_sort_func(sort_column_id: number, sort_func: TreeIterCompareFunc): void;

        /**
         * Emits a {@link Gtk.TreeSortable.SignalSignatures.sort_column_changed | Gtk.TreeSortable::sort-column-changed} signal on `sortable`.
         */
        sort_column_changed(): void;

        /**
         * Fills in `sort_column_id` and `order` with the current sort column and the
         * order. It returns `true` unless the `sort_column_id` is
         * `GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID` or
         * `GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_UNSORTED_SORT_COLUMN_ID`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_sort_column_id(): [boolean, number, SortType];

        /**
         * Returns `true` if the model has a default sort function. This is used
         * primarily by GtkTreeViewColumns in order to determine if a model can
         * go back to the default state, or not.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_has_default_sort_func(): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the default comparison function used when sorting to be `sort_func`.
         * If the current sort column id of `sortable` is
         * `GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID`, then the model will sort using
         * this function.
         * 
         * If `sort_func` is `null`, then there will be no default comparison function.
         * This means that once the model  has been sorted, it can’t go back to the
         * default state. In this case, when the current sort column id of `sortable`
         * is `GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID`, the model will be unsorted.
         * @param sort_func The comparison function
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_default_sort_func(sort_func: TreeIterCompareFunc): void;

        /**
         * Sets the current sort column to be `sort_column_id`. The `sortable` will
         * resort itself to reflect this change, after emitting a
         * {@link Gtk.TreeSortable.SignalSignatures.sort_column_changed | Gtk.TreeSortable::sort-column-changed} signal. `sort_column_id` may either be
         * a regular column id, or one of the following special values:
         * 
         * - `GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID`: the default sort function
         *   will be used, if it is set
         * 
         * - `GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_UNSORTED_SORT_COLUMN_ID`: no sorting will occur
         * @param sort_column_id the sort column id to set
         * @param order The sort order of the column
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_sort_column_id(sort_column_id: number, order: SortType): void;

        /**
         * Sets the comparison function used when sorting to be `sort_func`. If the
         * current sort column id of `sortable` is the same as `sort_column_id`, then
         * the model will sort using this function.
         * @param sort_column_id the sort column id to set the function for
         * @param sort_func The comparison function
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_sort_func(sort_column_id: number, sort_func: TreeIterCompareFunc): void;

        /**
         * Emits a {@link Gtk.TreeSortable.SignalSignatures.sort_column_changed | Gtk.TreeSortable::sort-column-changed} signal on `sortable`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_sort_column_changed(): void;
    }


    namespace LockButton {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Button.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::permission": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::text-lock": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::text-unlock": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-lock": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-not-authorized": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-unlock": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::always-show-image": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::image": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::image-position": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::label": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::relief": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-stock": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-underline": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::xalign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::yalign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::action-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::action-target": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::related-action": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-action-appearance": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Button.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Actionable.ConstructorProps, Activatable.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {
            permission: Gio.Permission;
            text_lock: string;
            textLock: string;
            text_unlock: string;
            textUnlock: string;
            tooltip_lock: string;
            tooltipLock: string;
            tooltip_not_authorized: string;
            tooltipNotAuthorized: string;
            tooltip_unlock: string;
            tooltipUnlock: string;
        }
    }

    /**
     * GtkLockButton is a widget that can be used in control panels or
     * preference dialogs to allow users to obtain and revoke authorizations
     * needed to operate the controls. The required authorization is represented
     * by a {@link Gio.Permission} object. Concrete implementations of {@link Gio.Permission} may use
     * PolicyKit or some other authorization framework. To obtain a PolicyKit-based
     * {@link Gio.Permission}, use `polkit_permission_new()`.
     * 
     * If the user is not currently allowed to perform the action, but can obtain
     * the permission, the widget looks like this:
     * 
     * ![](lockbutton-locked.png)
     * 
     * and the user can click the button to request the permission. Depending
     * on the platform, this may pop up an authentication dialog or ask the user
     * to authenticate in some other way. Once the user has obtained the permission,
     * the widget changes to this:
     * 
     * ![](lockbutton-unlocked.png)
     * 
     * and the permission can be dropped again by clicking the button. If the user
     * is not able to obtain the permission at all, the widget looks like this:
     * 
     * ![](lockbutton-sorry.png)
     * 
     * If the user has the permission and cannot drop it, the button is hidden.
     * 
     * The text (and tooltips) that are shown in the various cases can be adjusted
     * with the {@link Gtk.LockButton.text_lock}, {@link Gtk.LockButton.text_unlock},
     * {@link Gtk.LockButton.tooltip_lock}, {@link Gtk.LockButton.tooltip_unlock} and
     * {@link Gtk.LockButton.tooltip_not_authorized} properties.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class LockButton extends Button implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Actionable, Activatable, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<LockButton>;

        // Properties
        get permission(): Gio.Permission;
        set permission(val: Gio.Permission);

        /**
         * @default Lock
         */
        get text_lock(): string;
        set text_lock(val: string);

        /**
         * @default Lock
         */
        get textLock(): string;
        set textLock(val: string);

        /**
         * @default Unlock
         */
        get text_unlock(): string;
        set text_unlock(val: string);

        /**
         * @default Unlock
         */
        get textUnlock(): string;
        set textUnlock(val: string);

        /**
         * @default Dialog is unlocked.\nClick to prevent further changes
         */
        get tooltip_lock(): string;
        set tooltip_lock(val: string);

        /**
         * @default Dialog is unlocked.\nClick to prevent further changes
         */
        get tooltipLock(): string;
        set tooltipLock(val: string);

        /**
         * @default System policy prevents changes.\nContact your system administrator
         */
        get tooltip_not_authorized(): string;
        set tooltip_not_authorized(val: string);

        /**
         * @default System policy prevents changes.\nContact your system administrator
         */
        get tooltipNotAuthorized(): string;
        set tooltipNotAuthorized(val: string);

        /**
         * @default Dialog is locked.\nClick to make changes
         */
        get tooltip_unlock(): string;
        set tooltip_unlock(val: string);

        /**
         * @default Dialog is locked.\nClick to make changes
         */
        get tooltipUnlock(): string;
        set tooltipUnlock(val: string);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: LockButton.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<LockButton.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](permission: Gio.Permission | null): LockButton;

        // Conflicted with Gtk.Button.new
        static ["new"](...args: never[]): any;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof LockButton.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, LockButton.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof LockButton.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, LockButton.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof LockButton.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<LockButton.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Obtains the {@link Gio.Permission} object that controls `button`.
         * @returns the {@link Gio.Permission} of `button`
         */
        get_permission(): Gio.Permission;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gio.Permission} object that controls `button`.
         * @param permission a {@link Gio.Permission} object, or `null`
         */
        set_permission(permission: Gio.Permission | null): void;

        /**
         * @default null
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable
         */
        get action_name(): string | null;
        set action_name(val: string | null);

        /**
         * @default null
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable
         */
        get actionName(): string | null;
        set actionName(val: string | null);

        /** @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable */
        get action_target(): GLib.Variant;
        set action_target(val: GLib.Variant);

        /** @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable */
        get actionTarget(): GLib.Variant;
        set actionTarget(val: GLib.Variant);

        /**
         * The action that this activatable will activate and receive
         * updates from for various states and possibly appearance.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the this property and
         * > call `gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action()` when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get related_action(): Action;
        set related_action(val: Action);

        /**
         * The action that this activatable will activate and receive
         * updates from for various states and possibly appearance.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the this property and
         * > call `gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action()` when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get relatedAction(): Action;
        set relatedAction(val: Action);

        /**
         * Whether this activatable should reset its layout
         * and appearance when setting the related action or when
         * the action changes appearance.
         * 
         * See the {@link Gtk.Action} documentation directly to find which properties
         * should be ignored by the {@link Gtk.Activatable} when this property is `false`.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle this property
         * > and call `gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties()` on the activatable
         * > widget when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get use_action_appearance(): boolean;
        set use_action_appearance(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether this activatable should reset its layout
         * and appearance when setting the related action or when
         * the action changes appearance.
         * 
         * See the {@link Gtk.Action} documentation directly to find which properties
         * should be ignored by the {@link Gtk.Activatable} when this property is `false`.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle this property
         * > and call `gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties()` on the activatable
         * > widget when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get useActionAppearance(): boolean;
        set useActionAppearance(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Gets the action name for `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_name()` for more information.
         * @returns the action name, or `null` if none is set
         */
        get_action_name(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the current target value of `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_target_value()` for more information.
         * @returns the current target value
         */
        get_action_target_value(): GLib.Variant;

        /**
         * Specifies the name of the action with which this widget should be
         * associated.  If `action_name` is `null` then the widget will be
         * unassociated from any previous action.
         * 
         * Usually this function is used when the widget is located (or will be
         * located) within the hierarchy of a {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow}.
         * 
         * Names are of the form “win.save” or “app.quit” for actions on the
         * containing {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow} or its associated {@link Gtk.Application},
         * respectively.  This is the same form used for actions in the {@link Gio.Menu}
         * associated with the window.
         * @param action_name an action name, or `null`
         */
        set_action_name(action_name: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the target value of an actionable widget.
         * 
         * If `target_value` is `null` then the target value is unset.
         * 
         * The target value has two purposes.  First, it is used as the
         * parameter to activation of the action associated with the
         * {@link Gtk.Actionable} widget. Second, it is used to determine if the widget
         * should be rendered as “active” — the widget is active if the state
         * is equal to the given target.
         * 
         * Consider the example of associating a set of buttons with a {@link Gio.Action}
         * with string state in a typical “radio button” situation.  Each button
         * will be associated with the same action, but with a different target
         * value for that action.  Clicking on a particular button will activate
         * the action with the target of that button, which will typically cause
         * the action’s state to change to that value.  Since the action’s state
         * is now equal to the target value of the button, the button will now
         * be rendered as active (and the other buttons, with different targets,
         * rendered inactive).
         * @param target_value a {@link GLib.Variant} to set as the target value, or `null`
         */
        set_action_target_value(target_value: GLib.Variant | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the action-name and associated string target value of an
         * actionable widget.
         * 
         * `detailed_action_name` is a string in the format accepted by
         * `g_action_parse_detailed_name()`.
         * 
         * (Note that prior to version 3.22.25,
         * this function is only usable for actions with a simple "s" target, and
         * `detailed_action_name` must be of the form `"action::target"` where
         * `action` is the action name and `target` is the string to use
         * as the target.)
         * @param detailed_action_name the detailed action name
         */
        set_detailed_action_name(detailed_action_name: string): void;

        /**
         * Gets the action name for `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_name()` for more information.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_action_name(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the current target value of `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_target_value()` for more information.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_action_target_value(): GLib.Variant;

        /**
         * Specifies the name of the action with which this widget should be
         * associated.  If `action_name` is `null` then the widget will be
         * unassociated from any previous action.
         * 
         * Usually this function is used when the widget is located (or will be
         * located) within the hierarchy of a {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow}.
         * 
         * Names are of the form “win.save” or “app.quit” for actions on the
         * containing {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow} or its associated {@link Gtk.Application},
         * respectively.  This is the same form used for actions in the {@link Gio.Menu}
         * associated with the window.
         * @param action_name an action name, or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_action_name(action_name: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the target value of an actionable widget.
         * 
         * If `target_value` is `null` then the target value is unset.
         * 
         * The target value has two purposes.  First, it is used as the
         * parameter to activation of the action associated with the
         * {@link Gtk.Actionable} widget. Second, it is used to determine if the widget
         * should be rendered as “active” — the widget is active if the state
         * is equal to the given target.
         * 
         * Consider the example of associating a set of buttons with a {@link Gio.Action}
         * with string state in a typical “radio button” situation.  Each button
         * will be associated with the same action, but with a different target
         * value for that action.  Clicking on a particular button will activate
         * the action with the target of that button, which will typically cause
         * the action’s state to change to that value.  Since the action’s state
         * is now equal to the target value of the button, the button will now
         * be rendered as active (and the other buttons, with different targets,
         * rendered inactive).
         * @param target_value a {@link GLib.Variant} to set as the target value, or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_action_target_value(target_value: GLib.Variant | null): void;

        /**
         * This is a utility function for {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors.
         * 
         * When implementing {@link Gtk.Activatable} you must call this when
         * handling changes of the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action}, and
         * you must also use this to break references in {@link GObject.Object}->dispose().
         * 
         * This function adds a reference to the currently set related
         * action for you, it also makes sure the {@link Gtk.Activatable}->update()
         * method is called when the related {@link Gtk.Action} properties change
         * and registers to the action’s proxy list.
         * 
         * > Be careful to call this before setting the local
         * > copy of the {@link Gtk.Action} property, since this function uses
         * > `gtk_activatable_get_related_action()` to retrieve the
         * > previous action.
         * @param action the {@link Gtk.Action} to set
         */
        do_set_related_action(action: Action): void;

        /**
         * Gets the related {@link Gtk.Action} for `activatable`.
         * @returns the related {@link Gtk.Action} if one is set.
         */
        get_related_action(): Action;

        /**
         * Gets whether this activatable should reset its layout
         * and appearance when setting the related action or when
         * the action changes appearance.
         * @returns whether `activatable` uses its actions appearance.
         */
        get_use_action_appearance(): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the related action on the `activatable` object.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action}
         * > property and call `gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action()` when it changes.
         * @param action the {@link Gtk.Action} to set
         */
        set_related_action(action: Action): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether this activatable should reset its layout and appearance
         * when setting the related action or when the action changes appearance
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} property and call
         * > `gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties()` to update `activatable`
         * > if needed.
         * @param use_appearance whether to use the actions appearance
         */
        set_use_action_appearance(use_appearance: boolean): void;

        /**
         * This is called to update the activatable completely, this is called
         * internally when the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action} property is set
         * or unset and by the implementing class when
         * {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} changes.
         * @param action the related {@link Gtk.Action} or `null`
         */
        sync_action_properties(action: Action | null): void;

        /**
         * This is called to update the activatable completely, this is called
         * internally when the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action} property is set
         * or unset and by the implementing class when
         * {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} changes.
         * @param action the related {@link Gtk.Action} or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_sync_action_properties(action: Action | null): void;

        /**
         * Called to update the activatable when its related action’s properties change.
         * You must check the {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} property only apply action
         * properties that are meant to effect the appearance accordingly.
         * @param action 
         * @param property_name 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_update(action: Action, property_name: string): void;

        /**
         * Emits a {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.child_notify | Gtk.Widget::child-notify} signal for the
         * [child property][child-properties] `child_property`
         * on `widget`.
         * 
         * This is the analogue of `g_object_notify()` for child properties.
         * 
         * Also see `gtk_container_child_notify()`.
         * @param child_property the name of a child property installed on the                  class of `widget`’s parent
         */
        child_notify(child_property: string): void;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Gtk.Container.child_notify
        child_notify(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Returns whether the widget should grab focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
         * See `gtk_widget_set_focus_on_click()`.
         * @returns `true` if the widget should grab focus when it is clicked with               the mouse.
         */
        get_focus_on_click(): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets whether the widget should grab focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
         * Making mouse clicks not grab focus is useful in places like toolbars where
         * you don’t want the keyboard focus removed from the main area of the
         * application.
         * @param focus_on_click whether the widget should grab focus when clicked with the mouse
         */
        set_focus_on_click(focus_on_click: boolean): void;
    }


    namespace LockButtonAccessible {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends ButtonAccessible.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-layer": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-mdi-zorder": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-help-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-hypertext-nlinks": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption-object": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-summary": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends ButtonAccessible.ConstructorProps, Atk.Action.ConstructorProps, Atk.Component.ConstructorProps, Atk.Image.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class LockButtonAccessible extends ButtonAccessible implements Atk.Action, Atk.Component, Atk.Image {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<LockButtonAccessible>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: LockButtonAccessible.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<LockButtonAccessible.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof LockButtonAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, LockButtonAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof LockButtonAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, LockButtonAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof LockButtonAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<LockButtonAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        /**
         * Perform the specified action on the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns `true` if success, `false` otherwise
         */
        do_action(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns a description of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns a description string, or `null` if `action` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_description(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.get_description
        get_description(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Gets the keybinding which can be used to activate this action, if one
         * exists. The string returned should contain localized, human-readable,
         * key sequences as they would appear when displayed on screen. It must
         * be in the format "mnemonic;sequence;shortcut".
         * 
         * - The mnemonic key activates the object if it is presently enabled onscreen.
         *   This typically corresponds to the underlined letter within the widget.
         *   Example: "n" in a traditional "New..." menu item or the "a" in "Apply" for
         *   a button.
         * - The sequence is the full list of keys which invoke the action even if the
         *   relevant element is not currently shown on screen. For instance, for a menu
         *   item the sequence is the keybindings used to open the parent menus before
         *   invoking. The sequence string is colon-delimited. Example: "Alt+F:N" in a
         *   traditional "New..." menu item.
         * - The shortcut, if it exists, will invoke the same action without showing
         *   the component or its enclosing menus or dialogs. Example: "Ctrl+N" in a
         *   traditional "New..." menu item.
         * 
         * Example: For a traditional "New..." menu item, the expected return value
         * would be: "N;Alt+F:N;Ctrl+N" for the English locale and "N;Alt+D:N;Strg+N"
         * for the German locale. If, hypothetically, this menu item lacked a mnemonic,
         * it would be represented by ";;Ctrl+N" and ";;Strg+N" respectively.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns the keybinding which can be used to activate this action, or `null` if there is no keybinding for this action.
         */
        get_keybinding(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Returns the localized name of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns a name string, or `null` if `action` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_localized_name(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the number of accessible actions available on the object.
         * If there are more than one, the first one is considered the
         * "default" action of the object.
         * @returns a the number of actions, or 0 if `action` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_n_actions(): number;

        /**
         * Returns a non-localized string naming the specified action of the
         * object. This name is generally not descriptive of the end result
         * of the action, but instead names the 'interaction type' which the
         * object supports. By convention, the above strings should be used to
         * represent the actions which correspond to the common point-and-click
         * interaction techniques of the same name: i.e.
         * "click", "press", "release", "drag", "drop", "popup", etc.
         * The "popup" action should be used to pop up a context menu for the
         * object, if one exists.
         * 
         * For technical reasons, some toolkits cannot guarantee that the
         * reported action is actually 'bound' to a nontrivial user event;
         * i.e. the result of some actions via `atk_action_do_action()` may be
         * NIL.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns a name string, or `null` if `action` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_name(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.get_name
        get_name(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Sets a description of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @param desc the description to be assigned to this action
         * @returns a gboolean representing if the description was successfully set;
         */
        set_description(i: number, desc: string): boolean;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.set_description
        set_description(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Perform the specified action on the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_do_action(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns a description of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_description(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         * @virtual
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.vfunc_get_description
        vfunc_get_description(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Gets the keybinding which can be used to activate this action, if one
         * exists. The string returned should contain localized, human-readable,
         * key sequences as they would appear when displayed on screen. It must
         * be in the format "mnemonic;sequence;shortcut".
         * 
         * - The mnemonic key activates the object if it is presently enabled onscreen.
         *   This typically corresponds to the underlined letter within the widget.
         *   Example: "n" in a traditional "New..." menu item or the "a" in "Apply" for
         *   a button.
         * - The sequence is the full list of keys which invoke the action even if the
         *   relevant element is not currently shown on screen. For instance, for a menu
         *   item the sequence is the keybindings used to open the parent menus before
         *   invoking. The sequence string is colon-delimited. Example: "Alt+F:N" in a
         *   traditional "New..." menu item.
         * - The shortcut, if it exists, will invoke the same action without showing
         *   the component or its enclosing menus or dialogs. Example: "Ctrl+N" in a
         *   traditional "New..." menu item.
         * 
         * Example: For a traditional "New..." menu item, the expected return value
         * would be: "N;Alt+F:N;Ctrl+N" for the English locale and "N;Alt+D:N;Strg+N"
         * for the German locale. If, hypothetically, this menu item lacked a mnemonic,
         * it would be represented by ";;Ctrl+N" and ";;Strg+N" respectively.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_keybinding(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Returns the localized name of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_localized_name(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the number of accessible actions available on the object.
         * If there are more than one, the first one is considered the
         * "default" action of the object.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_n_actions(): number;

        /**
         * Returns a non-localized string naming the specified action of the
         * object. This name is generally not descriptive of the end result
         * of the action, but instead names the 'interaction type' which the
         * object supports. By convention, the above strings should be used to
         * represent the actions which correspond to the common point-and-click
         * interaction techniques of the same name: i.e.
         * "click", "press", "release", "drag", "drop", "popup", etc.
         * The "popup" action should be used to pop up a context menu for the
         * object, if one exists.
         * 
         * For technical reasons, some toolkits cannot guarantee that the
         * reported action is actually 'bound' to a nontrivial user event;
         * i.e. the result of some actions via `atk_action_do_action()` may be
         * NIL.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_name(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         * @virtual
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.vfunc_get_name
        vfunc_get_name(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Sets a description of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @param desc the description to be assigned to this action
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_description(i: number, desc: string): boolean;

        /**
         * @param args 
         * @virtual
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.vfunc_set_description
        vfunc_set_description(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Get a textual description of this image.
         * @returns a string representing the image description
         */
        get_image_description(): string;

        /**
         * Retrieves the locale identifier associated to the {@link Atk.Image}.
         * @returns a string corresponding to the POSIX   `LC_MESSAGES` locale used by the image description, or   `null` if the image does not specify a locale.
         */
        get_image_locale(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the position of the image in the form of a point specifying the
         * images top-left corner.
         * 
         * If the position can not be obtained (e.g. missing support), x and y are set
         * to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         */
        get_image_position(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number];

        /**
         * Get the width and height in pixels for the specified image.
         * The values of `width` and `height` are returned as -1 if the
         * values cannot be obtained (for instance, if the object is not onscreen).
         * 
         * If the size can not be obtained (e.g. missing support), x and y are set
         * to -1.
         */
        get_image_size(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Sets the textual description for this image.
         * @param description a string description to set for `image`
         * @returns boolean TRUE, or FALSE if operation could not be completed.
         */
        set_image_description(description: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Get a textual description of this image.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_image_description(): string;

        /**
         * Retrieves the locale identifier associated to the {@link Atk.Image}.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_image_locale(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the position of the image in the form of a point specifying the
         * images top-left corner.
         * 
         * If the position can not be obtained (e.g. missing support), x and y are set
         * to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_image_position(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number];

        /**
         * Get the width and height in pixels for the specified image.
         * The values of `width` and `height` are returned as -1 if the
         * values cannot be obtained (for instance, if the object is not onscreen).
         * 
         * If the size can not be obtained (e.g. missing support), x and y are set
         * to -1.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_image_size(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Sets the textual description for this image.
         * @param description a string description to set for `image`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_image_description(description: string): boolean;
    }


    namespace Menu {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends MenuShell.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "move-scroll": (arg0: ScrollType) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when the position of `menu` is finalized after being popped up
             * using gtk_menu_popup_at_rect (), gtk_menu_popup_at_widget (), or
             * gtk_menu_popup_at_pointer ().
             * 
             * `menu` might be flipped over the anchor rectangle in order to keep it
             * on-screen, in which case `flipped_x` and `flipped_y` will be set to `true`
             * accordingly.
             * 
             * `flipped_rect` is the ideal position of `menu` after any possible flipping,
             * but before any possible sliding. `final_rect` is `flipped_rect`, but possibly
             * translated in the case that flipping is still ineffective in keeping `menu`
             * on-screen.
             * 
             * ![](popup-slide.png)
             * 
             * The blue menu is `menu`'s ideal position, the green menu is `flipped_rect`,
             * and the red menu is `final_rect`.
             * 
             * See gtk_menu_popup_at_rect (), gtk_menu_popup_at_widget (),
             * gtk_menu_popup_at_pointer (), {@link Gtk.Menu.anchor_hints},
             * {@link Gtk.Menu.rect_anchor_dx}, {@link Gtk.Menu.rect_anchor_dy}, and
             * {@link Gtk.Menu.menu_type_hint}.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.22
             * @run-first
             */
            "popped-up": (arg0: null, arg1: null, arg2: boolean, arg3: boolean) => void;
            "notify::accel-group": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accel-path": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::active": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::anchor-hints": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::attach-widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::menu-type-hint": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::monitor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::rect-anchor-dx": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::rect-anchor-dy": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::reserve-toggle-size": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tearoff-state": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tearoff-title": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::take-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends MenuShell.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {
            accel_group: AccelGroup;
            accelGroup: AccelGroup;
            accel_path: string;
            accelPath: string;
            active: number;
            anchor_hints: Gdk.AnchorHints;
            anchorHints: Gdk.AnchorHints;
            attach_widget: Widget;
            attachWidget: Widget;
            menu_type_hint: Gdk.WindowTypeHint;
            menuTypeHint: Gdk.WindowTypeHint;
            monitor: number;
            rect_anchor_dx: number;
            rectAnchorDx: number;
            rect_anchor_dy: number;
            rectAnchorDy: number;
            reserve_toggle_size: boolean;
            reserveToggleSize: boolean;
            tearoff_state: boolean;
            tearoffState: boolean;
            tearoff_title: string;
            tearoffTitle: string;
        }
    }

    /**
     * A {@link Gtk.Menu} is a {@link Gtk.MenuShell} that implements a drop down menu
     * consisting of a list of {@link Gtk.MenuItem} objects which can be navigated
     * and activated by the user to perform application functions.
     * 
     * A {@link Gtk.Menu} is most commonly dropped down by activating a
     * {@link Gtk.MenuItem} in a {@link Gtk.MenuBar} or popped up by activating a
     * {@link Gtk.MenuItem} in another {@link Gtk.Menu}.
     * 
     * A {@link Gtk.Menu} can also be popped up by activating a {@link Gtk.ComboBox}.
     * Other composite widgets such as the {@link Gtk.Notebook} can pop up a
     * {@link Gtk.Menu} as well.
     * 
     * Applications can display a {@link Gtk.Menu} as a popup menu by calling the
     * `gtk_menu_popup()` function.  The example below shows how an application
     * can pop up a menu when the 3rd mouse button is pressed.
     * 
     * ## Connecting the popup signal handler.
     * 
     * 
     * ```c
     *   // connect our handler which will popup the menu
     *   g_signal_connect_swapped (window, "button_press_event",
     * G_CALLBACK (my_popup_handler), menu);
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * ## Signal handler which displays a popup menu.
     * 
     * 
     * ```c
     * static gint
     * my_popup_handler (GtkWidget *widget, GdkEvent *event)
     * {
     *   GtkMenu *menu;
     *   GdkEventButton *event_button;
     * 
     *   g_return_val_if_fail (widget != NULL, FALSE);
     *   g_return_val_if_fail (GTK_IS_MENU (widget), FALSE);
     *   g_return_val_if_fail (event != NULL, FALSE);
     * 
     *   // The "widget" is the menu that was supplied when
     *   // `g_signal_connect_swapped()` was called.
     *   menu = GTK_MENU (widget);
     * 
     *   if (event->type == GDK_BUTTON_PRESS)
     *     {
     *       event_button = (GdkEventButton *) event;
     *       if (event_button->button == GDK_BUTTON_SECONDARY)
     *         {
     *           gtk_menu_popup (menu, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL,
     *                           event_button->button, event_button->time);
     *           return TRUE;
     *         }
     *     }
     * 
     *   return FALSE;
     * }
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * # CSS nodes
     * 
     * 
     * ```
     * menu
     * ├── arrow.top
     * ├── <child>
     * ┊
     * ├── <child>
     * ╰── arrow.bottom
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * The main CSS node of GtkMenu has name menu, and there are two subnodes
     * with name arrow, for scrolling menu arrows. These subnodes get the
     * .top and .bottom style classes.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class Menu extends MenuShell implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<Menu>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * The accel group holding accelerators for the menu.
         * @since 2.14
         */
        get accel_group(): AccelGroup;
        set accel_group(val: AccelGroup);

        /**
         * The accel group holding accelerators for the menu.
         * @since 2.14
         */
        get accelGroup(): AccelGroup;
        set accelGroup(val: AccelGroup);

        /**
         * An accel path used to conveniently construct accel paths of child items.
         * @since 2.14
         * @default null
         */
        get accel_path(): string;
        set accel_path(val: string);

        /**
         * An accel path used to conveniently construct accel paths of child items.
         * @since 2.14
         * @default null
         */
        get accelPath(): string;
        set accelPath(val: string);

        /**
         * The index of the currently selected menu item, or -1 if no
         * menu item is selected.
         * @since 2.14
         * @default -1
         */
        get active(): number;
        set active(val: number);

        /**
         * Positioning hints for aligning the menu relative to a rectangle.
         * 
         * These hints determine how the menu should be positioned in the case that
         * the menu would fall off-screen if placed in its ideal position.
         * 
         * ![](popup-flip.png)
         * 
         * For example, {@link Gdk.AnchorHints.FLIP_Y} will replace {@link Gdk.Gravity.NORTH_WEST} with
         * {@link Gdk.Gravity.SOUTH_WEST} and vice versa if the menu extends beyond the
         * bottom edge of the monitor.
         * 
         * See gtk_menu_popup_at_rect (), gtk_menu_popup_at_widget (),
         * gtk_menu_popup_at_pointer (), {@link Gtk.Menu.rect_anchor_dx},
         * {@link Gtk.Menu.rect_anchor_dy}, {@link Gtk.Menu.menu_type_hint}, and {@link Gtk.Menu.SignalSignatures.popped_up | Gtk.Menu::popped-up}.
         * @since 3.22
         * @default Gdk.AnchorHints.FLIP_X | Gdk.AnchorHints.FLIP_Y | Gdk.AnchorHints.SLIDE_X | Gdk.AnchorHints.SLIDE_Y | Gdk.AnchorHints.RESIZE_X | Gdk.AnchorHints.RESIZE_Y
         */
        get anchor_hints(): Gdk.AnchorHints;
        set anchor_hints(val: Gdk.AnchorHints);

        /**
         * Positioning hints for aligning the menu relative to a rectangle.
         * 
         * These hints determine how the menu should be positioned in the case that
         * the menu would fall off-screen if placed in its ideal position.
         * 
         * ![](popup-flip.png)
         * 
         * For example, {@link Gdk.AnchorHints.FLIP_Y} will replace {@link Gdk.Gravity.NORTH_WEST} with
         * {@link Gdk.Gravity.SOUTH_WEST} and vice versa if the menu extends beyond the
         * bottom edge of the monitor.
         * 
         * See gtk_menu_popup_at_rect (), gtk_menu_popup_at_widget (),
         * gtk_menu_popup_at_pointer (), {@link Gtk.Menu.rect_anchor_dx},
         * {@link Gtk.Menu.rect_anchor_dy}, {@link Gtk.Menu.menu_type_hint}, and {@link Gtk.Menu.SignalSignatures.popped_up | Gtk.Menu::popped-up}.
         * @since 3.22
         * @default Gdk.AnchorHints.FLIP_X | Gdk.AnchorHints.FLIP_Y | Gdk.AnchorHints.SLIDE_X | Gdk.AnchorHints.SLIDE_Y | Gdk.AnchorHints.RESIZE_X | Gdk.AnchorHints.RESIZE_Y
         */
        get anchorHints(): Gdk.AnchorHints;
        set anchorHints(val: Gdk.AnchorHints);

        /**
         * The widget the menu is attached to. Setting this property attaches
         * the menu without a {@link Gtk.MenuDetachFunc}. If you need to use a detacher,
         * use `gtk_menu_attach_to_widget()` directly.
         * @since 2.14
         */
        get attach_widget(): Widget;
        set attach_widget(val: Widget);

        /**
         * The widget the menu is attached to. Setting this property attaches
         * the menu without a {@link Gtk.MenuDetachFunc}. If you need to use a detacher,
         * use `gtk_menu_attach_to_widget()` directly.
         * @since 2.14
         */
        get attachWidget(): Widget;
        set attachWidget(val: Widget);

        /**
         * The {@link Gdk.WindowTypeHint} to use for the menu's {@link Gdk.Window}.
         * 
         * See gtk_menu_popup_at_rect (), gtk_menu_popup_at_widget (),
         * gtk_menu_popup_at_pointer (), {@link Gtk.Menu.anchor_hints},
         * {@link Gtk.Menu.rect_anchor_dx}, {@link Gtk.Menu.rect_anchor_dy}, and {@link Gtk.Menu.SignalSignatures.popped_up | Gtk.Menu::popped-up}.
         * @since 3.22
         * @default Gdk.WindowTypeHint.POPUP_MENU
         */
        get menu_type_hint(): Gdk.WindowTypeHint;
        set menu_type_hint(val: Gdk.WindowTypeHint);

        /**
         * The {@link Gdk.WindowTypeHint} to use for the menu's {@link Gdk.Window}.
         * 
         * See gtk_menu_popup_at_rect (), gtk_menu_popup_at_widget (),
         * gtk_menu_popup_at_pointer (), {@link Gtk.Menu.anchor_hints},
         * {@link Gtk.Menu.rect_anchor_dx}, {@link Gtk.Menu.rect_anchor_dy}, and {@link Gtk.Menu.SignalSignatures.popped_up | Gtk.Menu::popped-up}.
         * @since 3.22
         * @default Gdk.WindowTypeHint.POPUP_MENU
         */
        get menuTypeHint(): Gdk.WindowTypeHint;
        set menuTypeHint(val: Gdk.WindowTypeHint);

        /**
         * The monitor the menu will be popped up on.
         * @since 2.14
         * @default -1
         */
        get monitor(): number;
        set monitor(val: number);

        /**
         * Horizontal offset to apply to the menu, i.e. the rectangle or widget
         * anchor.
         * 
         * See gtk_menu_popup_at_rect (), gtk_menu_popup_at_widget (),
         * gtk_menu_popup_at_pointer (), {@link Gtk.Menu.anchor_hints},
         * {@link Gtk.Menu.rect_anchor_dy}, {@link Gtk.Menu.menu_type_hint}, and {@link Gtk.Menu.SignalSignatures.popped_up | Gtk.Menu::popped-up}.
         * @since 3.22
         * @default 0
         */
        get rect_anchor_dx(): number;
        set rect_anchor_dx(val: number);

        /**
         * Horizontal offset to apply to the menu, i.e. the rectangle or widget
         * anchor.
         * 
         * See gtk_menu_popup_at_rect (), gtk_menu_popup_at_widget (),
         * gtk_menu_popup_at_pointer (), {@link Gtk.Menu.anchor_hints},
         * {@link Gtk.Menu.rect_anchor_dy}, {@link Gtk.Menu.menu_type_hint}, and {@link Gtk.Menu.SignalSignatures.popped_up | Gtk.Menu::popped-up}.
         * @since 3.22
         * @default 0
         */
        get rectAnchorDx(): number;
        set rectAnchorDx(val: number);

        /**
         * Vertical offset to apply to the menu, i.e. the rectangle or widget anchor.
         * 
         * See gtk_menu_popup_at_rect (), gtk_menu_popup_at_widget (),
         * gtk_menu_popup_at_pointer (), {@link Gtk.Menu.anchor_hints},
         * {@link Gtk.Menu.rect_anchor_dx}, {@link Gtk.Menu.menu_type_hint}, and {@link Gtk.Menu.SignalSignatures.popped_up | Gtk.Menu::popped-up}.
         * @since 3.22
         * @default 0
         */
        get rect_anchor_dy(): number;
        set rect_anchor_dy(val: number);

        /**
         * Vertical offset to apply to the menu, i.e. the rectangle or widget anchor.
         * 
         * See gtk_menu_popup_at_rect (), gtk_menu_popup_at_widget (),
         * gtk_menu_popup_at_pointer (), {@link Gtk.Menu.anchor_hints},
         * {@link Gtk.Menu.rect_anchor_dx}, {@link Gtk.Menu.menu_type_hint}, and {@link Gtk.Menu.SignalSignatures.popped_up | Gtk.Menu::popped-up}.
         * @since 3.22
         * @default 0
         */
        get rectAnchorDy(): number;
        set rectAnchorDy(val: number);

        /**
         * A boolean that indicates whether the menu reserves space for
         * toggles and icons, regardless of their actual presence.
         * 
         * This property should only be changed from its default value
         * for special-purposes such as tabular menus. Regular menus that
         * are connected to a menu bar or context menus should reserve
         * toggle space for consistency.
         * @since 2.18
         * @default true
         */
        get reserve_toggle_size(): boolean;
        set reserve_toggle_size(val: boolean);

        /**
         * A boolean that indicates whether the menu reserves space for
         * toggles and icons, regardless of their actual presence.
         * 
         * This property should only be changed from its default value
         * for special-purposes such as tabular menus. Regular menus that
         * are connected to a menu bar or context menus should reserve
         * toggle space for consistency.
         * @since 2.18
         * @default true
         */
        get reserveToggleSize(): boolean;
        set reserveToggleSize(val: boolean);

        /**
         * A boolean that indicates whether the menu is torn-off.
         * @since 2.6
         * @deprecated since 3.10
         * @default false
         */
        get tearoff_state(): boolean;
        set tearoff_state(val: boolean);

        /**
         * A boolean that indicates whether the menu is torn-off.
         * @since 2.6
         * @deprecated since 3.10
         * @default false
         */
        get tearoffState(): boolean;
        set tearoffState(val: boolean);

        /**
         * A title that may be displayed by the window manager when this
         * menu is torn-off.
         * @deprecated since 3.10
         * @default null
         */
        get tearoff_title(): string;
        set tearoff_title(val: string);

        /**
         * A title that may be displayed by the window manager when this
         * menu is torn-off.
         * @deprecated since 3.10
         * @default null
         */
        get tearoffTitle(): string;
        set tearoffTitle(val: string);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: Menu.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        menu_shell: MenuShell;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<Menu.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): Menu;

        static new_from_model(model: Gio.MenuModel): Menu;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof Menu.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Menu.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof Menu.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Menu.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof Menu.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<Menu.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Static methods
        /**
         * Returns a list of the menus which are attached to this widget.
         * This list is owned by GTK+ and must not be modified.
         * @param widget a {@link Gtk.Widget}
         */
        static get_for_attach_widget(widget: Widget): Widget[];

        // Methods
        /**
         * Adds a new {@link Gtk.MenuItem} to a (table) menu. The number of “cells” that
         * an item will occupy is specified by `left_attach`, `right_attach`,
         * `top_attach` and `bottom_attach`. These each represent the leftmost,
         * rightmost, uppermost and lower column and row numbers of the table.
         * (Columns and rows are indexed from zero).
         * 
         * Note that this function is not related to `gtk_menu_detach()`.
         * @param child a {@link Gtk.MenuItem}
         * @param left_attach The column number to attach the left side of the item to
         * @param right_attach The column number to attach the right side of the item to
         * @param top_attach The row number to attach the top of the item to
         * @param bottom_attach The row number to attach the bottom of the item to
         */
        attach(child: Widget, left_attach: number, right_attach: number, top_attach: number, bottom_attach: number): void;

        /**
         * Attaches the menu to the widget and provides a callback function
         * that will be invoked when the menu calls `gtk_menu_detach()` during
         * its destruction.
         * 
         * If the menu is attached to the widget then it will be destroyed
         * when the widget is destroyed, as if it was a child widget.
         * An attached menu will also move between screens correctly if the
         * widgets moves between screens.
         * @param attach_widget the {@link Gtk.Widget} that the menu will be attached to
         * @param detacher the user supplied callback function             that will be called when the menu calls `gtk_menu_detach()`
         */
        attach_to_widget(attach_widget: Widget, detacher: MenuDetachFunc | null): void;

        /**
         * Detaches the menu from the widget to which it had been attached.
         * This function will call the callback function, `detacher`, provided
         * when the `gtk_menu_attach_to_widget()` function was called.
         */
        detach(): void;

        /**
         * Gets the {@link Gtk.AccelGroup} which holds global accelerators for the
         * menu. See `gtk_menu_set_accel_group()`.
         * @returns the {@link Gtk.AccelGroup} associated with the menu
         */
        get_accel_group(): AccelGroup;

        /**
         * Retrieves the accelerator path set on the menu.
         * @returns the accelerator path set on the menu.
         */
        get_accel_path(): string;

        /**
         * Returns the selected menu item from the menu.  This is used by the
         * {@link Gtk.ComboBox}.
         * @returns the {@link Gtk.MenuItem} that was last selected          in the menu.  If a selection has not yet been made, the          first menu item is selected.
         */
        get_active(): Widget;

        /**
         * Returns the {@link Gtk.Widget} that the menu is attached to.
         * @returns the {@link Gtk.Widget} that the menu is attached to
         */
        get_attach_widget(): Widget;

        /**
         * Retrieves the number of the monitor on which to show the menu.
         * @returns the number of the monitor on which the menu should    be popped up or -1, if no monitor has been set
         */
        get_monitor(): number;

        /**
         * Returns whether the menu reserves space for toggles and
         * icons, regardless of their actual presence.
         * @returns Whether the menu reserves toggle space
         */
        get_reserve_toggle_size(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns whether the menu is torn off.
         * See `gtk_menu_set_tearoff_state()`.
         * @returns `true` if the menu is currently torn off.
         */
        get_tearoff_state(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the title of the menu. See `gtk_menu_set_title()`.
         * @returns the title of the menu, or `null` if the menu     has no title set on it. This string is owned by GTK+     and should not be modified or freed.
         */
        get_title(): string;

        /**
         * Places `menu` on the given monitor.
         * @param monitor the monitor to place the menu on
         */
        place_on_monitor(monitor: Gdk.Monitor): void;

        /**
         * Removes the menu from the screen.
         */
        popdown(): void;

        /**
         * Displays a menu and makes it available for selection.
         * 
         * Applications can use this function to display context-sensitive
         * menus, and will typically supply `null` for the `parent_menu_shell`,
         * `parent_menu_item`, `func` and `data` parameters. The default menu
         * positioning function will position the menu at the current mouse
         * cursor position.
         * 
         * The `button` parameter should be the mouse button pressed to initiate
         * the menu popup. If the menu popup was initiated by something other
         * than a mouse button press, such as a mouse button release or a keypress,
         * `button` should be 0.
         * 
         * The `activate_time` parameter is used to conflict-resolve initiation
         * of concurrent requests for mouse/keyboard grab requests. To function
         * properly, this needs to be the timestamp of the user event (such as
         * a mouse click or key press) that caused the initiation of the popup.
         * Only if no such event is available, `gtk_get_current_event_time()` can
         * be used instead.
         * 
         * Note that this function does not work very well on GDK backends that
         * do not have global coordinates, such as Wayland or Mir. You should
         * probably use one of the gtk_menu_popup_at_ variants, which do not
         * have this problem.
         * @param parent_menu_shell the menu shell containing the     triggering menu item, or `null`
         * @param parent_menu_item the menu item whose activation     triggered the popup, or `null`
         * @param func a user supplied function used to position     the menu, or `null`
         * @param button the mouse button which was pressed to initiate the event.
         * @param activate_time the time at which the activation event occurred.
         */
        popup(parent_menu_shell: Widget | null, parent_menu_item: Widget | null, func: MenuPositionFunc | null, button: number, activate_time: number): void;

        /**
         * Displays `menu` and makes it available for selection.
         * 
         * See gtk_menu_popup_at_widget () to pop up a menu at a widget.
         * gtk_menu_popup_at_rect () also allows you to position a menu at an arbitrary
         * rectangle.
         * 
         * `menu` will be positioned at the pointer associated with `trigger_event`.
         * 
         * Properties that influence the behaviour of this function are
         * {@link Gtk.Menu.anchor_hints}, {@link Gtk.Menu.rect_anchor_dx}, {@link Gtk.Menu.rect_anchor_dy}, and
         * {@link Gtk.Menu.menu_type_hint}. Connect to the {@link Gtk.Menu.SignalSignatures.popped_up | Gtk.Menu::popped-up} signal to find
         * out how it was actually positioned.
         * @param trigger_event the {@link Gdk.Event} that initiated this request or                 `null` if it's the current event
         */
        popup_at_pointer(trigger_event: Gdk.Event | null): void;

        /**
         * Displays `menu` and makes it available for selection.
         * 
         * See gtk_menu_popup_at_widget () and gtk_menu_popup_at_pointer (), which
         * handle more common cases for popping up menus.
         * 
         * `menu` will be positioned at `rect`, aligning their anchor points. `rect` is
         * relative to the top-left corner of `rect_window`. `rect_anchor` and
         * `menu_anchor` determine anchor points on `rect` and `menu` to pin together.
         * `menu` can optionally be offset by {@link Gtk.Menu.rect_anchor_dx} and
         * {@link Gtk.Menu.rect_anchor_dy}.
         * 
         * Anchors should be specified under the assumption that the text direction is
         * left-to-right; they will be flipped horizontally automatically if the text
         * direction is right-to-left.
         * 
         * Other properties that influence the behaviour of this function are
         * {@link Gtk.Menu.anchor_hints} and {@link Gtk.Menu.menu_type_hint}. Connect to the
         * {@link Gtk.Menu.SignalSignatures.popped_up | Gtk.Menu::popped-up} signal to find out how it was actually positioned.
         * @param rect_window the {@link Gdk.Window} `rect` is relative to
         * @param rect the {@link Gdk.Rectangle} to align `menu` with
         * @param rect_anchor the point on `rect` to align with `menu`'s anchor point
         * @param menu_anchor the point on `menu` to align with `rect`'s anchor point
         * @param trigger_event the {@link Gdk.Event} that initiated this request or                 `null` if it's the current event
         */
        popup_at_rect(rect_window: Gdk.Window, rect: Gdk.Rectangle, rect_anchor: Gdk.Gravity, menu_anchor: Gdk.Gravity, trigger_event: Gdk.Event | null): void;

        /**
         * Displays `menu` and makes it available for selection.
         * 
         * See gtk_menu_popup_at_pointer () to pop up a menu at the master pointer.
         * gtk_menu_popup_at_rect () also allows you to position a menu at an arbitrary
         * rectangle.
         * 
         * ![](popup-anchors.png)
         * 
         * `menu` will be positioned at `widget`, aligning their anchor points.
         * `widget_anchor` and `menu_anchor` determine anchor points on `widget` and `menu`
         * to pin together. `menu` can optionally be offset by {@link Gtk.Menu.rect_anchor_dx}
         * and {@link Gtk.Menu.rect_anchor_dy}.
         * 
         * Anchors should be specified under the assumption that the text direction is
         * left-to-right; they will be flipped horizontally automatically if the text
         * direction is right-to-left.
         * 
         * Other properties that influence the behaviour of this function are
         * {@link Gtk.Menu.anchor_hints} and {@link Gtk.Menu.menu_type_hint}. Connect to the
         * {@link Gtk.Menu.SignalSignatures.popped_up | Gtk.Menu::popped-up} signal to find out how it was actually positioned.
         * @param widget the {@link Gtk.Widget} to align `menu` with
         * @param widget_anchor the point on `widget` to align with `menu`'s anchor point
         * @param menu_anchor the point on `menu` to align with `widget`'s anchor point
         * @param trigger_event the {@link Gdk.Event} that initiated this request or                 `null` if it's the current event
         */
        popup_at_widget(widget: Widget, widget_anchor: Gdk.Gravity, menu_anchor: Gdk.Gravity, trigger_event: Gdk.Event | null): void;

        /**
         * Displays a menu and makes it available for selection.
         * 
         * Applications can use this function to display context-sensitive menus,
         * and will typically supply `null` for the `parent_menu_shell`,
         * `parent_menu_item`, `func`, `data` and `destroy` parameters. The default
         * menu positioning function will position the menu at the current position
         * of `device` (or its corresponding pointer).
         * 
         * The `button` parameter should be the mouse button pressed to initiate
         * the menu popup. If the menu popup was initiated by something other than
         * a mouse button press, such as a mouse button release or a keypress,
         * `button` should be 0.
         * 
         * The `activate_time` parameter is used to conflict-resolve initiation of
         * concurrent requests for mouse/keyboard grab requests. To function
         * properly, this needs to be the time stamp of the user event (such as
         * a mouse click or key press) that caused the initiation of the popup.
         * Only if no such event is available, `gtk_get_current_event_time()` can
         * be used instead.
         * 
         * Note that this function does not work very well on GDK backends that
         * do not have global coordinates, such as Wayland or Mir. You should
         * probably use one of the gtk_menu_popup_at_ variants, which do not
         * have this problem.
         * @param device a {@link Gdk.Device}
         * @param parent_menu_shell the menu shell containing the triggering     menu item, or `null`
         * @param parent_menu_item the menu item whose activation triggered     the popup, or `null`
         * @param func a user supplied function used to position the menu,     or `null`
         * @param button the mouse button which was pressed to initiate the event
         * @param activate_time the time at which the activation event occurred
         */
        popup_for_device(device: Gdk.Device | null, parent_menu_shell: Widget | null, parent_menu_item: Widget | null, func: MenuPositionFunc | null, button: number, activate_time: number): void;

        /**
         * Moves `child` to a new `position` in the list of `menu`
         * children.
         * @param child the {@link Gtk.MenuItem} to move
         * @param position the new position to place `child`.     Positions are numbered from 0 to n - 1
         */
        reorder_child(child: Widget, position: number): void;

        /**
         * Repositions the menu according to its position function.
         */
        reposition(): void;

        /**
         * Set the {@link Gtk.AccelGroup} which holds global accelerators for the
         * menu.  This accelerator group needs to also be added to all windows
         * that this menu is being used in with `gtk_window_add_accel_group()`,
         * in order for those windows to support all the accelerators
         * contained in this group.
         * @param accel_group the {@link Gtk.AccelGroup} to be associated               with the menu.
         */
        set_accel_group(accel_group: AccelGroup | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets an accelerator path for this menu from which accelerator paths
         * for its immediate children, its menu items, can be constructed.
         * The main purpose of this function is to spare the programmer the
         * inconvenience of having to call `gtk_menu_item_set_accel_path()` on
         * each menu item that should support runtime user changable accelerators.
         * Instead, by just calling `gtk_menu_set_accel_path()` on their parent,
         * each menu item of this menu, that contains a label describing its
         * purpose, automatically gets an accel path assigned.
         * 
         * For example, a menu containing menu items “New” and “Exit”, will, after
         * `gtk_menu_set_accel_path (menu, "<Gnumeric-Sheet>/File");` has been
         * called, assign its items the accel paths: `"<Gnumeric-Sheet>/File/New"`
         * and `"<Gnumeric-Sheet>/File/Exit"`.
         * 
         * Assigning accel paths to menu items then enables the user to change
         * their accelerators at runtime. More details about accelerator paths
         * and their default setups can be found at `gtk_accel_map_add_entry()`.
         * 
         * Note that `accel_path` string will be stored in a {@link GLib.Quark}. Therefore,
         * if you pass a static string, you can save some memory by interning
         * it first with `g_intern_static_string()`.
         * @param accel_path a valid accelerator path, or `null` to unset the path
         */
        set_accel_path(accel_path: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Selects the specified menu item within the menu.  This is used by
         * the {@link Gtk.ComboBox} and should not be used by anyone else.
         * @param index the index of the menu item to select.  Index values are         from 0 to n-1
         */
        set_active(index: number): void;

        /**
         * Informs GTK+ on which monitor a menu should be popped up.
         * See `gdk_monitor_get_geometry()`.
         * 
         * This function should be called from a {@link Gtk.MenuPositionFunc}
         * if the menu should not appear on the same monitor as the pointer.
         * This information can’t be reliably inferred from the coordinates
         * returned by a {@link Gtk.MenuPositionFunc}, since, for very long menus,
         * these coordinates may extend beyond the monitor boundaries or even
         * the screen boundaries.
         * @param monitor_num the number of the monitor on which the menu should    be popped up
         */
        set_monitor(monitor_num: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the menu should reserve space for drawing toggles
         * or icons, regardless of their actual presence.
         * @param reserve_toggle_size whether to reserve size for toggles
         */
        set_reserve_toggle_size(reserve_toggle_size: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gdk.Screen} on which the menu will be displayed.
         * @param screen a {@link Gdk.Screen}, or `null` if the screen should be          determined by the widget the menu is attached to
         */
        set_screen(screen: Gdk.Screen | null): void;

        /**
         * Changes the tearoff state of the menu.  A menu is normally
         * displayed as drop down menu which persists as long as the menu is
         * active.  It can also be displayed as a tearoff menu which persists
         * until it is closed or reattached.
         * @param torn_off If `true`, menu is displayed as a tearoff menu.
         */
        set_tearoff_state(torn_off: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the title string for the menu.
         * 
         * The title is displayed when the menu is shown as a tearoff
         * menu. If `title` is `null`, the menu will see if it is attached
         * to a parent menu item, and if so it will try to use the same
         * text as that menu item’s label.
         * @param title a string containing the title for the menu, or `null` to   inherit the title of the parent menu item, if any
         */
        set_title(title: string | null): void;
    }


    namespace MenuAccessible {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends MenuShellAccessible.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-layer": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-mdi-zorder": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-help-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-hypertext-nlinks": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption-object": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-summary": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends MenuShellAccessible.ConstructorProps, Atk.Component.ConstructorProps, Atk.Selection.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class MenuAccessible extends MenuShellAccessible implements Atk.Component, Atk.Selection {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<MenuAccessible>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: MenuAccessible.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<MenuAccessible.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof MenuAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, MenuAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof MenuAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, MenuAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof MenuAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<MenuAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        /**
         * Adds the specified accessible child of the object to the
         * object's selection.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the child index.
         * @returns TRUE if success, FALSE otherwise.
         */
        add_selection(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Clears the selection in the object so that no children in the object
         * are selected.
         * @returns TRUE if success, FALSE otherwise.
         */
        clear_selection(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the number of accessible children currently selected.
         * Note: callers should not rely on `null` or on a zero value for
         * indication of whether AtkSelectionIface is implemented, they should
         * use type checking/interface checking macros or the
         * `atk_get_accessible_value()` convenience method.
         * @returns a gint representing the number of items selected, or 0 if `selection` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_selection_count(): number;

        /**
         * Determines if the current child of this object is selected
         * Note: callers should not rely on `null` or on a zero value for
         * indication of whether AtkSelectionIface is implemented, they should
         * use type checking/interface checking macros or the
         * `atk_get_accessible_value()` convenience method.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the child index.
         * @returns a gboolean representing the specified child is selected, or 0 if `selection` does not implement this interface.
         */
        is_child_selected(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets a reference to the accessible object representing the specified
         * selected child of the object.
         * Note: callers should not rely on `null` or on a zero value for
         * indication of whether AtkSelectionIface is implemented, they should
         * use type checking/interface checking macros or the
         * `atk_get_accessible_value()` convenience method.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the index in the selection set.  (e.g. the ith selection as opposed to the ith child).
         * @returns an {@link Atk.Object} representing the selected accessible, or `null` if `selection` does not implement this interface.
         */
        ref_selection(i: number): Atk.Object | null;

        /**
         * Removes the specified child of the object from the object's selection.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the index in the selection set.  (e.g. the ith selection as opposed to the ith child).
         * @returns TRUE if success, FALSE otherwise.
         */
        remove_selection(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Causes every child of the object to be selected if the object
         * supports multiple selections.
         * @returns TRUE if success, FALSE otherwise.
         */
        select_all_selection(): boolean;

        /**
         * Adds the specified accessible child of the object to the
         * object's selection.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the child index.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add_selection(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Clears the selection in the object so that no children in the object
         * are selected.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_clear_selection(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the number of accessible children currently selected.
         * Note: callers should not rely on `null` or on a zero value for
         * indication of whether AtkSelectionIface is implemented, they should
         * use type checking/interface checking macros or the
         * `atk_get_accessible_value()` convenience method.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_selection_count(): number;

        /**
         * Determines if the current child of this object is selected
         * Note: callers should not rely on `null` or on a zero value for
         * indication of whether AtkSelectionIface is implemented, they should
         * use type checking/interface checking macros or the
         * `atk_get_accessible_value()` convenience method.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the child index.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_is_child_selected(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets a reference to the accessible object representing the specified
         * selected child of the object.
         * Note: callers should not rely on `null` or on a zero value for
         * indication of whether AtkSelectionIface is implemented, they should
         * use type checking/interface checking macros or the
         * `atk_get_accessible_value()` convenience method.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the index in the selection set.  (e.g. the ith selection as opposed to the ith child).
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_ref_selection(i: number): Atk.Object | null;

        /**
         * Removes the specified child of the object from the object's selection.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the index in the selection set.  (e.g. the ith selection as opposed to the ith child).
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_remove_selection(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Causes every child of the object to be selected if the object
         * supports multiple selections.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_select_all_selection(): boolean;

        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_selection_changed(): void;
    }


    namespace MenuBar {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends MenuShell.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::child-pack-direction": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::pack-direction": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::take-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends MenuShell.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {
            child_pack_direction: PackDirection;
            childPackDirection: PackDirection;
            pack_direction: PackDirection;
            packDirection: PackDirection;
        }
    }

    /**
     * The {@link Gtk.MenuBar} is a subclass of {@link Gtk.MenuShell} which contains one or
     * more `GtkMenuItems`. The result is a standard menu bar which can hold
     * many menu items.
     * 
     * # CSS nodes
     * 
     * GtkMenuBar has a single CSS node with name menubar.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class MenuBar extends MenuShell implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<MenuBar>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * The child pack direction of the menubar. It determines how
         * the widgets contained in child menuitems are arranged.
         * @since 2.8
         * @default Gtk.PackDirection.LTR
         */
        get child_pack_direction(): PackDirection;
        set child_pack_direction(val: PackDirection);

        /**
         * The child pack direction of the menubar. It determines how
         * the widgets contained in child menuitems are arranged.
         * @since 2.8
         * @default Gtk.PackDirection.LTR
         */
        get childPackDirection(): PackDirection;
        set childPackDirection(val: PackDirection);

        /**
         * The pack direction of the menubar. It determines how
         * menuitems are arranged in the menubar.
         * @since 2.8
         * @default Gtk.PackDirection.LTR
         */
        get pack_direction(): PackDirection;
        set pack_direction(val: PackDirection);

        /**
         * The pack direction of the menubar. It determines how
         * menuitems are arranged in the menubar.
         * @since 2.8
         * @default Gtk.PackDirection.LTR
         */
        get packDirection(): PackDirection;
        set packDirection(val: PackDirection);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: MenuBar.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        menu_shell: MenuShell;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<MenuBar.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): MenuBar;

        static new_from_model(model: Gio.MenuModel): MenuBar;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof MenuBar.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, MenuBar.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof MenuBar.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, MenuBar.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof MenuBar.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<MenuBar.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Retrieves the current child pack direction of the menubar.
         * See `gtk_menu_bar_set_child_pack_direction()`.
         * @returns the child pack direction
         */
        get_child_pack_direction(): PackDirection;

        /**
         * Retrieves the current pack direction of the menubar.
         * See `gtk_menu_bar_set_pack_direction()`.
         * @returns the pack direction
         */
        get_pack_direction(): PackDirection;

        /**
         * Sets how widgets should be packed inside the children of a menubar.
         * @param child_pack_dir a new {@link Gtk.PackDirection}
         */
        set_child_pack_direction(child_pack_dir: PackDirection): void;

        /**
         * Sets how items should be packed inside a menubar.
         * @param pack_dir a new {@link Gtk.PackDirection}
         */
        set_pack_direction(pack_dir: PackDirection): void;
    }


    namespace MenuButton {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends ToggleButton.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::align-widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::direction": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::menu-model": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::popover": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::popup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-popover": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::active": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::draw-indicator": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::inconsistent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::always-show-image": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::image": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::image-position": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::label": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::relief": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-stock": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-underline": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::xalign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::yalign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends ToggleButton.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Actionable.ConstructorProps, Activatable.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {
            align_widget: Container | null;
            alignWidget: Container | null;
            direction: ArrowType;
            menu_model: Gio.MenuModel | null;
            menuModel: Gio.MenuModel | null;
            popover: Popover | null;
            popup: Menu | null;
            use_popover: boolean;
            usePopover: boolean;
        }
    }

    /**
     * The {@link Gtk.MenuButton} widget is used to display a popup when clicked on.
     * This popup can be provided either as a {@link Gtk.Menu}, a {@link Gtk.Popover} or an
     * abstract {@link Gio.MenuModel}.
     * 
     * The {@link Gtk.MenuButton} widget can hold any valid child widget. That is, it
     * can hold almost any other standard {@link Gtk.Widget}. The most commonly used
     * child is {@link Gtk.Image}. If no widget is explicitely added to the {@link Gtk.MenuButton},
     * a {@link Gtk.Image} is automatically created, using an arrow image oriented
     * according to {@link Gtk.MenuButton.direction} or the generic “open-menu-symbolic”
     * icon if the direction is not set.
     * 
     * The positioning of the popup is determined by the {@link Gtk.MenuButton.direction}
     * property of the menu button.
     * 
     * For menus, the {@link Gtk.Widget.halign} and {@link Gtk.Widget.valign} properties of the
     * menu are also taken into account. For example, when the direction is
     * {@link Gtk.ArrowType.DOWN} and the horizontal alignment is {@link Gtk.Align.START}, the
     * menu will be positioned below the button, with the starting edge
     * (depending on the text direction) of the menu aligned with the starting
     * edge of the button. If there is not enough space below the button, the
     * menu is popped up above the button instead. If the alignment would move
     * part of the menu offscreen, it is “pushed in”.
     * 
     * ## Direction = Down
     * 
     * - halign = start
     * 
     *     ![](down-start.png)
     * 
     * - halign = center
     * 
     *     ![](down-center.png)
     * 
     * - halign = end
     * 
     *     ![](down-end.png)
     * 
     * ## Direction = Up
     * 
     * - halign = start
     * 
     *     ![](up-start.png)
     * 
     * - halign = center
     * 
     *     ![](up-center.png)
     * 
     * - halign = end
     * 
     *     ![](up-end.png)
     * 
     * ## Direction = Left
     * 
     * - valign = start
     * 
     *     ![](left-start.png)
     * 
     * - valign = center
     * 
     *     ![](left-center.png)
     * 
     * - valign = end
     * 
     *     ![](left-end.png)
     * 
     * ## Direction = Right
     * 
     * - valign = start
     * 
     *     ![](right-start.png)
     * 
     * - valign = center
     * 
     *     ![](right-center.png)
     * 
     * - valign = end
     * 
     *     ![](right-end.png)
     * 
     * # CSS nodes
     * 
     * GtkMenuButton has a single CSS node with name button. To differentiate
     * it from a plain {@link Gtk.Button}, it gets the .popup style class.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class MenuButton extends ToggleButton implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Actionable, Activatable, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<MenuButton>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * The {@link Gtk.Widget} to use to align the menu with.
         * @since 3.6
         */
        get align_widget(): Container | null;
        set align_widget(val: Container | null);

        /**
         * The {@link Gtk.Widget} to use to align the menu with.
         * @since 3.6
         */
        get alignWidget(): Container | null;
        set alignWidget(val: Container | null);

        /**
         * The {@link Gtk.ArrowType} representing the direction in which the
         * menu or popover will be popped out.
         * @since 3.6
         * @default Gtk.ArrowType.DOWN
         */
        get direction(): ArrowType;
        set direction(val: ArrowType);

        /**
         * The {@link Gio.MenuModel} from which the popup will be created.
         * Depending on the {@link Gtk.MenuButton.use_popover} property, that may
         * be a menu or a popover.
         * 
         * See `gtk_menu_button_set_menu_model()` for the interaction with the
         * {@link Gtk.MenuButton.popup} property.
         * @since 3.6
         */
        get menu_model(): Gio.MenuModel | null;
        set menu_model(val: Gio.MenuModel | null);

        /**
         * The {@link Gio.MenuModel} from which the popup will be created.
         * Depending on the {@link Gtk.MenuButton.use_popover} property, that may
         * be a menu or a popover.
         * 
         * See `gtk_menu_button_set_menu_model()` for the interaction with the
         * {@link Gtk.MenuButton.popup} property.
         * @since 3.6
         */
        get menuModel(): Gio.MenuModel | null;
        set menuModel(val: Gio.MenuModel | null);

        /**
         * The {@link Gtk.Popover} that will be popped up when the button is clicked.
         * @since 3.12
         */
        get popover(): Popover | null;
        set popover(val: Popover | null);

        /**
         * The {@link Gtk.Menu} that will be popped up when the button is clicked.
         * @since 3.6
         */
        get popup(): Menu | null;
        set popup(val: Menu | null);

        /**
         * Whether to construct a {@link Gtk.Popover} from the menu model,
         * or a {@link Gtk.Menu}.
         * @since 3.12
         * @default true
         */
        get use_popover(): boolean;
        set use_popover(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether to construct a {@link Gtk.Popover} from the menu model,
         * or a {@link Gtk.Menu}.
         * @since 3.12
         * @default true
         */
        get usePopover(): boolean;
        set usePopover(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: MenuButton.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<MenuButton.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): MenuButton;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof MenuButton.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, MenuButton.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof MenuButton.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, MenuButton.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof MenuButton.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<MenuButton.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Returns the parent {@link Gtk.Widget} to use to line up with menu.
         * @returns a {@link Gtk.Widget} value or `null`
         */
        get_align_widget(): Widget | null;

        /**
         * Returns the direction the popup will be pointing at when popped up.
         * @returns a {@link Gtk.ArrowType} value
         */
        get_direction(): ArrowType;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
    // Conflicted with Gtk.Widget.get_direction
        get_direction(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Returns the {@link Gio.MenuModel} used to generate the popup.
         * @returns a {@link Gio.MenuModel} or `null`
         */
        get_menu_model(): Gio.MenuModel | null;

        /**
         * Returns the {@link Gtk.Popover} that pops out of the button.
         * If the button is not using a {@link Gtk.Popover}, this function
         * returns `null`.
         * @returns a {@link Gtk.Popover} or `null`
         */
        get_popover(): Popover | null;

        /**
         * Returns the {@link Gtk.Menu} that pops out of the button.
         * If the button does not use a {@link Gtk.Menu}, this function
         * returns `null`.
         * @returns a {@link Gtk.Menu} or `null`
         */
        get_popup(): Menu | null;

        /**
         * Returns whether a {@link Gtk.Popover} or a {@link Gtk.Menu} will be constructed
         * from the menu model.
         * @returns `true` if using a {@link Gtk.Popover}
         */
        get_use_popover(): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.Widget} to use to line the menu with when popped up.
         * Note that the `align_widget` must contain the {@link Gtk.MenuButton} itself.
         * 
         * Setting it to `null` means that the menu will be aligned with the
         * button itself.
         * 
         * Note that this property is only used with menus currently,
         * and not for popovers.
         * @param align_widget a {@link Gtk.Widget}
         */
        set_align_widget(align_widget: Widget | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the direction in which the popup will be popped up, as
         * well as changing the arrow’s direction. The child will not
         * be changed to an arrow if it was customized.
         * 
         * If the does not fit in the available space in the given direction,
         * GTK+ will its best to keep it inside the screen and fully visible.
         * 
         * If you pass {@link Gtk.ArrowType.NONE} for a `direction`, the popup will behave
         * as if you passed {@link Gtk.ArrowType.DOWN} (although you won’t see any arrows).
         * @param direction a {@link Gtk.ArrowType}
         */
        set_direction(direction: ArrowType): void;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
    // Conflicted with Gtk.Widget.set_direction
        set_direction(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gio.MenuModel} from which the popup will be constructed,
         * or `null` to dissociate any existing menu model and disable the button.
         * 
         * Depending on the value of {@link Gtk.MenuButton.use_popover}, either a
         * {@link Gtk.Menu} will be created with `gtk_menu_new_from_model()`, or a
         * {@link Gtk.Popover} with `gtk_popover_new_from_model()`. In either case,
         * actions will be connected as documented for these functions.
         * 
         * If {@link Gtk.MenuButton.popup} or {@link Gtk.MenuButton.popover} are already set, those
         * widgets are dissociated from the `menu_button`, and those properties are set
         * to `null`.
         * @param menu_model a {@link Gio.MenuModel}, or `null` to unset and disable the   button
         */
        set_menu_model(menu_model: Gio.MenuModel | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.Popover} that will be popped up when the `menu_button` is clicked,
         * or `null` to dissociate any existing popover and disable the button.
         * 
         * If {@link Gtk.MenuButton.menu_model} or {@link Gtk.MenuButton.popup} are set, those objects
         * are dissociated from the `menu_button`, and those properties are set to `null`.
         * @param popover a {@link Gtk.Popover}, or `null` to unset and disable the button
         */
        set_popover(popover: Widget | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.Menu} that will be popped up when the `menu_button` is clicked, or
         * `null` to dissociate any existing menu and disable the button.
         * 
         * If {@link Gtk.MenuButton.menu_model} or {@link Gtk.MenuButton.popover} are set, those objects
         * are dissociated from the `menu_button`, and those properties are set to `null`.
         * @param menu a {@link Gtk.Menu}, or `null` to unset and disable the button
         */
        set_popup(menu: Widget | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether to construct a {@link Gtk.Popover} instead of {@link Gtk.Menu}
         * when `gtk_menu_button_set_menu_model()` is called. Note that
         * this property is only consulted when a new menu model is set.
         * @param use_popover `true` to construct a popover from the menu model
         */
        set_use_popover(use_popover: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Emits a {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.child_notify | Gtk.Widget::child-notify} signal for the
         * [child property][child-properties] `child_property`
         * on `widget`.
         * 
         * This is the analogue of `g_object_notify()` for child properties.
         * 
         * Also see `gtk_container_child_notify()`.
         * @param child_property the name of a child property installed on the                  class of `widget`’s parent
         */
        child_notify(child_property: string): void;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Gtk.Container.child_notify
        child_notify(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Returns whether the widget should grab focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
         * See `gtk_widget_set_focus_on_click()`.
         * @returns `true` if the widget should grab focus when it is clicked with               the mouse.
         */
        get_focus_on_click(): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets whether the widget should grab focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
         * Making mouse clicks not grab focus is useful in places like toolbars where
         * you don’t want the keyboard focus removed from the main area of the
         * application.
         * @param focus_on_click whether the widget should grab focus when clicked with the mouse
         */
        set_focus_on_click(focus_on_click: boolean): void;
    }


    namespace MenuButtonAccessible {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends ToggleButtonAccessible.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-layer": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-mdi-zorder": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-help-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-hypertext-nlinks": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption-object": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-summary": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends ToggleButtonAccessible.ConstructorProps, Atk.Action.ConstructorProps, Atk.Component.ConstructorProps, Atk.Image.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class MenuButtonAccessible extends ToggleButtonAccessible implements Atk.Action, Atk.Component, Atk.Image {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<MenuButtonAccessible>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: MenuButtonAccessible.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<MenuButtonAccessible.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof MenuButtonAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, MenuButtonAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof MenuButtonAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, MenuButtonAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof MenuButtonAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<MenuButtonAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;
    }


    namespace MenuItem {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Bin.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * Emitted when the item is activated.
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-first
             */
            activate: () => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when the item is activated, but also if the menu item has a
             * submenu. For normal applications, the relevant signal is
             * {@link Gtk.MenuItem.SignalSignatures.activate | Gtk.MenuItem::activate}.
             * @signal
             * @run-first
             */
            "activate-item": () => void;
            /**
             * @signal
             * @run-first
             */
            deselect: () => void;
            /**
             * @signal
             * @run-first
             */
            select: () => void;
            /**
             * @signal
             * @run-first
             */
            "toggle-size-allocate": (arg0: number) => void;
            /**
             * @signal
             * @run-first
             */
            "toggle-size-request": (arg0: null) => void;
            "notify::accel-path": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::label": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::right-justified": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::submenu": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-underline": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::action-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::action-target": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::related-action": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-action-appearance": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Bin.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Actionable.ConstructorProps, Activatable.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {
            accel_path: string | null;
            accelPath: string | null;
            label: string;
            right_justified: boolean;
            rightJustified: boolean;
            submenu: Menu | null;
            use_underline: boolean;
            useUnderline: boolean;
        }
    }

    /**
     * The {@link Gtk.MenuItem} widget and the derived widgets are the only valid
     * children for menus. Their function is to correctly handle highlighting,
     * alignment, events and submenus.
     * 
     * As a GtkMenuItem derives from {@link Gtk.Bin} it can hold any valid child widget,
     * although only a few are really useful.
     * 
     * By default, a GtkMenuItem sets a {@link Gtk.AccelLabel} as its child.
     * GtkMenuItem has direct functions to set the label and its mnemonic.
     * For more advanced label settings, you can fetch the child widget from the GtkBin.
     * 
     * An example for setting markup and accelerator on a MenuItem:
     * 
     * 
     * ```c
     * GtkWidget *menu_item = gtk_menu_item_new_with_label ("Example Menu Item");
     * 
     * GtkWidget *child = gtk_bin_get_child (GTK_BIN (menu_item));
     * gtk_label_set_markup (GTK_LABEL (child), "<i>new label</i> with <b>markup</b>");
     * gtk_accel_label_set_accel (GTK_ACCEL_LABEL (child), GDK_KEY_1, 0);
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * # GtkMenuItem as GtkBuildable
     * 
     * The GtkMenuItem implementation of the {@link Gtk.Buildable} interface supports
     * adding a submenu by specifying “submenu” as the “type” attribute of
     * a `<child>` element.
     * 
     * An example of UI definition fragment with submenus:
     * 
     * 
     * ```xml
     * <object class="GtkMenuItem">
     *   <child type="submenu">
     *     <object class="GtkMenu"/>
     *   </child>
     * </object>
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * # CSS nodes
     * 
     * 
     * ```
     * menuitem
     * ├── <child>
     * ╰── [arrow.right]
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * GtkMenuItem has a single CSS node with name menuitem. If the menuitem
     * has a submenu, it gets another CSS node with name arrow, which has
     * the .left or .right style class.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class MenuItem extends Bin implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Actionable, Activatable, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<MenuItem>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * Sets the accelerator path of the menu item, through which runtime
         * changes of the menu item's accelerator caused by the user can be
         * identified and saved to persistant storage.
         * @since 2.14
         * @default null
         */
        get accel_path(): string | null;
        set accel_path(val: string | null);

        /**
         * Sets the accelerator path of the menu item, through which runtime
         * changes of the menu item's accelerator caused by the user can be
         * identified and saved to persistant storage.
         * @since 2.14
         * @default null
         */
        get accelPath(): string | null;
        set accelPath(val: string | null);

        /**
         * The text for the child label.
         * @since 2.16
         */
        get label(): string;
        set label(val: string);

        /**
         * Sets whether the menu item appears justified
         * at the right side of a menu bar.
         * @since 2.14
         * @default false
         */
        get right_justified(): boolean;
        set right_justified(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Sets whether the menu item appears justified
         * at the right side of a menu bar.
         * @since 2.14
         * @default false
         */
        get rightJustified(): boolean;
        set rightJustified(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The submenu attached to the menu item, or `null` if it has none.
         * @since 2.12
         */
        get submenu(): Menu | null;
        set submenu(val: Menu | null);

        /**
         * `true` if underlines in the text indicate mnemonics.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default false
         */
        get use_underline(): boolean;
        set use_underline(val: boolean);

        /**
         * `true` if underlines in the text indicate mnemonics.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default false
         */
        get useUnderline(): boolean;
        set useUnderline(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: MenuItem.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        bin: Bin;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<MenuItem.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): MenuItem;

        static new_with_label(label: string): MenuItem;

        static new_with_mnemonic(label: string): MenuItem;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof MenuItem.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, MenuItem.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof MenuItem.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, MenuItem.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof MenuItem.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<MenuItem.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.MenuItem.SignalSignatures.activate | Gtk.MenuItem::activate} signal on the given item
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_activate(): void;

        /**
         * Signal emitted when the item is activated, but also
         *    if the menu item has a submenu.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_activate_item(): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.MenuItem.SignalSignatures.deselect | Gtk.MenuItem::deselect} signal on the given item.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_deselect(): void;

        /**
         * Sets `text` on the `menu_item` label
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_label(): string;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.MenuItem.SignalSignatures.select | Gtk.MenuItem::select} signal on the given item.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_select(): void;

        /**
         * Sets `text` on the `menu_item` label
         * @param label the text you want to set
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_label(label: string): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.MenuItem.SignalSignatures.toggle_size_allocate | Gtk.MenuItem::toggle-size-allocate} signal on the given item.
         * @param allocation the allocation to use as signal data.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_toggle_size_allocate(allocation: number): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.MenuItem.SignalSignatures.toggle_size_request | Gtk.MenuItem::toggle-size-request} signal on the given item.
         * @param requisition the requisition to use as signal data.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_toggle_size_request(requisition: number): number;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.MenuItem.SignalSignatures.activate | Gtk.MenuItem::activate} signal on the given item
         */
        activate(): void;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
    // Conflicted with Gtk.Widget.activate
        activate(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.MenuItem.SignalSignatures.deselect | Gtk.MenuItem::deselect} signal on the given item.
         */
        deselect(): void;

        /**
         * Retrieve the accelerator path that was previously set on `menu_item`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_menu_item_set_accel_path()` for details.
         * @returns the accelerator path corresponding to     this menu item’s functionality, or `null` if not set
         */
        get_accel_path(): string | null;

        /**
         * Sets `text` on the `menu_item` label
         * @returns The text in the `menu_item` label. This is the internal   string used by the label, and must not be modified.
         */
        get_label(): string;

        /**
         * Returns whether the `menu_item` reserves space for
         * the submenu indicator, regardless if it has a submenu
         * or not.
         * @returns `true` if `menu_item` always reserves space for the     submenu indicator
         */
        get_reserve_indicator(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets whether the menu item appears justified at the right
         * side of the menu bar.
         * @returns `true` if the menu item will appear at the   far right if added to a menu bar.
         */
        get_right_justified(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the submenu underneath this menu item, if any.
         * See `gtk_menu_item_set_submenu()`.
         * @returns submenu for this menu item, or `null` if none
         */
        get_submenu(): Widget | null;

        /**
         * Checks if an underline in the text indicates the next character
         * should be used for the mnemonic accelerator key.
         * @returns `true` if an embedded underline in the label     indicates the mnemonic accelerator key.
         */
        get_use_underline(): boolean;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.MenuItem.SignalSignatures.select | Gtk.MenuItem::select} signal on the given item.
         */
        select(): void;

        /**
         * Set the accelerator path on `menu_item`, through which runtime
         * changes of the menu item’s accelerator caused by the user can be
         * identified and saved to persistent storage (see `gtk_accel_map_save()`
         * on this). To set up a default accelerator for this menu item, call
         * `gtk_accel_map_add_entry()` with the same `accel_path`. See also
         * `gtk_accel_map_add_entry()` on the specifics of accelerator paths,
         * and `gtk_menu_set_accel_path()` for a more convenient variant of
         * this function.
         * 
         * This function is basically a convenience wrapper that handles
         * calling `gtk_widget_set_accel_path()` with the appropriate accelerator
         * group for the menu item.
         * 
         * Note that you do need to set an accelerator on the parent menu with
         * `gtk_menu_set_accel_group()` for this to work.
         * 
         * Note that `accel_path` string will be stored in a {@link GLib.Quark}.
         * Therefore, if you pass a static string, you can save some memory
         * by interning it first with `g_intern_static_string()`.
         * @param accel_path accelerator path, corresponding to this menu     item’s functionality, or `null` to unset the current path.
         */
        set_accel_path(accel_path: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets `text` on the `menu_item` label
         * @param label the text you want to set
         */
        set_label(label: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the `menu_item` should reserve space for
         * the submenu indicator, regardless if it actually has
         * a submenu or not.
         * 
         * There should be little need for applications to call
         * this functions.
         * @param reserve the new value
         */
        set_reserve_indicator(reserve: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the menu item appears justified at the right
         * side of a menu bar. This was traditionally done for “Help”
         * menu items, but is now considered a bad idea. (If the widget
         * layout is reversed for a right-to-left language like Hebrew
         * or Arabic, right-justified-menu-items appear at the left.)
         * @param right_justified if `true` the menu item will appear at the   far right if added to a menu bar
         */
        set_right_justified(right_justified: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets or replaces the menu item’s submenu, or removes it when a `null`
         * submenu is passed.
         * @param submenu the submenu, or `null`
         */
        set_submenu(submenu: Menu | null): void;

        /**
         * If true, an underline in the text indicates the next character
         * should be used for the mnemonic accelerator key.
         * @param setting `true` if underlines in the text indicate mnemonics
         */
        set_use_underline(setting: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.MenuItem.SignalSignatures.toggle_size_allocate | Gtk.MenuItem::toggle-size-allocate} signal on the given item.
         * @param allocation the allocation to use as signal data.
         */
        toggle_size_allocate(allocation: number): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.MenuItem.SignalSignatures.toggle_size_request | Gtk.MenuItem::toggle-size-request} signal on the given item.
         * @param requisition the requisition to use as signal data.
         */
        toggle_size_request(requisition: number): number;

        /**
         * @default null
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable
         */
        get action_name(): string | null;
        set action_name(val: string | null);

        /**
         * @default null
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable
         */
        get actionName(): string | null;
        set actionName(val: string | null);

        /** @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable */
        get action_target(): GLib.Variant;
        set action_target(val: GLib.Variant);

        /** @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable */
        get actionTarget(): GLib.Variant;
        set actionTarget(val: GLib.Variant);

        /**
         * The action that this activatable will activate and receive
         * updates from for various states and possibly appearance.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the this property and
         * > call `gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action()` when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get related_action(): Action;
        set related_action(val: Action);

        /**
         * The action that this activatable will activate and receive
         * updates from for various states and possibly appearance.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the this property and
         * > call `gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action()` when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get relatedAction(): Action;
        set relatedAction(val: Action);

        /**
         * Whether this activatable should reset its layout
         * and appearance when setting the related action or when
         * the action changes appearance.
         * 
         * See the {@link Gtk.Action} documentation directly to find which properties
         * should be ignored by the {@link Gtk.Activatable} when this property is `false`.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle this property
         * > and call `gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties()` on the activatable
         * > widget when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get use_action_appearance(): boolean;
        set use_action_appearance(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether this activatable should reset its layout
         * and appearance when setting the related action or when
         * the action changes appearance.
         * 
         * See the {@link Gtk.Action} documentation directly to find which properties
         * should be ignored by the {@link Gtk.Activatable} when this property is `false`.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle this property
         * > and call `gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties()` on the activatable
         * > widget when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get useActionAppearance(): boolean;
        set useActionAppearance(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Gets the action name for `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_name()` for more information.
         * @returns the action name, or `null` if none is set
         */
        get_action_name(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the current target value of `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_target_value()` for more information.
         * @returns the current target value
         */
        get_action_target_value(): GLib.Variant;

        /**
         * Specifies the name of the action with which this widget should be
         * associated.  If `action_name` is `null` then the widget will be
         * unassociated from any previous action.
         * 
         * Usually this function is used when the widget is located (or will be
         * located) within the hierarchy of a {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow}.
         * 
         * Names are of the form “win.save” or “app.quit” for actions on the
         * containing {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow} or its associated {@link Gtk.Application},
         * respectively.  This is the same form used for actions in the {@link Gio.Menu}
         * associated with the window.
         * @param action_name an action name, or `null`
         */
        set_action_name(action_name: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the target value of an actionable widget.
         * 
         * If `target_value` is `null` then the target value is unset.
         * 
         * The target value has two purposes.  First, it is used as the
         * parameter to activation of the action associated with the
         * {@link Gtk.Actionable} widget. Second, it is used to determine if the widget
         * should be rendered as “active” — the widget is active if the state
         * is equal to the given target.
         * 
         * Consider the example of associating a set of buttons with a {@link Gio.Action}
         * with string state in a typical “radio button” situation.  Each button
         * will be associated with the same action, but with a different target
         * value for that action.  Clicking on a particular button will activate
         * the action with the target of that button, which will typically cause
         * the action’s state to change to that value.  Since the action’s state
         * is now equal to the target value of the button, the button will now
         * be rendered as active (and the other buttons, with different targets,
         * rendered inactive).
         * @param target_value a {@link GLib.Variant} to set as the target value, or `null`
         */
        set_action_target_value(target_value: GLib.Variant | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the action-name and associated string target value of an
         * actionable widget.
         * 
         * `detailed_action_name` is a string in the format accepted by
         * `g_action_parse_detailed_name()`.
         * 
         * (Note that prior to version 3.22.25,
         * this function is only usable for actions with a simple "s" target, and
         * `detailed_action_name` must be of the form `"action::target"` where
         * `action` is the action name and `target` is the string to use
         * as the target.)
         * @param detailed_action_name the detailed action name
         */
        set_detailed_action_name(detailed_action_name: string): void;

        /**
         * Gets the action name for `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_name()` for more information.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_action_name(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the current target value of `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_target_value()` for more information.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_action_target_value(): GLib.Variant;

        /**
         * Specifies the name of the action with which this widget should be
         * associated.  If `action_name` is `null` then the widget will be
         * unassociated from any previous action.
         * 
         * Usually this function is used when the widget is located (or will be
         * located) within the hierarchy of a {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow}.
         * 
         * Names are of the form “win.save” or “app.quit” for actions on the
         * containing {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow} or its associated {@link Gtk.Application},
         * respectively.  This is the same form used for actions in the {@link Gio.Menu}
         * associated with the window.
         * @param action_name an action name, or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_action_name(action_name: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the target value of an actionable widget.
         * 
         * If `target_value` is `null` then the target value is unset.
         * 
         * The target value has two purposes.  First, it is used as the
         * parameter to activation of the action associated with the
         * {@link Gtk.Actionable} widget. Second, it is used to determine if the widget
         * should be rendered as “active” — the widget is active if the state
         * is equal to the given target.
         * 
         * Consider the example of associating a set of buttons with a {@link Gio.Action}
         * with string state in a typical “radio button” situation.  Each button
         * will be associated with the same action, but with a different target
         * value for that action.  Clicking on a particular button will activate
         * the action with the target of that button, which will typically cause
         * the action’s state to change to that value.  Since the action’s state
         * is now equal to the target value of the button, the button will now
         * be rendered as active (and the other buttons, with different targets,
         * rendered inactive).
         * @param target_value a {@link GLib.Variant} to set as the target value, or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_action_target_value(target_value: GLib.Variant | null): void;

        /**
         * This is a utility function for {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors.
         * 
         * When implementing {@link Gtk.Activatable} you must call this when
         * handling changes of the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action}, and
         * you must also use this to break references in {@link GObject.Object}->dispose().
         * 
         * This function adds a reference to the currently set related
         * action for you, it also makes sure the {@link Gtk.Activatable}->update()
         * method is called when the related {@link Gtk.Action} properties change
         * and registers to the action’s proxy list.
         * 
         * > Be careful to call this before setting the local
         * > copy of the {@link Gtk.Action} property, since this function uses
         * > `gtk_activatable_get_related_action()` to retrieve the
         * > previous action.
         * @param action the {@link Gtk.Action} to set
         */
        do_set_related_action(action: Action): void;

        /**
         * Gets the related {@link Gtk.Action} for `activatable`.
         * @returns the related {@link Gtk.Action} if one is set.
         */
        get_related_action(): Action;

        /**
         * Gets whether this activatable should reset its layout
         * and appearance when setting the related action or when
         * the action changes appearance.
         * @returns whether `activatable` uses its actions appearance.
         */
        get_use_action_appearance(): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the related action on the `activatable` object.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action}
         * > property and call `gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action()` when it changes.
         * @param action the {@link Gtk.Action} to set
         */
        set_related_action(action: Action): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether this activatable should reset its layout and appearance
         * when setting the related action or when the action changes appearance
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} property and call
         * > `gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties()` to update `activatable`
         * > if needed.
         * @param use_appearance whether to use the actions appearance
         */
        set_use_action_appearance(use_appearance: boolean): void;

        /**
         * This is called to update the activatable completely, this is called
         * internally when the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action} property is set
         * or unset and by the implementing class when
         * {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} changes.
         * @param action the related {@link Gtk.Action} or `null`
         */
        sync_action_properties(action: Action | null): void;

        /**
         * This is called to update the activatable completely, this is called
         * internally when the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action} property is set
         * or unset and by the implementing class when
         * {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} changes.
         * @param action the related {@link Gtk.Action} or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_sync_action_properties(action: Action | null): void;

        /**
         * Called to update the activatable when its related action’s properties change.
         * You must check the {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} property only apply action
         * properties that are meant to effect the appearance accordingly.
         * @param action 
         * @param property_name 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_update(action: Action, property_name: string): void;

        /**
         * Emits a {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.child_notify | Gtk.Widget::child-notify} signal for the
         * [child property][child-properties] `child_property`
         * on `widget`.
         * 
         * This is the analogue of `g_object_notify()` for child properties.
         * 
         * Also see `gtk_container_child_notify()`.
         * @param child_property the name of a child property installed on the                  class of `widget`’s parent
         */
        child_notify(child_property: string): void;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Gtk.Container.child_notify
        child_notify(...args: never[]): any;
    }


    namespace MenuItemAccessible {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends ContainerAccessible.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-layer": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-mdi-zorder": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-help-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-hypertext-nlinks": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption-object": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-summary": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends ContainerAccessible.ConstructorProps, Atk.Action.ConstructorProps, Atk.Component.ConstructorProps, Atk.Selection.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class MenuItemAccessible extends ContainerAccessible implements Atk.Action, Atk.Component, Atk.Selection {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<MenuItemAccessible>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: MenuItemAccessible.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<MenuItemAccessible.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof MenuItemAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, MenuItemAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof MenuItemAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, MenuItemAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof MenuItemAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<MenuItemAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        /**
         * Perform the specified action on the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns `true` if success, `false` otherwise
         */
        do_action(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns a description of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns a description string, or `null` if `action` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_description(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.get_description
        get_description(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Gets the keybinding which can be used to activate this action, if one
         * exists. The string returned should contain localized, human-readable,
         * key sequences as they would appear when displayed on screen. It must
         * be in the format "mnemonic;sequence;shortcut".
         * 
         * - The mnemonic key activates the object if it is presently enabled onscreen.
         *   This typically corresponds to the underlined letter within the widget.
         *   Example: "n" in a traditional "New..." menu item or the "a" in "Apply" for
         *   a button.
         * - The sequence is the full list of keys which invoke the action even if the
         *   relevant element is not currently shown on screen. For instance, for a menu
         *   item the sequence is the keybindings used to open the parent menus before
         *   invoking. The sequence string is colon-delimited. Example: "Alt+F:N" in a
         *   traditional "New..." menu item.
         * - The shortcut, if it exists, will invoke the same action without showing
         *   the component or its enclosing menus or dialogs. Example: "Ctrl+N" in a
         *   traditional "New..." menu item.
         * 
         * Example: For a traditional "New..." menu item, the expected return value
         * would be: "N;Alt+F:N;Ctrl+N" for the English locale and "N;Alt+D:N;Strg+N"
         * for the German locale. If, hypothetically, this menu item lacked a mnemonic,
         * it would be represented by ";;Ctrl+N" and ";;Strg+N" respectively.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns the keybinding which can be used to activate this action, or `null` if there is no keybinding for this action.
         */
        get_keybinding(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Returns the localized name of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns a name string, or `null` if `action` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_localized_name(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the number of accessible actions available on the object.
         * If there are more than one, the first one is considered the
         * "default" action of the object.
         * @returns a the number of actions, or 0 if `action` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_n_actions(): number;

        /**
         * Returns a non-localized string naming the specified action of the
         * object. This name is generally not descriptive of the end result
         * of the action, but instead names the 'interaction type' which the
         * object supports. By convention, the above strings should be used to
         * represent the actions which correspond to the common point-and-click
         * interaction techniques of the same name: i.e.
         * "click", "press", "release", "drag", "drop", "popup", etc.
         * The "popup" action should be used to pop up a context menu for the
         * object, if one exists.
         * 
         * For technical reasons, some toolkits cannot guarantee that the
         * reported action is actually 'bound' to a nontrivial user event;
         * i.e. the result of some actions via `atk_action_do_action()` may be
         * NIL.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns a name string, or `null` if `action` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_name(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.get_name
        get_name(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Sets a description of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @param desc the description to be assigned to this action
         * @returns a gboolean representing if the description was successfully set;
         */
        set_description(i: number, desc: string): boolean;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.set_description
        set_description(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Perform the specified action on the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_do_action(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns a description of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_description(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         * @virtual
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.vfunc_get_description
        vfunc_get_description(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Gets the keybinding which can be used to activate this action, if one
         * exists. The string returned should contain localized, human-readable,
         * key sequences as they would appear when displayed on screen. It must
         * be in the format "mnemonic;sequence;shortcut".
         * 
         * - The mnemonic key activates the object if it is presently enabled onscreen.
         *   This typically corresponds to the underlined letter within the widget.
         *   Example: "n" in a traditional "New..." menu item or the "a" in "Apply" for
         *   a button.
         * - The sequence is the full list of keys which invoke the action even if the
         *   relevant element is not currently shown on screen. For instance, for a menu
         *   item the sequence is the keybindings used to open the parent menus before
         *   invoking. The sequence string is colon-delimited. Example: "Alt+F:N" in a
         *   traditional "New..." menu item.
         * - The shortcut, if it exists, will invoke the same action without showing
         *   the component or its enclosing menus or dialogs. Example: "Ctrl+N" in a
         *   traditional "New..." menu item.
         * 
         * Example: For a traditional "New..." menu item, the expected return value
         * would be: "N;Alt+F:N;Ctrl+N" for the English locale and "N;Alt+D:N;Strg+N"
         * for the German locale. If, hypothetically, this menu item lacked a mnemonic,
         * it would be represented by ";;Ctrl+N" and ";;Strg+N" respectively.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_keybinding(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Returns the localized name of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_localized_name(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the number of accessible actions available on the object.
         * If there are more than one, the first one is considered the
         * "default" action of the object.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_n_actions(): number;

        /**
         * Returns a non-localized string naming the specified action of the
         * object. This name is generally not descriptive of the end result
         * of the action, but instead names the 'interaction type' which the
         * object supports. By convention, the above strings should be used to
         * represent the actions which correspond to the common point-and-click
         * interaction techniques of the same name: i.e.
         * "click", "press", "release", "drag", "drop", "popup", etc.
         * The "popup" action should be used to pop up a context menu for the
         * object, if one exists.
         * 
         * For technical reasons, some toolkits cannot guarantee that the
         * reported action is actually 'bound' to a nontrivial user event;
         * i.e. the result of some actions via `atk_action_do_action()` may be
         * NIL.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_name(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         * @virtual
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.vfunc_get_name
        vfunc_get_name(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Sets a description of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @param desc the description to be assigned to this action
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_description(i: number, desc: string): boolean;

        /**
         * @param args 
         * @virtual
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.vfunc_set_description
        vfunc_set_description(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Adds the specified accessible child of the object to the
         * object's selection.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the child index.
         * @returns TRUE if success, FALSE otherwise.
         */
        add_selection(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Clears the selection in the object so that no children in the object
         * are selected.
         * @returns TRUE if success, FALSE otherwise.
         */
        clear_selection(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the number of accessible children currently selected.
         * Note: callers should not rely on `null` or on a zero value for
         * indication of whether AtkSelectionIface is implemented, they should
         * use type checking/interface checking macros or the
         * `atk_get_accessible_value()` convenience method.
         * @returns a gint representing the number of items selected, or 0 if `selection` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_selection_count(): number;

        /**
         * Determines if the current child of this object is selected
         * Note: callers should not rely on `null` or on a zero value for
         * indication of whether AtkSelectionIface is implemented, they should
         * use type checking/interface checking macros or the
         * `atk_get_accessible_value()` convenience method.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the child index.
         * @returns a gboolean representing the specified child is selected, or 0 if `selection` does not implement this interface.
         */
        is_child_selected(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets a reference to the accessible object representing the specified
         * selected child of the object.
         * Note: callers should not rely on `null` or on a zero value for
         * indication of whether AtkSelectionIface is implemented, they should
         * use type checking/interface checking macros or the
         * `atk_get_accessible_value()` convenience method.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the index in the selection set.  (e.g. the ith selection as opposed to the ith child).
         * @returns an {@link Atk.Object} representing the selected accessible, or `null` if `selection` does not implement this interface.
         */
        ref_selection(i: number): Atk.Object | null;

        /**
         * Removes the specified child of the object from the object's selection.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the index in the selection set.  (e.g. the ith selection as opposed to the ith child).
         * @returns TRUE if success, FALSE otherwise.
         */
        remove_selection(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Causes every child of the object to be selected if the object
         * supports multiple selections.
         * @returns TRUE if success, FALSE otherwise.
         */
        select_all_selection(): boolean;

        /**
         * Adds the specified accessible child of the object to the
         * object's selection.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the child index.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add_selection(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Clears the selection in the object so that no children in the object
         * are selected.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_clear_selection(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the number of accessible children currently selected.
         * Note: callers should not rely on `null` or on a zero value for
         * indication of whether AtkSelectionIface is implemented, they should
         * use type checking/interface checking macros or the
         * `atk_get_accessible_value()` convenience method.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_selection_count(): number;

        /**
         * Determines if the current child of this object is selected
         * Note: callers should not rely on `null` or on a zero value for
         * indication of whether AtkSelectionIface is implemented, they should
         * use type checking/interface checking macros or the
         * `atk_get_accessible_value()` convenience method.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the child index.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_is_child_selected(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets a reference to the accessible object representing the specified
         * selected child of the object.
         * Note: callers should not rely on `null` or on a zero value for
         * indication of whether AtkSelectionIface is implemented, they should
         * use type checking/interface checking macros or the
         * `atk_get_accessible_value()` convenience method.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the index in the selection set.  (e.g. the ith selection as opposed to the ith child).
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_ref_selection(i: number): Atk.Object | null;

        /**
         * Removes the specified child of the object from the object's selection.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the index in the selection set.  (e.g. the ith selection as opposed to the ith child).
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_remove_selection(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Causes every child of the object to be selected if the object
         * supports multiple selections.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_select_all_selection(): boolean;

        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_selection_changed(): void;
    }


    namespace MenuShell {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Container.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * An action signal that activates the current menu item within
             * the menu shell.
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "activate-current": (arg0: boolean) => void;
            /**
             * An action signal which cancels the selection within the menu shell.
             * Causes the {@link Gtk.MenuShell.SignalSignatures.selection_done | Gtk.MenuShell::selection-done} signal to be emitted.
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            cancel: () => void;
            /**
             * A keybinding signal which moves the focus in the
             * given `direction`.
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "cycle-focus": (arg0: DirectionType) => void;
            /**
             * This signal is emitted when a menu shell is deactivated.
             * @signal
             * @run-first
             */
            deactivate: () => void;
            /**
             * The ::insert signal is emitted when a new {@link Gtk.MenuItem} is added to
             * a {@link Gtk.MenuShell}.  A separate signal is used instead of
             * GtkContainer::add because of the need for an additional position
             * parameter.
             * 
             * The inverse of this signal is the GtkContainer::removed signal.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.2
             * @run-first
             */
            insert: (arg0: Widget, arg1: number) => void;
            /**
             * An keybinding signal which moves the current menu item
             * in the direction specified by `direction`.
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "move-current": (arg0: MenuDirectionType) => void;
            /**
             * The ::move-selected signal is emitted to move the selection to
             * another item.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.12
             * @run-last
             */
            "move-selected": (arg0: number) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * This signal is emitted when a selection has been
             * completed within a menu shell.
             * @signal
             * @run-first
             */
            "selection-done": () => void;
            "notify::take-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Container.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {
            take_focus: boolean;
            takeFocus: boolean;
        }
    }

    /**
     * A {@link Gtk.MenuShell} is the abstract base class used to derive the
     * {@link Gtk.Menu} and {@link Gtk.MenuBar} subclasses.
     * 
     * A {@link Gtk.MenuShell} is a container of {@link Gtk.MenuItem} objects arranged
     * in a list which can be navigated, selected, and activated by the
     * user to perform application functions. A {@link Gtk.MenuItem} can have a
     * submenu associated with it, allowing for nested hierarchical menus.
     * 
     * # Terminology
     * 
     * A menu item can be “selected”, this means that it is displayed
     * in the prelight state, and if it has a submenu, that submenu
     * will be popped up.
     * 
     * A menu is “active” when it is visible onscreen and the user
     * is selecting from it. A menubar is not active until the user
     * clicks on one of its menuitems. When a menu is active,
     * passing the mouse over a submenu will pop it up.
     * 
     * There is also is a concept of the current menu and a current
     * menu item. The current menu item is the selected menu item
     * that is furthest down in the hierarchy. (Every active menu shell
     * does not necessarily contain a selected menu item, but if
     * it does, then the parent menu shell must also contain
     * a selected menu item.) The current menu is the menu that
     * contains the current menu item. It will always have a GTK
     * grab and receive all key presses.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    abstract class MenuShell extends Container implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<MenuShell>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * A boolean that determines whether the menu and its submenus grab the
         * keyboard focus. See `gtk_menu_shell_set_take_focus()` and
         * `gtk_menu_shell_get_take_focus()`.
         * @since 2.8
         * @default true
         */
        get take_focus(): boolean;
        set take_focus(val: boolean);

        /**
         * A boolean that determines whether the menu and its submenus grab the
         * keyboard focus. See `gtk_menu_shell_set_take_focus()` and
         * `gtk_menu_shell_get_take_focus()`.
         * @since 2.8
         * @default true
         */
        get takeFocus(): boolean;
        set takeFocus(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: MenuShell.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        container: Container;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<MenuShell.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof MenuShell.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, MenuShell.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof MenuShell.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, MenuShell.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof MenuShell.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<MenuShell.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * @param force_hide 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_activate_current(force_hide: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Cancels the selection within the menu shell.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_cancel(): void;

        /**
         * Deactivates the menu shell.
         * 
         * Typically this results in the menu shell being erased
         * from the screen.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_deactivate(): void;

        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_popup_delay(): number;

        /**
         * Adds a new {@link Gtk.MenuItem} to the menu shell’s item list
         * at the position indicated by `position`.
         * @param child The {@link Gtk.MenuItem} to add
         * @param position The position in the item list where `child`     is added. Positions are numbered from 0 to n-1
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_insert(child: Widget, position: number): void;

        /**
         * @param direction 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_move_current(direction: MenuDirectionType): void;

        /**
         * @param distance 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_move_selected(distance: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Selects the menu item from the menu shell.
         * @param menu_item The {@link Gtk.MenuItem} to select
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_select_item(menu_item: Widget): void;

        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_selection_done(): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Activates the menu item within the menu shell.
         * @param menu_item the {@link Gtk.MenuItem} to activate
         * @param force_deactivate if `true`, force the deactivation of the     menu shell after the menu item is activated
         */
        activate_item(menu_item: Widget, force_deactivate: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Adds a new {@link Gtk.MenuItem} to the end of the menu shell's
         * item list.
         * @param child The {@link Gtk.MenuItem} to add
         */
        append(child: MenuItem): void;

        /**
         * Establishes a binding between a {@link Gtk.MenuShell} and a {@link Gio.MenuModel}.
         * 
         * The contents of `shell` are removed and then refilled with menu items
         * according to `model`.  When `model` changes, `shell` is updated.
         * Calling this function twice on `shell` with different `model` will
         * cause the first binding to be replaced with a binding to the new
         * model. If `model` is `null` then any previous binding is undone and
         * all children are removed.
         * 
         * `with_separators` determines if toplevel items (eg: sections) have
         * separators inserted between them.  This is typically desired for
         * menus but doesn’t make sense for menubars.
         * 
         * If `action_namespace` is non-`null` then the effect is as if all
         * actions mentioned in the `model` have their names prefixed with the
         * namespace, plus a dot.  For example, if the action “quit” is
         * mentioned and `action_namespace` is “app” then the effective action
         * name is “app.quit”.
         * 
         * This function uses {@link Gtk.Actionable} to define the action name and
         * target values on the created menu items.  If you want to use an
         * action group other than “app” and “win”, or if you want to use a
         * {@link Gtk.MenuShell} outside of a {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow}, then you will need
         * to attach your own action group to the widget hierarchy using
         * `gtk_widget_insert_action_group()`.  As an example, if you created a
         * group with a “quit” action and inserted it with the name “mygroup”
         * then you would use the action name “mygroup.quit” in your
         * {@link Gio.MenuModel}.
         * 
         * For most cases you are probably better off using
         * `gtk_menu_new_from_model()` or `gtk_menu_bar_new_from_model()` or just
         * directly passing the {@link Gio.MenuModel} to `gtk_application_set_app_menu()` or
         * `gtk_application_set_menubar()`.
         * @param model the {@link Gio.MenuModel} to bind to or `null` to remove   binding
         * @param action_namespace the namespace for actions in `model`
         * @param with_separators `true` if toplevel items in `shell` should have   separators between them
         */
        bind_model(model: Gio.MenuModel | null, action_namespace: string | null, with_separators: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Cancels the selection within the menu shell.
         */
        cancel(): void;

        /**
         * Deactivates the menu shell.
         * 
         * Typically this results in the menu shell being erased
         * from the screen.
         */
        deactivate(): void;

        /**
         * Deselects the currently selected item from the menu shell,
         * if any.
         */
        deselect(): void;

        /**
         * Gets the parent menu shell.
         * 
         * The parent menu shell of a submenu is the {@link Gtk.Menu} or {@link Gtk.MenuBar}
         * from which it was opened up.
         * @returns the parent {@link Gtk.MenuShell}
         */
        get_parent_shell(): Widget;

        /**
         * Gets the currently selected item.
         * @returns the currently selected item
         */
        get_selected_item(): Widget;

        /**
         * Returns `true` if the menu shell will take the keyboard focus on popup.
         * @returns `true` if the menu shell will take the keyboard focus on popup.
         */
        get_take_focus(): boolean;

        /**
         * Adds a new {@link Gtk.MenuItem} to the menu shell’s item list
         * at the position indicated by `position`.
         * @param child The {@link Gtk.MenuItem} to add
         * @param position The position in the item list where `child`     is added. Positions are numbered from 0 to n-1
         */
        insert(child: Widget, position: number): void;

        /**
         * Adds a new {@link Gtk.MenuItem} to the beginning of the menu shell's
         * item list.
         * @param child The {@link Gtk.MenuItem} to add
         */
        prepend(child: Widget): void;

        /**
         * Select the first visible or selectable child of the menu shell;
         * don’t select tearoff items unless the only item is a tearoff
         * item.
         * @param search_sensitive if `true`, search for the first selectable                    menu item, otherwise select nothing if                    the first item isn’t sensitive. This                    should be `false` if the menu is being                    popped up initially.
         */
        select_first(search_sensitive: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Selects the menu item from the menu shell.
         * @param menu_item The {@link Gtk.MenuItem} to select
         */
        select_item(menu_item: Widget): void;

        /**
         * If `take_focus` is `true` (the default) the menu shell will take
         * the keyboard focus so that it will receive all keyboard events
         * which is needed to enable keyboard navigation in menus.
         * 
         * Setting `take_focus` to `false` is useful only for special applications
         * like virtual keyboard implementations which should not take keyboard
         * focus.
         * 
         * The `take_focus` state of a menu or menu bar is automatically
         * propagated to submenus whenever a submenu is popped up, so you
         * don’t have to worry about recursively setting it for your entire
         * menu hierarchy. Only when programmatically picking a submenu and
         * popping it up manually, the `take_focus` property of the submenu
         * needs to be set explicitly.
         * 
         * Note that setting it to `false` has side-effects:
         * 
         * If the focus is in some other app, it keeps the focus and keynav in
         * the menu doesn’t work. Consequently, keynav on the menu will only
         * work if the focus is on some toplevel owned by the onscreen keyboard.
         * 
         * To avoid confusing the user, menus with `take_focus` set to `false`
         * should not display mnemonics or accelerators, since it cannot be
         * guaranteed that they will work.
         * 
         * See also `gdk_keyboard_grab()`
         * @param take_focus `true` if the menu shell should take the keyboard     focus on popup
         */
        set_take_focus(take_focus: boolean): void;
    }


    namespace MenuShellAccessible {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends ContainerAccessible.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-layer": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-mdi-zorder": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-help-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-hypertext-nlinks": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption-object": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-summary": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends ContainerAccessible.ConstructorProps, Atk.Component.ConstructorProps, Atk.Selection.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class MenuShellAccessible extends ContainerAccessible implements Atk.Component, Atk.Selection {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<MenuShellAccessible>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: MenuShellAccessible.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<MenuShellAccessible.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof MenuShellAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, MenuShellAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof MenuShellAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, MenuShellAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof MenuShellAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<MenuShellAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        /**
         * Adds the specified accessible child of the object to the
         * object's selection.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the child index.
         * @returns TRUE if success, FALSE otherwise.
         */
        add_selection(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Clears the selection in the object so that no children in the object
         * are selected.
         * @returns TRUE if success, FALSE otherwise.
         */
        clear_selection(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the number of accessible children currently selected.
         * Note: callers should not rely on `null` or on a zero value for
         * indication of whether AtkSelectionIface is implemented, they should
         * use type checking/interface checking macros or the
         * `atk_get_accessible_value()` convenience method.
         * @returns a gint representing the number of items selected, or 0 if `selection` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_selection_count(): number;

        /**
         * Determines if the current child of this object is selected
         * Note: callers should not rely on `null` or on a zero value for
         * indication of whether AtkSelectionIface is implemented, they should
         * use type checking/interface checking macros or the
         * `atk_get_accessible_value()` convenience method.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the child index.
         * @returns a gboolean representing the specified child is selected, or 0 if `selection` does not implement this interface.
         */
        is_child_selected(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets a reference to the accessible object representing the specified
         * selected child of the object.
         * Note: callers should not rely on `null` or on a zero value for
         * indication of whether AtkSelectionIface is implemented, they should
         * use type checking/interface checking macros or the
         * `atk_get_accessible_value()` convenience method.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the index in the selection set.  (e.g. the ith selection as opposed to the ith child).
         * @returns an {@link Atk.Object} representing the selected accessible, or `null` if `selection` does not implement this interface.
         */
        ref_selection(i: number): Atk.Object | null;

        /**
         * Removes the specified child of the object from the object's selection.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the index in the selection set.  (e.g. the ith selection as opposed to the ith child).
         * @returns TRUE if success, FALSE otherwise.
         */
        remove_selection(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Causes every child of the object to be selected if the object
         * supports multiple selections.
         * @returns TRUE if success, FALSE otherwise.
         */
        select_all_selection(): boolean;

        /**
         * Adds the specified accessible child of the object to the
         * object's selection.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the child index.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add_selection(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Clears the selection in the object so that no children in the object
         * are selected.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_clear_selection(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the number of accessible children currently selected.
         * Note: callers should not rely on `null` or on a zero value for
         * indication of whether AtkSelectionIface is implemented, they should
         * use type checking/interface checking macros or the
         * `atk_get_accessible_value()` convenience method.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_selection_count(): number;

        /**
         * Determines if the current child of this object is selected
         * Note: callers should not rely on `null` or on a zero value for
         * indication of whether AtkSelectionIface is implemented, they should
         * use type checking/interface checking macros or the
         * `atk_get_accessible_value()` convenience method.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the child index.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_is_child_selected(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets a reference to the accessible object representing the specified
         * selected child of the object.
         * Note: callers should not rely on `null` or on a zero value for
         * indication of whether AtkSelectionIface is implemented, they should
         * use type checking/interface checking macros or the
         * `atk_get_accessible_value()` convenience method.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the index in the selection set.  (e.g. the ith selection as opposed to the ith child).
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_ref_selection(i: number): Atk.Object | null;

        /**
         * Removes the specified child of the object from the object's selection.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the index in the selection set.  (e.g. the ith selection as opposed to the ith child).
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_remove_selection(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Causes every child of the object to be selected if the object
         * supports multiple selections.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_select_all_selection(): boolean;

        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_selection_changed(): void;
    }


    namespace MenuToolButton {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends ToolButton.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * The ::show-menu signal is emitted before the menu is shown.
             * 
             * It can be used to populate the menu on demand, using
             * `gtk_menu_tool_button_set_menu()`.
             * 
             * Note that even if you populate the menu dynamically in this way,
             * you must set an empty menu on the {@link Gtk.MenuToolButton} beforehand,
             * since the arrow is made insensitive if the menu is not set.
             * @signal
             * @run-first
             */
            "show-menu": () => void;
            "notify::menu": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::icon-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::icon-widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::label": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::label-widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::stock-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-underline": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-important": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible-horizontal": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible-vertical": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::action-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::action-target": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends ToolButton.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Actionable.ConstructorProps, Activatable.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {
            menu: Menu;
        }
    }

    /**
     * A {@link Gtk.MenuToolButton} is a {@link Gtk.ToolItem} that contains a button and
     * a small additional button with an arrow. When clicked, the arrow
     * button pops up a dropdown menu.
     * 
     * Use `gtk_menu_tool_button_new()` to create a new
     * {@link Gtk.MenuToolButton}.
     * 
     * # GtkMenuToolButton as GtkBuildable
     * 
     * The GtkMenuToolButton implementation of the GtkBuildable interface
     * supports adding a menu by specifying “menu” as the “type” attribute
     * of a `<child>` element.
     * 
     * An example for a UI definition fragment with menus:
     * 
     * 
     * ```xml
     * <object class="GtkMenuToolButton">
     *   <child type="menu">
     *     <object class="GtkMenu"/>
     *   </child>
     * </object>
     * ```
     * 
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class MenuToolButton extends ToolButton implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Actionable, Activatable, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<MenuToolButton>;

        // Properties
        get menu(): Menu;
        set menu(val: Menu);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: MenuToolButton.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<MenuToolButton.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](icon_widget: Widget | null, label: string | null): MenuToolButton;

        // Conflicted with Gtk.ToolItem.new
        static ["new"](...args: never[]): any;

        static new_from_stock(stock_id: string): MenuToolButton;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof MenuToolButton.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, MenuToolButton.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof MenuToolButton.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, MenuToolButton.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof MenuToolButton.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<MenuToolButton.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * Signal emitted before the menu is shown.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_show_menu(): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Gets the {@link Gtk.Menu} associated with {@link Gtk.MenuToolButton}.
         * @returns the {@link Gtk.Menu} associated     with {@link Gtk.MenuToolButton}
         */
        get_menu(): Widget;

        /**
         * Sets the tooltip markup text to be used as tooltip for the arrow button
         * which pops up the menu.  See `gtk_tool_item_set_tooltip_text()` for setting
         * a tooltip on the whole {@link Gtk.MenuToolButton}.
         * @param markup markup text to be used as tooltip text for button’s arrow button
         */
        set_arrow_tooltip_markup(markup: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets the tooltip text to be used as tooltip for the arrow button which
         * pops up the menu.  See `gtk_tool_item_set_tooltip_text()` for setting a tooltip
         * on the whole {@link Gtk.MenuToolButton}.
         * @param text text to be used as tooltip text for button’s arrow button
         */
        set_arrow_tooltip_text(text: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.Menu} that is popped up when the user clicks on the arrow.
         * If `menu` is NULL, the arrow button becomes insensitive.
         * @param menu the {@link Gtk.Menu} associated with {@link Gtk.MenuToolButton}
         */
        set_menu(menu: Widget): void;

        /**
         * @default null
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable
         */
        get action_name(): string | null;
        set action_name(val: string | null);

        /**
         * @default null
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable
         */
        get actionName(): string | null;
        set actionName(val: string | null);

        /** @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable */
        get action_target(): GLib.Variant;
        set action_target(val: GLib.Variant);

        /** @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable */
        get actionTarget(): GLib.Variant;
        set actionTarget(val: GLib.Variant);

        /**
         * Gets the action name for `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_name()` for more information.
         * @returns the action name, or `null` if none is set
         */
        get_action_name(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the current target value of `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_target_value()` for more information.
         * @returns the current target value
         */
        get_action_target_value(): GLib.Variant;

        /**
         * Specifies the name of the action with which this widget should be
         * associated.  If `action_name` is `null` then the widget will be
         * unassociated from any previous action.
         * 
         * Usually this function is used when the widget is located (or will be
         * located) within the hierarchy of a {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow}.
         * 
         * Names are of the form “win.save” or “app.quit” for actions on the
         * containing {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow} or its associated {@link Gtk.Application},
         * respectively.  This is the same form used for actions in the {@link Gio.Menu}
         * associated with the window.
         * @param action_name an action name, or `null`
         */
        set_action_name(action_name: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the target value of an actionable widget.
         * 
         * If `target_value` is `null` then the target value is unset.
         * 
         * The target value has two purposes.  First, it is used as the
         * parameter to activation of the action associated with the
         * {@link Gtk.Actionable} widget. Second, it is used to determine if the widget
         * should be rendered as “active” — the widget is active if the state
         * is equal to the given target.
         * 
         * Consider the example of associating a set of buttons with a {@link Gio.Action}
         * with string state in a typical “radio button” situation.  Each button
         * will be associated with the same action, but with a different target
         * value for that action.  Clicking on a particular button will activate
         * the action with the target of that button, which will typically cause
         * the action’s state to change to that value.  Since the action’s state
         * is now equal to the target value of the button, the button will now
         * be rendered as active (and the other buttons, with different targets,
         * rendered inactive).
         * @param target_value a {@link GLib.Variant} to set as the target value, or `null`
         */
        set_action_target_value(target_value: GLib.Variant | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the action-name and associated string target value of an
         * actionable widget.
         * 
         * `detailed_action_name` is a string in the format accepted by
         * `g_action_parse_detailed_name()`.
         * 
         * (Note that prior to version 3.22.25,
         * this function is only usable for actions with a simple "s" target, and
         * `detailed_action_name` must be of the form `"action::target"` where
         * `action` is the action name and `target` is the string to use
         * as the target.)
         * @param detailed_action_name the detailed action name
         */
        set_detailed_action_name(detailed_action_name: string): void;

        /**
         * Gets the action name for `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_name()` for more information.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_action_name(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the current target value of `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_target_value()` for more information.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_action_target_value(): GLib.Variant;

        /**
         * Specifies the name of the action with which this widget should be
         * associated.  If `action_name` is `null` then the widget will be
         * unassociated from any previous action.
         * 
         * Usually this function is used when the widget is located (or will be
         * located) within the hierarchy of a {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow}.
         * 
         * Names are of the form “win.save” or “app.quit” for actions on the
         * containing {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow} or its associated {@link Gtk.Application},
         * respectively.  This is the same form used for actions in the {@link Gio.Menu}
         * associated with the window.
         * @param action_name an action name, or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_action_name(action_name: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the target value of an actionable widget.
         * 
         * If `target_value` is `null` then the target value is unset.
         * 
         * The target value has two purposes.  First, it is used as the
         * parameter to activation of the action associated with the
         * {@link Gtk.Actionable} widget. Second, it is used to determine if the widget
         * should be rendered as “active” — the widget is active if the state
         * is equal to the given target.
         * 
         * Consider the example of associating a set of buttons with a {@link Gio.Action}
         * with string state in a typical “radio button” situation.  Each button
         * will be associated with the same action, but with a different target
         * value for that action.  Clicking on a particular button will activate
         * the action with the target of that button, which will typically cause
         * the action’s state to change to that value.  Since the action’s state
         * is now equal to the target value of the button, the button will now
         * be rendered as active (and the other buttons, with different targets,
         * rendered inactive).
         * @param target_value a {@link GLib.Variant} to set as the target value, or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_action_target_value(target_value: GLib.Variant | null): void;

        /**
         * Emits a {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.child_notify | Gtk.Widget::child-notify} signal for the
         * [child property][child-properties] `child_property`
         * on `widget`.
         * 
         * This is the analogue of `g_object_notify()` for child properties.
         * 
         * Also see `gtk_container_child_notify()`.
         * @param child_property the name of a child property installed on the                  class of `widget`’s parent
         */
        child_notify(child_property: string): void;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Gtk.Container.child_notify
        child_notify(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Sets `markup` as the contents of the tooltip, which is marked up with
         *  the [Pango text markup language][PangoMarkupFormat].
         * 
         * This function will take care of setting {@link Gtk.Widget.has_tooltip} to `true`
         * and of the default handler for the {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.query_tooltip | Gtk.Widget::query-tooltip} signal.
         * 
         * See also the {@link Gtk.Widget.tooltip_markup} property and
         * `gtk_tooltip_set_markup()`.
         * @param markup the contents of the tooltip for `widget`, or `null`
         */
        set_tooltip_markup(markup: string | null): void;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Gtk.ToolItem.set_tooltip_markup
        set_tooltip_markup(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Sets `text` as the contents of the tooltip. This function will take
         * care of setting {@link Gtk.Widget.has_tooltip} to `true` and of the default
         * handler for the {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.query_tooltip | Gtk.Widget::query-tooltip} signal.
         * 
         * See also the {@link Gtk.Widget.tooltip_text} property and `gtk_tooltip_set_text()`.
         * @param text the contents of the tooltip for `widget`
         */
        set_tooltip_text(text: string | null): void;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Gtk.ToolItem.set_tooltip_text
        set_tooltip_text(...args: never[]): any;
    }


    namespace MessageDialog {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Dialog.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::buttons": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::image": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::message-area": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::message-type": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::secondary-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::secondary-use-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-header-bar": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accept-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::application": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::attached-to": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::decorated": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::default-height": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::default-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::deletable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::destroy-with-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-map": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gravity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-resize-grip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-toplevel-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hide-titlebar-when-maximized": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::icon": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::icon-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-active": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-maximized": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::mnemonics-visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::modal": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resizable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-grip-visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::screen": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::skip-pager-hint": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::skip-taskbar-hint": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::startup-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::title": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::transient-for": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::type": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::type-hint": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::urgency-hint": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window-position": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Dialog.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {
            buttons: ButtonsType;
            image: Widget;
            message_area: Widget;
            messageArea: Widget;
            message_type: MessageType;
            messageType: MessageType;
            secondary_text: string;
            secondaryText: string;
            secondary_use_markup: boolean;
            secondaryUseMarkup: boolean;
            text: string;
            use_markup: boolean;
            useMarkup: boolean;
        }
    }

    /**
     * {@link Gtk.MessageDialog} presents a dialog with some message text. It’s simply a
     * convenience widget; you could construct the equivalent of {@link Gtk.MessageDialog}
     * from {@link Gtk.Dialog} without too much effort, but {@link Gtk.MessageDialog} saves typing.
     * 
     * One difference from {@link Gtk.Dialog} is that {@link Gtk.MessageDialog} sets the
     * {@link Gtk.Window.skip_taskbar_hint} property to `true`, so that the dialog is hidden
     * from the taskbar by default.
     * 
     * The easiest way to do a modal message dialog is to use `gtk_dialog_run()`, though
     * you can also pass in the {@link Gtk.DialogFlags.MODAL} flag, `gtk_dialog_run()` automatically
     * makes the dialog modal and waits for the user to respond to it. `gtk_dialog_run()`
     * returns when any dialog button is clicked.
     * 
     * An example for using a modal dialog:
     * 
     * ```c
     *  GtkDialogFlags flags = GTK_DIALOG_DESTROY_WITH_PARENT;
     *  dialog = gtk_message_dialog_new (parent_window,
     *                                   flags,
     *                                   GTK_MESSAGE_ERROR,
     *                                   GTK_BUTTONS_CLOSE,
     *                                   "Error reading “%s”: %s",
     *                                   filename,
     *                                   g_strerror (errno));
     *  gtk_dialog_run (GTK_DIALOG (dialog));
     *  gtk_widget_destroy (dialog);
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * You might do a non-modal {@link Gtk.MessageDialog} as follows:
     * 
     * An example for a non-modal dialog:
     * 
     * ```c
     *  GtkDialogFlags flags = GTK_DIALOG_DESTROY_WITH_PARENT;
     *  dialog = gtk_message_dialog_new (parent_window,
     *                                   flags,
     *                                   GTK_MESSAGE_ERROR,
     *                                   GTK_BUTTONS_CLOSE,
     *                                   "Error reading “%s”: %s",
     *                                   filename,
     *                                   g_strerror (errno));
     * 
     *  // Destroy the dialog when the user responds to it
     *  // (e.g. clicks a button)
     * 
     *  g_signal_connect_swapped (dialog, "response",
     *                            G_CALLBACK (gtk_widget_destroy),
     *                            dialog);
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * # GtkMessageDialog as GtkBuildable
     * 
     * The GtkMessageDialog implementation of the GtkBuildable interface exposes
     * the message area as an internal child with the name “message_area”.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class MessageDialog extends Dialog implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<MessageDialog>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * @construct-only
         * @default Gtk.ButtonsType.NONE
         */
        set buttons(val: ButtonsType);

        /**
         * The image for this dialog.
         * @since 2.10
         * @deprecated since 3.12: Use {@link Gtk.Dialog} to create dialogs with images
         */
        get image(): Widget;
        set image(val: Widget);

        /**
         * The {@link Gtk.Box} that corresponds to the message area of this dialog.  See
         * `gtk_message_dialog_get_message_area()` for a detailed description of this
         * area.
         * @since 2.22
         * @read-only
         */
        get message_area(): Widget;

        /**
         * The {@link Gtk.Box} that corresponds to the message area of this dialog.  See
         * `gtk_message_dialog_get_message_area()` for a detailed description of this
         * area.
         * @since 2.22
         * @read-only
         */
        get messageArea(): Widget;

        /**
         * The type of the message.
         * @default Gtk.MessageType.INFO
         */
        get message_type(): MessageType;
        set message_type(val: MessageType);

        /**
         * The type of the message.
         * @default Gtk.MessageType.INFO
         */
        get messageType(): MessageType;
        set messageType(val: MessageType);

        /**
         * The secondary text of the message dialog.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default null
         */
        get secondary_text(): string;
        set secondary_text(val: string);

        /**
         * The secondary text of the message dialog.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default null
         */
        get secondaryText(): string;
        set secondaryText(val: string);

        /**
         * `true` if the secondary text of the dialog includes Pango markup.
         * See `pango_parse_markup()`.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default false
         */
        get secondary_use_markup(): boolean;
        set secondary_use_markup(val: boolean);

        /**
         * `true` if the secondary text of the dialog includes Pango markup.
         * See `pango_parse_markup()`.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default false
         */
        get secondaryUseMarkup(): boolean;
        set secondaryUseMarkup(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The primary text of the message dialog. If the dialog has
         * a secondary text, this will appear as the title.
         * @since 2.10
         */
        get text(): string;
        set text(val: string);

        /**
         * `true` if the primary text of the dialog includes Pango markup.
         * See `pango_parse_markup()`.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default false
         */
        get use_markup(): boolean;
        set use_markup(val: boolean);

        /**
         * `true` if the primary text of the dialog includes Pango markup.
         * See `pango_parse_markup()`.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default false
         */
        get useMarkup(): boolean;
        set useMarkup(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: MessageDialog.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<MessageDialog.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof MessageDialog.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, MessageDialog.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof MessageDialog.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, MessageDialog.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof MessageDialog.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<MessageDialog.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Gets the dialog’s image.
         * @returns the dialog’s image
         */
        get_image(): Widget;

        /**
         * Returns the message area of the dialog. This is the box where the
         * dialog’s primary and secondary labels are packed. You can add your
         * own extra content to that box and it will appear below those labels.
         * See `gtk_dialog_get_content_area()` for the corresponding
         * function in the parent {@link Gtk.Dialog}.
         * @returns A {@link Gtk.Box} corresponding to the     “message area” in the `message_dialog`.
         */
        get_message_area(): Widget;

        /**
         * Sets the dialog’s image to `image`.
         * @param image the image
         */
        set_image(image: Widget): void;

        /**
         * Sets the text of the message dialog to be `str`, which is marked
         * up with the [Pango text markup language][PangoMarkupFormat].
         * @param str markup string (see [Pango markup format][PangoMarkupFormat])
         */
        set_markup(str: string): void;
    }


    namespace Misc {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Widget.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::xalign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::xpad": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::yalign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::ypad": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Widget.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {
            xalign: number;
            xpad: number;
            yalign: number;
            ypad: number;
        }
    }

    /**
     * The {@link Gtk.Misc} widget is an abstract widget which is not useful itself, but
     * is used to derive subclasses which have alignment and padding attributes.
     * 
     * The horizontal and vertical padding attributes allows extra space to be
     * added around the widget.
     * 
     * The horizontal and vertical alignment attributes enable the widget to be
     * positioned within its allocated area. Note that if the widget is added to
     * a container in such a way that it expands automatically to fill its
     * allocated area, the alignment settings will not alter the widget's position.
     * 
     * Note that the desired effect can in most cases be achieved by using the
     * {@link Gtk.Widget.halign}, {@link Gtk.Widget.valign} and {@link Gtk.Widget.margin} properties
     * on the child widget, so GtkMisc should not be used in new code. To reflect
     * this fact, all {@link Gtk.Misc} API has been deprecated.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    abstract class Misc extends Widget implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<Misc>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * The horizontal alignment. A value of 0.0 means left alignment (or right
         * on RTL locales); a value of 1.0 means right alignment (or left on RTL
         * locales).
         * @deprecated since 3.14: Use `gtk_widget_set_halign()` instead. If you are using   {@link Gtk.Label}, use {@link Gtk.Label.xalign} instead.
         * @default 0.5
         */
        get xalign(): number;
        set xalign(val: number);

        /**
         * The amount of space to add on the left and right of the widget, in
         * pixels.
         * @deprecated since 3.14: Use `gtk_widget_set_margin_start()` and   `gtk_widget_set_margin_end()` instead
         * @default 0
         */
        get xpad(): number;
        set xpad(val: number);

        /**
         * The vertical alignment. A value of 0.0 means top alignment;
         * a value of 1.0 means bottom alignment.
         * @deprecated since 3.14: Use `gtk_widget_set_valign()` instead. If you are using   {@link Gtk.Label}, use {@link Gtk.Label.yalign} instead.
         * @default 0.5
         */
        get yalign(): number;
        set yalign(val: number);

        /**
         * The amount of space to add on the top and bottom of the widget, in
         * pixels.
         * @deprecated since 3.14: Use `gtk_widget_set_margin_top()` and   `gtk_widget_set_margin_bottom()` instead
         * @default 0
         */
        get ypad(): number;
        set ypad(val: number);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: Misc.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        widget: Widget;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<Misc.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof Misc.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Misc.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof Misc.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Misc.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof Misc.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<Misc.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Gets the X and Y alignment of the widget within its allocation.
         * See `gtk_misc_set_alignment()`.
         */
        get_alignment(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the padding in the X and Y directions of the widget.
         * See `gtk_misc_set_padding()`.
         */
        get_padding(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Sets the alignment of the widget.
         * @param xalign the horizontal alignment, from 0 (left) to 1 (right).
         * @param yalign the vertical alignment, from 0 (top) to 1 (bottom).
         */
        set_alignment(xalign: number, yalign: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the amount of space to add around the widget.
         * @param xpad the amount of space to add on the left and right of the widget,   in pixels.
         * @param ypad the amount of space to add on the top and bottom of the widget,   in pixels.
         */
        set_padding(xpad: number, ypad: number): void;

        /**
         * Adds a child to `buildable`. `type` is an optional string
         * describing how the child should be added.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child to add
         * @param type kind of child or `null`
         */
        add_child(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object, type: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Constructs a child of `buildable` with the name `name`.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} calls this function if a “constructor” has been
         * specified in the UI definition.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param name name of child to construct
         * @returns the constructed child
         */
        construct_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, name: string): T;

        /**
         * This is similar to `gtk_buildable_parser_finished()` but is
         * called once for each custom tag handled by the `buildable`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname the name of the tag
         * @param data user data created in custom_tag_start
         */
        custom_finished(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
         * the buildable.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @param data user data that will be passed in to parser functions
         */
        custom_tag_end(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called for each unknown element under `<child>`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @returns `true` if a object has a custom implementation, `false`          if it doesn't.
         */
        custom_tag_start(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string): [boolean, GLib.MarkupParser, null];

        /**
         * Get the internal child called `childname` of the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param childname name of child
         * @returns the internal child of the buildable object
         */
        get_internal_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, childname: string): T;

        /**
         * Gets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} sets the name based on the
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI]
         * used to construct the `buildable`.
         * @returns the name set with `gtk_buildable_set_name()`
         */
        get_name(): string;

        /**
         * Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI].
         * Note that this will be called once for each time
         * `gtk_builder_add_from_file()` or `gtk_builder_add_from_string()`
         * is called on a builder.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         */
        parser_finished(builder: Builder): void;

        /**
         * Sets the property name `name` to `value` on the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param name name of property
         * @param value value of property
         */
        set_buildable_property(builder: Builder, name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;

        /**
         * Sets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * @param name name to set
         */
        set_name(name: string): void;

        /**
         * Adds a child to `buildable`. `type` is an optional string
         * describing how the child should be added.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child to add
         * @param type kind of child or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add_child(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object, type: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Constructs a child of `buildable` with the name `name`.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} calls this function if a “constructor” has been
         * specified in the UI definition.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param name name of child to construct
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_construct_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, name: string): T;

        /**
         * This is similar to `gtk_buildable_parser_finished()` but is
         * called once for each custom tag handled by the `buildable`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname the name of the tag
         * @param data user data created in custom_tag_start
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_finished(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
         * the buildable.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @param data user data that will be passed in to parser functions
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_tag_end(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called for each unknown element under `<child>`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_tag_start(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string): [boolean, GLib.MarkupParser, never];

        /**
         * Get the internal child called `childname` of the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param childname name of child
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_internal_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, childname: string): T;

        /**
         * Gets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} sets the name based on the
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI]
         * used to construct the `buildable`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_name(): string;

        /**
         * Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI].
         * Note that this will be called once for each time
         * `gtk_builder_add_from_file()` or `gtk_builder_add_from_string()`
         * is called on a builder.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_parser_finished(builder: Builder): void;

        /**
         * Sets the property name `name` to `value` on the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param name name of property
         * @param value value of property
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_buildable_property(builder: Builder, name: string, value: unknown): void;

        /**
         * Sets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * @param name name to set
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_name(name: string): void;
    }


    namespace ModelButton {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Button.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::active": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::centered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::icon": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::iconic": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::inverted": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::menu-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::always-show-image": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::image": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::image-position": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::label": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::relief": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-stock": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-underline": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::xalign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::yalign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::action-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::action-target": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::related-action": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-action-appearance": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Button.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Actionable.ConstructorProps, Activatable.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {
            active: boolean;
            centered: boolean;
            icon: Gio.Icon;
            iconic: boolean;
            inverted: boolean;
            menu_name: string;
            menuName: string;
            role: ButtonRole;
            text: string;
            use_markup: boolean;
            useMarkup: boolean;
        }
    }

    /**
     * GtkModelButton is a button class that can use a {@link Gio.Action} as its model.
     * In contrast to {@link Gtk.ToggleButton} or {@link Gtk.RadioButton}, which can also
     * be backed by a {@link Gio.Action} via the {@link Gtk.Actionable.action_name} property,
     * GtkModelButton will adapt its appearance according to the kind of
     * action it is backed by, and appear either as a plain, check or
     * radio button.
     * 
     * Model buttons are used when popovers from a menu model with
     * `gtk_popover_new_from_model()`; they can also be used manually in
     * a {@link Gtk.PopoverMenu}.
     * 
     * When the action is specified via the {@link Gtk.Actionable.action_name}
     * and {@link Gtk.Actionable.action_target} properties, the role of the button
     * (i.e. whether it is a plain, check or radio button) is determined by
     * the type of the action and doesn't have to be explicitly specified
     * with the {@link Gtk.ModelButton.role} property.
     * 
     * The content of the button is specified by the {@link Gtk.ModelButton.text}
     * and {@link Gtk.ModelButton.icon} properties.
     * 
     * The appearance of model buttons can be influenced with the
     * {@link Gtk.ModelButton.centered} and {@link Gtk.ModelButton.iconic} properties.
     * 
     * Model buttons have built-in support for submenus in {@link Gtk.PopoverMenu}.
     * To make a GtkModelButton that opens a submenu when activated, set
     * the {@link Gtk.ModelButton.menu_name} property. To make a button that goes
     * back to the parent menu, you should set the {@link Gtk.ModelButton.inverted}
     * property to place the submenu indicator at the opposite side.
     * 
     * # Example
     * 
     * 
     * ```
     * <object class="GtkPopoverMenu">
     *   <child>
     *     <object class="GtkBox">
     *       <property name="visible">True</property>
     *       <property name="margin">10</property>
     *       <child>
     *         <object class="GtkModelButton">
     *           <property name="visible">True</property>
     *           <property name="action-name">view.cut</property>
     *           <property name="text" translatable="yes">Cut</property>
     *         </object>
     *       </child>
     *       <child>
     *         <object class="GtkModelButton">
     *           <property name="visible">True</property>
     *           <property name="action-name">view.copy</property>
     *           <property name="text" translatable="yes">Copy</property>
     *         </object>
     *       </child>
     *       <child>
     *         <object class="GtkModelButton">
     *           <property name="visible">True</property>
     *           <property name="action-name">view.paste</property>
     *           <property name="text" translatable="yes">Paste</property>
     *         </object>
     *       </child>
     *     </object>
     *   </child>
     * </object>
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * # CSS nodes
     * 
     * 
     * ```
     * modelbutton
     * ├── <child>
     * ╰── check
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * 
     * ```
     * modelbutton
     * ├── <child>
     * ╰── radio
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * 
     * ```
     * modelbutton
     * ├── <child>
     * ╰── arrow
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * GtkModelButton has a main CSS node with name modelbutton, and a subnode,
     * which will have the name check, radio or arrow, depending on the role
     * of the button and whether it has a menu name set.
     * 
     * The subnode is positioned before or after the content nodes and gets the
     * .left or .right style class, depending on where it is located.
     * 
     * 
     * ```
     * button.model
     * ├── <child>
     * ╰── check
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * Iconic model buttons (see {@link Gtk.ModelButton.iconic}) change the name of
     * their main node to button and add a .model style class to it. The indicator
     * subnode is invisible in this case.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class ModelButton extends Button implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Actionable, Activatable, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ModelButton>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * The state of the button. This is reflecting the state of the associated
         * {@link Gio.Action}.
         * @since 3.16
         * @default false
         */
        get active(): boolean;
        set active(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether to render the button contents centered instead of left-aligned.
         * This property should be set for title-like items.
         * @since 3.16
         * @default false
         */
        get centered(): boolean;
        set centered(val: boolean);

        /**
         * A {@link Gio.Icon} that will be used if iconic appearance for the button is
         * desired.
         * @since 3.16
         */
        get icon(): Gio.Icon;
        set icon(val: Gio.Icon);

        /**
         * If this property is set, the button will show an icon if one is set.
         * If no icon is set, the text will be used. This is typically used for
         * horizontal sections of linked buttons.
         * @since 3.16
         * @default false
         */
        get iconic(): boolean;
        set iconic(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether to show the submenu indicator at the opposite side than normal.
         * This property should be set for model buttons that 'go back' to a parent
         * menu.
         * @since 3.16
         * @default false
         */
        get inverted(): boolean;
        set inverted(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The name of a submenu to open when the button is activated.
         * If this is set, the button should not have an action associated with it.
         * @since 3.16
         * @default null
         */
        get menu_name(): string;
        set menu_name(val: string);

        /**
         * The name of a submenu to open when the button is activated.
         * If this is set, the button should not have an action associated with it.
         * @since 3.16
         * @default null
         */
        get menuName(): string;
        set menuName(val: string);

        /**
         * Specifies whether the button is a plain, check or radio button.
         * When {@link Gtk.Actionable.action_name} is set, the role will be determined
         * from the action and does not have to be set explicitly.
         * @since 3.16
         * @default Gtk.ButtonRole.NORMAL
         */
        get role(): ButtonRole;
        set role(val: ButtonRole);

        /**
         * The label for the button.
         * @since 3.16
         */
        get text(): string;
        set text(val: string);

        /**
         * If `true`, XML tags in the text of the button are interpreted as by
         * `pango_parse_markup()` to format the enclosed spans of text. If `false`, the
         * text will be displayed verbatim.
         * @since 3.24
         * @default false
         */
        get use_markup(): boolean;
        set use_markup(val: boolean);

        /**
         * If `true`, XML tags in the text of the button are interpreted as by
         * `pango_parse_markup()` to format the enclosed spans of text. If `false`, the
         * text will be displayed verbatim.
         * @since 3.24
         * @default false
         */
        get useMarkup(): boolean;
        set useMarkup(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: ModelButton.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<ModelButton.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): ModelButton;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof ModelButton.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ModelButton.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof ModelButton.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ModelButton.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof ModelButton.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<ModelButton.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        /**
         * @default null
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable
         */
        get action_name(): string | null;
        set action_name(val: string | null);

        /**
         * @default null
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable
         */
        get actionName(): string | null;
        set actionName(val: string | null);

        /** @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable */
        get action_target(): GLib.Variant;
        set action_target(val: GLib.Variant);

        /** @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable */
        get actionTarget(): GLib.Variant;
        set actionTarget(val: GLib.Variant);

        /**
         * The action that this activatable will activate and receive
         * updates from for various states and possibly appearance.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the this property and
         * > call `gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action()` when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get related_action(): Action;
        set related_action(val: Action);

        /**
         * The action that this activatable will activate and receive
         * updates from for various states and possibly appearance.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the this property and
         * > call `gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action()` when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get relatedAction(): Action;
        set relatedAction(val: Action);

        /**
         * Whether this activatable should reset its layout
         * and appearance when setting the related action or when
         * the action changes appearance.
         * 
         * See the {@link Gtk.Action} documentation directly to find which properties
         * should be ignored by the {@link Gtk.Activatable} when this property is `false`.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle this property
         * > and call `gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties()` on the activatable
         * > widget when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get use_action_appearance(): boolean;
        set use_action_appearance(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether this activatable should reset its layout
         * and appearance when setting the related action or when
         * the action changes appearance.
         * 
         * See the {@link Gtk.Action} documentation directly to find which properties
         * should be ignored by the {@link Gtk.Activatable} when this property is `false`.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle this property
         * > and call `gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties()` on the activatable
         * > widget when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get useActionAppearance(): boolean;
        set useActionAppearance(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Gets the action name for `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_name()` for more information.
         * @returns the action name, or `null` if none is set
         */
        get_action_name(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the current target value of `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_target_value()` for more information.
         * @returns the current target value
         */
        get_action_target_value(): GLib.Variant;

        /**
         * Specifies the name of the action with which this widget should be
         * associated.  If `action_name` is `null` then the widget will be
         * unassociated from any previous action.
         * 
         * Usually this function is used when the widget is located (or will be
         * located) within the hierarchy of a {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow}.
         * 
         * Names are of the form “win.save” or “app.quit” for actions on the
         * containing {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow} or its associated {@link Gtk.Application},
         * respectively.  This is the same form used for actions in the {@link Gio.Menu}
         * associated with the window.
         * @param action_name an action name, or `null`
         */
        set_action_name(action_name: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the target value of an actionable widget.
         * 
         * If `target_value` is `null` then the target value is unset.
         * 
         * The target value has two purposes.  First, it is used as the
         * parameter to activation of the action associated with the
         * {@link Gtk.Actionable} widget. Second, it is used to determine if the widget
         * should be rendered as “active” — the widget is active if the state
         * is equal to the given target.
         * 
         * Consider the example of associating a set of buttons with a {@link Gio.Action}
         * with string state in a typical “radio button” situation.  Each button
         * will be associated with the same action, but with a different target
         * value for that action.  Clicking on a particular button will activate
         * the action with the target of that button, which will typically cause
         * the action’s state to change to that value.  Since the action’s state
         * is now equal to the target value of the button, the button will now
         * be rendered as active (and the other buttons, with different targets,
         * rendered inactive).
         * @param target_value a {@link GLib.Variant} to set as the target value, or `null`
         */
        set_action_target_value(target_value: GLib.Variant | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the action-name and associated string target value of an
         * actionable widget.
         * 
         * `detailed_action_name` is a string in the format accepted by
         * `g_action_parse_detailed_name()`.
         * 
         * (Note that prior to version 3.22.25,
         * this function is only usable for actions with a simple "s" target, and
         * `detailed_action_name` must be of the form `"action::target"` where
         * `action` is the action name and `target` is the string to use
         * as the target.)
         * @param detailed_action_name the detailed action name
         */
        set_detailed_action_name(detailed_action_name: string): void;

        /**
         * Gets the action name for `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_name()` for more information.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_action_name(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the current target value of `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_target_value()` for more information.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_action_target_value(): GLib.Variant;

        /**
         * Specifies the name of the action with which this widget should be
         * associated.  If `action_name` is `null` then the widget will be
         * unassociated from any previous action.
         * 
         * Usually this function is used when the widget is located (or will be
         * located) within the hierarchy of a {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow}.
         * 
         * Names are of the form “win.save” or “app.quit” for actions on the
         * containing {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow} or its associated {@link Gtk.Application},
         * respectively.  This is the same form used for actions in the {@link Gio.Menu}
         * associated with the window.
         * @param action_name an action name, or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_action_name(action_name: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the target value of an actionable widget.
         * 
         * If `target_value` is `null` then the target value is unset.
         * 
         * The target value has two purposes.  First, it is used as the
         * parameter to activation of the action associated with the
         * {@link Gtk.Actionable} widget. Second, it is used to determine if the widget
         * should be rendered as “active” — the widget is active if the state
         * is equal to the given target.
         * 
         * Consider the example of associating a set of buttons with a {@link Gio.Action}
         * with string state in a typical “radio button” situation.  Each button
         * will be associated with the same action, but with a different target
         * value for that action.  Clicking on a particular button will activate
         * the action with the target of that button, which will typically cause
         * the action’s state to change to that value.  Since the action’s state
         * is now equal to the target value of the button, the button will now
         * be rendered as active (and the other buttons, with different targets,
         * rendered inactive).
         * @param target_value a {@link GLib.Variant} to set as the target value, or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_action_target_value(target_value: GLib.Variant | null): void;

        /**
         * This is a utility function for {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors.
         * 
         * When implementing {@link Gtk.Activatable} you must call this when
         * handling changes of the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action}, and
         * you must also use this to break references in {@link GObject.Object}->dispose().
         * 
         * This function adds a reference to the currently set related
         * action for you, it also makes sure the {@link Gtk.Activatable}->update()
         * method is called when the related {@link Gtk.Action} properties change
         * and registers to the action’s proxy list.
         * 
         * > Be careful to call this before setting the local
         * > copy of the {@link Gtk.Action} property, since this function uses
         * > `gtk_activatable_get_related_action()` to retrieve the
         * > previous action.
         * @param action the {@link Gtk.Action} to set
         */
        do_set_related_action(action: Action): void;

        /**
         * Gets the related {@link Gtk.Action} for `activatable`.
         * @returns the related {@link Gtk.Action} if one is set.
         */
        get_related_action(): Action;

        /**
         * Gets whether this activatable should reset its layout
         * and appearance when setting the related action or when
         * the action changes appearance.
         * @returns whether `activatable` uses its actions appearance.
         */
        get_use_action_appearance(): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the related action on the `activatable` object.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action}
         * > property and call `gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action()` when it changes.
         * @param action the {@link Gtk.Action} to set
         */
        set_related_action(action: Action): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether this activatable should reset its layout and appearance
         * when setting the related action or when the action changes appearance
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} property and call
         * > `gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties()` to update `activatable`
         * > if needed.
         * @param use_appearance whether to use the actions appearance
         */
        set_use_action_appearance(use_appearance: boolean): void;

        /**
         * This is called to update the activatable completely, this is called
         * internally when the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action} property is set
         * or unset and by the implementing class when
         * {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} changes.
         * @param action the related {@link Gtk.Action} or `null`
         */
        sync_action_properties(action: Action | null): void;

        /**
         * This is called to update the activatable completely, this is called
         * internally when the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action} property is set
         * or unset and by the implementing class when
         * {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} changes.
         * @param action the related {@link Gtk.Action} or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_sync_action_properties(action: Action | null): void;

        /**
         * Called to update the activatable when its related action’s properties change.
         * You must check the {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} property only apply action
         * properties that are meant to effect the appearance accordingly.
         * @param action 
         * @param property_name 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_update(action: Action, property_name: string): void;

        /**
         * Emits a {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.child_notify | Gtk.Widget::child-notify} signal for the
         * [child property][child-properties] `child_property`
         * on `widget`.
         * 
         * This is the analogue of `g_object_notify()` for child properties.
         * 
         * Also see `gtk_container_child_notify()`.
         * @param child_property the name of a child property installed on the                  class of `widget`’s parent
         */
        child_notify(child_property: string): void;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Gtk.Container.child_notify
        child_notify(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Returns whether the widget should grab focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
         * See `gtk_widget_set_focus_on_click()`.
         * @returns `true` if the widget should grab focus when it is clicked with               the mouse.
         */
        get_focus_on_click(): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets whether the widget should grab focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
         * Making mouse clicks not grab focus is useful in places like toolbars where
         * you don’t want the keyboard focus removed from the main area of the
         * application.
         * @param focus_on_click whether the widget should grab focus when clicked with the mouse
         */
        set_focus_on_click(focus_on_click: boolean): void;
    }


    namespace MountOperation {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Gio.MountOperation.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::is-showing": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::screen": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::anonymous": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::choice": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::domain": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-tcrypt-hidden-volume": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-tcrypt-system-volume": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::password": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::password-save": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::pim": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::username": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Gio.MountOperation.ConstructorProps {
            is_showing: boolean;
            isShowing: boolean;
            parent: Window;
            screen: Gdk.Screen;
        }
    }

    /**
     * This should not be accessed directly. Use the accessor functions below.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class MountOperation extends Gio.MountOperation {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<MountOperation>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * @read-only
         * @default false
         */
        get is_showing(): boolean;

        /**
         * @read-only
         * @default false
         */
        get isShowing(): boolean;

        get parent(): Window;
        set parent(val: Window);

        get screen(): Gdk.Screen;
        set screen(val: Gdk.Screen);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: MountOperation.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<MountOperation.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](parent: Window | null): MountOperation;

        // Conflicted with Gio.MountOperation.new
        static ["new"](...args: never[]): any;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof MountOperation.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, MountOperation.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof MountOperation.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, MountOperation.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof MountOperation.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<MountOperation.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Gets the transient parent used by the {@link Gtk.MountOperation}
         * @returns the transient parent for windows shown by `op`
         */
        get_parent(): Window;

        /**
         * Gets the screen on which windows of the {@link Gtk.MountOperation}
         * will be shown.
         * @returns the screen on which windows of `op` are shown
         */
        get_screen(): Gdk.Screen;

        /**
         * Sets the transient parent for windows shown by the
         * {@link Gtk.MountOperation}.
         * @param parent transient parent of the window, or `null`
         */
        set_parent(parent: Window | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the screen to show windows of the {@link Gtk.MountOperation} on.
         * @param screen a {@link Gdk.Screen}
         */
        set_screen(screen: Gdk.Screen): void;
    }


    namespace NativeDialog {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends GObject.Object.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * Emitted when the user responds to the dialog.
             * 
             * When this is called the dialog has been hidden.
             * 
             * If you call `gtk_native_dialog_hide()` before the user responds to
             * the dialog this signal will not be emitted.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.20
             * @run-last
             */
            response: (arg0: number) => void;
            "notify::modal": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::title": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::transient-for": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.Object.ConstructorProps {
            modal: boolean;
            title: string | null;
            transient_for: Window | null;
            transientFor: Window | null;
            visible: boolean;
        }
    }

    /**
     * Native dialogs are platform dialogs that don't use {@link Gtk.Dialog} or
     * {@link Gtk.Window}. They are used in order to integrate better with a
     * platform, by looking the same as other native applications and
     * supporting platform specific features.
     * 
     * The {@link Gtk.Dialog} functions cannot be used on such objects, but we
     * need a similar API in order to drive them. The {@link Gtk.NativeDialog}
     * object is an API that allows you to do this. It allows you to set
     * various common properties on the dialog, as well as show and hide
     * it and get a {@link Gtk.NativeDialog.SignalSignatures.response | Gtk.NativeDialog::response} signal when the user finished
     * with the dialog.
     * 
     * There is also a `gtk_native_dialog_run()` helper that makes it easy
     * to run any native dialog in a modal way with a recursive mainloop,
     * similar to `gtk_dialog_run()`.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    abstract class NativeDialog extends GObject.Object {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<NativeDialog>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * Whether the window should be modal with respect to its transient parent.
         * @since 3.20
         * @default false
         */
        get modal(): boolean;
        set modal(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The title of the dialog window
         * @since 3.20
         * @default null
         */
        get title(): string | null;
        set title(val: string | null);

        /**
         * The transient parent of the dialog, or `null` for none.
         * @since 3.20
         */
        get transient_for(): Window | null;
        set transient_for(val: Window | null);

        /**
         * The transient parent of the dialog, or `null` for none.
         * @since 3.20
         */
        get transientFor(): Window | null;
        set transientFor(val: Window | null);

        /**
         * Whether the window is currenlty visible.
         * @since 3.20
         * @default false
         */
        get visible(): boolean;
        set visible(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: NativeDialog.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<NativeDialog.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof NativeDialog.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, NativeDialog.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof NativeDialog.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, NativeDialog.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof NativeDialog.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<NativeDialog.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * Hides the dialog if it is visilbe, aborting any interaction. Once this
         * is called the  {@link Gtk.NativeDialog.SignalSignatures.response | Gtk.NativeDialog::response} signal will not be emitted
         * until after the next call to `gtk_native_dialog_show()`.
         * 
         * If the dialog is not visible this does nothing.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_hide(): void;

        /**
         * @param response_id 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_response(response_id: number): void;

        /**
         * Shows the dialog on the display, allowing the user to interact with
         * it. When the user accepts the state of the dialog the dialog will
         * be automatically hidden and the {@link Gtk.NativeDialog.SignalSignatures.response | Gtk.NativeDialog::response} signal
         * will be emitted.
         * 
         * Multiple calls while the dialog is visible will be ignored.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_show(): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Destroys a dialog.
         * 
         * When a dialog is destroyed, it will break any references it holds
         * to other objects. If it is visible it will be hidden and any underlying
         * window system resources will be destroyed.
         * 
         * Note that this does not release any reference to the object (as opposed to
         * destroying a GtkWindow) because there is no reference from the windowing
         * system to the {@link Gtk.NativeDialog}.
         */
        destroy(): void;

        /**
         * Returns whether the dialog is modal. See `gtk_native_dialog_set_modal()`.
         * @returns `true` if the dialog is set to be modal
         */
        get_modal(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the title of the {@link Gtk.NativeDialog}.
         * @returns the title of the dialog, or `null` if none has    been set explicitly. The returned string is owned by the widget    and must not be modified or freed.
         */
        get_title(): string | null;

        /**
         * Fetches the transient parent for this window. See
         * `gtk_native_dialog_set_transient_for()`.
         * @returns the transient parent for this window, or `null` if no transient parent has been set.
         */
        get_transient_for(): Window | null;

        /**
         * Determines whether the dialog is visible.
         * @returns `true` if the dialog is visible
         */
        get_visible(): boolean;

        /**
         * Hides the dialog if it is visilbe, aborting any interaction. Once this
         * is called the  {@link Gtk.NativeDialog.SignalSignatures.response | Gtk.NativeDialog::response} signal will not be emitted
         * until after the next call to `gtk_native_dialog_show()`.
         * 
         * If the dialog is not visible this does nothing.
         */
        hide(): void;

        /**
         * Blocks in a recursive main loop until `self` emits the
         * {@link Gtk.NativeDialog.SignalSignatures.response | Gtk.NativeDialog::response} signal. It then returns the response ID
         * from the ::response signal emission.
         * 
         * Before entering the recursive main loop, `gtk_native_dialog_run()`
         * calls `gtk_native_dialog_show()` on the dialog for you.
         * 
         * After `gtk_native_dialog_run()` returns, then dialog will be hidden.
         * 
         * Typical usage of this function might be:
         * 
         * ```c
         *   gint result = gtk_native_dialog_run (GTK_NATIVE_DIALOG (dialog));
         *   switch (result)
         *     {
         *       case GTK_RESPONSE_ACCEPT:
         *          do_application_specific_something ();
         *          break;
         *       default:
         *          do_nothing_since_dialog_was_cancelled ();
         *          break;
         *     }
         *   g_object_unref (dialog);
         * ```
         * 
         * 
         * Note that even though the recursive main loop gives the effect of a
         * modal dialog (it prevents the user from interacting with other
         * windows in the same window group while the dialog is run), callbacks
         * such as timeouts, IO channel watches, DND drops, etc, will
         * be triggered during a `gtk_native_dialog_run()` call.
         * @returns response ID
         */
        run(): number;

        /**
         * Sets a dialog modal or non-modal. Modal dialogs prevent interaction
         * with other windows in the same application. To keep modal dialogs
         * on top of main application windows, use
         * `gtk_native_dialog_set_transient_for()` to make the dialog transient for the
         * parent; most [window managers][gtk-X11-arch]
         * will then disallow lowering the dialog below the parent.
         * @param modal whether the window is modal
         */
        set_modal(modal: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the title of the {@link Gtk.NativeDialog}.
         * @param title title of the dialog
         */
        set_title(title: string): void;

        /**
         * Dialog windows should be set transient for the main application
         * window they were spawned from. This allows
         * [window managers][gtk-X11-arch] to e.g. keep the
         * dialog on top of the main window, or center the dialog over the
         * main window.
         * 
         * Passing `null` for `parent` unsets the current transient window.
         * @param parent parent window, or `null`
         */
        set_transient_for(parent: Window | null): void;

        /**
         * Shows the dialog on the display, allowing the user to interact with
         * it. When the user accepts the state of the dialog the dialog will
         * be automatically hidden and the {@link Gtk.NativeDialog.SignalSignatures.response | Gtk.NativeDialog::response} signal
         * will be emitted.
         * 
         * Multiple calls while the dialog is visible will be ignored.
         */
        show(): void;
    }


    namespace Notebook {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Container.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "change-current-page": (arg0: number) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * The ::create-window signal is emitted when a detachable
             * tab is dropped on the root window.
             * 
             * A handler for this signal can create a window containing
             * a notebook where the tab will be attached. It is also
             * responsible for moving/resizing the window and adding the
             * necessary properties to the notebook (e.g. the
             * {@link Gtk.Notebook.group_name} ).
             * @signal
             * @since 2.12
             * @run-last
             */
            "create-window": (arg0: Widget, arg1: number, arg2: number) => Notebook;
            /**
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "focus-tab": (arg0: NotebookTab) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "move-focus-out": (arg0: DirectionType) => void;
            /**
             * the ::page-added signal is emitted in the notebook
             * right after a page is added to the notebook.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.10
             * @run-last
             */
            "page-added": (arg0: Widget, arg1: number) => void;
            /**
             * the ::page-removed signal is emitted in the notebook
             * right after a page is removed from the notebook.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.10
             * @run-last
             */
            "page-removed": (arg0: Widget, arg1: number) => void;
            /**
             * the ::page-reordered signal is emitted in the notebook
             * right after a page has been reordered.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.10
             * @run-last
             */
            "page-reordered": (arg0: Widget, arg1: number) => void;
            /**
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "reorder-tab": (arg0: DirectionType, arg1: boolean) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "select-page": (arg0: boolean) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * Emitted when the user or a function changes the current page.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "switch-page": (arg0: Widget, arg1: number) => void;
            "notify::enable-popup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::group-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::page": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scrollable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::show-border": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::show-tabs": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tab-pos": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Container.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {
            enable_popup: boolean;
            enablePopup: boolean;
            group_name: string | null;
            groupName: string | null;
            page: number;
            scrollable: boolean;
            show_border: boolean;
            showBorder: boolean;
            show_tabs: boolean;
            showTabs: boolean;
            tab_pos: PositionType;
            tabPos: PositionType;
        }
    }

    /**
     * The {@link Gtk.Notebook} widget is a {@link Gtk.Container} whose children are pages that
     * can be switched between using tab labels along one edge.
     * 
     * There are many configuration options for GtkNotebook. Among other
     * things, you can choose on which edge the tabs appear
     * (see `gtk_notebook_set_tab_pos()`), whether, if there are too many
     * tabs to fit the notebook should be made bigger or scrolling
     * arrows added (see `gtk_notebook_set_scrollable()`), and whether there
     * will be a popup menu allowing the users to switch pages.
     * (see `gtk_notebook_popup_enable()`, `gtk_notebook_popup_disable()`)
     * 
     * # GtkNotebook as GtkBuildable
     * 
     * The GtkNotebook implementation of the {@link Gtk.Buildable} interface
     * supports placing children into tabs by specifying “tab” as the
     * “type” attribute of a `<child>` element. Note that the content
     * of the tab must be created before the tab can be filled.
     * A tab child can be specified without specifying a `<child>`
     * type attribute.
     * 
     * To add a child widget in the notebooks action area, specify
     * "action-start" or “action-end” as the “type” attribute of the
     * `<child>` element.
     * 
     * An example of a UI definition fragment with GtkNotebook:
     * 
     * 
     * ```xml
     * <object class="GtkNotebook">
     *   <child>
     *     <object class="GtkLabel" id="notebook-content">
     *       <property name="label">Content</property>
     *     </object>
     *   </child>
     *   <child type="tab">
     *     <object class="GtkLabel" id="notebook-tab">
     *       <property name="label">Tab</property>
     *     </object>
     *   </child>
     * </object>
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * # CSS nodes
     * 
     * 
     * ```
     * notebook
     * ├── header.top
     * │   ├── [<action widget>]
     * │   ├── tabs
     * │   │   ├── [arrow]
     * │   │   ├── tab
     * │   │   │   ╰── <tab label>
     * ┊   ┊   ┊
     * │   │   ├── tab[.reorderable-page]
     * │   │   │   ╰── <tab label>
     * │   │   ╰── [arrow]
     * │   ╰── [<action widget>]
     * │
     * ╰── stack
     *     ├── <child>
     *     ┊
     *     ╰── <child>
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * GtkNotebook has a main CSS node with name notebook, a subnode
     * with name header and below that a subnode with name tabs which
     * contains one subnode per tab with name tab.
     * 
     * If action widgets are present, their CSS nodes are placed next
     * to the tabs node. If the notebook is scrollable, CSS nodes with
     * name arrow are placed as first and last child of the tabs node.
     * 
     * The main node gets the .frame style class when the notebook
     * has a border (see `gtk_notebook_set_show_border()`).
     * 
     * The header node gets one of the style class .top, .bottom,
     * .left or .right, depending on where the tabs are placed. For
     * reorderable pages, the tab node gets the .reorderable-page class.
     * 
     * A tab node gets the .dnd style class while it is moved with drag-and-drop.
     * 
     * The nodes are always arranged from left-to-right, regarldess of text direction.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class Notebook extends Container implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<Notebook>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get enable_popup(): boolean;
        set enable_popup(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get enablePopup(): boolean;
        set enablePopup(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Group name for tab drag and drop.
         * @since 2.24
         * @default null
         */
        get group_name(): string | null;
        set group_name(val: string | null);

        /**
         * Group name for tab drag and drop.
         * @since 2.24
         * @default null
         */
        get groupName(): string | null;
        set groupName(val: string | null);

        /**
         * @default -1
         */
        get page(): number;
        set page(val: number);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get scrollable(): boolean;
        set scrollable(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default true
         */
        get show_border(): boolean;
        set show_border(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default true
         */
        get showBorder(): boolean;
        set showBorder(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default true
         */
        get show_tabs(): boolean;
        set show_tabs(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default true
         */
        get showTabs(): boolean;
        set showTabs(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default Gtk.PositionType.TOP
         */
        get tab_pos(): PositionType;
        set tab_pos(val: PositionType);

        /**
         * @default Gtk.PositionType.TOP
         */
        get tabPos(): PositionType;
        set tabPos(val: PositionType);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: Notebook.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<Notebook.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): Notebook;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof Notebook.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Notebook.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof Notebook.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Notebook.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof Notebook.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<Notebook.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * @param offset 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_change_current_page(offset: number): boolean;

        /**
         * @param type 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_focus_tab(type: NotebookTab): boolean;

        /**
         * @param child 
         * @param tab_label 
         * @param menu_label 
         * @param position 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_insert_page(child: Widget, tab_label: Widget, menu_label: Widget, position: number): number;

        /**
         * @param direction 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_move_focus_out(direction: DirectionType): void;

        /**
         * @param child 
         * @param page_num 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_page_added(child: Widget, page_num: number): void;

        /**
         * @param child 
         * @param page_num 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_page_removed(child: Widget, page_num: number): void;

        /**
         * @param child 
         * @param page_num 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_page_reordered(child: Widget, page_num: number): void;

        /**
         * @param direction 
         * @param move_to_last 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_reorder_tab(direction: DirectionType, move_to_last: boolean): boolean;

        /**
         * @param move_focus 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_select_page(move_focus: boolean): boolean;

        /**
         * @param page 
         * @param page_num 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_switch_page(page: Widget, page_num: number): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Appends a page to `notebook`.
         * @param child the {@link Gtk.Widget} to use as the contents of the page
         * @param tab_label the {@link Gtk.Widget} to be used as the label     for the page, or `null` to use the default label, “page N”
         * @returns the index (starting from 0) of the appended     page in the notebook, or -1 if function fails
         */
        append_page(child: Widget, tab_label: Widget | null): number;

        /**
         * Appends a page to `notebook`, specifying the widget to use as the
         * label in the popup menu.
         * @param child the {@link Gtk.Widget} to use as the contents of the page
         * @param tab_label the {@link Gtk.Widget} to be used as the label     for the page, or `null` to use the default label, “page N”
         * @param menu_label the widget to use as a label for the     page-switch menu, if that is enabled. If `null`, and `tab_label`     is a {@link Gtk.Label} or `null`, then the menu label will be a newly     created label with the same text as `tab_label`; if `tab_label`     is not a {@link Gtk.Label}, `menu_label` must be specified if the     page-switch menu is to be used.
         * @returns the index (starting from 0) of the appended     page in the notebook, or -1 if function fails
         */
        append_page_menu(child: Widget, tab_label: Widget | null, menu_label: Widget | null): number;

        /**
         * Removes the child from the notebook.
         * 
         * This function is very similar to `gtk_container_remove()`,
         * but additionally informs the notebook that the removal
         * is happening as part of a tab DND operation, which should
         * not be cancelled.
         * @param child a child
         */
        detach_tab(child: Widget): void;

        /**
         * Gets one of the action widgets. See `gtk_notebook_set_action_widget()`.
         * @param pack_type pack type of the action widget to receive
         * @returns The action widget with the given `pack_type` or `null` when this action widget has not been set
         */
        get_action_widget(pack_type: PackType): Widget | null;

        /**
         * Returns the page number of the current page.
         * @returns the index (starting from 0) of the current     page in the notebook. If the notebook has no pages,     then -1 will be returned.
         */
        get_current_page(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the current group name for `notebook`.
         * @returns the group name, or `null` if none is set
         */
        get_group_name(): string | null;

        /**
         * Retrieves the menu label widget of the page containing `child`.
         * @param child a widget contained in a page of `notebook`
         * @returns the menu label, or `null` if the notebook page does not have a menu label other than the default (the tab label).
         */
        get_menu_label(child: Widget): Widget | null;

        /**
         * Retrieves the text of the menu label for the page containing
         * `child`.
         * @param child the child widget of a page of the notebook.
         * @returns the text of the tab label, or `null` if the widget does not have a menu label other than the default menu label, or the menu label widget is not a {@link Gtk.Label}. The string is owned by the widget and must not be freed.
         */
        get_menu_label_text(child: Widget): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the number of pages in a notebook.
         * @returns the number of pages in the notebook
         */
        get_n_pages(): number;

        /**
         * Returns the child widget contained in page number `page_num`.
         * @param page_num the index of a page in the notebook, or -1     to get the last page
         * @returns the child widget, or `null` if `page_num` is out of bounds
         */
        get_nth_page(page_num: number): Widget | null;

        /**
         * Returns whether the tab label area has arrows for scrolling.
         * See `gtk_notebook_set_scrollable()`.
         * @returns `true` if arrows for scrolling are present
         */
        get_scrollable(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns whether a bevel will be drawn around the notebook pages.
         * See `gtk_notebook_set_show_border()`.
         * @returns `true` if the bevel is drawn
         */
        get_show_border(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns whether the tabs of the notebook are shown.
         * See `gtk_notebook_set_show_tabs()`.
         * @returns `true` if the tabs are shown
         */
        get_show_tabs(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns whether the tab contents can be detached from `notebook`.
         * @param child a child {@link Gtk.Widget}
         * @returns `true` if the tab is detachable.
         */
        get_tab_detachable(child: Widget): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the horizontal width of a tab border.
         * @returns horizontal width of a tab border
         */
        get_tab_hborder(): number;

        /**
         * Returns the tab label widget for the page `child`.
         * `null` is returned if `child` is not in `notebook` or
         * if no tab label has specifically been set for `child`.
         * @param child the page
         * @returns the tab label
         */
        get_tab_label(child: Widget): Widget | null;

        /**
         * Retrieves the text of the tab label for the page containing
         * `child`.
         * @param child a widget contained in a page of `notebook`
         * @returns the text of the tab label, or `null` if the tab label widget is not a {@link Gtk.Label}. The string is owned by the widget and must not be freed.
         */
        get_tab_label_text(child: Widget): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the edge at which the tabs for switching pages in the
         * notebook are drawn.
         * @returns the edge at which the tabs are drawn
         */
        get_tab_pos(): PositionType;

        /**
         * Gets whether the tab can be reordered via drag and drop or not.
         * @param child a child {@link Gtk.Widget}
         * @returns `true` if the tab is reorderable.
         */
        get_tab_reorderable(child: Widget): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the vertical width of a tab border.
         * @returns vertical width of a tab border
         */
        get_tab_vborder(): number;

        /**
         * Insert a page into `notebook` at the given position.
         * @param child the {@link Gtk.Widget} to use as the contents of the page
         * @param tab_label the {@link Gtk.Widget} to be used as the label     for the page, or `null` to use the default label, “page N”
         * @param position the index (starting at 0) at which to insert the page,     or -1 to append the page after all other pages
         * @returns the index (starting from 0) of the inserted     page in the notebook, or -1 if function fails
         */
        insert_page(child: Widget, tab_label: Widget | null, position: number): number;

        /**
         * Insert a page into `notebook` at the given position, specifying
         * the widget to use as the label in the popup menu.
         * @param child the {@link Gtk.Widget} to use as the contents of the page
         * @param tab_label the {@link Gtk.Widget} to be used as the label     for the page, or `null` to use the default label, “page N”
         * @param menu_label the widget to use as a label for the     page-switch menu, if that is enabled. If `null`, and `tab_label`     is a {@link Gtk.Label} or `null`, then the menu label will be a newly     created label with the same text as `tab_label`; if `tab_label`     is not a {@link Gtk.Label}, `menu_label` must be specified if the     page-switch menu is to be used.
         * @param position the index (starting at 0) at which to insert the page,     or -1 to append the page after all other pages.
         * @returns the index (starting from 0) of the inserted     page in the notebook
         */
        insert_page_menu(child: Widget, tab_label: Widget | null, menu_label: Widget | null, position: number): number;

        /**
         * Switches to the next page. Nothing happens if the current page is
         * the last page.
         */
        next_page(): void;

        /**
         * Finds the index of the page which contains the given child
         * widget.
         * @param child a {@link Gtk.Widget}
         * @returns the index of the page containing `child`, or     -1 if `child` is not in the notebook
         */
        page_num(child: Widget): number;

        /**
         * Disables the popup menu.
         */
        popup_disable(): void;

        /**
         * Enables the popup menu: if the user clicks with the right
         * mouse button on the tab labels, a menu with all the pages
         * will be popped up.
         */
        popup_enable(): void;

        /**
         * Prepends a page to `notebook`.
         * @param child the {@link Gtk.Widget} to use as the contents of the page
         * @param tab_label the {@link Gtk.Widget} to be used as the label     for the page, or `null` to use the default label, “page N”
         * @returns the index (starting from 0) of the prepended     page in the notebook, or -1 if function fails
         */
        prepend_page(child: Widget, tab_label: Widget | null): number;

        /**
         * Prepends a page to `notebook`, specifying the widget to use as the
         * label in the popup menu.
         * @param child the {@link Gtk.Widget} to use as the contents of the page
         * @param tab_label the {@link Gtk.Widget} to be used as the label     for the page, or `null` to use the default label, “page N”
         * @param menu_label the widget to use as a label for the     page-switch menu, if that is enabled. If `null`, and `tab_label`     is a {@link Gtk.Label} or `null`, then the menu label will be a newly     created label with the same text as `tab_label`; if `tab_label`     is not a {@link Gtk.Label}, `menu_label` must be specified if the     page-switch menu is to be used.
         * @returns the index (starting from 0) of the prepended     page in the notebook, or -1 if function fails
         */
        prepend_page_menu(child: Widget, tab_label: Widget | null, menu_label: Widget | null): number;

        /**
         * Switches to the previous page. Nothing happens if the current page
         * is the first page.
         */
        prev_page(): void;

        /**
         * Removes a page from the notebook given its index
         * in the notebook.
         * @param page_num the index of a notebook page, starting     from 0. If -1, the last page will be removed.
         */
        remove_page(page_num: number): void;

        /**
         * Reorders the page containing `child`, so that it appears in position
         * `position`. If `position` is greater than or equal to the number of
         * children in the list or negative, `child` will be moved to the end
         * of the list.
         * @param child the child to move
         * @param position the new position, or -1 to move to the end
         */
        reorder_child(child: Widget, position: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets `widget` as one of the action widgets. Depending on the pack type
         * the widget will be placed before or after the tabs. You can use
         * a {@link Gtk.Box} if you need to pack more than one widget on the same side.
         * 
         * Note that action widgets are “internal” children of the notebook and thus
         * not included in the list returned from `gtk_container_foreach()`.
         * @param widget a {@link Gtk.Widget}
         * @param pack_type pack type of the action widget
         */
        set_action_widget(widget: Widget, pack_type: PackType): void;

        /**
         * Switches to the page number `page_num`.
         * 
         * Note that due to historical reasons, GtkNotebook refuses
         * to switch to a page unless the child widget is visible.
         * Therefore, it is recommended to show child widgets before
         * adding them to a notebook.
         * @param page_num index of the page to switch to, starting from 0.     If negative, the last page will be used. If greater     than the number of pages in the notebook, nothing     will be done.
         */
        set_current_page(page_num: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets a group name for `notebook`.
         * 
         * Notebooks with the same name will be able to exchange tabs
         * via drag and drop. A notebook with a `null` group name will
         * not be able to exchange tabs with any other notebook.
         * @param group_name the name of the notebook group,     or `null` to unset it
         */
        set_group_name(group_name: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Changes the menu label for the page containing `child`.
         * @param child the child widget
         * @param menu_label the menu label, or `null` for default
         */
        set_menu_label(child: Widget, menu_label: Widget | null): void;

        /**
         * Creates a new label and sets it as the menu label of `child`.
         * @param child the child widget
         * @param menu_text the label text
         */
        set_menu_label_text(child: Widget, menu_text: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the tab label area will have arrows for
         * scrolling if there are too many tabs to fit in the area.
         * @param scrollable `true` if scroll arrows should be added
         */
        set_scrollable(scrollable: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether a bevel will be drawn around the notebook pages.
         * This only has a visual effect when the tabs are not shown.
         * See `gtk_notebook_set_show_tabs()`.
         * @param show_border `true` if a bevel should be drawn around the notebook
         */
        set_show_border(show_border: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether to show the tabs for the notebook or not.
         * @param show_tabs `true` if the tabs should be shown
         */
        set_show_tabs(show_tabs: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the tab can be detached from `notebook` to another
         * notebook or widget.
         * 
         * Note that 2 notebooks must share a common group identificator
         * (see `gtk_notebook_set_group_name()`) to allow automatic tabs
         * interchange between them.
         * 
         * If you want a widget to interact with a notebook through DnD
         * (i.e.: accept dragged tabs from it) it must be set as a drop
         * destination and accept the target “GTK_NOTEBOOK_TAB”. The notebook
         * will fill the selection with a GtkWidget** pointing to the child
         * widget that corresponds to the dropped tab.
         * 
         * Note that you should use `gtk_notebook_detach_tab()` instead
         * of `gtk_container_remove()` if you want to remove the tab from
         * the source notebook as part of accepting a drop. Otherwise,
         * the source notebook will think that the dragged tab was
         * removed from underneath the ongoing drag operation, and
         * will initiate a drag cancel animation.
         * 
         * 
         * ```c
         *  static void
         *  on_drag_data_received (GtkWidget        *widget,
         *                         GdkDragContext   *context,
         *                         gint              x,
         *                         gint              y,
         *                         GtkSelectionData *data,
         *                         guint             info,
         *                         guint             time,
         *                         gpointer          user_data)
         *  {
         *    GtkWidget *notebook;
         *    GtkWidget **child;
         * 
         *    notebook = gtk_drag_get_source_widget (context);
         *    child = (void*) gtk_selection_data_get_data (data);
         * 
         *    // process_widget (*child);
         * 
         *    gtk_notebook_detach_tab (GTK_NOTEBOOK (notebook), *child);
         *  }
         * ```
         * 
         * 
         * If you want a notebook to accept drags from other widgets,
         * you will have to set your own DnD code to do it.
         * @param child a child {@link Gtk.Widget}
         * @param detachable whether the tab is detachable or not
         */
        set_tab_detachable(child: Widget, detachable: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Changes the tab label for `child`.
         * If `null` is specified for `tab_label`, then the page will
         * have the label “page N”.
         * @param child the page
         * @param tab_label the tab label widget to use, or `null`     for default tab label
         */
        set_tab_label(child: Widget, tab_label: Widget | null): void;

        /**
         * Creates a new label and sets it as the tab label for the page
         * containing `child`.
         * @param child the page
         * @param tab_text the label text
         */
        set_tab_label_text(child: Widget, tab_text: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets the edge at which the tabs for switching pages in the
         * notebook are drawn.
         * @param pos the edge to draw the tabs at
         */
        set_tab_pos(pos: PositionType): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the notebook tab can be reordered
         * via drag and drop or not.
         * @param child a child {@link Gtk.Widget}
         * @param reorderable whether the tab is reorderable or not
         */
        set_tab_reorderable(child: Widget, reorderable: boolean): void;
    }


    namespace NotebookAccessible {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends ContainerAccessible.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-layer": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-mdi-zorder": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-help-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-hypertext-nlinks": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption-object": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-summary": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends ContainerAccessible.ConstructorProps, Atk.Component.ConstructorProps, Atk.Selection.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class NotebookAccessible extends ContainerAccessible implements Atk.Component, Atk.Selection {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<NotebookAccessible>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: NotebookAccessible.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<NotebookAccessible.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof NotebookAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, NotebookAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof NotebookAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, NotebookAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof NotebookAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<NotebookAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        /**
         * Adds the specified accessible child of the object to the
         * object's selection.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the child index.
         * @returns TRUE if success, FALSE otherwise.
         */
        add_selection(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Clears the selection in the object so that no children in the object
         * are selected.
         * @returns TRUE if success, FALSE otherwise.
         */
        clear_selection(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the number of accessible children currently selected.
         * Note: callers should not rely on `null` or on a zero value for
         * indication of whether AtkSelectionIface is implemented, they should
         * use type checking/interface checking macros or the
         * `atk_get_accessible_value()` convenience method.
         * @returns a gint representing the number of items selected, or 0 if `selection` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_selection_count(): number;

        /**
         * Determines if the current child of this object is selected
         * Note: callers should not rely on `null` or on a zero value for
         * indication of whether AtkSelectionIface is implemented, they should
         * use type checking/interface checking macros or the
         * `atk_get_accessible_value()` convenience method.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the child index.
         * @returns a gboolean representing the specified child is selected, or 0 if `selection` does not implement this interface.
         */
        is_child_selected(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets a reference to the accessible object representing the specified
         * selected child of the object.
         * Note: callers should not rely on `null` or on a zero value for
         * indication of whether AtkSelectionIface is implemented, they should
         * use type checking/interface checking macros or the
         * `atk_get_accessible_value()` convenience method.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the index in the selection set.  (e.g. the ith selection as opposed to the ith child).
         * @returns an {@link Atk.Object} representing the selected accessible, or `null` if `selection` does not implement this interface.
         */
        ref_selection(i: number): Atk.Object | null;

        /**
         * Removes the specified child of the object from the object's selection.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the index in the selection set.  (e.g. the ith selection as opposed to the ith child).
         * @returns TRUE if success, FALSE otherwise.
         */
        remove_selection(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Causes every child of the object to be selected if the object
         * supports multiple selections.
         * @returns TRUE if success, FALSE otherwise.
         */
        select_all_selection(): boolean;

        /**
         * Adds the specified accessible child of the object to the
         * object's selection.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the child index.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add_selection(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Clears the selection in the object so that no children in the object
         * are selected.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_clear_selection(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the number of accessible children currently selected.
         * Note: callers should not rely on `null` or on a zero value for
         * indication of whether AtkSelectionIface is implemented, they should
         * use type checking/interface checking macros or the
         * `atk_get_accessible_value()` convenience method.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_selection_count(): number;

        /**
         * Determines if the current child of this object is selected
         * Note: callers should not rely on `null` or on a zero value for
         * indication of whether AtkSelectionIface is implemented, they should
         * use type checking/interface checking macros or the
         * `atk_get_accessible_value()` convenience method.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the child index.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_is_child_selected(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets a reference to the accessible object representing the specified
         * selected child of the object.
         * Note: callers should not rely on `null` or on a zero value for
         * indication of whether AtkSelectionIface is implemented, they should
         * use type checking/interface checking macros or the
         * `atk_get_accessible_value()` convenience method.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the index in the selection set.  (e.g. the ith selection as opposed to the ith child).
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_ref_selection(i: number): Atk.Object | null;

        /**
         * Removes the specified child of the object from the object's selection.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the index in the selection set.  (e.g. the ith selection as opposed to the ith child).
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_remove_selection(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Causes every child of the object to be selected if the object
         * supports multiple selections.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_select_all_selection(): boolean;

        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_selection_changed(): void;
    }


    namespace NotebookPageAccessible {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Atk.Object.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::accessible-component-layer": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-mdi-zorder": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-help-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-hypertext-nlinks": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption-object": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-summary": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Atk.Object.ConstructorProps, Atk.Component.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class NotebookPageAccessible extends Atk.Object implements Atk.Component {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<NotebookPageAccessible>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: NotebookPageAccessible.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<NotebookPageAccessible.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](notebook: NotebookAccessible, child: Widget): NotebookPageAccessible;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof NotebookPageAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, NotebookPageAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof NotebookPageAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, NotebookPageAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof NotebookPageAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<NotebookPageAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        invalidate(): void;

        /**
         * Checks whether the specified point is within the extent of the `component`.
         * 
         * Toolkit implementor note: ATK provides a default implementation for
         * this virtual method. In general there are little reason to
         * re-implement it.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @returns `true` or `false` indicating whether the specified point is within the extent of the `component` or not
         */
        contains(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the alpha value (i.e. the opacity) for this
         * `component`, on a scale from 0 (fully transparent) to 1.0
         * (fully opaque).
         * @returns An alpha value from 0 to 1.0, inclusive.
         */
        get_alpha(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the rectangle which gives the extent of the `component`.
         * 
         * If the extent can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), all of x, y, width, height are set to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         */
        get_extents(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the layer of the component.
         * @returns an {@link Atk.Layer} which is the layer of the component
         */
        get_layer(): Atk.Layer;

        /**
         * Gets the zorder of the component. The value G_MININT will be returned
         * if the layer of the component is not ATK_LAYER_MDI or ATK_LAYER_WINDOW.
         * @returns a gint which is the zorder of the component, i.e. the depth at which the component is shown in relation to other components in the same container.
         */
        get_mdi_zorder(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the position of `component` in the form of
         * a point specifying `component`'s top-left corner.
         * 
         * If the position can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), x and y are set to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         */
        get_position(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the size of the `component` in terms of width and height.
         * 
         * If the size can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), width and height are set to -1.
         */
        get_size(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Grabs focus for this `component`.
         * @returns `true` if successful, `false` otherwise.
         */
        grab_focus(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets a reference to the accessible child, if one exists, at the
         * coordinate point specified by `x` and `y`.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @returns a reference to the accessible child, if one exists
         */
        ref_accessible_at_point(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): Atk.Object | null;

        /**
         * Remove the handler specified by `handler_id` from the list of
         * functions to be executed when this object receives focus events
         * (in or out).
         * @param handler_id the handler id of the focus handler to be removed from `component`
         */
        remove_focus_handler(handler_id: number): void;

        /**
         * Makes `component` visible on the screen by scrolling all necessary parents.
         * 
         * Contrary to atk_component_set_position, this does not actually move
         * `component` in its parent, this only makes the parents scroll so that the
         * object shows up on the screen, given its current position within the parents.
         * @param type specify where the object should be made visible.
         * @returns whether scrolling was successful.
         */
        scroll_to(type: Atk.ScrollType): boolean;

        /**
         * Move the top-left of `component` to a given position of the screen by
         * scrolling all necessary parents.
         * @param coords specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or to the parent object.
         * @param x x-position where to scroll to
         * @param y y-position where to scroll to
         * @returns whether scrolling was successful.
         */
        scroll_to_point(coords: Atk.CoordType, x: number, y: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the extents of `component`.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param width width to set for `component`
         * @param height height to set for `component`
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @returns `true` or `false` whether the extents were set or not
         */
        set_extents(x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the position of `component`.
         * 
         * Contrary to atk_component_scroll_to, this does not trigger any scrolling,
         * this just moves `component` in its parent.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the component's top level window
         * @returns `true` or `false` whether or not the position was set or not
         */
        set_position(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Set the size of the `component` in terms of width and height.
         * @param width width to set for `component`
         * @param height height to set for `component`
         * @returns `true` or `false` whether the size was set or not
         */
        set_size(width: number, height: number): boolean;

        /**
         * @param bounds 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_bounds_changed(bounds: Atk.Rectangle): void;

        /**
         * Checks whether the specified point is within the extent of the `component`.
         * 
         * Toolkit implementor note: ATK provides a default implementation for
         * this virtual method. In general there are little reason to
         * re-implement it.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_contains(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the alpha value (i.e. the opacity) for this
         * `component`, on a scale from 0 (fully transparent) to 1.0
         * (fully opaque).
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_alpha(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the rectangle which gives the extent of the `component`.
         * 
         * If the extent can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), all of x, y, width, height are set to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_extents(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the layer of the component.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_layer(): Atk.Layer;

        /**
         * Gets the zorder of the component. The value G_MININT will be returned
         * if the layer of the component is not ATK_LAYER_MDI or ATK_LAYER_WINDOW.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_mdi_zorder(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the position of `component` in the form of
         * a point specifying `component`'s top-left corner.
         * 
         * If the position can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), x and y are set to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_position(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the size of the `component` in terms of width and height.
         * 
         * If the size can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), width and height are set to -1.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_size(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Grabs focus for this `component`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_grab_focus(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets a reference to the accessible child, if one exists, at the
         * coordinate point specified by `x` and `y`.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_ref_accessible_at_point(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): Atk.Object | null;

        /**
         * Remove the handler specified by `handler_id` from the list of
         * functions to be executed when this object receives focus events
         * (in or out).
         * @param handler_id the handler id of the focus handler to be removed from `component`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_remove_focus_handler(handler_id: number): void;

        /**
         * Makes `component` visible on the screen by scrolling all necessary parents.
         * 
         * Contrary to atk_component_set_position, this does not actually move
         * `component` in its parent, this only makes the parents scroll so that the
         * object shows up on the screen, given its current position within the parents.
         * @param type specify where the object should be made visible.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_scroll_to(type: Atk.ScrollType): boolean;

        /**
         * Move the top-left of `component` to a given position of the screen by
         * scrolling all necessary parents.
         * @param coords specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or to the parent object.
         * @param x x-position where to scroll to
         * @param y y-position where to scroll to
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_scroll_to_point(coords: Atk.CoordType, x: number, y: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the extents of `component`.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param width width to set for `component`
         * @param height height to set for `component`
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_extents(x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the position of `component`.
         * 
         * Contrary to atk_component_scroll_to, this does not trigger any scrolling,
         * this just moves `component` in its parent.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the component's top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_position(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Set the size of the `component` in terms of width and height.
         * @param width width to set for `component`
         * @param height height to set for `component`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_size(width: number, height: number): boolean;
    }


    namespace NumerableIcon {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Gio.EmblemedIcon.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::background-icon": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::background-icon-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::count": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::label": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style-context": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gicon": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Gio.EmblemedIcon.ConstructorProps, Gio.Icon.ConstructorProps {
            background_icon: Gio.Icon;
            backgroundIcon: Gio.Icon;
            background_icon_name: string | null;
            backgroundIconName: string | null;
            count: number;
            label: string | null;
            style_context: StyleContext | null;
            styleContext: StyleContext | null;
        }
    }

    /**
     * GtkNumerableIcon is a subclass of {@link Gio.EmblemedIcon} that can
     * show a number or short string as an emblem. The number can
     * be overlayed on top of another emblem, if desired.
     * 
     * It supports theming by taking font and color information
     * from a provided {@link Gtk.StyleContext}; see
     * `gtk_numerable_icon_set_style_context()`.
     * 
     * Typical numerable icons:
     * ![](numerableicon.png)
     * ![](numerableicon2.png)
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class NumerableIcon extends Gio.EmblemedIcon implements Gio.Icon {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<NumerableIcon>;

        // Properties
        get background_icon(): Gio.Icon;
        set background_icon(val: Gio.Icon);

        get backgroundIcon(): Gio.Icon;
        set backgroundIcon(val: Gio.Icon);

        /**
         * @default null
         */
        get background_icon_name(): string | null;
        set background_icon_name(val: string | null);

        /**
         * @default null
         */
        get backgroundIconName(): string | null;
        set backgroundIconName(val: string | null);

        /**
         * @default 0
         */
        get count(): number;
        set count(val: number);

        /**
         * @default null
         */
        get label(): string | null;
        set label(val: string | null);

        get style_context(): StyleContext | null;
        set style_context(val: StyleContext | null);

        get styleContext(): StyleContext | null;
        set styleContext(val: StyleContext | null);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: NumerableIcon.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<NumerableIcon.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof NumerableIcon.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, NumerableIcon.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof NumerableIcon.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, NumerableIcon.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof NumerableIcon.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<NumerableIcon.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Static methods
        /**
         * Creates a new unthemed {@link Gtk.NumerableIcon}.
         * @param base_icon a {@link Gio.Icon} to overlay on
         */
        static ["new"](base_icon: Gio.Icon): Gio.Icon;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
    // Conflicted with Gio.EmblemedIcon.new
        static ["new"](...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Creates a new {@link Gtk.NumerableIcon} which will themed according
         * to the passed {@link Gtk.StyleContext}. This is a convenience constructor
         * that calls `gtk_numerable_icon_set_style_context()` internally.
         * @param base_icon a {@link Gio.Icon} to overlay on
         * @param context a {@link Gtk.StyleContext}
         */
        static new_with_style_context(base_icon: Gio.Icon, context: StyleContext): Gio.Icon;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Returns the {@link Gio.Icon} that was set as the base background image, or
         * `null` if there’s none. The caller of this function does not own
         * a reference to the returned {@link Gio.Icon}.
         * @returns a {@link Gio.Icon}, or `null`
         */
        get_background_gicon(): Gio.Icon | null;

        /**
         * Returns the icon name used as the base background image,
         * or `null` if there’s none.
         * @returns an icon name, or `null`
         */
        get_background_icon_name(): string | null;

        /**
         * Returns the value currently displayed by `self`.
         * @returns the currently displayed value
         */
        get_count(): number;

        /**
         * Returns the currently displayed label of the icon, or `null`.
         * @returns the currently displayed label
         */
        get_label(): string | null;

        /**
         * Returns the {@link Gtk.StyleContext} used by the icon for theming,
         * or `null` if there’s none.
         * @returns a {@link Gtk.StyleContext}, or `null`.     This object is internal to GTK+ and should not be unreffed.     Use `g_object_ref()` if you want to keep it around
         */
        get_style_context(): StyleContext | null;

        /**
         * Updates the icon to use `icon` as the base background image.
         * If `icon` is `null`, `self` will go back using style information
         * or default theming for its background image.
         * 
         * If this method is called and an icon name was already set as
         * background for the icon, `icon` will be used, i.e. the last method
         * called between `gtk_numerable_icon_set_background_gicon()` and
         * `gtk_numerable_icon_set_background_icon_name()` has always priority.
         * @param icon a {@link Gio.Icon}, or `null`
         */
        set_background_gicon(icon: Gio.Icon | null): void;

        /**
         * Updates the icon to use the icon named `icon_name` from the
         * current icon theme as the base background image. If `icon_name`
         * is `null`, `self` will go back using style information or default
         * theming for its background image.
         * 
         * If this method is called and a {@link Gio.Icon} was already set as
         * background for the icon, `icon_name` will be used, i.e. the
         * last method called between `gtk_numerable_icon_set_background_icon_name()`
         * and `gtk_numerable_icon_set_background_gicon()` has always priority.
         * @param icon_name an icon name, or `null`
         */
        set_background_icon_name(icon_name: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the currently displayed value of `self` to `count`.
         * 
         * The numeric value is always clamped to make it two digits, i.e.
         * between -99 and 99. Setting a count of zero removes the emblem.
         * If this method is called, and a label was already set on the icon,
         * it will automatically be reset to `null` before rendering the number,
         * i.e. the last method called between `gtk_numerable_icon_set_count()`
         * and `gtk_numerable_icon_set_label()` has always priority.
         * @param count a number between -99 and 99
         */
        set_count(count: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the currently displayed value of `self` to the string
         * in `label`. Setting an empty label removes the emblem.
         * 
         * Note that this is meant for displaying short labels, such as
         * roman numbers, or single letters. For roman numbers, consider
         * using the Unicode characters U+2160 - U+217F. Strings longer
         * than two characters will likely not be rendered very well.
         * 
         * If this method is called, and a number was already set on the
         * icon, it will automatically be reset to zero before rendering
         * the label, i.e. the last method called between
         * `gtk_numerable_icon_set_label()` and `gtk_numerable_icon_set_count()`
         * has always priority.
         * @param label a short label, or `null`
         */
        set_label(label: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Updates the icon to fetch theme information from the
         * given {@link Gtk.StyleContext}.
         * @param style a {@link Gtk.StyleContext}
         */
        set_style_context(style: StyleContext): void;

        /**
         * Checks if two icons are equal.
         * @param icon2 pointer to the second {@link Gio.Icon}.
         * @returns `true` if `icon1` is equal to `icon2`. `false` otherwise.
         */
        equal(icon2: Gio.Icon | null): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets a hash for an icon.
         * @returns a `guint` containing a hash for the `icon`, suitable for   use in a {@link GLib.HashTable} or similar data structure.
         */
        hash(): number;

        /**
         * Serializes a {@link Gio.Icon} into a {@link GLib.Variant}. An equivalent {@link Gio.Icon} can be retrieved
         * back by calling `g_icon_deserialize()` on the returned value.
         * As serialization will avoid using raw icon data when possible, it only
         * makes sense to transfer the {@link GLib.Variant} between processes on the same machine,
         * (as opposed to over the network), and within the same file system namespace.
         * @returns a {@link GLib.Variant}, or `null` when serialization fails. The {@link GLib.Variant} will not be floating.
         */
        serialize(): GLib.Variant | null;

        /**
         * Generates a textual representation of `icon` that can be used for
         * serialization such as when passing `icon` to a different process or
         * saving it to persistent storage. Use `g_icon_new_for_string()` to
         * get `icon` back from the returned string.
         * 
         * The encoding of the returned string is proprietary to {@link Gio.Icon} except
         * in the following two cases
         * 
         * - If `icon` is a {@link Gio.FileIcon}, the returned string is a native path
         *   (such as `/path/to/my icon.png`) without escaping
         *   if the {@link Gio.File} for `icon` is a native file.  If the file is not
         *   native, the returned string is the result of `g_file_get_uri()`
         *   (such as `sftp://path/to/my%20icon.png`).
         * 
         * - If `icon` is a {@link Gio.ThemedIcon} with exactly one name and no fallbacks,
         *   the encoding is simply the name (such as `network-server`).
         * @returns An allocated NUL-terminated UTF8 string or `null` if `icon` can't be serialized. Use `g_free()` to free.
         */
        to_string(): string | null;

        /**
         * Checks if two icons are equal.
         * @param icon2 pointer to the second {@link Gio.Icon}.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_equal(icon2: Gio.Icon | null): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets a hash for an icon.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_hash(): number;

        /**
         * Serializes a {@link Gio.Icon} into a {@link GLib.Variant}. An equivalent {@link Gio.Icon} can be retrieved
         * back by calling `g_icon_deserialize()` on the returned value.
         * As serialization will avoid using raw icon data when possible, it only
         * makes sense to transfer the {@link GLib.Variant} between processes on the same machine,
         * (as opposed to over the network), and within the same file system namespace.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_serialize(): GLib.Variant | null;

        /**
         * Serializes the `icon` into string tokens.
         * This is can be invoked when `g_icon_new_for_string()` is called.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_to_tokens(): [boolean, string[], number];
    }


    namespace OffscreenWindow {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Window.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::accept-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::application": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::attached-to": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::decorated": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::default-height": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::default-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::deletable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::destroy-with-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-map": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gravity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-resize-grip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-toplevel-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hide-titlebar-when-maximized": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::icon": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::icon-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-active": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-maximized": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::mnemonics-visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::modal": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resizable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-grip-visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::screen": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::skip-pager-hint": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::skip-taskbar-hint": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::startup-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::title": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::transient-for": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::type": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::type-hint": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::urgency-hint": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window-position": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Window.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * GtkOffscreenWindow is strictly intended to be used for obtaining
     * snapshots of widgets that are not part of a normal widget hierarchy.
     * Since {@link Gtk.OffscreenWindow} is a toplevel widget you cannot obtain
     * snapshots of a full window with it since you cannot pack a toplevel
     * widget in another toplevel.
     * 
     * The idea is to take a widget and manually set the state of it,
     * add it to a GtkOffscreenWindow and then retrieve the snapshot
     * as a {@link cairo.Surface} or {@link GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf}.
     * 
     * GtkOffscreenWindow derives from {@link Gtk.Window} only as an implementation
     * detail.  Applications should not use any API specific to {@link Gtk.Window}
     * to operate on this object.  It should be treated as a {@link Gtk.Bin} that
     * has no parent widget.
     * 
     * When contained offscreen widgets are redrawn, GtkOffscreenWindow
     * will emit a {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.damage_event | Gtk.Widget::damage-event} signal.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class OffscreenWindow extends Window implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<OffscreenWindow>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: OffscreenWindow.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        parent_object: Window;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<OffscreenWindow.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): OffscreenWindow;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof OffscreenWindow.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, OffscreenWindow.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof OffscreenWindow.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, OffscreenWindow.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof OffscreenWindow.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<OffscreenWindow.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Retrieves a snapshot of the contained widget in the form of
         * a {@link GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf}.  This is a new pixbuf with a reference count of 1,
         * and the application should unreference it once it is no longer
         * needed.
         * @returns A {@link GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf} pointer, or `null`.
         */
        get_pixbuf(): GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf | null;

        /**
         * Retrieves a snapshot of the contained widget in the form of
         * a {@link cairo.Surface}.  If you need to keep this around over window
         * resizes then you should add a reference to it.
         * @returns A {@link cairo.Surface} pointer to the offscreen     surface, or `null`.
         */
        get_surface(): cairo.Surface | null;
    }


    namespace Overlay {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Bin.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * The ::get-child-position signal is emitted to determine
             * the position and size of any overlay child widgets. A
             * handler for this signal should fill `allocation` with
             * the desired position and size for `widget`, relative to
             * the 'main' child of `overlay`.
             * 
             * The default handler for this signal uses the `widget`'s
             * halign and valign properties to determine the position
             * and gives the widget its natural size (except that an
             * alignment of {@link Gtk.Align.FILL} will cause the overlay to
             * be full-width/height). If the main child is a
             * {@link Gtk.ScrolledWindow}, the overlays are placed relative
             * to its contents.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "get-child-position": (arg0: Widget, arg1: Gdk.Rectangle) => boolean | void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Bin.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * GtkOverlay is a container which contains a single main child, on top
     * of which it can place “overlay” widgets. The position of each overlay
     * widget is determined by its {@link Gtk.Widget.halign} and {@link Gtk.Widget.valign}
     * properties. E.g. a widget with both alignments set to {@link Gtk.Align.START}
     * will be placed at the top left corner of the GtkOverlay container,
     * whereas an overlay with halign set to {@link Gtk.Align.CENTER} and valign set
     * to {@link Gtk.Align.END} will be placed a the bottom edge of the GtkOverlay,
     * horizontally centered. The position can be adjusted by setting the margin
     * properties of the child to non-zero values.
     * 
     * More complicated placement of overlays is possible by connecting
     * to the {@link Gtk.Overlay.SignalSignatures.get_child_position | Gtk.Overlay::get-child-position} signal.
     * 
     * An overlay’s minimum and natural sizes are those of its main child. The sizes
     * of overlay children are not considered when measuring these preferred sizes.
     * 
     * # GtkOverlay as GtkBuildable
     * 
     * The GtkOverlay implementation of the GtkBuildable interface
     * supports placing a child as an overlay by specifying “overlay” as
     * the “type” attribute of a `<child>` element.
     * 
     * # CSS nodes
     * 
     * GtkOverlay has a single CSS node with the name “overlay”. Overlay children
     * whose alignments cause them to be positioned at an edge get the style classes
     * “.left”, “.right”, “.top”, and/or “.bottom” according to their position.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class Overlay extends Bin implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<Overlay>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: Overlay.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<Overlay.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): Overlay;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof Overlay.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Overlay.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof Overlay.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Overlay.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof Overlay.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<Overlay.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * Signal emitted to determine the position and
         *    size of any overlay child widgets.
         * @param widget 
         * @param allocation 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_child_position(widget: Widget, allocation: Allocation): boolean;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Adds `widget` to `overlay`.
         * 
         * The widget will be stacked on top of the main widget
         * added with `gtk_container_add()`.
         * 
         * The position at which `widget` is placed is determined
         * from its {@link Gtk.Widget.halign} and {@link Gtk.Widget.valign} properties.
         * @param widget a {@link Gtk.Widget} to be added to the container
         */
        add_overlay(widget: Widget): void;

        /**
         * Convenience function to get the value of the {@link Gtk.Overlay.pass_through}
         * child property for `widget`.
         * @param widget an overlay child of {@link Gtk.Overlay}
         * @returns whether the widget is a pass through child.
         */
        get_overlay_pass_through(widget: Widget): boolean;

        /**
         * Moves `child` to a new `index` in the list of `overlay` children.
         * The list contains overlays in the order that these were
         * added to `overlay` by default. See also {@link Gtk.Overlay.index}.
         * 
         * A widget’s index in the `overlay` children list determines which order
         * the children are drawn if they overlap. The first child is drawn at
         * the bottom. It also affects the default focus chain order.
         * @param child the overlaid {@link Gtk.Widget} to move
         * @param index_ the new index for `child` in the list of overlay children   of `overlay`, starting from 0. If negative, indicates the end of   the list
         */
        reorder_overlay(child: Widget, index_: number): void;

        /**
         * Convenience function to set the value of the {@link Gtk.Overlay.pass_through}
         * child property for `widget`.
         * @param widget an overlay child of {@link Gtk.Overlay}
         * @param pass_through whether the child should pass the input through
         */
        set_overlay_pass_through(widget: Widget, pass_through: boolean): void;
    }


    namespace PadController {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends EventController.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::action-group": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::pad": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::propagation-phase": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends EventController.ConstructorProps {
            action_group: Gio.ActionGroup;
            actionGroup: Gio.ActionGroup;
            pad: Gdk.Device;
        }
    }

    /**
     * {@link Gtk.PadController} is an event controller for the pads found in drawing
     * tablets (The collection of buttons and tactile sensors often found around
     * the stylus-sensitive area).
     * 
     * These buttons and sensors have no implicit meaning, and by default they
     * perform no action, this event controller is provided to map those to
     * {@link Gio.Action} objects, thus letting the application give those a more semantic
     * meaning.
     * 
     * Buttons and sensors are not constrained to triggering a single action, some
     * {@link Gdk.InputSource.TABLET_PAD} devices feature multiple "modes", all these input
     * elements have one current mode, which may determine the final action
     * being triggered. Pad devices often divide buttons and sensors into groups,
     * all elements in a group share the same current mode, but different groups
     * may have different modes. See `gdk_device_pad_get_n_groups()` and
     * `gdk_device_pad_get_group_n_modes()`.
     * 
     * Each of the actions that a given button/strip/ring performs for a given
     * mode is defined by {@link Gtk.PadActionEntry}, it contains an action name that
     * will be looked up in the given {@link Gio.ActionGroup} and activated whenever the
     * specified input element and mode are triggered.
     * 
     * A simple example of {@link Gtk.PadController} usage, assigning button 1 in all
     * modes and pad devices to an "invert-selection" action:
     * 
     * ```
     *   GtkPadActionEntry *pad_actions[] = {
     *     { GTK_PAD_ACTION_BUTTON, 1, -1, "Invert selection", "pad-actions.invert-selection" },
     *     …
     *   };
     * 
     *   …
     *   action_group = g_simple_action_group_new ();
     *   action = g_simple_action_new ("pad-actions.invert-selection", NULL);
     *   g_signal_connect (action, "activate", on_invert_selection_activated, NULL);
     *   g_action_map_add_action (G_ACTION_MAP (action_group), action);
     *   …
     *   pad_controller = gtk_pad_controller_new (window, action_group, NULL);
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * The actions belonging to rings/strips will be activated with a parameter
     * of type `G_VARIANT_TYPE_DOUBLE` bearing the value of the given axis, it
     * is required that those are made stateful and accepting this {@link GLib.VariantType}.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class PadController extends EventController {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<PadController>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * @construct-only
         */
        get action_group(): Gio.ActionGroup;

        /**
         * @construct-only
         */
        get actionGroup(): Gio.ActionGroup;

        /**
         * @construct-only
         */
        get pad(): Gdk.Device;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: PadController.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<PadController.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](window: Window, group: Gio.ActionGroup, pad: Gdk.Device | null): PadController;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof PadController.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, PadController.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof PadController.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, PadController.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof PadController.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<PadController.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Adds an individual action to `controller`. This action will only be activated
         * if the given button/ring/strip number in `index` is interacted while
         * the current mode is `mode`. -1 may be used for simple cases, so the action
         * is triggered on all modes.
         * 
         * The given `label` should be considered user-visible, so internationalization
         * rules apply. Some windowing systems may be able to use those for user
         * feedback.
         * @param type the type of pad feature that will trigger this action
         * @param index the 0-indexed button/ring/strip number that will trigger this action
         * @param mode the mode that will trigger this action, or -1 for all modes.
         * @param label Human readable description of this action, this string should   be deemed user-visible.
         * @param action_name action name that will be activated in the {@link Gio.ActionGroup}
         */
        set_action(type: PadActionType, index: number, mode: number, label: string, action_name: string): void;

        /**
         * This is a convenience function to add a group of action entries on
         * `controller`. See {@link Gtk.PadActionEntry} and `gtk_pad_controller_set_action()`.
         * @param entries the action entries to set on `controller`
         */
        set_action_entries(entries: PadActionEntry[]): void;
    }


    namespace PageSetup {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends GObject.Object.SignalSignatures {}

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.Object.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * A GtkPageSetup object stores the page size, orientation and margins.
     * The idea is that you can get one of these from the page setup dialog
     * and then pass it to the {@link Gtk.PrintOperation} when printing.
     * The benefit of splitting this out of the {@link Gtk.PrintSettings} is that
     * these affect the actual layout of the page, and thus need to be set
     * long before user prints.
     * 
     * ## Margins ## {#print-margins}
     * The margins specified in this object are the “print margins”, i.e. the
     * parts of the page that the printer cannot print on. These are different
     * from the layout margins that a word processor uses; they are typically
     * used to determine the minimal size for the layout
     * margins.
     * 
     * To obtain a {@link Gtk.PageSetup} use `gtk_page_setup_new()` to get the defaults,
     * or use `gtk_print_run_page_setup_dialog()` to show the page setup dialog
     * and receive the resulting page setup.
     * 
     * ## A page setup dialog
     * 
     * 
     * ```c
     * static GtkPrintSettings *settings = NULL;
     * static GtkPageSetup *page_setup = NULL;
     * 
     * static void
     * do_page_setup (void)
     * {
     *   GtkPageSetup *new_page_setup;
     * 
     *   if (settings == NULL)
     *     settings = gtk_print_settings_new ();
     * 
     *   new_page_setup = gtk_print_run_page_setup_dialog (GTK_WINDOW (main_window),
     *                                                     page_setup, settings);
     * 
     *   if (page_setup)
     *     g_object_unref (page_setup);
     * 
     *   page_setup = new_page_setup;
     * }
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * Printing support was added in GTK+ 2.10.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class PageSetup extends GObject.Object {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<PageSetup>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: PageSetup.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<PageSetup.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): PageSetup;

        static new_from_file(file_name: string): PageSetup;

        static new_from_gvariant(variant: GLib.Variant): PageSetup;

        static new_from_key_file(key_file: GLib.KeyFile, group_name: string | null): PageSetup;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof PageSetup.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, PageSetup.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof PageSetup.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, PageSetup.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof PageSetup.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<PageSetup.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Copies a {@link Gtk.PageSetup}.
         * @returns a copy of `other`
         */
        copy(): PageSetup;

        /**
         * Gets the bottom margin in units of `unit`.
         * @param unit the unit for the return value
         * @returns the bottom margin
         */
        get_bottom_margin(unit: Unit): number;

        /**
         * Gets the left margin in units of `unit`.
         * @param unit the unit for the return value
         * @returns the left margin
         */
        get_left_margin(unit: Unit): number;

        /**
         * Gets the page orientation of the {@link Gtk.PageSetup}.
         * @returns the page orientation
         */
        get_orientation(): PageOrientation;

        /**
         * Returns the page height in units of `unit`.
         * 
         * Note that this function takes orientation and
         * margins into consideration.
         * See `gtk_page_setup_get_paper_height()`.
         * @param unit the unit for the return value
         * @returns the page height.
         */
        get_page_height(unit: Unit): number;

        /**
         * Returns the page width in units of `unit`.
         * 
         * Note that this function takes orientation and
         * margins into consideration.
         * See `gtk_page_setup_get_paper_width()`.
         * @param unit the unit for the return value
         * @returns the page width.
         */
        get_page_width(unit: Unit): number;

        /**
         * Returns the paper height in units of `unit`.
         * 
         * Note that this function takes orientation, but
         * not margins into consideration.
         * See `gtk_page_setup_get_page_height()`.
         * @param unit the unit for the return value
         * @returns the paper height.
         */
        get_paper_height(unit: Unit): number;

        /**
         * Gets the paper size of the {@link Gtk.PageSetup}.
         * @returns the paper size
         */
        get_paper_size(): PaperSize;

        /**
         * Returns the paper width in units of `unit`.
         * 
         * Note that this function takes orientation, but
         * not margins into consideration.
         * See `gtk_page_setup_get_page_width()`.
         * @param unit the unit for the return value
         * @returns the paper width.
         */
        get_paper_width(unit: Unit): number;

        /**
         * Gets the right margin in units of `unit`.
         * @param unit the unit for the return value
         * @returns the right margin
         */
        get_right_margin(unit: Unit): number;

        /**
         * Gets the top margin in units of `unit`.
         * @param unit the unit for the return value
         * @returns the top margin
         */
        get_top_margin(unit: Unit): number;

        /**
         * Reads the page setup from the file `file_name`.
         * See `gtk_page_setup_to_file()`.
         * @param file_name the filename to read the page setup from
         * @returns `true` on success
         */
        load_file(file_name: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Reads the page setup from the group `group_name` in the key file
         * `key_file`.
         * @param key_file the {@link GLib.KeyFile} to retrieve the page_setup from
         * @param group_name the name of the group in the key_file to read, or `null`              to use the default name “Page Setup”
         * @returns `true` on success
         */
        load_key_file(key_file: GLib.KeyFile, group_name: string | null): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the bottom margin of the {@link Gtk.PageSetup}.
         * @param margin the new bottom margin in units of `unit`
         * @param unit the units for `margin`
         */
        set_bottom_margin(margin: number, unit: Unit): void;

        /**
         * Sets the left margin of the {@link Gtk.PageSetup}.
         * @param margin the new left margin in units of `unit`
         * @param unit the units for `margin`
         */
        set_left_margin(margin: number, unit: Unit): void;

        /**
         * Sets the page orientation of the {@link Gtk.PageSetup}.
         * @param orientation a {@link Gtk.PageOrientation} value
         */
        set_orientation(orientation: PageOrientation): void;

        /**
         * Sets the paper size of the {@link Gtk.PageSetup} without
         * changing the margins. See
         * `gtk_page_setup_set_paper_size_and_default_margins()`.
         * @param size a {@link Gtk.PaperSize}
         */
        set_paper_size(size: PaperSize): void;

        /**
         * Sets the paper size of the {@link Gtk.PageSetup} and modifies
         * the margins according to the new paper size.
         * @param size a {@link Gtk.PaperSize}
         */
        set_paper_size_and_default_margins(size: PaperSize): void;

        /**
         * Sets the right margin of the {@link Gtk.PageSetup}.
         * @param margin the new right margin in units of `unit`
         * @param unit the units for `margin`
         */
        set_right_margin(margin: number, unit: Unit): void;

        /**
         * Sets the top margin of the {@link Gtk.PageSetup}.
         * @param margin the new top margin in units of `unit`
         * @param unit the units for `margin`
         */
        set_top_margin(margin: number, unit: Unit): void;

        /**
         * This function saves the information from `setup` to `file_name`.
         * @param file_name the file to save to
         * @returns `true` on success
         */
        to_file(file_name: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Serialize page setup to an a{sv} variant.
         * @returns a new, floating, {@link GLib.Variant}
         */
        to_gvariant(): GLib.Variant;

        /**
         * This function adds the page setup from `setup` to `key_file`.
         * @param key_file the {@link GLib.KeyFile} to save the page setup to
         * @param group_name the group to add the settings to in `key_file`,      or `null` to use the default name “Page Setup”
         */
        to_key_file(key_file: GLib.KeyFile, group_name: string | null): void;
    }


    namespace Paned {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Container.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * The ::accept-position signal is a
             * [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted to accept the current position of the handle when
             * moving it using key bindings.
             * 
             * The default binding for this signal is Return or Space.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.0
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "accept-position": () => boolean | void;
            /**
             * The ::cancel-position signal is a
             * [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted to cancel moving the position of the handle using key
             * bindings. The position of the handle will be reset to the value prior to
             * moving it.
             * 
             * The default binding for this signal is Escape.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.0
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "cancel-position": () => boolean | void;
            /**
             * The ::cycle-child-focus signal is a
             * [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted to cycle the focus between the children of the paned.
             * 
             * The default binding is f6.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.0
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "cycle-child-focus": (arg0: boolean) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * The ::cycle-handle-focus signal is a
             * [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted to cycle whether the paned should grab focus to allow
             * the user to change position of the handle by using key bindings.
             * 
             * The default binding for this signal is f8.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.0
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "cycle-handle-focus": (arg0: boolean) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * The ::move-handle signal is a
             * [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted to move the handle when the user is using key bindings
             * to move it.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.0
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "move-handle": (arg0: ScrollType) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * The ::toggle-handle-focus is a
             * [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted to accept the current position of the handle and then
             * move focus to the next widget in the focus chain.
             * 
             * The default binding is Tab.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.0
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "toggle-handle-focus": () => boolean | void;
            "notify::max-position": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::min-position": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::position": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::position-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::wide-handle": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::orientation": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Container.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, Orientable.ConstructorProps {
            max_position: number;
            maxPosition: number;
            min_position: number;
            minPosition: number;
            position: number;
            position_set: boolean;
            positionSet: boolean;
            wide_handle: boolean;
            wideHandle: boolean;
        }
    }

    /**
     * {@link Gtk.Paned} has two panes, arranged either
     * horizontally or vertically. The division between
     * the two panes is adjustable by the user by dragging
     * a handle.
     * 
     * Child widgets are
     * added to the panes of the widget with `gtk_paned_pack1()` and
     * `gtk_paned_pack2()`. The division between the two children is set by default
     * from the size requests of the children, but it can be adjusted by the
     * user.
     * 
     * A paned widget draws a separator between the two child widgets and a
     * small handle that the user can drag to adjust the division. It does not
     * draw any relief around the children or around the separator. (The space
     * in which the separator is called the gutter.) Often, it is useful to put
     * each child inside a {@link Gtk.Frame} with the shadow type set to {@link Gtk.ShadowType.IN}
     * so that the gutter appears as a ridge. No separator is drawn if one of
     * the children is missing.
     * 
     * Each child has two options that can be set, `resize` and `shrink`. If
     * `resize` is true, then when the {@link Gtk.Paned} is resized, that child will
     * expand or shrink along with the paned widget. If `shrink` is true, then
     * that child can be made smaller than its requisition by the user.
     * Setting `shrink` to `false` allows the application to set a minimum size.
     * If `resize` is false for both children, then this is treated as if
     * `resize` is true for both children.
     * 
     * The application can set the position of the slider as if it were set
     * by the user, by calling `gtk_paned_set_position()`.
     * 
     * # CSS nodes
     * 
     * 
     * ```
     * paned
     * ├── <child>
     * ├── separator[.wide]
     * ╰── <child>
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * GtkPaned has a main CSS node with name paned, and a subnode for
     * the separator with name separator. The subnode gets a .wide style
     * class when the paned is supposed to be wide.
     * 
     * In horizontal orientation, the nodes of the children are always arranged
     * from left to right. So :first-child will always select the leftmost child,
     * regardless of text direction.
     * 
     * ## Creating a paned widget with minimum sizes.
     * 
     * 
     * ```c
     * GtkWidget *hpaned = gtk_paned_new (GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL);
     * GtkWidget *frame1 = gtk_frame_new (NULL);
     * GtkWidget *frame2 = gtk_frame_new (NULL);
     * gtk_frame_set_shadow_type (GTK_FRAME (frame1), GTK_SHADOW_IN);
     * gtk_frame_set_shadow_type (GTK_FRAME (frame2), GTK_SHADOW_IN);
     * 
     * gtk_widget_set_size_request (hpaned, 200, -1);
     * 
     * gtk_paned_pack1 (GTK_PANED (hpaned), frame1, TRUE, FALSE);
     * gtk_widget_set_size_request (frame1, 50, -1);
     * 
     * gtk_paned_pack2 (GTK_PANED (hpaned), frame2, FALSE, FALSE);
     * gtk_widget_set_size_request (frame2, 50, -1);
     * ```
     * 
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class Paned extends Container implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable, Orientable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<Paned>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * The largest possible value for the position property.
         * This property is derived from the size and shrinkability
         * of the widget's children.
         * @since 2.4
         * @read-only
         * @default 2147483647
         */
        get max_position(): number;

        /**
         * The largest possible value for the position property.
         * This property is derived from the size and shrinkability
         * of the widget's children.
         * @since 2.4
         * @read-only
         * @default 2147483647
         */
        get maxPosition(): number;

        /**
         * The smallest possible value for the position property.
         * This property is derived from the size and shrinkability
         * of the widget's children.
         * @since 2.4
         * @read-only
         * @default 0
         */
        get min_position(): number;

        /**
         * The smallest possible value for the position property.
         * This property is derived from the size and shrinkability
         * of the widget's children.
         * @since 2.4
         * @read-only
         * @default 0
         */
        get minPosition(): number;

        /**
         * @default 0
         */
        get position(): number;
        set position(val: number);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get position_set(): boolean;
        set position_set(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get positionSet(): boolean;
        set positionSet(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Setting this property to `true` indicates that the paned needs
         * to provide stronger visual separation (e.g. because it separates
         * between two notebooks, whose tab rows would otherwise merge visually).
         * @since 3.16
         * @default false
         */
        get wide_handle(): boolean;
        set wide_handle(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Setting this property to `true` indicates that the paned needs
         * to provide stronger visual separation (e.g. because it separates
         * between two notebooks, whose tab rows would otherwise merge visually).
         * @since 3.16
         * @default false
         */
        get wideHandle(): boolean;
        set wideHandle(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: Paned.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        container: Container;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<Paned.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](orientation: Orientation): Paned;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof Paned.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Paned.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof Paned.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Paned.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof Paned.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<Paned.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_accept_position(): boolean;

        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_cancel_position(): boolean;

        /**
         * @param reverse 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_cycle_child_focus(reverse: boolean): boolean;

        /**
         * @param reverse 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_cycle_handle_focus(reverse: boolean): boolean;

        /**
         * @param scroll 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_move_handle(scroll: ScrollType): boolean;

        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_toggle_handle_focus(): boolean;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Adds a child to the top or left pane with default parameters. This is
         * equivalent to
         * `gtk_paned_pack1 (paned, child, FALSE, TRUE)`.
         * @param child the child to add
         */
        add1(child: Widget): void;

        /**
         * Adds a child to the bottom or right pane with default parameters. This
         * is equivalent to
         * `gtk_paned_pack2 (paned, child, TRUE, TRUE)`.
         * @param child the child to add
         */
        add2(child: Widget): void;

        /**
         * Obtains the first child of the paned widget.
         * @returns first child, or `null` if it is not set.
         */
        get_child1(): Widget | null;

        /**
         * Obtains the second child of the paned widget.
         * @returns second child, or `null` if it is not set.
         */
        get_child2(): Widget | null;

        /**
         * Returns the {@link Gdk.Window} of the handle. This function is
         * useful when handling button or motion events because it
         * enables the callback to distinguish between the window
         * of the paned, a child and the handle.
         * @returns the paned’s handle window.
         */
        get_handle_window(): Gdk.Window;

        /**
         * Obtains the position of the divider between the two panes.
         * @returns position of the divider
         */
        get_position(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the {@link Gtk.Paned.wide_handle} property.
         * @returns `true` if the paned should have a wide handle
         */
        get_wide_handle(): boolean;

        /**
         * Adds a child to the top or left pane.
         * @param child the child to add
         * @param resize should this child expand when the paned widget is resized.
         * @param shrink can this child be made smaller than its requisition.
         */
        pack1(child: Widget, resize: boolean, shrink: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Adds a child to the bottom or right pane.
         * @param child the child to add
         * @param resize should this child expand when the paned widget is resized.
         * @param shrink can this child be made smaller than its requisition.
         */
        pack2(child: Widget, resize: boolean, shrink: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the position of the divider between the two panes.
         * @param position pixel position of divider, a negative value means that the position            is unset.
         */
        set_position(position: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.Paned.wide_handle} property.
         * @param wide the new value for the {@link Gtk.Paned.wide_handle} property
         */
        set_wide_handle(wide: boolean): void;

        /**
         * The orientation of the orientable.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default Gtk.Orientation.HORIZONTAL
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Orientable
         */
        get orientation(): Orientation;
        set orientation(val: Orientation);

        /**
         * Retrieves the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @returns the orientation of the `orientable`.
         */
        get_orientation(): Orientation;

        /**
         * Sets the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @param orientation the orientable’s new orientation.
         */
        set_orientation(orientation: Orientation): void;
    }


    namespace PanedAccessible {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends ContainerAccessible.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-layer": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-mdi-zorder": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-help-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-hypertext-nlinks": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption-object": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-summary": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends ContainerAccessible.ConstructorProps, Atk.Component.ConstructorProps, Atk.Value.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class PanedAccessible extends ContainerAccessible implements Atk.Component, Atk.Value {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<PanedAccessible>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: PanedAccessible.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<PanedAccessible.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof PanedAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, PanedAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof PanedAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, PanedAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof PanedAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<PanedAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        /**
         * Gets the value of this object.
         */
        get_current_value(): unknown;

        /**
         * Gets the minimum increment by which the value of this object may be
         * changed.  If zero, the minimum increment is undefined, which may
         * mean that it is limited only by the floating point precision of the
         * platform.
         * @returns the minimum increment by which the value of this object may be changed. zero if undefined.
         */
        get_increment(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the maximum value of this object.
         */
        get_maximum_value(): unknown;

        /**
         * Gets the minimum increment by which the value of this object may be changed.  If zero,
         * the minimum increment is undefined, which may mean that it is limited only by the
         * floating point precision of the platform.
         */
        get_minimum_increment(): unknown;

        /**
         * Gets the minimum value of this object.
         */
        get_minimum_value(): unknown;

        /**
         * Gets the range of this object.
         * @returns a newly allocated {@link Atk.Range} that represents the minimum, maximum and descriptor (if available) of `obj`. NULL if that range is not defined.
         */
        get_range(): Atk.Range | null;

        /**
         * Gets the list of subranges defined for this object. See {@link Atk.Value}
         * introduction for examples of subranges and when to expose them.
         * @returns an {@link GLib.SList} of {@link Atk.Range} which each of the subranges defined for this object. Free the returns list with `g_slist_free()`.
         */
        get_sub_ranges(): Atk.Range[];

        /**
         * Gets the current value and the human readable text alternative of
         * `obj`. `text` is a newly created string, that must be freed by the
         * caller. Can be NULL if no descriptor is available.
         */
        get_value_and_text(): [number, string];

        /**
         * Sets the value of this object.
         * @param value a {@link GObject.Value} which is the desired new accessible value.
         * @returns `true` if new value is successfully set, `false` otherwise.
         */
        set_current_value(value: GObject.Value | any): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the value of this object.
         * 
         * This method is intended to provide a way to change the value of the
         * object. In any case, it is possible that the value can't be
         * modified (ie: a read-only component). If the value changes due this
         * call, it is possible that the text could change, and will trigger
         * an {@link Atk.Value.SignalSignatures.value_changed | Atk.Value::value-changed} signal emission.
         * 
         * Note for implementors: the deprecated `atk_value_set_current_value()`
         * method returned TRUE or FALSE depending if the value was assigned
         * or not. In the practice several implementors were not able to
         * decide it, and returned TRUE in any case. For that reason it is not
         * required anymore to return if the value was properly assigned or
         * not.
         * @param new_value a double which is the desired new accessible value.
         */
        set_value(new_value: number): void;

        /**
         * Gets the value of this object.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_current_value(): GObject.Value | any;

        /**
         * Gets the minimum increment by which the value of this object may be
         * changed.  If zero, the minimum increment is undefined, which may
         * mean that it is limited only by the floating point precision of the
         * platform.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_increment(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the maximum value of this object.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_maximum_value(): GObject.Value | any;

        /**
         * Gets the minimum increment by which the value of this object may be changed.  If zero,
         * the minimum increment is undefined, which may mean that it is limited only by the
         * floating point precision of the platform.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_minimum_increment(): GObject.Value | any;

        /**
         * Gets the minimum value of this object.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_minimum_value(): GObject.Value | any;

        /**
         * Gets the range of this object.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_range(): Atk.Range | null;

        /**
         * Gets the list of subranges defined for this object. See {@link Atk.Value}
         * introduction for examples of subranges and when to expose them.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_sub_ranges(): Atk.Range[];

        /**
         * Gets the current value and the human readable text alternative of
         * `obj`. `text` is a newly created string, that must be freed by the
         * caller. Can be NULL if no descriptor is available.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_value_and_text(): [number, string];

        /**
         * Sets the value of this object.
         * @param value a {@link GObject.Value} which is the desired new accessible value.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_current_value(value: unknown): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the value of this object.
         * 
         * This method is intended to provide a way to change the value of the
         * object. In any case, it is possible that the value can't be
         * modified (ie: a read-only component). If the value changes due this
         * call, it is possible that the text could change, and will trigger
         * an {@link Atk.Value.SignalSignatures.value_changed | Atk.Value::value-changed} signal emission.
         * 
         * Note for implementors: the deprecated `atk_value_set_current_value()`
         * method returned TRUE or FALSE depending if the value was assigned
         * or not. In the practice several implementors were not able to
         * decide it, and returned TRUE in any case. For that reason it is not
         * required anymore to return if the value was properly assigned or
         * not.
         * @param new_value a double which is the desired new accessible value.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_value(new_value: number): void;
    }


    namespace PlacesSidebar {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends ScrolledWindow.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * The places sidebar emits this signal when it needs to ask the application
             * to pop up a menu to ask the user for which drag action to perform.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.10
             * @run-last
             */
            "drag-action-ask": (arg0: number) => number;
            /**
             * When the user starts a drag-and-drop operation and the sidebar needs
             * to ask the application for which drag action to perform, then the
             * sidebar will emit this signal.
             * 
             * The application can evaluate the `context` for customary actions, or
             * it can check the type of the files indicated by `source_file_list` against the
             * possible actions for the destination `dest_file`.
             * 
             * The drag action to use must be the return value of the signal handler.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.10
             * @run-last
             */
            "drag-action-requested": (arg0: Gdk.DragContext, arg1: Gio.File, arg2: Gio.File[]) => number;
            /**
             * The places sidebar emits this signal when the user completes a
             * drag-and-drop operation and one of the sidebar's items is the
             * destination.  This item is in the `dest_file`, and the
             * `source_file_list` has the list of files that are dropped into it and
             * which should be copied/moved/etc. based on the specified `action`.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.10
             * @run-first
             */
            "drag-perform-drop": (arg0: Gio.File, arg1: Gio.File[], arg2: number) => void;
            /**
             * The places sidebar emits this signal when it starts a new operation
             * because the user clicked on some location that needs mounting.
             * In this way the application using the {@link Gtk.PlacesSidebar} can track the
             * progress of the operation and, for example, show a notification.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.20
             * @run-first
             */
            mount: (arg0: Gio.MountOperation) => void;
            /**
             * The places sidebar emits this signal when the user selects a location
             * in it.  The calling application should display the contents of that
             * location; for example, a file manager should show a list of files in
             * the specified location.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.10
             * @run-first
             */
            "open-location": (arg0: Gio.File, arg1: PlacesOpenFlags) => void;
            /**
             * The places sidebar emits this signal when the user invokes a contextual
             * popup on one of its items. In the signal handler, the application may
             * add extra items to the menu as appropriate. For example, a file manager
             * may want to add a "Properties" command to the menu.
             * 
             * It is not necessary to store the `selected_item` for each menu item;
             * during their callbacks, the application can use `gtk_places_sidebar_get_location()`
             * to get the file to which the item refers.
             * 
             * The `selected_item` argument may be `null` in case the selection refers to
             * a volume. In this case, `selected_volume` will be non-`null`. In this case,
             * the calling application will have to `g_object_ref()` the `selected_volume` and
             * keep it around to use it in the callback.
             * 
             * The `container` and all its contents are destroyed after the user
             * dismisses the popup. The popup is re-created (and thus, this signal is
             * emitted) every time the user activates the contextual menu.
             * 
             * Before 3.18, the `container` always was a {@link Gtk.Menu}, and you were expected
             * to add your items as `GtkMenuItems`. Since 3.18, the popup may be implemented
             * as a {@link Gtk.Popover}, in which case `container` will be something else, e.g. a
             * {@link Gtk.Box}, to which you may add `GtkModelButtons` or other widgets, such as
             * `GtkEntries`, `GtkSpinButtons`, etc. If your application can deal with this
             * situation, you can set {@link Gtk.PlacesSidebar.SignalSignatures.populate_all | Gtk.PlacesSidebar::populate-all} to `true` to request
             * that this signal is emitted for populating popovers as well.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.10
             * @run-first
             */
            "populate-popup": (arg0: Widget, arg1: Gio.File | null, arg2: Gio.Volume | null) => void;
            /**
             * The places sidebar emits this signal when it needs the calling
             * application to present an way to connect directly to a network server.
             * For example, the application may bring up a dialog box asking for
             * a URL like "sftp://ftp.example.com".  It is up to the application to create
             * the corresponding mount by using, for example, `g_file_mount_enclosing_volume()`.
             * @signal
             * @deprecated since 3.18: use the {@link Gtk.PlacesSidebar.SignalSignatures.show_other_locations | Gtk.PlacesSidebar::show-other-locations} signal     to connect to network servers.
             * @run-first
             */
            "show-connect-to-server": () => void;
            /**
             * The places sidebar emits this signal when it needs the calling
             * application to present an way to directly enter a location.
             * For example, the application may bring up a dialog box asking for
             * a URL like "http://http.example.com".
             * @signal
             * @since 3.14
             * @run-first
             */
            "show-enter-location": () => void;
            /**
             * The places sidebar emits this signal when it needs the calling
             * application to present an error message.  Most of these messages
             * refer to mounting or unmounting media, for example, when a drive
             * cannot be started for some reason.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.10
             * @run-first
             */
            "show-error-message": (arg0: string, arg1: string) => void;
            /**
             * The places sidebar emits this signal when it needs the calling
             * application to present a way to show other locations e.g. drives
             * and network access points.
             * For example, the application may bring up a page showing persistent
             * volumes and discovered network addresses.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.18
             * @deprecated since 3.20: use the {@link Gtk.PlacesSidebar.SignalSignatures.show_other_locations_with_flags | Gtk.PlacesSidebar::show-other-locations-with-flags} which includes the open flags in order to allow the user to specify to open in a new tab or window, in a similar way than {@link Gtk.PlacesSidebar.SignalSignatures.open_location | Gtk.PlacesSidebar::open-location}
             * @run-first
             */
            "show-other-locations": () => void;
            /**
             * The places sidebar emits this signal when it needs the calling
             * application to present a way to show other locations e.g. drives
             * and network access points.
             * For example, the application may bring up a page showing persistent
             * volumes and discovered network addresses.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.20
             * @run-first
             */
            "show-other-locations-with-flags": (arg0: PlacesOpenFlags) => void;
            /**
             * The places sidebar emits this signal when it needs the calling
             * application to present a way to show the starred files. In GNOME,
             * starred files are implemented by setting the nao:predefined-tag-favorite
             * tag in the tracker database.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.22.26
             * @run-first
             */
            "show-starred-location": (arg0: PlacesOpenFlags) => void;
            /**
             * The places sidebar emits this signal when it starts a new operation
             * because the user for example ejected some drive or unmounted a mount.
             * In this way the application using the {@link Gtk.PlacesSidebar} can track the
             * progress of the operation and, for example, show a notification.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.20
             * @run-first
             */
            unmount: (arg0: Gio.MountOperation) => void;
            "notify::local-only": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::location": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::open-flags": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::populate-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::show-connect-to-server": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::show-desktop": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::show-enter-location": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::show-other-locations": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::show-recent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::show-starred-location": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::show-trash": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hadjustment": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hscrollbar-policy": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::kinetic-scrolling": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::max-content-height": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::max-content-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::min-content-height": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::min-content-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::overlay-scrolling": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::propagate-natural-height": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::propagate-natural-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::shadow-type": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vadjustment": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vscrollbar-policy": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window-placement": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window-placement-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends ScrolledWindow.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {
            local_only: boolean;
            localOnly: boolean;
            location: Gio.File | null;
            open_flags: PlacesOpenFlags;
            openFlags: PlacesOpenFlags;
            populate_all: boolean;
            populateAll: boolean;
            show_connect_to_server: boolean;
            showConnectToServer: boolean;
            show_desktop: boolean;
            showDesktop: boolean;
            show_enter_location: boolean;
            showEnterLocation: boolean;
            show_other_locations: boolean;
            showOtherLocations: boolean;
            show_recent: boolean;
            showRecent: boolean;
            show_starred_location: boolean;
            showStarredLocation: boolean;
            show_trash: boolean;
            showTrash: boolean;
        }
    }

    /**
     * {@link Gtk.PlacesSidebar} is a widget that displays a list of frequently-used places in the
     * file system:  the user’s home directory, the user’s bookmarks, and volumes and drives.
     * This widget is used as a sidebar in {@link Gtk.FileChooser} and may be used by file managers
     * and similar programs.
     * 
     * The places sidebar displays drives and volumes, and will automatically mount
     * or unmount them when the user selects them.
     * 
     * Applications can hook to various signals in the places sidebar to customize
     * its behavior.  For example, they can add extra commands to the context menu
     * of the sidebar.
     * 
     * While bookmarks are completely in control of the user, the places sidebar also
     * allows individual applications to provide extra shortcut folders that are unique
     * to each application.  For example, a Paint program may want to add a shortcut
     * for a Clipart folder.  You can do this with `gtk_places_sidebar_add_shortcut()`.
     * 
     * To make use of the places sidebar, an application at least needs to connect
     * to the {@link Gtk.PlacesSidebar.SignalSignatures.open_location | Gtk.PlacesSidebar::open-location} signal.  This is emitted when the
     * user selects in the sidebar a location to open.  The application should also
     * call `gtk_places_sidebar_set_location()` when it changes the currently-viewed
     * location.
     * 
     * # CSS nodes
     * 
     * GtkPlacesSidebar uses a single CSS node with name placessidebar and style
     * class .sidebar.
     * 
     * Among the children of the places sidebar, the following style classes can
     * be used:
     * - .sidebar-new-bookmark-row for the 'Add new bookmark' row
     * - .sidebar-placeholder-row for a row that is a placeholder
     * - .has-open-popup when a popup is open for a row
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class PlacesSidebar extends ScrolledWindow implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<PlacesSidebar>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get local_only(): boolean;
        set local_only(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get localOnly(): boolean;
        set localOnly(val: boolean);

        get location(): Gio.File | null;
        set location(val: Gio.File | null);

        /**
         * @default Gtk.PlacesOpenFlags.NORMAL
         */
        get open_flags(): PlacesOpenFlags;
        set open_flags(val: PlacesOpenFlags);

        /**
         * @default Gtk.PlacesOpenFlags.NORMAL
         */
        get openFlags(): PlacesOpenFlags;
        set openFlags(val: PlacesOpenFlags);

        /**
         * If :populate-all is `true`, the {@link Gtk.PlacesSidebar.SignalSignatures.populate_popup | Gtk.PlacesSidebar::populate-popup} signal
         * is also emitted for popovers.
         * @since 3.18
         * @default false
         */
        get populate_all(): boolean;
        set populate_all(val: boolean);

        /**
         * If :populate-all is `true`, the {@link Gtk.PlacesSidebar.SignalSignatures.populate_popup | Gtk.PlacesSidebar::populate-popup} signal
         * is also emitted for popovers.
         * @since 3.18
         * @default false
         */
        get populateAll(): boolean;
        set populateAll(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get show_connect_to_server(): boolean;
        set show_connect_to_server(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get showConnectToServer(): boolean;
        set showConnectToServer(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default true
         */
        get show_desktop(): boolean;
        set show_desktop(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default true
         */
        get showDesktop(): boolean;
        set showDesktop(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get show_enter_location(): boolean;
        set show_enter_location(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get showEnterLocation(): boolean;
        set showEnterLocation(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get show_other_locations(): boolean;
        set show_other_locations(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get showOtherLocations(): boolean;
        set showOtherLocations(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default true
         */
        get show_recent(): boolean;
        set show_recent(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default true
         */
        get showRecent(): boolean;
        set showRecent(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get show_starred_location(): boolean;
        set show_starred_location(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get showStarredLocation(): boolean;
        set showStarredLocation(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default true
         */
        get show_trash(): boolean;
        set show_trash(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default true
         */
        get showTrash(): boolean;
        set showTrash(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: PlacesSidebar.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<PlacesSidebar.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): PlacesSidebar;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof PlacesSidebar.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, PlacesSidebar.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof PlacesSidebar.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, PlacesSidebar.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof PlacesSidebar.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<PlacesSidebar.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Applications may want to present some folders in the places sidebar if
         * they could be immediately useful to users.  For example, a drawing
         * program could add a “/usr/share/clipart” location when the sidebar is
         * being used in an “Insert Clipart” dialog box.
         * 
         * This function adds the specified `location` to a special place for immutable
         * shortcuts.  The shortcuts are application-specific; they are not shared
         * across applications, and they are not persistent.  If this function
         * is called multiple times with different locations, then they are added
         * to the sidebar’s list in the same order as the function is called.
         * @param location location to add as an application-specific shortcut
         */
        add_shortcut(location: Gio.File): void;

        /**
         * Returns the value previously set with `gtk_places_sidebar_set_local_only()`.
         * @returns `true` if the sidebar will only show local files.
         */
        get_local_only(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the currently selected location in the `sidebar`. This can be `null` when
         * nothing is selected, for example, when `gtk_places_sidebar_set_location()` has
         * been called with a location that is not among the sidebar’s list of places to
         * show.
         * 
         * You can use this function to get the selection in the `sidebar`.  Also, if you
         * connect to the {@link Gtk.PlacesSidebar.SignalSignatures.populate_popup | Gtk.PlacesSidebar::populate-popup} signal, you can use this
         * function to get the location that is being referred to during the callbacks
         * for your menu items.
         * @returns a {@link Gio.File} with the selected location, or `null` if nothing is visually selected.
         */
        get_location(): Gio.File | null;

        /**
         * This function queries the bookmarks added by the user to the places sidebar,
         * and returns one of them.  This function is used by {@link Gtk.FileChooser} to implement
         * the “Alt-1”, “Alt-2”, etc. shortcuts, which activate the cooresponding bookmark.
         * @param n index of the bookmark to query
         * @returns The bookmark specified by the index `n`, or `null` if no such index exist.  Note that the indices start at 0, even though the file chooser starts them with the keyboard shortcut "Alt-1".
         */
        get_nth_bookmark(n: number): Gio.File | null;

        /**
         * Gets the open flags.
         * @returns the {@link Gtk.PlacesOpenFlags} of `sidebar`
         */
        get_open_flags(): PlacesOpenFlags;

        /**
         * Returns the value previously set with `gtk_places_sidebar_set_show_connect_to_server()`
         * @returns `true` if the sidebar will display a “Connect to Server” item.
         */
        get_show_connect_to_server(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the value previously set with `gtk_places_sidebar_set_show_desktop()`
         * @returns `true` if the sidebar will display a builtin shortcut to the desktop folder.
         */
        get_show_desktop(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the value previously set with `gtk_places_sidebar_set_show_enter_location()`
         * @returns `true` if the sidebar will display an “Enter Location” item.
         */
        get_show_enter_location(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the value previously set with `gtk_places_sidebar_set_show_other_locations()`
         * @returns `true` if the sidebar will display an “Other Locations” item.
         */
        get_show_other_locations(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the value previously set with `gtk_places_sidebar_set_show_recent()`
         * @returns `true` if the sidebar will display a builtin shortcut for recent files
         */
        get_show_recent(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the value previously set with `gtk_places_sidebar_set_show_starred_location()`
         * @returns `true` if the sidebar will display a Starred item.
         */
        get_show_starred_location(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the value previously set with `gtk_places_sidebar_set_show_trash()`
         * @returns `true` if the sidebar will display a “Trash” item.
         */
        get_show_trash(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the list of shortcuts.
         * @returns A {@link GLib.SList} of {@link Gio.File} of the locations that have been added as     application-specific shortcuts with `gtk_places_sidebar_add_shortcut()`.     To free this list, you can use |[<!-- language="C" --> g_slist_free_full (list, (GDestroyNotify) g_object_unref); ]|
         */
        list_shortcuts(): Gio.File[];

        /**
         * Removes an application-specific shortcut that has been previously been
         * inserted with `gtk_places_sidebar_add_shortcut()`.  If the `location` is not a
         * shortcut in the sidebar, then nothing is done.
         * @param location location to remove
         */
        remove_shortcut(location: Gio.File): void;

        /**
         * Make the GtkPlacesSidebar show drop targets, so it can show the available
         * drop targets and a "new bookmark" row. This improves the Drag-and-Drop
         * experience of the user and allows applications to show all available
         * drop targets at once.
         * 
         * This needs to be called when the application is aware of an ongoing drag
         * that might target the sidebar. The drop-targets-visible state will be unset
         * automatically if the drag finishes in the GtkPlacesSidebar. You only need
         * to unset the state when the drag ends on some other widget on your application.
         * @param visible whether to show the valid targets or not.
         * @param context drag context used to ask the source about the action that wants to     perform, so hints are more accurate.
         */
        set_drop_targets_visible(visible: boolean, context: Gdk.DragContext): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the `sidebar` should only show local files.
         * @param local_only whether to show only local files
         */
        set_local_only(local_only: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the location that is being shown in the widgets surrounding the
         * `sidebar`, for example, in a folder view in a file manager.  In turn, the
         * `sidebar` will highlight that location if it is being shown in the list of
         * places, or it will unhighlight everything if the `location` is not among the
         * places in the list.
         * @param location location to select, or `null` for no current path
         */
        set_location(location: Gio.File | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the way in which the calling application can open new locations from
         * the places sidebar.  For example, some applications only open locations
         * “directly” into their main view, while others may support opening locations
         * in a new notebook tab or a new window.
         * 
         * This function is used to tell the places `sidebar` about the ways in which the
         * application can open new locations, so that the sidebar can display (or not)
         * the “Open in new tab” and “Open in new window” menu items as appropriate.
         * 
         * When the {@link Gtk.PlacesSidebar.SignalSignatures.open_location | Gtk.PlacesSidebar::open-location} signal is emitted, its flags
         * argument will be set to one of the `flags` that was passed in
         * `gtk_places_sidebar_set_open_flags()`.
         * 
         * Passing 0 for `flags` will cause #GTK_PLACES_OPEN_NORMAL to always be sent
         * to callbacks for the “open-location” signal.
         * @param flags Bitmask of modes in which the calling application can open locations
         */
        set_open_flags(flags: PlacesOpenFlags): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the `sidebar` should show an item for connecting to a network server;
         * this is off by default. An application may want to turn this on if it implements
         * a way for the user to connect to network servers directly.
         * 
         * If you enable this, you should connect to the
         * {@link Gtk.PlacesSidebar.SignalSignatures.show_connect_to_server | Gtk.PlacesSidebar::show-connect-to-server} signal.
         * @param show_connect_to_server whether to show an item for the Connect to Server command
         */
        set_show_connect_to_server(show_connect_to_server: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the `sidebar` should show an item for the Desktop folder.
         * The default value for this option is determined by the desktop
         * environment and the user’s configuration, but this function can be
         * used to override it on a per-application basis.
         * @param show_desktop whether to show an item for the Desktop folder
         */
        set_show_desktop(show_desktop: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the `sidebar` should show an item for entering a location;
         * this is off by default. An application may want to turn this on if manually
         * entering URLs is an expected user action.
         * 
         * If you enable this, you should connect to the
         * {@link Gtk.PlacesSidebar.SignalSignatures.show_enter_location | Gtk.PlacesSidebar::show-enter-location} signal.
         * @param show_enter_location whether to show an item to enter a location
         */
        set_show_enter_location(show_enter_location: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the `sidebar` should show an item for the application to show
         * an Other Locations view; this is off by default. When set to `true`, persistent
         * devices such as hard drives are hidden, otherwise they are shown in the sidebar.
         * An application may want to turn this on if it implements a way for the user to
         * see and interact with drives and network servers directly.
         * 
         * If you enable this, you should connect to the
         * {@link Gtk.PlacesSidebar.SignalSignatures.show_other_locations | Gtk.PlacesSidebar::show-other-locations} signal.
         * @param show_other_locations whether to show an item for the Other Locations view
         */
        set_show_other_locations(show_other_locations: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the `sidebar` should show an item for recent files.
         * The default value for this option is determined by the desktop
         * environment, but this function can be used to override it on a
         * per-application basis.
         * @param show_recent whether to show an item for recent files
         */
        set_show_recent(show_recent: boolean): void;

        /**
         * If you enable this, you should connect to the
         * {@link Gtk.PlacesSidebar.SignalSignatures.show_starred_location | Gtk.PlacesSidebar::show-starred-location} signal.
         * @param show_starred_location whether to show an item for Starred files
         */
        set_show_starred_location(show_starred_location: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the `sidebar` should show an item for the Trash location.
         * @param show_trash whether to show an item for the Trash location
         */
        set_show_trash(show_trash: boolean): void;
    }


    namespace Plug {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Window.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * Gets emitted when the plug becomes embedded in a socket.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            embedded: () => void;
            "notify::embedded": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::socket-window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accept-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::application": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::attached-to": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::decorated": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::default-height": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::default-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::deletable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::destroy-with-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-map": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gravity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-resize-grip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-toplevel-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hide-titlebar-when-maximized": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::icon": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::icon-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-active": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-maximized": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::mnemonics-visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::modal": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resizable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-grip-visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::screen": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::skip-pager-hint": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::skip-taskbar-hint": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::startup-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::title": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::transient-for": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::type": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::type-hint": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::urgency-hint": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window-position": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Window.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {
            embedded: boolean;
            socket_window: Gdk.Window | null;
            socketWindow: Gdk.Window | null;
        }
    }

    /**
     * Together with {@link Gtk.Socket}, {@link Gtk.Plug} provides the ability to embed
     * widgets from one process into another process in a fashion that is
     * transparent to the user. One process creates a {@link Gtk.Socket} widget
     * and passes the ID of that widget’s window to the other process,
     * which then creates a {@link Gtk.Plug} with that window ID. Any widgets
     * contained in the {@link Gtk.Plug} then will appear inside the first
     * application’s window.
     * 
     * The communication between a {@link Gtk.Socket} and a {@link Gtk.Plug} follows the
     * [XEmbed Protocol](http://www.freedesktop.org/Standards/xembed-spec).
     * This protocol has also been implemented in other toolkits, e.g. Qt,
     * allowing the same level of integration when embedding a Qt widget
     * in GTK+ or vice versa.
     * 
     * The {@link Gtk.Plug} and {@link Gtk.Socket} widgets are only available when GTK+
     * is compiled for the X11 platform and `GDK_WINDOWING_X11` is defined.
     * They can only be used on a `GdkX11Display`. To use {@link Gtk.Plug} and
     * {@link Gtk.Socket}, you need to include the `gtk/gtkx.h` header.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class Plug extends Window implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<Plug>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * `true` if the plug is embedded in a socket.
         * @since 2.12
         * @read-only
         * @default false
         */
        get embedded(): boolean;

        /**
         * The window of the socket the plug is embedded in.
         * @since 2.14
         * @read-only
         */
        get socket_window(): Gdk.Window | null;

        /**
         * The window of the socket the plug is embedded in.
         * @since 2.14
         * @read-only
         */
        get socketWindow(): Gdk.Window | null;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: Plug.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        
    // @ts-expect-error This property conflicts with an accessor in a parent class or interface.
    window: Window;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<Plug.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](socket_id: xlib.Window): Plug;

        // Conflicted with Gtk.Window.new
        static ["new"](...args: never[]): any;

        static new_for_display(display: Gdk.Display, socket_id: xlib.Window): Plug;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof Plug.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Plug.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof Plug.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Plug.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof Plug.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<Plug.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_embedded(): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Finish the initialization of `plug` for a given {@link Gtk.Socket} identified by
         * `socket_id`. This function will generally only be used by classes deriving from {@link Gtk.Plug}.
         * @param socket_id the XID of the socket’s window.
         */
        construct(socket_id: xlib.Window): void;

        /**
         * Finish the initialization of `plug` for a given {@link Gtk.Socket} identified by
         * `socket_id` which is currently displayed on `display`.
         * This function will generally only be used by classes deriving from {@link Gtk.Plug}.
         * @param display the {@link Gdk.Display} associated with `socket_id`’s      {@link Gtk.Socket}.
         * @param socket_id the XID of the socket’s window.
         */
        construct_for_display(display: Gdk.Display, socket_id: xlib.Window): void;

        /**
         * Determines whether the plug is embedded in a socket.
         * @returns `true` if the plug is embedded in a socket
         */
        get_embedded(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the window ID of a {@link Gtk.Plug} widget, which can then
         * be used to embed this window inside another window, for
         * instance with `gtk_socket_add_id()`.
         * @returns the window ID for the plug
         */
        get_id(): xlib.Window;

        /**
         * Retrieves the socket the plug is embedded in.
         * @returns the window of the socket, or `null`
         */
        get_socket_window(): Gdk.Window | null;
    }


    namespace PlugAccessible {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends WindowAccessible.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-layer": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-mdi-zorder": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-help-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-hypertext-nlinks": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption-object": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-summary": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends WindowAccessible.ConstructorProps, Atk.Component.ConstructorProps, Atk.Window.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Class
     * @since 3.24.30
     */
    class PlugAccessible extends WindowAccessible implements Atk.Component, Atk.Window {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<PlugAccessible>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: PlugAccessible.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<PlugAccessible.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof PlugAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, PlugAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof PlugAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, PlugAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof PlugAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<PlugAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        get_id(): string;
    }


    namespace Popover {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Bin.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * This signal is emitted when the popover is dismissed either through
             * API or user interaction.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.12
             * @run-last
             */
            closed: () => void;
            "notify::constrain-to": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::modal": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::pointing-to": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::position": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::relative-to": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::transitions-enabled": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Bin.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {
            constrain_to: PopoverConstraint;
            constrainTo: PopoverConstraint;
            modal: boolean;
            pointing_to: Gdk.Rectangle;
            pointingTo: Gdk.Rectangle;
            position: PositionType;
            relative_to: Widget;
            relativeTo: Widget;
            transitions_enabled: boolean;
            transitionsEnabled: boolean;
        }
    }

    /**
     * GtkPopover is a bubble-like context window, primarily meant to
     * provide context-dependent information or options. Popovers are
     * attached to a widget, passed at construction time on `gtk_popover_new()`,
     * or updated afterwards through `gtk_popover_set_relative_to()`, by
     * default they will point to the whole widget area, although this
     * behavior can be changed through `gtk_popover_set_pointing_to()`.
     * 
     * The position of a popover relative to the widget it is attached to
     * can also be changed through `gtk_popover_set_position()`.
     * 
     * By default, {@link Gtk.Popover} performs a GTK+ grab, in order to ensure
     * input events get redirected to it while it is shown, and also so
     * the popover is dismissed in the expected situations (clicks outside
     * the popover, or the Esc key being pressed). If no such modal behavior
     * is desired on a popover, `gtk_popover_set_modal()` may be called on it
     * to tweak its behavior.
     * 
     * ## GtkPopover as menu replacement
     * 
     * GtkPopover is often used to replace menus. To facilitate this, it
     * supports being populated from a {@link Gio.MenuModel}, using
     * `gtk_popover_new_from_model()`. In addition to all the regular menu
     * model features, this function supports rendering sections in the
     * model in a more compact form, as a row of icon buttons instead of
     * menu items.
     * 
     * To use this rendering, set the ”display-hint” attribute of the
     * section to ”horizontal-buttons” and set the icons of your items
     * with the ”verb-icon” attribute.
     * 
     * 
     * ```
     * <section>
     *   <attribute name="display-hint">horizontal-buttons</attribute>
     *   <item>
     *     <attribute name="label">Cut</attribute>
     *     <attribute name="action">app.cut</attribute>
     *     <attribute name="verb-icon">edit-cut-symbolic</attribute>
     *   </item>
     *   <item>
     *     <attribute name="label">Copy</attribute>
     *     <attribute name="action">app.copy</attribute>
     *     <attribute name="verb-icon">edit-copy-symbolic</attribute>
     *   </item>
     *   <item>
     *     <attribute name="label">Paste</attribute>
     *     <attribute name="action">app.paste</attribute>
     *     <attribute name="verb-icon">edit-paste-symbolic</attribute>
     *   </item>
     * </section>
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * # CSS nodes
     * 
     * GtkPopover has a single css node called popover. It always gets the
     * .background style class and it gets the .menu style class if it is
     * menu-like (e.g. {@link Gtk.PopoverMenu} or created using `gtk_popover_new_from_model()`.
     * 
     * Particular uses of GtkPopover, such as touch selection popups
     * or magnifiers in {@link Gtk.Entry} or {@link Gtk.TextView} get style classes
     * like .touch-selection or .magnifier to differentiate from
     * plain popovers.
     * @gir-type Class
     * @since 3.12
     */
    class Popover extends Bin implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<Popover>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * Sets a constraint for the popover position.
         * @since 3.20
         * @default Gtk.PopoverConstraint.WINDOW
         */
        get constrain_to(): PopoverConstraint;
        set constrain_to(val: PopoverConstraint);

        /**
         * Sets a constraint for the popover position.
         * @since 3.20
         * @default Gtk.PopoverConstraint.WINDOW
         */
        get constrainTo(): PopoverConstraint;
        set constrainTo(val: PopoverConstraint);

        /**
         * Sets whether the popover is modal (so other elements in the window do not
         * receive input while the popover is visible).
         * @since 3.12
         * @default true
         */
        get modal(): boolean;
        set modal(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Marks a specific rectangle to be pointed.
         * @since 3.12
         */
        get pointing_to(): Gdk.Rectangle;
        set pointing_to(val: Gdk.Rectangle);

        /**
         * Marks a specific rectangle to be pointed.
         * @since 3.12
         */
        get pointingTo(): Gdk.Rectangle;
        set pointingTo(val: Gdk.Rectangle);

        /**
         * Sets the preferred position of the popover.
         * @since 3.12
         * @default Gtk.PositionType.TOP
         */
        get position(): PositionType;
        set position(val: PositionType);

        /**
         * Sets the attached widget.
         * @since 3.12
         */
        get relative_to(): Widget;
        set relative_to(val: Widget);

        /**
         * Sets the attached widget.
         * @since 3.12
         */
        get relativeTo(): Widget;
        set relativeTo(val: Widget);

        /**
         * Whether show/hide transitions are enabled for this popover.
         * @since 3.16
         * @deprecated since 3.22: You can show or hide the popover without transitions   using `gtk_widget_show()` and `gtk_widget_hide()` while `gtk_popover_popup()`   and `gtk_popover_popdown()` will use transitions.
         * @default true
         */
        get transitions_enabled(): boolean;
        set transitions_enabled(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether show/hide transitions are enabled for this popover.
         * @since 3.16
         * @deprecated since 3.22: You can show or hide the popover without transitions   using `gtk_widget_show()` and `gtk_widget_hide()` while `gtk_popover_popup()`   and `gtk_popover_popdown()` will use transitions.
         * @default true
         */
        get transitionsEnabled(): boolean;
        set transitionsEnabled(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: Popover.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<Popover.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](relative_to: Widget | null): Popover;

        static new_from_model(relative_to: Widget | null, model: Gio.MenuModel): Popover;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof Popover.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Popover.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof Popover.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Popover.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof Popover.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<Popover.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_closed(): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Establishes a binding between a {@link Gtk.Popover} and a {@link Gio.MenuModel}.
         * 
         * The contents of `popover` are removed and then refilled with menu items
         * according to `model`.  When `model` changes, `popover` is updated.
         * Calling this function twice on `popover` with different `model` will
         * cause the first binding to be replaced with a binding to the new
         * model. If `model` is `null` then any previous binding is undone and
         * all children are removed.
         * 
         * If `action_namespace` is non-`null` then the effect is as if all
         * actions mentioned in the `model` have their names prefixed with the
         * namespace, plus a dot.  For example, if the action “quit” is
         * mentioned and `action_namespace` is “app” then the effective action
         * name is “app.quit”.
         * 
         * This function uses {@link Gtk.Actionable} to define the action name and
         * target values on the created menu items.  If you want to use an
         * action group other than “app” and “win”, or if you want to use a
         * {@link Gtk.MenuShell} outside of a {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow}, then you will need
         * to attach your own action group to the widget hierarchy using
         * `gtk_widget_insert_action_group()`.  As an example, if you created a
         * group with a “quit” action and inserted it with the name “mygroup”
         * then you would use the action name “mygroup.quit” in your
         * {@link Gio.MenuModel}.
         * @param model the {@link Gio.MenuModel} to bind to or `null` to remove   binding
         * @param action_namespace the namespace for actions in `model`
         */
        bind_model(model: Gio.MenuModel | null, action_namespace: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Returns the constraint for placing this popover.
         * See `gtk_popover_set_constrain_to()`.
         * @returns the constraint for placing this popover.
         */
        get_constrain_to(): PopoverConstraint;

        /**
         * Gets the widget that should be set as the default while
         * the popover is shown.
         * @returns the default widget, or `null` if there is none
         */
        get_default_widget(): Widget | null;

        /**
         * Returns whether the popover is modal, see gtk_popover_set_modal to
         * see the implications of this.
         * @returns `TRUE` if `popover` is modal
         */
        get_modal(): boolean;

        /**
         * If a rectangle to point to has been set, this function will
         * return `true` and fill in `rect` with such rectangle, otherwise
         * it will return `false` and fill in `rect` with the attached
         * widget width and height if a widget exists, otherwise it will zero-out `rect`.
         * @returns `true` if a rectangle to point to was set.
         */
        get_pointing_to(): [boolean, Gdk.Rectangle];

        /**
         * Returns the preferred position of `popover`.
         * @returns The preferred position.
         */
        get_position(): PositionType;

        /**
         * Returns the widget `popover` is currently attached to
         * @returns a {@link Gtk.Widget}
         */
        get_relative_to(): Widget;

        /**
         * Returns whether show/hide transitions are enabled on this popover.
         * @returns `TRUE` if the show and hide transitions of the given          popover are enabled, `FALSE` otherwise.
         */
        get_transitions_enabled(): boolean;

        /**
         * Pops `popover` down.This is different than a `gtk_widget_hide()` call
         * in that it shows the popover with a transition. If you want to hide
         * the popover without a transition, use `gtk_widget_hide()`.
         */
        popdown(): void;

        /**
         * Pops `popover` up. This is different than a `gtk_widget_show()` call
         * in that it shows the popover with a transition. If you want to show
         * the popover without a transition, use `gtk_widget_show()`.
         */
        popup(): void;

        /**
         * Sets a constraint for positioning this popover.
         * 
         * Note that not all platforms support placing popovers freely,
         * and may already impose constraints.
         * @param constraint the new constraint
         */
        set_constrain_to(constraint: PopoverConstraint): void;

        /**
         * Sets the widget that should be set as default widget while
         * the popover is shown (see `gtk_window_set_default()`). {@link Gtk.Popover}
         * remembers the previous default widget and reestablishes it
         * when the popover is dismissed.
         * @param widget the new default widget, or `null`
         */
        set_default_widget(widget: Widget | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether `popover` is modal, a modal popover will grab all input
         * within the toplevel and grab the keyboard focus on it when being
         * displayed. Clicking outside the popover area or pressing Esc will
         * dismiss the popover and ungrab input.
         * @param modal `TRUE` to make popover claim all input within the toplevel
         */
        set_modal(modal: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the rectangle that `popover` will point to, in the
         * coordinate space of the widget `popover` is attached to,
         * see `gtk_popover_set_relative_to()`.
         * @param rect rectangle to point to
         */
        set_pointing_to(rect: Gdk.Rectangle): void;

        /**
         * Sets the preferred position for `popover` to appear. If the `popover`
         * is currently visible, it will be immediately updated.
         * 
         * This preference will be respected where possible, although
         * on lack of space (eg. if close to the window edges), the
         * {@link Gtk.Popover} may choose to appear on the opposite side
         * @param position preferred popover position
         */
        set_position(position: PositionType): void;

        /**
         * Sets a new widget to be attached to `popover`. If `popover` is
         * visible, the position will be updated.
         * 
         * Note: the ownership of popovers is always given to their `relative_to`
         * widget, so if `relative_to` is set to `null` on an attached `popover`, it
         * will be detached from its previous widget, and consequently destroyed
         * unless extra references are kept.
         * @param relative_to a {@link Gtk.Widget}
         */
        set_relative_to(relative_to: Widget | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether show/hide transitions are enabled on this popover
         * @param transitions_enabled Whether transitions are enabled
         */
        set_transitions_enabled(transitions_enabled: boolean): void;
    }


    namespace PopoverAccessible {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends ContainerAccessible.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-layer": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-mdi-zorder": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-help-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-hypertext-nlinks": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption-object": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-summary": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends ContainerAccessible.ConstructorProps, Atk.Component.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class PopoverAccessible extends ContainerAccessible implements Atk.Component {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<PopoverAccessible>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: PopoverAccessible.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<PopoverAccessible.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof PopoverAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, PopoverAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof PopoverAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, PopoverAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof PopoverAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<PopoverAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;
    }


    namespace PopoverMenu {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Popover.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::visible-submenu": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::constrain-to": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::modal": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::pointing-to": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::position": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::relative-to": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::transitions-enabled": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Popover.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {
            visible_submenu: string;
            visibleSubmenu: string;
        }
    }

    /**
     * GtkPopoverMenu is a subclass of {@link Gtk.Popover} that treats its
     * children like menus and allows switching between them. It is
     * meant to be used primarily together with {@link Gtk.ModelButton}, but
     * any widget can be used, such as {@link Gtk.SpinButton} or {@link Gtk.Scale}.
     * In this respect, GtkPopoverMenu is more flexible than popovers
     * that are created from a {@link Gio.MenuModel} with `gtk_popover_new_from_model()`.
     * 
     * To add a child as a submenu, set the {@link Gtk.PopoverMenu.submenu}
     * child property to the name of the submenu. To let the user open
     * this submenu, add a {@link Gtk.ModelButton} whose {@link Gtk.ModelButton.menu_name}
     * property is set to the name you've given to the submenu.
     * 
     * By convention, the first child of a submenu should be a {@link Gtk.ModelButton}
     * to switch back to the parent menu. Such a button should use the
     * {@link Gtk.ModelButton.inverted} and {@link Gtk.ModelButton.centered} properties
     * to achieve a title-like appearance and place the submenu indicator
     * at the opposite side. To switch back to the main menu, use "main"
     * as the menu name.
     * 
     * # Example
     * 
     * 
     * ```xml
     * <object class="GtkPopoverMenu">
     *   <child>
     *     <object class="GtkBox">
     *       <property name="visible">True</property>
     *       <property name="margin">10</property>
     *       <child>
     *         <object class="GtkModelButton">
     *           <property name="visible">True</property>
     *           <property name="action-name">win.frob</property>
     *           <property name="text" translatable="yes">Frob</property>
     *         </object>
     *       </child>
     *       <child>
     *         <object class="GtkModelButton">
     *           <property name="visible">True</property>
     *           <property name="menu-name">more</property>
     *           <property name="text" translatable="yes">More</property>
     *         </object>
     *       </child>
     *     </object>
     *   </child>
     *   <child>
     *     <object class="GtkBox">
     *       <property name="visible">True</property>
     *       <property name="margin">10</property>
     *       <child>
     *         <object class="GtkModelButton">
     *           <property name="visible">True</property>
     *           <property name="action-name">win.foo</property>
     *           <property name="text" translatable="yes">Foo</property>
     *         </object>
     *       </child>
     *       <child>
     *         <object class="GtkModelButton">
     *           <property name="visible">True</property>
     *           <property name="action-name">win.bar</property>
     *           <property name="text" translatable="yes">Bar</property>
     *         </object>
     *       </child>
     *     </object>
     *     <packing>
     *       <property name="submenu">more</property>
     *     </packing>
     *   </child>
     * </object>
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * Just like normal popovers created using gtk_popover_new_from_model,
     * {@link Gtk.PopoverMenu} instances have a single css node called "popover"
     * and get the .menu style class.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class PopoverMenu extends Popover implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<PopoverMenu>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * @default null
         */
        get visible_submenu(): string;
        set visible_submenu(val: string);

        /**
         * @default null
         */
        get visibleSubmenu(): string;
        set visibleSubmenu(val: string);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: PopoverMenu.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<PopoverMenu.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): PopoverMenu;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof PopoverMenu.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, PopoverMenu.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof PopoverMenu.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, PopoverMenu.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof PopoverMenu.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<PopoverMenu.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Opens a submenu of the `popover`. The `name`
         * must be one of the names given to the submenus
         * of `popover` with {@link Gtk.PopoverMenu.submenu}, or
         * "main" to switch back to the main menu.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.ModelButton} will open submenus automatically
         * when the {@link Gtk.ModelButton.menu_name} property is set,
         * so this function is only needed when you are using
         * other kinds of widgets to initiate menu changes.
         * @param name the name of the menu to switch to
         */
        open_submenu(name: string): void;
    }


    namespace PrintContext {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends GObject.Object.SignalSignatures {}

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.Object.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * A GtkPrintContext encapsulates context information that is required when
     * drawing pages for printing, such as the cairo context and important
     * parameters like page size and resolution. It also lets you easily
     * create {@link Pango.Layout} and {@link Pango.Context} objects that match the font metrics
     * of the cairo surface.
     * 
     * GtkPrintContext objects gets passed to the {@link Gtk.PrintOperation.SignalSignatures.begin_print | Gtk.PrintOperation::begin-print},
     * {@link Gtk.PrintOperation.SignalSignatures.end_print | Gtk.PrintOperation::end-print}, {@link Gtk.PrintOperation.SignalSignatures.request_page_setup | Gtk.PrintOperation::request-page-setup} and
     * {@link Gtk.PrintOperation.SignalSignatures.draw_page | Gtk.PrintOperation::draw-page} signals on the {@link Gtk.PrintOperation}.
     * 
     * ## Using GtkPrintContext in a {@link Gtk.PrintOperation.SignalSignatures.draw_page | Gtk.PrintOperation::draw-page} callback
     * 
     * 
     * ```c
     * static void
     * draw_page (GtkPrintOperation *operation,
     * 	   GtkPrintContext   *context,
     * 	   int                page_nr)
     * {
     *   cairo_t *cr;
     *   PangoLayout *layout;
     *   PangoFontDescription *desc;
     * 
     *   cr = gtk_print_context_get_cairo_context (context);
     * 
     *   // Draw a red rectangle, as wide as the paper (inside the margins)
     *   cairo_set_source_rgb (cr, 1.0, 0, 0);
     *   cairo_rectangle (cr, 0, 0, gtk_print_context_get_width (context), 50);
     * 
     *   cairo_fill (cr);
     * 
     *   // Draw some lines
     *   cairo_move_to (cr, 20, 10);
     *   cairo_line_to (cr, 40, 20);
     *   cairo_arc (cr, 60, 60, 20, 0, M_PI);
     *   cairo_line_to (cr, 80, 20);
     * 
     *   cairo_set_source_rgb (cr, 0, 0, 0);
     *   cairo_set_line_width (cr, 5);
     *   cairo_set_line_cap (cr, CAIRO_LINE_CAP_ROUND);
     *   cairo_set_line_join (cr, CAIRO_LINE_JOIN_ROUND);
     * 
     *   cairo_stroke (cr);
     * 
     *   // Draw some text
     *   layout = gtk_print_context_create_pango_layout (context);
     *   pango_layout_set_text (layout, "Hello World! Printing is easy", -1);
     *   desc = pango_font_description_from_string ("sans 28");
     *   pango_layout_set_font_description (layout, desc);
     *   pango_font_description_free (desc);
     * 
     *   cairo_move_to (cr, 30, 20);
     *   pango_cairo_layout_path (cr, layout);
     * 
     *   // Font Outline
     *   cairo_set_source_rgb (cr, 0.93, 1.0, 0.47);
     *   cairo_set_line_width (cr, 0.5);
     *   cairo_stroke_preserve (cr);
     * 
     *   // Font Fill
     *   cairo_set_source_rgb (cr, 0, 0.0, 1.0);
     *   cairo_fill (cr);
     * 
     *   g_object_unref (layout);
     * }
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * Printing support was added in GTK+ 2.10.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class PrintContext extends GObject.Object {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<PrintContext>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: PrintContext.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<PrintContext.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof PrintContext.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, PrintContext.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof PrintContext.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, PrintContext.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof PrintContext.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<PrintContext.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Creates a new {@link Pango.Context} that can be used with the
         * {@link Gtk.PrintContext}.
         * @returns a new Pango context for `context`
         */
        create_pango_context(): Pango.Context;

        /**
         * Creates a new {@link Pango.Layout} that is suitable for use
         * with the {@link Gtk.PrintContext}.
         * @returns a new Pango layout for `context`
         */
        create_pango_layout(): Pango.Layout;

        /**
         * Obtains the cairo context that is associated with the
         * {@link Gtk.PrintContext}.
         * @returns the cairo context of `context`
         */
        get_cairo_context(): cairo.Context;

        /**
         * Obtains the horizontal resolution of the {@link Gtk.PrintContext},
         * in dots per inch.
         * @returns the horizontal resolution of `context`
         */
        get_dpi_x(): number;

        /**
         * Obtains the vertical resolution of the {@link Gtk.PrintContext},
         * in dots per inch.
         * @returns the vertical resolution of `context`
         */
        get_dpi_y(): number;

        /**
         * Obtains the hardware printer margins of the {@link Gtk.PrintContext}, in units.
         * @returns `true` if the hard margins were retrieved
         */
        get_hard_margins(): [boolean, number, number, number, number];

        /**
         * Obtains the height of the {@link Gtk.PrintContext}, in pixels.
         * @returns the height of `context`
         */
        get_height(): number;

        /**
         * Obtains the {@link Gtk.PageSetup} that determines the page
         * dimensions of the {@link Gtk.PrintContext}.
         * @returns the page setup of `context`
         */
        get_page_setup(): PageSetup;

        /**
         * Returns a {@link Pango.FontMap} that is suitable for use
         * with the {@link Gtk.PrintContext}.
         * @returns the font map of `context`
         */
        get_pango_fontmap(): Pango.FontMap;

        /**
         * Obtains the width of the {@link Gtk.PrintContext}, in pixels.
         * @returns the width of `context`
         */
        get_width(): number;

        /**
         * Sets a new cairo context on a print context.
         * 
         * This function is intended to be used when implementing
         * an internal print preview, it is not needed for printing,
         * since GTK+ itself creates a suitable cairo context in that
         * case.
         * @param cr the cairo context
         * @param dpi_x the horizontal resolution to use with `cr`
         * @param dpi_y the vertical resolution to use with `cr`
         */
        set_cairo_context(cr: cairo.Context, dpi_x: number, dpi_y: number): void;
    }


    namespace PrintOperation {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends GObject.Object.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * Emitted after the user has finished changing print settings
             * in the dialog, before the actual rendering starts.
             * 
             * A typical use for ::begin-print is to use the parameters from the
             * {@link Gtk.PrintContext} and paginate the document accordingly, and then
             * set the number of pages with `gtk_print_operation_set_n_pages()`.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.10
             * @run-last
             */
            "begin-print": (arg0: PrintContext) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when displaying the print dialog. If you return a
             * widget in a handler for this signal it will be added to a custom
             * tab in the print dialog. You typically return a container widget
             * with multiple widgets in it.
             * 
             * The print dialog owns the returned widget, and its lifetime is not
             * controlled by the application. However, the widget is guaranteed
             * to stay around until the {@link Gtk.PrintOperation.SignalSignatures.custom_widget_apply | Gtk.PrintOperation::custom-widget-apply}
             * signal is emitted on the operation. Then you can read out any
             * information you need from the widgets.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.10
             * @run-last
             */
            "create-custom-widget": () => GObject.Object;
            /**
             * Emitted right before {@link Gtk.PrintOperation.SignalSignatures.begin_print | Gtk.PrintOperation::begin-print} if you added
             * a custom widget in the {@link Gtk.PrintOperation.SignalSignatures.create_custom_widget | Gtk.PrintOperation::create-custom-widget} handler.
             * When you get this signal you should read the information from the
             * custom widgets, as the widgets are not guaraneed to be around at a
             * later time.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.10
             * @run-last
             */
            "custom-widget-apply": (arg0: Widget) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when the print operation run has finished doing
             * everything required for printing.
             * 
             * `result` gives you information about what happened during the run.
             * If `result` is {@link Gtk.PrintOperationResult.ERROR} then you can call
             * `gtk_print_operation_get_error()` for more information.
             * 
             * If you enabled print status tracking then
             * `gtk_print_operation_is_finished()` may still return `false`
             * after {@link Gtk.PrintOperation.SignalSignatures.done | Gtk.PrintOperation::done} was emitted.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.10
             * @run-last
             */
            done: (arg0: PrintOperationResult) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted for every page that is printed. The signal handler
             * must render the `page_nr`'s page onto the cairo context obtained
             * from `context` using `gtk_print_context_get_cairo_context()`.
             * 
             * ```c
             * static void
             * draw_page (GtkPrintOperation *operation,
             *            GtkPrintContext   *context,
             *            gint               page_nr,
             *            gpointer           user_data)
             * {
             *   cairo_t *cr;
             *   PangoLayout *layout;
             *   gdouble width, text_height;
             *   gint layout_height;
             *   PangoFontDescription *desc;
             *   
             *   cr = gtk_print_context_get_cairo_context (context);
             *   width = gtk_print_context_get_width (context);
             *   
             *   cairo_rectangle (cr, 0, 0, width, HEADER_HEIGHT);
             *   
             *   cairo_set_source_rgb (cr, 0.8, 0.8, 0.8);
             *   cairo_fill (cr);
             *   
             *   layout = gtk_print_context_create_pango_layout (context);
             *   
             *   desc = pango_font_description_from_string ("sans 14");
             *   pango_layout_set_font_description (layout, desc);
             *   pango_font_description_free (desc);
             *   
             *   pango_layout_set_text (layout, "some text", -1);
             *   pango_layout_set_width (layout, width * PANGO_SCALE);
             *   pango_layout_set_alignment (layout, PANGO_ALIGN_CENTER);
             *      		      
             *   pango_layout_get_size (layout, NULL, &layout_height);
             *   text_height = (gdouble)layout_height / PANGO_SCALE;
             *   
             *   cairo_move_to (cr, width / 2,  (HEADER_HEIGHT - text_height) / 2);
             *   pango_cairo_show_layout (cr, layout);
             *   
             *   g_object_unref (layout);
             * }
             * ```
             * 
             * 
             * Use `gtk_print_operation_set_use_full_page()` and
             * `gtk_print_operation_set_unit()` before starting the print operation
             * to set up the transformation of the cairo context according to your
             * needs.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.10
             * @run-last
             */
            "draw-page": (arg0: PrintContext, arg1: number) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted after all pages have been rendered.
             * A handler for this signal can clean up any resources that have
             * been allocated in the {@link Gtk.PrintOperation.SignalSignatures.begin_print | Gtk.PrintOperation::begin-print} handler.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.10
             * @run-last
             */
            "end-print": (arg0: PrintContext) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted after the {@link Gtk.PrintOperation.SignalSignatures.begin_print | Gtk.PrintOperation::begin-print} signal, but before
             * the actual rendering starts. It keeps getting emitted until a connected
             * signal handler returns `true`.
             * 
             * The ::paginate signal is intended to be used for paginating a document
             * in small chunks, to avoid blocking the user interface for a long
             * time. The signal handler should update the number of pages using
             * `gtk_print_operation_set_n_pages()`, and return `true` if the document
             * has been completely paginated.
             * 
             * If you don't need to do pagination in chunks, you can simply do
             * it all in the ::begin-print handler, and set the number of pages
             * from there.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.10
             * @run-last
             */
            paginate: (arg0: PrintContext) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * Gets emitted when a preview is requested from the native dialog.
             * 
             * The default handler for this signal uses an external viewer
             * application to preview.
             * 
             * To implement a custom print preview, an application must return
             * `true` from its handler for this signal. In order to use the
             * provided `context` for the preview implementation, it must be
             * given a suitable cairo context with `gtk_print_context_set_cairo_context()`.
             * 
             * The custom preview implementation can use
             * `gtk_print_operation_preview_is_selected()` and
             * `gtk_print_operation_preview_render_page()` to find pages which
             * are selected for print and render them. The preview must be
             * finished by calling `gtk_print_operation_preview_end_preview()`
             * (typically in response to the user clicking a close button).
             * @signal
             * @since 2.10
             * @run-last
             */
            preview: (arg0: PrintOperationPreview, arg1: PrintContext, arg2: Window | null) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * Emitted once for every page that is printed, to give
             * the application a chance to modify the page setup. Any changes
             * done to `setup` will be in force only for printing this page.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.10
             * @run-last
             */
            "request-page-setup": (arg0: PrintContext, arg1: number, arg2: PageSetup) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted at between the various phases of the print operation.
             * See {@link Gtk.PrintStatus} for the phases that are being discriminated.
             * Use `gtk_print_operation_get_status()` to find out the current
             * status.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.10
             * @run-last
             */
            "status-changed": () => void;
            /**
             * Emitted after change of selected printer. The actual page setup and
             * print settings are passed to the custom widget, which can actualize
             * itself according to this change.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.18
             * @run-last
             */
            "update-custom-widget": (arg0: Widget, arg1: PageSetup, arg2: PrintSettings) => void;
            "notify::allow-async": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::current-page": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::custom-tab-label": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::default-page-setup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::embed-page-setup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::export-filename": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-selection": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::job-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::n-pages": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::n-pages-to-print": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::print-settings": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::show-progress": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::status": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::status-string": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::support-selection": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::track-print-status": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::unit": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-full-page": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.Object.ConstructorProps, PrintOperationPreview.ConstructorProps {
            allow_async: boolean;
            allowAsync: boolean;
            current_page: number;
            currentPage: number;
            custom_tab_label: string;
            customTabLabel: string;
            default_page_setup: PageSetup;
            defaultPageSetup: PageSetup;
            embed_page_setup: boolean;
            embedPageSetup: boolean;
            export_filename: string;
            exportFilename: string;
            has_selection: boolean;
            hasSelection: boolean;
            job_name: string;
            jobName: string;
            n_pages: number;
            nPages: number;
            n_pages_to_print: number;
            nPagesToPrint: number;
            print_settings: PrintSettings;
            printSettings: PrintSettings;
            show_progress: boolean;
            showProgress: boolean;
            status: PrintStatus;
            status_string: string;
            statusString: string;
            support_selection: boolean;
            supportSelection: boolean;
            track_print_status: boolean;
            trackPrintStatus: boolean;
            unit: Unit;
            use_full_page: boolean;
            useFullPage: boolean;
        }
    }

    /**
     * GtkPrintOperation is the high-level, portable printing API.
     * It looks a bit different than other GTK+ dialogs such as the
     * {@link Gtk.FileChooser}, since some platforms don’t expose enough
     * infrastructure to implement a good print dialog. On such
     * platforms, GtkPrintOperation uses the native print dialog.
     * On platforms which do not provide a native print dialog, GTK+
     * uses its own, see `GtkPrintUnixDialog`.
     * 
     * The typical way to use the high-level printing API is to create
     * a GtkPrintOperation object with `gtk_print_operation_new()` when
     * the user selects to print. Then you set some properties on it,
     * e.g. the page size, any {@link Gtk.PrintSettings} from previous print
     * operations, the number of pages, the current page, etc.
     * 
     * Then you start the print operation by calling `gtk_print_operation_run()`.
     * It will then show a dialog, let the user select a printer and
     * options. When the user finished the dialog various signals will
     * be emitted on the {@link Gtk.PrintOperation}, the main one being
     * {@link Gtk.PrintOperation.SignalSignatures.draw_page | Gtk.PrintOperation::draw-page}, which you are supposed to catch
     * and render the page on the provided {@link Gtk.PrintContext} using Cairo.
     * 
     * # The high-level printing API
     * 
     * 
     * ```c
     * static GtkPrintSettings *settings = NULL;
     * 
     * static void
     * do_print (void)
     * {
     *   GtkPrintOperation *print;
     *   GtkPrintOperationResult res;
     * 
     *   print = gtk_print_operation_new ();
     * 
     *   if (settings != NULL)
     *     gtk_print_operation_set_print_settings (print, settings);
     * 
     *   g_signal_connect (print, "begin_print", G_CALLBACK (begin_print), NULL);
     *   g_signal_connect (print, "draw_page", G_CALLBACK (draw_page), NULL);
     * 
     *   res = gtk_print_operation_run (print, GTK_PRINT_OPERATION_ACTION_PRINT_DIALOG,
     *                                  GTK_WINDOW (main_window), NULL);
     * 
     *   if (res == GTK_PRINT_OPERATION_RESULT_APPLY)
     *     {
     *       if (settings != NULL)
     *         g_object_unref (settings);
     *       settings = g_object_ref (gtk_print_operation_get_print_settings (print));
     *     }
     * 
     *   g_object_unref (print);
     * }
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * By default GtkPrintOperation uses an external application to do
     * print preview. To implement a custom print preview, an application
     * must connect to the preview signal. The functions
     * `gtk_print_operation_preview_render_page()`,
     * `gtk_print_operation_preview_end_preview()` and
     * `gtk_print_operation_preview_is_selected()`
     * are useful when implementing a print preview.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class PrintOperation extends GObject.Object implements PrintOperationPreview {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<PrintOperation>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * Determines whether the print operation may run asynchronously or not.
         * 
         * Some systems don't support asynchronous printing, but those that do
         * will return {@link Gtk.PrintOperationResult.IN_PROGRESS} as the status, and
         * emit the {@link Gtk.PrintOperation.SignalSignatures.done | Gtk.PrintOperation::done} signal when the operation is actually
         * done.
         * 
         * The Windows port does not support asynchronous operation at all (this
         * is unlikely to change). On other platforms, all actions except for
         * {@link Gtk.PrintOperationAction.EXPORT} support asynchronous operation.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default false
         */
        get allow_async(): boolean;
        set allow_async(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Determines whether the print operation may run asynchronously or not.
         * 
         * Some systems don't support asynchronous printing, but those that do
         * will return {@link Gtk.PrintOperationResult.IN_PROGRESS} as the status, and
         * emit the {@link Gtk.PrintOperation.SignalSignatures.done | Gtk.PrintOperation::done} signal when the operation is actually
         * done.
         * 
         * The Windows port does not support asynchronous operation at all (this
         * is unlikely to change). On other platforms, all actions except for
         * {@link Gtk.PrintOperationAction.EXPORT} support asynchronous operation.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default false
         */
        get allowAsync(): boolean;
        set allowAsync(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The current page in the document.
         * 
         * If this is set before `gtk_print_operation_run()`,
         * the user will be able to select to print only the current page.
         * 
         * Note that this only makes sense for pre-paginated documents.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default -1
         */
        get current_page(): number;
        set current_page(val: number);

        /**
         * The current page in the document.
         * 
         * If this is set before `gtk_print_operation_run()`,
         * the user will be able to select to print only the current page.
         * 
         * Note that this only makes sense for pre-paginated documents.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default -1
         */
        get currentPage(): number;
        set currentPage(val: number);

        /**
         * Used as the label of the tab containing custom widgets.
         * Note that this property may be ignored on some platforms.
         * 
         * If this is `null`, GTK+ uses a default label.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default null
         */
        get custom_tab_label(): string;
        set custom_tab_label(val: string);

        /**
         * Used as the label of the tab containing custom widgets.
         * Note that this property may be ignored on some platforms.
         * 
         * If this is `null`, GTK+ uses a default label.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default null
         */
        get customTabLabel(): string;
        set customTabLabel(val: string);

        /**
         * The {@link Gtk.PageSetup} used by default.
         * 
         * This page setup will be used by `gtk_print_operation_run()`,
         * but it can be overridden on a per-page basis by connecting
         * to the {@link Gtk.PrintOperation.SignalSignatures.request_page_setup | Gtk.PrintOperation::request-page-setup} signal.
         * @since 2.10
         */
        get default_page_setup(): PageSetup;
        set default_page_setup(val: PageSetup);

        /**
         * The {@link Gtk.PageSetup} used by default.
         * 
         * This page setup will be used by `gtk_print_operation_run()`,
         * but it can be overridden on a per-page basis by connecting
         * to the {@link Gtk.PrintOperation.SignalSignatures.request_page_setup | Gtk.PrintOperation::request-page-setup} signal.
         * @since 2.10
         */
        get defaultPageSetup(): PageSetup;
        set defaultPageSetup(val: PageSetup);

        /**
         * If `true`, page size combo box and orientation combo box are embedded into page setup page.
         * @since 2.18
         * @default false
         */
        get embed_page_setup(): boolean;
        set embed_page_setup(val: boolean);

        /**
         * If `true`, page size combo box and orientation combo box are embedded into page setup page.
         * @since 2.18
         * @default false
         */
        get embedPageSetup(): boolean;
        set embedPageSetup(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The name of a file to generate instead of showing the print dialog.
         * Currently, PDF is the only supported format.
         * 
         * The intended use of this property is for implementing
         * “Export to PDF” actions.
         * 
         * “Print to PDF” support is independent of this and is done
         * by letting the user pick the “Print to PDF” item from the
         * list of printers in the print dialog.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default null
         */
        get export_filename(): string;
        set export_filename(val: string);

        /**
         * The name of a file to generate instead of showing the print dialog.
         * Currently, PDF is the only supported format.
         * 
         * The intended use of this property is for implementing
         * “Export to PDF” actions.
         * 
         * “Print to PDF” support is independent of this and is done
         * by letting the user pick the “Print to PDF” item from the
         * list of printers in the print dialog.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default null
         */
        get exportFilename(): string;
        set exportFilename(val: string);

        /**
         * Determines whether there is a selection in your application.
         * This can allow your application to print the selection.
         * This is typically used to make a "Selection" button sensitive.
         * @since 2.18
         * @default false
         */
        get has_selection(): boolean;
        set has_selection(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Determines whether there is a selection in your application.
         * This can allow your application to print the selection.
         * This is typically used to make a "Selection" button sensitive.
         * @since 2.18
         * @default false
         */
        get hasSelection(): boolean;
        set hasSelection(val: boolean);

        /**
         * A string used to identify the job (e.g. in monitoring
         * applications like eggcups).
         * 
         * If you don't set a job name, GTK+ picks a default one
         * by numbering successive print jobs.
         * @since 2.10
         */
        get job_name(): string;
        set job_name(val: string);

        /**
         * A string used to identify the job (e.g. in monitoring
         * applications like eggcups).
         * 
         * If you don't set a job name, GTK+ picks a default one
         * by numbering successive print jobs.
         * @since 2.10
         */
        get jobName(): string;
        set jobName(val: string);

        /**
         * The number of pages in the document.
         * 
         * This must be set to a positive number
         * before the rendering starts. It may be set in a
         * {@link Gtk.PrintOperation.SignalSignatures.begin_print | Gtk.PrintOperation::begin-print} signal hander.
         * 
         * Note that the page numbers passed to the
         * {@link Gtk.PrintOperation.SignalSignatures.request_page_setup | Gtk.PrintOperation::request-page-setup} and
         * {@link Gtk.PrintOperation.SignalSignatures.draw_page | Gtk.PrintOperation::draw-page} signals are 0-based, i.e. if
         * the user chooses to print all pages, the last ::draw-page signal
         * will be for page `n_pages` - 1.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default -1
         */
        get n_pages(): number;
        set n_pages(val: number);

        /**
         * The number of pages in the document.
         * 
         * This must be set to a positive number
         * before the rendering starts. It may be set in a
         * {@link Gtk.PrintOperation.SignalSignatures.begin_print | Gtk.PrintOperation::begin-print} signal hander.
         * 
         * Note that the page numbers passed to the
         * {@link Gtk.PrintOperation.SignalSignatures.request_page_setup | Gtk.PrintOperation::request-page-setup} and
         * {@link Gtk.PrintOperation.SignalSignatures.draw_page | Gtk.PrintOperation::draw-page} signals are 0-based, i.e. if
         * the user chooses to print all pages, the last ::draw-page signal
         * will be for page `n_pages` - 1.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default -1
         */
        get nPages(): number;
        set nPages(val: number);

        /**
         * The number of pages that will be printed.
         * 
         * Note that this value is set during print preparation phase
         * ({@link Gtk.PrintStatus.PREPARING}), so this value should never be
         * get before the data generation phase ({@link Gtk.PrintStatus.GENERATING_DATA}).
         * You can connect to the {@link Gtk.PrintOperation.SignalSignatures.status_changed | Gtk.PrintOperation::status-changed} signal
         * and call `gtk_print_operation_get_n_pages_to_print()` when
         * print status is {@link Gtk.PrintStatus.GENERATING_DATA}.
         * This is typically used to track the progress of print operation.
         * @since 2.18
         * @read-only
         * @default -1
         */
        get n_pages_to_print(): number;

        /**
         * The number of pages that will be printed.
         * 
         * Note that this value is set during print preparation phase
         * ({@link Gtk.PrintStatus.PREPARING}), so this value should never be
         * get before the data generation phase ({@link Gtk.PrintStatus.GENERATING_DATA}).
         * You can connect to the {@link Gtk.PrintOperation.SignalSignatures.status_changed | Gtk.PrintOperation::status-changed} signal
         * and call `gtk_print_operation_get_n_pages_to_print()` when
         * print status is {@link Gtk.PrintStatus.GENERATING_DATA}.
         * This is typically used to track the progress of print operation.
         * @since 2.18
         * @read-only
         * @default -1
         */
        get nPagesToPrint(): number;

        /**
         * The {@link Gtk.PrintSettings} used for initializing the dialog.
         * 
         * Setting this property is typically used to re-establish
         * print settings from a previous print operation, see
         * `gtk_print_operation_run()`.
         * @since 2.10
         */
        get print_settings(): PrintSettings;
        set print_settings(val: PrintSettings);

        /**
         * The {@link Gtk.PrintSettings} used for initializing the dialog.
         * 
         * Setting this property is typically used to re-establish
         * print settings from a previous print operation, see
         * `gtk_print_operation_run()`.
         * @since 2.10
         */
        get printSettings(): PrintSettings;
        set printSettings(val: PrintSettings);

        /**
         * Determines whether to show a progress dialog during the
         * print operation.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default false
         */
        get show_progress(): boolean;
        set show_progress(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Determines whether to show a progress dialog during the
         * print operation.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default false
         */
        get showProgress(): boolean;
        set showProgress(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The status of the print operation.
         * @since 2.10
         * @read-only
         * @default Gtk.PrintStatus.INITIAL
         */
        get status(): PrintStatus;

        /**
         * A string representation of the status of the print operation.
         * The string is translated and suitable for displaying the print
         * status e.g. in a {@link Gtk.Statusbar}.
         * 
         * See the {@link Gtk.PrintOperation.status} property for a status value that
         * is suitable for programmatic use.
         * @since 2.10
         * @read-only
         */
        get status_string(): string;

        /**
         * A string representation of the status of the print operation.
         * The string is translated and suitable for displaying the print
         * status e.g. in a {@link Gtk.Statusbar}.
         * 
         * See the {@link Gtk.PrintOperation.status} property for a status value that
         * is suitable for programmatic use.
         * @since 2.10
         * @read-only
         */
        get statusString(): string;

        /**
         * If `true`, the print operation will support print of selection.
         * This allows the print dialog to show a "Selection" button.
         * @since 2.18
         * @default false
         */
        get support_selection(): boolean;
        set support_selection(val: boolean);

        /**
         * If `true`, the print operation will support print of selection.
         * This allows the print dialog to show a "Selection" button.
         * @since 2.18
         * @default false
         */
        get supportSelection(): boolean;
        set supportSelection(val: boolean);

        /**
         * If `true`, the print operation will try to continue report on
         * the status of the print job in the printer queues and printer.
         * This can allow your application to show things like “out of paper”
         * issues, and when the print job actually reaches the printer.
         * However, this is often implemented using polling, and should
         * not be enabled unless needed.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default false
         */
        get track_print_status(): boolean;
        set track_print_status(val: boolean);

        /**
         * If `true`, the print operation will try to continue report on
         * the status of the print job in the printer queues and printer.
         * This can allow your application to show things like “out of paper”
         * issues, and when the print job actually reaches the printer.
         * However, this is often implemented using polling, and should
         * not be enabled unless needed.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default false
         */
        get trackPrintStatus(): boolean;
        set trackPrintStatus(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The transformation for the cairo context obtained from
         * {@link Gtk.PrintContext} is set up in such a way that distances
         * are measured in units of `unit`.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default Gtk.Unit.NONE
         */
        get unit(): Unit;
        set unit(val: Unit);

        /**
         * If `true`, the transformation for the cairo context obtained
         * from {@link Gtk.PrintContext} puts the origin at the top left corner
         * of the page (which may not be the top left corner of the sheet,
         * depending on page orientation and the number of pages per sheet).
         * Otherwise, the origin is at the top left corner of the imageable
         * area (i.e. inside the margins).
         * @since 2.10
         * @default false
         */
        get use_full_page(): boolean;
        set use_full_page(val: boolean);

        /**
         * If `true`, the transformation for the cairo context obtained
         * from {@link Gtk.PrintContext} puts the origin at the top left corner
         * of the page (which may not be the top left corner of the sheet,
         * depending on page orientation and the number of pages per sheet).
         * Otherwise, the origin is at the top left corner of the imageable
         * area (i.e. inside the margins).
         * @since 2.10
         * @default false
         */
        get useFullPage(): boolean;
        set useFullPage(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: PrintOperation.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<PrintOperation.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): PrintOperation;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof PrintOperation.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, PrintOperation.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof PrintOperation.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, PrintOperation.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof PrintOperation.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<PrintOperation.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * Signal emitted after the user has finished changing
         *    print settings in the dialog, before the actual rendering starts.
         * @param context 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_begin_print(context: PrintContext): void;

        /**
         * Signal emitted right before “begin-print” if
         *    you added a custom widget in the “create-custom-widget” handler.
         * @param widget 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_widget_apply(widget: Widget): void;

        /**
         * Signal emitted when the print operation run has finished
         *    doing everything required for printing.
         * @param result 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_done(result: PrintOperationResult): void;

        /**
         * Signal emitted for every page that is printed.
         * @param context 
         * @param page_nr 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_draw_page(context: PrintContext, page_nr: number): void;

        /**
         * Signal emitted after all pages have been rendered.
         * @param context 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_end_print(context: PrintContext): void;

        /**
         * Signal emitted after the “begin-print” signal, but
         *    before the actual rendering starts.
         * @param context 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_paginate(context: PrintContext): boolean;

        /**
         * Signal emitted when a preview is requested from the
         *    native dialog.
         * @param preview 
         * @param context 
         * @param parent 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_preview(preview: PrintOperationPreview, context: PrintContext, parent: Window): boolean;

        /**
         * Emitted once for every page that is printed,
         *    to give the application a chance to modify the page setup.
         * @param context 
         * @param page_nr 
         * @param setup 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_request_page_setup(context: PrintContext, page_nr: number, setup: PageSetup): void;

        /**
         * Emitted at between the various phases of the print
         *    operation.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_status_changed(): void;

        /**
         * Emitted after change of selected printer.
         * @param widget 
         * @param setup 
         * @param settings 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_update_custom_widget(widget: Widget, setup: PageSetup, settings: PrintSettings): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Cancels a running print operation. This function may
         * be called from a {@link Gtk.PrintOperation.SignalSignatures.begin_print | Gtk.PrintOperation::begin-print},
         * {@link Gtk.PrintOperation.SignalSignatures.paginate | Gtk.PrintOperation::paginate} or {@link Gtk.PrintOperation.SignalSignatures.draw_page | Gtk.PrintOperation::draw-page}
         * signal handler to stop the currently running print
         * operation.
         */
        cancel(): void;

        /**
         * Signalize that drawing of particular page is complete.
         * 
         * It is called after completion of page drawing (e.g. drawing in another
         * thread).
         * If `gtk_print_operation_set_defer_drawing()` was called before, then this function
         * has to be called by application. In another case it is called by the library
         * itself.
         */
        draw_page_finish(): void;

        /**
         * Returns the default page setup, see
         * `gtk_print_operation_set_default_page_setup()`.
         * @returns the default page setup
         */
        get_default_page_setup(): PageSetup;

        /**
         * Gets the value of {@link Gtk.PrintOperation.embed_page_setup} property.
         * @returns whether page setup selection combos are embedded
         */
        get_embed_page_setup(): boolean;

        /**
         * Call this when the result of a print operation is
         * {@link Gtk.PrintOperationResult.ERROR}, either as returned by
         * `gtk_print_operation_run()`, or in the {@link Gtk.PrintOperation.SignalSignatures.done | Gtk.PrintOperation::done} signal
         * handler. The returned {@link GLib.Error} will contain more details on what went wrong.
         */
        get_error(): void;

        /**
         * Gets the value of {@link Gtk.PrintOperation.has_selection} property.
         * @returns whether there is a selection
         */
        get_has_selection(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the number of pages that will be printed.
         * 
         * Note that this value is set during print preparation phase
         * ({@link Gtk.PrintStatus.PREPARING}), so this function should never be
         * called before the data generation phase ({@link Gtk.PrintStatus.GENERATING_DATA}).
         * You can connect to the {@link Gtk.PrintOperation.SignalSignatures.status_changed | Gtk.PrintOperation::status-changed} signal
         * and call `gtk_print_operation_get_n_pages_to_print()` when
         * print status is {@link Gtk.PrintStatus.GENERATING_DATA}.
         * This is typically used to track the progress of print operation.
         * @returns the number of pages that will be printed
         */
        get_n_pages_to_print(): number;

        /**
         * Returns the current print settings.
         * 
         * Note that the return value is `null` until either
         * `gtk_print_operation_set_print_settings()` or
         * `gtk_print_operation_run()` have been called.
         * @returns the current print settings of `op`.
         */
        get_print_settings(): PrintSettings;

        /**
         * Returns the status of the print operation.
         * Also see `gtk_print_operation_get_status_string()`.
         * @returns the status of the print operation
         */
        get_status(): PrintStatus;

        /**
         * Returns a string representation of the status of the
         * print operation. The string is translated and suitable
         * for displaying the print status e.g. in a {@link Gtk.Statusbar}.
         * 
         * Use `gtk_print_operation_get_status()` to obtain a status
         * value that is suitable for programmatic use.
         * @returns a string representation of the status    of the print operation
         */
        get_status_string(): string;

        /**
         * Gets the value of {@link Gtk.PrintOperation.support_selection} property.
         * @returns whether the application supports print of selection
         */
        get_support_selection(): boolean;

        /**
         * A convenience function to find out if the print operation
         * is finished, either successfully ({@link Gtk.PrintStatus.FINISHED})
         * or unsuccessfully ({@link Gtk.PrintStatus.FINISHED_ABORTED}).
         * 
         * Note: when you enable print status tracking the print operation
         * can be in a non-finished state even after done has been called, as
         * the operation status then tracks the print job status on the printer.
         * @returns `true`, if the print operation is finished.
         */
        is_finished(): boolean;

        /**
         * Runs the print operation, by first letting the user modify
         * print settings in the print dialog, and then print the document.
         * 
         * Normally that this function does not return until the rendering of all
         * pages is complete. You can connect to the
         * {@link Gtk.PrintOperation.SignalSignatures.status_changed | Gtk.PrintOperation::status-changed} signal on `op` to obtain some
         * information about the progress of the print operation.
         * Furthermore, it may use a recursive mainloop to show the print dialog.
         * 
         * If you call `gtk_print_operation_set_allow_async()` or set the
         * {@link Gtk.PrintOperation.allow_async} property the operation will run
         * asynchronously if this is supported on the platform. The
         * {@link Gtk.PrintOperation.SignalSignatures.done | Gtk.PrintOperation::done} signal will be emitted with the result of the
         * operation when the it is done (i.e. when the dialog is canceled, or when
         * the print succeeds or fails).
         * 
         * ```c
         * if (settings != NULL)
         *   gtk_print_operation_set_print_settings (print, settings);
         *   
         * if (page_setup != NULL)
         *   gtk_print_operation_set_default_page_setup (print, page_setup);
         *   
         * g_signal_connect (print, "begin-print",
         *                   G_CALLBACK (begin_print), &data);
         * g_signal_connect (print, "draw-page",
         *                   G_CALLBACK (draw_page), &data);
         *  
         * res = gtk_print_operation_run (print,
         *                                GTK_PRINT_OPERATION_ACTION_PRINT_DIALOG,
         *                                parent,
         *                                &error);
         *  
         * if (res == GTK_PRINT_OPERATION_RESULT_ERROR)
         *  {
         *    error_dialog = gtk_message_dialog_new (GTK_WINDOW (parent),
         *   			                     GTK_DIALOG_DESTROY_WITH_PARENT,
         * 					     GTK_MESSAGE_ERROR,
         * 					     GTK_BUTTONS_CLOSE,
         * 					     "Error printing file:\n%s",
         * 					     error->message);
         *    g_signal_connect (error_dialog, "response",
         *                      G_CALLBACK (gtk_widget_destroy), NULL);
         *    gtk_widget_show (error_dialog);
         *    g_error_free (error);
         *  }
         * else if (res == GTK_PRINT_OPERATION_RESULT_APPLY)
         *  {
         *    if (settings != NULL)
         * g_object_unref (settings);
         *    settings = g_object_ref (gtk_print_operation_get_print_settings (print));
         *  }
         * ```
         * 
         * 
         * Note that `gtk_print_operation_run()` can only be called once on a
         * given {@link Gtk.PrintOperation}.
         * @param action the action to start
         * @param parent Transient parent of the dialog
         * @returns the result of the print operation. A return value of   {@link Gtk.PrintOperationResult.APPLY} indicates that the printing was   completed successfully. In this case, it is a good idea to obtain   the used print settings with `gtk_print_operation_get_print_settings()`   and store them for reuse with the next print operation. A value of   {@link Gtk.PrintOperationResult.IN_PROGRESS} means the operation is running   asynchronously, and will emit the {@link Gtk.PrintOperation.SignalSignatures.done | Gtk.PrintOperation::done} signal when   done.
         */
        run(action: PrintOperationAction, parent: Window | null): PrintOperationResult;

        /**
         * Sets whether the `gtk_print_operation_run()` may return
         * before the print operation is completed. Note that
         * some platforms may not allow asynchronous operation.
         * @param allow_async `true` to allow asynchronous operation
         */
        set_allow_async(allow_async: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the current page.
         * 
         * If this is called before `gtk_print_operation_run()`,
         * the user will be able to select to print only the current page.
         * 
         * Note that this only makes sense for pre-paginated documents.
         * @param current_page the current page, 0-based
         */
        set_current_page(current_page: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the label for the tab holding custom widgets.
         * @param label the label to use, or `null` to use the default label
         */
        set_custom_tab_label(label: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Makes `default_page_setup` the default page setup for `op`.
         * 
         * This page setup will be used by `gtk_print_operation_run()`,
         * but it can be overridden on a per-page basis by connecting
         * to the {@link Gtk.PrintOperation.SignalSignatures.request_page_setup | Gtk.PrintOperation::request-page-setup} signal.
         * @param default_page_setup a {@link Gtk.PageSetup}, or `null`
         */
        set_default_page_setup(default_page_setup: PageSetup | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets up the {@link Gtk.PrintOperation} to wait for calling of
         * `gtk_print_operation_draw_page_finish()` from application. It can
         * be used for drawing page in another thread.
         * 
         * This function must be called in the callback of “draw-page” signal.
         */
        set_defer_drawing(): void;

        /**
         * Embed page size combo box and orientation combo box into page setup page.
         * Selected page setup is stored as default page setup in {@link Gtk.PrintOperation}.
         * @param embed `true` to embed page setup selection in the `GtkPrintUnixDialog`
         */
        set_embed_page_setup(embed: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets up the {@link Gtk.PrintOperation} to generate a file instead
         * of showing the print dialog. The indended use of this function
         * is for implementing “Export to PDF” actions. Currently, PDF
         * is the only supported format.
         * 
         * “Print to PDF” support is independent of this and is done
         * by letting the user pick the “Print to PDF” item from the list
         * of printers in the print dialog.
         * @param filename the filename for the exported file
         */
        set_export_filename(filename: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether there is a selection to print.
         * 
         * Application has to set number of pages to which the selection
         * will draw by `gtk_print_operation_set_n_pages()` in a callback of
         * {@link Gtk.PrintOperation.SignalSignatures.begin_print | Gtk.PrintOperation::begin-print}.
         * @param has_selection `true` indicates that a selection exists
         */
        set_has_selection(has_selection: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the name of the print job. The name is used to identify
         * the job (e.g. in monitoring applications like eggcups).
         * 
         * If you don’t set a job name, GTK+ picks a default one by
         * numbering successive print jobs.
         * @param job_name a string that identifies the print job
         */
        set_job_name(job_name: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets the number of pages in the document.
         * 
         * This must be set to a positive number
         * before the rendering starts. It may be set in a
         * {@link Gtk.PrintOperation.SignalSignatures.begin_print | Gtk.PrintOperation::begin-print} signal hander.
         * 
         * Note that the page numbers passed to the
         * {@link Gtk.PrintOperation.SignalSignatures.request_page_setup | Gtk.PrintOperation::request-page-setup}
         * and {@link Gtk.PrintOperation.SignalSignatures.draw_page | Gtk.PrintOperation::draw-page} signals are 0-based, i.e. if
         * the user chooses to print all pages, the last ::draw-page signal
         * will be for page `n_pages` - 1.
         * @param n_pages the number of pages
         */
        set_n_pages(n_pages: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the print settings for `op`. This is typically used to
         * re-establish print settings from a previous print operation,
         * see `gtk_print_operation_run()`.
         * @param print_settings {@link Gtk.PrintSettings}
         */
        set_print_settings(print_settings: PrintSettings | null): void;

        /**
         * If `show_progress` is `true`, the print operation will show a
         * progress dialog during the print operation.
         * @param show_progress `true` to show a progress dialog
         */
        set_show_progress(show_progress: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether selection is supported by {@link Gtk.PrintOperation}.
         * @param support_selection `true` to support selection
         */
        set_support_selection(support_selection: boolean): void;

        /**
         * If track_status is `true`, the print operation will try to continue report
         * on the status of the print job in the printer queues and printer. This
         * can allow your application to show things like “out of paper” issues,
         * and when the print job actually reaches the printer.
         * 
         * This function is often implemented using some form of polling, so it should
         * not be enabled unless needed.
         * @param track_status `true` to track status after printing
         */
        set_track_print_status(track_status: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets up the transformation for the cairo context obtained from
         * {@link Gtk.PrintContext} in such a way that distances are measured in
         * units of `unit`.
         * @param unit the unit to use
         */
        set_unit(unit: Unit): void;

        /**
         * If `full_page` is `true`, the transformation for the cairo context
         * obtained from {@link Gtk.PrintContext} puts the origin at the top left
         * corner of the page (which may not be the top left corner of the
         * sheet, depending on page orientation and the number of pages per
         * sheet). Otherwise, the origin is at the top left corner of the
         * imageable area (i.e. inside the margins).
         * @param full_page `true` to set up the {@link Gtk.PrintContext} for the full page
         */
        set_use_full_page(full_page: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Ends a preview.
         * 
         * This function must be called to finish a custom print preview.
         */
        end_preview(): void;

        /**
         * Returns whether the given page is included in the set of pages that
         * have been selected for printing.
         * @param page_nr a page number
         * @returns `true` if the page has been selected for printing
         */
        is_selected(page_nr: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Renders a page to the preview, using the print context that
         * was passed to the {@link Gtk.PrintOperation.SignalSignatures.preview | Gtk.PrintOperation::preview} handler together
         * with `preview`.
         * 
         * A custom iprint preview should use this function in its ::expose
         * handler to render the currently selected page.
         * 
         * Note that this function requires a suitable cairo context to
         * be associated with the print context.
         * @param page_nr the page to render
         */
        render_page(page_nr: number): void;

        /**
         * Ends a preview.
         * 
         * This function must be called to finish a custom print preview.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_end_preview(): void;

        /**
         * @param context 
         * @param page_setup 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_got_page_size(context: PrintContext, page_setup: PageSetup): void;

        /**
         * Returns whether the given page is included in the set of pages that
         * have been selected for printing.
         * @param page_nr a page number
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_is_selected(page_nr: number): boolean;

        /**
         * @param context 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_ready(context: PrintContext): void;

        /**
         * Renders a page to the preview, using the print context that
         * was passed to the {@link Gtk.PrintOperation.SignalSignatures.preview | Gtk.PrintOperation::preview} handler together
         * with `preview`.
         * 
         * A custom iprint preview should use this function in its ::expose
         * handler to render the currently selected page.
         * 
         * Note that this function requires a suitable cairo context to
         * be associated with the print context.
         * @param page_nr the page to render
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_render_page(page_nr: number): void;
    }


    namespace PrintSettings {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends GObject.Object.SignalSignatures {}

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.Object.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * A GtkPrintSettings object represents the settings of a print dialog in
     * a system-independent way. The main use for this object is that once
     * you’ve printed you can get a settings object that represents the settings
     * the user chose, and the next time you print you can pass that object in so
     * that the user doesn’t have to re-set all his settings.
     * 
     * Its also possible to enumerate the settings so that you can easily save
     * the settings for the next time your app runs, or even store them in a
     * document. The predefined keys try to use shared values as much as possible
     * so that moving such a document between systems still works.
     * 
     * Printing support was added in GTK+ 2.10.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class PrintSettings extends GObject.Object {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<PrintSettings>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: PrintSettings.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<PrintSettings.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): PrintSettings;

        static new_from_file(file_name: string): PrintSettings;

        static new_from_gvariant(variant: GLib.Variant): PrintSettings;

        static new_from_key_file(key_file: GLib.KeyFile, group_name: string | null): PrintSettings;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof PrintSettings.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, PrintSettings.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof PrintSettings.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, PrintSettings.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof PrintSettings.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<PrintSettings.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Copies a {@link Gtk.PrintSettings} object.
         * @returns a newly allocated copy of `other`
         */
        copy(): PrintSettings;

        /**
         * Calls `func` for each key-value pair of `settings`.
         * @param func the function to call
         */
        foreach(func: PrintSettingsFunc): void;

        /**
         * Looks up the string value associated with `key`.
         * @param key a key
         * @returns the string value for `key`
         */
        get(key: string): string;

        /**
         * Returns the boolean represented by the value
         * that is associated with `key`.
         * 
         * The string “true” represents `true`, any other
         * string `false`.
         * @param key a key
         * @returns `true`, if `key` maps to a true value.
         */
        get_bool(key: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the value of `GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_COLLATE`.
         * @returns whether to collate the printed pages
         */
        get_collate(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the value of `GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_DEFAULT_SOURCE`.
         * @returns the default source
         */
        get_default_source(): string;

        /**
         * Gets the value of `GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_DITHER`.
         * @returns the dithering that is used
         */
        get_dither(): string;

        /**
         * Returns the double value associated with `key`, or 0.
         * @param key a key
         * @returns the double value of `key`
         */
        get_double(key: string): number;

        /**
         * Returns the floating point number represented by
         * the value that is associated with `key`, or `default_val`
         * if the value does not represent a floating point number.
         * 
         * Floating point numbers are parsed with `g_ascii_strtod()`.
         * @param key a key
         * @param def the default value
         * @returns the floating point number associated with `key`
         */
        get_double_with_default(key: string, def: number): number;

        /**
         * Gets the value of `GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_DUPLEX`.
         * @returns whether to print the output in duplex.
         */
        get_duplex(): PrintDuplex;

        /**
         * Gets the value of `GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_FINISHINGS`.
         * @returns the finishings
         */
        get_finishings(): string;

        /**
         * Returns the integer value of `key`, or 0.
         * @param key a key
         * @returns the integer value of `key`
         */
        get_int(key: string): number;

        /**
         * Returns the value of `key`, interpreted as
         * an integer, or the default value.
         * @param key a key
         * @param def the default value
         * @returns the integer value of `key`
         */
        get_int_with_default(key: string, def: number): number;

        /**
         * Returns the value associated with `key`, interpreted
         * as a length. The returned value is converted to `units`.
         * @param key a key
         * @param unit the unit of the return value
         * @returns the length value of `key`, converted to `unit`
         */
        get_length(key: string, unit: Unit): number;

        /**
         * Gets the value of `GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_MEDIA_TYPE`.
         * 
         * The set of media types is defined in PWG 5101.1-2002 PWG.
         * @returns the media type
         */
        get_media_type(): string;

        /**
         * Gets the value of `GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_N_COPIES`.
         * @returns the number of copies to print
         */
        get_n_copies(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the value of `GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_NUMBER_UP`.
         * @returns the number of pages per sheet
         */
        get_number_up(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the value of `GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_NUMBER_UP_LAYOUT`.
         * @returns layout of page in number-up mode
         */
        get_number_up_layout(): NumberUpLayout;

        /**
         * Get the value of `GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_ORIENTATION`,
         * converted to a {@link Gtk.PageOrientation}.
         * @returns the orientation
         */
        get_orientation(): PageOrientation;

        /**
         * Gets the value of `GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_OUTPUT_BIN`.
         * @returns the output bin
         */
        get_output_bin(): string;

        /**
         * Gets the value of `GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAGE_RANGES`.
         * @returns an array     of `GtkPageRanges`.  Use `g_free()` to free the array when     it is no longer needed.
         */
        get_page_ranges(): PageRange[];

        /**
         * Gets the value of `GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAGE_SET`.
         * @returns the set of pages to print
         */
        get_page_set(): PageSet;

        /**
         * Gets the value of `GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAPER_HEIGHT`,
         * converted to `unit`.
         * @param unit the unit for the return value
         * @returns the paper height, in units of `unit`
         */
        get_paper_height(unit: Unit): number;

        /**
         * Gets the value of `GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAPER_FORMAT`,
         * converted to a {@link Gtk.PaperSize}.
         * @returns the paper size
         */
        get_paper_size(): PaperSize;

        /**
         * Gets the value of `GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAPER_WIDTH`,
         * converted to `unit`.
         * @param unit the unit for the return value
         * @returns the paper width, in units of `unit`
         */
        get_paper_width(unit: Unit): number;

        /**
         * Gets the value of `GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PRINT_PAGES`.
         * @returns which pages to print
         */
        get_print_pages(): PrintPages;

        /**
         * Convenience function to obtain the value of
         * `GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PRINTER`.
         * @returns the printer name
         */
        get_printer(): string;

        /**
         * Gets the value of `GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PRINTER_LPI`.
         * @returns the resolution in lpi (lines per inch)
         */
        get_printer_lpi(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the value of `GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_QUALITY`.
         * @returns the print quality
         */
        get_quality(): PrintQuality;

        /**
         * Gets the value of `GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION`.
         * @returns the resolution in dpi
         */
        get_resolution(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the value of `GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION_X`.
         * @returns the horizontal resolution in dpi
         */
        get_resolution_x(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the value of `GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION_Y`.
         * @returns the vertical resolution in dpi
         */
        get_resolution_y(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the value of `GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_REVERSE`.
         * @returns whether to reverse the order of the printed pages
         */
        get_reverse(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the value of `GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_SCALE`.
         * @returns the scale in percent
         */
        get_scale(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the value of `GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_USE_COLOR`.
         * @returns whether to use color
         */
        get_use_color(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns `true`, if a value is associated with `key`.
         * @param key a key
         * @returns `true`, if `key` has a value
         */
        has_key(key: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Reads the print settings from `file_name`. If the file could not be loaded
         * then error is set to either a {@link GLib.FileError} or {@link GLib.KeyFileError}.
         * See `gtk_print_settings_to_file()`.
         * @param file_name the filename to read the settings from
         * @returns `true` on success
         */
        load_file(file_name: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Reads the print settings from the group `group_name` in `key_file`. If the
         * file could not be loaded then error is set to either a {@link GLib.FileError} or
         * {@link GLib.KeyFileError}.
         * @param key_file the {@link GLib.KeyFile} to retrieve the settings from
         * @param group_name the name of the group to use, or `null` to use the default     “Print Settings”
         * @returns `true` on success
         */
        load_key_file(key_file: GLib.KeyFile, group_name: string | null): boolean;

        /**
         * Associates `value` with `key`.
         * @param key a key
         * @param value a string value, or `null`
         */
        set(key: string, value: string | null): void;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
    // Conflicted with GObject.Object.set
        set(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Sets `key` to a boolean value.
         * @param key a key
         * @param value a boolean
         */
        set_bool(key: string, value: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the value of `GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_COLLATE`.
         * @param collate whether to collate the output
         */
        set_collate(collate: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the value of `GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_DEFAULT_SOURCE`.
         * @param default_source the default source
         */
        set_default_source(default_source: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets the value of `GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_DITHER`.
         * @param dither the dithering that is used
         */
        set_dither(dither: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets `key` to a double value.
         * @param key a key
         * @param value a double value
         */
        set_double(key: string, value: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the value of `GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_DUPLEX`.
         * @param duplex a {@link Gtk.PrintDuplex} value
         */
        set_duplex(duplex: PrintDuplex): void;

        /**
         * Sets the value of `GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_FINISHINGS`.
         * @param finishings the finishings
         */
        set_finishings(finishings: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets `key` to an integer value.
         * @param key a key
         * @param value an integer
         */
        set_int(key: string, value: number): void;

        /**
         * Associates a length in units of `unit` with `key`.
         * @param key a key
         * @param value a length
         * @param unit the unit of `length`
         */
        set_length(key: string, value: number, unit: Unit): void;

        /**
         * Sets the value of `GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_MEDIA_TYPE`.
         * 
         * The set of media types is defined in PWG 5101.1-2002 PWG.
         * @param media_type the media type
         */
        set_media_type(media_type: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets the value of `GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_N_COPIES`.
         * @param num_copies the number of copies
         */
        set_n_copies(num_copies: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the value of `GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_NUMBER_UP`.
         * @param number_up the number of pages per sheet
         */
        set_number_up(number_up: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the value of `GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_NUMBER_UP_LAYOUT`.
         * @param number_up_layout a {@link Gtk.NumberUpLayout} value
         */
        set_number_up_layout(number_up_layout: NumberUpLayout): void;

        /**
         * Sets the value of `GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_ORIENTATION`.
         * @param orientation a page orientation
         */
        set_orientation(orientation: PageOrientation): void;

        /**
         * Sets the value of `GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_OUTPUT_BIN`.
         * @param output_bin the output bin
         */
        set_output_bin(output_bin: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets the value of `GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAGE_RANGES`.
         * @param page_ranges an array of `GtkPageRanges`
         */
        set_page_ranges(page_ranges: PageRange[]): void;

        /**
         * Sets the value of `GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAGE_SET`.
         * @param page_set a {@link Gtk.PageSet} value
         */
        set_page_set(page_set: PageSet): void;

        /**
         * Sets the value of `GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAPER_HEIGHT`.
         * @param height the paper height
         * @param unit the units of `height`
         */
        set_paper_height(height: number, unit: Unit): void;

        /**
         * Sets the value of `GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAPER_FORMAT`,
         * `GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAPER_WIDTH` and
         * `GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAPER_HEIGHT`.
         * @param paper_size a paper size
         */
        set_paper_size(paper_size: PaperSize): void;

        /**
         * Sets the value of `GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PAPER_WIDTH`.
         * @param width the paper width
         * @param unit the units of `width`
         */
        set_paper_width(width: number, unit: Unit): void;

        /**
         * Sets the value of `GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PRINT_PAGES`.
         * @param pages a {@link Gtk.PrintPages} value
         */
        set_print_pages(pages: PrintPages): void;

        /**
         * Convenience function to set `GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PRINTER`
         * to `printer`.
         * @param printer the printer name
         */
        set_printer(printer: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets the value of `GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_PRINTER_LPI`.
         * @param lpi the resolution in lpi (lines per inch)
         */
        set_printer_lpi(lpi: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the value of `GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_QUALITY`.
         * @param quality a {@link Gtk.PrintQuality} value
         */
        set_quality(quality: PrintQuality): void;

        /**
         * Sets the values of `GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION`,
         * `GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION_X` and
         * `GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION_Y`.
         * @param resolution the resolution in dpi
         */
        set_resolution(resolution: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the values of `GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION`,
         * `GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION_X` and
         * `GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_RESOLUTION_Y`.
         * @param resolution_x the horizontal resolution in dpi
         * @param resolution_y the vertical resolution in dpi
         */
        set_resolution_xy(resolution_x: number, resolution_y: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the value of `GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_REVERSE`.
         * @param reverse whether to reverse the output
         */
        set_reverse(reverse: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the value of `GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_SCALE`.
         * @param scale the scale in percent
         */
        set_scale(scale: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the value of `GTK_PRINT_SETTINGS_USE_COLOR`.
         * @param use_color whether to use color
         */
        set_use_color(use_color: boolean): void;

        /**
         * This function saves the print settings from `settings` to `file_name`. If the
         * file could not be loaded then error is set to either a {@link GLib.FileError} or
         * {@link GLib.KeyFileError}.
         * @param file_name the file to save to
         * @returns `true` on success
         */
        to_file(file_name: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Serialize print settings to an a{sv} variant.
         * @returns a new, floating, {@link GLib.Variant}
         */
        to_gvariant(): GLib.Variant;

        /**
         * This function adds the print settings from `settings` to `key_file`.
         * @param key_file the {@link GLib.KeyFile} to save the print settings to
         * @param group_name the group to add the settings to in `key_file`, or     `null` to use the default “Print Settings”
         */
        to_key_file(key_file: GLib.KeyFile, group_name: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Removes any value associated with `key`.
         * This has the same effect as setting the value to `null`.
         * @param key a key
         */
        unset(key: string): void;
    }


    namespace ProgressBar {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Widget.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::ellipsize": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::fraction": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::inverted": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::pulse-step": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::show-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::orientation": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Widget.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, Orientable.ConstructorProps {
            ellipsize: Pango.EllipsizeMode;
            fraction: number;
            inverted: boolean;
            pulse_step: number;
            pulseStep: number;
            show_text: boolean;
            showText: boolean;
            text: string | null;
        }
    }

    /**
     * The {@link Gtk.ProgressBar} is typically used to display the progress of a long
     * running operation. It provides a visual clue that processing is underway.
     * The GtkProgressBar can be used in two different modes: percentage mode
     * and activity mode.
     * 
     * When an application can determine how much work needs to take place
     * (e.g. read a fixed number of bytes from a file) and can monitor its
     * progress, it can use the GtkProgressBar in percentage mode and the
     * user sees a growing bar indicating the percentage of the work that
     * has been completed. In this mode, the application is required to call
     * `gtk_progress_bar_set_fraction()` periodically to update the progress bar.
     * 
     * When an application has no accurate way of knowing the amount of work
     * to do, it can use the {@link Gtk.ProgressBar} in activity mode, which shows
     * activity by a block moving back and forth within the progress area. In
     * this mode, the application is required to call `gtk_progress_bar_pulse()`
     * periodically to update the progress bar.
     * 
     * There is quite a bit of flexibility provided to control the appearance
     * of the {@link Gtk.ProgressBar}. Functions are provided to control the orientation
     * of the bar, optional text can be displayed along with the bar, and the
     * step size used in activity mode can be set.
     * 
     * # CSS nodes
     * 
     * 
     * ```
     * progressbar[.osd]
     * ├── [text]
     * ╰── trough[.empty][.full]
     *     ╰── progress[.pulse]
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * GtkProgressBar has a main CSS node with name progressbar and subnodes with
     * names text and trough, of which the latter has a subnode named progress. The
     * text subnode is only present if text is shown. The progress subnode has the
     * style class .pulse when in activity mode. It gets the style classes .left,
     * .right, .top or .bottom added when the progress 'touches' the corresponding
     * end of the GtkProgressBar. The .osd class on the progressbar node is for use
     * in overlays like the one Epiphany has for page loading progress.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class ProgressBar extends Widget implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable, Orientable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ProgressBar>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * The preferred place to ellipsize the string, if the progress bar does
         * not have enough room to display the entire string, specified as a
         * {@link Pango.EllipsizeMode}.
         * 
         * Note that setting this property to a value other than
         * {@link Pango.EllipsizeMode.NONE} has the side-effect that the progress bar requests
         * only enough space to display the ellipsis ("..."). Another means to set a
         * progress bar's width is `gtk_widget_set_size_request()`.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default Pango.EllipsizeMode.NONE
         */
        get ellipsize(): Pango.EllipsizeMode;
        set ellipsize(val: Pango.EllipsizeMode);

        /**
         * @default 0
         */
        get fraction(): number;
        set fraction(val: number);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get inverted(): boolean;
        set inverted(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default 0.1
         */
        get pulse_step(): number;
        set pulse_step(val: number);

        /**
         * @default 0.1
         */
        get pulseStep(): number;
        set pulseStep(val: number);

        /**
         * Sets whether the progress bar will show a text in addition
         * to the bar itself. The shown text is either the value of
         * the {@link Gtk.ProgressBar.text} property or, if that is `null`,
         * the {@link Gtk.ProgressBar.fraction} value, as a percentage.
         * 
         * To make a progress bar that is styled and sized suitably for
         * showing text (even if the actual text is blank), set
         * {@link Gtk.ProgressBar.show_text} to `true` and {@link Gtk.ProgressBar.text}
         * to the empty string (not `null`).
         * @since 3.0
         * @default false
         */
        get show_text(): boolean;
        set show_text(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Sets whether the progress bar will show a text in addition
         * to the bar itself. The shown text is either the value of
         * the {@link Gtk.ProgressBar.text} property or, if that is `null`,
         * the {@link Gtk.ProgressBar.fraction} value, as a percentage.
         * 
         * To make a progress bar that is styled and sized suitably for
         * showing text (even if the actual text is blank), set
         * {@link Gtk.ProgressBar.show_text} to `true` and {@link Gtk.ProgressBar.text}
         * to the empty string (not `null`).
         * @since 3.0
         * @default false
         */
        get showText(): boolean;
        set showText(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default null
         */
        get text(): string | null;
        set text(val: string | null);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: ProgressBar.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<ProgressBar.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): ProgressBar;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof ProgressBar.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ProgressBar.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof ProgressBar.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ProgressBar.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof ProgressBar.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<ProgressBar.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Returns the ellipsizing position of the progress bar.
         * See `gtk_progress_bar_set_ellipsize()`.
         * @returns {@link Pango.EllipsizeMode}
         */
        get_ellipsize(): Pango.EllipsizeMode;

        /**
         * Returns the current fraction of the task that’s been completed.
         * @returns a fraction from 0.0 to 1.0
         */
        get_fraction(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the value set by `gtk_progress_bar_set_inverted()`.
         * @returns `true` if the progress bar is inverted
         */
        get_inverted(): boolean;

        /**
         * Retrieves the pulse step set with `gtk_progress_bar_set_pulse_step()`.
         * @returns a fraction from 0.0 to 1.0
         */
        get_pulse_step(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the value of the {@link Gtk.ProgressBar.show_text} property.
         * See `gtk_progress_bar_set_show_text()`.
         * @returns `true` if text is shown in the progress bar
         */
        get_show_text(): boolean;

        /**
         * Retrieves the text that is displayed with the progress bar,
         * if any, otherwise `null`. The return value is a reference
         * to the text, not a copy of it, so will become invalid
         * if you change the text in the progress bar.
         * @returns text, or `null`; this string is owned by the widget and should not be modified or freed.
         */
        get_text(): string | null;

        /**
         * Indicates that some progress has been made, but you don’t know how much.
         * Causes the progress bar to enter “activity mode,” where a block
         * bounces back and forth. Each call to `gtk_progress_bar_pulse()`
         * causes the block to move by a little bit (the amount of movement
         * per pulse is determined by `gtk_progress_bar_set_pulse_step()`).
         */
        pulse(): void;

        /**
         * Sets the mode used to ellipsize (add an ellipsis: "...") the
         * text if there is not enough space to render the entire string.
         * @param mode a {@link Pango.EllipsizeMode}
         */
        set_ellipsize(mode: Pango.EllipsizeMode): void;

        /**
         * Causes the progress bar to “fill in” the given fraction
         * of the bar. The fraction should be between 0.0 and 1.0,
         * inclusive.
         * @param fraction fraction of the task that’s been completed
         */
        set_fraction(fraction: number): void;

        /**
         * Progress bars normally grow from top to bottom or left to right.
         * Inverted progress bars grow in the opposite direction.
         * @param inverted `true` to invert the progress bar
         */
        set_inverted(inverted: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the fraction of total progress bar length to move the
         * bouncing block for each call to `gtk_progress_bar_pulse()`.
         * @param fraction fraction between 0.0 and 1.0
         */
        set_pulse_step(fraction: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the progress bar will show text next to the bar.
         * The shown text is either the value of the {@link Gtk.ProgressBar.text}
         * property or, if that is `null`, the {@link Gtk.ProgressBar.fraction} value,
         * as a percentage.
         * 
         * To make a progress bar that is styled and sized suitably for containing
         * text (even if the actual text is blank), set {@link Gtk.ProgressBar.show_text} to
         * `true` and {@link Gtk.ProgressBar.text} to the empty string (not `null`).
         * @param show_text whether to show text
         */
        set_show_text(show_text: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Causes the given `text` to appear next to the progress bar.
         * 
         * If `text` is `null` and {@link Gtk.ProgressBar.show_text} is `true`, the current
         * value of {@link Gtk.ProgressBar.fraction} will be displayed as a percentage.
         * 
         * If `text` is non-`null` and {@link Gtk.ProgressBar.show_text} is `true`, the text
         * will be displayed. In this case, it will not display the progress
         * percentage. If `text` is the empty string, the progress bar will still
         * be styled and sized suitably for containing text, as long as
         * {@link Gtk.ProgressBar.show_text} is `true`.
         * @param text a UTF-8 string, or `null`
         */
        set_text(text: string | null): void;

        /**
         * The orientation of the orientable.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default Gtk.Orientation.HORIZONTAL
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Orientable
         */
        get orientation(): Orientation;
        set orientation(val: Orientation);

        /**
         * Adds a child to `buildable`. `type` is an optional string
         * describing how the child should be added.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child to add
         * @param type kind of child or `null`
         */
        add_child(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object, type: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Constructs a child of `buildable` with the name `name`.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} calls this function if a “constructor” has been
         * specified in the UI definition.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param name name of child to construct
         * @returns the constructed child
         */
        construct_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, name: string): T;

        /**
         * This is similar to `gtk_buildable_parser_finished()` but is
         * called once for each custom tag handled by the `buildable`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname the name of the tag
         * @param data user data created in custom_tag_start
         */
        custom_finished(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
         * the buildable.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @param data user data that will be passed in to parser functions
         */
        custom_tag_end(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called for each unknown element under `<child>`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @returns `true` if a object has a custom implementation, `false`          if it doesn't.
         */
        custom_tag_start(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string): [boolean, GLib.MarkupParser, null];

        /**
         * Get the internal child called `childname` of the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param childname name of child
         * @returns the internal child of the buildable object
         */
        get_internal_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, childname: string): T;

        /**
         * Gets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} sets the name based on the
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI]
         * used to construct the `buildable`.
         * @returns the name set with `gtk_buildable_set_name()`
         */
        get_name(): string;

        /**
         * Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI].
         * Note that this will be called once for each time
         * `gtk_builder_add_from_file()` or `gtk_builder_add_from_string()`
         * is called on a builder.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         */
        parser_finished(builder: Builder): void;

        /**
         * Sets the property name `name` to `value` on the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param name name of property
         * @param value value of property
         */
        set_buildable_property(builder: Builder, name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;

        /**
         * Sets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * @param name name to set
         */
        set_name(name: string): void;

        /**
         * Adds a child to `buildable`. `type` is an optional string
         * describing how the child should be added.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child to add
         * @param type kind of child or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add_child(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object, type: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Constructs a child of `buildable` with the name `name`.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} calls this function if a “constructor” has been
         * specified in the UI definition.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param name name of child to construct
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_construct_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, name: string): T;

        /**
         * This is similar to `gtk_buildable_parser_finished()` but is
         * called once for each custom tag handled by the `buildable`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname the name of the tag
         * @param data user data created in custom_tag_start
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_finished(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
         * the buildable.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @param data user data that will be passed in to parser functions
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_tag_end(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called for each unknown element under `<child>`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_tag_start(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string): [boolean, GLib.MarkupParser, never];

        /**
         * Get the internal child called `childname` of the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param childname name of child
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_internal_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, childname: string): T;

        /**
         * Gets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} sets the name based on the
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI]
         * used to construct the `buildable`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_name(): string;

        /**
         * Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI].
         * Note that this will be called once for each time
         * `gtk_builder_add_from_file()` or `gtk_builder_add_from_string()`
         * is called on a builder.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_parser_finished(builder: Builder): void;

        /**
         * Sets the property name `name` to `value` on the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param name name of property
         * @param value value of property
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_buildable_property(builder: Builder, name: string, value: unknown): void;

        /**
         * Sets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * @param name name to set
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_name(name: string): void;

        /**
         * Retrieves the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @returns the orientation of the `orientable`.
         */
        get_orientation(): Orientation;

        /**
         * Sets the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @param orientation the orientable’s new orientation.
         */
        set_orientation(orientation: Orientation): void;
    }


    namespace ProgressBarAccessible {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends WidgetAccessible.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-layer": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-mdi-zorder": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-help-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-hypertext-nlinks": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption-object": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-summary": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends WidgetAccessible.ConstructorProps, Atk.Component.ConstructorProps, Atk.Value.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class ProgressBarAccessible extends WidgetAccessible implements Atk.Component, Atk.Value {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ProgressBarAccessible>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: ProgressBarAccessible.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<ProgressBarAccessible.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof ProgressBarAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ProgressBarAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof ProgressBarAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ProgressBarAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof ProgressBarAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<ProgressBarAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        /**
         * Checks whether the specified point is within the extent of the `component`.
         * 
         * Toolkit implementor note: ATK provides a default implementation for
         * this virtual method. In general there are little reason to
         * re-implement it.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @returns `true` or `false` indicating whether the specified point is within the extent of the `component` or not
         */
        contains(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the alpha value (i.e. the opacity) for this
         * `component`, on a scale from 0 (fully transparent) to 1.0
         * (fully opaque).
         * @returns An alpha value from 0 to 1.0, inclusive.
         */
        get_alpha(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the rectangle which gives the extent of the `component`.
         * 
         * If the extent can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), all of x, y, width, height are set to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         */
        get_extents(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the layer of the component.
         * @returns an {@link Atk.Layer} which is the layer of the component
         */
        get_layer(): Atk.Layer;

        /**
         * Gets the zorder of the component. The value G_MININT will be returned
         * if the layer of the component is not ATK_LAYER_MDI or ATK_LAYER_WINDOW.
         * @returns a gint which is the zorder of the component, i.e. the depth at which the component is shown in relation to other components in the same container.
         */
        get_mdi_zorder(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the position of `component` in the form of
         * a point specifying `component`'s top-left corner.
         * 
         * If the position can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), x and y are set to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         */
        get_position(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the size of the `component` in terms of width and height.
         * 
         * If the size can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), width and height are set to -1.
         */
        get_size(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Grabs focus for this `component`.
         * @returns `true` if successful, `false` otherwise.
         */
        grab_focus(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets a reference to the accessible child, if one exists, at the
         * coordinate point specified by `x` and `y`.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @returns a reference to the accessible child, if one exists
         */
        ref_accessible_at_point(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): Atk.Object | null;

        /**
         * Remove the handler specified by `handler_id` from the list of
         * functions to be executed when this object receives focus events
         * (in or out).
         * @param handler_id the handler id of the focus handler to be removed from `component`
         */
        remove_focus_handler(handler_id: number): void;

        /**
         * Makes `component` visible on the screen by scrolling all necessary parents.
         * 
         * Contrary to atk_component_set_position, this does not actually move
         * `component` in its parent, this only makes the parents scroll so that the
         * object shows up on the screen, given its current position within the parents.
         * @param type specify where the object should be made visible.
         * @returns whether scrolling was successful.
         */
        scroll_to(type: Atk.ScrollType): boolean;

        /**
         * Move the top-left of `component` to a given position of the screen by
         * scrolling all necessary parents.
         * @param coords specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or to the parent object.
         * @param x x-position where to scroll to
         * @param y y-position where to scroll to
         * @returns whether scrolling was successful.
         */
        scroll_to_point(coords: Atk.CoordType, x: number, y: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the extents of `component`.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param width width to set for `component`
         * @param height height to set for `component`
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @returns `true` or `false` whether the extents were set or not
         */
        set_extents(x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the position of `component`.
         * 
         * Contrary to atk_component_scroll_to, this does not trigger any scrolling,
         * this just moves `component` in its parent.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the component's top level window
         * @returns `true` or `false` whether or not the position was set or not
         */
        set_position(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Set the size of the `component` in terms of width and height.
         * @param width width to set for `component`
         * @param height height to set for `component`
         * @returns `true` or `false` whether the size was set or not
         */
        set_size(width: number, height: number): boolean;

        /**
         * @param bounds 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_bounds_changed(bounds: Atk.Rectangle): void;

        /**
         * Checks whether the specified point is within the extent of the `component`.
         * 
         * Toolkit implementor note: ATK provides a default implementation for
         * this virtual method. In general there are little reason to
         * re-implement it.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_contains(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the alpha value (i.e. the opacity) for this
         * `component`, on a scale from 0 (fully transparent) to 1.0
         * (fully opaque).
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_alpha(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the rectangle which gives the extent of the `component`.
         * 
         * If the extent can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), all of x, y, width, height are set to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_extents(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the layer of the component.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_layer(): Atk.Layer;

        /**
         * Gets the zorder of the component. The value G_MININT will be returned
         * if the layer of the component is not ATK_LAYER_MDI or ATK_LAYER_WINDOW.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_mdi_zorder(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the position of `component` in the form of
         * a point specifying `component`'s top-left corner.
         * 
         * If the position can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), x and y are set to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_position(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the size of the `component` in terms of width and height.
         * 
         * If the size can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), width and height are set to -1.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_size(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Grabs focus for this `component`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_grab_focus(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets a reference to the accessible child, if one exists, at the
         * coordinate point specified by `x` and `y`.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_ref_accessible_at_point(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): Atk.Object | null;

        /**
         * Remove the handler specified by `handler_id` from the list of
         * functions to be executed when this object receives focus events
         * (in or out).
         * @param handler_id the handler id of the focus handler to be removed from `component`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_remove_focus_handler(handler_id: number): void;

        /**
         * Makes `component` visible on the screen by scrolling all necessary parents.
         * 
         * Contrary to atk_component_set_position, this does not actually move
         * `component` in its parent, this only makes the parents scroll so that the
         * object shows up on the screen, given its current position within the parents.
         * @param type specify where the object should be made visible.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_scroll_to(type: Atk.ScrollType): boolean;

        /**
         * Move the top-left of `component` to a given position of the screen by
         * scrolling all necessary parents.
         * @param coords specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or to the parent object.
         * @param x x-position where to scroll to
         * @param y y-position where to scroll to
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_scroll_to_point(coords: Atk.CoordType, x: number, y: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the extents of `component`.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param width width to set for `component`
         * @param height height to set for `component`
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_extents(x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the position of `component`.
         * 
         * Contrary to atk_component_scroll_to, this does not trigger any scrolling,
         * this just moves `component` in its parent.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the component's top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_position(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Set the size of the `component` in terms of width and height.
         * @param width width to set for `component`
         * @param height height to set for `component`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_size(width: number, height: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the value of this object.
         */
        get_current_value(): unknown;

        /**
         * Gets the minimum increment by which the value of this object may be
         * changed.  If zero, the minimum increment is undefined, which may
         * mean that it is limited only by the floating point precision of the
         * platform.
         * @returns the minimum increment by which the value of this object may be changed. zero if undefined.
         */
        get_increment(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the maximum value of this object.
         */
        get_maximum_value(): unknown;

        /**
         * Gets the minimum increment by which the value of this object may be changed.  If zero,
         * the minimum increment is undefined, which may mean that it is limited only by the
         * floating point precision of the platform.
         */
        get_minimum_increment(): unknown;

        /**
         * Gets the minimum value of this object.
         */
        get_minimum_value(): unknown;

        /**
         * Gets the range of this object.
         * @returns a newly allocated {@link Atk.Range} that represents the minimum, maximum and descriptor (if available) of `obj`. NULL if that range is not defined.
         */
        get_range(): Atk.Range | null;

        /**
         * Gets the list of subranges defined for this object. See {@link Atk.Value}
         * introduction for examples of subranges and when to expose them.
         * @returns an {@link GLib.SList} of {@link Atk.Range} which each of the subranges defined for this object. Free the returns list with `g_slist_free()`.
         */
        get_sub_ranges(): Atk.Range[];

        /**
         * Gets the current value and the human readable text alternative of
         * `obj`. `text` is a newly created string, that must be freed by the
         * caller. Can be NULL if no descriptor is available.
         */
        get_value_and_text(): [number, string];

        /**
         * Sets the value of this object.
         * @param value a {@link GObject.Value} which is the desired new accessible value.
         * @returns `true` if new value is successfully set, `false` otherwise.
         */
        set_current_value(value: GObject.Value | any): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the value of this object.
         * 
         * This method is intended to provide a way to change the value of the
         * object. In any case, it is possible that the value can't be
         * modified (ie: a read-only component). If the value changes due this
         * call, it is possible that the text could change, and will trigger
         * an {@link Atk.Value.SignalSignatures.value_changed | Atk.Value::value-changed} signal emission.
         * 
         * Note for implementors: the deprecated `atk_value_set_current_value()`
         * method returned TRUE or FALSE depending if the value was assigned
         * or not. In the practice several implementors were not able to
         * decide it, and returned TRUE in any case. For that reason it is not
         * required anymore to return if the value was properly assigned or
         * not.
         * @param new_value a double which is the desired new accessible value.
         */
        set_value(new_value: number): void;

        /**
         * Gets the value of this object.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_current_value(): GObject.Value | any;

        /**
         * Gets the minimum increment by which the value of this object may be
         * changed.  If zero, the minimum increment is undefined, which may
         * mean that it is limited only by the floating point precision of the
         * platform.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_increment(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the maximum value of this object.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_maximum_value(): GObject.Value | any;

        /**
         * Gets the minimum increment by which the value of this object may be changed.  If zero,
         * the minimum increment is undefined, which may mean that it is limited only by the
         * floating point precision of the platform.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_minimum_increment(): GObject.Value | any;

        /**
         * Gets the minimum value of this object.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_minimum_value(): GObject.Value | any;

        /**
         * Gets the range of this object.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_range(): Atk.Range | null;

        /**
         * Gets the list of subranges defined for this object. See {@link Atk.Value}
         * introduction for examples of subranges and when to expose them.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_sub_ranges(): Atk.Range[];

        /**
         * Gets the current value and the human readable text alternative of
         * `obj`. `text` is a newly created string, that must be freed by the
         * caller. Can be NULL if no descriptor is available.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_value_and_text(): [number, string];

        /**
         * Sets the value of this object.
         * @param value a {@link GObject.Value} which is the desired new accessible value.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_current_value(value: unknown): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the value of this object.
         * 
         * This method is intended to provide a way to change the value of the
         * object. In any case, it is possible that the value can't be
         * modified (ie: a read-only component). If the value changes due this
         * call, it is possible that the text could change, and will trigger
         * an {@link Atk.Value.SignalSignatures.value_changed | Atk.Value::value-changed} signal emission.
         * 
         * Note for implementors: the deprecated `atk_value_set_current_value()`
         * method returned TRUE or FALSE depending if the value was assigned
         * or not. In the practice several implementors were not able to
         * decide it, and returned TRUE in any case. For that reason it is not
         * required anymore to return if the value was properly assigned or
         * not.
         * @param new_value a double which is the desired new accessible value.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_value(new_value: number): void;
    }


    namespace RadioAction {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends ToggleAction.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * The ::changed signal is emitted on every member of a radio group when the
             * active member is changed. The signal gets emitted after the ::activate signals
             * for the previous and current active members.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.4
             * @deprecated since 3.10
             * @run-first
             */
            changed: (arg0: RadioAction) => void;
            "notify::current-value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::group": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::active": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::draw-as-radio": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::action-group": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::always-show-image": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gicon": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hide-if-empty": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::icon-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-important": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::label": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::short-label": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::stock-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible-horizontal": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible-overflown": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible-vertical": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends ToggleAction.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {
            current_value: number;
            currentValue: number;
            group: RadioAction;
            value: number;
        }
    }

    /**
     * A {@link Gtk.RadioAction} is similar to {@link Gtk.RadioMenuItem}. A number of radio
     * actions can be linked together so that only one may be active at any
     * one time.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class RadioAction extends ToggleAction implements Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<RadioAction>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * The value property of the currently active member of the group to which
         * this action belongs.
         * @since 2.10
         * @deprecated since 3.10
         * @default 0
         */
        get current_value(): number;
        set current_value(val: number);

        /**
         * The value property of the currently active member of the group to which
         * this action belongs.
         * @since 2.10
         * @deprecated since 3.10
         * @default 0
         */
        get currentValue(): number;
        set currentValue(val: number);

        /**
         * Sets a new group for a radio action.
         * @since 2.4
         * @deprecated since 3.10
         * @write-only
         */
        set group(val: RadioAction);

        /**
         * The value is an arbitrary integer which can be used as a
         * convenient way to determine which action in the group is
         * currently active in an ::activate or ::changed signal handler.
         * See `gtk_radio_action_get_current_value()` and {@link Gtk.RadioActionEntry}
         * for convenient ways to get and set this property.
         * @since 2.4
         * @deprecated since 3.10
         * @default 0
         */
        get value(): number;
        set value(val: number);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: RadioAction.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<RadioAction.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](name: string, label: string | null, tooltip: string | null, stock_id: string | null, value: number): RadioAction;

        // Conflicted with Gtk.ToggleAction.new
        static ["new"](...args: never[]): any;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof RadioAction.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, RadioAction.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof RadioAction.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, RadioAction.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof RadioAction.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<RadioAction.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * @param current 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_changed(current: RadioAction): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Obtains the value property of the currently active member of
         * the group to which `action` belongs.
         * @returns The value of the currently active group member
         */
        get_current_value(): number;

        /**
         * Returns the list representing the radio group for this object.
         * Note that the returned list is only valid until the next change
         * to the group.
         * 
         * A common way to set up a group of radio group is the following:
         * 
         * ```c
         *   GSList *group = NULL;
         *   GtkRadioAction *action;
         *  
         *   while ( ...more actions to add... /)
         *     {
         *        action = gtk_radio_action_new (...);
         *        
         *        gtk_radio_action_set_group (action, group);
         *        group = gtk_radio_action_get_group (action);
         *     }
         * ```
         * 
         * @returns the list representing the radio group for this object
         */
        get_group(): RadioAction[];

        /**
         * Joins a radio action object to the group of another radio action object.
         * 
         * Use this in language bindings instead of the `gtk_radio_action_get_group()`
         * and `gtk_radio_action_set_group()` methods
         * 
         * A common way to set up a group of radio actions is the following:
         * 
         * ```c
         *   GtkRadioAction *action;
         *   GtkRadioAction *last_action;
         *  
         *   while ( ...more actions to add... /)
         *     {
         *        action = gtk_radio_action_new (...);
         *        
         *        gtk_radio_action_join_group (action, last_action);
         *        last_action = action;
         *     }
         * ```
         * 
         * @param group_source a radio action object whos group we are   joining, or `null` to remove the radio action from its group
         */
        join_group(group_source: RadioAction | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the currently active group member to the member with value
         * property `current_value`.
         * @param current_value the new value
         */
        set_current_value(current_value: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the radio group for the radio action object.
         * @param group a list representing a radio group, or `null`
         */
        set_group(group: RadioAction[] | null): void;
    }


    namespace RadioButton {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends CheckButton.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * Emitted when the group of radio buttons that a radio button belongs
             * to changes. This is emitted when a radio button switches from
             * being alone to being part of a group of 2 or more buttons, or
             * vice-versa, and when a button is moved from one group of 2 or
             * more buttons to a different one, but not when the composition
             * of the group that a button belongs to changes.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.4
             * @run-first
             */
            "group-changed": () => void;
            "notify::group": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::active": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::draw-indicator": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::inconsistent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::always-show-image": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::image": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::image-position": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::label": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::relief": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-stock": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-underline": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::xalign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::yalign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends CheckButton.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Actionable.ConstructorProps, Activatable.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {
            group: RadioButton;
        }
    }

    /**
     * A single radio button performs the same basic function as a {@link Gtk.CheckButton},
     * as its position in the object hierarchy reflects. It is only when multiple
     * radio buttons are grouped together that they become a different user
     * interface component in their own right.
     * 
     * Every radio button is a member of some group of radio buttons. When one is
     * selected, all other radio buttons in the same group are deselected. A
     * {@link Gtk.RadioButton} is one way of giving the user a choice from many options.
     * 
     * Radio button widgets are created with `gtk_radio_button_new()`, passing `null`
     * as the argument if this is the first radio button in a group. In subsequent
     * calls, the group you wish to add this button to should be passed as an
     * argument. Optionally, `gtk_radio_button_new_with_label()` can be used if you
     * want a text label on the radio button.
     * 
     * Alternatively, when adding widgets to an existing group of radio buttons,
     * use `gtk_radio_button_new_from_widget()` with a {@link Gtk.RadioButton} that already
     * has a group assigned to it. The convenience function
     * `gtk_radio_button_new_with_label_from_widget()` is also provided.
     * 
     * To retrieve the group a {@link Gtk.RadioButton} is assigned to, use
     * `gtk_radio_button_get_group()`.
     * 
     * To remove a {@link Gtk.RadioButton} from one group and make it part of a new one,
     * use `gtk_radio_button_set_group()`.
     * 
     * The group list does not need to be freed, as each {@link Gtk.RadioButton} will remove
     * itself and its list item when it is destroyed.
     * 
     * # CSS nodes
     * 
     * 
     * ```
     * radiobutton
     * ├── radio
     * ╰── <child>
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * A GtkRadioButton with indicator (see `gtk_toggle_button_set_mode()`) has a
     * main CSS node with name radiobutton and a subnode with name radio.
     * 
     * 
     * ```
     * button.radio
     * ├── radio
     * ╰── <child>
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * A GtkRadioButton without indicator changes the name of its main node
     * to button and adds a .radio style class to it. The subnode is invisible
     * in this case.
     * 
     * ## How to create a group of two radio buttons.
     * 
     * 
     * ```c
     * void create_radio_buttons (void) {
     * 
     *    GtkWidget *window, *radio1, *radio2, *box, *entry;
     *    window = gtk_window_new (GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
     *    box = gtk_box_new (GTK_ORIENTATION_VERTICAL, 2);
     *    gtk_box_set_homogeneous (GTK_BOX (box), TRUE);
     * 
     *    // Create a radio button with a GtkEntry widget
     *    radio1 = gtk_radio_button_new (NULL);
     *    entry = gtk_entry_new ();
     *    gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (radio1), entry);
     * 
     * 
     *    // Create a radio button with a label
     *    radio2 = gtk_radio_button_new_with_label_from_widget (GTK_RADIO_BUTTON (radio1),
     *                                                          "I’m the second radio button.");
     * 
     *    // Pack them into a box, then show all the widgets
     *    gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box), radio1);
     *    gtk_box_pack_start (GTK_BOX (box), radio2);
     *    gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (window), box);
     *    gtk_widget_show_all (window);
     *    return;
     * }
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * When an unselected button in the group is clicked the clicked button
     * receives the {@link Gtk.ToggleButton.SignalSignatures.toggled | Gtk.ToggleButton::toggled} signal, as does the previously
     * selected button.
     * Inside the {@link Gtk.ToggleButton.SignalSignatures.toggled | Gtk.ToggleButton::toggled} handler, `gtk_toggle_button_get_active()`
     * can be used to determine if the button has been selected or deselected.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class RadioButton extends CheckButton implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Actionable, Activatable, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<RadioButton>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * Sets a new group for a radio button.
         * @write-only
         */
        set group(val: RadioButton);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: RadioButton.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        check_button: CheckButton;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<RadioButton.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](group: RadioButton[] | null): RadioButton;

        // Conflicted with Gtk.CheckButton.new
        static ["new"](...args: never[]): any;

        static new_from_widget(radio_group_member: RadioButton | null): RadioButton;

        static new_with_label(group: RadioButton[] | null, label: string): RadioButton;

        // Conflicted with Gtk.CheckButton.new_with_label
        static new_with_label(...args: never[]): any;

        static new_with_label_from_widget(radio_group_member: RadioButton | null, label: string): RadioButton;

        static new_with_mnemonic(group: RadioButton[] | null, label: string): RadioButton;

        // Conflicted with Gtk.CheckButton.new_with_mnemonic
        static new_with_mnemonic(...args: never[]): any;

        static new_with_mnemonic_from_widget(radio_group_member: RadioButton | null, label: string): RadioButton;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof RadioButton.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, RadioButton.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof RadioButton.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, RadioButton.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof RadioButton.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<RadioButton.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_group_changed(): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Retrieves the group assigned to a radio button.
         * @returns a linked list containing all the radio buttons in the same group as `radio_button`. The returned list is owned by the radio button and must not be modified or freed.
         */
        get_group(): RadioButton[];

        /**
         * Joins a {@link Gtk.RadioButton} object to the group of another {@link Gtk.RadioButton} object
         * 
         * Use this in language bindings instead of the `gtk_radio_button_get_group()`
         * and `gtk_radio_button_set_group()` methods
         * 
         * A common way to set up a group of radio buttons is the following:
         * 
         * ```c
         *   GtkRadioButton *radio_button;
         *   GtkRadioButton *last_button;
         * 
         *   while (some_condition)
         *     {
         *        radio_button = gtk_radio_button_new (NULL);
         * 
         *        gtk_radio_button_join_group (radio_button, last_button);
         *        last_button = radio_button;
         *     }
         * ```
         * 
         * @param group_source a radio button object whos group we are   joining, or `null` to remove the radio button from its group
         */
        join_group(group_source: RadioButton | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets a {@link Gtk.RadioButton}’s group. It should be noted that this does not change
         * the layout of your interface in any way, so if you are changing the group,
         * it is likely you will need to re-arrange the user interface to reflect these
         * changes.
         * @param group an existing radio     button group, such as one returned from `gtk_radio_button_get_group()`, or `null`.
         */
        set_group(group: RadioButton[] | null): void;

        /**
         * Emits a {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.child_notify | Gtk.Widget::child-notify} signal for the
         * [child property][child-properties] `child_property`
         * on `widget`.
         * 
         * This is the analogue of `g_object_notify()` for child properties.
         * 
         * Also see `gtk_container_child_notify()`.
         * @param child_property the name of a child property installed on the                  class of `widget`’s parent
         */
        child_notify(child_property: string): void;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Gtk.Container.child_notify
        child_notify(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Returns whether the widget should grab focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
         * See `gtk_widget_set_focus_on_click()`.
         * @returns `true` if the widget should grab focus when it is clicked with               the mouse.
         */
        get_focus_on_click(): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets whether the widget should grab focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
         * Making mouse clicks not grab focus is useful in places like toolbars where
         * you don’t want the keyboard focus removed from the main area of the
         * application.
         * @param focus_on_click whether the widget should grab focus when clicked with the mouse
         */
        set_focus_on_click(focus_on_click: boolean): void;
    }


    namespace RadioButtonAccessible {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends ToggleButtonAccessible.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-layer": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-mdi-zorder": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-help-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-hypertext-nlinks": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption-object": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-summary": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends ToggleButtonAccessible.ConstructorProps, Atk.Action.ConstructorProps, Atk.Component.ConstructorProps, Atk.Image.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class RadioButtonAccessible extends ToggleButtonAccessible implements Atk.Action, Atk.Component, Atk.Image {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<RadioButtonAccessible>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: RadioButtonAccessible.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<RadioButtonAccessible.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof RadioButtonAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, RadioButtonAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof RadioButtonAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, RadioButtonAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof RadioButtonAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<RadioButtonAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;
    }


    namespace RadioMenuItem {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends CheckMenuItem.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * @signal
             * @run-first
             */
            "group-changed": () => void;
            "notify::group": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::active": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::draw-as-radio": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::inconsistent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accel-path": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::label": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::right-justified": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::submenu": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-underline": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends CheckMenuItem.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Actionable.ConstructorProps, Activatable.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {
            group: RadioMenuItem;
        }
    }

    /**
     * A radio menu item is a check menu item that belongs to a group. At each
     * instant exactly one of the radio menu items from a group is selected.
     * 
     * The group list does not need to be freed, as each {@link Gtk.RadioMenuItem} will
     * remove itself and its list item when it is destroyed.
     * 
     * The correct way to create a group of radio menu items is approximatively
     * this:
     * 
     * ## How to create a group of radio menu items.
     * 
     * 
     * ```c
     * GSList *group = NULL;
     * GtkWidget *item;
     * gint i;
     * 
     * for (i = 0; i < 5; i++)
     * {
     *   item = gtk_radio_menu_item_new_with_label (group, "This is an example");
     *   group = gtk_radio_menu_item_get_group (GTK_RADIO_MENU_ITEM (item));
     *   if (i == 1)
     *     gtk_check_menu_item_set_active (GTK_CHECK_MENU_ITEM (item), TRUE);
     * }
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * # CSS nodes
     * 
     * 
     * ```
     * menuitem
     * ├── radio.left
     * ╰── <child>
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * GtkRadioMenuItem has a main CSS node with name menuitem, and a subnode
     * with name radio, which gets the .left or .right style class.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class RadioMenuItem extends CheckMenuItem implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Actionable, Activatable, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<RadioMenuItem>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * The radio menu item whose group this widget belongs to.
         * @since 2.8
         * @write-only
         */
        set group(val: RadioMenuItem);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: RadioMenuItem.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        check_menu_item: CheckMenuItem;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<RadioMenuItem.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](group: RadioMenuItem[] | null): RadioMenuItem;

        // Conflicted with Gtk.CheckMenuItem.new
        static ["new"](...args: never[]): any;

        static new_from_widget(group: RadioMenuItem | null): RadioMenuItem;

        static new_with_label(group: RadioMenuItem[] | null, label: string): RadioMenuItem;

        // Conflicted with Gtk.CheckMenuItem.new_with_label
        static new_with_label(...args: never[]): any;

        static new_with_label_from_widget(group: RadioMenuItem | null, label: string | null): RadioMenuItem;

        static new_with_mnemonic(group: RadioMenuItem[] | null, label: string): RadioMenuItem;

        // Conflicted with Gtk.CheckMenuItem.new_with_mnemonic
        static new_with_mnemonic(...args: never[]): any;

        static new_with_mnemonic_from_widget(group: RadioMenuItem | null, label: string | null): RadioMenuItem;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof RadioMenuItem.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, RadioMenuItem.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof RadioMenuItem.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, RadioMenuItem.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof RadioMenuItem.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<RadioMenuItem.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_group_changed(): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Returns the group to which the radio menu item belongs, as a {@link GLib.List} of
         * {@link Gtk.RadioMenuItem}. The list belongs to GTK+ and should not be freed.
         * @returns the group     of `radio_menu_item`
         */
        get_group(): RadioMenuItem[];

        /**
         * Joins a {@link Gtk.RadioMenuItem} object to the group of another {@link Gtk.RadioMenuItem}
         * object.
         * 
         * This function should be used by language bindings to avoid the memory
         * manangement of the opaque {@link GLib.SList} of `gtk_radio_menu_item_get_group()`
         * and `gtk_radio_menu_item_set_group()`.
         * 
         * A common way to set up a group of {@link Gtk.RadioMenuItem} instances is:
         * 
         * 
         * ```
         *   GtkRadioMenuItem *last_item = NULL;
         * 
         *   while ( ...more items to add... )
         *     {
         *       GtkRadioMenuItem *radio_item;
         * 
         *       radio_item = gtk_radio_menu_item_new (...);
         * 
         *       gtk_radio_menu_item_join_group (radio_item, last_item);
         *       last_item = radio_item;
         *     }
         * ```
         * 
         * @param group_source a {@link Gtk.RadioMenuItem} whose group we are   joining, or `null` to remove the `radio_menu_item` from its current   group
         */
        join_group(group_source: RadioMenuItem | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the group of a radio menu item, or changes it.
         * @param group the new group, or `null`.
         */
        set_group(group: RadioMenuItem[] | null): void;

        /**
         * For widgets that can be “activated” (buttons, menu items, etc.)
         * this function activates them. Activation is what happens when you
         * press Enter on a widget during key navigation. If `widget` isn't
         * activatable, the function returns `false`.
         * @returns `true` if the widget was activatable
         */
        activate(): boolean;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Gtk.MenuItem.activate
        activate(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Emits a {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.child_notify | Gtk.Widget::child-notify} signal for the
         * [child property][child-properties] `child_property`
         * on `widget`.
         * 
         * This is the analogue of `g_object_notify()` for child properties.
         * 
         * Also see `gtk_container_child_notify()`.
         * @param child_property the name of a child property installed on the                  class of `widget`’s parent
         */
        child_notify(child_property: string): void;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Gtk.Container.child_notify
        child_notify(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Given an accelerator group, `accel_group`, and an accelerator path,
         * `accel_path`, sets up an accelerator in `accel_group` so whenever the
         * key binding that is defined for `accel_path` is pressed, `widget`
         * will be activated.  This removes any accelerators (for any
         * accelerator group) installed by previous calls to
         * `gtk_widget_set_accel_path()`. Associating accelerators with
         * paths allows them to be modified by the user and the modifications
         * to be saved for future use. (See `gtk_accel_map_save()`.)
         * 
         * This function is a low level function that would most likely
         * be used by a menu creation system like {@link Gtk.UIManager}. If you
         * use {@link Gtk.UIManager}, setting up accelerator paths will be done
         * automatically.
         * 
         * Even when you you aren’t using {@link Gtk.UIManager}, if you only want to
         * set up accelerators on menu items `gtk_menu_item_set_accel_path()`
         * provides a somewhat more convenient interface.
         * 
         * Note that `accel_path` string will be stored in a {@link GLib.Quark}. Therefore, if you
         * pass a static string, you can save some memory by interning it first with
         * `g_intern_static_string()`.
         * @param accel_path path used to look up the accelerator
         * @param accel_group a {@link Gtk.AccelGroup}.
         */
        set_accel_path(accel_path: string | null, accel_group: AccelGroup | null): void;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Gtk.MenuItem.set_accel_path
        set_accel_path(...args: never[]): any;
    }


    namespace RadioMenuItemAccessible {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends CheckMenuItemAccessible.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-layer": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-mdi-zorder": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-help-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-hypertext-nlinks": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption-object": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-summary": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends CheckMenuItemAccessible.ConstructorProps, Atk.Action.ConstructorProps, Atk.Component.ConstructorProps, Atk.Selection.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class RadioMenuItemAccessible extends CheckMenuItemAccessible implements Atk.Action, Atk.Component, Atk.Selection {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<RadioMenuItemAccessible>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: RadioMenuItemAccessible.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<RadioMenuItemAccessible.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof RadioMenuItemAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, RadioMenuItemAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof RadioMenuItemAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, RadioMenuItemAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof RadioMenuItemAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<RadioMenuItemAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;
    }


    namespace RadioToolButton {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends ToggleToolButton.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::group": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::active": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::icon-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::icon-widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::label": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::label-widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::stock-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-underline": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-important": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible-horizontal": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible-vertical": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends ToggleToolButton.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Actionable.ConstructorProps, Activatable.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {
            group: RadioToolButton;
        }
    }

    /**
     * A {@link Gtk.RadioToolButton} is a {@link Gtk.ToolItem} that contains a radio button,
     * that is, a button that is part of a group of toggle buttons where only
     * one button can be active at a time.
     * 
     * Use `gtk_radio_tool_button_new()` to create a new GtkRadioToolButton. Use
     * `gtk_radio_tool_button_new_from_widget()` to create a new GtkRadioToolButton
     * that is part of the same group as an existing GtkRadioToolButton.
     * 
     * # CSS nodes
     * 
     * GtkRadioToolButton has a single CSS node with name toolbutton.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class RadioToolButton extends ToggleToolButton implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Actionable, Activatable, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<RadioToolButton>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * Sets a new group for a radio tool button.
         * @since 2.4
         * @write-only
         */
        set group(val: RadioToolButton);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: RadioToolButton.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<RadioToolButton.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](group: RadioButton[] | null): RadioToolButton;

        // Conflicted with Gtk.ToggleToolButton.new
        static ["new"](...args: never[]): any;

        static new_from_stock(group: RadioButton[] | null, stock_id: string): RadioToolButton;

        // Conflicted with Gtk.ToggleToolButton.new_from_stock
        static new_from_stock(...args: never[]): any;

        static new_from_widget(group: RadioToolButton | null): RadioToolButton;

        static new_with_stock_from_widget(group: RadioToolButton | null, stock_id: string): RadioToolButton;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof RadioToolButton.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, RadioToolButton.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof RadioToolButton.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, RadioToolButton.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof RadioToolButton.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<RadioToolButton.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Returns the radio button group `button` belongs to.
         * @returns The group `button` belongs to.
         */
        get_group(): RadioButton[];

        /**
         * Adds `button` to `group`, removing it from the group it belonged to before.
         * @param group an existing radio button group, or `null`
         */
        set_group(group: RadioButton[] | null): void;

        /**
         * Emits a {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.child_notify | Gtk.Widget::child-notify} signal for the
         * [child property][child-properties] `child_property`
         * on `widget`.
         * 
         * This is the analogue of `g_object_notify()` for child properties.
         * 
         * Also see `gtk_container_child_notify()`.
         * @param child_property the name of a child property installed on the                  class of `widget`’s parent
         */
        child_notify(child_property: string): void;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Gtk.Container.child_notify
        child_notify(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Sets `markup` as the contents of the tooltip, which is marked up with
         *  the [Pango text markup language][PangoMarkupFormat].
         * 
         * This function will take care of setting {@link Gtk.Widget.has_tooltip} to `true`
         * and of the default handler for the {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.query_tooltip | Gtk.Widget::query-tooltip} signal.
         * 
         * See also the {@link Gtk.Widget.tooltip_markup} property and
         * `gtk_tooltip_set_markup()`.
         * @param markup the contents of the tooltip for `widget`, or `null`
         */
        set_tooltip_markup(markup: string | null): void;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Gtk.ToolItem.set_tooltip_markup
        set_tooltip_markup(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Sets `text` as the contents of the tooltip. This function will take
         * care of setting {@link Gtk.Widget.has_tooltip} to `true` and of the default
         * handler for the {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.query_tooltip | Gtk.Widget::query-tooltip} signal.
         * 
         * See also the {@link Gtk.Widget.tooltip_text} property and `gtk_tooltip_set_text()`.
         * @param text the contents of the tooltip for `widget`
         */
        set_tooltip_text(text: string | null): void;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Gtk.ToolItem.set_tooltip_text
        set_tooltip_text(...args: never[]): any;
    }


    namespace Range {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Widget.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * Emitted before clamping a value, to give the application a
             * chance to adjust the bounds.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "adjust-bounds": (arg0: number) => void;
            /**
             * The {@link Gtk.Range.SignalSignatures.change_value | Gtk.Range::change-value} signal is emitted when a scroll action is
             * performed on a range.  It allows an application to determine the
             * type of scroll event that occurred and the resultant new value.
             * The application can handle the event itself and return `true` to
             * prevent further processing.  Or, by returning `false`, it can pass
             * the event to other handlers until the default GTK+ handler is
             * reached.
             * 
             * The value parameter is unrounded.  An application that overrides
             * the GtkRange::change-value signal is responsible for clamping the
             * value to the desired number of decimal digits; the default GTK+
             * handler clamps the value based on {@link Gtk.Range.round_digits}.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.6
             * @run-last
             */
            "change-value": (arg0: ScrollType, arg1: number) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * Virtual function that moves the slider. Used for keybindings.
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "move-slider": (arg0: ScrollType) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when the range value changes.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "value-changed": () => void;
            "notify::adjustment": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::fill-level": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::inverted": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::lower-stepper-sensitivity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::restrict-to-fill-level": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::round-digits": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::show-fill-level": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::upper-stepper-sensitivity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::orientation": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Widget.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, Orientable.ConstructorProps {
            adjustment: Adjustment;
            fill_level: number;
            fillLevel: number;
            inverted: boolean;
            lower_stepper_sensitivity: SensitivityType;
            lowerStepperSensitivity: SensitivityType;
            restrict_to_fill_level: boolean;
            restrictToFillLevel: boolean;
            round_digits: number;
            roundDigits: number;
            show_fill_level: boolean;
            showFillLevel: boolean;
            upper_stepper_sensitivity: SensitivityType;
            upperStepperSensitivity: SensitivityType;
        }
    }

    /**
     * {@link Gtk.Range} is the common base class for widgets which visualize an
     * adjustment, e.g {@link Gtk.Scale} or {@link Gtk.Scrollbar}.
     * 
     * Apart from signals for monitoring the parameters of the adjustment,
     * {@link Gtk.Range} provides properties and methods for influencing the sensitivity
     * of the “steppers”. It also provides properties and methods for setting a
     * “fill level” on range widgets. See `gtk_range_set_fill_level()`.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    abstract class Range extends Widget implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable, Orientable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<Range>;

        // Properties
        get adjustment(): Adjustment;
        set adjustment(val: Adjustment);

        /**
         * The fill level (e.g. prebuffering of a network stream).
         * See `gtk_range_set_fill_level()`.
         * @since 2.12
         * @default 1.7976931348623157e+308
         */
        get fill_level(): number;
        set fill_level(val: number);

        /**
         * The fill level (e.g. prebuffering of a network stream).
         * See `gtk_range_set_fill_level()`.
         * @since 2.12
         * @default 1.7976931348623157e+308
         */
        get fillLevel(): number;
        set fillLevel(val: number);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get inverted(): boolean;
        set inverted(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default Gtk.SensitivityType.AUTO
         */
        get lower_stepper_sensitivity(): SensitivityType;
        set lower_stepper_sensitivity(val: SensitivityType);

        /**
         * @default Gtk.SensitivityType.AUTO
         */
        get lowerStepperSensitivity(): SensitivityType;
        set lowerStepperSensitivity(val: SensitivityType);

        /**
         * The restrict-to-fill-level property controls whether slider
         * movement is restricted to an upper boundary set by the
         * fill level. See `gtk_range_set_restrict_to_fill_level()`.
         * @since 2.12
         * @default true
         */
        get restrict_to_fill_level(): boolean;
        set restrict_to_fill_level(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The restrict-to-fill-level property controls whether slider
         * movement is restricted to an upper boundary set by the
         * fill level. See `gtk_range_set_restrict_to_fill_level()`.
         * @since 2.12
         * @default true
         */
        get restrictToFillLevel(): boolean;
        set restrictToFillLevel(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The number of digits to round the value to when
         * it changes, or -1. See {@link Gtk.Range.SignalSignatures.change_value | Gtk.Range::change-value}.
         * @since 2.24
         * @default -1
         */
        get round_digits(): number;
        set round_digits(val: number);

        /**
         * The number of digits to round the value to when
         * it changes, or -1. See {@link Gtk.Range.SignalSignatures.change_value | Gtk.Range::change-value}.
         * @since 2.24
         * @default -1
         */
        get roundDigits(): number;
        set roundDigits(val: number);

        /**
         * The show-fill-level property controls whether fill level indicator
         * graphics are displayed on the trough. See
         * `gtk_range_set_show_fill_level()`.
         * @since 2.12
         * @default false
         */
        get show_fill_level(): boolean;
        set show_fill_level(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The show-fill-level property controls whether fill level indicator
         * graphics are displayed on the trough. See
         * `gtk_range_set_show_fill_level()`.
         * @since 2.12
         * @default false
         */
        get showFillLevel(): boolean;
        set showFillLevel(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default Gtk.SensitivityType.AUTO
         */
        get upper_stepper_sensitivity(): SensitivityType;
        set upper_stepper_sensitivity(val: SensitivityType);

        /**
         * @default Gtk.SensitivityType.AUTO
         */
        get upperStepperSensitivity(): SensitivityType;
        set upperStepperSensitivity(val: SensitivityType);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: Range.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        widget: Widget;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<Range.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof Range.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Range.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof Range.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Range.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof Range.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<Range.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * @param new_value 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_adjust_bounds(new_value: number): void;

        /**
         * @param scroll 
         * @param new_value 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_change_value(scroll: ScrollType, new_value: number): boolean;

        /**
         * @param border_ 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_range_border(border_: Border): void;

        /**
         * @param orientation 
         * @param minimum 
         * @param natural 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_range_size_request(orientation: Orientation, minimum: number, natural: number): void;

        /**
         * @param scroll 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_move_slider(scroll: ScrollType): void;

        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_value_changed(): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Get the {@link Gtk.Adjustment} which is the “model” object for {@link Gtk.Range}.
         * See `gtk_range_set_adjustment()` for details.
         * The return value does not have a reference added, so should not
         * be unreferenced.
         * @returns a {@link Gtk.Adjustment}
         */
        get_adjustment(): Adjustment;

        /**
         * Gets the current position of the fill level indicator.
         * @returns The current fill level
         */
        get_fill_level(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the value set by `gtk_range_set_flippable()`.
         * @returns `true` if the range is flippable
         */
        get_flippable(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the value set by `gtk_range_set_inverted()`.
         * @returns `true` if the range is inverted
         */
        get_inverted(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the sensitivity policy for the stepper that points to the
         * 'lower' end of the GtkRange’s adjustment.
         * @returns The lower stepper’s sensitivity policy.
         */
        get_lower_stepper_sensitivity(): SensitivityType;

        /**
         * This function is useful mainly for {@link Gtk.Range} subclasses.
         * 
         * See `gtk_range_set_min_slider_size()`.
         * @returns The minimum size of the range’s slider.
         */
        get_min_slider_size(): number;

        /**
         * This function returns the area that contains the range’s trough
         * and its steppers, in widget->window coordinates.
         * 
         * This function is useful mainly for {@link Gtk.Range} subclasses.
         */
        get_range_rect(): Gdk.Rectangle;

        /**
         * Gets whether the range is restricted to the fill level.
         * @returns `true` if `range` is restricted to the fill level.
         */
        get_restrict_to_fill_level(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the number of digits to round the value to when
         * it changes. See {@link Gtk.Range.SignalSignatures.change_value | Gtk.Range::change-value}.
         * @returns the number of digits to round to
         */
        get_round_digits(): number;

        /**
         * Gets whether the range displays the fill level graphically.
         * @returns `true` if `range` shows the fill level.
         */
        get_show_fill_level(): boolean;

        /**
         * This function returns sliders range along the long dimension,
         * in widget->window coordinates.
         * 
         * This function is useful mainly for {@link Gtk.Range} subclasses.
         */
        get_slider_range(): [number, number];

        /**
         * This function is useful mainly for {@link Gtk.Range} subclasses.
         * 
         * See `gtk_range_set_slider_size_fixed()`.
         * @returns whether the range’s slider has a fixed size.
         */
        get_slider_size_fixed(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the sensitivity policy for the stepper that points to the
         * 'upper' end of the GtkRange’s adjustment.
         * @returns The upper stepper’s sensitivity policy.
         */
        get_upper_stepper_sensitivity(): SensitivityType;

        /**
         * Gets the current value of the range.
         * @returns current value of the range.
         */
        get_value(): number;

        /**
         * Sets the adjustment to be used as the “model” object for this range
         * widget. The adjustment indicates the current range value, the
         * minimum and maximum range values, the step/page increments used
         * for keybindings and scrolling, and the page size. The page size
         * is normally 0 for {@link Gtk.Scale} and nonzero for {@link Gtk.Scrollbar}, and
         * indicates the size of the visible area of the widget being scrolled.
         * The page size affects the size of the scrollbar slider.
         * @param adjustment a {@link Gtk.Adjustment}
         */
        set_adjustment(adjustment: Adjustment): void;

        /**
         * Set the new position of the fill level indicator.
         * 
         * The “fill level” is probably best described by its most prominent
         * use case, which is an indicator for the amount of pre-buffering in
         * a streaming media player. In that use case, the value of the range
         * would indicate the current play position, and the fill level would
         * be the position up to which the file/stream has been downloaded.
         * 
         * This amount of prebuffering can be displayed on the range’s trough
         * and is themeable separately from the trough. To enable fill level
         * display, use `gtk_range_set_show_fill_level()`. The range defaults
         * to not showing the fill level.
         * 
         * Additionally, it’s possible to restrict the range’s slider position
         * to values which are smaller than the fill level. This is controller
         * by `gtk_range_set_restrict_to_fill_level()` and is by default
         * enabled.
         * @param fill_level the new position of the fill level indicator
         */
        set_fill_level(fill_level: number): void;

        /**
         * If a range is flippable, it will switch its direction if it is
         * horizontal and its direction is {@link Gtk.TextDirection.RTL}.
         * 
         * See `gtk_widget_get_direction()`.
         * @param flippable `true` to make the range flippable
         */
        set_flippable(flippable: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the step and page sizes for the range.
         * The step size is used when the user clicks the {@link Gtk.Scrollbar}
         * arrows or moves {@link Gtk.Scale} via arrow keys. The page size
         * is used for example when moving via Page Up or Page Down keys.
         * @param step step size
         * @param page page size
         */
        set_increments(step: number, page: number): void;

        /**
         * Ranges normally move from lower to higher values as the
         * slider moves from top to bottom or left to right. Inverted
         * ranges have higher values at the top or on the right rather than
         * on the bottom or left.
         * @param setting `true` to invert the range
         */
        set_inverted(setting: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the sensitivity policy for the stepper that points to the
         * 'lower' end of the GtkRange’s adjustment.
         * @param sensitivity the lower stepper’s sensitivity policy.
         */
        set_lower_stepper_sensitivity(sensitivity: SensitivityType): void;

        /**
         * Sets the minimum size of the range’s slider.
         * 
         * This function is useful mainly for {@link Gtk.Range} subclasses.
         * @param min_size The slider’s minimum size
         */
        set_min_slider_size(min_size: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the allowable values in the {@link Gtk.Range}, and clamps the range
         * value to be between `min` and `max`. (If the range has a non-zero
         * page size, it is clamped between `min` and `max` - page-size.)
         * @param min minimum range value
         * @param max maximum range value
         */
        set_range(min: number, max: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the slider is restricted to the fill level. See
         * `gtk_range_set_fill_level()` for a general description of the fill
         * level concept.
         * @param restrict_to_fill_level Whether the fill level restricts slider movement.
         */
        set_restrict_to_fill_level(restrict_to_fill_level: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the number of digits to round the value to when
         * it changes. See {@link Gtk.Range.SignalSignatures.change_value | Gtk.Range::change-value}.
         * @param round_digits the precision in digits, or -1
         */
        set_round_digits(round_digits: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether a graphical fill level is show on the trough. See
         * `gtk_range_set_fill_level()` for a general description of the fill
         * level concept.
         * @param show_fill_level Whether a fill level indicator graphics is shown.
         */
        set_show_fill_level(show_fill_level: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the range’s slider has a fixed size, or a size that
         * depends on its adjustment’s page size.
         * 
         * This function is useful mainly for {@link Gtk.Range} subclasses.
         * @param size_fixed `true` to make the slider size constant
         */
        set_slider_size_fixed(size_fixed: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the sensitivity policy for the stepper that points to the
         * 'upper' end of the GtkRange’s adjustment.
         * @param sensitivity the upper stepper’s sensitivity policy.
         */
        set_upper_stepper_sensitivity(sensitivity: SensitivityType): void;

        /**
         * Sets the current value of the range; if the value is outside the
         * minimum or maximum range values, it will be clamped to fit inside
         * them. The range emits the {@link Gtk.Range.SignalSignatures.value_changed | Gtk.Range::value-changed} signal if the
         * value changes.
         * @param value new value of the range
         */
        set_value(value: number): void;

        /**
         * The orientation of the orientable.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default Gtk.Orientation.HORIZONTAL
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Orientable
         */
        get orientation(): Orientation;
        set orientation(val: Orientation);

        /**
         * Adds a child to `buildable`. `type` is an optional string
         * describing how the child should be added.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child to add
         * @param type kind of child or `null`
         */
        add_child(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object, type: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Constructs a child of `buildable` with the name `name`.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} calls this function if a “constructor” has been
         * specified in the UI definition.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param name name of child to construct
         * @returns the constructed child
         */
        construct_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, name: string): T;

        /**
         * This is similar to `gtk_buildable_parser_finished()` but is
         * called once for each custom tag handled by the `buildable`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname the name of the tag
         * @param data user data created in custom_tag_start
         */
        custom_finished(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
         * the buildable.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @param data user data that will be passed in to parser functions
         */
        custom_tag_end(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called for each unknown element under `<child>`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @returns `true` if a object has a custom implementation, `false`          if it doesn't.
         */
        custom_tag_start(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string): [boolean, GLib.MarkupParser, null];

        /**
         * Get the internal child called `childname` of the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param childname name of child
         * @returns the internal child of the buildable object
         */
        get_internal_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, childname: string): T;

        /**
         * Gets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} sets the name based on the
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI]
         * used to construct the `buildable`.
         * @returns the name set with `gtk_buildable_set_name()`
         */
        get_name(): string;

        /**
         * Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI].
         * Note that this will be called once for each time
         * `gtk_builder_add_from_file()` or `gtk_builder_add_from_string()`
         * is called on a builder.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         */
        parser_finished(builder: Builder): void;

        /**
         * Sets the property name `name` to `value` on the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param name name of property
         * @param value value of property
         */
        set_buildable_property(builder: Builder, name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;

        /**
         * Sets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * @param name name to set
         */
        set_name(name: string): void;

        /**
         * Adds a child to `buildable`. `type` is an optional string
         * describing how the child should be added.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child to add
         * @param type kind of child or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add_child(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object, type: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Constructs a child of `buildable` with the name `name`.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} calls this function if a “constructor” has been
         * specified in the UI definition.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param name name of child to construct
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_construct_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, name: string): T;

        /**
         * This is similar to `gtk_buildable_parser_finished()` but is
         * called once for each custom tag handled by the `buildable`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname the name of the tag
         * @param data user data created in custom_tag_start
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_finished(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
         * the buildable.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @param data user data that will be passed in to parser functions
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_tag_end(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called for each unknown element under `<child>`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_tag_start(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string): [boolean, GLib.MarkupParser, never];

        /**
         * Get the internal child called `childname` of the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param childname name of child
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_internal_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, childname: string): T;

        /**
         * Gets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} sets the name based on the
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI]
         * used to construct the `buildable`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_name(): string;

        /**
         * Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI].
         * Note that this will be called once for each time
         * `gtk_builder_add_from_file()` or `gtk_builder_add_from_string()`
         * is called on a builder.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_parser_finished(builder: Builder): void;

        /**
         * Sets the property name `name` to `value` on the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param name name of property
         * @param value value of property
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_buildable_property(builder: Builder, name: string, value: unknown): void;

        /**
         * Sets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * @param name name to set
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_name(name: string): void;

        /**
         * Retrieves the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @returns the orientation of the `orientable`.
         */
        get_orientation(): Orientation;

        /**
         * Sets the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @param orientation the orientable’s new orientation.
         */
        set_orientation(orientation: Orientation): void;
    }


    namespace RangeAccessible {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends WidgetAccessible.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-layer": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-mdi-zorder": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-help-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-hypertext-nlinks": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption-object": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-summary": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends WidgetAccessible.ConstructorProps, Atk.Component.ConstructorProps, Atk.Value.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class RangeAccessible extends WidgetAccessible implements Atk.Component, Atk.Value {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<RangeAccessible>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: RangeAccessible.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<RangeAccessible.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof RangeAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, RangeAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof RangeAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, RangeAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof RangeAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<RangeAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        /**
         * Checks whether the specified point is within the extent of the `component`.
         * 
         * Toolkit implementor note: ATK provides a default implementation for
         * this virtual method. In general there are little reason to
         * re-implement it.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @returns `true` or `false` indicating whether the specified point is within the extent of the `component` or not
         */
        contains(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the alpha value (i.e. the opacity) for this
         * `component`, on a scale from 0 (fully transparent) to 1.0
         * (fully opaque).
         * @returns An alpha value from 0 to 1.0, inclusive.
         */
        get_alpha(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the rectangle which gives the extent of the `component`.
         * 
         * If the extent can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), all of x, y, width, height are set to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         */
        get_extents(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the layer of the component.
         * @returns an {@link Atk.Layer} which is the layer of the component
         */
        get_layer(): Atk.Layer;

        /**
         * Gets the zorder of the component. The value G_MININT will be returned
         * if the layer of the component is not ATK_LAYER_MDI or ATK_LAYER_WINDOW.
         * @returns a gint which is the zorder of the component, i.e. the depth at which the component is shown in relation to other components in the same container.
         */
        get_mdi_zorder(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the position of `component` in the form of
         * a point specifying `component`'s top-left corner.
         * 
         * If the position can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), x and y are set to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         */
        get_position(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the size of the `component` in terms of width and height.
         * 
         * If the size can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), width and height are set to -1.
         */
        get_size(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Grabs focus for this `component`.
         * @returns `true` if successful, `false` otherwise.
         */
        grab_focus(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets a reference to the accessible child, if one exists, at the
         * coordinate point specified by `x` and `y`.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @returns a reference to the accessible child, if one exists
         */
        ref_accessible_at_point(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): Atk.Object | null;

        /**
         * Remove the handler specified by `handler_id` from the list of
         * functions to be executed when this object receives focus events
         * (in or out).
         * @param handler_id the handler id of the focus handler to be removed from `component`
         */
        remove_focus_handler(handler_id: number): void;

        /**
         * Makes `component` visible on the screen by scrolling all necessary parents.
         * 
         * Contrary to atk_component_set_position, this does not actually move
         * `component` in its parent, this only makes the parents scroll so that the
         * object shows up on the screen, given its current position within the parents.
         * @param type specify where the object should be made visible.
         * @returns whether scrolling was successful.
         */
        scroll_to(type: Atk.ScrollType): boolean;

        /**
         * Move the top-left of `component` to a given position of the screen by
         * scrolling all necessary parents.
         * @param coords specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or to the parent object.
         * @param x x-position where to scroll to
         * @param y y-position where to scroll to
         * @returns whether scrolling was successful.
         */
        scroll_to_point(coords: Atk.CoordType, x: number, y: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the extents of `component`.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param width width to set for `component`
         * @param height height to set for `component`
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @returns `true` or `false` whether the extents were set or not
         */
        set_extents(x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the position of `component`.
         * 
         * Contrary to atk_component_scroll_to, this does not trigger any scrolling,
         * this just moves `component` in its parent.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the component's top level window
         * @returns `true` or `false` whether or not the position was set or not
         */
        set_position(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Set the size of the `component` in terms of width and height.
         * @param width width to set for `component`
         * @param height height to set for `component`
         * @returns `true` or `false` whether the size was set or not
         */
        set_size(width: number, height: number): boolean;

        /**
         * @param bounds 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_bounds_changed(bounds: Atk.Rectangle): void;

        /**
         * Checks whether the specified point is within the extent of the `component`.
         * 
         * Toolkit implementor note: ATK provides a default implementation for
         * this virtual method. In general there are little reason to
         * re-implement it.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_contains(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the alpha value (i.e. the opacity) for this
         * `component`, on a scale from 0 (fully transparent) to 1.0
         * (fully opaque).
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_alpha(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the rectangle which gives the extent of the `component`.
         * 
         * If the extent can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), all of x, y, width, height are set to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_extents(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the layer of the component.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_layer(): Atk.Layer;

        /**
         * Gets the zorder of the component. The value G_MININT will be returned
         * if the layer of the component is not ATK_LAYER_MDI or ATK_LAYER_WINDOW.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_mdi_zorder(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the position of `component` in the form of
         * a point specifying `component`'s top-left corner.
         * 
         * If the position can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), x and y are set to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_position(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the size of the `component` in terms of width and height.
         * 
         * If the size can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), width and height are set to -1.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_size(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Grabs focus for this `component`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_grab_focus(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets a reference to the accessible child, if one exists, at the
         * coordinate point specified by `x` and `y`.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_ref_accessible_at_point(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): Atk.Object | null;

        /**
         * Remove the handler specified by `handler_id` from the list of
         * functions to be executed when this object receives focus events
         * (in or out).
         * @param handler_id the handler id of the focus handler to be removed from `component`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_remove_focus_handler(handler_id: number): void;

        /**
         * Makes `component` visible on the screen by scrolling all necessary parents.
         * 
         * Contrary to atk_component_set_position, this does not actually move
         * `component` in its parent, this only makes the parents scroll so that the
         * object shows up on the screen, given its current position within the parents.
         * @param type specify where the object should be made visible.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_scroll_to(type: Atk.ScrollType): boolean;

        /**
         * Move the top-left of `component` to a given position of the screen by
         * scrolling all necessary parents.
         * @param coords specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or to the parent object.
         * @param x x-position where to scroll to
         * @param y y-position where to scroll to
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_scroll_to_point(coords: Atk.CoordType, x: number, y: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the extents of `component`.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param width width to set for `component`
         * @param height height to set for `component`
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_extents(x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the position of `component`.
         * 
         * Contrary to atk_component_scroll_to, this does not trigger any scrolling,
         * this just moves `component` in its parent.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the component's top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_position(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Set the size of the `component` in terms of width and height.
         * @param width width to set for `component`
         * @param height height to set for `component`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_size(width: number, height: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the value of this object.
         */
        get_current_value(): unknown;

        /**
         * Gets the minimum increment by which the value of this object may be
         * changed.  If zero, the minimum increment is undefined, which may
         * mean that it is limited only by the floating point precision of the
         * platform.
         * @returns the minimum increment by which the value of this object may be changed. zero if undefined.
         */
        get_increment(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the maximum value of this object.
         */
        get_maximum_value(): unknown;

        /**
         * Gets the minimum increment by which the value of this object may be changed.  If zero,
         * the minimum increment is undefined, which may mean that it is limited only by the
         * floating point precision of the platform.
         */
        get_minimum_increment(): unknown;

        /**
         * Gets the minimum value of this object.
         */
        get_minimum_value(): unknown;

        /**
         * Gets the range of this object.
         * @returns a newly allocated {@link Atk.Range} that represents the minimum, maximum and descriptor (if available) of `obj`. NULL if that range is not defined.
         */
        get_range(): Atk.Range | null;

        /**
         * Gets the list of subranges defined for this object. See {@link Atk.Value}
         * introduction for examples of subranges and when to expose them.
         * @returns an {@link GLib.SList} of {@link Atk.Range} which each of the subranges defined for this object. Free the returns list with `g_slist_free()`.
         */
        get_sub_ranges(): Atk.Range[];

        /**
         * Gets the current value and the human readable text alternative of
         * `obj`. `text` is a newly created string, that must be freed by the
         * caller. Can be NULL if no descriptor is available.
         */
        get_value_and_text(): [number, string];

        /**
         * Sets the value of this object.
         * @param value a {@link GObject.Value} which is the desired new accessible value.
         * @returns `true` if new value is successfully set, `false` otherwise.
         */
        set_current_value(value: GObject.Value | any): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the value of this object.
         * 
         * This method is intended to provide a way to change the value of the
         * object. In any case, it is possible that the value can't be
         * modified (ie: a read-only component). If the value changes due this
         * call, it is possible that the text could change, and will trigger
         * an {@link Atk.Value.SignalSignatures.value_changed | Atk.Value::value-changed} signal emission.
         * 
         * Note for implementors: the deprecated `atk_value_set_current_value()`
         * method returned TRUE or FALSE depending if the value was assigned
         * or not. In the practice several implementors were not able to
         * decide it, and returned TRUE in any case. For that reason it is not
         * required anymore to return if the value was properly assigned or
         * not.
         * @param new_value a double which is the desired new accessible value.
         */
        set_value(new_value: number): void;

        /**
         * Gets the value of this object.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_current_value(): GObject.Value | any;

        /**
         * Gets the minimum increment by which the value of this object may be
         * changed.  If zero, the minimum increment is undefined, which may
         * mean that it is limited only by the floating point precision of the
         * platform.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_increment(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the maximum value of this object.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_maximum_value(): GObject.Value | any;

        /**
         * Gets the minimum increment by which the value of this object may be changed.  If zero,
         * the minimum increment is undefined, which may mean that it is limited only by the
         * floating point precision of the platform.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_minimum_increment(): GObject.Value | any;

        /**
         * Gets the minimum value of this object.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_minimum_value(): GObject.Value | any;

        /**
         * Gets the range of this object.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_range(): Atk.Range | null;

        /**
         * Gets the list of subranges defined for this object. See {@link Atk.Value}
         * introduction for examples of subranges and when to expose them.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_sub_ranges(): Atk.Range[];

        /**
         * Gets the current value and the human readable text alternative of
         * `obj`. `text` is a newly created string, that must be freed by the
         * caller. Can be NULL if no descriptor is available.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_value_and_text(): [number, string];

        /**
         * Sets the value of this object.
         * @param value a {@link GObject.Value} which is the desired new accessible value.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_current_value(value: unknown): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the value of this object.
         * 
         * This method is intended to provide a way to change the value of the
         * object. In any case, it is possible that the value can't be
         * modified (ie: a read-only component). If the value changes due this
         * call, it is possible that the text could change, and will trigger
         * an {@link Atk.Value.SignalSignatures.value_changed | Atk.Value::value-changed} signal emission.
         * 
         * Note for implementors: the deprecated `atk_value_set_current_value()`
         * method returned TRUE or FALSE depending if the value was assigned
         * or not. In the practice several implementors were not able to
         * decide it, and returned TRUE in any case. For that reason it is not
         * required anymore to return if the value was properly assigned or
         * not.
         * @param new_value a double which is the desired new accessible value.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_value(new_value: number): void;
    }


    namespace RcStyle {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends GObject.Object.SignalSignatures {}

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.Object.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * The {@link Gtk.RcStyle}-struct is used to represent a set
     * of information about the appearance of a widget.
     * This can later be composited together with other
     * {@link Gtk.RcStyle}-struct<!-- -->s to form a {@link Gtk.Style}.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class RcStyle extends GObject.Object {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<RcStyle>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: RcStyle.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        name: string;

        bg_pixmap_name: string[];

        color_flags: RcFlags[];

        fg: Gdk.Color[];

        bg: Gdk.Color[];

        text: Gdk.Color[];

        base: Gdk.Color[];

        xthickness: number;

        ythickness: number;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<RcStyle.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): RcStyle;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof RcStyle.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, RcStyle.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof RcStyle.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, RcStyle.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof RcStyle.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<RcStyle.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * @param src 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_merge(src: RcStyle): void;

        /**
         * @param settings 
         * @param scanner 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_parse(settings: Settings, scanner: GLib.Scanner): number;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Makes a copy of the specified {@link Gtk.RcStyle}. This function
         * will correctly copy an RC style that is a member of a class
         * derived from {@link Gtk.RcStyle}.
         * @returns the resulting {@link Gtk.RcStyle}
         */
        copy(): RcStyle;
    }


    namespace RecentAction {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Action.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::show-numbers": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::action-group": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::always-show-image": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gicon": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hide-if-empty": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::icon-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-important": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::label": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::short-label": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::stock-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible-horizontal": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible-overflown": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible-vertical": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::filter": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::limit": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::local-only": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::recent-manager": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::select-multiple": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::show-icons": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::show-not-found": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::show-private": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::show-tips": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sort-type": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Action.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, RecentChooser.ConstructorProps {
            show_numbers: boolean;
            showNumbers: boolean;
        }
    }

    /**
     * A {@link Gtk.RecentAction} represents a list of recently used files, which
     * can be shown by widgets such as {@link Gtk.RecentChooserDialog} or
     * {@link Gtk.RecentChooserMenu}.
     * 
     * To construct a submenu showing recently used files, use a {@link Gtk.RecentAction}
     * as the action for a `<menuitem>`. To construct a menu toolbutton showing
     * the recently used files in the popup menu, use a {@link Gtk.RecentAction} as the
     * action for a `<toolitem>` element.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class RecentAction extends Action implements Buildable, RecentChooser {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<RecentAction>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * Whether the items should be displayed with a number.
         * @deprecated since 3.10
         * @default false
         */
        get show_numbers(): boolean;
        set show_numbers(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether the items should be displayed with a number.
         * @deprecated since 3.10
         * @default false
         */
        get showNumbers(): boolean;
        set showNumbers(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: RecentAction.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<RecentAction.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](name: string, label: string | null, tooltip: string | null, stock_id: string | null): RecentAction;

        static new_for_manager(name: string, label: string | null, tooltip: string | null, stock_id: string | null, manager: RecentManager | null): RecentAction;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof RecentAction.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, RecentAction.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof RecentAction.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, RecentAction.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof RecentAction.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<RecentAction.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Returns the value set by `gtk_recent_chooser_menu_set_show_numbers()`.
         * @returns `true` if numbers should be shown.
         */
        get_show_numbers(): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets whether a number should be added to the items shown by the
         * widgets representing `action`. The numbers are shown to provide
         * a unique character for a mnemonic to be used inside the menu item's
         * label. Only the first ten items get a number to avoid clashes.
         * @param show_numbers `true` if the shown items should be numbered
         */
        set_show_numbers(show_numbers: boolean): void;

        /**
         * The {@link Gtk.RecentFilter} object to be used when displaying
         * the recently used resources.
         * @since 2.10
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        get filter(): RecentFilter;
        set filter(val: RecentFilter);

        /**
         * The maximum number of recently used resources to be displayed,
         * or -1 to display all items.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default 50
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        get limit(): number;
        set limit(val: number);

        /**
         * Whether this {@link Gtk.RecentChooser} should display only local (file:)
         * resources.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        get local_only(): boolean;
        set local_only(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether this {@link Gtk.RecentChooser} should display only local (file:)
         * resources.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        get localOnly(): boolean;
        set localOnly(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The {@link Gtk.RecentManager} instance used by the {@link Gtk.RecentChooser} to
         * display the list of recently used resources.
         * @since 2.10
         * @construct-only
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        set recent_manager(val: RecentManager);

        /**
         * The {@link Gtk.RecentManager} instance used by the {@link Gtk.RecentChooser} to
         * display the list of recently used resources.
         * @since 2.10
         * @construct-only
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        set recentManager(val: RecentManager);

        /**
         * Allow the user to select multiple resources.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default false
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        get select_multiple(): boolean;
        set select_multiple(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Allow the user to select multiple resources.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default false
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        get selectMultiple(): boolean;
        set selectMultiple(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether this {@link Gtk.RecentChooser} should display an icon near the item.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        get show_icons(): boolean;
        set show_icons(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether this {@link Gtk.RecentChooser} should display an icon near the item.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        get showIcons(): boolean;
        set showIcons(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether this {@link Gtk.RecentChooser} should display the recently used resources
         * even if not present anymore. Setting this to `false` will perform a
         * potentially expensive check on every local resource (every remote
         * resource will always be displayed).
         * @since 2.10
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        get show_not_found(): boolean;
        set show_not_found(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether this {@link Gtk.RecentChooser} should display the recently used resources
         * even if not present anymore. Setting this to `false` will perform a
         * potentially expensive check on every local resource (every remote
         * resource will always be displayed).
         * @since 2.10
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        get showNotFound(): boolean;
        set showNotFound(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        get show_private(): boolean;
        set show_private(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        get showPrivate(): boolean;
        set showPrivate(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether this {@link Gtk.RecentChooser} should display a tooltip containing the
         * full path of the recently used resources.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default false
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        get show_tips(): boolean;
        set show_tips(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether this {@link Gtk.RecentChooser} should display a tooltip containing the
         * full path of the recently used resources.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default false
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        get showTips(): boolean;
        set showTips(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Sorting order to be used when displaying the recently used resources.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default Gtk.RecentSortType.NONE
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        get sort_type(): RecentSortType;
        set sort_type(val: RecentSortType);

        /**
         * Sorting order to be used when displaying the recently used resources.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default Gtk.RecentSortType.NONE
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        get sortType(): RecentSortType;
        set sortType(val: RecentSortType);

        /**
         * Adds a child to `buildable`. `type` is an optional string
         * describing how the child should be added.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child to add
         * @param type kind of child or `null`
         */
        add_child(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object, type: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Constructs a child of `buildable` with the name `name`.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} calls this function if a “constructor” has been
         * specified in the UI definition.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param name name of child to construct
         * @returns the constructed child
         */
        construct_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, name: string): T;

        /**
         * This is similar to `gtk_buildable_parser_finished()` but is
         * called once for each custom tag handled by the `buildable`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname the name of the tag
         * @param data user data created in custom_tag_start
         */
        custom_finished(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
         * the buildable.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @param data user data that will be passed in to parser functions
         */
        custom_tag_end(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called for each unknown element under `<child>`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @returns `true` if a object has a custom implementation, `false`          if it doesn't.
         */
        custom_tag_start(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string): [boolean, GLib.MarkupParser, null];

        /**
         * Get the internal child called `childname` of the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param childname name of child
         * @returns the internal child of the buildable object
         */
        get_internal_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, childname: string): T;

        /**
         * Gets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} sets the name based on the
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI]
         * used to construct the `buildable`.
         * @returns the name set with `gtk_buildable_set_name()`
         */
        get_name(): string;

        /**
         * Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI].
         * Note that this will be called once for each time
         * `gtk_builder_add_from_file()` or `gtk_builder_add_from_string()`
         * is called on a builder.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         */
        parser_finished(builder: Builder): void;

        /**
         * Sets the property name `name` to `value` on the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param name name of property
         * @param value value of property
         */
        set_buildable_property(builder: Builder, name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;

        /**
         * Sets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * @param name name to set
         */
        set_name(name: string): void;

        /**
         * Adds a child to `buildable`. `type` is an optional string
         * describing how the child should be added.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child to add
         * @param type kind of child or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add_child(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object, type: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Constructs a child of `buildable` with the name `name`.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} calls this function if a “constructor” has been
         * specified in the UI definition.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param name name of child to construct
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_construct_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, name: string): T;

        /**
         * This is similar to `gtk_buildable_parser_finished()` but is
         * called once for each custom tag handled by the `buildable`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname the name of the tag
         * @param data user data created in custom_tag_start
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_finished(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
         * the buildable.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @param data user data that will be passed in to parser functions
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_tag_end(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called for each unknown element under `<child>`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_tag_start(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string): [boolean, GLib.MarkupParser, never];

        /**
         * Get the internal child called `childname` of the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param childname name of child
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_internal_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, childname: string): T;

        /**
         * Gets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} sets the name based on the
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI]
         * used to construct the `buildable`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_name(): string;

        /**
         * Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI].
         * Note that this will be called once for each time
         * `gtk_builder_add_from_file()` or `gtk_builder_add_from_string()`
         * is called on a builder.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_parser_finished(builder: Builder): void;

        /**
         * Sets the property name `name` to `value` on the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param name name of property
         * @param value value of property
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_buildable_property(builder: Builder, name: string, value: unknown): void;

        /**
         * Sets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * @param name name to set
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_name(name: string): void;

        /**
         * Adds `filter` to the list of {@link Gtk.RecentFilter} objects held by `chooser`.
         * 
         * If no previous filter objects were defined, this function will call
         * `gtk_recent_chooser_set_filter()`.
         * @param filter a {@link Gtk.RecentFilter}
         */
        add_filter(filter: RecentFilter): void;

        /**
         * Gets the {@link Gtk.RecentInfo} currently selected by `chooser`.
         * @returns a {@link Gtk.RecentInfo}.  Use `gtk_recent_info_unref()` when   when you have finished using it.
         */
        get_current_item(): RecentInfo;

        /**
         * Gets the URI currently selected by `chooser`.
         * @returns a newly allocated string holding a URI.
         */
        get_current_uri(): string;

        /**
         * Gets the {@link Gtk.RecentFilter} object currently used by `chooser` to affect
         * the display of the recently used resources.
         * @returns a {@link Gtk.RecentFilter} object.
         */
        get_filter(): RecentFilter;

        /**
         * Gets the list of recently used resources in form of {@link Gtk.RecentInfo} objects.
         * 
         * The return value of this function is affected by the “sort-type” and
         * “limit” properties of `chooser`.
         * @returns A newly allocated   list of {@link Gtk.RecentInfo} objects.  You should   use `gtk_recent_info_unref()` on every item of the list, and then free   the list itself using `g_list_free()`.
         */
        get_items(): RecentInfo[];

        /**
         * Gets the number of items returned by `gtk_recent_chooser_get_items()`
         * and `gtk_recent_chooser_get_uris()`.
         * @returns A positive integer, or -1 meaning that all items are   returned.
         */
        get_limit(): number;

        /**
         * Gets whether only local resources should be shown in the recently used
         * resources selector.  See `gtk_recent_chooser_set_local_only()`
         * @returns `true` if only local resources should be shown.
         */
        get_local_only(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets whether `chooser` can select multiple items.
         * @returns `true` if `chooser` can select more than one item.
         */
        get_select_multiple(): boolean;

        /**
         * Retrieves whether `chooser` should show an icon near the resource.
         * @returns `true` if the icons should be displayed, `false` otherwise.
         */
        get_show_icons(): boolean;

        /**
         * Retrieves whether `chooser` should show the recently used resources that
         * were not found.
         * @returns `true` if the resources not found should be displayed, and   `false` otheriwse.
         */
        get_show_not_found(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns whether `chooser` should display recently used resources
         * registered as private.
         * @returns `true` if the recent chooser should show private items,   `false` otherwise.
         */
        get_show_private(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets whether `chooser` should display tooltips containing the full path
         * of a recently user resource.
         * @returns `true` if the recent chooser should show tooltips,   `false` otherwise.
         */
        get_show_tips(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the value set by `gtk_recent_chooser_set_sort_type()`.
         * @returns the sorting order of the `chooser`.
         */
        get_sort_type(): RecentSortType;

        /**
         * Gets the URI of the recently used resources.
         * 
         * The return value of this function is affected by the “sort-type” and “limit”
         * properties of `chooser`.
         * 
         * Since the returned array is `null` terminated, `length` may be `null`.
         * @returns A newly allocated, `null`-terminated array of strings. Use     `g_strfreev()` to free it.
         */
        get_uris(): string[];

        /**
         * Gets the {@link Gtk.RecentFilter} objects held by `chooser`.
         * @returns A singly linked list   of {@link Gtk.RecentFilter} objects.  You   should just free the returned list using `g_slist_free()`.
         */
        list_filters(): RecentFilter[];

        /**
         * Removes `filter` from the list of {@link Gtk.RecentFilter} objects held by `chooser`.
         * @param filter a {@link Gtk.RecentFilter}
         */
        remove_filter(filter: RecentFilter): void;

        /**
         * Selects all the items inside `chooser`, if the `chooser` supports
         * multiple selection.
         */
        select_all(): void;

        /**
         * Selects `uri` inside `chooser`.
         * @param uri a URI
         * @returns `true` if `uri` was found.
         */
        select_uri(uri: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets `uri` as the current URI for `chooser`.
         * @param uri a URI
         * @returns `true` if the URI was found.
         */
        set_current_uri(uri: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets `filter` as the current {@link Gtk.RecentFilter} object used by `chooser`
         * to affect the displayed recently used resources.
         * @param filter a {@link Gtk.RecentFilter}
         */
        set_filter(filter: RecentFilter | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the number of items that should be returned by
         * `gtk_recent_chooser_get_items()` and `gtk_recent_chooser_get_uris()`.
         * @param limit a positive integer, or -1 for all items
         */
        set_limit(limit: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether only local resources, that is resources using the file:// URI
         * scheme, should be shown in the recently used resources selector.  If
         * `local_only` is `true` (the default) then the shown resources are guaranteed
         * to be accessible through the operating system native file system.
         * @param local_only `true` if only local files can be shown
         */
        set_local_only(local_only: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether `chooser` can select multiple items.
         * @param select_multiple `true` if `chooser` can select more than one item
         */
        set_select_multiple(select_multiple: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether `chooser` should show an icon near the resource when
         * displaying it.
         * @param show_icons whether to show an icon near the resource
         */
        set_show_icons(show_icons: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether `chooser` should display the recently used resources that
         * it didn’t find.  This only applies to local resources.
         * @param show_not_found whether to show the local items we didn’t find
         */
        set_show_not_found(show_not_found: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Whether to show recently used resources marked registered as private.
         * @param show_private `true` to show private items, `false` otherwise
         */
        set_show_private(show_private: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether to show a tooltips containing the full path of each
         * recently used resource in a {@link Gtk.RecentChooser} widget.
         * @param show_tips `true` if tooltips should be shown
         */
        set_show_tips(show_tips: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the comparison function used when sorting to be `sort_func`.  If
         * the `chooser` has the sort type set to #GTK_RECENT_SORT_CUSTOM then
         * the chooser will sort using this function.
         * 
         * To the comparison function will be passed two {@link Gtk.RecentInfo} structs and
         * `sort_data`;  `sort_func` should return a positive integer if the first
         * item comes before the second, zero if the two items are equal and
         * a negative integer if the first item comes after the second.
         * @param sort_func the comparison function
         */
        set_sort_func(sort_func: RecentSortFunc): void;

        /**
         * Changes the sorting order of the recently used resources list displayed by
         * `chooser`.
         * @param sort_type sort order that the chooser should use
         */
        set_sort_type(sort_type: RecentSortType): void;

        /**
         * Unselects all the items inside `chooser`.
         */
        unselect_all(): void;

        /**
         * Unselects `uri` inside `chooser`.
         * @param uri a URI
         */
        unselect_uri(uri: string): void;

        /**
         * Adds `filter` to the list of {@link Gtk.RecentFilter} objects held by `chooser`.
         * 
         * If no previous filter objects were defined, this function will call
         * `gtk_recent_chooser_set_filter()`.
         * @param filter a {@link Gtk.RecentFilter}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add_filter(filter: RecentFilter): void;

        /**
         * Gets the URI currently selected by `chooser`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_current_uri(): string;

        /**
         * Gets the list of recently used resources in form of {@link Gtk.RecentInfo} objects.
         * 
         * The return value of this function is affected by the “sort-type” and
         * “limit” properties of `chooser`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_items(): RecentInfo[];

        /**
         * Signal emitted when the user “activates” a recent
         *    item in the recent chooser.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_item_activated(): void;

        /**
         * Gets the {@link Gtk.RecentFilter} objects held by `chooser`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_list_filters(): RecentFilter[];

        /**
         * Removes `filter` from the list of {@link Gtk.RecentFilter} objects held by `chooser`.
         * @param filter a {@link Gtk.RecentFilter}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_remove_filter(filter: RecentFilter): void;

        /**
         * Selects all the items inside `chooser`, if the `chooser` supports
         * multiple selection.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_select_all(): void;

        /**
         * Selects `uri` inside `chooser`.
         * @param uri a URI
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_select_uri(uri: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Signal emitted when there is a change in the
         *    set of selected recently used resources.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_selection_changed(): void;

        /**
         * Sets `uri` as the current URI for `chooser`.
         * @param uri a URI
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_current_uri(uri: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the comparison function used when sorting to be `sort_func`.  If
         * the `chooser` has the sort type set to #GTK_RECENT_SORT_CUSTOM then
         * the chooser will sort using this function.
         * 
         * To the comparison function will be passed two {@link Gtk.RecentInfo} structs and
         * `sort_data`;  `sort_func` should return a positive integer if the first
         * item comes before the second, zero if the two items are equal and
         * a negative integer if the first item comes after the second.
         * @param sort_func the comparison function
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_sort_func(sort_func: RecentSortFunc): void;

        /**
         * Unselects all the items inside `chooser`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_unselect_all(): void;

        /**
         * Unselects `uri` inside `chooser`.
         * @param uri a URI
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_unselect_uri(uri: string): void;
    }


    namespace RecentChooserDialog {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Dialog.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::use-header-bar": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accept-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::application": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::attached-to": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::decorated": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::default-height": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::default-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::deletable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::destroy-with-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-map": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gravity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-resize-grip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-toplevel-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hide-titlebar-when-maximized": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::icon": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::icon-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-active": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-maximized": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::mnemonics-visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::modal": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resizable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-grip-visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::screen": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::skip-pager-hint": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::skip-taskbar-hint": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::startup-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::title": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::transient-for": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::type": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::type-hint": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::urgency-hint": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window-position": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::filter": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::limit": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::local-only": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::recent-manager": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::select-multiple": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::show-icons": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::show-not-found": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::show-private": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::show-tips": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sort-type": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Dialog.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, RecentChooser.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * {@link Gtk.RecentChooserDialog} is a dialog box suitable for displaying the recently
     * used documents.  This widgets works by putting a {@link Gtk.RecentChooserWidget} inside
     * a {@link Gtk.Dialog}.  It exposes the {@link Gtk.RecentChooserIface} interface, so you can use
     * all the {@link Gtk.RecentChooser} functions on the recent chooser dialog as well as
     * those for {@link Gtk.Dialog}.
     * 
     * Note that {@link Gtk.RecentChooserDialog} does not have any methods of its own.
     * Instead, you should use the functions that work on a {@link Gtk.RecentChooser}.
     * 
     * ## Typical usage ## {#gtkrecentchooser-typical-usage}
     * 
     * In the simplest of cases, you can use the following code to use
     * a {@link Gtk.RecentChooserDialog} to select a recently used file:
     * 
     * 
     * ```c
     * GtkWidget *dialog;
     * gint res;
     * 
     * dialog = gtk_recent_chooser_dialog_new ("Recent Documents",
     *                                         parent_window,
     *                                         _("_Cancel"),
     *                                         GTK_RESPONSE_CANCEL,
     *                                         _("_Open"),
     *                                         GTK_RESPONSE_ACCEPT,
     *                                         NULL);
     * 
     * res = gtk_dialog_run (GTK_DIALOG (dialog));
     * if (res == GTK_RESPONSE_ACCEPT)
     *   {
     *     GtkRecentInfo *info;
     *     GtkRecentChooser *chooser = GTK_RECENT_CHOOSER (dialog);
     * 
     *     info = gtk_recent_chooser_get_current_item (chooser);
     *     open_file (gtk_recent_info_get_uri (info));
     *     gtk_recent_info_unref (info);
     *   }
     * 
     * gtk_widget_destroy (dialog);
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * Recently used files are supported since GTK+ 2.10.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class RecentChooserDialog extends Dialog implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable, RecentChooser {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<RecentChooserDialog>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: RecentChooserDialog.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<RecentChooserDialog.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof RecentChooserDialog.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, RecentChooserDialog.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof RecentChooserDialog.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, RecentChooserDialog.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof RecentChooserDialog.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<RecentChooserDialog.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        /**
         * The {@link Gtk.RecentFilter} object to be used when displaying
         * the recently used resources.
         * @since 2.10
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        get filter(): RecentFilter;
        set filter(val: RecentFilter);

        /**
         * The maximum number of recently used resources to be displayed,
         * or -1 to display all items.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default 50
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        get limit(): number;
        set limit(val: number);

        /**
         * Whether this {@link Gtk.RecentChooser} should display only local (file:)
         * resources.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        get local_only(): boolean;
        set local_only(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether this {@link Gtk.RecentChooser} should display only local (file:)
         * resources.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        get localOnly(): boolean;
        set localOnly(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The {@link Gtk.RecentManager} instance used by the {@link Gtk.RecentChooser} to
         * display the list of recently used resources.
         * @since 2.10
         * @construct-only
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        set recent_manager(val: RecentManager);

        /**
         * The {@link Gtk.RecentManager} instance used by the {@link Gtk.RecentChooser} to
         * display the list of recently used resources.
         * @since 2.10
         * @construct-only
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        set recentManager(val: RecentManager);

        /**
         * Allow the user to select multiple resources.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default false
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        get select_multiple(): boolean;
        set select_multiple(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Allow the user to select multiple resources.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default false
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        get selectMultiple(): boolean;
        set selectMultiple(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether this {@link Gtk.RecentChooser} should display an icon near the item.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        get show_icons(): boolean;
        set show_icons(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether this {@link Gtk.RecentChooser} should display an icon near the item.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        get showIcons(): boolean;
        set showIcons(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether this {@link Gtk.RecentChooser} should display the recently used resources
         * even if not present anymore. Setting this to `false` will perform a
         * potentially expensive check on every local resource (every remote
         * resource will always be displayed).
         * @since 2.10
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        get show_not_found(): boolean;
        set show_not_found(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether this {@link Gtk.RecentChooser} should display the recently used resources
         * even if not present anymore. Setting this to `false` will perform a
         * potentially expensive check on every local resource (every remote
         * resource will always be displayed).
         * @since 2.10
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        get showNotFound(): boolean;
        set showNotFound(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        get show_private(): boolean;
        set show_private(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        get showPrivate(): boolean;
        set showPrivate(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether this {@link Gtk.RecentChooser} should display a tooltip containing the
         * full path of the recently used resources.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default false
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        get show_tips(): boolean;
        set show_tips(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether this {@link Gtk.RecentChooser} should display a tooltip containing the
         * full path of the recently used resources.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default false
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        get showTips(): boolean;
        set showTips(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Sorting order to be used when displaying the recently used resources.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default Gtk.RecentSortType.NONE
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        get sort_type(): RecentSortType;
        set sort_type(val: RecentSortType);

        /**
         * Sorting order to be used when displaying the recently used resources.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default Gtk.RecentSortType.NONE
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        get sortType(): RecentSortType;
        set sortType(val: RecentSortType);

        /**
         * Adds `filter` to the list of {@link Gtk.RecentFilter} objects held by `chooser`.
         * 
         * If no previous filter objects were defined, this function will call
         * `gtk_recent_chooser_set_filter()`.
         * @param filter a {@link Gtk.RecentFilter}
         */
        add_filter(filter: RecentFilter): void;

        /**
         * Gets the {@link Gtk.RecentInfo} currently selected by `chooser`.
         * @returns a {@link Gtk.RecentInfo}.  Use `gtk_recent_info_unref()` when   when you have finished using it.
         */
        get_current_item(): RecentInfo;

        /**
         * Gets the URI currently selected by `chooser`.
         * @returns a newly allocated string holding a URI.
         */
        get_current_uri(): string;

        /**
         * Gets the {@link Gtk.RecentFilter} object currently used by `chooser` to affect
         * the display of the recently used resources.
         * @returns a {@link Gtk.RecentFilter} object.
         */
        get_filter(): RecentFilter;

        /**
         * Gets the list of recently used resources in form of {@link Gtk.RecentInfo} objects.
         * 
         * The return value of this function is affected by the “sort-type” and
         * “limit” properties of `chooser`.
         * @returns A newly allocated   list of {@link Gtk.RecentInfo} objects.  You should   use `gtk_recent_info_unref()` on every item of the list, and then free   the list itself using `g_list_free()`.
         */
        get_items(): RecentInfo[];

        /**
         * Gets the number of items returned by `gtk_recent_chooser_get_items()`
         * and `gtk_recent_chooser_get_uris()`.
         * @returns A positive integer, or -1 meaning that all items are   returned.
         */
        get_limit(): number;

        /**
         * Gets whether only local resources should be shown in the recently used
         * resources selector.  See `gtk_recent_chooser_set_local_only()`
         * @returns `true` if only local resources should be shown.
         */
        get_local_only(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets whether `chooser` can select multiple items.
         * @returns `true` if `chooser` can select more than one item.
         */
        get_select_multiple(): boolean;

        /**
         * Retrieves whether `chooser` should show an icon near the resource.
         * @returns `true` if the icons should be displayed, `false` otherwise.
         */
        get_show_icons(): boolean;

        /**
         * Retrieves whether `chooser` should show the recently used resources that
         * were not found.
         * @returns `true` if the resources not found should be displayed, and   `false` otheriwse.
         */
        get_show_not_found(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns whether `chooser` should display recently used resources
         * registered as private.
         * @returns `true` if the recent chooser should show private items,   `false` otherwise.
         */
        get_show_private(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets whether `chooser` should display tooltips containing the full path
         * of a recently user resource.
         * @returns `true` if the recent chooser should show tooltips,   `false` otherwise.
         */
        get_show_tips(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the value set by `gtk_recent_chooser_set_sort_type()`.
         * @returns the sorting order of the `chooser`.
         */
        get_sort_type(): RecentSortType;

        /**
         * Gets the URI of the recently used resources.
         * 
         * The return value of this function is affected by the “sort-type” and “limit”
         * properties of `chooser`.
         * 
         * Since the returned array is `null` terminated, `length` may be `null`.
         * @returns A newly allocated, `null`-terminated array of strings. Use     `g_strfreev()` to free it.
         */
        get_uris(): string[];

        /**
         * Gets the {@link Gtk.RecentFilter} objects held by `chooser`.
         * @returns A singly linked list   of {@link Gtk.RecentFilter} objects.  You   should just free the returned list using `g_slist_free()`.
         */
        list_filters(): RecentFilter[];

        /**
         * Removes `filter` from the list of {@link Gtk.RecentFilter} objects held by `chooser`.
         * @param filter a {@link Gtk.RecentFilter}
         */
        remove_filter(filter: RecentFilter): void;

        /**
         * Selects all the items inside `chooser`, if the `chooser` supports
         * multiple selection.
         */
        select_all(): void;

        /**
         * Selects `uri` inside `chooser`.
         * @param uri a URI
         * @returns `true` if `uri` was found.
         */
        select_uri(uri: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets `uri` as the current URI for `chooser`.
         * @param uri a URI
         * @returns `true` if the URI was found.
         */
        set_current_uri(uri: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets `filter` as the current {@link Gtk.RecentFilter} object used by `chooser`
         * to affect the displayed recently used resources.
         * @param filter a {@link Gtk.RecentFilter}
         */
        set_filter(filter: RecentFilter | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the number of items that should be returned by
         * `gtk_recent_chooser_get_items()` and `gtk_recent_chooser_get_uris()`.
         * @param limit a positive integer, or -1 for all items
         */
        set_limit(limit: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether only local resources, that is resources using the file:// URI
         * scheme, should be shown in the recently used resources selector.  If
         * `local_only` is `true` (the default) then the shown resources are guaranteed
         * to be accessible through the operating system native file system.
         * @param local_only `true` if only local files can be shown
         */
        set_local_only(local_only: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether `chooser` can select multiple items.
         * @param select_multiple `true` if `chooser` can select more than one item
         */
        set_select_multiple(select_multiple: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether `chooser` should show an icon near the resource when
         * displaying it.
         * @param show_icons whether to show an icon near the resource
         */
        set_show_icons(show_icons: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether `chooser` should display the recently used resources that
         * it didn’t find.  This only applies to local resources.
         * @param show_not_found whether to show the local items we didn’t find
         */
        set_show_not_found(show_not_found: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Whether to show recently used resources marked registered as private.
         * @param show_private `true` to show private items, `false` otherwise
         */
        set_show_private(show_private: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether to show a tooltips containing the full path of each
         * recently used resource in a {@link Gtk.RecentChooser} widget.
         * @param show_tips `true` if tooltips should be shown
         */
        set_show_tips(show_tips: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the comparison function used when sorting to be `sort_func`.  If
         * the `chooser` has the sort type set to #GTK_RECENT_SORT_CUSTOM then
         * the chooser will sort using this function.
         * 
         * To the comparison function will be passed two {@link Gtk.RecentInfo} structs and
         * `sort_data`;  `sort_func` should return a positive integer if the first
         * item comes before the second, zero if the two items are equal and
         * a negative integer if the first item comes after the second.
         * @param sort_func the comparison function
         */
        set_sort_func(sort_func: RecentSortFunc): void;

        /**
         * Changes the sorting order of the recently used resources list displayed by
         * `chooser`.
         * @param sort_type sort order that the chooser should use
         */
        set_sort_type(sort_type: RecentSortType): void;

        /**
         * Unselects all the items inside `chooser`.
         */
        unselect_all(): void;

        /**
         * Unselects `uri` inside `chooser`.
         * @param uri a URI
         */
        unselect_uri(uri: string): void;

        /**
         * Adds `filter` to the list of {@link Gtk.RecentFilter} objects held by `chooser`.
         * 
         * If no previous filter objects were defined, this function will call
         * `gtk_recent_chooser_set_filter()`.
         * @param filter a {@link Gtk.RecentFilter}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add_filter(filter: RecentFilter): void;

        /**
         * Gets the URI currently selected by `chooser`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_current_uri(): string;

        /**
         * Gets the list of recently used resources in form of {@link Gtk.RecentInfo} objects.
         * 
         * The return value of this function is affected by the “sort-type” and
         * “limit” properties of `chooser`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_items(): RecentInfo[];

        /**
         * Signal emitted when the user “activates” a recent
         *    item in the recent chooser.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_item_activated(): void;

        /**
         * Gets the {@link Gtk.RecentFilter} objects held by `chooser`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_list_filters(): RecentFilter[];

        /**
         * Removes `filter` from the list of {@link Gtk.RecentFilter} objects held by `chooser`.
         * @param filter a {@link Gtk.RecentFilter}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_remove_filter(filter: RecentFilter): void;

        /**
         * Selects all the items inside `chooser`, if the `chooser` supports
         * multiple selection.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_select_all(): void;

        /**
         * Selects `uri` inside `chooser`.
         * @param uri a URI
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_select_uri(uri: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Signal emitted when there is a change in the
         *    set of selected recently used resources.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_selection_changed(): void;

        /**
         * Sets `uri` as the current URI for `chooser`.
         * @param uri a URI
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_current_uri(uri: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the comparison function used when sorting to be `sort_func`.  If
         * the `chooser` has the sort type set to #GTK_RECENT_SORT_CUSTOM then
         * the chooser will sort using this function.
         * 
         * To the comparison function will be passed two {@link Gtk.RecentInfo} structs and
         * `sort_data`;  `sort_func` should return a positive integer if the first
         * item comes before the second, zero if the two items are equal and
         * a negative integer if the first item comes after the second.
         * @param sort_func the comparison function
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_sort_func(sort_func: RecentSortFunc): void;

        /**
         * Unselects all the items inside `chooser`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_unselect_all(): void;

        /**
         * Unselects `uri` inside `chooser`.
         * @param uri a URI
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_unselect_uri(uri: string): void;
    }


    namespace RecentChooserMenu {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Menu.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::show-numbers": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accel-group": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accel-path": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::active": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::anchor-hints": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::attach-widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::menu-type-hint": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::monitor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::rect-anchor-dx": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::rect-anchor-dy": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::reserve-toggle-size": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tearoff-state": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tearoff-title": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::take-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::related-action": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-action-appearance": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::filter": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::limit": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::local-only": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::recent-manager": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::select-multiple": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::show-icons": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::show-not-found": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::show-private": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::show-tips": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sort-type": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Menu.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Activatable.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, RecentChooser.ConstructorProps {
            show_numbers: boolean;
            showNumbers: boolean;
        }
    }

    /**
     * {@link Gtk.RecentChooserMenu} is a widget suitable for displaying recently used files
     * inside a menu.  It can be used to set a sub-menu of a {@link Gtk.MenuItem} using
     * `gtk_menu_item_set_submenu()`, or as the menu of a {@link Gtk.MenuToolButton}.
     * 
     * Note that {@link Gtk.RecentChooserMenu} does not have any methods of its own. Instead,
     * you should use the functions that work on a {@link Gtk.RecentChooser}.
     * 
     * Note also that {@link Gtk.RecentChooserMenu} does not support multiple filters, as it
     * has no way to let the user choose between them as the {@link Gtk.RecentChooserWidget}
     * and {@link Gtk.RecentChooserDialog} widgets do. Thus using `gtk_recent_chooser_add_filter()`
     * on a {@link Gtk.RecentChooserMenu} widget will yield the same effects as using
     * `gtk_recent_chooser_set_filter()`, replacing any currently set filter
     * with the supplied filter; `gtk_recent_chooser_remove_filter()` will remove
     * any currently set {@link Gtk.RecentFilter} object and will unset the current filter;
     * `gtk_recent_chooser_list_filters()` will return a list containing a single
     * {@link Gtk.RecentFilter} object.
     * 
     * Recently used files are supported since GTK+ 2.10.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class RecentChooserMenu extends Menu implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Activatable, Buildable, RecentChooser {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<RecentChooserMenu>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * Whether the first ten items in the menu should be prepended by
         * a number acting as a unique mnemonic.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default false
         */
        get show_numbers(): boolean;
        set show_numbers(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether the first ten items in the menu should be prepended by
         * a number acting as a unique mnemonic.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default false
         */
        get showNumbers(): boolean;
        set showNumbers(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: RecentChooserMenu.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<RecentChooserMenu.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): RecentChooserMenu;

        static new_for_manager(manager: RecentManager): RecentChooserMenu;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof RecentChooserMenu.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, RecentChooserMenu.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof RecentChooserMenu.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, RecentChooserMenu.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof RecentChooserMenu.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<RecentChooserMenu.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Returns the value set by `gtk_recent_chooser_menu_set_show_numbers()`.
         * @returns `true` if numbers should be shown.
         */
        get_show_numbers(): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets whether a number should be added to the items of `menu`.  The
         * numbers are shown to provide a unique character for a mnemonic to
         * be used inside ten menu item’s label.  Only the first the items
         * get a number to avoid clashes.
         * @param show_numbers whether to show numbers
         */
        set_show_numbers(show_numbers: boolean): void;

        /**
         * The action that this activatable will activate and receive
         * updates from for various states and possibly appearance.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the this property and
         * > call `gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action()` when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get related_action(): Action;
        set related_action(val: Action);

        /**
         * The action that this activatable will activate and receive
         * updates from for various states and possibly appearance.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the this property and
         * > call `gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action()` when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get relatedAction(): Action;
        set relatedAction(val: Action);

        /**
         * Whether this activatable should reset its layout
         * and appearance when setting the related action or when
         * the action changes appearance.
         * 
         * See the {@link Gtk.Action} documentation directly to find which properties
         * should be ignored by the {@link Gtk.Activatable} when this property is `false`.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle this property
         * > and call `gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties()` on the activatable
         * > widget when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get use_action_appearance(): boolean;
        set use_action_appearance(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether this activatable should reset its layout
         * and appearance when setting the related action or when
         * the action changes appearance.
         * 
         * See the {@link Gtk.Action} documentation directly to find which properties
         * should be ignored by the {@link Gtk.Activatable} when this property is `false`.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle this property
         * > and call `gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties()` on the activatable
         * > widget when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get useActionAppearance(): boolean;
        set useActionAppearance(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The {@link Gtk.RecentFilter} object to be used when displaying
         * the recently used resources.
         * @since 2.10
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        get filter(): RecentFilter;
        set filter(val: RecentFilter);

        /**
         * The maximum number of recently used resources to be displayed,
         * or -1 to display all items.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default 50
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        get limit(): number;
        set limit(val: number);

        /**
         * Whether this {@link Gtk.RecentChooser} should display only local (file:)
         * resources.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        get local_only(): boolean;
        set local_only(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether this {@link Gtk.RecentChooser} should display only local (file:)
         * resources.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        get localOnly(): boolean;
        set localOnly(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The {@link Gtk.RecentManager} instance used by the {@link Gtk.RecentChooser} to
         * display the list of recently used resources.
         * @since 2.10
         * @construct-only
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        set recent_manager(val: RecentManager);

        /**
         * The {@link Gtk.RecentManager} instance used by the {@link Gtk.RecentChooser} to
         * display the list of recently used resources.
         * @since 2.10
         * @construct-only
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        set recentManager(val: RecentManager);

        /**
         * Allow the user to select multiple resources.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default false
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        get select_multiple(): boolean;
        set select_multiple(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Allow the user to select multiple resources.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default false
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        get selectMultiple(): boolean;
        set selectMultiple(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether this {@link Gtk.RecentChooser} should display an icon near the item.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        get show_icons(): boolean;
        set show_icons(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether this {@link Gtk.RecentChooser} should display an icon near the item.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        get showIcons(): boolean;
        set showIcons(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether this {@link Gtk.RecentChooser} should display the recently used resources
         * even if not present anymore. Setting this to `false` will perform a
         * potentially expensive check on every local resource (every remote
         * resource will always be displayed).
         * @since 2.10
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        get show_not_found(): boolean;
        set show_not_found(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether this {@link Gtk.RecentChooser} should display the recently used resources
         * even if not present anymore. Setting this to `false` will perform a
         * potentially expensive check on every local resource (every remote
         * resource will always be displayed).
         * @since 2.10
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        get showNotFound(): boolean;
        set showNotFound(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        get show_private(): boolean;
        set show_private(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        get showPrivate(): boolean;
        set showPrivate(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether this {@link Gtk.RecentChooser} should display a tooltip containing the
         * full path of the recently used resources.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default false
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        get show_tips(): boolean;
        set show_tips(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether this {@link Gtk.RecentChooser} should display a tooltip containing the
         * full path of the recently used resources.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default false
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        get showTips(): boolean;
        set showTips(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Sorting order to be used when displaying the recently used resources.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default Gtk.RecentSortType.NONE
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        get sort_type(): RecentSortType;
        set sort_type(val: RecentSortType);

        /**
         * Sorting order to be used when displaying the recently used resources.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default Gtk.RecentSortType.NONE
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        get sortType(): RecentSortType;
        set sortType(val: RecentSortType);

        /**
         * This is a utility function for {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors.
         * 
         * When implementing {@link Gtk.Activatable} you must call this when
         * handling changes of the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action}, and
         * you must also use this to break references in {@link GObject.Object}->dispose().
         * 
         * This function adds a reference to the currently set related
         * action for you, it also makes sure the {@link Gtk.Activatable}->update()
         * method is called when the related {@link Gtk.Action} properties change
         * and registers to the action’s proxy list.
         * 
         * > Be careful to call this before setting the local
         * > copy of the {@link Gtk.Action} property, since this function uses
         * > `gtk_activatable_get_related_action()` to retrieve the
         * > previous action.
         * @param action the {@link Gtk.Action} to set
         */
        do_set_related_action(action: Action): void;

        /**
         * Gets the related {@link Gtk.Action} for `activatable`.
         * @returns the related {@link Gtk.Action} if one is set.
         */
        get_related_action(): Action;

        /**
         * Gets whether this activatable should reset its layout
         * and appearance when setting the related action or when
         * the action changes appearance.
         * @returns whether `activatable` uses its actions appearance.
         */
        get_use_action_appearance(): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the related action on the `activatable` object.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action}
         * > property and call `gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action()` when it changes.
         * @param action the {@link Gtk.Action} to set
         */
        set_related_action(action: Action): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether this activatable should reset its layout and appearance
         * when setting the related action or when the action changes appearance
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} property and call
         * > `gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties()` to update `activatable`
         * > if needed.
         * @param use_appearance whether to use the actions appearance
         */
        set_use_action_appearance(use_appearance: boolean): void;

        /**
         * This is called to update the activatable completely, this is called
         * internally when the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action} property is set
         * or unset and by the implementing class when
         * {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} changes.
         * @param action the related {@link Gtk.Action} or `null`
         */
        sync_action_properties(action: Action | null): void;

        /**
         * This is called to update the activatable completely, this is called
         * internally when the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action} property is set
         * or unset and by the implementing class when
         * {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} changes.
         * @param action the related {@link Gtk.Action} or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_sync_action_properties(action: Action | null): void;

        /**
         * Called to update the activatable when its related action’s properties change.
         * You must check the {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} property only apply action
         * properties that are meant to effect the appearance accordingly.
         * @param action 
         * @param property_name 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_update(action: Action, property_name: string): void;

        /**
         * Adds `filter` to the list of {@link Gtk.RecentFilter} objects held by `chooser`.
         * 
         * If no previous filter objects were defined, this function will call
         * `gtk_recent_chooser_set_filter()`.
         * @param filter a {@link Gtk.RecentFilter}
         */
        add_filter(filter: RecentFilter): void;

        /**
         * Gets the {@link Gtk.RecentInfo} currently selected by `chooser`.
         * @returns a {@link Gtk.RecentInfo}.  Use `gtk_recent_info_unref()` when   when you have finished using it.
         */
        get_current_item(): RecentInfo;

        /**
         * Gets the URI currently selected by `chooser`.
         * @returns a newly allocated string holding a URI.
         */
        get_current_uri(): string;

        /**
         * Gets the {@link Gtk.RecentFilter} object currently used by `chooser` to affect
         * the display of the recently used resources.
         * @returns a {@link Gtk.RecentFilter} object.
         */
        get_filter(): RecentFilter;

        /**
         * Gets the list of recently used resources in form of {@link Gtk.RecentInfo} objects.
         * 
         * The return value of this function is affected by the “sort-type” and
         * “limit” properties of `chooser`.
         * @returns A newly allocated   list of {@link Gtk.RecentInfo} objects.  You should   use `gtk_recent_info_unref()` on every item of the list, and then free   the list itself using `g_list_free()`.
         */
        get_items(): RecentInfo[];

        /**
         * Gets the number of items returned by `gtk_recent_chooser_get_items()`
         * and `gtk_recent_chooser_get_uris()`.
         * @returns A positive integer, or -1 meaning that all items are   returned.
         */
        get_limit(): number;

        /**
         * Gets whether only local resources should be shown in the recently used
         * resources selector.  See `gtk_recent_chooser_set_local_only()`
         * @returns `true` if only local resources should be shown.
         */
        get_local_only(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets whether `chooser` can select multiple items.
         * @returns `true` if `chooser` can select more than one item.
         */
        get_select_multiple(): boolean;

        /**
         * Retrieves whether `chooser` should show an icon near the resource.
         * @returns `true` if the icons should be displayed, `false` otherwise.
         */
        get_show_icons(): boolean;

        /**
         * Retrieves whether `chooser` should show the recently used resources that
         * were not found.
         * @returns `true` if the resources not found should be displayed, and   `false` otheriwse.
         */
        get_show_not_found(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns whether `chooser` should display recently used resources
         * registered as private.
         * @returns `true` if the recent chooser should show private items,   `false` otherwise.
         */
        get_show_private(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets whether `chooser` should display tooltips containing the full path
         * of a recently user resource.
         * @returns `true` if the recent chooser should show tooltips,   `false` otherwise.
         */
        get_show_tips(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the value set by `gtk_recent_chooser_set_sort_type()`.
         * @returns the sorting order of the `chooser`.
         */
        get_sort_type(): RecentSortType;

        /**
         * Gets the URI of the recently used resources.
         * 
         * The return value of this function is affected by the “sort-type” and “limit”
         * properties of `chooser`.
         * 
         * Since the returned array is `null` terminated, `length` may be `null`.
         * @returns A newly allocated, `null`-terminated array of strings. Use     `g_strfreev()` to free it.
         */
        get_uris(): string[];

        /**
         * Gets the {@link Gtk.RecentFilter} objects held by `chooser`.
         * @returns A singly linked list   of {@link Gtk.RecentFilter} objects.  You   should just free the returned list using `g_slist_free()`.
         */
        list_filters(): RecentFilter[];

        /**
         * Removes `filter` from the list of {@link Gtk.RecentFilter} objects held by `chooser`.
         * @param filter a {@link Gtk.RecentFilter}
         */
        remove_filter(filter: RecentFilter): void;

        /**
         * Selects all the items inside `chooser`, if the `chooser` supports
         * multiple selection.
         */
        select_all(): void;

        /**
         * Selects `uri` inside `chooser`.
         * @param uri a URI
         * @returns `true` if `uri` was found.
         */
        select_uri(uri: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets `uri` as the current URI for `chooser`.
         * @param uri a URI
         * @returns `true` if the URI was found.
         */
        set_current_uri(uri: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets `filter` as the current {@link Gtk.RecentFilter} object used by `chooser`
         * to affect the displayed recently used resources.
         * @param filter a {@link Gtk.RecentFilter}
         */
        set_filter(filter: RecentFilter | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the number of items that should be returned by
         * `gtk_recent_chooser_get_items()` and `gtk_recent_chooser_get_uris()`.
         * @param limit a positive integer, or -1 for all items
         */
        set_limit(limit: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether only local resources, that is resources using the file:// URI
         * scheme, should be shown in the recently used resources selector.  If
         * `local_only` is `true` (the default) then the shown resources are guaranteed
         * to be accessible through the operating system native file system.
         * @param local_only `true` if only local files can be shown
         */
        set_local_only(local_only: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether `chooser` can select multiple items.
         * @param select_multiple `true` if `chooser` can select more than one item
         */
        set_select_multiple(select_multiple: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether `chooser` should show an icon near the resource when
         * displaying it.
         * @param show_icons whether to show an icon near the resource
         */
        set_show_icons(show_icons: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether `chooser` should display the recently used resources that
         * it didn’t find.  This only applies to local resources.
         * @param show_not_found whether to show the local items we didn’t find
         */
        set_show_not_found(show_not_found: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Whether to show recently used resources marked registered as private.
         * @param show_private `true` to show private items, `false` otherwise
         */
        set_show_private(show_private: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether to show a tooltips containing the full path of each
         * recently used resource in a {@link Gtk.RecentChooser} widget.
         * @param show_tips `true` if tooltips should be shown
         */
        set_show_tips(show_tips: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the comparison function used when sorting to be `sort_func`.  If
         * the `chooser` has the sort type set to #GTK_RECENT_SORT_CUSTOM then
         * the chooser will sort using this function.
         * 
         * To the comparison function will be passed two {@link Gtk.RecentInfo} structs and
         * `sort_data`;  `sort_func` should return a positive integer if the first
         * item comes before the second, zero if the two items are equal and
         * a negative integer if the first item comes after the second.
         * @param sort_func the comparison function
         */
        set_sort_func(sort_func: RecentSortFunc): void;

        /**
         * Changes the sorting order of the recently used resources list displayed by
         * `chooser`.
         * @param sort_type sort order that the chooser should use
         */
        set_sort_type(sort_type: RecentSortType): void;

        /**
         * Unselects all the items inside `chooser`.
         */
        unselect_all(): void;

        /**
         * Unselects `uri` inside `chooser`.
         * @param uri a URI
         */
        unselect_uri(uri: string): void;

        /**
         * Adds `filter` to the list of {@link Gtk.RecentFilter} objects held by `chooser`.
         * 
         * If no previous filter objects were defined, this function will call
         * `gtk_recent_chooser_set_filter()`.
         * @param filter a {@link Gtk.RecentFilter}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add_filter(filter: RecentFilter): void;

        /**
         * Gets the URI currently selected by `chooser`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_current_uri(): string;

        /**
         * Gets the list of recently used resources in form of {@link Gtk.RecentInfo} objects.
         * 
         * The return value of this function is affected by the “sort-type” and
         * “limit” properties of `chooser`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_items(): RecentInfo[];

        /**
         * Signal emitted when the user “activates” a recent
         *    item in the recent chooser.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_item_activated(): void;

        /**
         * Gets the {@link Gtk.RecentFilter} objects held by `chooser`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_list_filters(): RecentFilter[];

        /**
         * Removes `filter` from the list of {@link Gtk.RecentFilter} objects held by `chooser`.
         * @param filter a {@link Gtk.RecentFilter}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_remove_filter(filter: RecentFilter): void;

        /**
         * Selects all the items inside `chooser`, if the `chooser` supports
         * multiple selection.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_select_all(): void;

        /**
         * Selects `uri` inside `chooser`.
         * @param uri a URI
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_select_uri(uri: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Signal emitted when there is a change in the
         *    set of selected recently used resources.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_selection_changed(): void;

        /**
         * Sets `uri` as the current URI for `chooser`.
         * @param uri a URI
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_current_uri(uri: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the comparison function used when sorting to be `sort_func`.  If
         * the `chooser` has the sort type set to #GTK_RECENT_SORT_CUSTOM then
         * the chooser will sort using this function.
         * 
         * To the comparison function will be passed two {@link Gtk.RecentInfo} structs and
         * `sort_data`;  `sort_func` should return a positive integer if the first
         * item comes before the second, zero if the two items are equal and
         * a negative integer if the first item comes after the second.
         * @param sort_func the comparison function
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_sort_func(sort_func: RecentSortFunc): void;

        /**
         * Unselects all the items inside `chooser`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_unselect_all(): void;

        /**
         * Unselects `uri` inside `chooser`.
         * @param uri a URI
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_unselect_uri(uri: string): void;
    }


    namespace RecentChooserWidget {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Box.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::baseline-position": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::homogeneous": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::spacing": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::orientation": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::filter": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::limit": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::local-only": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::recent-manager": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::select-multiple": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::show-icons": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::show-not-found": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::show-private": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::show-tips": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sort-type": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Box.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, Orientable.ConstructorProps, RecentChooser.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * {@link Gtk.RecentChooserWidget} is a widget suitable for selecting recently used
     * files.  It is the main building block of a {@link Gtk.RecentChooserDialog}.  Most
     * applications will only need to use the latter; you can use
     * {@link Gtk.RecentChooserWidget} as part of a larger window if you have special needs.
     * 
     * Note that {@link Gtk.RecentChooserWidget} does not have any methods of its own.
     * Instead, you should use the functions that work on a {@link Gtk.RecentChooser}.
     * 
     * Recently used files are supported since GTK+ 2.10.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class RecentChooserWidget extends Box implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable, Orientable, RecentChooser {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<RecentChooserWidget>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: RecentChooserWidget.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<RecentChooserWidget.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): RecentChooserWidget;

        static new_for_manager(manager: RecentManager): RecentChooserWidget;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof RecentChooserWidget.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, RecentChooserWidget.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof RecentChooserWidget.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, RecentChooserWidget.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof RecentChooserWidget.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<RecentChooserWidget.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        /**
         * The orientation of the orientable.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default Gtk.Orientation.HORIZONTAL
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Orientable
         */
        get orientation(): Orientation;
        set orientation(val: Orientation);

        /**
         * The {@link Gtk.RecentFilter} object to be used when displaying
         * the recently used resources.
         * @since 2.10
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        get filter(): RecentFilter;
        set filter(val: RecentFilter);

        /**
         * The maximum number of recently used resources to be displayed,
         * or -1 to display all items.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default 50
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        get limit(): number;
        set limit(val: number);

        /**
         * Whether this {@link Gtk.RecentChooser} should display only local (file:)
         * resources.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        get local_only(): boolean;
        set local_only(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether this {@link Gtk.RecentChooser} should display only local (file:)
         * resources.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        get localOnly(): boolean;
        set localOnly(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The {@link Gtk.RecentManager} instance used by the {@link Gtk.RecentChooser} to
         * display the list of recently used resources.
         * @since 2.10
         * @construct-only
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        set recent_manager(val: RecentManager);

        /**
         * The {@link Gtk.RecentManager} instance used by the {@link Gtk.RecentChooser} to
         * display the list of recently used resources.
         * @since 2.10
         * @construct-only
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        set recentManager(val: RecentManager);

        /**
         * Allow the user to select multiple resources.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default false
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        get select_multiple(): boolean;
        set select_multiple(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Allow the user to select multiple resources.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default false
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        get selectMultiple(): boolean;
        set selectMultiple(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether this {@link Gtk.RecentChooser} should display an icon near the item.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        get show_icons(): boolean;
        set show_icons(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether this {@link Gtk.RecentChooser} should display an icon near the item.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        get showIcons(): boolean;
        set showIcons(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether this {@link Gtk.RecentChooser} should display the recently used resources
         * even if not present anymore. Setting this to `false` will perform a
         * potentially expensive check on every local resource (every remote
         * resource will always be displayed).
         * @since 2.10
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        get show_not_found(): boolean;
        set show_not_found(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether this {@link Gtk.RecentChooser} should display the recently used resources
         * even if not present anymore. Setting this to `false` will perform a
         * potentially expensive check on every local resource (every remote
         * resource will always be displayed).
         * @since 2.10
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        get showNotFound(): boolean;
        set showNotFound(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        get show_private(): boolean;
        set show_private(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        get showPrivate(): boolean;
        set showPrivate(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether this {@link Gtk.RecentChooser} should display a tooltip containing the
         * full path of the recently used resources.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default false
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        get show_tips(): boolean;
        set show_tips(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether this {@link Gtk.RecentChooser} should display a tooltip containing the
         * full path of the recently used resources.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default false
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        get showTips(): boolean;
        set showTips(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Sorting order to be used when displaying the recently used resources.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default Gtk.RecentSortType.NONE
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        get sort_type(): RecentSortType;
        set sort_type(val: RecentSortType);

        /**
         * Sorting order to be used when displaying the recently used resources.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default Gtk.RecentSortType.NONE
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.RecentChooser
         */
        get sortType(): RecentSortType;
        set sortType(val: RecentSortType);

        /**
         * Retrieves the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @returns the orientation of the `orientable`.
         */
        get_orientation(): Orientation;

        /**
         * Sets the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @param orientation the orientable’s new orientation.
         */
        set_orientation(orientation: Orientation): void;

        /**
         * Adds `filter` to the list of {@link Gtk.RecentFilter} objects held by `chooser`.
         * 
         * If no previous filter objects were defined, this function will call
         * `gtk_recent_chooser_set_filter()`.
         * @param filter a {@link Gtk.RecentFilter}
         */
        add_filter(filter: RecentFilter): void;

        /**
         * Gets the {@link Gtk.RecentInfo} currently selected by `chooser`.
         * @returns a {@link Gtk.RecentInfo}.  Use `gtk_recent_info_unref()` when   when you have finished using it.
         */
        get_current_item(): RecentInfo;

        /**
         * Gets the URI currently selected by `chooser`.
         * @returns a newly allocated string holding a URI.
         */
        get_current_uri(): string;

        /**
         * Gets the {@link Gtk.RecentFilter} object currently used by `chooser` to affect
         * the display of the recently used resources.
         * @returns a {@link Gtk.RecentFilter} object.
         */
        get_filter(): RecentFilter;

        /**
         * Gets the list of recently used resources in form of {@link Gtk.RecentInfo} objects.
         * 
         * The return value of this function is affected by the “sort-type” and
         * “limit” properties of `chooser`.
         * @returns A newly allocated   list of {@link Gtk.RecentInfo} objects.  You should   use `gtk_recent_info_unref()` on every item of the list, and then free   the list itself using `g_list_free()`.
         */
        get_items(): RecentInfo[];

        /**
         * Gets the number of items returned by `gtk_recent_chooser_get_items()`
         * and `gtk_recent_chooser_get_uris()`.
         * @returns A positive integer, or -1 meaning that all items are   returned.
         */
        get_limit(): number;

        /**
         * Gets whether only local resources should be shown in the recently used
         * resources selector.  See `gtk_recent_chooser_set_local_only()`
         * @returns `true` if only local resources should be shown.
         */
        get_local_only(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets whether `chooser` can select multiple items.
         * @returns `true` if `chooser` can select more than one item.
         */
        get_select_multiple(): boolean;

        /**
         * Retrieves whether `chooser` should show an icon near the resource.
         * @returns `true` if the icons should be displayed, `false` otherwise.
         */
        get_show_icons(): boolean;

        /**
         * Retrieves whether `chooser` should show the recently used resources that
         * were not found.
         * @returns `true` if the resources not found should be displayed, and   `false` otheriwse.
         */
        get_show_not_found(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns whether `chooser` should display recently used resources
         * registered as private.
         * @returns `true` if the recent chooser should show private items,   `false` otherwise.
         */
        get_show_private(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets whether `chooser` should display tooltips containing the full path
         * of a recently user resource.
         * @returns `true` if the recent chooser should show tooltips,   `false` otherwise.
         */
        get_show_tips(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the value set by `gtk_recent_chooser_set_sort_type()`.
         * @returns the sorting order of the `chooser`.
         */
        get_sort_type(): RecentSortType;

        /**
         * Gets the URI of the recently used resources.
         * 
         * The return value of this function is affected by the “sort-type” and “limit”
         * properties of `chooser`.
         * 
         * Since the returned array is `null` terminated, `length` may be `null`.
         * @returns A newly allocated, `null`-terminated array of strings. Use     `g_strfreev()` to free it.
         */
        get_uris(): string[];

        /**
         * Gets the {@link Gtk.RecentFilter} objects held by `chooser`.
         * @returns A singly linked list   of {@link Gtk.RecentFilter} objects.  You   should just free the returned list using `g_slist_free()`.
         */
        list_filters(): RecentFilter[];

        /**
         * Removes `filter` from the list of {@link Gtk.RecentFilter} objects held by `chooser`.
         * @param filter a {@link Gtk.RecentFilter}
         */
        remove_filter(filter: RecentFilter): void;

        /**
         * Selects all the items inside `chooser`, if the `chooser` supports
         * multiple selection.
         */
        select_all(): void;

        /**
         * Selects `uri` inside `chooser`.
         * @param uri a URI
         * @returns `true` if `uri` was found.
         */
        select_uri(uri: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets `uri` as the current URI for `chooser`.
         * @param uri a URI
         * @returns `true` if the URI was found.
         */
        set_current_uri(uri: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets `filter` as the current {@link Gtk.RecentFilter} object used by `chooser`
         * to affect the displayed recently used resources.
         * @param filter a {@link Gtk.RecentFilter}
         */
        set_filter(filter: RecentFilter | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the number of items that should be returned by
         * `gtk_recent_chooser_get_items()` and `gtk_recent_chooser_get_uris()`.
         * @param limit a positive integer, or -1 for all items
         */
        set_limit(limit: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether only local resources, that is resources using the file:// URI
         * scheme, should be shown in the recently used resources selector.  If
         * `local_only` is `true` (the default) then the shown resources are guaranteed
         * to be accessible through the operating system native file system.
         * @param local_only `true` if only local files can be shown
         */
        set_local_only(local_only: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether `chooser` can select multiple items.
         * @param select_multiple `true` if `chooser` can select more than one item
         */
        set_select_multiple(select_multiple: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether `chooser` should show an icon near the resource when
         * displaying it.
         * @param show_icons whether to show an icon near the resource
         */
        set_show_icons(show_icons: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether `chooser` should display the recently used resources that
         * it didn’t find.  This only applies to local resources.
         * @param show_not_found whether to show the local items we didn’t find
         */
        set_show_not_found(show_not_found: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Whether to show recently used resources marked registered as private.
         * @param show_private `true` to show private items, `false` otherwise
         */
        set_show_private(show_private: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether to show a tooltips containing the full path of each
         * recently used resource in a {@link Gtk.RecentChooser} widget.
         * @param show_tips `true` if tooltips should be shown
         */
        set_show_tips(show_tips: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the comparison function used when sorting to be `sort_func`.  If
         * the `chooser` has the sort type set to #GTK_RECENT_SORT_CUSTOM then
         * the chooser will sort using this function.
         * 
         * To the comparison function will be passed two {@link Gtk.RecentInfo} structs and
         * `sort_data`;  `sort_func` should return a positive integer if the first
         * item comes before the second, zero if the two items are equal and
         * a negative integer if the first item comes after the second.
         * @param sort_func the comparison function
         */
        set_sort_func(sort_func: RecentSortFunc): void;

        /**
         * Changes the sorting order of the recently used resources list displayed by
         * `chooser`.
         * @param sort_type sort order that the chooser should use
         */
        set_sort_type(sort_type: RecentSortType): void;

        /**
         * Unselects all the items inside `chooser`.
         */
        unselect_all(): void;

        /**
         * Unselects `uri` inside `chooser`.
         * @param uri a URI
         */
        unselect_uri(uri: string): void;

        /**
         * Adds `filter` to the list of {@link Gtk.RecentFilter} objects held by `chooser`.
         * 
         * If no previous filter objects were defined, this function will call
         * `gtk_recent_chooser_set_filter()`.
         * @param filter a {@link Gtk.RecentFilter}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add_filter(filter: RecentFilter): void;

        /**
         * Gets the URI currently selected by `chooser`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_current_uri(): string;

        /**
         * Gets the list of recently used resources in form of {@link Gtk.RecentInfo} objects.
         * 
         * The return value of this function is affected by the “sort-type” and
         * “limit” properties of `chooser`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_items(): RecentInfo[];

        /**
         * Signal emitted when the user “activates” a recent
         *    item in the recent chooser.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_item_activated(): void;

        /**
         * Gets the {@link Gtk.RecentFilter} objects held by `chooser`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_list_filters(): RecentFilter[];

        /**
         * Removes `filter` from the list of {@link Gtk.RecentFilter} objects held by `chooser`.
         * @param filter a {@link Gtk.RecentFilter}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_remove_filter(filter: RecentFilter): void;

        /**
         * Selects all the items inside `chooser`, if the `chooser` supports
         * multiple selection.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_select_all(): void;

        /**
         * Selects `uri` inside `chooser`.
         * @param uri a URI
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_select_uri(uri: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Signal emitted when there is a change in the
         *    set of selected recently used resources.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_selection_changed(): void;

        /**
         * Sets `uri` as the current URI for `chooser`.
         * @param uri a URI
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_current_uri(uri: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the comparison function used when sorting to be `sort_func`.  If
         * the `chooser` has the sort type set to #GTK_RECENT_SORT_CUSTOM then
         * the chooser will sort using this function.
         * 
         * To the comparison function will be passed two {@link Gtk.RecentInfo} structs and
         * `sort_data`;  `sort_func` should return a positive integer if the first
         * item comes before the second, zero if the two items are equal and
         * a negative integer if the first item comes after the second.
         * @param sort_func the comparison function
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_sort_func(sort_func: RecentSortFunc): void;

        /**
         * Unselects all the items inside `chooser`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_unselect_all(): void;

        /**
         * Unselects `uri` inside `chooser`.
         * @param uri a URI
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_unselect_uri(uri: string): void;
    }


    namespace RecentFilter {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends GObject.InitiallyUnowned.SignalSignatures {}

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.InitiallyUnowned.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * A {@link Gtk.RecentFilter} can be used to restrict the files being shown
     * in a {@link Gtk.RecentChooser}.  Files can be filtered based on their name
     * (with `gtk_recent_filter_add_pattern()`), on their mime type (with
     * `gtk_file_filter_add_mime_type()`), on the application that has
     * registered them (with `gtk_recent_filter_add_application()`), or by
     * a custom filter function (with `gtk_recent_filter_add_custom()`).
     * 
     * Filtering by mime type handles aliasing and subclassing of mime
     * types; e.g. a filter for text/plain also matches a file with mime
     * type application/rtf, since application/rtf is a subclass of text/plain.
     * Note that {@link Gtk.RecentFilter} allows wildcards for the subtype of a
     * mime type, so you can e.g. filter for image/\*.
     * 
     * Normally, filters are used by adding them to a {@link Gtk.RecentChooser},
     * see `gtk_recent_chooser_add_filter()`, but it is also possible to
     * manually use a filter on a file with `gtk_recent_filter_filter()`.
     * 
     * Recently used files are supported since GTK+ 2.10.
     * 
     * ## GtkRecentFilter as GtkBuildable
     * 
     * The GtkRecentFilter implementation of the GtkBuildable interface
     * supports adding rules using the `<mime-types>`, `<patterns>` and
     * `<applications>` elements and listing the rules within. Specifying
     * a `<mime-type>`, `<pattern>` or `<application>` has the same effect as
     * calling `gtk_recent_filter_add_mime_type()`,
     * `gtk_recent_filter_add_pattern()` or `gtk_recent_filter_add_application()`.
     * 
     * An example of a UI definition fragment specifying {@link Gtk.RecentFilter}
     * rules:
     * 
     * 
     * ```xml
     * <object class="GtkRecentFilter">
     *   <mime-types>
     *     <mime-type>text/plain</mime-type>
     *     <mime-type>image/png</mime-type>
     *   </mime-types>
     *   <patterns>
     *     <pattern>*.txt</pattern>
     *     <pattern>*.png</pattern>
     *   </patterns>
     *   <applications>
     *     <application>gimp</application>
     *     <application>gedit</application>
     *     <application>glade</application>
     *   </applications>
     * </object>
     * ```
     * 
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class RecentFilter extends GObject.InitiallyUnowned implements Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<RecentFilter>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: RecentFilter.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<RecentFilter.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): RecentFilter;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof RecentFilter.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, RecentFilter.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof RecentFilter.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, RecentFilter.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof RecentFilter.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<RecentFilter.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Adds a rule that allows resources based on their age - that is, the number
         * of days elapsed since they were last modified.
         * @param days number of days
         */
        add_age(days: number): void;

        /**
         * Adds a rule that allows resources based on the name of the application
         * that has registered them.
         * @param application an application name
         */
        add_application(application: string): void;

        /**
         * Adds a rule to a filter that allows resources based on a custom callback
         * function. The bitfield `needed` which is passed in provides information
         * about what sorts of information that the filter function needs;
         * this allows GTK+ to avoid retrieving expensive information when
         * it isn’t needed by the filter.
         * @param needed bitfield of flags indicating the information that the custom          filter function needs.
         * @param func callback function; if the function returns `true`, then   the file will be displayed.
         */
        add_custom(needed: RecentFilterFlags, func: RecentFilterFunc): void;

        /**
         * Adds a rule that allows resources based on the name of the group
         * to which they belong
         * @param group a group name
         */
        add_group(group: string): void;

        /**
         * Adds a rule that allows resources based on their registered MIME type.
         * @param mime_type a MIME type
         */
        add_mime_type(mime_type: string): void;

        /**
         * Adds a rule that allows resources based on a pattern matching their
         * display name.
         * @param pattern a file pattern
         */
        add_pattern(pattern: string): void;

        /**
         * Adds a rule allowing image files in the formats supported
         * by GdkPixbuf.
         */
        add_pixbuf_formats(): void;

        /**
         * Tests whether a file should be displayed according to `filter`.
         * The {@link Gtk.RecentFilterInfo} `filter_info` should include
         * the fields returned from `gtk_recent_filter_get_needed()`, and
         * must set the {@link Gtk.RecentFilterInfo}.contains field of `filter_info`
         * to indicate which fields have been set.
         * 
         * This function will not typically be used by applications; it
         * is intended principally for use in the implementation of
         * {@link Gtk.RecentChooser}.
         * @param filter_info a {@link Gtk.RecentFilterInfo} containing information   about a recently used resource
         * @returns `true` if the file should be displayed
         */
        filter(filter_info: RecentFilterInfo): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the human-readable name for the filter.
         * See `gtk_recent_filter_set_name()`.
         * @returns the name of the filter, or `null`.  The returned string   is owned by the filter object and should not be freed.
         */
        get_name(): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
    // Conflicted with Gtk.Buildable.get_name
        get_name(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Gets the fields that need to be filled in for the {@link Gtk.RecentFilterInfo}
         * passed to `gtk_recent_filter_filter()`
         * 
         * This function will not typically be used by applications; it
         * is intended principally for use in the implementation of
         * {@link Gtk.RecentChooser}.
         * @returns bitfield of flags indicating needed fields when   calling `gtk_recent_filter_filter()`
         */
        get_needed(): RecentFilterFlags;

        /**
         * Sets the human-readable name of the filter; this is the string
         * that will be displayed in the recently used resources selector
         * user interface if there is a selectable list of filters.
         * @param name then human readable name of `filter`
         */
        set_name(name: string): void;

        /**
         * Adds a child to `buildable`. `type` is an optional string
         * describing how the child should be added.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child to add
         * @param type kind of child or `null`
         */
        add_child(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object, type: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Constructs a child of `buildable` with the name `name`.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} calls this function if a “constructor” has been
         * specified in the UI definition.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param name name of child to construct
         * @returns the constructed child
         */
        construct_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, name: string): T;

        /**
         * This is similar to `gtk_buildable_parser_finished()` but is
         * called once for each custom tag handled by the `buildable`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname the name of the tag
         * @param data user data created in custom_tag_start
         */
        custom_finished(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
         * the buildable.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @param data user data that will be passed in to parser functions
         */
        custom_tag_end(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called for each unknown element under `<child>`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @returns `true` if a object has a custom implementation, `false`          if it doesn't.
         */
        custom_tag_start(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string): [boolean, GLib.MarkupParser, null];

        /**
         * Get the internal child called `childname` of the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param childname name of child
         * @returns the internal child of the buildable object
         */
        get_internal_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, childname: string): T;

        /**
         * Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI].
         * Note that this will be called once for each time
         * `gtk_builder_add_from_file()` or `gtk_builder_add_from_string()`
         * is called on a builder.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         */
        parser_finished(builder: Builder): void;

        /**
         * Sets the property name `name` to `value` on the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param name name of property
         * @param value value of property
         */
        set_buildable_property(builder: Builder, name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;

        /**
         * Adds a child to `buildable`. `type` is an optional string
         * describing how the child should be added.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child to add
         * @param type kind of child or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add_child(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object, type: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Constructs a child of `buildable` with the name `name`.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} calls this function if a “constructor” has been
         * specified in the UI definition.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param name name of child to construct
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_construct_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, name: string): T;

        /**
         * This is similar to `gtk_buildable_parser_finished()` but is
         * called once for each custom tag handled by the `buildable`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname the name of the tag
         * @param data user data created in custom_tag_start
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_finished(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
         * the buildable.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @param data user data that will be passed in to parser functions
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_tag_end(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called for each unknown element under `<child>`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_tag_start(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string): [boolean, GLib.MarkupParser, never];

        /**
         * Get the internal child called `childname` of the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param childname name of child
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_internal_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, childname: string): T;

        /**
         * Gets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} sets the name based on the
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI]
         * used to construct the `buildable`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_name(): string;

        /**
         * Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI].
         * Note that this will be called once for each time
         * `gtk_builder_add_from_file()` or `gtk_builder_add_from_string()`
         * is called on a builder.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_parser_finished(builder: Builder): void;

        /**
         * Sets the property name `name` to `value` on the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param name name of property
         * @param value value of property
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_buildable_property(builder: Builder, name: string, value: unknown): void;

        /**
         * Sets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * @param name name to set
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_name(name: string): void;
    }


    namespace RecentManager {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends GObject.Object.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * Emitted when the current recently used resources manager changes
             * its contents, either by calling `gtk_recent_manager_add_item()` or
             * by another application.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.10
             * @run-first
             */
            changed: () => void;
            "notify::filename": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::size": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.Object.ConstructorProps {
            filename: string;
            size: number;
        }
    }

    /**
     * {@link Gtk.RecentManager} provides a facility for adding, removing and
     * looking up recently used files. Each recently used file is
     * identified by its URI, and has meta-data associated to it, like
     * the names and command lines of the applications that have
     * registered it, the number of time each application has registered
     * the same file, the mime type of the file and whether the file
     * should be displayed only by the applications that have
     * registered it.
     * 
     * The recently used files list is per user.
     * 
     * The {@link Gtk.RecentManager} acts like a database of all the recently
     * used files. You can create new {@link Gtk.RecentManager} objects, but
     * it is more efficient to use the default manager created by GTK+.
     * 
     * Adding a new recently used file is as simple as:
     * 
     * 
     * ```c
     * GtkRecentManager *manager;
     * 
     * manager = gtk_recent_manager_get_default ();
     * gtk_recent_manager_add_item (manager, file_uri);
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * The {@link Gtk.RecentManager} will try to gather all the needed information
     * from the file itself through GIO.
     * 
     * Looking up the meta-data associated with a recently used file
     * given its URI requires calling `gtk_recent_manager_lookup_item()`:
     * 
     * 
     * ```c
     * GtkRecentManager *manager;
     * GtkRecentInfo *info;
     * GError *error = NULL;
     * 
     * manager = gtk_recent_manager_get_default ();
     * info = gtk_recent_manager_lookup_item (manager, file_uri, &error);
     * if (error)
     *   {
     *     g_warning ("Could not find the file: %s", error->message);
     *     g_error_free (error);
     *   }
     * else
     *  {
     *    // Use the info object
     *    gtk_recent_info_unref (info);
     *  }
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * In order to retrieve the list of recently used files, you can use
     * `gtk_recent_manager_get_items()`, which returns a list of {@link Gtk.RecentInfo}-structs.
     * 
     * A {@link Gtk.RecentManager} is the model used to populate the contents of
     * one, or more {@link Gtk.RecentChooser} implementations.
     * 
     * Note that the maximum age of the recently used files list is
     * controllable through the {@link Gtk.Settings.gtk_recent_files_max_age}
     * property.
     * 
     * Recently used files are supported since GTK+ 2.10.
     * @gir-type Class
     * @since 2.10
     */
    class RecentManager extends GObject.Object {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<RecentManager>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * The full path to the file to be used to store and read the
         * recently used resources list
         * @since 2.10
         * @construct-only
         * @default null
         */
        get filename(): string;

        /**
         * The size of the recently used resources list.
         * @since 2.10
         * @read-only
         * @default 0
         */
        get size(): number;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: RecentManager.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<RecentManager.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): RecentManager;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof RecentManager.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, RecentManager.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof RecentManager.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, RecentManager.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof RecentManager.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<RecentManager.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Static methods
        /**
         * Gets a unique instance of {@link Gtk.RecentManager}, that you can share
         * in your application without caring about memory management.
         */
        static get_default(): RecentManager;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_changed(): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Adds a new resource, pointed by `uri`, into the recently used
         * resources list, using the metadata specified inside the
         * {@link Gtk.RecentData}-struct passed in `recent_data`.
         * 
         * The passed URI will be used to identify this resource inside the
         * list.
         * 
         * In order to register the new recently used resource, metadata about
         * the resource must be passed as well as the URI; the metadata is
         * stored in a {@link Gtk.RecentData}-struct, which must contain the MIME
         * type of the resource pointed by the URI; the name of the application
         * that is registering the item, and a command line to be used when
         * launching the item.
         * 
         * Optionally, a {@link Gtk.RecentData}-struct might contain a UTF-8 string
         * to be used when viewing the item instead of the last component of
         * the URI; a short description of the item; whether the item should
         * be considered private - that is, should be displayed only by the
         * applications that have registered it.
         * @param uri a valid URI
         * @param recent_data metadata of the resource
         * @returns `true` if the new item was successfully added to the     recently used resources list, `false` otherwise
         */
        add_full(uri: string, recent_data: RecentData): boolean;

        /**
         * Adds a new resource, pointed by `uri`, into the recently used
         * resources list.
         * 
         * This function automatically retrieves some of the needed
         * metadata and setting other metadata to common default values;
         * it then feeds the data to `gtk_recent_manager_add_full()`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_recent_manager_add_full()` if you want to explicitly
         * define the metadata for the resource pointed by `uri`.
         * @param uri a valid URI
         * @returns `true` if the new item was successfully added   to the recently used resources list
         */
        add_item(uri: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the list of recently used resources.
         * @returns a list of   newly allocated {@link Gtk.RecentInfo} objects. Use   `gtk_recent_info_unref()` on each item inside the list, and then   free the list itself using `g_list_free()`.
         */
        get_items(): RecentInfo[];

        /**
         * Checks whether there is a recently used resource registered
         * with `uri` inside the recent manager.
         * @param uri a URI
         * @returns `true` if the resource was found, `false` otherwise
         */
        has_item(uri: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Searches for a URI inside the recently used resources list, and
         * returns a {@link Gtk.RecentInfo}-struct containing informations about the resource
         * like its MIME type, or its display name.
         * @param uri a URI
         * @returns a {@link Gtk.RecentInfo}-struct containing information   about the resource pointed by `uri`, or `null` if the URI was   not registered in the recently used resources list. Free with   `gtk_recent_info_unref()`.
         */
        lookup_item(uri: string): RecentInfo | null;

        /**
         * Changes the location of a recently used resource from `uri` to `new_uri`.
         * 
         * Please note that this function will not affect the resource pointed
         * by the URIs, but only the URI used in the recently used resources list.
         * @param uri the URI of a recently used resource
         * @param new_uri the new URI of the recently used resource, or    `null` to remove the item pointed by `uri` in the list
         * @returns `true` on success
         */
        move_item(uri: string, new_uri: string | null): boolean;

        /**
         * Purges every item from the recently used resources list.
         * @returns the number of items that have been removed from the   recently used resources list
         */
        purge_items(): number;

        /**
         * Removes a resource pointed by `uri` from the recently used resources
         * list handled by a recent manager.
         * @param uri the URI of the item you wish to remove
         * @returns `true` if the item pointed by `uri` has been successfully   removed by the recently used resources list, and `false` otherwise
         */
        remove_item(uri: string): boolean;
    }


    namespace RendererCellAccessible {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends CellAccessible.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::renderer": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-layer": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-mdi-zorder": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-help-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-hypertext-nlinks": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption-object": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-summary": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends CellAccessible.ConstructorProps, Atk.Action.ConstructorProps, Atk.Component.ConstructorProps, Atk.TableCell.ConstructorProps {
            renderer: CellRenderer;
        }
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class RendererCellAccessible extends CellAccessible implements Atk.Action, Atk.Component, Atk.TableCell {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<RendererCellAccessible>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * @construct-only
         */
        get renderer(): CellRenderer;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: RendererCellAccessible.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<RendererCellAccessible.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](renderer: CellRenderer): RendererCellAccessible;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof RendererCellAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, RendererCellAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof RendererCellAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, RendererCellAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof RendererCellAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<RendererCellAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        /**
         * Perform the specified action on the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns `true` if success, `false` otherwise
         */
        do_action(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns a description of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns a description string, or `null` if `action` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_description(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.get_description
        get_description(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Gets the keybinding which can be used to activate this action, if one
         * exists. The string returned should contain localized, human-readable,
         * key sequences as they would appear when displayed on screen. It must
         * be in the format "mnemonic;sequence;shortcut".
         * 
         * - The mnemonic key activates the object if it is presently enabled onscreen.
         *   This typically corresponds to the underlined letter within the widget.
         *   Example: "n" in a traditional "New..." menu item or the "a" in "Apply" for
         *   a button.
         * - The sequence is the full list of keys which invoke the action even if the
         *   relevant element is not currently shown on screen. For instance, for a menu
         *   item the sequence is the keybindings used to open the parent menus before
         *   invoking. The sequence string is colon-delimited. Example: "Alt+F:N" in a
         *   traditional "New..." menu item.
         * - The shortcut, if it exists, will invoke the same action without showing
         *   the component or its enclosing menus or dialogs. Example: "Ctrl+N" in a
         *   traditional "New..." menu item.
         * 
         * Example: For a traditional "New..." menu item, the expected return value
         * would be: "N;Alt+F:N;Ctrl+N" for the English locale and "N;Alt+D:N;Strg+N"
         * for the German locale. If, hypothetically, this menu item lacked a mnemonic,
         * it would be represented by ";;Ctrl+N" and ";;Strg+N" respectively.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns the keybinding which can be used to activate this action, or `null` if there is no keybinding for this action.
         */
        get_keybinding(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Returns the localized name of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns a name string, or `null` if `action` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_localized_name(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the number of accessible actions available on the object.
         * If there are more than one, the first one is considered the
         * "default" action of the object.
         * @returns a the number of actions, or 0 if `action` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_n_actions(): number;

        /**
         * Returns a non-localized string naming the specified action of the
         * object. This name is generally not descriptive of the end result
         * of the action, but instead names the 'interaction type' which the
         * object supports. By convention, the above strings should be used to
         * represent the actions which correspond to the common point-and-click
         * interaction techniques of the same name: i.e.
         * "click", "press", "release", "drag", "drop", "popup", etc.
         * The "popup" action should be used to pop up a context menu for the
         * object, if one exists.
         * 
         * For technical reasons, some toolkits cannot guarantee that the
         * reported action is actually 'bound' to a nontrivial user event;
         * i.e. the result of some actions via `atk_action_do_action()` may be
         * NIL.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns a name string, or `null` if `action` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_name(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.get_name
        get_name(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Sets a description of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @param desc the description to be assigned to this action
         * @returns a gboolean representing if the description was successfully set;
         */
        set_description(i: number, desc: string): boolean;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.set_description
        set_description(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Perform the specified action on the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_do_action(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns a description of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_description(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         * @virtual
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.vfunc_get_description
        vfunc_get_description(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Gets the keybinding which can be used to activate this action, if one
         * exists. The string returned should contain localized, human-readable,
         * key sequences as they would appear when displayed on screen. It must
         * be in the format "mnemonic;sequence;shortcut".
         * 
         * - The mnemonic key activates the object if it is presently enabled onscreen.
         *   This typically corresponds to the underlined letter within the widget.
         *   Example: "n" in a traditional "New..." menu item or the "a" in "Apply" for
         *   a button.
         * - The sequence is the full list of keys which invoke the action even if the
         *   relevant element is not currently shown on screen. For instance, for a menu
         *   item the sequence is the keybindings used to open the parent menus before
         *   invoking. The sequence string is colon-delimited. Example: "Alt+F:N" in a
         *   traditional "New..." menu item.
         * - The shortcut, if it exists, will invoke the same action without showing
         *   the component or its enclosing menus or dialogs. Example: "Ctrl+N" in a
         *   traditional "New..." menu item.
         * 
         * Example: For a traditional "New..." menu item, the expected return value
         * would be: "N;Alt+F:N;Ctrl+N" for the English locale and "N;Alt+D:N;Strg+N"
         * for the German locale. If, hypothetically, this menu item lacked a mnemonic,
         * it would be represented by ";;Ctrl+N" and ";;Strg+N" respectively.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_keybinding(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Returns the localized name of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_localized_name(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the number of accessible actions available on the object.
         * If there are more than one, the first one is considered the
         * "default" action of the object.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_n_actions(): number;

        /**
         * Returns a non-localized string naming the specified action of the
         * object. This name is generally not descriptive of the end result
         * of the action, but instead names the 'interaction type' which the
         * object supports. By convention, the above strings should be used to
         * represent the actions which correspond to the common point-and-click
         * interaction techniques of the same name: i.e.
         * "click", "press", "release", "drag", "drop", "popup", etc.
         * The "popup" action should be used to pop up a context menu for the
         * object, if one exists.
         * 
         * For technical reasons, some toolkits cannot guarantee that the
         * reported action is actually 'bound' to a nontrivial user event;
         * i.e. the result of some actions via `atk_action_do_action()` may be
         * NIL.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_name(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         * @virtual
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.vfunc_get_name
        vfunc_get_name(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Sets a description of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @param desc the description to be assigned to this action
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_description(i: number, desc: string): boolean;

        /**
         * @param args 
         * @virtual
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.vfunc_set_description
        vfunc_set_description(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Checks whether the specified point is within the extent of the `component`.
         * 
         * Toolkit implementor note: ATK provides a default implementation for
         * this virtual method. In general there are little reason to
         * re-implement it.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @returns `true` or `false` indicating whether the specified point is within the extent of the `component` or not
         */
        contains(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the alpha value (i.e. the opacity) for this
         * `component`, on a scale from 0 (fully transparent) to 1.0
         * (fully opaque).
         * @returns An alpha value from 0 to 1.0, inclusive.
         */
        get_alpha(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the rectangle which gives the extent of the `component`.
         * 
         * If the extent can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), all of x, y, width, height are set to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         */
        get_extents(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the layer of the component.
         * @returns an {@link Atk.Layer} which is the layer of the component
         */
        get_layer(): Atk.Layer;

        /**
         * Gets the zorder of the component. The value G_MININT will be returned
         * if the layer of the component is not ATK_LAYER_MDI or ATK_LAYER_WINDOW.
         * @returns a gint which is the zorder of the component, i.e. the depth at which the component is shown in relation to other components in the same container.
         */
        get_mdi_zorder(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the position of `component` in the form of
         * a point specifying `component`'s top-left corner.
         * 
         * If the position can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), x and y are set to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         */
        get_position(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number];

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.TableCell.get_position
        get_position(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Gets the size of the `component` in terms of width and height.
         * 
         * If the size can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), width and height are set to -1.
         */
        get_size(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Grabs focus for this `component`.
         * @returns `true` if successful, `false` otherwise.
         */
        grab_focus(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets a reference to the accessible child, if one exists, at the
         * coordinate point specified by `x` and `y`.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @returns a reference to the accessible child, if one exists
         */
        ref_accessible_at_point(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): Atk.Object | null;

        /**
         * Remove the handler specified by `handler_id` from the list of
         * functions to be executed when this object receives focus events
         * (in or out).
         * @param handler_id the handler id of the focus handler to be removed from `component`
         */
        remove_focus_handler(handler_id: number): void;

        /**
         * Makes `component` visible on the screen by scrolling all necessary parents.
         * 
         * Contrary to atk_component_set_position, this does not actually move
         * `component` in its parent, this only makes the parents scroll so that the
         * object shows up on the screen, given its current position within the parents.
         * @param type specify where the object should be made visible.
         * @returns whether scrolling was successful.
         */
        scroll_to(type: Atk.ScrollType): boolean;

        /**
         * Move the top-left of `component` to a given position of the screen by
         * scrolling all necessary parents.
         * @param coords specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or to the parent object.
         * @param x x-position where to scroll to
         * @param y y-position where to scroll to
         * @returns whether scrolling was successful.
         */
        scroll_to_point(coords: Atk.CoordType, x: number, y: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the extents of `component`.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param width width to set for `component`
         * @param height height to set for `component`
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @returns `true` or `false` whether the extents were set or not
         */
        set_extents(x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the position of `component`.
         * 
         * Contrary to atk_component_scroll_to, this does not trigger any scrolling,
         * this just moves `component` in its parent.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the component's top level window
         * @returns `true` or `false` whether or not the position was set or not
         */
        set_position(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Set the size of the `component` in terms of width and height.
         * @param width width to set for `component`
         * @param height height to set for `component`
         * @returns `true` or `false` whether the size was set or not
         */
        set_size(width: number, height: number): boolean;

        /**
         * @param bounds 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_bounds_changed(bounds: Atk.Rectangle): void;

        /**
         * Checks whether the specified point is within the extent of the `component`.
         * 
         * Toolkit implementor note: ATK provides a default implementation for
         * this virtual method. In general there are little reason to
         * re-implement it.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_contains(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the alpha value (i.e. the opacity) for this
         * `component`, on a scale from 0 (fully transparent) to 1.0
         * (fully opaque).
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_alpha(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the rectangle which gives the extent of the `component`.
         * 
         * If the extent can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), all of x, y, width, height are set to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_extents(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the layer of the component.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_layer(): Atk.Layer;

        /**
         * Gets the zorder of the component. The value G_MININT will be returned
         * if the layer of the component is not ATK_LAYER_MDI or ATK_LAYER_WINDOW.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_mdi_zorder(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the position of `component` in the form of
         * a point specifying `component`'s top-left corner.
         * 
         * If the position can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), x and y are set to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_position(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number];

        /**
         * @param args 
         * @virtual
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.TableCell.vfunc_get_position
        vfunc_get_position(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Gets the size of the `component` in terms of width and height.
         * 
         * If the size can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), width and height are set to -1.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_size(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Grabs focus for this `component`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_grab_focus(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets a reference to the accessible child, if one exists, at the
         * coordinate point specified by `x` and `y`.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_ref_accessible_at_point(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): Atk.Object | null;

        /**
         * Remove the handler specified by `handler_id` from the list of
         * functions to be executed when this object receives focus events
         * (in or out).
         * @param handler_id the handler id of the focus handler to be removed from `component`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_remove_focus_handler(handler_id: number): void;

        /**
         * Makes `component` visible on the screen by scrolling all necessary parents.
         * 
         * Contrary to atk_component_set_position, this does not actually move
         * `component` in its parent, this only makes the parents scroll so that the
         * object shows up on the screen, given its current position within the parents.
         * @param type specify where the object should be made visible.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_scroll_to(type: Atk.ScrollType): boolean;

        /**
         * Move the top-left of `component` to a given position of the screen by
         * scrolling all necessary parents.
         * @param coords specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or to the parent object.
         * @param x x-position where to scroll to
         * @param y y-position where to scroll to
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_scroll_to_point(coords: Atk.CoordType, x: number, y: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the extents of `component`.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param width width to set for `component`
         * @param height height to set for `component`
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_extents(x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the position of `component`.
         * 
         * Contrary to atk_component_scroll_to, this does not trigger any scrolling,
         * this just moves `component` in its parent.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the component's top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_position(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Set the size of the `component` in terms of width and height.
         * @param width width to set for `component`
         * @param height height to set for `component`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_size(width: number, height: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the column headers as an array of cell accessibles.
         * @returns a GPtrArray of AtkObjects representing the column header cells.
         */
        get_column_header_cells(): Atk.Object[];

        /**
         * Returns the number of columns occupied by this cell accessible.
         * @returns a gint representing the number of columns occupied by this cell, or 0 if the cell does not implement this method.
         */
        get_column_span(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the row and column indexes and span of this cell accessible.
         * 
         * Note: If the object does not implement this function, then, by default, atk
         * will implement this function by calling get_row_span and get_column_span
         * on the object.
         * @returns TRUE if successful; FALSE otherwise.
         */
        get_row_column_span(): [boolean, number, number, number, number];

        /**
         * Returns the row headers as an array of cell accessibles.
         * @returns a GPtrArray of AtkObjects representing the row header cells.
         */
        get_row_header_cells(): Atk.Object[];

        /**
         * Returns the number of rows occupied by this cell accessible.
         * @returns a gint representing the number of rows occupied by this cell, or 0 if the cell does not implement this method.
         */
        get_row_span(): number;

        /**
         * Returns a reference to the accessible of the containing table.
         * @returns the atk object for the containing table.
         */
        get_table(): Atk.Object;

        /**
         * Returns the column headers as an array of cell accessibles.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_column_header_cells(): Atk.Object[];

        /**
         * Returns the number of columns occupied by this cell accessible.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_column_span(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the row and column indexes and span of this cell accessible.
         * 
         * Note: If the object does not implement this function, then, by default, atk
         * will implement this function by calling get_row_span and get_column_span
         * on the object.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_row_column_span(): [boolean, number, number, number, number];

        /**
         * Returns the row headers as an array of cell accessibles.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_row_header_cells(): Atk.Object[];

        /**
         * Returns the number of rows occupied by this cell accessible.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_row_span(): number;

        /**
         * Returns a reference to the accessible of the containing table.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_table(): Atk.Object;
    }


    namespace Revealer {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Bin.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::child-revealed": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::reveal-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::transition-duration": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::transition-type": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Bin.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {
            child_revealed: boolean;
            childRevealed: boolean;
            reveal_child: boolean;
            revealChild: boolean;
            transition_duration: number;
            transitionDuration: number;
            transition_type: RevealerTransitionType;
            transitionType: RevealerTransitionType;
        }
    }

    /**
     * The GtkRevealer widget is a container which animates
     * the transition of its child from invisible to visible.
     * 
     * The style of transition can be controlled with
     * `gtk_revealer_set_transition_type()`.
     * 
     * These animations respect the {@link Gtk.Settings.gtk_enable_animations}
     * setting.
     * 
     * # CSS nodes
     * 
     * GtkRevealer has a single CSS node with name revealer.
     * 
     * The GtkRevealer widget was added in GTK+ 3.10.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class Revealer extends Bin implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<Revealer>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * @read-only
         * @default false
         */
        get child_revealed(): boolean;

        /**
         * @read-only
         * @default false
         */
        get childRevealed(): boolean;

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get reveal_child(): boolean;
        set reveal_child(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get revealChild(): boolean;
        set revealChild(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default 250
         */
        get transition_duration(): number;
        set transition_duration(val: number);

        /**
         * @default 250
         */
        get transitionDuration(): number;
        set transitionDuration(val: number);

        /**
         * @default Gtk.RevealerTransitionType.SLIDE_DOWN
         */
        get transition_type(): RevealerTransitionType;
        set transition_type(val: RevealerTransitionType);

        /**
         * @default Gtk.RevealerTransitionType.SLIDE_DOWN
         */
        get transitionType(): RevealerTransitionType;
        set transitionType(val: RevealerTransitionType);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: Revealer.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<Revealer.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): Revealer;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof Revealer.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Revealer.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof Revealer.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Revealer.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof Revealer.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<Revealer.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Returns whether the child is fully revealed, in other words whether
         * the transition to the revealed state is completed.
         * @returns `true` if the child is fully revealed
         */
        get_child_revealed(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns whether the child is currently
         * revealed. See `gtk_revealer_set_reveal_child()`.
         * 
         * This function returns `true` as soon as the transition
         * is to the revealed state is started. To learn whether
         * the child is fully revealed (ie the transition is completed),
         * use `gtk_revealer_get_child_revealed()`.
         * @returns `true` if the child is revealed.
         */
        get_reveal_child(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the amount of time (in milliseconds) that
         * transitions will take.
         * @returns the transition duration
         */
        get_transition_duration(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the type of animation that will be used
         * for transitions in `revealer`.
         * @returns the current transition type of `revealer`
         */
        get_transition_type(): RevealerTransitionType;

        /**
         * Tells the {@link Gtk.Revealer} to reveal or conceal its child.
         * 
         * The transition will be animated with the current
         * transition type of `revealer`.
         * @param reveal_child `true` to reveal the child
         */
        set_reveal_child(reveal_child: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the duration that transitions will take.
         * @param duration the new duration, in milliseconds
         */
        set_transition_duration(duration: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the type of animation that will be used for
         * transitions in `revealer`. Available types include
         * various kinds of fades and slides.
         * @param transition the new transition type
         */
        set_transition_type(transition: RevealerTransitionType): void;
    }


    namespace Scale {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Range.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * Signal which allows you to change how the scale value is displayed.
             * Connect a signal handler which returns an allocated string representing
             * `value`. That string will then be used to display the scale's value.
             * 
             * If no user-provided handlers are installed, the value will be displayed on
             * its own, rounded according to the value of the {@link Gtk.Scale.digits} property.
             * 
             * Here's an example signal handler which displays a value 1.0 as
             * with "-->1.0<--".
             * 
             * ```c
             * static gchar*
             * format_value_callback (GtkScale *scale,
             *                        gdouble   value)
             * {
             *   return g_strdup_printf ("-->\%0.*g<--",
             *                           gtk_scale_get_digits (scale), value);
             *  }
             * ```
             * 
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "format-value": (arg0: number) => string;
            "notify::digits": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::draw-value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-origin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::value-pos": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::adjustment": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::fill-level": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::inverted": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::lower-stepper-sensitivity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::restrict-to-fill-level": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::round-digits": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::show-fill-level": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::upper-stepper-sensitivity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::orientation": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Range.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, Orientable.ConstructorProps {
            digits: number;
            draw_value: boolean;
            drawValue: boolean;
            has_origin: boolean;
            hasOrigin: boolean;
            value_pos: PositionType;
            valuePos: PositionType;
        }
    }

    /**
     * A GtkScale is a slider control used to select a numeric value.
     * To use it, you’ll probably want to investigate the methods on
     * its base class, {@link Gtk.Range}, in addition to the methods for GtkScale itself.
     * To set the value of a scale, you would normally use `gtk_range_set_value()`.
     * To detect changes to the value, you would normally use the
     * {@link Gtk.Range.SignalSignatures.value_changed | Gtk.Range::value-changed} signal.
     * 
     * Note that using the same upper and lower bounds for the {@link Gtk.Scale} (through
     * the {@link Gtk.Range} methods) will hide the slider itself. This is useful for
     * applications that want to show an undeterminate value on the scale, without
     * changing the layout of the application (such as movie or music players).
     * 
     * # GtkScale as GtkBuildable
     * 
     * GtkScale supports a custom `<marks>` element, which can contain multiple
     * `<mark>` elements. The “value” and “position” attributes have the same
     * meaning as `gtk_scale_add_mark()` parameters of the same name. If the
     * element is not empty, its content is taken as the markup to show at
     * the mark. It can be translated with the usual ”translatable” and
     * “context” attributes.
     * 
     * # CSS nodes
     * 
     * 
     * ```
     * scale[.fine-tune][.marks-before][.marks-after]
     * ├── marks.top
     * │   ├── mark
     * │   ┊    ├── [label]
     * │   ┊    ╰── indicator
     * ┊   ┊
     * │   ╰── mark
     * ├── [value]
     * ├── contents
     * │   ╰── trough
     * │       ├── slider
     * │       ├── [highlight]
     * │       ╰── [fill]
     * ╰── marks.bottom
     *     ├── mark
     *     ┊    ├── indicator
     *     ┊    ╰── [label]
     *     ╰── mark
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * GtkScale has a main CSS node with name scale and a subnode for its contents,
     * with subnodes named trough and slider.
     * 
     * The main node gets the style class .fine-tune added when the scale is in
     * 'fine-tuning' mode.
     * 
     * If the scale has an origin (see `gtk_scale_set_has_origin()`), there is a
     * subnode with name highlight below the trough node that is used for rendering
     * the highlighted part of the trough.
     * 
     * If the scale is showing a fill level (see `gtk_range_set_show_fill_level()`),
     * there is a subnode with name fill below the trough node that is used for
     * rendering the filled in part of the trough.
     * 
     * If marks are present, there is a marks subnode before or after the contents
     * node, below which each mark gets a node with name mark. The marks nodes get
     * either the .top or .bottom style class.
     * 
     * The mark node has a subnode named indicator. If the mark has text, it also
     * has a subnode named label. When the mark is either above or left of the
     * scale, the label subnode is the first when present. Otherwise, the indicator
     * subnode is the first.
     * 
     * The main CSS node gets the 'marks-before' and/or 'marks-after' style classes
     * added depending on what marks are present.
     * 
     * If the scale is displaying the value (see {@link Gtk.Scale.draw_value}), there is
     * subnode with name value.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class Scale extends Range implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable, Orientable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<Scale>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * @default 1
         */
        get digits(): number;
        set digits(val: number);

        /**
         * @default true
         */
        get draw_value(): boolean;
        set draw_value(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default true
         */
        get drawValue(): boolean;
        set drawValue(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default true
         */
        get has_origin(): boolean;
        set has_origin(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default true
         */
        get hasOrigin(): boolean;
        set hasOrigin(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default Gtk.PositionType.TOP
         */
        get value_pos(): PositionType;
        set value_pos(val: PositionType);

        /**
         * @default Gtk.PositionType.TOP
         */
        get valuePos(): PositionType;
        set valuePos(val: PositionType);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: Scale.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        range: Range;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<Scale.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](orientation: Orientation, adjustment: Adjustment | null): Scale;

        static new_with_range(orientation: Orientation, min: number, max: number, step: number): Scale;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof Scale.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Scale.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof Scale.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Scale.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof Scale.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<Scale.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_draw_value(): void;

        /**
         * @param value 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_format_value(value: number): string;

        /**
         * Obtains the coordinates where the scale will draw the
         * {@link Pango.Layout} representing the text in the scale. Remember
         * when using the {@link Pango.Layout} function you need to convert to
         * and from pixels using PANGO_PIXELS() or #PANGO_SCALE.
         * 
         * If the {@link Gtk.Scale.draw_value} property is `false`, the return
         * values are undefined.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_layout_offsets(): [number, number];

        // Methods
        /**
         * Adds a mark at `value`.
         * 
         * A mark is indicated visually by drawing a tick mark next to the scale,
         * and GTK+ makes it easy for the user to position the scale exactly at the
         * marks value.
         * 
         * If `markup` is not `null`, text is shown next to the tick mark.
         * 
         * To remove marks from a scale, use `gtk_scale_clear_marks()`.
         * @param value the value at which the mark is placed, must be between   the lower and upper limits of the scales’ adjustment
         * @param position where to draw the mark. For a horizontal scale, #GTK_POS_TOP   and {@link Gtk.PositionType.LEFT} are drawn above the scale, anything else below.   For a vertical scale, #GTK_POS_LEFT and {@link Gtk.PositionType.TOP} are drawn to   the left of the scale, anything else to the right.
         * @param markup Text to be shown at the mark, using [Pango markup][PangoMarkupFormat], or `null`
         */
        add_mark(value: number, position: PositionType, markup: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Removes any marks that have been added with `gtk_scale_add_mark()`.
         */
        clear_marks(): void;

        /**
         * Gets the number of decimal places that are displayed in the value.
         * @returns the number of decimal places that are displayed
         */
        get_digits(): number;

        /**
         * Returns whether the current value is displayed as a string
         * next to the slider.
         * @returns whether the current value is displayed as a string
         */
        get_draw_value(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns whether the scale has an origin.
         * @returns `true` if the scale has an origin.
         */
        get_has_origin(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the {@link Pango.Layout} used to display the scale. The returned
         * object is owned by the scale so does not need to be freed by
         * the caller.
         * @returns the {@link Pango.Layout} for this scale,     or `null` if the {@link Gtk.Scale.draw_value} property is `false`.
         */
        get_layout(): Pango.Layout | null;

        /**
         * Obtains the coordinates where the scale will draw the
         * {@link Pango.Layout} representing the text in the scale. Remember
         * when using the {@link Pango.Layout} function you need to convert to
         * and from pixels using PANGO_PIXELS() or #PANGO_SCALE.
         * 
         * If the {@link Gtk.Scale.draw_value} property is `false`, the return
         * values are undefined.
         */
        get_layout_offsets(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the position in which the current value is displayed.
         * @returns the position in which the current value is displayed
         */
        get_value_pos(): PositionType;

        /**
         * Sets the number of decimal places that are displayed in the value. Also
         * causes the value of the adjustment to be rounded to this number of digits,
         * so the retrieved value matches the displayed one, if {@link Gtk.Scale.draw_value} is
         * `true` when the value changes. If you want to enforce rounding the value when
         * {@link Gtk.Scale.draw_value} is `false`, you can set {@link Gtk.Range.round_digits} instead.
         * 
         * Note that rounding to a small number of digits can interfere with
         * the smooth autoscrolling that is built into {@link Gtk.Scale}. As an alternative,
         * you can use the {@link Gtk.Scale.SignalSignatures.format_value | Gtk.Scale::format-value} signal to format the displayed
         * value yourself.
         * @param digits the number of decimal places to display,     e.g. use 1 to display 1.0, 2 to display 1.00, etc
         */
        set_digits(digits: number): void;

        /**
         * Specifies whether the current value is displayed as a string next
         * to the slider.
         * @param draw_value `true` to draw the value
         */
        set_draw_value(draw_value: boolean): void;

        /**
         * If {@link Gtk.Scale.has_origin} is set to `true` (the default), the scale will
         * highlight the part of the trough between the origin (bottom or left side)
         * and the current value.
         * @param has_origin `true` if the scale has an origin
         */
        set_has_origin(has_origin: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the position in which the current value is displayed.
         * @param pos the position in which the current value is displayed
         */
        set_value_pos(pos: PositionType): void;

        /**
         * The orientation of the orientable.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default Gtk.Orientation.HORIZONTAL
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Orientable
         */
        get orientation(): Orientation;
        set orientation(val: Orientation);

        /**
         * Retrieves the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @returns the orientation of the `orientable`.
         */
        get_orientation(): Orientation;

        /**
         * Sets the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @param orientation the orientable’s new orientation.
         */
        set_orientation(orientation: Orientation): void;
    }


    namespace ScaleAccessible {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends RangeAccessible.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-layer": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-mdi-zorder": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-help-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-hypertext-nlinks": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption-object": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-summary": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends RangeAccessible.ConstructorProps, Atk.Component.ConstructorProps, Atk.Value.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class ScaleAccessible extends RangeAccessible implements Atk.Component, Atk.Value {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ScaleAccessible>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: ScaleAccessible.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<ScaleAccessible.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof ScaleAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ScaleAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof ScaleAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ScaleAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof ScaleAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<ScaleAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        /**
         * Gets the value of this object.
         */
        get_current_value(): unknown;

        /**
         * Gets the minimum increment by which the value of this object may be
         * changed.  If zero, the minimum increment is undefined, which may
         * mean that it is limited only by the floating point precision of the
         * platform.
         * @returns the minimum increment by which the value of this object may be changed. zero if undefined.
         */
        get_increment(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the maximum value of this object.
         */
        get_maximum_value(): unknown;

        /**
         * Gets the minimum increment by which the value of this object may be changed.  If zero,
         * the minimum increment is undefined, which may mean that it is limited only by the
         * floating point precision of the platform.
         */
        get_minimum_increment(): unknown;

        /**
         * Gets the minimum value of this object.
         */
        get_minimum_value(): unknown;

        /**
         * Gets the range of this object.
         * @returns a newly allocated {@link Atk.Range} that represents the minimum, maximum and descriptor (if available) of `obj`. NULL if that range is not defined.
         */
        get_range(): Atk.Range | null;

        /**
         * Gets the list of subranges defined for this object. See {@link Atk.Value}
         * introduction for examples of subranges and when to expose them.
         * @returns an {@link GLib.SList} of {@link Atk.Range} which each of the subranges defined for this object. Free the returns list with `g_slist_free()`.
         */
        get_sub_ranges(): Atk.Range[];

        /**
         * Gets the current value and the human readable text alternative of
         * `obj`. `text` is a newly created string, that must be freed by the
         * caller. Can be NULL if no descriptor is available.
         */
        get_value_and_text(): [number, string];

        /**
         * Sets the value of this object.
         * @param value a {@link GObject.Value} which is the desired new accessible value.
         * @returns `true` if new value is successfully set, `false` otherwise.
         */
        set_current_value(value: GObject.Value | any): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the value of this object.
         * 
         * This method is intended to provide a way to change the value of the
         * object. In any case, it is possible that the value can't be
         * modified (ie: a read-only component). If the value changes due this
         * call, it is possible that the text could change, and will trigger
         * an {@link Atk.Value.SignalSignatures.value_changed | Atk.Value::value-changed} signal emission.
         * 
         * Note for implementors: the deprecated `atk_value_set_current_value()`
         * method returned TRUE or FALSE depending if the value was assigned
         * or not. In the practice several implementors were not able to
         * decide it, and returned TRUE in any case. For that reason it is not
         * required anymore to return if the value was properly assigned or
         * not.
         * @param new_value a double which is the desired new accessible value.
         */
        set_value(new_value: number): void;

        /**
         * Gets the value of this object.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_current_value(): GObject.Value | any;

        /**
         * Gets the minimum increment by which the value of this object may be
         * changed.  If zero, the minimum increment is undefined, which may
         * mean that it is limited only by the floating point precision of the
         * platform.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_increment(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the maximum value of this object.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_maximum_value(): GObject.Value | any;

        /**
         * Gets the minimum increment by which the value of this object may be changed.  If zero,
         * the minimum increment is undefined, which may mean that it is limited only by the
         * floating point precision of the platform.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_minimum_increment(): GObject.Value | any;

        /**
         * Gets the minimum value of this object.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_minimum_value(): GObject.Value | any;

        /**
         * Gets the range of this object.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_range(): Atk.Range | null;

        /**
         * Gets the list of subranges defined for this object. See {@link Atk.Value}
         * introduction for examples of subranges and when to expose them.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_sub_ranges(): Atk.Range[];

        /**
         * Gets the current value and the human readable text alternative of
         * `obj`. `text` is a newly created string, that must be freed by the
         * caller. Can be NULL if no descriptor is available.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_value_and_text(): [number, string];

        /**
         * Sets the value of this object.
         * @param value a {@link GObject.Value} which is the desired new accessible value.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_current_value(value: unknown): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the value of this object.
         * 
         * This method is intended to provide a way to change the value of the
         * object. In any case, it is possible that the value can't be
         * modified (ie: a read-only component). If the value changes due this
         * call, it is possible that the text could change, and will trigger
         * an {@link Atk.Value.SignalSignatures.value_changed | Atk.Value::value-changed} signal emission.
         * 
         * Note for implementors: the deprecated `atk_value_set_current_value()`
         * method returned TRUE or FALSE depending if the value was assigned
         * or not. In the practice several implementors were not able to
         * decide it, and returned TRUE in any case. For that reason it is not
         * required anymore to return if the value was properly assigned or
         * not.
         * @param new_value a double which is the desired new accessible value.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_value(new_value: number): void;
    }


    namespace ScaleButton {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Button.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * The ::popdown signal is a
             * [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted to popdown the scale widget.
             * 
             * The default binding for this signal is Escape.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.12
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            popdown: () => void;
            /**
             * The ::popup signal is a
             * [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted to popup the scale widget.
             * 
             * The default bindings for this signal are Space, Enter and Return.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.12
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            popup: () => void;
            /**
             * The ::value-changed signal is emitted when the value field has
             * changed.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.12
             * @run-last
             */
            "value-changed": (arg0: number) => void;
            "notify::adjustment": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::icons": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::size": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::always-show-image": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::image": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::image-position": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::label": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::relief": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-stock": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-underline": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::xalign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::yalign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::action-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::action-target": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::related-action": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-action-appearance": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::orientation": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Button.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Actionable.ConstructorProps, Activatable.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, Orientable.ConstructorProps {
            adjustment: Adjustment;
            icons: string[];
            size: IconSize;
            value: number;
        }
    }

    /**
     * {@link Gtk.ScaleButton} provides a button which pops up a scale widget.
     * This kind of widget is commonly used for volume controls in multimedia
     * applications, and GTK+ provides a {@link Gtk.VolumeButton} subclass that
     * is tailored for this use case.
     * 
     * # CSS nodes
     * 
     * GtkScaleButton has a single CSS node with name button. To differentiate
     * it from a plain {@link Gtk.Button}, it gets the .scale style class.
     * 
     * The popup widget that contains the scale has a .scale-popup style class.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class ScaleButton extends Button implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Actionable, Activatable, Buildable, Orientable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ScaleButton>;

        // Properties
        get adjustment(): Adjustment;
        set adjustment(val: Adjustment);

        /**
         * The names of the icons to be used by the scale button.
         * The first item in the array will be used in the button
         * when the current value is the lowest value, the second
         * item for the highest value. All the subsequent icons will
         * be used for all the other values, spread evenly over the
         * range of values.
         * 
         * If there's only one icon name in the `icons` array, it will
         * be used for all the values. If only two icon names are in
         * the `icons` array, the first one will be used for the bottom
         * 50% of the scale, and the second one for the top 50%.
         * 
         * It is recommended to use at least 3 icons so that the
         * {@link Gtk.ScaleButton} reflects the current value of the scale
         * better for the users.
         * @since 2.12
         */
        get icons(): string[];
        set icons(val: string[]);

        /**
         * @default Gtk.IconSize.SMALL_TOOLBAR
         */
        get size(): IconSize;
        set size(val: IconSize);

        /**
         * @default 0
         */
        get value(): number;
        set value(val: number);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: ScaleButton.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<ScaleButton.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](size: number, min: number, max: number, step: number, icons: string[] | null): ScaleButton;

        // Conflicted with Gtk.Button.new
        static ["new"](...args: never[]): any;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof ScaleButton.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ScaleButton.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof ScaleButton.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ScaleButton.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof ScaleButton.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<ScaleButton.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * @param value 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_value_changed(value: number): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Gets the {@link Gtk.Adjustment} associated with the {@link Gtk.ScaleButton}’s scale.
         * See `gtk_range_get_adjustment()` for details.
         * @returns the adjustment associated with the scale
         */
        get_adjustment(): Adjustment;

        /**
         * Retrieves the minus button of the {@link Gtk.ScaleButton}.
         * @returns the minus button of the {@link Gtk.ScaleButton} as a {@link Gtk.Button}
         */
        get_minus_button(): Button;

        /**
         * Retrieves the plus button of the {@link Gtk.ScaleButton}.
         * @returns the plus button of the {@link Gtk.ScaleButton} as a {@link Gtk.Button}
         */
        get_plus_button(): Button;

        /**
         * Retrieves the popup of the {@link Gtk.ScaleButton}.
         * @returns the popup of the {@link Gtk.ScaleButton}
         */
        get_popup(): Widget;

        /**
         * Gets the current value of the scale button.
         * @returns current value of the scale button
         */
        get_value(): number;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.Adjustment} to be used as a model
         * for the {@link Gtk.ScaleButton}’s scale.
         * See `gtk_range_set_adjustment()` for details.
         * @param adjustment a {@link Gtk.Adjustment}
         */
        set_adjustment(adjustment: Adjustment): void;

        /**
         * Sets the icons to be used by the scale button.
         * For details, see the {@link Gtk.ScaleButton.icons} property.
         * @param icons a `null`-terminated array of icon names
         */
        set_icons(icons: string[]): void;

        /**
         * Sets the current value of the scale; if the value is outside
         * the minimum or maximum range values, it will be clamped to fit
         * inside them. The scale button emits the {@link Gtk.ScaleButton.SignalSignatures.value_changed | Gtk.ScaleButton::value-changed}
         * signal if the value changes.
         * @param value new value of the scale button
         */
        set_value(value: number): void;

        /**
         * @default null
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable
         */
        get action_name(): string | null;
        set action_name(val: string | null);

        /**
         * @default null
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable
         */
        get actionName(): string | null;
        set actionName(val: string | null);

        /** @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable */
        get action_target(): GLib.Variant;
        set action_target(val: GLib.Variant);

        /** @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable */
        get actionTarget(): GLib.Variant;
        set actionTarget(val: GLib.Variant);

        /**
         * The action that this activatable will activate and receive
         * updates from for various states and possibly appearance.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the this property and
         * > call `gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action()` when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get related_action(): Action;
        set related_action(val: Action);

        /**
         * The action that this activatable will activate and receive
         * updates from for various states and possibly appearance.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the this property and
         * > call `gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action()` when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get relatedAction(): Action;
        set relatedAction(val: Action);

        /**
         * Whether this activatable should reset its layout
         * and appearance when setting the related action or when
         * the action changes appearance.
         * 
         * See the {@link Gtk.Action} documentation directly to find which properties
         * should be ignored by the {@link Gtk.Activatable} when this property is `false`.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle this property
         * > and call `gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties()` on the activatable
         * > widget when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get use_action_appearance(): boolean;
        set use_action_appearance(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether this activatable should reset its layout
         * and appearance when setting the related action or when
         * the action changes appearance.
         * 
         * See the {@link Gtk.Action} documentation directly to find which properties
         * should be ignored by the {@link Gtk.Activatable} when this property is `false`.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle this property
         * > and call `gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties()` on the activatable
         * > widget when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get useActionAppearance(): boolean;
        set useActionAppearance(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The orientation of the orientable.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default Gtk.Orientation.HORIZONTAL
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Orientable
         */
        get orientation(): Orientation;
        set orientation(val: Orientation);

        /**
         * Gets the action name for `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_name()` for more information.
         * @returns the action name, or `null` if none is set
         */
        get_action_name(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the current target value of `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_target_value()` for more information.
         * @returns the current target value
         */
        get_action_target_value(): GLib.Variant;

        /**
         * Specifies the name of the action with which this widget should be
         * associated.  If `action_name` is `null` then the widget will be
         * unassociated from any previous action.
         * 
         * Usually this function is used when the widget is located (or will be
         * located) within the hierarchy of a {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow}.
         * 
         * Names are of the form “win.save” or “app.quit” for actions on the
         * containing {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow} or its associated {@link Gtk.Application},
         * respectively.  This is the same form used for actions in the {@link Gio.Menu}
         * associated with the window.
         * @param action_name an action name, or `null`
         */
        set_action_name(action_name: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the target value of an actionable widget.
         * 
         * If `target_value` is `null` then the target value is unset.
         * 
         * The target value has two purposes.  First, it is used as the
         * parameter to activation of the action associated with the
         * {@link Gtk.Actionable} widget. Second, it is used to determine if the widget
         * should be rendered as “active” — the widget is active if the state
         * is equal to the given target.
         * 
         * Consider the example of associating a set of buttons with a {@link Gio.Action}
         * with string state in a typical “radio button” situation.  Each button
         * will be associated with the same action, but with a different target
         * value for that action.  Clicking on a particular button will activate
         * the action with the target of that button, which will typically cause
         * the action’s state to change to that value.  Since the action’s state
         * is now equal to the target value of the button, the button will now
         * be rendered as active (and the other buttons, with different targets,
         * rendered inactive).
         * @param target_value a {@link GLib.Variant} to set as the target value, or `null`
         */
        set_action_target_value(target_value: GLib.Variant | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the action-name and associated string target value of an
         * actionable widget.
         * 
         * `detailed_action_name` is a string in the format accepted by
         * `g_action_parse_detailed_name()`.
         * 
         * (Note that prior to version 3.22.25,
         * this function is only usable for actions with a simple "s" target, and
         * `detailed_action_name` must be of the form `"action::target"` where
         * `action` is the action name and `target` is the string to use
         * as the target.)
         * @param detailed_action_name the detailed action name
         */
        set_detailed_action_name(detailed_action_name: string): void;

        /**
         * Gets the action name for `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_name()` for more information.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_action_name(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the current target value of `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_target_value()` for more information.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_action_target_value(): GLib.Variant;

        /**
         * Specifies the name of the action with which this widget should be
         * associated.  If `action_name` is `null` then the widget will be
         * unassociated from any previous action.
         * 
         * Usually this function is used when the widget is located (or will be
         * located) within the hierarchy of a {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow}.
         * 
         * Names are of the form “win.save” or “app.quit” for actions on the
         * containing {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow} or its associated {@link Gtk.Application},
         * respectively.  This is the same form used for actions in the {@link Gio.Menu}
         * associated with the window.
         * @param action_name an action name, or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_action_name(action_name: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the target value of an actionable widget.
         * 
         * If `target_value` is `null` then the target value is unset.
         * 
         * The target value has two purposes.  First, it is used as the
         * parameter to activation of the action associated with the
         * {@link Gtk.Actionable} widget. Second, it is used to determine if the widget
         * should be rendered as “active” — the widget is active if the state
         * is equal to the given target.
         * 
         * Consider the example of associating a set of buttons with a {@link Gio.Action}
         * with string state in a typical “radio button” situation.  Each button
         * will be associated with the same action, but with a different target
         * value for that action.  Clicking on a particular button will activate
         * the action with the target of that button, which will typically cause
         * the action’s state to change to that value.  Since the action’s state
         * is now equal to the target value of the button, the button will now
         * be rendered as active (and the other buttons, with different targets,
         * rendered inactive).
         * @param target_value a {@link GLib.Variant} to set as the target value, or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_action_target_value(target_value: GLib.Variant | null): void;

        /**
         * This is a utility function for {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors.
         * 
         * When implementing {@link Gtk.Activatable} you must call this when
         * handling changes of the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action}, and
         * you must also use this to break references in {@link GObject.Object}->dispose().
         * 
         * This function adds a reference to the currently set related
         * action for you, it also makes sure the {@link Gtk.Activatable}->update()
         * method is called when the related {@link Gtk.Action} properties change
         * and registers to the action’s proxy list.
         * 
         * > Be careful to call this before setting the local
         * > copy of the {@link Gtk.Action} property, since this function uses
         * > `gtk_activatable_get_related_action()` to retrieve the
         * > previous action.
         * @param action the {@link Gtk.Action} to set
         */
        do_set_related_action(action: Action): void;

        /**
         * Gets the related {@link Gtk.Action} for `activatable`.
         * @returns the related {@link Gtk.Action} if one is set.
         */
        get_related_action(): Action;

        /**
         * Gets whether this activatable should reset its layout
         * and appearance when setting the related action or when
         * the action changes appearance.
         * @returns whether `activatable` uses its actions appearance.
         */
        get_use_action_appearance(): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the related action on the `activatable` object.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action}
         * > property and call `gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action()` when it changes.
         * @param action the {@link Gtk.Action} to set
         */
        set_related_action(action: Action): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether this activatable should reset its layout and appearance
         * when setting the related action or when the action changes appearance
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} property and call
         * > `gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties()` to update `activatable`
         * > if needed.
         * @param use_appearance whether to use the actions appearance
         */
        set_use_action_appearance(use_appearance: boolean): void;

        /**
         * This is called to update the activatable completely, this is called
         * internally when the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action} property is set
         * or unset and by the implementing class when
         * {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} changes.
         * @param action the related {@link Gtk.Action} or `null`
         */
        sync_action_properties(action: Action | null): void;

        /**
         * This is called to update the activatable completely, this is called
         * internally when the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action} property is set
         * or unset and by the implementing class when
         * {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} changes.
         * @param action the related {@link Gtk.Action} or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_sync_action_properties(action: Action | null): void;

        /**
         * Called to update the activatable when its related action’s properties change.
         * You must check the {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} property only apply action
         * properties that are meant to effect the appearance accordingly.
         * @param action 
         * @param property_name 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_update(action: Action, property_name: string): void;

        /**
         * Retrieves the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @returns the orientation of the `orientable`.
         */
        get_orientation(): Orientation;

        /**
         * Sets the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @param orientation the orientable’s new orientation.
         */
        set_orientation(orientation: Orientation): void;

        /**
         * Emits a {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.child_notify | Gtk.Widget::child-notify} signal for the
         * [child property][child-properties] `child_property`
         * on `widget`.
         * 
         * This is the analogue of `g_object_notify()` for child properties.
         * 
         * Also see `gtk_container_child_notify()`.
         * @param child_property the name of a child property installed on the                  class of `widget`’s parent
         */
        child_notify(child_property: string): void;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Gtk.Container.child_notify
        child_notify(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Returns whether the widget should grab focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
         * See `gtk_widget_set_focus_on_click()`.
         * @returns `true` if the widget should grab focus when it is clicked with               the mouse.
         */
        get_focus_on_click(): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets whether the widget should grab focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
         * Making mouse clicks not grab focus is useful in places like toolbars where
         * you don’t want the keyboard focus removed from the main area of the
         * application.
         * @param focus_on_click whether the widget should grab focus when clicked with the mouse
         */
        set_focus_on_click(focus_on_click: boolean): void;
    }


    namespace ScaleButtonAccessible {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends ButtonAccessible.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-layer": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-mdi-zorder": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-help-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-hypertext-nlinks": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption-object": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-summary": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends ButtonAccessible.ConstructorProps, Atk.Action.ConstructorProps, Atk.Component.ConstructorProps, Atk.Image.ConstructorProps, Atk.Value.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class ScaleButtonAccessible extends ButtonAccessible implements Atk.Action, Atk.Component, Atk.Image, Atk.Value {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ScaleButtonAccessible>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: ScaleButtonAccessible.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<ScaleButtonAccessible.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof ScaleButtonAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ScaleButtonAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof ScaleButtonAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ScaleButtonAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof ScaleButtonAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<ScaleButtonAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        /**
         * Perform the specified action on the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns `true` if success, `false` otherwise
         */
        do_action(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns a description of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns a description string, or `null` if `action` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_description(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.get_description
        get_description(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Gets the keybinding which can be used to activate this action, if one
         * exists. The string returned should contain localized, human-readable,
         * key sequences as they would appear when displayed on screen. It must
         * be in the format "mnemonic;sequence;shortcut".
         * 
         * - The mnemonic key activates the object if it is presently enabled onscreen.
         *   This typically corresponds to the underlined letter within the widget.
         *   Example: "n" in a traditional "New..." menu item or the "a" in "Apply" for
         *   a button.
         * - The sequence is the full list of keys which invoke the action even if the
         *   relevant element is not currently shown on screen. For instance, for a menu
         *   item the sequence is the keybindings used to open the parent menus before
         *   invoking. The sequence string is colon-delimited. Example: "Alt+F:N" in a
         *   traditional "New..." menu item.
         * - The shortcut, if it exists, will invoke the same action without showing
         *   the component or its enclosing menus or dialogs. Example: "Ctrl+N" in a
         *   traditional "New..." menu item.
         * 
         * Example: For a traditional "New..." menu item, the expected return value
         * would be: "N;Alt+F:N;Ctrl+N" for the English locale and "N;Alt+D:N;Strg+N"
         * for the German locale. If, hypothetically, this menu item lacked a mnemonic,
         * it would be represented by ";;Ctrl+N" and ";;Strg+N" respectively.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns the keybinding which can be used to activate this action, or `null` if there is no keybinding for this action.
         */
        get_keybinding(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Returns the localized name of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns a name string, or `null` if `action` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_localized_name(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the number of accessible actions available on the object.
         * If there are more than one, the first one is considered the
         * "default" action of the object.
         * @returns a the number of actions, or 0 if `action` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_n_actions(): number;

        /**
         * Returns a non-localized string naming the specified action of the
         * object. This name is generally not descriptive of the end result
         * of the action, but instead names the 'interaction type' which the
         * object supports. By convention, the above strings should be used to
         * represent the actions which correspond to the common point-and-click
         * interaction techniques of the same name: i.e.
         * "click", "press", "release", "drag", "drop", "popup", etc.
         * The "popup" action should be used to pop up a context menu for the
         * object, if one exists.
         * 
         * For technical reasons, some toolkits cannot guarantee that the
         * reported action is actually 'bound' to a nontrivial user event;
         * i.e. the result of some actions via `atk_action_do_action()` may be
         * NIL.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns a name string, or `null` if `action` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_name(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.get_name
        get_name(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Sets a description of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @param desc the description to be assigned to this action
         * @returns a gboolean representing if the description was successfully set;
         */
        set_description(i: number, desc: string): boolean;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.set_description
        set_description(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Perform the specified action on the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_do_action(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns a description of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_description(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         * @virtual
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.vfunc_get_description
        vfunc_get_description(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Gets the keybinding which can be used to activate this action, if one
         * exists. The string returned should contain localized, human-readable,
         * key sequences as they would appear when displayed on screen. It must
         * be in the format "mnemonic;sequence;shortcut".
         * 
         * - The mnemonic key activates the object if it is presently enabled onscreen.
         *   This typically corresponds to the underlined letter within the widget.
         *   Example: "n" in a traditional "New..." menu item or the "a" in "Apply" for
         *   a button.
         * - The sequence is the full list of keys which invoke the action even if the
         *   relevant element is not currently shown on screen. For instance, for a menu
         *   item the sequence is the keybindings used to open the parent menus before
         *   invoking. The sequence string is colon-delimited. Example: "Alt+F:N" in a
         *   traditional "New..." menu item.
         * - The shortcut, if it exists, will invoke the same action without showing
         *   the component or its enclosing menus or dialogs. Example: "Ctrl+N" in a
         *   traditional "New..." menu item.
         * 
         * Example: For a traditional "New..." menu item, the expected return value
         * would be: "N;Alt+F:N;Ctrl+N" for the English locale and "N;Alt+D:N;Strg+N"
         * for the German locale. If, hypothetically, this menu item lacked a mnemonic,
         * it would be represented by ";;Ctrl+N" and ";;Strg+N" respectively.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_keybinding(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Returns the localized name of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_localized_name(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the number of accessible actions available on the object.
         * If there are more than one, the first one is considered the
         * "default" action of the object.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_n_actions(): number;

        /**
         * Returns a non-localized string naming the specified action of the
         * object. This name is generally not descriptive of the end result
         * of the action, but instead names the 'interaction type' which the
         * object supports. By convention, the above strings should be used to
         * represent the actions which correspond to the common point-and-click
         * interaction techniques of the same name: i.e.
         * "click", "press", "release", "drag", "drop", "popup", etc.
         * The "popup" action should be used to pop up a context menu for the
         * object, if one exists.
         * 
         * For technical reasons, some toolkits cannot guarantee that the
         * reported action is actually 'bound' to a nontrivial user event;
         * i.e. the result of some actions via `atk_action_do_action()` may be
         * NIL.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_name(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         * @virtual
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.vfunc_get_name
        vfunc_get_name(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Sets a description of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @param desc the description to be assigned to this action
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_description(i: number, desc: string): boolean;

        /**
         * @param args 
         * @virtual
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.vfunc_set_description
        vfunc_set_description(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Get a textual description of this image.
         * @returns a string representing the image description
         */
        get_image_description(): string;

        /**
         * Retrieves the locale identifier associated to the {@link Atk.Image}.
         * @returns a string corresponding to the POSIX   `LC_MESSAGES` locale used by the image description, or   `null` if the image does not specify a locale.
         */
        get_image_locale(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the position of the image in the form of a point specifying the
         * images top-left corner.
         * 
         * If the position can not be obtained (e.g. missing support), x and y are set
         * to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         */
        get_image_position(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number];

        /**
         * Get the width and height in pixels for the specified image.
         * The values of `width` and `height` are returned as -1 if the
         * values cannot be obtained (for instance, if the object is not onscreen).
         * 
         * If the size can not be obtained (e.g. missing support), x and y are set
         * to -1.
         */
        get_image_size(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Sets the textual description for this image.
         * @param description a string description to set for `image`
         * @returns boolean TRUE, or FALSE if operation could not be completed.
         */
        set_image_description(description: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Get a textual description of this image.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_image_description(): string;

        /**
         * Retrieves the locale identifier associated to the {@link Atk.Image}.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_image_locale(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the position of the image in the form of a point specifying the
         * images top-left corner.
         * 
         * If the position can not be obtained (e.g. missing support), x and y are set
         * to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_image_position(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number];

        /**
         * Get the width and height in pixels for the specified image.
         * The values of `width` and `height` are returned as -1 if the
         * values cannot be obtained (for instance, if the object is not onscreen).
         * 
         * If the size can not be obtained (e.g. missing support), x and y are set
         * to -1.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_image_size(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Sets the textual description for this image.
         * @param description a string description to set for `image`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_image_description(description: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the value of this object.
         */
        get_current_value(): unknown;

        /**
         * Gets the minimum increment by which the value of this object may be
         * changed.  If zero, the minimum increment is undefined, which may
         * mean that it is limited only by the floating point precision of the
         * platform.
         * @returns the minimum increment by which the value of this object may be changed. zero if undefined.
         */
        get_increment(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the maximum value of this object.
         */
        get_maximum_value(): unknown;

        /**
         * Gets the minimum increment by which the value of this object may be changed.  If zero,
         * the minimum increment is undefined, which may mean that it is limited only by the
         * floating point precision of the platform.
         */
        get_minimum_increment(): unknown;

        /**
         * Gets the minimum value of this object.
         */
        get_minimum_value(): unknown;

        /**
         * Gets the range of this object.
         * @returns a newly allocated {@link Atk.Range} that represents the minimum, maximum and descriptor (if available) of `obj`. NULL if that range is not defined.
         */
        get_range(): Atk.Range | null;

        /**
         * Gets the list of subranges defined for this object. See {@link Atk.Value}
         * introduction for examples of subranges and when to expose them.
         * @returns an {@link GLib.SList} of {@link Atk.Range} which each of the subranges defined for this object. Free the returns list with `g_slist_free()`.
         */
        get_sub_ranges(): Atk.Range[];

        /**
         * Gets the current value and the human readable text alternative of
         * `obj`. `text` is a newly created string, that must be freed by the
         * caller. Can be NULL if no descriptor is available.
         */
        get_value_and_text(): [number, string];

        /**
         * Sets the value of this object.
         * @param value a {@link GObject.Value} which is the desired new accessible value.
         * @returns `true` if new value is successfully set, `false` otherwise.
         */
        set_current_value(value: GObject.Value | any): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the value of this object.
         * 
         * This method is intended to provide a way to change the value of the
         * object. In any case, it is possible that the value can't be
         * modified (ie: a read-only component). If the value changes due this
         * call, it is possible that the text could change, and will trigger
         * an {@link Atk.Value.SignalSignatures.value_changed | Atk.Value::value-changed} signal emission.
         * 
         * Note for implementors: the deprecated `atk_value_set_current_value()`
         * method returned TRUE or FALSE depending if the value was assigned
         * or not. In the practice several implementors were not able to
         * decide it, and returned TRUE in any case. For that reason it is not
         * required anymore to return if the value was properly assigned or
         * not.
         * @param new_value a double which is the desired new accessible value.
         */
        set_value(new_value: number): void;

        /**
         * Gets the value of this object.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_current_value(): GObject.Value | any;

        /**
         * Gets the minimum increment by which the value of this object may be
         * changed.  If zero, the minimum increment is undefined, which may
         * mean that it is limited only by the floating point precision of the
         * platform.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_increment(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the maximum value of this object.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_maximum_value(): GObject.Value | any;

        /**
         * Gets the minimum increment by which the value of this object may be changed.  If zero,
         * the minimum increment is undefined, which may mean that it is limited only by the
         * floating point precision of the platform.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_minimum_increment(): GObject.Value | any;

        /**
         * Gets the minimum value of this object.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_minimum_value(): GObject.Value | any;

        /**
         * Gets the range of this object.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_range(): Atk.Range | null;

        /**
         * Gets the list of subranges defined for this object. See {@link Atk.Value}
         * introduction for examples of subranges and when to expose them.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_sub_ranges(): Atk.Range[];

        /**
         * Gets the current value and the human readable text alternative of
         * `obj`. `text` is a newly created string, that must be freed by the
         * caller. Can be NULL if no descriptor is available.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_value_and_text(): [number, string];

        /**
         * Sets the value of this object.
         * @param value a {@link GObject.Value} which is the desired new accessible value.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_current_value(value: unknown): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the value of this object.
         * 
         * This method is intended to provide a way to change the value of the
         * object. In any case, it is possible that the value can't be
         * modified (ie: a read-only component). If the value changes due this
         * call, it is possible that the text could change, and will trigger
         * an {@link Atk.Value.SignalSignatures.value_changed | Atk.Value::value-changed} signal emission.
         * 
         * Note for implementors: the deprecated `atk_value_set_current_value()`
         * method returned TRUE or FALSE depending if the value was assigned
         * or not. In the practice several implementors were not able to
         * decide it, and returned TRUE in any case. For that reason it is not
         * required anymore to return if the value was properly assigned or
         * not.
         * @param new_value a double which is the desired new accessible value.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_value(new_value: number): void;
    }


    namespace Scrollbar {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Range.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::adjustment": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::fill-level": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::inverted": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::lower-stepper-sensitivity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::restrict-to-fill-level": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::round-digits": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::show-fill-level": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::upper-stepper-sensitivity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::orientation": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Range.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, Orientable.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * The {@link Gtk.Scrollbar} widget is a horizontal or vertical scrollbar,
     * depending on the value of the {@link Gtk.Orientable.orientation} property.
     * 
     * Its position and movement are controlled by the adjustment that is passed to
     * or created by `gtk_scrollbar_new()`. See {@link Gtk.Adjustment} for more details. The
     * {@link Gtk.Adjustment.value} field sets the position of the thumb and must be between
     * {@link Gtk.Adjustment.lower} and {@link Gtk.Adjustment.upper} - {@link Gtk.Adjustment.page_size}. The
     * {@link Gtk.Adjustment.page_size} represents the size of the visible scrollable area.
     * The fields {@link Gtk.Adjustment.step_increment} and {@link Gtk.Adjustment.page_increment}
     * fields are added to or subtracted from the {@link Gtk.Adjustment.value} when the user
     * asks to move by a step (using e.g. the cursor arrow keys or, if present, the
     * stepper buttons) or by a page (using e.g. the Page Down/Up keys).
     * 
     * # CSS nodes
     * 
     * 
     * ```
     * scrollbar[.fine-tune]
     * ╰── contents
     *     ├── [button.up]
     *     ├── [button.down]
     *     ├── trough
     *     │   ╰── slider
     *     ├── [button.up]
     *     ╰── [button.down]
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * GtkScrollbar has a main CSS node with name scrollbar and a subnode for its
     * contents, with subnodes named trough and slider.
     * 
     * The main node gets the style class .fine-tune added when the scrollbar is
     * in 'fine-tuning' mode.
     * 
     * If steppers are enabled, they are represented by up to four additional
     * subnodes with name button. These get the style classes .up and .down to
     * indicate in which direction they are moving.
     * 
     * Other style classes that may be added to scrollbars inside {@link Gtk.ScrolledWindow}
     * include the positional classes (.left, .right, .top, .bottom) and style
     * classes related to overlay scrolling (.overlay-indicator, .dragging, .hovering).
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class Scrollbar extends Range implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable, Orientable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<Scrollbar>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: Scrollbar.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        range: Range;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<Scrollbar.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](orientation: Orientation, adjustment: Adjustment | null): Scrollbar;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof Scrollbar.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Scrollbar.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof Scrollbar.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Scrollbar.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof Scrollbar.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<Scrollbar.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        /**
         * The orientation of the orientable.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default Gtk.Orientation.HORIZONTAL
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Orientable
         */
        get orientation(): Orientation;
        set orientation(val: Orientation);

        /**
         * Retrieves the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @returns the orientation of the `orientable`.
         */
        get_orientation(): Orientation;

        /**
         * Sets the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @param orientation the orientable’s new orientation.
         */
        set_orientation(orientation: Orientation): void;
    }


    namespace ScrolledWindow {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Bin.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * The ::edge-overshot signal is emitted whenever user initiated scrolling
             * makes the scrolled window firmly surpass (i.e. with some edge resistance)
             * the lower or upper limits defined by the adjustment in that orientation.
             * 
             * A similar behavior without edge resistance is provided by the
             * {@link Gtk.ScrolledWindow.SignalSignatures.edge_reached | Gtk.ScrolledWindow::edge-reached} signal.
             * 
             * Note: The `pos` argument is LTR/RTL aware, so callers should be aware too
             * if intending to provide behavior on horizontal edges.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.16
             * @run-last
             */
            "edge-overshot": (arg0: PositionType) => void;
            /**
             * The ::edge-reached signal is emitted whenever user-initiated scrolling
             * makes the scrolled window exactly reach the lower or upper limits
             * defined by the adjustment in that orientation.
             * 
             * A similar behavior with edge resistance is provided by the
             * {@link Gtk.ScrolledWindow.SignalSignatures.edge_overshot | Gtk.ScrolledWindow::edge-overshot} signal.
             * 
             * Note: The `pos` argument is LTR/RTL aware, so callers should be aware too
             * if intending to provide behavior on horizontal edges.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.16
             * @run-last
             */
            "edge-reached": (arg0: PositionType) => void;
            /**
             * The ::move-focus-out signal is a
             * [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal] which gets
             * emitted when focus is moved away from the scrolled window by a
             * keybinding. The {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.move_focus | Gtk.Widget::move-focus} signal is emitted with
             * `direction_type` on this scrolled window’s toplevel parent in the
             * container hierarchy. The default bindings for this signal are
             * `Ctrl + Tab` to move forward and `Ctrl + Shift + Tab` to move backward.
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "move-focus-out": (arg0: DirectionType) => void;
            /**
             * The ::scroll-child signal is a
             * [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted when a keybinding that scrolls is pressed.
             * The horizontal or vertical adjustment is updated which triggers a
             * signal that the scrolled window’s child may listen to and scroll itself.
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "scroll-child": (arg0: ScrollType, arg1: boolean) => boolean | void;
            "notify::hadjustment": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hscrollbar-policy": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::kinetic-scrolling": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::max-content-height": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::max-content-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::min-content-height": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::min-content-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::overlay-scrolling": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::propagate-natural-height": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::propagate-natural-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::shadow-type": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vadjustment": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vscrollbar-policy": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window-placement": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window-placement-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Bin.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {
            hadjustment: Adjustment;
            hscrollbar_policy: PolicyType;
            hscrollbarPolicy: PolicyType;
            kinetic_scrolling: boolean;
            kineticScrolling: boolean;
            max_content_height: number;
            maxContentHeight: number;
            max_content_width: number;
            maxContentWidth: number;
            min_content_height: number;
            minContentHeight: number;
            min_content_width: number;
            minContentWidth: number;
            overlay_scrolling: boolean;
            overlayScrolling: boolean;
            propagate_natural_height: boolean;
            propagateNaturalHeight: boolean;
            propagate_natural_width: boolean;
            propagateNaturalWidth: boolean;
            shadow_type: ShadowType;
            shadowType: ShadowType;
            vadjustment: Adjustment;
            vscrollbar_policy: PolicyType;
            vscrollbarPolicy: PolicyType;
            window_placement: CornerType;
            windowPlacement: CornerType;
            window_placement_set: boolean;
            windowPlacementSet: boolean;
        }
    }

    /**
     * GtkScrolledWindow is a container that accepts a single child widget and makes
     * that child scrollable using either internally added scrollbars or externally
     * associated adjustments.
     * 
     * Widgets with native scrolling support, i.e. those whose classes implement the
     * {@link Gtk.Scrollable} interface, are added directly. For other types of widget, the
     * class {@link Gtk.Viewport} acts as an adaptor, giving scrollability to other widgets.
     * GtkScrolledWindow’s implementation of `gtk_container_add()` intelligently
     * accounts for whether or not the added child is a {@link Gtk.Scrollable}. If it isn’t,
     * {@link Gtk.ScrolledWindow} wraps the child in a {@link Gtk.Viewport} and adds that for you.
     * Therefore, you can just add any child widget and not worry about the details.
     * 
     * If `gtk_container_add()` has added a {@link Gtk.Viewport} for you, you can remove
     * both your added child widget from the {@link Gtk.Viewport}, and the {@link Gtk.Viewport}
     * from the GtkScrolledWindow, like this:
     * 
     * 
     * ```c
     * GtkWidget *scrolled_window = gtk_scrolled_window_new (NULL, NULL);
     * GtkWidget *child_widget = gtk_button_new ();
     * 
     * // GtkButton is not a GtkScrollable, so GtkScrolledWindow will automatically
     * // add a GtkViewport.
     * gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (scrolled_window),
     *                    child_widget);
     * 
     * // Either of these will result in child_widget being unparented:
     * gtk_container_remove (GTK_CONTAINER (scrolled_window),
     *                       child_widget);
     * // or
     * gtk_container_remove (GTK_CONTAINER (scrolled_window),
     *                       gtk_bin_get_child (GTK_BIN (scrolled_window)));
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * Unless {@link Gtk.ScrolledWindow.policy} is GTK_POLICY_NEVER or GTK_POLICY_EXTERNAL,
     * GtkScrolledWindow adds internal {@link Gtk.Scrollbar} widgets around its child. The
     * scroll position of the child, and if applicable the scrollbars, is controlled
     * by the {@link Gtk.ScrolledWindow.hadjustment} and {@link Gtk.ScrolledWindow.vadjustment}
     * that are associated with the GtkScrolledWindow. See the docs on {@link Gtk.Scrollbar}
     * for the details, but note that the “step_increment” and “page_increment”
     * fields are only effective if the policy causes scrollbars to be present.
     * 
     * If a GtkScrolledWindow doesn’t behave quite as you would like, or
     * doesn’t have exactly the right layout, it’s very possible to set up
     * your own scrolling with {@link Gtk.Scrollbar} and for example a {@link Gtk.Grid}.
     * 
     * # Touch support
     * 
     * GtkScrolledWindow has built-in support for touch devices. When a
     * touchscreen is used, swiping will move the scrolled window, and will
     * expose 'kinetic' behavior. This can be turned off with the
     * {@link Gtk.ScrolledWindow.kinetic_scrolling} property if it is undesired.
     * 
     * GtkScrolledWindow also displays visual 'overshoot' indication when
     * the content is pulled beyond the end, and this situation can be
     * captured with the {@link Gtk.ScrolledWindow.SignalSignatures.edge_overshot | Gtk.ScrolledWindow::edge-overshot} signal.
     * 
     * If no mouse device is present, the scrollbars will overlayed as
     * narrow, auto-hiding indicators over the content. If traditional
     * scrollbars are desired although no mouse is present, this behaviour
     * can be turned off with the {@link Gtk.ScrolledWindow.overlay_scrolling}
     * property.
     * 
     * # CSS nodes
     * 
     * GtkScrolledWindow has a main CSS node with name scrolledwindow.
     * 
     * It uses subnodes with names overshoot and undershoot to
     * draw the overflow and underflow indications. These nodes get
     * the .left, .right, .top or .bottom style class added depending
     * on where the indication is drawn.
     * 
     * GtkScrolledWindow also sets the positional style classes (.left,
     * .right, .top, .bottom) and style classes related to overlay
     * scrolling (.overlay-indicator, .dragging, .hovering) on its scrollbars.
     * 
     * If both scrollbars are visible, the area where they meet is drawn
     * with a subnode named junction.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class ScrolledWindow extends Bin implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ScrolledWindow>;

        // Properties
        get hadjustment(): Adjustment;
        set hadjustment(val: Adjustment);

        /**
         * @default Gtk.PolicyType.AUTOMATIC
         */
        get hscrollbar_policy(): PolicyType;
        set hscrollbar_policy(val: PolicyType);

        /**
         * @default Gtk.PolicyType.AUTOMATIC
         */
        get hscrollbarPolicy(): PolicyType;
        set hscrollbarPolicy(val: PolicyType);

        /**
         * Whether kinetic scrolling is enabled or not. Kinetic scrolling
         * only applies to devices with source {@link Gdk.InputSource.TOUCHSCREEN}.
         * @since 3.4
         * @default true
         */
        get kinetic_scrolling(): boolean;
        set kinetic_scrolling(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether kinetic scrolling is enabled or not. Kinetic scrolling
         * only applies to devices with source {@link Gdk.InputSource.TOUCHSCREEN}.
         * @since 3.4
         * @default true
         */
        get kineticScrolling(): boolean;
        set kineticScrolling(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The maximum content height of `scrolled_window`, or -1 if not set.
         * @since 3.22
         * @default -1
         */
        get max_content_height(): number;
        set max_content_height(val: number);

        /**
         * The maximum content height of `scrolled_window`, or -1 if not set.
         * @since 3.22
         * @default -1
         */
        get maxContentHeight(): number;
        set maxContentHeight(val: number);

        /**
         * The maximum content width of `scrolled_window`, or -1 if not set.
         * @since 3.22
         * @default -1
         */
        get max_content_width(): number;
        set max_content_width(val: number);

        /**
         * The maximum content width of `scrolled_window`, or -1 if not set.
         * @since 3.22
         * @default -1
         */
        get maxContentWidth(): number;
        set maxContentWidth(val: number);

        /**
         * The minimum content height of `scrolled_window`, or -1 if not set.
         * @since 3.0
         * @default -1
         */
        get min_content_height(): number;
        set min_content_height(val: number);

        /**
         * The minimum content height of `scrolled_window`, or -1 if not set.
         * @since 3.0
         * @default -1
         */
        get minContentHeight(): number;
        set minContentHeight(val: number);

        /**
         * The minimum content width of `scrolled_window`, or -1 if not set.
         * @since 3.0
         * @default -1
         */
        get min_content_width(): number;
        set min_content_width(val: number);

        /**
         * The minimum content width of `scrolled_window`, or -1 if not set.
         * @since 3.0
         * @default -1
         */
        get minContentWidth(): number;
        set minContentWidth(val: number);

        /**
         * Whether overlay scrolling is enabled or not. If it is, the
         * scrollbars are only added as traditional widgets when a mouse
         * is present. Otherwise, they are overlayed on top of the content,
         * as narrow indicators.
         * 
         * Note that overlay scrolling can also be globally disabled, with
         * the {@link Gtk.Settings.SignalSignatures.gtk_overlay_scrolling | Gtk.Settings::gtk-overlay-scrolling} setting.
         * @since 3.16
         * @default true
         */
        get overlay_scrolling(): boolean;
        set overlay_scrolling(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether overlay scrolling is enabled or not. If it is, the
         * scrollbars are only added as traditional widgets when a mouse
         * is present. Otherwise, they are overlayed on top of the content,
         * as narrow indicators.
         * 
         * Note that overlay scrolling can also be globally disabled, with
         * the {@link Gtk.Settings.SignalSignatures.gtk_overlay_scrolling | Gtk.Settings::gtk-overlay-scrolling} setting.
         * @since 3.16
         * @default true
         */
        get overlayScrolling(): boolean;
        set overlayScrolling(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether the natural height of the child should be calculated and propagated
         * through the scrolled window’s requested natural height.
         * 
         * This is useful in cases where an attempt should be made to allocate exactly
         * enough space for the natural size of the child.
         * @since 3.22
         * @default false
         */
        get propagate_natural_height(): boolean;
        set propagate_natural_height(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether the natural height of the child should be calculated and propagated
         * through the scrolled window’s requested natural height.
         * 
         * This is useful in cases where an attempt should be made to allocate exactly
         * enough space for the natural size of the child.
         * @since 3.22
         * @default false
         */
        get propagateNaturalHeight(): boolean;
        set propagateNaturalHeight(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether the natural width of the child should be calculated and propagated
         * through the scrolled window’s requested natural width.
         * 
         * This is useful in cases where an attempt should be made to allocate exactly
         * enough space for the natural size of the child.
         * @since 3.22
         * @default false
         */
        get propagate_natural_width(): boolean;
        set propagate_natural_width(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether the natural width of the child should be calculated and propagated
         * through the scrolled window’s requested natural width.
         * 
         * This is useful in cases where an attempt should be made to allocate exactly
         * enough space for the natural size of the child.
         * @since 3.22
         * @default false
         */
        get propagateNaturalWidth(): boolean;
        set propagateNaturalWidth(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default Gtk.ShadowType.NONE
         */
        get shadow_type(): ShadowType;
        set shadow_type(val: ShadowType);

        /**
         * @default Gtk.ShadowType.NONE
         */
        get shadowType(): ShadowType;
        set shadowType(val: ShadowType);

        get vadjustment(): Adjustment;
        set vadjustment(val: Adjustment);

        /**
         * @default Gtk.PolicyType.AUTOMATIC
         */
        get vscrollbar_policy(): PolicyType;
        set vscrollbar_policy(val: PolicyType);

        /**
         * @default Gtk.PolicyType.AUTOMATIC
         */
        get vscrollbarPolicy(): PolicyType;
        set vscrollbarPolicy(val: PolicyType);

        /**
         * @default Gtk.CornerType.TOP_LEFT
         */
        get window_placement(): CornerType;
        set window_placement(val: CornerType);

        /**
         * @default Gtk.CornerType.TOP_LEFT
         */
        get windowPlacement(): CornerType;
        set windowPlacement(val: CornerType);

        /**
         * Whether "window-placement" should be used to determine the location
         * of the contents with respect to the scrollbars.
         * @since 2.10
         * @deprecated since 3.10: This value is ignored and {@link Gtk.ScrolledWindow.window_placement} value is always honored.
         * @default true
         */
        get window_placement_set(): boolean;
        set window_placement_set(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether "window-placement" should be used to determine the location
         * of the contents with respect to the scrollbars.
         * @since 2.10
         * @deprecated since 3.10: This value is ignored and {@link Gtk.ScrolledWindow.window_placement} value is always honored.
         * @default true
         */
        get windowPlacementSet(): boolean;
        set windowPlacementSet(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: ScrolledWindow.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        container: Bin;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<ScrolledWindow.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](hadjustment: Adjustment | null, vadjustment: Adjustment | null): ScrolledWindow;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof ScrolledWindow.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ScrolledWindow.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof ScrolledWindow.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ScrolledWindow.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof ScrolledWindow.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<ScrolledWindow.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * Keybinding signal which gets emitted when focus is
         *    moved away from the scrolled window by a keybinding.
         * @param direction 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_move_focus_out(direction: DirectionType): void;

        /**
         * Keybinding signal which gets emitted when a
         *    keybinding that scrolls is pressed.
         * @param scroll 
         * @param horizontal 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_scroll_child(scroll: ScrollType, horizontal: boolean): boolean;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Used to add children without native scrolling capabilities. This
         * is simply a convenience function; it is equivalent to adding the
         * unscrollable child to a viewport, then adding the viewport to the
         * scrolled window. If a child has native scrolling, use
         * `gtk_container_add()` instead of this function.
         * 
         * The viewport scrolls the child by moving its {@link Gdk.Window}, and takes
         * the size of the child to be the size of its toplevel {@link Gdk.Window}.
         * This will be very wrong for most widgets that support native scrolling;
         * for example, if you add a widget such as {@link Gtk.TreeView} with a viewport,
         * the whole widget will scroll, including the column headings. Thus,
         * widgets with native scrolling support should not be used with the
         * {@link Gtk.Viewport} proxy.
         * 
         * A widget supports scrolling natively if it implements the
         * {@link Gtk.Scrollable} interface.
         * @param child the widget you want to scroll
         */
        add_with_viewport(child: Widget): void;

        /**
         * Return whether button presses are captured during kinetic
         * scrolling. See `gtk_scrolled_window_set_capture_button_press()`.
         * @returns `true` if button presses are captured during kinetic scrolling
         */
        get_capture_button_press(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the horizontal scrollbar’s adjustment, used to connect the
         * horizontal scrollbar to the child widget’s horizontal scroll
         * functionality.
         * @returns the horizontal {@link Gtk.Adjustment}
         */
        get_hadjustment(): Adjustment;

        /**
         * Returns the horizontal scrollbar of `scrolled_window`.
         * @returns the horizontal scrollbar of the scrolled window.
         */
        get_hscrollbar(): Widget;

        /**
         * Returns the specified kinetic scrolling behavior.
         * @returns the scrolling behavior flags.
         */
        get_kinetic_scrolling(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the maximum content height set.
         * @returns the maximum content height, or -1
         */
        get_max_content_height(): number;

        /**
         * Returns the maximum content width set.
         * @returns the maximum content width, or -1
         */
        get_max_content_width(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the minimal content height of `scrolled_window`, or -1 if not set.
         * @returns the minimal content height
         */
        get_min_content_height(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the minimum content width of `scrolled_window`, or -1 if not set.
         * @returns the minimum content width
         */
        get_min_content_width(): number;

        /**
         * Returns whether overlay scrolling is enabled for this scrolled window.
         * @returns `true` if overlay scrolling is enabled
         */
        get_overlay_scrolling(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the placement of the contents with respect to the scrollbars
         * for the scrolled window. See `gtk_scrolled_window_set_placement()`.
         * @returns the current placement value. See also `gtk_scrolled_window_set_placement()` and `gtk_scrolled_window_unset_placement()`.
         */
        get_placement(): CornerType;

        /**
         * Retrieves the current policy values for the horizontal and vertical
         * scrollbars. See `gtk_scrolled_window_set_policy()`.
         */
        get_policy(): [PolicyType | null, PolicyType | null];

        /**
         * Reports whether the natural height of the child will be calculated and propagated
         * through the scrolled window’s requested natural height.
         * @returns whether natural height propagation is enabled.
         */
        get_propagate_natural_height(): boolean;

        /**
         * Reports whether the natural width of the child will be calculated and propagated
         * through the scrolled window’s requested natural width.
         * @returns whether natural width propagation is enabled.
         */
        get_propagate_natural_width(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the shadow type of the scrolled window. See
         * `gtk_scrolled_window_set_shadow_type()`.
         * @returns the current shadow type
         */
        get_shadow_type(): ShadowType;

        /**
         * Returns the vertical scrollbar’s adjustment, used to connect the
         * vertical scrollbar to the child widget’s vertical scroll functionality.
         * @returns the vertical {@link Gtk.Adjustment}
         */
        get_vadjustment(): Adjustment;

        /**
         * Returns the vertical scrollbar of `scrolled_window`.
         * @returns the vertical scrollbar of the scrolled window.
         */
        get_vscrollbar(): Widget;

        /**
         * Changes the behaviour of `scrolled_window` with regard to the initial
         * event that possibly starts kinetic scrolling. When `capture_button_press`
         * is set to `true`, the event is captured by the scrolled window, and
         * then later replayed if it is meant to go to the child widget.
         * 
         * This should be enabled if any child widgets perform non-reversible
         * actions on {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.button_press_event | Gtk.Widget::button-press-event}. If they don't, and handle
         * additionally handle {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.grab_broken_event | Gtk.Widget::grab-broken-event}, it might be better
         * to set `capture_button_press` to `false`.
         * 
         * This setting only has an effect if kinetic scrolling is enabled.
         * @param capture_button_press `true` to capture button presses
         */
        set_capture_button_press(capture_button_press: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.Adjustment} for the horizontal scrollbar.
         * @param hadjustment the {@link Gtk.Adjustment} to use, or `null` to create a new one
         */
        set_hadjustment(hadjustment: Adjustment | null): void;

        /**
         * Turns kinetic scrolling on or off.
         * Kinetic scrolling only applies to devices with source
         * {@link Gdk.InputSource.TOUCHSCREEN}.
         * @param kinetic_scrolling `true` to enable kinetic scrolling
         */
        set_kinetic_scrolling(kinetic_scrolling: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the maximum height that `scrolled_window` should keep visible. The
         * `scrolled_window` will grow up to this height before it starts scrolling
         * the content.
         * 
         * It is a programming error to set the maximum content height to a value
         * smaller than {@link Gtk.ScrolledWindow.min_content_height}.
         * @param height the maximum content height
         */
        set_max_content_height(height: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the maximum width that `scrolled_window` should keep visible. The
         * `scrolled_window` will grow up to this width before it starts scrolling
         * the content.
         * 
         * It is a programming error to set the maximum content width to a value
         * smaller than {@link Gtk.ScrolledWindow.min_content_width}.
         * @param width the maximum content width
         */
        set_max_content_width(width: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the minimum height that `scrolled_window` should keep visible.
         * Note that this can and (usually will) be smaller than the minimum
         * size of the content.
         * 
         * It is a programming error to set the minimum content height to a
         * value greater than {@link Gtk.ScrolledWindow.max_content_height}.
         * @param height the minimal content height
         */
        set_min_content_height(height: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the minimum width that `scrolled_window` should keep visible.
         * Note that this can and (usually will) be smaller than the minimum
         * size of the content.
         * 
         * It is a programming error to set the minimum content width to a
         * value greater than {@link Gtk.ScrolledWindow.max_content_width}.
         * @param width the minimal content width
         */
        set_min_content_width(width: number): void;

        /**
         * Enables or disables overlay scrolling for this scrolled window.
         * @param overlay_scrolling whether to enable overlay scrolling
         */
        set_overlay_scrolling(overlay_scrolling: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the placement of the contents with respect to the scrollbars
         * for the scrolled window.
         * 
         * The default is {@link Gtk.CornerType.TOP_LEFT}, meaning the child is
         * in the top left, with the scrollbars underneath and to the right.
         * Other values in {@link Gtk.CornerType} are {@link Gtk.CornerType.TOP_RIGHT},
         * {@link Gtk.CornerType.BOTTOM_LEFT}, and {@link Gtk.CornerType.BOTTOM_RIGHT}.
         * 
         * See also `gtk_scrolled_window_get_placement()` and
         * `gtk_scrolled_window_unset_placement()`.
         * @param window_placement position of the child window
         */
        set_placement(window_placement: CornerType): void;

        /**
         * Sets the scrollbar policy for the horizontal and vertical scrollbars.
         * 
         * The policy determines when the scrollbar should appear; it is a value
         * from the {@link Gtk.PolicyType} enumeration. If {@link Gtk.PolicyType.ALWAYS}, the
         * scrollbar is always present; if {@link Gtk.PolicyType.NEVER}, the scrollbar is
         * never present; if {@link Gtk.PolicyType.AUTOMATIC}, the scrollbar is present only
         * if needed (that is, if the slider part of the bar would be smaller
         * than the trough — the display is larger than the page size).
         * @param hscrollbar_policy policy for horizontal bar
         * @param vscrollbar_policy policy for vertical bar
         */
        set_policy(hscrollbar_policy: PolicyType, vscrollbar_policy: PolicyType): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the natural height of the child should be calculated and propagated
         * through the scrolled window’s requested natural height.
         * @param propagate whether to propagate natural height
         */
        set_propagate_natural_height(propagate: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the natural width of the child should be calculated and propagated
         * through the scrolled window’s requested natural width.
         * @param propagate whether to propagate natural width
         */
        set_propagate_natural_width(propagate: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Changes the type of shadow drawn around the contents of
         * `scrolled_window`.
         * @param type kind of shadow to draw around scrolled window contents
         */
        set_shadow_type(type: ShadowType): void;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.Adjustment} for the vertical scrollbar.
         * @param vadjustment the {@link Gtk.Adjustment} to use, or `null` to create a new one
         */
        set_vadjustment(vadjustment: Adjustment | null): void;

        /**
         * Unsets the placement of the contents with respect to the scrollbars
         * for the scrolled window. If no window placement is set for a scrolled
         * window, it defaults to {@link Gtk.CornerType.TOP_LEFT}.
         * 
         * See also `gtk_scrolled_window_set_placement()` and
         * `gtk_scrolled_window_get_placement()`.
         */
        unset_placement(): void;
    }


    namespace ScrolledWindowAccessible {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends ContainerAccessible.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-layer": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-mdi-zorder": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-help-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-hypertext-nlinks": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption-object": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-summary": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends ContainerAccessible.ConstructorProps, Atk.Component.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class ScrolledWindowAccessible extends ContainerAccessible implements Atk.Component {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ScrolledWindowAccessible>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: ScrolledWindowAccessible.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<ScrolledWindowAccessible.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof ScrolledWindowAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ScrolledWindowAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof ScrolledWindowAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ScrolledWindowAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof ScrolledWindowAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<ScrolledWindowAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;
    }


    namespace SearchBar {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Bin.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::search-mode-enabled": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::show-close-button": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Bin.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {
            search_mode_enabled: boolean;
            searchModeEnabled: boolean;
            show_close_button: boolean;
            showCloseButton: boolean;
        }
    }

    /**
     * {@link Gtk.SearchBar} is a container made to have a search entry (possibly
     * with additional connex widgets, such as drop-down menus, or buttons)
     * built-in. The search bar would appear when a search is started through
     * typing on the keyboard, or the application’s search mode is toggled on.
     * 
     * For keyboard presses to start a search, events will need to be
     * forwarded from the top-level window that contains the search bar.
     * See `gtk_search_bar_handle_event()` for example code. Common shortcuts
     * such as Ctrl+F should be handled as an application action, or through
     * the menu items.
     * 
     * You will also need to tell the search bar about which entry you
     * are using as your search entry using `gtk_search_bar_connect_entry()`.
     * The following example shows you how to create a more complex search
     * entry.
     * 
     * # CSS nodes
     * 
     * GtkSearchBar has a single CSS node with name searchbar.
     * 
     * ## Creating a search bar
     * 
     * [A simple example](https://gitlab.gnome.org/GNOME/gtk/blob/gtk-3-24/examples/search-bar.c)
     * @gir-type Class
     * @since 3.10
     */
    class SearchBar extends Bin implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<SearchBar>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get search_mode_enabled(): boolean;
        set search_mode_enabled(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get searchModeEnabled(): boolean;
        set searchModeEnabled(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get show_close_button(): boolean;
        set show_close_button(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get showCloseButton(): boolean;
        set showCloseButton(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: SearchBar.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<SearchBar.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): SearchBar;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof SearchBar.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, SearchBar.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof SearchBar.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, SearchBar.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof SearchBar.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<SearchBar.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Connects the {@link Gtk.Entry} widget passed as the one to be used in
         * this search bar. The entry should be a descendant of the search bar.
         * This is only required if the entry isn’t the direct child of the
         * search bar (as in our main example).
         * @param entry a {@link Gtk.Entry}
         */
        connect_entry(entry: Entry): void;

        /**
         * Returns whether the search mode is on or off.
         * @returns whether search mode is toggled on
         */
        get_search_mode(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns whether the close button is shown.
         * @returns whether the close button is shown
         */
        get_show_close_button(): boolean;

        /**
         * This function should be called when the top-level
         * window which contains the search bar received a key event.
         * 
         * If the key event is handled by the search bar, the bar will
         * be shown, the entry populated with the entered text and `GDK_EVENT_STOP`
         * will be returned. The caller should ensure that events are
         * not propagated further.
         * 
         * If no entry has been connected to the search bar, using
         * `gtk_search_bar_connect_entry()`, this function will return
         * immediately with a warning.
         * 
         * ## Showing the search bar on key presses
         * 
         * 
         * ```c
         * static gboolean
         * on_key_press_event (GtkWidget *widget,
         *                     GdkEvent  *event,
         *                     gpointer   user_data)
         * {
         *   GtkSearchBar *bar = GTK_SEARCH_BAR (user_data);
         *   return gtk_search_bar_handle_event (bar, event);
         * }
         * 
         * static void
         * create_toplevel (void)
         * {
         *   GtkWidget *window = gtk_window_new (GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
         *   GtkWindow *search_bar = gtk_search_bar_new ();
         * 
         *  // Add more widgets to the window...
         * 
         *   g_signal_connect (window,
         *                    "key-press-event",
         *                     G_CALLBACK (on_key_press_event),
         *                     search_bar);
         * }
         * ```
         * 
         * @param event a {@link Gdk.Event} containing key press events
         * @returns `GDK_EVENT_STOP` if the key press event resulted     in text being entered in the search entry (and revealing     the search bar if necessary), `GDK_EVENT_PROPAGATE` otherwise.
         */
        handle_event(event: Gdk.Event): boolean;

        /**
         * Switches the search mode on or off.
         * @param search_mode the new state of the search mode
         */
        set_search_mode(search_mode: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Shows or hides the close button. Applications that
         * already have a “search” toggle button should not show a close
         * button in their search bar, as it duplicates the role of the
         * toggle button.
         * @param visible whether the close button will be shown or not
         */
        set_show_close_button(visible: boolean): void;
    }


    namespace SearchEntry {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Entry.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * The ::next-match signal is a [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted when the user initiates a move to the next match
             * for the current search string.
             * 
             * Applications should connect to it, to implement moving between
             * matches.
             * 
             * The default bindings for this signal is Ctrl-g.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.16
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "next-match": () => void;
            /**
             * The ::previous-match signal is a [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted when the user initiates a move to the previous match
             * for the current search string.
             * 
             * Applications should connect to it, to implement moving between
             * matches.
             * 
             * The default bindings for this signal is Ctrl-Shift-g.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.16
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "previous-match": () => void;
            /**
             * The {@link Gtk.SearchEntry.SignalSignatures.search_changed | Gtk.SearchEntry::search-changed} signal is emitted with a short
             * delay of 150 milliseconds after the last change to the entry text.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.10
             * @run-last
             */
            "search-changed": () => void;
            /**
             * The ::stop-search signal is a [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted when the user stops a search via keyboard input.
             * 
             * Applications should connect to it, to implement hiding the search
             * entry in this case.
             * 
             * The default bindings for this signal is Escape.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.16
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "stop-search": () => void;
            "notify::activates-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::attributes": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::buffer": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::caps-lock-warning": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::completion": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::cursor-position": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::editable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::enable-emoji-completion": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-frame": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::im-module": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::inner-border": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::input-hints": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::input-purpose": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::invisible-char": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::invisible-char-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::max-length": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::max-width-chars": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::overwrite-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::placeholder-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::populate-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::primary-icon-activatable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::primary-icon-gicon": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::primary-icon-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::primary-icon-pixbuf": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::primary-icon-sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::primary-icon-stock": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::primary-icon-storage-type": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::primary-icon-tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::primary-icon-tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::progress-fraction": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::progress-pulse-step": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scroll-offset": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::secondary-icon-activatable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::secondary-icon-gicon": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::secondary-icon-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::secondary-icon-pixbuf": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::secondary-icon-sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::secondary-icon-stock": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::secondary-icon-storage-type": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::secondary-icon-tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::secondary-icon-tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::selection-bound": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::shadow-type": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::show-emoji-icon": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tabs": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::text-length": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::truncate-multiline": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visibility": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-chars": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::xalign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::editing-canceled": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Entry.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, CellEditable.ConstructorProps, Editable.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * {@link Gtk.SearchEntry} is a subclass of {@link Gtk.Entry} that has been
     * tailored for use as a search entry.
     * 
     * It will show an inactive symbolic “find” icon when the search
     * entry is empty, and a symbolic “clear” icon when there is text.
     * Clicking on the “clear” icon will empty the search entry.
     * 
     * Note that the search/clear icon is shown using a secondary
     * icon, and thus does not work if you are using the secondary
     * icon position for some other purpose.
     * 
     * To make filtering appear more reactive, it is a good idea to
     * not react to every change in the entry text immediately, but
     * only after a short delay. To support this, {@link Gtk.SearchEntry}
     * emits the {@link Gtk.SearchEntry.SignalSignatures.search_changed | Gtk.SearchEntry::search-changed} signal which can
     * be used instead of the {@link Gtk.Editable.SignalSignatures.changed | Gtk.Editable::changed} signal.
     * 
     * The {@link Gtk.SearchEntry.SignalSignatures.previous_match | Gtk.SearchEntry::previous-match}, {@link Gtk.SearchEntry.SignalSignatures.next_match | Gtk.SearchEntry::next-match}
     * and {@link Gtk.SearchEntry.SignalSignatures.stop_search | Gtk.SearchEntry::stop-search} signals can be used to implement
     * moving between search results and ending the search.
     * 
     * Often, GtkSearchEntry will be fed events by means of being
     * placed inside a {@link Gtk.SearchBar}. If that is not the case,
     * you can use `gtk_search_entry_handle_event()` to pass events.
     * @gir-type Class
     * @since 3.6
     */
    class SearchEntry extends Entry implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable, CellEditable, Editable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<SearchEntry>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: SearchEntry.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<SearchEntry.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): SearchEntry;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof SearchEntry.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, SearchEntry.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof SearchEntry.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, SearchEntry.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof SearchEntry.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<SearchEntry.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_next_match(): void;

        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_previous_match(): void;

        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_search_changed(): void;

        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_stop_search(): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * This function should be called when the top-level window
         * which contains the search entry received a key event. If
         * the entry is part of a {@link Gtk.SearchBar}, it is preferable
         * to call `gtk_search_bar_handle_event()` instead, which will
         * reveal the entry in addition to passing the event to this
         * function.
         * 
         * If the key event is handled by the search entry and starts
         * or continues a search, `GDK_EVENT_STOP` will be returned.
         * The caller should ensure that the entry is shown in this
         * case, and not propagate the event further.
         * @param event a key event
         * @returns `GDK_EVENT_STOP` if the key press event resulted     in a search beginning or continuing, `GDK_EVENT_PROPAGATE`     otherwise.
         */
        handle_event(event: Gdk.Event): boolean;

        /**
         * Indicates whether editing on the cell has been canceled.
         * @since 2.20
         * @default false
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.CellEditable
         */
        get editing_canceled(): boolean;
        set editing_canceled(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Indicates whether editing on the cell has been canceled.
         * @since 2.20
         * @default false
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.CellEditable
         */
        get editingCanceled(): boolean;
        set editingCanceled(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.CellEditable.SignalSignatures.editing_done | Gtk.CellEditable::editing-done} signal.
         */
        editing_done(): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.CellEditable.SignalSignatures.remove_widget | Gtk.CellEditable::remove-widget} signal.
         */
        remove_widget(): void;

        /**
         * Begins editing on a `cell_editable`.
         * 
         * The {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} for the cell creates and returns a {@link Gtk.CellEditable} from
         * `gtk_cell_renderer_start_editing()`, configured for the {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} type.
         * 
         * `gtk_cell_editable_start_editing()` can then set up `cell_editable` suitably for
         * editing a cell, e.g. making the Esc key emit {@link Gtk.CellEditable.SignalSignatures.editing_done | Gtk.CellEditable::editing-done}.
         * 
         * Note that the `cell_editable` is created on-demand for the current edit; its
         * lifetime is temporary and does not persist across other edits and/or cells.
         * @param event The {@link Gdk.Event} that began the editing process, or   `null` if editing was initiated programmatically
         */
        start_editing(event: Gdk.Event | null): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.CellEditable.SignalSignatures.editing_done | Gtk.CellEditable::editing-done} signal.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_editing_done(): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.CellEditable.SignalSignatures.remove_widget | Gtk.CellEditable::remove-widget} signal.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_remove_widget(): void;

        /**
         * Begins editing on a `cell_editable`.
         * 
         * The {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} for the cell creates and returns a {@link Gtk.CellEditable} from
         * `gtk_cell_renderer_start_editing()`, configured for the {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} type.
         * 
         * `gtk_cell_editable_start_editing()` can then set up `cell_editable` suitably for
         * editing a cell, e.g. making the Esc key emit {@link Gtk.CellEditable.SignalSignatures.editing_done | Gtk.CellEditable::editing-done}.
         * 
         * Note that the `cell_editable` is created on-demand for the current edit; its
         * lifetime is temporary and does not persist across other edits and/or cells.
         * @param event The {@link Gdk.Event} that began the editing process, or   `null` if editing was initiated programmatically
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_start_editing(event: Gdk.Event | null): void;

        /**
         * Copies the contents of the currently selected content in the editable and
         * puts it on the clipboard.
         */
        copy_clipboard(): void;

        /**
         * Removes the contents of the currently selected content in the editable and
         * puts it on the clipboard.
         */
        cut_clipboard(): void;

        /**
         * Deletes the currently selected text of the editable.
         * This call doesn’t do anything if there is no selected text.
         */
        delete_selection(): void;

        /**
         * Deletes a sequence of characters. The characters that are deleted are
         * those characters at positions from `start_pos` up to, but not including
         * `end_pos`. If `end_pos` is negative, then the characters deleted
         * are those from `start_pos` to the end of the text.
         * 
         * Note that the positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
         * @param start_pos start position
         * @param end_pos end position
         */
        delete_text(start_pos: number, end_pos: number): void;

        /**
         * Retrieves a sequence of characters. The characters that are retrieved
         * are those characters at positions from `start_pos` up to, but not
         * including `end_pos`. If `end_pos` is negative, then the characters
         * retrieved are those characters from `start_pos` to the end of the text.
         * 
         * Note that positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
         * @param start_pos start of text
         * @param end_pos end of text
         * @returns a pointer to the contents of the widget as a      string. This string is allocated by the {@link Gtk.Editable}      implementation and should be freed by the caller.
         */
        get_chars(start_pos: number, end_pos: number): string;

        /**
         * Retrieves whether `editable` is editable. See
         * `gtk_editable_set_editable()`.
         * @returns `true` if `editable` is editable.
         */
        get_editable(): boolean;

        /**
         * Retrieves the current position of the cursor relative to the start
         * of the content of the editable.
         * 
         * Note that this position is in characters, not in bytes.
         * @returns the cursor position
         */
        get_position(): number;

        /**
         * Retrieves the selection bound of the editable. start_pos will be filled
         * with the start of the selection and `end_pos` with end. If no text was
         * selected both will be identical and `false` will be returned.
         * 
         * Note that positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
         * @returns `true` if an area is selected, `false` otherwise
         */
        get_selection_bounds(): [boolean, number, number];

        /**
         * Inserts `new_text_length` bytes of `new_text` into the contents of the
         * widget, at position `position`.
         * 
         * Note that the position is in characters, not in bytes.
         * The function updates `position` to point after the newly inserted text.
         * @param new_text the text to append
         * @param new_text_length the length of the text in bytes, or -1
         * @param position location of the position text will be inserted at
         */
        insert_text(new_text: string, new_text_length: number, position: number): number;

        /**
         * Pastes the content of the clipboard to the current position of the
         * cursor in the editable.
         */
        paste_clipboard(): void;

        /**
         * Selects a region of text. The characters that are selected are
         * those characters at positions from `start_pos` up to, but not
         * including `end_pos`. If `end_pos` is negative, then the
         * characters selected are those characters from `start_pos` to
         * the end of the text.
         * 
         * Note that positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
         * @param start_pos start of region
         * @param end_pos end of region
         */
        select_region(start_pos: number, end_pos: number): void;

        /**
         * Determines if the user can edit the text in the editable
         * widget or not.
         * @param is_editable `true` if the user is allowed to edit the text   in the widget
         */
        set_editable(is_editable: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the cursor position in the editable to the given value.
         * 
         * The cursor is displayed before the character with the given (base 0)
         * index in the contents of the editable. The value must be less than or
         * equal to the number of characters in the editable. A value of -1
         * indicates that the position should be set after the last character
         * of the editable. Note that `position` is in characters, not in bytes.
         * @param position the position of the cursor
         */
        set_position(position: number): void;

        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_changed(): void;

        /**
         * Deletes a sequence of characters. The characters that are deleted are
         * those characters at positions from `start_pos` up to, but not including
         * `end_pos`. If `end_pos` is negative, then the characters deleted
         * are those from `start_pos` to the end of the text.
         * 
         * Note that the positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
         * @param start_pos start position
         * @param end_pos end position
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_delete_text(start_pos: number, end_pos: number): void;

        /**
         * Deletes a sequence of characters. The characters that are deleted are
         * those characters at positions from `start_pos` up to, but not including
         * `end_pos`. If `end_pos` is negative, then the characters deleted
         * are those from `start_pos` to the end of the text.
         * 
         * Note that the positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
         * @param start_pos start position
         * @param end_pos end position
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_do_delete_text(start_pos: number, end_pos: number): void;

        /**
         * Inserts `new_text_length` bytes of `new_text` into the contents of the
         * widget, at position `position`.
         * 
         * Note that the position is in characters, not in bytes.
         * The function updates `position` to point after the newly inserted text.
         * @param new_text the text to append
         * @param new_text_length the length of the text in bytes, or -1
         * @param position location of the position text will be inserted at
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_do_insert_text(new_text: string, new_text_length: number, position: number): number;

        /**
         * Retrieves a sequence of characters. The characters that are retrieved
         * are those characters at positions from `start_pos` up to, but not
         * including `end_pos`. If `end_pos` is negative, then the characters
         * retrieved are those characters from `start_pos` to the end of the text.
         * 
         * Note that positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
         * @param start_pos start of text
         * @param end_pos end of text
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_chars(start_pos: number, end_pos: number): string;

        /**
         * Retrieves the current position of the cursor relative to the start
         * of the content of the editable.
         * 
         * Note that this position is in characters, not in bytes.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_position(): number;

        /**
         * Retrieves the selection bound of the editable. start_pos will be filled
         * with the start of the selection and `end_pos` with end. If no text was
         * selected both will be identical and `false` will be returned.
         * 
         * Note that positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_selection_bounds(): [boolean, number, number];

        /**
         * Inserts `new_text_length` bytes of `new_text` into the contents of the
         * widget, at position `position`.
         * 
         * Note that the position is in characters, not in bytes.
         * The function updates `position` to point after the newly inserted text.
         * @param new_text the text to append
         * @param new_text_length the length of the text in bytes, or -1
         * @param position location of the position text will be inserted at
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_insert_text(new_text: string, new_text_length: number, position: number): number;

        /**
         * Sets the cursor position in the editable to the given value.
         * 
         * The cursor is displayed before the character with the given (base 0)
         * index in the contents of the editable. The value must be less than or
         * equal to the number of characters in the editable. A value of -1
         * indicates that the position should be set after the last character
         * of the editable. Note that `position` is in characters, not in bytes.
         * @param position the position of the cursor
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_position(position: number): void;

        /**
         * Selects a region of text. The characters that are selected are
         * those characters at positions from `start_pos` up to, but not
         * including `end_pos`. If `end_pos` is negative, then the
         * characters selected are those characters from `start_pos` to
         * the end of the text.
         * 
         * Note that positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
         * @param start_pos start of region
         * @param end_pos end of region
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_selection_bounds(start_pos: number, end_pos: number): void;
    }


    namespace Separator {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Widget.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::orientation": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Widget.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, Orientable.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * GtkSeparator is a horizontal or vertical separator widget, depending on the
     * value of the {@link Gtk.Orientable.orientation} property, used to group the widgets
     * within a window. It displays a line with a shadow to make it appear sunken
     * into the interface.
     * 
     * # CSS nodes
     * 
     * GtkSeparator has a single CSS node with name separator. The node
     * gets one of the .horizontal or .vertical style classes.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class Separator extends Widget implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable, Orientable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<Separator>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: Separator.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        widget: Widget;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<Separator.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](orientation: Orientation): Separator;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof Separator.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Separator.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof Separator.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Separator.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof Separator.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<Separator.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        /**
         * The orientation of the orientable.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default Gtk.Orientation.HORIZONTAL
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Orientable
         */
        get orientation(): Orientation;
        set orientation(val: Orientation);

        /**
         * Adds a child to `buildable`. `type` is an optional string
         * describing how the child should be added.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child to add
         * @param type kind of child or `null`
         */
        add_child(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object, type: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Constructs a child of `buildable` with the name `name`.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} calls this function if a “constructor” has been
         * specified in the UI definition.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param name name of child to construct
         * @returns the constructed child
         */
        construct_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, name: string): T;

        /**
         * This is similar to `gtk_buildable_parser_finished()` but is
         * called once for each custom tag handled by the `buildable`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname the name of the tag
         * @param data user data created in custom_tag_start
         */
        custom_finished(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
         * the buildable.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @param data user data that will be passed in to parser functions
         */
        custom_tag_end(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called for each unknown element under `<child>`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @returns `true` if a object has a custom implementation, `false`          if it doesn't.
         */
        custom_tag_start(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string): [boolean, GLib.MarkupParser, null];

        /**
         * Get the internal child called `childname` of the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param childname name of child
         * @returns the internal child of the buildable object
         */
        get_internal_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, childname: string): T;

        /**
         * Gets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} sets the name based on the
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI]
         * used to construct the `buildable`.
         * @returns the name set with `gtk_buildable_set_name()`
         */
        get_name(): string;

        /**
         * Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI].
         * Note that this will be called once for each time
         * `gtk_builder_add_from_file()` or `gtk_builder_add_from_string()`
         * is called on a builder.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         */
        parser_finished(builder: Builder): void;

        /**
         * Sets the property name `name` to `value` on the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param name name of property
         * @param value value of property
         */
        set_buildable_property(builder: Builder, name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;

        /**
         * Sets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * @param name name to set
         */
        set_name(name: string): void;

        /**
         * Adds a child to `buildable`. `type` is an optional string
         * describing how the child should be added.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child to add
         * @param type kind of child or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add_child(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object, type: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Constructs a child of `buildable` with the name `name`.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} calls this function if a “constructor” has been
         * specified in the UI definition.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param name name of child to construct
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_construct_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, name: string): T;

        /**
         * This is similar to `gtk_buildable_parser_finished()` but is
         * called once for each custom tag handled by the `buildable`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname the name of the tag
         * @param data user data created in custom_tag_start
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_finished(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
         * the buildable.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @param data user data that will be passed in to parser functions
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_tag_end(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called for each unknown element under `<child>`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_tag_start(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string): [boolean, GLib.MarkupParser, never];

        /**
         * Get the internal child called `childname` of the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param childname name of child
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_internal_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, childname: string): T;

        /**
         * Gets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} sets the name based on the
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI]
         * used to construct the `buildable`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_name(): string;

        /**
         * Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI].
         * Note that this will be called once for each time
         * `gtk_builder_add_from_file()` or `gtk_builder_add_from_string()`
         * is called on a builder.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_parser_finished(builder: Builder): void;

        /**
         * Sets the property name `name` to `value` on the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param name name of property
         * @param value value of property
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_buildable_property(builder: Builder, name: string, value: unknown): void;

        /**
         * Sets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * @param name name to set
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_name(name: string): void;

        /**
         * Retrieves the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @returns the orientation of the `orientable`.
         */
        get_orientation(): Orientation;

        /**
         * Sets the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @param orientation the orientable’s new orientation.
         */
        set_orientation(orientation: Orientation): void;
    }


    namespace SeparatorMenuItem {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends MenuItem.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::accel-path": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::label": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::right-justified": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::submenu": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-underline": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::action-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::action-target": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::related-action": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-action-appearance": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends MenuItem.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Actionable.ConstructorProps, Activatable.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * The {@link Gtk.SeparatorMenuItem} is a separator used to group
     * items within a menu. It displays a horizontal line with a shadow to
     * make it appear sunken into the interface.
     * 
     * # CSS nodes
     * 
     * GtkSeparatorMenuItem has a single CSS node with name separator.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class SeparatorMenuItem extends MenuItem implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Actionable, Activatable, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<SeparatorMenuItem>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: SeparatorMenuItem.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        menu_item: MenuItem;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<SeparatorMenuItem.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): SeparatorMenuItem;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof SeparatorMenuItem.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, SeparatorMenuItem.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof SeparatorMenuItem.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, SeparatorMenuItem.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof SeparatorMenuItem.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<SeparatorMenuItem.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        /**
         * @default null
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable
         */
        get action_name(): string | null;
        set action_name(val: string | null);

        /**
         * @default null
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable
         */
        get actionName(): string | null;
        set actionName(val: string | null);

        /** @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable */
        get action_target(): GLib.Variant;
        set action_target(val: GLib.Variant);

        /** @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable */
        get actionTarget(): GLib.Variant;
        set actionTarget(val: GLib.Variant);

        /**
         * The action that this activatable will activate and receive
         * updates from for various states and possibly appearance.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the this property and
         * > call `gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action()` when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get related_action(): Action;
        set related_action(val: Action);

        /**
         * The action that this activatable will activate and receive
         * updates from for various states and possibly appearance.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the this property and
         * > call `gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action()` when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get relatedAction(): Action;
        set relatedAction(val: Action);

        /**
         * Whether this activatable should reset its layout
         * and appearance when setting the related action or when
         * the action changes appearance.
         * 
         * See the {@link Gtk.Action} documentation directly to find which properties
         * should be ignored by the {@link Gtk.Activatable} when this property is `false`.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle this property
         * > and call `gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties()` on the activatable
         * > widget when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get use_action_appearance(): boolean;
        set use_action_appearance(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether this activatable should reset its layout
         * and appearance when setting the related action or when
         * the action changes appearance.
         * 
         * See the {@link Gtk.Action} documentation directly to find which properties
         * should be ignored by the {@link Gtk.Activatable} when this property is `false`.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle this property
         * > and call `gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties()` on the activatable
         * > widget when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get useActionAppearance(): boolean;
        set useActionAppearance(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Gets the action name for `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_name()` for more information.
         * @returns the action name, or `null` if none is set
         */
        get_action_name(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the current target value of `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_target_value()` for more information.
         * @returns the current target value
         */
        get_action_target_value(): GLib.Variant;

        /**
         * Specifies the name of the action with which this widget should be
         * associated.  If `action_name` is `null` then the widget will be
         * unassociated from any previous action.
         * 
         * Usually this function is used when the widget is located (or will be
         * located) within the hierarchy of a {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow}.
         * 
         * Names are of the form “win.save” or “app.quit” for actions on the
         * containing {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow} or its associated {@link Gtk.Application},
         * respectively.  This is the same form used for actions in the {@link Gio.Menu}
         * associated with the window.
         * @param action_name an action name, or `null`
         */
        set_action_name(action_name: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the target value of an actionable widget.
         * 
         * If `target_value` is `null` then the target value is unset.
         * 
         * The target value has two purposes.  First, it is used as the
         * parameter to activation of the action associated with the
         * {@link Gtk.Actionable} widget. Second, it is used to determine if the widget
         * should be rendered as “active” — the widget is active if the state
         * is equal to the given target.
         * 
         * Consider the example of associating a set of buttons with a {@link Gio.Action}
         * with string state in a typical “radio button” situation.  Each button
         * will be associated with the same action, but with a different target
         * value for that action.  Clicking on a particular button will activate
         * the action with the target of that button, which will typically cause
         * the action’s state to change to that value.  Since the action’s state
         * is now equal to the target value of the button, the button will now
         * be rendered as active (and the other buttons, with different targets,
         * rendered inactive).
         * @param target_value a {@link GLib.Variant} to set as the target value, or `null`
         */
        set_action_target_value(target_value: GLib.Variant | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the action-name and associated string target value of an
         * actionable widget.
         * 
         * `detailed_action_name` is a string in the format accepted by
         * `g_action_parse_detailed_name()`.
         * 
         * (Note that prior to version 3.22.25,
         * this function is only usable for actions with a simple "s" target, and
         * `detailed_action_name` must be of the form `"action::target"` where
         * `action` is the action name and `target` is the string to use
         * as the target.)
         * @param detailed_action_name the detailed action name
         */
        set_detailed_action_name(detailed_action_name: string): void;

        /**
         * Gets the action name for `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_name()` for more information.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_action_name(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the current target value of `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_target_value()` for more information.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_action_target_value(): GLib.Variant;

        /**
         * Specifies the name of the action with which this widget should be
         * associated.  If `action_name` is `null` then the widget will be
         * unassociated from any previous action.
         * 
         * Usually this function is used when the widget is located (or will be
         * located) within the hierarchy of a {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow}.
         * 
         * Names are of the form “win.save” or “app.quit” for actions on the
         * containing {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow} or its associated {@link Gtk.Application},
         * respectively.  This is the same form used for actions in the {@link Gio.Menu}
         * associated with the window.
         * @param action_name an action name, or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_action_name(action_name: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the target value of an actionable widget.
         * 
         * If `target_value` is `null` then the target value is unset.
         * 
         * The target value has two purposes.  First, it is used as the
         * parameter to activation of the action associated with the
         * {@link Gtk.Actionable} widget. Second, it is used to determine if the widget
         * should be rendered as “active” — the widget is active if the state
         * is equal to the given target.
         * 
         * Consider the example of associating a set of buttons with a {@link Gio.Action}
         * with string state in a typical “radio button” situation.  Each button
         * will be associated with the same action, but with a different target
         * value for that action.  Clicking on a particular button will activate
         * the action with the target of that button, which will typically cause
         * the action’s state to change to that value.  Since the action’s state
         * is now equal to the target value of the button, the button will now
         * be rendered as active (and the other buttons, with different targets,
         * rendered inactive).
         * @param target_value a {@link GLib.Variant} to set as the target value, or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_action_target_value(target_value: GLib.Variant | null): void;

        /**
         * This is a utility function for {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors.
         * 
         * When implementing {@link Gtk.Activatable} you must call this when
         * handling changes of the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action}, and
         * you must also use this to break references in {@link GObject.Object}->dispose().
         * 
         * This function adds a reference to the currently set related
         * action for you, it also makes sure the {@link Gtk.Activatable}->update()
         * method is called when the related {@link Gtk.Action} properties change
         * and registers to the action’s proxy list.
         * 
         * > Be careful to call this before setting the local
         * > copy of the {@link Gtk.Action} property, since this function uses
         * > `gtk_activatable_get_related_action()` to retrieve the
         * > previous action.
         * @param action the {@link Gtk.Action} to set
         */
        do_set_related_action(action: Action): void;

        /**
         * Gets the related {@link Gtk.Action} for `activatable`.
         * @returns the related {@link Gtk.Action} if one is set.
         */
        get_related_action(): Action;

        /**
         * Gets whether this activatable should reset its layout
         * and appearance when setting the related action or when
         * the action changes appearance.
         * @returns whether `activatable` uses its actions appearance.
         */
        get_use_action_appearance(): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the related action on the `activatable` object.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action}
         * > property and call `gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action()` when it changes.
         * @param action the {@link Gtk.Action} to set
         */
        set_related_action(action: Action): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether this activatable should reset its layout and appearance
         * when setting the related action or when the action changes appearance
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} property and call
         * > `gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties()` to update `activatable`
         * > if needed.
         * @param use_appearance whether to use the actions appearance
         */
        set_use_action_appearance(use_appearance: boolean): void;

        /**
         * This is called to update the activatable completely, this is called
         * internally when the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action} property is set
         * or unset and by the implementing class when
         * {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} changes.
         * @param action the related {@link Gtk.Action} or `null`
         */
        sync_action_properties(action: Action | null): void;

        /**
         * This is called to update the activatable completely, this is called
         * internally when the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action} property is set
         * or unset and by the implementing class when
         * {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} changes.
         * @param action the related {@link Gtk.Action} or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_sync_action_properties(action: Action | null): void;

        /**
         * Called to update the activatable when its related action’s properties change.
         * You must check the {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} property only apply action
         * properties that are meant to effect the appearance accordingly.
         * @param action 
         * @param property_name 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_update(action: Action, property_name: string): void;

        /**
         * For widgets that can be “activated” (buttons, menu items, etc.)
         * this function activates them. Activation is what happens when you
         * press Enter on a widget during key navigation. If `widget` isn't
         * activatable, the function returns `false`.
         * @returns `true` if the widget was activatable
         */
        activate(): boolean;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Gtk.MenuItem.activate
        activate(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Emits a {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.child_notify | Gtk.Widget::child-notify} signal for the
         * [child property][child-properties] `child_property`
         * on `widget`.
         * 
         * This is the analogue of `g_object_notify()` for child properties.
         * 
         * Also see `gtk_container_child_notify()`.
         * @param child_property the name of a child property installed on the                  class of `widget`’s parent
         */
        child_notify(child_property: string): void;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Gtk.Container.child_notify
        child_notify(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Given an accelerator group, `accel_group`, and an accelerator path,
         * `accel_path`, sets up an accelerator in `accel_group` so whenever the
         * key binding that is defined for `accel_path` is pressed, `widget`
         * will be activated.  This removes any accelerators (for any
         * accelerator group) installed by previous calls to
         * `gtk_widget_set_accel_path()`. Associating accelerators with
         * paths allows them to be modified by the user and the modifications
         * to be saved for future use. (See `gtk_accel_map_save()`.)
         * 
         * This function is a low level function that would most likely
         * be used by a menu creation system like {@link Gtk.UIManager}. If you
         * use {@link Gtk.UIManager}, setting up accelerator paths will be done
         * automatically.
         * 
         * Even when you you aren’t using {@link Gtk.UIManager}, if you only want to
         * set up accelerators on menu items `gtk_menu_item_set_accel_path()`
         * provides a somewhat more convenient interface.
         * 
         * Note that `accel_path` string will be stored in a {@link GLib.Quark}. Therefore, if you
         * pass a static string, you can save some memory by interning it first with
         * `g_intern_static_string()`.
         * @param accel_path path used to look up the accelerator
         * @param accel_group a {@link Gtk.AccelGroup}.
         */
        set_accel_path(accel_path: string | null, accel_group: AccelGroup | null): void;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Gtk.MenuItem.set_accel_path
        set_accel_path(...args: never[]): any;
    }


    namespace SeparatorToolItem {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends ToolItem.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::draw": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-important": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible-horizontal": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible-vertical": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::related-action": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-action-appearance": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends ToolItem.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Activatable.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {
            draw: boolean | any;
        }
    }

    /**
     * A {@link Gtk.SeparatorToolItem} is a {@link Gtk.ToolItem} that separates groups of other
     * `GtkToolItems`. Depending on the theme, a {@link Gtk.SeparatorToolItem} will
     * often look like a vertical line on horizontally docked toolbars.
     * 
     * If the {@link Gtk.Toolbar} child property “expand” is `true` and the property
     * {@link Gtk.SeparatorToolItem.draw} is `false`, a {@link Gtk.SeparatorToolItem} will act as
     * a “spring” that forces other items to the ends of the toolbar.
     * 
     * Use `gtk_separator_tool_item_new()` to create a new {@link Gtk.SeparatorToolItem}.
     * 
     * # CSS nodes
     * 
     * GtkSeparatorToolItem has a single CSS node with name separator.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class SeparatorToolItem extends ToolItem implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Activatable, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<SeparatorToolItem>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * @default true
         */
    // This accessor conflicts with a field or function name in a parent class or interface.
         draw: boolean | any;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: SeparatorToolItem.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<SeparatorToolItem.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): SeparatorToolItem;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof SeparatorToolItem.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, SeparatorToolItem.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof SeparatorToolItem.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, SeparatorToolItem.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof SeparatorToolItem.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<SeparatorToolItem.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Returns whether `item` is drawn as a line, or just blank.
         * See `gtk_separator_tool_item_set_draw()`.
         * @returns `true` if `item` is drawn as a line, or just blank.
         */
        get_draw(): boolean;

        /**
         * Whether `item` is drawn as a vertical line, or just blank.
         * Setting this to `false` along with `gtk_tool_item_set_expand()` is useful
         * to create an item that forces following items to the end of the toolbar.
         * @param draw whether `item` is drawn as a vertical line
         */
        set_draw(draw: boolean): void;

        /**
         * The action that this activatable will activate and receive
         * updates from for various states and possibly appearance.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the this property and
         * > call `gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action()` when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get related_action(): Action;
        set related_action(val: Action);

        /**
         * The action that this activatable will activate and receive
         * updates from for various states and possibly appearance.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the this property and
         * > call `gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action()` when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get relatedAction(): Action;
        set relatedAction(val: Action);

        /**
         * Whether this activatable should reset its layout
         * and appearance when setting the related action or when
         * the action changes appearance.
         * 
         * See the {@link Gtk.Action} documentation directly to find which properties
         * should be ignored by the {@link Gtk.Activatable} when this property is `false`.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle this property
         * > and call `gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties()` on the activatable
         * > widget when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get use_action_appearance(): boolean;
        set use_action_appearance(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether this activatable should reset its layout
         * and appearance when setting the related action or when
         * the action changes appearance.
         * 
         * See the {@link Gtk.Action} documentation directly to find which properties
         * should be ignored by the {@link Gtk.Activatable} when this property is `false`.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle this property
         * > and call `gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties()` on the activatable
         * > widget when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get useActionAppearance(): boolean;
        set useActionAppearance(val: boolean);

        /**
         * This is a utility function for {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors.
         * 
         * When implementing {@link Gtk.Activatable} you must call this when
         * handling changes of the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action}, and
         * you must also use this to break references in {@link GObject.Object}->dispose().
         * 
         * This function adds a reference to the currently set related
         * action for you, it also makes sure the {@link Gtk.Activatable}->update()
         * method is called when the related {@link Gtk.Action} properties change
         * and registers to the action’s proxy list.
         * 
         * > Be careful to call this before setting the local
         * > copy of the {@link Gtk.Action} property, since this function uses
         * > `gtk_activatable_get_related_action()` to retrieve the
         * > previous action.
         * @param action the {@link Gtk.Action} to set
         */
        do_set_related_action(action: Action): void;

        /**
         * Gets the related {@link Gtk.Action} for `activatable`.
         * @returns the related {@link Gtk.Action} if one is set.
         */
        get_related_action(): Action;

        /**
         * Gets whether this activatable should reset its layout
         * and appearance when setting the related action or when
         * the action changes appearance.
         * @returns whether `activatable` uses its actions appearance.
         */
        get_use_action_appearance(): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the related action on the `activatable` object.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action}
         * > property and call `gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action()` when it changes.
         * @param action the {@link Gtk.Action} to set
         */
        set_related_action(action: Action): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether this activatable should reset its layout and appearance
         * when setting the related action or when the action changes appearance
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} property and call
         * > `gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties()` to update `activatable`
         * > if needed.
         * @param use_appearance whether to use the actions appearance
         */
        set_use_action_appearance(use_appearance: boolean): void;

        /**
         * This is called to update the activatable completely, this is called
         * internally when the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action} property is set
         * or unset and by the implementing class when
         * {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} changes.
         * @param action the related {@link Gtk.Action} or `null`
         */
        sync_action_properties(action: Action | null): void;

        /**
         * This is called to update the activatable completely, this is called
         * internally when the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action} property is set
         * or unset and by the implementing class when
         * {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} changes.
         * @param action the related {@link Gtk.Action} or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_sync_action_properties(action: Action | null): void;

        /**
         * Called to update the activatable when its related action’s properties change.
         * You must check the {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} property only apply action
         * properties that are meant to effect the appearance accordingly.
         * @param action 
         * @param property_name 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_update(action: Action, property_name: string): void;
    }


    namespace Settings {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends GObject.Object.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::color-hash": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-alternative-button-order": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-alternative-sort-arrows": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-application-prefer-dark-theme": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-auto-mnemonics": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-button-images": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-can-change-accels": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-color-palette": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-color-scheme": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-cursor-aspect-ratio": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-cursor-blink": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-cursor-blink-time": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-cursor-blink-timeout": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-cursor-theme-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-cursor-theme-size": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-decoration-layout": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-dialogs-use-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-dnd-drag-threshold": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-double-click-distance": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-double-click-time": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-enable-accels": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-enable-animations": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-enable-event-sounds": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-enable-input-feedback-sounds": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-enable-mnemonics": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-enable-primary-paste": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-enable-tooltips": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-entry-password-hint-timeout": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-entry-select-on-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-error-bell": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-fallback-icon-theme": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-file-chooser-backend": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-font-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-fontconfig-timestamp": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-icon-sizes": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-icon-theme-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-im-module": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-im-preedit-style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-im-status-style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-key-theme-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-keynav-cursor-only": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-keynav-use-caret": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-keynav-wrap-around": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-label-select-on-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-long-press-time": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-menu-bar-accel": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-menu-bar-popup-delay": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-menu-images": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-menu-popdown-delay": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-menu-popup-delay": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-modules": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-overlay-scrolling": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-primary-button-warps-slider": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-print-backends": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-print-preview-command": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-recent-files-enabled": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-recent-files-limit": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-recent-files-max-age": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-scrolled-window-placement": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-shell-shows-app-menu": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-shell-shows-desktop": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-shell-shows-menubar": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-show-input-method-menu": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-show-unicode-menu": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-sound-theme-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-split-cursor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-theme-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-timeout-expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-timeout-initial": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-timeout-repeat": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-titlebar-double-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-titlebar-middle-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-titlebar-right-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-toolbar-icon-size": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-toolbar-style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-tooltip-browse-mode-timeout": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-tooltip-browse-timeout": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-tooltip-timeout": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-touchscreen-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-visible-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-xft-antialias": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-xft-dpi": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-xft-hinting": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-xft-hintstyle": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gtk-xft-rgba": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.Object.ConstructorProps, StyleProvider.ConstructorProps {
            color_hash: { [key: string]: Gdk.Color };
            colorHash: { [key: string]: Gdk.Color };
            gtk_alternative_button_order: boolean;
            gtkAlternativeButtonOrder: boolean;
            gtk_alternative_sort_arrows: boolean;
            gtkAlternativeSortArrows: boolean;
            gtk_application_prefer_dark_theme: boolean;
            gtkApplicationPreferDarkTheme: boolean;
            gtk_auto_mnemonics: boolean;
            gtkAutoMnemonics: boolean;
            gtk_button_images: boolean;
            gtkButtonImages: boolean;
            gtk_can_change_accels: boolean;
            gtkCanChangeAccels: boolean;
            gtk_color_palette: string;
            gtkColorPalette: string;
            gtk_color_scheme: string;
            gtkColorScheme: string;
            gtk_cursor_aspect_ratio: number;
            gtkCursorAspectRatio: number;
            gtk_cursor_blink: boolean;
            gtkCursorBlink: boolean;
            gtk_cursor_blink_time: number;
            gtkCursorBlinkTime: number;
            gtk_cursor_blink_timeout: number;
            gtkCursorBlinkTimeout: number;
            gtk_cursor_theme_name: string;
            gtkCursorThemeName: string;
            gtk_cursor_theme_size: number;
            gtkCursorThemeSize: number;
            gtk_decoration_layout: string;
            gtkDecorationLayout: string;
            gtk_dialogs_use_header: boolean;
            gtkDialogsUseHeader: boolean;
            gtk_dnd_drag_threshold: number;
            gtkDndDragThreshold: number;
            gtk_double_click_distance: number;
            gtkDoubleClickDistance: number;
            gtk_double_click_time: number;
            gtkDoubleClickTime: number;
            gtk_enable_accels: boolean;
            gtkEnableAccels: boolean;
            gtk_enable_animations: boolean;
            gtkEnableAnimations: boolean;
            gtk_enable_event_sounds: boolean;
            gtkEnableEventSounds: boolean;
            gtk_enable_input_feedback_sounds: boolean;
            gtkEnableInputFeedbackSounds: boolean;
            gtk_enable_mnemonics: boolean;
            gtkEnableMnemonics: boolean;
            gtk_enable_primary_paste: boolean;
            gtkEnablePrimaryPaste: boolean;
            gtk_enable_tooltips: boolean;
            gtkEnableTooltips: boolean;
            gtk_entry_password_hint_timeout: number;
            gtkEntryPasswordHintTimeout: number;
            gtk_entry_select_on_focus: boolean;
            gtkEntrySelectOnFocus: boolean;
            gtk_error_bell: boolean;
            gtkErrorBell: boolean;
            gtk_fallback_icon_theme: string;
            gtkFallbackIconTheme: string;
            gtk_file_chooser_backend: string;
            gtkFileChooserBackend: string;
            gtk_font_name: string;
            gtkFontName: string;
            gtk_fontconfig_timestamp: number;
            gtkFontconfigTimestamp: number;
            gtk_icon_sizes: string;
            gtkIconSizes: string;
            gtk_icon_theme_name: string;
            gtkIconThemeName: string;
            gtk_im_module: string;
            gtkImModule: string;
            gtk_im_preedit_style: IMPreeditStyle;
            gtkImPreeditStyle: IMPreeditStyle;
            gtk_im_status_style: IMStatusStyle;
            gtkImStatusStyle: IMStatusStyle;
            gtk_key_theme_name: string;
            gtkKeyThemeName: string;
            gtk_keynav_cursor_only: boolean;
            gtkKeynavCursorOnly: boolean;
            gtk_keynav_use_caret: boolean;
            gtkKeynavUseCaret: boolean;
            gtk_keynav_wrap_around: boolean;
            gtkKeynavWrapAround: boolean;
            gtk_label_select_on_focus: boolean;
            gtkLabelSelectOnFocus: boolean;
            gtk_long_press_time: number;
            gtkLongPressTime: number;
            gtk_menu_bar_accel: string;
            gtkMenuBarAccel: string;
            gtk_menu_bar_popup_delay: number;
            gtkMenuBarPopupDelay: number;
            gtk_menu_images: boolean;
            gtkMenuImages: boolean;
            gtk_menu_popdown_delay: number;
            gtkMenuPopdownDelay: number;
            gtk_menu_popup_delay: number;
            gtkMenuPopupDelay: number;
            gtk_modules: string;
            gtkModules: string;
            gtk_overlay_scrolling: boolean;
            gtkOverlayScrolling: boolean;
            gtk_primary_button_warps_slider: boolean;
            gtkPrimaryButtonWarpsSlider: boolean;
            gtk_print_backends: string;
            gtkPrintBackends: string;
            gtk_print_preview_command: string;
            gtkPrintPreviewCommand: string;
            gtk_recent_files_enabled: boolean;
            gtkRecentFilesEnabled: boolean;
            gtk_recent_files_limit: number;
            gtkRecentFilesLimit: number;
            gtk_recent_files_max_age: number;
            gtkRecentFilesMaxAge: number;
            gtk_scrolled_window_placement: CornerType;
            gtkScrolledWindowPlacement: CornerType;
            gtk_shell_shows_app_menu: boolean;
            gtkShellShowsAppMenu: boolean;
            gtk_shell_shows_desktop: boolean;
            gtkShellShowsDesktop: boolean;
            gtk_shell_shows_menubar: boolean;
            gtkShellShowsMenubar: boolean;
            gtk_show_input_method_menu: boolean;
            gtkShowInputMethodMenu: boolean;
            gtk_show_unicode_menu: boolean;
            gtkShowUnicodeMenu: boolean;
            gtk_sound_theme_name: string;
            gtkSoundThemeName: string;
            gtk_split_cursor: boolean;
            gtkSplitCursor: boolean;
            gtk_theme_name: string;
            gtkThemeName: string;
            gtk_timeout_expand: number;
            gtkTimeoutExpand: number;
            gtk_timeout_initial: number;
            gtkTimeoutInitial: number;
            gtk_timeout_repeat: number;
            gtkTimeoutRepeat: number;
            gtk_titlebar_double_click: string;
            gtkTitlebarDoubleClick: string;
            gtk_titlebar_middle_click: string;
            gtkTitlebarMiddleClick: string;
            gtk_titlebar_right_click: string;
            gtkTitlebarRightClick: string;
            gtk_toolbar_icon_size: IconSize;
            gtkToolbarIconSize: IconSize;
            gtk_toolbar_style: ToolbarStyle;
            gtkToolbarStyle: ToolbarStyle;
            gtk_tooltip_browse_mode_timeout: number;
            gtkTooltipBrowseModeTimeout: number;
            gtk_tooltip_browse_timeout: number;
            gtkTooltipBrowseTimeout: number;
            gtk_tooltip_timeout: number;
            gtkTooltipTimeout: number;
            gtk_touchscreen_mode: boolean;
            gtkTouchscreenMode: boolean;
            gtk_visible_focus: PolicyType;
            gtkVisibleFocus: PolicyType;
            gtk_xft_antialias: number;
            gtkXftAntialias: number;
            gtk_xft_dpi: number;
            gtkXftDpi: number;
            gtk_xft_hinting: number;
            gtkXftHinting: number;
            gtk_xft_hintstyle: string;
            gtkXftHintstyle: string;
            gtk_xft_rgba: string;
            gtkXftRgba: string;
        }
    }

    /**
     * GtkSettings provide a mechanism to share global settings between
     * applications.
     * 
     * On the X window system, this sharing is realized by an
     * [XSettings](http://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Specifications/xsettings-spec)
     * manager that is usually part of the desktop environment, along with
     * utilities that let the user change these settings. In the absence of
     * an Xsettings manager, GTK+ reads default values for settings from
     * `settings.ini` files in
     * `/etc/gtk-3.0`, `$XDG_CONFIG_DIRS/gtk-3.0`
     * and `$XDG_CONFIG_HOME/gtk-3.0`.
     * These files must be valid key files (see {@link GLib.KeyFile}), and have
     * a section called Settings. Themes can also provide default values
     * for settings by installing a `settings.ini` file
     * next to their `gtk.css` file.
     * 
     * Applications can override system-wide settings by setting the property
     * of the GtkSettings object with `g_object_set()`. This should be restricted
     * to special cases though; GtkSettings are not meant as an application
     * configuration facility. When doing so, you need to be aware that settings
     * that are specific to individual widgets may not be available before the
     * widget type has been realized at least once. The following example
     * demonstrates a way to do this:
     * 
     * ```c
     *   gtk_init (&argc, &argv);
     * 
     *   // make sure the type is realized
     *   g_type_class_unref (g_type_class_ref (GTK_TYPE_IMAGE_MENU_ITEM));
     * 
     *   g_object_set (gtk_settings_get_default (), "gtk-enable-animations", FALSE, NULL);
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * There is one GtkSettings instance per screen. It can be obtained with
     * `gtk_settings_get_for_screen()`, but in many cases, it is more convenient
     * to use `gtk_widget_get_settings()`. `gtk_settings_get_default()` returns the
     * GtkSettings instance for the default screen.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class Settings extends GObject.Object implements StyleProvider {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<Settings>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * Holds a hash table representation of the {@link Gtk.Settings.gtk_color_scheme}
         * setting, mapping color names to `GdkColors`.
         * @since 2.10
         * @deprecated since 3.8: Will always return an empty hash table.
         * @read-only
         */
        get color_hash(): { [key: string]: Gdk.Color };

        /**
         * Holds a hash table representation of the {@link Gtk.Settings.gtk_color_scheme}
         * setting, mapping color names to `GdkColors`.
         * @since 2.10
         * @deprecated since 3.8: Will always return an empty hash table.
         * @read-only
         */
        get colorHash(): { [key: string]: Gdk.Color };

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get gtk_alternative_button_order(): boolean;
        set gtk_alternative_button_order(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get gtkAlternativeButtonOrder(): boolean;
        set gtkAlternativeButtonOrder(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Controls the direction of the sort indicators in sorted list and tree
         * views. By default an arrow pointing down means the column is sorted
         * in ascending order. When set to `true`, this order will be inverted.
         * @since 2.12
         * @default false
         */
        get gtk_alternative_sort_arrows(): boolean;
        set gtk_alternative_sort_arrows(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Controls the direction of the sort indicators in sorted list and tree
         * views. By default an arrow pointing down means the column is sorted
         * in ascending order. When set to `true`, this order will be inverted.
         * @since 2.12
         * @default false
         */
        get gtkAlternativeSortArrows(): boolean;
        set gtkAlternativeSortArrows(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether the application prefers to use a dark theme. If a GTK+ theme
         * includes a dark variant, it will be used instead of the configured
         * theme.
         * 
         * Some applications benefit from minimizing the amount of light pollution that
         * interferes with the content. Good candidates for dark themes are photo and
         * video editors that make the actual content get all the attention and minimize
         * the distraction of the chrome.
         * 
         * Dark themes should not be used for documents, where large spaces are white/light
         * and the dark chrome creates too much contrast (web browser, text editor...).
         * @since 3.0
         * @default false
         */
        get gtk_application_prefer_dark_theme(): boolean;
        set gtk_application_prefer_dark_theme(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether the application prefers to use a dark theme. If a GTK+ theme
         * includes a dark variant, it will be used instead of the configured
         * theme.
         * 
         * Some applications benefit from minimizing the amount of light pollution that
         * interferes with the content. Good candidates for dark themes are photo and
         * video editors that make the actual content get all the attention and minimize
         * the distraction of the chrome.
         * 
         * Dark themes should not be used for documents, where large spaces are white/light
         * and the dark chrome creates too much contrast (web browser, text editor...).
         * @since 3.0
         * @default false
         */
        get gtkApplicationPreferDarkTheme(): boolean;
        set gtkApplicationPreferDarkTheme(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether mnemonics should be automatically shown and hidden when the user
         * presses the mnemonic activator.
         * @since 2.20
         * @deprecated since 3.10: This setting is ignored
         * @default true
         */
        get gtk_auto_mnemonics(): boolean;
        set gtk_auto_mnemonics(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether mnemonics should be automatically shown and hidden when the user
         * presses the mnemonic activator.
         * @since 2.20
         * @deprecated since 3.10: This setting is ignored
         * @default true
         */
        get gtkAutoMnemonics(): boolean;
        set gtkAutoMnemonics(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether images should be shown on buttons
         * @since 2.4
         * @deprecated since 3.10: This setting is deprecated. Application developers   control whether a button should show an icon or not, on a   per-button basis. If a {@link Gtk.Button} should show an icon, use the   {@link Gtk.Button.always_show_image} property of {@link Gtk.Button}, and pack a   {@link Gtk.Image} inside the {@link Gtk.Button}
         * @default false
         */
        get gtk_button_images(): boolean;
        set gtk_button_images(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether images should be shown on buttons
         * @since 2.4
         * @deprecated since 3.10: This setting is deprecated. Application developers   control whether a button should show an icon or not, on a   per-button basis. If a {@link Gtk.Button} should show an icon, use the   {@link Gtk.Button.always_show_image} property of {@link Gtk.Button}, and pack a   {@link Gtk.Image} inside the {@link Gtk.Button}
         * @default false
         */
        get gtkButtonImages(): boolean;
        set gtkButtonImages(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether menu accelerators can be changed by pressing a key over the menu item.
         * @deprecated since 3.10: This setting is ignored.
         * @default false
         */
        get gtk_can_change_accels(): boolean;
        set gtk_can_change_accels(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether menu accelerators can be changed by pressing a key over the menu item.
         * @deprecated since 3.10: This setting is ignored.
         * @default false
         */
        get gtkCanChangeAccels(): boolean;
        set gtkCanChangeAccels(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Palette to use in the deprecated color selector.
         * @deprecated since 3.10: Only used by the deprecated color selector widget.
         * @default black:white:gray50:red:purple:blue:light blue:green:yellow:orange:lavender:brown:goldenrod4:dodger blue:pink:light green:gray10:gray30:gray75:gray90
         */
        get gtk_color_palette(): string;
        set gtk_color_palette(val: string);

        /**
         * Palette to use in the deprecated color selector.
         * @deprecated since 3.10: Only used by the deprecated color selector widget.
         * @default black:white:gray50:red:purple:blue:light blue:green:yellow:orange:lavender:brown:goldenrod4:dodger blue:pink:light green:gray10:gray30:gray75:gray90
         */
        get gtkColorPalette(): string;
        set gtkColorPalette(val: string);

        /**
         * A palette of named colors for use in themes. The format of the string is
         * 
         * ```
         * name1: color1
         * name2: color2
         * ...
         * ```
         * 
         * Color names must be acceptable as identifiers in the
         * [gtkrc][gtk3-Resource-Files] syntax, and
         * color specifications must be in the format accepted by
         * `gdk_color_parse()`.
         * 
         * Note that due to the way the color tables from different sources are
         * merged, color specifications will be converted to hexadecimal form
         * when getting this property.
         * 
         * Starting with GTK+ 2.12, the entries can alternatively be separated
         * by ';' instead of newlines:
         * 
         * ```
         * name1: color1; name2: color2; ...
         * ```
         * 
         * @since 2.10
         * @deprecated since 3.8: Color scheme support was dropped and is no longer supported.     You can still set this property, but it will be ignored.
         */
        get gtk_color_scheme(): string;
        set gtk_color_scheme(val: string);

        /**
         * A palette of named colors for use in themes. The format of the string is
         * 
         * ```
         * name1: color1
         * name2: color2
         * ...
         * ```
         * 
         * Color names must be acceptable as identifiers in the
         * [gtkrc][gtk3-Resource-Files] syntax, and
         * color specifications must be in the format accepted by
         * `gdk_color_parse()`.
         * 
         * Note that due to the way the color tables from different sources are
         * merged, color specifications will be converted to hexadecimal form
         * when getting this property.
         * 
         * Starting with GTK+ 2.12, the entries can alternatively be separated
         * by ';' instead of newlines:
         * 
         * ```
         * name1: color1; name2: color2; ...
         * ```
         * 
         * @since 2.10
         * @deprecated since 3.8: Color scheme support was dropped and is no longer supported.     You can still set this property, but it will be ignored.
         */
        get gtkColorScheme(): string;
        set gtkColorScheme(val: string);

        /**
         * @default 0.04
         */
        get gtk_cursor_aspect_ratio(): number;
        set gtk_cursor_aspect_ratio(val: number);

        /**
         * @default 0.04
         */
        get gtkCursorAspectRatio(): number;
        set gtkCursorAspectRatio(val: number);

        /**
         * Whether the cursor should blink.
         * 
         * Also see the {@link Gtk.Settings.gtk_cursor_blink_timeout} setting,
         * which allows more flexible control over cursor blinking.
         * @default true
         */
        get gtk_cursor_blink(): boolean;
        set gtk_cursor_blink(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether the cursor should blink.
         * 
         * Also see the {@link Gtk.Settings.gtk_cursor_blink_timeout} setting,
         * which allows more flexible control over cursor blinking.
         * @default true
         */
        get gtkCursorBlink(): boolean;
        set gtkCursorBlink(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default 1200
         */
        get gtk_cursor_blink_time(): number;
        set gtk_cursor_blink_time(val: number);

        /**
         * @default 1200
         */
        get gtkCursorBlinkTime(): number;
        set gtkCursorBlinkTime(val: number);

        /**
         * Time after which the cursor stops blinking, in seconds.
         * The timer is reset after each user interaction.
         * 
         * Setting this to zero has the same effect as setting
         * {@link Gtk.Settings.gtk_cursor_blink} to `false`.
         * @since 2.12
         * @default 10
         */
        get gtk_cursor_blink_timeout(): number;
        set gtk_cursor_blink_timeout(val: number);

        /**
         * Time after which the cursor stops blinking, in seconds.
         * The timer is reset after each user interaction.
         * 
         * Setting this to zero has the same effect as setting
         * {@link Gtk.Settings.gtk_cursor_blink} to `false`.
         * @since 2.12
         * @default 10
         */
        get gtkCursorBlinkTimeout(): number;
        set gtkCursorBlinkTimeout(val: number);

        /**
         * @default null
         */
        get gtk_cursor_theme_name(): string;
        set gtk_cursor_theme_name(val: string);

        /**
         * @default null
         */
        get gtkCursorThemeName(): string;
        set gtkCursorThemeName(val: string);

        /**
         * @default 0
         */
        get gtk_cursor_theme_size(): number;
        set gtk_cursor_theme_size(val: number);

        /**
         * @default 0
         */
        get gtkCursorThemeSize(): number;
        set gtkCursorThemeSize(val: number);

        /**
         * This setting determines which buttons should be put in the
         * titlebar of client-side decorated windows, and whether they
         * should be placed at the left of right.
         * 
         * The format of the string is button names, separated by commas.
         * A colon separates the buttons that should appear on the left
         * from those on the right. Recognized button names are minimize,
         * maximize, close, icon (the window icon) and menu (a menu button
         * for the fallback app menu).
         * 
         * For example, "menu:minimize,maximize,close" specifies a menu
         * on the left, and minimize, maximize and close buttons on the right.
         * 
         * Note that buttons will only be shown when they are meaningful.
         * E.g. a menu button only appears when the desktop shell does not
         * show the app menu, and a close button only appears on a window
         * that can be closed.
         * 
         * Also note that the setting can be overridden with the
         * {@link Gtk.HeaderBar.decoration_layout} property.
         * @since 3.12
         * @default menu:minimize,maximize,close
         */
        get gtk_decoration_layout(): string;
        set gtk_decoration_layout(val: string);

        /**
         * This setting determines which buttons should be put in the
         * titlebar of client-side decorated windows, and whether they
         * should be placed at the left of right.
         * 
         * The format of the string is button names, separated by commas.
         * A colon separates the buttons that should appear on the left
         * from those on the right. Recognized button names are minimize,
         * maximize, close, icon (the window icon) and menu (a menu button
         * for the fallback app menu).
         * 
         * For example, "menu:minimize,maximize,close" specifies a menu
         * on the left, and minimize, maximize and close buttons on the right.
         * 
         * Note that buttons will only be shown when they are meaningful.
         * E.g. a menu button only appears when the desktop shell does not
         * show the app menu, and a close button only appears on a window
         * that can be closed.
         * 
         * Also note that the setting can be overridden with the
         * {@link Gtk.HeaderBar.decoration_layout} property.
         * @since 3.12
         * @default menu:minimize,maximize,close
         */
        get gtkDecorationLayout(): string;
        set gtkDecorationLayout(val: string);

        /**
         * Whether builtin GTK+ dialogs such as the file chooser, the
         * color chooser or the font chooser will use a header bar at
         * the top to show action widgets, or an action area at the bottom.
         * 
         * This setting does not affect custom dialogs using GtkDialog
         * directly, or message dialogs.
         * @since 3.12
         * @default false
         */
        get gtk_dialogs_use_header(): boolean;
        set gtk_dialogs_use_header(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether builtin GTK+ dialogs such as the file chooser, the
         * color chooser or the font chooser will use a header bar at
         * the top to show action widgets, or an action area at the bottom.
         * 
         * This setting does not affect custom dialogs using GtkDialog
         * directly, or message dialogs.
         * @since 3.12
         * @default false
         */
        get gtkDialogsUseHeader(): boolean;
        set gtkDialogsUseHeader(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default 8
         */
        get gtk_dnd_drag_threshold(): number;
        set gtk_dnd_drag_threshold(val: number);

        /**
         * @default 8
         */
        get gtkDndDragThreshold(): number;
        set gtkDndDragThreshold(val: number);

        /**
         * @default 5
         */
        get gtk_double_click_distance(): number;
        set gtk_double_click_distance(val: number);

        /**
         * @default 5
         */
        get gtkDoubleClickDistance(): number;
        set gtkDoubleClickDistance(val: number);

        /**
         * @default 400
         */
        get gtk_double_click_time(): number;
        set gtk_double_click_time(val: number);

        /**
         * @default 400
         */
        get gtkDoubleClickTime(): number;
        set gtkDoubleClickTime(val: number);

        /**
         * Whether menu items should have visible accelerators which can be
         * activated.
         * @since 2.12
         * @default true
         */
        get gtk_enable_accels(): boolean;
        set gtk_enable_accels(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether menu items should have visible accelerators which can be
         * activated.
         * @since 2.12
         * @default true
         */
        get gtkEnableAccels(): boolean;
        set gtkEnableAccels(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default true
         */
        get gtk_enable_animations(): boolean;
        set gtk_enable_animations(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default true
         */
        get gtkEnableAnimations(): boolean;
        set gtkEnableAnimations(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether to play any event sounds at all.
         * 
         * See the [Sound Theme Specifications](http://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Specifications/sound-theme-spec)
         * for more information on event sounds and sound themes.
         * 
         * GTK+ itself does not support event sounds, you have to use a loadable
         * module like the one that comes with libcanberra.
         * @since 2.14
         * @default true
         */
        get gtk_enable_event_sounds(): boolean;
        set gtk_enable_event_sounds(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether to play any event sounds at all.
         * 
         * See the [Sound Theme Specifications](http://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Specifications/sound-theme-spec)
         * for more information on event sounds and sound themes.
         * 
         * GTK+ itself does not support event sounds, you have to use a loadable
         * module like the one that comes with libcanberra.
         * @since 2.14
         * @default true
         */
        get gtkEnableEventSounds(): boolean;
        set gtkEnableEventSounds(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether to play event sounds as feedback to user input.
         * 
         * See the [Sound Theme Specifications](http://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Specifications/sound-theme-spec)
         * for more information on event sounds and sound themes.
         * 
         * GTK+ itself does not support event sounds, you have to use a loadable
         * module like the one that comes with libcanberra.
         * @since 2.14
         * @default true
         */
        get gtk_enable_input_feedback_sounds(): boolean;
        set gtk_enable_input_feedback_sounds(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether to play event sounds as feedback to user input.
         * 
         * See the [Sound Theme Specifications](http://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Specifications/sound-theme-spec)
         * for more information on event sounds and sound themes.
         * 
         * GTK+ itself does not support event sounds, you have to use a loadable
         * module like the one that comes with libcanberra.
         * @since 2.14
         * @default true
         */
        get gtkEnableInputFeedbackSounds(): boolean;
        set gtkEnableInputFeedbackSounds(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether labels and menu items should have visible mnemonics which
         * can be activated.
         * @since 2.12
         * @deprecated since 3.10: This setting can still be used for application      overrides, but will be ignored in the future
         * @default true
         */
        get gtk_enable_mnemonics(): boolean;
        set gtk_enable_mnemonics(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether labels and menu items should have visible mnemonics which
         * can be activated.
         * @since 2.12
         * @deprecated since 3.10: This setting can still be used for application      overrides, but will be ignored in the future
         * @default true
         */
        get gtkEnableMnemonics(): boolean;
        set gtkEnableMnemonics(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether a middle click on a mouse should paste the
         * 'PRIMARY' clipboard content at the cursor location.
         * @since 3.4
         * @default true
         */
        get gtk_enable_primary_paste(): boolean;
        set gtk_enable_primary_paste(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether a middle click on a mouse should paste the
         * 'PRIMARY' clipboard content at the cursor location.
         * @since 3.4
         * @default true
         */
        get gtkEnablePrimaryPaste(): boolean;
        set gtkEnablePrimaryPaste(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether tooltips should be shown on widgets.
         * @since 2.14
         * @deprecated since 3.10: This setting is ignored.
         * @default true
         */
        get gtk_enable_tooltips(): boolean;
        set gtk_enable_tooltips(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether tooltips should be shown on widgets.
         * @since 2.14
         * @deprecated since 3.10: This setting is ignored.
         * @default true
         */
        get gtkEnableTooltips(): boolean;
        set gtkEnableTooltips(val: boolean);

        /**
         * How long to show the last input character in hidden
         * entries. This value is in milliseconds. 0 disables showing the
         * last char. 600 is a good value for enabling it.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default 0
         */
        get gtk_entry_password_hint_timeout(): number;
        set gtk_entry_password_hint_timeout(val: number);

        /**
         * How long to show the last input character in hidden
         * entries. This value is in milliseconds. 0 disables showing the
         * last char. 600 is a good value for enabling it.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default 0
         */
        get gtkEntryPasswordHintTimeout(): number;
        set gtkEntryPasswordHintTimeout(val: number);

        /**
         * @default true
         */
        get gtk_entry_select_on_focus(): boolean;
        set gtk_entry_select_on_focus(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default true
         */
        get gtkEntrySelectOnFocus(): boolean;
        set gtkEntrySelectOnFocus(val: boolean);

        /**
         * When `true`, keyboard navigation and other input-related errors
         * will cause a beep. Since the error bell is implemented using
         * `gdk_window_beep()`, the windowing system may offer ways to
         * configure the error bell in many ways, such as flashing the
         * window or similar visual effects.
         * @since 2.12
         * @default true
         */
        get gtk_error_bell(): boolean;
        set gtk_error_bell(val: boolean);

        /**
         * When `true`, keyboard navigation and other input-related errors
         * will cause a beep. Since the error bell is implemented using
         * `gdk_window_beep()`, the windowing system may offer ways to
         * configure the error bell in many ways, such as flashing the
         * window or similar visual effects.
         * @since 2.12
         * @default true
         */
        get gtkErrorBell(): boolean;
        set gtkErrorBell(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Name of a icon theme to fall back to.
         * @deprecated since 3.10: This setting is ignored.
         * @default null
         */
        get gtk_fallback_icon_theme(): string;
        set gtk_fallback_icon_theme(val: string);

        /**
         * Name of a icon theme to fall back to.
         * @deprecated since 3.10: This setting is ignored.
         * @default null
         */
        get gtkFallbackIconTheme(): string;
        set gtkFallbackIconTheme(val: string);

        /**
         * Name of the GtkFileChooser backend to use by default.
         * @deprecated since 3.10: This setting is ignored. {@link Gtk.FileChooser} uses GIO by default.
         * @default null
         */
        get gtk_file_chooser_backend(): string;
        set gtk_file_chooser_backend(val: string);

        /**
         * Name of the GtkFileChooser backend to use by default.
         * @deprecated since 3.10: This setting is ignored. {@link Gtk.FileChooser} uses GIO by default.
         * @default null
         */
        get gtkFileChooserBackend(): string;
        set gtkFileChooserBackend(val: string);

        /**
         * The default font to use. GTK+ uses the family name and size from this string.
         * @default Sans 10
         */
        get gtk_font_name(): string;
        set gtk_font_name(val: string);

        /**
         * The default font to use. GTK+ uses the family name and size from this string.
         * @default Sans 10
         */
        get gtkFontName(): string;
        set gtkFontName(val: string);

        /**
         * @default 0
         */
        get gtk_fontconfig_timestamp(): number;
        set gtk_fontconfig_timestamp(val: number);

        /**
         * @default 0
         */
        get gtkFontconfigTimestamp(): number;
        set gtkFontconfigTimestamp(val: number);

        /**
         * A list of icon sizes. The list is separated by colons, and
         * item has the form:
         * 
         * `size-name` = `width` , `height`
         * 
         * E.g. "gtk-menu=16,16:gtk-button=20,20:gtk-dialog=48,48".
         * GTK+ itself use the following named icon sizes: gtk-menu,
         * gtk-button, gtk-small-toolbar, gtk-large-toolbar, gtk-dnd,
         * gtk-dialog. Applications can register their own named icon
         * sizes with `gtk_icon_size_register()`.
         * @deprecated since 3.10: This setting is ignored.
         * @default null
         */
        get gtk_icon_sizes(): string;
        set gtk_icon_sizes(val: string);

        /**
         * A list of icon sizes. The list is separated by colons, and
         * item has the form:
         * 
         * `size-name` = `width` , `height`
         * 
         * E.g. "gtk-menu=16,16:gtk-button=20,20:gtk-dialog=48,48".
         * GTK+ itself use the following named icon sizes: gtk-menu,
         * gtk-button, gtk-small-toolbar, gtk-large-toolbar, gtk-dnd,
         * gtk-dialog. Applications can register their own named icon
         * sizes with `gtk_icon_size_register()`.
         * @deprecated since 3.10: This setting is ignored.
         * @default null
         */
        get gtkIconSizes(): string;
        set gtkIconSizes(val: string);

        /**
         * @default Adwaita
         */
        get gtk_icon_theme_name(): string;
        set gtk_icon_theme_name(val: string);

        /**
         * @default Adwaita
         */
        get gtkIconThemeName(): string;
        set gtkIconThemeName(val: string);

        /**
         * Which IM (input method) module should be used by default. This is the
         * input method that will be used if the user has not explicitly chosen
         * another input method from the IM context menu.
         * This also can be a colon-separated list of input methods, which GTK+
         * will try in turn until it finds one available on the system.
         * 
         * See {@link Gtk.IMContext}.
         * @default null
         */
        get gtk_im_module(): string;
        set gtk_im_module(val: string);

        /**
         * Which IM (input method) module should be used by default. This is the
         * input method that will be used if the user has not explicitly chosen
         * another input method from the IM context menu.
         * This also can be a colon-separated list of input methods, which GTK+
         * will try in turn until it finds one available on the system.
         * 
         * See {@link Gtk.IMContext}.
         * @default null
         */
        get gtkImModule(): string;
        set gtkImModule(val: string);

        /**
         * How to draw the input method preedit string.
         * @deprecated since 3.10: This setting is ignored.
         * @default Gtk.IMPreeditStyle.CALLBACK
         */
        get gtk_im_preedit_style(): IMPreeditStyle;
        set gtk_im_preedit_style(val: IMPreeditStyle);

        /**
         * How to draw the input method preedit string.
         * @deprecated since 3.10: This setting is ignored.
         * @default Gtk.IMPreeditStyle.CALLBACK
         */
        get gtkImPreeditStyle(): IMPreeditStyle;
        set gtkImPreeditStyle(val: IMPreeditStyle);

        /**
         * How to draw the input method statusbar.
         * @deprecated since 3.10: This setting is ignored.
         * @default Gtk.IMStatusStyle.CALLBACK
         */
        get gtk_im_status_style(): IMStatusStyle;
        set gtk_im_status_style(val: IMStatusStyle);

        /**
         * How to draw the input method statusbar.
         * @deprecated since 3.10: This setting is ignored.
         * @default Gtk.IMStatusStyle.CALLBACK
         */
        get gtkImStatusStyle(): IMStatusStyle;
        set gtkImStatusStyle(val: IMStatusStyle);

        /**
         * @default null
         */
        get gtk_key_theme_name(): string;
        set gtk_key_theme_name(val: string);

        /**
         * @default null
         */
        get gtkKeyThemeName(): string;
        set gtkKeyThemeName(val: string);

        /**
         * When `true`, keyboard navigation should be able to reach all widgets
         * by using the cursor keys only. Tab, Shift etc. keys can't be expected
         * to be present on the used input device.
         * @since 2.12
         * @deprecated since 3.10: Generally, the behavior for touchscreen input should be             performed dynamically based on `gdk_event_get_source_device()`.
         * @default false
         */
        get gtk_keynav_cursor_only(): boolean;
        set gtk_keynav_cursor_only(val: boolean);

        /**
         * When `true`, keyboard navigation should be able to reach all widgets
         * by using the cursor keys only. Tab, Shift etc. keys can't be expected
         * to be present on the used input device.
         * @since 2.12
         * @deprecated since 3.10: Generally, the behavior for touchscreen input should be             performed dynamically based on `gdk_event_get_source_device()`.
         * @default false
         */
        get gtkKeynavCursorOnly(): boolean;
        set gtkKeynavCursorOnly(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether GTK+ should make sure that text can be navigated with
         * a caret, even if it is not editable. This is useful when using
         * a screen reader.
         * @since 3.20
         * @default false
         */
        get gtk_keynav_use_caret(): boolean;
        set gtk_keynav_use_caret(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether GTK+ should make sure that text can be navigated with
         * a caret, even if it is not editable. This is useful when using
         * a screen reader.
         * @since 3.20
         * @default false
         */
        get gtkKeynavUseCaret(): boolean;
        set gtkKeynavUseCaret(val: boolean);

        /**
         * When `true`, some widgets will wrap around when doing keyboard
         * navigation, such as menus, menubars and notebooks.
         * @since 2.12
         * @deprecated since 3.10: This setting is ignored.
         * @default true
         */
        get gtk_keynav_wrap_around(): boolean;
        set gtk_keynav_wrap_around(val: boolean);

        /**
         * When `true`, some widgets will wrap around when doing keyboard
         * navigation, such as menus, menubars and notebooks.
         * @since 2.12
         * @deprecated since 3.10: This setting is ignored.
         * @default true
         */
        get gtkKeynavWrapAround(): boolean;
        set gtkKeynavWrapAround(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default true
         */
        get gtk_label_select_on_focus(): boolean;
        set gtk_label_select_on_focus(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default true
         */
        get gtkLabelSelectOnFocus(): boolean;
        set gtkLabelSelectOnFocus(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The time for a button or touch press to be considered a "long press".
         * @since 3.14
         * @default 500
         */
        get gtk_long_press_time(): number;
        set gtk_long_press_time(val: number);

        /**
         * The time for a button or touch press to be considered a "long press".
         * @since 3.14
         * @default 500
         */
        get gtkLongPressTime(): number;
        set gtkLongPressTime(val: number);

        /**
         * Keybinding to activate the menu bar.
         * @deprecated since 3.10: This setting can still be used for application      overrides, but will be ignored in the future
         * @default F10
         */
        get gtk_menu_bar_accel(): string;
        set gtk_menu_bar_accel(val: string);

        /**
         * Keybinding to activate the menu bar.
         * @deprecated since 3.10: This setting can still be used for application      overrides, but will be ignored in the future
         * @default F10
         */
        get gtkMenuBarAccel(): string;
        set gtkMenuBarAccel(val: string);

        /**
         * Delay before the submenus of a menu bar appear.
         * @deprecated since 3.10: This setting is ignored.
         * @default 0
         */
        get gtk_menu_bar_popup_delay(): number;
        set gtk_menu_bar_popup_delay(val: number);

        /**
         * Delay before the submenus of a menu bar appear.
         * @deprecated since 3.10: This setting is ignored.
         * @default 0
         */
        get gtkMenuBarPopupDelay(): number;
        set gtkMenuBarPopupDelay(val: number);

        /**
         * Whether images should be shown in menu items
         * @deprecated since 3.10: This setting is deprecated. Application developers   control whether or not a {@link Gtk.MenuItem} should have an icon or not,   on a per widget basis. Either use a {@link Gtk.MenuItem} with a {@link Gtk.Box}   containing a {@link Gtk.Image} and a {@link Gtk.AccelLabel}, or describe your menus   using a {@link Gio.Menu} XML description
         * @default false
         */
        get gtk_menu_images(): boolean;
        set gtk_menu_images(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether images should be shown in menu items
         * @deprecated since 3.10: This setting is deprecated. Application developers   control whether or not a {@link Gtk.MenuItem} should have an icon or not,   on a per widget basis. Either use a {@link Gtk.MenuItem} with a {@link Gtk.Box}   containing a {@link Gtk.Image} and a {@link Gtk.AccelLabel}, or describe your menus   using a {@link Gio.Menu} XML description
         * @default false
         */
        get gtkMenuImages(): boolean;
        set gtkMenuImages(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The time before hiding a submenu when the pointer is moving towards the submenu.
         * @deprecated since 3.10: This setting is ignored.
         * @default 1000
         */
        get gtk_menu_popdown_delay(): number;
        set gtk_menu_popdown_delay(val: number);

        /**
         * The time before hiding a submenu when the pointer is moving towards the submenu.
         * @deprecated since 3.10: This setting is ignored.
         * @default 1000
         */
        get gtkMenuPopdownDelay(): number;
        set gtkMenuPopdownDelay(val: number);

        /**
         * Minimum time the pointer must stay over a menu item before the submenu appear.
         * @deprecated since 3.10: This setting is ignored.
         * @default 225
         */
        get gtk_menu_popup_delay(): number;
        set gtk_menu_popup_delay(val: number);

        /**
         * Minimum time the pointer must stay over a menu item before the submenu appear.
         * @deprecated since 3.10: This setting is ignored.
         * @default 225
         */
        get gtkMenuPopupDelay(): number;
        set gtkMenuPopupDelay(val: number);

        /**
         * @default null
         */
        get gtk_modules(): string;
        set gtk_modules(val: string);

        /**
         * @default null
         */
        get gtkModules(): string;
        set gtkModules(val: string);

        /**
         * Whether scrolled windows may use overlayed scrolling indicators.
         * If this is set to `false`, scrolled windows will have permanent
         * scrollbars.
         * @since 3.24.9
         * @default true
         */
        get gtk_overlay_scrolling(): boolean;
        set gtk_overlay_scrolling(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether scrolled windows may use overlayed scrolling indicators.
         * If this is set to `false`, scrolled windows will have permanent
         * scrollbars.
         * @since 3.24.9
         * @default true
         */
        get gtkOverlayScrolling(): boolean;
        set gtkOverlayScrolling(val: boolean);

        /**
         * If the value of this setting is `true`, clicking the primary button in a
         * {@link Gtk.Range} trough will move the slider, and hence set the range’s value, to
         * the point that you clicked. If it is `false`, a primary click will cause the
         * slider/value to move by the range’s page-size towards the point clicked.
         * 
         * Whichever action you choose for the primary button, the other action will
         * be available by holding Shift and primary-clicking, or (since GTK+ 3.22.25)
         * clicking the middle mouse button.
         * @since 3.6
         * @default true
         */
        get gtk_primary_button_warps_slider(): boolean;
        set gtk_primary_button_warps_slider(val: boolean);

        /**
         * If the value of this setting is `true`, clicking the primary button in a
         * {@link Gtk.Range} trough will move the slider, and hence set the range’s value, to
         * the point that you clicked. If it is `false`, a primary click will cause the
         * slider/value to move by the range’s page-size towards the point clicked.
         * 
         * Whichever action you choose for the primary button, the other action will
         * be available by holding Shift and primary-clicking, or (since GTK+ 3.22.25)
         * clicking the middle mouse button.
         * @since 3.6
         * @default true
         */
        get gtkPrimaryButtonWarpsSlider(): boolean;
        set gtkPrimaryButtonWarpsSlider(val: boolean);

        /**
         * A comma-separated list of print backends to use in the print
         * dialog. Available print backends depend on the GTK+ installation,
         * and may include "file", "cups", "lpr" or "papi".
         * @since 2.10
         * @default file,lpr,cups
         */
        get gtk_print_backends(): string;
        set gtk_print_backends(val: string);

        /**
         * A comma-separated list of print backends to use in the print
         * dialog. Available print backends depend on the GTK+ installation,
         * and may include "file", "cups", "lpr" or "papi".
         * @since 2.10
         * @default file,lpr,cups
         */
        get gtkPrintBackends(): string;
        set gtkPrintBackends(val: string);

        /**
         * A command to run for displaying the print preview. The command
         * should contain a `%f` placeholder, which will get replaced by
         * the path to the pdf file. The command may also contain a `%s`
         * placeholder, which will get replaced by the path to a file
         * containing the print settings in the format produced by
         * `gtk_print_settings_to_file()`.
         * 
         * The preview application is responsible for removing the pdf file
         * and the print settings file when it is done.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default evince --unlink-tempfile --preview --print-settings %s %f
         */
        get gtk_print_preview_command(): string;
        set gtk_print_preview_command(val: string);

        /**
         * A command to run for displaying the print preview. The command
         * should contain a `%f` placeholder, which will get replaced by
         * the path to the pdf file. The command may also contain a `%s`
         * placeholder, which will get replaced by the path to a file
         * containing the print settings in the format produced by
         * `gtk_print_settings_to_file()`.
         * 
         * The preview application is responsible for removing the pdf file
         * and the print settings file when it is done.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default evince --unlink-tempfile --preview --print-settings %s %f
         */
        get gtkPrintPreviewCommand(): string;
        set gtkPrintPreviewCommand(val: string);

        /**
         * Whether GTK+ should keep track of items inside the recently used
         * resources list. If set to `false`, the list will always be empty.
         * @since 3.8
         * @default true
         */
        get gtk_recent_files_enabled(): boolean;
        set gtk_recent_files_enabled(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether GTK+ should keep track of items inside the recently used
         * resources list. If set to `false`, the list will always be empty.
         * @since 3.8
         * @default true
         */
        get gtkRecentFilesEnabled(): boolean;
        set gtkRecentFilesEnabled(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The number of recently used files that should be displayed by default by
         * {@link Gtk.RecentChooser} implementations and by the {@link Gtk.FileChooser}. A value of
         * -1 means every recently used file stored.
         * @since 2.12
         * @deprecated since 3.10: This setting is ignored
         * @default 50
         */
        get gtk_recent_files_limit(): number;
        set gtk_recent_files_limit(val: number);

        /**
         * The number of recently used files that should be displayed by default by
         * {@link Gtk.RecentChooser} implementations and by the {@link Gtk.FileChooser}. A value of
         * -1 means every recently used file stored.
         * @since 2.12
         * @deprecated since 3.10: This setting is ignored
         * @default 50
         */
        get gtkRecentFilesLimit(): number;
        set gtkRecentFilesLimit(val: number);

        /**
         * The maximum age, in days, of the items inside the recently used
         * resources list. Items older than this setting will be excised
         * from the list. If set to 0, the list will always be empty; if
         * set to -1, no item will be removed.
         * @since 2.14
         * @default 30
         */
        get gtk_recent_files_max_age(): number;
        set gtk_recent_files_max_age(val: number);

        /**
         * The maximum age, in days, of the items inside the recently used
         * resources list. Items older than this setting will be excised
         * from the list. If set to 0, the list will always be empty; if
         * set to -1, no item will be removed.
         * @since 2.14
         * @default 30
         */
        get gtkRecentFilesMaxAge(): number;
        set gtkRecentFilesMaxAge(val: number);

        /**
         * Where the contents of scrolled windows are located with respect to the
         * scrollbars, if not overridden by the scrolled window's own placement.
         * @since 2.10
         * @deprecated since 3.10: This setting is ignored.
         * @default Gtk.CornerType.TOP_LEFT
         */
        get gtk_scrolled_window_placement(): CornerType;
        set gtk_scrolled_window_placement(val: CornerType);

        /**
         * Where the contents of scrolled windows are located with respect to the
         * scrollbars, if not overridden by the scrolled window's own placement.
         * @since 2.10
         * @deprecated since 3.10: This setting is ignored.
         * @default Gtk.CornerType.TOP_LEFT
         */
        get gtkScrolledWindowPlacement(): CornerType;
        set gtkScrolledWindowPlacement(val: CornerType);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get gtk_shell_shows_app_menu(): boolean;
        set gtk_shell_shows_app_menu(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get gtkShellShowsAppMenu(): boolean;
        set gtkShellShowsAppMenu(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default true
         */
        get gtk_shell_shows_desktop(): boolean;
        set gtk_shell_shows_desktop(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default true
         */
        get gtkShellShowsDesktop(): boolean;
        set gtkShellShowsDesktop(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get gtk_shell_shows_menubar(): boolean;
        set gtk_shell_shows_menubar(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get gtkShellShowsMenubar(): boolean;
        set gtkShellShowsMenubar(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @deprecated since 3.10: This setting is ignored.
         * @default false
         */
        get gtk_show_input_method_menu(): boolean;
        set gtk_show_input_method_menu(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @deprecated since 3.10: This setting is ignored.
         * @default false
         */
        get gtkShowInputMethodMenu(): boolean;
        set gtkShowInputMethodMenu(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @deprecated since 3.10: This setting is ignored.
         * @default false
         */
        get gtk_show_unicode_menu(): boolean;
        set gtk_show_unicode_menu(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @deprecated since 3.10: This setting is ignored.
         * @default false
         */
        get gtkShowUnicodeMenu(): boolean;
        set gtkShowUnicodeMenu(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The XDG sound theme to use for event sounds.
         * 
         * See the [Sound Theme Specifications](http://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Specifications/sound-theme-spec)
         * for more information on event sounds and sound themes.
         * 
         * GTK+ itself does not support event sounds, you have to use a loadable
         * module like the one that comes with libcanberra.
         * @since 2.14
         * @default freedesktop
         */
        get gtk_sound_theme_name(): string;
        set gtk_sound_theme_name(val: string);

        /**
         * The XDG sound theme to use for event sounds.
         * 
         * See the [Sound Theme Specifications](http://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Specifications/sound-theme-spec)
         * for more information on event sounds and sound themes.
         * 
         * GTK+ itself does not support event sounds, you have to use a loadable
         * module like the one that comes with libcanberra.
         * @since 2.14
         * @default freedesktop
         */
        get gtkSoundThemeName(): string;
        set gtkSoundThemeName(val: string);

        /**
         * @default true
         */
        get gtk_split_cursor(): boolean;
        set gtk_split_cursor(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default true
         */
        get gtkSplitCursor(): boolean;
        set gtkSplitCursor(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default Adwaita
         */
        get gtk_theme_name(): string;
        set gtk_theme_name(val: string);

        /**
         * @default Adwaita
         */
        get gtkThemeName(): string;
        set gtkThemeName(val: string);

        /**
         * @deprecated since 3.10: This setting is ignored.
         * @default 500
         */
        get gtk_timeout_expand(): number;
        set gtk_timeout_expand(val: number);

        /**
         * @deprecated since 3.10: This setting is ignored.
         * @default 500
         */
        get gtkTimeoutExpand(): number;
        set gtkTimeoutExpand(val: number);

        /**
         * @deprecated since 3.10: This setting is ignored.
         * @default 500
         */
        get gtk_timeout_initial(): number;
        set gtk_timeout_initial(val: number);

        /**
         * @deprecated since 3.10: This setting is ignored.
         * @default 500
         */
        get gtkTimeoutInitial(): number;
        set gtkTimeoutInitial(val: number);

        /**
         * @deprecated since 3.10: This setting is ignored.
         * @default 50
         */
        get gtk_timeout_repeat(): number;
        set gtk_timeout_repeat(val: number);

        /**
         * @deprecated since 3.10: This setting is ignored.
         * @default 50
         */
        get gtkTimeoutRepeat(): number;
        set gtkTimeoutRepeat(val: number);

        /**
         * This setting determines the action to take when a double-click
         * occurs on the titlebar of client-side decorated windows.
         * 
         * Recognized actions are minimize, toggle-maximize, menu, lower
         * or none.
         * @since 3.14
         * @default toggle-maximize
         */
        get gtk_titlebar_double_click(): string;
        set gtk_titlebar_double_click(val: string);

        /**
         * This setting determines the action to take when a double-click
         * occurs on the titlebar of client-side decorated windows.
         * 
         * Recognized actions are minimize, toggle-maximize, menu, lower
         * or none.
         * @since 3.14
         * @default toggle-maximize
         */
        get gtkTitlebarDoubleClick(): string;
        set gtkTitlebarDoubleClick(val: string);

        /**
         * This setting determines the action to take when a middle-click
         * occurs on the titlebar of client-side decorated windows.
         * 
         * Recognized actions are minimize, toggle-maximize, menu, lower
         * or none.
         * @since 3.14
         * @default none
         */
        get gtk_titlebar_middle_click(): string;
        set gtk_titlebar_middle_click(val: string);

        /**
         * This setting determines the action to take when a middle-click
         * occurs on the titlebar of client-side decorated windows.
         * 
         * Recognized actions are minimize, toggle-maximize, menu, lower
         * or none.
         * @since 3.14
         * @default none
         */
        get gtkTitlebarMiddleClick(): string;
        set gtkTitlebarMiddleClick(val: string);

        /**
         * This setting determines the action to take when a right-click
         * occurs on the titlebar of client-side decorated windows.
         * 
         * Recognized actions are minimize, toggle-maximize, menu, lower
         * or none.
         * @since 3.14
         * @default menu
         */
        get gtk_titlebar_right_click(): string;
        set gtk_titlebar_right_click(val: string);

        /**
         * This setting determines the action to take when a right-click
         * occurs on the titlebar of client-side decorated windows.
         * 
         * Recognized actions are minimize, toggle-maximize, menu, lower
         * or none.
         * @since 3.14
         * @default menu
         */
        get gtkTitlebarRightClick(): string;
        set gtkTitlebarRightClick(val: string);

        /**
         * The size of icons in default toolbars.
         * @deprecated since 3.10: This setting is ignored.
         * @default Gtk.IconSize.LARGE_TOOLBAR
         */
        get gtk_toolbar_icon_size(): IconSize;
        set gtk_toolbar_icon_size(val: IconSize);

        /**
         * The size of icons in default toolbars.
         * @deprecated since 3.10: This setting is ignored.
         * @default Gtk.IconSize.LARGE_TOOLBAR
         */
        get gtkToolbarIconSize(): IconSize;
        set gtkToolbarIconSize(val: IconSize);

        /**
         * The size of icons in default toolbars.
         * @deprecated since 3.10: This setting is ignored.
         * @default Gtk.ToolbarStyle.BOTH_HORIZ
         */
        get gtk_toolbar_style(): ToolbarStyle;
        set gtk_toolbar_style(val: ToolbarStyle);

        /**
         * The size of icons in default toolbars.
         * @deprecated since 3.10: This setting is ignored.
         * @default Gtk.ToolbarStyle.BOTH_HORIZ
         */
        get gtkToolbarStyle(): ToolbarStyle;
        set gtkToolbarStyle(val: ToolbarStyle);

        /**
         * Amount of time, in milliseconds, after which the browse mode
         * will be disabled.
         * 
         * See {@link Gtk.Settings.gtk_tooltip_browse_timeout} for more information
         * about browse mode.
         * @since 2.12
         * @deprecated since 3.10: This setting is ignored.
         * @default 500
         */
        get gtk_tooltip_browse_mode_timeout(): number;
        set gtk_tooltip_browse_mode_timeout(val: number);

        /**
         * Amount of time, in milliseconds, after which the browse mode
         * will be disabled.
         * 
         * See {@link Gtk.Settings.gtk_tooltip_browse_timeout} for more information
         * about browse mode.
         * @since 2.12
         * @deprecated since 3.10: This setting is ignored.
         * @default 500
         */
        get gtkTooltipBrowseModeTimeout(): number;
        set gtkTooltipBrowseModeTimeout(val: number);

        /**
         * Controls the time after which tooltips will appear when
         * browse mode is enabled, in milliseconds.
         * 
         * Browse mode is enabled when the mouse pointer moves off an object
         * where a tooltip was currently being displayed. If the mouse pointer
         * hits another object before the browse mode timeout expires (see
         * {@link Gtk.Settings.gtk_tooltip_browse_mode_timeout}), it will take the
         * amount of milliseconds specified by this setting to popup the tooltip
         * for the new object.
         * @since 2.12
         * @deprecated since 3.10: This setting is ignored.
         * @default 60
         */
        get gtk_tooltip_browse_timeout(): number;
        set gtk_tooltip_browse_timeout(val: number);

        /**
         * Controls the time after which tooltips will appear when
         * browse mode is enabled, in milliseconds.
         * 
         * Browse mode is enabled when the mouse pointer moves off an object
         * where a tooltip was currently being displayed. If the mouse pointer
         * hits another object before the browse mode timeout expires (see
         * {@link Gtk.Settings.gtk_tooltip_browse_mode_timeout}), it will take the
         * amount of milliseconds specified by this setting to popup the tooltip
         * for the new object.
         * @since 2.12
         * @deprecated since 3.10: This setting is ignored.
         * @default 60
         */
        get gtkTooltipBrowseTimeout(): number;
        set gtkTooltipBrowseTimeout(val: number);

        /**
         * Time, in milliseconds, after which a tooltip could appear if the
         * cursor is hovering on top of a widget.
         * @since 2.12
         * @deprecated since 3.10: This setting is ignored.
         * @default 500
         */
        get gtk_tooltip_timeout(): number;
        set gtk_tooltip_timeout(val: number);

        /**
         * Time, in milliseconds, after which a tooltip could appear if the
         * cursor is hovering on top of a widget.
         * @since 2.12
         * @deprecated since 3.10: This setting is ignored.
         * @default 500
         */
        get gtkTooltipTimeout(): number;
        set gtkTooltipTimeout(val: number);

        /**
         * When `true`, there are no motion notify events delivered on this screen,
         * and widgets can't use the pointer hovering them for any essential
         * functionality.
         * @since 2.10
         * @deprecated since 3.4.: Generally, the behavior for touchscreen input should be             performed dynamically based on `gdk_event_get_source_device()`.
         * @default false
         */
        get gtk_touchscreen_mode(): boolean;
        set gtk_touchscreen_mode(val: boolean);

        /**
         * When `true`, there are no motion notify events delivered on this screen,
         * and widgets can't use the pointer hovering them for any essential
         * functionality.
         * @since 2.10
         * @deprecated since 3.4.: Generally, the behavior for touchscreen input should be             performed dynamically based on `gdk_event_get_source_device()`.
         * @default false
         */
        get gtkTouchscreenMode(): boolean;
        set gtkTouchscreenMode(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether 'focus rectangles' should be always visible, never visible,
         * or hidden until the user starts to use the keyboard.
         * @since 3.2
         * @deprecated since 3.10: This setting is ignored
         * @default Gtk.PolicyType.AUTOMATIC
         */
        get gtk_visible_focus(): PolicyType;
        set gtk_visible_focus(val: PolicyType);

        /**
         * Whether 'focus rectangles' should be always visible, never visible,
         * or hidden until the user starts to use the keyboard.
         * @since 3.2
         * @deprecated since 3.10: This setting is ignored
         * @default Gtk.PolicyType.AUTOMATIC
         */
        get gtkVisibleFocus(): PolicyType;
        set gtkVisibleFocus(val: PolicyType);

        /**
         * @default -1
         */
        get gtk_xft_antialias(): number;
        set gtk_xft_antialias(val: number);

        /**
         * @default -1
         */
        get gtkXftAntialias(): number;
        set gtkXftAntialias(val: number);

        /**
         * @default -1
         */
        get gtk_xft_dpi(): number;
        set gtk_xft_dpi(val: number);

        /**
         * @default -1
         */
        get gtkXftDpi(): number;
        set gtkXftDpi(val: number);

        /**
         * @default -1
         */
        get gtk_xft_hinting(): number;
        set gtk_xft_hinting(val: number);

        /**
         * @default -1
         */
        get gtkXftHinting(): number;
        set gtkXftHinting(val: number);

        /**
         * @default null
         */
        get gtk_xft_hintstyle(): string;
        set gtk_xft_hintstyle(val: string);

        /**
         * @default null
         */
        get gtkXftHintstyle(): string;
        set gtkXftHintstyle(val: string);

        /**
         * @default null
         */
        get gtk_xft_rgba(): string;
        set gtk_xft_rgba(val: string);

        /**
         * @default null
         */
        get gtkXftRgba(): string;
        set gtkXftRgba(val: string);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: Settings.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<Settings.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof Settings.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Settings.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof Settings.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Settings.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof Settings.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<Settings.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Static methods
        /**
         * Gets the {@link Gtk.Settings} object for the default GDK screen, creating
         * it if necessary. See `gtk_settings_get_for_screen()`.
         */
        static get_default(): Settings | null;

        /**
         * Gets the {@link Gtk.Settings} object for `screen`, creating it if necessary.
         * @param screen a {@link Gdk.Screen}.
         */
        static get_for_screen(screen: Gdk.Screen): Settings;

        /**
         * @param pspec 
         */
        static install_property(pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
    // Conflicted with GObject.Object.install_property
        static install_property(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * @param pspec 
         * @param parser 
         */
        static install_property_parser(pspec: GObject.ParamSpec, parser: RcPropertyParser): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Undoes the effect of calling `g_object_set()` to install an
         * application-specific value for a setting. After this call,
         * the setting will again follow the session-wide value for
         * this setting.
         * @param name the name of the setting to reset
         */
        reset_property(name: string): void;

        /**
         * @param name 
         * @param v_double 
         * @param origin 
         */
        set_double_property(name: string, v_double: number, origin: string): void;

        /**
         * @param name 
         * @param v_long 
         * @param origin 
         */
        set_long_property(name: string, v_long: bigint | number, origin: string): void;

        /**
         * @param name 
         * @param svalue 
         */
        set_property_value(name: string, svalue: SettingsValue): void;

        /**
         * @param name 
         * @param v_string 
         * @param origin 
         */
        set_string_property(name: string, v_string: string, origin: string): void;

        /**
         * Returns the {@link Gtk.IconFactory} defined to be in use for `path`, or `null` if none
         * is defined.
         * @param path {@link Gtk.WidgetPath} to query
         * @returns The icon factory to use for `path`, or `null`
         */
        get_icon_factory(path: WidgetPath): IconFactory | null;

        /**
         * Returns the style settings affecting a widget defined by `path`, or `null` if
         * `provider` doesn’t contemplate styling `path`.
         * @param path {@link Gtk.WidgetPath} to query
         * @returns a {@link Gtk.StyleProperties} containing the style settings affecting `path`
         */
        get_style(path: WidgetPath): StyleProperties | null;

        /**
         * Looks up a widget style property as defined by `provider` for
         * the widget represented by `path`.
         * @param path {@link Gtk.WidgetPath} to query
         * @param state state to query the style property for
         * @param pspec The {@link GObject.ParamSpec} to query
         * @returns `true` if the property was found and has a value, `false` otherwise
         */
        get_style_property(path: WidgetPath, state: StateFlags, pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): [boolean, unknown];

        /**
         * Returns the {@link Gtk.IconFactory} defined to be in use for `path`, or `null` if none
         * is defined.
         * @param path {@link Gtk.WidgetPath} to query
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_icon_factory(path: WidgetPath): IconFactory | null;

        /**
         * Returns the style settings affecting a widget defined by `path`, or `null` if
         * `provider` doesn’t contemplate styling `path`.
         * @param path {@link Gtk.WidgetPath} to query
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_style(path: WidgetPath): StyleProperties | null;

        /**
         * Looks up a widget style property as defined by `provider` for
         * the widget represented by `path`.
         * @param path {@link Gtk.WidgetPath} to query
         * @param state state to query the style property for
         * @param pspec The {@link GObject.ParamSpec} to query
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_style_property(path: WidgetPath, state: StateFlags, pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): [boolean, GObject.Value | any];
    }


    namespace ShortcutLabel {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Box.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::accelerator": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::disabled-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::baseline-position": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::homogeneous": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::spacing": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::orientation": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Box.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, Orientable.ConstructorProps {
            accelerator: string | null;
            disabled_text: string | null;
            disabledText: string | null;
        }
    }

    /**
     * {@link Gtk.ShortcutLabel} is a widget that represents a single keyboard shortcut or gesture
     * in the user interface.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class ShortcutLabel extends Box implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable, Orientable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ShortcutLabel>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * The accelerator that `self` displays. See {@link Gtk.ShortcutsShortcut.accelerator}
         * for the accepted syntax.
         * @since 3.22
         * @default null
         */
        get accelerator(): string | null;
        set accelerator(val: string | null);

        /**
         * The text that is displayed when no accelerator is set.
         * @since 3.22
         * @default null
         */
        get disabled_text(): string | null;
        set disabled_text(val: string | null);

        /**
         * The text that is displayed when no accelerator is set.
         * @since 3.22
         * @default null
         */
        get disabledText(): string | null;
        set disabledText(val: string | null);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: ShortcutLabel.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<ShortcutLabel.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](accelerator: string): ShortcutLabel;

        // Conflicted with Gtk.Box.new
        static ["new"](...args: never[]): any;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof ShortcutLabel.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ShortcutLabel.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof ShortcutLabel.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ShortcutLabel.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof ShortcutLabel.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<ShortcutLabel.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Retrieves the current accelerator of `self`.
         * @returns the current accelerator.
         */
        get_accelerator(): string | null;

        /**
         * Retrieves the text that is displayed when no accelerator is set.
         * @returns the current text displayed when no accelerator is set.
         */
        get_disabled_text(): string | null;

        /**
         * Sets the accelerator to be displayed by `self`.
         * @param accelerator the new accelerator
         */
        set_accelerator(accelerator: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets the text to be displayed by `self` when no accelerator is set.
         * @param disabled_text the text to be displayed when no accelerator is set
         */
        set_disabled_text(disabled_text: string): void;

        /**
         * The orientation of the orientable.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default Gtk.Orientation.HORIZONTAL
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Orientable
         */
        get orientation(): Orientation;
        set orientation(val: Orientation);

        /**
         * Retrieves the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @returns the orientation of the `orientable`.
         */
        get_orientation(): Orientation;

        /**
         * Sets the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @param orientation the orientable’s new orientation.
         */
        set_orientation(orientation: Orientation): void;
    }


    namespace ShortcutsGroup {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Box.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::accel-size-group": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::title": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::title-size-group": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::view": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::baseline-position": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::homogeneous": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::spacing": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::orientation": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Box.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, Orientable.ConstructorProps {
            accel_size_group: SizeGroup;
            accelSizeGroup: SizeGroup;
            height: number;
            title: string;
            title_size_group: SizeGroup;
            titleSizeGroup: SizeGroup;
            view: string;
        }
    }

    /**
     * A GtkShortcutsGroup represents a group of related keyboard shortcuts
     * or gestures. The group has a title. It may optionally be associated with
     * a view of the application, which can be used to show only relevant shortcuts
     * depending on the application context.
     * 
     * This widget is only meant to be used with {@link Gtk.ShortcutsWindow}.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class ShortcutsGroup extends Box implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable, Orientable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ShortcutsGroup>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * The size group for the accelerator portion of shortcuts in this group.
         * 
         * This is used internally by GTK+, and must not be modified by applications.
         * @write-only
         */
        set accel_size_group(val: SizeGroup);

        /**
         * The size group for the accelerator portion of shortcuts in this group.
         * 
         * This is used internally by GTK+, and must not be modified by applications.
         * @write-only
         */
        set accelSizeGroup(val: SizeGroup);

        /**
         * A rough measure for the number of lines in this group.
         * 
         * This is used internally by GTK+, and is not useful for applications.
         * @read-only
         * @default 1
         */
        get height(): number;

        /**
         * The title for this group of shortcuts.
         */
        get title(): string;
        set title(val: string);

        /**
         * The size group for the textual portion of shortcuts in this group.
         * 
         * This is used internally by GTK+, and must not be modified by applications.
         * @write-only
         */
        set title_size_group(val: SizeGroup);

        /**
         * The size group for the textual portion of shortcuts in this group.
         * 
         * This is used internally by GTK+, and must not be modified by applications.
         * @write-only
         */
        set titleSizeGroup(val: SizeGroup);

        /**
         * An optional view that the shortcuts in this group are relevant for.
         * The group will be hidden if the {@link Gtk.ShortcutsWindow.view_name} property
         * does not match the view of this group.
         * 
         * Set this to `null` to make the group always visible.
         * @default null
         */
        get view(): string;
        set view(val: string);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: ShortcutsGroup.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<ShortcutsGroup.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof ShortcutsGroup.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ShortcutsGroup.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof ShortcutsGroup.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ShortcutsGroup.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof ShortcutsGroup.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<ShortcutsGroup.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        /**
         * The orientation of the orientable.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default Gtk.Orientation.HORIZONTAL
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Orientable
         */
        get orientation(): Orientation;
        set orientation(val: Orientation);

        /**
         * Retrieves the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @returns the orientation of the `orientable`.
         */
        get_orientation(): Orientation;

        /**
         * Sets the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @param orientation the orientable’s new orientation.
         */
        set_orientation(orientation: Orientation): void;
    }


    namespace ShortcutsSection {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Box.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "change-current-page": (arg0: number) => boolean | void;
            "notify::max-height": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::section-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::title": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::view-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::baseline-position": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::homogeneous": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::spacing": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::orientation": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Box.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, Orientable.ConstructorProps {
            max_height: number;
            maxHeight: number;
            section_name: string;
            sectionName: string;
            title: string;
            view_name: string;
            viewName: string;
        }
    }

    /**
     * A GtkShortcutsSection collects all the keyboard shortcuts and gestures
     * for a major application mode. If your application needs multiple sections,
     * you should give each section a unique {@link Gtk.ShortcutsSection.section_name} and
     * a {@link Gtk.ShortcutsSection.title} that can be shown in the section selector of
     * the GtkShortcutsWindow.
     * 
     * The {@link Gtk.ShortcutsSection.max_height} property can be used to influence how
     * the groups in the section are distributed over pages and columns.
     * 
     * This widget is only meant to be used with {@link Gtk.ShortcutsWindow}.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class ShortcutsSection extends Box implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable, Orientable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ShortcutsSection>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * The maximum number of lines to allow per column. This property can
         * be used to influence how the groups in this section are distributed
         * across pages and columns. The default value of 15 should work in
         * most cases.
         * @default 15
         */
        get max_height(): number;
        set max_height(val: number);

        /**
         * The maximum number of lines to allow per column. This property can
         * be used to influence how the groups in this section are distributed
         * across pages and columns. The default value of 15 should work in
         * most cases.
         * @default 15
         */
        get maxHeight(): number;
        set maxHeight(val: number);

        /**
         * A unique name to identify this section among the sections
         * added to the GtkShortcutsWindow. Setting the {@link Gtk.ShortcutsWindow.section_name}
         * property to this string will make this section shown in the
         * GtkShortcutsWindow.
         * @default null
         */
        get section_name(): string;
        set section_name(val: string);

        /**
         * A unique name to identify this section among the sections
         * added to the GtkShortcutsWindow. Setting the {@link Gtk.ShortcutsWindow.section_name}
         * property to this string will make this section shown in the
         * GtkShortcutsWindow.
         * @default null
         */
        get sectionName(): string;
        set sectionName(val: string);

        /**
         * The string to show in the section selector of the GtkShortcutsWindow
         * for this section. If there is only one section, you don't need to
         * set a title, since the section selector will not be shown in this case.
         * @default null
         */
        get title(): string;
        set title(val: string);

        /**
         * A view name to filter the groups in this section by.
         * See {@link Gtk.ShortcutsGroup.view}.
         * 
         * Applications are expected to use the {@link Gtk.ShortcutsWindow.view_name}
         * property for this purpose.
         * @default null
         */
        get view_name(): string;
        set view_name(val: string);

        /**
         * A view name to filter the groups in this section by.
         * See {@link Gtk.ShortcutsGroup.view}.
         * 
         * Applications are expected to use the {@link Gtk.ShortcutsWindow.view_name}
         * property for this purpose.
         * @default null
         */
        get viewName(): string;
        set viewName(val: string);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: ShortcutsSection.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<ShortcutsSection.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof ShortcutsSection.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ShortcutsSection.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof ShortcutsSection.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ShortcutsSection.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof ShortcutsSection.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<ShortcutsSection.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        /**
         * The orientation of the orientable.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default Gtk.Orientation.HORIZONTAL
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Orientable
         */
        get orientation(): Orientation;
        set orientation(val: Orientation);

        /**
         * Retrieves the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @returns the orientation of the `orientable`.
         */
        get_orientation(): Orientation;

        /**
         * Sets the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @param orientation the orientable’s new orientation.
         */
        set_orientation(orientation: Orientation): void;
    }


    namespace ShortcutsShortcut {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Box.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::accel-size-group": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accelerator": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::action-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::direction": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::icon": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::icon-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::shortcut-type": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::subtitle": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::subtitle-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::title": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::title-size-group": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::baseline-position": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::homogeneous": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::spacing": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::orientation": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Box.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, Orientable.ConstructorProps {
            accel_size_group: SizeGroup;
            accelSizeGroup: SizeGroup;
            accelerator: string;
            action_name: string;
            actionName: string;
            direction: TextDirection;
            icon: Gio.Icon;
            icon_set: boolean;
            iconSet: boolean;
            shortcut_type: ShortcutType;
            shortcutType: ShortcutType;
            subtitle: string;
            subtitle_set: boolean;
            subtitleSet: boolean;
            title: string;
            title_size_group: SizeGroup;
            titleSizeGroup: SizeGroup;
        }
    }

    /**
     * A GtkShortcutsShortcut represents a single keyboard shortcut or gesture
     * with a short text. This widget is only meant to be used with {@link Gtk.ShortcutsWindow}.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class ShortcutsShortcut extends Box implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable, Orientable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ShortcutsShortcut>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * The size group for the accelerator portion of this shortcut.
         * 
         * This is used internally by GTK+, and must not be modified by applications.
         * @write-only
         */
        set accel_size_group(val: SizeGroup);

        /**
         * The size group for the accelerator portion of this shortcut.
         * 
         * This is used internally by GTK+, and must not be modified by applications.
         * @write-only
         */
        set accelSizeGroup(val: SizeGroup);

        /**
         * The accelerator(s) represented by this object. This property is used
         * if {@link Gtk.ShortcutsShortcut.shortcut_type} is set to #GTK_SHORTCUT_ACCELERATOR.
         * 
         * The syntax of this property is (an extension of) the syntax understood by
         * `gtk_accelerator_parse()`. Multiple accelerators can be specified by separating
         * them with a space, but keep in mind that the available width is limited.
         * It is also possible to specify ranges of shortcuts, using `...` between the keys.
         * Sequences of keys can be specified using a `+` or `&` between the keys.
         * 
         * Examples:
         * 
         * - A single shortcut: `<ctl><alt>delete`
         * - Two alternative shortcuts: `<shift>a Home`
         * - A range of shortcuts: `<alt>1...<alt>9`
         * - Several keys pressed together: `Control_L&Control_R`
         * - A sequence of shortcuts or keys: `<ctl>c+<ctl>x`
         * 
         * Use + instead of & when the keys may (or have to be) pressed sequentially (e.g
         * use t+t for 'press the t key twice').
         * 
         * Note that `<`, `>` and `&` need to be escaped as &lt;, &gt; and &amp; when used
         * in .ui files.
         * @default null
         */
        get accelerator(): string;
        set accelerator(val: string);

        /**
         * A detailed action name. If this is set for a shortcut
         * of type {@link Gtk.ShortcutType.ACCELERATOR}, then GTK+ will use
         * the accelerators that are associated with the action
         * via `gtk_application_set_accels_for_action()`, and setting
         * {@link Gtk.ShortcutsShortcut.SignalSignatures.accelerator | Gtk.ShortcutsShortcut::accelerator} is not necessary.
         * @since 3.22
         * @default null
         */
        get action_name(): string;
        set action_name(val: string);

        /**
         * A detailed action name. If this is set for a shortcut
         * of type {@link Gtk.ShortcutType.ACCELERATOR}, then GTK+ will use
         * the accelerators that are associated with the action
         * via `gtk_application_set_accels_for_action()`, and setting
         * {@link Gtk.ShortcutsShortcut.SignalSignatures.accelerator | Gtk.ShortcutsShortcut::accelerator} is not necessary.
         * @since 3.22
         * @default null
         */
        get actionName(): string;
        set actionName(val: string);

        /**
         * The text direction for which this shortcut is active. If the shortcut
         * is used regardless of the text direction, set this property to
         * #GTK_TEXT_DIR_NONE.
         * @default Gtk.TextDirection.NONE
         */
        get direction(): TextDirection;
        set direction(val: TextDirection);

        /**
         * An icon to represent the shortcut or gesture. This property is used if
         * {@link Gtk.ShortcutsShortcut.shortcut_type} is set to #GTK_SHORTCUT_GESTURE.
         * For the other predefined gesture types, GTK+ provides an icon on its own.
         */
        get icon(): Gio.Icon;
        set icon(val: Gio.Icon);

        /**
         * `true` if an icon has been set.
         * @default false
         */
        get icon_set(): boolean;
        set icon_set(val: boolean);

        /**
         * `true` if an icon has been set.
         * @default false
         */
        get iconSet(): boolean;
        set iconSet(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The type of shortcut that is represented.
         * @default Gtk.ShortcutType.ACCELERATOR
         */
        get shortcut_type(): ShortcutType;
        set shortcut_type(val: ShortcutType);

        /**
         * The type of shortcut that is represented.
         * @default Gtk.ShortcutType.ACCELERATOR
         */
        get shortcutType(): ShortcutType;
        set shortcutType(val: ShortcutType);

        /**
         * The subtitle for the shortcut or gesture.
         * 
         * This is typically used for gestures and should be a short, one-line
         * text that describes the gesture itself. For the predefined gesture
         * types, GTK+ provides a subtitle on its own.
         */
        get subtitle(): string;
        set subtitle(val: string);

        /**
         * `true` if a subtitle has been set.
         * @default false
         */
        get subtitle_set(): boolean;
        set subtitle_set(val: boolean);

        /**
         * `true` if a subtitle has been set.
         * @default false
         */
        get subtitleSet(): boolean;
        set subtitleSet(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The textual description for the shortcut or gesture represented by
         * this object. This should be a short string that can fit in a single line.
         */
        get title(): string;
        set title(val: string);

        /**
         * The size group for the textual portion of this shortcut.
         * 
         * This is used internally by GTK+, and must not be modified by applications.
         * @write-only
         */
        set title_size_group(val: SizeGroup);

        /**
         * The size group for the textual portion of this shortcut.
         * 
         * This is used internally by GTK+, and must not be modified by applications.
         * @write-only
         */
        set titleSizeGroup(val: SizeGroup);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: ShortcutsShortcut.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<ShortcutsShortcut.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof ShortcutsShortcut.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ShortcutsShortcut.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof ShortcutsShortcut.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ShortcutsShortcut.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof ShortcutsShortcut.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<ShortcutsShortcut.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        /**
         * The orientation of the orientable.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default Gtk.Orientation.HORIZONTAL
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Orientable
         */
        get orientation(): Orientation;
        set orientation(val: Orientation);

        /**
         * Retrieves the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @returns the orientation of the `orientable`.
         */
        get_orientation(): Orientation;

        /**
         * Sets the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @param orientation the orientable’s new orientation.
         */
        set_orientation(orientation: Orientation): void;
    }


    namespace ShortcutsWindow {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Window.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * The ::close signal is a
             * [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted when the user uses a keybinding to close
             * the window.
             * 
             * The default binding for this signal is the Escape key.
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            close: () => void;
            /**
             * The ::search signal is a
             * [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted when the user uses a keybinding to start a search.
             * 
             * The default binding for this signal is Control-F.
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            search: () => void;
            "notify::section-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::view-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accept-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::application": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::attached-to": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::decorated": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::default-height": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::default-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::deletable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::destroy-with-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-map": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gravity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-resize-grip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-toplevel-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hide-titlebar-when-maximized": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::icon": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::icon-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-active": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-maximized": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::mnemonics-visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::modal": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resizable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-grip-visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::screen": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::skip-pager-hint": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::skip-taskbar-hint": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::startup-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::title": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::transient-for": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::type": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::type-hint": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::urgency-hint": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window-position": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Window.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {
            section_name: string;
            sectionName: string;
            view_name: string;
            viewName: string;
        }
    }

    /**
     * A GtkShortcutsWindow shows brief information about the keyboard shortcuts
     * and gestures of an application. The shortcuts can be grouped, and you can
     * have multiple sections in this window, corresponding to the major modes of
     * your application.
     * 
     * Additionally, the shortcuts can be filtered by the current view, to avoid
     * showing information that is not relevant in the current application context.
     * 
     * The recommended way to construct a GtkShortcutsWindow is with GtkBuilder,
     * by populating a {@link Gtk.ShortcutsWindow} with one or more {@link Gtk.ShortcutsSection}
     * objects, which contain `GtkShortcutsGroups` that in turn contain objects of
     * class {@link Gtk.ShortcutsShortcut}.
     * 
     * # A simple example:
     * 
     * ![](gedit-shortcuts.png)
     * 
     * This example has as single section. As you can see, the shortcut groups
     * are arranged in columns, and spread across several pages if there are too
     * many to find on a single page.
     * 
     * The .ui file for this example can be found [here](https://git.gnome.org/browse/gtk+/tree/demos/gtk-demo/shortcuts-gedit.ui).
     * 
     * # An example with multiple views:
     * 
     * ![](clocks-shortcuts.png)
     * 
     * This example shows a {@link Gtk.ShortcutsWindow} that has been configured to show only
     * the shortcuts relevant to the "stopwatch" view.
     * 
     * The .ui file for this example can be found [here](https://git.gnome.org/browse/gtk+/tree/demos/gtk-demo/shortcuts-clocks.ui).
     * 
     * # An example with multiple sections:
     * 
     * ![](builder-shortcuts.png)
     * 
     * This example shows a {@link Gtk.ShortcutsWindow} with two sections, "Editor Shortcuts"
     * and "Terminal Shortcuts".
     * 
     * The .ui file for this example can be found [here](https://git.gnome.org/browse/gtk+/tree/demos/gtk-demo/shortcuts-builder.ui).
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class ShortcutsWindow extends Window implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ShortcutsWindow>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * The name of the section to show.
         * 
         * This should be the section-name of one of the {@link Gtk.ShortcutsSection}
         * objects that are in this shortcuts window.
         * @default internal-search
         */
        get section_name(): string;
        set section_name(val: string);

        /**
         * The name of the section to show.
         * 
         * This should be the section-name of one of the {@link Gtk.ShortcutsSection}
         * objects that are in this shortcuts window.
         * @default internal-search
         */
        get sectionName(): string;
        set sectionName(val: string);

        /**
         * The view name by which to filter the contents.
         * 
         * This should correspond to the {@link Gtk.ShortcutsGroup.view} property of some of
         * the {@link Gtk.ShortcutsGroup} objects that are inside this shortcuts window.
         * 
         * Set this to `null` to show all groups.
         * @default null
         */
        get view_name(): string;
        set view_name(val: string);

        /**
         * The view name by which to filter the contents.
         * 
         * This should correspond to the {@link Gtk.ShortcutsGroup.view} property of some of
         * the {@link Gtk.ShortcutsGroup} objects that are inside this shortcuts window.
         * 
         * Set this to `null` to show all groups.
         * @default null
         */
        get viewName(): string;
        set viewName(val: string);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: ShortcutsWindow.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        
    // @ts-expect-error This property conflicts with an accessor in a parent class or interface.
    window: Window;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<ShortcutsWindow.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof ShortcutsWindow.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ShortcutsWindow.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof ShortcutsWindow.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ShortcutsWindow.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof ShortcutsWindow.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<ShortcutsWindow.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_close(): void;

        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_search(): void;
    }


    namespace SizeGroup {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends GObject.Object.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::ignore-hidden": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.Object.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {
            ignore_hidden: boolean;
            ignoreHidden: boolean;
            mode: SizeGroupMode;
        }
    }

    /**
     * {@link Gtk.SizeGroup} provides a mechanism for grouping a number of widgets
     * together so they all request the same amount of space.  This is
     * typically useful when you want a column of widgets to have the same
     * size, but you can’t use a {@link Gtk.Grid} widget.
     * 
     * In detail, the size requested for each widget in a {@link Gtk.SizeGroup} is
     * the maximum of the sizes that would have been requested for each
     * widget in the size group if they were not in the size group. The mode
     * of the size group (see `gtk_size_group_set_mode()`) determines whether
     * this applies to the horizontal size, the vertical size, or both sizes.
     * 
     * Note that size groups only affect the amount of space requested, not
     * the size that the widgets finally receive. If you want the widgets in
     * a {@link Gtk.SizeGroup} to actually be the same size, you need to pack them in
     * such a way that they get the size they request and not more. For
     * example, if you are packing your widgets into a table, you would not
     * include the {@link Gtk.AttachOptions.FILL} flag.
     * 
     * {@link Gtk.SizeGroup} objects are referenced by each widget in the size group,
     * so once you have added all widgets to a {@link Gtk.SizeGroup}, you can drop
     * the initial reference to the size group with `g_object_unref()`. If the
     * widgets in the size group are subsequently destroyed, then they will
     * be removed from the size group and drop their references on the size
     * group; when all widgets have been removed, the size group will be
     * freed.
     * 
     * Widgets can be part of multiple size groups; GTK+ will compute the
     * horizontal size of a widget from the horizontal requisition of all
     * widgets that can be reached from the widget by a chain of size groups
     * of type {@link Gtk.SizeGroupMode.HORIZONTAL} or {@link Gtk.SizeGroupMode.BOTH}, and the
     * vertical size from the vertical requisition of all widgets that can be
     * reached from the widget by a chain of size groups of type
     * {@link Gtk.SizeGroupMode.VERTICAL} or {@link Gtk.SizeGroupMode.BOTH}.
     * 
     * Note that only non-contextual sizes of every widget are ever consulted
     * by size groups (since size groups have no knowledge of what size a widget
     * will be allocated in one dimension, it cannot derive how much height
     * a widget will receive for a given width). When grouping widgets that
     * trade height for width in mode {@link Gtk.SizeGroupMode.VERTICAL} or {@link Gtk.SizeGroupMode.BOTH}:
     * the height for the minimum width will be the requested height for all
     * widgets in the group. The same is of course true when horizontally grouping
     * width for height widgets.
     * 
     * Widgets that trade height-for-width should set a reasonably large minimum width
     * by way of {@link Gtk.Label.width_chars} for instance. Widgets with static sizes as well
     * as widgets that grow (such as ellipsizing text) need no such considerations.
     * 
     * # GtkSizeGroup as GtkBuildable
     * 
     * Size groups can be specified in a UI definition by placing an `<object>`
     * element with `class="GtkSizeGroup"` somewhere in the UI definition. The
     * widgets that belong to the size group are specified by a `<widgets>` element
     * that may contain multiple `<widget>` elements, one for each member of the
     * size group. The ”name” attribute gives the id of the widget.
     * 
     * An example of a UI definition fragment with GtkSizeGroup:
     * 
     * 
     * ```xml
     * <object class="GtkSizeGroup">
     *   <property name="mode">GTK_SIZE_GROUP_HORIZONTAL</property>
     *   <widgets>
     *     <widget name="radio1"/>
     *     <widget name="radio2"/>
     *   </widgets>
     * </object>
     * ```
     * 
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class SizeGroup extends GObject.Object implements Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<SizeGroup>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * If `true`, unmapped widgets are ignored when determining
         * the size of the group.
         * @since 2.8
         * @deprecated since 3.22: Measuring the size of hidden widgets has not worked     reliably for a long time. In most cases, they will report a size     of 0 nowadays, and thus, their size will not affect the other     size group members. In effect, size groups will always operate     as if this property was `true`. Use a {@link Gtk.Stack} instead to hide     widgets while still having their size taken into account.
         * @default false
         */
        get ignore_hidden(): boolean;
        set ignore_hidden(val: boolean);

        /**
         * If `true`, unmapped widgets are ignored when determining
         * the size of the group.
         * @since 2.8
         * @deprecated since 3.22: Measuring the size of hidden widgets has not worked     reliably for a long time. In most cases, they will report a size     of 0 nowadays, and thus, their size will not affect the other     size group members. In effect, size groups will always operate     as if this property was `true`. Use a {@link Gtk.Stack} instead to hide     widgets while still having their size taken into account.
         * @default false
         */
        get ignoreHidden(): boolean;
        set ignoreHidden(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default Gtk.SizeGroupMode.HORIZONTAL
         */
        get mode(): SizeGroupMode;
        set mode(val: SizeGroupMode);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: SizeGroup.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<SizeGroup.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](mode: SizeGroupMode): SizeGroup;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof SizeGroup.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, SizeGroup.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof SizeGroup.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, SizeGroup.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof SizeGroup.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<SizeGroup.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Adds a widget to a {@link Gtk.SizeGroup}. In the future, the requisition
         * of the widget will be determined as the maximum of its requisition
         * and the requisition of the other widgets in the size group.
         * Whether this applies horizontally, vertically, or in both directions
         * depends on the mode of the size group. See `gtk_size_group_set_mode()`.
         * 
         * When the widget is destroyed or no longer referenced elsewhere, it will
         * be removed from the size group.
         * @param widget the {@link Gtk.Widget} to add
         */
        add_widget(widget: Widget): void;

        /**
         * Returns if invisible widgets are ignored when calculating the size.
         * @returns `true` if invisible widgets are ignored.
         */
        get_ignore_hidden(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the current mode of the size group. See `gtk_size_group_set_mode()`.
         * @returns the current mode of the size group.
         */
        get_mode(): SizeGroupMode;

        /**
         * Returns the list of widgets associated with `size_group`.
         * @returns a {@link GLib.SList} of   widgets. The list is owned by GTK+ and should not be modified.
         */
        get_widgets(): Widget[];

        /**
         * Removes a widget from a {@link Gtk.SizeGroup}.
         * @param widget the {@link Gtk.Widget} to remove
         */
        remove_widget(widget: Widget): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether unmapped widgets should be ignored when
         * calculating the size.
         * @param ignore_hidden whether unmapped widgets should be ignored   when calculating the size
         */
        set_ignore_hidden(ignore_hidden: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.SizeGroupMode} of the size group. The mode of the size
         * group determines whether the widgets in the size group should
         * all have the same horizontal requisition ({@link Gtk.SizeGroupMode.HORIZONTAL})
         * all have the same vertical requisition ({@link Gtk.SizeGroupMode.VERTICAL}),
         * or should all have the same requisition in both directions
         * ({@link Gtk.SizeGroupMode.BOTH}).
         * @param mode the mode to set for the size group.
         */
        set_mode(mode: SizeGroupMode): void;

        /**
         * Adds a child to `buildable`. `type` is an optional string
         * describing how the child should be added.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child to add
         * @param type kind of child or `null`
         */
        add_child(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object, type: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Constructs a child of `buildable` with the name `name`.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} calls this function if a “constructor” has been
         * specified in the UI definition.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param name name of child to construct
         * @returns the constructed child
         */
        construct_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, name: string): T;

        /**
         * This is similar to `gtk_buildable_parser_finished()` but is
         * called once for each custom tag handled by the `buildable`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname the name of the tag
         * @param data user data created in custom_tag_start
         */
        custom_finished(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
         * the buildable.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @param data user data that will be passed in to parser functions
         */
        custom_tag_end(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called for each unknown element under `<child>`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @returns `true` if a object has a custom implementation, `false`          if it doesn't.
         */
        custom_tag_start(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string): [boolean, GLib.MarkupParser, null];

        /**
         * Get the internal child called `childname` of the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param childname name of child
         * @returns the internal child of the buildable object
         */
        get_internal_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, childname: string): T;

        /**
         * Gets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} sets the name based on the
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI]
         * used to construct the `buildable`.
         * @returns the name set with `gtk_buildable_set_name()`
         */
        get_name(): string;

        /**
         * Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI].
         * Note that this will be called once for each time
         * `gtk_builder_add_from_file()` or `gtk_builder_add_from_string()`
         * is called on a builder.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         */
        parser_finished(builder: Builder): void;

        /**
         * Sets the property name `name` to `value` on the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param name name of property
         * @param value value of property
         */
        set_buildable_property(builder: Builder, name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;

        /**
         * Sets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * @param name name to set
         */
        set_name(name: string): void;

        /**
         * Adds a child to `buildable`. `type` is an optional string
         * describing how the child should be added.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child to add
         * @param type kind of child or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add_child(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object, type: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Constructs a child of `buildable` with the name `name`.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} calls this function if a “constructor” has been
         * specified in the UI definition.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param name name of child to construct
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_construct_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, name: string): T;

        /**
         * This is similar to `gtk_buildable_parser_finished()` but is
         * called once for each custom tag handled by the `buildable`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname the name of the tag
         * @param data user data created in custom_tag_start
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_finished(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
         * the buildable.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @param data user data that will be passed in to parser functions
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_tag_end(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called for each unknown element under `<child>`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_tag_start(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string): [boolean, GLib.MarkupParser, never];

        /**
         * Get the internal child called `childname` of the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param childname name of child
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_internal_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, childname: string): T;

        /**
         * Gets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} sets the name based on the
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI]
         * used to construct the `buildable`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_name(): string;

        /**
         * Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI].
         * Note that this will be called once for each time
         * `gtk_builder_add_from_file()` or `gtk_builder_add_from_string()`
         * is called on a builder.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_parser_finished(builder: Builder): void;

        /**
         * Sets the property name `name` to `value` on the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param name name of property
         * @param value value of property
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_buildable_property(builder: Builder, name: string, value: unknown): void;

        /**
         * Sets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * @param name name to set
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_name(name: string): void;
    }


    namespace Socket {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Container.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * This signal is emitted when a client is successfully
             * added to the socket.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "plug-added": () => void;
            /**
             * This signal is emitted when a client is removed from the socket.
             * The default action is to destroy the {@link Gtk.Socket} widget, so if you
             * want to reuse it you must add a signal handler that returns `true`.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "plug-removed": () => boolean | void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Container.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * Together with {@link Gtk.Plug}, {@link Gtk.Socket} provides the ability to embed
     * widgets from one process into another process in a fashion that
     * is transparent to the user. One process creates a {@link Gtk.Socket} widget
     * and passes that widget’s window ID to the other process, which then
     * creates a {@link Gtk.Plug} with that window ID. Any widgets contained in the
     * {@link Gtk.Plug} then will appear inside the first application’s window.
     * 
     * The socket’s window ID is obtained by using `gtk_socket_get_id()`.
     * Before using this function, the socket must have been realized,
     * and for hence, have been added to its parent.
     * 
     * ## Obtaining the window ID of a socket.
     * 
     * 
     * ```c
     * GtkWidget *socket = gtk_socket_new ();
     * gtk_widget_show (socket);
     * gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (parent), socket);
     * 
     * // The following call is only necessary if one of
     * // the ancestors of the socket is not yet visible.
     * gtk_widget_realize (socket);
     * g_print ("The ID of the sockets window is %#x\n",
     *          gtk_socket_get_id (socket));
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * Note that if you pass the window ID of the socket to another
     * process that will create a plug in the socket, you must make
     * sure that the socket widget is not destroyed until that plug
     * is created. Violating this rule will cause unpredictable
     * consequences, the most likely consequence being that the plug
     * will appear as a separate toplevel window. You can check if
     * the plug has been created by using `gtk_socket_get_plug_window()`.
     * If it returns a non-`null` value, then the plug has been
     * successfully created inside of the socket.
     * 
     * When GTK+ is notified that the embedded window has been destroyed,
     * then it will destroy the socket as well. You should always,
     * therefore, be prepared for your sockets to be destroyed at any
     * time when the main event loop is running. To prevent this from
     * happening, you can connect to the {@link Gtk.Socket.SignalSignatures.plug_removed | Gtk.Socket::plug-removed} signal.
     * 
     * The communication between a {@link Gtk.Socket} and a {@link Gtk.Plug} follows the
     * [XEmbed Protocol](http://www.freedesktop.org/Standards/xembed-spec).
     * This protocol has also been implemented in other toolkits, e.g. Qt,
     * allowing the same level of integration when embedding a Qt widget
     * in GTK or vice versa.
     * 
     * The {@link Gtk.Plug} and {@link Gtk.Socket} widgets are only available when GTK+
     * is compiled for the X11 platform and `GDK_WINDOWING_X11` is defined.
     * They can only be used on a `GdkX11Display`. To use {@link Gtk.Plug} and
     * {@link Gtk.Socket}, you need to include the `gtk/gtkx.h` header.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class Socket extends Container implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<Socket>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: Socket.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        container: Container;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<Socket.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): Socket;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof Socket.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Socket.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof Socket.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Socket.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof Socket.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<Socket.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_plug_added(): void;

        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_plug_removed(): boolean;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Adds an XEMBED client, such as a {@link Gtk.Plug}, to the {@link Gtk.Socket}.  The
         * client may be in the same process or in a different process.
         * 
         * To embed a {@link Gtk.Plug} in a {@link Gtk.Socket}, you can either create the
         * {@link Gtk.Plug} with `gtk_plug_new (0)`, call
         * `gtk_plug_get_id()` to get the window ID of the plug, and then pass that to the
         * `gtk_socket_add_id()`, or you can call `gtk_socket_get_id()` to get the
         * window ID for the socket, and call `gtk_plug_new()` passing in that
         * ID.
         * 
         * The {@link Gtk.Socket} must have already be added into a toplevel window
         *  before you can make this call.
         * @param window the Window of a client participating in the XEMBED protocol.
         */
        add_id(window: xlib.Window): void;

        /**
         * Gets the window ID of a {@link Gtk.Socket} widget, which can then
         * be used to create a client embedded inside the socket, for
         * instance with `gtk_plug_new()`.
         * 
         * The {@link Gtk.Socket} must have already be added into a toplevel window
         * before you can make this call.
         * @returns the window ID for the socket
         */
        get_id(): xlib.Window;

        /**
         * Retrieves the window of the plug. Use this to check if the plug has
         * been created inside of the socket.
         * @returns the window of the plug if available, or `null`
         */
        get_plug_window(): Gdk.Window | null;
    }


    namespace SocketAccessible {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends ContainerAccessible.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-layer": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-mdi-zorder": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-help-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-hypertext-nlinks": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption-object": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-summary": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends ContainerAccessible.ConstructorProps, Atk.Component.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Class
     * @since 3.24.30
     */
    class SocketAccessible extends ContainerAccessible implements Atk.Component {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<SocketAccessible>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: SocketAccessible.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<SocketAccessible.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof SocketAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, SocketAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof SocketAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, SocketAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof SocketAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<SocketAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * @param path 
         */
        embed(path: string): void;
    }


    namespace SpinButton {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Entry.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * The ::change-value signal is a [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted when the user initiates a value change.
             * 
             * Applications should not connect to it, but may emit it with
             * `g_signal_emit_by_name()` if they need to control the cursor
             * programmatically.
             * 
             * The default bindings for this signal are Up/Down and PageUp and/PageDown.
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "change-value": (arg0: ScrollType) => void;
            /**
             * The ::input signal can be used to influence the conversion of
             * the users input into a double value. The signal handler is
             * expected to use `gtk_entry_get_text()` to retrieve the text of
             * the entry and set `new_value` to the new value.
             * 
             * The default conversion uses `g_strtod()`.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            input: (arg0: number) => number;
            /**
             * The ::output signal can be used to change to formatting
             * of the value that is displayed in the spin buttons entry.
             * 
             * ```c
             * // show leading zeros
             * static gboolean
             * on_output (GtkSpinButton *spin,
             *            gpointer       data)
             * {
             *    GtkAdjustment *adjustment;
             *    gchar *text;
             *    int value;
             * 
             *    adjustment = gtk_spin_button_get_adjustment (spin);
             *    value = (int)gtk_adjustment_get_value (adjustment);
             *    text = g_strdup_printf ("%02d", value);
             *    gtk_entry_set_text (GTK_ENTRY (spin), text);
             *    g_free (text);
             * 
             *    return TRUE;
             * }
             * ```
             * 
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            output: () => boolean | void;
            /**
             * The ::value-changed signal is emitted when the value represented by
             * `spinbutton` changes. Also see the {@link Gtk.SpinButton.SignalSignatures.output | Gtk.SpinButton::output} signal.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "value-changed": () => void;
            /**
             * The ::wrapped signal is emitted right after the spinbutton wraps
             * from its maximum to minimum value or vice-versa.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.10
             * @run-last
             */
            wrapped: () => void;
            "notify::adjustment": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::climb-rate": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::digits": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::numeric": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::snap-to-ticks": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::update-policy": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::wrap": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::activates-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::attributes": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::buffer": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::caps-lock-warning": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::completion": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::cursor-position": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::editable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::enable-emoji-completion": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-frame": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::im-module": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::inner-border": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::input-hints": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::input-purpose": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::invisible-char": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::invisible-char-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::max-length": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::max-width-chars": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::overwrite-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::placeholder-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::populate-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::primary-icon-activatable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::primary-icon-gicon": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::primary-icon-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::primary-icon-pixbuf": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::primary-icon-sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::primary-icon-stock": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::primary-icon-storage-type": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::primary-icon-tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::primary-icon-tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::progress-fraction": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::progress-pulse-step": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scroll-offset": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::secondary-icon-activatable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::secondary-icon-gicon": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::secondary-icon-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::secondary-icon-pixbuf": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::secondary-icon-sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::secondary-icon-stock": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::secondary-icon-storage-type": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::secondary-icon-tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::secondary-icon-tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::selection-bound": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::shadow-type": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::show-emoji-icon": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tabs": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::text-length": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::truncate-multiline": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visibility": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-chars": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::xalign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::editing-canceled": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::orientation": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Entry.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, CellEditable.ConstructorProps, Editable.ConstructorProps, Orientable.ConstructorProps {
            adjustment: Adjustment;
            climb_rate: number;
            climbRate: number;
            digits: number;
            numeric: boolean;
            snap_to_ticks: boolean;
            snapToTicks: boolean;
            update_policy: SpinButtonUpdatePolicy;
            updatePolicy: SpinButtonUpdatePolicy;
            value: number;
            wrap: boolean;
        }
    }

    /**
     * A {@link Gtk.SpinButton} is an ideal way to allow the user to set the value of
     * some attribute. Rather than having to directly type a number into a
     * {@link Gtk.Entry}, GtkSpinButton allows the user to click on one of two arrows
     * to increment or decrement the displayed value. A value can still be
     * typed in, with the bonus that it can be checked to ensure it is in a
     * given range.
     * 
     * The main properties of a GtkSpinButton are through an adjustment.
     * See the {@link Gtk.Adjustment} section for more details about an adjustment's
     * properties. Note that GtkSpinButton will by default make its entry
     * large enough to accomodate the lower and upper bounds of the adjustment,
     * which can lead to surprising results. Best practice is to set both
     * the {@link Gtk.Entry.width_chars} and {@link Gtk.Entry.max_width_chars} poperties
     * to the desired number of characters to display in the entry.
     * 
     * # CSS nodes
     * 
     * 
     * ```
     * spinbutton.horizontal
     * ├── undershoot.left
     * ├── undershoot.right
     * ├── entry
     * │   ╰── ...
     * ├── button.down
     * ╰── button.up
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * 
     * ```
     * spinbutton.vertical
     * ├── undershoot.left
     * ├── undershoot.right
     * ├── button.up
     * ├── entry
     * │   ╰── ...
     * ╰── button.down
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * GtkSpinButtons main CSS node has the name spinbutton. It creates subnodes
     * for the entry and the two buttons, with these names. The button nodes have
     * the style classes .up and .down. The GtkEntry subnodes (if present) are put
     * below the entry node. The orientation of the spin button is reflected in
     * the .vertical or .horizontal style class on the main node.
     * 
     * ## Using a GtkSpinButton to get an integer
     * 
     * 
     * ```c
     * // Provides a function to retrieve an integer value from a GtkSpinButton
     * // and creates a spin button to model percentage values.
     * 
     * gint
     * grab_int_value (GtkSpinButton *button,
     *                 gpointer       user_data)
     * {
     *   return gtk_spin_button_get_value_as_int (button);
     * }
     * 
     * void
     * create_integer_spin_button (void)
     * {
     * 
     *   GtkWidget *window, *button;
     *   GtkAdjustment *adjustment;
     * 
     *   adjustment = gtk_adjustment_new (50.0, 0.0, 100.0, 1.0, 5.0, 0.0);
     * 
     *   window = gtk_window_new (GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
     *   gtk_container_set_border_width (GTK_CONTAINER (window), 5);
     * 
     *   // creates the spinbutton, with no decimal places
     *   button = gtk_spin_button_new (adjustment, 1.0, 0);
     *   gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (window), button);
     * 
     *   gtk_widget_show_all (window);
     * }
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * ## Using a GtkSpinButton to get a floating point value
     * 
     * 
     * ```c
     * // Provides a function to retrieve a floating point value from a
     * // GtkSpinButton, and creates a high precision spin button.
     * 
     * gfloat
     * grab_float_value (GtkSpinButton *button,
     *                   gpointer       user_data)
     * {
     *   return gtk_spin_button_get_value (button);
     * }
     * 
     * void
     * create_floating_spin_button (void)
     * {
     *   GtkWidget *window, *button;
     *   GtkAdjustment *adjustment;
     * 
     *   adjustment = gtk_adjustment_new (2.500, 0.0, 5.0, 0.001, 0.1, 0.0);
     * 
     *   window = gtk_window_new (GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
     *   gtk_container_set_border_width (GTK_CONTAINER (window), 5);
     * 
     *   // creates the spinbutton, with three decimal places
     *   button = gtk_spin_button_new (adjustment, 0.001, 3);
     *   gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (window), button);
     * 
     *   gtk_widget_show_all (window);
     * }
     * ```
     * 
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class SpinButton extends Entry implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable, CellEditable, Editable, Orientable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<SpinButton>;

        // Properties
        get adjustment(): Adjustment;
        set adjustment(val: Adjustment);

        /**
         * @default 0
         */
        get climb_rate(): number;
        set climb_rate(val: number);

        /**
         * @default 0
         */
        get climbRate(): number;
        set climbRate(val: number);

        /**
         * @default 0
         */
        get digits(): number;
        set digits(val: number);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get numeric(): boolean;
        set numeric(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get snap_to_ticks(): boolean;
        set snap_to_ticks(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get snapToTicks(): boolean;
        set snapToTicks(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default Gtk.SpinButtonUpdatePolicy.ALWAYS
         */
        get update_policy(): SpinButtonUpdatePolicy;
        set update_policy(val: SpinButtonUpdatePolicy);

        /**
         * @default Gtk.SpinButtonUpdatePolicy.ALWAYS
         */
        get updatePolicy(): SpinButtonUpdatePolicy;
        set updatePolicy(val: SpinButtonUpdatePolicy);

        /**
         * @default 0
         */
        get value(): number;
        set value(val: number);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get wrap(): boolean;
        set wrap(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: SpinButton.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        entry: Entry;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<SpinButton.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](adjustment: Adjustment | null, climb_rate: number, digits: number): SpinButton;

        // Conflicted with Gtk.Entry.new
        static ["new"](...args: never[]): any;

        static new_with_range(min: number, max: number, step: number): SpinButton;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof SpinButton.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, SpinButton.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof SpinButton.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, SpinButton.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof SpinButton.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<SpinButton.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * @param scroll 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_change_value(scroll: ScrollType): void;

        /**
         * @param new_value 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_input(new_value: number): number;

        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_output(): number;

        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_value_changed(): void;

        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_wrapped(): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Changes the properties of an existing spin button. The adjustment,
         * climb rate, and number of decimal places are updated accordingly.
         * @param adjustment a {@link Gtk.Adjustment} to replace the spin button’s     existing adjustment, or `null` to leave its current adjustment unchanged
         * @param climb_rate the new climb rate
         * @param digits the number of decimal places to display in the spin button
         */
        configure(adjustment: Adjustment | null, climb_rate: number, digits: number): void;

        /**
         * Get the adjustment associated with a {@link Gtk.SpinButton}
         * @returns the {@link Gtk.Adjustment} of `spin_button`
         */
        get_adjustment(): Adjustment;

        /**
         * Fetches the precision of `spin_button`. See `gtk_spin_button_set_digits()`.
         * @returns the current precision
         */
        get_digits(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the current step and page the increments used by `spin_button`. See
         * `gtk_spin_button_set_increments()`.
         */
        get_increments(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Returns whether non-numeric text can be typed into the spin button.
         * See `gtk_spin_button_set_numeric()`.
         * @returns `true` if only numeric text can be entered
         */
        get_numeric(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the range allowed for `spin_button`.
         * See `gtk_spin_button_set_range()`.
         */
        get_range(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Returns whether the values are corrected to the nearest step.
         * See `gtk_spin_button_set_snap_to_ticks()`.
         * @returns `true` if values are snapped to the nearest step
         */
        get_snap_to_ticks(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the update behavior of a spin button.
         * See `gtk_spin_button_set_update_policy()`.
         * @returns the current update policy
         */
        get_update_policy(): SpinButtonUpdatePolicy;

        /**
         * Get the value in the `spin_button`.
         * @returns the value of `spin_button`
         */
        get_value(): number;

        /**
         * Get the value `spin_button` represented as an integer.
         * @returns the value of `spin_button`
         */
        get_value_as_int(): number;

        /**
         * Returns whether the spin button’s value wraps around to the
         * opposite limit when the upper or lower limit of the range is
         * exceeded. See `gtk_spin_button_set_wrap()`.
         * @returns `true` if the spin button wraps around
         */
        get_wrap(): boolean;

        /**
         * Replaces the {@link Gtk.Adjustment} associated with `spin_button`.
         * @param adjustment a {@link Gtk.Adjustment} to replace the existing adjustment
         */
        set_adjustment(adjustment: Adjustment): void;

        /**
         * Set the precision to be displayed by `spin_button`. Up to 20 digit precision
         * is allowed.
         * @param digits the number of digits after the decimal point to be displayed for the spin button’s value
         */
        set_digits(digits: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the step and page increments for spin_button.  This affects how
         * quickly the value changes when the spin button’s arrows are activated.
         * @param step increment applied for a button 1 press.
         * @param page increment applied for a button 2 press.
         */
        set_increments(step: number, page: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the flag that determines if non-numeric text can be typed
         * into the spin button.
         * @param numeric flag indicating if only numeric entry is allowed
         */
        set_numeric(numeric: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the minimum and maximum allowable values for `spin_button`.
         * 
         * If the current value is outside this range, it will be adjusted
         * to fit within the range, otherwise it will remain unchanged.
         * @param min minimum allowable value
         * @param max maximum allowable value
         */
        set_range(min: number, max: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the policy as to whether values are corrected to the
         * nearest step increment when a spin button is activated after
         * providing an invalid value.
         * @param snap_to_ticks a flag indicating if invalid values should be corrected
         */
        set_snap_to_ticks(snap_to_ticks: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the update behavior of a spin button.
         * This determines whether the spin button is always updated
         * or only when a valid value is set.
         * @param policy a {@link Gtk.SpinButtonUpdatePolicy} value
         */
        set_update_policy(policy: SpinButtonUpdatePolicy): void;

        /**
         * Sets the value of `spin_button`.
         * @param value the new value
         */
        set_value(value: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the flag that determines if a spin button value wraps
         * around to the opposite limit when the upper or lower limit
         * of the range is exceeded.
         * @param wrap a flag indicating if wrapping behavior is performed
         */
        set_wrap(wrap: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Increment or decrement a spin button’s value in a specified
         * direction by a specified amount.
         * @param direction a {@link Gtk.SpinType} indicating the direction to spin
         * @param increment step increment to apply in the specified direction
         */
        spin(direction: SpinType, increment: number): void;

        /**
         * Manually force an update of the spin button.
         */
        update(): void;

        /**
         * Indicates whether editing on the cell has been canceled.
         * @since 2.20
         * @default false
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.CellEditable
         */
        get editing_canceled(): boolean;
        set editing_canceled(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Indicates whether editing on the cell has been canceled.
         * @since 2.20
         * @default false
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.CellEditable
         */
        get editingCanceled(): boolean;
        set editingCanceled(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The orientation of the orientable.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default Gtk.Orientation.HORIZONTAL
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Orientable
         */
        get orientation(): Orientation;
        set orientation(val: Orientation);

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.CellEditable.SignalSignatures.editing_done | Gtk.CellEditable::editing-done} signal.
         */
        editing_done(): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.CellEditable.SignalSignatures.remove_widget | Gtk.CellEditable::remove-widget} signal.
         */
        remove_widget(): void;

        /**
         * Begins editing on a `cell_editable`.
         * 
         * The {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} for the cell creates and returns a {@link Gtk.CellEditable} from
         * `gtk_cell_renderer_start_editing()`, configured for the {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} type.
         * 
         * `gtk_cell_editable_start_editing()` can then set up `cell_editable` suitably for
         * editing a cell, e.g. making the Esc key emit {@link Gtk.CellEditable.SignalSignatures.editing_done | Gtk.CellEditable::editing-done}.
         * 
         * Note that the `cell_editable` is created on-demand for the current edit; its
         * lifetime is temporary and does not persist across other edits and/or cells.
         * @param event The {@link Gdk.Event} that began the editing process, or   `null` if editing was initiated programmatically
         */
        start_editing(event: Gdk.Event | null): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.CellEditable.SignalSignatures.editing_done | Gtk.CellEditable::editing-done} signal.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_editing_done(): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.CellEditable.SignalSignatures.remove_widget | Gtk.CellEditable::remove-widget} signal.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_remove_widget(): void;

        /**
         * Begins editing on a `cell_editable`.
         * 
         * The {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} for the cell creates and returns a {@link Gtk.CellEditable} from
         * `gtk_cell_renderer_start_editing()`, configured for the {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} type.
         * 
         * `gtk_cell_editable_start_editing()` can then set up `cell_editable` suitably for
         * editing a cell, e.g. making the Esc key emit {@link Gtk.CellEditable.SignalSignatures.editing_done | Gtk.CellEditable::editing-done}.
         * 
         * Note that the `cell_editable` is created on-demand for the current edit; its
         * lifetime is temporary and does not persist across other edits and/or cells.
         * @param event The {@link Gdk.Event} that began the editing process, or   `null` if editing was initiated programmatically
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_start_editing(event: Gdk.Event | null): void;

        /**
         * Copies the contents of the currently selected content in the editable and
         * puts it on the clipboard.
         */
        copy_clipboard(): void;

        /**
         * Removes the contents of the currently selected content in the editable and
         * puts it on the clipboard.
         */
        cut_clipboard(): void;

        /**
         * Deletes the currently selected text of the editable.
         * This call doesn’t do anything if there is no selected text.
         */
        delete_selection(): void;

        /**
         * Deletes a sequence of characters. The characters that are deleted are
         * those characters at positions from `start_pos` up to, but not including
         * `end_pos`. If `end_pos` is negative, then the characters deleted
         * are those from `start_pos` to the end of the text.
         * 
         * Note that the positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
         * @param start_pos start position
         * @param end_pos end position
         */
        delete_text(start_pos: number, end_pos: number): void;

        /**
         * Retrieves a sequence of characters. The characters that are retrieved
         * are those characters at positions from `start_pos` up to, but not
         * including `end_pos`. If `end_pos` is negative, then the characters
         * retrieved are those characters from `start_pos` to the end of the text.
         * 
         * Note that positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
         * @param start_pos start of text
         * @param end_pos end of text
         * @returns a pointer to the contents of the widget as a      string. This string is allocated by the {@link Gtk.Editable}      implementation and should be freed by the caller.
         */
        get_chars(start_pos: number, end_pos: number): string;

        /**
         * Retrieves whether `editable` is editable. See
         * `gtk_editable_set_editable()`.
         * @returns `true` if `editable` is editable.
         */
        get_editable(): boolean;

        /**
         * Retrieves the current position of the cursor relative to the start
         * of the content of the editable.
         * 
         * Note that this position is in characters, not in bytes.
         * @returns the cursor position
         */
        get_position(): number;

        /**
         * Retrieves the selection bound of the editable. start_pos will be filled
         * with the start of the selection and `end_pos` with end. If no text was
         * selected both will be identical and `false` will be returned.
         * 
         * Note that positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
         * @returns `true` if an area is selected, `false` otherwise
         */
        get_selection_bounds(): [boolean, number, number];

        /**
         * Inserts `new_text_length` bytes of `new_text` into the contents of the
         * widget, at position `position`.
         * 
         * Note that the position is in characters, not in bytes.
         * The function updates `position` to point after the newly inserted text.
         * @param new_text the text to append
         * @param new_text_length the length of the text in bytes, or -1
         * @param position location of the position text will be inserted at
         */
        insert_text(new_text: string, new_text_length: number, position: number): number;

        /**
         * Pastes the content of the clipboard to the current position of the
         * cursor in the editable.
         */
        paste_clipboard(): void;

        /**
         * Selects a region of text. The characters that are selected are
         * those characters at positions from `start_pos` up to, but not
         * including `end_pos`. If `end_pos` is negative, then the
         * characters selected are those characters from `start_pos` to
         * the end of the text.
         * 
         * Note that positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
         * @param start_pos start of region
         * @param end_pos end of region
         */
        select_region(start_pos: number, end_pos: number): void;

        /**
         * Determines if the user can edit the text in the editable
         * widget or not.
         * @param is_editable `true` if the user is allowed to edit the text   in the widget
         */
        set_editable(is_editable: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the cursor position in the editable to the given value.
         * 
         * The cursor is displayed before the character with the given (base 0)
         * index in the contents of the editable. The value must be less than or
         * equal to the number of characters in the editable. A value of -1
         * indicates that the position should be set after the last character
         * of the editable. Note that `position` is in characters, not in bytes.
         * @param position the position of the cursor
         */
        set_position(position: number): void;

        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_changed(): void;

        /**
         * Deletes a sequence of characters. The characters that are deleted are
         * those characters at positions from `start_pos` up to, but not including
         * `end_pos`. If `end_pos` is negative, then the characters deleted
         * are those from `start_pos` to the end of the text.
         * 
         * Note that the positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
         * @param start_pos start position
         * @param end_pos end position
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_delete_text(start_pos: number, end_pos: number): void;

        /**
         * Deletes a sequence of characters. The characters that are deleted are
         * those characters at positions from `start_pos` up to, but not including
         * `end_pos`. If `end_pos` is negative, then the characters deleted
         * are those from `start_pos` to the end of the text.
         * 
         * Note that the positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
         * @param start_pos start position
         * @param end_pos end position
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_do_delete_text(start_pos: number, end_pos: number): void;

        /**
         * Inserts `new_text_length` bytes of `new_text` into the contents of the
         * widget, at position `position`.
         * 
         * Note that the position is in characters, not in bytes.
         * The function updates `position` to point after the newly inserted text.
         * @param new_text the text to append
         * @param new_text_length the length of the text in bytes, or -1
         * @param position location of the position text will be inserted at
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_do_insert_text(new_text: string, new_text_length: number, position: number): number;

        /**
         * Retrieves a sequence of characters. The characters that are retrieved
         * are those characters at positions from `start_pos` up to, but not
         * including `end_pos`. If `end_pos` is negative, then the characters
         * retrieved are those characters from `start_pos` to the end of the text.
         * 
         * Note that positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
         * @param start_pos start of text
         * @param end_pos end of text
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_chars(start_pos: number, end_pos: number): string;

        /**
         * Retrieves the current position of the cursor relative to the start
         * of the content of the editable.
         * 
         * Note that this position is in characters, not in bytes.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_position(): number;

        /**
         * Retrieves the selection bound of the editable. start_pos will be filled
         * with the start of the selection and `end_pos` with end. If no text was
         * selected both will be identical and `false` will be returned.
         * 
         * Note that positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_selection_bounds(): [boolean, number, number];

        /**
         * Inserts `new_text_length` bytes of `new_text` into the contents of the
         * widget, at position `position`.
         * 
         * Note that the position is in characters, not in bytes.
         * The function updates `position` to point after the newly inserted text.
         * @param new_text the text to append
         * @param new_text_length the length of the text in bytes, or -1
         * @param position location of the position text will be inserted at
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_insert_text(new_text: string, new_text_length: number, position: number): number;

        /**
         * Sets the cursor position in the editable to the given value.
         * 
         * The cursor is displayed before the character with the given (base 0)
         * index in the contents of the editable. The value must be less than or
         * equal to the number of characters in the editable. A value of -1
         * indicates that the position should be set after the last character
         * of the editable. Note that `position` is in characters, not in bytes.
         * @param position the position of the cursor
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_position(position: number): void;

        /**
         * Selects a region of text. The characters that are selected are
         * those characters at positions from `start_pos` up to, but not
         * including `end_pos`. If `end_pos` is negative, then the
         * characters selected are those characters from `start_pos` to
         * the end of the text.
         * 
         * Note that positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
         * @param start_pos start of region
         * @param end_pos end of region
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_selection_bounds(start_pos: number, end_pos: number): void;

        /**
         * Retrieves the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @returns the orientation of the `orientable`.
         */
        get_orientation(): Orientation;

        /**
         * Sets the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @param orientation the orientable’s new orientation.
         */
        set_orientation(orientation: Orientation): void;
    }


    namespace SpinButtonAccessible {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends EntryAccessible.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-layer": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-mdi-zorder": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-help-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-hypertext-nlinks": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption-object": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-summary": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends EntryAccessible.ConstructorProps, Atk.Action.ConstructorProps, Atk.Component.ConstructorProps, Atk.EditableText.ConstructorProps, Atk.Text.ConstructorProps, Atk.Value.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class SpinButtonAccessible extends EntryAccessible implements Atk.Action, Atk.Component, Atk.EditableText, Atk.Text, Atk.Value {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<SpinButtonAccessible>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: SpinButtonAccessible.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<SpinButtonAccessible.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof SpinButtonAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, SpinButtonAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof SpinButtonAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, SpinButtonAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof SpinButtonAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<SpinButtonAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        /**
         * Perform the specified action on the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns `true` if success, `false` otherwise
         */
        do_action(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns a description of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns a description string, or `null` if `action` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_description(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.get_description
        get_description(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Gets the keybinding which can be used to activate this action, if one
         * exists. The string returned should contain localized, human-readable,
         * key sequences as they would appear when displayed on screen. It must
         * be in the format "mnemonic;sequence;shortcut".
         * 
         * - The mnemonic key activates the object if it is presently enabled onscreen.
         *   This typically corresponds to the underlined letter within the widget.
         *   Example: "n" in a traditional "New..." menu item or the "a" in "Apply" for
         *   a button.
         * - The sequence is the full list of keys which invoke the action even if the
         *   relevant element is not currently shown on screen. For instance, for a menu
         *   item the sequence is the keybindings used to open the parent menus before
         *   invoking. The sequence string is colon-delimited. Example: "Alt+F:N" in a
         *   traditional "New..." menu item.
         * - The shortcut, if it exists, will invoke the same action without showing
         *   the component or its enclosing menus or dialogs. Example: "Ctrl+N" in a
         *   traditional "New..." menu item.
         * 
         * Example: For a traditional "New..." menu item, the expected return value
         * would be: "N;Alt+F:N;Ctrl+N" for the English locale and "N;Alt+D:N;Strg+N"
         * for the German locale. If, hypothetically, this menu item lacked a mnemonic,
         * it would be represented by ";;Ctrl+N" and ";;Strg+N" respectively.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns the keybinding which can be used to activate this action, or `null` if there is no keybinding for this action.
         */
        get_keybinding(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Returns the localized name of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns a name string, or `null` if `action` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_localized_name(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the number of accessible actions available on the object.
         * If there are more than one, the first one is considered the
         * "default" action of the object.
         * @returns a the number of actions, or 0 if `action` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_n_actions(): number;

        /**
         * Returns a non-localized string naming the specified action of the
         * object. This name is generally not descriptive of the end result
         * of the action, but instead names the 'interaction type' which the
         * object supports. By convention, the above strings should be used to
         * represent the actions which correspond to the common point-and-click
         * interaction techniques of the same name: i.e.
         * "click", "press", "release", "drag", "drop", "popup", etc.
         * The "popup" action should be used to pop up a context menu for the
         * object, if one exists.
         * 
         * For technical reasons, some toolkits cannot guarantee that the
         * reported action is actually 'bound' to a nontrivial user event;
         * i.e. the result of some actions via `atk_action_do_action()` may be
         * NIL.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns a name string, or `null` if `action` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_name(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.get_name
        get_name(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Sets a description of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @param desc the description to be assigned to this action
         * @returns a gboolean representing if the description was successfully set;
         */
        set_description(i: number, desc: string): boolean;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.set_description
        set_description(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Perform the specified action on the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_do_action(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns a description of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_description(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         * @virtual
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.vfunc_get_description
        vfunc_get_description(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Gets the keybinding which can be used to activate this action, if one
         * exists. The string returned should contain localized, human-readable,
         * key sequences as they would appear when displayed on screen. It must
         * be in the format "mnemonic;sequence;shortcut".
         * 
         * - The mnemonic key activates the object if it is presently enabled onscreen.
         *   This typically corresponds to the underlined letter within the widget.
         *   Example: "n" in a traditional "New..." menu item or the "a" in "Apply" for
         *   a button.
         * - The sequence is the full list of keys which invoke the action even if the
         *   relevant element is not currently shown on screen. For instance, for a menu
         *   item the sequence is the keybindings used to open the parent menus before
         *   invoking. The sequence string is colon-delimited. Example: "Alt+F:N" in a
         *   traditional "New..." menu item.
         * - The shortcut, if it exists, will invoke the same action without showing
         *   the component or its enclosing menus or dialogs. Example: "Ctrl+N" in a
         *   traditional "New..." menu item.
         * 
         * Example: For a traditional "New..." menu item, the expected return value
         * would be: "N;Alt+F:N;Ctrl+N" for the English locale and "N;Alt+D:N;Strg+N"
         * for the German locale. If, hypothetically, this menu item lacked a mnemonic,
         * it would be represented by ";;Ctrl+N" and ";;Strg+N" respectively.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_keybinding(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Returns the localized name of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_localized_name(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the number of accessible actions available on the object.
         * If there are more than one, the first one is considered the
         * "default" action of the object.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_n_actions(): number;

        /**
         * Returns a non-localized string naming the specified action of the
         * object. This name is generally not descriptive of the end result
         * of the action, but instead names the 'interaction type' which the
         * object supports. By convention, the above strings should be used to
         * represent the actions which correspond to the common point-and-click
         * interaction techniques of the same name: i.e.
         * "click", "press", "release", "drag", "drop", "popup", etc.
         * The "popup" action should be used to pop up a context menu for the
         * object, if one exists.
         * 
         * For technical reasons, some toolkits cannot guarantee that the
         * reported action is actually 'bound' to a nontrivial user event;
         * i.e. the result of some actions via `atk_action_do_action()` may be
         * NIL.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_name(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         * @virtual
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.vfunc_get_name
        vfunc_get_name(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Sets a description of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @param desc the description to be assigned to this action
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_description(i: number, desc: string): boolean;

        /**
         * @param args 
         * @virtual
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.vfunc_set_description
        vfunc_set_description(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Copy text from `start_pos` up to, but not including `end_pos`
         * to the clipboard.
         * @param start_pos start position
         * @param end_pos end position
         */
        copy_text(start_pos: number, end_pos: number): void;

        /**
         * Copy text from `start_pos` up to, but not including `end_pos`
         * to the clipboard and then delete from the widget.
         * @param start_pos start position
         * @param end_pos end position
         */
        cut_text(start_pos: number, end_pos: number): void;

        /**
         * Delete text `start_pos` up to, but not including `end_pos`.
         * @param start_pos start position
         * @param end_pos end position
         */
        delete_text(start_pos: number, end_pos: number): void;

        /**
         * Insert text at a given position.
         * @param string the text to insert
         * @param length the length of text to insert, in bytes
         * @param position The caller initializes this to the position at which to insert the text. After the call it points at the position after the newly inserted text.
         */
        insert_text(string: string, length: number, position: number): void;

        /**
         * Paste text from clipboard to specified `position`.
         * @param position position to paste
         */
        paste_text(position: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the attributes for a specified range. See the ATK_ATTRIBUTE
         * macros (such as #ATK_ATTRIBUTE_LEFT_MARGIN) for examples of attributes
         * that can be set. Note that other attributes that do not have corresponding
         * ATK_ATTRIBUTE macros may also be set for certain text widgets.
         * @param attrib_set an {@link Atk.AttributeSet}
         * @param start_offset start of range in which to set attributes
         * @param end_offset end of range in which to set attributes
         * @returns `true` if attributes successfully set for the specified range, otherwise `false`
         */
        set_run_attributes(attrib_set: Atk.AttributeSet, start_offset: number, end_offset: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Set text contents of `text`.
         * @param string string to set for text contents of `text`
         */
        set_text_contents(string: string): void;

        /**
         * Copy text from `start_pos` up to, but not including `end_pos`
         * to the clipboard.
         * @param start_pos start position
         * @param end_pos end position
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_copy_text(start_pos: number, end_pos: number): void;

        /**
         * Copy text from `start_pos` up to, but not including `end_pos`
         * to the clipboard and then delete from the widget.
         * @param start_pos start position
         * @param end_pos end position
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_cut_text(start_pos: number, end_pos: number): void;

        /**
         * Delete text `start_pos` up to, but not including `end_pos`.
         * @param start_pos start position
         * @param end_pos end position
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_delete_text(start_pos: number, end_pos: number): void;

        /**
         * Insert text at a given position.
         * @param string the text to insert
         * @param length the length of text to insert, in bytes
         * @param position The caller initializes this to the position at which to insert the text. After the call it points at the position after the newly inserted text.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_insert_text(string: string, length: number, position: number): void;

        /**
         * Paste text from clipboard to specified `position`.
         * @param position position to paste
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_paste_text(position: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the attributes for a specified range. See the ATK_ATTRIBUTE
         * macros (such as #ATK_ATTRIBUTE_LEFT_MARGIN) for examples of attributes
         * that can be set. Note that other attributes that do not have corresponding
         * ATK_ATTRIBUTE macros may also be set for certain text widgets.
         * @param attrib_set an {@link Atk.AttributeSet}
         * @param start_offset start of range in which to set attributes
         * @param end_offset end of range in which to set attributes
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_run_attributes(attrib_set: Atk.AttributeSet, start_offset: number, end_offset: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Set text contents of `text`.
         * @param string string to set for text contents of `text`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_text_contents(string: string): void;

        /**
         * Adds a selection bounded by the specified offsets.
         * @param start_offset the starting character offset of the selected region
         * @param end_offset the offset of the first character after the selected region.
         * @returns `true` if successful, `false` otherwise
         */
        add_selection(start_offset: number, end_offset: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Get the ranges of text in the specified bounding box.
         * @param rect An AtkTextRectangle giving the dimensions of the bounding box.
         * @param coord_type Specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or widget window.
         * @param x_clip_type Specify the horizontal clip type.
         * @param y_clip_type Specify the vertical clip type.
         * @returns Array of AtkTextRange. The last          element of the array returned by this function will be NULL.
         */
        get_bounded_ranges(rect: Atk.TextRectangle, coord_type: Atk.CoordType, x_clip_type: Atk.TextClipType, y_clip_type: Atk.TextClipType): Atk.TextRange[];

        /**
         * Gets the offset of the position of the caret (cursor).
         * @returns the character offset of the position of the caret or -1 if          the caret is not located inside the element or in the case of          any other failure.
         */
        get_caret_offset(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the specified text.
         * @param offset a character offset within `text`
         * @returns the character at `offset` or 0 in the case of failure.
         */
        get_character_at_offset(offset: number): string;

        /**
         * Gets the character count.
         * @returns the number of characters or -1 in case of failure.
         */
        get_character_count(): number;

        /**
         * If the extent can not be obtained (e.g. missing support), all of x, y, width,
         * height are set to -1.
         * 
         * Get the bounding box containing the glyph representing the character at
         *     a particular text offset.
         * @param offset The offset of the text character for which bounding information is required.
         * @param coords specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or widget window
         */
        get_character_extents(offset: number, coords: Atk.CoordType): [number, number, number, number];

        /**
         * Creates an {@link Atk.AttributeSet} which consists of the default values of
         * attributes for the text. See the enum AtkTextAttribute for types of text
         * attributes that can be returned. Note that other attributes may also be
         * returned.
         * @returns an {@link Atk.AttributeSet} which contains the default text          attributes for this {@link Atk.Text}. This {@link Atk.AttributeSet} should be freed by          a call to `atk_attribute_set_free()`.
         */
        get_default_attributes(): Atk.AttributeSet;

        /**
         * Gets the number of selected regions.
         * @returns The number of selected regions, or -1 in the case of failure.
         */
        get_n_selections(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the offset of the character located at coordinates `x` and `y`. `x` and `y`
         * are interpreted as being relative to the screen or this widget's window
         * depending on `coords`.
         * @param x screen x-position of character
         * @param y screen y-position of character
         * @param coords specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or widget window
         * @returns the offset to the character which is located at  the specified          `x` and `y` coordinates of -1 in case of failure.
         */
        get_offset_at_point(x: number, y: number, coords: Atk.CoordType): number;

        /**
         * Get the bounding box for text within the specified range.
         * 
         * If the extents can not be obtained (e.g. or missing support), the rectangle
         * fields are set to -1.
         * @param start_offset The offset of the first text character for which boundary        information is required.
         * @param end_offset The offset of the text character after the last character        for which boundary information is required.
         * @param coord_type Specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or widget window.
         */
        get_range_extents(start_offset: number, end_offset: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): Atk.TextRectangle;

        /**
         * Creates an {@link Atk.AttributeSet} which consists of the attributes explicitly
         * set at the position `offset` in the text. `start_offset` and `end_offset` are
         * set to the start and end of the range around `offset` where the attributes are
         * invariant. Note that `end_offset` is the offset of the first character
         * after the range.  See the enum AtkTextAttribute for types of text
         * attributes that can be returned. Note that other attributes may also be
         * returned.
         * @param offset the character offset at which to get the attributes, -1 means the offset of the character to be inserted at the caret location.
         * @returns an {@link Atk.AttributeSet} which contains the attributes         explicitly set at `offset`. This {@link Atk.AttributeSet} should be freed by         a call to `atk_attribute_set_free()`.
         */
        get_run_attributes(offset: number): [Atk.AttributeSet, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the text from the specified selection.
         * @param selection_num The selection number.  The selected regions are assigned numbers that correspond to how far the region is from the start of the text.  The selected region closest to the beginning of the text region is assigned the number 0, etc.  Note that adding, moving or deleting a selected region can change the numbering.
         * @returns a newly allocated string containing the selected text. Use `g_free()`          to free the returned string.
         */
        get_selection(selection_num: number): [string, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets a portion of the text exposed through an {@link Atk.Text} according to a given `offset`
         * and a specific `granularity`, along with the start and end offsets defining the
         * boundaries of such a portion of text.
         * 
         * If `granularity` is ATK_TEXT_GRANULARITY_CHAR the character at the
         * offset is returned.
         * 
         * If `granularity` is ATK_TEXT_GRANULARITY_WORD the returned string
         * is from the word start at or before the offset to the word start after
         * the offset.
         * 
         * The returned string will contain the word at the offset if the offset
         * is inside a word and will contain the word before the offset if the
         * offset is not inside a word.
         * 
         * If `granularity` is ATK_TEXT_GRANULARITY_SENTENCE the returned string
         * is from the sentence start at or before the offset to the sentence
         * start after the offset.
         * 
         * The returned string will contain the sentence at the offset if the offset
         * is inside a sentence and will contain the sentence before the offset
         * if the offset is not inside a sentence.
         * 
         * If `granularity` is ATK_TEXT_GRANULARITY_LINE the returned string
         * is from the line start at or before the offset to the line
         * start after the offset.
         * 
         * If `granularity` is ATK_TEXT_GRANULARITY_PARAGRAPH the returned string
         * is from the start of the paragraph at or before the offset to the start
         * of the following paragraph after the offset.
         * @param offset position
         * @param granularity An {@link Atk.TextGranularity}
         * @returns a newly allocated string containing the text at          the `offset` bounded by the specified `granularity`. Use `g_free()`          to free the returned string.  Returns `null` if the offset is invalid          or no implementation is available.
         */
        get_string_at_offset(offset: number, granularity: Atk.TextGranularity): [string | null, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the specified text.
         * @param start_offset a starting character offset within `text`
         * @param end_offset an ending character offset within `text`, or -1 for the end of the string.
         * @returns a newly allocated string containing the text from `start_offset` up          to, but not including `end_offset`. Use `g_free()` to free the returned          string.
         */
        get_text(start_offset: number, end_offset: number): string;

        /**
         * Gets the specified text.
         * @param offset position
         * @param boundary_type An {@link Atk.TextBoundary}
         * @returns a newly allocated string containing the text after `offset` bounded          by the specified `boundary_type`. Use `g_free()` to free the returned          string.
         */
        get_text_after_offset(offset: number, boundary_type: Atk.TextBoundary): [string, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the specified text.
         * 
         * If the boundary_type if ATK_TEXT_BOUNDARY_CHAR the character at the
         * offset is returned.
         * 
         * If the boundary_type is ATK_TEXT_BOUNDARY_WORD_START the returned string
         * is from the word start at or before the offset to the word start after
         * the offset.
         * 
         * The returned string will contain the word at the offset if the offset
         * is inside a word and will contain the word before the offset if the
         * offset is not inside a word.
         * 
         * If the boundary type is ATK_TEXT_BOUNDARY_SENTENCE_START the returned
         * string is from the sentence start at or before the offset to the sentence
         * start after the offset.
         * 
         * The returned string will contain the sentence at the offset if the offset
         * is inside a sentence and will contain the sentence before the offset
         * if the offset is not inside a sentence.
         * 
         * If the boundary type is ATK_TEXT_BOUNDARY_LINE_START the returned
         * string is from the line start at or before the offset to the line
         * start after the offset.
         * @param offset position
         * @param boundary_type An {@link Atk.TextBoundary}
         * @returns a newly allocated string containing the text at `offset` bounded          by the specified `boundary_type`. Use `g_free()` to free the returned          string.
         */
        get_text_at_offset(offset: number, boundary_type: Atk.TextBoundary): [string, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the specified text.
         * @param offset position
         * @param boundary_type An {@link Atk.TextBoundary}
         * @returns a newly allocated string containing the text before `offset` bounded          by the specified `boundary_type`. Use `g_free()` to free the returned          string.
         */
        get_text_before_offset(offset: number, boundary_type: Atk.TextBoundary): [string, number, number];

        /**
         * Removes the specified selection.
         * @param selection_num The selection number.  The selected regions are assigned numbers that correspond to how far the region is from the start of the text.  The selected region closest to the beginning of the text region is assigned the number 0, etc.  Note that adding, moving or deleting a selected region can change the numbering.
         * @returns `true` if successful, `false` otherwise
         */
        remove_selection(selection_num: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Makes a substring of `text` visible on the screen by scrolling all necessary parents.
         * @param start_offset start offset in the `text`
         * @param end_offset end offset in the `text`, or -1 for the end of the text.
         * @param type specify where the object should be made visible.
         * @returns whether scrolling was successful.
         */
        scroll_substring_to(start_offset: number, end_offset: number, type: Atk.ScrollType): boolean;

        /**
         * Move the top-left of a substring of `text` to a given position of the screen
         * by scrolling all necessary parents.
         * @param start_offset start offset in the `text`
         * @param end_offset end offset in the `text`, or -1 for the end of the text.
         * @param coords specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or to the parent object.
         * @param x x-position where to scroll to
         * @param y y-position where to scroll to
         * @returns whether scrolling was successful.
         */
        scroll_substring_to_point(start_offset: number, end_offset: number, coords: Atk.CoordType, x: number, y: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the caret (cursor) position to the specified `offset`.
         * 
         * In the case of rich-text content, this method should either grab focus
         * or move the sequential focus navigation starting point (if the application
         * supports this concept) as if the user had clicked on the new caret position.
         * Typically, this means that the target of this operation is the node containing
         * the new caret position or one of its ancestors. In other words, after this
         * method is called, if the user advances focus, it should move to the first
         * focusable node following the new caret position.
         * 
         * Calling this method should also scroll the application viewport in a way
         * that matches the behavior of the application's typical caret motion or tab
         * navigation as closely as possible. This also means that if the application's
         * caret motion or focus navigation does not trigger a scroll operation, this
         * method should not trigger one either. If the application does not have a caret
         * motion or focus navigation operation, this method should try to scroll the new
         * caret position into view while minimizing unnecessary scroll motion.
         * @param offset the character offset of the new caret position
         * @returns `true` if successful, `false` otherwise.
         */
        set_caret_offset(offset: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Changes the start and end offset of the specified selection.
         * @param selection_num The selection number.  The selected regions are assigned numbers that correspond to how far the region is from the start of the text.  The selected region closest to the beginning of the text region is assigned the number 0, etc.  Note that adding, moving or deleting a selected region can change the numbering.
         * @param start_offset the new starting character offset of the selection
         * @param end_offset the new end position of (e.g. offset immediately past) the selection
         * @returns `true` if successful, `false` otherwise
         */
        set_selection(selection_num: number, start_offset: number, end_offset: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Adds a selection bounded by the specified offsets.
         * @param start_offset the starting character offset of the selected region
         * @param end_offset the offset of the first character after the selected region.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add_selection(start_offset: number, end_offset: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Get the ranges of text in the specified bounding box.
         * @param rect An AtkTextRectangle giving the dimensions of the bounding box.
         * @param coord_type Specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or widget window.
         * @param x_clip_type Specify the horizontal clip type.
         * @param y_clip_type Specify the vertical clip type.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_bounded_ranges(rect: Atk.TextRectangle, coord_type: Atk.CoordType, x_clip_type: Atk.TextClipType, y_clip_type: Atk.TextClipType): Atk.TextRange[];

        /**
         * Gets the offset of the position of the caret (cursor).
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_caret_offset(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the specified text.
         * @param offset a character offset within `text`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_character_at_offset(offset: number): string;

        /**
         * Gets the character count.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_character_count(): number;

        /**
         * If the extent can not be obtained (e.g. missing support), all of x, y, width,
         * height are set to -1.
         * 
         * Get the bounding box containing the glyph representing the character at
         *     a particular text offset.
         * @param offset The offset of the text character for which bounding information is required.
         * @param coords specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or widget window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_character_extents(offset: number, coords: Atk.CoordType): [number, number, number, number];

        /**
         * Creates an {@link Atk.AttributeSet} which consists of the default values of
         * attributes for the text. See the enum AtkTextAttribute for types of text
         * attributes that can be returned. Note that other attributes may also be
         * returned.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_default_attributes(): Atk.AttributeSet;

        /**
         * Gets the number of selected regions.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_n_selections(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the offset of the character located at coordinates `x` and `y`. `x` and `y`
         * are interpreted as being relative to the screen or this widget's window
         * depending on `coords`.
         * @param x screen x-position of character
         * @param y screen y-position of character
         * @param coords specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or widget window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_offset_at_point(x: number, y: number, coords: Atk.CoordType): number;

        /**
         * Get the bounding box for text within the specified range.
         * 
         * If the extents can not be obtained (e.g. or missing support), the rectangle
         * fields are set to -1.
         * @param start_offset The offset of the first text character for which boundary        information is required.
         * @param end_offset The offset of the text character after the last character        for which boundary information is required.
         * @param coord_type Specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or widget window.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_range_extents(start_offset: number, end_offset: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): Atk.TextRectangle;

        /**
         * Creates an {@link Atk.AttributeSet} which consists of the attributes explicitly
         * set at the position `offset` in the text. `start_offset` and `end_offset` are
         * set to the start and end of the range around `offset` where the attributes are
         * invariant. Note that `end_offset` is the offset of the first character
         * after the range.  See the enum AtkTextAttribute for types of text
         * attributes that can be returned. Note that other attributes may also be
         * returned.
         * @param offset the character offset at which to get the attributes, -1 means the offset of the character to be inserted at the caret location.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_run_attributes(offset: number): [Atk.AttributeSet, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the text from the specified selection.
         * @param selection_num The selection number.  The selected regions are assigned numbers that correspond to how far the region is from the start of the text.  The selected region closest to the beginning of the text region is assigned the number 0, etc.  Note that adding, moving or deleting a selected region can change the numbering.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_selection(selection_num: number): [string, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets a portion of the text exposed through an {@link Atk.Text} according to a given `offset`
         * and a specific `granularity`, along with the start and end offsets defining the
         * boundaries of such a portion of text.
         * 
         * If `granularity` is ATK_TEXT_GRANULARITY_CHAR the character at the
         * offset is returned.
         * 
         * If `granularity` is ATK_TEXT_GRANULARITY_WORD the returned string
         * is from the word start at or before the offset to the word start after
         * the offset.
         * 
         * The returned string will contain the word at the offset if the offset
         * is inside a word and will contain the word before the offset if the
         * offset is not inside a word.
         * 
         * If `granularity` is ATK_TEXT_GRANULARITY_SENTENCE the returned string
         * is from the sentence start at or before the offset to the sentence
         * start after the offset.
         * 
         * The returned string will contain the sentence at the offset if the offset
         * is inside a sentence and will contain the sentence before the offset
         * if the offset is not inside a sentence.
         * 
         * If `granularity` is ATK_TEXT_GRANULARITY_LINE the returned string
         * is from the line start at or before the offset to the line
         * start after the offset.
         * 
         * If `granularity` is ATK_TEXT_GRANULARITY_PARAGRAPH the returned string
         * is from the start of the paragraph at or before the offset to the start
         * of the following paragraph after the offset.
         * @param offset position
         * @param granularity An {@link Atk.TextGranularity}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_string_at_offset(offset: number, granularity: Atk.TextGranularity): [string | null, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the specified text.
         * @param start_offset a starting character offset within `text`
         * @param end_offset an ending character offset within `text`, or -1 for the end of the string.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_text(start_offset: number, end_offset: number): string;

        /**
         * Gets the specified text.
         * @param offset position
         * @param boundary_type An {@link Atk.TextBoundary}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_text_after_offset(offset: number, boundary_type: Atk.TextBoundary): [string, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the specified text.
         * 
         * If the boundary_type if ATK_TEXT_BOUNDARY_CHAR the character at the
         * offset is returned.
         * 
         * If the boundary_type is ATK_TEXT_BOUNDARY_WORD_START the returned string
         * is from the word start at or before the offset to the word start after
         * the offset.
         * 
         * The returned string will contain the word at the offset if the offset
         * is inside a word and will contain the word before the offset if the
         * offset is not inside a word.
         * 
         * If the boundary type is ATK_TEXT_BOUNDARY_SENTENCE_START the returned
         * string is from the sentence start at or before the offset to the sentence
         * start after the offset.
         * 
         * The returned string will contain the sentence at the offset if the offset
         * is inside a sentence and will contain the sentence before the offset
         * if the offset is not inside a sentence.
         * 
         * If the boundary type is ATK_TEXT_BOUNDARY_LINE_START the returned
         * string is from the line start at or before the offset to the line
         * start after the offset.
         * @param offset position
         * @param boundary_type An {@link Atk.TextBoundary}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_text_at_offset(offset: number, boundary_type: Atk.TextBoundary): [string, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the specified text.
         * @param offset position
         * @param boundary_type An {@link Atk.TextBoundary}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_text_before_offset(offset: number, boundary_type: Atk.TextBoundary): [string, number, number];

        /**
         * Removes the specified selection.
         * @param selection_num The selection number.  The selected regions are assigned numbers that correspond to how far the region is from the start of the text.  The selected region closest to the beginning of the text region is assigned the number 0, etc.  Note that adding, moving or deleting a selected region can change the numbering.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_remove_selection(selection_num: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Makes a substring of `text` visible on the screen by scrolling all necessary parents.
         * @param start_offset start offset in the `text`
         * @param end_offset end offset in the `text`, or -1 for the end of the text.
         * @param type specify where the object should be made visible.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_scroll_substring_to(start_offset: number, end_offset: number, type: Atk.ScrollType): boolean;

        /**
         * Move the top-left of a substring of `text` to a given position of the screen
         * by scrolling all necessary parents.
         * @param start_offset start offset in the `text`
         * @param end_offset end offset in the `text`, or -1 for the end of the text.
         * @param coords specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or to the parent object.
         * @param x x-position where to scroll to
         * @param y y-position where to scroll to
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_scroll_substring_to_point(start_offset: number, end_offset: number, coords: Atk.CoordType, x: number, y: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the caret (cursor) position to the specified `offset`.
         * 
         * In the case of rich-text content, this method should either grab focus
         * or move the sequential focus navigation starting point (if the application
         * supports this concept) as if the user had clicked on the new caret position.
         * Typically, this means that the target of this operation is the node containing
         * the new caret position or one of its ancestors. In other words, after this
         * method is called, if the user advances focus, it should move to the first
         * focusable node following the new caret position.
         * 
         * Calling this method should also scroll the application viewport in a way
         * that matches the behavior of the application's typical caret motion or tab
         * navigation as closely as possible. This also means that if the application's
         * caret motion or focus navigation does not trigger a scroll operation, this
         * method should not trigger one either. If the application does not have a caret
         * motion or focus navigation operation, this method should try to scroll the new
         * caret position into view while minimizing unnecessary scroll motion.
         * @param offset the character offset of the new caret position
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_caret_offset(offset: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Changes the start and end offset of the specified selection.
         * @param selection_num The selection number.  The selected regions are assigned numbers that correspond to how far the region is from the start of the text.  The selected region closest to the beginning of the text region is assigned the number 0, etc.  Note that adding, moving or deleting a selected region can change the numbering.
         * @param start_offset the new starting character offset of the selection
         * @param end_offset the new end position of (e.g. offset immediately past) the selection
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_selection(selection_num: number, start_offset: number, end_offset: number): boolean;

        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_text_attributes_changed(): void;

        /**
         * @param location 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_text_caret_moved(location: number): void;

        /**
         * the signal handler which is executed when there is a
         *   text change. This virtual function is deprecated sice 2.9.4 and
         *   it should not be overriden.
         * @param position 
         * @param length 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_text_changed(position: number, length: number): void;

        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_text_selection_changed(): void;

        /**
         * Gets the value of this object.
         */
        get_current_value(): unknown;

        /**
         * Gets the minimum increment by which the value of this object may be
         * changed.  If zero, the minimum increment is undefined, which may
         * mean that it is limited only by the floating point precision of the
         * platform.
         * @returns the minimum increment by which the value of this object may be changed. zero if undefined.
         */
        get_increment(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the maximum value of this object.
         */
        get_maximum_value(): unknown;

        /**
         * Gets the minimum increment by which the value of this object may be changed.  If zero,
         * the minimum increment is undefined, which may mean that it is limited only by the
         * floating point precision of the platform.
         */
        get_minimum_increment(): unknown;

        /**
         * Gets the minimum value of this object.
         */
        get_minimum_value(): unknown;

        /**
         * Gets the range of this object.
         * @returns a newly allocated {@link Atk.Range} that represents the minimum, maximum and descriptor (if available) of `obj`. NULL if that range is not defined.
         */
        get_range(): Atk.Range | null;

        /**
         * Gets the list of subranges defined for this object. See {@link Atk.Value}
         * introduction for examples of subranges and when to expose them.
         * @returns an {@link GLib.SList} of {@link Atk.Range} which each of the subranges defined for this object. Free the returns list with `g_slist_free()`.
         */
        get_sub_ranges(): Atk.Range[];

        /**
         * Gets the current value and the human readable text alternative of
         * `obj`. `text` is a newly created string, that must be freed by the
         * caller. Can be NULL if no descriptor is available.
         */
        get_value_and_text(): [number, string];

        /**
         * Sets the value of this object.
         * @param value a {@link GObject.Value} which is the desired new accessible value.
         * @returns `true` if new value is successfully set, `false` otherwise.
         */
        set_current_value(value: GObject.Value | any): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the value of this object.
         * 
         * This method is intended to provide a way to change the value of the
         * object. In any case, it is possible that the value can't be
         * modified (ie: a read-only component). If the value changes due this
         * call, it is possible that the text could change, and will trigger
         * an {@link Atk.Value.SignalSignatures.value_changed | Atk.Value::value-changed} signal emission.
         * 
         * Note for implementors: the deprecated `atk_value_set_current_value()`
         * method returned TRUE or FALSE depending if the value was assigned
         * or not. In the practice several implementors were not able to
         * decide it, and returned TRUE in any case. For that reason it is not
         * required anymore to return if the value was properly assigned or
         * not.
         * @param new_value a double which is the desired new accessible value.
         */
        set_value(new_value: number): void;

        /**
         * Gets the value of this object.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_current_value(): GObject.Value | any;

        /**
         * Gets the minimum increment by which the value of this object may be
         * changed.  If zero, the minimum increment is undefined, which may
         * mean that it is limited only by the floating point precision of the
         * platform.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_increment(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the maximum value of this object.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_maximum_value(): GObject.Value | any;

        /**
         * Gets the minimum increment by which the value of this object may be changed.  If zero,
         * the minimum increment is undefined, which may mean that it is limited only by the
         * floating point precision of the platform.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_minimum_increment(): GObject.Value | any;

        /**
         * Gets the minimum value of this object.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_minimum_value(): GObject.Value | any;

        /**
         * Gets the range of this object.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_range(): Atk.Range | null;

        /**
         * Gets the list of subranges defined for this object. See {@link Atk.Value}
         * introduction for examples of subranges and when to expose them.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_sub_ranges(): Atk.Range[];

        /**
         * Gets the current value and the human readable text alternative of
         * `obj`. `text` is a newly created string, that must be freed by the
         * caller. Can be NULL if no descriptor is available.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_value_and_text(): [number, string];

        /**
         * Sets the value of this object.
         * @param value a {@link GObject.Value} which is the desired new accessible value.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_current_value(value: unknown): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the value of this object.
         * 
         * This method is intended to provide a way to change the value of the
         * object. In any case, it is possible that the value can't be
         * modified (ie: a read-only component). If the value changes due this
         * call, it is possible that the text could change, and will trigger
         * an {@link Atk.Value.SignalSignatures.value_changed | Atk.Value::value-changed} signal emission.
         * 
         * Note for implementors: the deprecated `atk_value_set_current_value()`
         * method returned TRUE or FALSE depending if the value was assigned
         * or not. In the practice several implementors were not able to
         * decide it, and returned TRUE in any case. For that reason it is not
         * required anymore to return if the value was properly assigned or
         * not.
         * @param new_value a double which is the desired new accessible value.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_value(new_value: number): void;
    }


    namespace Spinner {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Widget.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::active": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Widget.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {
            active: boolean;
        }
    }

    /**
     * A GtkSpinner widget displays an icon-size spinning animation.
     * It is often used as an alternative to a {@link Gtk.ProgressBar} for
     * displaying indefinite activity, instead of actual progress.
     * 
     * To start the animation, use `gtk_spinner_start()`, to stop it
     * use `gtk_spinner_stop()`.
     * 
     * # CSS nodes
     * 
     * GtkSpinner has a single CSS node with the name spinner. When the animation is
     * active, the :checked pseudoclass is added to this node.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class Spinner extends Widget implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<Spinner>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get active(): boolean;
        set active(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: Spinner.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<Spinner.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): Spinner;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof Spinner.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Spinner.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof Spinner.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Spinner.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof Spinner.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<Spinner.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Starts the animation of the spinner.
         */
        start(): void;

        /**
         * Stops the animation of the spinner.
         */
        stop(): void;

        /**
         * Adds a child to `buildable`. `type` is an optional string
         * describing how the child should be added.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child to add
         * @param type kind of child or `null`
         */
        add_child(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object, type: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Constructs a child of `buildable` with the name `name`.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} calls this function if a “constructor” has been
         * specified in the UI definition.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param name name of child to construct
         * @returns the constructed child
         */
        construct_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, name: string): T;

        /**
         * This is similar to `gtk_buildable_parser_finished()` but is
         * called once for each custom tag handled by the `buildable`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname the name of the tag
         * @param data user data created in custom_tag_start
         */
        custom_finished(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
         * the buildable.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @param data user data that will be passed in to parser functions
         */
        custom_tag_end(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called for each unknown element under `<child>`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @returns `true` if a object has a custom implementation, `false`          if it doesn't.
         */
        custom_tag_start(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string): [boolean, GLib.MarkupParser, null];

        /**
         * Get the internal child called `childname` of the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param childname name of child
         * @returns the internal child of the buildable object
         */
        get_internal_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, childname: string): T;

        /**
         * Gets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} sets the name based on the
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI]
         * used to construct the `buildable`.
         * @returns the name set with `gtk_buildable_set_name()`
         */
        get_name(): string;

        /**
         * Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI].
         * Note that this will be called once for each time
         * `gtk_builder_add_from_file()` or `gtk_builder_add_from_string()`
         * is called on a builder.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         */
        parser_finished(builder: Builder): void;

        /**
         * Sets the property name `name` to `value` on the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param name name of property
         * @param value value of property
         */
        set_buildable_property(builder: Builder, name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;

        /**
         * Sets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * @param name name to set
         */
        set_name(name: string): void;

        /**
         * Adds a child to `buildable`. `type` is an optional string
         * describing how the child should be added.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child to add
         * @param type kind of child or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add_child(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object, type: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Constructs a child of `buildable` with the name `name`.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} calls this function if a “constructor” has been
         * specified in the UI definition.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param name name of child to construct
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_construct_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, name: string): T;

        /**
         * This is similar to `gtk_buildable_parser_finished()` but is
         * called once for each custom tag handled by the `buildable`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname the name of the tag
         * @param data user data created in custom_tag_start
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_finished(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
         * the buildable.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @param data user data that will be passed in to parser functions
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_tag_end(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called for each unknown element under `<child>`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_tag_start(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string): [boolean, GLib.MarkupParser, never];

        /**
         * Get the internal child called `childname` of the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param childname name of child
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_internal_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, childname: string): T;

        /**
         * Gets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} sets the name based on the
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI]
         * used to construct the `buildable`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_name(): string;

        /**
         * Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI].
         * Note that this will be called once for each time
         * `gtk_builder_add_from_file()` or `gtk_builder_add_from_string()`
         * is called on a builder.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_parser_finished(builder: Builder): void;

        /**
         * Sets the property name `name` to `value` on the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param name name of property
         * @param value value of property
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_buildable_property(builder: Builder, name: string, value: unknown): void;

        /**
         * Sets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * @param name name to set
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_name(name: string): void;
    }


    namespace SpinnerAccessible {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends WidgetAccessible.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-layer": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-mdi-zorder": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-help-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-hypertext-nlinks": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption-object": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-summary": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends WidgetAccessible.ConstructorProps, Atk.Component.ConstructorProps, Atk.Image.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class SpinnerAccessible extends WidgetAccessible implements Atk.Component, Atk.Image {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<SpinnerAccessible>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: SpinnerAccessible.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<SpinnerAccessible.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof SpinnerAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, SpinnerAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof SpinnerAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, SpinnerAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof SpinnerAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<SpinnerAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        /**
         * Checks whether the specified point is within the extent of the `component`.
         * 
         * Toolkit implementor note: ATK provides a default implementation for
         * this virtual method. In general there are little reason to
         * re-implement it.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @returns `true` or `false` indicating whether the specified point is within the extent of the `component` or not
         */
        contains(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the alpha value (i.e. the opacity) for this
         * `component`, on a scale from 0 (fully transparent) to 1.0
         * (fully opaque).
         * @returns An alpha value from 0 to 1.0, inclusive.
         */
        get_alpha(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the rectangle which gives the extent of the `component`.
         * 
         * If the extent can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), all of x, y, width, height are set to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         */
        get_extents(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the layer of the component.
         * @returns an {@link Atk.Layer} which is the layer of the component
         */
        get_layer(): Atk.Layer;

        /**
         * Gets the zorder of the component. The value G_MININT will be returned
         * if the layer of the component is not ATK_LAYER_MDI or ATK_LAYER_WINDOW.
         * @returns a gint which is the zorder of the component, i.e. the depth at which the component is shown in relation to other components in the same container.
         */
        get_mdi_zorder(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the position of `component` in the form of
         * a point specifying `component`'s top-left corner.
         * 
         * If the position can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), x and y are set to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         */
        get_position(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the size of the `component` in terms of width and height.
         * 
         * If the size can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), width and height are set to -1.
         */
        get_size(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Grabs focus for this `component`.
         * @returns `true` if successful, `false` otherwise.
         */
        grab_focus(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets a reference to the accessible child, if one exists, at the
         * coordinate point specified by `x` and `y`.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @returns a reference to the accessible child, if one exists
         */
        ref_accessible_at_point(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): Atk.Object | null;

        /**
         * Remove the handler specified by `handler_id` from the list of
         * functions to be executed when this object receives focus events
         * (in or out).
         * @param handler_id the handler id of the focus handler to be removed from `component`
         */
        remove_focus_handler(handler_id: number): void;

        /**
         * Makes `component` visible on the screen by scrolling all necessary parents.
         * 
         * Contrary to atk_component_set_position, this does not actually move
         * `component` in its parent, this only makes the parents scroll so that the
         * object shows up on the screen, given its current position within the parents.
         * @param type specify where the object should be made visible.
         * @returns whether scrolling was successful.
         */
        scroll_to(type: Atk.ScrollType): boolean;

        /**
         * Move the top-left of `component` to a given position of the screen by
         * scrolling all necessary parents.
         * @param coords specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or to the parent object.
         * @param x x-position where to scroll to
         * @param y y-position where to scroll to
         * @returns whether scrolling was successful.
         */
        scroll_to_point(coords: Atk.CoordType, x: number, y: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the extents of `component`.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param width width to set for `component`
         * @param height height to set for `component`
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @returns `true` or `false` whether the extents were set or not
         */
        set_extents(x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the position of `component`.
         * 
         * Contrary to atk_component_scroll_to, this does not trigger any scrolling,
         * this just moves `component` in its parent.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the component's top level window
         * @returns `true` or `false` whether or not the position was set or not
         */
        set_position(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Set the size of the `component` in terms of width and height.
         * @param width width to set for `component`
         * @param height height to set for `component`
         * @returns `true` or `false` whether the size was set or not
         */
        set_size(width: number, height: number): boolean;

        /**
         * @param bounds 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_bounds_changed(bounds: Atk.Rectangle): void;

        /**
         * Checks whether the specified point is within the extent of the `component`.
         * 
         * Toolkit implementor note: ATK provides a default implementation for
         * this virtual method. In general there are little reason to
         * re-implement it.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_contains(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the alpha value (i.e. the opacity) for this
         * `component`, on a scale from 0 (fully transparent) to 1.0
         * (fully opaque).
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_alpha(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the rectangle which gives the extent of the `component`.
         * 
         * If the extent can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), all of x, y, width, height are set to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_extents(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the layer of the component.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_layer(): Atk.Layer;

        /**
         * Gets the zorder of the component. The value G_MININT will be returned
         * if the layer of the component is not ATK_LAYER_MDI or ATK_LAYER_WINDOW.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_mdi_zorder(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the position of `component` in the form of
         * a point specifying `component`'s top-left corner.
         * 
         * If the position can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), x and y are set to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_position(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the size of the `component` in terms of width and height.
         * 
         * If the size can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), width and height are set to -1.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_size(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Grabs focus for this `component`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_grab_focus(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets a reference to the accessible child, if one exists, at the
         * coordinate point specified by `x` and `y`.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_ref_accessible_at_point(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): Atk.Object | null;

        /**
         * Remove the handler specified by `handler_id` from the list of
         * functions to be executed when this object receives focus events
         * (in or out).
         * @param handler_id the handler id of the focus handler to be removed from `component`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_remove_focus_handler(handler_id: number): void;

        /**
         * Makes `component` visible on the screen by scrolling all necessary parents.
         * 
         * Contrary to atk_component_set_position, this does not actually move
         * `component` in its parent, this only makes the parents scroll so that the
         * object shows up on the screen, given its current position within the parents.
         * @param type specify where the object should be made visible.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_scroll_to(type: Atk.ScrollType): boolean;

        /**
         * Move the top-left of `component` to a given position of the screen by
         * scrolling all necessary parents.
         * @param coords specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or to the parent object.
         * @param x x-position where to scroll to
         * @param y y-position where to scroll to
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_scroll_to_point(coords: Atk.CoordType, x: number, y: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the extents of `component`.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param width width to set for `component`
         * @param height height to set for `component`
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_extents(x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the position of `component`.
         * 
         * Contrary to atk_component_scroll_to, this does not trigger any scrolling,
         * this just moves `component` in its parent.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the component's top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_position(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Set the size of the `component` in terms of width and height.
         * @param width width to set for `component`
         * @param height height to set for `component`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_size(width: number, height: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Get a textual description of this image.
         * @returns a string representing the image description
         */
        get_image_description(): string;

        /**
         * Retrieves the locale identifier associated to the {@link Atk.Image}.
         * @returns a string corresponding to the POSIX   `LC_MESSAGES` locale used by the image description, or   `null` if the image does not specify a locale.
         */
        get_image_locale(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the position of the image in the form of a point specifying the
         * images top-left corner.
         * 
         * If the position can not be obtained (e.g. missing support), x and y are set
         * to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         */
        get_image_position(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number];

        /**
         * Get the width and height in pixels for the specified image.
         * The values of `width` and `height` are returned as -1 if the
         * values cannot be obtained (for instance, if the object is not onscreen).
         * 
         * If the size can not be obtained (e.g. missing support), x and y are set
         * to -1.
         */
        get_image_size(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Sets the textual description for this image.
         * @param description a string description to set for `image`
         * @returns boolean TRUE, or FALSE if operation could not be completed.
         */
        set_image_description(description: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Get a textual description of this image.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_image_description(): string;

        /**
         * Retrieves the locale identifier associated to the {@link Atk.Image}.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_image_locale(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the position of the image in the form of a point specifying the
         * images top-left corner.
         * 
         * If the position can not be obtained (e.g. missing support), x and y are set
         * to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_image_position(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number];

        /**
         * Get the width and height in pixels for the specified image.
         * The values of `width` and `height` are returned as -1 if the
         * values cannot be obtained (for instance, if the object is not onscreen).
         * 
         * If the size can not be obtained (e.g. missing support), x and y are set
         * to -1.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_image_size(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Sets the textual description for this image.
         * @param description a string description to set for `image`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_image_description(description: string): boolean;
    }


    namespace Stack {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Container.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::hhomogeneous": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::homogeneous": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::interpolate-size": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::transition-duration": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::transition-running": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::transition-type": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vhomogeneous": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible-child-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Container.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {
            hhomogeneous: boolean;
            homogeneous: boolean;
            interpolate_size: boolean;
            interpolateSize: boolean;
            transition_duration: number;
            transitionDuration: number;
            transition_running: boolean;
            transitionRunning: boolean;
            transition_type: StackTransitionType;
            transitionType: StackTransitionType;
            vhomogeneous: boolean;
            visible_child: Widget | null;
            visibleChild: Widget | null;
            visible_child_name: string | null;
            visibleChildName: string | null;
        }
    }

    /**
     * The GtkStack widget is a container which only shows
     * one of its children at a time. In contrast to GtkNotebook,
     * GtkStack does not provide a means for users to change the
     * visible child. Instead, the {@link Gtk.StackSwitcher} widget can be
     * used with GtkStack to provide this functionality.
     * 
     * Transitions between pages can be animated as slides or
     * fades. This can be controlled with `gtk_stack_set_transition_type()`.
     * These animations respect the {@link Gtk.Settings.gtk_enable_animations}
     * setting.
     * 
     * The GtkStack widget was added in GTK+ 3.10.
     * 
     * # CSS nodes
     * 
     * GtkStack has a single CSS node named stack.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class Stack extends Container implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<Stack>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * `true` if the stack allocates the same width for all children.
         * @since 3.16
         * @default true
         */
        get hhomogeneous(): boolean;
        set hhomogeneous(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default true
         */
        get homogeneous(): boolean;
        set homogeneous(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get interpolate_size(): boolean;
        set interpolate_size(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get interpolateSize(): boolean;
        set interpolateSize(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default 200
         */
        get transition_duration(): number;
        set transition_duration(val: number);

        /**
         * @default 200
         */
        get transitionDuration(): number;
        set transitionDuration(val: number);

        /**
         * @read-only
         * @default false
         */
        get transition_running(): boolean;

        /**
         * @read-only
         * @default false
         */
        get transitionRunning(): boolean;

        /**
         * @default Gtk.StackTransitionType.NONE
         */
        get transition_type(): StackTransitionType;
        set transition_type(val: StackTransitionType);

        /**
         * @default Gtk.StackTransitionType.NONE
         */
        get transitionType(): StackTransitionType;
        set transitionType(val: StackTransitionType);

        /**
         * `true` if the stack allocates the same height for all children.
         * @since 3.16
         * @default true
         */
        get vhomogeneous(): boolean;
        set vhomogeneous(val: boolean);

        get visible_child(): Widget | null;
        set visible_child(val: Widget | null);

        get visibleChild(): Widget | null;
        set visibleChild(val: Widget | null);

        /**
         * @default null
         */
        get visible_child_name(): string | null;
        set visible_child_name(val: string | null);

        /**
         * @default null
         */
        get visibleChildName(): string | null;
        set visibleChildName(val: string | null);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: Stack.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<Stack.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): Stack;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof Stack.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Stack.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof Stack.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Stack.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof Stack.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<Stack.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Adds a child to `stack`.
         * The child is identified by the `name`.
         * @param child the widget to add
         * @param name the name for `child`
         */
        add_named(child: Widget, name: string): void;

        /**
         * Adds a child to `stack`.
         * The child is identified by the `name`. The `title`
         * will be used by {@link Gtk.StackSwitcher} to represent
         * `child` in a tab bar, so it should be short.
         * @param child the widget to add
         * @param name the name for `child`
         * @param title a human-readable title for `child`
         */
        add_titled(child: Widget, name: string, title: string): void;

        /**
         * Finds the child of the {@link Gtk.Stack} with the name given as
         * the argument. Returns `null` if there is no child with this
         * name.
         * @param name the name of the child to find
         * @returns the requested child of the {@link Gtk.Stack}
         */
        get_child_by_name(name: string): Widget | null;

        /**
         * Gets whether `stack` is horizontally homogeneous.
         * See `gtk_stack_set_hhomogeneous()`.
         * @returns whether `stack` is horizontally homogeneous.
         */
        get_hhomogeneous(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets whether `stack` is homogeneous.
         * See `gtk_stack_set_homogeneous()`.
         * @returns whether `stack` is homogeneous.
         */
        get_homogeneous(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns wether the {@link Gtk.Stack} is set up to interpolate between
         * the sizes of children on page switch.
         * @returns `true` if child sizes are interpolated
         */
        get_interpolate_size(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the amount of time (in milliseconds) that
         * transitions between pages in `stack` will take.
         * @returns the transition duration
         */
        get_transition_duration(): number;

        /**
         * Returns whether the `stack` is currently in a transition from one page to
         * another.
         * @returns `true` if the transition is currently running, `false` otherwise.
         */
        get_transition_running(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the type of animation that will be used
         * for transitions between pages in `stack`.
         * @returns the current transition type of `stack`
         */
        get_transition_type(): StackTransitionType;

        /**
         * Gets whether `stack` is vertically homogeneous.
         * See `gtk_stack_set_vhomogeneous()`.
         * @returns whether `stack` is vertically homogeneous.
         */
        get_vhomogeneous(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the currently visible child of `stack`, or `null` if
         * there are no visible children.
         * @returns the visible child of the {@link Gtk.Stack}
         */
        get_visible_child(): Widget | null;

        /**
         * Returns the name of the currently visible child of `stack`, or
         * `null` if there is no visible child.
         * @returns the name of the visible child of the {@link Gtk.Stack}
         */
        get_visible_child_name(): string | null;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.Stack} to be horizontally homogeneous or not.
         * If it is homogeneous, the {@link Gtk.Stack} will request the same
         * width for all its children. If it isn't, the stack
         * may change width when a different child becomes visible.
         * @param hhomogeneous `true` to make `stack` horizontally homogeneous
         */
        set_hhomogeneous(hhomogeneous: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.Stack} to be homogeneous or not. If it
         * is homogeneous, the {@link Gtk.Stack} will request the same
         * size for all its children. If it isn't, the stack
         * may change size when a different child becomes visible.
         * 
         * Since 3.16, homogeneity can be controlled separately
         * for horizontal and vertical size, with the
         * {@link Gtk.Stack.hhomogeneous} and {@link Gtk.Stack.vhomogeneous}.
         * @param homogeneous `true` to make `stack` homogeneous
         */
        set_homogeneous(homogeneous: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether or not `stack` will interpolate its size when
         * changing the visible child. If the {@link Gtk.Stack.interpolate_size}
         * property is set to `true`, `stack` will interpolate its size between
         * the current one and the one it'll take after changing the
         * visible child, according to the set transition duration.
         * @param interpolate_size the new value
         */
        set_interpolate_size(interpolate_size: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the duration that transitions between pages in `stack`
         * will take.
         * @param duration the new duration, in milliseconds
         */
        set_transition_duration(duration: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the type of animation that will be used for
         * transitions between pages in `stack`. Available
         * types include various kinds of fades and slides.
         * 
         * The transition type can be changed without problems
         * at runtime, so it is possible to change the animation
         * based on the page that is about to become current.
         * @param transition the new transition type
         */
        set_transition_type(transition: StackTransitionType): void;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.Stack} to be vertically homogeneous or not.
         * If it is homogeneous, the {@link Gtk.Stack} will request the same
         * height for all its children. If it isn't, the stack
         * may change height when a different child becomes visible.
         * @param vhomogeneous `true` to make `stack` vertically homogeneous
         */
        set_vhomogeneous(vhomogeneous: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Makes `child` the visible child of `stack`.
         * 
         * If `child` is different from the currently
         * visible child, the transition between the
         * two will be animated with the current
         * transition type of `stack`.
         * 
         * Note that the `child` widget has to be visible itself
         * (see `gtk_widget_show()`) in order to become the visible
         * child of `stack`.
         * @param child a child of `stack`
         */
        set_visible_child(child: Widget): void;

        /**
         * Makes the child with the given name visible.
         * 
         * Note that the child widget has to be visible itself
         * (see `gtk_widget_show()`) in order to become the visible
         * child of `stack`.
         * @param name the name of the child to make visible
         * @param transition the transition type to use
         */
        set_visible_child_full(name: string, transition: StackTransitionType): void;

        /**
         * Makes the child with the given name visible.
         * 
         * If `child` is different from the currently
         * visible child, the transition between the
         * two will be animated with the current
         * transition type of `stack`.
         * 
         * Note that the child widget has to be visible itself
         * (see `gtk_widget_show()`) in order to become the visible
         * child of `stack`.
         * @param name the name of the child to make visible
         */
        set_visible_child_name(name: string): void;
    }


    namespace StackAccessible {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends ContainerAccessible.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-layer": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-mdi-zorder": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-help-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-hypertext-nlinks": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption-object": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-summary": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends ContainerAccessible.ConstructorProps, Atk.Component.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class StackAccessible extends ContainerAccessible implements Atk.Component {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<StackAccessible>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: StackAccessible.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<StackAccessible.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof StackAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, StackAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof StackAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, StackAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof StackAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<StackAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;
    }


    namespace StackSidebar {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Bin.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::stack": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Bin.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {
            stack: Stack | null;
        }
    }

    /**
     * A GtkStackSidebar enables you to quickly and easily provide a
     * consistent "sidebar" object for your user interface.
     * 
     * In order to use a GtkStackSidebar, you simply use a GtkStack to
     * organize your UI flow, and add the sidebar to your sidebar area. You
     * can use `gtk_stack_sidebar_set_stack()` to connect the {@link Gtk.StackSidebar}
     * to the {@link Gtk.Stack}.
     * 
     * # CSS nodes
     * 
     * GtkStackSidebar has a single CSS node with name stacksidebar and
     * style class .sidebar.
     * 
     * When circumstances require it, GtkStackSidebar adds the
     * .needs-attention style class to the widgets representing the stack
     * pages.
     * @gir-type Class
     * @since 3.16
     */
    class StackSidebar extends Bin implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<StackSidebar>;

        // Properties
        get stack(): Stack | null;
        set stack(val: Stack | null);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: StackSidebar.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<StackSidebar.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): StackSidebar;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof StackSidebar.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, StackSidebar.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof StackSidebar.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, StackSidebar.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof StackSidebar.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<StackSidebar.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Retrieves the stack.
         * See `gtk_stack_sidebar_set_stack()`.
         * @returns the associated {@link Gtk.Stack} or     `null` if none has been set explicitly
         */
        get_stack(): Stack | null;

        /**
         * Set the {@link Gtk.Stack} associated with this {@link Gtk.StackSidebar}.
         * 
         * The sidebar widget will automatically update according to the order
         * (packing) and items within the given {@link Gtk.Stack}.
         * @param stack a {@link Gtk.Stack}
         */
        set_stack(stack: Stack): void;
    }


    namespace StackSwitcher {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Box.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::icon-size": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::stack": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::baseline-position": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::homogeneous": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::spacing": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::orientation": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Box.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, Orientable.ConstructorProps {
            icon_size: number;
            iconSize: number;
            stack: Stack | null;
        }
    }

    /**
     * The GtkStackSwitcher widget acts as a controller for a
     * {@link Gtk.Stack}; it shows a row of buttons to switch between
     * the various pages of the associated stack widget.
     * 
     * All the content for the buttons comes from the child properties
     * of the {@link Gtk.Stack}; the button visibility in a {@link Gtk.StackSwitcher}
     * widget is controlled by the visibility of the child in the
     * {@link Gtk.Stack}.
     * 
     * It is possible to associate multiple {@link Gtk.StackSwitcher} widgets
     * with the same {@link Gtk.Stack} widget.
     * 
     * The GtkStackSwitcher widget was added in 3.10.
     * 
     * # CSS nodes
     * 
     * GtkStackSwitcher has a single CSS node named stackswitcher and
     * style class .stack-switcher.
     * 
     * When circumstances require it, GtkStackSwitcher adds the
     * .needs-attention style class to the widgets representing the
     * stack pages.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class StackSwitcher extends Box implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable, Orientable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<StackSwitcher>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * Use the "icon-size" property to change the size of the image displayed
         * when a {@link Gtk.StackSwitcher} is displaying icons.
         * @since 3.20
         * @default 1
         */
        get icon_size(): number;
        set icon_size(val: number);

        /**
         * Use the "icon-size" property to change the size of the image displayed
         * when a {@link Gtk.StackSwitcher} is displaying icons.
         * @since 3.20
         * @default 1
         */
        get iconSize(): number;
        set iconSize(val: number);

        get stack(): Stack | null;
        set stack(val: Stack | null);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: StackSwitcher.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        widget: Box;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<StackSwitcher.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): StackSwitcher;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof StackSwitcher.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, StackSwitcher.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof StackSwitcher.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, StackSwitcher.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof StackSwitcher.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<StackSwitcher.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Retrieves the stack.
         * See `gtk_stack_switcher_set_stack()`.
         * @returns the stack, or `null` if    none has been set explicitly.
         */
        get_stack(): Stack | null;

        /**
         * Sets the stack to control.
         * @param stack a {@link Gtk.Stack}
         */
        set_stack(stack: Stack | null): void;

        /**
         * The orientation of the orientable.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default Gtk.Orientation.HORIZONTAL
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Orientable
         */
        get orientation(): Orientation;
        set orientation(val: Orientation);

        /**
         * Retrieves the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @returns the orientation of the `orientable`.
         */
        get_orientation(): Orientation;

        /**
         * Sets the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @param orientation the orientable’s new orientation.
         */
        set_orientation(orientation: Orientation): void;
    }


    namespace StatusIcon {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends GObject.Object.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * Gets emitted when the user activates the status icon.
             * If and how status icons can activated is platform-dependent.
             * 
             * Unlike most G_SIGNAL_ACTION signals, this signal is meant to
             * be used by applications and should be wrapped by language bindings.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.10
             * @action
             * @run-first
             */
            activate: () => void;
            /**
             * The ::button-press-event signal will be emitted when a button
             * (typically from a mouse) is pressed.
             * 
             * Whether this event is emitted is platform-dependent.  Use the ::activate
             * and ::popup-menu signals in preference.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.14
             * @run-last
             */
            "button-press-event": (arg0: Gdk.EventButton) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * The ::button-release-event signal will be emitted when a button
             * (typically from a mouse) is released.
             * 
             * Whether this event is emitted is platform-dependent.  Use the ::activate
             * and ::popup-menu signals in preference.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.14
             * @run-last
             */
            "button-release-event": (arg0: Gdk.EventButton) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * Gets emitted when the user brings up the context menu
             * of the status icon. Whether status icons can have context
             * menus and how these are activated is platform-dependent.
             * 
             * The `button` and `activate_time` parameters should be
             * passed as the last to arguments to `gtk_menu_popup()`.
             * 
             * Unlike most G_SIGNAL_ACTION signals, this signal is meant to
             * be used by applications and should be wrapped by language bindings.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.10
             * @action
             * @run-first
             */
            "popup-menu": (arg0: number, arg1: number) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when the hover timeout has expired with the
             * cursor hovering above `status_icon`; or emitted when `status_icon` got
             * focus in keyboard mode.
             * 
             * Using the given coordinates, the signal handler should determine
             * whether a tooltip should be shown for `status_icon`. If this is
             * the case `true` should be returned, `false` otherwise. Note that if
             * `keyboard_mode` is `true`, the values of `x` and `y` are undefined and
             * should not be used.
             * 
             * The signal handler is free to manipulate `tooltip` with the therefore
             * destined function calls.
             * 
             * Whether this signal is emitted is platform-dependent.
             * For plain text tooltips, use {@link Gtk.StatusIcon.tooltip_text} in preference.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.16
             * @run-last
             */
            "query-tooltip": (arg0: number, arg1: number, arg2: boolean, arg3: Tooltip) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * The ::scroll-event signal is emitted when a button in the 4 to 7
             * range is pressed. Wheel mice are usually configured to generate
             * button press events for buttons 4 and 5 when the wheel is turned.
             * 
             * Whether this event is emitted is platform-dependent.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.16
             * @run-last
             */
            "scroll-event": (arg0: Gdk.EventScroll) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * Gets emitted when the size available for the image
             * changes, e.g. because the notification area got resized.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.10
             * @run-last
             */
            "size-changed": (arg0: number) => boolean | void;
            "notify::embedded": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::file": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gicon": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::icon-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::orientation": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::pixbuf": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::screen": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::size": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::stock": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::storage-type": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::title": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.Object.ConstructorProps {
            embedded: boolean;
            file: string;
            gicon: Gio.Icon | null;
            has_tooltip: boolean;
            hasTooltip: boolean;
            icon_name: string | null;
            iconName: string | null;
            orientation: Orientation;
            pixbuf: GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf | null;
            screen: Gdk.Screen;
            size: number;
            stock: string | null;
            storage_type: ImageType;
            storageType: ImageType;
            title: string;
            tooltip_markup: string | null;
            tooltipMarkup: string | null;
            tooltip_text: string | null;
            tooltipText: string | null;
            visible: boolean;
        }
    }

    /**
     * The “system tray” or notification area is normally used for transient icons
     * that indicate some special state. For example, a system tray icon might
     * appear to tell the user that they have new mail, or have an incoming instant
     * message, or something along those lines. The basic idea is that creating an
     * icon in the notification area is less annoying than popping up a dialog.
     * 
     * A {@link Gtk.StatusIcon} object can be used to display an icon in a “system tray”.
     * The icon can have a tooltip, and the user can interact with it by
     * activating it or popping up a context menu.
     * 
     * It is very important to notice that status icons depend on the existence
     * of a notification area being available to the user; you should not use status
     * icons as the only way to convey critical information regarding your application,
     * as the notification area may not exist on the user's environment, or may have
     * been removed. You should always check that a status icon has been embedded into
     * a notification area by using `gtk_status_icon_is_embedded()`, and gracefully
     * recover if the function returns `false`.
     * 
     * On X11, the implementation follows the
     * [FreeDesktop System Tray Specification](http://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Specifications/systemtray-spec).
     * Implementations of the “tray” side of this specification can
     * be found e.g. in the GNOME 2 and KDE panel applications.
     * 
     * Note that a GtkStatusIcon is not a widget, but just a {@link GObject.Object}. Making it a
     * widget would be impractical, since the system tray on Windows doesn’t allow
     * to embed arbitrary widgets.
     * 
     * GtkStatusIcon has been deprecated in 3.14. You should consider using
     * notifications or more modern platform-specific APIs instead. GLib provides
     * the {@link Gio.Notification} API which works well with {@link Gtk.Application} on multiple
     * platforms and environments, and should be the preferred mechanism to notify
     * the users of transient status updates. See this [HowDoI](https://wiki.gnome.org/HowDoI/GNotification)
     * for code examples.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class StatusIcon extends GObject.Object {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<StatusIcon>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * `true` if the statusicon is embedded in a notification area.
         * @since 2.12
         * @read-only
         * @default false
         */
        get embedded(): boolean;

        /**
         * @write-only
         * @default null
         */
        set file(val: string);

        /**
         * The {@link Gio.Icon} displayed in the {@link Gtk.StatusIcon}. For themed icons,
         * the image will be updated automatically if the theme changes.
         * @since 2.14
         */
        get gicon(): Gio.Icon | null;
        set gicon(val: Gio.Icon | null);

        /**
         * Enables or disables the emission of {@link Gtk.StatusIcon.SignalSignatures.query_tooltip | Gtk.StatusIcon::query-tooltip} on
         * `status_icon`.  A value of `true` indicates that `status_icon` can have a
         * tooltip, in this case the status icon will be queried using
         * {@link Gtk.StatusIcon.SignalSignatures.query_tooltip | Gtk.StatusIcon::query-tooltip} to determine whether it will provide a
         * tooltip or not.
         * 
         * Note that setting this property to `true` for the first time will change
         * the event masks of the windows of this status icon to include leave-notify
         * and motion-notify events. This will not be undone when the property is set
         * to `false` again.
         * 
         * Whether this property is respected is platform dependent.
         * For plain text tooltips, use {@link Gtk.StatusIcon.tooltip_text} in preference.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default false
         */
        get has_tooltip(): boolean;
        set has_tooltip(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Enables or disables the emission of {@link Gtk.StatusIcon.SignalSignatures.query_tooltip | Gtk.StatusIcon::query-tooltip} on
         * `status_icon`.  A value of `true` indicates that `status_icon` can have a
         * tooltip, in this case the status icon will be queried using
         * {@link Gtk.StatusIcon.SignalSignatures.query_tooltip | Gtk.StatusIcon::query-tooltip} to determine whether it will provide a
         * tooltip or not.
         * 
         * Note that setting this property to `true` for the first time will change
         * the event masks of the windows of this status icon to include leave-notify
         * and motion-notify events. This will not be undone when the property is set
         * to `false` again.
         * 
         * Whether this property is respected is platform dependent.
         * For plain text tooltips, use {@link Gtk.StatusIcon.tooltip_text} in preference.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default false
         */
        get hasTooltip(): boolean;
        set hasTooltip(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default null
         */
        get icon_name(): string | null;
        set icon_name(val: string | null);

        /**
         * @default null
         */
        get iconName(): string | null;
        set iconName(val: string | null);

        /**
         * The orientation of the tray in which the statusicon
         * is embedded.
         * @since 2.12
         * @read-only
         * @default Gtk.Orientation.HORIZONTAL
         */
        get orientation(): Orientation;

        get pixbuf(): GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf | null;
        set pixbuf(val: GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf | null);

        get screen(): Gdk.Screen;
        set screen(val: Gdk.Screen);

        /**
         * @read-only
         * @default 0
         */
        get size(): number;

        /**
         * @deprecated since 3.10: Use {@link Gtk.StatusIcon.icon_name} instead.
         * @default null
         */
        get stock(): string | null;
        set stock(val: string | null);

        /**
         * @read-only
         * @default Gtk.ImageType.EMPTY
         */
        get storage_type(): ImageType;

        /**
         * @read-only
         * @default Gtk.ImageType.EMPTY
         */
        get storageType(): ImageType;

        /**
         * The title of this tray icon. This should be a short, human-readable,
         * localized string describing the tray icon. It may be used by tools
         * like screen readers to render the tray icon.
         * @since 2.18
         * @default null
         */
        get title(): string;
        set title(val: string);

        /**
         * Sets the text of tooltip to be the given string, which is marked up
         * with the [Pango text markup language][PangoMarkupFormat].
         * Also see `gtk_tooltip_set_markup()`.
         * 
         * This is a convenience property which will take care of getting the
         * tooltip shown if the given string is not `null`.
         * {@link Gtk.StatusIcon.has_tooltip} will automatically be set to `true` and
         * the default handler for the {@link Gtk.StatusIcon.SignalSignatures.query_tooltip | Gtk.StatusIcon::query-tooltip} signal
         * will take care of displaying the tooltip.
         * 
         * On some platforms, embedded markup will be ignored.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default null
         */
        get tooltip_markup(): string | null;
        set tooltip_markup(val: string | null);

        /**
         * Sets the text of tooltip to be the given string, which is marked up
         * with the [Pango text markup language][PangoMarkupFormat].
         * Also see `gtk_tooltip_set_markup()`.
         * 
         * This is a convenience property which will take care of getting the
         * tooltip shown if the given string is not `null`.
         * {@link Gtk.StatusIcon.has_tooltip} will automatically be set to `true` and
         * the default handler for the {@link Gtk.StatusIcon.SignalSignatures.query_tooltip | Gtk.StatusIcon::query-tooltip} signal
         * will take care of displaying the tooltip.
         * 
         * On some platforms, embedded markup will be ignored.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default null
         */
        get tooltipMarkup(): string | null;
        set tooltipMarkup(val: string | null);

        /**
         * Sets the text of tooltip to be the given string.
         * 
         * Also see `gtk_tooltip_set_text()`.
         * 
         * This is a convenience property which will take care of getting the
         * tooltip shown if the given string is not `null`.
         * {@link Gtk.StatusIcon.has_tooltip} will automatically be set to `true` and
         * the default handler for the {@link Gtk.StatusIcon.SignalSignatures.query_tooltip | Gtk.StatusIcon::query-tooltip} signal
         * will take care of displaying the tooltip.
         * 
         * Note that some platforms have limitations on the length of tooltips
         * that they allow on status icons, e.g. Windows only shows the first
         * 64 characters.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default null
         */
        get tooltip_text(): string | null;
        set tooltip_text(val: string | null);

        /**
         * Sets the text of tooltip to be the given string.
         * 
         * Also see `gtk_tooltip_set_text()`.
         * 
         * This is a convenience property which will take care of getting the
         * tooltip shown if the given string is not `null`.
         * {@link Gtk.StatusIcon.has_tooltip} will automatically be set to `true` and
         * the default handler for the {@link Gtk.StatusIcon.SignalSignatures.query_tooltip | Gtk.StatusIcon::query-tooltip} signal
         * will take care of displaying the tooltip.
         * 
         * Note that some platforms have limitations on the length of tooltips
         * that they allow on status icons, e.g. Windows only shows the first
         * 64 characters.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default null
         */
        get tooltipText(): string | null;
        set tooltipText(val: string | null);

        /**
         * @default true
         */
        get visible(): boolean;
        set visible(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: StatusIcon.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<StatusIcon.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): StatusIcon;

        static new_from_file(filename: string): StatusIcon;

        static new_from_gicon(icon: Gio.Icon): StatusIcon;

        static new_from_icon_name(icon_name: string): StatusIcon;

        static new_from_pixbuf(pixbuf: GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf): StatusIcon;

        static new_from_stock(stock_id: string): StatusIcon;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof StatusIcon.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, StatusIcon.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof StatusIcon.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, StatusIcon.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof StatusIcon.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<StatusIcon.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Static methods
        /**
         * Menu positioning function to use with `gtk_menu_popup()`
         * to position `menu` aligned to the status icon `user_data`.
         * @param menu the {@link Gtk.Menu}
         * @param x return location for the x position
         * @param y return location for the y position
         * @param user_data the status icon to position the menu on
         */
        static position_menu(menu: Menu, x: number, y: number, user_data: StatusIcon): [number, number, boolean];

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_activate(): void;

        /**
         * @param event 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_button_press_event(event: Gdk.EventButton): boolean;

        /**
         * @param event 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_button_release_event(event: Gdk.EventButton): boolean;

        /**
         * @param button 
         * @param activate_time 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_popup_menu(button: number, activate_time: number): void;

        /**
         * @param x 
         * @param y 
         * @param keyboard_mode 
         * @param tooltip 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_query_tooltip(x: number, y: number, keyboard_mode: boolean, tooltip: Tooltip): boolean;

        /**
         * @param event 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_scroll_event(event: Gdk.EventScroll): boolean;

        /**
         * @param size 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_size_changed(size: number): boolean;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Obtains information about the location of the status icon
         * on screen. This information can be used to e.g. position
         * popups like notification bubbles.
         * 
         * See `gtk_status_icon_position_menu()` for a more convenient
         * alternative for positioning menus.
         * 
         * Note that some platforms do not allow GTK+ to provide
         * this information, and even on platforms that do allow it,
         * the information is not reliable unless the status icon
         * is embedded in a notification area, see
         * `gtk_status_icon_is_embedded()`.
         * @returns `true` if the location information has               been filled in
         */
        get_geometry(): [boolean, Gdk.Screen | null, Gdk.Rectangle | null, Orientation | null];

        /**
         * Retrieves the {@link Gio.Icon} being displayed by the {@link Gtk.StatusIcon}.
         * The storage type of the status icon must be {@link Gtk.ImageType.EMPTY} or
         * {@link Gtk.ImageType.GICON} (see `gtk_status_icon_get_storage_type()`).
         * The caller of this function does not own a reference to the
         * returned {@link Gio.Icon}.
         * 
         * If this function fails, `icon` is left unchanged;
         * @returns the displayed icon, or `null` if the image is empty
         */
        get_gicon(): Gio.Icon | null;

        /**
         * Returns the current value of the has-tooltip property.
         * See {@link Gtk.StatusIcon.has_tooltip} for more information.
         * @returns current value of has-tooltip on `status_icon`.
         */
        get_has_tooltip(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the name of the icon being displayed by the {@link Gtk.StatusIcon}.
         * The storage type of the status icon must be {@link Gtk.ImageType.EMPTY} or
         * {@link Gtk.ImageType.ICON_NAME} (see `gtk_status_icon_get_storage_type()`).
         * The returned string is owned by the {@link Gtk.StatusIcon} and should not
         * be freed or modified.
         * @returns name of the displayed icon, or `null` if the image is empty.
         */
        get_icon_name(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the {@link GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf} being displayed by the {@link Gtk.StatusIcon}.
         * The storage type of the status icon must be {@link Gtk.ImageType.EMPTY} or
         * {@link Gtk.ImageType.PIXBUF} (see `gtk_status_icon_get_storage_type()`).
         * The caller of this function does not own a reference to the
         * returned pixbuf.
         * @returns the displayed pixbuf,     or `null` if the image is empty.
         */
        get_pixbuf(): GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf | null;

        /**
         * Returns the {@link Gdk.Screen} associated with `status_icon`.
         * @returns a {@link Gdk.Screen}.
         */
        get_screen(): Gdk.Screen;

        /**
         * Gets the size in pixels that is available for the image.
         * Stock icons and named icons adapt their size automatically
         * if the size of the notification area changes. For other
         * storage types, the size-changed signal can be used to
         * react to size changes.
         * 
         * Note that the returned size is only meaningful while the
         * status icon is embedded (see `gtk_status_icon_is_embedded()`).
         * @returns the size that is available for the image
         */
        get_size(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the id of the stock icon being displayed by the {@link Gtk.StatusIcon}.
         * The storage type of the status icon must be {@link Gtk.ImageType.EMPTY} or
         * {@link Gtk.ImageType.STOCK} (see `gtk_status_icon_get_storage_type()`).
         * The returned string is owned by the {@link Gtk.StatusIcon} and should not
         * be freed or modified.
         * @returns stock id of the displayed stock icon,   or `null` if the image is empty.
         */
        get_stock(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the type of representation being used by the {@link Gtk.StatusIcon}
         * to store image data. If the {@link Gtk.StatusIcon} has no image data,
         * the return value will be {@link Gtk.ImageType.EMPTY}.
         * @returns the image representation being used
         */
        get_storage_type(): ImageType;

        /**
         * Gets the title of this tray icon. See `gtk_status_icon_set_title()`.
         * @returns the title of the status icon
         */
        get_title(): string;

        /**
         * Gets the contents of the tooltip for `status_icon`.
         * @returns the tooltip text, or `null`. You should free the   returned string with `g_free()` when done.
         */
        get_tooltip_markup(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the contents of the tooltip for `status_icon`.
         * @returns the tooltip text, or `null`. You should free the   returned string with `g_free()` when done.
         */
        get_tooltip_text(): string | null;

        /**
         * Returns whether the status icon is visible or not.
         * Note that being visible does not guarantee that
         * the user can actually see the icon, see also
         * `gtk_status_icon_is_embedded()`.
         * @returns `true` if the status icon is visible
         */
        get_visible(): boolean;

        /**
         * This function is only useful on the X11/freedesktop.org platform.
         * 
         * It returns a window ID for the widget in the underlying
         * status icon implementation.  This is useful for the Galago
         * notification service, which can send a window ID in the protocol
         * in order for the server to position notification windows
         * pointing to a status icon reliably.
         * 
         * This function is not intended for other use cases which are
         * more likely to be met by one of the non-X11 specific methods, such
         * as `gtk_status_icon_position_menu()`.
         * @returns An 32 bit unsigned integer identifier for the underlying X11 Window
         */
        get_x11_window_id(): number;

        /**
         * Returns whether the status icon is embedded in a notification
         * area.
         * @returns `true` if the status icon is embedded in   a notification area.
         */
        is_embedded(): boolean;

        /**
         * Makes `status_icon` display the file `filename`.
         * See `gtk_status_icon_new_from_file()` for details.
         * @param filename a filename
         */
        set_from_file(filename: string): void;

        /**
         * Makes `status_icon` display the {@link Gio.Icon}.
         * See `gtk_status_icon_new_from_gicon()` for details.
         * @param icon a GIcon
         */
        set_from_gicon(icon: Gio.Icon): void;

        /**
         * Makes `status_icon` display the icon named `icon_name` from the
         * current icon theme.
         * See `gtk_status_icon_new_from_icon_name()` for details.
         * @param icon_name an icon name
         */
        set_from_icon_name(icon_name: string): void;

        /**
         * Makes `status_icon` display `pixbuf`.
         * See `gtk_status_icon_new_from_pixbuf()` for details.
         * @param pixbuf a {@link GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf} or `null`
         */
        set_from_pixbuf(pixbuf: GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf | null): void;

        /**
         * Makes `status_icon` display the stock icon with the id `stock_id`.
         * See `gtk_status_icon_new_from_stock()` for details.
         * @param stock_id a stock icon id
         */
        set_from_stock(stock_id: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets the has-tooltip property on `status_icon` to `has_tooltip`.
         * See {@link Gtk.StatusIcon.has_tooltip} for more information.
         * @param has_tooltip whether or not `status_icon` has a tooltip
         */
        set_has_tooltip(has_tooltip: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the name of this tray icon.
         * This should be a string identifying this icon. It is may be
         * used for sorting the icons in the tray and will not be shown to
         * the user.
         * @param name the name
         */
        set_name(name: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gdk.Screen} where `status_icon` is displayed; if
         * the icon is already mapped, it will be unmapped, and
         * then remapped on the new screen.
         * @param screen a {@link Gdk.Screen}
         */
        set_screen(screen: Gdk.Screen): void;

        /**
         * Sets the title of this tray icon.
         * This should be a short, human-readable, localized string
         * describing the tray icon. It may be used by tools like screen
         * readers to render the tray icon.
         * @param title the title
         */
        set_title(title: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets `markup` as the contents of the tooltip, which is marked up with
         *  the [Pango text markup language][PangoMarkupFormat].
         * 
         * This function will take care of setting {@link Gtk.StatusIcon.has_tooltip} to `true`
         * and of the default handler for the {@link Gtk.StatusIcon.SignalSignatures.query_tooltip | Gtk.StatusIcon::query-tooltip} signal.
         * 
         * See also the {@link Gtk.StatusIcon.tooltip_markup} property and
         * `gtk_tooltip_set_markup()`.
         * @param markup the contents of the tooltip for `status_icon`, or `null`
         */
        set_tooltip_markup(markup: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets `text` as the contents of the tooltip.
         * 
         * This function will take care of setting {@link Gtk.StatusIcon.has_tooltip} to
         * `true` and of the default handler for the {@link Gtk.StatusIcon.SignalSignatures.query_tooltip | Gtk.StatusIcon::query-tooltip}
         * signal.
         * 
         * See also the {@link Gtk.StatusIcon.tooltip_text} property and
         * `gtk_tooltip_set_text()`.
         * @param text the contents of the tooltip for `status_icon`
         */
        set_tooltip_text(text: string): void;

        /**
         * Shows or hides a status icon.
         * @param visible `true` to show the status icon, `false` to hide it
         */
        set_visible(visible: boolean): void;
    }


    namespace Statusbar {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Box.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * Is emitted whenever a new message is popped off a statusbar's stack.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "text-popped": (arg0: number, arg1: string) => void;
            /**
             * Is emitted whenever a new message gets pushed onto a statusbar's stack.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "text-pushed": (arg0: number, arg1: string) => void;
            "notify::baseline-position": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::homogeneous": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::spacing": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::orientation": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Box.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, Orientable.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * A {@link Gtk.Statusbar} is usually placed along the bottom of an application's
     * main {@link Gtk.Window}. It may provide a regular commentary of the application's
     * status (as is usually the case in a web browser, for example), or may be
     * used to simply output a message when the status changes, (when an upload
     * is complete in an FTP client, for example).
     * 
     * Status bars in GTK+ maintain a stack of messages. The message at
     * the top of the each bar’s stack is the one that will currently be displayed.
     * 
     * Any messages added to a statusbar’s stack must specify a
     * context id that is used to uniquely identify
     * the source of a message. This context id can be generated by
     * `gtk_statusbar_get_context_id()`, given a message and the statusbar that
     * it will be added to. Note that messages are stored in a stack, and when
     * choosing which message to display, the stack structure is adhered to,
     * regardless of the context identifier of a message.
     * 
     * One could say that a statusbar maintains one stack of messages for
     * display purposes, but allows multiple message producers to maintain
     * sub-stacks of the messages they produced (via context ids).
     * 
     * Status bars are created using `gtk_statusbar_new()`.
     * 
     * Messages are added to the bar’s stack with `gtk_statusbar_push()`.
     * 
     * The message at the top of the stack can be removed using
     * `gtk_statusbar_pop()`. A message can be removed from anywhere in the
     * stack if its message id was recorded at the time it was added. This
     * is done using `gtk_statusbar_remove()`.
     * 
     * # CSS node
     * 
     * GtkStatusbar has a single CSS node with name statusbar.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class Statusbar extends Box implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable, Orientable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<Statusbar>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: Statusbar.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        parent_widget: Box;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<Statusbar.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): Statusbar;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof Statusbar.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Statusbar.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof Statusbar.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Statusbar.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof Statusbar.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<Statusbar.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * @param context_id 
         * @param text 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_text_popped(context_id: number, text: string): void;

        /**
         * @param context_id 
         * @param text 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_text_pushed(context_id: number, text: string): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Returns a new context identifier, given a description
         * of the actual context. Note that the description is
         * not shown in the UI.
         * @param context_description textual description of what context                       the new message is being used in
         * @returns an integer id
         */
        get_context_id(context_description: string): number;

        /**
         * Retrieves the box containing the label widget.
         * @returns a {@link Gtk.Box}
         */
        get_message_area(): Box;

        /**
         * Removes the first message in the {@link Gtk.Statusbar}’s stack
         * with the given context id.
         * 
         * Note that this may not change the displayed message, if
         * the message at the top of the stack has a different
         * context id.
         * @param context_id a context identifier
         */
        pop(context_id: number): void;

        /**
         * Pushes a new message onto a statusbar’s stack.
         * @param context_id the message’s context id, as returned by              `gtk_statusbar_get_context_id()`
         * @param text the message to add to the statusbar
         * @returns a message id that can be used with          `gtk_statusbar_remove()`.
         */
        push(context_id: number, text: string): number;

        /**
         * Forces the removal of a message from a statusbar’s stack.
         * The exact `context_id` and `message_id` must be specified.
         * @param context_id a context identifier
         * @param message_id a message identifier, as returned by `gtk_statusbar_push()`
         */
        remove(context_id: number, message_id: number): void;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
    // Conflicted with Gtk.Container.remove
        remove(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Forces the removal of all messages from a statusbar's
         * stack with the exact `context_id`.
         * @param context_id a context identifier
         */
        remove_all(context_id: number): void;

        /**
         * The orientation of the orientable.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default Gtk.Orientation.HORIZONTAL
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Orientable
         */
        get orientation(): Orientation;
        set orientation(val: Orientation);

        /**
         * Retrieves the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @returns the orientation of the `orientable`.
         */
        get_orientation(): Orientation;

        /**
         * Sets the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @param orientation the orientable’s new orientation.
         */
        set_orientation(orientation: Orientation): void;
    }


    namespace StatusbarAccessible {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends ContainerAccessible.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-layer": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-mdi-zorder": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-help-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-hypertext-nlinks": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption-object": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-summary": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends ContainerAccessible.ConstructorProps, Atk.Component.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class StatusbarAccessible extends ContainerAccessible implements Atk.Component {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<StatusbarAccessible>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: StatusbarAccessible.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<StatusbarAccessible.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof StatusbarAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, StatusbarAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof StatusbarAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, StatusbarAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof StatusbarAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<StatusbarAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;
    }


    namespace Style {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends GObject.Object.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * Emitted when the style has been initialized for a particular
             * visual. Connecting to this signal is probably seldom
             * useful since most of the time applications and widgets only
             * deal with styles that have been already realized.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.4
             * @run-first
             */
            realize: () => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when the aspects of the style specific to a particular visual
             * is being cleaned up. A connection to this signal can be useful
             * if a widget wants to cache objects as object data on {@link Gtk.Style}.
             * This signal provides a convenient place to free such cached objects.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.4
             * @run-first
             */
            unrealize: () => void;
            "notify::context": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.Object.ConstructorProps {
            context: StyleContext;
        }
    }

    /**
     * A {@link Gtk.Style} object encapsulates the information that provides the look and
     * feel for a widget.
     * 
     * > In GTK+ 3.0, GtkStyle has been deprecated and replaced by
     * > {@link Gtk.StyleContext}.
     * 
     * Each {@link Gtk.Widget} has an associated {@link Gtk.Style} object that is used when
     * rendering that widget. Also, a {@link Gtk.Style} holds information for the five
     * possible widget states though not every widget supports all five
     * states; see {@link Gtk.StateType}.
     * 
     * Usually the {@link Gtk.Style} for a widget is the same as the default style that
     * is set by GTK+ and modified the theme engine.
     * 
     * Usually applications should not need to use or modify the {@link Gtk.Style} of
     * their widgets.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class Style extends GObject.Object {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<Style>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * @construct-only
         */
        get context(): StyleContext;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: Style.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        fg: Gdk.Color[];

        bg: Gdk.Color[];

        light: Gdk.Color[];

        dark: Gdk.Color[];

        mid: Gdk.Color[];

        text: Gdk.Color[];

        base: Gdk.Color[];

        text_aa: Gdk.Color[];

        black: Gdk.Color;

        white: Gdk.Color;

        xthickness: number;

        ythickness: number;

        background: cairo.Pattern[];

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<Style.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): Style;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof Style.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Style.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof Style.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Style.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof Style.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<Style.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * @param src 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_copy(src: Style): void;

        /**
         * @param cr 
         * @param state_type 
         * @param shadow_type 
         * @param widget 
         * @param detail 
         * @param arrow_type 
         * @param fill 
         * @param x 
         * @param y 
         * @param width 
         * @param height 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_draw_arrow(cr: cairo.Context, state_type: StateType, shadow_type: ShadowType, widget: Widget, detail: string, arrow_type: ArrowType, fill: boolean, x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number): void;

        /**
         * @param cr 
         * @param state_type 
         * @param shadow_type 
         * @param widget 
         * @param detail 
         * @param x 
         * @param y 
         * @param width 
         * @param height 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_draw_box(cr: cairo.Context, state_type: StateType, shadow_type: ShadowType, widget: Widget, detail: string, x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number): void;

        /**
         * @param cr 
         * @param state_type 
         * @param shadow_type 
         * @param widget 
         * @param detail 
         * @param x 
         * @param y 
         * @param width 
         * @param height 
         * @param gap_side 
         * @param gap_x 
         * @param gap_width 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_draw_box_gap(cr: cairo.Context, state_type: StateType, shadow_type: ShadowType, widget: Widget, detail: string, x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number, gap_side: PositionType, gap_x: number, gap_width: number): void;

        /**
         * @param cr 
         * @param state_type 
         * @param shadow_type 
         * @param widget 
         * @param detail 
         * @param x 
         * @param y 
         * @param width 
         * @param height 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_draw_check(cr: cairo.Context, state_type: StateType, shadow_type: ShadowType, widget: Widget, detail: string, x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number): void;

        /**
         * @param cr 
         * @param state_type 
         * @param shadow_type 
         * @param widget 
         * @param detail 
         * @param x 
         * @param y 
         * @param width 
         * @param height 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_draw_diamond(cr: cairo.Context, state_type: StateType, shadow_type: ShadowType, widget: Widget, detail: string, x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number): void;

        /**
         * @param cr 
         * @param state_type 
         * @param widget 
         * @param detail 
         * @param x 
         * @param y 
         * @param expander_style 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_draw_expander(cr: cairo.Context, state_type: StateType, widget: Widget, detail: string, x: number, y: number, expander_style: ExpanderStyle): void;

        /**
         * @param cr 
         * @param state_type 
         * @param shadow_type 
         * @param widget 
         * @param detail 
         * @param x 
         * @param y 
         * @param width 
         * @param height 
         * @param gap_side 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_draw_extension(cr: cairo.Context, state_type: StateType, shadow_type: ShadowType, widget: Widget, detail: string, x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number, gap_side: PositionType): void;

        /**
         * @param cr 
         * @param state_type 
         * @param shadow_type 
         * @param widget 
         * @param detail 
         * @param x 
         * @param y 
         * @param width 
         * @param height 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_draw_flat_box(cr: cairo.Context, state_type: StateType, shadow_type: ShadowType, widget: Widget, detail: string, x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number): void;

        /**
         * @param cr 
         * @param state_type 
         * @param widget 
         * @param detail 
         * @param x 
         * @param y 
         * @param width 
         * @param height 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_draw_focus(cr: cairo.Context, state_type: StateType, widget: Widget, detail: string, x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number): void;

        /**
         * @param cr 
         * @param state_type 
         * @param shadow_type 
         * @param widget 
         * @param detail 
         * @param x 
         * @param y 
         * @param width 
         * @param height 
         * @param orientation 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_draw_handle(cr: cairo.Context, state_type: StateType, shadow_type: ShadowType, widget: Widget, detail: string, x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number, orientation: Orientation): void;

        /**
         * @param cr 
         * @param state_type 
         * @param widget 
         * @param detail 
         * @param x1 
         * @param x2 
         * @param y 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_draw_hline(cr: cairo.Context, state_type: StateType, widget: Widget, detail: string, x1: number, x2: number, y: number): void;

        /**
         * @param cr 
         * @param state_type 
         * @param use_text 
         * @param widget 
         * @param detail 
         * @param x 
         * @param y 
         * @param layout 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_draw_layout(cr: cairo.Context, state_type: StateType, use_text: boolean, widget: Widget, detail: string, x: number, y: number, layout: Pango.Layout): void;

        /**
         * @param cr 
         * @param state_type 
         * @param shadow_type 
         * @param widget 
         * @param detail 
         * @param x 
         * @param y 
         * @param width 
         * @param height 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_draw_option(cr: cairo.Context, state_type: StateType, shadow_type: ShadowType, widget: Widget, detail: string, x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number): void;

        /**
         * @param cr 
         * @param state_type 
         * @param widget 
         * @param detail 
         * @param edge 
         * @param x 
         * @param y 
         * @param width 
         * @param height 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_draw_resize_grip(cr: cairo.Context, state_type: StateType, widget: Widget, detail: string, edge: Gdk.WindowEdge, x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number): void;

        /**
         * @param cr 
         * @param state_type 
         * @param shadow_type 
         * @param widget 
         * @param detail 
         * @param x 
         * @param y 
         * @param width 
         * @param height 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_draw_shadow(cr: cairo.Context, state_type: StateType, shadow_type: ShadowType, widget: Widget, detail: string, x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number): void;

        /**
         * @param cr 
         * @param state_type 
         * @param shadow_type 
         * @param widget 
         * @param detail 
         * @param x 
         * @param y 
         * @param width 
         * @param height 
         * @param gap_side 
         * @param gap_x 
         * @param gap_width 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_draw_shadow_gap(cr: cairo.Context, state_type: StateType, shadow_type: ShadowType, widget: Widget, detail: string, x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number, gap_side: PositionType, gap_x: number, gap_width: number): void;

        /**
         * @param cr 
         * @param state_type 
         * @param shadow_type 
         * @param widget 
         * @param detail 
         * @param x 
         * @param y 
         * @param width 
         * @param height 
         * @param orientation 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_draw_slider(cr: cairo.Context, state_type: StateType, shadow_type: ShadowType, widget: Widget, detail: string, x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number, orientation: Orientation): void;

        /**
         * @param cr 
         * @param state_type 
         * @param widget 
         * @param detail 
         * @param step 
         * @param x 
         * @param y 
         * @param width 
         * @param height 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_draw_spinner(cr: cairo.Context, state_type: StateType, widget: Widget, detail: string, step: number, x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number): void;

        /**
         * @param cr 
         * @param state_type 
         * @param shadow_type 
         * @param widget 
         * @param detail 
         * @param x 
         * @param y 
         * @param width 
         * @param height 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_draw_tab(cr: cairo.Context, state_type: StateType, shadow_type: ShadowType, widget: Widget, detail: string, x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number): void;

        /**
         * @param cr 
         * @param state_type 
         * @param widget 
         * @param detail 
         * @param y1_ 
         * @param y2_ 
         * @param x 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_draw_vline(cr: cairo.Context, state_type: StateType, widget: Widget, detail: string, y1_: number, y2_: number, x: number): void;

        /**
         * @param rc_style 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_init_from_rc(rc_style: RcStyle): void;

        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_realize(): void;

        /**
         * Renders the icon specified by `source` at the given `size`
         * according to the given parameters and returns the result in a
         * pixbuf.
         * @param source the {@link Gtk.IconSource} specifying the icon to render
         * @param direction a text direction
         * @param state a state
         * @param size the size to render the icon at ({@link Gtk.IconSize}). A size of     `(GtkIconSize)-1` means render at the size of the source and     don’t scale.
         * @param widget the widget
         * @param detail a style detail
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_render_icon(source: IconSource, direction: TextDirection, state: StateType, size: number, widget: Widget | null, detail: string | null): GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf;

        /**
         * Sets the background of `window` to the background color or pixmap
         * specified by `style` for the given state.
         * @param window a {@link Gdk.Window}
         * @param state_type a state
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_background(window: Gdk.Window, state_type: StateType): void;

        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_unrealize(): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * @param cr 
         * @param window 
         * @param state_type 
         * @param x 
         * @param y 
         * @param width 
         * @param height 
         */
        apply_default_background(cr: cairo.Context, window: Gdk.Window, state_type: StateType, x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number): void;

        /**
         * Creates a copy of the passed in {@link Gtk.Style} object.
         * @returns a copy of `style`
         */
        copy(): Style;

        /**
         * Detaches a style from a window. If the style is not attached
         * to any windows anymore, it is unrealized. See `gtk_style_attach()`.
         */
        detach(): void;

        /**
         * Queries the value of a style property corresponding to a
         * widget class is in the given style.
         * @param widget_type the {@link GObject.GType} of a descendant of {@link Gtk.Widget}
         * @param property_name the name of the style property to get
         */
        get_style_property(widget_type: GObject.GType, property_name: string): unknown;

        /**
         * Returns whether `style` has an associated {@link Gtk.StyleContext}.
         * @returns `true` if `style` has a {@link Gtk.StyleContext}
         */
        has_context(): boolean;

        /**
         * Looks up `color_name` in the style’s logical color mappings,
         * filling in `color` and returning `true` if found, otherwise
         * returning `false`. Do not cache the found mapping, because
         * it depends on the {@link Gtk.Style} and might change when a theme
         * switch occurs.
         * @param color_name the name of the logical color to look up
         * @returns `true` if the mapping was found.
         */
        lookup_color(color_name: string): [boolean, Gdk.Color];

        /**
         * Looks up `stock_id` in the icon factories associated with `style`
         * and the default icon factory, returning an icon set if found,
         * otherwise `null`.
         * @param stock_id an icon name
         * @returns icon set of `stock_id`
         */
        lookup_icon_set(stock_id: string): IconSet;

        /**
         * Renders the icon specified by `source` at the given `size`
         * according to the given parameters and returns the result in a
         * pixbuf.
         * @param source the {@link Gtk.IconSource} specifying the icon to render
         * @param direction a text direction
         * @param state a state
         * @param size the size to render the icon at ({@link Gtk.IconSize}). A size of     `(GtkIconSize)-1` means render at the size of the source and     don’t scale.
         * @param widget the widget
         * @param detail a style detail
         * @returns a newly-created {@link GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf}     containing the rendered icon
         */
        render_icon(source: IconSource, direction: TextDirection, state: StateType, size: number, widget: Widget | null, detail: string | null): GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf;

        /**
         * Sets the background of `window` to the background color or pixmap
         * specified by `style` for the given state.
         * @param window a {@link Gdk.Window}
         * @param state_type a state
         */
        set_background(window: Gdk.Window, state_type: StateType): void;
    }


    namespace StyleContext {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends GObject.Object.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * The ::changed signal is emitted when there is a change in the
             * {@link Gtk.StyleContext}.
             * 
             * For a {@link Gtk.StyleContext} returned by `gtk_widget_get_style_context()`, the
             * {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.style_updated | Gtk.Widget::style-updated} signal/vfunc might be more convenient to use.
             * 
             * This signal is useful when using the theming layer standalone.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.0
             * @run-first
             */
            changed: () => void;
            "notify::direction": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::paint-clock": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::screen": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.Object.ConstructorProps {
            direction: TextDirection;
            paint_clock: Gdk.FrameClock;
            paintClock: Gdk.FrameClock;
            parent: StyleContext | null;
            screen: Gdk.Screen;
        }
    }

    /**
     * {@link Gtk.StyleContext} is an object that stores styling information affecting
     * a widget defined by {@link Gtk.WidgetPath}.
     * 
     * In order to construct the final style information, {@link Gtk.StyleContext}
     * queries information from all attached `GtkStyleProviders`. Style providers
     * can be either attached explicitly to the context through
     * `gtk_style_context_add_provider()`, or to the screen through
     * `gtk_style_context_add_provider_for_screen()`. The resulting style is a
     * combination of all providers’ information in priority order.
     * 
     * For GTK+ widgets, any {@link Gtk.StyleContext} returned by
     * `gtk_widget_get_style_context()` will already have a {@link Gtk.WidgetPath}, a
     * {@link Gdk.Screen} and RTL/LTR information set. The style context will also be
     * updated automatically if any of these settings change on the widget.
     * 
     * If you are using the theming layer standalone, you will need to set a
     * widget path and a screen yourself to the created style context through
     * `gtk_style_context_set_path()` and possibly `gtk_style_context_set_screen()`. See
     * the “Foreign drawing“ example in gtk3-demo.
     * 
     * # Style Classes # {#gtkstylecontext-classes}
     * 
     * Widgets can add style classes to their context, which can be used to associate
     * different styles by class. The documentation for individual widgets lists
     * which style classes it uses itself, and which style classes may be added by
     * applications to affect their appearance.
     * 
     * GTK+ defines macros for a number of style classes.
     * 
     * # Style Regions
     * 
     * Widgets can also add regions with flags to their context. This feature is
     * deprecated and will be removed in a future GTK+ update. Please use style
     * classes instead.
     * 
     * GTK+ defines macros for a number of style regions.
     * 
     * # Custom styling in UI libraries and applications
     * 
     * If you are developing a library with custom `GtkWidgets` that
     * render differently than standard components, you may need to add a
     * {@link Gtk.StyleProvider} yourself with the `GTK_STYLE_PROVIDER_PRIORITY_FALLBACK`
     * priority, either a {@link Gtk.CssProvider} or a custom object implementing the
     * {@link Gtk.StyleProvider} interface. This way themes may still attempt
     * to style your UI elements in a different way if needed so.
     * 
     * If you are using custom styling on an applications, you probably want then
     * to make your style information prevail to the theme’s, so you must use
     * a {@link Gtk.StyleProvider} with the `GTK_STYLE_PROVIDER_PRIORITY_APPLICATION`
     * priority, keep in mind that the user settings in
     * `XDG_CONFIG_HOME/gtk-3.0/gtk.css` will
     * still take precedence over your changes, as it uses the
     * `GTK_STYLE_PROVIDER_PRIORITY_USER` priority.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class StyleContext extends GObject.Object {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<StyleContext>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * @default Gtk.TextDirection.LTR
         */
        get direction(): TextDirection;
        set direction(val: TextDirection);

        get paint_clock(): Gdk.FrameClock;
        set paint_clock(val: Gdk.FrameClock);

        get paintClock(): Gdk.FrameClock;
        set paintClock(val: Gdk.FrameClock);

        /**
         * Sets or gets the style context’s parent. See `gtk_style_context_set_parent()`
         * for details.
         * @since 3.4
         */
        get parent(): StyleContext | null;
        set parent(val: StyleContext | null);

        get screen(): Gdk.Screen;
        set screen(val: Gdk.Screen);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: StyleContext.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        parent_object: GObject.Object;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<StyleContext.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): StyleContext;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof StyleContext.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, StyleContext.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof StyleContext.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, StyleContext.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof StyleContext.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<StyleContext.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Static methods
        /**
         * Adds a global style provider to `screen`, which will be used
         * in style construction for all `GtkStyleContexts` under `screen`.
         * 
         * GTK+ uses this to make styling information from {@link Gtk.Settings}
         * available.
         * 
         * Note: If both priorities are the same, A {@link Gtk.StyleProvider}
         * added through `gtk_style_context_add_provider()` takes precedence
         * over another added through this function.
         * @param screen a {@link Gdk.Screen}
         * @param provider a {@link Gtk.StyleProvider}
         * @param priority the priority of the style provider. The lower            it is, the earlier it will be used in the style            construction. Typically this will be in the range            between `GTK_STYLE_PROVIDER_PRIORITY_FALLBACK` and            `GTK_STYLE_PROVIDER_PRIORITY_USER`
         */
        static add_provider_for_screen(screen: Gdk.Screen, provider: StyleProvider, priority: number): void;

        /**
         * Removes `provider` from the global style providers list in `screen`.
         * @param screen a {@link Gdk.Screen}
         * @param provider a {@link Gtk.StyleProvider}
         */
        static remove_provider_for_screen(screen: Gdk.Screen, provider: StyleProvider): void;

        /**
         * This function recomputes the styles for all widgets under a particular
         * {@link Gdk.Screen}. This is useful when some global parameter has changed that
         * affects the appearance of all widgets, because when a widget gets a new
         * style, it will both redraw and recompute any cached information about
         * its appearance. As an example, it is used when the color scheme changes
         * in the related {@link Gtk.Settings} object.
         * @param screen a {@link Gdk.Screen}
         */
        static reset_widgets(screen: Gdk.Screen): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_changed(): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Adds a style class to `context`, so posterior calls to
         * `gtk_style_context_get()` or any of the gtk_render_*()
         * functions will make use of this new class for styling.
         * 
         * In the CSS file format, a {@link Gtk.Entry} defining a “search”
         * class, would be matched by:
         * 
         * 
         * ``` <!-- language="CSS" -->
         * entry.search { ... }
         * ```
         * 
         * 
         * While any widget defining a “search” class would be
         * matched by:
         * 
         * ``` <!-- language="CSS" -->
         * .search { ... }
         * ```
         * 
         * @param class_name class name to use in styling
         */
        add_class(class_name: string): void;

        /**
         * Adds a style provider to `context`, to be used in style construction.
         * Note that a style provider added by this function only affects
         * the style of the widget to which `context` belongs. If you want
         * to affect the style of all widgets, use
         * `gtk_style_context_add_provider_for_screen()`.
         * 
         * Note: If both priorities are the same, a {@link Gtk.StyleProvider}
         * added through this function takes precedence over another added
         * through `gtk_style_context_add_provider_for_screen()`.
         * @param provider a {@link Gtk.StyleProvider}
         * @param priority the priority of the style provider. The lower            it is, the earlier it will be used in the style            construction. Typically this will be in the range            between `GTK_STYLE_PROVIDER_PRIORITY_FALLBACK` and            `GTK_STYLE_PROVIDER_PRIORITY_USER`
         */
        add_provider(provider: StyleProvider, priority: number): void;

        /**
         * Adds a region to `context`, so posterior calls to
         * `gtk_style_context_get()` or any of the gtk_render_*()
         * functions will make use of this new region for styling.
         * 
         * In the CSS file format, a {@link Gtk.TreeView} defining a “row”
         * region, would be matched by:
         * 
         * 
         * ``` <!-- language="CSS" -->
         * treeview row { ... }
         * ```
         * 
         * 
         * Pseudo-classes are used for matching `flags`, so the two
         * following rules:
         * 
         * ``` <!-- language="CSS" -->
         * treeview row:nth-child(even) { ... }
         * treeview row:nth-child(odd) { ... }
         * ```
         * 
         * 
         * would apply to even and odd rows, respectively.
         * 
         * Region names must only contain lowercase letters
         * and “-”, starting always with a lowercase letter.
         * @param region_name region name to use in styling
         * @param flags flags that apply to the region
         */
        add_region(region_name: string, flags: RegionFlags): void;

        /**
         * Stops all running animations for `region_id` and all animatable
         * regions underneath.
         * 
         * A `null` `region_id` will stop all ongoing animations in `context`,
         * when dealing with a {@link Gtk.StyleContext} obtained through
         * `gtk_widget_get_style_context()`, this is normally done for you
         * in all circumstances you would expect all widget to be stopped,
         * so this should be only used in complex widgets with different
         * animatable regions.
         * @param region_id animatable region to stop, or `null`.     See `gtk_style_context_push_animatable_region()`
         */
        cancel_animations(region_id: null): void;

        /**
         * Gets the background color for a given state.
         * 
         * This function is far less useful than it seems, and it should not be used in
         * newly written code. CSS has no concept of "background color", as a background
         * can be an image, or a gradient, or any other pattern including solid colors.
         * 
         * The only reason why you would call `gtk_style_context_get_background_color()` is
         * to use the returned value to draw the background with it; the correct way to
         * achieve this result is to use `gtk_render_background()` instead, along with CSS
         * style classes to modify the color to be rendered.
         * @param state state to retrieve the color for
         */
        get_background_color(state: StateFlags): Gdk.RGBA;

        /**
         * Gets the border for a given state as a {@link Gtk.Border}.
         * 
         * See `gtk_style_context_get_property()` and
         * #GTK_STYLE_PROPERTY_BORDER_WIDTH for details.
         * @param state state to retrieve the border for
         */
        get_border(state: StateFlags): Border;

        /**
         * Gets the border color for a given state.
         * @param state state to retrieve the color for
         */
        get_border_color(state: StateFlags): Gdk.RGBA;

        /**
         * Gets the foreground color for a given state.
         * 
         * See `gtk_style_context_get_property()` and
         * #GTK_STYLE_PROPERTY_COLOR for details.
         * @param state state to retrieve the color for
         */
        get_color(state: StateFlags): Gdk.RGBA;

        /**
         * Returns the widget direction used for rendering.
         * @returns the widget direction
         */
        get_direction(): TextDirection;

        /**
         * Returns the font description for a given state. The returned
         * object is const and will remain valid until the
         * {@link Gtk.StyleContext.SignalSignatures.changed | Gtk.StyleContext::changed} signal happens.
         * @param state state to retrieve the font for
         * @returns the {@link Pango.FontDescription} for the given          state.  This object is owned by GTK+ and should not be          freed.
         */
        get_font(state: StateFlags): Pango.FontDescription;

        /**
         * Returns the {@link Gdk.FrameClock} to which `context` is attached.
         * @returns a {@link Gdk.FrameClock}, or `null`  if `context` does not have an attached frame clock.
         */
        get_frame_clock(): Gdk.FrameClock | null;

        /**
         * Returns the sides where rendered elements connect visually with others.
         * @returns the junction sides
         */
        get_junction_sides(): JunctionSides;

        /**
         * Gets the margin for a given state as a {@link Gtk.Border}.
         * See `gtk_style_property_get()` and #GTK_STYLE_PROPERTY_MARGIN
         * for details.
         * @param state state to retrieve the border for
         */
        get_margin(state: StateFlags): Border;

        /**
         * Gets the padding for a given state as a {@link Gtk.Border}.
         * See `gtk_style_context_get()` and #GTK_STYLE_PROPERTY_PADDING
         * for details.
         * @param state state to retrieve the padding for
         */
        get_padding(state: StateFlags): Border;

        /**
         * Gets the parent context set via `gtk_style_context_set_parent()`.
         * See that function for details.
         * @returns the parent context or `null`
         */
        get_parent(): StyleContext | null;

        /**
         * Returns the widget path used for style matching.
         * @returns A {@link Gtk.WidgetPath}
         */
        get_path(): WidgetPath;

        /**
         * Gets a style property from `context` for the given state.
         * 
         * Note that not all CSS properties that are supported by GTK+ can be
         * retrieved in this way, since they may not be representable as {@link GObject.Value}.
         * GTK+ defines macros for a number of properties that can be used
         * with this function.
         * 
         * Note that passing a state other than the current state of `context`
         * is not recommended unless the style context has been saved with
         * `gtk_style_context_save()`.
         * 
         * When `value` is no longer needed, `g_value_unset()` must be called
         * to free any allocated memory.
         * @param property style property name
         * @param state state to retrieve the property value for
         */
        get_property(property: string, state: StateFlags): unknown;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
    // Conflicted with GObject.Object.get_property
        get_property(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Returns the scale used for assets.
         * @returns the scale
         */
        get_scale(): number;

        /**
         * Returns the {@link Gdk.Screen} to which `context` is attached.
         * @returns a {@link Gdk.Screen}.
         */
        get_screen(): Gdk.Screen;

        /**
         * Queries the location in the CSS where `property` was defined for the
         * current `context`. Note that the state to be queried is taken from
         * `gtk_style_context_get_state()`.
         * 
         * If the location is not available, `null` will be returned. The
         * location might not be available for various reasons, such as the
         * property being overridden, `property` not naming a supported CSS
         * property or tracking of definitions being disabled for performance
         * reasons.
         * 
         * Shorthand CSS properties cannot be queried for a location and will
         * always return `null`.
         * @param property style property name
         * @returns `null` or the section where a value for `property` was defined
         */
        get_section(property: string): CssSection | null;

        /**
         * Returns the state used for style matching.
         * 
         * This method should only be used to retrieve the {@link Gtk.StateFlags}
         * to pass to {@link Gtk.StyleContext} methods, like `gtk_style_context_get_padding()`.
         * If you need to retrieve the current state of a {@link Gtk.Widget}, use
         * `gtk_widget_get_state_flags()`.
         * @returns the state flags
         */
        get_state(): StateFlags;

        /**
         * Gets the value for a widget style property.
         * 
         * When `value` is no longer needed, `g_value_unset()` must be called
         * to free any allocated memory.
         * @param property_name the name of the widget style property
         * @param value Return location for the property value
         */
        get_style_property(property_name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;

        /**
         * Returns `true` if `context` currently has defined the
         * given class name.
         * @param class_name a class name
         * @returns `true` if `context` has `class_name` defined
         */
        has_class(class_name: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns `true` if `context` has the region defined.
         * If `flags_return` is not `null`, it is set to the flags
         * affecting the region.
         * @param region_name a region name
         * @returns `true` if region is defined
         */
        has_region(region_name: string): [boolean, RegionFlags | null];

        /**
         * Invalidates `context` style information, so it will be reconstructed
         * again. It is useful if you modify the `context` and need the new
         * information immediately.
         */
        invalidate(): void;

        /**
         * Returns the list of classes currently defined in `context`.
         * @returns a {@link GLib.List} of          strings with the currently defined classes. The contents          of the list are owned by GTK+, but you must free the list          itself with `g_list_free()` when you are done with it.
         */
        list_classes(): string[];

        /**
         * Returns the list of regions currently defined in `context`.
         * @returns a {@link GLib.List} of          strings with the currently defined regions. The contents          of the list are owned by GTK+, but you must free the list          itself with `g_list_free()` when you are done with it.
         */
        list_regions(): string[];

        /**
         * Looks up and resolves a color name in the `context` color map.
         * @param color_name color name to lookup
         * @returns `true` if `color_name` was found and resolved, `false` otherwise
         */
        lookup_color(color_name: string): [boolean, Gdk.RGBA];

        /**
         * Looks up `stock_id` in the icon factories associated to `context` and
         * the default icon factory, returning an icon set if found, otherwise
         * `null`.
         * @param stock_id an icon name
         * @returns The looked up %GtkIconSet, or `null`
         */
        lookup_icon_set(stock_id: string): IconSet | null;

        /**
         * Notifies a state change on `context`, so if the current style makes use
         * of transition animations, one will be started so all rendered elements
         * under `region_id` are animated for state `state` being set to value
         * `state_value`.
         * 
         * The `window` parameter is used in order to invalidate the rendered area
         * as the animation runs, so make sure it is the same window that is being
         * rendered on by the gtk_render_*() functions.
         * 
         * If `region_id` is `null`, all rendered elements using `context` will be
         * affected by this state transition.
         * 
         * As a practical example, a {@link Gtk.Button} notifying a state transition on
         * the prelight state:
         * 
         * ``` <!-- language="C" -->
         * gtk_style_context_notify_state_change (context,
         *                                        gtk_widget_get_window (widget),
         *                                        NULL,
         *                                        GTK_STATE_PRELIGHT,
         *                                        button->in_button);
         * ```
         * 
         * 
         * Can be handled in the CSS file like this:
         * 
         * ``` <!-- language="CSS" -->
         * button {
         *     background-color: #f00
         * }
         * 
         * button:hover {
         *     background-color: #fff;
         *     transition: 200ms linear
         * }
         * ```
         * 
         * 
         * This combination will animate the button background from red to white
         * if a pointer enters the button, and back to red if the pointer leaves
         * the button.
         * 
         * Note that `state` is used when finding the transition parameters, which
         * is why the style places the transition under the :hover pseudo-class.
         * @param window a {@link Gdk.Window}
         * @param region_id animatable region to notify on, or `null`.     See `gtk_style_context_push_animatable_region()`
         * @param state state to trigger transition for
         * @param state_value `true` if `state` is the state we are changing to,     `false` if we are changing away from it
         */
        notify_state_change(window: Gdk.Window, region_id: null, state: StateType, state_value: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Pops an animatable region from `context`.
         * See `gtk_style_context_push_animatable_region()`.
         */
        pop_animatable_region(): void;

        /**
         * Pushes an animatable region, so all further gtk_render_*() calls between
         * this call and the following `gtk_style_context_pop_animatable_region()`
         * will potentially show transition animations for this region if
         * `gtk_style_context_notify_state_change()` is called for a given state,
         * and the current theme/style defines transition animations for state
         * changes.
         * 
         * The `region_id` used must be unique in `context` so the themes
         * can uniquely identify rendered elements subject to a state transition.
         * @param region_id unique identifier for the animatable region
         */
        push_animatable_region(region_id: null): void;

        /**
         * Removes `class_name` from `context`.
         * @param class_name class name to remove
         */
        remove_class(class_name: string): void;

        /**
         * Removes `provider` from the style providers list in `context`.
         * @param provider a {@link Gtk.StyleProvider}
         */
        remove_provider(provider: StyleProvider): void;

        /**
         * Removes a region from `context`.
         * @param region_name region name to unset
         */
        remove_region(region_name: string): void;

        /**
         * Restores `context` state to a previous stage.
         * See `gtk_style_context_save()`.
         */
        restore(): void;

        /**
         * Saves the `context` state, so temporary modifications done through
         * `gtk_style_context_add_class()`, `gtk_style_context_remove_class()`,
         * `gtk_style_context_set_state()`, etc. can quickly be reverted
         * in one go through `gtk_style_context_restore()`.
         * 
         * The matching call to `gtk_style_context_restore()` must be done
         * before GTK returns to the main loop.
         */
        save(): void;

        /**
         * This function is analogous to `gdk_window_scroll()`, and
         * should be called together with it so the invalidation
         * areas for any ongoing animation are scrolled together
         * with it.
         * @param window a {@link Gdk.Window} used previously in          `gtk_style_context_notify_state_change()`
         * @param dx Amount to scroll in the X axis
         * @param dy Amount to scroll in the Y axis
         */
        scroll_animations(window: Gdk.Window, dx: number, dy: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the background of `window` to the background pattern or
         * color specified in `context` for its current state.
         * @param window a {@link Gdk.Window}
         */
        set_background(window: Gdk.Window): void;

        /**
         * Sets the reading direction for rendering purposes.
         * 
         * If you are using a {@link Gtk.StyleContext} returned from
         * `gtk_widget_get_style_context()`, you do not need to
         * call this yourself.
         * @param direction the new direction.
         */
        set_direction(direction: TextDirection): void;

        /**
         * Attaches `context` to the given frame clock.
         * 
         * The frame clock is used for the timing of animations.
         * 
         * If you are using a {@link Gtk.StyleContext} returned from
         * `gtk_widget_get_style_context()`, you do not need to
         * call this yourself.
         * @param frame_clock a {@link Gdk.FrameClock}
         */
        set_frame_clock(frame_clock: Gdk.FrameClock): void;

        /**
         * Sets the sides where rendered elements (mostly through
         * `gtk_render_frame()`) will visually connect with other visual elements.
         * 
         * This is merely a hint that may or may not be honored
         * by themes.
         * 
         * Container widgets are expected to set junction hints as appropriate
         * for their children, so it should not normally be necessary to call
         * this function manually.
         * @param sides sides where rendered elements are visually connected to     other elements
         */
        set_junction_sides(sides: JunctionSides): void;

        /**
         * Sets the parent style context for `context`. The parent style
         * context is used to implement
         * [inheritance](http://www.w3.org/TR/css3-cascade/#inheritance)
         * of properties.
         * 
         * If you are using a {@link Gtk.StyleContext} returned from
         * `gtk_widget_get_style_context()`, the parent will be set for you.
         * @param parent the new parent or `null`
         */
        set_parent(parent: StyleContext | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.WidgetPath} used for style matching. As a
         * consequence, the style will be regenerated to match
         * the new given path.
         * 
         * If you are using a {@link Gtk.StyleContext} returned from
         * `gtk_widget_get_style_context()`, you do not need to call
         * this yourself.
         * @param path a {@link Gtk.WidgetPath}
         */
        set_path(path: WidgetPath): void;

        /**
         * Sets the scale to use when getting image assets for the style.
         * @param scale scale
         */
        set_scale(scale: number): void;

        /**
         * Attaches `context` to the given screen.
         * 
         * The screen is used to add style information from “global” style
         * providers, such as the screen’s {@link Gtk.Settings} instance.
         * 
         * If you are using a {@link Gtk.StyleContext} returned from
         * `gtk_widget_get_style_context()`, you do not need to
         * call this yourself.
         * @param screen a {@link Gdk.Screen}
         */
        set_screen(screen: Gdk.Screen): void;

        /**
         * Sets the state to be used for style matching.
         * @param flags state to represent
         */
        set_state(flags: StateFlags): void;

        /**
         * Returns `true` if there is a transition animation running for the
         * current region (see `gtk_style_context_push_animatable_region()`).
         * 
         * If `progress` is not `null`, the animation progress will be returned
         * there, 0.0 means the state is closest to being unset, while 1.0 means
         * it’s closest to being set. This means transition animation will
         * run from 0 to 1 when `state` is being set and from 1 to 0 when
         * it’s being unset.
         * @param state a widget state
         * @returns `true` if there is a running transition animation for `state`.
         */
        state_is_running(state: StateType): [boolean, number];

        /**
         * Converts the style context into a string representation.
         * 
         * The string representation always includes information about
         * the name, state, id, visibility and style classes of the CSS
         * node that is backing `context`. Depending on the flags, more
         * information may be included.
         * 
         * This function is intended for testing and debugging of the
         * CSS implementation in GTK+. There are no guarantees about
         * the format of the returned string, it may change.
         * @param flags Flags that determine what to print
         * @returns a newly allocated string representing `context`
         */
        to_string(flags: StyleContextPrintFlags): string;
    }


    namespace StyleProperties {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends GObject.Object.SignalSignatures {}

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.Object.ConstructorProps, StyleProvider.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * GtkStyleProperties provides the storage for style information
     * that is used by {@link Gtk.StyleContext} and other {@link Gtk.StyleProvider}
     * implementations.
     * 
     * Before style properties can be stored in GtkStyleProperties, they
     * must be registered with `gtk_style_properties_register_property()`.
     * 
     * Unless you are writing a {@link Gtk.StyleProvider} implementation, you
     * are unlikely to use this API directly, as `gtk_style_context_get()`
     * and its variants are the preferred way to access styling information
     * from widget implementations and theming engine implementations
     * should use the APIs provided by {@link Gtk.ThemingEngine} instead.
     * 
     * {@link Gtk.StyleProperties} has been deprecated in GTK 3.16. The CSS
     * machinery does not use it anymore and all users of this object
     * have been deprecated.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class StyleProperties extends GObject.Object implements StyleProvider {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<StyleProperties>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: StyleProperties.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<StyleProperties.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): StyleProperties;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof StyleProperties.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, StyleProperties.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof StyleProperties.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, StyleProperties.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof StyleProperties.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<StyleProperties.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Clears all style information from `props`.
         */
        clear(): void;

        /**
         * Gets a style property from `props` for the given state. When done with `value`,
         * `g_value_unset()` needs to be called to free any allocated memory.
         * @param property style property name
         * @param state state to retrieve the property value for
         * @returns `true` if the property exists in `props`, `false` otherwise
         */
        get_property(property: string, state: StateFlags): [boolean, unknown];

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
    // Conflicted with GObject.Object.get_property
        get_property(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Returns the symbolic color that is mapped
         * to `name`.
         * @param name color name to lookup
         * @returns The mapped color
         */
        lookup_color(name: string): SymbolicColor;

        /**
         * Maps `color` so it can be referenced by `name`. See
         * `gtk_style_properties_lookup_color()`
         * @param name color name
         * @param color {@link Gtk.SymbolicColor} to map `name` to
         */
        map_color(name: string, color: SymbolicColor): void;

        /**
         * Merges into `props` all the style information contained
         * in `props_to_merge`. If `replace` is `true`, the values
         * will be overwritten, if it is `false`, the older values
         * will prevail.
         * @param props_to_merge a second {@link Gtk.StyleProperties}
         * @param replace whether to replace values or not
         */
        merge(props_to_merge: StyleProperties, replace: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets a styling property in `props`.
         * @param property styling property to set
         * @param state state to set the value for
         * @param value new value for the property
         */
        set_property(property: string, state: StateFlags, value: GObject.Value | any): void;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
    // Conflicted with GObject.Object.set_property
        set_property(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Unsets a style property in `props`.
         * @param property property to unset
         * @param state state to unset
         */
        unset_property(property: string, state: StateFlags): void;

        /**
         * Returns the {@link Gtk.IconFactory} defined to be in use for `path`, or `null` if none
         * is defined.
         * @param path {@link Gtk.WidgetPath} to query
         * @returns The icon factory to use for `path`, or `null`
         */
        get_icon_factory(path: WidgetPath): IconFactory | null;

        /**
         * Returns the style settings affecting a widget defined by `path`, or `null` if
         * `provider` doesn’t contemplate styling `path`.
         * @param path {@link Gtk.WidgetPath} to query
         * @returns a {@link Gtk.StyleProperties} containing the style settings affecting `path`
         */
        get_style(path: WidgetPath): StyleProperties | null;

        /**
         * Looks up a widget style property as defined by `provider` for
         * the widget represented by `path`.
         * @param path {@link Gtk.WidgetPath} to query
         * @param state state to query the style property for
         * @param pspec The {@link GObject.ParamSpec} to query
         * @returns `true` if the property was found and has a value, `false` otherwise
         */
        get_style_property(path: WidgetPath, state: StateFlags, pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): [boolean, unknown];

        /**
         * Returns the {@link Gtk.IconFactory} defined to be in use for `path`, or `null` if none
         * is defined.
         * @param path {@link Gtk.WidgetPath} to query
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_icon_factory(path: WidgetPath): IconFactory | null;

        /**
         * Returns the style settings affecting a widget defined by `path`, or `null` if
         * `provider` doesn’t contemplate styling `path`.
         * @param path {@link Gtk.WidgetPath} to query
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_style(path: WidgetPath): StyleProperties | null;

        /**
         * Looks up a widget style property as defined by `provider` for
         * the widget represented by `path`.
         * @param path {@link Gtk.WidgetPath} to query
         * @param state state to query the style property for
         * @param pspec The {@link GObject.ParamSpec} to query
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_style_property(path: WidgetPath, state: StateFlags, pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): [boolean, GObject.Value | any];
    }


    namespace Switch {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Widget.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * The ::activate signal on GtkSwitch is an action signal and
             * emitting it causes the switch to animate.
             * Applications should never connect to this signal, but use the
             * notify::active signal.
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-first
             */
            activate: () => void;
            /**
             * The ::state-set signal on GtkSwitch is emitted to change the underlying
             * state. It is emitted when the user changes the switch position. The
             * default handler keeps the state in sync with the {@link Gtk.Switch.active}
             * property.
             * 
             * To implement delayed state change, applications can connect to this signal,
             * initiate the change of the underlying state, and call `gtk_switch_set_state()`
             * when the underlying state change is complete. The signal handler should
             * return `true` to prevent the default handler from running.
             * 
             * Visually, the underlying state is represented by the trough color of
             * the switch, while the {@link Gtk.Switch.active} property is represented by the
             * position of the switch.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.14
             * @run-last
             */
            "state-set": (arg0: boolean) => boolean | void;
            "notify::active": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::state": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::action-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::action-target": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::related-action": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-action-appearance": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Widget.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Actionable.ConstructorProps, Activatable.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {
            active: boolean;
            state: boolean;
        }
    }

    /**
     * {@link Gtk.Switch} is a widget that has two states: on or off. The user can control
     * which state should be active by clicking the empty area, or by dragging the
     * handle.
     * 
     * GtkSwitch can also handle situations where the underlying state changes with
     * a delay. See {@link Gtk.Switch.SignalSignatures.state_set | Gtk.Switch::state-set} for details.
     * 
     * # CSS nodes
     * 
     * 
     * ```
     * switch
     * ╰── slider
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * GtkSwitch has two css nodes, the main node with the name switch and a subnode
     * named slider. Neither of them is using any style classes.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class Switch extends Widget implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Actionable, Activatable, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<Switch>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * Whether the {@link Gtk.Switch} widget is in its on or off state.
         * @default false
         */
        get active(): boolean;
        set active(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The backend state that is controlled by the switch.
         * See {@link Gtk.Switch.SignalSignatures.state_set | Gtk.Switch::state-set} for details.
         * @since 3.14
         * @default false
         */
        get state(): boolean;
        set state(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: Switch.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<Switch.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): Switch;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof Switch.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Switch.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof Switch.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Switch.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof Switch.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<Switch.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * An action signal and emitting it causes the switch to animate.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_activate(): void;

        /**
         * Class handler for the ::state-set signal.
         * @param state 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_state_set(state: boolean): boolean;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Gets whether the {@link Gtk.Switch} is in its “on” or “off” state.
         * @returns `true` if the {@link Gtk.Switch} is active, and `false` otherwise
         */
        get_active(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the underlying state of the {@link Gtk.Switch}.
         * @returns the underlying state
         */
        get_state(): boolean;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
    // Conflicted with Gtk.Widget.get_state
        get_state(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Changes the state of `sw` to the desired one.
         * @param is_active `true` if `sw` should be active, and `false` otherwise
         */
        set_active(is_active: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the underlying state of the {@link Gtk.Switch}.
         * 
         * Normally, this is the same as {@link Gtk.Switch.active}, unless the switch
         * is set up for delayed state changes. This function is typically
         * called from a {@link Gtk.Switch.SignalSignatures.state_set | Gtk.Switch::state-set} signal handler.
         * 
         * See {@link Gtk.Switch.SignalSignatures.state_set | Gtk.Switch::state-set} for details.
         * @param state the new state
         */
        set_state(state: boolean): void;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
    // Conflicted with Gtk.Widget.set_state
        set_state(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * @default null
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable
         */
        get action_name(): string | null;
        set action_name(val: string | null);

        /**
         * @default null
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable
         */
        get actionName(): string | null;
        set actionName(val: string | null);

        /** @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable */
        get action_target(): GLib.Variant;
        set action_target(val: GLib.Variant);

        /** @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable */
        get actionTarget(): GLib.Variant;
        set actionTarget(val: GLib.Variant);

        /**
         * The action that this activatable will activate and receive
         * updates from for various states and possibly appearance.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the this property and
         * > call `gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action()` when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get related_action(): Action;
        set related_action(val: Action);

        /**
         * The action that this activatable will activate and receive
         * updates from for various states and possibly appearance.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the this property and
         * > call `gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action()` when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get relatedAction(): Action;
        set relatedAction(val: Action);

        /**
         * Whether this activatable should reset its layout
         * and appearance when setting the related action or when
         * the action changes appearance.
         * 
         * See the {@link Gtk.Action} documentation directly to find which properties
         * should be ignored by the {@link Gtk.Activatable} when this property is `false`.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle this property
         * > and call `gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties()` on the activatable
         * > widget when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get use_action_appearance(): boolean;
        set use_action_appearance(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether this activatable should reset its layout
         * and appearance when setting the related action or when
         * the action changes appearance.
         * 
         * See the {@link Gtk.Action} documentation directly to find which properties
         * should be ignored by the {@link Gtk.Activatable} when this property is `false`.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle this property
         * > and call `gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties()` on the activatable
         * > widget when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get useActionAppearance(): boolean;
        set useActionAppearance(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Gets the action name for `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_name()` for more information.
         * @returns the action name, or `null` if none is set
         */
        get_action_name(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the current target value of `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_target_value()` for more information.
         * @returns the current target value
         */
        get_action_target_value(): GLib.Variant;

        /**
         * Specifies the name of the action with which this widget should be
         * associated.  If `action_name` is `null` then the widget will be
         * unassociated from any previous action.
         * 
         * Usually this function is used when the widget is located (or will be
         * located) within the hierarchy of a {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow}.
         * 
         * Names are of the form “win.save” or “app.quit” for actions on the
         * containing {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow} or its associated {@link Gtk.Application},
         * respectively.  This is the same form used for actions in the {@link Gio.Menu}
         * associated with the window.
         * @param action_name an action name, or `null`
         */
        set_action_name(action_name: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the target value of an actionable widget.
         * 
         * If `target_value` is `null` then the target value is unset.
         * 
         * The target value has two purposes.  First, it is used as the
         * parameter to activation of the action associated with the
         * {@link Gtk.Actionable} widget. Second, it is used to determine if the widget
         * should be rendered as “active” — the widget is active if the state
         * is equal to the given target.
         * 
         * Consider the example of associating a set of buttons with a {@link Gio.Action}
         * with string state in a typical “radio button” situation.  Each button
         * will be associated with the same action, but with a different target
         * value for that action.  Clicking on a particular button will activate
         * the action with the target of that button, which will typically cause
         * the action’s state to change to that value.  Since the action’s state
         * is now equal to the target value of the button, the button will now
         * be rendered as active (and the other buttons, with different targets,
         * rendered inactive).
         * @param target_value a {@link GLib.Variant} to set as the target value, or `null`
         */
        set_action_target_value(target_value: GLib.Variant | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the action-name and associated string target value of an
         * actionable widget.
         * 
         * `detailed_action_name` is a string in the format accepted by
         * `g_action_parse_detailed_name()`.
         * 
         * (Note that prior to version 3.22.25,
         * this function is only usable for actions with a simple "s" target, and
         * `detailed_action_name` must be of the form `"action::target"` where
         * `action` is the action name and `target` is the string to use
         * as the target.)
         * @param detailed_action_name the detailed action name
         */
        set_detailed_action_name(detailed_action_name: string): void;

        /**
         * Gets the action name for `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_name()` for more information.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_action_name(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the current target value of `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_target_value()` for more information.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_action_target_value(): GLib.Variant;

        /**
         * Specifies the name of the action with which this widget should be
         * associated.  If `action_name` is `null` then the widget will be
         * unassociated from any previous action.
         * 
         * Usually this function is used when the widget is located (or will be
         * located) within the hierarchy of a {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow}.
         * 
         * Names are of the form “win.save” or “app.quit” for actions on the
         * containing {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow} or its associated {@link Gtk.Application},
         * respectively.  This is the same form used for actions in the {@link Gio.Menu}
         * associated with the window.
         * @param action_name an action name, or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_action_name(action_name: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the target value of an actionable widget.
         * 
         * If `target_value` is `null` then the target value is unset.
         * 
         * The target value has two purposes.  First, it is used as the
         * parameter to activation of the action associated with the
         * {@link Gtk.Actionable} widget. Second, it is used to determine if the widget
         * should be rendered as “active” — the widget is active if the state
         * is equal to the given target.
         * 
         * Consider the example of associating a set of buttons with a {@link Gio.Action}
         * with string state in a typical “radio button” situation.  Each button
         * will be associated with the same action, but with a different target
         * value for that action.  Clicking on a particular button will activate
         * the action with the target of that button, which will typically cause
         * the action’s state to change to that value.  Since the action’s state
         * is now equal to the target value of the button, the button will now
         * be rendered as active (and the other buttons, with different targets,
         * rendered inactive).
         * @param target_value a {@link GLib.Variant} to set as the target value, or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_action_target_value(target_value: GLib.Variant | null): void;

        /**
         * This is a utility function for {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors.
         * 
         * When implementing {@link Gtk.Activatable} you must call this when
         * handling changes of the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action}, and
         * you must also use this to break references in {@link GObject.Object}->dispose().
         * 
         * This function adds a reference to the currently set related
         * action for you, it also makes sure the {@link Gtk.Activatable}->update()
         * method is called when the related {@link Gtk.Action} properties change
         * and registers to the action’s proxy list.
         * 
         * > Be careful to call this before setting the local
         * > copy of the {@link Gtk.Action} property, since this function uses
         * > `gtk_activatable_get_related_action()` to retrieve the
         * > previous action.
         * @param action the {@link Gtk.Action} to set
         */
        do_set_related_action(action: Action): void;

        /**
         * Gets the related {@link Gtk.Action} for `activatable`.
         * @returns the related {@link Gtk.Action} if one is set.
         */
        get_related_action(): Action;

        /**
         * Gets whether this activatable should reset its layout
         * and appearance when setting the related action or when
         * the action changes appearance.
         * @returns whether `activatable` uses its actions appearance.
         */
        get_use_action_appearance(): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the related action on the `activatable` object.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action}
         * > property and call `gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action()` when it changes.
         * @param action the {@link Gtk.Action} to set
         */
        set_related_action(action: Action): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether this activatable should reset its layout and appearance
         * when setting the related action or when the action changes appearance
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} property and call
         * > `gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties()` to update `activatable`
         * > if needed.
         * @param use_appearance whether to use the actions appearance
         */
        set_use_action_appearance(use_appearance: boolean): void;

        /**
         * This is called to update the activatable completely, this is called
         * internally when the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action} property is set
         * or unset and by the implementing class when
         * {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} changes.
         * @param action the related {@link Gtk.Action} or `null`
         */
        sync_action_properties(action: Action | null): void;

        /**
         * This is called to update the activatable completely, this is called
         * internally when the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action} property is set
         * or unset and by the implementing class when
         * {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} changes.
         * @param action the related {@link Gtk.Action} or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_sync_action_properties(action: Action | null): void;

        /**
         * Called to update the activatable when its related action’s properties change.
         * You must check the {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} property only apply action
         * properties that are meant to effect the appearance accordingly.
         * @param action 
         * @param property_name 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_update(action: Action, property_name: string): void;

        /**
         * Adds a child to `buildable`. `type` is an optional string
         * describing how the child should be added.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child to add
         * @param type kind of child or `null`
         */
        add_child(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object, type: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Constructs a child of `buildable` with the name `name`.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} calls this function if a “constructor” has been
         * specified in the UI definition.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param name name of child to construct
         * @returns the constructed child
         */
        construct_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, name: string): T;

        /**
         * This is similar to `gtk_buildable_parser_finished()` but is
         * called once for each custom tag handled by the `buildable`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname the name of the tag
         * @param data user data created in custom_tag_start
         */
        custom_finished(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
         * the buildable.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @param data user data that will be passed in to parser functions
         */
        custom_tag_end(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called for each unknown element under `<child>`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @returns `true` if a object has a custom implementation, `false`          if it doesn't.
         */
        custom_tag_start(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string): [boolean, GLib.MarkupParser, null];

        /**
         * Get the internal child called `childname` of the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param childname name of child
         * @returns the internal child of the buildable object
         */
        get_internal_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, childname: string): T;

        /**
         * Gets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} sets the name based on the
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI]
         * used to construct the `buildable`.
         * @returns the name set with `gtk_buildable_set_name()`
         */
        get_name(): string;

        /**
         * Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI].
         * Note that this will be called once for each time
         * `gtk_builder_add_from_file()` or `gtk_builder_add_from_string()`
         * is called on a builder.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         */
        parser_finished(builder: Builder): void;

        /**
         * Sets the property name `name` to `value` on the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param name name of property
         * @param value value of property
         */
        set_buildable_property(builder: Builder, name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;

        /**
         * Sets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * @param name name to set
         */
        set_name(name: string): void;

        /**
         * Adds a child to `buildable`. `type` is an optional string
         * describing how the child should be added.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child to add
         * @param type kind of child or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add_child(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object, type: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Constructs a child of `buildable` with the name `name`.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} calls this function if a “constructor” has been
         * specified in the UI definition.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param name name of child to construct
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_construct_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, name: string): T;

        /**
         * This is similar to `gtk_buildable_parser_finished()` but is
         * called once for each custom tag handled by the `buildable`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname the name of the tag
         * @param data user data created in custom_tag_start
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_finished(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
         * the buildable.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @param data user data that will be passed in to parser functions
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_tag_end(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called for each unknown element under `<child>`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_tag_start(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string): [boolean, GLib.MarkupParser, never];

        /**
         * Get the internal child called `childname` of the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param childname name of child
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_internal_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, childname: string): T;

        /**
         * Gets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} sets the name based on the
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI]
         * used to construct the `buildable`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_name(): string;

        /**
         * Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI].
         * Note that this will be called once for each time
         * `gtk_builder_add_from_file()` or `gtk_builder_add_from_string()`
         * is called on a builder.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_parser_finished(builder: Builder): void;

        /**
         * Sets the property name `name` to `value` on the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param name name of property
         * @param value value of property
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_buildable_property(builder: Builder, name: string, value: unknown): void;

        /**
         * Sets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * @param name name to set
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_name(name: string): void;
    }


    namespace SwitchAccessible {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends WidgetAccessible.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-layer": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-mdi-zorder": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-help-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-hypertext-nlinks": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption-object": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-summary": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends WidgetAccessible.ConstructorProps, Atk.Action.ConstructorProps, Atk.Component.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class SwitchAccessible extends WidgetAccessible implements Atk.Action, Atk.Component {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<SwitchAccessible>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: SwitchAccessible.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<SwitchAccessible.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof SwitchAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, SwitchAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof SwitchAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, SwitchAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof SwitchAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<SwitchAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        /**
         * Perform the specified action on the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns `true` if success, `false` otherwise
         */
        do_action(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns a description of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns a description string, or `null` if `action` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_description(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.get_description
        get_description(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Gets the keybinding which can be used to activate this action, if one
         * exists. The string returned should contain localized, human-readable,
         * key sequences as they would appear when displayed on screen. It must
         * be in the format "mnemonic;sequence;shortcut".
         * 
         * - The mnemonic key activates the object if it is presently enabled onscreen.
         *   This typically corresponds to the underlined letter within the widget.
         *   Example: "n" in a traditional "New..." menu item or the "a" in "Apply" for
         *   a button.
         * - The sequence is the full list of keys which invoke the action even if the
         *   relevant element is not currently shown on screen. For instance, for a menu
         *   item the sequence is the keybindings used to open the parent menus before
         *   invoking. The sequence string is colon-delimited. Example: "Alt+F:N" in a
         *   traditional "New..." menu item.
         * - The shortcut, if it exists, will invoke the same action without showing
         *   the component or its enclosing menus or dialogs. Example: "Ctrl+N" in a
         *   traditional "New..." menu item.
         * 
         * Example: For a traditional "New..." menu item, the expected return value
         * would be: "N;Alt+F:N;Ctrl+N" for the English locale and "N;Alt+D:N;Strg+N"
         * for the German locale. If, hypothetically, this menu item lacked a mnemonic,
         * it would be represented by ";;Ctrl+N" and ";;Strg+N" respectively.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns the keybinding which can be used to activate this action, or `null` if there is no keybinding for this action.
         */
        get_keybinding(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Returns the localized name of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns a name string, or `null` if `action` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_localized_name(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the number of accessible actions available on the object.
         * If there are more than one, the first one is considered the
         * "default" action of the object.
         * @returns a the number of actions, or 0 if `action` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_n_actions(): number;

        /**
         * Returns a non-localized string naming the specified action of the
         * object. This name is generally not descriptive of the end result
         * of the action, but instead names the 'interaction type' which the
         * object supports. By convention, the above strings should be used to
         * represent the actions which correspond to the common point-and-click
         * interaction techniques of the same name: i.e.
         * "click", "press", "release", "drag", "drop", "popup", etc.
         * The "popup" action should be used to pop up a context menu for the
         * object, if one exists.
         * 
         * For technical reasons, some toolkits cannot guarantee that the
         * reported action is actually 'bound' to a nontrivial user event;
         * i.e. the result of some actions via `atk_action_do_action()` may be
         * NIL.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns a name string, or `null` if `action` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_name(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.get_name
        get_name(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Sets a description of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @param desc the description to be assigned to this action
         * @returns a gboolean representing if the description was successfully set;
         */
        set_description(i: number, desc: string): boolean;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.set_description
        set_description(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Perform the specified action on the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_do_action(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns a description of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_description(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         * @virtual
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.vfunc_get_description
        vfunc_get_description(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Gets the keybinding which can be used to activate this action, if one
         * exists. The string returned should contain localized, human-readable,
         * key sequences as they would appear when displayed on screen. It must
         * be in the format "mnemonic;sequence;shortcut".
         * 
         * - The mnemonic key activates the object if it is presently enabled onscreen.
         *   This typically corresponds to the underlined letter within the widget.
         *   Example: "n" in a traditional "New..." menu item or the "a" in "Apply" for
         *   a button.
         * - The sequence is the full list of keys which invoke the action even if the
         *   relevant element is not currently shown on screen. For instance, for a menu
         *   item the sequence is the keybindings used to open the parent menus before
         *   invoking. The sequence string is colon-delimited. Example: "Alt+F:N" in a
         *   traditional "New..." menu item.
         * - The shortcut, if it exists, will invoke the same action without showing
         *   the component or its enclosing menus or dialogs. Example: "Ctrl+N" in a
         *   traditional "New..." menu item.
         * 
         * Example: For a traditional "New..." menu item, the expected return value
         * would be: "N;Alt+F:N;Ctrl+N" for the English locale and "N;Alt+D:N;Strg+N"
         * for the German locale. If, hypothetically, this menu item lacked a mnemonic,
         * it would be represented by ";;Ctrl+N" and ";;Strg+N" respectively.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_keybinding(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Returns the localized name of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_localized_name(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the number of accessible actions available on the object.
         * If there are more than one, the first one is considered the
         * "default" action of the object.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_n_actions(): number;

        /**
         * Returns a non-localized string naming the specified action of the
         * object. This name is generally not descriptive of the end result
         * of the action, but instead names the 'interaction type' which the
         * object supports. By convention, the above strings should be used to
         * represent the actions which correspond to the common point-and-click
         * interaction techniques of the same name: i.e.
         * "click", "press", "release", "drag", "drop", "popup", etc.
         * The "popup" action should be used to pop up a context menu for the
         * object, if one exists.
         * 
         * For technical reasons, some toolkits cannot guarantee that the
         * reported action is actually 'bound' to a nontrivial user event;
         * i.e. the result of some actions via `atk_action_do_action()` may be
         * NIL.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_name(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         * @virtual
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.vfunc_get_name
        vfunc_get_name(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Sets a description of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @param desc the description to be assigned to this action
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_description(i: number, desc: string): boolean;

        /**
         * @param args 
         * @virtual
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.vfunc_set_description
        vfunc_set_description(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Checks whether the specified point is within the extent of the `component`.
         * 
         * Toolkit implementor note: ATK provides a default implementation for
         * this virtual method. In general there are little reason to
         * re-implement it.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @returns `true` or `false` indicating whether the specified point is within the extent of the `component` or not
         */
        contains(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the alpha value (i.e. the opacity) for this
         * `component`, on a scale from 0 (fully transparent) to 1.0
         * (fully opaque).
         * @returns An alpha value from 0 to 1.0, inclusive.
         */
        get_alpha(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the rectangle which gives the extent of the `component`.
         * 
         * If the extent can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), all of x, y, width, height are set to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         */
        get_extents(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the layer of the component.
         * @returns an {@link Atk.Layer} which is the layer of the component
         */
        get_layer(): Atk.Layer;

        /**
         * Gets the zorder of the component. The value G_MININT will be returned
         * if the layer of the component is not ATK_LAYER_MDI or ATK_LAYER_WINDOW.
         * @returns a gint which is the zorder of the component, i.e. the depth at which the component is shown in relation to other components in the same container.
         */
        get_mdi_zorder(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the position of `component` in the form of
         * a point specifying `component`'s top-left corner.
         * 
         * If the position can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), x and y are set to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         */
        get_position(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the size of the `component` in terms of width and height.
         * 
         * If the size can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), width and height are set to -1.
         */
        get_size(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Grabs focus for this `component`.
         * @returns `true` if successful, `false` otherwise.
         */
        grab_focus(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets a reference to the accessible child, if one exists, at the
         * coordinate point specified by `x` and `y`.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @returns a reference to the accessible child, if one exists
         */
        ref_accessible_at_point(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): Atk.Object | null;

        /**
         * Remove the handler specified by `handler_id` from the list of
         * functions to be executed when this object receives focus events
         * (in or out).
         * @param handler_id the handler id of the focus handler to be removed from `component`
         */
        remove_focus_handler(handler_id: number): void;

        /**
         * Makes `component` visible on the screen by scrolling all necessary parents.
         * 
         * Contrary to atk_component_set_position, this does not actually move
         * `component` in its parent, this only makes the parents scroll so that the
         * object shows up on the screen, given its current position within the parents.
         * @param type specify where the object should be made visible.
         * @returns whether scrolling was successful.
         */
        scroll_to(type: Atk.ScrollType): boolean;

        /**
         * Move the top-left of `component` to a given position of the screen by
         * scrolling all necessary parents.
         * @param coords specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or to the parent object.
         * @param x x-position where to scroll to
         * @param y y-position where to scroll to
         * @returns whether scrolling was successful.
         */
        scroll_to_point(coords: Atk.CoordType, x: number, y: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the extents of `component`.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param width width to set for `component`
         * @param height height to set for `component`
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @returns `true` or `false` whether the extents were set or not
         */
        set_extents(x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the position of `component`.
         * 
         * Contrary to atk_component_scroll_to, this does not trigger any scrolling,
         * this just moves `component` in its parent.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the component's top level window
         * @returns `true` or `false` whether or not the position was set or not
         */
        set_position(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Set the size of the `component` in terms of width and height.
         * @param width width to set for `component`
         * @param height height to set for `component`
         * @returns `true` or `false` whether the size was set or not
         */
        set_size(width: number, height: number): boolean;

        /**
         * @param bounds 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_bounds_changed(bounds: Atk.Rectangle): void;

        /**
         * Checks whether the specified point is within the extent of the `component`.
         * 
         * Toolkit implementor note: ATK provides a default implementation for
         * this virtual method. In general there are little reason to
         * re-implement it.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_contains(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the alpha value (i.e. the opacity) for this
         * `component`, on a scale from 0 (fully transparent) to 1.0
         * (fully opaque).
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_alpha(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the rectangle which gives the extent of the `component`.
         * 
         * If the extent can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), all of x, y, width, height are set to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_extents(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the layer of the component.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_layer(): Atk.Layer;

        /**
         * Gets the zorder of the component. The value G_MININT will be returned
         * if the layer of the component is not ATK_LAYER_MDI or ATK_LAYER_WINDOW.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_mdi_zorder(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the position of `component` in the form of
         * a point specifying `component`'s top-left corner.
         * 
         * If the position can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), x and y are set to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_position(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the size of the `component` in terms of width and height.
         * 
         * If the size can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), width and height are set to -1.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_size(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Grabs focus for this `component`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_grab_focus(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets a reference to the accessible child, if one exists, at the
         * coordinate point specified by `x` and `y`.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_ref_accessible_at_point(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): Atk.Object | null;

        /**
         * Remove the handler specified by `handler_id` from the list of
         * functions to be executed when this object receives focus events
         * (in or out).
         * @param handler_id the handler id of the focus handler to be removed from `component`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_remove_focus_handler(handler_id: number): void;

        /**
         * Makes `component` visible on the screen by scrolling all necessary parents.
         * 
         * Contrary to atk_component_set_position, this does not actually move
         * `component` in its parent, this only makes the parents scroll so that the
         * object shows up on the screen, given its current position within the parents.
         * @param type specify where the object should be made visible.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_scroll_to(type: Atk.ScrollType): boolean;

        /**
         * Move the top-left of `component` to a given position of the screen by
         * scrolling all necessary parents.
         * @param coords specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or to the parent object.
         * @param x x-position where to scroll to
         * @param y y-position where to scroll to
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_scroll_to_point(coords: Atk.CoordType, x: number, y: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the extents of `component`.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param width width to set for `component`
         * @param height height to set for `component`
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_extents(x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the position of `component`.
         * 
         * Contrary to atk_component_scroll_to, this does not trigger any scrolling,
         * this just moves `component` in its parent.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the component's top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_position(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Set the size of the `component` in terms of width and height.
         * @param width width to set for `component`
         * @param height height to set for `component`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_size(width: number, height: number): boolean;
    }


    namespace Table {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Container.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::column-spacing": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::homogeneous": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::n-columns": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::n-rows": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::row-spacing": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Container.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {
            column_spacing: number;
            columnSpacing: number;
            homogeneous: boolean;
            n_columns: number;
            nColumns: number;
            n_rows: number;
            nRows: number;
            row_spacing: number;
            rowSpacing: number;
        }
    }

    /**
     * The {@link Gtk.Table} functions allow the programmer to arrange widgets in rows and
     * columns, making it easy to align many widgets next to each other,
     * horizontally and vertically.
     * 
     * Tables are created with a call to `gtk_table_new()`, the size of which can
     * later be changed with `gtk_table_resize()`.
     * 
     * Widgets can be added to a table using `gtk_table_attach()` or the more
     * convenient (but slightly less flexible) `gtk_table_attach_defaults()`.
     * 
     * To alter the space next to a specific row, use `gtk_table_set_row_spacing()`,
     * and for a column, `gtk_table_set_col_spacing()`.
     * The gaps between all rows or columns can be changed by
     * calling `gtk_table_set_row_spacings()` or `gtk_table_set_col_spacings()`
     * respectively. Note that spacing is added between the
     * children, while padding added by `gtk_table_attach()` is added on
     * either side of the widget it belongs to.
     * 
     * `gtk_table_set_homogeneous()`, can be used to set whether all cells in the
     * table will resize themselves to the size of the largest widget in the table.
     * 
     * > {@link Gtk.Table} has been deprecated. Use {@link Gtk.Grid} instead. It provides the same
     * > capabilities as GtkTable for arranging widgets in a rectangular grid, but
     * > does support height-for-width geometry management.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class Table extends Container implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<Table>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * @default 0
         */
        get column_spacing(): number;
        set column_spacing(val: number);

        /**
         * @default 0
         */
        get columnSpacing(): number;
        set columnSpacing(val: number);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get homogeneous(): boolean;
        set homogeneous(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default 1
         */
        get n_columns(): number;
        set n_columns(val: number);

        /**
         * @default 1
         */
        get nColumns(): number;
        set nColumns(val: number);

        /**
         * @default 1
         */
        get n_rows(): number;
        set n_rows(val: number);

        /**
         * @default 1
         */
        get nRows(): number;
        set nRows(val: number);

        /**
         * @default 0
         */
        get row_spacing(): number;
        set row_spacing(val: number);

        /**
         * @default 0
         */
        get rowSpacing(): number;
        set rowSpacing(val: number);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: Table.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        container: Container;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<Table.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](rows: number, columns: number, homogeneous: boolean): Table;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof Table.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Table.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof Table.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Table.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof Table.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<Table.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Adds a widget to a table. The number of “cells” that a widget will occupy is
         * specified by `left_attach`, `right_attach`, `top_attach` and `bottom_attach`.
         * These each represent the leftmost, rightmost, uppermost and lowest column
         * and row numbers of the table. (Columns and rows are indexed from zero).
         * 
         * To make a button occupy the lower right cell of a 2x2 table, use
         * 
         * ```
         * gtk_table_attach (table, button,
         *                   1, 2, // left, right attach
         *                   1, 2, // top, bottom attach
         *                   xoptions, yoptions,
         *                   xpadding, ypadding);
         * ```
         * 
         * If you want to make the button span the entire bottom row, use `left_attach` == 0 and `right_attach` = 2 instead.
         * @param child The widget to add.
         * @param left_attach the column number to attach the left side of a child widget to.
         * @param right_attach the column number to attach the right side of a child widget to.
         * @param top_attach the row number to attach the top of a child widget to.
         * @param bottom_attach the row number to attach the bottom of a child widget to.
         * @param xoptions Used to specify the properties of the child widget when the table is resized.
         * @param yoptions The same as xoptions, except this field determines behaviour of vertical resizing.
         * @param xpadding An integer value specifying the padding on the left and right of the widget being added to the table.
         * @param ypadding The amount of padding above and below the child widget.
         */
        attach(child: Widget, left_attach: number, right_attach: number, top_attach: number, bottom_attach: number, xoptions: AttachOptions, yoptions: AttachOptions, xpadding: number, ypadding: number): void;

        /**
         * As there are many options associated with `gtk_table_attach()`, this convenience
         * function provides the programmer with a means to add children to a table with
         * identical padding and expansion options. The values used for the {@link Gtk.AttachOptions}
         * are `GTK_EXPAND | GTK_FILL`, and the padding is set to 0.
         * @param widget The child widget to add.
         * @param left_attach The column number to attach the left side of the child widget to.
         * @param right_attach The column number to attach the right side of the child widget to.
         * @param top_attach The row number to attach the top of the child widget to.
         * @param bottom_attach The row number to attach the bottom of the child widget to.
         */
        attach_defaults(widget: Widget, left_attach: number, right_attach: number, top_attach: number, bottom_attach: number): void;

        /**
         * Gets the amount of space between column `col`, and
         * column `col` + 1. See `gtk_table_set_col_spacing()`.
         * @param column a column in the table, 0 indicates the first column
         * @returns the column spacing
         */
        get_col_spacing(column: number): number;

        /**
         * Gets the default column spacing for the table. This is
         * the spacing that will be used for newly added columns.
         * (See `gtk_table_set_col_spacings()`)
         * @returns the default column spacing
         */
        get_default_col_spacing(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the default row spacing for the table. This is
         * the spacing that will be used for newly added rows.
         * (See `gtk_table_set_row_spacings()`)
         * @returns the default row spacing
         */
        get_default_row_spacing(): number;

        /**
         * Returns whether the table cells are all constrained to the same
         * width and height. (See gtk_table_set_homogeneous ())
         * @returns `true` if the cells are all constrained to the same size
         */
        get_homogeneous(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the amount of space between row `row`, and
         * row `row` + 1. See `gtk_table_set_row_spacing()`.
         * @param row a row in the table, 0 indicates the first row
         * @returns the row spacing
         */
        get_row_spacing(row: number): number;

        /**
         * Gets the number of rows and columns in the table.
         */
        get_size(): [number, number];

        /**
         * If you need to change a table’s size after
         * it has been created, this function allows you to do so.
         * @param rows The new number of rows.
         * @param columns The new number of columns.
         */
        resize(rows: number, columns: number): void;

        /**
         * Alters the amount of space between a given table column and the following
         * column.
         * @param column the column whose spacing should be changed.
         * @param spacing number of pixels that the spacing should take up.
         */
        set_col_spacing(column: number, spacing: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the space between every column in `table` equal to `spacing`.
         * @param spacing the number of pixels of space to place between every column   in the table.
         */
        set_col_spacings(spacing: number): void;

        /**
         * Changes the homogenous property of table cells, ie. whether all cells are
         * an equal size or not.
         * @param homogeneous Set to `true` to ensure all table cells are the same size. Set   to `false` if this is not your desired behaviour.
         */
        set_homogeneous(homogeneous: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Changes the space between a given table row and the subsequent row.
         * @param row row number whose spacing will be changed.
         * @param spacing number of pixels that the spacing should take up.
         */
        set_row_spacing(row: number, spacing: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the space between every row in `table` equal to `spacing`.
         * @param spacing the number of pixels of space to place between every row in the table.
         */
        set_row_spacings(spacing: number): void;
    }


    namespace TearoffMenuItem {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends MenuItem.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::accel-path": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::label": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::right-justified": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::submenu": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-underline": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::action-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::action-target": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::related-action": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-action-appearance": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends MenuItem.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Actionable.ConstructorProps, Activatable.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * A {@link Gtk.TearoffMenuItem} is a special {@link Gtk.MenuItem} which is used to
     * tear off and reattach its menu.
     * 
     * When its menu is shown normally, the {@link Gtk.TearoffMenuItem} is drawn as a
     * dotted line indicating that the menu can be torn off.  Activating it
     * causes its menu to be torn off and displayed in its own window
     * as a tearoff menu.
     * 
     * When its menu is shown as a tearoff menu, the {@link Gtk.TearoffMenuItem} is drawn
     * as a dotted line which has a left pointing arrow graphic indicating that
     * the tearoff menu can be reattached.  Activating it will erase the tearoff
     * menu window.
     * 
     * > {@link Gtk.TearoffMenuItem} is deprecated and should not be used in newly
     * > written code. Menus are not meant to be torn around.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class TearoffMenuItem extends MenuItem implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Actionable, Activatable, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<TearoffMenuItem>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: TearoffMenuItem.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        menu_item: MenuItem;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<TearoffMenuItem.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): TearoffMenuItem;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof TearoffMenuItem.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, TearoffMenuItem.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof TearoffMenuItem.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, TearoffMenuItem.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof TearoffMenuItem.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<TearoffMenuItem.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        /**
         * @default null
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable
         */
        get action_name(): string | null;
        set action_name(val: string | null);

        /**
         * @default null
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable
         */
        get actionName(): string | null;
        set actionName(val: string | null);

        /** @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable */
        get action_target(): GLib.Variant;
        set action_target(val: GLib.Variant);

        /** @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable */
        get actionTarget(): GLib.Variant;
        set actionTarget(val: GLib.Variant);

        /**
         * The action that this activatable will activate and receive
         * updates from for various states and possibly appearance.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the this property and
         * > call `gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action()` when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get related_action(): Action;
        set related_action(val: Action);

        /**
         * The action that this activatable will activate and receive
         * updates from for various states and possibly appearance.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the this property and
         * > call `gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action()` when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get relatedAction(): Action;
        set relatedAction(val: Action);

        /**
         * Whether this activatable should reset its layout
         * and appearance when setting the related action or when
         * the action changes appearance.
         * 
         * See the {@link Gtk.Action} documentation directly to find which properties
         * should be ignored by the {@link Gtk.Activatable} when this property is `false`.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle this property
         * > and call `gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties()` on the activatable
         * > widget when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get use_action_appearance(): boolean;
        set use_action_appearance(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether this activatable should reset its layout
         * and appearance when setting the related action or when
         * the action changes appearance.
         * 
         * See the {@link Gtk.Action} documentation directly to find which properties
         * should be ignored by the {@link Gtk.Activatable} when this property is `false`.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle this property
         * > and call `gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties()` on the activatable
         * > widget when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get useActionAppearance(): boolean;
        set useActionAppearance(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Gets the action name for `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_name()` for more information.
         * @returns the action name, or `null` if none is set
         */
        get_action_name(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the current target value of `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_target_value()` for more information.
         * @returns the current target value
         */
        get_action_target_value(): GLib.Variant;

        /**
         * Specifies the name of the action with which this widget should be
         * associated.  If `action_name` is `null` then the widget will be
         * unassociated from any previous action.
         * 
         * Usually this function is used when the widget is located (or will be
         * located) within the hierarchy of a {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow}.
         * 
         * Names are of the form “win.save” or “app.quit” for actions on the
         * containing {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow} or its associated {@link Gtk.Application},
         * respectively.  This is the same form used for actions in the {@link Gio.Menu}
         * associated with the window.
         * @param action_name an action name, or `null`
         */
        set_action_name(action_name: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the target value of an actionable widget.
         * 
         * If `target_value` is `null` then the target value is unset.
         * 
         * The target value has two purposes.  First, it is used as the
         * parameter to activation of the action associated with the
         * {@link Gtk.Actionable} widget. Second, it is used to determine if the widget
         * should be rendered as “active” — the widget is active if the state
         * is equal to the given target.
         * 
         * Consider the example of associating a set of buttons with a {@link Gio.Action}
         * with string state in a typical “radio button” situation.  Each button
         * will be associated with the same action, but with a different target
         * value for that action.  Clicking on a particular button will activate
         * the action with the target of that button, which will typically cause
         * the action’s state to change to that value.  Since the action’s state
         * is now equal to the target value of the button, the button will now
         * be rendered as active (and the other buttons, with different targets,
         * rendered inactive).
         * @param target_value a {@link GLib.Variant} to set as the target value, or `null`
         */
        set_action_target_value(target_value: GLib.Variant | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the action-name and associated string target value of an
         * actionable widget.
         * 
         * `detailed_action_name` is a string in the format accepted by
         * `g_action_parse_detailed_name()`.
         * 
         * (Note that prior to version 3.22.25,
         * this function is only usable for actions with a simple "s" target, and
         * `detailed_action_name` must be of the form `"action::target"` where
         * `action` is the action name and `target` is the string to use
         * as the target.)
         * @param detailed_action_name the detailed action name
         */
        set_detailed_action_name(detailed_action_name: string): void;

        /**
         * Gets the action name for `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_name()` for more information.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_action_name(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the current target value of `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_target_value()` for more information.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_action_target_value(): GLib.Variant;

        /**
         * Specifies the name of the action with which this widget should be
         * associated.  If `action_name` is `null` then the widget will be
         * unassociated from any previous action.
         * 
         * Usually this function is used when the widget is located (or will be
         * located) within the hierarchy of a {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow}.
         * 
         * Names are of the form “win.save” or “app.quit” for actions on the
         * containing {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow} or its associated {@link Gtk.Application},
         * respectively.  This is the same form used for actions in the {@link Gio.Menu}
         * associated with the window.
         * @param action_name an action name, or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_action_name(action_name: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the target value of an actionable widget.
         * 
         * If `target_value` is `null` then the target value is unset.
         * 
         * The target value has two purposes.  First, it is used as the
         * parameter to activation of the action associated with the
         * {@link Gtk.Actionable} widget. Second, it is used to determine if the widget
         * should be rendered as “active” — the widget is active if the state
         * is equal to the given target.
         * 
         * Consider the example of associating a set of buttons with a {@link Gio.Action}
         * with string state in a typical “radio button” situation.  Each button
         * will be associated with the same action, but with a different target
         * value for that action.  Clicking on a particular button will activate
         * the action with the target of that button, which will typically cause
         * the action’s state to change to that value.  Since the action’s state
         * is now equal to the target value of the button, the button will now
         * be rendered as active (and the other buttons, with different targets,
         * rendered inactive).
         * @param target_value a {@link GLib.Variant} to set as the target value, or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_action_target_value(target_value: GLib.Variant | null): void;

        /**
         * This is a utility function for {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors.
         * 
         * When implementing {@link Gtk.Activatable} you must call this when
         * handling changes of the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action}, and
         * you must also use this to break references in {@link GObject.Object}->dispose().
         * 
         * This function adds a reference to the currently set related
         * action for you, it also makes sure the {@link Gtk.Activatable}->update()
         * method is called when the related {@link Gtk.Action} properties change
         * and registers to the action’s proxy list.
         * 
         * > Be careful to call this before setting the local
         * > copy of the {@link Gtk.Action} property, since this function uses
         * > `gtk_activatable_get_related_action()` to retrieve the
         * > previous action.
         * @param action the {@link Gtk.Action} to set
         */
        do_set_related_action(action: Action): void;

        /**
         * Gets the related {@link Gtk.Action} for `activatable`.
         * @returns the related {@link Gtk.Action} if one is set.
         */
        get_related_action(): Action;

        /**
         * Gets whether this activatable should reset its layout
         * and appearance when setting the related action or when
         * the action changes appearance.
         * @returns whether `activatable` uses its actions appearance.
         */
        get_use_action_appearance(): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the related action on the `activatable` object.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action}
         * > property and call `gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action()` when it changes.
         * @param action the {@link Gtk.Action} to set
         */
        set_related_action(action: Action): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether this activatable should reset its layout and appearance
         * when setting the related action or when the action changes appearance
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} property and call
         * > `gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties()` to update `activatable`
         * > if needed.
         * @param use_appearance whether to use the actions appearance
         */
        set_use_action_appearance(use_appearance: boolean): void;

        /**
         * This is called to update the activatable completely, this is called
         * internally when the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action} property is set
         * or unset and by the implementing class when
         * {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} changes.
         * @param action the related {@link Gtk.Action} or `null`
         */
        sync_action_properties(action: Action | null): void;

        /**
         * This is called to update the activatable completely, this is called
         * internally when the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action} property is set
         * or unset and by the implementing class when
         * {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} changes.
         * @param action the related {@link Gtk.Action} or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_sync_action_properties(action: Action | null): void;

        /**
         * Called to update the activatable when its related action’s properties change.
         * You must check the {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} property only apply action
         * properties that are meant to effect the appearance accordingly.
         * @param action 
         * @param property_name 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_update(action: Action, property_name: string): void;

        /**
         * For widgets that can be “activated” (buttons, menu items, etc.)
         * this function activates them. Activation is what happens when you
         * press Enter on a widget during key navigation. If `widget` isn't
         * activatable, the function returns `false`.
         * @returns `true` if the widget was activatable
         */
        activate(): boolean;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Gtk.MenuItem.activate
        activate(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Emits a {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.child_notify | Gtk.Widget::child-notify} signal for the
         * [child property][child-properties] `child_property`
         * on `widget`.
         * 
         * This is the analogue of `g_object_notify()` for child properties.
         * 
         * Also see `gtk_container_child_notify()`.
         * @param child_property the name of a child property installed on the                  class of `widget`’s parent
         */
        child_notify(child_property: string): void;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Gtk.Container.child_notify
        child_notify(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Given an accelerator group, `accel_group`, and an accelerator path,
         * `accel_path`, sets up an accelerator in `accel_group` so whenever the
         * key binding that is defined for `accel_path` is pressed, `widget`
         * will be activated.  This removes any accelerators (for any
         * accelerator group) installed by previous calls to
         * `gtk_widget_set_accel_path()`. Associating accelerators with
         * paths allows them to be modified by the user and the modifications
         * to be saved for future use. (See `gtk_accel_map_save()`.)
         * 
         * This function is a low level function that would most likely
         * be used by a menu creation system like {@link Gtk.UIManager}. If you
         * use {@link Gtk.UIManager}, setting up accelerator paths will be done
         * automatically.
         * 
         * Even when you you aren’t using {@link Gtk.UIManager}, if you only want to
         * set up accelerators on menu items `gtk_menu_item_set_accel_path()`
         * provides a somewhat more convenient interface.
         * 
         * Note that `accel_path` string will be stored in a {@link GLib.Quark}. Therefore, if you
         * pass a static string, you can save some memory by interning it first with
         * `g_intern_static_string()`.
         * @param accel_path path used to look up the accelerator
         * @param accel_group a {@link Gtk.AccelGroup}.
         */
        set_accel_path(accel_path: string | null, accel_group: AccelGroup | null): void;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Gtk.MenuItem.set_accel_path
        set_accel_path(...args: never[]): any;
    }


    namespace TextBuffer {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends GObject.Object.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * The ::apply-tag signal is emitted to apply a tag to a
             * range of text in a {@link Gtk.TextBuffer}.
             * Applying actually occurs in the default handler.
             * 
             * Note that if your handler runs before the default handler it must not
             * invalidate the `start` and `end` iters (or has to revalidate them).
             * 
             * See also:
             * `gtk_text_buffer_apply_tag()`,
             * `gtk_text_buffer_insert_with_tags()`,
             * `gtk_text_buffer_insert_range()`.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "apply-tag": (arg0: TextTag, arg1: TextIter, arg2: TextIter) => void;
            /**
             * The ::begin-user-action signal is emitted at the beginning of a single
             * user-visible operation on a {@link Gtk.TextBuffer}.
             * 
             * See also:
             * `gtk_text_buffer_begin_user_action()`,
             * `gtk_text_buffer_insert_interactive()`,
             * `gtk_text_buffer_insert_range_interactive()`,
             * `gtk_text_buffer_delete_interactive()`,
             * `gtk_text_buffer_backspace()`,
             * `gtk_text_buffer_delete_selection()`.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "begin-user-action": () => void;
            /**
             * The ::changed signal is emitted when the content of a {@link Gtk.TextBuffer}
             * has changed.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            changed: () => void;
            /**
             * The ::delete-range signal is emitted to delete a range
             * from a {@link Gtk.TextBuffer}.
             * 
             * Note that if your handler runs before the default handler it must not
             * invalidate the `start` and `end` iters (or has to revalidate them).
             * The default signal handler revalidates the `start` and `end` iters to
             * both point to the location where text was deleted. Handlers
             * which run after the default handler (see `g_signal_connect_after()`)
             * do not have access to the deleted text.
             * 
             * See also: `gtk_text_buffer_delete()`.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "delete-range": (arg0: TextIter, arg1: TextIter) => void;
            /**
             * The ::end-user-action signal is emitted at the end of a single
             * user-visible operation on the {@link Gtk.TextBuffer}.
             * 
             * See also:
             * `gtk_text_buffer_end_user_action()`,
             * `gtk_text_buffer_insert_interactive()`,
             * `gtk_text_buffer_insert_range_interactive()`,
             * `gtk_text_buffer_delete_interactive()`,
             * `gtk_text_buffer_backspace()`,
             * `gtk_text_buffer_delete_selection()`,
             * `gtk_text_buffer_backspace()`.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "end-user-action": () => void;
            /**
             * The ::insert-child-anchor signal is emitted to insert a
             * {@link Gtk.TextChildAnchor} in a {@link Gtk.TextBuffer}.
             * Insertion actually occurs in the default handler.
             * 
             * Note that if your handler runs before the default handler it must
             * not invalidate the `location` iter (or has to revalidate it).
             * The default signal handler revalidates it to be placed after the
             * inserted `anchor`.
             * 
             * See also: `gtk_text_buffer_insert_child_anchor()`.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "insert-child-anchor": (arg0: TextIter, arg1: TextChildAnchor) => void;
            /**
             * The ::insert-pixbuf signal is emitted to insert a {@link GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf}
             * in a {@link Gtk.TextBuffer}. Insertion actually occurs in the default handler.
             * 
             * Note that if your handler runs before the default handler it must not
             * invalidate the `location` iter (or has to revalidate it).
             * The default signal handler revalidates it to be placed after the
             * inserted `pixbuf`.
             * 
             * See also: `gtk_text_buffer_insert_pixbuf()`.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "insert-pixbuf": (arg0: TextIter, arg1: GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf) => void;
            /**
             * The ::insert-text signal is emitted to insert text in a {@link Gtk.TextBuffer}.
             * Insertion actually occurs in the default handler.
             * 
             * Note that if your handler runs before the default handler it must not
             * invalidate the `location` iter (or has to revalidate it).
             * The default signal handler revalidates it to point to the end of the
             * inserted text.
             * 
             * See also:
             * `gtk_text_buffer_insert()`,
             * `gtk_text_buffer_insert_range()`.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "insert-text": (arg0: TextIter, arg1: string, arg2: number) => void;
            /**
             * The ::mark-deleted signal is emitted as notification
             * after a {@link Gtk.TextMark} is deleted.
             * 
             * See also:
             * `gtk_text_buffer_delete_mark()`.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "mark-deleted": (arg0: TextMark) => void;
            /**
             * The ::mark-set signal is emitted as notification
             * after a {@link Gtk.TextMark} is set.
             * 
             * See also:
             * `gtk_text_buffer_create_mark()`,
             * `gtk_text_buffer_move_mark()`.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "mark-set": (arg0: TextIter, arg1: TextMark) => void;
            /**
             * The ::modified-changed signal is emitted when the modified bit of a
             * {@link Gtk.TextBuffer} flips.
             * 
             * See also:
             * `gtk_text_buffer_set_modified()`.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "modified-changed": () => void;
            /**
             * The paste-done signal is emitted after paste operation has been completed.
             * This is useful to properly scroll the view to the end of the pasted text.
             * See `gtk_text_buffer_paste_clipboard()` for more details.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.16
             * @run-last
             */
            "paste-done": (arg0: Clipboard) => void;
            /**
             * The ::remove-tag signal is emitted to remove all occurrences of `tag` from
             * a range of text in a {@link Gtk.TextBuffer}.
             * Removal actually occurs in the default handler.
             * 
             * Note that if your handler runs before the default handler it must not
             * invalidate the `start` and `end` iters (or has to revalidate them).
             * 
             * See also:
             * `gtk_text_buffer_remove_tag()`.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "remove-tag": (arg0: TextTag, arg1: TextIter, arg2: TextIter) => void;
            "notify::copy-target-list": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::cursor-position": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-selection": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::paste-target-list": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tag-table": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.Object.ConstructorProps {
            copy_target_list: TargetList;
            copyTargetList: TargetList;
            cursor_position: number;
            cursorPosition: number;
            has_selection: boolean;
            hasSelection: boolean;
            paste_target_list: TargetList;
            pasteTargetList: TargetList;
            tag_table: TextTagTable;
            tagTable: TextTagTable;
            text: string;
        }
    }

    /**
     * You may wish to begin by reading the
     * [text widget conceptual overview](https://docs.gtk.org/gtk3/TextWidget.html)
     * which gives an overview of all the objects and data
     * types related to the text widget and how they work together.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class TextBuffer extends GObject.Object {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<TextBuffer>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * The list of targets this buffer supports for clipboard copying
         * and as DND source.
         * @since 2.10
         * @read-only
         */
        get copy_target_list(): TargetList;

        /**
         * The list of targets this buffer supports for clipboard copying
         * and as DND source.
         * @since 2.10
         * @read-only
         */
        get copyTargetList(): TargetList;

        /**
         * The position of the insert mark (as offset from the beginning
         * of the buffer). It is useful for getting notified when the
         * cursor moves.
         * @since 2.10
         * @read-only
         * @default 0
         */
        get cursor_position(): number;

        /**
         * The position of the insert mark (as offset from the beginning
         * of the buffer). It is useful for getting notified when the
         * cursor moves.
         * @since 2.10
         * @read-only
         * @default 0
         */
        get cursorPosition(): number;

        /**
         * Whether the buffer has some text currently selected.
         * @since 2.10
         * @read-only
         * @default false
         */
        get has_selection(): boolean;

        /**
         * Whether the buffer has some text currently selected.
         * @since 2.10
         * @read-only
         * @default false
         */
        get hasSelection(): boolean;

        /**
         * The list of targets this buffer supports for clipboard pasting
         * and as DND destination.
         * @since 2.10
         * @read-only
         */
        get paste_target_list(): TargetList;

        /**
         * The list of targets this buffer supports for clipboard pasting
         * and as DND destination.
         * @since 2.10
         * @read-only
         */
        get pasteTargetList(): TargetList;

        /**
         * @construct-only
         */
        get tag_table(): TextTagTable;

        /**
         * @construct-only
         */
        get tagTable(): TextTagTable;

        /**
         * The text content of the buffer. Without child widgets and images,
         * see `gtk_text_buffer_get_text()` for more information.
         * @since 2.8
         */
        get text(): string;
        set text(val: string);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: TextBuffer.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<TextBuffer.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](table: TextTagTable | null): TextBuffer;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof TextBuffer.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, TextBuffer.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof TextBuffer.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, TextBuffer.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof TextBuffer.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<TextBuffer.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * Emits the “apply-tag” signal on `buffer`. The default
         * handler for the signal applies `tag` to the given range.
         * `start` and `end` do not have to be in order.
         * @param tag a {@link Gtk.TextTag}
         * @param start one bound of range to be tagged
         * @param end other bound of range to be tagged
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_apply_tag(tag: TextTag, start: TextIter, end: TextIter): void;

        /**
         * Called to indicate that the buffer operations between here and a
         * call to `gtk_text_buffer_end_user_action()` are part of a single
         * user-visible operation. The operations between
         * `gtk_text_buffer_begin_user_action()` and
         * `gtk_text_buffer_end_user_action()` can then be grouped when creating
         * an undo stack. {@link Gtk.TextBuffer} maintains a count of calls to
         * `gtk_text_buffer_begin_user_action()` that have not been closed with
         * a call to `gtk_text_buffer_end_user_action()`, and emits the
         * “begin-user-action” and “end-user-action” signals only for the
         * outermost pair of calls. This allows you to build user actions
         * from other user actions.
         * 
         * The “interactive” buffer mutation functions, such as
         * `gtk_text_buffer_insert_interactive()`, automatically call begin/end
         * user action around the buffer operations they perform, so there's
         * no need to add extra calls if you user action consists solely of a
         * single call to one of those functions.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_begin_user_action(): void;

        /**
         * The class handler for the {@link Gtk.TextBuffer.SignalSignatures.changed | Gtk.TextBuffer::changed} signal.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_changed(): void;

        /**
         * The class handler for the {@link Gtk.TextBuffer.SignalSignatures.delete_range | Gtk.TextBuffer::delete-range} signal.
         * @param start 
         * @param end 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_delete_range(start: TextIter, end: TextIter): void;

        /**
         * Should be paired with a call to `gtk_text_buffer_begin_user_action()`.
         * See that function for a full explanation.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_end_user_action(): void;

        /**
         * Inserts a child widget anchor into the text buffer at `iter`. The
         * anchor will be counted as one character in character counts, and
         * when obtaining the buffer contents as a string, will be represented
         * by the Unicode “object replacement character” 0xFFFC. Note that the
         * “slice” variants for obtaining portions of the buffer as a string
         * include this character for child anchors, but the “text” variants do
         * not. E.g. see `gtk_text_buffer_get_slice()` and
         * `gtk_text_buffer_get_text()`. Consider
         * `gtk_text_buffer_create_child_anchor()` as a more convenient
         * alternative to this function. The buffer will add a reference to
         * the anchor, so you can unref it after insertion.
         * @param iter location to insert the anchor
         * @param anchor a {@link Gtk.TextChildAnchor}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_insert_child_anchor(iter: TextIter, anchor: TextChildAnchor): void;

        /**
         * Inserts an image into the text buffer at `iter`. The image will be
         * counted as one character in character counts, and when obtaining
         * the buffer contents as a string, will be represented by the Unicode
         * “object replacement character” 0xFFFC. Note that the “slice”
         * variants for obtaining portions of the buffer as a string include
         * this character for pixbufs, but the “text” variants do
         * not. e.g. see `gtk_text_buffer_get_slice()` and
         * `gtk_text_buffer_get_text()`.
         * @param iter location to insert the pixbuf
         * @param pixbuf a {@link GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_insert_pixbuf(iter: TextIter, pixbuf: GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf): void;

        /**
         * The class handler for the {@link Gtk.TextBuffer.SignalSignatures.insert_text | Gtk.TextBuffer::insert-text} signal.
         * @param pos 
         * @param new_text 
         * @param new_text_length 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_insert_text(pos: TextIter, new_text: string, new_text_length: number): void;

        /**
         * The class handler for the {@link Gtk.TextBuffer.SignalSignatures.mark_deleted | Gtk.TextBuffer::mark-deleted} signal.
         * @param mark 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_mark_deleted(mark: TextMark): void;

        /**
         * The class handler for the {@link Gtk.TextBuffer.SignalSignatures.mark_set | Gtk.TextBuffer::mark-set} signal.
         * @param location 
         * @param mark 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_mark_set(location: TextIter, mark: TextMark): void;

        /**
         * The class handler for the {@link Gtk.TextBuffer.SignalSignatures.modified_changed | Gtk.TextBuffer::modified-changed}
         *   signal.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_modified_changed(): void;

        /**
         * The class handler for the {@link Gtk.TextBuffer.SignalSignatures.paste_done | Gtk.TextBuffer::paste-done} signal.
         * @param clipboard 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_paste_done(clipboard: Clipboard): void;

        /**
         * Emits the “remove-tag” signal. The default handler for the signal
         * removes all occurrences of `tag` from the given range. `start` and
         * `end` don’t have to be in order.
         * @param tag a {@link Gtk.TextTag}
         * @param start one bound of range to be untagged
         * @param end other bound of range to be untagged
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_remove_tag(tag: TextTag, start: TextIter, end: TextIter): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Adds the mark at position `where`. The mark must not be added to
         * another buffer, and if its name is not `null` then there must not
         * be another mark in the buffer with the same name.
         * 
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.TextBuffer.SignalSignatures.mark_set | Gtk.TextBuffer::mark-set} signal as notification of the mark's
         * initial placement.
         * @param mark the mark to add
         * @param where location to place mark
         */
        add_mark(mark: TextMark, where: TextIter): void;

        /**
         * Adds `clipboard` to the list of clipboards in which the selection
         * contents of `buffer` are available. In most cases, `clipboard` will be
         * the {@link Gtk.Clipboard} of type `GDK_SELECTION_PRIMARY` for a view of `buffer`.
         * @param clipboard a {@link Gtk.Clipboard}
         */
        add_selection_clipboard(clipboard: Clipboard): void;

        /**
         * Emits the “apply-tag” signal on `buffer`. The default
         * handler for the signal applies `tag` to the given range.
         * `start` and `end` do not have to be in order.
         * @param tag a {@link Gtk.TextTag}
         * @param start one bound of range to be tagged
         * @param end other bound of range to be tagged
         */
        apply_tag(tag: TextTag, start: TextIter, end: TextIter): void;

        /**
         * Calls `gtk_text_tag_table_lookup()` on the buffer’s tag table to
         * get a {@link Gtk.TextTag}, then calls `gtk_text_buffer_apply_tag()`.
         * @param name name of a named {@link Gtk.TextTag}
         * @param start one bound of range to be tagged
         * @param end other bound of range to be tagged
         */
        apply_tag_by_name(name: string, start: TextIter, end: TextIter): void;

        /**
         * Performs the appropriate action as if the user hit the delete
         * key with the cursor at the position specified by `iter`. In the
         * normal case a single character will be deleted, but when
         * combining accents are involved, more than one character can
         * be deleted, and when precomposed character and accent combinations
         * are involved, less than one character will be deleted.
         * 
         * Because the buffer is modified, all outstanding iterators become
         * invalid after calling this function; however, the `iter` will be
         * re-initialized to point to the location where text was deleted.
         * @param iter a position in `buffer`
         * @param interactive whether the deletion is caused by user interaction
         * @param default_editable whether the buffer is editable by default
         * @returns `true` if the buffer was modified
         */
        backspace(iter: TextIter, interactive: boolean, default_editable: boolean): boolean;

        /**
         * Called to indicate that the buffer operations between here and a
         * call to `gtk_text_buffer_end_user_action()` are part of a single
         * user-visible operation. The operations between
         * `gtk_text_buffer_begin_user_action()` and
         * `gtk_text_buffer_end_user_action()` can then be grouped when creating
         * an undo stack. {@link Gtk.TextBuffer} maintains a count of calls to
         * `gtk_text_buffer_begin_user_action()` that have not been closed with
         * a call to `gtk_text_buffer_end_user_action()`, and emits the
         * “begin-user-action” and “end-user-action” signals only for the
         * outermost pair of calls. This allows you to build user actions
         * from other user actions.
         * 
         * The “interactive” buffer mutation functions, such as
         * `gtk_text_buffer_insert_interactive()`, automatically call begin/end
         * user action around the buffer operations they perform, so there's
         * no need to add extra calls if you user action consists solely of a
         * single call to one of those functions.
         */
        begin_user_action(): void;

        /**
         * Copies the currently-selected text to a clipboard.
         * @param clipboard the {@link Gtk.Clipboard} object to copy to
         */
        copy_clipboard(clipboard: Clipboard): void;

        /**
         * This is a convenience function which simply creates a child anchor
         * with `gtk_text_child_anchor_new()` and inserts it into the buffer
         * with `gtk_text_buffer_insert_child_anchor()`. The new anchor is
         * owned by the buffer; no reference count is returned to
         * the caller of `gtk_text_buffer_create_child_anchor()`.
         * @param iter location in the buffer
         * @returns the created child anchor
         */
        create_child_anchor(iter: TextIter): TextChildAnchor;

        /**
         * Creates a mark at position `where`. If `mark_name` is `null`, the mark
         * is anonymous; otherwise, the mark can be retrieved by name using
         * `gtk_text_buffer_get_mark()`. If a mark has left gravity, and text is
         * inserted at the mark’s current location, the mark will be moved to
         * the left of the newly-inserted text. If the mark has right gravity
         * (`left_gravity` = `false`), the mark will end up on the right of
         * newly-inserted text. The standard left-to-right cursor is a mark
         * with right gravity (when you type, the cursor stays on the right
         * side of the text you’re typing).
         * 
         * The caller of this function does not own a
         * reference to the returned {@link Gtk.TextMark}, so you can ignore the
         * return value if you like. Marks are owned by the buffer and go
         * away when the buffer does.
         * 
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.TextBuffer.SignalSignatures.mark_set | Gtk.TextBuffer::mark-set} signal as notification of the mark's
         * initial placement.
         * @param mark_name name for mark, or `null`
         * @param where location to place mark
         * @param left_gravity whether the mark has left gravity
         * @returns the new {@link Gtk.TextMark} object
         */
        create_mark(mark_name: string | null, where: TextIter, left_gravity: boolean): TextMark;

        /**
         * Copies the currently-selected text to a clipboard, then deletes
         * said text if it’s editable.
         * @param clipboard the {@link Gtk.Clipboard} object to cut to
         * @param default_editable default editability of the buffer
         */
        cut_clipboard(clipboard: Clipboard, default_editable: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Deletes text between `start` and `end`. The order of `start` and `end`
         * is not actually relevant; `gtk_text_buffer_delete()` will reorder
         * them. This function actually emits the “delete-range” signal, and
         * the default handler of that signal deletes the text. Because the
         * buffer is modified, all outstanding iterators become invalid after
         * calling this function; however, the `start` and `end` will be
         * re-initialized to point to the location where text was deleted.
         * @param start a position in `buffer`
         * @param end another position in `buffer`
         */
        ["delete"](start: TextIter, end: TextIter): void;

        /**
         * Deletes all editable text in the given range.
         * Calls `gtk_text_buffer_delete()` for each editable sub-range of
         * [`start`,`end`). `start` and `end` are revalidated to point to
         * the location of the last deleted range, or left untouched if
         * no text was deleted.
         * @param start_iter start of range to delete
         * @param end_iter end of range
         * @param default_editable whether the buffer is editable by default
         * @returns whether some text was actually deleted
         */
        delete_interactive(start_iter: TextIter, end_iter: TextIter, default_editable: boolean): boolean;

        /**
         * Deletes `mark`, so that it’s no longer located anywhere in the
         * buffer. Removes the reference the buffer holds to the mark, so if
         * you haven’t called `g_object_ref()` on the mark, it will be freed. Even
         * if the mark isn’t freed, most operations on `mark` become
         * invalid, until it gets added to a buffer again with
         * `gtk_text_buffer_add_mark()`. Use `gtk_text_mark_get_deleted()` to
         * find out if a mark has been removed from its buffer.
         * The {@link Gtk.TextBuffer.SignalSignatures.mark_deleted | Gtk.TextBuffer::mark-deleted} signal will be emitted as notification after
         * the mark is deleted.
         * @param mark a {@link Gtk.TextMark} in `buffer`
         */
        delete_mark(mark: TextMark): void;

        /**
         * Deletes the mark named `name`; the mark must exist. See
         * `gtk_text_buffer_delete_mark()` for details.
         * @param name name of a mark in `buffer`
         */
        delete_mark_by_name(name: string): void;

        /**
         * Deletes the range between the “insert” and “selection_bound” marks,
         * that is, the currently-selected text. If `interactive` is `true`,
         * the editability of the selection will be considered (users can’t delete
         * uneditable text).
         * @param interactive whether the deletion is caused by user interaction
         * @param default_editable whether the buffer is editable by default
         * @returns whether there was a non-empty selection to delete
         */
        delete_selection(interactive: boolean, default_editable: boolean): boolean;

        /**
         * This function deserializes rich text in format `format` and inserts
         * it at `iter`.
         * 
         * `formats` to be used must be registered using
         * `gtk_text_buffer_register_deserialize_format()` or
         * `gtk_text_buffer_register_deserialize_tagset()` beforehand.
         * @param content_buffer the {@link Gtk.TextBuffer} to deserialize into
         * @param format the rich text format to use for deserializing
         * @param iter insertion point for the deserialized text
         * @param data data to deserialize
         * @returns `true` on success, `false` otherwise.
         */
        deserialize(content_buffer: TextBuffer, format: Gdk.Atom, iter: TextIter, data: Uint8Array | string): boolean;

        /**
         * This functions returns the value set with
         * `gtk_text_buffer_deserialize_set_can_create_tags()`
         * @param format a {@link Gdk.Atom} representing a registered rich text format
         * @returns whether deserializing this format may create tags
         */
        deserialize_get_can_create_tags(format: Gdk.Atom): boolean;

        /**
         * Use this function to allow a rich text deserialization function to
         * create new tags in the receiving buffer. Note that using this
         * function is almost always a bad idea, because the rich text
         * functions you register should know how to map the rich text format
         * they handler to your text buffers set of tags.
         * 
         * The ability of creating new (arbitrary!) tags in the receiving buffer
         * is meant for special rich text formats like the internal one that
         * is registered using `gtk_text_buffer_register_deserialize_tagset()`,
         * because that format is essentially a dump of the internal structure
         * of the source buffer, including its tag names.
         * 
         * You should allow creation of tags only if you know what you are
         * doing, e.g. if you defined a tagset name for your application
         * suite’s text buffers and you know that it’s fine to receive new
         * tags from these buffers, because you know that your application can
         * handle the newly created tags.
         * @param format a {@link Gdk.Atom} representing a registered rich text format
         * @param can_create_tags whether deserializing this format may create tags
         */
        deserialize_set_can_create_tags(format: Gdk.Atom, can_create_tags: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Should be paired with a call to `gtk_text_buffer_begin_user_action()`.
         * See that function for a full explanation.
         */
        end_user_action(): void;

        /**
         * Retrieves the first and last iterators in the buffer, i.e. the
         * entire buffer lies within the range [`start`,`end`).
         */
        get_bounds(): [TextIter, TextIter];

        /**
         * Gets the number of characters in the buffer; note that characters
         * and bytes are not the same, you can’t e.g. expect the contents of
         * the buffer in string form to be this many bytes long. The character
         * count is cached, so this function is very fast.
         * @returns number of characters in the buffer
         */
        get_char_count(): number;

        /**
         * This function returns the list of targets this text buffer can
         * provide for copying and as DND source. The targets in the list are
         * added with `info` values from the {@link Gtk.TextBufferTargetInfo} enum,
         * using `gtk_target_list_add_rich_text_targets()` and
         * `gtk_target_list_add_text_targets()`.
         * @returns the {@link Gtk.TargetList}
         */
        get_copy_target_list(): TargetList;

        /**
         * This function returns the rich text deserialize formats registered
         * with `buffer` using `gtk_text_buffer_register_deserialize_format()` or
         * `gtk_text_buffer_register_deserialize_tagset()`
         * @returns an array of               `GdkAtoms` representing the registered formats.
         */
        get_deserialize_formats(): Gdk.Atom[];

        /**
         * Initializes `iter` with the “end iterator,” one past the last valid
         * character in the text buffer. If dereferenced with
         * `gtk_text_iter_get_char()`, the end iterator has a character value of 0.
         * The entire buffer lies in the range from the first position in
         * the buffer (call `gtk_text_buffer_get_start_iter()` to get
         * character position 0) to the end iterator.
         */
        get_end_iter(): TextIter;

        /**
         * Indicates whether the buffer has some text currently selected.
         * @returns `true` if the there is text selected
         */
        get_has_selection(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the mark that represents the cursor (insertion point).
         * Equivalent to calling `gtk_text_buffer_get_mark()` to get the mark
         * named “insert”, but very slightly more efficient, and involves less
         * typing.
         * @returns insertion point mark
         */
        get_insert(): TextMark;

        /**
         * Obtains the location of `anchor` within `buffer`.
         * @param anchor a child anchor that appears in `buffer`
         */
        get_iter_at_child_anchor(anchor: TextChildAnchor): TextIter;

        /**
         * Initializes `iter` to the start of the given line. If `line_number` is greater
         * than the number of lines in the `buffer`, the end iterator is returned.
         * @param line_number line number counting from 0
         */
        get_iter_at_line(line_number: number): TextIter;

        /**
         * Obtains an iterator pointing to `byte_index` within the given line.
         * `byte_index` must be the start of a UTF-8 character. Note bytes, not
         * characters; UTF-8 may encode one character as multiple bytes.
         * 
         * Before the 3.20 version, it was not allowed to pass an invalid location.
         * 
         * Since the 3.20 version, if `line_number` is greater than the number of lines
         * in the `buffer`, the end iterator is returned. And if `byte_index` is off the
         * end of the line, the iterator at the end of the line is returned.
         * @param line_number line number counting from 0
         * @param byte_index byte index from start of line
         */
        get_iter_at_line_index(line_number: number, byte_index: number): TextIter;

        /**
         * Obtains an iterator pointing to `char_offset` within the given line. Note
         * characters, not bytes; UTF-8 may encode one character as multiple bytes.
         * 
         * Before the 3.20 version, it was not allowed to pass an invalid location.
         * 
         * Since the 3.20 version, if `line_number` is greater than the number of lines
         * in the `buffer`, the end iterator is returned. And if `char_offset` is off the
         * end of the line, the iterator at the end of the line is returned.
         * @param line_number line number counting from 0
         * @param char_offset char offset from start of line
         */
        get_iter_at_line_offset(line_number: number, char_offset: number): TextIter;

        /**
         * Initializes `iter` with the current position of `mark`.
         * @param mark a {@link Gtk.TextMark} in `buffer`
         */
        get_iter_at_mark(mark: TextMark): TextIter;

        /**
         * Initializes `iter` to a position `char_offset` chars from the start
         * of the entire buffer. If `char_offset` is -1 or greater than the number
         * of characters in the buffer, `iter` is initialized to the end iterator,
         * the iterator one past the last valid character in the buffer.
         * @param char_offset char offset from start of buffer, counting from 0, or -1
         */
        get_iter_at_offset(char_offset: number): TextIter;

        /**
         * Obtains the number of lines in the buffer. This value is cached, so
         * the function is very fast.
         * @returns number of lines in the buffer
         */
        get_line_count(): number;

        /**
         * Returns the mark named `name` in buffer `buffer`, or `null` if no such
         * mark exists in the buffer.
         * @param name a mark name
         * @returns a {@link Gtk.TextMark}, or `null`
         */
        get_mark(name: string): TextMark | null;

        /**
         * Indicates whether the buffer has been modified since the last call
         * to `gtk_text_buffer_set_modified()` set the modification flag to
         * `false`. Used for example to enable a “save” function in a text
         * editor.
         * @returns `true` if the buffer has been modified
         */
        get_modified(): boolean;

        /**
         * This function returns the list of targets this text buffer supports
         * for pasting and as DND destination. The targets in the list are
         * added with `info` values from the {@link Gtk.TextBufferTargetInfo} enum,
         * using `gtk_target_list_add_rich_text_targets()` and
         * `gtk_target_list_add_text_targets()`.
         * @returns the {@link Gtk.TargetList}
         */
        get_paste_target_list(): TargetList;

        /**
         * Returns the mark that represents the selection bound.  Equivalent
         * to calling `gtk_text_buffer_get_mark()` to get the mark named
         * “selection_bound”, but very slightly more efficient, and involves
         * less typing.
         * 
         * The currently-selected text in `buffer` is the region between the
         * “selection_bound” and “insert” marks. If “selection_bound” and
         * “insert” are in the same place, then there is no current selection.
         * `gtk_text_buffer_get_selection_bounds()` is another convenient function
         * for handling the selection, if you just want to know whether there’s a
         * selection and what its bounds are.
         * @returns selection bound mark
         */
        get_selection_bound(): TextMark;

        /**
         * Returns `true` if some text is selected; places the bounds
         * of the selection in `start` and `end` (if the selection has length 0,
         * then `start` and `end` are filled in with the same value).
         * `start` and `end` will be in ascending order. If `start` and `end` are
         * NULL, then they are not filled in, but the return value still indicates
         * whether text is selected.
         * @returns whether the selection has nonzero length
         */
        get_selection_bounds(): [boolean, TextIter, TextIter];

        /**
         * This function returns the rich text serialize formats registered
         * with `buffer` using `gtk_text_buffer_register_serialize_format()` or
         * `gtk_text_buffer_register_serialize_tagset()`
         * @returns an array of               `GdkAtoms` representing the registered formats.
         */
        get_serialize_formats(): Gdk.Atom[];

        /**
         * Returns the text in the range [`start`,`end`). Excludes undisplayed
         * text (text marked with tags that set the invisibility attribute) if
         * `include_hidden_chars` is `false`. The returned string includes a
         * 0xFFFC character whenever the buffer contains
         * embedded images, so byte and character indexes into
         * the returned string do correspond to byte
         * and character indexes into the buffer. Contrast with
         * `gtk_text_buffer_get_text()`. Note that 0xFFFC can occur in normal
         * text as well, so it is not a reliable indicator that a pixbuf or
         * widget is in the buffer.
         * @param start start of a range
         * @param end end of a range
         * @param include_hidden_chars whether to include invisible text
         * @returns an allocated UTF-8 string
         */
        get_slice(start: TextIter, end: TextIter, include_hidden_chars: boolean): string;

        /**
         * Initialized `iter` with the first position in the text buffer. This
         * is the same as using `gtk_text_buffer_get_iter_at_offset()` to get
         * the iter at character offset 0.
         */
        get_start_iter(): TextIter;

        /**
         * Get the {@link Gtk.TextTagTable} associated with this buffer.
         * @returns the buffer’s tag table
         */
        get_tag_table(): TextTagTable;

        /**
         * Returns the text in the range [`start`,`end`). Excludes undisplayed
         * text (text marked with tags that set the invisibility attribute) if
         * `include_hidden_chars` is `false`. Does not include characters
         * representing embedded images, so byte and character indexes into
         * the returned string do not correspond to byte
         * and character indexes into the buffer. Contrast with
         * `gtk_text_buffer_get_slice()`.
         * @param start start of a range
         * @param end end of a range
         * @param include_hidden_chars whether to include invisible text
         * @returns an allocated UTF-8 string
         */
        get_text(start: TextIter, end: TextIter, include_hidden_chars: boolean): string;

        /**
         * Inserts `len` bytes of `text` at position `iter`.  If `len` is -1,
         * `text` must be nul-terminated and will be inserted in its
         * entirety. Emits the “insert-text” signal; insertion actually occurs
         * in the default handler for the signal. `iter` is invalidated when
         * insertion occurs (because the buffer contents change), but the
         * default signal handler revalidates it to point to the end of the
         * inserted text.
         * @param iter a position in the buffer
         * @param text text in UTF-8 format
         * @param len length of text in bytes, or -1
         */
        insert(iter: TextIter, text: string, len: number): void;

        /**
         * Simply calls `gtk_text_buffer_insert()`, using the current
         * cursor position as the insertion point.
         * @param text text in UTF-8 format
         * @param len length of text, in bytes
         */
        insert_at_cursor(text: string, len: number): void;

        /**
         * Inserts a child widget anchor into the text buffer at `iter`. The
         * anchor will be counted as one character in character counts, and
         * when obtaining the buffer contents as a string, will be represented
         * by the Unicode “object replacement character” 0xFFFC. Note that the
         * “slice” variants for obtaining portions of the buffer as a string
         * include this character for child anchors, but the “text” variants do
         * not. E.g. see `gtk_text_buffer_get_slice()` and
         * `gtk_text_buffer_get_text()`. Consider
         * `gtk_text_buffer_create_child_anchor()` as a more convenient
         * alternative to this function. The buffer will add a reference to
         * the anchor, so you can unref it after insertion.
         * @param iter location to insert the anchor
         * @param anchor a {@link Gtk.TextChildAnchor}
         */
        insert_child_anchor(iter: TextIter, anchor: TextChildAnchor): void;

        /**
         * Like `gtk_text_buffer_insert()`, but the insertion will not occur if
         * `iter` is at a non-editable location in the buffer. Usually you
         * want to prevent insertions at ineditable locations if the insertion
         * results from a user action (is interactive).
         * 
         * `default_editable` indicates the editability of text that doesn't
         * have a tag affecting editability applied to it. Typically the
         * result of `gtk_text_view_get_editable()` is appropriate here.
         * @param iter a position in `buffer`
         * @param text some UTF-8 text
         * @param len length of text in bytes, or -1
         * @param default_editable default editability of buffer
         * @returns whether text was actually inserted
         */
        insert_interactive(iter: TextIter, text: string, len: number, default_editable: boolean): boolean;

        /**
         * Calls `gtk_text_buffer_insert_interactive()` at the cursor
         * position.
         * 
         * `default_editable` indicates the editability of text that doesn't
         * have a tag affecting editability applied to it. Typically the
         * result of `gtk_text_view_get_editable()` is appropriate here.
         * @param text text in UTF-8 format
         * @param len length of text in bytes, or -1
         * @param default_editable default editability of buffer
         * @returns whether text was actually inserted
         */
        insert_interactive_at_cursor(text: string, len: number, default_editable: boolean): boolean;

        /**
         * Inserts the text in `markup` at position `iter`. `markup` will be inserted
         * in its entirety and must be nul-terminated and valid UTF-8. Emits the
         * {@link Gtk.TextBuffer.SignalSignatures.insert_text | Gtk.TextBuffer::insert-text} signal, possibly multiple times; insertion
         * actually occurs in the default handler for the signal. `iter` will point
         * to the end of the inserted text on return.
         * @param iter location to insert the markup
         * @param markup a nul-terminated UTF-8 string containing [Pango markup][PangoMarkupFormat]
         * @param len length of `markup` in bytes, or -1
         */
        insert_markup(iter: TextIter, markup: string, len: number): void;

        /**
         * Inserts an image into the text buffer at `iter`. The image will be
         * counted as one character in character counts, and when obtaining
         * the buffer contents as a string, will be represented by the Unicode
         * “object replacement character” 0xFFFC. Note that the “slice”
         * variants for obtaining portions of the buffer as a string include
         * this character for pixbufs, but the “text” variants do
         * not. e.g. see `gtk_text_buffer_get_slice()` and
         * `gtk_text_buffer_get_text()`.
         * @param iter location to insert the pixbuf
         * @param pixbuf a {@link GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf}
         */
        insert_pixbuf(iter: TextIter, pixbuf: GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf): void;

        /**
         * Copies text, tags, and pixbufs between `start` and `end` (the order
         * of `start` and `end` doesn’t matter) and inserts the copy at `iter`.
         * Used instead of simply getting/inserting text because it preserves
         * images and tags. If `start` and `end` are in a different buffer from
         * `buffer`, the two buffers must share the same tag table.
         * 
         * Implemented via emissions of the insert_text and apply_tag signals,
         * so expect those.
         * @param iter a position in `buffer`
         * @param start a position in a {@link Gtk.TextBuffer}
         * @param end another position in the same buffer as `start`
         */
        insert_range(iter: TextIter, start: TextIter, end: TextIter): void;

        /**
         * Same as `gtk_text_buffer_insert_range()`, but does nothing if the
         * insertion point isn’t editable. The `default_editable` parameter
         * indicates whether the text is editable at `iter` if no tags
         * enclosing `iter` affect editability. Typically the result of
         * `gtk_text_view_get_editable()` is appropriate here.
         * @param iter a position in `buffer`
         * @param start a position in a {@link Gtk.TextBuffer}
         * @param end another position in the same buffer as `start`
         * @param default_editable default editability of the buffer
         * @returns whether an insertion was possible at `iter`
         */
        insert_range_interactive(iter: TextIter, start: TextIter, end: TextIter, default_editable: boolean): boolean;

        /**
         * Moves `mark` to the new location `where`. Emits the {@link Gtk.TextBuffer.SignalSignatures.mark_set | Gtk.TextBuffer::mark-set}
         * signal as notification of the move.
         * @param mark a {@link Gtk.TextMark}
         * @param where new location for `mark` in `buffer`
         */
        move_mark(mark: TextMark, where: TextIter): void;

        /**
         * Moves the mark named `name` (which must exist) to location `where`.
         * See `gtk_text_buffer_move_mark()` for details.
         * @param name name of a mark
         * @param where new location for mark
         */
        move_mark_by_name(name: string, where: TextIter): void;

        /**
         * Pastes the contents of a clipboard. If `override_location` is `null`, the
         * pasted text will be inserted at the cursor position, or the buffer selection
         * will be replaced if the selection is non-empty.
         * 
         * Note: pasting is asynchronous, that is, we’ll ask for the paste data and
         * return, and at some point later after the main loop runs, the paste data will
         * be inserted.
         * @param clipboard the {@link Gtk.Clipboard} to paste from
         * @param override_location location to insert pasted text, or `null`
         * @param default_editable whether the buffer is editable by default
         */
        paste_clipboard(clipboard: Clipboard, override_location: TextIter | null, default_editable: boolean): void;

        /**
         * This function moves the “insert” and “selection_bound” marks
         * simultaneously.  If you move them to the same place in two steps
         * with `gtk_text_buffer_move_mark()`, you will temporarily select a
         * region in between their old and new locations, which can be pretty
         * inefficient since the temporarily-selected region will force stuff
         * to be recalculated. This function moves them as a unit, which can
         * be optimized.
         * @param where where to put the cursor
         */
        place_cursor(where: TextIter): void;

        /**
         * This function registers a rich text deserialization `function` along with
         * its `mime_type` with the passed `buffer`.
         * @param mime_type the format’s mime-type
         * @param _function the deserialize function to register
         * @returns the {@link Gdk.Atom} that corresponds to the               newly registered format’s mime-type.
         */
        register_deserialize_format(mime_type: string, _function: TextBufferDeserializeFunc): Gdk.Atom;

        /**
         * This function registers GTK+’s internal rich text serialization
         * format with the passed `buffer`. See
         * `gtk_text_buffer_register_serialize_tagset()` for details.
         * @param tagset_name an optional tagset name, on `null`
         * @returns the {@link Gdk.Atom} that corresponds to the               newly registered format’s mime-type.
         */
        register_deserialize_tagset(tagset_name: string | null): Gdk.Atom;

        /**
         * This function registers a rich text serialization `function` along with
         * its `mime_type` with the passed `buffer`.
         * @param mime_type the format’s mime-type
         * @param _function the serialize function to register
         * @returns the {@link Gdk.Atom} that corresponds to the               newly registered format’s mime-type.
         */
        register_serialize_format(mime_type: string, _function: TextBufferSerializeFunc): Gdk.Atom;

        /**
         * This function registers GTK+’s internal rich text serialization
         * format with the passed `buffer`. The internal format does not comply
         * to any standard rich text format and only works between {@link Gtk.TextBuffer}
         * instances. It is capable of serializing all of a text buffer’s tags
         * and embedded pixbufs.
         * 
         * This function is just a wrapper around
         * `gtk_text_buffer_register_serialize_format()`. The mime type used
         * for registering is “application/x-gtk-text-buffer-rich-text”, or
         * “application/x-gtk-text-buffer-rich-text;format=`tagset_name`” if a
         * `tagset_name` was passed.
         * 
         * The `tagset_name` can be used to restrict the transfer of rich text
         * to buffers with compatible sets of tags, in order to avoid unknown
         * tags from being pasted. It is probably the common case to pass an
         * identifier != `null` here, since the `null` tagset requires the
         * receiving buffer to deal with with pasting of arbitrary tags.
         * @param tagset_name an optional tagset name, on `null`
         * @returns the {@link Gdk.Atom} that corresponds to the               newly registered format’s mime-type.
         */
        register_serialize_tagset(tagset_name: string | null): Gdk.Atom;

        /**
         * Removes all tags in the range between `start` and `end`.  Be careful
         * with this function; it could remove tags added in code unrelated to
         * the code you’re currently writing. That is, using this function is
         * probably a bad idea if you have two or more unrelated code sections
         * that add tags.
         * @param start one bound of range to be untagged
         * @param end other bound of range to be untagged
         */
        remove_all_tags(start: TextIter, end: TextIter): void;

        /**
         * Removes a {@link Gtk.Clipboard} added with
         * `gtk_text_buffer_add_selection_clipboard()`.
         * @param clipboard a {@link Gtk.Clipboard} added to `buffer` by             `gtk_text_buffer_add_selection_clipboard()`
         */
        remove_selection_clipboard(clipboard: Clipboard): void;

        /**
         * Emits the “remove-tag” signal. The default handler for the signal
         * removes all occurrences of `tag` from the given range. `start` and
         * `end` don’t have to be in order.
         * @param tag a {@link Gtk.TextTag}
         * @param start one bound of range to be untagged
         * @param end other bound of range to be untagged
         */
        remove_tag(tag: TextTag, start: TextIter, end: TextIter): void;

        /**
         * Calls `gtk_text_tag_table_lookup()` on the buffer’s tag table to
         * get a {@link Gtk.TextTag}, then calls `gtk_text_buffer_remove_tag()`.
         * @param name name of a {@link Gtk.TextTag}
         * @param start one bound of range to be untagged
         * @param end other bound of range to be untagged
         */
        remove_tag_by_name(name: string, start: TextIter, end: TextIter): void;

        /**
         * This function moves the “insert” and “selection_bound” marks
         * simultaneously.  If you move them in two steps
         * with `gtk_text_buffer_move_mark()`, you will temporarily select a
         * region in between their old and new locations, which can be pretty
         * inefficient since the temporarily-selected region will force stuff
         * to be recalculated. This function moves them as a unit, which can
         * be optimized.
         * @param ins where to put the “insert” mark
         * @param bound where to put the “selection_bound” mark
         */
        select_range(ins: TextIter, bound: TextIter): void;

        /**
         * This function serializes the portion of text between `start`
         * and `end` in the rich text format represented by `format`.
         * 
         * `formats` to be used must be registered using
         * `gtk_text_buffer_register_serialize_format()` or
         * `gtk_text_buffer_register_serialize_tagset()` beforehand.
         * @param content_buffer the {@link Gtk.TextBuffer} to serialize
         * @param format the rich text format to use for serializing
         * @param start start of block of text to serialize
         * @param end end of block of test to serialize
         * @returns the serialized               data, encoded as `format`
         */
        serialize(content_buffer: TextBuffer, format: Gdk.Atom, start: TextIter, end: TextIter): Uint8Array;

        /**
         * Used to keep track of whether the buffer has been modified since the
         * last time it was saved. Whenever the buffer is saved to disk, call
         * gtk_text_buffer_set_modified (`buffer`, FALSE). When the buffer is modified,
         * it will automatically toggled on the modified bit again. When the modified
         * bit flips, the buffer emits the {@link Gtk.TextBuffer.SignalSignatures.modified_changed | Gtk.TextBuffer::modified-changed} signal.
         * @param setting modification flag setting
         */
        set_modified(setting: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Deletes current contents of `buffer`, and inserts `text` instead. If
         * `len` is -1, `text` must be nul-terminated. `text` must be valid UTF-8.
         * @param text UTF-8 text to insert
         * @param len length of `text` in bytes
         */
        set_text(text: string, len: number): void;

        /**
         * This function unregisters a rich text format that was previously
         * registered using `gtk_text_buffer_register_deserialize_format()` or
         * `gtk_text_buffer_register_deserialize_tagset()`.
         * @param format a {@link Gdk.Atom} representing a registered rich text format.
         */
        unregister_deserialize_format(format: Gdk.Atom): void;

        /**
         * This function unregisters a rich text format that was previously
         * registered using `gtk_text_buffer_register_serialize_format()` or
         * `gtk_text_buffer_register_serialize_tagset()`
         * @param format a {@link Gdk.Atom} representing a registered rich text format.
         */
        unregister_serialize_format(format: Gdk.Atom): void;
    }


    namespace TextCellAccessible {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends RendererCellAccessible.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::renderer": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-layer": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-mdi-zorder": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-help-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-hypertext-nlinks": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption-object": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-summary": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends RendererCellAccessible.ConstructorProps, Atk.Action.ConstructorProps, Atk.Component.ConstructorProps, Atk.TableCell.ConstructorProps, Atk.Text.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class TextCellAccessible extends RendererCellAccessible implements Atk.Action, Atk.Component, Atk.TableCell, Atk.Text {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<TextCellAccessible>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: TextCellAccessible.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<TextCellAccessible.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof TextCellAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, TextCellAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof TextCellAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, TextCellAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof TextCellAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<TextCellAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        /**
         * Adds a selection bounded by the specified offsets.
         * @param start_offset the starting character offset of the selected region
         * @param end_offset the offset of the first character after the selected region.
         * @returns `true` if successful, `false` otherwise
         */
        add_selection(start_offset: number, end_offset: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Get the ranges of text in the specified bounding box.
         * @param rect An AtkTextRectangle giving the dimensions of the bounding box.
         * @param coord_type Specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or widget window.
         * @param x_clip_type Specify the horizontal clip type.
         * @param y_clip_type Specify the vertical clip type.
         * @returns Array of AtkTextRange. The last          element of the array returned by this function will be NULL.
         */
        get_bounded_ranges(rect: Atk.TextRectangle, coord_type: Atk.CoordType, x_clip_type: Atk.TextClipType, y_clip_type: Atk.TextClipType): Atk.TextRange[];

        /**
         * Gets the offset of the position of the caret (cursor).
         * @returns the character offset of the position of the caret or -1 if          the caret is not located inside the element or in the case of          any other failure.
         */
        get_caret_offset(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the specified text.
         * @param offset a character offset within `text`
         * @returns the character at `offset` or 0 in the case of failure.
         */
        get_character_at_offset(offset: number): string;

        /**
         * Gets the character count.
         * @returns the number of characters or -1 in case of failure.
         */
        get_character_count(): number;

        /**
         * If the extent can not be obtained (e.g. missing support), all of x, y, width,
         * height are set to -1.
         * 
         * Get the bounding box containing the glyph representing the character at
         *     a particular text offset.
         * @param offset The offset of the text character for which bounding information is required.
         * @param coords specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or widget window
         */
        get_character_extents(offset: number, coords: Atk.CoordType): [number, number, number, number];

        /**
         * Creates an {@link Atk.AttributeSet} which consists of the default values of
         * attributes for the text. See the enum AtkTextAttribute for types of text
         * attributes that can be returned. Note that other attributes may also be
         * returned.
         * @returns an {@link Atk.AttributeSet} which contains the default text          attributes for this {@link Atk.Text}. This {@link Atk.AttributeSet} should be freed by          a call to `atk_attribute_set_free()`.
         */
        get_default_attributes(): Atk.AttributeSet;

        /**
         * Gets the number of selected regions.
         * @returns The number of selected regions, or -1 in the case of failure.
         */
        get_n_selections(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the offset of the character located at coordinates `x` and `y`. `x` and `y`
         * are interpreted as being relative to the screen or this widget's window
         * depending on `coords`.
         * @param x screen x-position of character
         * @param y screen y-position of character
         * @param coords specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or widget window
         * @returns the offset to the character which is located at  the specified          `x` and `y` coordinates of -1 in case of failure.
         */
        get_offset_at_point(x: number, y: number, coords: Atk.CoordType): number;

        /**
         * Get the bounding box for text within the specified range.
         * 
         * If the extents can not be obtained (e.g. or missing support), the rectangle
         * fields are set to -1.
         * @param start_offset The offset of the first text character for which boundary        information is required.
         * @param end_offset The offset of the text character after the last character        for which boundary information is required.
         * @param coord_type Specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or widget window.
         */
        get_range_extents(start_offset: number, end_offset: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): Atk.TextRectangle;

        /**
         * Creates an {@link Atk.AttributeSet} which consists of the attributes explicitly
         * set at the position `offset` in the text. `start_offset` and `end_offset` are
         * set to the start and end of the range around `offset` where the attributes are
         * invariant. Note that `end_offset` is the offset of the first character
         * after the range.  See the enum AtkTextAttribute for types of text
         * attributes that can be returned. Note that other attributes may also be
         * returned.
         * @param offset the character offset at which to get the attributes, -1 means the offset of the character to be inserted at the caret location.
         * @returns an {@link Atk.AttributeSet} which contains the attributes         explicitly set at `offset`. This {@link Atk.AttributeSet} should be freed by         a call to `atk_attribute_set_free()`.
         */
        get_run_attributes(offset: number): [Atk.AttributeSet, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the text from the specified selection.
         * @param selection_num The selection number.  The selected regions are assigned numbers that correspond to how far the region is from the start of the text.  The selected region closest to the beginning of the text region is assigned the number 0, etc.  Note that adding, moving or deleting a selected region can change the numbering.
         * @returns a newly allocated string containing the selected text. Use `g_free()`          to free the returned string.
         */
        get_selection(selection_num: number): [string, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets a portion of the text exposed through an {@link Atk.Text} according to a given `offset`
         * and a specific `granularity`, along with the start and end offsets defining the
         * boundaries of such a portion of text.
         * 
         * If `granularity` is ATK_TEXT_GRANULARITY_CHAR the character at the
         * offset is returned.
         * 
         * If `granularity` is ATK_TEXT_GRANULARITY_WORD the returned string
         * is from the word start at or before the offset to the word start after
         * the offset.
         * 
         * The returned string will contain the word at the offset if the offset
         * is inside a word and will contain the word before the offset if the
         * offset is not inside a word.
         * 
         * If `granularity` is ATK_TEXT_GRANULARITY_SENTENCE the returned string
         * is from the sentence start at or before the offset to the sentence
         * start after the offset.
         * 
         * The returned string will contain the sentence at the offset if the offset
         * is inside a sentence and will contain the sentence before the offset
         * if the offset is not inside a sentence.
         * 
         * If `granularity` is ATK_TEXT_GRANULARITY_LINE the returned string
         * is from the line start at or before the offset to the line
         * start after the offset.
         * 
         * If `granularity` is ATK_TEXT_GRANULARITY_PARAGRAPH the returned string
         * is from the start of the paragraph at or before the offset to the start
         * of the following paragraph after the offset.
         * @param offset position
         * @param granularity An {@link Atk.TextGranularity}
         * @returns a newly allocated string containing the text at          the `offset` bounded by the specified `granularity`. Use `g_free()`          to free the returned string.  Returns `null` if the offset is invalid          or no implementation is available.
         */
        get_string_at_offset(offset: number, granularity: Atk.TextGranularity): [string | null, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the specified text.
         * @param start_offset a starting character offset within `text`
         * @param end_offset an ending character offset within `text`, or -1 for the end of the string.
         * @returns a newly allocated string containing the text from `start_offset` up          to, but not including `end_offset`. Use `g_free()` to free the returned          string.
         */
        get_text(start_offset: number, end_offset: number): string;

        /**
         * Gets the specified text.
         * @param offset position
         * @param boundary_type An {@link Atk.TextBoundary}
         * @returns a newly allocated string containing the text after `offset` bounded          by the specified `boundary_type`. Use `g_free()` to free the returned          string.
         */
        get_text_after_offset(offset: number, boundary_type: Atk.TextBoundary): [string, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the specified text.
         * 
         * If the boundary_type if ATK_TEXT_BOUNDARY_CHAR the character at the
         * offset is returned.
         * 
         * If the boundary_type is ATK_TEXT_BOUNDARY_WORD_START the returned string
         * is from the word start at or before the offset to the word start after
         * the offset.
         * 
         * The returned string will contain the word at the offset if the offset
         * is inside a word and will contain the word before the offset if the
         * offset is not inside a word.
         * 
         * If the boundary type is ATK_TEXT_BOUNDARY_SENTENCE_START the returned
         * string is from the sentence start at or before the offset to the sentence
         * start after the offset.
         * 
         * The returned string will contain the sentence at the offset if the offset
         * is inside a sentence and will contain the sentence before the offset
         * if the offset is not inside a sentence.
         * 
         * If the boundary type is ATK_TEXT_BOUNDARY_LINE_START the returned
         * string is from the line start at or before the offset to the line
         * start after the offset.
         * @param offset position
         * @param boundary_type An {@link Atk.TextBoundary}
         * @returns a newly allocated string containing the text at `offset` bounded          by the specified `boundary_type`. Use `g_free()` to free the returned          string.
         */
        get_text_at_offset(offset: number, boundary_type: Atk.TextBoundary): [string, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the specified text.
         * @param offset position
         * @param boundary_type An {@link Atk.TextBoundary}
         * @returns a newly allocated string containing the text before `offset` bounded          by the specified `boundary_type`. Use `g_free()` to free the returned          string.
         */
        get_text_before_offset(offset: number, boundary_type: Atk.TextBoundary): [string, number, number];

        /**
         * Removes the specified selection.
         * @param selection_num The selection number.  The selected regions are assigned numbers that correspond to how far the region is from the start of the text.  The selected region closest to the beginning of the text region is assigned the number 0, etc.  Note that adding, moving or deleting a selected region can change the numbering.
         * @returns `true` if successful, `false` otherwise
         */
        remove_selection(selection_num: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Makes a substring of `text` visible on the screen by scrolling all necessary parents.
         * @param start_offset start offset in the `text`
         * @param end_offset end offset in the `text`, or -1 for the end of the text.
         * @param type specify where the object should be made visible.
         * @returns whether scrolling was successful.
         */
        scroll_substring_to(start_offset: number, end_offset: number, type: Atk.ScrollType): boolean;

        /**
         * Move the top-left of a substring of `text` to a given position of the screen
         * by scrolling all necessary parents.
         * @param start_offset start offset in the `text`
         * @param end_offset end offset in the `text`, or -1 for the end of the text.
         * @param coords specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or to the parent object.
         * @param x x-position where to scroll to
         * @param y y-position where to scroll to
         * @returns whether scrolling was successful.
         */
        scroll_substring_to_point(start_offset: number, end_offset: number, coords: Atk.CoordType, x: number, y: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the caret (cursor) position to the specified `offset`.
         * 
         * In the case of rich-text content, this method should either grab focus
         * or move the sequential focus navigation starting point (if the application
         * supports this concept) as if the user had clicked on the new caret position.
         * Typically, this means that the target of this operation is the node containing
         * the new caret position or one of its ancestors. In other words, after this
         * method is called, if the user advances focus, it should move to the first
         * focusable node following the new caret position.
         * 
         * Calling this method should also scroll the application viewport in a way
         * that matches the behavior of the application's typical caret motion or tab
         * navigation as closely as possible. This also means that if the application's
         * caret motion or focus navigation does not trigger a scroll operation, this
         * method should not trigger one either. If the application does not have a caret
         * motion or focus navigation operation, this method should try to scroll the new
         * caret position into view while minimizing unnecessary scroll motion.
         * @param offset the character offset of the new caret position
         * @returns `true` if successful, `false` otherwise.
         */
        set_caret_offset(offset: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Changes the start and end offset of the specified selection.
         * @param selection_num The selection number.  The selected regions are assigned numbers that correspond to how far the region is from the start of the text.  The selected region closest to the beginning of the text region is assigned the number 0, etc.  Note that adding, moving or deleting a selected region can change the numbering.
         * @param start_offset the new starting character offset of the selection
         * @param end_offset the new end position of (e.g. offset immediately past) the selection
         * @returns `true` if successful, `false` otherwise
         */
        set_selection(selection_num: number, start_offset: number, end_offset: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Adds a selection bounded by the specified offsets.
         * @param start_offset the starting character offset of the selected region
         * @param end_offset the offset of the first character after the selected region.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add_selection(start_offset: number, end_offset: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Get the ranges of text in the specified bounding box.
         * @param rect An AtkTextRectangle giving the dimensions of the bounding box.
         * @param coord_type Specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or widget window.
         * @param x_clip_type Specify the horizontal clip type.
         * @param y_clip_type Specify the vertical clip type.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_bounded_ranges(rect: Atk.TextRectangle, coord_type: Atk.CoordType, x_clip_type: Atk.TextClipType, y_clip_type: Atk.TextClipType): Atk.TextRange[];

        /**
         * Gets the offset of the position of the caret (cursor).
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_caret_offset(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the specified text.
         * @param offset a character offset within `text`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_character_at_offset(offset: number): string;

        /**
         * Gets the character count.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_character_count(): number;

        /**
         * If the extent can not be obtained (e.g. missing support), all of x, y, width,
         * height are set to -1.
         * 
         * Get the bounding box containing the glyph representing the character at
         *     a particular text offset.
         * @param offset The offset of the text character for which bounding information is required.
         * @param coords specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or widget window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_character_extents(offset: number, coords: Atk.CoordType): [number, number, number, number];

        /**
         * Creates an {@link Atk.AttributeSet} which consists of the default values of
         * attributes for the text. See the enum AtkTextAttribute for types of text
         * attributes that can be returned. Note that other attributes may also be
         * returned.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_default_attributes(): Atk.AttributeSet;

        /**
         * Gets the number of selected regions.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_n_selections(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the offset of the character located at coordinates `x` and `y`. `x` and `y`
         * are interpreted as being relative to the screen or this widget's window
         * depending on `coords`.
         * @param x screen x-position of character
         * @param y screen y-position of character
         * @param coords specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or widget window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_offset_at_point(x: number, y: number, coords: Atk.CoordType): number;

        /**
         * Get the bounding box for text within the specified range.
         * 
         * If the extents can not be obtained (e.g. or missing support), the rectangle
         * fields are set to -1.
         * @param start_offset The offset of the first text character for which boundary        information is required.
         * @param end_offset The offset of the text character after the last character        for which boundary information is required.
         * @param coord_type Specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or widget window.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_range_extents(start_offset: number, end_offset: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): Atk.TextRectangle;

        /**
         * Creates an {@link Atk.AttributeSet} which consists of the attributes explicitly
         * set at the position `offset` in the text. `start_offset` and `end_offset` are
         * set to the start and end of the range around `offset` where the attributes are
         * invariant. Note that `end_offset` is the offset of the first character
         * after the range.  See the enum AtkTextAttribute for types of text
         * attributes that can be returned. Note that other attributes may also be
         * returned.
         * @param offset the character offset at which to get the attributes, -1 means the offset of the character to be inserted at the caret location.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_run_attributes(offset: number): [Atk.AttributeSet, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the text from the specified selection.
         * @param selection_num The selection number.  The selected regions are assigned numbers that correspond to how far the region is from the start of the text.  The selected region closest to the beginning of the text region is assigned the number 0, etc.  Note that adding, moving or deleting a selected region can change the numbering.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_selection(selection_num: number): [string, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets a portion of the text exposed through an {@link Atk.Text} according to a given `offset`
         * and a specific `granularity`, along with the start and end offsets defining the
         * boundaries of such a portion of text.
         * 
         * If `granularity` is ATK_TEXT_GRANULARITY_CHAR the character at the
         * offset is returned.
         * 
         * If `granularity` is ATK_TEXT_GRANULARITY_WORD the returned string
         * is from the word start at or before the offset to the word start after
         * the offset.
         * 
         * The returned string will contain the word at the offset if the offset
         * is inside a word and will contain the word before the offset if the
         * offset is not inside a word.
         * 
         * If `granularity` is ATK_TEXT_GRANULARITY_SENTENCE the returned string
         * is from the sentence start at or before the offset to the sentence
         * start after the offset.
         * 
         * The returned string will contain the sentence at the offset if the offset
         * is inside a sentence and will contain the sentence before the offset
         * if the offset is not inside a sentence.
         * 
         * If `granularity` is ATK_TEXT_GRANULARITY_LINE the returned string
         * is from the line start at or before the offset to the line
         * start after the offset.
         * 
         * If `granularity` is ATK_TEXT_GRANULARITY_PARAGRAPH the returned string
         * is from the start of the paragraph at or before the offset to the start
         * of the following paragraph after the offset.
         * @param offset position
         * @param granularity An {@link Atk.TextGranularity}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_string_at_offset(offset: number, granularity: Atk.TextGranularity): [string | null, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the specified text.
         * @param start_offset a starting character offset within `text`
         * @param end_offset an ending character offset within `text`, or -1 for the end of the string.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_text(start_offset: number, end_offset: number): string;

        /**
         * Gets the specified text.
         * @param offset position
         * @param boundary_type An {@link Atk.TextBoundary}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_text_after_offset(offset: number, boundary_type: Atk.TextBoundary): [string, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the specified text.
         * 
         * If the boundary_type if ATK_TEXT_BOUNDARY_CHAR the character at the
         * offset is returned.
         * 
         * If the boundary_type is ATK_TEXT_BOUNDARY_WORD_START the returned string
         * is from the word start at or before the offset to the word start after
         * the offset.
         * 
         * The returned string will contain the word at the offset if the offset
         * is inside a word and will contain the word before the offset if the
         * offset is not inside a word.
         * 
         * If the boundary type is ATK_TEXT_BOUNDARY_SENTENCE_START the returned
         * string is from the sentence start at or before the offset to the sentence
         * start after the offset.
         * 
         * The returned string will contain the sentence at the offset if the offset
         * is inside a sentence and will contain the sentence before the offset
         * if the offset is not inside a sentence.
         * 
         * If the boundary type is ATK_TEXT_BOUNDARY_LINE_START the returned
         * string is from the line start at or before the offset to the line
         * start after the offset.
         * @param offset position
         * @param boundary_type An {@link Atk.TextBoundary}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_text_at_offset(offset: number, boundary_type: Atk.TextBoundary): [string, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the specified text.
         * @param offset position
         * @param boundary_type An {@link Atk.TextBoundary}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_text_before_offset(offset: number, boundary_type: Atk.TextBoundary): [string, number, number];

        /**
         * Removes the specified selection.
         * @param selection_num The selection number.  The selected regions are assigned numbers that correspond to how far the region is from the start of the text.  The selected region closest to the beginning of the text region is assigned the number 0, etc.  Note that adding, moving or deleting a selected region can change the numbering.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_remove_selection(selection_num: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Makes a substring of `text` visible on the screen by scrolling all necessary parents.
         * @param start_offset start offset in the `text`
         * @param end_offset end offset in the `text`, or -1 for the end of the text.
         * @param type specify where the object should be made visible.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_scroll_substring_to(start_offset: number, end_offset: number, type: Atk.ScrollType): boolean;

        /**
         * Move the top-left of a substring of `text` to a given position of the screen
         * by scrolling all necessary parents.
         * @param start_offset start offset in the `text`
         * @param end_offset end offset in the `text`, or -1 for the end of the text.
         * @param coords specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or to the parent object.
         * @param x x-position where to scroll to
         * @param y y-position where to scroll to
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_scroll_substring_to_point(start_offset: number, end_offset: number, coords: Atk.CoordType, x: number, y: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the caret (cursor) position to the specified `offset`.
         * 
         * In the case of rich-text content, this method should either grab focus
         * or move the sequential focus navigation starting point (if the application
         * supports this concept) as if the user had clicked on the new caret position.
         * Typically, this means that the target of this operation is the node containing
         * the new caret position or one of its ancestors. In other words, after this
         * method is called, if the user advances focus, it should move to the first
         * focusable node following the new caret position.
         * 
         * Calling this method should also scroll the application viewport in a way
         * that matches the behavior of the application's typical caret motion or tab
         * navigation as closely as possible. This also means that if the application's
         * caret motion or focus navigation does not trigger a scroll operation, this
         * method should not trigger one either. If the application does not have a caret
         * motion or focus navigation operation, this method should try to scroll the new
         * caret position into view while minimizing unnecessary scroll motion.
         * @param offset the character offset of the new caret position
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_caret_offset(offset: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Changes the start and end offset of the specified selection.
         * @param selection_num The selection number.  The selected regions are assigned numbers that correspond to how far the region is from the start of the text.  The selected region closest to the beginning of the text region is assigned the number 0, etc.  Note that adding, moving or deleting a selected region can change the numbering.
         * @param start_offset the new starting character offset of the selection
         * @param end_offset the new end position of (e.g. offset immediately past) the selection
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_selection(selection_num: number, start_offset: number, end_offset: number): boolean;

        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_text_attributes_changed(): void;

        /**
         * @param location 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_text_caret_moved(location: number): void;

        /**
         * the signal handler which is executed when there is a
         *   text change. This virtual function is deprecated sice 2.9.4 and
         *   it should not be overriden.
         * @param position 
         * @param length 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_text_changed(position: number, length: number): void;

        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_text_selection_changed(): void;
    }


    namespace TextChildAnchor {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends GObject.Object.SignalSignatures {}

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.Object.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * A {@link Gtk.TextChildAnchor} is a spot in the buffer where child widgets can
     * be “anchored” (inserted inline, as if they were characters). The anchor
     * can have multiple widgets anchored, to allow for multiple views.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class TextChildAnchor extends GObject.Object {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<TextChildAnchor>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: TextChildAnchor.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<TextChildAnchor.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): TextChildAnchor;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof TextChildAnchor.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, TextChildAnchor.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof TextChildAnchor.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, TextChildAnchor.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof TextChildAnchor.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<TextChildAnchor.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Determines whether a child anchor has been deleted from
         * the buffer. Keep in mind that the child anchor will be
         * unreferenced when removed from the buffer, so you need to
         * hold your own reference (with `g_object_ref()`) if you plan
         * to use this function — otherwise all deleted child anchors
         * will also be finalized.
         * @returns `true` if the child anchor has been deleted from its buffer
         */
        get_deleted(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets a list of all widgets anchored at this child anchor.
         * The returned list should be freed with `g_list_free()`.
         * @returns list of widgets anchored at `anchor`
         */
        get_widgets(): Widget[];
    }


    namespace TextMark {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends GObject.Object.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::left-gravity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.Object.ConstructorProps {
            left_gravity: boolean;
            leftGravity: boolean;
            name: string | null;
        }
    }

    /**
     * You may wish to begin by reading the
     * [text widget conceptual overview](https://docs.gtk.org/gtk3/TextWidget.html)
     * which gives an overview of all the objects and data
     * types related to the text widget and how they work together.
     * 
     * A {@link Gtk.TextMark} is like a bookmark in a text buffer; it preserves a position in
     * the text. You can convert the mark to an iterator using
     * `gtk_text_buffer_get_iter_at_mark()`. Unlike iterators, marks remain valid across
     * buffer mutations, because their behavior is defined when text is inserted or
     * deleted. When text containing a mark is deleted, the mark remains in the
     * position originally occupied by the deleted text. When text is inserted at a
     * mark, a mark with “left gravity” will be moved to the
     * beginning of the newly-inserted text, and a mark with “right
     * gravity” will be moved to the end.
     * 
     * Note that “left” and “right” here refer to logical direction (left
     * is the toward the start of the buffer); in some languages such as
     * Hebrew the logically-leftmost text is not actually on the left when
     * displayed.
     * 
     * Marks are reference counted, but the reference count only controls the validity
     * of the memory; marks can be deleted from the buffer at any time with
     * `gtk_text_buffer_delete_mark()`. Once deleted from the buffer, a mark is
     * essentially useless.
     * 
     * Marks optionally have names; these can be convenient to avoid passing the
     * {@link Gtk.TextMark} object around.
     * 
     * Marks are typically created using the `gtk_text_buffer_create_mark()` function.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class TextMark extends GObject.Object {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<TextMark>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * Whether the mark has left gravity. When text is inserted at the mark’s
         * current location, if the mark has left gravity it will be moved
         * to the left of the newly-inserted text, otherwise to the right.
         * @construct-only
         * @default false
         */
        get left_gravity(): boolean;

        /**
         * Whether the mark has left gravity. When text is inserted at the mark’s
         * current location, if the mark has left gravity it will be moved
         * to the left of the newly-inserted text, otherwise to the right.
         * @construct-only
         * @default false
         */
        get leftGravity(): boolean;

        /**
         * The name of the mark or `null` if the mark is anonymous.
         * @construct-only
         * @default null
         */
        get name(): string | null;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: TextMark.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<TextMark.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](name: string | null, left_gravity: boolean): TextMark;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof TextMark.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, TextMark.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof TextMark.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, TextMark.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof TextMark.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<TextMark.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Gets the buffer this mark is located inside,
         * or `null` if the mark is deleted.
         * @returns the mark’s {@link Gtk.TextBuffer}
         */
        get_buffer(): TextBuffer;

        /**
         * Returns `true` if the mark has been removed from its buffer
         * with `gtk_text_buffer_delete_mark()`. See `gtk_text_buffer_add_mark()`
         * for a way to add it to a buffer again.
         * @returns whether the mark is deleted
         */
        get_deleted(): boolean;

        /**
         * Determines whether the mark has left gravity.
         * @returns `true` if the mark has left gravity, `false` otherwise
         */
        get_left_gravity(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the mark name; returns NULL for anonymous marks.
         * @returns mark name
         */
        get_name(): string | null;

        /**
         * Returns `true` if the mark is visible (i.e. a cursor is displayed
         * for it).
         * @returns `true` if visible
         */
        get_visible(): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the visibility of `mark`; the insertion point is normally
         * visible, i.e. you can see it as a vertical bar. Also, the text
         * widget uses a visible mark to indicate where a drop will occur when
         * dragging-and-dropping text. Most other marks are not visible.
         * Marks are not visible by default.
         * @param setting visibility of mark
         */
        set_visible(setting: boolean): void;
    }


    namespace TextTag {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends GObject.Object.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * The ::event signal is emitted when an event occurs on a region of the
             * buffer marked with this tag.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            event: (arg0: GObject.Object, arg1: Gdk.Event, arg2: TextIter) => boolean | void;
            "notify::accumulative-margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::background": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::background-full-height": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::background-full-height-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::background-gdk": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::background-rgba": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::background-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::direction": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::editable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::editable-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::fallback": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::fallback-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::family": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::family-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::font": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::font-desc": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::font-features": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::font-features-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::foreground": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::foreground-gdk": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::foreground-rgba": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::foreground-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::indent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::indent-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::invisible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::invisible-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::justification": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::justification-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::language": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::language-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::left-margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::left-margin-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::letter-spacing": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::letter-spacing-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::paragraph-background": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::paragraph-background-gdk": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::paragraph-background-rgba": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::paragraph-background-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::pixels-above-lines": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::pixels-above-lines-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::pixels-below-lines": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::pixels-below-lines-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::pixels-inside-wrap": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::pixels-inside-wrap-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::right-margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::right-margin-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::rise": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::rise-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::size": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::size-points": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::size-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::stretch": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::stretch-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::strikethrough": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::strikethrough-rgba": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::strikethrough-rgba-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::strikethrough-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tabs": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tabs-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::underline": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::underline-rgba": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::underline-rgba-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::underline-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::variant": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::variant-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::weight": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::weight-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::wrap-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::wrap-mode-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.Object.ConstructorProps {
            accumulative_margin: boolean;
            accumulativeMargin: boolean;
            background: string;
            background_full_height: boolean;
            backgroundFullHeight: boolean;
            background_full_height_set: boolean;
            backgroundFullHeightSet: boolean;
            background_gdk: Gdk.Color;
            backgroundGdk: Gdk.Color;
            background_rgba: Gdk.RGBA;
            backgroundRgba: Gdk.RGBA;
            background_set: boolean;
            backgroundSet: boolean;
            direction: TextDirection;
            editable: boolean;
            editable_set: boolean;
            editableSet: boolean;
            fallback: boolean;
            fallback_set: boolean;
            fallbackSet: boolean;
            family: string;
            family_set: boolean;
            familySet: boolean;
            font: string;
            font_desc: Pango.FontDescription;
            fontDesc: Pango.FontDescription;
            font_features: string;
            fontFeatures: string;
            font_features_set: boolean;
            fontFeaturesSet: boolean;
            foreground: string;
            foreground_gdk: Gdk.Color;
            foregroundGdk: Gdk.Color;
            foreground_rgba: Gdk.RGBA;
            foregroundRgba: Gdk.RGBA;
            foreground_set: boolean;
            foregroundSet: boolean;
            indent: number;
            indent_set: boolean;
            indentSet: boolean;
            invisible: boolean;
            invisible_set: boolean;
            invisibleSet: boolean;
            justification: Justification;
            justification_set: boolean;
            justificationSet: boolean;
            language: string;
            language_set: boolean;
            languageSet: boolean;
            left_margin: number;
            leftMargin: number;
            left_margin_set: boolean;
            leftMarginSet: boolean;
            letter_spacing: number;
            letterSpacing: number;
            letter_spacing_set: boolean;
            letterSpacingSet: boolean;
            name: string;
            paragraph_background: string;
            paragraphBackground: string;
            paragraph_background_gdk: Gdk.Color;
            paragraphBackgroundGdk: Gdk.Color;
            paragraph_background_rgba: Gdk.RGBA;
            paragraphBackgroundRgba: Gdk.RGBA;
            paragraph_background_set: boolean;
            paragraphBackgroundSet: boolean;
            pixels_above_lines: number;
            pixelsAboveLines: number;
            pixels_above_lines_set: boolean;
            pixelsAboveLinesSet: boolean;
            pixels_below_lines: number;
            pixelsBelowLines: number;
            pixels_below_lines_set: boolean;
            pixelsBelowLinesSet: boolean;
            pixels_inside_wrap: number;
            pixelsInsideWrap: number;
            pixels_inside_wrap_set: boolean;
            pixelsInsideWrapSet: boolean;
            right_margin: number;
            rightMargin: number;
            right_margin_set: boolean;
            rightMarginSet: boolean;
            rise: number;
            rise_set: boolean;
            riseSet: boolean;
            scale: number;
            scale_set: boolean;
            scaleSet: boolean;
            size: number;
            size_points: number;
            sizePoints: number;
            size_set: boolean;
            sizeSet: boolean;
            stretch: Pango.Stretch;
            stretch_set: boolean;
            stretchSet: boolean;
            strikethrough: boolean;
            strikethrough_rgba: Gdk.RGBA;
            strikethroughRgba: Gdk.RGBA;
            strikethrough_rgba_set: boolean;
            strikethroughRgbaSet: boolean;
            strikethrough_set: boolean;
            strikethroughSet: boolean;
            style: Pango.Style;
            style_set: boolean;
            styleSet: boolean;
            tabs: Pango.TabArray;
            tabs_set: boolean;
            tabsSet: boolean;
            underline: Pango.Underline;
            underline_rgba: Gdk.RGBA;
            underlineRgba: Gdk.RGBA;
            underline_rgba_set: boolean;
            underlineRgbaSet: boolean;
            underline_set: boolean;
            underlineSet: boolean;
            variant: Pango.Variant;
            variant_set: boolean;
            variantSet: boolean;
            weight: number;
            weight_set: boolean;
            weightSet: boolean;
            wrap_mode: WrapMode;
            wrapMode: WrapMode;
            wrap_mode_set: boolean;
            wrapModeSet: boolean;
        }
    }

    /**
     * You may wish to begin by reading the
     * [text widget conceptual overview](https://docs.gtk.org/gtk3/TextWidget.html)
     * which gives an overview of all the objects and
     * data types related to the text widget and how they work together.
     * 
     * Tags should be in the {@link Gtk.TextTagTable} for a given {@link Gtk.TextBuffer}
     * before using them with that buffer.
     * 
     * `gtk_text_buffer_create_tag()` is the best way to create tags.
     * See “gtk3-demo” for numerous examples.
     * 
     * For each property of {@link Gtk.TextTag}, there is a “set” property, e.g.
     * “font-set” corresponds to “font”. These “set” properties reflect
     * whether a property has been set or not.
     * They are maintained by GTK+ and you should not set them independently.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class TextTag extends GObject.Object {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<TextTag>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * Whether the margins accumulate or override each other.
         * 
         * When set to `true` the margins of this tag are added to the margins
         * of any other non-accumulative margins present. When set to `false`
         * the margins override one another (the default).
         * @since 2.12
         * @default false
         */
        get accumulative_margin(): boolean;
        set accumulative_margin(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether the margins accumulate or override each other.
         * 
         * When set to `true` the margins of this tag are added to the margins
         * of any other non-accumulative margins present. When set to `false`
         * the margins override one another (the default).
         * @since 2.12
         * @default false
         */
        get accumulativeMargin(): boolean;
        set accumulativeMargin(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @write-only
         * @default null
         */
        set background(val: string);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get background_full_height(): boolean;
        set background_full_height(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get backgroundFullHeight(): boolean;
        set backgroundFullHeight(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get background_full_height_set(): boolean;
        set background_full_height_set(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get backgroundFullHeightSet(): boolean;
        set backgroundFullHeightSet(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Background color as a {@link Gdk.Color}.
         * @deprecated since 3.4: Use {@link Gtk.TextTag.background_rgba} instead.
         */
        get background_gdk(): Gdk.Color;
        set background_gdk(val: Gdk.Color);

        /**
         * Background color as a {@link Gdk.Color}.
         * @deprecated since 3.4: Use {@link Gtk.TextTag.background_rgba} instead.
         */
        get backgroundGdk(): Gdk.Color;
        set backgroundGdk(val: Gdk.Color);

        /**
         * Background color as a {@link Gdk.RGBA}.
         * @since 3.2
         */
        get background_rgba(): Gdk.RGBA;
        set background_rgba(val: Gdk.RGBA);

        /**
         * Background color as a {@link Gdk.RGBA}.
         * @since 3.2
         */
        get backgroundRgba(): Gdk.RGBA;
        set backgroundRgba(val: Gdk.RGBA);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get background_set(): boolean;
        set background_set(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get backgroundSet(): boolean;
        set backgroundSet(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default Gtk.TextDirection.NONE
         */
        get direction(): TextDirection;
        set direction(val: TextDirection);

        /**
         * @default true
         */
        get editable(): boolean;
        set editable(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get editable_set(): boolean;
        set editable_set(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get editableSet(): boolean;
        set editableSet(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether font fallback is enabled.
         * 
         * When set to `true`, other fonts will be substituted
         * where the current font is missing glyphs.
         * @since 3.16
         * @default true
         */
        get fallback(): boolean;
        set fallback(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get fallback_set(): boolean;
        set fallback_set(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get fallbackSet(): boolean;
        set fallbackSet(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default null
         */
        get family(): string;
        set family(val: string);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get family_set(): boolean;
        set family_set(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get familySet(): boolean;
        set familySet(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Font description as string, e.g. \"Sans Italic 12\".
         * 
         * Note that the initial value of this property depends on
         * the internals of {@link Pango.FontDescription}.
         * @default null
         */
        get font(): string;
        set font(val: string);

        get font_desc(): Pango.FontDescription;
        set font_desc(val: Pango.FontDescription);

        get fontDesc(): Pango.FontDescription;
        set fontDesc(val: Pango.FontDescription);

        /**
         * OpenType font features, as a string.
         * @since 3.18
         * @default null
         */
        get font_features(): string;
        set font_features(val: string);

        /**
         * OpenType font features, as a string.
         * @since 3.18
         * @default null
         */
        get fontFeatures(): string;
        set fontFeatures(val: string);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get font_features_set(): boolean;
        set font_features_set(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get fontFeaturesSet(): boolean;
        set fontFeaturesSet(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @write-only
         * @default null
         */
        set foreground(val: string);

        /**
         * Foreground color as a {@link Gdk.Color}.
         * @deprecated since 3.4: Use {@link Gtk.TextTag.foreground_rgba} instead.
         */
        get foreground_gdk(): Gdk.Color;
        set foreground_gdk(val: Gdk.Color);

        /**
         * Foreground color as a {@link Gdk.Color}.
         * @deprecated since 3.4: Use {@link Gtk.TextTag.foreground_rgba} instead.
         */
        get foregroundGdk(): Gdk.Color;
        set foregroundGdk(val: Gdk.Color);

        /**
         * Foreground color as a {@link Gdk.RGBA}.
         * @since 3.2
         */
        get foreground_rgba(): Gdk.RGBA;
        set foreground_rgba(val: Gdk.RGBA);

        /**
         * Foreground color as a {@link Gdk.RGBA}.
         * @since 3.2
         */
        get foregroundRgba(): Gdk.RGBA;
        set foregroundRgba(val: Gdk.RGBA);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get foreground_set(): boolean;
        set foreground_set(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get foregroundSet(): boolean;
        set foregroundSet(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default 0
         */
        get indent(): number;
        set indent(val: number);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get indent_set(): boolean;
        set indent_set(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get indentSet(): boolean;
        set indentSet(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether this text is hidden.
         * 
         * Note that there may still be problems with the support for invisible
         * text, in particular when navigating programmatically inside a buffer
         * containing invisible segments.
         * @since 2.8
         * @default false
         */
        get invisible(): boolean;
        set invisible(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get invisible_set(): boolean;
        set invisible_set(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get invisibleSet(): boolean;
        set invisibleSet(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default Gtk.Justification.LEFT
         */
        get justification(): Justification;
        set justification(val: Justification);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get justification_set(): boolean;
        set justification_set(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get justificationSet(): boolean;
        set justificationSet(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The language this text is in, as an ISO code. Pango can use this as a
         * hint when rendering the text. If not set, an appropriate default will be
         * used.
         * 
         * Note that the initial value of this property depends on the current
         * locale, see also `gtk_get_default_language()`.
         * @default null
         */
        get language(): string;
        set language(val: string);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get language_set(): boolean;
        set language_set(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get languageSet(): boolean;
        set languageSet(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default 0
         */
        get left_margin(): number;
        set left_margin(val: number);

        /**
         * @default 0
         */
        get leftMargin(): number;
        set leftMargin(val: number);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get left_margin_set(): boolean;
        set left_margin_set(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get leftMarginSet(): boolean;
        set leftMarginSet(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Extra spacing between graphemes, in Pango units.
         * @since 3.16
         * @default 0
         */
        get letter_spacing(): number;
        set letter_spacing(val: number);

        /**
         * Extra spacing between graphemes, in Pango units.
         * @since 3.16
         * @default 0
         */
        get letterSpacing(): number;
        set letterSpacing(val: number);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get letter_spacing_set(): boolean;
        set letter_spacing_set(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get letterSpacingSet(): boolean;
        set letterSpacingSet(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @construct-only
         * @default null
         */
        get name(): string;

        /**
         * The paragraph background color as a string.
         * @since 2.8
         * @write-only
         * @default null
         */
        set paragraph_background(val: string);

        /**
         * The paragraph background color as a string.
         * @since 2.8
         * @write-only
         * @default null
         */
        set paragraphBackground(val: string);

        /**
         * The paragraph background color as a {@link Gdk.Color}.
         * @since 2.8
         * @deprecated since 3.4: Use {@link Gtk.TextTag.paragraph_background_rgba} instead.
         */
        get paragraph_background_gdk(): Gdk.Color;
        set paragraph_background_gdk(val: Gdk.Color);

        /**
         * The paragraph background color as a {@link Gdk.Color}.
         * @since 2.8
         * @deprecated since 3.4: Use {@link Gtk.TextTag.paragraph_background_rgba} instead.
         */
        get paragraphBackgroundGdk(): Gdk.Color;
        set paragraphBackgroundGdk(val: Gdk.Color);

        /**
         * The paragraph background color as a {@link Gdk.RGBA}.
         * @since 3.2
         */
        get paragraph_background_rgba(): Gdk.RGBA;
        set paragraph_background_rgba(val: Gdk.RGBA);

        /**
         * The paragraph background color as a {@link Gdk.RGBA}.
         * @since 3.2
         */
        get paragraphBackgroundRgba(): Gdk.RGBA;
        set paragraphBackgroundRgba(val: Gdk.RGBA);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get paragraph_background_set(): boolean;
        set paragraph_background_set(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get paragraphBackgroundSet(): boolean;
        set paragraphBackgroundSet(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default 0
         */
        get pixels_above_lines(): number;
        set pixels_above_lines(val: number);

        /**
         * @default 0
         */
        get pixelsAboveLines(): number;
        set pixelsAboveLines(val: number);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get pixels_above_lines_set(): boolean;
        set pixels_above_lines_set(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get pixelsAboveLinesSet(): boolean;
        set pixelsAboveLinesSet(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default 0
         */
        get pixels_below_lines(): number;
        set pixels_below_lines(val: number);

        /**
         * @default 0
         */
        get pixelsBelowLines(): number;
        set pixelsBelowLines(val: number);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get pixels_below_lines_set(): boolean;
        set pixels_below_lines_set(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get pixelsBelowLinesSet(): boolean;
        set pixelsBelowLinesSet(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default 0
         */
        get pixels_inside_wrap(): number;
        set pixels_inside_wrap(val: number);

        /**
         * @default 0
         */
        get pixelsInsideWrap(): number;
        set pixelsInsideWrap(val: number);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get pixels_inside_wrap_set(): boolean;
        set pixels_inside_wrap_set(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get pixelsInsideWrapSet(): boolean;
        set pixelsInsideWrapSet(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default 0
         */
        get right_margin(): number;
        set right_margin(val: number);

        /**
         * @default 0
         */
        get rightMargin(): number;
        set rightMargin(val: number);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get right_margin_set(): boolean;
        set right_margin_set(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get rightMarginSet(): boolean;
        set rightMarginSet(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default 0
         */
        get rise(): number;
        set rise(val: number);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get rise_set(): boolean;
        set rise_set(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get riseSet(): boolean;
        set riseSet(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default 1
         */
        get scale(): number;
        set scale(val: number);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get scale_set(): boolean;
        set scale_set(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get scaleSet(): boolean;
        set scaleSet(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default 0
         */
        get size(): number;
        set size(val: number);

        /**
         * @default 0
         */
        get size_points(): number;
        set size_points(val: number);

        /**
         * @default 0
         */
        get sizePoints(): number;
        set sizePoints(val: number);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get size_set(): boolean;
        set size_set(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get sizeSet(): boolean;
        set sizeSet(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default Pango.Stretch.NORMAL
         */
        get stretch(): Pango.Stretch;
        set stretch(val: Pango.Stretch);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get stretch_set(): boolean;
        set stretch_set(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get stretchSet(): boolean;
        set stretchSet(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get strikethrough(): boolean;
        set strikethrough(val: boolean);

        /**
         * This property modifies the color of strikeouts. If not set, strikeouts
         * will use the forground color.
         * @since 3.16
         */
        get strikethrough_rgba(): Gdk.RGBA;
        set strikethrough_rgba(val: Gdk.RGBA);

        /**
         * This property modifies the color of strikeouts. If not set, strikeouts
         * will use the forground color.
         * @since 3.16
         */
        get strikethroughRgba(): Gdk.RGBA;
        set strikethroughRgba(val: Gdk.RGBA);

        /**
         * If the {@link Gtk.TextTag.strikethrough_rgba} property has been set.
         * @since 3.16
         * @default false
         */
        get strikethrough_rgba_set(): boolean;
        set strikethrough_rgba_set(val: boolean);

        /**
         * If the {@link Gtk.TextTag.strikethrough_rgba} property has been set.
         * @since 3.16
         * @default false
         */
        get strikethroughRgbaSet(): boolean;
        set strikethroughRgbaSet(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get strikethrough_set(): boolean;
        set strikethrough_set(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get strikethroughSet(): boolean;
        set strikethroughSet(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default Pango.Style.NORMAL
         */
        get style(): Pango.Style;
        set style(val: Pango.Style);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get style_set(): boolean;
        set style_set(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get styleSet(): boolean;
        set styleSet(val: boolean);

        get tabs(): Pango.TabArray;
        set tabs(val: Pango.TabArray);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get tabs_set(): boolean;
        set tabs_set(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get tabsSet(): boolean;
        set tabsSet(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default Pango.Underline.NONE
         */
        get underline(): Pango.Underline;
        set underline(val: Pango.Underline);

        /**
         * This property modifies the color of underlines. If not set, underlines
         * will use the forground color.
         * 
         * If {@link Gtk.TextTag.underline} is set to {@link Pango.Underline.ERROR}, an alternate
         * color may be applied instead of the foreground. Setting this property
         * will always override those defaults.
         * @since 3.16
         */
        get underline_rgba(): Gdk.RGBA;
        set underline_rgba(val: Gdk.RGBA);

        /**
         * This property modifies the color of underlines. If not set, underlines
         * will use the forground color.
         * 
         * If {@link Gtk.TextTag.underline} is set to {@link Pango.Underline.ERROR}, an alternate
         * color may be applied instead of the foreground. Setting this property
         * will always override those defaults.
         * @since 3.16
         */
        get underlineRgba(): Gdk.RGBA;
        set underlineRgba(val: Gdk.RGBA);

        /**
         * If the {@link Gtk.TextTag.underline_rgba} property has been set.
         * @since 3.16
         * @default false
         */
        get underline_rgba_set(): boolean;
        set underline_rgba_set(val: boolean);

        /**
         * If the {@link Gtk.TextTag.underline_rgba} property has been set.
         * @since 3.16
         * @default false
         */
        get underlineRgbaSet(): boolean;
        set underlineRgbaSet(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get underline_set(): boolean;
        set underline_set(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get underlineSet(): boolean;
        set underlineSet(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default Pango.Variant.NORMAL
         */
        get variant(): Pango.Variant;
        set variant(val: Pango.Variant);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get variant_set(): boolean;
        set variant_set(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get variantSet(): boolean;
        set variantSet(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default 400
         */
        get weight(): number;
        set weight(val: number);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get weight_set(): boolean;
        set weight_set(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get weightSet(): boolean;
        set weightSet(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default Gtk.WrapMode.NONE
         */
        get wrap_mode(): WrapMode;
        set wrap_mode(val: WrapMode);

        /**
         * @default Gtk.WrapMode.NONE
         */
        get wrapMode(): WrapMode;
        set wrapMode(val: WrapMode);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get wrap_mode_set(): boolean;
        set wrap_mode_set(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get wrapModeSet(): boolean;
        set wrapModeSet(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: TextTag.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<TextTag.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](name: string | null): TextTag;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof TextTag.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, TextTag.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof TextTag.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, TextTag.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof TextTag.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<TextTag.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * Emits the “event” signal on the {@link Gtk.TextTag}.
         * @param event_object object that received the event, such as a widget
         * @param event the event
         * @param iter location where the event was received
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_event(event_object: GObject.Object, event: Gdk.Event, iter: TextIter): boolean;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.TextTagTable.SignalSignatures.tag_changed | Gtk.TextTagTable::tag-changed} signal on the {@link Gtk.TextTagTable} where
         * the tag is included.
         * 
         * The signal is already emitted when setting a {@link Gtk.TextTag} property. This
         * function is useful for a {@link Gtk.TextTag} subclass.
         * @param size_changed whether the change affects the {@link Gtk.TextView} layout.
         */
        changed(size_changed: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Emits the “event” signal on the {@link Gtk.TextTag}.
         * @param event_object object that received the event, such as a widget
         * @param event the event
         * @param iter location where the event was received
         * @returns result of signal emission (whether the event was handled)
         */
        event(event_object: GObject.Object, event: Gdk.Event, iter: TextIter): boolean;

        /**
         * Get the tag priority.
         * @returns The tag’s priority.
         */
        get_priority(): number;

        /**
         * Sets the priority of a {@link Gtk.TextTag}. Valid priorities
         * start at 0 and go to one less than `gtk_text_tag_table_get_size()`.
         * Each tag in a table has a unique priority; setting the priority
         * of one tag shifts the priorities of all the other tags in the
         * table to maintain a unique priority for each tag. Higher priority
         * tags “win” if two tags both set the same text attribute. When adding
         * a tag to a tag table, it will be assigned the highest priority in
         * the table by default; so normally the precedence of a set of tags
         * is the order in which they were added to the table, or created with
         * `gtk_text_buffer_create_tag()`, which adds the tag to the buffer’s table
         * automatically.
         * @param priority the new priority
         */
        set_priority(priority: number): void;
    }


    namespace TextTagTable {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends GObject.Object.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "tag-added": (arg0: TextTag) => void;
            /**
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "tag-changed": (arg0: TextTag, arg1: boolean) => void;
            /**
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "tag-removed": (arg0: TextTag) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.Object.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * You may wish to begin by reading the
     * [text widget conceptual overview](https://docs.gtk.org/gtk3/TextWidget.html)
     * which gives an overview of all the objects and
     * data types related to the text widget and how they work together.
     * 
     * # GtkTextTagTables as GtkBuildable
     * 
     * The GtkTextTagTable implementation of the GtkBuildable interface
     * supports adding tags by specifying “tag” as the “type” attribute
     * of a `<child>` element.
     * 
     * An example of a UI definition fragment specifying tags:
     * 
     * 
     * ```xml
     * <object class="GtkTextTagTable">
     *  <child type="tag">
     *    <object class="GtkTextTag"/>
     *  </child>
     * </object>
     * ```
     * 
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class TextTagTable extends GObject.Object implements Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<TextTagTable>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: TextTagTable.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<TextTagTable.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): TextTagTable;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof TextTagTable.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, TextTagTable.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof TextTagTable.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, TextTagTable.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof TextTagTable.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<TextTagTable.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * @param tag 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_tag_added(tag: TextTag): void;

        /**
         * @param tag 
         * @param size_changed 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_tag_changed(tag: TextTag, size_changed: boolean): void;

        /**
         * @param tag 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_tag_removed(tag: TextTag): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Add a tag to the table. The tag is assigned the highest priority
         * in the table.
         * 
         * `tag` must not be in a tag table already, and may not have
         * the same name as an already-added tag.
         * @param tag a {@link Gtk.TextTag}
         * @returns `true` on success.
         */
        add(tag: TextTag): boolean;

        /**
         * Calls `func` on each tag in `table`, with user data `data`.
         * Note that the table may not be modified while iterating
         * over it (you can’t add/remove tags).
         * @param func a function to call on each tag
         */
        foreach(func: TextTagTableForeach): void;

        /**
         * Returns the size of the table (number of tags)
         * @returns number of tags in `table`
         */
        get_size(): number;

        /**
         * Look up a named tag.
         * @param name name of a tag
         * @returns The tag, or `null` if none by that name is in the table.
         */
        lookup(name: string): TextTag | null;

        /**
         * Remove a tag from the table. If a {@link Gtk.TextBuffer} has `table` as its tag table,
         * the tag is removed from the buffer. The table’s reference to the tag is
         * removed, so the tag will end up destroyed if you don’t have a reference to
         * it.
         * @param tag a {@link Gtk.TextTag}
         */
        remove(tag: TextTag): void;

        /**
         * Adds a child to `buildable`. `type` is an optional string
         * describing how the child should be added.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child to add
         * @param type kind of child or `null`
         */
        add_child(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object, type: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Constructs a child of `buildable` with the name `name`.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} calls this function if a “constructor” has been
         * specified in the UI definition.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param name name of child to construct
         * @returns the constructed child
         */
        construct_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, name: string): T;

        /**
         * This is similar to `gtk_buildable_parser_finished()` but is
         * called once for each custom tag handled by the `buildable`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname the name of the tag
         * @param data user data created in custom_tag_start
         */
        custom_finished(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
         * the buildable.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @param data user data that will be passed in to parser functions
         */
        custom_tag_end(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called for each unknown element under `<child>`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @returns `true` if a object has a custom implementation, `false`          if it doesn't.
         */
        custom_tag_start(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string): [boolean, GLib.MarkupParser, null];

        /**
         * Get the internal child called `childname` of the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param childname name of child
         * @returns the internal child of the buildable object
         */
        get_internal_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, childname: string): T;

        /**
         * Gets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} sets the name based on the
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI]
         * used to construct the `buildable`.
         * @returns the name set with `gtk_buildable_set_name()`
         */
        get_name(): string;

        /**
         * Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI].
         * Note that this will be called once for each time
         * `gtk_builder_add_from_file()` or `gtk_builder_add_from_string()`
         * is called on a builder.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         */
        parser_finished(builder: Builder): void;

        /**
         * Sets the property name `name` to `value` on the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param name name of property
         * @param value value of property
         */
        set_buildable_property(builder: Builder, name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;

        /**
         * Sets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * @param name name to set
         */
        set_name(name: string): void;

        /**
         * Adds a child to `buildable`. `type` is an optional string
         * describing how the child should be added.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child to add
         * @param type kind of child or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add_child(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object, type: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Constructs a child of `buildable` with the name `name`.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} calls this function if a “constructor” has been
         * specified in the UI definition.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param name name of child to construct
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_construct_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, name: string): T;

        /**
         * This is similar to `gtk_buildable_parser_finished()` but is
         * called once for each custom tag handled by the `buildable`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname the name of the tag
         * @param data user data created in custom_tag_start
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_finished(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
         * the buildable.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @param data user data that will be passed in to parser functions
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_tag_end(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called for each unknown element under `<child>`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_tag_start(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string): [boolean, GLib.MarkupParser, never];

        /**
         * Get the internal child called `childname` of the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param childname name of child
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_internal_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, childname: string): T;

        /**
         * Gets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} sets the name based on the
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI]
         * used to construct the `buildable`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_name(): string;

        /**
         * Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI].
         * Note that this will be called once for each time
         * `gtk_builder_add_from_file()` or `gtk_builder_add_from_string()`
         * is called on a builder.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_parser_finished(builder: Builder): void;

        /**
         * Sets the property name `name` to `value` on the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param name name of property
         * @param value value of property
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_buildable_property(builder: Builder, name: string, value: unknown): void;

        /**
         * Sets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * @param name name to set
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_name(name: string): void;
    }


    namespace TextView {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Container.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * The ::backspace signal is a
             * [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted when the user asks for it.
             * 
             * The default bindings for this signal are
             * Backspace and Shift-Backspace.
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            backspace: () => void;
            /**
             * The ::copy-clipboard signal is a
             * [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted to copy the selection to the clipboard.
             * 
             * The default bindings for this signal are
             * Ctrl-c and Ctrl-Insert.
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "copy-clipboard": () => void;
            /**
             * The ::cut-clipboard signal is a
             * [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted to cut the selection to the clipboard.
             * 
             * The default bindings for this signal are
             * Ctrl-x and Shift-Delete.
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "cut-clipboard": () => void;
            /**
             * The ::delete-from-cursor signal is a
             * [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted when the user initiates a text deletion.
             * 
             * If the `type` is {@link Gtk.DeleteType.CHARS}, GTK+ deletes the selection
             * if there is one, otherwise it deletes the requested number
             * of characters.
             * 
             * The default bindings for this signal are
             * Delete for deleting a character, Ctrl-Delete for
             * deleting a word and Ctrl-Backspace for deleting a word
             * backwords.
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "delete-from-cursor": (arg0: DeleteType, arg1: number) => void;
            /**
             * The ::extend-selection signal is emitted when the selection needs to be
             * extended at `location`.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.16
             * @run-last
             */
            "extend-selection": (arg0: TextExtendSelection, arg1: TextIter, arg2: TextIter, arg3: TextIter) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * The ::insert-at-cursor signal is a
             * [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted when the user initiates the insertion of a
             * fixed string at the cursor.
             * 
             * This signal has no default bindings.
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "insert-at-cursor": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * The ::insert-emoji signal is a
             * [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted to present the Emoji chooser for the `text_view`.
             * 
             * The default bindings for this signal are Ctrl-. and Ctrl-;
             * @signal
             * @since 3.22.27
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "insert-emoji": () => void;
            /**
             * The ::move-cursor signal is a
             * [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted when the user initiates a cursor movement.
             * If the cursor is not visible in `text_view`, this signal causes
             * the viewport to be moved instead.
             * 
             * Applications should not connect to it, but may emit it with
             * `g_signal_emit_by_name()` if they need to control the cursor
             * programmatically.
             * 
             * The default bindings for this signal come in two variants,
             * the variant with the Shift modifier extends the selection,
             * the variant without the Shift modifer does not.
             * There are too many key combinations to list them all here.
             * - Arrow keys move by individual characters/lines
             * - Ctrl-arrow key combinations move by words/paragraphs
             * - Home/End keys move to the ends of the buffer
             * - PageUp/PageDown keys move vertically by pages
             * - Ctrl-PageUp/PageDown keys move horizontally by pages
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "move-cursor": (arg0: MovementStep, arg1: number, arg2: boolean) => void;
            /**
             * The ::move-viewport signal is a
             * [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which can be bound to key combinations to allow the user
             * to move the viewport, i.e. change what part of the text view
             * is visible in a containing scrolled window.
             * 
             * There are no default bindings for this signal.
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "move-viewport": (arg0: ScrollStep, arg1: number) => void;
            /**
             * The ::paste-clipboard signal is a
             * [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted to paste the contents of the clipboard
             * into the text view.
             * 
             * The default bindings for this signal are
             * Ctrl-v and Shift-Insert.
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "paste-clipboard": () => void;
            /**
             * The ::populate-popup signal gets emitted before showing the
             * context menu of the text view.
             * 
             * If you need to add items to the context menu, connect
             * to this signal and append your items to the `popup`, which
             * will be a {@link Gtk.Menu} in this case.
             * 
             * If {@link Gtk.TextView.populate_all} is `true`, this signal will
             * also be emitted to populate touch popups. In this case,
             * `popup` will be a different container, e.g. a {@link Gtk.Toolbar}.
             * 
             * The signal handler should not make assumptions about the
             * type of `widget`, but check whether `popup` is a {@link Gtk.Menu}
             * or {@link Gtk.Toolbar} or another kind of container.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "populate-popup": (arg0: Widget) => void;
            /**
             * If an input method is used, the typed text will not immediately
             * be committed to the buffer. So if you are interested in the text,
             * connect to this signal.
             * 
             * This signal is only emitted if the text at the given position
             * is actually editable.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.20
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "preedit-changed": (arg0: string) => void;
            /**
             * The ::select-all signal is a
             * [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted to select or unselect the complete
             * contents of the text view.
             * 
             * The default bindings for this signal are Ctrl-a and Ctrl-/
             * for selecting and Shift-Ctrl-a and Ctrl-\ for unselecting.
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "select-all": (arg0: boolean) => void;
            /**
             * The ::set-anchor signal is a
             * [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted when the user initiates setting the "anchor"
             * mark. The "anchor" mark gets placed at the same position as the
             * "insert" mark.
             * 
             * This signal has no default bindings.
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "set-anchor": () => void;
            /**
             * The ::toggle-cursor-visible signal is a
             * [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted to toggle the {@link Gtk.TextView.cursor_visible}
             * property.
             * 
             * The default binding for this signal is F7.
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "toggle-cursor-visible": () => void;
            /**
             * The ::toggle-overwrite signal is a
             * [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted to toggle the overwrite mode of the text view.
             * 
             * The default bindings for this signal is Insert.
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "toggle-overwrite": () => void;
            "notify::accepts-tab": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::bottom-margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::buffer": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::cursor-visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::editable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::im-module": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::indent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::input-hints": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::input-purpose": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::justification": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::left-margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::monospace": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::overwrite": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::pixels-above-lines": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::pixels-below-lines": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::pixels-inside-wrap": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::populate-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::right-margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tabs": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::top-margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::wrap-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hadjustment": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hscroll-policy": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vadjustment": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vscroll-policy": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Container.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, Scrollable.ConstructorProps {
            accepts_tab: boolean;
            acceptsTab: boolean;
            bottom_margin: number;
            bottomMargin: number;
            buffer: TextBuffer;
            cursor_visible: boolean;
            cursorVisible: boolean;
            editable: boolean;
            im_module: string;
            imModule: string;
            indent: number;
            input_hints: InputHints;
            inputHints: InputHints;
            input_purpose: InputPurpose;
            inputPurpose: InputPurpose;
            justification: Justification;
            left_margin: number;
            leftMargin: number;
            monospace: boolean;
            overwrite: boolean;
            pixels_above_lines: number;
            pixelsAboveLines: number;
            pixels_below_lines: number;
            pixelsBelowLines: number;
            pixels_inside_wrap: number;
            pixelsInsideWrap: number;
            populate_all: boolean;
            populateAll: boolean;
            right_margin: number;
            rightMargin: number;
            tabs: Pango.TabArray | null;
            top_margin: number;
            topMargin: number;
            wrap_mode: WrapMode;
            wrapMode: WrapMode;
        }
    }

    /**
     * You may wish to begin by reading the
     * [text widget conceptual overview](https://docs.gtk.org/gtk3/TextWidget.html)
     * which gives an overview of all the objects and data
     * types related to the text widget and how they work together.
     * 
     * # CSS nodes
     * 
     * 
     * ```
     * textview.view
     * ├── border.top
     * ├── border.left
     * ├── text
     * │   ╰── [selection]
     * ├── border.right
     * ├── border.bottom
     * ╰── [window.popup]
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * GtkTextView has a main css node with name textview and style class .view,
     * and subnodes for each of the border windows, and the main text area,
     * with names border and text, respectively. The border nodes each get
     * one of the style classes .left, .right, .top or .bottom.
     * 
     * A node representing the selection will appear below the text node.
     * 
     * If a context menu is opened, the window node will appear as a subnode
     * of the main node.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class TextView extends Container implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable, Scrollable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<TextView>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * @default true
         */
        get accepts_tab(): boolean;
        set accepts_tab(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default true
         */
        get acceptsTab(): boolean;
        set acceptsTab(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The bottom margin for text in the text view.
         * 
         * Note that this property is confusingly named. In CSS terms,
         * the value set here is padding, and it is applied in addition
         * to the padding from the theme.
         * 
         * Don't confuse this property with {@link Gtk.Widget.margin_bottom}.
         * @since 3.18
         * @default 0
         */
        get bottom_margin(): number;
        set bottom_margin(val: number);

        /**
         * The bottom margin for text in the text view.
         * 
         * Note that this property is confusingly named. In CSS terms,
         * the value set here is padding, and it is applied in addition
         * to the padding from the theme.
         * 
         * Don't confuse this property with {@link Gtk.Widget.margin_bottom}.
         * @since 3.18
         * @default 0
         */
        get bottomMargin(): number;
        set bottomMargin(val: number);

        get buffer(): TextBuffer;
        set buffer(val: TextBuffer);

        /**
         * @default true
         */
        get cursor_visible(): boolean;
        set cursor_visible(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default true
         */
        get cursorVisible(): boolean;
        set cursorVisible(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default true
         */
        get editable(): boolean;
        set editable(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Which IM (input method) module should be used for this text_view.
         * See {@link Gtk.IMContext}.
         * 
         * Setting this to a non-`null` value overrides the
         * system-wide IM module setting. See the GtkSettings
         * {@link Gtk.Settings.gtk_im_module} property.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default null
         */
        get im_module(): string;
        set im_module(val: string);

        /**
         * Which IM (input method) module should be used for this text_view.
         * See {@link Gtk.IMContext}.
         * 
         * Setting this to a non-`null` value overrides the
         * system-wide IM module setting. See the GtkSettings
         * {@link Gtk.Settings.gtk_im_module} property.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default null
         */
        get imModule(): string;
        set imModule(val: string);

        /**
         * @default 0
         */
        get indent(): number;
        set indent(val: number);

        /**
         * Additional hints (beyond {@link Gtk.TextView.input_purpose}) that
         * allow input methods to fine-tune their behaviour.
         * @since 3.6
         * @default Gtk.InputHints.NONE
         */
        get input_hints(): InputHints;
        set input_hints(val: InputHints);

        /**
         * Additional hints (beyond {@link Gtk.TextView.input_purpose}) that
         * allow input methods to fine-tune their behaviour.
         * @since 3.6
         * @default Gtk.InputHints.NONE
         */
        get inputHints(): InputHints;
        set inputHints(val: InputHints);

        /**
         * The purpose of this text field.
         * 
         * This property can be used by on-screen keyboards and other input
         * methods to adjust their behaviour.
         * @since 3.6
         * @default Gtk.InputPurpose.FREE_FORM
         */
        get input_purpose(): InputPurpose;
        set input_purpose(val: InputPurpose);

        /**
         * The purpose of this text field.
         * 
         * This property can be used by on-screen keyboards and other input
         * methods to adjust their behaviour.
         * @since 3.6
         * @default Gtk.InputPurpose.FREE_FORM
         */
        get inputPurpose(): InputPurpose;
        set inputPurpose(val: InputPurpose);

        /**
         * @default Gtk.Justification.LEFT
         */
        get justification(): Justification;
        set justification(val: Justification);

        /**
         * The default left margin for text in the text view.
         * Tags in the buffer may override the default.
         * 
         * Note that this property is confusingly named. In CSS terms,
         * the value set here is padding, and it is applied in addition
         * to the padding from the theme.
         * 
         * Don't confuse this property with {@link Gtk.Widget.margin_left}.
         * @default 0
         */
        get left_margin(): number;
        set left_margin(val: number);

        /**
         * The default left margin for text in the text view.
         * Tags in the buffer may override the default.
         * 
         * Note that this property is confusingly named. In CSS terms,
         * the value set here is padding, and it is applied in addition
         * to the padding from the theme.
         * 
         * Don't confuse this property with {@link Gtk.Widget.margin_left}.
         * @default 0
         */
        get leftMargin(): number;
        set leftMargin(val: number);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get monospace(): boolean;
        set monospace(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get overwrite(): boolean;
        set overwrite(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default 0
         */
        get pixels_above_lines(): number;
        set pixels_above_lines(val: number);

        /**
         * @default 0
         */
        get pixelsAboveLines(): number;
        set pixelsAboveLines(val: number);

        /**
         * @default 0
         */
        get pixels_below_lines(): number;
        set pixels_below_lines(val: number);

        /**
         * @default 0
         */
        get pixelsBelowLines(): number;
        set pixelsBelowLines(val: number);

        /**
         * @default 0
         */
        get pixels_inside_wrap(): number;
        set pixels_inside_wrap(val: number);

        /**
         * @default 0
         */
        get pixelsInsideWrap(): number;
        set pixelsInsideWrap(val: number);

        /**
         * If :populate-all is `true`, the {@link Gtk.TextView.SignalSignatures.populate_popup | Gtk.TextView::populate-popup}
         * signal is also emitted for touch popups.
         * @since 3.8
         * @default false
         */
        get populate_all(): boolean;
        set populate_all(val: boolean);

        /**
         * If :populate-all is `true`, the {@link Gtk.TextView.SignalSignatures.populate_popup | Gtk.TextView::populate-popup}
         * signal is also emitted for touch popups.
         * @since 3.8
         * @default false
         */
        get populateAll(): boolean;
        set populateAll(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The default right margin for text in the text view.
         * Tags in the buffer may override the default.
         * 
         * Note that this property is confusingly named. In CSS terms,
         * the value set here is padding, and it is applied in addition
         * to the padding from the theme.
         * 
         * Don't confuse this property with {@link Gtk.Widget.margin_right}.
         * @default 0
         */
        get right_margin(): number;
        set right_margin(val: number);

        /**
         * The default right margin for text in the text view.
         * Tags in the buffer may override the default.
         * 
         * Note that this property is confusingly named. In CSS terms,
         * the value set here is padding, and it is applied in addition
         * to the padding from the theme.
         * 
         * Don't confuse this property with {@link Gtk.Widget.margin_right}.
         * @default 0
         */
        get rightMargin(): number;
        set rightMargin(val: number);

        get tabs(): Pango.TabArray | null;
        set tabs(val: Pango.TabArray | null);

        /**
         * The top margin for text in the text view.
         * 
         * Note that this property is confusingly named. In CSS terms,
         * the value set here is padding, and it is applied in addition
         * to the padding from the theme.
         * 
         * Don't confuse this property with {@link Gtk.Widget.margin_top}.
         * @since 3.18
         * @default 0
         */
        get top_margin(): number;
        set top_margin(val: number);

        /**
         * The top margin for text in the text view.
         * 
         * Note that this property is confusingly named. In CSS terms,
         * the value set here is padding, and it is applied in addition
         * to the padding from the theme.
         * 
         * Don't confuse this property with {@link Gtk.Widget.margin_top}.
         * @since 3.18
         * @default 0
         */
        get topMargin(): number;
        set topMargin(val: number);

        /**
         * @default Gtk.WrapMode.NONE
         */
        get wrap_mode(): WrapMode;
        set wrap_mode(val: WrapMode);

        /**
         * @default Gtk.WrapMode.NONE
         */
        get wrapMode(): WrapMode;
        set wrapMode(val: WrapMode);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: TextView.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<TextView.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): TextView;

        static new_with_buffer(buffer: TextBuffer): TextView;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof TextView.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, TextView.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof TextView.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, TextView.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof TextView.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<TextView.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * The class handler for the {@link Gtk.TextView.SignalSignatures.backspace | Gtk.TextView::backspace}
         *   keybinding signal.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_backspace(): void;

        /**
         * The class handler for the `GtkTextview::copy-clipboard`
         *   keybinding signal.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_copy_clipboard(): void;

        /**
         * The class handler for the {@link Gtk.TextView.SignalSignatures.cut_clipboard | Gtk.TextView::cut-clipboard}
         *   keybinding signal
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_cut_clipboard(): void;

        /**
         * The class handler for the {@link Gtk.TextView.SignalSignatures.delete_from_cursor | Gtk.TextView::delete-from-cursor}
         *   keybinding signal.
         * @param type 
         * @param count 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_delete_from_cursor(type: DeleteType, count: number): void;

        /**
         * The draw_layer vfunc is called before and after the text
         *   view is drawing its own text. Applications can override this vfunc
         *   in a subclass to draw customized content underneath or above the
         *   text. In the {@link Gtk.TextViewLayer.BELOW_TEXT} and {@link Gtk.TextViewLayer.ABOVE_TEXT}
         *   the drawing is done in the buffer coordinate space, but the older (deprecated)
         *   layers {@link Gtk.TextViewLayer.BELOW} and {@link Gtk.TextViewLayer.ABOVE} work in viewport
         *   coordinates, which makes them unnecessarily hard to use. Since: 3.14
         * @param layer 
         * @param cr 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_draw_layer(layer: TextViewLayer, cr: cairo.Context): void;

        /**
         * The class handler for the {@link Gtk.TextView.SignalSignatures.extend_selection | Gtk.TextView::extend-selection}
         *   signal. Since 3.16
         * @param granularity 
         * @param location 
         * @param start 
         * @param end 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_extend_selection(granularity: TextExtendSelection, location: TextIter, start: TextIter, end: TextIter): boolean;

        /**
         * The class handler for the {@link Gtk.TextView.SignalSignatures.insert_at_cursor | Gtk.TextView::insert-at-cursor}
         *   keybinding signal.
         * @param str 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_insert_at_cursor(str: string): void;

        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_insert_emoji(): void;

        /**
         * The class handler for the {@link Gtk.TextView.SignalSignatures.move_cursor | Gtk.TextView::move-cursor}
         *   keybinding signal.
         * @param step 
         * @param count 
         * @param extend_selection 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_move_cursor(step: MovementStep, count: number, extend_selection: boolean): void;

        /**
         * The class handler for the {@link Gtk.TextView.SignalSignatures.paste_clipboard | Gtk.TextView::paste-clipboard}
         *   keybinding signal.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_paste_clipboard(): void;

        /**
         * The class handler for the {@link Gtk.TextView.SignalSignatures.populate_popup | Gtk.TextView::populate-popup}
         *   signal.
         * @param popup 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_populate_popup(popup: Widget): void;

        /**
         * The class handler for the {@link Gtk.TextView.SignalSignatures.set_anchor | Gtk.TextView::set-anchor}
         *   keybinding signal.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_anchor(): void;

        /**
         * The class handler for the {@link Gtk.TextView.SignalSignatures.toggle_overwrite | Gtk.TextView::toggle-overwrite}
         *   keybinding signal.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_toggle_overwrite(): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Adds a child widget in the text buffer, at the given `anchor`.
         * @param child a {@link Gtk.Widget}
         * @param anchor a {@link Gtk.TextChildAnchor} in the {@link Gtk.TextBuffer} for `text_view`
         */
        add_child_at_anchor(child: Widget, anchor: TextChildAnchor): void;

        /**
         * Adds a child at fixed coordinates in one of the text widget's
         * windows.
         * 
         * The window must have nonzero size (see
         * `gtk_text_view_set_border_window_size()`). Note that the child
         * coordinates are given relative to scrolling. When
         * placing a child in #GTK_TEXT_WINDOW_WIDGET, scrolling is
         * irrelevant, the child floats above all scrollable areas. But when
         * placing a child in one of the scrollable windows (border windows or
         * text window) it will move with the scrolling as needed.
         * @param child a {@link Gtk.Widget}
         * @param which_window which window the child should appear in
         * @param xpos X position of child in window coordinates
         * @param ypos Y position of child in window coordinates
         */
        add_child_in_window(child: Widget, which_window: TextWindowType, xpos: number, ypos: number): void;

        /**
         * Moves the given `iter` backward by one display (wrapped) line.
         * A display line is different from a paragraph. Paragraphs are
         * separated by newlines or other paragraph separator characters.
         * Display lines are created by line-wrapping a paragraph. If
         * wrapping is turned off, display lines and paragraphs will be the
         * same. Display lines are divided differently for each view, since
         * they depend on the view’s width; paragraphs are the same in all
         * views, since they depend on the contents of the {@link Gtk.TextBuffer}.
         * @param iter a {@link Gtk.TextIter}
         * @returns `true` if `iter` was moved and is not on the end iterator
         */
        backward_display_line(iter: TextIter): boolean;

        /**
         * Moves the given `iter` backward to the next display line start.
         * A display line is different from a paragraph. Paragraphs are
         * separated by newlines or other paragraph separator characters.
         * Display lines are created by line-wrapping a paragraph. If
         * wrapping is turned off, display lines and paragraphs will be the
         * same. Display lines are divided differently for each view, since
         * they depend on the view’s width; paragraphs are the same in all
         * views, since they depend on the contents of the {@link Gtk.TextBuffer}.
         * @param iter a {@link Gtk.TextIter}
         * @returns `true` if `iter` was moved and is not on the end iterator
         */
        backward_display_line_start(iter: TextIter): boolean;

        /**
         * Converts coordinate (`buffer_x`, `buffer_y`) to coordinates for the window
         * `win`, and stores the result in (`window_x`, `window_y`).
         * 
         * Note that you can’t convert coordinates for a nonexisting window (see
         * `gtk_text_view_set_border_window_size()`).
         * @param win a {@link Gtk.TextWindowType}, except {@link Gtk.TextWindowType.PRIVATE}
         * @param buffer_x buffer x coordinate
         * @param buffer_y buffer y coordinate
         */
        buffer_to_window_coords(win: TextWindowType, buffer_x: number, buffer_y: number): [number, number];

        /**
         * Moves the given `iter` forward by one display (wrapped) line.
         * A display line is different from a paragraph. Paragraphs are
         * separated by newlines or other paragraph separator characters.
         * Display lines are created by line-wrapping a paragraph. If
         * wrapping is turned off, display lines and paragraphs will be the
         * same. Display lines are divided differently for each view, since
         * they depend on the view’s width; paragraphs are the same in all
         * views, since they depend on the contents of the {@link Gtk.TextBuffer}.
         * @param iter a {@link Gtk.TextIter}
         * @returns `true` if `iter` was moved and is not on the end iterator
         */
        forward_display_line(iter: TextIter): boolean;

        /**
         * Moves the given `iter` forward to the next display line end.
         * A display line is different from a paragraph. Paragraphs are
         * separated by newlines or other paragraph separator characters.
         * Display lines are created by line-wrapping a paragraph. If
         * wrapping is turned off, display lines and paragraphs will be the
         * same. Display lines are divided differently for each view, since
         * they depend on the view’s width; paragraphs are the same in all
         * views, since they depend on the contents of the {@link Gtk.TextBuffer}.
         * @param iter a {@link Gtk.TextIter}
         * @returns `true` if `iter` was moved and is not on the end iterator
         */
        forward_display_line_end(iter: TextIter): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns whether pressing the Tab key inserts a tab characters.
         * `gtk_text_view_set_accepts_tab()`.
         * @returns `true` if pressing the Tab key inserts a tab character,   `false` if pressing the Tab key moves the keyboard focus.
         */
        get_accepts_tab(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the width of the specified border window. See
         * `gtk_text_view_set_border_window_size()`.
         * @param type window to return size from
         * @returns width of window
         */
        get_border_window_size(type: TextWindowType): number;

        /**
         * Gets the bottom margin for text in the `text_view`.
         * @returns bottom margin in pixels
         */
        get_bottom_margin(): number;

        /**
         * Returns the {@link Gtk.TextBuffer} being displayed by this text view.
         * The reference count on the buffer is not incremented; the caller
         * of this function won’t own a new reference.
         * @returns a {@link Gtk.TextBuffer}
         */
        get_buffer(): TextBuffer;

        /**
         * Given an `iter` within a text layout, determine the positions of the
         * strong and weak cursors if the insertion point is at that
         * iterator. The position of each cursor is stored as a zero-width
         * rectangle. The strong cursor location is the location where
         * characters of the directionality equal to the base direction of the
         * paragraph are inserted.  The weak cursor location is the location
         * where characters of the directionality opposite to the base
         * direction of the paragraph are inserted.
         * 
         * If `iter` is `null`, the actual cursor position is used.
         * 
         * Note that if `iter` happens to be the actual cursor position, and
         * there is currently an IM preedit sequence being entered, the
         * returned locations will be adjusted to account for the preedit
         * cursor’s offset within the preedit sequence.
         * 
         * The rectangle position is in buffer coordinates; use
         * `gtk_text_view_buffer_to_window_coords()` to convert these
         * coordinates to coordinates for one of the windows in the text view.
         * @param iter a {@link Gtk.TextIter}
         */
        get_cursor_locations(iter: TextIter | null): [Gdk.Rectangle | null, Gdk.Rectangle | null];

        /**
         * Find out whether the cursor should be displayed.
         * @returns whether the insertion mark is visible
         */
        get_cursor_visible(): boolean;

        /**
         * Obtains a copy of the default text attributes. These are the
         * attributes used for text unless a tag overrides them.
         * You’d typically pass the default attributes in to
         * `gtk_text_iter_get_attributes()` in order to get the
         * attributes in effect at a given text position.
         * 
         * The return value is a copy owned by the caller of this function,
         * and should be freed with `gtk_text_attributes_unref()`.
         * @returns a new {@link Gtk.TextAttributes}
         */
        get_default_attributes(): TextAttributes;

        /**
         * Returns the default editability of the {@link Gtk.TextView}. Tags in the
         * buffer may override this setting for some ranges of text.
         * @returns whether text is editable by default
         */
        get_editable(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the horizontal-scrolling {@link Gtk.Adjustment}.
         * @returns pointer to the horizontal {@link Gtk.Adjustment}
         */
        get_hadjustment(): Adjustment;

        /**
         * Gets the default indentation of paragraphs in `text_view`.
         * Tags in the view’s buffer may override the default.
         * The indentation may be negative.
         * @returns number of pixels of indentation
         */
        get_indent(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the value of the {@link Gtk.TextView.input_hints} property.
         */
        get_input_hints(): InputHints;

        /**
         * Gets the value of the {@link Gtk.TextView.input_purpose} property.
         */
        get_input_purpose(): InputPurpose;

        /**
         * Retrieves the iterator at buffer coordinates `x` and `y`. Buffer
         * coordinates are coordinates for the entire buffer, not just the
         * currently-displayed portion.  If you have coordinates from an
         * event, you have to convert those to buffer coordinates with
         * `gtk_text_view_window_to_buffer_coords()`.
         * @param x x position, in buffer coordinates
         * @param y y position, in buffer coordinates
         * @returns `true` if the position is over text
         */
        get_iter_at_location(x: number, y: number): [boolean, TextIter];

        /**
         * Retrieves the iterator pointing to the character at buffer
         * coordinates `x` and `y`. Buffer coordinates are coordinates for
         * the entire buffer, not just the currently-displayed portion.
         * If you have coordinates from an event, you have to convert
         * those to buffer coordinates with
         * `gtk_text_view_window_to_buffer_coords()`.
         * 
         * Note that this is different from `gtk_text_view_get_iter_at_location()`,
         * which returns cursor locations, i.e. positions between
         * characters.
         * @param x x position, in buffer coordinates
         * @param y y position, in buffer coordinates
         * @returns `true` if the position is over text
         */
        get_iter_at_position(x: number, y: number): [boolean, TextIter, number];

        /**
         * Gets a rectangle which roughly contains the character at `iter`.
         * The rectangle position is in buffer coordinates; use
         * `gtk_text_view_buffer_to_window_coords()` to convert these
         * coordinates to coordinates for one of the windows in the text view.
         * @param iter a {@link Gtk.TextIter}
         */
        get_iter_location(iter: TextIter): Gdk.Rectangle;

        /**
         * Gets the default justification of paragraphs in `text_view`.
         * Tags in the buffer may override the default.
         * @returns default justification
         */
        get_justification(): Justification;

        /**
         * Gets the default left margin size of paragraphs in the `text_view`.
         * Tags in the buffer may override the default.
         * @returns left margin in pixels
         */
        get_left_margin(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the {@link Gtk.TextIter} at the start of the line containing
         * the coordinate `y`. `y` is in buffer coordinates, convert from
         * window coordinates with `gtk_text_view_window_to_buffer_coords()`.
         * If non-`null`, `line_top` will be filled with the coordinate of the top
         * edge of the line.
         * @param y a y coordinate
         */
        get_line_at_y(y: number): [TextIter, number];

        /**
         * Gets the y coordinate of the top of the line containing `iter`,
         * and the height of the line. The coordinate is a buffer coordinate;
         * convert to window coordinates with `gtk_text_view_buffer_to_window_coords()`.
         * @param iter a {@link Gtk.TextIter}
         */
        get_line_yrange(iter: TextIter): [number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the value of the {@link Gtk.TextView.monospace} property.
         * @returns `true` if monospace fonts are desired
         */
        get_monospace(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns whether the {@link Gtk.TextView} is in overwrite mode or not.
         * @returns whether `text_view` is in overwrite mode or not.
         */
        get_overwrite(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the default number of pixels to put above paragraphs.
         * Adding this function with `gtk_text_view_get_pixels_below_lines()`
         * is equal to the line space between each paragraph.
         * @returns default number of pixels above paragraphs
         */
        get_pixels_above_lines(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the value set by `gtk_text_view_set_pixels_below_lines()`.
         * 
         * The line space is the sum of the value returned by this function and the
         * value returned by `gtk_text_view_get_pixels_above_lines()`.
         * @returns default number of blank pixels below paragraphs
         */
        get_pixels_below_lines(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the value set by `gtk_text_view_set_pixels_inside_wrap()`.
         * @returns default number of pixels of blank space between wrapped lines
         */
        get_pixels_inside_wrap(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the default right margin for text in `text_view`. Tags
         * in the buffer may override the default.
         * @returns right margin in pixels
         */
        get_right_margin(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the default tabs for `text_view`. Tags in the buffer may
         * override the defaults. The returned array will be `null` if
         * “standard” (8-space) tabs are used. Free the return value
         * with `pango_tab_array_free()`.
         * @returns copy of default tab array, or `null` if    “standard" tabs are used; must be freed with `pango_tab_array_free()`.
         */
        get_tabs(): Pango.TabArray | null;

        /**
         * Gets the top margin for text in the `text_view`.
         * @returns top margin in pixels
         */
        get_top_margin(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the vertical-scrolling {@link Gtk.Adjustment}.
         * @returns pointer to the vertical {@link Gtk.Adjustment}
         */
        get_vadjustment(): Adjustment;

        /**
         * Fills `visible_rect` with the currently-visible
         * region of the buffer, in buffer coordinates. Convert to window coordinates
         * with `gtk_text_view_buffer_to_window_coords()`.
         */
        get_visible_rect(): Gdk.Rectangle;

        /**
         * Retrieves the {@link Gdk.Window} corresponding to an area of the text view;
         * possible windows include the overall widget window, child windows
         * on the left, right, top, bottom, and the window that displays the
         * text buffer. Windows are `null` and nonexistent if their width or
         * height is 0, and are nonexistent before the widget has been
         * realized.
         * @param win window to get
         * @returns a {@link Gdk.Window}, or `null`
         */
        get_window(win: TextWindowType): Gdk.Window | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
    // Conflicted with Gtk.Widget.get_window
        get_window(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Usually used to find out which window an event corresponds to.
         * 
         * If you connect to an event signal on `text_view`, this function
         * should be called on `event->window` to see which window it was.
         * @param window a window type
         * @returns the window type.
         */
        get_window_type(window: Gdk.Window): TextWindowType;

        /**
         * Gets the line wrapping for the view.
         * @returns the line wrap setting
         */
        get_wrap_mode(): WrapMode;

        /**
         * Allow the {@link Gtk.TextView} input method to internally handle key press
         * and release events. If this function returns `true`, then no further
         * processing should be done for this key event. See
         * `gtk_im_context_filter_keypress()`.
         * 
         * Note that you are expected to call this function from your handler
         * when overriding key event handling. This is needed in the case when
         * you need to insert your own key handling between the input method
         * and the default key event handling of the {@link Gtk.TextView}.
         * 
         * 
         * ```c
         * static gboolean
         * gtk_foo_bar_key_press_event (GtkWidget   *widget,
         *                              GdkEventKey *event)
         * {
         *   guint keyval;
         * 
         *   gdk_event_get_keyval ((GdkEvent*)event, &keyval);
         * 
         *   if (keyval == GDK_KEY_Return || keyval == GDK_KEY_KP_Enter)
         *     {
         *       if (gtk_text_view_im_context_filter_keypress (GTK_TEXT_VIEW (widget), event))
         *         return TRUE;
         *     }
         * 
         *   // Do some stuff
         * 
         *   return GTK_WIDGET_CLASS (gtk_foo_bar_parent_class)->key_press_event (widget, event);
         * }
         * ```
         * 
         * @param event the key event
         * @returns `true` if the input method handled the key event.
         */
        im_context_filter_keypress(event: Gdk.EventKey): boolean;

        /**
         * Updates the position of a child, as for `gtk_text_view_add_child_in_window()`.
         * @param child child widget already added to the text view
         * @param xpos new X position in window coordinates
         * @param ypos new Y position in window coordinates
         */
        move_child(child: Widget, xpos: number, ypos: number): void;

        /**
         * Moves a mark within the buffer so that it's
         * located within the currently-visible text area.
         * @param mark a {@link Gtk.TextMark}
         * @returns `true` if the mark moved (wasn’t already onscreen)
         */
        move_mark_onscreen(mark: TextMark): boolean;

        /**
         * Move the iterator a given number of characters visually, treating
         * it as the strong cursor position. If `count` is positive, then the
         * new strong cursor position will be `count` positions to the right of
         * the old cursor position. If `count` is negative then the new strong
         * cursor position will be `count` positions to the left of the old
         * cursor position.
         * 
         * In the presence of bi-directional text, the correspondence
         * between logical and visual order will depend on the direction
         * of the current run, and there may be jumps when the cursor
         * is moved off of the end of a run.
         * @param iter a {@link Gtk.TextIter}
         * @param count number of characters to move (negative moves left,    positive moves right)
         * @returns `true` if `iter` moved and is not on the end iterator
         */
        move_visually(iter: TextIter, count: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Moves the cursor to the currently visible region of the
         * buffer, it it isn’t there already.
         * @returns `true` if the cursor had to be moved.
         */
        place_cursor_onscreen(): boolean;

        /**
         * Ensures that the cursor is shown (i.e. not in an 'off' blink
         * interval) and resets the time that it will stay blinking (or
         * visible, in case blinking is disabled).
         * 
         * This function should be called in response to user input
         * (e.g. from derived classes that override the textview's
         * {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.key_press_event | Gtk.Widget::key-press-event} handler).
         */
        reset_cursor_blink(): void;

        /**
         * Reset the input method context of the text view if needed.
         * 
         * This can be necessary in the case where modifying the buffer
         * would confuse on-going input method behavior.
         */
        reset_im_context(): void;

        /**
         * Scrolls `text_view` the minimum distance such that `mark` is contained
         * within the visible area of the widget.
         * @param mark a mark in the buffer for `text_view`
         */
        scroll_mark_onscreen(mark: TextMark): void;

        /**
         * Scrolls `text_view` so that `iter` is on the screen in the position
         * indicated by `xalign` and `yalign`. An alignment of 0.0 indicates
         * left or top, 1.0 indicates right or bottom, 0.5 means center.
         * If `use_align` is `false`, the text scrolls the minimal distance to
         * get the mark onscreen, possibly not scrolling at all. The effective
         * screen for purposes of this function is reduced by a margin of size
         * `within_margin`.
         * 
         * Note that this function uses the currently-computed height of the
         * lines in the text buffer. Line heights are computed in an idle
         * handler; so this function may not have the desired effect if it’s
         * called before the height computations. To avoid oddness, consider
         * using `gtk_text_view_scroll_to_mark()` which saves a point to be
         * scrolled to after line validation.
         * @param iter a {@link Gtk.TextIter}
         * @param within_margin margin as a [0.0,0.5) fraction of screen size
         * @param use_align whether to use alignment arguments (if `false`,    just get the mark onscreen)
         * @param xalign horizontal alignment of mark within visible area
         * @param yalign vertical alignment of mark within visible area
         * @returns `true` if scrolling occurred
         */
        scroll_to_iter(iter: TextIter, within_margin: number, use_align: boolean, xalign: number, yalign: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Scrolls `text_view` so that `mark` is on the screen in the position
         * indicated by `xalign` and `yalign`. An alignment of 0.0 indicates
         * left or top, 1.0 indicates right or bottom, 0.5 means center.
         * If `use_align` is `false`, the text scrolls the minimal distance to
         * get the mark onscreen, possibly not scrolling at all. The effective
         * screen for purposes of this function is reduced by a margin of size
         * `within_margin`.
         * @param mark a {@link Gtk.TextMark}
         * @param within_margin margin as a [0.0,0.5) fraction of screen size
         * @param use_align whether to use alignment arguments (if `false`, just    get the mark onscreen)
         * @param xalign horizontal alignment of mark within visible area
         * @param yalign vertical alignment of mark within visible area
         */
        scroll_to_mark(mark: TextMark, within_margin: number, use_align: boolean, xalign: number, yalign: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the behavior of the text widget when the Tab key is pressed.
         * If `accepts_tab` is `true`, a tab character is inserted. If `accepts_tab`
         * is `false` the keyboard focus is moved to the next widget in the focus
         * chain.
         * @param accepts_tab `true` if pressing the Tab key should insert a tab    character, `false`, if pressing the Tab key should move the    keyboard focus.
         */
        set_accepts_tab(accepts_tab: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the width of {@link Gtk.TextWindowType.LEFT} or {@link Gtk.TextWindowType.RIGHT},
         * or the height of {@link Gtk.TextWindowType.TOP} or {@link Gtk.TextWindowType.BOTTOM}.
         * Automatically destroys the corresponding window if the size is set
         * to 0, and creates the window if the size is set to non-zero.  This
         * function can only be used for the “border windows”, and it won’t
         * work with {@link Gtk.TextWindowType.WIDGET}, {@link Gtk.TextWindowType.TEXT}, or
         * {@link Gtk.TextWindowType.PRIVATE}.
         * @param type window to affect
         * @param size width or height of the window
         */
        set_border_window_size(type: TextWindowType, size: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the bottom margin for text in `text_view`.
         * 
         * Note that this function is confusingly named.
         * In CSS terms, the value set here is padding.
         * @param bottom_margin bottom margin in pixels
         */
        set_bottom_margin(bottom_margin: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets `buffer` as the buffer being displayed by `text_view`. The previous
         * buffer displayed by the text view is unreferenced, and a reference is
         * added to `buffer`. If you owned a reference to `buffer` before passing it
         * to this function, you must remove that reference yourself; {@link Gtk.TextView}
         * will not “adopt” it.
         * @param buffer a {@link Gtk.TextBuffer}
         */
        set_buffer(buffer: TextBuffer | null): void;

        /**
         * Toggles whether the insertion point should be displayed. A buffer with
         * no editable text probably shouldn’t have a visible cursor, so you may
         * want to turn the cursor off.
         * 
         * Note that this property may be overridden by the
         * {@link Gtk.Settings.gtk_keynave_use_caret} settings.
         * @param setting whether to show the insertion cursor
         */
        set_cursor_visible(setting: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the default editability of the {@link Gtk.TextView}. You can override
         * this default setting with tags in the buffer, using the “editable”
         * attribute of tags.
         * @param setting whether it’s editable
         */
        set_editable(setting: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the default indentation for paragraphs in `text_view`.
         * Tags in the buffer may override the default.
         * @param indent indentation in pixels
         */
        set_indent(indent: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.TextView.input_hints} property, which
         * allows input methods to fine-tune their behaviour.
         * @param hints the hints
         */
        set_input_hints(hints: InputHints): void;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.TextView.input_purpose} property which
         * can be used by on-screen keyboards and other input
         * methods to adjust their behaviour.
         * @param purpose the purpose
         */
        set_input_purpose(purpose: InputPurpose): void;

        /**
         * Sets the default justification of text in `text_view`.
         * Tags in the view’s buffer may override the default.
         * @param justification justification
         */
        set_justification(justification: Justification): void;

        /**
         * Sets the default left margin for text in `text_view`.
         * Tags in the buffer may override the default.
         * 
         * Note that this function is confusingly named.
         * In CSS terms, the value set here is padding.
         * @param left_margin left margin in pixels
         */
        set_left_margin(left_margin: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.TextView.monospace} property, which
         * indicates that the text view should use monospace
         * fonts.
         * @param monospace `true` to request monospace styling
         */
        set_monospace(monospace: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Changes the {@link Gtk.TextView} overwrite mode.
         * @param overwrite `true` to turn on overwrite mode, `false` to turn it off
         */
        set_overwrite(overwrite: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the default number of blank pixels above paragraphs in `text_view`.
         * Tags in the buffer for `text_view` may override the defaults.
         * @param pixels_above_lines pixels above paragraphs
         */
        set_pixels_above_lines(pixels_above_lines: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the default number of pixels of blank space
         * to put below paragraphs in `text_view`. May be overridden
         * by tags applied to `text_view`’s buffer.
         * @param pixels_below_lines pixels below paragraphs
         */
        set_pixels_below_lines(pixels_below_lines: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the default number of pixels of blank space to leave between
         * display/wrapped lines within a paragraph. May be overridden by
         * tags in `text_view`’s buffer.
         * @param pixels_inside_wrap default number of pixels between wrapped lines
         */
        set_pixels_inside_wrap(pixels_inside_wrap: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the default right margin for text in the text view.
         * Tags in the buffer may override the default.
         * 
         * Note that this function is confusingly named.
         * In CSS terms, the value set here is padding.
         * @param right_margin right margin in pixels
         */
        set_right_margin(right_margin: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the default tab stops for paragraphs in `text_view`.
         * Tags in the buffer may override the default.
         * @param tabs tabs as a {@link Pango.TabArray}
         */
        set_tabs(tabs: Pango.TabArray): void;

        /**
         * Sets the top margin for text in `text_view`.
         * 
         * Note that this function is confusingly named.
         * In CSS terms, the value set here is padding.
         * @param top_margin top margin in pixels
         */
        set_top_margin(top_margin: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the line wrapping for the view.
         * @param wrap_mode a {@link Gtk.WrapMode}
         */
        set_wrap_mode(wrap_mode: WrapMode): void;

        /**
         * Determines whether `iter` is at the start of a display line.
         * See `gtk_text_view_forward_display_line()` for an explanation of
         * display lines vs. paragraphs.
         * @param iter a {@link Gtk.TextIter}
         * @returns `true` if `iter` begins a wrapped line
         */
        starts_display_line(iter: TextIter): boolean;

        /**
         * Converts coordinates on the window identified by `win` to buffer
         * coordinates, storing the result in (`buffer_x`,`buffer_y`).
         * 
         * Note that you can’t convert coordinates for a nonexisting window (see
         * `gtk_text_view_set_border_window_size()`).
         * @param win a {@link Gtk.TextWindowType} except {@link Gtk.TextWindowType.PRIVATE}
         * @param window_x window x coordinate
         * @param window_y window y coordinate
         */
        window_to_buffer_coords(win: TextWindowType, window_x: number, window_y: number): [number, number];

        /**
         * Horizontal {@link Gtk.Adjustment} of the scrollable widget. This adjustment is
         * shared between the scrollable widget and its parent.
         * @since 3.0
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Scrollable
         */
        get hadjustment(): Adjustment;
        set hadjustment(val: Adjustment);

        /**
         * Determines whether horizontal scrolling should start once the scrollable
         * widget is allocated less than its minimum width or less than its natural width.
         * @since 3.0
         * @default Gtk.ScrollablePolicy.MINIMUM
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Scrollable
         */
        get hscroll_policy(): ScrollablePolicy;
        set hscroll_policy(val: ScrollablePolicy);

        /**
         * Determines whether horizontal scrolling should start once the scrollable
         * widget is allocated less than its minimum width or less than its natural width.
         * @since 3.0
         * @default Gtk.ScrollablePolicy.MINIMUM
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Scrollable
         */
        get hscrollPolicy(): ScrollablePolicy;
        set hscrollPolicy(val: ScrollablePolicy);

        /**
         * Verical {@link Gtk.Adjustment} of the scrollable widget. This adjustment is shared
         * between the scrollable widget and its parent.
         * @since 3.0
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Scrollable
         */
        get vadjustment(): Adjustment;
        set vadjustment(val: Adjustment);

        /**
         * Determines whether vertical scrolling should start once the scrollable
         * widget is allocated less than its minimum height or less than its natural height.
         * @since 3.0
         * @default Gtk.ScrollablePolicy.MINIMUM
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Scrollable
         */
        get vscroll_policy(): ScrollablePolicy;
        set vscroll_policy(val: ScrollablePolicy);

        /**
         * Determines whether vertical scrolling should start once the scrollable
         * widget is allocated less than its minimum height or less than its natural height.
         * @since 3.0
         * @default Gtk.ScrollablePolicy.MINIMUM
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Scrollable
         */
        get vscrollPolicy(): ScrollablePolicy;
        set vscrollPolicy(val: ScrollablePolicy);

        /**
         * Returns the size of a non-scrolling border around the
         * outside of the scrollable. An example for this would
         * be treeview headers. GTK+ can use this information to
         * display overlayed graphics, like the overshoot indication,
         * at the right position.
         * @returns `true` if `border` has been set
         */
        get_border(): [boolean, Border];

        /**
         * Gets the horizontal {@link Gtk.ScrollablePolicy}.
         * @returns The horizontal {@link Gtk.ScrollablePolicy}.
         */
        get_hscroll_policy(): ScrollablePolicy;

        /**
         * Gets the vertical {@link Gtk.ScrollablePolicy}.
         * @returns The vertical {@link Gtk.ScrollablePolicy}.
         */
        get_vscroll_policy(): ScrollablePolicy;

        /**
         * Sets the horizontal adjustment of the {@link Gtk.Scrollable}.
         * @param hadjustment a {@link Gtk.Adjustment}
         */
        set_hadjustment(hadjustment: Adjustment | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.ScrollablePolicy} to determine whether
         * horizontal scrolling should start below the minimum width or
         * below the natural width.
         * @param policy the horizontal {@link Gtk.ScrollablePolicy}
         */
        set_hscroll_policy(policy: ScrollablePolicy): void;

        /**
         * Sets the vertical adjustment of the {@link Gtk.Scrollable}.
         * @param vadjustment a {@link Gtk.Adjustment}
         */
        set_vadjustment(vadjustment: Adjustment | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.ScrollablePolicy} to determine whether
         * vertical scrolling should start below the minimum height or
         * below the natural height.
         * @param policy the vertical {@link Gtk.ScrollablePolicy}
         */
        set_vscroll_policy(policy: ScrollablePolicy): void;

        /**
         * Returns the size of a non-scrolling border around the
         * outside of the scrollable. An example for this would
         * be treeview headers. GTK+ can use this information to
         * display overlayed graphics, like the overshoot indication,
         * at the right position.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_border(): [boolean, Border];
    }


    namespace TextViewAccessible {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends ContainerAccessible.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-layer": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-mdi-zorder": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-help-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-hypertext-nlinks": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption-object": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-summary": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends ContainerAccessible.ConstructorProps, Atk.Component.ConstructorProps, Atk.EditableText.ConstructorProps, Atk.StreamableContent.ConstructorProps, Atk.Text.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class TextViewAccessible extends ContainerAccessible implements Atk.Component, Atk.EditableText, Atk.StreamableContent, Atk.Text {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<TextViewAccessible>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: TextViewAccessible.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<TextViewAccessible.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof TextViewAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, TextViewAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof TextViewAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, TextViewAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof TextViewAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<TextViewAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        /**
         * Copy text from `start_pos` up to, but not including `end_pos`
         * to the clipboard.
         * @param start_pos start position
         * @param end_pos end position
         */
        copy_text(start_pos: number, end_pos: number): void;

        /**
         * Copy text from `start_pos` up to, but not including `end_pos`
         * to the clipboard and then delete from the widget.
         * @param start_pos start position
         * @param end_pos end position
         */
        cut_text(start_pos: number, end_pos: number): void;

        /**
         * Delete text `start_pos` up to, but not including `end_pos`.
         * @param start_pos start position
         * @param end_pos end position
         */
        delete_text(start_pos: number, end_pos: number): void;

        /**
         * Insert text at a given position.
         * @param string the text to insert
         * @param length the length of text to insert, in bytes
         * @param position The caller initializes this to the position at which to insert the text. After the call it points at the position after the newly inserted text.
         */
        insert_text(string: string, length: number, position: number): void;

        /**
         * Paste text from clipboard to specified `position`.
         * @param position position to paste
         */
        paste_text(position: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the attributes for a specified range. See the ATK_ATTRIBUTE
         * macros (such as #ATK_ATTRIBUTE_LEFT_MARGIN) for examples of attributes
         * that can be set. Note that other attributes that do not have corresponding
         * ATK_ATTRIBUTE macros may also be set for certain text widgets.
         * @param attrib_set an {@link Atk.AttributeSet}
         * @param start_offset start of range in which to set attributes
         * @param end_offset end of range in which to set attributes
         * @returns `true` if attributes successfully set for the specified range, otherwise `false`
         */
        set_run_attributes(attrib_set: Atk.AttributeSet, start_offset: number, end_offset: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Set text contents of `text`.
         * @param string string to set for text contents of `text`
         */
        set_text_contents(string: string): void;

        /**
         * Copy text from `start_pos` up to, but not including `end_pos`
         * to the clipboard.
         * @param start_pos start position
         * @param end_pos end position
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_copy_text(start_pos: number, end_pos: number): void;

        /**
         * Copy text from `start_pos` up to, but not including `end_pos`
         * to the clipboard and then delete from the widget.
         * @param start_pos start position
         * @param end_pos end position
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_cut_text(start_pos: number, end_pos: number): void;

        /**
         * Delete text `start_pos` up to, but not including `end_pos`.
         * @param start_pos start position
         * @param end_pos end position
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_delete_text(start_pos: number, end_pos: number): void;

        /**
         * Insert text at a given position.
         * @param string the text to insert
         * @param length the length of text to insert, in bytes
         * @param position The caller initializes this to the position at which to insert the text. After the call it points at the position after the newly inserted text.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_insert_text(string: string, length: number, position: number): void;

        /**
         * Paste text from clipboard to specified `position`.
         * @param position position to paste
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_paste_text(position: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the attributes for a specified range. See the ATK_ATTRIBUTE
         * macros (such as #ATK_ATTRIBUTE_LEFT_MARGIN) for examples of attributes
         * that can be set. Note that other attributes that do not have corresponding
         * ATK_ATTRIBUTE macros may also be set for certain text widgets.
         * @param attrib_set an {@link Atk.AttributeSet}
         * @param start_offset start of range in which to set attributes
         * @param end_offset end of range in which to set attributes
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_run_attributes(attrib_set: Atk.AttributeSet, start_offset: number, end_offset: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Set text contents of `text`.
         * @param string string to set for text contents of `text`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_text_contents(string: string): void;

        /**
         * Gets the character string of the specified mime type. The first mime
         * type is at position 0, the second at position 1, and so on.
         * @param i a gint representing the position of the mime type starting from 0
         * @returns a gchar* representing the specified mime type; the caller should not free the character string.
         */
        get_mime_type(i: number): string;

        /**
         * Gets the number of mime types supported by this object.
         * @returns a gint which is the number of mime types supported by the object.
         */
        get_n_mime_types(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the content in the specified mime type.
         * @param mime_type a gchar* representing the mime type
         * @returns A {@link GLib.IOChannel} which contains the content in the specified mime type.
         */
        get_stream(mime_type: string): GLib.IOChannel;

        /**
         * Get a string representing a URI in IETF standard format
         * (see http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc2396.txt) from which the object's content
         * may be streamed in the specified mime-type, if one is available.
         * If mime_type is NULL, the URI for the default (and possibly only) mime-type is
         * returned.
         * 
         * Note that it is possible for get_uri to return NULL but for
         * get_stream to work nonetheless, since not all GIOChannels connect to URIs.
         * @param mime_type a gchar* representing the mime type, or NULL to request a URI for the default mime type.
         * @returns Returns a string representing a URI, or `null` if no corresponding URI can be constructed.
         */
        get_uri(mime_type: string): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the character string of the specified mime type. The first mime
         * type is at position 0, the second at position 1, and so on.
         * @param i a gint representing the position of the mime type starting from 0
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_mime_type(i: number): string;

        /**
         * Gets the number of mime types supported by this object.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_n_mime_types(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the content in the specified mime type.
         * @param mime_type a gchar* representing the mime type
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_stream(mime_type: string): GLib.IOChannel;

        /**
         * Get a string representing a URI in IETF standard format
         * (see http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc2396.txt) from which the object's content
         * may be streamed in the specified mime-type, if one is available.
         * If mime_type is NULL, the URI for the default (and possibly only) mime-type is
         * returned.
         * 
         * Note that it is possible for get_uri to return NULL but for
         * get_stream to work nonetheless, since not all GIOChannels connect to URIs.
         * @param mime_type a gchar* representing the mime type, or NULL to request a URI for the default mime type.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_uri(mime_type: string): string | null;

        /**
         * Adds a selection bounded by the specified offsets.
         * @param start_offset the starting character offset of the selected region
         * @param end_offset the offset of the first character after the selected region.
         * @returns `true` if successful, `false` otherwise
         */
        add_selection(start_offset: number, end_offset: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Get the ranges of text in the specified bounding box.
         * @param rect An AtkTextRectangle giving the dimensions of the bounding box.
         * @param coord_type Specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or widget window.
         * @param x_clip_type Specify the horizontal clip type.
         * @param y_clip_type Specify the vertical clip type.
         * @returns Array of AtkTextRange. The last          element of the array returned by this function will be NULL.
         */
        get_bounded_ranges(rect: Atk.TextRectangle, coord_type: Atk.CoordType, x_clip_type: Atk.TextClipType, y_clip_type: Atk.TextClipType): Atk.TextRange[];

        /**
         * Gets the offset of the position of the caret (cursor).
         * @returns the character offset of the position of the caret or -1 if          the caret is not located inside the element or in the case of          any other failure.
         */
        get_caret_offset(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the specified text.
         * @param offset a character offset within `text`
         * @returns the character at `offset` or 0 in the case of failure.
         */
        get_character_at_offset(offset: number): string;

        /**
         * Gets the character count.
         * @returns the number of characters or -1 in case of failure.
         */
        get_character_count(): number;

        /**
         * If the extent can not be obtained (e.g. missing support), all of x, y, width,
         * height are set to -1.
         * 
         * Get the bounding box containing the glyph representing the character at
         *     a particular text offset.
         * @param offset The offset of the text character for which bounding information is required.
         * @param coords specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or widget window
         */
        get_character_extents(offset: number, coords: Atk.CoordType): [number, number, number, number];

        /**
         * Creates an {@link Atk.AttributeSet} which consists of the default values of
         * attributes for the text. See the enum AtkTextAttribute for types of text
         * attributes that can be returned. Note that other attributes may also be
         * returned.
         * @returns an {@link Atk.AttributeSet} which contains the default text          attributes for this {@link Atk.Text}. This {@link Atk.AttributeSet} should be freed by          a call to `atk_attribute_set_free()`.
         */
        get_default_attributes(): Atk.AttributeSet;

        /**
         * Gets the number of selected regions.
         * @returns The number of selected regions, or -1 in the case of failure.
         */
        get_n_selections(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the offset of the character located at coordinates `x` and `y`. `x` and `y`
         * are interpreted as being relative to the screen or this widget's window
         * depending on `coords`.
         * @param x screen x-position of character
         * @param y screen y-position of character
         * @param coords specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or widget window
         * @returns the offset to the character which is located at  the specified          `x` and `y` coordinates of -1 in case of failure.
         */
        get_offset_at_point(x: number, y: number, coords: Atk.CoordType): number;

        /**
         * Get the bounding box for text within the specified range.
         * 
         * If the extents can not be obtained (e.g. or missing support), the rectangle
         * fields are set to -1.
         * @param start_offset The offset of the first text character for which boundary        information is required.
         * @param end_offset The offset of the text character after the last character        for which boundary information is required.
         * @param coord_type Specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or widget window.
         */
        get_range_extents(start_offset: number, end_offset: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): Atk.TextRectangle;

        /**
         * Creates an {@link Atk.AttributeSet} which consists of the attributes explicitly
         * set at the position `offset` in the text. `start_offset` and `end_offset` are
         * set to the start and end of the range around `offset` where the attributes are
         * invariant. Note that `end_offset` is the offset of the first character
         * after the range.  See the enum AtkTextAttribute for types of text
         * attributes that can be returned. Note that other attributes may also be
         * returned.
         * @param offset the character offset at which to get the attributes, -1 means the offset of the character to be inserted at the caret location.
         * @returns an {@link Atk.AttributeSet} which contains the attributes         explicitly set at `offset`. This {@link Atk.AttributeSet} should be freed by         a call to `atk_attribute_set_free()`.
         */
        get_run_attributes(offset: number): [Atk.AttributeSet, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the text from the specified selection.
         * @param selection_num The selection number.  The selected regions are assigned numbers that correspond to how far the region is from the start of the text.  The selected region closest to the beginning of the text region is assigned the number 0, etc.  Note that adding, moving or deleting a selected region can change the numbering.
         * @returns a newly allocated string containing the selected text. Use `g_free()`          to free the returned string.
         */
        get_selection(selection_num: number): [string, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets a portion of the text exposed through an {@link Atk.Text} according to a given `offset`
         * and a specific `granularity`, along with the start and end offsets defining the
         * boundaries of such a portion of text.
         * 
         * If `granularity` is ATK_TEXT_GRANULARITY_CHAR the character at the
         * offset is returned.
         * 
         * If `granularity` is ATK_TEXT_GRANULARITY_WORD the returned string
         * is from the word start at or before the offset to the word start after
         * the offset.
         * 
         * The returned string will contain the word at the offset if the offset
         * is inside a word and will contain the word before the offset if the
         * offset is not inside a word.
         * 
         * If `granularity` is ATK_TEXT_GRANULARITY_SENTENCE the returned string
         * is from the sentence start at or before the offset to the sentence
         * start after the offset.
         * 
         * The returned string will contain the sentence at the offset if the offset
         * is inside a sentence and will contain the sentence before the offset
         * if the offset is not inside a sentence.
         * 
         * If `granularity` is ATK_TEXT_GRANULARITY_LINE the returned string
         * is from the line start at or before the offset to the line
         * start after the offset.
         * 
         * If `granularity` is ATK_TEXT_GRANULARITY_PARAGRAPH the returned string
         * is from the start of the paragraph at or before the offset to the start
         * of the following paragraph after the offset.
         * @param offset position
         * @param granularity An {@link Atk.TextGranularity}
         * @returns a newly allocated string containing the text at          the `offset` bounded by the specified `granularity`. Use `g_free()`          to free the returned string.  Returns `null` if the offset is invalid          or no implementation is available.
         */
        get_string_at_offset(offset: number, granularity: Atk.TextGranularity): [string | null, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the specified text.
         * @param start_offset a starting character offset within `text`
         * @param end_offset an ending character offset within `text`, or -1 for the end of the string.
         * @returns a newly allocated string containing the text from `start_offset` up          to, but not including `end_offset`. Use `g_free()` to free the returned          string.
         */
        get_text(start_offset: number, end_offset: number): string;

        /**
         * Gets the specified text.
         * @param offset position
         * @param boundary_type An {@link Atk.TextBoundary}
         * @returns a newly allocated string containing the text after `offset` bounded          by the specified `boundary_type`. Use `g_free()` to free the returned          string.
         */
        get_text_after_offset(offset: number, boundary_type: Atk.TextBoundary): [string, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the specified text.
         * 
         * If the boundary_type if ATK_TEXT_BOUNDARY_CHAR the character at the
         * offset is returned.
         * 
         * If the boundary_type is ATK_TEXT_BOUNDARY_WORD_START the returned string
         * is from the word start at or before the offset to the word start after
         * the offset.
         * 
         * The returned string will contain the word at the offset if the offset
         * is inside a word and will contain the word before the offset if the
         * offset is not inside a word.
         * 
         * If the boundary type is ATK_TEXT_BOUNDARY_SENTENCE_START the returned
         * string is from the sentence start at or before the offset to the sentence
         * start after the offset.
         * 
         * The returned string will contain the sentence at the offset if the offset
         * is inside a sentence and will contain the sentence before the offset
         * if the offset is not inside a sentence.
         * 
         * If the boundary type is ATK_TEXT_BOUNDARY_LINE_START the returned
         * string is from the line start at or before the offset to the line
         * start after the offset.
         * @param offset position
         * @param boundary_type An {@link Atk.TextBoundary}
         * @returns a newly allocated string containing the text at `offset` bounded          by the specified `boundary_type`. Use `g_free()` to free the returned          string.
         */
        get_text_at_offset(offset: number, boundary_type: Atk.TextBoundary): [string, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the specified text.
         * @param offset position
         * @param boundary_type An {@link Atk.TextBoundary}
         * @returns a newly allocated string containing the text before `offset` bounded          by the specified `boundary_type`. Use `g_free()` to free the returned          string.
         */
        get_text_before_offset(offset: number, boundary_type: Atk.TextBoundary): [string, number, number];

        /**
         * Removes the specified selection.
         * @param selection_num The selection number.  The selected regions are assigned numbers that correspond to how far the region is from the start of the text.  The selected region closest to the beginning of the text region is assigned the number 0, etc.  Note that adding, moving or deleting a selected region can change the numbering.
         * @returns `true` if successful, `false` otherwise
         */
        remove_selection(selection_num: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Makes a substring of `text` visible on the screen by scrolling all necessary parents.
         * @param start_offset start offset in the `text`
         * @param end_offset end offset in the `text`, or -1 for the end of the text.
         * @param type specify where the object should be made visible.
         * @returns whether scrolling was successful.
         */
        scroll_substring_to(start_offset: number, end_offset: number, type: Atk.ScrollType): boolean;

        /**
         * Move the top-left of a substring of `text` to a given position of the screen
         * by scrolling all necessary parents.
         * @param start_offset start offset in the `text`
         * @param end_offset end offset in the `text`, or -1 for the end of the text.
         * @param coords specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or to the parent object.
         * @param x x-position where to scroll to
         * @param y y-position where to scroll to
         * @returns whether scrolling was successful.
         */
        scroll_substring_to_point(start_offset: number, end_offset: number, coords: Atk.CoordType, x: number, y: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the caret (cursor) position to the specified `offset`.
         * 
         * In the case of rich-text content, this method should either grab focus
         * or move the sequential focus navigation starting point (if the application
         * supports this concept) as if the user had clicked on the new caret position.
         * Typically, this means that the target of this operation is the node containing
         * the new caret position or one of its ancestors. In other words, after this
         * method is called, if the user advances focus, it should move to the first
         * focusable node following the new caret position.
         * 
         * Calling this method should also scroll the application viewport in a way
         * that matches the behavior of the application's typical caret motion or tab
         * navigation as closely as possible. This also means that if the application's
         * caret motion or focus navigation does not trigger a scroll operation, this
         * method should not trigger one either. If the application does not have a caret
         * motion or focus navigation operation, this method should try to scroll the new
         * caret position into view while minimizing unnecessary scroll motion.
         * @param offset the character offset of the new caret position
         * @returns `true` if successful, `false` otherwise.
         */
        set_caret_offset(offset: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Changes the start and end offset of the specified selection.
         * @param selection_num The selection number.  The selected regions are assigned numbers that correspond to how far the region is from the start of the text.  The selected region closest to the beginning of the text region is assigned the number 0, etc.  Note that adding, moving or deleting a selected region can change the numbering.
         * @param start_offset the new starting character offset of the selection
         * @param end_offset the new end position of (e.g. offset immediately past) the selection
         * @returns `true` if successful, `false` otherwise
         */
        set_selection(selection_num: number, start_offset: number, end_offset: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Adds a selection bounded by the specified offsets.
         * @param start_offset the starting character offset of the selected region
         * @param end_offset the offset of the first character after the selected region.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add_selection(start_offset: number, end_offset: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Get the ranges of text in the specified bounding box.
         * @param rect An AtkTextRectangle giving the dimensions of the bounding box.
         * @param coord_type Specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or widget window.
         * @param x_clip_type Specify the horizontal clip type.
         * @param y_clip_type Specify the vertical clip type.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_bounded_ranges(rect: Atk.TextRectangle, coord_type: Atk.CoordType, x_clip_type: Atk.TextClipType, y_clip_type: Atk.TextClipType): Atk.TextRange[];

        /**
         * Gets the offset of the position of the caret (cursor).
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_caret_offset(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the specified text.
         * @param offset a character offset within `text`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_character_at_offset(offset: number): string;

        /**
         * Gets the character count.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_character_count(): number;

        /**
         * If the extent can not be obtained (e.g. missing support), all of x, y, width,
         * height are set to -1.
         * 
         * Get the bounding box containing the glyph representing the character at
         *     a particular text offset.
         * @param offset The offset of the text character for which bounding information is required.
         * @param coords specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or widget window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_character_extents(offset: number, coords: Atk.CoordType): [number, number, number, number];

        /**
         * Creates an {@link Atk.AttributeSet} which consists of the default values of
         * attributes for the text. See the enum AtkTextAttribute for types of text
         * attributes that can be returned. Note that other attributes may also be
         * returned.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_default_attributes(): Atk.AttributeSet;

        /**
         * Gets the number of selected regions.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_n_selections(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the offset of the character located at coordinates `x` and `y`. `x` and `y`
         * are interpreted as being relative to the screen or this widget's window
         * depending on `coords`.
         * @param x screen x-position of character
         * @param y screen y-position of character
         * @param coords specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or widget window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_offset_at_point(x: number, y: number, coords: Atk.CoordType): number;

        /**
         * Get the bounding box for text within the specified range.
         * 
         * If the extents can not be obtained (e.g. or missing support), the rectangle
         * fields are set to -1.
         * @param start_offset The offset of the first text character for which boundary        information is required.
         * @param end_offset The offset of the text character after the last character        for which boundary information is required.
         * @param coord_type Specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or widget window.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_range_extents(start_offset: number, end_offset: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): Atk.TextRectangle;

        /**
         * Creates an {@link Atk.AttributeSet} which consists of the attributes explicitly
         * set at the position `offset` in the text. `start_offset` and `end_offset` are
         * set to the start and end of the range around `offset` where the attributes are
         * invariant. Note that `end_offset` is the offset of the first character
         * after the range.  See the enum AtkTextAttribute for types of text
         * attributes that can be returned. Note that other attributes may also be
         * returned.
         * @param offset the character offset at which to get the attributes, -1 means the offset of the character to be inserted at the caret location.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_run_attributes(offset: number): [Atk.AttributeSet, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the text from the specified selection.
         * @param selection_num The selection number.  The selected regions are assigned numbers that correspond to how far the region is from the start of the text.  The selected region closest to the beginning of the text region is assigned the number 0, etc.  Note that adding, moving or deleting a selected region can change the numbering.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_selection(selection_num: number): [string, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets a portion of the text exposed through an {@link Atk.Text} according to a given `offset`
         * and a specific `granularity`, along with the start and end offsets defining the
         * boundaries of such a portion of text.
         * 
         * If `granularity` is ATK_TEXT_GRANULARITY_CHAR the character at the
         * offset is returned.
         * 
         * If `granularity` is ATK_TEXT_GRANULARITY_WORD the returned string
         * is from the word start at or before the offset to the word start after
         * the offset.
         * 
         * The returned string will contain the word at the offset if the offset
         * is inside a word and will contain the word before the offset if the
         * offset is not inside a word.
         * 
         * If `granularity` is ATK_TEXT_GRANULARITY_SENTENCE the returned string
         * is from the sentence start at or before the offset to the sentence
         * start after the offset.
         * 
         * The returned string will contain the sentence at the offset if the offset
         * is inside a sentence and will contain the sentence before the offset
         * if the offset is not inside a sentence.
         * 
         * If `granularity` is ATK_TEXT_GRANULARITY_LINE the returned string
         * is from the line start at or before the offset to the line
         * start after the offset.
         * 
         * If `granularity` is ATK_TEXT_GRANULARITY_PARAGRAPH the returned string
         * is from the start of the paragraph at or before the offset to the start
         * of the following paragraph after the offset.
         * @param offset position
         * @param granularity An {@link Atk.TextGranularity}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_string_at_offset(offset: number, granularity: Atk.TextGranularity): [string | null, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the specified text.
         * @param start_offset a starting character offset within `text`
         * @param end_offset an ending character offset within `text`, or -1 for the end of the string.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_text(start_offset: number, end_offset: number): string;

        /**
         * Gets the specified text.
         * @param offset position
         * @param boundary_type An {@link Atk.TextBoundary}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_text_after_offset(offset: number, boundary_type: Atk.TextBoundary): [string, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the specified text.
         * 
         * If the boundary_type if ATK_TEXT_BOUNDARY_CHAR the character at the
         * offset is returned.
         * 
         * If the boundary_type is ATK_TEXT_BOUNDARY_WORD_START the returned string
         * is from the word start at or before the offset to the word start after
         * the offset.
         * 
         * The returned string will contain the word at the offset if the offset
         * is inside a word and will contain the word before the offset if the
         * offset is not inside a word.
         * 
         * If the boundary type is ATK_TEXT_BOUNDARY_SENTENCE_START the returned
         * string is from the sentence start at or before the offset to the sentence
         * start after the offset.
         * 
         * The returned string will contain the sentence at the offset if the offset
         * is inside a sentence and will contain the sentence before the offset
         * if the offset is not inside a sentence.
         * 
         * If the boundary type is ATK_TEXT_BOUNDARY_LINE_START the returned
         * string is from the line start at or before the offset to the line
         * start after the offset.
         * @param offset position
         * @param boundary_type An {@link Atk.TextBoundary}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_text_at_offset(offset: number, boundary_type: Atk.TextBoundary): [string, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the specified text.
         * @param offset position
         * @param boundary_type An {@link Atk.TextBoundary}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_text_before_offset(offset: number, boundary_type: Atk.TextBoundary): [string, number, number];

        /**
         * Removes the specified selection.
         * @param selection_num The selection number.  The selected regions are assigned numbers that correspond to how far the region is from the start of the text.  The selected region closest to the beginning of the text region is assigned the number 0, etc.  Note that adding, moving or deleting a selected region can change the numbering.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_remove_selection(selection_num: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Makes a substring of `text` visible on the screen by scrolling all necessary parents.
         * @param start_offset start offset in the `text`
         * @param end_offset end offset in the `text`, or -1 for the end of the text.
         * @param type specify where the object should be made visible.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_scroll_substring_to(start_offset: number, end_offset: number, type: Atk.ScrollType): boolean;

        /**
         * Move the top-left of a substring of `text` to a given position of the screen
         * by scrolling all necessary parents.
         * @param start_offset start offset in the `text`
         * @param end_offset end offset in the `text`, or -1 for the end of the text.
         * @param coords specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or to the parent object.
         * @param x x-position where to scroll to
         * @param y y-position where to scroll to
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_scroll_substring_to_point(start_offset: number, end_offset: number, coords: Atk.CoordType, x: number, y: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the caret (cursor) position to the specified `offset`.
         * 
         * In the case of rich-text content, this method should either grab focus
         * or move the sequential focus navigation starting point (if the application
         * supports this concept) as if the user had clicked on the new caret position.
         * Typically, this means that the target of this operation is the node containing
         * the new caret position or one of its ancestors. In other words, after this
         * method is called, if the user advances focus, it should move to the first
         * focusable node following the new caret position.
         * 
         * Calling this method should also scroll the application viewport in a way
         * that matches the behavior of the application's typical caret motion or tab
         * navigation as closely as possible. This also means that if the application's
         * caret motion or focus navigation does not trigger a scroll operation, this
         * method should not trigger one either. If the application does not have a caret
         * motion or focus navigation operation, this method should try to scroll the new
         * caret position into view while minimizing unnecessary scroll motion.
         * @param offset the character offset of the new caret position
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_caret_offset(offset: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Changes the start and end offset of the specified selection.
         * @param selection_num The selection number.  The selected regions are assigned numbers that correspond to how far the region is from the start of the text.  The selected region closest to the beginning of the text region is assigned the number 0, etc.  Note that adding, moving or deleting a selected region can change the numbering.
         * @param start_offset the new starting character offset of the selection
         * @param end_offset the new end position of (e.g. offset immediately past) the selection
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_selection(selection_num: number, start_offset: number, end_offset: number): boolean;

        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_text_attributes_changed(): void;

        /**
         * @param location 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_text_caret_moved(location: number): void;

        /**
         * the signal handler which is executed when there is a
         *   text change. This virtual function is deprecated sice 2.9.4 and
         *   it should not be overriden.
         * @param position 
         * @param length 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_text_changed(position: number, length: number): void;

        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_text_selection_changed(): void;
    }


    namespace ThemingEngine {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends GObject.Object.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.Object.ConstructorProps {
            name: string;
        }
    }

    /**
     * {@link Gtk.ThemingEngine} was the object used for rendering themed content
     * in GTK+ widgets. It used to allow overriding GTK+'s default
     * implementation of rendering functions by allowing engines to be
     * loaded as modules.
     * 
     * {@link Gtk.ThemingEngine} has been deprecated in GTK+ 3.14 and will be
     * ignored for rendering. The advancements in CSS theming are good
     * enough to allow themers to achieve their goals without the need
     * to modify source code.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class ThemingEngine extends GObject.Object {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ThemingEngine>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * The theming engine name, this name will be used when registering
         * custom properties, for a theming engine named "Clearlooks" registering
         * a "glossy" custom property, it could be referenced in the CSS file as
         * 
         * 
         * ```
         * -Clearlooks-glossy: true;
         * ```
         * 
         * @since 3.0
         * @construct-only
         * @default null
         */
        get name(): string;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: ThemingEngine.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        parent_object: GObject.Object;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<ThemingEngine.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof ThemingEngine.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ThemingEngine.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof ThemingEngine.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ThemingEngine.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof ThemingEngine.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<ThemingEngine.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Static methods
        /**
         * Loads and initializes a theming engine module from the
         * standard directories.
         * @param name Theme engine name to load
         */
        static load(name: string): ThemingEngine | null;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * Renders an area displaying activity, such as in {@link Gtk.Spinner},
         *                   or {@link Gtk.ProgressBar}.
         * @param cr 
         * @param x 
         * @param y 
         * @param width 
         * @param height 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_render_activity(cr: cairo.Context, x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number): void;

        /**
         * Renders an arrow pointing to a certain direction.
         * @param cr 
         * @param angle 
         * @param x 
         * @param y 
         * @param size 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_render_arrow(cr: cairo.Context, angle: number, x: number, y: number, size: number): void;

        /**
         * Renders the background area of a widget region.
         * @param cr 
         * @param x 
         * @param y 
         * @param width 
         * @param height 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_render_background(cr: cairo.Context, x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number): void;

        /**
         * Renders a checkmark, as in {@link Gtk.CheckButton}.
         * @param cr 
         * @param x 
         * @param y 
         * @param width 
         * @param height 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_render_check(cr: cairo.Context, x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number): void;

        /**
         * Renders an element what will expose/expand part of
         *                   the UI, as in {@link Gtk.Expander}.
         * @param cr 
         * @param x 
         * @param y 
         * @param width 
         * @param height 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_render_expander(cr: cairo.Context, x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number): void;

        /**
         * Renders a extension to a box, usually a notebook tab.
         * @param cr 
         * @param x 
         * @param y 
         * @param width 
         * @param height 
         * @param gap_side 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_render_extension(cr: cairo.Context, x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number, gap_side: PositionType): void;

        /**
         * Renders the focus indicator.
         * @param cr 
         * @param x 
         * @param y 
         * @param width 
         * @param height 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_render_focus(cr: cairo.Context, x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number): void;

        /**
         * Renders the frame around a widget area.
         * @param cr 
         * @param x 
         * @param y 
         * @param width 
         * @param height 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_render_frame(cr: cairo.Context, x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number): void;

        /**
         * Renders the frame around a widget area with a gap in it.
         * @param cr 
         * @param x 
         * @param y 
         * @param width 
         * @param height 
         * @param gap_side 
         * @param xy0_gap 
         * @param xy1_gap 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_render_frame_gap(cr: cairo.Context, x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number, gap_side: PositionType, xy0_gap: number, xy1_gap: number): void;

        /**
         * Renders a handle to drag UI elements, as in {@link Gtk.Paned}.
         * @param cr 
         * @param x 
         * @param y 
         * @param width 
         * @param height 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_render_handle(cr: cairo.Context, x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number): void;

        /**
         * Renders an icon given as a {@link GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf}.
         * @param cr 
         * @param pixbuf 
         * @param x 
         * @param y 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_render_icon(cr: cairo.Context, pixbuf: GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf, x: number, y: number): void;

        /**
         * Renders an icon given as a {@link cairo.Surface}.
         * @param cr 
         * @param surface 
         * @param x 
         * @param y 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_render_icon_surface(cr: cairo.Context, surface: cairo.Surface, x: number, y: number): void;

        /**
         * Renders a {@link Pango.Layout}
         * @param cr 
         * @param x 
         * @param y 
         * @param layout 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_render_layout(cr: cairo.Context, x: number, y: number, layout: Pango.Layout): void;

        /**
         * Renders a line between two points.
         * @param cr 
         * @param x0 
         * @param y0 
         * @param x1 
         * @param y1 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_render_line(cr: cairo.Context, x0: number, y0: number, x1: number, y1: number): void;

        /**
         * Renders an option, as in {@link Gtk.RadioButton}.
         * @param cr 
         * @param x 
         * @param y 
         * @param width 
         * @param height 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_render_option(cr: cairo.Context, x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number): void;

        /**
         * Renders a slider control, as in {@link Gtk.Scale}.
         * @param cr 
         * @param x 
         * @param y 
         * @param width 
         * @param height 
         * @param orientation 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_render_slider(cr: cairo.Context, x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number, orientation: Orientation): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Gets the background color for a given state.
         * @param state state to retrieve the color for
         */
        get_background_color(state: StateFlags): Gdk.RGBA;

        /**
         * Gets the border for a given state as a {@link Gtk.Border}.
         * @param state state to retrieve the border for
         */
        get_border(state: StateFlags): Border;

        /**
         * Gets the border color for a given state.
         * @param state state to retrieve the color for
         */
        get_border_color(state: StateFlags): Gdk.RGBA;

        /**
         * Gets the foreground color for a given state.
         * @param state state to retrieve the color for
         */
        get_color(state: StateFlags): Gdk.RGBA;

        /**
         * Returns the widget direction used for rendering.
         * @returns the widget direction
         */
        get_direction(): TextDirection;

        /**
         * Returns the font description for a given state.
         * @param state state to retrieve the font for
         * @returns the {@link Pango.FontDescription} for the given          state. This object is owned by GTK+ and should not be          freed.
         */
        get_font(state: StateFlags): Pango.FontDescription;

        /**
         * Returns the widget direction used for rendering.
         * @returns the widget direction
         */
        get_junction_sides(): JunctionSides;

        /**
         * Gets the margin for a given state as a {@link Gtk.Border}.
         * @param state state to retrieve the border for
         */
        get_margin(state: StateFlags): Border;

        /**
         * Gets the padding for a given state as a {@link Gtk.Border}.
         * @param state state to retrieve the padding for
         */
        get_padding(state: StateFlags): Border;

        /**
         * Returns the widget path used for style matching.
         * @returns A {@link Gtk.WidgetPath}
         */
        get_path(): WidgetPath;

        /**
         * Gets a property value as retrieved from the style settings that apply
         * to the currently rendered element.
         * @param property the property name
         * @param state state to retrieve the value for
         */
        get_property(property: string, state: StateFlags): unknown;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
    // Conflicted with GObject.Object.get_property
        get_property(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Returns the {@link Gdk.Screen} to which `engine` currently rendering to.
         * @returns a {@link Gdk.Screen}, or `null`.
         */
        get_screen(): Gdk.Screen | null;

        /**
         * returns the state used when rendering.
         * @returns the state flags
         */
        get_state(): StateFlags;

        /**
         * Gets the value for a widget style property.
         * @param property_name the name of the widget style property
         */
        get_style_property(property_name: string): unknown;

        /**
         * Returns `true` if the currently rendered contents have
         * defined the given class name.
         * @param style_class class name to look up
         * @returns `true` if `engine` has `class_name` defined
         */
        has_class(style_class: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns `true` if the currently rendered contents have the
         * region defined. If `flags_return` is not `null`, it is set
         * to the flags affecting the region.
         * @param style_region a region name
         * @returns `true` if region is defined
         */
        has_region(style_region: string): [boolean, RegionFlags | null];

        /**
         * Looks up and resolves a color name in the current style’s color map.
         * @param color_name color name to lookup
         * @returns `true` if `color_name` was found and resolved, `false` otherwise
         */
        lookup_color(color_name: string): [boolean, Gdk.RGBA];

        /**
         * Returns `true` if there is a transition animation running for the
         * current region (see `gtk_style_context_push_animatable_region()`).
         * 
         * If `progress` is not `null`, the animation progress will be returned
         * there, 0.0 means the state is closest to being `false`, while 1.0 means
         * it’s closest to being `true`. This means transition animations will
         * run from 0 to 1 when `state` is being set to `true` and from 1 to 0 when
         * it’s being set to `false`.
         * @param state a widget state
         * @returns `true` if there is a running transition animation for `state`.
         */
        state_is_running(state: StateType): [boolean, number];
    }


    namespace ToggleAction {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Action.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * Should be connected if you wish to perform an action
             * whenever the {@link Gtk.ToggleAction} state is changed.
             * @signal
             * @deprecated since 3.10
             * @run-first
             */
            toggled: () => void;
            "notify::active": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::draw-as-radio": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::action-group": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::always-show-image": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gicon": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hide-if-empty": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::icon-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-important": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::label": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::short-label": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::stock-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible-horizontal": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible-overflown": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible-vertical": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Action.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {
            active: boolean;
            draw_as_radio: boolean;
            drawAsRadio: boolean;
        }
    }

    /**
     * A {@link Gtk.ToggleAction} corresponds roughly to a {@link Gtk.CheckMenuItem}. It has an
     * “active” state specifying whether the action has been checked or not.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class ToggleAction extends Action implements Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ToggleAction>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * Whether the toggle action should be active.
         * @since 2.10
         * @deprecated since 3.10
         * @default false
         */
        get active(): boolean;
        set active(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether the proxies for this action look like radio action proxies.
         * 
         * This is an appearance property and thus only applies if
         * {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} is `true`.
         * @deprecated since 3.10
         * @default false
         */
        get draw_as_radio(): boolean;
        set draw_as_radio(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether the proxies for this action look like radio action proxies.
         * 
         * This is an appearance property and thus only applies if
         * {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} is `true`.
         * @deprecated since 3.10
         * @default false
         */
        get drawAsRadio(): boolean;
        set drawAsRadio(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: ToggleAction.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<ToggleAction.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](name: string, label: string | null, tooltip: string | null, stock_id: string | null): ToggleAction;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof ToggleAction.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ToggleAction.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof ToggleAction.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ToggleAction.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof ToggleAction.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<ToggleAction.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * Emits the “toggled” signal on the toggle action.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_toggled(): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Returns the checked state of the toggle action.
         * @returns the checked state of the toggle action
         */
        get_active(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns whether the action should have proxies like a radio action.
         * @returns whether the action should have proxies like a radio action.
         */
        get_draw_as_radio(): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the checked state on the toggle action.
         * @param is_active whether the action should be checked or not
         */
        set_active(is_active: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the action should have proxies like a radio action.
         * @param draw_as_radio whether the action should have proxies like a radio    action
         */
        set_draw_as_radio(draw_as_radio: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Emits the “toggled” signal on the toggle action.
         */
        toggled(): void;

        /**
         * Adds a child to `buildable`. `type` is an optional string
         * describing how the child should be added.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child to add
         * @param type kind of child or `null`
         */
        add_child(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object, type: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Constructs a child of `buildable` with the name `name`.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} calls this function if a “constructor” has been
         * specified in the UI definition.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param name name of child to construct
         * @returns the constructed child
         */
        construct_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, name: string): T;

        /**
         * This is similar to `gtk_buildable_parser_finished()` but is
         * called once for each custom tag handled by the `buildable`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname the name of the tag
         * @param data user data created in custom_tag_start
         */
        custom_finished(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
         * the buildable.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @param data user data that will be passed in to parser functions
         */
        custom_tag_end(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called for each unknown element under `<child>`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @returns `true` if a object has a custom implementation, `false`          if it doesn't.
         */
        custom_tag_start(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string): [boolean, GLib.MarkupParser, null];

        /**
         * Get the internal child called `childname` of the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param childname name of child
         * @returns the internal child of the buildable object
         */
        get_internal_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, childname: string): T;

        /**
         * Gets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} sets the name based on the
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI]
         * used to construct the `buildable`.
         * @returns the name set with `gtk_buildable_set_name()`
         */
        get_name(): string;

        /**
         * Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI].
         * Note that this will be called once for each time
         * `gtk_builder_add_from_file()` or `gtk_builder_add_from_string()`
         * is called on a builder.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         */
        parser_finished(builder: Builder): void;

        /**
         * Sets the property name `name` to `value` on the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param name name of property
         * @param value value of property
         */
        set_buildable_property(builder: Builder, name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;

        /**
         * Sets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * @param name name to set
         */
        set_name(name: string): void;

        /**
         * Adds a child to `buildable`. `type` is an optional string
         * describing how the child should be added.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child to add
         * @param type kind of child or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add_child(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object, type: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Constructs a child of `buildable` with the name `name`.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} calls this function if a “constructor” has been
         * specified in the UI definition.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param name name of child to construct
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_construct_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, name: string): T;

        /**
         * This is similar to `gtk_buildable_parser_finished()` but is
         * called once for each custom tag handled by the `buildable`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname the name of the tag
         * @param data user data created in custom_tag_start
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_finished(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
         * the buildable.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @param data user data that will be passed in to parser functions
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_tag_end(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called for each unknown element under `<child>`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_tag_start(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string): [boolean, GLib.MarkupParser, never];

        /**
         * Get the internal child called `childname` of the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param childname name of child
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_internal_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, childname: string): T;

        /**
         * Gets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} sets the name based on the
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI]
         * used to construct the `buildable`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_name(): string;

        /**
         * Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI].
         * Note that this will be called once for each time
         * `gtk_builder_add_from_file()` or `gtk_builder_add_from_string()`
         * is called on a builder.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_parser_finished(builder: Builder): void;

        /**
         * Sets the property name `name` to `value` on the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param name name of property
         * @param value value of property
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_buildable_property(builder: Builder, name: string, value: unknown): void;

        /**
         * Sets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * @param name name to set
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_name(name: string): void;
    }


    namespace ToggleButton {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Button.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * Should be connected if you wish to perform an action whenever the
             * {@link Gtk.ToggleButton}'s state is changed.
             * @signal
             * @run-first
             */
            toggled: () => void;
            "notify::active": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::draw-indicator": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::inconsistent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::always-show-image": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::image": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::image-position": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::label": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::relief": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-stock": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-underline": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::xalign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::yalign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::action-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::action-target": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::related-action": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-action-appearance": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Button.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Actionable.ConstructorProps, Activatable.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {
            active: boolean;
            draw_indicator: boolean;
            drawIndicator: boolean;
            inconsistent: boolean;
        }
    }

    /**
     * A {@link Gtk.ToggleButton} is a {@link Gtk.Button} which will remain “pressed-in” when
     * clicked. Clicking again will cause the toggle button to return to its
     * normal state.
     * 
     * A toggle button is created by calling either `gtk_toggle_button_new()` or
     * `gtk_toggle_button_new_with_label()`. If using the former, it is advisable to
     * pack a widget, (such as a {@link Gtk.Label} and/or a {@link Gtk.Image}), into the toggle
     * button’s container. (See {@link Gtk.Button} for more information).
     * 
     * The state of a {@link Gtk.ToggleButton} can be set specifically using
     * `gtk_toggle_button_set_active()`, and retrieved using
     * `gtk_toggle_button_get_active()`.
     * 
     * To simply switch the state of a toggle button, use `gtk_toggle_button_toggled()`.
     * 
     * # CSS nodes
     * 
     * GtkToggleButton has a single CSS node with name button. To differentiate
     * it from a plain {@link Gtk.Button}, it gets the .toggle style class.
     * 
     * ## Creating two {@link Gtk.ToggleButton} widgets.
     * 
     * 
     * ```c
     * static void output_state (GtkToggleButton *source, gpointer user_data) {
     *   printf ("Active: %d\n", gtk_toggle_button_get_active (source));
     * }
     * 
     * void make_toggles (void) {
     *   GtkWidget *window, *toggle1, *toggle2;
     *   GtkWidget *box;
     *   const char *text;
     * 
     *   window = gtk_window_new (GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
     *   box = gtk_box_new (GTK_ORIENTATION_VERTICAL, 12);
     * 
     *   text = "Hi, I’m a toggle button.";
     *   toggle1 = gtk_toggle_button_new_with_label (text);
     * 
     *   // Makes this toggle button invisible
     *   gtk_toggle_button_set_mode (GTK_TOGGLE_BUTTON (toggle1),
     *                               TRUE);
     * 
     *   g_signal_connect (toggle1, "toggled",
     *                     G_CALLBACK (output_state),
     *                     NULL);
     *   gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (box), toggle1);
     * 
     *   text = "Hi, I’m a toggle button.";
     *   toggle2 = gtk_toggle_button_new_with_label (text);
     *   gtk_toggle_button_set_mode (GTK_TOGGLE_BUTTON (toggle2),
     *                               FALSE);
     *   g_signal_connect (toggle2, "toggled",
     *                     G_CALLBACK (output_state),
     *                     NULL);
     *   gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (box), toggle2);
     * 
     *   gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (window), box);
     *   gtk_widget_show_all (window);
     * }
     * ```
     * 
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class ToggleButton extends Button implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Actionable, Activatable, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ToggleButton>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get active(): boolean;
        set active(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get draw_indicator(): boolean;
        set draw_indicator(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get drawIndicator(): boolean;
        set drawIndicator(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get inconsistent(): boolean;
        set inconsistent(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: ToggleButton.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<ToggleButton.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): ToggleButton;

        static new_with_label(label: string): ToggleButton;

        static new_with_mnemonic(label: string): ToggleButton;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof ToggleButton.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ToggleButton.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof ToggleButton.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ToggleButton.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof ToggleButton.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<ToggleButton.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.ToggleButton.SignalSignatures.toggled | Gtk.ToggleButton::toggled} signal on the
         * {@link Gtk.ToggleButton}. There is no good reason for an
         * application ever to call this function.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_toggled(): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Queries a {@link Gtk.ToggleButton} and returns its current state. Returns `true` if
         * the toggle button is pressed in and `false` if it is raised.
         * @returns a `gboolean` value.
         */
        get_active(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the value set by `gtk_toggle_button_set_inconsistent()`.
         * @returns `true` if the button is displayed as inconsistent, `false` otherwise
         */
        get_inconsistent(): boolean;

        /**
         * Retrieves whether the button is displayed as a separate indicator
         * and label. See `gtk_toggle_button_set_mode()`.
         * @returns `true` if the togglebutton is drawn as a separate indicator   and label.
         */
        get_mode(): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the status of the toggle button. Set to `true` if you want the
         * GtkToggleButton to be “pressed in”, and `false` to raise it.
         * This action causes the {@link Gtk.ToggleButton.SignalSignatures.toggled | Gtk.ToggleButton::toggled} signal and the
         * {@link Gtk.Button.SignalSignatures.clicked | Gtk.Button::clicked} signal to be emitted.
         * @param is_active `true` or `false`.
         */
        set_active(is_active: boolean): void;

        /**
         * If the user has selected a range of elements (such as some text or
         * spreadsheet cells) that are affected by a toggle button, and the
         * current values in that range are inconsistent, you may want to
         * display the toggle in an “in between” state. This function turns on
         * “in between” display.  Normally you would turn off the inconsistent
         * state again if the user toggles the toggle button. This has to be
         * done manually, `gtk_toggle_button_set_inconsistent()` only affects
         * visual appearance, it doesn’t affect the semantics of the button.
         * @param setting `true` if state is inconsistent
         */
        set_inconsistent(setting: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the button is displayed as a separate indicator and label.
         * You can call this function on a checkbutton or a radiobutton with
         * `draw_indicator` = `false` to make the button look like a normal button.
         * 
         * This can be used to create linked strip of buttons that work like
         * a {@link Gtk.StackSwitcher}.
         * 
         * This function only affects instances of classes like {@link Gtk.CheckButton}
         * and {@link Gtk.RadioButton} that derive from {@link Gtk.ToggleButton},
         * not instances of {@link Gtk.ToggleButton} itself.
         * @param draw_indicator if `true`, draw the button as a separate indicator and label; if `false`, draw the button like a normal button
         */
        set_mode(draw_indicator: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.ToggleButton.SignalSignatures.toggled | Gtk.ToggleButton::toggled} signal on the
         * {@link Gtk.ToggleButton}. There is no good reason for an
         * application ever to call this function.
         */
        toggled(): void;

        /**
         * @default null
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable
         */
        get action_name(): string | null;
        set action_name(val: string | null);

        /**
         * @default null
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable
         */
        get actionName(): string | null;
        set actionName(val: string | null);

        /** @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable */
        get action_target(): GLib.Variant;
        set action_target(val: GLib.Variant);

        /** @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable */
        get actionTarget(): GLib.Variant;
        set actionTarget(val: GLib.Variant);

        /**
         * The action that this activatable will activate and receive
         * updates from for various states and possibly appearance.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the this property and
         * > call `gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action()` when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get related_action(): Action;
        set related_action(val: Action);

        /**
         * The action that this activatable will activate and receive
         * updates from for various states and possibly appearance.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the this property and
         * > call `gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action()` when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get relatedAction(): Action;
        set relatedAction(val: Action);

        /**
         * Whether this activatable should reset its layout
         * and appearance when setting the related action or when
         * the action changes appearance.
         * 
         * See the {@link Gtk.Action} documentation directly to find which properties
         * should be ignored by the {@link Gtk.Activatable} when this property is `false`.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle this property
         * > and call `gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties()` on the activatable
         * > widget when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get use_action_appearance(): boolean;
        set use_action_appearance(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether this activatable should reset its layout
         * and appearance when setting the related action or when
         * the action changes appearance.
         * 
         * See the {@link Gtk.Action} documentation directly to find which properties
         * should be ignored by the {@link Gtk.Activatable} when this property is `false`.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle this property
         * > and call `gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties()` on the activatable
         * > widget when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get useActionAppearance(): boolean;
        set useActionAppearance(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Gets the action name for `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_name()` for more information.
         * @returns the action name, or `null` if none is set
         */
        get_action_name(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the current target value of `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_target_value()` for more information.
         * @returns the current target value
         */
        get_action_target_value(): GLib.Variant;

        /**
         * Specifies the name of the action with which this widget should be
         * associated.  If `action_name` is `null` then the widget will be
         * unassociated from any previous action.
         * 
         * Usually this function is used when the widget is located (or will be
         * located) within the hierarchy of a {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow}.
         * 
         * Names are of the form “win.save” or “app.quit” for actions on the
         * containing {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow} or its associated {@link Gtk.Application},
         * respectively.  This is the same form used for actions in the {@link Gio.Menu}
         * associated with the window.
         * @param action_name an action name, or `null`
         */
        set_action_name(action_name: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the target value of an actionable widget.
         * 
         * If `target_value` is `null` then the target value is unset.
         * 
         * The target value has two purposes.  First, it is used as the
         * parameter to activation of the action associated with the
         * {@link Gtk.Actionable} widget. Second, it is used to determine if the widget
         * should be rendered as “active” — the widget is active if the state
         * is equal to the given target.
         * 
         * Consider the example of associating a set of buttons with a {@link Gio.Action}
         * with string state in a typical “radio button” situation.  Each button
         * will be associated with the same action, but with a different target
         * value for that action.  Clicking on a particular button will activate
         * the action with the target of that button, which will typically cause
         * the action’s state to change to that value.  Since the action’s state
         * is now equal to the target value of the button, the button will now
         * be rendered as active (and the other buttons, with different targets,
         * rendered inactive).
         * @param target_value a {@link GLib.Variant} to set as the target value, or `null`
         */
        set_action_target_value(target_value: GLib.Variant | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the action-name and associated string target value of an
         * actionable widget.
         * 
         * `detailed_action_name` is a string in the format accepted by
         * `g_action_parse_detailed_name()`.
         * 
         * (Note that prior to version 3.22.25,
         * this function is only usable for actions with a simple "s" target, and
         * `detailed_action_name` must be of the form `"action::target"` where
         * `action` is the action name and `target` is the string to use
         * as the target.)
         * @param detailed_action_name the detailed action name
         */
        set_detailed_action_name(detailed_action_name: string): void;

        /**
         * Gets the action name for `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_name()` for more information.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_action_name(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the current target value of `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_target_value()` for more information.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_action_target_value(): GLib.Variant;

        /**
         * Specifies the name of the action with which this widget should be
         * associated.  If `action_name` is `null` then the widget will be
         * unassociated from any previous action.
         * 
         * Usually this function is used when the widget is located (or will be
         * located) within the hierarchy of a {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow}.
         * 
         * Names are of the form “win.save” or “app.quit” for actions on the
         * containing {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow} or its associated {@link Gtk.Application},
         * respectively.  This is the same form used for actions in the {@link Gio.Menu}
         * associated with the window.
         * @param action_name an action name, or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_action_name(action_name: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the target value of an actionable widget.
         * 
         * If `target_value` is `null` then the target value is unset.
         * 
         * The target value has two purposes.  First, it is used as the
         * parameter to activation of the action associated with the
         * {@link Gtk.Actionable} widget. Second, it is used to determine if the widget
         * should be rendered as “active” — the widget is active if the state
         * is equal to the given target.
         * 
         * Consider the example of associating a set of buttons with a {@link Gio.Action}
         * with string state in a typical “radio button” situation.  Each button
         * will be associated with the same action, but with a different target
         * value for that action.  Clicking on a particular button will activate
         * the action with the target of that button, which will typically cause
         * the action’s state to change to that value.  Since the action’s state
         * is now equal to the target value of the button, the button will now
         * be rendered as active (and the other buttons, with different targets,
         * rendered inactive).
         * @param target_value a {@link GLib.Variant} to set as the target value, or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_action_target_value(target_value: GLib.Variant | null): void;

        /**
         * This is a utility function for {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors.
         * 
         * When implementing {@link Gtk.Activatable} you must call this when
         * handling changes of the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action}, and
         * you must also use this to break references in {@link GObject.Object}->dispose().
         * 
         * This function adds a reference to the currently set related
         * action for you, it also makes sure the {@link Gtk.Activatable}->update()
         * method is called when the related {@link Gtk.Action} properties change
         * and registers to the action’s proxy list.
         * 
         * > Be careful to call this before setting the local
         * > copy of the {@link Gtk.Action} property, since this function uses
         * > `gtk_activatable_get_related_action()` to retrieve the
         * > previous action.
         * @param action the {@link Gtk.Action} to set
         */
        do_set_related_action(action: Action): void;

        /**
         * Gets the related {@link Gtk.Action} for `activatable`.
         * @returns the related {@link Gtk.Action} if one is set.
         */
        get_related_action(): Action;

        /**
         * Gets whether this activatable should reset its layout
         * and appearance when setting the related action or when
         * the action changes appearance.
         * @returns whether `activatable` uses its actions appearance.
         */
        get_use_action_appearance(): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the related action on the `activatable` object.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action}
         * > property and call `gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action()` when it changes.
         * @param action the {@link Gtk.Action} to set
         */
        set_related_action(action: Action): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether this activatable should reset its layout and appearance
         * when setting the related action or when the action changes appearance
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} property and call
         * > `gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties()` to update `activatable`
         * > if needed.
         * @param use_appearance whether to use the actions appearance
         */
        set_use_action_appearance(use_appearance: boolean): void;

        /**
         * This is called to update the activatable completely, this is called
         * internally when the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action} property is set
         * or unset and by the implementing class when
         * {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} changes.
         * @param action the related {@link Gtk.Action} or `null`
         */
        sync_action_properties(action: Action | null): void;

        /**
         * This is called to update the activatable completely, this is called
         * internally when the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action} property is set
         * or unset and by the implementing class when
         * {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} changes.
         * @param action the related {@link Gtk.Action} or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_sync_action_properties(action: Action | null): void;

        /**
         * Called to update the activatable when its related action’s properties change.
         * You must check the {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} property only apply action
         * properties that are meant to effect the appearance accordingly.
         * @param action 
         * @param property_name 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_update(action: Action, property_name: string): void;

        /**
         * Emits a {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.child_notify | Gtk.Widget::child-notify} signal for the
         * [child property][child-properties] `child_property`
         * on `widget`.
         * 
         * This is the analogue of `g_object_notify()` for child properties.
         * 
         * Also see `gtk_container_child_notify()`.
         * @param child_property the name of a child property installed on the                  class of `widget`’s parent
         */
        child_notify(child_property: string): void;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Gtk.Container.child_notify
        child_notify(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Returns whether the widget should grab focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
         * See `gtk_widget_set_focus_on_click()`.
         * @returns `true` if the widget should grab focus when it is clicked with               the mouse.
         */
        get_focus_on_click(): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets whether the widget should grab focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
         * Making mouse clicks not grab focus is useful in places like toolbars where
         * you don’t want the keyboard focus removed from the main area of the
         * application.
         * @param focus_on_click whether the widget should grab focus when clicked with the mouse
         */
        set_focus_on_click(focus_on_click: boolean): void;
    }


    namespace ToggleButtonAccessible {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends ButtonAccessible.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-layer": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-mdi-zorder": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-help-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-hypertext-nlinks": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption-object": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-summary": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends ButtonAccessible.ConstructorProps, Atk.Action.ConstructorProps, Atk.Component.ConstructorProps, Atk.Image.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class ToggleButtonAccessible extends ButtonAccessible implements Atk.Action, Atk.Component, Atk.Image {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ToggleButtonAccessible>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: ToggleButtonAccessible.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<ToggleButtonAccessible.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof ToggleButtonAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ToggleButtonAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof ToggleButtonAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ToggleButtonAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof ToggleButtonAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<ToggleButtonAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        /**
         * Perform the specified action on the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns `true` if success, `false` otherwise
         */
        do_action(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns a description of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns a description string, or `null` if `action` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_description(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.get_description
        get_description(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Gets the keybinding which can be used to activate this action, if one
         * exists. The string returned should contain localized, human-readable,
         * key sequences as they would appear when displayed on screen. It must
         * be in the format "mnemonic;sequence;shortcut".
         * 
         * - The mnemonic key activates the object if it is presently enabled onscreen.
         *   This typically corresponds to the underlined letter within the widget.
         *   Example: "n" in a traditional "New..." menu item or the "a" in "Apply" for
         *   a button.
         * - The sequence is the full list of keys which invoke the action even if the
         *   relevant element is not currently shown on screen. For instance, for a menu
         *   item the sequence is the keybindings used to open the parent menus before
         *   invoking. The sequence string is colon-delimited. Example: "Alt+F:N" in a
         *   traditional "New..." menu item.
         * - The shortcut, if it exists, will invoke the same action without showing
         *   the component or its enclosing menus or dialogs. Example: "Ctrl+N" in a
         *   traditional "New..." menu item.
         * 
         * Example: For a traditional "New..." menu item, the expected return value
         * would be: "N;Alt+F:N;Ctrl+N" for the English locale and "N;Alt+D:N;Strg+N"
         * for the German locale. If, hypothetically, this menu item lacked a mnemonic,
         * it would be represented by ";;Ctrl+N" and ";;Strg+N" respectively.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns the keybinding which can be used to activate this action, or `null` if there is no keybinding for this action.
         */
        get_keybinding(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Returns the localized name of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns a name string, or `null` if `action` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_localized_name(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the number of accessible actions available on the object.
         * If there are more than one, the first one is considered the
         * "default" action of the object.
         * @returns a the number of actions, or 0 if `action` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_n_actions(): number;

        /**
         * Returns a non-localized string naming the specified action of the
         * object. This name is generally not descriptive of the end result
         * of the action, but instead names the 'interaction type' which the
         * object supports. By convention, the above strings should be used to
         * represent the actions which correspond to the common point-and-click
         * interaction techniques of the same name: i.e.
         * "click", "press", "release", "drag", "drop", "popup", etc.
         * The "popup" action should be used to pop up a context menu for the
         * object, if one exists.
         * 
         * For technical reasons, some toolkits cannot guarantee that the
         * reported action is actually 'bound' to a nontrivial user event;
         * i.e. the result of some actions via `atk_action_do_action()` may be
         * NIL.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @returns a name string, or `null` if `action` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_name(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.get_name
        get_name(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Sets a description of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @param desc the description to be assigned to this action
         * @returns a gboolean representing if the description was successfully set;
         */
        set_description(i: number, desc: string): boolean;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.set_description
        set_description(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Perform the specified action on the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_do_action(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns a description of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_description(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         * @virtual
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.vfunc_get_description
        vfunc_get_description(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Gets the keybinding which can be used to activate this action, if one
         * exists. The string returned should contain localized, human-readable,
         * key sequences as they would appear when displayed on screen. It must
         * be in the format "mnemonic;sequence;shortcut".
         * 
         * - The mnemonic key activates the object if it is presently enabled onscreen.
         *   This typically corresponds to the underlined letter within the widget.
         *   Example: "n" in a traditional "New..." menu item or the "a" in "Apply" for
         *   a button.
         * - The sequence is the full list of keys which invoke the action even if the
         *   relevant element is not currently shown on screen. For instance, for a menu
         *   item the sequence is the keybindings used to open the parent menus before
         *   invoking. The sequence string is colon-delimited. Example: "Alt+F:N" in a
         *   traditional "New..." menu item.
         * - The shortcut, if it exists, will invoke the same action without showing
         *   the component or its enclosing menus or dialogs. Example: "Ctrl+N" in a
         *   traditional "New..." menu item.
         * 
         * Example: For a traditional "New..." menu item, the expected return value
         * would be: "N;Alt+F:N;Ctrl+N" for the English locale and "N;Alt+D:N;Strg+N"
         * for the German locale. If, hypothetically, this menu item lacked a mnemonic,
         * it would be represented by ";;Ctrl+N" and ";;Strg+N" respectively.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_keybinding(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Returns the localized name of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_localized_name(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the number of accessible actions available on the object.
         * If there are more than one, the first one is considered the
         * "default" action of the object.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_n_actions(): number;

        /**
         * Returns a non-localized string naming the specified action of the
         * object. This name is generally not descriptive of the end result
         * of the action, but instead names the 'interaction type' which the
         * object supports. By convention, the above strings should be used to
         * represent the actions which correspond to the common point-and-click
         * interaction techniques of the same name: i.e.
         * "click", "press", "release", "drag", "drop", "popup", etc.
         * The "popup" action should be used to pop up a context menu for the
         * object, if one exists.
         * 
         * For technical reasons, some toolkits cannot guarantee that the
         * reported action is actually 'bound' to a nontrivial user event;
         * i.e. the result of some actions via `atk_action_do_action()` may be
         * NIL.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_name(i: number): string | null;

        /**
         * @param args 
         * @virtual
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.vfunc_get_name
        vfunc_get_name(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Sets a description of the specified action of the object.
         * @param i the action index corresponding to the action to be performed
         * @param desc the description to be assigned to this action
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_description(i: number, desc: string): boolean;

        /**
         * @param args 
         * @virtual
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Object.vfunc_set_description
        vfunc_set_description(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Get a textual description of this image.
         * @returns a string representing the image description
         */
        get_image_description(): string;

        /**
         * Retrieves the locale identifier associated to the {@link Atk.Image}.
         * @returns a string corresponding to the POSIX   `LC_MESSAGES` locale used by the image description, or   `null` if the image does not specify a locale.
         */
        get_image_locale(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the position of the image in the form of a point specifying the
         * images top-left corner.
         * 
         * If the position can not be obtained (e.g. missing support), x and y are set
         * to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         */
        get_image_position(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number];

        /**
         * Get the width and height in pixels for the specified image.
         * The values of `width` and `height` are returned as -1 if the
         * values cannot be obtained (for instance, if the object is not onscreen).
         * 
         * If the size can not be obtained (e.g. missing support), x and y are set
         * to -1.
         */
        get_image_size(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Sets the textual description for this image.
         * @param description a string description to set for `image`
         * @returns boolean TRUE, or FALSE if operation could not be completed.
         */
        set_image_description(description: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Get a textual description of this image.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_image_description(): string;

        /**
         * Retrieves the locale identifier associated to the {@link Atk.Image}.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_image_locale(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the position of the image in the form of a point specifying the
         * images top-left corner.
         * 
         * If the position can not be obtained (e.g. missing support), x and y are set
         * to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_image_position(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number];

        /**
         * Get the width and height in pixels for the specified image.
         * The values of `width` and `height` are returned as -1 if the
         * values cannot be obtained (for instance, if the object is not onscreen).
         * 
         * If the size can not be obtained (e.g. missing support), x and y are set
         * to -1.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_image_size(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Sets the textual description for this image.
         * @param description a string description to set for `image`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_image_description(description: string): boolean;
    }


    namespace ToggleToolButton {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends ToolButton.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * Emitted whenever the toggle tool button changes state.
             * @signal
             * @run-first
             */
            toggled: () => void;
            "notify::active": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::icon-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::icon-widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::label": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::label-widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::stock-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-underline": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-important": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible-horizontal": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible-vertical": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::action-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::action-target": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends ToolButton.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Actionable.ConstructorProps, Activatable.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {
            active: boolean;
        }
    }

    /**
     * A {@link Gtk.ToggleToolButton} is a {@link Gtk.ToolItem} that contains a toggle
     * button.
     * 
     * Use `gtk_toggle_tool_button_new()` to create a new GtkToggleToolButton.
     * 
     * # CSS nodes
     * 
     * GtkToggleToolButton has a single CSS node with name togglebutton.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class ToggleToolButton extends ToolButton implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Actionable, Activatable, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ToggleToolButton>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * If the toggle tool button should be pressed in.
         * @since 2.8
         * @default false
         */
        get active(): boolean;
        set active(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: ToggleToolButton.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<ToggleToolButton.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): ToggleToolButton;

        static new_from_stock(stock_id: string): ToggleToolButton;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof ToggleToolButton.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ToggleToolButton.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof ToggleToolButton.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ToggleToolButton.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof ToggleToolButton.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<ToggleToolButton.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * Signal emitted whenever the toggle tool button changes state.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_toggled(): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Queries a {@link Gtk.ToggleToolButton} and returns its current state.
         * Returns `true` if the toggle button is pressed in and `false` if it is raised.
         * @returns `true` if the toggle tool button is pressed in, `false` if not
         */
        get_active(): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the status of the toggle tool button. Set to `true` if you
         * want the GtkToggleButton to be “pressed in”, and `false` to raise it.
         * This action causes the toggled signal to be emitted.
         * @param is_active whether `button` should be active
         */
        set_active(is_active: boolean): void;

        /**
         * @default null
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable
         */
        get action_name(): string | null;
        set action_name(val: string | null);

        /**
         * @default null
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable
         */
        get actionName(): string | null;
        set actionName(val: string | null);

        /** @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable */
        get action_target(): GLib.Variant;
        set action_target(val: GLib.Variant);

        /** @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable */
        get actionTarget(): GLib.Variant;
        set actionTarget(val: GLib.Variant);

        /**
         * Gets the action name for `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_name()` for more information.
         * @returns the action name, or `null` if none is set
         */
        get_action_name(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the current target value of `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_target_value()` for more information.
         * @returns the current target value
         */
        get_action_target_value(): GLib.Variant;

        /**
         * Specifies the name of the action with which this widget should be
         * associated.  If `action_name` is `null` then the widget will be
         * unassociated from any previous action.
         * 
         * Usually this function is used when the widget is located (or will be
         * located) within the hierarchy of a {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow}.
         * 
         * Names are of the form “win.save” or “app.quit” for actions on the
         * containing {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow} or its associated {@link Gtk.Application},
         * respectively.  This is the same form used for actions in the {@link Gio.Menu}
         * associated with the window.
         * @param action_name an action name, or `null`
         */
        set_action_name(action_name: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the target value of an actionable widget.
         * 
         * If `target_value` is `null` then the target value is unset.
         * 
         * The target value has two purposes.  First, it is used as the
         * parameter to activation of the action associated with the
         * {@link Gtk.Actionable} widget. Second, it is used to determine if the widget
         * should be rendered as “active” — the widget is active if the state
         * is equal to the given target.
         * 
         * Consider the example of associating a set of buttons with a {@link Gio.Action}
         * with string state in a typical “radio button” situation.  Each button
         * will be associated with the same action, but with a different target
         * value for that action.  Clicking on a particular button will activate
         * the action with the target of that button, which will typically cause
         * the action’s state to change to that value.  Since the action’s state
         * is now equal to the target value of the button, the button will now
         * be rendered as active (and the other buttons, with different targets,
         * rendered inactive).
         * @param target_value a {@link GLib.Variant} to set as the target value, or `null`
         */
        set_action_target_value(target_value: GLib.Variant | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the action-name and associated string target value of an
         * actionable widget.
         * 
         * `detailed_action_name` is a string in the format accepted by
         * `g_action_parse_detailed_name()`.
         * 
         * (Note that prior to version 3.22.25,
         * this function is only usable for actions with a simple "s" target, and
         * `detailed_action_name` must be of the form `"action::target"` where
         * `action` is the action name and `target` is the string to use
         * as the target.)
         * @param detailed_action_name the detailed action name
         */
        set_detailed_action_name(detailed_action_name: string): void;

        /**
         * Gets the action name for `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_name()` for more information.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_action_name(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the current target value of `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_target_value()` for more information.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_action_target_value(): GLib.Variant;

        /**
         * Specifies the name of the action with which this widget should be
         * associated.  If `action_name` is `null` then the widget will be
         * unassociated from any previous action.
         * 
         * Usually this function is used when the widget is located (or will be
         * located) within the hierarchy of a {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow}.
         * 
         * Names are of the form “win.save” or “app.quit” for actions on the
         * containing {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow} or its associated {@link Gtk.Application},
         * respectively.  This is the same form used for actions in the {@link Gio.Menu}
         * associated with the window.
         * @param action_name an action name, or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_action_name(action_name: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the target value of an actionable widget.
         * 
         * If `target_value` is `null` then the target value is unset.
         * 
         * The target value has two purposes.  First, it is used as the
         * parameter to activation of the action associated with the
         * {@link Gtk.Actionable} widget. Second, it is used to determine if the widget
         * should be rendered as “active” — the widget is active if the state
         * is equal to the given target.
         * 
         * Consider the example of associating a set of buttons with a {@link Gio.Action}
         * with string state in a typical “radio button” situation.  Each button
         * will be associated with the same action, but with a different target
         * value for that action.  Clicking on a particular button will activate
         * the action with the target of that button, which will typically cause
         * the action’s state to change to that value.  Since the action’s state
         * is now equal to the target value of the button, the button will now
         * be rendered as active (and the other buttons, with different targets,
         * rendered inactive).
         * @param target_value a {@link GLib.Variant} to set as the target value, or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_action_target_value(target_value: GLib.Variant | null): void;

        /**
         * Emits a {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.child_notify | Gtk.Widget::child-notify} signal for the
         * [child property][child-properties] `child_property`
         * on `widget`.
         * 
         * This is the analogue of `g_object_notify()` for child properties.
         * 
         * Also see `gtk_container_child_notify()`.
         * @param child_property the name of a child property installed on the                  class of `widget`’s parent
         */
        child_notify(child_property: string): void;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Gtk.Container.child_notify
        child_notify(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Sets `markup` as the contents of the tooltip, which is marked up with
         *  the [Pango text markup language][PangoMarkupFormat].
         * 
         * This function will take care of setting {@link Gtk.Widget.has_tooltip} to `true`
         * and of the default handler for the {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.query_tooltip | Gtk.Widget::query-tooltip} signal.
         * 
         * See also the {@link Gtk.Widget.tooltip_markup} property and
         * `gtk_tooltip_set_markup()`.
         * @param markup the contents of the tooltip for `widget`, or `null`
         */
        set_tooltip_markup(markup: string | null): void;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Gtk.ToolItem.set_tooltip_markup
        set_tooltip_markup(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Sets `text` as the contents of the tooltip. This function will take
         * care of setting {@link Gtk.Widget.has_tooltip} to `true` and of the default
         * handler for the {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.query_tooltip | Gtk.Widget::query-tooltip} signal.
         * 
         * See also the {@link Gtk.Widget.tooltip_text} property and `gtk_tooltip_set_text()`.
         * @param text the contents of the tooltip for `widget`
         */
        set_tooltip_text(text: string | null): void;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Gtk.ToolItem.set_tooltip_text
        set_tooltip_text(...args: never[]): any;
    }


    namespace ToolButton {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends ToolItem.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * This signal is emitted when the tool button is clicked with the mouse
             * or activated with the keyboard.
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-first
             */
            clicked: () => void;
            "notify::icon-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::icon-widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::label": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::label-widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::stock-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-underline": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-important": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible-horizontal": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible-vertical": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::action-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::action-target": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::related-action": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-action-appearance": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends ToolItem.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Actionable.ConstructorProps, Activatable.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {
            icon_name: string | null;
            iconName: string | null;
            icon_widget: Widget | null;
            iconWidget: Widget | null;
            label: string | null;
            label_widget: Widget | null;
            labelWidget: Widget | null;
            stock_id: string;
            stockId: string;
            use_underline: boolean;
            useUnderline: boolean;
        }
    }

    /**
     * `GtkToolButtons` are `GtkToolItems` containing buttons.
     * 
     * Use `gtk_tool_button_new()` to create a new {@link Gtk.ToolButton}.
     * 
     * The label of a {@link Gtk.ToolButton} is determined by the properties
     * {@link Gtk.ToolButton.label_widget}, {@link Gtk.ToolButton.label}, and
     * {@link Gtk.ToolButton.stock_id}. If {@link Gtk.ToolButton.label_widget} is
     * non-`null`, then that widget is used as the label. Otherwise, if
     * {@link Gtk.ToolButton.label} is non-`null`, that string is used as the label.
     * Otherwise, if {@link Gtk.ToolButton.stock_id} is non-`null`, the label is
     * determined by the stock item. Otherwise, the button does not have a label.
     * 
     * The icon of a {@link Gtk.ToolButton} is determined by the properties
     * {@link Gtk.ToolButton.icon_widget} and {@link Gtk.ToolButton.stock_id}. If
     * {@link Gtk.ToolButton.icon_widget} is non-`null`, then
     * that widget is used as the icon. Otherwise, if {@link Gtk.ToolButton.stock_id} is
     * non-`null`, the icon is determined by the stock item. Otherwise,
     * the button does not have a icon.
     * 
     * # CSS nodes
     * 
     * GtkToolButton has a single CSS node with name toolbutton.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class ToolButton extends ToolItem implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Actionable, Activatable, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ToolButton>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * The name of the themed icon displayed on the item.
         * This property only has an effect if not overridden by
         * {@link Gtk.ToolButton.label_widget}, {@link Gtk.ToolButton.icon_widget} or
         * {@link Gtk.ToolButton.stock_id} properties.
         * @since 2.8
         * @default null
         */
        get icon_name(): string | null;
        set icon_name(val: string | null);

        /**
         * The name of the themed icon displayed on the item.
         * This property only has an effect if not overridden by
         * {@link Gtk.ToolButton.label_widget}, {@link Gtk.ToolButton.icon_widget} or
         * {@link Gtk.ToolButton.stock_id} properties.
         * @since 2.8
         * @default null
         */
        get iconName(): string | null;
        set iconName(val: string | null);

        get icon_widget(): Widget | null;
        set icon_widget(val: Widget | null);

        get iconWidget(): Widget | null;
        set iconWidget(val: Widget | null);

        /**
         * @default null
         */
        get label(): string | null;
        set label(val: string | null);

        get label_widget(): Widget | null;
        set label_widget(val: Widget | null);

        get labelWidget(): Widget | null;
        set labelWidget(val: Widget | null);

        /**
         * @deprecated since 3.10: Use {@link Gtk.ToolButton.icon_name} instead.
         * @default null
         */
        get stock_id(): string;
        set stock_id(val: string);

        /**
         * @deprecated since 3.10: Use {@link Gtk.ToolButton.icon_name} instead.
         * @default null
         */
        get stockId(): string;
        set stockId(val: string);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get use_underline(): boolean;
        set use_underline(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get useUnderline(): boolean;
        set useUnderline(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: ToolButton.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<ToolButton.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](icon_widget: Widget | null, label: string | null): ToolButton;

        // Conflicted with Gtk.ToolItem.new
        static ["new"](...args: never[]): any;

        static new_from_stock(stock_id: string): ToolButton;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof ToolButton.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ToolButton.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof ToolButton.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ToolButton.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof ToolButton.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<ToolButton.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * Signal emitted when the tool button is clicked with the
         *    mouse or activated with the keyboard.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_clicked(): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Returns the name of the themed icon for the tool button,
         * see `gtk_tool_button_set_icon_name()`.
         * @returns the icon name or `null` if the tool button has no themed icon
         */
        get_icon_name(): string | null;

        /**
         * Return the widget used as icon widget on `button`.
         * See `gtk_tool_button_set_icon_widget()`.
         * @returns The widget used as icon     on `button`, or `null`.
         */
        get_icon_widget(): Widget | null;

        /**
         * Returns the label used by the tool button, or `null` if the tool button
         * doesn’t have a label. or uses a the label from a stock item. The returned
         * string is owned by GTK+, and must not be modified or freed.
         * @returns The label, or `null`
         */
        get_label(): string | null;

        /**
         * Returns the widget used as label on `button`.
         * See `gtk_tool_button_set_label_widget()`.
         * @returns The widget used as label     on `button`, or `null`.
         */
        get_label_widget(): Widget | null;

        /**
         * Returns the name of the stock item. See `gtk_tool_button_set_stock_id()`.
         * The returned string is owned by GTK+ and must not be freed or modifed.
         * @returns the name of the stock item for `button`.
         */
        get_stock_id(): string;

        /**
         * Returns whether underscores in the label property are used as mnemonics
         * on menu items on the overflow menu. See `gtk_tool_button_set_use_underline()`.
         * @returns `true` if underscores in the label property are used as mnemonics on menu items on the overflow menu.
         */
        get_use_underline(): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the icon for the tool button from a named themed icon.
         * See the docs for {@link Gtk.IconTheme} for more details.
         * The {@link Gtk.ToolButton.icon_name} property only has an effect if not
         * overridden by non-`null` {@link Gtk.ToolButton.label_widget},
         * {@link Gtk.ToolButton.icon_widget} and {@link Gtk.ToolButton.stock_id} properties.
         * @param icon_name the name of the themed icon
         */
        set_icon_name(icon_name: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets `icon` as the widget used as icon on `button`. If `icon_widget` is
         * `null` the icon is determined by the {@link Gtk.ToolButton.stock_id} property. If the
         * {@link Gtk.ToolButton.stock_id} property is also `null`, `button` will not have an icon.
         * @param icon_widget the widget used as icon, or `null`
         */
        set_icon_widget(icon_widget: Widget | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets `label` as the label used for the tool button. The {@link Gtk.ToolButton.label}
         * property only has an effect if not overridden by a non-`null`
         * {@link Gtk.ToolButton.label_widget} property. If both the {@link Gtk.ToolButton.label_widget}
         * and {@link Gtk.ToolButton.label} properties are `null`, the label is determined by the
         * {@link Gtk.ToolButton.stock_id} property. If the {@link Gtk.ToolButton.stock_id} property is
         * also `null`, `button` will not have a label.
         * @param label a string that will be used as label, or `null`.
         */
        set_label(label: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets `label_widget` as the widget that will be used as the label
         * for `button`. If `label_widget` is `null` the {@link Gtk.ToolButton.label} property is used
         * as label. If {@link Gtk.ToolButton.label} is also `null`, the label in the stock item
         * determined by the {@link Gtk.ToolButton.stock_id} property is used as label. If
         * {@link Gtk.ToolButton.stock_id} is also `null`, `button` does not have a label.
         * @param label_widget the widget used as label, or `null`
         */
        set_label_widget(label_widget: Widget | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the name of the stock item. See `gtk_tool_button_new_from_stock()`.
         * The stock_id property only has an effect if not overridden by non-`null`
         * {@link Gtk.ToolButton.label_widget} and {@link Gtk.ToolButton.icon_widget} properties.
         * @param stock_id a name of a stock item, or `null`
         */
        set_stock_id(stock_id: string | null): void;

        /**
         * If set, an underline in the label property indicates that the next character
         * should be used for the mnemonic accelerator key in the overflow menu. For
         * example, if the label property is “_Open” and `use_underline` is `true`,
         * the label on the tool button will be “Open” and the item on the overflow
         * menu will have an underlined “O”.
         * 
         * Labels shown on tool buttons never have mnemonics on them; this property
         * only affects the menu item on the overflow menu.
         * @param use_underline whether the button label has the form “_Open”
         */
        set_use_underline(use_underline: boolean): void;

        /**
         * @default null
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable
         */
        get action_name(): string | null;
        set action_name(val: string | null);

        /**
         * @default null
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable
         */
        get actionName(): string | null;
        set actionName(val: string | null);

        /** @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable */
        get action_target(): GLib.Variant;
        set action_target(val: GLib.Variant);

        /** @category Inherited from Gtk.Actionable */
        get actionTarget(): GLib.Variant;
        set actionTarget(val: GLib.Variant);

        /**
         * The action that this activatable will activate and receive
         * updates from for various states and possibly appearance.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the this property and
         * > call `gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action()` when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get related_action(): Action;
        set related_action(val: Action);

        /**
         * The action that this activatable will activate and receive
         * updates from for various states and possibly appearance.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the this property and
         * > call `gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action()` when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get relatedAction(): Action;
        set relatedAction(val: Action);

        /**
         * Whether this activatable should reset its layout
         * and appearance when setting the related action or when
         * the action changes appearance.
         * 
         * See the {@link Gtk.Action} documentation directly to find which properties
         * should be ignored by the {@link Gtk.Activatable} when this property is `false`.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle this property
         * > and call `gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties()` on the activatable
         * > widget when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get use_action_appearance(): boolean;
        set use_action_appearance(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether this activatable should reset its layout
         * and appearance when setting the related action or when
         * the action changes appearance.
         * 
         * See the {@link Gtk.Action} documentation directly to find which properties
         * should be ignored by the {@link Gtk.Activatable} when this property is `false`.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle this property
         * > and call `gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties()` on the activatable
         * > widget when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get useActionAppearance(): boolean;
        set useActionAppearance(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Gets the action name for `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_name()` for more information.
         * @returns the action name, or `null` if none is set
         */
        get_action_name(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the current target value of `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_target_value()` for more information.
         * @returns the current target value
         */
        get_action_target_value(): GLib.Variant;

        /**
         * Specifies the name of the action with which this widget should be
         * associated.  If `action_name` is `null` then the widget will be
         * unassociated from any previous action.
         * 
         * Usually this function is used when the widget is located (or will be
         * located) within the hierarchy of a {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow}.
         * 
         * Names are of the form “win.save” or “app.quit” for actions on the
         * containing {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow} or its associated {@link Gtk.Application},
         * respectively.  This is the same form used for actions in the {@link Gio.Menu}
         * associated with the window.
         * @param action_name an action name, or `null`
         */
        set_action_name(action_name: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the target value of an actionable widget.
         * 
         * If `target_value` is `null` then the target value is unset.
         * 
         * The target value has two purposes.  First, it is used as the
         * parameter to activation of the action associated with the
         * {@link Gtk.Actionable} widget. Second, it is used to determine if the widget
         * should be rendered as “active” — the widget is active if the state
         * is equal to the given target.
         * 
         * Consider the example of associating a set of buttons with a {@link Gio.Action}
         * with string state in a typical “radio button” situation.  Each button
         * will be associated with the same action, but with a different target
         * value for that action.  Clicking on a particular button will activate
         * the action with the target of that button, which will typically cause
         * the action’s state to change to that value.  Since the action’s state
         * is now equal to the target value of the button, the button will now
         * be rendered as active (and the other buttons, with different targets,
         * rendered inactive).
         * @param target_value a {@link GLib.Variant} to set as the target value, or `null`
         */
        set_action_target_value(target_value: GLib.Variant | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the action-name and associated string target value of an
         * actionable widget.
         * 
         * `detailed_action_name` is a string in the format accepted by
         * `g_action_parse_detailed_name()`.
         * 
         * (Note that prior to version 3.22.25,
         * this function is only usable for actions with a simple "s" target, and
         * `detailed_action_name` must be of the form `"action::target"` where
         * `action` is the action name and `target` is the string to use
         * as the target.)
         * @param detailed_action_name the detailed action name
         */
        set_detailed_action_name(detailed_action_name: string): void;

        /**
         * Gets the action name for `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_name()` for more information.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_action_name(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the current target value of `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_target_value()` for more information.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_action_target_value(): GLib.Variant;

        /**
         * Specifies the name of the action with which this widget should be
         * associated.  If `action_name` is `null` then the widget will be
         * unassociated from any previous action.
         * 
         * Usually this function is used when the widget is located (or will be
         * located) within the hierarchy of a {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow}.
         * 
         * Names are of the form “win.save” or “app.quit” for actions on the
         * containing {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow} or its associated {@link Gtk.Application},
         * respectively.  This is the same form used for actions in the {@link Gio.Menu}
         * associated with the window.
         * @param action_name an action name, or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_action_name(action_name: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the target value of an actionable widget.
         * 
         * If `target_value` is `null` then the target value is unset.
         * 
         * The target value has two purposes.  First, it is used as the
         * parameter to activation of the action associated with the
         * {@link Gtk.Actionable} widget. Second, it is used to determine if the widget
         * should be rendered as “active” — the widget is active if the state
         * is equal to the given target.
         * 
         * Consider the example of associating a set of buttons with a {@link Gio.Action}
         * with string state in a typical “radio button” situation.  Each button
         * will be associated with the same action, but with a different target
         * value for that action.  Clicking on a particular button will activate
         * the action with the target of that button, which will typically cause
         * the action’s state to change to that value.  Since the action’s state
         * is now equal to the target value of the button, the button will now
         * be rendered as active (and the other buttons, with different targets,
         * rendered inactive).
         * @param target_value a {@link GLib.Variant} to set as the target value, or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_action_target_value(target_value: GLib.Variant | null): void;

        /**
         * This is a utility function for {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors.
         * 
         * When implementing {@link Gtk.Activatable} you must call this when
         * handling changes of the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action}, and
         * you must also use this to break references in {@link GObject.Object}->dispose().
         * 
         * This function adds a reference to the currently set related
         * action for you, it also makes sure the {@link Gtk.Activatable}->update()
         * method is called when the related {@link Gtk.Action} properties change
         * and registers to the action’s proxy list.
         * 
         * > Be careful to call this before setting the local
         * > copy of the {@link Gtk.Action} property, since this function uses
         * > `gtk_activatable_get_related_action()` to retrieve the
         * > previous action.
         * @param action the {@link Gtk.Action} to set
         */
        do_set_related_action(action: Action): void;

        /**
         * Gets the related {@link Gtk.Action} for `activatable`.
         * @returns the related {@link Gtk.Action} if one is set.
         */
        get_related_action(): Action;

        /**
         * Gets whether this activatable should reset its layout
         * and appearance when setting the related action or when
         * the action changes appearance.
         * @returns whether `activatable` uses its actions appearance.
         */
        get_use_action_appearance(): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the related action on the `activatable` object.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action}
         * > property and call `gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action()` when it changes.
         * @param action the {@link Gtk.Action} to set
         */
        set_related_action(action: Action): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether this activatable should reset its layout and appearance
         * when setting the related action or when the action changes appearance
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} property and call
         * > `gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties()` to update `activatable`
         * > if needed.
         * @param use_appearance whether to use the actions appearance
         */
        set_use_action_appearance(use_appearance: boolean): void;

        /**
         * This is called to update the activatable completely, this is called
         * internally when the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action} property is set
         * or unset and by the implementing class when
         * {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} changes.
         * @param action the related {@link Gtk.Action} or `null`
         */
        sync_action_properties(action: Action | null): void;

        /**
         * This is called to update the activatable completely, this is called
         * internally when the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action} property is set
         * or unset and by the implementing class when
         * {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} changes.
         * @param action the related {@link Gtk.Action} or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_sync_action_properties(action: Action | null): void;

        /**
         * Called to update the activatable when its related action’s properties change.
         * You must check the {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} property only apply action
         * properties that are meant to effect the appearance accordingly.
         * @param action 
         * @param property_name 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_update(action: Action, property_name: string): void;

        /**
         * Emits a {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.child_notify | Gtk.Widget::child-notify} signal for the
         * [child property][child-properties] `child_property`
         * on `widget`.
         * 
         * This is the analogue of `g_object_notify()` for child properties.
         * 
         * Also see `gtk_container_child_notify()`.
         * @param child_property the name of a child property installed on the                  class of `widget`’s parent
         */
        child_notify(child_property: string): void;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Gtk.Container.child_notify
        child_notify(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Sets `markup` as the contents of the tooltip, which is marked up with
         *  the [Pango text markup language][PangoMarkupFormat].
         * 
         * This function will take care of setting {@link Gtk.Widget.has_tooltip} to `true`
         * and of the default handler for the {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.query_tooltip | Gtk.Widget::query-tooltip} signal.
         * 
         * See also the {@link Gtk.Widget.tooltip_markup} property and
         * `gtk_tooltip_set_markup()`.
         * @param markup the contents of the tooltip for `widget`, or `null`
         */
        set_tooltip_markup(markup: string | null): void;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Gtk.ToolItem.set_tooltip_markup
        set_tooltip_markup(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Sets `text` as the contents of the tooltip. This function will take
         * care of setting {@link Gtk.Widget.has_tooltip} to `true` and of the default
         * handler for the {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.query_tooltip | Gtk.Widget::query-tooltip} signal.
         * 
         * See also the {@link Gtk.Widget.tooltip_text} property and `gtk_tooltip_set_text()`.
         * @param text the contents of the tooltip for `widget`
         */
        set_tooltip_text(text: string | null): void;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Gtk.ToolItem.set_tooltip_text
        set_tooltip_text(...args: never[]): any;
    }


    namespace ToolItem {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Bin.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * This signal is emitted when the toolbar needs information from `tool_item`
             * about whether the item should appear in the toolbar overflow menu. In
             * response the tool item should either
             * 
             * - call `gtk_tool_item_set_proxy_menu_item()` with a `null`
             *   pointer and return `true` to indicate that the item should not appear
             *   in the overflow menu
             * 
             * - call `gtk_tool_item_set_proxy_menu_item()` with a new menu
             *   item and return `true`, or
             * 
             * - return `false` to indicate that the signal was not handled by the item.
             *   This means that the item will not appear in the overflow menu unless
             *   a later handler installs a menu item.
             * 
             * The toolbar may cache the result of this signal. When the tool item changes
             * how it will respond to this signal it must call `gtk_tool_item_rebuild_menu()`
             * to invalidate the cache and ensure that the toolbar rebuilds its overflow
             * menu.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "create-menu-proxy": () => boolean | void;
            /**
             * This signal is emitted when some property of the toolbar that the
             * item is a child of changes. For custom subclasses of {@link Gtk.ToolItem},
             * the default handler of this signal use the functions
             * - `gtk_tool_shell_get_orientation()`
             * - `gtk_tool_shell_get_style()`
             * - `gtk_tool_shell_get_icon_size()`
             * - `gtk_tool_shell_get_relief_style()`
             * to find out what the toolbar should look like and change
             * themselves accordingly.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "toolbar-reconfigured": () => void;
            "notify::is-important": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible-horizontal": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible-vertical": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::related-action": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-action-appearance": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Bin.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Activatable.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {
            is_important: boolean;
            isImportant: boolean;
            visible_horizontal: boolean;
            visibleHorizontal: boolean;
            visible_vertical: boolean;
            visibleVertical: boolean;
        }
    }

    /**
     * `GtkToolItems` are widgets that can appear on a toolbar. To
     * create a toolbar item that contain something else than a button, use
     * `gtk_tool_item_new()`. Use `gtk_container_add()` to add a child
     * widget to the tool item.
     * 
     * For toolbar items that contain buttons, see the {@link Gtk.ToolButton},
     * {@link Gtk.ToggleToolButton} and {@link Gtk.RadioToolButton} classes.
     * 
     * See the {@link Gtk.Toolbar} class for a description of the toolbar widget, and
     * {@link Gtk.ToolShell} for a description of the tool shell interface.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class ToolItem extends Bin implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Activatable, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ToolItem>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get is_important(): boolean;
        set is_important(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get isImportant(): boolean;
        set isImportant(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default true
         */
        get visible_horizontal(): boolean;
        set visible_horizontal(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default true
         */
        get visibleHorizontal(): boolean;
        set visibleHorizontal(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default true
         */
        get visible_vertical(): boolean;
        set visible_vertical(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default true
         */
        get visibleVertical(): boolean;
        set visibleVertical(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: ToolItem.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<ToolItem.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): ToolItem;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof ToolItem.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ToolItem.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof ToolItem.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ToolItem.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof ToolItem.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<ToolItem.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * Signal emitted when the toolbar needs
         *    information from tool_item about whether the item should appear in
         *    the toolbar overflow menu.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_create_menu_proxy(): boolean;

        /**
         * Emits the signal {@link Gtk.ToolItem.SignalSignatures.toolbar_reconfigured | Gtk.ToolItem::toolbar_reconfigured} on `tool_item`.
         * {@link Gtk.Toolbar} and other {@link Gtk.ToolShell} implementations use this function
         * to notify children, when some aspect of their configuration changes.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_toolbar_reconfigured(): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Returns the ellipsize mode used for `tool_item`. Custom subclasses of
         * {@link Gtk.ToolItem} should call this function to find out how text should
         * be ellipsized.
         * @returns a {@link Pango.EllipsizeMode} indicating how text in `tool_item` should be ellipsized.
         */
        get_ellipsize_mode(): Pango.EllipsizeMode;

        /**
         * Returns whether `tool_item` is allocated extra space.
         * See `gtk_tool_item_set_expand()`.
         * @returns `true` if `tool_item` is allocated extra space.
         */
        get_expand(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns whether `tool_item` is the same size as other homogeneous
         * items. See `gtk_tool_item_set_homogeneous()`.
         * @returns `true` if the item is the same size as other homogeneous items.
         */
        get_homogeneous(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the icon size used for `tool_item`. Custom subclasses of
         * {@link Gtk.ToolItem} should call this function to find out what size icons
         * they should use.
         * @returns a {@link Gtk.IconSize} indicating the icon size used for `tool_item`
         */
        get_icon_size(): number;

        /**
         * Returns whether `tool_item` is considered important. See
         * `gtk_tool_item_set_is_important()`
         * @returns `true` if `tool_item` is considered important.
         */
        get_is_important(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the orientation used for `tool_item`. Custom subclasses of
         * {@link Gtk.ToolItem} should call this function to find out what size icons
         * they should use.
         * @returns a {@link Gtk.Orientation} indicating the orientation used for `tool_item`
         */
        get_orientation(): Orientation;

        /**
         * If `menu_item_id` matches the string passed to
         * `gtk_tool_item_set_proxy_menu_item()` return the corresponding {@link Gtk.MenuItem}.
         * 
         * Custom subclasses of {@link Gtk.ToolItem} should use this function to
         * update their menu item when the {@link Gtk.ToolItem} changes. That the
         * `menu_item_ids` must match ensures that a {@link Gtk.ToolItem}
         * will not inadvertently change a menu item that they did not create.
         * @param menu_item_id a string used to identify the menu item
         * @returns The {@link Gtk.MenuItem} passed to     `gtk_tool_item_set_proxy_menu_item()`, if the `menu_item_ids`     match.
         */
        get_proxy_menu_item(menu_item_id: string): Widget | null;

        /**
         * Returns the relief style of `tool_item`. See `gtk_button_set_relief()`.
         * Custom subclasses of {@link Gtk.ToolItem} should call this function in the handler
         * of the {@link Gtk.ToolItem.SignalSignatures.toolbar_reconfigured | Gtk.ToolItem::toolbar_reconfigured} signal to find out the
         * relief style of buttons.
         * @returns a {@link Gtk.ReliefStyle} indicating the relief style used for `tool_item`.
         */
        get_relief_style(): ReliefStyle;

        /**
         * Returns the text alignment used for `tool_item`. Custom subclasses of
         * {@link Gtk.ToolItem} should call this function to find out how text should
         * be aligned.
         * @returns a `gfloat` indicating the horizontal text alignment used for `tool_item`
         */
        get_text_alignment(): number;

        /**
         * Returns the text orientation used for `tool_item`. Custom subclasses of
         * {@link Gtk.ToolItem} should call this function to find out how text should
         * be orientated.
         * @returns a {@link Gtk.Orientation} indicating the text orientation used for `tool_item`
         */
        get_text_orientation(): Orientation;

        /**
         * Returns the size group used for labels in `tool_item`.
         * Custom subclasses of {@link Gtk.ToolItem} should call this function
         * and use the size group for labels.
         * @returns a {@link Gtk.SizeGroup}
         */
        get_text_size_group(): SizeGroup;

        /**
         * Returns the toolbar style used for `tool_item`. Custom subclasses of
         * {@link Gtk.ToolItem} should call this function in the handler of the
         * GtkToolItem::toolbar_reconfigured signal to find out in what style
         * the toolbar is displayed and change themselves accordingly
         * 
         * Possibilities are:
         * - {@link Gtk.ToolbarStyle.BOTH}, meaning the tool item should show
         *   both an icon and a label, stacked vertically
         * - {@link Gtk.ToolbarStyle.ICONS}, meaning the toolbar shows only icons
         * - {@link Gtk.ToolbarStyle.TEXT}, meaning the tool item should only show text
         * - {@link Gtk.ToolbarStyle.BOTH_HORIZ}, meaning the tool item should show
         *   both an icon and a label, arranged horizontally
         * @returns A {@link Gtk.ToolbarStyle} indicating the toolbar style used for `tool_item`.
         */
        get_toolbar_style(): ToolbarStyle;

        /**
         * Returns whether `tool_item` has a drag window. See
         * `gtk_tool_item_set_use_drag_window()`.
         * @returns `true` if `tool_item` uses a drag window.
         */
        get_use_drag_window(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns whether the `tool_item` is visible on toolbars that are
         * docked horizontally.
         * @returns `true` if `tool_item` is visible on toolbars that are docked horizontally.
         */
        get_visible_horizontal(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns whether `tool_item` is visible when the toolbar is docked vertically.
         * See `gtk_tool_item_set_visible_vertical()`.
         * @returns Whether `tool_item` is visible when the toolbar is docked vertically
         */
        get_visible_vertical(): boolean;

        /**
         * Calling this function signals to the toolbar that the
         * overflow menu item for `tool_item` has changed. If the
         * overflow menu is visible when this function it called,
         * the menu will be rebuilt.
         * 
         * The function must be called when the tool item changes what it
         * will do in response to the {@link Gtk.ToolItem.SignalSignatures.create_menu_proxy | Gtk.ToolItem::create-menu-proxy} signal.
         */
        rebuild_menu(): void;

        /**
         * Returns the {@link Gtk.MenuItem} that was last set by
         * `gtk_tool_item_set_proxy_menu_item()`, ie. the {@link Gtk.MenuItem}
         * that is going to appear in the overflow menu.
         * @returns The {@link Gtk.MenuItem} that is going to appear in the overflow menu for `tool_item`.
         */
        retrieve_proxy_menu_item(): Widget;

        /**
         * Sets whether `tool_item` is allocated extra space when there
         * is more room on the toolbar then needed for the items. The
         * effect is that the item gets bigger when the toolbar gets bigger
         * and smaller when the toolbar gets smaller.
         * @param expand Whether `tool_item` is allocated extra space
         */
        set_expand(expand: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether `tool_item` is to be allocated the same size as other
         * homogeneous items. The effect is that all homogeneous items will have
         * the same width as the widest of the items.
         * @param homogeneous whether `tool_item` is the same size as other homogeneous items
         */
        set_homogeneous(homogeneous: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether `tool_item` should be considered important. The {@link Gtk.ToolButton}
         * class uses this property to determine whether to show or hide its label
         * when the toolbar style is {@link Gtk.ToolbarStyle.BOTH_HORIZ}. The result is that
         * only tool buttons with the “is_important” property set have labels, an
         * effect known as “priority text”
         * @param is_important whether the tool item should be considered important
         */
        set_is_important(is_important: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.MenuItem} used in the toolbar overflow menu. The
         * `menu_item_id` is used to identify the caller of this function and
         * should also be used with `gtk_tool_item_get_proxy_menu_item()`.
         * 
         * See also {@link Gtk.ToolItem.SignalSignatures.create_menu_proxy | Gtk.ToolItem::create-menu-proxy}.
         * @param menu_item_id a string used to identify `menu_item`
         * @param menu_item a {@link Gtk.MenuItem} to use in the overflow menu, or `null`
         */
        set_proxy_menu_item(menu_item_id: string, menu_item: Widget | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the markup text to be displayed as tooltip on the item.
         * See `gtk_widget_set_tooltip_markup()`.
         * @param markup markup text to be used as tooltip for `tool_item`
         */
        set_tooltip_markup(markup: string): void;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
    // Conflicted with Gtk.Widget.set_tooltip_markup
        set_tooltip_markup(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Sets the text to be displayed as tooltip on the item.
         * See `gtk_widget_set_tooltip_text()`.
         * @param text text to be used as tooltip for `tool_item`
         */
        set_tooltip_text(text: string): void;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
    // Conflicted with Gtk.Widget.set_tooltip_text
        set_tooltip_text(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Sets whether `tool_item` has a drag window. When `true` the
         * toolitem can be used as a drag source through `gtk_drag_source_set()`.
         * When `tool_item` has a drag window it will intercept all events,
         * even those that would otherwise be sent to a child of `tool_item`.
         * @param use_drag_window Whether `tool_item` has a drag window.
         */
        set_use_drag_window(use_drag_window: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether `tool_item` is visible when the toolbar is docked horizontally.
         * @param visible_horizontal Whether `tool_item` is visible when in horizontal mode
         */
        set_visible_horizontal(visible_horizontal: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether `tool_item` is visible when the toolbar is docked
         * vertically. Some tool items, such as text entries, are too wide to be
         * useful on a vertically docked toolbar. If `visible_vertical` is `false`
         * `tool_item` will not appear on toolbars that are docked vertically.
         * @param visible_vertical whether `tool_item` is visible when the toolbar is in vertical mode
         */
        set_visible_vertical(visible_vertical: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Emits the signal {@link Gtk.ToolItem.SignalSignatures.toolbar_reconfigured | Gtk.ToolItem::toolbar_reconfigured} on `tool_item`.
         * {@link Gtk.Toolbar} and other {@link Gtk.ToolShell} implementations use this function
         * to notify children, when some aspect of their configuration changes.
         */
        toolbar_reconfigured(): void;

        /**
         * The action that this activatable will activate and receive
         * updates from for various states and possibly appearance.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the this property and
         * > call `gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action()` when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get related_action(): Action;
        set related_action(val: Action);

        /**
         * The action that this activatable will activate and receive
         * updates from for various states and possibly appearance.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the this property and
         * > call `gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action()` when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get relatedAction(): Action;
        set relatedAction(val: Action);

        /**
         * Whether this activatable should reset its layout
         * and appearance when setting the related action or when
         * the action changes appearance.
         * 
         * See the {@link Gtk.Action} documentation directly to find which properties
         * should be ignored by the {@link Gtk.Activatable} when this property is `false`.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle this property
         * > and call `gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties()` on the activatable
         * > widget when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get use_action_appearance(): boolean;
        set use_action_appearance(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether this activatable should reset its layout
         * and appearance when setting the related action or when
         * the action changes appearance.
         * 
         * See the {@link Gtk.Action} documentation directly to find which properties
         * should be ignored by the {@link Gtk.Activatable} when this property is `false`.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle this property
         * > and call `gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties()` on the activatable
         * > widget when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
         * @default true
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Activatable
         */
        get useActionAppearance(): boolean;
        set useActionAppearance(val: boolean);

        /**
         * This is a utility function for {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors.
         * 
         * When implementing {@link Gtk.Activatable} you must call this when
         * handling changes of the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action}, and
         * you must also use this to break references in {@link GObject.Object}->dispose().
         * 
         * This function adds a reference to the currently set related
         * action for you, it also makes sure the {@link Gtk.Activatable}->update()
         * method is called when the related {@link Gtk.Action} properties change
         * and registers to the action’s proxy list.
         * 
         * > Be careful to call this before setting the local
         * > copy of the {@link Gtk.Action} property, since this function uses
         * > `gtk_activatable_get_related_action()` to retrieve the
         * > previous action.
         * @param action the {@link Gtk.Action} to set
         */
        do_set_related_action(action: Action): void;

        /**
         * Gets the related {@link Gtk.Action} for `activatable`.
         * @returns the related {@link Gtk.Action} if one is set.
         */
        get_related_action(): Action;

        /**
         * Gets whether this activatable should reset its layout
         * and appearance when setting the related action or when
         * the action changes appearance.
         * @returns whether `activatable` uses its actions appearance.
         */
        get_use_action_appearance(): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the related action on the `activatable` object.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action}
         * > property and call `gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action()` when it changes.
         * @param action the {@link Gtk.Action} to set
         */
        set_related_action(action: Action): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether this activatable should reset its layout and appearance
         * when setting the related action or when the action changes appearance
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} property and call
         * > `gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties()` to update `activatable`
         * > if needed.
         * @param use_appearance whether to use the actions appearance
         */
        set_use_action_appearance(use_appearance: boolean): void;

        /**
         * This is called to update the activatable completely, this is called
         * internally when the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action} property is set
         * or unset and by the implementing class when
         * {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} changes.
         * @param action the related {@link Gtk.Action} or `null`
         */
        sync_action_properties(action: Action | null): void;

        /**
         * This is called to update the activatable completely, this is called
         * internally when the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action} property is set
         * or unset and by the implementing class when
         * {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} changes.
         * @param action the related {@link Gtk.Action} or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_sync_action_properties(action: Action | null): void;

        /**
         * Called to update the activatable when its related action’s properties change.
         * You must check the {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} property only apply action
         * properties that are meant to effect the appearance accordingly.
         * @param action 
         * @param property_name 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_update(action: Action, property_name: string): void;
    }


    namespace ToolItemGroup {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Container.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::collapsed": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::ellipsize": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::header-relief": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::label": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::label-widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Container.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, ToolShell.ConstructorProps {
            collapsed: boolean;
            ellipsize: Pango.EllipsizeMode;
            header_relief: ReliefStyle;
            headerRelief: ReliefStyle;
            label: string;
            label_widget: Widget;
            labelWidget: Widget;
        }
    }

    /**
     * A {@link Gtk.ToolItemGroup} is used together with {@link Gtk.ToolPalette} to add
     * `GtkToolItems` to a palette like container with different
     * categories and drag and drop support.
     * 
     * # CSS nodes
     * 
     * GtkToolItemGroup has a single CSS node named toolitemgroup.
     * @gir-type Class
     * @since 2.20
     */
    class ToolItemGroup extends Container implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable, ToolShell {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ToolItemGroup>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get collapsed(): boolean;
        set collapsed(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default Pango.EllipsizeMode.NONE
         */
        get ellipsize(): Pango.EllipsizeMode;
        set ellipsize(val: Pango.EllipsizeMode);

        /**
         * @default Gtk.ReliefStyle.NORMAL
         */
        get header_relief(): ReliefStyle;
        set header_relief(val: ReliefStyle);

        /**
         * @default Gtk.ReliefStyle.NORMAL
         */
        get headerRelief(): ReliefStyle;
        set headerRelief(val: ReliefStyle);

        get label(): string;
        set label(val: string);

        get label_widget(): Widget;
        set label_widget(val: Widget);

        get labelWidget(): Widget;
        set labelWidget(val: Widget);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: ToolItemGroup.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<ToolItemGroup.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](label: string): ToolItemGroup;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof ToolItemGroup.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ToolItemGroup.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof ToolItemGroup.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ToolItemGroup.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof ToolItemGroup.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<ToolItemGroup.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Gets whether `group` is collapsed or expanded.
         * @returns `true` if `group` is collapsed, `false` if it is expanded
         */
        get_collapsed(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the tool item at position (x, y).
         * @param x the x position
         * @param y the y position
         * @returns the {@link Gtk.ToolItem} at position (x, y)
         */
        get_drop_item(x: number, y: number): ToolItem;

        /**
         * Gets the ellipsization mode of `group`.
         * @returns the {@link Pango.EllipsizeMode} of `group`
         */
        get_ellipsize(): Pango.EllipsizeMode;

        /**
         * Gets the relief mode of the header button of `group`.
         * @returns the {@link Gtk.ReliefStyle}
         */
        get_header_relief(): ReliefStyle;

        /**
         * Gets the position of `item` in `group` as index.
         * @param item a {@link Gtk.ToolItem}
         * @returns the index of `item` in `group` or -1 if `item` is no child of `group`
         */
        get_item_position(item: ToolItem): number;

        /**
         * Gets the label of `group`.
         * @returns the label of `group`. The label is an internal string of `group`     and must not be modified. Note that `null` is returned if a custom     label has been set with `gtk_tool_item_group_set_label_widget()`
         */
        get_label(): string;

        /**
         * Gets the label widget of `group`.
         * See `gtk_tool_item_group_set_label_widget()`.
         * @returns the label widget of `group`
         */
        get_label_widget(): Widget;

        /**
         * Gets the number of tool items in `group`.
         * @returns the number of tool items in `group`
         */
        get_n_items(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the tool item at `index` in group.
         * @param index the index
         * @returns the {@link Gtk.ToolItem} at index
         */
        get_nth_item(index: number): ToolItem;

        /**
         * Inserts `item` at `position` in the list of children of `group`.
         * @param item the {@link Gtk.ToolItem} to insert into `group`
         * @param position the position of `item` in `group`, starting with 0.     The position -1 means end of list.
         */
        insert(item: ToolItem, position: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the `group` should be collapsed or expanded.
         * @param collapsed whether the `group` should be collapsed or expanded
         */
        set_collapsed(collapsed: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the ellipsization mode which should be used by labels in `group`.
         * @param ellipsize the {@link Pango.EllipsizeMode} labels in `group` should use
         */
        set_ellipsize(ellipsize: Pango.EllipsizeMode): void;

        /**
         * Set the button relief of the group header.
         * See `gtk_button_set_relief()` for details.
         * @param style the {@link Gtk.ReliefStyle}
         */
        set_header_relief(style: ReliefStyle): void;

        /**
         * Sets the position of `item` in the list of children of `group`.
         * @param item the {@link Gtk.ToolItem} to move to a new position, should     be a child of `group`.
         * @param position the new position of `item` in `group`, starting with 0.     The position -1 means end of list.
         */
        set_item_position(item: ToolItem, position: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the label of the tool item group. The label is displayed in the header
         * of the group.
         * @param label the new human-readable label of of the group
         */
        set_label(label: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets the label of the tool item group.
         * The label widget is displayed in the header of the group, in place
         * of the usual label.
         * @param label_widget the widget to be displayed in place of the usual label
         */
        set_label_widget(label_widget: Widget): void;

        /**
         * Retrieves the current ellipsize mode for the tool shell. Tool items must not
         * call this function directly, but rely on `gtk_tool_item_get_ellipsize_mode()`
         * instead.
         * @returns the current ellipsize mode of `shell`
         */
        get_ellipsize_mode(): Pango.EllipsizeMode;

        /**
         * Retrieves the icon size for the tool shell. Tool items must not call this
         * function directly, but rely on `gtk_tool_item_get_icon_size()` instead.
         * @returns the current size ({@link Gtk.IconSize}) for icons of `shell`
         */
        get_icon_size(): number;

        /**
         * Retrieves the current orientation for the tool shell. Tool items must not
         * call this function directly, but rely on `gtk_tool_item_get_orientation()`
         * instead.
         * @returns the current orientation of `shell`
         */
        get_orientation(): Orientation;

        /**
         * Returns the relief style of buttons on `shell`. Tool items must not call this
         * function directly, but rely on `gtk_tool_item_get_relief_style()` instead.
         * @returns The relief style of buttons on `shell`.
         */
        get_relief_style(): ReliefStyle;

        /**
         * Retrieves whether the tool shell has text, icons, or both. Tool items must
         * not call this function directly, but rely on `gtk_tool_item_get_toolbar_style()`
         * instead.
         * @returns the current style of `shell`
         */
        get_style(): ToolbarStyle;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Gtk.Widget.get_style
        get_style(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Retrieves the current text alignment for the tool shell. Tool items must not
         * call this function directly, but rely on `gtk_tool_item_get_text_alignment()`
         * instead.
         * @returns the current text alignment of `shell`
         */
        get_text_alignment(): number;

        /**
         * Retrieves the current text orientation for the tool shell. Tool items must not
         * call this function directly, but rely on `gtk_tool_item_get_text_orientation()`
         * instead.
         * @returns the current text orientation of `shell`
         */
        get_text_orientation(): Orientation;

        /**
         * Retrieves the current text size group for the tool shell. Tool items must not
         * call this function directly, but rely on `gtk_tool_item_get_text_size_group()`
         * instead.
         * @returns the current text size group of `shell`
         */
        get_text_size_group(): SizeGroup;

        /**
         * Calling this function signals the tool shell that the overflow menu item for
         * tool items have changed. If there is an overflow menu and if it is visible
         * when this function it called, the menu will be rebuilt.
         * 
         * Tool items must not call this function directly, but rely on
         * `gtk_tool_item_rebuild_menu()` instead.
         */
        rebuild_menu(): void;

        /**
         * Retrieves the current ellipsize mode for the tool shell. Tool items must not
         * call this function directly, but rely on `gtk_tool_item_get_ellipsize_mode()`
         * instead.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_ellipsize_mode(): Pango.EllipsizeMode;

        /**
         * mandatory implementation of `gtk_tool_shell_get_icon_size()`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_icon_size(): IconSize;

        /**
         * Retrieves the current orientation for the tool shell. Tool items must not
         * call this function directly, but rely on `gtk_tool_item_get_orientation()`
         * instead.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_orientation(): Orientation;

        /**
         * Returns the relief style of buttons on `shell`. Tool items must not call this
         * function directly, but rely on `gtk_tool_item_get_relief_style()` instead.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_relief_style(): ReliefStyle;

        /**
         * Retrieves whether the tool shell has text, icons, or both. Tool items must
         * not call this function directly, but rely on `gtk_tool_item_get_toolbar_style()`
         * instead.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_style(): ToolbarStyle;

        /**
         * Retrieves the current text alignment for the tool shell. Tool items must not
         * call this function directly, but rely on `gtk_tool_item_get_text_alignment()`
         * instead.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_text_alignment(): number;

        /**
         * Retrieves the current text orientation for the tool shell. Tool items must not
         * call this function directly, but rely on `gtk_tool_item_get_text_orientation()`
         * instead.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_text_orientation(): Orientation;

        /**
         * Retrieves the current text size group for the tool shell. Tool items must not
         * call this function directly, but rely on `gtk_tool_item_get_text_size_group()`
         * instead.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_text_size_group(): SizeGroup;

        /**
         * Calling this function signals the tool shell that the overflow menu item for
         * tool items have changed. If there is an overflow menu and if it is visible
         * when this function it called, the menu will be rebuilt.
         * 
         * Tool items must not call this function directly, but rely on
         * `gtk_tool_item_rebuild_menu()` instead.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_rebuild_menu(): void;

        /**
         * Emits a {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.child_notify | Gtk.Widget::child-notify} signal for the
         * [child property][child-properties] `child_property`
         * on `widget`.
         * 
         * This is the analogue of `g_object_notify()` for child properties.
         * 
         * Also see `gtk_container_child_notify()`.
         * @param child_property the name of a child property installed on the                  class of `widget`’s parent
         */
        child_notify(child_property: string): void;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Gtk.Container.child_notify
        child_notify(...args: never[]): any;
    }


    namespace ToolPalette {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Container.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::icon-size": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::icon-size-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::toolbar-style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::orientation": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hadjustment": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hscroll-policy": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vadjustment": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vscroll-policy": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Container.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, Orientable.ConstructorProps, Scrollable.ConstructorProps {
            icon_size: IconSize;
            iconSize: IconSize;
            icon_size_set: boolean;
            iconSizeSet: boolean;
            toolbar_style: ToolbarStyle;
            toolbarStyle: ToolbarStyle;
        }
    }

    /**
     * A {@link Gtk.ToolPalette} allows you to add `GtkToolItems` to a palette-like
     * container with different categories and drag and drop support.
     * 
     * A {@link Gtk.ToolPalette} is created with a call to `gtk_tool_palette_new()`.
     * 
     * `GtkToolItems` cannot be added directly to a {@link Gtk.ToolPalette} -
     * instead they are added to a {@link Gtk.ToolItemGroup} which can than be added
     * to a {@link Gtk.ToolPalette}. To add a {@link Gtk.ToolItemGroup} to a {@link Gtk.ToolPalette},
     * use `gtk_container_add()`.
     * 
     * 
     * ```c
     * GtkWidget *palette, *group;
     * GtkToolItem *item;
     * 
     * palette = gtk_tool_palette_new ();
     * group = gtk_tool_item_group_new (_("Test Category"));
     * gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (palette), group);
     * 
     * item = gtk_tool_button_new (NULL, _("_Open"));
     * gtk_tool_button_set_icon_name (GTK_TOOL_BUTTON (item), "document-open");
     * gtk_tool_item_group_insert (GTK_TOOL_ITEM_GROUP (group), item, -1);
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * The easiest way to use drag and drop with {@link Gtk.ToolPalette} is to call
     * `gtk_tool_palette_add_drag_dest()` with the desired drag source `palette`
     * and the desired drag target `widget`. Then `gtk_tool_palette_get_drag_item()`
     * can be used to get the dragged item in the {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.drag_data_received | Gtk.Widget::drag-data-received}
     * signal handler of the drag target.
     * 
     * 
     * ```c
     * static void
     * passive_canvas_drag_data_received (GtkWidget        *widget,
     *                                    GdkDragContext   *context,
     *                                    gint              x,
     *                                    gint              y,
     *                                    GtkSelectionData *selection,
     *                                    guint             info,
     *                                    guint             time,
     *                                    gpointer          data)
     * {
     *   GtkWidget *palette;
     *   GtkWidget *item;
     * 
     *   // Get the dragged item
     *   palette = gtk_widget_get_ancestor (gtk_drag_get_source_widget (context),
     *                                      GTK_TYPE_TOOL_PALETTE);
     *   if (palette != NULL)
     *     item = gtk_tool_palette_get_drag_item (GTK_TOOL_PALETTE (palette),
     *                                            selection);
     * 
     *   // Do something with item
     * }
     * 
     * GtkWidget *target, palette;
     * 
     * palette = gtk_tool_palette_new ();
     * target = gtk_drawing_area_new ();
     * 
     * g_signal_connect (G_OBJECT (target), "drag-data-received",
     *                   G_CALLBACK (passive_canvas_drag_data_received), NULL);
     * gtk_tool_palette_add_drag_dest (GTK_TOOL_PALETTE (palette), target,
     *                                 GTK_DEST_DEFAULT_ALL,
     *                                 GTK_TOOL_PALETTE_DRAG_ITEMS,
     *                                 GDK_ACTION_COPY);
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * # CSS nodes
     * 
     * GtkToolPalette has a single CSS node named toolpalette.
     * @gir-type Class
     * @since 2.20
     */
    class ToolPalette extends Container implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable, Orientable, Scrollable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ToolPalette>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * The size of the icons in a tool palette. When this property is set,
         * it overrides the default setting.
         * 
         * This should only be used for special-purpose tool palettes, normal
         * application tool palettes should respect the user preferences for the
         * size of icons.
         * @since 2.20
         * @default Gtk.IconSize.SMALL_TOOLBAR
         */
        get icon_size(): IconSize;
        set icon_size(val: IconSize);

        /**
         * The size of the icons in a tool palette. When this property is set,
         * it overrides the default setting.
         * 
         * This should only be used for special-purpose tool palettes, normal
         * application tool palettes should respect the user preferences for the
         * size of icons.
         * @since 2.20
         * @default Gtk.IconSize.SMALL_TOOLBAR
         */
        get iconSize(): IconSize;
        set iconSize(val: IconSize);

        /**
         * Is `true` if the {@link Gtk.ToolPalette.icon_size} property has been set.
         * @since 2.20
         * @default false
         */
        get icon_size_set(): boolean;
        set icon_size_set(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Is `true` if the {@link Gtk.ToolPalette.icon_size} property has been set.
         * @since 2.20
         * @default false
         */
        get iconSizeSet(): boolean;
        set iconSizeSet(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The style of items in the tool palette.
         * @since 2.20
         * @default Gtk.ToolbarStyle.ICONS
         */
        get toolbar_style(): ToolbarStyle;
        set toolbar_style(val: ToolbarStyle);

        /**
         * The style of items in the tool palette.
         * @since 2.20
         * @default Gtk.ToolbarStyle.ICONS
         */
        get toolbarStyle(): ToolbarStyle;
        set toolbarStyle(val: ToolbarStyle);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: ToolPalette.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<ToolPalette.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): ToolPalette;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof ToolPalette.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ToolPalette.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof ToolPalette.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ToolPalette.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof ToolPalette.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<ToolPalette.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Static methods
        /**
         * Get the target entry for a dragged {@link Gtk.ToolItemGroup}.
         */
        static get_drag_target_group(): TargetEntry;

        /**
         * Gets the target entry for a dragged {@link Gtk.ToolItem}.
         */
        static get_drag_target_item(): TargetEntry;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Sets `palette` as drag source (see `gtk_tool_palette_set_drag_source()`)
         * and sets `widget` as a drag destination for drags from `palette`.
         * See `gtk_drag_dest_set()`.
         * @param widget a {@link Gtk.Widget} which should be a drag destination for `palette`
         * @param flags the flags that specify what actions GTK+ should take for drops     on that widget
         * @param targets the {@link Gtk.ToolPaletteDragTargets} which the widget     should support
         * @param actions the `GdkDragActions` which the widget should suppport
         */
        add_drag_dest(widget: Widget, flags: DestDefaults, targets: ToolPaletteDragTargets, actions: Gdk.DragAction): void;

        /**
         * Get the dragged item from the selection.
         * This could be a {@link Gtk.ToolItem} or a {@link Gtk.ToolItemGroup}.
         * @param selection a {@link Gtk.SelectionData}
         * @returns the dragged item in selection
         */
        get_drag_item(selection: SelectionData): Widget;

        /**
         * Gets the group at position (x, y).
         * @param x the x position
         * @param y the y position
         * @returns the {@link Gtk.ToolItemGroup} at position or `null` if there is no such group
         */
        get_drop_group(x: number, y: number): ToolItemGroup | null;

        /**
         * Gets the item at position (x, y).
         * See `gtk_tool_palette_get_drop_group()`.
         * @param x the x position
         * @param y the y position
         * @returns the {@link Gtk.ToolItem} at position or `null` if there is no such item
         */
        get_drop_item(x: number, y: number): ToolItem | null;

        /**
         * Gets whether `group` is exclusive or not.
         * See `gtk_tool_palette_set_exclusive()`.
         * @param group a {@link Gtk.ToolItemGroup} which is a child of palette
         * @returns `true` if `group` is exclusive
         */
        get_exclusive(group: ToolItemGroup): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets whether group should be given extra space.
         * See `gtk_tool_palette_set_expand()`.
         * @param group a {@link Gtk.ToolItemGroup} which is a child of palette
         * @returns `true` if group should be given extra space, `false` otherwise
         */
        get_expand(group: ToolItemGroup): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the position of `group` in `palette` as index.
         * See `gtk_tool_palette_set_group_position()`.
         * @param group a {@link Gtk.ToolItemGroup}
         * @returns the index of group or -1 if `group` is not a child of `palette`
         */
        get_group_position(group: ToolItemGroup): number;

        /**
         * Gets the horizontal adjustment of the tool palette.
         * @returns the horizontal adjustment of `palette`
         */
        get_hadjustment(): Adjustment;

        /**
         * Gets the size of icons in the tool palette.
         * See `gtk_tool_palette_set_icon_size()`.
         * @returns the {@link Gtk.IconSize} of icons in the tool palette
         */
        get_icon_size(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the style (icons, text or both) of items in the tool palette.
         * @returns the {@link Gtk.ToolbarStyle} of items in the tool palette.
         */
        get_style(): ToolbarStyle;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
    // Conflicted with Gtk.Widget.get_style
        get_style(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Gets the vertical adjustment of the tool palette.
         * @returns the vertical adjustment of `palette`
         */
        get_vadjustment(): Adjustment;

        /**
         * Sets the tool palette as a drag source.
         * Enables all groups and items in the tool palette as drag sources
         * on button 1 and button 3 press with copy and move actions.
         * See `gtk_drag_source_set()`.
         * @param targets the {@link Gtk.ToolPaletteDragTargets}     which the widget should support
         */
        set_drag_source(targets: ToolPaletteDragTargets): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the group should be exclusive or not.
         * If an exclusive group is expanded all other groups are collapsed.
         * @param group a {@link Gtk.ToolItemGroup} which is a child of palette
         * @param exclusive whether the group should be exclusive or not
         */
        set_exclusive(group: ToolItemGroup, exclusive: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the group should be given extra space.
         * @param group a {@link Gtk.ToolItemGroup} which is a child of palette
         * @param expand whether the group should be given extra space
         */
        set_expand(group: ToolItemGroup, expand: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the position of the group as an index of the tool palette.
         * If position is 0 the group will become the first child, if position is
         * -1 it will become the last child.
         * @param group a {@link Gtk.ToolItemGroup} which is a child of palette
         * @param position a new index for group
         */
        set_group_position(group: ToolItemGroup, position: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the size of icons in the tool palette.
         * @param icon_size the {@link Gtk.IconSize} that icons in the tool     palette shall have
         */
        set_icon_size(icon_size: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the style (text, icons or both) of items in the tool palette.
         * @param style the {@link Gtk.ToolbarStyle} that items in the tool palette shall have
         */
        set_style(style: ToolbarStyle): void;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
    // Conflicted with Gtk.Widget.set_style
        set_style(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Unsets the tool palette icon size set with `gtk_tool_palette_set_icon_size()`,
         * so that user preferences will be used to determine the icon size.
         */
        unset_icon_size(): void;

        /**
         * Unsets a toolbar style set with `gtk_tool_palette_set_style()`,
         * so that user preferences will be used to determine the toolbar style.
         */
        unset_style(): void;

        /**
         * The orientation of the orientable.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default Gtk.Orientation.HORIZONTAL
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Orientable
         */
        get orientation(): Orientation;
        set orientation(val: Orientation);

        /**
         * Horizontal {@link Gtk.Adjustment} of the scrollable widget. This adjustment is
         * shared between the scrollable widget and its parent.
         * @since 3.0
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Scrollable
         */
        get hadjustment(): Adjustment;
        set hadjustment(val: Adjustment);

        /**
         * Determines whether horizontal scrolling should start once the scrollable
         * widget is allocated less than its minimum width or less than its natural width.
         * @since 3.0
         * @default Gtk.ScrollablePolicy.MINIMUM
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Scrollable
         */
        get hscroll_policy(): ScrollablePolicy;
        set hscroll_policy(val: ScrollablePolicy);

        /**
         * Determines whether horizontal scrolling should start once the scrollable
         * widget is allocated less than its minimum width or less than its natural width.
         * @since 3.0
         * @default Gtk.ScrollablePolicy.MINIMUM
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Scrollable
         */
        get hscrollPolicy(): ScrollablePolicy;
        set hscrollPolicy(val: ScrollablePolicy);

        /**
         * Verical {@link Gtk.Adjustment} of the scrollable widget. This adjustment is shared
         * between the scrollable widget and its parent.
         * @since 3.0
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Scrollable
         */
        get vadjustment(): Adjustment;
        set vadjustment(val: Adjustment);

        /**
         * Determines whether vertical scrolling should start once the scrollable
         * widget is allocated less than its minimum height or less than its natural height.
         * @since 3.0
         * @default Gtk.ScrollablePolicy.MINIMUM
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Scrollable
         */
        get vscroll_policy(): ScrollablePolicy;
        set vscroll_policy(val: ScrollablePolicy);

        /**
         * Determines whether vertical scrolling should start once the scrollable
         * widget is allocated less than its minimum height or less than its natural height.
         * @since 3.0
         * @default Gtk.ScrollablePolicy.MINIMUM
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Scrollable
         */
        get vscrollPolicy(): ScrollablePolicy;
        set vscrollPolicy(val: ScrollablePolicy);

        /**
         * Retrieves the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @returns the orientation of the `orientable`.
         */
        get_orientation(): Orientation;

        /**
         * Sets the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @param orientation the orientable’s new orientation.
         */
        set_orientation(orientation: Orientation): void;

        /**
         * Returns the size of a non-scrolling border around the
         * outside of the scrollable. An example for this would
         * be treeview headers. GTK+ can use this information to
         * display overlayed graphics, like the overshoot indication,
         * at the right position.
         * @returns `true` if `border` has been set
         */
        get_border(): [boolean, Border];

        /**
         * Gets the horizontal {@link Gtk.ScrollablePolicy}.
         * @returns The horizontal {@link Gtk.ScrollablePolicy}.
         */
        get_hscroll_policy(): ScrollablePolicy;

        /**
         * Gets the vertical {@link Gtk.ScrollablePolicy}.
         * @returns The vertical {@link Gtk.ScrollablePolicy}.
         */
        get_vscroll_policy(): ScrollablePolicy;

        /**
         * Sets the horizontal adjustment of the {@link Gtk.Scrollable}.
         * @param hadjustment a {@link Gtk.Adjustment}
         */
        set_hadjustment(hadjustment: Adjustment | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.ScrollablePolicy} to determine whether
         * horizontal scrolling should start below the minimum width or
         * below the natural width.
         * @param policy the horizontal {@link Gtk.ScrollablePolicy}
         */
        set_hscroll_policy(policy: ScrollablePolicy): void;

        /**
         * Sets the vertical adjustment of the {@link Gtk.Scrollable}.
         * @param vadjustment a {@link Gtk.Adjustment}
         */
        set_vadjustment(vadjustment: Adjustment | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.ScrollablePolicy} to determine whether
         * vertical scrolling should start below the minimum height or
         * below the natural height.
         * @param policy the vertical {@link Gtk.ScrollablePolicy}
         */
        set_vscroll_policy(policy: ScrollablePolicy): void;

        /**
         * Returns the size of a non-scrolling border around the
         * outside of the scrollable. An example for this would
         * be treeview headers. GTK+ can use this information to
         * display overlayed graphics, like the overshoot indication,
         * at the right position.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_border(): [boolean, Border];
    }


    namespace Toolbar {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Container.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * A keybinding signal used internally by GTK+. This signal can't
             * be used in application code
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "focus-home-or-end": (arg0: boolean) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * Emitted when the orientation of the toolbar changes.
             * @signal
             * @run-first
             */
            "orientation-changed": (arg0: Orientation) => void;
            /**
             * Emitted when the user right-clicks the toolbar or uses the
             * keybinding to display a popup menu.
             * 
             * Application developers should handle this signal if they want
             * to display a context menu on the toolbar. The context-menu should
             * appear at the coordinates given by `x` and `y`. The mouse button
             * number is given by the `button` parameter. If the menu was popped
             * up using the keybaord, `button` is -1.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "popup-context-menu": (arg0: number, arg1: number, arg2: number) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * Emitted when the style of the toolbar changes.
             * @signal
             * @run-first
             */
            "style-changed": (arg0: ToolbarStyle) => void;
            "notify::icon-size": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::icon-size-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::show-arrow": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::toolbar-style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::orientation": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Container.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, Orientable.ConstructorProps, ToolShell.ConstructorProps {
            icon_size: IconSize;
            iconSize: IconSize;
            icon_size_set: boolean;
            iconSizeSet: boolean;
            show_arrow: boolean;
            showArrow: boolean;
            toolbar_style: ToolbarStyle;
            toolbarStyle: ToolbarStyle;
        }
    }

    /**
     * A toolbar is created with a call to `gtk_toolbar_new()`.
     * 
     * A toolbar can contain instances of a subclass of {@link Gtk.ToolItem}. To add
     * a {@link Gtk.ToolItem} to the a toolbar, use `gtk_toolbar_insert()`. To remove
     * an item from the toolbar use `gtk_container_remove()`. To add a button
     * to the toolbar, add an instance of {@link Gtk.ToolButton}.
     * 
     * Toolbar items can be visually grouped by adding instances of
     * {@link Gtk.SeparatorToolItem} to the toolbar. If the GtkToolbar child property
     * “expand” is `TRUE` and the property {@link Gtk.SeparatorToolItem.draw} is set to
     * `FALSE`, the effect is to force all following items to the end of the toolbar.
     * 
     * By default, a toolbar can be shrunk, upon which it will add an arrow button
     * to show an overflow menu offering access to any {@link Gtk.ToolItem} child that has
     * a proxy menu item. To disable this and request enough size for all children,
     * call `gtk_toolbar_set_show_arrow()` to set {@link Gtk.Toolbar.show_arrow} to `false`.
     * 
     * Creating a context menu for the toolbar can be done by connecting to
     * the {@link Gtk.Toolbar.SignalSignatures.popup_context_menu | Gtk.Toolbar::popup-context-menu} signal.
     * 
     * # CSS nodes
     * 
     * GtkToolbar has a single CSS node with name toolbar.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class Toolbar extends Container implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable, Orientable, ToolShell {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<Toolbar>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * The size of the icons in a toolbar is normally determined by
         * the toolbar-icon-size setting. When this property is set, it
         * overrides the setting.
         * 
         * This should only be used for special-purpose toolbars, normal
         * application toolbars should respect the user preferences for the
         * size of icons.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default Gtk.IconSize.LARGE_TOOLBAR
         */
        get icon_size(): IconSize;
        set icon_size(val: IconSize);

        /**
         * The size of the icons in a toolbar is normally determined by
         * the toolbar-icon-size setting. When this property is set, it
         * overrides the setting.
         * 
         * This should only be used for special-purpose toolbars, normal
         * application toolbars should respect the user preferences for the
         * size of icons.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default Gtk.IconSize.LARGE_TOOLBAR
         */
        get iconSize(): IconSize;
        set iconSize(val: IconSize);

        /**
         * Is `true` if the icon-size property has been set.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default false
         */
        get icon_size_set(): boolean;
        set icon_size_set(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Is `true` if the icon-size property has been set.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default false
         */
        get iconSizeSet(): boolean;
        set iconSizeSet(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default true
         */
        get show_arrow(): boolean;
        set show_arrow(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default true
         */
        get showArrow(): boolean;
        set showArrow(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default Gtk.ToolbarStyle.BOTH_HORIZ
         */
        get toolbar_style(): ToolbarStyle;
        set toolbar_style(val: ToolbarStyle);

        /**
         * @default Gtk.ToolbarStyle.BOTH_HORIZ
         */
        get toolbarStyle(): ToolbarStyle;
        set toolbarStyle(val: ToolbarStyle);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: Toolbar.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        container: Container;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<Toolbar.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): Toolbar;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof Toolbar.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Toolbar.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof Toolbar.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Toolbar.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof Toolbar.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<Toolbar.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * @param orientation 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_orientation_changed(orientation: Orientation): void;

        /**
         * @param x 
         * @param y 
         * @param button_number 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_popup_context_menu(x: number, y: number, button_number: number): boolean;

        /**
         * @param style 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_style_changed(style: ToolbarStyle): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Returns the position corresponding to the indicated point on
         * `toolbar`. This is useful when dragging items to the toolbar:
         * this function returns the position a new item should be
         * inserted.
         * 
         * `x` and `y` are in `toolbar` coordinates.
         * @param x x coordinate of a point on the toolbar
         * @param y y coordinate of a point on the toolbar
         * @returns The position corresponding to the point (`x`, `y`) on the toolbar.
         */
        get_drop_index(x: number, y: number): number;

        /**
         * Retrieves the icon size for the toolbar. See `gtk_toolbar_set_icon_size()`.
         * @returns the current icon size for the icons on the toolbar.
         */
        get_icon_size(): IconSize;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
    // Conflicted with Gtk.ToolShell.get_icon_size
        get_icon_size(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Returns the position of `item` on the toolbar, starting from 0.
         * It is an error if `item` is not a child of the toolbar.
         * @param item a {@link Gtk.ToolItem} that is a child of `toolbar`
         * @returns the position of item on the toolbar.
         */
        get_item_index(item: ToolItem): number;

        /**
         * Returns the number of items on the toolbar.
         * @returns the number of items on the toolbar
         */
        get_n_items(): number;

        /**
         * Returns the `n`'th item on `toolbar`, or `null` if the
         * toolbar does not contain an `n`'th item.
         * @param n A position on the toolbar
         * @returns The `n`'th {@link Gtk.ToolItem} on `toolbar`,     or `null` if there isn’t an `n`'th item.
         */
        get_nth_item(n: number): ToolItem | null;

        /**
         * Returns the relief style of buttons on `toolbar`. See
         * `gtk_button_set_relief()`.
         * @returns The relief style of buttons on `toolbar`.
         */
        get_relief_style(): ReliefStyle;

        /**
         * Returns whether the toolbar has an overflow menu.
         * See `gtk_toolbar_set_show_arrow()`.
         * @returns `true` if the toolbar has an overflow menu.
         */
        get_show_arrow(): boolean;

        /**
         * Retrieves whether the toolbar has text, icons, or both . See
         * `gtk_toolbar_set_style()`.
         * @returns the current style of `toolbar`
         */
        get_style(): ToolbarStyle;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
    // Conflicted with Gtk.Widget.get_style
        get_style(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Insert a {@link Gtk.ToolItem} into the toolbar at position `pos`. If `pos` is
         * 0 the item is prepended to the start of the toolbar. If `pos` is
         * negative, the item is appended to the end of the toolbar.
         * @param item a {@link Gtk.ToolItem}
         * @param pos the position of the new item
         */
        insert(item: ToolItem, pos: number): void;

        /**
         * Highlights `toolbar` to give an idea of what it would look like
         * if `item` was added to `toolbar` at the position indicated by `index_`.
         * If `item` is `null`, highlighting is turned off. In that case `index_`
         * is ignored.
         * 
         * The `tool_item` passed to this function must not be part of any widget
         * hierarchy. When an item is set as drop highlight item it can not
         * added to any widget hierarchy or used as highlight item for another
         * toolbar.
         * @param tool_item a {@link Gtk.ToolItem}, or `null` to turn of highlighting
         * @param index_ a position on `toolbar`
         */
        set_drop_highlight_item(tool_item: ToolItem | null, index_: number): void;

        /**
         * This function sets the size of stock icons in the toolbar. You
         * can call it both before you add the icons and after they’ve been
         * added. The size you set will override user preferences for the default
         * icon size.
         * 
         * This should only be used for special-purpose toolbars, normal
         * application toolbars should respect the user preferences for the
         * size of icons.
         * @param icon_size The {@link Gtk.IconSize} that stock icons in the toolbar shall have.
         */
        set_icon_size(icon_size: IconSize): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether to show an overflow menu when `toolbar` isn’t allocated enough
         * size to show all of its items. If `true`, items which can’t fit in `toolbar`,
         * and which have a proxy menu item set by `gtk_tool_item_set_proxy_menu_item()`
         * or {@link Gtk.ToolItem.SignalSignatures.create_menu_proxy | Gtk.ToolItem::create-menu-proxy}, will be available in an overflow menu,
         * which can be opened by an added arrow button. If `false`, `toolbar` will
         * request enough size to fit all of its child items without any overflow.
         * @param show_arrow Whether to show an overflow menu
         */
        set_show_arrow(show_arrow: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Alters the view of `toolbar` to display either icons only, text only, or both.
         * @param style the new style for `toolbar`.
         */
        set_style(style: ToolbarStyle): void;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
    // Conflicted with Gtk.Widget.set_style
        set_style(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Unsets toolbar icon size set with `gtk_toolbar_set_icon_size()`, so that
         * user preferences will be used to determine the icon size.
         */
        unset_icon_size(): void;

        /**
         * Unsets a toolbar style set with `gtk_toolbar_set_style()`, so that
         * user preferences will be used to determine the toolbar style.
         */
        unset_style(): void;

        /**
         * The orientation of the orientable.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default Gtk.Orientation.HORIZONTAL
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Orientable
         */
        get orientation(): Orientation;
        set orientation(val: Orientation);

        /**
         * Retrieves the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @returns the orientation of the `orientable`.
         */
        get_orientation(): Orientation;

        /**
         * Sets the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @param orientation the orientable’s new orientation.
         */
        set_orientation(orientation: Orientation): void;

        /**
         * Retrieves the current ellipsize mode for the tool shell. Tool items must not
         * call this function directly, but rely on `gtk_tool_item_get_ellipsize_mode()`
         * instead.
         * @returns the current ellipsize mode of `shell`
         */
        get_ellipsize_mode(): Pango.EllipsizeMode;

        /**
         * Retrieves the current text alignment for the tool shell. Tool items must not
         * call this function directly, but rely on `gtk_tool_item_get_text_alignment()`
         * instead.
         * @returns the current text alignment of `shell`
         */
        get_text_alignment(): number;

        /**
         * Retrieves the current text orientation for the tool shell. Tool items must not
         * call this function directly, but rely on `gtk_tool_item_get_text_orientation()`
         * instead.
         * @returns the current text orientation of `shell`
         */
        get_text_orientation(): Orientation;

        /**
         * Retrieves the current text size group for the tool shell. Tool items must not
         * call this function directly, but rely on `gtk_tool_item_get_text_size_group()`
         * instead.
         * @returns the current text size group of `shell`
         */
        get_text_size_group(): SizeGroup;

        /**
         * Calling this function signals the tool shell that the overflow menu item for
         * tool items have changed. If there is an overflow menu and if it is visible
         * when this function it called, the menu will be rebuilt.
         * 
         * Tool items must not call this function directly, but rely on
         * `gtk_tool_item_rebuild_menu()` instead.
         */
        rebuild_menu(): void;

        /**
         * Retrieves the current ellipsize mode for the tool shell. Tool items must not
         * call this function directly, but rely on `gtk_tool_item_get_ellipsize_mode()`
         * instead.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_ellipsize_mode(): Pango.EllipsizeMode;

        /**
         * mandatory implementation of `gtk_tool_shell_get_icon_size()`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_icon_size(): IconSize;

        /**
         * Retrieves the current orientation for the tool shell. Tool items must not
         * call this function directly, but rely on `gtk_tool_item_get_orientation()`
         * instead.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_orientation(): Orientation;

        /**
         * Returns the relief style of buttons on `shell`. Tool items must not call this
         * function directly, but rely on `gtk_tool_item_get_relief_style()` instead.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_relief_style(): ReliefStyle;

        /**
         * Retrieves whether the tool shell has text, icons, or both. Tool items must
         * not call this function directly, but rely on `gtk_tool_item_get_toolbar_style()`
         * instead.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_style(): ToolbarStyle;

        /**
         * Retrieves the current text alignment for the tool shell. Tool items must not
         * call this function directly, but rely on `gtk_tool_item_get_text_alignment()`
         * instead.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_text_alignment(): number;

        /**
         * Retrieves the current text orientation for the tool shell. Tool items must not
         * call this function directly, but rely on `gtk_tool_item_get_text_orientation()`
         * instead.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_text_orientation(): Orientation;

        /**
         * Retrieves the current text size group for the tool shell. Tool items must not
         * call this function directly, but rely on `gtk_tool_item_get_text_size_group()`
         * instead.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_text_size_group(): SizeGroup;

        /**
         * Calling this function signals the tool shell that the overflow menu item for
         * tool items have changed. If there is an overflow menu and if it is visible
         * when this function it called, the menu will be rebuilt.
         * 
         * Tool items must not call this function directly, but rely on
         * `gtk_tool_item_rebuild_menu()` instead.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_rebuild_menu(): void;

        /**
         * Emits a {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.child_notify | Gtk.Widget::child-notify} signal for the
         * [child property][child-properties] `child_property`
         * on `widget`.
         * 
         * This is the analogue of `g_object_notify()` for child properties.
         * 
         * Also see `gtk_container_child_notify()`.
         * @param child_property the name of a child property installed on the                  class of `widget`’s parent
         */
        child_notify(child_property: string): void;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Gtk.Container.child_notify
        child_notify(...args: never[]): any;
    }


    namespace Tooltip {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends GObject.Object.SignalSignatures {}

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.Object.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * Basic tooltips can be realized simply by using `gtk_widget_set_tooltip_text()`
     * or `gtk_widget_set_tooltip_markup()` without any explicit tooltip object.
     * 
     * When you need a tooltip with a little more fancy contents, like adding an
     * image, or you want the tooltip to have different contents per {@link Gtk.TreeView}
     * row or cell, you will have to do a little more work:
     * 
     * - Set the {@link Gtk.Widget.has_tooltip} property to `true`, this will make GTK+
     *   monitor the widget for motion and related events which are needed to
     *   determine when and where to show a tooltip.
     * 
     * - Connect to the {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.query_tooltip | Gtk.Widget::query-tooltip} signal.  This signal will be
     *   emitted when a tooltip is supposed to be shown. One of the arguments passed
     *   to the signal handler is a GtkTooltip object. This is the object that we
     *   are about to display as a tooltip, and can be manipulated in your callback
     *   using functions like `gtk_tooltip_set_icon()`. There are functions for setting
     *   the tooltip’s markup, setting an image from a named icon, or even putting in
     *   a custom widget.
     * 
     *   Return `true` from your query-tooltip handler. This causes the tooltip to be
     *   show. If you return `false`, it will not be shown.
     * 
     * In the probably rare case where you want to have even more control over the
     * tooltip that is about to be shown, you can set your own {@link Gtk.Window} which
     * will be used as tooltip window.  This works as follows:
     * 
     * - Set {@link Gtk.Widget.has_tooltip} and connect to {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.query_tooltip | Gtk.Widget::query-tooltip} as before.
     *   Use `gtk_widget_set_tooltip_window()` to set a {@link Gtk.Window} created by you as
     *   tooltip window.
     * 
     * - In the {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.query_tooltip | Gtk.Widget::query-tooltip} callback you can access your window using
     *   `gtk_widget_get_tooltip_window()` and manipulate as you wish. The semantics of
     *   the return value are exactly as before, return `true` to show the window,
     *   `false` to not show it.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class Tooltip extends GObject.Object {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<Tooltip>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: Tooltip.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<Tooltip.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof Tooltip.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Tooltip.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof Tooltip.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Tooltip.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof Tooltip.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<Tooltip.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Static methods
        /**
         * Triggers a new tooltip query on `display`, in order to update the current
         * visible tooltip, or to show/hide the current tooltip.  This function is
         * useful to call when, for example, the state of the widget changed by a
         * key press.
         * @param display a {@link Gdk.Display}
         */
        static trigger_tooltip_query(display: Gdk.Display): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Replaces the widget packed into the tooltip with
         * `custom_widget`. `custom_widget` does not get destroyed when the tooltip goes
         * away.
         * By default a box with a {@link Gtk.Image} and {@link Gtk.Label} is embedded in
         * the tooltip, which can be configured using `gtk_tooltip_set_markup()`
         * and `gtk_tooltip_set_icon()`.
         * @param custom_widget a {@link Gtk.Widget}, or `null` to unset the old custom widget.
         */
        set_custom(custom_widget: Widget | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the icon of the tooltip (which is in front of the text) to be
         * `pixbuf`.  If `pixbuf` is `null`, the image will be hidden.
         * @param pixbuf a {@link GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf}, or `null`
         */
        set_icon(pixbuf: GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the icon of the tooltip (which is in front of the text)
         * to be the icon indicated by `gicon` with the size indicated
         * by `size`. If `gicon` is `null`, the image will be hidden.
         * @param gicon a {@link Gio.Icon} representing the icon, or `null`
         * @param size a stock icon size ({@link Gtk.IconSize})
         */
        set_icon_from_gicon(gicon: Gio.Icon | null, size: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the icon of the tooltip (which is in front of the text) to be
         * the icon indicated by `icon_name` with the size indicated
         * by `size`.  If `icon_name` is `null`, the image will be hidden.
         * @param icon_name an icon name, or `null`
         * @param size a stock icon size ({@link Gtk.IconSize})
         */
        set_icon_from_icon_name(icon_name: string | null, size: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the icon of the tooltip (which is in front of the text) to be
         * the stock item indicated by `stock_id` with the size indicated
         * by `size`.  If `stock_id` is `null`, the image will be hidden.
         * @param stock_id a stock id, or `null`
         * @param size a stock icon size ({@link Gtk.IconSize})
         */
        set_icon_from_stock(stock_id: string | null, size: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the text of the tooltip to be `markup`, which is marked up
         * with the [Pango text markup language][PangoMarkupFormat].
         * If `markup` is `null`, the label will be hidden.
         * @param markup a markup string (see [Pango markup format][PangoMarkupFormat]) or `null`
         */
        set_markup(markup: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the text of the tooltip to be `text`. If `text` is `null`, the label
         * will be hidden. See also `gtk_tooltip_set_markup()`.
         * @param text a text string or `null`
         */
        set_text(text: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the area of the widget, where the contents of this tooltip apply,
         * to be `rect` (in widget coordinates).  This is especially useful for
         * properly setting tooltips on {@link Gtk.TreeView} rows and cells, `GtkIconViews`,
         * etc.
         * 
         * For setting tooltips on {@link Gtk.TreeView}, please refer to the convenience
         * functions for this: `gtk_tree_view_set_tooltip_row()` and
         * `gtk_tree_view_set_tooltip_cell()`.
         * @param rect a {@link Gdk.Rectangle}
         */
        set_tip_area(rect: Gdk.Rectangle): void;
    }


    namespace ToplevelAccessible {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Atk.Object.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::accessible-component-layer": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-mdi-zorder": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-help-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-hypertext-nlinks": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption-object": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-summary": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Atk.Object.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class ToplevelAccessible extends Atk.Object {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ToplevelAccessible>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: ToplevelAccessible.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<ToplevelAccessible.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof ToplevelAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ToplevelAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof ToplevelAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, ToplevelAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof ToplevelAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<ToplevelAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * @returns List of   children.
         */
        get_children(): Window[];
    }


    namespace TreeModelFilter {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends GObject.Object.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::child-model": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::virtual-root": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.Object.ConstructorProps, TreeDragSource.ConstructorProps, TreeModel.ConstructorProps {
            child_model: TreeModel;
            childModel: TreeModel;
            virtual_root: TreePath;
            virtualRoot: TreePath;
        }
    }

    /**
     * A {@link Gtk.TreeModelFilter} is a tree model which wraps another tree model,
     * and can do the following things:
     * 
     * - Filter specific rows, based on data from a “visible column”, a column
     *   storing booleans indicating whether the row should be filtered or not,
     *   or based on the return value of a “visible function”, which gets a
     *   model, iter and user_data and returns a boolean indicating whether the
     *   row should be filtered or not.
     * 
     * - Modify the “appearance” of the model, using a modify function.
     *   This is extremely powerful and allows for just changing some
     *   values and also for creating a completely different model based
     *   on the given child model.
     * 
     * - Set a different root node, also known as a “virtual root”. You can pass
     *   in a {@link Gtk.TreePath} indicating the root node for the filter at construction
     *   time.
     * 
     * The basic API is similar to {@link Gtk.TreeModelSort}. For an example on its usage,
     * see the section on {@link Gtk.TreeModelSort}.
     * 
     * When using {@link Gtk.TreeModelFilter}, it is important to realize that
     * {@link Gtk.TreeModelFilter} maintains an internal cache of all nodes which are
     * visible in its clients. The cache is likely to be a subtree of the tree
     * exposed by the child model. {@link Gtk.TreeModelFilter} will not cache the entire
     * child model when unnecessary to not compromise the caching mechanism
     * that is exposed by the reference counting scheme. If the child model
     * implements reference counting, unnecessary signals may not be emitted
     * because of reference counting rule 3, see the {@link Gtk.TreeModel}
     * documentation. (Note that e.g. {@link Gtk.TreeStore} does not implement
     * reference counting and will always emit all signals, even when
     * the receiving node is not visible).
     * 
     * Because of this, limitations for possible visible functions do apply.
     * In general, visible functions should only use data or properties from
     * the node for which the visibility state must be determined, its siblings
     * or its parents. Usually, having a dependency on the state of any child
     * node is not possible, unless references are taken on these explicitly.
     * When no such reference exists, no signals may be received for these child
     * nodes (see reference couting rule number 3 in the {@link Gtk.TreeModel} section).
     * 
     * Determining the visibility state of a given node based on the state
     * of its child nodes is a frequently occurring use case. Therefore,
     * {@link Gtk.TreeModelFilter} explicitly supports this. For example, when a node
     * does not have any children, you might not want the node to be visible.
     * As soon as the first row is added to the node’s child level (or the
     * last row removed), the node’s visibility should be updated.
     * 
     * This introduces a dependency from the node on its child nodes. In order
     * to accommodate this, {@link Gtk.TreeModelFilter} must make sure the necessary
     * signals are received from the child model. This is achieved by building,
     * for all nodes which are exposed as visible nodes to {@link Gtk.TreeModelFilter}'s
     * clients, the child level (if any) and take a reference on the first node
     * in this level. Furthermore, for every row-inserted, row-changed or
     * row-deleted signal (also these which were not handled because the node
     * was not cached), {@link Gtk.TreeModelFilter} will check if the visibility state
     * of any parent node has changed.
     * 
     * Beware, however, that this explicit support is limited to these two
     * cases. For example, if you want a node to be visible only if two nodes
     * in a child’s child level (2 levels deeper) are visible, you are on your
     * own. In this case, either rely on {@link Gtk.TreeStore} to emit all signals
     * because it does not implement reference counting, or for models that
     * do implement reference counting, obtain references on these child levels
     * yourself.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class TreeModelFilter extends GObject.Object implements TreeDragSource, TreeModel {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<TreeModelFilter>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * @construct-only
         */
        get child_model(): TreeModel;

        /**
         * @construct-only
         */
        get childModel(): TreeModel;

        /**
         * @construct-only
         */
        get virtual_root(): TreePath;

        /**
         * @construct-only
         */
        get virtualRoot(): TreePath;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: TreeModelFilter.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<TreeModelFilter.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof TreeModelFilter.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, TreeModelFilter.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof TreeModelFilter.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, TreeModelFilter.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof TreeModelFilter.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<TreeModelFilter.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * @param child_model 
         * @param iter 
         * @param value 
         * @param column 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_modify(child_model: TreeModel, iter: TreeIter, value: unknown, column: number): void;

        /**
         * @param child_model 
         * @param iter 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_visible(child_model: TreeModel, iter: TreeIter): boolean;

        // Methods
        /**
         * This function should almost never be called. It clears the `filter`
         * of any cached iterators that haven’t been reffed with
         * `gtk_tree_model_ref_node()`. This might be useful if the child model
         * being filtered is static (and doesn’t change often) and there has been
         * a lot of unreffed access to nodes. As a side effect of this function,
         * all unreffed iters will be invalid.
         */
        clear_cache(): void;

        /**
         * Sets `filter_iter` to point to the row in `filter` that corresponds to the
         * row pointed at by `child_iter`.  If `filter_iter` was not set, `false` is
         * returned.
         * @param child_iter A valid {@link Gtk.TreeIter} pointing to a row on the child model.
         * @returns `true`, if `filter_iter` was set, i.e. if `child_iter` is a valid iterator pointing to a visible row in child model.
         */
        convert_child_iter_to_iter(child_iter: TreeIter): [boolean, TreeIter];

        /**
         * Converts `child_path` to a path relative to `filter`. That is, `child_path`
         * points to a path in the child model. The rerturned path will point to the
         * same row in the filtered model. If `child_path` isn’t a valid path on the
         * child model or points to a row which is not visible in `filter`, then `null`
         * is returned.
         * @param child_path A {@link Gtk.TreePath} to convert.
         * @returns A newly allocated {@link Gtk.TreePath}, or `null`.
         */
        convert_child_path_to_path(child_path: TreePath): TreePath | null;

        /**
         * Sets `child_iter` to point to the row pointed to by `filter_iter`.
         * @param filter_iter A valid {@link Gtk.TreeIter} pointing to a row on `filter`.
         */
        convert_iter_to_child_iter(filter_iter: TreeIter): TreeIter;

        /**
         * Converts `filter_path` to a path on the child model of `filter`. That is,
         * `filter_path` points to a location in `filter`. The returned path will
         * point to the same location in the model not being filtered. If `filter_path`
         * does not point to a location in the child model, `null` is returned.
         * @param filter_path A {@link Gtk.TreePath} to convert.
         * @returns A newly allocated {@link Gtk.TreePath}, or `null`.
         */
        convert_path_to_child_path(filter_path: TreePath): TreePath | null;

        /**
         * Returns a pointer to the child model of `filter`.
         * @returns A pointer to a {@link Gtk.TreeModel}.
         */
        get_model(): TreeModel;

        /**
         * Emits ::row_changed for each row in the child model, which causes
         * the filter to re-evaluate whether a row is visible or not.
         */
        refilter(): void;

        /**
         * With the `n_columns` and `types` parameters, you give an array of column
         * types for this model (which will be exposed to the parent model/view).
         * The `func`, `data` and `destroy` parameters are for specifying the modify
         * function. The modify function will get called for each
         * data access, the goal of the modify function is to return the data which
         * should be displayed at the location specified using the parameters of the
         * modify function.
         * 
         * Note that `gtk_tree_model_filter_set_modify_func()`
         * can only be called once for a given filter model.
         * @param types The `GTypes` of the columns.
         * @param func A {@link Gtk.TreeModelFilterModifyFunc}
         */
        set_modify_func(types: GObject.GType[], func: TreeModelFilterModifyFunc): void;

        /**
         * Sets `column` of the child_model to be the column where `filter` should
         * look for visibility information. `columns` should be a column of type
         * `G_TYPE_BOOLEAN`, where `true` means that a row is visible, and `false`
         * if not.
         * 
         * Note that `gtk_tree_model_filter_set_visible_func()` or
         * `gtk_tree_model_filter_set_visible_column()` can only be called
         * once for a given filter model.
         * @param column A `gint` which is the column containing the visible information
         */
        set_visible_column(column: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the visible function used when filtering the `filter` to be `func`.
         * The function should return `true` if the given row should be visible and
         * `false` otherwise.
         * 
         * If the condition calculated by the function changes over time (e.g.
         * because it depends on some global parameters), you must call
         * `gtk_tree_model_filter_refilter()` to keep the visibility information
         * of the model up-to-date.
         * 
         * Note that `func` is called whenever a row is inserted, when it may still
         * be empty. The visible function should therefore take special care of empty
         * rows, like in the example below.
         * 
         * 
         * ```c
         * static gboolean
         * visible_func (GtkTreeModel *model,
         *               GtkTreeIter  *iter,
         *               gpointer      data)
         * {
         *   // Visible if row is non-empty and first column is “HI”
         *   gchar *str;
         *   gboolean visible = FALSE;
         * 
         *   gtk_tree_model_get (model, iter, 0, &str, -1);
         *   if (str && strcmp (str, "HI") == 0)
         *     visible = TRUE;
         *   g_free (str);
         * 
         *   return visible;
         * }
         * ```
         * 
         * 
         * Note that `gtk_tree_model_filter_set_visible_func()` or
         * `gtk_tree_model_filter_set_visible_column()` can only be called
         * once for a given filter model.
         * @param func A {@link Gtk.TreeModelFilterVisibleFunc}, the visible function
         */
        set_visible_func(func: TreeModelFilterVisibleFunc): void;

        /**
         * Asks the {@link Gtk.TreeDragSource} to delete the row at `path`, because
         * it was moved somewhere else via drag-and-drop. Returns `false`
         * if the deletion fails because `path` no longer exists, or for
         * some model-specific reason. Should robustly handle a `path` no
         * longer found in the model!
         * @param path row that was being dragged
         * @returns `true` if the row was successfully deleted
         */
        drag_data_delete(path: TreePath): boolean;

        /**
         * Asks the {@link Gtk.TreeDragSource} to fill in `selection_data` with a
         * representation of the row at `path`. `selection_data`->target gives
         * the required type of the data.  Should robustly handle a `path` no
         * longer found in the model!
         * @param path row that was dragged
         * @param selection_data a {@link Gtk.SelectionData} to fill with data                  from the dragged row
         * @returns `true` if data of the required type was provided
         */
        drag_data_get(path: TreePath, selection_data: SelectionData): boolean;

        /**
         * Asks the {@link Gtk.TreeDragSource} whether a particular row can be used as
         * the source of a DND operation. If the source doesn’t implement
         * this interface, the row is assumed draggable.
         * @param path row on which user is initiating a drag
         * @returns `true` if the row can be dragged
         */
        row_draggable(path: TreePath): boolean;

        /**
         * Asks the {@link Gtk.TreeDragSource} to delete the row at `path`, because
         * it was moved somewhere else via drag-and-drop. Returns `false`
         * if the deletion fails because `path` no longer exists, or for
         * some model-specific reason. Should robustly handle a `path` no
         * longer found in the model!
         * @param path row that was being dragged
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_drag_data_delete(path: TreePath): boolean;

        /**
         * Asks the {@link Gtk.TreeDragSource} to fill in `selection_data` with a
         * representation of the row at `path`. `selection_data`->target gives
         * the required type of the data.  Should robustly handle a `path` no
         * longer found in the model!
         * @param path row that was dragged
         * @param selection_data a {@link Gtk.SelectionData} to fill with data                  from the dragged row
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_drag_data_get(path: TreePath, selection_data: SelectionData): boolean;

        /**
         * Asks the {@link Gtk.TreeDragSource} whether a particular row can be used as
         * the source of a DND operation. If the source doesn’t implement
         * this interface, the row is assumed draggable.
         * @param path row on which user is initiating a drag
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_row_draggable(path: TreePath): boolean;

        /**
         * Creates a new {@link Gtk.TreeModel}, with `child_model` as the child_model
         * and `root` as the virtual root.
         * @param root A {@link Gtk.TreePath} or `null`.
         * @returns A new {@link Gtk.TreeModel}.
         */
        filter_new(root: TreePath | null): TreeModel;

        /**
         * Calls func on each node in model in a depth-first fashion.
         * 
         * If `func` returns `true`, then the tree ceases to be walked,
         * and `gtk_tree_model_foreach()` returns.
         * @param func a function to be called on each row
         */
        foreach(func: TreeModelForeachFunc): void;

        /**
         * Returns the type of the column.
         * @param index_ the column index
         * @returns the type of the column
         */
        get_column_type(index_: number): GObject.GType;

        /**
         * Returns a set of flags supported by this interface.
         * 
         * The flags are a bitwise combination of {@link Gtk.TreeModelFlags}.
         * The flags supported should not change during the lifetime
         * of the `tree_model`.
         * @returns the flags supported by this interface
         */
        get_flags(): TreeModelFlags;

        /**
         * Sets `iter` to a valid iterator pointing to `path`.  If `path` does
         * not exist, `iter` is set to an invalid iterator and `false` is returned.
         * @param path the {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct
         * @returns `true`, if `iter` was set
         */
        get_iter(path: TreePath): [boolean, TreeIter];

        /**
         * Initializes `iter` with the first iterator in the tree
         * (the one at the path "0") and returns `true`. Returns
         * `false` if the tree is empty.
         * @returns `true`, if `iter` was set
         */
        get_iter_first(): [boolean, TreeIter];

        /**
         * Sets `iter` to a valid iterator pointing to `path_string`, if it
         * exists. Otherwise, `iter` is left invalid and `false` is returned.
         * @param path_string a string representation of a {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct
         * @returns `true`, if `iter` was set
         */
        get_iter_from_string(path_string: string): [boolean, TreeIter];

        /**
         * Returns the number of columns supported by `tree_model`.
         * @returns the number of columns
         */
        get_n_columns(): number;

        /**
         * Returns a newly-created {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct referenced by `iter`.
         * 
         * This path should be freed with `gtk_tree_path_free()`.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
         * @returns a newly-created {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct
         */
        get_path(iter: TreeIter): TreePath;

        /**
         * Generates a string representation of the iter.
         * 
         * This string is a “:” separated list of numbers.
         * For example, “4:10:0:3” would be an acceptable
         * return value for this string.
         * @param iter a {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
         * @returns a newly-allocated string.     Must be freed with `g_free()`.
         */
        get_string_from_iter(iter: TreeIter): string;

        /**
         * Initializes and sets `value` to that at `column`.
         * 
         * When done with `value`, `g_value_unset()` needs to be called
         * to free any allocated memory.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
         * @param column the column to lookup the value at
         */
        get_value(iter: TreeIter, column: number): unknown;

        /**
         * Sets `iter` to point to the first child of `parent`.
         * 
         * If `parent` has no children, `false` is returned and `iter` is
         * set to be invalid. `parent` will remain a valid node after this
         * function has been called.
         * 
         * If `parent` is `null` returns the first node, equivalent to
         * `gtk_tree_model_get_iter_first (tree_model, iter);`
         * @param parent the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct, or `null`
         * @returns `true`, if `iter` has been set to the first child
         */
        iter_children(parent: TreeIter | null): [boolean, TreeIter];

        /**
         * Returns `true` if `iter` has children, `false` otherwise.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct to test for children
         * @returns `true` if `iter` has children
         */
        iter_has_child(iter: TreeIter): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the number of children that `iter` has.
         * 
         * As a special case, if `iter` is `null`, then the number
         * of toplevel nodes is returned.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct, or `null`
         * @returns the number of children of `iter`
         */
        iter_n_children(iter: TreeIter | null): number;

        /**
         * Sets `iter` to point to the node following it at the current level.
         * 
         * If there is no next `iter`, `false` is returned and `iter` is set
         * to be invalid.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
         * @returns `true` if `iter` has been changed to the next node
         */
        iter_next(iter: TreeIter): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets `iter` to be the child of `parent`, using the given index.
         * 
         * The first index is 0. If `n` is too big, or `parent` has no children,
         * `iter` is set to an invalid iterator and `false` is returned. `parent`
         * will remain a valid node after this function has been called. As a
         * special case, if `parent` is `null`, then the `n`-th root node
         * is set.
         * @param parent the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct to get the child from, or `null`.
         * @param n the index of the desired child
         * @returns `true`, if `parent` has an `n`-th child
         */
        iter_nth_child(parent: TreeIter | null, n: number): [boolean, TreeIter];

        /**
         * Sets `iter` to be the parent of `child`.
         * 
         * If `child` is at the toplevel, and doesn’t have a parent, then
         * `iter` is set to an invalid iterator and `false` is returned.
         * `child` will remain a valid node after this function has been
         * called.
         * 
         * `iter` will be initialized before the lookup is performed, so `child`
         * and `iter` cannot point to the same memory location.
         * @param child the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
         * @returns `true`, if `iter` is set to the parent of `child`
         */
        iter_parent(child: TreeIter): [boolean, TreeIter];

        /**
         * Sets `iter` to point to the previous node at the current level.
         * 
         * If there is no previous `iter`, `false` is returned and `iter` is
         * set to be invalid.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
         * @returns `true` if `iter` has been changed to the previous node
         */
        iter_previous(iter: TreeIter): boolean;

        /**
         * Lets the tree ref the node.
         * 
         * This is an optional method for models to implement.
         * To be more specific, models may ignore this call as it exists
         * primarily for performance reasons.
         * 
         * This function is primarily meant as a way for views to let
         * caching models know when nodes are being displayed (and hence,
         * whether or not to cache that node). Being displayed means a node
         * is in an expanded branch, regardless of whether the node is currently
         * visible in the viewport. For example, a file-system based model
         * would not want to keep the entire file-hierarchy in memory,
         * just the sections that are currently being displayed by
         * every current view.
         * 
         * A model should be expected to be able to get an iter independent
         * of its reffed state.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
         */
        ref_node(iter: TreeIter): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.TreeModel.SignalSignatures.row_changed | Gtk.TreeModel::row-changed} signal on `tree_model`.
         * @param path a {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct pointing to the changed row
         * @param iter a valid {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct pointing to the changed row
         */
        row_changed(path: TreePath, iter: TreeIter): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.TreeModel.SignalSignatures.row_deleted | Gtk.TreeModel::row-deleted} signal on `tree_model`.
         * 
         * This should be called by models after a row has been removed.
         * The location pointed to by `path` should be the location that
         * the row previously was at. It may not be a valid location anymore.
         * 
         * Nodes that are deleted are not unreffed, this means that any
         * outstanding references on the deleted node should not be released.
         * @param path a {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct pointing to the previous location of     the deleted row
         */
        row_deleted(path: TreePath): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.TreeModel.SignalSignatures.row_has_child_toggled | Gtk.TreeModel::row-has-child-toggled} signal on
         * `tree_model`. This should be called by models after the child
         * state of a node changes.
         * @param path a {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct pointing to the changed row
         * @param iter a valid {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct pointing to the changed row
         */
        row_has_child_toggled(path: TreePath, iter: TreeIter): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.TreeModel.SignalSignatures.row_inserted | Gtk.TreeModel::row-inserted} signal on `tree_model`.
         * @param path a {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct pointing to the inserted row
         * @param iter a valid {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct pointing to the inserted row
         */
        row_inserted(path: TreePath, iter: TreeIter): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.TreeModel.SignalSignatures.rows_reordered | Gtk.TreeModel::rows-reordered} signal on `tree_model`.
         * 
         * This should be called by models when their rows have been
         * reordered.
         * @param path a {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct pointing to the tree node whose children     have been reordered
         * @param iter a valid {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct pointing to the node     whose children have been reordered, or `null` if the depth     of `path` is 0
         * @param new_order an array of integers     mapping the current position of each child to its old     position before the re-ordering,     i.e. `new_order``[newpos] = oldpos`
         */
        rows_reordered(path: TreePath, iter: TreeIter | null, new_order: number[]): void;

        /**
         * Lets the tree unref the node.
         * 
         * This is an optional method for models to implement.
         * To be more specific, models may ignore this call as it exists
         * primarily for performance reasons. For more information on what
         * this means, see `gtk_tree_model_ref_node()`.
         * 
         * Please note that nodes that are deleted are not unreffed.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
         */
        unref_node(iter: TreeIter): void;

        /**
         * Returns the type of the column.
         * @param index_ the column index
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_column_type(index_: number): GObject.GType;

        /**
         * Returns a set of flags supported by this interface.
         * 
         * The flags are a bitwise combination of {@link Gtk.TreeModelFlags}.
         * The flags supported should not change during the lifetime
         * of the `tree_model`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_flags(): TreeModelFlags;

        /**
         * Sets `iter` to a valid iterator pointing to `path`.  If `path` does
         * not exist, `iter` is set to an invalid iterator and `false` is returned.
         * @param path the {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_iter(path: TreePath): [boolean, TreeIter];

        /**
         * Returns the number of columns supported by `tree_model`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_n_columns(): number;

        /**
         * Returns a newly-created {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct referenced by `iter`.
         * 
         * This path should be freed with `gtk_tree_path_free()`.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_path(iter: TreeIter): TreePath;

        /**
         * Initializes and sets `value` to that at `column`.
         * 
         * When done with `value`, `g_value_unset()` needs to be called
         * to free any allocated memory.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
         * @param column the column to lookup the value at
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_value(iter: TreeIter, column: number): GObject.Value | any;

        /**
         * Sets `iter` to point to the first child of `parent`.
         * 
         * If `parent` has no children, `false` is returned and `iter` is
         * set to be invalid. `parent` will remain a valid node after this
         * function has been called.
         * 
         * If `parent` is `null` returns the first node, equivalent to
         * `gtk_tree_model_get_iter_first (tree_model, iter);`
         * @param parent the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct, or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_iter_children(parent: TreeIter | null): [boolean, TreeIter];

        /**
         * Returns `true` if `iter` has children, `false` otherwise.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct to test for children
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_iter_has_child(iter: TreeIter): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the number of children that `iter` has.
         * 
         * As a special case, if `iter` is `null`, then the number
         * of toplevel nodes is returned.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct, or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_iter_n_children(iter: TreeIter | null): number;

        /**
         * Sets `iter` to point to the node following it at the current level.
         * 
         * If there is no next `iter`, `false` is returned and `iter` is set
         * to be invalid.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_iter_next(iter: TreeIter): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets `iter` to be the child of `parent`, using the given index.
         * 
         * The first index is 0. If `n` is too big, or `parent` has no children,
         * `iter` is set to an invalid iterator and `false` is returned. `parent`
         * will remain a valid node after this function has been called. As a
         * special case, if `parent` is `null`, then the `n`-th root node
         * is set.
         * @param parent the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct to get the child from, or `null`.
         * @param n the index of the desired child
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_iter_nth_child(parent: TreeIter | null, n: number): [boolean, TreeIter];

        /**
         * Sets `iter` to be the parent of `child`.
         * 
         * If `child` is at the toplevel, and doesn’t have a parent, then
         * `iter` is set to an invalid iterator and `false` is returned.
         * `child` will remain a valid node after this function has been
         * called.
         * 
         * `iter` will be initialized before the lookup is performed, so `child`
         * and `iter` cannot point to the same memory location.
         * @param child the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_iter_parent(child: TreeIter): [boolean, TreeIter];

        /**
         * Sets `iter` to point to the previous node at the current level.
         * 
         * If there is no previous `iter`, `false` is returned and `iter` is
         * set to be invalid.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_iter_previous(iter: TreeIter): boolean;

        /**
         * Lets the tree ref the node.
         * 
         * This is an optional method for models to implement.
         * To be more specific, models may ignore this call as it exists
         * primarily for performance reasons.
         * 
         * This function is primarily meant as a way for views to let
         * caching models know when nodes are being displayed (and hence,
         * whether or not to cache that node). Being displayed means a node
         * is in an expanded branch, regardless of whether the node is currently
         * visible in the viewport. For example, a file-system based model
         * would not want to keep the entire file-hierarchy in memory,
         * just the sections that are currently being displayed by
         * every current view.
         * 
         * A model should be expected to be able to get an iter independent
         * of its reffed state.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_ref_node(iter: TreeIter): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.TreeModel.SignalSignatures.row_changed | Gtk.TreeModel::row-changed} signal on `tree_model`.
         * @param path a {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct pointing to the changed row
         * @param iter a valid {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct pointing to the changed row
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_row_changed(path: TreePath, iter: TreeIter): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.TreeModel.SignalSignatures.row_deleted | Gtk.TreeModel::row-deleted} signal on `tree_model`.
         * 
         * This should be called by models after a row has been removed.
         * The location pointed to by `path` should be the location that
         * the row previously was at. It may not be a valid location anymore.
         * 
         * Nodes that are deleted are not unreffed, this means that any
         * outstanding references on the deleted node should not be released.
         * @param path a {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct pointing to the previous location of     the deleted row
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_row_deleted(path: TreePath): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.TreeModel.SignalSignatures.row_has_child_toggled | Gtk.TreeModel::row-has-child-toggled} signal on
         * `tree_model`. This should be called by models after the child
         * state of a node changes.
         * @param path a {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct pointing to the changed row
         * @param iter a valid {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct pointing to the changed row
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_row_has_child_toggled(path: TreePath, iter: TreeIter): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.TreeModel.SignalSignatures.row_inserted | Gtk.TreeModel::row-inserted} signal on `tree_model`.
         * @param path a {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct pointing to the inserted row
         * @param iter a valid {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct pointing to the inserted row
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_row_inserted(path: TreePath, iter: TreeIter): void;

        /**
         * Lets the tree unref the node.
         * 
         * This is an optional method for models to implement.
         * To be more specific, models may ignore this call as it exists
         * primarily for performance reasons. For more information on what
         * this means, see `gtk_tree_model_ref_node()`.
         * 
         * Please note that nodes that are deleted are not unreffed.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_unref_node(iter: TreeIter): void;
    }


    namespace TreeModelSort {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends GObject.Object.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::model": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.Object.ConstructorProps, TreeDragSource.ConstructorProps, TreeModel.ConstructorProps, TreeSortable.ConstructorProps {
            model: TreeModel;
        }
    }

    /**
     * The {@link Gtk.TreeModelSort} is a model which implements the {@link Gtk.TreeSortable}
     * interface.  It does not hold any data itself, but rather is created with
     * a child model and proxies its data.  It has identical column types to
     * this child model, and the changes in the child are propagated.  The
     * primary purpose of this model is to provide a way to sort a different
     * model without modifying it. Note that the sort function used by
     * {@link Gtk.TreeModelSort} is not guaranteed to be stable.
     * 
     * The use of this is best demonstrated through an example.  In the
     * following sample code we create two {@link Gtk.TreeView} widgets each with a
     * view of the same data.  As the model is wrapped here by a
     * {@link Gtk.TreeModelSort}, the two `GtkTreeViews` can each sort their
     * view of the data without affecting the other.  By contrast, if we
     * simply put the same model in each widget, then sorting the first would
     * sort the second.
     * 
     * ## Using a {@link Gtk.TreeModelSort}
     * 
     * 
     * ```c
     * {
     *   GtkTreeView *tree_view1;
     *   GtkTreeView *tree_view2;
     *   GtkTreeModel *sort_model1;
     *   GtkTreeModel *sort_model2;
     *   GtkTreeModel *child_model;
     * 
     *   // get the child model
     *   child_model = get_my_model ();
     * 
     *   // Create the first tree
     *   sort_model1 = gtk_tree_model_sort_new_with_model (child_model);
     *   tree_view1 = gtk_tree_view_new_with_model (sort_model1);
     * 
     *   // Create the second tree
     *   sort_model2 = gtk_tree_model_sort_new_with_model (child_model);
     *   tree_view2 = gtk_tree_view_new_with_model (sort_model2);
     * 
     *   // Now we can sort the two models independently
     *   gtk_tree_sortable_set_sort_column_id (GTK_TREE_SORTABLE (sort_model1),
     *                                         COLUMN_1, GTK_SORT_ASCENDING);
     *   gtk_tree_sortable_set_sort_column_id (GTK_TREE_SORTABLE (sort_model2),
     *                                         COLUMN_1, GTK_SORT_DESCENDING);
     * }
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * To demonstrate how to access the underlying child model from the sort
     * model, the next example will be a callback for the {@link Gtk.TreeSelection}
     * {@link Gtk.TreeSelection.SignalSignatures.changed | Gtk.TreeSelection::changed} signal.  In this callback, we get a string
     * from COLUMN_1 of the model.  We then modify the string, find the same
     * selected row on the child model, and change the row there.
     * 
     * ## Accessing the child model of in a selection changed callback
     * 
     * 
     * ```c
     * void
     * selection_changed (GtkTreeSelection *selection, gpointer data)
     * {
     *   GtkTreeModel *sort_model = NULL;
     *   GtkTreeModel *child_model;
     *   GtkTreeIter sort_iter;
     *   GtkTreeIter child_iter;
     *   char *some_data = NULL;
     *   char *modified_data;
     * 
     *   // Get the current selected row and the model.
     *   if (! gtk_tree_selection_get_selected (selection,
     *                                          &sort_model,
     *                                          &sort_iter))
     *     return;
     * 
     *   // Look up the current value on the selected row and get
     *   // a new value to change it to.
     *   gtk_tree_model_get (GTK_TREE_MODEL (sort_model), &sort_iter,
     *                       COLUMN_1, &some_data,
     *                       -1);
     * 
     *   modified_data = change_the_data (some_data);
     *   g_free (some_data);
     * 
     *   // Get an iterator on the child model, instead of the sort model.
     *   gtk_tree_model_sort_convert_iter_to_child_iter (GTK_TREE_MODEL_SORT (sort_model),
     *                                                   &child_iter,
     *                                                   &sort_iter);
     * 
     *   // Get the child model and change the value of the row. In this
     *   // example, the child model is a GtkListStore. It could be any other
     *   // type of model, though.
     *   child_model = gtk_tree_model_sort_get_model (GTK_TREE_MODEL_SORT (sort_model));
     *   gtk_list_store_set (GTK_LIST_STORE (child_model), &child_iter,
     *                       COLUMN_1, &modified_data,
     *                       -1);
     *   g_free (modified_data);
     * }
     * ```
     * 
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class TreeModelSort extends GObject.Object implements TreeDragSource, TreeModel, TreeSortable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<TreeModelSort>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * @construct-only
         */
        get model(): TreeModel;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: TreeModelSort.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<TreeModelSort.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static new_with_model(child_model: TreeModel): TreeModelSort;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof TreeModelSort.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, TreeModelSort.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof TreeModelSort.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, TreeModelSort.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof TreeModelSort.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<TreeModelSort.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * This function should almost never be called.  It clears the `tree_model_sort`
         * of any cached iterators that haven’t been reffed with
         * `gtk_tree_model_ref_node()`.  This might be useful if the child model being
         * sorted is static (and doesn’t change often) and there has been a lot of
         * unreffed access to nodes.  As a side effect of this function, all unreffed
         * iters will be invalid.
         */
        clear_cache(): void;

        /**
         * Sets `sort_iter` to point to the row in `tree_model_sort` that corresponds to
         * the row pointed at by `child_iter`.  If `sort_iter` was not set, `false`
         * is returned.  Note: a boolean is only returned since 2.14.
         * @param child_iter A valid {@link Gtk.TreeIter} pointing to a row on the child model
         * @returns `true`, if `sort_iter` was set, i.e. if `sort_iter` is a valid iterator pointer to a visible row in the child model.
         */
        convert_child_iter_to_iter(child_iter: TreeIter): [boolean, TreeIter];

        /**
         * Converts `child_path` to a path relative to `tree_model_sort`.  That is,
         * `child_path` points to a path in the child model.  The returned path will
         * point to the same row in the sorted model.  If `child_path` isn’t a valid
         * path on the child model, then `null` is returned.
         * @param child_path A {@link Gtk.TreePath} to convert
         * @returns A newly allocated {@link Gtk.TreePath}, or `null`
         */
        convert_child_path_to_path(child_path: TreePath): TreePath | null;

        /**
         * Sets `child_iter` to point to the row pointed to by `sorted_iter`.
         * @param sorted_iter A valid {@link Gtk.TreeIter} pointing to a row on `tree_model_sort`.
         */
        convert_iter_to_child_iter(sorted_iter: TreeIter): TreeIter;

        /**
         * Converts `sorted_path` to a path on the child model of `tree_model_sort`.
         * That is, `sorted_path` points to a location in `tree_model_sort`.  The
         * returned path will point to the same location in the model not being
         * sorted.  If `sorted_path` does not point to a location in the child model,
         * `null` is returned.
         * @param sorted_path A {@link Gtk.TreePath} to convert
         * @returns A newly allocated {@link Gtk.TreePath}, or `null`
         */
        convert_path_to_child_path(sorted_path: TreePath): TreePath | null;

        /**
         * Returns the model the {@link Gtk.TreeModelSort} is sorting.
         * @returns the "child model" being sorted
         */
        get_model(): TreeModel;

        /**
         * > This function is slow. Only use it for debugging and/or testing
         * > purposes.
         * 
         * Checks if the given iter is a valid iter for this {@link Gtk.TreeModelSort}.
         * @param iter A {@link Gtk.TreeIter}.
         * @returns `true` if the iter is valid, `false` if the iter is invalid.
         */
        iter_is_valid(iter: TreeIter): boolean;

        /**
         * This resets the default sort function to be in the “unsorted” state.  That
         * is, it is in the same order as the child model. It will re-sort the model
         * to be in the same order as the child model only if the {@link Gtk.TreeModelSort}
         * is in “unsorted” state.
         */
        reset_default_sort_func(): void;

        /**
         * Asks the {@link Gtk.TreeDragSource} to delete the row at `path`, because
         * it was moved somewhere else via drag-and-drop. Returns `false`
         * if the deletion fails because `path` no longer exists, or for
         * some model-specific reason. Should robustly handle a `path` no
         * longer found in the model!
         * @param path row that was being dragged
         * @returns `true` if the row was successfully deleted
         */
        drag_data_delete(path: TreePath): boolean;

        /**
         * Asks the {@link Gtk.TreeDragSource} to fill in `selection_data` with a
         * representation of the row at `path`. `selection_data`->target gives
         * the required type of the data.  Should robustly handle a `path` no
         * longer found in the model!
         * @param path row that was dragged
         * @param selection_data a {@link Gtk.SelectionData} to fill with data                  from the dragged row
         * @returns `true` if data of the required type was provided
         */
        drag_data_get(path: TreePath, selection_data: SelectionData): boolean;

        /**
         * Asks the {@link Gtk.TreeDragSource} whether a particular row can be used as
         * the source of a DND operation. If the source doesn’t implement
         * this interface, the row is assumed draggable.
         * @param path row on which user is initiating a drag
         * @returns `true` if the row can be dragged
         */
        row_draggable(path: TreePath): boolean;

        /**
         * Asks the {@link Gtk.TreeDragSource} to delete the row at `path`, because
         * it was moved somewhere else via drag-and-drop. Returns `false`
         * if the deletion fails because `path` no longer exists, or for
         * some model-specific reason. Should robustly handle a `path` no
         * longer found in the model!
         * @param path row that was being dragged
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_drag_data_delete(path: TreePath): boolean;

        /**
         * Asks the {@link Gtk.TreeDragSource} to fill in `selection_data` with a
         * representation of the row at `path`. `selection_data`->target gives
         * the required type of the data.  Should robustly handle a `path` no
         * longer found in the model!
         * @param path row that was dragged
         * @param selection_data a {@link Gtk.SelectionData} to fill with data                  from the dragged row
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_drag_data_get(path: TreePath, selection_data: SelectionData): boolean;

        /**
         * Asks the {@link Gtk.TreeDragSource} whether a particular row can be used as
         * the source of a DND operation. If the source doesn’t implement
         * this interface, the row is assumed draggable.
         * @param path row on which user is initiating a drag
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_row_draggable(path: TreePath): boolean;

        /**
         * Creates a new {@link Gtk.TreeModel}, with `child_model` as the child_model
         * and `root` as the virtual root.
         * @param root A {@link Gtk.TreePath} or `null`.
         * @returns A new {@link Gtk.TreeModel}.
         */
        filter_new(root: TreePath | null): TreeModel;

        /**
         * Calls func on each node in model in a depth-first fashion.
         * 
         * If `func` returns `true`, then the tree ceases to be walked,
         * and `gtk_tree_model_foreach()` returns.
         * @param func a function to be called on each row
         */
        foreach(func: TreeModelForeachFunc): void;

        /**
         * Returns the type of the column.
         * @param index_ the column index
         * @returns the type of the column
         */
        get_column_type(index_: number): GObject.GType;

        /**
         * Returns a set of flags supported by this interface.
         * 
         * The flags are a bitwise combination of {@link Gtk.TreeModelFlags}.
         * The flags supported should not change during the lifetime
         * of the `tree_model`.
         * @returns the flags supported by this interface
         */
        get_flags(): TreeModelFlags;

        /**
         * Sets `iter` to a valid iterator pointing to `path`.  If `path` does
         * not exist, `iter` is set to an invalid iterator and `false` is returned.
         * @param path the {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct
         * @returns `true`, if `iter` was set
         */
        get_iter(path: TreePath): [boolean, TreeIter];

        /**
         * Initializes `iter` with the first iterator in the tree
         * (the one at the path "0") and returns `true`. Returns
         * `false` if the tree is empty.
         * @returns `true`, if `iter` was set
         */
        get_iter_first(): [boolean, TreeIter];

        /**
         * Sets `iter` to a valid iterator pointing to `path_string`, if it
         * exists. Otherwise, `iter` is left invalid and `false` is returned.
         * @param path_string a string representation of a {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct
         * @returns `true`, if `iter` was set
         */
        get_iter_from_string(path_string: string): [boolean, TreeIter];

        /**
         * Returns the number of columns supported by `tree_model`.
         * @returns the number of columns
         */
        get_n_columns(): number;

        /**
         * Returns a newly-created {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct referenced by `iter`.
         * 
         * This path should be freed with `gtk_tree_path_free()`.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
         * @returns a newly-created {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct
         */
        get_path(iter: TreeIter): TreePath;

        /**
         * Generates a string representation of the iter.
         * 
         * This string is a “:” separated list of numbers.
         * For example, “4:10:0:3” would be an acceptable
         * return value for this string.
         * @param iter a {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
         * @returns a newly-allocated string.     Must be freed with `g_free()`.
         */
        get_string_from_iter(iter: TreeIter): string;

        /**
         * Initializes and sets `value` to that at `column`.
         * 
         * When done with `value`, `g_value_unset()` needs to be called
         * to free any allocated memory.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
         * @param column the column to lookup the value at
         */
        get_value(iter: TreeIter, column: number): unknown;

        /**
         * Sets `iter` to point to the first child of `parent`.
         * 
         * If `parent` has no children, `false` is returned and `iter` is
         * set to be invalid. `parent` will remain a valid node after this
         * function has been called.
         * 
         * If `parent` is `null` returns the first node, equivalent to
         * `gtk_tree_model_get_iter_first (tree_model, iter);`
         * @param parent the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct, or `null`
         * @returns `true`, if `iter` has been set to the first child
         */
        iter_children(parent: TreeIter | null): [boolean, TreeIter];

        /**
         * Returns `true` if `iter` has children, `false` otherwise.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct to test for children
         * @returns `true` if `iter` has children
         */
        iter_has_child(iter: TreeIter): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the number of children that `iter` has.
         * 
         * As a special case, if `iter` is `null`, then the number
         * of toplevel nodes is returned.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct, or `null`
         * @returns the number of children of `iter`
         */
        iter_n_children(iter: TreeIter | null): number;

        /**
         * Sets `iter` to point to the node following it at the current level.
         * 
         * If there is no next `iter`, `false` is returned and `iter` is set
         * to be invalid.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
         * @returns `true` if `iter` has been changed to the next node
         */
        iter_next(iter: TreeIter): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets `iter` to be the child of `parent`, using the given index.
         * 
         * The first index is 0. If `n` is too big, or `parent` has no children,
         * `iter` is set to an invalid iterator and `false` is returned. `parent`
         * will remain a valid node after this function has been called. As a
         * special case, if `parent` is `null`, then the `n`-th root node
         * is set.
         * @param parent the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct to get the child from, or `null`.
         * @param n the index of the desired child
         * @returns `true`, if `parent` has an `n`-th child
         */
        iter_nth_child(parent: TreeIter | null, n: number): [boolean, TreeIter];

        /**
         * Sets `iter` to be the parent of `child`.
         * 
         * If `child` is at the toplevel, and doesn’t have a parent, then
         * `iter` is set to an invalid iterator and `false` is returned.
         * `child` will remain a valid node after this function has been
         * called.
         * 
         * `iter` will be initialized before the lookup is performed, so `child`
         * and `iter` cannot point to the same memory location.
         * @param child the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
         * @returns `true`, if `iter` is set to the parent of `child`
         */
        iter_parent(child: TreeIter): [boolean, TreeIter];

        /**
         * Sets `iter` to point to the previous node at the current level.
         * 
         * If there is no previous `iter`, `false` is returned and `iter` is
         * set to be invalid.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
         * @returns `true` if `iter` has been changed to the previous node
         */
        iter_previous(iter: TreeIter): boolean;

        /**
         * Lets the tree ref the node.
         * 
         * This is an optional method for models to implement.
         * To be more specific, models may ignore this call as it exists
         * primarily for performance reasons.
         * 
         * This function is primarily meant as a way for views to let
         * caching models know when nodes are being displayed (and hence,
         * whether or not to cache that node). Being displayed means a node
         * is in an expanded branch, regardless of whether the node is currently
         * visible in the viewport. For example, a file-system based model
         * would not want to keep the entire file-hierarchy in memory,
         * just the sections that are currently being displayed by
         * every current view.
         * 
         * A model should be expected to be able to get an iter independent
         * of its reffed state.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
         */
        ref_node(iter: TreeIter): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.TreeModel.SignalSignatures.row_changed | Gtk.TreeModel::row-changed} signal on `tree_model`.
         * @param path a {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct pointing to the changed row
         * @param iter a valid {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct pointing to the changed row
         */
        row_changed(path: TreePath, iter: TreeIter): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.TreeModel.SignalSignatures.row_deleted | Gtk.TreeModel::row-deleted} signal on `tree_model`.
         * 
         * This should be called by models after a row has been removed.
         * The location pointed to by `path` should be the location that
         * the row previously was at. It may not be a valid location anymore.
         * 
         * Nodes that are deleted are not unreffed, this means that any
         * outstanding references on the deleted node should not be released.
         * @param path a {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct pointing to the previous location of     the deleted row
         */
        row_deleted(path: TreePath): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.TreeModel.SignalSignatures.row_has_child_toggled | Gtk.TreeModel::row-has-child-toggled} signal on
         * `tree_model`. This should be called by models after the child
         * state of a node changes.
         * @param path a {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct pointing to the changed row
         * @param iter a valid {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct pointing to the changed row
         */
        row_has_child_toggled(path: TreePath, iter: TreeIter): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.TreeModel.SignalSignatures.row_inserted | Gtk.TreeModel::row-inserted} signal on `tree_model`.
         * @param path a {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct pointing to the inserted row
         * @param iter a valid {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct pointing to the inserted row
         */
        row_inserted(path: TreePath, iter: TreeIter): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.TreeModel.SignalSignatures.rows_reordered | Gtk.TreeModel::rows-reordered} signal on `tree_model`.
         * 
         * This should be called by models when their rows have been
         * reordered.
         * @param path a {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct pointing to the tree node whose children     have been reordered
         * @param iter a valid {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct pointing to the node     whose children have been reordered, or `null` if the depth     of `path` is 0
         * @param new_order an array of integers     mapping the current position of each child to its old     position before the re-ordering,     i.e. `new_order``[newpos] = oldpos`
         */
        rows_reordered(path: TreePath, iter: TreeIter | null, new_order: number[]): void;

        /**
         * Lets the tree unref the node.
         * 
         * This is an optional method for models to implement.
         * To be more specific, models may ignore this call as it exists
         * primarily for performance reasons. For more information on what
         * this means, see `gtk_tree_model_ref_node()`.
         * 
         * Please note that nodes that are deleted are not unreffed.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
         */
        unref_node(iter: TreeIter): void;

        /**
         * Returns the type of the column.
         * @param index_ the column index
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_column_type(index_: number): GObject.GType;

        /**
         * Returns a set of flags supported by this interface.
         * 
         * The flags are a bitwise combination of {@link Gtk.TreeModelFlags}.
         * The flags supported should not change during the lifetime
         * of the `tree_model`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_flags(): TreeModelFlags;

        /**
         * Sets `iter` to a valid iterator pointing to `path`.  If `path` does
         * not exist, `iter` is set to an invalid iterator and `false` is returned.
         * @param path the {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_iter(path: TreePath): [boolean, TreeIter];

        /**
         * Returns the number of columns supported by `tree_model`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_n_columns(): number;

        /**
         * Returns a newly-created {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct referenced by `iter`.
         * 
         * This path should be freed with `gtk_tree_path_free()`.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_path(iter: TreeIter): TreePath;

        /**
         * Initializes and sets `value` to that at `column`.
         * 
         * When done with `value`, `g_value_unset()` needs to be called
         * to free any allocated memory.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
         * @param column the column to lookup the value at
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_value(iter: TreeIter, column: number): GObject.Value | any;

        /**
         * Sets `iter` to point to the first child of `parent`.
         * 
         * If `parent` has no children, `false` is returned and `iter` is
         * set to be invalid. `parent` will remain a valid node after this
         * function has been called.
         * 
         * If `parent` is `null` returns the first node, equivalent to
         * `gtk_tree_model_get_iter_first (tree_model, iter);`
         * @param parent the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct, or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_iter_children(parent: TreeIter | null): [boolean, TreeIter];

        /**
         * Returns `true` if `iter` has children, `false` otherwise.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct to test for children
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_iter_has_child(iter: TreeIter): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the number of children that `iter` has.
         * 
         * As a special case, if `iter` is `null`, then the number
         * of toplevel nodes is returned.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct, or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_iter_n_children(iter: TreeIter | null): number;

        /**
         * Sets `iter` to point to the node following it at the current level.
         * 
         * If there is no next `iter`, `false` is returned and `iter` is set
         * to be invalid.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_iter_next(iter: TreeIter): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets `iter` to be the child of `parent`, using the given index.
         * 
         * The first index is 0. If `n` is too big, or `parent` has no children,
         * `iter` is set to an invalid iterator and `false` is returned. `parent`
         * will remain a valid node after this function has been called. As a
         * special case, if `parent` is `null`, then the `n`-th root node
         * is set.
         * @param parent the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct to get the child from, or `null`.
         * @param n the index of the desired child
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_iter_nth_child(parent: TreeIter | null, n: number): [boolean, TreeIter];

        /**
         * Sets `iter` to be the parent of `child`.
         * 
         * If `child` is at the toplevel, and doesn’t have a parent, then
         * `iter` is set to an invalid iterator and `false` is returned.
         * `child` will remain a valid node after this function has been
         * called.
         * 
         * `iter` will be initialized before the lookup is performed, so `child`
         * and `iter` cannot point to the same memory location.
         * @param child the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_iter_parent(child: TreeIter): [boolean, TreeIter];

        /**
         * Sets `iter` to point to the previous node at the current level.
         * 
         * If there is no previous `iter`, `false` is returned and `iter` is
         * set to be invalid.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_iter_previous(iter: TreeIter): boolean;

        /**
         * Lets the tree ref the node.
         * 
         * This is an optional method for models to implement.
         * To be more specific, models may ignore this call as it exists
         * primarily for performance reasons.
         * 
         * This function is primarily meant as a way for views to let
         * caching models know when nodes are being displayed (and hence,
         * whether or not to cache that node). Being displayed means a node
         * is in an expanded branch, regardless of whether the node is currently
         * visible in the viewport. For example, a file-system based model
         * would not want to keep the entire file-hierarchy in memory,
         * just the sections that are currently being displayed by
         * every current view.
         * 
         * A model should be expected to be able to get an iter independent
         * of its reffed state.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_ref_node(iter: TreeIter): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.TreeModel.SignalSignatures.row_changed | Gtk.TreeModel::row-changed} signal on `tree_model`.
         * @param path a {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct pointing to the changed row
         * @param iter a valid {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct pointing to the changed row
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_row_changed(path: TreePath, iter: TreeIter): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.TreeModel.SignalSignatures.row_deleted | Gtk.TreeModel::row-deleted} signal on `tree_model`.
         * 
         * This should be called by models after a row has been removed.
         * The location pointed to by `path` should be the location that
         * the row previously was at. It may not be a valid location anymore.
         * 
         * Nodes that are deleted are not unreffed, this means that any
         * outstanding references on the deleted node should not be released.
         * @param path a {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct pointing to the previous location of     the deleted row
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_row_deleted(path: TreePath): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.TreeModel.SignalSignatures.row_has_child_toggled | Gtk.TreeModel::row-has-child-toggled} signal on
         * `tree_model`. This should be called by models after the child
         * state of a node changes.
         * @param path a {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct pointing to the changed row
         * @param iter a valid {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct pointing to the changed row
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_row_has_child_toggled(path: TreePath, iter: TreeIter): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.TreeModel.SignalSignatures.row_inserted | Gtk.TreeModel::row-inserted} signal on `tree_model`.
         * @param path a {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct pointing to the inserted row
         * @param iter a valid {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct pointing to the inserted row
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_row_inserted(path: TreePath, iter: TreeIter): void;

        /**
         * Lets the tree unref the node.
         * 
         * This is an optional method for models to implement.
         * To be more specific, models may ignore this call as it exists
         * primarily for performance reasons. For more information on what
         * this means, see `gtk_tree_model_ref_node()`.
         * 
         * Please note that nodes that are deleted are not unreffed.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_unref_node(iter: TreeIter): void;

        /**
         * Fills in `sort_column_id` and `order` with the current sort column and the
         * order. It returns `true` unless the `sort_column_id` is
         * `GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID` or
         * `GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_UNSORTED_SORT_COLUMN_ID`.
         * @returns `true` if the sort column is not one of the special sort   column ids.
         */
        get_sort_column_id(): [boolean, number, SortType];

        /**
         * Returns `true` if the model has a default sort function. This is used
         * primarily by GtkTreeViewColumns in order to determine if a model can
         * go back to the default state, or not.
         * @returns `true`, if the model has a default sort function
         */
        has_default_sort_func(): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the default comparison function used when sorting to be `sort_func`.
         * If the current sort column id of `sortable` is
         * `GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID`, then the model will sort using
         * this function.
         * 
         * If `sort_func` is `null`, then there will be no default comparison function.
         * This means that once the model  has been sorted, it can’t go back to the
         * default state. In this case, when the current sort column id of `sortable`
         * is `GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID`, the model will be unsorted.
         * @param sort_func The comparison function
         */
        set_default_sort_func(sort_func: TreeIterCompareFunc): void;

        /**
         * Sets the current sort column to be `sort_column_id`. The `sortable` will
         * resort itself to reflect this change, after emitting a
         * {@link Gtk.TreeSortable.SignalSignatures.sort_column_changed | Gtk.TreeSortable::sort-column-changed} signal. `sort_column_id` may either be
         * a regular column id, or one of the following special values:
         * 
         * - `GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID`: the default sort function
         *   will be used, if it is set
         * 
         * - `GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_UNSORTED_SORT_COLUMN_ID`: no sorting will occur
         * @param sort_column_id the sort column id to set
         * @param order The sort order of the column
         */
        set_sort_column_id(sort_column_id: number, order: SortType): void;

        /**
         * Sets the comparison function used when sorting to be `sort_func`. If the
         * current sort column id of `sortable` is the same as `sort_column_id`, then
         * the model will sort using this function.
         * @param sort_column_id the sort column id to set the function for
         * @param sort_func The comparison function
         */
        set_sort_func(sort_column_id: number, sort_func: TreeIterCompareFunc): void;

        /**
         * Emits a {@link Gtk.TreeSortable.SignalSignatures.sort_column_changed | Gtk.TreeSortable::sort-column-changed} signal on `sortable`.
         */
        sort_column_changed(): void;

        /**
         * Fills in `sort_column_id` and `order` with the current sort column and the
         * order. It returns `true` unless the `sort_column_id` is
         * `GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID` or
         * `GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_UNSORTED_SORT_COLUMN_ID`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_sort_column_id(): [boolean, number, SortType];

        /**
         * Returns `true` if the model has a default sort function. This is used
         * primarily by GtkTreeViewColumns in order to determine if a model can
         * go back to the default state, or not.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_has_default_sort_func(): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the default comparison function used when sorting to be `sort_func`.
         * If the current sort column id of `sortable` is
         * `GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID`, then the model will sort using
         * this function.
         * 
         * If `sort_func` is `null`, then there will be no default comparison function.
         * This means that once the model  has been sorted, it can’t go back to the
         * default state. In this case, when the current sort column id of `sortable`
         * is `GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID`, the model will be unsorted.
         * @param sort_func The comparison function
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_default_sort_func(sort_func: TreeIterCompareFunc): void;

        /**
         * Sets the current sort column to be `sort_column_id`. The `sortable` will
         * resort itself to reflect this change, after emitting a
         * {@link Gtk.TreeSortable.SignalSignatures.sort_column_changed | Gtk.TreeSortable::sort-column-changed} signal. `sort_column_id` may either be
         * a regular column id, or one of the following special values:
         * 
         * - `GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID`: the default sort function
         *   will be used, if it is set
         * 
         * - `GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_UNSORTED_SORT_COLUMN_ID`: no sorting will occur
         * @param sort_column_id the sort column id to set
         * @param order The sort order of the column
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_sort_column_id(sort_column_id: number, order: SortType): void;

        /**
         * Sets the comparison function used when sorting to be `sort_func`. If the
         * current sort column id of `sortable` is the same as `sort_column_id`, then
         * the model will sort using this function.
         * @param sort_column_id the sort column id to set the function for
         * @param sort_func The comparison function
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_sort_func(sort_column_id: number, sort_func: TreeIterCompareFunc): void;

        /**
         * Emits a {@link Gtk.TreeSortable.SignalSignatures.sort_column_changed | Gtk.TreeSortable::sort-column-changed} signal on `sortable`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_sort_column_changed(): void;
    }


    namespace TreeSelection {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends GObject.Object.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * Emitted whenever the selection has (possibly) changed. Please note that
             * this signal is mostly a hint.  It may only be emitted once when a range
             * of rows are selected, and it may occasionally be emitted when nothing
             * has happened.
             * @signal
             * @run-first
             */
            changed: () => void;
            "notify::mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.Object.ConstructorProps {
            mode: SelectionMode;
        }
    }

    /**
     * The {@link Gtk.TreeSelection} object is a helper object to manage the selection
     * for a {@link Gtk.TreeView} widget.  The {@link Gtk.TreeSelection} object is
     * automatically created when a new {@link Gtk.TreeView} widget is created, and
     * cannot exist independently of this widget.  The primary reason the
     * {@link Gtk.TreeSelection} objects exists is for cleanliness of code and API.
     * That is, there is no conceptual reason all these functions could not be
     * methods on the {@link Gtk.TreeView} widget instead of a separate function.
     * 
     * The {@link Gtk.TreeSelection} object is gotten from a {@link Gtk.TreeView} by calling
     * `gtk_tree_view_get_selection()`.  It can be manipulated to check the
     * selection status of the tree, as well as select and deselect individual
     * rows.  Selection is done completely view side.  As a result, multiple
     * views of the same model can have completely different selections.
     * Additionally, you cannot change the selection of a row on the model that
     * is not currently displayed by the view without expanding its parents
     * first.
     * 
     * One of the important things to remember when monitoring the selection of
     * a view is that the {@link Gtk.TreeSelection.SignalSignatures.changed | Gtk.TreeSelection::changed} signal is mostly a hint.
     * That is, it may only emit one signal when a range of rows is selected.
     * Additionally, it may on occasion emit a {@link Gtk.TreeSelection.SignalSignatures.changed | Gtk.TreeSelection::changed} signal
     * when nothing has happened (mostly as a result of programmers calling
     * select_row on an already selected row).
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class TreeSelection extends GObject.Object {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<TreeSelection>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * Selection mode.
         * See `gtk_tree_selection_set_mode()` for more information on this property.
         * @since 3.2
         * @default Gtk.SelectionMode.SINGLE
         */
        get mode(): SelectionMode;
        set mode(val: SelectionMode);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: TreeSelection.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<TreeSelection.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof TreeSelection.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, TreeSelection.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof TreeSelection.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, TreeSelection.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof TreeSelection.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<TreeSelection.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * Signal emitted whenever the selection has (possibly) changed.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_changed(): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Returns the number of rows that have been selected in `tree`.
         * @returns The number of rows selected.
         */
        count_selected_rows(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the selection mode for `selection`. See
         * `gtk_tree_selection_set_mode()`.
         * @returns the current selection mode
         */
        get_mode(): SelectionMode;

        /**
         * Sets `iter` to the currently selected node, if `selection` is set to
         * {@link Gtk.SelectionMode.SINGLE} or {@link Gtk.SelectionMode.BROWSE}.
         * 
         * The `iter` argument may be `null` if you just want to test if `selection`
         * has any selected nodes.
         * 
         * The `model` argument is filled with the current model as a convenience.
         * 
         * This function will not work with {@link Gtk.SelectionMode.MULTIPLE}. See
         * `gtk_tree_selection_get_selected_rows()` instead.
         * @returns `true`, if there is a selected node.
         */
        get_selected(): [boolean, TreeModel | null, TreeIter | null];

        /**
         * Creates a list of path of all selected rows.
         * 
         * Additionally, if you are planning on modifying the model after calling
         * this function, you may want to convert the returned list into a list
         * of `GtkTreeRowReferences`.
         * 
         * To do this, you can use `gtk_tree_row_reference_new()`.
         * 
         * To free the return value, use:
         * 
         * 
         * ```c
         * g_list_free_full (list, (GDestroyNotify) gtk_tree_path_free);
         * ```
         * 
         * @returns the selected paths
         */
        get_selected_rows(): [TreePath[], TreeModel | null];

        /**
         * Returns the tree view associated with `selection`.
         * @returns A {@link Gtk.TreeView}
         */
        get_tree_view(): TreeView;

        /**
         * Returns `true` if the row at `iter` is currently selected.
         * @param iter A valid {@link Gtk.TreeIter}
         * @returns `true`, if `iter` is selected
         */
        iter_is_selected(iter: TreeIter): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns `true` if the row pointed to by `path` is currently selected.  If `path`
         * does not point to a valid location, `false` is returned
         * @param path A {@link Gtk.TreePath} to check selection on.
         * @returns `true` if `path` is selected.
         */
        path_is_selected(path: TreePath): boolean;

        /**
         * Selects all the nodes. `selection` must be set to #GTK_SELECTION_MULTIPLE
         * mode.
         */
        select_all(): void;

        /**
         * Selects the specified iterator.
         * @param iter The {@link Gtk.TreeIter} to be selected.
         */
        select_iter(iter: TreeIter): void;

        /**
         * Select the row at `path`.
         * @param path The {@link Gtk.TreePath} to be selected.
         */
        select_path(path: TreePath): void;

        /**
         * Selects a range of nodes, determined by `start_path` and `end_path` inclusive.
         * `selection` must be set to #GTK_SELECTION_MULTIPLE mode.
         * @param start_path The initial node of the range.
         * @param end_path The final node of the range.
         */
        select_range(start_path: TreePath, end_path: TreePath): void;

        /**
         * Calls a function for each selected node. Note that you cannot modify
         * the tree or selection from within this function. As a result,
         * `gtk_tree_selection_get_selected_rows()` might be more useful.
         * @param func The function to call for each selected node.
         */
        selected_foreach(func: TreeSelectionForeachFunc): void;

        /**
         * Sets the selection mode of the `selection`.  If the previous type was
         * #GTK_SELECTION_MULTIPLE, then the anchor is kept selected, if it was
         * previously selected.
         * @param type The selection mode
         */
        set_mode(type: SelectionMode): void;

        /**
         * Sets the selection function.
         * 
         * If set, this function is called before any node is selected or unselected,
         * giving some control over which nodes are selected. The select function
         * should return `true` if the state of the node may be toggled, and `false`
         * if the state of the node should be left unchanged.
         * @param func The selection function. May be `null`
         */
        set_select_function(func: TreeSelectionFunc | null): void;

        /**
         * Unselects all the nodes.
         */
        unselect_all(): void;

        /**
         * Unselects the specified iterator.
         * @param iter The {@link Gtk.TreeIter} to be unselected.
         */
        unselect_iter(iter: TreeIter): void;

        /**
         * Unselects the row at `path`.
         * @param path The {@link Gtk.TreePath} to be unselected.
         */
        unselect_path(path: TreePath): void;

        /**
         * Unselects a range of nodes, determined by `start_path` and `end_path`
         * inclusive.
         * @param start_path The initial node of the range.
         * @param end_path The initial node of the range.
         */
        unselect_range(start_path: TreePath, end_path: TreePath): void;
    }


    namespace TreeStore {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends GObject.Object.SignalSignatures {}

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.Object.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, TreeDragDest.ConstructorProps, TreeDragSource.ConstructorProps, TreeModel.ConstructorProps, TreeSortable.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * The {@link Gtk.TreeStore} object is a list model for use with a {@link Gtk.TreeView}
     * widget.  It implements the {@link Gtk.TreeModel} interface, and consequentially,
     * can use all of the methods available there.  It also implements the
     * {@link Gtk.TreeSortable} interface so it can be sorted by the view.  Finally,
     * it also implements the tree
     * [drag and drop][gtk3-GtkTreeView-drag-and-drop]
     * interfaces.
     * 
     * # GtkTreeStore as GtkBuildable
     * 
     * The GtkTreeStore implementation of the {@link Gtk.Buildable} interface allows
     * to specify the model columns with a `<columns>` element that may contain
     * multiple `<column>` elements, each specifying one model column. The “type”
     * attribute specifies the data type for the column.
     * 
     * An example of a UI Definition fragment for a tree store:
     * 
     * 
     * ```xml
     * <object class="GtkTreeStore">
     *   <columns>
     *     <column type="gchararray"/>
     *     <column type="gchararray"/>
     *     <column type="gint"/>
     *   </columns>
     * </object>
     * ```
     * 
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class TreeStore extends GObject.Object implements Buildable, TreeDragDest, TreeDragSource, TreeModel, TreeSortable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<TreeStore>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: TreeStore.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<TreeStore.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](types: GObject.GType[]): TreeStore;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof TreeStore.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, TreeStore.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof TreeStore.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, TreeStore.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof TreeStore.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<TreeStore.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Appends a new row to `tree_store`.  If `parent` is non-`null`, then it will append the
         * new row after the last child of `parent`, otherwise it will append a row to
         * the top level.  `iter` will be changed to point to this new row.  The row will
         * be empty after this function is called.  To fill in values, you need to call
         * `gtk_tree_store_set()` or `gtk_tree_store_set_value()`.
         * @param parent A valid {@link Gtk.TreeIter}, or `null`
         */
        append(parent: TreeIter | null): TreeIter;

        /**
         * Removes all rows from `tree_store`
         */
        clear(): void;

        /**
         * Creates a new row at `position`.  If parent is non-`null`, then the row will be
         * made a child of `parent`.  Otherwise, the row will be created at the toplevel.
         * If `position` is -1 or is larger than the number of rows at that level, then
         * the new row will be inserted to the end of the list.  `iter` will be changed
         * to point to this new row.  The row will be empty after this function is
         * called.  To fill in values, you need to call `gtk_tree_store_set()` or
         * `gtk_tree_store_set_value()`.
         * @param parent A valid {@link Gtk.TreeIter}, or `null`
         * @param position position to insert the new row, or -1 for last
         */
        insert(parent: TreeIter | null, position: number): TreeIter;

        /**
         * Inserts a new row after `sibling`.  If `sibling` is `null`, then the row will be
         * prepended to `parent` ’s children.  If `parent` and `sibling` are `null`, then
         * the row will be prepended to the toplevel.  If both `sibling` and `parent` are
         * set, then `parent` must be the parent of `sibling`.  When `sibling` is set,
         * `parent` is optional.
         * 
         * `iter` will be changed to point to this new row.  The row will be empty after
         * this function is called.  To fill in values, you need to call
         * `gtk_tree_store_set()` or `gtk_tree_store_set_value()`.
         * @param parent A valid {@link Gtk.TreeIter}, or `null`
         * @param sibling A valid {@link Gtk.TreeIter}, or `null`
         */
        insert_after(parent: TreeIter | null, sibling: TreeIter | null): TreeIter;

        /**
         * Inserts a new row before `sibling`.  If `sibling` is `null`, then the row will
         * be appended to `parent` ’s children.  If `parent` and `sibling` are `null`, then
         * the row will be appended to the toplevel.  If both `sibling` and `parent` are
         * set, then `parent` must be the parent of `sibling`.  When `sibling` is set,
         * `parent` is optional.
         * 
         * `iter` will be changed to point to this new row.  The row will be empty after
         * this function is called.  To fill in values, you need to call
         * `gtk_tree_store_set()` or `gtk_tree_store_set_value()`.
         * @param parent A valid {@link Gtk.TreeIter}, or `null`
         * @param sibling A valid {@link Gtk.TreeIter}, or `null`
         */
        insert_before(parent: TreeIter | null, sibling: TreeIter | null): TreeIter;

        /**
         * A variant of `gtk_tree_store_insert_with_values()` which takes
         * the columns and values as two arrays, instead of varargs.  This
         * function is mainly intended for language bindings.
         * @param parent A valid {@link Gtk.TreeIter}, or `null`
         * @param position position to insert the new row, or -1 for last
         * @param columns an array of column numbers
         * @param values an array of GValues
         */
        insert_with_values(parent: TreeIter | null, position: number, columns: number[], values: (GObject.Value | any)[]): TreeIter | null;

        /**
         * Returns `true` if `iter` is an ancestor of `descendant`.  That is, `iter` is the
         * parent (or grandparent or great-grandparent) of `descendant`.
         * @param iter A valid {@link Gtk.TreeIter}
         * @param descendant A valid {@link Gtk.TreeIter}
         * @returns `true`, if `iter` is an ancestor of `descendant`
         */
        is_ancestor(iter: TreeIter, descendant: TreeIter): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the depth of `iter`.  This will be 0 for anything on the root level, 1
         * for anything down a level, etc.
         * @param iter A valid {@link Gtk.TreeIter}
         * @returns The depth of `iter`
         */
        iter_depth(iter: TreeIter): number;

        /**
         * WARNING: This function is slow. Only use it for debugging and/or testing
         * purposes.
         * 
         * Checks if the given iter is a valid iter for this {@link Gtk.TreeStore}.
         * @param iter A {@link Gtk.TreeIter}.
         * @returns `true` if the iter is valid, `false` if the iter is invalid.
         */
        iter_is_valid(iter: TreeIter): boolean;

        /**
         * Moves `iter` in `tree_store` to the position after `position`. `iter` and
         * `position` should be in the same level. Note that this function only
         * works with unsorted stores. If `position` is `null`, `iter` will be moved
         * to the start of the level.
         * @param iter A {@link Gtk.TreeIter}.
         * @param position A {@link Gtk.TreeIter}.
         */
        move_after(iter: TreeIter, position: TreeIter | null): void;

        /**
         * Moves `iter` in `tree_store` to the position before `position`. `iter` and
         * `position` should be in the same level. Note that this function only
         * works with unsorted stores. If `position` is `null`, `iter` will be
         * moved to the end of the level.
         * @param iter A {@link Gtk.TreeIter}.
         * @param position A {@link Gtk.TreeIter} or `null`.
         */
        move_before(iter: TreeIter, position: TreeIter | null): void;

        /**
         * Prepends a new row to `tree_store`.  If `parent` is non-`null`, then it will prepend
         * the new row before the first child of `parent`, otherwise it will prepend a row
         * to the top level.  `iter` will be changed to point to this new row.  The row
         * will be empty after this function is called.  To fill in values, you need to
         * call `gtk_tree_store_set()` or `gtk_tree_store_set_value()`.
         * @param parent A valid {@link Gtk.TreeIter}, or `null`
         */
        prepend(parent: TreeIter | null): TreeIter;

        /**
         * Removes `iter` from `tree_store`.  After being removed, `iter` is set to the
         * next valid row at that level, or invalidated if it previously pointed to the
         * last one.
         * @param iter A valid {@link Gtk.TreeIter}
         * @returns `true` if `iter` is still valid, `false` if not.
         */
        remove(iter: TreeIter): boolean;

        /**
         * This function is meant primarily for `GObjects` that inherit from
         * {@link Gtk.TreeStore}, and should only be used when constructing a new
         * {@link Gtk.TreeStore}.  It will not function after a row has been added,
         * or a method on the {@link Gtk.TreeModel} interface is called.
         * @param types An array of {@link GObject.GType} types, one for each column
         */
        set_column_types(types: GObject.GType[]): void;

        /**
         * Sets the data in the cell specified by `iter` and `column`.
         * The type of `value` must be convertible to the type of the
         * column.
         * @param iter A valid {@link Gtk.TreeIter} for the row being modified
         * @param column column number to modify
         * @param value new value for the cell
         */
        set_value(iter: TreeIter, column: number, value: GObject.Value | any): void;

        /**
         * A variant of `gtk_tree_store_set_valist()` which takes
         * the columns and values as two arrays, instead of varargs.  This
         * function is mainly intended for language bindings or in case
         * the number of columns to change is not known until run-time.
         * @param iter A valid {@link Gtk.TreeIter} for the row being modified
         * @param columns an array of column numbers
         * @param values an array of GValues
         */
        set(iter: TreeIter, columns: number[], values: (GObject.Value | any)[]): void;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
    // Conflicted with GObject.Object.set
        set(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Swaps `a` and `b` in the same level of `tree_store`. Note that this function
         * only works with unsorted stores.
         * @param a A {@link Gtk.TreeIter}.
         * @param b Another {@link Gtk.TreeIter}.
         */
        swap(a: TreeIter, b: TreeIter): void;

        /**
         * Adds a child to `buildable`. `type` is an optional string
         * describing how the child should be added.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child to add
         * @param type kind of child or `null`
         */
        add_child(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object, type: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Constructs a child of `buildable` with the name `name`.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} calls this function if a “constructor” has been
         * specified in the UI definition.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param name name of child to construct
         * @returns the constructed child
         */
        construct_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, name: string): T;

        /**
         * This is similar to `gtk_buildable_parser_finished()` but is
         * called once for each custom tag handled by the `buildable`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname the name of the tag
         * @param data user data created in custom_tag_start
         */
        custom_finished(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
         * the buildable.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @param data user data that will be passed in to parser functions
         */
        custom_tag_end(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called for each unknown element under `<child>`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @returns `true` if a object has a custom implementation, `false`          if it doesn't.
         */
        custom_tag_start(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string): [boolean, GLib.MarkupParser, null];

        /**
         * Get the internal child called `childname` of the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param childname name of child
         * @returns the internal child of the buildable object
         */
        get_internal_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, childname: string): T;

        /**
         * Gets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} sets the name based on the
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI]
         * used to construct the `buildable`.
         * @returns the name set with `gtk_buildable_set_name()`
         */
        get_name(): string;

        /**
         * Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI].
         * Note that this will be called once for each time
         * `gtk_builder_add_from_file()` or `gtk_builder_add_from_string()`
         * is called on a builder.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         */
        parser_finished(builder: Builder): void;

        /**
         * Sets the property name `name` to `value` on the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param name name of property
         * @param value value of property
         */
        set_buildable_property(builder: Builder, name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;

        /**
         * Sets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * @param name name to set
         */
        set_name(name: string): void;

        /**
         * Adds a child to `buildable`. `type` is an optional string
         * describing how the child should be added.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child to add
         * @param type kind of child or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add_child(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object, type: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Constructs a child of `buildable` with the name `name`.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} calls this function if a “constructor” has been
         * specified in the UI definition.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param name name of child to construct
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_construct_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, name: string): T;

        /**
         * This is similar to `gtk_buildable_parser_finished()` but is
         * called once for each custom tag handled by the `buildable`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname the name of the tag
         * @param data user data created in custom_tag_start
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_finished(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
         * the buildable.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @param data user data that will be passed in to parser functions
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_tag_end(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called for each unknown element under `<child>`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_tag_start(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string): [boolean, GLib.MarkupParser, never];

        /**
         * Get the internal child called `childname` of the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param childname name of child
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_internal_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, childname: string): T;

        /**
         * Gets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} sets the name based on the
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI]
         * used to construct the `buildable`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_name(): string;

        /**
         * Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI].
         * Note that this will be called once for each time
         * `gtk_builder_add_from_file()` or `gtk_builder_add_from_string()`
         * is called on a builder.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_parser_finished(builder: Builder): void;

        /**
         * Sets the property name `name` to `value` on the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param name name of property
         * @param value value of property
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_buildable_property(builder: Builder, name: string, value: unknown): void;

        /**
         * Sets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * @param name name to set
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_name(name: string): void;

        /**
         * Asks the {@link Gtk.TreeDragDest} to insert a row before the path `dest`,
         * deriving the contents of the row from `selection_data`. If `dest` is
         * outside the tree so that inserting before it is impossible, `false`
         * will be returned. Also, `false` may be returned if the new row is
         * not created for some model-specific reason.  Should robustly handle
         * a `dest` no longer found in the model!
         * @param dest row to drop in front of
         * @param selection_data data to drop
         * @returns whether a new row was created before position `dest`
         */
        drag_data_received(dest: TreePath, selection_data: SelectionData): boolean;

        /**
         * Determines whether a drop is possible before the given `dest_path`,
         * at the same depth as `dest_path`. i.e., can we drop the data in
         * `selection_data` at that location. `dest_path` does not have to
         * exist; the return value will almost certainly be `false` if the
         * parent of `dest_path` doesn’t exist, though.
         * @param dest_path destination row
         * @param selection_data the data being dragged
         * @returns `true` if a drop is possible before `dest_path`
         */
        row_drop_possible(dest_path: TreePath, selection_data: SelectionData): boolean;

        /**
         * Asks the {@link Gtk.TreeDragDest} to insert a row before the path `dest`,
         * deriving the contents of the row from `selection_data`. If `dest` is
         * outside the tree so that inserting before it is impossible, `false`
         * will be returned. Also, `false` may be returned if the new row is
         * not created for some model-specific reason.  Should robustly handle
         * a `dest` no longer found in the model!
         * @param dest row to drop in front of
         * @param selection_data data to drop
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_drag_data_received(dest: TreePath, selection_data: SelectionData): boolean;

        /**
         * Determines whether a drop is possible before the given `dest_path`,
         * at the same depth as `dest_path`. i.e., can we drop the data in
         * `selection_data` at that location. `dest_path` does not have to
         * exist; the return value will almost certainly be `false` if the
         * parent of `dest_path` doesn’t exist, though.
         * @param dest_path destination row
         * @param selection_data the data being dragged
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_row_drop_possible(dest_path: TreePath, selection_data: SelectionData): boolean;

        /**
         * Asks the {@link Gtk.TreeDragSource} to delete the row at `path`, because
         * it was moved somewhere else via drag-and-drop. Returns `false`
         * if the deletion fails because `path` no longer exists, or for
         * some model-specific reason. Should robustly handle a `path` no
         * longer found in the model!
         * @param path row that was being dragged
         * @returns `true` if the row was successfully deleted
         */
        drag_data_delete(path: TreePath): boolean;

        /**
         * Asks the {@link Gtk.TreeDragSource} to fill in `selection_data` with a
         * representation of the row at `path`. `selection_data`->target gives
         * the required type of the data.  Should robustly handle a `path` no
         * longer found in the model!
         * @param path row that was dragged
         * @param selection_data a {@link Gtk.SelectionData} to fill with data                  from the dragged row
         * @returns `true` if data of the required type was provided
         */
        drag_data_get(path: TreePath, selection_data: SelectionData): boolean;

        /**
         * Asks the {@link Gtk.TreeDragSource} whether a particular row can be used as
         * the source of a DND operation. If the source doesn’t implement
         * this interface, the row is assumed draggable.
         * @param path row on which user is initiating a drag
         * @returns `true` if the row can be dragged
         */
        row_draggable(path: TreePath): boolean;

        /**
         * Asks the {@link Gtk.TreeDragSource} to delete the row at `path`, because
         * it was moved somewhere else via drag-and-drop. Returns `false`
         * if the deletion fails because `path` no longer exists, or for
         * some model-specific reason. Should robustly handle a `path` no
         * longer found in the model!
         * @param path row that was being dragged
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_drag_data_delete(path: TreePath): boolean;

        /**
         * Asks the {@link Gtk.TreeDragSource} to fill in `selection_data` with a
         * representation of the row at `path`. `selection_data`->target gives
         * the required type of the data.  Should robustly handle a `path` no
         * longer found in the model!
         * @param path row that was dragged
         * @param selection_data a {@link Gtk.SelectionData} to fill with data                  from the dragged row
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_drag_data_get(path: TreePath, selection_data: SelectionData): boolean;

        /**
         * Asks the {@link Gtk.TreeDragSource} whether a particular row can be used as
         * the source of a DND operation. If the source doesn’t implement
         * this interface, the row is assumed draggable.
         * @param path row on which user is initiating a drag
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_row_draggable(path: TreePath): boolean;

        /**
         * Creates a new {@link Gtk.TreeModel}, with `child_model` as the child_model
         * and `root` as the virtual root.
         * @param root A {@link Gtk.TreePath} or `null`.
         * @returns A new {@link Gtk.TreeModel}.
         */
        filter_new(root: TreePath | null): TreeModel;

        /**
         * Calls func on each node in model in a depth-first fashion.
         * 
         * If `func` returns `true`, then the tree ceases to be walked,
         * and `gtk_tree_model_foreach()` returns.
         * @param func a function to be called on each row
         */
        foreach(func: TreeModelForeachFunc): void;

        /**
         * Returns the type of the column.
         * @param index_ the column index
         * @returns the type of the column
         */
        get_column_type(index_: number): GObject.GType;

        /**
         * Returns a set of flags supported by this interface.
         * 
         * The flags are a bitwise combination of {@link Gtk.TreeModelFlags}.
         * The flags supported should not change during the lifetime
         * of the `tree_model`.
         * @returns the flags supported by this interface
         */
        get_flags(): TreeModelFlags;

        /**
         * Sets `iter` to a valid iterator pointing to `path`.  If `path` does
         * not exist, `iter` is set to an invalid iterator and `false` is returned.
         * @param path the {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct
         * @returns `true`, if `iter` was set
         */
        get_iter(path: TreePath): [boolean, TreeIter];

        /**
         * Initializes `iter` with the first iterator in the tree
         * (the one at the path "0") and returns `true`. Returns
         * `false` if the tree is empty.
         * @returns `true`, if `iter` was set
         */
        get_iter_first(): [boolean, TreeIter];

        /**
         * Sets `iter` to a valid iterator pointing to `path_string`, if it
         * exists. Otherwise, `iter` is left invalid and `false` is returned.
         * @param path_string a string representation of a {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct
         * @returns `true`, if `iter` was set
         */
        get_iter_from_string(path_string: string): [boolean, TreeIter];

        /**
         * Returns the number of columns supported by `tree_model`.
         * @returns the number of columns
         */
        get_n_columns(): number;

        /**
         * Returns a newly-created {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct referenced by `iter`.
         * 
         * This path should be freed with `gtk_tree_path_free()`.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
         * @returns a newly-created {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct
         */
        get_path(iter: TreeIter): TreePath;

        /**
         * Generates a string representation of the iter.
         * 
         * This string is a “:” separated list of numbers.
         * For example, “4:10:0:3” would be an acceptable
         * return value for this string.
         * @param iter a {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
         * @returns a newly-allocated string.     Must be freed with `g_free()`.
         */
        get_string_from_iter(iter: TreeIter): string;

        /**
         * Initializes and sets `value` to that at `column`.
         * 
         * When done with `value`, `g_value_unset()` needs to be called
         * to free any allocated memory.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
         * @param column the column to lookup the value at
         */
        get_value(iter: TreeIter, column: number): unknown;

        /**
         * Sets `iter` to point to the first child of `parent`.
         * 
         * If `parent` has no children, `false` is returned and `iter` is
         * set to be invalid. `parent` will remain a valid node after this
         * function has been called.
         * 
         * If `parent` is `null` returns the first node, equivalent to
         * `gtk_tree_model_get_iter_first (tree_model, iter);`
         * @param parent the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct, or `null`
         * @returns `true`, if `iter` has been set to the first child
         */
        iter_children(parent: TreeIter | null): [boolean, TreeIter];

        /**
         * Returns `true` if `iter` has children, `false` otherwise.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct to test for children
         * @returns `true` if `iter` has children
         */
        iter_has_child(iter: TreeIter): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the number of children that `iter` has.
         * 
         * As a special case, if `iter` is `null`, then the number
         * of toplevel nodes is returned.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct, or `null`
         * @returns the number of children of `iter`
         */
        iter_n_children(iter: TreeIter | null): number;

        /**
         * Sets `iter` to point to the node following it at the current level.
         * 
         * If there is no next `iter`, `false` is returned and `iter` is set
         * to be invalid.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
         * @returns `true` if `iter` has been changed to the next node
         */
        iter_next(iter: TreeIter): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets `iter` to be the child of `parent`, using the given index.
         * 
         * The first index is 0. If `n` is too big, or `parent` has no children,
         * `iter` is set to an invalid iterator and `false` is returned. `parent`
         * will remain a valid node after this function has been called. As a
         * special case, if `parent` is `null`, then the `n`-th root node
         * is set.
         * @param parent the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct to get the child from, or `null`.
         * @param n the index of the desired child
         * @returns `true`, if `parent` has an `n`-th child
         */
        iter_nth_child(parent: TreeIter | null, n: number): [boolean, TreeIter];

        /**
         * Sets `iter` to be the parent of `child`.
         * 
         * If `child` is at the toplevel, and doesn’t have a parent, then
         * `iter` is set to an invalid iterator and `false` is returned.
         * `child` will remain a valid node after this function has been
         * called.
         * 
         * `iter` will be initialized before the lookup is performed, so `child`
         * and `iter` cannot point to the same memory location.
         * @param child the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
         * @returns `true`, if `iter` is set to the parent of `child`
         */
        iter_parent(child: TreeIter): [boolean, TreeIter];

        /**
         * Sets `iter` to point to the previous node at the current level.
         * 
         * If there is no previous `iter`, `false` is returned and `iter` is
         * set to be invalid.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
         * @returns `true` if `iter` has been changed to the previous node
         */
        iter_previous(iter: TreeIter): boolean;

        /**
         * Lets the tree ref the node.
         * 
         * This is an optional method for models to implement.
         * To be more specific, models may ignore this call as it exists
         * primarily for performance reasons.
         * 
         * This function is primarily meant as a way for views to let
         * caching models know when nodes are being displayed (and hence,
         * whether or not to cache that node). Being displayed means a node
         * is in an expanded branch, regardless of whether the node is currently
         * visible in the viewport. For example, a file-system based model
         * would not want to keep the entire file-hierarchy in memory,
         * just the sections that are currently being displayed by
         * every current view.
         * 
         * A model should be expected to be able to get an iter independent
         * of its reffed state.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
         */
        ref_node(iter: TreeIter): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.TreeModel.SignalSignatures.row_changed | Gtk.TreeModel::row-changed} signal on `tree_model`.
         * @param path a {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct pointing to the changed row
         * @param iter a valid {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct pointing to the changed row
         */
        row_changed(path: TreePath, iter: TreeIter): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.TreeModel.SignalSignatures.row_deleted | Gtk.TreeModel::row-deleted} signal on `tree_model`.
         * 
         * This should be called by models after a row has been removed.
         * The location pointed to by `path` should be the location that
         * the row previously was at. It may not be a valid location anymore.
         * 
         * Nodes that are deleted are not unreffed, this means that any
         * outstanding references on the deleted node should not be released.
         * @param path a {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct pointing to the previous location of     the deleted row
         */
        row_deleted(path: TreePath): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.TreeModel.SignalSignatures.row_has_child_toggled | Gtk.TreeModel::row-has-child-toggled} signal on
         * `tree_model`. This should be called by models after the child
         * state of a node changes.
         * @param path a {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct pointing to the changed row
         * @param iter a valid {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct pointing to the changed row
         */
        row_has_child_toggled(path: TreePath, iter: TreeIter): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.TreeModel.SignalSignatures.row_inserted | Gtk.TreeModel::row-inserted} signal on `tree_model`.
         * @param path a {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct pointing to the inserted row
         * @param iter a valid {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct pointing to the inserted row
         */
        row_inserted(path: TreePath, iter: TreeIter): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.TreeModel.SignalSignatures.rows_reordered | Gtk.TreeModel::rows-reordered} signal on `tree_model`.
         * 
         * This should be called by models when their rows have been
         * reordered.
         * @param path a {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct pointing to the tree node whose children     have been reordered
         * @param iter a valid {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct pointing to the node     whose children have been reordered, or `null` if the depth     of `path` is 0
         * @param new_order an array of integers     mapping the current position of each child to its old     position before the re-ordering,     i.e. `new_order``[newpos] = oldpos`
         */
        rows_reordered(path: TreePath, iter: TreeIter | null, new_order: number[]): void;

        /**
         * Lets the tree unref the node.
         * 
         * This is an optional method for models to implement.
         * To be more specific, models may ignore this call as it exists
         * primarily for performance reasons. For more information on what
         * this means, see `gtk_tree_model_ref_node()`.
         * 
         * Please note that nodes that are deleted are not unreffed.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
         */
        unref_node(iter: TreeIter): void;

        /**
         * Returns the type of the column.
         * @param index_ the column index
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_column_type(index_: number): GObject.GType;

        /**
         * Returns a set of flags supported by this interface.
         * 
         * The flags are a bitwise combination of {@link Gtk.TreeModelFlags}.
         * The flags supported should not change during the lifetime
         * of the `tree_model`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_flags(): TreeModelFlags;

        /**
         * Sets `iter` to a valid iterator pointing to `path`.  If `path` does
         * not exist, `iter` is set to an invalid iterator and `false` is returned.
         * @param path the {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_iter(path: TreePath): [boolean, TreeIter];

        /**
         * Returns the number of columns supported by `tree_model`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_n_columns(): number;

        /**
         * Returns a newly-created {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct referenced by `iter`.
         * 
         * This path should be freed with `gtk_tree_path_free()`.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_path(iter: TreeIter): TreePath;

        /**
         * Initializes and sets `value` to that at `column`.
         * 
         * When done with `value`, `g_value_unset()` needs to be called
         * to free any allocated memory.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
         * @param column the column to lookup the value at
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_value(iter: TreeIter, column: number): GObject.Value | any;

        /**
         * Sets `iter` to point to the first child of `parent`.
         * 
         * If `parent` has no children, `false` is returned and `iter` is
         * set to be invalid. `parent` will remain a valid node after this
         * function has been called.
         * 
         * If `parent` is `null` returns the first node, equivalent to
         * `gtk_tree_model_get_iter_first (tree_model, iter);`
         * @param parent the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct, or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_iter_children(parent: TreeIter | null): [boolean, TreeIter];

        /**
         * Returns `true` if `iter` has children, `false` otherwise.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct to test for children
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_iter_has_child(iter: TreeIter): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the number of children that `iter` has.
         * 
         * As a special case, if `iter` is `null`, then the number
         * of toplevel nodes is returned.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct, or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_iter_n_children(iter: TreeIter | null): number;

        /**
         * Sets `iter` to point to the node following it at the current level.
         * 
         * If there is no next `iter`, `false` is returned and `iter` is set
         * to be invalid.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_iter_next(iter: TreeIter): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets `iter` to be the child of `parent`, using the given index.
         * 
         * The first index is 0. If `n` is too big, or `parent` has no children,
         * `iter` is set to an invalid iterator and `false` is returned. `parent`
         * will remain a valid node after this function has been called. As a
         * special case, if `parent` is `null`, then the `n`-th root node
         * is set.
         * @param parent the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct to get the child from, or `null`.
         * @param n the index of the desired child
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_iter_nth_child(parent: TreeIter | null, n: number): [boolean, TreeIter];

        /**
         * Sets `iter` to be the parent of `child`.
         * 
         * If `child` is at the toplevel, and doesn’t have a parent, then
         * `iter` is set to an invalid iterator and `false` is returned.
         * `child` will remain a valid node after this function has been
         * called.
         * 
         * `iter` will be initialized before the lookup is performed, so `child`
         * and `iter` cannot point to the same memory location.
         * @param child the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_iter_parent(child: TreeIter): [boolean, TreeIter];

        /**
         * Sets `iter` to point to the previous node at the current level.
         * 
         * If there is no previous `iter`, `false` is returned and `iter` is
         * set to be invalid.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_iter_previous(iter: TreeIter): boolean;

        /**
         * Lets the tree ref the node.
         * 
         * This is an optional method for models to implement.
         * To be more specific, models may ignore this call as it exists
         * primarily for performance reasons.
         * 
         * This function is primarily meant as a way for views to let
         * caching models know when nodes are being displayed (and hence,
         * whether or not to cache that node). Being displayed means a node
         * is in an expanded branch, regardless of whether the node is currently
         * visible in the viewport. For example, a file-system based model
         * would not want to keep the entire file-hierarchy in memory,
         * just the sections that are currently being displayed by
         * every current view.
         * 
         * A model should be expected to be able to get an iter independent
         * of its reffed state.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_ref_node(iter: TreeIter): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.TreeModel.SignalSignatures.row_changed | Gtk.TreeModel::row-changed} signal on `tree_model`.
         * @param path a {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct pointing to the changed row
         * @param iter a valid {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct pointing to the changed row
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_row_changed(path: TreePath, iter: TreeIter): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.TreeModel.SignalSignatures.row_deleted | Gtk.TreeModel::row-deleted} signal on `tree_model`.
         * 
         * This should be called by models after a row has been removed.
         * The location pointed to by `path` should be the location that
         * the row previously was at. It may not be a valid location anymore.
         * 
         * Nodes that are deleted are not unreffed, this means that any
         * outstanding references on the deleted node should not be released.
         * @param path a {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct pointing to the previous location of     the deleted row
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_row_deleted(path: TreePath): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.TreeModel.SignalSignatures.row_has_child_toggled | Gtk.TreeModel::row-has-child-toggled} signal on
         * `tree_model`. This should be called by models after the child
         * state of a node changes.
         * @param path a {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct pointing to the changed row
         * @param iter a valid {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct pointing to the changed row
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_row_has_child_toggled(path: TreePath, iter: TreeIter): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.TreeModel.SignalSignatures.row_inserted | Gtk.TreeModel::row-inserted} signal on `tree_model`.
         * @param path a {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct pointing to the inserted row
         * @param iter a valid {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct pointing to the inserted row
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_row_inserted(path: TreePath, iter: TreeIter): void;

        /**
         * Lets the tree unref the node.
         * 
         * This is an optional method for models to implement.
         * To be more specific, models may ignore this call as it exists
         * primarily for performance reasons. For more information on what
         * this means, see `gtk_tree_model_ref_node()`.
         * 
         * Please note that nodes that are deleted are not unreffed.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_unref_node(iter: TreeIter): void;

        /**
         * Fills in `sort_column_id` and `order` with the current sort column and the
         * order. It returns `true` unless the `sort_column_id` is
         * `GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID` or
         * `GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_UNSORTED_SORT_COLUMN_ID`.
         * @returns `true` if the sort column is not one of the special sort   column ids.
         */
        get_sort_column_id(): [boolean, number, SortType];

        /**
         * Returns `true` if the model has a default sort function. This is used
         * primarily by GtkTreeViewColumns in order to determine if a model can
         * go back to the default state, or not.
         * @returns `true`, if the model has a default sort function
         */
        has_default_sort_func(): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the default comparison function used when sorting to be `sort_func`.
         * If the current sort column id of `sortable` is
         * `GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID`, then the model will sort using
         * this function.
         * 
         * If `sort_func` is `null`, then there will be no default comparison function.
         * This means that once the model  has been sorted, it can’t go back to the
         * default state. In this case, when the current sort column id of `sortable`
         * is `GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID`, the model will be unsorted.
         * @param sort_func The comparison function
         */
        set_default_sort_func(sort_func: TreeIterCompareFunc): void;

        /**
         * Sets the current sort column to be `sort_column_id`. The `sortable` will
         * resort itself to reflect this change, after emitting a
         * {@link Gtk.TreeSortable.SignalSignatures.sort_column_changed | Gtk.TreeSortable::sort-column-changed} signal. `sort_column_id` may either be
         * a regular column id, or one of the following special values:
         * 
         * - `GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID`: the default sort function
         *   will be used, if it is set
         * 
         * - `GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_UNSORTED_SORT_COLUMN_ID`: no sorting will occur
         * @param sort_column_id the sort column id to set
         * @param order The sort order of the column
         */
        set_sort_column_id(sort_column_id: number, order: SortType): void;

        /**
         * Sets the comparison function used when sorting to be `sort_func`. If the
         * current sort column id of `sortable` is the same as `sort_column_id`, then
         * the model will sort using this function.
         * @param sort_column_id the sort column id to set the function for
         * @param sort_func The comparison function
         */
        set_sort_func(sort_column_id: number, sort_func: TreeIterCompareFunc): void;

        /**
         * Emits a {@link Gtk.TreeSortable.SignalSignatures.sort_column_changed | Gtk.TreeSortable::sort-column-changed} signal on `sortable`.
         */
        sort_column_changed(): void;

        /**
         * Fills in `sort_column_id` and `order` with the current sort column and the
         * order. It returns `true` unless the `sort_column_id` is
         * `GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID` or
         * `GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_UNSORTED_SORT_COLUMN_ID`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_sort_column_id(): [boolean, number, SortType];

        /**
         * Returns `true` if the model has a default sort function. This is used
         * primarily by GtkTreeViewColumns in order to determine if a model can
         * go back to the default state, or not.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_has_default_sort_func(): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the default comparison function used when sorting to be `sort_func`.
         * If the current sort column id of `sortable` is
         * `GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID`, then the model will sort using
         * this function.
         * 
         * If `sort_func` is `null`, then there will be no default comparison function.
         * This means that once the model  has been sorted, it can’t go back to the
         * default state. In this case, when the current sort column id of `sortable`
         * is `GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID`, the model will be unsorted.
         * @param sort_func The comparison function
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_default_sort_func(sort_func: TreeIterCompareFunc): void;

        /**
         * Sets the current sort column to be `sort_column_id`. The `sortable` will
         * resort itself to reflect this change, after emitting a
         * {@link Gtk.TreeSortable.SignalSignatures.sort_column_changed | Gtk.TreeSortable::sort-column-changed} signal. `sort_column_id` may either be
         * a regular column id, or one of the following special values:
         * 
         * - `GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID`: the default sort function
         *   will be used, if it is set
         * 
         * - `GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_UNSORTED_SORT_COLUMN_ID`: no sorting will occur
         * @param sort_column_id the sort column id to set
         * @param order The sort order of the column
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_sort_column_id(sort_column_id: number, order: SortType): void;

        /**
         * Sets the comparison function used when sorting to be `sort_func`. If the
         * current sort column id of `sortable` is the same as `sort_column_id`, then
         * the model will sort using this function.
         * @param sort_column_id the sort column id to set the function for
         * @param sort_func The comparison function
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_sort_func(sort_column_id: number, sort_func: TreeIterCompareFunc): void;

        /**
         * Emits a {@link Gtk.TreeSortable.SignalSignatures.sort_column_changed | Gtk.TreeSortable::sort-column-changed} signal on `sortable`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_sort_column_changed(): void;
    }


    namespace TreeView {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Container.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * The number of columns of the treeview has changed.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "columns-changed": () => void;
            /**
             * The position of the cursor (focused cell) has changed.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "cursor-changed": () => void;
            /**
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "expand-collapse-cursor-row": (arg0: boolean, arg1: boolean, arg2: boolean) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * The {@link Gtk.TreeView.SignalSignatures.move_cursor | Gtk.TreeView::move-cursor} signal is a [keybinding
             * signal][GtkBindingSignal] which gets emitted when the user
             * presses one of the cursor keys.
             * 
             * Applications should not connect to it, but may emit it with
             * `g_signal_emit_by_name()` if they need to control the cursor
             * programmatically. In contrast to `gtk_tree_view_set_cursor()` and
             * `gtk_tree_view_set_cursor_on_cell()` when moving horizontally
             * {@link Gtk.TreeView.SignalSignatures.move_cursor | Gtk.TreeView::move-cursor} does not reset the current selection.
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "move-cursor": (arg0: MovementStep, arg1: number) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * The "row-activated" signal is emitted when the method
             * `gtk_tree_view_row_activated()` is called, when the user double
             * clicks a treeview row with the "activate-on-single-click"
             * property set to `false`, or when the user single clicks a row when
             * the "activate-on-single-click" property set to `true`. It is also
             * emitted when a non-editable row is selected and one of the keys:
             * Space, Shift+Space, Return or Enter is pressed.
             * 
             * For selection handling refer to the
             * [tree widget conceptual overview](https://docs.gtk.org/gtk3/TreeWidget.html)
             * as well as {@link Gtk.TreeSelection}.
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "row-activated": (arg0: TreePath, arg1: TreeViewColumn) => void;
            /**
             * The given row has been collapsed (child nodes are hidden).
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "row-collapsed": (arg0: TreeIter, arg1: TreePath) => void;
            /**
             * The given row has been expanded (child nodes are shown).
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "row-expanded": (arg0: TreeIter, arg1: TreePath) => void;
            /**
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "select-all": () => boolean | void;
            /**
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "select-cursor-parent": () => boolean | void;
            /**
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "select-cursor-row": (arg0: boolean) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "start-interactive-search": () => boolean | void;
            /**
             * The given row is about to be collapsed (hide its children nodes). Use this
             * signal if you need to control the collapsibility of individual rows.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "test-collapse-row": (arg0: TreeIter, arg1: TreePath) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * The given row is about to be expanded (show its children nodes). Use this
             * signal if you need to control the expandability of individual rows.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "test-expand-row": (arg0: TreeIter, arg1: TreePath) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "toggle-cursor-row": () => boolean | void;
            /**
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "unselect-all": () => boolean | void;
            "notify::activate-on-single-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::enable-grid-lines": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::enable-search": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::enable-tree-lines": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expander-column": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::fixed-height-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::headers-clickable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::headers-visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hover-expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hover-selection": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::level-indentation": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::model": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::reorderable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::rubber-banding": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::rules-hint": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::search-column": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::show-expanders": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-column": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hadjustment": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hscroll-policy": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vadjustment": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vscroll-policy": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Container.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, Scrollable.ConstructorProps {
            activate_on_single_click: boolean;
            activateOnSingleClick: boolean;
            enable_grid_lines: TreeViewGridLines;
            enableGridLines: TreeViewGridLines;
            enable_search: boolean;
            enableSearch: boolean;
            enable_tree_lines: boolean;
            enableTreeLines: boolean;
            expander_column: TreeViewColumn;
            expanderColumn: TreeViewColumn;
            fixed_height_mode: boolean;
            fixedHeightMode: boolean;
            headers_clickable: boolean;
            headersClickable: boolean;
            headers_visible: boolean;
            headersVisible: boolean;
            hover_expand: boolean;
            hoverExpand: boolean;
            hover_selection: boolean;
            hoverSelection: boolean;
            level_indentation: number;
            levelIndentation: number;
            model: TreeModel | null;
            reorderable: boolean;
            rubber_banding: boolean;
            rubberBanding: boolean;
            rules_hint: boolean;
            rulesHint: boolean;
            search_column: number;
            searchColumn: number;
            show_expanders: boolean;
            showExpanders: boolean;
            tooltip_column: number;
            tooltipColumn: number;
        }
    }

    /**
     * Widget that displays any object that implements the {@link Gtk.TreeModel} interface.
     * 
     * Please refer to the
     * [tree widget conceptual overview](https://docs.gtk.org/gtk3/TreeWidget.html)
     * for an overview of all the objects and data types related
     * to the tree widget and how they work together.
     * 
     * Several different coordinate systems are exposed in the GtkTreeView API.
     * These are:
     * 
     * ![](tree-view-coordinates.png)
     * 
     * Coordinate systems in GtkTreeView API:
     * 
     * - Widget coordinates: Coordinates relative to the widget (usually `widget->window`).
     * 
     * - Bin window coordinates: Coordinates relative to the window that GtkTreeView renders to.
     * 
     * - Tree coordinates: Coordinates relative to the entire scrollable area of GtkTreeView. These
     *   coordinates start at (0, 0) for row 0 of the tree.
     * 
     * Several functions are available for converting between the different
     * coordinate systems.  The most common translations are between widget and bin
     * window coordinates and between bin window and tree coordinates. For the
     * former you can use `gtk_tree_view_convert_widget_to_bin_window_coords()`
     * (and vice versa), for the latter `gtk_tree_view_convert_bin_window_to_tree_coords()`
     * (and vice versa).
     * 
     * # GtkTreeView as GtkBuildable
     * 
     * The GtkTreeView implementation of the GtkBuildable interface accepts
     * {@link Gtk.TreeViewColumn} objects as `<child>` elements and exposes the internal
     * {@link Gtk.TreeSelection} in UI definitions.
     * 
     * An example of a UI definition fragment with GtkTreeView:
     * 
     * 
     * ```xml
     * <object class="GtkTreeView" id="treeview">
     *   <property name="model">liststore1</property>
     *   <child>
     *     <object class="GtkTreeViewColumn" id="test-column">
     *       <property name="title">Test</property>
     *       <child>
     *         <object class="GtkCellRendererText" id="test-renderer"/>
     *         <attributes>
     *           <attribute name="text">1</attribute>
     *         </attributes>
     *       </child>
     *     </object>
     *   </child>
     *   <child internal-child="selection">
     *     <object class="GtkTreeSelection" id="selection">
     *       <signal name="changed" handler="on_treeview_selection_changed"/>
     *     </object>
     *   </child>
     * </object>
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * # CSS nodes
     * 
     * 
     * ```
     * treeview.view
     * ├── header
     * │   ├── <column header>
     * ┊   ┊
     * │   ╰── <column header>
     * │
     * ╰── [rubberband]
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * GtkTreeView has a main CSS node with name treeview and style class .view.
     * It has a subnode with name header, which is the parent for all the column
     * header widgets' CSS nodes.
     * For rubberband selection, a subnode with name rubberband is used.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class TreeView extends Container implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable, Scrollable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<TreeView>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * The activate-on-single-click property specifies whether the "row-activated" signal
         * will be emitted after a single click.
         * @since 3.8
         * @default false
         */
        get activate_on_single_click(): boolean;
        set activate_on_single_click(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The activate-on-single-click property specifies whether the "row-activated" signal
         * will be emitted after a single click.
         * @since 3.8
         * @default false
         */
        get activateOnSingleClick(): boolean;
        set activateOnSingleClick(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default Gtk.TreeViewGridLines.NONE
         */
        get enable_grid_lines(): TreeViewGridLines;
        set enable_grid_lines(val: TreeViewGridLines);

        /**
         * @default Gtk.TreeViewGridLines.NONE
         */
        get enableGridLines(): TreeViewGridLines;
        set enableGridLines(val: TreeViewGridLines);

        /**
         * @default true
         */
        get enable_search(): boolean;
        set enable_search(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default true
         */
        get enableSearch(): boolean;
        set enableSearch(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get enable_tree_lines(): boolean;
        set enable_tree_lines(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get enableTreeLines(): boolean;
        set enableTreeLines(val: boolean);

        get expander_column(): TreeViewColumn;
        set expander_column(val: TreeViewColumn);

        get expanderColumn(): TreeViewColumn;
        set expanderColumn(val: TreeViewColumn);

        /**
         * Setting the ::fixed-height-mode property to `true` speeds up
         * {@link Gtk.TreeView} by assuming that all rows have the same height.
         * Only enable this option if all rows are the same height.
         * Please see `gtk_tree_view_set_fixed_height_mode()` for more
         * information on this option.
         * @since 2.4
         * @default false
         */
        get fixed_height_mode(): boolean;
        set fixed_height_mode(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Setting the ::fixed-height-mode property to `true` speeds up
         * {@link Gtk.TreeView} by assuming that all rows have the same height.
         * Only enable this option if all rows are the same height.
         * Please see `gtk_tree_view_set_fixed_height_mode()` for more
         * information on this option.
         * @since 2.4
         * @default false
         */
        get fixedHeightMode(): boolean;
        set fixedHeightMode(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default true
         */
        get headers_clickable(): boolean;
        set headers_clickable(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default true
         */
        get headersClickable(): boolean;
        set headersClickable(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default true
         */
        get headers_visible(): boolean;
        set headers_visible(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default true
         */
        get headersVisible(): boolean;
        set headersVisible(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Enables or disables the hover expansion mode of `tree_view`.
         * Hover expansion makes rows expand or collapse if the pointer moves
         * over them.
         * 
         * This mode is primarily intended for treeviews in popups, e.g.
         * in {@link Gtk.ComboBox} or {@link Gtk.EntryCompletion}.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default false
         */
        get hover_expand(): boolean;
        set hover_expand(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Enables or disables the hover expansion mode of `tree_view`.
         * Hover expansion makes rows expand or collapse if the pointer moves
         * over them.
         * 
         * This mode is primarily intended for treeviews in popups, e.g.
         * in {@link Gtk.ComboBox} or {@link Gtk.EntryCompletion}.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default false
         */
        get hoverExpand(): boolean;
        set hoverExpand(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Enables or disables the hover selection mode of `tree_view`.
         * Hover selection makes the selected row follow the pointer.
         * Currently, this works only for the selection modes
         * {@link Gtk.SelectionMode.SINGLE} and {@link Gtk.SelectionMode.BROWSE}.
         * 
         * This mode is primarily intended for treeviews in popups, e.g.
         * in {@link Gtk.ComboBox} or {@link Gtk.EntryCompletion}.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default false
         */
        get hover_selection(): boolean;
        set hover_selection(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Enables or disables the hover selection mode of `tree_view`.
         * Hover selection makes the selected row follow the pointer.
         * Currently, this works only for the selection modes
         * {@link Gtk.SelectionMode.SINGLE} and {@link Gtk.SelectionMode.BROWSE}.
         * 
         * This mode is primarily intended for treeviews in popups, e.g.
         * in {@link Gtk.ComboBox} or {@link Gtk.EntryCompletion}.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default false
         */
        get hoverSelection(): boolean;
        set hoverSelection(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Extra indentation for each level.
         * @since 2.12
         * @default 0
         */
        get level_indentation(): number;
        set level_indentation(val: number);

        /**
         * Extra indentation for each level.
         * @since 2.12
         * @default 0
         */
        get levelIndentation(): number;
        set levelIndentation(val: number);

        get model(): TreeModel | null;
        set model(val: TreeModel | null);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get reorderable(): boolean;
        set reorderable(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get rubber_banding(): boolean;
        set rubber_banding(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get rubberBanding(): boolean;
        set rubberBanding(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Sets a hint to the theme to draw rows in alternating colors.
         * @deprecated since 3.14: The theme is responsible for drawing rows   using zebra striping
         * @default false
         */
        get rules_hint(): boolean;
        set rules_hint(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Sets a hint to the theme to draw rows in alternating colors.
         * @deprecated since 3.14: The theme is responsible for drawing rows   using zebra striping
         * @default false
         */
        get rulesHint(): boolean;
        set rulesHint(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default -1
         */
        get search_column(): number;
        set search_column(val: number);

        /**
         * @default -1
         */
        get searchColumn(): number;
        set searchColumn(val: number);

        /**
         * `true` if the view has expanders.
         * @since 2.12
         * @default true
         */
        get show_expanders(): boolean;
        set show_expanders(val: boolean);

        /**
         * `true` if the view has expanders.
         * @since 2.12
         * @default true
         */
        get showExpanders(): boolean;
        set showExpanders(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default -1
         */
        get tooltip_column(): number;
        set tooltip_column(val: number);

        /**
         * @default -1
         */
        get tooltipColumn(): number;
        set tooltipColumn(val: number);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: TreeView.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<TreeView.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): TreeView;

        static new_with_model(model: TreeModel): TreeView;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof TreeView.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, TreeView.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof TreeView.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, TreeView.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof TreeView.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<TreeView.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_columns_changed(): void;

        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_cursor_changed(): void;

        /**
         * @param logical 
         * @param expand 
         * @param open_all 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_expand_collapse_cursor_row(logical: boolean, expand: boolean, open_all: boolean): boolean;

        /**
         * @param step 
         * @param count 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_move_cursor(step: MovementStep, count: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Activates the cell determined by `path` and `column`.
         * @param path The {@link Gtk.TreePath} to be activated.
         * @param column The {@link Gtk.TreeViewColumn} to be activated.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_row_activated(path: TreePath, column: TreeViewColumn): void;

        /**
         * @param iter 
         * @param path 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_row_collapsed(iter: TreeIter, path: TreePath): void;

        /**
         * @param iter 
         * @param path 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_row_expanded(iter: TreeIter, path: TreePath): void;

        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_select_all(): boolean;

        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_select_cursor_parent(): boolean;

        /**
         * @param start_editing 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_select_cursor_row(start_editing: boolean): boolean;

        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_start_interactive_search(): boolean;

        /**
         * @param iter 
         * @param path 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_test_collapse_row(iter: TreeIter, path: TreePath): boolean;

        /**
         * @param iter 
         * @param path 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_test_expand_row(iter: TreeIter, path: TreePath): boolean;

        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_toggle_cursor_row(): boolean;

        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_unselect_all(): boolean;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Appends `column` to the list of columns. If `tree_view` has “fixed_height”
         * mode enabled, then `column` must have its “sizing” property set to be
         * GTK_TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_FIXED.
         * @param column The {@link Gtk.TreeViewColumn} to add.
         * @returns The number of columns in `tree_view` after appending.
         */
        append_column(column: TreeViewColumn): number;

        /**
         * Recursively collapses all visible, expanded nodes in `tree_view`.
         */
        collapse_all(): void;

        /**
         * Collapses a row (hides its child rows, if they exist).
         * @param path path to a row in the `tree_view`
         * @returns `true` if the row was collapsed.
         */
        collapse_row(path: TreePath): boolean;

        /**
         * Resizes all columns to their optimal width. Only works after the
         * treeview has been realized.
         */
        columns_autosize(): void;

        /**
         * Converts bin_window coordinates to coordinates for the
         * tree (the full scrollable area of the tree).
         * @param bx X coordinate relative to bin_window
         * @param by Y coordinate relative to bin_window
         */
        convert_bin_window_to_tree_coords(bx: number, by: number): [number, number];

        /**
         * Converts bin_window coordinates (see `gtk_tree_view_get_bin_window()`)
         * to widget relative coordinates.
         * @param bx bin_window X coordinate
         * @param by bin_window Y coordinate
         */
        convert_bin_window_to_widget_coords(bx: number, by: number): [number, number];

        /**
         * Converts tree coordinates (coordinates in full scrollable area of the tree)
         * to bin_window coordinates.
         * @param tx tree X coordinate
         * @param ty tree Y coordinate
         */
        convert_tree_to_bin_window_coords(tx: number, ty: number): [number, number];

        /**
         * Converts tree coordinates (coordinates in full scrollable area of the tree)
         * to widget coordinates.
         * @param tx X coordinate relative to the tree
         * @param ty Y coordinate relative to the tree
         */
        convert_tree_to_widget_coords(tx: number, ty: number): [number, number];

        /**
         * Converts widget coordinates to coordinates for the bin_window
         * (see `gtk_tree_view_get_bin_window()`).
         * @param wx X coordinate relative to the widget
         * @param wy Y coordinate relative to the widget
         */
        convert_widget_to_bin_window_coords(wx: number, wy: number): [number, number];

        /**
         * Converts widget coordinates to coordinates for the
         * tree (the full scrollable area of the tree).
         * @param wx X coordinate relative to the widget
         * @param wy Y coordinate relative to the widget
         */
        convert_widget_to_tree_coords(wx: number, wy: number): [number, number];

        /**
         * Creates a {@link cairo.Surface} representation of the row at `path`.
         * This image is used for a drag icon.
         * @param path a {@link Gtk.TreePath} in `tree_view`
         * @returns a newly-allocated surface of the drag icon.
         */
        create_row_drag_icon(path: TreePath): cairo.Surface;

        /**
         * Turns `tree_view` into a drop destination for automatic DND. Calling
         * this method sets {@link Gtk.TreeView.reorderable} to `false`.
         * @param targets the table of targets that           the drag will support
         * @param actions the bitmask of possible actions for a drag from this    widget
         */
        enable_model_drag_dest(targets: TargetEntry[], actions: Gdk.DragAction): void;

        /**
         * Turns `tree_view` into a drag source for automatic DND. Calling this
         * method sets {@link Gtk.TreeView.reorderable} to `false`.
         * @param start_button_mask Mask of allowed buttons to start drag
         * @param targets the table of targets that the drag will support
         * @param actions the bitmask of possible actions for a drag from this    widget
         */
        enable_model_drag_source(start_button_mask: Gdk.ModifierType, targets: TargetEntry[], actions: Gdk.DragAction): void;

        /**
         * Recursively expands all nodes in the `tree_view`.
         */
        expand_all(): void;

        /**
         * Opens the row so its children are visible.
         * @param path path to a row
         * @param open_all whether to recursively expand, or just expand immediate children
         * @returns `true` if the row existed and had children
         */
        expand_row(path: TreePath, open_all: boolean): boolean;

        /**
         * Expands the row at `path`. This will also expand all parent rows of
         * `path` as necessary.
         * @param path path to a row.
         */
        expand_to_path(path: TreePath): void;

        /**
         * Gets the setting set by `gtk_tree_view_set_activate_on_single_click()`.
         * @returns `true` if row-activated will be emitted on a single click
         */
        get_activate_on_single_click(): boolean;

        /**
         * Fills the bounding rectangle in bin_window coordinates for the cell at the
         * row specified by `path` and the column specified by `column`.  If `path` is
         * `null`, or points to a node not found in the tree, the `y` and `height` fields of
         * the rectangle will be filled with 0. If `column` is `null`, the `x` and `width`
         * fields will be filled with 0.  The returned rectangle is equivalent to the
         * `background_area` passed to `gtk_cell_renderer_render()`.  These background
         * areas tile to cover the entire bin window.  Contrast with the `cell_area`,
         * returned by `gtk_tree_view_get_cell_area()`, which returns only the cell
         * itself, excluding surrounding borders and the tree expander area.
         * @param path a {@link Gtk.TreePath} for the row, or `null` to get only horizontal coordinates
         * @param column a {@link Gtk.TreeViewColumn} for the column, or `null` to get only vertical coordiantes
         */
        get_background_area(path: TreePath | null, column: TreeViewColumn | null): Gdk.Rectangle;

        /**
         * Returns the window that `tree_view` renders to.
         * This is used primarily to compare to `event->window`
         * to confirm that the event on `tree_view` is on the right window.
         * @returns A {@link Gdk.Window}, or `null` when `tree_view` hasn’t been realized yet.
         */
        get_bin_window(): Gdk.Window | null;

        /**
         * Fills the bounding rectangle in bin_window coordinates for the cell at the
         * row specified by `path` and the column specified by `column`.  If `path` is
         * `null`, or points to a path not currently displayed, the `y` and `height` fields
         * of the rectangle will be filled with 0. If `column` is `null`, the `x` and `width`
         * fields will be filled with 0.  The sum of all cell rects does not cover the
         * entire tree; there are extra pixels in between rows, for example. The
         * returned rectangle is equivalent to the `cell_area` passed to
         * `gtk_cell_renderer_render()`.  This function is only valid if `tree_view` is
         * realized.
         * @param path a {@link Gtk.TreePath} for the row, or `null` to get only horizontal coordinates
         * @param column a {@link Gtk.TreeViewColumn} for the column, or `null` to get only vertical coordinates
         */
        get_cell_area(path: TreePath | null, column: TreeViewColumn | null): Gdk.Rectangle;

        /**
         * Gets the {@link Gtk.TreeViewColumn} at the given position in the `tree_view`.
         * @param n The position of the column, counting from 0.
         * @returns The {@link Gtk.TreeViewColumn}, or `null` if the position is outside the range of columns.
         */
        get_column(n: number): TreeViewColumn | null;

        /**
         * Returns a {@link GLib.List} of all the {@link Gtk.TreeViewColumn} s currently in `tree_view`.
         * The returned list must be freed with g_list_free ().
         * @returns A list of {@link Gtk.TreeViewColumn} s
         */
        get_columns(): TreeViewColumn[];

        /**
         * Fills in `path` and `focus_column` with the current path and focus column.  If
         * the cursor isn’t currently set, then *`path` will be `null`.  If no column
         * currently has focus, then *`focus_column` will be `null`.
         * 
         * The returned {@link Gtk.TreePath} must be freed with `gtk_tree_path_free()` when
         * you are done with it.
         */
        get_cursor(): [TreePath | null, TreeViewColumn | null];

        /**
         * Determines the destination row for a given position.  `drag_x` and
         * `drag_y` are expected to be in widget coordinates.  This function is only
         * meaningful if `tree_view` is realized.  Therefore this function will always
         * return `false` if `tree_view` is not realized or does not have a model.
         * @param drag_x the position to determine the destination row for
         * @param drag_y the position to determine the destination row for
         * @returns whether there is a row at the given position, `true` if this is indeed the case.
         */
        get_dest_row_at_pos(drag_x: number, drag_y: number): [boolean, TreePath | null, TreeViewDropPosition | null];

        /**
         * Gets information about the row that is highlighted for feedback.
         */
        get_drag_dest_row(): [TreePath | null, TreeViewDropPosition | null];

        /**
         * Returns whether or not the tree allows to start interactive searching
         * by typing in text.
         * @returns whether or not to let the user search interactively
         */
        get_enable_search(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns whether or not tree lines are drawn in `tree_view`.
         * @returns `true` if tree lines are drawn in `tree_view`, `false` otherwise.
         */
        get_enable_tree_lines(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the column that is the current expander column.
         * This column has the expander arrow drawn next to it.
         * @returns The expander column.
         */
        get_expander_column(): TreeViewColumn;

        /**
         * Returns whether fixed height mode is turned on for `tree_view`.
         * @returns `true` if `tree_view` is in fixed height mode
         */
        get_fixed_height_mode(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns which grid lines are enabled in `tree_view`.
         * @returns a {@link Gtk.TreeViewGridLines} value indicating which grid lines are enabled.
         */
        get_grid_lines(): TreeViewGridLines;

        /**
         * Gets the {@link Gtk.Adjustment} currently being used for the horizontal aspect.
         * @returns A {@link Gtk.Adjustment} object, or `null`     if none is currently being used.
         */
        get_hadjustment(): Adjustment;

        /**
         * Returns whether all header columns are clickable.
         * @returns `true` if all header columns are clickable, otherwise `false`
         */
        get_headers_clickable(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns `true` if the headers on the `tree_view` are visible.
         * @returns Whether the headers are visible or not.
         */
        get_headers_visible(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns whether hover expansion mode is turned on for `tree_view`.
         * @returns `true` if `tree_view` is in hover expansion mode
         */
        get_hover_expand(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns whether hover selection mode is turned on for `tree_view`.
         * @returns `true` if `tree_view` is in hover selection mode
         */
        get_hover_selection(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the amount, in pixels, of extra indentation for child levels
         * in `tree_view`.
         * @returns the amount of extra indentation for child levels in `tree_view`.  A return value of 0 means that this feature is disabled.
         */
        get_level_indentation(): number;

        /**
         * Returns the model the {@link Gtk.TreeView} is based on.  Returns `null` if the
         * model is unset.
         * @returns A {@link Gtk.TreeModel}, or `null` if none is currently being used.
         */
        get_model(): TreeModel | null;

        /**
         * Queries the number of columns in the given `tree_view`.
         * @returns The number of columns in the `tree_view`
         */
        get_n_columns(): number;

        /**
         * Finds the path at the point (`x`, `y`), relative to bin_window coordinates
         * (please see `gtk_tree_view_get_bin_window()`).
         * That is, `x` and `y` are relative to an events coordinates. `x` and `y` must
         * come from an event on the `tree_view` only where `event->window ==
         * gtk_tree_view_get_bin_window ()`. It is primarily for
         * things like popup menus. If `path` is non-`null`, then it will be filled
         * with the {@link Gtk.TreePath} at that point.  This path should be freed with
         * `gtk_tree_path_free()`.  If `column` is non-`null`, then it will be filled
         * with the column at that point.  `cell_x` and `cell_y` return the coordinates
         * relative to the cell background (i.e. the `background_area` passed to
         * `gtk_cell_renderer_render()`).  This function is only meaningful if
         * `tree_view` is realized.  Therefore this function will always return `false`
         * if `tree_view` is not realized or does not have a model.
         * 
         * For converting widget coordinates (eg. the ones you get from
         * GtkWidget::query-tooltip), please see
         * `gtk_tree_view_convert_widget_to_bin_window_coords()`.
         * @param x The x position to be identified (relative to bin_window).
         * @param y The y position to be identified (relative to bin_window).
         * @returns `true` if a row exists at that coordinate.
         */
        get_path_at_pos(x: number, y: number): [boolean, TreePath | null, TreeViewColumn | null, number, number];

        /**
         * Retrieves whether the user can reorder the tree via drag-and-drop. See
         * `gtk_tree_view_set_reorderable()`.
         * @returns `true` if the tree can be reordered.
         */
        get_reorderable(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns whether rubber banding is turned on for `tree_view`.  If the
         * selection mode is #GTK_SELECTION_MULTIPLE, rubber banding will allow the
         * user to select multiple rows by dragging the mouse.
         * @returns `true` if rubber banding in `tree_view` is enabled.
         */
        get_rubber_banding(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the setting set by `gtk_tree_view_set_rules_hint()`.
         * @returns `true` if the hint is set
         */
        get_rules_hint(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the column searched on by the interactive search code.
         * @returns the column the interactive search code searches in.
         */
        get_search_column(): number;

        /**
         * Returns the {@link Gtk.Entry} which is currently in use as interactive search
         * entry for `tree_view`.  In case the built-in entry is being used, `null`
         * will be returned.
         * @returns the entry currently in use as search entry.
         */
        get_search_entry(): Entry;

        /**
         * Gets the {@link Gtk.TreeSelection} associated with `tree_view`.
         * @returns A {@link Gtk.TreeSelection} object.
         */
        get_selection(): TreeSelection;

        /**
         * Returns whether or not expanders are drawn in `tree_view`.
         * @returns `true` if expanders are drawn in `tree_view`, `false` otherwise.
         */
        get_show_expanders(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the column of `tree_view`’s model which is being used for
         * displaying tooltips on `tree_view`’s rows.
         * @returns the index of the tooltip column that is currently being used, or -1 if this is disabled.
         */
        get_tooltip_column(): number;

        /**
         * This function is supposed to be used in a {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.query_tooltip | Gtk.Widget::query-tooltip}
         * signal handler for {@link Gtk.TreeView}.  The `x`, `y` and `keyboard_tip` values
         * which are received in the signal handler, should be passed to this
         * function without modification.
         * 
         * The return value indicates whether there is a tree view row at the given
         * coordinates (`true`) or not (`false`) for mouse tooltips.  For keyboard
         * tooltips the row returned will be the cursor row.  When `true`, then any of
         * `model`, `path` and `iter` which have been provided will be set to point to
         * that row and the corresponding model.  `x` and `y` will always be converted
         * to be relative to `tree_view`’s bin_window if `keyboard_tooltip` is `false`.
         * @param x the x coordinate (relative to widget coordinates)
         * @param y the y coordinate (relative to widget coordinates)
         * @param keyboard_tip whether this is a keyboard tooltip or not
         * @returns whether or not the given tooltip context points to a row.
         */
        get_tooltip_context(x: number, y: number, keyboard_tip: boolean): [boolean, number, number, TreeModel | null, TreePath | null, TreeIter | null];

        /**
         * Gets the {@link Gtk.Adjustment} currently being used for the vertical aspect.
         * @returns A {@link Gtk.Adjustment} object, or `null`     if none is currently being used.
         */
        get_vadjustment(): Adjustment;

        /**
         * Sets `start_path` and `end_path` to be the first and last visible path.
         * Note that there may be invisible paths in between.
         * 
         * The paths should be freed with `gtk_tree_path_free()` after use.
         * @returns `true`, if valid paths were placed in `start_path` and `end_path`.
         */
        get_visible_range(): [boolean, TreePath | null, TreePath | null];

        /**
         * Fills `visible_rect` with the currently-visible region of the
         * buffer, in tree coordinates. Convert to bin_window coordinates with
         * `gtk_tree_view_convert_tree_to_bin_window_coords()`.
         * Tree coordinates start at 0,0 for row 0 of the tree, and cover the entire
         * scrollable area of the tree.
         */
        get_visible_rect(): Gdk.Rectangle;

        /**
         * This inserts the `column` into the `tree_view` at `position`.  If `position` is
         * -1, then the column is inserted at the end. If `tree_view` has
         * “fixed_height” mode enabled, then `column` must have its “sizing” property
         * set to be GTK_TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_FIXED.
         * @param column The {@link Gtk.TreeViewColumn} to be inserted.
         * @param position The position to insert `column` in.
         * @returns The number of columns in `tree_view` after insertion.
         */
        insert_column(column: TreeViewColumn, position: number): number;

        /**
         * Convenience function that inserts a new column into the {@link Gtk.TreeView}
         * with the given cell renderer and a {@link Gtk.TreeCellDataFunc} to set cell renderer
         * attributes (normally using data from the model). See also
         * `gtk_tree_view_column_set_cell_data_func()`, `gtk_tree_view_column_pack_start()`.
         * If `tree_view` has “fixed_height” mode enabled, then the new column will have its
         * “sizing” property set to be GTK_TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_FIXED.
         * @param position Position to insert, -1 for append
         * @param title column title
         * @param cell cell renderer for column
         * @param func function to set attributes of cell renderer
         * @returns number of columns in the tree view post-insert
         */
        insert_column_with_data_func(position: number, title: string, cell: CellRenderer, func: TreeCellDataFunc): number;

        /**
         * Determine whether the point (`x`, `y`) in `tree_view` is blank, that is no
         * cell content nor an expander arrow is drawn at the location. If so, the
         * location can be considered as the background. You might wish to take
         * special action on clicks on the background, such as clearing a current
         * selection, having a custom context menu or starting rubber banding.
         * 
         * The `x` and `y` coordinate that are provided must be relative to bin_window
         * coordinates.  That is, `x` and `y` must come from an event on `tree_view`
         * where `event->window == gtk_tree_view_get_bin_window ()`.
         * 
         * For converting widget coordinates (eg. the ones you get from
         * GtkWidget::query-tooltip), please see
         * `gtk_tree_view_convert_widget_to_bin_window_coords()`.
         * 
         * The `path`, `column`, `cell_x` and `cell_y` arguments will be filled in
         * likewise as for `gtk_tree_view_get_path_at_pos()`.  Please see
         * `gtk_tree_view_get_path_at_pos()` for more information.
         * @param x The x position to be identified (relative to bin_window)
         * @param y The y position to be identified (relative to bin_window)
         * @returns `true` if the area at the given coordinates is blank, `false` otherwise.
         */
        is_blank_at_pos(x: number, y: number): [boolean, TreePath | null, TreeViewColumn | null, number, number];

        /**
         * Returns whether a rubber banding operation is currently being done
         * in `tree_view`.
         * @returns `true` if a rubber banding operation is currently being done in `tree_view`.
         */
        is_rubber_banding_active(): boolean;

        /**
         * Calls `func` on all expanded rows.
         * @param func A function to be called
         */
        map_expanded_rows(func: TreeViewMappingFunc): void;

        /**
         * Moves `column` to be after to `base_column`.  If `base_column` is `null`, then
         * `column` is placed in the first position.
         * @param column The {@link Gtk.TreeViewColumn} to be moved.
         * @param base_column The {@link Gtk.TreeViewColumn} to be moved relative to, or `null`.
         */
        move_column_after(column: TreeViewColumn, base_column: TreeViewColumn | null): void;

        /**
         * Removes `column` from `tree_view`.
         * @param column The {@link Gtk.TreeViewColumn} to remove.
         * @returns The number of columns in `tree_view` after removing.
         */
        remove_column(column: TreeViewColumn): number;

        /**
         * Activates the cell determined by `path` and `column`.
         * @param path The {@link Gtk.TreePath} to be activated.
         * @param column The {@link Gtk.TreeViewColumn} to be activated.
         */
        row_activated(path: TreePath, column: TreeViewColumn): void;

        /**
         * Returns `true` if the node pointed to by `path` is expanded in `tree_view`.
         * @param path A {@link Gtk.TreePath} to test expansion state.
         * @returns `true` if #path is expanded.
         */
        row_expanded(path: TreePath): boolean;

        /**
         * Moves the alignments of `tree_view` to the position specified by `column` and
         * `path`.  If `column` is `null`, then no horizontal scrolling occurs.  Likewise,
         * if `path` is `null` no vertical scrolling occurs.  At a minimum, one of `column`
         * or `path` need to be non-`null`.  `row_align` determines where the row is
         * placed, and `col_align` determines where `column` is placed.  Both are expected
         * to be between 0.0 and 1.0. 0.0 means left/top alignment, 1.0 means
         * right/bottom alignment, 0.5 means center.
         * 
         * If `use_align` is `false`, then the alignment arguments are ignored, and the
         * tree does the minimum amount of work to scroll the cell onto the screen.
         * This means that the cell will be scrolled to the edge closest to its current
         * position.  If the cell is currently visible on the screen, nothing is done.
         * 
         * This function only works if the model is set, and `path` is a valid row on the
         * model.  If the model changes before the `tree_view` is realized, the centered
         * path will be modified to reflect this change.
         * @param path The path of the row to move to, or `null`.
         * @param column The {@link Gtk.TreeViewColumn} to move horizontally to, or `null`.
         * @param use_align whether to use alignment arguments, or `false`.
         * @param row_align The vertical alignment of the row specified by `path`.
         * @param col_align The horizontal alignment of the column specified by `column`.
         */
        scroll_to_cell(path: TreePath | null, column: TreeViewColumn | null, use_align: boolean, row_align: number, col_align: number): void;

        /**
         * Scrolls the tree view such that the top-left corner of the visible
         * area is `tree_x`, `tree_y`, where `tree_x` and `tree_y` are specified
         * in tree coordinates.  The `tree_view` must be realized before
         * this function is called.  If it isn't, you probably want to be
         * using `gtk_tree_view_scroll_to_cell()`.
         * 
         * If either `tree_x` or `tree_y` are -1, then that direction isn’t scrolled.
         * @param tree_x X coordinate of new top-left pixel of visible area, or -1
         * @param tree_y Y coordinate of new top-left pixel of visible area, or -1
         */
        scroll_to_point(tree_x: number, tree_y: number): void;

        /**
         * Cause the {@link Gtk.TreeView.SignalSignatures.row_activated | Gtk.TreeView::row-activated} signal to be emitted
         * on a single click instead of a double click.
         * @param single `true` to emit row-activated on a single click
         */
        set_activate_on_single_click(single: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets a user function for determining where a column may be dropped when
         * dragged.  This function is called on every column pair in turn at the
         * beginning of a column drag to determine where a drop can take place.  The
         * arguments passed to `func` are: the `tree_view`, the {@link Gtk.TreeViewColumn} being
         * dragged, the two {@link Gtk.TreeViewColumn} s determining the drop spot, and
         * `user_data`.  If either of the {@link Gtk.TreeViewColumn} arguments for the drop spot
         * are `null`, then they indicate an edge.  If `func` is set to be `null`, then
         * `tree_view` reverts to the default behavior of allowing all columns to be
         * dropped everywhere.
         * @param func A function to determine which columns are reorderable, or `null`.
         */
        set_column_drag_function(func: TreeViewColumnDropFunc | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the current keyboard focus to be at `path`, and selects it.  This is
         * useful when you want to focus the user’s attention on a particular row.  If
         * `focus_column` is not `null`, then focus is given to the column specified by
         * it. Additionally, if `focus_column` is specified, and `start_editing` is
         * `true`, then editing should be started in the specified cell.
         * This function is often followed by `gtk_widget_grab_focus` (`tree_view`)
         * in order to give keyboard focus to the widget.  Please note that editing
         * can only happen when the widget is realized.
         * 
         * If `path` is invalid for `model`, the current cursor (if any) will be unset
         * and the function will return without failing.
         * @param path A {@link Gtk.TreePath}
         * @param focus_column A {@link Gtk.TreeViewColumn}, or `null`
         * @param start_editing `true` if the specified cell should start being edited.
         */
        set_cursor(path: TreePath, focus_column: TreeViewColumn | null, start_editing: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the current keyboard focus to be at `path`, and selects it.  This is
         * useful when you want to focus the user’s attention on a particular row.  If
         * `focus_column` is not `null`, then focus is given to the column specified by
         * it. If `focus_column` and `focus_cell` are not `null`, and `focus_column`
         * contains 2 or more editable or activatable cells, then focus is given to
         * the cell specified by `focus_cell`. Additionally, if `focus_column` is
         * specified, and `start_editing` is `true`, then editing should be started in
         * the specified cell.  This function is often followed by
         * `gtk_widget_grab_focus` (`tree_view`) in order to give keyboard focus to the
         * widget.  Please note that editing can only happen when the widget is
         * realized.
         * 
         * If `path` is invalid for `model`, the current cursor (if any) will be unset
         * and the function will return without failing.
         * @param path A {@link Gtk.TreePath}
         * @param focus_column A {@link Gtk.TreeViewColumn}, or `null`
         * @param focus_cell A {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}, or `null`
         * @param start_editing `true` if the specified cell should start being edited.
         */
        set_cursor_on_cell(path: TreePath, focus_column: TreeViewColumn | null, focus_cell: CellRenderer | null, start_editing: boolean): void;

        /**
         * This function should almost never be used.  It is meant for private use by
         * ATK for determining the number of visible children that are removed when the
         * user collapses a row, or a row is deleted.
         * @param func Function to be called when a view row is destroyed, or `null`
         */
        set_destroy_count_func(func: TreeDestroyCountFunc | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the row that is highlighted for feedback.
         * If `path` is `null`, an existing highlight is removed.
         * @param path The path of the row to highlight, or `null`
         * @param pos Specifies whether to drop before, after or into the row
         */
        set_drag_dest_row(path: TreePath | null, pos: TreeViewDropPosition): void;

        /**
         * If `enable_search` is set, then the user can type in text to search through
         * the tree interactively (this is sometimes called "typeahead find").
         * 
         * Note that even if this is `false`, the user can still initiate a search
         * using the “start-interactive-search” key binding.
         * @param enable_search `true`, if the user can search interactively
         */
        set_enable_search(enable_search: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether to draw lines interconnecting the expanders in `tree_view`.
         * This does not have any visible effects for lists.
         * @param enabled `true` to enable tree line drawing, `false` otherwise.
         */
        set_enable_tree_lines(enabled: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the column to draw the expander arrow at. It must be in `tree_view`.
         * If `column` is `null`, then the expander arrow is always at the first
         * visible column.
         * 
         * If you do not want expander arrow to appear in your tree, set the
         * expander column to a hidden column.
         * @param column `null`, or the column to draw the expander arrow at.
         */
        set_expander_column(column: TreeViewColumn | null): void;

        /**
         * Enables or disables the fixed height mode of `tree_view`.
         * Fixed height mode speeds up {@link Gtk.TreeView} by assuming that all
         * rows have the same height.
         * Only enable this option if all rows are the same height and all
         * columns are of type {@link Gtk.TreeViewColumnSizing.FIXED}.
         * @param enable `true` to enable fixed height mode
         */
        set_fixed_height_mode(enable: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets which grid lines to draw in `tree_view`.
         * @param grid_lines a {@link Gtk.TreeViewGridLines} value indicating which grid lines to enable.
         */
        set_grid_lines(grid_lines: TreeViewGridLines): void;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.Adjustment} for the current horizontal aspect.
         * @param adjustment The {@link Gtk.Adjustment} to set, or `null`
         */
        set_hadjustment(adjustment: Adjustment | null): void;

        /**
         * Allow the column title buttons to be clicked.
         * @param setting `true` if the columns are clickable.
         */
        set_headers_clickable(setting: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the visibility state of the headers.
         * @param headers_visible `true` if the headers are visible
         */
        set_headers_visible(headers_visible: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Enables or disables the hover expansion mode of `tree_view`.
         * Hover expansion makes rows expand or collapse if the pointer
         * moves over them.
         * @param expand `true` to enable hover selection mode
         */
        set_hover_expand(expand: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Enables or disables the hover selection mode of `tree_view`.
         * Hover selection makes the selected row follow the pointer.
         * Currently, this works only for the selection modes
         * {@link Gtk.SelectionMode.SINGLE} and {@link Gtk.SelectionMode.BROWSE}.
         * @param hover `true` to enable hover selection mode
         */
        set_hover_selection(hover: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the amount of extra indentation for child levels to use in `tree_view`
         * in addition to the default indentation.  The value should be specified in
         * pixels, a value of 0 disables this feature and in this case only the default
         * indentation will be used.
         * This does not have any visible effects for lists.
         * @param indentation the amount, in pixels, of extra indentation in `tree_view`.
         */
        set_level_indentation(indentation: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the model for a {@link Gtk.TreeView}.  If the `tree_view` already has a model
         * set, it will remove it before setting the new model.  If `model` is `null`,
         * then it will unset the old model.
         * @param model The model.
         */
        set_model(model: TreeModel | null): void;

        /**
         * This function is a convenience function to allow you to reorder
         * models that support the {@link Gtk.TreeDragSourceIface} and the
         * {@link Gtk.TreeDragDestIface}.  Both {@link Gtk.TreeStore} and {@link Gtk.ListStore} support
         * these.  If `reorderable` is `true`, then the user can reorder the
         * model by dragging and dropping rows. The developer can listen to
         * these changes by connecting to the model’s {@link Gtk.TreeModel.SignalSignatures.row_inserted | Gtk.TreeModel::row-inserted}
         * and {@link Gtk.TreeModel.SignalSignatures.row_deleted | Gtk.TreeModel::row-deleted} signals. The reordering is implemented
         * by setting up the tree view as a drag source and destination.
         * Therefore, drag and drop can not be used in a reorderable view for any
         * other purpose.
         * 
         * This function does not give you any degree of control over the order -- any
         * reordering is allowed.  If more control is needed, you should probably
         * handle drag and drop manually.
         * @param reorderable `true`, if the tree can be reordered.
         */
        set_reorderable(reorderable: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the row separator function, which is used to determine
         * whether a row should be drawn as a separator. If the row separator
         * function is `null`, no separators are drawn. This is the default value.
         * @param func a {@link Gtk.TreeViewRowSeparatorFunc}
         */
        set_row_separator_func(func: TreeViewRowSeparatorFunc | null): void;

        /**
         * Enables or disables rubber banding in `tree_view`.  If the selection mode
         * is #GTK_SELECTION_MULTIPLE, rubber banding will allow the user to select
         * multiple rows by dragging the mouse.
         * @param enable `true` to enable rubber banding
         */
        set_rubber_banding(enable: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets a hint for the theme to draw even/odd rows in the `tree_view`
         * with different colors, also known as "zebra striping".
         * 
         * This function tells the GTK+ theme that the user interface for your
         * application requires users to read across tree rows and associate
         * cells with one another.
         * 
         * Do not use it just because you prefer the appearance of the ruled
         * tree; that’s a question for the theme. Some themes will draw tree
         * rows in alternating colors even when rules are turned off, and
         * users who prefer that appearance all the time can choose those
         * themes. You should call this function only as a semantic hint to
         * the theme engine that your tree makes alternating colors useful
         * from a functional standpoint (since it has lots of columns,
         * generally).
         * @param setting `true` if the tree requires reading across rows
         */
        set_rules_hint(setting: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets `column` as the column where the interactive search code should
         * search in for the current model.
         * 
         * If the search column is set, users can use the “start-interactive-search”
         * key binding to bring up search popup. The enable-search property controls
         * whether simply typing text will also start an interactive search.
         * 
         * Note that `column` refers to a column of the current model. The search
         * column is reset to -1 when the model is changed.
         * @param column the column of the model to search in, or -1 to disable searching
         */
        set_search_column(column: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the entry which the interactive search code will use for this
         * `tree_view`.  This is useful when you want to provide a search entry
         * in our interface at all time at a fixed position.  Passing `null` for
         * `entry` will make the interactive search code use the built-in popup
         * entry again.
         * @param entry the entry the interactive search code of `tree_view` should use or `null`
         */
        set_search_entry(entry: Entry | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the compare function for the interactive search capabilities; note
         * that somewhat like `strcmp()` returning 0 for equality
         * {@link Gtk.TreeViewSearchEqualFunc} returns `false` on matches.
         * @param search_equal_func the compare function to use during the search
         */
        set_search_equal_func(search_equal_func: TreeViewSearchEqualFunc): void;

        /**
         * Sets the function to use when positioning the search dialog.
         * @param func the function to use to position the search dialog, or `null`    to use the default search position function
         */
        set_search_position_func(func: TreeViewSearchPositionFunc | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether to draw and enable expanders and indent child rows in
         * `tree_view`.  When disabled there will be no expanders visible in trees
         * and there will be no way to expand and collapse rows by default.  Also
         * note that hiding the expanders will disable the default indentation.  You
         * can set a custom indentation in this case using
         * `gtk_tree_view_set_level_indentation()`.
         * This does not have any visible effects for lists.
         * @param enabled `true` to enable expander drawing, `false` otherwise.
         */
        set_show_expanders(enabled: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the tip area of `tooltip` to the area `path`, `column` and `cell` have
         * in common.  For example if `path` is `null` and `column` is set, the tip
         * area will be set to the full area covered by `column`.  See also
         * `gtk_tooltip_set_tip_area()`.
         * 
         * Note that if `path` is not specified and `cell` is set and part of a column
         * containing the expander, the tooltip might not show and hide at the correct
         * position.  In such cases `path` must be set to the current node under the
         * mouse cursor for this function to operate correctly.
         * 
         * See also `gtk_tree_view_set_tooltip_column()` for a simpler alternative.
         * @param tooltip a {@link Gtk.Tooltip}
         * @param path a {@link Gtk.TreePath} or `null`
         * @param column a {@link Gtk.TreeViewColumn} or `null`
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} or `null`
         */
        set_tooltip_cell(tooltip: Tooltip, path: TreePath | null, column: TreeViewColumn | null, cell: CellRenderer | null): void;

        /**
         * If you only plan to have simple (text-only) tooltips on full rows, you
         * can use this function to have {@link Gtk.TreeView} handle these automatically
         * for you. `column` should be set to the column in `tree_view`’s model
         * containing the tooltip texts, or -1 to disable this feature.
         * 
         * When enabled, {@link Gtk.Widget.has_tooltip} will be set to `true` and
         * `tree_view` will connect a {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.query_tooltip | Gtk.Widget::query-tooltip} signal handler.
         * 
         * Note that the signal handler sets the text with `gtk_tooltip_set_markup()`,
         * so &, <, etc have to be escaped in the text.
         * @param column an integer, which is a valid column number for `tree_view`’s model
         */
        set_tooltip_column(column: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the tip area of `tooltip` to be the area covered by the row at `path`.
         * See also `gtk_tree_view_set_tooltip_column()` for a simpler alternative.
         * See also `gtk_tooltip_set_tip_area()`.
         * @param tooltip a {@link Gtk.Tooltip}
         * @param path a {@link Gtk.TreePath}
         */
        set_tooltip_row(tooltip: Tooltip, path: TreePath): void;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.Adjustment} for the current vertical aspect.
         * @param adjustment The {@link Gtk.Adjustment} to set, or `null`
         */
        set_vadjustment(adjustment: Adjustment | null): void;

        /**
         * Undoes the effect of
         * `gtk_tree_view_enable_model_drag_dest()`. Calling this method sets
         * {@link Gtk.TreeView.reorderable} to `false`.
         */
        unset_rows_drag_dest(): void;

        /**
         * Undoes the effect of
         * `gtk_tree_view_enable_model_drag_source()`. Calling this method sets
         * {@link Gtk.TreeView.reorderable} to `false`.
         */
        unset_rows_drag_source(): void;

        /**
         * Horizontal {@link Gtk.Adjustment} of the scrollable widget. This adjustment is
         * shared between the scrollable widget and its parent.
         * @since 3.0
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Scrollable
         */
        get hadjustment(): Adjustment;
        set hadjustment(val: Adjustment);

        /**
         * Determines whether horizontal scrolling should start once the scrollable
         * widget is allocated less than its minimum width or less than its natural width.
         * @since 3.0
         * @default Gtk.ScrollablePolicy.MINIMUM
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Scrollable
         */
        get hscroll_policy(): ScrollablePolicy;
        set hscroll_policy(val: ScrollablePolicy);

        /**
         * Determines whether horizontal scrolling should start once the scrollable
         * widget is allocated less than its minimum width or less than its natural width.
         * @since 3.0
         * @default Gtk.ScrollablePolicy.MINIMUM
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Scrollable
         */
        get hscrollPolicy(): ScrollablePolicy;
        set hscrollPolicy(val: ScrollablePolicy);

        /**
         * Verical {@link Gtk.Adjustment} of the scrollable widget. This adjustment is shared
         * between the scrollable widget and its parent.
         * @since 3.0
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Scrollable
         */
        get vadjustment(): Adjustment;
        set vadjustment(val: Adjustment);

        /**
         * Determines whether vertical scrolling should start once the scrollable
         * widget is allocated less than its minimum height or less than its natural height.
         * @since 3.0
         * @default Gtk.ScrollablePolicy.MINIMUM
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Scrollable
         */
        get vscroll_policy(): ScrollablePolicy;
        set vscroll_policy(val: ScrollablePolicy);

        /**
         * Determines whether vertical scrolling should start once the scrollable
         * widget is allocated less than its minimum height or less than its natural height.
         * @since 3.0
         * @default Gtk.ScrollablePolicy.MINIMUM
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Scrollable
         */
        get vscrollPolicy(): ScrollablePolicy;
        set vscrollPolicy(val: ScrollablePolicy);

        /**
         * Returns the size of a non-scrolling border around the
         * outside of the scrollable. An example for this would
         * be treeview headers. GTK+ can use this information to
         * display overlayed graphics, like the overshoot indication,
         * at the right position.
         * @returns `true` if `border` has been set
         */
        get_border(): [boolean, Border];

        /**
         * Gets the horizontal {@link Gtk.ScrollablePolicy}.
         * @returns The horizontal {@link Gtk.ScrollablePolicy}.
         */
        get_hscroll_policy(): ScrollablePolicy;

        /**
         * Gets the vertical {@link Gtk.ScrollablePolicy}.
         * @returns The vertical {@link Gtk.ScrollablePolicy}.
         */
        get_vscroll_policy(): ScrollablePolicy;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.ScrollablePolicy} to determine whether
         * horizontal scrolling should start below the minimum width or
         * below the natural width.
         * @param policy the horizontal {@link Gtk.ScrollablePolicy}
         */
        set_hscroll_policy(policy: ScrollablePolicy): void;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.ScrollablePolicy} to determine whether
         * vertical scrolling should start below the minimum height or
         * below the natural height.
         * @param policy the vertical {@link Gtk.ScrollablePolicy}
         */
        set_vscroll_policy(policy: ScrollablePolicy): void;

        /**
         * Returns the size of a non-scrolling border around the
         * outside of the scrollable. An example for this would
         * be treeview headers. GTK+ can use this information to
         * display overlayed graphics, like the overshoot indication,
         * at the right position.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_border(): [boolean, Border];
    }


    namespace TreeViewAccessible {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends ContainerAccessible.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-layer": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-mdi-zorder": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-help-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-hypertext-nlinks": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption-object": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-summary": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends ContainerAccessible.ConstructorProps, Atk.Component.ConstructorProps, Atk.Selection.ConstructorProps, Atk.Table.ConstructorProps, CellAccessibleParent.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class TreeViewAccessible extends ContainerAccessible implements Atk.Component, Atk.Selection, Atk.Table, CellAccessibleParent {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<TreeViewAccessible>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: TreeViewAccessible.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<TreeViewAccessible.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof TreeViewAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, TreeViewAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof TreeViewAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, TreeViewAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof TreeViewAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<TreeViewAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        /**
         * Adds the specified accessible child of the object to the
         * object's selection.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the child index.
         * @returns TRUE if success, FALSE otherwise.
         */
        add_selection(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Clears the selection in the object so that no children in the object
         * are selected.
         * @returns TRUE if success, FALSE otherwise.
         */
        clear_selection(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the number of accessible children currently selected.
         * Note: callers should not rely on `null` or on a zero value for
         * indication of whether AtkSelectionIface is implemented, they should
         * use type checking/interface checking macros or the
         * `atk_get_accessible_value()` convenience method.
         * @returns a gint representing the number of items selected, or 0 if `selection` does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_selection_count(): number;

        /**
         * Determines if the current child of this object is selected
         * Note: callers should not rely on `null` or on a zero value for
         * indication of whether AtkSelectionIface is implemented, they should
         * use type checking/interface checking macros or the
         * `atk_get_accessible_value()` convenience method.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the child index.
         * @returns a gboolean representing the specified child is selected, or 0 if `selection` does not implement this interface.
         */
        is_child_selected(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets a reference to the accessible object representing the specified
         * selected child of the object.
         * Note: callers should not rely on `null` or on a zero value for
         * indication of whether AtkSelectionIface is implemented, they should
         * use type checking/interface checking macros or the
         * `atk_get_accessible_value()` convenience method.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the index in the selection set.  (e.g. the ith selection as opposed to the ith child).
         * @returns an {@link Atk.Object} representing the selected accessible, or `null` if `selection` does not implement this interface.
         */
        ref_selection(i: number): Atk.Object | null;

        /**
         * Removes the specified child of the object from the object's selection.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the index in the selection set.  (e.g. the ith selection as opposed to the ith child).
         * @returns TRUE if success, FALSE otherwise.
         */
        remove_selection(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Causes every child of the object to be selected if the object
         * supports multiple selections.
         * @returns TRUE if success, FALSE otherwise.
         */
        select_all_selection(): boolean;

        /**
         * Adds the specified accessible child of the object to the
         * object's selection.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the child index.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add_selection(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Clears the selection in the object so that no children in the object
         * are selected.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_clear_selection(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the number of accessible children currently selected.
         * Note: callers should not rely on `null` or on a zero value for
         * indication of whether AtkSelectionIface is implemented, they should
         * use type checking/interface checking macros or the
         * `atk_get_accessible_value()` convenience method.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_selection_count(): number;

        /**
         * Determines if the current child of this object is selected
         * Note: callers should not rely on `null` or on a zero value for
         * indication of whether AtkSelectionIface is implemented, they should
         * use type checking/interface checking macros or the
         * `atk_get_accessible_value()` convenience method.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the child index.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_is_child_selected(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets a reference to the accessible object representing the specified
         * selected child of the object.
         * Note: callers should not rely on `null` or on a zero value for
         * indication of whether AtkSelectionIface is implemented, they should
         * use type checking/interface checking macros or the
         * `atk_get_accessible_value()` convenience method.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the index in the selection set.  (e.g. the ith selection as opposed to the ith child).
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_ref_selection(i: number): Atk.Object | null;

        /**
         * Removes the specified child of the object from the object's selection.
         * @param i a `gint` specifying the index in the selection set.  (e.g. the ith selection as opposed to the ith child).
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_remove_selection(i: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Causes every child of the object to be selected if the object
         * supports multiple selections.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_select_all_selection(): boolean;

        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_selection_changed(): void;

        /**
         * Adds the specified `column` to the selection.
         * @param column a `gint` representing a column in `table`
         * @returns a gboolean representing if the column was successfully added to the selection, or 0 if value does not implement this interface.
         */
        add_column_selection(column: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Adds the specified `row` to the selection.
         * @param row a `gint` representing a row in `table`
         * @returns a gboolean representing if row was successfully added to selection, or 0 if value does not implement this interface.
         */
        add_row_selection(row: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the caption for the `table`.
         * @returns a AtkObject* representing the table caption, or `null` if value does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_caption(): Atk.Object | null;

        /**
         * Gets a `gint` representing the column at the specified `index_`.
         * @param index_ a `gint` representing an index in `table`
         * @returns a gint representing the column at the specified index, or -1 if the table does not implement this method.
         */
        get_column_at_index(index_: number): number;

        /**
         * Gets the description text of the specified `column` in the table
         * @param column a `gint` representing a column in `table`
         * @returns a gchar* representing the column description, or `null` if value does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_column_description(column: number): string;

        /**
         * Gets the number of columns occupied by the accessible object
         * at the specified `row` and `column` in the `table`.
         * @param row a `gint` representing a row in `table`
         * @param column a `gint` representing a column in `table`
         * @returns a gint representing the column extent at specified position, or 0 if value does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_column_extent_at(row: number, column: number): number;

        /**
         * Gets the column header of a specified column in an accessible table.
         * @param column a `gint` representing a column in the table
         * @returns a AtkObject* representing the specified column header, or `null` if value does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_column_header(column: number): Atk.Object | null;

        /**
         * Gets a `gint` representing the index at the specified `row` and
         * `column`.
         * @param row a `gint` representing a row in `table`
         * @param column a `gint` representing a column in `table`
         * @returns a `gint` representing the index at specified position. The value -1 is returned if the object at row,column is not a child of table or table does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_index_at(row: number, column: number): number;

        /**
         * Gets the number of columns in the table.
         * @returns a gint representing the number of columns, or 0 if value does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_n_columns(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the number of rows in the table.
         * @returns a gint representing the number of rows, or 0 if value does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_n_rows(): number;

        /**
         * Gets a `gint` representing the row at the specified `index_`.
         * @param index_ a `gint` representing an index in `table`
         * @returns a gint representing the row at the specified index, or -1 if the table does not implement this method.
         */
        get_row_at_index(index_: number): number;

        /**
         * Gets the description text of the specified row in the table
         * @param row a `gint` representing a row in `table`
         * @returns a gchar* representing the row description, or `null` if value does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_row_description(row: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the number of rows occupied by the accessible object
         * at a specified `row` and `column` in the `table`.
         * @param row a `gint` representing a row in `table`
         * @param column a `gint` representing a column in `table`
         * @returns a gint representing the row extent at specified position, or 0 if value does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_row_extent_at(row: number, column: number): number;

        /**
         * Gets the row header of a specified row in an accessible table.
         * @param row a `gint` representing a row in the table
         * @returns a AtkObject* representing the specified row header, or `null` if value does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_row_header(row: number): Atk.Object | null;

        /**
         * Gets the selected columns of the table by initializing **selected with
         * the selected column numbers. This array should be freed by the caller.
         * @param selected a `gint`** that is to contain the selected columns numbers
         * @returns a gint representing the number of selected columns, or %0 if value does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_selected_columns(selected: number): number;

        /**
         * Gets the selected rows of the table by initializing **selected with
         * the selected row numbers. This array should be freed by the caller.
         * @param selected a `gint`** that is to contain the selected row numbers
         * @returns a gint representing the number of selected rows, or zero if value does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_selected_rows(selected: number): number;

        /**
         * Gets the summary description of the table.
         * @returns a AtkObject* representing a summary description of the table, or zero if value does not implement this interface.
         */
        get_summary(): Atk.Object;

        /**
         * Gets a boolean value indicating whether the specified `column`
         * is selected
         * @param column a `gint` representing a column in `table`
         * @returns a gboolean representing if the column is selected, or 0 if value does not implement this interface.
         */
        is_column_selected(column: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets a boolean value indicating whether the specified `row`
         * is selected
         * @param row a `gint` representing a row in `table`
         * @returns a gboolean representing if the row is selected, or 0 if value does not implement this interface.
         */
        is_row_selected(row: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets a boolean value indicating whether the accessible object
         * at the specified `row` and `column` is selected
         * @param row a `gint` representing a row in `table`
         * @param column a `gint` representing a column in `table`
         * @returns a gboolean representing if the cell is selected, or 0 if value does not implement this interface.
         */
        is_selected(row: number, column: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Get a reference to the table cell at `row`, `column`. This cell
         * should implement the interface {@link Atk.TableCell}
         * @param row a `gint` representing a row in `table`
         * @param column a `gint` representing a column in `table`
         * @returns an {@link Atk.Object} representing the referred to accessible
         */
        ref_at(row: number, column: number): Atk.Object;

        /**
         * Adds the specified `column` to the selection.
         * @param column a `gint` representing a column in `table`
         * @returns a gboolean representing if the column was successfully removed from the selection, or 0 if value does not implement this interface.
         */
        remove_column_selection(column: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Removes the specified `row` from the selection.
         * @param row a `gint` representing a row in `table`
         * @returns a gboolean representing if the row was successfully removed from the selection, or 0 if value does not implement this interface.
         */
        remove_row_selection(row: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the caption for the table.
         * @param caption a {@link Atk.Object} representing the caption to set for `table`
         */
        set_caption(caption: Atk.Object): void;

        /**
         * Sets the description text for the specified `column` of the `table`.
         * @param column a `gint` representing a column in `table`
         * @param description a `gchar` representing the description text to set for the specified `column` of the `table`
         */
        set_column_description(column: number, description: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets the specified column header to `header`.
         * @param column a `gint` representing a column in `table`
         * @param header an {@link Atk.Table}
         */
        set_column_header(column: number, header: Atk.Object): void;

        /**
         * Sets the description text for the specified `row` of `table`.
         * @param row a `gint` representing a row in `table`
         * @param description a `gchar` representing the description text to set for the specified `row` of `table`
         */
        set_row_description(row: number, description: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets the specified row header to `header`.
         * @param row a `gint` representing a row in `table`
         * @param header an {@link Atk.Table}
         */
        set_row_header(row: number, header: Atk.Object): void;

        /**
         * Sets the summary description of the table.
         * @param accessible an {@link Atk.Object} representing the summary description to set for `table`
         */
        set_summary(accessible: Atk.Object): void;

        /**
         * Adds the specified `column` to the selection.
         * @param column a `gint` representing a column in `table`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add_column_selection(column: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Adds the specified `row` to the selection.
         * @param row a `gint` representing a row in `table`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add_row_selection(row: number): boolean;

        /**
         * @param column 
         * @param num_deleted 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_column_deleted(column: number, num_deleted: number): void;

        /**
         * @param column 
         * @param num_inserted 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_column_inserted(column: number, num_inserted: number): void;

        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_column_reordered(): void;

        /**
         * Gets the caption for the `table`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_caption(): Atk.Object | null;

        /**
         * Gets a `gint` representing the column at the specified `index_`.
         * @param index_ a `gint` representing an index in `table`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_column_at_index(index_: number): number;

        /**
         * Gets the description text of the specified `column` in the table
         * @param column a `gint` representing a column in `table`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_column_description(column: number): string;

        /**
         * Gets the number of columns occupied by the accessible object
         * at the specified `row` and `column` in the `table`.
         * @param row a `gint` representing a row in `table`
         * @param column a `gint` representing a column in `table`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_column_extent_at(row: number, column: number): number;

        /**
         * Gets the column header of a specified column in an accessible table.
         * @param column a `gint` representing a column in the table
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_column_header(column: number): Atk.Object | null;

        /**
         * Gets a `gint` representing the index at the specified `row` and
         * `column`.
         * @param row a `gint` representing a row in `table`
         * @param column a `gint` representing a column in `table`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_index_at(row: number, column: number): number;

        /**
         * Gets the number of columns in the table.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_n_columns(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the number of rows in the table.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_n_rows(): number;

        /**
         * Gets a `gint` representing the row at the specified `index_`.
         * @param index_ a `gint` representing an index in `table`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_row_at_index(index_: number): number;

        /**
         * Gets the description text of the specified row in the table
         * @param row a `gint` representing a row in `table`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_row_description(row: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the number of rows occupied by the accessible object
         * at a specified `row` and `column` in the `table`.
         * @param row a `gint` representing a row in `table`
         * @param column a `gint` representing a column in `table`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_row_extent_at(row: number, column: number): number;

        /**
         * Gets the row header of a specified row in an accessible table.
         * @param row a `gint` representing a row in the table
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_row_header(row: number): Atk.Object | null;

        /**
         * Gets the selected columns of the table by initializing **selected with
         * the selected column numbers. This array should be freed by the caller.
         * @param selected a `gint`** that is to contain the selected columns numbers
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_selected_columns(selected: number): number;

        /**
         * Gets the selected rows of the table by initializing **selected with
         * the selected row numbers. This array should be freed by the caller.
         * @param selected a `gint`** that is to contain the selected row numbers
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_selected_rows(selected: number): number;

        /**
         * Gets the summary description of the table.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_summary(): Atk.Object;

        /**
         * Gets a boolean value indicating whether the specified `column`
         * is selected
         * @param column a `gint` representing a column in `table`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_is_column_selected(column: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets a boolean value indicating whether the specified `row`
         * is selected
         * @param row a `gint` representing a row in `table`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_is_row_selected(row: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets a boolean value indicating whether the accessible object
         * at the specified `row` and `column` is selected
         * @param row a `gint` representing a row in `table`
         * @param column a `gint` representing a column in `table`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_is_selected(row: number, column: number): boolean;

        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_model_changed(): void;

        /**
         * Get a reference to the table cell at `row`, `column`. This cell
         * should implement the interface {@link Atk.TableCell}
         * @param row a `gint` representing a row in `table`
         * @param column a `gint` representing a column in `table`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_ref_at(row: number, column: number): Atk.Object;

        /**
         * Adds the specified `column` to the selection.
         * @param column a `gint` representing a column in `table`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_remove_column_selection(column: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Removes the specified `row` from the selection.
         * @param row a `gint` representing a row in `table`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_remove_row_selection(row: number): boolean;

        /**
         * @param row 
         * @param num_deleted 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_row_deleted(row: number, num_deleted: number): void;

        /**
         * @param row 
         * @param num_inserted 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_row_inserted(row: number, num_inserted: number): void;

        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_row_reordered(): void;

        /**
         * Sets the caption for the table.
         * @param caption a {@link Atk.Object} representing the caption to set for `table`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_caption(caption: Atk.Object): void;

        /**
         * Sets the description text for the specified `column` of the `table`.
         * @param column a `gint` representing a column in `table`
         * @param description a `gchar` representing the description text to set for the specified `column` of the `table`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_column_description(column: number, description: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets the specified column header to `header`.
         * @param column a `gint` representing a column in `table`
         * @param header an {@link Atk.Table}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_column_header(column: number, header: Atk.Object): void;

        /**
         * Sets the description text for the specified `row` of `table`.
         * @param row a `gint` representing a row in `table`
         * @param description a `gchar` representing the description text to set for the specified `row` of `table`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_row_description(row: number, description: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets the specified row header to `header`.
         * @param row a `gint` representing a row in `table`
         * @param header an {@link Atk.Table}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_row_header(row: number, header: Atk.Object): void;

        /**
         * Sets the summary description of the table.
         * @param accessible an {@link Atk.Object} representing the summary description to set for `table`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_summary(accessible: Atk.Object): void;

        /**
         * @param cell 
         */
        activate(cell: CellAccessible): void;

        /**
         * @param cell 
         */
        edit(cell: CellAccessible): void;

        /**
         * @param cell 
         */
        expand_collapse(cell: CellAccessible): void;

        /**
         * @param cell 
         */
        get_cell_area(cell: CellAccessible): Gdk.Rectangle;

        /**
         * @param cell 
         * @param coord_type 
         */
        get_cell_extents(cell: CellAccessible, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number, number, number];

        /**
         * @param cell 
         */
        get_cell_position(cell: CellAccessible): [number, number];

        /**
         * @param cell 
         */
        get_child_index(cell: CellAccessible): number;

        /**
         * @param cell 
         */
        get_column_header_cells(cell: CellAccessible): Atk.Object[];

        /**
         * @param cell 
         */
        get_renderer_state(cell: CellAccessible): CellRendererState;

        /**
         * @param cell 
         */
        get_row_header_cells(cell: CellAccessible): Atk.Object[];

        /**
         * @param cell 
         */
        grab_focus(cell: CellAccessible): boolean;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Component.grab_focus
        grab_focus(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * @param cell 
         * @param relationset 
         */
        update_relationset(cell: CellAccessible, relationset: Atk.RelationSet): void;

        /**
         * @param cell 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_activate(cell: CellAccessible): void;

        /**
         * @param cell 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_edit(cell: CellAccessible): void;

        /**
         * @param cell 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_expand_collapse(cell: CellAccessible): void;

        /**
         * @param cell 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_cell_area(cell: CellAccessible): Gdk.Rectangle;

        /**
         * @param cell 
         * @param coord_type 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_cell_extents(cell: CellAccessible, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number, number, number];

        /**
         * @param cell 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_cell_position(cell: CellAccessible): [number, number];

        /**
         * @param cell 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_child_index(cell: CellAccessible): number;

        /**
         * @param cell 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_column_header_cells(cell: CellAccessible): Atk.Object[];

        /**
         * @param cell 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_renderer_state(cell: CellAccessible): CellRendererState;

        /**
         * @param cell 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_row_header_cells(cell: CellAccessible): Atk.Object[];

        /**
         * @param cell 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_grab_focus(cell: CellAccessible): boolean;

        /**
         * @param args 
         * @virtual
         */
        // Conflicted with Atk.Component.vfunc_grab_focus
        vfunc_grab_focus(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * @param cell 
         * @param relationset 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_update_relationset(cell: CellAccessible, relationset: Atk.RelationSet): void;
    }


    namespace TreeViewColumn {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends GObject.InitiallyUnowned.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            clicked: () => void;
            "notify::alignment": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::cell-area": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::clickable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::fixed-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::max-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::min-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::reorderable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resizable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sizing": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sort-column-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sort-indicator": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sort-order": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::spacing": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::title": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::x-offset": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.InitiallyUnowned.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, CellLayout.ConstructorProps {
            alignment: number;
            cell_area: CellArea;
            cellArea: CellArea;
            clickable: boolean;
            expand: boolean;
            fixed_width: number;
            fixedWidth: number;
            max_width: number;
            maxWidth: number;
            min_width: number;
            minWidth: number;
            reorderable: boolean;
            resizable: boolean;
            sizing: TreeViewColumnSizing;
            sort_column_id: number;
            sortColumnId: number;
            sort_indicator: boolean;
            sortIndicator: boolean;
            sort_order: SortType;
            sortOrder: SortType;
            spacing: number;
            title: string;
            visible: boolean;
            widget: Widget | null;
            width: number;
            x_offset: number;
            xOffset: number;
        }
    }

    /**
     * The GtkTreeViewColumn object represents a visible column in a {@link Gtk.TreeView} widget.
     * It allows to set properties of the column header, and functions as a holding pen for
     * the cell renderers which determine how the data in the column is displayed.
     * 
     * Please refer to the [tree widget conceptual overview](https://docs.gtk.org/gtk3/TreeWidget.html)
     * for an overview of all the objects and data types related to the tree widget and how
     * they work together.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class TreeViewColumn extends GObject.InitiallyUnowned implements Buildable, CellLayout {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<TreeViewColumn>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * @default 0
         */
        get alignment(): number;
        set alignment(val: number);

        /**
         * The {@link Gtk.CellArea} used to layout cell renderers for this column.
         * 
         * If no area is specified when creating the tree view column with `gtk_tree_view_column_new_with_area()`
         * a horizontally oriented {@link Gtk.CellAreaBox} will be used.
         * @since 3.0
         * @construct-only
         */
        get cell_area(): CellArea;

        /**
         * The {@link Gtk.CellArea} used to layout cell renderers for this column.
         * 
         * If no area is specified when creating the tree view column with `gtk_tree_view_column_new_with_area()`
         * a horizontally oriented {@link Gtk.CellAreaBox} will be used.
         * @since 3.0
         * @construct-only
         */
        get cellArea(): CellArea;

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get clickable(): boolean;
        set clickable(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get expand(): boolean;
        set expand(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default -1
         */
        get fixed_width(): number;
        set fixed_width(val: number);

        /**
         * @default -1
         */
        get fixedWidth(): number;
        set fixedWidth(val: number);

        /**
         * @default -1
         */
        get max_width(): number;
        set max_width(val: number);

        /**
         * @default -1
         */
        get maxWidth(): number;
        set maxWidth(val: number);

        /**
         * @default -1
         */
        get min_width(): number;
        set min_width(val: number);

        /**
         * @default -1
         */
        get minWidth(): number;
        set minWidth(val: number);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get reorderable(): boolean;
        set reorderable(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get resizable(): boolean;
        set resizable(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default Gtk.TreeViewColumnSizing.GROW_ONLY
         */
        get sizing(): TreeViewColumnSizing;
        set sizing(val: TreeViewColumnSizing);

        /**
         * Logical sort column ID this column sorts on when selected for sorting. Setting the sort column ID makes the column header
         * clickable. Set to -1 to make the column unsortable.
         * @since 2.18
         * @default -1
         */
        get sort_column_id(): number;
        set sort_column_id(val: number);

        /**
         * Logical sort column ID this column sorts on when selected for sorting. Setting the sort column ID makes the column header
         * clickable. Set to -1 to make the column unsortable.
         * @since 2.18
         * @default -1
         */
        get sortColumnId(): number;
        set sortColumnId(val: number);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get sort_indicator(): boolean;
        set sort_indicator(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get sortIndicator(): boolean;
        set sortIndicator(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default Gtk.SortType.ASCENDING
         */
        get sort_order(): SortType;
        set sort_order(val: SortType);

        /**
         * @default Gtk.SortType.ASCENDING
         */
        get sortOrder(): SortType;
        set sortOrder(val: SortType);

        /**
         * @default 0
         */
        get spacing(): number;
        set spacing(val: number);

        get title(): string;
        set title(val: string);

        /**
         * @default true
         */
        get visible(): boolean;
        set visible(val: boolean);

        get widget(): Widget | null;
        set widget(val: Widget | null);

        /**
         * @read-only
         * @default 0
         */
        get width(): number;

        /**
         * @read-only
         * @default 0
         */
        get x_offset(): number;

        /**
         * @read-only
         * @default 0
         */
        get xOffset(): number;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: TreeViewColumn.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<TreeViewColumn.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): TreeViewColumn;

        static new_with_area(area: CellArea): TreeViewColumn;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof TreeViewColumn.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, TreeViewColumn.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof TreeViewColumn.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, TreeViewColumn.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof TreeViewColumn.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<TreeViewColumn.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * Emits the “clicked” signal on the column.  This function will only work if
         * `tree_column` is clickable.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_clicked(): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Adds an attribute mapping to the list in `tree_column`.  The `column` is the
         * column of the model to get a value from, and the `attribute` is the
         * parameter on `cell_renderer` to be set from the value. So for example
         * if column 2 of the model contains strings, you could have the
         * “text” attribute of a {@link Gtk.CellRendererText} get its values from
         * column 2.
         * @param cell_renderer the {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} to set attributes on
         * @param attribute An attribute on the renderer
         * @param column The column position on the model to get the attribute from.
         */
        add_attribute(cell_renderer: CellRenderer, attribute: string, column: number): void;

        /**
         * Obtains the horizontal position and size of a cell in a column. If the
         * cell is not found in the column, `start_pos` and `width` are not changed and
         * `false` is returned.
         * @param cell_renderer a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @returns `true` if `cell` belongs to `tree_column`.
         */
        cell_get_position(cell_renderer: CellRenderer): [boolean, number, number];

        /**
         * Obtains the width and height needed to render the column.  This is used
         * primarily by the {@link Gtk.TreeView}.
         * @param cell_area The area a cell in the column will be allocated, or `null`
         */
        cell_get_size(cell_area: Gdk.Rectangle | null): [number, number, number, number];

        /**
         * Returns `true` if any of the cells packed into the `tree_column` are visible.
         * For this to be meaningful, you must first initialize the cells with
         * `gtk_tree_view_column_cell_set_cell_data()`
         * @returns `true`, if any of the cells packed into the `tree_column` are currently visible
         */
        cell_is_visible(): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the cell renderer based on the `tree_model` and `iter`.  That is, for
         * every attribute mapping in `tree_column`, it will get a value from the set
         * column on the `iter`, and use that value to set the attribute on the cell
         * renderer.  This is used primarily by the {@link Gtk.TreeView}.
         * @param tree_model The {@link Gtk.TreeModel} to to get the cell renderers attributes from.
         * @param iter The {@link Gtk.TreeIter} to to get the cell renderer’s attributes from.
         * @param is_expander `true`, if the row has children
         * @param is_expanded `true`, if the row has visible children
         */
        cell_set_cell_data(tree_model: TreeModel, iter: TreeIter, is_expander: boolean, is_expanded: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Unsets all the mappings on all renderers on the `tree_column`.
         */
        clear(): void;

        /**
         * Clears all existing attributes previously set with
         * `gtk_tree_view_column_set_attributes()`.
         * @param cell_renderer a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} to clear the attribute mapping on.
         */
        clear_attributes(cell_renderer: CellRenderer): void;

        /**
         * Emits the “clicked” signal on the column.  This function will only work if
         * `tree_column` is clickable.
         */
        clicked(): void;

        /**
         * Sets the current keyboard focus to be at `cell`, if the column contains
         * 2 or more editable and activatable cells.
         * @param cell A {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         */
        focus_cell(cell: CellRenderer): void;

        /**
         * Returns the current x alignment of `tree_column`.  This value can range
         * between 0.0 and 1.0.
         * @returns The current alignent of `tree_column`.
         */
        get_alignment(): number;

        /**
         * Returns the button used in the treeview column header
         * @returns The button for the column header.
         */
        get_button(): Widget;

        /**
         * Returns `true` if the user can click on the header for the column.
         * @returns `true` if user can click the column header.
         */
        get_clickable(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns `true` if the column expands to fill available space.
         * @returns `true` if the column expands to fill available space.
         */
        get_expand(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the fixed width of the column.  This may not be the actual displayed
         * width of the column; for that, use `gtk_tree_view_column_get_width()`.
         * @returns The fixed width of the column.
         */
        get_fixed_width(): number;

        /**
         * Returns the maximum width in pixels of the `tree_column`, or -1 if no maximum
         * width is set.
         * @returns The maximum width of the `tree_column`.
         */
        get_max_width(): number;

        /**
         * Returns the minimum width in pixels of the `tree_column`, or -1 if no minimum
         * width is set.
         * @returns The minimum width of the `tree_column`.
         */
        get_min_width(): number;

        /**
         * Returns `true` if the `tree_column` can be reordered by the user.
         * @returns `true` if the `tree_column` can be reordered by the user.
         */
        get_reorderable(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns `true` if the `tree_column` can be resized by the end user.
         * @returns `true`, if the `tree_column` can be resized.
         */
        get_resizable(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the current type of `tree_column`.
         * @returns The type of `tree_column`.
         */
        get_sizing(): TreeViewColumnSizing;

        /**
         * Gets the logical `sort_column_id` that the model sorts on when this
         * column is selected for sorting.
         * See `gtk_tree_view_column_set_sort_column_id()`.
         * @returns the current `sort_column_id` for this column, or -1 if               this column can’t be used for sorting.
         */
        get_sort_column_id(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the value set by `gtk_tree_view_column_set_sort_indicator()`.
         * @returns whether the sort indicator arrow is displayed
         */
        get_sort_indicator(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the value set by `gtk_tree_view_column_set_sort_order()`.
         * @returns the sort order the sort indicator is indicating
         */
        get_sort_order(): SortType;

        /**
         * Returns the spacing of `tree_column`.
         * @returns the spacing of `tree_column`.
         */
        get_spacing(): number;

        /**
         * Returns the title of the widget.
         * @returns the title of the column. This string should not be modified or freed.
         */
        get_title(): string;

        /**
         * Returns the {@link Gtk.TreeView} wherein `tree_column` has been inserted.
         * If `column` is currently not inserted in any tree view, `null` is
         * returned.
         * @returns The tree view wherein `column` has     been inserted if any, `null` otherwise.
         */
        get_tree_view(): Widget | null;

        /**
         * Returns `true` if `tree_column` is visible.
         * @returns whether the column is visible or not.  If it is visible, then the tree will show the column.
         */
        get_visible(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the {@link Gtk.Widget} in the button on the column header.
         * If a custom widget has not been set then `null` is returned.
         * @returns The {@link Gtk.Widget} in the column     header, or `null`
         */
        get_widget(): Widget | null;

        /**
         * Returns the current size of `tree_column` in pixels.
         * @returns The current width of `tree_column`.
         */
        get_width(): number;

        /**
         * Returns the current X offset of `tree_column` in pixels.
         * @returns The current X offset of `tree_column`.
         */
        get_x_offset(): number;

        /**
         * Adds the `cell` to end of the column. If `expand` is `false`, then the `cell`
         * is allocated no more space than it needs. Any unused space is divided
         * evenly between cells for which `expand` is `true`.
         * @param cell The {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}.
         * @param expand `true` if `cell` is to be given extra space allocated to `tree_column`.
         */
        pack_end(cell: CellRenderer, expand: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Packs the `cell` into the beginning of the column. If `expand` is `false`, then
         * the `cell` is allocated no more space than it needs. Any unused space is divided
         * evenly between cells for which `expand` is `true`.
         * @param cell The {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}.
         * @param expand `true` if `cell` is to be given extra space allocated to `tree_column`.
         */
        pack_start(cell: CellRenderer, expand: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Flags the column, and the cell renderers added to this column, to have
         * their sizes renegotiated.
         */
        queue_resize(): void;

        /**
         * Sets the alignment of the title or custom widget inside the column header.
         * The alignment determines its location inside the button -- 0.0 for left, 0.5
         * for center, 1.0 for right.
         * @param xalign The alignment, which is between [0.0 and 1.0] inclusive.
         */
        set_alignment(xalign: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.TreeCellDataFunc} to use for the column.  This
         * function is used instead of the standard attributes mapping for
         * setting the column value, and should set the value of `tree_column`'s
         * cell renderer as appropriate.  `func` may be `null` to remove an
         * older one.
         * @param cell_renderer A {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param func The {@link Gtk.TreeCellDataFunc} to use.
         */
        set_cell_data_func(cell_renderer: CellRenderer, func: TreeCellDataFunc | null): void;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
    // Conflicted with Gtk.CellLayout.set_cell_data_func
        set_cell_data_func(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Sets the header to be active if `clickable` is `true`.  When the header is
         * active, then it can take keyboard focus, and can be clicked.
         * @param clickable `true` if the header is active.
         */
        set_clickable(clickable: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the column to take available extra space.  This space is shared equally
         * amongst all columns that have the expand set to `true`.  If no column has this
         * option set, then the last column gets all extra space.  By default, every
         * column is created with this `false`.
         * 
         * Along with “fixed-width”, the “expand” property changes when the column is
         * resized by the user.
         * @param expand `true` if the column should expand to fill available space.
         */
        set_expand(expand: boolean): void;

        /**
         * If `fixed_width` is not -1, sets the fixed width of `tree_column`; otherwise
         * unsets it.  The effective value of `fixed_width` is clamped between the
         * minimum and maximum width of the column; however, the value stored in the
         * “fixed-width” property is not clamped.  If the column sizing is
         * #GTK_TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_GROW_ONLY or #GTK_TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_AUTOSIZE, setting
         * a fixed width overrides the automatically calculated width.  Note that
         * `fixed_width` is only a hint to GTK+; the width actually allocated to the
         * column may be greater or less than requested.
         * 
         * Along with “expand”, the “fixed-width” property changes when the column is
         * resized by the user.
         * @param fixed_width The new fixed width, in pixels, or -1.
         */
        set_fixed_width(fixed_width: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the maximum width of the `tree_column`.  If `max_width` is -1, then the
         * maximum width is unset.  Note, the column can actually be wider than max
         * width if it’s the last column in a view.  In this case, the column expands to
         * fill any extra space.
         * @param max_width The maximum width of the column in pixels, or -1.
         */
        set_max_width(max_width: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the minimum width of the `tree_column`.  If `min_width` is -1, then the
         * minimum width is unset.
         * @param min_width The minimum width of the column in pixels, or -1.
         */
        set_min_width(min_width: number): void;

        /**
         * If `reorderable` is `true`, then the column can be reordered by the end user
         * dragging the header.
         * @param reorderable `true`, if the column can be reordered.
         */
        set_reorderable(reorderable: boolean): void;

        /**
         * If `resizable` is `true`, then the user can explicitly resize the column by
         * grabbing the outer edge of the column button.  If resizable is `true` and
         * sizing mode of the column is #GTK_TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_AUTOSIZE, then the sizing
         * mode is changed to #GTK_TREE_VIEW_COLUMN_GROW_ONLY.
         * @param resizable `true`, if the column can be resized
         */
        set_resizable(resizable: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the growth behavior of `tree_column` to `type`.
         * @param type The {@link Gtk.TreeViewColumnSizing}.
         */
        set_sizing(type: TreeViewColumnSizing): void;

        /**
         * Sets the logical `sort_column_id` that this column sorts on when this column
         * is selected for sorting.  Doing so makes the column header clickable.
         * @param sort_column_id The `sort_column_id` of the model to sort on.
         */
        set_sort_column_id(sort_column_id: number): void;

        /**
         * Call this function with a `setting` of `true` to display an arrow in
         * the header button indicating the column is sorted. Call
         * `gtk_tree_view_column_set_sort_order()` to change the direction of
         * the arrow.
         * @param setting `true` to display an indicator that the column is sorted
         */
        set_sort_indicator(setting: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Changes the appearance of the sort indicator.
         * 
         * This does not actually sort the model.  Use
         * `gtk_tree_view_column_set_sort_column_id()` if you want automatic sorting
         * support.  This function is primarily for custom sorting behavior, and should
         * be used in conjunction with `gtk_tree_sortable_set_sort_column_id()` to do
         * that. For custom models, the mechanism will vary.
         * 
         * The sort indicator changes direction to indicate normal sort or reverse sort.
         * Note that you must have the sort indicator enabled to see anything when
         * calling this function; see `gtk_tree_view_column_set_sort_indicator()`.
         * @param order sort order that the sort indicator should indicate
         */
        set_sort_order(order: SortType): void;

        /**
         * Sets the spacing field of `tree_column`, which is the number of pixels to
         * place between cell renderers packed into it.
         * @param spacing distance between cell renderers in pixels.
         */
        set_spacing(spacing: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the title of the `tree_column`.  If a custom widget has been set, then
         * this value is ignored.
         * @param title The title of the `tree_column`.
         */
        set_title(title: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets the visibility of `tree_column`.
         * @param visible `true` if the `tree_column` is visible.
         */
        set_visible(visible: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the widget in the header to be `widget`.  If widget is `null`, then the
         * header button is set with a {@link Gtk.Label} set to the title of `tree_column`.
         * @param widget A child {@link Gtk.Widget}, or `null`.
         */
        set_widget(widget: Widget | null): void;

        /**
         * Adds a child to `buildable`. `type` is an optional string
         * describing how the child should be added.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child to add
         * @param type kind of child or `null`
         */
        add_child(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object, type: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Constructs a child of `buildable` with the name `name`.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} calls this function if a “constructor” has been
         * specified in the UI definition.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param name name of child to construct
         * @returns the constructed child
         */
        construct_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, name: string): T;

        /**
         * This is similar to `gtk_buildable_parser_finished()` but is
         * called once for each custom tag handled by the `buildable`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname the name of the tag
         * @param data user data created in custom_tag_start
         */
        custom_finished(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
         * the buildable.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @param data user data that will be passed in to parser functions
         */
        custom_tag_end(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called for each unknown element under `<child>`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @returns `true` if a object has a custom implementation, `false`          if it doesn't.
         */
        custom_tag_start(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string): [boolean, GLib.MarkupParser, null];

        /**
         * Get the internal child called `childname` of the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param childname name of child
         * @returns the internal child of the buildable object
         */
        get_internal_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, childname: string): T;

        /**
         * Gets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} sets the name based on the
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI]
         * used to construct the `buildable`.
         * @returns the name set with `gtk_buildable_set_name()`
         */
        get_name(): string;

        /**
         * Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI].
         * Note that this will be called once for each time
         * `gtk_builder_add_from_file()` or `gtk_builder_add_from_string()`
         * is called on a builder.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         */
        parser_finished(builder: Builder): void;

        /**
         * Sets the property name `name` to `value` on the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param name name of property
         * @param value value of property
         */
        set_buildable_property(builder: Builder, name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;

        /**
         * Sets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * @param name name to set
         */
        set_name(name: string): void;

        /**
         * Adds a child to `buildable`. `type` is an optional string
         * describing how the child should be added.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child to add
         * @param type kind of child or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add_child(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object, type: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Constructs a child of `buildable` with the name `name`.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} calls this function if a “constructor” has been
         * specified in the UI definition.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param name name of child to construct
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_construct_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, name: string): T;

        /**
         * This is similar to `gtk_buildable_parser_finished()` but is
         * called once for each custom tag handled by the `buildable`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname the name of the tag
         * @param data user data created in custom_tag_start
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_finished(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
         * the buildable.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @param data user data that will be passed in to parser functions
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_tag_end(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called for each unknown element under `<child>`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_tag_start(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string): [boolean, GLib.MarkupParser, never];

        /**
         * Get the internal child called `childname` of the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param childname name of child
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_internal_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, childname: string): T;

        /**
         * Gets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} sets the name based on the
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI]
         * used to construct the `buildable`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_name(): string;

        /**
         * Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI].
         * Note that this will be called once for each time
         * `gtk_builder_add_from_file()` or `gtk_builder_add_from_string()`
         * is called on a builder.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_parser_finished(builder: Builder): void;

        /**
         * Sets the property name `name` to `value` on the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param name name of property
         * @param value value of property
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_buildable_property(builder: Builder, name: string, value: unknown): void;

        /**
         * Sets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * @param name name to set
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_name(name: string): void;

        /**
         * Returns the underlying {@link Gtk.CellArea} which might be `cell_layout`
         * if called on a {@link Gtk.CellArea} or might be `null` if no {@link Gtk.CellArea}
         * is used by `cell_layout`.
         * @returns the cell area used by `cell_layout`, or `null` in case no cell area is used.
         */
        get_area(): CellArea | null;

        /**
         * Returns the cell renderers which have been added to `cell_layout`.
         * @returns a list of cell renderers. The list, but not the renderers has     been newly allocated and should be freed with `g_list_free()`     when no longer needed.
         */
        get_cells(): CellRenderer[];

        /**
         * Re-inserts `cell` at `position`.
         * 
         * Note that `cell` has already to be packed into `cell_layout`
         * for this to function properly.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} to reorder
         * @param position new position to insert `cell` at
         */
        reorder(cell: CellRenderer, position: number): void;

        /**
         * Adds an attribute mapping to the list in `cell_layout`.
         * 
         * The `column` is the column of the model to get a value from, and the
         * `attribute` is the parameter on `cell` to be set from the value. So for
         * example if column 2 of the model contains strings, you could have the
         * “text” attribute of a {@link Gtk.CellRendererText} get its values from column 2.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param attribute an attribute on the renderer
         * @param column the column position on the model to get the attribute from
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add_attribute(cell: CellRenderer, attribute: string, column: number): void;

        /**
         * Unsets all the mappings on all renderers on `cell_layout` and
         * removes all renderers from `cell_layout`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_clear(): void;

        /**
         * Clears all existing attributes previously set with
         * `gtk_cell_layout_set_attributes()`.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} to clear the attribute mapping on
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_clear_attributes(cell: CellRenderer): void;

        /**
         * Returns the underlying {@link Gtk.CellArea} which might be `cell_layout`
         * if called on a {@link Gtk.CellArea} or might be `null` if no {@link Gtk.CellArea}
         * is used by `cell_layout`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_area(): CellArea | null;

        /**
         * Returns the cell renderers which have been added to `cell_layout`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_cells(): CellRenderer[];

        /**
         * Adds the `cell` to the end of `cell_layout`. If `expand` is `false`, then the
         * `cell` is allocated no more space than it needs. Any unused space is
         * divided evenly between cells for which `expand` is `true`.
         * 
         * Note that reusing the same cell renderer is not supported.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param expand `true` if `cell` is to be given extra space allocated to `cell_layout`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_pack_end(cell: CellRenderer, expand: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Packs the `cell` into the beginning of `cell_layout`. If `expand` is `false`,
         * then the `cell` is allocated no more space than it needs. Any unused space
         * is divided evenly between cells for which `expand` is `true`.
         * 
         * Note that reusing the same cell renderer is not supported.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param expand `true` if `cell` is to be given extra space allocated to `cell_layout`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_pack_start(cell: CellRenderer, expand: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Re-inserts `cell` at `position`.
         * 
         * Note that `cell` has already to be packed into `cell_layout`
         * for this to function properly.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} to reorder
         * @param position new position to insert `cell` at
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_reorder(cell: CellRenderer, position: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.CellLayoutDataFunc} to use for `cell_layout`.
         * 
         * This function is used instead of the standard attributes mapping
         * for setting the column value, and should set the value of `cell_layout`’s
         * cell renderer(s) as appropriate.
         * 
         * `func` may be `null` to remove a previously set function.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param func the {@link Gtk.CellLayoutDataFunc} to use, or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_cell_data_func(cell: CellRenderer, func: CellLayoutDataFunc | null): void;
    }


    namespace UIManager {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends GObject.Object.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * The ::actions-changed signal is emitted whenever the set of actions
             * changes.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.4
             * @deprecated since 3.10
             * @run-first
             */
            "actions-changed": () => void;
            /**
             * The ::add-widget signal is emitted for each generated menubar and toolbar.
             * It is not emitted for generated popup menus, which can be obtained by
             * `gtk_ui_manager_get_widget()`.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.4
             * @deprecated since 3.10
             * @run-first
             */
            "add-widget": (arg0: Widget) => void;
            /**
             * The ::connect-proxy signal is emitted after connecting a proxy to
             * an action in the group.
             * 
             * This is intended for simple customizations for which a custom action
             * class would be too clumsy, e.g. showing tooltips for menuitems in the
             * statusbar.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.4
             * @deprecated since 3.10
             * @run-first
             */
            "connect-proxy": (arg0: Action, arg1: Widget) => void;
            /**
             * The ::disconnect-proxy signal is emitted after disconnecting a proxy
             * from an action in the group.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.4
             * @deprecated since 3.10
             * @run-first
             */
            "disconnect-proxy": (arg0: Action, arg1: Widget) => void;
            /**
             * The ::post-activate signal is emitted just after the `action`
             * is activated.
             * 
             * This is intended for applications to get notification
             * just after any action is activated.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.4
             * @deprecated since 3.10
             * @run-first
             */
            "post-activate": (arg0: Action) => void;
            /**
             * The ::pre-activate signal is emitted just before the `action`
             * is activated.
             * 
             * This is intended for applications to get notification
             * just before any action is activated.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.4
             * @deprecated since 3.10
             * @run-first
             */
            "pre-activate": (arg0: Action) => void;
            "notify::add-tearoffs": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::ui": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.Object.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {
            add_tearoffs: boolean;
            addTearoffs: boolean;
            ui: string;
        }
    }

    /**
     * A {@link Gtk.UIManager} constructs a user interface (menus and toolbars) from
     * one or more UI definitions, which reference actions from one or more
     * action groups.
     * 
     * > GtkUIManager is deprecated since GTK+ 3.10. To construct user interfaces
     * > from XML definitions, you should use {@link Gtk.Builder}, {@link Gio.MenuModel}, et al. To
     * > work with actions, use {@link Gio.Action}, {@link Gtk.Actionable} et al. These newer classes
     * > support richer functionality and integration with various desktop shells.
     * > It should be possible to migrate most/all functionality from GtkUIManager.
     * 
     * # UI Definitions # {`XML`-UI}
     * 
     * The UI definitions are specified in an XML format which can be
     * roughly described by the following DTD.
     * 
     * > Do not confuse the GtkUIManager UI Definitions described here with
     * > the similarly named [GtkBuilder UI Definitions][BUILDER-UI].
     * 
     * 
     * ```
     * <!ELEMENT ui          (menubar|toolbar|popup|accelerator)* >
     * <!ELEMENT menubar     (menuitem|separator|placeholder|menu)* >
     * <!ELEMENT menu        (menuitem|separator|placeholder|menu)* >
     * <!ELEMENT popup       (menuitem|separator|placeholder|menu)* >
     * <!ELEMENT toolbar     (toolitem|separator|placeholder)* >
     * <!ELEMENT placeholder (menuitem|toolitem|separator|placeholder|menu)* >
     * <!ELEMENT menuitem     EMPTY >
     * <!ELEMENT toolitem     (menu?) >
     * <!ELEMENT separator    EMPTY >
     * <!ELEMENT accelerator  EMPTY >
     * <!ATTLIST menubar      name                      `IMPLIED`
     *                        action                    `IMPLIED` >
     * <!ATTLIST toolbar      name                      `IMPLIED`
     *                        action                    `IMPLIED` >
     * <!ATTLIST popup        name                      `IMPLIED`
     *                        action                    `IMPLIED`
     *                        accelerators (true|false) `IMPLIED` >
     * <!ATTLIST placeholder  name                      `IMPLIED`
     *                        action                    `IMPLIED` >
     * <!ATTLIST separator    name                      `IMPLIED`
     *                        action                    `IMPLIED`
     *                        expand       (true|false) `IMPLIED` >
     * <!ATTLIST menu         name                      `IMPLIED`
     *                        action                    `REQUIRED`
     *                        position     (top|bot)    `IMPLIED` >
     * <!ATTLIST menuitem     name                      `IMPLIED`
     *                        action                    `REQUIRED`
     *                        position     (top|bot)    `IMPLIED`
     *                        always-show-image (true|false) `IMPLIED` >
     * <!ATTLIST toolitem     name                      `IMPLIED`
     *                        action                    `REQUIRED`
     *                        position     (top|bot)    `IMPLIED` >
     * <!ATTLIST accelerator  name                      `IMPLIED`
     *                        action                    `REQUIRED` >
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * There are some additional restrictions beyond those specified in the
     * DTD, e.g. every toolitem must have a toolbar in its anchestry and
     * every menuitem must have a menubar or popup in its anchestry. Since
     * a {@link GLib.MarkupParser} is used to parse the UI description, it must not only
     * be valid XML, but valid markup.
     * 
     * If a name is not specified, it defaults to the action. If an action is
     * not specified either, the element name is used. The name and action
     * attributes must not contain “/” characters after parsing (since that
     * would mess up path lookup) and must be usable as XML attributes when
     * enclosed in doublequotes, thus they must not “"” characters or references
     * to the &quot; entity.
     * 
     * # A UI definition #
     * 
     * 
     * ```xml
     * <ui>
     *   <menubar>
     *     <menu name="FileMenu" action="FileMenuAction">
     *       <menuitem name="New" action="New2Action" />
     *       <placeholder name="FileMenuAdditions" />
     *     </menu>
     *     <menu name="JustifyMenu" action="JustifyMenuAction">
     *       <menuitem name="Left" action="justify-left"/>
     *       <menuitem name="Centre" action="justify-center"/>
     *       <menuitem name="Right" action="justify-right"/>
     *       <menuitem name="Fill" action="justify-fill"/>
     *     </menu>
     *   </menubar>
     *   <toolbar action="toolbar1">
     *     <placeholder name="JustifyToolItems">
     *       <separator/>
     *       <toolitem name="Left" action="justify-left"/>
     *       <toolitem name="Centre" action="justify-center"/>
     *       <toolitem name="Right" action="justify-right"/>
     *       <toolitem name="Fill" action="justify-fill"/>
     *       <separator/>
     *     </placeholder>
     *   </toolbar>
     * </ui>
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * The constructed widget hierarchy is very similar to the element tree
     * of the XML, with the exception that placeholders are merged into their
     * parents. The correspondence of XML elements to widgets should be
     * almost obvious:
     * 
     * - menubar
     * 
     *    a {@link Gtk.MenuBar}
     * 
     * - toolbar
     * 
     *    a {@link Gtk.Toolbar}
     * 
     * - popup
     * 
     *    a toplevel {@link Gtk.Menu}
     * 
     * - menu
     * 
     *    a {@link Gtk.Menu} attached to a menuitem
     * 
     * - menuitem
     * 
     *    a {@link Gtk.MenuItem} subclass, the exact type depends on the action
     * 
     * - toolitem
     * 
     *    a {@link Gtk.ToolItem} subclass, the exact type depends on the
     *    action. Note that toolitem elements may contain a menu element,
     *    but only if their associated action specifies a
     *    {@link Gtk.MenuToolButton} as proxy.
     * 
     * - separator
     * 
     *    a {@link Gtk.SeparatorMenuItem} or {@link Gtk.SeparatorToolItem}
     * 
     * - accelerator
     * 
     *    a keyboard accelerator
     * 
     * The “position” attribute determines where a constructed widget is positioned
     * wrt. to its siblings in the partially constructed tree. If it is
     * “top”, the widget is prepended, otherwise it is appended.
     * 
     * # UI Merging # {`UI`-Merging}
     * 
     * The most remarkable feature of {@link Gtk.UIManager} is that it can overlay a set
     * of menuitems and toolitems over another one, and demerge them later.
     * 
     * Merging is done based on the names of the XML elements. Each element is
     * identified by a path which consists of the names of its anchestors, separated
     * by slashes. For example, the menuitem named “Left” in the example above
     * has the path `/ui/menubar/JustifyMenu/Left` and the
     * toolitem with the same name has path
     * `/ui/toolbar1/JustifyToolItems/Left`.
     * 
     * # Accelerators #
     * 
     * Every action has an accelerator path. Accelerators are installed together
     * with menuitem proxies, but they can also be explicitly added with
     * `<accelerator>` elements in the UI definition. This makes it possible to
     * have accelerators for actions even if they have no visible proxies.
     * 
     * # Smart Separators # {`Smart`-Separators}
     * 
     * The separators created by {@link Gtk.UIManager} are “smart”, i.e. they do not show up
     * in the UI unless they end up between two visible menu or tool items. Separators
     * which are located at the very beginning or end of the menu or toolbar
     * containing them, or multiple separators next to each other, are hidden. This
     * is a useful feature, since the merging of UI elements from multiple sources
     * can make it hard or impossible to determine in advance whether a separator
     * will end up in such an unfortunate position.
     * 
     * For separators in toolbars, you can set `expand="true"` to
     * turn them from a small, visible separator to an expanding, invisible one.
     * Toolitems following an expanding separator are effectively right-aligned.
     * 
     * # Empty Menus
     * 
     * Submenus pose similar problems to separators inconnection with merging. It is
     * impossible to know in advance whether they will end up empty after merging.
     * {@link Gtk.UIManager} offers two ways to treat empty submenus:
     * 
     * - make them disappear by hiding the menu item they’re attached to
     * 
     * - add an insensitive “Empty” item
     * 
     * The behaviour is chosen based on the “hide_if_empty” property of the action
     * to which the submenu is associated.
     * 
     * # GtkUIManager as GtkBuildable # {{@link Gtk.UIManager}-BUILDER-UI}
     * 
     * The GtkUIManager implementation of the GtkBuildable interface accepts
     * GtkActionGroup objects as `<child>` elements in UI definitions.
     * 
     * A GtkUIManager UI definition as described above can be embedded in
     * an GtkUIManager `<object>` element in a GtkBuilder UI definition.
     * 
     * The widgets that are constructed by a GtkUIManager can be embedded in
     * other parts of the constructed user interface with the help of the
     * “constructor” attribute. See the example below.
     * 
     * ## An embedded GtkUIManager UI definition
     * 
     * 
     * ```xml
     * <object class="GtkUIManager" id="uiman">
     *   <child>
     *     <object class="GtkActionGroup" id="actiongroup">
     *       <child>
     *         <object class="GtkAction" id="file">
     *           <property name="label">_File</property>
     *         </object>
     *       </child>
     *     </object>
     *   </child>
     *   <ui>
     *     <menubar name="menubar1">
     *       <menu action="file">
     *       </menu>
     *     </menubar>
     *   </ui>
     * </object>
     * <object class="GtkWindow" id="main-window">
     *   <child>
     *     <object class="GtkMenuBar" id="menubar1" constructor="uiman"/>
     *   </child>
     * </object>
     * ```
     * 
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class UIManager extends GObject.Object implements Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<UIManager>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * The "add-tearoffs" property controls whether generated menus
         * have tearoff menu items.
         * 
         * Note that this only affects regular menus. Generated popup
         * menus never have tearoff menu items.
         * @since 2.4
         * @deprecated since 3.4: Tearoff menus are deprecated and should not     be used in newly written code.
         * @default false
         */
        get add_tearoffs(): boolean;
        set add_tearoffs(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The "add-tearoffs" property controls whether generated menus
         * have tearoff menu items.
         * 
         * Note that this only affects regular menus. Generated popup
         * menus never have tearoff menu items.
         * @since 2.4
         * @deprecated since 3.4: Tearoff menus are deprecated and should not     be used in newly written code.
         * @default false
         */
        get addTearoffs(): boolean;
        set addTearoffs(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @read-only
         * @default <ui>\n</ui>\n
         */
        get ui(): string;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: UIManager.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<UIManager.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): UIManager;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof UIManager.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, UIManager.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof UIManager.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, UIManager.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof UIManager.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<UIManager.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_actions_changed(): void;

        /**
         * @param widget 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add_widget(widget: Widget): void;

        /**
         * @param action 
         * @param proxy 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_connect_proxy(action: Action, proxy: Widget): void;

        /**
         * @param action 
         * @param proxy 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_disconnect_proxy(action: Action, proxy: Widget): void;

        /**
         * Looks up an action by following a path. See `gtk_ui_manager_get_widget()`
         * for more information about paths.
         * @param path a path
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_action(path: string): Action;

        /**
         * Looks up a widget by following a path.
         * The path consists of the names specified in the XML description of the UI.
         * separated by “/”. Elements which don’t have a name or action attribute in
         * the XML (e.g. `<popup>`) can be addressed by their XML element name
         * (e.g. "popup"). The root element ("/ui") can be omitted in the path.
         * 
         * Note that the widget found by following a path that ends in a `<menu>`;
         * element is the menuitem to which the menu is attached, not the menu it
         * manages.
         * 
         * Also note that the widgets constructed by a ui manager are not tied to
         * the lifecycle of the ui manager. If you add the widgets returned by this
         * function to some container or explicitly ref them, they will survive the
         * destruction of the ui manager.
         * @param path a path
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_widget(path: string): Widget;

        /**
         * @param action 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_post_activate(action: Action): void;

        /**
         * @param action 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_pre_activate(action: Action): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Adds a UI element to the current contents of `manager`.
         * 
         * If `type` is {@link Gtk.UIManagerItemType.AUTO}, GTK+ inserts a menuitem, toolitem or
         * separator if such an element can be inserted at the place determined by
         * `path`. Otherwise `type` must indicate an element that can be inserted at
         * the place determined by `path`.
         * 
         * If `path` points to a menuitem or toolitem, the new element will be inserted
         * before or after this item, depending on `top`.
         * @param merge_id the merge id for the merged UI, see `gtk_ui_manager_new_merge_id()`
         * @param path a path
         * @param name the name for the added UI element
         * @param action the name of the action to be proxied, or `null` to add a separator
         * @param type the type of UI element to add.
         * @param top if `true`, the UI element is added before its siblings, otherwise it   is added after its siblings.
         */
        add_ui(merge_id: number, path: string, name: string, action: string | null, type: UIManagerItemType, top: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Parses a file containing a [UI definition][XML-UI] and
         * merges it with the current contents of `manager`.
         * @param filename the name of the file to parse
         * @returns The merge id for the merged UI. The merge id can be used   to unmerge the UI with `gtk_ui_manager_remove_ui()`. If an error occurred,   the return value is 0.
         */
        add_ui_from_file(filename: string): number;

        /**
         * Parses a resource file containing a [UI definition][XML-UI] and
         * merges it with the current contents of `manager`.
         * @param resource_path the resource path of the file to parse
         * @returns The merge id for the merged UI. The merge id can be used   to unmerge the UI with `gtk_ui_manager_remove_ui()`. If an error occurred,   the return value is 0.
         */
        add_ui_from_resource(resource_path: string): number;

        /**
         * Parses a string containing a [UI definition][XML-UI] and merges it with
         * the current contents of `manager`. An enclosing `<ui>` element is added if
         * it is missing.
         * @param buffer the string to parse
         * @param length the length of `buffer` (may be -1 if `buffer` is nul-terminated)
         * @returns The merge id for the merged UI. The merge id can be used   to unmerge the UI with `gtk_ui_manager_remove_ui()`. If an error occurred,   the return value is 0.
         */
        add_ui_from_string(buffer: string, length: bigint | number): number;

        /**
         * Makes sure that all pending updates to the UI have been completed.
         * 
         * This may occasionally be necessary, since {@link Gtk.UIManager} updates the
         * UI in an idle function. A typical example where this function is
         * useful is to enforce that the menubar and toolbar have been added to
         * the main window before showing it:
         * 
         * ```c
         * gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (window), vbox);
         * g_signal_connect (merge, "add-widget",
         *                   G_CALLBACK (add_widget), vbox);
         * gtk_ui_manager_add_ui_from_file (merge, "my-menus");
         * gtk_ui_manager_add_ui_from_file (merge, "my-toolbars");
         * gtk_ui_manager_ensure_update (merge);
         * gtk_widget_show (window);
         * ```
         * 
         */
        ensure_update(): void;

        /**
         * Returns the {@link Gtk.AccelGroup} associated with `manager`.
         * @returns the {@link Gtk.AccelGroup}.
         */
        get_accel_group(): AccelGroup;

        /**
         * Looks up an action by following a path. See `gtk_ui_manager_get_widget()`
         * for more information about paths.
         * @param path a path
         * @returns the action whose proxy widget is found by following the path,     or `null` if no widget was found.
         */
        get_action(path: string): Action;

        /**
         * Returns the list of action groups associated with `manager`.
         * @returns a {@link GLib.List} of   action groups. The list is owned by GTK+   and should not be modified.
         */
        get_action_groups(): ActionGroup[];

        /**
         * Returns whether menus generated by this {@link Gtk.UIManager}
         * will have tearoff menu items.
         * @returns whether tearoff menu items are added
         */
        get_add_tearoffs(): boolean;

        /**
         * Obtains a list of all toplevel widgets of the requested types.
         * @param types specifies the types of toplevel widgets to include. Allowed   types are #GTK_UI_MANAGER_MENUBAR, #GTK_UI_MANAGER_TOOLBAR and   #GTK_UI_MANAGER_POPUP.
         * @returns a newly-allocated {@link GLib.SList} of all toplevel widgets of the requested types.  Free the returned list with `g_slist_free()`.
         */
        get_toplevels(types: UIManagerItemType): Widget[];

        /**
         * Creates a [UI definition][XML-UI] of the merged UI.
         * @returns A newly allocated string containing an XML representation of the merged UI.
         */
        get_ui(): string;

        /**
         * Looks up a widget by following a path.
         * The path consists of the names specified in the XML description of the UI.
         * separated by “/”. Elements which don’t have a name or action attribute in
         * the XML (e.g. `<popup>`) can be addressed by their XML element name
         * (e.g. "popup"). The root element ("/ui") can be omitted in the path.
         * 
         * Note that the widget found by following a path that ends in a `<menu>`;
         * element is the menuitem to which the menu is attached, not the menu it
         * manages.
         * 
         * Also note that the widgets constructed by a ui manager are not tied to
         * the lifecycle of the ui manager. If you add the widgets returned by this
         * function to some container or explicitly ref them, they will survive the
         * destruction of the ui manager.
         * @param path a path
         * @returns the widget found by following the path,     or `null` if no widget was found
         */
        get_widget(path: string): Widget;

        /**
         * Inserts an action group into the list of action groups associated
         * with `manager`. Actions in earlier groups hide actions with the same
         * name in later groups.
         * 
         * If `pos` is larger than the number of action groups in `manager`, or
         * negative, `action_group` will be inserted at the end of the internal
         * list.
         * @param action_group the action group to be inserted
         * @param pos the position at which the group will be inserted.
         */
        insert_action_group(action_group: ActionGroup, pos: number): void;

        /**
         * Returns an unused merge id, suitable for use with
         * `gtk_ui_manager_add_ui()`.
         * @returns an unused merge id.
         */
        new_merge_id(): number;

        /**
         * Removes an action group from the list of action groups associated
         * with `manager`.
         * @param action_group the action group to be removed
         */
        remove_action_group(action_group: ActionGroup): void;

        /**
         * Unmerges the part of `manager`'s content identified by `merge_id`.
         * @param merge_id a merge id as returned by `gtk_ui_manager_add_ui_from_string()`
         */
        remove_ui(merge_id: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the “add_tearoffs” property, which controls whether menus
         * generated by this {@link Gtk.UIManager} will have tearoff menu items.
         * 
         * Note that this only affects regular menus. Generated popup
         * menus never have tearoff menu items.
         * @param add_tearoffs whether tearoff menu items are added
         */
        set_add_tearoffs(add_tearoffs: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Adds a child to `buildable`. `type` is an optional string
         * describing how the child should be added.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child to add
         * @param type kind of child or `null`
         */
        add_child(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object, type: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Constructs a child of `buildable` with the name `name`.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} calls this function if a “constructor” has been
         * specified in the UI definition.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param name name of child to construct
         * @returns the constructed child
         */
        construct_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, name: string): T;

        /**
         * This is similar to `gtk_buildable_parser_finished()` but is
         * called once for each custom tag handled by the `buildable`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname the name of the tag
         * @param data user data created in custom_tag_start
         */
        custom_finished(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
         * the buildable.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @param data user data that will be passed in to parser functions
         */
        custom_tag_end(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called for each unknown element under `<child>`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @returns `true` if a object has a custom implementation, `false`          if it doesn't.
         */
        custom_tag_start(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string): [boolean, GLib.MarkupParser, null];

        /**
         * Get the internal child called `childname` of the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param childname name of child
         * @returns the internal child of the buildable object
         */
        get_internal_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, childname: string): T;

        /**
         * Gets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} sets the name based on the
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI]
         * used to construct the `buildable`.
         * @returns the name set with `gtk_buildable_set_name()`
         */
        get_name(): string;

        /**
         * Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI].
         * Note that this will be called once for each time
         * `gtk_builder_add_from_file()` or `gtk_builder_add_from_string()`
         * is called on a builder.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         */
        parser_finished(builder: Builder): void;

        /**
         * Sets the property name `name` to `value` on the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param name name of property
         * @param value value of property
         */
        set_buildable_property(builder: Builder, name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;

        /**
         * Sets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * @param name name to set
         */
        set_name(name: string): void;

        /**
         * Adds a child to `buildable`. `type` is an optional string
         * describing how the child should be added.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child to add
         * @param type kind of child or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add_child(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object, type: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Constructs a child of `buildable` with the name `name`.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} calls this function if a “constructor” has been
         * specified in the UI definition.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param name name of child to construct
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_construct_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, name: string): T;

        /**
         * This is similar to `gtk_buildable_parser_finished()` but is
         * called once for each custom tag handled by the `buildable`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname the name of the tag
         * @param data user data created in custom_tag_start
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_finished(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
         * the buildable.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @param data user data that will be passed in to parser functions
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_tag_end(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called for each unknown element under `<child>`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_tag_start(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string): [boolean, GLib.MarkupParser, never];

        /**
         * Get the internal child called `childname` of the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param childname name of child
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_internal_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, childname: string): T;

        /**
         * Gets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} sets the name based on the
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI]
         * used to construct the `buildable`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_name(): string;

        /**
         * Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI].
         * Note that this will be called once for each time
         * `gtk_builder_add_from_file()` or `gtk_builder_add_from_string()`
         * is called on a builder.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_parser_finished(builder: Builder): void;

        /**
         * Sets the property name `name` to `value` on the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param name name of property
         * @param value value of property
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_buildable_property(builder: Builder, name: string, value: unknown): void;

        /**
         * Sets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * @param name name to set
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_name(name: string): void;
    }


    namespace VBox {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Box.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::baseline-position": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::homogeneous": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::spacing": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::orientation": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Box.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, Orientable.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * A {@link Gtk.VBox} is a container that organizes child widgets into a single column.
     * 
     * Use the {@link Gtk.Box} packing interface to determine the arrangement,
     * spacing, height, and alignment of {@link Gtk.VBox} children.
     * 
     * All children are allocated the same width.
     * 
     * GtkVBox has been deprecated. You can use {@link Gtk.Box} with a {@link Gtk.Orientable.orientation}
     * set to {@link Gtk.Orientation.VERTICAL} instead when calling `gtk_box_new()`,
     * which is a very quick and easy change.
     * 
     * If you have derived your own classes from GtkVBox, you can change the
     * inheritance to derive directly from {@link Gtk.Box}, and set the {@link Gtk.Orientable.orientation}
     * property to {@link Gtk.Orientation.VERTICAL} in your instance init function,
     * with a call like:
     * 
     * 
     * ```c
     *   gtk_orientable_set_orientation (GTK_ORIENTABLE (object),
     *                                   GTK_ORIENTATION_VERTICAL);
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * If you have a grid-like layout composed of nested boxes, and you don’t
     * need first-child or last-child styling, the recommendation is to switch
     * to {@link Gtk.Grid}. For more information about migrating to {@link Gtk.Grid}, see
     * [Migrating from other containers to GtkGrid][gtk-migrating-GtkGrid].
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class VBox extends Box implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable, Orientable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<VBox>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: VBox.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        box: Box;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<VBox.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](homogeneous: boolean, spacing: number): VBox;

        // Conflicted with Gtk.Box.new
        static ["new"](...args: never[]): any;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof VBox.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, VBox.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof VBox.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, VBox.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof VBox.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<VBox.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        /**
         * The orientation of the orientable.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default Gtk.Orientation.HORIZONTAL
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Orientable
         */
        get orientation(): Orientation;
        set orientation(val: Orientation);

        /**
         * Retrieves the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @returns the orientation of the `orientable`.
         */
        get_orientation(): Orientation;

        /**
         * Sets the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @param orientation the orientable’s new orientation.
         */
        set_orientation(orientation: Orientation): void;
    }


    namespace VButtonBox {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends ButtonBox.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::layout-style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::baseline-position": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::homogeneous": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::spacing": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends ButtonBox.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, Orientable.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class VButtonBox extends ButtonBox implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable, Orientable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<VButtonBox>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: VButtonBox.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        button_box: ButtonBox;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<VButtonBox.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): VButtonBox;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof VButtonBox.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, VButtonBox.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof VButtonBox.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, VButtonBox.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof VButtonBox.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<VButtonBox.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;
    }


    namespace VPaned {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Paned.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::max-position": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::min-position": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::position": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::position-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::wide-handle": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::orientation": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Paned.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, Orientable.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * The VPaned widget is a container widget with two
     * children arranged vertically. The division between
     * the two panes is adjustable by the user by dragging
     * a handle. See {@link Gtk.Paned} for details.
     * 
     * GtkVPaned has been deprecated, use {@link Gtk.Paned} instead.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class VPaned extends Paned implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable, Orientable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<VPaned>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: VPaned.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        paned: Paned;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<VPaned.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): VPaned;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof VPaned.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, VPaned.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof VPaned.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, VPaned.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof VPaned.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<VPaned.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        /**
         * The orientation of the orientable.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default Gtk.Orientation.HORIZONTAL
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Orientable
         */
        get orientation(): Orientation;
        set orientation(val: Orientation);

        /**
         * Retrieves the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @returns the orientation of the `orientable`.
         */
        get_orientation(): Orientation;

        /**
         * Sets the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @param orientation the orientable’s new orientation.
         */
        set_orientation(orientation: Orientation): void;
    }


    namespace VScale {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Scale.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::digits": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::draw-value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-origin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::value-pos": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::adjustment": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::fill-level": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::inverted": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::lower-stepper-sensitivity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::restrict-to-fill-level": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::round-digits": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::show-fill-level": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::upper-stepper-sensitivity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Scale.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, Orientable.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * The {@link Gtk.VScale} widget is used to allow the user to select a value using
     * a vertical slider. To create one, use `gtk_hscale_new_with_range()`.
     * 
     * The position to show the current value, and the number of decimal places
     * shown can be set using the parent {@link Gtk.Scale} class’s functions.
     * 
     * GtkVScale has been deprecated, use {@link Gtk.Scale} instead.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class VScale extends Scale implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable, Orientable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<VScale>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: VScale.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        scale: Scale;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<VScale.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](adjustment: Adjustment): VScale;

        // Conflicted with Gtk.Scale.new
        static ["new"](...args: never[]): any;

        static new_with_range(min: number, max: number, step: number): VScale;

        // Conflicted with Gtk.Scale.new_with_range
        static new_with_range(...args: never[]): any;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof VScale.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, VScale.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof VScale.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, VScale.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof VScale.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<VScale.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;
    }


    namespace VScrollbar {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Scrollbar.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::adjustment": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::fill-level": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::inverted": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::lower-stepper-sensitivity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::restrict-to-fill-level": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::round-digits": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::show-fill-level": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::upper-stepper-sensitivity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Scrollbar.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, Orientable.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * The {@link Gtk.VScrollbar} widget is a widget arranged vertically creating a
     * scrollbar. See {@link Gtk.Scrollbar} for details on
     * scrollbars. {@link Gtk.Adjustment} pointers may be added to handle the
     * adjustment of the scrollbar or it may be left `null` in which case one
     * will be created for you. See {@link Gtk.Scrollbar} for a description of what the
     * fields in an adjustment represent for a scrollbar.
     * 
     * GtkVScrollbar has been deprecated, use {@link Gtk.Scrollbar} instead.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class VScrollbar extends Scrollbar implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable, Orientable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<VScrollbar>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: VScrollbar.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        scrollbar: Scrollbar;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<VScrollbar.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](adjustment: Adjustment | null): VScrollbar;

        // Conflicted with Gtk.Scrollbar.new
        static ["new"](...args: never[]): any;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof VScrollbar.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, VScrollbar.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof VScrollbar.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, VScrollbar.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof VScrollbar.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<VScrollbar.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;
    }


    namespace VSeparator {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Separator.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::orientation": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Separator.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, Orientable.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * The {@link Gtk.VSeparator} widget is a vertical separator, used to group the
     * widgets within a window. It displays a vertical line with a shadow to
     * make it appear sunken into the interface.
     * 
     * GtkVSeparator has been deprecated, use {@link Gtk.Separator} instead.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class VSeparator extends Separator implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable, Orientable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<VSeparator>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: VSeparator.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        separator: Separator;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<VSeparator.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): VSeparator;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof VSeparator.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, VSeparator.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof VSeparator.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, VSeparator.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof VSeparator.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<VSeparator.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        /**
         * The orientation of the orientable.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default Gtk.Orientation.HORIZONTAL
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Orientable
         */
        get orientation(): Orientation;
        set orientation(val: Orientation);

        /**
         * Retrieves the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @returns the orientation of the `orientable`.
         */
        get_orientation(): Orientation;

        /**
         * Sets the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @param orientation the orientable’s new orientation.
         */
        set_orientation(orientation: Orientation): void;
    }


    namespace Viewport {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Bin.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::shadow-type": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hadjustment": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hscroll-policy": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vadjustment": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vscroll-policy": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Bin.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, Scrollable.ConstructorProps {
            shadow_type: ShadowType;
            shadowType: ShadowType;
        }
    }

    /**
     * The {@link Gtk.Viewport} widget acts as an adaptor class, implementing
     * scrollability for child widgets that lack their own scrolling
     * capabilities. Use GtkViewport to scroll child widgets such as
     * {@link Gtk.Grid}, {@link Gtk.Box}, and so on.
     * 
     * If a widget has native scrolling abilities, such as {@link Gtk.TextView},
     * {@link Gtk.TreeView} or {@link Gtk.IconView}, it can be added to a {@link Gtk.ScrolledWindow}
     * with `gtk_container_add()`. If a widget does not, you must first add the
     * widget to a {@link Gtk.Viewport}, then add the viewport to the scrolled window.
     * `gtk_container_add()` does this automatically if a child that does not
     * implement {@link Gtk.Scrollable} is added to a {@link Gtk.ScrolledWindow}, so you can
     * ignore the presence of the viewport.
     * 
     * The GtkViewport will start scrolling content only if allocated less
     * than the child widget’s minimum size in a given orientation.
     * 
     * # CSS nodes
     * 
     * GtkViewport has a single CSS node with name viewport.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class Viewport extends Bin implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable, Scrollable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<Viewport>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * @default Gtk.ShadowType.IN
         */
        get shadow_type(): ShadowType;
        set shadow_type(val: ShadowType);

        /**
         * @default Gtk.ShadowType.IN
         */
        get shadowType(): ShadowType;
        set shadowType(val: ShadowType);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: Viewport.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        bin: Bin;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<Viewport.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](hadjustment: Adjustment | null, vadjustment: Adjustment | null): Viewport;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof Viewport.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Viewport.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof Viewport.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Viewport.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof Viewport.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<Viewport.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Gets the bin window of the {@link Gtk.Viewport}.
         * @returns a {@link Gdk.Window}
         */
        get_bin_window(): Gdk.Window;

        /**
         * Returns the horizontal adjustment of the viewport.
         * @returns the horizontal adjustment of `viewport`.
         */
        get_hadjustment(): Adjustment;

        /**
         * Gets the shadow type of the {@link Gtk.Viewport}. See
         * `gtk_viewport_set_shadow_type()`.
         * @returns the shadow type
         */
        get_shadow_type(): ShadowType;

        /**
         * Returns the vertical adjustment of the viewport.
         * @returns the vertical adjustment of `viewport`.
         */
        get_vadjustment(): Adjustment;

        /**
         * Gets the view window of the {@link Gtk.Viewport}.
         * @returns a {@link Gdk.Window}
         */
        get_view_window(): Gdk.Window;

        /**
         * Sets the horizontal adjustment of the viewport.
         * @param adjustment a {@link Gtk.Adjustment}.
         */
        set_hadjustment(adjustment: Adjustment | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the shadow type of the viewport.
         * @param type the new shadow type.
         */
        set_shadow_type(type: ShadowType): void;

        /**
         * Sets the vertical adjustment of the viewport.
         * @param adjustment a {@link Gtk.Adjustment}.
         */
        set_vadjustment(adjustment: Adjustment | null): void;

        /**
         * Horizontal {@link Gtk.Adjustment} of the scrollable widget. This adjustment is
         * shared between the scrollable widget and its parent.
         * @since 3.0
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Scrollable
         */
        get hadjustment(): Adjustment;
        set hadjustment(val: Adjustment);

        /**
         * Determines whether horizontal scrolling should start once the scrollable
         * widget is allocated less than its minimum width or less than its natural width.
         * @since 3.0
         * @default Gtk.ScrollablePolicy.MINIMUM
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Scrollable
         */
        get hscroll_policy(): ScrollablePolicy;
        set hscroll_policy(val: ScrollablePolicy);

        /**
         * Determines whether horizontal scrolling should start once the scrollable
         * widget is allocated less than its minimum width or less than its natural width.
         * @since 3.0
         * @default Gtk.ScrollablePolicy.MINIMUM
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Scrollable
         */
        get hscrollPolicy(): ScrollablePolicy;
        set hscrollPolicy(val: ScrollablePolicy);

        /**
         * Verical {@link Gtk.Adjustment} of the scrollable widget. This adjustment is shared
         * between the scrollable widget and its parent.
         * @since 3.0
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Scrollable
         */
        get vadjustment(): Adjustment;
        set vadjustment(val: Adjustment);

        /**
         * Determines whether vertical scrolling should start once the scrollable
         * widget is allocated less than its minimum height or less than its natural height.
         * @since 3.0
         * @default Gtk.ScrollablePolicy.MINIMUM
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Scrollable
         */
        get vscroll_policy(): ScrollablePolicy;
        set vscroll_policy(val: ScrollablePolicy);

        /**
         * Determines whether vertical scrolling should start once the scrollable
         * widget is allocated less than its minimum height or less than its natural height.
         * @since 3.0
         * @default Gtk.ScrollablePolicy.MINIMUM
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Scrollable
         */
        get vscrollPolicy(): ScrollablePolicy;
        set vscrollPolicy(val: ScrollablePolicy);

        /**
         * Returns the size of a non-scrolling border around the
         * outside of the scrollable. An example for this would
         * be treeview headers. GTK+ can use this information to
         * display overlayed graphics, like the overshoot indication,
         * at the right position.
         * @returns `true` if `border` has been set
         */
        get_border(): [boolean, Border];

        /**
         * Gets the horizontal {@link Gtk.ScrollablePolicy}.
         * @returns The horizontal {@link Gtk.ScrollablePolicy}.
         */
        get_hscroll_policy(): ScrollablePolicy;

        /**
         * Gets the vertical {@link Gtk.ScrollablePolicy}.
         * @returns The vertical {@link Gtk.ScrollablePolicy}.
         */
        get_vscroll_policy(): ScrollablePolicy;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.ScrollablePolicy} to determine whether
         * horizontal scrolling should start below the minimum width or
         * below the natural width.
         * @param policy the horizontal {@link Gtk.ScrollablePolicy}
         */
        set_hscroll_policy(policy: ScrollablePolicy): void;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.ScrollablePolicy} to determine whether
         * vertical scrolling should start below the minimum height or
         * below the natural height.
         * @param policy the vertical {@link Gtk.ScrollablePolicy}
         */
        set_vscroll_policy(policy: ScrollablePolicy): void;

        /**
         * Returns the size of a non-scrolling border around the
         * outside of the scrollable. An example for this would
         * be treeview headers. GTK+ can use this information to
         * display overlayed graphics, like the overshoot indication,
         * at the right position.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_border(): [boolean, Border];
    }


    namespace VolumeButton {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends ScaleButton.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::use-symbolic": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::adjustment": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::icons": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::size": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::always-show-image": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::image": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::image-position": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::label": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::relief": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-stock": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::use-underline": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::xalign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::yalign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::orientation": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends ScaleButton.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Actionable.ConstructorProps, Activatable.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps, Orientable.ConstructorProps {
            use_symbolic: boolean;
            useSymbolic: boolean;
        }
    }

    /**
     * {@link Gtk.VolumeButton} is a subclass of {@link Gtk.ScaleButton} that has
     * been tailored for use as a volume control widget with suitable
     * icons, tooltips and accessible labels.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class VolumeButton extends ScaleButton implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Actionable, Activatable, Buildable, Orientable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<VolumeButton>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * Whether to use symbolic icons as the icons. Note that
         * if the symbolic icons are not available in your installed
         * theme, then the normal (potentially colorful) icons will
         * be used.
         * @since 3.0
         * @default true
         */
        get use_symbolic(): boolean;
        set use_symbolic(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether to use symbolic icons as the icons. Note that
         * if the symbolic icons are not available in your installed
         * theme, then the normal (potentially colorful) icons will
         * be used.
         * @since 3.0
         * @default true
         */
        get useSymbolic(): boolean;
        set useSymbolic(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: VolumeButton.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<VolumeButton.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): VolumeButton;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof VolumeButton.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, VolumeButton.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof VolumeButton.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, VolumeButton.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof VolumeButton.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<VolumeButton.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        /**
         * The orientation of the orientable.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default Gtk.Orientation.HORIZONTAL
          * @category Inherited from Gtk.Orientable
         */
        get orientation(): Orientation;
        set orientation(val: Orientation);

        /**
         * Retrieves the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @returns the orientation of the `orientable`.
         */
        get_orientation(): Orientation;

        /**
         * Sets the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @param orientation the orientable’s new orientation.
         */
        set_orientation(orientation: Orientation): void;

        /**
         * Emits a {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.child_notify | Gtk.Widget::child-notify} signal for the
         * [child property][child-properties] `child_property`
         * on `widget`.
         * 
         * This is the analogue of `g_object_notify()` for child properties.
         * 
         * Also see `gtk_container_child_notify()`.
         * @param child_property the name of a child property installed on the                  class of `widget`’s parent
         */
        child_notify(child_property: string): void;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
        // Conflicted with Gtk.Container.child_notify
        child_notify(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Returns whether the widget should grab focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
         * See `gtk_widget_set_focus_on_click()`.
         * @returns `true` if the widget should grab focus when it is clicked with               the mouse.
         */
        get_focus_on_click(): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets whether the widget should grab focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
         * Making mouse clicks not grab focus is useful in places like toolbars where
         * you don’t want the keyboard focus removed from the main area of the
         * application.
         * @param focus_on_click whether the widget should grab focus when clicked with the mouse
         */
        set_focus_on_click(focus_on_click: boolean): void;
    }


    namespace Widget {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends GObject.InitiallyUnowned.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * @signal
             */
            "accel-closures-changed": () => void;
            /**
             * The ::button-press-event signal will be emitted when a button
             * (typically from a mouse) is pressed.
             * 
             * To receive this signal, the {@link Gdk.Window} associated to the
             * widget needs to enable the #GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK mask.
             * 
             * This signal will be sent to the grab widget if there is one.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "button-press-event": (arg0: Gdk.EventButton) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * The ::button-release-event signal will be emitted when a button
             * (typically from a mouse) is released.
             * 
             * To receive this signal, the {@link Gdk.Window} associated to the
             * widget needs to enable the #GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK mask.
             * 
             * This signal will be sent to the grab widget if there is one.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "button-release-event": (arg0: Gdk.EventButton) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * Determines whether an accelerator that activates the signal
             * identified by `signal_id` can currently be activated.
             * This signal is present to allow applications and derived
             * widgets to override the default {@link Gtk.Widget} handling
             * for determining whether an accelerator can be activated.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "can-activate-accel": (arg0: number) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * The ::child-notify signal is emitted for each
             * [child property][child-properties]  that has
             * changed on an object. The signal's detail holds the property name.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "child-notify": (arg0: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            /**
             * The ::composited-changed signal is emitted when the composited
             * status of `widgets` screen changes.
             * See `gdk_screen_is_composited()`.
             * @signal
             * @deprecated since 3.22: Use GdkScreen::composited-changed instead.
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "composited-changed": () => void;
            /**
             * The ::configure-event signal will be emitted when the size, position or
             * stacking of the `widget`'s window has changed.
             * 
             * To receive this signal, the {@link Gdk.Window} associated to the widget needs
             * to enable the #GDK_STRUCTURE_MASK mask. GDK will enable this mask
             * automatically for all new windows.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "configure-event": (arg0: Gdk.EventConfigure) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * Emitted when a redirected window belonging to `widget` gets drawn into.
             * The region/area members of the event shows what area of the redirected
             * drawable was drawn into.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.14
             * @run-last
             */
            "damage-event": (arg0: Gdk.EventExpose) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * The ::delete-event signal is emitted if a user requests that
             * a toplevel window is closed. The default handler for this signal
             * destroys the window. Connecting `gtk_widget_hide_on_delete()` to
             * this signal will cause the window to be hidden instead, so that
             * it can later be shown again without reconstructing it.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "delete-event": (arg0: Gdk.Event) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * Signals that all holders of a reference to the widget should release
             * the reference that they hold. May result in finalization of the widget
             * if all references are released.
             * 
             * This signal is not suitable for saving widget state.
             * @signal
             * @run-cleanup
             */
            destroy: () => void;
            /**
             * The ::destroy-event signal is emitted when a {@link Gdk.Window} is destroyed.
             * You rarely get this signal, because most widgets disconnect themselves
             * from their window before they destroy it, so no widget owns the
             * window at destroy time.
             * 
             * To receive this signal, the {@link Gdk.Window} associated to the widget needs
             * to enable the #GDK_STRUCTURE_MASK mask. GDK will enable this mask
             * automatically for all new windows.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "destroy-event": (arg0: Gdk.Event) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * The ::direction-changed signal is emitted when the text direction
             * of a widget changes.
             * @signal
             * @run-first
             */
            "direction-changed": (arg0: TextDirection) => void;
            /**
             * The ::drag-begin signal is emitted on the drag source when a drag is
             * started. A typical reason to connect to this signal is to set up a
             * custom drag icon with e.g. `gtk_drag_source_set_icon_pixbuf()`.
             * 
             * Note that some widgets set up a drag icon in the default handler of
             * this signal, so you may have to use `g_signal_connect_after()` to
             * override what the default handler did.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "drag-begin": (arg0: Gdk.DragContext) => void;
            /**
             * The ::drag-data-delete signal is emitted on the drag source when a drag
             * with the action {@link Gdk.DragAction.MOVE} is successfully completed. The signal
             * handler is responsible for deleting the data that has been dropped. What
             * "delete" means depends on the context of the drag operation.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "drag-data-delete": (arg0: Gdk.DragContext) => void;
            /**
             * The ::drag-data-get signal is emitted on the drag source when the drop
             * site requests the data which is dragged. It is the responsibility of
             * the signal handler to fill `data` with the data in the format which
             * is indicated by `info`. See `gtk_selection_data_set()` and
             * `gtk_selection_data_set_text()`.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "drag-data-get": (arg0: Gdk.DragContext, arg1: SelectionData, arg2: number, arg3: number) => void;
            /**
             * The ::drag-data-received signal is emitted on the drop site when the
             * dragged data has been received. If the data was received in order to
             * determine whether the drop will be accepted, the handler is expected
             * to call `gdk_drag_status()` and not finish the drag.
             * If the data was received in response to a {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.drag_drop | Gtk.Widget::drag-drop} signal
             * (and this is the last target to be received), the handler for this
             * signal is expected to process the received data and then call
             * `gtk_drag_finish()`, setting the `success` parameter depending on
             * whether the data was processed successfully.
             * 
             * Applications must create some means to determine why the signal was emitted
             * and therefore whether to call `gdk_drag_status()` or `gtk_drag_finish()`.
             * 
             * The handler may inspect the selected action with
             * `gdk_drag_context_get_selected_action()` before calling
             * `gtk_drag_finish()`, e.g. to implement {@link Gdk.DragAction.ASK} as
             * shown in the following example:
             * 
             * ```c
             * void
             * drag_data_received (GtkWidget          *widget,
             *                     GdkDragContext     *context,
             *                     gint                x,
             *                     gint                y,
             *                     GtkSelectionData   *data,
             *                     guint               info,
             *                     guint               time)
             * {
             *   if ((data->length >= 0) && (data->format == 8))
             *     {
             *       GdkDragAction action;
             * 
             *       // handle data here
             * 
             *       action = gdk_drag_context_get_selected_action (context);
             *       if (action == GDK_ACTION_ASK)
             *         {
             *           GtkWidget *dialog;
             *           gint response;
             * 
             *           dialog = gtk_message_dialog_new (NULL,
             *                                            GTK_DIALOG_MODAL |
             *                                            GTK_DIALOG_DESTROY_WITH_PARENT,
             *                                            GTK_MESSAGE_INFO,
             *                                            GTK_BUTTONS_YES_NO,
             *                                            "Move the data ?\n");
             *           response = gtk_dialog_run (GTK_DIALOG (dialog));
             *           gtk_widget_destroy (dialog);
             * 
             *           if (response == GTK_RESPONSE_YES)
             *             action = GDK_ACTION_MOVE;
             *           else
             *             action = GDK_ACTION_COPY;
             *          }
             * 
             *       gtk_drag_finish (context, TRUE, action == GDK_ACTION_MOVE, time);
             *     }
             *   else
             *     gtk_drag_finish (context, FALSE, FALSE, time);
             *  }
             * ```
             * 
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "drag-data-received": (arg0: Gdk.DragContext, arg1: number, arg2: number, arg3: SelectionData, arg4: number, arg5: number) => void;
            /**
             * The ::drag-drop signal is emitted on the drop site when the user drops
             * the data onto the widget. The signal handler must determine whether
             * the cursor position is in a drop zone or not. If it is not in a drop
             * zone, it returns `false` and no further processing is necessary.
             * Otherwise, the handler returns `true`. In this case, the handler must
             * ensure that `gtk_drag_finish()` is called to let the source know that
             * the drop is done. The call to `gtk_drag_finish()` can be done either
             * directly or in a {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.drag_data_received | Gtk.Widget::drag-data-received} handler which gets
             * triggered by calling `gtk_drag_get_data()` to receive the data for one
             * or more of the supported targets.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "drag-drop": (arg0: Gdk.DragContext, arg1: number, arg2: number, arg3: number) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * The ::drag-end signal is emitted on the drag source when a drag is
             * finished.  A typical reason to connect to this signal is to undo
             * things done in {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.drag_begin | Gtk.Widget::drag-begin}.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "drag-end": (arg0: Gdk.DragContext) => void;
            /**
             * The ::drag-failed signal is emitted on the drag source when a drag has
             * failed. The signal handler may hook custom code to handle a failed DnD
             * operation based on the type of error, it returns `true` is the failure has
             * been already handled (not showing the default "drag operation failed"
             * animation), otherwise it returns `false`.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.12
             * @run-last
             */
            "drag-failed": (arg0: Gdk.DragContext, arg1: DragResult) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * The ::drag-leave signal is emitted on the drop site when the cursor
             * leaves the widget. A typical reason to connect to this signal is to
             * undo things done in {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.drag_motion | Gtk.Widget::drag-motion}, e.g. undo highlighting
             * with `gtk_drag_unhighlight()`.
             * 
             * 
             * Likewise, the {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.drag_leave | Gtk.Widget::drag-leave} signal is also emitted before the
             * ::drag-drop signal, for instance to allow cleaning up of a preview item
             * created in the {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.drag_motion | Gtk.Widget::drag-motion} signal handler.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "drag-leave": (arg0: Gdk.DragContext, arg1: number) => void;
            /**
             * The ::drag-motion signal is emitted on the drop site when the user
             * moves the cursor over the widget during a drag. The signal handler
             * must determine whether the cursor position is in a drop zone or not.
             * If it is not in a drop zone, it returns `false` and no further processing
             * is necessary. Otherwise, the handler returns `true`. In this case, the
             * handler is responsible for providing the necessary information for
             * displaying feedback to the user, by calling `gdk_drag_status()`.
             * 
             * If the decision whether the drop will be accepted or rejected can't be
             * made based solely on the cursor position and the type of the data, the
             * handler may inspect the dragged data by calling `gtk_drag_get_data()` and
             * defer the `gdk_drag_status()` call to the {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.drag_data_received | Gtk.Widget::drag-data-received}
             * handler. Note that you must pass #GTK_DEST_DEFAULT_DROP,
             * #GTK_DEST_DEFAULT_MOTION or #GTK_DEST_DEFAULT_ALL to `gtk_drag_dest_set()`
             * when using the drag-motion signal that way.
             * 
             * Also note that there is no drag-enter signal. The drag receiver has to
             * keep track of whether he has received any drag-motion signals since the
             * last {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.drag_leave | Gtk.Widget::drag-leave} and if not, treat the drag-motion signal as
             * an "enter" signal. Upon an "enter", the handler will typically highlight
             * the drop site with `gtk_drag_highlight()`.
             * 
             * ```c
             * static void
             * drag_motion (GtkWidget      *widget,
             *              GdkDragContext *context,
             *              gint            x,
             *              gint            y,
             *              guint           time)
             * {
             *   GdkAtom target;
             * 
             *   PrivateData *private_data = GET_PRIVATE_DATA (widget);
             * 
             *   if (!private_data->drag_highlight)
             *    {
             *      private_data->drag_highlight = 1;
             *      gtk_drag_highlight (widget);
             *    }
             * 
             *   target = gtk_drag_dest_find_target (widget, context, NULL);
             *   if (target == GDK_NONE)
             *     gdk_drag_status (context, 0, time);
             *   else
             *    {
             *      private_data->pending_status
             *         = gdk_drag_context_get_suggested_action (context);
             *      gtk_drag_get_data (widget, context, target, time);
             *    }
             * 
             *   return TRUE;
             * }
             * 
             * static void
             * drag_data_received (GtkWidget        *widget,
             *                     GdkDragContext   *context,
             *                     gint              x,
             *                     gint              y,
             *                     GtkSelectionData *selection_data,
             *                     guint             info,
             *                     guint             time)
             * {
             *   PrivateData *private_data = GET_PRIVATE_DATA (widget);
             * 
             *   if (private_data->suggested_action)
             *    {
             *      private_data->suggested_action = 0;
             * 
             *      // We are getting this data due to a request in drag_motion,
             *      // rather than due to a request in drag_drop, so we are just
             *      // supposed to call `gdk_drag_status()`, not actually paste in
             *      // the data.
             * 
             *      str = gtk_selection_data_get_text (selection_data);
             *      if (!data_is_acceptable (str))
             *        gdk_drag_status (context, 0, time);
             *      else
             *        gdk_drag_status (context,
             *                         private_data->suggested_action,
             *                         time);
             *    }
             *   else
             *    {
             *      // accept the drop
             *    }
             * }
             * ```
             * 
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "drag-motion": (arg0: Gdk.DragContext, arg1: number, arg2: number, arg3: number) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * This signal is emitted when a widget is supposed to render itself.
             * The `widget`'s top left corner must be painted at the origin of
             * the passed in context and be sized to the values returned by
             * `gtk_widget_get_allocated_width()` and
             * `gtk_widget_get_allocated_height()`.
             * 
             * Signal handlers connected to this signal can modify the cairo
             * context passed as `cr` in any way they like and don't need to
             * restore it. The signal emission takes care of calling `cairo_save()`
             * before and `cairo_restore()` after invoking the handler.
             * 
             * The signal handler will get a `cr` with a clip region already set to the
             * widget's dirty region, i.e. to the area that needs repainting.  Complicated
             * widgets that want to avoid redrawing themselves completely can get the full
             * extents of the clip region with `gdk_cairo_get_clip_rectangle()`, or they can
             * get a finer-grained representation of the dirty region with
             * `cairo_copy_clip_rectangle_list()`.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.0
             * @run-last
             */
            draw: (arg0: cairo.Context) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * The ::enter-notify-event will be emitted when the pointer enters
             * the `widget`'s window.
             * 
             * To receive this signal, the {@link Gdk.Window} associated to the widget needs
             * to enable the #GDK_ENTER_NOTIFY_MASK mask.
             * 
             * This signal will be sent to the grab widget if there is one.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "enter-notify-event": (arg0: Gdk.EventCrossing) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * The GTK+ main loop will emit three signals for each GDK event delivered
             * to a widget: one generic ::event signal, another, more specific,
             * signal that matches the type of event delivered (e.g.
             * {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.key_press_event | Gtk.Widget::key-press-event}) and finally a generic
             * {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.event_after | Gtk.Widget::event-after} signal.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            event: (arg0: Gdk.Event) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * After the emission of the {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.event | Gtk.Widget::event} signal and (optionally)
             * the second more specific signal, ::event-after will be emitted
             * regardless of the previous two signals handlers return values.
             * @signal
             */
            "event-after": (arg0: Gdk.Event) => void;
            /**
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            focus: (arg0: DirectionType) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * The ::focus-in-event signal will be emitted when the keyboard focus
             * enters the `widget`'s window.
             * 
             * To receive this signal, the {@link Gdk.Window} associated to the widget needs
             * to enable the #GDK_FOCUS_CHANGE_MASK mask.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "focus-in-event": (arg0: Gdk.EventFocus) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * The ::focus-out-event signal will be emitted when the keyboard focus
             * leaves the `widget`'s window.
             * 
             * To receive this signal, the {@link Gdk.Window} associated to the widget needs
             * to enable the #GDK_FOCUS_CHANGE_MASK mask.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "focus-out-event": (arg0: Gdk.EventFocus) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * Emitted when a pointer or keyboard grab on a window belonging
             * to `widget` gets broken.
             * 
             * On X11, this happens when the grab window becomes unviewable
             * (i.e. it or one of its ancestors is unmapped), or if the same
             * application grabs the pointer or keyboard again.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.8
             * @run-last
             */
            "grab-broken-event": (arg0: Gdk.EventGrabBroken) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "grab-focus": () => void;
            /**
             * The ::grab-notify signal is emitted when a widget becomes
             * shadowed by a GTK+ grab (not a pointer or keyboard grab) on
             * another widget, or when it becomes unshadowed due to a grab
             * being removed.
             * 
             * A widget is shadowed by a `gtk_grab_add()` when the topmost
             * grab widget in the grab stack of its window group is not
             * its ancestor.
             * @signal
             * @run-first
             */
            "grab-notify": (arg0: boolean) => void;
            /**
             * The ::hide signal is emitted when `widget` is hidden, for example with
             * `gtk_widget_hide()`.
             * @signal
             * @run-first
             */
            hide: () => void;
            /**
             * The ::hierarchy-changed signal is emitted when the
             * anchored state of a widget changes. A widget is
             * “anchored” when its toplevel
             * ancestor is a {@link Gtk.Window}. This signal is emitted when
             * a widget changes from un-anchored to anchored or vice-versa.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "hierarchy-changed": (arg0: Widget | null) => void;
            /**
             * The ::key-press-event signal is emitted when a key is pressed. The signal
             * emission will reoccur at the key-repeat rate when the key is kept pressed.
             * 
             * To receive this signal, the {@link Gdk.Window} associated to the widget needs
             * to enable the #GDK_KEY_PRESS_MASK mask.
             * 
             * This signal will be sent to the grab widget if there is one.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "key-press-event": (arg0: Gdk.EventKey) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * The ::key-release-event signal is emitted when a key is released.
             * 
             * To receive this signal, the {@link Gdk.Window} associated to the widget needs
             * to enable the #GDK_KEY_RELEASE_MASK mask.
             * 
             * This signal will be sent to the grab widget if there is one.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "key-release-event": (arg0: Gdk.EventKey) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * Gets emitted if keyboard navigation fails.
             * See `gtk_widget_keynav_failed()` for details.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.12
             * @run-last
             */
            "keynav-failed": (arg0: DirectionType) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * The ::leave-notify-event will be emitted when the pointer leaves
             * the `widget`'s window.
             * 
             * To receive this signal, the {@link Gdk.Window} associated to the widget needs
             * to enable the #GDK_LEAVE_NOTIFY_MASK mask.
             * 
             * This signal will be sent to the grab widget if there is one.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "leave-notify-event": (arg0: Gdk.EventCrossing) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * The ::map signal is emitted when `widget` is going to be mapped, that is
             * when the widget is visible (which is controlled with
             * `gtk_widget_set_visible()`) and all its parents up to the toplevel widget
             * are also visible. Once the map has occurred, {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.map_event | Gtk.Widget::map-event} will
             * be emitted.
             * 
             * The ::map signal can be used to determine whether a widget will be drawn,
             * for instance it can resume an animation that was stopped during the
             * emission of {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.unmap | Gtk.Widget::unmap}.
             * @signal
             * @run-first
             */
            map: () => void;
            /**
             * The ::map-event signal will be emitted when the `widget`'s window is
             * mapped. A window is mapped when it becomes visible on the screen.
             * 
             * To receive this signal, the {@link Gdk.Window} associated to the widget needs
             * to enable the #GDK_STRUCTURE_MASK mask. GDK will enable this mask
             * automatically for all new windows.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "map-event": (arg0: Gdk.EventAny) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * The default handler for this signal activates `widget` if `group_cycling`
             * is `false`, or just makes `widget` grab focus if `group_cycling` is `true`.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "mnemonic-activate": (arg0: boolean) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * The ::motion-notify-event signal is emitted when the pointer moves
             * over the widget's {@link Gdk.Window}.
             * 
             * To receive this signal, the {@link Gdk.Window} associated to the widget
             * needs to enable the #GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK mask.
             * 
             * This signal will be sent to the grab widget if there is one.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "motion-notify-event": (arg0: Gdk.EventMotion) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "move-focus": (arg0: DirectionType) => void;
            /**
             * The ::parent-set signal is emitted when a new parent
             * has been set on a widget.
             * @signal
             * @run-first
             */
            "parent-set": (arg0: Widget | null) => void;
            /**
             * This signal gets emitted whenever a widget should pop up a context
             * menu. This usually happens through the standard key binding mechanism;
             * by pressing a certain key while a widget is focused, the user can cause
             * the widget to pop up a menu.  For example, the {@link Gtk.Entry} widget creates
             * a menu with clipboard commands. See the
             * [Popup Menu Migration Checklist][checklist-popup-menu]
             * for an example of how to use this signal.
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "popup-menu": () => boolean | void;
            /**
             * The ::property-notify-event signal will be emitted when a property on
             * the `widget`'s window has been changed or deleted.
             * 
             * To receive this signal, the {@link Gdk.Window} associated to the widget needs
             * to enable the #GDK_PROPERTY_CHANGE_MASK mask.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "property-notify-event": (arg0: Gdk.EventProperty) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * To receive this signal the {@link Gdk.Window} associated to the widget needs
             * to enable the #GDK_PROXIMITY_IN_MASK mask.
             * 
             * This signal will be sent to the grab widget if there is one.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "proximity-in-event": (arg0: Gdk.EventProximity) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * To receive this signal the {@link Gdk.Window} associated to the widget needs
             * to enable the #GDK_PROXIMITY_OUT_MASK mask.
             * 
             * This signal will be sent to the grab widget if there is one.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "proximity-out-event": (arg0: Gdk.EventProximity) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * Emitted when {@link Gtk.Widget.has_tooltip} is `true` and the hover timeout
             * has expired with the cursor hovering "above" `widget`; or emitted when `widget` got
             * focus in keyboard mode.
             * 
             * Using the given coordinates, the signal handler should determine
             * whether a tooltip should be shown for `widget`. If this is the case
             * `true` should be returned, `false` otherwise.  Note that if
             * `keyboard_mode` is `true`, the values of `x` and `y` are undefined and
             * should not be used.
             * 
             * The signal handler is free to manipulate `tooltip` with the therefore
             * destined function calls.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.12
             * @run-last
             */
            "query-tooltip": (arg0: number, arg1: number, arg2: boolean, arg3: Tooltip) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * The ::realize signal is emitted when `widget` is associated with a
             * {@link Gdk.Window}, which means that `gtk_widget_realize()` has been called or the
             * widget has been mapped (that is, it is going to be drawn).
             * @signal
             * @run-first
             */
            realize: () => void;
            /**
             * The ::screen-changed signal gets emitted when the
             * screen of a widget has changed.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "screen-changed": (arg0: Gdk.Screen | null) => void;
            /**
             * The ::scroll-event signal is emitted when a button in the 4 to 7
             * range is pressed. Wheel mice are usually configured to generate
             * button press events for buttons 4 and 5 when the wheel is turned.
             * 
             * To receive this signal, the {@link Gdk.Window} associated to the widget needs
             * to enable the #GDK_SCROLL_MASK mask.
             * 
             * This signal will be sent to the grab widget if there is one.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "scroll-event": (arg0: Gdk.EventScroll) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * The ::selection-clear-event signal will be emitted when the
             * the `widget`'s window has lost ownership of a selection.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "selection-clear-event": (arg0: Gdk.EventSelection) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "selection-get": (arg0: SelectionData, arg1: number, arg2: number) => void;
            /**
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "selection-notify-event": (arg0: Gdk.EventSelection) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "selection-received": (arg0: SelectionData, arg1: number) => void;
            /**
             * The ::selection-request-event signal will be emitted when
             * another client requests ownership of the selection owned by
             * the `widget`'s window.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "selection-request-event": (arg0: Gdk.EventSelection) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * The ::show signal is emitted when `widget` is shown, for example with
             * `gtk_widget_show()`.
             * @signal
             * @run-first
             */
            show: () => void;
            /**
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "show-help": (arg0: WidgetHelpType) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * @signal
             * @run-first
             */
            "size-allocate": (arg0: Allocation) => void;
            /**
             * The ::state-changed signal is emitted when the widget state changes.
             * See `gtk_widget_get_state()`.
             * @signal
             * @deprecated since 3.0: Use {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.state_flags_changed | Gtk.Widget::state-flags-changed} instead.
             * @run-first
             */
            "state-changed": (arg0: StateType) => void;
            /**
             * The ::state-flags-changed signal is emitted when the widget state
             * changes, see `gtk_widget_get_state_flags()`.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.0
             * @run-first
             */
            "state-flags-changed": (arg0: StateFlags) => void;
            /**
             * The ::style-set signal is emitted when a new style has been set
             * on a widget. Note that style-modifying functions like
             * `gtk_widget_modify_base()` also cause this signal to be emitted.
             * 
             * Note that this signal is emitted for changes to the deprecated
             * {@link Gtk.Style}. To track changes to the {@link Gtk.StyleContext} associated
             * with a widget, use the {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.style_updated | Gtk.Widget::style-updated} signal.
             * @signal
             * @deprecated since 3.0: Use the {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.style_updated | Gtk.Widget::style-updated} signal
             * @run-first
             */
            "style-set": (arg0: Style | null) => void;
            /**
             * The ::style-updated signal is a convenience signal that is emitted when the
             * {@link Gtk.StyleContext.SignalSignatures.changed | Gtk.StyleContext::changed} signal is emitted on the `widget`'s associated
             * {@link Gtk.StyleContext} as returned by `gtk_widget_get_style_context()`.
             * 
             * Note that style-modifying functions like `gtk_widget_override_color()` also
             * cause this signal to be emitted.
             * @signal
             * @since 3.0
             * @run-first
             */
            "style-updated": () => void;
            /**
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "touch-event": (arg0: Gdk.Event) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * The ::unmap signal is emitted when `widget` is going to be unmapped, which
             * means that either it or any of its parents up to the toplevel widget have
             * been set as hidden.
             * 
             * As ::unmap indicates that a widget will not be shown any longer, it can be
             * used to, for example, stop an animation on the widget.
             * @signal
             * @run-first
             */
            unmap: () => void;
            /**
             * The ::unmap-event signal will be emitted when the `widget`'s window is
             * unmapped. A window is unmapped when it becomes invisible on the screen.
             * 
             * To receive this signal, the {@link Gdk.Window} associated to the widget needs
             * to enable the #GDK_STRUCTURE_MASK mask. GDK will enable this mask
             * automatically for all new windows.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "unmap-event": (arg0: Gdk.EventAny) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * The ::unrealize signal is emitted when the {@link Gdk.Window} associated with
             * `widget` is destroyed, which means that `gtk_widget_unrealize()` has been
             * called or the widget has been unmapped (that is, it is going to be
             * hidden).
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            unrealize: () => void;
            /**
             * The ::visibility-notify-event will be emitted when the `widget`'s
             * window is obscured or unobscured.
             * 
             * To receive this signal the {@link Gdk.Window} associated to the widget needs
             * to enable the #GDK_VISIBILITY_NOTIFY_MASK mask.
             * @signal
             * @deprecated since 3.12: Modern composited windowing systems with pervasive     transparency make it impossible to track the visibility of a window     reliably, so this signal can not be guaranteed to provide useful     information.
             * @run-last
             */
            "visibility-notify-event": (arg0: Gdk.EventVisibility) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * The ::window-state-event will be emitted when the state of the
             * toplevel window associated to the `widget` changes.
             * 
             * To receive this signal the {@link Gdk.Window} associated to the widget
             * needs to enable the #GDK_STRUCTURE_MASK mask. GDK will enable
             * this mask automatically for all new windows.
             * @signal
             * @run-last
             */
            "window-state-event": (arg0: Gdk.EventWindowState) => boolean | void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            /**
             * The ::child-notify signal is emitted for each
             * [child property][child-properties]  that has
             * changed on an object. The signal's detail holds the property name.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "child-notify::app-paintable": (arg0: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            /**
             * The ::child-notify signal is emitted for each
             * [child property][child-properties]  that has
             * changed on an object. The signal's detail holds the property name.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "child-notify::can-default": (arg0: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            /**
             * The ::child-notify signal is emitted for each
             * [child property][child-properties]  that has
             * changed on an object. The signal's detail holds the property name.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "child-notify::can-focus": (arg0: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            /**
             * The ::child-notify signal is emitted for each
             * [child property][child-properties]  that has
             * changed on an object. The signal's detail holds the property name.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "child-notify::composite-child": (arg0: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            /**
             * The ::child-notify signal is emitted for each
             * [child property][child-properties]  that has
             * changed on an object. The signal's detail holds the property name.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "child-notify::double-buffered": (arg0: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            /**
             * The ::child-notify signal is emitted for each
             * [child property][child-properties]  that has
             * changed on an object. The signal's detail holds the property name.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "child-notify::events": (arg0: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            /**
             * The ::child-notify signal is emitted for each
             * [child property][child-properties]  that has
             * changed on an object. The signal's detail holds the property name.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "child-notify::expand": (arg0: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            /**
             * The ::child-notify signal is emitted for each
             * [child property][child-properties]  that has
             * changed on an object. The signal's detail holds the property name.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "child-notify::focus-on-click": (arg0: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            /**
             * The ::child-notify signal is emitted for each
             * [child property][child-properties]  that has
             * changed on an object. The signal's detail holds the property name.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "child-notify::halign": (arg0: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            /**
             * The ::child-notify signal is emitted for each
             * [child property][child-properties]  that has
             * changed on an object. The signal's detail holds the property name.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "child-notify::has-default": (arg0: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            /**
             * The ::child-notify signal is emitted for each
             * [child property][child-properties]  that has
             * changed on an object. The signal's detail holds the property name.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "child-notify::has-focus": (arg0: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            /**
             * The ::child-notify signal is emitted for each
             * [child property][child-properties]  that has
             * changed on an object. The signal's detail holds the property name.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "child-notify::has-tooltip": (arg0: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            /**
             * The ::child-notify signal is emitted for each
             * [child property][child-properties]  that has
             * changed on an object. The signal's detail holds the property name.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "child-notify::height-request": (arg0: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            /**
             * The ::child-notify signal is emitted for each
             * [child property][child-properties]  that has
             * changed on an object. The signal's detail holds the property name.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "child-notify::hexpand": (arg0: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            /**
             * The ::child-notify signal is emitted for each
             * [child property][child-properties]  that has
             * changed on an object. The signal's detail holds the property name.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "child-notify::hexpand-set": (arg0: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            /**
             * The ::child-notify signal is emitted for each
             * [child property][child-properties]  that has
             * changed on an object. The signal's detail holds the property name.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "child-notify::is-focus": (arg0: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            /**
             * The ::child-notify signal is emitted for each
             * [child property][child-properties]  that has
             * changed on an object. The signal's detail holds the property name.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "child-notify::margin": (arg0: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            /**
             * The ::child-notify signal is emitted for each
             * [child property][child-properties]  that has
             * changed on an object. The signal's detail holds the property name.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "child-notify::margin-bottom": (arg0: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            /**
             * The ::child-notify signal is emitted for each
             * [child property][child-properties]  that has
             * changed on an object. The signal's detail holds the property name.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "child-notify::margin-end": (arg0: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            /**
             * The ::child-notify signal is emitted for each
             * [child property][child-properties]  that has
             * changed on an object. The signal's detail holds the property name.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "child-notify::margin-left": (arg0: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            /**
             * The ::child-notify signal is emitted for each
             * [child property][child-properties]  that has
             * changed on an object. The signal's detail holds the property name.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "child-notify::margin-right": (arg0: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            /**
             * The ::child-notify signal is emitted for each
             * [child property][child-properties]  that has
             * changed on an object. The signal's detail holds the property name.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "child-notify::margin-start": (arg0: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            /**
             * The ::child-notify signal is emitted for each
             * [child property][child-properties]  that has
             * changed on an object. The signal's detail holds the property name.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "child-notify::margin-top": (arg0: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            /**
             * The ::child-notify signal is emitted for each
             * [child property][child-properties]  that has
             * changed on an object. The signal's detail holds the property name.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "child-notify::name": (arg0: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            /**
             * The ::child-notify signal is emitted for each
             * [child property][child-properties]  that has
             * changed on an object. The signal's detail holds the property name.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "child-notify::no-show-all": (arg0: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            /**
             * The ::child-notify signal is emitted for each
             * [child property][child-properties]  that has
             * changed on an object. The signal's detail holds the property name.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "child-notify::opacity": (arg0: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            /**
             * The ::child-notify signal is emitted for each
             * [child property][child-properties]  that has
             * changed on an object. The signal's detail holds the property name.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "child-notify::parent": (arg0: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            /**
             * The ::child-notify signal is emitted for each
             * [child property][child-properties]  that has
             * changed on an object. The signal's detail holds the property name.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "child-notify::receives-default": (arg0: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            /**
             * The ::child-notify signal is emitted for each
             * [child property][child-properties]  that has
             * changed on an object. The signal's detail holds the property name.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "child-notify::scale-factor": (arg0: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            /**
             * The ::child-notify signal is emitted for each
             * [child property][child-properties]  that has
             * changed on an object. The signal's detail holds the property name.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "child-notify::sensitive": (arg0: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            /**
             * The ::child-notify signal is emitted for each
             * [child property][child-properties]  that has
             * changed on an object. The signal's detail holds the property name.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "child-notify::style": (arg0: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            /**
             * The ::child-notify signal is emitted for each
             * [child property][child-properties]  that has
             * changed on an object. The signal's detail holds the property name.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "child-notify::tooltip-markup": (arg0: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            /**
             * The ::child-notify signal is emitted for each
             * [child property][child-properties]  that has
             * changed on an object. The signal's detail holds the property name.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "child-notify::tooltip-text": (arg0: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            /**
             * The ::child-notify signal is emitted for each
             * [child property][child-properties]  that has
             * changed on an object. The signal's detail holds the property name.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "child-notify::valign": (arg0: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            /**
             * The ::child-notify signal is emitted for each
             * [child property][child-properties]  that has
             * changed on an object. The signal's detail holds the property name.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "child-notify::vexpand": (arg0: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            /**
             * The ::child-notify signal is emitted for each
             * [child property][child-properties]  that has
             * changed on an object. The signal's detail holds the property name.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "child-notify::vexpand-set": (arg0: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            /**
             * The ::child-notify signal is emitted for each
             * [child property][child-properties]  that has
             * changed on an object. The signal's detail holds the property name.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "child-notify::visible": (arg0: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            /**
             * The ::child-notify signal is emitted for each
             * [child property][child-properties]  that has
             * changed on an object. The signal's detail holds the property name.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "child-notify::width-request": (arg0: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            /**
             * The ::child-notify signal is emitted for each
             * [child property][child-properties]  that has
             * changed on an object. The signal's detail holds the property name.
             * @signal
             * @detailed
             * @run-first
             */
            "child-notify::window": (arg0: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            [key: `child-notify::${string}`]: (arg0: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.InitiallyUnowned.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {
            app_paintable: boolean;
            appPaintable: boolean;
            can_default: boolean;
            canDefault: boolean;
            can_focus: boolean;
            canFocus: boolean;
            composite_child: boolean;
            compositeChild: boolean;
            double_buffered: boolean;
            doubleBuffered: boolean;
            events: Gdk.EventMask;
            expand: boolean;
            focus_on_click: boolean;
            focusOnClick: boolean;
            halign: Align;
            has_default: boolean;
            hasDefault: boolean;
            has_focus: boolean;
            hasFocus: boolean;
            has_tooltip: boolean;
            hasTooltip: boolean;
            height_request: number;
            heightRequest: number;
            hexpand: boolean;
            hexpand_set: boolean;
            hexpandSet: boolean;
            is_focus: boolean;
            isFocus: boolean;
            margin: number;
            margin_bottom: number;
            marginBottom: number;
            margin_end: number;
            marginEnd: number;
            margin_left: number;
            marginLeft: number;
            margin_right: number;
            marginRight: number;
            margin_start: number;
            marginStart: number;
            margin_top: number;
            marginTop: number;
            name: string;
            no_show_all: boolean;
            noShowAll: boolean;
            opacity: number;
            parent: Container | null;
            receives_default: boolean;
            receivesDefault: boolean;
            scale_factor: number;
            scaleFactor: number;
            sensitive: boolean;
            style: Style;
            tooltip_markup: string | null;
            tooltipMarkup: string | null;
            tooltip_text: string | null;
            tooltipText: string | null;
            valign: Align;
            vexpand: boolean;
            vexpand_set: boolean;
            vexpandSet: boolean;
            visible: boolean;
            width_request: number;
            widthRequest: number;
            window: Gdk.Window | null;
        }
    }

    /**
     * GtkWidget is the base class all widgets in GTK+ derive from. It manages the
     * widget lifecycle, states and style.
     * 
     * # Height-for-width Geometry Management # {#geometry-management}
     * 
     * GTK+ uses a height-for-width (and width-for-height) geometry management
     * system. Height-for-width means that a widget can change how much
     * vertical space it needs, depending on the amount of horizontal space
     * that it is given (and similar for width-for-height). The most common
     * example is a label that reflows to fill up the available width, wraps
     * to fewer lines, and therefore needs less height.
     * 
     * Height-for-width geometry management is implemented in GTK+ by way
     * of five virtual methods:
     * 
     * - {@link Gtk.WidgetClass}.get_request_mode()
     * - {@link Gtk.WidgetClass}.get_preferred_width()
     * - {@link Gtk.WidgetClass}.get_preferred_height()
     * - {@link Gtk.WidgetClass}.get_preferred_height_for_width()
     * - {@link Gtk.WidgetClass}.get_preferred_width_for_height()
     * - {@link Gtk.WidgetClass}.get_preferred_height_and_baseline_for_width()
     * 
     * There are some important things to keep in mind when implementing
     * height-for-width and when using it in container implementations.
     * 
     * The geometry management system will query a widget hierarchy in
     * only one orientation at a time. When widgets are initially queried
     * for their minimum sizes it is generally done in two initial passes
     * in the {@link Gtk.SizeRequestMode} chosen by the toplevel.
     * 
     * For example, when queried in the normal
     * {@link Gtk.SizeRequestMode.HEIGHT_FOR_WIDTH} mode:
     * First, the default minimum and natural width for each widget
     * in the interface will be computed using `gtk_widget_get_preferred_width()`.
     * Because the preferred widths for each container depend on the preferred
     * widths of their children, this information propagates up the hierarchy,
     * and finally a minimum and natural width is determined for the entire
     * toplevel. Next, the toplevel will use the minimum width to query for the
     * minimum height contextual to that width using
     * `gtk_widget_get_preferred_height_for_width()`, which will also be a highly
     * recursive operation. The minimum height for the minimum width is normally
     * used to set the minimum size constraint on the toplevel
     * (unless `gtk_window_set_geometry_hints()` is explicitly used instead).
     * 
     * After the toplevel window has initially requested its size in both
     * dimensions it can go on to allocate itself a reasonable size (or a size
     * previously specified with `gtk_window_set_default_size()`). During the
     * recursive allocation process it’s important to note that request cycles
     * will be recursively executed while container widgets allocate their children.
     * Each container widget, once allocated a size, will go on to first share the
     * space in one orientation among its children and then request each child's
     * height for its target allocated width or its width for allocated height,
     * depending. In this way a {@link Gtk.Widget} will typically be requested its size
     * a number of times before actually being allocated a size. The size a
     * widget is finally allocated can of course differ from the size it has
     * requested. For this reason, {@link Gtk.Widget} caches a  small number of results
     * to avoid re-querying for the same sizes in one allocation cycle.
     * 
     * See
     * [GtkContainer’s geometry management section][container-geometry-management]
     * to learn more about how height-for-width allocations are performed
     * by container widgets.
     * 
     * If a widget does move content around to intelligently use up the
     * allocated size then it must support the request in both
     * `GtkSizeRequestModes` even if the widget in question only
     * trades sizes in a single orientation.
     * 
     * For instance, a {@link Gtk.Label} that does height-for-width word wrapping
     * will not expect to have {@link Gtk.WidgetClass}.get_preferred_height() called
     * because that call is specific to a width-for-height request. In this
     * case the label must return the height required for its own minimum
     * possible width. By following this rule any widget that handles
     * height-for-width or width-for-height requests will always be allocated
     * at least enough space to fit its own content.
     * 
     * Here are some examples of how a {@link Gtk.SizeRequestMode.HEIGHT_FOR_WIDTH} widget
     * generally deals with width-for-height requests, for {@link Gtk.WidgetClass}.get_preferred_height()
     * it will do:
     * 
     * 
     * ```c
     * static void
     * foo_widget_get_preferred_height (GtkWidget *widget,
     *                                  gint *min_height,
     *                                  gint *nat_height)
     * {
     *    if (i_am_in_height_for_width_mode)
     *      {
     *        gint min_width, nat_width;
     * 
     *        GTK_WIDGET_GET_CLASS (widget)->get_preferred_width (widget,
     *                                                            &min_width,
     *                                                            &nat_width);
     *        GTK_WIDGET_GET_CLASS (widget)->get_preferred_height_for_width
     *                                                           (widget,
     *                                                            min_width,
     *                                                            min_height,
     *                                                            nat_height);
     *      }
     *    else
     *      {
     *         ... some widgets do both. For instance, if a GtkLabel is
     *         rotated to 90 degrees it will return the minimum and
     *         natural height for the rotated label here.
     *      }
     * }
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * And in {@link Gtk.WidgetClass}.get_preferred_width_for_height() it will simply return
     * the minimum and natural width:
     * 
     * ```c
     * static void
     * foo_widget_get_preferred_width_for_height (GtkWidget *widget,
     *                                            gint for_height,
     *                                            gint *min_width,
     *                                            gint *nat_width)
     * {
     *    if (i_am_in_height_for_width_mode)
     *      {
     *        GTK_WIDGET_GET_CLASS (widget)->get_preferred_width (widget,
     *                                                            min_width,
     *                                                            nat_width);
     *      }
     *    else
     *      {
     *         ... again if a widget is sometimes operating in
     *         width-for-height mode (like a rotated GtkLabel) it can go
     *         ahead and do its real width for height calculation here.
     *      }
     * }
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * Often a widget needs to get its own request during size request or
     * allocation. For example, when computing height it may need to also
     * compute width. Or when deciding how to use an allocation, the widget
     * may need to know its natural size. In these cases, the widget should
     * be careful to call its virtual methods directly, like this:
     * 
     * 
     * ```c
     * GTK_WIDGET_GET_CLASS(widget)->get_preferred_width (widget,
     *                                                    &min,
     *                                                    &natural);
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * It will not work to use the wrapper functions, such as
     * `gtk_widget_get_preferred_width()` inside your own size request
     * implementation. These return a request adjusted by {@link Gtk.SizeGroup}
     * and by the {@link Gtk.WidgetClass}.adjust_size_request() virtual method. If a
     * widget used the wrappers inside its virtual method implementations,
     * then the adjustments (such as widget margins) would be applied
     * twice. GTK+ therefore does not allow this and will warn if you try
     * to do it.
     * 
     * Of course if you are getting the size request for
     * another widget, such as a child of a
     * container, you must use the wrapper APIs.
     * Otherwise, you would not properly consider widget margins,
     * {@link Gtk.SizeGroup}, and so forth.
     * 
     * Since 3.10 GTK+ also supports baseline vertical alignment of widgets. This
     * means that widgets are positioned such that the typographical baseline of
     * widgets in the same row are aligned. This happens if a widget supports baselines,
     * has a vertical alignment of {@link Gtk.Align.BASELINE}, and is inside a container
     * that supports baselines and has a natural “row” that it aligns to the baseline,
     * or a baseline assigned to it by the grandparent.
     * 
     * Baseline alignment support for a widget is done by the {@link Gtk.WidgetClass}.get_preferred_height_and_baseline_for_width()
     * virtual function. It allows you to report a baseline in combination with the
     * minimum and natural height. If there is no baseline you can return -1 to indicate
     * this. The default implementation of this virtual function calls into the
     * {@link Gtk.WidgetClass}.get_preferred_height() and {@link Gtk.WidgetClass}.get_preferred_height_for_width(),
     * so if baselines are not supported it doesn’t need to be implemented.
     * 
     * If a widget ends up baseline aligned it will be allocated all the space in the parent
     * as if it was {@link Gtk.Align.FILL}, but the selected baseline can be found via `gtk_widget_get_allocated_baseline()`.
     * If this has a value other than -1 you need to align the widget such that the baseline
     * appears at the position.
     * 
     * # Style Properties
     * 
     * {@link Gtk.Widget} introduces “style
     * properties” - these are basically object properties that are stored
     * not on the object, but in the style object associated to the widget. Style
     * properties are set in [resource files][gtk3-Resource-Files].
     * This mechanism is used for configuring such things as the location of the
     * scrollbar arrows through the theme, giving theme authors more control over the
     * look of applications without the need to write a theme engine in C.
     * 
     * Use `gtk_widget_class_install_style_property()` to install style properties for
     * a widget class, `gtk_widget_class_find_style_property()` or
     * `gtk_widget_class_list_style_properties()` to get information about existing
     * style properties and `gtk_widget_style_get_property()`, `gtk_widget_style_get()` or
     * `gtk_widget_style_get_valist()` to obtain the value of a style property.
     * 
     * # GtkWidget as GtkBuildable
     * 
     * The GtkWidget implementation of the GtkBuildable interface supports a
     * custom `<accelerator>` element, which has attributes named ”key”, ”modifiers”
     * and ”signal” and allows to specify accelerators.
     * 
     * An example of a UI definition fragment specifying an accelerator:
     * 
     * 
     * ```xml
     * <object class="GtkButton">
     *   <accelerator key="q" modifiers="GDK_CONTROL_MASK" signal="clicked"/>
     * </object>
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * In addition to accelerators, GtkWidget also support a custom `<accessible>`
     * element, which supports actions and relations. Properties on the accessible
     * implementation of an object can be set by accessing the internal child
     * “accessible” of a {@link Gtk.Widget}.
     * 
     * An example of a UI definition fragment specifying an accessible:
     * 
     * 
     * ```xml
     * <object class="GtkLabel" id="label1"/>
     *   <property name="label">I am a Label for a Button</property>
     * </object>
     * <object class="GtkButton" id="button1">
     *   <accessibility>
     *     <action action_name="click" translatable="yes">Click the button.</action>
     *     <relation target="label1" type="labelled-by"/>
     *   </accessibility>
     *   <child internal-child="accessible">
     *     <object class="AtkObject" id="a11y-button1">
     *       <property name="accessible-name">Clickable Button</property>
     *     </object>
     *   </child>
     * </object>
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * Finally, GtkWidget allows style information such as style classes to
     * be associated with widgets, using the custom `<style>` element:
     * 
     * 
     * ```xml
     * <object class="GtkButton" id="button1">
     *   <style>
     *     <class name="my-special-button-class"/>
     *     <class name="dark-button"/>
     *   </style>
     * </object>
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * # Building composite widgets from template XML ## {#composite-templates}
     * 
     * GtkWidget exposes some facilities to automate the procedure
     * of creating composite widgets using {@link Gtk.Builder} interface description
     * language.
     * 
     * To create composite widgets with {@link Gtk.Builder} XML, one must associate
     * the interface description with the widget class at class initialization
     * time using `gtk_widget_class_set_template()`.
     * 
     * The interface description semantics expected in composite template descriptions
     * is slightly different from regular {@link Gtk.Builder} XML.
     * 
     * Unlike regular interface descriptions, `gtk_widget_class_set_template()` will
     * expect a `<template>` tag as a direct child of the toplevel `<interface>`
     * tag. The `<template>` tag must specify the “class” attribute which must be
     * the type name of the widget. Optionally, the “parent” attribute may be
     * specified to specify the direct parent type of the widget type, this is
     * ignored by the GtkBuilder but required for Glade to introspect what kind
     * of properties and internal children exist for a given type when the actual
     * type does not exist.
     * 
     * The XML which is contained inside the `<template>` tag behaves as if it were
     * added to the `<object>` tag defining "widget" itself. You may set properties
     * on `widget` by inserting `<property>` tags into the `<template>` tag, and also
     * add `<child>` tags to add children and extend "widget" in the normal way you
     * would with `<object>` tags.
     * 
     * Additionally, `<object>` tags can also be added before and after the initial
     * `<template>` tag in the normal way, allowing one to define auxiliary objects
     * which might be referenced by other widgets declared as children of the
     * `<template>` tag.
     * 
     * An example of a GtkBuilder Template Definition:
     * 
     * 
     * ```xml
     * <interface>
     *   <template class="FooWidget" parent="GtkBox">
     *     <property name="orientation">GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL</property>
     *     <property name="spacing">4</property>
     *     <child>
     *       <object class="GtkButton" id="hello_button">
     *         <property name="label">Hello World</property>
     *         <signal name="clicked" handler="hello_button_clicked" object="FooWidget" swapped="yes"/>
     *       </object>
     *     </child>
     *     <child>
     *       <object class="GtkButton" id="goodbye_button">
     *         <property name="label">Goodbye World</property>
     *       </object>
     *     </child>
     *   </template>
     * </interface>
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * Typically, you'll place the template fragment into a file that is
     * bundled with your project, using {@link Gio.Resource}. In order to load the
     * template, you need to call `gtk_widget_class_set_template_from_resource()`
     * from the class initialization of your {@link Gtk.Widget} type:
     * 
     * 
     * ```c
     * static void
     * foo_widget_class_init (FooWidgetClass *klass)
     * {
     *   // ...
     * 
     *   gtk_widget_class_set_template_from_resource (GTK_WIDGET_CLASS (klass),
     *                                                "/com/example/ui/foowidget.ui");
     * }
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * You will also need to call `gtk_widget_init_template()` from the instance
     * initialization function:
     * 
     * 
     * ```c
     * static void
     * foo_widget_init (FooWidget *self)
     * {
     *   // ...
     *   gtk_widget_init_template (GTK_WIDGET (self));
     * }
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * You can access widgets defined in the template using the
     * `gtk_widget_get_template_child()` function, but you will typically declare
     * a pointer in the instance private data structure of your type using the same
     * name as the widget in the template definition, and call
     * `gtk_widget_class_bind_template_child_private()` with that name, e.g.
     * 
     * 
     * ```c
     * typedef struct {
     *   GtkWidget *hello_button;
     *   GtkWidget *goodbye_button;
     * } FooWidgetPrivate;
     * 
     * G_DEFINE_TYPE_WITH_PRIVATE (FooWidget, foo_widget, GTK_TYPE_BOX)
     * 
     * static void
     * foo_widget_class_init (FooWidgetClass *klass)
     * {
     *   // ...
     *   gtk_widget_class_set_template_from_resource (GTK_WIDGET_CLASS (klass),
     *                                                "/com/example/ui/foowidget.ui");
     *   gtk_widget_class_bind_template_child_private (GTK_WIDGET_CLASS (klass),
     *                                                 FooWidget, hello_button);
     *   gtk_widget_class_bind_template_child_private (GTK_WIDGET_CLASS (klass),
     *                                                 FooWidget, goodbye_button);
     * }
     * 
     * static void
     * foo_widget_init (FooWidget *widget)
     * {
     * 
     * }
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * You can also use `gtk_widget_class_bind_template_callback()` to connect a signal
     * callback defined in the template with a function visible in the scope of the
     * class, e.g.
     * 
     * 
     * ```c
     * // the signal handler has the instance and user data swapped
     * // because of the swapped="yes" attribute in the template XML
     * static void
     * hello_button_clicked (FooWidget *self,
     *                       GtkButton *button)
     * {
     *   g_print ("Hello, world!\n");
     * }
     * 
     * static void
     * foo_widget_class_init (FooWidgetClass *klass)
     * {
     *   // ...
     *   gtk_widget_class_set_template_from_resource (GTK_WIDGET_CLASS (klass),
     *                                                "/com/example/ui/foowidget.ui");
     *   gtk_widget_class_bind_template_callback (GTK_WIDGET_CLASS (klass), hello_button_clicked);
     * }
     * ```
     * 
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    abstract class Widget extends GObject.InitiallyUnowned implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<Widget>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get app_paintable(): boolean;
        set app_paintable(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get appPaintable(): boolean;
        set appPaintable(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get can_default(): boolean;
        set can_default(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get canDefault(): boolean;
        set canDefault(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get can_focus(): boolean;
        set can_focus(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get canFocus(): boolean;
        set canFocus(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @read-only
         * @default false
         */
        get composite_child(): boolean;

        /**
         * @read-only
         * @default false
         */
        get compositeChild(): boolean;

        /**
         * Whether the widget is double buffered.
         * @since 2.18
         * @deprecated since 3.14: Widgets should not use this property.
         * @default true
         */
        get double_buffered(): boolean;
        set double_buffered(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether the widget is double buffered.
         * @since 2.18
         * @deprecated since 3.14: Widgets should not use this property.
         * @default true
         */
        get doubleBuffered(): boolean;
        set doubleBuffered(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default Gdk.EventMask.STRUCTURE_MASK
         */
        get events(): Gdk.EventMask;
        set events(val: Gdk.EventMask);

        /**
         * Whether to expand in both directions. Setting this sets both {@link Gtk.Widget.hexpand} and {@link Gtk.Widget.vexpand}
         * @since 3.0
         * @default false
         */
        get expand(): boolean;
        set expand(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether the widget should grab focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
         * 
         * This property is only relevant for widgets that can take focus.
         * 
         * Before 3.20, several widgets (GtkButton, GtkFileChooserButton,
         * GtkComboBox) implemented this property individually.
         * @since 3.20
         * @default true
         */
        get focus_on_click(): boolean;
        set focus_on_click(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether the widget should grab focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
         * 
         * This property is only relevant for widgets that can take focus.
         * 
         * Before 3.20, several widgets (GtkButton, GtkFileChooserButton,
         * GtkComboBox) implemented this property individually.
         * @since 3.20
         * @default true
         */
        get focusOnClick(): boolean;
        set focusOnClick(val: boolean);

        /**
         * How to distribute horizontal space if widget gets extra space, see {@link Gtk.Align}
         * @since 3.0
         * @default Gtk.Align.FILL
         */
        get halign(): Align;
        set halign(val: Align);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get has_default(): boolean;
        set has_default(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get hasDefault(): boolean;
        set hasDefault(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get has_focus(): boolean;
        set has_focus(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get hasFocus(): boolean;
        set hasFocus(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Enables or disables the emission of {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.query_tooltip | Gtk.Widget::query-tooltip} on `widget`.
         * A value of `true` indicates that `widget` can have a tooltip, in this case
         * the widget will be queried using {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.query_tooltip | Gtk.Widget::query-tooltip} to determine
         * whether it will provide a tooltip or not.
         * 
         * Note that setting this property to `true` for the first time will change
         * the event masks of the GdkWindows of this widget to include leave-notify
         * and motion-notify events.  This cannot and will not be undone when the
         * property is set to `false` again.
         * @since 2.12
         * @default false
         */
        get has_tooltip(): boolean;
        set has_tooltip(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Enables or disables the emission of {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.query_tooltip | Gtk.Widget::query-tooltip} on `widget`.
         * A value of `true` indicates that `widget` can have a tooltip, in this case
         * the widget will be queried using {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.query_tooltip | Gtk.Widget::query-tooltip} to determine
         * whether it will provide a tooltip or not.
         * 
         * Note that setting this property to `true` for the first time will change
         * the event masks of the GdkWindows of this widget to include leave-notify
         * and motion-notify events.  This cannot and will not be undone when the
         * property is set to `false` again.
         * @since 2.12
         * @default false
         */
        get hasTooltip(): boolean;
        set hasTooltip(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default -1
         */
        get height_request(): number;
        set height_request(val: number);

        /**
         * @default -1
         */
        get heightRequest(): number;
        set heightRequest(val: number);

        /**
         * Whether to expand horizontally. See `gtk_widget_set_hexpand()`.
         * @since 3.0
         * @default false
         */
        get hexpand(): boolean;
        set hexpand(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether to use the {@link Gtk.Widget.hexpand} property. See `gtk_widget_get_hexpand_set()`.
         * @since 3.0
         * @default false
         */
        get hexpand_set(): boolean;
        set hexpand_set(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether to use the {@link Gtk.Widget.hexpand} property. See `gtk_widget_get_hexpand_set()`.
         * @since 3.0
         * @default false
         */
        get hexpandSet(): boolean;
        set hexpandSet(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get is_focus(): boolean;
        set is_focus(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get isFocus(): boolean;
        set isFocus(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Sets all four sides' margin at once. If read, returns max
         * margin on any side.
         * @since 3.0
         * @default 0
         */
        get margin(): number;
        set margin(val: number);

        /**
         * Margin on bottom side of widget.
         * 
         * This property adds margin outside of the widget's normal size
         * request, the margin will be added in addition to the size from
         * `gtk_widget_set_size_request()` for example.
         * @since 3.0
         * @default 0
         */
        get margin_bottom(): number;
        set margin_bottom(val: number);

        /**
         * Margin on bottom side of widget.
         * 
         * This property adds margin outside of the widget's normal size
         * request, the margin will be added in addition to the size from
         * `gtk_widget_set_size_request()` for example.
         * @since 3.0
         * @default 0
         */
        get marginBottom(): number;
        set marginBottom(val: number);

        /**
         * Margin on end of widget, horizontally. This property supports
         * left-to-right and right-to-left text directions.
         * 
         * This property adds margin outside of the widget's normal size
         * request, the margin will be added in addition to the size from
         * `gtk_widget_set_size_request()` for example.
         * @since 3.12
         * @default 0
         */
        get margin_end(): number;
        set margin_end(val: number);

        /**
         * Margin on end of widget, horizontally. This property supports
         * left-to-right and right-to-left text directions.
         * 
         * This property adds margin outside of the widget's normal size
         * request, the margin will be added in addition to the size from
         * `gtk_widget_set_size_request()` for example.
         * @since 3.12
         * @default 0
         */
        get marginEnd(): number;
        set marginEnd(val: number);

        /**
         * Margin on left side of widget.
         * 
         * This property adds margin outside of the widget's normal size
         * request, the margin will be added in addition to the size from
         * `gtk_widget_set_size_request()` for example.
         * @since 3.0
         * @deprecated since 3.12: Use {@link Gtk.Widget.margin_start} instead.
         * @default 0
         */
        get margin_left(): number;
        set margin_left(val: number);

        /**
         * Margin on left side of widget.
         * 
         * This property adds margin outside of the widget's normal size
         * request, the margin will be added in addition to the size from
         * `gtk_widget_set_size_request()` for example.
         * @since 3.0
         * @deprecated since 3.12: Use {@link Gtk.Widget.margin_start} instead.
         * @default 0
         */
        get marginLeft(): number;
        set marginLeft(val: number);

        /**
         * Margin on right side of widget.
         * 
         * This property adds margin outside of the widget's normal size
         * request, the margin will be added in addition to the size from
         * `gtk_widget_set_size_request()` for example.
         * @since 3.0
         * @deprecated since 3.12: Use {@link Gtk.Widget.margin_end} instead.
         * @default 0
         */
        get margin_right(): number;
        set margin_right(val: number);

        /**
         * Margin on right side of widget.
         * 
         * This property adds margin outside of the widget's normal size
         * request, the margin will be added in addition to the size from
         * `gtk_widget_set_size_request()` for example.
         * @since 3.0
         * @deprecated since 3.12: Use {@link Gtk.Widget.margin_end} instead.
         * @default 0
         */
        get marginRight(): number;
        set marginRight(val: number);

        /**
         * Margin on start of widget, horizontally. This property supports
         * left-to-right and right-to-left text directions.
         * 
         * This property adds margin outside of the widget's normal size
         * request, the margin will be added in addition to the size from
         * `gtk_widget_set_size_request()` for example.
         * @since 3.12
         * @default 0
         */
        get margin_start(): number;
        set margin_start(val: number);

        /**
         * Margin on start of widget, horizontally. This property supports
         * left-to-right and right-to-left text directions.
         * 
         * This property adds margin outside of the widget's normal size
         * request, the margin will be added in addition to the size from
         * `gtk_widget_set_size_request()` for example.
         * @since 3.12
         * @default 0
         */
        get marginStart(): number;
        set marginStart(val: number);

        /**
         * Margin on top side of widget.
         * 
         * This property adds margin outside of the widget's normal size
         * request, the margin will be added in addition to the size from
         * `gtk_widget_set_size_request()` for example.
         * @since 3.0
         * @default 0
         */
        get margin_top(): number;
        set margin_top(val: number);

        /**
         * Margin on top side of widget.
         * 
         * This property adds margin outside of the widget's normal size
         * request, the margin will be added in addition to the size from
         * `gtk_widget_set_size_request()` for example.
         * @since 3.0
         * @default 0
         */
        get marginTop(): number;
        set marginTop(val: number);

        /**
         * @default null
         */
        get name(): string;
        set name(val: string);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get no_show_all(): boolean;
        set no_show_all(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get noShowAll(): boolean;
        set noShowAll(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The requested opacity of the widget. See `gtk_widget_set_opacity()` for
         * more details about window opacity.
         * 
         * Before 3.8 this was only available in GtkWindow
         * @since 3.8
         * @default 1
         */
        get opacity(): number;
        set opacity(val: number);

        get parent(): Container | null;
        set parent(val: Container | null);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get receives_default(): boolean;
        set receives_default(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get receivesDefault(): boolean;
        set receivesDefault(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The scale factor of the widget. See `gtk_widget_get_scale_factor()` for
         * more details about widget scaling.
         * @since 3.10
         * @read-only
         * @default 1
         */
        get scale_factor(): number;

        /**
         * The scale factor of the widget. See `gtk_widget_get_scale_factor()` for
         * more details about widget scaling.
         * @since 3.10
         * @read-only
         * @default 1
         */
        get scaleFactor(): number;

        /**
         * @default true
         */
        get sensitive(): boolean;
        set sensitive(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The style of the widget, which contains information about how it will look (colors, etc).
         * @deprecated Use {@link Gtk.StyleContext} instead
         */
        get style(): Style;
        set style(val: Style);

        /**
         * Sets the text of tooltip to be the given string, which is marked up
         * with the [Pango text markup language][PangoMarkupFormat].
         * Also see `gtk_tooltip_set_markup()`.
         * 
         * This is a convenience property which will take care of getting the
         * tooltip shown if the given string is not `null`: {@link Gtk.Widget.has_tooltip}
         * will automatically be set to `true` and there will be taken care of
         * {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.query_tooltip | Gtk.Widget::query-tooltip} in the default signal handler.
         * 
         * Note that if both {@link Gtk.Widget.tooltip_text} and {@link Gtk.Widget.tooltip_markup}
         * are set, the last one wins.
         * @since 2.12
         * @default null
         */
        get tooltip_markup(): string | null;
        set tooltip_markup(val: string | null);

        /**
         * Sets the text of tooltip to be the given string, which is marked up
         * with the [Pango text markup language][PangoMarkupFormat].
         * Also see `gtk_tooltip_set_markup()`.
         * 
         * This is a convenience property which will take care of getting the
         * tooltip shown if the given string is not `null`: {@link Gtk.Widget.has_tooltip}
         * will automatically be set to `true` and there will be taken care of
         * {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.query_tooltip | Gtk.Widget::query-tooltip} in the default signal handler.
         * 
         * Note that if both {@link Gtk.Widget.tooltip_text} and {@link Gtk.Widget.tooltip_markup}
         * are set, the last one wins.
         * @since 2.12
         * @default null
         */
        get tooltipMarkup(): string | null;
        set tooltipMarkup(val: string | null);

        /**
         * Sets the text of tooltip to be the given string.
         * 
         * Also see `gtk_tooltip_set_text()`.
         * 
         * This is a convenience property which will take care of getting the
         * tooltip shown if the given string is not `null`: {@link Gtk.Widget.has_tooltip}
         * will automatically be set to `true` and there will be taken care of
         * {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.query_tooltip | Gtk.Widget::query-tooltip} in the default signal handler.
         * 
         * Note that if both {@link Gtk.Widget.tooltip_text} and {@link Gtk.Widget.tooltip_markup}
         * are set, the last one wins.
         * @since 2.12
         * @default null
         */
        get tooltip_text(): string | null;
        set tooltip_text(val: string | null);

        /**
         * Sets the text of tooltip to be the given string.
         * 
         * Also see `gtk_tooltip_set_text()`.
         * 
         * This is a convenience property which will take care of getting the
         * tooltip shown if the given string is not `null`: {@link Gtk.Widget.has_tooltip}
         * will automatically be set to `true` and there will be taken care of
         * {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.query_tooltip | Gtk.Widget::query-tooltip} in the default signal handler.
         * 
         * Note that if both {@link Gtk.Widget.tooltip_text} and {@link Gtk.Widget.tooltip_markup}
         * are set, the last one wins.
         * @since 2.12
         * @default null
         */
        get tooltipText(): string | null;
        set tooltipText(val: string | null);

        /**
         * How to distribute vertical space if widget gets extra space, see {@link Gtk.Align}
         * @since 3.0
         * @default Gtk.Align.FILL
         */
        get valign(): Align;
        set valign(val: Align);

        /**
         * Whether to expand vertically. See `gtk_widget_set_vexpand()`.
         * @since 3.0
         * @default false
         */
        get vexpand(): boolean;
        set vexpand(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether to use the {@link Gtk.Widget.vexpand} property. See `gtk_widget_get_vexpand_set()`.
         * @since 3.0
         * @default false
         */
        get vexpand_set(): boolean;
        set vexpand_set(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether to use the {@link Gtk.Widget.vexpand} property. See `gtk_widget_get_vexpand_set()`.
         * @since 3.0
         * @default false
         */
        get vexpandSet(): boolean;
        set vexpandSet(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get visible(): boolean;
        set visible(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default -1
         */
        get width_request(): number;
        set width_request(val: number);

        /**
         * @default -1
         */
        get widthRequest(): number;
        set widthRequest(val: number);

        /**
         * The widget's window if it is realized, `null` otherwise.
         * @since 2.14
         * @read-only
         */
        get window(): Gdk.Window | null;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: Widget.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<Widget.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof Widget.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Widget.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof Widget.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Widget.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof Widget.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<Widget.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Static methods
        /**
         * Obtains the current default reading direction. See
         * `gtk_widget_set_default_direction()`.
         */
        static get_default_direction(): TextDirection;

        /**
         * Returns the default style used by all widgets initially.
         */
        static get_default_style(): Style;

        /**
         * Cancels the effect of a previous call to `gtk_widget_push_composite_child()`.
         */
        static pop_composite_child(): void;

        /**
         * Makes all newly-created widgets as composite children until
         * the corresponding `gtk_widget_pop_composite_child()` call.
         * 
         * A composite child is a child that’s an implementation detail of the
         * container it’s inside and should not be visible to people using the
         * container. Composite children aren’t treated differently by GTK+ (but
         * see `gtk_container_foreach()` vs. `gtk_container_forall()`), but e.g. GUI
         * builders might want to treat them in a different way.
         */
        static push_composite_child(): void;

        /**
         * Sets the default reading direction for widgets where the
         * direction has not been explicitly set by `gtk_widget_set_direction()`.
         * @param dir the new default direction. This cannot be        {@link Gtk.TextDirection.NONE}.
         */
        static set_default_direction(dir: TextDirection): void;

        /**
         * @param callback_name The name of the callback as expected in the template XML
         * @param callback_symbol The callback symbol
         */
        static bind_template_callback_full(callback_name: string, callback_symbol: GObject.Callback): void;

        /**
         * @param name The “id” of the child defined in the template XML
         * @param internal_child Whether the child should be accessible as an “internal-child”                  when this class is used in GtkBuilder XML
         * @param struct_offset The structure offset into the composite widget’s instance public or private structure                 where the automated child pointer should be set, or 0 to not assign the pointer.
         */
        static bind_template_child_full(name: string, internal_child: boolean, struct_offset: bigint | number): void;

        /**
         * @param property_name the name of the style property to find
         */
        static find_style_property(property_name: string): GObject.ParamSpec;

        static get_css_name(): string;

        /**
         * @param pspec the {@link GObject.ParamSpec} for the property
         */
        static install_style_property(pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): void;

        static list_style_properties(): GObject.ParamSpec[];

        /**
         * @param role The role to use for accessibles created for `widget_class`
         */
        static set_accessible_role(role: Atk.Role): void;

        /**
         * @param type The object type that implements the accessible for `widget_class`
         */
        static set_accessible_type(type: GObject.GType): void;

        /**
         * @param connect_func The {@link Gtk.BuilderConnectFunc} to use when connecting signals in the class template
         */
        static set_connect_func(connect_func: BuilderConnectFunc): void;

        /**
         * @param name name to use
         */
        static set_css_name(name: string): void;

        /**
         * @param template_bytes A {@link GLib.Bytes} holding the {@link Gtk.Builder} XML
         */
        static set_template(template_bytes: GLib.Bytes | Uint8Array): void;

        /**
         * @param resource_name The name of the resource to load the template from
         */
        static set_template_from_resource(resource_name: string): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * @param baseline 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_adjust_baseline_allocation(baseline: number): void;

        /**
         * @param minimum_baseline 
         * @param natural_baseline 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_adjust_baseline_request(minimum_baseline: number, natural_baseline: number): void;

        /**
         * Convert an initial size allocation assigned
         *   by a {@link Gtk.Container} using `gtk_widget_size_allocate()`, into an actual
         *   size allocation to be used by the widget. adjust_size_allocation
         *   adjusts to a child widget’s actual allocation
         *   from what a parent container computed for the
         *   child. The adjusted allocation must be entirely within the original
         *   allocation. In any custom implementation, chain up to the default
         *   {@link Gtk.Widget} implementation of this method, which applies the margin
         *   and alignment properties of {@link Gtk.Widget}. Chain up
         *   before performing your own adjustments so your
         *   own adjustments remove more allocation after the {@link Gtk.Widget} base
         *   class has already removed margin and alignment. The natural size
         *   passed in should be adjusted in the same way as the allocated size,
         *   which allows adjustments to perform alignments or other changes
         *   based on natural size.
         * @param orientation 
         * @param minimum_size 
         * @param natural_size 
         * @param allocated_pos 
         * @param allocated_size 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_adjust_size_allocation(orientation: Orientation, minimum_size: number, natural_size: number, allocated_pos: number, allocated_size: number): void;

        /**
         * Convert an initial size request from a widget's
         *   {@link Gtk.SizeRequestMode} virtual method implementations into a size request to
         *   be used by parent containers in laying out the widget.
         *   adjust_size_request adjusts from a child widget's
         *   original request to what a parent container should
         *   use for layout. The `for_size` argument will be -1 if the request should
         *   not be for a particular size in the opposing orientation, i.e. if the
         *   request is not height-for-width or width-for-height. If `for_size` is
         *   greater than -1, it is the proposed allocation in the opposing
         *   orientation that we need the request for. Implementations of
         *   adjust_size_request should chain up to the default implementation,
         *   which applies {@link Gtk.Widget}’s margin properties and imposes any values
         *   from `gtk_widget_set_size_request()`. Chaining up should be last,
         *   after your subclass adjusts the request, so
         *   {@link Gtk.Widget} can apply constraints and add the margin properly.
         * @param orientation 
         * @param minimum_size 
         * @param natural_size 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_adjust_size_request(orientation: Orientation, minimum_size: number, natural_size: number): void;

        /**
         * Signal will be emitted when a button
         *   (typically from a mouse) is pressed.
         * @param event 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_button_press_event(event: Gdk.EventButton): boolean;

        /**
         * Signal will be emitted when a button
         *   (typically from a mouse) is released.
         * @param event 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_button_release_event(event: Gdk.EventButton): boolean;

        /**
         * Determines whether an accelerator that activates the signal
         * identified by `signal_id` can currently be activated.
         * This is done by emitting the {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.can_activate_accel | Gtk.Widget::can-activate-accel}
         * signal on `widget`; if the signal isn’t overridden by a
         * handler or in a derived widget, then the default check is
         * that the widget must be sensitive, and the widget and all
         * its ancestors mapped.
         * @param signal_id the ID of a signal installed on `widget`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_can_activate_accel(signal_id: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Emits a {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.child_notify | Gtk.Widget::child-notify} signal for the
         * [child property][child-properties] `child_property`
         * on `widget`.
         * 
         * This is the analogue of `g_object_notify()` for child properties.
         * 
         * Also see `gtk_container_child_notify()`.
         * @param child_property the name of a child property installed on the                  class of `widget`’s parent
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_child_notify(child_property: GObject.ParamSpec): void;

        /**
         * Signal emitted when the composited status of
         *   widgets screen changes. See `gdk_screen_is_composited()`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_composited_changed(): void;

        /**
         * Computes whether a container should give this
         *   widget extra space when possible.
         * @param hexpand_p 
         * @param vexpand_p 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_compute_expand(hexpand_p: boolean, vexpand_p: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Signal will be emitted when the size, position or
         *   stacking of the widget’s window has changed.
         * @param event 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_configure_event(event: Gdk.EventConfigure): boolean;

        /**
         * Signal emitted when a redirected window belonging to
         *   widget gets drawn into.
         * @param event 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_damage_event(event: Gdk.EventExpose): boolean;

        /**
         * Signal emitted if a user requests that a toplevel
         *   window is closed.
         * @param event 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_delete_event(event: Gdk.EventAny): boolean;

        /**
         * Destroys a widget.
         * 
         * When a widget is destroyed all references it holds on other objects
         * will be released:
         * 
         *  - if the widget is inside a container, it will be removed from its
         *  parent
         *  - if the widget is a container, all its children will be destroyed,
         *  recursively
         *  - if the widget is a top level, it will be removed from the list
         *  of top level widgets that GTK+ maintains internally
         * 
         * It's expected that all references held on the widget will also
         * be released; you should connect to the {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.destroy | Gtk.Widget::destroy} signal
         * if you hold a reference to `widget` and you wish to remove it when
         * this function is called. It is not necessary to do so if you are
         * implementing a {@link Gtk.Container}, as you'll be able to use the
         * {@link Gtk.ContainerClass}.remove() virtual function for that.
         * 
         * It's important to notice that `gtk_widget_destroy()` will only cause
         * the `widget` to be finalized if no additional references, acquired
         * using `g_object_ref()`, are held on it. In case additional references
         * are in place, the `widget` will be in an "inert" state after calling
         * this function; `widget` will still point to valid memory, allowing you
         * to release the references you hold, but you may not query the widget's
         * own state.
         * 
         * You should typically call this function on top level widgets, and
         * rarely on child widgets.
         * 
         * See also: `gtk_container_remove()`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_destroy(): void;

        /**
         * Signal is emitted when a {@link Gdk.Window} is destroyed.
         * @param event 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_destroy_event(event: Gdk.EventAny): boolean;

        /**
         * Signal emitted when the text direction of a
         *   widget changes.
         * @param previous_direction 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_direction_changed(previous_direction: TextDirection): void;

        /**
         * Seldomly overidden.
         * @param n_pspecs 
         * @param pspecs 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_dispatch_child_properties_changed(n_pspecs: number, pspecs: GObject.ParamSpec): void;

        /**
         * Signal emitted on the drag source when a drag is
         *   started.
         * @param context 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_drag_begin(context: Gdk.DragContext): void;

        /**
         * Signal emitted on the drag source when a drag
         *   with the action {@link Gdk.DragAction.MOVE} is successfully completed.
         * @param context 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_drag_data_delete(context: Gdk.DragContext): void;

        /**
         * Signal emitted on the drag source when the drop
         *   site requests the data which is dragged.
         * @param context 
         * @param selection_data 
         * @param info 
         * @param time_ 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_drag_data_get(context: Gdk.DragContext, selection_data: SelectionData, info: number, time_: number): void;

        /**
         * Signal emitted on the drop site when the
         *   dragged data has been received.
         * @param context 
         * @param x 
         * @param y 
         * @param selection_data 
         * @param info 
         * @param time_ 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_drag_data_received(context: Gdk.DragContext, x: number, y: number, selection_data: SelectionData, info: number, time_: number): void;

        /**
         * Signal emitted on the drop site when the user drops the
         *   data onto the widget.
         * @param context 
         * @param x 
         * @param y 
         * @param time_ 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_drag_drop(context: Gdk.DragContext, x: number, y: number, time_: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Signal emitted on the drag source when a drag is
         *   finished.
         * @param context 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_drag_end(context: Gdk.DragContext): void;

        /**
         * Signal emitted on the drag source when a drag has
         *   failed.
         * @param context 
         * @param result 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_drag_failed(context: Gdk.DragContext, result: DragResult): boolean;

        /**
         * Signal emitted on the drop site when the cursor leaves
         *   the widget.
         * @param context 
         * @param time_ 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_drag_leave(context: Gdk.DragContext, time_: number): void;

        /**
         * signal emitted on the drop site when the user moves
         *   the cursor over the widget during a drag.
         * @param context 
         * @param x 
         * @param y 
         * @param time_ 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_drag_motion(context: Gdk.DragContext, x: number, y: number, time_: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Signal emitted when a widget is supposed to render itself.
         * @param cr 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_draw(cr: cairo.Context): boolean;

        /**
         * Signal event will be emitted when the pointer
         *   enters the widget’s window.
         * @param event 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_enter_notify_event(event: Gdk.EventCrossing): boolean;

        /**
         * Rarely-used function. This function is used to emit
         * the event signals on a widget (those signals should never
         * be emitted without using this function to do so).
         * If you want to synthesize an event though, don’t use this function;
         * instead, use `gtk_main_do_event()` so the event will behave as if
         * it were in the event queue. Don’t synthesize expose events; instead,
         * use `gdk_window_invalidate_rect()` to invalidate a region of the
         * window.
         * @param event a {@link Gdk.Event}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_event(event: Gdk.Event): boolean;

        /**
         * @param direction 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_focus(direction: DirectionType): boolean;

        /**
         * Signal emitted when the keyboard focus enters the
         * widget’s window.
         * @param event 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_focus_in_event(event: Gdk.EventFocus): boolean;

        /**
         * Signal emitted when the keyboard focus leaves the
         * widget’s window.
         * @param event 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_focus_out_event(event: Gdk.EventFocus): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the accessible object that describes the widget to an
         * assistive technology.
         * 
         * If accessibility support is not available, this {@link Atk.Object}
         * instance may be a no-op. Likewise, if no class-specific {@link Atk.Object}
         * implementation is available for the widget instance in question,
         * it will inherit an {@link Atk.Object} implementation from the first ancestor
         * class for which such an implementation is defined.
         * 
         * The documentation of the
         * [ATK](http://developer.gnome.org/atk/stable/)
         * library contains more information about accessible objects and their uses.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_accessible(): Atk.Object;

        /**
         * Retrieves a widget’s initial minimum and natural height.
         * 
         * This call is specific to width-for-height requests.
         * 
         * The returned request will be modified by the
         * GtkWidgetClass::adjust_size_request virtual method and by any
         * `GtkSizeGroups` that have been applied. That is, the returned request
         * is the one that should be used for layout, not necessarily the one
         * returned by the widget itself.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_preferred_height(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Retrieves a widget’s minimum and natural height and the corresponding baselines if it would be given
         * the specified `width`, or the default height if `width` is -1. The baselines may be -1 which means
         * that no baseline is requested for this widget.
         * 
         * The returned request will be modified by the
         * GtkWidgetClass::adjust_size_request and GtkWidgetClass::adjust_baseline_request virtual methods
         * and by any `GtkSizeGroups` that have been applied. That is, the returned request
         * is the one that should be used for layout, not necessarily the one
         * returned by the widget itself.
         * @param width the width which is available for allocation, or -1 if none
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_preferred_height_and_baseline_for_width(width: number): [number, number, number, number];

        /**
         * Retrieves a widget’s minimum and natural height if it would be given
         * the specified `width`.
         * 
         * The returned request will be modified by the
         * GtkWidgetClass::adjust_size_request virtual method and by any
         * `GtkSizeGroups` that have been applied. That is, the returned request
         * is the one that should be used for layout, not necessarily the one
         * returned by the widget itself.
         * @param width the width which is available for allocation
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_preferred_height_for_width(width: number): [number, number];

        /**
         * Retrieves a widget’s initial minimum and natural width.
         * 
         * This call is specific to height-for-width requests.
         * 
         * The returned request will be modified by the
         * GtkWidgetClass::adjust_size_request virtual method and by any
         * `GtkSizeGroups` that have been applied. That is, the returned request
         * is the one that should be used for layout, not necessarily the one
         * returned by the widget itself.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_preferred_width(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Retrieves a widget’s minimum and natural width if it would be given
         * the specified `height`.
         * 
         * The returned request will be modified by the
         * GtkWidgetClass::adjust_size_request virtual method and by any
         * `GtkSizeGroups` that have been applied. That is, the returned request
         * is the one that should be used for layout, not necessarily the one
         * returned by the widget itself.
         * @param height the height which is available for allocation
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_preferred_width_for_height(height: number): [number, number];

        /**
         * Gets whether the widget prefers a height-for-width layout
         * or a width-for-height layout.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Bin} widgets generally propagate the preference of
         * their child, container widgets need to request something either in
         * context of their children or in context of their allocation
         * capabilities.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_request_mode(): SizeRequestMode;

        /**
         * Signal emitted when a pointer or keyboard grab
         *   on a window belonging to widget gets broken.
         * @param event 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_grab_broken_event(event: Gdk.EventGrabBroken): boolean;

        /**
         * Causes `widget` to have the keyboard focus for the {@link Gtk.Window} it's
         * inside. `widget` must be a focusable widget, such as a {@link Gtk.Entry};
         * something like {@link Gtk.Frame} won’t work.
         * 
         * More precisely, it must have the `GTK_CAN_FOCUS` flag set. Use
         * `gtk_widget_set_can_focus()` to modify that flag.
         * 
         * The widget also needs to be realized and mapped. This is indicated by the
         * related signals. Grabbing the focus immediately after creating the widget
         * will likely fail and cause critical warnings.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_grab_focus(): void;

        /**
         * Signal emitted when a widget becomes shadowed by a
         *   GTK+ grab (not a pointer or keyboard grab) on another widget, or
         *   when it becomes unshadowed due to a grab being removed.
         * @param was_grabbed 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_grab_notify(was_grabbed: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Reverses the effects of `gtk_widget_show()`, causing the widget to be
         * hidden (invisible to the user).
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_hide(): void;

        /**
         * Signal emitted when the anchored state of a
         *   widget changes.
         * @param previous_toplevel 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_hierarchy_changed(previous_toplevel: Widget): void;

        /**
         * Signal emitted when a key is pressed.
         * @param event 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_key_press_event(event: Gdk.EventKey): boolean;

        /**
         * Signal is emitted when a key is released.
         * @param event 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_key_release_event(event: Gdk.EventKey): boolean;

        /**
         * This function should be called whenever keyboard navigation within
         * a single widget hits a boundary. The function emits the
         * {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.keynav_failed | Gtk.Widget::keynav-failed} signal on the widget and its return
         * value should be interpreted in a way similar to the return value of
         * `gtk_widget_child_focus()`:
         * 
         * When `true` is returned, stay in the widget, the failed keyboard
         * navigation is OK and/or there is nowhere we can/should move the
         * focus to.
         * 
         * When `false` is returned, the caller should continue with keyboard
         * navigation outside the widget, e.g. by calling
         * `gtk_widget_child_focus()` on the widget’s toplevel.
         * 
         * The default ::keynav-failed handler returns `false` for
         * {@link Gtk.DirectionType.TAB_FORWARD} and {@link Gtk.DirectionType.TAB_BACKWARD}. For the other
         * values of {@link Gtk.DirectionType} it returns `true`.
         * 
         * Whenever the default handler returns `true`, it also calls
         * `gtk_widget_error_bell()` to notify the user of the failed keyboard
         * navigation.
         * 
         * A use case for providing an own implementation of ::keynav-failed
         * (either by connecting to it or by overriding it) would be a row of
         * {@link Gtk.Entry} widgets where the user should be able to navigate the
         * entire row with the cursor keys, as e.g. known from user interfaces
         * that require entering license keys.
         * @param direction direction of focus movement
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_keynav_failed(direction: DirectionType): boolean;

        /**
         * Will be emitted when the pointer leaves the
         *   widget’s window.
         * @param event 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_leave_notify_event(event: Gdk.EventCrossing): boolean;

        /**
         * This function is only for use in widget implementations. Causes
         * a widget to be mapped if it isn’t already.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_map(): void;

        /**
         * Signal emitted when the widget’s window is mapped.
         * @param event 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_map_event(event: Gdk.EventAny): boolean;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.mnemonic_activate | Gtk.Widget::mnemonic-activate} signal.
         * @param group_cycling `true` if there are other widgets with the same mnemonic
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_mnemonic_activate(group_cycling: boolean): boolean;

        /**
         * Signal emitted when the pointer moves over
         *   the widget’s {@link Gdk.Window}.
         * @param event 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_motion_notify_event(event: Gdk.EventMotion): boolean;

        /**
         * Signal emitted when a change of focus is requested
         * @param direction 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_move_focus(direction: DirectionType): void;

        /**
         * Signal emitted when a new parent has been set on a
         *   widget.
         * @param previous_parent 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_parent_set(previous_parent: Widget): void;

        /**
         * Signal emitted whenever a widget should pop up a
         *   context menu.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_popup_menu(): boolean;

        /**
         * Signal will be emitted when a property on
         *   the widget’s window has been changed or deleted.
         * @param event 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_property_notify_event(event: Gdk.EventProperty): boolean;

        /**
         * @param event 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_proximity_in_event(event: Gdk.EventProximity): boolean;

        /**
         * @param event 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_proximity_out_event(event: Gdk.EventProximity): boolean;

        /**
         * Signal emitted when “has-tooltip” is `true` and the
         *   hover timeout has expired with the cursor hovering “above”
         *   widget; or emitted when widget got focus in keyboard mode.
         * @param x 
         * @param y 
         * @param keyboard_tooltip 
         * @param tooltip 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_query_tooltip(x: number, y: number, keyboard_tooltip: boolean, tooltip: Tooltip): boolean;

        /**
         * Invalidates the area of `widget` defined by `region` by calling
         * `gdk_window_invalidate_region()` on the widget’s window and all its
         * child windows. Once the main loop becomes idle (after the current
         * batch of events has been processed, roughly), the window will
         * receive expose events for the union of all regions that have been
         * invalidated.
         * 
         * Normally you would only use this function in widget
         * implementations. You might also use it to schedule a redraw of a
         * {@link Gtk.DrawingArea} or some portion thereof.
         * @param region region to draw
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_queue_draw_region(region: cairo.Region): void;

        /**
         * Creates the GDK (windowing system) resources associated with a
         * widget.  For example, `widget`->window will be created when a widget
         * is realized.  Normally realization happens implicitly; if you show
         * a widget and all its parent containers, then the widget will be
         * realized and mapped automatically.
         * 
         * Realizing a widget requires all
         * the widget’s parent widgets to be realized; calling
         * `gtk_widget_realize()` realizes the widget’s parents in addition to
         * `widget` itself. If a widget is not yet inside a toplevel window
         * when you realize it, bad things will happen.
         * 
         * This function is primarily used in widget implementations, and
         * isn’t very useful otherwise. Many times when you think you might
         * need it, a better approach is to connect to a signal that will be
         * called after the widget is realized automatically, such as
         * {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.draw | Gtk.Widget::draw}. Or simply g_signal_connect () to the
         * {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.realize | Gtk.Widget::realize} signal.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_realize(): void;

        /**
         * Signal emitted when the screen of a widget has
         *   changed.
         * @param previous_screen 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_screen_changed(previous_screen: Gdk.Screen): void;

        /**
         * Signal emitted when a button in the 4 to 7 range is
         *   pressed.
         * @param event 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_scroll_event(event: Gdk.EventScroll): boolean;

        /**
         * Signal will be emitted when the the
         *   widget’s window has lost ownership of a selection.
         * @param event 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_selection_clear_event(event: Gdk.EventSelection): boolean;

        /**
         * @param selection_data 
         * @param info 
         * @param time_ 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_selection_get(selection_data: SelectionData, info: number, time_: number): void;

        /**
         * @param event 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_selection_notify_event(event: Gdk.EventSelection): boolean;

        /**
         * @param selection_data 
         * @param time_ 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_selection_received(selection_data: SelectionData, time_: number): void;

        /**
         * Signal will be emitted when another
         *   client requests ownership of the selection owned by the widget's
         *   window.
         * @param event 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_selection_request_event(event: Gdk.EventSelection): boolean;

        /**
         * Flags a widget to be displayed. Any widget that isn’t shown will
         * not appear on the screen. If you want to show all the widgets in a
         * container, it’s easier to call `gtk_widget_show_all()` on the
         * container, instead of individually showing the widgets.
         * 
         * Remember that you have to show the containers containing a widget,
         * in addition to the widget itself, before it will appear onscreen.
         * 
         * When a toplevel container is shown, it is immediately realized and
         * mapped; other shown widgets are realized and mapped when their
         * toplevel container is realized and mapped.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_show(): void;

        /**
         * Recursively shows a widget, and any child widgets (if the widget is
         * a container).
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_show_all(): void;

        /**
         * @param help_type 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_show_help(help_type: WidgetHelpType): boolean;

        /**
         * This function is only used by {@link Gtk.Container} subclasses, to assign a size
         * and position to their child widgets.
         * 
         * In this function, the allocation may be adjusted. It will be forced
         * to a 1x1 minimum size, and the adjust_size_allocation virtual
         * method on the child will be used to adjust the allocation. Standard
         * adjustments include removing the widget’s margins, and applying the
         * widget’s {@link Gtk.Widget.halign} and {@link Gtk.Widget.valign} properties.
         * 
         * For baseline support in containers you need to use `gtk_widget_size_allocate_with_baseline()`
         * instead.
         * @param allocation position and size to be allocated to `widget`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_size_allocate(allocation: Allocation): void;

        /**
         * Signal emitted when the widget state
         *   changes. Deprecated: 3.0
         * @param previous_state 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_state_changed(previous_state: StateType): void;

        /**
         * Signal emitted when the widget state changes,
         *   see `gtk_widget_get_state_flags()`.
         * @param previous_state_flags 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_state_flags_changed(previous_state_flags: StateFlags): void;

        /**
         * Signal emitted when a new style has been set on a
         * widget. Deprecated: 3.0
         * @param previous_style 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_style_set(previous_style: Style): void;

        /**
         * Signal emitted when the GtkStyleContext of a widget
         *   is changed.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_style_updated(): void;

        /**
         * Signal emitted when a touch event happens
         * @param event 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_touch_event(event: Gdk.EventTouch): boolean;

        /**
         * This function is only for use in widget implementations. Causes
         * a widget to be unmapped if it’s currently mapped.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_unmap(): void;

        /**
         * Signal will be emitted when the widget’s window is
         *   unmapped.
         * @param event 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_unmap_event(event: Gdk.EventAny): boolean;

        /**
         * This function is only useful in widget implementations.
         * Causes a widget to be unrealized (frees all GDK resources
         * associated with the widget, such as `widget`->window).
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_unrealize(): void;

        /**
         * Signal emitted when the widget’s window is
         *   obscured or unobscured.
         * @param event 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_visibility_notify_event(event: Gdk.EventVisibility): boolean;

        /**
         * Signal emitted when the state of the toplevel
         *   window associated to the widget changes.
         * @param event 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_window_state_event(event: Gdk.EventWindowState): boolean;

        // Methods
        /**
         * For widgets that can be “activated” (buttons, menu items, etc.)
         * this function activates them. Activation is what happens when you
         * press Enter on a widget during key navigation. If `widget` isn't
         * activatable, the function returns `false`.
         * @returns `true` if the widget was activatable
         */
        activate(): boolean;

        /**
         * Installs an accelerator for this `widget` in `accel_group` that causes
         * `accel_signal` to be emitted if the accelerator is activated.
         * The `accel_group` needs to be added to the widget’s toplevel via
         * `gtk_window_add_accel_group()`, and the signal must be of type {@link GObject.SignalFlags.ACTION}.
         * Accelerators added through this function are not user changeable during
         * runtime. If you want to support accelerators that can be changed by the
         * user, use `gtk_accel_map_add_entry()` and `gtk_widget_set_accel_path()` or
         * `gtk_menu_item_set_accel_path()` instead.
         * @param accel_signal widget signal to emit on accelerator activation
         * @param accel_group accel group for this widget, added to its toplevel
         * @param accel_key GDK keyval of the accelerator
         * @param accel_mods modifier key combination of the accelerator
         * @param accel_flags flag accelerators, e.g. {@link Gtk.AccelFlags.VISIBLE}
         */
        add_accelerator(accel_signal: string, accel_group: AccelGroup, accel_key: number, accel_mods: Gdk.ModifierType, accel_flags: AccelFlags): void;

        /**
         * Adds the device events in the bitfield `events` to the event mask for
         * `widget`. See `gtk_widget_set_device_events()` for details.
         * @param device a {@link Gdk.Device}
         * @param events an event mask, see {@link Gdk.EventMask}
         */
        add_device_events(device: Gdk.Device, events: Gdk.EventMask): void;

        /**
         * Adds the events in the bitfield `events` to the event mask for
         * `widget`. See `gtk_widget_set_events()` and the
         * [input handling overview][event-masks] for details.
         * @param events an event mask, see {@link Gdk.EventMask}
         */
        add_events(events: number): void;

        /**
         * Adds a widget to the list of mnemonic labels for
         * this widget. (See `gtk_widget_list_mnemonic_labels()`). Note the
         * list of mnemonic labels for the widget is cleared when the
         * widget is destroyed, so the caller must make sure to update
         * its internal state at this point as well, by using a connection
         * to the {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.destroy | Gtk.Widget::destroy} signal or a weak notifier.
         * @param label a {@link Gtk.Widget} that acts as a mnemonic label for `widget`
         */
        add_mnemonic_label(label: Widget): void;

        /**
         * Queues an animation frame update and adds a callback to be called
         * before each frame. Until the tick callback is removed, it will be
         * called frequently (usually at the frame rate of the output device
         * or as quickly as the application can be repainted, whichever is
         * slower). For this reason, is most suitable for handling graphics
         * that change every frame or every few frames. The tick callback does
         * not automatically imply a relayout or repaint. If you want a
         * repaint or relayout, and aren’t changing widget properties that
         * would trigger that (for example, changing the text of a {@link Gtk.Label}),
         * then you will have to call `gtk_widget_queue_resize()` or
         * `gtk_widget_queue_draw_area()` yourself.
         * 
         * `gdk_frame_clock_get_frame_time()` should generally be used for timing
         * continuous animations and
         * `gdk_frame_timings_get_predicted_presentation_time()` if you are
         * trying to display isolated frames at particular times.
         * 
         * This is a more convenient alternative to connecting directly to the
         * {@link Gdk.FrameClock.SignalSignatures.update | Gdk.FrameClock::update} signal of {@link Gdk.FrameClock}, since you don't
         * have to worry about when a {@link Gdk.FrameClock} is assigned to a widget.
         * @param callback function to call for updating animations
         * @returns an id for the connection of this callback. Remove the callback     by passing it to `gtk_widget_remove_tick_callback()`
         */
        add_tick_callback(callback: TickCallback): number;

        /**
         * Determines whether an accelerator that activates the signal
         * identified by `signal_id` can currently be activated.
         * This is done by emitting the {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.can_activate_accel | Gtk.Widget::can-activate-accel}
         * signal on `widget`; if the signal isn’t overridden by a
         * handler or in a derived widget, then the default check is
         * that the widget must be sensitive, and the widget and all
         * its ancestors mapped.
         * @param signal_id the ID of a signal installed on `widget`
         * @returns `true` if the accelerator can be activated.
         */
        can_activate_accel(signal_id: number): boolean;

        /**
         * This function is used by custom widget implementations; if you're
         * writing an app, you’d use `gtk_widget_grab_focus()` to move the focus
         * to a particular widget, and `gtk_container_set_focus_chain()` to
         * change the focus tab order. So you may want to investigate those
         * functions instead.
         * 
         * `gtk_widget_child_focus()` is called by containers as the user moves
         * around the window using keyboard shortcuts. `direction` indicates
         * what kind of motion is taking place (up, down, left, right, tab
         * forward, tab backward). `gtk_widget_child_focus()` emits the
         * {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.focus | Gtk.Widget::focus} signal; widgets override the default handler
         * for this signal in order to implement appropriate focus behavior.
         * 
         * The default ::focus handler for a widget should return `true` if
         * moving in `direction` left the focus on a focusable location inside
         * that widget, and `false` if moving in `direction` moved the focus
         * outside the widget. If returning `true`, widgets normally
         * call `gtk_widget_grab_focus()` to place the focus accordingly;
         * if returning `false`, they don’t modify the current focus location.
         * @param direction direction of focus movement
         * @returns `true` if focus ended up inside `widget`
         */
        child_focus(direction: DirectionType): boolean;

        /**
         * Emits a {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.child_notify | Gtk.Widget::child-notify} signal for the
         * [child property][child-properties] `child_property`
         * on `widget`.
         * 
         * This is the analogue of `g_object_notify()` for child properties.
         * 
         * Also see `gtk_container_child_notify()`.
         * @param child_property the name of a child property installed on the                  class of `widget`’s parent
         */
        child_notify(child_property: string): void;

        /**
         * Same as `gtk_widget_path()`, but always uses the name of a widget’s type,
         * never uses a custom name set with `gtk_widget_set_name()`.
         */
        class_path(): [number, string, string];

        /**
         * Computes whether a container should give this widget extra space
         * when possible. Containers should check this, rather than
         * looking at `gtk_widget_get_hexpand()` or `gtk_widget_get_vexpand()`.
         * 
         * This function already checks whether the widget is visible, so
         * visibility does not need to be checked separately. Non-visible
         * widgets are not expanded.
         * 
         * The computed expand value uses either the expand setting explicitly
         * set on the widget itself, or, if none has been explicitly set,
         * the widget may expand if some of its children do.
         * @param orientation expand direction
         * @returns whether widget tree rooted here should be expanded
         */
        compute_expand(orientation: Orientation): boolean;

        /**
         * Creates a new {@link Pango.Context} with the appropriate font map,
         * font options, font description, and base direction for drawing
         * text for this widget. See also `gtk_widget_get_pango_context()`.
         * @returns the new {@link Pango.Context}
         */
        create_pango_context(): Pango.Context;

        /**
         * Creates a new {@link Pango.Layout} with the appropriate font map,
         * font description, and base direction for drawing text for
         * this widget.
         * 
         * If you keep a {@link Pango.Layout} created in this way around, you need
         * to re-create it when the widget {@link Pango.Context} is replaced.
         * This can be tracked by using the {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.screen_changed | Gtk.Widget::screen-changed} signal
         * on the widget.
         * @param text text to set on the layout (can be `null`)
         * @returns the new {@link Pango.Layout}
         */
        create_pango_layout(text: string | null): Pango.Layout;

        /**
         * Destroys a widget.
         * 
         * When a widget is destroyed all references it holds on other objects
         * will be released:
         * 
         *  - if the widget is inside a container, it will be removed from its
         *  parent
         *  - if the widget is a container, all its children will be destroyed,
         *  recursively
         *  - if the widget is a top level, it will be removed from the list
         *  of top level widgets that GTK+ maintains internally
         * 
         * It's expected that all references held on the widget will also
         * be released; you should connect to the {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.destroy | Gtk.Widget::destroy} signal
         * if you hold a reference to `widget` and you wish to remove it when
         * this function is called. It is not necessary to do so if you are
         * implementing a {@link Gtk.Container}, as you'll be able to use the
         * {@link Gtk.ContainerClass}.remove() virtual function for that.
         * 
         * It's important to notice that `gtk_widget_destroy()` will only cause
         * the `widget` to be finalized if no additional references, acquired
         * using `g_object_ref()`, are held on it. In case additional references
         * are in place, the `widget` will be in an "inert" state after calling
         * this function; `widget` will still point to valid memory, allowing you
         * to release the references you hold, but you may not query the widget's
         * own state.
         * 
         * You should typically call this function on top level widgets, and
         * rarely on child widgets.
         * 
         * See also: `gtk_container_remove()`
         */
        destroy(): void;

        /**
         * This function sets *`widget_pointer` to `null` if `widget_pointer` !=
         * `null`.  It’s intended to be used as a callback connected to the
         * “destroy” signal of a widget. You connect `gtk_widget_destroyed()`
         * as a signal handler, and pass the address of your widget variable
         * as user data. Then when the widget is destroyed, the variable will
         * be set to `null`. Useful for example to avoid multiple copies
         * of the same dialog.
         * @param widget_pointer address of a variable that contains `widget`
         */
        destroyed(widget_pointer: Widget): Widget;

        /**
         * Returns `true` if `device` has been shadowed by a GTK+
         * device grab on another widget, so it would stop sending
         * events to `widget`. This may be used in the
         * {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.grab_notify | Gtk.Widget::grab-notify} signal to check for specific
         * devices. See `gtk_device_grab_add()`.
         * @param device a {@link Gdk.Device}
         * @returns `true` if there is an ongoing grab on `device`          by another {@link Gtk.Widget} than `widget`.
         */
        device_is_shadowed(device: Gdk.Device): boolean;

        /**
         * This function is equivalent to `gtk_drag_begin_with_coordinates()`,
         * passing -1, -1 as coordinates.
         * @param targets The targets (data formats) in which the    source can provide the data
         * @param actions A bitmask of the allowed drag actions for this drag
         * @param button The button the user clicked to start the drag
         * @param event The event that triggered the start of the drag,    or `null` if none can be obtained.
         * @returns the context for this drag
         */
        drag_begin(targets: TargetList, actions: Gdk.DragAction, button: number, event: Gdk.Event | null): Gdk.DragContext;

        /**
         * Initiates a drag on the source side. The function only needs to be used
         * when the application is starting drags itself, and is not needed when
         * `gtk_drag_source_set()` is used.
         * 
         * The `event` is used to retrieve the timestamp that will be used internally to
         * grab the pointer.  If `event` is `null`, then `GDK_CURRENT_TIME` will be used.
         * However, you should try to pass a real event in all cases, since that can be
         * used to get information about the drag.
         * 
         * Generally there are three cases when you want to start a drag by hand by
         * calling this function:
         * 
         * 1. During a {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.button_press_event | Gtk.Widget::button-press-event} handler, if you want to start a drag
         * immediately when the user presses the mouse button.  Pass the `event`
         * that you have in your {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.button_press_event | Gtk.Widget::button-press-event} handler.
         * 
         * 2. During a {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.motion_notify_event | Gtk.Widget::motion-notify-event} handler, if you want to start a drag
         * when the mouse moves past a certain threshold distance after a button-press.
         * Pass the `event` that you have in your {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.motion_notify_event | Gtk.Widget::motion-notify-event} handler.
         * 
         * 3. During a timeout handler, if you want to start a drag after the mouse
         * button is held down for some time.  Try to save the last event that you got
         * from the mouse, using `gdk_event_copy()`, and pass it to this function
         * (remember to free the event with `gdk_event_free()` when you are done).
         * If you really cannot pass a real event, pass `null` instead.
         * @param targets The targets (data formats) in which the    source can provide the data
         * @param actions A bitmask of the allowed drag actions for this drag
         * @param button The button the user clicked to start the drag
         * @param event The event that triggered the start of the drag,    or `null` if none can be obtained.
         * @param x The initial x coordinate to start dragging from, in the coordinate space    of `widget`. If -1 is passed, the coordinates are retrieved from `event` or    the current pointer position
         * @param y The initial y coordinate to start dragging from, in the coordinate space    of `widget`. If -1 is passed, the coordinates are retrieved from `event` or    the current pointer position
         * @returns the context for this drag
         */
        drag_begin_with_coordinates(targets: TargetList, actions: Gdk.DragAction, button: number, event: Gdk.Event | null, x: number, y: number): Gdk.DragContext;

        /**
         * Checks to see if a mouse drag starting at (`start_x`, `start_y`) and ending
         * at (`current_x`, `current_y`) has passed the GTK+ drag threshold, and thus
         * should trigger the beginning of a drag-and-drop operation.
         * @param start_x X coordinate of start of drag
         * @param start_y Y coordinate of start of drag
         * @param current_x current X coordinate
         * @param current_y current Y coordinate
         * @returns `true` if the drag threshold has been passed.
         */
        drag_check_threshold(start_x: number, start_y: number, current_x: number, current_y: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Add the image targets supported by {@link Gtk.SelectionData} to
         * the target list of the drag destination. The targets
         * are added with `info` = 0. If you need another value,
         * use `gtk_target_list_add_image_targets()` and
         * `gtk_drag_dest_set_target_list()`.
         */
        drag_dest_add_image_targets(): void;

        /**
         * Add the text targets supported by {@link Gtk.SelectionData} to
         * the target list of the drag destination. The targets
         * are added with `info` = 0. If you need another value,
         * use `gtk_target_list_add_text_targets()` and
         * `gtk_drag_dest_set_target_list()`.
         */
        drag_dest_add_text_targets(): void;

        /**
         * Add the URI targets supported by {@link Gtk.SelectionData} to
         * the target list of the drag destination. The targets
         * are added with `info` = 0. If you need another value,
         * use `gtk_target_list_add_uri_targets()` and
         * `gtk_drag_dest_set_target_list()`.
         */
        drag_dest_add_uri_targets(): void;

        /**
         * Looks for a match between the supported targets of `context` and the
         * `dest_target_list`, returning the first matching target, otherwise
         * returning `GDK_NONE`. `dest_target_list` should usually be the return
         * value from `gtk_drag_dest_get_target_list()`, but some widgets may
         * have different valid targets for different parts of the widget; in
         * that case, they will have to implement a drag_motion handler that
         * passes the correct target list to this function.
         * @param context drag context
         * @param target_list list of droppable targets, or `null` to use    gtk_drag_dest_get_target_list (`widget`).
         * @returns first target that the source offers     and the dest can accept, or `GDK_NONE`
         */
        drag_dest_find_target(context: Gdk.DragContext, target_list: TargetList | null): Gdk.Atom;

        /**
         * Returns the list of targets this widget can accept from
         * drag-and-drop.
         * @returns the {@link Gtk.TargetList}, or `null` if none
         */
        drag_dest_get_target_list(): TargetList | null;

        /**
         * Returns whether the widget has been configured to always
         * emit {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.drag_motion | Gtk.Widget::drag-motion} signals.
         * @returns `true` if the widget always emits   {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.drag_motion | Gtk.Widget::drag-motion} events
         */
        drag_dest_get_track_motion(): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets a widget as a potential drop destination, and adds default behaviors.
         * 
         * The default behaviors listed in `flags` have an effect similar
         * to installing default handlers for the widget’s drag-and-drop signals
         * ({@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.drag_motion | Gtk.Widget::drag-motion}, {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.drag_drop | Gtk.Widget::drag-drop}, ...). They all exist
         * for convenience. When passing #GTK_DEST_DEFAULT_ALL for instance it is
         * sufficient to connect to the widget’s {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.drag_data_received | Gtk.Widget::drag-data-received}
         * signal to get primitive, but consistent drag-and-drop support.
         * 
         * Things become more complicated when you try to preview the dragged data,
         * as described in the documentation for {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.drag_motion | Gtk.Widget::drag-motion}. The default
         * behaviors described by `flags` make some assumptions, that can conflict
         * with your own signal handlers. For instance #GTK_DEST_DEFAULT_DROP causes
         * invokations of `gdk_drag_status()` in the context of {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.drag_motion | Gtk.Widget::drag-motion},
         * and invokations of `gtk_drag_finish()` in {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.drag_data_received | Gtk.Widget::drag-data-received}.
         * Especially the later is dramatic, when your own {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.drag_motion | Gtk.Widget::drag-motion}
         * handler calls `gtk_drag_get_data()` to inspect the dragged data.
         * 
         * There’s no way to set a default action here, you can use the
         * {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.drag_motion | Gtk.Widget::drag-motion} callback for that. Here’s an example which selects
         * the action to use depending on whether the control key is pressed or not:
         * 
         * ```c
         * static void
         * drag_motion (GtkWidget *widget,
         *              GdkDragContext *context,
         *              gint x,
         *              gint y,
         *              guint time)
         * {
         *   GdkModifierType mask;
         * 
         *   gdk_window_get_pointer (gtk_widget_get_window (widget),
         *                           NULL, NULL, &mask);
         *   if (mask & GDK_CONTROL_MASK)
         *     gdk_drag_status (context, GDK_ACTION_COPY, time);
         *   else
         *     gdk_drag_status (context, GDK_ACTION_MOVE, time);
         * }
         * ```
         * 
         * @param flags which types of default drag behavior to use
         * @param targets a pointer to an array of     `GtkTargetEntrys` indicating the drop types that this `widget` will     accept, or `null`. Later you can access the list with     `gtk_drag_dest_get_target_list()` and `gtk_drag_dest_find_target()`.
         * @param actions a bitmask of possible actions for a drop onto this `widget`.
         */
        drag_dest_set(flags: DestDefaults, targets: TargetEntry[] | null, actions: Gdk.DragAction): void;

        /**
         * Sets this widget as a proxy for drops to another window.
         * @param proxy_window the window to which to forward drag events
         * @param protocol the drag protocol which the `proxy_window` accepts   (You can use `gdk_drag_get_protocol()` to determine this)
         * @param use_coordinates If `true`, send the same coordinates to the   destination, because it is an embedded   subwindow.
         */
        drag_dest_set_proxy(proxy_window: Gdk.Window, protocol: Gdk.DragProtocol, use_coordinates: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the target types that this widget can accept from drag-and-drop.
         * The widget must first be made into a drag destination with
         * `gtk_drag_dest_set()`.
         * @param target_list list of droppable targets, or `null` for none
         */
        drag_dest_set_target_list(target_list: TargetList | null): void;

        /**
         * Tells the widget to emit {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.drag_motion | Gtk.Widget::drag-motion} and
         * {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.drag_leave | Gtk.Widget::drag-leave} events regardless of the targets and the
         * {@link Gtk.DestDefaults.MOTION} flag.
         * 
         * This may be used when a widget wants to do generic
         * actions regardless of the targets that the source offers.
         * @param track_motion whether to accept all targets
         */
        drag_dest_set_track_motion(track_motion: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Clears information about a drop destination set with
         * `gtk_drag_dest_set()`. The widget will no longer receive
         * notification of drags.
         */
        drag_dest_unset(): void;

        /**
         * Gets the data associated with a drag. When the data
         * is received or the retrieval fails, GTK+ will emit a
         * {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.drag_data_received | Gtk.Widget::drag-data-received} signal. Failure of the retrieval
         * is indicated by the length field of the `selection_data`
         * signal parameter being negative. However, when `gtk_drag_get_data()`
         * is called implicitely because the {@link Gtk.DestDefaults.DROP} was set,
         * then the widget will not receive notification of failed
         * drops.
         * @param context the drag context
         * @param target the target (form of the data) to retrieve
         * @param time_ a timestamp for retrieving the data. This will   generally be the time received in a {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.drag_motion | Gtk.Widget::drag-motion}   or {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.drag_drop | Gtk.Widget::drag-drop} signal
         */
        drag_get_data(context: Gdk.DragContext, target: Gdk.Atom, time_: number): void;

        /**
         * Highlights a widget as a currently hovered drop target.
         * To end the highlight, call `gtk_drag_unhighlight()`.
         * GTK+ calls this automatically if {@link Gtk.DestDefaults.HIGHLIGHT} is set.
         */
        drag_highlight(): void;

        /**
         * Add the writable image targets supported by {@link Gtk.SelectionData} to
         * the target list of the drag source. The targets
         * are added with `info` = 0. If you need another value,
         * use `gtk_target_list_add_image_targets()` and
         * `gtk_drag_source_set_target_list()`.
         */
        drag_source_add_image_targets(): void;

        /**
         * Add the text targets supported by {@link Gtk.SelectionData} to
         * the target list of the drag source.  The targets
         * are added with `info` = 0. If you need another value,
         * use `gtk_target_list_add_text_targets()` and
         * `gtk_drag_source_set_target_list()`.
         */
        drag_source_add_text_targets(): void;

        /**
         * Add the URI targets supported by {@link Gtk.SelectionData} to
         * the target list of the drag source.  The targets
         * are added with `info` = 0. If you need another value,
         * use `gtk_target_list_add_uri_targets()` and
         * `gtk_drag_source_set_target_list()`.
         */
        drag_source_add_uri_targets(): void;

        /**
         * Gets the list of targets this widget can provide for
         * drag-and-drop.
         * @returns the {@link Gtk.TargetList}, or `null` if none
         */
        drag_source_get_target_list(): TargetList | null;

        /**
         * Sets up a widget so that GTK+ will start a drag operation when the user
         * clicks and drags on the widget. The widget must have a window.
         * @param start_button_mask the bitmask of buttons that can start the drag
         * @param targets the table of targets     that the drag will support, may be `null`
         * @param actions the bitmask of possible actions for a drag from this widget
         */
        drag_source_set(start_button_mask: Gdk.ModifierType, targets: TargetEntry[] | null, actions: Gdk.DragAction): void;

        /**
         * Sets the icon that will be used for drags from a particular source
         * to `icon`. See the docs for {@link Gtk.IconTheme} for more details.
         * @param icon A {@link Gio.Icon}
         */
        drag_source_set_icon_gicon(icon: Gio.Icon): void;

        /**
         * Sets the icon that will be used for drags from a particular source
         * to a themed icon. See the docs for {@link Gtk.IconTheme} for more details.
         * @param icon_name name of icon to use
         */
        drag_source_set_icon_name(icon_name: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets the icon that will be used for drags from a particular widget
         * from a {@link GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf}. GTK+ retains a reference for `pixbuf` and will
         * release it when it is no longer needed.
         * @param pixbuf the {@link GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf} for the drag icon
         */
        drag_source_set_icon_pixbuf(pixbuf: GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf): void;

        /**
         * Sets the icon that will be used for drags from a particular source
         * to a stock icon.
         * @param stock_id the ID of the stock icon to use
         */
        drag_source_set_icon_stock(stock_id: string): void;

        /**
         * Changes the target types that this widget offers for drag-and-drop.
         * The widget must first be made into a drag source with
         * `gtk_drag_source_set()`.
         * @param target_list list of draggable targets, or `null` for none
         */
        drag_source_set_target_list(target_list: TargetList | null): void;

        /**
         * Undoes the effects of `gtk_drag_source_set()`.
         */
        drag_source_unset(): void;

        /**
         * Removes a highlight set by `gtk_drag_highlight()` from
         * a widget.
         */
        drag_unhighlight(): void;

        /**
         * Draws `widget` to `cr`. The top left corner of the widget will be
         * drawn to the currently set origin point of `cr`.
         * 
         * You should pass a cairo context as `cr` argument that is in an
         * original state. Otherwise the resulting drawing is undefined. For
         * example changing the operator using `cairo_set_operator()` or the
         * line width using `cairo_set_line_width()` might have unwanted side
         * effects.
         * You may however change the context’s transform matrix - like with
         * `cairo_scale()`, `cairo_translate()` or `cairo_set_matrix()` and clip
         * region with `cairo_clip()` prior to calling this function. Also, it
         * is fine to modify the context with `cairo_save()` and
         * `cairo_push_group()` prior to calling this function.
         * 
         * Note that special-purpose widgets may contain special code for
         * rendering to the screen and might appear differently on screen
         * and when rendered using `gtk_widget_draw()`.
         * @param cr a cairo context to draw to
         */
        draw(cr: cairo.Context): void;

        /**
         * Ensures that `widget` has a style (`widget`->style).
         * 
         * Not a very useful function; most of the time, if you
         * want the style, the widget is realized, and realized
         * widgets are guaranteed to have a style already.
         */
        ensure_style(): void;

        /**
         * Notifies the user about an input-related error on this widget.
         * If the {@link Gtk.Settings.gtk_error_bell} setting is `true`, it calls
         * `gdk_window_beep()`, otherwise it does nothing.
         * 
         * Note that the effect of `gdk_window_beep()` can be configured in many
         * ways, depending on the windowing backend and the desktop environment
         * or window manager that is used.
         */
        error_bell(): void;

        /**
         * Rarely-used function. This function is used to emit
         * the event signals on a widget (those signals should never
         * be emitted without using this function to do so).
         * If you want to synthesize an event though, don’t use this function;
         * instead, use `gtk_main_do_event()` so the event will behave as if
         * it were in the event queue. Don’t synthesize expose events; instead,
         * use `gdk_window_invalidate_rect()` to invalidate a region of the
         * window.
         * @param event a {@link Gdk.Event}
         * @returns return from the event signal emission (`true` if               the event was handled)
         */
        event(event: Gdk.Event): boolean;

        /**
         * Stops emission of {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.child_notify | Gtk.Widget::child-notify} signals on `widget`. The
         * signals are queued until `gtk_widget_thaw_child_notify()` is called
         * on `widget`.
         * 
         * This is the analogue of `g_object_freeze_notify()` for child properties.
         */
        freeze_child_notify(): void;

        /**
         * Returns the accessible object that describes the widget to an
         * assistive technology.
         * 
         * If accessibility support is not available, this {@link Atk.Object}
         * instance may be a no-op. Likewise, if no class-specific {@link Atk.Object}
         * implementation is available for the widget instance in question,
         * it will inherit an {@link Atk.Object} implementation from the first ancestor
         * class for which such an implementation is defined.
         * 
         * The documentation of the
         * [ATK](http://developer.gnome.org/atk/stable/)
         * library contains more information about accessible objects and their uses.
         * @returns the {@link Atk.Object} associated with `widget`
         */
        get_accessible(): Atk.Object;

        /**
         * Retrieves the {@link Gio.ActionGroup} that was registered using `prefix`. The resulting
         * {@link Gio.ActionGroup} may have been registered to `widget` or any {@link Gtk.Widget} in its
         * ancestry.
         * 
         * If no action group was found matching `prefix`, then `null` is returned.
         * @param prefix The “prefix” of the action group.
         * @returns A {@link Gio.ActionGroup} or `null`.
         */
        get_action_group(prefix: string): Gio.ActionGroup | null;

        /**
         * Returns the baseline that has currently been allocated to `widget`.
         * This function is intended to be used when implementing handlers
         * for the {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.draw | Gtk.Widget::draw} function, and when allocating child
         * widgets in {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.size_allocate | Gtk.Widget::size_allocate}.
         * @returns the baseline of the `widget`, or -1 if none
         */
        get_allocated_baseline(): number;

        /**
         * Returns the height that has currently been allocated to `widget`.
         * This function is intended to be used when implementing handlers
         * for the {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.draw | Gtk.Widget::draw} function.
         * @returns the height of the `widget`
         */
        get_allocated_height(): number;

        /**
         * Retrieves the widget’s allocated size.
         * 
         * This function returns the last values passed to
         * `gtk_widget_size_allocate_with_baseline()`. The value differs from
         * the size returned in `gtk_widget_get_allocation()` in that functions
         * like `gtk_widget_set_halign()` can adjust the allocation, but not
         * the value returned by this function.
         * 
         * If a widget is not visible, its allocated size is 0.
         */
        get_allocated_size(): [Allocation, number];

        /**
         * Returns the width that has currently been allocated to `widget`.
         * This function is intended to be used when implementing handlers
         * for the {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.draw | Gtk.Widget::draw} function.
         * @returns the width of the `widget`
         */
        get_allocated_width(): number;

        /**
         * Retrieves the widget’s allocation.
         * 
         * Note, when implementing a {@link Gtk.Container}: a widget’s allocation will
         * be its “adjusted” allocation, that is, the widget’s parent
         * container typically calls `gtk_widget_size_allocate()` with an
         * allocation, and that allocation is then adjusted (to handle margin
         * and alignment for example) before assignment to the widget.
         * `gtk_widget_get_allocation()` returns the adjusted allocation that
         * was actually assigned to the widget. The adjusted allocation is
         * guaranteed to be completely contained within the
         * `gtk_widget_size_allocate()` allocation, however. So a {@link Gtk.Container}
         * is guaranteed that its children stay inside the assigned bounds,
         * but not that they have exactly the bounds the container assigned.
         * There is no way to get the original allocation assigned by
         * `gtk_widget_size_allocate()`, since it isn’t stored; if a container
         * implementation needs that information it will have to track it itself.
         */
        get_allocation(): Allocation;

        /**
         * Gets the first ancestor of `widget` with type `widget_type`. For example,
         * `gtk_widget_get_ancestor (widget, GTK_TYPE_BOX)` gets
         * the first {@link Gtk.Box} that’s an ancestor of `widget`. No reference will be
         * added to the returned widget; it should not be unreferenced. See note
         * about checking for a toplevel {@link Gtk.Window} in the docs for
         * `gtk_widget_get_toplevel()`.
         * 
         * Note that unlike `gtk_widget_is_ancestor()`, `gtk_widget_get_ancestor()`
         * considers `widget` to be an ancestor of itself.
         * @param widget_type ancestor type
         * @returns the ancestor widget, or `null` if not found
         */
        get_ancestor(widget_type: GObject.GType): Widget | null;

        /**
         * Determines whether the application intends to draw on the widget in
         * an {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.draw | Gtk.Widget::draw} handler.
         * 
         * See `gtk_widget_set_app_paintable()`
         * @returns `true` if the widget is app paintable
         */
        get_app_paintable(): boolean;

        /**
         * Determines whether `widget` can be a default widget. See
         * `gtk_widget_set_can_default()`.
         * @returns `true` if `widget` can be a default widget, `false` otherwise
         */
        get_can_default(): boolean;

        /**
         * Determines whether `widget` can own the input focus. See
         * `gtk_widget_set_can_focus()`.
         * @returns `true` if `widget` can own the input focus, `false` otherwise
         */
        get_can_focus(): boolean;

        /**
         * This function is only for use in widget implementations. Obtains
         * `widget`->requisition, unless someone has forced a particular
         * geometry on the widget (e.g. with `gtk_widget_set_size_request()`),
         * in which case it returns that geometry instead of the widget's
         * requisition.
         * 
         * This function differs from `gtk_widget_size_request()` in that
         * it retrieves the last size request value from `widget`->requisition,
         * while `gtk_widget_size_request()` actually calls the "size_request" method
         * on `widget` to compute the size request and fill in `widget`->requisition,
         * and only then returns `widget`->requisition.
         * 
         * Because this function does not call the “size_request” method, it
         * can only be used when you know that `widget`->requisition is
         * up-to-date, that is, `gtk_widget_size_request()` has been called
         * since the last time a resize was queued. In general, only container
         * implementations have this information; applications should use
         * `gtk_widget_size_request()`.
         */
        get_child_requisition(): Requisition;

        /**
         * Gets the value set with `gtk_widget_set_child_visible()`.
         * If you feel a need to use this function, your code probably
         * needs reorganization.
         * 
         * This function is only useful for container implementations and
         * never should be called by an application.
         * @returns `true` if the widget is mapped with the parent.
         */
        get_child_visible(): boolean;

        /**
         * Retrieves the widget’s clip area.
         * 
         * The clip area is the area in which all of `widget`'s drawing will
         * happen. Other toolkits call it the bounding box.
         * 
         * Historically, in GTK+ the clip area has been equal to the allocation
         * retrieved via `gtk_widget_get_allocation()`.
         */
        get_clip(): Allocation;

        /**
         * Returns the clipboard object for the given selection to
         * be used with `widget`. `widget` must have a {@link Gdk.Display}
         * associated with it, so must be attached to a toplevel
         * window.
         * @param selection a {@link Gdk.Atom} which identifies the clipboard             to use. `GDK_SELECTION_CLIPBOARD` gives the             default clipboard. Another common value             is `GDK_SELECTION_PRIMARY`, which gives             the primary X selection.
         * @returns the appropriate clipboard object. If no             clipboard already exists, a new one will             be created. Once a clipboard object has             been created, it is persistent for all time.
         */
        get_clipboard(selection: Gdk.Atom): Clipboard;

        /**
         * Obtains the composite name of a widget.
         * @returns the composite name of `widget`, or `null` if `widget` is not   a composite child. The string should be freed when it is no   longer needed.
         */
        get_composite_name(): string;

        /**
         * Returns whether `device` can interact with `widget` and its
         * children. See `gtk_widget_set_device_enabled()`.
         * @param device a {@link Gdk.Device}
         * @returns `true` is `device` is enabled for `widget`
         */
        get_device_enabled(device: Gdk.Device): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the events mask for the widget corresponding to an specific device. These
         * are the events that the widget will receive when `device` operates on it.
         * @param device a {@link Gdk.Device}
         * @returns device event mask for `widget`
         */
        get_device_events(device: Gdk.Device): Gdk.EventMask;

        /**
         * Gets the reading direction for a particular widget. See
         * `gtk_widget_set_direction()`.
         * @returns the reading direction for the widget.
         */
        get_direction(): TextDirection;

        /**
         * Get the {@link Gdk.Display} for the toplevel window associated with
         * this widget. This function can only be called after the widget
         * has been added to a widget hierarchy with a {@link Gtk.Window} at the top.
         * 
         * In general, you should only create display specific
         * resources when a widget has been realized, and you should
         * free those resources when the widget is unrealized.
         * @returns the {@link Gdk.Display} for the toplevel for this widget.
         */
        get_display(): Gdk.Display;

        /**
         * Determines whether the widget is double buffered.
         * 
         * See `gtk_widget_set_double_buffered()`
         * @returns `true` if the widget is double buffered
         */
        get_double_buffered(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the event mask (see {@link Gdk.EventMask}) for the widget. These are the
         * events that the widget will receive.
         * 
         * Note: Internally, the widget event mask will be the logical OR of the event
         * mask set through `gtk_widget_set_events()` or `gtk_widget_add_events()`, and the
         * event mask necessary to cater for every {@link Gtk.EventController} created for the
         * widget.
         * @returns event mask for `widget`
         */
        get_events(): number;

        /**
         * Returns whether the widget should grab focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
         * See `gtk_widget_set_focus_on_click()`.
         * @returns `true` if the widget should grab focus when it is clicked with               the mouse.
         */
        get_focus_on_click(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the font map that has been set with `gtk_widget_set_font_map()`.
         * @returns A {@link Pango.FontMap}, or `null`
         */
        get_font_map(): Pango.FontMap | null;

        /**
         * Returns the {@link cairo.FontOptions} used for Pango rendering. When not set,
         * the defaults font options for the {@link Gdk.Screen} will be used.
         * @returns the {@link cairo.FontOptions} or `null` if not set
         */
        get_font_options(): cairo.FontOptions | null;

        /**
         * Obtains the frame clock for a widget. The frame clock is a global
         * “ticker” that can be used to drive animations and repaints.  The
         * most common reason to get the frame clock is to call
         * `gdk_frame_clock_get_frame_time()`, in order to get a time to use for
         * animating. For example you might record the start of the animation
         * with an initial value from `gdk_frame_clock_get_frame_time()`, and
         * then update the animation by calling
         * `gdk_frame_clock_get_frame_time()` again during each repaint.
         * 
         * `gdk_frame_clock_request_phase()` will result in a new frame on the
         * clock, but won’t necessarily repaint any widgets. To repaint a
         * widget, you have to use `gtk_widget_queue_draw()` which invalidates
         * the widget (thus scheduling it to receive a draw on the next
         * frame). `gtk_widget_queue_draw()` will also end up requesting a frame
         * on the appropriate frame clock.
         * 
         * A widget’s frame clock will not change while the widget is
         * mapped. Reparenting a widget (which implies a temporary unmap) can
         * change the widget’s frame clock.
         * 
         * Unrealized widgets do not have a frame clock.
         * @returns a {@link Gdk.FrameClock}, or `null` if widget is unrealized
         */
        get_frame_clock(): Gdk.FrameClock | null;

        /**
         * Gets the value of the {@link Gtk.Widget.halign} property.
         * 
         * For backwards compatibility reasons this method will never return
         * {@link Gtk.Align.BASELINE}, but instead it will convert it to
         * {@link Gtk.Align.FILL}. Baselines are not supported for horizontal
         * alignment.
         * @returns the horizontal alignment of `widget`
         */
        get_halign(): Align;

        /**
         * Returns the current value of the has-tooltip property.  See
         * {@link Gtk.Widget.has_tooltip} for more information.
         * @returns current value of has-tooltip on `widget`.
         */
        get_has_tooltip(): boolean;

        /**
         * Determines whether `widget` has a {@link Gdk.Window} of its own. See
         * `gtk_widget_set_has_window()`.
         * @returns `true` if `widget` has a window, `false` otherwise
         */
        get_has_window(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets whether the widget would like any available extra horizontal
         * space. When a user resizes a {@link Gtk.Window}, widgets with expand=TRUE
         * generally receive the extra space. For example, a list or
         * scrollable area or document in your window would often be set to
         * expand.
         * 
         * Containers should use `gtk_widget_compute_expand()` rather than
         * this function, to see whether a widget, or any of its children,
         * has the expand flag set. If any child of a widget wants to
         * expand, the parent may ask to expand also.
         * 
         * This function only looks at the widget’s own hexpand flag, rather
         * than computing whether the entire widget tree rooted at this widget
         * wants to expand.
         * @returns whether hexpand flag is set
         */
        get_hexpand(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets whether `gtk_widget_set_hexpand()` has been used to
         * explicitly set the expand flag on this widget.
         * 
         * If hexpand is set, then it overrides any computed
         * expand value based on child widgets. If hexpand is not
         * set, then the expand value depends on whether any
         * children of the widget would like to expand.
         * 
         * There are few reasons to use this function, but it’s here
         * for completeness and consistency.
         * @returns whether hexpand has been explicitly set
         */
        get_hexpand_set(): boolean;

        /**
         * Whether the widget is mapped.
         * @returns `true` if the widget is mapped, `false` otherwise.
         */
        get_mapped(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the value of the {@link Gtk.Widget.margin_bottom} property.
         * @returns The bottom margin of `widget`
         */
        get_margin_bottom(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the value of the {@link Gtk.Widget.margin_end} property.
         * @returns The end margin of `widget`
         */
        get_margin_end(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the value of the {@link Gtk.Widget.margin_left} property.
         * @returns The left margin of `widget`
         */
        get_margin_left(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the value of the {@link Gtk.Widget.margin_right} property.
         * @returns The right margin of `widget`
         */
        get_margin_right(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the value of the {@link Gtk.Widget.margin_start} property.
         * @returns The start margin of `widget`
         */
        get_margin_start(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the value of the {@link Gtk.Widget.margin_top} property.
         * @returns The top margin of `widget`
         */
        get_margin_top(): number;

        /**
         * Returns the modifier mask the `widget`’s windowing system backend
         * uses for a particular purpose.
         * 
         * See `gdk_keymap_get_modifier_mask()`.
         * @param intent the use case for the modifier mask
         * @returns the modifier mask used for `intent`.
         */
        get_modifier_mask(intent: Gdk.ModifierIntent): Gdk.ModifierType;

        /**
         * Returns the current modifier style for the widget. (As set by
         * `gtk_widget_modify_style()`.) If no style has previously set, a new
         * {@link Gtk.RcStyle} will be created with all values unset, and set as the
         * modifier style for the widget. If you make changes to this rc
         * style, you must call `gtk_widget_modify_style()`, passing in the
         * returned rc style, to make sure that your changes take effect.
         * 
         * Caution: passing the style back to `gtk_widget_modify_style()` will
         * normally end up destroying it, because `gtk_widget_modify_style()` copies
         * the passed-in style and sets the copy as the new modifier style,
         * thus dropping any reference to the old modifier style. Add a reference
         * to the modifier style if you want to keep it alive.
         * @returns the modifier style for the widget.     This rc style is owned by the widget. If you want to keep a     pointer to value this around, you must add a refcount using     `g_object_ref()`.
         */
        get_modifier_style(): RcStyle;

        /**
         * Retrieves the name of a widget. See `gtk_widget_set_name()` for the
         * significance of widget names.
         * @returns name of the widget. This string is owned by GTK+ and should not be modified or freed
         */
        get_name(): string;

        /**
         * Returns the current value of the {@link Gtk.Widget.no_show_all} property,
         * which determines whether calls to `gtk_widget_show_all()`
         * will affect this widget.
         * @returns the current value of the “no-show-all” property.
         */
        get_no_show_all(): boolean;

        /**
         * Fetches the requested opacity for this widget.
         * See `gtk_widget_set_opacity()`.
         * @returns the requested opacity for this widget.
         */
        get_opacity(): number;

        /**
         * Gets a {@link Pango.Context} with the appropriate font map, font description,
         * and base direction for this widget. Unlike the context returned
         * by `gtk_widget_create_pango_context()`, this context is owned by
         * the widget (it can be used until the screen for the widget changes
         * or the widget is removed from its toplevel), and will be updated to
         * match any changes to the widget’s attributes. This can be tracked
         * by using the {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.screen_changed | Gtk.Widget::screen-changed} signal on the widget.
         * @returns the {@link Pango.Context} for the widget.
         */
        get_pango_context(): Pango.Context;

        /**
         * Returns the parent container of `widget`.
         * @returns the parent container of `widget`, or `null`
         */
        get_parent(): Widget | null;

        /**
         * Gets `widget`’s parent window, or `null` if it does not have one.
         * @returns the parent window of `widget`, or `null` if it does not have a parent window.
         */
        get_parent_window(): Gdk.Window | null;

        /**
         * Returns the {@link Gtk.WidgetPath} representing `widget`, if the widget
         * is not connected to a toplevel widget, a partial path will be
         * created.
         * @returns The {@link Gtk.WidgetPath} representing `widget`
         */
        get_path(): WidgetPath;

        /**
         * Obtains the location of the mouse pointer in widget coordinates.
         * Widget coordinates are a bit odd; for historical reasons, they are
         * defined as `widget`->window coordinates for widgets that return `true` for
         * `gtk_widget_get_has_window()`; and are relative to `widget`->allocation.x,
         * `widget`->allocation.y otherwise.
         */
        get_pointer(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Retrieves a widget’s initial minimum and natural height.
         * 
         * This call is specific to width-for-height requests.
         * 
         * The returned request will be modified by the
         * GtkWidgetClass::adjust_size_request virtual method and by any
         * `GtkSizeGroups` that have been applied. That is, the returned request
         * is the one that should be used for layout, not necessarily the one
         * returned by the widget itself.
         */
        get_preferred_height(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Retrieves a widget’s minimum and natural height and the corresponding baselines if it would be given
         * the specified `width`, or the default height if `width` is -1. The baselines may be -1 which means
         * that no baseline is requested for this widget.
         * 
         * The returned request will be modified by the
         * GtkWidgetClass::adjust_size_request and GtkWidgetClass::adjust_baseline_request virtual methods
         * and by any `GtkSizeGroups` that have been applied. That is, the returned request
         * is the one that should be used for layout, not necessarily the one
         * returned by the widget itself.
         * @param width the width which is available for allocation, or -1 if none
         */
        get_preferred_height_and_baseline_for_width(width: number): [number, number, number, number];

        /**
         * Retrieves a widget’s minimum and natural height if it would be given
         * the specified `width`.
         * 
         * The returned request will be modified by the
         * GtkWidgetClass::adjust_size_request virtual method and by any
         * `GtkSizeGroups` that have been applied. That is, the returned request
         * is the one that should be used for layout, not necessarily the one
         * returned by the widget itself.
         * @param width the width which is available for allocation
         */
        get_preferred_height_for_width(width: number): [number, number];

        /**
         * Retrieves the minimum and natural size of a widget, taking
         * into account the widget’s preference for height-for-width management.
         * 
         * This is used to retrieve a suitable size by container widgets which do
         * not impose any restrictions on the child placement. It can be used
         * to deduce toplevel window and menu sizes as well as child widgets in
         * free-form containers such as GtkLayout.
         * 
         * Handle with care. Note that the natural height of a height-for-width
         * widget will generally be a smaller size than the minimum height, since the required
         * height for the natural width is generally smaller than the required height for
         * the minimum width.
         * 
         * Use `gtk_widget_get_preferred_height_and_baseline_for_width()` if you want to support
         * baseline alignment.
         */
        get_preferred_size(): [Requisition | null, Requisition | null];

        /**
         * Retrieves a widget’s initial minimum and natural width.
         * 
         * This call is specific to height-for-width requests.
         * 
         * The returned request will be modified by the
         * GtkWidgetClass::adjust_size_request virtual method and by any
         * `GtkSizeGroups` that have been applied. That is, the returned request
         * is the one that should be used for layout, not necessarily the one
         * returned by the widget itself.
         */
        get_preferred_width(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Retrieves a widget’s minimum and natural width if it would be given
         * the specified `height`.
         * 
         * The returned request will be modified by the
         * GtkWidgetClass::adjust_size_request virtual method and by any
         * `GtkSizeGroups` that have been applied. That is, the returned request
         * is the one that should be used for layout, not necessarily the one
         * returned by the widget itself.
         * @param height the height which is available for allocation
         */
        get_preferred_width_for_height(height: number): [number, number];

        /**
         * Determines whether `widget` is realized.
         * @returns `true` if `widget` is realized, `false` otherwise
         */
        get_realized(): boolean;

        /**
         * Determines whether `widget` is always treated as the default widget
         * within its toplevel when it has the focus, even if another widget
         * is the default.
         * 
         * See `gtk_widget_set_receives_default()`.
         * @returns `true` if `widget` acts as the default widget when focused,               `false` otherwise
         */
        get_receives_default(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets whether the widget prefers a height-for-width layout
         * or a width-for-height layout.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Bin} widgets generally propagate the preference of
         * their child, container widgets need to request something either in
         * context of their children or in context of their allocation
         * capabilities.
         * @returns The {@link Gtk.SizeRequestMode} preferred by `widget`.
         */
        get_request_mode(): SizeRequestMode;

        /**
         * Retrieves the widget’s requisition.
         * 
         * This function should only be used by widget implementations in
         * order to figure whether the widget’s requisition has actually
         * changed after some internal state change (so that they can call
         * `gtk_widget_queue_resize()` instead of `gtk_widget_queue_draw()`).
         * 
         * Normally, `gtk_widget_size_request()` should be used.
         */
        get_requisition(): Requisition;

        /**
         * Get the root window where this widget is located. This function can
         * only be called after the widget has been added to a widget
         * hierarchy with {@link Gtk.Window} at the top.
         * 
         * The root window is useful for such purposes as creating a popup
         * {@link Gdk.Window} associated with the window. In general, you should only
         * create display specific resources when a widget has been realized,
         * and you should free those resources when the widget is unrealized.
         * @returns the {@link Gdk.Window} root window for the toplevel for this widget.
         */
        get_root_window(): Gdk.Window;

        /**
         * Retrieves the internal scale factor that maps from window coordinates
         * to the actual device pixels. On traditional systems this is 1, on
         * high density outputs, it can be a higher value (typically 2).
         * 
         * See `gdk_window_get_scale_factor()`.
         * @returns the scale factor for `widget`
         */
        get_scale_factor(): number;

        /**
         * Get the {@link Gdk.Screen} from the toplevel window associated with
         * this widget. This function can only be called after the widget
         * has been added to a widget hierarchy with a {@link Gtk.Window}
         * at the top.
         * 
         * In general, you should only create screen specific
         * resources when a widget has been realized, and you should
         * free those resources when the widget is unrealized.
         * @returns the {@link Gdk.Screen} for the toplevel for this widget.
         */
        get_screen(): Gdk.Screen;

        /**
         * Returns the widget’s sensitivity (in the sense of returning
         * the value that has been set using `gtk_widget_set_sensitive()`).
         * 
         * The effective sensitivity of a widget is however determined by both its
         * own and its parent widget’s sensitivity. See `gtk_widget_is_sensitive()`.
         * @returns `true` if the widget is sensitive
         */
        get_sensitive(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the settings object holding the settings used for this widget.
         * 
         * Note that this function can only be called when the {@link Gtk.Widget}
         * is attached to a toplevel, since the settings object is specific
         * to a particular {@link Gdk.Screen}.
         * @returns the relevant {@link Gtk.Settings} object
         */
        get_settings(): Settings;

        /**
         * Gets the size request that was explicitly set for the widget using
         * `gtk_widget_set_size_request()`. A value of -1 stored in `width` or
         * `height` indicates that that dimension has not been set explicitly
         * and the natural requisition of the widget will be used instead. See
         * `gtk_widget_set_size_request()`. To get the size a widget will
         * actually request, call `gtk_widget_get_preferred_size()` instead of
         * this function.
         */
        get_size_request(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Returns the widget’s state. See `gtk_widget_set_state()`.
         * @returns the state of `widget`.
         */
        get_state(): StateType;

        /**
         * Returns the widget state as a flag set. It is worth mentioning
         * that the effective {@link Gtk.StateFlags.INSENSITIVE} state will be
         * returned, that is, also based on parent insensitivity, even if
         * `widget` itself is sensitive.
         * 
         * Also note that if you are looking for a way to obtain the
         * {@link Gtk.StateFlags} to pass to a {@link Gtk.StyleContext} method, you
         * should look at `gtk_style_context_get_state()`.
         * @returns The state flags for widget
         */
        get_state_flags(): StateFlags;

        /**
         * Simply an accessor function that returns `widget`->style.
         * @returns the widget’s {@link Gtk.Style}
         */
        get_style(): Style;

        /**
         * Returns the style context associated to `widget`. The returned object is
         * guaranteed to be the same for the lifetime of `widget`.
         * @returns a {@link Gtk.StyleContext}. This memory is owned by `widget` and          must not be freed.
         */
        get_style_context(): StyleContext;

        /**
         * Returns `true` if `widget` is multiple pointer aware. See
         * `gtk_widget_set_support_multidevice()` for more information.
         * @returns `true` if `widget` is multidevice aware.
         */
        get_support_multidevice(): boolean;

        /**
         * Fetch an object build from the template XML for `widget_type` in this `widget` instance.
         * 
         * This will only report children which were previously declared with
         * `gtk_widget_class_bind_template_child_full()` or one of its
         * variants.
         * 
         * This function is only meant to be called for code which is private to the `widget_type` which
         * declared the child and is meant for language bindings which cannot easily make use
         * of the GObject structure offsets.
         * @param widget_type The {@link GObject.GType} to get a template child for
         * @param name The “id” of the child defined in the template XML
         * @returns The object built in the template XML with the id `name`
         */
        get_template_child<T = GObject.Object>(widget_type: GObject.GType, name: string): T;

        /**
         * Gets the contents of the tooltip for `widget`.
         * @returns the tooltip text, or `null`. You should free the   returned string with `g_free()` when done.
         */
        get_tooltip_markup(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the contents of the tooltip for `widget`.
         * @returns the tooltip text, or `null`. You should free the   returned string with `g_free()` when done.
         */
        get_tooltip_text(): string | null;

        /**
         * Returns the {@link Gtk.Window} of the current tooltip. This can be the
         * GtkWindow created by default, or the custom tooltip window set
         * using `gtk_widget_set_tooltip_window()`.
         * @returns The {@link Gtk.Window} of the current tooltip.
         */
        get_tooltip_window(): Window;

        /**
         * This function returns the topmost widget in the container hierarchy
         * `widget` is a part of. If `widget` has no parent widgets, it will be
         * returned as the topmost widget. No reference will be added to the
         * returned widget; it should not be unreferenced.
         * 
         * Note the difference in behavior vs. `gtk_widget_get_ancestor()`;
         * `gtk_widget_get_ancestor (widget, GTK_TYPE_WINDOW)`
         * would return
         * `null` if `widget` wasn’t inside a toplevel window, and if the
         * window was inside a {@link Gtk.Window}-derived widget which was in turn
         * inside the toplevel {@link Gtk.Window}. While the second case may
         * seem unlikely, it actually happens when a {@link Gtk.Plug} is embedded
         * inside a {@link Gtk.Socket} within the same application.
         * 
         * To reliably find the toplevel {@link Gtk.Window}, use
         * `gtk_widget_get_toplevel()` and call GTK_IS_WINDOW()
         * on the result. For instance, to get the title of a widget's toplevel
         * window, one might use:
         * 
         * ```c
         * static const char *
         * get_widget_toplevel_title (GtkWidget *widget)
         * {
         *   GtkWidget *toplevel = gtk_widget_get_toplevel (widget);
         *   if (GTK_IS_WINDOW (toplevel))
         *     {
         *       return gtk_window_get_title (GTK_WINDOW (toplevel));
         *     }
         * 
         *   return NULL;
         * }
         * ```
         * 
         * @returns the topmost ancestor of `widget`, or `widget` itself    if there’s no ancestor.
         */
        get_toplevel(): Widget;

        /**
         * Gets the value of the {@link Gtk.Widget.valign} property.
         * 
         * For backwards compatibility reasons this method will never return
         * {@link Gtk.Align.BASELINE}, but instead it will convert it to
         * {@link Gtk.Align.FILL}. If your widget want to support baseline aligned
         * children it must use `gtk_widget_get_valign_with_baseline()`, or
         * `g_object_get (widget, "valign", &value, NULL)`, which will
         * also report the true value.
         * @returns the vertical alignment of `widget`, ignoring baseline alignment
         */
        get_valign(): Align;

        /**
         * Gets the value of the {@link Gtk.Widget.valign} property, including
         * {@link Gtk.Align.BASELINE}.
         * @returns the vertical alignment of `widget`
         */
        get_valign_with_baseline(): Align;

        /**
         * Gets whether the widget would like any available extra vertical
         * space.
         * 
         * See `gtk_widget_get_hexpand()` for more detail.
         * @returns whether vexpand flag is set
         */
        get_vexpand(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets whether `gtk_widget_set_vexpand()` has been used to
         * explicitly set the expand flag on this widget.
         * 
         * See `gtk_widget_get_hexpand_set()` for more detail.
         * @returns whether vexpand has been explicitly set
         */
        get_vexpand_set(): boolean;

        /**
         * Determines whether the widget is visible. If you want to
         * take into account whether the widget’s parent is also marked as
         * visible, use `gtk_widget_is_visible()` instead.
         * 
         * This function does not check if the widget is obscured in any way.
         * 
         * See `gtk_widget_set_visible()`.
         * @returns `true` if the widget is visible
         */
        get_visible(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the visual that will be used to render `widget`.
         * @returns the visual for `widget`
         */
        get_visual(): Gdk.Visual;

        /**
         * Returns the widget’s window if it is realized, `null` otherwise
         * @returns `widget`’s window.
         */
        get_window(): Gdk.Window | null;

        /**
         * Makes `widget` the current grabbed widget.
         * 
         * This means that interaction with other widgets in the same
         * application is blocked and mouse as well as keyboard events
         * are delivered to this widget.
         * 
         * If `widget` is not sensitive, it is not set as the current
         * grabbed widget and this function does nothing.
         */
        grab_add(): void;

        /**
         * Causes `widget` to become the default widget. `widget` must be able to be
         * a default widget; typically you would ensure this yourself
         * by calling `gtk_widget_set_can_default()` with a `true` value.
         * The default widget is activated when
         * the user presses Enter in a window. Default widgets must be
         * activatable, that is, `gtk_widget_activate()` should affect them. Note
         * that {@link Gtk.Entry} widgets require the “activates-default” property
         * set to `true` before they activate the default widget when Enter
         * is pressed and the {@link Gtk.Entry} is focused.
         */
        grab_default(): void;

        /**
         * Causes `widget` to have the keyboard focus for the {@link Gtk.Window} it's
         * inside. `widget` must be a focusable widget, such as a {@link Gtk.Entry};
         * something like {@link Gtk.Frame} won’t work.
         * 
         * More precisely, it must have the `GTK_CAN_FOCUS` flag set. Use
         * `gtk_widget_set_can_focus()` to modify that flag.
         * 
         * The widget also needs to be realized and mapped. This is indicated by the
         * related signals. Grabbing the focus immediately after creating the widget
         * will likely fail and cause critical warnings.
         */
        grab_focus(): void;

        /**
         * Removes the grab from the given widget.
         * 
         * You have to pair calls to `gtk_grab_add()` and `gtk_grab_remove()`.
         * 
         * If `widget` does not have the grab, this function does nothing.
         */
        grab_remove(): void;

        /**
         * Determines whether the widget is currently grabbing events, so it
         * is the only widget receiving input events (keyboard and mouse).
         * 
         * See also `gtk_grab_add()`.
         * @returns `true` if the widget is in the grab_widgets stack
         */
        has_grab(): boolean;

        /**
         * Determines if the widget style has been looked up through the rc mechanism.
         * @returns `true` if the widget has been looked up through the rc   mechanism, `false` otherwise.
         */
        has_rc_style(): boolean;

        /**
         * Checks whether there is a {@link Gdk.Screen} is associated with
         * this widget. All toplevel widgets have an associated
         * screen, and all widgets added into a hierarchy with a toplevel
         * window at the top.
         * @returns `true` if there is a {@link Gdk.Screen} associated   with the widget.
         */
        has_screen(): boolean;

        /**
         * Determines if the widget should show a visible indication that
         * it has the global input focus. This is a convenience function for
         * use in ::draw handlers that takes into account whether focus
         * indication should currently be shown in the toplevel window of
         * `widget`. See `gtk_window_get_focus_visible()` for more information
         * about focus indication.
         * 
         * To find out if the widget has the global input focus, use
         * `gtk_widget_has_focus()`.
         * @returns `true` if the widget should display a “focus rectangle”
         */
        has_visible_focus(): boolean;

        /**
         * Reverses the effects of `gtk_widget_show()`, causing the widget to be
         * hidden (invisible to the user).
         */
        hide(): void;

        /**
         * Utility function; intended to be connected to the {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.delete_event | Gtk.Widget::delete-event}
         * signal on a {@link Gtk.Window}. The function calls `gtk_widget_hide()` on its
         * argument, then returns `true`. If connected to ::delete-event, the
         * result is that clicking the close button for a window (on the
         * window frame, top right corner usually) will hide but not destroy
         * the window. By default, GTK+ destroys windows when ::delete-event
         * is received.
         * @returns `true`
         */
        hide_on_delete(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns whether the widget is currently being destroyed.
         * This information can sometimes be used to avoid doing
         * unnecessary work.
         * @returns `true` if `widget` is being destroyed
         */
        in_destruction(): boolean;

        /**
         * Creates and initializes child widgets defined in templates. This
         * function must be called in the instance initializer for any
         * class which assigned itself a template using `gtk_widget_class_set_template()`
         * 
         * It is important to call this function in the instance initializer
         * of a {@link Gtk.Widget} subclass and not in {@link GObject.Object}.constructed() or
         * {@link GObject.Object}.constructor() for two reasons.
         * 
         * One reason is that generally derived widgets will assume that parent
         * class composite widgets have been created in their instance
         * initializers.
         * 
         * Another reason is that when calling `g_object_new()` on a widget with
         * composite templates, it’s important to build the composite widgets
         * before the construct properties are set. Properties passed to `g_object_new()`
         * should take precedence over properties set in the private template XML.
         */
        init_template(): void;

        /**
         * Sets an input shape for this widget’s GDK window. This allows for
         * windows which react to mouse click in a nonrectangular region, see
         * `gdk_window_input_shape_combine_region()` for more information.
         * @param region shape to be added, or `null` to remove an existing shape
         */
        input_shape_combine_region(region: cairo.Region | null): void;

        /**
         * Inserts `group` into `widget`. Children of `widget` that implement
         * {@link Gtk.Actionable} can then be associated with actions in `group` by
         * setting their “action-name” to
         * `prefix`.`action-name`.
         * 
         * If `group` is `null`, a previously inserted group for `name` is removed
         * from `widget`.
         * @param name the prefix for actions in `group`
         * @param group a {@link Gio.ActionGroup}, or `null`
         */
        insert_action_group(name: string, group: Gio.ActionGroup | null): void;

        /**
         * Computes the intersection of a `widget`’s area and `area`, storing
         * the intersection in `intersection`, and returns `true` if there was
         * an intersection.  `intersection` may be `null` if you’re only
         * interested in whether there was an intersection.
         * @param area a rectangle
         * @returns `true` if there was an intersection
         */
        intersect(area: Gdk.Rectangle): [boolean, Gdk.Rectangle | null];

        /**
         * Determines whether `widget` is somewhere inside `ancestor`, possibly with
         * intermediate containers.
         * @param ancestor another {@link Gtk.Widget}
         * @returns `true` if `ancestor` contains `widget` as a child,    grandchild, great grandchild, etc.
         */
        is_ancestor(ancestor: Widget): boolean;

        /**
         * Whether `widget` can rely on having its alpha channel
         * drawn correctly. On X11 this function returns whether a
         * compositing manager is running for `widget`’s screen.
         * 
         * Please note that the semantics of this call will change
         * in the future if used on a widget that has a composited
         * window in its hierarchy (as set by `gdk_window_set_composited()`).
         * @returns `true` if the widget can rely on its alpha channel being drawn correctly.
         */
        is_composited(): boolean;

        /**
         * Determines whether `widget` can be drawn to. A widget can be drawn
         * to if it is mapped and visible.
         * @returns `true` if `widget` is drawable, `false` otherwise
         */
        is_drawable(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the widget’s effective sensitivity, which means
         * it is sensitive itself and also its parent widget is sensitive
         * @returns `true` if the widget is effectively sensitive
         */
        is_sensitive(): boolean;

        /**
         * Determines whether `widget` is a toplevel widget.
         * 
         * Currently only {@link Gtk.Window} and {@link Gtk.Invisible} (and out-of-process
         * `GtkPlugs`) are toplevel widgets. Toplevel widgets have no parent
         * widget.
         * @returns `true` if `widget` is a toplevel, `false` otherwise
         */
        is_toplevel(): boolean;

        /**
         * Determines whether the widget and all its parents are marked as
         * visible.
         * 
         * This function does not check if the widget is obscured in any way.
         * 
         * See also `gtk_widget_get_visible()` and `gtk_widget_set_visible()`
         * @returns `true` if the widget and all its parents are visible
         */
        is_visible(): boolean;

        /**
         * This function should be called whenever keyboard navigation within
         * a single widget hits a boundary. The function emits the
         * {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.keynav_failed | Gtk.Widget::keynav-failed} signal on the widget and its return
         * value should be interpreted in a way similar to the return value of
         * `gtk_widget_child_focus()`:
         * 
         * When `true` is returned, stay in the widget, the failed keyboard
         * navigation is OK and/or there is nowhere we can/should move the
         * focus to.
         * 
         * When `false` is returned, the caller should continue with keyboard
         * navigation outside the widget, e.g. by calling
         * `gtk_widget_child_focus()` on the widget’s toplevel.
         * 
         * The default ::keynav-failed handler returns `false` for
         * {@link Gtk.DirectionType.TAB_FORWARD} and {@link Gtk.DirectionType.TAB_BACKWARD}. For the other
         * values of {@link Gtk.DirectionType} it returns `true`.
         * 
         * Whenever the default handler returns `true`, it also calls
         * `gtk_widget_error_bell()` to notify the user of the failed keyboard
         * navigation.
         * 
         * A use case for providing an own implementation of ::keynav-failed
         * (either by connecting to it or by overriding it) would be a row of
         * {@link Gtk.Entry} widgets where the user should be able to navigate the
         * entire row with the cursor keys, as e.g. known from user interfaces
         * that require entering license keys.
         * @param direction direction of focus movement
         * @returns `true` if stopping keyboard navigation is fine, `false`               if the emitting widget should try to handle the keyboard               navigation attempt in its parent container(s).
         */
        keynav_failed(direction: DirectionType): boolean;

        /**
         * Lists the closures used by `widget` for accelerator group connections
         * with `gtk_accel_group_connect_by_path()` or `gtk_accel_group_connect()`.
         * The closures can be used to monitor accelerator changes on `widget`,
         * by connecting to the `GtkAccelGroup`::accel-changed signal of the
         * {@link Gtk.AccelGroup} of a closure which can be found out with
         * `gtk_accel_group_from_accel_closure()`.
         * @returns a newly allocated {@link GLib.List} of closures
         */
        list_accel_closures(): GObject.Closure[];

        /**
         * Retrieves a `null`-terminated array of strings containing the prefixes of
         * {@link Gio.ActionGroup}'s available to `widget`.
         * @returns a `null`-terminated array of strings.
         */
        list_action_prefixes(): string[];

        /**
         * Returns a newly allocated list of the widgets, normally labels, for
         * which this widget is the target of a mnemonic (see for example,
         * `gtk_label_set_mnemonic_widget()`).
         * 
         * The widgets in the list are not individually referenced. If you
         * want to iterate through the list and perform actions involving
         * callbacks that might destroy the widgets, you
         * must call `g_list_foreach (result,
         * (GFunc)g_object_ref, NULL)` first, and then unref all the
         * widgets afterwards.
         * @returns the list of  mnemonic labels; free this list  with `g_list_free()` when you are done with it.
         */
        list_mnemonic_labels(): Widget[];

        /**
         * This function is only for use in widget implementations. Causes
         * a widget to be mapped if it isn’t already.
         */
        map(): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.mnemonic_activate | Gtk.Widget::mnemonic-activate} signal.
         * @param group_cycling `true` if there are other widgets with the same mnemonic
         * @returns `true` if the signal has been handled
         */
        mnemonic_activate(group_cycling: boolean): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the base color for a widget in a particular state.
         * All other style values are left untouched. The base color
         * is the background color used along with the text color
         * (see `gtk_widget_modify_text()`) for widgets such as {@link Gtk.Entry}
         * and {@link Gtk.TextView}. See also `gtk_widget_modify_style()`.
         * 
         * > Note that “no window” widgets (which have the `GTK_NO_WINDOW`
         * > flag set) draw on their parent container’s window and thus may
         * > not draw any background themselves. This is the case for e.g.
         * > {@link Gtk.Label}.
         * >
         * > To modify the background of such widgets, you have to set the
         * > base color on their parent; if you want to set the background
         * > of a rectangular area around a label, try placing the label in
         * > a {@link Gtk.EventBox} widget and setting the base color on that.
         * @param state the state for which to set the base color
         * @param color the color to assign (does not need to     be allocated), or `null` to undo the effect of previous     calls to of `gtk_widget_modify_base()`.
         */
        modify_base(state: StateType, color: Gdk.Color | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the background color for a widget in a particular state.
         * 
         * All other style values are left untouched.
         * See also `gtk_widget_modify_style()`.
         * 
         * > Note that “no window” widgets (which have the `GTK_NO_WINDOW`
         * > flag set) draw on their parent container’s window and thus may
         * > not draw any background themselves. This is the case for e.g.
         * > {@link Gtk.Label}.
         * >
         * > To modify the background of such widgets, you have to set the
         * > background color on their parent; if you want to set the background
         * > of a rectangular area around a label, try placing the label in
         * > a {@link Gtk.EventBox} widget and setting the background color on that.
         * @param state the state for which to set the background color
         * @param color the color to assign (does not need     to be allocated), or `null` to undo the effect of previous     calls to of `gtk_widget_modify_bg()`.
         */
        modify_bg(state: StateType, color: Gdk.Color | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the cursor color to use in a widget, overriding the {@link Gtk.Widget}
         * cursor-color and secondary-cursor-color
         * style properties.
         * 
         * All other style values are left untouched.
         * See also `gtk_widget_modify_style()`.
         * @param primary the color to use for primary cursor (does not     need to be allocated), or `null` to undo the effect of previous     calls to of `gtk_widget_modify_cursor()`.
         * @param secondary the color to use for secondary cursor (does     not need to be allocated), or `null` to undo the effect of     previous calls to of `gtk_widget_modify_cursor()`.
         */
        modify_cursor(primary: Gdk.Color | null, secondary: Gdk.Color | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the foreground color for a widget in a particular state.
         * 
         * All other style values are left untouched.
         * See also `gtk_widget_modify_style()`.
         * @param state the state for which to set the foreground color
         * @param color the color to assign (does not need to be allocated),     or `null` to undo the effect of previous calls to     of `gtk_widget_modify_fg()`.
         */
        modify_fg(state: StateType, color: Gdk.Color | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the font to use for a widget.
         * 
         * All other style values are left untouched.
         * See also `gtk_widget_modify_style()`.
         * @param font_desc the font description to use, or `null`     to undo the effect of previous calls to `gtk_widget_modify_font()`
         */
        modify_font(font_desc: Pango.FontDescription | null): void;

        /**
         * Modifies style values on the widget.
         * 
         * Modifications made using this technique take precedence over
         * style values set via an RC file, however, they will be overridden
         * if a style is explicitly set on the widget using `gtk_widget_set_style()`.
         * The {@link Gtk.RcStyle}-struct is designed so each field can either be
         * set or unset, so it is possible, using this function, to modify some
         * style values and leave the others unchanged.
         * 
         * Note that modifications made with this function are not cumulative
         * with previous calls to `gtk_widget_modify_style()` or with such
         * functions as `gtk_widget_modify_fg()`. If you wish to retain
         * previous values, you must first call `gtk_widget_get_modifier_style()`,
         * make your modifications to the returned style, then call
         * `gtk_widget_modify_style()` with that style. On the other hand,
         * if you first call `gtk_widget_modify_style()`, subsequent calls
         * to such functions `gtk_widget_modify_fg()` will have a cumulative
         * effect with the initial modifications.
         * @param style the {@link Gtk.RcStyle}-struct holding the style modifications
         */
        modify_style(style: RcStyle): void;

        /**
         * Sets the text color for a widget in a particular state.
         * 
         * All other style values are left untouched.
         * The text color is the foreground color used along with the
         * base color (see `gtk_widget_modify_base()`) for widgets such
         * as {@link Gtk.Entry} and {@link Gtk.TextView}.
         * See also `gtk_widget_modify_style()`.
         * @param state the state for which to set the text color
         * @param color the color to assign (does not need to     be allocated), or `null` to undo the effect of previous     calls to of `gtk_widget_modify_text()`.
         */
        modify_text(state: StateType, color: Gdk.Color | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the background color to use for a widget.
         * 
         * All other style values are left untouched.
         * See `gtk_widget_override_color()`.
         * @param state the state for which to set the background color
         * @param color the color to assign, or `null` to undo the effect     of previous calls to `gtk_widget_override_background_color()`
         */
        override_background_color(state: StateFlags, color: Gdk.RGBA | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the color to use for a widget.
         * 
         * All other style values are left untouched.
         * 
         * This function does not act recursively. Setting the color of a
         * container does not affect its children. Note that some widgets that
         * you may not think of as containers, for instance `GtkButtons`,
         * are actually containers.
         * 
         * This API is mostly meant as a quick way for applications to
         * change a widget appearance. If you are developing a widgets
         * library and intend this change to be themeable, it is better
         * done by setting meaningful CSS classes in your
         * widget/container implementation through `gtk_style_context_add_class()`.
         * 
         * This way, your widget library can install a {@link Gtk.CssProvider}
         * with the `GTK_STYLE_PROVIDER_PRIORITY_FALLBACK` priority in order
         * to provide a default styling for those widgets that need so, and
         * this theming may fully overridden by the user’s theme.
         * 
         * Note that for complex widgets this may bring in undesired
         * results (such as uniform background color everywhere), in
         * these cases it is better to fully style such widgets through a
         * {@link Gtk.CssProvider} with the `GTK_STYLE_PROVIDER_PRIORITY_APPLICATION`
         * priority.
         * @param state the state for which to set the color
         * @param color the color to assign, or `null` to undo the effect     of previous calls to `gtk_widget_override_color()`
         */
        override_color(state: StateFlags, color: Gdk.RGBA | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the cursor color to use in a widget, overriding the
         * cursor-color and secondary-cursor-color
         * style properties. All other style values are left untouched.
         * See also `gtk_widget_modify_style()`.
         * 
         * Note that the underlying properties have the {@link Gdk.Color} type,
         * so the alpha value in `primary` and `secondary` will be ignored.
         * @param cursor the color to use for primary cursor (does not need to be     allocated), or `null` to undo the effect of previous calls to     of `gtk_widget_override_cursor()`.
         * @param secondary_cursor the color to use for secondary cursor (does not     need to be allocated), or `null` to undo the effect of previous     calls to of `gtk_widget_override_cursor()`.
         */
        override_cursor(cursor: Gdk.RGBA | null, secondary_cursor: Gdk.RGBA | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the font to use for a widget. All other style values are
         * left untouched. See `gtk_widget_override_color()`.
         * @param font_desc the font description to use, or `null` to undo     the effect of previous calls to `gtk_widget_override_font()`
         */
        override_font(font_desc: Pango.FontDescription | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets a symbolic color for a widget.
         * 
         * All other style values are left untouched.
         * See `gtk_widget_override_color()` for overriding the foreground
         * or background color.
         * @param name the name of the symbolic color to modify
         * @param color the color to assign (does not need     to be allocated), or `null` to undo the effect of previous     calls to `gtk_widget_override_symbolic_color()`
         */
        override_symbolic_color(name: string, color: Gdk.RGBA | null): void;

        /**
         * Obtains the full path to `widget`. The path is simply the name of a
         * widget and all its parents in the container hierarchy, separated by
         * periods. The name of a widget comes from
         * `gtk_widget_get_name()`. Paths are used to apply styles to a widget
         * in gtkrc configuration files. Widget names are the type of the
         * widget by default (e.g. “GtkButton”) or can be set to an
         * application-specific value with `gtk_widget_set_name()`. By setting
         * the name of a widget, you allow users or theme authors to apply
         * styles to that specific widget in their gtkrc
         * file. `path_reversed_p` fills in the path in reverse order,
         * i.e. starting with `widget`’s name instead of starting with the name
         * of `widget`’s outermost ancestor.
         */
        path(): [number, string, string];

        /**
         * This function is only for use in widget implementations.
         * 
         * Flags the widget for a rerun of the GtkWidgetClass::size_allocate
         * function. Use this function instead of `gtk_widget_queue_resize()`
         * when the `widget`'s size request didn't change but it wants to
         * reposition its contents.
         * 
         * An example user of this function is `gtk_widget_set_halign()`.
         */
        queue_allocate(): void;

        /**
         * Mark `widget` as needing to recompute its expand flags. Call
         * this function when setting legacy expand child properties
         * on the child of a container.
         * 
         * See `gtk_widget_compute_expand()`.
         */
        queue_compute_expand(): void;

        /**
         * Equivalent to calling `gtk_widget_queue_draw_area()` for the
         * entire area of a widget.
         */
        queue_draw(): void;

        /**
         * Convenience function that calls `gtk_widget_queue_draw_region()` on
         * the region created from the given coordinates.
         * 
         * The region here is specified in widget coordinates.
         * Widget coordinates are a bit odd; for historical reasons, they are
         * defined as `widget`->window coordinates for widgets that return `true` for
         * `gtk_widget_get_has_window()`, and are relative to `widget`->allocation.x,
         * `widget`->allocation.y otherwise.
         * 
         * `width` or `height` may be 0, in this case this function does
         * nothing. Negative values for `width` and `height` are not allowed.
         * @param x x coordinate of upper-left corner of rectangle to redraw
         * @param y y coordinate of upper-left corner of rectangle to redraw
         * @param width width of region to draw
         * @param height height of region to draw
         */
        queue_draw_area(x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number): void;

        /**
         * Invalidates the area of `widget` defined by `region` by calling
         * `gdk_window_invalidate_region()` on the widget’s window and all its
         * child windows. Once the main loop becomes idle (after the current
         * batch of events has been processed, roughly), the window will
         * receive expose events for the union of all regions that have been
         * invalidated.
         * 
         * Normally you would only use this function in widget
         * implementations. You might also use it to schedule a redraw of a
         * {@link Gtk.DrawingArea} or some portion thereof.
         * @param region region to draw
         */
        queue_draw_region(region: cairo.Region): void;

        /**
         * This function is only for use in widget implementations.
         * Flags a widget to have its size renegotiated; should
         * be called when a widget for some reason has a new size request.
         * For example, when you change the text in a {@link Gtk.Label}, {@link Gtk.Label}
         * queues a resize to ensure there’s enough space for the new text.
         * 
         * Note that you cannot call `gtk_widget_queue_resize()` on a widget
         * from inside its implementation of the GtkWidgetClass::size_allocate
         * virtual method. Calls to `gtk_widget_queue_resize()` from inside
         * GtkWidgetClass::size_allocate will be silently ignored.
         */
        queue_resize(): void;

        /**
         * This function works like `gtk_widget_queue_resize()`,
         * except that the widget is not invalidated.
         */
        queue_resize_no_redraw(): void;

        /**
         * Creates the GDK (windowing system) resources associated with a
         * widget.  For example, `widget`->window will be created when a widget
         * is realized.  Normally realization happens implicitly; if you show
         * a widget and all its parent containers, then the widget will be
         * realized and mapped automatically.
         * 
         * Realizing a widget requires all
         * the widget’s parent widgets to be realized; calling
         * `gtk_widget_realize()` realizes the widget’s parents in addition to
         * `widget` itself. If a widget is not yet inside a toplevel window
         * when you realize it, bad things will happen.
         * 
         * This function is primarily used in widget implementations, and
         * isn’t very useful otherwise. Many times when you think you might
         * need it, a better approach is to connect to a signal that will be
         * called after the widget is realized automatically, such as
         * {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.draw | Gtk.Widget::draw}. Or simply g_signal_connect () to the
         * {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.realize | Gtk.Widget::realize} signal.
         */
        realize(): void;

        /**
         * Computes the intersection of a `widget`’s area and `region`, returning
         * the intersection. The result may be empty, use `cairo_region_is_empty()` to
         * check.
         * @param region a {@link cairo.Region}, in the same coordinate system as          `widget`->allocation. That is, relative to `widget`->window          for widgets which return `false` from `gtk_widget_get_has_window()`;          relative to the parent window of `widget`->window otherwise.
         * @returns A newly allocated region holding the intersection of `widget`     and `region`.
         */
        region_intersect(region: cairo.Region): cairo.Region;

        /**
         * Registers a {@link Gdk.Window} with the widget and sets it up so that
         * the widget receives events for it. Call `gtk_widget_unregister_window()`
         * when destroying the window.
         * 
         * Before 3.8 you needed to call `gdk_window_set_user_data()` directly to set
         * this up. This is now deprecated and you should use `gtk_widget_register_window()`
         * instead. Old code will keep working as is, although some new features like
         * transparency might not work perfectly.
         * @param window a {@link Gdk.Window}
         */
        register_window(window: Gdk.Window): void;

        /**
         * Removes an accelerator from `widget`, previously installed with
         * `gtk_widget_add_accelerator()`.
         * @param accel_group accel group for this widget
         * @param accel_key GDK keyval of the accelerator
         * @param accel_mods modifier key combination of the accelerator
         * @returns whether an accelerator was installed and could be removed
         */
        remove_accelerator(accel_group: AccelGroup, accel_key: number, accel_mods: Gdk.ModifierType): boolean;

        /**
         * Removes a widget from the list of mnemonic labels for
         * this widget. (See `gtk_widget_list_mnemonic_labels()`). The widget
         * must have previously been added to the list with
         * `gtk_widget_add_mnemonic_label()`.
         * @param label a {@link Gtk.Widget} that was previously set as a mnemonic label for         `widget` with `gtk_widget_add_mnemonic_label()`.
         */
        remove_mnemonic_label(label: Widget): void;

        /**
         * Removes a tick callback previously registered with
         * `gtk_widget_add_tick_callback()`.
         * @param id an id returned by `gtk_widget_add_tick_callback()`
         */
        remove_tick_callback(id: number): void;

        /**
         * A convenience function that uses the theme settings for `widget`
         * to look up `stock_id` and render it to a pixbuf. `stock_id` should
         * be a stock icon ID such as #GTK_STOCK_OPEN or #GTK_STOCK_OK. `size`
         * should be a size such as #GTK_ICON_SIZE_MENU. `detail` should be a
         * string that identifies the widget or code doing the rendering, so
         * that theme engines can special-case rendering for that widget or
         * code.
         * 
         * The pixels in the returned {@link GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf} are shared with the rest of
         * the application and should not be modified. The pixbuf should be
         * freed after use with `g_object_unref()`.
         * @param stock_id a stock ID
         * @param size a stock size ({@link Gtk.IconSize}). A size of `(GtkIconSize)-1`     means render at the size of the source and don’t scale (if there are     multiple source sizes, GTK+ picks one of the available sizes).
         * @param detail render detail to pass to theme engine
         * @returns a new pixbuf, or `null` if the     stock ID wasn’t known
         */
        render_icon(stock_id: string, size: number, detail: string | null): GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf | null;

        /**
         * A convenience function that uses the theme engine and style
         * settings for `widget` to look up `stock_id` and render it to
         * a pixbuf. `stock_id` should be a stock icon ID such as
         * #GTK_STOCK_OPEN or #GTK_STOCK_OK. `size` should be a size
         * such as #GTK_ICON_SIZE_MENU.
         * 
         * The pixels in the returned {@link GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf} are shared with the rest of
         * the application and should not be modified. The pixbuf should be freed
         * after use with `g_object_unref()`.
         * @param stock_id a stock ID
         * @param size a stock size ({@link Gtk.IconSize}). A size of `(GtkIconSize)-1`     means render at the size of the source and don’t scale (if there are     multiple source sizes, GTK+ picks one of the available sizes).
         * @returns a new pixbuf, or `null` if the     stock ID wasn’t known
         */
        render_icon_pixbuf(stock_id: string, size: number): GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf | null;

        /**
         * Moves a widget from one {@link Gtk.Container} to another, handling reference
         * count issues to avoid destroying the widget.
         * @param new_parent a {@link Gtk.Container} to move the widget into
         */
        reparent(new_parent: Widget): void;

        /**
         * Reset the styles of `widget` and all descendents, so when
         * they are looked up again, they get the correct values
         * for the currently loaded RC file settings.
         * 
         * This function is not useful for applications.
         */
        reset_rc_styles(): void;

        /**
         * Updates the style context of `widget` and all descendants
         * by updating its widget path. `GtkContainers` may want
         * to use this on a child when reordering it in a way that a different
         * style might apply to it. See also `gtk_container_get_path_for_child()`.
         */
        reset_style(): void;

        /**
         * Very rarely-used function. This function is used to emit
         * an expose event on a widget. This function is not normally used
         * directly. The only time it is used is when propagating an expose
         * event to a windowless child widget (gtk_widget_get_has_window() is `false`),
         * and that is normally done using `gtk_container_propagate_draw()`.
         * 
         * If you want to force an area of a window to be redrawn,
         * use `gdk_window_invalidate_rect()` or `gdk_window_invalidate_region()`.
         * To cause the redraw to be done immediately, follow that call
         * with a call to `gdk_window_process_updates()`.
         * @param event a expose {@link Gdk.Event}
         * @returns return from the event signal emission (`true` if   the event was handled)
         */
        send_expose(event: Gdk.Event): number;

        /**
         * Sends the focus change `event` to `widget`
         * 
         * This function is not meant to be used by applications. The only time it
         * should be used is when it is necessary for a {@link Gtk.Widget} to assign focus
         * to a widget that is semantically owned by the first widget even though
         * it’s not a direct child - for instance, a search entry in a floating
         * window similar to the quick search in {@link Gtk.TreeView}.
         * 
         * An example of its usage is:
         * 
         * 
         * ```c
         *   GdkEvent *fevent = gdk_event_new (GDK_FOCUS_CHANGE);
         * 
         *   fevent->focus_change.type = GDK_FOCUS_CHANGE;
         *   fevent->focus_change.in = TRUE;
         *   fevent->focus_change.window = _gtk_widget_get_window (widget);
         *   if (fevent->focus_change.window != NULL)
         *     g_object_ref (fevent->focus_change.window);
         * 
         *   gtk_widget_send_focus_change (widget, fevent);
         * 
         *   gdk_event_free (event);
         * ```
         * 
         * @param event a {@link Gdk.Event} of type GDK_FOCUS_CHANGE
         * @returns the return value from the event signal emission: `true`   if the event was handled, and `false` otherwise
         */
        send_focus_change(event: Gdk.Event): boolean;

        /**
         * Given an accelerator group, `accel_group`, and an accelerator path,
         * `accel_path`, sets up an accelerator in `accel_group` so whenever the
         * key binding that is defined for `accel_path` is pressed, `widget`
         * will be activated.  This removes any accelerators (for any
         * accelerator group) installed by previous calls to
         * `gtk_widget_set_accel_path()`. Associating accelerators with
         * paths allows them to be modified by the user and the modifications
         * to be saved for future use. (See `gtk_accel_map_save()`.)
         * 
         * This function is a low level function that would most likely
         * be used by a menu creation system like {@link Gtk.UIManager}. If you
         * use {@link Gtk.UIManager}, setting up accelerator paths will be done
         * automatically.
         * 
         * Even when you you aren’t using {@link Gtk.UIManager}, if you only want to
         * set up accelerators on menu items `gtk_menu_item_set_accel_path()`
         * provides a somewhat more convenient interface.
         * 
         * Note that `accel_path` string will be stored in a {@link GLib.Quark}. Therefore, if you
         * pass a static string, you can save some memory by interning it first with
         * `g_intern_static_string()`.
         * @param accel_path path used to look up the accelerator
         * @param accel_group a {@link Gtk.AccelGroup}.
         */
        set_accel_path(accel_path: string | null, accel_group: AccelGroup | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the widget’s allocation.  This should not be used
         * directly, but from within a widget’s size_allocate method.
         * 
         * The allocation set should be the “adjusted” or actual
         * allocation. If you’re implementing a {@link Gtk.Container}, you want to use
         * `gtk_widget_size_allocate()` instead of `gtk_widget_set_allocation()`.
         * The GtkWidgetClass::adjust_size_allocation virtual method adjusts the
         * allocation inside `gtk_widget_size_allocate()` to create an adjusted
         * allocation.
         * @param allocation a pointer to a {@link Gtk.Allocation} to copy from
         */
        set_allocation(allocation: Allocation): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the application intends to draw on the widget in
         * an {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.draw | Gtk.Widget::draw} handler.
         * 
         * This is a hint to the widget and does not affect the behavior of
         * the GTK+ core; many widgets ignore this flag entirely. For widgets
         * that do pay attention to the flag, such as {@link Gtk.EventBox} and {@link Gtk.Window},
         * the effect is to suppress default themed drawing of the widget's
         * background. (Children of the widget will still be drawn.) The application
         * is then entirely responsible for drawing the widget background.
         * 
         * Note that the background is still drawn when the widget is mapped.
         * @param app_paintable `true` if the application will paint on the widget
         */
        set_app_paintable(app_paintable: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Specifies whether `widget` can be a default widget. See
         * `gtk_widget_grab_default()` for details about the meaning of
         * “default”.
         * @param can_default whether or not `widget` can be a default widget.
         */
        set_can_default(can_default: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Specifies whether `widget` can own the input focus. See
         * `gtk_widget_grab_focus()` for actually setting the input focus on a
         * widget.
         * @param can_focus whether or not `widget` can own the input focus.
         */
        set_can_focus(can_focus: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether `widget` should be mapped along with its when its parent
         * is mapped and `widget` has been shown with `gtk_widget_show()`.
         * 
         * The child visibility can be set for widget before it is added to
         * a container with `gtk_widget_set_parent()`, to avoid mapping
         * children unnecessary before immediately unmapping them. However
         * it will be reset to its default state of `true` when the widget
         * is removed from a container.
         * 
         * Note that changing the child visibility of a widget does not
         * queue a resize on the widget. Most of the time, the size of
         * a widget is computed from all visible children, whether or
         * not they are mapped. If this is not the case, the container
         * can queue a resize itself.
         * 
         * This function is only useful for container implementations and
         * never should be called by an application.
         * @param is_visible if `true`, `widget` should be mapped along with its parent.
         */
        set_child_visible(is_visible: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the widget’s clip.  This must not be used directly,
         * but from within a widget’s size_allocate method.
         * It must be called after `gtk_widget_set_allocation()` (or after chaining up
         * to the parent class), because that function resets the clip.
         * 
         * The clip set should be the area that `widget` draws on. If `widget` is a
         * {@link Gtk.Container}, the area must contain all children's clips.
         * 
         * If this function is not called by `widget` during a ::size-allocate handler,
         * the clip will be set to `widget`'s allocation.
         * @param clip a pointer to a {@link Gtk.Allocation} to copy from
         */
        set_clip(clip: Allocation): void;

        /**
         * Sets a widgets composite name. The widget must be
         * a composite child of its parent; see `gtk_widget_push_composite_child()`.
         * @param name the name to set
         */
        set_composite_name(name: string): void;

        /**
         * Enables or disables a {@link Gdk.Device} to interact with `widget`
         * and all its children.
         * 
         * It does so by descending through the {@link Gdk.Window} hierarchy
         * and enabling the same mask that is has for core events
         * (i.e. the one that `gdk_window_get_events()` returns).
         * @param device a {@link Gdk.Device}
         * @param enabled whether to enable the device
         */
        set_device_enabled(device: Gdk.Device, enabled: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the device event mask (see {@link Gdk.EventMask}) for a widget. The event
         * mask determines which events a widget will receive from `device`. Keep
         * in mind that different widgets have different default event masks, and by
         * changing the event mask you may disrupt a widget’s functionality,
         * so be careful. This function must be called while a widget is
         * unrealized. Consider `gtk_widget_add_device_events()` for widgets that are
         * already realized, or if you want to preserve the existing event
         * mask. This function can’t be used with windowless widgets (which return
         * `false` from `gtk_widget_get_has_window()`);
         * to get events on those widgets, place them inside a {@link Gtk.EventBox}
         * and receive events on the event box.
         * @param device a {@link Gdk.Device}
         * @param events event mask
         */
        set_device_events(device: Gdk.Device, events: Gdk.EventMask): void;

        /**
         * Sets the reading direction on a particular widget. This direction
         * controls the primary direction for widgets containing text,
         * and also the direction in which the children of a container are
         * packed. The ability to set the direction is present in order
         * so that correct localization into languages with right-to-left
         * reading directions can be done. Generally, applications will
         * let the default reading direction present, except for containers
         * where the containers are arranged in an order that is explicitly
         * visual rather than logical (such as buttons for text justification).
         * 
         * If the direction is set to {@link Gtk.TextDirection.NONE}, then the value
         * set by `gtk_widget_set_default_direction()` will be used.
         * @param dir the new direction
         */
        set_direction(dir: TextDirection): void;

        /**
         * Widgets are double buffered by default; you can use this function
         * to turn off the buffering. “Double buffered” simply means that
         * `gdk_window_begin_draw_frame()` and `gdk_window_end_draw_frame()` are called
         * automatically around expose events sent to the
         * widget. `gdk_window_begin_draw_frame()` diverts all drawing to a widget's
         * window to an offscreen buffer, and `gdk_window_end_draw_frame()` draws the
         * buffer to the screen. The result is that users see the window
         * update in one smooth step, and don’t see individual graphics
         * primitives being rendered.
         * 
         * In very simple terms, double buffered widgets don’t flicker,
         * so you would only use this function to turn off double buffering
         * if you had special needs and really knew what you were doing.
         * 
         * Note: if you turn off double-buffering, you have to handle
         * expose events, since even the clearing to the background color or
         * pixmap will not happen automatically (as it is done in
         * `gdk_window_begin_draw_frame()`).
         * 
         * In 3.10 GTK and GDK have been restructured for translucent drawing. Since
         * then expose events for double-buffered widgets are culled into a single
         * event to the toplevel GDK window. If you now unset double buffering, you
         * will cause a separate rendering pass for every widget. This will likely
         * cause rendering problems - in particular related to stacking - and usually
         * increases rendering times significantly.
         * @param double_buffered `true` to double-buffer a widget
         */
        set_double_buffered(double_buffered: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the event mask (see {@link Gdk.EventMask}) for a widget. The event
         * mask determines which events a widget will receive. Keep in mind
         * that different widgets have different default event masks, and by
         * changing the event mask you may disrupt a widget’s functionality,
         * so be careful. This function must be called while a widget is
         * unrealized. Consider `gtk_widget_add_events()` for widgets that are
         * already realized, or if you want to preserve the existing event
         * mask. This function can’t be used with widgets that have no window.
         * (See `gtk_widget_get_has_window()`).  To get events on those widgets,
         * place them inside a {@link Gtk.EventBox} and receive events on the event
         * box.
         * @param events event mask
         */
        set_events(events: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the widget should grab focus when it is clicked with the mouse.
         * Making mouse clicks not grab focus is useful in places like toolbars where
         * you don’t want the keyboard focus removed from the main area of the
         * application.
         * @param focus_on_click whether the widget should grab focus when clicked with the mouse
         */
        set_focus_on_click(focus_on_click: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the font map to use for Pango rendering. When not set, the widget
         * will inherit the font map from its parent.
         * @param font_map a {@link Pango.FontMap}, or `null` to unset any previously     set font map
         */
        set_font_map(font_map: Pango.FontMap | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link cairo.FontOptions} used for Pango rendering in this widget.
         * When not set, the default font options for the {@link Gdk.Screen} will be used.
         * @param options a {@link cairo.FontOptions}, or `null` to unset any   previously set default font options.
         */
        set_font_options(options: cairo.FontOptions | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the horizontal alignment of `widget`.
         * See the {@link Gtk.Widget.halign} property.
         * @param align the horizontal alignment
         */
        set_halign(align: Align): void;

        /**
         * Sets the has-tooltip property on `widget` to `has_tooltip`.  See
         * {@link Gtk.Widget.has_tooltip} for more information.
         * @param has_tooltip whether or not `widget` has a tooltip.
         */
        set_has_tooltip(has_tooltip: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Specifies whether `widget` has a {@link Gdk.Window} of its own. Note that
         * all realized widgets have a non-`null` “window” pointer
         * (gtk_widget_get_window() never returns a `null` window when a widget
         * is realized), but for many of them it’s actually the {@link Gdk.Window} of
         * one of its parent widgets. Widgets that do not create a %window for
         * themselves in {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.realize | Gtk.Widget::realize} must announce this by
         * calling this function with `has_window` = `false`.
         * 
         * This function should only be called by widget implementations,
         * and they should call it in their `init()` function.
         * @param has_window whether or not `widget` has a window.
         */
        set_has_window(has_window: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the widget would like any available extra horizontal
         * space. When a user resizes a {@link Gtk.Window}, widgets with expand=TRUE
         * generally receive the extra space. For example, a list or
         * scrollable area or document in your window would often be set to
         * expand.
         * 
         * Call this function to set the expand flag if you would like your
         * widget to become larger horizontally when the window has extra
         * room.
         * 
         * By default, widgets automatically expand if any of their children
         * want to expand. (To see if a widget will automatically expand given
         * its current children and state, call `gtk_widget_compute_expand()`. A
         * container can decide how the expandability of children affects the
         * expansion of the container by overriding the compute_expand virtual
         * method on {@link Gtk.Widget}.).
         * 
         * Setting hexpand explicitly with this function will override the
         * automatic expand behavior.
         * 
         * This function forces the widget to expand or not to expand,
         * regardless of children.  The override occurs because
         * `gtk_widget_set_hexpand()` sets the hexpand-set property (see
         * `gtk_widget_set_hexpand_set()`) which causes the widget’s hexpand
         * value to be used, rather than looking at children and widget state.
         * @param expand whether to expand
         */
        set_hexpand(expand: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the hexpand flag (see `gtk_widget_get_hexpand()`) will
         * be used.
         * 
         * The hexpand-set property will be set automatically when you call
         * `gtk_widget_set_hexpand()` to set hexpand, so the most likely
         * reason to use this function would be to unset an explicit expand
         * flag.
         * 
         * If hexpand is set, then it overrides any computed
         * expand value based on child widgets. If hexpand is not
         * set, then the expand value depends on whether any
         * children of the widget would like to expand.
         * 
         * There are few reasons to use this function, but it’s here
         * for completeness and consistency.
         * @param set value for hexpand-set property
         */
        set_hexpand_set(set: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Marks the widget as being mapped.
         * 
         * This function should only ever be called in a derived widget's
         * “map” or “unmap” implementation.
         * @param mapped `true` to mark the widget as mapped
         */
        set_mapped(mapped: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the bottom margin of `widget`.
         * See the {@link Gtk.Widget.margin_bottom} property.
         * @param margin the bottom margin
         */
        set_margin_bottom(margin: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the end margin of `widget`.
         * See the {@link Gtk.Widget.margin_end} property.
         * @param margin the end margin
         */
        set_margin_end(margin: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the left margin of `widget`.
         * See the {@link Gtk.Widget.margin_left} property.
         * @param margin the left margin
         */
        set_margin_left(margin: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the right margin of `widget`.
         * See the {@link Gtk.Widget.margin_right} property.
         * @param margin the right margin
         */
        set_margin_right(margin: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the start margin of `widget`.
         * See the {@link Gtk.Widget.margin_start} property.
         * @param margin the start margin
         */
        set_margin_start(margin: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the top margin of `widget`.
         * See the {@link Gtk.Widget.margin_top} property.
         * @param margin the top margin
         */
        set_margin_top(margin: number): void;

        /**
         * Widgets can be named, which allows you to refer to them from a
         * CSS file. You can apply a style to widgets with a particular name
         * in the CSS file. See the documentation for the CSS syntax (on the
         * same page as the docs for {@link Gtk.StyleContext}).
         * 
         * Note that the CSS syntax has certain special characters to delimit
         * and represent elements in a selector (period, #, >, *...), so using
         * these will make your widget impossible to match by name. Any combination
         * of alphanumeric symbols, dashes and underscores will suffice.
         * @param name name for the widget
         */
        set_name(name: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.Widget.no_show_all} property, which determines whether
         * calls to `gtk_widget_show_all()` will affect this widget.
         * 
         * This is mostly for use in constructing widget hierarchies with externally
         * controlled visibility, see {@link Gtk.UIManager}.
         * @param no_show_all the new value for the “no-show-all” property
         */
        set_no_show_all(no_show_all: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Request the `widget` to be rendered partially transparent,
         * with opacity 0 being fully transparent and 1 fully opaque. (Opacity values
         * are clamped to the [0,1] range.).
         * This works on both toplevel widget, and child widgets, although there
         * are some limitations:
         * 
         * For toplevel widgets this depends on the capabilities of the windowing
         * system. On X11 this has any effect only on X screens with a compositing manager
         * running. See `gtk_widget_is_composited()`. On Windows it should work
         * always, although setting a window’s opacity after the window has been
         * shown causes it to flicker once on Windows.
         * 
         * For child widgets it doesn’t work if any affected widget has a native window, or
         * disables double buffering.
         * @param opacity desired opacity, between 0 and 1
         */
        set_opacity(opacity: number): void;

        /**
         * This function is useful only when implementing subclasses of
         * {@link Gtk.Container}.
         * Sets the container as the parent of `widget`, and takes care of
         * some details such as updating the state and style of the child
         * to reflect its new location. The opposite function is
         * `gtk_widget_unparent()`.
         * @param parent parent container
         */
        set_parent(parent: Widget): void;

        /**
         * Sets a non default parent window for `widget`.
         * 
         * For {@link Gtk.Window} classes, setting a `parent_window` effects whether
         * the window is a toplevel window or can be embedded into other
         * widgets.
         * 
         * For {@link Gtk.Window} classes, this needs to be called before the
         * window is realized.
         * @param parent_window the new parent window.
         */
        set_parent_window(parent_window: Gdk.Window): void;

        /**
         * Marks the widget as being realized. This function must only be
         * called after all `GdkWindows` for the `widget` have been created
         * and registered.
         * 
         * This function should only ever be called in a derived widget's
         * “realize” or “unrealize” implementation.
         * @param realized `true` to mark the widget as realized
         */
        set_realized(realized: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Specifies whether `widget` will be treated as the default widget
         * within its toplevel when it has the focus, even if another widget
         * is the default.
         * 
         * See `gtk_widget_grab_default()` for details about the meaning of
         * “default”.
         * @param receives_default whether or not `widget` can be a default widget.
         */
        set_receives_default(receives_default: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the entire widget is queued for drawing when its size
         * allocation changes. By default, this setting is `true` and
         * the entire widget is redrawn on every size change. If your widget
         * leaves the upper left unchanged when made bigger, turning this
         * setting off will improve performance.
         * 
         * Note that for widgets where `gtk_widget_get_has_window()` is `false`
         * setting this flag to `false` turns off all allocation on resizing:
         * the widget will not even redraw if its position changes; this is to
         * allow containers that don’t draw anything to avoid excess
         * invalidations. If you set this flag on a widget with no window that
         * does draw on `widget`->window, you are
         * responsible for invalidating both the old and new allocation of the
         * widget when the widget is moved and responsible for invalidating
         * regions newly when the widget increases size.
         * @param redraw_on_allocate if `true`, the entire widget will be redrawn   when it is allocated to a new size. Otherwise, only the   new portion of the widget will be redrawn.
         */
        set_redraw_on_allocate(redraw_on_allocate: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the sensitivity of a widget. A widget is sensitive if the user
         * can interact with it. Insensitive widgets are “grayed out” and the
         * user can’t interact with them. Insensitive widgets are known as
         * “inactive”, “disabled”, or “ghosted” in some other toolkits.
         * @param sensitive `true` to make the widget sensitive
         */
        set_sensitive(sensitive: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the minimum size of a widget; that is, the widget’s size
         * request will be at least `width` by `height`. You can use this
         * function to force a widget to be larger than it normally would be.
         * 
         * In most cases, `gtk_window_set_default_size()` is a better choice for
         * toplevel windows than this function; setting the default size will
         * still allow users to shrink the window. Setting the size request
         * will force them to leave the window at least as large as the size
         * request. When dealing with window sizes,
         * `gtk_window_set_geometry_hints()` can be a useful function as well.
         * 
         * Note the inherent danger of setting any fixed size - themes,
         * translations into other languages, different fonts, and user action
         * can all change the appropriate size for a given widget. So, it's
         * basically impossible to hardcode a size that will always be
         * correct.
         * 
         * The size request of a widget is the smallest size a widget can
         * accept while still functioning well and drawing itself correctly.
         * However in some strange cases a widget may be allocated less than
         * its requested size, and in many cases a widget may be allocated more
         * space than it requested.
         * 
         * If the size request in a given direction is -1 (unset), then
         * the “natural” size request of the widget will be used instead.
         * 
         * The size request set here does not include any margin from the
         * {@link Gtk.Widget} properties margin-left, margin-right, margin-top, and
         * margin-bottom, but it does include pretty much all other padding
         * or border properties set by any subclass of {@link Gtk.Widget}.
         * @param width width `widget` should request, or -1 to unset
         * @param height height `widget` should request, or -1 to unset
         */
        set_size_request(width: number, height: number): void;

        /**
         * This function is for use in widget implementations. Sets the state
         * of a widget (insensitive, prelighted, etc.) Usually you should set
         * the state using wrapper functions such as `gtk_widget_set_sensitive()`.
         * @param state new state for `widget`
         */
        set_state(state: StateType): void;

        /**
         * This function is for use in widget implementations. Turns on flag
         * values in the current widget state (insensitive, prelighted, etc.).
         * 
         * This function accepts the values {@link Gtk.StateFlags.DIR_LTR} and
         * {@link Gtk.StateFlags.DIR_RTL} but ignores them. If you want to set the widget's
         * direction, use `gtk_widget_set_direction()`.
         * 
         * It is worth mentioning that any other state than {@link Gtk.StateFlags.INSENSITIVE},
         * will be propagated down to all non-internal children if `widget` is a
         * {@link Gtk.Container}, while {@link Gtk.StateFlags.INSENSITIVE} itself will be propagated
         * down to all {@link Gtk.Container} children by different means than turning on the
         * state flag down the hierarchy, both `gtk_widget_get_state_flags()` and
         * `gtk_widget_is_sensitive()` will make use of these.
         * @param flags State flags to turn on
         * @param clear Whether to clear state before turning on `flags`
         */
        set_state_flags(flags: StateFlags, clear: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Used to set the {@link Gtk.Style} for a widget (`widget`->style). Since
         * GTK 3, this function does nothing, the passed in style is ignored.
         * @param style a {@link Gtk.Style}, or `null` to remove the effect     of a previous call to `gtk_widget_set_style()` and go back to     the default style
         */
        set_style(style: Style | null): void;

        /**
         * Enables or disables multiple pointer awareness. If this setting is `true`,
         * `widget` will start receiving multiple, per device enter/leave events. Note
         * that if custom `GdkWindows` are created in {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.realize | Gtk.Widget::realize},
         * `gdk_window_set_support_multidevice()` will have to be called manually on them.
         * @param support_multidevice `true` to support input from multiple devices.
         */
        set_support_multidevice(support_multidevice: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets `markup` as the contents of the tooltip, which is marked up with
         *  the [Pango text markup language][PangoMarkupFormat].
         * 
         * This function will take care of setting {@link Gtk.Widget.has_tooltip} to `true`
         * and of the default handler for the {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.query_tooltip | Gtk.Widget::query-tooltip} signal.
         * 
         * See also the {@link Gtk.Widget.tooltip_markup} property and
         * `gtk_tooltip_set_markup()`.
         * @param markup the contents of the tooltip for `widget`, or `null`
         */
        set_tooltip_markup(markup: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets `text` as the contents of the tooltip. This function will take
         * care of setting {@link Gtk.Widget.has_tooltip} to `true` and of the default
         * handler for the {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.query_tooltip | Gtk.Widget::query-tooltip} signal.
         * 
         * See also the {@link Gtk.Widget.tooltip_text} property and `gtk_tooltip_set_text()`.
         * @param text the contents of the tooltip for `widget`
         */
        set_tooltip_text(text: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Replaces the default window used for displaying
         * tooltips with `custom_window`. GTK+ will take care of showing and
         * hiding `custom_window` at the right moment, to behave likewise as
         * the default tooltip window. If `custom_window` is `null`, the default
         * tooltip window will be used.
         * @param custom_window a {@link Gtk.Window}, or `null`
         */
        set_tooltip_window(custom_window: Window | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the vertical alignment of `widget`.
         * See the {@link Gtk.Widget.valign} property.
         * @param align the vertical alignment
         */
        set_valign(align: Align): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the widget would like any available extra vertical
         * space.
         * 
         * See `gtk_widget_set_hexpand()` for more detail.
         * @param expand whether to expand
         */
        set_vexpand(expand: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the vexpand flag (see `gtk_widget_get_vexpand()`) will
         * be used.
         * 
         * See `gtk_widget_set_hexpand_set()` for more detail.
         * @param set value for vexpand-set property
         */
        set_vexpand_set(set: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the visibility state of `widget`. Note that setting this to
         * `true` doesn’t mean the widget is actually viewable, see
         * `gtk_widget_get_visible()`.
         * 
         * This function simply calls `gtk_widget_show()` or `gtk_widget_hide()`
         * but is nicer to use when the visibility of the widget depends on
         * some condition.
         * @param visible whether the widget should be shown or not
         */
        set_visible(visible: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the visual that should be used for by widget and its children for
         * creating `GdkWindows`. The visual must be on the same {@link Gdk.Screen} as
         * returned by `gtk_widget_get_screen()`, so handling the
         * {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.screen_changed | Gtk.Widget::screen-changed} signal is necessary.
         * 
         * Setting a new `visual` will not cause `widget` to recreate its windows,
         * so you should call this function before `widget` is realized.
         * @param visual visual to be used or `null` to unset a previous one
         */
        set_visual(visual: Gdk.Visual | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets a widget’s window. This function should only be used in a
         * widget’s {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.realize | Gtk.Widget::realize} implementation. The %window passed is
         * usually either new window created with `gdk_window_new()`, or the
         * window of its parent widget as returned by
         * `gtk_widget_get_parent_window()`.
         * 
         * Widgets must indicate whether they will create their own {@link Gdk.Window}
         * by calling `gtk_widget_set_has_window()`. This is usually done in the
         * widget’s `init()` function.
         * 
         * Note that this function does not add any reference to `window`.
         * @param window a {@link Gdk.Window}
         */
        set_window(window: Gdk.Window): void;

        /**
         * Sets a shape for this widget’s GDK window. This allows for
         * transparent windows etc., see `gdk_window_shape_combine_region()`
         * for more information.
         * @param region shape to be added, or `null` to remove an existing shape
         */
        shape_combine_region(region: cairo.Region | null): void;

        /**
         * Flags a widget to be displayed. Any widget that isn’t shown will
         * not appear on the screen. If you want to show all the widgets in a
         * container, it’s easier to call `gtk_widget_show_all()` on the
         * container, instead of individually showing the widgets.
         * 
         * Remember that you have to show the containers containing a widget,
         * in addition to the widget itself, before it will appear onscreen.
         * 
         * When a toplevel container is shown, it is immediately realized and
         * mapped; other shown widgets are realized and mapped when their
         * toplevel container is realized and mapped.
         */
        show(): void;

        /**
         * Recursively shows a widget, and any child widgets (if the widget is
         * a container).
         */
        show_all(): void;

        /**
         * Shows a widget. If the widget is an unmapped toplevel widget
         * (i.e. a {@link Gtk.Window} that has not yet been shown), enter the main
         * loop and wait for the window to actually be mapped. Be careful;
         * because the main loop is running, anything can happen during
         * this function.
         */
        show_now(): void;

        /**
         * This function is only used by {@link Gtk.Container} subclasses, to assign a size
         * and position to their child widgets.
         * 
         * In this function, the allocation may be adjusted. It will be forced
         * to a 1x1 minimum size, and the adjust_size_allocation virtual
         * method on the child will be used to adjust the allocation. Standard
         * adjustments include removing the widget’s margins, and applying the
         * widget’s {@link Gtk.Widget.halign} and {@link Gtk.Widget.valign} properties.
         * 
         * For baseline support in containers you need to use `gtk_widget_size_allocate_with_baseline()`
         * instead.
         * @param allocation position and size to be allocated to `widget`
         */
        size_allocate(allocation: Allocation): void;

        /**
         * This function is only used by {@link Gtk.Container} subclasses, to assign a size,
         * position and (optionally) baseline to their child widgets.
         * 
         * In this function, the allocation and baseline may be adjusted. It
         * will be forced to a 1x1 minimum size, and the
         * adjust_size_allocation virtual and adjust_baseline_allocation
         * methods on the child will be used to adjust the allocation and
         * baseline. Standard adjustments include removing the widget's
         * margins, and applying the widget’s {@link Gtk.Widget.halign} and
         * {@link Gtk.Widget.valign} properties.
         * 
         * If the child widget does not have a valign of {@link Gtk.Align.BASELINE} the
         * baseline argument is ignored and -1 is used instead.
         * @param allocation position and size to be allocated to `widget`
         * @param baseline The baseline of the child, or -1
         */
        size_allocate_with_baseline(allocation: Allocation, baseline: number): void;

        /**
         * This function is typically used when implementing a {@link Gtk.Container}
         * subclass.  Obtains the preferred size of a widget. The container
         * uses this information to arrange its child widgets and decide what
         * size allocations to give them with `gtk_widget_size_allocate()`.
         * 
         * You can also call this function from an application, with some
         * caveats. Most notably, getting a size request requires the widget
         * to be associated with a screen, because font information may be
         * needed. Multihead-aware applications should keep this in mind.
         * 
         * Also remember that the size request is not necessarily the size
         * a widget will actually be allocated.
         */
        size_request(): Requisition;

        /**
         * This function attaches the widget’s {@link Gtk.Style} to the widget's
         * {@link Gdk.Window}. It is a replacement for
         * 
         * 
         * ```
         * widget->style = gtk_style_attach (widget->style, widget->window);
         * ```
         * 
         * 
         * and should only ever be called in a derived widget’s “realize”
         * implementation which does not chain up to its parent class'
         * “realize” implementation, because one of the parent classes
         * (finally {@link Gtk.Widget}) would attach the style itself.
         */
        style_attach(): void;

        /**
         * Gets the value of a style property of `widget`.
         * @param property_name the name of a style property
         * @param value location to return the property value
         */
        style_get_property(property_name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;

        /**
         * Reverts the effect of a previous call to `gtk_widget_freeze_child_notify()`.
         * This causes all queued {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.child_notify | Gtk.Widget::child-notify} signals on `widget` to be
         * emitted.
         */
        thaw_child_notify(): void;

        /**
         * Translate coordinates relative to `src_widget`’s allocation to coordinates
         * relative to `dest_widget`’s allocations. In order to perform this
         * operation, both widgets must be realized, and must share a common
         * toplevel.
         * @param dest_widget a {@link Gtk.Widget}
         * @param src_x X position relative to `src_widget`
         * @param src_y Y position relative to `src_widget`
         * @returns `false` if either widget was not realized, or there   was no common ancestor. In this case, nothing is stored in   *`dest_x` and *`dest_y`. Otherwise `true`.
         */
        translate_coordinates(dest_widget: Widget, src_x: number, src_y: number): [boolean, number, number];

        /**
         * Triggers a tooltip query on the display where the toplevel of `widget`
         * is located. See `gtk_tooltip_trigger_tooltip_query()` for more
         * information.
         */
        trigger_tooltip_query(): void;

        /**
         * This function is only for use in widget implementations. Causes
         * a widget to be unmapped if it’s currently mapped.
         */
        unmap(): void;

        /**
         * This function is only for use in widget implementations.
         * Should be called by implementations of the remove method
         * on {@link Gtk.Container}, to dissociate a child from the container.
         */
        unparent(): void;

        /**
         * This function is only useful in widget implementations.
         * Causes a widget to be unrealized (frees all GDK resources
         * associated with the widget, such as `widget`->window).
         */
        unrealize(): void;

        /**
         * Unregisters a {@link Gdk.Window} from the widget that was previously set up with
         * `gtk_widget_register_window()`. You need to call this when the window is
         * no longer used by the widget, such as when you destroy it.
         * @param window a {@link Gdk.Window}
         */
        unregister_window(window: Gdk.Window): void;

        /**
         * This function is for use in widget implementations. Turns off flag
         * values for the current widget state (insensitive, prelighted, etc.).
         * See `gtk_widget_set_state_flags()`.
         * @param flags State flags to turn off
         */
        unset_state_flags(flags: StateFlags): void;

        /**
         * Adds a child to `buildable`. `type` is an optional string
         * describing how the child should be added.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child to add
         * @param type kind of child or `null`
         */
        add_child(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object, type: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Constructs a child of `buildable` with the name `name`.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} calls this function if a “constructor” has been
         * specified in the UI definition.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param name name of child to construct
         * @returns the constructed child
         */
        construct_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, name: string): T;

        /**
         * This is similar to `gtk_buildable_parser_finished()` but is
         * called once for each custom tag handled by the `buildable`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname the name of the tag
         * @param data user data created in custom_tag_start
         */
        custom_finished(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
         * the buildable.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @param data user data that will be passed in to parser functions
         */
        custom_tag_end(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called for each unknown element under `<child>`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @returns `true` if a object has a custom implementation, `false`          if it doesn't.
         */
        custom_tag_start(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string): [boolean, GLib.MarkupParser, null];

        /**
         * Get the internal child called `childname` of the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param childname name of child
         * @returns the internal child of the buildable object
         */
        get_internal_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, childname: string): T;

        /**
         * Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI].
         * Note that this will be called once for each time
         * `gtk_builder_add_from_file()` or `gtk_builder_add_from_string()`
         * is called on a builder.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         */
        parser_finished(builder: Builder): void;

        /**
         * Sets the property name `name` to `value` on the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param name name of property
         * @param value value of property
         */
        set_buildable_property(builder: Builder, name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;

        /**
         * Adds a child to `buildable`. `type` is an optional string
         * describing how the child should be added.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child to add
         * @param type kind of child or `null`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_add_child(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object, type: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Constructs a child of `buildable` with the name `name`.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} calls this function if a “constructor” has been
         * specified in the UI definition.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param name name of child to construct
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_construct_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, name: string): T;

        /**
         * This is similar to `gtk_buildable_parser_finished()` but is
         * called once for each custom tag handled by the `buildable`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname the name of the tag
         * @param data user data created in custom_tag_start
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_finished(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
         * the buildable.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @param data user data that will be passed in to parser functions
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_tag_end(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called for each unknown element under `<child>`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_custom_tag_start(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string): [boolean, GLib.MarkupParser, never];

        /**
         * Get the internal child called `childname` of the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param childname name of child
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_internal_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, childname: string): T;

        /**
         * Gets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} sets the name based on the
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI]
         * used to construct the `buildable`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_name(): string;

        /**
         * Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI].
         * Note that this will be called once for each time
         * `gtk_builder_add_from_file()` or `gtk_builder_add_from_string()`
         * is called on a builder.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_parser_finished(builder: Builder): void;

        /**
         * Sets the property name `name` to `value` on the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param name name of property
         * @param value value of property
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_buildable_property(builder: Builder, name: string, value: unknown): void;

        /**
         * Sets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * @param name name to set
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_name(name: string): void;
    }


    namespace WidgetAccessible {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Accessible.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-layer": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-mdi-zorder": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-help-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-hypertext-nlinks": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption-object": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-summary": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Accessible.ConstructorProps, Atk.Component.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class WidgetAccessible extends Accessible implements Atk.Component {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<WidgetAccessible>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: WidgetAccessible.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<WidgetAccessible.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof WidgetAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, WidgetAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof WidgetAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, WidgetAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof WidgetAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<WidgetAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        /**
         * Checks whether the specified point is within the extent of the `component`.
         * 
         * Toolkit implementor note: ATK provides a default implementation for
         * this virtual method. In general there are little reason to
         * re-implement it.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @returns `true` or `false` indicating whether the specified point is within the extent of the `component` or not
         */
        contains(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the alpha value (i.e. the opacity) for this
         * `component`, on a scale from 0 (fully transparent) to 1.0
         * (fully opaque).
         * @returns An alpha value from 0 to 1.0, inclusive.
         */
        get_alpha(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the rectangle which gives the extent of the `component`.
         * 
         * If the extent can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), all of x, y, width, height are set to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         */
        get_extents(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the layer of the component.
         * @returns an {@link Atk.Layer} which is the layer of the component
         */
        get_layer(): Atk.Layer;

        /**
         * Gets the zorder of the component. The value G_MININT will be returned
         * if the layer of the component is not ATK_LAYER_MDI or ATK_LAYER_WINDOW.
         * @returns a gint which is the zorder of the component, i.e. the depth at which the component is shown in relation to other components in the same container.
         */
        get_mdi_zorder(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the position of `component` in the form of
         * a point specifying `component`'s top-left corner.
         * 
         * If the position can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), x and y are set to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         */
        get_position(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the size of the `component` in terms of width and height.
         * 
         * If the size can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), width and height are set to -1.
         */
        get_size(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Grabs focus for this `component`.
         * @returns `true` if successful, `false` otherwise.
         */
        grab_focus(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets a reference to the accessible child, if one exists, at the
         * coordinate point specified by `x` and `y`.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @returns a reference to the accessible child, if one exists
         */
        ref_accessible_at_point(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): Atk.Object | null;

        /**
         * Remove the handler specified by `handler_id` from the list of
         * functions to be executed when this object receives focus events
         * (in or out).
         * @param handler_id the handler id of the focus handler to be removed from `component`
         */
        remove_focus_handler(handler_id: number): void;

        /**
         * Makes `component` visible on the screen by scrolling all necessary parents.
         * 
         * Contrary to atk_component_set_position, this does not actually move
         * `component` in its parent, this only makes the parents scroll so that the
         * object shows up on the screen, given its current position within the parents.
         * @param type specify where the object should be made visible.
         * @returns whether scrolling was successful.
         */
        scroll_to(type: Atk.ScrollType): boolean;

        /**
         * Move the top-left of `component` to a given position of the screen by
         * scrolling all necessary parents.
         * @param coords specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or to the parent object.
         * @param x x-position where to scroll to
         * @param y y-position where to scroll to
         * @returns whether scrolling was successful.
         */
        scroll_to_point(coords: Atk.CoordType, x: number, y: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the extents of `component`.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param width width to set for `component`
         * @param height height to set for `component`
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @returns `true` or `false` whether the extents were set or not
         */
        set_extents(x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the position of `component`.
         * 
         * Contrary to atk_component_scroll_to, this does not trigger any scrolling,
         * this just moves `component` in its parent.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the component's top level window
         * @returns `true` or `false` whether or not the position was set or not
         */
        set_position(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Set the size of the `component` in terms of width and height.
         * @param width width to set for `component`
         * @param height height to set for `component`
         * @returns `true` or `false` whether the size was set or not
         */
        set_size(width: number, height: number): boolean;

        /**
         * @param bounds 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_bounds_changed(bounds: Atk.Rectangle): void;

        /**
         * Checks whether the specified point is within the extent of the `component`.
         * 
         * Toolkit implementor note: ATK provides a default implementation for
         * this virtual method. In general there are little reason to
         * re-implement it.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_contains(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the alpha value (i.e. the opacity) for this
         * `component`, on a scale from 0 (fully transparent) to 1.0
         * (fully opaque).
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_alpha(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the rectangle which gives the extent of the `component`.
         * 
         * If the extent can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), all of x, y, width, height are set to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_extents(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number, number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the layer of the component.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_layer(): Atk.Layer;

        /**
         * Gets the zorder of the component. The value G_MININT will be returned
         * if the layer of the component is not ATK_LAYER_MDI or ATK_LAYER_WINDOW.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_mdi_zorder(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the position of `component` in the form of
         * a point specifying `component`'s top-left corner.
         * 
         * If the position can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), x and y are set to -1.
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_position(coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the size of the `component` in terms of width and height.
         * 
         * If the size can not be obtained (e.g. a non-embedded plug or missing
         * support), width and height are set to -1.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_get_size(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Grabs focus for this `component`.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_grab_focus(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets a reference to the accessible child, if one exists, at the
         * coordinate point specified by `x` and `y`.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_ref_accessible_at_point(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): Atk.Object | null;

        /**
         * Remove the handler specified by `handler_id` from the list of
         * functions to be executed when this object receives focus events
         * (in or out).
         * @param handler_id the handler id of the focus handler to be removed from `component`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_remove_focus_handler(handler_id: number): void;

        /**
         * Makes `component` visible on the screen by scrolling all necessary parents.
         * 
         * Contrary to atk_component_set_position, this does not actually move
         * `component` in its parent, this only makes the parents scroll so that the
         * object shows up on the screen, given its current position within the parents.
         * @param type specify where the object should be made visible.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_scroll_to(type: Atk.ScrollType): boolean;

        /**
         * Move the top-left of `component` to a given position of the screen by
         * scrolling all necessary parents.
         * @param coords specify whether coordinates are relative to the screen or to the parent object.
         * @param x x-position where to scroll to
         * @param y y-position where to scroll to
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_scroll_to_point(coords: Atk.CoordType, x: number, y: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the extents of `component`.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param width width to set for `component`
         * @param height height to set for `component`
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the components top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_extents(x: number, y: number, width: number, height: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the position of `component`.
         * 
         * Contrary to atk_component_scroll_to, this does not trigger any scrolling,
         * this just moves `component` in its parent.
         * @param x x coordinate
         * @param y y coordinate
         * @param coord_type specifies whether the coordinates are relative to the screen or to the component's top level window
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_position(x: number, y: number, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): boolean;

        /**
         * Set the size of the `component` in terms of width and height.
         * @param width width to set for `component`
         * @param height height to set for `component`
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_size(width: number, height: number): boolean;
    }


    namespace Window {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends Bin.SignalSignatures {
            /**
             * The ::activate-default signal is a
             * [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted when the user activates the default widget
             * of `window`.
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "activate-default": () => void;
            /**
             * The ::activate-focus signal is a
             * [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted when the user activates the currently
             * focused widget of `window`.
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "activate-focus": () => void;
            /**
             * The ::enable-debugging signal is a [keybinding signal][GtkBindingSignal]
             * which gets emitted when the user enables or disables interactive
             * debugging. When `toggle` is `true`, interactive debugging is toggled
             * on or off, when it is `false`, the debugger will be pointed at the
             * widget under the pointer.
             * 
             * The default bindings for this signal are Ctrl-Shift-I
             * and Ctrl-Shift-D.
             * @signal
             * @action
             * @run-last
             */
            "enable-debugging": (arg0: boolean) => boolean | void;
            /**
             * The ::keys-changed signal gets emitted when the set of accelerators
             * or mnemonics that are associated with `window` changes.
             * @signal
             * @run-first
             */
            "keys-changed": () => void;
            /**
             * This signal is emitted whenever the currently focused widget in
             * this window changes.
             * @signal
             * @since 2.24
             * @run-last
             */
            "set-focus": (arg0: Widget | null) => void;
            "notify::accept-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::application": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::attached-to": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::decorated": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::default-height": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::default-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::deletable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::destroy-with-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-map": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::gravity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-resize-grip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-toplevel-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hide-titlebar-when-maximized": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::icon": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::icon-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-active": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-maximized": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::mnemonics-visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::modal": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resizable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-grip-visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::screen": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::skip-pager-hint": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::skip-taskbar-hint": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::startup-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::title": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::transient-for": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::type": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::type-hint": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::urgency-hint": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window-position": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::border-width": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::resize-mode": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::app-paintable": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::can-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::composite-child": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::double-buffered": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::events": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::expand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::focus-on-click": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::halign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::has-tooltip": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::height-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::hexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::is-focus": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-bottom": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-end": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-left": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-right": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-start": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::margin-top": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::no-show-all": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::opacity": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::receives-default": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::scale-factor": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::sensitive": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::style": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-markup": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::tooltip-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::valign": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::vexpand-set": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::visible": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::width-request": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::window": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Bin.ConstructorProps, Atk.ImplementorIface.ConstructorProps, Buildable.ConstructorProps {
            accept_focus: boolean;
            acceptFocus: boolean;
            application: Application | null;
            attached_to: Widget | null;
            attachedTo: Widget | null;
            decorated: boolean;
            default_height: number;
            defaultHeight: number;
            default_width: number;
            defaultWidth: number;
            deletable: boolean;
            destroy_with_parent: boolean;
            destroyWithParent: boolean;
            focus_on_map: boolean;
            focusOnMap: boolean;
            focus_visible: boolean;
            focusVisible: boolean;
            gravity: Gdk.Gravity;
            has_resize_grip: boolean;
            hasResizeGrip: boolean;
            has_toplevel_focus: boolean;
            hasToplevelFocus: boolean;
            hide_titlebar_when_maximized: boolean;
            hideTitlebarWhenMaximized: boolean;
            icon: GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf | null;
            icon_name: string | null;
            iconName: string | null;
            is_active: boolean;
            isActive: boolean;
            is_maximized: boolean;
            isMaximized: boolean;
            mnemonics_visible: boolean;
            mnemonicsVisible: boolean;
            modal: boolean;
            resizable: boolean;
            resize_grip_visible: boolean;
            resizeGripVisible: boolean;
            role: string | null;
            screen: Gdk.Screen;
            skip_pager_hint: boolean;
            skipPagerHint: boolean;
            skip_taskbar_hint: boolean;
            skipTaskbarHint: boolean;
            startup_id: string;
            startupId: string;
            title: string | null;
            transient_for: Window | null;
            transientFor: Window | null;
            type: WindowType;
            type_hint: Gdk.WindowTypeHint;
            typeHint: Gdk.WindowTypeHint;
            urgency_hint: boolean;
            urgencyHint: boolean;
            window_position: WindowPosition;
            windowPosition: WindowPosition;
        }
    }

    /**
     * A GtkWindow is a toplevel window which can contain other widgets.
     * Windows normally have decorations that are under the control
     * of the windowing system and allow the user to manipulate the window
     * (resize it, move it, close it,...).
     * 
     * # GtkWindow as GtkBuildable
     * 
     * The GtkWindow implementation of the {@link Gtk.Buildable} interface supports a
     * custom `<accel-groups>` element, which supports any number of `<group>`
     * elements representing the {@link Gtk.AccelGroup} objects you want to add to
     * your window (synonymous with `gtk_window_add_accel_group()`.
     * 
     * It also supports the `<initial-focus>` element, whose name property names
     * the widget to receive the focus when the window is mapped.
     * 
     * An example of a UI definition fragment with accel groups:
     * 
     * 
     * ```xml
     * <object class="GtkWindow">
     *   <accel-groups>
     *     <group name="accelgroup1"/>
     *   </accel-groups>
     *   <initial-focus name="thunderclap"/>
     * </object>
     * 
     * ...
     * 
     * <object class="GtkAccelGroup" id="accelgroup1"/>
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * The GtkWindow implementation of the {@link Gtk.Buildable} interface supports
     * setting a child as the titlebar by specifying “titlebar” as the “type”
     * attribute of a `<child>` element.
     * 
     * # CSS nodes
     * 
     * 
     * ```
     * window.background
     * ├── decoration
     * ├── <titlebar child>.titlebar [.default-decoration]
     * ╰── <child>
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * GtkWindow has a main CSS node with name window and style class .background,
     * and a subnode with name decoration.
     * 
     * Style classes that are typically used with the main CSS node are .csd (when
     * client-side decorations are in use), .solid-csd (for client-side decorations
     * without invisible borders), .ssd (used by mutter when rendering server-side
     * decorations). GtkWindow also represents window states with the following
     * style classes on the main node: .tiled, .maximized, .fullscreen. Specialized
     * types of window often add their own discriminating style classes, such as
     * .popup or .tooltip.
     * 
     * GtkWindow adds the .titlebar and .default-decoration style classes to the
     * widget that is added as a titlebar child.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class Window extends Bin implements Atk.ImplementorIface, Buildable {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<Window>;

        // Properties
        /**
         * Whether the window should receive the input focus.
         * @since 2.4
         * @default true
         */
        get accept_focus(): boolean;
        set accept_focus(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether the window should receive the input focus.
         * @since 2.4
         * @default true
         */
        get acceptFocus(): boolean;
        set acceptFocus(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The {@link Gtk.Application} associated with the window.
         * 
         * The application will be kept alive for at least as long as it
         * has any windows associated with it (see `g_application_hold()`
         * for a way to keep it alive without windows).
         * 
         * Normally, the connection between the application and the window
         * will remain until the window is destroyed, but you can explicitly
         * remove it by setting the :application property to `null`.
         * @since 3.0
         */
        get application(): Application | null;
        set application(val: Application | null);

        /**
         * The widget to which this window is attached.
         * See `gtk_window_set_attached_to()`.
         * 
         * Examples of places where specifying this relation is useful are
         * for instance a {@link Gtk.Menu} created by a {@link Gtk.ComboBox}, a completion
         * popup window created by {@link Gtk.Entry} or a typeahead search entry
         * created by {@link Gtk.TreeView}.
         * @since 3.4
         */
        get attached_to(): Widget | null;
        set attached_to(val: Widget | null);

        /**
         * The widget to which this window is attached.
         * See `gtk_window_set_attached_to()`.
         * 
         * Examples of places where specifying this relation is useful are
         * for instance a {@link Gtk.Menu} created by a {@link Gtk.ComboBox}, a completion
         * popup window created by {@link Gtk.Entry} or a typeahead search entry
         * created by {@link Gtk.TreeView}.
         * @since 3.4
         */
        get attachedTo(): Widget | null;
        set attachedTo(val: Widget | null);

        /**
         * Whether the window should be decorated by the window manager.
         * @since 2.4
         * @default true
         */
        get decorated(): boolean;
        set decorated(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default -1
         */
        get default_height(): number;
        set default_height(val: number);

        /**
         * @default -1
         */
        get defaultHeight(): number;
        set defaultHeight(val: number);

        /**
         * @default -1
         */
        get default_width(): number;
        set default_width(val: number);

        /**
         * @default -1
         */
        get defaultWidth(): number;
        set defaultWidth(val: number);

        /**
         * Whether the window frame should have a close button.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default true
         */
        get deletable(): boolean;
        set deletable(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get destroy_with_parent(): boolean;
        set destroy_with_parent(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get destroyWithParent(): boolean;
        set destroyWithParent(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether the window should receive the input focus when mapped.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default true
         */
        get focus_on_map(): boolean;
        set focus_on_map(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether the window should receive the input focus when mapped.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default true
         */
        get focusOnMap(): boolean;
        set focusOnMap(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether 'focus rectangles' are currently visible in this window.
         * 
         * This property is maintained by GTK+ based on user input
         * and should not be set by applications.
         * @since 2.20
         * @default true
         */
        get focus_visible(): boolean;
        set focus_visible(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether 'focus rectangles' are currently visible in this window.
         * 
         * This property is maintained by GTK+ based on user input
         * and should not be set by applications.
         * @since 2.20
         * @default true
         */
        get focusVisible(): boolean;
        set focusVisible(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The window gravity of the window. See `gtk_window_move()` and {@link Gdk.Gravity} for
         * more details about window gravity.
         * @since 2.4
         * @default Gdk.Gravity.NORTH_WEST
         */
        get gravity(): Gdk.Gravity;
        set gravity(val: Gdk.Gravity);

        /**
         * Whether the window has a corner resize grip.
         * 
         * Note that the resize grip is only shown if the window is
         * actually resizable and not maximized. Use
         * {@link Gtk.Window.resize_grip_visible} to find out if the resize
         * grip is currently shown.
         * @since 3.0
         * @deprecated since 3.14: Resize grips have been removed.
         * @default false
         */
        get has_resize_grip(): boolean;
        set has_resize_grip(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether the window has a corner resize grip.
         * 
         * Note that the resize grip is only shown if the window is
         * actually resizable and not maximized. Use
         * {@link Gtk.Window.resize_grip_visible} to find out if the resize
         * grip is currently shown.
         * @since 3.0
         * @deprecated since 3.14: Resize grips have been removed.
         * @default false
         */
        get hasResizeGrip(): boolean;
        set hasResizeGrip(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @read-only
         * @default false
         */
        get has_toplevel_focus(): boolean;

        /**
         * @read-only
         * @default false
         */
        get hasToplevelFocus(): boolean;

        /**
         * Whether the titlebar should be hidden during maximization.
         * @since 3.4
         * @default false
         */
        get hide_titlebar_when_maximized(): boolean;
        set hide_titlebar_when_maximized(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether the titlebar should be hidden during maximization.
         * @since 3.4
         * @default false
         */
        get hideTitlebarWhenMaximized(): boolean;
        set hideTitlebarWhenMaximized(val: boolean);

        get icon(): GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf | null;
        set icon(val: GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf | null);

        /**
         * The :icon-name property specifies the name of the themed icon to
         * use as the window icon. See {@link Gtk.IconTheme} for more details.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default null
         */
        get icon_name(): string | null;
        set icon_name(val: string | null);

        /**
         * The :icon-name property specifies the name of the themed icon to
         * use as the window icon. See {@link Gtk.IconTheme} for more details.
         * @since 2.6
         * @default null
         */
        get iconName(): string | null;
        set iconName(val: string | null);

        /**
         * @read-only
         * @default false
         */
        get is_active(): boolean;

        /**
         * @read-only
         * @default false
         */
        get isActive(): boolean;

        /**
         * @read-only
         * @default false
         */
        get is_maximized(): boolean;

        /**
         * @read-only
         * @default false
         */
        get isMaximized(): boolean;

        /**
         * Whether mnemonics are currently visible in this window.
         * 
         * This property is maintained by GTK+ based on user input,
         * and should not be set by applications.
         * @since 2.20
         * @default true
         */
        get mnemonics_visible(): boolean;
        set mnemonics_visible(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether mnemonics are currently visible in this window.
         * 
         * This property is maintained by GTK+ based on user input,
         * and should not be set by applications.
         * @since 2.20
         * @default true
         */
        get mnemonicsVisible(): boolean;
        set mnemonicsVisible(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get modal(): boolean;
        set modal(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default true
         */
        get resizable(): boolean;
        set resizable(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether a corner resize grip is currently shown.
         * @since 3.0
         * @deprecated since 3.14: Resize grips have been removed.
         * @read-only
         * @default false
         */
        get resize_grip_visible(): boolean;

        /**
         * Whether a corner resize grip is currently shown.
         * @since 3.0
         * @deprecated since 3.14: Resize grips have been removed.
         * @read-only
         * @default false
         */
        get resizeGripVisible(): boolean;

        /**
         * @default null
         */
        get role(): string | null;
        set role(val: string | null);

        get screen(): Gdk.Screen;
        set screen(val: Gdk.Screen);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get skip_pager_hint(): boolean;
        set skip_pager_hint(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get skipPagerHint(): boolean;
        set skipPagerHint(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get skip_taskbar_hint(): boolean;
        set skip_taskbar_hint(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get skipTaskbarHint(): boolean;
        set skipTaskbarHint(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The :startup-id is a write-only property for setting window's
         * startup notification identifier. See `gtk_window_set_startup_id()`
         * for more details.
         * @since 2.12
         * @write-only
         * @default null
         */
        set startup_id(val: string);

        /**
         * The :startup-id is a write-only property for setting window's
         * startup notification identifier. See `gtk_window_set_startup_id()`
         * for more details.
         * @since 2.12
         * @write-only
         * @default null
         */
        set startupId(val: string);

        /**
         * @default null
         */
        get title(): string | null;
        set title(val: string | null);

        /**
         * The transient parent of the window. See `gtk_window_set_transient_for()` for
         * more details about transient windows.
         * @since 2.10
         */
        get transient_for(): Window | null;
        set transient_for(val: Window | null);

        /**
         * The transient parent of the window. See `gtk_window_set_transient_for()` for
         * more details about transient windows.
         * @since 2.10
         */
        get transientFor(): Window | null;
        set transientFor(val: Window | null);

        /**
         * @construct-only
         * @default Gtk.WindowType.TOPLEVEL
         */
        get type(): WindowType;

        /**
         * @default Gdk.WindowTypeHint.NORMAL
         */
        get type_hint(): Gdk.WindowTypeHint;
        set type_hint(val: Gdk.WindowTypeHint);

        /**
         * @default Gdk.WindowTypeHint.NORMAL
         */
        get typeHint(): Gdk.WindowTypeHint;
        set typeHint(val: Gdk.WindowTypeHint);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get urgency_hint(): boolean;
        set urgency_hint(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get urgencyHint(): boolean;
        set urgencyHint(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default Gtk.WindowPosition.NONE
         */
        get window_position(): WindowPosition;
        set window_position(val: WindowPosition);

        /**
         * @default Gtk.WindowPosition.NONE
         */
        get windowPosition(): WindowPosition;
        set windowPosition(val: WindowPosition);

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: Window.SignalSignatures;

        // Fields
        bin: Bin;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<Window.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](type: WindowType): Window;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof Window.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Window.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof Window.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, Window.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof Window.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<Window.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Static methods
        /**
         * Gets the value set by `gtk_window_set_default_icon_list()`.
         * The list is a copy and should be freed with `g_list_free()`,
         * but the pixbufs in the list have not had their reference count
         * incremented.
         */
        static get_default_icon_list(): GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf[];

        /**
         * Returns the fallback icon name for windows that has been set
         * with `gtk_window_set_default_icon_name()`. The returned
         * string is owned by GTK+ and should not be modified. It
         * is only valid until the next call to
         * `gtk_window_set_default_icon_name()`.
         */
        static get_default_icon_name(): string;

        /**
         * Returns a list of all existing toplevel windows. The widgets
         * in the list are not individually referenced. If you want
         * to iterate through the list and perform actions involving
         * callbacks that might destroy the widgets, you must call
         * `g_list_foreach (result, (GFunc)g_object_ref, NULL)` first, and
         * then unref all the widgets afterwards.
         */
        static list_toplevels(): Widget[];

        /**
         * By default, after showing the first {@link Gtk.Window}, GTK+ calls
         * `gdk_notify_startup_complete()`.  Call this function to disable
         * the automatic startup notification. You might do this if your
         * first window is a splash screen, and you want to delay notification
         * until after your real main window has been shown, for example.
         * 
         * In that example, you would disable startup notification
         * temporarily, show your splash screen, then re-enable it so that
         * showing the main window would automatically result in notification.
         * @param setting `true` to automatically do startup notification
         */
        static set_auto_startup_notification(setting: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets an icon to be used as fallback for windows that haven't
         * had `gtk_window_set_icon()` called on them from a pixbuf.
         * @param icon the icon
         */
        static set_default_icon(icon: GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf): void;

        /**
         * Sets an icon to be used as fallback for windows that haven't
         * had `gtk_window_set_icon_list()` called on them from a file
         * on disk. Warns on failure if `err` is `null`.
         * @param filename location of icon file
         */
        static set_default_icon_from_file(filename: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets an icon list to be used as fallback for windows that haven't
         * had `gtk_window_set_icon_list()` called on them to set up a
         * window-specific icon list. This function allows you to set up the
         * icon for all windows in your app at once.
         * 
         * See `gtk_window_set_icon_list()` for more details.
         * @param list a list of {@link GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf}
         */
        static set_default_icon_list(list: GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf[]): void;

        /**
         * Sets an icon to be used as fallback for windows that haven't
         * had `gtk_window_set_icon_list()` called on them from a named
         * themed icon, see `gtk_window_set_icon_name()`.
         * @param name the name of the themed icon
         */
        static set_default_icon_name(name: string): void;

        /**
         * Opens or closes the [interactive debugger][interactive-debugging],
         * which offers access to the widget hierarchy of the application
         * and to useful debugging tools.
         * @param enable `true` to enable interactive debugging
         */
        static set_interactive_debugging(enable: boolean): void;

        // Virtual methods
        /**
         * Activates the default widget for the window.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_activate_default(): void;

        /**
         * Activates the current focused widget within the window.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_activate_focus(): void;

        /**
         * Class handler for the {@link Gtk.Window.SignalSignatures.enable_debugging | Gtk.Window::enable-debugging}
         *   keybinding signal. Since: 3.14
         * @param toggle 
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_enable_debugging(toggle: boolean): boolean;

        /**
         * Signal gets emitted when the set of accelerators or
         *   mnemonics that are associated with window changes.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_keys_changed(): void;

        /**
         * If `focus` is not the current focus widget, and is focusable, sets
         * it as the focus widget for the window. If `focus` is `null`, unsets
         * the focus widget for this window. To set the focus to a particular
         * widget in the toplevel, it is usually more convenient to use
         * `gtk_widget_grab_focus()` instead of this function.
         * @param focus widget to be the new focus widget, or `null` to unset   any focus widget for the toplevel window.
         * @virtual
         */
        vfunc_set_focus(focus: Widget | null): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Activates the default widget for the window, unless the current
         * focused widget has been configured to receive the default action
         * (see `gtk_widget_set_receives_default()`), in which case the
         * focused widget is activated.
         * @returns `true` if a widget got activated.
         */
        activate_default(): boolean;

        /**
         * Activates the current focused widget within the window.
         * @returns `true` if a widget got activated.
         */
        activate_focus(): boolean;

        /**
         * Activates mnemonics and accelerators for this {@link Gtk.Window}. This is normally
         * called by the default ::key_press_event handler for toplevel windows,
         * however in some cases it may be useful to call this directly when
         * overriding the standard key handling for a toplevel window.
         * @param event a {@link Gdk.EventKey}
         * @returns `true` if a mnemonic or accelerator was found and activated.
         */
        activate_key(event: Gdk.EventKey): boolean;

        /**
         * Associate `accel_group` with `window`, such that calling
         * `gtk_accel_groups_activate()` on `window` will activate accelerators
         * in `accel_group`.
         * @param accel_group a {@link Gtk.AccelGroup}
         */
        add_accel_group(accel_group: AccelGroup): void;

        /**
         * Adds a mnemonic to this window.
         * @param keyval the mnemonic
         * @param target the widget that gets activated by the mnemonic
         */
        add_mnemonic(keyval: number, target: Widget): void;

        /**
         * Starts moving a window. This function is used if an application has
         * window movement grips. When GDK can support it, the window movement
         * will be done using the standard mechanism for the
         * [window manager][gtk-X11-arch] or windowing
         * system. Otherwise, GDK will try to emulate window movement,
         * potentially not all that well, depending on the windowing system.
         * @param button mouse button that initiated the drag
         * @param root_x X position where the user clicked to initiate the drag, in root window coordinates
         * @param root_y Y position where the user clicked to initiate the drag
         * @param timestamp timestamp from the click event that initiated the drag
         */
        begin_move_drag(button: number, root_x: number, root_y: number, timestamp: number): void;

        /**
         * Starts resizing a window. This function is used if an application
         * has window resizing controls. When GDK can support it, the resize
         * will be done using the standard mechanism for the
         * [window manager][gtk-X11-arch] or windowing
         * system. Otherwise, GDK will try to emulate window resizing,
         * potentially not all that well, depending on the windowing system.
         * @param edge position of the resize control
         * @param button mouse button that initiated the drag
         * @param root_x X position where the user clicked to initiate the drag, in root window coordinates
         * @param root_y Y position where the user clicked to initiate the drag
         * @param timestamp timestamp from the click event that initiated the drag
         */
        begin_resize_drag(edge: Gdk.WindowEdge, button: number, root_x: number, root_y: number, timestamp: number): void;

        /**
         * Requests that the window is closed, similar to what happens
         * when a window manager close button is clicked.
         * 
         * This function can be used with close buttons in custom
         * titlebars.
         */
        close(): void;

        /**
         * Asks to deiconify (i.e. unminimize) the specified `window`. Note
         * that you shouldn’t assume the window is definitely deiconified
         * afterward, because other entities (e.g. the user or
         * [window manager][gtk-X11-arch])) could iconify it
         * again before your code which assumes deiconification gets to run.
         * 
         * You can track iconification via the “window-state-event” signal
         * on {@link Gtk.Widget}.
         */
        deiconify(): void;

        /**
         * Asks to place `window` in the fullscreen state. Note that you
         * shouldn’t assume the window is definitely full screen afterward,
         * because other entities (e.g. the user or
         * [window manager][gtk-X11-arch]) could unfullscreen it
         * again, and not all window managers honor requests to fullscreen
         * windows. But normally the window will end up fullscreen. Just
         * don’t write code that crashes if not.
         * 
         * You can track the fullscreen state via the “window-state-event” signal
         * on {@link Gtk.Widget}.
         */
        fullscreen(): void;

        /**
         * Asks to place `window` in the fullscreen state. Note that you shouldn't assume
         * the window is definitely full screen afterward.
         * 
         * You can track the fullscreen state via the "window-state-event" signal
         * on {@link Gtk.Widget}.
         * @param screen a {@link Gdk.Screen} to draw to
         * @param monitor which monitor to go fullscreen on
         */
        fullscreen_on_monitor(screen: Gdk.Screen, monitor: number): void;

        /**
         * Gets the value set by `gtk_window_set_accept_focus()`.
         * @returns `true` if window should receive the input focus
         */
        get_accept_focus(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the {@link Gtk.Application} associated with the window (if any).
         * @returns a {@link Gtk.Application}, or `null`
         */
        get_application(): Application | null;

        /**
         * Fetches the attach widget for this window. See
         * `gtk_window_set_attached_to()`.
         * @returns the widget where the window is attached, or `null` if the window is not attached to any widget.
         */
        get_attached_to(): Widget | null;

        /**
         * Returns whether the window has been set to have decorations
         * such as a title bar via `gtk_window_set_decorated()`.
         * @returns `true` if the window has been set to have decorations
         */
        get_decorated(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the default size of the window. A value of -1 for the width or
         * height indicates that a default size has not been explicitly set
         * for that dimension, so the “natural” size of the window will be
         * used.
         */
        get_default_size(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Returns the default widget for `window`. See
         * `gtk_window_set_default()` for more details.
         * @returns the default widget, or `null` if there is none.
         */
        get_default_widget(): Widget | null;

        /**
         * Returns whether the window has been set to have a close button
         * via `gtk_window_set_deletable()`.
         * @returns `true` if the window has been set to have a close button
         */
        get_deletable(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns whether the window will be destroyed with its transient parent. See
         * gtk_window_set_destroy_with_parent ().
         * @returns `true` if the window will be destroyed with its transient parent.
         */
        get_destroy_with_parent(): boolean;

        /**
         * Retrieves the current focused widget within the window.
         * Note that this is the widget that would have the focus
         * if the toplevel window focused; if the toplevel window
         * is not focused then  `gtk_widget_has_focus (widget)` will
         * not be `true` for the widget.
         * @returns the currently focused widget, or `null` if there is none.
         */
        get_focus(): Widget | null;

        /**
         * Gets the value set by `gtk_window_set_focus_on_map()`.
         * @returns `true` if window should receive the input focus when mapped.
         */
        get_focus_on_map(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the value of the {@link Gtk.Window.focus_visible} property.
         * @returns `true` if “focus rectangles” are supposed to be visible     in this window.
         */
        get_focus_visible(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the value set by `gtk_window_set_gravity()`.
         * @returns window gravity
         */
        get_gravity(): Gdk.Gravity;

        /**
         * Returns the group for `window` or the default group, if
         * `window` is `null` or if `window` does not have an explicit
         * window group.
         * @returns the {@link Gtk.WindowGroup} for a window or the default group
         */
        get_group(): WindowGroup;

        /**
         * Determines whether the window may have a resize grip.
         * @returns `true` if the window has a resize grip
         */
        get_has_resize_grip(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns whether the window has requested to have its titlebar hidden
         * when maximized. See gtk_window_set_hide_titlebar_when_maximized ().
         * @returns `true` if the window has requested to have its titlebar               hidden when maximized
         */
        get_hide_titlebar_when_maximized(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the value set by `gtk_window_set_icon()` (or if you've
         * called `gtk_window_set_icon_list()`, gets the first icon in
         * the icon list).
         * @returns icon for window or `null` if none
         */
        get_icon(): GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf | null;

        /**
         * Retrieves the list of icons set by `gtk_window_set_icon_list()`.
         * The list is copied, but the reference count on each
         * member won’t be incremented.
         * @returns copy of window’s icon list
         */
        get_icon_list(): GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf[];

        /**
         * Returns the name of the themed icon for the window,
         * see `gtk_window_set_icon_name()`.
         * @returns the icon name or `null` if the window has no themed icon
         */
        get_icon_name(): string | null;

        /**
         * Returns the mnemonic modifier for this window. See
         * `gtk_window_set_mnemonic_modifier()`.
         * @returns the modifier mask used to activate               mnemonics on this window.
         */
        get_mnemonic_modifier(): Gdk.ModifierType;

        /**
         * Gets the value of the {@link Gtk.Window.mnemonics_visible} property.
         * @returns `true` if mnemonics are supposed to be visible in this window.
         */
        get_mnemonics_visible(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns whether the window is modal. See `gtk_window_set_modal()`.
         * @returns `true` if the window is set to be modal and               establishes a grab when shown
         */
        get_modal(): boolean;

        /**
         * Fetches the requested opacity for this window. See
         * `gtk_window_set_opacity()`.
         * @returns the requested opacity for this window.
         */
        get_opacity(): number;

        /**
         * This function returns the position you need to pass to
         * `gtk_window_move()` to keep `window` in its current position.
         * This means that the meaning of the returned value varies with
         * window gravity. See `gtk_window_move()` for more details.
         * 
         * The reliability of this function depends on the windowing system
         * currently in use. Some windowing systems, such as Wayland, do not
         * support a global coordinate system, and thus the position of the
         * window will always be (0, 0). Others, like X11, do not have a reliable
         * way to obtain the geometry of the decorations of a window if they are
         * provided by the window manager. Additionally, on X11, window manager
         * have been known to mismanage window gravity, which result in windows
         * moving even if you use the coordinates of the current position as
         * returned by this function.
         * 
         * If you haven’t changed the window gravity, its gravity will be
         * #GDK_GRAVITY_NORTH_WEST. This means that `gtk_window_get_position()`
         * gets the position of the top-left corner of the window manager
         * frame for the window. `gtk_window_move()` sets the position of this
         * same top-left corner.
         * 
         * If a window has gravity #GDK_GRAVITY_STATIC the window manager
         * frame is not relevant, and thus `gtk_window_get_position()` will
         * always produce accurate results. However you can’t use static
         * gravity to do things like place a window in a corner of the screen,
         * because static gravity ignores the window manager decorations.
         * 
         * Ideally, this function should return appropriate values if the
         * window has client side decorations, assuming that the windowing
         * system supports global coordinates.
         * 
         * In practice, saving the window position should not be left to
         * applications, as they lack enough knowledge of the windowing
         * system and the window manager state to effectively do so. The
         * appropriate way to implement saving the window position is to
         * use a platform-specific protocol, wherever that is available.
         */
        get_position(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the value set by `gtk_window_set_resizable()`.
         * @returns `true` if the user can resize the window
         */
        get_resizable(): boolean;

        /**
         * If a window has a resize grip, this will retrieve the grip
         * position, width and height into the specified {@link Gdk.Rectangle}.
         * @returns `true` if the resize grip’s area was retrieved
         */
        get_resize_grip_area(): [boolean, Gdk.Rectangle];

        /**
         * Returns the role of the window. See `gtk_window_set_role()` for
         * further explanation.
         * @returns the role of the window if set, or `null`. The returned is owned by the widget and must not be modified or freed.
         */
        get_role(): string | null;

        /**
         * Returns the {@link Gdk.Screen} associated with `window`.
         * @returns a {@link Gdk.Screen}.
         */
        get_screen(): Gdk.Screen;

        /**
         * Obtains the current size of `window`.
         * 
         * If `window` is not visible on screen, this function return the size GTK+
         * will suggest to the [window manager][gtk-X11-arch] for the initial window
         * size (but this is not reliably the same as the size the window manager
         * will actually select). See: `gtk_window_set_default_size()`.
         * 
         * Depending on the windowing system and the window manager constraints,
         * the size returned by this function may not match the size set using
         * `gtk_window_resize()`; additionally, since `gtk_window_resize()` may be
         * implemented as an asynchronous operation, GTK+ cannot guarantee in any
         * way that this code:
         * 
         * 
         * ```c
         *   // width and height are set elsewhere
         *   gtk_window_resize (window, width, height);
         * 
         *   int new_width, new_height;
         *   gtk_window_get_size (window, &new_width, &new_height);
         * ```
         * 
         * 
         * will result in `new_width` and `new_height` matching `width` and
         * `height`, respectively.
         * 
         * This function will return the logical size of the {@link Gtk.Window},
         * excluding the widgets used in client side decorations; there is,
         * however, no guarantee that the result will be completely accurate
         * because client side decoration may include widgets that depend on
         * the user preferences and that may not be visibile at the time you
         * call this function.
         * 
         * The dimensions returned by this function are suitable for being
         * stored across sessions; use `gtk_window_set_default_size()` to
         * restore them when before showing the window.
         * 
         * To avoid potential race conditions, you should only call this
         * function in response to a size change notification, for instance
         * inside a handler for the {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.size_allocate | Gtk.Widget::size-allocate} signal, or
         * inside a handler for the {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.configure_event | Gtk.Widget::configure-event} signal:
         * 
         * 
         * ```c
         * static void
         * on_size_allocate (GtkWidget *widget, GtkAllocation *allocation)
         * {
         *   int new_width, new_height;
         * 
         *   gtk_window_get_size (GTK_WINDOW (widget), &new_width, &new_height);
         * 
         *   ...
         * }
         * ```
         * 
         * 
         * Note that, if you connect to the {@link Gtk.Widget.SignalSignatures.size_allocate | Gtk.Widget::size-allocate} signal,
         * you should not use the dimensions of the {@link Gtk.Allocation} passed to
         * the signal handler, as the allocation may contain client side
         * decorations added by GTK+, depending on the windowing system in
         * use.
         * 
         * If you are getting a window size in order to position the window
         * on the screen, you should, instead, simply set the window’s semantic
         * type with `gtk_window_set_type_hint()`, which allows the window manager
         * to e.g. center dialogs. Also, if you set the transient parent of
         * dialogs with `gtk_window_set_transient_for()` window managers will
         * often center the dialog over its parent window. It's much preferred
         * to let the window manager handle these cases rather than doing it
         * yourself, because all apps will behave consistently and according to
         * user or system preferences, if the window manager handles it. Also,
         * the window manager can take into account the size of the window
         * decorations and border that it may add, and of which GTK+ has no
         * knowledge. Additionally, positioning windows in global screen coordinates
         * may not be allowed by the windowing system. For more information,
         * see: `gtk_window_set_position()`.
         */
        get_size(): [number, number];

        /**
         * Gets the value set by `gtk_window_set_skip_pager_hint()`.
         * @returns `true` if window shouldn’t be in pager
         */
        get_skip_pager_hint(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the value set by `gtk_window_set_skip_taskbar_hint()`
         * @returns `true` if window shouldn’t be in taskbar
         */
        get_skip_taskbar_hint(): boolean;

        /**
         * Retrieves the title of the window. See `gtk_window_set_title()`.
         * @returns the title of the window, or `null` if none has been set explicitly. The returned string is owned by the widget and must not be modified or freed.
         */
        get_title(): string | null;

        /**
         * Returns the custom titlebar that has been set with
         * `gtk_window_set_titlebar()`.
         * @returns the custom titlebar, or `null`
         */
        get_titlebar(): Widget | null;

        /**
         * Fetches the transient parent for this window. See
         * `gtk_window_set_transient_for()`.
         * @returns the transient parent for this window, or `null` if no transient parent has been set.
         */
        get_transient_for(): Window | null;

        /**
         * Gets the type hint for this window. See `gtk_window_set_type_hint()`.
         * @returns the type hint for `window`.
         */
        get_type_hint(): Gdk.WindowTypeHint;

        /**
         * Gets the value set by `gtk_window_set_urgency_hint()`
         * @returns `true` if window is urgent
         */
        get_urgency_hint(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the type of the window. See {@link Gtk.WindowType}.
         * @returns the type of the window
         */
        get_window_type(): WindowType;

        /**
         * Returns whether `window` has an explicit window group.
         * @returns `true` if `window` has an explicit window group. Since 2.22
         */
        has_group(): boolean;

        /**
         * Asks to iconify (i.e. minimize) the specified `window`. Note that
         * you shouldn’t assume the window is definitely iconified afterward,
         * because other entities (e.g. the user or
         * [window manager][gtk-X11-arch]) could deiconify it
         * again, or there may not be a window manager in which case
         * iconification isn’t possible, etc. But normally the window will end
         * up iconified. Just don’t write code that crashes if not.
         * 
         * It’s permitted to call this function before showing a window,
         * in which case the window will be iconified before it ever appears
         * onscreen.
         * 
         * You can track iconification via the “window-state-event” signal
         * on {@link Gtk.Widget}.
         */
        iconify(): void;

        /**
         * Asks to maximize `window`, so that it becomes full-screen. Note that
         * you shouldn’t assume the window is definitely maximized afterward,
         * because other entities (e.g. the user or
         * [window manager][gtk-X11-arch]) could unmaximize it
         * again, and not all window managers support maximization. But
         * normally the window will end up maximized. Just don’t write code
         * that crashes if not.
         * 
         * It’s permitted to call this function before showing a window,
         * in which case the window will be maximized when it appears onscreen
         * initially.
         * 
         * You can track maximization via the “window-state-event” signal
         * on {@link Gtk.Widget}, or by listening to notifications on the
         * {@link Gtk.Window.is_maximized} property.
         */
        maximize(): void;

        /**
         * Activates the targets associated with the mnemonic.
         * @param keyval the mnemonic
         * @param modifier the modifiers
         * @returns `true` if the activation is done.
         */
        mnemonic_activate(keyval: number, modifier: Gdk.ModifierType): boolean;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
    // Conflicted with Gtk.Widget.mnemonic_activate
        mnemonic_activate(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Asks the [window manager][gtk-X11-arch] to move
         * `window` to the given position.  Window managers are free to ignore
         * this; most window managers ignore requests for initial window
         * positions (instead using a user-defined placement algorithm) and
         * honor requests after the window has already been shown.
         * 
         * Note: the position is the position of the gravity-determined
         * reference point for the window. The gravity determines two things:
         * first, the location of the reference point in root window
         * coordinates; and second, which point on the window is positioned at
         * the reference point.
         * 
         * By default the gravity is #GDK_GRAVITY_NORTH_WEST, so the reference
         * point is simply the `x`, `y` supplied to `gtk_window_move()`. The
         * top-left corner of the window decorations (aka window frame or
         * border) will be placed at `x`, `y`.  Therefore, to position a window
         * at the top left of the screen, you want to use the default gravity
         * (which is #GDK_GRAVITY_NORTH_WEST) and move the window to 0,0.
         * 
         * To position a window at the bottom right corner of the screen, you
         * would set #GDK_GRAVITY_SOUTH_EAST, which means that the reference
         * point is at `x` + the window width and `y` + the window height, and
         * the bottom-right corner of the window border will be placed at that
         * reference point. So, to place a window in the bottom right corner
         * you would first set gravity to south east, then write:
         * `gtk_window_move (window, gdk_screen_width () - window_width,
         * gdk_screen_height () - window_height)` (note that this
         * example does not take multi-head scenarios into account).
         * 
         * The [Extended Window Manager Hints Specification](https://specifications.freedesktop.org/wm/latest/)
         * has a nice table of gravities in the “implementation notes” section.
         * 
         * The `gtk_window_get_position()` documentation may also be relevant.
         * @param x X coordinate to move window to
         * @param y Y coordinate to move window to
         */
        move(x: number, y: number): void;

        /**
         * Parses a standard X Window System geometry string - see the
         * manual page for X (type “man X”) for details on this.
         * `gtk_window_parse_geometry()` does work on all GTK+ ports
         * including Win32 but is primarily intended for an X environment.
         * 
         * If either a size or a position can be extracted from the
         * geometry string, `gtk_window_parse_geometry()` returns `true`
         * and calls `gtk_window_set_default_size()` and/or `gtk_window_move()`
         * to resize/move the window.
         * 
         * If `gtk_window_parse_geometry()` returns `true`, it will also
         * set the #GDK_HINT_USER_POS and/or #GDK_HINT_USER_SIZE hints
         * indicating to the window manager that the size/position of
         * the window was user-specified. This causes most window
         * managers to honor the geometry.
         * 
         * Note that for `gtk_window_parse_geometry()` to work as expected, it has
         * to be called when the window has its “final” size, i.e. after calling
         * `gtk_widget_show_all()` on the contents and `gtk_window_set_geometry_hints()`
         * on the window.
         * 
         * ```c
         * #include <gtk/gtk.h>
         * 
         * static void
         * fill_with_content (GtkWidget *vbox)
         * {
         *   // fill with content...
         * }
         * 
         * int
         * main (int argc, char *argv[])
         * {
         *   GtkWidget *window, *vbox;
         *   GdkGeometry size_hints = {
         *     100, 50, 0, 0, 100, 50, 10,
         *     10, 0.0, 0.0, GDK_GRAVITY_NORTH_WEST
         *   };
         * 
         *   gtk_init (&argc, &argv);
         * 
         *   window = gtk_window_new (GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
         *   vbox = gtk_box_new (GTK_ORIENTATION_VERTICAL, 0);
         * 
         *   gtk_container_add (GTK_CONTAINER (window), vbox);
         *   fill_with_content (vbox);
         *   gtk_widget_show_all (vbox);
         * 
         *   gtk_window_set_geometry_hints (GTK_WINDOW (window),
         * 	  			    NULL,
         * 				    &size_hints,
         * 				    GDK_HINT_MIN_SIZE |
         * 				    GDK_HINT_BASE_SIZE |
         * 				    GDK_HINT_RESIZE_INC);
         * 
         *   if (argc > 1)
         *     {
         *       gboolean res;
         *       res = gtk_window_parse_geometry (GTK_WINDOW (window),
         *                                        argv[1]);
         *       if (! res)
         *         fprintf (stderr,
         *                  "Failed to parse “%s”\n",
         *                  argv[1]);
         *     }
         * 
         *   gtk_widget_show_all (window);
         *   gtk_main ();
         * 
         *   return 0;
         * }
         * ```
         * 
         * @param geometry geometry string
         * @returns `true` if string was parsed successfully
         */
        parse_geometry(geometry: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Presents a window to the user. This function should not be used
         * as when it is called, it is too late to gather a valid timestamp
         * to allow focus stealing prevention to work correctly.
         */
        present(): void;

        /**
         * Presents a window to the user. This may mean raising the window
         * in the stacking order, deiconifying it, moving it to the current
         * desktop, and/or giving it the keyboard focus, possibly dependent
         * on the user’s platform, window manager, and preferences.
         * 
         * If `window` is hidden, this function calls `gtk_widget_show()`
         * as well.
         * 
         * This function should be used when the user tries to open a window
         * that’s already open. Say for example the preferences dialog is
         * currently open, and the user chooses Preferences from the menu
         * a second time; use `gtk_window_present()` to move the already-open dialog
         * where the user can see it.
         * 
         * Presents a window to the user in response to a user interaction. The
         * timestamp should be gathered when the window was requested to be shown
         * (when clicking a link for example), rather than once the window is
         * ready to be shown.
         * @param timestamp the timestamp of the user interaction (typically a   button or key press event) which triggered this call
         */
        present_with_time(timestamp: number): void;

        /**
         * Propagate a key press or release event to the focus widget and
         * up the focus container chain until a widget handles `event`.
         * This is normally called by the default ::key_press_event and
         * ::key_release_event handlers for toplevel windows,
         * however in some cases it may be useful to call this directly when
         * overriding the standard key handling for a toplevel window.
         * @param event a {@link Gdk.EventKey}
         * @returns `true` if a widget in the focus chain handled the event.
         */
        propagate_key_event(event: Gdk.EventKey): boolean;

        /**
         * Reverses the effects of `gtk_window_add_accel_group()`.
         * @param accel_group a {@link Gtk.AccelGroup}
         */
        remove_accel_group(accel_group: AccelGroup): void;

        /**
         * Removes a mnemonic from this window.
         * @param keyval the mnemonic
         * @param target the widget that gets activated by the mnemonic
         */
        remove_mnemonic(keyval: number, target: Widget): void;

        /**
         * Hides `window`, then reshows it, resetting the
         * default size and position of the window. Used
         * by GUI builders only.
         */
        reshow_with_initial_size(): void;

        /**
         * Resizes the window as if the user had done so, obeying geometry
         * constraints. The default geometry constraint is that windows may
         * not be smaller than their size request; to override this
         * constraint, call `gtk_widget_set_size_request()` to set the window's
         * request to a smaller value.
         * 
         * If `gtk_window_resize()` is called before showing a window for the
         * first time, it overrides any default size set with
         * `gtk_window_set_default_size()`.
         * 
         * Windows may not be resized smaller than 1 by 1 pixels.
         * 
         * When using client side decorations, GTK+ will do its best to adjust
         * the given size so that the resulting window size matches the
         * requested size without the title bar, borders and shadows added for
         * the client side decorations, but there is no guarantee that the
         * result will be totally accurate because these widgets added for
         * client side decorations depend on the theme and may not be realized
         * or visible at the time `gtk_window_resize()` is issued.
         * 
         * If the GtkWindow has a titlebar widget (see `gtk_window_set_titlebar()`), then
         * typically, `gtk_window_resize()` will compensate for the height of the titlebar
         * widget only if the height is known when the resulting GtkWindow configuration
         * is issued.
         * For example, if new widgets are added after the GtkWindow configuration
         * and cause the titlebar widget to grow in height, this will result in a
         * window content smaller that specified by `gtk_window_resize()` and not
         * a larger window.
         * @param width width in pixels to resize the window to
         * @param height height in pixels to resize the window to
         */
        resize(width: number, height: number): void;

        /**
         * Determines whether a resize grip is visible for the specified window.
         * @returns `true` if a resize grip exists and is visible
         */
        resize_grip_is_visible(): boolean;

        /**
         * Like `gtk_window_resize()`, but `width` and `height` are interpreted
         * in terms of the base size and increment set with
         * gtk_window_set_geometry_hints.
         * @param width width in resize increments to resize the window to
         * @param height height in resize increments to resize the window to
         */
        resize_to_geometry(width: number, height: number): void;

        /**
         * Windows may set a hint asking the desktop environment not to receive
         * the input focus. This function sets this hint.
         * @param setting `true` to let this window receive input focus
         */
        set_accept_focus(setting: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets or unsets the {@link Gtk.Application} associated with the window.
         * 
         * The application will be kept alive for at least as long as it has any windows
         * associated with it (see `g_application_hold()` for a way to keep it alive
         * without windows).
         * 
         * Normally, the connection between the application and the window will remain
         * until the window is destroyed, but you can explicitly remove it by setting
         * the `application` to `null`.
         * 
         * This is equivalent to calling `gtk_application_remove_window()` and/or
         * `gtk_application_add_window()` on the old/new applications as relevant.
         * @param application a {@link Gtk.Application}, or `null` to unset
         */
        set_application(application: Application | null): void;

        /**
         * Marks `window` as attached to `attach_widget`. This creates a logical binding
         * between the window and the widget it belongs to, which is used by GTK+ to
         * propagate information such as styling or accessibility to `window` as if it
         * was a children of `attach_widget`.
         * 
         * Examples of places where specifying this relation is useful are for instance
         * a {@link Gtk.Menu} created by a {@link Gtk.ComboBox}, a completion popup window
         * created by {@link Gtk.Entry} or a typeahead search entry created by {@link Gtk.TreeView}.
         * 
         * Note that this function should not be confused with
         * `gtk_window_set_transient_for()`, which specifies a window manager relation
         * between two toplevels instead.
         * 
         * Passing `null` for `attach_widget` detaches the window.
         * @param attach_widget a {@link Gtk.Widget}, or `null`
         */
        set_attached_to(attach_widget: Widget | null): void;

        /**
         * By default, windows are decorated with a title bar, resize
         * controls, etc.  Some [window managers][gtk-X11-arch]
         * allow GTK+ to disable these decorations, creating a
         * borderless window. If you set the decorated property to `false`
         * using this function, GTK+ will do its best to convince the window
         * manager not to decorate the window. Depending on the system, this
         * function may not have any effect when called on a window that is
         * already visible, so you should call it before calling `gtk_widget_show()`.
         * 
         * On Windows, this function always works, since there’s no window manager
         * policy involved.
         * @param setting `true` to decorate the window
         */
        set_decorated(setting: boolean): void;

        /**
         * The default widget is the widget that’s activated when the user
         * presses Enter in a dialog (for example). This function sets or
         * unsets the default widget for a {@link Gtk.Window}. When setting (rather
         * than unsetting) the default widget it’s generally easier to call
         * `gtk_widget_grab_default()` on the widget. Before making a widget
         * the default widget, you must call `gtk_widget_set_can_default()` on
         * the widget you’d like to make the default.
         * @param default_widget widget to be the default, or `null`     to unset the default widget for the toplevel
         */
        set_default(default_widget: Widget | null): void;

        /**
         * Like `gtk_window_set_default_size()`, but `width` and `height` are interpreted
         * in terms of the base size and increment set with
         * gtk_window_set_geometry_hints.
         * @param width width in resize increments, or -1 to unset the default width
         * @param height height in resize increments, or -1 to unset the default height
         */
        set_default_geometry(width: number, height: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the default size of a window. If the window’s “natural” size
         * (its size request) is larger than the default, the default will be
         * ignored. More generally, if the default size does not obey the
         * geometry hints for the window (gtk_window_set_geometry_hints() can
         * be used to set these explicitly), the default size will be clamped
         * to the nearest permitted size.
         * 
         * Unlike `gtk_widget_set_size_request()`, which sets a size request for
         * a widget and thus would keep users from shrinking the window, this
         * function only sets the initial size, just as if the user had
         * resized the window themselves. Users can still shrink the window
         * again as they normally would. Setting a default size of -1 means to
         * use the “natural” default size (the size request of the window).
         * 
         * For more control over a window’s initial size and how resizing works,
         * investigate `gtk_window_set_geometry_hints()`.
         * 
         * For some uses, `gtk_window_resize()` is a more appropriate function.
         * `gtk_window_resize()` changes the current size of the window, rather
         * than the size to be used on initial display. `gtk_window_resize()` always
         * affects the window itself, not the geometry widget.
         * 
         * The default size of a window only affects the first time a window is
         * shown; if a window is hidden and re-shown, it will remember the size
         * it had prior to hiding, rather than using the default size.
         * 
         * Windows can’t actually be 0x0 in size, they must be at least 1x1, but
         * passing 0 for `width` and `height` is OK, resulting in a 1x1 default size.
         * 
         * If you use this function to reestablish a previously saved window size,
         * note that the appropriate size to save is the one returned by
         * `gtk_window_get_size()`. Using the window allocation directly will not
         * work in all circumstances and can lead to growing or shrinking windows.
         * @param width width in pixels, or -1 to unset the default width
         * @param height height in pixels, or -1 to unset the default height
         */
        set_default_size(width: number, height: number): void;

        /**
         * By default, windows have a close button in the window frame. Some
         * [window managers][gtk-X11-arch] allow GTK+ to
         * disable this button. If you set the deletable property to `false`
         * using this function, GTK+ will do its best to convince the window
         * manager not to show a close button. Depending on the system, this
         * function may not have any effect when called on a window that is
         * already visible, so you should call it before calling `gtk_widget_show()`.
         * 
         * On Windows, this function always works, since there’s no window manager
         * policy involved.
         * @param setting `true` to decorate the window as deletable
         */
        set_deletable(setting: boolean): void;

        /**
         * If `setting` is `true`, then destroying the transient parent of `window`
         * will also destroy `window` itself. This is useful for dialogs that
         * shouldn’t persist beyond the lifetime of the main window they're
         * associated with, for example.
         * @param setting whether to destroy `window` with its transient parent
         */
        set_destroy_with_parent(setting: boolean): void;

        /**
         * If `focus` is not the current focus widget, and is focusable, sets
         * it as the focus widget for the window. If `focus` is `null`, unsets
         * the focus widget for this window. To set the focus to a particular
         * widget in the toplevel, it is usually more convenient to use
         * `gtk_widget_grab_focus()` instead of this function.
         * @param focus widget to be the new focus widget, or `null` to unset   any focus widget for the toplevel window.
         */
        set_focus(focus: Widget | null): void;

        /**
         * Windows may set a hint asking the desktop environment not to receive
         * the input focus when the window is mapped.  This function sets this
         * hint.
         * @param setting `true` to let this window receive input focus on map
         */
        set_focus_on_map(setting: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.Window.focus_visible} property.
         * @param setting the new value
         */
        set_focus_visible(setting: boolean): void;

        /**
         * This function sets up hints about how a window can be resized by
         * the user.  You can set a minimum and maximum size; allowed resize
         * increments (e.g. for xterm, you can only resize by the size of a
         * character); aspect ratios; and more. See the {@link Gdk.Geometry} struct.
         * @param geometry_widget widget the geometry hints used to be applied to   or `null`. Since 3.20 this argument is ignored and GTK behaves as if `null` was   set.
         * @param geometry struct containing geometry information or `null`
         * @param geom_mask mask indicating which struct fields should be paid attention to
         */
        set_geometry_hints(geometry_widget: Widget | null, geometry: Gdk.Geometry | null, geom_mask: Gdk.WindowHints): void;

        /**
         * Window gravity defines the meaning of coordinates passed to
         * `gtk_window_move()`. See `gtk_window_move()` and {@link Gdk.Gravity} for
         * more details.
         * 
         * The default window gravity is #GDK_GRAVITY_NORTH_WEST which will
         * typically “do what you mean.”
         * @param gravity window gravity
         */
        set_gravity(gravity: Gdk.Gravity): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether `window` has a corner resize grip.
         * 
         * Note that the resize grip is only shown if the window
         * is actually resizable and not maximized. Use
         * `gtk_window_resize_grip_is_visible()` to find out if the
         * resize grip is currently shown.
         * @param value `true` to allow a resize grip
         */
        set_has_resize_grip(value: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Tells GTK+ whether to drop its extra reference to the window
         * when `gtk_widget_destroy()` is called.
         * 
         * This function is only exported for the benefit of language
         * bindings which may need to keep the window alive until their
         * wrapper object is garbage collected. There is no justification
         * for ever calling this function in an application.
         * @param setting the new value
         */
        set_has_user_ref_count(setting: boolean): void;

        /**
         * If `setting` is `true`, then `window` will request that it’s titlebar
         * should be hidden when maximized.
         * This is useful for windows that don’t convey any information other
         * than the application name in the titlebar, to put the available
         * screen space to better use. If the underlying window system does not
         * support the request, the setting will not have any effect.
         * 
         * Note that custom titlebars set with `gtk_window_set_titlebar()` are
         * not affected by this. The application is in full control of their
         * content and visibility anyway.
         * @param setting whether to hide the titlebar when `window` is maximized
         */
        set_hide_titlebar_when_maximized(setting: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets up the icon representing a {@link Gtk.Window}. This icon is used when
         * the window is minimized (also known as iconified).  Some window
         * managers or desktop environments may also place it in the window
         * frame, or display it in other contexts. On others, the icon is not
         * used at all, so your mileage may vary.
         * 
         * The icon should be provided in whatever size it was naturally
         * drawn; that is, don’t scale the image before passing it to
         * GTK+. Scaling is postponed until the last minute, when the desired
         * final size is known, to allow best quality.
         * 
         * If you have your icon hand-drawn in multiple sizes, use
         * `gtk_window_set_icon_list()`. Then the best size will be used.
         * 
         * This function is equivalent to calling `gtk_window_set_icon_list()`
         * with a 1-element list.
         * 
         * See also `gtk_window_set_default_icon_list()` to set the icon
         * for all windows in your application in one go.
         * @param icon icon image, or `null`
         */
        set_icon(icon: GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the icon for `window`.
         * Warns on failure if `err` is `null`.
         * 
         * This function is equivalent to calling `gtk_window_set_icon()`
         * with a pixbuf created by loading the image from `filename`.
         * @param filename location of icon file
         * @returns `true` if setting the icon succeeded.
         */
        set_icon_from_file(filename: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets up the icon representing a {@link Gtk.Window}. The icon is used when
         * the window is minimized (also known as iconified).  Some window
         * managers or desktop environments may also place it in the window
         * frame, or display it in other contexts. On others, the icon is not
         * used at all, so your mileage may vary.
         * 
         * `gtk_window_set_icon_list()` allows you to pass in the same icon in
         * several hand-drawn sizes. The list should contain the natural sizes
         * your icon is available in; that is, don’t scale the image before
         * passing it to GTK+. Scaling is postponed until the last minute,
         * when the desired final size is known, to allow best quality.
         * 
         * By passing several sizes, you may improve the final image quality
         * of the icon, by reducing or eliminating automatic image scaling.
         * 
         * Recommended sizes to provide: 16x16, 32x32, 48x48 at minimum, and
         * larger images (64x64, 128x128) if you have them.
         * 
         * See also `gtk_window_set_default_icon_list()` to set the icon
         * for all windows in your application in one go.
         * 
         * Note that transient windows (those who have been set transient for another
         * window using `gtk_window_set_transient_for()`) will inherit their
         * icon from their transient parent. So there’s no need to explicitly
         * set the icon on transient windows.
         * @param list list of {@link GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf}
         */
        set_icon_list(list: GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf[]): void;

        /**
         * Sets the icon for the window from a named themed icon.
         * See the docs for {@link Gtk.IconTheme} for more details.
         * On some platforms, the window icon is not used at all.
         * 
         * Note that this has nothing to do with the WM_ICON_NAME
         * property which is mentioned in the ICCCM.
         * @param name the name of the themed icon
         */
        set_icon_name(name: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Asks to keep `window` above, so that it stays on top. Note that
         * you shouldn’t assume the window is definitely above afterward,
         * because other entities (e.g. the user or
         * [window manager][gtk-X11-arch]) could not keep it above,
         * and not all window managers support keeping windows above. But
         * normally the window will end kept above. Just don’t write code
         * that crashes if not.
         * 
         * It’s permitted to call this function before showing a window,
         * in which case the window will be kept above when it appears onscreen
         * initially.
         * 
         * You can track the above state via the “window-state-event” signal
         * on {@link Gtk.Widget}.
         * 
         * Note that, according to the
         * [Extended Window Manager Hints Specification](https://specifications.freedesktop.org/wm/latest/),
         * the above state is mainly meant for user preferences and should not
         * be used by applications e.g. for drawing attention to their
         * dialogs.
         * @param setting whether to keep `window` above other windows
         */
        set_keep_above(setting: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Asks to keep `window` below, so that it stays in bottom. Note that
         * you shouldn’t assume the window is definitely below afterward,
         * because other entities (e.g. the user or
         * [window manager][gtk-X11-arch]) could not keep it below,
         * and not all window managers support putting windows below. But
         * normally the window will be kept below. Just don’t write code
         * that crashes if not.
         * 
         * It’s permitted to call this function before showing a window,
         * in which case the window will be kept below when it appears onscreen
         * initially.
         * 
         * You can track the below state via the “window-state-event” signal
         * on {@link Gtk.Widget}.
         * 
         * Note that, according to the
         * [Extended Window Manager Hints Specification](https://specifications.freedesktop.org/wm/latest/),
         * the above state is mainly meant for user preferences and should not
         * be used by applications e.g. for drawing attention to their
         * dialogs.
         * @param setting whether to keep `window` below other windows
         */
        set_keep_below(setting: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the mnemonic modifier for this window.
         * @param modifier the modifier mask used to activate               mnemonics on this window.
         */
        set_mnemonic_modifier(modifier: Gdk.ModifierType): void;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.Window.mnemonics_visible} property.
         * @param setting the new value
         */
        set_mnemonics_visible(setting: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets a window modal or non-modal. Modal windows prevent interaction
         * with other windows in the same application. To keep modal dialogs
         * on top of main application windows, use
         * `gtk_window_set_transient_for()` to make the dialog transient for the
         * parent; most [window managers][gtk-X11-arch]
         * will then disallow lowering the dialog below the parent.
         * @param modal whether the window is modal
         */
        set_modal(modal: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Request the windowing system to make `window` partially transparent,
         * with opacity 0 being fully transparent and 1 fully opaque. (Values
         * of the opacity parameter are clamped to the [0,1] range.) On X11
         * this has any effect only on X screens with a compositing manager
         * running. See `gtk_widget_is_composited()`. On Windows it should work
         * always.
         * 
         * Note that setting a window’s opacity after the window has been
         * shown causes it to flicker once on Windows.
         * @param opacity desired opacity, between 0 and 1
         */
        set_opacity(opacity: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets a position constraint for this window. If the old or new
         * constraint is {@link Gtk.WindowPosition.CENTER_ALWAYS}, this will also cause
         * the window to be repositioned to satisfy the new constraint.
         * @param position a position constraint.
         */
        set_position(position: WindowPosition): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the user can resize a window. Windows are user resizable
         * by default.
         * @param resizable `true` if the user can resize this window
         */
        set_resizable(resizable: boolean): void;

        /**
         * This function is only useful on X11, not with other GTK+ targets.
         * 
         * In combination with the window title, the window role allows a
         * [window manager][gtk-X11-arch] to identify "the
         * same" window when an application is restarted. So for example you
         * might set the “toolbox” role on your app’s toolbox window, so that
         * when the user restarts their session, the window manager can put
         * the toolbox back in the same place.
         * 
         * If a window already has a unique title, you don’t need to set the
         * role, since the WM can use the title to identify the window when
         * restoring the session.
         * @param role unique identifier for the window to be used when restoring a session
         */
        set_role(role: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gdk.Screen} where the `window` is displayed; if
         * the window is already mapped, it will be unmapped, and
         * then remapped on the new screen.
         * @param screen a {@link Gdk.Screen}.
         */
        set_screen(screen: Gdk.Screen): void;

        /**
         * Windows may set a hint asking the desktop environment not to display
         * the window in the pager. This function sets this hint.
         * (A "pager" is any desktop navigation tool such as a workspace
         * switcher that displays a thumbnail representation of the windows
         * on the screen.)
         * @param setting `true` to keep this window from appearing in the pager
         */
        set_skip_pager_hint(setting: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Windows may set a hint asking the desktop environment not to display
         * the window in the task bar. This function sets this hint.
         * @param setting `true` to keep this window from appearing in the task bar
         */
        set_skip_taskbar_hint(setting: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Startup notification identifiers are used by desktop environment to
         * track application startup, to provide user feedback and other
         * features. This function changes the corresponding property on the
         * underlying GdkWindow. Normally, startup identifier is managed
         * automatically and you should only use this function in special cases
         * like transferring focus from other processes. You should use this
         * function before calling `gtk_window_present()` or any equivalent
         * function generating a window map event.
         * 
         * This function is only useful on X11, not with other GTK+ targets.
         * @param startup_id a string with startup-notification identifier
         */
        set_startup_id(startup_id: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets the title of the {@link Gtk.Window}. The title of a window will be
         * displayed in its title bar; on the X Window System, the title bar
         * is rendered by the [window manager][gtk-X11-arch],
         * so exactly how the title appears to users may vary
         * according to a user’s exact configuration. The title should help a
         * user distinguish this window from other windows they may have
         * open. A good title might include the application name and current
         * document filename, for example.
         * @param title title of the window
         */
        set_title(title: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets a custom titlebar for `window`.
         * 
         * A typical widget used here is {@link Gtk.HeaderBar}, as it provides various features
         * expected of a titlebar while allowing the addition of child widgets to it.
         * 
         * If you set a custom titlebar, GTK+ will do its best to convince
         * the window manager not to put its own titlebar on the window.
         * Depending on the system, this function may not work for a window
         * that is already visible, so you set the titlebar before calling
         * `gtk_widget_show()`.
         * @param titlebar the widget to use as titlebar
         */
        set_titlebar(titlebar: Widget | null): void;

        /**
         * Dialog windows should be set transient for the main application
         * window they were spawned from. This allows
         * [window managers][gtk-X11-arch] to e.g. keep the
         * dialog on top of the main window, or center the dialog over the
         * main window. `gtk_dialog_new_with_buttons()` and other convenience
         * functions in GTK+ will sometimes call
         * `gtk_window_set_transient_for()` on your behalf.
         * 
         * Passing `null` for `parent` unsets the current transient window.
         * 
         * On Wayland, this function can also be used to attach a new
         * #GTK_WINDOW_POPUP to a #GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL parent already mapped
         * on screen so that the #GTK_WINDOW_POPUP will be created as a
         * subsurface-based window #GDK_WINDOW_SUBSURFACE which can be
         * positioned at will relatively to the #GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL surface.
         * 
         * On Windows, this function puts the child window on top of the parent,
         * much as the window manager would have done on X.
         * @param parent parent window, or `null`
         */
        set_transient_for(parent: Window | null): void;

        /**
         * By setting the type hint for the window, you allow the window
         * manager to decorate and handle the window in a way which is
         * suitable to the function of the window in your application.
         * 
         * This function should be called before the window becomes visible.
         * 
         * `gtk_dialog_new_with_buttons()` and other convenience functions in GTK+
         * will sometimes call `gtk_window_set_type_hint()` on your behalf.
         * @param hint the window type
         */
        set_type_hint(hint: Gdk.WindowTypeHint): void;

        /**
         * Windows may set a hint asking the desktop environment to draw
         * the users attention to the window. This function sets this hint.
         * @param setting `true` to mark this window as urgent
         */
        set_urgency_hint(setting: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Don’t use this function. It sets the X Window System “class” and
         * “name” hints for a window.  According to the ICCCM, you should
         * always set these to the same value for all windows in an
         * application, and GTK+ sets them to that value by default, so calling
         * this function is sort of pointless. However, you may want to call
         * `gtk_window_set_role()` on each window in your application, for the
         * benefit of the session manager. Setting the role allows the window
         * manager to restore window positions when loading a saved session.
         * @param wmclass_name window name hint
         * @param wmclass_class window class hint
         */
        set_wmclass(wmclass_name: string, wmclass_class: string): void;

        /**
         * Asks to stick `window`, which means that it will appear on all user
         * desktops. Note that you shouldn’t assume the window is definitely
         * stuck afterward, because other entities (e.g. the user or
         * [window manager][gtk-X11-arch] could unstick it
         * again, and some window managers do not support sticking
         * windows. But normally the window will end up stuck. Just don't
         * write code that crashes if not.
         * 
         * It’s permitted to call this function before showing a window.
         * 
         * You can track stickiness via the “window-state-event” signal
         * on {@link Gtk.Widget}.
         */
        stick(): void;

        /**
         * Asks to toggle off the fullscreen state for `window`. Note that you
         * shouldn’t assume the window is definitely not full screen
         * afterward, because other entities (e.g. the user or
         * [window manager][gtk-X11-arch]) could fullscreen it
         * again, and not all window managers honor requests to unfullscreen
         * windows. But normally the window will end up restored to its normal
         * state. Just don’t write code that crashes if not.
         * 
         * You can track the fullscreen state via the “window-state-event” signal
         * on {@link Gtk.Widget}.
         */
        unfullscreen(): void;

        /**
         * Asks to unmaximize `window`. Note that you shouldn’t assume the
         * window is definitely unmaximized afterward, because other entities
         * (e.g. the user or [window manager][gtk-X11-arch])
         * could maximize it again, and not all window
         * managers honor requests to unmaximize. But normally the window will
         * end up unmaximized. Just don’t write code that crashes if not.
         * 
         * You can track maximization via the “window-state-event” signal
         * on {@link Gtk.Widget}.
         */
        unmaximize(): void;

        /**
         * Asks to unstick `window`, which means that it will appear on only
         * one of the user’s desktops. Note that you shouldn’t assume the
         * window is definitely unstuck afterward, because other entities
         * (e.g. the user or [window manager][gtk-X11-arch]) could
         * stick it again. But normally the window will
         * end up unstuck. Just don’t write code that crashes if not.
         * 
         * You can track stickiness via the “window-state-event” signal
         * on {@link Gtk.Widget}.
         */
        unstick(): void;
    }


    namespace WindowAccessible {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends ContainerAccessible.SignalSignatures {
            "notify::widget": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-layer": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-component-mdi-zorder": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-help-text": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-hypertext-nlinks": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-id": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-name": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-parent": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-role": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-caption-object": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-column-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-description": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-row-header": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-table-summary": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
            "notify::accessible-value": (pspec: GObject.ParamSpec) => void;
        }

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends ContainerAccessible.ConstructorProps, Atk.Component.ConstructorProps, Atk.Window.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class WindowAccessible extends ContainerAccessible implements Atk.Component, Atk.Window {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<WindowAccessible>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: WindowAccessible.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<WindowAccessible.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof WindowAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, WindowAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof WindowAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, WindowAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof WindowAccessible.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<WindowAccessible.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;
    }


    namespace WindowGroup {
        // Signal signatures
        interface SignalSignatures extends GObject.Object.SignalSignatures {}

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.Object.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    /**
     * A {@link Gtk.WindowGroup} restricts the effect of grabs to windows
     * in the same group, thereby making window groups almost behave
     * like separate applications.
     * 
     * A window can be a member in at most one window group at a time.
     * Windows that have not been explicitly assigned to a group are
     * implicitly treated like windows of the default window group.
     * 
     * GtkWindowGroup objects are referenced by each window in the group,
     * so once you have added all windows to a GtkWindowGroup, you can drop
     * the initial reference to the window group with `g_object_unref()`. If the
     * windows in the window group are subsequently destroyed, then they will
     * be removed from the window group and drop their references on the window
     * group; when all window have been removed, the window group will be
     * freed.
     * @gir-type Class
     */
    class WindowGroup extends GObject.Object {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<WindowGroup>;

        /**
         * Compile-time signal type information.
         *
         * This instance property is generated only for TypeScript type checking.
         * It is not defined at runtime and should not be accessed in JS code.
         * @internal
         */
        $signals: WindowGroup.SignalSignatures;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<WindowGroup.ConstructorProps>, ...args: any[]);

        _init(...args: any[]): void;

        static ["new"](): WindowGroup;

        // Signals
        /** @signal */
        connect<K extends keyof WindowGroup.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, WindowGroup.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        connect_after<K extends keyof WindowGroup.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, callback: GObject.SignalCallback<this, WindowGroup.SignalSignatures[K]>): number;
        connect_after(signal: string, callback: (...args: any[]) => any): number;

        /** @signal */
        emit<K extends keyof WindowGroup.SignalSignatures>(signal: K, ...args: GObject.GjsParameters<WindowGroup.SignalSignatures[K]> extends [any, ...infer Q] ? Q : never): void;
        emit(signal: string, ...args: any[]): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Adds a window to a {@link Gtk.WindowGroup}.
         * @param window the {@link Gtk.Window} to add
         */
        add_window(window: Window): void;

        /**
         * Returns the current grab widget for `device`, or `null` if none.
         * @param device a {@link Gdk.Device}
         * @returns The grab widget, or `null`
         */
        get_current_device_grab(device: Gdk.Device): Widget | null;

        /**
         * Gets the current grab widget of the given group,
         * see `gtk_grab_add()`.
         * @returns the current grab widget of the group
         */
        get_current_grab(): Widget;

        /**
         * Returns a list of the `GtkWindows` that belong to `window_group`.
         * @returns A   newly-allocated list of windows inside the group.
         */
        list_windows(): Window[];

        /**
         * Removes a window from a {@link Gtk.WindowGroup}.
         * @param window the {@link Gtk.Window} to remove
         */
        remove_window(window: Window): void;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type AboutDialogClass = typeof AboutDialog;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class AboutDialogPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<AboutDialogPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type AccelGroupClass = typeof AccelGroup;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    class AccelGroupEntry {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<AccelGroupEntry>;

        // Fields
        accel_path_quark: GLib.Quark;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class AccelGroupPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<AccelGroupPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    class AccelKey {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<AccelKey>;

        // Fields
        accel_key: number;

        accel_mods: Gdk.ModifierType;

        accel_flags: number;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type AccelLabelClass = typeof AccelLabel;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class AccelLabelPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<AccelLabelPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type AccelMapClass = typeof AccelMap;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type AccessibleClass = typeof Accessible;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class AccessiblePrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<AccessiblePrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type ActionBarClass = typeof ActionBar;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class ActionBarPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ActionBarPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type ActionClass = typeof Action;

    /**
     * {@link Gtk.ActionEntry} structs are used with `gtk_action_group_add_actions()` to
     * construct actions.
     * @gir-type Struct
     * @deprecated since 3.10
     */
    class ActionEntry {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ActionEntry>;

        // Fields
        name: string;

        stock_id: string;

        label: string;

        accelerator: string;

        tooltip: string;

        callback: GObject.Callback;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type ActionGroupClass = typeof ActionGroup;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class ActionGroupPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ActionGroupPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class ActionPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ActionPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type ActionableInterface = typeof Actionable;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type ActivatableIface = typeof Activatable;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type AdjustmentClass = typeof Adjustment;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class AdjustmentPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<AdjustmentPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type AlignmentClass = typeof Alignment;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class AlignmentPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<AlignmentPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type AppChooserButtonClass = typeof AppChooserButton;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class AppChooserButtonPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<AppChooserButtonPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type AppChooserDialogClass = typeof AppChooserDialog;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class AppChooserDialogPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<AppChooserDialogPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type AppChooserWidgetClass = typeof AppChooserWidget;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class AppChooserWidgetPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<AppChooserWidgetPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type ApplicationClass = typeof Application;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class ApplicationPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ApplicationPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type ApplicationWindowClass = typeof ApplicationWindow;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class ApplicationWindowPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ApplicationWindowPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type ArrowAccessibleClass = typeof ArrowAccessible;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class ArrowAccessiblePrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ArrowAccessiblePrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type ArrowClass = typeof Arrow;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class ArrowPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ArrowPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type AspectFrameClass = typeof AspectFrame;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class AspectFramePrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<AspectFramePrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type AssistantClass = typeof Assistant;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class AssistantPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<AssistantPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type BinClass = typeof Bin;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class BinPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<BinPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * A {@link Gtk.BindingArg} holds the data associated with
     * an argument for a key binding signal emission as
     * stored in {@link Gtk.BindingSignal}.
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    class BindingArg {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<BindingArg>;

        // Fields
        arg_type: GObject.GType;
    }


    /**
     * Each key binding element of a binding sets binding list is
     * represented by a GtkBindingEntry.
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    class BindingEntry {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<BindingEntry>;

        // Fields
        keyval: number;

        modifiers: Gdk.ModifierType;

        destroyed: number;

        in_emission: number;

        marks_unbound: number;

        // Static methods
        /**
         * Parses a signal description from `signal_desc` and incorporates
         * it into `binding_set`.
         * 
         * Signal descriptions may either bind a key combination to
         * one or more signals:
         * 
         * ```
         *   bind "key" {
         *     "signalname" (param, ...)
         *     ...
         *   }
         * ```
         * 
         * 
         * Or they may also unbind a key combination:
         * 
         * ```
         *   unbind "key"
         * ```
         * 
         * 
         * Key combinations must be in a format that can be parsed by
         * `gtk_accelerator_parse()`.
         * @param binding_set a {@link Gtk.BindingSet}
         * @param signal_desc a signal description
         */
        static add_signal_from_string(binding_set: BindingSet, signal_desc: string): GLib.TokenType;

        /**
         * Override or install a new key binding for `keyval` with `modifiers` on
         * `binding_set`.
         * @param binding_set a {@link Gtk.BindingSet} to add a signal to
         * @param keyval key value
         * @param modifiers key modifier
         * @param signal_name signal name to be bound
         * @param binding_args list of {@link Gtk.BindingArg} signal arguments
         */
        static add_signall(binding_set: BindingSet, keyval: number, modifiers: Gdk.ModifierType, signal_name: string, binding_args: BindingArg[]): void;

        /**
         * Remove a binding previously installed via
         * `gtk_binding_entry_add_signal()` on `binding_set`.
         * @param binding_set a {@link Gtk.BindingSet} to remove an entry of
         * @param keyval key value of binding to remove
         * @param modifiers key modifier of binding to remove
         */
        static remove(binding_set: BindingSet, keyval: number, modifiers: Gdk.ModifierType): void;

        /**
         * Install a binding on `binding_set` which causes key lookups
         * to be aborted, to prevent bindings from lower priority sets
         * to be activated.
         * @param binding_set a {@link Gtk.BindingSet} to skip an entry of
         * @param keyval key value of binding to skip
         * @param modifiers key modifier of binding to skip
         */
        static skip(binding_set: BindingSet, keyval: number, modifiers: Gdk.ModifierType): void;
    }


    /**
     * A binding set maintains a list of activatable key bindings.
     * A single binding set can match multiple types of widgets.
     * Similar to style contexts, can be matched by any information contained
     * in a widgets {@link Gtk.WidgetPath}. When a binding within a set is matched upon
     * activation, an action signal is emitted on the target widget to carry out
     * the actual activation.
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    class BindingSet {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<BindingSet>;

        // Fields
        set_name: string;

        priority: number;

        widget_path_pspecs: null[];

        widget_class_pspecs: null[];

        class_branch_pspecs: null[];

        parsed: number;

        // Static methods
        /**
         * Find a binding set by its globally unique name.
         * 
         * The `set_name` can either be a name used for `gtk_binding_set_new()`
         * or the type name of a class used in `gtk_binding_set_by_class()`.
         * @param set_name unique binding set name
         */
        static find(set_name: string): BindingSet | null;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Find a key binding matching `keyval` and `modifiers` within
         * `binding_set` and activate the binding on `object`.
         * @param keyval key value of the binding
         * @param modifiers key modifier of the binding
         * @param object object to activate when binding found
         * @returns `true` if a binding was found and activated
         */
        activate(keyval: number, modifiers: Gdk.ModifierType, object: GObject.Object): boolean;

        /**
         * This function was used internally by the GtkRC parsing mechanism
         * to assign match patterns to {@link Gtk.BindingSet} structures.
         * 
         * In GTK+ 3, these match patterns are unused.
         * @param path_type path type the pattern applies to
         * @param path_pattern the actual match pattern
         * @param priority binding priority
         */
        add_path(path_type: PathType, path_pattern: string, priority: PathPriorityType): void;
    }


    /**
     * A GtkBindingSignal stores the necessary information to
     * activate a widget in response to a key press via a signal
     * emission.
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    class BindingSignal {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<BindingSignal>;

        // Fields
        signal_name: string;

        n_args: number;

        args: BindingArg[];
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type BooleanCellAccessibleClass = typeof BooleanCellAccessible;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class BooleanCellAccessiblePrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<BooleanCellAccessiblePrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * A struct that specifies a border around a rectangular area
     * that can be of different width on each side.
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    class Border {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<Border>;

        // Fields
        left: number;

        right: number;

        top: number;

        bottom: number;

        // Constructors

        constructor(properties?: Partial<{
            left: number;
            right: number;
            top: number;
            bottom: number;
        }>);

        static ["new"](): Border;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Copies a {@link Gtk.Border}-struct.
         * @returns a copy of `border_`.
         */
        copy(): Border;

        /**
         * Frees a {@link Gtk.Border}-struct.
         */
        free(): void;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type BoxClass = typeof Box;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class BoxPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<BoxPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type BuildableIface = typeof Buildable;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type BuilderClass = typeof Builder;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class BuilderPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<BuilderPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type ButtonAccessibleClass = typeof ButtonAccessible;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class ButtonAccessiblePrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ButtonAccessiblePrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type ButtonBoxClass = typeof ButtonBox;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class ButtonBoxPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ButtonBoxPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type ButtonClass = typeof Button;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class ButtonPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ButtonPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type CalendarClass = typeof Calendar;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class CalendarPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<CalendarPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type CellAccessibleClass = typeof CellAccessible;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type CellAccessibleParentIface = typeof CellAccessibleParent;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class CellAccessiblePrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<CellAccessiblePrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type CellAreaBoxClass = typeof CellAreaBox;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class CellAreaBoxPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<CellAreaBoxPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type CellAreaClass = typeof CellArea;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type CellAreaContextClass = typeof CellAreaContext;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class CellAreaContextPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<CellAreaContextPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class CellAreaPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<CellAreaPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type CellEditableIface = typeof CellEditable;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type CellLayoutIface = typeof CellLayout;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type CellRendererAccelClass = typeof CellRendererAccel;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class CellRendererAccelPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<CellRendererAccelPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type CellRendererClass = typeof CellRenderer;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class CellRendererClassPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<CellRendererClassPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type CellRendererComboClass = typeof CellRendererCombo;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class CellRendererComboPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<CellRendererComboPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type CellRendererPixbufClass = typeof CellRendererPixbuf;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class CellRendererPixbufPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<CellRendererPixbufPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class CellRendererPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<CellRendererPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type CellRendererProgressClass = typeof CellRendererProgress;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class CellRendererProgressPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<CellRendererProgressPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type CellRendererSpinClass = typeof CellRendererSpin;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class CellRendererSpinPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<CellRendererSpinPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type CellRendererSpinnerClass = typeof CellRendererSpinner;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class CellRendererSpinnerPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<CellRendererSpinnerPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type CellRendererTextClass = typeof CellRendererText;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class CellRendererTextPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<CellRendererTextPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type CellRendererToggleClass = typeof CellRendererToggle;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class CellRendererTogglePrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<CellRendererTogglePrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type CellViewClass = typeof CellView;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class CellViewPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<CellViewPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type CheckButtonClass = typeof CheckButton;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type CheckMenuItemAccessibleClass = typeof CheckMenuItemAccessible;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class CheckMenuItemAccessiblePrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<CheckMenuItemAccessiblePrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type CheckMenuItemClass = typeof CheckMenuItem;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class CheckMenuItemPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<CheckMenuItemPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type ColorButtonClass = typeof ColorButton;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class ColorButtonPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ColorButtonPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type ColorChooserDialogClass = typeof ColorChooserDialog;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class ColorChooserDialogPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ColorChooserDialogPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type ColorChooserInterface = typeof ColorChooser;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type ColorChooserWidgetClass = typeof ColorChooserWidget;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class ColorChooserWidgetPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ColorChooserWidgetPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type ColorSelectionClass = typeof ColorSelection;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type ColorSelectionDialogClass = typeof ColorSelectionDialog;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class ColorSelectionDialogPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ColorSelectionDialogPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class ColorSelectionPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ColorSelectionPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type ComboBoxAccessibleClass = typeof ComboBoxAccessible;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class ComboBoxAccessiblePrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ComboBoxAccessiblePrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type ComboBoxClass = typeof ComboBox;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class ComboBoxPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ComboBoxPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type ComboBoxTextClass = typeof ComboBoxText;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class ComboBoxTextPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ComboBoxTextPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type ContainerAccessibleClass = typeof ContainerAccessible;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class ContainerAccessiblePrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ContainerAccessiblePrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type ContainerCellAccessibleClass = typeof ContainerCellAccessible;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class ContainerCellAccessiblePrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ContainerCellAccessiblePrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type ContainerClass = typeof Container;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class ContainerPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ContainerPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type CssProviderClass = typeof CssProvider;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class CssProviderPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<CssProviderPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * Defines a part of a CSS document. Because sections are nested into
     * one another, you can use `gtk_css_section_get_parent()` to get the
     * containing region.
     * @gir-type Struct
     * @since 3.2
     */
    abstract class CssSection {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<CssSection>;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Returns the line in the CSS document where this section end.
         * The line number is 0-indexed, so the first line of the document
         * will return 0.
         * This value may change in future invocations of this function if
         * `section` is not yet parsed completely. This will for example
         * happen in the GtkCssProvider::parsing-error signal.
         * The end position and line may be identical to the start
         * position and line for sections which failed to parse anything
         * successfully.
         * @returns the line number
         */
        get_end_line(): number;

        /**
         * Returns the offset in bytes from the start of the current line
         * returned via `gtk_css_section_get_end_line()`.
         * This value may change in future invocations of this function if
         * `section` is not yet parsed completely. This will for example
         * happen in the GtkCssProvider::parsing-error signal.
         * The end position and line may be identical to the start
         * position and line for sections which failed to parse anything
         * successfully.
         * @returns the offset in bytes from the start of the line.
         */
        get_end_position(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the file that `section` was parsed from. If no such file exists,
         * for example because the CSS was loaded via
         * `gtk_css_provider_load_from_data`(), then `null` is returned.
         * @returns the {@link Gio.File} that `section` was parsed from     or `null` if `section` was parsed from other data
         */
        get_file(): Gio.File;

        /**
         * Gets the parent section for the given `section`. The parent section is
         * the section that contains this `section`. A special case are sections of
         * type #GTK_CSS_SECTION_DOCUMENT. Their parent will either be `null`
         * if they are the original CSS document that was loaded by
         * `gtk_css_provider_load_from_file()` or a section of type
         * #GTK_CSS_SECTION_IMPORT if it was loaded with an import rule from
         * a different file.
         * @returns the parent section or `null` if none
         */
        get_parent(): CssSection | null;

        /**
         * Gets the type of information that `section` describes.
         * @returns the type of `section`
         */
        get_section_type(): CssSectionType;

        /**
         * Returns the line in the CSS document where this section starts.
         * The line number is 0-indexed, so the first line of the document
         * will return 0.
         * @returns the line number
         */
        get_start_line(): number;

        /**
         * Returns the offset in bytes from the start of the current line
         * returned via `gtk_css_section_get_start_line()`.
         * @returns the offset in bytes from the start of the line.
         */
        get_start_position(): number;

        /**
         * Increments the reference count on `section`.
         * @returns `section` itself.
         */
        ref(): CssSection;

        /**
         * Decrements the reference count on `section`, freeing the
         * structure if the reference count reaches 0.
         */
        unref(): void;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type DialogClass = typeof Dialog;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class DialogPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<DialogPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type DrawingAreaClass = typeof DrawingArea;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type EditableInterface = typeof Editable;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type EntryAccessibleClass = typeof EntryAccessible;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class EntryAccessiblePrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<EntryAccessiblePrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type EntryBufferClass = typeof EntryBuffer;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class EntryBufferPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<EntryBufferPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type EntryClass = typeof Entry;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type EntryCompletionClass = typeof EntryCompletion;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class EntryCompletionPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<EntryCompletionPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class EntryPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<EntryPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type EventBoxClass = typeof EventBox;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class EventBoxPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<EventBoxPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type EventControllerClass = typeof EventController;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type EventControllerKeyClass = typeof EventControllerKey;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type EventControllerMotionClass = typeof EventControllerMotion;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type EventControllerScrollClass = typeof EventControllerScroll;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type ExpanderAccessibleClass = typeof ExpanderAccessible;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class ExpanderAccessiblePrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ExpanderAccessiblePrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type ExpanderClass = typeof Expander;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class ExpanderPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ExpanderPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type FileChooserButtonClass = typeof FileChooserButton;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class FileChooserButtonPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<FileChooserButtonPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type FileChooserDialogClass = typeof FileChooserDialog;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class FileChooserDialogPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<FileChooserDialogPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type FileChooserNativeClass = typeof FileChooserNative;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type FileChooserWidgetAccessibleClass = typeof FileChooserWidgetAccessible;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class FileChooserWidgetAccessiblePrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<FileChooserWidgetAccessiblePrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type FileChooserWidgetClass = typeof FileChooserWidget;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class FileChooserWidgetPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<FileChooserWidgetPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * A {@link Gtk.FileFilterInfo}-struct is used to pass information about the
     * tested file to `gtk_file_filter_filter()`.
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    class FileFilterInfo {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<FileFilterInfo>;

        // Fields
        contains: FileFilterFlags;

        filename: string;

        uri: string;

        display_name: string;

        mime_type: string;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    class FixedChild {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<FixedChild>;

        // Fields
        widget: Widget;

        x: number;

        y: number;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type FixedClass = typeof Fixed;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class FixedPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<FixedPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type FlowBoxAccessibleClass = typeof FlowBoxAccessible;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class FlowBoxAccessiblePrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<FlowBoxAccessiblePrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type FlowBoxChildAccessibleClass = typeof FlowBoxChildAccessible;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type FlowBoxChildClass = typeof FlowBoxChild;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type FlowBoxClass = typeof FlowBox;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type FontButtonClass = typeof FontButton;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class FontButtonPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<FontButtonPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type FontChooserDialogClass = typeof FontChooserDialog;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class FontChooserDialogPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<FontChooserDialogPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type FontChooserIface = typeof FontChooser;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type FontChooserWidgetClass = typeof FontChooserWidget;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class FontChooserWidgetPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<FontChooserWidgetPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type FontSelectionClass = typeof FontSelection;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type FontSelectionDialogClass = typeof FontSelectionDialog;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class FontSelectionDialogPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<FontSelectionDialogPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class FontSelectionPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<FontSelectionPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type FrameAccessibleClass = typeof FrameAccessible;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class FrameAccessiblePrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<FrameAccessiblePrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type FrameClass = typeof Frame;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class FramePrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<FramePrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type GLAreaClass = typeof GLArea;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type GestureClass = typeof Gesture;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type GestureDragClass = typeof GestureDrag;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type GestureLongPressClass = typeof GestureLongPress;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type GestureMultiPressClass = typeof GestureMultiPress;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type GesturePanClass = typeof GesturePan;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type GestureRotateClass = typeof GestureRotate;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type GestureSingleClass = typeof GestureSingle;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type GestureStylusClass = typeof GestureStylus;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type GestureSwipeClass = typeof GestureSwipe;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type GestureZoomClass = typeof GestureZoom;

    /**
     * GtkGradient is a boxed type that represents a gradient.
     * It is the result of parsing a
     * [gradient expression][gtkcssprovider-gradients].
     * To obtain the gradient represented by a GtkGradient, it has to
     * be resolved with `gtk_gradient_resolve()`, which replaces all
     * symbolic color references by the colors they refer to (in a given
     * context) and constructs a {@link cairo.Pattern} value.
     * 
     * It is not normally necessary to deal directly with `GtkGradients`,
     * since they are mostly used behind the scenes by {@link Gtk.StyleContext} and
     * {@link Gtk.CssProvider}.
     * 
     * {@link Gtk.Gradient} is deprecated. It was used internally by GTK’s CSS engine
     * to represent gradients. As its handling is not conforming to modern
     * web standards, it is not used anymore. If you want to use gradients in
     * your own code, please use Cairo directly.
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    class Gradient {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<Gradient>;

        // Constructors
        constructor(x0: number, y0: number, x1: number, y1: number);

        static new_linear(x0: number, y0: number, x1: number, y1: number): Gradient;

        static new_radial(x0: number, y0: number, radius0: number, x1: number, y1: number, radius1: number): Gradient;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Adds a stop color to `gradient`.
         * @param offset offset for the color stop
         * @param color color to use
         */
        add_color_stop(offset: number, color: SymbolicColor): void;

        /**
         * Increases the reference count of `gradient`.
         * @returns The same `gradient`
         */
        ref(): Gradient;

        /**
         * If `gradient` is resolvable, `resolved_gradient` will be filled in
         * with the resolved gradient as a cairo_pattern_t, and `true` will
         * be returned. Generally, if `gradient` can’t be resolved, it is
         * due to it being defined on top of a named color that doesn't
         * exist in `props`.
         * @param props {@link Gtk.StyleProperties} to use when resolving named colors
         * @returns `true` if the gradient has been resolved
         */
        resolve(props: StyleProperties): [boolean, cairo.Pattern];

        /**
         * @param context 
         */
        resolve_for_context(context: StyleContext): cairo.Pattern;

        /**
         * Creates a string representation for `gradient` that is suitable
         * for using in GTK CSS files.
         * @returns A string representation for `gradient`
         */
        to_string(): string;

        /**
         * Decreases the reference count of `gradient`, freeing its memory
         * if the reference count reaches 0.
         */
        unref(): void;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type GridClass = typeof Grid;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class GridPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<GridPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type HBoxClass = typeof HBox;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type HButtonBoxClass = typeof HButtonBox;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type HPanedClass = typeof HPaned;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type HSVClass = typeof HSV;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class HSVPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<HSVPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type HScaleClass = typeof HScale;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type HScrollbarClass = typeof HScrollbar;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type HSeparatorClass = typeof HSeparator;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type HandleBoxClass = typeof HandleBox;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class HandleBoxPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<HandleBoxPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type HeaderBarAccessibleClass = typeof HeaderBarAccessible;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class HeaderBarAccessiblePrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<HeaderBarAccessiblePrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type HeaderBarClass = typeof HeaderBar;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class HeaderBarPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<HeaderBarPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type IMContextClass = typeof IMContext;

    /**
     * Bookkeeping information about a loadable input method.
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    class IMContextInfo {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<IMContextInfo>;

        // Fields
        context_id: string;

        context_name: string;

        domain: string;

        domain_dirname: string;

        default_locales: string;

        // Constructors

        constructor(properties?: Partial<{
            context_id: string;
            context_name: string;
            domain: string;
            domain_dirname: string;
            default_locales: string;
        }>);
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type IMContextSimpleClass = typeof IMContextSimple;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class IMContextSimplePrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<IMContextSimplePrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type IMMulticontextClass = typeof IMMulticontext;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class IMMulticontextPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<IMMulticontextPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type IconFactoryClass = typeof IconFactory;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class IconFactoryPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<IconFactoryPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type IconInfoClass = typeof IconInfo;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    class IconSet {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<IconSet>;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<{}>);

        static ["new"](): IconSet;

        static new_from_pixbuf(pixbuf: GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf): IconSet;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Icon sets have a list of {@link Gtk.IconSource}, which they use as base
         * icons for rendering icons in different states and sizes. Icons are
         * scaled, made to look insensitive, etc. in
         * `gtk_icon_set_render_icon()`, but {@link Gtk.IconSet} needs base images to
         * work with. The base images and when to use them are described by
         * a {@link Gtk.IconSource}.
         * 
         * This function copies `source`, so you can reuse the same source immediately
         * without affecting the icon set.
         * 
         * An example of when you’d use this function: a web browser’s "Back
         * to Previous Page" icon might point in a different direction in
         * Hebrew and in English; it might look different when insensitive;
         * and it might change size depending on toolbar mode (small/large
         * icons). So a single icon set would contain all those variants of
         * the icon, and you might add a separate source for each one.
         * 
         * You should nearly always add a “default” icon source with all
         * fields wildcarded, which will be used as a fallback if no more
         * specific source matches. {@link Gtk.IconSet} always prefers more specific
         * icon sources to more generic icon sources. The order in which you
         * add the sources to the icon set does not matter.
         * 
         * `gtk_icon_set_new_from_pixbuf()` creates a new icon set with a
         * default icon source based on the given pixbuf.
         * @param source a {@link Gtk.IconSource}
         */
        add_source(source: IconSource): void;

        /**
         * Copies `icon_set` by value.
         * @returns a new {@link Gtk.IconSet} identical to the first.
         */
        copy(): IconSet;

        /**
         * Obtains a list of icon sizes this icon set can render. The returned
         * array must be freed with `g_free()`.
         */
        get_sizes(): number[];

        /**
         * Increments the reference count on `icon_set`.
         * @returns `icon_set`.
         */
        ref(): IconSet;

        /**
         * Renders an icon using `gtk_style_render_icon()`. In most cases,
         * `gtk_widget_render_icon()` is better, since it automatically provides
         * most of the arguments from the current widget settings.  This
         * function never returns `null`; if the icon can’t be rendered
         * (perhaps because an image file fails to load), a default "missing
         * image" icon will be returned instead.
         * @param style a {@link Gtk.Style} associated with `widget`, or `null`
         * @param direction text direction
         * @param state widget state
         * @param size icon size ({@link Gtk.IconSize}). A size of `(GtkIconSize)-1`        means render at the size of the source and don’t scale.
         * @param widget widget that will display the icon, or `null`.          The only use that is typically made of this          is to determine the appropriate {@link Gdk.Screen}.
         * @param detail detail to pass to the theme engine, or `null`.          Note that passing a detail of anything but `null`          will disable caching.
         * @returns a {@link GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf} to be displayed
         */
        render_icon(style: Style | null, direction: TextDirection, state: StateType, size: number, widget: Widget | null, detail: string | null): GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf;

        /**
         * Renders an icon using `gtk_render_icon_pixbuf()`. In most cases,
         * `gtk_widget_render_icon_pixbuf()` is better, since it automatically provides
         * most of the arguments from the current widget settings.  This
         * function never returns `null`; if the icon can’t be rendered
         * (perhaps because an image file fails to load), a default "missing
         * image" icon will be returned instead.
         * @param context a {@link Gtk.StyleContext}
         * @param size icon size ({@link Gtk.IconSize}). A size of `(GtkIconSize)-1`        means render at the size of the source and don’t scale.
         * @returns a {@link GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf} to be displayed
         */
        render_icon_pixbuf(context: StyleContext, size: number): GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf;

        /**
         * Renders an icon using `gtk_render_icon_pixbuf()` and converts it to a
         * cairo surface.
         * 
         * This function never returns `null`; if the icon can’t be rendered
         * (perhaps because an image file fails to load), a default "missing
         * image" icon will be returned instead.
         * @param context a {@link Gtk.StyleContext}
         * @param size icon size ({@link Gtk.IconSize}). A size of `(GtkIconSize)-1`        means render at the size of the source and don’t scale.
         * @param scale the window scale to render for
         * @param for_window {@link Gdk.Window} to optimize drawing for, or `null`
         * @returns a {@link cairo.Surface} to be displayed
         */
        render_icon_surface(context: StyleContext, size: number, scale: number, for_window: Gdk.Window | null): cairo.Surface;

        /**
         * Decrements the reference count on `icon_set`, and frees memory
         * if the reference count reaches 0.
         */
        unref(): void;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    class IconSource {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<IconSource>;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<{}>);

        static ["new"](): IconSource;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Creates a copy of `source`; mostly useful for language bindings.
         * @returns a new {@link Gtk.IconSource}
         */
        copy(): IconSource;

        /**
         * Frees a dynamically-allocated icon source, along with its
         * filename, size, and pixbuf fields if those are not `null`.
         */
        free(): void;

        /**
         * Obtains the text direction this icon source applies to. The return
         * value is only useful/meaningful if the text direction is not
         * wildcarded.
         * @returns text direction this source matches
         */
        get_direction(): TextDirection;

        /**
         * Gets the value set by `gtk_icon_source_set_direction_wildcarded()`.
         * @returns `true` if this icon source is a base for any text direction variant
         */
        get_direction_wildcarded(): boolean;

        /**
         * Retrieves the source filename, or `null` if none is set. The
         * filename is not a copy, and should not be modified or expected to
         * persist beyond the lifetime of the icon source.
         * @returns image filename. This string must not be modified or freed.
         */
        get_filename(): string;

        /**
         * Retrieves the source icon name, or `null` if none is set. The
         * icon_name is not a copy, and should not be modified or expected to
         * persist beyond the lifetime of the icon source.
         * @returns icon name. This string must not be modified or freed.
         */
        get_icon_name(): string;

        /**
         * Retrieves the source pixbuf, or `null` if none is set.
         * In addition, if a filename source is in use, this
         * function in some cases will return the pixbuf from
         * loaded from the filename. This is, for example, true
         * for the GtkIconSource passed to the {@link Gtk.Style} `render_icon()`
         * virtual function. The reference count on the pixbuf is
         * not incremented.
         * @returns source pixbuf
         */
        get_pixbuf(): GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf;

        /**
         * Obtains the icon size this source applies to. The return value
         * is only useful/meaningful if the icon size is not wildcarded.
         * @returns icon size ({@link Gtk.IconSize}) this source matches.
         */
        get_size(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the value set by `gtk_icon_source_set_size_wildcarded()`.
         * @returns `true` if this icon source is a base for any icon size variant
         */
        get_size_wildcarded(): boolean;

        /**
         * Obtains the widget state this icon source applies to. The return
         * value is only useful/meaningful if the widget state is not
         * wildcarded.
         * @returns widget state this source matches
         */
        get_state(): StateType;

        /**
         * Gets the value set by `gtk_icon_source_set_state_wildcarded()`.
         * @returns `true` if this icon source is a base for any widget state variant
         */
        get_state_wildcarded(): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the text direction this icon source is intended to be used
         * with.
         * 
         * Setting the text direction on an icon source makes no difference
         * if the text direction is wildcarded. Therefore, you should usually
         * call `gtk_icon_source_set_direction_wildcarded()` to un-wildcard it
         * in addition to calling this function.
         * @param direction text direction this source applies to
         */
        set_direction(direction: TextDirection): void;

        /**
         * If the text direction is wildcarded, this source can be used
         * as the base image for an icon in any {@link Gtk.TextDirection}.
         * If the text direction is not wildcarded, then the
         * text direction the icon source applies to should be set
         * with `gtk_icon_source_set_direction()`, and the icon source
         * will only be used with that text direction.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.IconSet} prefers non-wildcarded sources (exact matches) over
         * wildcarded sources, and will use an exact match when possible.
         * @param setting `true` to wildcard the text direction
         */
        set_direction_wildcarded(setting: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the name of an image file to use as a base image when creating
         * icon variants for {@link Gtk.IconSet}. The filename must be absolute.
         * @param filename image file to use
         */
        set_filename(filename: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets the name of an icon to look up in the current icon theme
         * to use as a base image when creating icon variants for {@link Gtk.IconSet}.
         * @param icon_name name of icon to use
         */
        set_icon_name(icon_name: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets a pixbuf to use as a base image when creating icon variants
         * for {@link Gtk.IconSet}.
         * @param pixbuf pixbuf to use as a source
         */
        set_pixbuf(pixbuf: GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf): void;

        /**
         * Sets the icon size this icon source is intended to be used
         * with.
         * 
         * Setting the icon size on an icon source makes no difference
         * if the size is wildcarded. Therefore, you should usually
         * call `gtk_icon_source_set_size_wildcarded()` to un-wildcard it
         * in addition to calling this function.
         * @param size icon size ({@link Gtk.IconSize}) this source applies to
         */
        set_size(size: number): void;

        /**
         * If the icon size is wildcarded, this source can be used as the base
         * image for an icon of any size.  If the size is not wildcarded, then
         * the size the source applies to should be set with
         * `gtk_icon_source_set_size()` and the icon source will only be used
         * with that specific size.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.IconSet} prefers non-wildcarded sources (exact matches) over
         * wildcarded sources, and will use an exact match when possible.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.IconSet} will normally scale wildcarded source images to produce
         * an appropriate icon at a given size, but will not change the size
         * of source images that match exactly.
         * @param setting `true` to wildcard the widget state
         */
        set_size_wildcarded(setting: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the widget state this icon source is intended to be used
         * with.
         * 
         * Setting the widget state on an icon source makes no difference
         * if the state is wildcarded. Therefore, you should usually
         * call `gtk_icon_source_set_state_wildcarded()` to un-wildcard it
         * in addition to calling this function.
         * @param state widget state this source applies to
         */
        set_state(state: StateType): void;

        /**
         * If the widget state is wildcarded, this source can be used as the
         * base image for an icon in any {@link Gtk.StateType}.  If the widget state
         * is not wildcarded, then the state the source applies to should be
         * set with `gtk_icon_source_set_state()` and the icon source will
         * only be used with that specific state.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.IconSet} prefers non-wildcarded sources (exact matches) over
         * wildcarded sources, and will use an exact match when possible.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.IconSet} will normally transform wildcarded source images to
         * produce an appropriate icon for a given state, for example
         * lightening an image on prelight, but will not modify source images
         * that match exactly.
         * @param setting `true` to wildcard the widget state
         */
        set_state_wildcarded(setting: boolean): void;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type IconThemeClass = typeof IconTheme;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class IconThemePrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<IconThemePrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type IconViewAccessibleClass = typeof IconViewAccessible;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class IconViewAccessiblePrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<IconViewAccessiblePrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type IconViewClass = typeof IconView;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class IconViewPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<IconViewPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type ImageAccessibleClass = typeof ImageAccessible;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class ImageAccessiblePrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ImageAccessiblePrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type ImageCellAccessibleClass = typeof ImageCellAccessible;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class ImageCellAccessiblePrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ImageCellAccessiblePrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type ImageClass = typeof Image;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type ImageMenuItemClass = typeof ImageMenuItem;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class ImageMenuItemPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ImageMenuItemPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class ImagePrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ImagePrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type InfoBarClass = typeof InfoBar;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class InfoBarPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<InfoBarPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type InvisibleClass = typeof Invisible;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class InvisiblePrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<InvisiblePrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type LabelAccessibleClass = typeof LabelAccessible;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class LabelAccessiblePrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<LabelAccessiblePrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type LabelClass = typeof Label;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class LabelPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<LabelPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class LabelSelectionInfo {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<LabelSelectionInfo>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type LayoutClass = typeof Layout;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class LayoutPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<LayoutPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type LevelBarAccessibleClass = typeof LevelBarAccessible;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class LevelBarAccessiblePrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<LevelBarAccessiblePrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type LevelBarClass = typeof LevelBar;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class LevelBarPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<LevelBarPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type LinkButtonAccessibleClass = typeof LinkButtonAccessible;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class LinkButtonAccessiblePrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<LinkButtonAccessiblePrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type LinkButtonClass = typeof LinkButton;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class LinkButtonPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<LinkButtonPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type ListBoxAccessibleClass = typeof ListBoxAccessible;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class ListBoxAccessiblePrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ListBoxAccessiblePrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type ListBoxClass = typeof ListBox;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type ListBoxRowAccessibleClass = typeof ListBoxRowAccessible;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type ListBoxRowClass = typeof ListBoxRow;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type ListStoreClass = typeof ListStore;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class ListStorePrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ListStorePrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type LockButtonAccessibleClass = typeof LockButtonAccessible;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class LockButtonAccessiblePrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<LockButtonAccessiblePrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type LockButtonClass = typeof LockButton;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class LockButtonPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<LockButtonPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type MenuAccessibleClass = typeof MenuAccessible;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class MenuAccessiblePrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<MenuAccessiblePrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type MenuBarClass = typeof MenuBar;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class MenuBarPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<MenuBarPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type MenuButtonAccessibleClass = typeof MenuButtonAccessible;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class MenuButtonAccessiblePrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<MenuButtonAccessiblePrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type MenuButtonClass = typeof MenuButton;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class MenuButtonPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<MenuButtonPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type MenuClass = typeof Menu;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type MenuItemAccessibleClass = typeof MenuItemAccessible;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class MenuItemAccessiblePrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<MenuItemAccessiblePrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type MenuItemClass = typeof MenuItem;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class MenuItemPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<MenuItemPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class MenuPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<MenuPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type MenuShellAccessibleClass = typeof MenuShellAccessible;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class MenuShellAccessiblePrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<MenuShellAccessiblePrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type MenuShellClass = typeof MenuShell;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class MenuShellPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<MenuShellPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type MenuToolButtonClass = typeof MenuToolButton;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class MenuToolButtonPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<MenuToolButtonPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type MessageDialogClass = typeof MessageDialog;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class MessageDialogPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<MessageDialogPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type MiscClass = typeof Misc;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class MiscPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<MiscPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type MountOperationClass = typeof MountOperation;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class MountOperationPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<MountOperationPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type NativeDialogClass = typeof NativeDialog;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type NotebookAccessibleClass = typeof NotebookAccessible;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class NotebookAccessiblePrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<NotebookAccessiblePrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type NotebookClass = typeof Notebook;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type NotebookPageAccessibleClass = typeof NotebookPageAccessible;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class NotebookPageAccessiblePrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<NotebookPageAccessiblePrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class NotebookPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<NotebookPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type NumerableIconClass = typeof NumerableIcon;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class NumerableIconPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<NumerableIconPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type OffscreenWindowClass = typeof OffscreenWindow;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type OrientableIface = typeof Orientable;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type OverlayClass = typeof Overlay;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class OverlayPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<OverlayPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * Struct defining a pad action entry.
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    class PadActionEntry {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<PadActionEntry>;

        // Fields
        type: PadActionType;

        index: number;

        mode: number;

        label: string;

        action_name: string;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type PadControllerClass = typeof PadController;

    /**
     * See also `gtk_print_settings_set_page_ranges()`.
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    class PageRange {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<PageRange>;

        // Fields
        start: number;

        end: number;

        // Constructors

        constructor(properties?: Partial<{
            start: number;
            end: number;
        }>);
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type PanedAccessibleClass = typeof PanedAccessible;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class PanedAccessiblePrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<PanedAccessiblePrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type PanedClass = typeof Paned;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class PanedPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<PanedPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * GtkPaperSize handles paper sizes. It uses the standard called
     * [PWG 5101.1-2002 PWG: Standard for Media Standardized Names](http://www.pwg.org/standards.html)
     * to name the paper sizes (and to get the data for the page sizes).
     * In addition to standard paper sizes, GtkPaperSize allows to
     * construct custom paper sizes with arbitrary dimensions.
     * 
     * The {@link Gtk.PaperSize} object stores not only the dimensions (width
     * and height) of a paper size and its name, it also provides
     * default [print margins][print-margins].
     * 
     * Printing support has been added in GTK+ 2.10.
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    class PaperSize {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<PaperSize>;

        // Constructors
        constructor(name: string | null);

        static ["new"](name: string | null): PaperSize;

        static new_custom(name: string, display_name: string, width: number, height: number, unit: Unit): PaperSize;

        static new_from_gvariant(variant: GLib.Variant): PaperSize;

        static new_from_ipp(ipp_name: string, width: number, height: number): PaperSize;

        static new_from_key_file(key_file: GLib.KeyFile, group_name: string | null): PaperSize;

        static new_from_ppd(ppd_name: string, ppd_display_name: string, width: number, height: number): PaperSize;

        // Static methods
        /**
         * Returns the name of the default paper size, which
         * depends on the current locale.
         */
        static get_default(): string;

        /**
         * Creates a list of known paper sizes.
         * @param include_custom whether to include custom paper sizes     as defined in the page setup dialog
         */
        static get_paper_sizes(include_custom: boolean): PaperSize[];

        // Methods
        /**
         * Copies an existing {@link Gtk.PaperSize}.
         * @returns a copy of `other`
         */
        copy(): PaperSize;

        /**
         * Free the given {@link Gtk.PaperSize} object.
         */
        free(): void;

        /**
         * Gets the default bottom margin for the {@link Gtk.PaperSize}.
         * @param unit the unit for the return value, not {@link Gtk.Unit.NONE}
         * @returns the default bottom margin
         */
        get_default_bottom_margin(unit: Unit): number;

        /**
         * Gets the default left margin for the {@link Gtk.PaperSize}.
         * @param unit the unit for the return value, not {@link Gtk.Unit.NONE}
         * @returns the default left margin
         */
        get_default_left_margin(unit: Unit): number;

        /**
         * Gets the default right margin for the {@link Gtk.PaperSize}.
         * @param unit the unit for the return value, not {@link Gtk.Unit.NONE}
         * @returns the default right margin
         */
        get_default_right_margin(unit: Unit): number;

        /**
         * Gets the default top margin for the {@link Gtk.PaperSize}.
         * @param unit the unit for the return value, not {@link Gtk.Unit.NONE}
         * @returns the default top margin
         */
        get_default_top_margin(unit: Unit): number;

        /**
         * Gets the human-readable name of the {@link Gtk.PaperSize}.
         * @returns the human-readable name of `size`
         */
        get_display_name(): string;

        /**
         * Gets the paper height of the {@link Gtk.PaperSize}, in
         * units of `unit`.
         * @param unit the unit for the return value, not {@link Gtk.Unit.NONE}
         * @returns the paper height
         */
        get_height(unit: Unit): number;

        /**
         * Gets the name of the {@link Gtk.PaperSize}.
         * @returns the name of `size`
         */
        get_name(): string;

        /**
         * Gets the PPD name of the {@link Gtk.PaperSize}, which
         * may be `null`.
         * @returns the PPD name of `size`
         */
        get_ppd_name(): string;

        /**
         * Gets the paper width of the {@link Gtk.PaperSize}, in
         * units of `unit`.
         * @param unit the unit for the return value, not {@link Gtk.Unit.NONE}
         * @returns the paper width
         */
        get_width(unit: Unit): number;

        /**
         * Returns `true` if `size` is not a standard paper size.
         * @returns whether `size` is a custom paper size.
         */
        is_custom(): boolean;

        /**
         * Compares two {@link Gtk.PaperSize} objects.
         * @param size2 another {@link Gtk.PaperSize} object
         * @returns `true`, if `size1` and `size2` represent the same paper size
         */
        is_equal(size2: PaperSize): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns `true` if `size` is an IPP standard paper size.
         * @returns whether `size` is not an IPP custom paper size.
         */
        is_ipp(): boolean;

        /**
         * Changes the dimensions of a `size` to `width` x `height`.
         * @param width the new width in units of `unit`
         * @param height the new height in units of `unit`
         * @param unit the unit for `width` and `height`
         */
        set_size(width: number, height: number, unit: Unit): void;

        /**
         * Serialize a paper size to an a{sv} variant.
         * @returns a new, floating, {@link GLib.Variant}
         */
        to_gvariant(): GLib.Variant;

        /**
         * This function adds the paper size from `size` to `key_file`.
         * @param key_file the {@link GLib.KeyFile} to save the paper size to
         * @param group_name the group to add the settings to in `key_file`
         */
        to_key_file(key_file: GLib.KeyFile, group_name: string): void;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type PlacesSidebarClass = typeof PlacesSidebar;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type PlugAccessibleClass = typeof PlugAccessible;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class PlugAccessiblePrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<PlugAccessiblePrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type PlugClass = typeof Plug;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class PlugPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<PlugPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type PopoverAccessibleClass = typeof PopoverAccessible;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type PopoverClass = typeof Popover;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type PopoverMenuClass = typeof PopoverMenu;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class PopoverPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<PopoverPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type PrintOperationClass = typeof PrintOperation;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type PrintOperationPreviewIface = typeof PrintOperationPreview;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class PrintOperationPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<PrintOperationPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type ProgressBarAccessibleClass = typeof ProgressBarAccessible;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class ProgressBarAccessiblePrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ProgressBarAccessiblePrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type ProgressBarClass = typeof ProgressBar;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class ProgressBarPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ProgressBarPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type RadioActionClass = typeof RadioAction;

    /**
     * {@link Gtk.RadioActionEntry} structs are used with
     * `gtk_action_group_add_radio_actions()` to construct groups of radio actions.
     * @gir-type Struct
     * @deprecated since 3.10
     */
    class RadioActionEntry {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<RadioActionEntry>;

        // Fields
        name: string;

        stock_id: string;

        label: string;

        accelerator: string;

        tooltip: string;

        value: number;

        // Constructors

        constructor(properties?: Partial<{
            name: string;
            stock_id: string;
            label: string;
            accelerator: string;
            tooltip: string;
            value: number;
        }>);
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class RadioActionPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<RadioActionPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type RadioButtonAccessibleClass = typeof RadioButtonAccessible;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class RadioButtonAccessiblePrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<RadioButtonAccessiblePrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type RadioButtonClass = typeof RadioButton;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class RadioButtonPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<RadioButtonPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type RadioMenuItemAccessibleClass = typeof RadioMenuItemAccessible;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class RadioMenuItemAccessiblePrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<RadioMenuItemAccessiblePrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type RadioMenuItemClass = typeof RadioMenuItem;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class RadioMenuItemPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<RadioMenuItemPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type RadioToolButtonClass = typeof RadioToolButton;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type RangeAccessibleClass = typeof RangeAccessible;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class RangeAccessiblePrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<RangeAccessiblePrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type RangeClass = typeof Range;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class RangePrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<RangePrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class RcContext {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<RcContext>;
    }


    /**
     * Deprecated
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    class RcProperty {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<RcProperty>;

        // Fields
        type_name: GLib.Quark;

        property_name: GLib.Quark;

        origin: string;

        // Static methods
        /**
         * A {@link Gtk.RcPropertyParser} for use with `gtk_settings_install_property_parser()`
         * or `gtk_widget_class_install_style_property_parser()` which parses
         * borders in the form
         * `"{ left, right, top, bottom }"` for integers
         * left, right, top and bottom.
         * @param pspec a {@link GObject.ParamSpec}
         * @param gstring the {@link GLib.String} to be parsed
         * @param property_value a {@link GObject.Value} which must hold boxed values.
         */
        static parse_border(pspec: GObject.ParamSpec, gstring: GLib.String, property_value: GObject.Value | any): boolean;

        /**
         * A {@link Gtk.RcPropertyParser} for use with `gtk_settings_install_property_parser()`
         * or `gtk_widget_class_install_style_property_parser()` which parses a
         * color given either by its name or in the form
         * `{ red, green, blue }` where red, green and
         * blue are integers between 0 and 65535 or floating-point numbers
         * between 0 and 1.
         * @param pspec a {@link GObject.ParamSpec}
         * @param gstring the {@link GLib.String} to be parsed
         * @param property_value a {@link GObject.Value} which must hold {@link Gdk.Color} values.
         */
        static parse_color(pspec: GObject.ParamSpec, gstring: GLib.String, property_value: GObject.Value | any): boolean;

        /**
         * A {@link Gtk.RcPropertyParser} for use with `gtk_settings_install_property_parser()`
         * or `gtk_widget_class_install_style_property_parser()` which parses a single
         * enumeration value.
         * 
         * The enumeration value can be specified by its name, its nickname or
         * its numeric value. For consistency with flags parsing, the value
         * may be surrounded by parentheses.
         * @param pspec a {@link GObject.ParamSpec}
         * @param gstring the {@link GLib.String} to be parsed
         * @param property_value a {@link GObject.Value} which must hold enum values.
         */
        static parse_enum(pspec: GObject.ParamSpec, gstring: GLib.String, property_value: GObject.Value | any): boolean;

        /**
         * A {@link Gtk.RcPropertyParser} for use with `gtk_settings_install_property_parser()`
         * or `gtk_widget_class_install_style_property_parser()` which parses flags.
         * 
         * Flags can be specified by their name, their nickname or
         * numerically. Multiple flags can be specified in the form
         * `"( flag1 | flag2 | ... )"`.
         * @param pspec a {@link GObject.ParamSpec}
         * @param gstring the {@link GLib.String} to be parsed
         * @param property_value a {@link GObject.Value} which must hold flags values.
         */
        static parse_flags(pspec: GObject.ParamSpec, gstring: GLib.String, property_value: GObject.Value | any): boolean;

        /**
         * A {@link Gtk.RcPropertyParser} for use with `gtk_settings_install_property_parser()`
         * or `gtk_widget_class_install_style_property_parser()` which parses a
         * requisition in the form
         * `"{ width, height }"` for integers %width and %height.
         * @param pspec a {@link GObject.ParamSpec}
         * @param gstring the {@link GLib.String} to be parsed
         * @param property_value a {@link GObject.Value} which must hold boxed values.
         */
        static parse_requisition(pspec: GObject.ParamSpec, gstring: GLib.String, property_value: GObject.Value | any): boolean;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type RcStyleClass = typeof RcStyle;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type RecentActionClass = typeof RecentAction;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class RecentActionPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<RecentActionPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type RecentChooserDialogClass = typeof RecentChooserDialog;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class RecentChooserDialogPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<RecentChooserDialogPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type RecentChooserIface = typeof RecentChooser;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type RecentChooserMenuClass = typeof RecentChooserMenu;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class RecentChooserMenuPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<RecentChooserMenuPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type RecentChooserWidgetClass = typeof RecentChooserWidget;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class RecentChooserWidgetPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<RecentChooserWidgetPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * Meta-data to be passed to `gtk_recent_manager_add_full()` when
     * registering a recently used resource.
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    class RecentData {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<RecentData>;

        // Fields
        display_name: string;

        description: string;

        mime_type: string;

        app_name: string;

        app_exec: string;

        groups: string[];

        is_private: boolean;

        // Constructors

        constructor(properties?: Partial<{
            display_name: string;
            description: string;
            mime_type: string;
            app_name: string;
            app_exec: string;
            groups: string[];
            is_private: boolean;
        }>);
    }


    /**
     * A GtkRecentFilterInfo struct is used
     * to pass information about the tested file to `gtk_recent_filter_filter()`.
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    class RecentFilterInfo {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<RecentFilterInfo>;

        // Fields
        contains: RecentFilterFlags;

        uri: string;

        display_name: string;

        mime_type: string;

        applications: string[];

        groups: string[];

        age: number;
    }


    /**
     * {@link Gtk.RecentInfo}-struct contains private data only, and should
     * be accessed using the provided API.
     * 
     * {@link Gtk.RecentInfo} constains all the meta-data
     * associated with an entry in the recently used files list.
     * @gir-type Struct
     * @since 2.10
     */
    abstract class RecentInfo {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<RecentInfo>;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Creates a {@link Gio.AppInfo} for the specified {@link Gtk.RecentInfo}
         * @param app_name the name of the application that should   be mapped to a {@link Gio.AppInfo}; if `null` is used then the default   application for the MIME type is used
         * @returns the newly created {@link Gio.AppInfo}, or `null`.   In case of error, `error` will be set either with a   `GTK_RECENT_MANAGER_ERROR` or a `G_IO_ERROR`
         */
        create_app_info(app_name: string | null): Gio.AppInfo | null;

        /**
         * Checks whether the resource pointed by `info` still exists.
         * At the moment this check is done only on resources pointing
         * to local files.
         * @returns `true` if the resource exists
         */
        exists(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the timestamp (seconds from system’s Epoch) when the resource
         * was added to the recently used resources list.
         * @returns the number of seconds elapsed from system’s Epoch when   the resource was added to the list, or -1 on failure.
         */
        get_added(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the number of days elapsed since the last update
         * of the resource pointed by `info`.
         * @returns a positive integer containing the number of days   elapsed since the time this resource was last modified
         */
        get_age(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the data regarding the application that has registered the resource
         * pointed by `info`.
         * 
         * If the command line contains any escape characters defined inside the
         * storage specification, they will be expanded.
         * @param app_name the name of the application that has registered this item
         * @returns `true` if an application with `app_name` has registered this   resource inside the recently used list, or `false` otherwise. The   `app_exec` string is owned by the {@link Gtk.RecentInfo} and should not be   modified or freed
         */
        get_application_info(app_name: string): [boolean, string, number, number];

        /**
         * Retrieves the list of applications that have registered this resource.
         * @returns a newly allocated `null`-terminated array of strings.     Use `g_strfreev()` to free it.
         */
        get_applications(): string[];

        /**
         * Gets the (short) description of the resource.
         * @returns the description of the resource. The returned string   is owned by the recent manager, and should not be freed.
         */
        get_description(): string;

        /**
         * Gets the name of the resource. If none has been defined, the basename
         * of the resource is obtained.
         * @returns the display name of the resource. The returned string   is owned by the recent manager, and should not be freed.
         */
        get_display_name(): string;

        /**
         * Retrieves the icon associated to the resource MIME type.
         * @returns a {@link Gio.Icon} containing the icon, or `null`.   Use `g_object_unref()` when finished using the icon
         */
        get_gicon(): Gio.Icon | null;

        /**
         * Returns all groups registered for the recently used item `info`.
         * The array of returned group names will be `null` terminated, so
         * length might optionally be `null`.
         * @returns a newly allocated `null` terminated array of strings.   Use `g_strfreev()` to free it.
         */
        get_groups(): string[];

        /**
         * Retrieves the icon of size `size` associated to the resource MIME type.
         * @param size the size of the icon in pixels
         * @returns a {@link GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf} containing the icon,     or `null`. Use `g_object_unref()` when finished using the icon.
         */
        get_icon(size: number): GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf | null;

        /**
         * Gets the MIME type of the resource.
         * @returns the MIME type of the resource. The returned string   is owned by the recent manager, and should not be freed.
         */
        get_mime_type(): string;

        /**
         * Gets the timestamp (seconds from system’s Epoch) when the meta-data
         * for the resource was last modified.
         * @returns the number of seconds elapsed from system’s Epoch when   the resource was last modified, or -1 on failure.
         */
        get_modified(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the value of the “private” flag. Resources in the recently used
         * list that have this flag set to `true` should only be displayed by the
         * applications that have registered them.
         * @returns `true` if the private flag was found, `false` otherwise
         */
        get_private_hint(): boolean;

        /**
         * Computes a valid UTF-8 string that can be used as the
         * name of the item in a menu or list. For example, calling
         * this function on an item that refers to
         * “file:///foo/bar.txt” will yield “bar.txt”.
         * @returns A newly-allocated string in UTF-8 encoding   free it with `g_free()`
         */
        get_short_name(): string;

        /**
         * Gets the URI of the resource.
         * @returns the URI of the resource. The returned string is   owned by the recent manager, and should not be freed.
         */
        get_uri(): string;

        /**
         * Gets a displayable version of the resource’s URI. If the resource
         * is local, it returns a local path; if the resource is not local,
         * it returns the UTF-8 encoded content of `gtk_recent_info_get_uri()`.
         * @returns a newly allocated UTF-8 string containing the   resource’s URI or `null`. Use `g_free()` when done using it.
         */
        get_uri_display(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the timestamp (seconds from system’s Epoch) when the meta-data
         * for the resource was last visited.
         * @returns the number of seconds elapsed from system’s Epoch when   the resource was last visited, or -1 on failure.
         */
        get_visited(): number;

        /**
         * Checks whether an application registered this resource using `app_name`.
         * @param app_name a string containing an application name
         * @returns `true` if an application with name `app_name` was found,   `false` otherwise
         */
        has_application(app_name: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Checks whether `group_name` appears inside the groups
         * registered for the recently used item `info`.
         * @param group_name name of a group
         * @returns `true` if the group was found
         */
        has_group(group_name: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Checks whether the resource is local or not by looking at the
         * scheme of its URI.
         * @returns `true` if the resource is local
         */
        is_local(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the name of the last application that have registered the
         * recently used resource represented by `info`.
         * @returns an application name. Use `g_free()` to free it.
         */
        last_application(): string;

        /**
         * Checks whether two {@link Gtk.RecentInfo}-struct point to the same
         * resource.
         * @param info_b a {@link Gtk.RecentInfo}
         * @returns `true` if both {@link Gtk.RecentInfo}-struct point to the same   resource, `false` otherwise
         */
        match(info_b: RecentInfo): boolean;

        /**
         * Increases the reference count of `recent_info` by one.
         * @returns the recent info object with its reference count     increased by one
         */
        ref(): RecentInfo;

        /**
         * Decreases the reference count of `info` by one. If the reference
         * count reaches zero, `info` is deallocated, and the memory freed.
         */
        unref(): void;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type RecentManagerClass = typeof RecentManager;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class RecentManagerPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<RecentManagerPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type RendererCellAccessibleClass = typeof RendererCellAccessible;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class RendererCellAccessiblePrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<RendererCellAccessiblePrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * Represents a request of a screen object in a given orientation. These
     * are primarily used in container implementations when allocating a natural
     * size for children calling. See `gtk_distribute_natural_allocation()`.
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    class RequestedSize {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<RequestedSize>;

        // Fields
        data: null;

        minimum_size: number;

        natural_size: number;

        // Constructors

        constructor(properties?: Partial<{
            data: null;
            minimum_size: number;
            natural_size: number;
        }>);
    }


    /**
     * A {@link Gtk.Requisition}-struct represents the desired size of a widget. See
     * [GtkWidget’s geometry management section][geometry-management] for
     * more information.
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    class Requisition {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<Requisition>;

        // Fields
        width: number;

        height: number;

        // Constructors

        constructor(properties?: Partial<{
            width: number;
            height: number;
        }>);

        static ["new"](): Requisition;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Copies a {@link Gtk.Requisition}.
         * @returns a copy of `requisition`
         */
        copy(): Requisition;

        /**
         * Frees a {@link Gtk.Requisition}.
         */
        free(): void;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type RevealerClass = typeof Revealer;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type ScaleAccessibleClass = typeof ScaleAccessible;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class ScaleAccessiblePrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ScaleAccessiblePrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type ScaleButtonAccessibleClass = typeof ScaleButtonAccessible;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class ScaleButtonAccessiblePrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ScaleButtonAccessiblePrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type ScaleButtonClass = typeof ScaleButton;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class ScaleButtonPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ScaleButtonPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type ScaleClass = typeof Scale;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class ScalePrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ScalePrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type ScrollableInterface = typeof Scrollable;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type ScrollbarClass = typeof Scrollbar;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type ScrolledWindowAccessibleClass = typeof ScrolledWindowAccessible;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class ScrolledWindowAccessiblePrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ScrolledWindowAccessiblePrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type ScrolledWindowClass = typeof ScrolledWindow;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class ScrolledWindowPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ScrolledWindowPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type SearchBarClass = typeof SearchBar;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type SearchEntryClass = typeof SearchEntry;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class SelectionData {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<SelectionData>;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Makes a copy of a {@link Gtk.SelectionData}-struct and its data.
         * @returns a pointer to a copy of `data`.
         */
        copy(): SelectionData;

        /**
         * Frees a {@link Gtk.SelectionData}-struct returned from
         * `gtk_selection_data_copy()`.
         */
        free(): void;

        /**
         * Retrieves the data type of the selection.
         * @returns the data type of the selection.
         */
        get_data_type(): Gdk.Atom;

        /**
         * Retrieves the raw data of the selection along with its length.
         * @returns the raw data of the selection
         */
        get_data(): Uint8Array;

        /**
         * Retrieves the display of the selection.
         * @returns the display of the selection.
         */
        get_display(): Gdk.Display;

        /**
         * Retrieves the format of the selection.
         * @returns the format of the selection.
         */
        get_format(): number;

        /**
         * Retrieves the length of the raw data of the selection.
         * @returns the length of the data of the selection.
         */
        get_length(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the contents of the selection data as a {@link GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf}.
         * @returns if the selection data   contained a recognized image type and it could be converted to a   {@link GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf}, a newly allocated pixbuf is returned, otherwise   `null`.  If the result is non-`null` it must be freed with   `g_object_unref()`.
         */
        get_pixbuf(): GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf | null;

        /**
         * Retrieves the selection {@link Gdk.Atom} of the selection data.
         * @returns the selection {@link Gdk.Atom} of the selection data.
         */
        get_selection(): Gdk.Atom;

        /**
         * Retrieves the target of the selection.
         * @returns the target of the selection.
         */
        get_target(): Gdk.Atom;

        /**
         * Gets the contents of `selection_data` as an array of targets.
         * This can be used to interpret the results of getting
         * the standard TARGETS target that is always supplied for
         * any selection.
         * @returns `true` if `selection_data` contains a valid    array of targets, otherwise `false`.
         */
        get_targets(): [boolean, Gdk.Atom[]];

        /**
         * Gets the contents of the selection data as a UTF-8 string.
         * @returns if the selection data contained a   recognized text type and it could be converted to UTF-8, a newly   allocated string containing the converted text, otherwise `null`.   If the result is non-`null` it must be freed with `g_free()`.
         */
        get_text(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the contents of the selection data as array of URIs.
         * 
         * Since 3.24.37, this may involve using the FileTransfer
         * portal to send files between sandboxed apps.
         * @returns if   the selection data contains a list of   URIs, a newly allocated `null`-terminated string array   containing the URIs, otherwise `null`. If the result is   non-`null` it must be freed with `g_strfreev()`.
         */
        get_uris(): string[];

        /**
         * Stores new data into a {@link Gtk.SelectionData} object. Should
         * only be called from a selection handler callback.
         * Zero-terminates the stored data.
         * @param type the type of selection data
         * @param format format (number of bits in a unit)
         * @param data pointer to the data (will be copied)
         */
        set(type: Gdk.Atom, format: number, data: Uint8Array | string): void;

        /**
         * Sets the contents of the selection from a {@link GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf}
         * The pixbuf is converted to the form determined by
         * `selection_data`->target.
         * @param pixbuf a {@link GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf}
         * @returns `true` if the selection was successfully set,   otherwise `false`.
         */
        set_pixbuf(pixbuf: GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the contents of the selection from a UTF-8 encoded string.
         * The string is converted to the form determined by
         * `selection_data`->target.
         * @param str a UTF-8 string
         * @param len the length of `str`, or -1 if `str` is nul-terminated.
         * @returns `true` if the selection was successfully set,   otherwise `false`.
         */
        set_text(str: string, len: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the contents of the selection from a list of URIs.
         * The string is converted to the form determined by
         * `selection_data`->target.
         * 
         * Since 3.24.37, this may involve using the FileTransfer
         * portal to send files between sandboxed apps.
         * @param uris a `null`-terminated array of     strings holding URIs
         * @returns `true` if the selection was successfully set,   otherwise `false`.
         */
        set_uris(uris: string[]): boolean;

        /**
         * Given a {@link Gtk.SelectionData} object holding a list of targets,
         * determines if any of the targets in `targets` can be used to
         * provide a {@link GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf}.
         * @param writable whether to accept only targets for which GTK+ knows   how to convert a pixbuf into the format
         * @returns `true` if `selection_data` holds a list of targets,   and a suitable target for images is included, otherwise `false`.
         */
        targets_include_image(writable: boolean): boolean;

        /**
         * Given a {@link Gtk.SelectionData} object holding a list of targets,
         * determines if any of the targets in `targets` can be used to
         * provide rich text.
         * @param buffer a {@link Gtk.TextBuffer}
         * @returns `true` if `selection_data` holds a list of targets,               and a suitable target for rich text is included,               otherwise `false`.
         */
        targets_include_rich_text(buffer: TextBuffer): boolean;

        /**
         * Given a {@link Gtk.SelectionData} object holding a list of targets,
         * determines if any of the targets in `targets` can be used to
         * provide text.
         * @returns `true` if `selection_data` holds a list of targets,   and a suitable target for text is included, otherwise `false`.
         */
        targets_include_text(): boolean;

        /**
         * Given a {@link Gtk.SelectionData} object holding a list of targets,
         * determines if any of the targets in `targets` can be used to
         * provide a list or URIs.
         * @returns `true` if `selection_data` holds a list of targets,   and a suitable target for URI lists is included, otherwise `false`.
         */
        targets_include_uri(): boolean;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type SeparatorClass = typeof Separator;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type SeparatorMenuItemClass = typeof SeparatorMenuItem;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class SeparatorPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<SeparatorPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type SeparatorToolItemClass = typeof SeparatorToolItem;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class SeparatorToolItemPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<SeparatorToolItemPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type SettingsClass = typeof Settings;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class SettingsPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<SettingsPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    class SettingsValue {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<SettingsValue>;

        // Fields
        origin: string;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type ShortcutLabelClass = typeof ShortcutLabel;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type ShortcutsGroupClass = typeof ShortcutsGroup;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type ShortcutsSectionClass = typeof ShortcutsSection;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type ShortcutsShortcutClass = typeof ShortcutsShortcut;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type ShortcutsWindowClass = typeof ShortcutsWindow;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type SizeGroupClass = typeof SizeGroup;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class SizeGroupPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<SizeGroupPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type SocketAccessibleClass = typeof SocketAccessible;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class SocketAccessiblePrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<SocketAccessiblePrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type SocketClass = typeof Socket;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class SocketPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<SocketPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type SpinButtonAccessibleClass = typeof SpinButtonAccessible;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class SpinButtonAccessiblePrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<SpinButtonAccessiblePrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type SpinButtonClass = typeof SpinButton;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class SpinButtonPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<SpinButtonPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type SpinnerAccessibleClass = typeof SpinnerAccessible;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class SpinnerAccessiblePrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<SpinnerAccessiblePrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type SpinnerClass = typeof Spinner;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class SpinnerPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<SpinnerPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type StackAccessibleClass = typeof StackAccessible;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type StackClass = typeof Stack;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type StackSidebarClass = typeof StackSidebar;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class StackSidebarPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<StackSidebarPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type StackSwitcherClass = typeof StackSwitcher;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type StatusIconClass = typeof StatusIcon;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class StatusIconPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<StatusIconPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type StatusbarAccessibleClass = typeof StatusbarAccessible;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class StatusbarAccessiblePrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<StatusbarAccessiblePrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type StatusbarClass = typeof Statusbar;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class StatusbarPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<StatusbarPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     * @deprecated since 3.10
     */
    class StockItem {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<StockItem>;

        // Fields
        stock_id: string;

        label: string;

        modifier: Gdk.ModifierType;

        keyval: number;

        translation_domain: string;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Copies a stock item, mostly useful for language bindings and not in applications.
         * @returns a new {@link Gtk.StockItem}
         */
        copy(): StockItem;

        /**
         * Frees a stock item allocated on the heap, such as one returned by
         * `gtk_stock_item_copy()`. Also frees the fields inside the stock item,
         * if they are not `null`.
         */
        free(): void;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type StyleClass = typeof Style;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type StyleContextClass = typeof StyleContext;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class StyleContextPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<StyleContextPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type StylePropertiesClass = typeof StyleProperties;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class StylePropertiesPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<StylePropertiesPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type StyleProviderIface = typeof StyleProvider;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type SwitchAccessibleClass = typeof SwitchAccessible;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class SwitchAccessiblePrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<SwitchAccessiblePrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type SwitchClass = typeof Switch;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class SwitchPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<SwitchPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * GtkSymbolicColor is a boxed type that represents a symbolic color.
     * It is the result of parsing a
     * [color expression][gtkcssprovider-symbolic-colors].
     * To obtain the color represented by a GtkSymbolicColor, it has to
     * be resolved with `gtk_symbolic_color_resolve()`, which replaces all
     * symbolic color references by the colors they refer to (in a given
     * context) and evaluates mix, shade and other expressions, resulting
     * in a {@link Gdk.RGBA} value.
     * 
     * It is not normally necessary to deal directly with `GtkSymbolicColors`,
     * since they are mostly used behind the scenes by {@link Gtk.StyleContext} and
     * {@link Gtk.CssProvider}.
     * 
     * {@link Gtk.SymbolicColor} is deprecated. Symbolic colors are considered an
     * implementation detail of GTK+.
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    class SymbolicColor {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<SymbolicColor>;

        // Constructors
        constructor(color: SymbolicColor, factor: number);

        static new_alpha(color: SymbolicColor, factor: number): SymbolicColor;

        static new_literal(color: Gdk.RGBA): SymbolicColor;

        static new_mix(color1: SymbolicColor, color2: SymbolicColor, factor: number): SymbolicColor;

        static new_name(name: string): SymbolicColor;

        static new_shade(color: SymbolicColor, factor: number): SymbolicColor;

        static new_win32(theme_class: string, id: number): SymbolicColor;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Increases the reference count of `color`
         * @returns the same `color`
         */
        ref(): SymbolicColor;

        /**
         * If `color` is resolvable, `resolved_color` will be filled in
         * with the resolved color, and `true` will be returned. Generally,
         * if `color` can’t be resolved, it is due to it being defined on
         * top of a named color that doesn’t exist in `props`.
         * 
         * When `props` is `null`, resolving of named colors will fail, so if
         * your `color` is or references such a color, this function will
         * return `false`.
         * @param props {@link Gtk.StyleProperties} to use when resolving    named colors, or `null`
         * @returns `true` if the color has been resolved
         */
        resolve(props: StyleProperties | null): [boolean, Gdk.RGBA];

        /**
         * Converts the given `color` to a string representation. This is useful
         * both for debugging and for serialization of strings. The format of
         * the string may change between different versions of GTK, but it is
         * guaranteed that the GTK css parser is able to read the string and
         * create the same symbolic color from it.
         * @returns a new string representing `color`
         */
        to_string(): string;

        /**
         * Decreases the reference count of `color`, freeing its memory if the
         * reference count reaches 0.
         */
        unref(): void;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    class TableChild {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<TableChild>;

        // Fields
        widget: Widget;

        left_attach: number;

        right_attach: number;

        top_attach: number;

        bottom_attach: number;

        xpadding: number;

        ypadding: number;

        xexpand: number;

        yexpand: number;

        xshrink: number;

        yshrink: number;

        xfill: number;

        yfill: number;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type TableClass = typeof Table;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class TablePrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<TablePrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    class TableRowCol {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<TableRowCol>;

        // Fields
        requisition: number;

        allocation: number;

        spacing: number;

        need_expand: number;

        need_shrink: number;

        expand: number;

        shrink: number;

        empty: number;

        // Constructors

        constructor(properties?: Partial<{
            requisition: number;
            allocation: number;
            spacing: number;
            need_expand: number;
            need_shrink: number;
            expand: number;
            shrink: number;
            empty: number;
        }>);
    }


    /**
     * A {@link Gtk.TargetEntry} represents a single type of
     * data than can be supplied for by a widget for a selection
     * or for supplied or received during drag-and-drop.
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    class TargetEntry {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<TargetEntry>;

        // Fields
        target: string;

        flags: number;

        info: number;

        // Constructors

        constructor(properties?: Partial<{
            target: string;
            flags: number;
            info: number;
        }>);

        static ["new"](target: string, flags: number, info: number): TargetEntry;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Makes a copy of a {@link Gtk.TargetEntry} and its data.
         * @returns a pointer to a copy of `data`.     Free with `gtk_target_entry_free()`
         */
        copy(): TargetEntry;

        /**
         * Frees a {@link Gtk.TargetEntry} returned from
         * `gtk_target_entry_new()` or `gtk_target_entry_copy()`.
         */
        free(): void;
    }


    /**
     * A {@link Gtk.TargetList}-struct is a reference counted list
     * of {@link Gtk.TargetPair} and should be treated as
     * opaque.
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    class TargetList {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<TargetList>;

        // Constructors
        constructor(targets: TargetEntry[] | null);

        static ["new"](targets: TargetEntry[] | null): TargetList;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Appends another target to a {@link Gtk.TargetList}.
         * @param target the interned atom representing the target
         * @param flags the flags for this target
         * @param info an ID that will be passed back to the application
         */
        add(target: Gdk.Atom, flags: number, info: number): void;

        /**
         * Appends the image targets supported by {@link Gtk.SelectionData} to
         * the target list. All targets are added with the same `info`.
         * @param info an ID that will be passed back to the application
         * @param writable whether to add only targets for which GTK+ knows   how to convert a pixbuf into the format
         */
        add_image_targets(info: number, writable: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Appends the rich text targets registered with
         * `gtk_text_buffer_register_serialize_format()` or
         * `gtk_text_buffer_register_deserialize_format()` to the target list. All
         * targets are added with the same `info`.
         * @param info an ID that will be passed back to the application
         * @param deserializable if `true`, then deserializable rich text formats                  will be added, serializable formats otherwise.
         * @param buffer a {@link Gtk.TextBuffer}.
         */
        add_rich_text_targets(info: number, deserializable: boolean, buffer: TextBuffer): void;

        /**
         * Prepends a table of {@link Gtk.TargetEntry} to a target list.
         * @param targets the table of {@link Gtk.TargetEntry}
         */
        add_table(targets: TargetEntry[]): void;

        /**
         * Appends the text targets supported by {@link Gtk.SelectionData} to
         * the target list. All targets are added with the same `info`.
         * @param info an ID that will be passed back to the application
         */
        add_text_targets(info: number): void;

        /**
         * Appends the URI targets supported by {@link Gtk.SelectionData} to
         * the target list. All targets are added with the same `info`.
         * 
         * Since 3.24.37, this includes the application/vnd.portal.files
         * target when possible, to allow sending files between sandboxed
         * apps via the FileTransfer portal.
         * @param info an ID that will be passed back to the application
         */
        add_uri_targets(info: number): void;

        /**
         * Looks up a given target in a {@link Gtk.TargetList}.
         * @param target an interned atom representing the target to search for
         * @returns `true` if the target was found, otherwise `false`
         */
        find(target: Gdk.Atom): [boolean, number];

        /**
         * Increases the reference count of a {@link Gtk.TargetList} by one.
         * @returns the passed in {@link Gtk.TargetList}.
         */
        ref(): TargetList;

        /**
         * Removes a target from a target list.
         * @param target the interned atom representing the target
         */
        remove(target: Gdk.Atom): void;

        /**
         * Decreases the reference count of a {@link Gtk.TargetList} by one.
         * If the resulting reference count is zero, frees the list.
         */
        unref(): void;
    }


    /**
     * A {@link Gtk.TargetPair} is used to represent the same
     * information as a table of {@link Gtk.TargetEntry}, but in
     * an efficient form.
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    class TargetPair {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<TargetPair>;

        // Fields
        flags: number;

        info: number;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type TearoffMenuItemClass = typeof TearoffMenuItem;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class TearoffMenuItemPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<TearoffMenuItemPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    class TextAppearance {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<TextAppearance>;

        // Fields
        bg_color: Gdk.Color;

        fg_color: Gdk.Color;

        rise: number;

        underline: number;

        strikethrough: number;

        draw_bg: number;

        inside_selection: number;

        is_text: number;

        // Constructors

        constructor(properties?: Partial<{
            bg_color: Gdk.Color;
            fg_color: Gdk.Color;
            rise: number;
            underline: number;
            strikethrough: number;
            draw_bg: number;
            inside_selection: number;
            is_text: number;
        }>);
    }


    /**
     * Using {@link Gtk.TextAttributes} directly should rarely be necessary.
     * It’s primarily useful with `gtk_text_iter_get_attributes()`.
     * As with most GTK+ structs, the fields in this struct should only
     * be read, never modified directly.
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    class TextAttributes {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<TextAttributes>;

        // Fields
        appearance: TextAppearance;

        justification: Justification;

        direction: TextDirection;

        font_scale: number;

        left_margin: number;

        right_margin: number;

        indent: number;

        pixels_above_lines: number;

        pixels_below_lines: number;

        pixels_inside_wrap: number;

        wrap_mode: WrapMode;

        invisible: number;

        bg_full_height: number;

        editable: number;

        no_fallback: number;

        letter_spacing: number;

        // Constructors

        constructor(properties?: Partial<{
            appearance: TextAppearance;
            justification: Justification;
            direction: TextDirection;
            font_scale: number;
            left_margin: number;
            right_margin: number;
            indent: number;
            pixels_above_lines: number;
            pixels_below_lines: number;
            pixels_inside_wrap: number;
            wrap_mode: WrapMode;
            invisible: number;
            bg_full_height: number;
            editable: number;
            no_fallback: number;
            letter_spacing: number;
        }>);

        static ["new"](): TextAttributes;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Copies `src` and returns a new {@link Gtk.TextAttributes}.
         * @returns a copy of `src`,     free with `gtk_text_attributes_unref()`
         */
        copy(): TextAttributes;

        /**
         * Copies the values from `src` to `dest` so that `dest` has
         * the same values as `src`. Frees existing values in `dest`.
         * @param dest another {@link Gtk.TextAttributes}
         */
        copy_values(dest: TextAttributes): void;

        /**
         * Increments the reference count on `values`.
         * @returns the {@link Gtk.TextAttributes} that were passed in
         */
        ref(): TextAttributes;

        /**
         * Decrements the reference count on `values`, freeing the structure
         * if the reference count reaches 0.
         */
        unref(): void;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class TextBTree {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<TextBTree>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type TextBufferClass = typeof TextBuffer;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class TextBufferPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<TextBufferPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type TextCellAccessibleClass = typeof TextCellAccessible;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class TextCellAccessiblePrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<TextCellAccessiblePrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type TextChildAnchorClass = typeof TextChildAnchor;

    /**
     * You may wish to begin by reading the
     * [text widget conceptual overview](https://docs.gtk.org/gtk3/TextWidget.html)
     * which gives an overview of all the objects and data
     * types related to the text widget and how they work together.
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    class TextIter {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<TextIter>;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<{}>);

        // Methods
        /**
         * Assigns the value of `other` to `iter`.  This function
         * is not useful in applications, because iterators can be assigned
         * with `GtkTextIter i = j;`. The
         * function is used by language bindings.
         * @param other another {@link Gtk.TextIter}
         */
        assign(other: TextIter): void;

        /**
         * Moves backward by one character offset. Returns `true` if movement
         * was possible; if `iter` was the first in the buffer (character
         * offset 0), `gtk_text_iter_backward_char()` returns `false` for convenience when
         * writing loops.
         * @returns whether movement was possible
         */
        backward_char(): boolean;

        /**
         * Moves `count` characters backward, if possible (if `count` would move
         * past the start or end of the buffer, moves to the start or end of
         * the buffer).  The return value indicates whether the iterator moved
         * onto a dereferenceable position; if the iterator didn’t move, or
         * moved onto the end iterator, then `false` is returned. If `count` is 0,
         * the function does nothing and returns `false`.
         * @param count number of characters to move
         * @returns whether `iter` moved and is dereferenceable
         */
        backward_chars(count: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Like `gtk_text_iter_forward_cursor_position()`, but moves backward.
         * @returns `true` if we moved
         */
        backward_cursor_position(): boolean;

        /**
         * Moves up to `count` cursor positions. See
         * `gtk_text_iter_forward_cursor_position()` for details.
         * @param count number of positions to move
         * @returns `true` if we moved and the new position is dereferenceable
         */
        backward_cursor_positions(count: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Same as `gtk_text_iter_forward_find_char()`, but goes backward from `iter`.
         * @param pred function to be called on each character
         * @param limit search limit, or `null` for none
         * @returns whether a match was found
         */
        backward_find_char(pred: TextCharPredicate, limit: TextIter | null): boolean;

        /**
         * Moves `iter` to the start of the previous line. Returns `true` if
         * `iter` could be moved; i.e. if `iter` was at character offset 0, this
         * function returns `false`. Therefore if `iter` was already on line 0,
         * but not at the start of the line, `iter` is snapped to the start of
         * the line and the function returns `true`. (Note that this implies that
         * in a loop calling this function, the line number may not change on
         * every iteration, if your first iteration is on line 0.)
         * @returns whether `iter` moved
         */
        backward_line(): boolean;

        /**
         * Moves `count` lines backward, if possible (if `count` would move
         * past the start or end of the buffer, moves to the start or end of
         * the buffer).  The return value indicates whether the iterator moved
         * onto a dereferenceable position; if the iterator didn’t move, or
         * moved onto the end iterator, then `false` is returned. If `count` is 0,
         * the function does nothing and returns `false`. If `count` is negative,
         * moves forward by 0 - `count` lines.
         * @param count number of lines to move backward
         * @returns whether `iter` moved and is dereferenceable
         */
        backward_lines(count: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Same as `gtk_text_iter_forward_search()`, but moves backward.
         * 
         * `match_end` will never be set to a {@link Gtk.TextIter} located after `iter`, even if
         * there is a possible `match_start` before or at `iter`.
         * @param str search string
         * @param flags bitmask of flags affecting the search
         * @param limit location of last possible `match_start`, or `null` for start of buffer
         * @returns whether a match was found
         */
        backward_search(str: string, flags: TextSearchFlags, limit: TextIter | null): [boolean, TextIter | null, TextIter | null];

        /**
         * Moves backward to the previous sentence start; if `iter` is already at
         * the start of a sentence, moves backward to the next one.  Sentence
         * boundaries are determined by Pango and should be correct for nearly
         * any language (if not, the correct fix would be to the Pango text
         * boundary algorithms).
         * @returns `true` if `iter` moved and is not the end iterator
         */
        backward_sentence_start(): boolean;

        /**
         * Calls `gtk_text_iter_backward_sentence_start()` up to `count` times,
         * or until it returns `false`. If `count` is negative, moves forward
         * instead of backward.
         * @param count number of sentences to move
         * @returns `true` if `iter` moved and is not the end iterator
         */
        backward_sentence_starts(count: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Moves backward to the next toggle (on or off) of the
         * {@link Gtk.TextTag} `tag`, or to the next toggle of any tag if
         * `tag` is `null`. If no matching tag toggles are found,
         * returns `false`, otherwise `true`. Does not return toggles
         * located at `iter`, only toggles before `iter`. Sets `iter`
         * to the location of the toggle, or the start of the buffer
         * if no toggle is found.
         * @param tag a {@link Gtk.TextTag}, or `null`
         * @returns whether we found a tag toggle before `iter`
         */
        backward_to_tag_toggle(tag: TextTag | null): boolean;

        /**
         * Moves `iter` forward to the previous visible cursor position. See
         * `gtk_text_iter_backward_cursor_position()` for details.
         * @returns `true` if we moved and the new position is dereferenceable
         */
        backward_visible_cursor_position(): boolean;

        /**
         * Moves up to `count` visible cursor positions. See
         * `gtk_text_iter_backward_cursor_position()` for details.
         * @param count number of positions to move
         * @returns `true` if we moved and the new position is dereferenceable
         */
        backward_visible_cursor_positions(count: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Moves `iter` to the start of the previous visible line. Returns `true` if
         * `iter` could be moved; i.e. if `iter` was at character offset 0, this
         * function returns `false`. Therefore if `iter` was already on line 0,
         * but not at the start of the line, `iter` is snapped to the start of
         * the line and the function returns `true`. (Note that this implies that
         * in a loop calling this function, the line number may not change on
         * every iteration, if your first iteration is on line 0.)
         * @returns whether `iter` moved
         */
        backward_visible_line(): boolean;

        /**
         * Moves `count` visible lines backward, if possible (if `count` would move
         * past the start or end of the buffer, moves to the start or end of
         * the buffer).  The return value indicates whether the iterator moved
         * onto a dereferenceable position; if the iterator didn’t move, or
         * moved onto the end iterator, then `false` is returned. If `count` is 0,
         * the function does nothing and returns `false`. If `count` is negative,
         * moves forward by 0 - `count` lines.
         * @param count number of lines to move backward
         * @returns whether `iter` moved and is dereferenceable
         */
        backward_visible_lines(count: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Moves backward to the previous visible word start. (If `iter` is currently
         * on a word start, moves backward to the next one after that.) Word breaks
         * are determined by Pango and should be correct for nearly any
         * language (if not, the correct fix would be to the Pango word break
         * algorithms).
         * @returns `true` if `iter` moved and is not the end iterator
         */
        backward_visible_word_start(): boolean;

        /**
         * Calls `gtk_text_iter_backward_visible_word_start()` up to `count` times.
         * @param count number of times to move
         * @returns `true` if `iter` moved and is not the end iterator
         */
        backward_visible_word_starts(count: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Moves backward to the previous word start. (If `iter` is currently on a
         * word start, moves backward to the next one after that.) Word breaks
         * are determined by Pango and should be correct for nearly any
         * language (if not, the correct fix would be to the Pango word break
         * algorithms).
         * @returns `true` if `iter` moved and is not the end iterator
         */
        backward_word_start(): boolean;

        /**
         * Calls `gtk_text_iter_backward_word_start()` up to `count` times.
         * @param count number of times to move
         * @returns `true` if `iter` moved and is not the end iterator
         */
        backward_word_starts(count: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns `true` if `tag` is toggled on at exactly this point. If `tag`
         * is `null`, returns `true` if any tag is toggled on at this point.
         * 
         * Note that if `gtk_text_iter_begins_tag()` returns `true`, it means that `iter` is
         * at the beginning of the tagged range, and that the
         * character at `iter` is inside the tagged range. In other
         * words, unlike `gtk_text_iter_ends_tag()`, if `gtk_text_iter_begins_tag()` returns
         * `true`, `gtk_text_iter_has_tag()` will also return `true` for the same
         * parameters.
         * @param tag a {@link Gtk.TextTag}, or `null`
         * @returns whether `iter` is the start of a range tagged with `tag`
         */
        begins_tag(tag: TextTag | null): boolean;

        /**
         * Considering the default editability of the buffer, and tags that
         * affect editability, determines whether text inserted at `iter` would
         * be editable. If text inserted at `iter` would be editable then the
         * user should be allowed to insert text at `iter`.
         * `gtk_text_buffer_insert_interactive()` uses this function to decide
         * whether insertions are allowed at a given position.
         * @param default_editability `true` if text is editable by default
         * @returns whether text inserted at `iter` would be editable
         */
        can_insert(default_editability: boolean): boolean;

        /**
         * A `qsort()`-style function that returns negative if `lhs` is less than
         * `rhs`, positive if `lhs` is greater than `rhs`, and 0 if they’re equal.
         * Ordering is in character offset order, i.e. the first character in the buffer
         * is less than the second character in the buffer.
         * @param rhs another {@link Gtk.TextIter}
         * @returns -1 if `lhs` is less than `rhs`, 1 if `lhs` is greater, 0 if they are equal
         */
        compare(rhs: TextIter): number;

        /**
         * Creates a dynamically-allocated copy of an iterator. This function
         * is not useful in applications, because iterators can be copied with a
         * simple assignment (`GtkTextIter i = j;`). The
         * function is used by language bindings.
         * @returns a copy of the `iter`, free with `gtk_text_iter_free()`
         */
        copy(): TextIter;

        /**
         * Returns whether the character at `iter` is within an editable region
         * of text.  Non-editable text is “locked” and can’t be changed by the
         * user via {@link Gtk.TextView}. This function is simply a convenience
         * wrapper around `gtk_text_iter_get_attributes()`. If no tags applied
         * to this text affect editability, `default_setting` will be returned.
         * 
         * You don’t want to use this function to decide whether text can be
         * inserted at `iter`, because for insertion you don’t want to know
         * whether the char at `iter` is inside an editable range, you want to
         * know whether a new character inserted at `iter` would be inside an
         * editable range. Use `gtk_text_iter_can_insert()` to handle this
         * case.
         * @param default_setting `true` if text is editable by default
         * @returns whether `iter` is inside an editable range
         */
        editable(default_setting: boolean): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns `true` if `iter` points to the start of the paragraph
         * delimiter characters for a line (delimiters will be either a
         * newline, a carriage return, a carriage return followed by a
         * newline, or a Unicode paragraph separator character). Note that an
         * iterator pointing to the \n of a \r\n pair will not be counted as
         * the end of a line, the line ends before the \r. The end iterator is
         * considered to be at the end of a line, even though there are no
         * paragraph delimiter chars there.
         * @returns whether `iter` is at the end of a line
         */
        ends_line(): boolean;

        /**
         * Determines whether `iter` ends a sentence.  Sentence boundaries are
         * determined by Pango and should be correct for nearly any language
         * (if not, the correct fix would be to the Pango text boundary
         * algorithms).
         * @returns `true` if `iter` is at the end of a sentence.
         */
        ends_sentence(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns `true` if `tag` is toggled off at exactly this point. If `tag`
         * is `null`, returns `true` if any tag is toggled off at this point.
         * 
         * Note that if `gtk_text_iter_ends_tag()` returns `true`, it means that `iter` is
         * at the end of the tagged range, but that the character
         * at `iter` is outside the tagged range. In other words,
         * unlike `gtk_text_iter_starts_tag()`, if `gtk_text_iter_ends_tag()` returns `true`,
         * `gtk_text_iter_has_tag()` will return `false` for the same parameters.
         * @param tag a {@link Gtk.TextTag}, or `null`
         * @returns whether `iter` is the end of a range tagged with `tag`
         */
        ends_tag(tag: TextTag | null): boolean;

        /**
         * Determines whether `iter` ends a natural-language word.  Word breaks
         * are determined by Pango and should be correct for nearly any
         * language (if not, the correct fix would be to the Pango word break
         * algorithms).
         * @returns `true` if `iter` is at the end of a word
         */
        ends_word(): boolean;

        /**
         * Tests whether two iterators are equal, using the fastest possible
         * mechanism. This function is very fast; you can expect it to perform
         * better than e.g. getting the character offset for each iterator and
         * comparing the offsets yourself. Also, it’s a bit faster than
         * `gtk_text_iter_compare()`.
         * @param rhs another {@link Gtk.TextIter}
         * @returns `true` if the iterators point to the same place in the buffer
         */
        equal(rhs: TextIter): boolean;

        /**
         * Moves `iter` forward by one character offset. Note that images
         * embedded in the buffer occupy 1 character slot, so
         * `gtk_text_iter_forward_char()` may actually move onto an image instead
         * of a character, if you have images in your buffer.  If `iter` is the
         * end iterator or one character before it, `iter` will now point at
         * the end iterator, and `gtk_text_iter_forward_char()` returns `false` for
         * convenience when writing loops.
         * @returns whether `iter` moved and is dereferenceable
         */
        forward_char(): boolean;

        /**
         * Moves `count` characters if possible (if `count` would move past the
         * start or end of the buffer, moves to the start or end of the
         * buffer). The return value indicates whether the new position of
         * `iter` is different from its original position, and dereferenceable
         * (the last iterator in the buffer is not dereferenceable). If `count`
         * is 0, the function does nothing and returns `false`.
         * @param count number of characters to move, may be negative
         * @returns whether `iter` moved and is dereferenceable
         */
        forward_chars(count: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Moves `iter` forward by a single cursor position. Cursor positions
         * are (unsurprisingly) positions where the cursor can appear. Perhaps
         * surprisingly, there may not be a cursor position between all
         * characters. The most common example for European languages would be
         * a carriage return/newline sequence. For some Unicode characters,
         * the equivalent of say the letter “a” with an accent mark will be
         * represented as two characters, first the letter then a "combining
         * mark" that causes the accent to be rendered; so the cursor can’t go
         * between those two characters. See also the {@link Pango.LogAttr}-struct and
         * `pango_break()` function.
         * @returns `true` if we moved and the new position is dereferenceable
         */
        forward_cursor_position(): boolean;

        /**
         * Moves up to `count` cursor positions. See
         * `gtk_text_iter_forward_cursor_position()` for details.
         * @param count number of positions to move
         * @returns `true` if we moved and the new position is dereferenceable
         */
        forward_cursor_positions(count: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Advances `iter`, calling `pred` on each character. If
         * `pred` returns `true`, returns `true` and stops scanning.
         * If `pred` never returns `true`, `iter` is set to `limit` if
         * `limit` is non-`null`, otherwise to the end iterator.
         * @param pred a function to be called on each character
         * @param limit search limit, or `null` for none
         * @returns whether a match was found
         */
        forward_find_char(pred: TextCharPredicate, limit: TextIter | null): boolean;

        /**
         * Moves `iter` to the start of the next line. If the iter is already on the
         * last line of the buffer, moves the iter to the end of the current line.
         * If after the operation, the iter is at the end of the buffer and not
         * dereferencable, returns `false`. Otherwise, returns `true`.
         * @returns whether `iter` can be dereferenced
         */
        forward_line(): boolean;

        /**
         * Moves `count` lines forward, if possible (if `count` would move
         * past the start or end of the buffer, moves to the start or end of
         * the buffer).  The return value indicates whether the iterator moved
         * onto a dereferenceable position; if the iterator didn’t move, or
         * moved onto the end iterator, then `false` is returned. If `count` is 0,
         * the function does nothing and returns `false`. If `count` is negative,
         * moves backward by 0 - `count` lines.
         * @param count number of lines to move forward
         * @returns whether `iter` moved and is dereferenceable
         */
        forward_lines(count: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Searches forward for `str`. Any match is returned by setting
         * `match_start` to the first character of the match and `match_end` to the
         * first character after the match. The search will not continue past
         * `limit`. Note that a search is a linear or O(n) operation, so you
         * may wish to use `limit` to avoid locking up your UI on large
         * buffers.
         * 
         * `match_start` will never be set to a {@link Gtk.TextIter} located before `iter`, even if
         * there is a possible `match_end` after or at `iter`.
         * @param str a search string
         * @param flags flags affecting how the search is done
         * @param limit location of last possible `match_end`, or `null` for the end of the buffer
         * @returns whether a match was found
         */
        forward_search(str: string, flags: TextSearchFlags, limit: TextIter | null): [boolean, TextIter | null, TextIter | null];

        /**
         * Moves forward to the next sentence end. (If `iter` is at the end of
         * a sentence, moves to the next end of sentence.)  Sentence
         * boundaries are determined by Pango and should be correct for nearly
         * any language (if not, the correct fix would be to the Pango text
         * boundary algorithms).
         * @returns `true` if `iter` moved and is not the end iterator
         */
        forward_sentence_end(): boolean;

        /**
         * Calls `gtk_text_iter_forward_sentence_end()` `count` times (or until
         * `gtk_text_iter_forward_sentence_end()` returns `false`). If `count` is
         * negative, moves backward instead of forward.
         * @param count number of sentences to move
         * @returns `true` if `iter` moved and is not the end iterator
         */
        forward_sentence_ends(count: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Moves `iter` forward to the “end iterator,” which points one past the last
         * valid character in the buffer. `gtk_text_iter_get_char()` called on the
         * end iterator returns 0, which is convenient for writing loops.
         */
        forward_to_end(): void;

        /**
         * Moves the iterator to point to the paragraph delimiter characters,
         * which will be either a newline, a carriage return, a carriage
         * return/newline in sequence, or the Unicode paragraph separator
         * character. If the iterator is already at the paragraph delimiter
         * characters, moves to the paragraph delimiter characters for the
         * next line. If `iter` is on the last line in the buffer, which does
         * not end in paragraph delimiters, moves to the end iterator (end of
         * the last line), and returns `false`.
         * @returns `true` if we moved and the new location is not the end iterator
         */
        forward_to_line_end(): boolean;

        /**
         * Moves forward to the next toggle (on or off) of the
         * {@link Gtk.TextTag} `tag`, or to the next toggle of any tag if
         * `tag` is `null`. If no matching tag toggles are found,
         * returns `false`, otherwise `true`. Does not return toggles
         * located at `iter`, only toggles after `iter`. Sets `iter` to
         * the location of the toggle, or to the end of the buffer
         * if no toggle is found.
         * @param tag a {@link Gtk.TextTag}, or `null`
         * @returns whether we found a tag toggle after `iter`
         */
        forward_to_tag_toggle(tag: TextTag | null): boolean;

        /**
         * Moves `iter` forward to the next visible cursor position. See
         * `gtk_text_iter_forward_cursor_position()` for details.
         * @returns `true` if we moved and the new position is dereferenceable
         */
        forward_visible_cursor_position(): boolean;

        /**
         * Moves up to `count` visible cursor positions. See
         * `gtk_text_iter_forward_cursor_position()` for details.
         * @param count number of positions to move
         * @returns `true` if we moved and the new position is dereferenceable
         */
        forward_visible_cursor_positions(count: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Moves `iter` to the start of the next visible line. Returns `true` if there
         * was a next line to move to, and `false` if `iter` was simply moved to
         * the end of the buffer and is now not dereferenceable, or if `iter` was
         * already at the end of the buffer.
         * @returns whether `iter` can be dereferenced
         */
        forward_visible_line(): boolean;

        /**
         * Moves `count` visible lines forward, if possible (if `count` would move
         * past the start or end of the buffer, moves to the start or end of
         * the buffer).  The return value indicates whether the iterator moved
         * onto a dereferenceable position; if the iterator didn’t move, or
         * moved onto the end iterator, then `false` is returned. If `count` is 0,
         * the function does nothing and returns `false`. If `count` is negative,
         * moves backward by 0 - `count` lines.
         * @param count number of lines to move forward
         * @returns whether `iter` moved and is dereferenceable
         */
        forward_visible_lines(count: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Moves forward to the next visible word end. (If `iter` is currently on a
         * word end, moves forward to the next one after that.) Word breaks
         * are determined by Pango and should be correct for nearly any
         * language (if not, the correct fix would be to the Pango word break
         * algorithms).
         * @returns `true` if `iter` moved and is not the end iterator
         */
        forward_visible_word_end(): boolean;

        /**
         * Calls `gtk_text_iter_forward_visible_word_end()` up to `count` times.
         * @param count number of times to move
         * @returns `true` if `iter` moved and is not the end iterator
         */
        forward_visible_word_ends(count: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Moves forward to the next word end. (If `iter` is currently on a
         * word end, moves forward to the next one after that.) Word breaks
         * are determined by Pango and should be correct for nearly any
         * language (if not, the correct fix would be to the Pango word break
         * algorithms).
         * @returns `true` if `iter` moved and is not the end iterator
         */
        forward_word_end(): boolean;

        /**
         * Calls `gtk_text_iter_forward_word_end()` up to `count` times.
         * @param count number of times to move
         * @returns `true` if `iter` moved and is not the end iterator
         */
        forward_word_ends(count: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Free an iterator allocated on the heap. This function
         * is intended for use in language bindings, and is not
         * especially useful for applications, because iterators can
         * simply be allocated on the stack.
         */
        free(): void;

        /**
         * Computes the effect of any tags applied to this spot in the
         * text. The `values` parameter should be initialized to the default
         * settings you wish to use if no tags are in effect. You’d typically
         * obtain the defaults from `gtk_text_view_get_default_attributes()`.
         * 
         * `gtk_text_iter_get_attributes()` will modify `values`, applying the
         * effects of any tags present at `iter`. If any tags affected `values`,
         * the function returns `true`.
         * @returns `true` if `values` was modified
         */
        get_attributes(): [boolean, TextAttributes];

        /**
         * Returns the {@link Gtk.TextBuffer} this iterator is associated with.
         * @returns the buffer
         */
        get_buffer(): TextBuffer;

        /**
         * Returns the number of bytes in the line containing `iter`,
         * including the paragraph delimiters.
         * @returns number of bytes in the line
         */
        get_bytes_in_line(): number;

        /**
         * The Unicode character at this iterator is returned.  (Equivalent to
         * operator* on a C++ iterator.)  If the element at this iterator is a
         * non-character element, such as an image embedded in the buffer, the
         * Unicode “unknown” character 0xFFFC is returned. If invoked on
         * the end iterator, zero is returned; zero is not a valid Unicode character.
         * So you can write a loop which ends when `gtk_text_iter_get_char()`
         * returns 0.
         * @returns a Unicode character, or 0 if `iter` is not dereferenceable
         */
        get_char(): string;

        /**
         * Returns the number of characters in the line containing `iter`,
         * including the paragraph delimiters.
         * @returns number of characters in the line
         */
        get_chars_in_line(): number;

        /**
         * If the location at `iter` contains a child anchor, the
         * anchor is returned (with no new reference count added). Otherwise,
         * `null` is returned.
         * @returns the anchor at `iter`
         */
        get_child_anchor(): TextChildAnchor;

        /**
         * A convenience wrapper around `gtk_text_iter_get_attributes()`,
         * which returns the language in effect at `iter`. If no tags affecting
         * language apply to `iter`, the return value is identical to that of
         * `gtk_get_default_language()`.
         * @returns language in effect at `iter`
         */
        get_language(): Pango.Language;

        /**
         * Returns the line number containing the iterator. Lines in
         * a {@link Gtk.TextBuffer} are numbered beginning with 0 for the first
         * line in the buffer.
         * @returns a line number
         */
        get_line(): number;

        /**
         * Returns the byte index of the iterator, counting
         * from the start of a newline-terminated line.
         * Remember that {@link Gtk.TextBuffer} encodes text in
         * UTF-8, and that characters can require a variable
         * number of bytes to represent.
         * @returns distance from start of line, in bytes
         */
        get_line_index(): number;

        /**
         * Returns the character offset of the iterator,
         * counting from the start of a newline-terminated line.
         * The first character on the line has offset 0.
         * @returns offset from start of line
         */
        get_line_offset(): number;

        /**
         * Returns a list of all {@link Gtk.TextMark} at this location. Because marks
         * are not iterable (they don’t take up any "space" in the buffer,
         * they are just marks in between iterable locations), multiple marks
         * can exist in the same place. The returned list is not in any
         * meaningful order.
         * @returns list of {@link Gtk.TextMark}
         */
        get_marks(): TextMark[];

        /**
         * Returns the character offset of an iterator.
         * Each character in a {@link Gtk.TextBuffer} has an offset,
         * starting with 0 for the first character in the buffer.
         * Use `gtk_text_buffer_get_iter_at_offset()` to convert an
         * offset back into an iterator.
         * @returns a character offset
         */
        get_offset(): number;

        /**
         * If the element at `iter` is a pixbuf, the pixbuf is returned
         * (with no new reference count added). Otherwise,
         * `null` is returned.
         * @returns the pixbuf at `iter`
         */
        get_pixbuf(): GdkPixbuf.Pixbuf;

        /**
         * Returns the text in the given range. A “slice” is an array of
         * characters encoded in UTF-8 format, including the Unicode “unknown”
         * character 0xFFFC for iterable non-character elements in the buffer,
         * such as images.  Because images are encoded in the slice, byte and
         * character offsets in the returned array will correspond to byte
         * offsets in the text buffer. Note that 0xFFFC can occur in normal
         * text as well, so it is not a reliable indicator that a pixbuf or
         * widget is in the buffer.
         * @param end iterator at end of a range
         * @returns slice of text from the buffer
         */
        get_slice(end: TextIter): string;

        /**
         * Returns a list of tags that apply to `iter`, in ascending order of
         * priority (highest-priority tags are last). The {@link Gtk.TextTag} in the
         * list don’t have a reference added, but you have to free the list
         * itself.
         * @returns list of {@link Gtk.TextTag}
         */
        get_tags(): TextTag[];

        /**
         * Returns text in the given range.  If the range
         * contains non-text elements such as images, the character and byte
         * offsets in the returned string will not correspond to character and
         * byte offsets in the buffer. If you want offsets to correspond, see
         * `gtk_text_iter_get_slice()`.
         * @param end iterator at end of a range
         * @returns array of characters from the buffer
         */
        get_text(end: TextIter): string;

        /**
         * Returns a list of {@link Gtk.TextTag} that are toggled on or off at this
         * point.  (If `toggled_on` is `true`, the list contains tags that are
         * toggled on.) If a tag is toggled on at `iter`, then some non-empty
         * range of characters following `iter` has that tag applied to it.  If
         * a tag is toggled off, then some non-empty range following `iter`
         * does not have the tag applied to it.
         * @param toggled_on `true` to get toggled-on tags
         * @returns tags toggled at this point
         */
        get_toggled_tags(toggled_on: boolean): TextTag[];

        /**
         * Returns the number of bytes from the start of the
         * line to the given `iter`, not counting bytes that
         * are invisible due to tags with the “invisible” flag
         * toggled on.
         * @returns byte index of `iter` with respect to the start of the line
         */
        get_visible_line_index(): number;

        /**
         * Returns the offset in characters from the start of the
         * line to the given `iter`, not counting characters that
         * are invisible due to tags with the “invisible” flag
         * toggled on.
         * @returns offset in visible characters from the start of the line
         */
        get_visible_line_offset(): number;

        /**
         * Like `gtk_text_iter_get_slice()`, but invisible text is not included.
         * Invisible text is usually invisible because a {@link Gtk.TextTag} with the
         * “invisible” attribute turned on has been applied to it.
         * @param end iterator at end of range
         * @returns slice of text from the buffer
         */
        get_visible_slice(end: TextIter): string;

        /**
         * Like `gtk_text_iter_get_text()`, but invisible text is not included.
         * Invisible text is usually invisible because a {@link Gtk.TextTag} with the
         * “invisible” attribute turned on has been applied to it.
         * @param end iterator at end of range
         * @returns string containing visible text in the range
         */
        get_visible_text(end: TextIter): string;

        /**
         * Returns `true` if `iter` points to a character that is part of a range tagged
         * with `tag`. See also `gtk_text_iter_starts_tag()` and `gtk_text_iter_ends_tag()`.
         * @param tag a {@link Gtk.TextTag}
         * @returns whether `iter` is tagged with `tag`
         */
        has_tag(tag: TextTag): boolean;

        /**
         * Checks whether `iter` falls in the range [`start`, `end`).
         * `start` and `end` must be in ascending order.
         * @param start start of range
         * @param end end of range
         * @returns `true` if `iter` is in the range
         */
        in_range(start: TextIter, end: TextIter): boolean;

        /**
         * Determines whether `iter` is inside a sentence (as opposed to in
         * between two sentences, e.g. after a period and before the first
         * letter of the next sentence).  Sentence boundaries are determined
         * by Pango and should be correct for nearly any language (if not, the
         * correct fix would be to the Pango text boundary algorithms).
         * @returns `true` if `iter` is inside a sentence.
         */
        inside_sentence(): boolean;

        /**
         * Determines whether the character pointed by `iter` is part of a
         * natural-language word (as opposed to say inside some whitespace).  Word
         * breaks are determined by Pango and should be correct for nearly any language
         * (if not, the correct fix would be to the Pango word break algorithms).
         * 
         * Note that if `gtk_text_iter_starts_word()` returns `true`, then this function
         * returns `true` too, since `iter` points to the first character of the word.
         * @returns `true` if `iter` is inside a word
         */
        inside_word(): boolean;

        /**
         * See `gtk_text_iter_forward_cursor_position()` or {@link Pango.LogAttr} or
         * `pango_break()` for details on what a cursor position is.
         * @returns `true` if the cursor can be placed at `iter`
         */
        is_cursor_position(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns `true` if `iter` is the end iterator, i.e. one past the last
         * dereferenceable iterator in the buffer. `gtk_text_iter_is_end()` is
         * the most efficient way to check whether an iterator is the end
         * iterator.
         * @returns whether `iter` is the end iterator
         */
        is_end(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns `true` if `iter` is the first iterator in the buffer, that is
         * if `iter` has a character offset of 0.
         * @returns whether `iter` is the first in the buffer
         */
        is_start(): boolean;

        /**
         * Swaps the value of `first` and `second` if `second` comes before
         * `first` in the buffer. That is, ensures that `first` and `second` are
         * in sequence. Most text buffer functions that take a range call this
         * automatically on your behalf, so there’s no real reason to call it yourself
         * in those cases. There are some exceptions, such as `gtk_text_iter_in_range()`,
         * that expect a pre-sorted range.
         * @param second another {@link Gtk.TextIter}
         */
        order(second: TextIter): void;

        /**
         * Moves iterator `iter` to the start of the line `line_number`.  If
         * `line_number` is negative or larger than the number of lines in the
         * buffer, moves `iter` to the start of the last line in the buffer.
         * @param line_number line number (counted from 0)
         */
        set_line(line_number: number): void;

        /**
         * Same as `gtk_text_iter_set_line_offset()`, but works with a
         * byte index. The given byte index must be at
         * the start of a character, it can’t be in the middle of a UTF-8
         * encoded character.
         * @param byte_on_line a byte index relative to the start of `iter`’s current line
         */
        set_line_index(byte_on_line: number): void;

        /**
         * Moves `iter` within a line, to a new character
         * (not byte) offset. The given character offset must be less than or
         * equal to the number of characters in the line; if equal, `iter`
         * moves to the start of the next line. See
         * `gtk_text_iter_set_line_index()` if you have a byte index rather than
         * a character offset.
         * @param char_on_line a character offset relative to the start of `iter`’s current line
         */
        set_line_offset(char_on_line: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets `iter` to point to `char_offset`. `char_offset` counts from the start
         * of the entire text buffer, starting with 0.
         * @param char_offset a character number
         */
        set_offset(char_offset: number): void;

        /**
         * Like `gtk_text_iter_set_line_index()`, but the index is in visible
         * bytes, i.e. text with a tag making it invisible is not counted
         * in the index.
         * @param byte_on_line a byte index
         */
        set_visible_line_index(byte_on_line: number): void;

        /**
         * Like `gtk_text_iter_set_line_offset()`, but the offset is in visible
         * characters, i.e. text with a tag making it invisible is not
         * counted in the offset.
         * @param char_on_line a character offset
         */
        set_visible_line_offset(char_on_line: number): void;

        /**
         * Returns `true` if `iter` begins a paragraph,
         * i.e. if `gtk_text_iter_get_line_offset()` would return 0.
         * However this function is potentially more efficient than
         * `gtk_text_iter_get_line_offset()` because it doesn’t have to compute
         * the offset, it just has to see whether it’s 0.
         * @returns whether `iter` begins a line
         */
        starts_line(): boolean;

        /**
         * Determines whether `iter` begins a sentence.  Sentence boundaries are
         * determined by Pango and should be correct for nearly any language
         * (if not, the correct fix would be to the Pango text boundary
         * algorithms).
         * @returns `true` if `iter` is at the start of a sentence.
         */
        starts_sentence(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns `true` if `tag` is toggled on at exactly this point. If `tag`
         * is `null`, returns `true` if any tag is toggled on at this point.
         * 
         * Note that if `gtk_text_iter_starts_tag()` returns `true`, it means that `iter` is
         * at the beginning of the tagged range, and that the
         * character at `iter` is inside the tagged range. In other
         * words, unlike `gtk_text_iter_ends_tag()`, if `gtk_text_iter_starts_tag()` returns
         * `true`, `gtk_text_iter_has_tag()` will also return `true` for the same
         * parameters.
         * @param tag a {@link Gtk.TextTag}, or `null`
         * @returns whether `iter` is the start of a range tagged with `tag`
         */
        starts_tag(tag: TextTag | null): boolean;

        /**
         * Determines whether `iter` begins a natural-language word.  Word
         * breaks are determined by Pango and should be correct for nearly any
         * language (if not, the correct fix would be to the Pango word break
         * algorithms).
         * @returns `true` if `iter` is at the start of a word
         */
        starts_word(): boolean;

        /**
         * This is equivalent to (gtk_text_iter_starts_tag() ||
         * `gtk_text_iter_ends_tag()`), i.e. it tells you whether a range with
         * `tag` applied to it begins or ends at `iter`.
         * @param tag a {@link Gtk.TextTag}, or `null`
         * @returns whether `tag` is toggled on or off at `iter`
         */
        toggles_tag(tag: TextTag | null): boolean;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type TextMarkClass = typeof TextMark;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type TextTagClass = typeof TextTag;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class TextTagPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<TextTagPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type TextTagTableClass = typeof TextTagTable;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class TextTagTablePrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<TextTagTablePrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type TextViewAccessibleClass = typeof TextViewAccessible;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class TextViewAccessiblePrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<TextViewAccessiblePrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type TextViewClass = typeof TextView;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class TextViewPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<TextViewPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class ThemeEngine {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ThemeEngine>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type ThemingEngineClass = typeof ThemingEngine;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class ThemingEnginePrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ThemingEnginePrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type ToggleActionClass = typeof ToggleAction;

    /**
     * {@link Gtk.ToggleActionEntry} structs are used with
     * `gtk_action_group_add_toggle_actions()` to construct toggle actions.
     * @gir-type Struct
     * @deprecated since 3.10
     */
    class ToggleActionEntry {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ToggleActionEntry>;

        // Fields
        name: string;

        stock_id: string;

        label: string;

        accelerator: string;

        tooltip: string;

        callback: GObject.Callback;

        is_active: boolean;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class ToggleActionPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ToggleActionPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type ToggleButtonAccessibleClass = typeof ToggleButtonAccessible;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class ToggleButtonAccessiblePrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ToggleButtonAccessiblePrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type ToggleButtonClass = typeof ToggleButton;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class ToggleButtonPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ToggleButtonPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type ToggleToolButtonClass = typeof ToggleToolButton;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class ToggleToolButtonPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ToggleToolButtonPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type ToolButtonClass = typeof ToolButton;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class ToolButtonPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ToolButtonPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type ToolItemClass = typeof ToolItem;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type ToolItemGroupClass = typeof ToolItemGroup;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class ToolItemGroupPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ToolItemGroupPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class ToolItemPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ToolItemPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type ToolPaletteClass = typeof ToolPalette;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class ToolPalettePrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ToolPalettePrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type ToolShellIface = typeof ToolShell;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type ToolbarClass = typeof Toolbar;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class ToolbarPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ToolbarPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type ToplevelAccessibleClass = typeof ToplevelAccessible;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class ToplevelAccessiblePrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ToplevelAccessiblePrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type TreeDragDestIface = typeof TreeDragDest;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type TreeDragSourceIface = typeof TreeDragSource;

    /**
     * The {@link Gtk.TreeIter} is the primary structure
     * for accessing a {@link Gtk.TreeModel}. Models are expected to put a unique
     * integer in the `stamp` member, and put
     * model-specific data in the three `user_data`
     * members.
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    class TreeIter {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<TreeIter>;

        // Fields
        stamp: number;

        user_data: null;

        user_data2: null;

        user_data3: null;

        // Constructors

        constructor(properties?: Partial<{
            stamp: number;
            user_data: null;
            user_data2: null;
            user_data3: null;
        }>);

        // Methods
        /**
         * Creates a dynamically allocated tree iterator as a copy of `iter`.
         * 
         * This function is not intended for use in applications,
         * because you can just copy the structs by value
         * (`GtkTreeIter new_iter = iter;`).
         * You must free this iter with `gtk_tree_iter_free()`.
         * @returns a newly-allocated copy of `iter`
         */
        copy(): TreeIter;

        /**
         * Frees an iterator that has been allocated by `gtk_tree_iter_copy()`.
         * 
         * This function is mainly used for language bindings.
         */
        free(): void;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type TreeModelFilterClass = typeof TreeModelFilter;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class TreeModelFilterPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<TreeModelFilterPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type TreeModelIface = typeof TreeModel;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type TreeModelSortClass = typeof TreeModelSort;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class TreeModelSortPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<TreeModelSortPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    class TreePath {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<TreePath>;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<{}>);

        static ["new"](): TreePath;

        static new_first(): TreePath;

        static new_from_indices(indices: number[]): TreePath;

        static new_from_string(path: string): TreePath;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Appends a new index to a path.
         * 
         * As a result, the depth of the path is increased.
         * @param index_ the index
         */
        append_index(index_: number): void;

        /**
         * Compares two paths.
         * 
         * If `a` appears before `b` in a tree, then -1 is returned.
         * If `b` appears before `a`, then 1 is returned.
         * If the two nodes are equal, then 0 is returned.
         * @param b a {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct to compare with
         * @returns the relative positions of `a` and `b`
         */
        compare(b: TreePath): number;

        /**
         * Creates a new {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct as a copy of `path`.
         * @returns a new {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct
         */
        copy(): TreePath;

        /**
         * Moves `path` to point to the first child of the current path.
         */
        down(): void;

        /**
         * Frees `path`. If `path` is `null`, it simply returns.
         */
        free(): void;

        /**
         * Returns the current depth of `path`.
         * @returns The depth of `path`
         */
        get_depth(): number;

        /**
         * Returns the current indices of `path`.
         * 
         * This is an array of integers, each representing a node in a tree.
         * It also returns the number of elements in the array.
         * The array should not be freed.
         * @returns The current     indices, or `null`
         */
        get_indices(): number[];

        /**
         * Returns `true` if `descendant` is a descendant of `path`.
         * @param descendant another {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct
         * @returns `true` if `descendant` is contained inside `path`
         */
        is_ancestor(descendant: TreePath): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns `true` if `path` is a descendant of `ancestor`.
         * @param ancestor another {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct
         * @returns `true` if `ancestor` contains `path` somewhere below it
         */
        is_descendant(ancestor: TreePath): boolean;

        /**
         * Moves the `path` to point to the next node at the current depth.
         */
        next(): void;

        /**
         * Prepends a new index to a path.
         * 
         * As a result, the depth of the path is increased.
         * @param index_ the index
         */
        prepend_index(index_: number): void;

        /**
         * Moves the `path` to point to the previous node at the
         * current depth, if it exists.
         * @returns `true` if `path` has a previous node, and     the move was made
         */
        prev(): boolean;

        /**
         * Generates a string representation of the path.
         * 
         * This string is a “:” separated list of numbers.
         * For example, “4:10:0:3” would be an acceptable
         * return value for this string.
         * @returns A newly-allocated string.     Must be freed with `g_free()`.
         */
        to_string(): string;

        /**
         * Moves the `path` to point to its parent node, if it has a parent.
         * @returns `true` if `path` has a parent, and the move was made
         */
        up(): boolean;
    }


    /**
     * A GtkTreeRowReference tracks model changes so that it always refers to the
     * same row (a {@link Gtk.TreePath} refers to a position, not a fixed row). Create a
     * new GtkTreeRowReference with `gtk_tree_row_reference_new()`.
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    class TreeRowReference {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<TreeRowReference>;

        // Constructors
        constructor(model: TreeModel, path: TreePath);

        static ["new"](model: TreeModel, path: TreePath): TreeRowReference;

        static new_proxy(proxy: GObject.Object, model: TreeModel, path: TreePath): TreeRowReference;

        // Static methods
        /**
         * Lets a set of row reference created by
         * `gtk_tree_row_reference_new_proxy()` know that the
         * model emitted the {@link Gtk.TreeModel.SignalSignatures.row_deleted | Gtk.TreeModel::row-deleted} signal.
         * @param proxy a {@link GObject.Object}
         * @param path the path position that was deleted
         */
        static deleted(proxy: GObject.Object, path: TreePath): void;

        /**
         * Lets a set of row reference created by
         * `gtk_tree_row_reference_new_proxy()` know that the
         * model emitted the {@link Gtk.TreeModel.SignalSignatures.row_inserted | Gtk.TreeModel::row-inserted} signal.
         * @param proxy a {@link GObject.Object}
         * @param path the row position that was inserted
         */
        static inserted(proxy: GObject.Object, path: TreePath): void;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Copies a {@link Gtk.TreeRowReference}.
         * @returns a copy of `reference`
         */
        copy(): TreeRowReference;

        /**
         * Free’s `reference`. `reference` may be `null`
         */
        free(): void;

        /**
         * Returns the model that the row reference is monitoring.
         * @returns the model
         */
        get_model(): TreeModel;

        /**
         * Returns a path that the row reference currently points to,
         * or `null` if the path pointed to is no longer valid.
         * @returns a current path, or `null`
         */
        get_path(): TreePath | null;

        /**
         * Returns `true` if the `reference` is non-`null` and refers to
         * a current valid path.
         * @returns `true` if `reference` points to a valid path
         */
        valid(): boolean;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type TreeSelectionClass = typeof TreeSelection;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class TreeSelectionPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<TreeSelectionPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type TreeSortableIface = typeof TreeSortable;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type TreeStoreClass = typeof TreeStore;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class TreeStorePrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<TreeStorePrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type TreeViewAccessibleClass = typeof TreeViewAccessible;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class TreeViewAccessiblePrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<TreeViewAccessiblePrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type TreeViewClass = typeof TreeView;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type TreeViewColumnClass = typeof TreeViewColumn;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class TreeViewColumnPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<TreeViewColumnPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class TreeViewPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<TreeViewPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type UIManagerClass = typeof UIManager;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class UIManagerPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<UIManagerPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type VBoxClass = typeof VBox;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type VButtonBoxClass = typeof VButtonBox;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type VPanedClass = typeof VPaned;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type VScaleClass = typeof VScale;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type VScrollbarClass = typeof VScrollbar;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type VSeparatorClass = typeof VSeparator;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type ViewportClass = typeof Viewport;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class ViewportPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<ViewportPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type VolumeButtonClass = typeof VolumeButton;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type WidgetAccessibleClass = typeof WidgetAccessible;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class WidgetAccessiblePrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<WidgetAccessiblePrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type WidgetClass = typeof Widget;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class WidgetClassPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<WidgetClassPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * GtkWidgetPath is a boxed type that represents a widget hierarchy from
     * the topmost widget, typically a toplevel, to any child. This widget
     * path abstraction is used in {@link Gtk.StyleContext} on behalf of the real
     * widget in order to query style information.
     * 
     * If you are using GTK+ widgets, you probably will not need to use
     * this API directly, as there is `gtk_widget_get_path()`, and the style
     * context returned by `gtk_widget_get_style_context()` will be automatically
     * updated on widget hierarchy changes.
     * 
     * The widget path generation is generally simple:
     * 
     * ## Defining a button within a window
     * 
     * 
     * ```c
     * {
     *   GtkWidgetPath *path;
     * 
     *   path = gtk_widget_path_new ();
     *   gtk_widget_path_append_type (path, GTK_TYPE_WINDOW);
     *   gtk_widget_path_append_type (path, GTK_TYPE_BUTTON);
     * }
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * Although more complex information, such as widget names, or
     * different classes (property that may be used by other widget
     * types) and intermediate regions may be included:
     * 
     * ## Defining the first tab widget in a notebook
     * 
     * 
     * ```c
     * {
     *   GtkWidgetPath *path;
     *   guint pos;
     * 
     *   path = gtk_widget_path_new ();
     * 
     *   pos = gtk_widget_path_append_type (path, GTK_TYPE_NOTEBOOK);
     *   gtk_widget_path_iter_add_region (path, pos, "tab", GTK_REGION_EVEN | GTK_REGION_FIRST);
     * 
     *   pos = gtk_widget_path_append_type (path, GTK_TYPE_LABEL);
     *   gtk_widget_path_iter_set_name (path, pos, "first tab label");
     * }
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * All this information will be used to match the style information
     * that applies to the described widget.
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    class WidgetPath {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<WidgetPath>;

        // Constructors
        constructor(properties?: Partial<{}>);

        static ["new"](): WidgetPath;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Appends the data from `widget` to the widget hierarchy represented
         * by `path`. This function is a shortcut for adding information from
         * `widget` to the given `path`. This includes setting the name or
         * adding the style classes from `widget`.
         * @param widget the widget to append to the widget path
         * @returns the position where the data was inserted
         */
        append_for_widget(widget: Widget): number;

        /**
         * Appends a widget type to the widget hierarchy represented by `path`.
         * @param type widget type to append
         * @returns the position where the element was inserted
         */
        append_type(type: GObject.GType): number;

        /**
         * Appends a widget type with all its siblings to the widget hierarchy
         * represented by `path`. Using this function instead of
         * `gtk_widget_path_append_type()` will allow the CSS theming to use
         * sibling matches in selectors and apply :nth-child() pseudo classes.
         * In turn, it requires a lot more care in widget implementations as
         * widgets need to make sure to call `gtk_widget_reset_style()` on all
         * involved widgets when the `siblings` path changes.
         * @param siblings a widget path describing a list of siblings. This path   may not contain any siblings itself and it must not be modified   afterwards.
         * @param sibling_index index into `siblings` for where the added element is   positioned.
         * @returns the position where the element was inserted.
         */
        append_with_siblings(siblings: WidgetPath, sibling_index: number): number;

        /**
         * Returns a copy of `path`
         * @returns a copy of `path`
         */
        copy(): WidgetPath;

        /**
         * Decrements the reference count on `path`, freeing the structure
         * if the reference count reaches 0.
         */
        free(): void;

        /**
         * Returns the topmost object type, that is, the object type this path
         * is representing.
         * @returns The object type
         */
        get_object_type(): GObject.GType;

        /**
         * Returns `true` if any of the parents of the widget represented
         * in `path` is of type `type`, or any subtype of it.
         * @param type widget type to check in parents
         * @returns `true` if any parent is of type `type`
         */
        has_parent(type: GObject.GType): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns `true` if the widget type represented by this path
         * is `type`, or a subtype of it.
         * @param type widget type to match
         * @returns `true` if the widget represented by `path` is of type `type`
         */
        is_type(type: GObject.GType): boolean;

        /**
         * Adds the class `name` to the widget at position `pos` in
         * the hierarchy defined in `path`. See
         * `gtk_style_context_add_class()`.
         * @param pos position to modify, -1 for the path head
         * @param name a class name
         */
        iter_add_class(pos: number, name: string): void;

        /**
         * Adds the region `name` to the widget at position `pos` in
         * the hierarchy defined in `path`. See
         * `gtk_style_context_add_region()`.
         * 
         * Region names must only contain lowercase letters
         * and “-”, starting always with a lowercase letter.
         * @param pos position to modify, -1 for the path head
         * @param name region name
         * @param flags flags affecting the region
         */
        iter_add_region(pos: number, name: string, flags: RegionFlags): void;

        /**
         * Removes all classes from the widget at position `pos` in the
         * hierarchy defined in `path`.
         * @param pos position to modify, -1 for the path head
         */
        iter_clear_classes(pos: number): void;

        /**
         * Removes all regions from the widget at position `pos` in the
         * hierarchy defined in `path`.
         * @param pos position to modify, -1 for the path head
         */
        iter_clear_regions(pos: number): void;

        /**
         * Returns the name corresponding to the widget found at
         * the position `pos` in the widget hierarchy defined by
         * `path`
         * @param pos position to get the widget name for, -1 for the path head
         * @returns The widget name, or `null` if none was set.
         */
        iter_get_name(pos: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Returns the object name that is at position `pos` in the widget
         * hierarchy defined in `path`.
         * @param pos position to get the object name for, -1 for the path head
         * @returns the name or `null`
         */
        iter_get_object_name(pos: number): string | null;

        /**
         * Returns the object {@link GObject.GType} that is at position `pos` in the widget
         * hierarchy defined in `path`.
         * @param pos position to get the object type for, -1 for the path head
         * @returns a widget type
         */
        iter_get_object_type(pos: number): GObject.GType;

        /**
         * Returns the index into the list of siblings for the element at `pos` as
         * returned by `gtk_widget_path_iter_get_siblings()`. If that function would
         * return `null` because the element at `pos` has no siblings, this function
         * will return 0.
         * @param pos position to get the sibling index for, -1 for the path head
         * @returns 0 or the index into the list of siblings for the element at `pos`.
         */
        iter_get_sibling_index(pos: number): number;

        /**
         * Returns the list of siblings for the element at `pos`. If the element
         * was not added with siblings, `null` is returned.
         * @param pos position to get the siblings for, -1 for the path head
         * @returns `null` or the list of siblings for the element at `pos`.
         */
        iter_get_siblings(pos: number): WidgetPath;

        /**
         * Returns the state flags corresponding to the widget found at
         * the position `pos` in the widget hierarchy defined by
         * `path`
         * @param pos position to get the state for, -1 for the path head
         * @returns The state flags
         */
        iter_get_state(pos: number): StateFlags;

        /**
         * Returns `true` if the widget at position `pos` has the class `name`
         * defined, `false` otherwise.
         * @param pos position to query, -1 for the path head
         * @param name class name
         * @returns `true` if the class `name` is defined for the widget at `pos`
         */
        iter_has_class(pos: number, name: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns `true` if the widget at position `pos` has the name `name`,
         * `false` otherwise.
         * @param pos position to query, -1 for the path head
         * @param name a widget name
         * @returns `true` if the widget at `pos` has this name
         */
        iter_has_name(pos: number, name: string): boolean;

        /**
         * See `gtk_widget_path_iter_has_class()`. This is a version that operates
         * with GQuarks.
         * @param pos position to query, -1 for the path head
         * @param qname class name as a {@link GLib.Quark}
         * @returns `true` if the widget at `pos` has the class defined.
         */
        iter_has_qclass(pos: number, qname: GLib.Quark): boolean;

        /**
         * See `gtk_widget_path_iter_has_name()`. This is a version
         * that operates on `GQuarks`.
         * @param pos position to query, -1 for the path head
         * @param qname widget name as a {@link GLib.Quark}
         * @returns `true` if the widget at `pos` has this name
         */
        iter_has_qname(pos: number, qname: GLib.Quark): boolean;

        /**
         * See `gtk_widget_path_iter_has_region()`. This is a version that operates
         * with GQuarks.
         * @param pos position to query, -1 for the path head
         * @param qname region name as a {@link GLib.Quark}
         * @returns `true` if the widget at `pos` has the region defined.
         */
        iter_has_qregion(pos: number, qname: GLib.Quark): [boolean, RegionFlags];

        /**
         * Returns `true` if the widget at position `pos` has the class `name`
         * defined, `false` otherwise.
         * @param pos position to query, -1 for the path head
         * @param name region name
         * @returns `true` if the class `name` is defined for the widget at `pos`
         */
        iter_has_region(pos: number, name: string): [boolean, RegionFlags];

        /**
         * Returns a list with all the class names defined for the widget
         * at position `pos` in the hierarchy defined in `path`.
         * @param pos position to query, -1 for the path head
         * @returns The list of          classes, This is a list of strings, the {@link GLib.SList} contents          are owned by GTK+, but you should use `g_slist_free()` to          free the list itself.
         */
        iter_list_classes(pos: number): string[];

        /**
         * Returns a list with all the region names defined for the widget
         * at position `pos` in the hierarchy defined in `path`.
         * @param pos position to query, -1 for the path head
         * @returns The list of          regions, This is a list of strings, the {@link GLib.SList} contents          are owned by GTK+, but you should use `g_slist_free()` to          free the list itself.
         */
        iter_list_regions(pos: number): string[];

        /**
         * Removes the class `name` from the widget at position `pos` in
         * the hierarchy defined in `path`.
         * @param pos position to modify, -1 for the path head
         * @param name class name
         */
        iter_remove_class(pos: number, name: string): void;

        /**
         * Removes the region `name` from the widget at position `pos` in
         * the hierarchy defined in `path`.
         * @param pos position to modify, -1 for the path head
         * @param name region name
         */
        iter_remove_region(pos: number, name: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets the widget name for the widget found at position `pos`
         * in the widget hierarchy defined by `path`.
         * @param pos position to modify, -1 for the path head
         * @param name widget name
         */
        iter_set_name(pos: number, name: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets the object name for a given position in the widget hierarchy
         * defined by `path`.
         * 
         * When set, the object name overrides the object type when matching
         * CSS.
         * @param pos position to modify, -1 for the path head
         * @param name object name to set or `null` to unset
         */
        iter_set_object_name(pos: number, name: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the object type for a given position in the widget hierarchy
         * defined by `path`.
         * @param pos position to modify, -1 for the path head
         * @param type object type to set
         */
        iter_set_object_type(pos: number, type: GObject.GType): void;

        /**
         * Sets the widget name for the widget found at position `pos`
         * in the widget hierarchy defined by `path`.
         * 
         * If you want to update just a single state flag, you need to do
         * this manually, as this function updates all state flags.
         * 
         * ## Setting a flag
         * 
         * 
         * ```c
         * gtk_widget_path_iter_set_state (path, pos, gtk_widget_path_iter_get_state (path, pos) | flag);
         * ```
         * 
         * 
         * ## Unsetting a flag
         * 
         * 
         * ```c
         * gtk_widget_path_iter_set_state (path, pos, gtk_widget_path_iter_get_state (path, pos) & ~flag);
         * ```
         * 
         * @param pos position to modify, -1 for the path head
         * @param state state flags
         */
        iter_set_state(pos: number, state: StateFlags): void;

        /**
         * Returns the number of {@link Gtk.Widget} `GTypes` between the represented
         * widget and its topmost container.
         * @returns the number of elements in the path
         */
        length(): number;

        /**
         * Prepends a widget type to the widget hierachy represented by `path`.
         * @param type widget type to prepend
         */
        prepend_type(type: GObject.GType): void;

        /**
         * Increments the reference count on `path`.
         * @returns `path` itself.
         */
        ref(): WidgetPath;

        /**
         * Dumps the widget path into a string representation. It tries to match
         * the CSS style as closely as possible (Note that there might be paths
         * that cannot be represented in CSS).
         * 
         * The main use of this code is for debugging purposes, so that you can
         * `g_print()` the path or dump it in a gdb session.
         * @returns A new string describing `path`.
         */
        to_string(): string;

        /**
         * Decrements the reference count on `path`, freeing the structure
         * if the reference count reaches 0.
         */
        unref(): void;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class WidgetPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<WidgetPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type WindowAccessibleClass = typeof WindowAccessible;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class WindowAccessiblePrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<WindowAccessiblePrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type WindowClass = typeof Window;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class WindowGeometryInfo {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<WindowGeometryInfo>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type WindowGroupClass = typeof WindowGroup;

    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class WindowGroupPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<WindowGroupPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class WindowPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<WindowPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * Abstract interface type for the D-Bus interface <link linkend="gdbus-interface-org-Gtk-MountOperationHandler.top_of_page">org.Gtk.MountOperationHandler</link>.
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class _MountOperationHandler {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<_MountOperationHandler>;
    }


    /**
     * Virtual table for the D-Bus interface <link linkend="gdbus-interface-org-Gtk-MountOperationHandler.top_of_page">org.Gtk.MountOperationHandler</link>.
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class _MountOperationHandlerIface {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<_MountOperationHandlerIface>;
    }


    /**
     * The #_GtkMountOperationHandlerProxy structure contains only private data and should only be accessed using the provided API.
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class _MountOperationHandlerProxy {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<_MountOperationHandlerProxy>;
    }


    /**
     * Class structure for #_GtkMountOperationHandlerProxy.
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class _MountOperationHandlerProxyClass {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<_MountOperationHandlerProxyClass>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class _MountOperationHandlerProxyPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<_MountOperationHandlerProxyPrivate>;
    }


    /**
     * The #_GtkMountOperationHandlerSkeleton structure contains only private data and should only be accessed using the provided API.
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class _MountOperationHandlerSkeleton {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<_MountOperationHandlerSkeleton>;
    }


    /**
     * Class structure for #_GtkMountOperationHandlerSkeleton.
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class _MountOperationHandlerSkeletonClass {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<_MountOperationHandlerSkeletonClass>;
    }


    /**
     * @gir-type Struct
     */
    abstract class _MountOperationHandlerSkeletonPrivate {
        static $gtype: GObject.GType<_MountOperationHandlerSkeletonPrivate>;
    }


    namespace Actionable {
        /**
         * Interface for implementing Actionable.
         * Contains only the virtual methods that need to be implemented.
         */
        interface Interface {

            // Virtual methods
            /**
             * Gets the action name for `actionable`.
             * 
             * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_name()` for more information.
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_get_action_name(): string | null;

            /**
             * Gets the current target value of `actionable`.
             * 
             * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_target_value()` for more information.
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_get_action_target_value(): GLib.Variant;

            /**
             * Specifies the name of the action with which this widget should be
             * associated.  If `action_name` is `null` then the widget will be
             * unassociated from any previous action.
             * 
             * Usually this function is used when the widget is located (or will be
             * located) within the hierarchy of a {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow}.
             * 
             * Names are of the form “win.save” or “app.quit” for actions on the
             * containing {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow} or its associated {@link Gtk.Application},
             * respectively.  This is the same form used for actions in the {@link Gio.Menu}
             * associated with the window.
             * @param action_name an action name, or `null`
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_set_action_name(action_name: string | null): void;

            /**
             * Sets the target value of an actionable widget.
             * 
             * If `target_value` is `null` then the target value is unset.
             * 
             * The target value has two purposes.  First, it is used as the
             * parameter to activation of the action associated with the
             * {@link Gtk.Actionable} widget. Second, it is used to determine if the widget
             * should be rendered as “active” — the widget is active if the state
             * is equal to the given target.
             * 
             * Consider the example of associating a set of buttons with a {@link Gio.Action}
             * with string state in a typical “radio button” situation.  Each button
             * will be associated with the same action, but with a different target
             * value for that action.  Clicking on a particular button will activate
             * the action with the target of that button, which will typically cause
             * the action’s state to change to that value.  Since the action’s state
             * is now equal to the target value of the button, the button will now
             * be rendered as active (and the other buttons, with different targets,
             * rendered inactive).
             * @param target_value a {@link GLib.Variant} to set as the target value, or `null`
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_set_action_target_value(target_value: GLib.Variant | null): void;
        }


        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Widget.ConstructorProps {
            action_name: string | null;
            actionName: string | null;
            action_target: GLib.Variant;
            actionTarget: GLib.Variant;
        }
    }

    export interface ActionableNamespace {
        $gtype: GObject.GType<Actionable>;
        prototype: Actionable;
    }
    /**
     * This interface provides a convenient way of associating widgets with
     * actions on a {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow} or {@link Gtk.Application}.
     * 
     * It primarily consists of two properties: {@link Gtk.Actionable.action_name}
     * and {@link Gtk.Actionable.action_target}. There are also some convenience APIs
     * for setting these properties.
     * 
     * The action will be looked up in action groups that are found among
     * the widgets ancestors. Most commonly, these will be the actions with
     * the “win.” or “app.” prefix that are associated with the {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow}
     * or {@link Gtk.Application}, but other action groups that are added with
     * `gtk_widget_insert_action_group()` will be consulted as well.
     * @gir-type Interface
     * @since 3.4
     */
    interface Actionable extends Widget, Actionable.Interface {

        // Properties
        /**
         * @default null
         */
        get action_name(): string | null;
        set action_name(val: string | null);

        /**
         * @default null
         */
        get actionName(): string | null;
        set actionName(val: string | null);

        get action_target(): GLib.Variant;
        set action_target(val: GLib.Variant);

        get actionTarget(): GLib.Variant;
        set actionTarget(val: GLib.Variant);

        // Methods
        /**
         * Gets the action name for `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_name()` for more information.
         * @returns the action name, or `null` if none is set
         */
        get_action_name(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the current target value of `actionable`.
         * 
         * See `gtk_actionable_set_action_target_value()` for more information.
         * @returns the current target value
         */
        get_action_target_value(): GLib.Variant;

        /**
         * Specifies the name of the action with which this widget should be
         * associated.  If `action_name` is `null` then the widget will be
         * unassociated from any previous action.
         * 
         * Usually this function is used when the widget is located (or will be
         * located) within the hierarchy of a {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow}.
         * 
         * Names are of the form “win.save” or “app.quit” for actions on the
         * containing {@link Gtk.ApplicationWindow} or its associated {@link Gtk.Application},
         * respectively.  This is the same form used for actions in the {@link Gio.Menu}
         * associated with the window.
         * @param action_name an action name, or `null`
         */
        set_action_name(action_name: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the target value of an actionable widget.
         * 
         * If `target_value` is `null` then the target value is unset.
         * 
         * The target value has two purposes.  First, it is used as the
         * parameter to activation of the action associated with the
         * {@link Gtk.Actionable} widget. Second, it is used to determine if the widget
         * should be rendered as “active” — the widget is active if the state
         * is equal to the given target.
         * 
         * Consider the example of associating a set of buttons with a {@link Gio.Action}
         * with string state in a typical “radio button” situation.  Each button
         * will be associated with the same action, but with a different target
         * value for that action.  Clicking on a particular button will activate
         * the action with the target of that button, which will typically cause
         * the action’s state to change to that value.  Since the action’s state
         * is now equal to the target value of the button, the button will now
         * be rendered as active (and the other buttons, with different targets,
         * rendered inactive).
         * @param target_value a {@link GLib.Variant} to set as the target value, or `null`
         */
        set_action_target_value(target_value: GLib.Variant | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the action-name and associated string target value of an
         * actionable widget.
         * 
         * `detailed_action_name` is a string in the format accepted by
         * `g_action_parse_detailed_name()`.
         * 
         * (Note that prior to version 3.22.25,
         * this function is only usable for actions with a simple "s" target, and
         * `detailed_action_name` must be of the form `"action::target"` where
         * `action` is the action name and `target` is the string to use
         * as the target.)
         * @param detailed_action_name the detailed action name
         */
        set_detailed_action_name(detailed_action_name: string): void;
    }


    export const Actionable: ActionableNamespace & {
        new (): Actionable; // This allows `obj instanceof Actionable`
    };

    namespace Activatable {
        /**
         * Interface for implementing Activatable.
         * Contains only the virtual methods that need to be implemented.
         */
        interface Interface {

            // Virtual methods
            /**
             * This is called to update the activatable completely, this is called
             * internally when the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action} property is set
             * or unset and by the implementing class when
             * {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} changes.
             * @param action the related {@link Gtk.Action} or `null`
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_sync_action_properties(action: Action | null): void;

            /**
             * Called to update the activatable when its related action’s properties change.
             * You must check the {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} property only apply action
             * properties that are meant to effect the appearance accordingly.
             * @param action 
             * @param property_name 
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_update(action: Action, property_name: string): void;
        }


        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.Object.ConstructorProps {
            related_action: Action;
            relatedAction: Action;
            use_action_appearance: boolean;
            useActionAppearance: boolean;
        }
    }

    export interface ActivatableNamespace {
        $gtype: GObject.GType<Activatable>;
        prototype: Activatable;
    }
    /**
     * Activatable widgets can be connected to a {@link Gtk.Action} and reflects
     * the state of its action. A {@link Gtk.Activatable} can also provide feedback
     * through its action, as they are responsible for activating their
     * related actions.
     * 
     * # Implementing GtkActivatable
     * 
     * When extending a class that is already {@link Gtk.Activatable}; it is only
     * necessary to implement the {@link Gtk.Activatable}->sync_action_properties()
     * and {@link Gtk.Activatable}->update() methods and chain up to the parent
     * implementation, however when introducing
     * a new {@link Gtk.Activatable} class; the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action} and
     * {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} properties need to be handled by
     * the implementor. Handling these properties is mostly a matter of installing
     * the action pointer and boolean flag on your instance, and calling
     * `gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action()` and
     * `gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties()` at the appropriate times.
     * 
     * ## A class fragment implementing {@link Gtk.Activatable}
     * 
     * 
     * ```c
     * 
     * enum {
     * ...
     * 
     * PROP_ACTIVATABLE_RELATED_ACTION,
     * PROP_ACTIVATABLE_USE_ACTION_APPEARANCE
     * }
     * 
     * struct _FooBarPrivate
     * {
     * 
     *   ...
     * 
     *   GtkAction      *action;
     *   gboolean        use_action_appearance;
     * };
     * 
     * ...
     * 
     * static void foo_bar_activatable_interface_init         (GtkActivatableIface  *iface);
     * static void foo_bar_activatable_update                 (GtkActivatable       *activatable,
     * 						           GtkAction            *action,
     * 						           const gchar          *property_name);
     * static void foo_bar_activatable_sync_action_properties (GtkActivatable       *activatable,
     * 						           GtkAction            *action);
     * ...
     * 
     * 
     * static void
     * foo_bar_class_init (FooBarClass *klass)
     * {
     * 
     *   ...
     * 
     *   g_object_class_override_property (gobject_class, PROP_ACTIVATABLE_RELATED_ACTION, "related-action");
     *   g_object_class_override_property (gobject_class, PROP_ACTIVATABLE_USE_ACTION_APPEARANCE, "use-action-appearance");
     * 
     *   ...
     * }
     * 
     * 
     * static void
     * foo_bar_activatable_interface_init (GtkActivatableIface  *iface)
     * {
     *   iface->update = foo_bar_activatable_update;
     *   iface->sync_action_properties = foo_bar_activatable_sync_action_properties;
     * }
     * 
     * ... Break the reference using `gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action()`...
     * 
     * static void
     * foo_bar_dispose (GObject *object)
     * {
     *   FooBar *bar = FOO_BAR (object);
     *   FooBarPrivate *priv = FOO_BAR_GET_PRIVATE (bar);
     * 
     *   ...
     * 
     *   if (priv->action)
     *     {
     *       gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action (GTK_ACTIVATABLE (bar), NULL);
     *       priv->action = NULL;
     *     }
     *   G_OBJECT_CLASS (foo_bar_parent_class)->dispose (object);
     * }
     * 
     * ... Handle the “related-action” and “use-action-appearance” properties ...
     * 
     * static void
     * foo_bar_set_property (GObject         *object,
     *                       guint            prop_id,
     *                       const GValue    *value,
     *                       GParamSpec      *pspec)
     * {
     *   FooBar *bar = FOO_BAR (object);
     *   FooBarPrivate *priv = FOO_BAR_GET_PRIVATE (bar);
     * 
     *   switch (prop_id)
     *     {
     * 
     *       ...
     * 
     *     case PROP_ACTIVATABLE_RELATED_ACTION:
     *       foo_bar_set_related_action (bar, g_value_get_object (value));
     *       break;
     *     case PROP_ACTIVATABLE_USE_ACTION_APPEARANCE:
     *       foo_bar_set_use_action_appearance (bar, g_value_get_boolean (value));
     *       break;
     *     default:
     *       G_OBJECT_WARN_INVALID_PROPERTY_ID (object, prop_id, pspec);
     *       break;
     *     }
     * }
     * 
     * static void
     * foo_bar_get_property (GObject         *object,
     *                          guint            prop_id,
     *                          GValue          *value,
     *                          GParamSpec      *pspec)
     * {
     *   FooBar *bar = FOO_BAR (object);
     *   FooBarPrivate *priv = FOO_BAR_GET_PRIVATE (bar);
     * 
     *   switch (prop_id)
     *     {
     * 
     *       ...
     * 
     *     case PROP_ACTIVATABLE_RELATED_ACTION:
     *       g_value_set_object (value, priv->action);
     *       break;
     *     case PROP_ACTIVATABLE_USE_ACTION_APPEARANCE:
     *       g_value_set_boolean (value, priv->use_action_appearance);
     *       break;
     *     default:
     *       G_OBJECT_WARN_INVALID_PROPERTY_ID (object, prop_id, pspec);
     *       break;
     *     }
     * }
     * 
     * 
     * static void
     * foo_bar_set_use_action_appearance (FooBar   *bar,
     * 				   gboolean  use_appearance)
     * {
     *   FooBarPrivate *priv = FOO_BAR_GET_PRIVATE (bar);
     * 
     *   if (priv->use_action_appearance != use_appearance)
     *     {
     *       priv->use_action_appearance = use_appearance;
     *       
     *       gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties (GTK_ACTIVATABLE (bar), priv->action);
     *     }
     * }
     * 
     * ... call `gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action()` and then assign the action pointer,
     * no need to reference the action here since `gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action()` already
     * holds a reference here for you...
     * static void
     * foo_bar_set_related_action (FooBar    *bar,
     * 			    GtkAction *action)
     * {
     *   FooBarPrivate *priv = FOO_BAR_GET_PRIVATE (bar);
     * 
     *   if (priv->action == action)
     *     return;
     * 
     *   gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action (GTK_ACTIVATABLE (bar), action);
     * 
     *   priv->action = action;
     * }
     * 
     * ... Selectively reset and update activatable depending on the use-action-appearance property ...
     * static void
     * gtk_button_activatable_sync_action_properties (GtkActivatable       *activatable,
     * 		                                  GtkAction            *action)
     * {
     *   GtkButtonPrivate *priv = GTK_BUTTON_GET_PRIVATE (activatable);
     * 
     *   if (!action)
     *     return;
     * 
     *   if (gtk_action_is_visible (action))
     *     gtk_widget_show (GTK_WIDGET (activatable));
     *   else
     *     gtk_widget_hide (GTK_WIDGET (activatable));
     *   
     *   gtk_widget_set_sensitive (GTK_WIDGET (activatable), gtk_action_is_sensitive (action));
     * 
     *   ...
     *   
     *   if (priv->use_action_appearance)
     *     {
     *       if (gtk_action_get_stock_id (action))
     * 	foo_bar_set_stock (button, gtk_action_get_stock_id (action));
     *       else if (gtk_action_get_label (action))
     * 	foo_bar_set_label (button, gtk_action_get_label (action));
     * 
     *       ...
     * 
     *     }
     * }
     * 
     * static void
     * foo_bar_activatable_update (GtkActivatable       *activatable,
     * 			       GtkAction            *action,
     * 			       const gchar          *property_name)
     * {
     *   FooBarPrivate *priv = FOO_BAR_GET_PRIVATE (activatable);
     * 
     *   if (strcmp (property_name, "visible") == 0)
     *     {
     *       if (gtk_action_is_visible (action))
     * 	gtk_widget_show (GTK_WIDGET (activatable));
     *       else
     * 	gtk_widget_hide (GTK_WIDGET (activatable));
     *     }
     *   else if (strcmp (property_name, "sensitive") == 0)
     *     gtk_widget_set_sensitive (GTK_WIDGET (activatable), gtk_action_is_sensitive (action));
     * 
     *   ...
     * 
     *   if (!priv->use_action_appearance)
     *     return;
     * 
     *   if (strcmp (property_name, "stock-id") == 0)
     *     foo_bar_set_stock (button, gtk_action_get_stock_id (action));
     *   else if (strcmp (property_name, "label") == 0)
     *     foo_bar_set_label (button, gtk_action_get_label (action));
     * 
     *   ...
     * }
     * ```
     * 
     * @gir-type Interface
     */
    interface Activatable extends GObject.Object, Activatable.Interface {

        // Properties
        /**
         * The action that this activatable will activate and receive
         * updates from for various states and possibly appearance.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the this property and
         * > call `gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action()` when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
         */
        get related_action(): Action;
        set related_action(val: Action);

        /**
         * The action that this activatable will activate and receive
         * updates from for various states and possibly appearance.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the this property and
         * > call `gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action()` when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
         */
        get relatedAction(): Action;
        set relatedAction(val: Action);

        /**
         * Whether this activatable should reset its layout
         * and appearance when setting the related action or when
         * the action changes appearance.
         * 
         * See the {@link Gtk.Action} documentation directly to find which properties
         * should be ignored by the {@link Gtk.Activatable} when this property is `false`.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle this property
         * > and call `gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties()` on the activatable
         * > widget when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
         * @default true
         */
        get use_action_appearance(): boolean;
        set use_action_appearance(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether this activatable should reset its layout
         * and appearance when setting the related action or when
         * the action changes appearance.
         * 
         * See the {@link Gtk.Action} documentation directly to find which properties
         * should be ignored by the {@link Gtk.Activatable} when this property is `false`.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle this property
         * > and call `gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties()` on the activatable
         * > widget when it changes.
         * @since 2.16
         * @deprecated since 3.10
         * @default true
         */
        get useActionAppearance(): boolean;
        set useActionAppearance(val: boolean);

        // Methods
        /**
         * This is a utility function for {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors.
         * 
         * When implementing {@link Gtk.Activatable} you must call this when
         * handling changes of the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action}, and
         * you must also use this to break references in {@link GObject.Object}->dispose().
         * 
         * This function adds a reference to the currently set related
         * action for you, it also makes sure the {@link Gtk.Activatable}->update()
         * method is called when the related {@link Gtk.Action} properties change
         * and registers to the action’s proxy list.
         * 
         * > Be careful to call this before setting the local
         * > copy of the {@link Gtk.Action} property, since this function uses
         * > `gtk_activatable_get_related_action()` to retrieve the
         * > previous action.
         * @param action the {@link Gtk.Action} to set
         */
        do_set_related_action(action: Action): void;

        /**
         * Gets the related {@link Gtk.Action} for `activatable`.
         * @returns the related {@link Gtk.Action} if one is set.
         */
        get_related_action(): Action;

        /**
         * Gets whether this activatable should reset its layout
         * and appearance when setting the related action or when
         * the action changes appearance.
         * @returns whether `activatable` uses its actions appearance.
         */
        get_use_action_appearance(): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the related action on the `activatable` object.
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action}
         * > property and call `gtk_activatable_do_set_related_action()` when it changes.
         * @param action the {@link Gtk.Action} to set
         */
        set_related_action(action: Action): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether this activatable should reset its layout and appearance
         * when setting the related action or when the action changes appearance
         * 
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable} implementors need to handle the
         * > {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} property and call
         * > `gtk_activatable_sync_action_properties()` to update `activatable`
         * > if needed.
         * @param use_appearance whether to use the actions appearance
         */
        set_use_action_appearance(use_appearance: boolean): void;

        /**
         * This is called to update the activatable completely, this is called
         * internally when the {@link Gtk.Activatable.related_action} property is set
         * or unset and by the implementing class when
         * {@link Gtk.Activatable.use_action_appearance} changes.
         * @param action the related {@link Gtk.Action} or `null`
         */
        sync_action_properties(action: Action | null): void;
    }


    export const Activatable: ActivatableNamespace & {
        new (): Activatable; // This allows `obj instanceof Activatable`
    };

    namespace AppChooser {

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Widget.ConstructorProps {
            content_type: string;
            contentType: string;
        }
    }

    export interface AppChooserNamespace {
        $gtype: GObject.GType<AppChooser>;
        prototype: AppChooser;
    }
    /**
     * {@link Gtk.AppChooser} is an interface that can be implemented by widgets which
     * allow the user to choose an application (typically for the purpose of
     * opening a file). The main objects that implement this interface are
     * {@link Gtk.AppChooserWidget}, {@link Gtk.AppChooserDialog} and {@link Gtk.AppChooserButton}.
     * 
     * Applications are represented by GIO {@link Gio.AppInfo} objects here.
     * GIO has a concept of recommended and fallback applications for a
     * given content type. Recommended applications are those that claim
     * to handle the content type itself, while fallback also includes
     * applications that handle a more generic content type. GIO also
     * knows the default and last-used application for a given content
     * type. The {@link Gtk.AppChooserWidget} provides detailed control over
     * whether the shown list of applications should include default,
     * recommended or fallback applications.
     * 
     * To obtain the application that has been selected in a {@link Gtk.AppChooser},
     * use `gtk_app_chooser_get_app_info()`.
     * @gir-type Interface
     */
    interface AppChooser extends Widget {

        // Properties
        /**
         * The content type of the {@link Gtk.AppChooser} object.
         * 
         * See [GContentType][gio-GContentType]
         * for more information about content types.
         * @construct-only
         * @default null
         */
        get content_type(): string;

        /**
         * The content type of the {@link Gtk.AppChooser} object.
         * 
         * See [GContentType][gio-GContentType]
         * for more information about content types.
         * @construct-only
         * @default null
         */
        get contentType(): string;

        // Methods
        /**
         * Returns the currently selected application.
         * @returns a {@link Gio.AppInfo} for the currently selected     application, or `null` if none is selected. Free with `g_object_unref()`
         */
        get_app_info(): Gio.AppInfo | null;

        /**
         * Returns the current value of the {@link Gtk.AppChooser.content_type} property.
         * @returns the content type of `self`. Free with `g_free()`
         */
        get_content_type(): string;

        /**
         * Reloads the list of applications.
         */
        refresh(): void;
    }


    export const AppChooser: AppChooserNamespace & {
        new (): AppChooser; // This allows `obj instanceof AppChooser`
    };

    namespace Buildable {
        /**
         * Interface for implementing Buildable.
         * Contains only the virtual methods that need to be implemented.
         */
        interface Interface {

            // Virtual methods
            /**
             * Adds a child to `buildable`. `type` is an optional string
             * describing how the child should be added.
             * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
             * @param child child to add
             * @param type kind of child or `null`
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_add_child(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object, type: string | null): void;

            /**
             * Constructs a child of `buildable` with the name `name`.
             * 
             * {@link Gtk.Builder} calls this function if a “constructor” has been
             * specified in the UI definition.
             * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
             * @param name name of child to construct
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_construct_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, name: string): T;

            /**
             * This is similar to `gtk_buildable_parser_finished()` but is
             * called once for each custom tag handled by the `buildable`.
             * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
             * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
             * @param tagname the name of the tag
             * @param data user data created in custom_tag_start
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_custom_finished(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

            /**
             * This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
             * the buildable.
             * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
             * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
             * @param tagname name of tag
             * @param data user data that will be passed in to parser functions
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_custom_tag_end(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

            /**
             * This is called for each unknown element under `<child>`.
             * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
             * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
             * @param tagname name of tag
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_custom_tag_start(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string): [boolean, GLib.MarkupParser, never];

            /**
             * Get the internal child called `childname` of the `buildable` object.
             * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
             * @param childname name of child
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_get_internal_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, childname: string): T;

            /**
             * Gets the name of the `buildable` object.
             * 
             * {@link Gtk.Builder} sets the name based on the
             * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI]
             * used to construct the `buildable`.
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_get_name(): string;

            /**
             * Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
             * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI].
             * Note that this will be called once for each time
             * `gtk_builder_add_from_file()` or `gtk_builder_add_from_string()`
             * is called on a builder.
             * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_parser_finished(builder: Builder): void;

            /**
             * Sets the property name `name` to `value` on the `buildable` object.
             * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
             * @param name name of property
             * @param value value of property
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_set_buildable_property(builder: Builder, name: string, value: unknown): void;

            /**
             * Sets the name of the `buildable` object.
             * @param name name to set
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_set_name(name: string): void;
        }


        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.Object.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    export interface BuildableNamespace {
        $gtype: GObject.GType<Buildable>;
        prototype: Buildable;
    }
    /**
     * GtkBuildable allows objects to extend and customize their deserialization
     * from [GtkBuilder UI descriptions][BUILDER-UI].
     * The interface includes methods for setting names and properties of objects,
     * parsing custom tags and constructing child objects.
     * 
     * The GtkBuildable interface is implemented by all widgets and
     * many of the non-widget objects that are provided by GTK+. The
     * main user of this interface is {@link Gtk.Builder}. There should be
     * very little need for applications to call any of these functions directly.
     * 
     * An object only needs to implement this interface if it needs to extend the
     * {@link Gtk.Builder} format or run any extra routines at deserialization time.
     * @gir-type Interface
     */
    interface Buildable extends GObject.Object, Buildable.Interface {

        // Methods
        /**
         * Adds a child to `buildable`. `type` is an optional string
         * describing how the child should be added.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child to add
         * @param type kind of child or `null`
         */
        add_child(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object, type: string | null): void;

        /**
         * Constructs a child of `buildable` with the name `name`.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} calls this function if a “constructor” has been
         * specified in the UI definition.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param name name of child to construct
         * @returns the constructed child
         */
        construct_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, name: string): T;

        /**
         * This is similar to `gtk_buildable_parser_finished()` but is
         * called once for each custom tag handled by the `buildable`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname the name of the tag
         * @param data user data created in custom_tag_start
         */
        custom_finished(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called at the end of each custom element handled by
         * the buildable.
         * @param builder {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @param data user data that will be passed in to parser functions
         */
        custom_tag_end(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string, data: null): void;

        /**
         * This is called for each unknown element under `<child>`.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder} used to construct this object
         * @param child child object or `null` for non-child tags
         * @param tagname name of tag
         * @returns `true` if a object has a custom implementation, `false`          if it doesn't.
         */
        custom_tag_start(builder: Builder, child: GObject.Object | null, tagname: string): [boolean, GLib.MarkupParser, null];

        /**
         * Get the internal child called `childname` of the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param childname name of child
         * @returns the internal child of the buildable object
         */
        get_internal_child<T = GObject.Object>(builder: Builder, childname: string): T;

        /**
         * Gets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * 
         * {@link Gtk.Builder} sets the name based on the
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI]
         * used to construct the `buildable`.
         * @returns the name set with `gtk_buildable_set_name()`
         */
        get_name(): string;

        /**
         * Called when the builder finishes the parsing of a
         * [GtkBuilder UI definition][BUILDER-UI].
         * Note that this will be called once for each time
         * `gtk_builder_add_from_file()` or `gtk_builder_add_from_string()`
         * is called on a builder.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         */
        parser_finished(builder: Builder): void;

        /**
         * Sets the property name `name` to `value` on the `buildable` object.
         * @param builder a {@link Gtk.Builder}
         * @param name name of property
         * @param value value of property
         */
        set_buildable_property(builder: Builder, name: string, value: GObject.Value | any): void;

        /**
         * Sets the name of the `buildable` object.
         * @param name name to set
         */
        set_name(name: string): void;
    }


    export const Buildable: BuildableNamespace & {
        new (): Buildable; // This allows `obj instanceof Buildable`
    };

    namespace CellAccessibleParent {
        /**
         * Interface for implementing CellAccessibleParent.
         * Contains only the virtual methods that need to be implemented.
         */
        interface Interface {

            // Virtual methods
            /**
             * @param cell 
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_activate(cell: CellAccessible): void;

            /**
             * @param cell 
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_edit(cell: CellAccessible): void;

            /**
             * @param cell 
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_expand_collapse(cell: CellAccessible): void;

            /**
             * @param cell 
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_get_cell_area(cell: CellAccessible): Gdk.Rectangle;

            /**
             * @param cell 
             * @param coord_type 
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_get_cell_extents(cell: CellAccessible, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number, number, number];

            /**
             * @param cell 
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_get_cell_position(cell: CellAccessible): [number, number];

            /**
             * @param cell 
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_get_child_index(cell: CellAccessible): number;

            /**
             * @param cell 
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_get_column_header_cells(cell: CellAccessible): Atk.Object[];

            /**
             * @param cell 
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_get_renderer_state(cell: CellAccessible): CellRendererState;

            /**
             * @param cell 
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_get_row_header_cells(cell: CellAccessible): Atk.Object[];

            /**
             * @param cell 
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_grab_focus(cell: CellAccessible): boolean;

            /**
             * @param cell 
             * @param relationset 
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_update_relationset(cell: CellAccessible, relationset: Atk.RelationSet): void;
        }


        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.Object.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    export interface CellAccessibleParentNamespace {
        $gtype: GObject.GType<CellAccessibleParent>;
        prototype: CellAccessibleParent;
    }
    /**
     * @gir-type Interface
     */
    interface CellAccessibleParent extends GObject.Object, CellAccessibleParent.Interface {

        // Methods
        /**
         * @param cell 
         */
        activate(cell: CellAccessible): void;

        /**
         * @param cell 
         */
        edit(cell: CellAccessible): void;

        /**
         * @param cell 
         */
        expand_collapse(cell: CellAccessible): void;

        /**
         * @param cell 
         */
        get_cell_area(cell: CellAccessible): Gdk.Rectangle;

        /**
         * @param cell 
         * @param coord_type 
         */
        get_cell_extents(cell: CellAccessible, coord_type: Atk.CoordType): [number, number, number, number];

        /**
         * @param cell 
         */
        get_cell_position(cell: CellAccessible): [number, number];

        /**
         * @param cell 
         */
        get_child_index(cell: CellAccessible): number;

        /**
         * @param cell 
         */
        get_column_header_cells(cell: CellAccessible): Atk.Object[];

        /**
         * @param cell 
         */
        get_renderer_state(cell: CellAccessible): CellRendererState;

        /**
         * @param cell 
         */
        get_row_header_cells(cell: CellAccessible): Atk.Object[];

        /**
         * @param cell 
         */
        grab_focus(cell: CellAccessible): boolean;

        /**
         * @param cell 
         * @param relationset 
         */
        update_relationset(cell: CellAccessible, relationset: Atk.RelationSet): void;
    }


    export const CellAccessibleParent: CellAccessibleParentNamespace & {
        new (): CellAccessibleParent; // This allows `obj instanceof CellAccessibleParent`
    };

    namespace CellEditable {
        /**
         * Interface for implementing CellEditable.
         * Contains only the virtual methods that need to be implemented.
         */
        interface Interface {

            // Virtual methods
            /**
             * Emits the {@link Gtk.CellEditable.SignalSignatures.editing_done | Gtk.CellEditable::editing-done} signal.
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_editing_done(): void;

            /**
             * Emits the {@link Gtk.CellEditable.SignalSignatures.remove_widget | Gtk.CellEditable::remove-widget} signal.
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_remove_widget(): void;

            /**
             * Begins editing on a `cell_editable`.
             * 
             * The {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} for the cell creates and returns a {@link Gtk.CellEditable} from
             * `gtk_cell_renderer_start_editing()`, configured for the {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} type.
             * 
             * `gtk_cell_editable_start_editing()` can then set up `cell_editable` suitably for
             * editing a cell, e.g. making the Esc key emit {@link Gtk.CellEditable.SignalSignatures.editing_done | Gtk.CellEditable::editing-done}.
             * 
             * Note that the `cell_editable` is created on-demand for the current edit; its
             * lifetime is temporary and does not persist across other edits and/or cells.
             * @param event The {@link Gdk.Event} that began the editing process, or   `null` if editing was initiated programmatically
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_start_editing(event: Gdk.Event | null): void;
        }


        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Widget.ConstructorProps {
            editing_canceled: boolean;
            editingCanceled: boolean;
        }
    }

    export interface CellEditableNamespace {
        $gtype: GObject.GType<CellEditable>;
        prototype: CellEditable;
    }
    /**
     * The {@link Gtk.CellEditable} interface must be implemented for widgets to be usable
     * to edit the contents of a {@link Gtk.TreeView} cell. It provides a way to specify how
     * temporary widgets should be configured for editing, get the new value, etc.
     * @gir-type Interface
     */
    interface CellEditable extends Widget, CellEditable.Interface {

        // Properties
        /**
         * Indicates whether editing on the cell has been canceled.
         * @since 2.20
         * @default false
         */
        get editing_canceled(): boolean;
        set editing_canceled(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Indicates whether editing on the cell has been canceled.
         * @since 2.20
         * @default false
         */
        get editingCanceled(): boolean;
        set editingCanceled(val: boolean);

        // Methods
        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.CellEditable.SignalSignatures.editing_done | Gtk.CellEditable::editing-done} signal.
         */
        editing_done(): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.CellEditable.SignalSignatures.remove_widget | Gtk.CellEditable::remove-widget} signal.
         */
        remove_widget(): void;

        /**
         * Begins editing on a `cell_editable`.
         * 
         * The {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} for the cell creates and returns a {@link Gtk.CellEditable} from
         * `gtk_cell_renderer_start_editing()`, configured for the {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} type.
         * 
         * `gtk_cell_editable_start_editing()` can then set up `cell_editable` suitably for
         * editing a cell, e.g. making the Esc key emit {@link Gtk.CellEditable.SignalSignatures.editing_done | Gtk.CellEditable::editing-done}.
         * 
         * Note that the `cell_editable` is created on-demand for the current edit; its
         * lifetime is temporary and does not persist across other edits and/or cells.
         * @param event The {@link Gdk.Event} that began the editing process, or   `null` if editing was initiated programmatically
         */
        start_editing(event: Gdk.Event | null): void;
    }


    export const CellEditable: CellEditableNamespace & {
        new (): CellEditable; // This allows `obj instanceof CellEditable`
    };

    namespace CellLayout {
        /**
         * Interface for implementing CellLayout.
         * Contains only the virtual methods that need to be implemented.
         */
        interface Interface {

            // Virtual methods
            /**
             * Adds an attribute mapping to the list in `cell_layout`.
             * 
             * The `column` is the column of the model to get a value from, and the
             * `attribute` is the parameter on `cell` to be set from the value. So for
             * example if column 2 of the model contains strings, you could have the
             * “text” attribute of a {@link Gtk.CellRendererText} get its values from column 2.
             * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
             * @param attribute an attribute on the renderer
             * @param column the column position on the model to get the attribute from
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_add_attribute(cell: CellRenderer, attribute: string, column: number): void;

            /**
             * Unsets all the mappings on all renderers on `cell_layout` and
             * removes all renderers from `cell_layout`.
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_clear(): void;

            /**
             * Clears all existing attributes previously set with
             * `gtk_cell_layout_set_attributes()`.
             * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} to clear the attribute mapping on
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_clear_attributes(cell: CellRenderer): void;

            /**
             * Returns the underlying {@link Gtk.CellArea} which might be `cell_layout`
             * if called on a {@link Gtk.CellArea} or might be `null` if no {@link Gtk.CellArea}
             * is used by `cell_layout`.
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_get_area(): CellArea | null;

            /**
             * Returns the cell renderers which have been added to `cell_layout`.
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_get_cells(): CellRenderer[];

            /**
             * Adds the `cell` to the end of `cell_layout`. If `expand` is `false`, then the
             * `cell` is allocated no more space than it needs. Any unused space is
             * divided evenly between cells for which `expand` is `true`.
             * 
             * Note that reusing the same cell renderer is not supported.
             * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
             * @param expand `true` if `cell` is to be given extra space allocated to `cell_layout`
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_pack_end(cell: CellRenderer, expand: boolean): void;

            /**
             * Packs the `cell` into the beginning of `cell_layout`. If `expand` is `false`,
             * then the `cell` is allocated no more space than it needs. Any unused space
             * is divided evenly between cells for which `expand` is `true`.
             * 
             * Note that reusing the same cell renderer is not supported.
             * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
             * @param expand `true` if `cell` is to be given extra space allocated to `cell_layout`
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_pack_start(cell: CellRenderer, expand: boolean): void;

            /**
             * Re-inserts `cell` at `position`.
             * 
             * Note that `cell` has already to be packed into `cell_layout`
             * for this to function properly.
             * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} to reorder
             * @param position new position to insert `cell` at
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_reorder(cell: CellRenderer, position: number): void;

            /**
             * Sets the {@link Gtk.CellLayoutDataFunc} to use for `cell_layout`.
             * 
             * This function is used instead of the standard attributes mapping
             * for setting the column value, and should set the value of `cell_layout`’s
             * cell renderer(s) as appropriate.
             * 
             * `func` may be `null` to remove a previously set function.
             * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
             * @param func the {@link Gtk.CellLayoutDataFunc} to use, or `null`
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_set_cell_data_func(cell: CellRenderer, func: CellLayoutDataFunc | null): void;
        }


        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.Object.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    export interface CellLayoutNamespace {
        $gtype: GObject.GType<CellLayout>;
        prototype: CellLayout;
    }
    /**
     * {@link Gtk.CellLayout} is an interface to be implemented by all objects which
     * want to provide a {@link Gtk.TreeViewColumn} like API for packing cells,
     * setting attributes and data funcs.
     * 
     * One of the notable features provided by implementations of
     * GtkCellLayout are attributes. Attributes let you set the properties
     * in flexible ways. They can just be set to constant values like regular
     * properties. But they can also be mapped to a column of the underlying
     * tree model with `gtk_cell_layout_set_attributes()`, which means that the value
     * of the attribute can change from cell to cell as they are rendered by
     * the cell renderer. Finally, it is possible to specify a function with
     * `gtk_cell_layout_set_cell_data_func()` that is called to determine the
     * value of the attribute for each cell that is rendered.
     * 
     * # GtkCellLayouts as GtkBuildable
     * 
     * Implementations of GtkCellLayout which also implement the GtkBuildable
     * interface ({@link Gtk.CellView}, {@link Gtk.IconView}, {@link Gtk.ComboBox},
     * {@link Gtk.EntryCompletion}, {@link Gtk.TreeViewColumn}) accept GtkCellRenderer objects
     * as `<child>` elements in UI definitions. They support a custom `<attributes>`
     * element for their children, which can contain multiple `<attribute>`
     * elements. Each `<attribute>` element has a name attribute which specifies
     * a property of the cell renderer; the content of the element is the
     * attribute value.
     * 
     * This is an example of a UI definition fragment specifying attributes:
     * 
     * 
     * ```xml
     * <object class="GtkCellView">
     *   <child>
     *     <object class="GtkCellRendererText"/>
     *     <attributes>
     *       <attribute name="text">0</attribute>
     *     </attributes>
     *   </child>
     * </object>
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * Furthermore for implementations of GtkCellLayout that use a {@link Gtk.CellArea}
     * to lay out cells (all GtkCellLayouts in GTK+ use a GtkCellArea)
     * [cell properties][cell-properties] can also be defined in the format by
     * specifying the custom `<cell-packing>` attribute which can contain multiple
     * `<property>` elements defined in the normal way.
     * 
     * Here is a UI definition fragment specifying cell properties:
     * 
     * 
     * ```xml
     * <object class="GtkTreeViewColumn">
     *   <child>
     *     <object class="GtkCellRendererText"/>
     *     <cell-packing>
     *       <property name="align">True</property>
     *       <property name="expand">False</property>
     *     </cell-packing>
     *   </child>
     * </object>
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * # Subclassing GtkCellLayout implementations
     * 
     * When subclassing a widget that implements {@link Gtk.CellLayout} like
     * {@link Gtk.IconView} or {@link Gtk.ComboBox}, there are some considerations related
     * to the fact that these widgets internally use a {@link Gtk.CellArea}.
     * The cell area is exposed as a construct-only property by these
     * widgets. This means that it is possible to e.g. do
     * 
     * 
     * ```c
     * combo = g_object_new (GTK_TYPE_COMBO_BOX, "cell-area", my_cell_area, NULL);
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * to use a custom cell area with a combo box. But construct properties
     * are only initialized after instance `init()`
     * functions have run, which means that using functions which rely on
     * the existence of the cell area in your subclass’ `init()` function will
     * cause the default cell area to be instantiated. In this case, a provided
     * construct property value will be ignored (with a warning, to alert
     * you to the problem).
     * 
     * 
     * ```c
     * static void
     * my_combo_box_init (MyComboBox *b)
     * {
     *   GtkCellRenderer *cell;
     * 
     *   cell = gtk_cell_renderer_pixbuf_new ();
     *   // The following call causes the default cell area for combo boxes,
     *   // a GtkCellAreaBox, to be instantiated
     *   gtk_cell_layout_pack_start (GTK_CELL_LAYOUT (b), cell, FALSE);
     *   ...
     * }
     * 
     * GtkWidget *
     * my_combo_box_new (GtkCellArea *area)
     * {
     *   // This call is going to cause a warning about area being ignored
     *   return g_object_new (MY_TYPE_COMBO_BOX, "cell-area", area, NULL);
     * }
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * If supporting alternative cell areas with your derived widget is
     * not important, then this does not have to concern you. If you want
     * to support alternative cell areas, you can do so by moving the
     * problematic calls out of `init()` and into a `constructor()`
     * for your class.
     * @gir-type Interface
     */
    interface CellLayout extends GObject.Object, CellLayout.Interface {

        // Methods
        /**
         * Adds an attribute mapping to the list in `cell_layout`.
         * 
         * The `column` is the column of the model to get a value from, and the
         * `attribute` is the parameter on `cell` to be set from the value. So for
         * example if column 2 of the model contains strings, you could have the
         * “text” attribute of a {@link Gtk.CellRendererText} get its values from column 2.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param attribute an attribute on the renderer
         * @param column the column position on the model to get the attribute from
         */
        add_attribute(cell: CellRenderer, attribute: string, column: number): void;

        /**
         * Unsets all the mappings on all renderers on `cell_layout` and
         * removes all renderers from `cell_layout`.
         */
        clear(): void;

        /**
         * Clears all existing attributes previously set with
         * `gtk_cell_layout_set_attributes()`.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} to clear the attribute mapping on
         */
        clear_attributes(cell: CellRenderer): void;

        /**
         * Returns the underlying {@link Gtk.CellArea} which might be `cell_layout`
         * if called on a {@link Gtk.CellArea} or might be `null` if no {@link Gtk.CellArea}
         * is used by `cell_layout`.
         * @returns the cell area used by `cell_layout`, or `null` in case no cell area is used.
         */
        get_area(): CellArea | null;

        /**
         * Returns the cell renderers which have been added to `cell_layout`.
         * @returns a list of cell renderers. The list, but not the renderers has     been newly allocated and should be freed with `g_list_free()`     when no longer needed.
         */
        get_cells(): CellRenderer[];

        /**
         * Adds the `cell` to the end of `cell_layout`. If `expand` is `false`, then the
         * `cell` is allocated no more space than it needs. Any unused space is
         * divided evenly between cells for which `expand` is `true`.
         * 
         * Note that reusing the same cell renderer is not supported.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param expand `true` if `cell` is to be given extra space allocated to `cell_layout`
         */
        pack_end(cell: CellRenderer, expand: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Packs the `cell` into the beginning of `cell_layout`. If `expand` is `false`,
         * then the `cell` is allocated no more space than it needs. Any unused space
         * is divided evenly between cells for which `expand` is `true`.
         * 
         * Note that reusing the same cell renderer is not supported.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param expand `true` if `cell` is to be given extra space allocated to `cell_layout`
         */
        pack_start(cell: CellRenderer, expand: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Re-inserts `cell` at `position`.
         * 
         * Note that `cell` has already to be packed into `cell_layout`
         * for this to function properly.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer} to reorder
         * @param position new position to insert `cell` at
         */
        reorder(cell: CellRenderer, position: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.CellLayoutDataFunc} to use for `cell_layout`.
         * 
         * This function is used instead of the standard attributes mapping
         * for setting the column value, and should set the value of `cell_layout`’s
         * cell renderer(s) as appropriate.
         * 
         * `func` may be `null` to remove a previously set function.
         * @param cell a {@link Gtk.CellRenderer}
         * @param func the {@link Gtk.CellLayoutDataFunc} to use, or `null`
         */
        set_cell_data_func(cell: CellRenderer, func: CellLayoutDataFunc | null): void;
    }


    export const CellLayout: CellLayoutNamespace & {
        new (): CellLayout; // This allows `obj instanceof CellLayout`
    };

    namespace ColorChooser {
        /**
         * Interface for implementing ColorChooser.
         * Contains only the virtual methods that need to be implemented.
         */
        interface Interface {

            // Virtual methods
            /**
             * Adds a palette to the color chooser. If `orientation` is horizontal,
             * the colors are grouped in rows, with `colors_per_line` colors
             * in each row. If `horizontal` is `false`, the colors are grouped
             * in columns instead.
             * 
             * The default color palette of {@link Gtk.ColorChooserWidget} has
             * 27 colors, organized in columns of 3 colors. The default gray
             * palette has 9 grays in a single row.
             * 
             * The layout of the color chooser widget works best when the
             * palettes have 9-10 columns.
             * 
             * Calling this function for the first time has the
             * side effect of removing the default color and gray palettes
             * from the color chooser.
             * 
             * If `colors` is `null`, removes all previously added palettes.
             * @param orientation {@link Gtk.Orientation.HORIZONTAL} if the palette should     be displayed in rows, {@link Gtk.Orientation.VERTICAL} for columns
             * @param colors_per_line the number of colors to show in each row/column
             * @param colors the colors of the palette, or `null`
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_add_palette(orientation: Orientation, colors_per_line: number, colors: Gdk.RGBA[] | null): void;

            /**
             * @param color 
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_color_activated(color: Gdk.RGBA): void;

            /**
             * Gets the currently-selected color.
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_get_rgba(): Gdk.RGBA;

            /**
             * Sets the color.
             * @param color the new color
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_set_rgba(color: Gdk.RGBA): void;
        }


        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.Object.ConstructorProps {
            rgba: Gdk.RGBA;
            use_alpha: boolean;
            useAlpha: boolean;
        }
    }

    export interface ColorChooserNamespace {
        $gtype: GObject.GType<ColorChooser>;
        prototype: ColorChooser;
    }
    /**
     * {@link Gtk.ColorChooser} is an interface that is implemented by widgets
     * for choosing colors. Depending on the situation, colors may be
     * allowed to have alpha (translucency).
     * 
     * In GTK+, the main widgets that implement this interface are
     * {@link Gtk.ColorChooserWidget}, {@link Gtk.ColorChooserDialog} and {@link Gtk.ColorButton}.
     * @gir-type Interface
     * @since 3.4
     */
    interface ColorChooser extends GObject.Object, ColorChooser.Interface {

        // Properties
        /**
         * The ::rgba property contains the currently selected color,
         * as a {@link Gdk.RGBA} struct. The property can be set to change
         * the current selection programmatically.
         * @since 3.4
         */
        get rgba(): Gdk.RGBA;
        set rgba(val: Gdk.RGBA);

        /**
         * When ::use-alpha is `true`, colors may have alpha (translucency)
         * information. When it is `false`, the {@link Gdk.RGBA} struct obtained
         * via the {@link Gtk.ColorChooser.rgba} property will be forced to have
         * alpha == 1.
         * 
         * Implementations are expected to show alpha by rendering the color
         * over a non-uniform background (like a checkerboard pattern).
         * @since 3.4
         * @default true
         */
        get use_alpha(): boolean;
        set use_alpha(val: boolean);

        /**
         * When ::use-alpha is `true`, colors may have alpha (translucency)
         * information. When it is `false`, the {@link Gdk.RGBA} struct obtained
         * via the {@link Gtk.ColorChooser.rgba} property will be forced to have
         * alpha == 1.
         * 
         * Implementations are expected to show alpha by rendering the color
         * over a non-uniform background (like a checkerboard pattern).
         * @since 3.4
         * @default true
         */
        get useAlpha(): boolean;
        set useAlpha(val: boolean);

        // Methods
        /**
         * Adds a palette to the color chooser. If `orientation` is horizontal,
         * the colors are grouped in rows, with `colors_per_line` colors
         * in each row. If `horizontal` is `false`, the colors are grouped
         * in columns instead.
         * 
         * The default color palette of {@link Gtk.ColorChooserWidget} has
         * 27 colors, organized in columns of 3 colors. The default gray
         * palette has 9 grays in a single row.
         * 
         * The layout of the color chooser widget works best when the
         * palettes have 9-10 columns.
         * 
         * Calling this function for the first time has the
         * side effect of removing the default color and gray palettes
         * from the color chooser.
         * 
         * If `colors` is `null`, removes all previously added palettes.
         * @param orientation {@link Gtk.Orientation.HORIZONTAL} if the palette should     be displayed in rows, {@link Gtk.Orientation.VERTICAL} for columns
         * @param colors_per_line the number of colors to show in each row/column
         * @param colors the colors of the palette, or `null`
         */
        add_palette(orientation: Orientation, colors_per_line: number, colors: Gdk.RGBA[] | null): void;

        /**
         * Gets the currently-selected color.
         */
        get_rgba(): Gdk.RGBA;

        /**
         * Returns whether the color chooser shows the alpha channel.
         * @returns `true` if the color chooser uses the alpha channel,     `false` if not
         */
        get_use_alpha(): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the color.
         * @param color the new color
         */
        set_rgba(color: Gdk.RGBA): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether or not the color chooser should use the alpha channel.
         * @param use_alpha `true` if color chooser should use alpha channel, `false` if not
         */
        set_use_alpha(use_alpha: boolean): void;
    }


    export const ColorChooser: ColorChooserNamespace & {
        new (): ColorChooser; // This allows `obj instanceof ColorChooser`
    };

    namespace Editable {
        /**
         * Interface for implementing Editable.
         * Contains only the virtual methods that need to be implemented.
         */
        interface Interface {

            // Virtual methods
            /**
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_changed(): void;

            /**
             * Deletes a sequence of characters. The characters that are deleted are
             * those characters at positions from `start_pos` up to, but not including
             * `end_pos`. If `end_pos` is negative, then the characters deleted
             * are those from `start_pos` to the end of the text.
             * 
             * Note that the positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
             * @param start_pos start position
             * @param end_pos end position
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_delete_text(start_pos: number, end_pos: number): void;

            /**
             * Deletes a sequence of characters. The characters that are deleted are
             * those characters at positions from `start_pos` up to, but not including
             * `end_pos`. If `end_pos` is negative, then the characters deleted
             * are those from `start_pos` to the end of the text.
             * 
             * Note that the positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
             * @param start_pos start position
             * @param end_pos end position
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_do_delete_text(start_pos: number, end_pos: number): void;

            /**
             * Inserts `new_text_length` bytes of `new_text` into the contents of the
             * widget, at position `position`.
             * 
             * Note that the position is in characters, not in bytes.
             * The function updates `position` to point after the newly inserted text.
             * @param new_text the text to append
             * @param new_text_length the length of the text in bytes, or -1
             * @param position location of the position text will be inserted at
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_do_insert_text(new_text: string, new_text_length: number, position: number): number;

            /**
             * Retrieves a sequence of characters. The characters that are retrieved
             * are those characters at positions from `start_pos` up to, but not
             * including `end_pos`. If `end_pos` is negative, then the characters
             * retrieved are those characters from `start_pos` to the end of the text.
             * 
             * Note that positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
             * @param start_pos start of text
             * @param end_pos end of text
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_get_chars(start_pos: number, end_pos: number): string;

            /**
             * Retrieves the current position of the cursor relative to the start
             * of the content of the editable.
             * 
             * Note that this position is in characters, not in bytes.
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_get_position(): number;

            /**
             * Retrieves the selection bound of the editable. start_pos will be filled
             * with the start of the selection and `end_pos` with end. If no text was
             * selected both will be identical and `false` will be returned.
             * 
             * Note that positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_get_selection_bounds(): [boolean, number, number];

            /**
             * Inserts `new_text_length` bytes of `new_text` into the contents of the
             * widget, at position `position`.
             * 
             * Note that the position is in characters, not in bytes.
             * The function updates `position` to point after the newly inserted text.
             * @param new_text the text to append
             * @param new_text_length the length of the text in bytes, or -1
             * @param position location of the position text will be inserted at
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_insert_text(new_text: string, new_text_length: number, position: number): number;

            /**
             * Sets the cursor position in the editable to the given value.
             * 
             * The cursor is displayed before the character with the given (base 0)
             * index in the contents of the editable. The value must be less than or
             * equal to the number of characters in the editable. A value of -1
             * indicates that the position should be set after the last character
             * of the editable. Note that `position` is in characters, not in bytes.
             * @param position the position of the cursor
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_set_position(position: number): void;

            /**
             * Selects a region of text. The characters that are selected are
             * those characters at positions from `start_pos` up to, but not
             * including `end_pos`. If `end_pos` is negative, then the
             * characters selected are those characters from `start_pos` to
             * the end of the text.
             * 
             * Note that positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
             * @param start_pos start of region
             * @param end_pos end of region
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_set_selection_bounds(start_pos: number, end_pos: number): void;
        }


        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.Object.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    export interface EditableNamespace {
        $gtype: GObject.GType<Editable>;
        prototype: Editable;
    }
    /**
     * The {@link Gtk.Editable} interface is an interface which should be implemented by
     * text editing widgets, such as {@link Gtk.Entry} and {@link Gtk.SpinButton}. It contains functions
     * for generically manipulating an editable widget, a large number of action
     * signals used for key bindings, and several signals that an application can
     * connect to to modify the behavior of a widget.
     * 
     * As an example of the latter usage, by connecting
     * the following handler to {@link Gtk.Editable.SignalSignatures.insert_text | Gtk.Editable::insert-text}, an application
     * can convert all entry into a widget into uppercase.
     * 
     * ## Forcing entry to uppercase.
     * 
     * 
     * ```c
     * #include <ctype.h>;
     * 
     * void
     * insert_text_handler (GtkEditable *editable,
     *                      const gchar *text,
     *                      gint         length,
     *                      gint        *position,
     *                      gpointer     data)
     * {
     *   gchar *result = g_utf8_strup (text, length);
     * 
     *   g_signal_handlers_block_by_func (editable,
     *                                (gpointer) insert_text_handler, data);
     *   gtk_editable_insert_text (editable, result, length, position);
     *   g_signal_handlers_unblock_by_func (editable,
     *                                      (gpointer) insert_text_handler, data);
     * 
     *   g_signal_stop_emission_by_name (editable, "insert_text");
     * 
     *   g_free (result);
     * }
     * ```
     * 
     * @gir-type Interface
     */
    interface Editable extends GObject.Object, Editable.Interface {

        // Methods
        /**
         * Copies the contents of the currently selected content in the editable and
         * puts it on the clipboard.
         */
        copy_clipboard(): void;

        /**
         * Removes the contents of the currently selected content in the editable and
         * puts it on the clipboard.
         */
        cut_clipboard(): void;

        /**
         * Deletes the currently selected text of the editable.
         * This call doesn’t do anything if there is no selected text.
         */
        delete_selection(): void;

        /**
         * Deletes a sequence of characters. The characters that are deleted are
         * those characters at positions from `start_pos` up to, but not including
         * `end_pos`. If `end_pos` is negative, then the characters deleted
         * are those from `start_pos` to the end of the text.
         * 
         * Note that the positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
         * @param start_pos start position
         * @param end_pos end position
         */
        delete_text(start_pos: number, end_pos: number): void;

        /**
         * Retrieves a sequence of characters. The characters that are retrieved
         * are those characters at positions from `start_pos` up to, but not
         * including `end_pos`. If `end_pos` is negative, then the characters
         * retrieved are those characters from `start_pos` to the end of the text.
         * 
         * Note that positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
         * @param start_pos start of text
         * @param end_pos end of text
         * @returns a pointer to the contents of the widget as a      string. This string is allocated by the {@link Gtk.Editable}      implementation and should be freed by the caller.
         */
        get_chars(start_pos: number, end_pos: number): string;

        /**
         * Retrieves whether `editable` is editable. See
         * `gtk_editable_set_editable()`.
         * @returns `true` if `editable` is editable.
         */
        get_editable(): boolean;

        /**
         * Retrieves the current position of the cursor relative to the start
         * of the content of the editable.
         * 
         * Note that this position is in characters, not in bytes.
         * @returns the cursor position
         */
        get_position(): number;

        /**
         * Retrieves the selection bound of the editable. start_pos will be filled
         * with the start of the selection and `end_pos` with end. If no text was
         * selected both will be identical and `false` will be returned.
         * 
         * Note that positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
         * @returns `true` if an area is selected, `false` otherwise
         */
        get_selection_bounds(): [boolean, number, number];

        /**
         * Inserts `new_text_length` bytes of `new_text` into the contents of the
         * widget, at position `position`.
         * 
         * Note that the position is in characters, not in bytes.
         * The function updates `position` to point after the newly inserted text.
         * @param new_text the text to append
         * @param new_text_length the length of the text in bytes, or -1
         * @param position location of the position text will be inserted at
         */
        insert_text(new_text: string, new_text_length: number, position: number): number;

        /**
         * Pastes the content of the clipboard to the current position of the
         * cursor in the editable.
         */
        paste_clipboard(): void;

        /**
         * Selects a region of text. The characters that are selected are
         * those characters at positions from `start_pos` up to, but not
         * including `end_pos`. If `end_pos` is negative, then the
         * characters selected are those characters from `start_pos` to
         * the end of the text.
         * 
         * Note that positions are specified in characters, not bytes.
         * @param start_pos start of region
         * @param end_pos end of region
         */
        select_region(start_pos: number, end_pos: number): void;

        /**
         * Determines if the user can edit the text in the editable
         * widget or not.
         * @param is_editable `true` if the user is allowed to edit the text   in the widget
         */
        set_editable(is_editable: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the cursor position in the editable to the given value.
         * 
         * The cursor is displayed before the character with the given (base 0)
         * index in the contents of the editable. The value must be less than or
         * equal to the number of characters in the editable. A value of -1
         * indicates that the position should be set after the last character
         * of the editable. Note that `position` is in characters, not in bytes.
         * @param position the position of the cursor
         */
        set_position(position: number): void;
    }


    export const Editable: EditableNamespace & {
        new (): Editable; // This allows `obj instanceof Editable`
    };

    namespace FileChooser {

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.Object.ConstructorProps {
            action: FileChooserAction;
            create_folders: boolean;
            createFolders: boolean;
            do_overwrite_confirmation: boolean;
            doOverwriteConfirmation: boolean;
            extra_widget: Widget | null;
            extraWidget: Widget | null;
            filter: FileFilter | null;
            local_only: boolean;
            localOnly: boolean;
            preview_widget: Widget | null;
            previewWidget: Widget | null;
            preview_widget_active: boolean;
            previewWidgetActive: boolean;
            select_multiple: boolean;
            selectMultiple: boolean;
            show_hidden: boolean;
            showHidden: boolean;
            use_preview_label: boolean;
            usePreviewLabel: boolean;
        }
    }

    export interface FileChooserNamespace {
        $gtype: GObject.GType<FileChooser>;
        prototype: FileChooser;
    }
    /**
     * {@link Gtk.FileChooser} is an interface that can be implemented by file
     * selection widgets.  In GTK+, the main objects that implement this
     * interface are {@link Gtk.FileChooserWidget}, {@link Gtk.FileChooserDialog}, and
     * {@link Gtk.FileChooserButton}.  You do not need to write an object that
     * implements the {@link Gtk.FileChooser} interface unless you are trying to
     * adapt an existing file selector to expose a standard programming
     * interface.
     * 
     * {@link Gtk.FileChooser} allows for shortcuts to various places in the filesystem.
     * In the default implementation these are displayed in the left pane. It
     * may be a bit confusing at first that these shortcuts come from various
     * sources and in various flavours, so lets explain the terminology here:
     * 
     * - Bookmarks: are created by the user, by dragging folders from the
     *   right pane to the left pane, or by using the “Add”. Bookmarks
     *   can be renamed and deleted by the user.
     * 
     * - Shortcuts: can be provided by the application. For example, a Paint
     *   program may want to add a shortcut for a Clipart folder. Shortcuts
     *   cannot be modified by the user.
     * 
     * - Volumes: are provided by the underlying filesystem abstraction. They are
     *   the “roots” of the filesystem.
     * 
     * # File Names and Encodings
     * 
     * When the user is finished selecting files in a
     * {@link Gtk.FileChooser}, your program can get the selected names
     * either as filenames or as URIs.  For URIs, the normal escaping
     * rules are applied if the URI contains non-ASCII characters.
     * However, filenames are always returned in
     * the character set specified by the
     * `G_FILENAME_ENCODING` environment variable.
     * Please see the GLib documentation for more details about this
     * variable.
     * 
     * This means that while you can pass the result of
     * `gtk_file_chooser_get_filename()` to `g_open()` or `g_fopen()`,
     * you may not be able to directly set it as the text of a
     * {@link Gtk.Label} widget unless you convert it first to UTF-8,
     * which all GTK+ widgets expect. You should use `g_filename_to_utf8()`
     * to convert filenames into strings that can be passed to GTK+
     * widgets.
     * 
     * # Adding a Preview Widget
     * 
     * You can add a custom preview widget to a file chooser and then
     * get notification about when the preview needs to be updated.
     * To install a preview widget, use
     * `gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget()`.  Then, connect to the
     * {@link Gtk.FileChooser.SignalSignatures.update_preview | Gtk.FileChooser::update-preview} signal to get notified when
     * you need to update the contents of the preview.
     * 
     * Your callback should use
     * `gtk_file_chooser_get_preview_filename()` to see what needs
     * previewing.  Once you have generated the preview for the
     * corresponding file, you must call
     * `gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget_active()` with a boolean
     * flag that indicates whether your callback could successfully
     * generate a preview.
     * 
     * ## Example: Using a Preview Widget ## {#gtkfilechooser-preview}
     * 
     * ```c
     * {
     *   GtkImage *preview;
     * 
     *   ...
     * 
     *   preview = gtk_image_new ();
     * 
     *   gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget (my_file_chooser, preview);
     *   g_signal_connect (my_file_chooser, "update-preview",
     * 		    G_CALLBACK (update_preview_cb), preview);
     * }
     * 
     * static void
     * update_preview_cb (GtkFileChooser *file_chooser, gpointer data)
     * {
     *   GtkWidget *preview;
     *   char *filename;
     *   GdkPixbuf *pixbuf;
     *   gboolean have_preview;
     * 
     *   preview = GTK_WIDGET (data);
     *   filename = gtk_file_chooser_get_preview_filename (file_chooser);
     * 
     *   pixbuf = gdk_pixbuf_new_from_file_at_size (filename, 128, 128, NULL);
     *   have_preview = (pixbuf != NULL);
     *   g_free (filename);
     * 
     *   gtk_image_set_from_pixbuf (GTK_IMAGE (preview), pixbuf);
     *   if (pixbuf)
     *     g_object_unref (pixbuf);
     * 
     *   gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget_active (file_chooser, have_preview);
     * }
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * # Adding Extra Widgets
     * 
     * You can add extra widgets to a file chooser to provide options
     * that are not present in the default design.  For example, you
     * can add a toggle button to give the user the option to open a
     * file in read-only mode.  You can use
     * `gtk_file_chooser_set_extra_widget()` to insert additional
     * widgets in a file chooser.
     * 
     * An example for adding extra widgets:
     * 
     * ```c
     * 
     *   GtkWidget *toggle;
     * 
     *   ...
     * 
     *   toggle = gtk_check_button_new_with_label ("Open file read-only");
     *   gtk_widget_show (toggle);
     *   gtk_file_chooser_set_extra_widget (my_file_chooser, toggle);
     * }
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * If you want to set more than one extra widget in the file
     * chooser, you can a container such as a {@link Gtk.Box} or a {@link Gtk.Grid}
     * and include your widgets in it.  Then, set the container as
     * the whole extra widget.
     * @gir-type Interface
     */
    interface FileChooser extends GObject.Object {

        // Properties
        /**
         * @default Gtk.FileChooserAction.OPEN
         */
        get action(): FileChooserAction;
        set action(val: FileChooserAction);

        /**
         * Whether a file chooser not in {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.OPEN} mode
         * will offer the user to create new folders.
         * @since 2.18
         * @default true
         */
        get create_folders(): boolean;
        set create_folders(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether a file chooser not in {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.OPEN} mode
         * will offer the user to create new folders.
         * @since 2.18
         * @default true
         */
        get createFolders(): boolean;
        set createFolders(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether a file chooser in {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.SAVE} mode
         * will present an overwrite confirmation dialog if the user
         * selects a file name that already exists.
         * @since 2.8
         * @default false
         */
        get do_overwrite_confirmation(): boolean;
        set do_overwrite_confirmation(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether a file chooser in {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.SAVE} mode
         * will present an overwrite confirmation dialog if the user
         * selects a file name that already exists.
         * @since 2.8
         * @default false
         */
        get doOverwriteConfirmation(): boolean;
        set doOverwriteConfirmation(val: boolean);

        get extra_widget(): Widget | null;
        set extra_widget(val: Widget | null);

        get extraWidget(): Widget | null;
        set extraWidget(val: Widget | null);

        get filter(): FileFilter | null;
        set filter(val: FileFilter | null);

        /**
         * @default true
         */
        get local_only(): boolean;
        set local_only(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default true
         */
        get localOnly(): boolean;
        set localOnly(val: boolean);

        get preview_widget(): Widget | null;
        set preview_widget(val: Widget | null);

        get previewWidget(): Widget | null;
        set previewWidget(val: Widget | null);

        /**
         * @default true
         */
        get preview_widget_active(): boolean;
        set preview_widget_active(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default true
         */
        get previewWidgetActive(): boolean;
        set previewWidgetActive(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get select_multiple(): boolean;
        set select_multiple(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get selectMultiple(): boolean;
        set selectMultiple(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get show_hidden(): boolean;
        set show_hidden(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get showHidden(): boolean;
        set showHidden(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default true
         */
        get use_preview_label(): boolean;
        set use_preview_label(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default true
         */
        get usePreviewLabel(): boolean;
        set usePreviewLabel(val: boolean);

        // Methods
        /**
         * Adds a 'choice' to the file chooser. This is typically implemented
         * as a combobox or, for boolean choices, as a checkbutton. You can select
         * a value using `gtk_file_chooser_set_choice()` before the dialog is shown,
         * and you can obtain the user-selected value in the ::response signal handler
         * using `gtk_file_chooser_get_choice()`.
         * 
         * Compare `gtk_file_chooser_set_extra_widget()`.
         * @param id id for the added choice
         * @param label user-visible label for the added choice
         * @param options ids for the options of the choice, or `null` for a boolean choice
         * @param option_labels user-visible labels for the options, must be the same length as `options`
         */
        add_choice(id: string, label: string, options: string[] | null, option_labels: string[] | null): void;

        /**
         * Adds `filter` to the list of filters that the user can select between.
         * When a filter is selected, only files that are passed by that
         * filter are displayed.
         * 
         * Note that the `chooser` takes ownership of the filter, so you have to
         * ref and sink it if you want to keep a reference.
         * @param filter a {@link Gtk.FileFilter}
         */
        add_filter(filter: FileFilter): void;

        /**
         * Adds a folder to be displayed with the shortcut folders in a file chooser.
         * Note that shortcut folders do not get saved, as they are provided by the
         * application.  For example, you can use this to add a
         * “/usr/share/mydrawprogram/Clipart” folder to the volume list.
         * @param folder filename of the folder to add
         * @returns `true` if the folder could be added successfully, `false` otherwise.  In the latter case, the `error` will be set as appropriate.
         */
        add_shortcut_folder(folder: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Adds a folder URI to be displayed with the shortcut folders in a file
         * chooser.  Note that shortcut folders do not get saved, as they are provided
         * by the application.  For example, you can use this to add a
         * “file:///usr/share/mydrawprogram/Clipart” folder to the volume list.
         * @param uri URI of the folder to add
         * @returns `true` if the folder could be added successfully, `false` otherwise.  In the latter case, the `error` will be set as appropriate.
         */
        add_shortcut_folder_uri(uri: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the type of operation that the file chooser is performing; see
         * `gtk_file_chooser_set_action()`.
         * @returns the action that the file selector is performing
         */
        get_action(): FileChooserAction;

        /**
         * Gets the currently selected option in the 'choice' with the given ID.
         * @param id the ID of the choice to get
         * @returns the ID of the currenly selected option
         */
        get_choice(id: string): string;

        /**
         * Gets whether file choser will offer to create new folders.
         * See `gtk_file_chooser_set_create_folders()`.
         * @returns `true` if the Create Folder button should be displayed.
         */
        get_create_folders(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the current folder of `chooser` as a local filename.
         * See `gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder()`.
         * 
         * Note that this is the folder that the file chooser is currently displaying
         * (e.g. "/home/username/Documents"), which is not the same
         * as the currently-selected folder if the chooser is in
         * {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.SELECT_FOLDER} mode
         * (e.g. "/home/username/Documents/selected-folder/".  To get the
         * currently-selected folder in that mode, use `gtk_file_chooser_get_uri()` as the
         * usual way to get the selection.
         * @returns the full path of the current folder, or `null` if the current path cannot be represented as a local filename.  Free with `g_free()`.  This function will also return `null` if the file chooser was unable to load the last folder that was requested from it; for example, as would be for calling `gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder()` on a nonexistent folder.
         */
        get_current_folder(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the current folder of `chooser` as {@link Gio.File}.
         * See `gtk_file_chooser_get_current_folder_uri()`.
         * @returns the {@link Gio.File} for the current folder.
         */
        get_current_folder_file(): Gio.File | null;

        /**
         * Gets the current folder of `chooser` as an URI.
         * See `gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder_uri()`.
         * 
         * Note that this is the folder that the file chooser is currently displaying
         * (e.g. "file:///home/username/Documents"), which is not the same
         * as the currently-selected folder if the chooser is in
         * {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.SELECT_FOLDER} mode
         * (e.g. "file:///home/username/Documents/selected-folder/".  To get the
         * currently-selected folder in that mode, use `gtk_file_chooser_get_uri()` as the
         * usual way to get the selection.
         * @returns the URI for the current folder. Free with `g_free()`.  This function will also return `null` if the file chooser was unable to load the last folder that was requested from it; for example, as would be for calling `gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder_uri()` on a nonexistent folder.
         */
        get_current_folder_uri(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the current name in the file selector, as entered by the user in the
         * text entry for “Name”.
         * 
         * This is meant to be used in save dialogs, to get the currently typed filename
         * when the file itself does not exist yet.  For example, an application that
         * adds a custom extra widget to the file chooser for “file format” may want to
         * change the extension of the typed filename based on the chosen format, say,
         * from “.jpg” to “.png”.
         * @returns The raw text from the file chooser’s “Name” entry.  Free this with `g_free()`.  Note that this string is not a full pathname or URI; it is whatever the contents of the entry are.  Note also that this string is in UTF-8 encoding, which is not necessarily the system’s encoding for filenames.
         */
        get_current_name(): string;

        /**
         * Queries whether a file chooser is set to confirm for overwriting when the user
         * types a file name that already exists.
         * @returns `true` if the file chooser will present a confirmation dialog; `false` otherwise.
         */
        get_do_overwrite_confirmation(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the current extra widget; see
         * `gtk_file_chooser_set_extra_widget()`.
         * @returns the current extra widget, or `null`
         */
        get_extra_widget(): Widget | null;

        /**
         * Gets the {@link Gio.File} for the currently selected file in
         * the file selector. If multiple files are selected,
         * one of the files will be returned at random.
         * 
         * If the file chooser is in folder mode, this function returns the selected
         * folder.
         * @returns a selected {@link Gio.File}. You own the returned file;     use `g_object_unref()` to release it.
         */
        get_file(): Gio.File;

        /**
         * Gets the filename for the currently selected file in
         * the file selector. The filename is returned as an absolute path. If
         * multiple files are selected, one of the filenames will be returned at
         * random.
         * 
         * If the file chooser is in folder mode, this function returns the selected
         * folder.
         * @returns The currently selected filename,  or `null` if no file is selected, or the selected file can't  be represented with a local filename. Free with `g_free()`.
         */
        get_filename(): string | null;

        /**
         * Lists all the selected files and subfolders in the current folder of
         * `chooser`. The returned names are full absolute paths. If files in the current
         * folder cannot be represented as local filenames they will be ignored. (See
         * `gtk_file_chooser_get_uris()`)
         * @returns a {@link GLib.SList}    containing the filenames of all selected files and subfolders in    the current folder. Free the returned list with `g_slist_free()`,    and the filenames with `g_free()`.
         */
        get_filenames(): string[];

        /**
         * Lists all the selected files and subfolders in the current folder of `chooser`
         * as {@link Gio.File}. An internal function, see `gtk_file_chooser_get_uris()`.
         * @returns a {@link GLib.SList}   containing a {@link Gio.File} for each selected file and subfolder in the   current folder.  Free the returned list with `g_slist_free()`, and   the files with `g_object_unref()`.
         */
        get_files(): Gio.File[];

        /**
         * Gets the current filter; see `gtk_file_chooser_set_filter()`.
         * @returns the current filter, or `null`
         */
        get_filter(): FileFilter | null;

        /**
         * Gets whether only local files can be selected in the
         * file selector. See `gtk_file_chooser_set_local_only()`
         * @returns `true` if only local files can be selected.
         */
        get_local_only(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the {@link Gio.File} that should be previewed in a custom preview
         * Internal function, see `gtk_file_chooser_get_preview_uri()`.
         * @returns the {@link Gio.File} for the file to preview,     or `null` if no file is selected. Free with `g_object_unref()`.
         */
        get_preview_file(): Gio.File | null;

        /**
         * Gets the filename that should be previewed in a custom preview
         * widget. See `gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget()`.
         * @returns the filename to preview, or `null` if  no file is selected, or if the selected file cannot be represented  as a local filename. Free with `g_free()`
         */
        get_preview_filename(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the URI that should be previewed in a custom preview
         * widget. See `gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget()`.
         * @returns the URI for the file to preview,     or `null` if no file is selected. Free with `g_free()`.
         */
        get_preview_uri(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the current preview widget; see
         * `gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget()`.
         * @returns the current preview widget, or `null`
         */
        get_preview_widget(): Widget | null;

        /**
         * Gets whether the preview widget set by `gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget()`
         * should be shown for the current filename. See
         * `gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget_active()`.
         * @returns `true` if the preview widget is active for the current filename.
         */
        get_preview_widget_active(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets whether multiple files can be selected in the file
         * selector. See `gtk_file_chooser_set_select_multiple()`.
         * @returns `true` if multiple files can be selected.
         */
        get_select_multiple(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets whether hidden files and folders are displayed in the file selector.
         * See `gtk_file_chooser_set_show_hidden()`.
         * @returns `true` if hidden files and folders are displayed.
         */
        get_show_hidden(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the URI for the currently selected file in
         * the file selector. If multiple files are selected,
         * one of the filenames will be returned at random.
         * 
         * If the file chooser is in folder mode, this function returns the selected
         * folder.
         * @returns The currently selected URI, or `null`    if no file is selected. If `gtk_file_chooser_set_local_only()` is set to    `true` (the default) a local URI will be returned for any FUSE locations.    Free with `g_free()`
         */
        get_uri(): string | null;

        /**
         * Lists all the selected files and subfolders in the current folder of
         * `chooser`. The returned names are full absolute URIs.
         * @returns a {@link GLib.SList} containing the URIs of all selected   files and subfolders in the current folder. Free the returned list   with `g_slist_free()`, and the filenames with `g_free()`.
         */
        get_uris(): string[];

        /**
         * Gets whether a stock label should be drawn with the name of the previewed
         * file.  See `gtk_file_chooser_set_use_preview_label()`.
         * @returns `true` if the file chooser is set to display a label with the name of the previewed file, `false` otherwise.
         */
        get_use_preview_label(): boolean;

        /**
         * Lists the current set of user-selectable filters; see
         * `gtk_file_chooser_add_filter()`, `gtk_file_chooser_remove_filter()`.
         * @returns a  {@link GLib.SList} containing the current set of user selectable filters. The  contents of the list are owned by GTK+, but you must free the list  itself with `g_slist_free()` when you are done with it.
         */
        list_filters(): FileFilter[];

        /**
         * Queries the list of shortcut folders in the file chooser, as set by
         * `gtk_file_chooser_add_shortcut_folder_uri()`.
         * @returns A list of folder URIs, or `null` if there are no shortcut folders.  Free the returned list with `g_slist_free()`, and the URIs with `g_free()`.
         */
        list_shortcut_folder_uris(): string[] | null;

        /**
         * Queries the list of shortcut folders in the file chooser, as set by
         * `gtk_file_chooser_add_shortcut_folder()`.
         * @returns A list of folder filenames, or `null` if there are no shortcut folders. Free the returned list with `g_slist_free()`, and the filenames with `g_free()`.
         */
        list_shortcut_folders(): string[] | null;

        /**
         * Removes a 'choice' that has been added with `gtk_file_chooser_add_choice()`.
         * @param id the ID of the choice to remove
         */
        remove_choice(id: string): void;

        /**
         * Removes `filter` from the list of filters that the user can select between.
         * @param filter a {@link Gtk.FileFilter}
         */
        remove_filter(filter: FileFilter): void;

        /**
         * Removes a folder from a file chooser’s list of shortcut folders.
         * @param folder filename of the folder to remove
         * @returns `true` if the operation succeeds, `false` otherwise. In the latter case, the `error` will be set as appropriate. See also: `gtk_file_chooser_add_shortcut_folder()`
         */
        remove_shortcut_folder(folder: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Removes a folder URI from a file chooser’s list of shortcut folders.
         * @param uri URI of the folder to remove
         * @returns `true` if the operation succeeds, `false` otherwise. In the latter case, the `error` will be set as appropriate. See also: `gtk_file_chooser_add_shortcut_folder_uri()`
         */
        remove_shortcut_folder_uri(uri: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Selects all the files in the current folder of a file chooser.
         */
        select_all(): void;

        /**
         * Selects the file referred to by `file`. An internal function. See
         * _gtk_file_chooser_select_uri().
         * @param file the file to select
         * @returns Not useful.
         */
        select_file(file: Gio.File): boolean;

        /**
         * Selects a filename. If the file name isn’t in the current
         * folder of `chooser`, then the current folder of `chooser` will
         * be changed to the folder containing `filename`.
         * @param filename the filename to select
         * @returns Not useful. See also: `gtk_file_chooser_set_filename()`
         */
        select_filename(filename: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Selects the file to by `uri`. If the URI doesn’t refer to a
         * file in the current folder of `chooser`, then the current folder of
         * `chooser` will be changed to the folder containing `filename`.
         * @param uri the URI to select
         * @returns Not useful.
         */
        select_uri(uri: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the type of operation that the chooser is performing; the
         * user interface is adapted to suit the selected action. For example,
         * an option to create a new folder might be shown if the action is
         * {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.SAVE} but not if the action is
         * {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.OPEN}.
         * @param action the action that the file selector is performing
         */
        set_action(action: FileChooserAction): void;

        /**
         * Selects an option in a 'choice' that has been added with
         * `gtk_file_chooser_add_choice()`. For a boolean choice, the
         * possible options are "true" and "false".
         * @param id the ID of the choice to set
         * @param option the ID of the option to select
         */
        set_choice(id: string, option: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether file choser will offer to create new folders.
         * This is only relevant if the action is not set to be
         * {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.OPEN}.
         * @param create_folders `true` if the Create Folder button should be displayed
         */
        set_create_folders(create_folders: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the current folder for `chooser` from a local filename.
         * The user will be shown the full contents of the current folder,
         * plus user interface elements for navigating to other folders.
         * 
         * In general, you should not use this function.  See the
         * [section on setting up a file chooser dialog][gtkfilechooserdialog-setting-up]
         * for the rationale behind this.
         * @param filename the full path of the new current folder
         * @returns Not useful.
         */
        set_current_folder(filename: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the current folder for `chooser` from a {@link Gio.File}.
         * Internal function, see `gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder_uri()`.
         * @param file the {@link Gio.File} for the new folder
         * @returns `true` if the folder could be changed successfully, `false` otherwise.
         */
        set_current_folder_file(file: Gio.File): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the current folder for `chooser` from an URI.
         * The user will be shown the full contents of the current folder,
         * plus user interface elements for navigating to other folders.
         * 
         * In general, you should not use this function.  See the
         * [section on setting up a file chooser dialog][gtkfilechooserdialog-setting-up]
         * for the rationale behind this.
         * @param uri the URI for the new current folder
         * @returns `true` if the folder could be changed successfully, `false` otherwise.
         */
        set_current_folder_uri(uri: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the current name in the file selector, as if entered
         * by the user. Note that the name passed in here is a UTF-8
         * string rather than a filename. This function is meant for
         * such uses as a suggested name in a “Save As...” dialog.  You can
         * pass “Untitled.doc” or a similarly suitable suggestion for the `name`.
         * 
         * If you want to preselect a particular existing file, you should use
         * `gtk_file_chooser_set_filename()` or `gtk_file_chooser_set_uri()` instead.
         * Please see the documentation for those functions for an example of using
         * `gtk_file_chooser_set_current_name()` as well.
         * @param name the filename to use, as a UTF-8 string
         */
        set_current_name(name: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether a file chooser in {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.SAVE} mode will present
         * a confirmation dialog if the user types a file name that already exists.  This
         * is `false` by default.
         * 
         * If set to `true`, the `chooser` will emit the
         * {@link Gtk.FileChooser.SignalSignatures.confirm_overwrite | Gtk.FileChooser::confirm-overwrite} signal when appropriate.
         * 
         * If all you need is the stock confirmation dialog, set this property to `true`.
         * You can override the way confirmation is done by actually handling the
         * {@link Gtk.FileChooser.SignalSignatures.confirm_overwrite | Gtk.FileChooser::confirm-overwrite} signal; please refer to its documentation
         * for the details.
         * @param do_overwrite_confirmation whether to confirm overwriting in save mode
         */
        set_do_overwrite_confirmation(do_overwrite_confirmation: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets an application-supplied widget to provide extra options to the user.
         * @param extra_widget widget for extra options
         */
        set_extra_widget(extra_widget: Widget): void;

        /**
         * Sets `file` as the current filename for the file chooser, by changing
         * to the file’s parent folder and actually selecting the file in list.  If
         * the `chooser` is in {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.SAVE} mode, the file’s base name
         * will also appear in the dialog’s file name entry.
         * 
         * If the file name isn’t in the current folder of `chooser`, then the current
         * folder of `chooser` will be changed to the folder containing `filename`. This
         * is equivalent to a sequence of `gtk_file_chooser_unselect_all()` followed by
         * `gtk_file_chooser_select_filename()`.
         * 
         * Note that the file must exist, or nothing will be done except
         * for the directory change.
         * 
         * If you are implementing a save dialog,
         * you should use this function if you already have a file name to which the
         * user may save; for example, when the user opens an existing file and then
         * does Save As...  If you don’t have
         * a file name already — for example, if the user just created a new
         * file and is saving it for the first time, do not call this function.
         * Instead, use something similar to this:
         * 
         * ```c
         * if (document_is_new)
         *   {
         *     // the user just created a new document
         *     gtk_file_chooser_set_current_folder_file (chooser, default_file_for_saving);
         *     gtk_file_chooser_set_current_name (chooser, "Untitled document");
         *   }
         * else
         *   {
         *     // the user edited an existing document
         *     gtk_file_chooser_set_file (chooser, existing_file);
         *   }
         * ```
         * 
         * @param file the {@link Gio.File} to set as current
         * @returns Not useful.
         */
        set_file(file: Gio.File): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets `filename` as the current filename for the file chooser, by changing to
         * the file’s parent folder and actually selecting the file in list; all other
         * files will be unselected.  If the `chooser` is in
         * {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.SAVE} mode, the file’s base name will also appear in
         * the dialog’s file name entry.
         * 
         * Note that the file must exist, or nothing will be done except
         * for the directory change.
         * 
         * You should use this function only when implementing a save
         * dialog for which you already have a file name to which
         * the user may save.  For example, when the user opens an existing file and
         * then does Save As... to save a copy or
         * a modified version.  If you don’t have a file name already — for
         * example, if the user just created a new file and is saving it for the first
         * time, do not call this function.  Instead, use something similar to this:
         * 
         * ```c
         * if (document_is_new)
         *   {
         *     // the user just created a new document
         *     gtk_file_chooser_set_current_name (chooser, "Untitled document");
         *   }
         * else
         *   {
         *     // the user edited an existing document
         *     gtk_file_chooser_set_filename (chooser, existing_filename);
         *   }
         * ```
         * 
         * 
         * In the first case, the file chooser will present the user with useful suggestions
         * as to where to save his new file.  In the second case, the file’s existing location
         * is already known, so the file chooser will use it.
         * @param filename the filename to set as current
         * @returns Not useful.
         */
        set_filename(filename: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the current filter; only the files that pass the
         * filter will be displayed. If the user-selectable list of filters
         * is non-empty, then the filter should be one of the filters
         * in that list. Setting the current filter when the list of
         * filters is empty is useful if you want to restrict the displayed
         * set of files without letting the user change it.
         * @param filter a {@link Gtk.FileFilter}
         */
        set_filter(filter: FileFilter): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether only local files can be selected in the
         * file selector. If `local_only` is `true` (the default),
         * then the selected file or files are guaranteed to be
         * accessible through the operating systems native file
         * system and therefore the application only
         * needs to worry about the filename functions in
         * {@link Gtk.FileChooser}, like `gtk_file_chooser_get_filename()`,
         * rather than the URI functions like
         * `gtk_file_chooser_get_uri()`,
         * 
         * On some systems non-native files may still be
         * available using the native filesystem via a userspace
         * filesystem (FUSE).
         * @param local_only `true` if only local files can be selected
         */
        set_local_only(local_only: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets an application-supplied widget to use to display a custom preview
         * of the currently selected file. To implement a preview, after setting the
         * preview widget, you connect to the {@link Gtk.FileChooser.SignalSignatures.update_preview | Gtk.FileChooser::update-preview}
         * signal, and call `gtk_file_chooser_get_preview_filename()` or
         * `gtk_file_chooser_get_preview_uri()` on each change. If you can
         * display a preview of the new file, update your widget and
         * set the preview active using `gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget_active()`.
         * Otherwise, set the preview inactive.
         * 
         * When there is no application-supplied preview widget, or the
         * application-supplied preview widget is not active, the file chooser
         * will display no preview at all.
         * @param preview_widget widget for displaying preview.
         */
        set_preview_widget(preview_widget: Widget): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether the preview widget set by
         * `gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget()` should be shown for the
         * current filename. When `active` is set to false, the file chooser
         * may display an internally generated preview of the current file
         * or it may display no preview at all. See
         * `gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget()` for more details.
         * @param active whether to display the user-specified preview widget
         */
        set_preview_widget_active(active: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether multiple files can be selected in the file selector.  This is
         * only relevant if the action is set to be {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.OPEN} or
         * {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.SELECT_FOLDER}.
         * @param select_multiple `true` if multiple files can be selected.
         */
        set_select_multiple(select_multiple: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether hidden files and folders are displayed in the file selector.
         * @param show_hidden `true` if hidden files and folders should be displayed.
         */
        set_show_hidden(show_hidden: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the file referred to by `uri` as the current file for the file chooser,
         * by changing to the URI’s parent folder and actually selecting the URI in the
         * list.  If the `chooser` is {@link Gtk.FileChooserAction.SAVE} mode, the URI’s base
         * name will also appear in the dialog’s file name entry.
         * 
         * Note that the URI must exist, or nothing will be done except for the
         * directory change.
         * 
         * You should use this function only when implementing a save
         * dialog for which you already have a file name to which
         * the user may save.  For example, when the user opens an existing file and then
         * does Save As... to save a copy or a
         * modified version.  If you don’t have a file name already — for example,
         * if the user just created a new file and is saving it for the first time, do
         * not call this function.  Instead, use something similar to this:
         * 
         * ```c
         * if (document_is_new)
         *   {
         *     // the user just created a new document
         *     gtk_file_chooser_set_current_name (chooser, "Untitled document");
         *   }
         * else
         *   {
         *     // the user edited an existing document
         *     gtk_file_chooser_set_uri (chooser, existing_uri);
         *   }
         * ```
         * 
         * 
         * 
         * In the first case, the file chooser will present the user with useful suggestions
         * as to where to save his new file.  In the second case, the file’s existing location
         * is already known, so the file chooser will use it.
         * @param uri the URI to set as current
         * @returns Not useful.
         */
        set_uri(uri: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets whether the file chooser should display a stock label with the name of
         * the file that is being previewed; the default is `true`.  Applications that
         * want to draw the whole preview area themselves should set this to `false` and
         * display the name themselves in their preview widget.
         * 
         * See also: `gtk_file_chooser_set_preview_widget()`
         * @param use_label whether to display a stock label with the name of the previewed file
         */
        set_use_preview_label(use_label: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Unselects all the files in the current folder of a file chooser.
         */
        unselect_all(): void;

        /**
         * Unselects the file referred to by `file`. If the file is not in the current
         * directory, does not exist, or is otherwise not currently selected, does nothing.
         * @param file a {@link Gio.File}
         */
        unselect_file(file: Gio.File): void;

        /**
         * Unselects a currently selected filename. If the filename
         * is not in the current directory, does not exist, or
         * is otherwise not currently selected, does nothing.
         * @param filename the filename to unselect
         */
        unselect_filename(filename: string): void;

        /**
         * Unselects the file referred to by `uri`. If the file
         * is not in the current directory, does not exist, or
         * is otherwise not currently selected, does nothing.
         * @param uri the URI to unselect
         */
        unselect_uri(uri: string): void;
    }


    export const FileChooser: FileChooserNamespace & {
        new (): FileChooser; // This allows `obj instanceof FileChooser`
    };

    namespace FontChooser {
        /**
         * Interface for implementing FontChooser.
         * Contains only the virtual methods that need to be implemented.
         */
        interface Interface {

            // Virtual methods
            /**
             * @param fontname 
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_font_activated(fontname: string): void;

            /**
             * Gets the {@link Pango.FontFace} representing the selected font group
             * details (i.e. family, slant, weight, width, etc).
             * 
             * If the selected font is not installed, returns `null`.
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_get_font_face(): Pango.FontFace | null;

            /**
             * Gets the {@link Pango.FontFamily} representing the selected font family.
             * Font families are a collection of font faces.
             * 
             * If the selected font is not installed, returns `null`.
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_get_font_family(): Pango.FontFamily | null;

            /**
             * Gets the custom font map of this font chooser widget,
             * or `null` if it does not have one.
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_get_font_map(): Pango.FontMap | null;

            /**
             * The selected font size.
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_get_font_size(): number;

            /**
             * Adds a filter function that decides which fonts to display
             * in the font chooser.
             * @param filter a {@link Gtk.FontFilterFunc}, or `null`
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_set_filter_func(filter: FontFilterFunc | null): void;

            /**
             * Sets a custom font map to use for this font chooser widget.
             * A custom font map can be used to present application-specific
             * fonts instead of or in addition to the normal system fonts.
             * 
             * 
             * ```c
             * FcConfig *config;
             * PangoFontMap *fontmap;
             * 
             * config = FcInitLoadConfigAndFonts ();
             * FcConfigAppFontAddFile (config, my_app_font_file);
             * 
             * fontmap = pango_cairo_font_map_new_for_font_type (CAIRO_FONT_TYPE_FT);
             * pango_fc_font_map_set_config (PANGO_FC_FONT_MAP (fontmap), config);
             * 
             * gtk_font_chooser_set_font_map (font_chooser, fontmap);
             * ```
             * 
             * 
             * Note that other GTK+ widgets will only be able to use the application-specific
             * font if it is present in the font map they use:
             * 
             * 
             * ```
             * context = gtk_widget_get_pango_context (label);
             * pango_context_set_font_map (context, fontmap);
             * ```
             * 
             * @param fontmap a {@link Pango.FontMap}
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_set_font_map(fontmap: Pango.FontMap | null): void;
        }


        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.Object.ConstructorProps {
            font: string | null;
            font_desc: Pango.FontDescription | null;
            fontDesc: Pango.FontDescription | null;
            font_features: string;
            fontFeatures: string;
            language: string;
            level: FontChooserLevel;
            preview_text: string;
            previewText: string;
            show_preview_entry: boolean;
            showPreviewEntry: boolean;
        }
    }

    export interface FontChooserNamespace {
        $gtype: GObject.GType<FontChooser>;
        prototype: FontChooser;
    }
    /**
     * {@link Gtk.FontChooser} is an interface that can be implemented by widgets
     * displaying the list of fonts. In GTK+, the main objects
     * that implement this interface are {@link Gtk.FontChooserWidget},
     * {@link Gtk.FontChooserDialog} and {@link Gtk.FontButton}. The GtkFontChooser interface
     * has been introducted in GTK+ 3.2.
     * @gir-type Interface
     */
    interface FontChooser extends GObject.Object, FontChooser.Interface {

        // Properties
        /**
         * The font description as a string, e.g. "Sans Italic 12".
         * @default Sans 10
         */
        get font(): string | null;
        set font(val: string | null);

        /**
         * The font description as a {@link Pango.FontDescription}.
         */
        get font_desc(): Pango.FontDescription | null;
        set font_desc(val: Pango.FontDescription | null);

        /**
         * The font description as a {@link Pango.FontDescription}.
         */
        get fontDesc(): Pango.FontDescription | null;
        set fontDesc(val: Pango.FontDescription | null);

        /**
         * The selected font features, in a format that is compatible with
         * CSS and with Pango attributes.
         * @since 3.24.1
         * @read-only
         */
        get font_features(): string;

        /**
         * The selected font features, in a format that is compatible with
         * CSS and with Pango attributes.
         * @since 3.24.1
         * @read-only
         */
        get fontFeatures(): string;

        /**
         * The language for which the {@link Gtk.FontChooser.font_features} were
         * selected, in a format that is compatible with CSS and with Pango
         * attributes.
         * @since 3.24.1
         */
        get language(): string;
        set language(val: string);

        /**
         * The level of granularity to offer for selecting fonts.
         * @since 3.24.1
         * @default Gtk.FontChooserLevel.STYLE | Gtk.FontChooserLevel.SIZE
         */
        get level(): FontChooserLevel;
        set level(val: FontChooserLevel);

        /**
         * The string with which to preview the font.
         * @default The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog.
         */
        get preview_text(): string;
        set preview_text(val: string);

        /**
         * The string with which to preview the font.
         * @default The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog.
         */
        get previewText(): string;
        set previewText(val: string);

        /**
         * Whether to show an entry to change the preview text.
         * @default true
         */
        get show_preview_entry(): boolean;
        set show_preview_entry(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether to show an entry to change the preview text.
         * @default true
         */
        get showPreviewEntry(): boolean;
        set showPreviewEntry(val: boolean);

        // Methods
        /**
         * Gets the currently-selected font name.
         * 
         * Note that this can be a different string than what you set with
         * `gtk_font_chooser_set_font()`, as the font chooser widget may
         * normalize font names and thus return a string with a different
         * structure. For example, “Helvetica Italic Bold 12” could be
         * normalized to “Helvetica Bold Italic 12”.
         * 
         * Use `pango_font_description_equal()` if you want to compare two
         * font descriptions.
         * @returns A string with the name     of the current font, or `null` if  no font is selected. You must     free this string with `g_free()`.
         */
        get_font(): string | null;

        /**
         * Gets the currently-selected font.
         * 
         * Note that this can be a different string than what you set with
         * `gtk_font_chooser_set_font()`, as the font chooser widget may
         * normalize font names and thus return a string with a different
         * structure. For example, “Helvetica Italic Bold 12” could be
         * normalized to “Helvetica Bold Italic 12”.
         * 
         * Use `pango_font_description_equal()` if you want to compare two
         * font descriptions.
         * @returns A {@link Pango.FontDescription} for the     current font, or `null` if  no font is selected.
         */
        get_font_desc(): Pango.FontDescription | null;

        /**
         * Gets the {@link Pango.FontFace} representing the selected font group
         * details (i.e. family, slant, weight, width, etc).
         * 
         * If the selected font is not installed, returns `null`.
         * @returns A {@link Pango.FontFace} representing the     selected font group details, or `null`. The returned object is owned by     `fontchooser` and must not be modified or freed.
         */
        get_font_face(): Pango.FontFace | null;

        /**
         * Gets the {@link Pango.FontFamily} representing the selected font family.
         * Font families are a collection of font faces.
         * 
         * If the selected font is not installed, returns `null`.
         * @returns A {@link Pango.FontFamily} representing the     selected font family, or `null`. The returned object is owned by `fontchooser`     and must not be modified or freed.
         */
        get_font_family(): Pango.FontFamily | null;

        /**
         * Gets the currently-selected font features.
         * @returns the currently selected font features
         */
        get_font_features(): string;

        /**
         * Gets the custom font map of this font chooser widget,
         * or `null` if it does not have one.
         * @returns a {@link Pango.FontMap}, or `null`
         */
        get_font_map(): Pango.FontMap | null;

        /**
         * The selected font size.
         * @returns A n integer representing the selected font size,     or -1 if no font size is selected.
         */
        get_font_size(): number;

        /**
         * Gets the language that is used for font features.
         * @returns the currently selected language
         */
        get_language(): string;

        /**
         * Returns the current level of granularity for selecting fonts.
         * @returns the current granularity level
         */
        get_level(): FontChooserLevel;

        /**
         * Gets the text displayed in the preview area.
         * @returns the text displayed in the     preview area
         */
        get_preview_text(): string;

        /**
         * Returns whether the preview entry is shown or not.
         * @returns `true` if the preview entry is shown     or `false` if it is hidden.
         */
        get_show_preview_entry(): boolean;

        /**
         * Adds a filter function that decides which fonts to display
         * in the font chooser.
         * @param filter a {@link Gtk.FontFilterFunc}, or `null`
         */
        set_filter_func(filter: FontFilterFunc | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the currently-selected font.
         * @param fontname a font name like “Helvetica 12” or “Times Bold 18”
         */
        set_font(fontname: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets the currently-selected font from `font_desc`.
         * @param font_desc a {@link Pango.FontDescription}
         */
        set_font_desc(font_desc: Pango.FontDescription): void;

        /**
         * Sets a custom font map to use for this font chooser widget.
         * A custom font map can be used to present application-specific
         * fonts instead of or in addition to the normal system fonts.
         * 
         * 
         * ```c
         * FcConfig *config;
         * PangoFontMap *fontmap;
         * 
         * config = FcInitLoadConfigAndFonts ();
         * FcConfigAppFontAddFile (config, my_app_font_file);
         * 
         * fontmap = pango_cairo_font_map_new_for_font_type (CAIRO_FONT_TYPE_FT);
         * pango_fc_font_map_set_config (PANGO_FC_FONT_MAP (fontmap), config);
         * 
         * gtk_font_chooser_set_font_map (font_chooser, fontmap);
         * ```
         * 
         * 
         * Note that other GTK+ widgets will only be able to use the application-specific
         * font if it is present in the font map they use:
         * 
         * 
         * ```
         * context = gtk_widget_get_pango_context (label);
         * pango_context_set_font_map (context, fontmap);
         * ```
         * 
         * @param fontmap a {@link Pango.FontMap}
         */
        set_font_map(fontmap: Pango.FontMap | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the language to use for font features.
         * @param language a language
         */
        set_language(language: string): void;

        /**
         * Sets the desired level of granularity for selecting fonts.
         * @param level the desired level of granularity
         */
        set_level(level: FontChooserLevel): void;

        /**
         * Sets the text displayed in the preview area.
         * The `text` is used to show how the selected font looks.
         * @param text the text to display in the preview area
         */
        set_preview_text(text: string): void;

        /**
         * Shows or hides the editable preview entry.
         * @param show_preview_entry whether to show the editable preview entry or not
         */
        set_show_preview_entry(show_preview_entry: boolean): void;
    }


    export const FontChooser: FontChooserNamespace & {
        new (): FontChooser; // This allows `obj instanceof FontChooser`
    };

    namespace Orientable {

        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.Object.ConstructorProps {
            orientation: Orientation;
        }
    }

    export interface OrientableNamespace {
        $gtype: GObject.GType<Orientable>;
        prototype: Orientable;
    }
    /**
     * The {@link Gtk.Orientable} interface is implemented by all widgets that can be
     * oriented horizontally or vertically. Historically, such widgets have been
     * realized as subclasses of a common base class (e.g {@link Gtk.Box}/{@link Gtk.HBox}/{@link Gtk.VBox}
     * or {@link Gtk.Scale}/{@link Gtk.HScale}/{@link Gtk.VScale}). {@link Gtk.Orientable} is more flexible in that
     * it allows the orientation to be changed at runtime, allowing the widgets
     * to “flip”.
     * 
     * {@link Gtk.Orientable} was introduced in GTK+ 2.16.
     * @gir-type Interface
     */
    interface Orientable extends GObject.Object {

        // Properties
        /**
         * The orientation of the orientable.
         * @since 2.16
         * @default Gtk.Orientation.HORIZONTAL
         */
        get orientation(): Orientation;
        set orientation(val: Orientation);

        // Methods
        /**
         * Retrieves the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @returns the orientation of the `orientable`.
         */
        get_orientation(): Orientation;

        /**
         * Sets the orientation of the `orientable`.
         * @param orientation the orientable’s new orientation.
         */
        set_orientation(orientation: Orientation): void;
    }


    export const Orientable: OrientableNamespace & {
        new (): Orientable; // This allows `obj instanceof Orientable`
    };

    namespace PrintOperationPreview {
        /**
         * Interface for implementing PrintOperationPreview.
         * Contains only the virtual methods that need to be implemented.
         */
        interface Interface {

            // Virtual methods
            /**
             * Ends a preview.
             * 
             * This function must be called to finish a custom print preview.
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_end_preview(): void;

            /**
             * @param context 
             * @param page_setup 
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_got_page_size(context: PrintContext, page_setup: PageSetup): void;

            /**
             * Returns whether the given page is included in the set of pages that
             * have been selected for printing.
             * @param page_nr a page number
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_is_selected(page_nr: number): boolean;

            /**
             * @param context 
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_ready(context: PrintContext): void;

            /**
             * Renders a page to the preview, using the print context that
             * was passed to the {@link Gtk.PrintOperation.SignalSignatures.preview | Gtk.PrintOperation::preview} handler together
             * with `preview`.
             * 
             * A custom iprint preview should use this function in its ::expose
             * handler to render the currently selected page.
             * 
             * Note that this function requires a suitable cairo context to
             * be associated with the print context.
             * @param page_nr the page to render
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_render_page(page_nr: number): void;
        }


        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.Object.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    export interface PrintOperationPreviewNamespace {
        $gtype: GObject.GType<PrintOperationPreview>;
        prototype: PrintOperationPreview;
    }
    /**
     * @gir-type Interface
     */
    interface PrintOperationPreview extends GObject.Object, PrintOperationPreview.Interface {

        // Methods
        /**
         * Ends a preview.
         * 
         * This function must be called to finish a custom print preview.
         */
        end_preview(): void;

        /**
         * Returns whether the given page is included in the set of pages that
         * have been selected for printing.
         * @param page_nr a page number
         * @returns `true` if the page has been selected for printing
         */
        is_selected(page_nr: number): boolean;

        /**
         * Renders a page to the preview, using the print context that
         * was passed to the {@link Gtk.PrintOperation.SignalSignatures.preview | Gtk.PrintOperation::preview} handler together
         * with `preview`.
         * 
         * A custom iprint preview should use this function in its ::expose
         * handler to render the currently selected page.
         * 
         * Note that this function requires a suitable cairo context to
         * be associated with the print context.
         * @param page_nr the page to render
         */
        render_page(page_nr: number): void;
    }


    export const PrintOperationPreview: PrintOperationPreviewNamespace & {
        new (): PrintOperationPreview; // This allows `obj instanceof PrintOperationPreview`
    };

    namespace RecentChooser {
        /**
         * Interface for implementing RecentChooser.
         * Contains only the virtual methods that need to be implemented.
         */
        interface Interface {

            // Virtual methods
            /**
             * Adds `filter` to the list of {@link Gtk.RecentFilter} objects held by `chooser`.
             * 
             * If no previous filter objects were defined, this function will call
             * `gtk_recent_chooser_set_filter()`.
             * @param filter a {@link Gtk.RecentFilter}
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_add_filter(filter: RecentFilter): void;

            /**
             * Gets the URI currently selected by `chooser`.
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_get_current_uri(): string;

            /**
             * Gets the list of recently used resources in form of {@link Gtk.RecentInfo} objects.
             * 
             * The return value of this function is affected by the “sort-type” and
             * “limit” properties of `chooser`.
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_get_items(): RecentInfo[];

            /**
             * Signal emitted when the user “activates” a recent
             *    item in the recent chooser.
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_item_activated(): void;

            /**
             * Gets the {@link Gtk.RecentFilter} objects held by `chooser`.
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_list_filters(): RecentFilter[];

            /**
             * Removes `filter` from the list of {@link Gtk.RecentFilter} objects held by `chooser`.
             * @param filter a {@link Gtk.RecentFilter}
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_remove_filter(filter: RecentFilter): void;

            /**
             * Selects all the items inside `chooser`, if the `chooser` supports
             * multiple selection.
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_select_all(): void;

            /**
             * Selects `uri` inside `chooser`.
             * @param uri a URI
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_select_uri(uri: string): boolean;

            /**
             * Signal emitted when there is a change in the
             *    set of selected recently used resources.
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_selection_changed(): void;

            /**
             * Sets `uri` as the current URI for `chooser`.
             * @param uri a URI
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_set_current_uri(uri: string): boolean;

            /**
             * Sets the comparison function used when sorting to be `sort_func`.  If
             * the `chooser` has the sort type set to #GTK_RECENT_SORT_CUSTOM then
             * the chooser will sort using this function.
             * 
             * To the comparison function will be passed two {@link Gtk.RecentInfo} structs and
             * `sort_data`;  `sort_func` should return a positive integer if the first
             * item comes before the second, zero if the two items are equal and
             * a negative integer if the first item comes after the second.
             * @param sort_func the comparison function
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_set_sort_func(sort_func: RecentSortFunc): void;

            /**
             * Unselects all the items inside `chooser`.
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_unselect_all(): void;

            /**
             * Unselects `uri` inside `chooser`.
             * @param uri a URI
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_unselect_uri(uri: string): void;
        }


        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.Object.ConstructorProps {
            filter: RecentFilter;
            limit: number;
            local_only: boolean;
            localOnly: boolean;
            recent_manager: RecentManager;
            recentManager: RecentManager;
            select_multiple: boolean;
            selectMultiple: boolean;
            show_icons: boolean;
            showIcons: boolean;
            show_not_found: boolean;
            showNotFound: boolean;
            show_private: boolean;
            showPrivate: boolean;
            show_tips: boolean;
            showTips: boolean;
            sort_type: RecentSortType;
            sortType: RecentSortType;
        }
    }

    export interface RecentChooserNamespace {
        $gtype: GObject.GType<RecentChooser>;
        prototype: RecentChooser;
    }
    /**
     * {@link Gtk.RecentChooser} is an interface that can be implemented by widgets
     * displaying the list of recently used files.  In GTK+, the main objects
     * that implement this interface are {@link Gtk.RecentChooserWidget},
     * {@link Gtk.RecentChooserDialog} and {@link Gtk.RecentChooserMenu}.
     * 
     * Recently used files are supported since GTK+ 2.10.
     * @gir-type Interface
     */
    interface RecentChooser extends GObject.Object, RecentChooser.Interface {

        // Properties
        /**
         * The {@link Gtk.RecentFilter} object to be used when displaying
         * the recently used resources.
         * @since 2.10
         */
        get filter(): RecentFilter;
        set filter(val: RecentFilter);

        /**
         * The maximum number of recently used resources to be displayed,
         * or -1 to display all items.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default 50
         */
        get limit(): number;
        set limit(val: number);

        /**
         * Whether this {@link Gtk.RecentChooser} should display only local (file:)
         * resources.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default true
         */
        get local_only(): boolean;
        set local_only(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether this {@link Gtk.RecentChooser} should display only local (file:)
         * resources.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default true
         */
        get localOnly(): boolean;
        set localOnly(val: boolean);

        /**
         * The {@link Gtk.RecentManager} instance used by the {@link Gtk.RecentChooser} to
         * display the list of recently used resources.
         * @since 2.10
         * @construct-only
         */
        set recent_manager(val: RecentManager);

        /**
         * The {@link Gtk.RecentManager} instance used by the {@link Gtk.RecentChooser} to
         * display the list of recently used resources.
         * @since 2.10
         * @construct-only
         */
        set recentManager(val: RecentManager);

        /**
         * Allow the user to select multiple resources.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default false
         */
        get select_multiple(): boolean;
        set select_multiple(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Allow the user to select multiple resources.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default false
         */
        get selectMultiple(): boolean;
        set selectMultiple(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether this {@link Gtk.RecentChooser} should display an icon near the item.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default true
         */
        get show_icons(): boolean;
        set show_icons(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether this {@link Gtk.RecentChooser} should display an icon near the item.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default true
         */
        get showIcons(): boolean;
        set showIcons(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether this {@link Gtk.RecentChooser} should display the recently used resources
         * even if not present anymore. Setting this to `false` will perform a
         * potentially expensive check on every local resource (every remote
         * resource will always be displayed).
         * @since 2.10
         * @default true
         */
        get show_not_found(): boolean;
        set show_not_found(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether this {@link Gtk.RecentChooser} should display the recently used resources
         * even if not present anymore. Setting this to `false` will perform a
         * potentially expensive check on every local resource (every remote
         * resource will always be displayed).
         * @since 2.10
         * @default true
         */
        get showNotFound(): boolean;
        set showNotFound(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get show_private(): boolean;
        set show_private(val: boolean);

        /**
         * @default false
         */
        get showPrivate(): boolean;
        set showPrivate(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether this {@link Gtk.RecentChooser} should display a tooltip containing the
         * full path of the recently used resources.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default false
         */
        get show_tips(): boolean;
        set show_tips(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Whether this {@link Gtk.RecentChooser} should display a tooltip containing the
         * full path of the recently used resources.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default false
         */
        get showTips(): boolean;
        set showTips(val: boolean);

        /**
         * Sorting order to be used when displaying the recently used resources.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default Gtk.RecentSortType.NONE
         */
        get sort_type(): RecentSortType;
        set sort_type(val: RecentSortType);

        /**
         * Sorting order to be used when displaying the recently used resources.
         * @since 2.10
         * @default Gtk.RecentSortType.NONE
         */
        get sortType(): RecentSortType;
        set sortType(val: RecentSortType);

        // Methods
        /**
         * Adds `filter` to the list of {@link Gtk.RecentFilter} objects held by `chooser`.
         * 
         * If no previous filter objects were defined, this function will call
         * `gtk_recent_chooser_set_filter()`.
         * @param filter a {@link Gtk.RecentFilter}
         */
        add_filter(filter: RecentFilter): void;

        /**
         * Gets the {@link Gtk.RecentInfo} currently selected by `chooser`.
         * @returns a {@link Gtk.RecentInfo}.  Use `gtk_recent_info_unref()` when   when you have finished using it.
         */
        get_current_item(): RecentInfo;

        /**
         * Gets the URI currently selected by `chooser`.
         * @returns a newly allocated string holding a URI.
         */
        get_current_uri(): string;

        /**
         * Gets the {@link Gtk.RecentFilter} object currently used by `chooser` to affect
         * the display of the recently used resources.
         * @returns a {@link Gtk.RecentFilter} object.
         */
        get_filter(): RecentFilter;

        /**
         * Gets the list of recently used resources in form of {@link Gtk.RecentInfo} objects.
         * 
         * The return value of this function is affected by the “sort-type” and
         * “limit” properties of `chooser`.
         * @returns A newly allocated   list of {@link Gtk.RecentInfo} objects.  You should   use `gtk_recent_info_unref()` on every item of the list, and then free   the list itself using `g_list_free()`.
         */
        get_items(): RecentInfo[];

        /**
         * Gets the number of items returned by `gtk_recent_chooser_get_items()`
         * and `gtk_recent_chooser_get_uris()`.
         * @returns A positive integer, or -1 meaning that all items are   returned.
         */
        get_limit(): number;

        /**
         * Gets whether only local resources should be shown in the recently used
         * resources selector.  See `gtk_recent_chooser_set_local_only()`
         * @returns `true` if only local resources should be shown.
         */
        get_local_only(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets whether `chooser` can select multiple items.
         * @returns `true` if `chooser` can select more than one item.
         */
        get_select_multiple(): boolean;

        /**
         * Retrieves whether `chooser` should show an icon near the resource.
         * @returns `true` if the icons should be displayed, `false` otherwise.
         */
        get_show_icons(): boolean;

        /**
         * Retrieves whether `chooser` should show the recently used resources that
         * were not found.
         * @returns `true` if the resources not found should be displayed, and   `false` otheriwse.
         */
        get_show_not_found(): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns whether `chooser` should display recently used resources
         * registered as private.
         * @returns `true` if the recent chooser should show private items,   `false` otherwise.
         */
        get_show_private(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets whether `chooser` should display tooltips containing the full path
         * of a recently user resource.
         * @returns `true` if the recent chooser should show tooltips,   `false` otherwise.
         */
        get_show_tips(): boolean;

        /**
         * Gets the value set by `gtk_recent_chooser_set_sort_type()`.
         * @returns the sorting order of the `chooser`.
         */
        get_sort_type(): RecentSortType;

        /**
         * Gets the URI of the recently used resources.
         * 
         * The return value of this function is affected by the “sort-type” and “limit”
         * properties of `chooser`.
         * 
         * Since the returned array is `null` terminated, `length` may be `null`.
         * @returns A newly allocated, `null`-terminated array of strings. Use     `g_strfreev()` to free it.
         */
        get_uris(): string[];

        /**
         * Gets the {@link Gtk.RecentFilter} objects held by `chooser`.
         * @returns A singly linked list   of {@link Gtk.RecentFilter} objects.  You   should just free the returned list using `g_slist_free()`.
         */
        list_filters(): RecentFilter[];

        /**
         * Removes `filter` from the list of {@link Gtk.RecentFilter} objects held by `chooser`.
         * @param filter a {@link Gtk.RecentFilter}
         */
        remove_filter(filter: RecentFilter): void;

        /**
         * Selects all the items inside `chooser`, if the `chooser` supports
         * multiple selection.
         */
        select_all(): void;

        /**
         * Selects `uri` inside `chooser`.
         * @param uri a URI
         * @returns `true` if `uri` was found.
         */
        select_uri(uri: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets `uri` as the current URI for `chooser`.
         * @param uri a URI
         * @returns `true` if the URI was found.
         */
        set_current_uri(uri: string): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets `filter` as the current {@link Gtk.RecentFilter} object used by `chooser`
         * to affect the displayed recently used resources.
         * @param filter a {@link Gtk.RecentFilter}
         */
        set_filter(filter: RecentFilter | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the number of items that should be returned by
         * `gtk_recent_chooser_get_items()` and `gtk_recent_chooser_get_uris()`.
         * @param limit a positive integer, or -1 for all items
         */
        set_limit(limit: number): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether only local resources, that is resources using the file:// URI
         * scheme, should be shown in the recently used resources selector.  If
         * `local_only` is `true` (the default) then the shown resources are guaranteed
         * to be accessible through the operating system native file system.
         * @param local_only `true` if only local files can be shown
         */
        set_local_only(local_only: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether `chooser` can select multiple items.
         * @param select_multiple `true` if `chooser` can select more than one item
         */
        set_select_multiple(select_multiple: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether `chooser` should show an icon near the resource when
         * displaying it.
         * @param show_icons whether to show an icon near the resource
         */
        set_show_icons(show_icons: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether `chooser` should display the recently used resources that
         * it didn’t find.  This only applies to local resources.
         * @param show_not_found whether to show the local items we didn’t find
         */
        set_show_not_found(show_not_found: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Whether to show recently used resources marked registered as private.
         * @param show_private `true` to show private items, `false` otherwise
         */
        set_show_private(show_private: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets whether to show a tooltips containing the full path of each
         * recently used resource in a {@link Gtk.RecentChooser} widget.
         * @param show_tips `true` if tooltips should be shown
         */
        set_show_tips(show_tips: boolean): void;

        /**
         * Sets the comparison function used when sorting to be `sort_func`.  If
         * the `chooser` has the sort type set to #GTK_RECENT_SORT_CUSTOM then
         * the chooser will sort using this function.
         * 
         * To the comparison function will be passed two {@link Gtk.RecentInfo} structs and
         * `sort_data`;  `sort_func` should return a positive integer if the first
         * item comes before the second, zero if the two items are equal and
         * a negative integer if the first item comes after the second.
         * @param sort_func the comparison function
         */
        set_sort_func(sort_func: RecentSortFunc): void;

        /**
         * Changes the sorting order of the recently used resources list displayed by
         * `chooser`.
         * @param sort_type sort order that the chooser should use
         */
        set_sort_type(sort_type: RecentSortType): void;

        /**
         * Unselects all the items inside `chooser`.
         */
        unselect_all(): void;

        /**
         * Unselects `uri` inside `chooser`.
         * @param uri a URI
         */
        unselect_uri(uri: string): void;
    }


    export const RecentChooser: RecentChooserNamespace & {
        new (): RecentChooser; // This allows `obj instanceof RecentChooser`
    };

    namespace Scrollable {
        /**
         * Interface for implementing Scrollable.
         * Contains only the virtual methods that need to be implemented.
         */
        interface Interface {

            // Virtual methods
            /**
             * Returns the size of a non-scrolling border around the
             * outside of the scrollable. An example for this would
             * be treeview headers. GTK+ can use this information to
             * display overlayed graphics, like the overshoot indication,
             * at the right position.
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_get_border(): [boolean, Border];
        }


        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.Object.ConstructorProps {
            hadjustment: Adjustment;
            hscroll_policy: ScrollablePolicy;
            hscrollPolicy: ScrollablePolicy;
            vadjustment: Adjustment;
            vscroll_policy: ScrollablePolicy;
            vscrollPolicy: ScrollablePolicy;
        }
    }

    export interface ScrollableNamespace {
        $gtype: GObject.GType<Scrollable>;
        prototype: Scrollable;
    }
    /**
     * {@link Gtk.Scrollable} is an interface that is implemented by widgets with native
     * scrolling ability.
     * 
     * To implement this interface you should override the
     * {@link Gtk.Scrollable.hadjustment} and {@link Gtk.Scrollable.vadjustment} properties.
     * 
     * ## Creating a scrollable widget
     * 
     * All scrollable widgets should do the following.
     * 
     * - When a parent widget sets the scrollable child widget’s adjustments,
     *   the widget should populate the adjustments’
     *   {@link Gtk.Adjustment.lower}, {@link Gtk.Adjustment.upper},
     *   {@link Gtk.Adjustment.step_increment}, {@link Gtk.Adjustment.page_increment} and
     *   {@link Gtk.Adjustment.page_size} properties and connect to the
     *   {@link Gtk.Adjustment.SignalSignatures.value_changed | Gtk.Adjustment::value-changed} signal.
     * 
     * - Because its preferred size is the size for a fully expanded widget,
     *   the scrollable widget must be able to cope with underallocations.
     *   This means that it must accept any value passed to its
     *   {@link Gtk.WidgetClass}.size_allocate() function.
     * 
     * - When the parent allocates space to the scrollable child widget,
     *   the widget should update the adjustments’ properties with new values.
     * 
     * - When any of the adjustments emits the {@link Gtk.Adjustment.SignalSignatures.value_changed | Gtk.Adjustment::value-changed} signal,
     *   the scrollable widget should scroll its contents.
     * @gir-type Interface
     */
    interface Scrollable extends GObject.Object, Scrollable.Interface {

        // Properties
        /**
         * Horizontal {@link Gtk.Adjustment} of the scrollable widget. This adjustment is
         * shared between the scrollable widget and its parent.
         * @since 3.0
         */
        get hadjustment(): Adjustment;
        set hadjustment(val: Adjustment);

        /**
         * Determines whether horizontal scrolling should start once the scrollable
         * widget is allocated less than its minimum width or less than its natural width.
         * @since 3.0
         * @default Gtk.ScrollablePolicy.MINIMUM
         */
        get hscroll_policy(): ScrollablePolicy;
        set hscroll_policy(val: ScrollablePolicy);

        /**
         * Determines whether horizontal scrolling should start once the scrollable
         * widget is allocated less than its minimum width or less than its natural width.
         * @since 3.0
         * @default Gtk.ScrollablePolicy.MINIMUM
         */
        get hscrollPolicy(): ScrollablePolicy;
        set hscrollPolicy(val: ScrollablePolicy);

        /**
         * Verical {@link Gtk.Adjustment} of the scrollable widget. This adjustment is shared
         * between the scrollable widget and its parent.
         * @since 3.0
         */
        get vadjustment(): Adjustment;
        set vadjustment(val: Adjustment);

        /**
         * Determines whether vertical scrolling should start once the scrollable
         * widget is allocated less than its minimum height or less than its natural height.
         * @since 3.0
         * @default Gtk.ScrollablePolicy.MINIMUM
         */
        get vscroll_policy(): ScrollablePolicy;
        set vscroll_policy(val: ScrollablePolicy);

        /**
         * Determines whether vertical scrolling should start once the scrollable
         * widget is allocated less than its minimum height or less than its natural height.
         * @since 3.0
         * @default Gtk.ScrollablePolicy.MINIMUM
         */
        get vscrollPolicy(): ScrollablePolicy;
        set vscrollPolicy(val: ScrollablePolicy);

        // Methods
        /**
         * Returns the size of a non-scrolling border around the
         * outside of the scrollable. An example for this would
         * be treeview headers. GTK+ can use this information to
         * display overlayed graphics, like the overshoot indication,
         * at the right position.
         * @returns `true` if `border` has been set
         */
        get_border(): [boolean, Border];

        /**
         * Retrieves the {@link Gtk.Adjustment} used for horizontal scrolling.
         * @returns horizontal {@link Gtk.Adjustment}.
         */
        get_hadjustment(): Adjustment;

        /**
         * Gets the horizontal {@link Gtk.ScrollablePolicy}.
         * @returns The horizontal {@link Gtk.ScrollablePolicy}.
         */
        get_hscroll_policy(): ScrollablePolicy;

        /**
         * Retrieves the {@link Gtk.Adjustment} used for vertical scrolling.
         * @returns vertical {@link Gtk.Adjustment}.
         */
        get_vadjustment(): Adjustment;

        /**
         * Gets the vertical {@link Gtk.ScrollablePolicy}.
         * @returns The vertical {@link Gtk.ScrollablePolicy}.
         */
        get_vscroll_policy(): ScrollablePolicy;

        /**
         * Sets the horizontal adjustment of the {@link Gtk.Scrollable}.
         * @param hadjustment a {@link Gtk.Adjustment}
         */
        set_hadjustment(hadjustment: Adjustment | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.ScrollablePolicy} to determine whether
         * horizontal scrolling should start below the minimum width or
         * below the natural width.
         * @param policy the horizontal {@link Gtk.ScrollablePolicy}
         */
        set_hscroll_policy(policy: ScrollablePolicy): void;

        /**
         * Sets the vertical adjustment of the {@link Gtk.Scrollable}.
         * @param vadjustment a {@link Gtk.Adjustment}
         */
        set_vadjustment(vadjustment: Adjustment | null): void;

        /**
         * Sets the {@link Gtk.ScrollablePolicy} to determine whether
         * vertical scrolling should start below the minimum height or
         * below the natural height.
         * @param policy the vertical {@link Gtk.ScrollablePolicy}
         */
        set_vscroll_policy(policy: ScrollablePolicy): void;
    }


    export const Scrollable: ScrollableNamespace & {
        new (): Scrollable; // This allows `obj instanceof Scrollable`
    };

    namespace StyleProvider {
        /**
         * Interface for implementing StyleProvider.
         * Contains only the virtual methods that need to be implemented.
         */
        interface Interface {

            // Virtual methods
            /**
             * Returns the {@link Gtk.IconFactory} defined to be in use for `path`, or `null` if none
             * is defined.
             * @param path {@link Gtk.WidgetPath} to query
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_get_icon_factory(path: WidgetPath): IconFactory | null;

            /**
             * Returns the style settings affecting a widget defined by `path`, or `null` if
             * `provider` doesn’t contemplate styling `path`.
             * @param path {@link Gtk.WidgetPath} to query
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_get_style(path: WidgetPath): StyleProperties | null;

            /**
             * Looks up a widget style property as defined by `provider` for
             * the widget represented by `path`.
             * @param path {@link Gtk.WidgetPath} to query
             * @param state state to query the style property for
             * @param pspec The {@link GObject.ParamSpec} to query
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_get_style_property(path: WidgetPath, state: StateFlags, pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): [boolean, GObject.Value | any];
        }


        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.Object.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    export interface StyleProviderNamespace {
        $gtype: GObject.GType<StyleProvider>;
        prototype: StyleProvider;
    }
    /**
     * GtkStyleProvider is an interface used to provide style information to a {@link Gtk.StyleContext}.
     * See `gtk_style_context_add_provider()` and `gtk_style_context_add_provider_for_screen()`.
     * @gir-type Interface
     */
    interface StyleProvider extends GObject.Object, StyleProvider.Interface {

        // Methods
        /**
         * Returns the {@link Gtk.IconFactory} defined to be in use for `path`, or `null` if none
         * is defined.
         * @param path {@link Gtk.WidgetPath} to query
         * @returns The icon factory to use for `path`, or `null`
         */
        get_icon_factory(path: WidgetPath): IconFactory | null;

        /**
         * Returns the style settings affecting a widget defined by `path`, or `null` if
         * `provider` doesn’t contemplate styling `path`.
         * @param path {@link Gtk.WidgetPath} to query
         * @returns a {@link Gtk.StyleProperties} containing the style settings affecting `path`
         */
        get_style(path: WidgetPath): StyleProperties | null;

        /**
         * Looks up a widget style property as defined by `provider` for
         * the widget represented by `path`.
         * @param path {@link Gtk.WidgetPath} to query
         * @param state state to query the style property for
         * @param pspec The {@link GObject.ParamSpec} to query
         * @returns `true` if the property was found and has a value, `false` otherwise
         */
        get_style_property(path: WidgetPath, state: StateFlags, pspec: GObject.ParamSpec): [boolean, unknown];
    }


    export const StyleProvider: StyleProviderNamespace & {
        new (): StyleProvider; // This allows `obj instanceof StyleProvider`
    };

    namespace ToolShell {
        /**
         * Interface for implementing ToolShell.
         * Contains only the virtual methods that need to be implemented.
         */
        interface Interface {

            // Virtual methods
            /**
             * Retrieves the current ellipsize mode for the tool shell. Tool items must not
             * call this function directly, but rely on `gtk_tool_item_get_ellipsize_mode()`
             * instead.
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_get_ellipsize_mode(): Pango.EllipsizeMode;

            /**
             * mandatory implementation of `gtk_tool_shell_get_icon_size()`.
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_get_icon_size(): IconSize;

            /**
             * Retrieves the current orientation for the tool shell. Tool items must not
             * call this function directly, but rely on `gtk_tool_item_get_orientation()`
             * instead.
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_get_orientation(): Orientation;

            /**
             * Returns the relief style of buttons on `shell`. Tool items must not call this
             * function directly, but rely on `gtk_tool_item_get_relief_style()` instead.
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_get_relief_style(): ReliefStyle;

            /**
             * Retrieves whether the tool shell has text, icons, or both. Tool items must
             * not call this function directly, but rely on `gtk_tool_item_get_toolbar_style()`
             * instead.
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_get_style(): ToolbarStyle;

            /**
             * Retrieves the current text alignment for the tool shell. Tool items must not
             * call this function directly, but rely on `gtk_tool_item_get_text_alignment()`
             * instead.
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_get_text_alignment(): number;

            /**
             * Retrieves the current text orientation for the tool shell. Tool items must not
             * call this function directly, but rely on `gtk_tool_item_get_text_orientation()`
             * instead.
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_get_text_orientation(): Orientation;

            /**
             * Retrieves the current text size group for the tool shell. Tool items must not
             * call this function directly, but rely on `gtk_tool_item_get_text_size_group()`
             * instead.
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_get_text_size_group(): SizeGroup;

            /**
             * Calling this function signals the tool shell that the overflow menu item for
             * tool items have changed. If there is an overflow menu and if it is visible
             * when this function it called, the menu will be rebuilt.
             * 
             * Tool items must not call this function directly, but rely on
             * `gtk_tool_item_rebuild_menu()` instead.
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_rebuild_menu(): void;
        }


        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends Widget.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    export interface ToolShellNamespace {
        $gtype: GObject.GType<ToolShell>;
        prototype: ToolShell;
    }
    /**
     * The {@link Gtk.ToolShell} interface allows container widgets to provide additional
     * information when embedding {@link Gtk.ToolItem} widgets.
     * @gir-type Interface
     */
    interface ToolShell extends Widget, ToolShell.Interface {

        // Methods
        /**
         * Retrieves the current ellipsize mode for the tool shell. Tool items must not
         * call this function directly, but rely on `gtk_tool_item_get_ellipsize_mode()`
         * instead.
         * @returns the current ellipsize mode of `shell`
         */
        get_ellipsize_mode(): Pango.EllipsizeMode;

        /**
         * Retrieves the icon size for the tool shell. Tool items must not call this
         * function directly, but rely on `gtk_tool_item_get_icon_size()` instead.
         * @returns the current size ({@link Gtk.IconSize}) for icons of `shell`
         */
        get_icon_size(): number;

        /**
         * Retrieves the current orientation for the tool shell. Tool items must not
         * call this function directly, but rely on `gtk_tool_item_get_orientation()`
         * instead.
         * @returns the current orientation of `shell`
         */
        get_orientation(): Orientation;

        /**
         * Returns the relief style of buttons on `shell`. Tool items must not call this
         * function directly, but rely on `gtk_tool_item_get_relief_style()` instead.
         * @returns The relief style of buttons on `shell`.
         */
        get_relief_style(): ReliefStyle;

        /**
         * Retrieves whether the tool shell has text, icons, or both. Tool items must
         * not call this function directly, but rely on `gtk_tool_item_get_toolbar_style()`
         * instead.
         * @returns the current style of `shell`
         */
        get_style(): ToolbarStyle;

        /**
         * @param args 
         */
    // Conflicted with Gtk.Widget.get_style
        get_style(...args: never[]): any;

        /**
         * Retrieves the current text alignment for the tool shell. Tool items must not
         * call this function directly, but rely on `gtk_tool_item_get_text_alignment()`
         * instead.
         * @returns the current text alignment of `shell`
         */
        get_text_alignment(): number;

        /**
         * Retrieves the current text orientation for the tool shell. Tool items must not
         * call this function directly, but rely on `gtk_tool_item_get_text_orientation()`
         * instead.
         * @returns the current text orientation of `shell`
         */
        get_text_orientation(): Orientation;

        /**
         * Retrieves the current text size group for the tool shell. Tool items must not
         * call this function directly, but rely on `gtk_tool_item_get_text_size_group()`
         * instead.
         * @returns the current text size group of `shell`
         */
        get_text_size_group(): SizeGroup;

        /**
         * Calling this function signals the tool shell that the overflow menu item for
         * tool items have changed. If there is an overflow menu and if it is visible
         * when this function it called, the menu will be rebuilt.
         * 
         * Tool items must not call this function directly, but rely on
         * `gtk_tool_item_rebuild_menu()` instead.
         */
        rebuild_menu(): void;
    }


    export const ToolShell: ToolShellNamespace & {
        new (): ToolShell; // This allows `obj instanceof ToolShell`
    };

    namespace TreeDragDest {
        /**
         * Interface for implementing TreeDragDest.
         * Contains only the virtual methods that need to be implemented.
         */
        interface Interface {

            // Virtual methods
            /**
             * Asks the {@link Gtk.TreeDragDest} to insert a row before the path `dest`,
             * deriving the contents of the row from `selection_data`. If `dest` is
             * outside the tree so that inserting before it is impossible, `false`
             * will be returned. Also, `false` may be returned if the new row is
             * not created for some model-specific reason.  Should robustly handle
             * a `dest` no longer found in the model!
             * @param dest row to drop in front of
             * @param selection_data data to drop
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_drag_data_received(dest: TreePath, selection_data: SelectionData): boolean;

            /**
             * Determines whether a drop is possible before the given `dest_path`,
             * at the same depth as `dest_path`. i.e., can we drop the data in
             * `selection_data` at that location. `dest_path` does not have to
             * exist; the return value will almost certainly be `false` if the
             * parent of `dest_path` doesn’t exist, though.
             * @param dest_path destination row
             * @param selection_data the data being dragged
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_row_drop_possible(dest_path: TreePath, selection_data: SelectionData): boolean;
        }


        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.Object.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    export interface TreeDragDestNamespace {
        $gtype: GObject.GType<TreeDragDest>;
        prototype: TreeDragDest;
    }
    /**
     * @gir-type Interface
     */
    interface TreeDragDest extends GObject.Object, TreeDragDest.Interface {

        // Methods
        /**
         * Asks the {@link Gtk.TreeDragDest} to insert a row before the path `dest`,
         * deriving the contents of the row from `selection_data`. If `dest` is
         * outside the tree so that inserting before it is impossible, `false`
         * will be returned. Also, `false` may be returned if the new row is
         * not created for some model-specific reason.  Should robustly handle
         * a `dest` no longer found in the model!
         * @param dest row to drop in front of
         * @param selection_data data to drop
         * @returns whether a new row was created before position `dest`
         */
        drag_data_received(dest: TreePath, selection_data: SelectionData): boolean;

        /**
         * Determines whether a drop is possible before the given `dest_path`,
         * at the same depth as `dest_path`. i.e., can we drop the data in
         * `selection_data` at that location. `dest_path` does not have to
         * exist; the return value will almost certainly be `false` if the
         * parent of `dest_path` doesn’t exist, though.
         * @param dest_path destination row
         * @param selection_data the data being dragged
         * @returns `true` if a drop is possible before `dest_path`
         */
        row_drop_possible(dest_path: TreePath, selection_data: SelectionData): boolean;
    }


    export const TreeDragDest: TreeDragDestNamespace & {
        new (): TreeDragDest; // This allows `obj instanceof TreeDragDest`
    };

    namespace TreeDragSource {
        /**
         * Interface for implementing TreeDragSource.
         * Contains only the virtual methods that need to be implemented.
         */
        interface Interface {

            // Virtual methods
            /**
             * Asks the {@link Gtk.TreeDragSource} to delete the row at `path`, because
             * it was moved somewhere else via drag-and-drop. Returns `false`
             * if the deletion fails because `path` no longer exists, or for
             * some model-specific reason. Should robustly handle a `path` no
             * longer found in the model!
             * @param path row that was being dragged
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_drag_data_delete(path: TreePath): boolean;

            /**
             * Asks the {@link Gtk.TreeDragSource} to fill in `selection_data` with a
             * representation of the row at `path`. `selection_data`->target gives
             * the required type of the data.  Should robustly handle a `path` no
             * longer found in the model!
             * @param path row that was dragged
             * @param selection_data a {@link Gtk.SelectionData} to fill with data                  from the dragged row
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_drag_data_get(path: TreePath, selection_data: SelectionData): boolean;

            /**
             * Asks the {@link Gtk.TreeDragSource} whether a particular row can be used as
             * the source of a DND operation. If the source doesn’t implement
             * this interface, the row is assumed draggable.
             * @param path row on which user is initiating a drag
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_row_draggable(path: TreePath): boolean;
        }


        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.Object.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    export interface TreeDragSourceNamespace {
        $gtype: GObject.GType<TreeDragSource>;
        prototype: TreeDragSource;
    }
    /**
     * @gir-type Interface
     */
    interface TreeDragSource extends GObject.Object, TreeDragSource.Interface {

        // Methods
        /**
         * Asks the {@link Gtk.TreeDragSource} to delete the row at `path`, because
         * it was moved somewhere else via drag-and-drop. Returns `false`
         * if the deletion fails because `path` no longer exists, or for
         * some model-specific reason. Should robustly handle a `path` no
         * longer found in the model!
         * @param path row that was being dragged
         * @returns `true` if the row was successfully deleted
         */
        drag_data_delete(path: TreePath): boolean;

        /**
         * Asks the {@link Gtk.TreeDragSource} to fill in `selection_data` with a
         * representation of the row at `path`. `selection_data`->target gives
         * the required type of the data.  Should robustly handle a `path` no
         * longer found in the model!
         * @param path row that was dragged
         * @param selection_data a {@link Gtk.SelectionData} to fill with data                  from the dragged row
         * @returns `true` if data of the required type was provided
         */
        drag_data_get(path: TreePath, selection_data: SelectionData): boolean;

        /**
         * Asks the {@link Gtk.TreeDragSource} whether a particular row can be used as
         * the source of a DND operation. If the source doesn’t implement
         * this interface, the row is assumed draggable.
         * @param path row on which user is initiating a drag
         * @returns `true` if the row can be dragged
         */
        row_draggable(path: TreePath): boolean;
    }


    export const TreeDragSource: TreeDragSourceNamespace & {
        new (): TreeDragSource; // This allows `obj instanceof TreeDragSource`
    };

    namespace TreeModel {
        /**
         * Interface for implementing TreeModel.
         * Contains only the virtual methods that need to be implemented.
         */
        interface Interface {

            // Virtual methods
            /**
             * Returns the type of the column.
             * @param index_ the column index
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_get_column_type(index_: number): GObject.GType;

            /**
             * Returns a set of flags supported by this interface.
             * 
             * The flags are a bitwise combination of {@link Gtk.TreeModelFlags}.
             * The flags supported should not change during the lifetime
             * of the `tree_model`.
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_get_flags(): TreeModelFlags;

            /**
             * Sets `iter` to a valid iterator pointing to `path`.  If `path` does
             * not exist, `iter` is set to an invalid iterator and `false` is returned.
             * @param path the {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_get_iter(path: TreePath): [boolean, TreeIter];

            /**
             * Returns the number of columns supported by `tree_model`.
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_get_n_columns(): number;

            /**
             * Returns a newly-created {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct referenced by `iter`.
             * 
             * This path should be freed with `gtk_tree_path_free()`.
             * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_get_path(iter: TreeIter): TreePath;

            /**
             * Initializes and sets `value` to that at `column`.
             * 
             * When done with `value`, `g_value_unset()` needs to be called
             * to free any allocated memory.
             * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
             * @param column the column to lookup the value at
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_get_value(iter: TreeIter, column: number): GObject.Value | any;

            /**
             * Sets `iter` to point to the first child of `parent`.
             * 
             * If `parent` has no children, `false` is returned and `iter` is
             * set to be invalid. `parent` will remain a valid node after this
             * function has been called.
             * 
             * If `parent` is `null` returns the first node, equivalent to
             * `gtk_tree_model_get_iter_first (tree_model, iter);`
             * @param parent the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct, or `null`
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_iter_children(parent: TreeIter | null): [boolean, TreeIter];

            /**
             * Returns `true` if `iter` has children, `false` otherwise.
             * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct to test for children
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_iter_has_child(iter: TreeIter): boolean;

            /**
             * Returns the number of children that `iter` has.
             * 
             * As a special case, if `iter` is `null`, then the number
             * of toplevel nodes is returned.
             * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct, or `null`
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_iter_n_children(iter: TreeIter | null): number;

            /**
             * Sets `iter` to point to the node following it at the current level.
             * 
             * If there is no next `iter`, `false` is returned and `iter` is set
             * to be invalid.
             * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_iter_next(iter: TreeIter): boolean;

            /**
             * Sets `iter` to be the child of `parent`, using the given index.
             * 
             * The first index is 0. If `n` is too big, or `parent` has no children,
             * `iter` is set to an invalid iterator and `false` is returned. `parent`
             * will remain a valid node after this function has been called. As a
             * special case, if `parent` is `null`, then the `n`-th root node
             * is set.
             * @param parent the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct to get the child from, or `null`.
             * @param n the index of the desired child
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_iter_nth_child(parent: TreeIter | null, n: number): [boolean, TreeIter];

            /**
             * Sets `iter` to be the parent of `child`.
             * 
             * If `child` is at the toplevel, and doesn’t have a parent, then
             * `iter` is set to an invalid iterator and `false` is returned.
             * `child` will remain a valid node after this function has been
             * called.
             * 
             * `iter` will be initialized before the lookup is performed, so `child`
             * and `iter` cannot point to the same memory location.
             * @param child the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_iter_parent(child: TreeIter): [boolean, TreeIter];

            /**
             * Sets `iter` to point to the previous node at the current level.
             * 
             * If there is no previous `iter`, `false` is returned and `iter` is
             * set to be invalid.
             * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_iter_previous(iter: TreeIter): boolean;

            /**
             * Lets the tree ref the node.
             * 
             * This is an optional method for models to implement.
             * To be more specific, models may ignore this call as it exists
             * primarily for performance reasons.
             * 
             * This function is primarily meant as a way for views to let
             * caching models know when nodes are being displayed (and hence,
             * whether or not to cache that node). Being displayed means a node
             * is in an expanded branch, regardless of whether the node is currently
             * visible in the viewport. For example, a file-system based model
             * would not want to keep the entire file-hierarchy in memory,
             * just the sections that are currently being displayed by
             * every current view.
             * 
             * A model should be expected to be able to get an iter independent
             * of its reffed state.
             * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_ref_node(iter: TreeIter): void;

            /**
             * Emits the {@link Gtk.TreeModel.SignalSignatures.row_changed | Gtk.TreeModel::row-changed} signal on `tree_model`.
             * @param path a {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct pointing to the changed row
             * @param iter a valid {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct pointing to the changed row
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_row_changed(path: TreePath, iter: TreeIter): void;

            /**
             * Emits the {@link Gtk.TreeModel.SignalSignatures.row_deleted | Gtk.TreeModel::row-deleted} signal on `tree_model`.
             * 
             * This should be called by models after a row has been removed.
             * The location pointed to by `path` should be the location that
             * the row previously was at. It may not be a valid location anymore.
             * 
             * Nodes that are deleted are not unreffed, this means that any
             * outstanding references on the deleted node should not be released.
             * @param path a {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct pointing to the previous location of     the deleted row
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_row_deleted(path: TreePath): void;

            /**
             * Emits the {@link Gtk.TreeModel.SignalSignatures.row_has_child_toggled | Gtk.TreeModel::row-has-child-toggled} signal on
             * `tree_model`. This should be called by models after the child
             * state of a node changes.
             * @param path a {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct pointing to the changed row
             * @param iter a valid {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct pointing to the changed row
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_row_has_child_toggled(path: TreePath, iter: TreeIter): void;

            /**
             * Emits the {@link Gtk.TreeModel.SignalSignatures.row_inserted | Gtk.TreeModel::row-inserted} signal on `tree_model`.
             * @param path a {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct pointing to the inserted row
             * @param iter a valid {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct pointing to the inserted row
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_row_inserted(path: TreePath, iter: TreeIter): void;

            /**
             * Lets the tree unref the node.
             * 
             * This is an optional method for models to implement.
             * To be more specific, models may ignore this call as it exists
             * primarily for performance reasons. For more information on what
             * this means, see `gtk_tree_model_ref_node()`.
             * 
             * Please note that nodes that are deleted are not unreffed.
             * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_unref_node(iter: TreeIter): void;
        }


        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends GObject.Object.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    export interface TreeModelNamespace {
        $gtype: GObject.GType<TreeModel>;
        prototype: TreeModel;
    }
    /**
     * The {@link Gtk.TreeModel} interface defines a generic tree interface for
     * use by the {@link Gtk.TreeView} widget. It is an abstract interface, and
     * is designed to be usable with any appropriate data structure. The
     * programmer just has to implement this interface on their own data
     * type for it to be viewable by a {@link Gtk.TreeView} widget.
     * 
     * The model is represented as a hierarchical tree of strongly-typed,
     * columned data. In other words, the model can be seen as a tree where
     * every node has different values depending on which column is being
     * queried. The type of data found in a column is determined by using
     * the GType system (ie. #G_TYPE_INT, #GTK_TYPE_BUTTON, #G_TYPE_POINTER,
     * etc). The types are homogeneous per column across all nodes. It is
     * important to note that this interface only provides a way of examining
     * a model and observing changes. The implementation of each individual
     * model decides how and if changes are made.
     * 
     * In order to make life simpler for programmers who do not need to
     * write their own specialized model, two generic models are provided
     * — the {@link Gtk.TreeStore} and the {@link Gtk.ListStore}. To use these, the
     * developer simply pushes data into these models as necessary. These
     * models provide the data structure as well as all appropriate tree
     * interfaces. As a result, implementing drag and drop, sorting, and
     * storing data is trivial. For the vast majority of trees and lists,
     * these two models are sufficient.
     * 
     * Models are accessed on a node/column level of granularity. One can
     * query for the value of a model at a certain node and a certain
     * column on that node. There are two structures used to reference a
     * particular node in a model. They are the {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct and
     * the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct (“iter” is short for iterator). Most of the
     * interface consists of operations on a {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct.
     * 
     * A path is essentially a potential node. It is a location on a model
     * that may or may not actually correspond to a node on a specific
     * model. The {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct can be converted into either an
     * array of unsigned integers or a string. The string form is a list
     * of numbers separated by a colon. Each number refers to the offset
     * at that level. Thus, the path `0` refers to the root
     * node and the path `2:4` refers to the fifth child of
     * the third node.
     * 
     * By contrast, a {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct is a reference to a specific node on
     * a specific model. It is a generic struct with an integer and three
     * generic pointers. These are filled in by the model in a model-specific
     * way. One can convert a path to an iterator by calling
     * `gtk_tree_model_get_iter()`. These iterators are the primary way
     * of accessing a model and are similar to the iterators used by
     * {@link Gtk.TextBuffer}. They are generally statically allocated on the
     * stack and only used for a short time. The model interface defines
     * a set of operations using them for navigating the model.
     * 
     * It is expected that models fill in the iterator with private data.
     * For example, the {@link Gtk.ListStore} model, which is internally a simple
     * linked list, stores a list node in one of the pointers. The
     * {@link Gtk.TreeModelSort} stores an array and an offset in two of the
     * pointers. Additionally, there is an integer field. This field is
     * generally filled with a unique stamp per model. This stamp is for
     * catching errors resulting from using invalid iterators with a model.
     * 
     * The lifecycle of an iterator can be a little confusing at first.
     * Iterators are expected to always be valid for as long as the model
     * is unchanged (and doesn’t emit a signal). The model is considered
     * to own all outstanding iterators and nothing needs to be done to
     * free them from the user’s point of view. Additionally, some models
     * guarantee that an iterator is valid for as long as the node it refers
     * to is valid (most notably the {@link Gtk.TreeStore} and {@link Gtk.ListStore}).
     * Although generally uninteresting, as one always has to allow for
     * the case where iterators do not persist beyond a signal, some very
     * important performance enhancements were made in the sort model.
     * As a result, the #GTK_TREE_MODEL_ITERS_PERSIST flag was added to
     * indicate this behavior.
     * 
     * To help show some common operation of a model, some examples are
     * provided. The first example shows three ways of getting the iter at
     * the location `3:2:5`. While the first method shown is
     * easier, the second is much more common, as you often get paths from
     * callbacks.
     * 
     * ## Acquiring a {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
     * 
     * 
     * ```c
     * // Three ways of getting the iter pointing to the location
     * GtkTreePath *path;
     * GtkTreeIter iter;
     * GtkTreeIter parent_iter;
     * 
     * // get the iterator from a string
     * gtk_tree_model_get_iter_from_string (model,
     *                                      &iter,
     *                                      "3:2:5");
     * 
     * // get the iterator from a path
     * path = gtk_tree_path_new_from_string ("3:2:5");
     * gtk_tree_model_get_iter (model, &iter, path);
     * gtk_tree_path_free (path);
     * 
     * // walk the tree to find the iterator
     * gtk_tree_model_iter_nth_child (model, &iter,
     *                                NULL, 3);
     * parent_iter = iter;
     * gtk_tree_model_iter_nth_child (model, &iter,
     *                                &parent_iter, 2);
     * parent_iter = iter;
     * gtk_tree_model_iter_nth_child (model, &iter,
     *                                &parent_iter, 5);
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * This second example shows a quick way of iterating through a list
     * and getting a string and an integer from each row. The
     * `populate_model()` function used below is not
     * shown, as it is specific to the {@link Gtk.ListStore}. For information on
     * how to write such a function, see the {@link Gtk.ListStore} documentation.
     * 
     * ## Reading data from a {@link Gtk.TreeModel}
     * 
     * 
     * ```c
     * enum
     * {
     *   STRING_COLUMN,
     *   INT_COLUMN,
     *   N_COLUMNS
     * };
     * 
     * ...
     * 
     * GtkTreeModel *list_store;
     * GtkTreeIter iter;
     * gboolean valid;
     * gint row_count = 0;
     * 
     * // make a new list_store
     * list_store = gtk_list_store_new (N_COLUMNS,
     *                                  G_TYPE_STRING,
     *                                  G_TYPE_INT);
     * 
     * // Fill the list store with data
     * populate_model (list_store);
     * 
     * // Get the first iter in the list, check it is valid and walk
     * // through the list, reading each row.
     * 
     * valid = gtk_tree_model_get_iter_first (list_store,
     *                                        &iter);
     * while (valid)
     *  {
     *    gchar *str_data;
     *    gint   int_data;
     * 
     *    // Make sure you terminate calls to `gtk_tree_model_get()` with a “-1” value
     *    gtk_tree_model_get (list_store, &iter,
     *                        STRING_COLUMN, &str_data,
     *                        INT_COLUMN, &int_data,
     *                        -1);
     * 
     *    // Do something with the data
     *    g_print ("Row %d: (%s,%d)\n",
     *             row_count, str_data, int_data);
     *    g_free (str_data);
     * 
     *    valid = gtk_tree_model_iter_next (list_store,
     *                                      &iter);
     *    row_count++;
     *  }
     * ```
     * 
     * 
     * The {@link Gtk.TreeModel} interface contains two methods for reference
     * counting: `gtk_tree_model_ref_node()` and `gtk_tree_model_unref_node()`.
     * These two methods are optional to implement. The reference counting
     * is meant as a way for views to let models know when nodes are being
     * displayed. {@link Gtk.TreeView} will take a reference on a node when it is
     * visible, which means the node is either in the toplevel or expanded.
     * Being displayed does not mean that the node is currently directly
     * visible to the user in the viewport. Based on this reference counting
     * scheme a caching model, for example, can decide whether or not to cache
     * a node based on the reference count. A file-system based model would
     * not want to keep the entire file hierarchy in memory, but just the
     * folders that are currently expanded in every current view.
     * 
     * When working with reference counting, the following rules must be taken
     * into account:
     * 
     * - Never take a reference on a node without owning a reference on its parent.
     *   This means that all parent nodes of a referenced node must be referenced
     *   as well.
     * 
     * - Outstanding references on a deleted node are not released. This is not
     *   possible because the node has already been deleted by the time the
     *   row-deleted signal is received.
     * 
     * - Models are not obligated to emit a signal on rows of which none of its
     *   siblings are referenced. To phrase this differently, signals are only
     *   required for levels in which nodes are referenced. For the root level
     *   however, signals must be emitted at all times (however the root level
     *   is always referenced when any view is attached).
     * @gir-type Interface
     */
    interface TreeModel extends GObject.Object, TreeModel.Interface {

        // Methods
        /**
         * Creates a new {@link Gtk.TreeModel}, with `child_model` as the child_model
         * and `root` as the virtual root.
         * @param root A {@link Gtk.TreePath} or `null`.
         * @returns A new {@link Gtk.TreeModel}.
         */
        filter_new(root: TreePath | null): TreeModel;

        /**
         * Calls func on each node in model in a depth-first fashion.
         * 
         * If `func` returns `true`, then the tree ceases to be walked,
         * and `gtk_tree_model_foreach()` returns.
         * @param func a function to be called on each row
         */
        foreach(func: TreeModelForeachFunc): void;

        /**
         * Returns the type of the column.
         * @param index_ the column index
         * @returns the type of the column
         */
        get_column_type(index_: number): GObject.GType;

        /**
         * Returns a set of flags supported by this interface.
         * 
         * The flags are a bitwise combination of {@link Gtk.TreeModelFlags}.
         * The flags supported should not change during the lifetime
         * of the `tree_model`.
         * @returns the flags supported by this interface
         */
        get_flags(): TreeModelFlags;

        /**
         * Sets `iter` to a valid iterator pointing to `path`.  If `path` does
         * not exist, `iter` is set to an invalid iterator and `false` is returned.
         * @param path the {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct
         * @returns `true`, if `iter` was set
         */
        get_iter(path: TreePath): [boolean, TreeIter];

        /**
         * Initializes `iter` with the first iterator in the tree
         * (the one at the path "0") and returns `true`. Returns
         * `false` if the tree is empty.
         * @returns `true`, if `iter` was set
         */
        get_iter_first(): [boolean, TreeIter];

        /**
         * Sets `iter` to a valid iterator pointing to `path_string`, if it
         * exists. Otherwise, `iter` is left invalid and `false` is returned.
         * @param path_string a string representation of a {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct
         * @returns `true`, if `iter` was set
         */
        get_iter_from_string(path_string: string): [boolean, TreeIter];

        /**
         * Returns the number of columns supported by `tree_model`.
         * @returns the number of columns
         */
        get_n_columns(): number;

        /**
         * Returns a newly-created {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct referenced by `iter`.
         * 
         * This path should be freed with `gtk_tree_path_free()`.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
         * @returns a newly-created {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct
         */
        get_path(iter: TreeIter): TreePath;

        /**
         * Generates a string representation of the iter.
         * 
         * This string is a “:” separated list of numbers.
         * For example, “4:10:0:3” would be an acceptable
         * return value for this string.
         * @param iter a {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
         * @returns a newly-allocated string.     Must be freed with `g_free()`.
         */
        get_string_from_iter(iter: TreeIter): string;

        /**
         * Initializes and sets `value` to that at `column`.
         * 
         * When done with `value`, `g_value_unset()` needs to be called
         * to free any allocated memory.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
         * @param column the column to lookup the value at
         */
        get_value(iter: TreeIter, column: number): unknown;

        /**
         * Sets `iter` to point to the first child of `parent`.
         * 
         * If `parent` has no children, `false` is returned and `iter` is
         * set to be invalid. `parent` will remain a valid node after this
         * function has been called.
         * 
         * If `parent` is `null` returns the first node, equivalent to
         * `gtk_tree_model_get_iter_first (tree_model, iter);`
         * @param parent the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct, or `null`
         * @returns `true`, if `iter` has been set to the first child
         */
        iter_children(parent: TreeIter | null): [boolean, TreeIter];

        /**
         * Returns `true` if `iter` has children, `false` otherwise.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct to test for children
         * @returns `true` if `iter` has children
         */
        iter_has_child(iter: TreeIter): boolean;

        /**
         * Returns the number of children that `iter` has.
         * 
         * As a special case, if `iter` is `null`, then the number
         * of toplevel nodes is returned.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct, or `null`
         * @returns the number of children of `iter`
         */
        iter_n_children(iter: TreeIter | null): number;

        /**
         * Sets `iter` to point to the node following it at the current level.
         * 
         * If there is no next `iter`, `false` is returned and `iter` is set
         * to be invalid.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
         * @returns `true` if `iter` has been changed to the next node
         */
        iter_next(iter: TreeIter): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets `iter` to be the child of `parent`, using the given index.
         * 
         * The first index is 0. If `n` is too big, or `parent` has no children,
         * `iter` is set to an invalid iterator and `false` is returned. `parent`
         * will remain a valid node after this function has been called. As a
         * special case, if `parent` is `null`, then the `n`-th root node
         * is set.
         * @param parent the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct to get the child from, or `null`.
         * @param n the index of the desired child
         * @returns `true`, if `parent` has an `n`-th child
         */
        iter_nth_child(parent: TreeIter | null, n: number): [boolean, TreeIter];

        /**
         * Sets `iter` to be the parent of `child`.
         * 
         * If `child` is at the toplevel, and doesn’t have a parent, then
         * `iter` is set to an invalid iterator and `false` is returned.
         * `child` will remain a valid node after this function has been
         * called.
         * 
         * `iter` will be initialized before the lookup is performed, so `child`
         * and `iter` cannot point to the same memory location.
         * @param child the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
         * @returns `true`, if `iter` is set to the parent of `child`
         */
        iter_parent(child: TreeIter): [boolean, TreeIter];

        /**
         * Sets `iter` to point to the previous node at the current level.
         * 
         * If there is no previous `iter`, `false` is returned and `iter` is
         * set to be invalid.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
         * @returns `true` if `iter` has been changed to the previous node
         */
        iter_previous(iter: TreeIter): boolean;

        /**
         * Lets the tree ref the node.
         * 
         * This is an optional method for models to implement.
         * To be more specific, models may ignore this call as it exists
         * primarily for performance reasons.
         * 
         * This function is primarily meant as a way for views to let
         * caching models know when nodes are being displayed (and hence,
         * whether or not to cache that node). Being displayed means a node
         * is in an expanded branch, regardless of whether the node is currently
         * visible in the viewport. For example, a file-system based model
         * would not want to keep the entire file-hierarchy in memory,
         * just the sections that are currently being displayed by
         * every current view.
         * 
         * A model should be expected to be able to get an iter independent
         * of its reffed state.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
         */
        ref_node(iter: TreeIter): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.TreeModel.SignalSignatures.row_changed | Gtk.TreeModel::row-changed} signal on `tree_model`.
         * @param path a {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct pointing to the changed row
         * @param iter a valid {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct pointing to the changed row
         */
        row_changed(path: TreePath, iter: TreeIter): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.TreeModel.SignalSignatures.row_deleted | Gtk.TreeModel::row-deleted} signal on `tree_model`.
         * 
         * This should be called by models after a row has been removed.
         * The location pointed to by `path` should be the location that
         * the row previously was at. It may not be a valid location anymore.
         * 
         * Nodes that are deleted are not unreffed, this means that any
         * outstanding references on the deleted node should not be released.
         * @param path a {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct pointing to the previous location of     the deleted row
         */
        row_deleted(path: TreePath): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.TreeModel.SignalSignatures.row_has_child_toggled | Gtk.TreeModel::row-has-child-toggled} signal on
         * `tree_model`. This should be called by models after the child
         * state of a node changes.
         * @param path a {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct pointing to the changed row
         * @param iter a valid {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct pointing to the changed row
         */
        row_has_child_toggled(path: TreePath, iter: TreeIter): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.TreeModel.SignalSignatures.row_inserted | Gtk.TreeModel::row-inserted} signal on `tree_model`.
         * @param path a {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct pointing to the inserted row
         * @param iter a valid {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct pointing to the inserted row
         */
        row_inserted(path: TreePath, iter: TreeIter): void;

        /**
         * Emits the {@link Gtk.TreeModel.SignalSignatures.rows_reordered | Gtk.TreeModel::rows-reordered} signal on `tree_model`.
         * 
         * This should be called by models when their rows have been
         * reordered.
         * @param path a {@link Gtk.TreePath}-struct pointing to the tree node whose children     have been reordered
         * @param iter a valid {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct pointing to the node     whose children have been reordered, or `null` if the depth     of `path` is 0
         * @param new_order an array of integers     mapping the current position of each child to its old     position before the re-ordering,     i.e. `new_order``[newpos] = oldpos`
         */
        rows_reordered(path: TreePath, iter: TreeIter | null, new_order: number[]): void;

        /**
         * Lets the tree unref the node.
         * 
         * This is an optional method for models to implement.
         * To be more specific, models may ignore this call as it exists
         * primarily for performance reasons. For more information on what
         * this means, see `gtk_tree_model_ref_node()`.
         * 
         * Please note that nodes that are deleted are not unreffed.
         * @param iter the {@link Gtk.TreeIter}-struct
         */
        unref_node(iter: TreeIter): void;
    }


    export const TreeModel: TreeModelNamespace & {
        new (): TreeModel; // This allows `obj instanceof TreeModel`
    };

    namespace TreeSortable {
        /**
         * Interface for implementing TreeSortable.
         * Contains only the virtual methods that need to be implemented.
         */
        interface Interface extends TreeModel.Interface {

            // Virtual methods
            /**
             * Fills in `sort_column_id` and `order` with the current sort column and the
             * order. It returns `true` unless the `sort_column_id` is
             * `GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID` or
             * `GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_UNSORTED_SORT_COLUMN_ID`.
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_get_sort_column_id(): [boolean, number, SortType];

            /**
             * Returns `true` if the model has a default sort function. This is used
             * primarily by GtkTreeViewColumns in order to determine if a model can
             * go back to the default state, or not.
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_has_default_sort_func(): boolean;

            /**
             * Sets the default comparison function used when sorting to be `sort_func`.
             * If the current sort column id of `sortable` is
             * `GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID`, then the model will sort using
             * this function.
             * 
             * If `sort_func` is `null`, then there will be no default comparison function.
             * This means that once the model  has been sorted, it can’t go back to the
             * default state. In this case, when the current sort column id of `sortable`
             * is `GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID`, the model will be unsorted.
             * @param sort_func The comparison function
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_set_default_sort_func(sort_func: TreeIterCompareFunc): void;

            /**
             * Sets the current sort column to be `sort_column_id`. The `sortable` will
             * resort itself to reflect this change, after emitting a
             * {@link Gtk.TreeSortable.SignalSignatures.sort_column_changed | Gtk.TreeSortable::sort-column-changed} signal. `sort_column_id` may either be
             * a regular column id, or one of the following special values:
             * 
             * - `GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID`: the default sort function
             *   will be used, if it is set
             * 
             * - `GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_UNSORTED_SORT_COLUMN_ID`: no sorting will occur
             * @param sort_column_id the sort column id to set
             * @param order The sort order of the column
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_set_sort_column_id(sort_column_id: number, order: SortType): void;

            /**
             * Sets the comparison function used when sorting to be `sort_func`. If the
             * current sort column id of `sortable` is the same as `sort_column_id`, then
             * the model will sort using this function.
             * @param sort_column_id the sort column id to set the function for
             * @param sort_func The comparison function
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_set_sort_func(sort_column_id: number, sort_func: TreeIterCompareFunc): void;

            /**
             * Emits a {@link Gtk.TreeSortable.SignalSignatures.sort_column_changed | Gtk.TreeSortable::sort-column-changed} signal on `sortable`.
             * @virtual
             */
            vfunc_sort_column_changed(): void;
        }


        // Constructor properties interface
        interface ConstructorProps extends TreeModel.ConstructorProps {}
    }

    export interface TreeSortableNamespace {
        $gtype: GObject.GType<TreeSortable>;
        prototype: TreeSortable;
    }
    /**
     * {@link Gtk.TreeSortable} is an interface to be implemented by tree models which
     * support sorting. The {@link Gtk.TreeView} uses the methods provided by this interface
     * to sort the model.
     * @gir-type Interface
     */
    interface TreeSortable extends TreeModel, TreeSortable.Interface {

        // Methods
        /**
         * Fills in `sort_column_id` and `order` with the current sort column and the
         * order. It returns `true` unless the `sort_column_id` is
         * `GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID` or
         * `GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_UNSORTED_SORT_COLUMN_ID`.
         * @returns `true` if the sort column is not one of the special sort   column ids.
         */
        get_sort_column_id(): [boolean, number, SortType];

        /**
         * Returns `true` if the model has a default sort function. This is used
         * primarily by GtkTreeViewColumns in order to determine if a model can
         * go back to the default state, or not.
         * @returns `true`, if the model has a default sort function
         */
        has_default_sort_func(): boolean;

        /**
         * Sets the default comparison function used when sorting to be `sort_func`.
         * If the current sort column id of `sortable` is
         * `GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID`, then the model will sort using
         * this function.
         * 
         * If `sort_func` is `null`, then there will be no default comparison function.
         * This means that once the model  has been sorted, it can’t go back to the
         * default state. In this case, when the current sort column id of `sortable`
         * is `GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID`, the model will be unsorted.
         * @param sort_func The comparison function
         */
        set_default_sort_func(sort_func: TreeIterCompareFunc): void;

        /**
         * Sets the current sort column to be `sort_column_id`. The `sortable` will
         * resort itself to reflect this change, after emitting a
         * {@link Gtk.TreeSortable.SignalSignatures.sort_column_changed | Gtk.TreeSortable::sort-column-changed} signal. `sort_column_id` may either be
         * a regular column id, or one of the following special values:
         * 
         * - `GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_DEFAULT_SORT_COLUMN_ID`: the default sort function
         *   will be used, if it is set
         * 
         * - `GTK_TREE_SORTABLE_UNSORTED_SORT_COLUMN_ID`: no sorting will occur
         * @param sort_column_id the sort column id to set
         * @param order The sort order of the column
         */
        set_sort_column_id(sort_column_id: number, order: SortType): void;

        /**
         * Sets the comparison function used when sorting to be `sort_func`. If the
         * current sort column id of `sortable` is the same as `sort_column_id`, then
         * the model will sort using this function.
         * @param sort_column_id the sort column id to set the function for
         * @param sort_func The comparison function
         */
        set_sort_func(sort_column_id: number, sort_func: TreeIterCompareFunc): void;

        /**
         * Emits a {@link Gtk.TreeSortable.SignalSignatures.sort_column_changed | Gtk.TreeSortable::sort-column-changed} signal on `sortable`.
         */
        sort_column_changed(): void;
    }


    export const TreeSortable: TreeSortableNamespace & {
        new (): TreeSortable; // This allows `obj instanceof TreeSortable`
    };

    /**
     * A {@link Gtk.Allocation}-struct of a widget represents region
     * which has been allocated to the widget by its parent. It is a subregion
     * of its parents allocation. See
     * [GtkWidget’s geometry management section][geometry-management] for
     * more information.
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type Allocation = Gdk.Rectangle;

    /**
     * @gir-type Alias
     */
    type Stock = string;

    /**
     * Name of the imported GIR library
     * `see` https://gitlab.gnome.org/GNOME/gjs/-/blob/master/gi/ns.cpp#L188
     */
    const __name__: string;

    /**
     * Version of the imported GIR library
     * `see` https://gitlab.gnome.org/GNOME/gjs/-/blob/master/gi/ns.cpp#L189
     */
    const __version__: string;
}

export default Gtk;

// END